ISTORICA
GREEK
RAMMAR
ANNARIS
880.5
J34h
NON
CIRCULATING
MACMILLAN & C

ARTES
1837
SCIENTIA
VERITAS
LIBRARY
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
É PILURIBUS UNUM
TUFUOR
SI QUAERIS PENINSULAM AMOENAM
CIRCUMSPICE
!
t
1
880,5-
J34h
BUHR
}
ΑΝ
HISTORICAL GREEK GRAMMAR
JANNARIS
AN
HISTORICAL 70353
GREEK GRAMMAR

CHIEFLY OF THE ATTIC DIALECT
AS WRITTEN AND SPOKEN
FROM CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY DOWN TO THE PRESENT TIME
FOUNDED UPON THE
ANCIENT TEXTS, INSCRIPTIONS, PAPYRI
AND PRESENT POPULAR GREEK
}
BY
A. N. JANNARIS, PH.D.
LECTURER ON POST-CLASSICAL AND MODERN GREEK AT THE UNIVERSITY OF ST. ANDREWS,
AUTHOR OF
'AN ANCIENT GREEK LEXICOn for greekS,' 'A MODERN greek and ENGLISH DICTIONAKY,
'A MODERN GREEK GRAMMAR FOR GERMANS,' ETC., ETC.
London
MACMILLAN AND CO., LIMITED
NEW YORK: THE MACMILLAN CO.
1897
880.5
3844
Oxford
HORACE HART, PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY
1-&-4-à 3 L N.
ΤΟ
THE MOST HONOURABLE
THE MARQUESS OF BUTE, K.T.
THE GENEROUS PATRON AND PIONEER
OF
GREEK CULTURE AND SCHOLARSHIP
THIS WORK IS INSCRIBED
BY
THE AUTHOR
PREFACE
THOUGH the Greek language in its classical period has been,
ever since ancient times, a field of almost constant research and
study, so that the grammars and treatises written on the sub-
ject, if merely catalogued, would fill up many bulky volumes,
an 'historical' grammar, tracing in a connected manner the
life of the Greek language from classical antiquity to the present
time, has not been written nor even seriously attempted as
yet'. The reasons are not far to soek. First, the origin
and prehistoric stages of Greek are matters of vague specu-
lation. Next, tho so-called 'post-classical' or Alexandrian and
Roman periods have been at all times overshadowed by their
surpassing 'classical' predecessor. Then the post-Christian or
Byzantine and mediaeval ages, far from meeting with any
sympathetic interest on the part of classical students, have on
the contrary at all times been branded with unmerited reproach
and scorn. Finally, modern Greek has not even succoodod in
assuming a clear and definite idea in the mind of classical
scholars, or is often made the object of ridicule and discredit.
It is true that considerable interest has of late been awakonod
in post-classical,' Byzantine, and evon modern Greek, and
that a number of valuable articlos and treatises have appeared
¹PKrotschmer's rocont volume Einleitung in die Geschichte dor
Griechischen Spracho (Göttingon, 1896) is not what the title professes to
bo. It is virtually an attempt to fix the original seat of the Aryan (Indo-
Germanic) raco in Europe and particularly in Germany (p. 60), and thon
an othnological study of tho various uon-hollonic racos (Bápßapoi) which in
prohistoric timos occupied the countries north of Grooco and Asia Minor.
As a mattor of fact, there is not a single paragraph in the book about the
Grock language in its historical period.
V
PREFACE.
on special points; but the history of Greek remains still
unwritten, and cannot be written without a previous thorough
knowledge of popular Byzantine or, which amounts to nearly
the same, of Neohellenic speech. It is obvious that the task of
such a work devolves upon native Greek scholars (witness the
labours of EASophocles, AMaupo púdns, and GHatzidakis), such
native Greek philologists as are equipped with classical educa-
tion, trained in critical research, and, what is indispensable
also, emancipated from national prejudices. I have ventured
to undertake such an essay, and having devoted to it more
than five whole years, now lay before my readers the fruits of
my arduous and unremitting labours.
The plan and method of the work are simple. I have
collected and critically sifted all information available, and
eliminated, as far as possible, all theoretical speculations relating
to the Indo-European and mythical stages of the language.
On a similar principle I deemed it unsafe to enlarge on the
Greek dialects, seeing that not only their actual number
and mutual connexion are still matters of speculation, but
that in many cases they have not even left adequate relics to
illustrate their individual character. As a matter of fact, by
the side of Attic they appear to have had but a temporary
and local existence, and exerted no consequential influence on
the subsequent history of the Greek language. These elimi-
nations narrowed the sphere of my investigations principally
to the Attic dialect. Not howover to the Attic dialect of the
fifth and fourth centuries B. C., as the term 'Attic' is generally
understood to imply, but to that Greek which has been evolved
out of the Attic dialect; and since the entire Greek language
from its 'classical' period down to the present time forms
an unbroken continuation of classical Attic, the scope of my
research still remains wide, covering as it does the whole range
from classical antiquity to the present time, and thus includes
modern Groek. But referring here to modern Groek or Neo-
hellenic, I must distinctly explain that by this torm I under-
stand the popular specch which survives in the mouth of the
Greek nation, not the literary or artificial style, which, as far
as it deviates from popular speech, has been partly transmitted
through the literature, partly revived or created by Noohollonic
scribes and journalists, and as such, though indisponsable for
vi
PREFACE.
practical purposes, possesses only a relative historical value ¹.
I have considered or rather laid under large contribution
popular Neohellenic speech, first because it constitutes a lineal
and unbroken continuation of classical Greek, preserving all
the fundamental features of ancient grammar, in its wide sense,
and thus throwing much light upon many problems and in-
numerable details of classical Greek; next because, unlike
prehistoric or Indo-Germanic Greek, with its conjectural data,
modern Greek with its actual data forms a sure basis for
scientific or critical research; finally, because this often mis-
judged language proves to be the oldest living tongue, and
thus deserves far more consideration than any Romanic or
Teutonic tongue, however old, can claim in matters of
comparative philology.
My original plan was to adhere as much as possible to the
methods and theories generally received in our leading gram-
mars, adopting even the Erasmian pronunciation (to which,
when an undergraduate in German universities, I had become a
sincere convert), and merely to subjoin to each rule its post-
classical and subsequent phases or vicissitudes. But I had not
advanced far in my research when I began to light upon phe-
nomena which would not fit in well with the received theories.
And as these anomalies steadily increased in number, my old
beliefs, especially that in the Erasmian pronunciation, grew
weaker in proportion. For I now began to see clearly that
many a theory, old as well as modern, enjoyed almost canonical
deference not because of its intrinsic merits, but rather because
of the absence of a better theory. It is in this way, and not
by a preconceived plan, that the range and system of the
present work gradually grew in my hands; and with my present
experience, I am not sure whether it might not have been
better still if I had gone even further in the direction of
emancipation. For though I cannot claim to have every-
where established my own views to absolute certainty, I
do not feel much surer of many a doctrine now generally
accepted as an old established fact.
For after all the grammar
The ancients
of the Greek language has not been writton.
The proportion and mutual relation of the two forms of diction is
synoptically illustrated in my Modern Grook Dictionary (London, 1895,
John Murray), p. xiii f.
vii
PREFACE.
began to write grammatical treatises on 'classical Greek,' that
is on the artistic form of Greek which had perhaps at no time
reflected faithfully the living language of the people. Those
treatises on the one hand were conceived in a more or less
philosophical (Stoic) spirit, and on the other considered only the
artistic form of the language as portrayed in classical poetry and
prose; or, to be more correct, they emphasized only such
peculiarities and traits as were present in the standard poets
and prose-writers of days gone by, but absent from the ordinary
or 'common' Greek, in utter disregard of the actual speech of
their time. These brief compendia then soon rose to canonical
eminence, and so began to be copied generation after genera-
tion down to modern times, when the Greeks, with the capture
of Constantinople, lost their national unity. Some learned
fugitives among them then came over to western Europe and
introduced the rudimentary Greek grammar inherited from
their ancestors and laid the seeds of the 'Western' school.
The first act of this school, still in its infancy, was to do away
with the traditional pronunciation-which reflects perhaps the
least changed part of the language-and then to declare Greek
a dead tongue. In this way, being cut off from all direct con-
nexion with ancient Greek, from all assistance and advantage
offered by the surviving tongue, and finding utterly insufficient
the traditional compendia handed over to them, they began
to construct a Greek grammar on a novel basis, by laying
under contribution the mute ancient texts and adapting their
system to the principles and the spirit of their own tongues,
that is to the principles of alion languages; just as we are
now constructing a grammar of old Egyptian on the basis of
the hieroglyphics and after the spirit of modern languages.
My deviation from the current system, however, must not
imply that I have built my work upon the speculative prin-
ciples adopted by recent philologists. For while these neo-
grammarians can duly claim the credit of having overthrown
the time-honoured but fundamentally erroneous theory that
language is built up on a philosophical system, and that overy
grammatical phonomenon reflects an operation of the mind,
they seem to me to be committing an equally serious mistake
in another direction: for philosophy they have virtually
substituted Indo-Germanic speculation, and in their zeal to
viii
PREFACE.
prove or uphold the unity of the Indo-European imaginary
'Ursprache' or 'Grundsprache,' they are apt to emphasize
the little that is generically common to the whole group, and
overlook the innumerable specific differences and details which
after all constitute the real individuality of each distinct
language; so that younger or ordinary students are often
tempted to reduce, by forced methods, every deviating detail
back to some Indo-European principle. I have considered
Greek in its distinct individuality, and striven to the best of
my ability to search the causes of each phenomenon or anomaly
rather within its own domain and history than embark in
alien and often indemonstrable speculations.
As
As already indicated, my work is based essentially upon.
classical Attic, and so considers in a concise manner all essential
points or rules contained in our school grammars. After the
Introduction and the chapter on the Pronunciation which,
I trust, will prove acceptable to many an earnest and unpre-
judiced student, I take up every grammatical phenomenon
and follow its gradual evolution down to the present time.
a matter of course, where it has withstood the influences of all
past times without notable change, my task has been compara-
tively easy, since I had either to attest its unbroken continuity
through all ages by proofs taken from the intermediate periods,
or merely to state the fact-when there could be no reasonable
doubt that the phenomenon under consideration still obtains
in modern Greek, meaning of course the popular language of to-
day, in particular southern speech as defined in the Introduction
(030 f.). In all other cases where the thread of continuity did not
reach the present period, my task has been more difficult and
often very arduous; for I had to search through each succeeding
period either for its recovery or for its substitute. It often
happened also (as e. g. in the case of the future, the infinitive, etc.)
that its substitute was again lost sight of, and had to be retraced
until I reached the ultimate terminus. It further occurred that
I lighted upon such novel phenomena as appeared to be foreign
to both the antecedent and subsequent ages. In such cases
I had to ascertain whether it was a real novelty or a relic of
ancient speech studiously excluded from the literary composition.
It will be soen then that my main object has been not to
prove, or to attempt to prove, that anciont Greck is living in
ix
PREFACE.
modern Greek, but to show how much of the former is still
surviving in the latter, and how much has become extinct,
endeavouring at the same time to indicate the period, cause,
process, and other attendant circumstances of such a loss or
change. As a matter of course, I do not presume to have said
the last word on all or most of these points, seeing that, even
in the case of modern Greek, I cannot be reasonably expected
to master, in all its details, the entire vocabulary and grammar
of every single Neohellenic dialect, and I shall not be sur-
prised if future investigation should prove that many a pheno-
menon, designated by me as extinct or peculiar to a particular
dialect, still survives in one or more localities of Greece
or Turkey. All I can say is that I have carefully studied
every detail, and that my constant aim has been to carry
on my investigations in a spirit of absolute fairness and
candour, without bias towards this or that form or stage of
the language. I have therefore made no preferential distinc-
tion among classical, post-classical, Greco-Roman, Byzantine,
and Neohellenic forms of the language, but throughout con-
sidered it in its unbroken continuity, where every single stage
or form is entitled to the same regard and appreciation, whether
it marks, in the literature, a stage of growth or decay. If
I have enlarged more fully on the later periods, it is because
theso stages, boing less explored, presented many points which
were partly dark, partly new, partly debatable, and had to be
established. Speaking of modern Greek in particular, it will be
remembered that besides its intrinsic value for the history of
Greek, it possesses the merit of having been the very language
spoken by nearly all the commentators and copiers through
whom classical literature has reached us. Those 'Byzantine'
scribes (excerptors, commentators, copiers, etc.), it is woll known,
often deemed themselves competent to slightly rovise or correct
the MS before them, and so studiously or unconsciously imparted
to the texts copied or commented upon the spelling and diction
or even the grammar of their own time, so that an editor or
critic now cannot well afford to dispense with Byzantine or
modern Greek. Let it be clearly understood then that if the
nature of my subject has brought into evidence many simi-
larities between ancient and modern Greek, it has been very
far from my intention to plead the cause of the latter.
Had
X
PREFACE.
I wished to do so, I should not have excluded from the sphere
of my research the written style, but should, on the contrary,
have selected this very form as the standard. The striking
similarity then between ancient and this form of modern Greek
would have served my purpose and, moreover, greatly facili-
tated my task. But, as already emphasized, I have not subor-
dinated my work to any preconceived plan. I accepted the
facts and results as they came, with complete equanimity,
with equal gratification and pleasure, whether they tended to
confirm or destroy existing prejudices.
In founding my work upon classical Attic, and discussing
that phase of the language at a certain length, I may be
charged with having embodied in the book much matter which
is familiar to Greek scholars. This, however, cannot consti-
tute a serious objection, since the book is intended not for the
limited-very limited-number of specialists, but for the wider
class of classical students, including clergymen, who would
gladly have their memory refreshed by a summary repetition of
half-forgotten details. This method was, moreover, the only
practicable one in a work professing to give a synoptical and
connected history of the language, for it thus brings out in
a clearer relief the traits and relations of its various stages and
vicissitudes. Besides it will be found that in numerous cases
classical Greek receives new light from its post-classical and
even modern phases.
To enumerato here all the new features of the work, or seek
to justify them as well as some novel terms (e. g. phonopathy,
metaphony, trisyllabotony, tonoclisis, synenclisis, antectasis,
revection, secondary subjunctivo for optative, etc.) introduced
for the sake of precision or convenience, would lead to an unduly
long excursus and serve no practical purpose. All these new
points have been more conveniently explained in their proper
places, and their nature and number can be easily traced
through the copious indexes which have been prepared with
great pains, and will, it is hoped, be found very serviceable for
all purposes. The only point which requires some explanation
here is the adoption of a few abbreviations indicatod by the
capital letters ABGHMNPT(see p. xiv and 03). The need for
precision and convenience led me to divide the long life of the
Greek language into periods larger in number and therefore
xi
PREFACE.
narrower in extent than is generally the case in works on
Greek history and literature. For I have rather preferred to
assign a precise date to a grammatical phenomenon with the
risk of occasionally erring in some detail, than to follow the
usual broad periods and thus shelter myself behind such vague
generalities as 'classical,' 'post-classical,' 'Byzantine,' or the
like, terms which surely do not convey a quite definite idea.
Whenever no precise date was obtainable from the general
literature, from the inscriptions or papyri, in assigning to this
or that period the first appearance, the spread, or the retreat
of a phonomenon, I was guided by a combination of observa-
tions. Thus the occurrence of a neologism in one or more
writers and its subsequent spread, its deprecation by the
Atticists or by the grammarians, its presence in compounds or
nicknames, constituted a fairly sure criterion of its having
already been current in the living language of the time. Again
its growing infrequency in literature, its absence from the un-
scholarly compositions, its misapplication by the scribes of the
time, its frequent replacement by some synonymous neologism,
its zealous vindication by the purists, appeared to me unmis-
takable signs of its decline or even disappearance from the
spoken language.
Another point to which I desire to call attention is that
I believe I have consulted, in almost every portion and detail,
the latest authorities, and duly indicated their share of con-
tribution to a theory adopted or discussed. But in a work
covering such a wide space, and containing an immense
number of details and references; a work which moreover
embraces the living language of to-day, it may well happen
that in some of my views I have been anticipated by others
not expressly mentioned. In such a case, I believe myself
entitled to leniency, especially if the omission lies within the
period of modern Greek, because, this being my native lan-
guage, it would be unreasonable and even pedantic to expect me
to quote previous authorities-provided there were any-on
minor points which can be readily and independently explained
by any Greek endowed with some training and intuition.
To conclude, I am far from presuming to have adequately
dealt with my subject. There may be cases of inconsistency,
errors of judgement, and errors of fact. However, considering
xii
PREFACE.
the nature of the subject, the heaviness of the task, and the
multitude of details involved therein, as well as the scantiness
of the material at hand, I venture to believe that, with all its
shortcomings, the present work gives a fair picture of the
history of the Greek language, and will possess as such a con-
siderable amount of interest. At any rate, it represents the
fruits of a long and arduous labour, a labour I have undertaken
and performed throughout with earnest and unabated zeal in
the interest of science and truth.
As the MS has been prepared, almost entirely, in the
Reading Room of the British Museum, I gladly avail myself
of the occasion to return my acknowledgements to its officials
of every grade, for their friendly and ever willing assistance
in all matters of inquiry. I further own my gratitude to
several other personal friends, for their occasional help by way
of suggestion or rectification, especially to Mr. William Wills,
of the Inner Temple, for reading part of the proofs. Above all
I desire to tender my grateful thanks to Miss C. C. Sandwith,
a former pupil of mine in Crete, and now a proficient Greek
scholar, who in times of great pressure very kindly volunteered
to copy more than half the MS, and gave me the benefit of many
a valuable suggestion.
I finally acknowledge my great obligation to Mr. Horace
Hart, the Controller of the Oxford University Press, whose
ungrudging willingness to have the entire MS set in type
enabled me, during the print, to improve the book in every
respect.
THE UNIVERSITY,
St. Andrews, N.B.
A. N. JANNARIS.
xiii
PREFACE
CONTENTS
ABBREVIATIONS EXPLAINED
PRINCIPAL MODERN Works Consulted
NOTABLE P-N TEXTS QUOTED
INTRODUCTION
Attic period (500-300 B.C.)
Hellenistic Period (300-150 B.C.)
Greco-Roman Period (150 B.C.-300 A.D.)
Transitional Period (300-600 a.D.)
Neohellenic Period (600-1900 A.D.)
PART FIRST.
PAGE
V
xxii
xxiii
. xxxiii
1
35600
8
II
PHONOLOGY
I. PHONETIC SYMBOLS AND THEIR SOUNDS
A. Script (Alphabet)
•
Short History of the Greek Letters
Synoptical Table of the Letters
Classification of Letters.
B. Pronunciation
I. Pronunciation of the Sonants
The Diphthongs in particular
A. Pronunciation of the Sonants i, ei, v, n, ol
B. The Diphthongs av and ev
II. Pronunciation of the Consonants
2 I
ib.
ib.
ib.
24
27
31
36
42
47
55
56
A. Aspiratae and Mediac
ib.
B. Liquids and Spirants
Reading Marks (προσῳδίαι)
Breathings
Accents or Accentual Marks
Accentual Terms
Accent and Ictus
Quantity
61
62
63
Yoga
65
67
69
70
XV
CONTENTS.
I. Common or î- Conjugation
I. Sonantic Verbs
A. Barytone Conjugation .
Accent in the Conjugation
I. Prefixes
II. Infixes
III. Person Endings
B Contracted Conjugation
Verbs in -áw
Verbs in -éw
Verbs in -ów
•
Peculiarities of Contracted Verbs
Contracted Conjugation in P-N
II. Consonantal Verbs.
A. Mute Verbs
B. Liquid Verbs
II. Verbs in -MI
P-N History of Verbs in
A. Verbs in -(v)vvµc
B. Reduplicated Verbs in
Other solitary Verbs in -μ
Irregular Verbs
μι
τα με
I. Anomaly in the Conjugation
II. Anomaly in the Meaning
II. ETYMOLOGY
A. Derivation
I. Substantives
a. From Verbs
b. From Substantives
c. From Adjectives
II. Adjectives
a. Common Adjectives.
b. Ethnic Adjectives
III. Verbs
a. From Nouns
b. From Verbs (also Adverbs)
IV. Adverbs
a. From Adjectives
b. From Substantives and Verbs
B. Composition
A. First Constituent
I. Composition Proper
·
•
PAGE
181
ib.
ib.
184
ib.
195
196
207
ib.
214
ib.
215
216
•
221
ib.
226
232
234
235
237
248, 250
•
·
·
•
252
ib.
282
287
ib.
ib.
288
290
295
296
ib.
299
300
ib.
301
302
ib.
•
•
ib.
303
ib.
ib.
305
307
·
310
Peculiarities of the First Constituent
B. Second Constituent.
II. Copulative Composition
PART THIRD.
SYNTAX (GENERAL REMARKS)
COLLOCATION OF WORDS
CONCORD
ADJECTIVES
312
ib.
313
•
315
xviii
CONTENTS.
THE ARTICLE (Introductory)
I. Demonstrative Use
II. Ordinary Use .
•
PAGE
317
318
ib.
III. Elliptical Use
IV. Peculiar Use .
THE CASES (Introductory)
Nominative and Vocative
Accusative
•
Double Accusative
Genitive
I. Genitive Proper
II. Ablatival Genitive
Dative.
I. Dative Proper
322
323
325
327
328
331
333
•
ib.
337
341
II. Dative of Association.
342
III. Instrumental Dative.
344
IV. Locative Dative.
345
347
PRONOUNS
Personal Pronouns
Reflexive Pronouns
ib.
ib.
Possessive Pronouns
349
Determinative Pronouns
350
Demonstrative Pronouns
351
ib.
Relative Pronouns
Assimilation or Attraction of the Relative
352
Interrogative Pronouns
354
Indefinite Pronouns
355
ib.
VOICES OF THE VERB
356
Active Voice
Passive Voice
Middle Voice
Reciprocal Verbs.
Short History of the Future and Aorist Middle
THE PARTICLES (Introductory Remarks)
A. Prepositions
ἀμφί, ανά
ἀντί, από
διά
eis (és)
ἐν
¿¿ (ék)
*
ἐπί
κατά
μετά
παρά
περί
πρό
πρός
σύν
ὑπέρ
ὑπό
•
·
is (with Accusative of Person)
ib.
359
360
361
362
365
ib.
367
368
373
376
379
380
382
384
386
388
392
393
394
396
397
398
399
xix
CONTENTS.
PAGE
B. Conjunctions
•
1. Coordinating Conjunctions
A. Copulative
B. Disjunctive
C. Adversative
II. Subordinating Conjunctions
Causal Particles
Emphatic Particles
Asseverative Particles
Interrogative Particles.
Declarative Particles
Consecutive Particles
Final Particles
Conditional Particles
Temporal Particles
C. Particles of Negation
I. Morphology of the Negations.
II. Use of the Negations
III. Idiomatic Use of the Negations
THE TENSES
Present
400
.
·
•
•
401
ib.
•
•
406
ថ
407
408
ib.
409
410
411
412
414
·
416
419
421
425
ib.
427
432
433
ib.
Imperfect
436
Aorist
ib.
Perfect.
438
Pluperfect
440
Future.
441
Effective Future
442
Durative Future
•
444
Future Perfect
ib.
Moods in Independent CLAUSES (Simple Sentences)
445
A. Indicative
ib.
B. Primary Subjunctive (Present and Future)
C. Secondary Subjunctive (Optative) .
Imperative.
MOODS IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES (Compound Sentences)
446
450
45I
ib.
Declarative Clauses.
Causal Clauses
Consecutive Clauses
Final Clauses
•
453
•
ib.
.
•
454
455
Temporal Clauses
Conditional Sentences (General Remarks)
Peculiarities of Conditional Sentences
Concessive Clauses
Peculiarities of πρίν .
Relative Clauses
I. Definite Relative Clauses
11. Indefinite Relative Clauses
Indirect Discourse
Interrogative Clauses.
Answering a Question
458
461
465
ib.
M
467
468
ib.
•
ib.
471
472
479
XX
CONTENTS.
INFINITIVE (Introductory)
Subject and Predicate of the Infinitive
I. Substantival or Articular Infinitive
II. Verbal or Anarthrous Infinitive (Historical Survey)
PARTICIPLE
Attributive Participle.
•
•
•
Predicative Participle
Circumstantial Participle
Temporal Participle
Causal Participle.
Conditional Participle
Concessive Participle
Final Participle
Modal Participle.
Historical Survey of the Participle
APPENDICES:-
PAGE
480
481
482
484
489
490
ib.
498
500
501
502
ib.
503
ib.
504
I. ACCENT
II. QUANTITY IN GREEK
507
III. TERMINAL CONSONANTISM AND ITS INFLUENCE ON
519
THE P-N INFLECTION
IV. THE FUTURE INDICATIVE SINCE A TIMES
541
V. THE MOODS CHIEFLY SINCE A TIMES
VI. THE INFINITIVE CHIEFLY SINCE A TIMES
INDICES:-
552
560
568
I. INDEX OF Notable Greek Words.
•
581
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
698
III. PASSAGES EMENDED OR CRITICALLY DISCUSSED.
734
xxi
ABBREVIATIONS EXPLAINED
In order to avoid repetitions and save room, the subjoined
abbreviations in italic capitals have been resorted to (cp. 03).
They point to the various periods during which a grammatical
phenomenon was current. For obvious reasons, the periods
thus indicated are to be taken only roundly and approximately.
It is further to be borne in mind that the opening and closing
parts of each period show only a sporadic occurrence of the
phenomenon in question.
A I.-
1.—CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY.—LITERARY STYLE.
Classical Attic period (500-300 B.C.)
P II-POST-CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY.—CHIEFLY LITERARY STYLE.
II Hellenistic period (300-150 B.0.)
G Greco-Roman
T Transitional
""
(B.O. 150-300 a.d.)
(300-600 A.D.)
N III.-NEOIIELLENIC TIMES.-POPULAR SPEECH.
B Byzantine (or N', i. e. 1st Noohellenic) period (600-1000 A.D.)
M Mediaeval (or N², i.e. 2nd Neohellenic) period (1000-1450 A.D.),
N 3rd Noohellenic or Modorn poriod (1450-1800 a.d.)
[N 4th Neohellenic or Rostorative period (1800-pres. time).]
ABBREVIATIONS ALPHABETICALLY ARRANGED :
A denotes: classical Attic period or diction.
B
G
Byzantine
Greco-Roman
""
""
17
II
Hellonistic
""
""
M
Mediaeval
""
""
""
N
Neohollonic
19
""
,, (chiefly since 1000 A.D.)
Ꮲ
Post-classical 11
17
T
""
O
Transitional ""
SUPPLEMENTary Signs.
still fully surviving in presont popular speech.
still surviving, but only partially or in a modification.
extinct in Modern Groek (present popular speech).
+ A.D.
± about.
* conjectural form.
Ist, IInd, IIIrd, IV, otc., means 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, otc., contury.
In phonotic transcriptions the vowels a ei ou aro to be pronounced
as in Italian, and g as German j (English y in yes, you).
References in square brackets [ ] point to the footnotes.-See also p. 581.
xxii
I. PRINCIPAL MODERN WORKS CONSULTED
ABC (+XIVth+), see WWagner in p. xxx.
Akad. Wiss.-Akademie der Wissenschaften, Wien.
Akademie der Wissenschaften, München.
Amer. Jour. Phil.-American Journal of Philology, Baltimore.
Amer. Phil. Ass.-American Philological Association, Hartford.
Arch. Glott.-Archivio Glottologico Italiano, Roma, 1873, etc.
GIAscoli, Iscrizioni inedite o mal note, Greche, Latine, Ebraiche,
etc. Torino e Roma, 1880.
'AOнNâ, Athens, 1889, etc.
'AOHNAION, Athens, 1872, etc.
FDAllen, On Greek versification in inscriptions, in Archaeo-
logical Institute of America, vol. iv, 1888.
ABamberg, Griechische Schulgrammatik, Berlin, 1890.
CBayet, De titulis Atticae christianis, Paris, 1878.
AMBell, A Popular Manual of vocal physiology and visible
speech, London, 1889.
FGBenseler, De nominibus in s iv pro los tov (Diss.), Leipzig,
1870 (=GCurtius, Studien iii. 149–204).
HBerg, De participii temporum usu (Diss.), Bonn, 1884.
ABergaigne-VHenry, Manuel pour étudier le Sanscrit Védique,
1890.
GBernhardy, Wissenschaftliche Syntax der Griechischen Sprache,
Berlin, 1829.
Paralipomena Syntaxis Graecae, Halle, 1862.
MBertholet-ChERuelle, Collection des anciens Alchimistes Grecs,
Paris, 1887-8.
ABezzemberger, Ueber die Sprache der Preussischen Letten,
Göttingen, 1886.
Lottische Dialektstudien, Göttingen, 1885.
FBirklein, Entwickelungsgeschichte des substantivierten Infini-
tivs in MSchanz's Beiträgen, vii, 1882.
FBlass, Palaeographie' etc. (in IMüller's Handbuch), München,
1892.
Pronunciation of ancient Greek, London, 1890.
Grammatik des Neutestamentlichen Griechisch, Göttin-
gen, 1896.
xxiii
I. PRINCIPAL MODERN WORKS CONSULTED.
FBlass, Griech. Gram.³, see Kühner-Blass.
ABochner, De Arriani dicendi genere (Diss.), Erlangen, 1885.
EBoisacq, Les Dialectes Doriens, Paris, 1891.
Bova, see APellegrini.
SBrief, Die Conjunctionen bei Polybius (Progr.), 1 Theile,
Wien, 1891-3.
EBrücke, Die physiologischen Grundlagen der neuhochdeutschen
Verskunst, Wien, 1871.
KBrugmann, Elements of comparative grammar, London, 1888.
Griechische Grammatik2, München, 1890.
Zum heutigen Stand der Sprachwissenschaft,
Darmstadt, 1885.
FBrunot, Précis de grammaire historique française, Paris,
1886.
JACBuchon, Recherches Historiques, Paris, 1845.
Bull. Corr. Hell.-Bulletin de Correspondance Hellénique,
Athènes, 1877, etc.
EWittBurton, Syntax of the Moods and Tenses in New
Testament Greek, Chicago, 1893.
ABultmann, A Grammar of the New Testament Greek, Andover,
1873.
Byz. Zeit.-Byzantinische Zeitschrift, München, 1892, etc.
PCauer, Del.-Delectus inscriptionum, etc., Leipzig, 1883.
IIom.-Grundfragen der Homerkritik, Leipzig, 1895.
HChandler, A Practical Introduction to Greek Accentuation,
2nd ed. Oxford, 1881.
W Christ, Die verbalen Abhängigkeitscomposita des Griechischen
in Akad. Wiss., München, 1890.
Geschichte der Griechischen Literatur² (in IMüller's
Handbuch), 1891.
Grundzüge der Griechischen Lautlehre, Leipzig, 1859.
Metrik der Griechen und Römer², Leipzig, 1879.
Class. Rev.
Classical Review, London, 1887, etc.
HCollite, Sammlung der Griechischen Dialekt-Inschriften,
Göttingen, 1883, etc.
W Corssen², Ueber Aussprache, Vocalismus und Betonung der
Lateinischen Sprache 2, 1868–70.
WECrum, Coptic Manuscripts, London, 1893.
OCrusius, Dio Delphischen Hymnen, Göttingen, 1894.
GCurtius, Griechische Schulgrammatik, Leipzig, 1888.
The Greek Verb, London, 1880.
Principles of Greek Etymology, London, 1886.
Lateinischen
Curt. Stud.-Studien zur Griechischen und
Grammatik, Leipzig, 1868-78.
Scusa, I diplomi Greci ed Arabici di Sicilia, two vols., Palermo,
1869-82.
HDDarbishire, Reliquiae philologicae, Cambridge, 1895.
xxiv
I. PRINCIPAL MODERN WORKS CONSULTED.
RDareste, Inscriptions juridiques Grecques, Paris, 1891, etc.
EASDawes, Pronunciation of Greek, London, 1889.
Greek Aspirates, London, 1894.
BDelbrück, Einleitung in das Sprachstudium, 1884.
Vergleichende Syntax der Indogermanischen
Sprachen, Strassburg, 1893.
NDossios, Beiträge zur Neugr. Wortbildungslehre, Zürich,
1879.
ADraeger, Historische Syntax der Lateinischen Sprache,
Leipzig, 1878-81.
ThEckinger, Die Orthographie Lateinischer Wörter in Griechi-
schen Inschriften (Diss.), München, 1892.
AJEllis, The English, Dionysian, and Hellenic pronunciation
of Greek, London, 1876.
EEngel, Die Aussprache des Griechischen, Jena, 1887.
ΕΦΗΜ ἀρχ. Ἐφημερίς ᾿Αρχαιολογική, Athens.
REucken, De Aristotelis dicendi ratione (Diss.), Göttingen,
1866.
FFassbaender, Quaestiones Grammaticae ad Polybium perti-
nentes (Progr.), Crefeld, 1889.
IFoster, An Essay on the nature of accent and quantity in
Latin and Greek, etc. 3rd ed. with Dr. G[ally]'s
dissertations, London, 1820.
KFoy, Lautsystem der Griech. Vulgarsprache, Leipzig, 1879.
CFranke, Griechische Formenlehre (bearbeitet von A. v. Bam-
berg, 21te Auflage), Berlin, 1890.
IFranz, Elementa epigraphices Graecae, Berlin, 1840.
JFuerst, Glossarium Graeco-Hobraeum, Strassburg, 1890.
VGardthausen, Griechische Palaeographie, Leipzig, 1879.
FAGevaert, Histoire et théorie de la musiquo antique, Gand,
1875-81.
PGiles, Manual of Comparative Philology, London, 1895.
HGleditch, Metrik der Griechen und Römer, in IMüller's Hand-
buch, ii, 2nd ed. pp. 679-870.
GGoetz, Hormoneumata Pseudo-Dositheana (in Corpus Gloss.
Latin, vol. iii.), Leipzig, 1892.
LGoetzeler, De Polybii elocutione, Würzburg, 1887.
Quaestiones in Appiani et Polybii dicendi genere,
Würzburg, 1890.
WGoodwin, Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek
Verb, London, 1889.
Gr. A Greek Grammar, London, 1894.
CGöttling, Allgemeine Lehre vom Accent der Griechischen
Sprache, Jena, 1835.
XXV
I. PRINCIPAL MODERN WORKS CONSULTED.
SGGreen, Handbook to the Grammar of the Greek Testament,
London, 1892.
TSGreen, A Treatise on the Grammar of the N. T. Greek,
London, 1862.
GGröber, Grundriss der Romanischen Philologie, Darmstadt,
1886, etc.
HGutscher, Die Attischen Grabinschriften, Leoben, 1889-90.
JHadley, A Greek Grammar (ed. by FAllen), New York, 1889.
WHartel, Beiträge zur Homerischen Prosodie und Metrik,
Berlin, 1873.
Homerische Studien, in Wiener Studien, vols. 76. 78.
JAHartung, Lehre von den Partikeln der Griechischen Sprache,
Erlangen, 1832-3.
EHatch, Essays on Biblical Greek, Oxford, 1889.
GHatzidakis, Einleitung in die Neugriechische Grammatik,
Leipzig, 1892.
MHecht, Orthographisch-dialektische Forschungen auf Grund
Attischer Inschriften, II Theile, Leipzig,
1885-6.
HHeller, Die Absichtssätze bei Lucian (Progr.), Berlin, 1880.
VHenry, A Short Comparative Grammar of Greek and Latin,
London, 1890.
A Short Comparative Grammar of English and German,
London, 1893.
see also ABergaigne.
IGHermann, De emendanda ratione Graecae Grammaticae pars
prima, Lipsiae, 1801.
Hermes, Berlin, 1866, etc.
JHilberg, Das Princip der Silbonwägung, Wien, 1882.
HHirt, Der Indogermanische Akzent, Strassburg, 1895.
CAIIoffmann, Quaestiones Homericae, Klausthal, 1842-8.
OHoffmann, Die Griechischen Dialekte, etc., Göttingen, 1891, etc.
FHolzweissig, Griechische Schulgrammatik, Leipzig, 1893.
FIIultsch, Die Erzählenden Zeitformen bei Polybius, etc. (in
Säch. Gesellsch. Wiss.), 1891–3.
CJacoby, Sprache des Dionysius von Halicarnass, Aarau, 1874.
MRJames, Apocrypha Anecdota (vol. ii. no. 3), Cambridge,
1893.
RCJebb, Homer: an Introduction to the Iliad and the Odyssey,
Glasgow, 1892.
Jour. Hell. Stud.-Journal of Hellenic Studies, London, 1880, otc.
Jour. Phil.-The Journal of Philology, Cambridge, 1868, etc.
FKaelker, Quaestiones do elocutione Polybiana (Diss.) [= Lpz.
Stud. iii. 219-302], Leipzig, 1878.
GKaibel, Epigrammata Graeca, etc., Berlin, 1878; see also IGS
in p. xxviii.
xxvi
I. PRINCIPAL MODERN WORKS CONSULTED.
HAKennedy, Sources of N. T. Greek, Edinburgh, 1895.
EKing, Introduction to Comparative Grammar, Oxford, 1890.
JEKing, Principles of Sound and Inflection in the Greek
language, Oxford, 1888.
AKirchhoff, Studien zur Geschichte des Griechischen Alphabets,
4te Aufl., Gütersloh, 1887.
FCKirchhoff, Betonung des Heroischen Hexameters, Altona,
1866.
Κόντος, Γλωσσικαὶ παρατηρήσεις, Athens, 1882.
기
​A KopaĤc, "ATαKTα, Paris, 1828-35.
ΣΚΟΥΜΑΝΟΥΔΗΣ, Συναγωγὴ λέξεων ἀθησαυρίστων ἐν τοῖς Ἑλληνικοῖς
λesikois, Athens, 1883.
GKratt, De Appiani elocutione (Diss.), Baden-Baden, 1886.
FKrebs, Die Präpositionen bei Polybius (Progr.), Regensburg,
1881.
Die präpositionsartigen Adverbia bei Polybius (Progr.),
Regensburg, 1892.
Zur Rection der Casus in der späteren historischen
Gräcität (Progr.), Regensburg, 1885.
PKretschmer, Die Griechischen Vaseninschriften, Gütersloh,
1894.
Einleitung in die Geschichte der Griechischen Sprache,
Göttingen, 1896.
KKrumbacher,
Geschichte der Byzantinischen Litteratur,
München, 1891; also 2te Aufl. 1897.
FKrumbholz, De praepositionum usu Appianeo (Diss.), Jena,
1885.
RKühnau, Die Trishtubh-Jagati-Familie, etc., Göttingen, 1886.
Rhythmus und Indische Metrik, Göttingen, 1887.
RKühner, Ausführliche Grammatik der Griechischen Sprache²,
Hannover, 1869–72.
Kühner-Blass, Ausführliche Grammatik der Griechischen
Sprache, 1er Band (11 Theile), dritte Auflage,
Hannover, 1890-2.
FKurschat, Grammatik der Lithauischen Sprache, Halle, 1876.
KZ.-Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung, etc.
Berlin, 1852, etc.
SLampros, Collection de Romans Grecs, Paris, 1880.
ALang, Homer and the Epic, London, 1893.
ARLange, De Substantivis Femininis Graecis (Diss.), Leipzig,
1885.
SLa Roche, Beiträge zur Griechischen Grammatik, Leipzig, 1893.
WLarfeld, Griechische Epigraphik (in IMüller's Handbuch),
1892.
ELegrand, Bibliothèque Grecque vulgaire, Paris, 1881, etc.
Collection des monuments, etc., Paris, 1869, etc.
WMLindsay, The Latin Language, Oxford, 1894.
Lpe. Stud.-Leipziger Studien, Leipzig, 1878, etc.
xxvii
I. PRINCIPAL MODERN WORKS CONSULTED.
W Schmid, Der Atticismus, Stuttgart, III Theile, 1887-93.
HSchmidt, De Duali Graecorum, Bresslau 1893.
KEASchmidt, Beiträge zur Geschichte der Grammatik, Halle,
1859.
PhSchmidt, Syntax des Histor. Herodian (Progr.), Gütersloh,
1891.
PhSchmidt, Die Rection der Casus (Progr.), Gütersloh, 1893.
PW Schmiedel, see GBWiner.
FrSchoel, De accentu linguae Latinae, etc. (in Acta Soc. Phil.
Lips. vol. vi.), Leipzig, 1875-6.
HEMSchuchardt, Ueber die Lautgesetze, gegen die Junggramma-
tiker, Berlin, 1885.
Der Vocalismus des Vulgärlateins, Leipzig,
1866-8.
ASchütz, Historia Alphabeti Attici, Berlin, 1875.
LSchwabe, De Deminutivis Graecis et Latinis, Giessen, 1859.
FHAScrivener, A plain Introduction to the Criticism of the
New Testament, fourth edition, by EMiller,
London, 1894.
ESeelmann, Die Aussprache des Latein, Heilbronn, 1885.
ESeidel, De usu praepositionum Plotiniano quaestiones (Diss.),
Nissae, 1886.
HSeiling, Ursprung und Messung des Homerischen Verses
(Progr.), Münster, 1887.
ThDSeymour, Introduction to the language and verse of
Homer, Boston, 1889.
ESivers', Grundzüge der Phonetik, 4to Auflage, Leipzig, 1893.
WWSkcal, A Primer of English Etymology, Oxford, 1892.
ΑΝΣκιάς, Περὶ τῆς Κρητικῆς διαλέκτου, Athens, 1891.
Soc. Bibl. Lit.-Society of Biblical Literature and Exegesis,
Middletown-Boston, U.S.A., 1882, etc.
BSokolovsky, Die Musik des Griechischen Alterthums und des
Orients, 1887.
ZoкpáтHC, Athens, 1874, etc.
NSophianos, Grammaire du Grec vulgaire (before 1550), 2nd ed.
ELegrand, Paris, 1874.
EASophocles [roal name Evayyeλivòs 'Aπоσтolídns], Gloss. A
Glossary of later and Byzantine Greek (in
Momoirs of Amer. Acad. vol. vii.), Boston,
1860.
Lex. A Greek Lexicon of the Roman and Byzan-
tine periods, New York, 1887.
Gram. A Romaic Grammar, Hartford (U.S.A.),
1842.
Gram.2 A Romaic or modern Greek Grammar, new
edition, Boston, 1857.
FSpohr, Die Präpositionen bei M. Aur. Antonin (Diss.), Cassel,
1890.
XXX
I. PRINCIPAL MODERN WORKS CONSULTED.
HSteinthal2, Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaft bei den
Griechen und Römern, 2te Auflage, Berlin,
1890-1.
JStich, De Polybii dicendi genere (Diss.), Erlangen, 1880.
Quaestiones in Appiani et Polybii dicendi genus,
Würzburg, 1890.
FrStolz, Lateinische Grammatik 2 (Lautlehre und Formenlehre,
in IMüller's Handbuch), München, 1890.
Historische Grammatik der Lat. Sprache (Einleitung,
Lautlehre, Stammbildungslehre), Leipzig, 1894.
JStorm, Englische Philologie, Heilbronn, 1892.
GStrachler, De caesuris versus Homerici cap. I, Breslau, 1889.
WStudemund, Anecdota varia, Berlin, 1886.
FSturz, De dialecto Macedonica et Alexandrina, Leipzig, 1808.
FSusemill, Griechische Literaturgeschichte in der Alexandriner-
zeit, Leipzig, 1892.
HSweet, History of English Sounds, Oxford, 1888.
A Primer of Phonetics, Oxford, 1890.
FTechmer, Phonetik, Leipzig, 1880, etc.
EMThompson, Greek and Latin Palaeography, London, 1894.
AThumb, Untersuchungen über d. Spir. Asper, Strassburg, 1889.
Handbuch der Nougriechischen Sprache, Strassburg,
1895 [Accidence only].
HUsener, Acta S. Marinae et S. Christophori, Bonn, 1886.
Der heilige Theodosius, Leipzig, 1890.
Altgriechischer Vorsbau, Bonn, 1877.
Ueber den Homerischen Vers, Bonn, 1886.
Legenden der heiligen Pelagia, Bonn, 1879.
W Veilch, Verbs irregular and defective, Oxford, 1887.
PViereck, Sermo Graocus, Göttingen, 1888.
W Victor, Phonetischo Studien, Marburg, 1887, etc.
JViteau, Étude sur le Grec du Nouveau Testament, Paris, 1893.
GVogrinz, Grammatik des Homer. Dialekts, Paderborn, 1889.
JWackernagel, Altindische Grammatik, 1. Lautlehre, Göttingen,
1896.
RWagner, Quaestiones de epigrammatis Graecis grammaticae,
Leipzig, 1883.
W Wagner, see p. xxx.
W Wattenbach, Anleitung zur Griechischen Palaeographio",
Leipzig, 1895.
Alb Weber, Indische Beiträge zur Geschichte der Aussprache des
Griechischon, in Monatsberichte Akad. der
Wiss. zu Berlin, 1871, pp. 613–632.
O Weise, Die Griechischen Wörter im Latoin, Leipzig, 1882.
CWessely, see p. xxx.
RWestphal, Allgemeine Metrik, Berlin, 1892.
xxxi
с
I. PRINCIPAL MODERN WORKS CONSULTED.
RWestphal, Die Musik des Griech. Alterthums, Leipzig, 1883.
Theorie der Musischen Künste der Hellenen (III
Theile), Leipzig, 1885-93.
JB Wheeler, Der Griechische Nominalaccent, Strassburg, 1885.
WDWhitney, A Sanskrit Grammar (2nd ed.), Leipzig, 1889.
Wien. Stud.-Wiener Studien, Wien, 1879, etc.
UWilamowits(-Moellendorf), Homerische Untersuchungen, 1884.
GB Winer, A Treatise on the Grammar of New Testament
Greek, Edinburgh, 1882.
GB Winer-Schmiedel, Grammatik des Neutestamentlichen
Sprachidioms, Göttingen, 1. Theil, 1894.
J Winteler, Naturlaute und Sprache, Aarau, 1892.
J Witrzens, Betonungssystem der Griechischen Sprache, Teschen,
1889.
CZacher, Die Aussprache des Griechischen, Leipzig, 1888.
EZarnke, Dio Entstehung der Griechischen Literatursprachen,
Leipzig, 1890.
Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung, see KZ.
xxxii
II. NOTABLE P-N TEXTS QUOTED
In this list inscriptions, papyri, and only such P-N texts are
given as might prove unfamiliar to general students. On the other
hand, such texts (inscriptions, papyri, etc.) as are scattered in
various modern works and periodicals are given in the list of Modern
Works consulted (p. xv. ff.)
All missing P-B authors are those given in EASophocles' Greek
Lexicon of the Roman and Byzantine periods (New York, 1887).
C.
ABC, Das ABC der Liebe (+XIV-XV +), WWagner, 1879.
Abgari Epistula (T-B), in RALipsius' Acta Apost. apocr. 1891,
p. 279–283.
Abraham, Ovoía Tov 'Aẞpaáu (1535), ELegrand, Bibl. i. 226–268.
Acta Andreae (T), MBonnet, 1895.
Nerei (T-B), HAchelis, 1893.
Pauli (V-VI+), in RALipsius' Acta Apost. apocr.
Pauli et Theclac (T-B), in RALipsius' Acta Apost. apocr.
1891, p. 235-272.
Pelri et Pauli (V-VI), in RALipsius' Acta Apost. apocr.
p. 178-222.
Pilati (T-B), in CTischendorf's Evang. apocr. p. 210-332.
Thaddaei (T-B), in RALipsius' Acta Apost. apocr. 1891,
P. 273-8.
Thomae (I), MBonnet, 1883.
Xanthippae et Polyxenac (III-IV), in MRJames's Apocr.
anecd. 1893, p. 58-85.
Aclian (210), RHercher, 1864-6.
Agathias (560+), BGNiebuhr, 1828.
Alchemists, Greok (parts I-IV [=p. 2-319] T-B; part V [p.
321 ff.] B-M), MBertholet & ChRuelle, 1887-8.
Ammonios (390t), Loipzig, LKulencamp, 1822.
Anuphora Pilati (T-B), in CTischendorf's Evang. apocr. p. 435-
449.
Anna Comnena, see Comnena.
Antatticista in Bekkeri Anecdota, p. 77-116.
Apoc. Mar., Αποκάλυψις τῆς ῾Αγίας Θεοτόκου περὶ τῶν κολάσεων
(T-B), in MRJames' Anecdota, p. 115-126.
Apoc. Sedrach (T-B), ib. p. 130-137.
Apokoр., 'ATÓKOTOS тоû Mπеруаdη (1534†), in ELegrand's Bibl. ii.
P. 94-112.
Apollodoros of Athens (140 B.C.), JBekker, 1854.
xxxiii
C 2
II. NOTABLE P-N TEXTS QUOTED.
Apollonios Dyscolos (±150+), JBekker, 1813.
Apophthegmata Patrum (±500+), JMigne, 45. 6
Appianos (1401), LMendelssohn, 1879-81.
ΠΑΡΑΒΑΝΤΙΝΟΥ, Συλλογὴ δημωδῶν ᾀσμάτων τῆς Ἠπείρου, ἐν ᾿Αθήναις,
1880.
Aristides Aelios (160t), GDindorf, 1829.
Artemidoros (+180t), RHercher, Leipzig, 1864.
Asin. Evvažúpiov тov тiμnμévov yadúpov (XVIth), in WWagner's
Carmina, p. 112-123.
Asin. L., Γαδάρου λύκου καὶ ἀλωπους διήγησις ὡραία, in W Wagner's
Carmina, 124-140.
Athenaeos (200t), GKaibel, Leipzig, 1887-90.
Babrios (III), MGitlbauer, Wien, 1882.
Barnabas' epistle (70-130+), in JBLightfoot's Apost. Fathers,
P. 243-265.
Bekk. An.-IBekkeri Anecdota Graeca, iii voll. Berlin, 1814-21.
Belis., Piµáda Tepì Bedwrapíov (XVth), in WWagner's Carmina,
P. 348-378.
Bclth., Διήγησις ἐξαίρετος Βελθάνδρου τοῦ Ῥωμαίου, in ELegrand's
Bibl. i. p. 125–168.
Bull. Corr. Hell.-Bulletin de Correspondance Hollénique,
Athènes, 1877, etc.
Boiss. Anecd.-Anecdota Graeca ed. JFBoissonade, 5 vols. Paris,
1829-33-
Callim., Tà Karà Kaλλípaɣov кai Xpvσroppóny (XI-XII), SLampros,
1880.
Callinicos Vita S.Hypatii (450), Leipzig (Toubner), 1895.
[Callisth.], Pseudo-Callisthenes, in the Vten Suppl.-Bd. der Jahr-
bücher für Class. Philologie, Leipzig, 1871.
Cananos, Ioannes (1430t), IBekkor, Bonnae, 1838.
Cedrenos, Georgios (1060†), IBokker, Bonnae, 1838–9.
CGL, Corpus Glossariorum Latinorum, iii, ed. GGootz, Leipzig,
1892.
Chocroboscos, Georgios (±550+), AHilgard, Loipzig, 1894.
Chronicon paschale (±630t), LDindorf, Bonnae, 1832.
Chron. Mor., Xpovov Toi Mapés (XIII), in JACBuchon’s
Recherches Historiques, Paris, 1845.
Chrysostomos, Ioannes (390†), JMigne, 47-04.
CIA, Corpus inscriptionum Atticarum, Berolini, 1873, etc.
CIG, Corpus inscriptionum Graecarum, Berolini, 1828-77.
Cinnamos, Ioannes (1160), AMeineke, Bonnae, 1836.
Clement of Alexandria (1957), GDindorf, 1869.
of Rome, I. Epistle (95†), in JBLightfoot's Apost.
Fathors, p. 5-40.
Clementina (III), PLagarde, Leipzig, 1865.
HCollitz, Sammlung der Griechischen Dialectinschriften, Göt-
tingen, 1883, etc.
xxxiv
II. NOTABLE P-N TEXTS QUOTED.
Comnena, Anna (1130), vol. i. JSchoppen, Bonnae, 1839; ii.
AReifferscheid, Bonnae, 1878.
VCornaros, 'EpwтókρITOS (±1520), Venice, 1713 [and frequently
since; editions issued in Greece are worthless].
JACramer, Anecdota Graeca, Oxonii, 1835-7.
Didache (90-120†), in JBLightfoot's Apost. Fathers, p. 217–225.
Dig., Aiyevns Aкpíтas (XII-XIIIth), ELegrand, Bibl. vi. 1892.
Dig.2
in SLampros' Collection, 11–237.
""
Diplomi Grechi, sce SCusa and GSpata.
GDittenberger, Sylloge Inscriptionum Graecarum, Lipsiae,
1883, etc.
Ducas (XVth), JBekker, Bonnae, 1834.
Et. M., Etymologicum magnum (B), ThGaisford, Oxford, 1868.
Εφημερὶς ἀρχαιολογική, Athens, 1883, etc.
Epictetos (50-130+), HSchenkl, Leipzig, 1894.
Epiphanios, Bishop of Cypros (370+), FOehler, Leipzig, 1859-61.
vitae (V-VI), Migne, 41.
Evangelium Thomae (T-B), in CTischendorf's Evangelia Apo-
crypha (2nd ed. 1876), p. 140–63.
Eusebios of Caesaria (3151), LDindorf, Leipzig, 1867-71.
Euthymii vita (±900t), C. de Boor, Berlin, 1888.
Geoponicon (±8oot), NNiclas, Leipzig, 1781; also HBeckh, 1895.
EGcorgillas (XV), in ELegrand's Bibl. i. p. 169-225.
Θανατικὸν τῆς Ρόδου in WWagner's Carmina Graeca,
P. 32-52.
Georgios Monachos, see GMonachos.
GIB, Greek inscriptions in the Br. Museum, London, 1874-93.
Gloss. Laod., Glossaire Gréco-Latin (MS IXth), par JMiller in
Notices et Extraits, xxix. (1880), p. 25–230.
MGlycûs (1150+), in ELegrand's Bibl. i. p. 18-37.
Great Louvre Papyrus (±310†), in CWessely's Griech. Zauber-
papyri, Akad. Wiss., Wien, 1888, p. 44-126.
Gregorios Nazianzenos (370†), JMigne, 35.
Gregorios of Nyssa (375t), JMigno, 44.
Gr. Pap. Br. Mus.-Catalogue of Greek Papyri in the British
Museum, od. by FGKenyon, London, 1893-
Gr. Urk Berlin-Aegyptische Urkunden aus den königlichen
Museen zu Borlin-Griechische Urkundon
(parts 1-x1), Berlin, 1892-3.
BV Head, Historia numorum, Oxford, 1887.
IIdn., Herodianos the grammarian (1601), ed. ALontz, Leipzig,
1867–70.
IIdn. Hist., Herodianos the Historian (±215†).
Heliodoros (390+), in GAHirschig's Erotici Scriptores, 1856.
Hermas (1401), in JBLightfoot's Apost. Fathers, p. 297-402.
XXXV
II. NOTABLE P-N TEXTS QUOTED.
Hermon., Κωσταντίνου Ἑρμονιακοῦ μετάφρασις τῆς Ἰλιάδος (1323-
35), ELegrand, 1890.
IGA, Inscript. Gr. antiquissimae, ed. HRoehl, Berolini, 1882.
IGB, Inscriptiones Graecae Megaridis Oropiae Boeotiae, ed.
GDittenberger, Berlin, 1892.
IGS, Inscriptiones Graecae Siciliae et Italiae, etc., ed. GKaibel,
Berolini, 1890.
Jacobi protevangelium (T), in CTischendorf's Evang. apocr.
P. I-50.
Jann. Kreta's Volkslieder in der Ursprache mit Glossar von
ANJeannaraki (Jannaris), Leipzig, 1876.
Ignatios, Epistle of (IV), in JBLightfoot's Apost. Fathers,
p. 105-134.
Infort., Λόγος παρηγορητικὸς περὶ δυστυχίας καὶ εὐτυχίας (XII-
XIII), in SLampros' Collection, p. 289-321.
Irenaeos (180†), JMigne, 7.
GKaibel, Epigrammata Gracca, Berolini, 1878. (See also IGS.)
FGKenyon, Classical Toxts from Papyri in the British Museum,
London, 1891.
CLeemans, Papyri Graeci, ii, Leyden, 1885.
ELegrand, Bibliothèque Grecque vulgaire, Paris, vi vols. Paris,
1881-1892.
Collection des Monuments, etc., Paris, 1869, etc.
Leo Diaconos (980+), CBHase, Bonnae, 1828.
Leo Sapiens (890t), JMigne, 107.
Leonlios of Neupolis (650+), Vita Ioannis, HGezler, 1893; Vita
Symeonis, Migne, vol. 93.
Lesbonax (II-III), LKulencamp, Leipzig, 1822.
Louvre Papyri, in Notices et Extraits, vol. xviii. Paris, 1865.
JLydos (5251), JBekker, Bonnae, 1837.
Macarios (±390†), JMigne, 34.
JPMahaffy, The Flinders Petrie Papyri, Dublin, 1891-2.
JMalalas (+550t), LDindorf, Bonnae, 1831.
RMeister, Dio Griechischen Dialekte, etc., Göttingen, 1882, etc.
KMeisterhans, Grammatik der Att. Inschriften, Berlin, 1888.
Menander Hist. (5901), LDindorf, in Hist. Gr. min. ii. 1-131.
Michaelis Archangeli miraculum (±500+), MBonnet, 1890.
Mitth., Mittheilungen des Archacol. Instituts, Berlin, 1876, etc.
Mocris (2001), GAKoch, Leipzig, 1830.
GMonachos (850†), JMigne, 110.
JMoschos (±6101), JMigne, vol. 87 iii.
Mus. Gr., Musici Scriptores Graeci, ed. CJanus, Lipsiao, 1895.
Narratio Josephi (T-B), in CTischendorf's Evang. apocr.
P. 459-470.
xxxvi
II. NOTABLE P-N TEXTS QUOTED.
Narratio Zosimi (V-VIht), in MRJames' Apocr. anecd. p. 96-108.
Nilos (420+), JMigne, 79.
Nomocanon (1090t) ed. Cotelerius.
I
Notices et Extraits des manuscrits, etc., Paris, 1865, etc.
NT, New Testament, CTischendorf-Gebhardt, Leipzig, 1891.
Olympiodoros (450†), Bonnae, 1829.
Palladios (420+), Historia Lausiaca, JMigne, 65.
APassow, Popularia carmina Graeciae recentioris, Leipzig, 1860.
Photios (890+), JMigne, 101-104; Lexicon, SANaber, 1864-5.
Phrantzes (14771), IBekker, Bonnae, 1838.
Phrynichos (±180+), GRutherford, London, 1881.
Physiologos (XIV-XV), ChGidol-ELegrand, 1873.
Picat., 'lwávvov Ilikaτópov tоínμa (XVI), in WWagner's Car-
mina, p. 224–241.
Pilati acta (T-B), in CTischendorf's Evang. apocr. p. 210-332.
anaphora (T-B), ib. p. 435–49.
paradosis (T-B), ib. p. 449-55-
Polyacnos (+180+), Woelfflin, 1860.
Polycarp's Epistle (1551), in JBLightfoot's Apost. Fathers, p.
168-173.
Poric., Anynois IIwpikoλóyov (XII-XIII), in WWagner's Car-
mina, p. 199–202.
Porphyrogennetos, Constantinos (950), IBekker, Bonnae,
1829-40.
Prochoros (+500†), ThZahn, Erlangen, 1880.
Procopios (540+), GDindorf, Bonnao, 1833-8.
Prodromos, Theodoros (XII), in ELegrand's Bibl. i. 38-107.
Protevangelium Jacobi (III), in CTischendorf's Evang. apocr.
p. 1-50.
MPsellos (1050), JMigne, 122.
Pul., Hovλoλóyos (XIV), in WWagner's Carmina, p. 179-198.
Quadr., Διήγησις παιδιόφραστος τῶν τετραπόδων ζώων (1365), in
WWagner's Carmina, p. 141-178.
Roboam, Aidaxy Zoloμarros (XII), in ELegrand's Bibl. i.
HRoehl, see IGA.
11-16.
LRoss, Inscriptiones Graecao ineditae, Naupliae, 1834-45.
Sachl., repávov Zaxλíkn Tpadaí (XVI), in WWagner's Car-
mina, p. 62-105.
Sal. Ps., Vaλuoi Zoloµâvros (50-60 B. C.), OGebhardt, Leipzig,
1895.
Septuaginta, CTischendorf, 7th ed., Leipzig, 1887.
JSkylitzes (1080), IBekker, Bonnae, 1838-9.
Spaneas (XIIth), in ELegrand's Bibl. i. p. 1-10.
Span., Αλεξίου Κομνηνου ποίημα παραινετικόν (XIII-XIV), in
WWagner's Carmina, p. 1-27.
1
xxxvii
II. NOTABLE P-N TEXTS QUOTED.
8
Span. ditto in Δελτίον τῆς Ἱστορικῆς καὶ Ἐθνολογικῆς Εταιρείας,
V. 17, p. 105–121.
GSpata, Diplomi Grechi, inediti, etc., Torino, 1870.
JStaphidas (MS of 1384†), in ELegrand's Bibl. ii. 1-27.
W Studemund, Anecdota varia, Graeca et Latina, Berlin, 1886.
GSynkellos (805+), GDindorf, Bonnae, 1829.
Synesios (430†), JMigne, 66.
Test. x, Testamenta duodecim Patriarcharum, JMigne, 2.
Thdn., Theodotion (II), JMigne, 15.
Theodoretos (457†), JMigne, 80.
Theodoros Lector (525), JMigne, 86, 1.
Theodosios of Scythopolis (553), JMigne, 86, 1.
Theophanes (800t), C. De Boor, Leipzig, 1883-5.
Theophanes continuatus (950), JBekker, Bonnae, 1838.
Theophylactos (±1100+), C. de Boor, Leipzig, 1887.
Thomas Magister (1310), FRitschel, Halis, 1832.
FTrinchera, Syllabus Graec. membranorum, etc., Neapoli, 1865.
Tzclzes, Ioannes (1150), ThKiessling, Leipzig, 1826.
Villois. Anecd.-Anecdota Gracca, ed. IBGVilloison, 2 vols.,
Venetiis, 1781.
Vita Epiphanii (V-VI), JMigne, 41.
Euthymii (±900), C. de Boor, Berlin, 1888.
SA, vita S. Andreae Sali in Acta sanctorum, mense Mai
t. vi corollarium 1*-111*.
I II
W Wagner, Das ABC der Liebe (+IV+), Leipzig, 1879.
Mediaoval Greek Texts, London (in Phil. Soc.), 1870.
Carmina Graeca medii aevi, Leipzig, 1874.
Trois poèmes Grecs du moyen âge, Berlin, 1881.
CWessely, Die Pariser Papyri des Fundes El-Fayun in Akad.
Wiss., Wien, 1889 (vol. 37, 2).
Griechische Zauberpapyri (±31ot), ib. vol. 36, 2
(1888), p. 1-208.
Neue Pariser Papyri (±310+), ib. vol. 42 (1893).
Einige Urkunden des Berliner kgl. Aegypt. Museums,
Berlin, 1890.
Prolegomena ad pap. Graec., etc., Vienna, 1883.
Zonaras, Ioannes (1118), LDindorf, Leipzig, 1868-75.
Zosimos (4251), JBekker, Bonnae, 1837.
xxxviii
HISTORICAL GREEK GRAMMAR
INTRODUCTION.
01. In all countries and at all times it has been observed that
natural, local, social, and other manifold influences lead invari-
ably to varieties of racial type, character, and language.
This phenomenon manifested itself also in ancient Greece: her
populations exhibited many well-defined differences in every
respect. The Greeks themselves were struck by this fact, and
sought to account for it by attributing their dissimilarities of
race, character, and speech to a dissimilarity of origin. Accord-
ingly they invented a mythological genealogy calculated to
satisfy the popular mind. Three legendary heroes, they assumed,
Aeolos and Doros, sons, and Ion, grandson, of Hellen, were the
progenitors of all Greeks. Aeolos gave birth to a distinct race
of Grecks, named after him Aeolians, Doros to another called
Dorians, and Ion to that of the Ionians. Each race was naturally
made to speak a distinct dialect: the Aeolians Aeolic, the
Dorians Doric, and the Ionians Ionic. Some time aftor, the
Ionic branched off, so they believed, and gave rise to a new
dialect called Attic.
02. These beliefs, once settled in the popular mind, passed
into history, and assumed the sanctity of a religious canon
through all antiquity. They were accepted as a matter of un-
questionablo authenticity, and every particular phenomenon was
adaptod to this national legend. It is only since the beginning of
the present century that philological and historical criticism has
called these traditions in question, and eventually compelled
classical students to give up the old theory so notoriously re-
futed by modern science. Indeed, when we found our researches
on the critical examination of direct evidences (chiefly in-
scriptions) and other allied fields, we are forced to the con-
1
B
02-03.] CLASSIFICATION AND NUMBER OF DIALECTS.
clusion that the Greek language once formed not four (Aeolic,
Doric, Ionic and Attic), but numerous dialects varying more
or less considerably from one another. In point of fact, in
prehistoric times and several centuries thereafter, each Greek
region and community had a dialect of its own. At the same
time these various dialects, when compared to one another,
exhibit some common features which enable philologists to
group them under two leading heads, the Non-Ionic and the
Ionic. The chief criterion for this grouping is afforded by the
observation that the Non-Ionic head, on the whole, shows
'long'a where the Ionic exhibits н (though cp. 29; also App.
ii. 6 & 14). Thus the assumed prototype Indo-European word,
*sistami I place,' sounded loraui among the Non-Ionic dialects,
and torn in the Ionic group.
03. The two groups of dialects referred to, as well as their
varieties or subdivisions, may be roughly illustrated by the
following classification.
A. NON-IONIC or a-dialects.
1. Doric: (1) Laconia; (2)
Heraclia and Taras; (3)
Messenia; (4) Argolis
and Aegina; (5) Corinth
and Corcyra; (6) Megaris
and Byzantium; (7)
Crete; (8) Melos; (9)
Rhodes; (10) Achaia;
(11) Doric isles of the
archipelago (Anaphe, A-
stypalaca, Tenos, Cos, Ca-
lymna, etc.).
II. Achacic Dialects:
A. Northern Greece: (1)
Epiros; (2) Locris ; (3)
Phokis ¹1; (4) Aetolia [¹];
(5) Acarnania [']; (6)
Phthiotis.
B. (Aeolic) (1) Northern
Thessaly ; (2) Elis;
(3) Arcadia and Cy-
pros; (4) Pamphylia;
(5) Lesbos (Aeolic); (6)
Boeotia.
B. IONIC or н-dialects.
I. Ionic: (1) Decapolis; (2) Cycla-
des; (3) Euboea.
II. ATTIC:
I.
CLASSICAL PERIOD (500-
300 B.C.).
2. POST-CLASSICAL PERIOD:
(a) Hellenistic or Alexandrian
Period (300-150 B.C.).
(b) Greco-Roman Period (150
B.C.—300 A.D.).
(c) Transitional Period (300-
600 A.D.).
3. NEOIIELLENIC PERIOD (600-
1900 A.D.).
(a) Byzantine or First Neohel-
lenic period (600-1000 A.D.).
(b) Mediaeval or Socond Neo-
hellenic period (1000-1450
A.D.).
(c) Modern or Third Neohellenic
period (1450-1800 A.D.).
(d) Present or Fourth Noohel-
lenic period(1800-1900A.D.).
[ Popular dialects of which we possoss no reprosontativo literature, except
inscriptions.
2
ATTIC DIALECT AND LITERATURE.
[04-05.
ATTIC PERIOD (500-300 B.C.).
04. Whatever may have been originally the actual number
of Greek dialects, it lies in the nature of language that local,
political, social, and cultural factors should favour this or
that dialect, and give it ascendency over the rest, so as to
eventually supersede them. In the case of Greek, it was
at the outset so far back at least as history can trace---
the Ionic group which rose to pre-eminence and became
the received language of early composition (Homer, cyclic
poetry, Hesiod-then Herodotos, Hippocrates, etc.). On the
other hand, the Dorian conquest ('Return of the Heraclids'
±1000 B.C.) could not fail to lead, in progress of time, to the rise
of a powerful rival in the spread of the Doric dialects. How-
ever, with the close of the VIth B.C., the dialect of Athens, the
so-called Attic—one of the Ionic group-prevailed over all other
sister-dialects, and eventually absorbed them". It was the Attic,
because Athens, particularly after the Persian wars, rose to
absolute dominion over all the other Greek communities, and
finally became the metropolis of all Greek races. Once having
gained the hegemony, she leads in every line: science, art,
literature, trade, manufacture, fashion, wealth, and all other
political, military, social, and educational institutions are
started and developed in Athens, and from Athens spread in
all directions through the ancient world. The entire nation,
in and out of Greece proper, streams, for purposes of business,
knowledge, pleasure, etc., to the national metropolis. Younger
people, also, eager for education, repair to Athens, as the uni-
versal or Panhellenic seminary of culture Hence Pericles
himself could well say of her: ἐπεισέρχεται δὲ διὰ μέγεθος τῆς
πόλεως ἐκ πάσης γῆς τὰ πάντα. (Th. 2, 38.)
τα
05. It is during this period of supremacy of Athens (500-300)
that the Athenian or Attic dialect attained its highest stage
of development. It is amply reflected in the contemporary
works of Aeschylos, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes; the
historians Thucydides and Xenophon; the philosophers Plato
and Aristotle; the orators Demosthenes, Aoschines, Isocrates,
Lysias, etc., then in numerous inscriptions of the time. The
language of this period is also styled the classical or Attic Greek
par excellence. But, speaking of Attic Greek, we must not infer
that all Athenians and Atticized Greeks wrote and spoke the
classical Attic portrayed in the aforesaid literature, for this
ง
[This is evidently the mouning of [Xenophon] when he says in 'A@ŋv. Пoλɩт,
2, 3, 8 οἱ μὲν Ἕλληνες ἰδίᾳ μᾶλλον καὶ φωνῇ καὶ διαίτῃ καὶ σχήματι χρῶνται,
Αθηναῖοι δὲ κεκραμένῃ ἐξ ἁπάντων τῶν Ἑλλήνων καὶ βαρβάρων. The first to ru-
treat was Aoolic (honco lator Groeks attributed to this dialect the thon extinct
digamma F), next Ionic, and last Doric. None of those dialects has loft any
tracos in presont Crook excopt Doric which still lin.ors in Tsaconic, thon in
a fow solitary words elsewhore, as † Míλuro (Crete) for anciont Miλaros.
3
B 2
05-05b.]
LITERARY AND POPULAR GREEK.
Attic is essentially what it still remains in modern Greek
composition: a merely historical abstraction, that is an artistic
language which nobody spoke but still everybody understood
(05b ff. 020 [2] & 20). Nor must we imply that, because the
above writers have been styled classics by posterity, they were
both the creators and finishers of Greek literature. They
rather were the continuators and perfecters of a work relegated
to them as a national inheritance. Their own productions,
therefore, are both in matter and form emulous though free
imitations of ancestral models[]-lost to us-and as such
reflect the genius, subject, practice, language, and technical
treatment of preceding ages (29 ff. App. ii. 9 ff.) under the
unavoidable influence of their own time. Accordingly what
is generally styled the classical or Attic period marks not the
start of a new era; it rather forms the crowning age of a
glorious history, an age subsequently raised to ideal by its
excellence over all posterity. The literary mastorpieces of this
period then do not represent the language as actually spoken
at the time; they simply reflect the traditional or received
style artistically tempered and adapted to the exigencies of the
age [
For in ordinary intercourse both the educatod classes
and uneducated multitudes could not rise above the simple
colloquial or popular speech, in many cases degenerating into
a vernacular or even rustic idiom. The co-existence at all times
of an artistic or literary style, and a colloquial or popular
speech (to pass over the rustic idiom) with an intermediate
conventional language, is a fact indisputably established by
the force of logic, by historical investigation, and by modorn
analogies, as well as by daily experience.
[1]
05. 'In Greek, more than in most other old languages, there was
a difference between the artless or popular language and the literary,
especially the poetical language (written and artificial dialects);
a difference which, in view of our insufficient knowledge of the artless
popular speech, we can only conjecture but not clearly define. For
even the oldest Greek extant, the Homeric poetry, was an artificial
dialect which exhibits forms of various times and widely different
idioms commixed, and so can by no means have been the language
of ordinary intercourse. This language then has influenced, in a
more or less degree, the entire poetry of subsequent times. Tho
mixture of the dialects having become, through the llomeric standard,
a so-to-say constituent element of the poetical diction, appears to
have been carried to greatest lengths in lyric poetry. Among the
older prose writers, Herodotos and the oldest Attics show the
Honco tho frequent sharp discrimination in Attic grammar botwoon
'pootionl '(also 'epic') and 'prose' Greck.—This also explains why Hosiod
and Pindar, though Bocobins, huve not written in their native dinloct. Again,
Alcacos, Sappho, and the trugodians, though omploying on the whole the
received language of their country, frequently borrow Homoric forms, and tho
choric parts of tho Attic plays aro conventionally in Doric.
4
ATTIC AN INTERNATIONAL LANGUAGE.
[05b-08.
clearest difference from the colloquial language, though that difference
cannot [?] have been very considerable. Towards the close of the
V B.C. a Panhellenic literary language, founded on the Attic dialect,
came into existence, which gradually lost touch with the popular
language.'-KBrugmann, Gr. Gram. p. 21; so too p. 76 footnote.
2
06. But apart from these facts and considerations, it is
within daily observation that no writer whatever uses the same
diction both in writing and speaking. On the contrary, every
penman makes it a special point to clothe his thoughts in a
more or less elegant expression, and we all acknowledge that
a literary composition is likely to meet with more favour on
the part of its readers if it rises above daily common talk (020).
Accordingly the classical writings of the Greeks, which excel
in elegance of style and diction, are of necessity artistic and
artificial productions different from the common and popular,
as well as from the plebeian or rustic speech.
07. Facts, then, analogy, and modern experience, force us to
the recognition, at all periods of Greek history, of a literary
style, and a colloquial speech in the Attic or national language
of Greece. It now remains to say a word on the literary pro-
ductions extant of these two forms of language.
In the case
of the literary style the material at hand is very rich and sur-
passing; in fact, the whole Greek literature, the glory of ancient
Greece, is composed almost exclusively in the literary diction.
With regard to the colloquial or popular speech, it is hardly
represented in the written monuments extant (cp. 020). This
is a regrettable vacuum, but its occurrence is not surprising.
For all colloquial compositions of the time, being of temporary
and private character (private correspondenco, notes, etc.), were
committed to skins, leaves, wax-boards or tablets (cerac, vģíu,
Seλría), and papyri, which, being single copies, have all perished
in the humid soil of Greece. But even if the material were of
lasting substance, we must remember that every scribe, the
moment he tries to commit his thoughts to writing, instine-
tively shapes them in a more or less artistic form and thus
unconsciously rises to the conventional or literary style (05.
019). In those circumstances the colloquial or popular lan-
guage, especially that of the classical period, has left, and could
leave, no representative specimens to distant posterity.
HELLENISTIC PERIOD (300-150 B.C.).
Greek becoming an International Language.
08. With the close of the IV B.C. a new era opens in
the history of the Greek language. With the final subjection
of Grooce to the Macedonian rule her glorious days closed for
At the same time, the rapid and vast conquests of
Alexander the Great in Asia and Egypt threw the East open to
the Greek populations. Multitudes of them soon made their
evor.
LO
5
08-010.]
FOREIGN INFLUENCE.
way into the various territories of Asia, Egypt, North Africa,
Southern Europe, Spain, France, the Euxine, in short, along
the coasts of the Mediterranean and Black seas, in many cases
penetrating into the far interior. The Greek language then,
already Atticized, gradually conquered the whole ancient world,
and became the medium of international communication. At
the same time, the rapid expansion of the Hellenic race over
alien regions naturally led to novel conditions: new Greek com-
munities sprang up in Asia Minor (Smyrna, Rhodes, Antioch,
Pergamon) and Alexandria, which soon competed with the
metropolis for supremacy. The balance of culture and learning
eventually shifted to the East, Alexandria becoming the principal
centre of classical education and learning (hence this period is
often termed the Alexandrian period).
09. The conditions created by such political and social changes
are naturally reflected in the contemporary literature and lan-
guage: the Greek populations which had settled abroad among
alien races (such as Syrians, Persians, Egyptians, Ethiopians)
as soldiers, colonists, tradesmen, and the like, formed only a
minority among the natives. They had to accommodate them-
selves to altered conditions: novel (oriental) life, new avoca-
tions, new climate, foreign culture. Such changes in life,
coupled with the absence of a national centre and a uniform or
systematic education, called into existence a sort of colonial or
Levantine Greek which soon began to tell on the language of
the already declining metropolis in Greece proper, inasmuch
as the colonial and foreign spirit asserted itself against the
ancestral or classical culture. In this way a Panhellenic Greek
sprang up which, while always preserving all its main features
of Attic grammar and vocabulary, adopted many colonial and
foreign elements and moreover began to proceed in a more
analytical spirit and on a simplified grammar. This modified
or cosmopolitan Greek is generally designated as the non-Attic
or Common Greek (Kown or Envikỳ diúλektos), that is, the
generally received Greek (Panhellenic). It is this Panhellenic
or new Attic that marks an already advanced stage in the direc-
tion of Modern Greek.
GRECO-ROMAN PERIOD (B.C. 150-300 A.D.).
010. From this time onward the Greek language departs farther
from classical Attic under more and more varying conditions.
In the first place, while the cultural and social compotition be-
tween the new Greek commonwealths in the East and the
ancient metropolis (Athens) of all Greeks was still in process,
a foreign unwelcome mastor interposed: the Romans came
upon the stage and put an end to the political independence of
all Greek communities, both abroad and at home. However,
6
ATTICISTIC REACTION.
[010-011.
we must not imply here that Greek made room for Latin; for
the Romans, instead of Romanizing their Greek subjects, were
Hellenized by them a fact deplored by the Romans themselves.
Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 156: Graecia capta ferum victorem cepil et artes Intulit agresti
Latio.-Ovid Fast. 3, 101 sq.: nondum tradideral victas victoribus artes Graecia.
-Liv. 34, 4: iam in Graeciam Asiamque transcendimus omnibus libidinum ille-
cebris repletas, et regias etiam attrectamus gazas; eo plus horreo ne illae magis res
nos ceperint quam nos illas. Cic. Arch. 23 quod Graeca leguntur in omnibus fere
regionibus, Latina suis finibus, exiguis sane, continentur.—and ảяoλoûσi 'Рwμałor
τὰ πράγματα γραμμάτων Ἑλληνικῶν ἀναπλησθέντες, said Cato the elder (Plut.
Cato Maj. 23, 3)[¹].
011. On the other hand, it is equally true that the Roman ad-
ministration, notwithstanding its surrendering to Greek culture
and education, did not fail to influence the Greek language: a
large number of words referring to Roman associations and
novelties, especially official (administrative, military, and judi-
cial) terms, social grades, titles and dates were adopted in a more
or less Hellenized form. At the same time the Roman rule,
essentially military as it was, reduced intellectual life and
culture to a lower ebb, and thus on the one hand brought
into disuse and oblivion a considerable portion of the Greek
vocabulary, and on the other left freer play and scope to the
colloquial or popular speech. Now as the language developed
under such conditions and influences compared unfavourably
with the Attic of the glorious olden times of Athenian hegemony,
many scholars now, and after them the great majority of their
successors, acting in a tacit conspiracy, endeavoured to check
the further progress of this 'Common' (i. e. unclassical Attic)
Greek and revive the ancient pure Attic, a circumstance which
gave them the nickname of Atticists, i. e. 'purists.' Not origi-
nality, but imitation and form: Keîtai; oỷ keîtai; -was now the
motto of all scribes, and their general conspiracy systematically
excluded from the literary compositions all the new elements
daily cropping up, and thus prevented them from reaching
posterity isi
The effort and example of these purists, too,
though criticized at first, gradually became a sort of moral
dictatorship, and so has been tacitly if not zealously obeyed
by all subsequent scribes down to the present time.
[ Cp. also Senec. Consol. ad Helv. 6, 8; Juven. 6, 184; 15, 110; Quintil. i. 1, 12;
Sueton. Claud. 42; Aristid. i. 294, 10; Acts 21, 37; Jos. B. J. 5, 5, 2; Epict. Frg. 53.
[2] Thus Aristides (Rhot. 2, 6) prides himself on being able to state that he
has usod not a word which is not sanctioned by classical writers: Tepi de
ἑρμηνείας τοσοῦτον ἂν εἴποιμι, μήτε ὀνόματι μήτε ῥήματι χρῆσθαι ἄλλοις πλὴν
TOLS EIC TŴY BIBλiwv. - See also FBlass Pron, to f
The actual stato of public education at this period may bo gauged by such
documentary specimens as: (Gr. Urk. Berlin 13" [July 22, 289 A.D.], 22-23)
α]υρήλιος αμμωνις απο χώρας νεθείτων αξειωθεις υπαιρατων γραματα με είδωτων
έγραψα υπαιρ ατων (for Αυρήλιος ῎Αμμωνις ἀπὸ χώρας Νεθιτῶν ἀξιωθεὶς ὑπ' αὐτῶν
γράμματα μὴ εἰδότων ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν), where the formal and standing
phraseology of the signaturo by procuration would have led us to expect a moro
correct spelling even among the uneducated masses.
7
012-014.]
ATTICISTIC AND COMMON SCHOOLS.
012. But despite this purist conspiracy of all post-classical
scribes, which is amply illustrated in the Atticistic productions
of the time, the unlearned inscriptions and papyri, especially
those of a private character, show an essentially different com-
plexion, which reflects, though dimly, the popular or colloquial
language, and at the same time signalizes, as stated above (09),
a distinctly advanced stage of modern Greek.
013. Generally speaking, in the literary productions of this
period we can distinguish four different strata of the language :
(1) The Atlicists, who adhere rigidly to classical Attic, copying
both its vocabulary and grammar (Dionysios of Halicarnassos,
Dion Chrysostomos, Lucian, Aristides, Pausanias, Aelian, Hime-
rios, Themistios, Libanios, Phrynichos, Moeris, etc.). (2) The
common or conventional school consisting of writers who in
their compositions follow the received or Panhellenic lan-
guage, that is Attic with many concessions to the spirit of the
times (Polybios [but ep. 1771, b], Diodoros, Plutarch, etc., also
Josephos and Philon). (3) The Levantine group, represented by
Asiatic Greeks and those Hellenized foreigners who in their
compositions adopted the Greek language (many contemporary
inscriptions and papyri, then the New Testament, less the
Septuagint which is Rabbinic Greek). This Levantine group
is sometimes wrongly termed the Hellenistic.-From these three
schools which represent the written language, we must distin-
guish as (4): The colloquial or popular speech, which is dis-
cernible in the analytical spirit and modernized diction of the
Common and Levantine Schools, and particularly in many of
the contemporary inscriptions, and papyri. The last-named
source, especially that of the papyri, is now being daily multi-
plied by discoveries in Egypt, where the dryness of the climate
and the solidity of the temples and tombs afforded to MSS and
other documents an everlasting shelter.
TRANSITIONAL PERIOD (300-600 A.D.).
a. Christianization of the Greek language: Greek body, Christian
soul, Modern Attire.
014. In this transition stage of the Greek language, another
agency, mightier than any previous one, manifested itself and
remodelled its character: the conversion of the Greek race
to Christianity. It was Christianity, indeed, which had the
most revolutionary effects on the Greek history and culture.
Christianity originated in Asia Minor, which was ruled
by Rome but spoke Greek. It came not from abroad as
a foreign invader and conqueror, but sprang up in the midst
8
INFLUENCE OF CHRISTIANITY.
[014-016.
of the masses as a friend and saviour. Once set in the hearts
of the people, it became part of their race, part of their nature,
and turned them not to subjects but to zealous agents. The
classical or Hellenic spirit now makes room for new ideas and
doctrines, new education and life. In their religious ardour
and enthusiasm, the Greek multitudes abjure their ancestral
beliefs, their history and literature, and therewith that part
of their vocabulary which was associated with unchristian
principles. The Greek temples are zealously transformed into
Christian churches or deserted as haunted spots; the traditional
customs and beliefs are abandoned and disowned; the reading
of pagan authors, that is, of Greek literature altogether, is
religiously shunned ; Hellenic colleges are abolished as pagan
institutions; in short, the old Hellenism is Christianized in
a modern spirit, and thus undergoes a process of transubstan-
tiation.
[¹
015. The work of Christianity in the transformation of the
Greek language received an additional impulse from another
momentous factor: with the division of the Roman Empire
into Eastern and Western, the seat of Greck culture and learn-
ing removed from Alexandria and Athens to ancient Byzan-
tium, now rebuilt by Constantine the Great, and named New
Rome (later Constantinople). Constantine himself having
adopted the Christian faith (first Christian Emperor) raised it
to a State Church and made New Rome a metropolis of the
Eastern Empire, which was now composed chiefly of Christian-
ized Greeks (cp. 025). The new capital was situated in the midst
of many heterogeneous races and alien influences; the adminis-
tration and court ceremonial were entirely novel; the spirit of
the times was mainly roligious and martial All these influences
affected daily life and imprinted on the language a peculiar and,
as it were, composite stamp which is conventionally termed
the Byzantine style.
016. To sum up, partly the Roman sway,-whether it pro-
ceeded directly from Rome proper as in the first centuries
(145 B.C.-330 A.D.), or from New Rome, her Hellenized successor
and rival in the East (025)--but chiefly the rapid transition
from Greek culture to the ascetic fervour of Christianism, had the
most consequential and permanent effects on the Greek language.
Thousands of words and terms associated with science, litera-
turo, history, mythology (now called idolatry), philosophy, and
all such vocabulary as was associated with God-forsaken pagan-
ism, passed into oblivion. Even the name of 'Hellen,' the
[4] Clementina 4, 12 ἐγὼ τὴν πᾶσαν Ἑλλήνων παιδείαν κακοῦ δαίμονος χαλεπωτά-
την ὑπόθεσιν εἶναι νομίζω. Const. Apost. 1, 6 τί γάρ σοι καὶ λείπει ἐν τῷ νόμῳ
τοῦ Θεοῦ ἵν᾽ ἐπ᾿ ἐκεῖνα τὰ ἐθνύμυθα ὁρμήσῃς;
9
016-018.] EARLY CHURCH SAVING GREEK LANGUAGE.
traditional and hereditary designation for a Greek, being now
associated with heathen reminiscences, was repudiated, and the
appellation Romaios' ('Papatos), that is, citizen of the Chris-
tian metropolis, New Rome, or 'Rome par excellence,' was
universally adopted instead. In this way the formerly copious
stock and vocabulary of the Greek language was now consider-
ably reduced and modified in a Christian and modern spirit.
b. The Church saving Literary Greek from Extinction.
017. Here, however, misunderstanding must be guarded against.
It is true that Christianity while ousting paganism obliterated
Hellenic culture and with it remodelled the Greek language.
But on the other hand a reaction followed: once Christianized,
the Greek language found a mighty support and shelter in the
Christian Church. Not that the latter was in actual sympathy
with the Hellenic language as such, but for other practical
reasons. Apart from the very momentous fact that the Old Testa-
ment had been translated from the Hebrew into the conventional
or Atticizing Greek (013), the then international or cosmopolitan
language, the very founder of Christianity (presumably) and
His Apostles (cortainly) had preached and written in Greek;
the New Testament, the foundation and fountain-head of the
Christian faith, had been promulgated in Greek; the early eccle-
siastical writers and Church Fathers had devoutly imitated the
Biblical diction; in short, the Christian Church had been
founded upon the conventional and universal Greek of the
time. In these conditions it was a foregone conclusion-
nay, it was almost pre-ordained-that all subsequent religious.
compositions should be guided by the sacred language of the
Church, whose diction and grammar, having once received a
canonical sanction, continued as a fixed standard, appropriate to
the lofty and earnest subject, to influence in every way Chris-
tian posterity.
018. It might be reasonably objected here, that secular writers
of the Christian era, whose number is considerable, though
Christians themselves, were not, by any means, compelled by
religious considerations to frame their compositions after Biblical
or patristic Greek. This is true, but, as already explained (o1off.),
for pagan or secular compositions, the old classical Attic diction,
sanctioned as it had been through all previous ages, still stood
as the only model and standard for all composition. Thus
it came to pass that all literary compositions produced since
the Christianization of the Greek race, if religious in their
character, were adapted to ecclesiastical Greek; if secular in
their tenour, were moulded on the classical languago. As
a matter of course, either form goes back to the same original,
classical Attic (019).
10
MODERNIZATION OF GREEK.
[019.
NEOHELLENIC PERIOD (600-1900 A.D.).
a. Byzantine Period (600-1000 A.D.).
019. With its Christianization, the Greek language had entered
on the path of distinct modernization. We have already seen
that, since the Roman dominion, ancient culture had made room
for Christian worship, and education for ascetic renunciation.
This state of things naturally led to general ignorance and
darkness, a circumstance which greatly loosened the mutual
touch previously existing between the literary style and the
colloquial or popular speech, and thus left an unhampered
course to the latter. It might have even led to a complete
disconnection and separation between the two forms, had not
the literary language already permeated the popular idiom.
For it will be remembered that, just as classical Attic had
served as a model for all pre-Christian antiquity, so eccle-
siastical Attic succeeded and continued as a fixed and sacred
standard for all post-Christian literature. As a matter of fact,
ecclesiastical Attic was now the diction of every reading
book; ecclesiastical Attic was the language of the ritual
daily read and heard in the Greek Church; ecclesiastical Attic
was the diction of all school-books, the entire course of educa-
tion being religious in its spirit and bearing. Likewise the
official language of the Emperor and his court, that of the vast
administration, of the law courts and the numberless clergy,
was essentially ecclesiastical or modernized Attic. Even the
language of the uneducated masses was crammed and infused
with an immense amount of phraseology recognizable as eccle-
siastical expressions, official terms and standing phrases. In
short, all compositions as well as polite language were moulded
after the same pattern: the ecclesiastical or modernized Attic.
It is true that, in his daily life and intercourse, every Greek was
at liberty to speak the colloquial language or even his own
dialect; but as soon as he proceeded to commit his thoughts to
paper, he was compolled to follow some grammar (07). Now
there was but one grammar: the Attic. It was Attic grammar
that every penman, whether highly or poorly educated,
had learned. Attic grammar then naturally suggested the
traditional orthography and vocabulary associated with it (25).
It must be also borne in mind that education was limited
almost to the clergy-the great majority of penmen since
Christian times-who read chiefly, if not exclusively, the Bible
and so knew it by hoart. These monks and priests, then,
whether they treated religious subjects or secular matters, gave
them a scriptural colour. They made it a pious duty to copy or
imitate the sacred language of the Church. From whatever
quarter then we may start wo always gravitate towards the same
contral fountain- the Attic grammar and stock (018). Thus
11
019-021.]
POPULAR PRODUCTIONS.
there was at all stages of the Greek language, since classical
antiquity, a general conspiracy of agencies in favour of the
Attic dialect, which caused nearly the whole Greek literature,
whether pre-Christian or post-Christian, to be clad in a more
or less artificial Attic attire varying only with the degree of
the individual education of each scribe.
020. Under these conditions it is not surprising if the collo-
quial speech is hardly represented in literature in its genuine
form. It never obtained recognition or favour among the edu-
cated set of writers (05 ff., 25 ff.). On the contrary there has been
at all times a general prejudice against it, and the writers and
scribes of the time made it a special point of honour and pride
to make the least possible concessions to the popular vocabulary
and grammar. It is true that the spirit of the popular language
breathes through all post-Christian compositions, still in every
case it is very carefully disguised under the veil of classicalism.
It is only now and then that we light upon a purely popular
expression which has forced its way into the text owing to its
untranslatable nature, but even then it is branded as 'common,"
that is, exceptionable or vulgar, and the author intimates to us
his reluctance and aversion to such 'vulgarisms.' A curious
specimen of such Greek, exhibiting the literary style mixed
with colloquialisms, may be adduced here as an illustration.
It is a satire against the Byzantine Emperor Maurice, in the
year 600 A.D. (Thooph. 283, 19-23.)
Εύρηκε τὴν δαμαλίδα ἁπαλὴν (καὶ τρυφεράν)
[1]
καὶ ὡς τὸ καινὸν ἀλεκτόριν ταύτῃ (ἐπεπήδησεν 11,
καὶ ἐποίησε παιδία ὡς τὰ ξυλοκούκκουδα,
καὶ οὐδεὶς τολμᾷ λαλῆσαι, ἀλλ' ὅλους ἐφίμωσεν.
Αγιέ μου ἅγιε, φοβερὲ καὶ δυνατέ,
ว
δὸς αὐτῷ κατὰ κρανίου ἵνα μὴ περαίρηται,
καγώ σοι τὸν βοῦν τὸν μέγαν προσαγάγω εἰς εὐχήν.
021. This specimen of mixed Greek, which represents two
languages blended into one common stock, or rather one
language embodying, like a composite picture, the features
of two languages, is very characteristic. Taken in connexion
1¹| The roading of the toxt is raúry newýdykev, both against tho motro und the
construction of the word. The forum ἐπεπήδησεν ἐπιπηδῶ) is required both by
the dativo raúry and tho senso. Op. Arist. H. A. 5, 2, 4. Plat. ii, 512 D.
Alchem. 35, 15.
[2] Similar characteristics are discornible in almost all literary productions
dating since the VI of our era. Whether they are based upon the classical
dictionary and grammar, or upon the popular spooch, thoy do not mirror
the actual stato of the language. In the former case, which ombracos well-
nigh all litoraluro down to the X1 and tho groutor part produced since,
the language, looked at from the standpoint of grunmar and vocabulary, is
ossoutinlly Attic, while in its spirit and character it reflects the popular
or colloquial spooch; virtually it may bo litorally paraphrased into modern
Grook. On the other hand, all compositions which profoss to bo founded on
the popular language are infused with a literary vocabulary and phraseology
so considerable that they aro anything but expononts of tho actual spooch. In
12
FOREIGN INVASIONS AND THEIR INFLUENCE. [021-022.
with the Alchemistic texts and some more serious or pretentious
writings of the time, like those of a Callinicos (450 a.d.),
the two Vitae Epiphanii, Malalas (560 A.D.), Leontios of Neapolis
in Cypros (620), Joannes Moschos (620), the Chronicon paschale
(630), Theophanes (810), Constantinos Porphyrogennetos (950),
Theophanes continuatus (960), and others, leave no doubt that
the popular language at this time had very closely approached
that of the present day. This was also to be expected not
only from the general character of the preceding or transitional
literature, but even from that of the New Testament and such
of its sequels as the Didache and the Testamenta XII Patriar-
charum.
022. It has been argued that the political history of the Greek
race during the Middle Ages had sweeping effects on the Greek
language, and that the Slav invasions since the VIIth gave the finishing
stroke to ancient Greek. This part of Greek history, it is alleged, re-
cords the sad fact that Slavs [1, Franks, Venetians, and Turks succeeded
one another in the formerly classical soil of Greece, and have swept
away all features of Greek culture and language left behind by the
Roman sway. Each foreign race, it is assumed, naturally imparted
the stamp of its régime to the language of its Greek bondsmen, so
that the final product of this successive or periodical havoc was the
submerging and extinction of the original language. In other words,
all the above heterogeneous elements were blended together and
produced a bizarre idiom, the 'Romaic' or modern Greek. This line
of reasoning, however, so fair in its semblance, does not stand the
test of critical research. It is founded upon a superficial comparison
of modern Greck glossary with ancient Greek lexicon, that is upon
a parallel of the vocabulary of present popular speech with the arti-
ficial diction of classical literature (05 f. 032), and not, as it should
be, upon a comparison of present Greek grammar with ancient Greek
grammar, the true test in the critical or scientific study of language.
Now such a comparison will easily show that present (popular)
Greek preserves almost faithfully the phonology, in all its essentials
the morphology or accidence, and to a considerable extent the syntax
of ancient Greek (031): three umistakable criteria of its being a lineal
descendant and direct representative of ancient Greek. Were it
a new, that is a distinct or separate language, formed, as erroneously
believed, during the above stormy times, it would inevitably represent
the result or conglomerate of all their heterogeneous influences; it
would be an essentially Franco-Slavonic idiom, as English is Anglo-
Saxou, and thus preserve only such Greek (chiefly lexical) elements
as English does preserve Celtic relics. But the results before us tell
a very different story. They plainly show that, in its character and
fact, it may be safely contendod that, with the exception of the popular songs
and tho opic story Erotocritos of the Crotan poet Cornaros, no literary produc-
tion worthy of note, whother anciont or modern, reflects tho colloquial languago
of the time in its puro and genuino form.
In passing by the invasions previous to this time, of the Goths (396-7), Bul-
garinns (540), and Slavs (581), I neithor ignoro nor disputo these historical facts,
but the prosenco of tho above races in Crook territory was too transient; in point
of fact, those incidents mark moro predatory incursions which could not leavo
lasting or porcoptiblo traces on the Grook languago. This is also proved by tho
fact, that thore is not a single Slav word in modern Groek, which can bo tracod
back to tho prosonco of Slavs in Grocco (1040, 0, c & [2]).
13
022-024.] FOREIGN ELEMENT IN GREEK.
structure, present Greek is still genuine Greek, and, in all its essen-
tials, can be traced back to ancient times. The phenomenon too,
though very remarkable, finds its explanation in the natural law that
the language of the more civilized race remains supreme, whether that
race be the conqueror or the conquered. Now the culture of all foreign
rulers of Greece-Romans, Goths, Slavs, Franks, Venetians, Turks-was
certainly inferior to that of their contemporaneous Grecks, especially
in reference to language. For, to begin with the Romans, they were
a nation of great racial strength and military genius, but of avowedly
inferior culture, as compared with their Greck subjects. Accordingly
they received more from, than they imparted to, the Greek language,
since it was already far richer and more cultivated than theirs (010.025).
They imposed on it only such a vocabulary as was peculiar to their
superiority, or new to the Greeks; that is to say, a vocabulary ex-
pressive, as we have seen, of Roman associations and novelties,
especially official and administrative terms or titles (o11.023).
023. The Roman dominion was succeeded by the Byzantine Empire,
which was an essentially Greek régime. For even the emperors them-
selves, though originally Roman, soon adopted not only the Christian
faith in its original Greek form, but also the Greek language and
nationality (015); nay, they identified themselves so much with the
Greek race and cause, that they even disclaimed all connexion with old
Rome, and carried on against her a constant religious war. Now what
were the characteristic features of this Byzantine period apart from
its devotional spirit (o19)? Religious strifes and military struggles.
The religious hatred which ensued between the Roman or Latin and
Greek Churches (and remains alive to the present time) has kept the
Greek and Latin races, through all times, apart from each other, or
rather, in constant antagonism, so that neither (old) Rome nor her
Romanic descendants (Franks and Venetians) succeeded in converting
Greece to their faith, or in influencing her language in any perceptible
degree. As to the Latinisms-military, judicial, and administrative
terms originally adopted from the Romans- so far as they had
not been Grecized, they were naturally displaced by a corresponding
Byzantine- that is, Greck vocabulary, Greek being the language,
not only of the people and the administration, but of the emperors
themselves, who frequently even aspired to eminence in Greek litera-
ture (015. 028).
b. Mediaeval Period (1000-1450 A.D.).
024. With the opening of the next or Mediaeval period, we are
faced all at once by all those changes which had been effected since
Christian times by a long and gradual but hitherto latent process:
here we witness the complete modernization of the language.
A whole series of compositions, especially metrical, are written in
undisguised 'modern Greek.' This is the more significant as the
carliest of these specimens (Spaneas, Theodoros Prodromos, Michael
Glykâs, etc.) were composed by 'learned' scribes or champions of
ancient Greek, and at a time noted as the period of zealous reaction
in the spirit of classicalism (028). The language of these productions
G.
[1] A striking illustration of this law is afforded by Roman history. From
tho I B.C. to the IV A.D. Rome was the mistress of Gaul and Spain on the one
hand and of Greece on the other, yet with very difforent rosults. For while she
succoodod in completely Romanizing the Gauls and Spaniards, in Greoco she
was Hellenized by her subjects (010).
14
TURKISH RULE AND ITS EFFECTS ON GREEK. [024-027.
then marks not the beginning, as commonly believed, but the com-
pletion of the process which since classical antiquity had been leading
to 'modern Greek.'
025. The Greek terms of administration, titles, and military grades,
introduced by the Byzantine régime, had a peculiar history. In the
capital (Constantinople), and those eastern provinces which escaped all
foreign dominion during the Middle Ages, they remained in full force
and continuous use as late as the XIVth, when the Turks came upon
the stage. In Greece proper, however, the Byzantine terms were
expatriated, and replaced by a new vocabulary of the feudal régime
of the Franks, chiefly bearing on chivalry and gallantry. Still, these
extraneous and alien novelties, which had nothing to do with common
life and thought, never struck root in the character of the Greek
people, so that, through popular unconcern and time, they soon passed
into oblivion. Similar considerations apply to the succeeding dominion
of the Venetians, whose Romanish institutions, like those of their
predecessors, never became popular in Greek provinces. They also
substituted their own (Italian) terminology-military, administrative.
nautical, commercial-for those of the Franks; but dissimilarity of
race, and religious antagonism between Rome and Constantinople, or
between the Roman and Greek Churches, kept the two races apart, or
rather in antagonism, and prevented a free intercourse and influence
of real consequence (023). A striking illustration of the failure which
attended the efforts of Venice-the most civilized and mighty of all
foreign rulers in Greece to assimilate her Greek subjects, may be
found in the present state of Crete. That island remained under the
Venetian dominion, and formed a dependency of admirable organization
-it was called the Kingdom of Crete (Regno di Candia)—for an un-
broken series of more than 450 years (1210-1669) [¹, yet with all that,
hardly any native Cretan Romanist is to be found on the island,
and the Cretan vocabulary of to-day does not preserve fifty words
which can be traced directly back to the Venetian domination [2].
c. Modern Period (1450-1800 a.d.).
026. The subjugation of the Greeks to the Turkish rule had a
peculiar effect on the Greck language. The Turks had no affinity
with either their predecessors (the Byzantines at Constantinople
or the Venetians in Greece) nor with their Greck subjects, but were
totally alien in race, religion, and culture. Their policy also was
directed, not to assimilate their bonsdmen (for which they neither
cared nor had capacity), but mainly to keep down their Christian
subjects, and extort from them the greatest possible material benefit.
The Greek Church was even respected, for fear lest her numerous and
powerful flock might be pushed into the arms of the Western Chris-
tian powers, the formidable foes of the Turk. Hence the Sultans
not only spared, but also recognized, the Patriarch of Constantinople
as the spiritual head' of all Christians in his dominions, so that
the Greek Church exercised a sort of national authority and power.
027. The appearance and establishment of Turkish rule in Europe-
much as it may have proved obnoxious to civilization and the Christian
[1] In Grooco proper the Venetian dominion lasted only half as long,
[2] This is tho moro striking when wo remember that Croto has not since changed
mastors more than once, for it has passed from the Venetians directly to the Turks,
hor presont rulors, who cannot claim a civilization suporior to that of their prede-
cossors.
15
027-028.] ACTUAL STATE OF MODERN GREEK.
cause-looked at from a Greek point of view, appears less fatal than
any other foreign régime might have proved, since, notwithstanding its
barbarous character, it has proved less injurious to the cause of the
Greek Church and language. For, having an aversion to all European
civilization and religion, the Sultans fenced their empire against all
access from Europe, and thus barred out all Western influence on
their subjects. This policy, though obstructing the progress of the
Greeks in proportion to the Western Europeans, had a beneficial effect
on their language, inasmuch as it guarded it against Western (Romanic)
influence. Again, the open contrast and hostility between the Chris-
tian faith of the Greeks and the Mohammedan religion, kept aloof
the Christians who looked for comfort and salvation in their Church.
Be it further remembered that the Greeks of the time, degenerate
though they were, still preserved a degree of culture and education
superior to that of their Mohammedan masters. In point of fact, they
had hardly anything to learn from them, save some novel administrative
terms and a small vocabulary referring to oriental dresses, meals, and
other Asiatic novelties. The grammar and main stock of the Greek
language was not materially affected, since the Greeks, having
been left to themselves, continued to pursue their ancestral voca-
tions as agriculturists, tradesmen, artisans, shepherds, priests, or
monks, and employed the very same implements and means as
they had inherited from time immemorial. At the same time it
was inevitable that this stationary condition, which barred out the
influx of foreign elements into the Greek language, led to another
serious evil: a gross ignorance ensued, and the remains of education,
science, and knowledge, which had been preserved from the previous
times, now came to an end. All the terms then representative
of such cultural notions were forgotten, so that the vocabulary sus-
tained a further depletion and change. On the whole, however, in
grammar and spirit, the language remained purely Greek; and in
lexicon, essentially Greek, for the reasons given above (023).
028. Under these conditions, the Greek of to-day, as spoken by
the people (not the abstract-scholarly and journalistic-Greek, which
is ancient Attic modernized), is a direct survival and development of
classical Attic, impoverished and simplified in a modern spirit, and
under the unavoidable influence of various agencies, mostly internal
and peculiar to Greek history. These may be briefly summed up here.
Classical Attic, having once attained its fullest development, fur-
nishod post-classical antiquity and posterity with a surpassing and
inexhaustible literature, extending into almost every line of thought
and action. This advantage secured for it an absolute supremacy
and authority in the ancient world: it made it first a standard or
national, then an international-though always an abstract language
(05). When the period of Greek sway had gone, instead of vanishing
with the glory of its native soil, it met with exceptionally favourable
chances: no superior or even equal culture followed in Greek lands to
supersede and extinguish it; all races which occupied its classical
territory, however strong and mighty in military genius, proved inferior
in culturo. Hence the Greek language has successfully resisted all
foreign predominance. Looked at also from the internal point of view,
it withstood, more successfully than any other language, the mighty
stream towards rapid change and modernization. This singular pheno-
menon is due to various factors peculiar not only to the nature of the
Greek language (cp. 32° ff. 81. App. i. 9), but also to the Greek history.
16
MODERN GREEK DIALECTS GROUPED.
[028-029.
To begin with, the Atticists (B.C. 200-100 A.D.) were the first to raise the
standard of classicism, and their efforts did not fail to further the cause
of the language, by influencing all subsequent writers. Second in order,
but foremost in importance, is the mighty support which it received
from the Greek Church. Whatever may have been the motives which
actuated her, it is indisputable that her shield proved a veritable
palladium for the language. Another impulse which also furthered
considerably the cause of the language is to be found in the revival
of classicism at the imperial court of the then metropolis (Constanti-
nople), during the reign of the Comneni (1050-1200) and Palaeologoi
(1260-1450). The literary taste and ambition of these emperors, and
their zealous and commanding efforts to enforce, through the adminis-
tration, ancient Greek upon common life, did not fail to refresh
and enliven the language. The fourth and last agency need not be
emphasized: I refer to the regeneration of Greece, which has naturally
led to the revival of the language. In point of fact, the national
zeal displayed by the present Greeks during the last seventy years,
though not always in the right direction, has already made up for
well-nigh all lexical losses sustained by the ancient vocabulary during
the last twenty centuries [1].
028h. It results from the foregoing sketch that the history of ancient
Greek literature is not the history of the ancient Greek language, and
likewise, the history of modern Greek literature is by no means the
history of the modern Greek language. Ancient Greek literature-an
artistic product of psychological action and mental reflexion-begins
for us with Homer and closes conventionally with the end of paganism,
its subsequent continuation being a merely artificial and scholastic
reproduction of ancient models. In the same way the ancient Greek
language begins with the origin of the Greek race and closes virtually
with the present day, or, so far as it differs from present speech, with
the end of paganism. This inter-relation of literature and language
is more pronounced in the case of modern Greek. For the history of
modern Greek literature-i.e. of those compositions which reflect popular
speech- opens as late as the twelfth century A.D., whilst the history of
the modern Greek language is virtually as old as the history of ancient
Greek, or, considered in its distinctly modern form, goes at least as far
back as the origin of Christianity.
029. In its present stage, that is not in its abstract or literary form,
but as actually spoken by the uneducated masses during the last hundred
years, modern Greck consists of a great number of dialects and idioms
which are distinguished from one another principally by lexical
varieties. At the same time their phonology is not quite identical
throughout, but varies more or less according as a locality lies further
south or north. A line drawn along the 38th degree of northern lati-
tude would (according to GHatzidakis 342) divide all dialects into two
general groups: the northern, which would comprise Continental
Greece, Euboca, Epirus, Thessaly, Macedonia, Thrace, Pontos, and the
northern Sporades (Asia Minor); and the southern, which would
consist of the Peloponnese (Achaia excepted), Megara, Aegina, the
Cyclades (except Tenos, partly also Andros), Crete, Chios, Cypros,
It may bo computod that more than 40,000 now words have boon coined
within the last 100 yours either to supplement the reduced stock, or to roplaco
tho foreign elemont. As a mattor of course, a very great number of these new
forinations woro novor naturalized, but after a short life passed into oblivion,
17
С
029-030.] MODERN PHONETICS AND SPELLING.
Rhodes, up to the southern Sporades (Asia Minor), then Southern Italy,
especially Otranto and Bova (Byzantine settlements of the VIIIth Xth),
which last, having been cut off from all other Greek dialects since
the X1th, in some respects preserve the pre-mediaeval morphology
and vocabulary of modern Greek.
030. The fundamental difference between the two groups lies in
the higher or lower stress of accent, inasmuch as the more north we
proceed, the stronger the stress becomes, at the expense of unaccented
syllables, and conversely the more south we return the less the
difference becomes between accented and unaccented syllables.
Accordingly in southern speech all syllables, whether stressed or
unstressed, are well defined and almost isochronous (half long),
whereas in the northern dialects the effect of the strong expiratory or
dynamic accent has been to lessen the stability of the unaccented
parts of the word, whether following (post-tonic) or preceding (pre-
tonic), that is to reduce unaccented vowels to a minimum, often
even to nil. The chief vowel sounds affected by this northern
phonetic principle are i, u, e, o, in that southern unaccented e and o are
reduced to short i and u respectively, and southern i and u frequently
swallowed altogether. The natural consequence of this phonetic
tendency is that, while southern speech, like ancient Greek, is
averse to consonantal accumulations (123), and in case of need even
develops interconsonantal vowel sounds, dropping also any final
consonants except o and v;--the northern dialects generally, but
especially those of Macedonia (e g. Velvendos) show a decided fondness
for consonantal sounds, whether initial, medial, or final, and drop weak
vowels (146 ff.). Thus southern epnuos 'deserted' in northern speech
changes to ἔρ'μους οι έρ'μους, δουλεύω ' work to δελευω οι δ᾽λεύου, σκυλί
dog 'to σκλιοr σκολί, νερό ' water to νερό, παιδί to π'δί, κουνούπι 'gnat
to κνοῦπ', θυμός ' wrath to θμός, λιβάδι ' meadow to λ'βάδ', κοιμοῦμαι
sleep' to κ' μοῦμ', σηκώνω lift to σ' κώνου, πουλῶ < sell to πλῶ, κεφάλι
'head' to 'φάλ', ποτάμι ' river to πουτάμ', κάνετε ‘you do' to κάνιτι,
ἐγὼ ‘Γ' to ἐγώ, ἐμεῖς we' to ἐμεῖς, με 'me' to μί, μή 'don't to μέ,
'I'
Boußis 'dumb' to (B'ßós) 'Bós, σTоunni 'flax' to (or'ni) o'ri.-In other
words, the reduction to a minimum or disappearance of unaccented
iu, and the change of unaccented e o to i u, have altogether trans-
formed the language, the ancient rich sonantism (124) having made
room for a new and odd sonantism, and the ancient poor conso-
nantism (123 f. 169) for a strange succession of consonants, whereas
the declension and conjugation, so richly developed in ancient times,
now appears strangely reduced and almost irrecognizable. Thus
northern (Macedonian) speech changes southern ó λóyos to où λóyous,
τοῦ λόγου to τ' λόγ, τοὺς λόγους to τ'ς λόγος, ὁ κλέφτης ' thief' to οὗ
κλέφτ'ς, θέλω ‘will to θέλου, πουλοῦμεν 'we sell & ἐπουλοῦμεν to
πλοῦμ', πηδάτε 'you jump & ἐπηδάτε τo π' δᾶτ', ἐλέγετε το 'λέγετ', ἐγύ-
ρισε to 'γύρισε, θὰ πουλήσετε ‘you will sell to θὰ πλήσ'τ', θὰ πουλή
σουν they will sell to θὰ πλήσον.—Τον ἄλλ' τ' μέρα κάθουνταν ἡ γυναῖκα
τ' μὶ τοὺ κέν’μα 'ς του κατέφλ' ου μὲ ἄλλ'ς γ' τόν' σ'ς κ' κ' ντοῦσ'ν, for southern
“
π
"
[1] As a matter of course, theso phonotic peculiaritios of northern speech are
modern and have nothing in common with the reputed ancient quantity,' othor-
wise the process would have affoctod the entire Grook phonology and lod to tho
disappearance of all the formerly 'short' vowels. In all likelihood, the pho-
nomenon is traceable to foreign influenco, the moro so as Albanian phonology
shows striking analogies (cp. C Moyer in Gröbor's Grundriss, i. 812 1.).
18
HISTORICAL AND PHONETIC SPELLING. [030-032.
Τὴν ἄλλην (τὴν) ἡμέρα ἐκάθεντο ἡ γυναῖκα του μὲ τὸ κέντημα 'ς τὸ κατώ-
φλιο μὲ ἄλλες γειτόνισσες κ' ἐκέντα.
031. We see then that, from a phonological point of view, the nor-
thern and southern groups, especially towards their extreme boundaries
(e. g. Velvendos in Macedonia-Crete), exhibit a very marked difference
of sonantism/124). It is further evident that the geographical position
of the several localities, their isolation or their vicinity to foreign races,
their political and internal history, have, to a greater or less extent,
conduced to shape the idioms at present spoken in the various Greek
communities. That these various dialects have not the same
historical value needs no special comment. Thus while northern
speech has been influenced by alien (Albanian, etc.) phonology,
the dialects of Pontos and South Italy bear unmistakable traits of
Turkish and Italo-Venetian influence. Now as phonology in every lan-
guage is intimately connected with morphology, it inevitably follows
that the grammar of the above specified (northern, Pontic and Italian)
dialects has been, within Neohellenic times, considerably affected
by extraneous influences. At the same time, a careful examination
of the southern group will show that, for various reasons, these dia-
lects have withstood foreign influence with far greater success than the
northern, and so preserved the ancient phonology, substantially also
morphology and syntax (022), with such (chiefly morphological and syn-
tactical) changes and vicissitudes only as would be inevitable fron
the nature of the case and the culture or spirit of the time. It is
for these reasons that students of the post-classical and subsequent
history of Greek, in looking for information in the present stage of
modern Greek, should direct their attention not so much to the
northern as to the southern group of Neohellenie dialects.
[032. As an appendix to this introduction, it may be well to
remind young students of a fundamental error often committed by
investigators of modern Greek. These Neo-grecists are apt to rashly
draw an unqualified parallel between classical Greek, in its artistic
as well as artificial form, taught through the Attic grammar (05-06),
and present popular speech, especially northern. And the evil is
aggra-
vated by the practice of representing present popular speech in its
phonetic spelling, while retaining etymological or historical orthography
for ancient Greek (25°). The natural consequence of this compari-
son is the creation of such a wide chasm between classical and
modern Greek as to render the former almost irrecognizable in the
latter. This method, however, is utterly misplaced and misleading.
A phonetic parallelism between the ancient Greek of the texts and
the popular speech of to-day would be justified only under the three
following assumptions: that the pronunciation of classical Greek
(V-IVth B.C.) had been incontrovertibly the Erasmian; that the ancient
Hellens wrote and spoke the same language, that is they used the
same vocabulary and grammar whether they wrote or spoke; and
above all that they followed the principle of phonetic spelling. Now
as these premises can never be established, to contend that classical
θεός (allegedly Theos) has degenerated to θεός, παλαιός (παλαιός) to
παλιός, δίκαιος (δίκαιος) to δίκλος oι δίκος, ἡ γλυκεία and τὰ γλυκέα to 3λυκιά,
καὶ ἂν τo καὶ ἄν, ὁποῖος (1οποίος) to ὄπχιος οι πχος, μία to μνιά, ἀλλοίως
to adiós, etc. is not only to disregard ancient phonology-- that is the
characteristic phenomenon of synalocphe (synizesis, contraction, crasis,
elision, etc.), so common even in classical compositions,—but to ignore
the very physiology and actual structure of language. No doubt
19
C 2
032-033.] HISTORICAL AND PHONETIC SPELLING.
modern popular Greek is the form to be considered in an historical
and critical study of the Greek language, but to apply historical
orthography to the ancient period and phonetic spelling to the
modern, introducing even novel and alien symbols into ordinary
texts, is to forget the elementary fact that such a parallelism would
distort any language, whether we should compare two different ages
of it or the written and spoken forms of the same period. Take as
instances the following specimens of modern French, German, and
English, as given phonetically by HSweet (Primer of Phonetics, pp.
92, 100, and 81 f.).
French.
parle vu fransæ? on p. gaŋ se zyst ase pur ma fæær koŋ-
praandrh. il loe parl kuraman. il ekri 1 fransa kom sa proprh laang.
kæl œær æt il? il æ trwez œœr e dmi. save vu si Bit war on dega
sone? vule vuz ataundr on cŋstaŋ ?
Parloz-vous français? Un pou. J'en sais juste assoz pour mo faire com-
prendro. Il le parle courammont. Il écrit le français comme sa propre langue.
Quelle houre est-il ? Il ost trois heures ot demie. Savez-vous si huit houros ont
déjà sonnó? Voulez-vous attendre un instant?
German.
:00 zeestu, folor moontufain! -tsum ;letstn :maal auf mainə
pain, :deen :ię :zoo 'mançə mitornaxt -an diizm pult herange:vaxt !
dann :yyber byyçǝrn -unt pa piir, :tryyp zeeljer froynt! erfiinst :duu
:miir. ax, kont -ig :dox -auf ;bergoshoon -in :dainom liibn ligto
geen, -um bergǝshoǝlə -mit gaistorn fvecbm, -auf ;viizn -in :dainom
demer veebn, fon alom ;visnskvalm ent laadn -in dainom tau
go zunt -mię baadn.
♥
O sähst du, vollor Mondenschein ! zum letztenmal auf meine Poin, den ich
so manche Mitternacht an diosom Pult borangewacht! dann übor Büchern und
Papior, trübsol'gor Freund! orschionst du mir. Ach könnt' ich doch auf
Borgoshöh'n in deinem liobon Lichto gohn, um Bergoshöhle mit Geistern schwo-
bon, auf Wieson in deinem Dimmer woben, von allem Wissonsqualm entladen,
iu deinem Thau gesund mich baden !
English.
pijpl juws -to pink-i oop -woz -ə :kaind -ov 'flæt keik', -wið -də
sij -ol raund -it'; -bot -wij 'nou 'nau -Xot -its rioli ;raund', :laik -ə
bɔl' not 'kwait :raund', -bot -o litl flætnd', :laik -on ‘oring'.
People used to think the earth was a kind of flat enko, with tho sen all round
it; but we know now that it is roully round, like a ball-not quite round, but
a little flattoned, like an orango,
-on inglismən -woz wens trævlig -in tfaino' -huw 'kudnt :spijk
tfai nijz'. wen dei' -hij -woz dainiŋ -ot sem ijtiŊ:haus', -on-o
weit brot -im -o mijt pai'. -oz -ij -wəz 'veri heŋgri', -hij ‘et -it
ep', -on pot -it veri gud', -bot -ij kudnt meik aut' whot -it -woz
'mneid -ov'. -sou when weito :keim -to :klior o'wei', -hij 'pointid
-oti emti pai:dif', -on 'kwakt -laik -o 'dak'. So weitor -ot wans
:fuk -iz hed', on baakt -laik -o 'dog'. -on 'sou -Xi :iŋgliſmon 'njuw
-ijd -biju ‘dainiŋ -on 'dogzflef'.
033. It is therefore absolutely unscholarly, or arbitrary and mis-
leading, to contrast modern Greek (especially northern) in its phonetic.
spelling, with ancient Greek (especially artistic) in its historical
orthography before we have gained a full insight into the actual
phonology and grammatical structure of classical and subsequent
ancient Greek. To contribute something in that direction is one
of the primary objects of the present work.]
20
PART FIRST.
PHONOLOGY.
I. PHONETIC SYMBOLS AND THEIR
SOUNDS.
A. SCRIPT (ALPHABET).
SHORT HISTORY OF THE GREEK LETTERS.
1. ALTHOUGH there is every probability that, as far back as the
earlier part of the XVIth or XVth B.C., the then inhabitants of
Greece were acquainted with an aboriginal system, however crude,
of pictographic or even alphabetic writing (AJEvans in Jour. Hell.
Stud. xiv. 270-372), archaeology and classical scholarship are generally
agreed that the Greek alphabet handed down to us was received from
the Phoenicians, most probably before the XIIth B.C. This is borne
out not only by tradition (5), but also by the significant fact that
as regards form, name, and order, the two alphabets show a striking
correspondence.
2. (1) 'aleph' (ox), A pa; (2) 4 'beth' (house), Bira ;
₫
(3) 'gimel' (camel), 7 yáppa; (4) Adaleth' (door), A Seλra; (5)
'he' (window), «i (? cp. 9º; later è fiλóv); (6) & 'vau' (nail),
Ý
4 diyaµµa; (7) ‡ ‘zayin' (?), ‡ (îta; [(8) ¦‘cheth' (fence), ¦ ĥra ?] ;
(9)teth' (serpent ?), Onra; (10) 'yod' (hand), ira; (11)
Y 'kaph' (palm), ✈ káππа; (12) ► ‘lamed' (ox-goad), ▼ λdáßda;
(13) 'mem' (water), M µû (µ☎); (14) ↳ ‘nun' (fish), И vù; [(15) ‡
samekh' (prop?), ‡ §û]; (16) 0 ‘ayin' (eyc), O oʊ (? cp. 9º; later ő, still
later ồ pkpót); (7) 2‘pe’(month), 1 méi (Tê); [(18) N ‘tsale
Mσavni]; (19) 'goph' (ape ?), O KÓTTа (Q Latin); (20) 4 'resh
(head), ¶ pô; (21) W'shin' (tooth), } oiypa; (22) + 'tau' (cross),
Τ ταῦ.
:
C.
}
3. These Phoenician symbols are traceable in the oldest Greek in-
scriptions recovered up to the present time, which go as far back as the
middle of the VIIth B. C. There is, however, one important difference
between the Phoenician and the Greck systems. While the former
has no signs for vowels, and a great variety of aspirate and sibilant
consonants, the latter, even in its earliest specimens found, shows an
already fully developed vowel-system, and contents itself with one
sibilant and one aspirate representative respectively. Thus the Greeks
probably evolved out of the Phoenician consonants aleph, he, yod,
ayin, the vowels a eto, and moreover invented v (5), as a twenty-third
letter. On the other hand, the Phoenician symbols, P, P, E, fell into
desuctude as letters (11) and remained only as numeral ciphers,
namely ran or 4, or otherwise diyamma F (i. c. double gamma, now
shaped Q)=6; koppa O or Q (now shaped )=90; and tsade or
san M (now shaped or and since M miscalled oavπî from N σår
21
3-4.]
GREEK LETTERS AND ALPHABETS.
Ө
πî, i.e. like a π) = 900; so too which lingered the longest in the
form of H (as a rough breathing ?) was retained in A as cipher for 100
(cp. 11.616). Again for the sounds x 6 the Greeks at first resorted
to the digraphs KB TE MB (Thera, Melos), then gradually devised
their monoliteral successors XO respectively (6. 12).
4. Together with the letters, the Greeks adopted from the Phoe-
nicians also the retrograde mode of writing from right to left. Ac-
cordingly the earliest Greek characters look to the left. Somewhat
later the direction is Bovor pondov (plough-wise), that is to say the
lines proceed alternately from right to left, and from left to right.
But before the close of the VII B.C. the practice of writing all the
lines from left to right had been initiated. The Greek characters
therefore appear, in this archaic period, looking now to the left
and now to the right, according to the direction of writing.
C.
C.
4. The absence of all engraved monuments and inscriptional records
in Greece from the XIII to VIIIth B. c. does not necessarily imply that
the Greeks were unfamiliar with the art of writing. This absence is the
natural concomitant of the then tribul and orratic condition of the Greeks,
a condition quickened first by the Doric invasion, then by the colonial
dispersion which kept the Greek racos in continuous stir. In view of
this state of things, which rendered uncertain the nearest future of every
community [', the Greeks of this period, like their trade-pursuing prede-
cessors, the Phoenicians, had neither opportunity nor desire to record
on stone their public or private affairs. Nevertheless, the practice of the
art of writing among the Greeks through the above tribal poriod is suffi-
ciently borne out by the following data.
(1) Tho presence of the Ilomeric poems, and the high ago attributed to
them by all antiquity.
(2) The very frequent occurrence in them of metrical position between two
consecutive words-with frequent interpunctuation-which presupposes
the use of the eye, and cannot be well explained on the phonotic principle.
(3) The direct mention in the Iliad of writing (Z 168 f.): ëπоpev d'őɣe
CĤMata Ayrpå | гpáwac én tinaki птуктР. (Сp. ib. 176. 178. H 175.187.189.)
(4)
The existence of schools in various Grock townships during, if not
prior to, the VIIth B. c. (Aelian V. II. 7, 15), and the impossibility of school
instruction without written texts.
(5) The presence, ovon in the earliest Grook inscriptions, of the non-
Phoenician characters v o x, which are Greek inventions, falling within
the tribal period, at any rate previous to tho XIIIth B.O.
C.
(6) The testimony of Herodotos to the effect that he saw at Thebes
a Greek inscription dating from romote antiquity-Hdt. 5, 59 Tаûτα
raûra
ἡλικίην εἴη ἂν κατὰ Λάϊον τὸν Λαβδάκου (about the XIII B.c., according
to the legendary chronology; at any rato considerably earlier than tho
Trojan war).
C.
(7) Tho express montion, in an Elian inscription of the VIIth B. C.
(ESRoberts 365), of an anciently written law (IGA 10. 111) rà []ícara
ка[т] то графос тархаîон єє ка.
T
Of this tribal condition the following vivid sketch is givon by Thucydides
in ch. 1. 2 : φαίνεται ἡ νῦν Ἑλλὰς καλουμένη οὐ πάλαι βεβαίως οἰκουμένη, ἀλλὰ
μεταναστάσεις τε οὖσαι τὰ πρότερα καὶ ῥᾳδίως ἕκαστοι τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀπολείποντες
βιαζόμενοι ὑπό τινων ἀεὶ πλειόνων. τῆς γὰρ ἐμπορίας οὐκ οὔσης, οὐδ᾽ ἐπιμιγνύντες
ἀδεῶς ἀλλήλοις οὔτε κατὰ γῆν οὔτε διὰ θαλάσσης, νεμόμενοί τε τὰ αὑτῶν ἕκαστοι
ὅσον ἀποζῆν καὶ περιουσίαν χρημάτων οὐκ ἔχοντες οὐδὲ γῆν φυτεύοντες, ἄδηλον
ἂν ὁπότε τις ἐπελθὼν (καὶ ἀτειχίστων ἅμα ὄντων) ἄλλος ἀφαιρήσεται, τῆς τε καθ'
ἡμέραν ἀναγκαίου τροφῆς πανταχοῦ ἂν ἡγούμενοι ἐπικρατεῖν οὐ χαλεπῶς ἀπανί-
σταντο, καὶ δι' αὐτὸ οὔτε μεγέθει πόλεων ἴσχυον οὔτε τῇ ἄλλῃ παρασκευῇ.
22
EUCLEIDIAN SPELLING REFORM.
[4–6.
(8) The presence in the VIIth B. C. (in Crete, Thera, Melos, Attica, etc.)
of public and private inscriptions, nay even long codes (Gortyn law of
12 columns with about 12000 letters), and other public ordinances, all
of which presuppose a reading public.
5. The earliest Greek inscriptions show that, in its primitive stage,
the Greek alphabet was incomplete and deficient, very often also
incongruous. This circumstance plainly indicates that the Phoenician
alphabet found its way into the various Greek communities not all at
once, but by degrees, at various intervals, and by various private
channels. This is moreover confirmed by the fact that several
symbols crept into the various localities in different forms and with
different phonetic values, and explains the phenomenon that the
system of earlier inscriptions exhibits a variety of local or 'epichoric'
alphabets (10). In their archaic stage these epichoric alphabets
have one common feature among them, that they all show the Phoe-
nician letters from a to 7, and moreover u as a Greek addition (3).
But in the case of X, they exhibit several peculiarities, in
that, so far as they do not ignore these symbols altogether (as does
Melos, Thera, Crete), they use them in a different order and phonetic
value, viz. x or x, a confusion which apparently arose from
the then current mode of reading either from the left or from the
right (4). It is this inverse order and phonetic difference that led
archaeologists to divide the Greek alphabets (apart from those of
Melos, Thera, Crete) into two broad groups: an eastern (Ionian),
which comprises Asia Minor, the islands of the Aegean Sea, the Bos-
phoros, Macedonia, the Ionian islands, then Corinth, Megara, Argos;
and a western, which comprises middle Greece (except Attica),
Euboea, Thessaly, the Peloponnesos, and Italy (including Rome,
which received her alphabet from the Chalcidian colonies in Italy
whereas Attica occupies an intermediate place. The eastern group
uses phonetically X as x, y as y, and the Phoenician samekh
as ; the western employs X as έ, as x, and either ignores or
expresses its sound by a new symbol . Again, the Attic alphabet,
like the eastern group, uses and X as and x, but shows no έ nor
, these sounds being expressed by the digraphs XX and 2 (6. 12).
6. The Attic alphabet, which is represented chiefly by Athens, shows,
in its archaic stage, this deficiency as compared with the eastern or
Ionian group, that it lacks the symbols and o, their place being
supplied by E (which stood both fore and ) and O (which stood both
for o and w) respectively, and the consonants έ and y, their place being
supplied-since the time when KH and PH had been replaced by the
simple X and (3)-by the digraphs X (K) and 2 (112) respectively (5).
4
ÞE
According to ancient tradition recorded by Horodotos (5, 58 f., so too Plut.
ii. 738 ) and Diodoros (3, 66 f. quoting Dionysios of Milotos; thon 5, 74, 1), it
was importod first to Bocotia (W Larfeld 501, suggests Delphi) through the Tyrian
Cadmos (hence in Hdt. 5, 58 Kadµýia or Þoivikýia ypáµμaтa, op. also CIG 3044
ds àv
ὃς ἂν Φοινικήια εκκύψει sc. γράμματα. Τυς. Apion. 1, 2.
Jos.
Cloru. A. tr. 1, 306.
Bokk. An. 782, 783, 20. Hesych. s. v. Þoiviniois ypáµµaơi), and thence it spread all
ovor Greece. Victorin. vi. (HKoil), 23, 14; 196, 13. Audax 325, 1. Pliny N. H.
7, 56 (57), 191 Cp. also Tac. Ann. 9, 14.—Soo also Bekk. An. 781 ff.
[2] Thus ▷ gonorally, but in Molos B; C in Delos and Elis = ẞ, but in
Rhodos, Mogara, Phocis, olc. =y, and in Crotoπ; generally, but in Paros
=λ; Bor gonorally - ß, but in Corinth and Corcyrn = e or ŋ ; or generally
☐
=h, but in Elis w; so in Turent = h, but in Rhodes=λ; X gonorally = X, but
in Cyreno, etc. ≈έ; so + in Euboou and Bocotia -- §.
23
6-9.] FORMS OF SCRIPT-TABLE OF LETTERS.
It was only in the latter part of the fifth century B.C. that these
symbols found their way into the ordinary composition, and only in the
year 403 B.C., during the archonship of Eucleides, that they were
officially admitted into the received or Attic alphabet (27 ff.). Conse-
quently all literary productions written prior to the middle of the
Vth B. C. must have been composed in the old Attic alphabet, that
is without η, ω (also without ξ, ψ); they must have shown-and so
inscriptions actually do show-E wherever we are now wont to read
either e orn, in most cases also e; and O wherever we are now
wont to read either o or w, in most cases also oυ (12).
7. As a matter of fact, previous to and during the adoption of the
above (scholastic) orthography at Athens:
so that :-
ΒΟΛΕ
ΕΥΤΥΧΕΣ
E stood for e, η, ει; and O for o, ω, ου ;
stood for βολή, βουλή, βούλει (cp. Pl. Crat. 420 €).
ΛΟΓΟΣ, -ΟΝ
ΔΟΛΟΝ
ΕΛΘΟΜΕΝ
ΠΡΟΧΟΝ
>>
""
""
εὐτυχές, εὐτυχεῖς (σύ, οί), εὐτυχής, (εὐτυχῇς),
ηὐτύχεις.
λόγος, λόγους, -ον, λόγων.
δόλον, δοῦλον, δόλων, δούλων, δουλοῦν.
ἤλθομεν, ἔλθωμεν.
πρόχουν (τὴν), πρόχων (τῶν), προύχον (προέχον,
προείχον), προύχων (προέχων).
8. Assuming then that an Attic scribe had to write down the following
sentenco: τοῦτο μηχανώμενος ὅπως ἂν ἄρξῃ ἐκβάλλων ἄλλους ψήφῳ δήμου [2],
he would have probably written in the 'scriptura continua' (25°. 79) and
spelt :
(a) Provious to and during the VIIIth B.o.:
WWOLATA WEA WAWO1EWOMAMCW/1MC+o+*]
EKBALONSEWE˜BO?ARMO]
(b) During the VIth B.C.:
*ΤΟΤΟΜΕΧΑΝΟΜΕΝΟΣ ΟΠΟΣ ΑΝΑΡΧΣΕΙΑΛΟΣΕΚ
ΟΜΕΔΙΟΦΕΣΦΝΟΛΑΒ
(c) During tho V B.o.:
*ΤΟΤΟΜΕΧΑΝΟΜΕΝΟΣΟΠΟΣΑΝΑΡΧΣΕΙ ΑΛΛΟΥΣ
ΕΚΒΑΛΟΝΦΣΕΦΟΙ ΔΕΜΟ.
(d) During tho IV B.O.:
C.
*ΤΟΥΤΟΜΗΧΑΝΩΜΕΝΟΣΟΠΩΣ ΑΝΑΡΞΗ ΑΛΛΟΥΣΕΚ
ΒΑΛΛΩΝ ΨΗΦΩΙ ΔΗΜΟΥ
SYNOPTICAL Table of THE LETTERS.
9. Since the time of the Eucleidian spelling reform (6) the
Greek alphabet (ὁ or ἡ ἀλφάβητος from ἄλφα βητα) has shown
twenty-four lettors. Their form, as printed in books, is con-
ventional and dates from the middle ages (cp. 8).
[] For the history of this orthographic chango soo App. ii. 12 [2].
[2] The sentence is not ultogothor classical (though ep. Pl. Phaedr. 239 n), but
may conveniently serve to give a rough idea of the striking changos which took
place during the pre-Euclidian and archaic stages in the case of the most
characteristic symbols.
24
FORM AND TABLE OF LETTERS.
[9.
Primitive.
Classical Attic,
Vth IVth B.C.
Uncials,
Ith A.D.
CHARACTERS.
Ancient.
NAME.
Modern.
Minuscules,
since IXth A.D,
Capitals.
Minuscules.
PRONUNCIATION.
(see 24-69.)
13
xx
ă
Traditional and
in most points
classical.
Erasmian,
adopted since
1500 A.D.
手
​Ө
Σ Ζ
x = < SHO
A
W
1
A
B B
Λ Γ ୮
AAA
гопян
4
EE
(YF)
I
H
Δ
€
NI O
Ө
ω
と​と
​ny
a
A
α
αλφα
а
B
B
В
βήτα
V
b
୮,
Γ
γ
γάμμα
gh, i
g
Δ
б
δέλτα
th()
E
€
L N
F
εἶ, ἔ (ψιλόν)
βαῦ, δίγαμμα | lost
ζήτα
e
70
10
d
ĕ
lost
Z
ts
H
η
ἦτα
i
ē
Өө
Ө
θῆτα
th (p)
t
LA
КК
VA
M
N
I
I
L
ίωτα (2)
i
ī, i
K
H
K
K
κάππα
k, k
k
Λ 入
​λ
Λ
λ
λά(μ)βδα
1
}
王​三
​Ө
า
(8)
Σ ZIN OF
им
M
μ
μύ
11
m
γν
N
ע
vû
n
n
Ž E
0
مله
Śû, ä
ks
ks
0
οὖ, ὦ (μικρόν)
0
C
πω
II
π
9
πει (πι)
κόππα
p
ין
lost
lost
1 PRP
PRP P
др
W
3+
C
୮
T T
T
V
Y V
Y
ບ
RN MU
P
P
ῥω
r
1
Σ
σ
σίγμα (σάν)
0
S
T
T
ταῦ
t
t
ԴՐ V 8 (ψιλόν)
i
u, ü
M
丬
​ΦΦ Φ q Φ
X X
Y Y
Ω
Ө
frεî (pi)
f
f
नै+ 3
✈ 3
X
X Xeî (xî)
kh, ch
ch
Vrei (vi)
րտ
ps
Ω
W
ὦ (μέγα)
0
10
9b-13.] NAMES OF LETTERS-PRE-EUCLEIDIAN SYMBOLS.
9b. All twenty-four letters (which are conceived as indeclinable
neuters) still survive in N with the sounds assigned to them in the
last but one column. (For some dialectal discrepancies see 24°.)
9. The ancient names of e o v w are eî oû û & respectively [¹.
â
The terms
ề Yɩλdv (Zosimos 4, 13) and d yıλdy mean simple (i.e. monoliteral) è and ~, in
contradistinction to the biliteral homophones avi, El, ol. The latter names
originated during G in the need of facilitating orthography when dictating to
pupils and MS copiors. For similar reasons & was called & μupov, i. e. small o,
as distinguished from & µéya, i.e. large w. On the same principle N often
designatos i ag 7 μικρὸν (ἴμικρον), and n as ἢ μεγάλο". (For a different view
see KEASchmidt 48-75.) On the numes el and oû for è and & see App. ii. 10.
as
9d. Also the ancient names of the letters are still preserved in N, but those
ending in -a are now often conceived as feminines (cp. 261. 338), as : Tò yáμpa
(348. 369), τὸ ἔψιλο" (so !) τὸ μῦ, νῦ, ξῦ οι ξεῖ, τὸ ὄμικρο”, τὸ πεῖ, ῥῶ, τὸ σίγμα
(348. 369), τὸ τᾶ (not τα i. o. ταf 219), τὸ ὕψιλον, τὸ φεῖ, χεῖ, ψεῖ, τὸ ὦ μεγάλο,
but τὸ & ἡ ἄλιφα (131) τὸ & Η βῆτα, τὸ & ἡ δέλιτα (131), τὸ & Η ζῆτα, τὸ & Η ἦτα,
θῆτα, ἰῶτα, κάππα, λάβδα (247 f.).-Note further that the initial syllable alone
(probably suggested by To µû, vû, ¿eî etc.) is also popular as an indeclinable
neuter, as : το ᾶ, τὸ βῆ, γᾶ, δέ, ἔ, ζῆ, θῆ, κᾶ, λᾶ, σι.
C
C
10. The four columns figuring as ancient in the preceding page, give
the average form of characters as found in the inscriptions and MSS.
However, many of these characters exhibit a variety of forms accord
ing to the locality and time. (5 & [2].)
11. In the above list of letters two symbols have been inserted and
marked as 'lost': vau (Bav) or from its shape F digamma (Siyaµµa,
i. e. double gamma, which might possibly represent a relic of a pre-
Phoenician indigenous system of writing; cp. 1), then koppa (9).
Both disappeared in the earlier stage of the language (3), but left
some traces in a few dialects. Besides F and Q, another symboli
(yod or jod) is assumed for the phonetic development of the 2-sound.
in primitive Greek, but as it has left behind no direct traces, its
former existence is simply deduced from cognate fields and kindred
languages (cp. 29 f. 123. 209 ft.).-None of these lost signs lived to
play a part in the classical' and subsequent history of the language,
and if they are considered in modern grammars, it is because they afford
a theoretical explanation to a number of grammatical phenomena.
12. Previous to the Vth B.C. most of the Greek communities had
no complete alphabet, but used to represent several sounds by one
and the same symbol (6). Thus in the carly Attic alphabet, the
sound of ene was represented by simple E; that of o w ov by O;
primordially by IIH, later by ; x primordially by KH, later by
X; ¿ by KƐ (XE); √ by 112 (2); also apparently by TH. Accord-
ingly in archaic Attic the symbol H performed two distinct functions:
on the one hand, it stood for the aspiration h, and on the other,
represented the second constituent of x 0, then symbolized by the
digraphs IH KH TII respectively (3. 6). This expedient was to
some extent resorted to in several localities even after the general
reception of the complete (Ionic) alphabet in 403 B. C. (6. 23).
13. Final sigma has since M assumed the 'conventional '
form s, as : σεισμός.
ő ô
[1] In Plato's time still ἔ γ 3 &: (Crat. 393 D) τῶν στοιχείων οἶσθα ὅτι ὀνόματα
λέγομεν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ αὐτὰ τὰ στοιχεῖα πλὴν τεσσάρων, τοῦ € καὶ τοῦ γ καὶ τοῦ ο
καὶ τοῦ ω. But also rd as CIA iv. 4321 before 340 B.C. (Cp. 2900 [2].)
26
LETTERS CLASSIFIED_VOWELS.
[14-18.
14. In a compound word, the modern form of final s is sometimes
used, at the instance of HStephanus (then FWolf), at the end of a con-
stituent, as huςτυχής, προςφέρω.
15. Capital letters are now conventionally used: (1) after a full
stop; (2) at the beginning of a quotation; (3) as initials in
proper names (and their adjectives). (8.)
CLASSIFICATION OF LETTERS.
€
16. Of the twenty-four Greek letters seven (a eni o vw)
are vowels (þwvýevra) and the remaining seventeen consonants
(σύμφωνα).
16. From its remotest traceable period down to the closing decades of
the Vth B.C., the Attic alphabet shows only five vowel symbols: a e O V,
which evidently represent (for the earlier antiquity at least) the five
normal sounds a e i o u, corresponding to the Latin and N vowel-system.
This paucity of vowel sounds !' finds its physiological explanation in the
fact that, unlike most modern languages, especially English and German,
Greek was a polysyllabic and inflectional language, and thus could confer
upon its lengthy words a distinct individuality and perspicuity without
resorting to the phonetic differentiation, that is to the development of the
rich and variegated qualitative and quantitative phonology observable in
the monosyllabic and uninflectional languages.
16º. As a polysyllabic and essentially inflectional language, N preserves
the five vowel sounds a e io u of early Greek (16". 124; cp. 35b & 144).
VOWELS.
17. The seven vowels are traditionally classified and called
respectively:
as
e, o short (ẞpayéa);
η, ω long (μακρά) ;
a, i, v variable (also doubtful, common, díxpova, even vypá,
ȧupißola, peraßoλiká, Sext. adv. gram. 621, 19; cf. also
Schol. Dion. Thr. in Bekk. An. 800 f.). (88.)
n
17. The symbols ŋ and, in numerous cases also, originated at school
mere compensatory marks, to represent positional or 'thetic '
€ and o.
As time went on, however, their systematical application
caused them to be considered as regularly long vowels (28 f.). Hence
the term 'long' is to be taken not phonetically but technically (metri-
cally and grammatically), in that ŋ, w, ā, ī, v, as well as the diphthongs
(20), represent a length due to the effect either of antectasis or of the
ictus (29). Again, any vowel not long in this sense is conventionally
called 'short. See 86 ff. and App. ii. 9-15.
18. In certain combinations, the vowels and v act as consonants
(32", 3. 51. 78b). This phonetic by-function, howover, nevor caused thom
Honco Soxtus' just roproach to tho grammarians (adv. granı. 625, 14):
τυφλώττουσιν οὖν οἱ γραμματικοὶ καὶ τὸ ἀκόλουθον αὑτοῖς οὐ συνορῶσι λέγοντες
ἑπτὰ φωνάεντα τυγχάνειν, πέντε μόνων ὄντων προς ΤΗΝ ΦΥΣΙΝ Gp 29 [2]).
As to modern languagos, in his Primor (p. 20 f.) HSweet onumerates thirty-six
elementary vowol-sounds, eighteen of which are prosent in English alone.
[2] Comparo Priscinu 1, 3, 7, 10: 'vocales apud Latinos omnos sunt ancipitos vel
liquidao, hoc ost quao facilo modo produci modo corripi possunt: sicut etiam
apud antiquissimos erant Graocorum anto inventionem et æ, quibus inventis,
e ot o, quao anto ancipitos orunt, romanserunt porpotuo brovos.'
27
18-19b.]
DIPHTHONGS SYLLABLE.
to be reckoned among the consonants also, the theorists being guided by
the prevalent (vocalic) character of the symbols in question (19). In the
same way the Roman grammarians, copying their Greek masters, in-
variably classed I and V among the vowels, notwithstanding the fact
that these letters very frequently acted as consonants j and v (19b. 51).
[As is well known, the consonantal forms j and v date only since M.]
DIPHTHONGS (30).
η
19. Two vowel-sounds fused into one make a diphthong
(Síployyos). In Greek such diphthongs arise only when one
of the vowels a e o or their post-Eucleidian associates
and o
(all of which are styled prepositive vowels, þwvýevta проTAKTIKÁ)
is followed by or v (called postpositive vowels, 4. ÝпOTAKTIKÁ);
further the combination of the two postpositives v. (App. ii.
2, d.) And according as the postpositive vowel is or is not
sounded, the diphthongs are called proper (kúpia) or spurious
(KаTaxρηOTIKαί, 20c) and written as follows:-
a. Proper diphthongs: au (ae 19º) et
αυ
b. Spurious diphthongs: a
し
​LE
οι
ευ ου ην
ท @ vɩ (for y).
บ
ωυ
19ª. In early Greek the diphthong au was written de, and the
change of ae to a seems to have been suggested by the analogy of et,
o, uɩ, where ɩ is established as the only postpositive vowel (20"). That
the case is so appears :-(a) from the present pronunciation of a as e,
which, considering the peculiar principles of Greek phonology (32 ff.),
could not have resulted from a+1; (b) from Latin ae, the exact and
regular equivalent of a; (c) from the express testimony of ancient
authorities, as Terent. Scaurus, 16, 10 (HKeil, vii): ‘antiqui quoque
Graecorum hanc syllabam (ai) per ae (i.e. ae) scripsisse traduntur';
(d) from the frequent occurrence of ae for at in early Corinthian,
Boeotian, and even Attic inscriptions, as: 'AE' Opa (Attica) PKretschmer
126. Λιθων, ᾿ΑθανΛεία, Περιϊόθεν (Corinth), ib. 33 f. Λεσχώνδας,
ΛαρισΛΕ'ων, ΛυσανίΛΕ, ᾿ΑβΑΕόδωρος, ᾿ΑμεινοκλείΑΕ, ΠολυμίδΛΕ, etc.
GMeyer § 113. FBlass Pron. 56 f. ESRoberts 222 f. OHoffmann ii.
368-It follows on the one hand that in the spurious diphthong a
the subscript is hysterogeneous and spurious, and on the other that
the casual occurrence in earlier Latin of ai for ae does not actually
represent the old spelling, as commonly held, but rather points to an
attempt to imitate the Greck fashion of replacing ae by al.
Mar.
Victor. 14, 1 (HKeil, vi): 'ae syllabam quidam more Graecorum per
ai scribunt.' `(For another imitation see 53.)
し
​19. Properly or historically speaking, the term 'diphthong' originated in the
combination Sípooyyos ovλλaßý, and thus meant a vowel-pair forming one
syllable. The question, therefore, as to what the ancient Greeks moant by
a diphthong, considored from a phonetic point of view (that is whether it
consisted of two successive but distinct vowel sounds or of two successivo vowels
blended into one simple sound), is inseparable from the definition of a ‘syllable
by the ancients, as well as from the actual pronunciation of such diphthong" '1
antiquity. While referring the latter point to the section of pronunciation
>
It is the influence of this ae that seems to account for the few solitary
cuses of of for οι : Χοερίλος ᾿Αθήν. iv. 213 ; Προεσος, Μοέριχος, Κοέρανος, Δαμαε
νέτος, Διωνύσος, Πολυαράτος, Meyer" § 116. To usgumo horo, on the strong th
of Latin oe, that ou also was originally spelt oe, would bo unsafo considering that
Latin systematically shows e postpositivo for Greek postpositivo. (Cp. 53.)
28
DIPHTHONGS SUBSCRIPT.
19b-20c.
(30 ff.), we find that the ancients give a diphthong a monophthongal value, that
is a simple sound. [Arist.] Poet. 20 σvλλaßý kσтi pwvn άonμos (read donμos,
i. e. μονόσημος [1]), σύνθετος ἐξ ἀφώνου καὶ φωνὴν ἔχοντος. Dion. Thr. in Bekk.
Αn. ii. 632 συλλαβή ἐστι κυρίως σύλληψις συμφώνου (v. 1. συμφώνων) μετὰ φωνής
εντος ἢ φωνηέντων, οἷον κάρ, Boς· καταχρηστικῶς δὲ καὶ ἡ ἐξ ἑνὸς φωνήεντος,
olov a, H.
Schol. Dion. Thr. ib. 819 συλλαβή ἐστι σύλληψις συμφώνων μετὰ
φωνήεντος ἢ φωνηέντων ὑφ᾽ ἕνα τόνον καὶ ἓν πνεῦμα ἀδικτάτως ἀγομένη. That
this was actually the received view among ancient professional grammarians,
appears also from its literal adaptation to Latin: Priscian i. 44 (HKeil) 'syllaba
est comprehensio literarum conscquens sub uno accentu et uno spiritu prolata;
abusive tamen ctiam singularum vocalium sonos syllabas nominamus. possumus
tamen et sic definire syllabam : syllaba est vox literalis quae sub uno accentu et
uno spiritu indistanter profertur.' Though wo have no earlier technical definition
of the syllable than that of Aristotle given above, the term ovλλaß occurs
from Aeschylos downwards. Aesch. Sept. 468 [pammáτwn èv ZyλλaВaîc, PL
Crut. 390 E và FPAMMATA tải vào cYAAaBác, so ib. 424 B. Thouet. 203 A ai pèv
γλλαβαὶ λόγον ἔχουσι τὰ δὲ στοιχεῖα ἄλογα. ib. 6.
So Dom. 24, 70.
Aeschin.
in Ctesiph. 140. A close examination of the above passages and a study of the
G-B grammarians will show that the expression σvλλaßǹ generally applied to
the external or concrete symbols (25º). Accordingly the term diphthong (Síploryus
sc, ovλλaßǹ) also applied from the outset rather to the eye than to the ear [2], and
thus virtually meant 'a biliteral vowel-sound,' the consonantal by-function of
and v having been left out of account (18. 32". 78). The very same phenomenon
is still more strikingly witnessed in Latin, where, though very frequently acting
as consonants, the lettors I and V are never classed among the consonants (18).
20. The -adscript or subscript of the spurious diphthongs originated, in
many cases at least, as a prosodic mute mark, in that the vacancy left by
a lost sound was, for rhythmical purposes, indicated by schoolmasters and
rhythmicians with a stroke analogous to our sign of the apostrophe. This
stroke then came to be annexed in the form of a mute to the preceding vowel.
Hence the mute was written, as far as it was written, in the same line with
the rest of the letters [hence it is termed, adscript]—and it is not until manu-
scripts of the VII A.D. that we nect with written a little higher or a little
lowor (a a.), not until those of the XII with subscriptum' (FBlass, Pron. 50.
Cp. Kühner-Blass i. 62, 2-3).
20b. All diphthongs, whether proper or spurious, are theoret-
ically long (17b)-except final au and o, which, so far as they do
not close the secondary subjunctive [optative], count short.
(705; cp. 525b.)
L
20°. The diphthongs an @ which in the inscriptions and earlier MSS
figure as (AE)AI HI QI and (ae)ai ni wi, are called spurious (kaтаxpηOTɩ-
raí, 19), because their has no phonetic value of its own nor does it affect
the sound of the proceding a ŋw, but is absolutely mute. This is borne out—
to pass over the precepts of the anciont grammarians (as Dion. Thr. in
Bokk. An. 639, 13)—by many facts the principal of which are: (a) In A
metre the spurious diphthongs an are, unlike the diphthongs proper,
never dissolved into their constituent olements aï ŋï wï, but are invariably
treated as simple vowels. (b) In tho Attic (also Thessalian, Aeolic, and
Ionic) inscriptions the is, ovor since the VI, very often either omitted
(Kühnor-Blass i. 183 f.), or wrongly added, as: Tô for Tŵi HRöhl 503 twice ;
[1] For the term μovóonμos see Mar. Victor. do rhythmo 2 (vi. 42, 17, HKeil)
and RWestphal Thoorio i. 209 f. This palaeographic misreading of donμos
occurs throo times in the above chapter of Psoudo-Aristotle where he definos
the oúrdeoμos and äpopov, and has naturally taxed the ingenuity of the editors.
[*] Schol. in Dion. Thr. ii. 803 δίφθογγοι λέγονται ἐπειδὴ ἐκ δύο φθόγγων
συνίστανται φθόγγοι δὲ καλοῦνται κατὰ μουσικὸν λόγον τὰ ΓΡΑΜΜΑΤΑ. Choer.
520, 25 (TGaisford) δίφθογγοι λέγονται διὰ τὸ ἕκαστον αὐτῶν ἔχειν δύο φωνηέντων
φθόγγους φθόγγους γὰρ λέγομεν ἐνταῦθα τὰ φωνήεντα, κἂν ἐκφωνῶνται κὰν μὴ
ἐκφωνῶνται. (25)
29
20¢-22.]
INTERSONANTIC CONSONANTS.
δήμω for -μῳ, ἐν τῷ πρόνεῳ, τῇ πόλει, ταμία for -ίᾳ, αἱρεθῆ for -θῇ, εἴπη for -πῃ,
пάoн for -on, etc. (KMeisterhans2 52, 12; Haяad. 302-349; FBlass Pron.
45 f. ; OHoffmann i. 186 f. ii. 439 ff.):—τῷ θεῷ, ζηλωταί, Κολωνῆθεν, νεωτέρῳ,
ὀπίσω, γυμνασίας, φιλοπονίας (KMeisterhans 53, 13 ; cp. GMeyer § 35); ἐκ
Tậv idiwv, Tậv npwv CIA iv. 630 b (34 B.c.); Gr. Urk. Berlin 260 (+90)
ἀπέχωι, ἐκδώσωι, ἔστωι, χεὶρ κατακεχωρισμένη. (c) Strabo testifies that many
systematically dropped the of these spurious diphthongs, because it has
no sonse whatever: 14, 41 πολλοὶ χωρὶς τοῦ ἡ γράφουσι τὰς δοτικὰς καὶ (add
| tàs
ὑποτακτικάς), ἐκβάλλουσι δὲ τὸ ἔθος φυσικὴν αἰτίαν οὐκ ἔχον.
20. For the genesis and phonetic value of the -subscript, see 20 & 29 ff.
20º. Associated with the practice of discarding the adscript (now
subscript) is apparently the widespread phenomenon in the inscriptions,
of freely dropping any intersonantic ὑποτακτικόν 1 (29), η case which
naturally occurs most frequently in the endings -atos, -ELOS, -OLOS (-nos,
-WLOS). Here I seems to act as a compensatory mark or as a mere divisor
between heterosyllabic vowels (29. App. ii. 9-15.) Cp. 'Aonraía & -váa,
'Αθηναία
èraía & èráa, aieì & ȧeí,—å(i)erós, Пeipa(1)eús, ´Aλa(1)eús, dwpe(1)á, iépe(i)a,
πολιτέ(ί)α, χρέί)α, υγίε(ι)α, πλέίων, τέλειος, ἐπιτήδε(ι)ος, στο(ι)ά, ποιεῖν,
κά (ί)ειν, κλά(ί)ειν, κατεαγῦ(ῖα, ὀργυ(ι)ά, ὑ(ι)ός, λῶι)ον, σπ(ι)ος, σω(ι)ώ (=σώσω),
ȧvdpê(î)os, Hoσide(1)úv, xpo(1)á, ő(1)a or w(1)α, Aivé(i)as, Aive(1)àтai, ypaµ-
μarê(î)ov, Oŋoê()ov, etc. (KMeisterhans 24 ff. 31 f. 44 f. 46 f.) ;-so further,
in the 'scriptura continua' (25) many cases of crasis, as: (a[i]eyw, origin-
ally κα εγω,19 ) κἀγώ, (κα[ι]εμοι οι καεεμοι) καμοί, (κα[ι]ειτα or καεειτα) κατα,
(Ka[i]ev or ka[€]ev) xảv Mitth. xxi. 249, 6, etc., expressions which, owing to
their frequency, became standing formulae. Compare further (μo[i]edókei)
μovdókei (Ar. Vesp. 34), (σo[i]eoti) σovoti (Aosch. Eum. 913), (dovva[i]av)
douvav (Ar. Lys. 45), etc.
2
20′. Conversely, the licence with which intervocalic was dealt with could
not but load to the misconception that it might be inserted between any two
non diphthongal vowels as a mere ornamental adscript (29 ff.), ns: åµpidé[i]a,
ἐγιγάν, ε[ι]αυτοῦ, βασιλέ[ι]α, Ζέ[ι]α, δέ[ι]ηται, Σοφοκλέ[ι]ους, νε[ι]ώς, Λε[ι]ωντί-
δος, οινοχό[ι]η, Βο[ι]ηδρομιών, Ο[ι]ῆθεν, Χλό[ι]η (KMeisterhang 35 ff. 45 1.)
し
​21. Each of the two vowels and v, when it is not postpositive
and thus does not form with a preceding vowel a diphthong, is
marked with two dots placed over it (ï, ü). This is called diaeresis
(ep. 158), as : Αχαΐα, αύλος.
21b. In this book a simple vowel or a diphthong will be generally
called by the common name sonant (cp. Diom. 422, 8, HKeil), for
brevity's sake.
CONSONANTS.
22. The seventeen consonants (16) are commonly classified
according to the following table:


Guttural
(volar, palatal)
Dontal
Labial
Smooth (tenues)
K
T
πT
Middle (mediae)
γ
β
Aspirate (aspiratae)
Ө
X
Nasals
γ
V
μ
Sibilant or Spirant
σ
Liquids
λ
P
30
CONSONANTS CLASSIFIED-
[23-24.
PRONUNCIATION.
23. The three consonants, commonly but wrongly called
'double,' are compound: being generally taken as equivalent to dơ
(cp. 20³. 69), § to ko, ↓ to nσ. (cp. 5 f. 12. 23".)
23. The ancient classification of the consonants is thus summed up by
Sext. adv. gram. 621 f. τῶν συμφώνων τὰ μὲν ἡμίφωνα ἐστι κατ᾿ αὐτοὺς (i. e.
τοὺς γραμματικοὺς, or rather Στωικοὺς) τὰ δὲ ἄφωνα. καὶ ἡμίφωνα μὲν ὅσα δι'
αὑτῶν ῥοῖζον ἢ σιγμὸν ἢ μυγμὸν ἤ τινα παραπλήσιον ἦχον κατὰ τὴν ἐκφώνησιν
ἀποτελεῖν πεφυκότα, [p. 622] καθάπερ τὸ ἄθλΜ Ν Ξ Ρ Ε Φ Χ Ψ, ή, ώς τινες,
χωρὶς τοῦ θ καὶ φ καὶ χ, τὰ λειπόμενα οκτώ. ἄφωνα δέ ἐστι τὰ μήτε συλλαβὰς
καθ᾿ ἑαυτὰ ποιεῖν δυνάμενα μήτε ἔχων ἰδιότητας, αὐτὸ δὲ μόνον μετὰ τῶν ἄλλων
συνεκφωνούμενα, καθάπερ Β Γ Δ κ π τ, ἤ, ὡς ἔνιοι, καὶ τὸ θ φ χ. καὶ μὴν κοινῶς
τῶν συμφώνων πάλιν τὰ μὲν φύσει δασέα λέγουσι τὰ δὲ ψιλά. καὶ δασέα μὲν
θ φ χ, ψιλὰ δὲ κ π τ. μόνον δέ φασι τὸ ρ ἐπιδέχεσθαι ἑκάτερον, δασύτητα καὶ
X,
p
ψιλότητα. λέγουσι δέ τινα τῶν συμφώνων καὶ διπλᾶ, καθάπερ τὸ Ζ Ζ Ψ.
στηκέναι γάρ φασι τὸ μὲν z ἐκ τοῦ c καὶ Δ, τὸ δὲ ξ ἐκ τοῦ κ καὶ c, τὸ δὲ ψ ἐκ τοῦ
π kaì c. (Cp. also 55.) So too Priscian ii. 11, 13 (HKeil) 'sciendum tamen quod
hic quoque error a quibusdam antiquis Graecorum grammaticis" invasit
Latinos, qui pot et x semivocales putabant, nulla alia causa nisi quod
spiritus in eis abundet, inducti.' So too 9, 12. Victorin. vi. 6, 15.
422, 2. (Cp. 25 [x] b. 56, 8 & [r].)
B. PRONUNCIATION.
συνε
Diom. i.
24. The pronunciation of ancient Greek in the manner of the
present Greeks had been traditionally accepted at all times, before
and through the middle ages, as a matter of unquestionable fact. The
first objections to it were raised towards the beginning of the XVIth,
the principal arguments brought against it being three: (a) its strik-
ing incongruity with the Latin -the then academic and international
language in such words as ἐκκλησία (pronounced ekklisia), ἠθικῶς
(ithikòs), alpáßntos (alphávitos), as compared with their Latinized forms
ecclésia, éthice, alphabètum; (b) that it sounded many sonants alike
(N, L, V, EL, O., U = i; e, au = e ; 0, w = = 0); and (c) that such an ortho-
graphic variety presented practical difficulties. A bitter controversy
ensued and soon divided Greek scholars into two hostile camps, the
one led by Desiderius Erasmus and the other by JReuchlin, and called
Erasmians and Reuchlinians respectively ; they are also frequently
The Erasmian pronunciation was not propounded but tentatively suggested
by Erasmus in a dialogue betweon a bear and a lion, entitled De Recta Latini
Graecique sermonis pronuntiatione, published first at Basle (also Paris) in 1528, and
the origin of the doctrine receivos a curious illustration in the account given
by Gorard Jan Voss (or 'Vossius' 1577-1649), a lending Dutch professor and
zealous promoter of Erasmianism. In his Aristarchus sive de Grammatica
(Amsterdam, 1635), this oarnest scholar explains how Erasmus came to writo his
now famous dialogue (quo modo Erasmus scripserit dialogum de recta pronuntia-
tione) by the following narrative :
'I beliovo that it is known to fow in what circumstancos Erasmus was induced
to write on the correct pronunciation. Therefore I have deemed it best to sub-
join the account which I possess writton, some time ago, on a piece of paper by
tho hand of Honricus Corucopetrnous, a most learned mun and well known to
scholars. It reads as follows:-"I have heard M. Rutgerus Roschius, who was
professor of Crook in the Busleidan (Buslidiano) College at Louvain, and my
procoptor of revored momory, relate, that ho was in the Lilionsian School for
about two years at the sanno time as Erasmus, who occupied an upper room,
while he had a lower one; that Henry Glareanus | Honricus Loritus, a Swiss
scholar, born at Glurus (1488-1563), whonce his surnamio Glareanus], having
31
24. ERASMIAN AND TRADITIONAL PRONUNCIATION.
designated as Etacists and Itacists (or Iotacists), according as they pro-
nounce the cardinal point of dispute-like e or i (iota). It must
not be implied, however, that the new or Erasmian school substituted
a different pronunciation for each single letter: in the great majority
of cases it adhered to the traditional or 'modern Greek '(as it has been
called since) pronunciation, viz. in the case of a, €, 1, 0, ov (=u); K, λ,
µg 11, E, π, P, O, T, ; substantially also in the case of o, x, §. The
dispute at present turns mainly on the aspiration ('), which is un-
known to Ñ; on the quantity,' of which N makes no account but
pronounces all sonants absolutely isochronous and half long (except in
position, 137, App. ii. 1 & [2]); and on the pronunciation of the diph-
thongs ai, ei, oi, vi, av, ev, of the vowels n, w, v, and of the consonants
ß, v, ö, P, x, 0, inasmuch as
'
at is sounded by Erasmians a + i, by modern Greeks e in 'emit'
ει
""
OL
11
UL
αυ
ευ
η
υ
""
ē
""
e + i
0+2
""
>"
i or English ē
ĕ
""
i i + i
2
"
""
α + u
""
e + u
""
ē
""
ü (or u)
""
""
} (51)
av or af
ev or ef
i or English ē
""
ē
arrived at Louvain from Paris, was invited by Erasmus to dino at the College;
and on being asked what nows he brought with him, he said-which was a story
he had made up on the journey, inasmuch as he know Erasmus to be inor-
dinately fond of novelties and wondrously credulous-that some native Greeks
had arrived in Paris, mon of marvellous learning, who made use of a pronuncia-
tion of the Groek tongue entirely diflorent from that generally received in those
parts; for instance, they called B, instead of Vila, Bota, and 7, instead of Ila,
Ela; a, instond of e, ai; o, instead of 2, oi; and so on; that on hearing this
Erasmus wrote soon afterwards the Dialogue on the right pronunciation of the
Latin and Grook tongues, in order to appear himself the inventor of the maller (at
videretur huius rei ipso inventor), and offered it to the printer, Potor of Alost,
for printing; but, as the printer declined, either because he was engaged in
other work, or at any rate because he said he was not able to produce it as soon
as was desired, Erasmus sent the treatise to Froben at Basle, by whom it wus
immodiately printed and published. Erasmus, however, having found out the
trick (practised upon him), never afterwards used that method of pronouncing,
nor did he direct those of his friends, with whom he was more familiar, to
follow it. In proof of this M. Rutgerus used to show a schomo (formulam) of
pronunciation written by the band of Erasmus himself—a copy of which is still
in my [Voss's] possession--for the use of Damian de Goes, a Spaniard, which in
no way differed from that which learned and unlearned uso everywhere for that
language." (Signed) Henricus Corucopetruous Cuccensis [Henrik Ravensborg
van Kuik] Neoniugi [Nijinegen] 1569, the ove of St. Simon and St. Judo [27th of
October].'
This incident then explains on the one hand why Erasmus did not trout the
subject in a direct and earnest manner, but put the discussion into the mouth
of animals, and on the other accounts for the fact that he continued to abido by
the traditional (or modern Greck) pronunciation of Grook to the end of his life.
The whole subject bearing on the genesis and history of the Erusmian doctrine
is ably and lucidly set forth by JGennadios in the Nineteenth Century (vol,
xxxviii f.), to whom I am indebted for the above extract.
As a matter of course, regard is had hore to that Erasmian pronuncia-
tion only which Erasmians believe to bo the ancient and correct one (us
advocated, for instance, by Professors EVArnold and RSConway in their pam-
phlet bouring the rather misleading title: The restored' [menning the 'genuine
Erusmian Pronunciation of Greek and Latin, Cambridge, 1895), not to that which
they actually practise, sinco this is English in English-speaking countrios,
This inconsistont
Gorman in Germany, French in France, and so forth.
Anglo-Gorman pronunciation thereforo is ontirely disregarded here.
32
SOURCES FOR DETERMINING PRONUNCIATION. [24–25.
B is sounded by Erasmians b
Y
8
Ф
""
g
by modern Greeks
v (b)
gh (i) or English
gh (y)
d
,,
or th in 'then'
""
>>
p + h
f
>>
X
ㅂ
​c + h
""
""
11
kh or ch (x)
t + h
""
""
""
th in 'thin'
IC
24b. Add, for the sake of completeness, that some Erasmians give ( the
complex sound of ds, while Greeks pronounce it invariably as a simple
voiced ≈ in zeal (69). Conversely, while Erasmians sound y « x invariably as
guttural gk ch, Greeks pronounce them so before consonants and ao u only,
but before the palatal vowels e i they palatalize them to i í ý (54º. 60. 91).
24º. As a matter of course, a few N dialects, in particular those which lie in,
or border on, alien races, show some phonetic discrepancies. Thus, to leave asido
the peculiar phonology of northern speech (029 ff.), Tsaconic expresses @ by τ
(instead of o, as in ancient Laconic, 56′), while South Italian has replaced
7 8 0 4 έ by Italian gd ((s) dz ƒs (031. 174". 184". 187º). In a similar way, the
Pontic idioms have adopted the sonants ä ö ù from the Turkish.
γ
25. The criteria and other data which at the present time each
school adduces in support of its doctrine are: linguistic and dialectal
parallels; etymologies; the process of contraction and crasis
information derived from the works of ancient writers, in par-
ticular the old grammarians; plays on words (puns); inuitations of the
cries of animals; transcriptions from and into Latin; and above all
the orthographical confusion occurring in the spelling of the inscrip-
tions and old papyri. It is obvious, however, that the great majority
of these tests, notably the linguistic and dialectal parallels, etymo-
logies, cases of contraction and crasis (156 f.), imitations of animal
cries, and most of the transcriptions into and from Latin, are unsafe
and often misleading, especially in the case of the sonants. Nor is
the information derived from ancient writers and theorists more valu-
able, secing that in most of their remarks which are incidental-
these authorities do not so much consider the actual pronunciation as
they do the concrete script (25°), as fixed by historical spelling (25º). In
the case of the grammarians, moreover, it must be borne in mind that
they are post-Christian scribes (excerptors, commentators, copiers) and
cannot speak with authority of the pronunciation of 'classical' Greek.
As a matter of fact, their precepts and theories on this point are just
as worthless as is their information about Homer's authorship and
personality. Be it further remembered that, as they are not actual
Il Compare HSteinthal2 i, 256 l. Even the bost of these theorists and critics
are often trifling with their subject. Thus, to pass over Plato's 139 curious or
puzzling etymologios in Cratylos, Dionysios of Halicarnassos, if correctly reported,
evinces a strungo predilection for long vowels over short vowels (cp, ulso 69 & [1]).
a. De Comp. 19, 1. 162 (Sch.) τούτων δὴ τῶν φωνηέντων) κράτιστα μέν έστι
καὶ φωνὴν ἡλίσTHN ἀποτελεῖ τά τε Μακρὰ καὶ τῶν διχρόνων ὅσα μηκύνεται κατὰ
τὴν ἐκφοράν, ὅτι πολὺν ἠχεῖται χρόνον καὶ τοῦ πνεύματος οὐ κατακύπτει τὸν τόνον·
χείρω δὲ τὰ βραχέα ἢ τὰ βραχέως λεγόμενα ὅτι μικρόφωνά τε ἐστὶ καὶ σπαδονίζει
τὸν ἦχον. αὐτῶν δὲ τῶν μακρῶν εὐφωνότατον τὸ α ὅταν ἐκτείνηται· λέγεται
γὰρ ἀνοιγομένου τοῦ στόματος ἐπὶ πλεῖστον καὶ τοῦ πνεύματος ἄνω φερομένου
πρὸς τὸν οὐρανόν. [p. 164] δεύτερον δὲ τὸ Η ὅτι κάτω περὶ τὴν βάσιν τῆς γλώσσης
ἐρείδει τὸν ἦχον ἀκόλουθον (road ἀκώλυτον, ep. Arist. Quint. 54, 17 τῶν φωνηέντων
τὰ μὲν ἀκώλγτον προφερόμενα τὸν ἦχον), ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἄνω, καὶ μετρίως ἀνοιγομένου.
τρίτον δὲ τὸ ω· στρογγύλλεταί τε γὰρ ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ στόμα καὶ περιστέλλει τὰ χείλη,
τήν τε πληγὴν τὸ πνεῦμα περὶ τὸ ἀκροστόμιον ποιεῖται. ἔστι δὲ ἧττον τούτου
τὸ υ· περὶ γὰρ αὐτὰ τὰ χείλη συστολῆς γενομένης αξιολόγου πνίγεται καὶ στενὸς
33
D
25-25.] ANCIENT TESTIMONY ON PRONUNCIATION.
grammarians but mostly commentators of classical texts, they hardly
consider orthoepy (25º), and that moreover they speculate too much
and represent phonology not even as it was in their own time, but
as it ought to be or could be in their judgement and taste.
25. Grammar, as now generally understood-the art concerned with the
principles and rules of language in speaking and writing-was viewed dif-
ferently among the ancients. For, as already intimated (05 ff. 020. 25), the
spoken or colloquial language was, even in A, hardly considered by writers,
and utterly ignored by theorists or 'philologers.' With the ancients then
the study of language was the philosophical etymology of words. When
in the course of time the Stoics took up the subject of philosophical
or highor grammar and finally the term γραμματικὴ made its appearance,
it was conceived as the art dealing with the rpámmata, or litteratura (as the
earlier Romans rendered it), that is with the wrillen compositions of 'classi-
cal' antiquity. Hence the technical definition given by the 'oldest gram-
marian, Dionysios Thrax (Ι.Β.C.), is Γραμματική ἐστιν ἐμπειρία τῶν παρὰ
ποιηταῖς καὶ συγγραφεῦσιν ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ λεγομένων, that is grammar is tho
knowledge of the usual subject-matter and diction found in the (classical)
poets and prosaists' (cp. Soxt. adv. gram: 611 ff.), and is literally repeated
by the Romans, Grammatica, quae a nobis lilleratura dicitur, scientia est eorum
quae a poctis historicis oratoribusque dicuntur ex parte maiore (Varro in Mar.
>
I
"
ἐκπίπτει ὁ ἦχος. ἔσχατον δὲ πάντων τὸ 1 [p. 166] περὶ τοὺς ὀδόντας γὰρ ἡ κρότησις
τοῦ πνεύματος γίνεται μικρὸν ἀνοιγομένου τοῦ στόματος καὶ οὐκ ἐπιλαμπρυνόντων
(ἐπιδασυνόντων ?) τῶν χειλέων τὸν ἦχον. τῶν δὲ βραχέων οὐδέτερον μὲν
ΕἴΗΧΩΝ, ἧττον δὲ δυσηχὲς τὸ ο· διίστησι γὰρ τὸ στόμα κρεῖττον θατέρου, τὴν δὲ
πληγὴν λαμβάνει περὶ τὴν ἀρτηρίαν μᾶλλον.
b. Following this strange principle that the euphony of a sound is in propor-
tion to its volume, Dionysios further enumerates (ib. p. 166) Aм NPC and Z Z Y
as somi-vowels (23) of which z Zy are doublo, and thon declares (p. 168): Exá-
στου δὴ τούτων κρείττω μέν ἐστι τὰ διπλᾶ τῶν ἁπλῶν, ἐπειδὴ ΜΕΙΖΟΝά ἐστι τῶν
ἑτέρων καὶ μᾶλλον ἐγγίζειν δοκεῖ τοῖς τελείοις· ἥττω δὲ τὰ ἁπλᾶ διὰ τὸ εἰς
βραχυτέρους αὐτῶν τόνους συνάγεσθαι τὸν ἦχον.—And rogarding the mutos he
naturally considers the aspirates far the best (p. 176): κράτιστα μὲν οὖν ἐστιν
ὅσα τῷ πνεύματι πολλῷ λέγεται, δεύτερα δὲ ὅσα μέσῳ, κακίω δὲ ὅσα ψιλῷ. ταῦτα
μὲν γὰρ τὴν ἑαυτῶν δύναμιν ἔχει μόνην, τὰ δὲ δασέα καὶ τὴν τοῦ πνεύματος
προσθήκην, ὥστε ἐγγὺς τοῦ τελειότατα εἶναι ἐκεῖνα. (Cp. also 69 [r].)
c. Still more absurd is Dionysios' contention that the earnestness and dignity
of Thucydidos' and Plato's diction consist in tho rhythmical succossion and
altornation in them of motrical feet, c. 18, p. 232 & p. 236.
d. Dionysios' tasto as to the relativo euphony of the vowel-sounds is evidently
shared by Hormogenes the rhetoricinu. In his Περὶ ἰδεῶν τόμ. α' γ. 201
(LSpongel), the latter argues that no word is sonorons unless it fills the
mouth : λέξις δὲ σεμνὴ πᾶσα μὲν ἡ πλατεῖα καὶ διογκοῦσα τὸ στόμα κατὰ τὴν
προφορὰν ὥστε οἷον στομφάζειν καὶ ὅπερ ἐπιτηδεύουσί τινες, τοῦτο ἀναγκάζεσθαι
ποιεῖν τῇ φύσει τῶν λέξεων αὐτῶν. τοιαῦται δὲ καὶ ἄλλαι μέν τινες, ἐξαιρέτως
δὲ αἱ τῷ α καὶ τῷ ω πλείστῳ (road πλεῖστα) χρώμεναι, ὥς που καὶ ὁ Πλάτων
[Phaedr. 244 v] τὴν οἰωνιστικὴν ᾠωνιστικήν φησιν ὀνομάσαι τινὰς ἀποσεμνύνοντας
το ω.
καὶ περὶ τοῦ α λέγοιτ' ἄν τι τοιοῦτον. ὁ γὰρ Θεόκριτος ἀχθόμενόν τινα
πεποίηκε δωριαζούσαις γυναιξὶ διὰ τὸ πλατύνειν τὴν φωνήν, τῷ α τὰ πλεῖστα χρω-
μέναις. μάλιστα δὲ τὰ στοιχεῖα ταῦτα, τὸ ω καὶ τὸ α, διαίρει τε καὶ διογκοὶ τὸν
λόγον εἰ κατὰ τὰς τελευταίας εἴη συλλαβὰς τῶν λέξεων, οἷον ὁ ΜΕΝ ΔΗ ΜΕΓΑ
ΗΓΕΜΩΝ ΕΝ ΟΥΡΑΝῷ Ζεὺς ΠΤΗΝΩΝ ΧΡΜΑ. Δεύτεραι δὲ σεμνότητος λέξεις αἱ διὰ
του ο στοιχείου κατὰ μόνας (ἢ εἴς τι μακρὸν καταλήγουσαι, οἷον Ορόντης, καὶ
αἱ ταῖς μακραῖς τε καὶ διφθόγγοις πλεονάζουσαι, καὶ αἱ τὰ τελευταῖα ἐν ταύταις
ἔχουσαι, πλὴν τῆς ει διφθόγγου. καὶ εἰ καθ' αὑτὸ δὲ τὸ ιτιθοῖτο, ἥκιστα σεμνὴν
ποιεῖ τὴν λέξιν πλεονάσασαν, συστέλλει γὰρ μᾶλλον καὶ σεσηρέναι ποιεῖ, διογκοῖ δὲ
οὐδαμῶς τὸ στόμα. (Cp. 208 [3].)
AC
34
ANCIENT GRAMMAR AND GRAMMARIANS. [25b-25e.
Victorin. i. 1, 6 HKeil vi. 4). The various parts of such a grammar
were, according to the said Dion. Thrax: (1) åváyvwσis évtρißÈS KAтÀ
προσωδίαν ; (2) ἐξήγησις κατὰ τοὺς ἐνυπάρχοντας ποιητικοὺς τρόπους ; (3) γλωσ
σῶν τε καὶ ἱστοριῶν πρόχειρος ἀπόδοσις ; (4) ἐτυμολογίας εὕρεσις; (5) αναλογίας
Ekλoyoµós; (6) ирíσis поinμáтшν. And these requisites of a 'grammarian' are
thus defined by his scholiast: (µépos) diopowτikóv (i.e. correcting one's own
copy), ἀναγνωστικόν, ἐξηγητικών, κριτικόν ; and by the Romans : grammaticae
officia constant in partibus quattuor, lectione enarratione emendatione et iudicio
(Diomed. ii. 426 HKeil).-These principles were more or less adhered to
by all ancient and Byzantine 'grammarians' down to very recent times.
(Cp. 02 & Preface p. vii f.)
25º. Another very important point, which cannot be too strongly in-
pressed upon the student, is this. While nowadays a written composition
is intended first for the mind, next for the ear, and last for the eye of
the reader, in their writings the ancient Greeks had regard mainly to the
permanent part of the language, that is to the mind and to the eye, heeding
but incidentally the acoustic side of the diction. Hence they wrote all
words in a continuous line-a mode of writing called now scriptura con-
tinua-and this unbroken line they often treated, especially in verse, as
a text unit, sometimes even subjecting it to the phonetic principles applic-
able to a single word. Accordingly when we peruse ancient texts for
information as to the phonotic value of a lotter, syllable, word, accent, and
the like, we must ascertain whether the informant refers—
(1) To its grammatical function; (2) to its external form, that is to the
script as it appears to the eye (19), the commonest case; (3) to its sound.
Compare Sext. adv. gram. 621 καὶ δὴ τριχῶς λεγομένου τοῦ στοιχείου, τοῦ τε
γραφομένου χαρακτῆρος καὶ τύπου, καὶ τῆς τούτου δυνάμεως, καὶ ἔτι τοῦ ὀνόματος,
προαγέτω νῦν ἡ ζήτησις μάλιστα περὶ τῆς δυνάμεως (grammatical function).
αὕτη γὰρ καὶ κυρίως στοιχεῖον παρ' αὐτοῖς (i.Θ. τοῖς γραμματικοῖς οι Στωικοίς)
πроσпуάрενтαι. Cp. Arist. de part. anim. 2. 16, 660 a 2. 3, 1, 661 b 14:
προσηγόρευται.
πολλὰ πρὸς τὴν γένεσιν τῶν Γραμμάτων οἱ πρόσθιοι τῶν ὀδόντων συμβάλλονται.
-See further 19. 41. 203b. 851 f. & App. i. 6 [1] & 19, 9. 'In fact in this
entire theory (of vowels and their classification), writing rather than sound
has evidently been the guide.' FBlass Pron. 19 f.
254. In face of these facts, the only safe criteria for the deter-
mination of the pronunciation of ancient Greek are the contemporary
inscriptions and papyri. But even here we must draw a line of distinc-
tion between public and private documents, inasmuch as official and
literary productions preserve the etymological and historical spelling,
whereas private records (inscriptions on stone or on vases; sepulchral,
votive, and honorary memorials; correspondence; notes, etc., on
papyri), being the work of unscholarly artisans, are of especial value
to us as throwing a sidelight on the actual state of the language.
25º. In order to realize the full significance of the etymological or historical
orthography, be it remembered that, in ancient times: (1) grammar was
the foundation of all education and the indispensablo companion of every
scribo. Sext adv. Gram. 6o7, 41 ἀπὸ νηπιότητος σχεδὸν καὶ ἐκ σπαργάνων γραμ
ματικῇ παραδιδόμεθα, ἔστι τε αὕτη οἷον ἀφετήριόν τι πρὸς τὴν τῶν ἄλλων μάθησιν.
(2) Evory public place toomed with inscriptions which served as ortho-
graphic standard and guide; and (3) not only all current school-texts
(rà прaτróμeva) had to be copied accurately and in the received uniform
spelling, but, what is most important, in the majority of cases, a reader
was also a more or less professional copior, inasmuch as he had to copy
his own roading matter. In point of fact, the ancients were more
familiar with the received or historical orthography than is the case with
us nowadays, and Quintilian could well say (Inst. Orat. 1, 7, 11 & 30);
orthographia quoque consuetudini servit. Op. 717 [1].
35
D 2
26]
PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS.
I. PRONUNCIATION OF THE SONANTS.
η
ην
η
26. The absence of ŋ and w, and the multiple value of E and
O previous to the adoption of scholastic spelling (6 f. 12), clearly
indicate our starting-point and the proper method of investi-
gation to be adopted as long as the vowel symbols 7 and o,
together with their combinations ท and w, ŋu and wv, did not
exist, they cannot claim a sound of their own (29¹). Evon after
their adoption it came to pass, in consequence of the tenacious
adherence of the Athenians to their ancestral (historical) spell-
ing, that the old orthography continued to be used, for a con-
siderable time-sporadically down to the IIIrd B.C., and in the
case of e and ʼn down to Byzantine times,-side by side with
the new system (cp. 41), so that, during 450-300 B. C., we are
confronted by a constant confusion of these symbols as well
as their combinations with their predecessors.
This confusion may be illustrated by the following specimens :
1. E and El are vory frequently interchanged from the VI to the latter
part of the IVth B.C. Thus stands-
C.
α. E for (original) ΕΙ: ὀλέζων (beside 'ολείζον), Πέσιδος, ἐχσαλέψατο, Ηρα-
κλάδης, καται, Μενεκλάδες (FBluss 3o note 3 ; cp. also 4); Ποτεδᾶν (over thirty
times, PKrotschmer 34); raλè donês, ib.; Þɛdíλas IGA 91; Þɛdio ib. 504 (on Attic
Φεδίλας
vases, PKretschmer 109 f.).; Пeloveos for Пelowvelos (OHoffmann ii. 13).—For
hysterogeneous El (29) ff.): Εστιαιες, Ότρυνες, πρυτάνες CIA ii. 873 (341-340
Β.Ο.); νεσθαι, ναι, Διες, πρέσβες, δουλύεν, μελεδαίνεν, ἀποδώσεν (KMeister-
hans³ 5 f. & 16),-not to mention tho frequent case whero e is followed by
another vowel, as: Heios (for éws) on a ▲ rod-figured vaso (PKretschmer 136),
¿(1)áv, dwpe(1)á, téλe(i)os, otc, etc. (s00 20º).
3004.
b. EI for E, rarely: eix@poλéwv CIA ii. 2836; exe for exe, ib.
μvwv for Méμvwv on a A rod-figured vase, PKretschmer 136. Cp. 20º f.
Μεί-
2. E and H interchango times without number from the V B.C. down to
the IX A.D. (42 (.).
C.
-
a. In the Attic inscriptions the two symbols are written intorchangeably,
but e, us tho ancestral representative (29 ff.), occurs far more frequently for n
than conversely. For the period anterior to the III B.C. see KMeisterhans2
26 [] (also GMoyor" 88 f. and FBlass 31 f.)—and add among other instancos
ol e for n: Teɩpíßaços Xpɛøtós CIA ii. 4172 (IIIrd B.C.); CIA iii. 281 : iepéws | Aids
Σωτῆρος | καὶ ᾿Αθενᾶς Σωτείρας CIA iii. add. 14" Εὐφέμου. ΟΙΛ iii. 1144,
ii. 15 Εἰρηναῖος. 2936 Τερμασσεύς. 2063 Εισιάς Λεναίου.
2063 Εισιάς Λεναίου. 2856 Νικησώ Μενε
στράτου Περγαμηνή. Gr. Urk. Berlin 261, 26 1. ἵνα διακονέσι ἱμῖν for - νήσῃ ἡμῖν.
b. H for E from the beginning (Vth B.C.): Þiλo§ń»ŋ UKöhler in Mitth.
x. p. 363. Ηροφίλη ib. Κλεομήνης ib. 364. ἰσοτλής CIA ii. 2731. Ἡλένη,
"Hos ("Ews), 'HinBóλw, PKrotschmor 98. Mнλírη id. 107. Ako Bios CIA ii.
Μηλίτη
Λάσβιος
3134 (III B.C.), Anμoolнvns ib. 1081, 48, iii. (37-54 A.D.), TCOHаμaι Louvre
τεθέαμαι
Pap. 41 (160 B.0.); Hws (for ews) ib. 53, 9, 39 1.---Hvoxos (for ev-) Gr. Urk. Borlin 92,7.
C.
[ Comparo id. p. 15, 6, b'n kann bis 250 n. Chr. noch mit e vorwechselt
werden' adducing many inscriptional vouchers from 117-269 A.D. [but for
Miλéois read Miλéσios].-FBlass 36 These sounds (n and e) also aro, it is
Μιλέσις Μιλέσιος
true, frequently confounded by the papyri, and on the latter as well as on
inscriptions e no less than 7 is used for tho e arising from a' with roferonco
to Louvre Pap. No. 1 whore 1 πυροειδές (for -δής), twico ; τι οἰκέσεως ; 12 δισκο-
ειδές & σκαφοειδές : no. 40 ἀπελλάγην ; 47, 15 Αζημίοται. Bull. Corr. Holl. ii. 341
Μηλισίππου und Εμπίδου (Delos). - Add: εὔξησεν CIA iv. 630 b (34 Β.Ο.), 18;
evoнßeιav Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 29, 4 (161 B.C.); μɛтpós CIG 4763. PETOPIKĤS
4788. èníocµov 5839, etc. etc.
36
INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. [26.
3. H and HI-see above, 20º.
C.
4. El and H interchange frequently: ἡμιχόνει for -χώνη on an Attic vase
of the V B.C. (PKretschmer 143), åpɛîke CIA ii. 811, c, 19 (323 B C.); so too
Bull. Corr. Holl. xiv. p. 163, 13-21 (beside ἀφῆκεν); εὐδοκείσωσι Jour. Holl
Stud. Megalopolis 126 (IIIrd B.C.); åpɛíkaтe FKenyon Class. Texts p. 62 (II);
Ασκληπιείου FKenyon Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. pp. 25 & 28 (161 B.C.). See also 37 & 52.
5. EI and HI interchange times without number from the time of the adoption
of η down to the Ist B.c., as: κλείς and κλής, πλεΐζω und κλήζω, λειστής δ
ληστής, Πεντελεικός & -λικός, Αριστείδης & -στίδης, ἀγαθεῖ τύχει & θη, τύχη,
εἴπει & εἴπη, εἱρέθη & ᾑρ-. δοκεῖ & δοκῇ, μηνύσεις & -σης, Αργεῖος & γλος, τε-
τρήσεις & - ρης, γραμματεῖ & τῇ, πόλει & -λη, etc. (KMeisterhans 28-31. 131. 136).
ἐν τεῖ βολεῖ CIA ii. 50, 3 (b side 17 ἐν ἀκροπόλη) (372 Β.C.); ἐν τοῖ βολῇ, ὃς
ἂν δοκῇ αὐτεῖ, δεδόχθαι τῇ βουλῇ, τεῖ βουλεῖ τῇ βουλῇ, etc. in CIA ii. 114
(343 Β.C.); τρίτει καὶ εἰκοστεῖ τῆς πρυτανείας, τῇ βουλεῖ, ἰδίᾳ καὶ κοινεῖ, ἀγαθῇ
τύχει CIA ii. 186, 19-26 (322-1 Β.Ο.); ἐνάτει (bis), τεῖ τῶν προγόνων καὶ τεῖ τῆς
ἀδελφῆς προαιρέσει, ἐν τεῖ συμμαχίᾳ, ἀγαθῆ τύχει, ἐν τοῖ συμμαχίᾳ τεῖ Λακεδαι-
μονίων (basile ἐν στήλη) CTA ii. 332 (270 -260 Β.C.). For a synopsis see 28, b.
6. O for OT occurs most frequently from the VIth down to the IIIrd B.C. viz.
a. For hysterogeneous oυ (29. 34"): μισθόντα (570 Β.C.), ἐλθοσαν (445 Β.Ο.),
ὑποργοῖς, ἐνοικόντων (378 Β.Ο.), τὄνομα κριό (400 -3.50 Β.C.), Μαλθακίο (270-262 Β.Ο.),
φιαλίο, Αριστίο, Εὐτύχο, Αρχεστράτο, Καλλίππο, προσώπο, etc, etc. (KMoister-
hans² 6 & 21; FBlass 32.)
b. For original ου (29) : βὃν (439 Β.C.), τότο (for τούτου), τότων, seven times
(415 Β.C.), τότο, τότων three times (414 Β.Ε.), Σποδίας, ὀδέ for οὐδέ (after 400 B.C.),
ὅς for οὕς, οκ, ὀδένα, ὄποτε, ὀθένα (all from 398 to 357 Β.C.), (KMeisterhans 49;
FBlass 32); τοοοτοι, τότῳ, τότων, ὅπο ἄν, Εφημ. ἀρχ. 1883-9 p. I f. (396 B.C.).
πλότος, on an Attic vase of about 450 B.c. (PKretschmer 109); Προκρύστης
(besido -κρού- id. 232).
C.
c. But owing to its distinct sound us u, ΟΥ stands neither for o nor for a (27).
7. O and interchange occasionally from the first appearance of to the
ond of tho III B.c., thence indiscriminately down to the present time. For
-450-200 BC. see KMeisterhans 5, b, and 19: Aewvrís often (beside Acovrís)
370-317 B.C. (KMeist rhans" noto 113); eis Záμwv CIA ii. 808". 130 (326 B C.),
μνημείων (τοι - μείον) Mittl. x. 363; τὸν ἔγγονων, παραγγελλέτωσαν Εφημ. ἀρχ·
1884 -5 Ρ. 137, 11 & 14. στάχυως CIA ii. 272. λιπόν fοι - πών CIA 2836 (+ 30. B C.);
Θεοδωσία CIA 3216. Γνόμη CIA 3580. Λυσίωνι (beside Λυσίονι) Εφημ. ἀρχ.
1886 p. 158, 103; 264; 291; even aùrwû for aỷтoû (!) CIA ii. 578, 23; conversely
ἑαυτῶν CTG 2009.
On Attic vases of the V-IV B.O. nark Δίφιλως (beside -λος),
Διώνυσος, ᾿Αλκίμαχος, καλώς, Περσωφάτα, Κυμοδώκη, οἰνώμαος, Κάνθαρον,
λυσσεύς, PKretschmer 106 f.
C.
a. In the early papyri the instancos of confusion between o and w are innu-
morable. Thus in Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. wo find : Μακεδώνος, 26, 2 & 29 (163 Β.Ο.);
and in two specimens of 162 and ror B.c. respectively ἔχωντος 10, 6 ; ἀπέδοκα
30, 5. διαδώχω 11, 31. Δωρίων μεταλαβόν 10, 12. ὁ προεστηκός 11, 34.
ὑπό
μνημα ἔχων ὑπογραφήν τ, 35 f. δομάτων 32, δ.
ἀποδέδωκε 25, 20 ; 26, 19.
ψομὸν πολυῦσι 25, 18, 26, 16. νεότερον 25, 8. ἐπέδοκα 24, 4. χιρογραφησάτωσαν
22, 34. ἐνεστῶτος 23, 25 (bosido ἐνεστῶτος 26, 13). ἀναγωγης 23, 23. παρέχω
μένας 20, 28. εὔγνωμων (for - μον) 28, 18. ἐδώθη 28, 16, etc, etc. Similar and
equally numerous cases of confusion aro found in the Louvre Papyri of the
samo period, as [165 Β. Ο. ] : μείζων, ἔχων for ἔχον, ὠκταετηρίδα, ὥ for ὅ, το
αὐτὸ τρύπωι, ὡρᾶται, κύκλων for -λον, μεθοπορινός, etc. FBlass Pron. 35, note 5.
8. ΟΙ and of interchange vory frequently, as : τοι δήμοι (± 300 Β Ο.), τῶν ἱερῷ
(300 B.0.), koµoidía (IVth B.C.), KMeisterhans" 52, GKaibel 38, 7ôi dýµọi tôi Alov-
ύσοι, τραγοιδοῖς bogido six instances of w Εφημ. ἀρχ. 1884, 69 ft. (where moreover
two examples of o for ov, and et iuvariably for ηι). Αξιόχοι Εφημ. ἀρχ. 1880,
149, 50.
τον 1 τῷ ib. 69. Τιμασιθέοι ib. 238. ᾿Αριστόνοι ib. 254. Ἡρόιδα,
Tôi tin
Κερδόιον, FBlass 45 f. Conversely στεφανων for yoἳ Bull. Corr. Hell. iii. 120, 12.
(IV. Β.Ο.), οἰκοσίτως CIA ii. 834b, ii. 24 (320-8 Β.Ο.), ἑκάστοις CIA ii. 258 (304
Β.α.), ωινοχόη CIA ii. 403 (ΙΙΙ B.c.); ep. FBlass 45 f.
(IIIrd
37
27-28.] INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS.
27. The above direct evidence (all from inscriptions and
papyri) could be easily multiplied, but the specimens given may
suffice for our purpose. The whole phenomenon may be con-
veniently illustrated by the following synoptical diagram in
which the arrows indicate the direction of interchange, the
black lines the frequency of this confusion, and the dotted lines
its infrequency.
E = El,
Eɩ, and o
oov, and ow.
n......?
ω
η
From this diagram then, which gives a synoptical survey
of the frequency and direction of the misspelling' occurring
in the inscriptions of the VIth IVth B.C., we see that the
'misuse' of € for
Ε
ทุ and El, and the 'misuse' of o for w and ov,
are by far commoner than conversely. But what is more striking
is that while e very frequently stands for ŋ and a, the latter two
symbols are rarely interchanged; and in the same way, though o
is often misused for w and ov, the latter two symbols are hardly
interchanged (26, b, c). In face of these facts, it would be very
unsafe or uncritical to draw conclusions as to the pronunciation,
in the Vth-IVth B. C., of the above sonants from their frequent
or casual interchange in the inscriptions, before we have first
investigated and detected the cause and process which have
been at work in producing this irregular phenomenon.
28. It is commonly held, especially among Erasmians, that the official
adoption of ŋ and w in 403 B.C. was due to the crying need of expressing by
ๆ
these specific symbols primarily new sounds which had in the course of
previous times dovoloped out of E and O respectively, and thon a dif-
ference of quantity [see the following noto]. This theory, however, though
sanctioned by long and general belief, cannot stand the scrutiny of either
historical investigation or close reasoning, as Appendix II will show, and
the following considerations corroborate.
a. In adopting 7 and w as vowel-symbols, the Athenians must have
had in mind either a phonetic (i. e. qualitative or quantitative), or a
theoretical (motrical and grammatical) principle; that is to say the
adoption of η and a can have been intended to graphically symbolizo
eithor pre-existing specific sounds, hitherto imperfectly or not at all
reprosented, or metrical and grammaticul phenomena developed in the
course of time. Now the formor assumption is procluded by many and
weighty considerations. In the first place, had there boon devolopod,
prior to the Eucleidian spelling, any new sounds for which the original
five sonants a, €, 1, 0, (0)ov, were inadequate, there is no plausible reason
why Athens, the foremost leader in thought and action, who thon teemed
with writers, philosophers, painters, sculptors, musicians, architects, etc.,
who moreover, in view of her mixod (chiefly Ionic and Doric) dialect (04),
could not be reproached with great exclusivism, should have been so slow
and tardy in contriving or borrowing new and specific symbols for these
sounds, the more so as she had already contrived so many musical notos.
If n and a had been adopted as representatives of specific new sounds, is
η
it possible that such an event should have been passed over in silence by
all ancient authorities? (App. ii. 12[2].) It is also unaccountable how, if
38
LONG VOWELS AND THEIR ORIGIN.
|28-29.
.
η
once adopted to represent specific and real sounds, ŋ and w did not meet with
immediate popularity-as did έ and 4 from the very outset-and did not
remain sharply distinct, precluding all confusion with other sonants (cp. 27.
41). To argue therefore with FBlass (Pron. 25) that '7 and w were adopted
to express the open e [i.e. ] and open o respectively,'-sounds which
ä]
avowedly disappeared very soon afterwards, that is even before Aristotle's
time and before the symbols for them had met with general reception-
but that none the less these symbols were now retained for different
("quantitative") purposes [',' is to my mind a rather feeble and improb-
able theory. For if phonetic distinction had become by this time, and
not before 403 B.C., a conditio sine qua non which necessitated the retention
of ŋ and was marks for a long e-sound and a long o-sound respectively,
η
there can be no reason why no recourse was had to the natural expedient
suggested by the then surviving poetical (Homeric) method of doubling
the vowels, but on the contrary, double vowels should have been by
this time systematically abandoned. Is it probable that ignorant scribes
and stone-cutters should have never been misled by their car and so sub-
stituted ee for 'long' 7, and oo for 'long' w? Or is it possible to conceive
a long u-sound (ov) without the presence of a parallel short u-sound?
Bo it further observed that if ŋ and a denoted or came to denote the
quantitative length of e and o in actual speech, it is rather strange that
they should not immediately meet with general acceptance as repre-
sentatives of long e and o, but should do so only at a period (350-200 B. C.)
which clearly marks the beginning of the disappearance of quantity.
Even the very name & méra (though later) is irreconcilable with 'quantity,'
which would have certainly suggested & MAKPÓN. Add finally the very
significant fact that the spurious diphthongs ni and wi (n and w), in which
ŋ and a virtually did the work of quantity, are almost indiscriminately
replaced by a and o respectively (26, 5 & 8).
し
​b. In these diphthongs where the is mute and thus necessarily throws upon
an a the entire work of quantitative distinction, the Attic as well as Ionic
and Doric inscriptions and papyri show throughout antiquity an almost indis-
criminate interchange of e with ŋɩ, and or with w (in the caso of α there was
no occasion for confusion). Thus the words κλείς, παρειά, λειτουργεῖν, ληστής,
᾿Αριστείδης, Ερεχθείς, Πεντελικός, ἀγαθῆ τύχη, πόλει, γραμματεῖ, εἴπη, Αρέθη,
etc., taken as representatives of their class, appear spelt: during 400-300 B.C.
rather with HI than with EI; during 300-200 B.C. rather with El than with
HI; and during B.C. 200-100 A.D. rather with HI than with EI (26, 5). In par-
ticular we find that, even in the 'public' A inscriptions, the dative of the 1st
and 3rd declensions and the subjunctivo show the following interrelation in
the use of HI and EI respectively :
1st declension.
3rd declension.
subjunctive.
During
B.C. 370-300
ηι
EL
ηι
EL
ηι
ει
188
44
20
17
18
15
""
287-200 105
208
6
170-100 A.D. 54
133
ΙΟ
15
3
(Seo MHecht ii.; cp. KMoistorhans² 28-31 & FBlass Pron. 44-50.)
29. Now let us turn to the theoretical (motrical and grammatical) prin-
ciple. It will be shown elsewhero (123) that the character of archaic
Greek woll justifies us in assuming a richer consonantism for the primitive
FBlass Pron. 25: The distinction between H and E, and O was
originally one of quality, and the only qualitativo distinction which can havo
beon intonded is that which the Italians make prominont both in pronunciation
and in grammatical writing in the case of those two vowols, and only those,
namely the distinction between opon and closod e and o. Tho quantitativo
distinction came to pass accidentally and socondarily,' etc.-And 31: 'distinc-
tion of quantity cannot be 10gardod in this caso (of e and hystorogoneous a] or
elsowhore in ancient times as the cause of differenco in writing.' These aro of
course mero assertions based on a subjectivo opinion, not on facts. Cp. 29 ff.
39
29-29b.]
LONG VOWELS AND
Ely
C.
stage of the language than appears in A, and that the loss of conso-
nants had led to a corresponding change in the language. When there-
fore (in the VII-VI B.C.) a spirit of national education awoke and
the ancestral literature-then all in verse-was adopted as the basis
of the educational system, schoolmasters found that the current texts
had been affected by the loss of the aforesaid consonants and thus ex-
hibited certain metrical anomalies, which had to be removed in the
interest of their pupils. Accordingly teachers and commentators began
to mark the affected syllables with conventional signs. In Achaeic or
Aeolic (03) countries the conventional marks resorted to were either a doub-
ling of the succeeding consonant (ἔμμι, ὀλοφύρρω, κρίννω, κτέννω, φθέρρω,
Xéppwv, ¿évvos), or an epenthetic, the latter being intended as a visible
but mute guide suggested by the i adscript (20° ff.). In this way, original
a e o, when occurring before a lost sound, came to bo written at ei ol,
and thus led to these hysterogeneous or compensated diphthongs which natur-
ally retained for a time the phonetic quality of their simple parents a € 0,
as : τὰς ἄρχαις for τὰς ἄρχανς, παις for *παντς, λύσαις for *λυσαντς, μέλαις
του μέλανς, φάισι for *φαντσι, εις for *&νς (εις), τις for τόνς (τούς), ἔχοισα for
ἔχονσα, μόισα for *μοντία, φέροισι for *φεροντσι (197. 202. 211 11.) Actuated
by similar considerations, the Ionians also adopted certain marks, viz.
the Achaeic e, thon ou for Achaeic o, while a was retained unaltered, as :
φαεινός, ξεῖνος, εἵνεκα, τοὺς νόμους, μοῦσα, ἔχουσι, but πᾶσα, μέλας, φασί. In the
same way Doric dialects adopted ʼn (identified with EI) for e (µì for *ẻoµi,
s for evsels), and w (n) for Achaeic or or Ionic ou (Tàs vóμws, µŵσa). At
last Athonian schoolmasters also saw the expediency of such conventional
symbols and so adopted the Ionic e and ov for compensated or thetic e
and o.
In this way, overy postpositive 4, especially when prevocalic—
therefore every intersonantic-came to be confounded with adscript
intended to graphically symbolizo some lost sound (consonant), and thus
offect or indicato metrical position in the form of 'natural' length. The
consequence of such a confusion was that the said began to be freely
dropped or freely inserted (20° f.). For fullor particulars see App. ii. 9–15.
29". Tho relativo influence of theory (prosody) and physiology on the
orthographic system developed, even in the dialects, ever since historical
timos, is strikingly illustrated by the various methods adopted in Achaoic
(especially in its Boeotian form), the most conservative of all dialects.
Here we find: (1) originally positional or 'thotic' a developed first into
αἳ (τάλαις, ταὶς δίκαις), thon either yielded to Attic α τάλας, τὰς δίκας), or
was phonetically transcribed to ŋ (=e: xýp for xeip, wŷda for naîda); (2) origi-
πῆδα
nally thotice developed first into el (rídem, maréip, pé), thon oithor yielded
to (Ionic-) Attic ʼn (ríonμ, raτhp, μn), or was phonetically transcribed to
η (χήρ, φέρην) or by ι (= ει : ίμι, ἱράνα); (3) originally thetic o developed
first into oἳ τοὺς πέπλοις, μοῖσα, φέροισι), later replaced by w (τῶ, δάμω, ἀν
Oрάπw), then either yielded to (Ionic-) Attic ov (= =ω: τοὺς πέπλους, μοῦσα,
pépovoi), or was phonetically transcribed by the simple u-symbol v (zaλû,
tûs tû
τῆς ἄλλυς, τῦ δάμυ, μῦσα, φέρυσι) ;-a mode of spelling which found its way
also into the received or panhellenic orthography (36).-All these modes
and stages of spelling are amply represented in the respective inscriptions.
b. The process just dolineated shows thon that the above resultant diphthongs
aro not original but hysterogeneous (spurious), and so cannot, in thoir first
stage, claim a sound different from that of their simple predecessors. However,
as in process of time they cano to be systematically applied, it was inevitable
that pupils and gonoral roaders should havo gradually confounded thom in overy
respect, and that from reading the confusion passed into common life. (Op. 29º,
App. ii. 12.)
η
η
29. Regarding the adoption of the symbol ŋ as a separate vowel, the
promotors of the spelling reform wore ovidently animated by the wish
to remove all ambiguities and anomalies in matters of law (GGroto Gr.
Hist. vi. 524 (f.), and more particularly to simplify the roading at school
and elsewhere of the national literature, then chiefly metrical, and to
40
HYSTEROGENEOUS DIPHTHONGS.
[29b-29cc.
this end merely sanctioned the conventional system already initiated
and developed at school. Accordingly that particular e was transcribed
by n which, though not diphthongized to hysterogeneous et (29), appeared
in verse as 'long' (usually under the ictus, 89); or, to put it another way,
that e was transliterated by 7, which in the other principal dialects
already figured as 7, and furthermore that e which in Doric (and Achaeic)
corresponded to a, but in Ionic already appeared as 7, except after e p
whore the Doric (and Achaeic) a had established itself in Attic and so
was retained, e. g. :
Panhellenic: ύψηλός, κληδών, γῆρας, πατήρ, ευγενής, μήν, φρών, δοτήρ,
εξήκοντα, ποιήσω, ποίημα, χρήμα, χρήσω, μπω, βέβλημαι, μαι, ἔσβην, εἴην,
λύκς, etc.
Atlic and Ionic : πλήν (Doric πλάν), μήν (μάν), βάδην (βάδαν), μάχη (μάχα),
ἠλακάτη (ἀλακάτα), μνήμη (μνάμα), σκηνή (σκανά), πληγή (πλαγά), νῆσος (νᾶσος),
κήρυξ (καρυξ), μήκος (μάκος), στρατηγός (-αγός), τήκω (τάκω), δόξης (δύξας),
σεμνότης (-τας), etc.
But Doric and Attic : χώρα (Tonic χώρη), νεανίας (νεηνίης), σοφία (-ίη), θώραξ
(θώρης), κρατήρ (κρητήρ), τραχύνω τρηχύνω), πράσσω (πρήσσω), πειράσομαι
(πειρήσομαι), θέατρον (θέητρον), ἀπέδρα (-δρη), γραῦς (γρηΰς), κέκραμαι («έκρη
μαι), λάθρα (θρη), λίαν (λίην), ole.
29%. The rapid spread from the outset of the symbol ŋ-not as H (=h) but
as an additional symbol or new letter (with a new name, 72)-was apparently
due to various causes: unlike its associate e, it prevented phonetic confusion
with original and real diphthongal ; it was thought to graphically sym-
bolize its progenitor, H being taken for a combination of El (or EE ?); and it bad
also become widespread, apart from Ionic, in Doric and Achacic, including the
adjacent Boeolian (ep. xp for χείρ, «Άνος for ἐκεῖνος, τρις for τρεις, φέρων for
φέρειν, Απον for εἶπον, είχες του εἶχες; φιλήτω του φιλείτω, Κλησθένης for
Κλεισθένης, Ηράκλητος for -κλειτος, Ἧs for εἷς, ἔστηλαν for ἔστειλαν, ἄπηρος
for helpos, &c.). This frequent concurrence of ŋ and i thon inevitably led
to a confusion, and obscured the special use for which either new symbol had
been intended, the Athenian public at large imagining that 7 had been
introduced as a monoliteral and convenient phonetic equivalent to its biliteral
predecessor and associate . Now as e by that time had assumed the
ei [1],
sound of (34), it happened that ŋ began to be popularly read like, while
among (heorists and trainod readers it must have retained, for a considerable
time, the sound of its predecessor E (cp. 29. 48). In other words, H was tech-
nically intended for 'long' c, but popularly mistaken for e, which c by this
time was pronounced as i.
29cc. As expected, the innovation could not fail to cause confusion
between the old and new system. At the same time the novel symbols
were regarded, for a long time (41), as a sort of aliens and mere graphic
alternativos for the ancestral e and o respectively [3]. This circumstance
also accounts for the striking phenomenon that, whereas the primordial
and traditional E and O are used times without number for 7 and a re-
spectively, the lattor, having originated as concrete marks of compensated
e and o, and so being subservient chiefly to specialists, aro on the whole
rarely misused for the former (27). It is only since G times that H and
have been completely identified with E and O respectively, and thus very
often take their placo (26, 2 & 7).
η
[1] Compare Pl. Crat. 418 ο οἱ μὲν ἀρχαιότατοι ἱμέραν (έμ- ?) τὴν ἡμέραν εκά-
λουν, οἱ δὲ ὕστερον) εἱμέραν, οἱ δὲ νῦν ἡμέραν. Οp. 41.
C.
12 Henco in an Attic inscription of the IV [bofore 340] B.C., found on the
Acropolis (CIA iv. 4321, 3 f.)-which has nothing to do with stenography-v is
called the fifth or the vowels, τὸ δὲ πέμπτον τῶν φωνηέντων Υ- un expression
which obvionsly excludes 7 and w from the list of proper lotters. Even in an
Ionic abecedarium of the Vh B.C. (ESRoborts p. 19), the symbols 7 and a are
absent. Cp. 16 [1].
41
29d-30.]
DIPHTHONGS MONOPHTHONGIZED.
C.
29ª. To sum up, in Greek sonantism, as exhibited in classical Attic,
the so-called long vowels and in the greatest majority of cases the
diphthongs & and ou, represent not original, physiological or specific
sounds; they are hysterogeneous and accidental symbols portraying
prosodic phenomena developed within historical antiquity, but pre-
vious to the IVth B.C. The successive stages of this evolution can be
distinctly traced in the case of t and ou by their spelling in the
contemporary inscriptions and, under direct Greek influence, in the
carly Latin orthography also. Here we can distinguish four broad
phases of spelling: the primitive, the scholastic, and the phonetic, out
of which arose the fourth or received (post-Euclidian) orthography
current in our texts. See App. ii. 9-15.
Primitive.
I. E
Scholastic.
Phonetic.
Received.
EI
έχει
és (evs)
πρέσβες
χρέα
devos
vecos
EI or H
EI or I
ἔχειν, ἔχην
ἔχειν, ἔχιν
εἰς, ής
és, is
ἔχειν
els
πρέσβεις, -βης
πρέσβες, -βις
χρεία, χρήσ
χρέα, χρία
πρέσβεις.
χρεία
deivos
divus
divus
veicos
vicus
vicus
sei, seive (ei, eire)
si, sive
II.
βός
τύτο
0
ΟΥ ΟΙ Ω
ΟΥ
βοῦς, βῶς
βους
τούτου, τώτω
oncia
τούτου
uncia
plous
ioudex
plus
iudex
si, sive
ΟΥ
Boûs
τούτου
uncia
plus
iudex
C.
29°. The foregoing historical facts show plainly enough that, at the
time of their adoption, the vowel symbols 7 and w had no phonetic
value of their own, but served as mere technical (metrical or gram-
matical) varieties of e and o respectively. It is evident then that
the gradual development of the Ionic orthography initiated prior to
the VI B.C. and finally adopted or legalized by Athens in 403 B.C.,
originated not in the need of symbolizing pre-existing sounds, but in
the need of symbolizing metrical phenomena. In other words, the
new or scholastic spelling was not the result of previous phonetic
growth, but the very cause of the subsequent (post-Eucleidian) phonetic
system. It is therefore misleading to start from the assumption, for
primordial Greek, of sounds which were not symbolized, and to treat
them as concrete tests by the side of the old symbols for phonetic
research is surely a false method.
The Diphthongs in particular (19 ff.).
30. The diphthongs au, et, ol, vl, av, ev (nu occurs only as
augment and wv mainly in Ionic) are sounded by Erasmians
diphthongally and by traditionists monophthongally in the
sense explained above (24). Now judging from the striking
frequency of vowel sequences in Homeric (also post-IIomeric)
compositions (124), and the rareness if not absence of contraction
and crasis in them, we are warrantod in assuming a diphthongal
pronunciation of these vowel pairs in so far as they are
original,' that is in so far as they had come into real existence
42
MONOPHTHONGIZATION OF DIPHTHONGS.
[30-32.
as early as in Homeric times. But when we descend to classical
Attic, we find a very different phenomenon the process
of contraction (as represented in 156-165b (appears fully and
systematically developed, and the so-called hiatus, either with-
in a word or between two consecutive words, is generally
avoided. Now as non-contraction (dovvapeoría) of the diph-
thongs and contraction (including crasis) are two opposite
processes, we are bound to assume that the diphthongs in A
had long become monophthongs. This is also proved by
the fact that no diphthong ever shows a partial elision
(141), and the papyri-unlike the inscriptions, which were
engraved not phonetically but at first (in A) σтoɣndóv, later
(in P) mechanically (91)-never dissect a diphthong to its com-
ponent parts at the end of a line. Further very conclusive
evidence is afforded by the inscriptions of the Delphian hymns.
to Apollo (composed after 146 B.C.), where the diphthongs,
when they happen to stand under a long note, are not dissolved
into their elements, but repeated in their entirety just like simple
vowels (OCrusius 92-94), whereas the natural way of prolonging
the sound of a diphthong would be to draw out its dominant
element: μαντείειον (twice), ἐφρούουρει, εΐειλες, κλειειτύν, Φοῖοιβον,
βωμοῖοισιν, ἀειόλοιοις, ὁμοῦου. So again in Bull. Cor. Hell.
xviii. 349ff.: 3 κλειειτύν ; η θιγούουσα; 17 (p. 352) άδειειαν τ'; 23
έχεις alongside with 3 ὕμνωων; η γλυκάας; το αιθήτρ; 13
ἀαμπέχει; 15 γααλ[όφῳ], τριτωωνιάδος; 19 ἀαμβρόταν, ἀνθ' ὧν ;
21 τεχνιτώων ; 22 ἔνοικοος ; 26 καμβρόται; 27 Λαατούς.
!!!
30". Regarding the occurrence in the said hymns (OCrusius 94) of couúdpov
for ενύδρου, and τούρων for ταύρων, such an artificial analysis was a matter
of absolute necessity, since the alternative rendering by means of repeti-
tion: εὐενδρου and ταυαύρων would produce ενένδρου and ταυάυρων, or at least
evéudpov and Taváupov, and thus render irrecognizable the original sound.
31. As to the spurious diphthongs a,,, v-originally
written (AE)AI, EI, OI, YI, later AI, HI, QI, YI-in so far as I
here is original, or a genuine phonetic symbol, they evidently
came into existence at a period when, as in the case of the
proper diphthongs, either vowel was still sounded separately,
the process being that the first prevailed over the second and
ultimately swallowed it.
32. The phonotic process which brought about the monophthongization
of the diphthongs (ae) at, ov, El, ol, vi, ạ, n, w, is commonly explained by the
theory that before reaching their prosont (or N) monophthongal sound,
thoso vowel pairs must have passed through cortain intermediate stagos
of phonotic gradation, that is through a gradual phonetic process, the
ultimate result of which was that in some cases, as in a w, the pre-
ηι
Tho accontuation pavтeletov, épovoúpel, etc. assumos a crescendo utter-
anco which is against tho falling (decroscendo) naturo of accent. Moreover, if
arranged under musical notation, the above words would run thus: pav-Teî...
ον ἐ-φρού . . . ρει, etc.
43
32-32b.] MONOPHTHONGIZATION OF DIPHTHONGS.
positive 'long' vowel prevailed over its postpositive 'short' associate and
produced the spurious diphthongs a na (FBlass Pron. 43 ff.), while in
othor cases, as in (ae)at, ov, et, o, u, it was the postpositive vowel which,
though short, overpowered its propositive associate, and producod e u i i i
respectively [i. This theory however, though simple and prepossessing,
is a fanciful explanation. Moreover several weighty objections arise
against it:
(1) The same cause acting under the same conditions could surely not
have brought about different results, as shown by the case of a & a (now
=e & a), oɩ & ç (now – i & o), «ɩ & ʼn (now≈i).
p
L
(2) The transition of a from a + through & to e; of ou from o + v
to u; of a from € +ɩ to i; of o from o + through ü [!] to i-to pass over
the post-Eucleidian combinations nor and wor g-naturally pre-
supposes a long period during which the first vowel sound must have
struggled with the second for the preponderanco (èrupáтela)['], a period
of slurred pronunciation which ought to have shown a confusion of the
two contending vowel-sounds: a and , o and v, e and i, o and
whereas such a characteristic interchange does not actually occur.
4, etc.,
(3) The originally composite sound assumed must have stood somo-
where between the first and second constituent of tho diphthongs in
question, and then from some 'unknown' causes the compound or diph-
thongal sound in certain cases advanced towards the second constituent,
and ultimately was absorbed by it, while in other cases the process was
regressive, and so has resulted in the exclusive prevalence of the first con-
stituent, as shown by tho spurious diphthongs ai, ni, wi (a, n, w), where the
has become mute and therefore subscript. Such a progressivo-regrossive
or oscillating process moreover militatos against the very constitution of
a 'diphthong' whore the first vowel always predominates over the second
vowol, which latter thus assumos a semivocalic or rather consonantal
function (18. 19. 325) 78. ESiovers 384; KBrugmann Gr. Gram.3 33.
32. The monophthongization of the diphthongs in Grook lios in more
causos than one, which will be better understood whon we have first
taken into consideration tho peculiar principles operating in Greek. We
have before us three different classes of diphthongs :
Sponking ol' a n ợ (nu wv), FBlass in his Pron. 4; 'lays down' as their
original value āi či ôi ĉu õu, and arguos that those somi-diphthongs are one and
all'inconvenient' to pronounco, because the component parts do not coalesce to
a proper unity, and honco tho tendency of the languago either to fuse them
more closely together by shortoning the first eloment [this is puroly hypo-
thotical], or to simplify them by rojocting the socond.' Novertholoss, Prof. Blass
contrives to show (ib. 48) that this 'inconvenionco' was withstood as late as the
' 7 @
close of the III B.C., whon the semi-diphthongs a bocumio monophthongs
rd'
C.
by 'rojecting' the adscript. But granting for a moment that thoso vowol pairs
had really ovor had tho valuo laid down by Prof. Blass, if that value was or had
become inconvoniont in A-P timos, how could it have boon 'convoniont' from
the outset down to A antiquity, and so have had an actual existonco?
[2] FBlass holds (Prou. 32 f.) that tho hysterogeneous ov was in 378 B.C. still 0,
but that in 363 B.c. it had changed to u by rapid advancos,' thus implying that
one and the same person at Athons in the IV B.C. witnossod, within twenty-five
yours, a gradual succession, from one another, of all intermediato sounds lying
between o and u, after which the process of phonotic change stopped for over.
Again, an Athonian who happoned to loavo Attica in 378, on his roburn home in
363, found it difficult to understand his fellow-citizens. To such a startling
theory it would have boon worth whilo to adduco a parallel from the history of
any languago.
The frequent omission of intervocalic in instances like del, Пepacús,
ἱέρεα, άνδρεος, ποεί, etc., is iroloyant,
Soo 20º.
44
MONOPHTHONGIZATION OF DIPHTHONGS. [32b-32d.
1. Diphthongs in which the prepositive vowel has overpowered and
absorbed its postpositive associate i, as in a, 7, @ (in early A written AE
[later AI] EI OI, 19" & 31);
し
​ợ
2. Diphthongs in which the postpositive has overpowered and absorbed
its prepositive associate, as in e, ot, u (now all =¿);
3. Diphthongs in which oither of the two component vowels has nearly
preserved its own sound with a decided preponderance of the prepositivo
a ore and a consequent labialization of the postpositivo v, as in av ev
(now av ev or af ef, 24 & 51 ff.).
32º. Each of these three classes has its special causes, and must be con-
sidered separately. To do this adequately we must constantly bear in
mind the following four fundamental principles:
1. Beside Sanskrit, Greck is tho most inflectional of all languages
whether dead or living; hence it exhibits an infinite number of suffixes
and prefixes (127; cp 16") ['],
2. Grook is based on the peculiar principle of trisyllabic accentuation
(trisyllabolony) with a decidedly regressive tendency (32. 84").
3. The eminently inflectional character of Greek involves a constant
sway to and fro of the accent within the last three syllablos, in particular
from the anteponult (which very often coincides with the root or stem) to
tho penult, and conversely.
4. Of the five original vowel sounds (16), a is the relatively strongest,
next comes 0, then Uz thon e
and finally i as the last in ordor and weakest
of all (146 fl.).
32ª. A caroful study of the above four principles will show that it is
the operation of one or more of them, in particular the influence of the
accent and by accent we moan stress (77", 85. App. i.)- that has brought
about the monophthongization of the vowel pairs a, et, ot, vi (ni, w). It was
the accont, acting as a dynamic agent from various points (seats), that led
the process, the start having evidently been made from the root or stem
of the words. For it will be remembered that in a given word the root
or stem is the primitive elemont, while the suffixes and prefixes are
hystorogeneous accretions, so that the root or stem must have originally
boon the seat of accent, and probably of a considerably stronger accent
too (App. i. 17 & [1]). When in process of time primary (mostly
suffixal) and binary (mostly prefixal accretions began to amplify the words
to polysyllables-a caso so common in Greek-these hystorogeneous acero-
tions naturally fell under the sway of the accont and so led to the develop-
mont of the system of trisyllabic accentuation (trisyllabotony), peculiar
to Greek. Now as long as the total number of syllables was kept within
three, the accont generally retained its soat, but as soon as that number
was excoeded, or extraneous (grammatical, analogical, otc.) influences
camo into play, the rhythmical balance of the word was disturbed by
drawing the accont out of its original seat over to the penultima or oven
to the ultima (ep. Α λέγε, λέγομεν, λεγόμεθα, λεγομένους-μέλισσα, μελίσσας,
μeλioσâv). On the other hand, when one or more suffixal syllables were
dropped, tho accent generally receded to its original seat (riµnonoónevos,
τιμήσομεν, τίμησον, τίμα—ἡδιόνων, ἥδιον). Again in cause of prolixal accro-
tions tho accent, in consequence of its recessive tendency, often shifted its
position oven further back than its original sont in the root-syllable when
the prefix either carried emphasis or had coalesced with the stem to au
indistinguishablo whole (άνομος, εύ-λογος, ἀέκων ἄκων, προέπεμπε προύπεμπε).
[The Grook 'verb' alone shows no less than 508 endings (finito alone 249
against 243 in Sanskrit), while Latin oxhibits 143, and Gothic 38 (GCurtius Gr.
Vorb 3 ft.).
45
32d-325.]
PRONUNCIATION OF 1, EI, Y, H, ΟΙ,
On this principle we have, taking into account simple words only and
indicating the seat of the accent by a capital letter :—
Αερε
Αερον
but ἀρετε
λειπε
λειπον
λείπετε
ἀερομεν
λειπομεν
άπρω hence αἴρω (194)
""
θειος
θειον
θείων
λείπω
θείους
λείπω
""
""
θεῖος
>"
TELXOS
""
TEIXEOS
τειχέα
τείχος
κοιλος
κοιλον
κοιλοο
κοιλων
κοίλους
71
όμοιος
ὅμοιον
ὁμοιου
ὁμοιων
""
για
γιαν
μυίας
hence
μ'α i.. μια
κοίλος
ὁμοίους 1 ὅμοιος
λελυκγια
λελυκγιαν
λελυκυίας
"7
δεδος
δαεδι
δπεδα
""
λελυκυία -κρα
dâ's (19ª)",
δᾷς
ἀεττομεν
ἀΕττω
Λεττον
'Α'ττε
""
""
άττω
προίρας
προιρα
""
προιρα
19
προ'ρα
""
πρώρα
χρειζομεν
χρείζετε
""
χρειζε
""
χρέ ζω
""
Χρήζω
-
(τουτο
τούτου
""
ΤΟΥΤῳ
τούτο)
""
32. In the case of the spurious diphthongs (μυία [i. e. μια], δᾷς, πρώρα,
XPS), we must reckon as coefficient factor the relative strength of the
constituent vowels, in that the propositivos a o ve, as stronger sounds,
have overpowered their postpositive attendant (32°, 4. 146 ff.).
>
32. The above illustrations, taken as representatives of all classos of
stom diphthongs (suffixal and prefixal diphthongs being due to gramma-
tical and analogical influences, 32"), show that the monophthongization
of' (αε)αι, ει, οι, υι, ου, αι (=q), ηι, ωι, originated chiefly in the system of
trisyllabotony which shifted the accent now to the prepositive now to
the postpositive vowel, and thus rendered both forms equally familiar
to the people. A further consequence of this alternative accentuation
was a corresponding 'lengthening' of the accented, and 'shortening' of
the unaccentod vowel, so that when in process of time popular speech
fixed the accent on one seat rather than on the other, the unaccented vowel
was further reduced and soon swallowed up altogether. It bocomes clear
thon that the monophthongization of the diphthongs AI EI OI YI OY (HI
ωι) was not, as generally believed, effected by a slow and gradual pro-
coss, witnessed within historical or oven postclassical times ; it rallor
points to the concurrence in primordial Greek of diphthongs with an
alternative accontuation (άϊ & αί, έτ & εί, ό & οἱ [ & δύ], etc., ep. either
as ai-ther and i-ther), with the natural consoquence that as timo went on
Accord-
ono accentuation prevailed over the other and obliterated it.
ingly thero was no intermodiato gradual process, no compromise or blend-
ing of the two vowel sounds, no progressive or oscillating phonetic
process which lod on the one hand to tho propor, and on the other
to the spurious diphthongs, but both forms are virtually co-oval and
go back to primordial antiquity. At the same time the monophthongiza-
tion in question was not effected all at once, but the process affected
each diphthong in each case or word separately and at a different timo,
though all certainly in proclassical antiquity. It is further clear that
in the spurious diphthongs the muteness or phonetic disappearance of the
postpositivo 1 ( adscript, lator subscript) is not duo to the preponderance
of the prepositivo vowel (α η ω) ‘by virtue of its longth, but the vory
roverso: the disappearance or mutonoss of the postpositivo acted as
a sort of compensatory lengthening on its prepositivo associate.
[Comparo Al or AI-ΑΕ(η) in φαίνω, αἴρω, σημαίνω, τεκμαίρω φανώ &
φαενῶ, ἄρω, σημανῶ, τεκμαρῶ-- Ηνα, ερα, ἐσήμηνα, ἐτέκμηρα. So further
φεύγω φυγείν, τεύχω τυχεῖν, λείπω λιπεῖν, εἰμι μεν, οἶδα ἴδμεν οι ἴσμεν, etc.
168.864.]
=
32%. Different is the caso of the diphthongs av ev (now av cv or aƒ ef).
Hore we find that either vowol has retained its individual sound, with
prevalence of the first (32, 3), so that the composito rosultant (áu óu or
rathor au eu) finally became av af or ev ef (51).
46
PRONUNCIATION OF Y AND I.
[32h-34b.
32. From the above general remarks it becomes clear that, strictly
speaking, Greck, since historical times, knows nothing of real (phonetic
or acoustic), but merely graphic diphthongs, the only exception being
afforded by the vowel pairs au and eu (ŋu, wv), and that only previous to
the complete consonantization of their postpositive v.
A. PRONUNCIATION OF THE SONANTS I, EI, Y, H, OI.
33. The vowel symbol, whose pronunciation as i at all
times cannot be questioned, has interchanged, ever since the VIth
B.C., first with EI, then with Y and H. The following inscriptional
data will illustrate the nature and frequency of their confusion
and the degree of consequent homophony among them.
34. I. Interchange of with el. (Cp. 30 & c f.) The fol-
lowing specimens, among numerous others, may suffice for the
purpose. (But cp. 28, c f.)
332 B.C.
λλeíπ CIA ii.
Vth B.C. xiio Roehl IGA 381 c B 15d 12. Διοτείμου ᾿Αθήν. Ε΄ 419,
10, I (ALÓTIμOS CIA 201, 1014, 1029, &c.).
1029, &c.). аTOKтíη CIA i.
ἀποκτίνη 9, 28.
Μιλιχίο Διός Εφημ. Αρχ. 1889 p. 51 (Μειλ- CIA 1122, &c.). Εἰφιστιάδης
CIA ii. 465, 105 ('IPT- ib. 104 & 105. 'Hit- ib.). Σαλαμίνιος CIA
ii. 482, 113. Pidias PKretschmer 36. 450 B.C. Erayıîrai CIA i. 230.
447 Β.C. Σταγιρῖται ib. 234. 392 Β.C. Επαφρόδιτος CIA ii. 482, 108.
'Appodeioios CIA ii. 482, 114 (beside 'Appodio- ib. 110). 378-367 B.C.
Siepioμara CIA ii. 678 B 47 (diepeioμ- ib. 651, 4; 695, 15, &c.).
διερίσ ματα
IVth B.C. Mixio beside Medixi Bull. Corr. IIell. vii. 507 & 509.
opíxaλkos CIA ii. 681 (ópely- ib. 751, b, 21; & 765, 24-25).
'Apiorídov Bull. Corr. Hell. xii. 254, 14. 320 B.C.
835, i-1 86. 292-1 Β.C. ἀπολέλιπται ἰκόνος ᾿Αθήν. Η'
III B.C. Μιδίας Κουμαν. Επιγρ. 1835. Στιριεύς ib. 1153.
3151, 5. Ηπιρῶτις ib. 1675 & 1679. ισέπραξε CIA ii. 603, 9.
Kokodíly Mahaffy, Petrie Pap. i. 14, 5. 164-3 Β.C.
Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 8, 37. 163 Β.C. ἀποτείσει ib. p. 32, 18.
ib. p. 10, 5. Κρητεί ib. p. 11, 37 (Κρητί ib. 48). τραπεζείτου ib. p. 16, 7-8.
ὑποκιμένων ib. p. 10, 21. 161 B.C. Týσis (for -σets) ib. p. 21, 10. ÉTTI-
dolions ib. p. 17, II. Toùs ypaµµurîs ib. p. 17, 15-18 twice; also p. 19, 17.
τοὺς γραμματῖς
ἐλήφασι ib. p. 23, 8. 9. 15. 26. 30. ἀντιλημμένου ib. p. 19, 4-5
ever since. For many other examples see GMeyer³ § 115.
rd
0.
294-5, 9.
ἄπιμι ib.
237 B. C.
Αφροδισίω
βασιλεικοῦ
and so on
34¹. II. Interchange of y with 1 (or its homophones e¡ and н).
Doaling with the sound of u, it is difficult to trace the physiological
process which led to its change from its original u-sound (16) to its
present i-sound. Still, as in the absence of any explanation (that of u-ü-i
being a fanciful hypothesis irreconcilable with Greek phonology) even
conjectures are allowablo, I believe that we can detect a plausible explan-
ation of the phonomenon in the generalization of tho above principle
of the monophthongization of the diphthongs (32 ff.). Wo have seen there
that, under the stress of accent, the prepositive vowol of the diphthongs
ov and vɩ became early muto. With this change of ovory (original) ov to
u and every u to i, the u-sound came to be expressed systematically by
ov and occasionally by the (rather uncommon) original simple v. Now as
in progress of time, ou, already the principal representative of the u-sound,
gained in frequency through the accession of hysterogeneous (compensated)
ov,
il may be conjectured that it gradually appropriated the whole field
of tho u-sound, while u, having already been associated with its com-
47
34b-35b.]
PRONUNCIATION OF Y, 1, 01.
panion, gradually went further in that direction and ultimately ended
by being systematically either read as or transcribed by ov.
C.
C.
35. 600-550 B.C. Συκεεῦσιν beside Σιγενεῦσιν IGA 452. Vth B.C.
Aióviσos, Alovoiyévŋs, Moúnɣos PKretschmer p. 119 (on A red-figured
vases). Túpivoɩ ib. 64. 90. 403 B.C. Kuvdins CIA i. 230 (beside
KI- CIA i. 240). 378 B.C. μuov CIA ii. 17ª 45.
374 B.C.
'Aμikтúoves CIA ii. 54 (beside frequent -Kri-) KMeisterhans² 22. 320
Β.C. Σίβιλλα ΓIA ii. 835. IVth B.C. Touýva for 'loμ-, PKretschmer 31.
Kiavis for Ku- ib. f. 279 B.C. Xoipulos Bull. Corr. Hell. 1890 p. 389.
IIIrd B.C. Eurxís CIA ii. 2935. 230 B.C. μυov Mahaffy ii. xvi. 2, 9.
180 Β.Ο. κυλύχνιον, Κυνθυκῷ Kühner-Blass i. 70. Χοιρύλος Bull. Corr
Hell. iv. 13, 81 & 21, 164. IIB.C. μvov Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 22.
6-10 (thrice); so too 24, 5; 25, 15-17 (twice) (but urv 46, 24, etc.).
158-7 в.C. аруЄñeρéтη» Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 41, 121 (beside apуum- ib.
97). 73 Β.C. Μυνύκιος Εφημ. Αρχ. iii. 1884 p. 100 (Μινύκιος Bull. Corr.
Hell. viii. 154 [45 A.D.]). 96-98 A.D. Túros Bull. Corr. Hell. viii.
154. II. A.D. λɩñòv (for λɩπ-) CIG 9727; GKaibel Epigr. 730. 161–
169 A.D. Tußépios CIG 1168. paulías Bull. Corr. Hell. xii. 490 no.
115 (Paµdías ib.). Alpuλía Mitth. xii. 170 no. 3. Αφρικανός CIG
add. 1999b. Bapßúλeia CIA iii. 127.
Βαρβύλλεια
170-180 A. D. Πομπύλιος CIG
add. 3822 b². KUTÚNIOS CIG 1738. Eépßuλλa Archives de miss. iii. ser.
III. 244, no. 71. Συλουανός CIG 1967. Συνπλίκιος Arch. ep. Mitth. xi.
32, no. 31. Tußépios CIG 1168. II-III A.D. µŋvάovoa CLeemans
95, 6 (beside uŋvówv 21). πύξις for πήξις, 97, 47. θήρα for θύρα 107,
20. μηνύει 131, 19. ἥμνησα for ὑμ- 131, 40. μηστηρίων 135, 39.
βαρίς for βαρύς 83, 15. τοῖς for τῆς, 107, 12. σκύπτρον for σκη- 97, 21.
συνψηφίσας for -ψηφ- 109, 5. πικρίας for πικ- 121, 45. ἀπόκριφος
109, 33. τοῦ βηθού του βυθοῦ 115, 23. ταχήν for -χύν 117, 39. IIIrd
A.D. μoλißîy Gr. Pap. Brit. Mus. 98, 432; also 113, 926 (beside
μodußoûr ib. 74, 304, and poλvßoû 76, 358: IVt! A.D.).
Beiðwápxns (for -u-) Berl. Akad. 1888 p. 888, 61, 10.
2824, 18. III-IV A.D. Внjavтíov ČIA iii. 3483.
Βυζαντίου
N. Zaub. 77, 1 φιλακτήριον, αλλοιωσείνη, δεσπίνης, οἱμέρας, παρεστώσοι (for
-σῃ), σύ (for σή), ὑμερινόν, ἔθηκας (for ἔθηκας), etc. IV A.D. φρυκτόν
Great Louvre Pap. 513 (рIT- ib. 266. 1460. 3017). μoß ib. 2466
(μολύβουν ib. 329). φυλύμινον ib. 2695. κίκλω ib. 2138. IV-VA.D.
μodißouv Gr. Pap. Brit. Mus. 122, 30. Huérepos (for vµ-) ib. p. 108, 746.
vth A.D. Kipia (for kup-) ib. p. 124, 14 (kupia ib. 20). 487 Α.Ο. ινδικτυόνος
CWessely Prol. 65. V-VI A.D. ámóλнore CWessely Akad. Wiss.
1889 p. 115. ἀπολέσαται ib. p. 114. μαρτυρώ ib. p. 115. ὀξύρυχος ib.
p. 106 iii. twice (beside frequent -pur- ib.). Tv y' μapτúpwv ib. p. 112.
μαρτύρων
VIth A.D. Hлoуpápas Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 203, 82. πολυτίων CIG
8643, 10. λήμης (for λυ-) ib. 8655. VI-VII A.D. ůµôv (for yμ@v)
CWessely Prol. 64. Gr. Urk. Berlin 308, 13 ράφια ή πράήνων,
μάρτυρος, ανάλισις ib. 608 A.D. ROUGIu (lor -Ký) CWessely Prol. 64.
VIIth A.D. μaprúpo (beside -Túpw) CWessely Prol. 64. [B]aßiλóv
WECrum Coptic MSS. no. 53 (beside Baßvλóv ib.). ἀλυθινός ib.
39. κίρι (lor κυρώ 1.0. κυρίῳ) ib. 12. 15. 42. προσκηνήσ[ο]μεν ib. 8 (-κυν-
23)—and so on ever since.
C.
th
C.
th
C.
C.
215 A.D.
ὑπεύθυνοι CIG
CWessely
35º. In later Sanskrit, Grook v is transcribed almost as often by i as by u,
but then curiously Grook is often transcribed by u as woll (AlbWobor 615
& 621 f.). Conversely Sanskrit i is transcribed into Grook now by a now by
v (ib. 628, App. i. 11 [3]).
35. The allegation that the Erasmian pronunciation of u as ü or French
u is heard in such N instances as (northern) küpá for rvpá, äxüpa for
ἄχυρα, τυρί for τυρί, rosts on a moro fallacy, whether tho testimony procoods
48
PRONUNCIATION OF H.
[35b-37.
from Gorman (KFoy Lautsystem 84; GMeyer § 93; FBlass 21) or Greek
sources. For the former authorities are misled by the palatal sound of the
preceding 'y' x' (cp. 56b. 57. 91) which they mistake for part of the suc-
ceeding v-sound, and the latter make it a patriotic or pleasant duty to bear
testimony to the 'preservation' of ü-sound in N, since they are told that
it is 'classical.' As a matter of fact, N knows absolutely no other vowel
sounds than a e io u (16º), all well defined and isochronous, except in
position (App. ii. 1 & [1]).
35°. Likewise the inference drawn by FBlass (39 f. cp. PKretschmer 68)
from the present name of Kumi and Slura (Κούμη, Στούρα) for the ancient Κύμη
and Erúpa, as to the pronunciation in ▲ of u as u, cannot be accepted, since
these modern forms merely point to the influence of the Latino-Venetian
administration.
oi
36. Under Aeolic (particularly Boeotian ?) influence, the sonants
v and on came to be regarded among G-B scribes as equivalent, and
thus were almost indiscriminately substituted for each other (29), as:
160 Β. C. ἀνύγετε Louvre Pap. 50, 7. ἀνύγω ib. 51, 7. σοὶ λέγοι (for
σὺ λέγῃ) Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 106, 675. ἐνυκίων, φυνίκον, ἀκυλάντως,
CWessely, Akad. Wiss. 1889 p. 115. Ist A.D. poípa (for µúpa) FG Kenyon,
Class. Texts p. 97 (=r 517). оi πрауμатενóμevu Arch. Inst. Amer. ii.
36. апотрúcυ (for -dpúpoi) FGKenyon Class. Texts p. 106 (=Q 21).
dưó (for do) ib. p. 108 (=2 648). τὰ λυπά CIG 2824, 6. πεπύημαι
2826, 23.
ἀνύξαι, εἰ δέ τις ἀνύξι ib. 1933, 6-8. 153 A. D. ταύτην
Gr. Úrk. Berlin 153, 18 & 35. ¿píλi µʊ for opeidei μo 155, 5. ib. 183
(†85), 21 To μoo μépos. 276 († II-III), 20 oùv oú, etc. etc. 238-
244 A.D. Nomveiova CIA iii. 1197, ii. 17. IIIrd A.D. ávūža CIA iii.
1427, C. 4. ἀνύξας ib. 1428, 3. κυμητήριον (very often), κτήριον (for
oikηT-) KMeisterhans² 46, 10. ἐπύησα, Διονοισίου Mitth. xviii. 206.
ΟΤ
36. The frequent substitution of -eîa for yîa in the feminine of the
perfect participle active is apparently analogical, due to the influence
of the adjectives -ús, -ú, -eîa, as:
ἐρρηγεῖα (often), ἐπιτετελεκεῖα, ἑστακεῖα, συναγαγοχεῖα, διερρωγεῖα, λε-
λοιπεία, γεγονεία (often), συναραρεία, Ειλειθεῖα, etc. all in old inscrip-
tions. G. Meyer" § 130.
37. III. a. Interchange of н with 1 (or €1.
32 f., 34).
VI
See 26. 4, 28 ff.,
Vth B.C. Epißos for
Μείλιχος,
452 B. C. [K]aµнрñя CIA i. 228, 12.
Euonẞos (on a red-figured vase) PKretschmer 138.
Múλixos, Miλexos (on vases) ib. 133 f. & 233. 425 B. C. 'Hπо-
Kрárns Rochl IGA 26. Σικινεται CIA i. 37. Πιδασῆς CIA i. 37 (Πηδ
ib. 229, 232, 231, 233). 422-419 B.C. σußúvŋ CIA iì. 170, 19;
also 172, 18 (420 B.C.), and often since. 420 в.C. Kаµнрns ib.
263, 9 (Kaµns ib. 237, 11. 239, 52. 240, 75. 256, 17). 378 B.C.
ELKIVATAL CIA i. 17, B, 31. 349 B.C. Ova[i] (for -v) CIA ii. 755, 7.
330-317 B.C. áµaέíñoda CIA ii. add. 834, C, 4, 2. 323 B.C. ápЄîke
CIA ii. 811, c, 119 (arbĥkev Bull. Corr. Hell. xiv. 163, 13-21 often).
321 B.C. Thy de λ CIA ii. 1059, 9. + 305 Β.C. γεισόδισμα CIA
ii. 63, 114. yetúrous ib. IIIrd B.C. Túếŋ (for TiTen) CIA ii. 836, c-k
43,; also 992. Εύτυχος Τυχιππίδου Ηρακλεώτης ΟΙΛ ii. 2936. ενδο-
Keiowo Journ. Hell. Stud. Megalopolis 126. Διονίχα Θειβής (for
Θηβαία) ClA ii. 2998. Επικρατὴς (for -τὶς) Φίλωνος Σιδωνία Cl ii.
3222. pui Herond. Nim. 4, 50. Airpios Bull. Corr. Hell. v. 168,
no. 33. xpíus 'Enµ. ȧpx. E' 23, twice. 168 Β.C. Ηνου (for οἴνου)
49
E
37-39.]
PRONUNCIATION OF H.
C.
vi. 608.
C.
Louvre Pap. 55, 11-15, thrice. IInd B.C. ns xpeior for xpýστns GIB
ης χρείστ χρήστης
477, 40. 120 Β.C. ' (for τὴν) μίαν Louvre Pap. 15", 15. Αὐρηλίας
(beside Avpnλiov) Mitth. xiv. 114, 72, 3-6. Vípioμa ib. 110, 66. Hλwτа
ib. 105, 51.
AlvнOU CIA ii. 1049 A 55. 69-62 Β.C. ανατεθήκασι CIA
ii. 470, 71. 80 (beside -Teleik-, 1053, 7; 835, c-1 45; 403, 38, &c.).
Ist B.C. KaĤλкov CIA ii. 470, 20. 45 B.C. Paẞúpios Bull. Corr. Hell.
39 B.C. Kaλovнotos (for Calvisius) Bull. Corr. Hell.
Καλονήσιος
xi. 226, 7. Ist A.D. THẞépios CIG 2739. 84 Δ.Δ. Σαλήνιος
CIG 5045.
τὸν χρύσιν for χρύσην FBlass Hermen. 139. 92 A. D.
πроσ wνĤσðаι Gr. Urk. Berlin II, II. IInd A.D. dikey FGKenyon Class.
é¤ikev
Texts p. 104 ( ¥ 751). Teðvióra ib. p. 106 (=₪ 20). +150 A. D.
Atoμions CIA iii. 1119, 1, F, 19. on μnreip GKaibel Epigr. 998. 152
A.D. Tô ‘Aрwaɣáo Gr. Urk. Berlin 153, 32 (beside To Apnayán ib. 13).
μὺ εἰτύεις for μὴ εἰδυίης ib. 38. 158 A.D. Kλpouxias Gr. Urk. Berlin
161-9 A.D. dwápia Le Bas 243º (twice); FBlass Pron. 37
164 A.D. 'AVTнO@VTI Mitth. xiv. 92, 15, 3. 170 A.D.
Xaphotos CIA iii. 1133, 49 ii. 194 A.D. 'Apаßнкоù Gг. Urk. Berlin
199, 23. 190-200 A.D. Ekîyɩ (for Ekñ√, on a coin!) Imhoof-Blumer
Abhdl. xviii. (1890) p. 628. övтнvα CIG 2824, 2. els iv σopóv ib. 6.
της for τίς ib. 2826, 17. αύθιμερί CIA iii. 73, 24, 5. γράψον μυ ἢ
ἔλαβες τὸ σφυρίτι Gr. Urk. Berlin 247, 5-6. ἢ μὲν σοθὴς ᾧ i. e. εἰ μὲν
owbeis & [for which wrongly owońow]) ib. 223, 3; 230, 3. ἵνα διακονέσι
μῖν (i. e. ἵνα διακονήσῃ ἡμῖν) ib. 2613, 26-27. οὐθὲν ἢ μὴ τὸν τόκον ib.
12-13. 215 A.D. TηS Tоλнтeías Berl. Akad. 1888 p. 888, 61, 12.
III A.D. Κρήτης καὶ Κυρίνης Κυντήλιος CIG 2588. εψηφισμένα 2790.
Καλλίστρατος Καλλητύχῃ ἀνέθηκε 6672. ἐνγίθεν τις μάμις αὐτοῦ Bull. Corr.
Hell. 1893 p. 528 f.-and so on ever since.
160, 3.
note 5.
H
38. The interchange of 7 and et in the endings -eos and -eia, so
frequent in II-G inscriptions (B.C. 200-100 A.D.), as: evσéßна,
εὐσέβια,
ἱέρμα, θεραπία, μαντία, παιδία (Louvre Pap. p. 370, 18, παιδήᾳ), Αρι-
στόκλια, Ηράκλια, Φιλόκλμα, Αφέλια, Γαλάτα, Ισιγένια, Ηδρα, Λαο-
δάμνα,-Αντωνίκα, Γερμανίκια, Ερμπα, Θήσια, Καισάρκα, "Αρηος πάγος,
'ApyĤos, Aúkнos, Mýdнos (KMeisterhans2 37)-has hardly been con-
sidered here, since a prevocalic i or e can lead through a weak i to a
consonantal ¿ (155, a. cp. F'Blass. Pron. 35), notwithstanding that this
cannot well apply to paroxytones (θεραπία, μαντία, παιδία, Ηδια),
where the accented i-sound is not weak.-See also 20º.
38. On the other hand, the frequent syncopation of words like Alyîdos,
Ερεχθῖδος, Οἰνῖδος (from -ηίδος), Χολίδην from -ηίδην, λιτουργία from ληιτ.,
which occur in the inscriptions since the Ist A.D. (KMoisterhans² 30, 6),
can be explained only on the assumption of homophony between ŋ and .
η
(Cp. 148 f.)
C.
39. The most unmistakable evidence of the pronunciation of 7 as e is
seon by Erasmians in the two fragmentary lines whore Cratinos and
Aristophanes represent the shoep cry by Bê Bîn and Bî respectively :
ὁ δ' ἠλίθιος ὥσπερ πρόβατον Βι Βῆ λέγων βαδίζει. Frg. 43 (TKock)
and θύειν με μέλλει καὶ κελεύει Βῇ λέγειν. Αr. Frg. 642 (ib.).
Compare Hesych. BĤ λéyeĽ Bλnxâтαi; and BHBHN' πрóßaтov. Bekk. An. 86, 3
Βι· προβάτων βληχή. Αριστοφάνης θύειν με κτλ. Εt. Μ. 78, 40 τὸ Βῇ ὅπερ περι-
σπᾶται . . . ἔστι δὲ μίμημα προβάτου.
But even granting that it was universally sounded as e at the time of its
adoption (29¹ f.), I have shown elsewhere (Amer. Jour. Phil. XVI. [1895]
46-51), that neither Cratinosn or Aristophanes are likely to have marked
their own verse with the prosodic symbol 7, that they wrote ßeßé(e) and
Bé(e) respectively, and that this ßeßé(e) does not represent the sheep cry,
but denotes, in the language of infants (and Cratinos is ridiculing somo
50
PRONUNCIATION OF H.
39-41.
childish man or lad), the sheep itself. In other words, βεβέ(ε) οι βηβη
(not βῆ βῆ) means ba-lamb, and the term is still fully preserved in N
speech.
η
39. Prof. Blass's appeal (Pron, 37 f) to the testimony of Sextus regarding the
pronunciation of ŋ as e in the IInd A.D. surely rests on misrepresentation.
In
criticizing the grammarians, Sextus here instances 7 and speaks not of its sound,
but of the grammatical value or function given to it by the theorists, with
a view to prove their inconsistency. The passage, which, as quoted by Blass,
appears imperfect, runs thus (Adv. Gram. 635) : εἰ τὸ ὁ Κατ' ατος (i.e. accord-
ing to the grammarians) εκτεινόμενον καὶ συστελλόμενον οὐχ ἕτερόν ἐστι στοι-
χεῖον ἀλλ᾽ ἂν κοινόν, ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ τὸ 1 καὶ τὸ γ, ἀκολουθήσει καὶ τὸ ε καὶ τὸ
Η ὲν εἶναι στοιχεῖον κατὰ τὴν αὐτὴν δύναμιν (value, function) κοινόν. ἡ γὰρ αὐτὴ
δύναμις ἐπ' ἀμφοτέρων ἐστι. καὶ συσταλὲν μὲν τὸ Ἡ γίνεται ε, ἐκταθὲν δὲ τὸ ε
γίνεται Η. κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τρόπον καὶ τὸ ο καὶ τὸ ω, μία στοιχείου γενή-
σεται φύσις κοινὴ ἐκτάσει καὶ συστολῇ διαφέρουσα, ἐπείπερ τὸ μὲν ω μακρόν
ἐστιν ο, τὸ δὲ ο βραχύ ἐστιν ω. τυφλώττουσιν οὖν οἱ γραμματικοὶ καὶ το
ἀκόλουθον αατοίς οι CYNOρώει λέγοντες ἑπτὰ φωνήεντα τυγχάνειν, πέντε
μόνων ὄντων πρὸς τὴν φύσιν (in reality).
40. Such data as N ξερός, μερός, θεριό (for ξηρός, μηρός, θηρίον), etc., prove
nothing as to the pronunciation of ŋ in A-P times, seeing that the sound
ir (ιρ, ηρ, υρ, ειρ, οιρ), especially that unaccented, generally changes to e (186),
a phenomenon which goes back to P times, as (leaving aside such classical
instances as Καμερείς, Σταγερίτης) : 137-8 A.D. Σωτῆρος CIA iii. 281, 2.
166-8 Α. D. Φαληρέως 1131, 4. 184-7 A.D. Εἰρενος 1144, ii. 15. Ἐρακλεωτις
2452. Εροδότου 1524, 2. IV. A.D. ὑπηρέτην Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 101,
548, etc. [1]
41. According to traditionists, the pronunciation of η as i, as early as pre-
Socratic times, receives strong support also from Plato's testimony (Crat. 418 B-C)
ΣΩ. οἶσθα ὅτι οἱ παλαιοὶ οἱ ἡμέτεροι τῷ ἰῶτα καὶ τῷ δέλτα εὖ μάλα ἐχρῶντο, καὶ
οὐχ ἥκιστα αἱ γυναῖκες, αἵπερ μάλιστα τὴν ἀρχαίαν φωνὴν σῴζουσι, Νῦν δὲ ἀΝΤΙ ΜΕΝ
τοῦ ἰῶτα, "Η εἶ, [ἢ] τα μεταστρέφουσιν, ἀντὶ δὲ τοῦ δέλτα ζῆτα, ὡς μεγαλοπρεπέ-
στερα ὄντα. ΕΡΜ. πῶς δή; ΣΩ. οἷον οἱ μὲν ἀρχαιότατοι ἡμέραν (εμ- ?) ΤΗΝ ΗΜΕΡΑΝ
ἐκάλουν, οἱ δὲ ὕστερον) εἱμέραν, οἱ ΔΕ ΝΥΝ ΗΜΕΡΑΝ. ΕΡΜ. ἔστι ταῦτα.
ΣΩ. οἶσθα οὖν ὅτι μόνον τοῦτο δηλοῖ τὸ ἀρχαῖον ὄνομα τὴν διάνοιαν τοῦ θεμέ
νου; ὅτι γὰρ ἀσμένοις τοῖς ἀνθρώποις καὶ ἱμείρουσιν ἐκ τοῦ σκότους τὸ φῶς
ἐγίγνετο, ταύτῃ ὠνόμασαν ἱμέραν. ΕΡΜ. φαίνεται. ΣΩ. Νῦν δέ γε τετραγῳδημένον
οὐδ᾽ ἂν κατανοήσαις ὅ,τι βούλεται ἡ ἡμέρα. καίτοι τινὲς οἴονται ὡς δὴ ἡ ἡμέρα
ἥμερα ποιεῖ, διὰ ταῦτα ὠνομάσθαι αὐτὴν οὕτως. The argument, however, is of
no avail, since, besides the vagueness and ambiguity of the passage, in his
etymological speculations Plato refors not so much to the pronunciation
as to the script or spelling of tho words, as current in his time (25, c). Thus
ἥρως is connected with ἔρως (398 c-D), and "Ηρα (404 c) with both ερᾶσθαι
and αέρα: Ηρα δὲ ἐρατή τις, ὥσπερ οὖν καὶ λέγεται ὁ Ζεὺς αὐτῆς ἐρασθεὶς
ἔχειν. ἴσως δὲ μετεωρολογῶν ὁ νομοθέτης τὸν ἀέρα "Ηραν i. e. AEP ΕΡΑ or ἀὴρ
ἥρα) ὠνόμασεν ἐπικρυπτόμενος, θεὶς τὴν ἀρχὴν ἐπὶ τὴν τελευτήν. γνοίης δ᾽ ἂν
εἰ πολλάκις λέγοις τὸ τῆς Ἥρας ὄνομα (i.e. ΕΡΑΕΡΑ Αραέρα). 396 Β ἡ δ᾽ αὖ ἐς
τὸ ἄνω ὄψις καλῶς ἔχει τοῦτο τὸ ὄνομα καλεῖσθαι, οὐρανία, ὁρῶσα τὰ ἄνω (i.e.
OPAN-). So again in Tim. 28 B and 32 B. 398 α ὁ δὲ δὴ ἥρως τί ἂν εἴη ;—τοῦτο
τὸ ὄνομα δηλοῖ τὴν ἐκ τοῦ ἔρωτος γένεσιν (ΕΡΩΣ or ΕΡΟΣ). ib. D τοῦτο λέγει
τοὺς ἥρωας ἢ ὅτι σοφοὶ ἦσαν ἐρωτῶν ἱκανοὶ ὄντες· τὸ γὰρ εἴρειν (i..
EPEN) λέγειν ἐστιν, κτλ. ; 50 408 4. 405 Β. 406 Α. 407 Β' ΑΘΗΝΑ ὡσπερεί ὁ ΘΕΟΝΟΔ
ἐστίν (ΑΘΕΝΑ ΑΘΕΟΝΟΑ). ib. D κατὰ τὸ ἄρρεν τε καὶ κατὰ τὸ ἀνδρεῖον APHC
ἂν εἴη (.Ο. ΑΡΕΣ). 408 Β. 409 Β ΣΕΛΗΝΗ Σέλας ἔνον. 41ο c αἱ μὲν ὧραι Αττικιστί·
ὄραι γάρ εἰσι διὰ τὸ δρίζειν. 415 ο Δειλία τῆς ψυχῆς σημαίνει δεσμόν τινα· τὸ γὰρ
λίαν ἰσχύς τίς ἐστι (i.Θ. ΔΕ-ΛΙΑ). ib. D ἀρετή—ἀειρήτη-αἱρετή. 416 Β αἰσχρὸν τὸ
[1] Hence the derivation of the N word νερό" from ancient νηρὸν is phonopathi-
cally woll justified. See 15o, c [2].
51
E 2
41-44.]
PRONUNCIATION OF 01.
ἴσχον τὸν ῥοῦν, ἀεισχοροῦν (ῥοῦν = ΡΟN), etc. etc. Accordingly the only in-
ference to be deduced from the above and any other similar passages is that
the Athenians in Plato's time had not yet become quito familiar with the
new orthography, but more or less adhered to the ancestral or scholastic
mode of spelling (6. 26), and, what is also very significant, that they made no
account eithor of the aspiration (72 ff.) or of quantity' (28 ff. 86 ff. App. ii.).
This accounts also for the very frequent misspelling of µèv and dè for µǹv and
dǹ in most of the archaic and classical texts. (1744 f.
42. b. Interchange of н with e. (See 26 f. 28 ff.)
η
On the other hand, the same A inscriptions from the first appearance
of n in the Vth B.C. down to Byzantine times show a far more fre-
quent interchange of this symbol with e. This phenomenon has
already been fully investigated in 28 ff.
43. Regarding the almost regular practice in Latin of transliterat-
ing n by e, it now becomes clear that the Romans could not be
expected to use for it the letter H familiar to them as h, or to provide
a special symbol for Greek H, the more so as this comparatively
modern sign was so unsettled and shifting among the Greeks them-
selves. Having adopted the Greek (Chalcidian) characters more than
two centuries prior to the spelling reform at Athens (5), at a time
when E was the only representative of its class, they continued to
abide by the old system familiar to them, just as they still adhered
to the old E for et (29 ff.), as well as to the old digraphs PH, PS,
CH, unmindful of the fact that in Greece these pairs had been long
replaced by the simple symbols ☀, ¥, X (5 f. 12. 53. 56).
44. IV. Interchange of or with 1 (or e1 and н, cp. 28 ff. 32 ff).
ΕΙ
329 B.C. ducîv (and often since) K Meisterhans2124. 320-300 B.C. oikei
(for oiko) Kühner-Blass i. 135. Haλnpeî (for -poî) CIA ii. 768, i. 24.
Пepibcions (for -Ooídŋs) Bull. Corr. Hell. 1890 p. 62. 302 Β.Ε. συνδι-
oiknoev, GDittenberger 134, 5. 168 Β.Ο. Ηνου (for οἴνου) Louvre Pap.
55, 11-15 (thrice). 162 B.C. σvýŋkodovankútoi σot Gr. Pap. Br. Mus.
P. 9, 13-14. 165-158 B.C. Stolknσav HCollitz. 1529, 28. olero ib.
1339. (Cp. 45.) 101 B.C. τοῖς λοιπεῖς CIA ii. 467, 12 f. Αύγουστοῖνος
Le Bas vi. 4, 2388. 'Akuλoîvos CIG 7284.
30 σñovdúv
σπονδύν
IIIrd A. D.
µévois Gr.
C.
III-
II-IIIrd A.D. oi πρŵtí Pavévtes CLeemans 117, II. 131,
for -δήν. 135, 44 τὰ λεπά for λοιπά. 137, 9 της ποσί.
áváун (for -yoɩ) FGKenyon Class. Texts p. 95 (=r 262).
Pap. Br. Mus. p. 93, 268. σoì λéyo (for où λéyn) ib. p. 106, 675.
IVth A.D. ikováμos CIA iii. 1444, 4. ἀντιβίας (for βίοις) FGKenyon
Class. Texts p. 86 (= B 378). Ovμúrηy (for -μoí-) ib. p. 88 (= l'144).
aidios (for aidoios) ib. p. 88 (=1172). ȧvнkodoμýσavтos Bull. Corr.
αίδιος
Hell. ix. 210 f. adaμavríns Great Louvre Pap. 3100.
C.
b
αδαμαντίνης
C.
th
IV A.D.
C.
ἐποιεν
πтошοû (for πîη-) Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 24. ofμas for huis CWessely N.
Gr. Zaub. 77, 1. oμg) (for λu) Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 87, 101.
(for énjev) ib. p. 87, 115. V A.D. νοῦσον: λιμικὴν νόσον UWilken
Berl. Akad. 1887 p. 819, 9. V-VIth A.D. ventro: cilia (i. e. kodía)
Louvre Pap. 4 p. 126. V-VIIth A.D. σrýxi (for orixo) CWessely Akad.
Wiss. 1889 p. 115. olkola (for olkia) ib.
οἰκοία οἰκία) 540 A.D. τοῦ προκειμηθέντος
599 A.D. Tμor CWessely Prol. 68. 618 A.D. évîkɩ (for
ἐνοίκιον) ib. p. 64. ἐνικίου ib. φιβ/ (for φοιβάμμων] ib.) τοῖς δεσποίνης
τοῖς ἁγίας ib. πрокеίμеVOL μεmodopedu Gr. Urk. Berlin 308, 15,
VIIIth A.D. ǹ ápoúvres (for oi ádiévres) Apocal. Petri 17, 34.
CIG 9277:
I, 2. 730 A.D. Ɛapakowóv (for -kŋvóv) ib. p. 5. 66.
Koîvol
52
PRONUNCIATION OF al.
[44-48.
So further povía (for -voía) CIG 9111, 4. év kódmis 9113 &
9114, 8. yévrо. ÉV KóλTIS 9115, 10 (also 9121, 9. 9124, 4. 9128, 9).
γένιτο. Εν
is KÓλTIS 9131, 8. polódeos WECrum Coptic MSS. 13" (pλ- ib. 12.
20. 22). πιμήν ib. 22 (ποιμήν ib. 13). ἰκουμένη ib. 5. λιπόν ib. 24. 30.
(λoπ- ib. 14. 18. 22. 25). μos ib. Ap. v. ;-and so on ever since.
ล
45. The argument for the monophthongal pronunciation of o
in A finds support also in the frequent absence of the augment in
verbs beginning with o, as: oikodoμnμévoi (four times during the IVth
B.C.), beside kod- KMeisterhans 2 137. olakoσтpódovv Aesch. Pers. 768;
Bac. 32; οἰωνίζοντο Xen. Hell. I, 4, 14, 5, 4, 17; οἰνωμένος regular
form from Aristotle onwards. (716 f.; however cp. 26, 8.)
46. For the strikingly frequent interchange of o and u in G-B
times see 29 and 36.
47. The phonetic interrelation of o and in the Vth B. C. is not
clearly borne out by the popular confusion of λopòs and Auós, as recorded by
Thucydides 2, 54, 2: ἐν δὲ τῷ κακῷ (pest) οἷα εἰκὸς ἀνεμνήσθησαν καὶ τοῦδε τοῦ
ἔπους φάσκοντες οἱ πρεσβύτεροι πάλαι ᾄδεσθαι ἥξει Δωριακὺς πόλεμος καὶ λοιμός
ἅμ᾽ αὐτῷ.” ἐγένετο μὲν οὖν ἔρις τοῖς ἀνθρώποις μὴ λοιπὸν ὠνομάσθαι ἐν τῷ ἔπει
ὑπὸ τῶν παλαιῶν ἀλλὰ λιμόν. ἐνίκησε δὲ ἐν τῷ παρόντι εἰκότως λοιμὸν εἰρῆσθαι.
οἱ γὰρ ἄνθρωποι πρὸς ἃ ἔπασχον τὴν μνήμην ἐποιοῦντο. ἢν δέ γε, οἶμαι, ποτ'
ἄλλος πόλεμος καταλάβῃ Δωρικὸς τοῦδ᾽ ὕστερος καὶ ξυμβῇ γενέσθαι λιμόν, κατὰ
τὸ εἰκὸς οὕτως ᾄσονται. For the passage only shows : (r) that the ἔρις ἐγένετο
(arose) after the plague had broken out, since the alternative would have been
indicated by Thucydides through the term v µèv oûv ěpis, consequently there
was but one phonetic version of the old saying; (2) that this original version was
understood to mean Auós, the natural concomitant of war, since if the alter-
native λouds were in the mind of the people, its very realization afterwards
could not possibly have caused surprise and therefore a dispute, the more so
as no Auòs is mentioned by Thucydides during the siege; (3) that the appear-
ance of Aouds for the expected λuds led to tho a posteriori substitution of the
latter for the former in the version given by Thucydides;-a circumstance
which surely suggests a sort of homophony between 1 and 0 in Thucydides'
time. The contention that the very dispute' about the words in question
provos their heterophony (Kühner-Blass i. 5, 3 [1]), is utterly indefensible,
since the epis was not necessarily carried on phonetically but through
the spelling (cp. the English set formula 'How do you spell it?'), a round-
about process which the unmistakable script rendered needless for Thucy-
dides to mention. Equally untenable is the argument (Kühner-Blass i. 53)
derived from Hes. Op. 243, where Zeus is represented to inflict upon mortals
Xiµdy dµoû kai Xoµóv, seeing that, unlike the above oral saying (éros ₫dú-
μevov), Hesiod's lino was written (even as a private advice to his brother
Perses), und so was meant for the eye, which could not possibly mistake the two
words. A similar collocation (λoiµoùs kaì Xiµoùs) occurs in Dion. H. Ars rhet. 17
and so too Luko 21, 11 λιμοὶ καὶ λοιμοί.
V. A (ae) and e interchanged. (See 19". 28 ff. 33 ff.)
48. We have seen above (19ª) that ae was the original spelling of
the diphthong aɩ, and that it exchanged its postpositive vowel ← for ‹
after the analogy of ει οι νι. This (grammatical) modification in the
mode of writing, having been carried out systematically, did not affect
ordinary speech, so that a from the outset retained the sound de
(that is [?] ) of its predecessor (32d). Hence a in A admits
of another independent after it, as (V-Ind B.C.): 'Aoŋvakós (i. e.
Αθηναϊκός), Αθηναίς, ᾿Αχαιϊκός, Δικαίδης, Ερματικός, Κορωνατικός, Πλα
ταιικός, Πειραικός, Πτολεμαίς, &c. (KMeisterhans 26); ep. Boeotian
ἱππότῃ for ἱππόται, εὐεργέτης for -ταις, ὀφειλέτΗ for -ται, ἀπογράφεσθε,
δεδόχθη, ΘείβΗοs for Θηβαῖος, «Η for καί, χΗpe for χαῖρε, etc., (298
xHpe
53
48-50b.]
PRONUNCIATION OF al.
48b; cp. GMeyer2 § 113), where H stands for E. This association of
terminal would be unaccountable for A, if we were to assume
anothe rindependent before it, that is if the of the preceding
diphthong contained a distinct postpositive i-sound.
η
48. That the vowel-pair (ae)au had become a monophthongous e
(?) before 400 B.C., appears also from the fact that, when ŋ found
its way into Boeotia (cp. 5 [1]), this simple symbol took the place of
the diphthong (αε) αι, as : 'Αρίστηχμος, Ηγοσθενίτης, Δημήνατος, Ἤχμων
Ἠχμόνιος, Φίδιμος, θεράπωνα, Χωρίας, χθρε, ταμίη (for -αι), τίπτομη, κλύω
(kλaíw), 'AdavĤoi, etc. etc. RMeister i. 238 ff. cp. id. 82 f.-- See 29⁰ & 48.
(κλαίω), Αθανλοι,
49. 2. For the pronunciation of a ase since A compare: Iλareais,
Φηγεεύς, Βησεύς, Πειρεύς, Ελεούσιος, Κυδαθηνεύς, νέϊν (for ναίειν),
Μεμακτηριώνα, Αθηνέος, &c.-and conversely Ερικαιεύς, Διομαιεύς, Τρινε
μαιεύς, ἐλαίου (for ἐλέου), γραιο (for ἔχρεο), καίκλυτι (for κέκλυθι); further
ἠσελεύσοντα (for εἰσελεύσονται), διφθέρας (for ραις), συνστέη, φέλιμον,
&c.&c.-all in CIA (KMeisterhans² 27). So further ȧvédia CIL iv.
2269. ἐνθάδαι εἰσιαίτω ib. 733. 168 B.C. ávúуere (for -Ta) Louvre
Pap. 50, 7. 165 B.C. ópâtαι (for -Te) ib. 1, 386.
Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 38, 23. 39, 45. 40, 66.
Pap. 43, 4. Eppwola ib. 43, 1-4 twice.
FG Kenyon Class. Texts 76. kλêe ib. 105 (=₪ 1). ¿yôv (for alyŵv ib. 106
(=Ω 34). βούλεσθ' αἰπαρήγειν (for -εσθ' ἐπαρήγειν ib. 106 (=Ω 39).
Ηφεστος CIG 628 twice. νέειν (for ναίειν CIA iii. 171, ii. 1-2. ὑμναίο
μεν ib. 14. τῇ γυνεκί, χρε, Ρωμέων, κέ (for και) GIB 177;- and so on
ever since [cp. also 299].
158 Β.C. σημαν
154 Β.C. εἰδῆται Louvre
I A.D. λυμενομένους
49. GCurtius and with him FBlass (Pron. 55) claim to havo discoverod un-
mistakable evidence of the pronunciation of a as a-i in such cases of crasis as
κάν (for καὶ ἐν), κἀκεῖνος, κατα, κάστιν, and the liko. But this phenomenon,
which occurs chiofly in verse (161), is insoparable from the widespread practice
in A of freely dropping every intersonantic 1 (20", 29), secing that cai not only
is a proclitic but also forms an inseparablo part of tho (metrical) line in tho
scriptura continua (79. 159. 165 ³).
50. No safe argument for or against the pronunciation of al-El
as e-ɩ, in the III B.C., can be derived from the famous epigram of
Kallimachos (A. P. xii. 28):
Λυσανίη, σὺ δὲ Ναίχι καλός καλός ἀλλὰ πρὶν εἰπεῖν
τοῦτο σαφῶς, ἠχώ φησί τίς ἄλλος ἔχει
where to vaixɩ the echo seems to respond eye, that is nechi -echi, seeing
that the reply of the echo is, for metrical reasons, given in inverted
order (vaixi kadós—űλdos éxe). On the other hand, the contention
of staunch Erasmians that the ccho replies to kaλos by λλos (FBlass
Pron. 64 f. and Kühner-Blass i. 54[1]) is untenable, since kadós is
oxytone and λλos paroxytone, so that the two words could not well
lend themselves to parechesis.
50b. A general survey of tho pronunciation of the sonants in tho
V-VIth A.D. is afforded by a MS in capitals of tho IXth, publishod by
ABoucherie in the Notices XXIII (1872) pp. 277 ff. and 297 ff. It is entitled
'Epuŋveúμara, and was composed by Pollux (207 A.D.) for the use of Greeks
wishing to learn Latin (ib. p. 29o noto : συνέγραψα πάντα τὰ ῥήματα . . . ὅσα
ὠφελεῖ ἀνθρώποις φιληταῖς τῆς λαλιᾶς τῆς Ῥωμαϊκής). Our copy is the work of
a foreigner who know hardly anything more than the Greek lottors, and thus
executed a mechanical reproduction of the MS boforo him, which sooms to
have bolonged to the V-VIth (ib. p. 297), so that we may charge most of the
blunders in it to his prodocossor.
Hero thon wo find (ib. p. 300):- for el
79 times; for 7 over 50 times; for o 8 times; for v 66 times.-eɩ for n
C.
54
PRONUNCIATION OF AY, EY.
[50b-52.
ບ
6 times; el for 41 times.-n for 20 times; 7 for v once (Kнviyós for
kuvŋyós).—o for v 5 times.-v for et 2 times; v for 10 times;
v for n
onco (ev@uvías); v for o 3 times.- for a 54 times; e for 7 37 times
(see above 43); n for e 7 times; o for a 75 times; w for o 22 times.
e
B. THE DIPHTHONGS AY AND ЄY. (See 32b, 3. 325.)
51. The diphthongs av ev are now pronounced in N as av
ev, modified to af ef before hard consonants (TKT, x0, o)
(24. 32b, 3. 91). This is also the natural result, in accelerated
speech, of the original composite sound au and eu (cp. Latin u
and v, 18), or rather a" and e" (325), and the phenomenon of
labialization is very old, as may be seen from the following
inscriptional specimens. (Cp. GMeyer § 119 ff.)
VI-Vth B.C. NaƑtakтiwv (Lokris) Röhl IGA 321 (Navπ- ib.). Fleтos
(Corinth) ib. 20, 101. ἀριστέοντα ib. 343, 4. ἀτοῦ ib. 409. ναυ...
▲ελT. арx. 1888 p. 173. àfuráp ib. 1890 p. 130. afraîot Röhl Dial. Ins.
1267. aFrós (Crete), DComparetti Mus. Ital. ii. 211 no. 63. àFra... 194,
32; åƑróv 217 f. 77-78; 'AƑλŵv 231 sqq. 83-84. (Cp. evFernpis HCollitz
1040. 1041. 1267, 7, 21 aƑraîoi, Frрayiais). See GMeyer § 121. 320
B.C. EuBalovos CIA ii. 836, 40. Η Β.C. ευδομον CIG 1563. ευδομή
Kovта ib. 1845, 47. 180 B.C. Aíẞtos Bull. Cor. Hell. vi. 38. Βίβιος
ib. 43.
159 B.C. éµßλévoavtes (for -†avtes) Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 38, 15.
156 B.C. páudovs Louvre Pap. 40, 33 & 41, 26. 120 Β.C. εὐφήβοισι CIA
iii. 1104, 1. κατεσκέβασε CIG 3693. ἀπελέφτερος (for -λεύθ-) ib. 5922.
énioreqσe Wescher-Foucart Inscr. (1863) p. 312. Haßlos Rev. Arch. sér.
ἐπιστεφτε
26, p. 382. B.C. 20–30 A.D. Þλáßios CIG 5239 & 5331. üße (for ave: CIG
9653. B.C. Ist-III A.D. 'Aɓlávios (twice), 'Aẞidtavós (thrice), 'Aßidios
(II times), ᾿Αβῖτος, "Αβιος (thrice), Φαβώνιος, Φλαβιανός (28 times),
Φλαβιλλιανός, Φλάβιλλος, Φλάβιος (144 times), Φλαβώνιος, Φλάβος, Γαβιανός,
Γαβίδιος, Γάλλος, Γάβιος (thrice), Οκταβιανός (4 times), Οκτάβιος (12
times) 'Paßévva, &c. (ThEckinger 16-17). 42 A.D. Σεβήρος ; Σεβηριανός,
Σεβηρεῖνος, &c. ib. 28.
51. The consonantal sound of v in au and ev is further borne out
by the phenomenon that in composition initial p is not doubled after ev-
(186. 712), as : εύρωστος, εὔρους (by the side of ἄρρωστος, εύρροος). However
see also 64 ff. and App. ii. 8 fl. & 14.
เ
เ
•
52. FBlass (Pron. 82 f.) is wrong in asserting that the Greeks
represent consonantal v by ov, even in cases where it is pre-
ceded by a, e: 'Okтánvios, ΣeovĤpos; and side by side with this appears
Οκτάϊος. . But the fact that av and ev are written from the second
· century [A.D.] onwards with av and ev, though never before [?], suggests
'that the modern Greek pronunciation had at that time begun, and
naturally first before vowels. . . . For my part I have the greatest
'hesitation in assigning cu= ef and f to the time of Hadrian;
'for before consonants, according to what has been said before,
the modern Greek pronunciation cannot have prevailed even in
'the time of Terentianus Maurus (end of the IIIrd).' All this
reasoning is refuted by inscriptional evidence, as: Bißios (fifteen
times, Delos) Bull. Cor. Hell. vi. 29 ft. (185-180 B.C.), Baλépios
(thirty-nine times, Athens), diorwp i. 288 (IInd B.C.), ouλBLOS
(eighteen times, Gythion), Le Bas, ii. 4, 242 a (86-80 B. C.), &c. (cp. 51).
As a matter of fact, Latin av is transcribed in the Ist B.C. three times
by av, and three times by aß; in the Ist A. D. twenty-six times by aov,
three times by av, and twenty times by aß; in the IInd A.D. forty-nine
times by aov, six times by av, and forty times by aß. The actual state
55
52-54.] PRONUNCIATION OF ASPIRATAE AND MEDIAE.
of things regarding the transcription of Latin v preceded by a vowel
into Greek is illustrated by the following summary table drawn by
ThEckinger 89:

V
av
ev
iv
OV
uv
aev
ου B
αου αν αβ εου ευ εβ ιου ιβ σου ου οβ ουου ου ουβ
αιον αιβ
που ηβ
ωβ
B.C.
IIIrd
2
IInd
10 3
I
I
Ist
C.
Ist
C.
A.D.
98 21 26
24
LG
5
13 3
درم
I
3
20
2
23
2
8
I
་
7 I
-
2
|
IInd
234100 49 6
40
27 95 I
2
I
I
I
IIIrd
65 41
63 21
831742 2
3
2
I
3
I
IV th
23 17 6
7
2
I
I
4
Vth
er
5
Ι
1
After 500
6
LO
5
I
I
I
Undated 319 203 107 28 136 35 19 18
4 15
4
612
I 3
9
LQ
5
Sum
6 ΙΟ
7
10
total
779 400 196 43 229 149 47 69 11 34 7 18 20 2
53. The prevalent transcription of Greck T (v) through Latin V (u),
and conversely of Latin V through Greek T-then of Greek B (B) through
Latin B (b) and conversely-represents the traditional or historical spel-
ling, and has no direct bearing on the pronunciation (25ª f.); while the
regular transliteration of Greek ov through Latin u is a matter of ncces-
sity. On the other hand, the occasional appearance in Latin of ou is an
attempt to imitate Greek ov (19ª & [1]), analogous to that of copying a
through ai, a through ei, and or through oi. (Cp. 19ª [1] 29ª.)
II. PRONUNCIATION OF THE Consonants.
A. Aspiratae and Mediae.
54. As there is no real dispute about the pronunciation of the
consonants, except in the case of the-
aspiratae x 0, sounded by
and mediae y d ß, sounded by
Erasmians as c+h, t+h, p + h
Traditionists as ch, th(=P), f
Traditionists as voiced gh ờ v,
Erasmians as ordinary g db
we shall limit ourselves here to a brief examination of these symbols
only. The method to be applied cannot be identical with that adopted
in the case of the sonants, because on the whole there is no frequent
interchange among the consonants. But we can arrive at safe results
by remembering the principle of syllabication (91 ff.) which assigns
these consonants to the following syllable, so that their sound is deter-
mined by that of the next following sound; then by laying under
contribution also the often equivocal testimony of the ancient gram-
marians (25 f.), certain phonopathic phenomena, and the transcriptions
into and from Latin, besides the occasional confusion in the inscriptions.
56
PRONUNCIATION OF ASPIRATAE.
[55, 56.
55. The ancient passages commonly adduced by either school in support
of its theory are: Pl. Crat. 427 Α: Διὰ ταῦτα τὸ ἰέναι καὶ τὸ ἴεσθαι διὰ
τοῦ ι ἀπομιμεῖται ὥσπερ γε διὰ τοῦ ᾧ καὶ τοῦ ψ καὶ τοῦ σίγμα καὶ τοῦ ζῆτα, ὅτι
πνευματώδη τὰ γράμματα, πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα μεμίμηται αὐτοῖς ὀνομάζων οἷον τὸ
ψυχρὸν καὶ τὸ ζέον καὶ τὸ σείεσθαι καὶ ὅλως σεισμών. καὶ ὅταν που τὸ φγεώδες
μιμῆται πανταχοῦ ἐνταῦθα ὡς τὸ πολὺ τὰ τοιαῦτα γράμματα επιφέρειν φαίνεται ὁ τὰ
ὀνόματα τιθέμενος. Dion. Thr. in An. Bekk. 631, 18 f. : "Αφωνα δέ ἐστιν ἐννέα β,
γ, δ, θ, κ, π, τ, φ, χ· ἄφωνα δὲ λέγεται ὅτι μᾶλλον τῶν ἄλλων ἐστὶ κακόφωνα, ὥσπερ
ἄφωνον λέγομεν τραγῳδὸν τὸν κακόφωνον. τούτων ψιλὰ μὲν τρία κ π τ, δασέα δὲ
τρία θ φ Χ, μέσα δὲ τούτων τρία β γ δ· μέσα δὲ εἴρηται ὅτι τῶν μὲν ψιλῶν ἐστι δασύ
τερα, τῶν δὲ δασέων ψιλότερα. καὶ ἔστι τὸ μὲν β μέσον τοῦ π καὶ τοῦ φ, τὸ δὲ
γάμμα μέσον τοῦ κ καὶ τοῦ χ, τὸ δὲ δ μέσον τοῦ τ καὶ τοῦ θ. Dion. H. de comp.
II (p. 174 f. Schaef.): Τῶν δὲ καλουμένων ἀφώνων ἐννέα ὄντων τρία μέν ἐστι
ψιλά, τρία δὲ δασέα, τρία δὲ μεταξὺ τούτων. ψιλὰ μὲν τό τε κ καὶ τὸ π καὶ τὸ Τ,
δασέα δὲ τό τε χ καὶ τὸ φ καὶ τὸ θ, κοινὰ δὲ ἀμφοῖν τό τε γ καὶ τὸ β καὶ τὸ δ.
ἐκφωνεῖται δὲ αὐτῶν ἕκαστον τρόπον τοιόνδε τρία μὲν ἀπὸ τῶν χειλέων ἄκρων, τὸ
π καὶ τὸ φ καὶ τὸ β, ὅταν τοῦ στόματος πιεσθέντος τὸ προβαλλόμενον ἐκ τῆς
ἀρτηρίας πνεῦμα λύσῃ τὸν δεσμὸν αὐτοῦ. καὶ ψιλὸν μέν ἐστιν αὐτῶν τὸ π, δασὺ
δὲ τὸ φ, μέσον δὲ ἀμφοῖν τὸ β (τοῦ μὲν γὰρ ψιλώτερόν ἐστιν τοῦ δὲ δασύτερον)
τρία δὲ ἄλλα λέγεται τῆς γλώσσης ἄκρῳ τῷ στόματι προσερειδομένης κατὰ
τοὺς μετεωροτέρους ὀδόντας, ἔπειθ᾽ ὑπὸ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑπορριπιζομένης, κατὰ (read
κατα) τὴν διέξοδον αὐτῷ περὶ τοὺς ὀδόντας ἀποδιδούσης, τὸ τ καὶ τὸ θ καὶ τὸ δ.
διαλλάττει δὲ καὶ ταῦτα δασύτητι καὶ ψιλότητι . . . τρία δὲ τὰ λοιπὰ λέγεται μὲν
τῆς γλώττης ἀνισταμένης κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἐγγὺς τῆς φάρυγγος καὶ τῆς ἀρτηρίας
ὑπηχούσης τῷ πνεύματι, τὸ κ καὶ τὸ χ καὶ τὸ γ, οὐδενὶ ταῦτα διαφέροντα τῷ
σχήματι ἀλλήλων πλὴν ὅτι τὸ κ ψιλῶς λέγεται, τὸ δὲ χ δασέως, τὸ δὲ γ μετρίως
καὶ μεταξὺ τούτων.—And Arist. Quint. p. 89 f. Moib. : Τῶν ἀφώνων τὰ μὲν
διὰ τῶν χειλῶν ἠχεῖται μόνων, τοῦ πνεύματος τὴν ἔμφραξιν αὐτῶν κατὰ μέσον
ἐκβιαζομένου, ὡς τὸ β καὶ τὰ τούτου περιεκτικά· τὰ δὲ τῆς μὲν παρειᾶς ὑποσαι-
ρούσης, τοῦ δὲ πνεύματος ραγδαίως καὶ εἰς πλάτος προϊεμένου, ὡς τὸ γ καὶ (read
κατὰ τὰ ἑκατέρωσε ἄκρα τὰ δὲ τῶν μὲν ὀδόντων ἐπ' ὀλίγον διαζευχθέντων, τῆς
δὲ γλώττης οἱονεὶ σφενδονώσης κατὰ μέσον ἀθρόως τὸ πνεῦμα, ὡς τὸ τ καὶ τὸ θ καὶ
τὸ τούτων μέσον· τοίτων τὰ μὲν ἠρεμαίως προάγοντα τὸν ἀέρα και τῶν περὶ
τοὺς ὀδόντας τύπων, κέκληταί τε ψιλὰ καὶ ἔστιν εὐφωνότερα τὰ δὲ ἔνδοθεν ἐκ
(τῆς ?) φάρυγγος ὠνόμασται δασέα καὶ ἔστι λίαν τραχέα· τὰ δ᾽ ἐκ μέσου τοῦ φωνη-
τικοῦ τόπου μέσα τε εἴρηται καὶ τῆς ἀμφοτέρων εἴληχε φύσεως. So too 44 : (τῶν
ἀφώνων) τὰ μὲν ἐπιπολῆς κινοῦντα τὸ πνεῦμα ψιλά, τὰ δὲ ἔνδοθεν μετὰ σφοδρό-
τητος ἐξάγοντα δασέα, τὰ δὲ μεταξὺ ποιοῦντα μέσα προσαγορεύεται. See also
Bekk. An. 810 f.
a. Aspiratae X θ φ.
Ө
56. The aspiratae X θ φ are sounded according to the Erasmians
like two separate clements -h, t-h, p-h (sometimes symbolized by
κ', τ, π), while traditionists pronounce them as simple ch, th (p), β
that is Χ is sounded by the latter, before the sonants a ou and the
consonants, like ch in Scotch 'loch,' or German nach,' 'doch,' and
before the sonants e, i, like palatal ch in German ‘Blech,' 'ich' (91).
The Erasmian view (which by the way is not unanimous, FBlass,
Pron. 104 f.) rests on two considerations: the existence of kh, th, ph in
Sanskrit (whose pronunciation, however, is still more hypothetical)
and the transliteration into Latin of x 4 φ by ch, th, ph, respectively.
But such arguments cannot be seriously entertained in the face of
the following data: (1) Latin f is always transcribed in Greek by p.
(2) The Latin digraphs ch, th, ph are a reminiscence of the original
Greek digraphs KH TH TH (43), which in Greece were subsequently given
up in favour of their monoliteral substitutes x, 8, 4, undoubtedly
coined for the special purpose, because their predecessors κΗ ΤΗ Π
were felt as simple sounds and the aspiration h had long become
57
56.]
PRONUNCIATION OF ASPIRATAE.
π
Ө
Ө
extinct (72 f.) [¹. (3) If h was heard in x 0, the monoliteral repre-
sentatives of primordial κ-h т-h π-h, it is unaccountable why these
should not form metrical length as does the corresponding visarga
(also the anusvāra and anūnasika) in Sanskrit, or as do έy, the
representatives of archaic ko (xo), no (po), do (5 f. 12). (4) Even
prevocalic or initial h, though easier to pronounce, had been given
up already in A (72 ff.). (5) In the A inscriptions the preposition
ek remains unchanged before K TT, but before xeo is often changed
0 ф
to ex, as: ἐχ Χαλκίδος, ἐχ Θετταλίας, ἐχ θητῶν, ἐκφέρω (KMeisterhang2
82); which would be physiologically impossible as ek +h-K + hudkidos,
ÈK+h-T+hyTwv. (6) Prevocalic and intervocalic x 0 p, as representa-
tives of K-h, --h, -h, ought to interchange inevitably and frequently
with κ Tπ respectively. (7) Latin, though preserving the aspiration
h, does not admit of consonantal pairs with h as second constituent,
for ch th ph with Romans were the symbols only for Greek words,
according to the archaic mode of writing (43). (8) According
to Sextus (adv. gram. 622) and Priscian (i. 11, HKeil), the ancient
grammarians (Stoics) usually included x among the huicpova or
semivowels (236) [21. (9) If ex were sounded like p+ht + h k + h,
there is no reason why popular speech should have simplified words
like Σαπφώ, 'Ατθίς, Βάκχος το Σαφφώ, Αθθίς, Βάχχος, since the converse
case (Σαππó, 'Arris, etc.) would have been far easier and more natural.
(10) Were pronounced like p-h, it is unaccountable how u in the
diphthongs av ev should have ever been confounded with and not
with (51 ff.). (11) The nasal v is sometimes dropped before and
e, but hardly before π, as: api, 'Apɩtpitn, Núpns, Núpas (PKretschmer
162 f.), συφέρουσι (ib. 193 f.). (12) Combinations like φθόνος, συμφθείρω,
χθών, Σαπφώ, Σαφφώ, ᾿Ατθίς, ᾿Αθθίς, ἤρχθην, ἠλέγχθην, ἐκάμφθην, ἐχθρός,
that is, p-h+t-h-óvos, ovµp-h +t-heipw, k-h+t-hov, Eup+p-hw,
Σap+h-p-hó, Art + his, 'At+h-this, "pk-h+t-hny, λéɣk-h-t-hŋy, etc.,
are not only incompatible with Greek phonology (124. 169 ff.), but
constitute a physiological impossibility in any actual language
[8]. See
also Bekk. An. 810.
π
Ө
[' 'It seems very strange that, if x were really spoken as explosivos
followed by an 'h,' the Groek: should have felt the need of new signs to express
them—if IIH, KH exactly denoted their phonetic value, why was this writing
abandoned and another adopted which did not clearly reprosent their sound?
It seems a needloss and rather senseless innovation on the assumption that
and x were aspirates; if they were spirants, it is easily comprehensible.'
EDuwos Gr. Aspir. 51. 'Wore x sounded like k-, t-h, p-h respectively, how
is it possible to explain that never once in Attica before the time of Eucloidos
whilst H still=h, nor in any other dialect, as for instanco in Herculaneum
where they had a special sign - for “h,” do we find on an inscription of any
kind, ich, тh, wh written in olisions, crases, and compound words for X, 0, &
respectively?' ib. 98.
Ө
[4] Those few (rīvès) grammarians who classed x 0 4 among the äpova (Sext.
adv. Gram. 622) or explosives, were guided according to HSteinthal (i. 256 &
ii. 193) by the observation that, unlike the other continuae or pipova
o p v µ (§ † (), the three aspiratao x ◊ wero never found at the end of a
Greek word. Priscian i. 11 (HKcil) quare ƒ loco mutae ponatur, miror hanc
inter semivocales posuisse artium scriptores': nihil enim aliud habet haec
litera somivocalis nisi nominis prolationem quae a vocali incipit (i.o. ef).
sed hoc potestatem mutare literae non debuit: si enim esset semivocalis
necessario terminalis nominum inveniretur, quod minime ropories.
เ
[3] Instances like uphill, polherb, blockhouse, etc., aro absolutely irrelevant, since
hero p-h, t-h, kc-h are not only heterosyllabic, but oven bolong to two soparate
words.
58
PRONUNCIATION OF MEDIAE.
[56ª-59.
C.
56. 'The consonants
and had assumed in Boeotia, as early as the
Vuh B.C., the sound of [th in thin] and f respectively. For the transition
of 0 to p, which can take place only on the assumption of a spirantic pro-
nunciation of the two consonants, appears effected already in an epichoric
inscription: ΦΕΤΑΛΟΣ Tan. 49, also Φέτταλος Theb. 21g, against Θέτταλον
Thesp. 273, which last preserves the received spelling.' RMeister i. 260. ii. 52.
56. Just as x is palatalized before the sonants ei, so x is softened in N to
Kɩ or (not тσ) before e i which phenomenon is ancient (60). This palataliza-
tion is strongest in insular speech, particularly in Thera, Amorgos, Naxos,
Chios, Pontos, Crete (ospecially eastern), and South Italy (where it is alto-
gother assimilated to Italian c), as: kaì=ké, kaкé = kaké, èkeî = èkî, pakĥ = pakî.
56º. In Tsaconic speech is sounded like σ, as: σépi (for lépos), oŋλvKÓ
(for θηλυκό). (24)
b. Mediae r a B.
б
57. With regard to the mediae y d B, Erasmians pronounce them
generally as g d b, whereas traditionists sound them as voiced gh, th (þ),
v, except after a nasal where uncultivated N speech sounds them as g,
d, b, the natural fusion of v+j, v +d, v+n, as: eygovos, ❝ygeλos, avdpa,
μάνδαλος, δένδρα, γαμβρός, θαμβώνω (cp. 61). The latter pronunciation
is clearly borne out by the fact that in the A inscriptions the stop
* appears very often changed to y before ẞ and 8, as: éyßárns éɣBodý,
ἐγ Βυζαντίου, ἔκδοσις, ἐκδοχή, ἐγ Δήλου, ἐγ Δρυμού (KMeisterhans 82 f.).
Now the combinations yẞ and yo cannot symbolize the sounds of gb
and gd, since before the labial stops b and d, the mute g is much
more inconvenient to pronounce than is K. On the other hand, « easily
passes to voiced y (gh or 3) before a voiced v or an interdental (8 ).
57. At the same time it may be reasonably averred that g, d, b
being actually established as medial simple sounds (57), cannot be
declared inadmissible at the beginning of a word (as traditionists
claim), unless on the plea of absolute necessity, viz. that the
alternative digraphs уÊ(уỳ), Vт, μπ can never stand at the beginning
of a Greek word (62. 64). As a matter of fact, both pronunciations
g d b and gh v are supported by ancient evidence, and the whole
case will be better illustrated if we consider each media separately.
58. The media y is sounded by-
Erasmians like ordinary g, but before guttural «, y, y like n;
Traditionists velar gh
then-
""
""
""
the sonants e i
""
17
n (189);
y (60).
Thus Erasmians assume a twofold, and traditionists a threefold sound
for y (cp. 189).
59. Leaving aside all theoretical speculation, the traditional
voiced or hard guttural sound gh or 3 is supported by the following
inscriptional data :
a. Before a liquida, y often replaces κ, a phenomenon hardly
explicable if we give y the sound of palatal g, as: érdéyew, érλoyns,
ἐν λιμένος, ἐν Μακεδονίας, ἐν νήσων, ἐτ Ρυμοῦ, ἐν Ρόδου, &c. (all in A
inscriptions; KMeisterhans² 82-85). The same sound of velar gh is
indicated by r-γονος (i. e. ἔκγονος), and misspelling like κόνοις,
έκι Μυρρινούττης, ἐγκ Πειραιῶς ἐπλευσασῶν (all 369-300 Β. C.), ib. 83 &
84 f.
0.
b. An interchange of y and k appears in κναφεύς (V1 Β. Ο.), Γναφείον
(IV Β.Ο.), Κρίφων (Vt B.Ο.), Γνίφων (IV-II B.C.), κωλακρέται &
κωλαρέται, ἀκρόπολις & ατρόπολις, Γορτύνιος & Κορτύνιος, KMeisterhans
58. Compare further since 300 Β.C.) γίνομαι & γίνομαι, γι(σ)νώσκω,
όλι (σ)ωρέω, ολί(σ)ος, Φι(π)αλεύς, ib. See also GMeyer $ 218.
59
59-63.]
PRONUNCIATION OF MEDIAE.
c. Latin c is not rarely transcribed either by y or by x, as: oapárapov
garracum), στάλη (scala), Γάντιος (Cantius), Δέμος (Decimus), Ἰοῦντος
(Juncus), Γαμουρείνα (Camurena)-καλικών, καλικίων (caligarum), καλι-
κάριος, κραβάτριος (grabatarius), Κάϊος (Gaius), 'Ακρίκολος (Agricolus).
(ThEckinger 100 ff.)
59. Likewise such misspellings as ὀλιος and ἐπιταὴ for ὀλίγος and
ÉTITAYń (155°), can be explained only on the assumption for y of a hard
guttural sound: ὀλίγκος ὀλίγος.
K
Χ
60. On the other hand, that the palatal pronunciation of y as į, then
of κ and x as x and y before the palatal sonants e i is ancient (155 f.),
appears clearly:-(a) from the inadmissibility at the end of a syllable
of y × x (54. 91), these consonants being assigned and accommodated
to the next following sound; (b) the unequivocal testimony of Aristid.
Quint. p. 89 Meib.: τῶν ἀφώνων τὰ μὲν διὰ τῶν χειλῶν ἠχεῖται μόνων, τοῦ
πνεύματος τὴν ἔμφραξιν αὐτῶν κατὰ μέσον ἐκβιαζομένου, ὡς τὸ Β καὶ τὰ
τούτου περιεκτικά· τὰ δὲ τῆς μὲν παρειάς Υπο αιρYCHC, τοῦ δὲ ΠΝΕΥΜΑΤΟΣ
ῥαγδέως καὶ εἰς πλάτος προϊεμένου, ὡς τὸ τ καὶ τὰ (read κατὰ τὰ ἑκατέ
pwce akpa, all of which takes place when we pronounce y xx as palatal
x; (c) from misspellings, like Zaparirio for Eaparicio Louvre Pap.
40, 10, & 41, 10 (156 B.C.). Tparetavou Gr. Urk. Berlin 68 (113-4), 12
& 25. Tpariavós GCurtius Anecd. Delph. 1843 p. 73 (198-117). ureιoû
for vioù SSterret, Arch. Inst. Amer. iii. 331; also i. 85. repo[û] ¿σTéov
ὀστέου
for iepoù doréov CWessely, Neue Zaub. p. 213 (±300 A.D.). This is
moreover conceded by Erasmians too (FBlass Pron. 110).
K
ولا
61. The remaining two mediae & and B are pronounced by Eras-
mians invariably as d and b respectively, while traditionists sound them
as buzzes or voiced th and v, except after a nasal, where popular N
pronounces them, like the Erasmians, as d and b respectively (cp.
57). Apart from this partial agreement, it is almost certain that,
like also initial & and B were in many cases sounded like d and b
respectively (57). On the other hand the existence of interdental (i.e.
th in 'then') and labiodental is sufficiently borne out not only by
its presence in N, but also by the tolerably clear testimony of Plato,
who speaks (Crat. 427 A) of τῆς δ᾽ αὖ τοῦ δ συμπιέσεως καὶ τοῦ τ καὶ
απερείσεως τῆς γλώσσης [especially if we read καὶ τῆς τοῦ τ ἀπερείσεως].
See also 194 f.
21
62. In the particular case of ẞ which, above all consonants, has been
the subject of controversy, there is conclusive evidence of its having
had the twofold pronunciation of b and v in classical Greek. For the
former, we have no criterion in the fact that Latin b is regularly
transcribed by Greek B, and conversely Greek B by Latin b, since this
phenomenon is due to the influence of historical orthography (53), but
we have an unmistakable proof in the phonetic representation of
the sheep-cry by means of B (or rather Bée) 'baa,' in a fragment of
Aristophanes (39), an evidence which cannot be refuted by the flimsy
retort of some traditionists that the sheep-cry may be variously heard
by the various nations. The only reasonable objection that could be
raised is that the spelling Bŷ (Bée) may have been necessitated by the
inadmissibility of the alternative spelling uη (µπée), seeing that pr
can never stand at the beginning of a Greek word (57". 64).
63. On the other hand, for the pronunciation of ẞ as labiodental
↑, a whole series of evidence can be adduced. First, the common
[1] For A comparo : 'Aµпраkiŵтis CIA ii. 789, u, 64 (373 B.C.) and 'АµВρаkιштŵν
ib. 184, 6 (323 B.C.). --See also OHoffmann ii. 459 fï.
60
PRONUNCIATION OF LIQUIDS.
[63-67.
f
theory that the sounds ƒ and v were alien to classical Greek phono-
logy is absolutely refuted not only by general linguistic considera-
tions, but also by the very presence of the digamma F in archaic
Greek and its almost total replacement by Bor consonantal v [¹];
next we have the interchange of au and ev with aß eß in the inscrip-
tions (51. 52); the frequent transliteration of Latin intervocalic v by
Greek (ib.); the occasional dropping of μ before ẞ (193); and finally
the pronunciation in N of ẞ as v.
63b. B. LIQUIDS P, A, M, N, AND SPIRANTS C Z.
Though there is no dispute as to the nature of the sound of the
above consonants, it will be advantageous to consider them briefly
here.
PRONUNCIATION OF P.
64. It is unanimously conceded (FBlass Pron. 89) that the ancient
Greeks, like their descendants now, pronounced p with the tip of the
tongue. Cp. Pl. Crat. 426 ο τὸ ῥῷ ἐμοί γε φαίνεται ὥσπερ ὄργανον εἶναι
πάσης τῆς κινήσεως ἣν οὐδ᾽ εἴπομεν [?] δι' ὅ,τι ἔχει τοῦτο τοὔνομα. ib. D τὸ οὖν
ῥῶ τὸ στοιχεῖον καλὸν ἔδοξεν ὄργανον εἶναι τῆς κινήσεως. ib. Ε ἑώρα γὰρ τὴν
γλῶτταν ἐν τούτῳ (τῷ ῥῶ) ἥκιστα μένουσαν, μάλιστα δὲ CΕΙΟΜΕΝΗΝ.
ib. 434 C
τὸ ῥῷ τῇ φορᾷ καὶ κινήσει καὶ σκληρότητι προσέοικεν. Dion. H. De comp.
79 R. (ἐκφωνεῖται δὲ τὸ ρ τῆς γλώσσης απορραπιζού CHC τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ πρὸς τὸν
οὐρανὸν (palate) err'c τῶν ὀλόντων ἀνισταμένης. It was therefore alveo-
lar, vibrating or trilling, like Scotch, Italian, and Russian r; hence
when it stood alone or at the beginning of a word, it was felt as a double
r (a case more or less applicable to interdental ▲ also, 61). This is also
shown by the fact that in verse it very often makes position, and, what
is equally significant, in the scriptura continua it sometimes actually appears
as pp (Kühner-Blass i. 311, cp. KBrugmann" § 65). Now as in the
separation of words no double consonant was admitted as initial (cp. 57b.
62), one of the two p's was inevitably dropped, and this omission was
later on indicated by the sign of the apostrophie inserted in the shape
of the spiritus asper (71. 140). When, however, through composition, it
happened to come after a vowel, the original trilling or double p reap-
peared, as : καταρρέω, βαθύρροος, ἀπορρώξ, ἔρρεον, άρρωστος (but εὔρους,
cupaσtos, i.e. evrus, ovrostos). (Cp. 51. 185 ff. 712.)
εύρωστος,
[Tho common
theory is that initial & reprosents original sr, but cp. 73.]
65. It is this trilled character of alvoolar p, especially when it begins
a syllable or is terminal, which seems to account for the signal avoid-
ance of terminal -PH in 4, inasmuch as the trilling with the tip of the tonguo
involves a back position and cavity in the mouth from which it is incon-
venient to pass immediately to the front position required by the palatal e
and i sounds, as: ἡμέρα, ἀργυρά, καθαρά, θώραξ, ἐπέρανα, πρανής (186°. 269,
4, 839, 892).
66. The parallel, but loss frequent, phenomenon of metrical position in
the case of μσ seems to point to a different phonetic process, in
that these consonants, unlike all other consonants, aro continue, that is
they admit of being drawn out or prolonged at will and so act as short
or long (ep. 92b), i.e. simple or double consonants, as occasion requires
(α]. έλλαβε, έλλαχε, ἔμμαθε).
67. In N speech there are, proporly speaking, three different sounds of A
produced by the relativo position of the tip of the tongue. If it fails, out of
laziness, to roach the palato, it producos an imperfect or indistinct 7 which can
bo easily mistakon for gutturul ; this occurs chiefly before the buck sonants
[1] Thug Lesbian ανηρ = Doric ἅβηρ= Attic αήρ. So του Βαρθαγόρας, βέκας,
βέργον, βέτος, Βαστίας, Βιόλας, φάβος, ευρυβάνασσα, εὐβάλκης-βύνων, Αρχε
νανίδας, φάνος, ανελλα, ανίαχοι, etc. (Kuhner-Blass i. 80, 3 a & b).
61
67, 70.]
READING MARKS.
a o u, as in Sphakia of Crete (1870). If it touches gently the palate, it produces
the ordinary l-sound, universal in Greece. But if it, or rather its blade, is
pressed flatly upon the palate, it produces a thick l analogous to the Russian
hard J, a sound also not unknown in Greece (e. g. at Mesklà in western Crete).
68. Before ß y d μ, the spirant σ (=ss) changes to ((=2), as: IIeda-
αγικόν Le Bas ii. 122 (IVE B. C.), πρεαβευτοῦ Εφημ. αρχ. 2118, 4. Σμύρνα,
βέννυμι often ; ἐνδέσμους Εφημ. ἀρχ. 1883, p. 125, f, γ, 12. Ερασμία
CIA iii. 1553. Xpŋozμóv Bull. Corr. Hell. v. 228 (Cos). Výpızμa CIA
ii. 468 (†·Ist), zµápaydos 'Ednu. åpx. 1280, 8 (45†). So zuikpós, zµepda-
λέος, τμήγμα, μινύη, κμίλιον, etc., Sext. adv. gram. 638, 19 : πότερον διὰ
τοῦ Ζ γραπτέον ἐστὶ τὸ σμιλίον καὶ τὴν Σμύρναν ἢ διὰ τοῦ σ. Luc. Jud.
Voc. 9 τῷ ζῆτα εμάραγδον ἀποσπάσαντι καὶ πᾶσαν ἀφελομένῳ τὴν Σμύρναν.
Many more examples in GMeyer" § 226.
69. For (Erasmians assume the sound of sd or ds (FBlass Pron. 115-
125) on the plea that the grammarians make it consist of o +d. But
this proves only that the grammarians refer to the actual occurrence in
written composition (25. 25°) of the combination od, which naturally
imparts to o the voiced s-sound (cp. Bekk. An. 815, 29 ff.), whereas
the complex do is altogether foreign to Greek. Nor does the other
Erasmian argument which rests on such etymological speculations
ας ἔδω ῥέζω, δαφοινός, ίζω, μαζός, Αθήνα-ζε, etc., deserve any serious
consideration (25).-That from the outset represented a simple
sound appears plainly from the fact that it figures, even in the
oldest inscriptions, as a simple or monoliteral symbol (in the shape
of I), whereas the alleged double sound sd or ds would naturally
have led to the digraph od or do, just as έ and were represented
by xo or κσ and po or no respectively. And that this simple
sound of was no other than voiced s is evidenced by the above
inscriptional and other data (68): Πελαγικών, πρεαβευτοῦ, Ζμύρνα,
zßévvvµi, évdézuovs, zuápaydos, etc.-and further corroborated by the
testimony of Dion. H. De comp. 14 (p. 172 Sch.): Tрiv de tŵv äddwv
γραμμάτων ἃ δὴ διπλᾶ καλεῖται τὸ κ μᾶλλον ἡδύνει τὴν ἀκοὴν τῶν ἑτέρων
(Dion. takes strong objection to the 'animal' sound of o¹). TÒ μÈV
γὰρ = διὰ τοῦ κ τὸ δὲ ψ διὰ τοῦ η τὸν συριγμὸν ἀποδίδωσι, ψιλῶν ὄντων
ἀμφοτέρων, τοῦτο δὲ ἡσυχῇ τῷ πνεύματι δασύνεται (read cγΝΗxe [is voiced
besides] To Tveúμari daovveтaí TE, for the meaningless and contra-
dictory ἡσυχῇ δασύνεται).
READING MARKS (προσωδίαι).
70. Associated with the letters proper are a number of com-
plementary symbols which serve to modulate or regulate the voice
in expressing a word or sentence. Leaving aside η and @), also
ɩ (17¹), such reading marks are generally absent from the Greek
inscriptions and the earlier papyri, and though we can trace at
all events some of them to the IVth B. C., tradition ascribes the
genesis of the whole system to Aristophanes of Byzantium,
a great philologist and librarian at Alexandria during the
IIIrd B.C. This system of complementary symbols gradually
embraced ten signs, called ai déкα πроσwdíαι, and included, besides
[1] De Comp. 17ο ἄχαρι δὲ καὶ ἀηδὲς τὸ σ καὶ εἰ πλεονάσειε σφόδρα λυπεῖ
θηριώδους γὰρ καὶ ἀλόγου μᾶλλον ἢ λογικῆς ἐφάπτεσθαι δοκεῖ φωνῆς δ' συριγμός.
Now as σ is by far the commonest of all consonants in Grook-it is twice as fre-
quent as y, the next commonest consonant-the Grook language must bo, in
Dionysios' opinion, fitted botter for boasts than for men. (Cp. 25 [1], 267, & 536.)
62
READING MARKS-BREATHINGS.
[70-72.
the reading signs properly so-called, also the breathings, accents,
and quantity marks. The whole system consisted of the follow-
ing symbols: the two signs and to denote quantity (i. e.
length and shortness, cp. 17b); the three accentual marks / \ n
(now shaped ~); the two breathings (and'); the comma (,);
and the hyphen ~.
/
1. Breathings :
2. Accents:
3. Stops:
smooth ('spiritus lenis,'
λn, originally 4,
shorter or 1), as άva, èπɩ
rough ('spiritus asper,' daocia, originally
†, shorter L), as vπo, pew
acute (ỏέcîa, originally), as κatá, tís
grave (βαρεία, originally), as κατὰ, μὴν
circumflex (περισπωμένη, also ὀξυβάρεια,
δίτονος, σύμπλεκτος, originally or A
then rounded in order to avoid con-
fusion with the letter A), as pôs µûs
, comma (vпоσтιyμý, originally later +
shorter or ), as peper. later pepeɩ.
period or full stop (Teλeía), as peper.
•
;
•
colon (μέση στιγμή), as φέρει
interrogation (ερωτηματικόν), as φερει ;
4. Quantity Marks: the paкрú (sc. Tроowdía). App. ii. 16.)
5. Other Signs:
μακρά προσῳδία).
~ the βραχεία (sc. προσωδία).
( ) parenthesis (ñapévbeσis, 80)
dash (παύλα, 80)
! exclamation (Oavμaoтikóv, 80)
BREATHINGS.
App. ii. 16).
(δασεία and ψιλή [sc. προσῳδία], later also πνεῦμα δασὺ and ψιλόν.)
71. Every initial sonant is marked with either the smooth
or the rough breathing. The smooth ('), called spiritus lenis,
has at all times been mute. The rough (), called spiritus asper,
is now sounded by Erasmians like h. (See 72 ff.; cp. 56.)
71. Also initial is now marked with the rough breathing (64),
while pp may be written either po or more commonly simply pp.
72. Speaking of the breathings, it will be remembered that they
never found a place among the letters (70), as they figure in the
alphabets of other nations. Their original form, as shown in some
old papyri supplied with such signs (e.g. Alkman, Ilias of Bankes),
was and 4, very soon worn down to Land (the latter also
Jsince the XIth A.D. to the modern and and it is alleged
that they originated in the bisection of H, the first half repre-
senting the rough_breathing (') and the second half the smooth
breathing (') [¹). ~ Now it is true that in many archaic inscriptions II
[1] Bekk. An. ii. 692 : τὸ σημεῖον τῆς δασείας, ἤτοι τὸ διχοτόμημα τοῦ Η τὸ
ἐπὶ τὰ ἔξω ἀπεστραμμένον . τὸ δὲ ἕτερον τοῦ αὐτοῦ στοιχείου διχοτόμημα τὸ ἐπὶ
τὰ ἔσω ἐστραμμένον. And p. 706 : ἡ δασεία συναπτομένη τῇ ψιλῇ τύπον τοῦ
Η αποτελεί, οἷον | 4.
63
72-74.]
BREATHINGS.
appears still lingering as a Phoenician reminiscence (3), acting as a
sort of breathing, either initial (aspiration), or medial (interaspiration,
but in the principal dialects-Ionic, Aeolic (84), to a great extent
also Doric-it does not occur at all. As to Attic, its pre-Eucleidian
inscriptions show a great irregularity regarding this symbol. For
very frequently it is absent [1], still oftener it is added, but even then
not always in the right place, according to our present notions; some-
times, too, it is put before every initial vowel (as CIA i. 324) [2], and
again it often accompanies the consonants p, X, Y, F, a case preclud-
ing the possibility of any aspiration in actual speech; finally, with
the close of the Vth B.C., it disappears altogether from the inscrip-
tions. This anomaly admits of two explanations: either that as early
as the VI-Vth the Athenians, anticipating our modern Cockneys,
dropped their h's, and eventually, with the close of the Vth B.C., the
aspiration was altogether done away with, and that even in the
polite and literary language, as a useless encumbrance; or, which is
more probable, that H lingered as a mere Phoenician antiquity and so
was now discarded altogether. This is moreover shown by the sig-
nificant fact that the rough breathing, whether initial or medial, never
prevents elision (παρ' οὗ, ἄν-οδος, πάροδος, etc., forms which cannot pro-
ceed directly from Taрa+hov, ava +hodos, Tapa+hodos, etc., 170 f.)[³],
nor actually affects the sound of any preceding consonant, seeing
that the case of the tenues is no real exception (171). A further
confirmation is finally afforded by its never being considered or
mentioned by Plato in the very frequent occasion offered by his
etymologies in Cratylos (cp. 41),; by the testimony of Aristotle,
who states that the distinction between of and où consists in stress,
and makes no mention whatever of aspiration (El. Soph. 21; so too
4 & 8); and finally by the absence in A of even a naine for it (29º).
See 84 & App. i. 4 & [1]. See also ESRoberts 104 f.
72b. Tho sound h was expressed in old Attic until 403 B. C. by tho sign H; but
even in early antiquity an uncertainty prevails in the uso of this sign, partly
owing to the weak pronunciation of the sound, partly owing to the irruption of
the Ionic alphabet, h being frequently omitted, occasionally also (at least in the
late inscriptions of the Vi) erroneously added. Thus, an inscription of 418 B.C.
omits all h's save in the word iepós, which occurs four times. Conversely, in
an inscription of 408 B.c., h is prefixed indiscriminately to almost every initial
vowel.' KMeisterhans" 65-67 (where numerous instances are cited).
73. Modern philologists are generally agreed in tracing the origin of the
aspiration in Greck back to the Indo-European common stock. But it is
a curious phenomenon, commonly overlooked, that just in those casos where
Groek tradition is unanimous in the use of tho spiritus aspor, as in the
initial v- und -, the assumod Indo-European prototype shows no aspiration. Cp.
HDDarbishire 24 f. & 55 fl. (64).
74. Our present practice of marking the rough breathing origi-
nated during II times (70). Like all other pooqdía, this sign
was devised by the grammarians and placed, as a diacritic mark,
above the initial sonants of certain words which, judging from their
effect in composition, were originally aspirated (kúeodos ódós, épiornµ
fr.
In about 150 instancos, according to PCauor in Curt. Stud. viii, 232
[2] This inscription (408 B.C.) toems with confusions: Houceiv pussin (bosido
οἰκεῖν), κατιστᾶσιν, ἔδραν (often), Her (for ἐν), από, Ηικρίωμα, Ηοροφή, Πεντύς,
ἄρμα, Ηεχόμενος, εργαζομένοις, εύδοξος, εἰστήκει, ἱερέας, ή (for f), oto.
[*] Solitary instancos, like πάρεδρος, καθάπερ, μηδενί (440-400 Β.C.)
(KMoisterhans² 67) do not tostify to the actual prosence of interaspiration at tho
time, but merely point to an artificial compromise of original purathotic'
παρα-εδρος, κατα-κάπερ, μηδε-μενί, with contemporary πάρεδρος, καθάπερ,
μηδενί. (Cp. πιο, 1138.)
64
ACCENTS.
[74-76b.
ornu). As time went on, this practice met with favour among their
Byzantine successors, and ultimately found its way into our MSS,
though its systematic application dates only from the VIIth A.D. (76º).
75. The sign of the smooth breathing or spiritus lenis (') is never
found in the inscriptions and papyri, nor in the oldest MSS. Like
the rough breathing, it is alleged to have been invented by Alexan-
drian grammarians (70). It is only since the VIIth A.D. that it has
been systematically applied in the MS texts as a mere negative sign,
that is, to emphasize the absence of aspiration.
C.
ACCENTS OR ACCENTUAL MARKS.
76. The Greek language, though it unquestionably indicated the
accent at all times, shows no marks for it either in the inscrip-
tions or in the earlier papyri (72). Nevertheless, as early as A
times the theorists had observed that not only every word is
stressed, but that every syllable bears a relatively higher or lower
stress [1], and endeavoured to express this stress by conventional signs
which we may call here 'accentual marks [2]' Hence the system was
adopted of marking every unstressed (or rather lower stressed) syllable
with a bar slanting from the left to the right \ and called πрoodia
Bapeia (Latinized accentus gravis), while the one bearing the dominant
stress was marked with a bar slanting from the right to the left / and
called mрoo día ógeîa (Latinized accentus acutus). Thus :-
π
ΘΕΟΔΩΡΟΣ ΛΕΓΟΜΕΝΟΙ ΜΗΣΑΜΕΝΟΙ ΕΠΕΣΣΕΥΟΝΤΟ,
a practice which is attested by several instances in the Harris papyrus
of Homer (Ist A.D.) . When two consecutive syllables, thus accented,
were contracted to one, the theorists indicated the process by joining
the two slanting bars either at the top or at the bottom: *KÉÈпÒΣ
ΚΗΠΟΣ, ΦΑΟΣ ΦΩΣ, ΜΙΣΘΟ ΜΕΝ ΜΙΣΘΟΥΜΕΝ, ΕΣΤΑΟΣ ΕΣΤΩΣ,
ΜΙΣΘΟ ΜΕΘΑ ΜΙΣΘΟΥΜΕΘΑ, and called the resultants A and V
περισπωμένη (circumflexus) and ἀντανακλωμένη respectively (App. i. 19g.
76. As time went on, the regular addition of the grave was found
to be useless and cumbrous (82), and so scribes dropped it altogether
(retaining it only as far as it was contained in the circumflex A,
77), so that the above words came to be marked simply thus:
ΘΕΟΔΩΡΟΣ ΛΕΓΟΜΕΝΟΙ ΜΗΣΑΜΕΝΟΙ ΕΠΕΣΣΕΥΟΝΤΟ ΚΑΠΟΣ
ΦΩΣ ΜΙΣΘΟΥΜΕΝ ΕΣΤΩΣ ΜΙΣΘΟΥΜΕΘΑ [4].
[1] It is well known among phoneticians that each single syllable in a word has
its accont, with this difference, that one particular syllable among thom boars
the relatively highest or dominant stress. The prominence thus given to this
particular syllable has led to the popular practice of calling this stross the accent
par excellence, while all othor (secondary) degroos of accent, being overpowered
by the dominant, have boon lost sight of. Honce the common saying that oach
word has only one accent, moaning by it the dominant accent. (Cp. 81 & App. i. 3,
9[1]. Varieties of such acoustic accent aro mentioned also by Pluto (Crat. 399 A-B ;
416 B), and other contemporaries, who distinguish between Au piλos and Aípidos,
Γλαύκος and γλαυκός, Ξάνθος und ξανθός (App. i. 2 f. ; Kuhner-Blass, i. 318).
[2] Tho six mрoo día, attributed by Varro (iv. 530, HKeil) to Glaukos cannot
all apply to acoustic accent. In fact all those terms-ἀνειμένη, μέση, επιτετα-
μένη, κεκλασμένη, ἀντανακλαζομένη οι ἀντανακλωμένη, περίσπασις (otherwise
περισπωμένη), δίτονος, ὀξυβάρεια—rofer to the three graphic symbols 16,
and so have no specific value. See App. i. 1 & 5, ii. 16.
The practice of supplying the syllables with accentual marks in Aristotle's
timo is alluded to by him as a kind of novelty (El. Soph. 20, 3): hồŋ пaρáoŋμа
TOLOUνTαL. (Sco App. i. 1-4).
[4] IPhiloponos Tονικὰ παραγγέλματα γ. 6 : καθ' ἑκάστην λέξιν ἐν μιᾷ συλλαβῇ
65
F
76c-77b.]
ACCENTS.
76°. The systematic application of accentual marks to MS texts
dates only since the VIIth A.D. (cp. 74 f. 80.).
77. The above historical sketch of the development of the accentual
marks makes it sufficiently clear that, for practical purposes, the ancient
Greeks, like modern phoneticians, recognized two degrees of accent: the
stressing (rising ?) or acute ( 7 ), and the relaxing (falling?) or grave ( \ ),
while a combination of the two, the circumflex ( \ ), was a merely con-
crete symbolization of the rising and falling (better of the stressing and
relaxing, or percussion and remission, 85 ff.) of the tone present on two
successive sonants like φάos and ἱππέ previous to their contraction. It is
evident, however, that as soon as such successive sonants had, under the
influence of accent (stress or ictus), merged to a simple sound, be it in
the form of a simple vowel (φως) or a diphthong (ἱππεϊ), involving one
position of the mouth, the accent was of necessity reduced to the dominant
or acute, and the retention of the unstressed or grave mark as an append-
ant to it (76) was merely intended to symbolize graphically the phonetic
process which had taken place on the resultant or contracted sonant. The
absolute identity of the circumflex and acute is moreover shown by their
equal treatment in the operation of the tonoclisis (ro4 f.), as : φῶς τε, φῶς
ἐστιν, καλός τε, καλός ἐστιν [1]. The theory therefore that in A the acute de-
noted a rising (1), and the grave a falling (\) of the voice, is, in a certain
sense (App. i. 8), correct, whereas the belief that the circumflex denoted
a rising-falling ( 1 \ ) of the voice, is only so far admissible as it refers
to its original form (/\), when it clasped two separate vowels, but as soon
as those two vowels had 'contracted' to one sonant involving one position
of the mouth, the contention that the circumflex still continued to denote
the original rising-falling of the voice is a purely theoretic speculation,
utterly impossible in actual speech and without parallel in language.
For the appeal to the Sanskrit svarila is a demonstration of incertum per
incertius[2], and the few supposed analogues adduced from living languages
are either irrelevant interjections (really ? 1 ja ! ?) or imaginary cases.
77. On the other hand, it must not be inferred that, because all three
accentual signs ( /\ ~) came to symbolize one and the same accent, the
higher stress or acute (their absence indicating the presence of the lower
τίθεμεν ἢ ἐξεῖαν ἢ περισπωμένην, ἐν δὲ ταῖς λοιπαῖς συλλαβαῖς βαρείαν, οἷον ἐν
τῷ Μενέλαος (ή) δευτέρα συλλαβὴ ὀξύνεται, αἱ δὲ λοιπαὶ βαρύνονται. καὶ ἐν τῷ
ἀλλοῖὸς ἡ μέση περισπάται, ἡ δὲ πρώτη καὶ ἡ τρίτη βαρύνονται. (Compare
Noticos XVIII. ii. 417.) Schol. ad Dion. Thr. in Bekk. An. ii. 688 ἡ βαρεία
συλλαβικὸς τόνος ἐστί, τουτέστιν εἰς τὴν συλλαβὴν τὴν μὴ ἔχουσαν τὸν κύριον
τόνον ἐπιτίθεται. ἐξηγούμενος ὁ περὶ τῶν προσῳδιῶν τὸν λόγον ποιούμενος διατί
ἐλέγετο παρὰ τοῖς ἀρχαίοις συλλαβικός τόνος ἡ βαρεία, φησὶν ὅτι ἐπὶ πάσης
συλλαβῆς τῆς μὴ ἐχούσης τὴν ἐξεῖαν ἐτίθετο. ἦν γὰρ κανὼν ὁ λέγων ὅτι πᾶσα
συλλαβή, χωρὶς τῆς συλλαβῆς τῆς ἐχούσης τὸν κύριον τόνον, τὴν βαρεῖαν ἐπιδέ
χεται· οἷον Θεόδωρὸς τὸ θε καὶ τὸ δω καὶ τὸ POC βαρεῖαν ἐδέχοντο. τὸ γὰρ ο
τὸν κύριον τόνον εἶχε, κύριος δὲ τόνος καλεῖται ἡ ἐξεῖα ὅτι ἐπιτείνει τὴν φωνήν.
καὶ πόθεν δῆλον ; ὅτι πᾶσαι αἱ ἄλλαι συλλαβαὶ αἱ μὴ ἔχουσαι τὴν ὀξείαν, ἄνεσιν
ἔχουσιν. Εἶτα τὴν αἰτίαν ἀποδιδοὺς δι᾿ ἣν οὐ τίθεται νῦν ἐπὶ πάσης συλλαβῆς ἡ
βαρεία φησίν· “ἵνα μὴ καταχαράσσωνται τὰ βιβλία τοῦτο νῦν οὐ γίνεται.
[4] Henco Plato identifies πᾶν and May in overy respect: Crat. 408 ο ὀρθῶς
ἄρ᾽ ἂν ὁ πᾶν μηνύων καὶ αἰεὶ πολῶν Πάν αιπόλος εἴη. Op. also 85 f. 85 (but also 25°).
[2] The independent svarita, which is everywhere of a binary origin, appoars
as the union of a higher with a lower tone within a syllablo. In its nature there-
fore it is identical with the Greek circumflox, but its origin is a difforent one.
For it commonly appears only thero where a short or long vowol is followed by
an i or u, provided with the udatta and acting as y and v respoctivoly.-The
identification of the independent svarita in the vocativo dŷjāus with the circum-
flex in Greek Zeû, as represented by Brugmann in his Grundriss i. 539, is hardly
tenable.' HHirt 20 f. so too 1Wackornagel § 244, and PKretschmer Einl. 78.—
Cp. App. i. I [3].
66
ACCENTS
[77b-81.
-ACCENTUAL TERMS.
stress or grave, 76b; cp. 75), Greek accent in classical antiquity was in every
respect identical with modern English or German accent; it was rather
similar to modern Greek and Italian or Spanish accent which, as is well
known, is less intensive and consequently does not overpower or per-
ceptibly reduce (syncopate) unaccented syllables (App. i. 11 & [1]. 17 & [1]).
78. In a diphthong the second vowel conventionally receives
both breathing and accent, as : εὐθύς, εὖ, αὔριον, εἶχον, φεύγε, αἷμα,
ποίει, ποιεῖ, οὐ, οὗτος, τοῦτο.
78. This practice, which dates from M, is both historically and ration-
ally wrong.
For whether we admit a resolved or a monophthongal
pronunciation, in inscriptions and papyri, so far as they show any
breathings, the sign H or is regularly placed before or above the first
(initial) vowel of a diphthong word. This naturally applies with equal
force to the accentual marks when placed over the mute or consonantized
element of a diphthong (as in ãi, ni wɩ—av eu nu wv), or when placed over
the postpositive vowel of a diphthong pronounced in the Erasmian fashion,
sceing that in the union of two vowels in what Erasmians call a
diphthong the first remains dominant and the second performs a semi-
consonantal function (18. 19. 32, 3. 326). This is also shown first by the very
constitution of the circumflex / which stresses the prepositive vowel, and
then by the present sound of av ev as av ev or af ef, which could proceed
only from du eu [άν έν], never from au eu : νεῦρον ναύτης = νευρον νά της
not veoûpov vaoúrns. (Cp. further máïs, öïs, etc., and the spurious diph-
ναούτης.
thongs a, n, a in 19 ff. 31 ff.)
@
79. The four stops (,. ;) (70, 3) are generally absent from the
old inscriptions and papyri (70), the custom with the ancients being
to write all words in an unbroken line, called scriptura continua (25°).
When the necessity for such stops arose among Alexandrian gram-
marians, they resorted to the use of the full-point in a threefold but
reverse sense, that is, the high point or reλeía ortyun, which denoted
the complete close of a sentence, was placed at the top of the last letter
(as in γράμμα"); the μέση στιγμή, which corresponded to our semi-
colon, was a simple point in a middle position (as in ypáµµa), whereas
the point on the line (UTоσrtyμn) was equivalent to our comma . The
1.
form of our modern comma (,) was also known and called vπоdiaσтоλn
or (ẞpaɣeîa) diaorodý, but served in the 'scriptura continua' to sepa-
(βραχεία) διαστολή,
rate two words liable to confusion, as: ΕΣΤΙΝ, ΟΥΣ and ΕΣΤΙ, ΝΟΥΣ.
It is still sometimes used as a distinctive mark, as 8,T='whatever,'
örı' that.' In process of time the μéon oTiyun disappeared, and
ὅτι
about the IXth A.D. the regular comma (,) took its place.
C.
80. The English colon (:) is rendered in Greek by a simple dot (·),
called μéon oriyµń (79, but cp. 2032). The note of interrogation dates
from the IXth of our era. In their present form, the note of exclama-
tion (anciently marked by a semicolon) (*), the parenthesis, the dash, and
the quotation marks (2032 f.), were unknown to the Greeks; these signs
have been introduced into the Greek texts by critics of the present
century, chiefly by FrWolf.
ACCENTUAL TERMS.
81. In Greek every word has one, and only one, accent (76 &
[1]), which, in consequence of its dynamic nature (85 f.), is re-
stricted to the last three syllables, and can never recede beyond
[1] Dion. Thr. iu Bokk, An. ii. 630 στιγμαί εἰσι τρεῖς, τελεία, μέση, ὑπο-
στιγμή. καὶ ἡ μὲν τελεία στιγμή ἐστι διανοίας ἀπηρτισμένης σημεῖον· μέση δὲ
σημείον πνεύματος ένεκεν παραλαμβανόμενον· ὑποστιγμὴ δὲ διανοίας μηδέπω
ἀπηρτισμένης, ἀλλ' ἔτι ἐνδεούσης σημεῖον. For more details seo Schol. ib. 758 f.
67
F 2
81-83.]
ACCENTUAL TERMS.
the third syllable from the end (trisyllabotony). It is chiefly this
system of trisyllabotony that accounts for the development and
preservation in Greek of its eminently inflectional character
(32° ff. App. i. 9). Of the three accentual marks now used—
81b. The acute (') can stand over any ('long or short ')
syllable among the last three. If it stands over the very last
(ultima), the word is called oxytone, as νομός ; if over the last
but one (penultima or penult), the word is called paroxytone, as
νόμος ; if over the last but two (antepenultima]), a case admis-
sible only when the ultima is 'short,' the word is called
proparoxytone, as παράνομος.
82. The grave (`) can stand only over the last syllable as a
substitute for the acute, when the latter would not be immedi-
ately followed by a pause (stop or comma), as : σοφὸς ἀνήρ, and
ἀνὴρ σοφός.
82. This practice seems to rest on the analogy of unaccented
(barytoned) syllables and proclitics (94 ff.). Just as unstressed syl-
lables, now unaccented but originally marked with the grave (76 f.),
stand in the relation of dependency to that bearing the dominant
accent; just as the proclitics attach themselves to the leading word,
for which they formerly received the secondary or grave accent (95 f.):
so ordinary single words in a sentence, as constituent parts of a con-
nected whole, are treated as if they were proclitics, and so are
marked with the grave accent, conceived as the sign of continuation.
82. Compare Schol. ad Dion. Th. in Bekk. Αn. ii. 674 f. ἡ βαρεία συλλαβικὸς
τόνος ἐστί, τουτέστιν εἰς τὴν συλλαβὴν τὴν μὴ ἔχουσαν τὸν κύριον τόνον ἐπὶ
τέλους ἐτίθετο. ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα μὴ καταχαράσσωνται τὰ βιβλία, τοῦτο νῦν οὐ γίνεται,
ἀλλ᾽ εἰς τὸν τύπον τῆς ὀξείας ἐν τῇ συνεπείᾳ τίθεται, οἷον ἄνθρωπος καλός.
ἰδοὺ γὰρ εἰς τὸ λος ἐνταῦθα ἐτέθη ἡ ὀξεῖα ὅτι ἐπὶ τέλους εὑρέθη. ἐὰν δὲ εἴπῃς
Καλός άνθρωπος, ἰδοὺ ὧδε εἰς τὸ λος ἐτέθη ἡ βαρεῖα ὅτι μετὰ ταῦτα εὑρέθη τὸ
ἄνθρωπος.—And 689 οὐχ ἁπλῶς τίθεται ἡ βαρεῖα εἰς τὸν τόπον τῆς ὀξείας, ἀλλ᾿
εἰς ἐκεῖνον μόνον τὸν ἐπὶ τῆς ληγούσης εὑρισκόμενον, καὶ ταῦτα ὅτε οὐδὲ ἡ ἔννοια
ἀναπαύεται ἀλλ' ἔστι συνέπεια, ἤτοι μετὰ τὴν ὀξύτονον λέξιν εὑρίσκεται καὶ ἑτέρα
λέξις. 690 συνέπεια γάρ ἐστι ἡ συναρμογὴ τῶν λέξεων καὶ συνεκφώνησις
ζητήσειέ δ᾽ ἄν τις διατί μή, ἐπὶ τέλους τῆς ὀξυτόνου λέξεως εὑρισκομένης, τίθεται ἡ
βαρεία. ἐστιν οὖν εἰπεῖν ὅτι ἡ στιγμὴ καὶ ἡ ἀνάπαυσις τῆς φωνῆς οὐκ ἐᾷ βαρείαν
τεθεῖναι, ἀλλὰ κρουστικωτέραν, ἵν᾽ οὕτως εἴπω, τὴν λέξιν ἀπεργαζομένη οξύνεσθαι
ταύτην βιάζεται. οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἑτέρα λέξις ἐπαγομένη ἵνα συγκαλύψῃ τὸν ἦχον
τῆς ὀξείας. Choer. ib. 707, 27 ἰστέον δὲ ὅτι πᾶσα λέξεις ὀξύτονος, ἐν τῇ συνεπείᾳ
ἤγουν ἐν τῇ φράσει (road συμφράσει), κοιμίζει τὴν ἐξεῖαν εἰς βαρεῖαν χωρὶς τοῦ τίς
δεῖ δὲ ἐν τῷ κανόνι προσθεῖναι χωρὶς εἰ μὴ ἐπιφέρεται στιγμὴ ἢ ἐγκλιτικόν.
ἐὰν γὰρ ἐπιφέρηται στιγμὴ ἢ ἐγκλιτικὸν οὐ κοιμίζεται ἡ ἐξεῖα εἰς βαρείαν.
•
·
•
.
83. The circumflex (^ or ) can stand over a 'naturally
long' ultima or penult. If over the ultima, the word is called
perispomenon, as φιλῶ ; if over the penult, the word is called
properispomenon, as κήπος.
a. For the origin and value of the circumflex see 76 ff.
b. A word having no accent over the ultima is called barytone,
because the ultima was originally marked with a βαρεία or grave
accent (76 f.).
[Io. Alex. 6, 15 βαρύτονα καλεῖται τὰ παροξύτονα καὶ προπαροξύτονα καὶ
προπερισπώμενα, διό(τι) ἡ τελευταία τούτων βαρύνεται.]
68
ACCENT AND ICTUS.
[84-85d.
84. Aeolic on the one hand discarded the spiritus asper (72), and on the other
drew the accent as far back from the end as possible (except in the case of prepo-
sitions and conjunctions as tonoclitics, 94), as: δ, οὗτος, ἄλις—πόταμος, αὖτος,
υλος, ἄπαλος, Σαπφω, δύνατος, Αφρόδιτα, βασίλευς, λεύκος, σκλῆρος, σύφος, ἔμοι,
νύεις. These two peculiarities of Aeolic are designated as psilosis and bary-
tonesis (ψίλωσις, βαρυτόνησις). Cp. Apoll. de const. 38, 127 (Bekk.) äλλoɩ pèv
Έλληνες δασύνουσι τὰ φωνήεντα, Αἰολεῖς δὲ οὐδαμῶς—and Schol. ad Dion. Thr.
in An. Bekk. 716, ο κανών γάρ ἐστιν ὁ λέγων ὅτι οἱ Αἰολεῖς ἐν ταῖς ἰδίαις λέξεσι
τὴν δασείαν ὅλως ἀγνοοῦσιν. Hdn. ii. 825, 13 οἱ Αἰολεῖς . . . πᾶσαν λέξιν ὑπὲρ
μίαν συλλαβὴν παρ' ἡμῖν ὀξύτονον βαρύνουσι χωρὶς τῶν προθέσεων καὶ τῶν
συνδέσμων.
ovvdéoμwv. (RMeister i. 31 ff. OHoffmann ii. 526 ff.)
9
84b. To judge from old Indian (Vedic and Sanskrit), Latin, Aeolic [¹],
and numerous instances in Attic (cp. 257. 704), the Greek accent on
the whole was recessive, thus tending to barytonesis or rather pro-
paroxytonesis (32°, 2).
ACCENT AND Ictus.
85. As in all other languages, so in Greek accent was and still
is 'dynamic' denoting stress (32ª. 77¹, App. i). It appears under
two different forms, according as it applies to ordinary speech
or to verse.
a. In ordinary speech accent is the percussion or stress put on one
among several syllables of a word. The syllable thus made prominent
is fixed by general consensus and so appears natural to us. It may be
termed the speaking accent or tonic stress.
b. In verse or rhythmical composition accent is the percussion or
emphasis given to one among several syllables forming a rhythmical
group or measure (Tous). The syllable thus stressed is selected
by the versifier and its place determines the nature of the rhythm.
This kind of accent appears as artificial and is distinguished from
natural accent as 'metrical (or rhythmical) beat,' as ictus. Reciting
according to it is called scanning or scansion.
85". Spoaking accent and ictus then are identical in nature but different in
application. In this way, while speaking accont is the soul or pulse of
speech, ictus is the soul or pulse of rhythm (metre). As a matter of course,
grammar considers only the speaking accent which it designates by the simple
torm accent.
>
85º. The identity of speaking with metrical accent (of stress with ictus) on
the one hand, and the identity of the acute with the circumflex on the other
(77
& [1]), finds a striking illustration in the anecdote told of Eur. Or. 279
ἐκ κγμάτων γάρ ανθις Α' ΓΑΛΗΝ᾽ ὁρῶ: κεκωμώδηται ὁ στίχος διὰ Ηγέλοχον
τὸν ὑποκριτήν· οὐ γὰρ φθάσαντα διελεῖν τὴν συναλοιφήν, ἐπιλείψαντος τοῦ πνεύ
ματος, τοῖς ἀκροωμένοις τὴν γαλὴν δόξαι (if not ἔδοξε) λέγειν, τὸ ζῷον ἀλλ᾽ οὐχὶ
τὰ γαληνά πολλοὶ μὲν οὖν αὐτὸ διέπαιξαν τῶν κωμικῶν, Αριστοφάνης, etc. (so too
Ar. Ran, 303)—where yaλýv' ('calm') was mistaken for yaλîv ('cnt' or
'weazel'), and thus caused a deririon (ekwμḍdηtai, diénaiçav). To attributo
the derision to the intermission of the olision or to the mispronunciation of
the accent (yaλýv' yaλñv), as is sometimes argued, is to forgot that such a dis-
cordanco or jarring in enunciation would havo causod not derision but dis-
ploasuro, a hardly appropriate point for popular fun. Cp. 77 [1].
854. The identity of the speaking accent with tho ictus is further evidenced
first by direct ancient testimony (Quint. 1, 5, 28; Victor. 31, 17; Auson. 4, 47), and
then by their complete analogy in both usage and effect, and it would not be a bold
[4] Apparontly Cypriot also, as: κόρζα for καρδία, ἄγανα for σαγήνην, etc.
OHoffmann, ii. 232.
69
85d-89b.]
QUANTITY.
theory to assume that the rhythm of Homeric verse was suggested by accent. Just
as speaking accent in Greek was rogressive but falling, so was the dactylic rhythm
(); just as Greek accent was restricted to the last three syllables, so Homeric
rhythm played on three syllables, the dactyls corresponding to proparoxytona
and the spondees to paroxytona; just as accent can reduce an adjoining syllable
(App. i. 13 ff.), so can the ictus reduce an adjoining syllablo (as (363 ½pwos
του; ep. A αὕτη, τουτουί, τουτῳί, ταυτηί, οὗτοι, αὑταιί-all -r- etc.). Cp. 574.
QUANTITY.
86. Technically (metrically and grammatically) considered,
a syllable counts short when it has a 'short' vowel followed by
either another vowel or a simple consonant. (17h. 89 f. App. ii.)
87. A syllable counts long either-
1. by position (féσe), when it has a 'short' vowel, but this
vowel is followed by two consonants or a compound consonant,
ας οργή, ὄψον, πιστός. (App. ii. 5 1.)
as
2. by nature (pure), when it has a 'naturally long' vowel
or a diphthong (17 f.);
88. A syllable is called common or doubtful (also variable, 17),
counting either short or long, when it has a naturally short
vowel followed by a combination of one mute (y, B, 8) with
the liquid p, sometimes also A. (Cp. 64 f. and App. ii. 5 f.)
88". Original and genuino (physiological) quantity is that effoctod by
position. What we are wont to call 'natural quantity' is really hystero-
goneous and compensatory, having developed from lost 'position' by arti-
ficial means and for metrical purposes. For the historical development of
this phenomenon sce 89 and particularly App. ii. 6-15.
89. As a matter of courso, previous to the adoption of ŋ and w (6), the Greeks
knew nothing of the technical terms ' long vowels' and 'short vowels.' In rocit-
ing or reading verso, the prevalent kind of literature then cultivated (29 f.), they
were guided by the rhythmical accent (85, b) which in those timos was indicated
by the audible putting down and raising of the foot, the θέσις (also βάσις) καὶ
ἄρσις τοῦ ποδός, the θέσις corresponding to tho rhythmical beat or porcussion
(ictus) and the apois to the remission or fall, a practico which originatod in
the orchestics and accounts for the designation of a metrical unit or measure
by the term roús (pes), foot. In this way éois (sc, toû todds) came to be equiva-
lont to the rhythmically acconted and consequently 'longer syllablo,' while
'shorter
tho ἄρσις (sc. τοῦ ποδός) indicated the rhythmically unacconted or
syllable' of the woús, with this furthor peculiarity that, as movement bogins first
by lifting tho foot, the current formula was apois kaì ééσis, not convorsely. In
other words, a syllable was conceived according to its placo in the Toùs or
mcaguro, either θέσει μακρά οι άρσει βραχεία, whereas tho vowels thomsolvos
woro not distinguishod in point of quantity. This old and simple systom, which
explains the very common caso of metrical length undor tho ictus (85'. App. i.
16"), was disturbed when ŋ and a found their way into verso as visiblo guides
to prosody, inasmuch as syllables with ŋ or a soon appropriated the term of
naturally long syllablos (púσe μarpaí), while the rest, that is those with any
other vowel, were contradistinguished according to their place in the Déσis or
ἄρσις of the πούς, ως θέσει μακραί, i. e, long by position, as βραχείαι i.Θ.
'short,' or us díxpovoι (àµpißoλo, otc. 17 1.), i. o. shifting or doubtful.'- For more
particulars so0 29 ff. and App. ii. 6-15. (Cp. also RWostphal, Thoorie" i. 102 ff.)
89". It may be further notod that whon in procoss of time tho musical arts
attained a higher development, the use of the foot was found to be inconvoniont
for tho singers who needed a loss disturbing and yot porceptiblo or visible mark of
tho rhythmical mousure. Honce the raising and putting down of the foot made
70
PHONOPATHY-SYLLABICATION.
[89b-91.
room for the raising and lowering of the hand (ἄρσις καὶ θέσις τῆς χειρός),
new method which during G was identified with the rise and fall of the tone
(a misconception to which the standing formula apois kai béois may have con-
tributed, 89) and thus led to the reverse meaning, apois now being identified
with the former éois, and conversely. This roversed terminology then passed
over to the Romans and from them (through RBentley and GHermann) to
modern prosody.
II. PHONOPATHY.
I. GENERAL PHONOPATHY.
90. Phonopathy, or pathology of sounds, deals with the
process and nature of changes which sounds (including accent)
frequently undergo when they are brought into immediate
contact with one another. Thus phonopathy investigates under
what conditions and how far letters and accentual marks, as
representatives of sounds and stress, are affected by their
mutual contact.
a. SYLLABICATION.
91. For the division of a Greek word into syllables, there is no
established rule, and the general custom followed by grammars rests on
a number of inconsistent and contradictory precepts handed down to
us by Byzantine grammarians (cp. Sext. adv. gramm. 638 f. Bk., and
Kühner-Blass i. 350, 2 f.). Nor are the inscriptions in any way
safer guides, seeing that they are never engraved phonetically, but
either oroyndor or mechanically (30). Almost equally unsatisfactory is
the lesson to be drawn from the ancient papyri and MSS, because
they follow no fixed rule. Indeed the value of all these sources is
problematical, and the only safe inference to be drawn from all these
sources is that syllabication in Greek has no regard to the logical or
etymological constitution of the word, and so the question must be
determined by the phonetic principles of the language, that is, by
the actual constitution of a syllable in Greek, as exhibited in the
numerous monosyllables as: av, év, év, iv, ôv, îv, wv, ïs, eis, eîs; tá, té, TI,
τί, τό, τοῦ, τῷτίς, τρεῖς, μυς, πᾶς, ναῦς, Ζεύς, πούς, πλοῦς ; πᾶν, δρᾶν, μήν,
δρῦν, σπλήν ; γάρ, φώρ ; γύψ, λίψ, βήξ, πνύξ, τρύξ. For here we have the
plainest indication and criterion that a Greek word, consequently
also a syllable, can begin by almost any sonantic or consonantal com-
[1] I have coined this torm as a collective designation of all those phonotic
principles which are commonly called 'phonetic laws' (the German Laut-
gesetzo'). And I have done so first, because this term (formed on the analogy of
phrenopathy, neuropathy, psychopathy; cp. allopathy, homœopathy, etc.) londs
itsolf conveniently to further formations (as phonopath-ic, -ically, -ist, otc.), and
thon on account of tho misleading notion convoyed by the curront high-sounding
torm 'phonetic law.' For 'law' is an inaltorablo decroe proceeding from some
superior authority and admitting of no excoptions or fluctuations, local or
poriodical, such as are commonly observed not only in cvory language but in
every dialect and poriod. Equally inappropriate seems to mo the alternative
torm 'phonotic docay,' coinod, I boliove, by Prof. Max Müllor, since decay is
associated with degeneration, and naturally suggests a tendency towards or
approach to finality. Now, no Englishman is likely to admit that the English
of to-day or that of Shakespearo, compared with that of Chaucor, shows a phonetic
'docay.' As a matter of fact, it marks a more change, and that not necos-
sarily for the worso,
71
91-94.]
SYLLABICATION__TONOCLISIS.
bination admissible in the language, that it can close with any sonant,
but that it can never close with any consonantal group whatever; not
even with a simple consonant with the exception of v, p, o, since in
words like yúy, Big, the labial or guttural consonant is sheltered by
the succeeding sibilant (218 ff.). The same holds true of the rare
sequence -γξ (σφίγξ, φάρυγξ, φάλαγξ), for here y virtually represents
a nasal weak (n). Accordingly in dividing a Greek word into
syllables the following rule may be laid down as the one most
rational and compatible with the character of Greek phonology.
92. One or more intervocalic consonants belong to the
succeeding syllable.-Only preconsonantal v p o (perhaps A also)
can be assigned to the preceding syllable. E.g.
ἀνα-βουλή, ράβδος, ἐ-μνήσθην, ἑπτά, πράγμα, αριθμός, ἐχθρός, βά-
κτρον, Ατθίς, Σαπφώἀρχή (οι ἀρχή), ἄρσην (or -ρσην), εἰσ-βάλλω (οι
εἰσβάλλω), ἄνθος (or ἄνθος), ἅλ-μη (οι ἅ-λμη), λεξις (οι έλξις-κατέ
χω, ἀφαιρῶ-ὁ δ᾽ ἄναξ, οὐκ ἔστι, μετ᾿ αὐτοῦ, καθ' ὑμᾶς.
92. As regards double consonants, like oo (тT), PP, λλ, µµ, vv, ππ, YY, PP,
XX, etc., the case is inseparably connected with the question of gemination
in Greek. If we admit an actually divided pronunciation for cach letter
-a case which the practice of the A inscriptions (KMoisterhans² 71-78)
and Grook phonology render on the whole very questionablo (cp. also
ESievers 528)—the pairs oo, vv, pp (perhaps also AA) can be separated,
because single σ, v, p, (^), is admissible at the end of a word (91. 218), as: ráo-
σω, πράσσω, μέλισσα, γλῶσσα, τέσσαρες, γενναῖος, θύννος, θάρρος, ἄρρην, άλ-
λος, μέλ-λω (ep. 66). In the remaining cases (that is, in ττ, μμ, ππ, γγ, ΦΦ,
XX, etc.), however, we are not justified in separating the two letters, since
their sound is inadmissible at the close of a word, consequently also of a
syllable (gr). We should therefore divide rather : τάττω, μέλι-ττα, γλῶ-ττα,
τέτταρες, γράμμα, εἴλη-μμαι, ἵππος, ἄ-γγελος, σάκκος, Βάχχος, Αθθίς, Σα-
φφώ, Μα-θθαίος, etc., than τάττω, μέλιτ-τα, etc.
93. In compound words, the first constituent of which closes with σ v p,
two cases must be distinguished. If the latter component begins with
a sonant, the preceding consonants σ v p, being admitted at the end of
a Greek word (91. 218 ff.), can retain their final position in the first consti-
tuent,though the above fundamental rule (92) has proved so undiscriminat-
ing as to affect even these cases. Accordingly, elo-áyw & el-oáyw, elo-ayyería &
εισαγγελία, προσ-ῳδία & προ-σῳδία, ἐξ-άγω & ἐ-ξάγω, δυσ-άρεστος & δυσάρεστος,
συν-έχω & συνέχω, υπέροχος & υπέροχος, παρ-άγω & πα-ράγω, πάροδος δ
πάροδος. If on the contrary σνρ are followed by one or more other con-
sonants, then, as long as they rotain their proper sound, both rational
and phonetic considerations justify us in assigning them to the preceding
syllable, as : εἰσ-φέρω, ὅστις, φωσφόρος, ώσπερ, παλίντροπος, πυρ-φόρος, πυρ-
πολεῖν. But as soon as they have been phonetically affected, or have
assumed a new sound, inadmissible at the end of a Greek word-a caso
applying chiefly to v and o-they have, by the fact of their phonopathic
accommodation to the next following consonant, lost their hold on the
precoding syllable, and attached themselves inseparably to tho succeed-
ing one (189) fr. 201. 203), ns : ἐμβάλλω (οι ἐν-βάλλω), ἔμψυχος (έν-ψ-),
συμφωνῶ, συ-γκαλῶ, συγγνώμη, συρρέω (οι συν-ρ-), παρρησία, συλλέγω
(οι συν-λ-), εισβάλλω (οι εἰσ-β-), εἰ-σδύω, δύσμορφος (pronounce -§β-, - δ-,
-Sμ-, whereas -o-ß-, -o-d-, -o-µ- would sound -oo-ß-, -oo-d-, -00-µ-),
b. TONOCLISIS (PROCLISIS AND ENCLISIS).
94. Syntactically considered, that is in connected speech,
certain unemphatic little words-mostly monosyllabic, but also
disyllabic and chiefly oxytone-play a secondary part, and are
72
TONOCLISIS.
[94-102.
uttered so rapidly as to appear to form part of the succeeding
or preceding word (cp. 1138). Hence they are unstressed, or
half-stressed (µítova, 76 & 106), and according as they attach
themselves to the succeeding or preceding word, they are
generally called proclitics or enclitics respectively.
94b. The whole phenomenon will be called in this book tonoclisis
(TOVOKλioia), a term intended to include the two varieties of proclisis
and enclisis. On the same principle proclitics and enclitics together
may be termed tonoclitics.
95. I. Proclisis ('reclination') is the close syntactical attach-
ment of a monosyllable or disyllable, called proclitic, to the
succeeding word. The proclitic then is as rapidly pronounced
as if it were an integral part of the succeeding word.
96. Though the process of proclisis has undoubtedly been at work through all
stages of the Greek language (cp. 101"), the older grammarians did not indicate
it by any special name, but treated proclitics as ordinary independent words and
supplied them with the acute or grave, as the case might be (82 ff.). Accord-
ingly they wrote & or d for d, év or èv for èv, eï or eì for ei, etc. Our modern
practice of distinguishing or specializing proclitics from enclitics dates from
postchristian times and the very term 'proclisis' was only recently (in 1801)
coined by GHermann (De emond, rat. 96-101).
97. Proclitics are-
a. All forms of the article, both prepositive and postpositive
(606); also N oπov or πоû (608 f.) and eis (623).
b. The oblique cases of the personal pronouns (527);
c. The prepositions ;
d. The conjunctions el, (ẻ)äv, (v), ws, kaí, iva—N vá, đá;
e. The negation οὐ οὐκ, οὐχ), Ν δέν ;—then μή, μά
98. Of the above proclitics some are conventionally written
without accent and called atona (ǎTova). These are-
a. The sonantic forms of the article : ó, ý, oi, ai;
b. The prepositions eis, év, è§ (èk), ws;
c. The conjunctions ei, ús;
d. The negation où.
99. But all atona are accented: (a) when they annex an enclitic
(102 f.), as: őde, élte, ovnw; (b) when they bear the emphasis of the
sentence, as: ǹ ëк прóð‹σis 'the preposition ěk.’
100. The negation où receives the acute when it closes a sentence,
as: pns of; 'sayest thou or not?' (224.)
101. II. Enclisis (eykλious 'leaning on') is the close syntactical
attachment of a monosyllable or disyllable, called enclitic (94),
to the preceding word. In this case the enclitic is pronounced
as if it wero an integral part of the preceding word.
101. The term enclisis is of ancient date. (Apoll. De pron. 268 A, etc.)
102. Enclitics are--
a. The oblique cases of the personal pronouns (97, b. 527);
b. The indefinite pronoun rìs, Tì, throughout (but arra,
588);
c. The indefinite adverbs που, ποῖ, ποθέν, πῶς, πῇ, ποτέ ;
73
102-105°.]
TONOCLISIS.
d. The Present Indicative of εἰμὶ and φημί, save in the
2nd person singular el and φής (982. 975 ) ;
e. The postpositive particles μέν, μήν, δέ, γέ, τέ, τοί, νύν, πέρ,
πώ, κέ(ν), ῥά.
102. Under this head seems to fall also the suffix -de, which is attached to
accusatives and to demonstrative pronouns, as : οίκονδε, ὅδε, τάδε, τοσόσδε.
103. Some enclitics have, like the preceding - δε, altogether coal-
esced with the preceding word, as: οἴμοι, οὔτις, οὔποτε, ὅλε, τούσδε,
104. In connecting an enclitic with a preceding word, it
must be borne in mind that Greek accentuation admits of no
longer termination than one of dactylic rhythm, that is, no
more than two post-tonic syllables can be left without accent
(81. 105,2). Accordingly an enclitic loses its accent
a. After a perispomenon or an oxytone (81), also after a pro-
clitic, the oxytone and proclitic then receiving the acute (not the
grave, 82 f.), as: ἐρῶ τι, σοφῶν τινων, σοφός τις, σοφοί τιNEC,
εἴ ποτε, πρός με, ἤν τινά, ποῦ εἰει, σοφοί φάει.
b. After a proparoxytone [technically also after its equiva-
lent trochee, 105], which then, in addition to its own accent,
takes over on the ultima the accent of the enclitic in the form
of acute (82c), as : ἄγγελός τις, ἤκουσέ μου, ἄνθρωποί εἶCIN.
[So too commonly: πραγμά τι (=πράαγμά τι), κῆπόν τινα (= κέεπόν τινα),
thon, according to ancient theory, by extension φύλλα τε like φυλά τε (80
too άλλος τις like στῦλός τις ; but see 105")].
105. After a paroxytone or a properispomenon, a mono-
syllabic enclitic loses its accent, but a disyllabic enclitic retains.
it, as : λόγος τις, λόγου τινός, γράφω τινί, σῶμα τι like σώματι,
δοῦλος ἐστίν, μῆλα τινά. (See 105.)
105b. In enclisis a 'long' syllable counts 'short' in regard to
accentuation, as : δοῦλος μου, νοῦς τινων (both -υν).
105. Tho oporation and offoct of onelisis alter a paroxytono or properispom-
enon is often misunderstood or misroprosented in modern grammiars, and thus
calls for a fow romarks hore. In laying down the rules of enclisis the ancients
wero evidently guided by the instinct of three physiological principles:
(1) No word can have two successivo syllables stressed, othorwise this would
brouk the unity of the word (108) [4 ;
[1] Comparo Charax in Bold. An. 1149 ἐν μιᾷ λέξει κατὰ συνέχειαν δύο ὀξείας οἱ
παλαιοὶ οὐκ ἐτίθουν· κακοφωνίαν γὰρ ποιοῦσι· τὸ οὖν ἄνθρωπός τις οὐκ ἔστι
κατὰ συνέχειαν ἀλλὰ μεσολαβεί βαρεία (unaccontod) ἡ ἐν τῷ θρω συλλαβή.
σοφός τις μία ἐστιν ἐξεῖα ἡ τὸ ως . . . ὅθεν μέμφονται οἱ ἀκριβεῖς τὸν θέσει προ-
χαϊκὸν ἔχοντα δύο οξείας ἐφεξῆς· ἄλλος τις καὶ εὐλόγως εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν τῆς Οδυσ-
σείας δ' Αρίσταρχος οὐκ ἐβουλήθη δοῦναι εἰς τὸ ἄΝΔΡΑ ΜΟι δύο οξείας, ἀλλὰ μίαν
εἰς τὸ ΑΝ, φάσκων ἐν ἀρχῇ ποιήσεως παράλογον οὐ μὴ(ν) ποιήσω.Honce tho
symbolization (Kühner-Blugs i. 341): σῶ]μάτε fur σῶμα τε, σωμάεστιν τον σῶμα
ἐστίν, has no roul existence in any language, soring that such Gornun or English
parallels as Vorstand, msshon, boften, uphill, etc. in reality consist of two
distinct words graphically linked together, and that as soon as thoy havo virtually
coalesced into one word, thoy have also lost their socond accont, us óhronman,
góntloman, blackborry, thróoponco, nóbody, otc. (Cp. 108".)
74
TONOCLISIS.
[105c-107.
(2) No more than two post-tonic syllables are admissible in a Greek word
(81. 104);
(3) No enclitic admits of anastrophe, otherwise this would change the enclitic
to an emphatic and therefore orthotone word (cp. 109);
(Compare λέγε τι with λέγετε, φέρων τι with φέροντι,φησί τε with φῶς τε,
ποιῶ τε with δότε and γνῶτε, φίλος ἐστίν and ἄλλων τινῶν with ἄγων ὁδόν.)
Now as in the eyes of the old grammarians a proparoxytone complex (úuu,
as δίδομεν, ἔπος τι) was genetically or theoretically equivalent to a properi-
spomenon (-, εις δῶμεν, κῆπος), the latter was drawn into the domain of the
rulo and thus led to the treatment of δῶρα τε like *δύορά τε, hence δωρα τε, and
δωρα τινα liko *δύορά τινα, hence δωρα τινα. Once adopted, this principle was
inevitably extended from a natural trochee to a trochee by position, the more
readily as accent and metrical ictus were identified in verse (85" f.), the chief study
and norm of the theorists. Arc. 146, ι ὁμοίως εἰ προπερισπᾶται ἡ προκειμένη λέξις
ἐγκλιτικοῦ ἐπιφερομένου ἐγείρει τὴν μετὰ τὴν περισπωμένην βαρείαν, οἷον οἶκός
τια, Σκωλόν τε, ΚΝΗΜΟΝ ΤΕ κἂν παροξύνοιτο τροχαϊκὴ οὖσα· ἀλλός τις, ἔετί
τις, ἔνθά ποτε. To put it shortly: proparoxytones attracted their equivalent
properispomena and these again, as representatives of natural spondees, attracted
the romaining spondaic paroxytonos. Hence the ancient and rational accentua-
tion : φύλλα τε (like φυλά τε), λάμπέ τε, τυφθέντα τε, ἔστί τις, ἔνθά ποτε, μήτέ
τε, πύργόν τε, ἄνδρά μοι, καίπερ ἐστιν, etc. (Arc. 141, 3. 145, 11. Han. π. έ. μ.
1143. Cp. Kühner-Blass. i. 341.) In face of these facts, modern grammarians
ought either to carry out consistontly the principle adopted by the ancients and
write accordingly ἄλλος τις, πύργόν τινα, and even φίλος τις, ἄλλως πως, γέρων
ἐστιν (to which there is an ancient parallel ἐσάν οἱ Ζ 289, testified by Schol. Ven.
ad loc. Arc. 145, 16 ; Charax 1154. 1157), despite the exception taken by some
old thoorists [];—or to adopt the only rational and physiological principle that
the accent cannot possibly fall on two successive syllables of the same word (108),
and so treat onclitics following a properispomenon just as they treat them after a
paroxytone: δῶρον τι like ῥόδον τι, and δῶρα τινά liko ῥόδα τινα,-fuuther οἶκος
τις, κῆρυξ τε, κῆρυξ τινός, φοίνιξ ἐστίν, λαῖλαψ ἐστίν,—n system which will be
followed in the presont book, for the plain ronson that circumflex and acute
are physiologically identical (77), differing only in form, and that a properispomc-
non being virtually the same as a paroxytone, requires a similar treatment
(κρίνα τε, κρίνα τινά= ῥῖνα τε, ῥῖνα τινά).
105. According to some old grammarians (Arc. 140 f. 145.
1143.
Hdn. π. ἐ. μ.
Schol. Ven. Z 367), the accont of pronouns beginning with σφ-, whether of
one or of two syllables, is regularly thrown to the preceding word irrespective of
its constitution or accentuation, as: ἄρά σφιν, ενθά σφεας, τόξα σφεων, ἵνα
σφισιν. Generally, however, this theory was ignorod and oven deprecated as
irrational by the ancients themselves (so by Aristarchos in Charax, Bokk, An.
iii. 1154. Schol. Ven. H 199).
106. In cases where the attracting word, besides its own accent, has
drawn on its ultima that of the enclitic also, the principal stress.
is that of the attracting word, while the transposed accent of the
enclitic plays a secondary part or no part at all (this possibly being
the μέση προσωδία of the ancients.
Thus δείξατέ μοι, ὁρῶ τινα are pronounced δείξα-τέμοι, ὁρῶτινα.
107. III. Sumenclisis. When two or three enclitics succeed
one another, their accentual rhythm is adapted to the trisyllabic
system of accentuation (104), thus inevitably leading to dactyls
or trochoes: καλός με τις (=καλόσγε τις), φίλοι τινές μοι εἰσίν
[1] Han, π. ἐ. μ. 1143 οὐδέποτε δὲ τοῦτο ἐν σπονδείῳ παρακολουθεῖ, ὡς δὴ ἐπὶ τοῦ
«Ατρείδης τε ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν, Φοίβω θ᾽ ἱερὴν ἑκατόμβην, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἐν ἰάμβῳ·
πάρος γε μὲν οὔτι θαμίζεις, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἐν τῷ πυρριχίῳ· ὅτι οἱ συμφράσσατο
βουλάς.” ἐὰν δέ ποτε τροχαίος γένηται διαπλασιασθέντος τοῦ τ, ἔσονται ἐπάλληλοι
ὀξείαι· ' ὅττί ΜΙΝ ὡς ὑπέδεκτο.
75
107-112.] ORTHOTONESIS.
GRAM. PRINCIPLES.
(=φίλοιτι-νέσμοιεἰσίν), εἴ που τίς τινα ἴδοι (= εἴπου τίστινα ἴδοι).
tina
This process will be termed in the present book synenclisis.
108. The grammarians teach that when several enclitics succeed
one another, each one takes an acute from the next following, so that
the last remains without accent, as : εἴ πέρ τίς σέ μοί φησί ποτε. But
this precept is physiologically impossible, since in no language two
consecutive syllables in a word can have the same stress; this would
break the word into two words (105°, 1). It is also to be noted that an
accumulation of enclitics, such as appears in the above example, does
not actually occur; this very example being a fiction of the grammar-
ians who coined it for the purpose (Arc. 146, 15) [¹].
108. Tonoclisis bears a certain analogy to the secondary accent in English
polysyllables, and German compound words, as: undertake, cóntradict (wpòs
πаτρós); mägnifier (äveрwπós Tis); affability (avoρwπоí тives); dédicáte (éλeyé
μoi); schűldiréctor, democrátic (Ypápoμév Ti); látitúdinárian (elrep tis σe μoi
pnoi), ungewissenhaftigkeit, öberappellationsgericht. (Cp. 105º, 1 [1] & 1138.)
109. 2. ORTHOTONESIS (óporóvnois). Tonoclitics are syntac-
tically accented or rather retain their accent, and so are called
orthotone-
α. When they are uttered with emphasis, as : ἀλλὰ cὲ λέγω
I mean thee.” ὁ σύνδεσμος ΜΗΝ 'the conjunction μήν.
b. When they begin a sentence: TINÈC Aéyovori. QAMÈN
ΦΑΜΕΝ
τοίνυν.
c. When the sonant which was to receive the accent of
the enclitic is elided, as : ταῦτ᾽ ἐστίν (for ταῦτα ἐστίν).
d. When they precede other tonoclitics (107).
e. When they are disyllabic and follow a paroxytone or
properispomenon (105).
110. A number of disyllabic prepositions are occasionally put
after their respective words. In that case they shift their accent
from the ultima to the penultima, and this shifting is called
anastrophe (αναστροφή), as : τούτων πέρι for περὶ τούτων. (1138.)
111. In A prose anastrophe occurs only in répɩ (with gen.), άπо
(= πωθεν), ἔνι (=ἔνεστι), and πάρα (=πάρεστι οι πάρεισι) ; in 4 poetry
also in ἔπι, κάτα, ὕπερ, ὕπο, and μέτα.
c. GRAMMATICAL PRINCIPLES.
112. Introductory remark. In studying the history of the Greek lan-
guage, we find that its gradual evolution has been determined by
various agencies chiefly internal (cp. 028), the nature and extent of
which will be duly explained in the course of the present work.
Some of these agencies, however, are of such a fundamental and
general character as to require an explanation here at the outset.
[1] Charax in Bekk. An. 1157 δυνατὸν δὲ καὶ πλείονας ἐπINORCAI εἴ πέρ τί
cέ μοί φΗcί ποτε· τὸ μὲν γὰρ εἴ ὀξύνεται διὰ τὴν ἐπιφορὰν τοῦ πέρ, τὸ δὲ πέρ
cé moi
διὰ τὸ τίς, τὸ δὲ τὶς διὰ τὸ cέ, τὸ δὲ σὲ διὰ τὸ Μοί, τὸ δὲ Μοὶ διὰ τὸ φΗεί, τὸ δὲ
ΦΗΣὶ διὰ τὸ ποτέ, ὥστε ἐφεξῆς ἐξεῖαι εξ εἰ καὶ σπάνιον διὰ τὴν τοῦ πνεύματος συνέ-
Xelav. (Cp. CGöttling 404 ff.
Kühner-Blass i. 343.)
76
GRAMMATICAL PRINCIPLES.
[113-122.
113. Analogy is the very frequent psychological phenomenon
by which an item (sound, accent, form, word, meaning, construe-
tion, etc.) is adopted as a standard or pattern either for coining
a novel item or for remodelling one already existing.
114. In this mannor the leading analogue influences or attracts other
items, and so serves as a norm for new imitative formations.
Thus
are due to
πίομαι
ἔδομαι
φωτεινός
σκοτεινός
and
καθ' ιδίαν
οὐχ ὄψεσθε
to
καθ᾿ ἑαυτόν οὐχ ὁρᾶτε
ἠβουλόμην ἔσω
ἤθελον ἔξω
κενός τινος
πλήρης τινός
ἀφίδω
ἀφορῶ
δύνομαι Ρ
γίνομαι
οὐκ ὑπάρχει
οὐκ ἔστι
Β.
Mitth. v. 328, 6 [III'd B.o.], and often since, then NT Luke r7, 22 οὐχ ὄψεσθε.
Ph. 2, 23 αφίδω. Acts 4, 29 ἔφιδε. 2, η οὐχ ιδού. 1 Cor. 1, 8 οὐχ ἰδόντες.
Gal. I, 19 οὐχ εἶδον. Luke 1, 25 ἐφεῖδεν. Αcts 3, 6 οὐκ ὑπάρχει. So Acts 12,
18 οὐχ ὀλίγος after οὐχ ἱκανός. ἀφέσταλκα (often in CIA 300-200 Β.Ο.) aftor
ἀφέστηκα, etc.—ἐφ᾽ ἔτος (ἐφέτος) after ἐφ' ὥραν or ἐφ' ἡμέραν. καθ᾽ ἔτος & καθ᾿
ἐνιαυτὸν after καθ᾿ ὥραν & καθ' ἡμέραν. μεθοπωρινός after μεθημερινός.
after ταχέως.—Ν ὀμπρὸς (for ἐμπρός) after ὀπίσω. (Cp. 665.)
=
εὐθέως
115. Both the term and effects of analogy were known to the ancients.
116. It may happen that kindred models existing side by side give
birth to a third formation. Such cross-influence is termed contamina-
tion (intermixture), as : Μισθωσάντων x μισθωσάτωCAN MICOWCANTWCAN
CIA ii. 6oo, 45 (300 Β.Ο.); ἄρα × ἦρα πάρα; G-B ᾖ x ἔστω = (ᾔτω & ᾔστω)
ἤτω & ἤστω, δῷ κ δοίη = δῴη, ἀφίω κ ἐῶ = ἀφεῶ, καθαίρω x καθαρίζω = καθαι
ρίζω (ΝΤ), κιρνάω × κεραννύω = κερνάω (but cp. 40), ancora x (κ)μή(ν) =
ἀκόμη & ακόμα (in South Italian N ἀκομή), Μηδέ χ οὐδέ = μονηδέ (626),
πορεύομαι × περιπατῶ = πορπατῶ, volta x φορά= βολά (Crete, etc.), ἔστω
ὅτι x essendo che=ἔστωντας καί (1994).
Χ
117. Association is the connexion of two or more cognate items (113)
with one another and the consequent prevalence of one to the gradual
elimination or even extinction of the others, as : γὲ ἄρα + γάρ = γάρ.
118. On this principle, associated items first interchange, then
generally coalesce, under various-often contaminatory-influences,
into one representative, usually the most emphatic or most familiar
in the whole group. For illustrations see 1487-8.
119. Strictly speaking, association is a generic term proceding and
comprehending analogy. For two or more items must be first associated
with ono another either in senso (as θέλω βούλομαι) or in form (as θέλω
μέλλω) and then undorgo the process of analogy (ἤθελον ἠβουλόμην-ἤθελον
ἤμελλον). Hence many grammarians identify association with analogy.
120. Next to analogy, association has been the most potent factor
in the history of Greek. (App. iii. 1.)
121. Dissociation is the instinctive or studious disconnexion of two
or more kindred or analogous items (113) for the sake of distinction,
perspicuity, emphasis, or antithesis.
Thus the 3rd person plural-
Ρ εἴδοσαν ἔλαβαν ἦλθαν
ἐπληροῦσαν
787-794.
are distinguished by dissociation from the 1st singular:
εἶδον
and
from
ἔλαβον ἦλθον
Α εὑρέ
ευρε
εἰπέ
είπε
ἤλπιζαν
ἤλπιζον
ἐπλήρουν
ιδέ
elde 913 ff.
είδε
122. Dissociation may degenerato to alloctation when it aims at origin-
ality. In this way, fastidious writors or speakers are apt to introduce new
expressions which, as a matter of course, aro often transitory. Such neolo-
77
122-125.]
ASSIMILATION.
PHONOPATHY.
gisms, if they have not, or as long as they have not, become popular with
the masses, but are merely characteristic of a certain set at a certain time,
may be termed euphuisms or mannerisms, as G-B: elnov (not elπóv !), λáßov,
ἄγαγον, for εἰπέ, λάβε, άγαγε, and ὅτε εἴπητε, ὅτε ψυγῇ, for ὅταν είπητε, ὅταν
ψυγῇ (1988), ἐκεῖσε for ἐκεῖ. (435. 1513)
II. SPECIAL PHONOPATHY.
a. Introductory Remarks.
123. Judging from the character of archaic Greek, as portrayed in
the early compositions and inscriptions extant, as well as from the
phonology of kindred ancient tongues, such as old Indian and Latin,
the Greek language in its primitive stage must have possessed a richer
consonantal system (consonantism) than it does exhibit in its mature
or classical period. In particular the structure of early Greek verse
and the diction of archaic inscriptions lead us to discern the quondam
existence in the language of certain mostly intervocalic consonants
(as F,, ; see 11. 29. 124 ff. 209 ff. App. ii. 7 ff.) and consonantal com-
binations (as vσ, vτσ, po, etc. 197 f. 180. 206), of which the effects are
unmistakable in the classical period. This tendency towards dropping
consonants-the last to retreat were combinations of a liquido-is
furthermore witnessed even in the subsequent history of the language,
seeing that here a still smaller number of them is admitted either
in the body or at the end of a word. (App. ii. 7.)
124. Turning to the vowel system (vocalism, or rather sonantism, 21h),
we find that it was from the outset limited to the five fundamental
sounds a e i o u, expressed by a e ɩ o v respectively (16" f.). However,
the gradual elimination of the above and possibly other consonants
had the effect that in very many cases two or more vowels were brought
together and thus caused the phenomenon of a frequent vowel succes-
sion, a peculiar trait of archaic Greek (ep. οἴοιο, ἰείη, εὐαέα, δημοῖο,
dúaros, yoάoter). Here too, however, as the language gradually
attained a higher stage of development, the frequent occurrence of
vowel successions interfered with rapidity in speech, and thus was felt
to cause a discord (xaoµwdía, hiatus). A phonetic accommodation was
therefore sought in some expedient, and this consisted chiefly in the
sacrifice of one or more of the interfering sonants. See App. ii. 9 ff.
124. The principles ruling in the accommodation of sonantic as
well as consonantal complexes are laid down in the following sections
of phonopathy, chiefest among which are contraction and antectasis
(156-165). In perusing these principles, however, it will be well to
bear in mind at the outset that the phonopathic phenomena dealt
with in every case are not necessarily the product of physiological
agencies acting every time anew. Thus it is not true that in A
Toe, when followed by a dental, change to o, as: avvoĥvaι from
ἀνύτω, πεισθῆναι from πείθω (176). In the great majority of cases
phonopathy had completed its work in prehistoric antiquity, and
its subsequent application does not necessarily imply its regular
repetition, but rather an unconscious imitation or analogical forma-
tion. (Cp. 113. 1104; KBrugmann Gr. Gram.” 15.)
a sonant
125. Assimilation is the process by which a sound
or consonant-is rondered like (assimilation proper) or less un-
like (accommodation) another contiguous sound. (Cp. 169 ff.)
Α Αλωποκονήσιοι for ᾿Αλωπεκονήσιοι, ὀβολὸς for οβελός, τρια-
κόντορος for τριακόντερος, Ορχομενός for Ερχομενός, Σαφφ for
78
AMPLIFICATION OF WORDS.
[125-130.
Σαπφώ, ᾿Αθθὶς for 'Ατθίς, Ρ Μαθθαῖος for Ματθαῖος, Γολγαθὰ (ΝΤ)
for Γολγοθά, Σαλωμων for Σολομών—Ν πενεχρὸς for πενιχρός. Cp.
177. 195. 200. 144r ff., et passim.
126. Dissimilationsonantic or consonantalis the change,
reduction, or loss of one of two similar sounds (sonants or con-
sonants) for the sake of accommodation, when otherwise the two
similar sounds would concur or come very close to each other.
&
Compare A κυβιστὴς for -στητής, ζητρὸς for -τητρός (PKretschmer 88),
Σελινίκα for -νονικα (id. 184), κεφαλαργία & κεφαλαλγία, φατρία & φρατρία,
δρύφακτος for *δρυφρακτος, σκηπτούχος for *σκηπτρουχος, τίθημι for *θιθημι,
σώθητι for *σωθηθι, ἐπαφὴ for *έφαφη (182), ἐμπίπλημι & ἐμπίπρημι for
ἐμπίμπλημι δ ἐμπίμπρημι ; ψηφηφορῶ for ψηφοφορῶ, ἀμφορεὺς for *ἀμφι-
φορεύς, μώνυξ for μονῶνυξ, ἡμέδιμνον for ἡμιμέδιμνον, λακπατέω for λακτοπα
τέω, πυγμάχος for πυγμομάχος, καλαμίνθη for καλαμομίνθη, καρδ[αμ]άμω-
μον, ὀπισθ[οθ]έναρ, κωμῳ [δο]διδάσκαλος, τραγῳ[δο]διδάσκαλος, λι[πο]πυρία,
κελαι[νο]νεφής, καμη[λο]λάτης, τριακο[ντα]στός, etc., Κολασσαί (ΝΤ) for
Κολοσσαί. - Ν πλώρη for πρώρα (Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 117 [+IVt], 4o f.),
Τ παραψίδιον for παροψίδιον (ib. p. 121 IV-V so M-N: το ίτοιος
τέτοιος ἔτοιος, αυθέντης ἀφέντης, φλέβα φλέγα, ἐγρήγορος [Macar. 528 Β 6
νοῦς γρήγορος ὤν] γλήγορος; κανοναρχώ (*καναναρχών) καλαναρχῶ, ὑδράργυρος
διάργυρος; ὑδράλμη υδάρμη (Alchem. 348, 9); πελεγρίνος (Prodr. 2, 144)
for peregrinus, ἄροτρον αλέτρι, κραββάτιον κρεββάτι, βαλάνιον βελάνι &
βελανίδι, ἀρραβὼν ἀρρεβῶνας; γεγραμμένος γραμμένος, λελυμένος λυμένος,
διδάσκαλος δάσκαλος, σηπία σουπιά, στυππίου στουππί, Θεσσαλονίκη Σαλο-
νίκη, τὴν φορβάδα ἡ φοράδα (FTrinch. 194 [+1149]). (Cp. 736 f. 753 f.)
C.
6. AMPLIFICATION OF WORDS.
th
127. A word is often amplified for the sake of convenience, per-
spicuity, or emphasis, by adding an expletive letter or syllable at the
beginning, in the middle, or at the end of a word. In the first case
the amplification is specified as prothesis, in the second as epenthesis
or anaptyxis (also surabhatki), in the third as paragogue, and the
element added in each case goes under the name of prefix, infix, and
suffix (or postfix) respectively.
128. Although in most cases such amplifications originated in the need for
perspicuity and emphasis, they have gradually lost their original force.
129. Prothesis is the prefixing of a vowel (commonly a co)
to a word (generally beginning with σρλμf) either by analogy
or for the sake of convenience, euphony, or emphasis.
Thus 4
α-σκαίρω
A
ἀράσσω
ἄ-στάχυς
ἐρέφω
έ-μέ
ὀρύσσω
ἐχθές.
ά-ερσα
130. A very frequent variety of prothesis is provection (progressive
prothesis), by which a final letter is unconsciously carried from the
end of the preceding word to the beginning of the next word [¹.
This is due to popular misconception, and occurs usually in N
proclitics, such as εἰς, τόν, τήν, τῆς, τούς, δ, ἡ, τό, τά, but more par-
ticularly in τόν, τήν, τῶν, ἕνα, μία, μᾶς, σᾶς, δέν, ἄν, of which the closing
sound is misappropriated by the succeeding word and thus acts as
a parasitic or intrusive prefix (App. iii. 24. cp. 155b). Thus--
Α ες κόρακας has led to σκορακίζω
[1] Comparo tho English nickname, nowt, for tho nonco.
79
130-132b.]
EPENTHESIS-PARAGOGUE.
δ εύμορφος
ὁ ὑγρός
Νδ Εβραίος has led to Ὁ βραῖος then to ὁ Ὁβραῖος (ep. 150)
δ'μορφος
δ' γρύς
Ο όμορφος
""
ὁ Αγρός
""
ὁ ἐχθρός
29
δ χτρός
ὁ οχτρός (Crete)
δ δεῖνα
ὁ δεῖνος
ὁ ἄδεινος
>>
""
29
τὸ ζόν (148)
""
τ᾿ ὀζόν
19
τ' όζόν (Crete)
Ν τὴν Ιδαν
τὴν Ιον (οι Ιόν)
""
""
τὸν ὦμον
τὸν οἰκοκύρην
19
τὸμ Ποντικόν
""
δὲν πορῶ (723) [4]
was mistaken for τηίδαν
τηνιόν
τονῶ μον
τονοικοκύρη
τομποντικόν
δεμπορῶ
บ
""
17
ὁ μποντικός
17
"
and produced ἡ Νίδα
ἡ Νιό
Ο νομος
ὁ Νοικοκύρης
εἴς Ιτανον
εἰσίτανον
μπορώ
ἡ Σίτανο
τόνε (132) δικών
τον εδικόν
""
29
ὁ ἐδικός (554)
τῆνε ζημιά
""
19
την ζημιά
""
ἡ ἐζημιά
τὸν κρημνόν
2)
"
τογκρημνόν
ὁ Γρεμνός
>>
τόνε γκρεμνόν
τονεγκρεμνόν
τόνε γνωρίζω
""
""
τον εγνωρίζω
ένα ψηλό
Αναψηλο
ένα χνάρι
ἕναχνάρι (150, ()
ἕνα ὀμμάτι
εναμάτι (150, α)
ὁ ἐγκρεμνός
ἐγνωρίζω
ἀψηλός
τὸ ἀχνάρι
τὸ ἀμάτι
ένα βράμηλο
""
"7
Αναβράμηλο
>>
τὸ ἀβράμηλο
ἕνα ἔντερον
ἑνάντερο (150, c)
"1
το άντερο
μία βδέλλα
μια βδέλλα
""
μία βρυωνία
>>
""
μια βρυωνιά
μίαν κινάραν
>>
μαγκινάραν
τοὺς πυργίτας
""
τουσπουργίτας
ἡ ἀβδέλλα
ἡ ἁβρωνιά
ἡ ἀγκινάρα
ὁ σπουργίτης
τὰς κόνεις
τασκύνεις
""
ἡ σκόνη
""
τὰς κλήθρας
"1
""
τασκλήθρας
τοὺς φλώμους
τοὺς κορυδαλλούς
τοὺς κανθάρους
17
""
τουσφλώμους
τουσ κορυδαλλούς
τουσκανθάρους
ἡ σκλήθρα
ὁ σολωμος
ὁ σκορδαλλός
δ σκάθαρος
130. Cp. 4 : σμίλαξ δε μίλαξ, σ-μύδρος, σ-μήρυνθος, σ-μήριγξ, σμύραινα,
σ-μικρός, στέρφος, στλεγγίς, σ-πέλεθος, σ-πύραθος, σ-κνίψ,σ-πάλαθρον, etc.
131. Epenthesis (anaptyxis, svarabhatki) is the insertion or de-
velopment of one or more sounds in the body of a word (infix)
to facilitate the pronunciation (accommodation, euphony).
Thus I-II έβδομος (for *έπτ-μος), ἀν-δρύς (for *άν-ρος 385), Ματταθίας from
Ματθαῖος—Ν κραγιός for (κρός) κριός, χέρι-σος for χέρσος, τον-γ-λάρον ὁ γλάρος,
γ-ου-δί for 1]γδί, ψαλ-ι-τῆρι for ψαλτήρι, ἄλ-ι-φα for ἄλφα (but ἀρφάδι for
ἀλφάδιον 187), δέλει-τα for δέλτα, βόλει-τα for Italian volta ; so CIG 9114, 7
ἐν πύλλιπις for ἐν κόλποις. (Cp. 179. 188.)
182. Paragogue (παραγωγή or rather προσσχηματισμός) is the
adding to the end of a word of one or more letters, as : ουτοσί,
(ἐγών), προσώπατα-Ν τόνε, μᾶσε, αὐτόνα, εφίλεις (ep. 130. 574).
132. In Nspeech the paragogic suffix is either analogical, as : έψίσ
(after εχθές), εμένα (after τινά, δείνα), εφίλειε (after ἔλυε, ἔλεγε (857) ;
or protective of the final and untenable v (219), as: åve (for åv), "μovve
& ἤμουνα (for ἤμην, after εἶχα ?), θέλουνε (for θέλουν), ἕνα (for v 621),
[1] The N vorb ἐ]μπορῶ does not come from έμπορος, but from εὐπορῶ
through tho successivo slagos : εὐπορῶ (as Span. ro, 116, 119, etc.)*μπορώ
*πορῶ (723; cp. Εὐστάθιος -θης, Στάθης, Εὐστράτιος Στρατής, εὐπρέπεια πρεπειά)
δὲν πορῶ οι δεμπορῶμπορώ. From this last form then, which is the genuine
popular, N scribos huvo evolved ἐμπορῶ by mistaking the initial μ of μπορῶ for
part of the proposition iv. For the popular ἐμπορῶ οι ἠμπορῶ 500 132,
80
RETRENCHMENT OF WORDS. [132b-134.
ἕξε
>
déve (for dév, App. iii. 24 f.), 맀 ;—or anaptyctic (epenthetic), developed
for clearness' sake, as : τόνε γνωρίζω I know him (τὸ γνωρίζω I know it);
δένε ῥιγάω δὲν ἐργῶ (Crete), τῶνι δυὸ for τῶν δύο (τῶ δυὸ=τὸ δυό), δένε
μπορώ (whence δὲν μπορῶ οι δέν μπορῶ (whence δὲν μπορῶ (as
Span. 230)) ‘I cannot. (So too perhaps δένι ξεύρω, ή-ξεύρω, δένι *στάνο-
μαι, ή-στάνομαι 996.) This last kind of paragogue often appears as
revective in that, though virtually constituting a prefix to the next
following word, it is mistaken for a suffix to the preceding (mostly
proclitic word, and so is transferred to it (ep. 130), as: τὸν ἔβλεπα
I was seeing him, τόνε βλέπω ‘I see him '; also ἕξη (from ἕξ ἥμισυ 641)
'I
current even in M, as: Prodr. 3, 242, and Pul. 237 (cp. 208. 725. App.
iii. 24 ff.).
C. RETRENCHMENT OF WOrds.
ἢ ἐμοῦ
ἢ 'μοῦ
τον
κεῖνος.
133. A word is often shortened for the sake of convenience by
dropping one or more letters from the beginning, middle, or end
(initial, medial, and terminal retrenchment). In the first case the
retrenchment is conventionally called aphaeresis(also prodelision), in
the second syncope (with hyphaeresis), in the third elision (with apocope).
133b. Aphaeresis occurs chiefly in poetry and popular speech.
Thus A μὴ ἐγὼ
ἱμάσθλη GN αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνος
become μή 'γώ
μὴ
μάσθλη
134. In N aphaeresis is due chiefly to popular misconception, the
part dropped being mistaken for an alien element, or suffix to the
preceding word. Thus unaccented initial a-, 0-, 1-, Ñ-, and above all
e-, is dropped owing to its being associated or identified with the final
-α, -, -, -, - of some proclitic like ἕνα, μία, δ, τό, ἡ, τών; δέκα τόν
(μᾶσ, σάσε)--or for the augment - (208. 723). Aphaeresis then is the
reverse of provection (prothesis), and affects particularly nouns and
verbs of more than two syllables. Thus-
α. ἐμφαλός was mistaken for
δ'μφαλός and produced N φαλός
δ φθαλμὸς
ὀφθαλμὸς
Ιωσήφ (ης)
ὀλίγος
φταρμός
""
*
"
"
Σήφης
Σήφης
ὁ λίγος
>>
λίγος
b. τ' ὀνύχιον
τὸ νύχιον
νύχι
>>
τ' ὀφρύδιον
τ' ὡρολόγιον
τὸ φρύδιον
""
φρύδι
τὸ ρολόγι
29
ρολόγι
τ' ὀψάριον
"}
τὸ ψάριον
19
ψάρι
τ' ὀψώνιον
""
τὸ ψώνιον
ψώνι
τ' ορύζιον
τὸ ρύζιον
ρύζι
τ᾽ ὀξείδιον
""
τὸ 'ξείδιον
>>
ξείδι
τ᾽ ὀστρείδιον
19
""
τὸ στρείδιον
στρείδι
τ᾽ ὀμμάτιον
τὸ μάτιον
τ' οπωρικόν
τ᾽ ὀδύντιον
τὸ 'πωρικόν
τὸ δόντιον
μάτι
πωρικόν
δόντι
c. τὴν Νάξον
11
τὴν Αξον
""
Αξιά
τὴν Ναύπακτον
ἐν ἀμύγδαλον
"
11
τὴν ᾿Αὔπακτον
"
ἕνα 'μύγδαλον
"1
Ἔπαχτο
μύγδαλο
ἕν᾿ ἀστακόν
ἕνα 'στακύν
στακός
11
""
ἕνα ἰχνάρι
ἕνα ὑπόδημα
d. initial ¿-
να 'χνάρι
ένα πόδημα
χνάρι
πόδημα
19
"1
augment
(723)
τὸν ἐρωτῶ
99
"
τονε 'ρωτῶ
ῥωτῶ
τὸν ἐξετάζω
>>
τονε 'ξετάζω
ξετάζω
. ἡμέρα
ἡ 'μέρα
μέρα
ὑπερηφανία
29
ή περιφανία
περιφανία
ὑγεία
""
ἡ 'γεία
γειά
εἰκόνα
ἡ 'κόνα
κύνα (= εἰκών)
81
135-136b.]
SYNCOPE.
135. To similar influences are due numerous other cases of N aphaeresis in
which initial - is mostly affected (723), as :
μπαίνω
(for ἐμβαίνω)
ξυπνώ
"1
ἐξυπνῶ)
γδύνω
ἐκδύνω)
παινῶ
(,, ἐπαινω)
βρίσκω (,, εὑρίσκω)
Φκαριστώ (,, εὐχαριστῶ)
παίρνω (,, ἐπαίρω)
135b. So further:
βλογιά (,, εὐλογία)
Βαγγέλης (,, Εὐάγγελος)
Φροσύνη ,, Εὐφροσύνη)
πισκοπή ,, ἐπισκοπή)
πιστάτης » ἐπιστάτης)
29
Λεψίνα
Ελευσίνα)
πίβουλος
ἐπίβουλος)
γλήγορος
""
ἐγρήγορος)
περήφανος
""
ὑπερήφανος)
βγαίνω
ντρέπομαι
(for ἐκβαίνω)
» ἐντρέπομαι)
θυμούμαι (,, ἐνθυμοῦμαι)
δημάζω
βλογώ (, εὐλογῶ)
(,, ἐρημάζω)
ξερνώ
(,, ἐξερω)
σοδιάζω
(,, ἐσοδιάζω)
λευτεριά
ἐλευθερία)
>>
ἐνοίκιον)
ἐλάφιον)
""
ἐσχάρα) [1]
""
ἐπίτροπος)
νοίκι
λάφι
σκάρα
πίτροπος
πετραχήλι ,, ἐπιτραχήλιον)
πιτήδειος
>>
ἐπιτήδειος)
πιδέξιος
ἐπιδέξιος)
ψηλός
» υψηλός)
γούμενος (,, ἡγούμενος)
δυόσμος (,, ἡδύοσμος)
πουργός (,, υπουργός)
διάργυρος (,, υδράργυρος)
136. Syncope (συγκοπή) is the suppression of one or more
interconsonantal sonants [2] for the sake of convenience or
phonetic accommodation. It is due mostly to the effect of
accent which overpowers the post-tonic and pre-tonic syllables,
especially those consisting of the weaker sonants i and e, also u.
(Cp. 144-155 ; App. i. 16, also o3o.) Ε. g.
I. A ἔσται
from *ἔσεχον
from ἔσεται
ἐπτόμην
πτήσομαι
""
ἐπετόμην
ἔσχον
πατρός
""
>>
πετήσομαι
γιγνόμενος
>>
Απατερός
*γιγενόμενος
φιλτέρου
""
φιλωτέρου
τουτί
τουτοΐ
""
ἠγρόμην
""
ἠγενόμην
ἄλφα
aleph
Βερνίκη
Βερενίκη
τάρχος
""
τάριχος
οὐρανός
Λέντλος
veteranus
Βύβλος
Bibulus
""
>>
Lentulus
""
Πρόκλος
Proculus
""
2. Ν πέρσι
κορφή
καθημερνός
στάρι
[8]
πέρυσι
περβόλι
""
περιβόλι
""
κορυφή
περπατώ
""
περιπατῶ
""
καθημερινός
χοιρνός
""
χοιρινός
""
σιτάρι
Φλακή
19
φυλακή
σκωτι
συκωτι
[4]
""
(σ)κορδαλλός (4),, κορυδαλλός
πάρτε
ὁρίστε
""
πάρετε
πιάστε
πιάσετε
"}
""
ὁρίσετε
αστε
ΐσετε
""
διαρμίζω
""
διαρρυθμίζω
εἰκοσπέντε
""
σμίγῳ
τυρνη
""
συμμίγω
Τυρινή
κάτσε
εἰκοσιπέντε
κάθισε
"7
σπίρτο
>>
spirito
186. For furthor examples in archaic and A Greek see App. i. 16.-On this
principle G-B λάμνα slands for lamina Great Louvre Pap. 2115. 2116. 2238. 2226 ;
whilo μωρέ (properly vocative of μωρός, ' fool, but now used as an exclamution,
'I say!') becomes µ'pé (so now in Crete and elsewhere), then 'pé now current,
especially in northern N spoech (030. 251 ('. 1254).
[1] So oven in CGL 650, 9 σχάραν.
[9] Among ancients tho term συγκοπή is wider, in that it means tho reduc-
tion of a word by tho suppression of a sonant, consonant, or whole syllable.
[3] So as early as in Hermas 2, περσινός, also Porph. Cor. 660, 30.
[4] So evon in Prodr. 4, 439. For the initial - see 130.
82
METATHESIS-VOCALISM.
[137–144.
137. All vowels in Greek having been almost isochronous (24. 35.
App. ii. 1 & [1]) and the accent (stress) much weaker than in those
modern languages which distinguish quantity (English, German, etc.),
a balance of quantity was thus maintained, which greatly checked the
operation of syncope. (App. i. 17.)
138. A variety of syncope is hyphaeresis (¿Paípeσis) which consists
in the dropping of a sonant before or after another homophonous
sonant. For examples see 148 f.
139. Elision (ěkos) is the dropping of a final sonant when
the next word begins with another sonant. The final sonant
thus elided is indicated by the spiritus lenis ('), called in this
particular case apostrophe.
μετ᾿ ἐμοῦ for μετὰ ἐμοῦ, ἐπ᾿ αὐτῷ for ἐπὶ αὐτῷ, γένοιτ᾽ ἄν for
γένοιτο ἄν.
140. The apostrophe, whose form varied from a curve to a straight
accent or even a mere dot, was very generally placed in carly MSS after
a foreign name, or a name not having a Greek termination, as, for
example, 'Aẞpaáµ', and after a word ending in a hard consonant, as к X § 4,
and also p.' (EMThompson 72 f.) (Cp. 64.)
141. In A elision occurs in words, especially particles, ending in
-ɑ, -e, -o, -i, -aɩ, -oi, except in рò and πeрí (743). In N it affects all
sonants according to 146-154.
141. Considering that elision is never partial but invariably total in the case
of final at and ot, we may safely infer that these diphthongs had very early
assumed a monophthongal sound. (30.)
142. A variety of elision is Apocоре (ȧжокояý), which consists
in the dropping of one or more terminal sounds notwithstanding
that the following word begins with a consonant. It occurs
rarely and only in ancient dialects and N speech. (Cp. App.
i. 16.)
ἄν' τε μάχην for ἀνά τε μάχην, ἀμ' πέλαγος for ἀνὰ πέλαγος, καγ' γόνυ for
κατὰ γόνυ, πάρ' τόν for παρὰ τόν ἀπ' τὰ κόκκαλα οἱ ἀφ᾿ τὰ κόκκαλα.
d. METATHESIS.
143. Metathesis (perábeσis) is the transposition of two letters,
one of which is commonly a liquid. It may moreover be
accompanied by dissimilation (126).
Thus A θάρσος θύμβρος Πύκνα become θράσος θρύμβος Πνύκα
then γνωρίζω ἐκβάλλω
in Ν γρωνίζω βγάλλω
ἐκβαίνω
Likewise
become in N βγαίνω
σκορπίζω ἀμέλγω Φεβράρης φάντασμα
σκροπίζω ἀρμέγω Φλεβάρης σφάνταμα
πικρός
ἴδω
(ἰδῶ) διῶ πρικός
143. For a metathesis of 'quantity' see 168.
A. SONANTIC PHONOPATHY (VOCALISM).
144. Greek sonantism or vocalism consisted originally-and
so doos still in N-of the five fundamental sounds a, o, u, c, i
(16b f. 35). These are divided into—
83
G 2
144-148.]
PHONODYNAMY.
Three guttural ('velar' or 'back') sonants (a, o, u): a, o, ov.
Two palatal ( dental or front) sonants (e, i) : ε, αι-ι, η, υ ;
El, Ol, Ul.
RELATIVE POWER OF SONANTS.
145. Phonetically or dynamically considered, guttural sonants
are stronger than palatal sonants, while among co-ordinates,
accented sonants are stronger than unaccented sonants.
Thus in φάγε, μία, λύομεν, λούεις, θέλει, ιδέ, the black-faced sonants
are stronger than their neighbours.
[This phenomenon applies strictly to P-N, but cannot be clearly tracod
in A and earlier Greek owing to the then anomalous constitution of tho
alphabet and the inconsistency of the orthography.]
146. The relative power of the above five sonants ( phonodynamy,
ἐπικράτεια) may be roughly represented by the following phono-
dynamic scale :
a, o, u, e, i,
in which, the absence of any interfering consonant given, each
sound, propelled by the dominant accent of the word, over-
powers and absorbs any one of its successors, and conversely is
absorbed by any of its predecessors. Thus-
a + a
0+ 0
e
i
0 Μ
i
Ο
и + и
e
i = u
i
et e
i + i = i
147. This phonodynamic scale, which has wrought fundamental changes
in the language, particularly since A times, was first detected, for aught
I know, by EASophocles (Romaic gram. [Hartford, 1842] p. 13; cp. also now
ed. [1857] p. 4 & 20). In recent times, it has been fully investigatod, in-
dependently as it appears, by GHatzidakis (304-305). It may be con-
veniently memorized by the word ἀπωθούμενοι (speak αροθήmeni)-
conversely ὑπεδούλωσα (ιροδήμοςα).
According to this phonodynamic principle:
148. A. Two contiguous homophonous sonants are contracted or syn-
copated to ono (by hyphaeresis, 138. 157), aς: Πολυυμνίς Πολυμνίς VII-
VIt B.c. PKretschmer; Ρ ταμιείον ταμεῖον, Αβραάμ Αβράμ (so WFCrum
Coptic MSS 46 & 29), Γαβριήλ Γαβρήλης. If either was accented before
the contraction, it is this sonant that prevails and so determines the
resultant accent.
become
and
become
so too P-G
Thus-
μελαγχροιής
μελαγχρής
Αλαιεύς
Αλεύς
πιείν
κρέαα
κρέα
Επιεικίδης
Επεικίδης
κυλίειν
σπος
σως
Πειραιεύς
Πειρεύς
ποιῆσαι
λούουσι φύμην
λούσι ᾤμην
Θοραιεύς Νικαιεύς
Θορεύς Νικεύς
ἀφίεις γέεννα
γέννα
καμμύεις
καμμεῖς
καμμύει
ΕΥΤΗΣ
become
and in N
become
further N
become
πεῖν (πῖν)
λύεις
λείς
κυλεῖν
πτύεις
φτείς
πτύει
ποῖσαι (πῆσαι) ἀφεῖς
χρίεις
χρεῖς
κλείεις
κλείς
λύει
λεί
φτεί
χρίει
χρεῖ
κλείει
κλεί
καμμε
84
PHONODYNAMY.
148b-150.
148. So further P ἐπιείκεια επείκεια, ἐπίγειοι καὶ ἀέριοι ἐπίγοι καὶ ἀέροι
(CLeemans Pap. Gr. ii. 15), υγίεια για or ὑγεία [1], ομνύειν (*ομνυν and
by analogy) όμνεῖν, δοίη δοῖ (or δῇ), πεποίηκα πεποίκα (GKaibel 719) ;
γέννα πυρός (Great Louvre Pap. 3072) ; περιπτάμενος ib. 3026 ; ἀρτύεις ἀρτεῖς
(CGL 401, 24 artys);-so N ἐγγυητής ἐγγυτής, κλαίετε κλαῖτε, μηλέες μηλές,
συκέες συκές, θεέ μου θέ μου,—ἡ ἡμέρα ἡ 'μέρα, καλὴ ἡμέρα (CGL 229 i. 11)
καλημέρα, (Ρ-Ν) χρυσοχόος χρυσοχός, ἀκούουν ἀκοῦν, τριήμερα τρίμερα (MGeorg.
Const. 153), ζῷον ζόν (Corn. A 1158).
149. B. Of two contiguous heterophonous sonants the stronger
prevails over the weaker (146). It thus acquires additional stress
and theoretically operates like a 'long' sonant. Accordingly—
150. I. The a-sound prevails over all others :
α.-a+oor o+a=a: [ep. Λ τῷ ἀνδρὶ τἀνδρί, ὁ ἀνὴρ ανήρ, Λαοσθένης Λασ
θένης]; Ν χαωμένος χαμένος (ἐχάωσες ἔχασες Span. 263 ; MGlycas 206 & 573),
Ιωάννης Γάννης Ἰάννης i. e. Γιάννης (155, α), διὰ ὅτι (γιὰ ὅτι) γιατί, παραοπίσω
(524) παραπίσω, καλοακούω καλακούω, τὸ ἄλογο τ' ἄλογο, ὁ ᾿Αντώνης Αντώνης,
τὸ ἄκουσα τ' ἄκουσα, ἀπὸ αὐτοῦ ἀπ' αὐτοῦ, —but δέκα οκτώ δεκοχτώ.
α:
b-a+ou or ou+a=a: Φεβρᾶρις for Φεβρουάρις Plut. Quest. Rom. 68
(ep. 1 τάνδρός); so now Φλεβάρης, τοῦ ἀφέντη τ᾽ ἀφέντη, νὰ φά(γ)ουσι νὰ φᾶσι.
ca+e_or_eta=a: τίμαε τίμα, ἀεργὺς ἀργός, ἀέρδην άρδην, τὰ ἐπίλοιπα
τἀπίλοιπα, τὰ ἔνδον τᾶνδον, ἐννεακόσιοι ἐνακόσιοι, ἑαυτὸν αὐτόν, ἐὰν ἄν, (ἄγε)
ἄε ἆ, τὰ ἔργα τἂργα, κατεάσσω κατάσσω, ἔασε ασε (949, 996 τα ; ἆs, 949, 1916),
παραεμπρός (524) παραμπρός, δεκαεπτὰ δακαφτά—νὰ ἔχῃ νά 'χῃ, τὰ ἔδωκα τά
'δωκα [2].
d.ati (also ita, 151)=α: (Θράιξ Θράξ, δάις δᾷς [not δαῖς δάς], ἐλάιδες
ἐλάδες, οἱ ἄνδρες ἄνδρες), καϋμένος καμένος, κλαϋμένος κλαμένος, Μηχαήλης
Μηχάλης, ἀειπάρθενος ἀπάρθενος (1132), νὰ εἶχες νά 'χες, θὰ ἦτον θά 'τον (if not
νάχες, θᾶτον); σιαγώνιον σαγώνιον (so even in Great Louvre Pap. 2898 : σαγω-
νίου), ψίαθος ψάθη, τρακόσιοι οι τρακόσοι, τριαντάφυλλου τραντάφυλλο, πά(γ)εις
πας (863) σίαλος σάλιον, ἐκκλησιάρχης κλησάρχης ‘churchwarden. (So too
φιλία φιλιά, μηλέα μηλεά, κλαδια κλαδιά, etc. 155, c).
[1] Moeris 345 υγίεια Αττικῶς, ὑγεία Ελληνικώς. Mark further that in the
inscriptions the proper namos are invariably spelt Tyeîa and 'Tyeivos (twenty-
four differont names; never Υγιει- ; cp. the Index to CIA iii. p. 376).
[4] Hence the common derivation of the N word νερό “waterfron νηρὸν
is indisputable, whereas that from νεαρόν (sc. ὕδωρ) fresh water (cp. Louvre
Pap. p. 126 [+ V-VI ]'aqua nero '), which lattor I advocated (not as my own)
in Cluss. Rov. (viii. 100) and to which undue claims of priority have been raised
(ib. 398 f. and Byz. Zeit. iv. 188), is improbable. The matter has been fully in-
vestigated and correctly explained, long time since, first by EASophocles
in his Glossary (Boston, 1860) p. 440 f. ' νηρός, όν . . . substantively τὸ νηρὸν sc.
ὕδωρ, water, νερὸν Inscr. [=C1G] 5072, 20. The expression νηρόν ὕδωρ means
running water, the ναματιαῖον ὕδωρ of the earlier Greeks and the ὕδωρ ζῶν of the
Septuagint and Now Tostament. In the time of Phrynichos, however, it meant
fresh water, in the sense of water just brought from the fountain; that is νηρὸν
ὕδωρ was confoundod with νεαρόν ύδωρ [the latter was a scholastic paraphrase
of the former which was avoided as "common"]. In the course of timo, üdwp
was droppod, and vŋpdy became a substantivo. And [when quantity disap-
peared] νηρὸν was writton and pronounced νερόν, which sec.-νερόν, ου, τό,
Apophth. Jonn. Coleb. 7 [= Migno LXV 202 Β ἀνέστη τις πρεσβύτερος μέγας
δοῦναι τὸ καυκάλιον τοῦ νεροῦ]. Porph. Adm. 77, 13.
Cor. 466, 17. Εt Μ. 597,
43
43 νηρὸν τὸ ὑγρόν . . . καὶ ἴσως ἡ συνήθεια τρέψασα τὸ Α εἰς Ε λέγει νερόν.—
νεαρός 2 fresh, just brought, as water. Ammon. νεαρὸν νεαλοῦς καὶ προσφάτου
διαφέρει. νεαρὸν μὲν γάρ ἐστι τὸ νεωστὶ κομισθὲν ὕδωρ. So even carlier in his
Rom. Gram. p. vi.-Compare also Cornos' vague spoculations in his "AraKTA
iv. 349 Νερὸν ἀπὸ τὸ Νηρὸν ἢ Ναρὸν Ἑλλην. τοῦτο δὲ ἢ ὡς ῥηματικὸν τοῦ Νάω, τὸ
[sic] ῥέω, ἢ κατὰ σύγκρασιν ἢ συγκοπὴν τοῦ Νεαρόν, παραγώγου του Νέον (recent,
frais), ἤ, κατ' ἄλλους, συνθέτου ἀπὸ τὸ Νεωστὶ ἀρύεσθαι (nouvellement puisé).
85
150b-155.]
PHONODYNAMY-SYNIZESIS.
150b. Sometimes the combination ove produces o, though chiefly in northern
N, as : ποῦ ἔχω πό 'χω, μοῦ ἔρχεται μό' 'ρχεται.
151. Otherwise i + a, when pronounceable, undergoes synizosis and becomes ja,
ας : ιατρός πατρός, ύαλος καλί, εἴα ιά (155, α).
152. 2. The o-sound prevails over i eu: βοίδι & βόϊδι βόδι or βῷδι,
ὀγδοῆντα ὀγδόντα or ὀγδῶντα, τὸ εἶπα τό 'πα, (παιδοέγγονα) παιδόγγονα, τὸ ἔχω
το 'χω, (λέγω) λέω λῶ (863), τοῦ ὀρφανοῦ τ' ὀρφανοῦ, περιστερεών περιστερών,
σιώπα σώπα, Μωϋσῆς Μωσης, εώρων ὥρων (727), νεοσσός νοσσός (as Barn. II, 3),
Θεόδωρος Θόδωρος, χρεωστῶ χρωστῶ, θεωρῶ θωρῶ, ἕως ως ὡς) [1], ἀφεῶ ἀφῶ
(960), ποῦ ὁρίζει π᾽ ὁρίζει, τρώ(γ)εις τρος. (So further ποῖος ποιός, Σμυρναίος
Σμυρναιός, 155, c). [but γητεία (ELegrand Bibl. ii. 277 & 237, MS 1384 A.D.),
now γητειά, and γητεύω for γοητεία, γοητεύω ! though the alternative of
γοητεία Αγοτεία and by dissimilation again γητεία, γητεύω is admissible also.]
153. 3. The u-sound prevails over i, e : (cp. 4 λούετε λοῦτε, τοὺ ἐμοῦ τοῦ
'μοῦ, λούεσθαι λοῦσθαι, ἀπέλους ἀπέλου, Ρ -εούρησα οὔρησα) ακούεις ἀκοῦς, ἄκουε
άκου (CLoemans 135 [II-III+], 49 κατάκου for -ουε), ἀκούετε ἀκοῦτε, που
εἶσαι ποῦ 'σαι, ποῦ εἶνε ποῦ 'νε, ποῦ ἤσουν που 'σουν, ποῦ ἤθελες που 'θελες, σοῦ
εἶπα σοῦ 'πα, τοῦ ἔφυγα τοῦ 'φυγα. (So too παιδίου παιδιού 155, 6.)
154. 4. The e-sound generally prevails over i, but often also conversely:
θέλει ἐμένα θέλ' ἐμένα οι θέλει 'μένα, καίεις καῖς, κλαίεις κλαῖς, λέ(γ) εις λές, λέγει
λέ, τί ἔχεις τ' ἔχεις or τί 'χεις, ὅ,τι ἔχω ὅ,τι ἔχω or ὅ,τ᾽ ἔχω, σὲ εἶδα σ᾿ εἶδα ; 30
too τί έν' τα τίντα (592 f.). (So too ἐννέα ἐννεά, μηλέα μηλεα 155 c.)
155. Synizesis. Two successive syllables, of which the first
commonly ends in a palatal and the second in a guttural sonant
(144 f.)—or conversely-may be so rapidly uttered, under the
influence of the accent or ictus, as to form but one syllable.
This is called synizesis (συνίζησις, better συνεκφώνησις) and occurs
chiefly in verse and common speech. (162. App. i. 14.)
a. When the first of the two syllables thus merged ends in a palatal
sonant (i, e), it naturally glides into short i or rather into the semi-
vowel i (which can even be gutturalized, 155f. 155b). Accordingly in N-
ί, βί, δι, ρί, μί aro soundod į, Bi, di, pi, µñ, as: já (eta), já (díá),ádia (ädeia),
e, Be, de, pe,
πί, φί, θέ, τί, πτὶ
πε, φε, δε, τε, πτε,
""
""
""
μπά (μιά), ὥριος (ὡραῖος), χορτή (ἑορτή).
πχι, όχι, όχι, τχι, φιϊ, as: Οχιάφχια (θειά
πχ.,
Compare ancient (a- from δια- (1125), θιός for θεός (Laconia), Fἔποια
for ἔπεα (Cypros), θειο-, θιο- (Boeotia), (KBrugmann Gr. Gram. 38);
further Σαραπιτήῳ, Τρατιανός, Γερο[ϋ] ὀστέου (60) ; σκεῦος Γυάλινου ABC 243.
b. Of the two sonants thus merged or contracted the stronger
(146 f.) usually receives the stress of the syllable :
1 θεός, νείκεα, χρύσεον ἐπηετανόν, Ενυαλίῳ, πόλιος οι πόλεως, ἴσχεο, νεανιῶν,
ἢ οὐκ, δὴ ἑβδομον.—Η (161 Β.Ο.) τὸν βασιλειά Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 23, 35.
ib. 28, 22 ;—161 Β.C. τοῦ βασιλειώς Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 28, 2.-α συμφωνιάν
(trisyllabic) Kaibol 560, 6 (+I).—Ν λογαριασμός, ἅγιος, ἀετός, παλαιός.
c. If the palatal sonant was accented before the synizesis took
place, the accent is generally removed to the succeeding stronger
[1] So even in NT Gal. 6, το ἄρ᾽ οὖν ὡς (ubi male ὡς) καιρὸν ἔχομεν ἐργαζώ
μεθα. Ignat. ad Smyrn, 9, 1 εὔλογόν ἐστιν λοιπὸν ἀνανῆψαι ἡμᾶς ὡς ἔτι καιρὸν
ἔχομεν. So too even 4 ὅς ὅν ἥ from ός ξύν ξή, as : Mosch. Sop. 628. Fum. 367.
Soph. Tr. 266. 525. O. R. 1248. O. C. 1639. Ai, 442. Eur. Hel. 1124. Mod. 955.
Pl. Rop. iii. 394 Α τὰ ἃ δάκρυα. Ζ 170. M 280.150. § 153.
153. Hdt. 1, 205.
86
PHONODYNAMY-CONTRACTION.
[155-158b.
syllable, as : νεός (νιός) for νέος, Μαθθαιός for Μαθθαῖος (171), ἐννεά for
ἐννέα, φιλιά for φιλία, παιδιοῦ for παιδίου, παιδιὰ for παιδία, μηλιὰ for
μηλέα, ποιὸς for ποῖος, Ρωμαιος for Ῥωμαῖος, δυὸ for δύο, μεθυῶ for μεθύω,
πιὲ for πίε (996213), φιλιὲς for φιλίες (152). But αἰτία, οὐσία, ἁμαρτία.
C
d. In many places, however, such as Cumae in Euboea, Aegina, Maina,
Tsaconia, Pontos, Ionian Islands, South Italy, etc., the synizesis is still
often resisted (271), as : φιλί-α, μηλέα, παιδί-ου, παιδί-α, λύ-ω, πί-ε, etc.
ι
e. In several insular, especially southern, dialects, including that of eastern
Crete, the sibilant syllable -o- loses its before a sonant in the same word, as
(τὸ κρασί ‘wine”) τοῦ κρασοῦ, τὰ κρασά (for -σιοῦ, -σιά)-τὰ νησά, πλοῦσος
(for πλούσιος), άξος (for ἄξιος), μοναξά (for -ξιά), κλεψά (for -ψιά i.e. κλοπή).
f. Conversely, in Cypros the semivowel : becomes k before a sonant (155, α.
1555), as : (χωριὸν *χωργὸν) χωρκόν, (ποιός) πικός, (τρία) τρικά, (Κυριακός) Κυρκακός.
g. In Crotan speech, unaccented ri changes to i, and unaccented vri to Ɛi,
bofore a sonant (cp. 181 1.), as: (φωτιά) φωθιά, (τέτοιος) τέθοιος, στρατιώτης,
στραθιώτης, (ἀρχοντιὰ) ἀρχοδιά, (ἐνάντιος) ἀνάδιος—but αἰτία, οὐσία, ἁμαρτία.
1555. Consonantization.-In N the need for perspicuity or emphasis
may even prevent phonodynamic fusion by developing an intersonantic
-y-, first palatal (2), then guttural (gh; cp. 60. 860), as:
(κλαίγω in Louvre Pap. 15 [160 B.c.], 61). παιδοποιείων IStaph. 242.
ἄγουρος ABC 31, 10. 83, 25. αγέρας (for αέρας i.e. ἀήρ), πλέγει & πλέγω
(πλέω), λούγει & λούγω (λούω), ἀκούγει & ἀκούγω, κρούγω, νογῶ (νοώ),
πραγύς (πραΰς), ἄγουρος (ἄωρος), 6-1-εἰς (ὁ εἷς) γείς, ὅ-γ-οιός (ὁ οἷος) γοιός
(612. 615), τὸ αἷμα γαῖμα, τὸ ὑνί (ὑνίον) γυνί, 6-1-ἴδιος γίδιος, τό-γ-ούλι
(ούλον), ἡ-γ-urnα γούρνα (cp. 155, α).
"
155. Suppression of the gutturals γ, κ, χ. Conversely Nspeech often
drops intersonantic -y- (į or gh), by extension also -- and -x-, either
by simple volatalization or by mistaking them for an intrusive element
in the above sense (155); cp. 863), as : νὰ φάγῃ φάῃ φάω, νὰ πά(γ)ῃ πάω,
λέγει λέω (thence λω), νὰ σφα(γ)ῇ, νὰ σφα(γ)ῶ, ἔχει, (χ)ι, σπά(γ)ος,
πέλα(γ)ος, τα γλίζω, τα χυτέρου (Crete), (γ)ώ, (γ)ωμε, (άωμε) ἆμε = ἄγε,
80' ἄγε ε λ let, ἄγετε ετε) ἄιντε 'go'. (Cp. Louvre Pap. 26
[163-2 Β.Ο.], 9 ὀλίων; ib. 14 ὀλίας. ib. 63 [165 B.Ο.] 103 ὀλίους : -all
for ὀλίγ-.) CLeemans 23 κατ' ἐπιταήν.—Cp. 59, c & 6ου.
linlect
23, 4
1554. In tho dialect of Otranto this extrusion is often extended even to
intergonantic τδβν, as: τοῦο for τοῦτο, δίω for δίδω, βράϋ for βράδυ, πρύατα
tor πρόβατα, ἐκεῖο for ἐκεῖνο. (HFTozer in Journ. Hell. Stud. x. 18.)
156. Contraction is the phonetic or graphic fusion, originally
under the influence of accent (85 ff.), of two successive sonants
within one word into one sonant, naturally intensified ('length-
ened') at the time of the contraction, but soon afterwards un-
consciously reduced to the level of normal or common sonants
(124. App. ii. 14). The process of contraction, however, so far
as it appears in the script, is indicated, for theoretical (metrical
and grammatical) purposes, by treating the resulting sonant
as 'long' (165 f.).—Contraction is either written or unwritten.
156b. I. In written contraction two cases must be distinguished:
(1) Phonetic contraction which occurs within the fixed part (stem)
of a word. Here a sonant overpowers and absorbs another sonant
chiefly under the stress of the accent, as: Λαερτίου Λαρτίου, δίιος δίος,
πατρόϊος πατρῴος. More examples in 156. See App. ii. 14.
87
156b-161.]
CONTRACTION-CRASIS.
(2) Grammatical contraction which occurs chiefly outside the stem
of a word. Here two or more concurrent sonants are fused into one
monophthongous sonant determined by grammatical (inflectional or
analogical influences, as: πόλεες πόλεις, φιλέετε φιλεῖτε, τιμάομεν
τιμῶμεν, τείχεα τείχη, ὑμέας ὑμᾶς, μείζοας μείζους. See App. ii. 9-15.
156º. Thus are (phonetically or grammatically) contracted (165)—
1. α+t to g : γραΐδιον γρᾴδιον 3. o ta to ω: αἰδόα αἰδῶ
α+ο ω : νικάομεν νικώμεν
E+I ει : γένει γένει
οτι
ε + v
η+ι
1 + 10
2. ατα
ετη
η +ε
"}
""
οι : ἀιδόνι αἰδοῖ
ev: è-ú (ëü? 78Þ) ev
» ῃ : κλήιθρον κλῇθρον
» @ : πατρώιος πατρῷος
""
α : γέρεα γέρα
η : φιλέητε φιλῆτε
η : τιμήεντι τιμῆντι
""
0+ 1 11
ω : δηλύητε δηλώτε
Ε+ω ω : φιλέωσι φιλῶσι
""
19
ω: ήρωα ήρω
4. ατε α : τιμάετε τιμάτε
""
ατη
Ετα
**
""
5. Ε+ ε
";
τ: Χίος Χίος
11
""
ω : δηλόωσι δηλῶσι
@ to "
ω: σωος σως
ετο
0 + €
0+ 0
""
o + w
""
α : τιμάητε τιμᾶτε
η : γένεα γένη, ἔαγον ἦγον
ει : φίλες φίλει, σαφέες
σαφεῖς, ἔεχον εἶχον
ου: γένεος γένους
ου : προέχων προύχων
ου : νέος νοῦς.
157. If the constituent parts had, previous to their contraction,
a similar sound, and the resulting sonant is also homophonous, the
contraction is virtually hyphaeresis or absorption, inasmuch as the
stronger sonant has prevailed over the weaker sonant (148), as :
(Χίος) Χίος, (δηλύωσι) δηλῶσι, (σῶος) σῶς, (χρύσεαι) χρυσαί.
157. This is the only kind of 'contraction' obtaining in N (148 f.).
157. But if, previous to the contraction, the constituent parts were
heterophonous, the resultant may be either homophonous with the
stronger sonant (as φιλέουσι φιλοῦσι), or different from either (as δηλόεν
δηλοῦν, γένεα γένη, βασιλέες βασιλῆς, βασιλεῖς). In the latter case the
resultant points not to a different process of phonopathy during A, but
rather to dialectal (Ionic) influence or to analogy (1655. App. ii. 14).
158. The omission of contraction which is poculiar to archaic and early
Greol (124) is contradistinguished as non-contraction (ἀσυναιρεσία), less correct
diueresis (21).
159. A variety of written contraction is Crasis, that is, the
blending of the final sonant of a word (chiefly proclitic) with
the initial sonant of the next following word. (App. ii. 14.)
a. Though crasis unites two separate words into one, in connected
speech and in the 'scriptura continua' it is virtually identical with
contraction. Hence it follows the rules of contraction (156 ff. App.
ii. 14), and is moreover indicated by the spiritus lenis (3), put over
the resultant and called in this special caso coronis (κορωνίς), as :
τὰ ἀγαθά τἀγαθά, τὸ ὄνομα τοὔνομα, καὶ ἐγώ καγώ (20%), τῷ αὐτῷ ταὐτῷ.
160. The resulting sonant of the crusis is conventionally supplied with
an subscript-in capitals adscript (20º. 31)-if previous to the contraction
the second component had an t, as: (καὶ εἶτα) κᾆτα (ἐγὼ οἶμαι) ἐγᾦμαι (204).
161. b. Written crasis occurs chiefly in verse, and that only after
very common words, in particular after the article, the relative pro-
nouns, and the conjunction καί :
(τὸ ἐναντίον) τοὐναντίον
(τὰ ἐμά) τἀμά
(& εγώ) αγώ
(καὶ ἄν) κάν (200)
(& ἄν ἄν
(ὁ ἀνήρ) ανήρ.
88
SYNIZESIS-ANTECTASIS.
[161b-165b.
161b. The coronis is omitted when it coincides with the spiritus
asper, as: (ὁ ἄνθρωπος), ἄνθρωπος.
162. II. Unwritten contraction. Very commonly contraction
(including crasis) is not symbolized by the script, but is none the
less indicated by the rhythm or metre. This kind of contraction
which takes place in pronunciation only, and so escapes the eye,
goes by the special name of synizesis (συνίζησις or συνεκφώνησις),
and has already been dealt with in 155. (Cp. App. i. 14.)
163. ANTECTASIS. Most frequently one of two or three
consecutive consonants which thus form metrical position, is
phonopathically extruded (169) and the metrical position leads
to a metrical compensation by lengthening or diphthongizing
the rhythmically affected syllable (29 ff. App. ii. 9-15). This
phenomenon, which is commonly known as 'compensatory
lengthening,' will be called in this book antectasis (avтékтaois).
Thus ǎ becomes a (also н): πâs
€
""
""
""
O
>
(from *πavтs
e (always): xapieis
OU :
ī:
Ŭ :
""
*
λύσασι ἔφηνα
Χλυσαντσι *ἐφανσα)
εἰς
(from χαριεντς Χένς
διδούς
λιμήν
Χλιμενς)
ἔστειλα
*έστελσα)
ῥήτωρ
*ῥητορε
παιδεύουσι
γέρουσι
γέρων
ᾤκτιρα
Κώκτιρσα)
ἤμυνα
(from *δίδοντς *γεροντσι
ἔκρινα ἔτιλα
(from *έκρινσα *ἐτιλσα
φύς
δεικνυσι
Απαιδευοντσι)*γεροντς
L
(from *puvts *δεικνυντσι *ἠμυνσα)
€
164. a. In the nominative case of the third declension, e and o be-
come ๆ and o respectively (337, c), as:
ποιμήν (from *ποιμενς), δαίμων (from *δαιμονς), ῥήτωρ (from *ῥητορς).
165. b. Strictly speaking, antectasis is the compensation for any
loss, whether of consonants or sonants, and so virtually comprises
all kinds of contraction. In fact antectasis goes back to the first
stage of phonopathy and so forms the basis of all prosodic length or
'quantity,' inasmuch as the genesis of nearly all long vowels and all
the hysterogeneous diphthongs (29b)- a very great part of Greek
phonology and the whole system of quantity in Greek-are the
effects of antcctasis. That these effects were never physiological
but technical, and that from school they passed through the script
to actual speech, has been already explained in 29 fl. and will be
more fully treated in App. ii. 9-15.
165". Considering that contraction and antoctasis had comploted their
work much anterior to the adoption of the scholastic spelling (6. 29 ff.), at a
poriod when there was as yet no such a 'vowel 'as norw in the Attic alphabet,
and when e and o porformed a variety of functions (6. 12), it is self-evident
that a great number of the cases of contraction (7+1, w + 1, e + n, n + €, o + ∞,
@+o, o+n, ε+∞, ∞ +α, α +7) and antectasis are virtually speculative.
(See however App. ii. 9-15.) Honce it is hard to tell how much of tho
contraction and antectasis is actually due to the phonetic process, how
much to grammatical principles, and how much to the process of trans-
litoration from which it has passed through the script into common speech.
[1] Gellius N. A. ii, 17, 8 'dotrimontum littorae productione syllabae compen-
satur.'
89
165b-168b.]
METAPHONY.
In effect, a great many of the above cases of contraction and antectasis
156 ff. 163 f.), so far as they go back to early A times, are probably due
directly to Ionic and Doric influence. To put it more plainly, those
phonetic and grammatical phenomena which 4 shares with Ionic and
Doric, were mostly, if not wholly, borrowed directly from those time-
honoured dialects (04) previous to the rise of Athens to pro-eminence, and
thus, once sanctioned, served as patterns for subsequent formations as
well (124). It is therefore erroneous to speak of contraction and crasis
as a phonopathic process actually going on during 500-300 B.O., and still
more venturesome to seek to determine, on the strength of such a process,
the pronunciation of the sonants at the time referred to (20.30.141.165).
METAPHONY.
166. Metaphony is a phonopathic process by which a vowel
underwent, in prehistoric times (1245), a change under certain
conditions. This change appears either as qualitative when the
sonant has altered its nature or quality; or quantitative when
the sonant, for theoretical purposes, has altered its quantity only.
[166". I have substituted the tractable term metaphony (μerapwvía aft or
diaparía, ovµpwvía, otc.) for the cumbrous and unpliable German Ablaut(ung),
notwithstanding that ancient μerapwvely had a diflorent meaning [.]
167. Qualitative metaphony is the change of a sonant into another
heterophonous sonant (cp. 224b). Thus we meet with an interchange
of-
a and n : μακρός, μῆκος ; στατός, στήσω ; τιμάω, τιμήσω.
H ω: ἀρήγω, ἀρωγή.
""
€ o and a : τρέπω, τρόπος, ἐτράπην ; στέλλω, στόλος, ἐστάλην ;
φθείρω (φθερ), φθορά, ἐφθάρην.
168. Quantitative metaphony is either the (metrical and grammatical)
lengthening of a short sonant, or the (metrical and grammatical)
shortening of a long sonant. Thus we meet with an interchange of-
a and : θέαμα, θεᾶομαι; κέκρᾶγα, ἔκρᾶγον ; καλός & καλός.
3 =
H
U
ΕΙ
91
""
ο : πώμα, ποτός; δώσω, δοτήρ; δουλώσω, δουλύω.
ε: ἦθος, ἐθίζω ; θήσω, θετός; ποιήσω, ποιέω.
1: τρίβω, τριβή; κλίνω, κλίσις ; κρίνω, κριτής.
ϋ : θῦμα, θυσία ; λύσω, λύσις ; ὄμνυμι, όμνυμεν.
ἴ : εἶδος, ἰδεῖν ; λείπω, λιπεῖν ; πείθω, πιθανός (32').
ευ ϋ : τεύχω, τυχεῖν ; φεύγω, φυγή (331).
}"
168". A variety of quantitativo metaphony is the caso when two contiguous
This is com-
heterosyllabic vowols interchango quantity for motrical purposes.
monly called metalhesis of quantity (vñepßißaoµds тov Xpóvov, Fdn. ii. 381 &
625). Seo App. ii. 14, and cp. 143.
βασιλέως βασιλήος βασιλέα βασιλία ; so too ἵλεως ἵλαος.
[1] I had coined this term for the purposes roforrod to, moro than two years
bofore the publication of Prof. VHonry's Compar. Grammar of English and
German, where he first introduced it, togothor with 'apophony' (p. 43. 74 of his
English version), for the Gorman torm Umlaut, Thus I can havo noithor claims
to priority nor responsibility for the coinago. I only rojoice at the fact that
a similar idea should have occurred indopondently to two difforont students.
At the same time, I must confess my inability to follow Prof. H. in his
application of metaphony to 'Umlaut' and apophony to 'Ablaut.' For wherous
μerà in Greck composition can moan a change, thus corresponding to Gorman um-
and ab-, Groek árо- can moan only a 'dropping' or something 'bad' (Gorman
miss-, ver-). Henco whilo μerapavía can moan' change of sound,' that is Ablaut
or Umlaut, dropwvia would moan eithor 'dropping of a sound' (Lautabfall), or
u 'bad sound' (Misslaut or Uebollaut), and thus be a variety of 'cacophony.'
90
CONSONANTISM-MUTAE.
[169–171.
B. CONSONANTAL PHONOPATHY (CONSONANTISM).
A. INITIAL AND MEDIAL CONSONANTISM.
169. As already explained in 123 f., Greek manifested from
the outset an unmistakable aversion to consonantal accumula-
tions. Should therefore two or more incompatible consonants
meet together (by inflection, composition, or derivation), an
accommodation was brought about either by their commuta-
tion or by the sacrifice of one or more of them (cp. èvs: ès,
èv, cis). The main principles governing in this phonopathic
process are laid down in the following paragraphs (170-217).
169. This phonopathic process seems to underlie also the change of the
aspiratae x 0 p to their co-ordinate tenues т π before a dental or μ (172.
177), inasmuch as the aspirata here drops its second constituent H=h
171) before a consonant under certain conditions, as: *dedekhtai dédentⱭL,
*πειτημα Απειτμα (πεῖσμα), *γεγραπται γέγραπται. Seo 171, 172, 177 & 178.
a. MUTES.
170. When they occur before a sonant originally aspirated,
the tenues K T T are changed into their co-ordinate aspiratae
(i.e. KH TH IIH) by misappropriating the initial aspiration
x
Ө
(H) of the succeeding word (171).
Thus
become
i. e.
οὐκ Ηοσίως
οὐΚΗ οσίως
οὐχ ὁσίως
πάντ' Ηύσα
ἀπ᾿ Ηοῦ
πάνΤΗ όσα
πάνθ᾽ ὅσα
ἀΠΗ οὐ
ἀφ᾽ οὗ
ἐπΗοδός
ΕΠΗ οδός
ἔφ-οδος [1]
171. As the aspiration was hardly perceived even in earlier A (72 f.), the
above rule cannot have applied to A-P Greek, either written or spoken. As
a matter of fact, the phenomenon represents not a phonetic but a graphic
union of +h, T + h, π + h, these pairs being mistakon, in the scriptura continua,
for the old biliteral consonants KH, TH, IH (i.e. x, 0, 4 ; cp. 3. 6. 12). It will
be remembered that in primitivo Greck the aspiration I was represented
in the script by the symbol H (72), so that combinations like the above
were written in the scriptura continua: ΟΙΗΟΣΙΟΣ, ΠΑΝΤΗΟΣΑ, ΜΕTHIEMI,
ΑΠΗΟΔΟΣ, ΕΠΗΟΔΟΣ, ΑΠΗΙΕΜΙ. We further know that H, bosides its
phonetic value as h, formed the second constituent of the then biliteral
consonants x, 0, (KH, TH, ITH; 12). In progress of time when the
aspiration became muto (72), its symbol H began also to be dropped from
the script everywhore except after 4, 7, π, with which it seemed to form a
natural and familiar digraph. Accordingly in οὐχ ὁσίως, πανθ᾽ ὅσα, μεθίημι,
ảp oû, ¿podos, àpínu, and the like, there is no phonetic change of the
tenues Tπ into the aspiratao x 0 4, but a more mechanic revection and
incorporation of tho initial H () into tho precoding final tenuis, just as
it is mechanically done in the caso of two words spoken by two different
persons, as in dialogue (cp. Soph. El. 1502: OP. ¿^^ ' épq'. AI. úpηyoû—
whero no man can contond that Orestes had anticipated Aegisthos'
reply and so snatchod his opening h; cp. App. ii. 5). In all other cases
where the aspiration symbol H could not be graphically blended with tho
procoding letter (cp. σύνοδος, πάρ-Ηοδος, ἔξ-Ποδος, περί-Ηοδος, τρίβ' μούτως,
λéy' hetéρav, ovd' hŋueîs), it was altogother dropped even in pre-Attic times(2),
Ө
[ Honce the repotition of the aspiration (h + ) is irrational, and we ought
to spoll: οὐχ οσίως, πάνθ' ὅσα, ἀφ οὗ (if not οὐχ οσίως, πανθ' όσα, ἀφ' ου).
[2] Evon Dorio, which prosorvod the sign of aspiration (H) tho longest, dis-
carded the rule in the case of т π, according to Dion. Comp. 335 B : àπeipákis
τὰ Δωρικὰ διὰ ψιλῶν ἀντιστοίχων τὰς συναλοιφὰς ποιεῖται. Κὦ τοξύτης Ἡρακλέης,
91
171-176.]
CONSONANTISM-MUTAE.
notwithstanding that in most of these cases it was far easier to pronounce
than after the tenues ἔπ-Ηοδος, κάτ-Ποδος, which physiologically are
explosive aspirates, thus containing in themselves the aspiration (cp.
56 & 72).—See Dion. Th. in Bekk. An. 631, 25 ff. & 813, 2 ff.
171. Should a tenuis к т be followed by an aspirata, it is often
phonopathically assimilated to its co-ordinate aspirata (if not dropped,
179. 195). This is regular in P-N speech, as: Βάκχος Βάχχος, Ατθὶς
᾿Αθθίς, Ματθαῖος Μαθθαίος, Σαπφώ Σαφφώ. (See also 56 & 56.)
172. Should a labial or guttural be succeeded by a dental,
it becomes co-ordinate with the dental. (169b.)
The only combinations admissible here are : κτ, γδ, χθ—πτ, βδ, φθ.
Thus pr and φτ become πτ: (*τετριβται) τέτριπται
πδ
""
φδ
""
πθ
""
βδ
""
ΥΤ
Χτ
">
κθ
кб (χδ)
χθ
""
βδ: (*γραπίδην Αγραπδην) γράβδην
φθ: (*έλειπθην) ἐλείφθην
κτ: (*λελεγται *λελεκηται) λέλεκται
γδ : (*πλεκδην) πλέγδην
χθ : (*ἐλεγθην ἐλέχθην
173. The preceding rule holds good only for literary A. On the
other hand, the frequent occurrence, in A inscriptions, as well as in
papyri, of combinations like—
ἐχ θητῶν
ἐχ Θετταλίας
ἐγβάτης
ἐγβολῆς
ἐγ Βυζαντίου
ἔγμακτος
ἐγ μεγάλων
ἐχ φυλῆς
ἐφορήσαντι
ἔγγονος (= ἔλγα)
ἐγ Γαργηττίων
ἔγδοσιν
ἐγδάκτυλος
ἐγ νήσων
ἐχ Χαλκίδος
ἐχ Λέσβου
ἐγλέγειν
ἐγλυθέντα
ἐγ Λέσβου
ἐγ Ρυμου
ἐγ Δρυμοῦ
C.
and many others (KMeisterhans 2 82-84), then "ExTwp on A vases
(PKretschmer 155 & 235)-all dating before the II B.c.show
that even A speech deviated from literary usage in the direction of
consonantal accommodation, as illustrated in the following sections
(174. 176. 179) of N consonantism.
174. While retaining the groups γδ and βδ, uncultivated N speech
has changed т and x0 into XT, and Tт and pe into 47, so that it does not
admit of the concurrence of either two tonues or two aspiratae. Should
such incompatible consonants concur, the resultant is always an aspirata
with a tonuis (ep. 885), as: οχτώ, χτύπος, χτίζω, δαχτύλι, νύχτα, ἐχ τὸν
(for ἐκ τόν, 1571); φτωχός, φτέρνα, φτερό, εφτά, κλέφτης, ἐφκὴ or εὐκὴ (i.e.
εὐχή, so even in Vita S. 8* Β), φτάνω, ()προχτές; (ζευχθέντες) ζευθέντες
(Acta Xanth. 6, 32), πέμπτη (*πεπτη), πέφτη.
174. The combinations ur or χr and mr or or are treated differently in
South Italian Greek, the Otrantine idiom changing χτ (μτ) to φτ, while that
of Bova turns φτ (πτ) 10 στ, as : νύφτα for νύχτα, ἑστὰ for ἑφτά (ἑπτά).
175. Before μ, a labial becomes μ: (*γραφμα γραπίμα) γράμμα.
guttural γ: (*διωκμός) διωγμός.
27 2 dental
σ: (*πειθμα *πειτιιμα) πεῖσμα.
29
22 79
""
176. On this principle, the chango into o of a dental before another
dontal is not physiological or phonopathic, but analogical (124"). Thus
tho change of *ίστε *ίδθι Απεπειθται *ἐπειθθην, into ἴστε ἴσθι πέπεισται
ἐπείσθην, is due to ἴcMer πεπείσμεθα, πείσμα. (Cp. 169" & 196.)
κάλλιστ᾽ ὑπαυλέν. Καμεγασθενὴς Ασαναία. Μελάμποδα τ' Αρπύλυκόν τε. ἄρχοι-
μεν γὰρ κὠθρασίων. (TBergk iii. 697.)
92
CONSONANTISM
[177-182.
ASPIRATAE.
177. But actual speech of all times changes the combination oế to
στ (cp. 173. 885), as :
λυσάστω IGA 109. III. 117. 119. 121. 322, 16 ἑλέσται. 321, 19, 23, 26, 28
χρῆσται. ᾿Αθήν. Ε' 417 ᾿Αλκιστένου (iv-iiit B.c.).—200-190 B.C. θέςτων GDit-
tenberger 294, 68. ἀποπολιτεύσαται ib. 294, 55.-161 B.C. μνή τητι Gr. Pap.
Br. Mus. p. 24, 4. 26, 4.- +150 Β.Ο. παραγενέεται GDittenberger 323, 12.
+ 140 B.Ο. καταρχέςτων ib. 233, 65. - 9Ι Β.Ο. ἀγείςτω( = ἀγέσθω) ib. 388, 28.
Ι. Β.Ο. καθαριζέτω GDittenberger 379, 3; CIA iii. 73, 9-10; 74, 3.—ἐντεί-
λαςται Bull. Corr. Hell. 1894 p. 14. ± 197 A.D. τρέφεται Gr. Urk. Berlin
15, 21.-III A.D. γενέτω, ἀπογραφέςτω, Mitth. xix. 250, 27, 83 (Athens).
ἀποθέστε for ἀποθέσθαι, ib. xviii. 64 (Athos).-313 A.D. μεμιςτωκέναι Gr. Urk.
Berlin 343, 5.So too generally in old Locrian, Boeotian, Thessalian,
Phocean, Elian, and Messenian.
C.
So now ἀστενής, μιστός, ἔρχεστε, etc.
177. In the same way, the combination σχ becomes σκ, as IGA 112
πάσκοι-now πάσκω, then σχίζω σκίζω, σχολεῖον σκολειό (174).
178. But sometimes a guttural before a dental remains unchanged in A,
as: ἀκμή, ερετμός, ἀριθμός. (Cp. 169.)
T
179. In uncultivated N speech a guttural is usually, and a labial
always, dropped before μ, as: τυλιμός (even in Et. M. 773, 5) but also
τυλιγμός,σα(γ)μάρι, βρε(γ)μένος, πρα(γ)μα, θάμασμα (from θαυμάζω),
ῥέμα (ῥεῦμα), πνέμα (πνευμα) 1; whereas a dental either becomes
aspirata, changing at the same time μ to v, as: ἀχνὸς for ἀτμός,
ἀρίφνητος for ἀναρίθμητος, στάφνη for στάθμη, παχνί for παθνίον from πάθνη
(Moeris356; Geop. 15, 4, 1) for φάτνη ;-or develops a sonant between
r and u, as : Gloss. Laod. 66 ατομός, ἀτομίζω (for ἀτμός, ἀτμίζω); so too
now τμήμα (for τμήμα ep. CGL 414, 55 praecisum est tetimemenon
estin, i.e. τετμημένον ἐστίν), ἡ Πάτινο (for Πάτμος), etc. (Cp. 131 & 187.)
180. Followed by o, a labial produces (124) ψ: (*τερπσις) τέρψις.
guttural
ξ: (*πραγσω πράξω.
dental is dropped (169) : (*πειθσω) πείσω.
180. So still in N, as : τρίψω, κράξω, κλώσω—then χορέψω, δουλέψω,
Λεψίνα, πάψω, κλάψω, κάψα (for χορεύσω, δουλεύσω, Ελευσίνα [135],
παύσω, κλαύσω, καύσις)-since here αν ευπαφ εφ (51 f.).
29
29 29
19
180°. In South Italian Greek, tho idiom of Otranto resolves ψ to φσ, as :
κλάψσω, ἀφσηλός (υψηλός).
181. The syllable τι (and ντι) is often changed to σι, especially when
followed by a sonant (124b). This is called assibilation.
Thus *πλουτιος, Καδυνατια, *γεροντία, λεγοντι,
πλούσιος, ἀδυνασία, γερουσία, λέγουσι.
become
181", For a dentalization instead of assibilation in N see 155, g.
b. ASPIRATAE.
182. Two contiguous syllables in the same word, beginning
with an aspirata, undergo the following dissimilative changes
(124b. 126):
a. In reduplication, a tenuis is substituted for the aspirata, as:
πέφυκα and τίθημι for φεφυκα and θιθημι. (But see 184 f. and cp. 730.)
Assuming that in their actual spocch the ancients did not practise
gemination (ya), but pronounced γράμα (γραμα) for γράμμα, τέτριμαι for -μμαι,
we aro justifiod in applying this historical orthography to N as woll, and
so writo : τυλιμμός, σαμμάρι, βρεμμένος, πραμμα, θάμμασμα, ῥέμμα, πνέμμα.
93
182-187.]
LIQUIDS AND NASALS.
b. The imperative ending -θ becomes -τι in the first aorist passive:
(λυθηθι) λύθητι (808. 920).
c. The stems e- and Ov- become re- and Tv- in the first aorist
passive: (* ἐθεθην) ἐτέθην, (Ρ ἐθύθην ἐτύθην. Cp. 176.
183. In monosyllabic stems beginning with r and ending in
φ or x, the aspirata (φ, χ), when removed from its place, is
transferred to the beginning (124b):
Stem τριχ
>>
ταχ
""
ταφ
>>
τρεφ
τριχός
ταχύς
ταφή
τρέφω
θρίξ, θριξίν
θάσσων οι θάττων
θάπτω
θρέψω
184. That the two preceding rules of dissimilation (182 f.) did not
hold good for popular speech even in A, appears sufficiently from the
ancient inscriptions and papyri, as :
ἐνθαυθοῖ, ἀνεθέθη, ἐθέθην
Κόλχος (for Κόλχος), χάλχη, Καλχηδόνιοι
Φάνφαιος beside Πάνφαιος), χιθών (beside χιτών)
Νίχαρχον, θροφός, θηθές (for τηθίς)
χυθρίς (beside χυτρίς), Θαλθύβιος.
184b. These inscriptional evidences, beside many others (KMeis-
terhans 2 78-82; Blass-Kühner, i. 277 f.), are anterior to the
III B.c. Compare further ἔφθιθ᾽ οὗτος Aesch. Εum. 458 ; σώθηθ᾽ ὅσον
Eur. Or. 1345; θρεφθεῖσι Pl. Pol. 310 A; θρεφθείς GKaibel 71, 5
(IVt B.c.), and the regular forms ἐχύθην, ἐθέλχθην, ἐθλίφθην, ἐλιθώθην,
φάθι, τέθναθι.
184. Influenced by Italian phonology, the idiom of Otranto changes
initial i to r, and intersonantic i to o, as : τέλω for θέλω, τάλασσα for θάλασσα,
τωρῶ for θωρῶ, σπασί for σπαθί, λισάρι for λιθάρι, πεσαμμένο for πεθαμμένο.
c. LIQUIDS AND NASALS.
185. Technically initial p is usually doubled when, by inflec-
tion or composition, a short vowel is prefixed to it (64), as :
ῥίπτω, ἔρριπτον, καταρρίπτωῥητός, ἀπόρρητος. See 64.
185b. In the script this rule has been conventionally adhered to through
all P-B antiquity, and is still observed in N.
Ρι
186 The doubling of p here is believed to have originated in the
presence, before initial
of a primordial F or σ which was assimilated
Thus Fρητος, ρρητος, ῥητός. The phenomenon, however, is pro-
bably connected with the trilling character of Greek p. (See 64, and
cp. 51. 209 f. 712.)
to p.
186. That (unaccented) initial and modial ir becomes er in GN, has been
explained in 40, whore add : ]γιερός, κερὰ for πυρά (i.o. κυρία), περὶ for κηρίον
(ep. Λ γέρας γῆρας), but σφυρί, τυρί, βούτυρο, Κυριακή, μαρτυρώ, ote.
186º. For the almost regular appearance of -ra for -re or -ri, in devrépa,
ἀργυρᾶ, θηράσω, χρᾶσθαι, ἐπέρασα, etc., soe 65. (Cp. also 269, 4. 839. 892.)
187. Before a consonant, P-N uncultivated speech changes λ to p,
or interposes i (131. 179), as:
Εὐέρπιστος CIA iii. 1202. Ερπιδίου 3466 (besido Ελπ- 3415 and 3475).
Ἐρπινίκου, ἀδερφοί 3526. τορμήσι (for τολμήσει) Jour. Hell. Stud. 1896
p. 226, 24.-κεφαλαργήσης Great Louvre Pap. 137. Οὐρφίλας Philostorgios
(425 A.D.) 468 B & C. CGL 296, 46 κεφαλαργία. ὑδάρμη for ὑδράλμη Alchom.
348, 9.-Honce τολμήσῃ τορμήσῃ τρομήσῃ CIA iii. 1433.
So now : ἁρμυρός, σκαρμός, φταρμός (όφθαλμός), αδερφός, ᾿Αρβανίτης for
94
LIQUIDS AND NASALS.
[187-194.
᾿Αλβανίτης i. e. Αλβανός (JScylitses, 739), βάρσαμο & βάσαρμος, κόρφος
(κόλπος ' lap, bay'), σφαρτός (σφαλτός), etc.-ψαλιτήρι, άλφα, etc. i31.
26
187. However, the combinations -λμ- and -iv- are not unpopular, particu-
larly in northern and Levantine speech, as : σφαλνῶ, στέλνω, βαλμένος (cp. 904).
187º. In Samothrace the liquids A p are dropped altogether (cp. 863), as :
μέλι, και ός, πλύνω, χώρα, τυί τ' είς. So further in Tsaconic, though only before
a o u, as: ea for λa. A similar phonetic phenomenon is witnessed in
Sphakia of Crete, where A before a o u becomes guttural, thus approaching
? (67), as : καλός φίλος, μήτο, καγάθι ;—then at Lakkoi of Canea where λ
before a o u is reduced to a short semivocalic u, English w, as: kawòs piwos,
οὗτος (οὗλος, i.e. ὅλος), κανὰ κουνούρια (καλὰ κουλλούρια).—Again in Ionian
the syllables λi and vi are, under Italian influence, palatalized sounding like
Italian gn or i and gl, as : vagὴ νύχτα.
188. Between liquids and nasals, a consonant is sometimes
phonopathically developed (epenthesis, 131) to facilitate pro-
nunciation. Thus is developed—
between μ and λ, and μ and ρ, α β, as : μέμ-β-λωκα, γαμ-β-ρός
a 8, as: v-d-pa.
""
ע
ρ
""
189. Before gutturals, v is usually, by phonetic accommoda-
tion, changed to y nasal, that is to a weak n (58, 203b).
Thus ἐν-καλῶ συν-γενής συν-χωρώ
become ἐγκαλῶ
συγγενής
συγχωρῶ
τὸν κήρυκα
τὸν κήρυκα.
190. So still in N (58), with the only difference that in uncul-
tivated speech y altogether dwindles away before κ, X, § (193), as:
συ-χωρῶ, σφιχτός (for συγχωρώ, σφιγκτός), σύξυλος.
101. This phonetic departure, however, is of no recent date.
κτής CIA iii. p. 312. ἐλέξι (for ἐλέγξει) Sept. Jos. 2, 4 (N).
13. φάραξιν 57, 5. φθεξάσθωσαν Jer. 9, 17. σάλπιξιν 1 Macc.
φάρυξ Cant. 5, 16. λάρυξ John 6, 30. 12, ΙΙ. Ps. 5, 10.
σάλπιξ 1 Cor. 14, 8. ἄσπλαχνος Gloss. Laod. 65. λύξ ib. 88.
Cp. σαλπι-
ἐλέξει 11,
6, 38 (N).
Rom. 3, 13.
192. Before labials, v changes, by phonetic accommodation,
to μ, and is usually so written (203b).
μη
Thus ἐμπίπτω
but also ενεπίπτω
ἐμβαίνω
ἐν-βαίνω
συμφέρω
ἔμψυχος,
συν-φέρω ἔν-ψυχος
193. In N the combination μπ still holds good, but in those of μβ,
μφ, μψ, μπτ, uncultivated speech drops the μ. However, this phe-
nomenon - which by the way points to the pronunciation of ẞ and o
as v and ƒ (63. 5611)-can be traced back to A-P times.
Cp. Λ λά(μ)βδα; ξυβάλλεσθαι CIA ii. add. 52, c, 8 (368 Β.C.).—συφέρουσι Gr.
Inscr. Br. Mus. 477, 32.—της συβίου CIA iii. 3510.—συββῇ, συββήσετε Gr.
Pap. Br. Mus. 117, 38-39 (†IVth).—rǹ Yñpov ib. 117, 48 (†IVth).—λaɣávn
(for λαμψάνη) Pallad. 1105 B; also Hesych. τὴ βελτίωσιν CWessely
Prol. 29 (VIC). ἔμπα, κάμπος, ἐμπρός; but σύβουλος, συφέρο, υφαλός,
σύψυχος (πέμπτη Απέπτη) πέφτη. (Cp. 190.)
194. Before dentals, v holds its own in A composition
(though CIG 129 ἒχωμ διετέλει), but in P-N uncultivated speech
it is generally dropped before 0 and 8 (because of 0 and 8 = }
and d, 56 f. 61). Moreover vd in N also appears as vт.
τῶ δυνάμεων Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. 41, 118 f. (158 Β.C.). ἀθρώπους CIA
iii 171, ii. 4 (III).-κάθαρον Great Louvre Pap. 65 . τῶ δύω ἱεράκων
Gr. Pup. Br. Mus. 119, 100.—σαντάλιον ib. 122, 33 (HIV). Porph. Adm.
144, 11 συμπεθερίας.
95
194b-201.]
LIQUIDS AND NASALS.
1945. So too now in uncultivated speech: ἀθῶ, κολοκύθι, σπίθα, τὸ θεόν, τὸ
διακο”, τῷ δασκάλων, &c. (beside cultivated ἀνθῶ, σπινθήρ, τὸν θεόν, τὸν διακον,
τῶν (διδασκάλων)—ἄντρας, ντύνω (ἐνδύνω), σφεντόνη (σφενδόνη), σφόντυλος.
ν
195. Before a or a liquid, v is usually assimilated (or dropped ?
1714. 179 & [1]. 201). Cp. 203.
συρράπτω
Thus ἐμμένω συλλέγω
beside ἐν-μένω συν-λέγω συν-ράπτω
3
τὸ λόγον ἂμ μή
τὸν λόγον
ἂν μή
But also τὴ μίσθωσιν CWessely Akad. Wiss. 1889, p. 115. ἐμ μηνί CWessoly
Prol. 64. εἰς τὼ Μητρώδωρον (for τὸν Μ.), εἰς Βορρᾶ μετά ib. CLeemans passim.
So N ἀμ(μ)ὴ for ἂν μή(Span. 1ο8)—το (μ) μῆνα, τὸ (λ) λόγο, τὸ (ρ) ῥάφτη", &c.
195. For particulars regarding the frequency of permutation, in the A public
inscriptions during the V-IV B.O., of final r before labials, gutturals, and
liquids, see 203 and MHecht i. 5-30.
195º. For suffixal or terminal and movable -v, see 219, 221, and App. iii.
196. The combination νμ becomes σμ in the perfect passive and in
verbal substantives having a v-thematic (897-on the analogy of 176?).
*φαν μα * μιαν μα
φάσμα
Thus Υπεφαν μαι
become πέφασμα
μίασμα
196. This is applicable to N also, as far as regards verbal
adjectives. For the perfect passive see 688, 1875, & 2140.
197. Final -r, when followed by σ, is usually retained (2or);
but medial -v- is dropped with (prosodic) antectasis in the fol-
lowing cases (cf. 29ff. 123. 202. See App. ii. 8-15):
a. In some nominatives, as : (μελανς) μέλας, (ένς) εἷς.
b. In the accusative plural of sonantic stems.
Thus χώρανς Αλυσανδ Χλογους Κουνς
bocomo χώρας
λόγους
σὺς
Χλελυκανσι
λελύκασι
*διδαν σι
διδόασι
λύσας
c. In the verbal ending -νσι.
Thus *παιδευουσι
borome παιδεύουσι
198. 1. But in the dative plural, v is dropped without antectasis.
Thus μέλανσι
become μέλᾶσι
ποιμένοι
ποιμέσι
δαίμονσι
δαίμοσι
199. 2. The preposition ἐν retains (by constraint) its - unchanged
before ρ, σ, ζ, as : ἐνρίπτω, ἐνσείω, ἐνζεύγνυμι.
200. 3. Metrically the preposition σύν, when followed by a simple
o, generally assimilates v to o [but cp. 195]; but when it is followed
by a combination of o, or by (, it generally drops its v.
ν
Thus σύν-σιτος
beside
σύσ-σιτος
συν-σκευάζω συν-ζυγία
συσκευάζω συζυγία
201. The preceding rules 197-200 deal with a process initiated and
completed in pre-classical Greek and subsequently repeated in literary
style by mere analogy (124b). On the other hand, popular speech,
both ancient and modern, invariably drops or assimilates before
σ, ρ, ζ (195; cp. 190. 193 f.). This is shown (1) by the inscriptions
and papyri of the time (KMeisterhans" 86 f.); (2) by other casual
instances where is dropped or assimilated even by A authors; and
(3) by N consonantism which does not tolerate » before σ, ρ, ζ.
Thus in 4, boside ἐν σανίδι
ἐσανίδι
occur
ἐνστήσαντι
ἐστήσαντι
ν
ἐν Ῥόδῳ τὸν λόγον,
ἐρ) Ρόδῳ το(λ) λόγον.
96
LIQUIDS AND NASALS-SPIRANT σ. [202–207.
202. The consonantal groups VT về vẻ before σ are dropped
with antectasis (29 ff. 123. App. ii.
App. ii. 9 ff. 14).
Thus Απαντσι
become πάσι
Ασπενόσω
σπείσω
*διδοντσι
δίδουσι
203. Strictly speaking, this rule applies only to archaic Greek, for
the occurrence of combinations like vro, vdo, veo had become impossible
even in A-P compositions (124, 169). In N speech, however, such occur-
rences are not rare, first owing to its fondness for syncope, and then in
consequence of its adoption of foreign elements having the conso-
nantal combinations referred to (cp. 205). In all these cases then N
drops v and the resulting sound is tσ (i.e. ts) and τh or vτh (i. e. dz).
Cp. 205.
C.
203. As shown in the public inscriptions of the V-IV B.C., the actual
condition in A of final v, especially that of the proclitics Tòv Tìv tôv ẻv oúv,
before the labials, gutturals, liquids, and the sibilant o, notably of enclitics,
is illustrated by the following synoptical table (based on MHocht i. 6-27).
That many of the cases, especially those between lengthy and independent
words, and abovo all those between clauses separated by a pause, do not
represent a phonopathic, but a mechanical or analogical process (25°),
due to the scriptura continua, is more than probablo. Cp. aτhoaм πρbole
(46ο Β. C.), ἔστι περί (400-350 B.C.), ἔγκτησις καὶ (before 376 Β.Ε.), ταρρύΜ,
πηδάλια (235 Β. α.), ὀφείλουσιμ Φιλόδημος (323 Β. C.). KMeisterhans" 86, 2. Cp.
GIB no. 925, 4, 12, 15, 20, etc.

LABIALS
GUTTURALS
LIQUIDS
SIBILANT
Final v
before
II
Φ B
K
X
T=gh Ti
guttural palatal
Λ M P
Σ
assimil.
97 5 24
18 14
18 (1) [1]
8423
15
not ass. 202 16 46 183 36 25
3
28 63 4
30
d. SPIRANT σ.
204. Interconsonantal o usually dwindles away (124b. 884, d).
Thus *τεταραχσθε
become τετάραχθε
*γεγραφσθαι
γεγράφθαι
Αλελεχσθω Χέστασθαι
λελέχθω ἐστάλθαι.
205. So still in N, the only combinations tolerated being Tσ (=ts) and
τζ οι ντζ (= 4) (203) as : κάτσε (from καθ'σε, i.o. κάθισε [136] = κάθισον), τσῆ
(from r's 1.0. τῆς 562), κουτσός, τσάπα, τσόχα, χατζῆς, ἄντζα (i.e. άλζα).
206. After a liquid à µ v p, the sibilant o is generally dropped,
and the (rhythmically affected) preceding syllable is compen-
sated either by inserting into it a (silent), or by doubling the
liquid (29 ff. 215. App. ii. 9 ff. & 14).
Thus Κέστελσα
*έφθερσα
become ἔστειλα
ἔφθειρα
Χένευσα
ἔνειμα
Χέκρινα
ἔκρινα
or Aeolic ἔστελλα
ἔφθερα
ἔνεμμα
ἔκριννα
Cp. Old Attic
θάρσος
χέρσος
χερσόνησος
with New & P Attic Oúppos
χέρρος
χερρόνησος
207. The results of the two preceding rules 206-7 are applicable
to N also.
[¹] CIA i. 324, ¤, 21 týг yvvaîka (408-7 B.C.)
97
II
208-215.]
SEMIVOWELS 2 AND F.
208. Note finally that, in the case of els (1554, b), and of the proclitic
pronouns τον την των της τους τας μας σας τους (τως), instead of dropping their
final v
or σ, or accommodating it to the following initial consonant,
popular N speech very frequently inserts a protective or revective -e (132 f.
536. 725), for the sake of perspicuity, as : τονε θωρώ, την βλέπω, σασε χαιρετᾷ,
εἰ]σε χρόνια πολλά, ζωὴ σε λόγου σου, εί]σε δυδ (τρεῖς, πέντε) μήνες, etc.
ELegrand Bibl. ii. [MS 1384 A.D.], 233 εἰς πόνον καὶ εἰςὲ βῆχαν. ib. 437 eice
συκοφαντίαν. CGeorgillas Const. 47ι να τον ξεριζώσετε. 473 νὰ cace
φωτίσῃ. 492 νὰ τοΝε φάγῃ. 546 νὰ τοΝε νικήσετε. 695 €ice κληρονομιάν των.
931 và cace διορθώσῃ. (ib. 929 even τινὰς γκε σαλεύεται !)
e. PRIMITIVE SEMIVOWELS AND F. (See App. ii. 9 ff. & 14.)
209. Remark. Of these two letters, j never occurs in any Greek
dialect; it has been recently assumed or deduced by philology from
the cognate fields of Indo-European languages, and naturally refers
to primordial Greek only (cp. 11. 29 ff. App. ii. 9 ff. & 14). On the other
hand, F is found in archaic and dialectal Greek (3. 11).—As a matter of
course, neither į nor Ƒ plays any part in the historical period of the
Greek language, so that the following remarks (210-217) refer to
primitive and archaic Greek of which we have no adequate literary
relics in their original or genuine spelling.
210. The semivowels i and F appear to have interchanged with their
cognate vowels, that is with (first silent then voiced, App. ii. 9 ff. &
14), and F with v and B (51. 63), or to have dwindled away when they
happened to stand between two sonants (App. ii. 9). Compare-
βοῦς βοῦν βof-os Bof-u (bovi
vaûs vaû-v vηF-os (navis) vnF- (navi).
211. The semivowel, when preceded by a palatal, presumably
became oσ or TT (App. ii. 9 ff. & 14).
Thus tho assumed forms *φυλακίω
avowedly became
or
φυλάσσω
φυλάττω
Χταρακτίω
ταράσσω
ταράττω
*ταχ-ίων
θάσσων
θάττων.
212. Sometimes i was apparently blended with a dental into σσ
ΟΙ ΤΤ.
Thus Χπλατ-λω
became πλάσσω
Thus Απαντ-ία
became πᾶσα
Απορυθμίου Αχαριστία
κορύσσω
χαρίεσσα.
213. The combination vri apparently became σ (cp. 202).
*λυθεντία
λυθείσα
Κακοντία
άκουσα.
214. Preceded by δ (and sometimes by γ), * apparently became ζ
(App. ii. 9 ff. & 14).
Thus *ἐλπιδίω
became ἐλπίζω
*εδίομαι
ἕζομαι
Κοιμωγείω
οἰμώζω.
215. After a liquid λ ν ρ, the semivowel x is dropped and the
(rhythmically affected) preceding syllable is compensated either by
inserting into it a (silent), or by doubling the liquid (29 ff. 206.
App. ii. 9 ft. & 14).
Thus *μελανία
become μέλαινα
Αφαν-ίω *μακαρία Χμορία
φαίνω μάχαιρα μοίρα
and *άλ-χος (alius)
become άλλος
Again
become
Αχερ-ίων
Χείρων
but in Aeolic χέρρων
*μαλίον Χαλ-ομαι (salio)
μᾶλλον άλλομαι.
Αφθερ-τω κλίνίω *οικτίρ-ω
φθείρω κλίνω οἰκτίρω
φθέρρω
κλίννω
οικτίρρω.
98
TERMINAL CONSONANTISM.
[216-219º.
216. Initial F was apparently dropped.
Cp. οἶκος
with vicus
οἶνος
ἔργον
vinum (work)
ἐσθής
ἕννυμι
vestis
vestire
217. Intersonantic į and F were apparently dropped.
Thus
became
i
BoFos
βούς
ήδεξος
ἡδέος
*πλευω
πλέω
B. TERMINAL CONSONANTISM.
a. Constituent Final Consonants.
218. A Greek word can close with any sonant, but no other
consonant is admissible at the end of a genuine Greek word, than
σ, v, p—also έ and as combinations of σ. (91. Cp. [Arist.]
Poet. 1458 a 8 eis apwvov ovdèv ovoμa Teλevтa.) Any other final
consonant is simply dropped.
Thus
become
*παιδ
παι
Ασωματ
σώμα
*μελιτ
μέλι
*γαλακτ
γάλα
218 b. So too in P-N (but see 219 f.). Even Biblical nouns (Scripture
names) familiar to the masses, notwithstanding Christian piety, con-
form to this rule, inasmuch as a final consonant other than σ, v, p.
is either dropped, or, more commonly, the word is Grecized by
annexing a familiar ending. Only in cultivated speech is it retained,
though even here its pronunciation appears rather affected. Compare:
Ἰακὼβ Ἰάκωβος. 'Αδάμ "Αδαμος, Ν 'Αδάμης. Ἰωσὴφ Ιώσηπος, Ν Σήφης (134, α).
Γαβριήλ, Ν Γαβρήλης. Μιχαήλ, Ν Μιχαήλος and Μιχάλης. Ελισάβετ, Ν
Ε]λισάβη and 'Αλισάβη and ᾿Αλισάβα. Βαρούχ Βαρούχας. Cp. App. vi. 25 [1].)
218. The two particles and our are only apparent exceptions,
inasmuch as, boing proclitics (97 f.), they generally attach themselves to
the next following word.
N
218 d. Labials, howover, are sometimes allowed at the close of a word,
ospecially in exclamations, as: ἰόφ, ώύπ; cp. φεῦ, βασιλεῦ, γραῦ (where
v=0; 51-53).
219. The above leading rule, 218, which is peculiar to Greek alone,
has been in full force through all stages and periods of the language
in written composition. But in popular speech it began as early as
H to receive further limitations by the successive dropping first of p,
then of also, so that present N speech admits of no other terminal
consonant than o (but see 221), then of v in proclitics followed by
a sonant or кTπ. Only the dialects of the northern Sporades show
a fondness for final v (221), and Tsaconic for final p. [See also 219º.]
For further particulars see App. iii. 11-15.
V
219". On the other hand, owing to fundamental changes in their phonology
(030 f.), northorn (Epirotic, Thossalian, Macedonian, etc.) and Pontic dialects
can closo a word with any consonant, as: yλém' for yλémei (Bλémei) 'ho sees,'
Bpáo ‘evening,’ và xác to do, Đá ’s!thon wilt, và có to cut, tráp for
πουλάρι ' foal, λιοντάρ' ‘lion, μοιάζ” resembles, ἀθρωπ' for ἄνθρωποι, etc.
เ
219º. Conversely, Tsaconic systomatically drops final -s. This is naturally
the caso with South Italian Grook also, owing to Italian influence, as: maijei'
αγαπᾷ for παίζεις ἀγαπᾷς, τεὸ for θεός.
99
H 2
DorM
220-224.]
MOVABLE CONSONANTS.
b. Euphonic (Movable) Consonants v, o, (K).
220. Before a sonant or full stop, certain endings may annex
a final v- -called movable or v éþeλKvσTIKÓV. These endings are——
1. The nominal verbal and adverbial ending -o, as : nâoï, 'A¤ývnoi”,
διδοῦσι, λέγουσι, φησί.
2. The verbal ending -e, as: ἔλεγε”, εἶπε, ἐπαίδευσε”, εἴρηκε".
3. The words εἴκοσι” and παντάπασι.
4. The word éoτí".
5. Sometimes the 3ª person singular of the pluperfect, as: deť”.
221. The preceding remarks do not strictly apply even to 4,
inasmuch as, to judge from the inscriptions, papyri, and earlier MSS,
movable is almost indiscriminately appended to the above endings
(HIMaassen in Lpz. Stud. iv. 1-64), and frequently stands even against
metre (FAllen in Arch. Inst. Amer. iv. p. 158; RWagner 65 f.). In the
course of P-B times, this tendency for annexing euphonic v steadily
increased, and gradually led to the identification in the popular speech
of the intrusive element with the constituent final v, and its conse-
quent extension, especially since G, to almost every verbal ending,
as: ἱστορήθην ὁ ναός, πατρὶς δέ μοι ἦτον, ὅπως ἄλυπος ᾖν-since B even to
nouns, particularly neuters in -μa, as: oróμan, éλnuan. This practice
was very general in M speech and is still surviving in several dialects,
particularly in the insular group of the northern Sporades, Cypros,
Rhodes, Cos, Calymna, etc. up to Icaros and Chios, then Pontos, etc.
(219).-At the same time, when the use of such final had become so
common and indiscriminate, a reaction set in which gradually
affected every final ", whether movable or constituent, and eventually
led to its dropping from all endings, so that it has almost retreated
from N speech except in the few dialects just referred to. For more
details and examples see App. iii. 16-30.
v,
ק
222. A movable or is attached to the adverb ouro [and the preposi-
tion ἐκ], in P also to μέχρι and ἄχρι, which thus become οὕτως, [ἐξ],
Ρ μέχρις, ἄχρις.
223. A movable « appears in the negation où which, when followed
by the spiritus asper, becomes οὐχ (170), as : οὐκ ἀγαθόν, οὐχ ὅσιον.
224. Acconted or emphatic ou (not où) stands before a stop (100), as:
ἐξικνοῦντο γὰρ οὔ, οὔτε ἔβλαπτον οὐδένα (Xen. Λη. 4, 8, 3).
100
PART SECOND.
MORPHOLOGY.
I. ACCIDENCE.
A. THE NOUN.
GENERAL REMARKS.
225. In the Greek noun (and by noun we mean any substan-
tive or adjective) there are conventionally distinguished—
A. Three declensions: First, Second, and Third. (238, 253.)
226. All three declensions are still substantially preserved in N,
but the latter shows a frequent interchange and assimilation among
them (256. 264-8. 338-346).
227. B. Three genders: Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter,
-all still preserved in N.
228. C. Three numbers: Singular, Plural, and Dual.
229. The dual refers to two, as: тà ȧvôрóпw λéуeтоv, 'the (two)
men speak.' Whether it was universally current in pre-Attic
speech is an open question. This much however is certain: that it
was absent from Aeolic and Ionic; that, with the close of the Vth B.C.,
it generally retreats from the A inscriptions; that even A writers make
a limited use of it; and that at the end of the IVth B.C. it had entirely
disappeared from the language (631. 633. 668; cp. 315).
230. The singular and plural are still preserved in N.
231. D. Five cases: Nominative, Vocative (both distin-
guished as casus recti); Accusative, Genitive, Dative (called
casus obliqui, or oblique cases).
232. All the cases are still preserved in Nexcept the dative, which
has been replaced partly by the simple accusative, partly by the
genitive, rarely by a prepositional circumlocution (1242-7. 1348-95.)
[233. Literary N has to a certain extent preserved or revived the
dative, especially in prepositional and adverbial expressions, as: oùv
Θεῷ with God's help, ἐν τούτοις with all that, ἐν ᾧ while, παντὶ
oßéveɩ ' with all one's power,' év or ét' óvóµatɩ “ in the name,' ' in behalf.”
Several of these turns have passed into popular speech. See also 1247.]
ἐν
> >
234. Identical in form are:-(1) The neuter nominative, vocative,
and accusative in all three numbers; (2) the plural nominative and
vocative of masculines and feminines; (3) the dual nominative,
vocative, and accusative of all genders; so too the dual genitive
and dative.
101
235-245.] DECLENSIONS
GENDER OF NOUNS.
235. E. One definite article with three distinct forms for the
three genders: ô, τó, ý, ‘the' (ô masculine, rò neuter, feminine).
235 b. The article still survives in N (251 f.).
236. Originally the article was a demonstrative (558 f. 1195-8), liko the
English the, the German der, die, das, and the Romanic il, le, lo, &c.
237. The function of the indefinite article, as represented in English
by a or an, was commonly performed in 4 Greek by the mere absence
of any article (624), and this usage is, on the whole, still the one pre-
vailing in N. In many cases, however, its place in A was taken by the
indefinite pronoun ris (595). On the other hand P Greek introduced,
besides TIS,
the numeral els 'one,' which, under certain conditions, has
ever since remained in similar use (594 ff. 622 ff. 1206. 1448 ff.).
:
238. F. Modern grammarians-since the XVIIth (239)—
further distinguish three Declensions: First for nouns ending
in -a or -H; Second for nouns ending in -o; and Third for nouns
ending in a consonant, also - or -u (253).
239. Ancient grammarians distinguished no less than ten declen-
sions. Some also treated each gender separately, and laid down
thirty-five rules for masculines, twelve for feminines, and nine for
neuters. Our present system of distinguishing three declensions
has been adopted since the XVIIth, chiefly through the grammar of
Jac.Weller[us], issued first in 1634 (cp. KEASchmidt 283).
240. The gender is determined in Greek partly by the sense,
partly by the ending of the nominative singular. According
to the sense
241. Masculine are words denoting males; also names of
winds, rivers, months.
242. Feminine are words designating females and trees, both
conceived as fruit-bearing beings; also most names of countries,
islands, and towns; then abstract nouns denoting a quality, state,
or action.
243. Neuter are the names of fruits, and those of most diminu-
tives; also indeclinable words conceived as nouns.
244. Of common gender are nouns which may be used with
either the masculine or feminine article (ó, y Ocós). Conversely
names of animals usually admitting of only one form of article
for both genders are called epicoene (ἐπίκοινα), as : ὁ ὄνος, ἡ ἄρκτος
'(he or she) ass, bear.'
245. All the above remarks respecting the determination and quali-
tication of gender (241-244) are still substantially applicable to N.
The only signal departure therefrom is that names of trees in
-os, which
in A were feminine, now very often appear as masculines (cp. 292). This
change, however, goes, in many cases, back to P times:-
π-.
ἡ κύμαρος, Ρ ὁ κ-, Ν δ κούμαρος, ἡ πρίνος, P-N & πρ- (evon Ar. Ran.
859). ἡ δρύς, - Ν δ δρυς (or N ὁ δρῆς, 343). ἡ βάτος, P-N δ β-. ἡ πλάτανος,
Ρ - Ν δ πλ. ἡ σφένδαμνος, Ν δ (α)σφένταμος. ἡ κυπάρισσος, Ν δ καὶ ἡ σχίνος,
P-N ὁ σκίνος (ep. Hatzidakis 24). So further ἡ ἐλάτη, Ν δ ἔλατος. ἡ πεύκη,
Ν ὁ πεύκος, τὸ κρίνον, Ν δ κρίνος (ep. 249).
102
GENDER OF NOUNS.
[246-249b.
246. The discrimination of gender by means of the ending of the
nominative singular must be reserved for the respective sections of
the declension (252-666). Here suffice it to state broadly that-
247. Nouns ending in a consonant (-s, -v, -p; 218) are mainly
masculine; nouns ending in a sonant are mainly feminine (261 f.
248); while exceptions from masculines and feminines make
up the
neuter.
248. This broad and general rule assumed, ever since A times, a more
and more definite shape, the popular tendency being to distinguish tho
gender by some external (terminal) criterion. A suggestive basis was
already afforded by the 1st declension which distinguished sigmatic mas-
culines (-as, -ns) from vocalic feminines (-a, -n) [261 f.], and thus offered a
general principle of classification. Once started, the process of this terminal
distinction received additional impetus in the fact that in the 3rd declen-
sion numerous feminines in -is (-is, -vs, -[T]ns), owing to the homophony
of their torminal sonant with the -η of the ist declension (29". 37 f.),
lent themselves casily to assimilation by simply dropping their final -s (ep.
ή πράξις πράξι-πράξη; ἡ ὄψις—ὄψιὄψη, etc. 343), thus -s boing proserved
for masculines only (263. 338. 343). Accordingly in N all masculines end
in -s, all feminines in a sonant (except ἡ γῆς !), whereas neuters may end
in either a sonant or in -s (also in v; cp. 247. 221. App. iii. 12).
249. So far, then, the above process has not matorially affected the gender,
notwithstanding the long history of the Greek language, which would
lead us to expect a radical transformation. The changes effected are, apart
from certain localisms and dialectal peculiarities, neither very considerable
nor very difficult to explain. They are the result mainly of analogy and
association (also dissociation) of meaning. Many of them can, moreover,
be traced back to P times (cp. GHatzidakis 354-73).
249. Compare among others : ἡ αὐγή, P-N τὸ αὖγος (suggested by το φέγγος).
ἡ βάσανος, Β Ν τὸ βάσανον (τὸ κακόν). δ βίος, Ν τὸ βίος (τὸ πλοῦτος). ἡ
βοτάνη, Τ-Ν τὸ βύτανον (τὸ λάχανον, ὁ βουνός, Ν τὸ βουνόν (τὸ ὄρος). δ βυθύς,
Ν τὸ βύθος (τὸ βάθος). ὁ δάκτυλος, Ρ Ν τὸ δάκτυλον. τὸ δεῖπνον, Ρ-Ν ὁ δεῖπνος.
ἡ δρόσος, Ν τὸ δρόσος (τὸ κρύος). ὁ ἔλεος, P-Ν τὸ ἔλεος. ὁ ἔπαινος, Ν τὸ
ἔπαινος (τὸ καύχημα). δ ζῆλος, G-Ν τὸ ζῆλος (as NT, then Clom. R. Cor. 4, 8-13
often. 6, 1 & 2. 9, 1 τὸ εἰς θάνατον ἄγον ζῆλος). Ο θρῆνος, Ν τὸ θρῆνος (τὸ κλαῦμα).
τὸ θύμον, Ρ-Ν δ θύμος (δ κούμαρος, σχίνος, 245). τὸ κάρα, Ρ-Ν ἡ κάρα (ή
κεφαλή). δ κύκκαλος, Ν τὸ κόκκαλου (τὸ ὀστοῦν), ὁ κίνδυνος, Ν τὸ κίνδυνο" (τό
πάθος, τὰ πάθημα), τὸ πῶλον, Β-Ν δ κωλος (δ πρωκτός). ὁ λαός, Ν τὸ λαός
(τὸ πλῆθος). ὁ λειχήν, Ν ἡ λειχῆνα ἡ ψώρα, πιτυρίασις). τὸ λείψανον, N also
δ λείψανος (δ νεκρός). δ μισθός, Ν τὸ μιστό (τὸ ἔλεος, τὸ καλύ"). ὁ μυελός,
Ν τὸ μυαλό (τὸ κρανίον, καύκαλο”). ἡ μύλη, P-Ν ὁ μύλος. τὸ ναῦλον, Ρ-Ν
ὁ ναῦλος. ἡ νίκη, Ρ-Ν τὸ νίκος, ὁ πάγος, Ν τὸ πάγος (τὸ κρύος, τὸ χιόνι)
ὁ παράδεισος, Ν ἡ παράδεισο (ἡ κόλασις). ὁ πήχυς, Ν ἡ πήχη (ἡ πιθαμή, παλάμη)
ὁ πλοῦτος, Ρ-Ν τὸ πλοῦτος. τὸ ρίγος, Ν δ ρίγος (ὁ πυρετός). ὁ σίδηρος, Ρ τὸ
σίδηρον (Ν τὸ σίδερο"). ὁ σπλήν, Ν ἡ σπλήνα (ή καρδία). & σφήξ, Ν ἡ σφήκα
& σφίγγα or rather σφίγγα (ή μέλισσα). δ σφήν, Ν ἡ σφήνα ή σχίζα).
stabulum, T-N & στάβλος (δ ἱππών). δ στέφανος, Ν τὸ στέφανο" (τὸ κουλλοῦρι,
or dissociation from & Στέφανος). ἡ τράφος, Ν ὁ τράφος (δ τοῖχος). ἡ τρύγη,
P-N το τρύγος & δ τρύγος. ὁ φθείρ, Ρ ή φθείρ, Ν ἡ ψείρα ή κονίς or us
fominine of ψύλλος) [. δ χόρτος, Ν τὸ χόρτου [also Sopt. Gen. 1, 29, as v. l.]
(τὸ λάχανον). ἡ ψῆφος, Ν τὸ ψῆφος (το σέβας). ἡ ψύλλα, 1-1 ο ψύλλος
(conceived as tho malo of yeîpa) [2].
δ
[4] Phryn. 277 τὴν φθεῖρα λέγουσί τινες καὶ τὴν κόριν· σὺ δὲ ἀρσενικῶς τὸν
κύριν λέγε καὶ τὸν φθεῖρα, ὡς οἱ ἀρχαῖοι. Mooris 357 φθεῖρες αρσενικῶς, Αττικῶς
θηλυκῶς Ελληνικῶς.
[2] Moorig 380 ψύλλα θηλυκῶς 'Αττικῶς ἀρσενικῶς Ἕλληνες.
}
1
103
250-253.]
ARTICLE-DECLENSION.
250. INFLECTION OF THE ARTICLE.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
Masc. Neut. Fem. Masc. Neut. Fem.
M. N. F.
Nom.
8
τό
n
oi
τά
ai
τώ
Acc.
τόν
τήν
τούς
τάς
>>
Gen.
τοῦ
τῆς τῶν
τοῖν
Dat.
Tw
τῇ τοῖς
ταῖς
251. The interjection &, 'Oh!' serves as a vocative of the article
for all genders and numbers. However, besides this &, G-N speech,
particularly since T, often uses aï (written also ë), an ejaculation now
very general in N, as: Apophth. 2800 aï at daîpov, tοû тpéxeis ; Leont.
Neap. V. S. 1708 0 è àßßâs µwpós for å åßßâ µwpé. Pachom. Mon. 135 A
ἄλλοι μὲν τὸ ὦ κλητικὸν ἐπίρρημα, ἄλλοι δ' ἀντὶ τούτου τὸ ἔ. (Cp. 136.)
251. Alongside with & we find in A-P compositions sometimes, in G-B
oftener, and in N speech vory frequently, the term (w) µæpè (A µŵpe or µŵpos,
257), used as a mere exclamation in the sense of A&or & ouros, as: Ar.
Nub. 397 kаì nôs ŵ µŵρe où KTλ. Eur. Med. 61 & µŵpos. Xen. Mem. 1, 3, 13.
Pl. Log. 857 D. NT Matt. 5, 22 ὃς δ᾿ ἂν εἴπῃ· Μωρέ, ἔνοχος ἔσται. Εpict.
3, 22, 85 ἐρῶ σοι, μωρέ, ποίαν ἀρχὴν κτλ. So 3, 23, 17.-In N this μωρέ
(fem. uop, but also poopè as an adverb), which stands for výme (hence
τὸ μωρό = νήπιον, βρέφος), is often shortened in Cretan speech to μ'ρέ and
in northern usually to ẞpé, wpé or simple 'pé (136º), as: µœpè ('pè) 'Iávvn
= ὦ Ἰωάννη, μωρή (or β]ρέ) Σοφία = ὦ Σοφία, β]ρὲ σύ=ὦ οὗτος. The same
function is performed in N, ospecially in politer parlanco, by кaλè ‘I say,'
used also as a crystallized adverb (in eastern Crete it is even shortened to
simplo na or κά, 2048 [2]), 25 : καλὲ Μανώλη = ὦ Εμμανουήλ, καλὲ μάνα = ὦ μητερ,
καλέ Χριστιανοί = ὦ Χριστιανοί, καλὲ γειτόνοι=ὦ γείτονες. καλὲ τί λέτε;
'fancy!''indeed!'-Not different from this is the use in (northern) N
speech of auté ! or åmavté ! 'I say!' 'What is your name?' [¹Ì
251º. The article is substantially preserved in N (235). For a few
changes see 559-562. Cp. 1248-1255.
DECLENSION.
GENERAL REMARKS.
252. The various cases of a noun are formed by adding cor-
tain endings or terminations to a fixed part called the stem (or
theme), of which the closing or final sound is called the character.
The stom appears in its genuine and full form by dropping
the ending of the genitive case.
253. The stem character of a Greek noun can be-
a: 1st declension ;
o: 2nd declension ;
a consonant, also 1 or u: 3rd declension.
Cp. GHatzidakis in Byz, Zeit. iv. 412 ff.
104
ACCENT OF NOUNS FIRST DECLENSION.
[253-261.
Accordingly the stem character of the 1st and 2nd declensions
is always a sonant (a, o), while that of the 3rd declension is
mainly a consonant (238).
254. When a sonantic stem is succeeded by a terminal
vowel, it undergoes a phonopathic change (contraction), and
so does not show its genuine character (342). On the other
hand, consonantal stems generally show their true character.
255. The 1st and 2nd declensions retain throughout the same
number of syllables, and are on this account called parisyllabic
(ioooúlaßo); but the 3rd declension generally exhibits an
additional syllable in the oblique cases, and is therefore called
imparisyllabic (περιττοσύλλαβος).
256. In N the 1st and 3rd declensions have been, to a large extent,
fused into a single declension, the singular of which substantially
corresponds to the singular of the ancient 1st declension, and the
plural to the plural of the ancient 3rd declension (226. 338–346).
Principal Rules of Accent.
6
257. The accent remains in its place, as shown in the
nominative, unless the constitution or quantity' of the final
syllable calls for a change, as: μέλισσα, μέλισσαν, μέλισσαι
ἄγγελος, ἄγγελον, ἄγγελοι—but μελίσσης, ἀγγέλου, ἀγγέλων.
257b. Generally, however, in exclamations (and interjections), it lies
in the nature of language to stress the first syllablo uttered and reduce
the end. Honce the vocative also, as the case of exclamation, has the
tendency to throw the accent as far back as trisyllabotony admits (81.
429), 29 : (ω) γύναι, πάτερ, θύγατερ, ἄνερ, δέσποτα, Δήμητερ, σῶτερ, Δημόσθενες,
Σώκρατες, "Απολλον, ᾿Αγάμεμνον, Πόσειδον, εὔδαιμον (353), so too μωρε, άδελφε,
πόνηρε, μύχθηρε, άληθες. Cp. πάππα, ἄττα, τέττα.
258. The above remarks partially hold for N also, but in the
majority of cases the accent generally conforms not to the 'quanti-
tative' but to the qualitative changes of the endings. Thus, whenever
the terminal sonant of the nominative singular is retained throughout,
the accent also remains in its place (cp. 311); whereas a metaphonic
change in the terminal sonant often draws the accent from the ante-
penult to the penult, as : ἡ μέλισσα, τῆς μέλισσας ; ὁ ἄγγελος, τὸν ἄγγελο
—but τοῦ ἀγγέλου, οἱ ἀγγέλοι, τῶν ἀγγέλω" (so even in Prodr. δκάποιας
γειτόνισσας, δεύτερην, σκουμπροπαλαμυδόπαστου).
259. Genitive and dative endings, if 'long' and accented,
have the circumflex. This applies also to N.
260. Nominative, vocative, and accusative endings, if ac-
cented, have always the acute.-So still in N.
FIRST DECLENSION (A-DECLENSION).
261. The first doclension comprehends only-
Feminines ending in -a, -ŋ;—and
Masculines
-as, -ns,
105
262-267.]
HISTORY OF FIRST DECLENSION.
262.
Sing.
N.
-n
Endings of the First Declension.
FEMININE.
-α
MASCULINE.
της
-us
V.
-n
-a
""
""
A.
την
-av
την
-av
G.
της
-as, °-ns
του
-ου
°D.
-n
-α, -n
-n
-a
"Dual N. V. A.
G. D.
-a
- αιν
Plur. N. V.
A.
G.
°D.
-al
-ās
-ων
-als
263. Generally speaking, in masculines terminal -s is the
sign of the nominative singular; in feminines, it is the sign of
the genitive singular (cp. 247. 276. 339).
HISTORICAL REMARKS.
264. Greek declension began to manifest, as early as A times, a tend-
ency towards simplification and uniformity in its terminal vocalism.
a. P-N Singular.
265. Thus, if we look at the singular of the above endings (262), we
find that the prevailing vowels a and н have attracted and eventually
assimilated those of their co-ordinate cases which had an hetero-
phonous sonant. Accordingly the consonantal masculine vocative -a,
the genitive feminine -ns, and the masculine genitive °-ou, have been
assimilated to the uniform vowel of their other co-ordinate cases,
and so become -n, -as, and -n respectively, after the model ǹ píça, &
ῥίζα, τὴν ρίζαν, τῆς ῥίζας, (τῇ ρίζα)—ὁ ναύτης, ὦ ναύτη, τὸν ναύτην, τοῦ ναύτη,
(T vaÚT). This phenomenon signalized itself as early as A, but owing
to the Atticistic and scholastic spirit of all P-B scribes (011), the
assimilation of all terminal sonants appears fully established only
in M-N speech (277-284).
266. The simplicity and regularity thus obtained of the 1st declen-
sion rendered it peculiarly appropriate to attract and assimilate other
classes of nouns, especially those of the 3rd declension (338 f.).
b. P-N Plural.
J
267. In the plural a more striking and fundamental change has
taken place. Besides the presence of an identical genitive plural -ov
in all declensions, the 1st and 3rd declensions generally had in the
accusative-the most familiar of all cases the common ending -as.
This coincidence then associated them with each other, and led,
us early as P, to a confusion between them. Such an interchange
was inoreover to be expected since, with the retreat of the dative
(1348-51), there remained only one varying case, the nominative, which
ended in -a (for the 1st decl.) or -es (for the 3rd decl.). Now the homo-
phony of a and both sounded like e (48 ff.)- was in itself suggestive,
and the question at issue was which of the two forms should prevail over
the other. It was naturally -es, since this ending was far commoner,
106
FIRST DECLENSION-FEMININES.
[267-272.
τες met
and therefore more familiar. It had also the advantage of a sibilant
close (-s), a sound very popular owing to its presence in most of the
other plural cases (-as, -õus, -ois, -aɩs). (Cp. 69 [1].) Accordingly
with general acceptance, and gradually supplanted -at. (Cp. Pallad.
Vita Chrys. 33 C γεννάδες for γεννάδαι. Mal. 170, 3 Αινειάδες. 331, 7 Πέρσες.
Apoc. Mar. 120, 32 οἱ μαργαρίτες. Leo Gram. 78, 14 Σκύθες, as v. 1.
Attal. 254, 15 ιππότες). But as already explained, this process of level-
ling became manifest as early as P times and appears complete in
B-M popular speech (see 332 ff.). For the accusative plural see 332.
267". Considering that the resultant common ending -es (-es) is greatly
due to the homophony of al and e (χῆραι χείρες), the nominative spelling
ῥίζαις, τιμαίς, ἡμέραις, ναύταις, πολίταις, etc., now commonly followed by
Greeks, is not altogether unjustifiable, since it may be argued that a in
this case has boon not changed, but retained and amplified to -as by
borrowing final -s from the 3rd declension.
268. I. FEMININES OF FIRST DECLENSION.
'house'
Sing. N. V.
oiki-ā
n'root'
ῥίζ-α
<
'honour'
τιμή
'bee'
μέλισσα
A.
οἰκί-αν
ρίζ-ἂν
τιμήν
μέλισσἂν
G.
οἰκίας
ρίζης
τιμής
μελίσσης
D.
οἰκίᾳ
ῥίζη
τιμ-ῇ
μελίσση
Dual N. V. Α. οἰκία
ῥίζα
τιμ-ά
μελίσσα
G. D. οἰκί-αιν
ῥίζ-αιν
τιμ-αῖν
μελίσσαιν
ΡΙ.
N. V.
οἰκί-αι
ρίζ-αι
τιμ-αί
μέλισσαι
A.
οἰκίας
ῥίζας
τιμ-άς
μελίσσας
G. οἰκι-ων
ῥιζ-ῶν
τιμῶν
μελισσών
D. οἰκίαις
ῥίζαις
τιμ-αῖς μελίσσαις
269. In declining a noun of the 1st declension observe that—
1. The vocative and accusative singular agree in accent and
quantity. So too in N.
2. The ending -as counts 'long' throughout;
-α
19
in the dual
-ὢν has the circumflex. So too in Ν.
3. The ending -η remains unchanged throughout the singular.
-So still in N.
4. The ending -a, when preceded by a sonant or p (in which
case the -a is called pure), remains unchanged throughout the
singular (ep. 65); but when preceded by an ordinary consonant
(a impure), it counts 'short' and changes to n in the genitive
and dative singular.
270. In popular speech, over since the +Ist, both -a (whether pure or
impure) and the accent are retained unchanged through all the cases of
the singular (277).
271. Agrocably to 155 b-c, in N nearly all paroxytone fomininos in -ia
and -er (-ία, -εία, -έα, αία) have become oxytono, as : (παρδία) καρδιά,
ἀδικιά, κακιά, φιλιά, (θεία) θειά, (μηλέα) μηλά (or -ιά), συκεά (or -ιά), δουλειά,
αντρειά, (γλυκεία) γλυκειά. Νοvortholess the paroxytone form is also fairly
common in the dialects montioned in 155 d, especially in Ionian speech
(which is moreover influenced by Italian mia and -ca), as : καρδία, μηλέα.
272. N fominines in -cá (chiolly namos of trees) appear also under tho
form -. This is due to the circumstance that with the establishment of
107
272-277.]
FIRST DECLENSION MASCULINES.
-es in the plural as the normal ending of the ist and 3rd declensions (267),
the presence of another (thematic) e before the ending gave rise to
hyphaeresis (-ées) -és (148. 157), and this accented plural now called forth
a novel nominative singular in -é, on the following pattern:
ἡ μηλέα pl. μηλέ-ες
συκέα
πετρέα
συκέτες
μηλές
συκές
""
πετρέσες
πετρές
ἐλαία
ἐλαίες
""
new nom. sing. ἡ μηλέ
συκέ
>>
11
>>
""
πετρέ
ἐλαί οι ἐλέ.
ἐλαῖς (or ἐλέ-s).
273. A further consequence of this process was that feminines in -ea
affected masculines in -éas and reduced them to -és, so that some N
dialects (as Crete, Chios, Icaros, etc.) admit of ὁ βασιλές beside βασιλέας,
ὁ ἱερὲς beside ἱερέας, δ βαφές beside βαφέας, etc. (407).
273b. That in popular N the whole plural of the 1st declension follows the
plural of the 3rd declension, has been already explained in 267.
274. Inflection of N Feminines ist Declension.
Sing. N. & V. αἰτία (155,c) καρδιά
A.
G.
°D.
αἰτίαν
αἰτίας
ρίζα
τιμή
μηλέ
καρδιά
καρδιᾶς
δίζαν
τιμήν
μηλές
ῥίζας τιμῆς
μηλές
For the plural see 267, 312, c, & 332 ff.
II. MASCULINES OF FIRST DECLENSION.
275.
'ó young man
Sing. Ν. νεανίας
'ó citizen'
'Skythian'
πολίτης
Σκύθης
Φιλέας
V. νεανί-α
πολιτ-α
Σκύθα
Φιλέα
Α. νεανί-αν
πολίτην
Σκύθην
Φιλέαν
G. νεανί-ου
D. νεανί-α
πολίτου
πολίτ-ῃ
Σκύθου
Φιλέα (sic!)
Σκύθ-η
Φιλέα
Dual N. V. Α. pearl-a
πολίτα
G. D.
νεανί-αιν
πολίτ-αιν
Σκύθα
Σκύθαιν
Ρ1. Ν. V. νεανί-αι
πολίται
Σκύθαι
Α. νεανίας
πολίτας
Σκύθας
G. veam-ὢν
πολιτών
Σκυθῶν
D. νεανίαις
πολίταις
Σκύθαις
276. The declension of masculines essentially agrees with
that of feminines (262), the only deviation being that-
1. The nom. sing. ends in -s.
2. The gen. sing. ends in -ov.
So still in N (263).
(For N seo 265 & 277 f.)
C.
277. In 1 barytone substantivos in as puro (269, 4) occasionally
formed the genitivo also in -a (after tho Doric infection), as: τοῦ
πατραλοία, ορνιθοθήρα, μανδραγόρα, Δαμοκλέα (CIA ii. 968, 30-II B.Ο.),
Ορόντα, Ὕλα, Σύλλα, Σκύπα, Αννίβα, Αγρίππα, ᾿Ακύλα, Νέρβα, Γέτα, Καικίνα,
Γάλβα ('Th Eckinger 129). This form gradually affected all substantives
in -as and soon became a ruling principlo which has ever since re-
mained in full force, as: τοῦ ᾿Αντίπα, Αρέτα, Βαρνάβα, Ματθία, Ἰούδα,
Καϊάφα (all in the NT; great many more examples in Hdn. ii. 648-
655); τοῦ ᾿Ανδρέα, ᾿Ανανία, Ἰωσία, ᾿Ακρίτα, κοχλία, ταμία, &c. (so in N
τοῦ Νικήτα, Πάπα, τοῦ χαχα, ρήγα, etc.). The popularity of this practico
since II is moreover expressly attested by Herodian, who in the IInd
teaches (ii. 665, ro) that the genitivo ending -a had become common :
ἐπὶ τῶν εἰς -ας βαρυτόνων ἐὰν εὕρωμεν εἰς -α τὴν γενικήν, οἷον τοῦ παπία καὶ
τοῦ κοχλία, Δωρικὴν αὐτὴν λέγομεν, τη κοινή Διαλέκτῳ ΣΥΝΗΘΗ ΓΕΝΟΜΕΝΗΝ
108
FIRST DECLENSION-CONTRACTED.
[277-285.
(with numerous examples in pp. 648-54). Moeris 241 Μειδίου ᾿Αττικῶς,
Μειδία τό τε ἀναλογικὸν καὶ τὸ Ἑλληνικόν.
277. For those in -as or -as see 287-290.
278. The same tendency for equalization soon affected also substantives
in -7s, whose A genitive -ov was assimilated to the -7 of the other endings
(265), as: τοῦ Ἐπιφάνη, Πασικράτη (CIA iii. 3519, 3459, 3464), τοῦ Ἑρμῆ,
Αχιλλείδη, οἰκαίτη (for οἰκέτου CIA iii. 3513, 3 1410 A.D.), ᾿Αγαθοκλή,
Διομήδη, Ιωάννη, Εὐτύχη, "Ατη, Θεαγένη, πρεσβευτή (CIG 5366, 17ο A.D.), (ep.
Theoph. 373, 21 f. τοῦ Δάναπρι, Δάναστρι [ep. 298 & 301]; Theoph. cont. 427,
4 "Αλυ ποταμοῦ)-and this form is now ruling in N speech. (430. App. iii. r5.)
278b. For contracted or perispomena in -7s see 288-290.
279. 3. The vocative singular ends in -a when the nominative
ends in -τηs, as : ὦ πολῖτα. So too the vocative of ethnic nouns
(ro3o) and compounds, as : ὦ Σκύθα, Πέρσα, παιδοτρίβα.
280. Popular speech since H has assimilated the terminal vowel of the
vocative to that of the other cases (265. 432, α).
281. 4. The vocative of δεσπότης master, is ὦ δέσποτα.
282. The form δεσπότης has been preserved through tho church in tho
sense of bishop, while the vocative δέσποτα (title of the clergy) has given
birth to a novel nominative ὁ δέσποτας ‘the Reverend." (Cp. 386.)
283. Masculines of the ist declension in -as are mostly appellatives
and proper names (due partly to Doric influence, 287), as:
ταμίας, κοχλίας, ἀκοντίας, καρχαρίας, εκτομίας, καικίας, κερατίας, ξιφίας, στι
γματίας, (ανα)φαλαντίας, μαστιγίας, ξυρίας, ἐρυθρίας, τραυματίας, φρονηματίας, καυ
χηματίας, χρηματίας, παππίας—Αγαθίας, Αθηναγόρας, Αμύντας, Αρχίας, Βρασίδας,
Γλαυκίας, Γοργίας, Επαμεινώνδας, Ερμείας, Ἡρέας, Κλεινίας, Λεωνίδας, Μαρσύας,
Παυσανίας, Πελοπίδας, Πυθαγόρας, Φειδίας, Φιλέας-Μενέλας, Ιόλας, Νικόλας, etc.
283¹. Those in -ns are very numerous, especially appellatives in
της, as :
Αἰσχίνης, Αλκιβιάδης, ᾿Αριστείδης, Ηρακλείδης, Πέρσης, "Αιδης-γεωμέτρης,
παιδοτρίβης, πολίτης, τεχνίτης, κλέπτης, στρατιώτης, ναύτης, προδότης, ἐργάτης,
ὑπηρέτης-ποιητής, αθλητής, κριτής, δικαστής, θεατής, ευρετής, μαθητής, λῃστής,
δεσπότης, etc. etc.
283°. Since ▲ common speech has added considerably to the number
of proper names in -as and -ŋs, and made either class very popular, as :
Αρέτας, Βαρνάβας, Ζαχαρίας, Ματθίας (Ματταθίας), Ηλίας, Τωβίας, Ἰούδας,
Σκόπας, Τιμέας, Ιωσίας, Ουρίας, ᾿Ανανίας, Γάλβας, Ηγησίας, Ἱερεμίας, Ανδρέας,
Κίλας, Λυσανίας, Μαντίας, Ματρέας, Ονάτας, Πάλλας, Χαβρίας, Μεσσάλας-Ἰωάν-
νης.—Ν Γεώργης, Βασίλης, Αναστάσης, etc. (Cp. 301.)
284. Inflection of N Masculines 1st Declension.
Sing. Ν. 'Ανανίας, Νικόλας, μάγερας, πατριάρχης, κριτής, ναύτης
V. Ανανία, Νικόλα, μάγερα, πατριάρχη, κριτή, ναύτη
Λ. Ανανία", Νικόλα, μάγερα", πατριάρχη", κριτή", ναύτη
>
(. Ανανία, Νικόλα, μάγερα (& -έρου, 296) πατριάρχη, κριτῆ, ναύτη.
284. For the plural see 267 & 332 f.
CONTRACTED IST DECLENSION.
285. Some stems ending in -áa and -éa contract -áa to -â,
and -éa to -î (but -péa to -pâ 269, 4. 441), and drop a ore before
a 'long' sonant (but see App. ii. 14). All resulting contractions
technically and conventionally receive the circumflex. (76b. 77.)
109
285-288.]
FIRST DECLENSION-CONTRACTED.
ἡ μνάα ‘mina, ἡ συκέα ‘Gig-tree, δ βορρέας north wind, δ Ερμίας
'Hermes.'
Sing. N. μνα
V.
συκῆ
βορράς
Ἑρμῆς
βορρά
Ερμή
""
""
Α. μνᾶν
συκήν
βορράν
Ερμην
G. μνᾶς
συκής
βορρά
Ἑρμοῦ
D.
μνᾷ
συκῇ
βορρά
Ἑρμῇ
Pl. N. & V. μναῖ
συκαλ
Ερμαϊ 'images of H.
Α. μνᾶς
συκᾶς
Ερμᾶς
G. μνῶν
συκῶν
Ερμῶν
D. μναῖς
συκαῖς
Ερμαῖς.
286. As expected, popular speech, ever since A, being unconscious
of the nature of contraction (156), treats contracted forms like
ordinary cases. Nevertheless historical orthography requires us
to follow the ancient accentuation in forms common to A and N,
as: (ή, ω) φακή, (ή, ω) γῆ; τὴν φακή", τὴν γῆ”; τῆς φακῆς, τῆς γῆς; ὁ
βορεας (from βορέας, not from βορρᾶς, 155, c. 407) του βορεᾶ”, τοῦ
βορεᾶ. So too ἁπλῆ, διπλῆ [1]
287. In the number of contracted masculines in -âs consisted in a few
examples traceable, as it appears, back to Doric influence (277. 283). Thoy
were mostly shortened proper names (petnames and nicknames), or
appellativos designating a character or occupation, as: Znvâs (for Zŋvó-
δωρος), Μητρᾶς (Μητρόδωρος), Μηνᾶς (Μηνόδωρος), (κατα)φαγάς ' glutton, φακᾶς,
τρεσᾶς coward, χεσᾶς cacator (ep. πελεκᾶς, ἀλλᾶς, διξᾶς, τριᾶς, τετρᾶς, ἐξᾶς
-6. άντος). Gradually, however, this class of substantives, owing to their
shortness and vigour, met with great popularity, which they have ever since
maintained in common speech. Thus P Θεοδᾶς (for Θεόδωρος), 'Αμυνας ('Αμύ
νανδρος), 'Αλεξάς ('Αλέξανδρος), Αρτεμᾶς ('Αρτεμίδωρος), Νικομᾶς (Νικόμαχος),
Λεωνᾶς (Λεωνίδας), Δημᾶς (Δημήτριος), Επαφρᾶς (Επαφρόδιτος), Ερμᾶς (Ερμό-
δωρος), Ονησᾶς (Ονήσιμος), Νυμφᾶς (Νυμφόδωρος), Ολυμπᾶς (Ολυμπιόδωρος),
Παρμενᾶς (Παρμενίδης), Φωκᾶς (Φωκίων) ;- further GB Λουκᾶς, Κηφᾶς, Κλωπᾶς,
Στεφανᾶς, Σακκάς, Σκευᾶς, Γονατᾶς (compare CIA iii. 122, 10-13 Σωτᾶς,
Διονύσιος, Ζώσιμος, Συνφᾶς, Φοίβος, Αττικός, Ζωσιμᾶς, Σώτης), Χρυσᾶς τοῦ
Χρυσά Gr. Urk. Berlin 6, rr f.-+158-9) ; Σαμβᾶς Χρυσᾶ τοῦ Σαμβᾶ (ib. 24),
Ηρακλᾶς (ib. 21, 5—340 Λ.D.), etc. etc.—ὑψᾶς (for ὑψαγόρας), κορυζᾶς, πελλᾶς,
χηλᾶς, σαννᾶς, τηθηλᾶς, ὀστρακᾶς, δακνᾶς, λαχανᾶς, πινακᾶς, σχοινᾶς, μαχαιρᾶς,
προβατᾶς, σαλιβαρᾶς, λαρυγγᾶς, κερατᾶς, ἐλαδᾶς, κρασᾶς, βελονᾶς, κτενᾶς,
ἀσβεστᾶς, ἀββᾶς, πεταλᾶς, ψιλάς, θαλᾶς, κορβανάς, μαμμωνας, etc., etc. (for
great many moro specimens seo Hdn. i. 648-668). - Ν παπᾶς, χειλᾶς,
γλωσσᾶς, κεφαλάς, ψωμᾶς, κλειδᾶς, ἀμπελᾶς, μεταξᾶς, κοσκινᾶς, σιταρᾶς, κολο-
κυθᾶς, κρομμυδάς, καλαμαρᾶς, ζευγάς, etc. etc. (cp. Theoph. Cont. 198, 17
Kpaσâs. 656, 22 Kepaλâs. Codr. i. 472, 24 Tpaxnλâs. ii. 607, 3 Mixanλâs—
nicknames.) (Cp. 1043.)
287. All those P-N formations, though not actually contracted, but
merely abbreviated, are treated as contractod nouns, that is, they are cir-
The same
cumflected after the analogy of 1 (κατα) φαγᾶς, βορρᾶς, etc.
holds true also for the P N proper names and appellativos in -s, which
may be traced back to Ionic influence, as: Δρῆς, Τρῆς, Μωϋσῆς, Μανασσῆς,
Ἰωσῆς, Ψιλῆς, Ἰαμβῆς Ν Στεφανής, Κωστής from Κω[ν]σταντῆς (=Κων-
σταντίνος), Διονῆς (= Διονύσης), Μαρῆς (= Μαρίνος οι Μάριος), Νικολῆς (= Νικό-
λαος), etc. For the spolling Κωσταντίς, Διονύς, Μαρίς, etc., seo 298 & 301.
288. Since G times also circumflected shortened names (mostly
petnames or nicknames and appellatives) in -âs and -ñs (-îs, -ûs; 343)
are occasionally inflected after the imparisyllabic or 3rd declension, as:
[1] Tho accentuation χρυσή (as Mart, Petri r, beside χρυσῇ τραπέζη) is both
irrational and inconsistent,
110
FIRST DECLENSION IN N-2ND DECLENSION. [288-292.
C.
τοῦ Βοιβάδος, Βιττάδος, Κυρᾶδος (Hrdn. i. 51; ii. 657); τοῦ ᾿Αππᾶ &
᾿Αππᾶδος, ᾿Απολλά & ᾿Απολλάδος (CIG 3253), Επαφρα & Επαφρᾶδος, Εἰρηνᾶ
& Εἰρηνάδος, Ζωπα & Ζωπᾶδος, Μηνᾶ & Μηνάδος (CIG 3142 iii. 10), Ζωσᾶ &
Ζωσᾶδος, Διονυτα (CIG 3137) & Διονυτᾶδος (CIG 3242), Ηρᾶ & Ηρᾶδος, Βοττᾶ
& Βοττάδος (GDittenberger 172, 4-III A.D.) (also Βοττᾶτος); τῷ Φιλωνάδι
(CIG 3392); Ζωσᾶδι Arch. Inst. Amer. ii. 11.—τοῦ Ἑρμῆ & Ἑρμῆδος, Διοκλῆ
& Διοκλῆδος, Καλλικλῆ & Καλλικλῆδος (GMeyer" 336; Kühner-Blass i. 136, 3).
289. This imparisyllabic inflection naturally suggested an impari-
syllabic plural in -âdes and -îdes (so far as a plural form was admissible,
as in the case of appellatives 290b), and this imparisyllabic plural
has ever since remained in common use, and even gained a wider
popularity, as :
φαγάδες, παπάδες (ep. παπαδία and παπαδίτζιν found in literature since
500 A.D., as JJcjun. 1909 Β παπαδίτζης), κερατάδες, ἀββάδες, ἀμηρᾶδες, ῥηγάδες,
κεφαλάδες, Νικολήδες, Στεφανῆδες, Περικλήδες, Κωστηδες, etc. (290.)
290. Specimen of popular N rst declension contracted.
ἡ κυρᾶ mistress, ἡ φακή lentils, ὁ βορεᾶς north wind, ὁ φαγάς
glutton, ὁ παπᾶς priest, ὁ Μωϋσῆς ‘Moses, ὁ Κουμῆς ‘Jacob.
,
Singular:
Nom.
Voc.
Accus.
ἡ κυρᾶ
ὦ κυρά
τὴν κυρᾶν
Gen.
τῆς κυρᾶς
ἡ φακῆ
ὦ φακὴ
τὴν φακὴν
τῆς φακῆς
ὁ βορεᾶς
ὦ βορεα
τὸν βορεαν
τοῦ βορεᾶ
ὁ φαγᾶς
ὦ φαγά
το φαγά
τοῦ φαγά
ὁ παπᾶς
ὦ παπα
τὸν παπαν
τοῦ παπα
ὁ Μωϋσῆς
ὦ Μωϋση [1]
τὸν Μωϋσῆν
τοῦ Μωϋσῆ
ὁ Κουμῆς
ὦ Κουμή
τὸν Κουμῆν
τοῦ Κουμῆ
The plural follows the 3rd doclension (267. 332 fr.):
οἱ ({[2]) κυράδες
ὦ κυράδες
τὰς (τὲς, τὴς) κυράδες
τῶν κυράδων
οἱ Βορεάδες
ὦ βορεάδες
τοὺς βορεᾶδες
τῶν βορεάδων
οἱ φαγάδες
ὦ φαγάδες
τοὺς φαγάδες
τῶν φαγάδων
290. Compare among others: Theoph. 445, 30 (ἀββᾶς) ἀββάδων. 451, 24
ἀμηρᾶδες. 451, 23 ἀμηρᾶδας. 445, 30 ἀββάδων (αρ. 405, 30 ἐν ἄλλαις ὀκτὼ ἥμισυ
μυριάδες as v. 1.). Conc. Const. iv. 869 ο βελονάδες (ep. 908 ο ἀββάδιον). Porph.
Cer. 674, 13 ἀββάδας. Theoph. Cont. 145, 19 καρτζιμάδων. 438, 15 & 439, 1 & 6
ἀτυπάδων. FTrinch. 171 (†1141) ἐξουσιαστάδες. 441 (+268) & 451 Κρεββατάδων.
458 Μανδηλάδων. 480 Φλογειάδων. Chron. Mor. Prol. 1049 τοὺς καταπατητᾶδες.
and so on ever since: χορευτάδες, διαλαλητάδες, ῥαφτάδες, δεσποτάδες, μαθητάδες,
otc. (cp. 289. GHatzidakis 385).
SECOND DECLENSION (O-DECLENSION).
I SUBSTANTIVES.
291. The 2nd declension comprehends all nouns of which
the nominative ends in -os or -ov. Those in -os are mostly
masculine, rarely feminine; those in -ov are all ncuter.
292. This rule on the whole still applies to N. However, feminines
in -os, few as they were even in 4, have been further reduced, one
after another having either changed gender (by merely adopting
[1] So even in the Sept. Num. 9, 23.
[2] 500 560.
111
292–296.]
SECOND DECLENSION.
the article 6) or exchanged the ending -η for that of -os (245. ep.
310), as:
Α δ (beside ἡ) πρῖνος, ἀσπάλαθος, ὀρίγανος, βάτος, Ρ ὁ σχίνος, πλάτανος,
δοκός, στενωπός, στάμνος, ἄψινθος, υάκινθος ; Β δ πύξος, ψῆφος, βῶλος ; Ν ὁ ἄμμος
(besides ἡ ἄμμο), γερανός, πάπυρος, θόλος, (γ)ὕψος, κέδρος, πηλός, κυπάρισσος
Ρ ἡ ἀσβύλη, χαλκάνθη, Σύρα; Ν ἡ παρθένα, δασκάλα, etc. (ep. A-P ἡ
κάρδοπος & -ύπη, σπάρτος & τη, μίνθος & θη, ἔβεννος & -νη, ψάμμος & μη,
ἄσβολος & -λη, etc. Hatzidakis 245 f.).
292. As a consequence, N now preserves only a few feminines in -os,
and that subject to rules 247, 263 and 338, as: ἡ ἄμμο, δρύσο, Κόρθο
Κόρινθος), Κύπρο, Τήνο, Μῆλο, Νιό ("Ιός), Πάτινο (Πάτμος), Χιό, Ρόδο, Κάσο, Θάσο.
(Cp. Chron. Mor. 127 τῆς Κόρινθος. 247 τῆς Πελοπόννησος.)-See also 414.
292. Nevertheless the ancient feminine form -os soems to linger still
in some isolated idioms, as: (Icaros ἡ ἄβατος, άμμος, Χίος, Ρόδος, Σάμος,
νεόνυφος.
เ
293. As regards quantity,' the neuter ending -a always
counts short, and this still holds good in N, as far as regards
accentuation.
'word'
¿ 'people'
δ'man
Sing. Ν. λόγος
δῆμος
ἄνθρωπος
Td 'gift'
δῶρον
V. λόγε
δῆμε
ἄνθρωπε
""
Α. λόγον
δήμου
ἄνθρωπον
""
G. λόγου
δήμου
ἀνθρώπου
δώρου
D. λόγῳ
δήμῳ
ἀνθρώπῳ
δώρω
Dual N. V. A. λόγω
δήμω
ἀνθρώπω
δώρω
G. D. λόγοιν
δήμοιν
ἀνθρώποιν
δώροιν
Plural N. V. λόγοι
δήμοι
ἄνθρωποι
δώρα
Α. λόγους
δήμους
ἀνθρώπους
29
G. λόγων
δήμων
ἀνθρώπων
δώρων
D. λόγοις
δήμοις
ἀνθρώποις
δώροις
Ο
294. The 2nd declension, as illustrated in the above examples,
still survives in N, the only deviations from A being that: (a) proper
names in -os sometimes preserve the o in the vocative, as : (ὦ) Νίκο,
Πέτρο, Γεώργο (from ὁ Γεώργος); (b) owing to the influence of the
accusative and genitive plural (cp. 379), the nom. and voc. plural of
proparoxytone substantives accent the penult, and this accentuation
is regular even in South Italian Greek, as:
Ν. & V. Pl. ἀγγέλοι after ἀγγέλους, ἀγγέλων (ep. ἀγγέλου)
27
""
πολέμοι
ἀθρωποι
""
πολέμους, πολέμων (ep. πολέμου)
""
μαγέροι
ἀποστόλοι,,
""
ἀθρώπους, ἀθρώπων (cp. ἀθρώπου)
μαγέρους, μαγέρων (ep. μαγείρου).
ἀποστόλους, ἀποστόλων (ep. ἀποστόλου).
295. The accentuation ἀθρώποι, ndvocated by some recent scholars, is
untonable, since the question at issue is not about the 'nature,' but about tho
place of accont.
296. The plural of the 2nd declongion, takon in conjunction with tho
genitivo singular, has attracted, since M times, a number of polysyllabic
masculines in -as, which in A were inflected after the 3rd declension.
Their accentuation naturally follows the above rulo (294. cp. 346), as :
οἱ κοράκοι, ἀρχόντοι, γερόντοι, μαρτύροι, δαιμόνοι,—τοῦ κοράκου, ἀρχόντου,
γερόντου, μαρτύρου, δαιμόνου, —τοῦ ἀλεκτόρου (CLeomans ii. 33 [+1II-1941),
nom. sing. ὁ κόρακας, ἄρχοντας, γέροντας, μάρτυρας, δαίμονας, ἀλέκτορας
(339. 346).
112
SECOND DECLENSION.
[296b-301.
296. Conversely, the popularity of masculino substantives in -as (339)
and the need of discrimination between substantives and adjectives in -os
has recently led to the change of many proparoxytone masculines in
-os to those in -as, as : μάγερας (for μάγειρος), έμπορας, κάβουρας (κάβειρος
crab '), ἔγγονας, κάπελας (κάπηλος)- with pl. μαγέροι, ἐμπόροι, καβούροι (296).
297. A couple of neuters form, besides the regular plural, an impari-
syllabic plural after the 3rd declension : ὄνειρον dream, pl. ὄνειρα & ὀνεί
ρατα ; πρόσωπον ' face, pl. πρόσωπα & προσώπατα. This classical peculiarity
still survives in N, the above substantives having even received a further
accretion in the B-N word dλoyov 'horse,' and several neuters in -os (424):
pl, ἄλογα & αλόγατα, κέρδητα (beside κέρδη), βάρητα (beside βάρη), etc.
298. Just as the masculine ending -as of the ist declension has called
into existence a multitude of shortened names, both propor and appella-
tive (287 ff.), so too the masculine ending -ns has given birth to many
corresponding shortened names. Thus ναύτης, πατριάρχης, σχολάρχης, etc.,
Αριστείδης, Αλκιβιάδης, Σωκράτης, Ιωάννης, Αρσάκης—"Αρης, "Αιδης, Διομήδης,
Πολυδεύκης, Διογένης, Δημοσθένης, Αριστοφάνης, Αριστοτέλης, and all the rest
ending in -γένης, -μένης, -σθένης, - κράτης, -μήδης, etc., which had already been
identified with the 1st declension (432), attracted proper names in -ios and
shortened them to -is, that is to the familiar ending -ns of the 1st declension.
This has been particularly the case with proparoxytones in 40s (LELOS)
which, being polysyllabic and cumbrous, easily lent themselves to abbrevia-
tion (1040). Accordingly 'Αποδήμιος became first 'Αποδημιs, then 'Λποδήμης
(CIG 9572) ; Λύκιος Λύκις Λύκης ; Σωτήριος Σωτῆρις Σωτήρης; Εὐτύχιος Εὐτύχις
Εὐτύχης; Δημήτριος Δημήτρις Δημήτρης; Αντώνιος ᾿Αντώνις ᾿Αντώνης; Πορ-
φύριος Πορφύρις Πορφύρης; Διονύσιος, Διονύσις, Διονύσης; Βασίλειος Βασίλεις
Βασίλης. So further ᾿Απολλωνις, 'Αρτέμις, ᾿Αφροδίσις, Βάκχις, Γάϊς, Κούρτις,
Λούκις, Λουκρῆτις, Μῆνις, Ολύμπις, Παρθένις, etc. (ull in CIA iii, index);
Φαρνάκης, Εὐσέβης ib., Αὐρῆλις Βιτάλης (CIG 5700); Σειμάκης, Κουρτίκης ;
Σταυράκιος Σταυράκις Σταυράκης, etc. etc. So also proparoxytone appellatives
in Los [paroxytones in los having become oxytone -ός 155, c], as : κύριος κύρις
(and since T) κύρης (thon as proelitic title Mr. reduced to indeclinable
κῦρ); περδικάριος περδικάρις περδικάρης ; ᾿Απρίλιος Απρίλις 'Απρίλης; Μάρτιος
Μάρτις Μάρτης ; Μάϊος, Μάϊς, Μάης,—and the T-B nicknamos κοντοχέρης,
χρυσοχέρης, κοντογένης, κοντομύτης, πλατυπόδης, λειχούδης, στραβομύτης, etc.
(ΔΜαυροφρύδης 424). That the whole process may have been initiated by
neuters in -, will be seen in 302 f.
299. Corresponding influences of analogy affected somno P-B proper
namos in -alos, as: ᾿Αθήναιος Αθήναις (Παναθήναιος, Φιλαθήναιος -θήναις), Ειρή
ναιος Ειρήναις, ᾿Αρίσταιος ᾿Αρίσταις, Εστίαιος Ἑστίαις, Ηραιος Ηραις, Λείναιος οι
Λήναιος έναις, Μούσαιος Μούσαις. However, a nominative ending -es (-es, -αις)
boing abnormal and alien to Grook declension never became popular.
[This circumstanco, by the way, is an additional proof that noithor η
was then sounded liko e, nor a liko a-ï, 37 fl. 48 ff.
300. The Nonding - es (us καφές ' coffee, πουτεντές ‘dunce, κύντες 'count
ig foreign and of rocent origin Lin Chron. Mor. ὁ Ντζεφρές, τοῦ Ντζεφρέ
passim. δ Μαφρές 4455, etc.]
301. Instead of Εὐγένης, Διονύσης, Αντώνης, gomo scholarg 11, following tho
provalent spolling of the inscriptions, writo Εὐγένις, Διονύσις, Αντώνις (or -ὢνις),
otc., on tho assumption that tho onding Los has boon roduced to Lis through tho
moro dropping of -o-, a phonomenon without parallel in the Grook language.
Othors soo in thoso shortened forms a Roman influence, and contend that
Εὐγένις, Αυρήλις, 'Αντώνις (30 acconted 304), etc., have boon formod directly after
tho Latin Eugenis, Aurelis, Antonis. But to begin with, it may be evon disputod
whothor theso Latin forms aro not due to rock influence, the more so us
[1] T.
[ EASophocles Clogs. 82 1. & Lox. p. 36 f, ; ΔΜαυροφρύδης 15.
[*] G Hatzidakis 183 & 318.
113
Ι
301-305.1
SECOND DECLENSION.
they first appear not so much in Rome as in Grecce propor, and that at a time
(+) when corresponding names in -is are not current in Latin. Then this would
be the only example of Latin influence on Greek infection [for -aros see 1052],
and afford no explanation whatever of the analogous formation of diminutives
in uv from uov (as Ερῶτιν from 'Ερώτιον, 302). Lastly, even admitting a direct
Roman influence in this case, it is to be remembered that the Latin ending -is
met with popular favour among the Grecks just because it sounded like -7s,
a termination very familiar with them. Whatever may be the contention, popular
feeling idontified the ending is with the -ns of the 1st declension.
Hence
tho current spelling Εὐγένης, Δημήτρης, Βασίλης, which also occurs not only in
B-M compositions, but also in inscriptions, as : άρσηνάλης, Κεριάλης, Μαρτιάλης,
Μερκουριάλης, Προβινκιάλης, Βιτάλης, κουρούλης, ἐκουέστρες, ᾿Αρήνης, &c.
(ThEckingor 49), deservos unqualified preference. Forms like Εὐγένις, Δημήτρις,
Βασίλεις, μαυρογένεις (κοκκινογένεις, etc.)., with a genitive τοῦ Εὐγένι, Δημήτρι,
Βασίλει, μαυρογένει, κοκκινογένει, etc.), besides their oddness, are alien to the
genius of Greek inflection, which since A began to show a constant tendency
towards simplification and uniformity (265-7 & 327), reducing nominal declen-
sion to the simple pattern of substantives in -as, -ης, and -os (cp. Ν λαγός,
προεστός, with genitivo τοῦ λαγοῦ, προεστοῦ- for the A λαγώς, προεστώς, with
genitivo τοῦ λαγώ, προεστῶτος).
302. The convenience afforded by shortened proper names and
appellatives (287 ff. cp. 298), led easily to an analogical shortening also
of their diminutives in -tov (whether feminine or neuter) to -ɩ, as:—
Καλλίστιον Καλλίστιν, Φιλημάτιον Φιλημάτιν, Αρτέμιον ᾿Αρτέμιν, Ερώτιον
Ερῶτιν, Χαρίτιον Χαρίτιν, Χρυσίον Χρυσίν, Ἡδύν—ἡμιωβέλιν (on a coin of Aegion !
146-143 Β.C., Gr. Coins Br. Mus. Pelopon. p. 18), μαρτυριν, στάδιν, ἀρσενίκιν
(p. 1o4o & GBensoler); so too M-N τραπέζι, πόδι, κτένι” οι χτένι (174),
δυάκι”, ποτῆρι”, παιδί”, ἀνώγει” οι ἀνῶγι”, ψυχάρι”, etc. (App. iii. 7.)
303. However, considering that, when the above shortened neuters in
-iv first appeared, terminal - had been identified with movable or analo-
gical v (221), we are warranted in assuming that the formation of this
class of diminutive nouters was first suggested by the presence of corre-
sponding familiar neuters in -ɩ (399f.), such as: μέλι (with ἀπόμελι, ἐλαιό-
μελι, μηλόμελι, ἐμφακόμελι, ὀξύμελι), ἄμμι, σίλλι, σάρι, κίκι, κουκκι, στίμι or
στίμμι, κιννάβαρι, πέπερι, σέσελι, ἄκαρι, τάγυρι, σίναπι (Ν σινάπι), σάκχαρι,
κύρι, etc. (for many more examples see Choer. ed. AHilgard 343-5)-(ep.
also τὸ ἄστυ, νάπυ, μέθυ, μίσυ, κάχρυ, δάκρυ, ἥμισυ, etc. [whero v and are
homophonous, 35 ff.], and тd neî, pî, xî, µû, vô, §î, yû, 9).-See also 298.
304. Somo recent scholars, at the instance of EASophoclos (Lex. p. 35), accent
shortened substantivos, whether proper names or appellatives, just as if they
still exhibited their fail form, us : Σωτήρης (liko Σωτήριος), Αντώνις, Δημήτρις,
κύρις, ταίρι (= ἑταίριον), ξείδι (= οξείδιον), ποτήρι, σκουλήκι, etc. ; but such u
practice is arbitrary and incompatible with the principle of Greek accen-
tuation. Cp. 301 & 347.
305.
Specimen of popular N 2nd declension.
ὁ καιρός ‘weather, time, κῆπος 'garden, άνεμος wind, τὸ σῦκο" fig
χωριό" village, ῥυάκι” “brook, παιδί ‘child, ἀνῶγι” ‘upper room,
μέλι ‘honey.
Sing. Nom.
Voc.
Λες.
Gon.
καιρός
καιρέ
καιρόν
καιροῦ
κήπος
κηπε
κήπου
κήπου
ἄνεμος
άνεμε
ἄνεμον
ἀνέμου
σύκου
σύκου
ῥνάκι”
παιδίν
ἀνῶγι
μέλι
ν
ρυακιού (155, c)
παιδιοῦ
ἀνω γιοῦ
μελιοῦ
>>
>>
114
ADJECTIVES OF IST & 2ND DECLENSION. [306-310.
ADJECTIVES OF IST AND 2ND DECLENSION.
306. The great majority of Greek adjectives end in -os, and
follow the 2nd declension. The feminine gender ends generally
in -η or -a, and so follows the ist declension (441).
2ND DECLENSION.
1ST DECLENSION.
Sing. N.
καλός
καλόν δίκαιος δίκαιον
καλή
δικαία
V.
καλέ
δίκαιε
""
""
A.
καλόν
δίκαιον
καλήν δικαίαν
G.
καλοῦ
δικαίου
καλῆς
δικαίας
D.
καλῷ
δικαίῳ
καλῇ
δικαία
Dual. N. V. A.
καλώ
δικαίω
καλά
δικαία
G.D.
καλοῖν
δικαίοιν
καλαῖν
δικαίαιν
Plural N. V.
καλοί καλά
δίκαιοι δίκαια
καλαί
δίκαιαι !
Α.
καλούς
δικαίους
καλάς
δικαίας
G.
καλῶν
δικαίων
καλῶν
δικαίων
D.
καλοῖς
δικαίοις
καλαῖς δικαίαις
306. The above rule and inflection holds substantially also for N (but
cp. 258 & 311).
307. As regards accent, the nominative and genitive plural
of the feminine follows the masculine gender (contrary to
269, 2), as :
Masc. δίκαιος 'just
Fem. δικαία
99
Nom. Pl. δίκαιοι
δίκαιαι
[not δικαίαι]
Gen. δικαίων
δικαίων
[not δικαιών].
308. A great number of adjectives in -os, chiefly compound.
have a common ending and inflection for both the masculine
and feminine genders (communia), whereas the neuter ends
regularly in -ov.
ἄτεκνος, ἔντιμος
ἥσυχον, ἄτεκνον, ἔντιμον.
M. & F. ȧpyós,
Ν. ἀργόν,
Π
ήμερος,
ήμερον,
ήσυχος,
309. Many of these adjectives, however, occur sometimes with two,
sometimes with three endings, as:
F.
Μ.
βέβαιος secure
ἔρημος ' desert’
χρήσιμος ‘useful’
ἀναίτιος ' guiltless
Ν.
βέβαιον
βέβαιος & βεβαία
ἔρημον
ἔρημος & ἐρήμη
χρήσιμος & χρησίμη
χρήσιμον
ἀναίτιον
ἀναίτιος & αναιτία.
So further: μάταιος ‘vain, ὠφέλιμος ‘useful, βίαιος violent,
ἕτοιμος ‘ready,' ἀναγκαῖος necessary.
310. This terminal fluctuation, noticeable even in A, not only in
adjectives, but also in substantives ending in -os (cp. 245 ff. 292),
assumed, in the course of P times, greater proportions and eventually
led to a complete assimilation of all feminines in -os, whether
adjective or substantive, to those in -η or -a pure (cp. vita SA 40*
ἄσεμναι γυναίκες πόρναι καὶ ἀδιάτροπαι). Hence N now knows adjectives
of three endings only, as : ἄγραφος, ἄγραφο", ἄγραφη 'unwritten, δίκαιος
(δίκιος, 032. 155, α), δίκαιο", δίκαια just.
115
I 2
311-313.]
CONTRACTED 2ND DECLENSION.
311. A further peculiarity of N is that, irrespective of their terminal
'quantity,' all adjectives retain the accent on the same syllable through-
out (cp. 258), as : ἀκούραστος ‘indefatigablo, ἀκούραστου, ἀκούραστης, ἀκού-
ραστοι, ἀκούραστους.
312. N inflection of adjectives, and and ist declension.
καλός, καλόν, καλή ‘good; ἄξιος, ἄξιον, ἄξια “able'; φανερός, φανερό,
φανερή ' evident'; ἄκακος, ἄκακο", ἄκακη innocent.
α. MASOULINES.
Nom.
Voc.
Sing. καλός
καλέ
Λες.
καλόν
Gen.
καλοῦ
ἄξιος
ἄξιε
ἄξιον
άξιου
φανερός
φανερέ
φανερόν
φανεροῦ
ἄκακος
ἄκακε
ἄκακον
ἄκακου
Plur. καλοί
καλούς
καλῶν
ἄξιοι
ἄξιους
ἄξιων
φανεροί
ἄκακοι
φανερούς
ἄκακους
φανερῶν
ἄκακων
b. NEUTERS.
Sing. καλόν
ἄξιον
φανερόν
ἄκακον
καλοῦ
άξιου
φανεροῦ
ἄκακου
καλῶν
ἄξιων
φανερῶν
Plur. καλά
ἄξια
φανερά
akaka
ἄκακων
c. FEMININES.
Sing. καλή
άξια
καλήν
καλῆς
ἄξια
άξιας
φανερή
φανερή
φανερῆς
ἄκακη
ἄκακην
ἄκακης
Plur. After the 3rd doclonsion (267. 332. 357').
καλές
(& -ás)
καλῶν
άξιες
(& -as)
άξιων
φανερές
(& -ás)
φανερών
akakes
(& -as)
ἄκακων
DECLENSION.
CONTRACTED 2nd
313. Stems ending in eo and oo contract to ou throughout,
but drop e or o when a 'long' sonant succeeds (cp. 285 & App.
ii. 9. 14).
ὁ νοῦς ‘mind'; τὸ ὀστοῦν ‘bone'; δ ἡ εὔνους, τὸ εὔνουν favourable.
Sing. Ν. νοῦς
ὀστοῦν
V. νοῦ
εὔνους
εὔνου
εὔνουν
""
""
Α. νοῦν
εὔνουν
19
""
G. νοῦ
ὀστοῦ
εὔνου
D. νῷ
ὀστῷ
εὔνῳ
Pl. N. V. voî
ὀστα
ΕΥΝΟΙ !εὔνους) ΕΥΝΟΣ!
Α. νοῦς
εὔνους
G. νῶν
ὀστῶν
εὔνων
D. νοῖς
ὀστοῖς
εὔνοις
116
CONTRACTED 2ND DECLENSION.
[313b-321.
,
313. So are declined: ὁ ἀδελφιδούς ‘nephew, ὁ θροῦς ‘report,
ὁ ῥοῦς ‘flow, ὁ θυγατριδούς ' grandson, ὁ πλοῦς ' navigation, ὁ περίπλους
circumnavigation, τὸ κανοῦν ‘basket, etc.
>
314. After εὔνους εὔνουν are infected many adjectives, as : δύσνους
ill-affected, κακόνους ‘hostile, ἄνους foolish, κουφόνους “light-
headed,” (πλοος) ἄπλους ‘unnavigable,” σύμπλους sailing together,
εὔρους ‘fairly flowing. So too adjectives compounded with ποὺς
'foot,' inasmuch as they form in -Tovv the N. V. and A. singular
neuter, often also the A. singular masculine and feminine, as: (τὸ)
ἄπουν, βραδύπουν, δίπουν, πολύπουν; τὸν-τὴν δίπουν, τρίπουν, δεκάπουν,
besides τὸν τὴν δίποδα, τρίποδα, δεκάποδα.
315. The dual does not occur even in A (229. 633).
316. The uncontracted forms occur only in Ionic and Aeolic.
817. In adjectives of two endings compounded with πλοῦς,
νοῦς, πνους, θρούς, the contraction is omitted in the N., V. & A.
plural neuter : τὰ ὦ ἄνοα.
318. Simple substantives and adjectives take the circumflex
over the ultima through all the cases, but compounds retain
the accent of the nominative singular throughout.
319. Contracted and, moreover, perispomena throughout are-
I. Adjectives ending in -eos, which denote material or colour, as :
(χρύσεος) χρυσούς, χρυσοῦν, χρυσῆ golden.
(ἀργύρεος) ἀργυροῦς, ἀργυροῦν, ἀργυρα • of silver.
(κυάνεος) κυανούς, κυανοῦν, κυανή dark blue.
2. Multiplicatives ending in -πλοος (Latin -plex), (653, 1), as :
(ἁπλύος) ἁπλοῦς, ἁπλοῦν, ἁπλῆ simple.
(διπλόος) διπλοῦς, διπλοῦν, διπλή ' double.
Sing. Ν. χρυσοῦς
-οῦν
-η
ἀργυρούς
τοῦν
-â
Α. χρυσοῦν
ὴν
ἀργυροῦν
-αν
G. χρυσοῦ
της
ἀργυροῦ
-ᾶς
D. χρυσῷ
-η
ἀργυρῷ
-â
Γ1. Ν. χρυσοί
-α
-αϊ
ἀργυροι
-α
-aî
Α. χρυσοῦς
-ας
ἀργυροῦς
-âs
>>
G. χρυσῶν
ἀργυρῶν
D. χρυσοῖς
-αῖς
ἀργυροῖς
-uis.
led to διπλός, διπλό" ;
χρυσός, χρυσό”.
320. As may be seen, the inflection of nouns of the 2nd declension
(whothor contracted or not) coincides with that of uncontracted adjec-
tives in all the casos except the nominative and accusative singular. This
coincidence could not fail to associate the two classes with each other,
and thus load to the assimilation of the two doviating cases to the
regular forms of the 2nd declension (654). Thus-
καλοῦ, καλῷ-καλοί, καλούς, καλῶν, καλοῖς
διπλοῦ, διπλῷ διπλοῖ, διπλοῦς, διπλῶν, διπλοῖς
χρυσοῦ, χρυσῷ-χρυσοῖ, χρυσοῦς, χρυσῶν, χρυσοῖς
321. Comparo P δορυξέ, διπλύτερος, ἁπλύτερος, χρυσότερος, πορφυρώτερος
(Kühnor-Blass i. 402 & 559).—ἀδελφιδός Sept. Cant. I, 13; 14. 5, 1. 8, 1.
Theoph. 140, 27 (also 159, I; 187, 23; 445, 1). (654.) χρυσός Sophron.
3597 B, a coin. Αργυρός Theoph. Cont. 724, 3. επλος Porph. Cor. 379, 20.
τετράποδον (from τετράποδα) Wossoly Gr, Zaub. p. 118. [Cp. Mooris 26o
ὀστοῦν ᾿Αττικῶς, ὀστέον Ἑλληνικῶς. 336 τριπλᾶ, τετραπλᾶ περισπωμένως καὶ
117
321-328.] 2ND ATTIC DECLENSION-3RD DECLENSION.
μακρῶς, Αττικῶς· βραχέως Ἑλληνικῶς. 365 χαλκοῦς καὶ χαλκή ἀδιαιρέτως
Αττικῶς χάλκεος χαλκέα Ἕλληνες. χρυσοῦς καὶ χρυσῆ Αττικῶς· χρύσεος καὶ
χρυσέα Ελληνες. 376 χαλκήν, χρυσῆν, Αττικῶς· διαλελυμένως δὲ Ἕλληνες.]
322. The only nominative and accusative singular which appears to bo
a genuine survival of A contraction is vous, voûv (with a modern pl. oi
νούδες). The inflection of vous is followed by the rather dialectal ὁ παππούς
(πάππος). Cp. also ὁ Ἰησοῦς.
SECOND ATTIC DECLENSION.
323. The 2nd declension includes a few substantive and
adjective stems in -, generally preceded by e. This o, which
stands for o and ov (6 f. 26 & ib. 6. App. ii. 9 ff.), remains through
all the cases and becomes @ where otherwise o should result.
The vocative is like the nominative (349. 377).
324. As regards accentuation, the terminal o counts short
throughout (327. 393. App. i. 15, b).
325. This inflection is peculiar to A, and has for this reason been
called the (2nd) Attic declension by ancient grammarians, evidently
because they knew it only from A writings (327; cp. Kühner-Blass
i. 403).
ἵλεως, ἵλεων gracious.
ἵλεως (Μ. & Γ.) ἵλεων (Ν.)
""
¿ vews 'temple,'
Sing. N. V. vews
Α. νεών
ἵλεων
G. νεώ
ἵλεω
D. νεφ
ἵλεω
Į
Dual N. V. A. vew
ἵλεω
G. D. νεών
ἵλεων
Plural N. V. ved
ἵλεω
ἵλεα !
Α. νεώς
ἵλεως
G. νεών
ἵλεων
D. νεώς
ἵλεως
326. So are declined: Aews 'people,' ó káλws 'rope,' Mevéλews
'Menelas'; and the adjectives oôs, oav 'whole,' λéws, πλéшv (with
fem. πλέα, Ist decl.) ‘full, ἔκπλεως, ἔκπλεων ‘completed, ἀξιόχρεως,
ἀξιόχρεων ‘worthy of credit'; then compounds in -κερως, - γελως,
-ynpws. Finally ǹ ews 'dawn' with an accusative rηy ew! (412).
<
327. The 2nd Attic declension, if ever used in A parlance (cp. ráλoi
χρυσοί ΟΙΛ ii. 689, 6 [350 B.c.]; also οἱ κάλως as if from οἱ κάλωες, liko οἱ
йpws, 415; atroxpéovs IGB 3073 [IInd B. c.], 27), retreated from the living
language in the course of P' timos, making room for the regular declension
in -os : ναός, λαγός, ὀρφός, κάλος, υπόχρεος, etc. (Cp. 3or).
[Phryn. 162 λαγὼς ὁ ᾿Αττικός, διὰ τοῦ ο ὁ Ἴων λαγός. Moeris 351 φιλόγελῷ
dià od
'Αττικῶς, φιλογέλωτες Ἑλληνικῶς.]
THIRD DECLENSION.
328. The case-endings of the 3rd declension are:
M. & F.
Sing.N. V. -s
A. -a,(-v)
G.
-ος
D.
ར་
N.
M. F. & N.
M. & F.
N.
Dual
-α
Plural
-ES
-OLD
-ŭs, [v]s
-901
-σι
118
HISTORICAL REVIEW OF 3RD DECLENSION. [329-332.
329. Mark that: (1) all endings begin with a vowel, except the
nominative and vocative singular masculine and feminine, then the
dative plural of all three genders.
(2) The neuter has no distinct case-ending in the N. V. A. singular.
HISTORICAL REMARKS.
330. I. In the Singular the accusative ending -a is attached to con-
sonantal stems, and the ending -v to sonantic, sometimes also to conso-
nantal, stems (358). The former then appears to constitute an excep-
tion to the general method of indicating the object case in the singular
by a final -v. This peculiarity, applying as it did to the minority of
nouns, came to be felt as a certain anomaly, since forms like μnva
beside ταμίαν, χείρα beside χήρας, ἀληθῆ beside ἀγαθήν appeared in-
complete and naked, and so called for the finishing -v. The earliest
traces of such assimilation go back to A antiquity itself, and the start
was apparently made by contracted nouns, notably proper names,
ending in -ης, which were associated or rather identified with sub-
stantives of the rst declension. Thus τὸν Σωκράτης, Διογένης, Δημοτ
σθένην, ᾿Αριστοτέλην, etc. occur even in 4 beside τὸν Σωκράτη, Διογένη,
Δημοσθένη, ᾿Αριστοτέλη, etc. Soon hereafter, if not simultaneously,
appellatives followed, as : τριήρην, τετρήρην, beside τριήρη, τετρήρη, and
since 3oo B.c. (if not earlier) proper names in -κλής, as: Μενεκλῆς,
Λυσικλῆς, etc., beside Στρατοκλέα, Διοκλέα, etc. (431 f. App. iii. 3-10).
From the IIIrd B.C. downwards the instances become so frequent as
to warrant the assumption that popular speech closed every accusa-
tive singular with the finishing (App. iii. 5 f.)
330. Compare Sept. σκνίφας, ἀκρίδας, νύκτας, ὑγιῆν, αἶγαν, θώρακας,
χεῖραν, βασιλέας, μονογενῆ, etc. ΝΤ χείρας, 'Αντιοχέων, Δίαν, νύκτας,
ἀσφαλῆν, etc.-Inscriptional: ἄνδρας, γυναῖκαν, θυγατέραν, χεῖραν, ἀνδρειάν-
ταν, ἄρχονταν, πατρίδας, χάριτας, νεύτητας, Οἰδίποδας, &c. and so on down
to M speech.
For more particulars and rofurences see App. iii. 3-6 & 30.
331. Similarly neuters like ἡδύ, γλυκύ, στίμι, μελίτι, etc., associated
as they were with χωρίον, παιδίου, ξύλον, etc. appeared naked and thus
called for the analogical finishing -v, as:
τὸ ἡδύν, γλυκύν, μελίτιν, στίμιν, ἡμιωβέλια, μαρτύριο, στάδιο, 'Αρτέμιο,
Ερῶτιν, Ἑλλάδιο, Ἡδύν, etc.—and 2-Β ῥιζάριν, ὀψάριν, κοντάριν, ἀσῆμιν,
καλαμάρι, etc. etc. So further τὸ θέμαν, Ν χρῆμαν, κρίμαν, ole.
For more details and references see App. iii. 7-10 & 30.
332. II. As to the Plural in P Greck, the two case-endings -es
and as of the nominative and accusative masculine and feminine
show a tendency towards complete equalization, due to their associa-
tion (267). For apart from the identity of these two cases in all
neuters (ξύλα, πράγματα, καλά, ἔχοντα, τά, ἅ, τινά, ἐκεῖνα, etc.), sonantic
stems of the 3rd declension exhibited identical endings in the
masculine and feminine also, the process beginning with contracted
nouns of the stem character - (391. 394) and gradually extending to
the other sonantic stems.
Cp. αἱ-τὰς πόλεις, οἱ τοὺς πήχεις, οἱ τοὺς βασιλεῖς, οἱ τοὺς ἰχθύς, αἱ τὰς ναῦς
(Phryn. 147), ai-Tàs ypaûs, ol-Toùs npws (¹), oi-toùs káλws [KMeisterhans² 101]
-οἱ-αἱ τοὺς τὰς ἀληθεῖς, γλυκεῖς, μείζους, οἱ τοὺς τὰς εὔνους.
[4] Comparo Phryn. 137 οἱ ἥρως οὐ λέγουσιν, ἀλλ᾽ οἱ ἥρωες τρισυλλάβως· ἐπὶ
δὲ τῆς αἰτιατικῆς δισυλλάβως, τοὺς ἥρως ἅπαξ βιασθείς ᾿Αριστοφάνης ὑπὸ τοῦ
μέτρου οἱ ἥρως εἶπε (cp. 327.)
119
332b-335.] STEMS OF 3RD DECLENSION.
332b. With the opening of G, consonantal stems followed the pro-
cess initiated, the start being apparently made by the accusative of
those proparoxytones which lacked stress on the ultima.
τοὺς ἐλάσσονες, συμπολεμήσαντες, συνδιασώσαντες, τοὺς δασμοφύλακες (Achaia
[IIIrd B.o.]), AFick in Bez. Beitr. v. 521; TOÙS λÉYOVTEs Louvre Pap.
315 (153 Β.α.); τοὺς ἐνέγκαντες, φιλοῦντες, ὀβολοὺς τέσσαρες, δραχμὰς
τέσσαρες, ἐννέα ἔχων δεκάδες, Kaibol 134 (Attica); ἔζησε μῆνες θ',
ἡμέρες η' ib. 483. μυριάδες τριακοσίας (III B.c.), τοὺς πάντες (ofton), τοὺς
μήνες (ofton), Μακεδόνες; ἔζησεν μῆνες & ἡμέρες (ofton), δεκατέσσαρες,
(all from inscriptions: RWagner 125; GHatzidakis 139); Spaxµàs réσσapes
Flinders Petrio Koptos p. 27, 28 (†90); taûtes, ärλes, GIB 358 (+I-IInd).
-dipoépes CIA iii. 48, 29. Louvre Pap. 233 TOÙS TάνTES; 322 (Tas)
yuvaîkes; Gr. Urk. Berlin 177 (†47), 4 & 7 ápoúpas réoσapes. 46 (†193), 11
ὄνους τέσσαρες. ib. 62 (+199), η δραχμὰς τέσσαρες. 290 (+150), το δραχμάς
ὀγδοήκοντα τέσσαρες. 301 (+157), το αρούρας τέσσαρες. GIB 134 (HI-II),
43 Ῥωμαῖοι ἄγουσι καλένδαις (for - δες) ἀπριλίας. 33 (+II-III), 18 τοὺς ἐν
οἴκῳ πάντες. 164 (+II-III), τοὺς ἐνοίκους σου πάντες. 238, 4 δραχμὰς ογδοή-
κοντα τέσσαρες. 261 (+II-II), 15 δέδωκες δέκα στατήρες. 268, 2-3 δραχμὰς
τέσσαρες (twice). 322 (+II III), 5 ἡμᾶς ὑγιαίνοντες, ἐπιτετευχότας. 276
(†11-IIIrd), 25 vµâs nártes (twice). GIB p. 106, 674 (†III), ToùS ÈKTEXÉ-
σαντες. (Cp. Mal. 223, 19 тaîs #λánais [road mλánes]; Theoph. 405, 30 raîs
μupiádes as v. 1. Vita SA 18* A taîs dvoìv ¿ßdoµádes.) (Sec also 267 f.)
333. This phenomenon, though totally suppressed in the MSS__of
ancient texts by the classicalist and scholastic spirit of the times, has
no doubt been all along in oporation and progress, seeing that with the
first appearance of popular M compositions (in the XIth), instances
of the nominative for the accusative reappear almost without number
(cp. Prodr. 6, 101). In point of fact, the phenomenon already constitutes
the rule, and every subsequent stage shows a further retreat of the
A ending -as. Nevertheless the process, though it originated in H, has
not yot come to a close, for several N idioms (as Chios, Icaros, etc.) still
preservo the A form -as.-For the nominative plural sce 267.
334. In the 3rd declension, the first point to be considered is
whether the stem ends in a consonant or in a sonant. This
generally shows itself by dropping the genitive ending -os
(252). It then appears that the 3rd declension comprehends-
I. CONSONANTAL stems, that is, stems ending in a consonant,
which may be a—
a. Labial or Guttural (™, ß, þ−x, y, x) ;
b. Dental (T, 8, 0);
c. Liquid (^, v, p).
II. SONANTIC (Vocalic) stems ending in
(α), υ, αν, ου ;-ευ;-ι, ε; υ, ε;
v, av, ov;
·0, w.
III. ELIDED stems, that is, consonantal stems dropping their
final consonant before certain endings.
335. The stem character of the 3rd doclension generally
coalesces with the case-endings, and the resultant form is
determined by the two following phonopathic principles:
1. Only certain compatible consonants can stand together (169).
2. Only a sonant and the semisonants v, p, s can stand at the end
of a Greek word (218).
120
HISTORY OF 3RD DECLENSION.
[336-338.
336. From these two ruling principles it follows that con-
sonantal stems retain their character whenever they annex a so-
nantic ending (σóμaт-os, σúμar-, etc.); but they change it when
it is not compatible with the succeeding terminal consonant,
which here happens to be always σ- (φλέβες, φλέψ ; νύκτας, νυκ-ς,
vúg); and they drop it when it is incompatible with the terminal
-s, or when no ending whatever is annexed (180).
337. Agreeably to these phonopathic principles :
a. Labial and guttural stems produce y and έ, as: (Pλeß+s) pλé¥,
(κορακ + σι) κόραξι (180).
b. Dental stems are dropped, as: (éλπid+s) éλñís, (vpvið + s) öpvıs (180).
c. Liquid stems eject σ and at the same time commonly lengthen by
antectasis the preceding e to 7, and o to ∞ (164. 168.197), as: (Xiμev+s)
λιμήν, (ῥητορ + s) ῥήτωρ. So too stems in -ovr-, as (λεοντ + s, λεον-ς) λέων.
HISTORICAL REMARKS.
I. CONSONANTAL STEMS (App. iii. 12 f.).
338. Since A, consonantal stems show the most far-reaching changes
and greatest losses incurred by Greek declension. With the gradual
dropping of final p, y, έ (219. 221) and the identification of final v
with the accusative case (330), nominative forms, like marijp, xecµwv,
γέρων, κόραξ, αἴξ, φλέψ, βασιλεύς (= vassilefs 407), γραῦς (= γραφς),
became unpronounceable and there remained but three alternatives
open to them: (a) either to make room for synonymous terms, as: Opéap
for nŋɣádı(ov), kúliέ for Toτýpi(ov) etc.; (b) or to adopt the diminutive
πηγάδι (ον), κύλιξ ποτήρι
ending -tom (-ι»), as: ὄνυξ ονύχιον, ἀηδών ἀηδόνιον, θήρ θηρίον, πρίων
πрióviov; (c) or-and this is the commonest case-to adapt themselves
to some other nominative type more convenient and familiar. Such
a popular type was found in the sonantic (1st and 2nd) declensions,
which had adopted -s for all masculines (263), and a sonant (particu-
larly -a or -i) for feminines (247). Accordingly, the classical final
consonant v, p, σ (§, y) being now inconvenient had either to make
room for the received ending (-s masc., -a or -n fem.)-as actually
happened in a number of nouns (cp. 439), as :—
äppns for äppηy Great Louvro Pap. 361 & 370, also CIG 1464,10; ¿ yépos
for yépwv (cp. kaλóyeрos oven in Pallad. 1058 B, Callin. 104, 26, etc.;
γέρων καλόγερος
λυσσόγερος Vita SA 9* Ε), χάρος for χάρων, δράκος for δράκων, διακος for
διάκων (α- form for διάκονος), ἄσχημος for ἀσχήμων, κλῶνος for κλών [p.
Mal. 223, 19 Taîs #λánais (rond Tλáres); Theoph. 405, 30 taîs µvpiádes],
κάλλιος 1ου καλλίων, προεστός (G. -στοῦ) for προεστώς (363), παθὺς for παθών
Χαρίτος for Χαρίτων, τὸ συφέρο" for συμφέρον, τὸ πρεπὸ” for πρέπον (as Corn.
Α 518), ἡ χάρη, δλύτη, θεύτη for ἡ χάρις, ὁλύτης, θεότης (361); ep. ἡ γυνή
beside γυναίκα ;
;
Or the more convenient ending -a had to be adopted. The latter
alternative had a far better chance of meeting with popular favour,
owing to the presence of -a in the accusative (τὸν πατέρα, χειμῶνα ;
γέροντα, ἄρχοντα, κόρακα, βασιλέα; τὴν αἶγα, φλέβα, ἀκρίδα, ὁλότητα). This
vocalic ending was moreover the most frequent-the accusative
having to a great extent replaced the dative and genitive (1247)—and
consequently also the most familiar of all case-endings (rov xeµŵva,
and with prepositions εἰς-, πρός-, ανά-, κατά-, διά-, μετά-, παρά-, (ἀπο-)
ὑπο-, ὑπέρ-, since T times also ἀπὸ, μετά- [ = with], ἐκ-, σύν-, τὸν χειμώνα)
121
338-346.
HISTORY OF 3RD DECLENSION.
and the most perspicuous, since it showed the fullest (imparisyllabic)
and therefore most vigorous form. It was the accusative ending
then that lent itself above all other expedients conveniently to the
exigency; in fact it was already a finished nominative feminine :
τὴν αἴγα, θυγατέρα, ἀκρίδα, νύκτα, ὁλότητα,ἡ αἶγα, θυγατέρα, ἀκρίδα, νύκτα,
¿λóτηTа. See App. iii. 12 f.
ó
339. As to the masculine gender, it was very casily obtained by
simply annexing the normal ending -s (263. 276), as: tòv kópakа, TATÉPа,
χειμῶνα, γέροντα, ἄρχοντα, βασιλέα ὁ κόρακας, πατέρας, χειμῶνας, γέροντας,
ἄρχοντας, βασιλέας (cp. Ιέρακας Vita Epiph. 57 Β & 6o A, twice; ὁ ῥῆγας
Anon. in Porph. iii. 358, 9). As a matter of course, such new feminine
and masculine formations in -a and -as went over to the parisyllabic
1st declension, the more SO as their respective accusatives had
already adopted a terminal -v (330. App. iii. 5-6).
340. In a very fow casos the dative, owing to its frequent use as an
adverb, gavo riso to a N nominative : (τῷ σαββάτῳ) τὸ σαββάτο”, (τῇ τετράδι)
✈ TETрádη (SO Oven Theoph. Cont. 430, 1 & 19 тeтρádŋν kаì τаρаσкevý). 1395.
341. Only in a few isolated and mostly dialoctal cases is the A genitivo
singular still met with, especially when it is oxytone, as: тoû µŋvús,
ἀντρός, τῆς γυναικός, νυχτός (cp. also ἀφεντός = αὐθέντου, after ῥηγός = regis ;
354). This occurs further in nouters ending in -os, as: Toû dáσov, пλáтovs,
βάθους, ψήλους (=ὕψους from (ύψηλὸς after βάθος), ὄρους.
II. SONANTIC STEMS.
342. Sonantic stems annex the endings directly and without
change, but if short vowels should meet together, they undergo
grammatical contraction (156", 2 f.).
HISTORICAL REMARKS (cp. App. iii. 14).
343. In sonantic stems the process of transition has been much
simpler than in consonantal stems. Forms like dpûs, öcus, övis, Túğıs,
Tрagis, owing to their terminal vowel -1 or -u being identified with the
terminal -H of the 1st declension (261. 298. 395), were easily accommo-
dated that is to say, the few instances of the masculine gender were
changed to the homophonous -ns (298), while feminines first dropped
their final -s (which was the characteristic sign of the masculine, 263)
and then changed - to -ŋ.
-η. In this manner, masculines and femi-
nines alike have been assimilated to those of the 1st declension :
ó ý
ὁ ἔφης, δρῆς, ἡ ὕψη, τάξη, πράξη (ep. ἡ χάρη, 396; ἡ γυνὴ beside ἡ γυναῖκα,
ǹ
338); so further ἡ νεότη, ὁλότη, πλουσιότη beside ἡ ὁλότητα, πλουσιότητα,
etc. (338).
344. In those N nominativos some scholars see no assimilation to tho
Ist declension, and cling to the spelling & ὄφις, δ δρῦς, ἡ ὄψι, τάξι, πρᾶξι,
† πîxʊ, imagining that this mode of writing illustratos botter the historical
connexion with A Grock (301. 304). On this principle, however, they
ought to write also ἡ τετράδι ad τῷ σαββάτῳ του ἡ τετράδη and τὸ σαββάτο
(340; cp. 301).
345. On the general formation of the plural since A see 267 & 332 H.
346. As early as II times, a confusion between the plural of the 3rd
and 2nd declensions arose, and the process has gradually resulted
in remodelling many (mostly polysyllabic and barytone) masculines.
after those of the 2nd declension (296).
122
ACCENTUATION OF 3RD DECLENSION.
[346-352.
Compare τοῖς χρημάτοις, λιμένοις, παθημάτοις, μειόνοις, γονέοισιν IGS 1417
& 1787, 8 (cp. Kühner-Blass i. 417); Tivos HCollitz 1409, 5; Meλitaiéois
1415, 1 & 3; ἀρχόντοις 1415, 24; ὤτοις for ὠσί Phryn. (see 433, 15). ἐν
'Apáßois Alchem. 346, 10. 347, II. TOIS KAVOIS Nic. CP Hist. 29, 18;
κλώνους Apoc. Mar. 119, 33; τοὺς μεγιστάνους Syntippa i. 7, 82, 89; τέσ-
σαροι SCusa 151 (+1175); τεσσάρους 616 (1145); τοὺς γονέους FTrinch.
99 (†1114); Téoσapoi Chron. Mor. 5221; reoσápovs 668; 670; 672; 4818;
τοὺς γειτόνους 737 ; οἱ γειτόνοι 7ro8;-and so now οἱ σκουλῆκοι, μαρτύροι,
κοράκοι, δαιμόνοι, γερόντοι, ἀρχόντοι, etc. (296).
347. Since the singular of the 1st declension has attracted the singular
of the 3rd declension (265), the question arises whether the numerous
nouns anciently belonging to the latter are to be treated, in regard to
accentuation, after the analogy of the 1st or of the 3rd declension, that is
whether the endings -a and -as should be treated as grammatically 'long'
or
π
'short.' This is very essential, inasmuch as it must be decided
whother forms with a 'long' and accented penult, like yvνaika, прağı (if
correct 344; cp. 304), αίγα, σφηνα, ὁ μηνας, βηχας, χειμωνας, ἡ σφραγίδα, etc.
should take the acute or the circumflox. Some scholars, following the
analogy of the ist declension, write ἡ γυναίκα, αἴγα, ὁ μήνας, βήχας, χειμώνας.
But this accentuation is indefonsible seeing that accusative forms, like
τὴν γυναίκα, αἴγα, τον μήνα, βήχα, χειμώνα (with their plural γυναίκες, αἴγες,
μýves, otc.) are formations of which the terminal -a has not been borrowed
from the 1st declension, but is the very -a of the 3rd declension (cp. P
Anunτpă from 4 Thy Anunтpă 384b); and since that -a was anciently
'short,' thero is no reason why it should be lengthened on its transference
from the accusative to the nominative case. Moreover terminal -a in the
Ist declension was not always long' (ep. μοῖρα, γλῶσσα, ἀλήθεια, and N
ὁ κόρακας, γέροντας, γείτονας, etc.).
348. Of all substantives forming the 3rd declension, only the
numerous class of neuters ending in -pa (369) and -os (424) still
preserve in N their ancient form and (at least partial) inflection, as:
τὸ στόμα, ὄνομα, μάθημα, αἷμα, πάθημα τὸ βάθος, πλάτος, ὄρος, πέλαγος,
βάρος, πάθος, δάσος, θέρος, κέρδος, τέλος, ete. So too το κρέας (420).
349. The vocative singular is identical with the nominative
if the latter is oxytone or has a labial or guttural stem, as: ó
ἡγεμὼν ὦ ἡγεμών, ὁ αἰθίοψ ὦ αἰθίοψ, ὁ κόραξ ὦ κόραξ. In all other
ô 8 w
instances the stem generally serves as vocative (323. 377),
dental stems naturally dropping their final 780 as unpro-
nounceable. (180. 337.)
ACCENTUATION OF THE 3RD DECLENSION.
350. Monosyllabic stems, also syncopated liquid stems (383 ff.),
accent the terminal sonant in the genitive and dative of all
three numbers.
351. a. The following monosyllablos, das (gen. dadós, 150, d) torch,' oùs
(ωτός 433, 15) Gear, παῖς (παιδός) 'boy, girl, Τρώς (Τρωός) ‘a Trojan, τὸ φῶς
(parós) 'light,'-aro paroxytono in the genitive plural and dual: Sadwr
δᾄδοιν, παίδων παίδοιν, ole.
352. b. Monosyllabic participles accent the stom, as: (v) G. övtos,
D. ὄντι ; Pl. G. ὄντων, D. οὖσι ; (θείς) θέντος, θέντι; Pl. θέντων, θεῖσι το
too was 'ovory,' though only in the plural: пávτшv, пâơi" (whereas sing. G.
παντός, D. παντί).
123
353-359.] CONSONANTAL & DENTAL STEMS OF 3RD DECL.
353. In compound barytones, the accent recedes in the vocative singu-
lar, as: ('Αγαμέμνων) ὦ Αγάμεμνον, (αυθάδης) αὔθαδες (257').
354. The accentuation of the 3rd declension has since A times
naturally shared the vicissitudes of its inflection. That is to say, the
plural and those few isolated forms of the singular, which still
survive, preserve also their ancient accentuation, as: μήνες μηνῶν,
ἄντρες ἀντρῶν, γυναίκες γυναικῶν, χιλιάδες χιλιαδων (659); τοῦ μηνός, φωτός
(but G. Pl. φώτων), αντρός (then ῥηγός regis, and after it τοῦ ἀφεντός,
341). As to the singular, on the whole its assimilation to the
singular of the 1st declension has led to a corresponding change in
the accentuation (343. cp. 347).
I. CONSONANTAL STEMS.
355. a. Labial and Guttural stems (π, β, φκ, γ, χ).

ἡ σάλπιγξ
(σαλπιγγ-)
A trumpet
>
δ βήξ
ὁ Αἰθίοψ
(Αιθιοπ·)
ἡ φλέψ
(φλεβ-)
δ φύλαξ
(φυλακ-)
· Athiopian
vein
เ watchman'
(βηχ)
'cough'
Sing. N. & V. Αιθίοψ
φλέψ
φύλαξ
σάλπιγξ
βήξ
Α. Αιθίοπα
φλέβα
φύλακα
σάλπιγγα βήχα
G. Αιθίοπ-ο
φλεβούς φύλακος
σάλπιγγος | βηχός
D. Αιθίοπ-ι
φλεβί
φύλακι
σάλπιγγι βηχεί

σάλπιγγε
βήχε
Dual. N. & V. Ailíon-e
G. & 1. Αίθιόποιν
Ρ1. Ν. & V. Αιθίοπες
Α. Αιθίοπας
G. Αιθιόπων
D. Αιθίοψι
φλέβε φύλακα
φλεβοῖν φυλάκοιν
φλέβες φύλακες
φλέβας φύλακας
φλέβ-ων φυλάκων
φλεψίν φύλαξι
σαλπίγγοιν βηχοῖν
σάλπιγγεςβῆχτες
σάλπιγγας βήχας
σαλπίγγων βηχῶν
σάλπιγξι βηξί
ע
356. The vocative is identical with the nominative (349).
357. Popular N Inflection of Labial and Gutlural Stems.
Singular, after the rst declension (265 f. 338 F.): ἡ φλέβα, τὴν φλέβα,
τῆς φλέβας ;δ φύλακας, ὦ φύλακα, τον φύλακα, τοῦ φύλακα & φυλάκου (296);
ὁ βήχας, ὦ βήχα, τὸ βῆχα, τοῦ βῆχα.
Plural (267) : of (or ἡ [j] 56ο) φλέβες, ὦ φλέβες, τὰς (τὲς, τῆς, 561) φλέβες,
τῶν φλεβῶ” ;—οἱ φυλάκοι (294. 296), ὦ φυλάκοι, τοὺς φυλάκους, τῶν φυλάκω";
οἱ βήχες & βῆχοι, ὦ βήχες & βήχοι, τοὺς βήχες, τῶν βηχῶ”.
357b. For the development of this popular inflection of labial and
guttural stems in P-N speech see 264-7 & 338–341.
b. Dental Stems (τ, δ, θ).
358. The accusative singular ends in -v (instead of -a) if the
nominative is a dental barytone in -s or -vs (330), as: ý xápis
grace, τὴν χάριν ; ἡ ἔρις ' quarrel, τὴν ἔριν ; ἡ κόρυς ‘holm',
τὴν κόρυν.
359. But dental oxytones in is or is tako -a in the accusative
singular, as: ἡ ἐλπὶς “hope, τὴν ἐλπίδα ; ἡ χλαμὺς cloak, τὴν χλαμύδα.
(
124
DENTAL STEMS OF 3RD DECLENSION.
[359-369.
ὁ θής
(θητ-)
ἡ ἐλπίς
(έλπιδ-)
τὸ σῶμα
'labourer'
hope
,
(σωματ-)
'body'
ὁ γέρων
(γέροντ-)
λυθείς
(λυθεντ-)
>
'old man 'loosed'
Sing. Ν. θής
ἐλπίς
σώμα
γέρων
λυθείς
V.
ἐλπί
γέρον
Α.
θητα
ἐλπίδα
29
γεροντ-α
λυθέντα
G. θητός
ἐλπίδος σώματος γέροντος λυθέντος
°D. θητεί
ἐλπίδι
σώματι
γέρονται
λυθέντοι
• Dual. N. V. Α.
G. D.
θητα
θητ-οῖν
ἐλπίδα
σώματα
γέροντας
γερόντοιν
λυθένη -
λυθέντοιν
Plural N. V.
θῆτες
Α. θήτας
γέροντες λυθέντες
ἐλπίδας
γέροντας λυθέντας
G. θητῶν
D. θη-σίν
น
,
ἐλπίδ-οιν σωμάτοιν
ἐλπίδες σώματα | γέροντες
""
ἐλπίδων σωμάτων γερόντων λυθέντων
ἐλπίσει σώμα-σι" γέρουσι λυθεῖ-σι
<
>
360. So are inflected nouns ending in:-I. -ns (G.
της (G. -ητος, like θής)
as : Κρής Cretan, γυμνής (light-armed, τάπης carpet, ἐσθὴς dress,
βραδυτής & αύτης slowness, ταχυτὴς & -ύτης speed, δεξιότης skill,
σκαιότης awkwardness, δικαιότης justice, λαμπρότης splendour, πι-
στότης fidelity, and many other barytones in -της (-ύτης and -ύτης.)
361. Of this class of substantives only abstract feminines in -ότης still
survive, and that in the modified form -ύτη or -ότητα (338), as : ἡ ὁλότη,
νεότη, πλουσιότη (& -ότητα), ταπεινότη (& -ότητα), μεγαλύτη (& -ύτητα).
(
362. 2. -ως (G. -ωτος, like θής), as: ἱδρὼς perspiration, γέλως
laughter, εἵλως ‘helot, ἔρως love. So too all participles perfect
active ending in -ώς (neuter -òs) which, however, have -ότος in the
genitive, as: λελυκώς ‘having loosed, G. λελυκότος, πεποιθὼς ‘con-
fident ' G. πεποιθότος.
363. In N this class of nouns, so far as they survive, have mostly gono
over to the ist declension, as: ὁ ἵδρωτας, ἔρωτας (339), rarely to the 2nd
declension, as : & προεστός (333).
J
364. 3. -άς (G. -άδος, like ελπίς), as: φυγάς fugitive, Ἑλλὰς
Greece, λαμπὰς torch, ὁλκάς, δυάς, τριάς, etc. (658).-In N ἡ λαμπάδα,
Ελλάδα (338), αγελάδα for ἀγελάς cow' (so even in FTrinch. 171 [+1149]).
For N ὁ φευγᾶς scu 287 & 367.
365. 4. -4ς (G. -ίδος, like ἐλπίς), as: ἀσπὶς 'shield, παῖς ‘boy, girl,
G. παιδός; so too ποὺς foot, G. ποδός, with its compounds, as :
πολύπους, δίπους, τρίπους, τετράπους.
366. 5. -us (G. ύδος, like ἐλπίς), as : χλαμύς cloak.
367. The number of oxytono nouns classified under 362-6 which was
never great, has boen considerably roduced in N in consequence of 338.
368. Like σῶμα are declined all neuters ending in -μα, which
are very numerous, and all barytones, as:
πρᾶγμα 'thing, γράμμα letter, ἅρμα ' coach, αἷμα ‘blood, κτῆμα 'pos-
Bossion, ὄνομα 'namo, δέρμα skin, στόμα mouth, μάθημα lesson, κύμα
wave, στράτευμα ‘army, χρῆμα 'thing (Pl. χρήματα money), τραύμα
wound,' etc. etc.
So too μέλι ‘honey" (G. μέλιτος).
969. This class of neuters in -μα has been preserved and even
increased (348) by the accession of a great number of abstract
feminines formerly ending in -σις (1024), as: θέλημα (=θέλησις) * will,
125
389-375.] DENTAL & LIQUID STEMS OF 3RD DECLENSION.
>
“ purpose, ἀνέβασμα (=ανάβασις), κατέβασμα (= κατάβασις). They form
the genitive singular in 'ov (paroxytone) after the analogy of the
2nd declension, as: τοῦ πρα(γ)μάτου, κτημάτου, ὀνομάτου, τοῦ πνευ
μάτου (CLeemans 33 [+III-IV-1), ανατελμάτου (Chron. Mor. 3385).
370. Tho great frequency of the above neuter ending - μα in the singular
with its corresponding plural ending 'ματα, made the occasional presence
of -μα in the plural (ὤκιμα, ἔθιμα) appear abnormal and insufficient.
Hence when -μa occurred as a plural ending, it was gonerally amplified
to 4ματα after the analogy of the numerous class in -μα (σῶμα, πρᾶγμα).
This process naturally affected all those verbal or abstract proparoxytone
neuters in -μo" (1022) which made their appearanco after T and bocame
ever since very common.
371. The inflection of this now class of noutors may be illustrated by
the following example:
Sing. N. V. A. ἀλλάξιμο”, G. ἀλλαξίμου & -ατος (Β D. ἀλλαξίμῳ & κατι).
PI. N. V. A. ἀλλάξιμα & Ιατα, G. ἀλλαξίμων & -άτων (Β °D. ἀλλαξίμοις
& Δασι”).
I
CGL 643, 25 ἆρον ἡμῖν ἀλλάξιμα εἰς τὸ βαλανεῖον. Porph. Cer. 157, 14 αλλα-
ξίματα. 441, 5 αλλαξιμάτων. 779, 2 ἀλλαξίματος. 7, 1 & 137, 1 ἀλλαξίμων.
Porph. Cer. 86, 13 μεταστάσιμον. Adm. 234, 2 μεταστασίματα ; so too Theoph,
Cont. 430, 2.
472, 19 μεταστάσιμον.—Porph. Cor. 293, 9 σάξιμον. — Porph. Cer.
194, 1 στεψίμῳ ; so too 205, 4. 205, 5 στεψίμου.-Porph. Cor. 278, 3 & 5 δέξιμον.
278, 6 δεξίμου. Theoph. Cont. 142, 1 δεξίμων.
372. In Ν μέλι follows the inflection of diminutivo neuters in -ι
throughout (303. 305), του μελιοῦ, τὰ μέλια.
373. The popular P-N inflection of dental stems (so far as they
have been preserved) is indicated in 264-7 & 338, and illustrated here.
373b. Popular N inflection of dental stems.
Singular : ἡ ὁλύτη, τὴν ὁλύτην, τῆς ὁλότης ;—ἡ ἐλπίδα (ὀρπίδα 187), τὴν ἐλπίδα,
τῆς ἐλπίδας ; Ν & Λ τὸ γράμμα, τοῦ γραμμάτου (369. 371);ὁ ἔρωτας, τὸν
ἔρωτα”, τοῦ ἔρωτα;—ὁ γέροντας, τον γέροντα”, τοῦ γέροντα & γερόντου (296).
Plural: of (or *) ἐλπίδες, τὰς (τὲς, της, 559-562) ἐλπίδες ;-τὰ γράμματα, τῶν
γραμμάτω” ;-οἱ γέροντες & γερόντοι (296), τοὺς γερόντους, τῶν γερόντω”.
c. Liquid stems ([X] v, p) (335 ff.).
374. The only stom ending in λ is found in the word ἅλ-s
'salt,' which in A generally occurs in the plural åλes.
δ αιών ὁ ἡγεμών δ δαίμων ὁ ποιμήν δ θήρ
(αίων) | (ἡγεμον.) δαιμον-) (ποιμεν-) (θηρ-)
divinity''shepherd'' wild beast'
δαίμων ποιμήν Θήρ
ὁ ῥήτωρ
(ρητορά)
ago
Sing.
Ν. V. αἰών
Α. αἰῶνα
guido
ἡγεμών
ἡγεμόνα
orator
,
ῥήτωρ
δαίμονα ποιμένα
Θήρα
ῥήτορα
G. αἰῶνος ἡγεμόνος
D. αἰων-ι
Dual. N. V. A. } aiŵr. e
α.υ. αιών-οιν
δαίμονος ποιμένος
θηρούς
ῥήτορος
ἡγεμόνι
δαίμονι ποιμένι
θηρί
ῥήτορ-ι
ἡγεμόνε
δαίμονα
ποιμένα
θηρα
ρήτορα
ἡγεμόνοιν
δαιμόνοιν
ποιμένοιν
θηροῖν
ῥητόροιν
ΡΙ.
N.V. αἰῶνες ἡγεμόνες δαίμονες ποιμένες θήρ-cs
Λ. αἰῶνας ἡγεμόνας δαίμονας ποιμένας Θήρας
G. αἰώνων ἡγεμόν-ων δαιμόνων ποιμένων
D. αἰῶ-σι ἡγεμόσι δαίμο-σι" ποιμέσι"
375. Further examples : λιμήν (λιμεν-) harbour, ἀγών (αγων.)
test, κρατήρ (κρατηρ-) mixing-bowl, σωτήρ (σωτηρ-) saviour, ἀήρ (αερ.)
‘air,' αιθήρ (αίθερ-) aether," φώρ (φωρ-) thief, and several adjectives in
-ωρ (472), as : ἀπάτωρ ' fatherless, ἀμήτωρ ' motherless.
ῥήτορες
ῥήτορας
θηρῶν
Θηρεσία
ῥητόρων
ρήτορσι
con-
126
LIQUID STEMS OF 3RD DECLENSION. [376-382.
1
REMARKS.
376. The nominative singular usually drops final -s with
antectasis, if necessary, as : (ποιμενς) ποιμήν, (ῥητορος) ῥήτωρ ;
but (δελφίν-s) δελφίς, (Σαλαμίνας) Σαλαμίς.
377. The vocative singular is identical with the nominative
when the latter is oxytone; but it is identical with the stem
when the nominative is barytone, as : ὁ ποιμὴν ὦ ποιμήν, ὁ δαίμων
ὦ δαίμον. 323. 349.)
378. If the character is v, it is dropped before the ending
-σι" without antectasis (337, c), as : (δαιμον-σι") δαίμοσιν, ἡγεμον
σι) ἡγεμόσιν.
379. Popular N inflection of liquid stems (cp. 338 ff.):
26
ὁ χειμῶνας “ winter, & δαίμονας “ demon, ὁ ἀέρας air, wind.
Gen.
χειμώνα
δαίμονα & όνου
Nom.
Voc.
Accus.
Sing. χειμώνας
χειμώνα
χειμῶνα
δαίμονας
δαίμονα
δαίμονα
ἀέρας
ἀέρα
ἀέρα
ἀέρα
Plural. χειμῶνοι
χειμώνος
δαιμόνοι
δαιμόνους
δαιμόνων
αέρες & -έροι
αέρους
αέρων
χειμώνων
(296)
380. The inflection of liquid stems is followed by adjectives
ending in -ων, -ον (especially -μων, -μον, 469), as well as by the
masculine and neuter of the few adjectives in -ās, -ăv, -aɩvă, of
which the neuter exhibits the pure stem (446), as : δ, ἡ εὐδαίμων,
τὸ εὔδαιμον ‘happy'; ὁ μέλας, τὸ μέλαν, ἡ μέλαινα
(446 f.).
Masc. & Fem. Neuter
black
Masc.
Neuter
Feni.
Sing. N. εὐδαίμων
ευδαιμον
μέλας
μίλαν
μέλαινα
V. εὔδαιμον
μέλαν
Λ. εὐδαίμονα
μέλανα
""
1)
G. εὐδαίμονος
D. εὐδαίμονι
Dual N. V. Λ. εὐδαίμονε
(. 1). εὐδαιμόνοιν
μέλανος
μέλανι
μίλαν-
μιλάι-οιν
↓ ↓
Plur. N. V. εὐδαίμονες
εὐδαίμονα
μέλανες μέλανα
Λ. εὐδαίμονας
μέλανας
(. εὐδαιμόνων
μελάνων
μέλα-σι
follows the 1st declension
D. εὐδαίμοσι
381. So too comparativos in 4ιων, -ιον, with this difference that
A contracts the accusative singular, as : βελτίω (but P βελτίονα),
and the non and acc. plural βελτίους (but Ρ βελτίονας).
382. This class of adjoctives has altogether disappeared from N popular
spocch (ep. 218").
127
383-387.] LIQUID & SONANTIC STEMS OF 3RD DECL.
SYNCOPATED LIQUID STEMS.
383. Owing to the dynamic character of Greek accent and
the facility of blending with p, the following four substan-
tives in -τηρ: πατήρ (πατερ-) father, μήτηρ (μητερ-) mother.
θυγάτηρ (θυγατερ-) daughter, and γαστήρ (γαστερ-) ‘belly, sup-
press the vowel of the stem in the genitive and dative
singular, and at the same time develop an epenthetic -- before
the -σι" of the dative plural. (App. i. 16.)
383. The vocative singular accents the first syllable (257).
Sing. ὁ πατήρ, ὦ πάτερ, τὸν πατέρα, τοῦ (*πατερὸς) πατρός, τῷ πατρί ;
PI. οἱ πατέρες, ὦ πατέρες, τους πατέρας, τῶν πατέρων, τοῖς (*πατεράσι) πατράσι.
384. Το this class belongs the proper name Δημήτηρ, Demeter,
viz. ἡ Δημήτηρ, ὦ Δήμητερ, την Δήμητρα, τῆς Δήμητρος, τῇ Δήμητρι
384. But in P ἡ Δήμητρα, after the ist declension (347).
385. In their inflection, the two words ἀνὴρ ἀνερ-) 'man, and ἀρὴν
(ἀρεν-) ‘lamb, also suppress pre-tonic e, the former moreover develop-
ing an epenthetic or euphonic -d- (131. 188):
Singular.
Ν. ἀνήρ
V. ἄνερ
Plural.
ἀρήν
ἄν-δ-ρες
ἄρ-νες
19
ἄρνα
ἄν-δ-ρας
ἄρνας
ἀνδρῶν
ἀρ-νῶν
ἀν-δ-ράσιν
ἀρ-νάσι
Α. ἄν-δρα
G. ἀν-δορός
29
D. ἀν-δ-ρί
ἀρνός
ἀρ-νί
386. The popular P-N inflection of syncopated stems has been adapted
to that of consonantal stems (338-339). Accordingly ὁ πατέρας (bosido
an indeclinable form ὁ πάτερ ' father, pater [title of monks], from
ὦ πάτερ, found even in Vita Epiph. 76 A ὁ πάτερ Ιωάννης, so ib. n; ep.
282); ἡ μητέρα, ἡ θυγατέρα, ἡ ἀ]γαστέρα (Croto), ὁ ἄνδρας (ἄντρας).-As to
Δημήτηρ and ἄρην, the former, after having boon romodelled to Δήμητρα
(384), disappeared with the Christianization of Greeco (or4ff.), while ἀρήν
(in its accusative form άpva) gave birth to a diminutive apvíov, which in
ìts N form åpvì naturally follows the 2nd declension (305).
II. SONANTIC STEMS (334. 343).
387. a. Substantives in -is (G. -tos) and -us, -u (G. -vos).
Sing N. κί-s
V.
mouse
ὁ ἰχθὺς ἰχθύς)
(ιχθυ-)
'fish'
τὸ δάκρυ
(δακρύ-)
'tear'
ἰχθύς (ἰχθύς) δάκρυ
ὁ κίς
(Kī-)
ὁ μυς
(μύ)
weevil'
μυς
μῦ
ἰχθὺ
71
""
A. kî-v
μύν
ἰχθὺν
99
G. κι-ός
μυός
ιχθύος
δάκρυτος
D. κι ί
μυτί
ιχθύ-ϊ
δάκρυσι
Dual N. V. A. kî-o
μύτε
ιχθύσα
δάκρυα
G. D. kɩ-oîv
μυοῖν
ἰχθύ-οιν
δακρύσουν
Plur. N. V. kî-es
μύτες
ἰχθύες, ἰχθὺς
δάκρυα
A. (kîs)
μυς
ἰχθὺς
19
G. κι-ων
μυών
ιχθύων
D. κι-σί
μυσίν
ιχθύ-σι"
δακρύων
δάκρυσι"
128
SONANTIC STEMS IN -ις, -υς, -ι. [388-399.
388. After is is declined only the poetical word is 'lion.'-Both kis
and λîs seem to have been foreign to popular speech even in A times.
388b. After μûs and ixoûs are declined: 6 & ǹ σûs or ûs 'sow,'
ὁ βότρυς cluster of grapes, ἡ ὀφρυς ‘eye-brow, ἡ ὀσφύς ‘loin,' ἡ δρῦς
oak, ἡ πίτυς ' pine, & στάχυς ' ear of corn, ἡ Ἐρινύς 'Fury, etc.
(
,
'
,
389. In popular N all above substantives (387-84) have partly become extinct,
partly been modified after the analogy of other regular forms of inflection.
Thus ἡ δρυς has been changed to ὁ δρυς (245) or rather δρῆς (343), while ἡ ὀφρύς
has given birth to τὸ φρύδι (134, b), ὁ στάχυς to τὸ ἀ]στάχι, ἡ πίτυς to ἡ πιτνά.
390. The neuter δάκρυ still survives in its alternative and more regular
form δάκρυον.
391. b. Substantives in -ic, -uc, -u, -1 (G. -ews).
το πέπερι
'pepper'
city'
ἄστυ
""
ἡ στάσις
'faction'
ἡ πόλις ὁ πήχυς
τὸ ἄστυ
'town'
'fore-arm'
4
Sing. N. στάσις
πόλις
πήχυς
πέπερι
V. στάσι
πόλι
πήχυ
Α. στάσιν
πόλιν
πήχυν
""
""
G. στάσεως
πόλεως
πηχε ως
D. στάσει
πόλει
πήχει
ἄστεως
ἄστει
πεπέρεως (& -ιος)
πεπέρει
πόλει
πήχει
πολύτοιν
πηχέ-οιν
ἄστει
ἀστέ-οιν
πεπέρει
πεπερέσουν
ἄστη
ual.N.V.A. στάσει
G. D. στασέοιν
Ρ1. Ν. V. στάσεις
A.
""
πόλεις πήχεις
39
G στάσεων πόλεων πήχεων
D. στάσε-σι πόλεσι πήχε-σι
πεπέρη
99
ἄστεων πεπέρεων
ἄστε-σι πεπέρεσι
392. All nouns of this class are barytone. Their stem character in
the nom. voc. and accus. singular is ', in all other cases e. The latter
undergoes contraction, though only in the dative singular and
nominative plural.
393. The endings -ως and -ων of the genitive singular and plural
counts short (324 ff. App. i. 15, b; App. ii. 9 & 14).
394. The accusative plural is assimilated to the nominative (332).
395. After στάσις and πόλις are declined all barytones in -σις, - ξις
[=κσις], -ψις [=πσις], which are very numerous and mainly abstract
feminines, as: κρίσις ‘judgement,' φύσις ‘nature, αἴσθησις feeling,
δίωξις ' persecution, ἐπίθεσις attack, ποίησις 'poetry," πρᾶξις 'action,
ὄψις looks, ἐξέτασις examination, πρόφασις pretext. Further
many other barytone masculines and feminines in is, as: ἡ ἀκρόπολις
citadel, ἡ σπάνις “scarcity, ἡ δύναμις strength, ἡ πίστις faith,
ἡ ὕβρις ' outrage'ὁ ὄφις ' serpent,' ὁ μάντις 'secr
396. Of this numorous class of substantivos very many abstract femin-
inos survivo in the modified form -ι, -σι, -ξι, -ψι, or rather -η (-ση, -η, -ψη
343 f.), as: ἡ φύση, πράξη, ὄψη, πρόφαση, δύναμη, πίστη ;-so too & ὄφις or
rather ὔφης (343).
397. After πήχυς are declined only two nouns : ὁ πέλεκυς hatchet,
and πρέσβυς ' old man, while ἄστυ is almost unique.
398. Of those four words N has changed πήχυς to ἡ πῆχυ or rather πήχη
(343), πέλεκυς to the diminutivo τὸ πελέκι, while πρέσβυς and ἄστυ have,
for obvious roasons, become altogether extinct.
399. After πέπερι (which is a foreign word and does not actually
occur through all the cases) are declined many other oriental (mostly
129
K
399-402.]
ADJECTIVES IN ύς, -ύ, -εία.
ús, -ú,
Egyptian) substantives in -, which are all neuter. However, both
their form and infection fluctuate, as: σίνηπι & σίναπι (in N σινάπι)
mustard, του σινάπεως & σινάπιος; also τὸ σίνηπι & σίναπυ & ὁ σίναπυς,
τὸν σίναπυν—all for the Λ ναπυ. Further κόμμι ' gum, either indeclin-
able or τοῦ κόμμεως & κομμιδος (ep. κομμιώδης & κομμιδώδης). Στίμι οι
στίμμι, τοῦ -ιως, -εως, & ειδος (beside ἡ στίμις or στίμμις, acc. στίμιν).
Κιννάβαρι (also τιγγάβαρι) cinnabar, G. -εως (beside & κιννάβαρις).
Σέσελι (also σίλι) Tordylium officinale, beside ἡ σέσελις, G. -εως.
Κίκι 'caster-berry, beside τῆς κίκεως. Θλάσπι, beside ἡ θλάσπις, G. -εως.
Even πέπερι shows a variety of forms and cases, as : G. πεπέρεως & ατος,
beside ὁ πέπερις Α. -ιν, G. -ιδος, D. -ιδι ; Pl. αἱ πεπέριδες G. -ίδων.
400. It has been already observed (303) that the presence of theso
nouters in - has, in all likelihood, suggested the change of nouters in -Lov
to those in -" (also uos in -ις oι -ης, 298), and thus effected a uniform
inflection.
401. c. Adjectives in -uc, -ύ, -εία.
(
γλυκύς, γλυκύ, γλυκεία sweet.
Μ.
Sing N. γλυκύς
Ν.
γλυκύ
V. γλυκύ
""
Λ. γλυκύν
""
G. γλυκέως
D. γλυκεί
Dual N. V. Λ.
G. 1.
Plural N. V. γλυκεῖς
""
G. γλυκέτων
γλυκεῖ.
γλυκά-οιν
γλυκέα
A.
""
F.
γλυκεία
29
γλυκείαν
etc. after the
1st declension
D. γλυκέσιν
}
>
,
•
401. So are declined numorous oxytone adjectives in -us, as : βαθύς
docp, βαρύς heavy, βραδύς ‘slow, ηδύς swoot, εὐθύς • straight, θρασύς
daring, παχύς ' thick, ταχύς swift, ὠκύς swift, βραχύς short, δασύς
denso, ευρύς “broad, οξύς sharp, δριμύς ' pungent, πλατύς ‘broad, τραχύς
rough. So too tho barytones θῆλυς, θῆλυ, θήλεια (α- θηλυκός, όν, ή),
• female, and ἥμισυς, ἥμισυ, ἡμίσεια half (G-B ἥμισος [as: Εφημ. ἀρχ.
1886 p. 158, 15 f. ἥμισσον, orton ; Gr. Urk. Berlin 142, 15 ( + 6o Α. D.),
±60 a.
τύπους δύο ἡμίσους], whenco N μισός ; also indeclinable ἥμισυ, as : Gr. Urk.
Berlin 29o [150] & 139 [[202], 13 μίαν ἥμισυ, 500 641).
402. This class of adjectives in -us is still substantially proserved in N
(ας γλυκύς |ὕδατι Γλγκέῳ from γλυκέος Alchrom. 310, 3], βαθύς, πλατύς, παχύς,
βαρύς, δριμύς, δασύς, etc. ; also πραγύς i.o. πραΰς (480), tumo, and has even
oneroached upon other classes of adjectivos, as: μακρύς (so even in Martyr.
Barthol. 2) for μακρύς, πικρός (and by metathesis τρικύς, Creto, etc.) for
πικρός, ἁδρύς τον αδρός (but also conversely γλυκός, a recent formation due
ο πικρός).With regard to their N popular inflection, their itacistic end-
ing (uni) has naturally caused them to pass over to the parisyllabic
ist declension (343), namely-
Μ.
Sing. Ν. γλυκύς
V. γλυκύ
Λ. γλυκύ
Ν.
γλυκύν
Κ.
γλυκειά
""
""
""
γλυκειά
G. γλυκ(ε)οῦ
γλυκ(ε)ού
γλυκειάς
γλυκιά
γλυκειές
""
γλυκειῶν
Pl. Ν. V. γλυκ(ε)οί
Λ. γλυκ(ε)ούς
G. γλυκ(ε)ών
130
SUBSTANTIVES IN -εύς, -οῦς, -ας. [403-409.
403. d. Substantives in -εύς.
These are all oxytone mascu-
line, and seem to have originally had ef for stem character.
Sing. Ν. βασιλεύς
γ. βασιλεῦ
Α. βασιλέα
G. βασιλέως
D. βασιλεῖ
ὁ βασιλεὺς king.
Dual N.V.A. βασιλῆ
G.D. βασιλέ-οιν
Ρ1. Ν. βασιλῆς & -είς
V.
Λ. Βασιλέας, γ' εις
G. βασιλέων
D. βασιλεῦ-σι
403. After βασιλεύς are declined all the numorous masculinos in -εύς,
ag: Αχιλλεύς ‘Achilles, ἱερεύς priest, φονεύς murderer, ἀμφορεύς Garn-
phora, Πειραιεύς “Piraeus, ἁλιεύς ‘fisher, Οδυσσεύς Odysseus, ἑρμηνεύς
interpretor, ἱππεύς “ rider, χαλκεύς blacksmith, γραφεύς scrivener,
Δωριεύς ‘Dorian, οἱ γονεῖς ‘parents.
>
4
404. Substantives in -cùs change their original stem character
ef to ev (51. 63) in the vocative singular, also before σ. Every-
where else of is reduced to simple ‹, which undergoes gram-
matical contraction with any succeeding (short) vowel.
405. Also substantives having a vowel before ev are often (espe-
cially in early 4) contracted in the genitive and accusative singu-
lar and plural, as: Πειραιέως & Πειραιῶς, Πειραιέα & Πειραιᾶ, Ερε-
τριέων & Ερετριῶν, Ερετριέας & Ερετριας.
406. For the accusative singular -éā, P writers and inscriptions
often show a contracted form -ῆ, as: τὸν βασιλῆ (CIA ii. 161, 2
[280 Β.Ο.], ἱερή, γραμματῆ. This form, the occurrence of which in
common speech is reflected by the Tragedians and even Homer, has
met ever since with wider popularity, owing to the general tendency
towards a uniform inflection (264 ff.).
407. As a nominative ending, -eùs (that is efs 51 f.) boing incompatible
with N phonology which admits only a simple final -s (218 f.),—the diffi-
culty was obviated by treating nouns in -eùs like consonantal stems
(338). Accordingly τὸν βασιλέα gave birth to δ βασιλέας and by synizesis
βασιλιάς (155, b-c) or rather βασιλεᾶς (286 Ι.) [ως βασιλιάς (155, «)]; τὸν
Φονέα φονεᾶς [ον φονιάς], τον χαλκέα- χαλκεας [or χαλκιας ], &c. Mark,
however, ὁ γονῆς τοῦ γονῆ Corn. B 102), ἱερής (406), beside ὁ ἱερέας (out
of deference to church) & Ιερές (273 1.).
408. e. Substantives in -oûc and -aûc.
↓
ὁ, ἡ βοῦς οχ, cow'; ἡ γραῖς old woman.
Sing. Ν. βοὺς
V. βοῦ
γραῦς
γραῦ
Α. βοῦν
γραύν
G. βο-ός
γρατός
D. Bo-i
γρα-ΐ
Du. N.V.A. Bó-e
βάσ
γρατσ
G.D. βο-οῖν
γρα-οῖν
Pl. N.V. Bó-es
γράψει
Boûs
γραῦς
βο-ων
γραῶν
βουτσί
γραυ-σί
408. After Boûs are declined only d xoûs a measure' and in I'
ó &ý poûs sumach,' also ó vous 'mind'-while the inflection of ypaûs
is followed only- and that even partially- by n vaûs 'ship' (433, 11).
409. Thoso fow nouns have altogether disappeared from popular N
with the exception of ypaûs which, agreeably to 407, has been remodelled
131
Κ 2
409-417b. NOUNS IN --ά,
, -ós, ELIDED CLASS.
since I to γραία, that is N γραιά [or γρηά i.e. γριά 155, b-c], and then
contracted to (Cretan) ypâ (169. cp. 285).
410. f. Feminines in - (also -úc), Gen. -oos.
ἡ πειθώ persuasion, ἡ αἰδώς 'shame, awe.
Sing. N. Telow
V. πειθοῖ
Α. πειθώ
G. πειθούς
D. πειθοῖ
No Plural.
<
αἰδώς
αἰδῷ!
αἰδοῦς
aidoî
" <
411. After ƒ‹ɩðò are declined many oxytone feminines in -, mostly
proper names, as: ἡ ἠχώ ‘echo, ἡ εὐεστώ ‘health, ἡ λεχώ ‘lying-in
woman, Λητώ Leto, Καλυψώ Calypso, Ερατώ Erato, Σαπφώ
(Σappw, 56, & 11. 171b) 'Sappho,' etc.-Their nominative and accusa-
(Σαφφώ,
tive, though contracted, is oxytone.
412. After aidòs is declined only s dawn,' for which, however,
A used news, inflected after the 2nd Attic declension (326).
413. The above feminines in - and -ùs sometimes form their
plural after the common 2nd declension, as: N. V. AŋToí, A. Antoús,
G. Λητών, D. Λητοῖς.
414. No appellative example of this class seems to have outlived T
(Β μιμώ [Suid. πίθηκος ἡ μιμώ, and Achmet. 135, 282 τῇ μιμῷ] is apparently a
scholastic paraphrase of N or rather Turkish païμoû 'ape'; exà has changed
to lexovσa or Aŋxoûva). However, proper names (invariably feminine)
in -, used as pet-names, appear to have had an unbroken currency down
to the present time, as : P-B Φειδώ, Καλλιστώ, Αἰαντώ, Μαραθώ, Χαριτώ,
Μεγαλώ, Φωτώ, Κομητώ, Θεοκλητώ, Θεοφανών Χρυσώ, 'Αργυρώ, Μαριγώ
(also τὸ Μαριό”), Ασημώ, ᾿Αγγελικώ, Βασιλώ. As to their infection, it has
been shaped after that of feminines of the popular 2nd declension (292"): TĤS
Φειδῶς, Καλλιστῶς, Αἰαντῶς (ep. τῇ Λατῷ CIG 2554, 70, Crete; though cp. 26g).
415. Masculines in -wc, G. -wos.
& йpws 'hero.'
Sing. N. V. npws
A. nрwa & npw
G. npw-os & npw
D. npw & npw-
Dual. ἥρωε
""
ἡρώ‐οιν
Pl. pw-es & pas
ἥρωτας & ἥρως
ἡρώων
ήρω-σι
415. So are further declined: ὁ θὼς ‘jackal, ὁ πάτρως and μήτρως
'uncle,' Mivos 'Minos.'
416. This small class of nouns is unknown to N popular speech. For
forms liko pwas, Mirwas (1st decl.) or Mivos (2nd decl.) havo recently
been reintroduced into the language through the literary style.
III. ELIDED CLASS.
417. The class of elided stems (334) consists of numerous
substantives and adjectives. The former are all neuter and have
in the nominative singular the ending -as and most commonly
-os; whereas adjectives end in -ŋs, -es.
417. Neuters in -os and adjectives in -ns, es, contract by analogy -pea to
-ρη (instead of -ρα, 65, 186. 2694), as: -τὰ ὄρη, (τὸν τὴν τὰ πλήρη.
132
NEUTERS IN -ας, -ος.
[418-424.
I. SUBSTANTIVES.
418. a. Neuters in -ac (G. -ατος, -αος).
τὸ τέρας ‘wonder, τὸ κέρας ‘horn, τὸ κρέας ‘flesh.
Sing. N.V.A. τέρας
G. τέρατος
D. τέραται
Du. N.V.A. τέρατ
G. τεράτουν
Pl. N.V.A. τέρατα & τέρα
G. τεράτων & τερῶν
D. τέρα-σι
Κέρας
κρέας
κέρατος & κέρως
κρέως
κέρατοι & κέρα
κρέα
κέρατε & κέρα
κρέα
κεράτοιν & κερῶν [κεροῖν?]
κρεων [κρεοΐν]
κέρατα & κέρα
κρέα
κεράτων
κρεών
κέρασι
κρέα-σι
419. After τέρας is infected πέρας ‘extremity, while κέρας stands
alone in its inflection.
420. After κρέας are declined τὸ σέλας splendour, σφέλας stool,
δέπας ‘bowl, γέρας ' prize, γῆρας ' old age, σκέπας cover (421. 424);
also σέβας 'awe, which occurs only in the nominative and accusa-
tive singular, with oéßn as nominative and accusative plural.
>
421. In the course of P times all the above neuters assumed 7 for stem
charactor, thus following the analogy and inflection of τέρας and πέρας,
namoly : κρέας, κρέατος, κρέατι ; Pl. κρέατα, κρεάτων, κρέασι”; so, ἅλας ‘salt,
and γῆρας (but τοῦ γήρογε Leont. Neap. V. S. 1677 Β; τῷ γήρει Callin. 95,
27 & 125, 30; Narr. Zos. 105, 10). As time wont on, this P inflection led
to N κρέας, κρεάτου (after γραμμάτου 369) κρέατα (& κρεάτα from κρεάς 155,
b-c), κρεάτω” ; similarly γῆρας has been remodelled to N τὰ γερατειά & τὰ
γέρα οι γεράματα (40), while πέρας still survives in the Pl. τὰ πέρατα (ep. N
τὸ πέραμα ' passago'). Also σκέπας survives in its P by-form σκέπος.
422h. Neuters in -oc are believed to have originally had & for
stem character. According to this hypothesis, the primordial
& has been retained only when it was final; but when it
occurred between two sonants, it was dropped (elided) and thus
gave rise to contraction (cp. 156 & 404. App. ii. 9 & 14).
τὸ ὄρος ‘mountain, τὸ τεῖχος ‘wall.
Sing. N. V. A. ὄρος
G. ὄρους
D. ὄρει
τείχος
τείχους
P1. ὄρη (417) τείχη
(ὀρέων)
(τειχέων)
ὀρῶν
τειχῶν
τείχει
ὄρεσι"
τείχεσι
423. So are declined all barytone neuters in -os, which are very
numerous, as :-
βάθος ' depth, βάρος ‘weight, ὕψος height, μέγεθος greatness, size,
γένος ' gondor, raco, ἔθος habit, δέος 'fear, ἔτος “ year, θάλπος warmth,
κέρδος guin, κράνος holmet, ξίφος sword, σκέλος ‘leg, ἄνθος ‘flower,
μέρος 'part, πάθος ‘suffering, passion, ὄνειδος disgrace, εἶδος ‘form,
εδρος width, μῆκος length, πλῆθος ‘multitude, ἔθνος people, ἦθος
custom, θάρσος & θάρρος courage, θέρος 4 summer, ψύχος ‘cold, μίσος
I hatred, ψεῦδος ‘lie, fib, πέλαγος opon soa, ζεῦγος 'pair, χείλος lip,
σκεῦος utensil, κράτος ‘force, τέλος 'ond, etc., ote.
(
?
>
424. This class of nouters, which aro mostly abstract, is substantially
preserved in N (348), and has even received many accessions, by attract-
ing other forms. Among surviving examples mark: τὸ ὄρος, βάθος,
πλάτος, ἔτος, κέρδος, πάθος, θάρρος, θέρος, τέλος, μέρος, πέλαγος, νίκος, victory
•
133
424-427b.]
ADJECTIVES IN -ης.
etc. P-Nformations : τὸ λάθος 4 error, χρέος ' dobt, πλοῦτος “ wealth, σκέπος
cover (420), νέφος cloud, θρήνος “lamentation, πάγος “ice, μέτρος 'mousure,
τρύγος vintage, ναῦλος “fare, ἄστρος (beside άστρο") star, σπλάχνος
mercy, tenderness, ψῆλος (from (ύψηλός) = ὕψος, μάκρος (from μακρός) =
μῆκος, ote. So τὰ δένδρη οι δέντρη (FTrinch. II [+1000] δένδρη) for δένδρα.
They are now all declined as follows:-
>
Sing. N. V. A.
ὄρος
α.
ὄρους
Pl. N. V. A.
ὄρη
πλοῦτος
πλούτους & recent πλούτου
πλούτη
πλάτος
πλάτους
πλάτου
πλάτη
39
""
βάθος
βάθους
βάθου
βάθη & recent βάθητα (297)
""
θάρρος
θάρρους
θάρρου
θάρρη
""
θάρρητα
κέρδος
κέρδους
κέρδου
κέρδη
""
κέρδητα
27
"}
βάρος
βάρους
βάρου
βάρη
19
βάρητα
""
424". A furthor N poculiarity of this class of noutors in -os is that the
plural onding -7, having boon mistaken for -1, that is for a nom, sing. (302 ff.),
was in some cases amplified to -Ha or by analogy to -1a, and thus led to a
now nom. sing. in -, as :
τὸ στῆθος “broast
τὰ στήθη & (στήθη + α) στήθια
σκέλος 4 leg
>
29
» χείλος “ lip
12
σκέλη & (σκέλη + α) σκέλια
χείλη & (χείλη + α) χείλια
เ
2. ADJECTIVES IN -HC G. -εος.
τὸ στῆθι
">
σκέλι
3 χείλι
425. a. Adjectivos in -ŋs, -es (Masc. & Fem. -ns, Neuter -es).
δικής
ὁ ἡ συγγενής, τὸ συγγενές ‘kindred; ὁ ἡ αὐθάδης, τὸ αὔθαδες
'haughty.
Μ. & Γ.
Sing. N. συγγενής
Ν.
συγγενές
Μ. & Γ.
Ν.
αυθάδης
αυθάδες
V. συγγενές
αὔθαδες
""
19
Α. συγγενῆ
""
G. συγγενοῦς
D. συγγενεί
Dual N. V. A. συγγενεῖ
α. D. συγγενέ-οιν
!
Π
αυθάδη
αυθάδους
αυθάδει
αυθάδει
133
Į
G.
Η
Pl. N. V. A. συγγενείς
συγγενή
αυθάδοιν
αυθάδεις
αυθάδη
G. συγγενῶν
D. συγγενέσι"
αυθάδων
αυθάδεσι
425. So are declined numerous adjectives of two endings, as:
?
เ
?
ἀκριβής exact, δαψιλής abundant, πολυτελής ' oxpensivo, σαφής clear,
ἀσεβής ‘impious, ασφαλής (secure, εὐμενής favourablo, εὐπρεπής “ docent,
πλήρης ‘full, ἀληθής truo, ἐγκρατής tomperato, πρανής (65) declivitous,
ψευδής falso, ἀφανής invisible, εὐπειθής docile, εὐτυχής ‘happy,' ευώδης
• fragrant, ευήθης ' simple-minded, θηριώδης ' beastly, &c. &c.
L
426. This class of adjectives is believed to have originally had -co-
for stem character, which manifests itself in the neuter, as well as in
the vocative singular of all three genders (cp. 422).
427. The accusative plural is identical with the nominativo.
427". In G-N spooch the vocativo singular masculino und fominine ends
also in -7, altor tho rst dolorision, as : χρυσοστεφή Croat Louvro Pap. 2272-3-
πρωτοφανῆ, νυκτιφανῆ, νυκτιχαρής ib. 1794-5. (S00 265 & 432, α.)
134
ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES IN -ης. [428-431.
428. b. Adjectives ending in -ens contract -éa to -â instead of
-n, whereas those in -ns and -vns admit of either contrac-
tion, as :
ἐνδεής ' needy, ευκλεής glorious,
(τὸν, τὴν, τὰ ἐνδεᾶ
εὐκλεα
ὑγιής ‘healthy,
ὑγια
εὐφυής comely.
εὐφνα
& ὑγιῆ
εὐφυή
[Moeris 341 Ἁγιᾶ Αττικῶς, ὑγιῆ Ἑλληνικῶς.]
429. c. In compound barytones, other than those in -ώδης,
-ώλης, -ώρης, -ήρης, the accent recedes everywhere (cp. 257), as :
αυτάρκης self-sufficient'
συνήθης ‘common
αὐθάδης haughty
αὔταρκες
σύνηθες
αυθαδες
429. So too τριήρης trireme (accus. -ρη, 417').
αὐτάρκων
συνήθων
αυθάδων.
τμήρων.
429°. But εὐώδης fragrant, ὦ & τὸ εὐῶδες (not εύωδες !), ποδήρης ' reach-
ing the foot, ποδήρες, etc.
A
C.
430. Popular feeling began as early as A to identify the nominal ending
της with masculine substantives of the 1st declension (278) and to treat it
accordingly. Thus beside περιόδῳ τῇ χιλιετει Pl. Phaed. 249 A and ὁ ἡ ἐξέτης,
wo moet : τὸν ἑξέτη καὶ τὴν ἐξέτιν Pl. Legg. 794 0 ; τοὺς τριακοντούτας Rep. 7,
593 Α; πεντηκοντούτας Legg. 670 λ; ἑπτέτις κόρη Ar. Eq. 1388 ; ψευδάς CIA
ii. 422, 13 (V Β.Ο.); ἰσοτελοῦ KMeisterhans 107, 14 III Β.Ο.); τριετῆν
Bull. Corr. Hell. 1890, 162; τὸν ὀκτωκαιδεκέτην, ἐνενηκοντούτην Dio C.
69, 17; δωδεκαετῇ Jos. Ant. 15, 9, 773; so ἡ συγγενίς, εὐγενίς ; then
ἠριγένεια, χαλκοβάρεια, ἡδυέπεια, αρτιέπεια, etc. (for ἡ ἠριγενής, χαλκοβαρής, etc.
Kühnor-Blass i. 544.) In the course of P, this confusion spread wider
and eventually turnod all adjectivos formerly ending in -ŋs either to sub-
stantives in the sense just referred to, or to adjectives in -os, the latter
alternative having mot with greater popularity (soo 440 & 1151 ; ep. ἐξώλεοι
καὶ πανώλοι for ἐξώλεις καὶ πανώλεις, Bull. Corr. Hell. xx. 33 ; so further
λάγνος for λάγνης, ἀδύλεσχος for ἀδολέσχης), as : τοὺς εὐγενούς Loo Gram. 359 ;
ἐπαναγκος Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 46 (146 or 135 B.c.), 28; ib. p. 79, 435 ;
Great Louvro Pap. 2574, also Gr. Urk. Berlin 153 (+153), and CLeemans
passim ; ἄμαθος, δύστυχος, ἄβλαβος, ἀκριβός, ἀληθύς; ψευδός Leo Tact. 19, 13 ;
μετάμελος (Frinch. 16 [tior,]), etc. Hence evon Latin nouns in -is
also wore, by their Hellonization, romodelled to nouns in 40s (298 ff.), as :
καλινάριος, φαμελιάριος, πριμιπιλάριος, πουλικάριος, κουρούλλιος (curullis), αστί-
λιον (hastile), Απρίλιος, Αὐγουστάλιος, Κυρινάλιος, ἀλγνήσιος (algononsis),
Αγριππήσιος, Μουτουνήσιος, etc. (Tekingor 133 f.) The ultimate result of
this process was that N now knows only adjectives of three endings (438).
3. PROPER NAMES IN -HC.
431. Proper names in -ηs follow the inflection of adjec-
tives in -ns (425 ff.). However, so far as they do not end in
(-κλέης) -κλῆς, they form the accus. singular in -η or -ην, after
the 3rd or ist declension respectively (330. 432).
Sing. N. (Περικλέης) Περικλῆς
V. (Περίκλεες) Περίκλεις
Α. (Περικλέα) Περικλέα
Σωκράτης
Σώκρατες
Σωκράτη & την
G. (Περικλέος) Περικλέους Σωκράτους
D. (Περικλέει) Περικλεί
Σωκράτει.
-nv,
135
431b-433.]
ANOMALOUS DECLENSION.
431. So are declined: Ἡρακλῆς, Θεμιστοκλῆς, Σοφοκλῆς, ᾿Αγαθοκλῆς,
Ετεοκλῆς, etc. ;-Διογένης, Διομήδης, Δημοσθένης, Αριστοτέλης, Αριστό
φάνης, Αριστομένης, Πολυκράτης, Ισοκράτης, Πολυνείκης, Πραξιτέλης,
Τισσαφέρνης, etc.
432. The tendency to a uniform inflection manifested in the course
of P times (264) led to a gradual assimilation of all nouns in -ŋs of
the 3rd declension to those of the more convenient and familiar 1st de-
clension. Accordingly P speech inflects all proper names in -7s after
the ist declension (265. 280. 330).
♪
της
α. Voc. Πολυκλή HCollitz 1206; Διομήδη 1210; Αριστοφάνη 119Ι; Δωρικλή
1215 ; ᾿Αγαθοκλή 1243; so Θεοκρίνη, Ξενοπείθη (Kühnor Blass i. 513), Νεοκλῆ,
Εχεκράτη, Θεαγένη (GHatzidakis 77 & 380) ; πρωτοφανή, νυκτιφανῆ, νυκτιχαρῆ,
Great Louvre Pap. 1794-6. (427. App. iii. 15.)
b. Accus. -ην for - εα (300-200 Β.Ο.): Μενεκλῆν, Αμεινοκλῆν, Λυσικλῆν, Εὐκλῆν
(KMeisterhans 105); so Επικλῆν, Ξενοκλῆν (ib.), Ἡρακλῆν, Διοκλῆν,
etc. [Comparo Phryn. 134 Ἡρακλέα, Περικλέα, Θεμιστοκλέα, επεκτείνων τὴν
ἐσχάτην λέγε, ἀλλὰ μὴ Ηρακλῆν καὶ Περικλῆν καὶ Θεμιστοκλῆν.]
c. Gen. του for -ους (400-300 Β.Ο.) Χαιριμένου, Αριστοκράτου, Εργομένου,
Αντιψάνου, Τιμοκράτου, Δημοκράτου, Διοπείθου, Δημοσθένου, Επιτέλου, Ερξι
γένου, Αριστοφάνου, Τιμοσθένου, Φιλοσθένου, Δημοχάρου, Δεινοκράτου, etc.
(KMoistorhans 106). So further : Αστυγένου CIA ii. 1158 (285-284 Β.Ο.);
Διογένου 1745 ; 'Αριστομένου 1747; 2458; 3Ι3Ι; Θεοφάνου 1709; Δεξιμένου
1922 (bis); Φιλοκλέου 1937, Σωσικλέου 1993, Θεαγένου 2067 ; Αριστοκλέου
2077; ᾿Ανδροκλέου 2145 ; Δικαιογένου 2232 (bis); Δημοσθένου 2258; Ερμογένου
2508; Κλεοσθένου 2844; Μνασιγένου 2979; ᾿Ανδροσθένου 3132 ; Σωσιγένου
3183; Πρωτογένου 3277, ote. etc.
d. Dat. -n.
For the dative wo have no sure criterion since e and ?
were freely intorchangod in P-G times (26, 5; cp. Kühner-Blass i. 513).
c. Plural. οἱ Δημοσθέναι, Αριστόφαναι Hrdn. ii. 697), Αριστοφάνας
(Pl. Symp. 218 в).
ANOMALOUS DECLENSION.
433. 1."Apns (ó 'Mars'), V."Apes, A. "Apny, G."Apews, D."Apei.
With the introduction of Christianity, this namo, liko those of all doities,
naturally fell into oblivion. (015-017.)
2. γάλα (τό milk '), G. γάλακτος, D. γάλακτι ; Ρl. γάλακτα, G. γαλά
κτων, D. γάλαξι". P-B: G. γάλατος, D. γάλατα, etc.
The P-Bby-form γάλατος, γάλατι, &c., has led to the declension : τ
γάλα, τοῦ γαλάτου (369), τὰ γάλατα, from which & γαλατᾶς ‘milkman.
3. γόνυ (τό ‘knee'), G. γόνατος, D. γόνατι, Pl. γόνατα, G. γονάτων,
D. γόνασι.
In Ν τὸ γύνατο", rogular.
4. γυνή (ἡ ' woman'), V. γύναι, Α. γυναῖκα, G. γυναικός, D. γυναικί; Dua
γυναῖκε, (. D. γυναικοῖν ; Γ1. γυναῖκες, Λ. γυναίκας, G. γυναικῶν, D. γυναιξί".
Accentuation similar to that of ἀνήρ (257. 385), with which it
naturally associated.
6. This substantivo survived down to m especially in tho form ή γυνὴ τῆς
γυνῆς (ep. Antatt. 86. 12 γυναὶ ἀντὶ γυναῖκες, Φιλιππίδης Αδωνιαζούσαις : Frinch.
114 [121] τῆς γυνῆς), but is now obsoleto, its common form at prosont being
ἡ γυναίκα (338).
5. δόρυ (τό spear '), G. δόρατος, etc. like γόνυ.
The disuso of the weapon has naturally led to the oxtinction of tho namo.
6. Ζεύς (ὁ 'Jupiter, accent after Θησεύς, βασιλεύς), V. Ζεν (accent
after εὖ, Θησεῦ), Α. Δία, G. Διός, D. Διί.
For N 900 'Αρης abovo (433, 1).
136
ANOMALOUS DECLENSION.
[433.
7. θρίξ (ἡ 'a hair '), Α. τρίχα, G. τριχός, D. τριχί ; Ρ1. τρίχες, Α. τρίχας,
G. τριχών, D. θριξί" (183).
In N ἡ τρίχα (338).
8. κλείς (ή ‘key '), Α. κλείν (Ρ κλείδα), G. κλειδός, D. κλειδί ; Pl. κλεί-
δες Α. κλεῖς, (Ρ κλείδας), G. κλειδῶν, D. κλεισί”.
In Ν τὸ κλειδί, from the diminutive κλειδίον (338).
9. κύων (ὁ dog) V. κύον, Α. κύνα, G. κυνός, D. κυνί; Pl. κύνες,
Α. κύνας, G. κυνῶν, D. κυσί".
In N extinct (218), its place having been taken by δ σκύλ(λ)ος (current
since T), and τὸ σκυλ(λ)ί.
10. μάρτυς (ὁ, ἡ witness'), Α. μάρτυρα, G. μάρτυρος, etc., but Pl. D.
μάρτυσι" (163).
In Ν δ μάρτυρας, regular (338).
νηΐ;
11. vaûs ( 'ship'), A. vauv, G. vews, D. vni; Dual G. D. veoîv; Pl.
νῆες (Ρ ναῦς), Α. ναῦς (Ρ νῆας), G. νεῶν, D. ναυσί. (408.)
[Moeris 244 νῆες ὡς Θουκυδίδης ᾿Αττικῶς· ναῦς Ἑλληνικῶς.]
For raus N uses τὸ καράβι, from B & κάραβος.
12. ὄναρ (τό ' dream '), G. ὀνείρατος, D. ὀνείρατι, etc. (297), beside the
regular forms ὁ ὄνειρος & τὸ ὄνειρον which follow the 2nd declension.
Still surviving in the form τὸ ὄνειρο”, Ρ1. ὀνείρατα (297).
13. ὄρνις (ὁ, ἡ, “bird '), Α. ὄρνιν & ὄρνιθα, G. ὄρνιθος, D. ὄρνιθι; Ρl.
ὄρνιθες, etc. D. ὄρνισι" (G also ὄρνιξι"). Another plural ὄρνεις, G.
ὄρνεων, D. ὄρνεσι”.
In N ἡ ὄρνιθα (after 338), which in Crete has been shortened to [ὕρν θα] ἔρθα
136. 194 f.
14. πρεσβευτής (ὁ ambassador '), V. -τά, Α. -τήν, G. -τοῦ, D. -τῇ ; Ρl.
πρέσβεις ; G. πρέσβεων, D. πρέσβεσι".
In N extinct, together with all other terms rolating to ancient political insti-
tutions (022 fl.).
15. οὖς (τό 'ear '), G. ὠτός, D. ὠτί ; Pl. ὦτα, G. ὤτων (351), D. ὠσί".
[Phryn. 186 ὤτοις μὴ λέγε, ὥς τινες τῶν ΓΡΑΜΜΑΤΙΚῶν, ἀλλ᾽ ὠσί. Cp. Moeris 204
οὖς Αττικῶς, ὠτίον Ἑλληνικῶς.]
In Ν τὸ αὐτί, from ancient Doric (only ?) αὖς, G. αὐτός (cp. Ηes. αὖς, αυτός.
Κρῆτες και Λάκωνες).
Ο
16. Πνύξ (ή ‘Pnyx at Athens), Α. Πίκνα (also Πνύκα), G. Πυκνός
(and Πνυκός), D. Πυκνί (and Πνυκί).
17. πῦρ (τό 'fire '), G. πυρός, D. πυρί; Pl. πυρά ‘watch-fires, G. πυρῶν,
D. πυροίς.
Nusos ἡ φωτιά (Hos. φωτία λαμπρία καὶ ὄμματα) from τὸ φῶς (G. φωτός),
[though πυρώνω 'I hout, and δ πυρόβολος fint '].
18. σίτος (ὁ 'corn ') in sing. regular, but in Pl. metaplastic : τὰ σῖτα.
b. In N τὸ σιτάρι (also gyncopatol στάρι 136). [In N metaplasmus occurs
in ὁ πηλός mud, τὰ πηλά (su even in Callin. 60, 27), ὁ λόγος νord, τὰ λόγια ;
thon δ χρόνος 'your, τὰ χρόνια (boside οἱ χρόνοι), δ μυαλός ‘brain, τὰ μυαλά
(beside οἱ μυαλοί), δ καπνός smoko, tobacco, τά καπνά ' tobacco (οἱ καπνοί
volumes of smoko ').]
}
19. σκώρ, (τό dirt '), G. σκατός, etc.-P (Phryn. 261) το σκάτος, G.
σκάτους.
In N το σκατό" ovon in Schol. Ar. Pl. 305. 707; Pic, 42.
305.707;
137
•
433-436.
CASE-LIKE ADVERBS-ADJECTIVES.
20. otádiov (Tó 'stadium') in sing. regular, but in pl. rà orádiu &
οἱ στάδιοι.
The word bocamo extinct with the retroat of the anciont motric system
(022-025).
21. ὕδωρ (τό “water), G. ὕδατος, D. ὕδατι; Pl. ὕδατα, G. ὑδάτων, D,
ὕδασι”.
In N replaced by 70 vepú" (from vnpóv, neuter of the old colloquial adj.
vnpús, seo 150, c & [2]).
22. vids or vòs (ó ‘son') declined regularly after the 2nd declension,
besides G. viéos, D. vieî; Pl. vieîs, G. viéwv, D. viéoi”.
In N vids or rather yıús (i. e. ¿ús, 155, a), aftor the 2nd declension.
23. χείρ (ἡ hand '), Α. χεῖρα, G. χειρός, D. χειρί; Du. G. D. χεροίν ; Pl
χειρες, Α. χεῖρας, G. χειρῶν, D. χερεί”.
In Nǹ Xépa (Crete, otc.) and commoner To xépi (aftor 218 & 338).
CASE-LIKE ADVERBS.
434. Cortain adverbial terminations which denote relations
of place, appear to act like case-endings. These are—
-1, -01
at, in (some place),—-01 and -1 being affixed to the sin-
-σι gular, and -or" to the plural.
-EN-from some place.
-de, -σe, -ze=to some place.
WHORD (in what place?)
oikvi (525) 'at home'
WηENCK?
oikolev from homo'
άλλοθι 4in some other placo' ἄλλοθεν * from alsowhero
Αθήνησι" 4 in Athens
Μαραθῶνι ' in Marathon'
Xajaí 'on tho ground'
'A0ývn0ev 'from Athens'
WHITHER?
olkade 'home(ward)'
aλλoσe to some other placo'
Αθήναζε “to Athens
Távтolev from overywhoro' Méyapáde 'to Megura'
χαμαθεν ' from the ground χαμάζε ' to the ground '
435. Unless we admit N forms like ὁλοῦθε (=πανταχόθεν), ποῦθε &
ñobés (=πov), to be ancient reminiscences, all these adverbial case-
endings have become extinct. However, their retreat from actual
speech goes back to G times, if we may judge by instances like: Sept.
Job 39, 29 ἐκεῖσε ὢν ζητεῖ τὰ σίτα. Polyb. 5, 51, 3 ἀποδοθέντος δ' ἐκεῖσε
diaẞovλíov. Acts 22, 5. Epiph. ii. 804 B. Polyb. 5, 101, 10 tηv ékeî
διάβασιν (for ἐκεισε). Cullin. 62, 29 παρὰ τῶν ἐκεῖτε ἀδελφῶν. Agath. 140
AỶTóce for avτou.- Sept. 2 Reg. 20, 2 and oпICOEN. Polyb. 40, 6, 1 an'
ENTEỶ ĐEN. So Method. 4oo B. Macar. 541 C. Epiph.i. 276 A an KG ĐEN.
ii. 737 C am' enteŶOEN. Callin. 88, I am enteŶ(en. 55, 19 Tηs ékeîce μovîs.
Also 130. 23. Mal. 117, 22 eK NHTIÓ EN 35, 5 ek maιdióben; so 429, 4;
παιδιόθεν;
237, 16. Porph. Cer. 357, 20 år' èkeî. Adm. 148, 9 am' ékeîce. Cp. 1516.
ነ
ADJECTIVES.
GENERAL REMARKS.
436. Greek adjectives have either three endings, one for each
gender; or two endings, one for both masc. and fem., and one
Very few adjectives have only one ending, and
for neuter.
138
ADJECTIVES AND THEIR ENDINGS. [436-442.
even these virtually act as substantives of either masculine or
feminine gender (476).
437. For the P-N history of this rule see the following sections
439-478.
438. In popular Greck, all adjectives of two endings, as well as those
of ono ending, have been dropped, one after another, so that present N
knows only adjectives of three endings, in particular the class ending
in -os, -o”, -ŋ (or -a), and -ús, -ú, -cîa or -ciá (401 ff. 444)-
439. Of all Greek adjectives those of three endings have at all
times been the commonest, and among these again those ending in
-os (-ov, -n, or -a) and -vs (-v, -eta) enjoyed the widest popularity.
Above all, however, those in -os (-o", -ŋ or -a) comprise the great majority
of Greck adjectives. Their numerical preponderance, their frequency,
their perspicuity in indicating each gender by a distinct ending, and
the convenience of their parisyllabic inflection (2nd and 1st declen-
sion, kaλós, -óv, -) appealed particularly to popular taste, and thus
attracted many adjectives from other (consonantal) classes.
Cp. ancient μονάμπυκος for and beside μονάμπυξ, δίπτυχος & διπτυχής, εὔθριξ
& εὔτριχος, γαμψώνυξ & γαμψώνυχος, δίοψ & δίοπος, ἀκμὴς & ἄκμητος, ἀρίδακρυς
& ἀριδάκρυτος & αριδάκρυος, πολυπ(λ)άτας & πολυπ(λ)άταγος, διχόμην & διχύ-
μηνος, διάκτωρ & διάκτορος, ὠμοβρὼς & ὠμόβρωτος, ἀμφιτρὴς & ἀμφίτρητος, ερίηρ
& ερίηρος, προβλὴς & πρόβλητος, εὔρις & εὔρινος, ἀριγνὼς & ἀρίγνωτος, ἀγνὼς &
ἅγνωτος, μελάγχρως & μελάγχροος, etc. (338.)
440. It will also be remembered that, with the gradual disappear-
ance of the consonantal inflection (264-7), adjectives of that class, so
far as they survive (430), have been remodelled either after those
in os or after those in -us (cp. ἀκριβός for ἀκριβής, ψευδός for ψευδής,
ἀληθὸς for ἀληθής, πρεπὸς for and from εὐπρεπής, μισός for and from
μioos, i.c. μirus, 401b, etc.). As to the subsequent formations, they
have naturally been framed after the above two familiar types (-os,
-ov, -ŋ or -a and -vs, v-, -eta), so that practically all adjectives have
been reduced to these two classes.
ત
ADJECTIVES OF THREE ENDINGS.
441. I. -os, -ov, -n or′ -a. Of Groek adjectives (and participles,
2110) those ending in -os are the most numerous (439 f.) and
have a separate ending for each gender, viz. -os for the mascu-
line, -ov for the neuter, and - or (when a vowel or p precedes)
-a for the feminine (269, 4. 285). The masculino and neuter
follow the 2nd declension, while the feminine follows the 1st
declension (306).
ayaon 'good'
ὑψηλή high
TOTη faithful'
ἀγαθός
ὑψηλός
ἀγαθόν
ὑψηλόν
πιστός
πιστόν
γεγραμμένος
γεγραμμένον
γεγραμμένη ‘written
δίκαιος
δίκαιον
dikala 'just'
ἀθρόος
αθρόον
μικρός
μικρόν
a@póa 'collected'
μικρά little
442. This class of adjectives is still fully preserved and has even
considerably increased (320. 430. 439). The only N deviation from
139
442-451.]
ADJECTIVES OF THREE ENDINGS.
A is that adjectives in -pos now form the feminine in -pn (instead of
-ρα, contrary to 441).
καλός
ψηλός
βραστό
γραμμένος
δίκαιος
μικρός
καθαρός
καλόν
ψηλών
βραστόν
γραμμένου
δίκαιον
μικρό
καθαρόν
καλή 'good
ψηλή 'high'
βραστή boiled
γραμμένη ' written
δίκαια just (311).
μικρή little
καθαρή ' clean
443. 2. -ovs, -ovv, -n (or -a). This class of contracted adjec-
tives has already been considered in 320 f.
444. 3. -υς, -υ, -εια.
Adjectives of this class are considerable
in number (401 ff.). Their masculine and neuter are oxytone
(-ύς, -ύ) and the feminine properispomenon. Only compounds,
which are very few, also ἥμισυς half, and θῆλυς female, are
barytone,
445. For the inflection and P history of these adjectives see 401 ff.
446. 4. -ας, -αν, -αινα (38o) is shown only by the two adjectives μέλας
(μέλαν, μέλαινα) ‘black, and τάλας (τάλαν, τάλαινα) ‘wretched, and
their compounds παμμέλας ‘very black, παντάλας and δυστάλας very
miscrable. For their A inflection see 380.
447. Of these two adjectives τάλας is oxtinct in N (Apophth. 289 ο τάλαν
καὶ ἀκάθαρτον ἔλεγεν ἑαυτόν). Μέλας appears in @-B in the form μελανός
(as Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 94 [+III] 3or; ib. 105, 6o7 νυκτερίδος μελανῆς;
further Great Louvre Pap. 800 μελανῆς γῆς; so too CWossoly N. Zaub.
310. 717), but in N it has been roplaced by paûpos (from A dµavpós), the
ancient term μέλας still surviving in the substantive τὸ μελάνι (from
G-Β τὸ μέλαν, μελάνιον) ‘ink.
448. 5. -ας, -αν, -ασᾶ is found only in πᾶς πᾶν, πᾶσα) 'every,
4 all, with its compounds ἅπας, σύμπας, πρόπας, ἐπίπας, etc.
Sing. Ν. πᾶς
παν
πᾶσα Ρ1. Ν. πάντες πάντα
Α. πάντα
πᾶσαν
πάντας
"
G. παντός
D. παντί
πάσης
πάσῃ
πάντων
πᾶσι
πᾶσαι
πάσας
πασῶν
πάσαις
449. This adjective is proserved only in the indeclinable form πᾶσα
overy (621), as: πᾶσα εἰς συvery one, πᾶσα μέρα ' overy day, and in the
adverb πάντα always, current sinco 1, as: Apophth. 265 Β τί πάντα (v. 1.
πάντοτε) οὕτω κλαίεις ;
(
450. 6. -ας, -α, -ασ is peculiar to participles, as : λείψας
(λείψαν, λείψασα), having abandoned,” ἱστάς (ἱστάν, ἱστᾶσα)
erecting.' They are inflected like πûs.
450. In N oxtinct for reasons given in 338-341 & 439 f.
451. 7. -εις, -εν, -εσσα is found in a limited number of adjectives,
ας : χαρίεις (χαρίεν, χαρίεσσα) Ιovely, φωνήεις (φωνήεν, φωνήεσσα
‘sounding, τιμήεις (τιμῆεν, τιμήεσσα) honourable, μελιτόεις honeyed,
melliferous, πτερόεις winged, σκισεις shady,' νιφόεις ‘snow-clad.
Those ending in -ήεις and -όεις adnit of contraction, as : (τιμήεις)
τιμῆς, (μελιτόεις) μελιτοῦς.
Sing. Ν. χαρίεις, χαρίεν, χαρίεσσα ; V. χαρίεν, χαρίεσσα ; Λ. χαρίεντα,
χαρίεν, χαρίεσσαν; (. χαρίεντος, χαριέσσης; D. χαρίεντι, χαριέσσῃ. Ρ1.
140
ADJECTIVES OF THREE AND TWO ENDINGS. [451-464.
Ν. V. χαρίεντες, χαρίεντα, χαρίεσσαι ; Α. χαρίεντας, χαρίεντα, χαριέσσας, G.
χαριέντων, χαριεσσῶν ; D. χαρίεσι, χαριέσσαις.
Sing. Ν. τιμῆς, τιμῆν, τιμῆσσα ; Λ. τιμῆντα, τιμῆν, τιμῆσσαν ; G. τιμῆντος,
τιμήσσης, etc.
452. This class of adjectives is extinct in N for causes given in 338 ff.
and 439 f.
453. 8. -είς, -έν, -εῖσα. Thus end only participles, as : τυφθείς
(τυφθέν, τυφθεῖσα) beaten, τιθείς putting.
Sing. N. τυφθείς, τυφθέν, τυφθεῖσα; Α. τυφθέντα, τυφθέν, τυφθεῖσαν ;
G. τυφθέντος, do., τυφθείσης, and so on. (G. Pl. fem. τυφθεισῶν.)
454. In N extinct. For the causes see 338-341. 439-440.
455. 9. -ούς, -όν, -οῦσα. Thus end a few participles of the
present and and aorist, as : διδούς (διδόν, διδούσα) giving, δούς
having given,' yvoús 'having known.'
Sing. Ν. δούς, δόν, δοῦσα ; Α. δόντα, δών, δοῦσαν ; G. δόντος, do., δούσης,
and so on. (G. Pl. fem. δουσῶν.)
456. In N extinct for reasons given in 338-341 & 439-440.
457. 10. -ων, -ον, -ουσα. So end many participles and a few adjec-
tives, as: λείπων (λείπον, λείπουσα) abandoning, παύων stopping,
θέλων ‘willing, ἑκών (ἑκόν, ἑκουσα) ‘voluntary, ἄκων (ἶκον, ἄκουσα)
'unwilling.'
Sing. Ν. λείπων, λείπον, λείπουσα—ἑκών, εκόν, ἑκοῦσα ; Α. λείποντα, λείπον,
λείπουσαν—ἑκύντα, ἑκόν, ἑκοῦσαν ; G. λείποντος, do., λειπούσης--ἑκόντος, do.,
εκούσης, and so on. (G. Pl. fem. λειπουσῶν, ἑκουσῶν.)
458. So too contracted participles in -άων (-άον, -άουσα), -έων (-έον, -έουσα),
as: (τιμάων) τιμῶν, (τιμάον) τιμῶν, (τιμάουσα) τιμῶσα ; (φιλέων) φιλῶν, (φιλέον)
φιλοῦν, (φιλέουσα) φιλοῦσα.
459. In N extinct for reasons given in 338-340 & 439-440.
460. II. -ús, -úv, -voa. So end only participles of the present
and 2nd aorist, as:
Sing. Ν. δεικνύς, δεικνύν, δεικνῖσα showing φύς, φύν, φῦσα having
generated; Λ. δεικνύντα, δεικνύν, δεικνύσαν φύντα, φύν, φύσαν; G.
δεικνύντος, do., δεικνύσης φύντος, do., φύσης, and so on. (G. Pl. fem.
δεικνυσῶν, φυσῶν.)
461. In N extinct for reasons given in 338-340 & 439-440 & 936-7.
462. 12. -ús, -ós, -via. So end only participles of the perfect
active, as:
Sing. Ν. πεποιηκώς, πεποιηκός, πεποιηκυία having done, ειδώς, εἰδός,
εἰδυία knowing'; Λ. πεποιηκότα, πεποιηκός, πεποιηκυίαν; G. πεποιηκότος,
do., πεποιηκυίας, and so on. (G. Pl. fem. πεποιηκυιῶν, εἰδυιῶν.)
463. In N extinct for ronsons given in 338-341 & 439-440. 2166.
ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS.
464. In adjectivos of two endings tho masculine form is used
also for the fominine (436), while the neuter has, as usual, its
separato form. As to the inflection of these adjectives, they
follow partly the 2nd, partly the 3rd declension. (For P. N
500 310 & 440.)
141
465-475.1
ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS.
465. I. -OS,
-OV.
So end many adjectives, mostly com-
pound, as :
a. simple:-ßápßapos, 'barbaric,' uepos 'tame,' ovxos 'quiet,'
λáλos 'talkative.'
b. Compound.
dikos' unjust'
Moyos unreasonable'
úvoμos 'illegal'
repos inexperienced"
δύσβατος impassable
Euevos 'hospitable'
Siapopos different'
ἔμπειρος ' expert
παράνομος ' unlawful
öuopos adjacent'
áðávaros 'immortal"
ἀμήχανος ' perplexed
άTIOтоs unreliable'
εὔφωνος sonorous
évoogos 'glorious'
Výκоos obedient'
άypoikos 'rustic'
ἐπίλεκτος select
àxpeîos 'useless'
Tаvоûруos 'artful.'
466. For the inflection and P history of this class of adjectives see
306-312.
467. 2. -ους, -ουν. So end a number of adjectives contracted
from -cos and -oos, for the inflection and P vicissitudes of which
see 313-322.
468. 3. -ws, -wv. So end a few adjectives inflected after the
2nd Attic declension, for which see 323-327.
469. 4. -wv, -ον.
-μων (380), as :
So end many adjectives especially in
"
(
δ ἡ πέπων, τὸ πέπον ' ripo, δ ἡ σώφρων, τὸ σῶφρον ' wise, πρόφρων ' willing,
φράδμων ' intelligent,' ἐπιστήμων knowing, νοήμων ' understanding, τλήμων
'persovoring,' μvýμwv 'mindful,' dμvýμwv 'unmindful,' èriλhoμwv forget-
ful, φιλοικτίρμων ' compassionate, ἀπράγμων unbusy, idle, πολυπράγμων
'bustling,' &c.
470. For the inflection and P-N history of this class of adjectives
see 374-380. Cp. 1074.
471. 5. -ns, -ES. So end numerous adjectives for the inflec-
tion and P-N history of which see 425-430.
472. 6. -wp, (-op). So end a few adjectives, which are all
compound and paroxytone and follow the inflection of pýrwP
(374 ff.), as: árúтop 'fatherless,' aµÝTwp 'motherless,' cuπáTwp,
αὐτοκράτωρ, ῥηξήνωρ, παιδολέτωρ, παμμήτωρ, πανδαμάτωρ. They
hardly occur in the neuter singular, and their feminine is often
formod in Σειρα, εις : παμμήτειρα, πανδαμάτειρα.
474. 7. -IS, -L,
and
-vs, -v.
473. In N extinct for reasons given in 338–340 & 439–440.
So end a number of compound
adjectivos declined after their second constituent, as:
εὔελπις, εὔελπι ' hopeful, G. εὐέλπιδος, Λ. εὔελπιν, etc.
ἄχαρις, ἄχαρι ' graceless, G. ἀχάριτος, Λ. ἄχαριν, etc.
ἐπίχαρις, ἐπίχαρι ‘lovely, G. ἐπιχάριτος, etc.
C
εύχαρις, εὔχαρι lovely, G. εὐχάριτος, etc.
δίπηχυς, δίπηχυ ' two ells long, G. διπήχεος
ἀρίδακρυς, ἀρίδακρυ ' full of tears, G. ἀριδάκρυος
So too φιλόπολις, φιλόπολι ' patriotic, G. φιλοπόλιδος.
475. In N extinct. Cp. 436-440 & 439-440.
7
142
ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING - METAPLASTIC. [476-482.
ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING.
476. Adjectives of one ending are either masculine or femi-
nine or both. They denote animated beings and as such, they
have no neuter at all. In fact they are rather substantives
than adjectives (436). Such are for instance :--
δ ἡ φυγάς, άδος, fugitivo,
ὁ ἡ ἀγνώς, ῶτος, unknown'
ὁ ἡ ἅπαις, δος, childless
ὁ ἡ ἀλαζών, όνος, boastful
ὁ ἡ μάκαρ, ρος, blessed
ὁ ἡ πένης, ητος, poor
,
>
ὁ ἡ γυμνής, ἦτος, light-armed
ὁ ἡ ἴδρις, ιος, knowing.
>
477. Used as distinct substantives, these nouns have often becn
modified, especially since P times, to nouns of two or even three
endings in the sense of 338. (Cp. Kühner-Blass i. 552, 2.)
478. So far as they survive in N, those adjectives are treated like sub-
stantives according to their respective endings, as : & quyâs or commoner
φευγᾶς (after φαγάς, 287 f. 364).
METAPLASTIC ADJECTIVES.
,
479. Three adjectives show irregular inflection, namely πρᾶος
(πρᾷος 200) ‘mild, πολύς ‘much, numerous, and μέγας ' great,
big.'
Sing. Ν. πρᾶος πρᾶον πραεία P1. πραείς (πρᾶοι) πραέα
Λ. πρᾶον
(*. πράου
D. πράῳ
πραείαν
πραξίας
πραεία
πράους
πραέων
πραέσι
πραείαι
πραξίας
πραξιών
πραείαις
480. In 4 poetry and P-B prose a singular πραύς, formed from the
plural, is not uncommon (as Sept. Joel 3, 11. Didache 3, 7; Barn. 19,
4. Hermas Mand. II, 8. Great Louvre Pap. 1042 & 1046; πραΰν 451).
This is still preserved in N in the modification πραγύς, πραγύ, πραγειά
(155. 402) tame,' 'meck,' which implies that the singular pays has
been current in popular speech through all times.
α. Πολύς (πολύ, πολλή).
Sing. Ν. πολύς
Λ. πολύν
πολύ
π
Ρ1. πολλοί πολλά πολλαί
πολλάς
πολλαῖς.
πολλή
πολλήν
G. πολλοῦ
πολλῆς
D. πολλῷ
πολλῇ
πολλούς
πολλῶν
πολλοῖς
481. So still in N.
6. Μέγας (μέγα, μεγάλη).
Sing. Ν. μέγας
μέγα
μεγάλη Ρ1. μεγάλοι μεγάλα μεγάλαι
V. μεγάλε
Λ. μέγαν
99
μεγάλην
>>
μεγάλους
α. μεγάλου
μεγάλης
μεγάλων
D. μεγάλῳ
μεγάλη
μεγάλοις
μεγάλας
μεγάλαις.
482. During P the amplified stem μεγαλο- Logan to be transferred also
to the nom. and accus, singular masc. and nouter, and thus gave birth
to a rogular form μεγάλος, μεγάλον, μεγάλη, current since @ even among
such writers as Porphyrios (v. Plotin. 67, 3); it is now universal in N.
143
483-493.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
483. In Greek, comparison is expressed either by means of
endings or by periphrasis.
484. I. By means of endings, and that:
1. most commonly by-
Στερος, έτερον, -τέρα for the comparative
Στατος, έτατον, τάτη
superlative.
485. So still in N, though Στατοs is now retreating before its peri-
phrasis. (490 f.)
486. 2. Less commonly by -ίων, 4ον for the comparative.
ιστος, 4ιστον, -ίστη for the superlative.
487. This has become extinct in N. (5o6. ep. 495. 503.)
488. II. By periphrasis, that is by-
μᾶλλον 'more for the comparative
μάλιστα ' most
"
17
superlative.
489. This is still partially preserved in N. (511 f.)
490. The absolute superlative which denotes not the highest,
but a very high degree (1191), is expressed either as above (by
means of Στατος, 4ιστος, μάλιστα), or by some adverb of intensity
(Every), as : σφόδρα, λίαν, πάνυ, ἄγαν, πάντως, πολύ, etc. (Cp. 515.)
491. So too in N, as : καλώτατος, μεγαλώτατος, λαμπυρώτατος,but the
periphrastic mode is now the normal.
I. COMPARISON BY έτερος, έτατος.
492. The endings έτερος and 4τατos are affixed to the stem, as
shown in the neuter, as :
μέλας (stem μελαν) black,
μελάντερος
μελάντατος
γλυκύς (γλυκυ) sweet
C
γλυκύτερος
γλυκύτατος
σαφής (σαφες) clear
σαφέστερος
σαφέστατος
κούφος (κουφο) ‘light
κουφότερος
κουφότατος
λεπτός (λεπτο) ‘thin
λεπτότερος
λεπτότατος
μακρός (μακρο) ‘long
μακρότερος
μακρότατος
ἄγροικος (άγροικο) ‘rustic
ἀγροικότερος
ἀγροικότατος.
493. For prosodic and grammatical purposes, adjectives in
-os change o to w, whenever the preceding syllable (penult) is
metrically short (App. ii. 10 & 14), as:
véos 'young,' 'new'
ἄξιος ' worthy
σοφός ' wise
νεώτερος
ἀξιώτερος
σοφώτερος
νεώτατος
ἀξιώτατος
σοφώτατος
πολεμικώτερος
πολεμικώτατος
πονηρότερος
πονηρότατος
πραότερος
πραότατος
ἐντιμότερος
ἐντιμότατος
,
προθυμότερος
προθυμότατος
ἐνδοξότερος
ἐνδοξότατος
πικρότερος
λεπτότερος
πικρότατος
λεπτότατος.
πολεμικός ' wurlike
but πονηρός ' wicked
πρᾶος (προς) ' mild
ἔντιμος honourable
πρόθυμος ' willing
ένδοξος & glorious'
πικρός bitter
λεπτός line
144
COMPARATIVES IN -τερος.
[494-499.
494. The common vowels (a, ι, υ) in the penult generally count short ;
so always in adjectives ending in -ος, -ικός, -ἴμος, -ίνος. But they count
long in the compounds of τιμή, θυμός, κίνδυνος, as: ἄτιμος ( honourless,
ἔντιμος ‘honourable, ἄθυμος ' cheerless, δύσθυμος dejected, εὔθυμος
cheerful.' So too in aviapós 'unpleasant,' and loxūpós 'strong.'
C
495. It will be remembered that popular speech has in the long run
reduced all adjectives to the two classes ending in -os and -ύς (438-440).
As a natural consequence, all N adjectives now, ending as they do in -os
and - us, form their comparative invariably either in -ότερος (-ώτερος) οι
in -ύτερος, as: πικρότερος, βεβαιότερος, ἁπαλώτερος, δυνατώτερος, βαρύτερος,
βαθύτερος, παχύτερος, γλυκύτερος, πλατύτερος, δριμύτερος.
496. The comparativo ending -ύτερος seems to have particularly ap-
poaled to popular taste, for it has attracted a number of adjectives in
-os, and has even, by a rogressive process, given birth to a few novel
positive forms in -ús (402). Thus:-
Comp.
μακρύτερος
κοντύτερος
μακρός ‘long'
(after πλατύτερος) {
κοντός short
μεγάλος ‘big'
μεγαλύτερος
>>
χονδρός ‘thick
χοντρύτερος
""
παχύτερος)
στιφός 'pungent' στιφύτερος
>>
αδρός ' rough
ἁδρύτερος
πικρός bitter
γλήγορος
πρῶτος ‘first
πρεσβύτερος)
ἀλαφρύς light' ἀλαφρύτερος
πρικύτερος
γληγορύτερος
29
πρωτύτερος
ἀρχύτερος
"
δριμύτερος)
τραχύτερος)
βαρύτερος)
γλυκύτερος)
ταχύτερος)
From which
a new positive } μακρύς
""
στιφύς
ἁδρύς
ἀλαφρύς
προκύ
)' previous'
496. So further καλός ' good, καλύτερος (if not καλλίτερος from κάλλιος i. 0.
καλλίων 338); μαῦρος ‘black, μαυρύτερος; ἄσπρος ‘whito, ἀσπρύτερος; ἔμορφος
οι όμορφος, -ύτερος (besides ἐμορφότερος); (cp. also dialectul δεξύς ' right-handed,
ζερβύς loft-handed"; ἀρύς ' thin ').— Conversely γλυκώτερος (aftor πικρότερος)
from which γλυκός after πικρός.
as:
497. Some adjectives in -alos drop -o- before -τερος and -τατος,
γεραιός Faged
παλαιός ' old
γεραίτερος
παλαίτερος
γεραίτατος
παλαίτατος
σχολαίος leisurely
φίλος dear
σχολαίτερος
φίλτερος (136, 1)
σχολαίτατος
φίλτατος.
498. Of those adjectives only παλαιός is still current with tho regular
comparison, παλαιότερος, παλαιότατος. Φίλος is also preserved, but as a sub-
stantive : friend.
499. Not τερος, έτατος, but -έστερος, -έστατος is annexed to
the stem of-
a. Adjectives in -wv, -ov, as:
εὐδαίμων ‘happy
σώφρων 4 wise
εὐδαιμονέστερος
σωφρονέστερος
εὐδαιμονέστατος
σωφρονέστατος.
(ἁπλοέστερος) ἁπλούστερος
ἁπλούστατος
b. Contracted adjectives in -ovs, -ovv, as :
ἁπλοῦς 4 simpl
εὔνους ' well-disposed
εὐνοέστερος) ευνούστερος εὐνούστατος.
But in N : ἁπλός, απλότερος, ἁπλύτατος (320 f.).
c. Some isolated forms, as:
ἐρρωμένος strong
χαρίεις ' plousing
πένης 'poor
ἐρρωμενέστερος
χαριέστερος
πενέστερος
ἐρρωμενέστατος
χαριέστατος
πενέστατος.
145
L
500-504b.]
COMPARISON IN -ίων, 4ιστος.
500. So too Ρ πλησιέστερος, πλησιέστατος (507. 523) from πλησίον ‘near,
after which the literary but incorrect N forms ἀθλιέστερος, ἀθλιέστατος, frou
ἄθλιος ‘miserable, and ἀχρειέστερος, ἀχρειέστατος, from ἀχρεῖος shameful.
[Cp. Acta Xanth. 77, η συμπαθέστερος καὶ εὐσπλαγχνέστερος.]
(
501. Similarly -ίστερος, -ίστατοs is affixed to some adjectives, espe-
cially to λάλος ‘talkative, πτωχὸς ‘beggarly, ὀψοφάγος dainty,
μονοφάγος ' eating alone, λάγνος libidinous, κλέπτης ‘thierish, πύτης
'fond of drink.'
I. COMPARISON BY -ίων, ιστος.
"
502. The rarer endings -ίων, 4uov for the comparative, and
ιστος, 4ιστον, -ίστη for the superlative
These are-
are affixed to the stem of a few adjectives.
κακός ‘bad
ἡδύς ‘sweet
ταχύς ‘swift'
καλός 4 beautiful
αἰσχρός shameful
ἐχθρός ‘hostile
,
κακίων, κάκιον
κάκιστος, Ζιστον, -ίστη
ἡδίων, ἥδιον
ἥδιστος
""
θάττων, θᾶττον (for ταχίων, 183) [1] τάχιστος
>>
καλλίων, κάλλιον
κάλλιστος
29
αἰσχίων, αἴσχιον
αἴσχιστος
ἐχθίων, ἔχθιον
ἔχθιστος
502. Beside έχθρότερος, ἐχθρότατος. Mark further P κακώτερος; ἡδύτερος,
ἡδύτατος; ταχύτερος (also ταχίων), ταχύτατος; αἰσχρότερος, αἰσχρότατος.
503. Of these adjectives καλὸς and κακὸς still survive in N (for whose
comparison see 505), also ἐχθρὸς ἐχτρός, οχτρός, Cretan δθρός, 13o) as a sub-
stantive, while ἡδὺς and αἰσχρὸς have become extinct. Ταχὺς is preserved
only in the advorh τὸ ταχὺ ‘in the morning' (after which also τὸ βραδύ,
beside τὸ βράδυ 4 in the evening ), and in the adverbial (but dialectal) com-
parative form ταχυτέρου (‘carlier ), ' in the morning, to-morrow.
16
504. Under the above head (502) fall the following irregular
formations of comparison:
I. ἀγαθός 'good
2. κακός bad
39
3. μέγας great, big'
4. μικρός small
>
"
ἀμείνων, ἄμεινον
βελτίων, βέλτιον
κρείττων, κρεῖττον
λῴων, λῷον
κακίων, κάκιον
Χείρων, χεῖρον
ἥττων, ἧττον ‘inforior
μείζων, μείζον
μικρότερος 3
ἐλάττων, ἔλαττον
5. Ολίγος little, fow᾽ ἐλάττων, ἔλαττον
μείων, μείον
6. πολύς much," many' πλείων, πλέον
7. βάδιος easy
8. ἀλγεινός painful
""
ῥᾴων, ῥᾷον
ἀλγεινότερος 3
ἀλγίων, ἄλγιον
πεπαίτερος 3
>
ἄριστος 3 'excellent
βέλτιστος 3 ‘morally good
κράτιστος 3 ' superior
λῷστος 3 ‘advantageous
κάκιστος 3
χείριστος 3 ‘poor, low
ἥκιστα (adv. ' least)
μέγιστος 3
μικρότατος 3
ἐλάχιστον 3
ἐλάχιστος 3
1
ῥαστος 3
9. πέπων ' ripo
πλείστος 3
ἀλγεινότατος 3
άλγιστος 3
πεπαίτατος 3.
&
504. Bogido P ἀγαθώτερος, -ώτατος [2] ; κακώτερος (so even Homer in T 321
X 106, then P-1 proso; G-B -ώτατος), χειρότερος (χερειότερος, p. 506); ὀλιγώ-
τερος (further G-B μεγαλώτερος, -ώτατος).-On tho other hand, P ἐπιμήκιστος
(as Philo 1, 291; Arcad. 191, 14).
[4] Phryn. 58 τάχιον οἱ Ἕλληνες οὐ λέγουσι, θᾶττον δέ.
[2] Phryn. ἀγαθὸς μᾶλλον λέγε, μὴ ἀγαθώτερος, καὶ ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀγαθώτατος
ἀγαθὸς μάλιστα.
146
IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. [505-508.
505. As far as they still survive in N, the above adjectives form a more
or less regular comparison, viz. ἀγαθός, ἀγαθώτερος (so even in Aristotle),
κακός, κακώτερος, usually χειρότερος (506 ; χείρον in South Italy); μεγάλος,
μεγαλύτερος (496) ; μικρός, μικρότερος (also A), ὀλίγος, ολιγώτερος (also P), Μ
μεῖος ; πολύς, πλείος, and now πλειός (obsolescent) or (Crete) πλειᾶς, from
which πλειότερος (506) & πλειότερος, otherwise περισσότερος (so even
FTrinch. 9 [1999] & ir [trooo]); καλός, κάλλιος (obsolescent, from the
neuter κάλλιον) or (Crete) καλλιᾶς from which καλλιώτερος (506), usually
καλλίτερος οι καλύτερος (496) ; ὕστερος, usually ὑστερώτερος (506).
506. The comparative ending -ίων, 4uor, limited, as it was even in
A, seems to have been felt weak and inexpressive as compared with
Στερος. Hence the latter suffix was superadded to the former, and
thus gave birth to a double comparative form. This phenomenon,
which appears even in A compositions (as άμεινότερος Mimn. fr. 119,
ῥάτερον Pind. Ο. 8, 60; ῥᾳότερος (11), extended gradually to most com-
paratives formerly ending in -ίων, as :
κακιότερος Α. Ρ. 12, 7, 4; χειρότερος & χρειεύτερος, ῥᾳδιώτερος & ῥᾳδιέστερος,
frequent; καλλιώτερος (Phryn. 12r), so still in N; μειότερος Ap. Rh. 2,
386 ; μειζότερος ΝΤ etc., later also μειζονώτερος; even μεγεθέστερος (Vita
SA 6* c) and μεγιστότερος Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. 134, 49 (HI-II) [μεγιστό-
τατος [2], ἐλαχιστότερος ΝT Eph. 3, 8 ; καλλίστατος Apoc. Sedrach 134, 14];
πλειότερος Arat. 644, 1005, 1080 (so still in N); in P poets also λωίτερος and
λύτερος, ὀλιγότερος (ep. also κρεισσότερος Phryn. 111)
and this form finally superseded -ίων, 4ιστος. Hence N now, with
but two or three exceptions (πλειός, κάλλιος, μάλλιος [from μᾶλλον
x meglio ?]), knows only comparatives of the ending -τερος.
506. A double -τερος is shown in ὑστερώτερος for ὕστερος (505).
507. Defective comparison. Some adjectives occur in the com-
parative and superlative, but not in the positive. These are:
(πρό ‘before )
(ὑπέρ • abovo')
πρότερος ' previous
ὑπέρτερος 'superior
ὕστερος posterior
(ἐξ ' from ')
(πλησίον ‘near ') πλησιαίτερος
πρῶτος (Ρ πρώτιστος) first
ὑπέρτατος (also ὕπατος) supreme
ὕστατος ‘last
ἔσχατος extreme
πλησιαίτατος (500).
508. In P-B wo further meet with the following forms:-
(ἄνω ' up ')
ἀνώτερος superior
(κάτω ' down)
κατώτερος 4 10wor
(ἔσω ' within )
ἐσώτερος ' interior
(ἔνδον ' inside)
ἐνδότερος
>>
(έξω ' outside ')
ἐξώτερος
(ἐγγύς ' near ')
ἐγγύτερος
(πόρρω ' far )
πορρώτερος
(πέρα ‘beyond")
περαίτερος
(ἀπό οι άπω ? off)
ἀπώτερος
ἀνώτατος supreme'
κατώτατος “lowest
ἐσώτατος intimus
ἐνδότατος
ἐξώτατος
>>
ἐγγύτατος & ἔγγιστος
περαίτατος
ἀπώτατος.
[1] Blamed by Phryn. 111: εἰ ποιητὴς εἶπεν ἀμεινότερον χαιρέτω· οὐδὲ γὰρ
καλλιώτερον οὐδὲ κρεισσότερον ῥητέον· συγκριτικοῦ γὰρ συγκριτικὸν οὐ γίγνεται.
λέγε οὖν ἄμεινον καὶ κάλλιον καὶ κρείσσον. 381 ῥᾳύτερον μὴ λέγε ἀλλὰ ῥᾷον
συγκριτικὸν γὰρ συγκριτικοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν, οἷον εἴ τις λέγοι κρεισσότερον.
ม
[4] Comparo Phryn. 50 τελευταιότατον λέγειν ἁμάρτημα τῶν περὶ παιδείαν
δοκούντων τευτάζειν. ἐπεὶ γὰρ ἀρχαιότατον εὗρον λεγόμενον παρὰ τοῖς ἀρχαίοις
ᾠήθησαν καὶ τοῦτο δεῖν λέγειν. ἀλλὰ σὺ τελευταίον λέγε. 51 CXATON χρὴ
λέγειν οὐχὶ ἐσχατώτατον, εἰ καὶ μάρτυρα παρέχει τις (μάρτυρ' ἄν παρέχοι τις ?).
52 κορυφαιότατον ἐνεκαλυψάμην εὑρὼν παρὰ Φαβωρίνῳ· λέγε οὖν κΟΡΥΦΑΙΟΝ.
Mooris 336 τελευταῖον μόνως τελευταιότατον οὐδεὶς τῶν παλαιῶν. Antatt. 104,
κεφαλαιότατον Πλάτων Γοργίᾳ.
6
147
L 2
508b-514.]
PERIPHRASTIC COMPARISON.
508b. Most of these comparatives and superlatives have been formed
from their respective adverbs (523).
III. PERIPHRASTIC COMPARISON.
509. The periphrastic formation of the comparison is effected
by means of μᾶλλον (sometimes also πλέον (11) ' more, and μάλιστα
'most,' that is-
paλλov 'more' for the comparative, and
μáλiora 'most'
""
superlative.
510. Such a periphrasis (which has passed through the Latin
to the Romanic languages) was sometimes resorted to for the
sake of variety (as in φίλος, σοφός, ἄξιος, &c.), or when the
positive was unsuitable for a regular comparative ending.
This was particularly the case with adjectives of one ending
and with participles. Thus :—
μᾶλλον φίλος
yevvaîos
وو
""
وو
وو
ἄξιος
εὔελπις
ἀγαπῶν
μάλιστα φίλος
παράνομος
""
δῆλος
εὔελπις
""
""
φιλῶν.
511. For μâλλov P substituted the synonymous and more popular
adverb λéov [furthered by the Latin plus, the parent of Romanic
plus, piu, &c.] 'more,' which gradually assumed the ascendency,
and having displaced uâλλov from the colloquial speech, has remained
ever since in unbroken usage, as: Arist. Civ. vii. 15, 8 ýλıkíav πλéov
προσήκουσαν. Ignat. ad Polyc. 3, 2 πλέον σπουδαῖος γίγνου. (Cp. ΔΜαυ-
podpúdns 548.)—For A sec above 509 & [2].
612. Πλέον οι πλείον has in N, properly speaking, two forms πλεύω or
πλειδ' and πλεà or πλειά. Though often used synonymously, they are now
gonorally so specialized that the former refors to time, as: dè" Ovμoûμai
Tλ(1) 'I remember no longer,' whoreas the latter (mλed or Theid which is
formed regularly after 518 & 522) refers to the degree and thus corresponds
to 4 μᾶλλον, as : πλε(ι)ὰ μεγάλος == μεγαλύτερος, πλε(ι)ὰ πλούσιος = πλουσιώτερος.
513. Since II a periphrastic superlative is sometimes formed in popular
speech by simply repeating the adjectivo twico, with or without an inter-
vening και (521. 1192f.), as: θεῷ μεγάλῳ μεγάλῳ (= μεγίστῳ) Mittl. xix. 2 1 2-3
(III B.C.); also Bull. Corr. Hell. 1894 p. 147 (91 B.C.) & 148 (88 B 0.).
Ἑρμῆς ὁ μέγας καὶ μέγας CIG 4697, 19 (Rosetta stone). ὁ μέγας μέγας
Zápamis CWossely Gr. Zaub. (1888) A 13. Gr. Urk. Berlin 149 (†II-III™)
μεγάλου μεγάλου (five times). 229 & 230 (|ΙΙ-ΙΙΙα) μεγάλοι μεγάλοι. 296
(+220) μεγάλου μεγάλου.—Hormas Sim. 9, 17, 1-2 ἄλλος καὶ ἄλλος. Euchol.
ἅγιος μόνος καὶ μόνος. Loont. Noup. V. S. 168 A καλὴ καλὴ καὶ ἀξία. Antatt. 108,5
μᾶλλον μᾶλλον ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀεὶ καὶ μᾶλλον. ῎Αλεξις Πεζονίκῃ· μεῖζον μεῖζον, μικρὸν
μικρόν, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀεὶ κατὰ μικρόν· Αντιφάνης Αγροίκῳ. (1192.)
C.
514. The comparativo somolimes stands, ospecially since H, for the
relative superlativo, as :
Dion. H. Do Comp. 14 p. 169 (Sch.) τούτων δὲ κράτιστα μὲν τὰ μακρὰ . . . χείρω
δὲ τὰ βραχέα. Luc. D. Door. 204 τὴν ἀμείνω τῶν μοιρῶν.
Dio. Chr. 3, 39:
[ On the periphrastic comparison in Grook, as well as on the uso of
#λéov for μâλλov, see OSchwab in MSchanz IV, iii. 124 If.
148
ADVERBS OF MANNER IN -ως. [514-518.
ἁπάντων πιθανώτερος. NT Mark 4, 31 μικρότερος πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων. ib.
32 μεῖζον πάντων τῶν λαχάνων. Luke 21, 3 πλεῖον πάντων.
1 Cor. 15, 19
ἐλεεινότεροι πάντων ἀνθρώπων. Ephes. 3, 8 τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων. Matt.
8, 12 (& 28, 13) εἰς τὸ σκότος τὸ ἐξώτερον. Gr. Urk. Berlin 332 (+II-III), 4
ὅ μοι πάντων ἐστὶν ἀναγκαιότερον. Hermas Mand. 10, 2 ἡ λύπη πάντων τῶν
πνευμάτων πονηροτέρα ἐστὶ καὶ δεινοτάτη. Athen. 3, 247 πάντων καρπῶν
ὠφελιμώτερα. Heron. Geom. (ed. Hultsch.) 47 πάντων δὲ τῶν μέτρων ἐλαχιστό-
τερόν ἐστι δάκτυλος. Macar. 524 Β (κύρη) πλουσιωτέρα ὑπὲρ πάσας. (Cp. Justin.
757 Β φαεινότερος μᾶλλον τῶν ἡλίου δυνάμεων.) Εunap. 44, 7 ἡσυχία μυστηρίων
ἁπάντων σταθερωτέρα. Theodos. Can. in Bekk. An. iii. 1187 τὸ ' ἀσθενέστερον
ὑπάρχον πάντων τῶν φωνηέντων.
514'. This misapplication which was undoubtedly due to the influence
of popular speech, has spread ever since and ultimately established itself
in N as the absolute norm (cp. Kühner-Blass i. 574 ἔξω), the relative
superlative being now formed, as in the Romanic languages, by the com-
parative preceded by the article.
515. The various modes of forming the comparison, explained above
(483-491. 511-514), may be summed up as under, where 4 σφόδρα, πάνυ,
ἄγαν, λίαν, πάντως, and πολύ (490), are replaced in N by πολλά (518):
Positive Α-Ν σοφός ' wise
Comp. 1 Α-Ν σοφώτερος
02 Α-Γ μᾶλλον σοφός
P-N πλέον
Μ-Ν πλειά
""
Sum. a. absolute Α-Ν σοφώτατος
>>
>>
>>
Α Ρ πάνυ &c. σοφός
Ν πολλὰ
b. relative A-Μ σοφώτατος
Α-Μ μάλιστα σοφός
(G-N) 8+cmpr.
ταπεινός ‘humble
φανερός clear' στέργων ' content
' '
φανερώτερος
μᾶλλον φανερός μᾶλλον στέργων
ταπεινότερος
μᾶλλον ταπεινός
πλέον
>>
πλειὰ
πλέον
πλειά
πλέον
>>
29
23
ταπεινότατος
πάνυ &c. ταπεινός
πολλὰ
29
ταπεινότατος
μάλιστα ταπεινός
$ + cmpr.
φανερώτατος
πάνυ &c. φανερός
πολλὰ
>>
φανερώτατος
μάλιστα φανερός
ὁ + cmpr.
(459)
πάνυ &c. στέργων
(no part. in use)
μάλιστα στέργων
5 + cmpr.
ADVERBS OF MANNER.
516. Adverbs of manner, derived from adjectives (denomina-
tive adverbs) end in -ws. (1102.) This ending corresponds, in
form and accent, to the genitive plural of the respective adjective.
κακός “bad
δίκαιος 'just
ἁπλοῦς ‘simple
πως ' whole
σαφής 4 clear
ταχύς ' quick
G. Pl. κακών, adv. κακῶς 'badly'
"" ""
"" 29
"" ""
,
""
δικαίων,
ἁπλῶν,
πάντων,
», σαφῶν,
""
29
δικαίως 'justly
ἁπλῶς ' simply
""
πάντως 4 wholly
>>
σαφῶς ' clearly
», ταχέων,
"}
ταχέως ' quickly
εὐδαιμόνων,,,
εὐδαιμόνως “happily
εὐδαίμων ' happy
516. α. So too ἄλλως
وو
otherwise, οὕτως “so, διαφερόντως pre-
eminently, εἰκότως 'apparently,' ὄντως ' indeed.
517. b. In A the adverb of ayaðòs 'good' is ev (not ủyaðâs) 'well.'
518. Denominative adverbs in -os are frequently replaced by
the neuter of the corresponding adjective in the accusative sin-
gular or (oftener) plural, as:
>
ταχὺ (for ταχέως) ' speedily, soon ; μικρὸν & μικρὰ 'shortly, μόνον
only, τόσον ' so much, πολὺ & πολλὰ (515) ‘very, μέγα & μεγάλα
149
518-521.]
COMPARISON OF ADVERBS OF MANNER.
'greatly,' pakpù 'long,' ovxvà ' frequently' (1185. 1266 ff. ep. RKühner
ii. 27ο Α. 11); 50 οξέα, ἐλεεινά, πυκνά, αἰφνίδια, ἀκάματα, ἀσύνετα, etc.
Many other 4-P examples in ΔΜαυροφρύδης 684.
518. Such adverbial neuters, owing to their very familiar endings,
their convenient accentuation, and, above all, owing to the presence
of a similar (neutral) ending in the superlative (519. 1267), met with
popular favour as early as pre-Attic antiquity, but especially since
A times forcing its way even into Atticistic compositions (WSchmid
ii. 36), and gradually prevailed over the regular adverbs. Hence the
present phenomenon in N, that adverbs of all three degrees of com-
parison, with a few exceptions in -ως (as καλῶς ' well, ἀλλοιῶς
otherwise, δίχως “without, ἴσως perhaps, ὡς, καθώς, ‘as, like '),
are always identical with the accusative plural of their corresponding
neuter adjectives (522 ; ep. ΔΜαυροφρύδης 684 f.), as : καλά, κακά, πλού-
σια, χαμηλά, πολλά, μεγάλα, τόσα, καλλίτερα, χαμηλότερα, etc.
,
2
519. Adverbs derived from adjectives borrow for their--
Comparative the acc. neuter singular of the adjective;
Superlative
σοφῶς ' wisely'
σαφῶς 'clearly
ἡδέως ' gladly
>
29
χαριέντως ' gracefully
καλῶς ' beautifully
κακῶς ' badly'
ταχέως 4 speedily'
So eu well' (517)
μάλα 'very'
""
""
σοφώτατα
σαφέστατα
ἥδιστα
χαριέστατα
κάλλιστα
plural
σοφώτερον
σαφέστερον
ἥδιον
χαριέστερον
κάλλιον
χεῖρον
χείριστα
θάττον
τάχιστα
ἄμεινον
ἄριστα
μᾶλλον
μάλιστα.
as:
>
519. Που θᾶττον οι θάσσον Puses τάχιον and after it βράδιον. (Cp. Phryn.
58 τάχιον οἱ Ἕλληνες οὐ λέγουσι, θᾶττον δέ. 59 βράδιον· καὶ τοῦτο Ἡσίοδος μὲν
λέγει, βράδιον δὲ Πανελλήνεσσι φαείνει, Πλάτων δὲ καὶ Θουκυδίδης καὶ οἱ
δόκιμοι βραδύτερον. Mooris 332 τάχιον οὐ λέγεται παρ' Αττικοῖς, ἀλλὰ θᾶττον.)
520. Some adverbs form their comparative also in -répws, after
the positive (516 f.), as:
(ευρέως ‘broadly) ευρυτέρως
(γελοίως ' ridiculously ') γελοιοτέρως
6
(ἀσφαλῶς 'safely) ἀσφαλεστέρως
beside εὐρύτερον
""
γελοιότερον
ἀσφαλέστερον.
1)
520. So too ελασσόνως beside ἔλασσον, κρεισσόνως beside κρείσσον,
καλλιόνως beside κάλλιον, ἀληθεστέρως, περισσοτέρως, etc. (καλλίστως
Great Louvre Pap. 2443 & 2465).
521. Another popular mode of forming the superlativo of adverbs is
resorted to, sinco a, by simply repeating the positivo (13), us: πολὺ
πολύ - πλεῖστον, ταχὺ ταχύ = τάχιστα. This kind of poriphrasis is now vory
common in N, as:
σφόδρα σφόδρα
ήδη ήδη, ταχὺ
λέγε σιγῇ σιγῇ
ταχύ ib. 973 &
πρωί πρωί Sopt. Ex. 16, 21 ; so too Theoph. Cont. 694, 7.
Sopt. Gen. 7, 19. ταχὺ ταχύ Gront Louvro Pap. 35 f. & 85.
ταχύ ib. 123, and often ; so too CLeemans 13, 19, also 3, etc.
λόγον Great Louvro Pap. 573 & 582 ; ἄρτι ἄρτι, ἤδη ἤδη, ταχὺ
1593; 1245. oven thrico σιγῇ σιγῇ σιγῇ ib. 557-8. Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. 95 (HIV)
[1] Compare tho froquont use of πολλὰ us advorb ovon in Homor, as: Σ 434
πολλὰ μάλ' οὐκ ἐθέλουσα. Η 358 πολλὰ λισσομένη. Aesch. Pr. 45 πολλὰ μισηθεῖσα
χειρωναξία. Αg. 1295 ὦ πολλὰ μὲν τάλαινα, πολλὰ δ᾽ αὖ σοφή. Soph. Aut.
1046 αἱ πολλὰ δεινοί.
150
COMPARISON OF ADVERBS OF MANNER.
[521-524.
330; 99, 473 f. etc.
κάτω κάτω εἰς τὴν γῆν.
(so now ὅπου καὶ ὅπου)
Apophth. 321 Α ποιμὴν ἄνω ἄνω εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν ἐγὼ δὲ
Theoph. 183, 20 ἄρτι ἄρτι. MGlycus 117 & 135 ὅπου ὅπου
soon'; IStaph, 178 καλὰ καλά, etc.
522. As observed above (518 ff. cp. 1185 f. & 1266 f.), all denominative
adverbs in N, whether in the positive, comparative, or superlative, end
in -a, thus being identical with the accusative neutor plural, as :
δυνατά strongly
ταπεινά humbly
ἁπλᾶ ' simply'
βαρεά ' heavily'
καλά ' well
κακά ' badly'
""
δυνατώτερα
ταπεινότερα
ἁπλότερα
βαρύτερα
πολλὰ δυνατά (cp. 518 )
πολλὰ ταπεινά
πολλὰ ἁπλᾶ
πολλὰ βαρεά
καλύτερα -λλίτερα (505)
πολλὰ καλά
πολλὰ κακά
& κάλλιο, also κάλλια
or καλλιὰ
κακώτερα
χειρότερα (χερώτ- 40)
522. Sο πολλά 'much'; empr. πλειά, πλέο (Otranto) and πλειό, recent and
uncommon πειδ or πιό (cp. Italian pil), πλειότερα οι περισσότερα ; sup. (πολλὰ)
περίσσ(ι)α (for πολλὰ πολλά 521).
522º. For adverbs in -ovra' see 822 f. & 1102".
523. Original adverbs of place, whether ending in -ω (-τέρω) οι
otherwise, retain that ending in the comparative and super-
lative also.
ἄνω above
κάτω ' below
ἔξω ' without
ἔσω ' within
ἔνδον 4 within ' (P)
(ἀπὸ οι άπω ? from ')
?
ἀνωτάτω
κατωτάτω
ἐξωτάτω
ἐσωτάτω
ἀνωτέρω
κατωτέρω
ἐξωτέρω
ἐσωτέρω
ἐνδοτέρω
ἐνδοτάτω
ἀπωτέρω ' farther
ἀπωτάτω
περαιτέρω ' further
ἐγγυτέρω
ἐγγυτάτω
ἐγγύτερον
ἐγγύτατα
(also ἔγγιον [1])
(also ἔγγιστα)
πλησίον ' near
5 πόρρω ' far
πλησιαιτέρω & -αίτερον
πορρωτέρω
πορρωτάτω
πρύσω & πόρσω
προσωτέρω
πέρα ‘beyond
ἐγγύς ‘nour
προσωτάτω & -ώτατα.
524. As far as they still survive, the above local adverbs form, since
T, their comparative by prefixing the preposition mapa- 'further
(cp. ὑπέρ 1615 f.). This formation is also followed by some other
kindred adverbs (op. ancient παρακατιών; παρακάτω Apophth. 261 A & c,
παρέκει ib. 157 € & 158 Λ. παράνω Leont. Neap. V. J. 82, 7).
ἄνω abovo
κάτω ‘bolow
comp. παράνω (for ὑπεράνω or ἀνωτέρω)
παρακάτω (for κατωτέρω)
παρέξω οι παραέξω (for ἐξωτέρω)
παραπέρα (for προσωτέρω)
παρέκει, also παρεκεί (Του περαιτέρω)
ἔξω ' without
17
(όξω [Croto] ' without
29
παράξω τον ἐξωτέρω)
ἔσω ' within
παρέσω οι παραέσω
πέρα ‘beyond
11
ἐκεῖ ' thoro
ἐμπρός (οι ὀμπρός) before
17
mapwde 'nearer hero' (Crote, 564)
ἐ]πῶδε hither (Crete).
ὀπίσω behind
(ὧδε ‘horo' A)
παρεμπρὸς οι παραμπρός (150, c)
παροπίσω οι παραπίσω (150, α)
[4] Phryn, 265 ἔγγιον ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐγγύτερον μὴ λέγε, ἀλλ' ἐγγύτερον.
151
525-527.]
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
525.
Ist Person.
Emphatic unemphatic
(orthotone) (tonoclitic)
PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
2nd Person.
emphatic unemphatic
(orthotone) (tonoclitic)
Sing. Ν. ἐγώ Ι'
σύ 'thou
Α. ἐμέ
με
σέ
σε
G.
ἐμοῦ
μου
σου
σου
D.
ἐμοί
μοι
σοί
σου
Du. N.A.
G.D.
νώ [1]
σφώ
νων [1]
σφῶν
P1. Ν.
ἡμεῖς ‘we
ὑμεῖς ‘you'
Α.
ἡμᾶς
ἡμας
ὑμᾶς
G. ἡμῶν
ἡμων
ὑμῶν
μας
ύμων
D. ἡμῖν
ἡμιν
ὑμῖν
ὑμῖν.
3rd Person.
emphatic
unemphatic
(orthotone)
(tonoclitic)
(αυτός, ό, ή) ‘he, it, she'
αυτον, ην, ο
αὐτόν, ό, ήν
αὐτοῦ, do., ἧς
αὐτῷ, do., ἢ
αυτώ, do. (or ά)
αὐτοῖν do. (or air)
(αὐτοί, ά, αί) they'
αὐτούς, ά, άς
αὐτῶν
αὐτοῖς, do., αἷς
αὐτου, ης, ου
αὐτῳ, η, ψ
αύτους, α, ας
αὐτων
αυτοις, do., αις.
525. The accentuation ἐμοὶ (μοι) and ood instead of ἐμοῖ (μοῖ) and σοι, seemg
to rost on the theory that, unless proceeding from contraction, final -o and -ai
count short (20). As to of ubi and οἴκοι, their quantity and accent were
probably suggested by ποῖ, πανταχοῖ, Ἰσθμοί, etc.
526. Besides the 3rd person as given above, there is another form
used in the oblique cases: Sing. A. 2, G. oû, D. oî, — Pl. A. opâs, G. opâr,
D. σφίσι". This by-form, however, is found chiefly in archaic and
poetic Greek, while A does not use it except in the plural and dative
singular. On the whole, it may be questioned whether this form was
current oven in 4 speech seeing that it disappears from the inscrip-
tions as early as 395 B.C. (Cp. KMeisterhans² 120 & Kühner-Blass
i. 595-8).
[526. Moeris 310 σφείς Αττικῶς, αὐτοὶ Ἕλληνες, σφίσιν Αττικῶς, αὐτοῖς
Ἕλληνες. σφῶν ᾿Αττικῶς, αὐτοῖς Ἕλληνες. σφᾶς ᾿Αττικῶς, αὐτοὺς Ἕλληνες.]
527. The emphatic forms, which generally are lengthier or fuller,
occur through all the cases, and are always accented. On the other
[1] Moeris 244 νὼ δυϊκῶς ᾿Αττικῶς, ἡμεῖς Ἑλληνικῶς. νῶν μὴ συνεκφωνουμένου
του 1, ἡμῖν.
152
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
[527-530.
hand, the unemphatic forms are wanting in the nominative and bear
no individual stress, but are (or ought to be) treated as ordinary
tonoclitics. 94. 97, b. 102. (Cp. Kühner-Blass i. 339–340, & 501-502.)
528. The emphatic forms are used when emphasis or anti-
thesis is aimed at, as:`
cὲ λέγω ' it is thee I mean.” οὐκ ἐμοὶ ἀλλὰ εοὶ ἀρέσκει, ‘it pleases not
me but thee.' Xen. An. 1, 14, 16 èsw µèv hồŋ ¡mâc éñaivô· öñws dè kai
ἤδη ἐπαινῶ·
Ὑμεῖς ἐμὲ ἐπαινέσετε ἐμοὶ μελήσει.
528¹. The emphatic forms are also generally used after pre-
positions, because these words are proclitic, as: èπ' èµoí 'on
me μετὰ σέ ' after thee'; περὶ ὑμῶν ' on you”; μετ' αὐτοῦ “ with
him'; πρòs aνTOús 'to them';—but πρós μe 'to me.'
529. The emphasis is still more intensified by adding the enclitic
particle °γε, as: ἐγώ γε, σύ γε, ἐμέ γε, ἐμοί γε, ἐμοῦ γε—ἡμεῖς γε.
529. Owing to their very frequent use in answers (2058), the two combina-
tions ἐγώ γε (scil. οἶμαι, ἡγοῦμαι, δοκῶ, νομίζω) and ἐμοί γε (scil. δοκεῖ) wore
gradually weakened to standing adverbial phrases éywye and ëμotye (Hdn. ii.
24, otc.), in which the recessive accent was probably suggested by the synonymous
terms μáλa ye, πávu ye (cp. the vocative also 257). We nust therefore distin-
μάλα γε
πάνυ
guish between the emphatic pronoun éywye I and the adverb eywye yes, and
not write, as is commonly done, ywye for either case. JWackernagel's theory
(Beiträge z. Lehre d. Gr. Akzents, 1893, p. 19), which assumes eywye to be the
original and èµéye an hystorogeneous complex, is too speculative and improb-
ablo, since it gives ěywye—a lule (mere A) formula-a much greater age than
it does to the simple form èµè with its very old derivative uós, and moreover
leaves unexplained why there is no such analogue of ἔγωγε as ἥμισγε,
Χὕμασγε, Χαὐτοσγε, λέγε, seeing that these pronominal forms are surely very
old. (Cp. also HHirt 33.)
530. That the unemphatic or enclitic forms of the personal pro-
nouns in all three persons were uttered rapidly and without any
stress even in antiquity, is expressly stated by ancient authorities.
(HChandler² 944-957; Kühner-Blass i. 339-340 & 591; cp. M 204
κόψε γάρ αὐτον [sic] ἔχοντα. Charax in Bekk. An. 1153; Apoll.
Pron. 41 C; Hdn. ap. Schol. Ven. M 204.) Their tonoclitic nature
and the presence of monosyllabic beside disyllabic forms, even in
early antiquity (ἐμέ με, ἐμοῦ μου, ἐμοὶ μοι, ep. τινος του, τινι τῳ ; then
μιν, έ, ού, οἱ, σφας, σφών, σφίσι"), affected the rest and have thus
reduced, since G, all unemphatic forms to uniform monosyllables,
the process beginning with avrov, the commonest of all (cp. 1399 f.).
In this way αὐτου was shortened to του (after μου, σου ; cp. also the
article του), αὐτης to της, αὐτον to τoν, αὐτο to τo, αύτην to την, αὐτους
to τους, αύτα to τα, αύτας to τas (still later τες 561), αὐτων to των (still
later Tws 534). That this process was furthered also by the asso-
ciated and kindred article (τόν, τό, τήν, τοῦ, τῆς, τούς, τά, τάς, τῶν) is
obvious, since all these reduced forms have become uniform with
the corresponding forms of the article (cp. 546).
CIG 8634 (aftor 557†), 5 Tĥs Baσiλeías TOY, ib. 7 τῆς συζύγου του Θεο-
δώρας. CWossoly Prol. 63 (+618) φιλανθρώπου ΜωΝ. Mal. 281, I σтρwσαS
ΤΗΝ (V. 1. αὐτὴν) διὰ μυλίτου λίθου. Porph. Cor. 295, το πολλά των τὰ ἔτη.
So too 295, 15. Alchom. 36, ΙΙ δ θεός το ἔδωκεν διὰ τοὺς πτωχούς. 317, 7
ἔπειτα λαβών το. 324, 13 ἐάν το ἔχουσιν. 326, 23 νά το ποιήσῃς βαθύ. 328, 19
καὶ πάλιν το βάνε. 330, I f. ἔπαρον ἀσῆμιν. χύσε το βάλε το, σύρε το μίαν
popáv, BáλE TOY σtepáviv; etc. etc.-So too in Prodr. Span. Glycas, etc. (ep.
ELegrand Bibl. ii. p. 21, 107 ds тa kрaтî µeтá THC), and ever since passim.
153
531-535.]
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
531. Since the reduction of ἡμῶν and ὑμῶν to an identical μων ('μων)
caused confusion, the latter was of necessity roplaced by a novel forma-
tion. This was reis, formed from the singular oé, after the analogy of
ἡμεῖς (532, c).
532. The fuller forms êµé, èμoû, ¿µoí, ¿yw, of the first person have given
birth to analogous forms in the 2nd porson : êσé, ¿oú. Again these full
forms have affected their respective plurals, and thus called forth êpeîs
for ἡμεῖς, ἐσεῖς for σεῖς (= ὑμεῖς) (542. 572).
a. ¿ooû Pap. Drosd. in Wiener Stud. vii. 77 (IInd B.C.); so too CIG 4864 ; Louvre
Pap. 18, 10 (Ist); Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. 203, 72 (+ VI); Span. 32.—èré” Roboam
73. Glycas 242. 312. 369. Prodr. 3, 501. 6, 365 & 366; ¿oévav Roboam 50. 91;
Prodr. 5, 2. 14; 6, 366. Belth. 102;-and evor since passim.
b. èµév CIG 3420 ( = GKaibel 322); Hermes 29, 422, 2.-Pecnt. 1. 2. Prodr. 3, 631. 6,
368. µéva Pocat. 4. Belth. 203. épévav Prodr. 3, 330. 5, 99. 6, 88. 183. 288.
c. σas or oâs (=vµâv) Porph. Cer. 36, 11; 37,6; 38, 22; 42, 8; 44, 22; 51, 13; 61,
2; 380, 15; 383, 1, 2, 3. 384, 5; 650, 12; 651, 11. (See also 534 & 1309.)
σas or σâs (=vµá:) Porph. Cer. 380, 16, 17. Span. 232, 233.
d. ẻơú Roboam 15. Bolth. 50. 108. 113. Hermon. 13, 418; èσeîs Belth. 608. Chron.
Mor. Prol. 69; 196. σeîs EGcorg. Const. 443;-and ever since passim.
e. èueîs FTrinch. p. 16 (†1015); GSpata 122 (A.D. 1142) èµeîs (ubi èpoîs). Prodr.
3, 76 (cp. 4, 76); Asin. 14 éµeis; also Apokopos 371.—¿ µâs FTrinch. 34 (†1034);
Chron. Mor. frequently (as 3848 & 3861 úπò èμâs). Cantacuz. iii. 94 dm' èµâs.
ẻµâs).
ἐμᾶς.
μas or μâs FTrinch. 34 (†1034) and ofton; Prodr. 4, 487; 503; 533. 6, 278; 294.
Pul. 332.
Asin. êµâs 161; 514; 516, etc. Pocat. 355.—and over since passim.
533. The plural of ¿yw (†µeîs, †µâs, ýµŵr, †µîv) resisted the longest, possibly
because it occurs very frequently in the Lord's Prayer (the daily suppli-
cation of every Greek in M), whore religious deference prevented its
abbreviation[1].
534. The genitive plural of the 1st and 2nd persons (*)μŵr and *(è)oŵv
boing inconvenient because of the untenable character of final -v (218. 219.
App. iii. 11-15), the difficulty was obviated by substituting the accusa-
tive form ()uâs (ẻ)σâs for the gonitivo (Porph. Cer. 36, 11: 38, 20 moλU-
χρόνιον ποιήσει [read -σῃ] ὁ θεὸς τὴν ἁγίαν βασιλείαν σας. 380, 16 θεός διαφυ
d
λágei [read -έn] cac. ib. 17 εὐλογῶν τὸν γάμον cac. 383, 1 πάντα ἐχθρόν cac
δουλώσῃ πρὸ τῶν ποδῶν cac, etc. (532, c). On the same principlo των has
since boon changed to Tws or (now chiefly in northern N) to Tous, as: TÙ
παιδί τως οι τὸ παιδί τους for and besido τὸ παιδί των ‘their child'; τους
(or Tws) Tó 'na for and bosido Twv Tó 'nа 'I told them so.' (Cp. Span. 42
τὴν βουλήν τογc. IStaph. ii. 164 οὐδὲν ἔχουν εἰρήνην μέσον τως.)
C.
535. Since tho time whon movable -v came to be folt as a constituent
suffix to sonantic endings (221. 330), and particularly to all accusativos
singular, èuè and ẻoè wore also affected, and so bocamo èµèv and (e)oèv
(Eμèv CIG 3440—214 A.D. cp. GKaibel 322 h); did σèn édvgdoon CLeemans
117—II-III A.D. 7-8). When further a reaction followed, and every
final was droppod (219), èµèv and (e)oér, among other classes of words,
instead of dropping their parasitic - boforo a consonant, annexod
an analogical -a, and so woro amplified to èµéva, èoéva; so too aúróva,
αὐτῆνα (after δεῖνα, τινά, ἕνα, τὸν μήνα, 132. 537. 580). It may be further
noted that terminal -a boing characteristic not only of tho accusative,
but also of the genitive singular (277. 290), the forms épéva and èoéva
were also mistaken for genitives and thus wore sometimes further ampli-
fied to èµéva”, éoéva" (537). This phenomenon, howevor, of the amplified
forms èμéva" and toéva" (used either as accusativos or gonitivos), though
[1] Πάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ...τὸν ἄρτον ἡμῶν τὸν ἐπιούσιον δὸς ΗΜΙΝ
σήμερον· καὶ ἄφες ἡμῖν τὰ ὀφειλήματα ἡμῶν ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς ἀφίεμεν τοῖς ὀφειλέταις
ἡμῶν, καὶ μή εἰσενέγκῃς ἡμᾶς εἰς πειρασμόν, ἀλλὰ ῥῦσαι ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ πονηροῦ.
154
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
[535-542.
dating since B (532, a, b), has not yet gained ascendency, the ancient
forms euè and coè being still equally popular.
536. To analogous influences is due the amplification in N speech of the
tonoclitic forms τον to τονε, την to τηνε, των to τωνε (134. 208). Likewise the
sigmatic proclitics μας, σας, τους, τως (=των), εἰς, before a consonant ofton
become, in N speech, μασε, σασε, τουσε, τωσε, είσε (then frequently abbreviated
to 'σe) to avoid the accumulation of incompatible consonants (208). Here the
suffixal -e has been apparently borrowed from the syllabic augment (µas Bλete
μασε βλέπει ; σας ἐγνώρισα σασε γνωρίζω, 1325. 208. 725). These amplified items,
howevor, when standing enclitically, resume their original form, final -s being
the preeminently popular sound. (Cp. 69 [1]. 267. 725.)
537. In some rocent cases the euphonic amplification has gone so far as
to attract more than one movable v with a protective vowel, mostly -e, so that
the original word has been enlarged by two movable v's and two protective
vowels alternately, as : èµé-v-a-v-e, éoé-v-a-v-e. So too éva”. (132). 535. App.
iii. 30.)
538. The ultimate or present stage of the personal pronouns then may
be shown by the following table :-
1st Porson.
2nd Person.
Emphatic Unomph. Emph. Uncmph.
(orthotone) (tonoclitic) (orthotone) (tonoclitic)
3rd Person.
Emphatic
(orthotono)
Unemphatic
(tonoclitic)
Sing. N.
yw
A. ἐμέ (να)
ἐσύ
με
ἐσένα")
σε
Gt.
μου
σου
Pl. Ν.
ἐμεῖς
Α. ἐμᾶς
ἐσεῖς
αυτός [1], 6, ή
αὐτόν, ό, ήν
avtov, do., îs
αὐτοί, ά, ές [2]
μας
ἐσᾶς
σας
G. "}
αὐτούς, ά, άς(ές [3])
αὐτῶν, do., do.
""
:
τον, το, την
του, do., της
τους,τα,τας (τες[31)
των (τως), do., do.
539. The pronoun aúrós, -ó, -ý, is declined like an adjective in -ós,
-óv, -n, the only difference being that it generally drops the final -v in
the nominative and accusative neuter (KMeisterhans2 122). The same
inflection is followed by ἄλλος, ἄλλο, ἄλλη ' other; ἐκεῖνος, ἐκεῖνο, ἐκείνη
that,' and ouros, TOûTo, aurŋ, 'this;' os, o, ' which;' and the article
Ó, Tú, ʼn (250).—Mark further that besides its function as a personal
pronoun, avròs is also intensive, meaning 'self,' as: avròs ó Buσideùs
or & Buσilevs avrós 'the king himself.' (1239. 1418.)
<
540. Preceded by the article, avròs means 'same' (1239. 1419), and
canbe blended with it by crasis (159ff.), whenever the article closes with
a sonant, viz. ὁ αὐτὸς αὑτός, τοῦ αὐτοῦ ταὐτοῦ, τῷ αὐτῷ ταὐτῷ, τὰ αὐτὰ
ταυτά, τὸ αὐτὸ ταὐτό, and, by analogy, oftener ταὐτόν !—but τῆς αὐτῆς,
τὸν αὐτόν, etc.
541. For ó autòs N uses ó idios (613).
542. In N αὐτὸς has four different forms : αὐτός, εὐτός, ἀτός (sometimes
amplified to ȧñaтús, 547), and *Tos. Αὐτὸς (with its by-form αὖτος from
aurŋ [Span. 242], uncommon in Greece, but rogular in Otranto), is a de-
monstrativo and porsonal pronoun and corrosponds to the ancient oÛTOS,
English 'this' and 'ho.'-Tho socond, eurós, which appears oven in
[1] Also εὐτός εὐτόν otc., after the analogy of Ἐμέ, Εσέ, Ἐκεῖνος (542).
[2] After the articlo rés in its latest stage (559–562).
155
542-544.]
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
an inscription of Roman times [PCauer Del. 224], and is sometimes
reduced to ἐτός [ep. τραυλός, ο τρελός, τρελός], also ἔτος, and which
owes its initial - to ἐγώ, ἐσύ, ἐκεῖνος (532. 572), is also common, espe-
cially in insular speech, and corresponds in use to αὐτός. The third,
ἀτός, has been in popular use since @ (ep. J Wackernagel in KZ 1893, 7;
TȧTÓ UWilken in Hermes 28, 417, +IInd). But while still preserving
its force in Pontos (also in Icaros and elsewhere), it has gonerally
become determinative, like A aúrós: 'self.' It is now almost always
(1423, ι) followed by the enclitic genitive of the appropriate personal
pronoun (546), as : ἀτός μου ' myself, ἀτός σου ‘thyself, ἀτός του himself,
ἀτή της herself, ἀτοί μας ' ourselves; ἀτός του ὁ βασιλεᾶς οι ὁ βασιλεᾶς
ατός του “the king himsolf.’Απατὸς has a similar use but is more
emphatic (547. 549). The last, *τός, which, owing to its unemphatic
nature, is not required in the nominative (cp. 1164), supplies the unem-
phatic oblique cases of the 3rd person, and is always used as a tonoclitic
(1423, c).
>
543. Occasionally *ros is heard in tho colloquial expressions νά τος ‘thore
he is, and που 'ν' τος ' where is he'? Those phrases, however, aro far moro
popular and commoner in the form νά τον (also ἔν τον", in South Italian
Greek ἄν του, where ày and ἂν point to Latin en=ιδέ, ιδού), and που 'ν' τον”,
both being apparently due to the analogy of the current phrase (γειὰ) ιδέ τον
seo him,' 'look at him.' Now as the enclitic rov is inconveniont owing to
its final v (218-219), it had to be either amplified into Tove (536), or altorod
instond to *ros (534), namely νά τονε, ποῦ 'ν' τονε, or νά τος, που 'ν' τος.
That Tos
is a modifiod accusative and not a nominative, is further shown by the fact that
it nover appears as subject in the sentence-in that caso it would resume its
full form αὐτὸς or εὐτός—and that the above phrases, when turned into the
plural, run thus : νά τους, που 'ν' τους, nover νά τοι, ποῦ 'ν' τοι.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
544. The reflexive pronouns which, owing to the nature of
the case, are reflexive only in the oblique cases, are composed
of αὐτὸς and the personal pronouns ἐμέ, σέ, and (526) used as
prefixes. In the plural of the 1st and 2nd person each compo-
nent is declined separately.
'thyself'
'myself'
Sing. [Ν. ἐγὼ αὐτός, -ή]
[σὺ αὐτός, -ή]
σ(ε)αυτόν, -ήν
Α. ἐμαυτόν -ήν
G. ἐμαυτοῦ τῆς
D. ἐμαυτῷ
' ourselves'
Ρ1. [Ν. ἡμεῖς αὐτοί, -αί]
Α. ἡμᾶς αὐτούς,
αὐτάς
G. ἡμῶν αὐτῶν
σεαυτοῦ, τῆς
σεαυτῷ, τῇ
'yourselves
[ὑμεῖς αὐτοί, αἱ ]
αι
ὑμᾶς αὐτούς, αυτάς
ὑμῶν αὐτῶν
D. ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς,
αὐταῖς
ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς, — αὐταῖς
'himself'
[αὐτὸς οὗτος]
(ε)αυτόν, -6, -ήν
(ε)αὑτοῦ, do., -ῆς
(ε)avrų, do., -î
[αὐτοὶ οὗτοι]
'themselves'
(ε)αυτούς, -α, -άς ; also σφᾶς αὐτούς, αὐτάς
(ἑαυτῶν, also σφῶν αὐτῶν
(ε)αὑτοῖς, do., -αῖς ; also σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, αὐταῖς.
156
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
[545-549.
545. The 2nd and 3rd persons occur both in the full and in the con-
tracted forms, namely σεαυτὸν and σαυτόν, (ε)αὑτὸν, ()αυτούς, etc. (150, c).
546. The inconvenience of the cumbersome plural ἡμᾶς αὐτούς, ὑμᾶς
αὐτούς, σφᾶς αὐτούς, ἡμῶν αὐτῶν, ὑμῶν αὐτῶν, σφῶν αὐτῶν, ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, ὑμῖν
αὐτοῖς, σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, as compared with the short forms (ε)αυτούς, ()αὑτῶν,
(ε)αὑτοῖς, was so much felt even in classical antiquity (ep. ὅτου, ὅτων, ὅτοις,
åtta, for oűtivos, etc. 610), that even Aeschylos, Plato, Isocrates, Demo-
sthenes, Xenophion, and others occasionally (4 inscriptions regularly since
400 B.C.
cp. KMeisterhans' 120) substitute the more serviceable form
(avroùs etc. for the corresponding cases of the 1st and 2nd persons.
P writers, influenced by popular speech, went still further in this direc-
tion, so that Polybios knows no longer any other plural form than kavтoús
(FKülker 277; Kühner-Blass i. 599), while in NT Greek both the plural
and singular forms (é)aúτdy and (e)avroùs stand also for the 1st and 2nd
persons, when this does not involve ambiguity (GBWiner, 187). In
the further process of time the use of (¿)αúτdv became still more universal
and ultimately obtained almost exclusive currency in the popular language.
At the same time, the emphatic form avròv very often appears in G popular
speech (since 74 B.C.) in the reduced by-form ĉaròv (JWackernagel adduces
fifty instances in KZ xiii. 5-8 & 61; cp. also CIA iv. 630 b (34 B. C.), 19;
Gr. Urk. Berlin 197 [+181, 5 ἑατῆς ; 22 ἑατοῖς ; 183 [+85], 3 ἑατοῦ ; 6 ἑατῇ ; 29
karîs, etc.; cp. KMeisterhans² 121, 5 & 122, 11)—and this popular by-form,
in proportion as it became general, suffered abbreviation and weakening of
meaning: that is ἑατὸν was reduced to ἁτόν (150, c). Now ἁτὸν having lost
its original force called for some compensation, and this was found first in
annexing the gonitive of the respective personal pronoun (1407), and sub-
sequently in prefixing to it the article also (542; cp. 530). Accordingly :—
Singular.
Plural.
ist pers. τὸν ἁτόν
τοὺς ἁτούς μας
τὰς ἁτάς μας
μου
τὴν ἁτήν μου
2nd pers. τὸν ἁτόν σου
τὴν ἁτήν σου
3rd pers. τὸν ἁτόν του
τὴν ἁτήν της
>
τοὺς ἁτούς σας
τὰς ἁτάς σας
τοὺς ἁτούς των
τὰς ἁτάς των.
547. A second and perhaps more popular form of reflexive pronoun current
since M, is ȧπaтds (542) from M áravтús (549), which is followed by the gonitive
of personal pronouns and in the oblique cases takes the article, as: åñатós µov
ἀπατός μου
myself, ἀπατός σου ‘yourself, your honour';—τὸν ἀπατόν μου, τὴν ἀπατήν
μου ; τὸν ἀπατόν σου, τὴν ἀπατή” σου; τὸν ἀπατόν του, τὴν ἀπατήν της Ρ1. τοὺς
ἀπατούς μας, τοὺς ἀπατούς σας, τοὺς ἀπατούς των. (C. Pl. Phaed. 258 Α τὸν ἑαΥΤΩΝ
δὴ λέγων καὶ ἐγκωμιάζων.)
a
548. On the other hand, kavтòv and μavтdy are occasionally met with
in post-Christian inscriptions for the 2nd and 3rd persons (SSterrot i. 247,
no. 278, 5), and this practico is common in M compositions (as ABC 22, 2
тdy éμavтóν μov 'my own self,' NSophianos 79). These forms are still often
heard in popular speech, but their presont usago is probably due to the
influence of the literary style.
549. Another intensive form of the reflexive pronoun was anciently
oflected by tho ropetition of αυτός, namely αὐτὸς αὐτόν (rather αυτόν),
αὐτὸς αὐτοῦ, etc., which subsequently coalescod into the compound αὐταυτός
(Kühnor-Blass, i. 600; cp. ảλdýλous and ẻµavтóv). If this clumsy form was
actually current in the common language one might fool tempted to sco
a survival of it in tho N ἀπατός (547) : *ἀφταφτός: Καφατός: ἀπατός, which is
the gonuine reflexive pronoun in present popular speech (moro gonuino
than avtór, 548). In reality, however, ȧnards is identical with M and
prosent (chiofly northern) àпautós, that is airds curiously strengthened by
tho profix ano- (547).
157
550-557.] RECIPROCAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
RECIPROCAL PRONOUN.
550. The reciprocal pronoun each-other which, owing to the
nature of its meaning, has no singular, is formed in Greek from
ἄλλος repeated in due form: ἄλλος ἄλλον, ἄλλοι ἄλλους ‘one an-
other and fused with dissimilation to ἀλλήλους.
άλληλα
Plur. A. ἀλλήλους
G. ἀλλήλων
D. ἀλλήλοις
550b. For N see 1410-1413.
ἀλλήλας
ἀλλήλαις
Dual ἀλλήλω
ἀλλήλοιν
"
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
551. (1) Unemphatic: 'my':
• •
•
μου
σου
αὐτοῦ
αὐτῆς
ὑμῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν (or -ων)
ὁ, τό, ἡ-οἱ, τά, αἱ .
ὁ, τό, ἡ-οἱ, τά, αἱ . . . ἡμῶν
552. So still in N with this difference that the monosyllabic
(tonoclitic) forms του, της, των, μας, σας (525. 538) are substituted for
the disyllabic αὐτοῦ (or rather -ου), αὐτῆς (-ης), αὐτῶν(-ων), ἡμῶν (-ων),
ὑμῶν (-ων).
553. (2) Emphatic, also reflexive:
(δ) ἐμός, όν, ή
(δ) ἡμέτερος, ον, α
'my,' 'my own.'
σός, όν, ή
ὑμέτερος, ον, α
554. Also idios, ov, a 'own' for all persons (556), which form T-M
has modified to δικός μου, and finally to the more popular ἐ]δικός
(130).
T
554. On tho other hand, the A forms ἐμὺς σὺς ἡμέτερος seem to lingor still
in Pontos and Cappadocin. Thus tho Trapozuntian dialect uses reµdv for
‘my, τεσὸν for ' thine,' ἐ]μέτερος for Four, σέτερος for 'thine, and even
ἐκεινέτερος for their.
555. (3) Reflexive: 'my own.'
§, τό, ἡ-οἱ, τά, αἱ . . . ἐμαυτοῦ, ἧς
σεαυτοῦ, ἧς
ἑαυτοῦ, ὃς
δ, τό, ἡ-οἱ, τά, αἱ . . . ἡμέτερος (αὐτῶν)
ὑμέτερος (αὐτῶν)
ἑαυτῶν, also σφέτερος αὐτῶν.
556. Instead of ἡμέτερος (ὑμέτερος) αὐτῶν, tho forms ἡμῶν
(ὑμῶν) αὐτῶν are also used. Moreover the adjective ἴδιος, ov, α
(sometimes also oikeîos) 'own,' may stand for all persons. Soe
1416 f.
557. (4) Both reflexive and emphatic (1416): 'my very own.'
ὁ ἴδιος σεαυτοῦ
ὁ σὸς ἴδιος
ὁ ἴδιος ἐμαυτοῦ
οἱ ἡμέτεροι ἴδιοι
οἱ ὑμέτεροι ἴδιοι
(& ὁ ἐμὸς ἴδιος
ὁ ἴδιος ἑαυτοῦ
""
οι
">
οἱ σφέτεροι ἴδιοι
or οἱ ἴδιοι (σφῶν αὐτῶν
557b. For more particulars and examples see 1414-7.
158
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
[558-563.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
558. Demonstrative pronouns are current in A Greek :-
I. ὁ, τό, ἡ ‘this
2. öde, tóde, nde 'this... (here)'
3. αὐτός, αὐτό, αυτή ' this
4. οὗτος, τοῦτο, αὕτη this
5. ἐκεῖνος, ἐκεῖνο, ἐκείνη ‘that.”
559. I. ô, Tó, , the oldest, simplest, and weakest of all de-
monstrative pronouns, had even prior to A lost its demon-
strative force and become a mere definite article.
For its form and inflection see 250; for its history and use 1195–1241.
560. All masculine and neuter forms of the article still fully sur-
vive in N; so too those of the feminine gender except the nom.
plural ai, which still lingers only in Otranto, while everywhere else
it has been changed to i, that is oi (if not [sometimes misspelt y]
after ý Týν Tôs, cp. 561). This new feminine plural made its appear-
ance first in M compositions, but must have been earlier in popular use.
FTrinch. 155 Houréaus. Prodr. 6, 374 Ḥ Veîpes. Chron. Mor. Prol. oí ¿exóv-
τισσες, οἱ σάρκες. Κ. 1059 ή συμφωνιας. 4631 ἡ ἐκκλησίες. Bolth. 202 οἱ συγ-
γενίδες μου, γυναῖκες ἰδικές σας. 603 ἵσταντο καὶ οἱ τρεῖς ὡραῖες); τοι οἱ
Xápires, etc. Pul 45 σápres. 51 Ḥ evyevídes λais, and so on ever since.
(Cp. NSophianos 37 ἡ εὐθεῖα [i. e. nom.] τῶν θηλυκῶν πληθυντικῶν υἱ.)
561. A further departure from ancient Greek is the change of rás, since
tho XIt, first to τὲς (some writo ταὶς or ταῖς, NSophianos 37 ἡ αἰτιατικὴ
[i. e. accus. pl.] тŵν Оŋλνкŵv Taîc) through the influence of the homo-
phonous nominal ending -es (332), (GSpata 90 [A.D. 1095] eis taîc Tpeis
àmdéais. 124 åπd taîc kóyxais. Chron. Mor. Prol. 769 tèc aïpeoes), then tʊ
Ts (written also rois, rís), a change apparently due to the frequency of the
¿-sound in ǹ, týν, TŷS (TOîs), Ol. This phenomenon, however, is still in
process of evolution, and has not yet ousted the classical form rás, nor
its subsequent by-form rés. For the form rds still survivos in several
chiofly insular idioms (Chios, Rhodes, Icaros, Leros, Pontos).
562. Another still moro recent chango-since the XV-peculiar to
some islands (Crete, Cyprus, otc.), consists in the change of the form Tôs
to Tơn through syncope (146), and oponthetics (131 f.). Thus Tŷs (as
representative of rs and 7ds) became first T's, then r's+i, ron, as: To'
ἀδερφῆς, τσ᾿ ἀδερφές—τσῆ δούλας, τσὴ δοῦλες, This double process soon
affected the masculino accusativo roùs also, thus producing Tơi (written
τσῆ, τσή, οι τσοί), as: τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς—τσ᾽ ἀδερφούς ; τσὴ (or τσοί) γέρους. By
the same procoss τίποτις becamo τύποτσι (Cretan τίβοτσι) (something,
apparently also M-N ëтns (sc. λoyŷs), èr's, thon eroi [cp. Spanish asi] so
(as IStaph. 437. ABC 27, 6. 51, 3. 71, 5. 74, 6. 75, 4.) NSophianos 82
κατομωτικὰ ἐπιρρήματα· ναί, ἔτζη, ναίσκε, εἴτις, οὕτως. (Cp. 573. 596 [1].)
563. 2. öde, tóde, de, 'this (one) hore' points to something
present or near. It is simply the article 8, Tó, ʼn (559), amplified
by the addition of the intensive particle & in its original form
dé (AE, 6. 1774¹ f.). The inflection and accentuation, therefore,
are those of the article (250) with -de annexed to each case.
159
563-570.]
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
Singular
Plural
Ν. ὅδε τόδε
ήδε
οἵδε
τάδε
αδε
Α. τόνδε
99
τήνδε
τούσδε
τάσδε
G. τοῦδε +
D. τ δε
τῆσδε
τῇδε
τῶνδε
τοῖσδε + =
ταίσδε
564. Owing to its abnormal inflection, this pronoun has not survived
in N, the only form extant being ὁ τάδες (for the -s see 248 & 339) & τάδε
ποιός, τὸ τάδε & τάδε ποιόν, ἡ τάδε & τάδε ποιά, used in the sense of δεῖνα (600)
(ep. also the Cretan adverb παρῶδε ‘nearer here, πῶδε ' hither; 524).
565. 3. Οὗτος, τοῦτο, αὕτη, ‘this (person or thing referred to),
is also a lengthened and intensive form of the demonstrative
article (559), and substantially follows its inflection.
Singular
Ν. οὗτος τοῦτο αὕτη
Plural
οὗτοι ταῦτα αὗται
Α. τοῦτον
ταύτην
τούτους
39
99
G. τούτου
ταύτης
τούτων
D. τούτῳ
ταύτῃ
τούτοις
Dual.
Μ.
Ν.
Γ.
ΝΑ. τούτω
GD. τούτοιν
(also ταύτα)
(,, ταύται)
ταύτας
=
ταύταις.
566. The initial complex τουτ-, occurring as it does through all
the oblique cases (cp. also τοῖος, τοιοῦτος, τόσος, τηλικούτος, τηνos, and
589), seems to have been, ever since A, identified with the seat of
deictic force. It was therefore extended to the few cases lacking it,
and has thus produced the N forms τοῦτος, τοῦτοι, τούτη, τοῦτες (cp.
the Doric form τούτοι, τούτας, also τοι, ται), in Bova τοῦντο (from τοῦνο
× τοῦτο). The uniformity thus effected can be traced, irrespective of
the Doric form τούτοι, τούτας (τοί), back to P times, as : τούτην Gr. Pap.
Br. Mus. 38, 17 (B.C. 158-7).
567. In addition to its changes referred to, τοῦτος has been rocently
affected by the accentuation of its synonymous αὐτός (539), and thus
assumed the following N inflection (578) :
Ν.
Α.
τοῦτος
τοῦτον
τοῦτο
Gr.
τούτου (570)
τούτου-Νου
τούτη
τούτην
τούτης
τούτη-ΝΑς
τοῦτοι
τούτους
τούτων
τούτω-Να <
τοῦτα τοῦτες
567. Cp. CIA ii. 305, 16 [400 B.C.] & RWagner 109 TOÛTOL; CIG iv. 8683
πόλις ταύτη; Alchem. 38, τι ἡ μαγνησία ἡ ὑελουργικὴ ταύτη ; 8702 ὁ πύργος
τοῦτος. (Conversely οὕτη for τῇδε, @Kaibel 96, Attica ; οὗτον Bull. Corr.
Hell. 1880 p. 141, Tanagra.)
568. 3. Aútós, auró, aùrý “this.' For its inflection see 525 & 538 f.;
for its P-N history 542 f.; for its use 539 f. & 1418-23.
569. 5. Ἐκεῖνος, ἐκεῖνο, ἐκείνη ' that, follows the infection of
αυτός.
570. This demonstrative is fully preserved in N. But its asso-
ciation with αὐτὸς (542) has gone so far as to even affect their accen-
tuation. Accordingly the genitive throughout, and the accusative
plural masculine of ἐκεῖνοs are accented both ways (567. 577), viz.
Ν. ἐκεῖνος ἐκεῖνο ἐκείνη —ἐκεῖνοι ἐκεῖνα ἐκεῖνες
Λ. ἐκεῖνου
α. ἐκείνοῦ «
ἐκείνην
ἐκείνῆς
ἐκείνους
ἐκείνων
"
=
160
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
[571-578.
571. A syncopated form ἐκειός, ἐκειό, ἐκειά, (ep. ποιός, τέτοιος) is sometimes
heard in the Ionian and Tsaconic dialects; then eîvos in Pontos.
572. The initial e- of ἐκεῖνος, associated with that of ἐγώ, ἐμέ, (ἐσύ, ἐμεῖς,
etc. ep. 532), was mistaken for an intensive prefix, and thus has been
transferred, since G (542), as such to kindred words, viz.
εὐτός (also ἔτός 542)
ἐτοῦτος [1]
ἐτέτοιος
ἐτόσος
For ἔτοιοs see 584.
for and beside αὐτός (542)
""
""
τοῦτος
τέτοιος
""
""
τόσος
29
""
573. The process of intensification has gone even so far as to superadd ἔδε
(575), a demonstrative and emphatic prefix abstracted by dissimilation from
ιδέ, and current even in / speech (915), as : ἐδετοῦτος 'this very,' ἐδεκεῖνος
'that very,' ¿derboos 'so much indeed' (Prodr. 3, 432; 434; 441; 617. 4, 429; 433;
435; 441; 506; 617; 5, 73; 161. 6, 144; 266; 302 [cp. 4, 437 & 622]. MGlycas 269;
293; 311; Bolth. 62; édétoɩ ABC 51, 8 (cp. 562)—and so on ever since.
574. Demonstrative pronouns are rendered more emphatic
by annexing an accented -í (iota paragogicum), which, owing to
its strong stress, shortens a pre-tonic sonant and suppresses
pre-tonic a, e, o, as : ουτοσί, αὑτῆί, τουτουί, τουτί, ταυτί ; ἐκεινοσί,
ἐκεινονί, ἐκεινωνί; ὁδί, τοισδί. See 85d. App. i. 13 ft.
575. In N the demonstrative pronouns (ἐτοῦτος and ἐκεῖνοs are often
intensified by annexing a suffixal: -é (analogous to prefixal - 572), and
oftener -a (probably from δά [ = δή ? ] or rather ἔδε νά 573) which, however,
bears only a secondary stress: ἐτοῦτοσ-έ, ἐτοῦτοσ-ά. Should this suffix be
preceded by a sonant, a -v- (formerly movable, 221) is inserted.
Sing. N. (ε)τοῦτοσ-ά(s) (ἐτοῦτον-ά (ε)τουτην-ά ἐκεῖνοσ-ά(s) ἐκεῖνον-ά ἐκείνην-ά
ἐκεῖνον-ά
Α. (ἐτοῦτον-ά
G. (ε)τούτουν-α
Ρ1. Ν. ()τούτοιν-ά
Α. (ἐτούτουσ-ά(ς)
G. (ε)τούτων-ά
""
(ἐτούτησ-α(ς) εκείνουν ά
ἐκείνησ-α(ς)
(ε)τουταν-ά (ἐτοῦτεσ-ά(s) ἐκεῖνοιν-ά ἐκεῖναν-ά ἐκεῖνεσ-ά(ς)
ἐκείνουσ-ά(s)
ἐκείνων-ά
39
or (ἐτοῦτοσ-έ(ς) (ἐτοῦτον-έ (ἐτούτην-έ ἐκεῖνοσ-έ(ς) ἐκεῖνον-έ ἐκείνην-έ,etc.
576. This intonsive -d having gradually lost its suffixal character, a final -s
is generally suporadded in those cases which would otherwise requiro it.
577. Ν αὐτός (εὐτός, 572 ; also ἔτός 542) is strengthened by repeating the
terminal sonant in each case after having inserted -v- or rather in-
corporated the formerly movable -p (221).
αὐτόνος [2]
αὐτόνου
αὐτούνου
αὐτόνο
αὐτήνη [3]
αὐτήνην
αὐτήνης
αὐτοῖνοι
αὐτούνους[1]
αυτώνων
αὐτάνα
(αὐτένες[2])
29
577. So εὐτόνος, εὐτόνο, εὐτήνη, then τοῦτος, τοῦτο, τούτη (so even in
NSophianos 78 f.). (Cp. 581.)
578. The double-accented forms occur with oither accent (570), but the
tendency is in favour of the ultima : αὐτουνοῦ, αὐτηνῆς, αυτουνούς, αὐτωνῶν
(also αὐτουνῶν, NSophianos 79), after tho simple αὐτός. Theso intensified
[1] So even in Nomoc. 477; thon IStaph. ii. 196 ; Pul. 225 ἐτούτην.
[2] In αὐτόνος, αὐτήνης, αὐτούνους (αὐτένες), ποιανῆς, ἀλληνῆς, μιανῆς του Χαὐτόσο
νος, Χαὐτήσνης, Χαὐτούσνους, Καὐτέσνες, *ποιασνῆς, ἀλλησνῆς, *μιαστῆς, tho
y, which was borrowed from tho other cases, drove out the uncongonial σ.
[3] As: Pul. 326 αὐτήνην.
161
M
578-586.] DEMONSTRATIVE & INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
forms have affected a few other short (monosyllabic or disyllabic)
words, as :
ἀλλουνοῦ
for and beside ἄλλου,
ἀλληνῆς for and beside ἄλλης
τουτουνοῦ (567)
ποιουνοῦ
>>
>>
ποιανής [2]
>>
τούτου,
τουτωνων [1]
ποιοῦ (155, c), ποιωνῶν
ποιᾶς,
ποιανῶν
τούτων
>>
ποιών
""
29
ποιῶν
>>
579. α. So too κάποιουνοῦ, κάποιανοῦ ; κάποιωνῶν, κάποιανῶν ; further
μιανής [2]
ἀλλωνῶν
for and beside μιας,
ἄλλων,
μιανοῦ for and beside έvós
τῶν δυονῶν
τριωνῶν
τῶν δύο
>>
19
τριών
>>
580. b. Besides the accusatives αὐτόνο, αὐτήνη", thero occur αὐτόνα, αὐτῆνα
but the latter forms are due to other influences (535).
581. Amplifications like αὐτούνου αὐτήνης having been mistaken for
independent varieties, new forms were evolved out of them : αὐτοῦνος or
εὐτοῦνος, -o, -η, and αὐτῆνος οι εὐτῆνος, -o, -η (cp. also ἐκεῖνος, 570), a neologism
found oven in M popular compositions (as Prodr. 4, 36ο : αὐτοῦνον).
Even ἐτοῦνος and τοῦνος (in Bova ἐτοῦνο, Otranto τοῦνο).
582. Besides the demonstrative pronouns, there are in Greek
demonstrative adjectives of quantity, quality, and age (or size),
used mostly with the intensive suffix -δε (563). Cp. 6or.
Quantity : τόσος, τόσον, τόση, oftener in the intensive form τοσόσδε,
toróvde, tooýde, 'so much,' 'so many.'
Quality: τοῖος, τοῖον, τοία, oftener in the intensive form τοιόσδε,
τοιόνδε, τοιάδε, such.
Age or size: τηλίκος, τηλίκον, τηλίκη, oftener in the intensive form
τηλικόσδε, τηλικόνδε, τηλικήδε, ' so old, so big.'
583. These demonstratives are still commoner in composition with
οὗτος, viz.
Quantity: τοσοῦτος, τοσοῦτο”, τοσαύτη, so much, so many.
Quality: τοιοῦτος, τοιοῦτο”, τοιαύτη, 'such.
Age or size: τηλικοῦτος, τηλικοῦτο, τηλικαύτη, ‘so old, so big.
584. Of the above demonstratives the one denoting quantity is still fully
proserved in its simple form τόσος. On the other hand that designating
quality (τοῖος) τοιοῦτος was first modified to the M το)ίτοιος (ΔΜαυροφρύδης
606), then roduced by dissimilation to tho now universal τέτοιος, a form
which is sometimos further roducod by fresh dissimilation to ἔτοιος (IStaph.
ii. 184). (Cp. 126 & 593,)
585. As to the demonstrative of ago τηλίκος, with its compound τηλι-
κοντος, it has becomo oxtinct in N, the circumlocution τόσα μεγάλος having
takon its place.
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
586. The pronoun τίς τί is both interrogativo and indefinite.
As an interrogativo, it always stands first and accents the initial
syllable (τί-) throughout, while as an indefinite term, it is a post-
positive enclitic and always accents the ultima.
[1] Algo τουτουνῶν, as NSophianos 78 f.
[4] Seo noto [1] on p. 161.
162
INTERROGATIVE & INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. [587-589.
A. Interrogative.
B. Indefinite.
Ν.
Μ. & Γ.
'what?' rís 'some one,' ‘any,' ri 'something'
τινά
τινός, του
τινί, τῷ
587.
Μ. & Γ.
Ν.
Sing. Ν. τίς ; 'who ?'
τί ;
Α. τίνα ;
G. τίνος ; τοῦ ;
D. τίνι ;
Ρ1. Ν. τίνες ;
Α. τίνας ;
G. τίνων ;
τίνα ;
τινες
τινάς
""
τινῶν
τισίν
D. τίσι” ;
τινέ
Dual Ν Λ. τίνε ;
τινοῖν
G. D. τίνοιν ;
""
τινά, ἄττα
""
588. The indefinito neuter plural form ἄττα is never enclitic (ro2, 6).
The forms Tou and 7 for Tivòs and Twì disappear from the A inscriptions
το
about 300 B.C.
του
588. The two solitary forms Tis and rì of the indefinite pronoun are
commonly marked with the grave accent, rìs and rì, merely for the sake of
distinction from thu corresponding interrogative forms τis and τί. This is
however irrational seeing that the remaining indefinito forms τινά, τινός, etc.,
are always marked like ordinary words.
589. As shown above, the masculine stands also for the feminine
throughout, as well as for the neuter, save in the nominative (and
accusativo) singular and plural. In fact all the genders, cases, and numbers
are almost identical in form. This uniformity in so common a word, used
both as a substantive and an adjective, was felt to be something abnormal
in the language, the more so as all other interrogatives happened to begin
with n (ποιος, πόσος, πηλίκος ; ep. που, πῶς, πότε, πόθεν, etc., p. 566). Hence
even writers often had recourse to the normal and cognate form
ποῖος, ποῖον, ποία in place of the interrogativo τίς [1], thon later to the
numeral εἷς ἂν μία for the indefinite τίς (622 f.). P speech, bont as it
was on uniformity, showed a more decided preferenco for this expedient,
and tho uso of ποῖος for τίς, εἷς or κανεὶς for (indef.) τίς, gradually met
with general acceptanco, and caused the retreat of ris. Tho ascondency
of eis and κανείς over the indefinite ris was moreover soon manifested
by the circumstanco that the latter, following the prepositive nature of
εἷς and κανείς, also bocamo propositive (1448-9). This process of substi-
tution and interchange, though of ancient origin, has not yet come to
a close, but can be still witnessed in N. Seo also 597.
Span. 16ο ἂν δώσῃς τίποτέ τΙΝΑΝ μὴν τού το ονειδίσῃς. 122 καὶ ὁμοιάσης
καί τινος ἀνθρώπου κακογνώμου, | ὡς εἴ τινες νὰ σπείρωσιν εἰς τὸ χωράφι σπόρον,
χοίρους ἐμβάζουν εἰς αὐτὸ καὶ δαπανοῦν τὸν σπόρον.
[1] On tho use of ποῖος for τiς during and since 4 times, ep. Aosch. Αg. 203
ποίου χρόνου ; 1046 προς ποίαν στέγην ; Eur. Andr. 388 sq. ποίαν πόλιν προύδωκα,
τίνα σῶν ἔκτανον παίδων ἐγώ; Ποῖον δ᾽ ἔπρησα δῶμ'; 1266 ποίας ἄλλυμαι
πρὸς αἰτίας; (ep. Hoc. 159-163); Iph. Taur. 400 σοὶ δ᾽ ὄνομα ποῖον ἔθεθ᾽ ὁ
γεννήσας πατήρ ; Ar. Vesp. 183 ποῖον ; φέρ' ἴδωμεν ; Theophr. Char. viii. ποίᾳ
γὰρ οὐ στοᾷ, ποίῳ δ᾽ ἐργαστηρίῳ, ποίῳ δὲ μέρει τῆς ἀγορᾶς οὐ διημερεύουσιν
ἀπαυδῶν ποιοῦντες τοὺς ἀκούοντας; Polyb. 3, 8, 9 εἰ δέ τις ἔροιτο τὸν συγγραφέα
ποῖος ἦν καιρὸς οἰκειότερος τοῖς Καρχηδονίοις, ἢ συμφορώτερον etc. ; 36, 3, 1
τίνας καὶ πόσους διελθὼν τύπους εἰς ποῖα μέρη κατῆρε τῆς Ἰταλίας ; Diod. 12, p. 128
οἱ τοὺς Θουρίους οἰκοῦντες ἐστασίαζον πρὸς ἀλλήλους ποίας πόλεως ἀποίκους καλεῖσθαι
τοὺς Θουρίους καὶ τίνα κτίστην δίκαιον ὀνομάζεσθαι; Jos. Ant. 16, 3, 21 ποία
μὲν εὔνοια πρὸς τὸν ὑμέτερον οἶκον παραλείπεται; ποία δὲ πίστις ἐνδεής ἐστιν
τίς δ᾽ οὐ τετίμηται τιμή; (For more examplos soo ΔΜαυροφρύδης 615-17; also
GIIatzidakis 207 f.)
;
163
590-595.] INTERROGATIVE & INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
590. In present N speech, while ποῖος and eἷς (ἕνας) are almost the only repre-
entatives current (save in South Italian where rís and rí still obtain), a fow
older forms are also surviving, mostly in a substantival function : τίς, τί, τίνος
τις or τινάς, τί, τινός (596).
591. On the other hand, the A meaning of roos 'which,'' what sort,' was
transferred during G-B times to ποταπός (ep. Matth. 8, 27; Sext. 476, 13;
Apophth. 285 B) ['], and subsequently (during T-M) passed to tho nouter rí, used
as an indeclinable word (ep. ὅ,τι 61ο f.), as : τί ἄνθρωπος ; ' what sort of man ?' τί
βιβλία θέλεις ; ' what sort of books do you want? (cp Basil. i. 8 Β τί καλὴ
ἡ τάξις! Acta Xanth. 62, 19 τί πρᾶος αὐτοῦ καὶ ὁμαλὸς ὁ περίπατος! τί εὐμενὲς
αὐτοῦ τὸ πρόσωπον ! τί εὐμόρφως περισκοπεί ὧδε κἀκεῖσε! so 72, 18; 29. Stud.
1668 Α τί καλὴ ἐπιστολὴ τῆς εὐγενείας σου! CGL 648, 5 τί χρείαν ἔχεις δανεί
σασθαι ; quid opus habes mutuari? Ducas Novell. 324 καὶ τί ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ
βασιλεύς ;
591". This function of rí is now often strengthened by the addition of the
genitive λογῆς or (plural) λογιών [2] (μιας λογῆς, πολλῶν λογιῶ") τί λογῆς
='what sort; chè sorta, rí λoyiŵr chè sorte-a colloquialism apparently duo to
Italian influenco.
592. For the nouter rí 'what,' now in universal use, some insular dialects
(as Cretan, Cypriote, etc.) employ by preference ἵντα, a corruption or extreme
contraction of B-M Τί ἔΝΙ ΤΑlater τί ἔνε τά, τί εἶνε τά— what is that which,
qu'est ce que (154) [3].
593. That τί ἔνε τα (or τί εἶνε τα) was first contracted to τί 'ν' τα or τίντα and
then reduced by dissimilation to ἴντα (ep. πεντῆντα, πενήντα, 639; αυθέντης,
ἀφέντης, 126 ; τέτοιος, ἔτοιος 584), appears clearly not only from the express tosti-
mony of Pachom. Mon. (Migno 98, 1352 Α : Κρῆτες (λέγουσιν) ἴΝτα θὲς ἀντὶ τοῦ τί
θέλεις . . . ἀπὸ τοῦ τί ἔνι τό, καὶ τί ἔνι τά, τίντο καὶ τίντα, ὡς παρὰ Λεσβίοις, ἐξ
οὗ καὶ παρὰ Κρησὶ καὶ ἄλλοις ῥᾳθύμοις τὸ ἴντα), but also from B-M popular com-
positions as: JMoschos 3064 Β τί ἂν τὸ ἔχεις, κύριε Μόσχε; ELegrand Bibl
Intr. lxiv. 53 με ψυχή μου τί ἔΝ᾽ τὸ λές; τί ἔν τό γλυκὺ μαντᾶτο; ib. 67 θ'
5 γιὰ τί Ν' τό = διὰ τί ; id. 62, θ' ι τίωτ᾽ ἀφορμὴ σ' ἐβίασεν ; id. 67, ιη' 6 γιὰ τίντα
id, 68, κ' 6 τίν' τά 'καμεν ; id, 76, λέ' : τίντα θαρρείς.
I
Other Indefinite Pronouns.
594. For the English a, an, A uses τίς, Ρ εις and Ν τίς, τινάς, εἷς,
ἕνας, κάτις, κάτι, κανείς, κανένας.
For some, Α-Β uses τινές, τινά, and N καμπόσοι οι καμπόσοι, κάποιοι,
μερικοί.
595. Tho indofinite pronoun which in 4 corresponds to the English
indofinite article is rìs (237). IIowever, there is another representativo also,
els (589. 623), which, though not common, has hold an oquivalent position,
[4] Phryn. 39 ποταπὸς διὰ τοῦ τ μὴ εἴπῃς, ἀδόκιμον γάρ. διὰ τοῦ δέλτα δὲ
λέγων ἐπὶ γένους θήσεις, ποδαπός ἐστι ; Θηβαῖος ἢ Αθηναῖος ; ἔστι γὰρ οἷον ἐκ
τίνος δαπέδου; ποταπὸς δέ ἐστιν εἰ εἴποι· ποταπὸς τὸν τρόπον Φρύνιχος ; ἐπιεικής
χρὴ οὖν οὕτως ἐρωτῶν· ποῖος τίς σοι δοκεῖ εἶναι ;
ι
[2] Tho t in λογιων is of courgo no additional lettor, but a monns of preserving
the original palatal sound of y, which would otherwise bocomo guttural.
[3] The spelling είντα adopted by some scholars is inadmissible, seoing that
in the whole phrase τί εἶνε τά, or rather τί ἔνε τά ἔνε boing the M form for
εἶνε 985), the interrogativo τί is tho emphatic word and so cannot logo ita 4,
while ïve (or elve), liko its ancient representativo čorɩ (cloív), is enclitic, and as
such vory often undergoes uphuorosis ('ve) and oligion or apocopo (εἶν'). It may
ovon-and this is vory common---shrink to simplo 'v', ς: καλό 'ν' καὶ τοῦτο
good this is too '; ποῦ 'ν' τὰ παιδιά ; whero aro tho children ? Honce tho
writing evra is both untonable and misloading.
'
164
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
[595-598c.
especially since I times (622 ff.). For the sake of clearness, subsequent
speech profixed nav to it (598), as well as to the other indefinite words and
thus produced the combinations κἂν εἶς or κανείς –κάτις, κάποιος, κάπου, κάπως,
καμπόσος,
kaμпóσos, etc. All those words, Tís, eîs (Cretan now yes, 155 ), and rȧveis
(also kalaveis or kaveis, Cretan kaiαeis or kiαeis), together with their by-forms
τινάς, ἕνας, and κανένας (Cretan καιανείς οι κιανένας), are now very common
in N speech (621 ff.). As to the plural, their clumsy inflection made
room for καμπόσοι (now commoner κάμποσοι), κάποιοι, μερικοί.
596. Of the indefinite pronoun rès likewise several forms are still
preserved : τίς, τινάς, τί, τινός (590), formerly also τινά”. The neuter
Tì is now current chiefly in the strengthened form TÍTOTE (dialectally
also τίποτες, τας, τις, τίποτσι, τίβοτσι, 562), which occurs even in P
writors in the sense of simple rí, as: Epict. 3, 13, 18 oikodoμei Tínoтe
εἶτα καταστρέφει. 24, 39 φλυαρείν τίποτε. Apollod. 2, 6, 4 καὶ τότε τίποτε
doûσav; and so on increasingly (AMaupoppúdŋs 622) (¹).—Tì survives further
in κάτι (used also for κάπως) or oftener κάτι τι (in Crete also κάτιν τις)
'something,' ráð¤ Tɩ 'every thing.'
ti
597. The considerations which prevented the free use and perpetuation
of the interrogative rís (589), naturally apply also to the indofinite form
τίς.
Tís. The absonce in it of a normal ending for each gender rendered it
inconvenient in popular speech, and thus called for a kindred substitute.
This was found in the numeral adjective eîs, év, µía, ‘a', ‘an' (622 ff.).
μία,
A similar function was assumed later on also by náveis (rav eîs 595) and
during M times by kanоios, both of which, however, have since become
either adjectives, 'some,' or substantives some one.'-All these substi-
tutes are now current in N.
મ
(also 5, 28).
Luc. D. D.
598. The compound particle näv (=naì äv), which occurs oven in A
as an intensive simple kai 'even' (as Soph. El. 1483; O. T. 615, &
1078; Plat. Prot. 318 в; id. Rep. 515 E; etc.), has, apart from the
common phraso nav ei 'oven if,' met with ever increasing popularity since
A timos, and that simply as a strong sal 'oven,' 'at least (cp. 629).' E. g.
Mark 6, 56 παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν ἵνα κἂν τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται
Acts 5, 15 ἵνα ἐρχομένου Πέτρου κἂν ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν.
5, 2 ἐκεῖναι μέν σοι κἂν ἐν γῇ μένουσι. id. Tim. 20 οἷς οὐδὲ κἂν ὄνος ὑπῆρξε
πάжоτе 'not oven an ass'; and with numerals, as Philo ii. 29, 13 Kån év tɩ tŵv
Távтwvut least one.' Luc. Ver. Hist. 4 Κἂν ἐν γὰρ δὴ τοῦτο ἀληθεύων λέγω
'this ono at loust.' Galon. 6, 349 D KẦN µâs †µépas 'for at least one day,' Acta
Xanth. 6, 1 κἂν μικρὸν ἀνεπαυσάμην. 77, 38 ἀλλὰ τὰ θηρία και μεθ᾿ ἑτέρων
ὁμογενῶν διάγουσιν.
મ
598. In its association with cardinal numerals, såv gradually assumed
the force of a merely indofinito particle, as: Apophth. 261 B TávTWs dè ¿E
αὐτῶν κἂν ἐν ἀρέσει αὐτῷ ; Loont. Noup. V. S. 1709 1 οὐ χρεία ἵνα πωλήσωμεν
τίποτε, και Μίαν γὰρ γάστραν ἐξ ἧς ἔχω κανονίζουσα αὐτὸν ἔφαγεν θερμίων.
Chron. 723, 20 KAN EBAOMHKONTA Káρaßоι' some seventy boats.' 733 KAN EZHKONTA
äλoya 'some sixty horsos.'-In N speech, it occurs chiefly in composition, as :
κανείς (καιαείς οι κιαείς, 594), κάτι, κάποιος, καμπόσος, κἄποτες, κάπου, κάπως.
598°. For the uso of rìs où (or µ)) and nav els où (un) as a popular substi-
tuto for ovdeìs (µndeis) 800 629° & 1449°.
It may further be noted, by the way, that Tímore has given birth to a number
of by-forms: when it camo to be considered as a substantive (rð TíπOTE), it was
first remodellel to τίποτα (after πράγμα), and then amplified to τίποτας (after
κρέας). Again whon πότε was amplified to πότες (aftor εχθές, τύτες), τίποτε bocumo
τίποτες, thon gradually τίποτις, τίποτσι (562), and by dissimilation τίβοτσι (υρ.
Μαυροφρύδης 621 f.).
165
599-607.] INDEFINITE & RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
599. Another indefinite pronoun, always used with the article as
a substantive, which was current chiefly in colloquial speech, is ó, tó,
<
ǹ deiva 'the man (or Mr.) so and so,'' what's his name?'
This term
was treated sometimes as an indeclinable word, but more commonly
it showed the following inflection :
Sing. N. ó, Tò, ǹ deîva
Α. τὸν, τὸ, τὴν δεῖνα
G. τοῦ, τοῦ, τῆς δεῖνος
D. τῷ, τῷ, τῇ δεῖνι
Pl. oi deives, Tà deîva
τοὺς δεῖνας ""
τῶν δείνων
600. So still in N: 8 deîvas (248. 339), td, † deiva, pl. oi deîvot, ni deîves, tà
δεῖνα. Another N by-form, current sinco T, is : ὁ ὅδεινος (13o. 612), τὸ ὅδεινο,
† ödewn (even in [Chrys.] 12, 779 a toû ddeívov; so Porph. Cor. 18, 15; 198,
3, etc., cp. CLeemans 129 [II-III], 24 тdv devov), which may be com-
pared with the form ódéiva of tho grammarians (Apoll. Do Pron. 75, c;
Et. M. 684, 56; cp. Kühner-Blass i. 615). For ráde tuids see 564.
τάδε
601. Interrogative adjectives of quantity, quality, and age or
size (corresponding to 582 f.) are—
many?'
Quantity: rooоs, пóσον, пóσŋ, 'how much ?' 'how many
Quality: Tolos, wołoν, nola, 'what sort of?' 'which ?'
Age or size: пyλikos, tŋλíkov, îŋλíêŋ, 'how old?' 'how large ?'
002. Of these adjectives, only ŋλíos has become extinct, while moîus
and Tóσos are still fully preserved. Nevertheless rotos, now commonly woLÚS
155, c), has exchanged its A meaning of which' for that of rís who.'
For this change sec 589.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
603. There are in Greek three relative pronouns-
a. os, o, y, 'who,' 'which '-in T N öñoυ, N Tou
,6
ὅπου, που
b. ὅσπερ, ὅπερ, ήπερ, ' (just) who, which
C.
C
'—in
(
c. ὅστις, ὅ,τι, ἥτις, whoever, whichever in N ὅποιος, ὅπου,
604. 1. "Os, ő, 2, 'who,' 'which,' follows the inflection of avròs
(525; cp. 538 f.) and bears the rough breathing throughout.
Sing. N. ös
त
Pl. of
aï
A. öv
G. où
""
ηv
οὕς
as
21
ων
vis
ais
ກ
D. a
Dual. N. A. & G. D. olv.
605. Mark the A standing phrases raì ôs en 'and he said,' and ' ős
'said ho,' where is stands for autós (1437; cp. 978).
606. The form ös, 8, 7, is frequently replaced by the postpositive
article (vπOTAKTIKòv äρéрov) i. e. the article in those cases where it
begins with T. Thus τo often stands for ὅ, τὸν for ὅν, τοῦ for οὗ, τὴν
for y, etc. (1438).
606. The postpositive article still survives in N (1438), though only in
the accusative and oven hore it is obsolescent making room for őñov (608).
607. The relative pronoun os, ő,, remained in unbroken usage
through all antiquity and partially lingered down to the XVIt, as
may be gathered from the M compositions. Since then, however, it
has disappeared altogether from the living language, its place having
been taken partly by the postpositive article (606), partly by oпоν
(608. 1438).
166
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
[608–612.
608. Besides ős, 8, ½, another relative made its appearance since G.
This was the adverb ὅπου ‘where (probably suggested by ὁποῖος), which
took its place beside the postpositive article (606) and soon asserted itsolf
as a popular substitute for ős, ő, ʼn (1438).
(Clem. R. ad Cor. 23, 3 πόρρω γενέσθω ἀφ' ἡμῶν ἡ γραφὴ αὕτη ὅπου λέγει· ταλαί-
πωροι κτλ.) Apophth. 300 B καὶ λαβόντες καὶ τὸν ἀδελφὸν ὅπου εἶχε πρὸς αὐτὸν
τὴν λύπην. 300 σ οὐδὲ γὰρ εἴχετε τίποτε τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου ὕλην εἰ μὴ ῥαφίδα
ὅπως τὰ θαλλία ἔσχιζεν. Leont. Neap. V. I. 46, 18 ἐκεῖνος ὅπου ἐμαγείρευεν.
JMoschos 2914 1 εἰς τὸ ὄρος ὅπου αὐτὸς εἶπεν (cp. 2949 Β μετὰ τὸ καῦσαι
αὐτὸν τὸν φοῦρνον οὐχ εὗρεν ἔνθα (wherewith) ὤφειλεν σφογγίσαι τὸν φοῦρνον,
where ἔνθα is a paraphrase of the colloquial ὅπου).
608b. As time went on, this convenient substitute (που) gained ascen
dency over ős, ő, ½, and eventually (since the 16th; 606 b) supplanted it.
On the other hand, owing to its proclitic naturo, this nou gradually
dropped its initial o and became simple που, (Cp. ἵνα νά 1766, οὐδὲν δέν
1979, and αὐτὸν τὸν 530.) In both forms, but particularly in that of που,
it is still very common-in fact it is the real popular relative-and may
soon displace the now almost obsolete postpositive article (606 fr.).
609. 2. Ὅσπερ, ὅπερ, ήπερ, ' (just) who, which is nothing
else than ὅs, ὅ, ή, strengthened by the enclitic particle περ an-
nexed to it. Its inflection therefore is that of ὅς, ὅ, ἤ, viz. ὅσπερ,
ὅνπερ, οὗπερ, etc.
610. 3. Ὅστις, ὅ,τι, ἥτις, ' whoever, consists of ös, ὅ, K, and the
indefinite rís, each component being inflected separately, viz.
Sing. Ν. ὅστις
Α. ὅντινα
ὅ,τι [1]
ἥτις
G. ούτινος & του
ἥντινα
ἧστινος
D. τινι & ὅτῳ
τινι
ἅτινα & ἅττα
αἵτινες
άστινας
""
αἷστισι
Ρ1. Ν. οἵτινες
Α. οὕστινας
G. ὧντινων (& ὅτων)
D. οἷστισι” (& ὅτοισι, ὅτοις)
Dual. Ν. Λ. τινε G. D, οἶντινοιν.
611. Just as τίς has been replaced by ποῖος (589), so ὅστις has made
room for ὁποῖος or, with displaced accent, ὅποιος (615). However, to judge
from the M compositions, ὅστις was still current as late as this XIV,
though in tho sonso of A ős. The neuter ő,τi, used both as a substantivo
and adjective 'whatever,' is still universally common (cp. Tí, 591), and has
oven lod to a G B masculino by-form őris (as Great Louvre Pap. 236), of
which the genitive ὅτινος ‘whososoever still survives in somno dialects
(Crete) and curiously coincidos with the old Doric form ὅτινος.
611. In the same way us tho interrogativo τί (or ἴντα) often stands for ποιος
(592 f.), 80 8,7ɩ can stand for dπoîos or olos 'whatever sort,'
612. The forms ὁ ὁποῖος τὸ ὁποῖον, ἡ ὁποία), ὁ ποῖος οι ποιός (τὸ ποῖον, ἡ
ποίδ) and (δ οἷος) & οξύς οι ὅγοιος (155, 615) are a literal translation of the
Romanic lequel, il quale (op. the which). They were introduced by M seribos
and, boing associated with the then popular postpositive article (606:
ὁ κ ποῦ = ὁποῖος, τὸ κ ποῦ τὸ ποῖον ; ep. also ὁ ὅς, ὁ ὅσος, 615 & 1219; δκάτις,
ὁκάποιος, ὕδεινος), found favour among Greek pommon who objected to the
[1] It should be written ὅτι, but ancient grammarians introduced ὅ,τι-fur
which modern scholars often substituto ő T—to distinguish it from the con-
junction ὅτι ' that ' (79).
167
612-817.]
RELATIVE PRONOUNS NUMERALS.
indeclinable character of ónov or wоû (608 f.). It is still proper to written
ὅπου οι ποῦ
composition, popular speech always using öroυ or Toû instead (¹).
Chron. Mor. Prol. 1332 τοὺς ὁποίυγε οὐ νομάζω τους. Κ. 1440 τὰ ὁποῖα κάστρη.
4831 τὸ ὁποῖον πράγμα. 5323 Με ὁποῖον ἔχει φουσᾶτον. EGeorg. Const. Prol. τὰ
ἑξῆς τὰ ὁποῖα ῥήματα γράφουνται διὰ στίχου. 569 f. τὴν γλῶσσαν | ΤΗΝ ΠΟΙΑΝ
δὲν ἐδυνήθηκα νὰ τὴν ἀποκρατήσω. 643 τὸ ὁποῖον πολ ξεύρετε καὶ οὐδὲν τὸ ἀνα-
φέρνω. 715 τὰ συμβάντα | τὰ ποῖα ἐσυνέβησαν. Beliss. 336 f. Δημότυχοι Αλέξιος
ἔτι καὶ Πετρολήψας | οἱ ποῖοι ἀνδραγάθησαν. Belth. 1250 ὃν ἔχομεν εὐνοῦχον
oi
|
ὁποῖον ἐξαπέστειλεν Ῥοδόφιλος ὁ ἄναξ. 462 κἀκεῖνα | τὰ ὁποῖα μετὰ μηχανῆς
ἐβάστα—Suchl. 49 τὰ κακὰ τὰ ποιά θέλεις πανθάνειν,—and so on ever sinco
passim.
613. To similar foreign influence points the hybrid form 8 idios the same,'
inasmuch as hero the article & is probably due to the influence of 8 aúrós, and
the meaning 'samo' to the Latin idem (541. 1417).
614. Relative adjectives of quantity, quality, and age or size
(corresponding to 582 & 601) are-
Quantity: soos or oπóσos 'as much';
Quality: οἷος or ὁποῖος such as
,
Age or size: ĥλíkos (or útηλíkos) ‘as old,' 'as large'-
all inflected like adjectives of the 2nd declension.
615. Of these relative adjectives, ooos is still fully preserved in N.
Οπόσος having been associated with the interrogative ὁ πόσος (134),
had to be reduced to nóoos, a form which, in the presence of an
identical interrogative, could not but be dropped altogether. Of the
two qualitatives olos and oroios, the former still lingers in N (y)olos
(i. e. ó × oîos, 155, 612) 'such as,' qualis, while the latter is still uni-
versal with the retracted accent ὅποιος (due to ὅστις, cp. κάποιος)
instead of órolós (152. 155, c), which would coincide with ó Tolós
i. e. ὁ ποῖος (602).— Ηλίκος and σπηλίκοs have naturally shared the
fate of their correlatives (585 & 602).
NUMERALS.
I.
CIPHERS.
616. For ciphers the ancient Greeks used the lottors of the
alphabet including three more signs (3). These three signs
were-
1. Vau, F, lator shaped 5 and inserted after e with the value
of 6. In G-B times it was represented by 9, while the symbol
5 camo to be used also as a ligature for or, whence it was
termod στίγμα.
2. Koppa, shaped G and insertod aftor π with the value of 90.
3. Sampi, shaped and inserted after o with the value of goo.
W
617. Thus the units are represented by the letters a to 0, the tens
し
​by ɩ to G (koppa), the hundreds by p to (sampi, 3), and the thou-
sands by a fresh series of letters.
[] For a difforont, but forced explanation, soc AKоpañs, "Aтакта A' 66, and
ΔΜαυροφρύδης (u, f.
168
CIPHERS AND CARDINAL NUMBERS. [618-621.
618. When used as ciphers, the letters are marked with an
accent-like stroke put above on the right (as a 'y' etc.) for all
numbers up to 999, and beneath to the left for the thousands (as a
By, etc.). When two or more co-ordinate ciphers follow one another,
instead of marking each one with a separate stroke, the last cipher
only is conveniently so marked. Thus ta' (for 'a')=11, py (for pty)
- 163, ωςε = 895 - μωςζ = 1897.
619. Another system of ciphers, used in early Attic, appears
in old inscriptions (sometimes also in MSS when they refer to
lines). It consists of four single normal lines appended to the
initial letter of the terms denoting 5, 10, 100, 1000, and 10,000 respec-
tively, that is Πέντε, Δέκα, Ηεκατόν (old spelling for subsequent Εκατόν),
Χίλιοι, Μύριοι. These symbols were placed by and in one another in
the following manner :
1
I
שוח
9
ΔΔΔΔ
40
X
1000
2
A
10
3
ΔΙ
II
4
All
12 etc.
H
ID D
A
50
ХХ
2000
AA
60 etc.
区
​5000
100
ах 6000
Г
5
ΔΔ
20
HH
200
M
10000
Г 6
ΔΔΙ
A
2I etc.
500
M50000
гич
7
AAA
30
ΓΔΔ
520
PIII 8
ΔΔΔΙ 3r etc.
PH 600
XPHHH▲▲▲▲ПII
1897. XXX H = 3650
II.
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
620. The first four cardinal numbers are declined as fol-
lows:-
I a
N. els
év
A. ενα
G. Evós
D. ενί
μία
μίαν
μιας
μια
ev
621. All those forms, leaving aside the dativo (232), still survivo in N,
subjoct, of course, to phonopathic modifications. Thus els is still current
in sovoral insular dialects, sometimes unchanged, as in the M-N expressions
πâσa eîs, kála (or náðε) els 'overy one'; sometimes modified to (Cretan)
yeîs (155"). In other rospects its regular and generally received form is évas
(338). The noutor èv is naturally amplified to eva (132". 219).-Tho accu-
sativo masculino eva" (537) is still universal (in Pontos elvav).—The genitive
Evds also survivos, but the form ¿voû (Cretan also évioûs, beside moûs) is
more common.-The fominino is still fully prosorved as oxytono má
(155, c). Nevertheless for the gonitive as a rocont and dialectal by-form
Mavns is occasionally heard (579); rarely also aroû for ivós (579). The
fominino pía lod to tho M adverb ei]s pía" (as Bova 53, etc.), together,'
which is still so curront in South Italian Grook. At tho samo time
another form ci]s µíó" (dissociation from (ŋuíá) appears concurrently in M
(NSophianos 83), and this by form still survivos in the contraction (quó
at onco,' 'therefore,' now current in insular (Cretan otc.) speoch.
•
169
622-629.]
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
622. Besides its regular function as a distinct unit 'one,' eis is
occasionally used, even by classical writers, without any stress or
antithesis, as an equivalent of the indefinite pronoun rìs 'a, an' (589.
595).
Hdt. 4, 3 εἷς αὐτῶν ἔλεξε τάδε. Th. 4, 57, 2 Λακεδαιμονίων φρουρὰ Μία τῶν
περὶ τὴν χώραν. Auschin. I, 18ο παρελθών τις τῶν γερόντων οὓς ἐκεῖνοι καὶ
αἰσχύνονται καὶ δεδίασιν τούτων εἷς παρελθὼν κτλ. So 165 & 182 ȧvnp
εἷς τῶν πολιτῶν. Xen. Mom. 3, 3 ὅταν γε χορός εἷς ἐκ τῆσδε τῆς πόλεως
γίγνηται.
W
M
623. In Pantiquity this indefinite numeral eis, which is treated as
a proclitic (97, a), met with ever increasing popularity owing to its ad-
vantage over rìs of having a separate form for each gender (eis, ev, µía;
cp. 589. 597. 1449"), and ultimately established itself in popular
speech as a kind of indefinite article a, an; it still remains so in N.
Gen. 21, 15 ἔρριψε τὸ παιδίον ὑποκάτω μιᾶς ἐλάττης. Polyb. 9ο Νομάς
τῶν ἐνδοξοτάτων εἷς. Matt. 8, 9 προσελθών εις γραμματεὺς εἶπεν αὐτῷ.
18, 24 εἷς οφειλέτης μυρίων ταλάντων. 18, 28 εὗρεν ἕνα τῶν συνδούλων
αὐτοῦ. 21, 19 ἰδὼν συκήν ΜίαΝ. Mark 14, 47 εἷς τῶν παρεστηκότων.
Luke 15, 26 προσκαλεσάμενος ἕνα τῶν παίδων. John 6, 9 ἔστι παιδάριον ἓν
ὧδε. Rov. 8, 13 ήκουσα ἑνὸς ἀγγέλου πετομένου ἐν μεσουρανήματι λέγοντος.
Jos. Aut. 7, 14, 3 εὑρίσκεται ἐν τῇ πόλει γυνὴ μία ᾿Αβεσάκη τούνομα.
Plut. Arat. 5 ἦν δὲ τῶν φυγάδων ἑνὸς Ξενοκλέους ἀδελφός. Plut. Cras. 4
ἔπεμψεν ἕνα δοῦλον. Ael. Hist. 10, 18 ἠράσθη αὐτοῦ νύμφη Μία. Apocr.
Acta Joh. 159 ἦν δέ τις ἐν μιᾷ κώμῃ. Epict. 3, 2, 1ο εις φιλόσοφος. Mal.
190, 15 βασιλίσσης MIac. Chron. 70, 11 Μία παρθένος κύρη. 597 εἷς Γότθος.
624. It must be noted, however, that in many, especially predicative
(1159) cases, the English indefinite article a, an, is indicatod, both in A
and N, by the simplo absence of any article (237).
625. Like εἷς aro declined its two compounds οὐδείς [so ac-
cented instead of οὐδεὶς ], οὐδέν, οὐδεμία, and μηδείς [μηδεῖς], μηδέν,
undeμía 'no one,' 'nobody,'-which have moreover a masculine
plural.
Ν. οὐδείς
Α. οὐδένα
G. οὐδενός
D. οὐδενί
οὐδέν
οὐδεμία
οὐδεμίαν
οὐδεμιᾶς
οὐδεμια
οὐδένες
οὐδένας
οὐδένων
οὐδέσι
626. This negativo adjectivo (especially in the form μηδεὶς) still sur-
vives in N: οὐδένας, μηδένας. The Cretan dialect usos by preference μονη-
δένας, whore μονηδὲ is a contamination of μηδὲ and οὐδέ (116. 629").
Othor N compounds of eis are καθεὶς (καθεῖς) and καθένας or καθ᾽ ἕνας, κανεὶς
and κανένας (cp. also κάθα εἷς [ep. Spanish carta uno and French chacun] and
mâoa els, µndè eîs, 621. 665), which are all infloctod liko eis and évas rospect-
ivoly.
627. By substituting οὔτε und μήτε for οὐδὲ and μηδέ, P writers,
notably those of the Alexandrian school, formed οὐθείς, οὐθέν,
μηθείς, μηθέν. These forms, which occur also in Attic inscriptions
since 380 B.C., did not enjoy either a very long or a general currency.
[Compare Phryn, 160 οὐθεὶς διὰ τοῦ Θ. εἰ καὶ Χρύσιππος καὶ οἱ ἀμφ' αὐτὸν οὕτω
λέγουσι, σὺ δὲ (reud δὴ ἀποτρέπου λέγειν. οἱ γὰρ ἀρχαῖοι διὰ τοῦ Δ λέγουσιν.]
628. No feminino οὐθεμία οι μηθεμία has been found as yet, possibly bo-
cause of the difficulty of pronouncing -θεμι οr -τεμι (dissimilation).
629. In case of omphasis, οὐδεὶς and μηδείς can rosume their
separato form without elision : ovdè eîs and µŋdè els 'not one,’—
170
CARDINAL NUMB1'RS.
[629-636b.
the particle av being often inserted here for more stress: ovd
àv cîs, µnd ùv eîs, 'not a single one' (cp. 598 ff.).
629. So too in N: μηδὲ ἕνας (οι μηδὲ εἰς), μηδὲ ἕνα, μηδὲ μιά, and
oftener οὔτε οι μήτε ἕνας, ἕνα, μιά; Cretan μουηδὲ εἷς οι μονηδὲ ἕνας (626).
629. For a popular modo of replacing, since G, οὐδεὶς and μηδεὶς by τις
(εῖς, κἂν εἶς) οὐ or μή, see 1449.
630. Of the forms οὐδεὶς and μηδείς the neuter οὐδὲν and μηδὲν is still
occasionally heard in N as a substantive 'nought,' though rò undevikòv
is the regular school term for 'nought. As an adverb, however, οὐδὲν
(μηδέν) has been in general use through all times with a gradual weaken-
ing of its original force 'not at all,' into that of a simple not (où). This
attenuation in so frequent a word naturally led to proclisis, and proclisis
to aphaeresis, i.e. οὐδὲν became first οὐδεν, then simple δεν or rather δεν
(219), a form in universal use since B times. For the gradual develop-
ment of this process see 1798 f.
631. 2 β'. Dual N. A.
C.
G.D.
δύο (δύω)
δυοῖν, later δυεῖν.
D. also δυσίν [1]
631b. The cardinal number for two forms the basis of the dual in
Greek. In the nominative and accusative, it has the form dúo (for
metrical purposes often written δύω), in the genitive and dative δυοίν,
since the IV (329 Β.C., KMeisterhans 124) written δυεϊν, beside δυσί
(after τρισί", as CIA ii. 467, 27 : δυσὶ πλοίοις, etc.). On the other hand,
δύο occurs frequently even in A with the plural as an indeclinable
word, as : Th. I, 104 τῶν δύο μερών ; also Pl. Legg. 848 A ; Th. 1, 74 δύο
μοιρών. 7, 50 δύο ἡμερῶν. 3, 15 τοῖς δύο μέρεσιν. 5, 4 ναυσὶ δύο, etc.
Xen. An. i. 2, 23 δύο πλέθρων, etc. CIA iii. 1443 ἐτῶν δύο. See 229.
632. Aúo survives in N as an indeclinable and chiefly oxytone word
(δυό, 135, c) : viz. N. & Λ. δυό, G τῶν δυό,—though τῶν δυονῶν (579) and
τῶνι δυό (for τῶνε δύο, 1321) also occur, chiefly as substantives.
C.
633. The frequent occurrence of δύο as an indeclinable word, its
dative form dvo", and above all its usual construction, since the V
B.C., with the plural both of nouns and verbs (1172) clearly points to the
simultanoous disappearance of the dual (229).
634. The inflection of δύο (δύω) is followed by its synonym
ἄμφω ‘both; G. D. ἀμφοΐν—a term foreign to popular speech
since A.
M. F.
Ν.
635. 3 ý. Pl. N.A.
7peîs
τρία
G.
τριῶν
D. τρισίν
635. So still in N (save in the dative, 229, 232).
Pl.
636. 4 δ'. Ρ1. Ν.Λ. τέσσαρες
G. τεσσάρων
D. τέσσαρσι
636. Γου τεσσ- early Attie used τεττ-.
τέσσαρα
[4] Phryn. 185 δυσὶ μὴ λέγε, ἀλλὰ δυιῖν. δνεῖν δ᾽ ἔστι μὲν δόκιμον, τῷ δὲ
ἀλλοκότως αὐτῷ χρῆσθαι τινὰς ἐπιταράττεται (ἐπιταράττει τι ?). ἐπὶ γὰρ μόνης
γενικῆς τίθεται, οὐχὶ δὲ δοτικῆς.
171
637-644.]
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
637. In Ionic and P Greek the nominative τέσσαρες, τέσσαρα was
often, under the stress of the accent, reduced to réoσepes réoσepa
(App. i. 15, b), a form still current in N: réoσepes, commoner réoσEPELS
(after rpeis, avoádeis, Gloss. Laod. 211 tessaris), and réoσepa. For the
masculine réσoepeis another M-N form réoσepoi (after adjectives in -oɩ,
diakóσini, etc. 346. 638) is sometimes heard. The regular genitive Teσ-
σάρων is preserved in its A form only (hence τεσσάρω”, never τεσσέρω”).
σε
638. All cardinal numbers from 5 to 199 inclusive, are inde-
clinable. The round hundreds from 200 upwards are regular
adjectives of three endings (-ot, -a, -au).—So still in N.
-αι
639. As all tens from 20 upwards ond in ovтa and thus consist of
four or more syllables, the post-tonic ending covтa, being too clumsy for
such common terms, was syncopated to (-K'vтα) vra. This abbreviation
appears even in G inscriptions, and is now the only form current in N.
(Tpiákovтa) тpiâvтa (Le Bas-Foucard Voyage ii. no. 137, cp. CIL xii. 5399
trienta), (τεσσαράκοντα) *τεσσαρᾶντα σαράντα, (πεντήκοντα) πεντῆντα (GIAscoli
4, 5; so too in M), now πενήντα (593) ; (ἑξήκοντα) ἑξῆντα, (ἑβδομήκοντα)
ἑβδομῆντα, (ὀγδοήκοντα) ὀγδοῆντα (so evon in GIAscoli 17), now ὀγδόντα or
ὀγδῶντα, ἐνενήκοντα) ἐνενῆντα (cp. 1 ἐννήκοντα, ἐνακόσιοι).Also trianta,
saranta, pentinta, exinla, ebdominla, ogdoinla, cneninta, ecalo, in Gloss. Laod. 211.
640. In compound numbers consisting of units and tens, two modes
of combination are followed in A:-(a) The units may precede or
follow the tens with or without the interposition of the copula kai
Gand, as: πέντε (καὶ) εἴκοσι ‘five and twenty' or εἴκοσι (καὶ) πέντε
'twenty and five.'--(b) The tens may precede without the copula κaí,
as: elkooɩ tévte=25. This latter mode obtained general popularity
in P times, and is now the one exclusively current in N.
2
MI
641. In a number consisting of whole units and a half, the half is
expressed :-(a) through the ordinal followed by hu- as prefix to the
noun representing the unit, c.g. 'two minac and a half' rpirov ĤмIμvaîov,
* 33 (4), 5.) talents 3 τέταρτον (πέμπτον, ἕκτον) ἡμιτάλαντον.-(b) by con-
necting the half (povs) with the whole by means of kaì 'and,' as:
δύο καὶ ἡμίσεια μνα, πέντε καὶ ἥμισυ τάλαντον. P-B speech follows the
latter practice, but departs from A by first conceiving ous as a
neuter ἥμισυ (sc. μέρος), then by dropping the connective καὶ and
uttering the whole complex under one dominant accent, a circum-
stance which soon led to the enclisis and abbreviation of ov to N
'μισυ, δύο πήχεων καὶ ἡmicoyc.
'mov, as: Sept. Ex. 25, 10 dúo týɣewv kal ĤMicoYC. Dion. H. ii. 681, 13
δώδεκα καὶ ἡMicoYC μνων. Cleomed. 22, 9 ώρα καὶ ἥmicy. 63, 20 ἑπτὰ καὶ
εἴκοσιν ἡμέραις καὶ mice. 98, το δυὸ καὶ ἥMICY μοίρας. Diosc. 1, 62 τρεῖς
καὶ ἥMICY λίτρας. Plut. ii. 908 A & B. App. ii. 315, 95 μυριάδας ἓξ καὶ
HMICY ταλάντων. Galen. ii. 54 F.-Ν ἕνας (δυό, τρεις, τέσσερεις, πέντε,
εἴκοσι, τριάντα) και Μισός (401), τρεῖς (τέσσερεις, ἓξ) HMICY, δυό (τρία, τέσ
σερα, πέντε, ἕξε, εφτά, etc.) 'ΜICY, δεκά 'MICY, δικοχτώ 'micy, etc.
642. In the two units 8 and 9, when joined to tens, were often ex-
pressed by way of subtraction of 2 or 1 from the tens (20, 30, 40
etc.), the usual formula being δυοῖν δέοντες “wanting two, ἑνὸς δέοντες
wanting one,' that is, minus two,' 'minus one,' as: '48 years' dvoîv
δέοντα πεντήκοντα ἔτη, duodequinquaginta ammi. 49 years' ἑνὸς δέοντα
πεντήκοντα ἔτη. 'with 39 ships ναυσὶ μιᾶς δεούσαις τετταράκοντα.
ships'vavoì
643. This clumsy circumlocution was hardly proper to popular speech
even in A times. As a matter of course it is unknown to N.
644. Another periphrastic mode of subtracting a smaller from a
larger quantity was sometimes resorted to by means of the preposition
172
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
[644, 645.
Tapà with accusative corresponding to the English 'except,' 'save,'
minus (1619 ff.). Hdt. 9, 33 & Th. 8, 29 παρὰ πέντε ναῦς. Isae. 41, 36 ;
A. P. 695. ΝΤ 2 Cor. 9, 24 τεσσαράκοντα παρὰ μίαν. Jos. Ant. 4, 8, 1 τεσ-
σαράκοντα ἐτῶν παρὰ τριάκονθ' ἡμέρας. Nicom. 77 παρὰ μονάδα. GKaibel
1426 ἐτῶν ιβ' παρὰ ἡμέρας η'; ib. 1900 ἔτη ιθ' παρὰ ἡμέρας ζ'. The
convenience thus afforded met with greater popularity during G
times, and eventually became a familiar colloquialism, still very
common in N.
645.
12345O N∞ a
7
8
B'
5'
9
ΙΟ
í
II
ια
12 ιβ'
13 | ιγ'
14
ιδ'
15
16 ις
17
ιζ'
18 in'
19
20
21
22
κ'
και
κβ'
23 . κγ'
30
40 | μ'
50
60
70
SYNOPSIS OF CARDINAL NUMBERS.
*eis, év, pía (621 ff. 630)
*δύοΝ δυό (632)
Ατρεῖς, τρία (635) N also τρᾶ for τρία (rarely)
*τέσσαρες, τέσσαρα (τεττ-) (636 f.), GN τέσσερα
πέντε
*ξΝ ἕξε & έξη or ἕξι (1325)
§
* ἑπτά-Ν ἑφτά (174)
*ὀκτώ—Ν ὀχτώ (174)
*ἐννέα—Ν εννεά (155, α)
δέκα
ένδεκα (Ρ δέκα εἷς)—Ν ἕντεκα (61) [instead of ἕδεκα
ELS
(194), which form would lead to confusion]
δώδεκα, P-Β δέκα δύο.
τρεῖς (τρία) καὶ δέκα (640 f.)
*δέκα τρεῖς (τρία)
Ο
τέσσαρες (-ρα) καὶ δέκα (640 f.)
δέκα τέσσαρες (τρα)
πεντεκαίδεκα
δέκα πέντε
εκκαίδεκα
δέκα ἕξin N oftener δεκάξε or δεκάξη (soe ἕξ
ἑπτακαίδεκα
δέκα ἑπτά-in N oftoner δεκαφτά (150, c; 174)
ὀκτωκαίδεκα
δεκα ὀκτώ-in N oftener δεκοχτώ (150, α; 174)
δυοῖν δέοντες εἴκοσι (642)
Εννεακαίδεκα
δέκα ἐννέα-in N δεκαννεά (150, c.)
ἑνὸς δέοντες εἴκοσι (642)
είκοσι (220, 3)
Τ
°εἷς (μία, ἓν) καὶ εἴκοσι
* εἴκοσιν εἷς (μία, ἕν)—in N εἴκοσι ἕνας (μιά, ἕνα) (621).
δύο καὶ εἴκοσι
εἴκοσι δύο -Ν εἰκοσιδυό (632)
τρεῖς (τρία) καὶ εἴκοσι"
{ εἴκοσι τρεῖς (τρία)-in N also εἰκοστρείς (136)
τριάκοντα—Ν τριάντα (39)
[1]
τεσσαράκοντα (τετταρα) - By dissimilation Β Μ σαράκοντα
Porph. Cor 478, 13; GSpata 98 (A.D. 1131) (cp. В σapako-
στός, Σεραντάπηχοs, and ancient τάρων for τεττάρων Athen.
6,5). Noapârra (evon in Theoph. 474, 3). Soc 647".
πεντήκοντα-Μ πεντῆντα, now πενήντα (593. 639)
€
ξήκοντα—Ν ἑξήντα (639)
ἑβδομήκοντα -Ν ἑβδομήντα (639)
[1] In G -B also τεσσεράκοντα. (Οp. 637.)
173
645, 646.]
ORDINAL NUMBERS.
80
90
100
200
ὀγδοήκοντα—Ν ὀγδοῆντα and ὀγδόντα or ὀγδῶντα (639)
ἐνενήκοντα—Ν ἐνενήντα (639)
ἑκατόν— Ν ἑκατό (219)
διακόσιοι, α, αι (638), N also διακόσοι (148)
N also εξακόσοι (148)
*ἑπτακόσιοι, α, αι—Ν εφτακόσιοι (174), also εφτακόσοι (148)
*ὀκτακόσιοι, α, αι Ν οχτακόσιοι (174), also ὀχτακόσοι (148)
ἐνακόσιοι (639)-Ν ἐννεακόσιοι, also ἐννεακόσοι (148)
χίλιοι, α, αι
300
τριακόσιοι, α, αι
""
Ν τρακόσιοι (150, α) also τρακόσοι (148)
400
500
Δ'
Ατετρακόσιοι, α, αι
Επεντακόσιοι, α, αι
29
N also τετρακόσοι (148)
""
N also πεντακόσοι (148)
600
μεξακόσιοι, α, αι
""
700
800
900
1000
2000
3000
4000
केरे
5000
6000
7000
etc.
99
""
""
""
β δισχίλιοι, α, αι-Ν δυο χιλιάδες
τρισχίλιοι, α, αι Ν τρεις χιλιάδες
τετρακισχίλιοι-Ν τέσσερεις (& -ρες) χιλιάδες
πεντακισχίλιοι, α, αι
εξακισχίλιοι, α, αι
ξ ἑπτακισχίλιοι, α, αι
ὀκτακισχίλιοι, 4, αι
8000 η
9000 θ ἐνακισχίλιοι, α, αι
IC,000
20,000 Κ
100,000 ρ
—
μύριοι, α, αι Ν δέκα χιλιάδες
δισμύριοι, α, αι-Ν εἴκοσι χιλιάδες
δεκακισμύριοι, α, αι-Ν ἑκατὸ χιλιάδες
III. ORDINAL NUMBERS.
646. The ordinal numerals end in -τος from rst to rgth (the
2nd, 7th, and 8th excepted), then invariably in -orós. Hence
they are all adjectives of three endings: -os, -ov, -n (or -a).
πρώτος, ον, η
Ist
2nd δεύτερος, ον, α
3rd τρίτος, ον, η
4th τέταρτος, ον, η
5th πέμπτος, ον, η
6th έκτος, ον, η
7th ἕβδομος, ου, η
8th "ydoos, ov, n
gth ἔνατος, ον, η
roth δέκατος, ον, η
IIth ἑνδέκατος, ον, η
12th δωδέκατος, ον, η
13th τρίτος καὶ δέκατος, ον, η
14th τέταρτος καὶ δέκατος
15th πέμπτος καὶ δέκατος
16th ἕκτος καὶ δέκατος
17th ἕβδομος καὶ δέκατος
18th ὄγδοος καὶ δέκατος
19th ἔνατος καὶ δέκατος
20th εικοστός, όν, ή
21st εἷς Οι πρῶτος καὶ εἰκοστός
22nd δεύτερος καὶ εἰκοστός
23rd τρίτος καὶ εἰκοστός
30th τριακοστός, όν, ή
4oth τεσσαρακοστός, όν, ή
5oth πεντηκοστός, όν, ή
6oth εξηκοστός, όν, ή
7oth ἑβδομηκοστός, όν, ή
8oth ὀγδοηκοστός, όν, ή
goth ἐνενηκοστός, όν, ή
Iooth ἑκατοστός, όν, ή
200th διακοσιοστός, όν, ή
3ooth τριακοσιοστός, όν, ή
4ooth τετρακοσιοστός, όν, ή
5ooth πεντακοσιοστός, όν, ή
6ooth εξακοσιοστός, όν, ή
7ooth ἑπτακοσιοστός, όν, ή
Sooth οκτακοσιοστός, όν, ἡ
gooth ενακοσιοστός, όν, ή
1oooth χιλιοστός, όν, ή
2000th δισχιλιοστός, όν, ή
3000th τρισχιλιοστός, όν, ή
4000th τετρακισχιλιοστός, όν,
5oooth πεντακισχιλιοστός, όν, ή
oooth εξακισχιλιοστός, όν, ή
7000th ἑπτακισχιλιοστός, όν, ή
Soooth ὀκτακισχιλιοστός, όν, ή
goooth ενακισχιλιοστός, όν, ή
10,oooth μυριοστός, όν, ἡ
20,000th δισμυριοστός, όν, ή
174
NUMERAL ADVERBS.
[646b-650.
646. P-Β formation : τετραεξηκοστός Gr. Urk. Berlin 234 (+121),
12 & 17.
647. Of the ordinal numerals, only πρῶτος δεύτερος and τρίτος are still
preserved in N, all the remaining being replaced by the cardinals preceded
by the articlo, as: ὁ ἑφτά, ὁ δώδεκα, ὁ τριάντα.-On the other hand, a few
olhor ordinals survive as substantives, viz. δευτέρα ‘Monday, τρίτη
Tuesday'; (for τετάρτη ' Wednesday popular speech uses τετράδη [340]);
πέφτη (i.ο. πέμπτη, *πέπτη, πέφτη [193. 174]) Thursday'; σαρακοστή i.e.
τεσσαρακοστή (sc. νηστεία) ‘Lent (see 647); πεντηκοστή ‘Pentecost,
• Whit Sunday'; ἑκατοστή ' a number of hundred (ep. ἑκατοστός 66ο).
647. By dissimilation τεσσαρακοστός becomes Β σαρακοστός Nomoc. 285 &
286 ; Dig. 6, 129; henco ἡ σαρακοστή 'the quadragesimal fast, Lent (645,
40. 647.) Το τεσσερακοστός is represented by M σερακοστός (as FTrincl. 428
[+1265] σερακοστὸν χρόνον).
IV. NUMERAL ADVERBS.
648. Numeral adverbs answering to the question How many
times ? are formed from cardinals by affixing the ending -άκις
'times' to all numbers from 4 upwards. In compound numbers
only the last part receives the ending -άκις.-Mark as irregular
the first three numbers.
I ἅπαξ once
2 dis 'twice'
3 τρίς 'thrice
4 τετράκις ‘four times
5 πεντάκις “ five times
6 ἑξάκις six times, etc.
7 ἑπτάκις
8 οκτάκις
9 ἐνάκις
1ο δεκάκις
ΙΙ ἑνδεκάκις
12 δωδεκάκις
21 εἰκοσάκις ἅπαξ
22 εικοσάκις δίς
30 τριακοντάκις
40 τεσσαρακοντάκις
50 πεντηκοντάκις
60 έξηκοντάκις
το έβδομηκοντάκις
8ο ὀγδοηκοντάκις
90 ἐνενηκοντάκις
100 ἑκατοντάκις
200 διακοσιάκις
300 τριακοσιάκις
>
13 τρισκαιδεκάκις
1000 χιλιάκις
14 τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάκις
15 πεντεκαιδεκάκις
20 εἰκοσάκις
649. So further πολλάκις ' many times,
,
2000 δισχιλιάκις
10,000 μυριάκις
20,000 δισμυριάκις
often, συχνάκις ' frequently,
ὀλιγάκις few times, σπανάκις rarely, τοσάκις οι τοσαυτάκις ‘so many
times,' óσúκis as many times,' 'as often,' 'whenever.'
650. Being the simplest and most natural unit of time, day (ἡμέρα)
suggested itself most conveniently for enumerations of time and thus
was closely associated with numerals, both cardinal and ordinal.
This frequent association then gradually led to the convenience of
dropping the substantive ἡμέρα (cp. A καθ' ἑκάστην ‘every day';
Sept. Ps. 47, I ἡ δευτέρα ‘second day, Monday'; so further τρίτη,
τετάρτη, πέμπτη, for Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, since G; also
ἡ ἑβδόμη the seventh day of the month, Plut. ii. 1027 F; Luc.
Pseudol. 16; Philo i. 645, 4, etc.; cp. also 1791), and thus gave birth
to the elliptical expressions μία, δύο, τρεῖς, etc., or πρώτη, δευτέρα,
τρίτη, etc., in the sense of one, two, three times or frst, second,
third, time.' This ellipsis seems to have been furthered by the NT
(Luke) standing phrase μία τῶν ἡμερῶν. (Cp. μία τῶν σαββάτων and ἀπ'
ἧς 1791.)
175
650-654.] NUMERAL ADVERBS MULTIPLICATIVES.
Pallad. 1179 ο ἐν μιᾷ τῶν ἡμερῶν, but 1228 D ἐσθίειν μίαν παρὰ μίαν
every other day. Apophth. Ior ο εκάλεσέ με μίαν ὁ ἀββᾶς 'Αρσένιος ‘one
day. 328 Β τί εἶπες μοι τῇ ἄλλῃ ‘the other day. 185 Β μια γοῦν πολε-
μηθείς once.'
420 ο ἀνῆλθεν ἐν μιᾷ εἰς τὸ δωμάτιον αὐτῆς προσεύξασθαι.
JMoschos 2877 ο & 2949 ο ἐν μιᾷ. Leont. Neap. V. J. ἐν μιᾷ 15, 10; 48, 4;
6 ; 73, 10 ; 76, 9; et passim (beside ἐν μιᾷ τῶν ἡμερῶν 12, 6; 54, 7; 83, 17).
Theoph. 182, 28 μίαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν προέρχομαι. Vita Nil. Jun. 45 Β μίαν
τοῦ χρόνου ' once a year.ELegrand Bibl. ii. p. 23, 145 καὶ τοῦτο ποῖσε το μίαν
καὶ δύο καὶ τρεῖς καὶ θέλεις ἰδεῖν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ;
and so on down to the present day, as:
'I
I told you so once, I told you so twice.
τρεῖς καὶ τὴν κακήν του μέρα.
σοῦ τό 'πα μιά, σοῦ τό 'πα δυό
μιὰ τοῦ φίλου δυὸ τοῦ φίλου
651. Another equally post-christian (T-N) mode of expressing the same
notion has been evolved by supplying to the cardinal number the word
φορά dialectally [Crete etc.] also βολά, 116; ep. Ital. volta) turn,
'time,' naturally used mostly in the plural, as:
[Diosc.] Eupor. 2, 2 πέντε ἢ ἐξ φορὰς τὸν μῆνα Alchem. 318, 17 φορὰς δύο. 322,
21 κατὰ πέντε καὶ ἐξ φοράς. ib. 26 εἰς πᾶσαν φορὰν β' ἢ γ'. 323, 6 κατὰ γ' φοράς.
325, 23 ἀπὸ ε' καὶ ἐξ φοράς. 330, 3 μίαν φοράν, etc., etc. Theoph. 332, τι καὶ γίνεται
πρώτη φορά [ν. 1.] πτῶσις τοῦ Ῥωμαϊκοῦ στρατοῦ. Nomoc. 46 δύο φοράς. Tzetz.
Chil. 13, 58. Nicet. 459, 24 μίαν (sc. φοράν). IStaph. 123 f. τέσσαρας φορὲς τὴν
ἡμέραν, κάθα φορὰν δὲ ὡσεὶ πανία δέκα. Asin. 327 μιὰν φοράν. 448 μια φορά.
651. This expedient is now the one in universal use: μιὰ φορά, δυὸ
(τρεις, τέσσερεις, πέντε κτλ., πολλὲς ὀ]λίγες, πόσες, τόσες, ὅσες φορές.
652. A third substitute for the numoral adverbs, peculiar to G-M
Greek, is offoctod by extending the meaning of the neuter cardinal (rd)
πρῶτον ' for the first time to 'once'; (τὸ δεύτερον ' for the second time
to twice'; (τ) τρίτον ' for the third time to three times and so on.
This extension of usage is natural, seeing that what occurred for the
rst, and, 3rd, 4th, etc. time, must needs have occurred once, twice, three,
four, etc. times.
B.
Conc. Ant. (+341) 2ο δεύτερον τοῦ ἔτους=δὲς τοῦ ἔτους. Basil. i. 217 Β.
Chrys. X. 120 A. Prodr. 4, 85.-Chrys. i. 611 Β τρίτον τῆς ἑβδομάδος. Vita
Epiph. 28 B; 45 0. JMoschos 2865 Α. Acta Joann 5, 14; 24, 12. 35, 9;
Basil. iv. 484 Β τέταρτον καθ' ἑκάστην ἑβδομάδα κοινω
Α. - JMoschos 2925 • ἕβδομον δι᾽ ὅλης τῆς ἡμέρας.
Leont. Neap. V. J. 17, 11 δεύτερον τῆς ἑβδομάδος ἢ καὶ τρίτον ἀπήρχετο.
114, 2.
νοῦμεν.
Prodr. 5, 64
Chrys. i. 6o
-
V. OTHER NUMERALS.
653. From numeral stems are further formed :-
I. Multiplicalives in (-πλόος) -πλοῦς, as: ἁπλοῦς, οὖν, ἢ, simple, δι
πλοῦς ‘twofold (beside occasional δισσός ' double '), τριπλούς ‘three-
fold (beside occasional τρισσός treble '), τετραπλούς fourfold, πεντα
πλοῦς ‘Givefold, etc. Further πολλαπλούς ' manifold, ποσαπλούς ‘how
manifold.' (319, 2.)
"
654. Contracted adjectives of this class, coinciding as they do in
most of their casos with the ordinary adjectives in -os, woro ofton
identified with thom (320 f.), sometimes oven by A writers (ep. δορυξός,
φυλλοξός, δίκρος, Κρατίνος, Αρχίνος, πορφυρώτερος, πορφυρώτατος, διπλότερος,
ἁπλότερος, etc. 321). That the procoss of assimilation had, as carly in
a, roached an advanced or rathor final stage in popular speech, may bo
gathered from the testimony of Mooris 336: τριπλὰ τετραπλᾶ περισπωμένως
καὶ μακρῶς 'Αττικῶς βραχέως Ἑλληνικῶς. Honco N treats thom as ordinary
176
MULTIPLICATIVES AND NUMERAL SUBSTANTIVES. [654-661.
adjectives in -os: ἁπλός, διπλός, τριπλός (ep. 4 δισσός, τρισσός). For all other
N numbers upwards, the adjective dimλds is added as a crystallized suffix:
διπλος, as: τρίδιπλος, τετράδιπλος (50 even in Acta Thadd. 3), πεντάδιπλος,
ἑξάδιπλος, ἐφτάδιπλος, οχτάδιπλος, etc.
655. A variety of multiplicatives is effected by the ending
-πλάσιος, which answers to the question : ποσαπλάσιος; how many
times as much ? διπλάσιος ‘twice as much, τριπλάσιος ‘thrice as much,
τετραπλάσιος, πενταπλάσιος, ἑξαπλάσιος, εἰκοσαπλάσιος, etc. 4, 5, 6, 20
times as much, etc. So further πολλαπλάσιος ' many times as much,
μυριοπλάσιος ‘thousands of times as much.
656. For -πλάσιος Ρ Greek often uses -πλασίων (neuter -πλάσιον),
G. -ovos, us : τριπλασίων, ἑκατονταπλασίονα.
657. Neiller -πλάσιος nor -πλασίων survives in N. Present speech, like
other modern languages, uses instead a periphrastic expression, such as
δυὸ τρεῖς, τέσσερεις, πέντε, etc.) φορὲς πλειότερος (πλειότερος) οι περισσότερος
(μεγαλύτερος), etc.
,
658. 2. Abstract feminines in -άς (G. άδος 363), as : μονάς unit, δυάς
couple, τριάς ' a number of three, τετράς, πεμπάς (Ρ πεντάς), ἑξάς,
ἑβδομὰς & ἑπτάς, ὀγδοάς & ὀκτάς, ἐννεάς, δεκάς, ενδεκάς, δωδεκάς, εἰκάς,
τριακάς (G- τριακοντάς), τεσσαρακοντάς, πεντηκοντάς, ἑκατοντάς, χιλιάς,
μυριάς, ' a number of 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 20, 30, 40, 50, 100, 1000,
10000. Hence τρεῖς μυριάδες 30,000.
658. Of those substantivos only a few survive in N, chiefly as specific
torms, viz. ἡ μονάδα ' unit a school term), Αγία Τριάδα ‘Holy Trinity, τετράδη
(340. 647) ' Wednesday,' ἑβδομάδα ' wook, δεκάδα ‘ten, ἑκατοντάδα ' u hundred
(both as school torms only), χιλιάδα, ' a thousand, μυριάδες an immenso
number.' For the rost sco 661.
659. In A the two words χιλιὰς and μυριάς accent the ultima in the geni-
tivo plural: χιλιαδῶν, μυριαδῶν. So still in N (354).
660. Bosidos -ás (G. -ádos), there are a few numeral substantives with the
ending -us (G. -ύος), as : ἡ τριτύς, τετρακτύς, πεντηκοστύς, χιλιοστύς, μυριοστύς,
660. These forms, which oven in A occur rarely, are of course unknown to N,
though some scholars claim to have discovered a romant of them in the N popular
pharuso μιὰ ἑκατοστή, and accordingly write ή εκατοστύ (647
661. The genuino N numorals, which correspond to the 4 feminino
substantives in -ds (G. -άδος 658), ended in 1-1 speech in -αρέα, now con-
tracted to -ωρεά or -αριά (155, c). This ending is naturally current chiefly
in multiples of 5 (that is in ro, 15, 20, 25, etc.), in conjunction will μιά.
B-M
μια δεκαρέα
δωδεκαρέα
">
» δεκαπενταρέα
εικοσαρέα
εἰκοσιπενταρέα
Η τριανταρέα
1 σαρανταρέα
"}
πεντηνταρέα
Εξηνταρέα
ἑκατονταρέα
ἑκατονπεντηνταρέα
διακοσαρέα
""
""
"}
but χιλιάδα
Now
δεκαριά (οι -ιά, 155, c)
δωδεκαριά
δεκαπενταριά
εικοσαρεί
εἰκοσπενταρεά
τριανταριά
σαρανταριά
πενηνταρεά
Εξηνταρεά
ἑκατονταρεά
ἑκατο(ν)πενηνταριά
διακοσαριά, οιο.
χιλιάδα
177
N
662-670.]
DISTRIBUTIVES THE VERB.
662. 3. Distributives are formed :
(1) By prefixing the preposition oùv (used as an adverb) to
the cardinal number, as: σύνδυο ‘by twos, σύντρεις (σύντρια)
by threes, σύμπεντε ' by fives, συνδώδεκα ‘by dozens, συνεκκαί
δεκα ‘by sixteens (writton also σὺν δύο, σὺν τρεῖς, etc.).
(2) By means of the prepositions and and κατά, with the ac-
cusative of the cardinal number (1497, b. 1589, b), as: åvà tévte
‘by fives, ἀνὰ δέκα ‘by tens, καθ᾽ ἕνα singuli one by one, κατὰ
δύο σύνδυο,
Εν
ע:
6
Cp. Rev. 4, 8 ἓν καθ' ἓν αὐτῶν ἔχον ἀνὰ πτέρυγας ἕξ. Plut. Cat. min. 68
καθ᾿ ἕνα τῶν οἰκετῶν every one. Vita SA 9* Ε φέρετέ μοι ἕνα καθ' ένα.
ib. Γ ἔλεγον ἑνὶ καθ' ἑνί. (Cp. 666.)
663. For the propositions σὺν and ἀνά, N has substituted partly ἀπό
(1515), partly κατά in the modified form κάθε (665. 15901).
664. Like σὺν and probably after its analogy, the prepositions ἀνὰ
and Kurά, when used in the above distributive sense, came to be treated
in P-M as adverbial prefixes to the nominative (1589), as: Plut.
Aem. 32 ἀνὰ τέσσαρες (like ἀνὰ τρεῖς); Rev. 21, 21 ἀνὰ εἰς ἕκαστος;
Hermas Sim. 9, 2, 3 ἀνὰ δύο παρθένοι. NT Mark 14, 19 (also John 8, 9)
eis kuo' eis (so too Cedr. ii. 698. 723, & Curop. 689; cp. also Leo Tact.
783 εἷς παρ' εἷς; cp. Rev. 4, 8 ἓν καθ' ἓν αὐτῶν ἔχον ἀνὰ πτέρυγας ἕξ);
Rom. 12, 5 ὁ καθ' εἷς οι καθείς. So Luc. Pseudosoph. 9. Cp. also Igoo.
1500b.
-
665. The frequent expressions καθ᾽ ἕνα, καθ᾽ ἕκαστον, καθ᾿ ἑβδομάδα, οὐθένα,
μηθένα (ep. καθ᾿ ὥραν, καθ' ἡμέραν, καθ᾽ ἔτος, 1589,3), taken in conjunction
with οὐδ᾽ ἕνα, μηδ' ἕνα, οὔτε ἕνα, μήτε ἕνα, led to a feminino form κάθε μία
after οὐδεμία, μηδεμία, οὔτε μία, μήτε μίαund thus called into existonco
an indeclinable adjective κάθε (simple καθ' being inadmissiblo 218 f.).
This κάθε, which is often modified by assimilation to κάθα (after πᾶσα
621. 626), was muistakon for an independent word, and so gradually took
the place of mas and ἕκαστος each overy (ep. κατά, 1590).
666. 3. By repeating the cardinal numeral twice, as: ἕνα ἕνα, μίαν
μίαν, τρεῖς τρείς, etc. ep. Antatt. 108, 9 μίαν μίαν ἀντὶ κατὰ μίαν. Σοφοκλῆς
Έριδι. Aesch. Pers. 981 μυρία μυρία = κατὰ μυριάδας ; Sept. Gen. 7, 12 &
15 δύο δύο. 7, 2 ἑπτὰ ἑπτά. 1 Par. 24, 6 εἷς εἷς. Callin. 60, 33 εἷς καὶ εἰς.
Porph. Cer. 261 απέρχεται μία μία προσκυνοῦσα. Αpophth. 8ο ^ χρὴ οὖν
ΜΙΑΝ ΜΙΑΝ συγκαταβαίνειν τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς. 113 D Δύο Διο νηστεύω καὶ δύο
ΔΥΟ
παξαμάτια ἐσθίω. 116 Λ νηστεύειν θέλων δύο λύω. So too 120 Β Δύο Δύο
ἐσθίων (ubi male διὰ δύο). 368 ο ἐγὼ Δύο Δύο νηστεύω καὶ ζεῦγος ψωμίων
ἐσθίω. So ib. p. This mode of indicating distribution has since
spread widely, and is now the commonest in N speech.
Β. THE VERB (CONJUGATION).
667. The Greek verb has-
A. THREE PERSONS: First, Second, and Third.-So too in N.
B. THREE NUMBERS: Singular, Dual, and Plural.
688. The Dual, however, began to retreat from the ordinary lan-
guage carly in classical antiquity. After 420 B. C. it disappears from
the A inscriptions, and even the orators show no trace of it from
363 Β. c. downwards (229. 631. 633; ep. SiKeck 57; cp. KMeister-
hans² 161; HSchmidt 2f.)
669. C. THREE VOICES: Active, Passive, and Middle. So still
in N.
670. The middle voice of transitive verbs (1466) refers the
178
MOODS AND TENSES OF VERB.
[670-682.
action back to the agent or subject, in the sense either of an accu-
sative (direct object), or of a dative (indirect object), (1467. 1470):
ACTIVE.
λούω ' I bathe
Tоρico 'I procure'
δανείζω 'I lend
πορίζω
MIDDLE.
λούομαι (=λούω ἐμαυτόν) ‘I bathe myself.
πορίζομαι (=πορίζω ἐμαυτῷ) I procure for
δανείζομαι ' I borrow.
[myself."
671. Both functions of the Middle still obtain in N, but the indirect
function is much more uncommon than it was in 4. (1472. 1478–86.)
672. The middle and passive voices have the same form
through all tenses save in the Future and Aorist where each
has its separate form.
673. However, in N the two voices have become identical in the future
and aorist also, the passive having obliterated the middlo (675. 1478–86).
674. In many cases the middle and passive (medio-passive) voice has
an active meaning. In that case it is called deponent, in particular
Middle deponent (MD) or Passive deponent (PD), according as it has
a middle or a passive form in the future and aorist (999º f.).
675. In N both the middle future and the middle aorist having
become extinct (1478-86), all deponent verbs have of necessity become
PD (673). Moreover many of the deponents being active in sense have
also, in the course of P-N, adopted the active voice, so that the group
of deponents appears now considerably reduced. See 1000 & 1482.
676. D. THREE MOODS: Indicative, Subjunctive (Conjunctive),
and Imperative,-which are called Finite moods, because they
distinguish persons and numbers. (Cp. 680.)
677. The 'subjunctive of the past,' or secondary subjunctive (692), is conven-
tionally called Optative, a term suggested to the ancient grammarians by
the circumstance that at their time this mood survived merely as
a means of expressing wish (1924. App. v. 3. 10). In ono single case.
however, the secondary subjunctive is formed from the future stem and
in that case may preserve, for the sako of distinction, the name future optative
(1935 f.). But even hero it is raro, and appears only as a substitute for the
future indicative.
678. The future subjunctive and future imperative are formed from
the aorist stem (ep. 908). Owing to this morphological connexion, they
are commonly classed under the aorist and termed aorist subjunctive
and aorist imperative respectively. This is, however, misleading, since,
from a logical and syntactical point of view, we cannot well conceive
a past subjunctive and past imperative, such moods, owing to the nature
of their special case, always referring to the future (cp. 1909–22. 1926).
679. All three (finite) moods are still preserved in N, but the
secondary subjunctive (optative) has become extinct since G, its
place having been taken chiefly by the primary subjunctive, partly
by the indicative also. (1923 ff. 1934. 2039-40. App. v. 6-13. 15.)
680. E. Two VERBAL NOUNS: the Infinitive acting as a sub-
stantive, and the Participle acting as an adjective.—These two
verbal representatives are distinguished as Infinite moods (676).
681. Both verbal nouns have become extinct in N, only past parti-
ciples in -µévos still surviving (822.2063. 2110. App. vi. 13-19, 24-27).
682. F. SIX TENSES: Present, Future, Perfect, -Imperfect,
Aorist, and Pluperfect.
179
N 2
683-689.]
TENSES OF VERB.
683. Strictly speaking there are or ought to be three groups of tenses
corresponding to the three divisions of time, viz. three for the present,
three for the future, and three for the past, according as each division
is conceived as merely performed (effected), as still going on (con-
tinued), or as standing complete.
684. The nine tenses thus distinguishable would be classified as
follows:
I. PRESENT.
I. To, 'do': action merely effected: Effective Present
2. now (= eiµì Toiv), 'am doing' action going on: Duralive Present
3. Tеяоíŋkα, 'have done': standing complete: completed present or Perfect.
II. FUTURE.
6
4. Tоnow shall do': action merely effected: Effective Future
5. roińow(=ëooµai toiŵv) 'shall be doing': action going on: Durative Future
6. ooμaι neжоinkws, shall have done': action standing completo: Future
Perfect.
ἐποίησα,
III. PAST.
7. ¿woíŋoa, 'did': action merely effected: Aorist
เ
8. πolour, was doing' action going on: Imperfect
9. ÉTETTOIηKELV 'had done': action standing completo: Pluperfect.
REMARKS.
685. It will be seen that for the effective and durative present the
Greek language developed no separate simple forms, both functions
being expressed by one and the same representative: To ‘I do'
and am doing,' while the completed present is conventionally
called perfect: memoiŋka 'I have done.' Likewise both the effective
and durative future are expressed by one and the same simple form
Toow I shall do' and 'shall be doing'; whereas the completed
future is almost always periphrastic: Eropa Temoiŋkós 'I shall have
done.' It is only in the case of the passive future that A has in many
cases developed separate simple forms, one for the effective, another
for the durative, and a third for the completed future: mpаɣÕhσeтαι,
it shall be (then or once) performed' (effective); mpáćera it shall
continue to be, or shall be every time, performed' (durative); and
Tempáĝerai ‘it shall have been performed '(future perfect). (1882.)
680. N has evolved in all three voices separate forms, but only for the
effective and durativo future: Où λovow 'I shall batho onco' (offectivo);
Od λouw 'I shall be bathing or shall batho every timo' (durativo) ;—0à
AOVOT 'I shall be bathed once' (effective future); Od λovwμm I shall be
bathed overy time,' or 'I shall batho myself every time.'
687. Ancient Greek then actually developed only six simple tenses,
while the remaining three-the durative present, the durative future,
and the completed future-were compound, in that they were expressed
by means of some auxiliary verb (εἰμί, also ὑπάρχω, γίγνομαι, τον
xúvw, ëxw, 2106 f.) and the participle of the respective verb. This
periphrastic mode originated chiefly in the need for perspicuity, but
partly also in phonopathic causes. (Cp. 736 H. 764. 886.)
688. Of the six simplo tensos reforred to, four still survivo in N, viz. :
tho Prosent, Futuro, Imperfect, and Aorist, while the other two, viz. tho
Perfect and Pluperfect, have made room for periphrastic substitutes.
689. The completed future, which is commonly called future perfect
(also third future), and corresponds to the Latin Futurum exactum, is
proper to A and Atticistic compositions only (1881 f. 1897). Even
180
CLASSIFICATION OF VERBS.—Q-CONJUGATION.
-2-CONJUGATION. [689–700.
here it occurs only in the passive (rarely intransitive) voice, and then
nearly always in the indicative. (Cp. 1869. 1882-5.)
690. Otherwise the future perfect is usually expressed by the com-
bination of cooμai 'shall be' with the perfect participle of the respective
vorb, as meπоinkas éσoμaι 'I shall have done.'
691. The perfect generally corresponds to the Latin perfectum praesens, and the
aorist to the perfectum historicum.
692. Of the six simple tenses, the Present, Future, and Perfect are
called primary (or principal), while the Imperfect, Aorist, and Pluper-
fect are contradistinguished as secondary or historical (also past) tenses
(1932). The primary tenses serve as a basis for the formation of the
secondary tenses.
693. For the formation and conjugation of the verb in N, the present,
the future, and the perfect participle passivo serve regularly as primary
tenses, while all the rest serve as secondary tenses (996, d):
γράφω ' write, ἔγραφα (θα) Γράψω, ἔγραψα
Γράφομαι ' am writton, write my name, εγράφουμουν—(θὰ) Γράφτῶ, ἐγράφ
τηκα-Γραμμένος, εἶμαι γραμμένος, ἔχω γραμμένο”.
CLASSIFICATION OF VERBS.
694. For the sake of convenience, verbs are commonly classified
into three groups distinguished by the character of their 'stem' or
'theme' (252. 756). According to this (stem-) character we have-
695. 1. Sonantic (or vocalic) verbs, i. e. verbs of which the stem
character is a sonant, as Xúw 'loose,' maúw 'stop,' πuideúw 'educate,'
τιμάω ' honour, ποιέω 'do, δηλόω manifest
696. 2. Consonantal verbs, in particular-
a. Mute verbs, i. e. verbs of which the stem character is a mute, as:
διώκω ' pursue, λέγω ' say, πράττω 'λο, τρέχω ' run, τρέφω breed.
b. Liquid verbs, i. c. verbs of which the stem character is a liquid, as :
στέλλω ' send, δέμω ' fog, νέμω ' distribute, κρίνω ‘judge.
697. The inflection of the verb, commonly called conjugation,
is determined not by the ending of the infinitive, as in modern.
languages, but by the ending of the first person of the present
indicative (in the active voice). This ending shows two modes
of inflection or conjugation.
698. a. The Common conjugation which ends in -w and is
accordingly called the Q-conjugation. In three tenses, the
Present, Imperfect, and Future, it attaches the endings to the
stem by means of an o or e, commonly called thematic (sometimes
also 'connective') vowel (758), as: äpx-0-μev, äpx-e-te, stem åpx-.
699. b. The Mi-conjugation which ends in -u. It attaches the
endings directly to the stem, without a thematic vowel, as:
ἵστα-μεν, ἵστα-τε, ston ἱστα-.
I. COMMON OR Q-CONJUGATION.
I. SONANTIC VERBS.
A. BARYTONE CONJUGATION.
700. The conjugation of sonantic vorbs is either barytonc
(uncontracted) or contracted. The barytone conjugation is
illustrated by the following paradigm of raúw 'stop," 'suspend."
181
700b.]
ACTIVE.
CONJUGATION TABLE OF 2-VERBS.
7005. Conjugation Table of raw 'stop,' as typical representative of barytone verbs in -w.
παύτω
Present
INDICATIVE
-ELS
-EL
-ΕΤΟΥ
-ο-μεν -ε-τε
Εντον
-ου-σι
I. ACTIVE VOICE.
SUBJUNCTIVE
παύτω
-ns
-ω-μεν
-η τον
-η-τε
-η τον
-ω-σι
ע
IMPERATIVE
παντε
«Ε-τον
-έτω
-έ-των
-Ε-ΤΕ -ό-ντων
ΟΙ -έ-τωσαν
ἔ-παυ-ον
Imperfect
182
Perfect
-ES
-E
-Ε-τον
-έ-την
-ov
-O-μEV, -E-TE,
πέ-παν-κα
D
kas,
-ΚΕ
-κα-τοι,
-και τον
-καμεν -κατε
-κασί
έ-πε-παύ-κειν
Pluperf.
-κεις
-κει τον -κεί την
-Κειμεν - κειτε
-ELS
•ε τον
•σκομεν -ε-ΤΕ
παύ-σ-ω
Future
παύ-οι-μι
-οι-μεν
πε-παύ-κω
τοις
-κω-μεν
-οι τον
-OL-TE
-Kns
- οι
-οί την
-οι εν
· κή τον
-κη-τε
[1]
-κη
-κή-τον
-κω-σι
-KEL
πεπαύ-και-μι
-KOLS
-κοι
[1]
-κοι-τον
-κοί την
-κε-σαν
-και-μεν -κοι-τε
-και-εν
-Εί
•Ε τον
-ουσι
D
πέ-παν-κε
INFINITIVE
παύξειν
που-ον,
PARTICIPLE
παύτων, οντος
""
παν-ουσα, ης
do.
do.
έ-τω
πεπαυκέναι
-Κε-τον
-KE-TE
-κέστων
σκότων
Οι κέτωσαν
-
πε-παυ-κώς, ότος
-κός,
""
-κυια, ας
do.
do.
παύ-ε-ω
-ns
-η-τον
-n
παύ-ε-ον
-ω-μεν -η-τε
-η τον
-ω-σι
-α-τον
-α-τε
-ά-τω
-ά-των
-ά-ντων
or -ά-τωσαν
παύ-c-ων,
οντος
παύ-σ-ειν
παῦ-σ-ον,
παύ-σ-ουσα, ης
επαν-ε-α
Aorist
-ας
- Ε
-α-τον
-ά-την
-α-μεν -α-τε
παύ-ε-αι-μι -αις Οι -ειας
-αι τον
-αι-μεν -αιτε
και οι -ειε"
-αί-την
-ειεν οι -ειαν
παύσαι
παύ-c-as,
παῦ-σ-αν,
αυτός
33
παν-σ-ασα, ης
♫¹ As given above, the subjunctive of the perfect and pluperfect active is rather rare. The ordinary A form is periphrastic, as in
the medio-passive voice (764), viz, pf. πεπαγ-κώς ὦ ᾖς ᾖ, πεπαυκότε ἦτον ἦτον, πεπαυκότες ὦμεν ἦτε ὦσι-plpf. πεπαγ-κὼς εἴην εἴης εἴη,
πεπαυκότε εἴητον εἰήτην, πεπαυκότες εἴημεν εἴητε εἴησαν.
CONJUGATION TABLE OF Ω-VERBS.
MEDIO-PASSIVE. [700 ¹.
II. MEDIO-PASSIVE VOICE.
SUBJUNCTIVE
MPERATIVE
INFINITIVE
παύ-ω-μαι
-ε-σθον
-ονται
-?
-η-σθον
τη ται
παύ-ου
-έ-σθω
PARTICIPLE
παυ-ό-μενος
-η-σθον
-ε-σθον -έ-σθων
παύεσθαι
σώμεθα -η-σθε
-ω-νται
-εσθε -έ-σθων
-ό-μενον
-ο-μένη
INDICATIVE
παύ-ο-μαι
Present
-ό-μεθα
-
-ε-σθον
-εσθε
Οι -έ-σθωσαν
Imperfect
ἐ-παυ-ό-μην
-ε-σθον -έ-σθην
-ό-μεθα -ε-σθε
του
-E-TO
παυ-οί-μην -οιο
-οι-σθον
-O-LTO
-οίμεθα -οι-σθε
-OL-TO
-οί-σθην
- οι ντο
do.
do.
πέ-παυμαι -σαι
-ται
πε-παυμένος ὦ
ᾖς
πέ-παυ-σο
-σθω
77
-σθον -σθων
πε-παύ-σθαι
Perfect
-σθον
-σθον
-μένω
ἦτον
ἦτον
-σθε
μεθα
ασθε
-νται
-μένοι ώμεν
ήτε
ὦσι
-σθων
Οι -σθωσαν
πεπαυμενος
-μένον
-μενη
έ-πε-παύ-μην -σο
-TO
πεπαυμένος εἴην
εἴης
ειη
Pluperf.
-σθον
-σθην
-μένω
εἴητον
εἰήτην
-μεθα -σθε
-ντο
μένοι εἴημεν εἴητε
εἴησαν
PASSIVE ONLY
MIDDLE ONLY
παύ-ε-ομαι
-έ-σθον
Future
-ό-μεθα -ε-σθε
- εται
-ε-σθον
-ονται
παύ-ε-ω-μαι
-η ται
παύ-εται
-η-σθον
-ώ-μεθα -η-σθε
-η-σθον
-ω-νται
-α-σθον
-α-σθε -ά-σθων
έπαυ-c-ά-μην
Aorist
-ά-μεθα -α-σθε
παυ-θή-σο-μαι -η
Future
-σε-σθον -σε-σθον
-σύ-μεθα -σε-σθε -σο-νται
ἐ-παύ-θην
Aorist
-θης
-θη-τον
-θημεν θητε
-θη
αθή την
έθησαν
Fut.
πε-παύ-ε-ομαι
-D
-ε-σθον
Εται
-ε-σθον
perfect
-0
πα-το
-α-σθον
-ά-σθην
-α-ντο
-σεται
| παν-θ-ω
της
-n
-ή-τον
-ω- μεν
-ω-μεν
-ή-τε
-η-τον
-ω-σι
υ
παυ-θεί-ην
-θείσης
-θεί η
-θεί-η-τον
θεῖστον
-θεί-η-τον
θεῖστον
-θείτε
-θεί εν
πεπαυμένος
1/s
μενω
ἦτον
ἦτον
-ύ-μεθα -ε-σθε
-ονται
-μένοι ώμεν ήτε
ὦσιν
παυ-c-αί-μην -αι-ο
-αι-σθον
-αί-μεθα -αι-σθε
-αι-το
-αί-σθην
-αι-ντο
παύθη-τι
do.
do.
-ά-σθω
-ά-σθον
παύ-σε-σθαι
παν-ε-ό-μενος
-ό-μενον
-ο-μένη
or -ά-σθωσαν
παυ-τ-άμενος
παύ-σ-α-σθαι
-ά-μενον
-α-μενη
Στω
παυ-θα-σό- μενος
τον
-των
παυ-θή-σ-ε-σθαι
ΣΤΕ
-θέντων
or -θήτωσαν
παυθήναι
-σό-μενον
-σο-μένη
παν-θείς, έντος
-θέν,
-θεῖσα, ης
| -θεί-η-μεν θεί-η-τε θεί-η-σαν
| -θεῖ-μεν
(πε-παυ-σ-ό-μενος
(πε-παύ-σ-ε-σθαι)
-ό-μενον
-ο-μένη)
183
701-709.]
ACCENT OF VERB-PREFIXES.
701. So are further conjugated all sonantic verbs in -iw (-aiw, -eiw),
-úw, -avw, and the very numerous class in -eúw, as :
κυλίω ' roll
'
παίω strike
κωλύω hinder
kleiw 'close''
ακονίω ' cover with dust ῒδακρύω weep
'
δουλεύω serve
χορεύω ' dance
βουλεύω ' advise
*Bariλeuw 'reign' etc. etc.
ów 'loose'
Imoтeúw 'believe'
701". So further N: Baotλeuw 'go down,' 'set,' pilców treat,' yapew
φιλεύω ' ψαρεύω
fish, μισσεύω depart, μαζεύω gather, καβαλλικεύω ‘ride, κοντεύω ' am
neur, σημαδεύω ‘mark, γυρεύω ‘search, φυτεύω ‘plant, πιστεύω ‘believe,
χορατεύω ‘joke, 'play,' δασκαλεύω instruct, χαϊδεύω spoil, ζηλεύω ' envy,
etc., etc.
+
"
>
>
>
,
>
702. Since G times verbs in -iw (i. e. -íw, -úw, -eíw) have undergone
hyphaoresis or contraction in the penult (148), and so became associated
with contracted verbs. (Cp. 857-860.)
Thus πιείν
hucomo πεῖν
ὀμνύειν
ὀμνεῖν
ἀφίεις, Ν λύεις
ἀφεῖς λεις
κλείεις κυλίει πτύει
κλείς κυλεί φτεῖ.
703. When the diphthongs av and ev had assumed the sound of av or
af, and ev or eƒ (51 ff.), popular speech bogan to identify vorbs in -aúw and
-εύω with labial mutos. Henco popular N treats -αύω and -εύω 2s -άβω
as
and -éẞw respectively (865, 1. 884).
ACCENT IN THE CONJUGATion.
704. 1. The accent of the verb, on the whole, is recessive
(84¹¹), in that it stands as far back from the end as the 'quantity'
of the ultima allows. However, it can never recede beyond the
augment. Thus-
προσάγω, προσάγετε, πρόσαγε, προσαγάγωμεν, προσήχθησαν,—but προσῆ
γον (not προσηγον !).
704. So tou in N, as : λέγω, ἔλεγα, ἐλέγαμε. (But ἐπρόσεχα for προσεί
Xov, after 752.)
705. The endings -au and -o of the secondary subjunctive
(20b), and the participial ending -as count long (197). Hence Tai-
Sevσa (infin.), Taidevσai (imprt.), but raidevoa (secondary subj.).
706. 2. The penult is accented-
a. In all infinitives ending in -ναι, aς : λελυκέναι, λυθῆναι.—For
N seo 681.
b. In all infinitives and participles perf. middle, as: Aeλvolai,
λeλvµévos.—For N sco 681.
c. In the infin. aor. active, as : Avσai, maideûoai. -For N see 681.
707 3. Participles in -ùs and -cìs are accented on the ultima,
as : λελυκώς, λυθείς.—For N soo 681.
708. Neuters and feminines accent the same syllable as their
respective masculines, as : παιδεύων, παιδεύον, παιδεύουσα.—For N
Bee 681.
I. PREFIXES.
709. In Greek, conjugation is effected by means of prefixes, infixes,
and suffixes, all added to the stem. The prefixes consist in the augment
and reduplication, the infixes in the tense character and mood vowel,
and the suffixes in the person endings.
184
AUGMENT AND ITS ORIGIN.
[710-715.
AUGMENT.
710. The augment is the prefix indicating the past, and
belongs to the indicative of past or secondary tenses only (692).
It is either syllabic or temporal, according as the verb to be
conjugated begins with a consonant or sonant.
711. A. The syllabic augment consists in an ẻ- prefixed to all
verbs beginning with a consonant, as: (παύω) ἔ-παυον, ἔ-παυσα,
ἐ-πεπαύκειν, ἐπαυόμην, ἐ-παυσάμην, ἐ-πεπαύμην.-So still in N (but
cp. 713).
For
712. Initial p- is usually doubled after the syllabic augment
(KMeisterhans 73 & 134), as : ρίπτω) ἔρριπτον, ῥέω ἔρρεον.
the reason see 64 and cp. 51".
712¹. Modern editors often omit this doubling of p in G-B texts against
historical orthography, as: Acta Tho. 70, 10 épámiσev.
713. The syllabic augment is still normal in N, as: éπave”, ëλve”,
ἔλεγε, ἔγραψα, ἐγράψαμε", ἐποτίσετε, ἐβοτανίσετε. In northern speech,
however, when unaccented, it is dropped like any other unaccented e
(030f.), as: ἔγραψα, ἔτρεξι, but ᾽πάτσα, 'π'ρ'πάτσα, πήγαμε, γράψ' τι,
ποτίσ᾽τι, βοτανίσ'τι (030).
714. B. The temporal augment consists in the prefixing of the
syllabic augment to the initial vowel of the verb and the
change consequent on the contraction of the two concurring
vowels (156 ff.). Thus-
a changes to ŋ: άyw‘guide'
» ῖ: ἱκετεύω 'supplicate ” ικέτευον
€
""
» η: ἐλπίζω ‘hope
0
""
""
ω: ὁπλίζω 'arm
ἦγον
ἤλπιζον
πλιζον
し
​บ
υβριζον
αι
""
,, η: αἰσχύνω ‘disgrace
ᾔσχυνον
ก
δον
دو
ηὔξανον
ᾤκτιρον.)
a
αυ
(or
""
"?
υ: ὑβρίζω ‘insult'
"?: adw 'sing'
,, ηυ: αὐξάνω increase
,,
인
​: oikтípw 'pity'
714". The origin of the augment is a matter of vague speculation, the ten-
dency being to connect it with the old Indian augment, which is uniformly a-
(cp. ásam=ĥv). But when wo consider that in Homoric Greek the augmont is
still very fluctuating, or rather undeveloped (which may be due to the still pre-
ponderating fulness of the vorb-endings), we shall probably be not very far
from the truth if wo assume it to be closely associated, if not identical, with
tho archaic form of tho imperfect of eiµí : ĥ or ¾v (i.o. E, EN; cv. ča, čŋv) ‘was.'
This prefixal - thon retained its original form bolore all consonants (the fow
instances ἐάγην, άλων, -εούρουν, ἐώθουν, ἐωνούμήν, ἑώρων, etc. are hardly
exceptions, 123), whilo in all other cases of initial vowol it undorwent con-
traction on the general principle set forth in 156-162 : (ẻ + èxov) eîxor, (ẻ +ảyov)
ἦγον, ἐ + ἐλπιζον) ἤλπιζον, (ἐ+ ᾄδον) ῒδον, ἐ + αύξον) ηΰξον, (ἐ + οἰκτιρον)
οἴκτιρον (lator translitorated to ᾤκτιρον), (έ + ἠρεμεον) ἠρέμουν, etc.; thon even
(è + ềv) ĥv & (è + èa) ĥa. As to the few vorb-stems beginning with - o- v-,
their technical (motrical and grammatical) 'longthoning' is probably duo to tho
analogy of the rest (if not to App. ii. 9 & 14). Cp. also 733.
9
715. No visible augment is taken by those verbs which begin with
185
715-717.]
ANOMALOUS TEMPORAL AUGMENT.
n-, w-, i-, v-, ov- (714b), frequently also by those beginning with e-
and ev- (717), as:
eináłw 'presumo' ciaçov (y-, but cp. 26, 5. 28, b)—evxoµɑι 'pray' evxbµnv.
716. Initial ou also remains, even in A, but notably in P, without
augment, a circumstance which points to its monophthongal pronun-
ciation (44 ft.), as:
στ
Ο
Aosch. Pers. 768 olanоoтpúpour. Soph. Trach. 268 oivaμévos. Eur. Bacch.
32 οἴστρησα. Xen. Hell. I, 4, 14 οἰωνίζοντο; οἴκτιρε, οἰκοδόμησε, οἴκησαν,
oikηтo, olioтai, oixeтo, etc. (Kühner-Blass, ii. 21). Louvro Pap. p. 321
(B. C. 160) OLETO; PCauer" 247, 9 (B. C. 170) oleтo; 358, 28 (B. C. 170-160)
oikŋøav; CIG 954, 2 b oiktípnoe. 2114 d & 1894º oikodóµnoa, etc. Soe also 45.
-The same holds true for initial eỷ ( ev or ef) which since 300 B. C. dis-
cards the augment (KMeistorhang" 136, 14), as : εὐεργέτηκα, προευχρήστηκεν,
ete. Sept. Gen. 17, 20 εὐλόγηκα ; 25, 29 & 1 Macc. 3, 30 εὐλαβήθη, εὐφράνθη.
Ps. 76, 4 εὐφράνθην. 88, 43 εὔφρανας.
[716. Cp. Phryn. 131 ᾄδηκεν, ᾠκοδόμηκεν διὰ τοῦ ωι ἄριστα ἐρεῖς, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ διὰ
τοῦ οι, οἴδηκεν, οἰκοδόμηκεν. Μoeris 385 ᾠδηκὼς ᾿Αττικῶς, οἰδηκὼς Ἑλληνικῶς.
Hdn. ii. 789 ἐπεκράτησε κατὰ ΚΟΙΝΗΝ διάλεκτον ή ευ δίφθογγος μὴ τρέπεσθαι,
οἷον εὔχομαι εὐχόμην, εὐφραίνομαι εὐφραινόμην, εὐχαριστῶ εὐχαρίστουν, καὶ ἴσως
εὐφωνίας χάριν.]
717. While the syllabic augment, whose absolute uniformity and sim-
plicity (it is invariably -) had rendered it so familiar to the massos, was
from the beginning felt to be the very representative of the past (723), and
so could maintain itself through all times, the temporal augment laboured
under groat disadvantages. In the first place it varied in form and
sound according to the initial vowel of the individual vorb (714). Thon
it was not especially distinguishable, either to the ear or to the oyo, in
the frequent casos of initial -, v-, n-, w-, ov-, el-, soon (since 300 B.C. if not
carlier) also in that of ev-, au-, thon o- (715 ff.). Again a number of verbs
augmented initial e- sometimes to nov, pisov, olc.), sometimes
to el- (eîxov, eîλícov, etc. 719). Finally in some cases either the temporal
augmont was replaced by the syllabic (εύρακα, ἐάγην, ξάλωκα, ἒωσα, etc.),
or both were resorted to (ήδυνάμην, ἠβουλόμην, εώρων, ἑώρταζον, etc.).
consoquenco of these restrictions in the great majority of casos (4, 77, v, w,
ov, el, ev, av, o) and fluctuations in those of oi- and -, which influenced
ovon 4 writors (Kühner-Blass, ii. 10-22), popular P spocch could not but
lose sight of the temporal augment in the remaining three cases of initial
a-, -, and tho raro au- (o sounded like w and thus escapod observation ['),
In
[1] However, as initial o- appours rogularly augmented to w- in all P-B litorary
compositions and inscriptions, dospite the identity in pronunciation of the two
vowols at all times, it is arbitrary or rathor pedantic to dopart from the tra-
ditional orthography, in which all ancient scribos wore moro systematically
trained than is the case with schoolmasters in our days (25"). Honco tho
omission of tho argument in such cases as: Sept. égoμoloyɣεîтo, ¿μow-
ἐξομολογεῖτο, ὁμοιώ
θημεν, οχύρωσαν, ὀνομάσθη, ὁπλοδύτησεν, προορώμην, ὀλιγοψύχησεν, ὁδοποίησε,
κατορθούμην, etc. (FSturz 124) ; ι Macc. 3, 7 εὐοδώθη ; ὄφειλον οι ὄφελον (very
frequently). Acta Potri ot Pauli 6, 16 opdívevoa; Mart. Petri 84, 19 ỷvoxλOÛVTO ;
Acta Andr. 129, 15 & 178, 18 ὀργίσθη, Acta Tho. 17, 9 ὁμίλουν ; 27, 35 ὀνόμασται;
Acta Thadd. 268, 6 odcvov; Acta Philippi 94, 42 тd ópioµévov; Protov. Jac.
13, 1; 15, 1 & 2 ογκωμένην (ΒΗ & ΛΕΗ ὠγκ·); 24, 3 ολόλυζαν (In ὠλ-); Acta
Pilati A 16, 7 ονόμασεν; Β το, 2 ολιγοψύχησε; τι, 5 οδύρετο ; 14, 2 ἐξόρκισεν;
16, 2 ἐξόρκισαν ; Purud. Piluti 3 ὄφειλες ; Nurr. Jos. 2, 3 ομολόγουν ; Λεία
Xanth. 63, 36 vůпw Sμоvоýσаre. Callin. 109, 7 kатevоdυûтo. Nurr. Zos. 102,
dµvvvýoare.
κατευοδοῦτο.
22 óvýon. Loont. Nonp. V. J. 46, 6 (C) öpµnoev; Theoph. 734 (Do Boor) óπλı-
νήθη.
σμένος, ὁρμισμένος, ὁρισμένος, ὀχυρωμένος—and elsowhoro is unjustifiablo, tho
moro so us wo regularly follow the practico of writing w (dpoά0ŋµev, ¿xúpwrav,
otc.), and putting tho rough broathing, though wo know that it was hardly
186
ANOMALOUS TEMPORAL AUGMENT.
[717-722.
the more so as e and a were homophonous with the syllabic augment
- (723). Hence even scribes since G are influenced by the common practice
and omit all temporal augment (723. 736).
Acta Jo. 110, 12 épμývevev. Doroth. 1741 c konépičov. Acta Tho. 23, 30
ἐπιστάμην. Callin. 68, 18 ἔα (for εἴα). 80, 14 έψημένη. 119, 11 ἑτοιμάσθησαν.
131, 5 ερμήνευσεν. (Cp. 60, 9 ἀηδίζετο.) CWessely Prol. 65 (+VII) ἐλευθε-
półŋv. id. Prol. 168, 11 & Mal. 168, 11 évaνTIOÛTO. Leont. Neap. V. J. 13, 12
αἰχμαλώτευσεν. 48, 19 (F) αἰτήσατο. 51, 8 (Γ) ἁμαρτηκέναι. 55, 17 (C) ερυθρία.
Chron. ii. 482, ἔγειρεν. Theoph. 295, 15 (G) αἰχμαλώτευσαν. 321,2 ἀπλη-
κευμένος. 18.4, 2 & 325, 20 ἔασεν. 40, 31
40, 31 & 68, το ἐκκλησίαζον (ep. 996, 74).
433, 11 ἀρματωμένος ; 46, 18 ἑλλήνιζεν. 300, 1 & 303, 30 ερήμωσα, etc. CGL
405, 45 omi agorasa. ib. 47 emimus agorasamen. ib. 49 emerunt agorasan.
416, 48 salutari aspasamen (i.e úoñaσáµŋy). 652 ăλcupa unxi.
718. As a matter of course, N ignores the use of temporal augment (except in
a few cases 720 ff.), as: FTrinch. 13 (1005 A.D.) ảɣopaoµévov; 23 (1029 A.D.)
ἀγόρακα, ερημωμένα; 182 (A.D. 1145) ἀσφαλισμένα; 261 & 293 (A.D. 1180) ἀγόρασεν ;
328 (A.D. 1198) ȧpxýoaµev; 89 (A.D. 1101) ¿vwoaµev; SCusa 87 áɣópakas; 117
ȧyoрáσaтe, etc. (GHatzidakis 69);—and so on ever since.
719. A few verbs beginning with - (which however was originally
preceded by For 4, 123, 209) augment the initial - to e- (instead of "-).
These are-
ἔχω ‘have
EoTiάw 'entertain'
*¿áw 'permit'
ἔρπω (and ερπύζω) creep
¿oít 'accustom
(
ἕλκω (and ἑλκύω) draw
ἕπομαι follow
εργάζομαι ' work
ελίσσω ‘rovolve
as : εἶχον, εἷρπον, εἴων, εἷλκον, εἵλισσον, εἴθιζον, εἰργαζόμην (beside ήργ-),
εἴασα, etc.
El-.
720. Observe that in most of these verbs the accent falls on the augment
This coincidence, coupled with other similar cases frequent in popular
speech (είπον, είδον, Ρ εἶπα, εἶδα, ep. ἤμελλον) and with the common occurrence
of n- as augment of initial - (ἤθελον, ἤρχετο, ἦτο, ηὕρηκα, etc.), seems to
have led the uneducated to imagine that accented initial i- (eï- or eî-, ñ- or ĥ-)
was, next to the syllabic augment, a characteristic sign of the past. Hence
those of the above-mentioned verbs which still survive in N not only pre-
servo their ancient temporal augment, as: eîxa, ñ0eλa, eîña, eîda, nôpa, then
nűρnía, ĥτо”, ñ³xeσle, etc., but have at the same time served as a pattorn for
many other formations. Accordingly, besides the now universal mia for
ἔπια (i.e. ἔπιον) and the loss general ἠλεγα (i. e. ἔλεγον, due to είπα), many in-
sular dialects (Chios, Carpathos, eastern Crete, etc.) express the augment by
i- (ή-, εἰ-) whenever it boars the stress, as : τρωγα, ἤψαγα, ἤπεσε, ἥκαμα, ἤφερες,
βλεπες, elc. (so του ἤφηκα folt as simple, 958), but ἐτρώγαμε", ἐφάγετε,
ἐπέσαμε", εκάμετε, ἐφέρετε, ἐβλέπετε, ἐπίναμε, ἀφήκαμε”, etc. (ep. 713)—ἐπέρνα
(ep. ήπαιρνα from παίρνω), ἐδούλευε, ενίκα, ἐγέλας, etc. Some few idioms
(Thora, Patmos, Aenos, etc.) have gone oven further and fused both
temporal and syllabic augment into this - (n-, ei-), us : ǹwépva, ýµídele,
ἠθάρρειε, ἠζήσανε, ἠμιλήσανε, ἠπέρασε, ἠπάτησα (i.Θ. ἐπάτησα), ἠκτύπα, etc. (c]).
GHatzidakis 72).
721. Conversely other insular idioms (Rhodes, Cyprus, Syme, etc.) now
regularly profix the syllabic augment to all verbs, whether they begin
with a consonant ora sonant, as : (πατῶ) ἐπάτησα, (ἀγαπῶς ἐγάπησα, (ἀ[ν]θῶ)
ἔθησα, (ὁρίζω) ἔρισα. (Cp. 723 1.)
722. The three verbs péλλw 'am about (to),' Bouλopa 'wish,' dúvapai
uttored ovon in 4.-In tho samo way there is no reason for adopting the
spolling "dov for eldov (as Mart. Pauli 117, 3 & Evang. Tho. A 19, 4 idoµev ;
Acta Pilati A 14, 3 ïdere, ïdoμer twico; 16, 6 ïdes. ib. P. ii. 1 ides and elso-
whore), sinoo el- hore has been not roduced but retained, simply because it
happoned to sound liko i. Cp. 971.
187
722-724. LOSS OF AUGMENT AND ITS EFFECTS IN N.
'um able,' can take the temporal, beside the syllabic, augment
viz. ἔμελλον and ἤμελλον, ἐβουλόμην and ἠβουλόμην, ἐδυνάμην and
ἠδυνάμην.
[Moeris 161 ἤμελλον, ἠβουλόμην, ἠδυνάμην, ηὐξάμην διὰ τοῦ Ἡ ('Αττικῶς), διὰ
δὲ τοῦ € Ἑλληνικῶς.]
722. So now ἤθελα, ἠθέλησα, though the present is always θέλω (never
ἐθέλω, 723).
722" The temporal augment of the above three verbs (722) is duo to thoir
association with ἐθέλω either in form, us ἐ]θέλω x μέλλω: ἤθελον ἤμελλον,
or in meaning, ns ἐ]θέλω x βούλομαι: ἤθελον ἠβουλόμην ; so too ἠβουλήθην
ἠδυνήθην. (GMoyer 423.)
723. The great perspicuity, frequency, and regularity of tho syllabie
augment (717) gradually led to the impression that overy initial e- was
the sign of the past. Verbs therefore beginning with - or its homo-
phonous ai- retained this prefix in the past tenses, because it was moro
familiar and more expressive than the temporal augment (7- or e-), as :
ἑρμήνευον, ἑσπέριζον, ἔγειρον, ἐπιστάμην, αἰχμαλώτευσα, etc. (717; ep. 750).
As time went on, initial - (also ai-) in the present and future came to
be folt odd or out of place and so was gradually dropped, as: ἐθέλω
θέλω, (ἕστηκα) στήκω, (ἐγρήγορα) γρηγορῶ [1] (ep. ἐοικώς εἰκώς). Presently
vorbs beginning with i- (η-, ει-, ι-, ύ-, οι-, etc.), the normal representative of
the temporal augment (720), were also affected, and the result was that
nearly all verbs (sometimes evon substantives associated thorewith)
beginning with e-, αι-, η-, εἰ- (ι-, -, οι-, etc.), especially when unaccented,
havo either altogether lost or changed their initial sonant (135. 1135), as:
ντύνω
from ἐξεικάζω
from ἐνδύνω
ξεικάζω
ῥωτώ
παινω
ἐπαινῶ
ἐρωτῶ
Βρίσκω
""
εὑρίσκω
ματώνω
αἱματίω
βλογώ
εὐλογῶ
λιάζω
>>
ἡλιάζω
*πορώ (130 [1])
εὐπορῶ
""
συχάζω
ἡσυχάζω
μπαίνω
"}
ἐμβαίνω
μερώνω
βγάζω
ἐκβιβάζω
δρώνω
""
λευτερώνω
""
ἐλευθερω
σταίνω
ἡμερόω
Ιδρύω
ἱστάνω
βάλλω (βάνω).
ἐμβάλλω
δέχομαι
""
ξερνώ
ἐξερῶ
δίζω
""
ὀρέγομαι
δρίζω 'own'
μποδίζω
""
ἐμποδίζω
βρίζω
ὑβρίζω
θυμοῦμαι
ἐνθυμοῦμαι
πάγω
"
ὑπάγω
φανίζομαι
ἐμφανίζομαι
ποτάσσω
ὑποτάσσω
29
ξετάζω
ἐξετάζω
γιαίνω
""
ὑγιαίνω
ξυρίζω
ἐξωρίζω
περασπίζομαι
>>
παίρνω
""
ἐπαίρω
περηφανεύομαι
πιτηδεύ(γ)ομαι
,
ἐπιτηδεύομαι
ἀργάζομαι
πιβουλεύ(γ)ομαι
ἐπιβουλεύω ἁρμηνεύω & δρμο
πεθυμώ (Prod. 6,242)
"}
ἐπιθυμῶ ορπίζω
ὑπερασπίζω
ὑπερηφανεύομαι
ἐργάζομαι
ἑρμηνεύω
ἐλπίζω
πετυχαίνω
ἐπιτυγχάνω ἀναύω
Εναύω
"
723. For vorbal substantivos 800 753-5.
724. It is obvious that the presence of initial - in tho N imporfect and
aorist indicative of vorbs like the above (as ἐπαίνεσα, ἐξέρασα, ἐπῆρα, ἐπε-
θύμησα, ἐπέτυχα, εὐλόγησα [ἐβλόγησα], ole.) is not constituont but prolixal,
representing the syllabic augment.
Cp. Loont. Noap. V. J. 46, 9 (Β)ἐσφάλιζεν (from ἀ]σφαλίζω). V. S. 24, 198 ἐσφαλι
σμέναι. So now dinloctally ἐγάπησα (for ἠγάπησα), ἔκουσα (ἤκουσα), ἔρισα (ὥρισα),
ἐγανάχτησα (Αγανάκτησα), ἐγόρασα (ἠγόρασα), ἐπόμεινα (for ἀπόμεινα, π.ο. απέ-
μεινα), ἐπύθανα (ἀπέθανα, i, ο, ἀπέθανον), etc. (721 ; ep. GHatzidakis 73).
[4] Comparo Phryn. 95 γρηγορώ, γρηγορεῖ οὐ δεῖ, ἀλλὰ ἐγρήγορα λέγειν καὶ
ἐγρήγορεν.
188
REDUPLICATION AND ITS FORMS.
[725-733.
725. In a number of cases the syllabic augment e- was mistaken for
the closing sound of the preceding (proclitic) word and so passed over to it
as a revoclive (or protective) suffix, as: δεν, τον, μασ', etc. (133 f. 208. 536.)
726. A few verbs, though beginning with a sonant, take the
syllabic augment (ep. 714. 1113); a few others again take both,
as:
ὠθέω ' push, ἐώθουν
ὠνέομαι 'buy,' ἐωνούμην
δράω ' see, ἑώρων
ἀν-οίγω ' open, ἀνέῳγον.
727. However, P phonology frequently contracts 'w to -, as: ὤθουν,
ὥρων, ὠνησάμην. Cp. Hesych. απῶσμαι· ώθησα. (152.)
REDUPLICATION.
728. Reduplication is the repetition of the initial sound with
the syllabic augment interposed. It is the sign of an
action standing complete and applies to perfect and pluperfect
(also future perfect) in all moods and in the verbal nouns (680).
Regarding its application observe that--
Ε
729. Verbs beginning with a simple consonant (except p
731) reduplicate that consonant with an e interposed, as :
λύω loose
Perf. Act. λέ-λυκα Perf. medio-passive λέ-λυμαι
παιδεύω ' educate
πεπαίδευμαι.
""
""
πεπαίδευκα
19
""
730. Initial aspirates suffer dissimilation, that is they become
smooth (182, α) by reduplicating the first, and discarding the
second, element of their (original) biliteral symbols (170), as:
θύω (τηύω) sacrifice ' τέ-θυκα
χορεύω (κτορεύω) dance κε-χόρευκα
φιλέω (πιλέω) love ' πε-φίληκα
θηρεύω (τιηρεύω) hunt ' τε-θήρευκα
τέ-θυμαι
κεχόρευμα
-φίλημαι
τεθήρευμαι.
731. Vorbs beginning with too consonants or a compound con-
sonant, or p, tako only the syllabic augment instead of the full
reduplication, as :
κτίζω ' build '
Porf. *-κτικα
Inf. ἐκτικέναι
στρατεύω ‘tako the field
"}
ζητέω ' sook
""
ἐστράτευμα
ἐ-ζήτημα
""
-στρατευκέναι
ἐ-ζητηκέναι
ψαύω ' touch
**
ἔ-ψαυκα
ἐ-ψαυκέναι
ρίπτω ‘throw
11
ἔρριψα
ἐρ-ριφέναι
But κτάομαι ' acquire, has
>1
κέκτημαι
κεκτήσθαι.
732. But verbs beginning with a mute+liquid suffer dissimi-
lation by reduplicating the naute (cp. 730), as :
(
γράψω write Perf. Aet. γέ-γραφα Porf. Pass. γέ- γραμμαι
βλάπτω ‘harm
>>
βέ-βλαφα
βέ-βλαμμαι.
733. Verbs beginning with a sonant take the temporal
augment (as far as admissiblo) instead of the full reduplication,
as:
ἄγω ‘lead
Perf. Act.
αἱρέω ' tako
19
ὀνειδίζω ' reproach
"}
ὠφελέω ' am of use
"}
ήχα
ᾕρηκα
ὠν είδικα
ὠφέλημα.
έ
(from è + dxa ? 714")
ἐ + αίμημα ? 74)
(ονείδικα App. ii. 9 & 14)
I
189
734-736.]
REDUPLICATION AND ITS LOSS.
734. Several verbs beginning with a liquid take ei instead of
the reduplication, as :
,
λαμβάνω 4 take
λαγχάνω ' obtain'
stem se- say'
εἴληφα
εἴλημμαι
from
εἴλη χα
εἴληγμαι
""
εἴρηκα
εἴρημαι
19
είμαρται
""
27.
εἴωθα
""
συν-είλοχα
συν-είλεγμαι
δι-είλεγμαι
€-,
μερ- ' it is fated
10- 'am wont
συλ-λέγω gather
διαλέγομαι ' converse,
'
735. Some verbs beginning with a-, -, o-, take the temporal
augment and at the same time prefix to it the initial vowel
together with the succeeding consonant. This is called Attic
reduplication by the ancient grammarians, obviously because
in their time it was foreign to the living language (cp. 677):
Porf. ἀκήκοα
Purf. Pass. (ἤκουσμαι)
ἀκούω ' hear
ἀλείφω ' anoint
ἀλ-ήλιφα
""
""
ἐλαύνω ' drive
""
Ελ-ήλακα
""
""
ἀλ-ήλιμμαι
ἐλήλαμαι
ὀρύσσω ' dig
""
δρ-ώρυχα
""
ὀρ-ώρυγμαι
""
""
ἐλ-ήλεγμαι
J
Γρ-ήγορα
19
ἐγήγερμαι.
ἐλέγχω ' convict
ἐπείρω ' wako
[Phryn. 24 ἤλειπται, κατώρυκται οὐ χρή, ἀλλὰ διπλασίαζε τὴν φωνὴν ὥσπερ οἱ
Αθηναῖοι, ἀλλειπται κατορώρυκται. 25 ὤμοσε τελέως ἄηθες χρὴ γὰρ ἐμώμοκε
λέγειν. Moeris 221 κατορώρυκται 'Αττικῶς, κατώρυκται Ελληνικῶς.]
736. The P-N history of the augment and reduplication has been
dotormined by various causes, but particularly by the principle of dis-
similation. The identity of augment and reduplication, or rather the ab-
sence of reduplication, in all verbs beginning with a sonant inevitably
led to a close connexion between the perfect and aorist, two otherwise
naturally associated tensos (740. 786. 1870-5). The same considerations
apply to the numerous other cases of verbs beginning with two consonants,
a compound consonant, an aspirato, or f, inasmuch as here dissimilation
excluded a consonantal roduplication and thus led to the substitution of the
syllabic augment for it. It is true that an initial mute or aspirato admittod
of reduplication under certain conditions (730-2), but oven in these limited
casos, common practice was frequently influenced by the preponderance
of the other verbs, and dispensed with the reduplication (ep. ἔγνωκα, ἔβλαψα,
ἐβλάστηκα, ole. ; also ἐβούλευμα, ἐχάλκευται. ἐνωγάλισται are cited as Attic by
Eustathios; cp. GHatzidakis 74U): P Grook, in particular common speech,
naturally wont much further in this direction, and ultimately led to
tho total oxtinction of the reduplication in N (737. 740). The gradual
process of the phenomenon can bo dotected oven in the olovated style
of the writers of the time who, despite their Atticistie zoul, cannot help
admitting into their compositions such forms as the following (adduced
by ΚΚόντος in Σωκράτης Ι. 121 (ΐ.):
ἐβλάστημα, ἐπτερύγωμαι, ἐγλυμμένος—Polyb. 5, 82, 7 ἔτακτο. γ. 658 γεωμετρη
[1] Lust. p. 750 Ιστέον δὲ ὅτι ἡ κακοφωνία τοῦ ἐν παρακειμένοις αναδιπλασιασμοῦ
ἢ δι᾽ ἐναλλαγῆς θεραπεύεται στοιχείων οίον φέφρασα πέφραδα, χεχείρικα κεχεί
ρικα,
ἢ διὰ παντελοῦς ἀπελεύσεως [rond απελάσεως τοῦ κατ' ἀρχὴν στοιχείου, οἷον
ἔσπεγκα, ἔφθακα, ἔΖΗΚΑ, κτλ.—and p. 1750 ἐπεὶ καὶ τὰ ψιλὰ καθὰ καὶ τὰ δασέα
συμφωνεῖ καὶ αὐτὰ κατά τινα ἐπαλληλίαν, γίνεται καὶ ἐν αὐτοῖς ἐξώθησις
καλλιφωνίας χάριν και εγαρμοστίας λεκτικῆς ἣν φιλοῦμεν ἄνθρωποι [road ἄνθρ
οι οἱ ἄνθρ-]. τοιοῦτον τὸ πέφθακε καὶ τὸ κεχάλκεται ἅπερ ᾿Αττικοὶ ἔφθακε
φασι καὶ ἐχάλκεται. ὅμοιον δὲ τούτοις καὶ τὸ Βεβούλεγκεν ὅτε λεχθῇ ἐΒούλεγκεν.
ἀποσκευάζονται δὲ ὁμοίως γλυκείας απηχήσεως χάριν τὸ τῆς αὐξήσεως κατάρχον
σύμφωνον καὶ τὸ εἰλημμένος, κτλ.
190
REDUPLICATION LOST OR MISAPPLIED.
[736–740.
:
κέναι. 964 βασιλευκότες. 1113 πρεσβευκέναι. 1340 δυστυχηκυία. So [Menandr.]
431 δυστυχηκόσι. Diod. 5, 45, 4 γεωργηκέναι. 12, 45, 4 δενδροκοπημένης. 1863,
3 πειθαρχηκόσι. Epistologr. cd. Herscher p. 4 δενδροκοπημένην. Hermas Vis. 2, 4
ἐποίηκας. Athen. 14, 65 τελειωμένος [2]. Apollod. Arch, 16 κρεμασμένος. Diosc.
i. 22 λεπτοκοπημένην. δτι κακοτεχνημένος. Hero Alex. 245, 17 περασμένην.
264, 19 κέντρωται. Plocl. Diad. in Eucl. p. 54 μεγεθυσμένως. 145 πληθυσμένων.
Philo V. 4 τεχνιτευμένη. Hesych. πέπονται: πεπράϋνται, ΚΑΙΝΟΥΡΓΗκότα: νέα
πράγματα ἐργασάμενον. κεκαινοτόμηται : Νεωτέρισται. πεπλεγμένον: KOCMH-
MENON. Schol. Oppian. 349, 25 νεωστὶ ἐφονευμένου. Orib. ii. 61 ἐσιμωμέναι
ΜΕΝΟΝ.
τὰ χείλη. CIA τι ἐγραμμέναι.—Add further : Gr. Pap. Dr. Mus. 117, 40 (FIV)
ἐγραμμένον: ib. 40 ἐπεγραμμένῳ. Eust 163 τέθλασται: ἔθλασται ἀφ' οὗ
ΘΑ ΜΕΝΟΝ παρὰ τῷ Δειπνοσοφιστῇ. So ἐχρωμάτιστο, ἐχρύσωτο ἡ γῆ, ἐκρέμαστο
(ΚΚόντος ib. 153 f). Siorret i. 252, 32 ψηφισμένον. Cleomans 85 τελεσμένος.
89 γλυμμένον. Μucar. 137 Β ζυμωμένος. Alchom. 313, 21 λειοτριβημένα. 322, 5
κοσκινισμένου. ib. 25 λαγαρισμένου ; et passim. Apophth. 120 Β φιλοκαλη-
μένον. JMoschos 308r A διεθήκασι. CWessaly Prol. 65 (+618) ἐποιήκασιν, ἐποίημαι.
Theoph. 156. 18 σιδηρωμένος. 298, 16 καστελλωμένα. 361, 30 ῥινοκοπημένος.
441, 22 σαγματωμένου. 433, τι αρματωμένος. 321, 2 ἀπληκευμένος.
Sym.
Mag. 613 στρωμένον καὶ χαλινωμένον. Vita SA 24* Α' ἡ χήρα ἡ παραπονημένη.
Porph. Adm. 149, 9 βαπτισμένος. Cor. 329, 12 βουλλωμένος. Theoph. Cont.
140, 14 μαρμάρωται. FTrinch. 114 μοιρασμένη. 315 πηγμένος. 270 (A.D. 1181)
χαρακωμένον. 595, 6 Βλαμμένον (proper name: ep. GHatzidakis 75).
737. As a matter of course, N preserves no traco whatever of reduplica-
tion, as: στρωμένος, ζωσμένος, τριμμένος, γραμμένος, μαραμμένος, θυμωμένος (126).
Even reduplicated presents and substantivos have been, on the same
principle, dissimilated or reduced to their thematic representatives in every
case except where the systematic application of the principle would have
led to monosyllables, as : γνώσκω (El. Μ. 43, 17) γιγνώσκω γνώθω, βιβάζω βάζω,
M.
διδάσκαλος δάσκαλος (perhaps also ὑπαγάγω ὑ]πάγω), τίθημι θέτω, etc. But
δίδωμι δίδω (never δῶ).
738. The roverse phenomonon also, that is the casual misapplication of the
reduplication, points to its retreat from the living language, and its consequent
unfamiliarity with the respective writers of the time.
JACramer iii. 256, 6 ἁμαρτάνουσιν οἱ λέγοντες ζέζηκα καὶ πέψυχα. δέον διὰ καθα-
ροῦ τοῦ €. ik. τη πεφθύνημα. Macur. 664 ο εζυμωμένος. Cyrill. Al. 108 A
πεφθαρμένος. Damasc. ii. 268 η πειθακώς. Mal. 200, 14 κεκτισμένη. 263,
15 κεκτισμένον. Epiph. i. 203, 12; also | Callisth. 3, 23, 2 & Theoph. 480, 27
ζεζοφωμένος. 425, 24. κεκάθικεν. Κόντος further cites (Σωκράτης 1 153)
εξυμωμένος, πέψυγμαι, κέκτισμαι, πεπταικέναι (from Choerob.), γεγραμμένα,
κεκτενισμένα (Hesych.), πεπτερύγημαι (Ε. Μ.), etc.
739. For the occasional reduplication of initial p ovon in classical Greek soo
Kühner-Blass ii. ΑΙ.
23
Great
and add from post-christian sources:
2,
Louvro Pap. 194. έριμμαι. JACramer iii. 257 (Hlu. Gr. Philet, 417) §épartai,
μέρευσε. Eus. 5, 28 (1. 253, 40) ῥεραδιουργήμασι. 6, ως ῥεραθύμημα. Acta Tho.
30, 17 βερυπωμένη. 65, 20 διαφερρηγμένην. Acta Pil. Δ. i. 15, 1 ῥέριπται. Jo
schos 2888 Α δερυπωμένος. Τheoph. 115, 33 (f) ῥερυπωμένῃ; and (ΚΚόντος ία
Σωκράτης 1 53) με ραδιουργημένα, ῥερυτιδωμένην, ῥερητινωμένην, ἱεραψανιδωμένος
(Hesychios). CCL 416, 18 oxyrmonon i, o, πεξυσμένον.
A
་
A.
in
740. With tho disappearance of the consonantal reduplication, the
perfect was reduced to the level of past touses and thus brought closer to
the otherwise kindrod aorist (736). ~ The lattor tense, then, retaining as it
[4] It is certain, however, that in several of those ( compositions the omission
of roduplication is chargonblo mainly to the copiers, who wore unconsciously
carried away by the influence of dissimilation so fully established in their
time. To such an influonco wo may also safely attributo various other ensos of
compound vorbs, ns [Arist.] Probl. 20, 20 (t. 4, 210) πεπανθαι. Polyb. 3, 58, 8
ἐκβαρβαρῶσθαι. 779 συγκλειμένου. 1208 κατέτακτο. 1244 παραδόσθαι.
3, 5 κατέτηκτο. Diosc. i. 653 ἐπικλίσθαι.
Paus. 4,
191
740-746.] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOUNDS.
still did its full force in the living language, soon succeeded in absorbing
the mutilated perfect. In the case of the perfect participle, since it did
not of itself refor distinctly to the past, its reduplication even in the form
of temporal augment appeared out of placo and so was simply dropped.
Cp. the above instances (736) : βασιλευκότες, δυστυχηκυία, δυστυχηκόσι,
δενδροκοπημένης, πειθαρχηκόσι, τελειωμένος, λεπτοκοπημένος, κακοτεχνημένος,
περασμένην, etc. etc.
AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOUND VERBS.
741. Compound verbs beginning with one or more prepositions
take the augment and reduplication after the prepositions (the
latter being treated as distinct adverbs, 1138), as:
προς-τάσσω ' command
map-elc-áyw 'introduce '
Imperfect προς-έτασσον Porf. προς-τέταχα
παρ-εις-ήγον
1)
παρ-εις-ήγμαι.
742. In such compound verbs the preposition may naturally
appear in a modified form as the result of phonopathy (170-200), as:
Imperf. ἐν-εβαλλον
Perf. ἐμ-βέβληκα.
ἐμ-βάλλω (191)
ἐμ-μένω (195)
ἐν-έμενον
"7
ἐμμέμονα
συγχωρέω (18)
""
συνεχώρουν
""
ἐκ-βάλλω (191)
ἐξ-έβαλλον
συγκεχώρηκα
ἐκ-βέβληκα
συ-στρατεύομαι (200)
συν-εστρατευόμην
"}
συν-εστράτευμαι
συρ-ράπτω (195)
συν-έρραπτον
17
συν-έγραφα
ἀποβάλλω
>7
ἀπ-έβαλλον (139)
ἀπο-βέβληκα
παραβάλλω
παρ-έβαλλον (139)
""
παρα-βέβληκα
συγ-κατα-βαίνω (189)
17
συγ-κατέβαινον
συγκατα-βέβηκα
προ-δια-λύω
""
προ-δι-έλυον (139)
""
συμ-παρ-απόλλυμι
συμ-παρ-απ-ώλλυν
""
Π
,
C.
προ-δια-λέλυκα
συμ-παρ-απ-υλώλεκα.
743. Only πρὸ (which could not be reduced to πρ) and περὶ (dissociation
from meo and ὑπέρ ?) rotain their final vowel in all casos (141), us: περι-βάλλω
4 encompass, περι-έβαλλον ; προ-βάλλω ' put forward, προσέβαλλον. Πρὸ can
moroover (though in A inscriptions only provious to III B.C.) bo contracted
will a succeeding simple c, as. προσέβαλλον (πρόβαλλον App. ii. 9 & 14)
προύβαλλον (not προὔβαλλον ! 159, ω), but never in προ-εώρων und προ-έσχον.
744. Vorbs not directly compound, but derived from nouns compounded
with propositions, also take the augment and roduplication after tho
proposition, as:
ἐμποδίζω kindor
from
imporf.
perf.
ἐπιορκέω 'swear falsely'
ἐμποδών impedimont,' ἐν ἐπόδιζον
ἐπί-ορκος ' perjured,
ἐπι-ώρκουν,
ἐπι-ώρκηκα
κατηγορέω ' aceuso
>
κατήγορος accuser,
κατηγόρουν
κατηγόρηκα
ὑποπτεύω ' suspect
ὕποπτος (suspected
ὑπ-ώπτευον.
745. A fow compound verbs augment and reduplicato both
the verb and the proposition, as :
ἀνέχομαι 'onduro
ἐπ-αν-ορθόω 4 esloro
ἐν-οχλίω ' annoy
δι-αιτάω ' arbitrato
Import. ἦν ειχόμην
"}
ἐπ-ην-ώρθουν
ἠν-ώχλουν
(κατ.) ἐδι-ήτων
•
2οι. ἠν-εσχόμην
porf. pass. ἐπηνώρθωμαι
που. ήν-ώχλησα
perf. δε-δε-ῄτηκα, δε-δε-ήτημαι.
745 ν. 5ο 4 ἐκάθηρα, β' ἐκάθαρα, in CIA (KMoistorhans 1.46, 8).
746. Several vorbs, though compounded with propositions, aro
folt as simple and thus take the augment before the preposition
(cp. 750 f.), as:
192
AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOUNDS. [746–750.
καθεύδω sleep
καθ-ίζω ' sit
καθέζομαι ' sit down
ἐν-αντιόομαι ' resist
ἀφίημι ' sond
Imperf.
""
ἐκάθευδον, beside καθηΰδον
ἐκάθιζον aor. ἐκάθισα
ἐκαθεζόμην
ἠναντιούμην
ἠφίει(ν), beside ἀφίει.
747. So P ἤνοιγον, ἤνοιξα, ἤνοιγμαι-beside A ἀνέργον, ἀνέφξα, ἀνέφγμαι,
from ἀν-οίγω ' open.
>
748. Verbs compounded with prefixes other than prepositions,
or derived from nouns of such a composition (1143 ff.), take the
augment and reduplication at the beginning (cp. 751), as:
ἀδικέω ' do wrong
Imperf.
ἀπιστέω ‘mistrust
})
ἠδίκουν perf. ἠδίκηκα
ἠπίστουν
ἠπίστηκα
δυστυχέω 4 am unhappy'
ἐδυστύχουν
11
εὐεργετέω benefit
<
""
εὐεργέτουν
"}
οικοδομέω “build
πολιορκέω ‘bosiego
""
ᾠκοδόμουν
ἐπολιόρκουν
""
δεδυστύχησα
εὐεργέτηκα
ᾠκοδόμημα
πεπολιόρκηκα.
749. Verbs beginning with a vowel preceded by the prefix
δυσ- or εὐ- can augment the initial vowel, as: δυσαρεστέω
Gam displeased, δυσαρέστουν, εὐαρεστέω please, εὐ-Ηρέστουν,
εὐεργετέω benefit, εὐ-Ηργέτουν.
750. From the preceding sections about compound verbs (741-
749), it will be seen that as long as they were felt to be distinctly
compound, that is as long as each component was felt as a distinct
and separate word, both augment and reduplication were invariably
inserted between prefix and stem. When the nature of such a com-
position began to be lost sight of, both augment and reduplication
became shifting and so were now internal, now external, sometimes
both, or otherwise anomalous, according as either the simple verb or
the prefix was still familiar, or had lost touch with the living
language (cp. 745. 746). When finally such compounds came to be
felt as simple verbs they were treated as such, both augment and
reduplication (so far as the latter still survived 736) being pre-
fixed to the preposition, or, in case the preposition began with
a sonant, altogether dropped (717-724).
22,
a. So even in 4, as: Αμφίεσα, ναυον, ἐπιστάμην, εκάθιζον, ἐκαθήμην, ἐκάθευδον,
κεκάμμυκα, ἐσυνῆκε, δεδιήγηται, εσυγχωρηκέναι (Kühner-Blass, ii. 30). Then
Sopt. 1 Macc. 10, 76 Ĥvoičuv. So ofton in the NT (Acts 7, 56; 12, 14; 14, 27; 16,
14 ; Rov. 8, 1 ; II, 1.). Sopt. Deut. 21, 23 κεκατηραμένος. So again in Num.
1; 11,
6 &
24, 9. Num. 31, 9. επροφήτευον; 53 επροφήτευσα. Matt. rr, 13;
22, 22, etc. επροφήτευσαν. Just. Apol. 1, 44 πεπροφητεῦσθαι. Phryn. 132
ἀνίστατο λέγε καὶ μὴ ἡνίστατο.-Aetn Tho. 4, 39 εκατήντησαν (S). 92, 18 έπα-
ρεκαθέζοντο. Chron. 353, 15 ἐδιοικήθη. 490, το ἠφόρισεν. Gloss. Lao, 85 κεκα-
Tηpaµévos. So also GSpata 36 [A.D 1193). Leont. Neap. V. J. 28, 9 & 51, 6
τηραμένος.
ἠφόρισεν. Sym. 1740 Β ἐδιοικήθη. Mal. 6, 3 ἐδιοίκουν. 6, 8 ἐδιοίκει.
ἐμεθώρμησαν (road ἐμεθόρμησαν). Theoph. 52, 16. 100, 12 ἐδιοίκει. 136, 6 ήπαι
τήθη. 403, τι ἠπαίτησε, της, τις ἠφόρισαν. So again 170, 28 & 202, 24.
257, 28 &
310, 18 ἐπισύναξαν. Theoph. Cont. 22 ἐσυμβούλευε. Λρού. Mar. 120, 35 ἐσύνιον.
Porph. Cor. 787 ἠφορίσθη. Αnna Comn. 7, 198 ἐδιηγήσατο. Georg. Mon. 205
àñóλekes, otc, and so on in M -N spooch, though only in the case of the syllabic
augmont (77).
116, 5
8. (Kaibel 989 ἀκούσαμεν. Luko 13, 13 ανορθώθη (ανωρ- ?). Great Louvro Pap.
45 ανάγκασα. Gloss. Imod, 131 αναγίνωσκον. Οι 8664 (+VIII) ἀνακαινίσαντο.
Mal. 168, 1 ἐναντιοῦτο (300 717). Theoph. 364, 12 ὑπαντηκότες. 471, 4 ύπερ-
ασπίζετο στα 5072 (Silko) αναχωρήθην.
193
O
750-753.] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOUNDS.
c. NT 2 Tim. 1, 16 ἐπαισχύνθη. Acta Tho. 5, 1 ἐξέταζεν (RS). 13, 32 ἐπιστάμην
(PQ). Callim. 91, 22 παραιτήσαντο. CWessely Akad. Wiss. 1889 p. 116 (+V-vn)
υπόγραψα, απόλυτα. Leont. Neap. V. J. 83, 17 (Λ) ἐπιδείκνυτο, Anast. Sin. 45 B
ἐνέργησαν. Μal. 168, ιι ἐναντιοῦτο. CIG 8668 (+VIII) ἐγκενίσθη. οι5ι" ἐπηδή
μησα. Theoph. 60, 11 ἐπισκόπησεν. 61, 17 ἐπισκόπει. 40, 31 & 68, το ἐκκλησίαζον.
90,25 ἐξέμεσαν. 180, 16 ἐξετάσθησαν. CGL 409, 2-6 epenoses, epaenosa, epanesen,
opaenesan, So too in M, as : FTrinch. 40 (A.D. 1042) ἐνχειρίσθη. οι ἀνέγειρα
58 (+1059) ἐκτέθη. 116 (121) ἐγκαινίσθῃ. 125 (Α.Φ. 1125) ἀπύλαβον. 14 ἐγκά-
λεσεν. 1.47 (A.D. 1131) ἀπύδωκε. 327 (Λ.Χ. 1196) ἀπόλαυα. 220 ἀποπαύσαμεν. 230
(A.D. 1170) ἐπικράτησαν. 241 (Λ.D. 1175) εἰσπήδησεν. 286 (A.D. 1184) ἀπόδωκα.
SCusa 317 ἐξετάσαμεν. 32 ἀπολάβομεν, etc. (ep. Hatzidakis 63)-where the
initial vowel of the proposition stands to a certain oxtont also for the augment
(752).
P.
Dion.
d. CIA ii. 331, 27 (R.C. 272-265) κατασκευασμένοι. Louvre Pap. 63, 297, p. 370
(Β.Ο. 165), 16 παρασπονδημένας. Polyb. p. 1148 καταπολεμημένων.
H. Thuc. 42. κατεπιτηδεῦσθαι. Cheonans 39, 17 μεθερμηνευμένα. 129 μεθερμή
Plot. i. 254, 4 ἐμψυχωμένος. So too Socr. 392 A & Cyrill. Αl. x. 16 α.
Athen. 14, 68 ἐγκεντρισμέναις. 69 προσαναπληρώκει. Χen. Εph. 2, 9, 1 κατέ-
κλειστο. Eus. Alox. 333 Β διαρρηγμένας. Colin. 78, 12 συμπτωμένας.
νευται.
751. A number of verbs were augmented even in A both before and
after the preposition, obviously because the internal augment alone
was not sufficiently indicative, as: ἠμπ-ειχόμην, ἠμφ-εγνόουν, ην-ειχόμην,
ἠντ-εβόλησε, ἐπην-ώρθουν, δεδι-ῴκηται, ἠν-ώχλουν, ήντ-εδίκει, ἠμφ-εσβήτουν,
κατ-εδι-ήτων, δεδιηκόνηκα, έπαρ-ώνουν (Kühner-Blass ii. 35). This
becomes more frequent in P-G, owing to the ignorance of the
time, as: Sept. Num. 30, 1 κατεπροενόμευσεν. Mark 3, 5 & Luke 4,
1ο ἀπεκατέστη. An. Bekk. iii. 1285 ἐ-προ-εφασιζόμην ; Theodos. 40,
8 ἐ-προέταξε. Fus. Alex. 429 Β ἐ-κατ-Ηρώμην, ἐ-κατ-κράθην. CGL
225 ii. 24 ἐ-δι-ώρθωσεν. Vita Euthym. ἐ-κατ-ελαβόμεθα. Byz. Zeit-
schrift i. 615 e-κατετέθη (504). Leont. Neap. V. J. 51, 9 (C) -παρ-ήνει.
55, 10 (AF) ἐπ-εκατ-έλαβεν. 66, 17 (1) άπ-εκατ-έσταινεν. 84, 8 (Α)
-κατ-εδέχετο. Εpist. Abgari 283, 14 κατέβη. GSpata 90 (A.D. 1096)
ἐπροεκράτουν. (See 753 & cp. 755 fin.)
752. As a matter of course N treats compound verbs like simple verbs,
and so supplies the preposition with the syllabic augment, while the
reduplication is invariably dropped (ep. 736. 750, c).
Apoc. Mur. 123, 35 ἐσύνιον. FTrinch, 73 επρόσταξα, ἐπροδέσποσεν. 220 (Α.Π.
1165) ἐδιεκδίκησαν. 355 (Α. D. 1206) ἐσυνμαρτύρησαν. 114 ἐγκάλεσεν. 121 ἐσυνάλ
λαξαν, ἐσυναρέσθησαν. 147 (Α.Φ. 1131) ἐπρόσθεσα. 200 (Α.Φ. 1154) ἐσυνάλλαξα.
242 ἐπρόσταξα. GSpata 90 (A.D. 1006) ἐπροχειρήσαμεν, ἐπερίκλεισεν (ubi ἐπετρί
κλεισεν), etc. (ep. G Hatzidakis p. 60).
753. Only apparent is tho augment in N cnses liko ἀνέβαινα, ἀνέβηκα, εκατέ
βαινα, ἐκατέβηκα, etc., since this augment-liko -e- is not propor to the indicativo
of past tenses, but common to all moods and tenses, and even to nouns derived
thorofrom: ἀνεβαίνω, κατεβαίνω (also κατηβαίνω), ξεμαθαίνω, ἀνεβασμός ως ἀνέ
βασμα, κατεβασμός or κατέβασμα, κατεβασιά, etc. The presence of tho - e- here is
apparently duo to dissimilation and roduction, in that two otherwise homo-
phronous and strong sonants would follow each other: ἀναβαίνω, καταβαίνω,
ἀνάβηκα, εκατάβηκα, καταβασία. A similar procoss is truccablo iu a fow
sporadic instancos of older timos, as: PCmar Vol.2 128, 37 ανενεωσάμενοι.
KMoistorians 138, 26 ανήλωμα (246-226 Β.Ο.), αναλώσας, αναλώσωσι (Ια Β.Ο.);
Gr. Pup. Br. Mus. 160, 3 ( 78-79) ἀναλωμάτων. Loout. Nonp. V. J. 39, 14 (Α, Β),
and particularly in the frequent cases cropping up during M, cited in another
sense by GHatzidakis (65 f.), as :
-
Digon. 2 197 έκατεφρόνησε. 135 & 463 ἐκατέλαβον. 877 ἐκατεφίλει. FTrinch. 1
(A.D. 1000) παρεδώκαμεν (for ἐπαραδ-). 46 ἐπαρέδωκα, ἐδιετάξατο (for ἐδιατάξατο).
194
TENSE CHARACTER.
[753-756.
47 (A.D. 1051) ἐκατέστησα. 73 (A.D. 1019) ἐκατάρπαξεν (for ἑκατάρπ). οι ἐκατελή
φθησαν. 217 (A.D. 1164) ἐκατέλαχεν. 238 (A.D. 1168) ἐκατεφύτευσεν. 245 (A.D. 1175)
ἐκατέγραψα. 253 (A.D. 1179) έκατεγράψατο. 286 ἐκαταγράψατο. 289 (A.D. 1185)
ἐκατέλειπεν. 293 εκατήλαξεν. GSpata 58 (A.D. 1095) έκατήρπαξε. 68 (A.D. 1176)
ἐπαρεχωρήσαμεν καὶ ἐσυνεπαθήσαμεν. (Cp. 755 end.)
754. So now in eastern Crete, thon in Patmos, Paros, and Thera, all compounds
with unaccented ἀνα-, aς: ἀνεγελῶ, ἀνεσύρω, ἀνεχασκίζω, ἀνεπνέω, ἀνεπνοιά, άνε-
διώχνει μοι (as if ἀναδοκεῖ μοι) ‘I reconsider, ἀνεθεματίζω, etc. (but ἀνάδιοξέ μου
ἀνάθεμα, ἀνάσταιμα, ἀνάδιωμα, etc.).
755. Within recent times a theory has been advanced by GHatzidakis (64)
and gonerally favoured, that N forms liko ἀνέβαινα ἀνέβηκα, εκατέβαινα ἐκατέ-
βηκα, ἐξεκίνουνα ἐξεκίνησα, ἐξεμάθαινα ἐξέμαθα, etc., are survivals of the
internal augment, and that this augment has been transferred to the present
ἀνεβαίνω, κατεβαίνω, ξεμαθαίνω, ξεκινώ, as well as to their respective substantives
ἀνεβασμὸς οἱ ἀνέβασμα, κατεβασμὸς οι κατέβασμα, κατεβασιά, ξεμαθημὸς οι ξεμά
θημα, ξεκινημὸς or ξεκίνημα, this process applying also to all the multitudinous
N verbs and substantives beginning with fe-. Such a doctrine, howovor, though
ingonious, labours under the following difficulties: (1) N ever since its first
appoaranco in popular form lias treated compound verbs as simple (752), admitting
of the syllabic augment only before the preposition; (2) The N compounds in åve-
and fe- aro of far too recent origin to bo connected with the romote time
when tho augment was insorted between preposition and verb; (3) The profix ξε-
corresponds, both in meaning and usage, not to ancient ἐξ (ἐκ), but simply to Latin
ex- (also dis-) and its Italian progony (723. 135; cp. exparesco, exposco, excutitur-
*xparesco, *xposco, *xcutitur, sparesco, sposco, scutitur, FStolz Hist. Lat. Gr.
202). (4) No other proposition shows a parallel phenomenon of a fossilized
internal augmon, not ovont ἐκ in any case (cp. βγαίνω, γδέχομαι, γδικιώ-
νομαι). All tho data adduced by G Hatzidakis in support of his theory find
a simpler explanation in the process of reduction or dissimilation as indicated
abovo (136. 753), as : (επιθυμῶ) πεθυμώ, (ανάφορος) ἀνήφορος (also Cretan ἀνηφορᾶς
chimney '), (κατάφορος) κατήφορος, (καταβατόν) κατεβατό(ν), (ανταμείβω) αντη-
μέβω, (ἀπολογοῦμαι) ἀπηλογοῦμαι, (αναμένω) ἀνημένω, (ἐπιτυχαίνω) πετυχαίνω;
so too the dinloctal forms (περιχύννω), περεχύννω, (αναγαλλιῶς ἀνεγαλλιῶ,
(αναρράπτω) ανερράβω, (ἀνασπῶς ἀνεσπῶ, (ανασύρω) ανεσύρω, ἀνέφορο, κατέ-
φορο, ἀνηβαίνω, κατηβαίνω, etc, etc. So further the established practice
in tho dialects montioned in 754. The same process is traceablo in B
forms like έκατηρώμην, εκατηράθην, ἐκατελαβόμεθα, ἐπεκατέλαβεν, ἀπεκατέ-
σταινεν, ἀπεκατέστη, ἐκατεδέχετο, etc., mentioned in 751 1.; further in κατηρά-
σασθαι (Alchom. 36, 6). (Cp. also Crotun 'Απανηχώρι, Κατηχώρι.) [1]
II. INFIXES.
756. In order to form and inflect a tense, we must know its
tense character. This consists in one or more letters affixed
directly to the stem. The present and imperfect, as well as
all second tonsos of all voices, then the perfect medio-passive,
have no fixed or specific character, but all the rest show a
characteristic sign. This is-
-Κ-
-c- in the future and aorist active and middle : παυ--, έπαν-ε-
1st porfoet and 1st pluperfect passivo : πεπαυ-κ-, ἐπεπαυκ-
-θε- norist passivo : παυ-θέ-ντων. (757.)
""
»
-θης- future passivo: παυ-θησ
333, 11
No conclusivo evidenco to the contrary can bo claimed by such solitary
examples of -βαίνω, ης : Alchom. 30, ὁ ἵνα ἐξεβαίνῃ. 325, 11, 322, 22 ὅτι
as: 6
ἐξεβαίνει. 323, 10 νὰ ἐξέβῃ ὁ ἀτμός. 325, ο ἵνα ἐξεβαίνῃ ὁ καπνός.
τοῦ ἐξεβῆναι. ib. 14 & 22 ἐξήβαλε (tor ἔκβαλε). 334, 25 νὰ ἐξεβάλῃς. 335, 2
νὰ ἐξέβῃ. (ib. 21 ἐξέβαλον, beside ἔβγαλον 336, 29, etc.). ib. 25 νὰ ἐξέβῃ.
444, 27 νὰ σεβαίνῃ. 445, 10 νὰ σέβῇ, etc.
195
0 2
757-763.]
TENSE CHARACTER—PERSON ENDINGS.
757. The character -0e- of the aorist passive appears 'lengthened' to -On-
in the indicativo and infinitive.
758. Immediately after the tense character, a thematic vowel or
thematic sonant (698) is added to the stem in all tenses except the
perfect, pluperfect, and aorist passive, and remains through all the
moods. This is-
μ
a. For the present, imperfect, and future -o- before and v, other-
wise -e- : παύ-ο-μεν, ἔπαυ-ο-ν, παύ-ο-ντες-παύ-ε-τε, ἔπαυ-ε-ς, παύσετε.
b. For the aorist active and middle, and for the perfect active -a- :
ἔπαυσ-α, ἐπαύσ-α-μεν, ἐπαύσ-α-σθε, πεπαύκ-α-μεν, πεπαύκ-α-σι".
c. For the pluperfect active -ei- ; é-te-taúk-ei-v, É-Te-Taúk-CI-TE.
: -πε-παύκ-ει-ν, ἐ-π
ἐ-πε-παύκ-ει-τε.
759. In addition to the thematic sonant, the subjunctive
annexes a mood vowel. In the primary subjunctive, this con-
sists in the mere lengthening of the thematic vowels -o- and
-e- to -w- and -n- respectively, while the secondary subjunctive
[optative] has a specific -- which coalescos with the preceding
vowel:
παύω- μεν,
παύο-ι-μι,
παύσ-ω-μεν,
πεπαύκ-ωμεν-παύ-Η-τε,
παύσο-ι-μι, πεπαύκο-ι-μι-παύσα-ι-μι,
παύσ-Η-τε, πεπαύκ-Η-τε
παυθε-ί-ην.
759. All above remarks on the infixos, roferring as they do to pre-
historic antiquity, aro naturally applicable to N also, so far as the verbal
forms affected still survive.
III. PERSON ENDINGS.
In
760. The Greek verb has separate person endings for the
voices, as well as for the primary and secondary tenses.
their primitive form (930), these were-
I. INDICATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE.
SINGULAR.
Principal: -μ -US -L
Secondary: -v
-S
a. ACTIVE.
DUAL.
PLURAL.
-ΤΟΥ
-TOV
-TOV
-μεν -TE -VTL
στην
b. MEDIO-PASSIVE.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
-μαι - σαι -Tal
-σθον -σθον
μην σο -ΤΟ
-σθον έσθην
-мег -TE -ν Οι -σαν
PLURAL.
μεθα σθε -νται
έμεθα -σθε -ντο
761. The entire aorist passive, as well as the futuro sub-
junctive and imporative passive, havo active endings (804. 807).
701. N has -a in the aorist passivo indicativo. (801. App. iii. 29.)
762. The above person ondings aro regularly appended to the
infixes (756 ff.), or, where there are no infixes, to the stem.
Mark only that the two endings -σa and -oo (medio-passive)
generally drop the o when it should stand between two sonants
ας : λύεσαι (λύεαι) λγη, ἐλύετο ἐλύει ἐλγογ; παύεφο ΠΑΥΟΥ (782. 809).
763. But in threo solitary casos the 2nd person singular of the middlo
onds in - (instead of -n): Bouλe 'thou wishost,' of 'thou thinkost,' öel
(futuro) thou wilt soo; also čoa (bosido čơn) 'thou wilt bo.' (Bul sco 26, 4.)
For P N seo 773.
-e
196
PERSON ENDINGS OF PRESENT INDICATIVE.
[764-773.
764. The subjunctive of the perfect and pluperfect active,
in particular medio-passive, are formed mostly by way of circum-
locution (687. 1883 f. 2106 f.), that is by the subjunctive of
εἰμί and the appropriate participle: πεπαυκὼς Οι πεπαυμένος ὦ
(ᾖς ᾖ, etc.), πεπαυμένος εἴην (εἴης εἴη, etc.). So too the 3rd person
plural indicative medio-passive, when the endings -vrau and
-ντο would concur with a preceding consonant: γεγραμμένοι εἰσὶν
or ἦσαν (instead of *γέγραφεται, * ἐγέγραφντο ; p. 169. 687. 886).
765. In connecting together as well as in the proper order
the thematic and mood vowels with the personal endings, the
resulting combinations of the common or 2-conjugation are
the following :
Present Indicative (Active and Medio-passive).
ACTIVE.
Present
Indicative
S. -w 1
2
D. (?)
-ELS
Leroy
-EL
Ρ. ζομεν μετε
Lovoi's
-ομαι
Δεσθον
MEDIO-PASSIVE.
-η(-ει)
=
-όμεθα ζεσθε ζονται.
Ζεται.
766. 1. The first person singular of the active voice -w is the result of
dropping the personal ending - and the consequent antectasis of the
precoding thematic vowel -o- to -w (163).
767. 2. The second and third persons singular of the active voice, -eus
and -e, have arisen from e-is and e-1 (760, a), originally from -eo and -eTi
respectively (930).
768. 3. The third person plural Lovo" arose from (-OVTI) -ovot by expelling
-σ- with antcctasis (163).
769. 4. In the second person singular of the medio-passive voice, the
form 47 (4) arose from original Legai by extruding intersonantic -σ- (762).
770. II. Future indicative active and middle. By prefixing
o to the above endings, we obtain the future indicative active
and middle : -σω, -σεις, -σει --σετον,
and -σομαι, -σῃ, - σεται — -σεσθον, -σεσθον
-
-σετον
-σομεν, -σετε, -σουσι",
-σόμεθα, -σεσθε, -σονται.
770 Þ. The middle future has become extinct in N (1478-86).
771. III. Present and future subjunctive, active and middle.
On the other hand, by substituting -w- and -- for -o- and -e-
respectively, we obtain the subjunctive of the present and future
active and middle : -ω, -ης, -η, - -" ητον, -῏ητον,
- σωμεν, - σητε,
-σωσι", and -σωμαι, -η, -ηται, – ησθον, ησθον, = -σώμεθα, σησθε,
-σωνται.
σ
—
-
772. According to 761, the future subjunctive passive is -0,
- θῇς, -θῇ -θῆτον, -θῆτον θῶμεν, -θῆτε, -θῶσι.
773. The verbal endings effected by the above process (765–772) are
still substantially preserved in N. It is even significant that the
original form -eora of the second person singular medio-passive (760,
b) has been, since II, restored after the analogy of the perfect medio-
passive (λέλυσαι, πεποίησαι, κάθησαι, κεῖσαι) and such present types as
δύνασαι, ἵστασαι, τίθεσαι, δίδοσαι otc. (733).—Mooris 16 : ἀκροᾷ Αττικῶς, ἀκροᾶσαι
Ελληνικώς. Phryn. in An. Bokk. 18, 19 ανακτᾷ τόνδε, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀναλαμβάνεις
κεκμηκότα. οἱ δὲ ἀμαθεῖς προσθέσει τῆς και συλλαβῆς ἀνακτᾶσαι λέγουσι.
Sept. Ruth 2, 14 payeσai (so too Ps. 127, 2; Luke 17, 8); Deut. 28, 39 nieoai (80
197
773-779.] OF PRESENT INDICATIVE.
PERSON or
PERSON ENDINGS ENDINGS r
1
too 3 Reg. 17, 4; Luke 17, 8); 3 Reg. 14, 6 ἀποξενοῦσαι. Luke 16, 25 δυνᾶσαι.
Rom. 2, 17 & 23 καυχᾶσαι (also 1 Cor. 4, 7), Rom. 9, 18 κατακαυχᾶσαι. Hesych.
ii. 219 κοιμάσαι (so too Sept. Deut. 31, 16). Acta Tho. 25, 38 δρᾶσαι. 33, 18 ἐξομοι-
οῦσαι. 53, 15 ἐνθυμεῖσαι. 74, 27 λυτροῦσαι. Proch. 152, 6 βούλεσαι. Greg.
Naz. iii. 272 Ο δεξιοῦσαι. Basil. i. 753 Α ἐναντιοῦσαι. Callin. 133, 1 προσκολ-
λᾶσαι. 140, 6 τελειοῦσαι. Αpophth. 141 B & o, thun J Moschos 3017 ο πολεμείσαι.
Vita Euthym. 73 περισπᾶσαι. 79 ἐξέρχεσαι. Leo Tact. 9, 40 ἐπείγεσαι. Leont.
Mon. 665 Α δεξιοῦσαι. Porph Cor. 250 είσαι (also 253; 364 ; 266), 376, 8 κομίζεσαι
(also 377, 23). 623 αναλαμβάνεσαι. Basil. Sol. 473 Α λυτροῦσαι, ίασαι,—and so
on ever since. (Cp. EASoph. Gloss. 93 & 73.)
0
774. The influence of analogy in this caso is more strikingly shown by
the circumstance that oven verbs like δύναμαι, κρέμαμαι, κάθημαι—δίδομαι,
δίδωμι, τίθεμαι, τίθημι, and the rest of the Mi-class, which 4 Grook formed
without thematic sonant, woro soon attracted and assimilated to the
general norm of barytone -verbs (936 f.), as: Louvre Pap. 39 (161 B.0.),
1ο δύνομαι ; also Gr. Urk. Berlin 246 (+II-III), 10. Sept. Jer. 28,
δυνάμεθα. ib. 59, 14 ἠδύνοντο. 4 Macc. 2, 20 ἐδύνετο. (996, 54.)
775. These analogical formations indicate the mode and line of
transition from the M-verbs to the barytone or n-class, a phenomenon
illustrated by the following examples (936 f. 853):
δίδομαι, etc.
ζώννυμαι, etc.
στρώννυμαι, etc.
χώννυμαι, etc.
ἀπόλλυμαι, etc.
ἀφίεμαι, etc.
δίδομεν, δίδοτε—ΔΙΔΟΜΕΝ Δίδετε
-ΕΙΣ -ΕΙ
-ουσι δίδω
Ζώντω
11
στρώννω
ζώννυμεν, ζώννυτε—ζώνΝΟΜΕΝ ΖΩΝΝΕΤΕ
στρώννυμεν, στρώννυτε-στρώνΝΟΜΕΝ Στρώνετε,,
χώννυμεν, χώννυτε-χώνΝΟΜΕΝ χώΝΝΕΤΕ
ἀπόλλυμεν, ἀπόλλυτε - απόλλομεν ἀπόλλετε
ἀφίεμεν ἀφίετε αφίσες ἀφίετε
""
77
Χώννω
""
""
ἀπόλλω
""
ἀφίω ""
17
776. Even a single person can sorve as basis for new formations; thus-
τιθέασι las called forth P τιθέαμεν
διδύασι
σ
11
διδόαμεν
τιθέατε
διδύατε. (Cp. 930, α. 996, 51.)
777. The third person plural activo - "ουσι appears sinco T also in the
gyncopated form - ovy, as : Bull. Corr. Holl. vii. 309, 7 ἐπιτηδεύσουν. Alchem.
322, 9 νὰ ψυχρανθοῦν. 324, 27 νὰ λυθοῦν, etc. Nomoc. 47 ποιήσουν. ib. 307 ἐσθίουν,
ἔχουν. Loo Gram. 359, 13 κυριεύουν. FTrinch. 34 (1034) ἵνα κληρονομή-
iva
σουν. 75 (+1093) ἵνα ἡμᾶς ἔχουν, ἵνα σηκώσουν. 78 (1097) ἔχουν—and so on
over since. This abbreviation, which is apparently due to the analogy of
tho corresponding porson of the porfoct (785-8. 793-6), has been ever sinco
in popular nso, and N now, while still preserving the ancient form - ουσι
in some dialecta (Crote, Rhodos, Thera, Cypros, Chios, Loros, etc., op. Hatzi-
dakis 112), commonly says θέλου", τρώγου”, φάγου", λάβου", γράφου", γράψου”,
λύσου", ete, or amplifies to θέλουνε, λάβουνε, γράφουνε, etc. (132. App. iii. 29.)
778. In the same way, tho third person plural modio-passivo 4ονται has been
influenced by the corresponding onding -ovv, or rathor by the contracted forms
(ποιούμεθα, (δηλοῦσθε (ποι-, δηλ-)-οῦνται, and thus changed to N - ούνται,
as : ἔρχουνται, χαίρουνται, δέρνουνται, γίνουνται, κάθουνται (ep. 850 6. f.). This
N form occurs even in the curliest M popular compositions, as: SCusa 81
άρχουνται, κατάρχουνται. FTrinch. 373 (A.D. 1323) περιορίζουνται.
0
Ο
Ο
Ο
"η;
Ο
σ
Q
770. As regards the subjunctive forms ", "ης, η ; σωμεν, σητε, σωσι
σωμαι, σῃ, ηται; σώμεθα, ησθε, σωνται, generally speaking, they have
been strictly adhered to by corroct writers of all times. IIowover, as the
difference between indicative and subjunctive in most of the casos ("w,
σεις, ει, σομεν ; "ω, ης, η, σωμεν ; σομαι, σῃ, σύμεθα ; ωμαι, η, με was
a matter of moro orthography (1987 fr.), it naturally oscaped observation
and the homophony oxisting in all those cases soon led to a complete
uniformity. This was obtained by assimilating the few heterophonous
forms of tho subjunctivo (ητε, σωσι, "ηται, σησθε to those of the indicativo
which were far more familiar, since they occurred also in the imperative,
198
PERSON ENDINGS OF IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. [779-785.
and, with a slight prefixal variation, in the imperfect and 2nd aorist
indicative (φεύγετε, φύγετε, ἐφεύγετε, φύγετε; ἔρχεσθε, ἤρχεσθε, etc.). Ac-
cordingly the heterophonous forms appear to have retreated from popular
speech as early as G, and are, as a matter of course, unknown to N.
NT Mark Ir, 25 ὅταν στήκετε. 1 Thess. 3, 8 ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε. Gal. 2, 4 ἵνα
καταδουλώσουσιν. Τit. 2, 4 ἵνα σωφρονίζουσιν. 1 Cor. 4, 6 ἵνα μάθετε. Hermas
Vis. 3, 12, 3 ἐὰν εἰρηνεύετε. John t7, 3 ἵνα γινώσκουσιν (cp. Gal. 15, 24 ὅταν
παραδίδοι = -δίδῃ). John 5, 20 ἵνα θαυμάζετε. Phil. 2, 11 ἵνα ἐξομολογήσεται.
Matt. 7, 6 μήποτε καταπατήσουσιν καὶ ῥήξωσιν. Acts 7, 7, ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσουσιν.
Mark 15, 20 ἵνα σταυρώσουσιν. Mult. 18, 19 ἐὰν συμφωνήσουσιν. Rev. 13, 15
ὅσοι ἐὰν προσκυνήσουσιν. John 17, 3 ἵνα γινώσκουσιν. Rev. 12, 6 ἵνα τρέ
φουσιν. 3, 9 ἵνα ήξουσιν καὶ προσκυνήσουσιν. 6, 4 ἵνα σφάξουσιν. 4, 9
ὅταν δώσουσιν. 9, 20 ἵνα μὴ προσκυνήσουσιν. Acts 2, 32 & Hernias Vis. 1, 3, 2
ἐὰν μετανοήσουσιν. CIG 5128, 22 ἄχρις οὗ ἀγάγουσιν. Acta Thu. 28, 35 ἵνα
βλέπωσι καὶ ἀκούουσι. 66, 3 ὅταν λαμβάνουσιν. 59, 20 ὅταν ἐξουσίαν ἔχετε.
Acta Potri et Pauli 194, 3 ἵνα μὴ μόνον φύγωσιν ἀλλὰ καὶ δειγματίσουσιν. Acta
Pauli et Theclue 243, 11 (ABC) ἵνα μένουσιν. 256, 9 & 12 ἵνα ζήσεται. Acta
Pilati A i. 2, 5 ἵνα φονεύσουσιν. Acta Andreae 117, 8 ὅπως ἐγκαταλείψουσιν
(ep. 850-1). CGL 233, 25 ἐάν θέλετε si vullis. For other examples soo 1988 f.
1990, & cp. 850.
&
779". Even learned and staunch Atticists cannot escape the influence of
this confusion as : Proc. i. 479, 17 ἣν ὑπ' αὐτοῖς ἔσησθε. 336, 13 ὅπως συλλήψεται.
ii. 71, 20 ὅπως ἀκούσησθε. Aguth. 41, 3 ὅπως μὴ ὅμοια πείσησθε, socing that
such blunders merely point to a scholastic reaction. (Cp. 805 & 1935".)
780.
ACTIVE.
Imperfect (& 2nd Aorist) Indicative.
S. -ov -ES
-€
D.
Ρ. ζομεν ετε
στον στην
-ον
MEDIO-PASSIVE.
-όμην (εσο)-ου ετο
Δεσθον
-έσθην
-όμεθα εσθε
Συντο
781. For the P-N changes in the endings -ον -ομεν and -ετε see 786-791.
782. The form -ov of the 2nd person singular medio-passive arose
from edo by extrudling intersonantic σ (762. 934). However, the
original form remains unchanged in Mi-verbs and in the pluperfect,
as: ἵστασο, ἐτίθεσο, ἐδίδοση, ἐδείκνυσο, ἐδέδοση.
783. Starting from these fow romnants, P-B Greok revived and extended
the original form -εσo, first to contracted vorbs (ep. 773), then to all
vorba indiscriminately (ep. Kühner-Blass ii. 69), as: ἠκροᾶσο, ἐκαυχάσω,
ἐλέγετο, ἤρχεσο. Antalt. 98, 28 ἠκροᾶσο ἀντὶ ἠκροῶ· Αντιφάνης Επιδαύρῳ.
It still survivos in South Italian Grook, as: Morosi ii. 56 ἔρκεσο του
hexeσo; 140 éypápcσo (ep. APollogrini 26 & 42; also GHatzidakis 61). For
all other P-N changes see 801 ff. 849 f. 852. 859 f.
784. By substituting -a- and the appropriato tenso character
(-σ- οι -κ-, 756) for the thomatic -o- and -e-, the ist aorist active
and middle, and the perfect active as well aro effected. The
only variation noteworthy is that in the active voice: (a) the first
person singular drops final -r in the aorist and perfect; (b) the
third person singular takos of necessity -e for -a ; and (c) the
third person plural has - in the aorist and -σι" in the perfect.
-ν
785. Similarly, if we replaco -o- and -e- by -kel- or -On-, we
obtain the pluperfect active or the aorist passive respectively.
199
785-789.] PERSON ENDINGS OF AORIST INDICATIVE.
ACTIVE.
MIDDLE.
PASSIVE.
-σατο 1θην 10ης Αθη
Ισασθον σάσθην
S. -σα -σας -σε -σάμην ίσω
-σ€³
Aorist D.
Ισατον -σάτην
Σθητον -θήτην
Ρ. σαμεν ίσατε -caN -σάμεθα 'σασθε 'εαντο Κθημεν έθητε έθησαν
Perfect
S. -κa
D.
Active
-kas
-KE"
Σκειν Σκεις κει
Σκατον κατον
Pluperfect
Active
Σκειτον
-κείτην
LKELCAN
Ρ. έκαμεν Σκατε Σκασι
κειμεν κειτε
786. There has been, since A times, a close affinity between the aorist and
perfect. First they bordered on each other in meaning (736. 739. 1870-5),
then both had virtually the same endings save in the 3rd person plural
(-a, -as, -e, -aµev, -are, —); often even the same prefix as augment and
reduplication respectively (731.733-736). Those common points naturally
could not fail to bring about a completo assimilation. The first step in the
process was made by the 3rd person plural, the only varying terminal
suffix, since it was -ao" in the perfect, while the aorist ended in -(o)av.
If the balance of frequency were to turn the scale, the perfect would have
prevailed over the aorist, but the position of the latter was strengthened
by several allied cases of -oav, occurring in the samo person of the
pluperfect (èλeλúkecɑn) and aorist passive (èλú0ŋcan), in the imperativo (Aué-
τωσαν, λυσάτωσαν, λυθήτωσαν), and in the secondary subjunctivo (λύοισαν,
Xúσaioav, 791 f.). The assistance rendered by the aorist passive was of no
small moment, since this tenso already performed, to a considerable
extont, the office of the middle and active voice (1478-86), as:
ἐχάρησαν, ἀπηλλάγησαν, εφοβήθησαν, ἐπραγματεύθησαν, ἐβουλήθησαν, ἠνέχθη-
oav, etc. Accordingly the aorist ending -(o)av prevailed over the perfect
ending -ao", so that the perfect activo appears ever since the IIIrd B.C.
also in the form -ar (ep. Λ ἔθηκαν, ἔδωκαν):
(B.C
K Meistorlang 2 147, 8 (Β.Ε. 246-226) παρείληφαν. CIG 3053 (Β.C. 193) ἀπέσταλκαν.
Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. ro, 23 (Β.Ο. 162 ) εἴληφαν. ib. 11, 50 ἐπιδέδωκαν.
ἐπιδέδωκαν. GMoyer
§ 560 κέκρικαν. KMoisterhans 147, 8 (Ig! B.α.) διατετέλεκαν, ἐντέτευχαν,
εἴσχηκαν, πεποίηκαν. Sept. 1 Chron. 19, το γέγοναν. Jesu. 5, 29 ἑώρακαν. Fud
Jud.
7, 10 πέποιθαν.
NT Acts 16, 36 ἀπέσταλκαν. Col. 2, 1 ἑώρακαν. John 17, 6
τετήρηκαν. 17, 7 ἔγνωκαν. Rov. 18, 3 πέπτωκαν. 19, 3 εἴρηκαν. Jas. 5, 4 εἰσελή
λυθαν. Batrach. 179 čopyar; also Sib. or. 14, 253 (cp. CIG 4712 b évéпpηíav).
Peyron, Pap. Taur. p. 24 rekvрievkav. Sib. or. 1, 86 éoxníav. Lycoph. Alex, 252
mé¶piñav, éλýλvlav. Soxt, adv. Gr. 213. also Gcop. 2, 6, 27 Hippol. Haer. 272,
24 dedúεakav. Jacob.] 17, 1 oldav. [ Callisth.] i. 46, p. 52" réqunav. i. 26, p. 27
(C) dédwicar. Acta Pil. 4 yéyovav. Loont. Neap. V. J. 21, 12 dédwrav. So Theoph.
232, 6 (2), 2, 15 (C) méпovlav. Theoph. 294, 19; 21; 23; 352, 3 (also 116, 8 y) &
πέπονθαν
Loo Gram. 292, 22 пeпоíηкаν. Theoph. 227, 10 (2) yéyovav. (Cp. Kühner-Blass
πεποίηκαν.
ii. 49.)-- Conversely: Gr. Urk. Berlin 22, 21 (†114) ☎v némрakon λaɣávwv.
For N see 789 1.
787. This influence soon extended to the 2nd aorist also (907-916), the
more so as that touso was syntactically identical with the 1st aorist :--
CIG 2264 udd, peréoxav. Polyb. 3, 19, 5 åvténeoav. 33, 17, 1 évéπeoav. Sopt.
2 Rog. 23, 16 λaßav. Tobit 3, 9
έλαβαν.
ἀπέθαναν. 1 Sir. 10, 14 είδαν, ἔφυγαν ; 27, 20
εὗραν. NT Murk 14, 46 ἐπέβαλαν. Mutt. 14, 15 προσῆλθαν. Luke 8, 35 ἦλθαν.
Rev. 7, 11 ἔπεσαν. Gr. Urk. Borlin 146 (II-IIIrd) λav. Hormas Vis. 1,
4, 1 ἦλθαν καὶ ἦραν καὶ ἀπῆλθον. ib. 3 ἀπῆλθαν. Acta The 19, 9 παρεῖδαν. 93, 3
ἐξήνεγκαν. 89, 35 ἀπήνεγκαν. Proch. 43, 1 είπαν. So 43, 7; 48, 14; 18 ; 92, 3. 91,
6 è¿éßaλav, ote. Also Narr. Zos. 99, 13 & 18; 106, 9. Leout. Noup. V. J. 22, 24
ἔπεσαν. Μul. 66, 13 ἔφυγαν.
788. This form has over since boon curront in popular spooch, and is
now universal in N, us : ἔφυγαν, εἶδαν, ἔπαθαν, ἔγιναν.
789. The analogical influence of the 3rd person plural -av could not
200
PERSON ENDINGS OF IMPERFECT AND AORIST. [789-793.
but also soon affect the only remaining past tense, namely the imper-
fect, the more so as the identity of the 3rd with the 1st person plural
in this tense (780. 794) called for a dissociation. This assimilation
then completed the levelling of all tenses referring to the past: aorist,
pluperfect, perfect, and imperfect, whether barytone or contracted.
Sept. 2 Reg. 6, 3 ἦγαν. So too Εφημ. ἀρχ. 1892, 41-2. Louvre Pap. 40
(156 Β.Ο.), 39 ὕβριζαν με. Also 41, 29. CIA iii. 1379, 4 ήφεραν. Hermas
Vis. 3, 2 (N) κατέκοπταν. Acta Andr. et Matt. 3 προσέδεναν. Mich. Arch.
2, 8 είχαν. Εur. Hec. 574 ἐπληρούσαν. CIG 1583, 4 ἐνικῶσαν. Bull.
Corr. Hell. 1890, 5 παρεκαλοῦσαν. Sept. Gen. 6, 4 ἐγεννῶσαν. Εx. 33. 8
κατενοοῦσαν. 2 Reg. 20, 15 ἐνοοῦσαν. Ps. 5, 12 ἐδολιοῦσαν. Job I, 4 ἐποιοῦσαν.
Jer. 19, 13 et 39, 29 ἐθυμιωσαν. 41, το ἐῶσαν. Ezech. 22, 11 ἠνομοῦσαν.
2 Esdr. 6, 14 ᾠκοδομούσαν. Sol. Ps. 8, 12 ἐπατοῦσαν. 2, 2 κατεπατοῦσαν. 2, 3
ἐβεβηλοῦσαν. 17, 15 ἐπεκρατοῦσαν. Gr. Urk. Berlin 183 (185), 6 προεγαμοῦσαν.
Hermas Sim. 9, 9, 5 ἐδοκοῦσαν. Steph. Diacon. 1104 D ἐπαλινοδοῦσαν. (Cp.
NT Acts 17, 5 ἐθορυβοῦσαν.) [In all those cases the accent was borrowed
from ἐπληροῦμεν, ἐπληροῦτε, παρεκαλοῦμεν, ἐδολιοῦμεν, ἐδολιοῦτε, etc. ; not from
ἐπλήρουν, as G Hatzidakis argues in Παρνασσός 17, 581-8. Cp. ἡμάρτοσαν,
ἐφάγοσαν, ἐμάθοσαν, etc. from ἡμάρτομεν, ἡμάρτετε, ἐφάγομεν, ἐφάγετε, etc. 791.]
790. This form has ever since been current in popular speech and is still
universul in N, where it has been transferred evon to tho passivo voice: ἐφοβοῦν-
ταν, ἐφαίνουνταν (= ἐφοβοῦντο, ἐφαίνοντο).
791. To what extent the ending - (σ)αν came to be felt as the charac-
toristic suffix of the past, may be gathered from the fact that it soon began
to be superadded even to the thematic vowel of the 2nd aorist and imperfect,
thon even to the kindred secondary subjunctive [optativo] active, thus
leading to 4oσαν :
•
B.
Bull. Corr. Hell. vi. 41-43 (180 B.α.) παρελάβοσαν. Ephem. epigr. i. 278 (170 Β.Ο.),
41 απήλθοσαν. Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. 23 (Β.C. 161), 31 ἐλαμβάνεσαν (reud -οσαν).
Hermes viii. 433 διελάβοσαν. Sept. Jusu. 8, 19 (Β) ἤλθοσαν. Gen. 8, 19 & 12,
5, also Jogu. 2, 8 ἐξήλθοσαν. Deut. 1, 25 & Josu. II, 19) (B) ἐλάβησαν. Dout.
7, 19) ἴδοσαν (writo εἴδοσαν, 717 [1]). 32, 5 ἡμάρτοσαν. Ps. 76, 17 & 97, 3, also
Jos. 41, 5 εἴδοσαν. 77, 29 εφάγοσαν. 114, 3 εὕροσαν. Jor. 28, 7 ἐπίοσαν. Ruth
4, 11 εἴπυσαν. Nehon. 3, 5 κατέσχεσαν. Jos. 3, 14 (1) ἤρυσαν (for ἦραν). 8,
22 καθείλοσαν. Dan. 3, 22 ἐνεβάλοσαν. Josu. 6, 23 (1) εξηγάγοσαν. Scynn. 695
ἔσχοσαν. Et. Μ. 282, 27 ἐμάθοσαν. Loo Gram. 200, 22 εἰσήλθοσαν. ρ.
CALobeck Phryn. 349 εἴδοσαν, ἐφεύροσαν, ήλθοσαν.—Bull. Cor. Hell. vii. 57
(180 B.C.) ovvýyooav. Pap. Louvre 34 (±150 B.C.), 13 èpáonooar. A. P. 5, 209
εἴχοσαν. Lycophr. 21 ἐσχάζοσαν. Sept. Ex. 16, 24 ελαμβάνοσαν. 18, 26 ἐκρίνεσαι,
ἀνεφέρεσαν. 1 Macc. 4, 50 ἐφαίνεσαν. Εzech. 22, 12 ἐλαμβάνοσαν. 1 Par. 22, 4
ἐφέρεσαν. John 15, 22 & 24 εἴχοσαν. Sol. Ps. 8, τι διηρπάζοσαν. 8, 25 εἴδοσαν ;
14), 7 ἡμάρτησαν ; 17, τό ἐφύγοσαν. 13, 3 ἐπεδραμοσαν, ἐτίλλοσαν. Kühner-
Blass ii. 55 ἐλέγοσαν, ἐφεύγεσαν, ἐγράφησαν, εἴπασαν (-οσαν?). Antatt. gr, 14
ἐλέγοσαν, ἐγράφοσαν, καὶ τὰ ὅμοια Αλεξανδρεῖς λέγουσιν· Λυκόφρων ᾿Αλεξάνδρα
· ναῦται λίαζον κἀπὸ γῆς ἐσχάζυσαν. Leont. Neap. V. J. 30, 8 (Ε) εἰσήλθοσαν
(ubi -θωσαν). Μich. Arch. 3, το διήλθοσαν. 11, 10 ήλθοσαν.
11
792. As similar macaronic instances of the secondary subjunctive
[optative noto the following cases in Ζαισαν and Loισαν, suggested by -" αι
and for rospectively (805):
9
Job
Sept. Gen. 49, 8 αινέσαισαν. Dout, 1, 44 ποιήσαισαν. Του 5, 14 ψηλαφήσασαν.
18, 7 θηρεύσαισαν. 18, ο ἔλθοισαν. 18, 11 ὀλέσαισαν. 20, 10 πυρσεύσαισαν. Ps. 34, 25
εἴποισαν. 103, 35 ἐκλείποισαν. Τobil 3, 11 εὐλογήσαισαν. Sol. Ps. 4, 8 δικαιώσαισαν.
4, 20 εκκύψαισαν. 12, 6 κληρονομήσαισαν. CIG 1600 παρέχοισαν. Hippol. 283, 47
λέγοισαν. Phavor. p. 172, 23 εἴπαισαν. (So CIC II, ο ἀποτίνοιαν ; for moro
examples s00 805.)
703. On the other hand, the great frequency (in P-B Greek) of the perfect
and the consequent popularity of its ending Lao" (supported as it was by
201
793-798.] PERSON ENDINGS OF PAST INDICATIVE.
the -ovci" of the other two principal tenses, notably the present, with
which it was syntactically associated), inevitably exerted a counter-
influence on the invading aorist. Hence we often find the ending -ao"
applied to the aorist and imperfect, though hardly provious to T, as:
Clom. Rom. 1, 44 (4) èdwkarı (if not dedwkacı). Gr. Urk. Berlin 275 (†215), 5
ἐπήλθασί τινες. CWessely Prol. 65 (+618) ἐποιήκασιν (or πεποιήκασιν ?). Acta
Pilati B 10, 6 (a) éλáßaow. Vita Epiph. 68 d áttedúraoi. Acta Tho. 22, 35
εἴπασιν. Apocr. Martyr. Barthol. 2, also JMoschos 3081 A dielnicαoi.
Damasc. ii. 324 A einaσiv. Theoph. 468, 6 kπýpaow. (Cp. Villois. Anocd. ii, 122
ἐτιθέασι.)
FTrinch. 6o (A. D. 1063) ἀφιερώσασιν. 125 (A. D. 1125) ἐποιήσασιν. 151 (A. D. 1133)
ἐχρήζασιν. 167 (A.D. 1141) ἐκλέψασι. 243 (Α. D. 1175) ὀμώσασιν. 412 (Α. D. 1244)
ὀμόσασιν. 413 εἴχασιν, ἐσυναινέσασιν, ἐτίσασιν, etc. Sousa 416 (A. D. 1117) ἤλθασιν,
ὑπήρχασιν. Prodr. 1, 88 παρεδώκασι. 304 ἠθέλασι. 2, 438 ἐθέκασι. 3, 272
¿πovλoúvraσı—and so on to the present time. (Cp. GHatzidakis 112.)
794. Another departure from A conjugation is shown by the Ist
person of past tenses. The ending -ov of the 2nd aorist and imperfect
served as 3rd person plural also (780. 789), and thus rendered an un-
mistakable distinction necessary. This was readily found in the 1st porson
of tho ist aorist and perfoet (ἔλυσα, λέλυκα):
CIA iii. 1636, 5 oxa. RWagner 119 10a, and often. NT Acts 12, 7 eneσα.
CIA iii. 1379
(IIIrd A. D.) npepa (996 293). also GKaibel 168, 2 & J.Moschos 3004 A épepa.
Mal. 234, 15 miα. CIA iii. 1350, 4 ½λmiša. Acta Pauli et Thoclae 258, 3 éɣù
KаTÉрUYа. So Acta Tho. 77, 3. Leont. Neap. V. J. 90, 12 ȧnéтuxo. Sym. 1701
Α ἐγκατέλιπα (ubi -λειπα); 1700 D ἔφυγα, κατέφυγα. CGL 399, 26 elaba
(ἔλαβα), 402, 32 edrama (ἔδραμα).
Rov. 17, 3 είδα. Gr. Urk, Berlin 261 (±II-IIIrd A. D.), 18 éλɑßa.
ἤλπιζα.
795. This form has over since been current in popular speech and is still
universal in N, as : ἔφυγα, είδα, ἔλεγα, ἔβλεπα
796. Onco established in the 3rd person plural and tho 1st person
singular (789. 794), the thematic -a- soon extended to the remaining 1st
and 3rd persons of the plural :
διείλαμεν.
So
(Aeschin. 2, 176 évenéoaµev.) Polyb. 4, 57, I ȧmeλíñaμev. Sept. 1 Sir. 10, 14
ἐνεπέσαμεν.) ι ἀπελίπαμεν.
eldaμev. 2 Sir. 19, 42 épáɣaµev. Orph. Argon. 119 eldaμev. So NT Acts 4, 20.
Luke 8, 35 & 23, 2 εὕραμεν. Acts 21, 8 ήλθαμεν. Clem. R. ad Cor. 38, 3 εἰσήλθαμεν.
Acta Tho. 1, 6 dieíλaμev. 43, 39 & 44, 26 kateλíñaµev (ubi -λeiπ-). CWessely
Akad. Wiss, 1889, p. 166. (V VII) eo xaμev. Acta Pil. A. i. 15, 1 eïdaµev. Proch.
53, 16 & Acta Pil. A. 4, 5 λ0aμev. So 54, 21; 59, 3; 67, 15 otc.-Proch. 117, 2
elonλaper. So 148, 6; 160, 3 & 5; 161, 81.—64, 5 è§ýλ0aµev. So 18; 87, 3; 117, 2 otc.
102, 14 εἴπαμεν. 103, 18 ηὕραμεν. 44, 2 εὕραμεν. Το 86, 9. 102, 4 εἴπαμεν. 108, 9
μετελάβαμεν. Mal. 449, 20 ηὕραμεν. Acta Pilati Λ i. 1, 5 εἴχαμεν. So Vita
Ephiph. 108, 1; Loont. Neap. V. J. 19, 16 (D) evpaper. Sym. 1688 o kykareλinaµev
(ubi -λeíraµev). Apoc. Mar. 122, 36-7 eidaμer (twico).-Sopt. Esai. 1, 4
λείπαμεν).
ἐγκατελίπατε. Amos 4, 4 εἰσήλθατε. NT Matt. 25, 36 ἤλθατε. 11, η εξήλθατε.
7
Gal. 5, 4 ἐξεπέσατε. Polye. ad Phil. 9, 1 εἴδατε κατ᾽ ὀφθαλμούς. Acta Tho
79, 11 cimate. So 85, 15. Mart. Potri et Pauli 124, 10 KαTEλíñate (ubi -λeímare).
Acta Petri ot Pauli 191, 2 ¿ykareλínare (-λeír). Leont. Noap. Sym, 1681 A
ἐγκατελίπατε (ubi λείπατε). CWessely Prol. 65 (+VI-VIII) ἐλάβατε.
797. Thoso forms have over since been current in popular spooch and
are now very common in N, except the 2nd person plural (-are), for which
the ancient form -ere is by far commoner. (Cp. NT Matt. 23, 23 åpýkete.)
798. Under the influence of such an assimilating process, it was a
foregone conclusion that the only remaining anomaly in the por-
sonal endings of past tenses, the 2nd person singular, should be removed.
This was done by substituting the -es of the imperfect and 2nd aorist for
the -as of the perfect and 1st aorist:
Sept. Ex. 5, 22 απέσταλκες. NT Acts 21, 23 ἐλήλυθες. John 8, 57 εώρακες.
202
PERSON ENDINGS OF N PAST TENSES. [798-801º.
Rov. 2, 3
κεκοπίακες. 2, 4 ἀφῆκες. 2, 5 πέπτωκες. Le Bag 2415 οἰκοδόμησες, ἔκτισες.
GKaibel 570 (IInd A.D.) рπages (so IGS 2040 & 525). 577 & 578 hpraσes (so too
IGS 1754). 241, 1 åπéonaσes. IGS 40; 497a; 578 ë(noes. Gr. Urk. Berlin 261
(±II-IIIrd A. D.), 14 dédwxes. ib. 23 oïdes. ib. 24 eypayes. Apoll. D. Synt. i. 36, 37
(also CWessely Akad. Wiss. 1889 p. 116) čɣpayes. 37,9 eĭpnies. Acta Pilati B. ii. 7
èyúpevoes. CWessely Prol. 65 (†608) èxophynoais (for -σes). Leont. Neap.
V. J. 43, 14. (C) ἐσκέπασες. CGL 400, 10 efileses (épíλnoes). 401, 58 edipneses
(¿deíπvnoes). ib. 68 erises (nploes). 402 epateses (énáτnoes). ib. 14 erapses
(eppayes). ib. 56 echeses (exeσes). ib. 70 epsefises (npioes). ib. syneterescs
(ovverηpnocs); et passim [],
798b. This form has ever since been current in popular speech and is
now universal in N, as: ἔγραψες, ἔκτισες, ἐφίλησες, ἔδωκες.
799. For the P N morphology of the Middle Futuro and Aorist, see
once for all 1478-1486.
800. On the other hand, the ending -are, -a00e, owing to the presence of
-aμev, -aσı”, perhaps also to the phonodynamic superiority of a over e (146),
has not only hold its own against -ere, -code the longest, but was even
transferred to the future imperative and still obtains in several N idioms.
Sopt. Ps. 145, 3 & Jer. 9, 4 μr пETOídαтe. Josu. II, 19 μὴ ἑστήκατε. Acta
Petri ot Pauli 192, 10 εἰσέλθατε. Acla Tho. 13, 20 περιέλθατε.
21, 29 ἐξέλθατε.
93, 19 εἰσέλθατε. 49, 29 ἀπέλθατε (even 82, 29 ἐλθάτω! ep. Acta Pil. B. 4, 2 μηδὲν
ποιήσατε κακόν). CLeomans 19, 15 ἔλθαται for -τε. CGL 656, 12 ἔλθατε ὧδε.
657, 14 ἀπελθάτω τις καὶ ἀγγειλάτω.
801. As recent N doos not well admit of a closing -v (218. 221), the
aorist passive ending -Ony has been changed to -Oŋka (App. iii. 29), where
-ka has been borrowed from the perfect (786), as: À éλú¤ŋv, N éλúoŋka;
Α εὑρέθην, Ν εὑρέθηκα ; 4 ἐχάρην, Ν ἐχάρηκα ; Α κατέβην, Ν ἐκατέβηκα.
801. In this way, popular speech has since G timos gradually established
a uniform system of person endings for all past tenses, including the
perfect (the pluperfect having previously retreated before its analytical
substitute 1880), in the following manner :
-α
Imperfect, Perfect, and Aorist in G-N speech :
I. G-N
II. A-В -úμnv
N Δούμου
Σατε & ετε (οσαν) -αν
-OPTO
Ζουντα" [3]
-ES
-E
Σαμεν
Σεσο
LETO
-όμεθα
Δεσθε
Δούσουν -ETO"
-μεστα
Δεστε
III. A-B
Onv
Ν έθηκα
Lons
Σθήκες
θη
θη
θημεν
θήκαμε
θητε
έθησαν
θήκετε
έθηκαν
δε -θηκε"
& -θήκατε
& θήκανε [3]
& θήκασι
801°. Regarding the N forms given here under II, note that the
terminal -ov" is due chiefly to the influence of the proceding thematic -ov-
(859b; for the 2nd person ep. also the imperative záloυ, pvßoů, λuñýσou),
while this thematic -ov- is again due to the influence of contracted verbs
(852.859). Onco established, this form, Loúμovv Loúoovv or with the
protoctivo -e (northern -a) (App. iii. 28), -vúμovve -oúoovve (-va), attracted
the 3rd person -ero”, and under the influence of the 3rd person plural led
to -ovvтav“.—In the plural -úμeσra, tho σ is due to -core (i. e. -eσ0€ 176).
This form moreover is changed in northern N speech to paore, also
Lμаoтav (Epiros) or μaoтovv (Macedonia), with a corresponding 2nd and
3rd porson Loαote and Loαotay or (Chios) LoaσTev. See also App. iii. 28.
Ισαστε 'σασταν Ισαστεν.
-ουνταν.
[1] Conversely but rarely elonλoas (due to eloeλýλv@as) Groat Louvre
Pap. 2340.
COL 642, 20 εύχερῶς (roud εὐκαίρως) ἦλθας opportune venisti.
[2] Somotimos also -ouvraσi", which occurs even in Prodr. 3, 272 étovλoúvтaJI
for ἐπωλοῦντο.
Soo App. iii. 28,
203
802-805.] PERSON ENDINGS OF OPTATIVE.
802.
SECONDARY SUBJUNCTIVE [OPTATIVE].
a. ACTIVE.
α.
Imperfect S. -οιμι
& 2nd Aorist
b. MEDIO-PASSIVE.
-οις
- οι
-οίμην
- οιο
-οιτο
- οιτον
-οίτην
Ρ1. -οιμεν
- οιτε
- OLED
-οίμεθα
D.
-
οισθον -οίσθην
-οισθε ποιντο
803. By prefixing to the above endings the tense character
-o- or -k- (756), we obtain the subjunctive of the 1st aorist and
pluperfect respectively: - σοιμι, -σοις, -σοι, etc. ; -σοίμην, -σοιο,
-σοιτο, etc.
-κοιμι, κοις, -κοι, etc. Likewise, the tense char-
acter -θησ- produces the aorist passive: -θησοίμην, -θήσοιο,
-θήσοιτο, etc.
804. Mark however that the aorist subjunctive (active and medio-
passive), as indicated above, is rare and that its regular and common
formation is effected by substituting the thematic vowel -a- for -0-
(758, b); or, in the case of the aorist passive, by special active endings
(761). Thus the aorist subjunctive has the following endings:
α. ACTIVE.
S. -σαιμι -σαις οι -σειας,
-σαιτον
6. MIDDLE.
b.
- σαιο
-σαισθον
- σαι οι -σεις
-σαίμην
-σαίτην
Ρ1. - σαιμεν - σαιτε
-σαιεν οι -σειαν
-σαίμεθα -σαισθε
C. PASSIVE.
S. -θείην
-θείης
D.
-θεῖτον
θείη
-θείτὴν
Ρ1. θειμεν
-θείτε
- σαιτο
σαίσθην
-σαιντο
-θεῖεν
805. Owing to its carly retreat from the living language (679), tho
secondary subjunctive, considered from a morphological point of view,
has no P-N history. Its only noteworthy feature is that scholarly
writers of all P-M ages made a more or less correct use of it according to
their proficiency in A grammar, whereas unlearned scribes either altogether
discarded it or blundered in its use-especially in the aorist-being
mostly guided by what they imagined to bo analogy or Attic idiom (827).
In this connexion the frequency of the ending -(o)av in the 3rd person
plural is particularly striking (779. 792) :
σαν.
CIG 1, 6 ἀποτίνοιαν. 2366, τι εὕρειαν (for εὕροιεν. Sept. Gen. 49, 8 αἰνέσαισαν.
Deut. 1, 44 ποιήσαισαν. Job 5, 14 ψηλαφήσασαν. 18, η θηρεύσαισαν. 18, 9 ἔλθοι-
18, 11 ὀλέσαισαν. 20, 10 πυρσεύσαισαν. Ps. 34, 25 εἴποισαν. 103, 35 ἐκλεί-
ποισαν. Tobit 3, 11 εὐλογήσαισαν. Sir. 33, 11 εὕροισαν. CIG 1699 & 1702 παρέ-
χοισαν. GCurtius Anecd. Dolph. 5, 12, 13, 31 παρέχουν (for -χειεν). Porph.
Adm. 136, 8 γένειεν. [CIG 5760 γραῦ μεθύστρια ζήσοις (writo ζήσης (1).
Eus. ii. 8gr A υγιαίνοντά σε ὁ θεὸς διαφυλάξοι. Athan. i. 36. ν δ θεὸς ὑμᾶς
διαφυλάξοι ; Cyrill. H. Procut. τη φυτεύσοι δὲ ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν καὶ στρατεύ
σοι ὑμᾶς ἑαυτῷ. Theophyl. 327, 9 ὁ θεὸς ὑποτάξοι σοι πάντα. Nic. ii. 744 Β ὁ θεὸς
φυλάξοι τοὺς εὐλαβεῖς :most if not all for - H. Soe 1953 and ep. 1935 -6. App. v.
4 f. 15b.]
[1] However, in this and all succeeding cuses of more wish, where the ' optativo
had lingored the longest (1924. App. iv. 13-15), it is most probable, if not certuin,
hat the spelling with o is a pedantic transcription of the 7 of the primary
Subjunctive which had been current over sinco II times for the 'optative'
(1919). It is certainly strange that the 'optative' should have beon practised
chiefly in those cuses where it is homophonous with the primary subjunctivo
(App. iv. 15).
204
PERSON ENDINGS OF IMPERATIVE.
[806-814.
II. IMPERATIVE.
808. The Imperative has the following endings:-
ACTIVE.
MEDIO-PASSIVE.
-012
-TU)
-σ03&4
-σθω
-των
-σθον
-σθων
5
-ντων οι -τωσαν
-ове
-σθων οι -σθωσαν
5
τον
-TE
807. 1. The future passive has active endings (761).
808. 2. The ending - is simply dropped in the present, as
Trave; but in the aorist passive after the tense character -On-, it is
changed by dissimilation into T- (182, b), as πaúðŋti.
σ,
and o
809. 3. The ending -σo in the present loses its
then coalesces with the preceding thematic to ov (762), as:
(*πανε ο παύεο) παύου.
810. 4. The 2nd person singular of the future active and
middle is irregularly formed in -σov and -oau respectively:
παῦσον, παῦσαι (instead of παῦσε [παυσε ο] παύσου).
811. 5. Of the two alternative endings active and middle
-ντων οι -τωσαν, and -σθων or -σθωσαν, the former (-ντων and
-σ0wv) prevail in A, the latter (-Twσav and -o0wσav) since 300 B. C.
τω
811'. A contaminatory form (-VTWV × -TWOαV) -VTwσav is also found since A,
aς: καθελόντωσαν CIA iv. 1o4 @ (352-1 Β.Ο.), 17; μισθωσάντωσαν (116), ποιησάντωσαν,
áпodóvтwσav Jour. Hell, Stud. 1896 p. 235 (bis).
812. In considering the P-N history of the imperative, we must
distinguish between its second and third person. The latter retreated
comparatively early from the common language before the subjunc-
tive, and its presence in post-christian compositions is due mainly
to scholasticisin. (1919-1930. App. v. 1–5. 17.)
-ατε
813. On the other hand, the second person active shows such changes as
might be expected from the influence of analogy. The endings -e and -e7€,
occurring as they do in the present and in the 2nd futuro [2nd aorist}
(φευγε, φεύγετε; φύγε, φύγετε; κρίνε, κρίνετε), not to mention the perfect
(TÉTаVIE), wore far more familiar than the signatic forms -"ov, -"ate (\ûoov,
λύσατε, κρῖνον, κρίνατε). Henco tho former attracted and, after a con-
sidorable struggle and cross-influenco (cp. 122, and Vita SA 49* v űñayon Kai
ν ὕπαγον καὶ
σkúпŋσоν), gradually assimilated the lattor, and thus brought about a
uniform imperative. This process of equalization signalized itself in G
(LRoss 246 opvεe. SStorrot, i. 82 Spâσe. ii. 311 (ñoa, i.o. ¿noe; Vita Aesopi
od. AWestormann 10, 27 πpâ§e. CGL 402, 39 hypodese [úñúdnoe or vñúdeσe).
652 nepi(woe), but has not yet completely closed, sinco a fow modern Greek
idioms (as Pontos, South Italy, Cypros) still preserve the ending -ov,
115 : γράψον, γέλασον, ὕβρισον, ξύσον, φύγον [1] Iu all other N dialects,
however, the only endings known aro - and -e7e:
-ETE: γράφε, γράφετε
γράψε, γράψετε (CGL 652 συνάξετε, ἀγοράσετε. p. 653 ανάπεσε discumbe)
—TλÛVE, TλÚVETE (those two sorving both as present and future).
814. On the samo principlo, tho melio-passive ondings are still fully
proserved in N, so far as they agreo with the prosent endings -ov and -600€,
As to tho futuro, in which the middle and passivo voices have assumod a com-
14 This occurs chiofly in Pontos and Otranto, though in the lattor dialect the
auciont for survivos only in proparoxytonos, us: φώνασο, πίστευσο, κράτησο,
ole, but κλαυσε, ῥιφσε, γράφε, πλεῖσε, etc. (Morusi i. 135 f.)
205
814-823.]
INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE ENDINGS.
mon form (1478-86), the ending -OnTi still survives in Pontos (GHatzidakis
29), but all other N dialects have replaced it by -oov, naturally moulded on
the ancient and more familiar form ov, as : φαντάσου, κοιμήσου, νίψου. The
plural oŋre has become -Onre by assimilation to the cognate hortative sub-
junctivo (App. v. 16 ff. 1919), ς: κοιμηθῆτε, πλυθῆτε, χαθῆτε. Moreover
this accentuation seems on the whole to be applicable also to G-B popular
compositions, as: poßnoîte, Xaρîte, etc. (App. v. 16, b.)
INFINITIVE.
815. The infinitive endings are--
Active: -ev or -vau. -Medio-passive: -o0au.
816. 1. The ending -vau is peculiar to the perfect active and
aorist passive: πεπαυκέ-ναι, παυθῆναι.
817. 2. The ending -ev coalesces with the preceding thematic
-e- to -eɩ: πaúεev πаúeш. (But see App. ii. 8–14).
818. 3. Instead of -σew, the aorist active has, by exception,
the ending -σαι, aς : παῦσαι.
819. Owing to its simple and indeclinable character, the infinitive
shows no morphological vicissitudes since A times, except an occa-
sional interchange of tenses. This confusion, however, points to the
gradual retreat of the infinitive altogether from the common speech,
and therefore its investigation belongs to the syntax (2063. App. vi).
PARTICIPLE.
820. In the active voice, the participle has no fixed endings,
except a terminal character -VT- or (in the perfect) -or-, attached
to the thematic vowol. This VT- or -оT- coalesces with the suc-
ceeding ending giving rise to antectasis (163. App. ii. 9 ff. & 14):
(παυοντ + s) παύων, παυσοντ+s) παύσων, (παύσαντ + s) παύσας,
παλον,
παύουσα,
(παυθεντ + s) παυθείς,
παυθέν,
παυθεῖσα,
παῦσον,
παύσουσα,
S
(πεπαυκοτ + s) πεπαυκώς.
πεπαυκός.
πεπαυκυία.
παύσαν
παύσασα
821. In the modio-passive voice [save in the aorist passive
761], the participle invariably ends in -μevos, -μevov, -µévn, as :
παυόμενος (-ον, -η), παυσόμενος (-ον, -η), παυσάμενος (-ον, -η), πεπαυ-
μένος (-ον, -η).
822. Regarding the P-N history of the participle, mark that the
medio-passive, especially in the perfect form -uévos, still obtains in N,
while the active, following as it did an imparisyllabic inflection, has
naturally shared the fate of the 3rd declension (338). However, in
South Italian N (GMorosi i. 132. 138. 142), the active form is still
lingering in the adverbial termination -οντα, as : γράφοντα, γράφσοντα.
823. This -ovтa, which is evidently a rolic of a neuter participlo active
in -vra (instead of simple -v), occurs rather frequently in T-B diction, and
206
CONTRACTED CONJUGATION.
[823-827.
thus seems to mark the transition from the ancient participle active to the
M-N participial adverb in -οντας (1102).
C.
CLeemansry(-III-IV ζώδιον λαιὰν χεῖρα ἐκτετακότα, τὴν δὲ ἑτέραν [κεκ]αμμέ-
νην ἔχοντα. Vita Epiph. 88 Α τὸ παιδίον ζώντα. 89 4 (αὐτὸ ἀποθανόΝΤΑ, ΑΝΑ-
στάντα, λαβόντα, 65 στὸ πλοῖον επάCANTA (ubi ἀσπάσαντα) ἀπὸ τῶν κυμάτων.
JMoschos 2948 ο πλοῖον ὁρΜΟΥ͂ΝΤΑ. Leont. Neap. V. J. 5, 9 σταυρίον ἀργυροῦν
ΝΤΑ. 9, 14 πρόθεμα περιέχοντα τον τύπον τοῦτον. 24, 6 πιττάκιον περιέχοντα
οὕτως 42, 21 τὸ ἐσωφύριον αὐτοῦ ἀναγκαῖον ὑπάρχοντα. 64, 1 γύναιον προεπί-
ΠΤΟΝΤΑ καὶ λέγοντα. 88, 12 τὸ παιδίον ἐτῶν ὑπάρχοντα ἑπτά. Μul. 38, 11 τὸ πῦρ
κατενεχθέντα, 60, 22 πλῆθος οἰΚΟΥ͂ΝΤΑ. 206, 24 τὸ ἱερὸν Σολομῶντος ΝτΑ.
211, 19 τὸ βουλευτήριον πεσόντα. 217, 3 τὸ πάνθεον μέλλοντα συμπίπτειν. 220, 15
τὸ λείψανον CMYPνια θέΝΤΑ. 235, 13 λουτρόν παρέχοντα. 367, 14 τὸ δημόσιον
πεσόντα. 399, 14 χωρίον ὄΝΤΑ (bis). 464, 4 τὸ βάνδον εγλληφθέντα. Αpoc.
Mar. 120, 37 θηρίον πτερωτὸν ἔχοντα τρεῖς κεφαλάς. 124, 34 ἡ ψυχὴ βοᾷ λέγοντα.
Chron. 608, 2 τὸ Δύρας χωρίον ΝτΑ. Frinch. 9999 A.D.) ἡμεῖς βλέποντα. 13. (1005
A.D.) τὸ ὄντα καὶ διακείμενον. 34 (1034 A.D.) φαινόμενα αφιερώνοντα. ἐὰν φανῶ
μεν ΚΑΤΑΖΗΤΟΥΝΤΑ καὶ ἐνοχλοῦντα. GSpata 64 (1176 A.D.) φαίνομαι πιπράσKONTA
ἅπαντα τὸ ἐμὸν ὀλίγον ἀμπέλιον . τὸ ὄντα καὶ διακείμενον. Belth. 395
Βλέποντα καὶ τὸ ζῴδιον θλιμμένα νὰ ἱστέκῃ. 572 καὶ ἡ τετάρτη φθάνοντα,
κἀκεῖνος ταύτην λέγει. 885 ἡ Φαιδροκάτσα πρὸς αὐτὸν Γελῶντ᾽ ἀπηλογήθην.
1004 μικρὸν ἀπεμειδίασε βλέποντά τον ἡ κύρη. Ποιο ἀκούοντα ὁ Βέλθανδρος οὐδὲν
ἀπηλογήθην. 1026 λέγοντα. 1313 νὰ πᾶ Γυρεύοντά τον.-Chron. Mor. Prol. 390
ἦσαν ἐπάροντα (ib. 1274 ἦτον ἀποθανών), 1003 ἦτον ποιήσοντα.
7747 ἦσαν
ΣΤΑΘΕΝΤΑ. Prol. 18 ἰδόντες τοῦτ᾽ ὁ ἅγιος. 28 θρηνώΝΤΑΣ. 89 κουρεύονται,
κερδίζοντας. 1048 ΔΙΑΒΑΝΤΑ, etc.
N
Η
Ν
[823. Compare Boiss. An. iii. 164 ἵνα μὴ βαρβαρωθῶ καὶ αὐτὸς ὥσπερ ἄρα
βεβαρβάρωνταί γε οἱ Λάκωνες καὶ νῦν κέκληνται Τζάκωνες, καὶ πιάσοντα καὶ
ΣΦΙΞΟΝΤΑ και δώσοντα, καὶ ἤμενον [i.o. ἔμενον [20] καὶ ἠρχόντησαν καὶ
καθεζού(ν)τησαν [i.e. ἤρχοντο καὶ ἐκαθέζοντο], καὶ ἔλα δὰ, 'πά, καὶ αἰτιτοίωσέν[?]
τον, καὶ ἄλλ' ἄττα βάρβαρα λέγουσι.]
B. CONTRACTED CONJUGATION.
CONTRACTED VERBS.
824. Sonantic verbs the character of which is a, e, o, lengthen
this vowel before the consonantal tense character (756), and
contract it with any succeeding thematic or terminal vowel.
Contraction therefore takes place only in the present and imper-
fect where a tense character is wanting (756), and lengthening
in all other tensos. Verbs of this class are called contracted
verbs, and their contraction and lengthening are due to prosodic
and grammatical or analogical influences (156–165. App. ii. 14).
825. The rule of longthening is that, before a succeeding
consonant, -u- and -e- change into -7-, and -o- into -w-.
ω
I. Verbs in -άω.
οι =μ.)
826. The rule of contraction is that of 156 %, namely -
a and e or ʼn produce ɑ
η
(that is a+ or a+n=ɑ; a +ei or a+ n =q.)
a and o or a produce w-(that is a + o ora + w = ∞ ; « + ov=w;a+o=
827. The imperfect subjunctive [present optative] has in the sin-
gular either the normal ending -οιμι or, more commonly, the passive
ending -υίην, which in this case is called Attic (cp. 804, C).
207
828.]
CONJUGATION TABLE OF VERBS IN -άω - ACTIVE.
PARTICIPLE
τιμῶν, ῶντος
""
""
ά-ουσα τιμῶσα, ης
do.
828.
Conjugation table of verbs in -áw: tiµáw tiµô 'honour'-(Cp. also p. 214 ff.)
INDICATIVE
SUBJUNCTIVE
IMPERATIVE
INFINITIVE
{
τιμάτω
τιμώ
τιμάω
τιμώ
άξεις
τιμας
ά-ῃς
τιμᾷς
τίμαε
α-ει
тира
ά-ῃ
τιμα
τίμα
α-έστω τιμάτω
τιμάων
τιμά-εν τιμᾶν
ά-ον
Present
ά-ε-τον
τιμάτον
α-η τον τιμᾶτον
ά-ε-τον
τιμᾶτον
α-έ-των
τιμάτων
35
ά-ε-τε τιμάτε
ά-ου-σι” τιμῶσι
ἐτίμα-ον
ά-ο-μεν τιμώμεν
ά-ω-μεν τιμῶμεν
άτη τε τιμάτε
ά-ω-σι τιμωσι
ά-ε-τε τιμάτε
¡or
α-όντων τιμώντων
α-έ-τωσαν οι τιμάτωσαν
ἐτίμων
τιμά-οιμι
τιμῷμι & την
a-es
ἐτίμας
ά-οις
τιμως & -ῴης
ἐτίμα
ἐτιμᾶτον
Imperf.
α-ε
α-ε-τον
α-έ-την
ἐτιμά την
ά-ο-μεν ἐτιμῶμεν
ά-ε-τε ἐτιμᾶτε
α-ον ἐτίμων
Perfect τετίμηκα
άτοι
τιμω
ά-οι-τον τιμῷτον & ψητον
α-οί την τιμῴτην & φήτην
ά-οι-μεν τιμῷμενα -ῴημεν
ά-οι-τε τιμῷτε & -ῴητε
ά-οι-εν τιμῷεν
& -wn
do.
ACTIVE
τετιμηκώς ὦ ᾖς ᾖ
τετίμηκε -έτω
τετιμηκέναι
τετιμηκώς
Pluperfect ἐτετιμήκειν & -κη
τετιμηκὼς εἴην εἴης εἴη
do.
do.
Future τιμήσω σεις σει
τιμήσω -ης -η
τίμησον -άτω
τιμήσειν
τιμήσων
Aorist ετίμησα
τιμήσαιμι -ειας -ειε
τιμῆσαι
τιμήσας
1
208
CONJUGATION TABLE OF VERBS IN -άω
MEDIO-PASS. [828.
Present
τιμά-ομαι
τιμώμαι
τιμάτωμαι τιμῶμαι
τιμάτου
ά-πί-ει)
ά-εται
τιμα
ά-ῃ τιμά
α-έσθω
τιμώ
τιμάσθω
τιμαζόμενος τιμώμενος
τιμαται
ά-ηται τιμαται
ά-εσθον
τιμάσθον
α-έσθων
τιμάσθων
τιμάεσθαι τιμάσθαι
-μενον τιμώμενον
""
"
ά-εσθε
α-έσθων
τιμασθε
τιμάσθων
-μένη τιμωμένη
ά-εσθον τιμάσθοι
""
α-όμεθα τιμώμεθα
ά-εσθε τιμασθε
ά-ονται τιμώνται
ἐτιμα-όμην ἐτιμώμην
ά-ου ἐτιμῶ
ά-ετο ἐτιμᾶτο
Imperf. ά-εσθον ἐτιμάσθον
αέσθην ἐτιμάσθην
α-όμεθα ἐτιμώμεθα
ά-εσθε ἐτιμᾶσθε
ά-οντο ἐτιμῶντο
Perfect τετίμημαι
P.uperf. ἐτετιμήμην
Future τιμήσομαι
Aorist ἐτιμησάμην
Future τιμηθήσομαι
Aorist ετιμήθην
ά-ησθον τιμᾶσθον
α-ώμεθα τιμώμεθα
ά-ησθε τιμάσθε
ά-ωνται τιμῶνται
τιμα-οίμην τιμῴμην
ά-οιο τιμο
ά-οιτο τιμωτο
ά-οισθον τιμῷσθον
α-οίσθην τιμῴσθην
α-οίμεθα τιμώμεθα
ά-οισθε τιμῷσθε
ά-οιντο τιμῷντο
τετιμημένος ὦ ᾖς ᾖ
Οι α-έσθωσαν τιμάσθωσαν
do.
do.
τετίμησο -σθω
τετιμήσθαι
τετιμημένος
τετιμημένος εἴην εἴης εἴη
do.
do.
τιμήσωμαι - η -ηται
τίμησαι -άσθω
τιμήσεσθαι
τιμησόμενος
τιμησαίμην -σαιο -σαιτο
τιμήσασθαι
τιμησάμενος
τιμηθώ
τιμήθητι
τιμηθήσεσθαι
τιμηθησόμενος
τιμηθείην
τιμηθῆναι
τιμηθείς

MEDIO-PASSIVE
PASSIVE | MIDDLE
209
P
833.] CONJUGATION TABLE OF VERBS IN -έω-ACTIVE.
833. Conjugation table of verbs in -έω :-
INDICATIVE
SUBJUNCTIVE
ποιέω ποιῶ do, make. See p. 214 f.
IMPERATIVE
INFINITIVE
PARTICIPLE
ποιέσω
έχεις
Έχει
ποιώ
ποιείς
ποιέω
ποιο
έτης
ποις
ποίε-ε
ποιέτων
TTOLEL
ποιῶν, οἶντος
ποιεί
É-S-701
ποιείτον
33
Present
"}
έ-ο-μεν ποιούμεν
ένα μεν ποιῶμεν
É-D
έ-η-τον
ποιη
ποιητον
33
E-έ-τω
έ-ε-τον
ε-έ-των
Ε-Ε-ΤΕ
ποιείτω
ποιεῖτον
ποιέ εν ποιείν
έ-ον
ποιοῦν, οῦντος
ποιείτων
ποιειτε
έ-ουσα ποιοῦσα, ης
ACTIVE
Ε-Ε-ΤΕ
ποιείτε
έ-ου-σι
บ
ποιουσι
εποίε-ον
E-ES
ἐποίουν
ποιε-οίην
έ-π-τε ποιητε
έ-ω-σι ποιωσι
ποιοιην
εσύ-νταν ποιούντων
ΟΙ
ε-έ-τωσαν ποιείτωσαν
ETTOLELS
ετοίης
ποιοίης
Ε-Ε
ἐποίει
ε-οίη
ποιοιη
Imperf.
-ε-τον
ἐποιεῖτον
ένοιτον
ποιοῖτον
do.
do.
ε-έ--ην
ἐποιεί την
ε-οίτην
έ-ο-μεν
ἐποιοῦμεν
έ-οι-μεν
ποιοί την
ποιοιμεν
Ε-ε-τε
ἐποιεῖτε
έ-οι-τε
ποιοιτε
ε-ον
ἐποίουν
É-OL-EV
ποιοιεν
Perfect πεποίηκα, as, e, etc.
πεποιηκὼς ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, etc.
πεποίηκε, έτω, etc.
πεποιηκέναι
πεποιηκώς, ός, υία
Pluperfect επεποιήκειν, εις, ει, etc. πεποιηκὼς εἴην, εἴης, εἴη, etc.
25
""
""
Future ποιήσω, εις, ει, etc.
ποιήσω, ηs, n, etc.
ποίησον, άτω, etc.
ποιήσειν
ποιήσων, ον, ουσα
Aorist
ἐποίησα, as, e, etc.
ποιήσαιμι ειας είε
ποιησαι
ποιήσας, αν, αση
210
CONJUGATION TABLE OF VERBS IN -έω-MEDIO-PASS. [833.
ποιέομαι
έ-ῃ
έ-εται
έεσθον
ποιοῦμαι
ποιέ-ωμαι
ποιωμαι
ποιη
έ-ῃ
ποιέ-ον
ποιού
ποιη
ποιείται
έ-ηται
ενέσθω
ποιηται
ποιεῖσθον
έ-ησθον ποιήσθον
έ-εσθον
ενέσθων
ποιείσθω
ποιεῖσθον
ποιείσθων
ποιε-όμενος ποιούμενος
ε-όμενον ποιούμενον
ποιέεσθαι ποιείσθαι
Present
""
93
εξόμεθα ποιούμεθα
εσώμεθα ποιώμεθα
έ-εσθε ποιείσθε
ε-ομένη ποιουμένη
έσεσθε ποιείσθε
έ-ησθε ποιῆσθε
ενέσθων
ποιείσθων
έ-ονται ποιούνται
ἐποιε-όμην ἐποιούμην ποιε-οίμην ποιοίμην
έξωνται
ποιώνται
or
ενέσθωσαν ποιείσθωσαν
έτου
ἐποιοῦ
έτοιο
ποιοιο
έ-ετο
ἐποιεῖτο
έτοιτο
ποιοιτο
Imperf.
έτεσθον
ἐποιεῖσθον
έ-οισθον
ποιοῖσθον
do.
ε-έσθην
ἐποιείσθην
ε-οίσθην ποιοίσθην
εξόμεθα
ἐποιούμεθα
ε-οίμεθα ποιοίμεθα
do.
έ-εσθε
ἐποιεῖσθε
έ-οισθε ποιοισθε
έ-οντο
ἐποιοῦντο
έξοιντο ποιοιντο
Perfect πεποίημαι, σαι, ται, etc. πεποιημένος ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, etc.
πεποίησο, σθω, etc.
πεποιῆσθαι
πεποιημένος, ον, η
Pluperf. ἐπεποιήμην, σο, το, etc. πεποιημένος εἴην, εἴης, εἴη, etc.
Future ποίησομαι, η, εται, etc. ποιήσωμαι, η, ηται, etc.
Aorist εποιησάμην, σω, ατο, etc. ποιησαίμην, αι, αιτο, etc.
do.
do.
ποίησαι, άσθω, etc.
ποιήσεσθαι
ποιησόμενος, ον, η
ποιήσασθαι
ποιησάμενος, ον, η
Future ποιηθήσομαι,ῇ, εται, etc. ποιηθῶ, ᾖς, ᾖ, etc.
ποιήθητι, τω, etc.
ποιηθήσεσθαι
ποιηθησόμενος, ον, η
Aorist εποιήθην, ης, η, etc.
ποιηθείην, είης, είη, etc.
ποιηθῆναι
ποιηθείς, έν, είσα

MEDIO-PASSIVE
211
PASSIVE MIDDLE
P 2
837.] CONJUGATION TABLE OF VERBS IN -όω- ACTIVE.
837. Conjugation table of verbs in -ów :
δηλόω δηλῶ declare. See p. 214 1.
INDICATIVE
SUBJUNCTIVE
IMPERATIVE
INFINITIVE
δηλόω
δηλώ
δηλόω
δηλώ
όσεις
δηλοῖς
6-775
δηλοῖς
δήλο-ε
δήλου
δηλό-εν
δηλοῦν
6-ον
όσει
Present
όετον
δηλοί
δηλοῦτον
ό-ῃ δηλοί
ο-έτω
δηλούτω
""
ό-ουσα
όητον
δηλῶτον
- ΕΤΟΥ
δηλοῦτον
}}
δηλόων
PARTICIPLE
δηλῶν, οῦντος
δηλοῦν,
δηλοῦσα, ης
33
""
JJ
ό-ομεν
ό-ετε
δηλούμεν
δηλοῦτε
ό-ωμεν δηλωμεν
ο-έτων
ό-ετε
δηλούτων
δηλοῦτε
ότητε
δηλῶτε
ο-όντων
δηλούντων
ό-ουσι δηλοῦσι
ό-ωσι
δηλώσι
or ο-έτωσαν δηλούτωσαν
ἐδήλο-ον
ἐδήλουν
δηλο-οίην
δηλοίην
O-ES
ἐδήλους
ο-οίης
δηλοίης
Imperf.
0-E
ἐδήλου
ο-οίη
δηλοίη
do.
do.
ό-ετον
ἐδηλοῦτον
ό-οιτον δηλοῖτον
θέτην
ἐδηλούτην
ό-ομεν ἐδηλοῦμεν
όσετε ἐδηλοῦτε
O-OV ἐδήλουν
ο-οίτην δηλοίτην
ό-οιμεν δηλοῖμεν
όποιτε δηλοῖτε
δηλό-οιεν δηλοῖεν
Perfect δεδήλωκα, as, e, etc.
δεδηλωκώς ὦ, s, i, etc.
δεδήλωκε, έτω, etc.
δεδηλωκέναι
δεδηλωκώς, ός, υία
Pluperfect ἐδεδηλώκειν, εις, ει, etc. δεδηλώκοιμι, οις, οι, etc.
do.
do.
Future δηλώσω, εις, ει, etc.
δηλώσω, ης, η, etc.
δήλωσον, άτω, etc.
δηλώσειν
δηλώσων, ον, ουσα
Aorist
ἐδήλωσα, as, e, etc.
ε,
δηλώσαιμι, ειας, ειε, etc.
δηλώσαι
δηλώσας, αν, ασα
ACTIVE
212
CONJUGATION TABLE OF VERBS IN -ÓW
MEDIO-PASS. [837.
213
MEDIO-PASSIVE
PASSIVE MIDDLE
δηλό-ομαι
ότη
δηλοῦμαι
δηλό-ωμαι
δηλῶμαι
δηλοί
6-1
δηλοῖ
δηλό-ου
δηλού
ό-εται
δηλούται
ό-ηται
δηλῶται
ο-έσθω
δηλούσθω
ό-εσθον δηλοῦσθον
ό-ησθον δηλώσθον
ό-εσθον
δηλούσθον
δηλό-εσθαι δηλοῦσθαι
δηλο-όμενος δηλούμενος
ο-όμενον δηλούμενον
Present
ο-έσθων
δηλούσθων
"}
99
ο-όμεθα δηλούμεθα
ό-εσθε δηλοῖσθε
ό-ονται δηλοῦνται
οσώμεθα δηλώμεθα
ό-εσθε
δηλοῦσθε
ο-ομένη δηλουμένη
ό-ησθε δηλώσθε
ο-έσθων
δηλούσθων
ό-ωνται δηλῶνται
or
ο-έσθωσαν δηλούσθωσαν
ἐδηλο-όμην ἐδηλούμην
όπου
δηλο-οίμην δηλοίμην
ἐδηλοῦ
όποιο δηλοίο
ό-ετο
ἐδηλοῦτο
όσοιτο δηλοῖτο
Imperf
ό-εσθον ἐδηλοῦσθον
ο-έσθην ἐδηλούσθην
ο-όμεθα ἐδηλούμεθα
ό-εσθε ἐδηλοῦσθε
όσοισθον δηλοῖσθον
ο-οίσθην δηλοίσθην
ο-οίμεθα δηλοίμεθα
ό-οισθε δηλοῖσθε
do.
do.
ό-οντο ἐδηλοῦντο
όσοιντο δηλοῖντο
Perfect δεδήλωμαι, σαι, ται, etc. δεδηλωμένος ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, etc.
δεδήλωσα, σθω, etc.
δεδηλώσθαι
δεδηλωμένος, ον, η
Pluperf. ἐδεδηλώμην, σο, το, etc. δεδηλωμένος εἴην, εἴης, εἴη, etc.
do.
Future δηλώσομαι, η, εται, etc. δηλώσωμαι, η, ηται, etc.
Aorist ἐδηλωσάμην, ω, ατο, etc. δηλωσαίμην, αιο, αιτο, etc.
δήλωσαι, άσθω, etc.
δηλώσεσθαι
δηλωσόμενος, ον, η
δηλώσασθαι
δηλωσάμενος, ον, η
Future δηλωθήσομαι, η, εται, etc. δηλωθῶ, s, i, etc.
Aorist ἐδηλώθην, ης, η, etc.
δηλώθητι, ήτω, etc.
δηλωθήσεσθαι
δηλωθησόμενος, ον, η
δηλωθείην, είης, είη, etc.
δηλωθῆναι
δηλωθείς, έν, εἶσα
829-837.] REMARKS ON CONTRACTED VERBS.
Verbs in -áw continued from p. 209.
η
829. A few verbs in -άω contract to those vowel sequences
which otherwise would produce a. Such verbs are Cáo 'live,'
Υπεινάω ‘hunger, χράομαι ' use, as :
ζῶ, ZAC, ζή, ζῶμεν, ζῆτε, ζῶσι. Imperf. ἔξων ἔξης, ἔζη, ἐξῶμεν ἐξῆτε, ἔζων.
Inf. ZAN. χράομαι, χρῆ, χρῆται, etc. Imperf. ἐχρώμην, ἐχρῶ, ἐχρῆτο, ote. ;
Inf. χρῆσθαι.
830. This contraction is proper to A only, P-N diction (from
Aristotle onwards) following the normal contraction : πεινᾶς, διψά,
χρᾶσθαι [1]
The only exception is (aw which still preserves its A
conjugation in N: ζω, ζῇς, ζῇ, ζῆτε —but πεινάς διψᾷς, πεινᾷ διψά, etc.,
whereas χρῆσθαι has become extinct.
830. The imperative onding -α(τίμα), which still fully survives in N,
has by analogy attracted a fow vorbs from the barytono class, as : τρέχα
(after πήδα) for and beside τρέχε, φεύγα (for and beside φεύγε), φευγάτε
(φεύγετε), χάσκα (after μάσα) for and besido χάσκε
830°. For other P changes see 850-863.
Verbs in -έω.
831. The rule of contraction is that of 156º, 5, namely-
e produces et,
ΕΠ
ου.
29
832. Otherwise -- is absorbed by any succeeding long
sonant (η, ω, ει, η, οι, ου ; ep. 146-154).
833. The conjugation table of verbs in -éo is given in p. 210 f.
834. Monosyllabic stems contract only in combinations where the
resultant, under normal conditions, would be -ci-, as :
πλέω, πλεῖς, πλεῖ, πλέομεν, πλεῖτε, πλέουσι πλέω, πλέης, πλέῃ, ote. πλέοιμι,
ote. πλεῖν, πλέων, πλέον-ἔπλεον, ἔπλεις, etc.
834. But δέω, in the sense of bind, is contracted throughout:
(δέω) δῶ, (δέεις) δεῖς, (δέομεν) δοῦμεν, etc. (Cp. 844.)
835. In P-B Greek the above class of verbs dispense with all
contraction (Kühner-Blass ii. 138), as: χέεις, χέει (Rev. 16, 1 ἐκχέετε),
πλέειν, δέεται (Great Louvre Pap. ἀξιοῖ καὶ δέεται); πνεέτω πῦρ ib.
2117 [2]. So always in N, as: πλέεις, πλέει (like κλαίεις, κλαίει).
Verbs in -όω.
836. The rule of contraction is that of 156º, 5, namely—
produce ou
ΟΕ 00
δει
on οοι
ση φω
ΟΙ
77
ω
837. The conjugation table of verbs in -ów is given in p. 212 f.
Moeris 366 χρῆται
[1] Phryn. 133 πεινήν, διψήν λέγε, ἀλλὰ μὴ διὰ τοῦ α.
Αττικῶς, χρᾶται Έλληνες. Mitth, ix. 289 (200-150 Β.Ο.), 24 χράσθαι ].
[2] Phryn. 195 ρέει, ζέει, πλέει Ἰακὰ ταῦτα διαιρούμενα· λέγε οὖν ῥεῖ, ζεῖ,
πλεῖ. 196 ἐδέετο, ἐπλέετο ἐρρέετο)· Ἰωνικὰ ταῦτα, ἡ δὲ Αττικὴ συνήθεια συναιρεῖ.
ἐδεῖτο, ἐπλεῖτο, ἐρρεῖτο. 197 προσδεῖσθαι λέγε, ἀλλὰ μὴ προσδέεσθαι διαιρῶν, ὡς
Φαβωρίνος λέγων ἁμαρτάνει.
214
PECULIARITIES OF CONTRACTED VERBS. [838–848.
Peculiarities of Contracted Verbs.
838. The rule that contracted verbs lengthen their character
a or e to n, and o to w before a consonant (824), suffers the
following modifications:
839. 1. Verbs in τράω, -εύω, -ιάω and -σάω preserve -a- (cp. 65. 186.
2694. 892), but lengthen it in the barytone (uncontracted) tenses, as :
θηράω ‘hunt -άσω -ᾶσα -ᾶκα; -αθήσομαι άθην ᾶμαι
-άσα
εστιάω 'troat' -άσω
-ᾶκα; -αθήσομαι -άθην ᾶμαι.
ἀκροάομαι -άσομαι, -ασάμην. But χράομαι 'use, ήσομαι, -ησάμην, ημαι.
839. So too N vorbs in -ράω (now mostly -ρνάω 906), also ρέω, -ρέσω,
-ρεσα, :ς: κεράσω, φορέσω, χωρέσω; further δειλιάω shrink back" : -άσω, -ασα.
840. 2. Some verbs (mostly liquid and sonantic) preserve the short
vowel, but insert in the future perfect and 1st aorist passive a -o- after
the character. These are commonly (cp. 846 ft.) the following :
γελάω laugh' - άσομαι (Ρ -άσω)
τελέω complete' - έσω (or τελῶ 889)
αἰδέομαι
- έσομαι
-σω
ἀνύω ' complete
ἐράω love
-αεμαι
-ασα -ακα; -ασθήσομαι -άςθην
- εσα -εκα; -εκθήσομαι -έςθην
-έσθην
-υσα -ύκα; -υσθήσομαι ύσθην
-ασθήσομαι -άςθην
-εαματι
είμαι
-υομαι
841. So further : *σπάω ‘drag, κλάω break, αρκέω 'suffice, τρέω
tremble, ελκύω ‘draw.
841. So still γελάω, σπάω, (κλάνω), the only representatives of the whole class
surviving in N.
842. 3. The verb κρύω ' plough preservos -o- throughout: ἀρύσω, -υσα,
-όθην.-Extinct in N.
843. 4. The verb aivéw 'praise' preserves -- throughout, save
in the perfect passive:
ἐπ-, παραινέω έσομαι (Ρ -έσω) -εσα - εκα; -εθήσομαι -έθην, but -ημαι.
843. N verbs in -νέω gouorally preserve -e- throughout (c. 839 f.),
as: ἐπαινῶ 'praiso, πονῶ pain, έσω, -εμένος. This peculiarity, however,
is of ancient date, as : Sept. Esai. 19, 10 πονέσω,-διακονέσω 996, 43.
844. 5. The vorb δέω 'bind changes -e- to -- only in the futuro
and aorist active (cp. 834):
δέω 'bind' δήσω ἔδησα δέδεκα; δεθήσομαι ἐδέθην δεδεμένος.
845. In TN this vorb has the form δένω and preserves -- throughout :
δέσω, ἔδεσα, δεμένος.
846. 6. A few verbs (mostly liquid and sonantic), despite their
diphthongal and therefore long character (840) insert & in the perfect
and aorist passive:
ο κελεύω ' οrder
Εσείω ' shako
Σκλείω ‘shut
Γκρούω ' strike
ἐκελεύσθην
ἐσείςθην
εκλείσθην
ἐκρούςθην
846. So further, δράω ' do, Αχρίω smear.
κεκέλευομαι
σέσεις μαι
κέκλει(σ)μαι
κεκρου (σ)μένος

847. So too in N, excopting κελεύω and δράω, which have become extinet.
848. 7. The following seven verbs (all sonantic or liquid)
exhibit some individual peculiarities:
215
848-850b.]
CONTRACTED CONJUGATION IN P-N.
2. Ακαίω
3. κλαίω
Οι πάω
Οι κλάω
4. πλέω ' swim
}'burn'
καυθήσομαι
1. *ἀκούω 4 hour
ἀκούσομαι (Ρ -σω), ήκου-σα
ἀκου-ς-θήσομαι ἠκού-ε-θην
καύσω
ἀκ-ήκο-α (735) } 9968.
ήκου-ε-μαι
κέκαυκα
κέ-καυ-μαι
έκαυσα
ἐκαύθην
996123.
weep
κλαύ-σομαι
ἔκλαυσα
κέκλανμαι
}
996132 -
πλεύσουμαι
ἔπλευσα
πλευσοῦμαι
ἐπλεύ-ε-θην
5. *πνέω blow
πνεύσομαι
έπνευσα
6, °véo ‘swim’
>
νεύ-σομαι
ἔνευσα
7. χέω 'pour
χέω (Ρ-Ν χύσω)
(Ρχύω, P-1 χύννω) χυ-θήσομαι
πέπλευκα
πέπλευς και 996217.
πέπνευκα 996219-
νένευ-κα 996170·
ἒχεια (P-N ἔχυσα) κέχυκα
ἐχύθην
κεχυμαι 996312
•
CONTRACTED CONJUGATION IN P-N.
849. In dealing with the P history of contracted verbs, we have
to distinguish between contracted tenses and uncontracted or barytone
tenses (824). The latter still fully survive in N and also preserve their
ancient form (-ήσω, -ησα; -ώσω ; -ωσα; -ημένος -ωμένος), so that they
need no further comment here, as:
τιμήσω, ἐτίμησα, τε]τιμημένος—πατήσω, ἐπάτησα, πε]πατημένος—στεφανώσω,
ἐστεφάνωσα, ἐστεφανωμένος.
850. On the other hand, the two contracted tenses, the present and im-
perfect (824), as well as their cognate future subjunctive passivo (-0,
-θῆς, etc.) have undergone considerable modifications and so require a
special examination. When critically sifted, these contracted forms show
a process of assimilation and equalization analogous to that observed in
the indicative and primary subjunctive of barytone verbs (773-9). Just
as there the majority of cases have assimilated the few deviating forms,
so here in the three classes of contraction (-áw, -éw, -ów) the more
numerous and more familiar cases among the resulting sonants have
attracted and assimilated the rest. This process is manifested here in
two distinct but parallel forms, one in the resultants w ou, and another
in the resultants ει η οι. In either case the question at issue was which
of the competing resultants was more familiar with the masses.
the case of a and ov, this was undoubtedly ou, since it occurred in the
two classes of -éw and -ów, which comprised the great majority of con-
tracted verbs.
In
(Cp. πατοῦμεν, πατοῦσι”; πατοῦμαι, πατούμεθα, πατοῦνται; δηλοῦμεν, δηλοῦτε,
δηλοῦσι ; δηλοῦμαι, δηλοῦται, δηλούμεθα, δηλοῦσθε, δηλοῦνται; ἐπάτουν, ἐπατοῦμεν,
ἐπάτουν; ἐπατούμην, ἐπατοῦντο; ἐδήλουν, ἐδηλοῦμεν, ἐδηλοῦτε, ἐδήλουν; ἐδηλού-
μην, ἐδηλοῦτο, ἐδηλούμεθα, ἐδηλοῦσθε, ἐδηλοῦντο; πατοῦντες, δηλοῦντες, πατού-
μενος, δηλούμενος, δηλοῦν, δηλοῦσθαι, πατοῦσα, δηλοῦσα, etc.)
850. Accordingly, popular speech substituted the sonant -ou- for -w-,
that is -ῶμεν for -οῦμεν, «ὦσι” for -ουσι", -ῶμαι for -οῦμαι, -ώμεθα for -ούμεθα,
-ὢνται for -οῦνται, and the more easily as the deviation was limited only to
the initial sonants -w- and -ov- (ep. 778), and thus obtained the desired
uniformity and simplicity. The earliest traces of this simplification make
their appearance in II times, but complete uniformity was apparently
established during T, and thence subsequently passed into N speech.
PCauer Del. 47, 5 δαπανούμενα. 180, 10 τιμοῦντες.
2
180, 10 τιμοῦντες. Sept. Εx. 1, 16 ὅταν
μαιοῦσθε τὰς Εβραίας καὶ ὦσι πρὸς τῷ τίκτειν. NT Matt. 15, 23 ἠρώτουν. Rev.
2, 17 τῷ νικοῦντι. 25, 2 (C) νικοῦντας. John 11, 38 ἐμβριμούμενος. Mark 14, 5 ενεβρι-
μοῦντο. Gal. 4, 17 ἵνα αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε. 1 Cor. 4, 6 ἵνα μὴ φυσιοῦσθε. Martyr. Petri
ot Pauli 43 πλακοῦμαι (πλανᾶσαι ib.). Acta Tho. 37, 8 ἠγάπουν. Acta Andr. 127, 14
ἐναρκουν. Martyr. Andr. 61, 28 (CH) ἐτόλμουν. Acta Μatt. 170 ἐπεβύουν. Test.
ΧΙΙ 17 ο ἐὰν ευοδούται.
XII
Acta Xanth. 75, 3 ὥρμουν ἐπὶ τὴν Βαβυλωνίαν
CWessely N. Zaub. (III-IV) 373 & JMoschos 3017 ο κοιμοῦ. Proc. ii. 101, 1

216
P-N HISTORY OF CONTRACTED VERBS.
[850b-853.
(also 327, 24 ; 543, 7) éтóλμovv. Mart. Potri et Pauli 120, 13 åɣaπoûVTES (E). Callin.
133, 2 προσκολλοῦ. 127, 4 ὠδύνουν. Leont. Neap. V. J. 23, 8 (Α) δαπανοῦνται.
93, 14 (AC) δαπανούμενα. 77, 2 (Α) νικοῦμαι. 48, 2 (CF) ἐπείνουν. 45, 23 πλανούμεθα.
80, 11 (EC) ovvavтoûσav. Sym. 1672 ▲ (Vind.) kаtavтovσns. ib. D (Vind.) ẻкπŋ-
doûoav. Vita Andr. Sal. 8, 66 (also 9, 85; 16, 124) kwpovv. Mal, 39, 18 & 54, 11
ἐτίμουν. 247, 8 ἐμελέτουν. 207, 7 ἠπατοῦντο. 374, 11 ἵνα μηδείς μοι ἐναντιούται.
id. ἠρώτουν, νικοῦνται-ἀγαπούντων, τιμοῦσι. Αpoc. Mar. 121, 24 ἐβύουν; 119, 33
ékpeμvoûvтo. (Cp. also koμoû Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. 96 | ± IVth A.D.], 395, ubi kovµoû.)
850°. The following observation is also instructivo: Theodos. 1037, 10
Εἰρήναιος δὲ ὁ περὶ ᾿Αττικῆς συνηθείας γράψας φησὶ τοὺς ᾿Αττικοὺς τὰ τρία
πρόσωπα τῆς τρίτης συζυγίας διὰ τοῦ Ω λέγειν: ἐὰν χρυσῶται, ἐὰν γυψῶται,
¿àv σTepavŵTai. For this moans that at the time of Irenaeus (IInd A.D.) the 2nd
person subjunctive in -ŵrai (ẻàv Xpvoŵтai) had already become unfamiliar
even to scribes, having long been assimilated to -oûra of the indicative.
851. The other parallel process which told on the P-N history of con-
tracted verbs (850), boars on verbs in -éw and verbs in -ów. Here we find
that in all cases where they contracted to homophonous resultants (eo oe
oo to ov, and ee en eei oei on to i [«i, n, oi]), the two classes are rogularly
distinguished from each other in the script. On the other hand, in those
cases whore the resultants of contraction are heterophonous the subcurrent
process cannot well be concealed from the eye, and so we meet with odd
forms like the following:
NT Matt. 13, 32 kатаσкηνоîν (which is a scholastic spelling for kатаσkη-
νεῖν); Heb. 7, 5 ἀποδεκατοῖν (-τεῖν); Damasc. ii. 320 Β στεφανεῖν ; Pallad.
1073 c karnεivis (-ies). [Such instances as I Cor. 4, 6 iva quoioûode; Gal.
4, 17 ἵνα ζηλοῦτε, etc. (850 *) are due to the presence of ou in φιλοῦμεν,
δηλοῦμεν, φιλούμεθα, δηλούμεθα, φιλοῦσι, δηλοῦσι, φιλοῦνται, δηλοῦνται, etc.
778-9.]
851º. This means then that, in their contracted forms, verbs in -ów, as
the less numerous, had long been identified with verbs in éw, as the
more numerous and more familiar of the classes, but that the process of
assimilation, though already complete, had all along been systematically
suppressed by scholastic practice or historical orthography (25").
852. As a matter of course, before they had been completely
assimilated to each other, contracted verbs passed through a stage of
cross influence. It is this intermediate stage that accounts for the
shifting of such A-II verbs, as:
οιδέω & οιδάω, ξυρέω & ξυράω, φληναφέω & φληναφάω, βυφέω & ροφάω, σκηνέω
& σκηνύω, κυκλέω & κυκλύω, γανάω & γανόω, ριγύω & ριγάω (?996.0), κωφάω
& κωλέω δε πωφύω, ἐρέω δ ἐράω (9967). For N seo 854.
853. When, in their contracted forms, verbs in -ów had been assimilated
to those in -éw, there arose a striking anomaly and contrast of the two
classes, seeing that, in their barytone tonses, vorbs in -ew showed the regular
ondings -How, -нow, -нµévos, etc., while vorbs in -ów retained their ancient
ondings wow, wow, -wuevos, otc. Here then a reaction set in towards
-ώσω, -ωμένος,
dissociating and discriminating the two classes, and tho direction of the
process was suggested by the analogy of verbs in -úv(v)w (775. 1090) with
which verbs in -ów were associated through a common future subjunctive
and above all through the perfect participle passivo (-wow, -œ0ŵ, -wménoc):
Just as στρώσω, ζώσω, χώσω, -ωθῶ -WOMENOC led to a pr. σTρÓNN∞, etc.
30 πυρώσω, θυμώ ώ, δρκώσω,
πυρώνω, etc.
φανερώνω, etc.
Acta Tho. 14, 34 (P) τελειώνω ;
Loout. Noup. V. J. 6, 9 (BEL)
φανερώσω, διπλώσω,
17
71
>>
CLoomans 115 [II-III+], 28 dakúvovтa.
55, 29 poptáveiv. "Apophth, 276 n (úvovew.
φορτώνειν.
ζώνουσιν.
στενώνων. 23, 18 φορτώνει. Theoph. 150, 21 κομβώνεις. 442, 23 τυφλώνων.
Gloss. Laod, 141 agióra. Syni. Mag. 639, 8 ¿λev@cpóra. Porph. Adm, 76 & 79
αξιόνω.
217
853-855.1
P-N HISTORY OF CONTRACTED VERBS.
σκαλώνω. 208, 12 φιβλώνουσι. (Cp. Cer. 463, η καμωθέντων from καμωμένος.)
Alchom. 21, 22 συμφανώνεται, λειώνεται. 315, 13 περιπήλωνε. 328, 4 & το χρύσωνε
ib. 8 ὅταν χρυσώνῃς. 326, 28 ἀνακάτωνέ το, etc. etc. FTrinch. 34 (A.D. 1304)
ἀφιερόννοντα, ἀφιερρύνομεν. 60, 99, 104, etc, ἀφιερώννοντα. 145 κυκλώνει. 394
(Λ.D. 1232) κεντρώννομεν, etc. (ep. G Hatzidakis 408) and ever since in N passim.
[853. In his Einleitung (p. 395 & 408) GHatzidakis maintains that the
N vorbs in -ώνω arise from the aorist onding -ωσα after the pattern ἔδωσα
ζώνω, ἔστρωσα στρώνω, ἔδωσα δώνω [this however comes from dono, 996, 51],
ἔσωσα σώνω, ete. But I for one fail to see how the aorist -ωσα could so surely lond
to a present in -wvw, since no previous stage of the language supplies any ana-
logue. An aorist -woa (or rathor a future in -wow-w”0ŵ, and a participlo passivo
in -ω" μένος) can point to a prosent in -ώθω, -όσσω (-ύττω), -ύζω, etc., but not to
ono in -ώνω. Moreovor, as Hatzidakis has omitted to explain tho gonesis of his
vory promises, that is how ἔξωσα, ἔστρωσα, ἔδωσα, ἔσωσα, etc., have produced
ζώνω, στρώνω, etc., his line of argument rosolves itself to a petitio principii.]
[853". Still more fooble appears to me the theory of the same scholar that N
vorbs in -άω and -fw procced sololy from tho aorist ending -ησα. That this
tonso, or rather the futuro (-ήσω) has contributod to strengthen the position of
the contracted present is admissible; but to affirm that it has called forth tho
whole contracted system is a forcod theory. For first other aorist endings,
beside -ησα, admit of a contracted presont in -άω or -έω, us : ἐκοπίασα κοπιῶ
(later κοπιάζω), ἐδειλίασα δειλιῶ, ἀνατρίχιασα ἀνατριχιῶ, ἐκάλεσα καλῶ, ἐφόρεσα
φορῶ, ἐπόνεσα πονῶ, ἐγέλασα γελῶ, ἐπλάνεσα πλανῶ, ἐχώρεσα χωρῶ, ἐμπόρεσα
μπορῶ, ἐπείνασα πεινῶ, ἐδίψασα διψῶ, ἐκέρασα περνῶ, ἐπέρασα περιῶ, ἐχάλασα
χαλ(ν)ῶ, ἐτράβηξα τραβῶ, ἐχαιρέτηξα (also -ησα) χαιρετῶ, ἐζήτηξα (-ησα) ζητῶ,
ἐπερπάτηξα(-ησα) περπατῶ, ἐβάσταξα βαστῶ, ἐβούτηξα βουτῶ, ἐβρόντηξα (-ησα)
βροντῶ, ἐπήδηξα (-ησα) πηδῶ, etc., etc. Then it is rather abnormal that one
uniform aorist ending -noa should not suggest one uniform present either in
-άω or in -έω, but that two difforont forms should havo como iuto oxistonco. It is
also strange that N verbs in -έω, supposing that tloy aro now formations, should
havo their oxact and almost invariablo parallel in anciont Grook.-That
N contract vorbs in -áw and -éw aro direct survivals, with mutual influence
and intorchange, of the corresponding ancient forms, is too munifust to bo
insisted upon.]
854. After verbal contraction had been limited to the two classes of
-άω und -έω (851 ff.) a struggle arogo botween them, and is still going on
in N, with a stoady ascendency of those in -dw, which is favourod
particularly by northern N speech (855). As a mattor of fact, this class
owing to the presence in it of tho strongest sonant a, us: γελᾷς,
γελᾷ, γελᾶτε; κοιμᾶσαι, κοιμᾶται, κοιμᾶσθε (146) has attracted, especially in
rocent times, numorous vorbs from tho éw-class, so that the lattor, though
still largely represented, particularly in southern speech, is now losing
ground before its formidablo rival - άω. Compare:
μετρῶ
ζητώ
Λ - άω, Ν -έω
Λ -έομαι, Ν -άομαι: (ulso -άω) :
ᾶσαι ᾶται | μαδῶ
Eûs eî
A -kw, N -áw :
ᾷς ᾷ ἀκολουθῶ
ᾶς φοβοῦμαι
"}
""
βουληθώ
""
""
λυπούμαι
""
27
κολλῶ εἰς εί
μισω
""
ὠφελῶ
""
>"
ἐνθυμοῦμαι
""
μασῶ εἰς εί
πολεμῶ
77
πλη-, κλερονομῶ
», παραπονούμαι
11
προσκυνῶ
""
77
τυραννῶ
71
""
ἀπο-, ἀπολογοῦ
ψοφώ
ἐπαινῶ
""
:>
μαι
κατοικῶ
17
βλογῶ (εὐλογῶ)
"7
""
ἀδικῶ
77
11
πεθυμῶ (ἐπιθυμῶ)
ἀρνοῦμαι
διακονοῦμαι
11
17
>1
855. The proportion of A-P contracted verbs preserved in N,
roughly speaking, is :
Of A-P -ów
survives in -úvw, not counting many modern formations.
-άω ν
-έω το
>>
ΤΟ
17
-άω,
""
">
-ew, but oven this small fraction has hoon mostly
changed to -áw in northern N spooch (854).
218
P-N HISTORY OF CONTRACTED VERBS.
[856-859.
3 4
856. The rest (-6w about ; -άω ; -έω 1) have partly become
extinct, and partly changed to barytones, particularly to such in -(w
(-άζω, -ίζω ; 868).
857. With the change of contracted verbs in -ów to barytones in -ώνω (853),
the ending -ov naturally disappeared from the active voice and left the field
to the other surviving endings. Among them only -e, -a, and -eɩ were now
admissible in the 2nd person imperative and in the 3rd person singular of
past tenses active (λέγε, τίμα, πάτειἔλεγε, ἐτίμα, ἐπάτει). Now of these
endings, -e was by far the commonest and most familiar, and -a the strongest
(146), so that neither could be dispensed with. On the other hand, as -ει ( = ι)
was tho weakest and uncommonest suffix in the places referred to,
it gradually came to be felt odd and out of place, notably when other
verbs of similar (contracted) conjugation wero supplied with a rogular -←.
A similarity of conjugation could not but call for a uniform treatment in
the supply of torminal -e. Hence-
Η κυλίω
κυλείς (702) κυλεί-κύλιε
ἐκύλια
i.Θ. - λγε like λέγε, ἔλεγε
λαλῶ
λαλείς
λαλεῖλάλειΕ
ἐλάλει Ε
κλείω
κλείς
κλεί-κλείε
Έκλεισ
1.Θ. -λγε
πνιγε, ἔπνιγε
καλῶ
καλείς
κάλει κάλει
ἐκάλει Ε
χρίω
χρεις
χρει-χρισ
ἔχριε
i.e. -pýe,,
στέργε ἔστερε
φορώ
φορείς
φόρει φόρει
ἐφόρει Ε
πτύω
πτεις
πτειπτύε
ἔπτυσ
1.θ. -σχε
exe εἶχε
κρατῶ
κρατεῖς
κράτει –κράτειε
ἐκράτεια
ξύω
ξεις
ξείξει
ἔξνε
i.e. -σχε
βρέχει έβρεχα
μασῶ
μασεις
μασείμάσειΕ
ἐμάσεις
""
μίστε ἔμιστε
ζω
ζης
Sn-Sne
ἔζηΕ
So further λύω-φιλῶ, ἀρτύω-πατῶ, μεθύω-ἀθῶ, etc.
858 In the same way κυλιέσαι κυλιέται χριέται ξύεται ἀρτύεται, πουλειέται,
etc., havo led to φιλειέσαι φιλειέται βαρειέται μασειέται πατειέται, etc.
i. e. φιλιέσαι φιλιέται βαριέται μασιέται πατιέται.
Cp. Prodr. 3, 115 πουλειέται. Alex. Comm. 468 ὠφελειέσαι. Chron. Mor.
1177 ἀγωνιέσαι. IStaph. 273 φόρειε. Pul. 263 & 579 ἐκράτειεν. NSophianos
60 κρατούμαι, κρατιέται, κρατιέται, κρατούμεθα, κρατειέςθε, κρατοῦνται), etc.
859. That the development of the above semi-sonant ie is a purely
phonopathic result (155, α), furthered by the corresponding onding
of guttural vorbs (-e, -e, -e), is manifest. It remains only to add
that the terminal e or -ýe thus developed was soon transferred to all other
persons, and thus led to an oqualization of the two formerly different
classos of verbs in -iw and -éw. Though not yet universal, this phenomenon
is widespread and occurs even in South Italian Grock.
κυλίον
κυλίω
φιλώ
κυλείς κυλεί
φιλείς φιλεί
κυλιούμεν
φιλοῦμεν
κυλεῖτε
φιλεῖτε
φιλοῦν
φιλειώ
29
φιλειοῦμεν
φιλειοῦν
ἐκύλιου
ἐκύλιες ἐκύλιε
ἐκυλιούσαμε ἐκυλεῖτε
ἐκυλιοῦσαν
ἐφίλου
ἐφίλεις ἐφίλειε
ἐφιλούσαμε ἐφιλεῖτε
ἐφίλειου
""
""
ἐφιλειούσαμε” (ἐφιλειούσατε) ἐφιλειοῦσαν
Imperativo κύλιε φίλειε, κυλεῖτε φιλεῖτε.
κυλιούμαι
κυλιέσαι
φιλοῦμαι φιλειέσαι
κυλιέται
φιλειέται
κυλιού μεστα
κυλιέστε
κυλιούνται
φιλούμε στα
φιλοῦνται
φιλειοῦμαι
φιλειούμαστα
(φιλειούσαστε)
ἐκυλιούμουν ἐκυλιούσουν
φιλειοῦνται
ἐκυλι του
ἐφιλούμουν ἐφιλούσουν
ἐφιλειέτον
ἐκυλιοῦνταν
ἐφιλοῦνταν
· ἐφιλειούμουν ἐφιλειούσουν ἐφιλειοῦντον) ἐφιλειούμεστα (ἐφιλειούσαστε) ἐφιλειοῦνταν
Imporativo : κυλιού, φιλοῦ φιλειοῦ κυλιέστε, φιλειέστε.
ἐκυλιού μεστα
ἐφιλούμε στα
ἐκυλιέστε
ἐφιλειέστε
219
859b-862.] P-N HISTORY OF CONTRACTED VERBS.
859. In the Nendings -ούμουν -ούσουν of the rst and and person sin-
gular of the imperfect medio-passive, the ultima -μουν, -σουν is apparently
due to the influence of the accented preceding -oú- (assimilation 801").
59. Mark hore by the way, that the above association of verbs in -(λ)ίω
with vorbs in -(A)w has led to their total equalization, though chiefly in
northern N speech : just as φιλεῖς φίλειε φιλειοῦν φιλῶ, so κυλεῖς κύλιε κυλοῦν
καλῶ (κυλάω), ἀπολεῖς ἀπολύεις) ἀπόλυε ἀπολυοῦν ἀπολάω) απολώ, and φτεῖς
(πτύεις) φτύέ φτοῦν (φτάω) φτῶ. (Cp. 148 & 702).
860. Somewhat difforont is the process of the development of intorgonantic
(γ) in vorbs ending in -έω and -ούω (as : πλέω, κλαίω, φταίνω, παλαίνω
λούνω, κρούνω, ἀκούω, 155 b) where, moreover, the reduction of ἔπλε-πλές, ἔκλαιε-
κλαῖς, ἔλουε-λοῦς, etc., to *έπλε-*πλε, *έκλε (* έκλαι) -*κλε (*πλαι), *έλου. *λου,
was inadmissible. Honce ἔπλεγε-πλέγε, ἔκλαιγε-κλαῖγε, ἔλουγε-λοῦγε, etc. (863.)
861. Once established in all sonantic verbs-not to speak of guttural
stoms where it had always been at home (865, 2)—the suffix -'e (i. e. -ειε) -γε
(859) soon affected also the numorous class of verbs onding in -vo (-αύω,
-εύω, -ίβω) and changed them to -νγο (-αύγω, -εύγω, -ίβγω), on the
pattern : ἔπαυχε: παις: παύλεις: παύει-παύτω. This phenomonon, which is
now rather common in southern N, can be traced back to the eighth
contury (if not earlier, Mart. Pauli 115, 7 πιστεύγοντας P). It also appears
in Bova of South Italy in the form -eguo, though Otrantine Greek reduces
it to -έω, as : πιστέω for πιστεύω [1]
ἔπαυγε
ἔγευγε
παύγε παύγεις
παύγει
γεύγε
γεύγεις
γεύγει
παύτω
γεύρω
etc.
otc.
ἐσαλευγε σάλευγε σαλεύγεις
ἐβασίλευγε βασίλευγε βασιλεύγεις βασιλεύγει βασιλεύσω etc.
σαλεύγει
σαλεύρω otc.
ἐπαίδευγε παίδευγε παιδεύγεις
παιδεύγει
παιδεύτω otc.
ἐγύρευγε
γύρευγε
γυρεύγεις
γυρεύγει
γυρεύγω otc.
ἔτριβγε
τρίβγε
τρίβγεις
τρίβγει
τρίβω
etc.
ἔθλιβγε
θλίβγε
θλίβγεις
θλίβγει
θλίβω
otc.
ἔκρυβγε
κρύβγε
κρύβγεις
κρύβγει
κρύβω
etc.
CGL 124, 67-9 anagorougo recito, anagorougis recitas, anagorougi recitat.
140, 26-8 cyclougo circito, cyclongis circitus, cyclougi circitat. cludougo puto,
cladougis putus, cludougi putat. 407, 76 iubeo colougo, iubos colouris.
861 b. So further (according to 877) verbs in -πτω, treated in 875.
862. With the change of contracted imperfects like ἐ]πάτει to ἐπάτειε
(859), tho ending - gainod such absoluto aseondoney and universal popu-
larity, that any other incomplote suffix-and thoro was only -a in ἐ]τίμα
still loft-now appearod odd and incomplete. Hence, popular speech now
began to affix this universal cuding -e also to contracted vorbs in -άw, and
thus completed the system of absolute uniformity. This last stage of
equalization, however, cannot be traced further back than M (X), and
is still limited chiefly to the northern group of N dialects [2].
[1] To arguo with Hatzidakis (125) that the one vorh φεύγω served horo
as model and basis for the wholesale chango, would be assuming too much. Nor
would be more probablo tho assumption of a thomatic -cúe (reckoning the
ending - as a crystallizod charactor of the stom), and the consequent forma-
tion of -εύγω απ tho puttorn ἐχόρευει Ε ἐχόρευ- χόρευε χορεύγεις
χορεύγει, etc., for the languago has at all times fult and treated final et as the
κατ' ἐξοχὴν singular endlingit has ovon transforrod it to vorbs in -άω (862
vicáci)-and could nover mistako it for a thematic character, so as to superadd
to it a second onding.
[4] For the explanation of this phonomonon G Hatzidakis (126 1.) starts from the
present indicativo 3rd person singular and writes ἀγαπᾷει ἀγαπᾷεις αγαπάω.
But apart from the other advantages offered by our interprotation (857-862),
220
CONSONANTAL CONJUGATION-
862-865.
MUTE VERBS.
ἐνίκα-ε
νίκα-ε
νικάει
νικάω, etc.
ἐπείνα-ε
πείνα-ε
πεινάει
πεινάω
ἐφύσα-ε
φύσα-ε
φυσάει
φυσάω
""
ἐζήτα-ε
ζήτα-ε
ζητάει
ζητάω
863. The appearance of such novel uncontracted verbs in -άω inovitably
led to the development of a -- or -γ- between the two sonants (155 5. 860),
and thus called forth a great number of new consonantal verbs in -άγω,
current chiefly in northern N speech. A further consequence of this
process was that verbs in -άγω (whether ancient or recent) and -άω are
now often used side by side : φυλάγω and φυλάω, ϋ] πάγω and ὑ]πάω, φάγω
and φάω-and, in association with the still surviving forms λού(γ)ω
πλέ(γ)ω and the like (152) : πάεις (πᾷς) for ϋ]πάγεις, τρώεις (τρῷς) for τρώγεις
τρώουν Pul. 201, also τρῶν), φάης (φας) for φάγῃς, ἔφας for ἔφα(γ)ες (Pul.
14, 323), φυλάεις φυλᾷς for φυλάγεις, καίεις καῖς, καίει και (ABC 10, 8), λέεις
(λές) for λέγεις [1], λέω & λῶ for λέγω (155 °), ἔω for ἔχω, με for ἄωμεν i.Θ.
ἄγωμεν (1559).-On a similar principle (ep. 187 ) Μ Ν θέλω, θέλεις & θές
θέλει & θέ, θέλομεν & θέμε”, θέλετε & θέτε, θέλουν & θένα (996, 61).
-
II. CONSONANTAL VERBS.
864. Consonantal verbs are either mute or liquid, according
as their character is a mute or liquid consonant. In either case,
they often show two parallel stems, one amplified or lengthened
for the present and imperfect (756), and one shortened for the
other tenses (891)—
λείπω leavestem λίπ
τήκω ‘melt
stem Tăκ
σήπω 'make putrid
σαπ
φεύγω ' fee
φύγ
φαίνω 'show
φαν
τίκτω ‘bear
TEK
19
βαλλω ‘throw
βαλ
σπείρω 'sow
92 σπερ.
864). This naturally holds good for N also. For the origin of the
phenomenon compare 32d ff.
A. MUTE VERBS.
865. According to their character, mute verbs can be :
,
r. Labial, as : βλέπω ‘see, τρίβω ‘rub, γράφω write;
So too in N, as : λείπω ' am absent, βλέπω ‘seo, λάμπω ' shino, γράφω
write, στίψω squeeze, θρέφω ' nourish, στρίβω & φω turn, κόβω cut,
'
'
νίβω ‘wash, τρίβω ‘rub, σκύβω ' stoop, κρύβω ‘hide, etc.—where moro-
over aro classed vorbs in -aúw and -eúw (703. 861).
¿
>
2. Gultural, as : “πλέκω ' plait, *ψέγω blame, βρέχω' wet ;
So too in N, as: βήχω cough, τρέχω run, ἔχω ‘havo, ἀνοίγω open,
πνίγω ' suffocale, σμίγω ' join, φέγγω ' shine.
Ο
>
3. Dental, as : *ψεύδω ' decuive, πείθω' persuade, ἀνύτω' accom-
plish ' ; So too in N, though considerably reduced in number, as : πέφτω
fall, ράφτω ' sow, ῥίχτω (996.97) ‘throw, θέτω 'put, ἀλέθω ' grindl, κλώθω
spin, πλάθω form, γνώθω understand, ἀναγνώθω ‘read, νοιώθω cum-
prohond,' ote.
>
•
which holds good for the whole system, it can hardly be admitted that the form
ἀγαπᾷ (γελᾷ, φυσᾷ, τιμᾷ, accented (circumfected) as it is, should appear so
faint and vaguo as to call for the superaddition of a now ending.
[4] Puchon. Mon. 98, 1352 13 (IMigno) Κρήτες ἵντα θὲς ἀντὶ τοῦ τί θέλεις, καὶ
τί λές ἕτεροι ἀντὶ τοῦ τί λέγεις, ἅπερ κατὰ ἀφαίρεσιν ἢ ἀποκοπήν τε καὶ συγκοπὴν
τῶν συλλαβῶν οὕτω φέρεται.
221
866-870]. CONSONANTAL CONJUGATION-VERBS IN-ζω.
866. Many mute verbs, however, show a changed, mostly
amplified, present stem. Thus-
867. I. Verbs in ζω—which are very numerous-point to
a dental character, as : φράζω 'say, *ἐλπίζω ‘hope, νομίζω “be-
lieve, παίζω play, etc.
>
J
868. This last class of verbs is abundantly represented in N. The
specimens are partly direct survivals, as : ἀγοράζω ‘buy, σκεπάζω
cover, πλαγιάζω lie down, δανείζω lend, σκορπίζω scatter, σχίζω
tear, καπνίζω smoke, καθίζω sit, χωρίζω separate, κτίζω build,
γογγύζω grumble, γνωρίζω know, στολίζω ‘dress, θερίζω mow' etc.
etc.); partly P-N formations, as : °ἑλκύζω draw, γεμίζω ‘Gill, ὁμοιάζω
resemble, ζωγραφίζω 'paint,' ]ψωνίζω ' buy,' ναναρίζω ' lull, ὁρίζω ' rule
over, σπουδάζω Chasten, study, βραδυάζει it gets late or dark,
θυμιάζω incense, κοπιάζω ‘toil, work, λογιάζω ' deem, συννεφιάζει
it gets cloudy, χρειάζομαι ‘need, γυρίζω ‘turn, ἀρχίζω begin,
πασχίζω ' endeavour, etc. etc. In either case, they substantially agree
'
both in their meaning and usage. At the same time, P-N formations
of this class have assumed a distinctly intensive, iterative, or factitive
(causative) force (1460), and so have appropriated the office of ancient
inceptives or inchoatives in -σκω (1098). Cp. P-B:
>
C
ἀκροάομαι
-άζομαι
ισόω
-άζω
ὀρθιάω
-άζω
ἀνδρόομαι
-ίζομαι
καινόω
-ίζω
ὁρμέω
-ίζω
ἀνεμάω
αίζω
καρπόω(-εύω)-ίζω
ὀχθέω
-ίζω
ἀνθέω
-ίζω
καυματόω -ίζω
πειράω
-άζω
ἀρτύω
-ίζω
κεντρύω
-ίζω
πλουτέω
-ίζω
αὐγέω
-άζω
κνάω κνύω
-ύζω
σέβομαι
-άζομαι
βλύω
-ύζω
κοιμάω
-ίζω
σιγάω
-άζω
βροντάω
-άζω!!!
κομπέω
-άζω
σιτέω
-ίζω
βύω
-ύζω
κοπιάω
τίζω
σπαργανόω-ίζω
γέμω
-ίζω
κυματάω
-ίζω
στέγω -άζω
γενειάω
-άζω(=-άσκω) κύπτω
-άζω
στένω - ζω
δαιμονάω
-ίζω
μοχθέω
-ίζω
τεχνάομαι -άζομαι
δειπνέω
-ίζω
ξενύω
-ίζω
φλύω -ύζω
ἑλκύω
-ύζω
ξυρέω
είζω
χλοάω
-άζω
ἐπιχειρέω
-ίζομαι
οἰκέω
-ίζω φωνέω -άζω
έρπω
Εύζω
εὐνάω
-άζω
ὁμοιόω
ὁπλέω
-άζω
χνοάω τάζω
-ίζω
ὠθέω -ίζω.
-άζω
ὀργιάω -άζω
θυμιάω
869. This modo of forming inceptive, itorative, or intensivo verbs, has
become so popular sinco M, that almost overy verb now can annex the
incoptivo onding -ζω, as : ἀγαπῶ -ίζω, μισῶ -ίζω, δακρύω -ύζω, διψῶ -άζω, πεινῶ
-άζω, ἀνατριχιῶ -άζω, θέλω -ίζω, δύνομαι -άζομαι, βοῶ -ίζω οι -ύζω, βόσκω -ίζω,
ἀκονῶ -ίζω, κεντῶ -ίζω, τυραννῶ -ίζω, κρατῶ -ίζω, ἀστοχῶ -ίζω, πάσχω (-σκω) -ίζω,
πυνῶ -έξω, φορῶ -έξω, δω(ν)φῶ -ίζω, πεθυμῶ ἐπιθ-755) -ίζω, φορῶ -έξω ' put on,
and a host of others.
869. For another similar N suffix -vw see 853 ff.
*
870. An immediato consequorco of the above process (868 f.) was that
ordinary vorbs in Cw woro now mistakon for inchoatives, factitivos, or
iterativos, and thus have boon romodelled, by a retrogrossive process, to
vorbs in -άω, ς : βαστάζω -τῶ, - ἁρπάζω -πῶ, ψηφίζω -φω, ραντίζω -τῶ, σκορπίζω
[1] Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 92 (II), 235 βροντάζων. ib. p. 119 (HIV), 93 βρον
τάζοντα.
222
VERBS IN -ζω, πτω, -ττω OR -σσω.
[870-880.
- πῶ, σχολάζω (σκο-) -λῶ, λογίζομαι -γοῦμαι, ἀ]σφαλίζω -λῶ,κυτάζω -τῶ, μεθύζω
χαιρετίζω -τῶ, etc. etc.
871. The threo stages of the successive evolution alluded to may be
illustrated by the few following examples:
Ist
2nd
3rd
Ist
2nd
κρεμάννυμι
κρεμάζω
κρεμάω
πετάννυμι
πετάξω
3rd
πετάω
μεθύω
μεθύζω
μεθάω
ἀρτύω
ἀρτύζω
ἀρτάω
κυλίω
κυλίζω
κυλάω
δειπνέω
δειπνίζω
δειπνάω
τηρέω
τηράζω
τηράω
καμμύω
καμμύζω καμμάω
6
>
"
872. But verbs in -to denoting a 'sound,' point to a guttural charac-
ter, as : κράζω ' shout, τρίζω creak, οιμώζω lament, αλαλάζω
raise the war-cry';- so further στάζω ‘drop, στίζω prick, στη-
ρίζω ‘prop. The two verbs κλάζω ' clang, and σαλπίζω ‘trumpet,
have γγ for character; hence fut. -γξω.
16
>
873. Also this class of vorbs is still substantially represented in N and
has even received considerablo accessions, mostly from those in -σσω (880),
as : κράζω ' call, crow, ἀναστενάζω ' sigh, τρίζω ' creak, στάζω ' drip, σφάζω
(ovon in P) ‘kill,' ταράζω 'stir, ἀλλάζω ' chango, φράζω close, block up,
χαράζω inciso, πήζω curdlo, coagulate, τινάζω shake off, τρομάζω
* frighton, ἐ]ξετάζω examine, inquire, συνάζω gather, etc.
>
(
>
7
6
874. 2.Verbs in -πτω point to a labial character; in particular to
nas *κλέπτω steal, *κύπτω ' cut';
<
β as *βλάπτω injure, καλύπτω ' cover ;
•
q as “βάπτω 'dye, *θάπτω ‘bury,' *ράπτω 'sew, *σκάπτω ‘dig.
875. This class of verbs still survives in N, naturally in the phonopathic
modification «φτω (174), as: άφτω, ἀστράφτω, βλάψτω, θάφτω, χάφτω (1.0.
κάπτω), ράφτω, κύφτω, κρυφτω, νίφτω, σκάφτω, σκέφτομαι. Most of them,
however, appear-sporadically as early as G times-also in tho reduced
form - Bo, as : ῥάβω, κρύβω, νίβω, σκάβω, κύβω, ἅβω (if not ανω) light. This
phenomenon which was suggested by the presenco of verbs in -ίβω, -αύω,
-εύω, (i. o. iv, -α, -evo) is now common, particularly in southern speech:
κρύβω (Sopt. etc. frequent t'1), θρύβω (Anast. Sin. 209 A), νίβω (due to τρίβω,
θλίβω, ἀμείβω, βλάβω, θάβω, ῥάβω, σκάβω (or -αύω, duo to παύω, θραύω, αναύω,
ἀπολαύω);—κλέβω due to γεύω, χορεύω, δουλεύω, cte.
876. So further γράφω for γνάπτω (= κνάπτω) and βάφω [nevor βάβω ! 126]
for βάπτω which are duo to γράφω.
877. All above (875) verbs in -βω (-ίβω, -αύω, -εύω) naturally appear
also in the form -βγω (861).
878. 3. Verbs in -ττω οι -σσω point to a guttural character; in
particular to-
α. κ, us: φυλάττω οι ΐ-σσω 'guard, κηρύττω οι -σσω ‘proclaim,
φρίττω οι -σσω shudder
"
b. r, as : Οτάττω οι *-σσω arrange, πράττω οι ΐ-σσω 'do, ἀλλάττω
or ΐ-σσω alter, πλήττω οι -σσω strike ";
c. x, as : ταράττω οι ΐ-σσω
870. Only a few vorbs in -ττω
°ἁρμόττω (1-1 -όζω) fit, ερέσσω
also πλάθω) form.
disturb, δρύττω or -σσω 'dig.
(-σσω) point to a dontal character, as :
τον, πάσσω spriukle, Απλάσσω (in N
880. Vorks in -ττω or -σσω λιαvo, over since 4 times, invariably appeared
in the latter form -σσω, and so they still survivo in N, especially in
[1] Phryn. 291 κρύβεται φευγε διὰ τοῦ Β λέγειν καὶ κρύβεσθαι, ἀλλὰ διὰ τοῦ πτ
κρύπτεται καὶ κρύπτεσθαι ψαθί.
223
880-886.
PECULIARITIES OF MUTE VERBS.
σ
southern speech, as: ἀλλάσσω, μαλάσσω, πατάσσω, πράσσω, ταράσσω, τινάσσω,
τυλίσσω, φράσσω, χαράσσω, τάσσω, πάσσω, etc. At the same time, as -σσω
was identical in sound with - σω (925), and this -σω happened to be the com-
monost and most familiar ending of the future (770), thoro could not but
arise the feeling as if -(o)ow was the characteristic sign of the future tense
(ep. goo) and therefore inappropriate in any other place. Consequently
as a present ending, -oow had to make room for some analogical substitute
and this was easily suggested by verbs in -ζω (867 ff.), which had
a similar future onding, as well as a homogeneous charactor in their
abstract nouns. Accordingly verbs like:
κραυγή κράζω suggested σφάξω σφαγή
στεναγμός στενάζω
σφάζω Α
σταλάξω σταλαγμός σταλάζω
σφυρίξω σ(φ)ύρι(γ)μα σφυρίζω Ν
μαλάξω μάλα(γ)μα μαλάξω N
ἀλλάξω ἀλλαγή ἀλλάζω 39
ταράξω ταραχή
κράξω
στενάξω
στηρίξω
στήριγμα
στηρίζω
στάξω
στάγμα
στάζω
eto.
etc.
etc.
ταράζω
881. On this pattern are further formed in N:
χαράξω
χαραγή
χαράζω
φράξω
φραγή
φράζω
τυλίξω
τύλι (γ)μα
τυλίζω
τάξω
τα(γ)μα
τάζω
τινάξω
τίνα(γ)μα
τινάζω
etc.
etc.
etc.
The only
882. In the conjugation of mute verbs the same formative
elements come into play as those in sonantic verbs.
noteworthy departure is that in mute verbs the blending of the
stem character with the tense character (where there is any,
756) involves certain phonetic changes. Hence the following
peculiarities must be remembered:
883. In the present and imperfect where there is no fixed
tense character (756), mute verbs are inflected exactly like
sonantic verbs (700-1).
884. In all other tenses the stom character coalesces with
the tense character or, in the absence of the latter, with the
succeeding terminal consonant and undergoes the appropriate
phonopathic changes (169-217). Thus :
p0;
α. π, β, φ + σ &; + θ φο; + μ
b. x, r, x + 6 =
µµ; +T = πT; + K =
YH; + T = IT; + K
Χ
σμ; + T = OT; + K = σ.
φθ;
C.
τ, δ, θ + σ = σ
+ 0
; + θ
χθ; + μ
σθ; + μ
χθ ; τ + σθ, δ + σθ, θ + σθ
d. Interconsonantal σ is dropped (π + σθ, β + σθ, φ + 60
16 + σθ, γ + σ, χ + σθ
σθ; 204).
885. Of these resultants ψ ε στ μμ σμ still hold good in N. On the
other hand, present speech substitutes or for Tт; xг for both xẻ and
κτ; and or for σθ (174. 177).
886. As no consonant is compatible with a succeeding or (169.
202), all consonantal (mnuto and liquid) verbs form the 3rd
person plural of the perfect and pluperfect modio-passive
by way of periphrasis (for -νται, -ντο, 687. 764, 1864).
224
INFLECTION OF MUTE VERBS.
886-888.
γραφ
γράφω ' write,
γέγραμμαι
I. Inflection of Perfect Medio-passive.
ταγ
τάττω ' arrange,
INDICATIVE
τέταγμαι
γέγραψα
γέγραπται
τέταξαι
τέτακται
γέγραφ-0ον
τέταχθον
γεγραμ-μεθα
τεταγμεθα
γέγραφ-θε
τέταχθε
γεγραμμένοι εἰσίν
τεταγμένοι εἰσίν
IMPERATIVE
γέγραφ-θα
τέταξο
γεγράφθω
τετάχθω
γέγραφθον
γεγράφθων
τέταχθον
τετάχθων
γέγραφ-θε
τέταχθε
γεγράφθων (-θωσαν)
τετάχθων (-θωσαν)
INFINITIVE
γεγράφθαι
τετάχθαι
ψευδ
ψεύδομαι “lie.
ἔψευσομαι
ἔψευσαι
ἔψευστα
ἔψευσθον
ἐψεύσμεθα
ἔψευσθε
ἐψευσμένοι εἰσίν
ἔψευ-σο
ἐψεύσθω
ἔψευσθον
ἐψεύσθων
ἔψευσθε
ἐψεύσθων (-θωσαν)
ἐψεύσθαι
γεγραμμένος
-νον
-νη
PARTICIPLE
τεταγμένος
-νον
-νη
ἐψευσμένος
-νον
-νη.
κρύφ' conceal πρᾶγ' do' ἁρμοτ 'ft γυμνάδ 'exercise 'νομίδ believo
Pr.
κρύπτω
πράττω
ἁρμόττω
γυμνάζω
νομίζω
Fut.
κρύψω
πράξω
ἁρμόσω
γυμνάσω
νομιῶ, G-Ν-ίσω
Aor.
ἔκρυψα
ἔπραξα
ἥρμοσα
ἐγύμνασα
ἐνόμισα
Porf.
κεκρυφα
πέπραχα
ἥρμοκα
γεγύμνακα
νενόμικα
19
Μ.&Ρ. κέκρυμ-μαι
πέπραγ-μαι
ἥρμοσ μαι
γεγύμνασμαι
νενόμισμαι
Aor. P. ἐκρύφθην
ἐπράχθην
ἡρμόσθην ἐγυμνάσθην
ἐνομίσ-θην.
2. Inflection of Pluperfect Medio-passive.
ἐγεγραμ-μην
ἐγέγραψο
ἐγέγραπτο
ἀγέγραφθον
ἐγεγράφθην
ἐγεγραμ-μεθα
ἐγέγραφε
γεγραμμένοι ἦσαν
ἐτετάγ-μην
ἐτέταξο
ἐτέτακτο
ἐτέταχθον
ἐτετάχθην
ἐτεταγμεθα
ἐτέταχθε
τεταγμένοι ἦσαν
ἐψεύσμην
ἔψευ-σο
ἔψευστο
έψευσθον
ἐψεύσθην
ἐψεύσμεθα
ἔψευσθε
ἐψευσμένοι ἦσαν.
887. The three verbs στρέφω ‘turn, τρέπω ' turn, τρέφω ‘feed,
change their radical -- to -a- in the perfect, pluperfect, and aorist
passivo : ἔστραμμαι, ἐστράμην, ἐστράφην (υρ. 895. 921).
888. Verbs in -ίζω of more than two syllables drop the future
225
♦
888-893.]
MUTE VERBS-LIQUID VERBS.
character -o- in the future active and middle, and substitute for
it an -- which is then contracted with the succeeding vowel
to -τω. This is called Attic future. (892.)
-iâ.
νομίζω ' consider (νομίσω, νομιέω) νομιῶ, -είς, -εί, etc., like ποιῶ
νομίζομαι (νομίσομαι νομιέομαι) νομιοῦμαι, -εῖ, -είται, etc., like ποιοῦμαι.
889. So too βιβάζω 'make go, ἐξετάζω examine, καλέω ' call ' (but
καλέσω in CIA since 16ο Β.C.), τελέω accomplish (840), ἐλαύνω
drive (99676), and a few others, among which P σκευάζω (in CIA
since 200 B. C.)
[Moeris 134 ἐλῶ ᾿Αττικῶς, ἐλάσω Ἑλληνικῶς. 198 καλῶ καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ μέλλοντος)
καλέσω Αττικῶς· ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος μόνων τῶν Ἑλλήνων τὸ λεγόμενον καλώ. 231
λογιεῖται ᾿Αττικῶς, λογίσεται Ἑλληνικῶς. 253 ὁμοῦμαι, ἐμεῖς ὀμεῖται, Αττικῶς·
ὀμύσω, (σμύσεις), ὀμόσει, Ἑλληνικῶς.]
890. This Attic future is peculiar to A and to its P imitators
(Atticists), but hardly familiar to H-T speech. In the NT writers
the ordinary future is -íow, while the Attic form - is rather rare
and not above suspicion, seeing that, though occurring in about a
dozen passages, it does not in any of them happen to stand in the 1st or
2nd person plural (-ιοῦμεν, -ιείτε), but invariably in the forms -ιω, -ιεις,
-ιει, οι ιουσι", that is in those forms where the insertion or absence of
the one letter o makes all the difference, and could have been
easily dropped by scholastic transcribers (cp. 894).
LIQUID VERBS.
891. Liquid verbs generally show an amplified present stem
(864). Their shorter stem shows itself by reducing -αι -to -a-, ει
to --, and -λ- to -λ-. (See 29 ff.and App. ii. 9-14.)
892. Their future active and middle is formed from the
shorter stem by affixing to it the ending (-εφω, -έω) -ω, -είς,
-ει, etc. (888), after the manner of contracted verbs in -έω; and the
aorist from the future by dropping the character -o- before the
ending and lengthening, by antectasis, the thematic vowel: a
to ʼn or (before or p, 269,) to ū; e to a ; ì, ì to i, í :
PRESENT
“
φαίνω ' show
Εφαίνομαι appear
*μιαίνω ' stain
περαίνω * oflect
FUTURE
pavŵ, eîs, eî, otc.
AORIST
épnya, as, e, otc.
ἔφηνα,
ἐφηνάμην, ω, ατο, etc.
ἐπέρανα, ας, ε, etc.
STEM
φάν
""
φανοῦμαι, εἰ, εἶται, οίς.
etc.
•
μιαν
μιανῶ, εις, ει, ote.
ἐμίνα, as, e, etc.
περάν
περανῶ, εις, ει, etc.
*σπείρω ‘sow
σπερ
σπερῶ, εις, ει, ote.
†μένω ' romain
μεν
μενῶ, εις, ει, etc.
κρίνω 'judge
,
κρίν
κρινῶ, εἰς, εἰ, etc.
νεμ
νεμώ, εις, ει, ote.
>
Ονέμω ' distribute
Ονέμομαι ' pasture
ἀγγέλλω unounco Αγγελ
1
Ο
νεμοῦμαι, εί, είται, etc.
ἀγγελώ, εις, ει, στο
eîs, eî, otc.
ἔσπειρα, ας, ε, etc.
έμεινα, as, e, etc.
čupiva, as, e, ote.
ἔκρινα,
ένεια,
éveiμa, as, e, otc.
ἐνειμάμην, ω, ατο,ote.
ἤγγειλα, as, e, etc.
893. Several other verbs in -αίνω, besides those in -ραίνω and -αίνω,
retain the thematic vowel in the aorist, as: γλυκαίνω 'sweeten,' ἐγλύκανα,
[κερδαίνω 'gain, ἐκέρδανα; so ισχναίνω ' make meagre,” “κοιλαίνω ‘hollow
out,' λιπαίνω ' enrich, ὀργαίνω irritute,” πεπαίνω make ripe. This is
a step towards phonetic equalization of the future and aorist stems,
suggested by the homophony already existing in verbs in -ivw and
-ύνω (κρινῶ ἔκρινα, πλυνῶ ἔπλυνα, 899). As expected, / Greek wont
further in this direction and soon brought about a complete uniformity:
226
PECULIARITIES OF LIQUID VERBS. [893-896.
σημαίνω ἐσήμανα, θερμαίνω ἐθέρμανα, καθαίρω ἐκάθαρα, etc.-Only
verbs in -eipw have retained the lengthened stem -ep-, but this apparent
exception is due to other analogical influences (903).
894. How far P speech preserved the contracted future is a matter of
speculation, since its practice, as shown in our texts, is mostly a point
of mere accentuation, determined by intuition, or rather by the taste
of modern editors. Indeed, when we bear in mind that the future
Indicative began as early as H-G times to retreat partly before the
present indicative (1836) and partly before the future [aorist] subjunctive
(1921); that contraction in verbs was identified with the present tense
(824) ; that the difference of the indicative and subjunctive future in this
particular case consists merely in the place of accent, and that syste-
matical accentuation has been adopted only since T-B times (76º): we are
faced by a complicated problem, seeing that forms like μενω, ξηρανω, κρινω,
πλυνω, -εις, -ει, -ουσι", may represent equally a circumflected (contracted)
future or a prospective (futuric) barytone present. They may even,
with a slight modification (by adopting n for the alternative and
homophonous ει 26, 5) stand for the future [aorist] subjunctive, one of
the popular alternatives resorted to since a times to express the future
indicative (App. iv. 8). The only criterion in the circumstances would be
the 1st and 2nd persons plural and the middle voice, where there is
a phonolic difference (-ουμεν, - ειτε, -ουμαι, ουμεθα, -ουνται,—though even
here ep. 779). Unfortunately our evidence of this nature is too meagre
and fluctuating in unscholastic compositions like the NT writings, to
serve as a safe indication.[4] (Cp. 888.)
895. The remaining tenses are formed from the pure stem
with the only difference that monosyllabic stems with -e- change
this stem vowel to -a-, as :-
ἀγγέλλω
Ο
αιρω
Ο
φαίνω
*σπείρω
ἤγγελκα
ἦρκα
πέφαγκα
ἔσπαρκα
ἤγγελμα
ἦρμαι
πέρασμαι
ἔσπαρματ
ἀγγελθήσομαι
ἀρθήσομαι
φανθήσομαι
σπαθήσομαι
ἠγγέλθην
ἤρθην
ἐφάνθην
ἐσπάρην
896. The four verbs (κλίνω bend, κρίνω judge, πλύνω ' wash, and
τείνω tend, drop their character v in the perfect, pluperfect, and in
the passive future and aorist:
κλίνω
κρίνω
τείνω
κλινώ
κρινώ
τενώ
κέκλικα
κέκρικα
τέτακα
κέκλιμαι
κέκριμαι
τέταμαι
κλιθήσομαι
ἐκλίθην
κριθήσομαι
ἐκρίθην
παθήσομαι
ἐτάθην
[1] No conclusive evidence is afforded by forms like the following: John 16, 13 ;
14; 15 ἀναγγέλει, Id. 16, 25 ȧvayyeλw. Matt. 13, 42 & 50 βαλουσιν. Mark
16, τη ἐκβαλουσιν. Luke 21, 12 ἐπιβαλλουσιν. Luke 19, 43 περιβαλλουσιν. Matt.
13, 41 ; 24, 31. Μark 13, 27 ἀποστελει. Lmko 11, 49 and Acts 7, 34 (Εx. 3, 10) ἀπο-
στελω. Sept. Ps. 17 (18), 50 ; Rom. 15, 9; 1 Cor. 14, 15 ψαλώ. Sept. Ps. 90 (91), 12; Matt.
4, 6; Mark 16, 18 αρουσι. Luke 12, 18 καθελω. John 3, 36; 14, 17; 1 John 3, 17 μενει.
Phil. 1, 25 μενω καὶ συμπαραμένω, Rov. 10, ο πικρανει. Matt. 2, 6; Rov. 2, 27 ;
7, 17, 19, 15 ποιμάνει. 2 Cor. 9, το πληθύνει. Nor from the vory frequent κρινω
and κατακρινω, -ει, - ουσι" (sco Bruder's Concordance); nor also from ἀποκτεν(ν)ω,
-ει, -ουσιν, -ειτε, in face of n prosont ἀποκτεννω. On the other hand forms
liko r Cor. 6, 8 κρινουμεν ; 1 Cor. 3, 17 φθερει; John 2, 19 έγερω ; John 2, 20
ἐγερεις ; Jas. 5, 15 ἐγερει- and others would be conclusivo had they no important
variants against them. Novertheless cp. 1 Cor. 6, 3 pivoûμer, and Matt. 23, 34
ἀποκτενεῖτε; Κον. 3, 5 περιβαλεῖται (though again tho homophorous ἀποκτέννητε,
περιβάληται πιο oqnally admissible). For ἐγερῶ, ἐγερεῖς, ἐγερεῖ in John 2, 19,
Jag. 5, 15 | ἐξεγερεί 1 Cor. 6, 14], and φθερεί in 1 Cor. 3, 17, comparo 40. 121 & App. iv.
As a matter of course such accontuation as : Proter. Jacobi r9, 3 ἐὰν μὴ Βαλῶ τὸν
δάκτυλόν μου οὐ μὴ (ν) πιστεύσω, is absolutely indefonsible.
227
Q 2
897-903.] P-N HISTORY OF LIQUID VERBS.
897. In conjugating the porfect and pluperfect medio-passive, it must be
remembered that interconsonantalo is dropped (204. cp. 884, d), and
v before a changed to r, as: (ἤγγελ- φθε) ἤγγελ-θε, (πέφαν-φθε) πέφαν-θε,
(*πεφαν-μαι) πέφασμα (196).
898. For the P-N history of liquid verbs one peculiarity common
to the whole class has had a determining influence. It is the
circumstance that they retained the liquid character in the future
(and aorist) stem, and thus dispensed with the ordinary -σω (-σα).
899. Considering each class in particular, we find that in the P future of
verbs in vw (as ξηραίνω, ὑγιαίνω, μένω, κρίνω, πλύνω), the sonant immediately
preceding v is almost invariably a or i (v, sometimes 1, rarely e). In
other words the various forms of the P futuro and present show the
following relative proportion:
Present
Future
-μω
-σω
I per cent.
3
"9
-ίνω i.Θ. -ύνω
77
-(ε)ίνω
30}
35
-μνω
-άνω
-ίνω 1.Θ. -ύνω 29
2 per cent.
15
5
""
11
,, -(e)ivw 9
}
39 38
""
-ανω
45
αίνω
""
45
""
900. This approximative table shows that the future ends almost
always either in -ava or -iva (-vvw), while the present generally onds in
-αινω οι -ίνω, less commonly in -άνω. Accordingly the characteristic
ending of the present is -alvo. This peculiarity could not but
gradually lead to the notion that the other endings -ava and -ivw were
proper to the future (cp. the case of -oow, 880), and so had either to
retroat from the present or to undergo such modifications as to render
clear their distinction from the homophonous present. The latter
alternative was rosorted to, and the modification was easily obtained
by simply assimilating the endings -ava and -ivo (-vvw) to their pre-
vailing associates in -αίνω. Accordingly ολισθάνω and ἱστάνω, γλυκύνω and
ἁπαλύνω were changed to ολισθαίνω and ἱσταίνω, γλυκαίνω and ἁπαλαίνω
rospectively. This levelling tendency signalized itself in H (cp. ¿λolaívw,
κυρταίνω, παθαίνω, ἀλθαίνω, σιγαίνω ; ep. μένω, δένω, etc.), but the full develop-
mont of the process escapes our observation owing to the Atticistic spirit
of the timo. IIowever, with the first appearance in M of the popular pro-
ductions, it appears already altogether complete.
901. In the same way, all verbs in -áva with -v- insertod in the stom
liko μανθάνω, λαμβάνω, τυγχάνω, have become first μαθάνω (ΛΒΟ 88, 4),
λαβάνω, τυχάνω, λαχάνω (rgo-194), evon πανθάνω (Suchl. 49 Ρ), παθάνω (ΛΒΟ
83, 7), then μαθαίνω, λαβαίνω, τυχαίνω, λαχαίνω, παθαίνω.
*
902. There is, however, a small group of verbs in -árw and -ivw, noarly all of
monosyllabic stoms, which (together with their compounds) havo hitherto
resistod the process of equalization, us : φτάνω (φθάνω), βάνω, κάνω, σφάνω, κρίνω,
κλίνω, πλύνω, ντύνω (i. ο. ἐνδύνω), ψήνω-und have even attracted specimons from
other classes, as : (πιάζω) πιάνω ' catch, δαγκάνω ' bite, βυζάνω ' nurse, χύν (ν)ω
(evon in Hero 217 & CLoomans III [+II-IIIr], 26 èπíxvvve), ¿úvw, úpтúvw,
¿‹pírw (cp. 906, 960). Nevertheless ovon this small class has been, and is still
boing (at least in northern N), assimilated to tho rost in -evw or -aivw (900), as:
πλένω, σβένω, μένω, κρένω, γδένω, ξένω, (οι πλαίνω, σβαίνω, ψαίνω, etc.), προφταίνω
(for the southern and commoner πλύνω, σβύνω, ψήνω, κρίνω, ξύνω, προφθάνω).
(Cp. 906.)
903. The same principle has oporated on verbs in -pw. The homophony
of the present with the future in the great majority of casos (about
70 per cont.) led to the popular notion that -pw was the normal
228
LIQUID VERBS IN N—SECOND TENSES. [903–909.
ending of the future, and thus called for a new representative in the
present. This was the familiar ending -vw (cp. -aww, -ivw, -ávw, -úvw, etc.),
which was now borrowed from the familiar class in -vw or rather -aíva (900)
and so led to a modified present in -pvw, -aípvw, -épvw. Accordingly pépw,
δέρω, ἐπαίρω, σπείρω, σύρω, etc., have changed to φέρνω, δέρνω, ἐπαίρνω, σπέρνω,
σύρνω, etc.
This process set in apparently in B times (Theoph. 224, 21
emaiрva), but, owing to the general passion for Atticism, remained latent
down to M, when it at once reasserted itself as an old-established form, as :
φέρνω, ἐ]γέρνω (for ἐγείρω), δέρνω, ἀναφέρνω (for ἀναφύρω), etc.,—though always
xaípoμai. As a matter of course, it has ever since remained in universal
popularity, save in a few idioms (as Epiros, Calymna) where the
ancient present form appears to be still preserved; as péрw, è]τaiρw,
σπείρω, σύρω.
904. Likewise in the small group of verbs in -λλw the need of dissociating
the present from its homophonous future (βάλλω βάλω, σφάλλω σφάλω,
cp. 880 & 92") brought the former into association with vorbs in -vw,
notably -cvw (893. 900 ff.), and thus led to the modified forms opáλvw σpávw,
then (903) σφαίνω, σφαίλνω, σφαίρνω (187 f.); (*βάλνω), βάνω (even in Alchem.
328, 19 ; 332, II, etc.), βαίνω ; προβάλλω (προβαίλνω), προβαίρνω, προβαίνω ;
παραγγέλλω -έλνω, -έρνω, -ένω; στέλλω, στέλνω, στέρνω; ψάλλω ' chant,
ψάχνω, ψαίρνω (though mostly ψάλλω out of deference to the Church)
—(ἀπολύω) ἀπολῶ (859) ἀπολνῶ, χαλῶ χαλνῶ, σφαλῶ σφαλνῶ, καλῶ καλνῶ.
905. Nevertheless, some insular idioms (as Rhodes, Icaros, Syme,
Cypros), which are alleged to distinguish between A and AA by gemina-
tion (GHatzidakis 409), still preserve the ancient presont form in -Aλw,
as: σφάλλω, βάλλω, ostensibly distinct from the futuro (θὰ) σφάλω, βάλω, etc.
906. Mark finally that owing to its great frequency in liquid verbs, tho
present ending vw became so familiar and general it corresponds in
popularity and force to the suffix -iw and -wvw (868-873. 853)-that it was
ultimately transferred also to sonantic and particularly contracted vorbs in -áw,
but above all to those with a liquid charactor, as: repváw (Achmet. 196), Teрvŵ
(Apophth. 440 A; Epiph. Mon. 265 €), (γηράω) γερνῶ, ἐξεράω) ξερνῶ, ξεχνῶ
(dinloctally also χαλάω χαλνῶ, σχολάζω σκολνῶ, γυρίζω γυρνῶ, ἀ]σφαλίζω
σφαλνῶ, ἀπολύω ἀπολῶ ἀπολνῶ)—κλάνω, σπάνω, ψήνω, στήνω (dialoctally also
χρίνω, λύνω, κλείνω, ξύνω, φτύνω 1.0. πτύω, ep. ἀφίνω 960), though these by-forms
may also bo duo to other influences. (902.)
FORMATION OF SECOND TENSES.
907. A number of mute and liquid verbs have usually no
first aorist or perfect, but a second aorist or perfect. These
second tenses are formed from the short vorbal stem (found
as in 865. 866 ff.), and so have no tense character (756).
908. As the aorist stom supplies the futuro subjunctive and
imperative (678), it follows that whenever the 2nd aorist replaces
the first, it also supplies the stem to the future subjunctive
and imperative, and thus gives rise to a 2nd future.
SECOND AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDdle.
909. The 2nd aorist active and middle has in the indicative
and subjunctive the endings of the imperfect active and middle
[1] Moeris 261 οἶσε 'Αττικῶς φέρε Ἑλληνικῶς καὶ κοινῶς. (Cp. 996305.)
229
909-917.] PECULIARITIES OF SECOND TENSES.
respectively. In the infinitive and participle, it follows the
present.
910. The future subjunctive and imporative have the endings of the
prosent indicative. (771. 806 ff.)
911. As regards accentuation, however, the 2nd aorist (and
2nd future) varios from the imperfect (and present) indicative,
in that it accents the thematic sonant in the following two
cases :-
a. In the infinitive and participle aorist active and middle: Badeîv,
βαλέσθαι βαλών, βαλόμενος.
6. In the imperative future middle: βαλοῦ, ἀποβαλοῦ.
912. Five verbs accent the 2nd person singular of the future im-
perative on the ultima: (apßávo 'receive') daßé 'here you are!'
(εὑρίσκω ‘find”) εὑρέ; ἔρχομαι 'come) ἐλθέ, (ἰδεῖν ‘to see') ἰδέ, (εἰπεῖν
to say ') elné.
913. These oxytono forms are due oither to dissociation from the homophonous
clde (ïde), eîne, eûpe (121), callod forth by the commonly initial position of the
imporative in the sontonce-or, which is more probablo, to the analogy of lồvú 'lo'
'bohold,' (cp. πроσðοû, à¶оû, 953, c) and thus contain a sort of omphatic (epidoic-
tic) suffix -è possibly suggested by &de, öde (cp. here you aro! and Gorman hier!
for λaßé, cp. CGöttling 44).-Tho assumption that we have hore a rolic of Indo-
Europoan accentuation is absolutely improbablo.
914. Of these fivo casos, λαβὲ and ἐλθὲ are extinel in N, ἐλθὲ having
mado room for éλa (as ABC 3, 2. 17, 4. 31, 4. 87, 3. cp. 9967 & 30). The rest
survive and preserve the ancient accentuation also. On the other hand,
owing to their initial sonant, evpè idè and einè aro commonly shortened to
'Bpè 'dè and πé (135. 723).
915. From idè cvpè and elπé, N has evolved a future subjunctivo idŵ (some-
timos transformed to dɩ@ i.o. diŵ, 155, a) eúpŵ and eiπŵ, ofton shortened to dŵ Bpŵ
and nŵ (cp. 971), bosido èdè or éde (from ide, cp. ABC 63, 7), often crystallized
to an emphatic profix ède- (573).
916. Inflection of the 2nd aorist and 2nd future.
INDICATIVE
Activo čλiπ-ov, es, e, otc.
a. 2nd Aorist.
SUBJUNCTIVE
λίποιμι, οις, οι ote.
INFINITIVE PARTICIPLE.
λιπ-είν λιπών, όν, οῦσα
Middle ἐλιπ-όμην, ου, ετο, etc. λιπ-οίμην, οιο, οιτο, etc. λιπ-έσθαι λιπ-όμενος, ον, η
b. 2nd FUTURE.
SUBJUNCTIVE
IMPERATIVE
Active
λίπ-ω, γs, n, etc.
λίπ-ε, έτω, ole.
λιπ-οῦ, έσθω, ote.
Middle λίπ-ωμαι, η, ηται, etc.
917. Verbs with a 2nd aorist (and 2nd future) belong mostly to
the irregular class (996).
ing are the principal:
Treino 'abandou '
φεύγω 4 1100
Of those regularly conjugated, the follow-
ἔλιπον (Ν έλειψα)
ἐλιπόμην
ἔφυγον (Ν ἔφυγα 786 f.)
dyw 'load'
ἤγαγον
ἠγαγόμην
οτίκτω 4 begot
ἔτεκον
*ανα-κράζω 1 ' cry out
ἀνέκραγον (Νέκραξα)
βάλλω ' throw
ἔβαλον (Ν ἔβαλα 786 1.)
ἐβαλόμην
κατα-καίνω ‘kill
κατ-έκανον
ἐγείρομαι ' awako
ἠγρόμην.
230
2ND AORIST AND 2ND FUTURE PASSIVE. [918-921.
918. The verb τρέπω ' turn, beside its regular ist aorist ἔτρεψα turned
ἐτρεψάμην ' put to fight, has also a poetical and aorist ἔτραπον (=ἔτρεψα)
and an intransitive ἐτραπόμην ' took to fight." (Cp. 887.)
SECOND AORIST AND SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE.
919. The 2nd aorist and 2nd future passive have the endings,
as well as the inflection, of the 1st aorist and 1st future passive
respectively. The only difference is that they annex to the
verbal stem not the tense character -θη-, but only -η-, which
before the consonants -vr- is changed to ---.
920. In the 2nd person singular of the imperative future the
ending - θ remains unchanged (182, 1. 808).
INDIO.
SUBJ.
2nd aor. pass. ἐβλάβην
βλαβείην
INFIN.
βλαβηναι
PART.
βλαβείς
ἐβλάβης
ἐβλάβη, etc.
βλαβείης
βλαβείη, etc.
βλαβέν
βλαβείσα
and fut. pass. βλαβήσομαι
βλαβῶ
βλαβήσεσθαι βλαβησόμενος
βλαβήσει οι - η
βλαβῇς
βλαβησόμενον
βλαβήσεται, οle. βλαβῇ, etc.
βλαβησομένη.
921. A 2nd aorist and 2nd future passive is found in the sub-
joined list of verbs. It will be observed that, with the exception
of συλλέγω, all stems with -- change this vowel to -α-. (887. 895.)
LITERARY A GREEK.
N SPEECH (cp. 801).
1 γράφω
'write'
ἐγράφην
γράφω
ἐγράφτηκα
2 τρέπω
'turn'
ἐτράπην
ἐντρέπομαι
ἐντράπηκα
3 τρέφω
'feed'
ἐτράφην
θρέψω
θράφηκα
4 στρέφω
'turn'
ἐστράφην
στρέφω
ἐστράφηκα
5 σήπομαι
'rot'
ἐσάπην
σαπίζω
ἐσαπήθηκα
6 τρίβω
'rub'
ἐτρίβ-ην
τρίβ(γ)ω (861)
ἐτρίφτηκα
7 βλάπτω
damage'
βλάβην
βλάφτω, βλάβω
ἐβλάφτηκα
8 κόπτω
9 κλέπτω
10 θάπτω
'knock'
ἐκόπην
κόφτω, κόβ (γ)ω cut'
ἐκόπηκα
'steal'
ἐκλάπην
κλέφτω, κλέβ(γ)ω
(ἐκλέφτηκα)
'bury'
ἐτάφην
θάφτω
ἐθάφτηκα
Η σκάπτω
14 τήκομαι
12 πλέκω
13 συλλέγω
'melt'
'dig'
'twine'
ἐσκάφην
σκάφτω, σκάβ(γ)ω
ἐσκάφτηκα
ἐπλάκην
πλέκω
ἐπλέχτηκα
'gather'
συνελέγην
ἐτάκτην
τήκομαι
15 πνίγω
'suffocate'
ἐπνίγην πνίγομαι
ἐπνίγηκα
16 °πλήσσω
'beat'
ἐπλήγην
ἐκπλήσσω
frighten
ἐξεπλάγην
17 ἀπ -αλλάσσω
release
ἀπηλλάγην ἀλλάσσω change
ἀλλάχτηκα
18 σφάττω
“kill
ἐσφάγην
σφάζω
ἐσφάγηκα
19 δέρω
'flay'
ἐδάρην
γδέρνω (i.o. ἐκδέρνω)
ἐγδάρθηκα
20 σπείρω
SOW'
ἐσπάρτην
(σπείρω) σπέρνω
ἐσπάρθηκα
21 φθείρω
'spoil'
ἐφθάρην
22 στέλλω
23 σφάλλω
24 μαίνομαι
25 φαίνομαι
send'
ἐστάλην
mako stumble”
ἐσφάλ-ην
σφάλλω ' fail
ἔσφαλα
rage'
ἐμάνην
(
appoar'
ἐφάνην
φαίνομαι
ἐφάνηκα
231
922-927.] 2ND PERFECT AND PLPF. VERBS IN -μι.
922. In the following three verbs, A uses both the ist and 2nd
aorist passive without difference of meaning:
βλάπτω ' injure
ρίπτω ' hurl
ἀλλάσσω ' change
Ist aor. ἐβλάφθην (Ν -φτηκα)
2nd aor. ἐβλάβην
""
""
ἐρρίφθην (Νεφτηκα)
ἠλλάχθην (Ν -χτηκα)
ἐρρίφην
""
ἠλλάγην
923. In the two following verbs, A distinguishes between the Ist and
2nd tenses:
Ist aor.
ἐφάνθην ' was shown
from φαίνω ' show
2nd
Ist
19
ἐφάνην ' appeared
>>
φαίνομαι ' appear
ἐτρέφθην ' was turned
""
τρέπω ‘turn
2nd
29
ἐτράπην turned (myself)
">
τρέπομαι ‘turn.
SECOND PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE.
924. The 2nd perfect and 2nd pluperfect active are formed
from the verbal stem without tense character, and follow the
inflection of the 1st perfect and 1st pluperfect respectively. At
the same time the stem vowel is either retained, as:
φρίσσω shivor (φριγ)
πράσσω ' do (πραγ)
κράζω ' ery" (κραγ)
φεύγω ‘Lee" (φευγ)
πέ-φρικα
πέ-πραγα
κέ-κραγα
πέφευγα
ἐπε-φρίκειν
ἐπε-πραγειν
ἐκε-κράγειν
ἐπε-φεύγειν ;-
924b. Or it changes by way of metaphony (dissimilation ?),
viz.-
a to H : σήπομαι ‘rot” (σαπ)
τήκομαι ' molt" (τακ)
σέσηπα
ἐσεσήπειν
τέτηκα
ἐτετήκειν
φαίνομαι ' appear (φαν)
πέφηνα
ἐπεφήνειν
ετο ο τίκτω bogot (τεις)
τέτοκα
ἐτετύκειν
ἀποκτείνω kill ' (κτεν)
ἀπ-έκτονα
ἀπεκτόνειν
φθείρω ' corrupt" (φθερ)
-φθορα
ἐφθύρειν
ἐγείρω ' awake' (έγερ
ἐγρήγορα
ἐγρηγόρειν
Ei to oi
λείπω ' leave' (λειπ
λέλοιπα
ἐλελοίπειν
πείθω 'porsuado (πειθ)
πέποιθα
ἐπεποίθειν
925. In some cases there is a 1st and 2nd perfect and pluperfect
with a difference of meaning:
ist pf.
2nd pf.
πείθω ' persuade '
πράσσω απ'
πέπεικα ' have persuaded
πέπραχα ' have done'
πέποιθα ' trust
φαίνω ' show'
πέφαγμα ' have shown
πέπραγα ' have acted
πέφηνα 'have appeared
926. The only vorb which does not distinguish between tho Ist and 2nd
perfect and pluperfect is δια-φθείρω : διέφθαρκα or διέφθορα have corruptod.
II. VERBS IN -MI.
927. Verbs in -μι differ from verbs in -w only in the inflection
of those tenses which are formed from tho presont and 2nd aorist
stem. In these cases the thematic sonant is dispensed with-
hence they are sometimes termed athematic verbs (cp. 980)—and
the primitive endings (760) are directly annexed to the stem.
This conjugation, however, appears fully developed only in the
four verbs τίθημι, ἵημι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι (945-966). In all other verbs,
232
PECULIARITIES OF VERBS IN -μl. [927-934.
it is restricted either to the present stem, or to the 2nd aorist
stem; in some verbs, too, it appears only in a few sporadic forms.
928. Another feature of verbs in -μ is that they show an
amplified present stem. This amplification consists either in
an infixal -vv-, also (after a vowel) -vvv-, inserted between the stem
and the ending, as deík-NU-µ, þú-NNU-µ (938); or in a prefixal -1-
with the initial consonant in the sense of reduplication (present
reduplication), as тí-Oŋµi, di-dwµu, Y-ornμ. The former class occurs
only in the present and imperfect, whereas the latter has also
a 2nd aorist.
929. Other inflectional peculiarities of the verbs in -µ are
the following:
1. The singular of the indicative active lengthens the thematic
vowel: e to ŋ, o to w, a to n, v to v.
930. 2. In some cases, the primitive endings (760) are resorted to :
a. Ist person sing. -μι : δείκνυμι, τίθημι ;
2nd
3rd
b.
-ς: δείκνυς, τίθης, δίδως ;
pl.-ασι" : δεικνύ-ασι", τιθέασι, διδόασι. (776. 936, b.)
-σαν, in the imperfect and 2nd aorist indica-
tive, as: ἐδείκνυσαν, ἔθεσαν, ἔστησαν.
931. 3. The subjunctive has the usual thematic sonant and
endings, but contracts, as far as possible, the concurring sonantic
elements, that is to say-
e as in wow regularly: (Tiléw) TɩOŵ, î³, ñ—Oŵ, Oûs, Oñ etc.
to @ throughout : (διδύω) διδῶ, ς, --δῶ, δῷς, δῷ, etc.
α as in ζώω: (ἱστάω) ἱστῶ, ἱστῇς, ἱστῇστῶ, στῇς στῇ, etc., but
δεικνύω, -ης, -η, etc.
€
932. The present imperative active contracts the ending e of
the 2nd person singular with the thematic vowel (cp. 163 ff. App.
ii. 9-14), as : (δείκνυε) δείκνυ, (τίθεε) τίθει, (δίδοε) δίδου, (ἵσταε) ἵστη.
933. The participle active annexes the terminal character -Vπ-
and forms a sigmatic nominative masculine (820. 163 ff.):
δεικνυντ + s produces δεικνύς
διδοντ + s
>>
ἱσταντ + s
διδούς
ἱστάς
τιθεντ +s produces τιθείς
θεντ + s
θείς
σταντ + s
στάς,
934. The medio-passive ending -ra is retained through-
out; so isoo in the indicative and imperative of the prosent
stem; but in the 2nd aorist stem, -o- is dropped and this
gives rise to contraction (762. 782):
δείκνυ-σαι,
ἐδείκνυσο,
τίθεσαι
ἐτίθεσο
δίδοσαι
ἐδίδοσο
ἵστα-σαι
ἵστα-σο
but (έθετο, ἔθεο) ἔθου, (έδοφο, ἔδο0) ἔδου- imperative (θετο, θέο) θου,
(doto, dúo) dov.
233
935-937.] P-N HISTORY IN VERBS IN -μι.
935. Verbs in -u are accented like verbs in -w. Mark how-
ever that-
a. The infinitive active accents the penult: δεικνύναι, τιθέναι,
θεῖναι ;
b. The participle active accents the ultima: δεικνύς, τιθείς.
P-N history of Verbs in -μι.
936. Verbs in -μι are peculiar to 1 and Atticistic Greek. As
a matter of fact, they belong rather to pre-Attic than 4 times, since
classical prose writers, like Herodotos, Xenophon, Plato, and the
orators already show signs of the retreat of this class of verbs before
their successors in -w. (JLa Roche 152-160.)
a. Comparo 4: ομνύω, ἐγ-κεραννύω,—δεικνύεις, ὀλλύεις, σβεννύεις—δεικνύει,
ἀπολλύει, καταγνύει, κεραννύει, ομνύει, σβεννύει— δεικνύουσι, κεραννύουσι, κρε-
μαννύουσι, ἀπολλύουσι, ομνύουσιν etc. etc.-δείκνυε, ἀπόλλυε, ὄμνυε, ομνυέτω,
ὀμνύετε—δεικνύειν; δεικνύων, ὀμνύων, ἀπολλύων, ομνύοντες, etc.—ἐδείκνυον,
ἀπώλλυον, ὤμνυον, ὤμνυες, ἐζώννυες, ἐδείκνυε”; προσεμίγνυον, ἀπεκτίννυον,
ὤμνυον, etc. etc. (Cp. Kühner-Blass ii. 194 f.)
[U. Moeris to ἀπολλὺς ᾿Αττικῶς, ἀπολλύων Ἑλληνικῶς; & 23 ἀπολλύασιν Αττικῶς,
ἀπολλύουσιν Ἑλληνικῶς. 11η δεικνύσι προπερισπωμένως ᾿Αττικῶς, δεικνύουσιν
Ελληνικῶς, δεικνύασι δὲ οἱ δεύτεροι Αττικοί [930, α]. 258 ὀλλύασιν, ομνύασιν,
Αττικῶς. ὀλλύουσιν, ὀμνύουσιν Ἕλληνες. 307 ῥηγνύασι διὰ τοῦ α Αττικώς, ῥηγ
νύουσιν ἡ ῥήσσουσιν Ἑλληνικῶς. 338 ὤμνυον Ἑλληνικῶς.]
937. This was also to be expectod in view of tho disadvantagos under
which the conjugation in - laboured: for first, it was neither comploto
nor systematic, not even within the narrow scopo of ono tenso through-
out, but borrowed the subjunctive from the regular w-class (941).
Thon verbs in -μι woro too fow in number about 5o in all) to assert
themselves against the overwhelming multitudes of thoir rivals in -w.
The influence of analogy, thereforo, so dominant everywhero in the
evolution of P-N, could not but tell on this part of grammar also and thus
transform verbs in - to vorbs in -w. Tho first class to be affected by
this process woro verbs in -(ν)νυμι, in particular those in -νυμι, beginning
with the 3rd porson plural of the prosont indicativo, which in its - form
(-άσι") appoured to be quite out of place. The intermixture of forms in
-μι and -ω spronds then rapidly during II-G, as may bo tostifiod by the
Septuagint, by Polybios, Diodoros, Plutarch, Aelian, Lucian, and tho
rest, whore forms in -νύω and -νυμι hold tho balanco (cp. FKaelkor 23 f.).
As time went on, the remaining forms of -vorbs followed, yielding one
after another to the influenco of the initiated process, and so either were
changed to vorbs in -w or altogether retroated before somo synonym of this
normal class. In this way :- (1774-5)
μια
ἵστημι yielded to ἱστάω or ἱστάνω, later 2]στήκω, Ν στέκω ; πίμπλημι τo πιμπλάω,
πιμπλέω, πίμπλω, πλήθω, πληρόω, δ γεμίζω ; πίμπρημι τo πιμπράω, πρήθω & prin-
cipally καίω ; τίθημι το τιθῶ or τίθω, Ν θέτω ; ἀφ- & συνίημι το ἀφ- & συν-ίω;
δίδωμι το δίδω ; κεράννυμι το κεράω, περνάω, lator περνάω (40) ; κρεμάννυμι to
κρεμ(ν)άω [1]; σκεδάννυμι τo σκεδάζω & σκεδάω; κορέννυμι το κορέω & χορτάζω;
αμφιέννυμι το αμφιέζω οτ ἀμφιάζω δ ἐνδύ(ν)ω; πετάννυμι το πετάω ; πήγνυμι το
πηγνύω & πήσσω; ζεύγνυμι το ζευγίζω; ῥήγνυμι το ρηγνύω & βήσσω (936, 4);
ὀνίνημι to ὀνέω & ὠφελῶ; ἀπόλλυμι to ἀπολλύω & απόλλω (όλλυμι το ὀλέσκω
us Proch. 85, 5); μίγνυμι τo μίσγω (later συμμίγω, σμίγω [136, 1]); σβέννυμι το σβεν-
[1] Mooris 134 ἐκρεμάννυεν Αττικῶς, ἐκρέμνα Ἑλληνικῶς, Αρoc. Mar. 119, 33
ἐκρεμνοῦντο.
234
INFLECTION OF VERBS IN - (ν)νυμι. [937–942.
νύω, Ν σβύν(ν)ω ; εἰμὶ τo εἶμαι & ὑπάρχω (985. 1845); φημὶ το λέγω; δύναμαι to
δύνομαι, κάθημαι τo κάθομαι ; ἔδοσαν to ἔδωκαν ; ἔδυν to ἔδυνα & ἔδυσα; ἔγνων to
eyvwoa;—and so on. How this process operated in each case will be explained
in the respective sections dealing with these verbs.
A. VERBS IN -(N)NYMI.
938. Verbs in -(ν)νυμι are formed with the infix -νυ- or -ννυ-,
according as the stem character to which it is affixed is a con-
sonant or a vowel, as : δείκνυμι show, σκεδάννυμι scatter,
σβέννυ-μι ' extinguish.
C
939. Consonantal stems are mute or liquid, according as their
stem character is a mute or liquid (864), as : ῥήγνυμι ' break,
ὄμνυμι 'swear.
940. Vocalic stems have as character-
α : σκεδάννυμι scatter
ε: σβέννυμι ' extinguish
ω: στρώννυμι 'spread.
941. Verbs in -(ν)νυμι follow the Mr-conjugation only in the
present and imperfect, and that not throughout, since in the
primary subjunctive, sometimes also in other forms, they are con-
jugated like regular barytone verbs in -(ν)νύω (937. 954); thus
δεικνύουσι beside δεικνύασι" (930, α)
ἐδείκνυε
ἐδείκνυ.
δεικνύει beside δείκνυσι
δεικνύων
δυκνύς
941. The infix -vv- or -vvv- counts short except in the singular in-
cative, where it counts long by analogy (929, 1).
942. THE VERB δείκνυμι ' show.
Imperfect
Present
INDICATIVE
δείκνυμι
δείκνυς
A. Active.
SUBJUNCTIVE
δεικνύω
δεικνύσης
δείκνυσι
δείκνυτον
δείκνυμεν
δείκνυ-τε
δεικνύ-ασι
δεικνύση, etc.
ἐδείκνυ-ν
ἐδείκνυ-ς
ἐδείκνυ
ἐδείκνυτον
δεικνύοιμι
δεικνύοις
δεικνύοι, etc.
ἐδεικνύ-την
ἐδείκνυμεν
ἐδείκνυ-τε
ἐδείκνυσαν
Fut.
δείξω, εις, etc.
Aor.
ἔδειξα, as, etc.
Perf.
δέδειχα, as, etc.
: Plpf.
ἐδεδείχειν, εις, etc.
IMPERATIVE
δείκνυ
δεικνύ-τω
δείκνυτον
δεικνύτων
δείκνυ-τε
δεικνύντων
ΟΙ -τωσαν
INFINITIVE
δεικνύναι
PARTICIPLE
δεικνύς, ύντος
δεικνύν,
99
δεικνύσα, ης
Subjunctive, Imperative, Infinitive
and Participle as in barytone
verbs (700b).
235
942, 943.] INFLECTION OF VERBS IN -(ν)νυμι.
Imperfect
Present
INDICATIVE
δείκνυμαι
δείκνυσαι
δείκνυται
δείκνυ-σθον
δεικνύ-μεθα
δείκνυσθε
B. Medio-passive.
SUBJUNCTIVE
δεικνύωμαι
δεικνύσῃ
δεικνύηται, etc.
δείκνυνται
ἐδεικνύ-μην
ἐδείκνυ-σο
δεικνυ-οίμην
δεικνύοιο
δεικνύοιτο, etc.
ἐδείκνυ-το
ἐδείκνυ-σθον
ἐδεικνύ-σθην
ἐδεικνύμεθα
ἐδείκνυσθε
ἐδείκνυ-ντο
IMPERATIVE
δείκνυσο
δεικνύ-σθω
δείκνυ-σθον
δεικνύ-σθων
δείκνυσθε
δεικνύ-σθων
Οι -σθωσαν
INFINITIVE
δείκνυσθαι
PARTICIPLE
δεικνύμενος
-ον
τη
άξω
ἀγήσομαι
ζεύξω
διαζευχθήσεται P
Fut. Mid.
Aor. Μid.
δείξομαι, η, etc.
ἐδειξάμην, ω, etc.
Fut. Pass. δειχθήσομαι, η, etc.
Λοr. Pass.
Aor.
Perf.
Plpf.
2. Mute Stems (γ).
I ἄγνυμι break
Pass.
2 ζεύγνυμι 'yoko
-Pass.
ἐδείχθην, ης, etc.
δέδειγμαι, ξαι, etc.
ἐδεδειγμην, ξο, etc.
Subjunctive, Imperative, Infinitive
and Participle as in barytone
verbs (700°).
943. OTHER ΕΧAMPLES IN - (N)ΝUΜΙ.
I. CONSONANTAL STEMS: -NUM.
ψαξα
ἐάγην
ἔλγα ' am broken
έζευξα
ἐξεύχθην
ἐζύγην
3 °ἀπο-κτίννυμι ‘kill
4 μ(ε)ίγνυμι mix
ἀπο-κτενῶ
ἀπέκτεινα
ζευγμαι
ἀπ-έκτονα
μίξω
ἔμιξα
μέμιχα
-Pass.
μιχθήσομαι
ἐμίχθην
ἐμίγην
κι ἀν-οίγνυμι ' open
--Pass.
ἀνοίξω
ανέφεα
ἀν-έῳχα
ἀνοιχθήσομαι
ἀν-εώχθην
ἀν-έγμαι (-γα)
Ο πήγνυμι ' fix
-Pass.
πήξω
ἔπηξα
παγήσομαι
ἐπαγην
πέπηγα 'am firm
7 ῥήγνυμι tear
Pass.
δήξω
έρρηξα
ῥαγήσομαι
ἐρράγην
ἔρρωγα 'am torn
b. Liquid Stems.
8 ἀπόλλυμι ruin
-Pass.
9 όμνυμι swoar
I
-Pass.
ἀπ-ολῶ, εἰς (892)
ἀπολοῦμαι
ὁμοῦμαι (892)
Ομοσθήσομαι
1 A mostly κατάγνυμι, G κατ-άσσω, also
κατ-εάσσω, Ν σπάω & σπάνω.
21 Ν ζεύγω (Nomoc. 412).
ἀπολώλεκα
απόλωλα 4 am lost
ὀμώμοια
3. Λ ἀποκτείνω, Α-Ν φονεύω, Ν σκοτώνω.
4" Α μίσγω; μίγω (Stud. 1229 B & C);
σμίγω from συμμί(σ)γω (937).
ἀπώλεσα
ἀπ-ωλόμην
ώμοσα
ὠμό(σ)θην
Ομώμο(σ)μαι
236
VERBS IN -(ν)νυμι
REDUPLICATED VERBS IN -μι. [943-948.
In A mostly and in N only ἀν-οίγω.
65 G-Ν πήσσω.
7 G βήσσω, Ν σπάω & σπάνω, but ῥαγίζω
'spring.'
a. Stem Vowel a:
10 κεράννυμι ‘mix
-Pass.
8 Η ἀπολλύω, Ν χαλῶ, χάνω.
9 Νομώνω -όνω), M also ὀμνέω (Belis.
455).
944. II. VOCALIC STEMS : -NNUMι.
κερῶ, ας
ἐπέρασα
ἐκράθην
κέκρᾶμαι (136)
Ρ ἐκεράσθην
1 κρεμάννυμι hang
κρέμαμαι ' hang
-Pass.
13 σκεδάννυμι scatter
κρεμώ, ας
ἐκρέμασα
κρεμήσομαι
ἐκρεμάσθην
12 πετάννυμι 'spread," open πετῶ, @s
ἐπέτασα
ἐπετάσθην
πέπταμαι (136)
σκεδῶ, ἃς
ἐσκέδασα
-Pass.
b. Stem Vowele :
14 ἀμφιέννυμι ' clothe
-Middle
15 κορέννυμι satisfy
-Pass.
16 σβέννυμι ' extinguish
-Pass.
ἐσκεδάσθην
ἐσκέδασμαι
ἀμφιῶ, εἰς
ἀμφιέσομαι
ἠμφίεσα
ἠμφιεσάμην
ἠμφίεσμαι ' have on
κορέσω & κορῶ, εἰς
ἐκύρεσα
ἐκορέσθην
κεκορεσμαι
σβέσω
ἔσβεσα
σβήσομαι
ἐσβέσθην
ἔσβεσμαι
ἔσβην (937)
ἔσβηκα
c. Stem Vowel w:
τη ζώννυμι ' gird
ζώσω
ἔδωσα
έξω (σ)μαι
18 °ρώ-ννυμι strengthon
δώσω
ἔρρωσα
-Pass.
ἐρρώσθην
ἒρρωμαι
19 στρώννυμι 'spread
στρώσω
ἔστρωσα
ἐστρώθην
ἔστρωμαι
-Pass.
To π κιρνάω, Β-Ν κερνάω (40. 116).
b
I ID κρεμάζω (Sept. Job 26, 7), Ν κρεμνάω.
I
Ν κρέμομαι.
12" ( πετάω, πετάζω (Aquil. Ex. 9, 9).
13) Η σκεδάω, Α σκεδάζω, Α - Ν σκορπίζω (937).
14" Η ἀμφιάζω, @ ἀμφιέζω, 1 ἐνδύω, ἐνδύνω
(Ν ντύνω 723).
15 Η κορέω (Sept. Deut. 3r, 20 κορήσουσι),
4 χορτάζω, Ν χορταίνω (937).
Η σβεννύω, Ν σβύνω (or σβήνω).
16
b
18
ρωννύω.
17 Η ζωννύω, Ν ζών (ν)ω.
19 Η στρωννύω, Ν στρών (ν)ω.
B. REDUPLICATED VERBS IN -MI.
945. The conjugation of the four verbs τίθημι 'put, ἵημι
send, δίδωμι give, ἵστημι ' set up' (927) shows the following
peculiarities :
946. The imperfect and 2nd aorist subjunctive [optative] contract
the modal vowel -- with the endlings to -ει -οι -αι respectively, and
moreover accent the contracted syllable, as:
τιθείην, τιθεῖτε, θείην, θεῖτε, δεδοίην, διδοῖτε, etc.
947. A similar contraction takes place in the following forms of
the imperfect:
ἐτίθεις, ἐτίθει; ἐδίδουν, ἐδίδους, ἐδίδου; ἀφίην (ἠφίειν), ἀφίεις, ἀφίει.
948. In the futuro imperative, the 2nd person singular shows the
ending -s : θές, ες, δός. But ἵστημι in the imprt. has στῆθι.
237
949-954.]
REDUPLICATED VERBS IN -μl.
949. When in the course of P times the future indicative and sub-
junctive of the above verbs assumed the regular form now (or Okow), åp-
now, dwow (964. 9961), it was inevitable that their imperative should also
become θέσε, άφησε, δῶσε. It is true that the 4 form 0és, äp-es, dós, is
the one practised by all P-B scribes and that even prosont speech ofton
admits of Oès and dòs (though only apнs!), so that philologists imagine that
they have discovered in these forms classical relics, but all morphological
and phonopathic considerations combine against this assumption. First
the scholastic practice of all scribes is in itself no proof of such anomalous
and solitary forms having actually boon current also in popular speech
through all times. Then their occurrence in presont parlance rests on a
mero fallacy. For though in connected speech uneducated people now
say, δύς του, θές το, δὸς τὸ μαχαίρι, θὲς ἐκεῖ τὸ καλαμάρι, and so on, they
oqually say πιάσ᾽ το, χώσ' το, âơ' To, åpno' To, and so on. On the other hand
before a stop, no one says dós, Oés, miάo', xwo', do', but invariably dŵσe,
θέσε [1], πιάσε, χῶσε, άσε, άφησε). In other words, the actual existenco in B-N
popular speech of forms like dds and Oès and above all äpes, is illusory (180b.
1915 f.), their truc popular and actual form, in case of apocope or rather
syncopo, being dão', éo', do', dpno'. That an actual syncope of -e
has taken place in those casos, is sufficiently shown also by the other-
wiso unaccountable presence of σ in the plural: dwore Oéσte (never
δότε, θέτε), πιάστε, χῶστε, ὥστε, ἀφῆστε, further ὁρίστε, κοπιάστε, πάρτε
Pépire (but more commonly pipere). See also 1915 f. & 136, 2.
950. The infinitive active attaches the ending -va, in the present,
to the short stem; in the 2nd aorist to the lengthened stem: Tɩðé-vai,
διδόναι, ἱστά-ναι-θείναι, δοῦναι, στῆναι.
951. The lengthened 2nd aorist stem orn- of ornμ is retained
through the indicative and infinitive. So too in the future impera-
tive (except before vr) where it retains the ending -0: ori (808).
952. The verbs Tíonui, inui, Sidwμi, form tho singular of the
rst aorist indicative in -κα (963, ε) : ἔθηκα, ηκα, ἔδωκα, from which
stem also plural forms are derived, beside those of the 2nd
aorist: ἐθήκαμεν, ἔθηκαν, ἐδώκαμεν, παρ-εδώκατε, ἔδωκαν.
952. Compare Moeris τo απέδομεν, ἀπέδοτε, ἀπέδοσαν ᾿Αττικῶς· ἀπεδώκαμεν,
ἀπεδώκατε, ἀπέδωκαν Ἑλληνικῶς.
953. In their conjugation, the verbs τίθημι, ἵημι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι are
accented like those in -w. Mark however that-
a. In the subjunctive they accent the contracted ending: row, iw,
διδῶ, ἱστῶ, τιθῇς, ἵης, διδῷς, ἱστῇς, τιθῇ, etc.
b. The compound forms follow the accentuation of the simple forms.
It is only in the indicative and imperative that the accent is thrown
as far back as possible, though even here not beyond the syllable
immediately preceding the stem, as:
ἀνάστηθι, περίθες (not πέριθες), σύνθετε, περίθετε, περίθου, περίθεσθε.
c. Novertheless the imporative of the future middle, when compounded
with monosyllabic propositions, retains the accent on the verb: mpooooû,
ἀφοῦ. Cp. 913.)
954. The primary subjunctive of these verbs always, and
the secondary subjunctive sometimes, follows the conjugation
of barytones in -ω, ς : τίθηται for τιθῆται, τίθοιτο for τιθοῖτο ἵηται,
πρύηται, ἐπί-θοιτο, πρό-οιτο, προσ-ίοιντο. 931. 937. 941.)
Compure Alchom. 384, 17 décоn els aµßikov naì “aσov ýµépas n' i) 5'.
238
THE VERBS τίθημι, ἵημι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι. [955.
955. Conjugation table of the four verbs τίθημι 'put, ἵημι ‘send,
δίδωμι ' give, ἵστημι ' set up.
I. ACTIVE.
PRESENT
INDICATIVE
τίθημι
τίθης
ἵημι
δίδωμι
in-s
δίδως
τίθησι
ἵστημι
τίθετον
11
τίθεμεν
IMPERATIVE
ιει
έστω
ἵε-τε
τιθέντων
τιθέναι
ἱέ-ντων
INFINITIVE
ié-vai
τίθετε
τιθέασι
τιθῶ
τιθῇς
τιθῆ
τιθῆ τον
11
τιθῶ-μεν
τιθῆτε
τιθῶσι
τίθει
τιθέτω
τίθετον
τιθέτων
τίθετε
δίδομεν
δίδο-τε
διδόασι
ἵη-σι
ἵe-τον
ἵε-μεν
LE
δίδωσι
δίδο-τον
11
ἵστης
ἵστη-σι
στα-τον
>>
ἵστα μεν
ἵστα-τε
ἱστα-σι
ע
SUBJUNCTIVE
διδω
διδως
ἱστῶ
διδῷ
ν
ΐε-τε
ἱα-σι
ἱω
της
ἱῆ-τον
ἱω-μεν
ἱη-τε
ἱω-σι
-TE
ΐς τον
ἱέτων
διδω τον
ἱστῇς
ἱστῇ
ἱστῇ τον
1)
ἱστά-τω
ἵστα-τον
ἱστά των
ιστατε
ἱστά-ντων
ἱστάναι
διδῶμεν
ἱστῶμεν
διδώτε
ἱστῆτε
διδῶσιν
ἱστῶσι
δίδου
ἵστη
διδότω
δίδοτον
διδότων
δίδο-τε
διδύ-ντων
διδόναι
PARTICIPLE
τιθείς, έντος
τιθέν
ἱείς, έντος
διδούς, όντος
ἱστάς, άντος
ἱέν,
διδούν
ἱστάν
""
""
τιθεῖσα, ης
ἱεῖσα, ης
διδούσα, ης
ἱστάσα, ης
IMPERFECT
INDICATIVE
ἐτίθη-ν
ἐτίθεις
ἐτίθει
ἐτίθετον
ἐτιθέ-την
Π
LEL
e-τον
ἵην
ΐει·ς
ἐδίδουν
ἵστην
ἐδίδους
ἵστη
ἐδίδου
ἵστη
ἐδίδο-τον
με την
ἐτίθε-μεν
ἵε-μεν
ἐδιδό την
ἐδίδομεν
ἵστα τον
ἱστά την
ἵστα-μεν
ἐτίθετε
LE-TE
ἐδίδο-τε
ἵστα-τε
ετίθεσαν
ἵε-σαν
ἐδίδοσαν
ἵστα-σαν
SUBJUNCTIVE [OPTATIVE]
τιθείην
ἱείην
διδοίην
ἱσταίην
τιθείης
ἱείης
διδοίης
τιθείη
ἱείη
διδοίη
ἱσταίης
ἱσταίη
διδοῖτον
τιθεῖ τον
τιθεί την
τιθεί-μεν
ἱεῖ-τον
ἱεί την
ἱεῖ-μεν
διδοί την
διδοῖ-μεν
διδοῖτε
τιθείτε
ἱει-τε
τιθεῖσεν
ἱεῖ-εν
διδοῖεν
ἱσται τον
ἱσταί την
ἱσταί μεν
ἱσταί-τε
ἱσταίσεν
239
955.] THE VERBS τίθημι, ἵημι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι.
SECOND AORIST
INDICATIVE
(ἔθηκα 952)
(ἔθηκα-ς)
(ἔθηκε")
(ἧκα 952)
(κα-ς)
(ήκε)
(ἔδωκα 952)
ἔστην
(ἔδωκας)
ἔστης
(ἔδωκε")
ἔθετον
ἐθέτην
ἔθε-μεν
ἔθετε
εί-τον
εΐ-την
ἔδο τον
で
​είμεν
ἐδό την
ἔδο-μεν
ἔστη
ἔστη-τον
ἐστή την
ἔστημεν
είτε
ἔδο-τε
ἔστη-τε
ἔθεσαν
εἶσαν
ἔδο-σαν
ἔστησαν
SUBJUNCTIVE [OPTATIVE]
θείην
θείης
εἴη-ν
δοίην
σταίην
εἵης
δοίης
σταίης
θείη etc.
ein etc.
δοίη etc.
σταίη etc.
INFINITIVE
θεῖναι
ειναι
δοῦναι
στῆναι
PARTICIPLE
θείς, έντος
θέν
εἷς, ἕντος
ἕν,
""
""
εἶσα, ης
δούς, όντος
δούν
δοῦσα, ης
στάς, άντος
στάν,
29
""
στάσα, ης
θείσα, ης
SECOND FUTURE (908).
SUBJUNCTIVE
θω
On-s
On etc.
θές
θέτω
θέτον
θέτων
θέτε
n-s
etc.
ES
-τον
-των
Ε-ΤΕ
Π
θέντων
δώ
δώς
δῷ etc.
IMPERATIVE
-τω
δός
δύ-τω
δό-τον
δότων
δύστε
ἕντων
δόντων
στῶ
στῇς
στῇ etc.
στῆ-θι
στή-τω
στῆ τον
στή των
στή-τε
στάντων
2. MEDIO-PASSIVE.
PRESENT
INDICATIVE
τίθεμαι
ε-μαι
δίδομαι
ἵσταμαι
τίθεσαι
ἵεσαι
δίδοσαι
ἵστασαι
τίθεται
ἵεται
δίδοται
ἵσταται
τίθε-σθον
e-σθον
δίδο-σθον
ἵστα-σθον
11
11
τιθέμεθα
έμεθα
διδόμεθα
ἱστά-μεθα
τίθεσθε
ἵεσθε
δίδοσθε
ἵστα-σθε
τίθενται
ἵε-νται
δίδονται
ἵστανται
240
THE VERBS τίθημι, ἵημι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι. [955.
τιθώμαι
τιθῇ
τιθῆται
τιθῆσθον
11
τιθώμεθα
ἱω-μαι
ἱῆται
ή-σθον
11
-μεθα
SUBJUNCTIVE
διδῶμαι
διδῷ
διδώται
διδω-σθον
11
ἱστω-μαι
ἱστῇ
ἱστῆται
ἱστή-σθον
τιθήσθε
ἱη-σθε
διδώ-μεθα
διδω-σθε
ἱστώ-μεθα
τιθώνται
ἱῶνται
διδῶνται
ἱστή-σθε
ἱστώνται
IMPERATIVE
τίθεσο
ἵε-σο
δίδο-σο
ἵστα-σο
τιθέσθω
ιέ-σθω
τίθε-σθον
ἵε-σθον
τιθέσθων
ιέσθων
τίθεσθε
ἵεσθε
διδόσθω
δίδο-σθον
διδόσθων
δίδοσθε
ἱστά-σθω
ἵστα-σθον
ἱστά-σθων
ἵστα-σθε
τιθέσθων
ἱέ-σθων
διδόσθων
ἱστά-σθων
INFINITIVE
τίθεσθαι
ἵε-σθαι
δίδοσθαι
ΐστασθαι
PARTICIPLE
τιθέμενος, ον, η
Τέμενος, ον, η
διδόμενος, ον, η ἱστάμενος, ον, η
IMPERFECT
INDICATIVE
ἐτιθέμην
έ-μην
ἐδιδόμην
ἱστά-μην
ἐτίθε-σο
ΐε-σο
ἐδίδο-σο
ἵστα-σο
ἐτίθετο
LE-TO
ἐδίδο-το
ἵστα-το
ἐτίθε-σθον
ἵε-σθον
ἐδίδο-σθον
ἵστα-σθον
ἐτιθέ-σθην
ἱέ-σθην
ἐδιδό-σθην
ἱστά-σθην
ἐτιθέμεθα
ιέμεθα
ἐδιδόμεθα
ἱστάμεθα
ἐτίθεσθε
ἵε-σθε
ἐδίδοσθε
ΐστασθε
ἐτίθεντο
ἵε-ντο
ἐδίδο-ντο
ἵστα-ντο
SUBJUNCTIVE [OPTATIVE]
τιθεί-μην
δεί-μην
διδοίμην
ἱσταίμην
τιθεί-ο
ἱει-ο
διδοῖτο
ἱσται-ο
τιθεί-το
ἱεῖ το
διδοι-το
ἱσταί-το
τιθεῖ-σθον
τιθεί-σθην
ἱεῖ-σθον
ἰεί-σθην
διδοῖ-σθον
ἱσταῖ-σθον
διδοί-σθην
ἱσταίσθων
τι είμεθα
ἱεί-μεθα
διδοίμεθα
σταί-μεθα
τιθεῖσθε
ἱεῖ-σθε
διδοῖσθε
ἱσται-σθε
τιθεί-ντο
ἱει-ντο
διδοῖ-ντο
ἱσταί-ντο
ἐθέμην
ἔθου
ἔθετο
ἔθο-σθον
ἐθέ-σθην
ἐθέμεθα
ἔθεσθε
ἔθεντο
-TO
εἶ-σθον
εἶμην
είσο
εί
SECOND AORIST
INDICATIVE
ἐδό-μην
ἔδου
wanting
ἔδοτο
ἔδο-σθον
εΐ-σθην
ἐδό-σθην
εἴμεθα
εἶσθε
ἐδό-μεθα
ἔδο-σθε
?
ει-ντο
ἔδοντο
241
R
955-959.] Τίθημι, ἵημι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι, AND COMPOUNDS.
SUBJUNCTIVE [OPTATIVE]
θεί-μην
θεί-ο
εΐμην
EL-0
δοί-μην
δοί-ο
wanting
θεῖ το, etc.
ei-ro, etc.
δοῖ-το, etc.
INFINITIVE
θέσθαι
-σθαι
δό-σθαι
wanting
PARTICIPLE
θέμενος, ον, η
-μενος, ον, η δόμενος, ον, η
wanting
SECOND FUTURE (908).
SUBJUNCTIVE
θωμαι
ω-μαι
δῶμαι
wanting
θῇ
δῷ
θῆται, etc.
ή-ται, etc.
δῶται, etc.
IMPERATIVE
θου
οὗ
θέσθω
θέ-σθον
θέσθων
-σθω
δοῦ
δόσθω
wanting
-σθον
δόσθων
δό-σθε
δόσθων
θέσθε
θέσθων
ἔ-σθων
-σθε
-σθων
δό-σθον
956. Mark the usual compounds of . -
α. τίθημι : ἀνα-, ἀπο-, δια-, ἐν-, ἐπι-, κατα-, μετα-, παρα-, προ-, προσ-,
συν-, υπο-
b. ἵημι : ἀν-, άφ-, δι-, ἐξ-, ἐφ-, καθ-, μεθ-, παρ-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ύφο
c. δίδωμι : ανα-, ἀπο-, δια-, ἐκ-, ἐν-, ἐπι-, μετα-, παρα-, προ-.
4. ἵστημι ἀν-, ἀνθ-, ἀφ-, δι-, ἐξ-, ἐφ-, καθ-, μεθ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, συν-, ὑφ
957. The P-N morphology of the verbs τίθημι ἵημι δίδωμι ἵστημι and
their compounds has been determined by the general agencies and
influences indicated in 936-7 and 7745. Now dealing here with
the reduplicated class of u-verbs in particular, it must be noted that
the tendency for a uniform thematic sonant (758. 775), and the
presence here of a contracted subjunctive (τιθῶ, θῶ, ἱω, ὦ, τιθῇς, θῇς, της,
etc.), as well as imperfect indicative (ἐτίθουν, -ει ; ἐδίδουν, -ου), called
forth a systematically contracted conjugation. Accordingly-
958. The above verbs, ever since II times, appear now in a contracted,
now in a barytone form:
-
οι
Η
-
τίθημι : ( - Β τιθω, -είς, -εί, etc.-or τίθω, εις, ει, etc. (Ν θέτω 959).
ἀφίημι: (-1 ἀφιῶ, -είς, -εῖ, etc.—or ἀφίω, εις, ει, ole. (whenco N αφίνω 902,
G-B
960), ἀφεω (αφέω? 960) ἀφω (960). - Folt throughout us simplo vorb (720).
δίδωμι : G- διδῶ, -οίς, -οι (-είς, -ei 251) etc.—or δίδω, εις, ει, ole. (10 M).
ἵστημι : G- Β ἱστῶ, -ας, -ᾷ, etc.—or ἱστάνω and ἑ]στήκω, -είς, -el, etc. (Ν
σταίνω 900 1.).
959. Τίθημι τιθώ τίθω-Ν θέτω. Owing to its hard pronunciation
in popular speech, the form ri0w has been changed by dissimilation
and metathesis to *θιτω (126. 143), and then modified to θέτω through
the influence of such forms as θέτε, τίθετε, ἔθετε, ἐτίθετε, τίθεται,
242
Τίθημι, ἵημι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι, AND COMPOUNDS. [959-963.
ἐτίθετο, ἔθετο, and particularly θετός, θέτης, θετικός with their numerous
and popular compounds (¹).
I
a. GKaibel 1096 (=CIG 2722) ȧvaríew. Great Louvre Pap. 333 napaтibwv.
Hormas Vis. I, 1, 3 & 2, 1, 2 τίθω (οι τιθῶ). Acta Tho. 93, το προσετίθοντο.
(or
Acta Thad. 277, 2ο ἐπιτίθων. Acta Andr. 9 προστίθων, ἐπιτίθειν. Leont.
Noap. V. J. 45, 46 mapaтilew. Theoph. 423, 23 èmiтilew. Stud. 1713 c
παρατίθειν.
пaрaðñσaι. (Сp. Andr. C. Method. 1332 α πроotíoηtɩ.)
960. 'Ap-íími—åpiŵ—¿píw (N ¿pinw 902)—åpeŵ—¿‹.—The last
form is a contraction of the preceding aøe (152) [incorrectly accented
adéw, as in Luke 5, 20; 23. 7, 47; 48. John 20, 23. 1 John 2, 12] which
again is a contaminatory product of adi x (éáw)èô (116), the latter
having been, since G times, a very popular substitute for its synony-
mous but irregular ἀφίημι.
a. Sept. 2 Par. 26, 5 d ovviæv; so Iren. 468; Matt. 6, 12 & Luke 11, 4
appioμev; Mark 1, 34 & 11, 16 ½pie; Matt. 9, 2 & 5 (D) ápíovraι. Rev. 2, 20
ἀφίονται.
åpeîs. CLeomans Pap. Gr. ii. 109, 4 πapapíwv; 231, 4 aveiwv. Sext. 32, 32
ἀφεῶ. Socr. 404 Λ ήφιεν ; Apophth. 280 A ἀφίει; 97 ο ἤφιε ; Eus. Alex. 400
Β΄ ἀφίαν
B apic; Doroth. 1632 A a porper. 1633 A ah (write ae); Leont.
a ȧpoûµev.
a ȧpeî);
Neap. V. J. 78, 5 ἀφίομεν ; 30, 12 (Ε r) & 78, 2 (Ε) αφίωμεν ; 73, 6 ἀφίουσαι ;
78, 7 (E) ȧpíw;—Matt. 13, 13 ovviovoi. Mark 4, 12 ovviwo; Hermas Mand.
6, 2 & 6 ; σύνιε. Apophth. 280 € ἀφίει.
δίδω
961. Δίδωμι Διλώ-Δίδω (so N, 9966). Sept. Ex. 2, 21 & 5, 13;
Δίδωμι-Διδώ-Δίδω -
NT 1 Cor. II, 23 παρεδίδετο ; Acts 4, 35 διεδίδετο; Apophth. 340 € προδίδω ;
Acta Tho. 42, 28 ἀποδίδετε; 39, 19 ἀπεδίδετο ; Acta Joan. 47, 16 ἐδίδετο
[Mark] Liturg. 307 μeтadida. [Grog. Naz.] ii. 712 A Tape didns (write -deis);
Apophth. 340 o mapedidel. Grogent. 600 в Tapedídeтo? Callin. 78, 30 didw
(ubi διδῶ). Loont. Neap. V. J. 62, 23 & 76, 15 didw; also V. S. 1725 a;
1733 c; V. J. 73, 15 évdideis; V. S. 1733 ▲ (Vind.) dídeus; V. J. So, 3 & 11
παραδίδει. 23, 11 ote. δίδει ; 41, η δίδετε ; V. S. 17, 29 Β ἐνδίδουσιν ; V. J.
77, 4 & 9 δίδης ; 62, 17 ; 72, 5; 77, 7 & 14 δίδειν ; 49, 7 δίδων ; or 7 διαδίδων,
etc. So xii. Patr. 1137 A; Martyr. Areth. 34; Jejun. 1912 D;-So finally
Theoph. Porph, and N passim.—See 996ы1.
962. "IcthmicTÁNw (from iorúvai), N CтAiNw (723. 900)—E]LTHKW
(from ἕστηκα 723), Ν στέκω (965) διιστάνω (Ρ-Β), ἐξιστάνω (Sept., NT,
etc.), Tapioτávw (Philo, NT, etc.). CIA iv. 6306 (32 B. C.), 26 iotavó-
μενος. Εφημ. ἀρχ. 1884 1. 167-8, 13 (Β.C. 48-117) παριστάνοντος.
Mitth. xix. 252 (III A.D., Athens), 75 πapɑotavétw! also Acts 1,6(Beza)
αποκαταστάνεις. Great Louvre Pap. 257 στάμενος (for ἱστ-). ib. 1711
παραστὼς δαιμόνιον.—Ιστάω [from ἱστῶ, τῆς etc.] (Diosc. etc.), ἀφιστάω
(Luc., Test. Patr., etc.), duorúw (Dion. Thr.), égiráw (NT), ¿pioráw
(Diosc. etc.), μeboτáw (Diod. etc.), napioráw (Dion. Thr., Sext.,
etc.). See also 965 f. & 996118.
963. The remaining A tense forms follow the conjugation of
sonantic barytone vorbs, with the following deviations :
a. The stem vowel remains short in several cases, as : dédoμai,
δοθήσομαι, ἐδόθην.
b. The stem vowel is irregularly lengthened in the forms
εἶκα, εἶμαι, τέθηκα (Γ' τέθεικα after είκα), and τέθειμαι.
A different but too olaborato and improbable theory is propounded by
GIIatzidakis in KZ xiii 105-117. Cp 993.
243
R 2
963 -967.] Τίθημι, ἵημι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι—τέθνηκα.
963 c. The singular of the rst aorist active of τίθημι, ἵημι,
δίδωμι has -- for tense character : ἔθηκα, ἧκα, ἔδωκα (952).
ICTHMI
(stom στα)
964.
ΤΙΘΗΜΙ
(stem θε)
ΓΙ
ΗΜΙ
(stem )
Future
θήσω
ἥσω
Δίδωμι
(stem δο)
δώσω
στήσω
Ist Aor.
Perf.
ἔθηκα (only sing.)
τέθηκα
ἧκα (only sing.) ἔδωκα (only sing.)
ἔστησα ' set up'
δέδωκα
ἕστηκα ‘stand
(Ρ τέθεικα)
Perf. pass. (τέθειμα 963, b) είμαι
δέδομαι
Λor. pass. ἐτέθην
εἴθην
ἐδόθην
Fut. pass. τεθήσομαι
εθήσομαι
δοθήσομαι
Plup. εἱστήκειν stood
(Ρ-Β ΐσταμαι)
ἐστάθην
σταθήσομαι.
964. Instead of τέθειμαι, A writers commonly use κείμαι (992).
965. The intransitive perfect ἕστηκα (subj. ἑστήκω) has given birth
to a new present ἑ]στήκω (found even in Sept. and NT etc.), and in
association with ἵστημι (ἵστημι κ ἑστήκω) to Μ ἱστήκω. Again this con-
taminatory form, taken in association with σταίνω (or σταίνομαι), has led to
the further N form (σταίνω χ στήκω) σταίκω or rathor στέκω ; mark further
(ἵσταμαι κ στέκω) στέκω (Belth. 391. 395 ; 785. 845. 561 ἱστάθην), and finally
rocent N (στήκω χ σταίνω) στήνω. Cp. 996118
966. Several forms of the intransitive ἕστηκα and εἱστήκειν
are derived from the stem έστα, without tense character :
ἑστᾶσι
Imperat. ἔσταθι
Perf. Indic. ἵστατον,
Subj. ἐστῶμεν
σταμεν, ἕστατε,
ἑστῶσι
Infin. εστάναι
Part. ὁ ἑστώς, ώτος
τὸ ""
ἡ ἑστῶσα, ης
""
Plpf. Indic. εστάτην ἕστασαν
เ
Subj. ἑσταίην.
967. The conjugation of the perfect ἕστηκα is followed also by
τέθνηκα um dead (perfect of θνήσκω or θνῄσκω ' die'), δέδοικα
'fear' (with no present).
α. Τέθηκα.
INDICATIVE
Perf. τέθνηκα -κας
-Κε
τίθνατον τέθνατον
SUBJUNCTIVE
τεθνήκω, -κῃς,
etc.
IMPERATIVE
-κη
τέθναι die'
τέθναμεν τέθνατε τεθνάσι"
INFINITIVE
τεθνάναι
PARTICIPLE
Plup. ἐτεθνήκειν, -κεις, κει
etc.
τεθναίην, -ης, -η
etc.
τεθνεώς, -ῶτος
τεθνείς, αύτος
τεθνεώσα, της.
For the P-N conjugation of τέθνηκα see 736-9 and 996 με
112
Il Supt. Ex. 14, 13 (v. 1.). 3 Rog. 8, 11. NT Murk 3, 31; Rom 14, 4. Chrys, i.
35 D (στήκεσθαι). Nil. 252 A.
Stud. 1736 A.
244
THE VERBS δέδοικα AND οἶδα.
[967–970 b.
Perfect
Pluperfect
INDICATIVE
δέδοικα & δέδια
δέδοικας & δέδιας
δέδοικε" & δέδιευ
δέδιτον
δεδοίκαμεν & δέδιμεν
δεδοίκατε & δέδιτε
δεδοίκασι & δεδιᾶσι
ἐδεδοίκειν οι -κη
ἐδεδοίκεις » -κης
ἐδεδοίκει
ἐδεδοίκεσαν
1. Δέδοικα (γέλια).
& ἐδεδίειν
& έδεδίεις
& ἐδεδίει
ἐδέδιτον
ἐδεδίτην
ἐδέδιμεν
ἐδέδιτε
ἐδέδισαν
(or ἐδεδίεσα
SUBJUNCTIVE
δεδίω (δεδοίκω)
etc.
IMPERATIVE
δέδιθι
δεδίτω
etc.
INFINITIVE
δεδιέναι & δεδοικέναι
PARTICIPLE
δεδιώς & δεδοικώς, ότος
δεδιώς & δεδοικός
δεδινῖα & δεδοικυία, ας
968. In P popular speech this verb retreated before φοβούμαι (cp.
937). It does not occur in Biblical compositions and is extinct in N,
while A φοβούμαι is still the universal term in colloquial N.
969. Here is to be classed also the defective oîda 'know,'
which is used as a present and borrows its aorist from γιγνώσκω
'get to know.'
Perfect
Pluperfect
INDICATIVE
οἶδα οἶσθα οἶδε
SUBJUNCTIVE
εἰδῶ εἰδῆς εἰδῇ
ΐστον
ἵστον
etc.
ἴσμεν
ιστε
ἴσασι
ᾔδειν & ἤδη
ᾔδει
etc.
IMPERATIVE
ἴσθι ἴστω
ἴστον ἴστον
ἴστε ἴστωσαν
ᾔδεις οι ᾔδεισθα & ᾔδης or ᾔδησθα εἰδείην, εἰδείης, εἰδείη εἰδέναι
ᾔδειτον & ᾖστον
δείτην & στην
δ η
INFINITIVE
PARTICIPLE
εἰδώς, ότος
εἰδός,
ειδυία, us
ᾔδειμεν & ᾖσμεν
ᾔδειτε & ᾖστε
ᾔδεσαν
Future εἴσομαι ' shall know or learn,'Aorist ἔγνων ' got to know.
970. In P-B Greek οἶδα is conjugated regularly: οἶδα, οἶδας (also
oides duc to eides, as Gr. Urk. Berlin 261 [123]; Great Louvre Pap. etc.),
οἶδε, οἴδαμεν, οἴδατε, οἴδασι"; ᾔδειν, ᾔδεις, etc.; future εἰδήσω, aorist εἴδησα ;
the syncopated forms having disappeared during G times. Hence
in NT we only once read ἴσασι (Acts 26, 14), and once ἴστε (Heb.
12, 17, perhaps also in Jus. I, 19), whereas the regular P form is
common. Cp. Sept. Deut. 4, 35 εἰδῆσαι. Philostr. 388 εἰδέτωσαν.
Chrys. iii. 595 c εἰδέτω.
970". In N oïda is extinct, except perhaps in the standing phrase vis
οἶδε ; ' who knows ? Κύριος οἶδε • Honvon knows.
971-973. See p. 247.
245
974, 975.] VERBS CONJUGATED AFTER
ἵστημι—φημί.
STEM
ονα
974. Other verbs following the conjugation of ἵστημι.
1 ὀνίνη- με beneft
ὀνίνα-μαι (middle)
1
>
FUTURE
ὀνήσω
AORIST
PERFECT
ὤνησα
ὠνήθην (Pass.)
ὀνήσομαι
ὠνησάμην
2 ñí-μ-π-μ ‘fill
πλά
πλήσω,
ΕΠ
έπλησα
πληθ
πλησθήσομαι ἐπλήσθην
3 πί-μ-πρη-μι ‘burn
πρα
πρησω
έπρησα
πρηθ
πρησθήσομαι
ἐπρήσθην
4 "αγα-μαι admie
(
άγα
αγάσομαι
ἠγάσθην
5
δύνα-μαι can
δυνα
δυνήσομαι
ἐ- οι ή-δυνήθην
πέπληκα
πέπλησμαι
πέπρηκα
πεπρησμαι
δεδύνημαι
ἐπίσταμαι know
ἐπιστα
ἐπιστήσομαι
ἠπιστήθην
κρέμα-μαι hang
κρεμα
8 φημί ' say ' ; see 975 | φά, φη
κρεμήσομαι
REMARKS (937)
G ὀνέω-4 ὠφελέω, Ν φελάω
A aor. subj. ὀναίμην, ἔναιο ; Infn. ὄνασθαι
Η πιμπλάω, 4 πλήθω, πληρόω, Α-Ν γεμίζω
Η πιμπάω, Β-Ν πρήσκω, 4 κάω & καίω, Ν καίω
4 In the pres. and imperf. subj. the verbs
δύναμαι, ἐπίσταμαι, κρέμαμαι, have recessive ac-
cent: δύνωμαι, ἐπίστωμαι, κρέμωμοι, δύναιο, ἐπί-
σταιο, κρέμαιο ; and drop the o of the ending σο,
with contraction (762. 782.934): ἐπίστω, ἐδύνω,
ἠπίστω.-Η-Ν δύνομαι, G-Ν κρέμομαι (774. 99654).
975. CONJUGATION OF THE VERB φημίο
246
INDICATIVE
SUBJUNCTIVE
φημί
φής (φης)
φησίν φω
φῇς
φῇ
IMPERATIVE
φάθι [1] φάτω
φατόν
φατόν
ψητον
φητον
φάτον
φάτων
φαμέν
φατέ
φασίν φῶμεν
φῆτε
φωσι
Φάτε
φάντων
ἔφην
ἔφησθα [2]
ἔφη
φαίην Φαίης
Φαίη
INFINITIVE
ἔφατον
ἐφάτην
φαῖτον
φαίτην
ἔφαμεν
ἔφατε
ἔφασαν
φαίμεν
Φαίτε
φαίεν
φάναι
PARTICIPLE
φάσκων (996.92).
[1] Mueris 356 φαθὶ ᾿Αττικῶς εἰπὲ Ἑλληνικῶς.
[2] Phryn. ἔφης ἔστι μὲν παρὰ τοῖς ἀρχαίοις, ἀλλ᾽ ὀλίγον· τὸ δὲ πλεῖστον ἔφησθα,
Ἵστημι AND φημί. AORIST AFTER ἔστην. [971-979.
Continuation from p. 245.
971. In T-B compositions the subjunctive εἰδῶ, εἰδῇς, etc. appears occasionally
in our texts, but in unscholarly productions it seems to be a mere misspelling of
ἴδω, ἴδῃς, etc. (in N ἰδῶ, ἰδῇς) from ἰδεῖν (ep. 717 [1] & 913 f.).
972. As regards its meaning, the verb ἵστημι is transitive in the
present, imperfect, future, and ist aorist active; intransitive in the
2nd aorist, also in the perfect and pluperfect active and in the future
perfect (997, 1).
'set up.'
Present ἵστημι
'get up,' 'stand.' 'set up for myself.' 'am set up.'
ἵσταμαι
ἵσταμαι
Fut. στήσω
στήσομαι
στήσομαι
Aor. ἔστησα
ἔστην
ἐστησάμην
ἕστηκα 4 am standing
Porf.
Fut. pf.
ἑστήξω ' shall stand
ἵσταμαι
σταθήσομαι
ἐστάθην
(ἕστηκα)
(ἑστήξω)
973. But P καθέστακα (active) Sept. Jer. 1, 10; I Macc. 1o, 20 ; παρέστακα
Polyb. 3, 941 7 ; Sext. 756, 6; συνέστακα Sext. 485, 5 ; ἐφεστάκει Polyb. 10,
20, 5 ; ἀνέστακεν Sept. 1 Reg. Ι5, 12 ; καθέσταμαι Sept. Num. 3, 32 ; συνέστα-
μαι Polyb. 8, 3, 2; Sext. 212, 23, 216, 20; Mitth. xix. 249, 2 (+III rd
Athens) Ελαφηβολιῶνος η' ἑσταμένου (=ἱσταμένου); ἀφεστάθη IMoschos 2008.
974, 975. See opposite page.
975 b. When not emphatic, the entire present indicative of φημὶ is
enclitic save in the 2nd person þýs. (102, d. Cp. 982.)
976. Though very common in A, the verb φημί retreats before λέγω
in P times, owing to its irregular - inflection (936-7). Even the NT
writers make but a limited use of it, and that principally in the
standing and parenthetical forms ἔφη and φησί, less frequently
φασί. (φημὶ only in 1 Cor. 7, 29. 10, 15; 19; 50.)
976. As a matter of course, N preserves no traeo of φημί.
977. Preceded by the negation οὐ, the verb φημί means deng,
refuse. The imperfect form épny has the force of an aorist: said;
hence the real mperfect of φημὶ is ἔφασκον from φάσκω (996.02). The
normal futuro φήσω and aorist ἔφησα are used in the sense of assert,
acknowledge.
1
1
1
978. 9. The verb ἠμὶ ' say is found only in the following forms: ἠμὶ
say, ἦν δ' ἐγὼ 'quoth I, ή δ' ός 'quoth he, ή δ' ή 'quoth she. It
occurs chiefly in Plato's dialogues, but is foreign to P-N. (Cp. 605.)
979. Conjugation of and aorist after
ἔβην
ἀπ-έδραν
ἔβης
ἔβη
ἕδρας
ἔδρα
στην.
INDICATIVE
ἔγνων
ἔγνως
ἔδυν
ἀπέσβην
ἔσβης
ἔσβη
ἔσβητον
ἐσβήτην
ἔγνω
ἔγνωτον
ἐγνώτην
ΣΕΙΚΙΕΣ
ἔδρατον
δράτην
ἔβητον
ἐβήτην
βημεν
ἔβησαν
ἔδραμεν
ἔδρατε
δρασαν
ἔβητε
ἔσβημεν
ἔσβητε
ἔσβησαν
ἔγνωμεν
ἔγνωτε
ἔγνωσαν
δυτον
ἐδύτην
ἔδυμεν
ἔδυτε
ἔδυσαν
247
979-981.] AORISTS AFTER ἔστην-εἰμί.
SUBJUNCTIVE
βαίην
ἀπο-δραίην
ἀπο-σβαίην
γνοίην
((dúny)
βαίης
δραίης
σβαίης
γνοίης
βαίη
δραίη
σβαίη
γνοίη
βαλτον
δραῖτον
σβαῖτον
γνοῖτον
βαίτην
δραίτην
σβαίτην
γνοίτην
+Also
βαμεντ
δραμεν
σβαίμεν
γνοίμεν
βαῖτε
δραῖτε
σβατε
γνοίτε
βαίημεν,
ἀπο-
δραίημεν, ἀποσβαίη.
μεν, γνοίημεν etc.
βαλεν
δραῖεν
σβαλεν
γνοῖεν
INFINITIVE
βῆναι
| αποδράναι
| ἀπο-σβῆναι | γνῶναι
| δύναι
PARTICIPLE
βάς, άντος
βάν
>>
βασα, ης
ἀπο-δράς, άντος
-δράν,
-δράσα, ης
ἀπο-σβείς, έντος | γνούς, όντος | δύς, ύντος
-σβέν,
>>
""
-σβεῖσα, ης
γνόν
γνοῦσα, ης
δύν,
27
δύσα, ης
Future
βῶ
ἀπο-δρῶ
SUBJUNCTIVE
ἀπο-σβῶ
γνῶ
δύω
βής
δρᾶς
σβῇς
γνῷς
δύης
Bn
δρα
σβῇ
γνώ
δύν
βῆτον
δρᾶτον
σβητον
γνῶτον
δύητον
29
""
βῶμεν
βήτε
δρώμεν
δρᾶτε
σβῶμεν
γνωμεν
δύωμεν
σβητε
γνώτε
δύητε
βῶσι
δρῶσιν
σβῶσι
γνωσι
δύωσι
IMPERATIVE
βηθι
ἀπό-δραθι
ἀπό-σβηθι
γνωθι
δύθι
βήτω
-δράτω
-σβήτω
γνώτω
δύτω
βῆτον
-δρατου
-σβητον
γνῶτον
δύτον
βήτων
-δράτων
-σβήτων
γνώτων
δύτων
βῆτε
-δρατε
βάντων
-δράντων
σβητε
-σβέντων
γνώτε
δύτε
γνώντων
δύντων
οι βήτωσαν or -δράτωσαν οι -σβήτωσαν
οι γνώτωσαν ) or δύτωσαν
Present
980. See opposite page.
OTHER SOLITARY VERBS IN -μl.
981. 1. eiµì'am' (stem eo, es-se).
INDICATIVE
SUBJUNCTIVE
εἰμί
Fi
ἐστίν
is
?
ἴσθι
ἐστόν
ἐστόν
ἦτον
ἦτον
στον
ἐσμέν ἐστέ
εἰσίν
ὦμεν
ήτε
ὦσι"
ἔστε
IMPERATIVE
ἔστω
ἔστων
ἔστων & ἔστωσαν
Οι ὄντων
INFINITIVE
εἶναι
PARTICIPLE
ὤν, ὄντος
ἦν
ἦσθα
ἦν
εἴην
εἴης
εἴη
ἧστον
στην
εἴητον
εἰήτην
μεν ήτε
ἦσαν
& οἶτον
εἴτην
(ήστε)
εἴημεν
& εἶμεν
εἴητε
εἴησαν
&
ὄν,
ELEV
""
οὖσα, οὔσης.
Continued on p. 250.
248
SECOND AORISTS AFTER ἔστην.
[980.
in
-W,
OTHER 2ND AORISTS FORMED AFTER ἔστην.
vowel.
tion of corny throughout (979), thus showing a lengthened stem
which is sometimes called the syncopated aorist, follows the conjuga-
active without thematic vowel (athematic aorist, 927). This 2nd aorist,
980. Some verbs with the stem vowel a, ε, ο, υ, though ending mostly
follow the analogy of verbs in -μ in that they form a 2nd aorist
a. Stam Vowel a:
1 *βαίνω 'g0
2 φθάνω anticipate
STEM FUTURE
3 °ἀπο-διδράσκω ' run away ' δρα ἀπο-δράσομαι
2nd AORIST
βα βήσομαι
φθαφθήσομαι
(P-N φθάσω)
ἔ-βην
ἔφθην (P-N
βέβηκα
ἔ-φθακα
PERFECT
N' aor. ἀν-, κατέβηκα (801)
a
N aor. ἔφτασα & ἔφταξα
ἔφθασα)
ἀπ-έδραν, ας, α
ἀπο-δέδρακα
(Ρ ἀπ-έδρασα)
'endure
τλα | τλήσομαι
ἔ-τλην
τέτληκα
P-N βαστάζω, Ν βαστῶ (870)
b. Stem Vowel €:
5 °péw 'run,' ' flow'
ρυε
ῥυή-σομαι
ἐ-ρρύην
ἐρρύη-κα
(Ρ. ρεύσω)
(Ρ ἔρρευσα)
8 *γι-γνώσκω ‘know
}
6 *χαίρω rejoice
7 *σβέννυμαι ' extinguish
c. Stem Vowel o:
9 °βιόω Ρ' live
C
10 αλίσκομαι am taken
d. Stem Vowel u:
11 "δύομαι 'go into
12 φύσομαι grow
(
σβε ἀπο-σβήσομαι ἀπ-έ-σβην
χαρε χαιρήσω
ἐ-χάρην
KE-
κεχρη-κα
(Ρ χρήσομαι)
ἀπέσβηκα
γνο
γνώσομαι
ἔγνων
ἔγνω-κα
G- Ν χαίρομαι, χαρώ, να χαρού
μενος & χαιράμενος (= χαίρων)
Ν σβύνω οι -ήνω, σβύσω,
σβυμένος (σβη-)
Ν γνώθω, γνώσω ; γνωρίζω
(G-N γνώσω,
βιο
βιώσομαι
ἐβίων
βεβίωκα
όλο | ἁλώσομαι
ἑ-άλων
ἑ-άλω-κα
δυ
δύ-σομαι
ἔ-δυν
φυ
φύ-σομαι
ἔ-φῦν
δέδύ-κα
| πέφυκα
Ν φυτρώνω
249
981-985°.] PECULIARITIES AND P-N HISTORY OF εἰμί.
Continuation from p. 248.
Future: ἔσομαι, ἔσῃ (ἔσει 763), ἔσται (136, 1)-ἔσεσθον, ἔσεσθον—ἐσόμεθα,
ἔσεσθε, ἔσονται. Aor. Subj. [Optat.] ἐσοίμην. Inf. ἔσεσθαι. Part. ἐσόμενος.
982. With the exception of the one form ef thou art,' the entire present
indicative of elµì is enclitic (102, d), when it serves as copula 'am' (1249),
but it is orthotone when it carries omphasis and means exist.
983. The 3rd person singular is paroxytone, ἔστι
a. when it begins a clause.
b. when it means there exists, there is.
c. when it stands for ἔξεστι it is permitted.
d. when it comes after ὡς, οὐκ, εἰ, καί—also after elided ἀλλ' and τοῦτ',
as : ὡς ἔστι, τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι” id est, ἀλλ᾽ ἔστι.
984. In composition, εἰμὶ draws back the accent in the indicative and
imperative, as : πάρειμι, πάρει, πάρεστι, etc. παρισθι--but παρῶ, παρῇς, etc.
παρεῖναι, παρών ; παρῆν, παρῆς, etc. παρέσται (from παρέσεται 136, 1).
985. Notable P-N forms of cluí (cp. Winer-Schmiedel 117 f.):
Β Ν εἶμαι
είσαι (773)
P-N ἔνι, M-N ἔνε (ἔναι), Ν εἶνε (είναι) [1]
P-N ήμην [3], Β-Ν ήμουνα
ής [4]
ἦτο
Β-Ν εἴμεθα (Ν εἴμεστα)
εἶσθε (είστε)
ένε (ναι), Ν εἶνε (είναι) [1]
Imperativo
Ρ-Βἔσο, Νήσου ;
ἥτω ἤστω; ἧστε;
ήτωσαν []).
""
ἤσου" ([Nil.] 545 Β)
ἦτονα
11
"7
P-N ἤμεθα (Ν ἤμεστα, also ήμασταν 801)
ἦτε, Ν ἦστε (also ήσασταν 801°)
ἦσαν, N also ἦταν
985. In M-N compositions, chiefly those of South Italian Greek, a curious
infinitivo εἶσθαι (εἶσται) is often mot with, probably coined by B seribos
aftor the ancient modio-passivo infinitive, as: Chron. Mor. Prol. 168 &
4831 θέλει εισται. This form, however, is foreign to popular speech in
Greek countries. Mark further that in G-B εἰμὶ servos also for ὦ, and
&,
ἦμεν for ὦμεν (as Acta Xanth. 6, 35).
985. In G-B diction, εἰμὶ being folt too irregular is vory often replaced
by ὑπάρχω, especially in the subj., part. and fut. (937. 1845, 2107). Moreover
the subj. ŵ, pis, n', etc., often assumes the form of the indicativo (cp. 779),
[1] The spelling ive, started by somo N scribes who claim to soo a meta-
thesis from evɩ, is nugatory. Equally untenablo is tho spelling elvou adoptod by
the Grook public at large (owing to its formal coincidence with the A
infinitive είναι) and now accepted by CHatzidakis (207) who pleads that the
torminal -e (io. -αι) is duo to the two other endlings είμαι and είσ-αι. But it will
be remembered that Greek, whether A or N, knows of no such verbal endings;
it is morely aware of the full tormination -Mai -Cal -TAI. Now if those endings
-ΜΑΙ ΤΑΙ
had played a part in the abovo process of change from evɩ to ene, it would have
led to *εται & *είται, not to NΑΙ ΔΕ ΕΙΝΑΙ. Honce it is more rational to assume an
assimilation of torminal e to the preceding thematic - (acconted as it is), thus
producing the M form ene, still current in somo dialects (Crete, Cypros, South
Italy, etc.). As to the ultimate form eive (eîva), it hus boen obtained by regrossive
assimilation of the stom - to that of all the rest εἴ- (εί-μαι, εἶσαι, εἴμεθα
είσθε).
[2] The form ἔσo is due to πάθητο, ἵστατο, etc.—Ησου after φυλάσσοY, στά ογ,
τυλίεςογ.- For ἤτω and ἥστω 800 116, - Ήστε from ἤστω.—Ἤτωσαν from ήτω.
On the froquont use in d-B of ήτω lor ἔστω, ep. Clem. R. ad Cor. 48, 5 ήτω τις
πιστός, ήτω δυνατὸς γνῶσιν ἐξειπεῖν, ήτω σοφὸς ἐν διακρίσει λόγων, τω γοργὸς
ἐν ἔργοις, τω ἁγνός.
[3] Phryn. 130 ΗΜΗΝ εἰ καὶ εὑρίσκεται παρὰ τοῖς ἀρχαίοις, οὐκ ἐρεῖς, ἀλλ᾽ ἦν
ἐγώ. Moeris 158 ὴν ᾿Αττικῶς, ΗΜΗΝ Ἑλληνικῶς.
[4] Phryn. 124 AC ἐν ἀγορᾷ σόλοικον· λέγε οὖν μεθα. ὀρθότερον δὲ χρῷτο ἂν
ὁ λέγων· ἐὰν ἧς ἐν ἀγορᾷ. Moeris 161 ᾖεθα Αττικῶς, ᾖς Ἑλληνικῶς.
250
THE VERBS χρή, εἶμι, κείμαι.
[985 C-990.
as: CGL 230, 9 f. ἄν σοι ἡδύ ἐστι 'si tibi suaue est. 650, η ἄν σοι ἡδύ ἐστιν
'si tibi suaue est.'
986. 2. Χρή (sc. ἐστι) it behoves, is an indeclinable sub-
stantive (χρέα ? 2o *), but coalesces with εἰμὶ and produces the
following forms:
INDICATIVE
χρή (sc. έστι)
χρῆν (i.e. χρέα ἦν)
& ἐχρῆν
20
SUBJUNCTIVE
INFINITIVE
PARTICIPLE
χρῇ (i.e. χρέα ή) χρῆναι (i.e. χρέα εἶναι τὸ χρεών (indecl.)
χρείη (i.e. χρέα εἴη)
987. The verb χρὴ appears to be foreign to P-B speech. It occurs only
once in the NT (Jas. 3, 10), its placo having been taken by xpeía èoriv or
χρείαν ἔχειν, a substitute still common in N.
Present
987 D. The form αποχρῆ (not ἀπόχρη etc. belongs to ἀποχράω (996314).
°988. 3. εἶμι ' shall go. Stems εἰ- (ep. 929) & i- (ep. Latin i-re).
Imperfect
INDICATIVE
IMPERATIVE
SUBJUNCTIVE
"/
εἶμι
eî
ἴμεν
εἶσι"
ἵτον ΐτον
ἴτε ἴασι"
ἴω
της เก
ἴητον
ἴθι
ἴητον
τον
ἴωμεν ἵητε
ἴωσι
ἴτε
ἴτω
ἴτων
ιόντων
INFINITIVE
ἰέναι
PARTICIPLE
γα
ᾔεις ᾔει
ήτον ήτην
ᾖμεν ᾖτε ήσαν
ἴοιμι
ἴοις
ἴοι
ἴοιτον
ἱοίτην
ἴοιμεν
ἴοιτε
ΐοιεν.
ἰών ἰόντος
""
ἰόν
λούσα της
989. The present indicative of εἶμι has always a future meaning (shall
go, ep. App. iv. 4), but the subjunctivo, infinitive, and participle may refor
either to the present or the future.
a. Op. Phryn. 26 ἀπελεύσομαι παντάπασι φυλάττου· οὔτε γὰρ οἱ δόκιμοι ῥήτορες
οὔτε ἡ ἀρχαία κωμῳδία οὔτε Πλάτων κέχρηται τῇ φωνῇ· ἀντὶ δὲ αὐτοῦ τῷ ἄπειμΙ
χρῶ καὶ τοῖς ὁμοειδέσιν ὡσαύτως. id. 27 ἐπεξελευσόμενος ἄλλος οὗτος Ἡρακλῆς.
τοῦτ᾽ οὖν ἔσυρεν ἐκ τριόδου Φαβωρίνος χρὴ [χρῆν ?] γὰρ ἐπεξιών εἰπεῖν.
καὶ γὰρ
ἐπέξειμι λέγεται, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐπεξελεύσομαι. Mooris 15 ἄπεισιν Αττικῶς ἀπελεύσεται
Ελληνικῶς.
J
989. In P-B literary productions the vorb εἶμι occurs only sporadically,
and that merely in composition (chiefly ἀπ-, ἐξ-, εἰσ-, συν-), whilo N shows
no traco of it.
Ο
990. 4. κείμαι lio, am laid.'
Imperfect
Present
INDICATIVE
SUBJUNCTIVE
IMPERATIVE
κείμαι
κείσαι κείται κέω-μαι κέη) κέηται
κείμεθα κεῖσθε κείνται
κείω-νται
ἐκείμην -κει-σο ἔκειτο
ἐκείμεθα -κει-σθε ἔ-κειντο
κέοιτο
κεί το κείσθω
etc.
INFINITIVE
κεσθαι
κέοι-ντο PARTICIPLE
κείμενος.
Futuro : κεί-σομαι.
251
991-996.] Κάθημαι
Κάθημαι VERBS IRREGULAR IN FORM.
Imperfect
Present
991. a. Compounds: ἀνά-, ἀπό-, διά-, ἔγ-, ἐπί-, κατά-, παρά-, πρό-, προσ-, σύγ-,
ὑπόκειμαι. In all these forms the infinitive κεῖσθαι retains the accent
on the penult, contrary to rule 704.
992. Κ. Κείμαι supplies the passive of τίθημι (964). Hence οἱ ἄρχοντες
τιθέασι νόμους-οἱ νόμοι κεῖνται. θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλατὰ ὅπλα κεῖται.
.
,
993. Though common in P-B compositions, κείμαι does not survive in N,
either simple or compound. It is true that some recent scholars (GHatzidakis
in KZ xiii 105-117) see a direct survival in its present N substitute κοίτομαι
• lie down, and so write κείτομαι, but the arguments adduced fail to carry
conviction. There is but little doubt that noiтopa is directly associated
with κοίτη (still common in N) berth, roost, κοιτών bedchamber' (ep.
παράκοιτις, παρα-κοίτης, παρά-κοιτος, Ν κοιτάζω and -σσω ' go to roost, etc.).
994. 5. Ακάθημαι sit.
INDICATIVE
κάθησθε κάθηνται καθώμεθα κάθησθε κάθω-νται
IMPERATIVE
κάθη-σο (& κάθου [21
καθήσθω
κάθημαι
κάθησαι [1] κάθηται
κάθω-μαι
SUBJUNCTIVE
κάθη κάθηται
καθήμεθα
κάθησθε καθή-σθων
INFINITIVE
{
ἐκαθή-μην
οι καθήμην
ἐκάθη-σο
καθη-σο
ἐκάθητο
καθῆ (σ)το
καθήμην
καθῇ ο
καθῇ-το
καθοί-μην
κάθοιτο κάθοιτο
καθῆσθαι
etc.
PARTICIPLE
καθήμενος
ἐκαθήμεθα ἐκάθησθε ἐκάθηντο
οι καθήμεθα καθήσθε καθή-ντο
995. In P-N speech κάθημαι is naturally folt as simple and like other
similar verbs (936), has adopted the normal ending -ομαι, viz. κάθομαι,
fut. καθήσω οι καθίσω (also κάτσω, from κάθισε καθ' σε 136, 2).-καθησμένος
or καθισμένος ' seated, & καθούμενος sitting.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
I. ANOMALY IN THE CONJUGATION.
General Remarks.
996. a. The casual absence of a verbal form in A does not neces-
sarily exclude its actual existence from that dialect; in a great many
cases it is a mere matter of chance that it does not occur in that
portion of A literature which has come down to us.
b. A great many, if not most, of the verbal forms marked here as
P (post-classical) do actually occur also in pre-Attic or dialectal
(chiefly lonic) Greek, and thus are not P novelties but forms already
current in previous literature, possibly also in ▲ (cp. a).
c. In order to save room in the following list of irregular verbs--which
does not profess to be exhaustive-the names of tonses and moods have
boon omitted whenever they seemed self-evident. Nevertheless, for the
sako of absolute clearness, the following order has generally been followed,
assuming that the respective verb exhibits a completo sories of tensos:
Present-Imperfect-Futuro-Aorist-Perfect-Pluperfect.
d. In N the imperfect and aorist are not marked as boing regularly
formed from the present and futuro respectively (693), us :
μαραίνω ' wither imprf ἐμάραινα ----fut. (θα) μαράνω, aor. ἐμάρανα.
mid. & pass. μαραίνομαι fade away, imprt. ἐμαραίνουμου – fut. (θα) μαραθῶ,
aor. ἐμαράθηκα- pf. part. puss. μαραμμένος.
1 Antatt. 10, 32 κάθῃ ἀντὶ τοῦ κάθησαι· Ὑπερείδης ὑπὲρ Κρατίνου.
[4] Mooris 215 κάθησε ᾿Αττικῶς, κάθου κοινῶς. Antutt. 100, 31 κάθου· "Αλεξις
Ταραντίνοις, Δίφιλος Ευνούχῳ.
252
IRREGULAR VERBS : ἄγαμαι-αἰσχύνω.
[996,
:
e. For the formation of the future with or without θὰ see 686 and App.
iv. 14.
S. In all the cases where no authority is given, the reader is referred
once for all to WVeitch, or to Kühner-Blass ii. 334-577-
1. Αγαμαι admire 'ἠγάμην-ἀγάσομαι-ἠγάσθην (974. 1004).
In P-B rare, its place being taken by θαυμάζω (937), now θαμάζω (179) or
commoner θαμάζομαι (MD, 674).
2. °ἄγνυμι) κατάγνυμι & -νύω ‘break κατάξω-κατέαξα-κατέαγι
4 am broken, (Ρ -έαγμαι)κατεάγην (Ρ - εάχθην).
Abnormal but hardly questionable GB forms: κατεάξαντες, κατεαγῇ,
κατεαγείς, ἐξεαγεῖσα, κατεάξει, found in Hippocr. (cp. also Pl. Gorg. 469 v
κατεαγῆναι), Ap. Rh., Epict., Ael., ΝΤ (Mart. Petri 82, 25 & 32 κατεάξῃ,
κατεάξαντα), etc. These forms again have led to a new G-B present κατε-
áoow (Artem. 391; Athan. i. 732 a; 708 c), phonopathically contracted to
κατάσσω (Cels. in Orib. i. 1497 Β ; Artem. 181 ; Mart. Petri 84, 1). (150, C.)
3. *ἄγω ‘leadἦγον—ἄξω, subj. ἀγάγω - (Ρ ἦξα) ἤγαγον, ἀγάγοιμι, ἀγα-
γεῖν, ἀγαγών—ἦχα (Ρ ἀγήοχα) ;-ἄξομαι (durat.), ἀχθήσομαι (effect.)ἦγμαι.
[Phryn. 97 ἀγήρχεν εἴ τις εἴποι, ὅτι ἐν τῷ συνθέτῳ Λυσίας κέχρηται, μὴ πάνυ
πείθου. ἦχε μὲν γὰρ λέγουσι, καὶ Δημοσθένης ἤχασι λέγει, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἀγηύχασι.
Moeris 135 εἰσήχεν ᾿Αττικῶς, εἰσαγήοχεν Ἑλληνικῶς. Phryn. 252 ἵνα ἄξωσιν οὐ
χρὴ λέγειν, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα ἀγάγωσιν. 328 ἄγαγον· καὶ τοῦτο εἰ μὲν τὴν μετοχὴν εἶχεν
ὁ ἀγάγας ἐν λόγῳ ἄν τινι ἦν· λεκτέον οὖν ἀγαγε· καὶ γὰρ ἡ μετοχὴ ἀγαγών, ὡς
ἄνελε ἀνελών.]
In N replaced by φέρ(ν)ω, otherwise surviving in ἄγωμε (now με) and ἄγετε
¤'ete, 155º, äïvte 'go,' then in [v]ƒá(y)w 'go '—fut. [v]πá(y)w (from iñaɣáyw?
[ep. 126 ), whence a new presont παγαίνω), aor. ἐπῆγα, part. pf. πηγαιμένος (from
which another present πηγαίνω, often contracted to πηαίνω or πχαίνω 136) aud
παγαιμένος, - then in (Crete) διά(γ)ω ' dwell.
4. αἱρέω take ᾕρουν αἱρήσω είλον ᾕρηκα — Mid. αἱροῦμαι
choose ᾑρούμην — αἱρήσομαι-εἱλύμην —ᾕρημαι --- Pass. αἱρεθήσομαι
ᾑρέθην.
P-B forms : fut. ἑλῶ ἕλω ? 894; ep. αἴρω).—ἑλεῖται (Sext. 577, 21), ἐξ-ελούμενος
(Polyb. 15, 22, 4), παρ-ελεῖσθαι (Diod. 18, 62), αἱρῆσαι (Dion, H. i. 305, 6), αναι
ρήση (Plut. ii. 560 D). aor. είλα-εἱλάμην (Polyb. 2, 61, το προείλαντο. 4, 51,
6 & 37, 1, 10 παρείλαντο. 8, 14, 2 ἐπανείλατο, 38, 4, 4 εἵλαντο. εἱλάμεθα Gr.
Urk. Berlin 362 [215], 6)—εἵληται for ᾕρηται (Clom. Α. i. 221 Α).
-
[Phryn. 16 ἀφείλατο ὅσοι διὰ τοῦ λα λέγουσιν ἀσχημονοῦσι δέον διὰ τοῦ λε
λέγειν, ἀφείλετο. καὶ ἀφειλόμην δεῖ λέγειν διὰ τοῦ ο, ἀλλὰ μὴ διὰ τοῦ Α.]
5. *αἴρω ' raise, lift '—ᾖρον—ἀρῶ (G-B ἄρω, cp. 894)ῆραἠράμην
ἀπῆρκα.
In N preserved only in [ἐ]παίρνω tako away" (903)—πάρω-ἐπῆρα—παρ-
μένος.
6. *αἰσθάνομαι ' feel —ᾐσθανόμην-αἰσθήσομαι· -ᾐσθόμην-ᾔσθημαι.
P-B forms: αισθανθήσομαι (also αἰσθηθήσομαι Sept. Εsai. 53, 11)-ᾐσθάνθην
(also ᾐσθήθην Sept. Job 40, 18; Manich. 1433 Β); αἰσθηνθέντες (Vila Nil.
Jun. 145 Α-Β); αἰσθανείς (αἰσθανθείς ? Acta Xanth. 64, 35). T-B pr. aï-
σθομαι (App. iv. 3 ; Leont. Noap. V. I. 65, 1 ᾔσθετο = ᾔσθάνετο ?).
–
Ν : ᾐστάνομαι (1324. 176)—ᾐστάνουμουν—το πΟΓΟ,
7. °αἰσχύνω shame * -- αἰσχυνῶ — ᾔσχυνα. - Mid. αἰσχύνομαι-αἰσχυ
νοῦμαι durat.), αἰσχυνθήσομαι (effect.).
P-B forms : ᾔσχυγια, ᾔσχυμμαι.
-
253
996 8-22] IRREGULAR VERBS : ἀκούω-βαδίζω.
8. Τἀκούω ‘hear’— ἤκουον—ἀκούσομαι (998) — ἤκουσα-ἀκήκοα.—Pass.
ἀκουσθήσομαι—ἠκούσθην.
P-B forms : fut. ἀκούσω—aor. ἠκουσάμην -pass. pf. ἤκουσμαι, plpf. ἠκού-
σμην. (ακήκοαν for ἀκηκόασιν Anast. Sin. 188 c.)
Ν: ἀκούω (ἀκοῦς for ἀκούεις 153), ἀκούει, ἀκοῦμεν, ἀκοῦτε, ἀκοῦσι & ἀκοῦν for
ἀκούουν 148 f.)—ἀκούσω—ἀκουσμένος.
9. ἁλίσκομαι ' am takenἡλισκόμην-ἁλώσομαι (ἁλῶ, ἁλῶς, ἀλῷ etc.)
—ἑάλων (ἁλοίην, ἁλῶναι, ἁλούς)—ἑάλωκα & ἥλωκα am seized.
10. άλλομαι leap ’ἡλλόμην-ἁλοῦμαιἡλάμην (ἡλόμην).
In P-N speech replaced by πηδάω (cp. 937).
11. ἁμαρτάνω ‘miss’—ἡμάρτανον—ἁμαρτήσομαι—ἥμαρτον ἡμάρτηκα.
—Pass. ἡμαρτήθη—ἡμάρτηται—ἡμάρτητο.
P-B forms : ἁμαρτήσω —ἡμάρτησα.
In N preserved only in the Biblical expression ἥμαρτο θέ μου (i.e. ἥμαρτον
θεέ μου 148) ‘I have sinned.
12. ἀναλίσκω & ἀναλύω ‘spend’—ἀνήλισκον—ἀναλώσω-ἀνήλωσα-
ἀνήλωκα.—Pass. ἀνηλοῦντο—ἀναλωθήσομαι-ἀνηλώθην.
13. ἀνοίγω see οἴγνυμι.
14. ἀντορθόω ' erect’ἐπηνώρθουν (745) ἀνορθώσω—ἀνώρθωσα & ἐπ-
ηνώρθωσα.-Pass. ἐπ-ηνωρθώθην—ἐπηνώρθωμαι.
P forms : ἠνορθώκειν—ἐπ-ανωρθούμην (CALobeck Phryn. 154).
Ν: see ὀρθόω.
15. (ἀντάω) συν-, ἀπ- ‘meet’—ἀπαντήσομαι-συν-, συνήντησα ἀπ-
ήντηκα.
Pforms: ἀπ-αντήσω.-Pass. ἀπ-, συν-αντῶμαι-συν-αντήσομαι-ἀπηντήθην
-άπ-, συνήντημαι,
Ν : ἀπαντῶ & ήχνω-fut. ήσω & ήξω.
16. ἀντιόομαι see ἐναντιόομαι.
17. *ἀρέσκω ' please -ἤρεσκον—ἀρέσω-ἤρεσα-(Ρ ἀρήρεια).-Μ αρέ-
σκομαι-ἀρέσομαι.
Ν: ἀρέσσω & -έξω, έσωἄρεσα.
18. Τἁρπάζω ' snatch,‘seize’—ήρπαζον—ἁρπάσομαι (& -άσω)—ἥρπασα
—ήρπακα.—Pass. ἁρπασθήσομαι-ἡρπάσθην—ἥρπασμαι.
P-N forms : ἁρπάζω & ἁρπῶ (Sept. Lev. 19, 13 ἁρπᾷ. Hos. 5, 14 ἁρπῶμαι)
fut. ἁρπάξω, aor. ἥρπαξα.
Ν: ἁρπάζω & ἁρπῶ, fut. -άξω.
19. αυξάνω & αὔξω ‘increase '-ηὔξανον & ηύξον—αὐξήσω-ηύξησα
ηΰξηκα. Pass. -ομαι -αὐξήσομαι (durat.), αὐξηθήσομαι (effect.)-ηὐξήθην
ηύξημαι. [G aor. εὔξησεν CIA iv. 630 / [34 Β. C.], 18.]
20. ἀφίημι see 955 ft. & 960.
21. άχθομαι am vexedἀχθέσομαι (durat.), αχθεσθήσομαι (effect.)
—ἠχθέσθην—(Ρ κατηχθημένος).
22. βαδίζω step,
strideἐβάδιζονβαδιοῦμαι.
P forms: βαδίσομαι, -ίσω & -ιω-βεβάδικα.
254
IRREGULAR VERBS: βαίνω βρέχω.
[996
[996 23-39
. βρέχω23. *βαίνω ‘walk, goἀπο-, ἀνα-, δια-, παρα-, προ-, ἐκ-βήσομαι
ἀπ-, ἀν-, κατ-, συνέβην-βέβηκα (βεβηκώς & βεβώς). fut. βήσω shall
make go' aor. -έβησα.
Ν: δια-, ἀνε-, κατε-βαίνω, also μ-παίνω (from ἐμ-βαίνω)-fut. -βῶ (imprt. -βάστε
from -βιβάσετε)—aor. -έβηκα-pf. -βασμένος (ep. βιβάζω).
24. βάλλω ' throw’—βαλῶἔβαλον—βέβληκα. — Mid. -βαλοῦμαι--
ἐβαλόμην-βέβλημαι.
P-B forms : βληθήσομαι, βεβλήσομαι, active βάλω (imprt. βάλον Alchem.
322, 13 f. five times, et passim ubi male βάλλων & βάλων ; 333, 27 ἔκβαλον
(imprt.), etc. etc.).-Alchem. 311, 16 ἐκ-βάλας.
II
Ν: βάλλω, commoner βάνω (so even Alchem. 328, 19 & 332, 11 βάνε imprt.)
-fut. βάλω (imprt. βάλε)— ἔβαλα (Ant. Mon. 1516 ο ἐκ-βάλαι for ἐκβαλεῖν frum
ἐξ-έβαλα)βαλμένος (187) & βαρμένος.
25. *βιβάζω * make go, bring βιβάσω & βιβῶ- -εβίβασα.—Mid.
ἀνα-βιβάσομαι & ανα-βιβῶμαι-ἀνεβιβασάμην.
P forms : δια-βιβασθήσομαι-ἐβιβάσθην—βεβίβασται.
Ν : δια-, ἀνε-, κατε-βάζω, also βάζω from ἐμ-βιβάζω (737)-fat. -βάσω (Leo
Gram. 354, 22 ἃς καταβάσωμεν; imprt. -βάστε 136, ; ep. βαίνω supra 23), also βάλω
(from ἐμ-βάλλω)—aor. -έβασα (also - έβαλα)--βασμένος.
26. (βιόω live’P)-βιώσομαι-ἐβίωσα & ἐβίων-βεβίωκα (pass. βε-
βίωταί μοι). See ζάω infra 100.
P forms : βιώσωἀνα-βιωθείς.
27. βλάπτω ‘harm’—ἔβλαπτον-βλάψω-ἔβλαψαβέβλαφα &
βλαφα.-Pass, βλαβήσομαι & βλάψομαι-ἐβλάφθην & ἐβλάβην—βέβλαμμαι
& βλαμμαι.
Ν : βλάφτω (& βλάβω 875) - βλάψω-βλαμμένος.
,
28. βλαστάνω ‘bud, sprout —ἐβλάστανον—ἔβλαστον-βεβλάστηκα.
P forms: βλαστάω-βλαστήσω (trans.) & -ήσομαι (intr.).
29. βλέπω ' see 'βλέψομαιἔβλεψα.
P forms : βλέψω βέβλεφα.-Pass. βέβλεμμαι-προσ-εβλέφθην. Mid.
περι-βλεψάμενος.
Ν: βλέπω (also γλέπω) see, imprf. ἔβλεπα—the rest from εἶδον ; see infra 64.
30. *βοάω 'shout ’—ἐβόων—βοήσομαι-ἐβόησα.-Pass. βοῶμαι.
P forms : βοήσω-βεβόηκα—ἐβοήθην—βεβόημαι.
Ν : βοω & βου@fut. βοήσω & βουήξω—aor. ἐβύηξα & ἐβούηξα from the incep-
tive βοΐζω or βουΐζω (863-71).
31. βόσκω ' pasture βοσκήσω.-Mid. & Pass. βόσκομαι.
P forms: βοσκήσομαι & -ηθήσομαι—ἐβύσκησα. Mid. ἐβοσκησάμην.
Ν: βόσκωβοσκήσω.—Mid. βόσκομαι-βοσκηθῶ-βοσκημένος. Causative &
inceptive βοσκίζω (868–71).
32. βούλομαι ' wish” (βούλει [763], βούλεται, etc.)-- & ήβουλόμην
(722)- βουλήσομαι ἐ- & -βουλήθην βεβούλημαι.
P-Β : βουληθήσομαι. [CWessely N. Zaub. p. 31, 342 & Alchem. 351, 24 ἐὰν
βούλης after θέλῃς, ep. FTrinch. 16 [+ro15] δν ἂν θέλῃς καὶ βούλῃς.]
Ν: βούλομαι βουληθῶ.
33. βρέχω ‘wet' (P-N 'rain ")—ἔβρεχον-βρέξω έβρεξα—βέβρεχα.
Pass. ἐβρέχθην.
Ρ ἐβράχην.—Ν βρέχω ‘wet, rain
βρέξω—ἐβράχηκα-βρε(γ)μένος.
255
966 34-451
IRREGULAR VERBS : γαμέωδέω
34. *γαμέω 'marry (said of the man) fut. γαμῶἔγημα γεγάμηκα.
Mid. fut. γαμούμαι (892)-γεγάμημαι.
P-Bforms: γαμήσω-ἐγάμησα.—Mid. (said of the wife) γαμήσομαι-
ἐγημάμην.—Pass. γαμηθήσομαι-ἐγαμήθην.
Ν: γαμῶ (= βινέω, futuo)—γαμήσω-γαμημένος.
35. γελάω laugh ’—γελάσομαι-ἐγέλασα.-Pass. aor. ἐγελάσθην.
P-B forms : γελάσω-κατα-γελασθήσομαι-κατα-γεγέλασται.
Ν: γελῶ (also ἀνα-, κατα-, περι-)-γελάσω-γελασμένος.
36. γηράσκω (also γηράω) grow old γηράσομαι & -άσω-ἐγήρασα
γεγήρακα.
P-B forms : γηράσκομαι & -άομαι, also γηράω (as Clement. 20, ἡ τοῦ γηρῶν-
τος καὶ ἀποθανεῖν ἔχοντος)—ὑπερ-γηραθείς.
Ν: γερνάω (40. 906)-γεράσω-γερασμένος.
37. * γίγνομαι become’γενήσομαι (imprt. γενοῦ)—ἐγενόμην-γεγένη-
μαι & γέγονα.
P-B forms : γίνομαι-γενηθήσομαι-ἐγενήθην & ἐγενάμην, γενάμενος (dissocia-
tion from ἐγενόμην and γενόμενος, which were folt as imperfect and prosont
rospectively; cp. App. iv. 3).
Ν: γίνομαι (also γένομαι, soo P-B) become '—γενῶ & γένω (so ovon in Acta
Xanth. 62, 33 & 71, 37) also γ(ε)ίνω-ἐγ(ε)ίνηκα, ἔγ(ε)ινα & ἔγενα [inf, καταγεῖναι
Acta Xanth. 7, 37] -γ(ε)ινωμένος & γενωμένος, algo γενάμενος & γεν(ν)ούμενος.
32
38. *γιγνώσκω ‘know’γνώσομαι (subj. γνῶ, γνῷs, etc. 979; imprt.
γνῶθι) - ἔγνων (subj. γνοίην ; γνῶναι ; γνούς)-ἔγνωκα. See 979.
P-B forms : γινώσκω γνώσω- ἔγνωσα (subj. γνώην).
Ν: γνώθω (also γνώνω)-γνώσω-γνωσμένος.
39. γράφω ' write’—ἔγραφον—γράψω-ἔγραψα-γέγραφα.-Pass. γρα-
φήσομαι; γεγράψομαι-ἐγράφην (Ρ ἐγράφθην)-γέγραμμαι.
Ν γράφω γράψω -γραμμένος. [Β καταγεγραφηκέναι 1875.]
40. δάκνω ‘bite'—δήξομαι—ἔδακον.- Pass. δηχθήσομαι-ἐδήχθην—δέ
δηγμαι.
P-Β forms: δαγκάνω—δήξω-ἔδηξα & pass. ἐδάκην (δαχθέντας Callin. 116,
21)δεδηχώς.
Ν: δαγκάνω & δακάνω, ‘bito'--δα (γ)κάσω-δα(γ) καμένος (also δα(γ)κασμένος).-
By-form daykwvw and darávo (cp, 900) (so ovon in CLoemuns 115 [II III+], 28
δακύνοντα) ώσω, · -ωμένος.
41. (δαρθάνω) κατα- sleep ' (no fut.) aor. κατέδαρθον-κατα-δεδαρ-
θηκώς.
42. δέδια & δέδοικα ' fear, see 967, b.
"
43. *δέρω 'flay, skin δερῶἔδειρα.-Pass. ἐδάρην—δεδάρθαι.
Ν: γδέρνω 'beat' (from ἐκ-δέρω, 135. 723. 903)-γδάρω-γδαρμένος -But δέρνω
bout'δείρω-δαρμένος.
14. δέχομαι accept," receive’—δέξομαι-ἐδεξάμην—δέδεγμαι.-Puss.
-δεχθήσομαι, -δεχθείς.
Ν: δέχομαι-δεχτῶ (171)—ἐδέχτηκα.
45. δέω 'bind (834 ". 844) - δήσωἔδησα- δέδεκα. - Mid. - δέομαι- δή
σομαι; -δεδήσομαι -- -εδησάμην. Pass. δεθήσομαι-ἐδέθην-δέδεμαι-δε-
δέμην.
Ν : δένω (so sinco T, as : Steph. Dine, 1002 D ; προσέδεναν Acta Andr. ot Mall.
3 ; ἐπι-δένω Const. Apost. 2, 20 ; Porph. Cor. 328, 21) -δέσω-δεμένος.
256
IRREGULAR VERBS : δέω-δίδωμι.
[996,6-51
46. δέω ' want,' ' need (cp. 835)—δεήσω-ἐδέησα-δεδέηκα.-Impers.
δεῖ (δέῃ, δεῖν, δέον) ἔδει (subj. δέοι)—δεήσει-ἐδέησε.-Pass. δέομαι ' need
(δέῃ οι δέει, δεῖται, etc.)-δεήσομαι (Ρ δεηθήσομαι)—ἐδεήθην δεδέημαι.
47. διαιτάω 'arbitrate, feed 'κατ-εδιῄτα-διαιτήσω-διῄτησα-δεδιῄ-
τηκα. Pass. δεδιῄτημαι.-Mid. κατ-εδιῃτησάμην.-Mid. διαιτῶμαι lead
a life, dwell 'διῃτώμην διαιτήσομαι-διῃτήθην—δεδιῄτημαι.
"
P forms: δεδιαιτηκώς - Mid. διαιτῶμαι • lead a life' συν-διῃτᾶτο — ἐξ-
ἐδιῃτήθην—διητημένος.
48. * διακονέω 'serve — ἐδιακόνουν — διακονήσω — δεδιακόνηκεν.
ἐδιακονήθην δε διακόνημαι.
Pass.
P-B forms : διηκόνουν-διακονέσω (Gr. Urk. Berlin 261 [+II-III] ἵνα
διακονέσι ἱμῖν for -ήσῃ ἡμῖν 843)—διηκόνησα.—Mid. διηκονεῖτο—διακονήσομαι,
δεδιακονήσομαι-διηκονησάμην & ἐδιακονησάμην—διηκονήθην.
Ν: διακονοῦμαι (854) & διακονίζομαι beg’διακονιστῶ-διακονεμένος, -ισμένος.
49. διδάσκω ‘teach - διδάξω-ἐδίδαξα- δεδίδαχα.— Mid. διδάξομαι--
ἐδιδαξάμην.- Pass. ἐδιδάχθην-δεδίδαγμαι.
[In Nextinct savo in δάσκαλος (for διδάσκαλος 737) teacher, δασκαλεύ(γ)ω
• Loach' δασκάλεμα & διασκαλεμός ' touching.'|
50. °(διδράσκω) ἀπο-, ἐκ-, δια-διδράσκω escape '-απο-δράσομαι (subj.
-δρῶ, -δρᾷς, δρᾳ, etc.)-ἀπ-, ἐξ-έδραν (-δραίην, δρᾶναι, -δράς)-απο-,
δια-δέδρακα. See 979.
-
P forms : -δράσω- - δρων & έδρασα (also simple : Pallad. 1041 B ἔδρασεν
ἐξ Αἰγύπτου).
51. δίδωμι 'give, for A see 955 Η.
PB forms (ep. 961) : δίδω Rev. 3, 9 (ubi διδῶ); Loont. Neap. V. J. 62,
23; 76, 15; V. S. 1725 A; 1733 c. CGL 415, 74 reddo apodido i.Θ. ἀποδίδω.
δίδεις Leont. Neup. V. S. Vind.) 1733 Α ; ἐνδίδεις Leont. Neap. V. J. 73, 15.
δίδει Apophth. 28o o ubi male διδοῖ αὐτῷ πληγὰς καὶ ἀφίει αὐτὸν ἡμιθανῆ;
παραδίδει Leont. Neap. V. J. 80, 3 ; 11. δίδει ib. 23, 4; V. S. 1721 A; ib.
(Vind.) 1729 D. CGL 416, 2 reddit apodidi i.e, ἀποδίδει. (διδόαμεν for δίδομεν
Orig. ii. 65 A. ἀντι-διδόαμεν Theod. iv. 585 Α ; cp. 776). ἀποδίδετε Acta Tho
15, 15. δίδετε Loont. Neap. V. J. 41, 7. δίδωσιν for δίδουσιν Acta Tho. 53, 31.
ἐν δίδουσιν Loont. Nonp. V. S. 1729 Β. δίδης V. J. 77, 4; 9. ἐν-διδῴη (δώη) for
ἐν-διδοίη [1] Philo 382, 42 ; διδυῒ from διδοίη Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. i. 57. διδῷτο
(διδῶτο) for διδοῖτο Orig. i. 1505 Β ; δίδος (due to δός) for δίδου, JMoschos
3077 D. διδείν (write δίδει») Acta Tho. 36, 31. Leont. Noap. V. J. 62, 17 ;
72, 5, 77, 7; 14.--απο-διδούν fur -διδόν Rov. 22, 2. διαδιδών (write διαδίδων)
Acta Tho. 15, 15 ; Loont. Neap. V. J. 61, 7. δίδων Loont. Noup. V. J. 49, 7.
ἐδίδει Leont. Neup. V. J. 10, 5 ; 77, 13. απεδίδει Leont. Noup. V. J. 66, 9 (σ).-
δώσης του δῷς Ius Alex. 361 B. δώσῃ (-σει) Rev. 8, 3 ; Philo i. 182, 13 ; παρα-
δώση (-σει) Sept. Ex. 13, 11 ; Deut. 13, 17 (18) ; Luke 12, 58 ; [δῴη for δῷ Sept.
Gen. 28, 20; Ps. 120 (121), 3. John 15, 16; Eph. 3, 16.] Swowμer Mark 6, 37;
ἀπο-δώσωσι Hormas Mand. 3, 2. ἐκδώσητε Acla Tho. 88, 21 ; Leont. Neap.
V. S. 1680 €. παραδώσωσιν Auta Who. 42, 5. ενδώσωσι Acta Tho. 88, 29.
παραδώσατε Dion. H. ii. 117, 9, 8. ἔδωσα for ἔδωκα Apoll. D. Synt. 276, ι';
δῴην ? Luc. Paras. 836 ; Cyn. 546 ; δῴη (δώη) Pap. Potrettini p. 1. δοι from
δοίη (148) Revue Arch. ix (1887), 201; Sept. Ps. 41, 3;
2 S. 3, 39.
for
[1] Phryn. 325 διδῴη καὶ διδῴης· τούτου τὸ εὐκτικὸν οὐδεὶς τῶν ᾿Αττικῶν εἶπε διὰ
τοῦ ω ἀλλὰ διὰ τῆς οι διφθύγγου. τεκμηριοῖ δὲ Ομηρος· ἐὰν μὲν ὑποτακτικῶς
χρῆται διὰ τοῦ ω λέγων· εἰ δέ κεν αὖ τοι | δώῃ κῦδος ἀρέσθαι, ἔστι δὲ ἐάν σοι δῷ
ὁ θεός· εἰ δὲ εὐκτικῶς, οὕτως · σοὶ δὲ θεοὶ τόσα δοῖεν ὅσα φρεσὶ σῇσι μενοινᾷς.
ἐθαύμασα οὖν ᾿Αλεξάνδρου τοῦ Σύρου σοφιστοῦ, δῴη καὶ διδῴη λέγοντος ἐπὶ τοῦ
εὐκτικοῦ.
257
8
9962-68] IRREGULAR VERBS: δόκεω-ἐγείρω.
Το παρα-δοι (i.e. παραδοίη, if not -δῇ) Sept. 1 Macc. II, 40 ; Mark 4, 29
(see above δῴη for Sῷ); δώσει Sibyll. 5, 221 ; ἀποδώσειαν Orig. i. 1429 Β.
δώημεν, δῴητε· Moeris 1o8 δοίημεν, δοίητε Αττικῶς, δῴημεν, δῴητε Ελληνικῶς.---
παραδώσαντα Hippol. 829 B. δώσας Vita Epiph. 52 D ; 92 B. Leont. Noap.
V. J. 67, 8. Mal 26, 4 (ubi male δύσας); ἐπιδώσαντος Leont. Neap. V. J.
24, 2 ; ἐπιδώσασαν ib. 22, 6. ἀπο-δώσαντες JMoschos 3064 c; Andr. Cr.
1221 B ; Leo Gram. 361, 8 (ubi male παραδόσαντες).— ἐξ-έδετο Matt. 21, 33 ;
-Cp. Leont.
Mark 12, 1.- Οp. δέδωκαν for δεδώκασιν [Callisth.] 126, p. 27 (C);
Noap. V. J. 21, 12. (786.)
Ν: δίδω (δίδεις, δίδει, etc.), also δίνω (somotimos δώνω io. dono [853] & Cretan
[from do x δίδω : *δοδω] δούδω)-- δώσω (sometimes δώκω, due toἔδωκα, ulgo
ἔδωσα.- Pass. δοθῶ-ἐδόθηκα—δοσμένος (dissociated from δωμένος i. ο. ιδωμένος).
52. δοκέω believe, think’δόξω (δοκήσω)—ἔδοξα (ἐδόκησα)δεδό-
κηκε.-- Pass. ἐδοκήθην—δέδογμαι (δεδίκημα).
Ν: (Cretan) διώχνει (διώχνει) μου = δοκεῖ μοι-διώξει μου-ἔδιοξέ μου.
53. δράω doδράσω-ἔδρασα-δέδρακα.-Pass. ἐδράσθην-δέδραμα
(Ρ δεδρασμένος).
54. *δύναμαι 'can, am able' (δύνασαι, also δύνῃ ; δύναται, etc. ; δύνω-
μαι, δύνῃ, etc., δύνασθαι, δυνάμενος)—ἐδυνάμην & ἠδυνάμην (722) (subj.
δυναίμην)—δυνήσομαι—ἐδυνήθην—δεδύνημα.
P-B forms : δύνομαι Louvro Pap. 39 (161 B.c.) 1ο ; so too Gr. Pup. Br. Mus.
p. 36 (160-159 B.C.), 22; whonce frequently dúvn, as: Gr. Urk. Berlin 246
(|ΙΙ-ΙΙ), 10; Acta Tho. 14, 3 πότε δύνῃ; δυνάμεθα Sopt. Jos. 28, 2.
ἠδύνοντο Jes. 59, 14; ἐδύνετο 4 Mace. 2, 20 ep. 774). — δυνηθήσομαι
ἐδυνησάμην, ἐδυνάσθην. (174.)
今
​[Phryn. 337 δίνῃ· ἐὰν μὲν τοῦτο ὑποτακτικὸν ᾖ, ἐὰν Δύνωμαι, ἐάν ΔΥΝΗ,
ὀρθῶς λέγεται. ἐὰν δὲ ὁριστικῶς τιθῇ τις, ΔΥΝΗ ΤΟΥ͂το πράξει, οὐχ ὑγιῶς ἂν τιθείη.
χρὴ γὰρ λέγειν ΔΥΝΑΣΑΙ ΤΟΥ͂το πράξει.]
Ν: δύνομαι & inceptive δυνάζομαι (869)—δυνηθῶ & δυναστῶ.
55. δύω ' dive, plunge-δύσω--ἔδυσα (trans.). Mid. δύομαι sink
--- δύσομαι (δύω, -ης, -η, etc. δύθι)—ἔδυν (979); δῦναι ; δύς, δύν, δῦσα
δέδυκα.--Pass. δυθήσομαι-ἐδύθην—-δέδυμαι. See 979 & cp. 997, 2.
P forms : δύνω ‘sot (intr.)—ἔδυσα, also ἔδυνα-παρεισ-εδύησαν.
Ν: ντύνω (i.o. ἐν-δύνω 135 & 723) ' clotho 'ντύσω-ντυμένος.—So γδύνω (i..
ἐκδύνω) undress.
56. *¿áw ‘leave,' 'permit,' 'let'—cïwv—¿áow—elaoa—élaka.—Pass.
ἐάσομαι-εἰθην-είμαι.
N prosorvos only : άσε (i.e. ἔασε 150, 6.049) ‘let' and ἄσετε (io. ἐάσετε)
often contractod to âore (136, 2) lot,' then the adverbial singular ás (1.0. čaoe
949. 1916 f.).
57. εγγυάω 'plodge-ἠγγία-ἠγγύησα (also ἐνεγύησα)ἠγγύηκα-
ἠγγυήκει. - Mid. ἐγγυώμαι ' pledge myself -ἠγγυώμην (also ἐν γνώμην
ἐγγυήσομαι ἠγγυησάμην (also ἐνεγυησάμην) --ἠγγύημαι (εγγεγύημαι)
ἠγγυήμην (ἐγγεγυήμην).--Pass. κατ-, ἐξηγγυήθην.
N: kyyvoûµai (850 ff.) 'pledge mysolf’—¿yyu(n)0ŵ—¿yyv(n)µévos. (148 f.)
58. ἐγείρω awaken, rouse, erect --ἤγειρον-ἐγερῶ-ἤγειρα.-Mid.
ηγρόμην (136, 1)' awoke 'ἐγρήγορα am awake'εγρηγόρειν δε -μη-
'am
Pass. ἠγέρθην (997, 4).
Ρ Β forms: ἐγήγερμα—ἐγηγέρκειν.-Pass. ἐγερθήσομαι ἐγήγερμαι.
From ἐγρήγορα P has abstractod an adj. ἐγρήγορος (whoneo Ν γλήγορος
swift 134. 126) and thonce έγρηγορέω (ovon in Arist.), thon γρηγορέω
Sept., NT, etc.
(
Ν: γέρνω (for *ἐγέρνω 903) bend, stoop 'γείρω-γερμένος.
258
IRREGULAR VERBS: ἐγκωμιάζω εἴρομαι. [998
71
59. ἐγκωμιάζω praise’—ἐνεκωμίαζον—ἐγκωμιάσομαι & -άσω-ἐνεκω-
μίασα-εγκεκωμίακα.-Pass. ἐγκεκωμίασμαι.
Ο
'
60. ° (ἕζομαι) καθέζομαι sit’—έκαθεζόμην-καθεδούμαι (cp. ΐζω infra
114).
P forms: καθεσθήσομαι (Sept. Lev. 12, 5 ; Just. Apol. I, 35) — ἐκαθέσθην
(Luc. ii. 349).-For N see ΐζω (infra 114).
[Phryn. 236 εκαθέσθη, καθεσθείς, καθεσθήσομαι, καὶ τὰ πληθυντικὰ καθεσθή-
σονται ἔκφυλα· λέγε οὖν καθέζομαι, καθεδοῦμαι, καθεδοῦνται, καθεδούμενος.]
•
61. ἐθέλω & (in CIA since 250 B.c.) θέλω ' wish, want —ἤθελον
(ἐθελήσωἠθέλησαἠθέληκαἠθελήκειν.
P-B forms: θεληθῆτε (Ignat. ad Tral. 8, 1)—τεθέληκα—ἐτεθελήκεσαν
(Dio C. 24, 26)—τεθελήμεθα (Greg. Naz. ii. 8ο Β).
[Phryn. 307 τεθεληκέναι· ᾿Αλεξανδρεωτικὸν τοὔνομα. διὸ ἀφετέον Αλεξανδρεύ
σιν καὶ Αἰγυπτίοις αὐτό, ἡμῖν δὲ ῥητέον ἠθεληκέναι. So too Tho. M. 172.]
Ν: θέλω (θέλεις & θές, θέλει & θέ, θέλε)με, θέλετε, θέλου)νε & θέν ; 863)
—ἤθελα-θελήσωἠθέλησα.
-
62. ἐθίζω accustom-εἴθιζον-ἐθιω (888) εἴθισα—εἴθικα.—Ρ εἰθίσθην
εἴθισμαι- εἰθίσμην. (Cp. ἔθω.)
G Β: συνηθίζω--ίσω--ισα- -ικα [σεσυνήθικα Justinian Cod. 1, 17,
3; Clim. 697 A; 900 D; 1095 D.]
Ν: συνηθίζω
συνηθίσω-ἐσυνήθισα-συνηθισμένος.
63. (ΕΘΩ) εἴωθα am wont ’εἰώθειν.
64. (ΕΙΔΩ) εἶδον 'gaw (ἴδοιμι, ἰδεῖν, ἰδών; fut. subj. ἴδω, ἴδῃς, etc.; imprt.
* Ιδέ 912). οἶδα know (969)ᾔδειν-εἴσομαι. (Cp. δράω infra 186.)
For P forms cp. 969 fr.
Ν : εἶδα (not ἴδα 717 [1])—ἰδῶ (also διῶ)—ἰ]δωμένος (also διωμένος 915).
65. εικάζω ' compare, assume'ἤκαζον & εἴκαζον-εἰκάσωᾤκασα.
Pass. εἰκασθήσομαι=ᾐκάσθην (εἰκάσθην)--ᾔκασμαι (εἴκασμαι).
P form : εἴκακα.
Ν: ξεικάζω (io. ἐξεικάζω 135 & 723) ' conjecturo, undorstand 'ξεικάσω
ξεικασμένος.
Ο
66. εἴκω ' give in, retreat εἶκον εἴξω-εἶξα, also εἴκαθον.
67. (ΕΙΚΩ) ἔοικα resemble” (ἐοίκω, ἐοικέναι, ἐοικώς, also εἰκώς, εἰκός,
εἰκνία (ep. 723), but εἰκός fitting, fair”)--ᾤκειν-εΐξω,
67b. *elµí ‘am,' sce 981 ff.
68. είμι shall go, sec 988 f.
69. εἰπεῖν ' to say,' see ΕΠΩ (infra 86).
70. °εἴργω & εργνυμι (also ειργνύω) (push, hinder’εἴρξω-εἶρξα.
Pass. εἵρχθην-είργμαι.
[ Some write elpy- in the sense of 'shut in,' 'lock up,' and elpy- 'shut
out, excludo. Cp. Εust. 1387, 3 τὸ εἴργω ἐπὶ μὲν τοῦ κωλύω ἐψίλουν, ἐπὶ δὲ
τοῦ ἐγκλείω ἐδάσυνον.]
71. ° εἴρομαι ask
fut. ερήσομαιἠρύμην.
In P-N replaced by the 4 ερωτάω,
259
8 2
1
99612-8] IRREGULAR VERBS: εἴρω-ἐνοχλέω.
72. °εἴρω 'say fut. ἐρῶ-εἴρηκα.-Pass. ῥηθήσομαι, fut. pf. εἰρήσομαι
ἐρρήθην—εἴρημαι.
P forms: ἐρέω [1] (also ἐράω [852], as: Prisc. 174, 1 ἧκον ἀνερώντες.
187, 1 ἐστάλησαν ἐρῶντες), ερρέθην.
In P-N replaced by λέγω, εἶπον (εἶπα). See ΕΠΩ (infra 86).
73. εἴωθα see ἔθω (supra 63).
74.° ἐκκλησιάζω hold a meeting,
conveneἐξ-εκλησίαζον & ἠκκλη
σίαζον—ἐκκλησιάσω-ἐξ-εκλησίασα & ἠκκλ-. (Cp. 746.)
In P-B also passivo: 'convene,' 'am read in church,' and Mid. 'go to
church.'
Ν : πλησιάζομαι (732) 'go to church —κλησιαστῶ.
75. ἐλαύνω drive’—ἤλαυνον—ἐδῶ ἐλᾷς, etc. ; cp. 889)—ἤλασα
ἐλήλακα.-Mid. ἠλασάμην. - Pass. ἠλάθην ἐλήλαμαιἠληλάμην.
P-B forms : ἐλάω (pres.), (cp. εἴρω supra 72)—ἠλάσμην—ἐλα (σ)θήσομαι---
ἐλήλασμαι.
In N extinct, unless eλa & λάote (infra 90) 'come' be a relic of it (914).
76. ελίσσω or -ττω, αlo είλ-, 'roll 'ελίξω εἵλιξα. Also Mil.
Pass. εἱλίχθην εἵλιγμαι- εἵλικτο.
P forms : εξελιχθήσομαι & ἐλιγήσομαι.
In N replaced by τυλίσσω, -ζω (880; also - γω)—τυλίξωτυλι(γ)μένος (179).
77. λκω draw'εἷλκον (719) έλξω-εἵλκυσα-καθείλκυκα.-Mid.
εἱλκυσάμην.---Pass. έλκυσθήσομαι-εἱλκύσθην εἵλκυσμαι.
-
P forms : ἑλκύω—ἑλκύσω – εἷλέα. Mid. έλκυσόμενος.
78. εμέω ' vomit 'ἐμοῦμαι--ἤμεσα-εμήμεκα.
PB forms : ήμέθην ἐμεθήσεται ἐμήμεσμαι.
In N replaced by ξερνάω (i.o. ἐξ-εράω 135 & 733. 906)-ξεράσω-ξερασμένος.
79. ἐναντιόομαι oppose— ἐναντιώσομαι (pass.) - ἠναντιώθην -- Αναν
τίωμαι.
Β forms : ἐναντιοῦτο (Mal. 168, II ; ep. 717.
Ν: ἀναντιώνομαι (from ἀνάντια 1.0. ἐναντία by assimilation)-ἀναντιωθῶ.
'
80. * ἐνθυμέομαι think upon ἐνεθυμούμην—ἐνθυμήσομαι (durat.),
ἐνθυμηθήσομαι (effect.)--ἐνεθυμήθην ἐντεθύμημαι—ένετεθύμητο. So tou
προθυμέομαι am eager προθυμούμην -προθυμήσομαι, also προθυμηθή
σομαι-προθυμήθην.
↑
Ν: θυμοῦμαι (i.o. ἐνθυμοῦμαι, ν]θυμοῦμαι or ἐ[ν]θυμοῦμαι [194], θυμούμαι 135
& 723)- θυμηθώ θυμισμένος from θυμίζω 1.ο. ἐνθυμίζω ' remind').
81. (ἔννυμι), ἀμφιέννυμι-ἀμφιῶἠμφίεσα. Mid. ἀμφιέννυμαι-αμ
φιέσομαι ἠμφίεσμαι.
P forms : ἀμφιεννύω--ἀμφιεσθείς. Also ἀμφιέζω and commonor ἀμφιάζω
regular (937).
"
82. ενοχλέω trouble —ἠνώχλουν & ενώχλουν (745) ἠνώχλησα.
Even Atticists misuso the form épéw for the prosent, as: Dio Chrys, i,
174, 3 οὐδὲ ἐδύνατο ἐρεῖν; ii. 118, 13 μέλλων νῦν ἐρεῖν ἢ γράφειν. Luc. do Dom.
200 τις μηχανὴ μὴ οὐχί πάντως ἔλαττον ἐρεῖν αὐτόν; Aristid. xlvi. p. 217, 268
ἐρεῖν ἔδει. Philost. Vit. Ap. 175, 13 (Keysor) αὐτὸ τὸ μὴ περὶ ἀληθινῶν ἐρεῖν
ἀληθεύει. Schol. Luc. Jacobita iv. 23o in p. 253, 11 ἢ ἀληθέστερον ἐρεῖν. Cp.
WSchmid i. 96 & ii. 51, where the above examples are mistaken for future
infinitives.
260
IRREGULAR VERBS: ἐξετάζω-εὕδω.
[99689-95
83. * εξετάζω examine —ἐξήταζον—ἐξετάσω (& ἐξετῶ 889)—ἐξήτασα
--ἐξήτακα.-Pass. ἐξητάσθην—ἐξήτασμαι.
P-B forms : ἐτάζω—ἤτασα (ἐξήταξα).
Ν: ξετάζω (723)—ξετάξω-ξετασμένος.
84. ἐπιορκέω 'swear falsely'ἐπιορκήσω-ἐπιώρκησα-ἐπιώρκηκα (744).
85. ἐπίσταμαι understand, know” (ἐπίστασαι, ἐπίσταται, etc. ἐπίστω
μαι, ἐπίστῃ, ἐπίστηται, etc. επίστασο & ἐπίστω)-ἠπιστάμην (ἠπίστασο &
ἠπίστω)--ἐπιστήσομαι-ἐπιστήθην.
;
86. ΕΠΩ-aor. εἶπον, also εἶπα ' said ' εἶπες & εἶπας εἶπε”; εἴποιμι, etc,
also εἴπαιμεν, εἴπαιεν; εἰπεῖν, εἰπών (fut. subj. εἴπω, εἴπῃς, etc. imprt.
εἰπέ, εἰπάτω, εἴπατε, εἰπόντων.)The rest is borrowed from the verbs
φημί, εἴρω, αγορεύω, λέγω.
P-B forms: εἶπα, εἶπας, εἶπε, εἴπαμεν, εἴπατε, εἶπαν ; Part. εἶπας, αντος,
εἶπασα ; Fut. imprt. εἶπον, εἰπάτω, etc., εἰπάτωσαν.
Ν: εἶπα, εἶπες, εἶπε, εἴπαμε”, εἴπετε, εἶπανα (dialectal by-form εἴπηκαν, due
to ἐποῖκαν i.Θ. πεποίηκαν ?) & εἴπασι” (so Nicet. Byz. 772 A)-Fut. subj. εἰ ]πώ,
της, f, etc. (915). εἰ]πές, εἰ πέτε.-Pass. πω(η)θώ (που)-πώ(η)μένος (στ πο(η)-
μένος). Sou also λέγω infra 151, 2.
Ο
87. (πω) ἕπομαι follow 'εἱπόμην-ἕψομαι- ἑσπόμην.
88. *ἐργάζομαι ' work —ἠργαζόμην (719)ἐργάσομαι-ἠργασάμην - εἴμ
γασμαι, ἠργασμένος (ClAiv. 477 frg. b 8. 477 & 12).—Pass. ἐργασθήσομαι
ἠργάσθην.
P-B forms: έργᾷ & έργᾶται for ἐργάσῃ & εργάσεται (Sept.).
Ν: ἐργάζομαι & ἀργάζομαι-στο-σμένος.
88. ερέσθαι see εἴρομαι (supra 71).
89. ρρω clear out 'ἐρρήσωἤρρησα-εἰσήρρηκα.
90. Τέρχομαι '80, come - ἠρχόμην-- (fut. εἶμι [989], ἥξω, ἀφίξομαι,
P ἐλεύσομαι, imprt. ἐλθέ 912)—ἦλθον (ἔλθοιμι, ἐλθεῖν, ἐλθών)—ἐλήλυθα
ἐληλύθειν.
G-B forms : δεῦρο for ἐλθέ (Antatt. 88, 19 δεῦρο ἀντὶ τοῦ ἔρχου Πλάτων
Πολιτείας τρίτῳ ), and δεῦτε for ἔλθετε.
Ν ἔρχομαι-(έλθω) ἔρθω (ἔλα for ἐλθέ 914, ἐλάστε & ἐλᾶτε)—ἦρθαὀρχομένως
(for έρχ-). See supra 75.
91. ἐσθίω 'eat'ἤσθιον--ἔδομαι - ἔφαγον—ἐδήδοκα.—Pass. ἠδέσθην---
κατεδήδεσμαι.
Pforms: ἔσθωφάγομαι (due to A ἔδομαι [114], also φαγοῦμαι), φάγεσαι, είν
[Phryn. 301 φάγομαι βάρβαρον λέγε οὖν ἔδομαι καὶ κατέδομαι· τοῦτο γὰρ
Αττικόν. 302 βρώσομαι, κακῶς ὁ Φαβωρίνος· οἱ γὰρ Αττικοὶ ἀντ᾿ αὐτοῦ ἔδωμαι
χρῶνται καὶ κατέδομαι.]
Sinco G replaced by τρώγω which sco (infra 281).
93. ἑστήκω see ἵστημι 955, 962, 965 & 966.
1
93. Εστιάω treat, regalo εἱστίων (719) - εστιάσω
(ἡστίασεν ClA iv. 63o b 26)
εἱστίαση
εἱστίακα.— Pass. ἑστιῶμαι - εἱστιώμην
εστιάσομαι (durat.) Γ', εστιαθήσομαι (effect.)-εἱστιάθην-εἱστίαμαι.
91. ἐτάζω see ἐξετάζω (supra 83).
95. °(εύδω) καθεύδω sleep (καθεύδον) καθ-ηΰδον & εκάθευδον (746)
---καθευδήσω- (Ι' καθεύδηκα).
In P-N speech roplaced by κοιμούμαι (i. e, κοιμώμαι 850 Ι.).
261
996, 103
- ] IRREGULAR VERBS: εὑρίσκωἥδομαι.
19996. *εὑρίσκω ‘Gnd 'εὑρήσω (imprt. εὑρέ, 912.)-ηὗρον & εὗρον--
ηύρηκα & εύρηκα—εὑρήκειν & ηὑρήκη. -- Mid. ηὑρισκόμηνεὑρήσομαι--ηὑρό-
μην & εὑρόμηνεὕρημαι (Mid. & Pass.).--Pass. εὑρεθήσομαι-εὑρέθην.
P B forms: ηὕρισκον—εὗρα & εὕρησα-εὑράμηνηὑρήκει (Babr. 22)--
ηὑρέθη (Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. 112, 864; Alchem. 348, 6).
[Phryn. 115 εὕρασθαι οὐκ ἐρεῖς προπαροξυτόνως διὰ τοῦ α, ἀλλὰ παροξυτόνως διὰ
τοῦ €, εὑρέσθαι.]
Ν : βρίσκω (i.e. ε]υρίσκω, 135 & 733), also βρίχνω anal (Cretan) βρίστω,
' find 'ηὕρισκα & εὕρισκα βρώ (i.e. ευρώ) ηὕρα, ηὕρηκα & εὕρηκα-βρωμένος
(= εὑρημένος from εύρω, 915).-By-form ἠ]ξεύρω (from fut. ἐ]ξεύρω (132), also
ξέρω, know ήξε(ν)ρα-no more.
97. *εὔχομαι 'pray 'εὔξομαι-ηὐξάμην & εὐξάμηνηῢγμαι-ηὔγμην.
-(Ρ εὐχθεῖσα pass.).
Ν: εὐκοῦμαι (due to καταροῦμαι i.e. καταρῶμαι)εὐκηστῶεὐρήστηκα.
98. 1. έχω 'have '-εἶχον (719)ἕξω & σχήσω (imprt. σχές)ἔσχον
(σχοίην, σχεῖν, σχών)-ἔσχηκα. - Mid. & Pass. ἔχομαιεἰχόμην-έξομαι &
σχήσομαι (durat.), σχεθήσομαι (effect.)—ἐσχόμην—ἔσχημαι.
P-B forms: εἴχοσαν for εἶχον (791; Λ. Ρ. 5, 209), ἔσχοσαν for ἔσχον
(Scymn. 695), čoxnoa.
Ν: ἔχω-είχα, no moro.
'
2. ἀμπέχω surround, cover '-ἀμφ-έξω-ἠμπέσχον.— Mid. ἀμ
πέχομαι ' have on '—ἠμπειχόμην-ἀμφέξομαι—ἠμπεσχόμην. Also ἀμπί-
σχω & Mid. ἀμπίσχομαι-ἠμπίσχετο.
3. αντέχω keep up'ἀνεῖχον ἀνέξω & ανασχήσω-ἀνέσχονἀνέ
σχηκα).—Mid. ἀνέχομαι hold out'ἠνειχόμην—ἀνέξομαι & ανασχήσομαι
—ήνεσχόμην.
4. ὑπισχνέομαι promiseὑπισχνούμην —ὑποσχήσομαι-υπεσχόμην--
ὑπέσχημαιὑπεσχήμην.
Ν: ὑ]πύσκομαι (App. iv. 3) & ὑ]ποσκεύ(γ)ομαι-ϋ]ποσκευτῶ——ποσκεμένος.
99. ἔψω cookἧψον—ἑψήσωἥψησα.—Mid. ἑψήσομαι.
P-B forms : εψέω and ψάω (from εψήσω) ἥψουνἕψηκα.—Pass. εψηθείς --
ἡψημένος.
Ν: Ψήνω (723, μένω οι ψαίνω 902)—ψήσω-ψημένος (from which the
present ψήνω, 853).
100. *(ζάω) ζω live (ζῆς, ζῆ, etc. [829] subj. ζῶ, ζῇς, ζῇ, etc. ; imprt. ζῆ
& ζῆθι, ζήτω, etc. ζῆν, ζῶν)—ἔζων (έζης, ἔζη, etc. ; subj. ζώην, ζώης, etc.)--
ζήσω δε ζήσομαι (commoner βιώσομαι supra 26) - (ἔζησα) ἐβίων.
P-B forms : nor. ἔζησα-pt. ἔζηκα (ζέζηκα JACramor iii. 256, 6). (738.)
N: Sŵ 'live' (Šņs, Sûì, olc.)—Show.—By-formı : 5nŵ (857), Sñs, sî, Snvûµe”.
ἔηουνα, έζηες, ote.
'
101. *ζεύγνυμι & -νύω ' yoke --ζεύξω -ἔζευξα.-Mid. & Pass. ζεύγνυμαι
ἐζευγνύμην ζεύξομαι ἐζευξάμην ; Pass. ἐζεύχθην & ἐζύγην—ἔζευγμαι.
P-B forms : ζευγίζω-δια-ζευχθήσεται.
Ν: ζεύγω (so von Nomo. 412 [instoud of ζεύγνω 7751) & ζέφνω (1.0.ζεύ[γ]νω)
ζέψω-ζεμένος.
103. "ζώννυμι 'gird '--ἔζωσα.-Mid. ζώννυμαι-ἐζωσάμην-ἔζωμαι.
P-B forms : ζώσομαι. -- Pass. ἐξώσθην ἕζωσμαι.
Ν: ζών (ν)ω (so since T, as Apophth. 276 ν ζώνουσι) ---- ζώσω -- ζωσμένος. (775)
103. ήδομαι ' rejoice'ἡσθήσομαι-ήσθην.
262
IRREGULAR VERBS : ἥκω -ἵστημι. [996 104-118
104
104. ήκω 'am comeἥξω.
P-B forms: ἥκω as present : come aor. ήξα-pf. ἧκα.
105. ήμαι see κάθημαι 994.
106. °ημί 'say, see 978.
107. ἡττάομαι (ήσσ-) am worsted—ἡττώμην—ἡττήσομαι durat.),
ἡττηθήσομαι (effect.)—ἡττήθηνἥττημαι.
P-B forms : ἡττάω (= νικάω) ‘conquer’ἡττήσω—ἥττησαἥττηκα.-Pass.
ἡσσόομαι (from ἥσσων 504, 2).
108. Αθάπτω ‘bury'θάψω ἔθαψα.-Pass. ταφήσομαι ; τεθάψομαι
ἐτάφην (ἐθάφθην)-τέθαμμαι.
P-B forms : pf. τετάφατε, τετάφθαι.
Ν: θάψτω (174) ‘bury'—θάψωθαμμένος.
109. * θαυμάζω admire, ‘wonder'θαυμάσομαι-ἐθαύμασατεθαύ
μακα.-Pass. regular.
P-B forms : fut. θαυμάσω. Also Mid. θαυμάζομαι-θαυμασθήσομαι-ἐθαυμα
σάμην & ἐθαυμάσθην (N Rov. 13, 3).
Ν: θαμάζομαι (179) 'admire 'θαμαστώ.
110. θέλω see ἐθέλω.
111. θέω run, ‘race'ἔθεον-θεύσομαι. The rest from τρέχω &
δραμείν (see infra 278).
P-B forms: ἔθεe for ἔθει (835).-fut. θεύσω.
112. * (θνήσκω οι θνήσκω) ἀποθνήσκω ‘die'ἀποθανοῦμαι, τεθνήξω
ἀπέθανον τέθνηκα, as, e, etc. See 967, α.
P forms : fut. θνήξομαι, τεθνήξομαι—ἔθανον.
Ν: ἀποθαίνω (900) & northern N πεθαίνω die’—ἀποθάνω & πεθάνω ἀπόθανα
& ἐπέθανα-ἀποθαμμένος & πεθαμμένος.
113. θύω sacrifice, regular, but aor. pass. ἐτύθην (182, c), Ρ ἐθύθην
(Melito 1216 A; Aster. 436 B).
111. ζω & [καθ-ίζω 'sit’ἐκάθιζον-καθιῶ (888)-καθίσα & ἐκάθισα
(746) - Mid. ἵζομαι & καθίζομαι -- ἱζόμην & ἐκαθιζόμην — καθιζήσομαι
ἐκαθισάμην (trans.) pf. κάθημαι, which see in 994.
P-B forms : καθίσω & καθιζήσω-καθίζησα- κεκάθικα. Mid. fut. καθίσομαι
and καθιοῦμαι πor. ἐκαθεζόμην. (See also ἕζομαι.)
[Moeris 195 καθεδεῖ 'Αττικῶς, καθίσεις Ἑλληνικῶς.]
N : καθίζω ' sit’—καθίσω, imprt. κάτσε (Prodr. 3, 43t) i. e, κάθισε (136. 995),
(έκατσα Prodr. 1, 131 ; ἔκατσεν 1, 199; κάτσωμεν 1, 243, und so on ever since)
καθισμένος.
115. ἵημι sce 957.
116. (ίκω) αφικνέομαι ‘arrive’ἀφίξομαι-ἀφικόμην-ἀφιγμαι, ξαι,
-κται.-50 καθ-, έφ
117. ιλάσκομαι 'propitiate - εξιλασάμην - Pass. ἐξιλάσθην. Also
ἱλεύομαι.
P-B forms : ἱλάσομαι & ἐξ-ιλάσωἱλασάμην-Pass. ἐξιλασθήσομαι-ἱλάσθην.
118. ἵστημι 300 955, 962, 965-6 & 997, 1.
P-N forms:
(α) from ἵστημι PB forms : ἱστάνω (also στάνω ? ep. παραστανέτω 962)
and ἱστάω ‘set up'στήσω-ἔστησαἕστακα.—Ν: σταίνω (from ἱστάνω, 723
& 900 f.; not so Glatzidakis in KZ xiii. 105-117, but ep. 959 | 1]) 'sot up
σταίσω (στέσω)-σταιμένος.-Also στήνω (965) *set up —στήσω-(στημένος).
263
996119-130] IRREGULAR VERBS: καθαίρω-κερδαίνω.
(b) from ἕστηκα stand, see 965 f.-P-B forms: ἑστήκω & στήκω (so in
Sept., NT, etc. ep. 973) 11-pf. ἵσταμαι —Ν : στέκω, also στέκομαι (a contami
nation of στήκω Χ ἵσταμαι οι ἕσταμαι) stand (imprt. στέκε, also στέκα,
στεκᾶτε [30], part. στεκάμενος & στεκούμενος)—σταθῶ-σταιμένος.
119. *καθαίρω ‘cleanse’ἐκάθαιρον (746) - καθαρῶ ἐκάθηρα.—Mid.
καθαίρομαι --καθαροῦμαι-ἐκαθηράμην. — Pass. ἐκαθάρθη- κεκαθαρμαι.
P-B forms : κεκάθαρα — ἐκάθαρα -- καθαρθήσομαι.-By-form : καθαρίζω (ulso
καθερίζω or rather καθαρίζω (16) in Sept. & ΝΤ).
Ν : καθαρίζω ' cleanse 'καθαρίσω-καθαρισμένος.
120. καθέζομαι see ἕζομαι (supra 60).
121. καθ-ίζω see ίζω (supra 114).
122. * κάθημαι see 994.
κατα-κέκαυκα. --
123. καίω & κάω (209) burn —καύσω— ἔκαυσα-κατα-κ καυκα. -- Pass.
καύσομαι (durat.), καυθήσομαι (effect.)-ἐκαύθην.
P-B forms : fut. καήσομαι-ἐκάην (κατα-καών Diog. 6, 95).
N: καίω 'burn,' καίγω (860), also καύω (from καύσω)—κάψω (from καύσω 1.0.
κάφσω) - καημένος (from ἐκεν, henco καϋμένος is a misspelling).
124. καλέω call '--fut. καλώ (889)ἐκάλεσα—κέκληκα. Mid. καλοῦ-
μαι invite. fut. καλοῦμαι-ἐκαλεσάμην.-Pass. fut. καλοῦμαι (durat.),
κληθήσομαι (efect.); κεκλήσομαι-ἐκλήθην κέκλημαι ἐκεκλήμην.
P form : καλέσω.
Ν : καλῶ (& καλειῶ 857 ff.) ' invito 'καλέσω--- καλεσμένος.
195. Γκαμμύω see μύω (infra 168).
126. *κάμνω toil 'καμοῦμαιἔκαμονκέκμηκα.
P B forms : (κάμνω ' work'): καμῶ (or rather κάμω 894) = ἐργάσομαι
(Hesych.)—έκαμόμην.
Ν: (κάμνω) κάνω, ' do, make, also καμώνω (so too Porph. Cer. 463, 7 καμω
θέντων)—κάμω έκαμα—καμωμένος.
197. κείμαι see 990.
'
138. κείρω shear --κερῶ ἔκειρα.----Mid. κείρομαι-κεροῦμαι--ἐκειρά-
μην. -- Pass. ἐκάρην κέκαρμαι.
In N replaced by P κουρεύω.
129. *κεράννυμι & -νύω mix' ἐκέρασα. - Mid. ἐκερασάμην. - Puss.
κραθήσομαι--ἐκράθην & ἐκεράσθην -- κέκραμαι. By-form : κίρνημι with
pass. κίρναμαι.
P-B forms : κεράω & κιρνάω ' pour out κεράσω & περῶ κεκέρακα. - Mid
κεράομαι. Ρass. κιρνῶμαι—κεκέρασμαι (κεκίρναμαι Orib. iii. 179, 5).
N: nepváw (116. 937; so oven Achmet. 196) ‘pour out,' 'fill' (a cup))—repáow
-κερασμένος.
130. Ακερδαίνω 'win 'κερδανῶ ἐκέρδανα.
PK forms : κερδαίνω - κερδήσω - εκέρδησα – κεκέρδηκα & ακα.
-
δε
κερδηθήσομαι κεκερδημένος. By-form : κερδίζω.
Pass.
Ν: κερδαίνω (so in Crole and elsowhore) & κερδίζω-κερδαίσω & κερδίσω..
εκέρδαισα & ἐκέρδισα-κερδαιμένος & κερδισμένος.
[1] Hence ἕστηκα or ruther ἔστηκα = 4 εἱστήκειν : Apophth. 375 Β ἡ ἁγία
Μαρία ἔστηκε καὶ ἔκλαιεν.
264
IRREGULAR VERBS: κίχρημι—κρεμάννυμι. [996 -
131 10
- 131. κίχρημι ‘lend'—χρήσω-ἔχρησα- κέχρηκα.-Mid. κίχραμαι-ἐχρη-
σάμην.
P-B forms : κιχράω (Sept.).-Mid. κιχράομαι 'borrow '—ἐκιχράμην.
Since G replaced by A δανείζω which still fully survives.
139. κλαίω & κλάω (20°) ‘weep 'κλαύσομαι & κλαήσω-ἔκλαυσα.
Mid. κλαίομαι ' lament 'ἐκλαυσάμην.--Pass. κεκλαύσεται.
P-Bforms: κλαύσω. Pass. κλαυσθήσομαι ἐκλαύσθην
κέκλαυται.
κέκλαυσμαι,
Ν : κλαίω, ulgo κλαίγω (860) ' weep'κλάψω (from κλαύσω 1.0.κλάφσω).— Mid
κλαίομαι—κλαυτῶ—κλαημένος (κλαυμένος ? ep. su ru 123) & κλαμένος (150, d).
133. °κλάω ' break -ἔκλασα-Pass. ἐκλάσθην — κέκλασμαι.
—
P forms: κλάσω--Pass. ἀνα-κλασθήσομαι, also ἀνα-κλάσομαι (Gal. 3, 147).
>
N : κλάνω ' break (CGL 5, 13 κλάννι frangit)-κλάσω-κλασμένος.
134. *κλείω & κλῄω ‘shut 'ἔκλειον, ἔκλῃον-κλείσω, κλῄσω-ἔκλεισα,
ἔκλῃσα-ἀπο-κέκληκα.-Mid. κατα-κλησάμενος.--Pass. κλεισθήσομαι-κε-
κλείσομαι-ἐκλείσθην, κατεκλήσθην-κεκλειμαι, κέκλημαι ἐκεκλείμην.
P form : κέκλεισμαι.
Ν : κλείω οι κλειω (155, c) shut 'κλείσω--κλεισμένος.
135. Εκλέπτω steal 'κλέψω, also κλέψομαι-ἔκλεψα-κέκλοφα. --
Pass. ἐκλάπην-κέκλεμμαι.
P-B forms : ἐκλέφθην—κέκλαμμαι.
Ν: κλέφτω (174), also κλέβω (875), ' steal 'κλέψω-κλεμμένος.
136. Γκλίνω lean, slope κλίνω-ἔκλινα.--Pass. κατα-κλίνομαι--
-κλινοῦμαι δε -κλινησωμαι - -εκλίνην-κέκλιμα.
P-B forms : κέκλικα κλιθήσομαι ἐκλινάμην, ἐκλίθην & ἐκλίνθην.
(κεκλίσεται Αpoll. De Pron. 286 € ; κεκλίνθαι id. Synt. 47, 1).
N : κλίνω ‘lean 'κλίνω-κλιμένος.
137. * κόπτω cut' κόψωἔκοψα-κέκοφα.- Pass. κοπήσομαι-ἐκόπην
κόκομμα-απο-κεκόψομαι.
P forms: κόψομαι - ἐκυψάμην.
Ν : κύφτω & κύβ(γ)ω (875) cut’—κόψω-κομμένος.
138. κράζω, commoner κέκραγα 'cry —ἐκεκράγειν ' cried κεκράξομαι
shall cry -ἐν-έκραγον.-By-form: κραυγάζω- κραυγάσας.
1 1 forms : κράξω, κεκράξω, ανα-κράξομαι, ἀνα-κεκράξομαι-ἐκέκραγον, ἐκέκραξα.
Ν : κράζω-κράξω.
139. *κρέμαμαι hang (subj. κρέμωμαι, -ηται)—ἐκρεμάμην (subj. κρε-
μαίμην, -αιο, ταιτο, etc.)-κρεμήσομαι.-Pass, εκρεμάσθην.
P-B forms : (κρέμομαι ? ep. 774 & δύναμαι supra 54)-ἐξ-ἐκρέμετο (Luke 19),
48) κεκρέμασμαι.
Ν : κρέμομαι ' hung --κρεμαστῶ --κρεμασμένος (ω). Apollod. Arch. 16).
140. κρεμάννυμι hang 'κρεμώ--ἐκρέμασα.
P for : κρεμαννύω & κρεμνάω-κρεμάσω.- Mid. ἐκρεμασάμην. For the
pass. κρέμαμαι see proceding.
[Moeris 134 εκρεμάννυεν ᾿Αττικῶς, ἐκρέμνα Ἑλληνικῶς. Αγος. Mar. 119, 33
ἐκρεμνοῦντο.]
Ν : κρεμ(ν)άω (sometimes κρεμάγω 860), also κρεμάζω (808. 871) hang
κρεμάσω - κρεμασμένος. Cp. preceding.
265
996,41-150]
IRREGULAR VERBS : κρίνω-λανθάνω.
* explain - διακεκρίμεθα.
(durat.), κριθήσομαι (effect.)
141. κρίνω 'judge—κρίνω ἔκρινα—κεκρίκα.—Mid. κρίνομαι choose,
Pass. κρίνομαι am judged - κρινοῦμαι
ἐκρίθην κέκριμαι. - So ἀπο-κρίνω 'separate.
fut. κρίνω.-Pass. κρίνομαι-κριθῶκριμένος.
Ν : κρίνω (also κρένω 902) 'judge
2. ἀπο-κρίνομαι answer, reply' (mid.)-ἀποκρινοῦμαι - ἀπεκρινάμην
ἀποκέκριμαι-ἀπεκεκρίμην. So ὑποκρίνομαι dissemble.
6
P-B forms : ἀποκριθήσομαι shall answerἀπεκρίθην.
Ν : ἀποκρίνομαι 'reply 'ἀποκριθῶ.
142. Γκρούω strike, regular. - Mid. ἐκρουσάμην.--Pass. -εκρούσθην
-κέκρουμαι δε κέκρουσμαι.
Ν : κρού(γ)ω (860) ‘strike, hurt — κρούσω—κρουσμένος.
143. κρύπτω ‘hide"κρύψωἔκρυψα.-Mid. κρύψομαι-ἐκρυψάμην.
Pass. ἐκρύφθηνκέκρυμμαι.
P forms : κρύβω ἔκρυβον (ἔκρυφον ? Q. Sm. I, 393) aor. ἔκρυβον (= έκρυψα
Α. Ρ. 7,700)-συγκέκρυφα.-Pass. κρυβήσομαι & κρυφθήσομαι ; κεκρύψομαι.
Ν : κρύφτω (174), κρύβω (875) & κρύβγω (861), hide 'κρύψω κρυμμένος.
N:
'
144. *κτάομαι acquire κτήσομαι, κεκτήσομαι shall possess
ἐκτησάμην—κέκτημαι possess (subj. κεκτῆται)-ἐκεκτήμην (subj. κεκτῇτο).
Ν : ἀπο-κτῶ (κτάω JMoschos 3065 Β)—ἀποκτήσω—ἀποκτημένος.
145. κτείνω ‘kill’—κτενῶ—ἔκτεινα (ἔκτανον)—ἀπ-έκτονα (& ἀπ-εκτόνηκα)
--ἀπ-εκτόνεσαν.-By-form : ἀπο-κτίννυμι οι εκτείνυμι, also κτ(ε)ιν(ν)ύω.
P-B by-forms: ἀπο-κτέννω & -κταίνω - ἔκταναν —ἀπ-έκτα(γ)μα-ἀπ-εκτο-
νήκει.
146. κτίν(ν)υμι see preceding.
147. *κύπτω ' stoop - ἀνα-κύψομαι-ἔκυψα-κέκια.
P form : fut. κύψω.
Ν: σκύφτω (so even Leont. Mon. 621 ) [from εἰσ-κύπτω], also σκύβω (875) δ
σκύβγω (861), ‘stoup σκύψω -- σκυμμένος.
118. *λαγχάνω get by lot 'πλήξομαι-ἔλαχον --- εἴληχα.- Pass. ἐλήχθην
--εἰληγμένος.
P forms : λελογχα, λέλαχα - Pass. λελάχαται.
16
Ν: λαχάνω (Μ), λαχαίνω (900 f.) ' got by lot, come across ' -λάχω-λαχαι-
μένος.
(
-
149. λαμβάνω take λήψομαι (inprt. λαβέ 912 f., λαβεῖν, λαβών)
ἔλαβον-εἴληφα - ειλήφειν. Mid. λαμβάνομαι grasp - ἐλαβάμην ἐπ-
ειλήφθαι. - Puss. ληφθήσομαι — ἐλήφθην -- εἴλημμαι.
P forms : λήμψομαι-ἔληψα (= ἔλαβον)—ἐλήμφθην (=ἐλήφθην)-ἐπιλέλημ
μαι (also είλημπται)-κατα-λελήψεται.
Ν: λαβάνω (Μ), also λαμπάνω, now λαβαίνω (goo f.) receive '--- λάβω (imprt.
λάβε & λάβον, ng Grout Louvro Pup. 2378 & 3ror, und Alohem. passim)λαβα
μένος (whonco λαβώνω ' hit, wound ').
150. *λανθάνω lie hid, escape notice'-λήσω-ἔλαθον-λέληθα.--
Mid. dep. (επι-λανθάνομαι forget '-ἐπιλήσομαι-ελαθόμην-(ἐπι-λέ-
λησμαι.
P forms: λήσομαι (= λήσω)-λέλαθα.-Mid. ἐλησάμην—λελήσεται (λελα-
θήσεται Acta Phil. in Hollad. 14).--Pass, ἐπι-λησθήσομαι-ἐπ-ελήσθην.
Ν : (λαβαίνω ? 900 f.) λαθεύω ' oscape notice, orr'λαθέψω λαθεμένος.
266
IRREGULAR VERBS: λέγω μάχομαι. [996,
161-158
151. 1. °(λéyw 'gather,' 'choose') ovλ-, ék-λéyw,— -λé§w— -é뀧a—
συνείλοχα (734) λέξομαι (διαλέξομαι durat., διαλεχθήσομαι effect.)
-ελεξάμην. Pass. συλλεγήσομαι-ελέγην (& ελέχθην) είλεγμαι δ
-λέλεγμαι).
P forms: pf. -είλεχα-κατα-λεχθήσομαι.
[Moeris 191 καταλεγείς Αττικῶς, καταλεχθεὶς Ἑλληνικῶς.]
> C
2. λέγω 'say 'λέξω-ἔλεξα-(pf. εἴρηκα; see εἴρω supra 72).--Pass.
λεχθήσομαι; λελέξομαι-ἐλέχθην—λέλεγμαι. - 50 δια-λέγομαι chat, dis-
cuss διαλέξομαι (durat.), διαλεχθήσομαι (effect.) -διελέχθην-διείλεγμαι.
P forms : λέλεχα (= εἴρηκα) διελέγην.
Ν : λέ(γ)ω (863. 155, c) say 'εἰ]πῶ—εἶπα (εἴπηκα)-εἰ]πωμένος (& πωημένος,
800 supra 86 & infra 214).
152. Κλείπω ‘leave' ἀπο-λείψω ἔλιπον - λέλοιπα - ἐλελοίπην.
Pass. (ἀπο-)λείπομαι-(ἀπο-)λείψομαι durat.), ἀπο-, ὑπολειφθήσομαι
(effect.); λελείψομαι-ἐλείφθην—λέλειμμαι.-By-form : -λιμπάνω.
P forms : ἔλειψα—ἐλειψάμην.
[Phryn. 343 ἐκλείψας ἀδόκιμον, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἐκλιπών.]
16
>
Ν: λείπω ' leave, am wanting λείψωἔλειψα.
153. *λούω ' wash, bathe ' λούεις, λούει, λοῦμεν, λοῦτε, λοῦσι")
ἔλουον (ἀπ-έλου, ἐλοῦμεν) ἔλουσα.—Mid. λοῦται, λοῦνται (λοῦσθαι, λού
μενος & λουόμενος)—ἐλούμην—λούσομαι-ἐλουσάμην-λέλουμαι. (Cp. 153.)
P forms : λούω, λούεις, λούει, λούομεν, etc., regular-ἔλουον, ἔλονες, etc.-
λούσω.—Pass, ἐλούθην & ἐλούσθην λέλουσμαι.
[Phryn. 165 ἐλουόμην, ἐλούου, ἐλούετο, λούομαι, λούεται, ἐλουόμεθα, ἐλούοντο,
λούεσθαι πάντα οὕτω λεγόμενα ἀδόκιμα, εἰ δὲ δόκιμα βούλει αὐτὰ ποιῆσαι τὸ
ε καὶ τὸ ὁ ἀφαίρει καὶ λέγε λοῦσθαι καὶ λοῦμαι, λοῦται, ἐλούμην, ἐλοῦτο, ἐλούμεθα,
ἐλοῦντο· οὕτω γὰρ οἱ ἀρχαῖοι λέγουσιν. Μoeris 228 λοῦται ᾿Αττικῶς, λούεται
Ἑλληνικῶς.]
Ο
Ν: λούω & λούγω (860) bathe '—λούσω.-Mid. λού(γ)ομαι-λουστῶλου-
σμένος.
154. μαίνω 'make mad 'ἔμηνα.-Pass. μαίνομαι am mad 'μανοῦμαι
---ἐμάνην μέμηνα am mad.
P forms: μανήσομαι-ἐμηνάμην με μάνημαι.
(N: [Creto, etc.] μανίζω 'get angry —μανίσω-μανισμένος.)
155. * μανθάνω learn ' -- μαθήσομαι-ἔμαθον-μεμάθηκα.
N: M
Ν: μαθάνω Μ (194), μαθαίνω (poor.) learn, touch 'μάθω-μαθημένος.
156. μαραίνω ' wither' ἐμάρανα (65. 892) μεμάρασμαι.
P forms : ἐμαρηνάμην. - Pass. μαρανθήσομαι-ἐμαράνθην --- με μάραμμαι.
Ν: μαραίνω ' wilhor μαράνω-ἐμάρανα.-Mid. μαραίνομαι-μαραθῶ ἐμα
ράθηκα-μαραμμένος.
1
157. μαρτυρέω testify, regular.-Pass. μαρτυρήσομαι (durat.), μαρτυ-
μηθήσομαι (effect.)-ἐκ-μαρτυρησάμενος. - By-form : μαρτύρομαι attest
ἐμαρτυράμην.
P forms : μαρτυροῦμαι-μεμαρτύρημαι.
Ν : μαρτυρώ (-άω) testify 'μαρτυρήσω-μαρτυρημένος.
158. * μάχομαι ' fight 'μαχοῦμαι-ἐμαχεσάμην -με μάχημαι.
P forms : μαχήσομαι ἐμαχησάμην & ἐμαχέσθην.
Ν: μάχομαι 'bour mulico against ' ἐμάχουμου-10 moro,
N:
1
267
996159 - 168
- 1688] ]
μεθύσκω μεθύσκω
μύω.
IRREGULAR VERBS: 159. μεθύσκω intoxicate, μεθύω am intoxicated 'ἐμέθυσα.— Pass.
μεθύσκομαι 'get drunk ἐμεθύσθην.
P forms: μεθύσω, μεθυσθήσομαι-με μέθυσμαι.
Ν : μεθνῶ (155, c) 'am or make drunk’—μεθύσω-μεθυσμένος.
159. μείγνυμι & μειγνύω see μίγνυμι.
160. (μείρομαι) Pass. pf. εἵμαρται it is fated, εἱμαρμένος.ἡ εἱμαρμένη
'fate.'
161. *μέλλω am about to,tarry--ἔμελλον & ἤμελλον (722)-μελ-
λήσω-ἐμέλλησα (& ήμ-).-Pass. μέλλεται ' is put off.
N : μέλλει ' is roserved, is about’ἔμελλε-no noro. Puss. μέλλεται (= εΐ-
N:
μαρται; ep. precoding in Pass.); τὸ μελλούμενου (= τὸ μέλλον).
102. (μέλω ' care ') μέλει ' concerns, is of interest '--ἔμελεν-μελήσει
ἐμέλησε -- με μέληκε.
Το ἐπι-μέλομαι, commoner -μελοῦμαι — ἐπ-εμελόμην, -εμελούμην—ἐπι-
μελήσομαι durat.) -ἐπεμελήθην ἐπι-μεμέλημαι. So too μετα-μέλομαι
repent μετ-εμελόμην- (τὸ μετα-μελησόμενον).
P forms : ἐμέλησα (= ἐφρόντισα)μεμέληκας-μεμέλημαι— Επ-εμελησάμην.
Mid. μετα-μελοῦμαι μετα-μεληθήσομαι-μετεμελήθην-μετα-μμέλημαι.
Ν : μέλει με ‘it is of importance to mo,' ' I care' (chiofy negutive : δέ με μέλει
it is nothing to me')ἔμελε-no m010. Probably due to literary influence, for
common speech commonly uses in its place (γ)νοιάζει με (= ἔννοιά μοι ἐστί).
+
163. μένω remain μεν@-ἔμειναμεμένηκα.
Ν: μένω (northern N also μνίσκω [or μνήσκω] & μνέσκω)—μείνω.
*
164. *μιαίνω * defle, regular -ἐμίανα.-Pass. ἐμιάνθην μεμίασμαι.
P forms: ἐμίηνα-μεμιαγκώς.—ἐμιήνατο—με μίαμμαι.
>
Ν: μιώνω (Crete) defile —μιώσωμιωμένος.
165. μίγνυμι (or μείγνυμι) & -νύω 'mix'μίξωἔμιξα.-Pass. μίγνυμαι
- αναμιχθήσομαι-ἐμίχθην & ἐμίγην--μέμιγμαι.
P forms: μέμιχα—ἐμεμίχην.—ἐμιξάμην- μιγήσομαι.
Ν : σμίγω (so too Theoph., Nonn. i. 222, 346) [from συμ-μίγω 136, 2] 'mix,
join' σμίξω-σμι(γ)μένο; (179).
166. (μιμνήσκω οι -μνή-) ανα-, ὑπο-μιμνήσκω * remind ' -μνήσω
-έμνησα. Pass. μιμνήσκομαι remember μνησθήσομαι - μεμνήσομαι
shall remember-ἐμνήσθην μέμνημαι remember) (subj. μεμνῶμαι;
μέμνησο)-ἐμε μνήμην (subj. μεμνήμην).
In N it lingors in the dissimilatod form μνήσκω (Trinch. 220 [+ 1165] μνησκό
μεθα), then in a low isolated oxpressions due to the Church: (μ)νήστητί μου
Κύριε (i. e. μνήσθητι). For the northern form μνήσκω or rather μνίσκω = μένω
800 μένω suprα 163.]
167. Αμνημονεύω mention, regular. Pass. μνημονεύσομαι (durat.),
μνημονευθήσομαι (effect.).
Ν: μνημονεύω ' commemorate 'μνημονέψω-μνημονεμένος-duo to the in-
fluence of the Church.
'
168. *μύω shut' (the eyes or lips)- ἔμυσαμέμικα am closed.
Commoner κατα-μύω, also καμμύω, close the eyes.
P forms: καμ-μύω ' shut the eyes—καμμύσωἐκάμμυσα-κεκάμμυκα.
Ν : καμμνω (155, c) & καννυω (from καμπω 155, α) ' close my eyes' ύσω
-υσμένος,
268
IRREGULAR VERBS: νέμωὄλλυμι.
[996169–182
> C
169. νέμω distribute 'νεμώ — ἔνειμα
ἔνειμα - δια-νενέμηκα. Mid. 'dis-
tribute among selves, pasture, possess — νεμοῦμαι - ἐνειμάμην --
νενέμημαι.-Pass. ἐνεμήθην.
P forms : νεμήσω νεμήσομαι-νεμηθήσομαι.
170. °νέω “heap up'ἔνησα.-Pass. νένημαι.
P forms : νήσω--ἐνήσθην, ἐπ-ενήθην—νένησμαι.
171. (νίζω ' wash ') ἀπο-, ἐκ-νίζω- νίψω.-Mid. ἀπο-νίζομαι-ἀπο-νίψο-
μαι-ἀπ-ενιψάμην—ἀπο-, ἐκ-, κατα-νένιμμαι.
P forms: νίπτω-νίψω-ένιψα.-Mid. νίψομαι-ἐνιψάμην. - Pass. νιφήσομαι
—κατ-ενίφθην—νένιμμαι.
Ν: νίφτω (174), νίβω (875) (so even Nomoc. 505), also νίβγω (861) ' wash (the
hands or face νίψω.Mid. νίβομαι wash my hands'νιψτώνιμμένος.
172. νυστάζω ' nod, am sleepy —ἐνύστασα.
P forms : νυστάξω-ἐνύσταξα.
Ν : νυστάζω ' am sleepy νυστάξω-νυστα(γ)μένος (179)..
<
173. (οίγνυμι ' open ') ανοίγνυμι & ἀν-οίγω 'open-ἀνέῳγον (747)
ἀνοίξω—ἀνέφξα—ἀνέωγα or ἀνέφχα 'have opened & stand open.
Pass. ὑπανεωγνύμην, ἀνεῳγόμην — ἀνοίξομαι (durat.) ἀνεῴξομαι & P ανοιχθή-
Ρ
σομαι (effect.)-ἀνέφγμαι & ἀνέῳγα-ἀνεῴγμην.
P forms : ἤνοι γον—ἤνοιξα. — Mid. aor. ἀνεῳγόμην. —ἀνοιχθήσομαι δ ἀνοιγή
σομαι—ἠνεώχθην (ἀνεῳχθῆναι) & ἠνοίχθην—ἤνοιγμαι.
Ν: ἀνοίγω ' open —ἀνοίξω-ἀνοι (γ)μένος (179).
174. οἶδα see 969 f.
175. οικτίρω ' pity'ᾤκτίρα.
-
P forms: οἰκτείρω - οἰκτειρήσω — εκτείρησα. -- Pass, οἰκτειρήσομαι (Marc.
Erem. 90g 4)ᾠκτειρήθην —ᾠκτείρηται.
176. οἶμαι see οἴομαι.
177. οιμώζω ' wail —οιμώξομοιώμωξα.
F forms : οἰμώσσω or -ττωοἰμώξω.
178. οἴομαι & οἶμαι ‘think, deem (οἴει 763, οἴεται, οιόμεθα, οἴεσθε
[& οἶσθε Pup. of Isocr. 8, 119], οἴονται)—φόμην, commoner ᾤμην (cp. 148)
—οιήσομαι=φήθην.
P forms : οἰηθήσομαι-ψησάμην.
179. οἴχομαι am gone χόμην-οἰχήσομαι.
P forms : παρ-άχηκα-παραλήκει.
180. οἰωνίζομαι forbode '-οἰωνίζοντο-οἰωνισάμην (716).
P form : fut. οἰωνιοῦμαι.
181. ολισθάνω & -αίνω 'slip' aor. 2nd ὤλισθον.
P forms : ολισθαίνω (900)—ολισθήσω-ὠλίσθησα (also ὠλίσθηνα)---ὠλίσθηκα.
182. (όλλυμι destroy) ἀπόλλυμι, also ἐξ-, διόλλυμι, by-form απ
ολλύω destroy ἀπώλλυν & -ώλλυον---ἀπολῶ, διολῶ - ἀπώλεσα
ἀπολώλεκα.-Pass. ἀπόλλυμαι-ἀπ-ολοῦμαι-ἀπ-ωλόμην - ἀπ-όλωλα ‘am
lost-απωλώλειν (997, 11).
P forms: ἀπολλύω & απόλλω (937)ὀλέσωὤλεσα,
σομαι-ἀπ-ωλέσθην (διωλέσθη Theoph. 299, 17)ὀλώλεσμαι.
Pass. ἀπ-ολεσθή-
269
996 189–193-193.
] IRREGULAR VERBS: ὄμνυμιὀφειλω.
183. *ὄμνυμι (& -νύω) swear (imprt. ὄμνυ, ὀμνύς, -ύντος)—ὤμνυν &
ὤμνυον-ομοῦμαι-ώμοσαὀμώμοκα.-Pass. ὠμό(σ)θηνὀμώμο(σ)ται.
P forms: ὀμνύω (ύμνυε)—ὀμέσω.
[ Moeris 253 ὁμοῦμαι, ἐμεῖς ὀμεῖται, ᾿Αττικῶς· ὀμύσω, (ομόσεις), ομόσει, Έλλη-
νικῶς. ]
Ν : 0]μώνω & ἀμώνω ‘swear 8]μώσω & ἀμώσω.-By-forms : μνώγωμνώξω
μνωμένος.
184. ὀνίνημι ' profit’ὀνήσω—ὤνησα. Pass. ὀν ναμαι—ὠνινάμην—ὀνή-
σομαι--aor. ὠνήμην (subj. ὀναίμην, ἔναιο ; ἄνασθαι), also ὠνήθην (ὀνηθῆναι).
P forms: ὀνέω (Theod. Lect. 225).Mid. δνοῦμαι ἀνεῖται Stob. 68, 36;
ὠνούμενος [Luc.] Philop. 26)-aor. ὠνάμην, νήσασθαι, ἀνάσατο.
In P-N speech replaced by ὠφελέω (Ν φελάω). (937.)
°
185. (ὀξύνω sharpen *) παροξύνω stimulate. - Pass. παρώξυμμα
(παρωξύνθαι).
P forms : παρ-ώξυγκα-ὤξυμμαι, ἀπ-ώξυσμαι.
186. δράω seeἑώρων (763)ὄψομαι (ὄψει 726) εἶδον (see ΕΙΔΩ
supra 64)εόρακα (ἑώρακα)-ἑωράκη & κειν. Mid. προ-, ύφ-, περι-
ορῶμαι - προ-εωρώμην — ὀφθήσομαι — ὤφθην — ἑώραμαι δε όμμαι ώψαι,
ὦπται, etc.).
P forms : ὥρων (727)-εἶδα (see ΕΙΔΩ supra 64)ώρακα. (Mal. III, η έωρα-
κοῦσα.)-Mid. ὠψάμην. — Pass. δραθήσομαι—ἑωράθην & ὡράθην.-Pf. προ-εωρα-
σθαι. [Mark that in TM compositions the future form ὄψομαι is very often
used as present in the sonso of I have to answer for, App. iv. 10b.]
In N replaced by θωρώ (i. o. θεωρώ 727. 152) & βλέπω 'sce'fut. ἰδῶ (also
διῶ 1.0. διῶ 915) — εἶδα- ιδωμένος. Neo under ΕΙΔΩ (supra 64).
Κ
187. ὀργίζω irritate ώργισα. Mid. dep. Γοργίζομαι 'get angry'
ὀργιοῦμαι durat.), ὀργισθήσομαι (effect.)-ὠργίσθην—ὤργισμαι.
Ν : ὀργίζομαι ' hato'ὀργιστῶὠργισμένος.
188. *¿péyw 'stretch'-pega.—Mid. & Pass. ¿péyoµai 'stretch myself,'
desire (ὠρεξάμην) ὠρέχθην.
P forms: opúpexa (due to ¿púpvxa; sec ¿púttw infra 190).—Mid. & Pass.
πρωρεγμένος.-By-form : ὀριγνῶμαι—ὀριγνήσομαιὀριγνηθῆναι.
Ν: ο]ρέγομαι ' desire —ῥεχτῶ.
189. ὀρθόω ' crect, regular-but see ανορθύω.
Ν : διορθώνω ' correct 'διορθώσω-διωρθωμένος.
190. ὀρύττω & -σσω 'dig'-κατορύξω -- ώρυξα-(κατ-)ὐρώρυχα - Pass.
κατ-ὀρυχθήσομαι (κατ-ορυχήσομαι)—ὠρύχθην ορώρυγμαι- δι-ωρώρυκτο.
Pforms: aor. 2nd ὤρυγον—ὠρωρύχειν. Mid. ώρυξάμην. — Pass, ὀρυγήσομαι
—ὤρυγμαι.
191. ὀσφραίνομαι smellὀσφρήσομαι--ὠσφρόμην.
P forms: οσφραίνω give to small; Mid. οσφραίνομαι & ὀσφρῶμαι (or
ὄσφρομαι ? App. iv. 3)—ὠσφράνθην & ὠσφρησάμην.
199. * οὐρέω make water -εούρουν (726)-ουρήσομαι-ἐν-εούρησα
ἐν-εούρηκα.
P forms : οὐρήσω-ούρησα οὐρήκει.—Pass. οὐρήθην. (727. 153.)
Ν : κατ-ουρέω 'mako water'κατουρήσω κατουρημένος.
193. ὀφείλω ' owe '--- ώφειλον -- ὀφειλήσω
ὀφειλήσω - ὠφείλησα - ὠφειλήκειν.
Pass. οφειληθείς.
The 2nd aor. ὤφελον (mostly preceded by ὡς,
εἴθε, εἰ γάρ) is used as a particle of unattainable wish: would that
(1904 f.).
270
IRREGULAR VERBS : ὀφλισκάνω-πειράω. [996194-202
P forms : φλωὄφελον (write ὤφελον ητη [1]) & ὤφειλον ὤφελον :
'would that.'
(In N extinct, except in χρωφελέτης i. e. χρεωφειλέτης 152.)
194. όφλισκάνω ‘oweὀφλήσω-φλον (from ὤφελον)-ὤφληκα.--
Pass. ὠφλημένος.
P forms: ἔφλω (App. iv. 3)-ὤφλησα.
195. παίζω sport, play —παίσομαι (998)ἔπαισα-πέπαικα.—Pass.
πέπαισμαι.
P forms : παίξομαι, παίξω—ἔπαιξα-πέπαιχα.-Pass. παιχθήσομαι—ἐπαίχθην
πέπαιγμαι.
[Phryn. 217 παίξαι Δωριείς διὰ τοῦ Ξ, ὁ δ᾽ ᾿Αττικὸς παῖσαι καὶ παίσατε καὶ
συμπαίστης διὰ τοῦ σ ἐρεῖς. Μoeris 137 ἐπαίσαμεν Αττικῶς, ἐπαίξαμεν Ἑλλη
νικως. 268 παῖσαι ᾿Αττικῶς, παῖξαι Ἑλληνικῶς.]
Ν: παίζω παίξω-παιγμένος (179) & παισμένος.
196. παίω ' strike 'παίσω & durat.) ποιήσω-ἔπαισα-ὑπερ-πέπαικα.
Mid. (trans.) έπαισάμην.-Pass. ἐπαίσθην (commoner ἐπλήγην-pf. πέ-
πληγμαι).
P forms : πέπαικα & πεπαίηκα.—Pass. ἐμ-πέπαισμαι.
by πατάσσω (which see below 198).
Otherwise replaced
197. Υπάσχω suffer'πείσομαι-ἔπαθον-πέπονθα—ἐπεπόνθειν. .
P form : παθαίνω & pass., also προσ-παθέω.
16
Ν : πάσκω (176) labour, strive‘—πάθω-παθωμένος. [The form προσπαθῶ
Favours of literary mannerism.] By-form : (Μ πα(ν)θάνω 901), πασκίζω (πα-
σχίζω) ' ondeavour.
198. Επατάσσω ‘strike'πατάξω-ἐπάταξα.- Pass. replaced by τύ
πτομαι (which see below 283).
Pforms : Pass. πατάσσομαι-παταχθήσομαι-ἐπατάχθην. (Cp. παίω & τύπτω.)
Ν: πατάσσω harass, worry πατάξω-πατα(γ)μένος (179).
16
παε
199. ‡raúw 'cause to cease,'
cause to cease,' 'stop' (but rave also intr. 'stop')---
παύσω-ἔπαυσαπέπαυκα.-Μid. παύομαι cease '---παύσομαι-ἐπαυσά-
μην-πέπαυμαι.-Pass. παυθήσομαι; πεπαύσομαι-ἐπαύθην (& ἐπαύσθην).
P forms: ἀνα-πέον (Acla Tho. 19, 29, if not ἀναπεθον, as in Ν).-ἀνεπε-
ώμην (Acta Tho. 33, 40) or ἀve-mu- ? ep. Ν]-να-παήσομαι, ἀναπαῶσιν
(Callin. 135, 24)—ἐπάην, ἀνεπάην), παῆναι (Hermas Vis. 3, 9, 1).
Ν: παύω & παύγω (861) πάψω Mid. ἀνα-παύ(γ)ομαι & πεύ(γ)ομαι (801)
rest'ἀναπα(γ)ῶ --ἀναπάηκα-ἀναπαημένος.
200. πείθω persuade'πείσω- ἔπεισα-πέπεικα, but πέποιθα (intr.)
trust. Pass. πείθομαι πείσομαι durat.), πεισθήσομαι (effect.)ἐπεί-
σθην, ἐπιθόμην-πέπεισμαι & πέποιθα (997, 9).
P form : πεποιθήσω (Aquil. Ps. 9, 1).
201. Επεινάω 'am hungry (πεινῇς, πεινῇ, etc. πεινήν) πεινήσω-ἐπεί-
νησα-πεπείνηκα (829 f.).
P forms : πεινῶ (πεινάς, πεινᾷ, etc. πεινᾶν)-πεινάσω-ἐπείνασα (830 [& 1]).
Ν: πεινῶ 'um hungry 'πεινάσωπεινασμένος.
1
203. *πειράω 'try —πειράσω-ἐπείρασα (65. 892). Mid. dep. πειρῶμαι
“try 'πειράσομαι--ἐπειρασάμην & ἐπειράθην-πεπείραμαι.
,
P forms: πειράζω “try, tompt, vox πεπείρακα-πειραθήσομαι.-Pass.
πειράζομαι ἐπειράσθην πεπειρασμένος.
Ν : πειράζω ' troublo, vox —πειράξω-(πειραγμένος, 179) πειρασμένος.
271
996203-213] IRREGULAR VERBS : πέμπω-πίνω.
203. *πέμπω 'send'πέμψωἔπεμψα- πέπομφα--ἐπεπόμφην. Mid
ἀπο-, ἐκ-, προ-, μετα-πέμπομαι- πέμψομαι επεμψάμην.-Pass. ἐπέμ-
φθην-πέπεμμαι.
P form : πεμφθήσομαι.
Ν: (μ)πέμπω (μπέπω) send (μ) πέψω (μπεμπᾶτος = πεπεμμένος 1052).
204. περαίνω accomplish 'περανῶ-ἐπέρανα (65. 892).Mid. δι
επερανίμην.-Pass. ἐπεράνθην-πεπέρασμαι.
P forms : περανθήσομαι-πεπραμένος.
205. περαιόω carry over, regular, but fut. pass. περαιώσομαι
(durat.), περαιωθήσομαι (effect.)-ἐπεραιώθην.
206. *περάω 'pass'-- δια-περάσω-διεπέρασα.
P forms : ἐπέρασα πεπέρακα.
7
Ν : περνάω (ovon Apophth. 440 Α περνᾷ τὴν φάραγγα ; so Epiph. Mon. 265 Β)
(σου), algo απερνάω, 'puss, cross-περάσω-περασμένος (also περαζόμενος,
us Corn. A 19).
207. “πετάννυμι ' spread (also ανα-πεταννία)-fut. ἀνα-πετῶ--κατ-επέ-
τα απέπταμαι.
P forms : ανα-πετάω-πετάσω-δια-πεπέταμα.
"
Ν: πετάω ' throw, ‘fy'πετάξω--πετα(γ)μένος (179).
208. Επίτομαι 'y'πετήσομαι & πτήσομαι (136, 1)---ἀν-επτόμην (ανά
πτοιτο, ἀνα-πτέσθαι, ἐπι-πτόμενος).
P forms : ίπταμαιfut. imprt. ἀπόπτηθι—aur. ἔπτην (ἀπο-πταίην—πτῆναι,
ἐπι-, κατα-πτάς).
Ν : πέτομαι ' roly, trust —ἐπέτου μου” (Sor 4.)
ἐπέτουμου” --no moro.
fly, it has been replaced by πετάω (see supra 207).
209. πήγνυμι ‘fix' πήξω
πηγα stand firmı (997, 6).
• '
P forms : πηγνύω & πήσσω
ἐπήχθην—πέπηγμαι.
In the sonso of
ἔπηξα. - Pass. παγήσομαι ἐπάγην—pf. πέ-
(πήττω)- πέπηχα. - Mid. επηξάμην. Pass.
Ν: πήσσω & πήζω (873) stiffon, curdle’—πήξω--πη(γ)μένος (179). Also
μπήγω δε μπήζω ' thrust,, ' fix in 'μπήξω-μπηγμένος.
210. Υπηδάω lap, regular, but fut. πηδήσομαι (998).-- Γ' πηδήσω.
N : πηδάω ‘loap 'πηδήσω & πηδήξω-πηδημένος.
211. (πίμπλημι < fill, ἐμ-πίπλημι (126)--ἐν-επίμπλην (ἐν-επίμπλασαν)
ἐμπλήσω-ἐνέπλησα--ἐμ-πέπληκα. Mill. ἐμ-πίπλαμαι ' fill for self
ἐνεπλησάμην.-Pass. ἐμπλησθήσομαι-ἐν-έπλητο (subj. ἐμπλήμην) &
ἐν-επλήσθην---ἐμ-πέπλησται.
P forms : πιμπλάω & πιμπλέω (937; Great Louvre Pap. 581 πιπλῶντας)
(2140 πίμπλαμαι, εις Sept. Prov. 3, 1ο πίμπληται)—πλησθήσομαιπέπλησμαι
πεπλήσομαι.
212. (πίμπρημι ‘burn *) ἐμ-πίπρημι (126) ἐν-επίμπρην--ἐμ-πρήσω--
ἐνέπρησα.- Pass. ἐν-επρήσθην—ἐμ-πεπρῆσθαι (ἐμπεπρημένος).
>
P forms : πιμπράω & πρήθω (937) burn, swoll - ἐμ-, κατα-πέπρηκα--ἐν-
επρήσαντο. Pass. πρησθήσομαι (also ἐμπρήσομαι)πέπρησμαι (imprt. πέπρησε).
Ν: πρήσκω (due to εὑρίσκω ? also πρήστω Greto) swell’πρήσω. - Pass. πρή-
σκομαι (so evon Achmot, 7ι; Prodr. 3, 234) πρηστῶ-πρησμένος.
'
213. Υπίνω ' -
drink 'πίομαι (imprt. πίθι)ἔπιον - πέπωκα. - Pass. κατα-
ποθήσομαι-ἐπόθην-- πέπομαι.
272
IRREGULAR VERBS: πιπράσκω-ποιέω. [996214-21
P forms : fut. πιοῦμαι & πίομαι (πίεσαι, imprt. πίε)—aor.inf. πεῖν (148)
πέπωκαν.
2
| Moeris 294 πίομαι, πῖθι, Αττικῶς· πιοῦμαι, πιέ (155, ο ), Ἑλληνικῶς.]
N: πίνω ‘drink 'πιῶ (imprt. πιέ 155, c)-(ἔπια) ἤπια (720)-πιωμένος dissimila-
tion from εἰ]πωμένος i.e, εἰρημένος (supra 151, 2) drunk.
214. πιπράσκω 'sell'; Α πωλέω or ἀποδίδομαι-fut. πωλήσω οι ἀπο-
δώσομαι-aor. ἐπώλησα οι ἀπεδόμην)-pf. πέπρακα.-Pass. πιπράσκεται ---
πεπράσομαι-ἐπράθην—πέπραμαι-ἐπέπρατο.
P forms : πιπράσκω ' sell (beside πωλῶ) —ἐπίπρασκον.-Pass. πραθήσομαι
ἐπίπρασα (Vita Epiph. 81 Β ἐπίπρασεν == ἐπώλησεν. Vita SA 14* η δεῦτε πιπρά-
σωμεν), πιπράσασαι.
[In N replaced by πωλῶ or rather πουλώ (so even in FTrinch. 13 [1005] & 143
[+11301) - -ήσω---κημένος.]
215. *πίπτω ‘fall '—πεσοῦμαι-ἔπεσον—πέπτωκα.
P forms : fut. πέσομαι— ἔπεσαπέπτωκες, πέπτωκαν.-Pass. ἀπο-πίπτομοι
(Protev. Jacobi 20, 1. ἐπτώθη [= ἔπεσε] & Achmot. 144. κατα-πτωθῆναι
Diod. ii. 513, 17; ἀπο-πτωθέντων Sophronios 3429 c).-Mid. ἀν-επέσαντο
(Ev. Petri 18).
X
Ν : πέφτω (from πέσω x πίπτω, ep. πέπτωκα, πέφτη 174) 'fall'- πέσω πεσμένος.
216. Ιπλέκω ‘twine,‘plait'ἔπλεξα-δια-πέπλυχα.-Pass. ἐμπλε-
χθήσμαι-επλέχθην, & 2nd ἐπλάκην-πέπλεγμαι.
P forms : πλέξω-πέπλεχα.—Mid. ἐπλεξάμην.—Pass. συν-επλέκησαν.
> C
Ν : πλέκω ' plait, braid —πλέξω-πλε(γ)μένος (179).
1
217. πλέω swim, navigate (πλεῖς etc. 834)ἔπλεον—πλεύσομαι
& σοῦμαι-ἔπλευσαπέπλευκα. Pass. πεπλευσμένος.
P forms : fut. πλεύσω.-Pass. περι-πλευσθήσεται-ἐπλεύσθην.
Ν: πλέ(γ)ω (860) swim 'πλέψω (also πλέξω, Crete) -πλεμένος.
218. πλήττω strike (in A commoner παίω, τύπτω)—ἐκ-, κατα-
πλήξω-ἔπληξα-πέπληγα.- Pass. ἐκ-πλήττομαι-πληγήσομαι (but εκ-πλα-
γήσομαι); πεπλήξομαι-ἐπλήγην (but ἐξ-, κατ-επλάγην)-πέπληγμαι.
P forms : πλήσσω strike
ἐπληξάμην.—Pass. ἐπλήχθην.
πλήξω-ἔπληξα.—Mid. πλήσσομαι —πλήξομαι-
219. *πνέω blow,‘breathe’—πνευσοῦμαι (but ἐμπνεύσομαι)-ἔπνευσα
ἐπι-πέπνευκα.
P forms : πι εύσω. -- Pass. δια-πνευσθήσομαι-δι-επνεύσθην—ἐμ- πέπνευ(σ)μαι.
Ν: ανα-πνέ(γ)ω (860) breathe '—ἀναπνέψω (from -πνεύσω) & -πνέξω (from
-πνέγω) - αναπνεμένος.
230. Υπνίγω choke, throttleἀπο-πνίξω-ἀπ-έπνιξα.— Pass. ἀπο-
πνιγήσομαι-ἀπ-επνίγην--πέπνιγμαι.
P forms : ἀποπνίξομαι (Eunap. p. 24 GFBoiss.)- ἔπνιξα.-Pass. πνιγήσομαι,
ἀποπεπνίξεσθαι (Eunap. V. Soph. p. 38) ἐπνίγην & ἀπ-επνίχθην.
Ν: πνίγω ' choke, drown—πνίξω.-Pass. πνίγομαι-πνιγῶ—ἐπνίγηκα-πνιγ)-
μένος (179).
221. Υποθέω long for, desire ποθήσω (& έσομαι ?) — ἐπόθησα
(-εσα ?).
P forms : πεπύθηκα.-Mid. ποθοῦμαι-προ-ποθηθείσης—πεποθημένος.
Ν: (ποθέω) ποθῶ long for’—ποθήσωτὸ ποθούμενο desideratum,
222. Toléw 'make,' 'do,'-regular (833).
f forms : ποῖσαι, ποισάμενοι, πεποίκει (148).
Ν: ἔποικα (=ἐποίησα 1875) raro; otherwise replaced by κάμνω, which sce
άλογο 136.
273
Τ
996,223–2-236:35.
] ] IRREGULAR VERBS: πονέω-ῥήγνυμι.
26
223. Υπονέω ‘labour, suffer —πονήσω-ἐπόνησα-πεπόνηκα-ἐπεπονή-
κειν.—Mid. δι-επονησάμην.-Pass. δι-, ἐξ-εποιήθην.
Pforms (843): πονέσω (Sopt. Esai. 19, 10)—ἐπόνεσα (Sept. often).
Mid. πονέσομαι, κατα-πονήσομαι.—Pass. ἐπονήθην (also mid.).
Ν : (πονέω) πονῶ ‘sulfor pain ’—πονέσω-πονεμένος (843).
224. *πορεύω convey'πορεύσω-ἐπόρευσα. — Pass. πορεύομαι '80,
wander πορεύσομαι durat.), πορευθήσομαι (effect.) — ἐπορεύθην —
πεπόρευμα.
Ρ: πορεύω = πορεύομαι (Pachom. 948 Α).
Ν : πορεύ(γ)ομαι (860) (Crete) got along, can subsist 'πορευτῶ.
225. πράσσω οι πράττω 'do'πράξω--ἔπραξα-πέπραγα & (!?) πέτ
πραχα.—Mid. πράξομαι ἐπραξάμην—πέπραγμαι.-Pass. πράξομαι (durat.),
πραχθήσομαι (effect.); πεπράξεται (685)ἐπράχθην.
Ν : πράσσω ' net, dwell —πράξω.
226. πρίασθαι see ὠνέομαι (infra 321).
227. * πτάρνυμαι sneeze aor. 2nd ἔπταρον.
P forms : πτάρνυμι sneezo'πτάραντες.
Ν : φταρνίζομαι & φταρμίζομαι 'gnoeze '-στο-σμένος.
228. οπτήσσω crouch 'ἔπτηξαἔπτηχα.
P forms : πτήξω—ἔπτηκα.
—
229. °πτύσσω ‘fold — ἀνα-πτύξω - ἔπτυξα. — Mid. ἐπτυξάμην — ἀν-
έπτυγμαι.-Pass. δι-επτύχθην.
P forms : προσ-πτύξομαι-ἀν-επτύγην—πέπτυκται.
230. Ιπτύω 'spit —πτύσομαι—κατ-έπτυσα.
P forms : fut. πτύσω-ἔπτυσα - ἔπτυκα.-Pass. ἀνα-πτυσθήσομαι—ἐπτύσθην.
Ν : φτύω (174. 155, c) & φτῶ (from φτεῖς, 859) spit'φτύσωφτυσμένος.
231. πυνθάνομαι inquire, hear 'πεύσομαι-ἐπυθόμην-πέπυσμαι.
Sinco a replaced by ἐξετάζω, ἐρωτῶ, μανθάνω, etc.
232. Ipalvo'sprinkle '-pavo-éppāva (65).
P forms : ἔρραγκα-περιρρανάμενος—ῥανθείς—μέραμμαι (739), ἐρραμμένος.
Ν: ῥαίνω ' sprinkloῥάνω.
-
233. Ιράπτω 'sew 'ἀπο-ρράψω - ἔρραψα. - Mid. ἐρραψάμην. - Pass.
-
ἐρράφην ἔρραμμαι.
Ν: ῥάφτω (174) & ῥάβω (875) sowῥάψω ραμμένος.
N:
234. ορέω 'flow'ρεύσομαι (durat.), ῥυήσομαι (effect.)—ἐρρύην—ἐρρύηκα.
P form: ¿épevka (IIrdn. Gr. Philot. 417; IIippol. Haer. 196, 3).
[In N replaced by τρέχω und χύνομαι.]
-
235. ῥήγνυμι (also ῥηγνύω) breakῥήξωἔρρηξα.--Mid. καταρρήγνυ-
μαικατερρηξάμην—pf. δι-, ἀν-έρρωγα am broken. - Pass. ῥαγήσομαι
—ερράγην (997, 7).
P forms : ῥηγνύω & βήσσω διέρρηχα. — Mid. ἐρρηξάμην—ἔρρωγα.— Pass.
συν-έρρηγμαι, ἀπο-ρρέρηκται (739)ῥηχθείσα.
[Moeris 307 ρηγνύασι διὰ τοῦ α 'Αττικῶς, ῥηγνύουσιν ἢ ῥήσσουσιν Ἑλληνικῶς.]
274
IRREGULAR VERBS: ῥιγόω-σιωπάω. [996
230-244
In N replaced by σπά(ν)ω, σχίζω (which see below 249); but ῥαγίζω (from
ῥαγῶ), also ῥαΐζω (155) & 863) ' crack'ραγίσωῥαγισμένος.
[Some connect N ρίχνω and ῥίχτω 'throw with 4 ῥήγνυμι and write accord-
ingly ήχνω and ῥήχτω; but see below under ῥίπτω 237.]
236. * ριγόω 'shiver contracts to @ and @ instead of ov and οι (836),
though ῥιγοῦσι (Pl. Phil. 45 B) and ῥιγούντων (Xen. Hell. 4, 5, 4) ; inf.
ριγών for and beside ῥιγοῦν. ριγώσω-ἐρρίγωσα.
P forms : ῥιγάω (? see N)—ἐρριγωκότες.
[Moeris 307 ῥιγῶντος ᾿Αττικῶς, ῥιγοῦντος Ἑλληνικῶς. 309 ῥιγῶν ᾿Αττικῶς,
ῥιγοῦν κοινῶς, ῥιγοι(ν) [i.c. ῥιγεῖν 251 & App. v. 8] Ἑλληνικῶς.]
Ν: ῥιγάω (80 even Apophth. 260 D οὐ ῥιγᾶτε & CGL 399 [MS. of
VIII-IX+| rigo, rigas, riga, rigomon), & έργωά (from ἐρ γάω 132 & 136, Crete)
shiver, I am cold -άσω-σμένος.
237. * ρίπτω, also ῥιπτέω 'throw 'ρίψωἔρριψα-ἔρριφα.-Pass. απο-
ρριφθήσομαι-ἐρρίφθην & ἐρρίφην—ἔρριμμαι.
P forms : ῥιφήσομαι—ἐρρίψομαι (Luc. i. (73)βέριμμαι (739).
Ν : ρίχνω & δίχτω or ῥή- (from ῥίπτω x ῥήγνω and ῥήγνω χ ρίπτω ? see above
under ῥήγνυμι) 4 throw ρίξω οι ῥήξω (Apoc. Mar. 124, 14 ἀράτω [read ἄρατέ] με
και ρήξατε με) [The forms ρίψω ἔρριψα due to literary influence ?]ριμμένος.
238. ρώννυμι (also -νύω) strengthen --ἐπ-έρρωσα.-Pass. ἐρρώσθην
ἔρρωμαι (imprt. ἔρρωσο, ἔρρωσθε farewell, inf. ἐρρῶσθαι)—ἐρρώμην.
P formas : ρωννύω-ἐπι-ρρώσωἔρρωσα.--Pass. ῥωσθήσομαι.
(
239. *σβέννυμι extinguish, quench'σβέσωἔσβεσα.—Mid. ἀπ-
ἐσβην (ἀπο-σβῆναι, ἀπο-σβείς).—Pass. σβέννυμαι-ἀπο-σβήσομαι-ἐσβέσθην
pf. ἀπέσβηκα 'am extinguished (997, 8). See 979.
P forms : σβεννύω.-Pass. σβεσθήσομαι—ἔσβεσμαι.
Ν: σβύνω οι σβήνω (northern σβένω 902) oxtinguish, quench'σβύσω οι
σβήσω-σβυμμένος οι σβημένος.
240. Εσείω ' shake'σείσω-κατα-σέσεικα.— Mid. ἀπ-εσεισάμην.-Pass.
ἐσείσθην—σέσεισμαι.
P forms : ἔσεισα. - Pass. σείομαι.
Ν: σείω (155, e) shako (σεις, σεῖ, 148 & 702)—σείσω-σεισμένος.
241. σημαίνω show, indicate σημανῶ-ἐσήμηνα (& -ανα).-Mill.
ἐσημηνάμην. - Pass. ἐπισημανθήσομαι σεσημασμαι.
P forms: ἐσήμανα-σεσήμαγκα.—Mid. σημανοῦμαι.—Pass. σημανθήσομαι-
ἐσημάνθην.
Ν: σημαίνω ' sound (of tho σήμαντρον ' sounding metal, gong)-σημάνω
σημασμένος).
242. * σήπω 'make putrid-Pass.κατα-σαπήσομαι-ἐσάπην—pf. σέσηπα
*σńnw‘make
'am rotten.'
P forms : σήψω-κατ-έσηψα.-Pass. ἐσήφθην—σεσημμαι.
Make My
Ν : σαπίζω ' make or bocomo putrid —σαπίσω. Also pass. (Croto) σαπίζομαι -
σαπηθῶ-ἐσαπήθηκα-σαπημένος.
2.13. σιγάω 'am silent’σιγήσομαι-ἐσίγησα—σεσίγηκα.-Pass. σιγη-
θήσομαι; σεσιγήσομαι-ἐσιγήθην σεσίγημαι.
P form : σιγήσω.
211. *σιωπάω am silent 'σιωπήσομαι-ἐσιώπησασεσιώπηκα.
P form : σιωπήσω.
Ν σωπώ raro (as δὲ σωπᾶς ;), σωπαίνω & σωπάζω become silont’—σωπάσω
—σωπασμένος (fur σιωπ- σωπ- 300 152).
275
T 3
346-260245-265
] IRREGULAR VERBS: σκάπτω
σκάπτω στερέω.
h
245. σκάπτω ‘dig-σκάψω-κατέσκαψα-κατέσκαφα.-Pass. και
τεσκάφην—ἔσκαμμαι.
P forms : κατα-σκαφήσομαι-ἐσκάφην.
Ν σκάφτω (174), also σκάβω (875), ‘dig-σκάψω-σκαμμένος.
946. (σκεδάννυμι scatter ') δια-, κατα-, ἀπο-σκεδάννυμι - ἀπο-, δια
σκεδώ (889) δι-, κατεσκέδασα.-Pass. ἐσκεδάσθην—ἐσκέδασμαι.
P forms: σκεδαννύω, σκεδάω & σκεδάζω (937)-σκεδάσω-ἐσκέδασα.-Puss.
διασκεδάννυται-σκεδασθήσεται.
[Ν διασκεδάζω ' amuse'-διασκεδάσω-διασκεδασμένος is apparently due to
literary influence.]
947. (σκέπτομαι look about) Α σκοπέω & σκοπέομαι-ἐσκόπουν δ
ἐσκοπούμην-σκέψομαι-εσκεψάμην ἔσκεμμαι-ἐσκέψεται (pass.).
P forms: σκέπτομαι ‘examine’—σκοπήσω-ἐσκόπησαἐσκοπησάμην —ἐσκύ-
πημαι.-Pass. ἐσκέφθην (ἐπ-εσκέπην Sept. Num. 1, 19 ; 47).
Ν σκέφτομαι (174) ' ponder over, think 'σκεφτῶ—σκεμμένος.
1
248. σκώπτω 'mock, seoff — σκώψομαι-ἔσκωψα.—Mid. ἐσκωψάμην.
Pass. ἐσκώφθην—ἔσκωμμαι.
249. *σπάω 'pull’—σπάσω-ἔσπασα-ἔσπακα.—Mid σπάσομαι-ἐσπα-
σάμην ἔσπασμαι.-Pass. δια-σπασθήσομαι-ἐσπάσθην ἔσπασμα.
P form: σπασθήσομαι.
Ν σπάω (go even Achmet. 181) & σπάνω (906), also σπάζω (868), broak —
σπίσω-σπασμένος.
250. *σπείρω 'sow 'σπερῶ-ἔσπειρα.--Pass. ἐσπάρην—ἔσπαρμαι.
{ forms: ἔσπαρκα-σπείρασθαι-σπαρήσομαι.
N:
Ν: σπέρνω (903) sow 'σπείρω-σπαρμένος.
251. σπένδω ' pour out, make a libation —κατα-σπείσω-ἔσπειτα.
Mid 'make an agreement’σπείσομαι-ἐσπεισάμην.— Mid. & pass.
ἔσπεισμαι.
P forms : σπείσω-κατεσπεικώς (Plut. Sort. 14).—Pass. ἐσπείσθην.
259. σπουδάζω ‘make haste, ‘hurry —σπουδάσομαι-ἐσπούδασα
ἐσπούδακα. -Pass. ἐσπούδασμαι.
Λη.
Pforms: σπουδάσω.-Mid. δι-εσπουδαζόμην (Arr. An. 7, 23)-δια-σπουδά
σομαι.-Pass. σπουδασθήσομαι—ἐσπουδάσθην.
Ν: σπουδάζω ' make hasto, study'σπουδάξω (873) & -άσω-ἐσπούδαξα (also
ακα 1875) σπουδασμένος (also σπουδαγμένος).
253. (στέλλω ‘despatch ') - ἀπο-, ἐπι-στέλλω -- ἔστειλα -ἐπ-, ἀπ-
έσταλκα. Mid. ὑπ-εστειλάμην. Pass. στέλλομαι — ἀπο-σταλήσομαι
ἐστάλην — ἔσταλμαι.
P forms : ἔσταλια & 2nd ἔστολα.-Pass. ἐστάλθην.
--
[Ν στέλλω, στέλνω (904, for στέρνω 187),—στείλω-σταλμένος-points to
litorary influonce? Genuino popular substitute (μ)πέμπω, 800 supra 203.]
254. στενάζω 'sigh ἐστέναξα.
P forns : στενάξω-ἐστεναγμένος.
Ν : ἀνα-στενάζω ' sigh’—ἀναστενάξω—ἀναστενα(γ)μένος (179) ' wrotch d.
-
255. (στερέω, ἀπο- 'deprive) & στερίσκω - στερήσω — ἐστέρησα. —
Pass. ἀπο-στεροῦμαι, στερίσκομαι & στέρομαι — ἐστερόμην - στερήσομαι
(durat.), στερηθήσομαι P (effect.)—ἐστερήθην.
276
IRREGULAR VERBS : στόρνυμι -τείνω. 996200-200
P forms : ἐστέρεσα (839)— ἐστέρηκα. — Pass. στεροῦμαι — στερηθήσομαι -
ἐστέρημαι, ἐστέρεσμαι. Since P, it is frequently confounded with, and
mostly replaced by, ὑστερέω (as Pachom. 948 Β) which see below 287.
256. στόρνυμι & *στρώννυμι ' spread 'παρα-, ὑπο-στορῶ & ὑπο-στρώσω
- ἐστόρεσα & ἔστρωσα.-Μία ὑπο-στόρνυμαι.-Pass. ἔστρωμα.
P forms : στρωννύω-στρώσω & στορέσω—ἔστρωκα.—Mid. στρώσομαι-στο-
ρεσάμην (στρωσάμενοι).-Pass. στρωθήσομαι-κατ-εστρώθην, ἐστορέσθην ἐστορέ
σμην.
Ν: στρών (ν)ω ' spread 'στρώσω στρωμένος (775. 853).
257. *στρέφω ‘turn'-ἀπο-, δια-, ἀνα-στρέψωἔστρεψα.-Mid. fut.
ἀπος, κατα-στρέψομαι (& pass.) -κατεστρεψάμην ἔστραμμαι (& pass.).
Pass. δια-στραφήσομαι-(but subj. στρεφθῶ)-ἐστρέφθην (στρεφθείς).
Pforms: στρέψω-ἐπεστροφώςMid. & Pass. στρέψομαι, Pass. στραφήσομαι.
Ν : στρέφομαι ' take a look at 'στραφώ.
258. στρώννυμι see στόρνυμι (above 256).
259. *(σφάζω 873) σφάττω ‘kill 'σφάξωἔσφαξα.-Pass. ἀπο-σφα
γήσομαι-ἀπ-, κατεσφάγην (ἐσφάχθην) -ἔσφαγμαι.
P forms : ἔσφακα—σφαγήσομαι —ἐσφάγην.
Ν: σφάζω ' kill 'σφάξω-σφα(γ)μένος (179).
260. * σφάλλω cause to fall’—σφαλῶἔσφηλα. - Pass. σφαλοῦμαι
(durat.), σφαλήσομαι (effect.)-ἐσφάλην ἔσφαλμαι.
P forms: ἔσφαλκα—ἐσφάλθην—(ἐσφαλόμην as Orig. i. 1337 Β.-Also
neuter : σφάλλω = 'err.
Ν: (σφάλλω) σφαίλνω, σφαίρνω (904)- σφάλω-(σφαλμένος) σφαρμένος.
261. σφάττω see σφάζω (above 259).
262. Ισώζω (σώζω) save' σώσω (σώσω)-ἔσωσα-(ἔσωσα)-σέσωκα οι
Mid. διασώσομαι (-σώ),-δι-, ἀν-εσωσάμην (-σω-).-Pass, σωθή
σομαι (σῳ-)-ἐσώθην-σέσωμαι & σέσωσμαι.
σεσωκα.
P forms : σώσομαι-ἐσῴσθην.-By-form : σωννύω.
N: σῴζω ‘save—σώσω.-Pass. σωστῶ—ἐσῴστηκα-σῳσμένος.-By-forms
σών(ν)ω ' reach, suffice & σων(ν)ίζω (Crete) stop. Cp. Antatt. 114, 5 σαννύω
'
ἀντὶ τοῦ σῴζω· Δεινόλοχος Μειδία.)
-
?
Pass. ταράξομαι
263. ταράσσω & ττω 'stir — ταράξω - ετάραξα.
(durat.), ταραχθήσομαι Ρ (effect.)-ἐταράχθην-τετάραγμαι.
P form : συν-ετεταράχειν-Pass. ταραχθήσομαι.
Ν : ταράσσω, also ταράζω (880) stir’—ταράξω-ταρα(γ)μένος (179).
264. τάσσω & τάττω 'arrange'τάξω--ἔταξα-τέταχα.—Mid. ἐπι
ἀντι-τάξομαι.—Pass. ταχθήσομαι; τετάξομαι-ἐτάχθην τέταγμαι.
(
P forms: Mid. τάσσομαι, also vow —τάξομαι. — Pass. ἐν-ταγήσομαι
ἐτάγην.
>
Ν : τάσσω & τάζω (880) ' promise τάξω-τα(γ)μένος (179).Mid. VOW
ταχτώτα(γ)μένος 'promised.”
(
>
265. τείνω stretch 'τενῶ ἔτεινα-τέτακα.-Mid. προ-τενούμαι έτσι
νάμην. -- Pass. παρα-τενοῦμαι (durat.), ταθήσομαι (effect.) ετάθην
τέταμαι.
P forns : Mid. τείνομαι.-Pass, ταθήσομαι-ἐτάθην,
[In N τεντώνω & ξεντώνω ‘stretch — -ώσω -ωμένος.]
-
277
200-278] IRREGULAR VERBS: τελέω-τρέχω.
266. τελέω accomplish 'τελῶ (889)ἐτέλεσα-τετέλεκα.—Mid, έτε-
λεσάμην.—Pass. ἐτελέσθηντετέλεσμαι.
P forms : τελέσω-ἀπο-τελεσθήσομαι, τελεσθησόμενος.
[In N τελειώνω, less common τελεύω ' finish, both regular.]
26
267. (τέλλω ' accomplish), ἀνα-τέλλω raise, rise’ἀνέτειλα.Mid.
ἐν-τέλλομαι ' order 'ἐνετειλάμην-εν-τέταλμαι.
Pforms: ἀνα-τέταλκα.—Mid. ἐν-τελοῦμαι.
268. τίμνω 'cut'—τεμῶ (892)ἔτεμοντέτμηκα.—Mid. ὑπο-τεμοῦμαι
ἐτεμόμην.-Pass. τμηθήσομαι; τετμήσομαιἐτμήθην τέτμημαι.
[In P-N speech replaced by κόπτω (N also κόβω) which seo above 137.]
269. (τετραίνω ‘bore”)-aor. συν-έτρησα.-Pass. τέτρημαι.
P forms : τιτραίνω & τιτράω, also τορέω, but generally τρυπάω (regular),
which last is still universal in N.
270. Στήκω 'melt ἐκατήξω — έτηξα. Pass. ἐτάκην — τέτηκα am
moltenἐτετήκην (997, 5).
P forms: τήξωἔτηξα.-Pass. τήξομαι (durat.) τακήσομαι (effect.)-ἐτήχθην
—τέτηγμαι.
Ν: τήκομαι ' melt '--ἐτήκουμουν.-The rest from λυώνω (in Q-T often λειώνω).
271. τίθημι, Ρ τίθω, see 955-9 & 963 ff.
972. °τίκτω bear 'τέξομαιἔτεκον-τέτοκα.
P forms : τέξω-ἔτεξα.-Pass. τεχθήσομαι-ἐτέχθην-τέταγμαι.
[In N replaced by γεννάω.]
273. τιμάω honour, regular (828) ; Pass. τιμήσομαι (durat.), τιμηθή
σομαι (effect.); τετιμήσομαι.
Ν: τιμάω ' honour τιμήσω-τιμημένος.
974. τίνω (also τείνω) 'pay 'τίσω-ἔτισα—τέτικα.
—ἐκ-τέτισμαι ἐξ-ετετίσμην.
Pass. ἐξ-ετίσθην
In N roplaced by πληρώνω or rather πλερώνω (40) 'pay 'πλερώσω-πλερω-
μένος.]
975. τιτρώσκω wound 'τρώσω-ἔτρωσα.-Pass. τρωθήσομαι-ἐτρώ
θην-τέτρωμαι.
P forms: τετρωκώς—ἐτετρώκειν.-τετρώσομαι.
Sinco Τ times replaced by πληγώνω ' wound (as Theoph. 236, 3. 319. 3.
Achmet. 77, 80) -πληγώσω-ἐπλήγωσα-πληγωμένος.]
276. *τρέπω ' turn "τρέψωἔτρεψα τέτροφα.Mid. τρέψομαι-έτρε-
ψάμην (also trans.), ἐτραπόμην (intr.) - Pass. ἐτρέφθην τέτραμμαι.
P forms : τέτραφα-τραπήσομαι ; τετράψομαι.
Ν: ἐ]ντρέπομαι (723) (= αιδέομαι, αἰσχύνομαι)—ντραπῶ (imprt. ντράψου).
277. *τρέφω ' nourish 'θρέψω (183 f.)-ἔθρεψατέτροφα. Mid. θρέ
ψομαι durat.), τραφήσομαι (effect.)—ἐθρεψάμην.-Pass. τραφήσομαι
ἐτράφην (θρεφθεῖσι Pl. Pol. 31ο Α) τέθραμμαι.
>
Ν : θρέφω (184) ‘nourish θρέψω θρεμμένος.
278. τρέχω ' run'-ἀπο-θρέξομαι (183), δραμοῦμαι-ἔδραμον-ἀνα-δεδρά-
μηκα.-Pass. ἐπ:-δεδραμηται.
P forms: θρέξω & δράμω (or δραμῶ? 894), ανα-δράμομαι-(Ορεξα)- δε δρύμηκα.
Ν: τρέχω run (imprt, τρέχα boside τρέχει [830), τρεχάτε) τρέξω (184)
τρεχάμενος fowing,
lowing, running, τρεχούμενος current, τρεχάτος θέων
'ruuning').
278
IRREGULAR VERBS: τρίβω
φαίνω. [996210-291
279. τρίβω ‘rub τρίψωἔτριψα τέτριφα Mid. προσ-τρίψομαι
ἀπ-, προσ-ετριψάμην.-Pass. κατα-τριβήσομαι; ἐπι-τετρίψομαι - ἐτρίβην
(also ἐτρίφθην)τέτριαμαι.
Ν : τρίβω & τρίβγω (861) rub 'τρίψω—τριμμένος.
280. τρίζω (Ρ) creak
τρίξωἔτριξα-τέτριγα as present creak.
Ν : τρίζω ' creak'—τρίξω-τριγμένος (179) & τρισμένος.
,
281. *τρώγω ' gnaw, P also eat’—τρώξομαι—ἔτραγον.-Pass. δια-τέ-
τρωγμαι.
Να τρώγω (τρώ (γ) εις & τρος 863 & 154) eat? -φά(γ)ω-φα(γ)ωμένος (863. 155 f.)
1
282. * τυγχάνω hit, chance τεύξομαι ἔτυχον τετύχηκα.
P forms : τέτευχα, τέτυχα.— Also τυγχάνομαι (pass.) — ἐν-ετύχθην, ἀπ-
ετεύχθην (τύχοιτο Milth. xix 249, 135 [III A.D., Athens])-ἀπο-τέτευγμαι.
Adverbially τυχόν ' porchance, forte (2125).
[Phryn. 373 τέτευχε τιμῆς, τέτευχε τοῦ σκοποῦ μὴ λέγε, ἀλλ᾽ ἀντ᾿ αὐτοῦ τῷ
δοκίμῳ χρῶ τετύχηκε.]
Ν: (Μ τυχάνω, 190) τυχαίνω (yor) clunce 'τύχω.--Compound ἐ]πιτυχαίνω
& cummoner πετυχαίνω (755)—πιτύχω & πετύχω-πιτυχαιμένος & πετυχαιμένος.
283. τύπτω ' strike τυπτήσω-ἐπάταξα, ἔπαισα (see above πατάσσω &
παίω).-Pass. τυπτήσομαι.
-
τετύπτηκα,
P forms: τύψω ἔτυψα & ἐτύπτησα (also 2nd ἔτυπον)
τέτυφα.—Mid. ἐτυψάμην.— Pass. ἐτύπην, ἐτυπτήθην & ἐτύφθην—τέτυμμαι & τε-
τύπημαι.
[ Mooris 339 τυπτήσειν ᾿Αττικῶς, παίσειν Ἑλληνικῶς.]
| In N replaced by δέρνω (soe abovo 43) and κτυπάω.]
984. °τύφω smoke.'-Pass. ἐπι-τυφήσομαι- τεθυμμένος.
285. * ὑγιαίνω ' am healthy'ὑγιανῶἉγίανα.
P-B forms : ύγιασθήσομαι ὑγιάσθην (υγιάνθην)—ἁγιασμένος.
Ν : γιαίνω (723)—γιάνω-γιαμ(μ)ένος.
286. ὑπισχνέομαι see ἔχω (supra 98, 4).
287. ὑστερέω ' am too late, fail ὑστερήκει.
P-1 forms : ὑστερήσω υστέρημα. Frequently confounded with στερέο-
μαι, ως ὑστερήσομαι Eur. I. A. 1203. NT Rom. 3, 23 etc. Joseph. 15, 6, 7.
δου στερέω abovo 255.
[The N forms: ὑστεροῦμαι am noody' ὑστερηθῶὑστερημένος savour of
literary influence.]
288. *ὑφαίνω ' weave 'ὑφανῶ-ύφηνα.- Pass. ὑφάνθηνὕφασμαι.
P-B forms : ὕφανα-συν-ύφαγκα. Mid. ὑφηνάμην & ὑφανάμην.
Ν : φαίνω (134 1. 723) * wouvo’—φάνω-φαμ(μ)ένος (149[r]) (cp. ancient ὕφαμμα).
289. νω rain'ὕσω-σα.-Pass. ἐφ-υσμένος.
[Since a replaced by βρέχω which is still universal in N, seo above 33.]
200. φαγεῖν 500 ἐσθίω (& τρώγω) above gr (& 281).
291. *φαίνω ' show’—φανῶἔφηνα.-Pass. φαίνομαι appear φανού
μαι (durat.), φανήσομαι (effect.)-εφάνθην, (intr.) ἐφάνην πέφηνα ‘have
appeared (997, 10) -πέφασμαι.-Mill. ἀπο-φαίνομαι express ἀποφα-
νουμαι-ἀπεφηνάμην.
Ν : φαίνομαι ' appear’—φανῶ ἐφάνηκα. [By-form: φανίζομαι (i. ο. εμφανί
ζομαι 723) G make my appouruco.]
279
996202-208] IRREGULAR VERBS: φάσκω-φρίσσω.
292. φάσκω say' replaces φημί in the participle and imperfect:
φάσκων, ἔφασκον (975 f.).
293. φέρω ' bear, bring, carry'ἔφερον-οἴσω-ἤνεγκα & ἤνεγκον---
ἐνήνοχα.—Pass. ἐνεχθήσομαι, also αἰσθήσομαι-ηνέχθην—ἐνήνεγμαι.
Sinco P times popular speech has extended the stem φερ- to the fut. and
aorist also (cp. 903), as: Mooris 261 οἶσε 'Αττικῶς, φέρε Ἑλληνικῶς καὶ κοινῶς
-ήμερα (CIG 1379), έφερα (JMoschos 3004 Α).
Ν : φέρνω (903 ; Apoc. Sedrach 133, 36 ἀναφέρνεται διὰ φάρυγγος) bring φέρω
—έφερα-φερμένος.
'
294. φεύγω fee
PB forms: φεύξω,
φευχθῆναι.
φεύξομαι (also φευξούμαι)-ἔφυγον-πέφευγα.
φυγοῦμαι & φύγομαι
ἔφευξα. — Pass. διεφεύχθη,
Ν: φεύγω ' fee (imprt. φεύγα beside φεύγε, φευγάτε beside φεύγετε, [830 ])—
φύγω-(φευγάτος = πεφευγώς, πεφυγμένος 1052).
295. φημί, see 975 f.
296. Αφθάνω anticipate 'ἔφθανον—φθήσομαι—ἔφθασα, 2nd ἔφθην
(φθαίην, φθῆναι, φθάς).
P-Bforms: φθάσω-(ἔφθαξα Theocr. 2, 115)-ἔφθακα, πεφθακώς (Damasc.
ii. 268 Α)—έφθάκειν, ἐπεφθάνει (Dion. C. 65, 18, 1).-Pass. ἐφθάνοντο
ἐφθάσθην.
(Moeris 360 φθῶσιν ᾿Αττικῶς, φθάσωσιν Ἑλληνικῶς.]
Ν : φτάνω (174) roach, arrive 'φτάξω-φτασμένος.
297. φθείρω corrupt 'φθερῶ — ἔφθειρα ἔφθαρκα (also διέφθορα
trans.) -- διεφθάρκειν. -- Pass. διαφθερούμαι durat.), δια-φθαρήσομαι
(effect.) ἐφθάρην-ἔφθαρμα (also διεφθορα intr.).
P forms: ἔφθορα = ἔφθαρκα.—Pass. φθαρήσομαι—πέφθαρμαι.
298. φιλοτιμέομαι am ambitious ' -- φιλοτιμήσομαι — ἐφιλοτιμήθην,
φιλοτιμηθείς-πεφιλοτίμημαι.
Pforms (also bostow upon): φιλοτιμηθήσομαι-ἐφιλοτιμησάμην.--Also pass.
299. *φοβέω frighten - (ἐκ-φοβήσω — ἐφόβητα. — Mid. φοβέομαι
fear.Mid. & pass. φοβήσομαι (durat.), φοβηθήσομαι (effect.)-ἐφο-
βήθην—πεφόβημαι-ἐπεφοβήμην.
So too in P-B Greek. P-N by-form : φοβερίζω = φοβέω ' threaton.”
Ν: φοβοῦμαι fear'φοβηθώἐφοβήθηκα.φοβισμένος from the by-form
φοβίζω ' frighten. The P φοβερίζω still obtains in N in the sense of threaton.
300. Υφορέω ' carry 'φορήσω-ἐφύρησα-κατα-πεφόρηκα. Mid. έξ
εφορησάμην.-Pass. πεφορημένος.
P-B ferms: φορέσω (839) ἐφόρεσα πεφορηκότες.-Pass. φορήσομαι-ἐν
εφορήθην.
N: φορέω ' weur, have on 'φορέσω φορεμένος.
301. φράζω ' declaro -φράσω--ἔφρασα-πέφρακα.-Pass. πέφρασμαι.
302. (φράσσω) φράττω ' enclose
Pass. ἐφράχθην — πέφραγμαι.
φράξω-ἔφραξα.—Mid. ἐφραξάμην.
P forms: φράσσω-περι-πεφραγυῖαι — ἐπεφράκεσαν.-Pass. ἐμφραχθήσομαι,
φραγήσομαι-ἐφράγην.
Ν : φράσσω & φράζω (880) ' enclose'-φράξω-φρα(γ)μένος (179).
303. φρίσσω & -ττω 'shudder - ἔφριξα-πέφρικα (as present).
P forms : φρίξω—πέφρικαν fur πεφρίκασι (786).
280
IRREGULAR VERBS: φυλάσσω-χόω.
Xów. [996,
996304–313
[304. φυλάσσω & -ττω 'guard-φυλάξω-ἐφύλαξα-πεφύλαχα Mid.
φυλάξομαι (durat.), φυλαχθήσομαι Ρ (effect.) έφυλαξάμην-πεφύλαγμαι.
Pass. φυλάξομαι (durat.)-ἐφυλάχθην.
P-B forms : πεφύλακα-φυλαχθήσομαι.
"
Ν: φυλάσσω & φυλά(γ)ω (880. 155) guard, preserve' (φυλάεις φυλᾷς, φυλάει
φυλα φυλάμε, etc. 863)-φυλάξω-ἐφύλαξα—φυλα(γ)μένος (179).
305. *φύρω ‘mix'Pass. πεφυρμαι. By-form: φυράω ‘stirφυ-
ράσω-ἐφύρασα.—Mid. ἐφυρασάμην. - Pass. ἐφυράθην πεφύραμαι.
P forms : ἔφυρσα & ἔφυρα.—Mid. φυρσάμενος.-Pass. συμ-φυρήσομαι, συνανα
φυρέντες.
Ν: ανα-φέρνω (903) mix, stirἀναφύρω—ανάφερα --ἀναφερμένος.
Ο
306. φύω ' produce’φύσωἔφυσα. Mid. & Pass. φύομαι-grow'
φύσομαι-ἔφυν-πέφυκα ' am by nature, it lies in me’—ἐπεφύκειν (997,3).
P forms : φνήσομαι-ἐφύην—πέφυκαν (786).
In N replaced by φυτρώνω 'gr wand κάνω or γεννῶ produce
307. *χαίρω ' rejoice 'χαιρήσω (durat.), χαρήσομαι P (efect.)-ἐχάρην
- κεχάρηκα (κεχάρημαι).
C.
P-B forms : χαίρομαι χαρήσομαι (effect. CIA ii. 593, b, 13 [ΙΙ. Β..]
συνχαρήσονται), χαροῦμαι ; κεχαρήσω, κεχαρήσομαι.
[Mooris 366 χαιρήσεις 'Αττικῶς, χαιρήσῃ (read χαρήσῃ) Ελληνικώς. Hdu. 393
χαίρω ἐρεῖς, οὐ χαίρομαι· εἰ δὲ μὴ ἁμάρτημα ἁμαρτήσεις ὃ καλεῖται Δατισμὸς ἀπὸ
Δάτιδος τοῦ Πέρσου ὅστις πρῶτον εἶπεν ὅτι χαίρομαι, πλανηθεὶς τῷ ἔθει τῶν ᾿Ατ-
τικών.]
Ν: χαίρομαι ' rejoice 'χαρῶ-ἐχάρηκα-χαιράμενος, χαρούμενος (500 2111).
308. *χαλάω ' 1oosen -ἐχάλασα-ἐχαλάσθην.
P forms: χαλάσω--κεχάλακα.-Pass. κεχάλασμαι.
'
Ν : χαλάω (ulso χαλνάω 906) destroy, spoil 'χαλάσω χαλασμένος.
'
309. *χαρίζομαι (Mid. dep.) grant -- χαριοῦμαι — ἐχαρισάμην -
κεχάρισμαι (also pass.).
"
Ν: χαρίζω (so evon Porph. Cor. 59, 14) grunt, offer χαρίσω-ἐχάρισα
χαρισμένος. [χαρισάμενος, enjoyable, dolightful, see 2111.]
310. χάσκω 'gape 'ἐγχανομαι - ἔχανον- κέχηνα gape (κεχήν,
imprt. κεχήνετε, κεχηνώς).
N : χάσκω ' gape (imprt. χάσκα besides χάσκε, 8301) ἔχασκα (ανα-χασκήσω),
no more. By-form : ἀνα-χασπίζω ' open my mouth αναχασκίσω.
311. χέζω caco – χεσοῦμαι (& κατασχέσομαι, subj. χίσω)--κατέχεσα
(ἐγ-χέσαιμι) - ἐγκέχοδα. Pass. κεχεσμένος.
P form : χέσειν.
Ν: χέζω cacoχέσω- έχεσα- χεσμένος.
312. *χέω 'pour fut. χέω, χεῖς, χεῖ (834) (subj. χέω-imprt. ἐγχεάτω)
- ἔχει (subj. ἐγ-, συγχέαιμι)-ἐκ-κέχυκα.- Mid. χέομαι- (fut.) χεόμενον
--ἐχεάμην.- Pass. συγχυθήσομαι (effect.) -κόχυμαι.
P-B forms : χύω σε χύν(ν)ω (902)- χύσω, 1150 χεπ χεείς ole. if not χέω,
χέεις, 894) ἔχυσα. -Pass. συγχύννου (Hermas Vis. 5, 5)-χυθήσομαι ἐχύθην.
Ν: χύν(ν)ω ' pour ' χύσω-χυμένος.
-
313. *χόω heap - χώσω- έχωσα--ανα-κεχωκότες. Pass. χωσθήσομαι
ἐχώσθην κέχωσμαι.
P forms : χώννυμι & χωννύω.-Mid. χωσαμένη.
N: Xúv(v)w (851) 'bury,' 'hide'-xwow-xwoµévos.
281
996 3149
111, 997.] XPΑὠνέω. VERBS OF ANOMALOUS MEANING.
314. °XPA-, XPH-. I. χρῶμαι ‘use 'χρήσομαι-ἐχρησάμην-κέχρη-
μαι.—Pass. ἐχρήσθην.
P forms: χρᾶσθαι (Sext. 644, 15 ; seo 830 [1])—ἐχρᾶτο (Dion. H. ii. 7o6)
κεχρήσεται (Theocr. 16, 73).
2. χρῶ 'give oracle'—χρήσωἔχρησα.-Pass. ἐχρήσθην.
P forms: χρᾷ, χρᾶν.
Ο
3. ἀπο-χρῶ suffice (subj. ἀποχρῇ [987], inf. ἀποχρῆν, ἀποχρῶν)
ἀπέχρη-αποχρήσειν-ἀπέχρησε.-Mid. ἀποχρῶμαι am content.
-
315. χρίω ‘anoint ' χρίσω - ἔχρισα. — Mid. ἐχρισάμην — κέχριμαι
(κεχρισμαι).
P forms : κέχρικα.-Pass. χρισθήσομαι-ἐχρίσθην.
16
Ν : χρίω (155, c) (also χρίνω 906) ' anoint, smear 'χρίσω-χρισμένος.
316. (χροΐζω) χρῴζω ' colour.'Pass. ἐχρώσθηνκέχρωσμαι.
P forms: χρώννυμι—χρώσω— ἔχρωσα— ἐπι-κέχρωμα. Pass. χρωσθήσομαι-
κεχρωσμαι.
317. χώννυμι, see χύω.
318. ψεύδω deceive, belie —ψεύσωἔψευσα.-Mid. lie’ψεύσο
μαι durat.), ψευσθήσομαι (effect.) ἐψευσάμην—ἔψευσμαι.-Pass. ψευ
σθήσομαι-ἐψεύσθην.
319. Υψύχω cool-ψύξω-ἔψυξα.-Pass. ἐψύχθην, and 2nd ἀπ-, ἀν-
εψύχην ἔψυκται.
P forms: ψύγω.-Pass. ψυχθήσομαι & ψυγήσομαι-ἐψύγην.
[Mooris 382 ψυχῆναι 'Αττικῶς, ψυγῆναι Ἑλληνικῶς.]
2
Ν: ψύγω cool —ψύξω. -Pass. ψυγῶ ἐψύγηκα—ψυμ(μ)ένος (or ψημένος from
N:
Ψήνω ; see under ἕψω above 99).
330. *ὠθέω 'push'ἐώθουν (726)ὤσω--ἔωσα.— Mid. ἀπ-ώσομαι
ἐωσάμην—ἔωσμοι.-Pass. ὠσθήσομαι-ἐώσθην.
P forms: ὤθησα (152)—ἐξ-έωκα—ἐξ-εώκειν.—Mid. ὠθήσομαι (ἀπ-εώσομαι
Sept. 4 Reg. 21, 14; ἐξεώσασθαι Vita Epiph. 1o5 Α)—δι-, ἐξ-ωθησάμην.-Pass.
ἐξ-, ἀπ-ώσθην (ὠθηθείς)-ὠσμένος (152).
Ν: (μ)π-ώθω & αμπ-ώχνω (also ἀμπ-ώνω) push(μ)πώσω & ἀμπώξω -
ἀμ)πωσμένος & ἀμπωγμένος (179 Petros Patrikios 126, 5 απωγμένου).
321. (ὠνέω) ὠνέομαι sell-ἐωνούμην (726)ὠνήσομαιὠνήμην (com-
noner ἐπριάμην)εώνημαι (also pass.)-ἐωνήθην (pass.)εωνηκώς.
P forms: ὠνησάμην (152)—ἀπ-ωνηθήσεται.
| Phryn. 5 ὠνάμην ὤνασο, ὤνατο πάντα ἀδόκιμα ὅταν διὰ τοῦ α· τὰ γὰρ ἀρχαῖα
διὰ τοῦ κ, ὠνήμην, ὤνησο, ὤνητο. 113 ἐωνησάμην· εἰς λόγος περὶ τοῦ ἁμαρτή
ματος. ἔνθα ἂν μὴ δυνηθῇς τὸ πρίασθαι ἢ ἐπριάμην θεῖναι, ἐκεῖ τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὠνοῦ
μαι τάττε, ἔνθα δ' ἂν τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ πρίασθαι, φυλάττου θάτερον.]
C
A
II. ANOMALY IN THE MEANING.
997. Some verbs show a fluctuation between transitive and
intransitive meaning. Whon this is the case, mark that-
the 1st aorist and 1st perfect are transitive;
the 2nd
""
2nd
""
""
""
intransitive.
1. ἵστημι ' set up,' 'place '-στήσω-ἔστησα ‘set up. —ἵσταμαι set up
myself στήσομαι — ἔστην ‘stood ἕστηκα um standing ἑστήκη
'
was standing 'ἑστήξω ' shall stand ' (972. 996118).
282
ACTIVE VERRS WITH MIDDLE FUTURE. [997, 998.
>
So ἀφίστημι ‘set off, ἀπέστην ‘stood off, revolted, ἀφέστηκα Gam
distant ';ἐφίστημι ' set over, ἐπέστην ' set myself over, ἐφέστηκα an
set over ;-καθίστημι set down, κατέστην established myself (but
κατεστησάμην established for myself'), καθέστηκα ' an established (972).
2. κατα-δύω ‘submerge - καταδύσω
καταδύσω - κατέδυσα—καταδέδυκα;
δύομαι ‘sink 'καταδύσομαι—κατέδυν ‘dived, ‘set '—καταδέδυκα ‘have
entered, set.So ἐνδύω ' put on, dress — ἐνδύσω-ἐνέδυσα.—ἐνδύομαι
put on’ἐνδύσομαι—ἐνέδυν ‘put on (my clothes) '—ἐνδέδυκα ‘wear,
àm clad.' (99665.)
1
16
κατα-
3. φύω ' produce, fut. φύσω aor. ἔφυσα.-φύομαι 'grow, fut. φύσομαι
-ἔφυν-πέφυκα ' am by nature. (996300.)
4. ἐγείρω 'raise 'ἐγερώ -ἤγειρα.ἐγείρομαι ' rise —ἠγέρθην—ἐγρήγορα
am awake.'
(99658.)
5. τήκω ‘melt
τήξωἔτηξα.τήκομαι ' melt '—τακήσομαι-ἐτάκην—
τέτηκα am melt. (996270)
6. πήγνυμι ‘Εx'—πήξωἔπηξα.πήγνυμαι become frm, freeze
παγήσομαι—ἐπάγην-πέπηγα stand firm. (996209-)
<
7. ῥήγνυμι tearῥήξωἔρρηξα.πῥήγνυμαι burst ῥαγήσομαι
ἐρράγην—ἔρρωγα am torn. (996, στ)
8. ἀπο-σβέννυμι extinguish 'ἀπο-σβέσωἀπτέσβεσα.—ἀποσβέννυμα
* go out 'ἀπο-σβήσομαι-ἀπ-έσβην—ἀπ-έσβηκα. (996239.)
9. πείθω persuade πείσωἔπεισα-πέπεικα.—πείθομαι listen to,
obey’πείσομαι ἐπείσθην—πέπεισμαι ' am convinced 'πέποιθα trust,
'relie.' (996200-)
10. φαίνω show φανῶἔφηνα-πέφαγκα.φαίνομαι appear
φανοῦμαι, φανήσομαι-ἐφάνην—πέφηνα ‘have appeared. (996.91.)
7
II. ἀπόλλυμι destroy' ἀπολῶ ἀπώλεσα—ἀπολώλεκα.—ἀπόλλυμαι
perish 'ἀπολοῦμαι-ἀπωλόμην-απόλωλα am lost. (99612)
ACTIVE VERBS WITII A MIDDLE FUTURE.
998. Many active verbs form a middle future, which has
either an active (transitive) or passive meaning.
A middle future with an active meaning is formed by the
following verbs among others :
adw 'sing'
σομαι
ἀκούω hear
ἀκούσομαι
πηδάω leap
πλέω 'swim
πηδήσομαι
πλεύσομαι
απαντάω 'meet
ἀπαντήσομαι πνέω ‘blow
πνεύσομαι
ἀπολαύω enjoy
7
ἀπολαύσομαι ῥέω 'fow
ῥυήσομαι
ἁρπάζω ‘snatch
ἁρπάσομαι
σιγάω keep silent
σιγήσομαι
βαδίζω ' step '
βαδιοῦμαι
σιωπάω 19
3
σιωπήσομαι
βοάω ' cry
βοήσομαι
σκώπτω mock
σκώψομαι
γελάω ' laugh
γελάσομαι
σπουδάζω ‘mako hastel σπουδάσομαι
διώκω 'pursue
ἐπ-αινέω ' pruise
κλέπτω steal'
οιμώζω lument"
διώξομαι
τίκτω bear
τέξομαι
ἐπαινέσομαι
τρώγω 'gnaw'
τρώξομαι
θαυμάζω admire
θαυμάσομαι
τυγχάνω ' chance'
τεύξομαι
κλέψομαι
φεύγω 'fee'
φεύξομαι
οιμώξομαι
| φθάνω * anticipate
φθήσομαι
283
999–1000b.]
DEPONENT VERBS.
999. Many of these verbs, however, have also the future active in
use, as: ᾄσω, ἁρπάσω, διώξω, ἐπαινέσω, θαυμάσω, κλέψω, πλεύσω, σιωπήσω,
τέξω, φθάσω-and this tendency for regularity, manifested even in
early and A compositions, comes to a full development in P Greek,
ς: ἀκούσω, ἁμαρτήσω, ἀπαντήσω, ἀπολαύσω, βοήσω, γελάσω, οιμώξω, etc.
999. For the further consequences of this tendency see 1478-86.
DEPONENT VERBS.
999º. For the definition of deponent verbs and their discrimination
into middle and passive deponents (MD, PD) see 674.
1000. Though the A mode of conception regarding the
middle form of the verb has considorably changed since (1478
86), the group of deponents, as far as they still survive in N, pre-
serve also, to a great extent, their deponent character (1001-4).
In many cases, however, they have changed to actives, and in
others, they have even attracted a considerable number of verbs
from the class of actives.
1. Deponents in A, changed to Actives in P-N (cp. 1003).
Α
δράττομαι seize
κτώμαι acquire
αὐθαδίζομαι ' am self-willed
βρωμάομαι ' stink'
βιάζομαι ' force
μασάομαι ' chew'
ἐξηγέομαι interpret
πειρῶμαι attempt
χαρίζομαι ' present with '
δωρέομαι ' present with
2. Actives in A,
Λ
δυσαρεστέω 'am displeased'
ἐκδικέω avenge
7
εμπιστεύω ' trust '
επιχειρέω attempt
ἐχθαίρω ' hate
θαυμάζω ' wonder
παρουσιάζω ' appear
σικχαίνω loathe
δράττω
κτώ
P-B
αυθαδιάζω Γ
βρομάω (& -έω)
βιάζω
ἐξηγέομαι
πειράζω ' tempt
"
χαρίζω
δωρέω
N
αδράχνω
ἀπο-κτῶ
βρωμάω & νέω
βιάζω
μασάω & -έω
έ-, (ξε-)ξηγεω
πειράζω molest
χαρίζω
changed to Deponents in P-N.
N
δυσαρεσκίζομαι
γδικιώνομαι
μπιστεύ(γ)ομαι
P-B
(δυσαρεστούμαι
ἐμπιστεύομαι
ἐπιχειρίζομαι
ἐχθαίρομαι
ὀχτρεύομαι
θαυμάζω
θαμάζομαι
παρουσιάζομαι
παρρησιάζομαι
(εὐσπλαγχνίζομαι 'pity" σπλαχνίζομαι
σικχαίνομαι
σιχαίνομαι
(κακ-ἀφοροῦμαι
ὑπερασπίζομαι
ὑπερηφανεύομαι
χαίρομαι
ὑφοράω ' suspect
ὑπερασπίζω defend
"
ὑπερηφανέω um proud
χαίρω ' rejoice
περασπίζομαι
περηφανεύομαι
χαίρομαι
C
1000. So further N : παραπονοῦμαι ' complain, παραξενίζομαι 'won-
der, ὀνειρεύομαι ‘dream, ἐντηροῦμαι (=σέβομαι), ὀργίζομαι hate,
ὀρέγομαι, (γ)νοιάζομαι, ἐρωτεύομαι, καμώνομαι (= Α ὑποκρίνομαι), μυρί
ζομαι (formed after its A equivalent ὀσμῶμαι οι οσφραίνομαι), ξεκαρδί
ζομαι (= 4 ἐκθνῄσκω γέλωτι, ξεμυστηρεύ(γ)ομαι, ψυχοπονοῦμαι < sympathize
with. (Cp. 1466-74.)
284
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE DEPONENTS. [1001–1004.
I. MIDDLE DEPONENTS (MD).
1001. The commonest deponents with an aorist middle are
the following:-
>
*αἰσθάνομαι ' feel
αιτιάομαι ' accuse
°ακέομαι heal
* ἀκροάομαι ' listen
άλλομαι ' leap
ἀπο-κρίνομαι ' reply'
*αράομαι ' beseech
ἀσπάζομαι ' greet
*βιάζομαι ' force
οβληχάομαι ' blent
βρωμάομαι ' «tink'
*γίγνομαι ' become
δέχομαι receive
δωρέομαι 'present
°ἐντέλλομαι ' enjoin'
Cael
πομαι ' follow
εργάζομαι ' work
*εὔχομαι ' wish
*ἡγέομαι 4 lead
'
θεάομαι ' look ᾽
Ιάομαι ‘heal
°ἱκνέομαι ' arrive
>
ἵπταμαι Ρ ' flee
καλαμάομαι 'glean
Οκνυζάομαι ' whine
*λογίζομαι ' reflect
Ολυμαίνομαι ' injure
λωβάομαι ' outrage
μαρτύρομαι ' attest
*μασάομαι ' chow
6
μάχομαι fight
μέμφομαι blame
>
,
παλαμάομαι 'handle
Ο
παρακελεύομαι urge
παραμυθέομαι console
παρρησιάζομαι “speak freely'
πέτομαι ‘fy'
πραγματεύομαι ‘deal with
προ-καλίζομαι ' challenge
προοιμιάζομαι 'preface
προφασίζομαι ' pretend
Ορύομαι ' doliver
*μετα-πέμπομαι ' send for *στοχάζομαι ' aim
>
μηκάομαι ' bleat
Ομιμέομαι 4 imitate
νήχομαι swim
ὀγκάομαι 'bray
οὐδύρομαι ' wail
οἴχομαι ' am gono
°οἰωνίζομαι ' augur from
Ολοφύρομαι lament over
Αρχέομαι ‘skip
οσμάομαι ' smell
Οὐσφραίνομαι 4 small
>
τοξάζομαι shoot with a bow
*ὑπισχνέομαι promise
O
ὑπο-κρίνομαι ' feign
οφείδομαι 'sparo
οφθέγγομαι speak
*χαρίζομαι ' gratify
χασμάομοι yawn'
χειρομαι subdue
χράομαι ' use
Ο
ὠνέομαι huy
ωρύομαι 4 howl’
(
>
1002. Many of the above MD verbs have also an aorist passive with a pas-
stre mouning, as : ᾐτιασάμην ' accused ' ΗτιάΘΗΝ was accused; ἐβιασάμην
'forcod ' —ÉBiáсOHN was forced.' Of others the perfect has both an activo
and a passive meaning, as : εἴργασται ' he has performed and it has been
performed '; ἀπο-κέκριται ' he has replied and it has been replied.
-
1003. The middle aorist having retreated since G (1478-86) and its
substitute (the aorist passivo, often also the perfect) having generally
maintained the original passive meaning, several of the above verbs have
been mistaken for passivos and thus adapted also to the active form (cp.
1000), as: αἰτιάω Ρ-Β, ακέω Ρ, βιάζω 1-1, βρωμάω 1-1, δωρέω P-1, λυμαίνω 1',
μασάω Ρ-Ν, μεταπέμπω Ρ-Β, °ἐντέλλω 1-1, παρρησιάζω 1, °χειρύω P. - On the
other hand, the ancient form is still preserved in δέχομαι, ἐργάζομαι, ἀπο
κρίνομαι, ἀφουκροῦμαι (for A έπακροῶμαι), κατ-αροῦμαι (Α καταρῶμαι), γίνομαι,
μάχομαι, προφασίζομαι, ὀρχει)οῦμαι (859, 4 ὀρχοῦμαι, πέτομαι, στοχάζομαι,
ὑπόσχομαι (App. iv. 3, 4 ὑπισχνοι μαι, χασμοῦμαι οι χασμουραιοῦμαι (Α χα-
σμῶμαι), etc.
II. PASSIVE DEPONENTS (PD).
1004. Deponents with an aorist passive in form are chiefly
verbs donoting motion, emotion, or thinking. The commonest
of them are :-
άγαμαι admire
αἰδέομαι ' revere
ἁμιλλάομαι ' emulate
χαρνέομαι ' refuse
χθομαι am
am unwill-
ing'
βούλομαι wish '
δέομαι need, re- *ἐνθυμίωμαι consider
quest'
διατάομαι live
διαλέγομαι ' converse
διανοέομαι ' meditate'
*δύναμαι can'
* ἐναντιύομαι ' oppose
(
Ο
ἐπιμέλομαι & τέρμα
-έομαι
1
care,'' attend to'
ἐπίσταμαι “ know
ἑστιάομαι banquet'
εὐλαβέομαι beware
εὐωχέομαι ' feast
285
1004-1006.]
DERIVATION OF WORDS.
ήδομαι rejoice
ἡττάομαι ' am over-
come '
* κρέμαμαι hang
μαίνομαι ' am mad
μεταμέλομαι repent
μιμνήσκομαι 'recollect
μυσάττομαι • loathe’
16
οἴομαι deem, think
οργίζομαι ' get angry'
δρμάομαι 'start
*πειράομαι ' attempt
πλανάομαι 'ramble
*πορεύομαι ' wander
προθυμέομαι am dis-
posed
προνοομαι provide
σέβομαι revere,
spect'
re-
>
*φαντάζομαι ' appear
φιλοτιμέομαι ' have am-
bition'
φοβέομαι fear
ὑποτοπέομαι surmise.
1005. Several of these PD verbs form also an aorist middlo (MD),
especially in P-B Atticistic Greek, as: ἠγασάμην, ᾐδεσάμην, ἡμιλλησάμην,
ἠρνησάμην, διελεξάμην, ἐδυνησάμην (& ἐδυνασάμην), διενοησάμην, ἡσάμην,
ἐμνησάμην, ὡρμησάμην, ἐπειρασάμην, ἐπλανησάμην, προυνοησάμην, ἐφιλοτιμη
σάμην. See also 1486.
1006. The few specimens among the above verbs which still survive in N
preserve also their deponent form in the surviving tenses (1478-86), us : ἀρνοῦμαι,
βούλομαι, δύνομαι, ἀναντιώνομαι, ἐν θυμοῦμαι, κρέμομαι, ὀργίζομαι, πορεύομαι
got along, (σέβομαι), φοβοῦμαι.
286
II. ETYMOLOGY.
1007. The stock of the Greek language consists of simple
words and of words compound of simple items. Hence the
formation of words, which is called etymology, resolves itself
into derivation and composition.
A. DERIVATION.
1008. Simple words are derived either directly from verbal
stems and roots, in which case they are called primitive (also
postverbal, deverbal), as: ἀρχὴ from ἄρχω, σωτὴρ from σῴζω,
TO-Ts from Tot;-or from nominal stems and are called
ποιητής ποιο
denominative, as: ἀρχαῖος from ἀρχα i. e. ἀρχή, παιδάριον from
παιδ i. Θ. παῖς, σοφία from σοφός.
1009. Both primitives (postverbals) and denominatives are
formed from the above stems by means of suffixes which
indicate the grammatical character and meaning of the word
thus formed, as: KPL-Ts 'judge'-κpí-ois 'judgement'--Kpt-Týpov
'judging court,' 'tribunal.'
1010. The derivation of a word often necessitates, in addition
to the suffixes, a metaphonic change within tho stem or root of
the word, as :
φεύγω
peyo 'flee' gives puyý (ep. 32) 'flight-λéyw 'say' gives
λόγος word λείπω ‘leave gives λείψανον remnant, ἐλλιπής
'wanting,' and Aotrós 'remaining.'
Accordingly, derivation often necessitates one or more of the phonopathic
changes dealt with in 123-217.
1011. Both the 4 gondor and accentuation of primitives as
well as denominatives is still substantially preserved in N.
(Cp. 245-9b. 258. 354, etc.)
I. SUBSTANTIVES.
1012. Substantives are dorived from vorbs, from substan-
tives, or from adjectivos by apponding to their stom one
of the following suffixes, synoptically grouped. according to
their association of meaning.
287
1013-1020.] SUBSTANTIVES DERIVED FROM SUBSTANTIVES.
A. FROM VERBS.
1013. 1. Denoting the AGENT—
-τήρ (δ), Στειρα (ή), als : σωτήρ 'saviour 'σώτειρα
δοτήρ ' giver —δότειρα
} Rather common.
τωρ (δ), *τρια, (ἡ) as : συλλήπτωρ ‘helper’- συλλήπτρια.-- Uncommon.
-Της (δ), -τρίς, τρια (ἡ) as : ποιητής 'poet'ποιήτρια
ψάλτης harper ψάλτρια
αὐλητής ‘flute player'αὐλητρίς
-εύς (δ), Ζειά, (ή)
as : ἱερεύς priest -ἱέρεια
Very
common.
βασιλεύς 'king βασίλεια 'queen. Common.
-ός (ό, ή), as : ὁ & ἡ ἀοιδός 'singer, ὁ & ἡ τροφός ' nurse.’Common.
Remarks.
1014. Nouns in -τήρ, -τρίς, -εύς, -ός, are always oxytone, while those
in -τωρ, -τειρα, -τρια have recessive accent.
1015. As to the masculines in -της which are the most numerous, they
are accented according as they consist of two or more syllables. In
the former case, they invariably accent the penult (except κριτής
'judge' and its compounds with a preposition); in the latter, they
accent the penult if it be short either by nature or position, other-
wise they accent the ultima, us: ναύτης, πλάστης, κτίστης, ψάλτης [not
κτιστής, ψαλτής]-νομοθέτης, ἐργάτης, ἐπιβάτης, ἐρέτης, προδότης-μαθητής,
ποιητής, δικαστής, ζηλωτής.
1016. However, nouns in -υντής are oxytone, as: εὐθυντής ; further
κριτής (1org, but ὀνειροκρίτης), καθαρτής, ποικιλτής, αλήτης, πλανήτης, δυνάστης,
κυβερνήτης, πενέστης.
1017. Of the above suffixes (1013), -της and cos still fully survive in N,
preserving their A accentuation also, as: ναύτης, κτίστης, κλέπτης,
προφήτης, δεσπότης, μεσίτης, ψάλτης, ἐργάτης, προδότης, μαθητής, καλεστής,
χορευτής, κριτής ; so too τριa in the syncopated form 'τρα (150, d ep. 645,
3) as : μαθήτρια, χορεύτρα, μεσίτρα.-On the other hand -τήρ, Στωρ, -τρίς,
and -εύς, owing to their final consonantism (219) and their incon-
venient declension (219), have been affected by terminal phonopathy
and become -τῆρας, έτωρας, νέας οι -εᾶς (-ιᾶς), -τρίδα respectively (21 8 f.,
338 f., 379. 407), as: σημαντήρας (σημαντήρ), κλήτορας (κλήτωρ), μάστορας
master, βασιλείς (βασιλεύς).
1018. 2. Denoting the ACTION, also an abstract and concrete
notion
*ac (ή): δόσις giving, πράξις acting, γένεσις | Very common.
origin, μίμησις imitation
'
1
* -εία (ή) : δοκιμασία trial, προδοσία treachery 'Common.
:
* ία & -εία (ή) πενία poverty, αγγελία news, βασιλεία } Very common.
kingdom, παιδεία education
*-μός (6): διωγμός 'persecution, θυμός ' courage,
σεισμός ' earthquake
} Fairly common.
1019. As a variety of -ía appears the suffix -ela which comprises a great
number of abstract fomininos derived from verbs in -εύω, as : (βασιλεύω
βασιλεία) βασιλεία, παιδεύω) παιδεία, (στρατεύω) στρατεία, (πορεύομαι) πορεία.
1020. All these suffixes still obtain in N, subject to phonopathy;
that is -μòs fully survives, preserving its ancient accent also, as:
288
SUBSTANTIVES FROM SUBSTANTIVES. [1020–1024.
1
θυμός, λογισμός, σεισμός ; so too -σία and -ía though generally as oxy-
tones -σiá and -á (155, c);—while -ois has been modified by ter-
minal phonopathy to -on or -o (343). Examples: ǹ πpúέŋ (îpâέı)
'act,' yvwon common sense, κατηγόρηση, πείραξη, ζήση, θλίψη, στάση,
κρίση, (προδοσία) προδοσία, ἀδυνασία, γρασία (for ὑγρασία, 130)-αντρεία
(ἀνδρεία), φιλιά, φτωχιά (also φτώχια), δουλεία, ἀδικία, κακία-πειρασμός,
κλαδισμός (Acta Xanth. 6, 27), λο(γ)ισμός (155, c), ἁγιασμός, φερμός,
δαρμός, σκοτωμός, ερχομός, φαγωμός, etc.
1021. But a more important deviation of N from 1, regarding the
above class of terminations, lies in the fact, that, whereas in A
-σis was one of the commonest suffixes and acted as an equivalent
and alternative of the infinitive, P Greek, especially G-B speech, in
its disinclination for inconvenient inflexion and owing to the homo-
phony of feminines in -s with masculines in -ns (338), began to
favour the ending -oia and above all -µós (beside pa and pov [1022]).
The natural outcome of this tendency was that -(o)ia, now -(σ)ɩá
(155,c), has become very numerous in N, while nouns in -ơŋ or -σɩ
at present form a rather limited group. In this way, the relative fre-
quency in A of the above suffixes: -ois, -(σ)ía, -µós, has been reversed
in N to -µús, -(o)úú, -on.
1021. For an idiomatic uso in N of -uós sce 1839.
C
1022. Out of -σis + -µa (1024) T-N speech has evolved a third neuter
suffix---μov,
pov, now most common in N speech, to denote the action
formerly designated by -ois, as: Bypayiμov 'writing,' dégipov 'reception,' etc.
Ν ράψιμο sewing, κλείσιμο" closing, φέρσιμο" behaviour, λούσιμο"
'bathing,' uouo" washing,' &c., &c. It is a contaminatory form based
upon the stem of -ous and infected aftor -pa in all the cases except the nomi-
native singular (370 f.).
1022". Regarding the genesis of -μor, scholars generally take it for a substan-
tivized neuter of the adjective onding pos(1054). This view howover is refuted by
the consideration that -ipo" stands in no connexion of meaning with adjectives
in pos and that B-N shows no parallel caso of raising, as A Greek did, the
neutor of an adjective to an abstract substantivo (1050“. 1182). (Cp. В µетá-
στασις, μετάστημα, μεταστάσιμον, στέψις, στέμμα, στέψιμον.)
1023. 3. Denoting the RESULT of action; also an abstract
ro concrete notion--
*-μα (τό): γέννημα ‘product,' ποίημα ‘poem, ῥῆμα “word, πρᾶγμα
'thing,' oôua 'body.'- Very common.
UH
I-μн (1): yvwμn opinion,' un report,' entorhun 'knowledge.'---
Common.
I-н or -α (1) Topńcut,' páxn 'battle,' kλor
H
: τομή
+
theft,' qopa de-
struction,' poipa fate,' Bláßn damage.'- Very common.
I-OC (Tú): xos 'cold,' ëdos 'custom,' pioros hatred,' ráðos 'suffer-
ing,' Tλos multitude,' kpáros 'force.'- Very common.
1024. All these four suffixes are still fully preserved in N, and that
almost in the same proportion and with the same accentuation, as in
11, 15: γράμμα, θέλημα, ἐπιστήμη, γνώμη, φορά, μοῖρα, αλλαγή, βάθος, βάρος.
The only noteworthy deviation is that - now denotes also the
action as well as the abstract notion, thus corresponding to both-pu
and -σis, hence it has contributed to the abstraction of -yor (1022).
It is also far commoner now in consequence of its gradual substi-
tution for -ous and its synonymous infinitive (1022. App. vi. 25).
289
U
1025-1030.] SUBSTANTIVES FROM SUBSTANTIVES.
1025. 4. Denoting the INSTRUMENT or MEANS; also the
place-
I-TPON (TÓ): ❝POтpov 'plough,' σкŷπтроv 'staff.'—Common.
-OPON (TÓ): Bálрov 'base,' 'step,' κλeipov 'bar,' 'lock.'—Not common.
I-Tра (n): §úστpa 'scraper,' paperpa 'quiver.'-Fairly common.
-THρION (TO) TOTηptov tumbler,' áкpoaтýptov auditorium (cp. 1034).-
Common.
1026. So still in N and in about the same proportion, the only
difference being that -rpov has been shortened to -rp (302 ff.) and
moreover become still commoner, as: onμavтpo" 'sounding-board,'
'gong,' ávarpо" 'scovel,' 'maulkin,' okáλapo" poker," qúorpа
scraper, noriorpa 'cattle-trough,' o¶upixrpa 'whistle,' worîрɩ 'cup,'
πατητήρι
πатητηрɩ wine-vat,' apyaorĥpı 'loom,' shop,' σkaλiorηpi 'poker,' etc.
1026b. Kindred with -7pa is the suffix 20pa which is peculiar to G-N, as:
κολυμβήθρα ' font, δακτυλήθρα ' an instrument of torture, now thimble, κρε-
μάθρα hook for hanging, άρμυρήθρα (αλμυρήθρα) ' a plant, κερήθρα (κηρήθρα)
'honey-comb.'
1027. Mark finally that B-N diction has abstracted a feminine ending -éa
(sc. #λnyń) to denote the effect produced by an instrument (stroke), as:
Theoph. 318, 27 коνтаρéav (also Dig. 6, 504; 510, et passim), moλλàs oĦaléas.
In B-M this was still paroxytone (-éa), but has since become oxytone (-cá
or -á) through the natural process of synizesis (155), as: ¿uλeá, µaxaipeá,
παλαμά (-ιά).
B. FROM SUBSTANTIVES.
1028. 5. Denoting DESCENT from a father or ancestor-so-
called patronymics-and occurring oftener in epic than in A
Greek-
º½dнc i.e. -áôн¤ (ó): Alvecúdns, Aaepriádns son of Acncas, of Laertios.'
-ίδης (δ) : Πριαμίδης, Πηλείδης, Ηρακλείδης 'son of Priamos,
Peleus, Heracles.'- Common.
°-íwn (6): Kpoviov 'son of Kronos.'- Uncommon.
-ίων Κρονίων
-ίς, ίδος (ή) : Τανταλίς, Νηρηίς ' daughter of Tantalos, of Nereus.
Uncommon.
°-18cức (6), said of animals: deride's 'caglet,' λayıdeús 'leveret.'
Fairly common.
1029. No direct trace of these patronymic suffixes is found in N, their place
having been taken, to a great extent, by the diminutive endings -ái(ov)
-ákis, or -ákns, and wouλos (1038¢ ff.). Such N specimens as: Anµntpiádns,
Γεωργιάδης, Κωνσταντινίδης, Νικολαΐδης, etc., ' son of Δημήτριος, Γεώργιος, etc.,
are scholastic revivals of the classical usage.
1030. 6. Representing a person as belonging to a country or
nation- so-called ETIINIC or gentile nouns—
*-10 (6): Συρακόσιος, Κορίνθιος, *Αθηναίος, *Σμυρναίος-
} Common.
Συρακοσία, Κορινθία, Αθηναία (ep. 1o8r f.)
°-εύς (6) : Ερετριεύς, Μεγαρεύς, Πειραιεύς. - Fairly common.
*της (ὁ) : Σπαρτιάτης, Αἰγινήτης, Σικελιώτης, Τεγεάτης,
*
Κυδωνιάτης, Ηπειρώτης, Ν Μανιάτης, Very common.
Κορφιάτης, Κισαμίτης, Σελινιώτης
°-άς, άδος (ἡ): Δηλιάς. Uncommon.
ο-ίς, ιδος (ή) : Περσίς, Σικελίς.-Παirly uncommon.
290
SUBSTANTIVES FROM SUBSTANTIVES. [1030-1037.
Στις, ιδος (ή) : Σικελιῶτες, Σπαρτιάτις, Αἰγινίτις.-Fairly common.
*
-cca (ἡ): Θρᾷσσα, Κρήσσα — P Φοινίκισσα, Κιλίκισσα-
Ν Ρεθεμνιώτισσα, Χανιώτισσα, Περαιώτισσα } Common.
1031. In G-N, particularly since T, ethnics are formed by the
suffixes-
I. -THS (δ), fem. έτισσα (ep. Latin -issa) : Ν Μανιάτης Δισσα, Κορφιάτης
Δισσα, Κισαμίτης -ισσα, Μεσολογγίτης -ισσα, Μωραίτης -ισσα, Σουλιώτης -σσα,
Αντριώτης -ισσα, Κασιώτης -ισσα, Ρουμελιώτης -ισσα, Περαιώτης (Πειραιεύς)
-ισσα. - Very numerous.
2. -ιανός (ep. Latin -ianus) : Ασιανός, Σαρδιανός, Κασιανός,—Ν Σφακιανός,
Παριανός, Ψαριανός, -ιανή.-Very numerous.
2b. Substantives of this class are used also as adjectives (1078).
3. -Νός (1078) : Ν Πατρινός, Καστρινός, Αριτνός, -νή.-Not common.
3. These ethnic substantives are used also as adjectives (1078 f.).
4. - (Nanos or - (Ν)αιός (i.e. -λός (155, α)): Ν Σιφναιός (not from Σίφνιος, which
would have romained unchanged), Σμυρναιος, Μυτιληναιος, Σαντορηναιος,
Ῥωμαιός, Σαλονικεύς. - Fairly common.
4. In all these nouns, which are not numerous, the frequently occurring v is
thematic.
Ρ
5. -INOS 3 (also 4, p. 1080), as : Λεοντίνος, Ακραγαντίνος, Μεταποντίνος,
Γ' Αλεξανδρινος, Βυζαντίνος ;—Ν Τριεστῖνος, Αρτζερίνος.-Fairly common.
6 -κός 3 : Ν Κρητικός, Τηνιακός.-Rare.
1032. 7. Denoting an APPURTENANCE or MEMBERSHIP—
*-THC (6), *-τις, ιδος (ή): πολίτης, πολίτις ‘citizen,” δημότης, δημότες
burgess, στρατιώτης, στρατιῶτις soldier.'Numerous.
1033. So still in N, but the feminino ending is έτισσα (1031, 1), as : ναύτης,
ἀγωγιάτης, πετρίτης, κοπρίτης, χωριάτης, ἀκαμάτης -τισσα. -Numerous.
1034. 8. Denoting a PLACE; sometimes also the instrument---
*-εῖον (τό): μουσεῖον ‘seat of the muses, κουρείον barber's shop,
ᾠδεῖον ' music hall ' odeum, ἱερεῖον victim.'Common.
-τήριον (τό): δεσμωτήριον ' prison, ἀκροατήριον auditorium, δικαστ
τήριον ' court of justice. Common. (Cp. 1025.)
1
* ών, ώνος (ο): ἀνδρών men's apartment,' παρθενών ‘maiden's
room, ἀμπελών vineyard, περιστερεών dovecote.'-Fairly common.
1035. So still in N with the necessary phonopathic modification of -eîov
to -ειό" (155, c), as : σκολειό", αγγειό", στοιχειό" ;-of -τήριον 10 -τήριο" or com-
monly -τήρι" (302 ff.), as : ποτῆρι, κριτήριο" ;—and of -ὢν to -ωνας (338 f.), or
moro commonly -εώνας, as: καλαμεῶνας 'reed-bed, περιστεριώνας, dove-
cute, ἀχρεῶνας, lay-loft, etc.
1036. 9. Denoting a DIMINUTIVE—
C
-1οΝ (τό) : παιδίον little child, θηρίον little beast, θύριον little
door, τραπέζιον ' little table, κλειδίον ' little key. Very numerous.
* ίδιον (τό): νησίδιον islet, οἰκίδιον • little house, ἀγρίδιον little
field.'-Numerous.
Ο
1
*-άριον (τό): παιδάριον 'boy,' ἀνθρωπάριον manikin.’Numerous.
-ίσκος (δ) : παιδίσκος ‘young boy. Uncommon.
°-ick (ή) : παιδίσκη maiden.'Uncommon.
1037. The above two suffixes - ίδιον and -άριον are in reality not
separate terminations, but mere amplifications of -tov, hence they are
actual diminutives of a diminutive, and so denote, or at all events
originally denoted, something smaller than what is denoted by
291
U 2
1037-1038c.]
DIMINUTIVES.
Similar in formation, though of a more pronounced character, are the
following collateral but rather uncommon A amplifications: -ύλλιον
(-έλλιον, - άλ(λ)ιον, -υλλίδιον), -ύδριον, -ιδάριον, -αρίδιον, -άσιον, -άφιον,
-ύφιον, -ίσκιον, (-ισκίδιον, -ισκύδριον, -ισκάριον), ίχνιον, άκνιον, -άκιον, as :
ἀνθύλλιον, κρικέλλιον, κοράλ (λ)ιον, μειρακυλλίδιον, μελύδριον, νησύδριον,
ἱματιδάριον, βιβλαρίδιον, κοράσιον, θειάφιον, ἀσπιδίσκιον, χλανισκίδιον,
νεανισκύδριον, νεανισκάριον, παιδισκάριον, πολίχνιον, κυλίχνιον, πιθάκνιον,
σπινθηράκιον.
1038. Owing to their froquont use in common speech, many of tho
diminutives had lost, as early as 4 times, their diminutive meaning and
become equivalent to their primitives. Hence even in 4 the diminutive
ending does not necessarily imply a diminutive sense also, us : θηρίον
(=θήρ), ἱστίον ‘sail, ἑρκίον, ισχίον, στόμιον, κρανίον, ἰνίον, φορτίον, πηνίον,
βιβλίον, &c. This is the case particularly in G-B whore diminutives
bocame unduly numerous, having assumed the function of their
primitives. (1038 1.)
ον
-
1038. With the probable exception of -ίσκος and -ίσκη, all the above
suffixes are still proserved in N, of course in the shortened form - (302 f.),
ας : χαρτί, παιδί, ποδάρι, κλωνάρι, πιθάρι, κανίσκι, ξυράφι, χωράφι, κτένι, πηγάδι
σημάδι, ο]φείδι, ψαλίδι, καρύδι, κοράσι, &c. (but also κοράσιο, so too στοιχειό,
προικιό, χωριό, &c.). In other respects, however, N shows a considorablo
doparture from A, in that it teems with diminutives, that is with nouns
which aro diminutive only in form but not in meaning. Thus: χαρτί
= χάρτης, παιδί = παῖς, κλωνάρι = κλών, πιθάρι = πίθος, κανίσκι = κανοῦν, ῥαβδί
ῥάβδος, &c. The normalization thus effected naturally called for some
differentiation of, or substitution for, tho obliterated items. Accordingly
while t in most of its variotios (-δι", -ρι", - κι", &c., especially -άρι"")
more or less still preservos (chiefly in insular Greck) its original or
diminutivo forco (ep. λυρί little λύρα, γατί ' little γάτα, πετράδι little πέτρα)
a novel suffix -άκι" (also -ίκιου, ήκιου, -άγγιου, -ίγγιου) was resorted to
in & timos, and this successor has spread ever since and finally become tho
dominant representative of N diminutivo suffixes (cp. Τ-Β νυσσάκιον CLeo-
mans ( III IV) 13, 2 ; σπινθηράκιον, μανάκιον, μανιάκιον, καψάκιον, καπι-
στράκιον, κιονάκιον, στενάκιον, etc.). In this way -du now eau bo not only
affixed to any primitivo substantive (appellative or proper name); it can
even bo suporadded-and this is the commonest case-to any other dimi-
nutivo suffix, all those terminations having more or less lost their
diminutivo force.
un-
1038. Tho gonosis of the diminutive suffix -άκιον, -ήκιον, -ίκιον,
seems to go not further back than & timos, though it was
doubtedly a popular termination, as half diminutive and half radical,
as early as A, at least in connexion with substantivos in -ξ, as: ἄβαξ
ἀβ-άκιον, σκύλαξ σκυλάκιον, δέλφαξ δελφάκιον, αλλαξ αὐλ-άκιον, ψύδρας
ψυδράκιον, ἄνθραξ ἀνθράκιον, Ιέραξ ἱερ-άκιον, δύας δυ-άκιον, θώραξ θωράκιον,
μύσταξ μυστ-άκιον, πίναξ πινάκιον, λάβρας λαβράκιον, κάμας καμ-άκιον, θρίναξ
θριν-άκιον, χάραξ χαρ-άκιον, κόχλας κοχλάκιον, χάλι χαλίκιον, μύρμηξ μυρμ
ήπιον, σκώληξ σκωλήκιον, πέρδιξ περδίκιον, φάραγξ φαράγγιον, σάλπιγξ
σαλπίγγιον, συριγέ συρίγγιον, etc. (ep. ulso πιστάκη πιστ-άκιον, φαρμάκιον,
TITT-άKLOV). It is out of this class then that the torminal complex -ámior
-ám" was evolved as a diminutivo suffix and so extended, since T timos,
to almost every substantivo, whether primitive or already diminutive.
(C). Ν ἀνδράκι", &(ν)θρωπάκι", γυναικάκι", παιδάκι", χεράκι”, δακτυλάκι,
βουνάκι, σανιδάκι", ποταμάκι”, μαχαιράκι", ποτηράκι", φυλλαράκι", πετρα-
δάκι", κρεατάκι", elc., etc.) Nay, even the vory group which gave the start
to this process could not, in the long run, oscapo its influence, for N has
formed from πινάκιον πινακάκι", from καμάκιον καμακάκι", from αὐλάκιον
αὐλακάκι”, from θρινάκιον θρινακάκι", from χαράκιον χαρακάκι", from βυάκιον
ῥυακάκι”, from (μυστάκιον) μουστάκιον μουστακάκι”, from ἱεράκιον Ιερακάκι", from
χαλίκιον χαλικάκι”, from σκωλήκιον οι σκουλήκι” σκουληκάκι”, etc., ole.
292
DIMINUTIVES.
[1039–1040.
1039. Among the various influences which have contributed to the mul-
tiplication since A of diminutives, we may note here: (a) their popularity
even in A, especially in common speech, as may be inferred from the dic-
tion used in comedy;-(b) the inconvenience of inflection attending their
primitives, particularly in the numerous cases of consonantal declen-
sion (338 f.) ;—(c) the frequent use, especially since G, of the suffix -as
(fem. -a) in an augmentative sense, and the necessity arising therefrom for
a differentiation and dissociation. Cp. χάρακας ' big χάραξ, χαράκιον little
χάραξ; λάβρακας ' big λάβραξ, λαβράκιον little λάβραξ; ιέρακας • big ἱέραξ.
(Cp. 1043.)
>
>
1040. The popular custom ostablished even in classical antiquity, of
forming pet names and nicknames by violently shortening proper names
(287. 298; cp. Kühner-Blass ii. 280) remained in popular favour through
all subsequent stages of the language. This practice, which is moreover
common to all languages, could not fail to affect also foreign names
introduced into common life. Hence just as Χρόμιος, Βάκχιος, Νύμφιος,
Κίκιος, Κόννιος, Ζεφύριος, Κλεόβιος, Πυόνιος, Γύλιος, Απολλώνιος, Αφροδίσιος,
Διονύσιος, Αρτέμιος, Θεοδόσιος, Ολύμπιος, Δημήτριος, Γ-Β 'Αποδήμιος, Πετίσιος,
Παχούμιος, Εὐστάθιος, Αρμένιος, etc., were shortened to Χρόμις, Βάκχις, Νύμφις,
Κίκις, Κόννις,Ζεφύρις, Κλέοβις, Πυόνις, Γύλις, Απολλώνις, Αφροδίσις, Διονύσις (then
Διονῦς), Αρτέμις, Θεοδόσις, Ολύμπις, Δημήτρις, Ρ-Β Αποδῆμις οι -μης, Πετίσις
οι -ης, Παχούμις or 4μης, Εὐστάθις or -ης, Αρμένις or της respectively (298) :-
so Αντώνιος (Antonius), Πετρώνιος, Αυρήλιος, Ἰούλιος, Τιβέριος, Κλαύδιος, Μάριος,
Ἰγνάτιος, etc., became ᾿Αντώνις, Πετρωνις, Αὐρῆλις, Ἰούλις, Τιβέρις, Κλαύδις,
Μάρις, Ἰγνάτις (then -ης, 298), etc. Again just as the class of feminine
proper names which since A often appeared in the diminutive form -10v,
as : Αρτέμιον, Ἐρώτιον, Καλλίστιον, etc., were shortened to 'Αρτέμιν, Ερῶτιν,
Καλλίστιν, etc. (302), and then, taken in connexion with appellative
nouters (303), affected the whole class of appellative neuters in -ov, as :
ἡμιωβέλιν, μαρτύριν, μελίτιν, στάδιν, ἀμφιδέξιν, κηστρίν, ζωΐδιν, χοιρίδιν, ἐπιστύλιν,
ψυχάριν, etc. (App. iii. 7): in like manner shortened masculine proper
names in -s (from tos) affected corresponding appellatives in -tos, the
more so as, in the course of P-G times, this class of nouns had greatly
increased through the accession from Latin of numerous administrative
and professional torms in ius (chiefly arius, as: τροχαδάριος, χεάριος,
νοτάριος, ταβερνάριος, etc. ep. o11. 012). The direction and extent of this pro-
coss of abbreviation may be illustrated by the following particular cases:
Λ. -άριον-άριον x -arius: -άριος, as : χεράριος, ἀρχάριος, τροχαδάριος, ἀποθηκά-
(1036)
ριος, ἀκτουάριος, δρακωνάριος, καβαλλάριος, ote.
-APHC (298-301), ως : χαρτάρις or -ρης, διφθεράρις,
ψωράρις, ακτουάρις, δρακωνάρις, καβαλλάρις, δαιμονιά-
ρης (Vila SA 13* 1).
-άριν: άριc or
Β. -άκιον-άκιον : -άκιος (curront since 7'), us : Βασιλάκιος, Σταυράκιος, Στεφα-
(1038)
νάκιος, Αρσάκιος, Ἰσάκιος, Σισιννάκιος (identical
with Σισίννιος, as Theoph. 414, 31).
α. - Άκιν : -Άκις or -ÁKHC (298-301; ep. 1041), εις: Θεοδοτάκις οι -κης,
Μαρτινάκης, Μαρινάκης, Βασιλάκης, 'Απλάκης, Ἰωα-
νάκις (Theoph. 385, 10). (Cp. 'Αρσάκης, Ραψάκης,
Ἰωαννάκης | Dig. pussim], Χρυσοϊαννάκης (ib. 6, 415).
So now Αντωνάκης, Νικολάκης, Δημητράκης, etc.
otc. (with the by-form -άκος [ep. 1040], ως :
Ἰαννάκος oι Γιαννάκος, Θοδωράκος, Δημητράκος).
b. -άTCION: -átcioc (i.o. -ucio), roduced to—
c. - ATCIN : -άτοις or -ATCH (298-301), fem. Arca,us : Χορτάτσης, κυράτσα,
Φαιδροκάτσα.
Cp. English Bat, Gab, Gus, Fred, Mat, Nell, Put, Phil, Sam, Tim, Tom, Val, Will.
293
1040-1041.]
DIMINUTIVES.
C. -ίκιον -ίκιον : -ίκιος, as: ἀπολυτίκιον, λιτανίκιον, ματρωνίκιον (from ἀπολυ-
(1038b)
α. -ίκιν : -ίκια or
b. ITCION : -ίτσιος
τικόν, λιτανικόν, ματρωνικόν), Καισαρίκια (Porph. Cer.
220, 17), συγχαρίκια (Dig. 3, 31).—Μαυρίκιος, Κουρτί
πιος, Πατρίκιος, Οὐρβίκιος, Ουρσάκιος, Σιμπλίκιος,
Σιρίκιος, Σπανίκιος, Ἰωαννίκιος( = Giovannicio, GSpata
108 [A.D. 1141]).
iKHC (298-301), fem. -ίκα, as: Κουρτίκης, Πατρίκης,
Μαρίκα, Αννίκα.
111, us : FTrinch, 194 (+ 1149) πουλαδίτζιον ; 225 († 1167)
πορίτζιον, χωραφίτζια; Dig. 4, 234 & 235 κυδωνίτζια.
c. ITCIN : ίτCC or -ITCHC (298-301), fem. -irca [1], as : FTrinch. r9 (frorg)
Βακαρίτζα (Vaccaritia), besides Βακαριτζιώτης ib.);
551 (+ 1112) κακκαβίτσιν ; 143 (|- 1130) γεφυρίτζι ; Ρrodr.
νινίτσιν, σταυρίτσιν, καλογηρίτσιν, προαστίτσιν,
σπαθίτσιν, καραβίτσιν, καρυδίτσιν, κρομμυδίτσιν,λαχ-
ανίτσιν, etc. ; φακεολίτζιν (Dig. 6,737); Λεστίτζι, Καλα-
μίτσι (places in Bova and Otranto); now κορίτσι-
παπαδίτης (JJejun. 1909 B); υἱοῦ Ἰαννήτζη (FTrinch.
6 [+ 981]), Βασιλίτσης, Ιακωβίτσης (Theoph. Cont.
837, 9); Θεοφυλίτσης, Καμμύτσης, Νικηφορίτσης,
Σκυλίτσης, Διακονίτσης ; Μελεμίτζης (Dig. 6, 427,
etc.), ἀγουρίτσης (Dig. 4, 163 ; 320; 438), κυρίτσης
Τριαδίτσα Ραμιστανίτσα, βαγίτσα (Dig.4,282), ψυχίτζα
(ib. 2, 129. 4, 626 ; 778 ; 808), ὡρίτζα (ib. 4, 542) [2].
D. -ούκιον : -ογκΙοΝ : -ογκιος, then ofkoc, orcoc, as : βαρνούκιος (1040).
(
α. -ΟΫΚΙΝ : -ογκιc or onc, as : παλούκι, σουρτούκης.
b. -οτειν:-οτειc or ofTCHC[1] (298-30r), as : 'Αδρανούτσης Βουσεβούτσης.
1040. The suffix -ούκιος, supported by Italian : -uccio, -uzzo (cp. -τρια, -τρα,
1017, and -άκος
1040, Β, α), has led to N -ούτσος, εις : ᾿Αντρούτσος, Πανούτσος, Νερού-
τσος ; then to the double diminutive adjectivo -ούτσικος, as: σγουρούτζικος (Dig
6, 716), καλούτσικος (also in Bova (Morosi ii. 47) rather good. IStaph. 3 μαυ
ρούτσικα. 45 πουλίτσιν γὰρ ἔνι μικρούτζικον [i]. ib. 52 ὀλιγούτσικον ὀλιγούτσικον.
μικρούτσικος rather small, μεγαλούτσικος rather large, ο]λιγούτσικος ' rather
little' (Prodr. 3, 231), οπτούτσικος sufficiently roasted (Prodr. 3, 177), etc.
t
1041. To the above B-N suffixes we must add nouλos, a both remarkable
and popular diminutive. It appears in our texts ever since the close of T,
and points to ancient πωλος ‘foal, colt,' (Ν πουλάρι, like μουσκάρι, σκου
λήκι, λουρί, etc.), a term which, liko μόσχος, δάμαλις, πύρτις, was occasionally
used also for νεανίας youth (as Eur. Hoc. 144 ; Ph. 947 ; Hipp. 546 ; Anacr.
75). The earliest example of this B-N formation known to mo is Leont.
Noap. V.J. 88, 2 ἀββαδόπουλον ; then Porph. Cer. Adm. 157, 2 & 11
(also Comn. i. 359 ?) ἀρχοντόπουλος; Cedr. ii. 347, 3; 435, 1 κομητόπουλοι.
In M and ospecially N speech it is a very common parallel to (-ários) -ákηs
designating the young one, then the son. During M it was transferred also
to inanimate beings, and so has since become a rogular adjectivo onding:
Σπουλος, Σπουλον, -πούλα (this -πούλα serving also as feminine to -άκης 1040,
Β, α), us : παπαδόπουλος 4 son of a priest, παπαδοπούλα ' daughter of a priest,
[1] In B-M texts often misspelt -itzion, -ítzioc, -itzın, -itzic, -itzhc, -itza,
-ΟΥΤΖΙΝ, ΟΫΤΖΙΟ, -ΟΥΤΖΗΣ, -ΟΥΤΖΙΚΟΣ, -ΟΥΤΖΟΣ,a form apparently suggested
by -izzio, -izza, -uzzo, but misloading, sinco T5 = dz, as r§áμ 'window-glass,' and
τσ =ts, us τσάμι 'pino-tree. (203. 205.)
[2] Among other scholars, O Meyor maintains (Akad. Wiss. Wion exxx [1893]
3) that the N onding -íroa is due to Slav influonco, adding that this is the only
Slav suffix that has been productive in N. But since it made its appearance,
as he admits himself and the above roforonces tostify, first in the Grook of South
Italy (also in Cypros !), and at a time when -ίκιος or -icio hud become itsio, -itso
(-izio, -izo), feminine -itsa-a connexion moreovor corroboratod by the agrooment
of the accent the contontion surely needs more solid proofs, (022 (41.)
294
SUBSTANTIVES FROM ADJECTIVES. [1041-1045.
παπαδόπουλου τέκνον of a priest, Φραγκοποῦλα ‘European girl, Τουρκόπουλα
'young Turks,' ¿pvíðóπovλo” ‘chicken,' youpovvórovλo" 'sucking pig,' etc. ['].
1042. The opposite sense of that expressed by diminutives
is conveyed by the so-called augmentative nicknames formed by
means of the following suffixes:
WN, ovos (ó): yáoтpwv 'pot-bellied,' kepaλwv 'thick-skull.'--Not
common.
-α, aкos (6): σтóμpaέ 'bouncer,' λoúтag 'rich churl.'- Rare.
I-ac, û (ó): payas 'glutton,' 'hog,' kopulâs.—Fairly common.
1043. Of these suffixes, -w" does not survive in N (338 f.), whereas
-âs has a parallel (if not direct survival) in the N augmentative ending
-akas (1039), as: xúpakas ('big stone') 'rock,' xxλakas 'big pebble,'à0pw-
Tukas 'huge man,' Bháorakas 'big sprout.'-As to the perispomenon in -as
(287), it has remained in common use since A times, each succeeding
period having added to its popularity. It is therefore very common now
in N and has a corresponding feminine in -où (1067): P-B Tovarâs
(Antigonos), κερατᾶς, δεικνᾶς, τραχηλας, κεφαλάς, σαλιβαράς, Φωκάς, Γρη-
γορᾶς, Μιχαηλᾶς, Βασιλάς μυξᾶς, κοιλᾶς & κοιλαμᾶς (=γάστρων),
μυτᾶς & μυταρᾶς, ἐ]δοντᾶς, γλωσσᾶς, χερᾶς, φωνιαλάς & φωνακλάς, βρακκάς,
etc.-Ν ἡ φαγοῦ, γλωσσοῦ, μυταροῦ, μυξοῦ, κεφαλού. (Pul. 325 τσαπεροῦ,
326 τὴν ἐμπαλωτοῦν.)
1044. Identical in form, but different in meaning, are the still more
numerous appellatives in -âs current since G, which denote a trade or
profession and have now a feminine in -oû, as: vaλâs (jaλas 151) glass
maker or dealer,' ¿λadâs 'oil merchant,' parâs 'wine merchant,' rрopaτâs
shopherd, ]ψαρᾶς, ἀσβεστᾶς, κτενᾶς, πεταλᾶς ἡ κοσκινού, μυλωνού, μεταξοῦ,
povprapoû, further † kλwooû. In point of fact, these formations correspond in
ineaning to those Greco-Latin appellatives in -ápios (-arius) or -ápis (1040)
from which thoy may proceed by contraction suggested by the preceding
class in -as (ep. B voтápios with N voTapas).- Cp. also 287.
C. FROM ADJECTIVES.
1045. Denoting the QUALITY or abstract nature-
Γ-ία (ἡ): σοφία wisdom, κακία badness, μωρία
1
'folly,' πevia ‘poverty,' pɩdía ' friend- } Very numerous.
ship, artoria 'unfaithfulness'
‡eră (†): àìýle 'truth,' evyéveta 'nobility.'- Numerous.
*LTHC, NTOS (1): veárns youth,' loórns equality.'-Numerous.
I-CÚNH (1): Sikatoσúvn 'justice,' owppoovn 'prudence.'-Numerous.
*-oc, ους (τό): μήκος length, βάρος weight, μέγεθος
1
'size,' yeudos 'lie,' 'fib,' rúxos 'speed.' } Numerous
[ A differont view advanced, for aught I know, first by EASophocles (Gram”.
51 also Lox. 37") and adopted by more recent scholars (GHatzidakis in Пapvaoσús
IZ' 561-574), is that tho ending -Touλos - or as they propose to write Touλλos-
is the Latin pullus. Those authorities however have omittod to adduce parallels
to the offoct that Latin pullus was over used in the above (diminutivo) senso,
and that it was in early B times a term already familiar to the Greek masses
in tho form πούλλος σε ονση πουλλίον, Thoy moreover forget that the word
πῶλος, πωλίων, πωλάριον (e]. also its many compounds), Ν πουλάρι, has been at
all times in popular use, both in a propor and motaphorical (complimontury)
sonse (colt,' thon youth' or 'lad'), and that pullus in Latin meant at all times
chicken and had hardly boen familiar to the Greek masses, when the terms
in quostion were first coined: ἀββαδόπουλος, ἀρχοντόπουλος, κομητόπουλος,
αὐθεντόπουλος, etc.
295
1046-1052.] COMMON ADJECTIVES FROM ADJECTIVES.
1046. Mark that abstract feminines in -ia are paroxytone, and come
mostly from adjectives in -os (2nd declension), whereas abstract feminines
in -eă are proparoxytone, and come mostly from adjoctives in -ns (3rd
declension), as: σοφία from σοφός, κακία from κακός, ἀλήθεια from ἀληθής,
evyéveia from evуevýs. (Cp. 1013.)-For a paroxytone-eía soo 1018 f.
εὐγένεια ευγενής.
1047. All above five suffixes are still preserved in N, the only
difference being that - has generally become oxytone (155, c-d.), and
-της has changed to -τη or 'τητα (338) : φιλιά, κακιά-νεύτη(τα), ὁλότη(τα)
- but αλήθεια-δικαιοσύνη ‘justice, θεωσύνη ‘godliness, ἐλεημοσύνη
'charity,' ayiwoúvn ('sanctity'), 'reverence,'-ßáðos, Bápos, eros, etc.
1048. Another mode of forming abstract feminines from adjectives
is sometimes resorted to by simply using the feminine of the adjective
with recessive accent, as:
(αἴτιος, αἰτία) ἡ αἰτία ' cause
(εχθρός, έχθρα) ή ἔχθρα • hostility
(γαληνός, γαληνή) ή γαλήνη 4 calm
(
(ἀνδρεῖος, ἀνδρεία) ἡ ἀνδρεία ‘bravonoss
(θερμός, θερμή) ἡ θέρμη “heat
(κακός, κακή) ή κάκη budness
1049. So still in N, as: (ζεστός, ζεστή) ζέστη ' hout, (χλωρός, χλωρή)
χλώρη groenness, (ξερός, ξερά & ξερή) ξέρα & ξέρη shore, land, (στεγνός,
στεγνή) στέγνη ' dryness, (φοβερός, φοβερά) φοβέρα ' threatening, (μαδαρός,
μαδαρά) μαδάμα ' mountainous country,' (ψυχρός, ψυχρά) ψύχρα (cold weather,
etc.
>
II. ADJECTIVES.
1050. Adjectives are derived from verbs or substantives (also
from adverbs) and may be divided into common and ethnic.
1050º. From A down to B times, the neuter of any adjective,
especially common, is used as an abstract substantive (cp. 1182), as:
τὸ σῶφρον (sc. εἶναι ?) for σωφροσύνη ' prudence, τὸ ἄνανδρον for ανανδρία
'cowardice,' rò éλeúdepov for eλevepia liberty.' This usage is foreign
to B-N speech, except in a few cases inherited from antiquity, as:
τὸ ἐλεύθερον ‘freedom” (ἐλευθερία, now λευτεριά ' deliverance ').
ຄ. COMMON ADJECTIVES.
1050¹. Common adjectives are formed by means of one of
the following suffixes:
ο-τέος
-Téoc 3 denoting necessity (Latin -ndus): ypanтéоs scribendus, àσкŋ-
Téos to be exercised.'- Fairly common.
- TÓC 3
-TOC 2
denoting possibility or susceptibility (Latin -bilis); also, an
action accomplished, as: óparós 'visible,' duvarós 'possible,'
νοητός conceivable, κινητός ‘movable '-αἱρετός =ᾑρημένος
'—uiperós=ημévos
conquered,' apavoros 'untouched,' ampakтos' undone," ari-
øros ‘unfaithful.'— Very common.
ረ
στος
1051. In P N both those suffixes have lost their verbal force. In
particular -réos is peculiar to A and has hardly outlived that period.
At least neither the NT writers nor their unsophisticated successors
make a use of it, save in the neuter or adverbial form -Téor, and that
very rarely (only once Luke 5, 38 Bλntéov; cp. AButtmann 190); its
work being performed by the more perspicuous and emphatic
analysis: δεῖ, πρέπει, ανάγκη (or χρεία) ἐστί, and the like, with the
infinitive or its analysis by iva (App. vi. 13-18).
1052. Regarding the suffix -ros, two cases are to be distinguished :
as a means of expressing possibility or susceptibility, it appears also in
296
COMMON ADJECTIVES FROM ADJECTIVES. [1052-1058.
P-B compositions, though much more rarely than in A (in NT only
Taonτós Acts 26, 23), its place now being supplied partly by the suffix
Liuos (1054), partly by the finite verb (1837). It is therefore difficult
to ascertain how far the suffix -Tos was current in G-B speech as a rerbal
noun; at all events M-N diction shows no trace of it.-On the other
hand, as an ordinary adjective equivalent to the perfect participle.
passive-accomplished action-it has been at all times in common
use, but since G it has gained a far wider popularity, partly through
the influence of Latin -tus (especially -atus), partly in consequence
of the retreat of the reduplicated participle (736), as well as of the
participle of manner and means (2162). It is therefore now very
common in N speech, as: ἀνοικτός ' open, κλειστός ' closed, διαλεκτός
'picked,' Bparrós 'boiling,' yeλarrós laughing,' xwpioτós separate,'
κρεμαστός hanging, χυτός moulded, cast, σηκωτός carried, βαρβάτος
'not castrated,' yeμatos 'full,' devyâtus 'fugitive,' тpexáros 'running,
μupwdûtos 'fragrant,' apparos 'fresh.' It even appears as an elliptical
neuter substantive, as: rò aveûrov (Orib. i. 435, 6) 'absinthiated wine,'
σukwtóv (SC. ĥπap) 'liver,' kudwvûto" 'quiddany,' Taywró" 'ice cream,' etc.
1053. As a variety of -Tús, the suffix -wrós deserves special mention
here, first because it means supplied with, as: dovтwrús 'dented,' SIKTUWTUS
reticular, θυσανωτός ' with fringus, πτερωτός ' winged,' Ν φουντωτός 4 with
a tassel,' or 'like a tassel,' κаµарштós 'arched';-and then because its
feminine form -WTH appears since G sometimes as an elliptical substantive,
as: ἡ καμηλωτὴ (sc. δορά) 4 coat made of a camel skin, ή μηλωτή coat of
a sheep skin,' Ν ἡ πτερωτή (φτερωτή) 'paddle-wheel, ἡ πινακωτή • a tray
†
with cavities serving as broad-pans.'
1
>
1054. uoc 3 (& 2) denoting a susceptibility (Latin -ndus, English
-ble); also a lasting quality páxuos 'fit for fighting,' yoyos trans-
portable,' édédiµoseatable,' xphoμos 'useful.'- Fairly common.
·N
σ
>
1055. So too in P-N: пpágiµos that can be collected,' #λevoμos ‘navig-
able, ἑορτάσιμος fustal, κλόπιμος stolen, Ν φα(γ)ώσιμος 'catable, χρήσιμος
respectable, φρόνιμος, γνώριμος, ὄψιμος • late, πρώϊμος ' early, etc.
1056. By superadding to us the onding -atos (1081 f.), an amplified
form -μaîos is obtained, especially in P-N, denoting a lasting quality, as:
Kλоmiµãîos stolen,' vroßoxipaîos 'supposititious,' èmorodiµaïos 'epistolar,
úvade¿iµaîos, ¿¿§opiσipaîos. In N this ending naturally appears as a con-
tractod oxytone -ipaiós [-quós] (1082), as: pavnõiµaiós (-µós) ' prominent,'
άпоррiğiμaιós 'abjoct,' 'despicable,' pilipaiós rooted.'
1057. Denoting a CHARACTER or feature-
I-úc 3: dús 'sweet,' Bapús 'heavy,' raxús 'swift.'- Common.
-Nóc 3: Selvós 'formidable,' ikavós sufficient,' σeμvós 'venerable,'
opevós 'mountainous,' Taπewvós 'low.'-Very common.
L
"
1
-λός 3 : καλός beautiful, δειλός timorous, σιγηλός ' silent, ὑψηλός
'high,' àπaλós ‘soft,' maxvdás rather thick.'—Very common.
Ιερός 3 : ἐχθρός hostile, ψυχρός cold, φανερός manifest, ἐχυρός
'fortified,' Avrnpós grievous,' Tovηpós bad,' poovepós invidious.'-
Very common.
เ
HC 2: ψευδής false, λυσιτελής ‘profitable, πλήρης full, ἀήθης
'unwont,' euyeuns 'noble,' duoruxýs 'unhappy.'-Very common.
1058. The four suffixes -ús, -vós, -λós, -pós, are still fully preserved
in N, as yλukús 'sweet, Bapus 'heavy,' Taπevés modest,' orevÓS
· narrow, σκοτεινός dark, ύ] ψηλός high, χαμηλός low, δροσερός
• fresh,' kaµarepús' cultivated,' 'tame,' porepós 'light,' nevexpós 'poor';
297
1058-1067.] COMMON ADJECTIVES FROM ADJECTIVES.
while -ýs, owing to its inconvenient inflection on the one hand,
and its identification with substantives in -ŋs on the other, has been
changed to -os, as : ἀκριβός, ψευδός, ἀληθινός, ἄνηθος (cp. 430. 439 f. 1149).
= μικ
1059. The suffix -úλos deserves especial notice here, because such ancient
diminutive adjectives as: maxvλós rather thick,' μkkúλos rather small,'
'small and dear,' Spiμúλos rather sharp,' taken in conjunction with
Latin diminutives in -ulus, have sorved as patterns for a whole class of N
diminutive formations in -ουλός, as : παχουλός = παχυλός, μικρουλός
κύλος, μακρουλός largish, βαθουλός rather deep,' vepovλós 'rathor
watery,' etc. Furthermore these adjectives, taken in conjunction with
Italian -ullo, gave rise to a parallel class of diminutive nouns in -ouλns,
fom. -oûλa, as: & μupovλns, † μikроûλа 'small and pretty,' 'darling'; &
κοντούλης, ἡ κοντούλα • rather short'; δ κυρούλης ' (grand) papa, ἡ κυροῦλα
(grand) mamma' ; ὁ Κυριακούλης ( dear Κυριακος, ἡ Κυριακούλα dear Κυριακή,
ὁ καψούλης, ἡ καψοῦλα poor thing, περδικούλα, καρδούλα (in Bova GMorosi
ii. 42), etc.-In all these formations the ponult complex -ov- is unmistak-
ably Latin, while the ending and the accent are decidedly Greek.
δ
1060. Denoting the MATERIAL (μETоvoiασTIKά)-
t
°(-os) -oûc 3: Xpvooûs 'golden,' ȧpyupoûs 'of silver,' épeoûs 'woollen.'
-Fairly uncommon.
INOC 3 úλwos 'wooden,' Xieuvos 'of stone.'- Very common.
1061. The suffix wos still fully survives in N, as: Téтpivos of stone,'
Fúλivos' wooden,' Téтowos' of leather'-but since I appears often in the
modification -éivos (now commonly pronounced -évios), as: OтUппÉÏVOS
στυππέϊνος
(Phryn.), Teтotivos (Porph. Cor. 670, 15), σidepéïvos, polißéïvos (now com-
moner σidepévios, poλißévios), etc.-As to -(cos) -oûs see 320 f.
1062. Denoting TIME: -INÓC 3: koπepivós' evening-,' VUKTE-
pivós 'night-,' capivós 'spring-.'-Very common.
ρινός
VUKTE
1063. So still in N, as: vukтepivós 'night-,' onμepivós 'to-day's,' kalnμepivós
'every-day,' ¿λλot(eo)wbs ‘of former times,' repvovós last year's,' TaXIVÚS
'to-morrow's,' тaxuтepiós 'morning-,' aλokaιpivós 'summer-.'
1064. Denoting FULNESS or ABUNDANCE—
เ
LEIC 3: IXOUGELs full of fish,' iλnes 'woody,' xapies 'graceful,'
Ζεις ἰχθυόεις
ȧveμóels 'windy.'-Not common. (1067.)
°-άdнс 2: Tεтрoons 'rocky,' Onpiwdns 'full of beasts,' 'beastly,'
-ώδης πετρώδης θηριώδης
evádŋs 'fragrant,' Avoσódns 'raging.'-Common.
1065. The suffix -woŋs denotes also similarity, as: oiλnvádŋs 'Silen-like,'
opniwons 'wasp-like.'
1066. Both those suffixes (Leis & -wons) have become extinct in N, in
consequence of their inconvenient inflection (439 f. 451 f. 1058).
1067. Preceded by -o-, the suffix -es becomes -óes and admits
of contraction to -ous, as: μελιτύεις, μελιτούς, μελιτοῦν, μελιτοῦσσα
'melliferous.' The feminine form -ovoga, owing to its convenient
inflection (1st declension), maintained itself through P-B times,
particularly as an elliptical substantive, as: µedirovoσa [sc. (úμn],
οἰνοῦσσα, Τειχιοῦσ(σ)α, Ερμιονοῦσσα, Αργεννοῦσσαι (cp. αἰθαλοῦσσα, πτε-
povoσa, Kühner-Blass i. 529 f.), and still survives in a few N nouns,
as: Podovora, 'A[v]¤ovo(σ)a, cp. Вpwµovo(o)a, ‘a stinking insect,'
Ροδούσσα,
also 'ladybird,' λexovo (σ)a, πerovo (o)a 'flying.' Whether this -ovo (o)a
is the lineal parent of the rather common N -où (1043), remains still
to be investigated.
298
ETHNIC ADJECTIVES FROM ADJECTIVES. [1068–1077.
1068. Denoting a PECULIARITY or APPURTENANCE—
6
*-ικός 3: ἱππικός ‘equestrian, κωμικός ‘comic, τραγικός tragic,
πολεμικός ' hostile, πολιτικός ' civil, βασιλικός ‘royal, μουσικός of the
'
Muses,' musical.'- Very common. (1070.)
1
1069. The feminine ending - is often used elliptically (for -ɩký
TÉXVn) to denote an art, profession or trade (thus corresponding to
its English progeny -ic or -ics), as: μovoký (sc. тéxvn) 'music,' ý
ῥητορική rhetoric, ή ιατρική ' medicine, γυμναστική gymnastics.
1
?
1
1070. So still in N, as: Toλeμkós 'warlike,' adeppikós brotherly,'
quirós 'friendly,' Turpixós 'paternal,' vxikós concerning the soul,'
νηστικός ‘fasting, νυκτικός ‘night-, etc.ἡ βοσκική (sc. τέχνη or
ἐπιστήμη) ‘the trade of a shepherd, ἡ ψαρική or ψαρευτική (=αλιευτική)
'fishing,' koλoyepiký monasticism,' etc.
C
"
ή
1071. In N the neuter plural -Tucá (rarely singular -Tɩkó”), which comes
from -τns, often denotes the fee for somo service, as: τà åλeotiká ‘fee for
-της,
grinding,' тà πλvoтikά' washing money,' rd σkapтɩká 'digging money.'
1071". For the proparoxytone suffix Lukos see 1077.
,
1072. -10c 3 (which, when preceded by a e o w, either becomes -aíos,
-elos, -olos, -wos respectively; cp. 1081), as: ovpúvios 'heavenly,' πλoú-
σrios 'rich,' avaykaios 'necessary,' oπovdutos 'eager,' oikeios 'domestic,'
Barileos 'royal,' less commonly aidoîos 'venerable,' Tатрos 'paternal,'
éos 'morning-,' 'casterly,' apкros northerly';—or drops i and thus
leads to the endings -uos, -eos, -oos [-ous], -wos [200]).— Very numerous.
>
1073. This suffix is still preserved in N, and that in all its A varieties
except -os. However, it is less common in present speech than
in A, and usually undergoes synizesis (155, c), as: aypios wild,' a&ios
capable, δεξιός ' right, πλούσιος rich, ὡραῖος beautiful (also ὥραιος,
and always ravopaios 'very beautiful,' 1134), àpatós 'thin,' 'rare,
παλαιός Gold, βέβαιος 'sure, δίκαιος 'just, ὅμοιος similar, καθάριος
'pure,' epíogios abundant,' koúdios 'empty,' yaλáčios 'blue.'
L
?
1
1074. 4μων, ΜΟΝ : τλήμων ‘suffering, μνήμων mindful, ἐπιλήσμων
forgetful.'-Rare.
1074. As an adjectival suffix, this item is extinct in N. Cp. 469 f.
b. ETHNIC ADJECTIVES.
1075. ETIINIC or gentile adjectives aro derived from ethnic
substantives (1030). They are formed by means of one of
the following suffixes-
1076. -κός (-ικός, -ακός) 3 : Λακωνικός, Περσικός, Κορινθιακός, Κρητικός,
Θηβαϊκός, Ευβοϊκός, Σπαρτιατικός, Πλαταϊκός.-Very numerous.
1077. In this oxytone form, -ikós is no longer current in N[Kpytɩkós,
Τηνιακός etc. aure rather substantives], popular speech having
substituted for it, since B times, a proparoxytone form kos derived
from the kindred ethnic substantives (1030), as (pvpvaiòs) Eµvp-
ναίικος, (Σιφναιός) Σιφναίικος, (Ρωμαιος) Ρωμαίικος, Τούρκικος, Αρβανίτικος,
Μωραΐτικος, Πολίτικος, Βλάχικος, Φράγκικος, etc. This phenomenon
points to the influence of Latino-Italian 4icus, Lico (cp. Porph. Adm.
72, 2 Пúpdikos, if correctly accented), and has attracted, since
299
1077-1088.] VERBS DERIVED FROM NOUNS.
M, also a number of common adjectives, as: cúrikos (=↓evdýs),
ψευδής),
yépɩkos ‘old,' véikos 'young,' 'new,' avrpiorikos 'manly,' 'brave,' тpa-
yi(o)TIKOS ‘of a buck,' σkvλí(o)TIKOS 'canine,' etc.
1078. *-Νός (-Ιανός, -ηνός) 3 : Ασιανός, Σαρδιανός, 'Αγκυρανός, Κυζικηνός.
Common.
1079. So too in N, as : Ψαριανός, Σφακιανός, Ανωγειανός (seo 1o31, 2f.).
1080. *-ĪNOC 3 (1031, 2f.): Λεοντίνος, Ακραγαντίνος, Ταραντίνος,
᾿Αλεξανδρίνος, Βυζαντίνος, Μεταποντίνος. In N it is preserved only in
substantives (1031, 5), while the corresponding adjectival suffix is
either -ινός 3 (1031, 3) or -ίνικος (1977), as: Πατρινός, Καστρινός, ᾿Αλε-
ξαντρινός, Τριεστίνικος, Ναπολιτάνικος.
1081. *-10c 3 (used also as substantive 1030) : Κορίνθιος, Σαλαμίνιος.
When preceded by a ew, -tos becomes -aios -elos -îos -os (1072),
ας : 'Αθηναίος, Θηβαίος, Λαρισαίος, Κερκυραίος, Μυτιληναίος, 'Αργείος,
Ke-îos, (Xilos) Xios, Koos.-Very common.
1082. This suffix is still preserved in N, but only in the variety
-aîos which properly applies to substantives (1030). It is now
commonly contracted to augs or -ós (155, c), and has even succeeded,
owing to its frequency since ancient times, in attracting adjectives
from other classes, including appellatives (cp. 1056), as: Muriλnraiós,
Σμυρναιός, Σαλονικεύς (= Θεσσαλονικεύς 126), Σιφναιός.
III. VERBS.
1083. Verbs, as appearing in the present tense, are derived
either from nouns (denominative), or from verbs (postverbal),
sometimes also from adverbs. (1008.)
a. FROM NOUNS.
1084. Denominative verbs are formed by means of one of the
following suffixes, synoptically grouped according to their
meaning:
1085. 1. Donoting an ACTION or CONDITION (transitive
or intransitive)—--
I-άw: raw honour,' Bodo 'shout,' Búw am in the prime of
τιμάω βοάω
ἡβάω
youth,' airioμm 'accuse,' paoúopμm 'chew.'-Numerous.
1086. This suffix not only survives in N, but has even attained
a very wide extension (854 f.), as : dyɑπúw 'like,' 'love,' yevvúw ‘bear,'
κυβερνάω ' govern, βροντάω ' thunder. For P-N examples see 854.
For middle forms see 1000 ff.
1087. 2. Denoting mostly a BEING of what is implied by
the stem, sometimes also an action—
'
U
-έω: φιλέω am a φίλος (friend), στρατηγέω am a στρατηγός
'am
(general), command,' euruxéo am curux's (happy).'—Very numerous.
*-εύω : βασιλεύω ' am βασιλεύς (king), reign, δουλεύω am δοῦλος
(slave),' Taideúw 'educate,' Oepaevo 'attend to.'-Very numerous.
1088. Both those suffixes obtain also in N, but éw has considerably
retreated before -áw (854 f.), while-cúw appears also in the by-form -eúy∞ (861),
as: θαρρέω ' believe, φιλέω ‘kiss, καλέω ‘invite, βασιλεύω set (of stars),
300
VERBS DERIVED FROM VERBS. [1088-1097.
Souλcúw 'serve,' 'work'—but Boŋláw 'help,' woλeμáw 'fight,' dovλeú(y)∞,
δουλεύω
βασιλεύ(γ)ω.
1089. 3º. Denoting a CAUSING or MAKING (causative
verbs)—
*-ów: dovλów ('make a slave of ') ‘enslave,' dŋλów (‘make manifest')
'declare,' xpvoów ('make golden') 'gild,' (ŋµów 'punish.'--Common.
* αίνω: θερμαίνω ‘make warm, warm,' koiλaivo 'hollow out,'
onμaivo 'signify.'- Common.
2
*-únw: Bapúvw 'burden,' ýdúvw 'sweeten,' ¿§úvw 'sharpen.'- Common.
1090. 3³. Of these three suffixes -aivo and -úvo still survive in N,
-aivo having even gained ascendency over -úvo (900 ff.).-On the other
hand, -ów has been changed to -wvw (775. 853).
1091. 4". Denoting a FURNISHING WITII; also the practice
of the function implied in the noun-
1
>
*-άζω: ονομάζω 'name, παρασκευάζω 'prepare, δικάζω 'judge, έργα -
Coμai 'work.'-Numerous.
า
*-ίζω: ὁπλίζω ‘arm, πλουτίζω ‘enrich, μακαρίζω deem happy,
Amico hope,' xapitopai gratify.'-Very numerous.
1092. Annoxed to proper names and ethnics, the above suffixes denote an
imitator of or sympathizer with the person or nation implied in the noun
(1093), as: Swpiάsw 'imitate the Dorians,' piλimmíjw ‘sido with Philip,'
Eλλŋvíça imitate the Greeks,'
1
1093. 4. Both suffixes still fully survive in N, as: 6]poiáłw 're-
semble, κτίζω build, γνωρίζω ‘know, μαυρίζω ' make black, χαρίζω
'make a present of' (cp. 1098). But they are never annexed to
proper names and ethnics in the sense of 1092.
b. FROM VERBS (also adverbs).
1094. Verbs are formed from primitive verbs (also from
adverbs) by means of one of the following suffixes-
1095. 1. Donoting a STRENGTHENING or REPETITION
of the primitive notion and called intensive or frequentutive
respectively-
ριπτάζω
I-ázw: pinтá(w 'toss,' 'jerk,' orevito 'groan,' 'moan.'-Common.
-ízw: aiti(w 'beg,' wori(w 'push to and fro, oiuw lament.'
Very common.
ω
‡-úzw: épπú(w 'crawl about,' Baûłw ‘bark.'—Uncommon.
1096. All these three suffixes are still common in N, but charac-
terize also inceptive verbs (868-870. 1097 f.), as: kpiw (from κрù) 'crow,'
pwráca 'shout out,' Spálo become thirsty,' ownúgw become silent,'
ayaníto become foud of,' «pariçw ‘keep back,' dakpúćw‘shed tears,'
γαυγύζω bark.
W
1097. Denoting the INCEPTION of an action or condition
(inceptive or inchoative verbs); often also acting as mere causatives
or intensives (1089)-
-ckw: ynpáσkw senesco, grow old,' ¡ßáσкw pubesco, ‘attain man-
hood,' μelúσкw 'intoxicate,' yevelúσko 'get a beard.'- Fairly common.
301
1098-1102b.
DERIVATION OF ADVERBS.
1098. With the exception of a fow specimens, as: xáσк 'gape,' тáoкш
(i.e. πάσχω 177) ‘endeavour, βρίσκω (i.Θ. εὑρίσκω 723) ‘find, πρήσκω 'swell,
'inflamo,' Bbow 'pasture,'-the above suffix has become extinct in N, its
incoptive, causative, or intensivo function having been taken up by -¿w
(867 ff. 880). It is true that -ow is now common in several chiofly northern
dialects (Pontos, Cappadocia, Cypros, Thrace, Macedonia, Thessaly, cp.
GHatzidakis 135), as : μνίσκω οι μνήσκω (μνέσκω) remain, βαρίσκω ' hurt';
particularly in the middle and imperfect form (-σкоμаι, -σкоV
-oka; ep. GHatzidakis 415 & 417)—a circumstance which has led somo
scholars to take it for an Ionic remnant-but before connecting it with
classical Greek, we should ascertain whether foreign influence (particu-
larly Italian -sco) has been or not at work.
-σκον or
1099. Denoting a DESIRE for action (desiderative verbs)—
°-ceiw: todeµnoeiw, yeλaoeiw 'wish to fight, to laugh.'-Uncommon ['].
°-1άw: σтpaτnуiáw, kλavoráw 'wish to command, to weep.'-Rare.
1100. The suffix -w points also to a bodily or mental affection, as:
¿¿ðaλμáw 'have sore oyes,' onλnviáo 'am splenetic.'
1101. Neither -oeiw nor -iáw can be traced in N, their place having been
taken (and that probably since H timos) either by their paraphraso by
means of θέλω (βούλομαι) να, as : θέλω (ζητῶς νὰ γελάσω κλάψω, or by the
ordinary middle form, as : χέζομαι = 4 χεζητιάω, κατουρειοῦμαι = 4 οὐρητιάω.
IV.
ADVERBS.
1102. Adverbs are formed from adjectives, less frequently
from substantives and verbs, by means of one of the following
suffixes. (See also 523.)
a. FROM ADJECTIVES.
*-wc, N-a, for which see 516-522b.
Kus for which see 648-652.
b. FROM SUBSTANTIVES AND VERBS.
"
-δόν : ἀγεληδόν ' in focks, διακριδόν ' separately, ἀναφανδόν ' openly.
¿SнN: σжopádny 'here and there,' Búdny step by step.'
° τί: νεωστί ' recently,” ὀνομαστί ‘by name, αμαχητί ' without striking
a blow,' Alodiorí 'in Acolic."
°-cí: navdnμei 'in a body,' vηovel 'with impunity.'
°-ΘΕΝ
°-01, -CI, -1
°-de, -ce, -ze
sce 434 f.
1102". To the N adverbs of manner in -a, treated in 522 f., we may add
hore the participial suffix -ovra(s), current since T timos (823). It first
appears in the form orra, then takes final -s and bocomos -ovras, and
its prosorvation in N is due to the parallel use of tho Italian gorundive
(-ante, -ente, as parlante, erodente). This adverbial suffix is now added
chiefly to the present stem of verbs and donotes manner, loss commonly
time (synchronous action) and thus corresponds to the Romanic (and English)
gordive, as: ἔφυγε τρέχοντας “ho wont of running, ἐσηκώθηκε φωνάζοντας
The got up shricking; πηδῶντας, περιπατῶντας, θωρῶντας, βλέποντας, θέλοντας
ho
kai µò éλovтas, 'willy nilly.'-For T-M examples soo 823.
[ Cp. Mouris 189 κνησείειν Αττικῶς, κνηστικῶς ἔχειν Ἑλληνικῶς.
302
COMPOSITION.—FIRST CONSTITUENT. [1103–1106.
B.
COMPOSITION.
1103. Composition is the blending together of two separate
words which otherwise would stand to each other in the syn-
tactical relation of either subordination (dependence), or co-ordi-
nation (1702). In the former case, it is called composition proper,
in the latter copulative composition. (Cp. 1110.)
1104. As carly as Homeric times the Greek language possessed a singular
aptness to form compound words, and so relegated to A a very rich and
manifold supply of such complexes, which thus served as patterns for
subsequent formations. Accordingly compound words dating since his-
torical times are, for the most part, analogical productions or unconscious
imitations, similar to those observed in phonopathy (124). That this is
actually the case appears also from the fact that in many instances the
constituent parts, though obsolete or extinct as early as 4, neverthe-
less continued-some continue even to the present day-to serve as
popular prefixes or suffixes for new formations. Thus in A ȧ- or ȧv-, dvo-,
¿pi-, èpi-, vn-, etc. no longer appeared as independent words, nevertheless
they still continued to serve as first constituents for many new formations.
In the same way déµw, néλw, wy, etc. were foreign to ordinary A, yet A oiko-
δόμος, ονειροπολέω, μονώψ, ἀμβλυωπής, εὐωπός, Ν χαρωπός, μικρωπός, μεγαλ-
ωπός, etc. So even to this day: κιτρινωπός, μεγαλωπός, στρογγυλωπός,
βούκολος (4 βουκόλος), τυροκόμος, γεροκομῶ, ἐγγαλυνόμος, συνολόγος,
πουλλολόγος, πετροβολώ, βλαστολογώ, ζευγολάτης, γαϊδουρολάτης, εύψυχος,
ευφάμελος, etc., though όπ-, κολ- οι πολ-, κομέω, νέμω, βάλλω ' throw,
λéyw 'gather,' èλaúvw 'drive,' oúv, have long become extinct.- See also 1110.
I. COMPOSITION PROPER.
1105. A compound word consists of two parts, called compo-
nents or constituents, the second of which contains the principal
idea, while the first generally serves as a qualifying adjunct.
1105". This holds good for N also. IIere, however, the two constituents
in a fow cases appear interchangeable, as: Aaiμórovos and movóλapos 'throat
trouble, ὀμματόπονο & πονόμματος “soro eyes, ο]δοντόπονος & πονόδοντος
toothache, κεφαλόπονος & πονοκέφαλος Ιeadache, ὁ ποδόγυρος & τὸ
το
γυροπόδι (hem (of a skirt), ψωμότυρο οι ψωμοτύρι & τυρόψωμο bread and
cheese, ]ρυζόγαλο & γαλύρυζο) 4 milk rico.
>
A. FIRST CONSTITUENT.
>
1106. The first constituent which is commonly a noun,
rarely a verb, is profixed to the second constituent by moans of
a compositional (thematic, connective) vowel, chiefly o, some-
times also a, H, rarely e, --or none. (See 1110. 1116.)
7
Οι λογογράφος prose writer, οικονόμος manager, φιλότιμος
emulous, pepodpópos 'courier,' §idokтóvos 'slaying with
the sword,' reyouaɣia 'siege,' ix@vodayos 'cating fish,' ow-
ματοφύλαξ bodyguard, λιποταξία desertion, μισόγυνος
hating women, ioópporos balancing
σω
ɑ: ayopɑvóμos 'clerk of the market,' Bißɑypicos' writer of books
н: éxaнßáλos shooting deer,' Xapradнópos torch-bearer'
€: Saké buμos annoying,' exépor ‘sensible, 'apyédaos 'ruler' (1116)
1: TUρíпvous 'fire-breathing,' apxirektor master-builder' (1116)
none: πολυ-τελής ( costly, πολυ-πράγμων • mcddlesome, ναυμαχία sc-
fight.'
303
1107-1113.] FIRST CONSTITUENT OF COMPOUNDS.
,
•
I
•
1107. The compositional -o- is absolute in N (1110), as : Χαροκόπος ‘epi-
curean, ὡρολόγι ‘watch, μωρόπιστος ‘credulous, κακόγνωμος spiteful,
ξενόφιλος hospitablo, κοιλιόδουλος gluttonous, ψωμοζήτης ‘bogging for
broad, νυκτοκόρακας night-rav, κοκκινογένης with a rod beard but
also στεναχωρώ (though commoner στενο-χωρώ) ( forco (ep. 1108).
1108. The compositional vowel is dispensed with in particular
when the first constituent ends in -v, -us, or when it consists of πολύς,
βους, ναῦς, ἥμισυς, also καλός which lust appears then in the com-
parative form καλλι- (though καλο- since G 1133), as: πτολίπορθος 'sack-
ing cities, λεξι-θηρέω ' hunt after words, αστυνόμος (plebeian N στο
νόμος) 'guardian of the city,' ιχθυ-βόλος (beside ιχθυο-βόλος) catching
fish, εὐθύφρων straightminded, γλυκύθυμος good-natured, ἡδύ
φωνος 4 sweet-voiced, βαρύθυμος sullen, ὀξύθυμος ' quick-tempered,
βαθύρριζος ' deep-rooted, πολυ-κέφαλος with many heads, πολύ-λόγος
loquacious, ἡμι-όλιος (half as much again, ἡμι-ωβέλιον ' a half-obol,
καλλί-πας ' with beautiful children';-&-B καλογνώμων ' well-minded,
καλόγηρος (good γέρων '), monk, etc. (1133).
C
1109. Also in this class N follows the general rule (1106 f.), oxcept in the
cuso of πολὺς (μακρύς, raroly βαρύς), where the A practice is still observed,
as: yλvkópwvus 'swoot-voiced' (so even in Caosarius, IMigne 38, 1072),
γλυκόφωνος
πολύ-λογος ( loquacious, πολυ-καιρία (long time, μακρυ-λαίμης (μακρο-λαίμης)
4 with a long throat, μακρυγένης (long-boarded, μακρομάλλης & μακρυμάλλης
with long hair, μακροχέρης & μακρυχέρης ( long-armed, βαροκαρδίζω (βαρυ-
καρδίζω) 4 become despondent.
>
1110. Originally composition was apparently offected by parathesis,
that is by affixing the second constituent directly to the character of the
first. Now as -o- was the commonest charactor owing to its prosence in all
the multitudinous nouns forming the 2nd declension, it soon affected other
classes and gradually bocamo tho normal compositional vowel, to the
restriction of tho remaining a, η, ε, ι. As a consequence, N knows of no
other compositional vowel than -o- (1107) and in some casos -U- (1109),
a result which, however, seems to apply also to G-B speech (cp. 1108. 1133).
1111. As expected, the compositional vowel is suppressed
when the second constituent begins with a sonant, as:
αἰχμάλωτος captive
ἀνδραγαθία “bravery
ψευδ-ενέδρα sham anbuscade
μόν-αρχος ruling alone'
μεγαληγορέω 'vuunt
Cp. νυμ-άρχης
with νομοθέτης
παιδαγωγός
παιδοτρίβης
ψευδώνυμος under a false name
λοχαγός leader of a section
κεφαλ-αλγής ' causing headache’
φιλ-άνθρωπος ‘humano.
σωματέμπορος ταξί-αρχος
σωματοφύλαξ φυσιολόγος.
1112. So too in N with the difference that the phonodynamic
principlo (146-154) is brought to bear upon composition, as : (ξυλο-
άγγουρο) ξυλάγγουρα" kind of cucumber, (παλαιο-άθρωπος) παλαι-
άθρωπος scump, καλοακούω hear well, αγριο-ελαία) αγριο-λαιά wild
olive(-tree).'
1113. Sometimes, however, the compositional vowel is retained
notwithstanding that the second constituent begins with a sonant.
This is particularly the case with ἔπος, εἶδος, ἕρκος (which are be-
lieved to have originally began with F, 11. 209 ff.), and still more with
ἔργον, ἔτως, ἔχω, since these words as second constituents undergo
normal contruction to -ουργ-, -ουτ-, -ουχ- (ε]. 714. 726, 19:
1
φερέοικος ' currying his own house, ἁμαρτο-επής 'orring in speech,
ὀρθο-έπεια ' correctness of diction, μηνοειδής crescent-shaped, θυμο
ειδής high-spirited, πολι-ορκίω besiege, ἀγαθοεργός & αγαθουργός
304
FIRST CONSTITUENT IN COMPOSITION.
[1113–1122.
* doing good, κακο-εργός & κακοῦργος ' doing evil, τριακονταέτης & τρια-
KOVTOŪTIS 'thirty years old,' paßdouxos 'judge,' 'beadle,' dadoûxos ‘torch-
bearer.'
1114. The preceding observations (1113) do not apply to N, save in
a few inherited cases ῥαβδοῦχος, κακοῦργος, καινούργιος (i.Θ. καινουργής).
1115. Sometimes instead of composition we have a merely close union,
under one accent, of the two words which otherwise would stand in
a syntactical relation (syntactical composition), as vewo-oikos (for vnds oikos)
'ship-house,' 'docks,' Пeλoпóv-vnoos (for Héλoños vñσos) 'Pelops' island,'
Peloponnese, δορί-ληπτος (for δορὶ ληπτός) 4 caught by the spear, ναυσί-
πορος 'traversed by ships,' odo-mópos wanderer,' 'traveller.'
1115. This mode of composition is foreign to N. (Cp. KwσтаYTIVÓTOλN,
χεροπιαστός, etc.)
PECULIARITIES OF THE FIRST CONSTITUENT.
1116. When the first constituent is a verb the compositional
vowel -o- is often replaced by—
ε: ἐχέφρων sensible, δακέθυμος heart-vexing, φερέπονος bring
ing toil,' èke-xeɩpía 'armistice' (1106).
ct or 1: λυσιτελέω ' avail,' ' pay,πλης-ίστιος ( filling the sails, πλήξ-ιπ-
πος striking horses, μεμψίμοιρος ' querulous, ῥαψῳδός rhapsodist.
1116b. For P-N see 111O.
1117. When the first constituent is a particle, its connexion
with the second constituent is looser, being effected without
compositional vowel. Such particles are either separable or in-
separable.
A. Separable particles are-
1118. r. Prepositions(137f.) as: προ-βάλλω, Διά-λυσις, ἔκ-παλαι.
1119. So too in N : προ-βαίνω, περι-γελῶ, περί-πλουτος, εγΝ-τεκνος, Ανά
βλεμμα.
ㅠ
​ευ
(
1120. 2. Certain adverbs, viz. e 'well,' Av without,'
ayxi 'near,' aρTɩ 'recently,' Iπáλw ‘again,' mádat 'long since,'
ἄγχι
"Sis 'twice,' rpís 'thrice,' *xauai' on the ground,' and (chiefly
in P-B) °åcí, as:
"
εὐτυχής ‘happy, πλημμελής ( discordant, ἀγχίμαχος ( close fighting,
ἀρτι-θαλής just budding, παλαί-φυτος old-planted, χαμαι-κέρασος
dwarf-cherry,' Sur-púpuoi twenty thousand,' di-σToμos 'two-edged,'
Tр-σKeys 'three-legged,' dei-(wos evergreen,'-P-B det-кívnтos ever-
ἀει-κίνητος
moving,' dec-Táp@evos ever-virgin' (1132).
1121. So too in N, so far as the compounds in question are preserved,
as: eй-коλos 'easy,' di-σтoμos 'two-odged,' трio-κатάратоs thrice-cursed,'
except χαμαι- which has become χαμο- (1110), as : χαμόκλαδο ‘shrub,
χαμομήλι
xaμoμnλi 'camomile.' (Cp. Xаμокоiт@ν CLoemans 91, 30 [II-III+], &
133, 26.)
•
1122. In consequence of the association and affinity, manifested
as early as A, between eu and kaλos on the one hand, and Svo- and
Kakos on the other, not only in meaning but also in composition
[cp. eu- with kaλλt-, and duo- with kako- in lexicon], popular speech
began in G to substitute for ev- (1126) and Svo- the said adjectives,
as more expressive representatives (cp. εὔροος with καλλίρροος, εὔζωνος
305
X
1122-1133.] FIRST CONSTITUENT IN COMPOSITION.
with καλλίζωνος, εὐγνώμων with καλογνώμων, εὖ ποιῶ with καλοποιῶ, εὐτυ
χὴς with καλότυχος, etc. - further Δύσπαρις with Κακοΐλιος, δύσφημος with
κακόφημος, δύστροπος with κακότροπος, δυσειδής with κακοειδής, δύσφρων
with κακόφρων, δυσπρόσωπος with κακοπρόσωπος, δυστυχής with κακότυχος
[Acta Tho. 62, 24], etc.). In process of time, when the identity of
meaning had become complete, ev- and Suo- disappeared altogether
as formative prefixes (cp. 1123), their place having been taken by
kaλo- (1133) and Kako- respectively. Accordingly N prefixes the latter
representatives to any noun or verb, as:
""
καλο-σύβαστος C compliant, καλο-χώνευτος = εύπεπτος, κακο-σύβαστος in-
tractable, κακοχώνευτος = δύσπεπτος, καλοσυβάζομαι ' comply easily with,
καλοπερνῶ ‘live well, κακοπερνῶ live poorly, καλοπλερωτής, κακοπλερωτής
('one who pays regularly, irregularly '), ' good, bad customer,' etc.
?
1123. Another mode of expressing facility or difficulty in composition is ef-
fected in recont N speech by prefixing củkoλo- and dvokoλo- to any adjective
or verb, as eŮKоλоKȧμWтOS 'casily done,' 'fonsible,' dvokoλómaσтos 'difficult to
entch,' EVKOλoπeрvŵ, dvσkоλотeрv@ 'pass with ease, difficulty.' This alternative,
however, rather savours of literary influence, in that N scribos aro anxious to
discriminate between good and easy contained in xaλós, and bad and difficult
contained in kaкós.
1124. B. Inseparable particles are—
°1125. 1. Intensire : åpı-, épı-, za- or da- (from dɩa or dia, 155, a) ‘very,'
-all proper mostly to A poetry and foreign to P- N speech, as: apt-
πрЕлηя 'very conspicuous,' 'magnificent,' èpt-ßâλug 'big-clodded,' ¿á-
KOTOS 'very angry,' dá-σкios 'very shady.'-Uncommon.
1126. 2. Suc- 'difficult to,' 'mis-,' 'un-,' as: duo-róрeuros 'difficult
to pass,' 'impassable,' duo-ruxýs 'unfortunate,' dúo-Ovμos 'despondent,'
dúo-μayos unconquerable.'-Very common.
For P-N see 1122 f.
1127. 3. Hu-(from μovs) 'half,' as: hui-ßporos 'half-eaten,' ¡µí-ovos
('half-ass '), 'mule,' μ-reλns 'half-finished.'- Common.
1128. When movs had become (moos) moós (401), μ- naturally made
room for μισο-, as : μισοφαγωμένος ' half-enten, μισοτελειωμένος = ἡμιτελής,
half-finishod.' Now as the notion of half and middle, then the forms
μισός and μέσος, aro naturally associated, μισο- is very often confounded
with μεσο-, as : μεσο-φαγωμένος, μεσο-τελειωμένος, μισο-, μεσο-γραμμένος “ half-
writton.'
1129. 4. á- or (before a sonant) an- privative, very frequent: 'un-,'
'in-,' '-less,' as: d-dúvaros 'impossible,' "-dikos 'unjust,' a-rais 'childless,'
áv-óμotos unlike,' dv-ýкeσтos 'incurable.'-Most common.
ἄ-κακος
1130. So still in N, as: a-kakos 'guileless,'-douλos 'slothful,' a-yévvnros
‘unborn,” ἄ-πλυτος unwashed, -πάντρευτος ‘unmarried, αντάξιος in-
capable,' av-epyos 'inactive,' 'idle,' a-mаσтрos 'unclean,' etc., etc.
1131. 5. ȧ- collective or intensive: ä-λoxos 'bed-fellow,' à-póos 'col-
lected,' d-revns 'intent.'- Rare.
1132. This profixal &- was apparently oven in A mistakon for a consti-
tuont part and so P-N speech shows no actual trace of it. [Tho N adjec-
tivo -παρθενος for παρθένος is a phonopathic contraction of ἀειπάρθενος
(1120. 150, d), a torm applied chiefly to the Holy Virgin and therefore
familiar to the poople through the church.]
1133. As first constituent of a compound word-
*Καλός appears in the form καλλι-,
Ν καλο- (suggested by κακο-,
1108), as: kaλλívikos 'with glorious victory,' kaλλíkoμos 'beautiful-
306
SECOND CONSTITUENT IN COMPOSITION. [1133–1141.
haired, καλλίρρους beautiful-flowing';-G-N καλοσύμβουλος giving
good advice, καλόχρωος IDamasc. 95, 244 A (IMigne), καλογνώμων (Ν
καλόγνωμος) ‘noble-minded, καλόγηρος οι γερος 'good γέρων, ' monk.
1
t
1134. Πac usually appears in the form nan- (Ρ also παντο-), 25:
Παν-αθήναια, παν-ώλης & πανώλεθρος utterly ruined, all-destructive,
παν-ουργία roguery, πάμ-πολυς (very numerous, παρρησία openness,
πάγκαλος ‘all-beautiful; παντοδύναμος, παντοκράτωρ omnipotent';
Ν παν-ώραιος 'very beautiful.' (1073.)
*1135. ΓΗ appears commonly in the form rew- (but P also γη-), as :
γεωμέτρης ( land-measurer, γεώλοφος (γήλοφος) ‘hillock, γεωργός 'hus-
bandman.'
1136. Κρέας appears in the form κρεο- Ρ κρεω-), as: κρεοφάγος
eating flesh, κρεοκοπέω cut in pieces.
B. SECOND CONSTITUENT.
1137. Generally speaking, in all classes of compounds the
second constituent retains its nature and form when the FIRST
CONSTITUENT is a preposition (cp. 1117f.).
This is moreover the only case of direct composition admitted by
verbs. (Cp. 1154.)
σύμπραξις διάταξις
ἔκ-λυσις ἐπίμετρον δια-γνώμη ἀπο-ρρών σύγγραμμα
πρό-δηλος σύνδουλος ὑπό-λευκος ἐπί-παν πρύ-παλαι ἔκτοτε ἐπι-τροχάδην
ἐκ-βαίνω ἐμβάλλω συν-αγείρω ἀπ-έχω ἀφαιρέω προ-έχω περι-ελαύνω.
1138. In reality this is not composition but juxtaposition or para-
thesis, which syntactically may be compared with toñoclisis (94. 108h.
1110). Hence in archaic Greck the prepositions are generally treated
as adverbs and thus can be separated from their verb (tmesis, ana-
strophe), a disjunction systematically practised also in A Greek in
the case of the augment and reduplication (741).
1139. Analogous, but without historical connexion with this phenomenon.
is tho ocensional adverbial uso in N of μετὰ (sometimes ματά, by assimilation)
and favd in the sonso of avots 'aguin.' This is, howovor, rather rare and pecu-
liar to nor thorn speoch, as: (μετα-είδα, ξανα-εῖδα ' saw again ') εἶδα μετὰ (ματὰ)
οι ξανά, ἦρθα μετὰ (ματα) or ξανά ' camo again.
1140. Very frequently, however, the nature of the preposition
is lost sight of (746. 750 f.) and the compound is shaped after
the analogy of some other formation having as first constituent
an adverbial or other prefix.
Thus-
σύν-, αντί-δικος from δίκη is due to the analogy of ἄδικος.
"1
ἀκρατής
ἐγκρατής
κράτος
ἐπήκοος
ἀκούω
""
περιώνυμος
όνομα
συμπαθής
πάθος
"}
ὑπερ-βαρής
"}
βάρος
""
αμφι-γνοέω
ΓΝΟ
κατηγορέω
>>
ἀγείρω
})
11
αυτήκοος, ἀνήκοος.
ανώνυμος
ἀπαθής
ἀ-βαρής
α-γνοέω
δημηγορέω
1141. Conversely, adverbial and other non-propositional prefixos are
occasionally, since & times, identified with propositions, and thus leave
the second constituont unaffected (parathesis). Examples in 1155.
307
X 2
1142-1148.1
SECOND CONSTITUENT IN COMPOSITION.
1142. Irrespective of the nature of the first constituent, the
initial vowel of the SECOND CONSTITUENT, if metrically short,
is generally formed from the augmented stem, as: σтраT-ŋyós
(ἄγω) general, ὑπήκοος (ἀκούω) obedient, κατ-ήγορος (α-γορεύω)
accuser, ἀν-ώνυμος (όνομα) ' anonymous, ἀν-ώδυνος (ὀδύνη) painless.
So too in N: åpx-nyós 'chiof,' kar-nyopŵ 'blame,' etc.
1143. When the first constituent is not a preposition, the
second constituent is generally liable to some terminal modifi-
cation in order to indicate the gender and nature of the result-
ing compound (cp. 748). In particular-
1144. A. If the second constituent is a substantive the result-
ing compound can be either a fresh substantive or an adjective.
a. It becomes a fresh substantive, in which case it retains also its
former ending, as:
>
↓
ἡμί-ονος ‘mule, ἀκρύ-πολις citadel, πλαγίαυλος (transvorse flute, ἱππό-
δρομος ‘chariot-road, race-course, ἀγριό-χοιρος “wild boar,' λεοντο-κεφαλή
'lion's head,' Yeud-evédpa ' sham ambuscado.'
1145. This class of compounds is not numerous in A, but spreads, in
the course of P times [see dypto- in lexicon, and cp. Phryn. 172 μeσo-
δάκτυλα· ἐναυτίασα τοῦτο ἀκούσας τοὔνομα, λέγομεν (οι λέγωμεν ?) τὰ μέσα
Tŵv daкTúλwv] and eventually appears in N as the most popular group,
ας : ἀντρο-γυναῖκα (ep. 4 γυναικάνηρ) ' masculine woman, ἀνεμόμυλος wind-
mill, μελισσόκηπος ' apiary, ξερό-τοπος dry soil, κεφαλόπονος (CGL 296,
62 Οδοντοπονία) (head-acho, παλαι-άθρωπος (scamp, χιονόνερο snow-
water, μοναχουιός ' only son, ψυχο-παιδι adopted child, κοκκινόχωμα
'red earth,' anavw-yрaµµа 'address' (of a letter), etc. (Cp. 1155.)
"
>
1146. N diminutives in -, when they serve as second constituent, gonerally
assume the onding -o", as (maidi) madaió-maido”, 'naughty child,'' urchin,' (ảπidi)
ἀγρι-άπιδο" ' wild pear,' (ἀγγούρι) ξυλάγγουρο, κρασί) νερό-κρασο".
เ
1147. b. It becomes an adjective. In this case which is by far
commoner, the second constituent undergoes, if necessary, such a
terminal modification as to clearly indicate the gender of the result-
ing adjective. The endings thus resorted to are most commonly -oc
(rarely by-form -ws), very often -нc, sometimes -ws, rarely -wp, -vs,
-is, as:
"
1
-ος (-ως): εὐθύ-δικος (δίκη) ‘just,' -τεκνος (τέκνον) childless, ἄτιμος
(τιμή) dishonoured, ἄ-στομος (στόμα) 'mouthless, ἄν-αιμος bloodless,
μεγαλόψυχος ' magnanimous, κακό-βουλος (βουλή) ill-advised, λεπτό-
γεως (γῆ) of a poor soil, ἀ-γήρως (γῆρας) undecaying.
-Ηε: εὐξήθης (ἦθος) simple-minded, ἀν-ωφελής όφελο) useless,
κακο-σκελής (σκέλος) ‘with bad legs, δυστυχής (τύχη) unfortunate,
a-ndns (dos) 'disagreeable' (1148).
-ων: σώφρων (φρήν) of sound mind, πολυ-πράγμων (πρᾶγμα)
'officious.'
-ωρ (-τὴρ becoming 'τωρ): φιλο-πάτωρ ‘loving his father, ἀ-μήτωρ
'motherless' (1148).
-YC: a-daкpus (dákрv) 'tearless.'
-1: ἄναλκις (ἀλκή) impotent.
So further: άπαις childless, μακρόχειρ long-armed, δί-πους
'biped,' etc.
1148. Compounds in -ns generally have as second constituent a nouter
in -os or an adjectivo in -ús, as: ev-nons Hoos, á-ŋdýs ñdús,—while compounds
in -op have as second constituent a masculine in -hp, as: pλo-пáтwρ пaтhР.
308
SECOND CONSTITUENT IN COMPOSITION.
[1149–1154.
"
,
1149. The above rule 1147 applies substantially to N also, with
this difference that the number of words coming under this head
has been reduced, and that the only endings now admissible are
chiefly -oc (then -Hс as substantive with fem. in -a) (430. 1058), while
-ων, -ωρ, -υς, τις have become extinct (469-475), as: ἄδικος ‘unjust,
-τεκνος “ childless, στρογγυλο-πρόσωπος ‘round-faced, κοντο-γόνατος
* short-legged, μαυρομούστακος * with black moustaches, λαγουδό-καρδος
easily scared, timorous, μονο-κόμματος ‘of one piece, δίπατος ‘of
two stores, τρι-κατάταρτος 'with three masts, εφτάψυχος (with seven
souls) very tenacious,στραβο-πόδης 'with crooked legs, ἱερακο-
μύτης ‘with a roman nose, σφιχτοχέρης close-handed, κοντο-λαίμης
• short-necked, μαυρο-γένης " with a black beard, etc.
"
1150. B. If the second constituent is a verb, or contums
a verbal notion, the resulting compound is a verbal noun,
chiefly adjective, ending mostly in -oc, frequently in -HC, some-
times also in the substantival suffix -nc (-as), rarely in -ξ, as :
1. -oc: ά-τροφος ' unfed, λιθο-βόλος 'throwing stones, εὐθυπόρος
going straight, δύσ-μαχος ' unconquerable, λογο-ποιός prose-writer,
στρατηγός general, ναυπηγός 'ship-builder, ναύαρχος admiral,
υ-βάτης ' seaman.
ναυ-
(
>
1
Η I. So too in N, us : μαυρο-φόρος ' dressed in black, χορτο-λόγος ' gathering
greens, συκο-φάγος fig-eater, oriole, χαρο-κόπος epicurean, κακόβολος
δυσπόρευτος, ὑπνο-μάχος tremendous sleeper.
2. °-HC, -ες : Θεο-φιλής loved by God, εύ-μαθής quick at learning,
ἀ-μαθής ignorant, αὐτάρκης sufficient.
1151. In N this and the preceding group of verbal adjectives (1-2), which
are mostly passive in sense, have become either regular adjectives in
-os, as: ά-βαφος ‘undyed, ἄ-βλαβος ‘uninjured, ἄ-πρεπος ‘unseemly,
ἄμελος & ἀν-άμελος negligent,' κακο-μάθητος difficult to learn' (1122) ;-or,
more commonly, the second constituent has been replaced by the past
participle in -μένος, as: κακο-μαθημένος ‘ill-brod, νεο-φερμένος ‘newly
arrived, ‘new-comer, βαρο-φορτωμένος ‘heavy laden, πολυ-παινεμένος
4 much-praised, μαυρο-φορεμένος dressed in black.
>
1152. c. *-wc (subst.) and rarely °-ac (gen. ov), as : νομοθέτης legis-
lator, οἶνο-πότης wine-drinker, μυρο-πώλης ‘perfumer, γεωμέτρης '80-
meter, κωμάρχης 'chief of a village, burgomaster, ὀρνιθοθήρας fowler.
1152. So too in N, as : νερο-κράτης turn-cock, χαρτο-παίχτης 4 gambler,
κρασο - πιωτής ‘wine-drinker, μαχαιρο - βγάρτης ‘rowdy, κλησ(ι)-άρχης
churchwarden, ἀνεμο-γάμης, peregrino falcon.
-
1153. 3. °-= rarely : βου-πλήξox-goad, κυαμοτρώξ‘bean-eater.
In N extinct. (338.)
1154. It is only from or through the above verbal nouns
(1144-53), either actual or implied, that compound verbs, chiefly
in -έω, and abstract feminines chiefly in -ía (εια from -ης 1046),
can be obtained, as :
ἵππους τρέφω
θεούς σέβομαι
ἱππο-τροφέω
ἱπποτρόφος
θεοσεβής
θεο-εβέω
τηλ μάχομαι
ναυμάχος
ΝΑΥ-Μαχέω
ἱππο-τροφία
θεο-σέβεια
NAY MAXIA
εὖ ἐργάζομαι
εὐεργέτης
ενεργετέω
ЄY-Єprecia
νόμον τίθημι
νομοθέτης
ΝΟΜΟ-θετέω
ΝΟΜΟ-θεσία
πᾶν ἐργάζομαι
παντοῦργος
ΠΑΝ-ΟΥΡΓέω
ΠΑΝ-ουργία.
ὁδὸν πορεύομαι
ὁδοιπόρος
Ολοι-πορέω
Ολοι-πορία
λέξεις θηράω
λεξι-Θήρας
λεξι-θηρέω
λεξι-θηρία
λιπείν τάξιν
λιπο-τάκτης
λιπο-τακτέω
λιπο-ταξία
309
1155-1157.]
COPULATIVE COMPOSITION.
1155. In this particular case (1154), G-N speech shows a signal
departure from A usage. For although in several cases the ancient
pattern is still followed in N, as : πετροβολώ ‘throw stones, χορτο-λογῶ
gather greens, ξυλοκοπώ cut wood, beat,' ἀγκο-μαχῶ 'pant,' ψυχο-
μαχώ 'am dying (though even here the derived verbs end mostly
in -áw 850 & 854)-on the whole G-N treats each constituent as
an independent word, so that the compound appears to form not
synthesis, but parathesis (1138. 1141).
Thus ἀμπελοτέμνω Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 181, 375 & 182, 422 (+78-79),
θρυοκόπτω ib. p. 172, 8; 173, 105; 177, 245. ib. θρυοτίλλω often ;
λειοτρίβεται Alchem. 319, 6;-now μοσχομυρίζω (Dig. 2, 279 μοσχομυρισμένην
1151); καλο-μαθαίνω (= καλά μαθαίνω) & κακο-μαθαίνω (= κακά μαθαίνω) got
spoiled," κακο-γράφω (= κακὰ γράφω) ‘write badly, συχνο-τρώγω (= συχνὰ
τρώγω) 4 eat frequently, στραβο-κυτάζω (= στραβὰ κυτάζω) look askance,
ξενο-δουλεύω (= ξένους δουλεύω) work for other people, etc. So further
substantives in -μα (τό), also -μός (δ), for -σις, as : καλο-μάθημα, κακο-μάθημα
(or - μός) ' getting spoiled, κακό-γραμμα ‘bad writing, συχνο-φάγωμα 4 fre-
quent eating, στραβο-κύταμα, ξενο-δούλεμα, etc.
"
II. COPULATIVE COMPOSITION.
1156. Copulative composition is the combination or union, under
one dominant accent, of two independent words -chiefly nouns
which, considered from a syntactical point of view, would
stand to each other in a paratactic relation (co-ordination) and
be linked by καὶ 'and. This kind of composition which some-
times goes by the name of dvandva, is uncommon in A, but in P
becomes frequent and since T very popular (641. 1193. 1729b f.).
4 κλαυσίγελως, ἰατρό-μαντις, ὀξ-άλμη, πλουθυγίεια, οἰνό-γαλα, ἀνθρωπο-
δαίμων, ἕνδεκα, δώδεκα, δεκαπέντε, γλυκύπικρος, ὀξύ-γλυκυ.
P-G ευρόνοτος, λιβό-νοτος, Κελτ-ίβηρες, πειθ-ανάγκη, φαγησι-πόσια,
αὐξο-μείωσις, νυχθήμερον, ᾠό-γαλα, ῥιγο-πύρετος, ἀρτό-κρεας, ἀρτό-τυρος,
ἰσχαδοκάρυα, μυλο-κυδώνια, ἱστιο-κώπη, κροτο-θόρυβος, ἀριστό-δειπνοι,
γαρ-έλαιον, οἰνό-γαρον, οἰν-έλαιον, υδρ-έλαιον, κηρύ-πισσος, μυρο-πισσό-
κηρος, βατραχο-μυομαχία, μωρό-σοφος, ἀκριβο-δίκαιος, θρασύδειλος, λευκ
έρυθρος, ερυθρόλευκος, λευκό-πυρρος, ὠχρο-μέλας, λευκο-μέλας, μικρό-
κομψος, μικρο-γλάφυρος, ὑψηλο-ταπεινος, etc.
Τ-Ν τὰ ἀνδρόγυνα, γυναικό-παιδα, ποδο-κέφαλα, άξιν-ορύγια, ὑποκαμισο-βράκια,
σιτλο-λέκανα, σελλο-χάλινα Dig. 4, 239; 791; 90I. 6, 555), σελλο-σκαλο-
χάλινα (Corn. Β 2275), χειρό-ψελλα, χαρτο-καλαμάρια, τοξο-φάρετρα ;-ἡ
δοσοληψία, ληψο-δοσία, τετραδο-παρασκευή, γαλεο-μυομαχία, Περσ-αρμενία
(Theoph. 311, 1ο), ανωγο-κατάγεον οἴκημα (FTrinch. II [+rooo]; 25 [tro32],
etc.) ;-μωρο-πλούσιος, μωρο-κακοήθης, λευκο-πόρφυρος, ote.
Ν: ἀντρόγυνο, ρυζόγαλο & γαλό-ρυζο, τετραδο-παρασκο", τὰ λαμπρο-χριστό-
γεννα, τὸ σαββατοκύριακο”, αὐγο-λέμονου, λαδό-ξειδο" & ξειδό-λαδο", σταρο-κρίθι
—τὰ ματόφρυδα, μαχαιροπήρουνα, καρυδό-συκα, αμπελο-χώραφα, κεφαλόποδα,
χερο-πόδαρα, παιδό-γγονα, νερό-λαδα, etc.—Ἠπειρο-θεσσαλία, Μολδοβλαχία
γλυκόξινος, στενό-μακρος, κοντόχοντρος, μαυρο-κόκκινος, κουτο-πόνηρος.
1157. N speech goes still further in this direction and sometimes joins
even two verbs which either by usage or meaning can be associatod
together, as : (περνῶ & διαβαίνω) περνω-διαβαίνω, ἀνεβω-κατεβαίνω, πηγαινοέρ-
χομαι (Chron. Mor. 3741 ὑπεγενοέρχετον), πηαίνω-γιαγέρνω (Corn. Β 348),
ἀνοιγω-σφαλίζω οι -σφαλῶ, στριφω-γυρίζω, κλωθω-γυρίζω, παιζω-γελῶ, πασσ-
αλείφω (i e. πάσσω καὶ ἀλείφω), etc.
310
COPULATIVE COMPOSITION.
[1157b.
as
1157. GMeyer (in KZ xxii 1-31), and with him several other philologists,
deny point-blank the existence of dvandva compounds in ancient Greek with the
possible exception of νυχθήμερον of the NT (2 Cor. 11, 25). They argue that A-P
formations Like κλαυσί γελως, ιατρό-μαντις, ῥιγο-πύρετος, πλουθυγίεια, βατραχο-
μυο-μαχία, οξύ-μελι, πειθ-ανάγκη, ερυθρόλευκος, λευκ-έρυθρος, ερυθρο-μέλας, and
all the rest, denote one resultant or mixture, one intermediate item, not two items.
This argument, however, as well as the subtle interpretations foisted into each
individual case, are far too elaborate and artificial to apply to any actual language
like that spoken by the ancient Greek nation. It is also hard to conceive how a
kλavoi-yeλws can be 'ein lächeln unter thränen' where either constituent points
to a loud expression of feeling: 'crying followed by laughter.' Equally untenable
is the interpretation of ἰατρόμαντις us an ' ἰατρὸς μάντις ; ἰατρὸς ist attributiv
wie etwa Ιατρικός 'instead of the simple and only correct interpretation: a man
who is both ἰατρὸς καὶ μάντις. So too ῥιγο-πύρετος (or -πύρετον) cannot be a mix-
ture, 'ein fieber mit heftigem frostschauer,' since piyos and ruperds never come
simultaneously, but ῥῖγος precedes and πυρετός follows, hence ῥιγο-πύρετος =
ῥίγος καὶ πυρετός. Further ερυθρό-λευκος, ἀκριβο-δίκαιος, etc. do not express one
intermediate quality, but two qualities applying to one item. Nor is βατραχο-
μυομαχία εν μάχη τῶν βατραχομύων or a μυο-μαχία τῶν βατράχων, since this would
be an inconceivable monstrosity, but a μάχη των βατράχων καὶ μυῶν, like πόλεμος
τῶν 'Αθηναίων καὶ Πελοποννησίων.-As a matter of fact, if GMeyer's argumenta-
tion be accepted as correct, we might as well deny altogether the existence of
any dvandva formation in any period of the Greek language, including N speech.
For in this manner even νυχθήμερον might be explained away as a unit, or
one period consisting of a night and a day (νυχθήμερον χρόνον), φαγησιπύσια
'one banquet where people eat and drink,' loxado-xápva 'one mixture of figs
and nuts, γυναικόπαιδα ' one group of women and children (not two separate
groups); ἀμπελο-χώραφα one estate consisting of ἀμπέλια και χωράφια ;
Ηπειρο-Θεσσαλία 'one (or at least conceived as one) administrative district
consisting of 'Ηπειρος and Θεσσαλία, and so on all the rest.
€11
PART THIRD.
SYNTAX.
GENERAL REMARKS.
COLLOCATION OF WORDS.
1158. As nearly all parts of speech are inflected in Greek
(having special endings for each individual case, cp. 32º, 1), and
so of themselves indicate their mutual relation in a sentence,
the syntactical position of words is not tied down to fixed and
definite rules, as is the case with English and other modern
languages (cp. 2034). Therefore a sentence like the father loves
his son may be expressed in Greek, according as the stress lies
on this or that word, by-
ὁ πατὴρ φιλεῖ τὸν υἱόν—or φιλεῖ ὁ πατὴρ τὸν υἱόνοι τὸν υἱὸν φιλεῖ
ὁ πατήρ.-Φιλεῖ ὁ πατὴρ τὸν υἱόν; ὁ πατὴρ φιλεῖ τὸν υἱόν; τὸν υἱὸν φιλεῖ
ὁ πατήρ ;-Cp. Th. 2, 2 ἐπηγάγοντο δὲ τοὺς Θηβαίους καὶ ἀνέῳξαν τὰς πύλας
Πλαταιέων ἄνδρες, Ναυκλείδης καὶ οἱ μετ᾿ αὐτοῦ.
So still in N.
1159. An adjective or participle may refer to a noun either
as an attribute or as a predicate. In the former case it commonly
stands between the noun and its article, if any, and the associa-
tion is direct and close; in the latter it stands after or before
the articular noun (1236) and the association is effected by means
of a copulative verb (elva, etc. 1249) either actually supplied or
understood (1236).
Attributive relation: σοφὸς ἀνὴρ or ἀνὴρ σοφὸς ' a wise man. ὁ σοφὸς ἀνὴρ οι
¿ àvǹp d oopds 'the wise man.' χώρα οἰκουμένη οι (ή) οικουμένη χώρα
'the (an) inhabited land.'
Predicative relation: ὁ ἀνήρ (ἐστι σοφός οι σοφός (ἐστιν ὁ ἀνήρ the man is
wise. ἡ χώρα ἐστιν οἰκουμένη οι οἰκουμένη (ἐστιν ἡ χώρα • the land
is inhabited.'
1159¹. A noun or pronoun is often defined or described by
means of another noun put in the same case without any
connective particle. Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος, ἡμᾶς τοὺς Ἕλληνας.
(1211). This descriptive co-ordination, as well as the noun so
co-ordinated, is called apposition.
I
1160. The subject of a finite verb stands in the nominative
(cp. 1313): KỶpoc &pxe. So still in N.
I
1160. For the subject of the infinitive see 2064
312
VERB OMITTED
[1161-1169.
CONCORD.
The Subject Omitted.
1161. The subject of a finite verb is usually omitted in the
following cases :—
1162. a. When it is a pronoun of the 1st and 2nd person, in
which case it is sufficiently indicated by the ending of the
verb (1158):-ypúpoo 'I write'; orηkas 'thou standest';
ἕστηκας
ȧκоúσαтe 'hear ye.'-So still in N.
I
1163. But it is added whenever an emphasis or antithesis is
implied (ep. 2066): cy τε Ελλην εἰ καὶ ἡμεῖς. ἐγὼ μὲν λέγω, εγ δὲ
Ypapers.-So still in N.
1164. b. When it is implied from the context (cp. 2065):
Xen. An. 1, 4, 5 Κῦρος τὰς ναῦς μετεπέμψατο ὅπως ὁπλίτας ἀποβιβάσειεν
(sc. ὁ Κῦρος). So still in N.
1165. c. When it refers to people generally (cp. 1182, a. 2070),
or when it is impersonal and indeterminate:
φασί 'they say.' εἴρηται ' it has been said. ὀψὲ ἦν τῆς ὥρας it was
late. εὖ ἔχει it is well. δεῖ it must. ἔξεστι ' it is possible.
it is a matter of concern.' kaλws exeɩ 'it is well.'
μέλει
So still in N: eive yλýyopa 'it is (too) early.' paivera 'it appears.'
Xpeɩáčeraι 'it is necessary.'
χρειάζετ
εται
1166. d. When it refers to the state of the weather or to
natural phenomena:
ἐβρόντησε ' it has thundered.
φυσᾷ it is windy.
νει ' it rains.” ἀστράπτει ' it lightens.
So still in N: βρέχει, χιονίζει, βροντα.
1166. Such natural phenomena being regarded as actions of God
(Zeus, eós), the agency was in A occasionally expressed in the form
of subject: Zeỳc vet, 'Zeus rains.'
The Verb Omitted.
1167. Whenever it is not emphasized, the verb of a sentence
is or can be omitted:
a. If it is readily implied from the context, as: éyò μèv týμepov
ἐλήλυθα σὺ δὲ χθὲς (sc. ἐλήλυθας).
b. If it should be the copula éorí, a case very common especially in
proverbial_sayings, then after nouns like ȧváyŋ, &pɑ, and verbals in
-τέον, as : Fur. Οr. 397 σοφόν τοι τὸ σαφές οὐ τὸ μὴ σαφές.
Pl. Rep.
435 C χαλεπὰ τὰ καλά.
1167. So too in P-N, as: NT Rom. 8, 6.- N éyò ĥрða σýµepo” k' čσù
ἐψές. ἄβουλος ὁ νοῦς διπλὸς ὁ κόπος ‘your head will never save your legs.
CONCORD.
1168. A finite verb conforms to its
number: ἡμεῖς ἐπαινοῦμεν ‘we approve.
laughed.'-So still in N.
subject in person and
οὗτος ἐγέλασεν ‘this man
จ
1169. But when the subject is a neuter plural, the verb
usually stands in the singular :
Trag. Frg. ad. 462, 1, Ν τὰ μεγάλα δῶρα τῆς τύχης φόβον ἔχει. ΡΙ.
Alcib. 11 5 Α πάντα τὰ δίκαια καλά ἐCTIN.
313
1170-1176.]
CONCORD OF WORDS.
1170. This peculiarity, however, refers chiefly to A, hence it is
called σχῆμα Αττικόν. Nevertheless it is not rigidly adhered to even
by A writers, as:
Xen. An. I, 7, 17 φανερὰ ἦCAN καὶ ἵππων καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἴχνη πολλά. Th. 5,
62 ἐΓΕΝΟΝΤΟ ἐξ αὐτῶν εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατὸν τάλαντα. Lys. 25, 2 ἃ ὑπὸ τῶν τριά-
κοντα ΓΕΓΕΝΗΝΤΑι τῇ πόλει (Il. Β 135 σπάρτα λέλυνται). CIA ii. 467 (I. B.Ο.),
23 καθὼς ἐπέταΤΤΟΝ αὐτοῖς τὰ ψηφίσματα τῆς βουλῆς. (Cp. Dom. 18, 218.)
N
1171. As a matter of course P writers, except Alticists, follow the com-
mon language which in their time had established a uniform standard of
agreement between subject and verb (1168), and this general norm has
been relegated to N.
1172. In the case of one subject in the dual or two subjects in the
singular, the verb may stand either in the dual or in the plural.
Xen. Mom. I, 2, 14 τὦ ἄνδρε τούτω φύσει φιλοτιμοτάτω πάντων ᾿Αθηναίων
Γενέσθην. Αn. 4, 3, 1ο Αριστῶντι τῷ Ξενοφῶντι προσέτρεχον Δύο ΝEANICκω.
Mem. 1, 2, 33 καλέςANTEC ὅ τε Κριτίας καὶ ὁ Χαρικλῆς τὸν Σωκράτην, τὸν τε
νόμον ἐΔΕΙΚΝΥΤΗΝ αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς νέοις ἀπειπέτην μὴ διαλέγεσθαι.
1173. In the absence of a dual (229. 633. 668), N naturally always uses
the plural.
1174. A collective subject in the singular may have its verb
in the plural:
Th. 1, 20 'Αθηναίων τὸ πλήθος οἴονται Ιππαρχον τύραννον ὄντα ἀπο-
θανεῖν.
So too in PN, as: Evang. Tho. 15, 2 ὄχλος δὲ πολὺς παρειστήκεισαν
ἀκούοντες. Callin. 130, 1 ἡ χώρα φυλάττουσα οὐκ ἐξήρχοντο. So 104, 26.
Apoc. Mar. 119, 26. Ν: ἦρθαν πολὺ λαός, there came crowds.
1175. Two or more subjects connected by kaì 'and,' require
the verb or the predicate (1159) in the plural: Ευρυμέδων καὶ
Σοφοκλῆς ἐστράτεγεαν· ὁ ἀδελφὸς καὶ ὁ φίλος eiciN ἀγαθοί…and
if they are of different persons (1st, 2nd, 3rd), the verb is put
in the predominant person, the 1st taking precedence over the
2nd and the 2nd over the 3rd.
Pl. Theaet. 154 D δεινοί τε καὶ σοφοί ἐγώ τε καὶ σὺ ΗΜΕN. Legg.
888 Β οὐ εγ οὐδὲ οἱ σοὶ φίλοι πρῶτοι ταύτην τὴν ?) δόξαν ἔσχετα.
So still in N: ἐγὼ καὶ σὺ θὰ περιμείνωμε ὀλίγο. σὺ καὶ αὐτὸς ἐφωνάζετε.
1175 b. The place of kai is very rarely taken by μετὰ with genitive or by
some of its synonymous participles (2161 f.), as : Th. 3, 109 Δημοσθένης μετὰ τῶν
ξυστρατήγων Ακαρνάνων επένδονται Μαντινεῦσι. Luc. D. D. 12, · Ρέα
παραλαβοντα καὶ τοὺς Κορύβαντας τὴν Ιδην περιπολογCIN. This construction,
which is common in Latin with cum (as Nep. 19, 2, 2 Demosthenes cum caeteris
in exilium erant expulsi), reappears in G B, though rather as a Latinism,
in that σὺν is mostly used for cum or μετά, as : Callin. 71, 19 δ οὖν Ὑπάτιος
CYN τῷ Τιμοθέῳ ἐπέτειναν τὴν ἄσκησιν. 75, 3 δ κουβικουλάριος εν τῷ
δομεστίκῳ ἐδόΞΑΖΟΝ καὶ ἠσπάζοντο. 69, τι ὁ δὲ Τιμόθεος εν τοῖς ἄλλοις
κλαίοντες ἐζήτογΝ.—Cp. Ν: ὁ Ἰάννης Μὲ τὸν ἥλιο εγΝΩΡΙΖΟΥΝΤΑΝ.
1176. Often, however, the number of the verb is determined by the
nearest or most prominent among the subjects.
Xen. An. 2, 1, 16 cy τε Ελλην εἰ καὶ ἡμεῖς. 7, 7, 16 ἐγώ λέγω καὶ Σεύθης
τὰ αὐτά. Ath. Pol. 1, 2 ᾿Αθήνησι καὶ οἱ πένητες καὶ ὁ δῆμος πλέον ἔχει τῶν
γενναίων καὶ πλουσίων. Dom. 18, 218 οἱ ἐμοὶ πλάνοι καὶ ταλαιπωρίαι καὶ τὰ
πολλὰ ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑΤὰ τοῦτο ἀπειργάσατο.
314
ADJECTIVES, HOW CONSTRUED. [1177-1181b.
1177. Two or more nouns having a common predicate (1159)
require it in the predominant gender, the masculine prevailing
over the feminine, and the feminine over the neuter (cp. 1175):
Aeschin. 2, 118 ἡ τύχη καὶ ὁ Φίλιππος ἦσαν τῶν ἔργων κύριοι.
1177. But in case they only denote things, their common
predicate stands in the neuter :
Xen. Mem. 3, 1, 17 λίθοι τε καὶ πλίνθοι καὶ ξύλα καὶ κέραμοι, ατάκτως
ἐρριμμένα, οὐδὲν χρήσιμά ἐστιν.
So still in N, as : ξύλα καὶ πέτρες ἦσαν ανακατωμένα, though it is
commoner to sum them up by the plural of the neuter adjective ὅλα,
as: αἶγες καὶ χοίροι καὶ ὄρνιθες, ὅλα ἔτρεχαν φοβισμένα.
1178. Masculine and feminine appellatives are often con-
ceived in their generality (as one abstract whole) and thus have
their predicate in the neuter singular.
Pl. Rep. 5, 455 Ε ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἀσθενέστερον γυνὴ ἀνδρός. Xen. Mem.
2, 3, Ι οἱ τοιοῦτοι ἄνθρωποι χρησιμώτερον νομίζουσι χρήματα ἢ ἀδελφούς.
1178. N generally supplies the word πρᾶγμα (also κάτι or κάτι τι),
as: ἡ ἀλήθεια εἶνε καλὸ πρᾶγμα.
1179. A pronominal subject or object agrees in gender and
number with its substantival predicate: ΑΥΤΗ ἄλλη πρόφα-
σις ἦν.
Xen. An. 4, 8, 4 οἶμαι ἐμὴν ταΥΤΗΝ πατρίδα εἶναι. Μem. 1, 2, 42 πάντες
οὗτοι νόμοι εἰσὶν οὓς τὸ πλῆθος συνελθὼν καὶ δοκιμάσαν ἔγραψε φράζον ἅ τε
δεῖ ποιεῖν καὶ ἃ μή. Pl. Phil. 40 Α λόγοι μήν εἰσιν ἐν ἑκάστοις ἡμῶν δ
ἐλπίδας ὀνομάζομεν.
So still in N, as:
ΑΥ̓τή εἶνε ἀνοησία. αὐτὰ εἶνε λόγια τοῦ ἀέρα.
1180. Sometimes the neuter (singular or plural) is used by
way of dissimilation, as in English: Xen. An. 1, 3, 18 ἐγώ γε φημὶ
ταῦτα φλυαρίας είναι. This is always the case in definitions, as : Pl. Men,
71 D τί φῂς ἀρετὴν εἶναι ;
So still in N : αὐτὰ εἶναι ἀνοησίες. τοῦτο φαίνεται ποταμός.
ADJECTIVES.
1181. An adjective or participle, whether serving as an attri-
bute or predicate (1159. 1236), must conform to its substantive
in gender, number, and case:—
Δίκαιος ἀνήρ, καλή γυναίκα, Μέγιστα ἔργα. - ἄνδρας νοῦν ἔχοντας, τέκνων
φιλούντων, ἔργα θαγμαΖΟΜΕΝΑ.
1181. So still in Nas regards (parisyllabic) adjectives, as: καλή κόρη,
Μικρά παιδιά, πολλοὶ ἄνδρες.
1181. But when tho imparisyllabic declension began to retreat from popular
speech (338. 1208. 2166-70), a confusion inevitably followed during tho period of tho
struggle, as : Acta Tho. 8, 11 αἱ δύο χεῖρες σημαίνουσι KHpYCCONTE (PQ). 41, 39
πάντων τῶν ἐπιθυμιών (Ρ). 48, 19 ἐχόντων ψυχῶν. 52, 28 γυναῖκες ΑΝΑΠΕΜ
ΠΟΝΤΕΣ. 66, 17 πάντων γυναικών. 70, 30 πάντων τῶν ἡδονῶν. 72, 15 Μυγδονία
ANACTAC 75, 19 αὐτὴν ἑΠΑΝΙΟΝΤΑ. (Cp. Acta Xath. 84, 14 εὕρομεν τὰς
παρθένους σὺν τῷ νεανίσκῳ ΖΗΤΟΥΝΤΑΙ πλοῖον.) Theophyl. 215, 15 πλήθη εγρ-
ρεγιάντων δυνάμεων. 338, ιι ἐπ' ὄψεσι πάντων εἶναι ΔΟΚΟΥΝΤΩΝ τῶν βασιλικῶν
συμφορῶν.
315
1182-1187.] ADJECTIVES, HOW CONSTRUED.
1182. A substantive qualified by an adjective or participle
is often omitted; the omission then raises the adjective to the
position of a substantive (ep. 1050. 1207). This is the case
notably-
a. When the substantive, if supplied, would generally be the
word man or thing (cp. 1165) :
1
ὁ σοφός a wise man, οἱ σοφοί ' the wise, ὁ πλούσιος ' a rich man, οἱ
πλούσιοι ' the rich, οἱ πολλοί 'the masses, τὸ καλόν ' the beautiful, τὰ
καλά beautiful things, τὸ δίκαιον 'justice, τὸ λεγόμενον (=the thing
said) the common saying, τὰ (i.Θ. πράγματα) τῆς πόλεως the affairs of
the city. Th. 3, 82, 4 τὸ σῶφροΝ ΤΟΥ ΑΝΑΝΔΡΟΥ πρόσχημα. (Cp. 1207.)
So still in N (but see 1225 ff.).
1
b. When it serves as regular accompaniment of the adjective,
and so can be readily supplied from the nature of the case, as:
ἡ δεξιά (sc. χείρ) the right hand, ἡ ἀριστερά ' the left hand, ἡ μουσική,
γραμματική, ῥητορική (sc. τέχνη, 1069), ἡ οἰκουμένη (sc. γῆ), ἡ ἐπιοῦσα (sc.
ἡμέρα), ἡ ὑστεραία, ἡ πεπρωμένη (sc. μοίρα), ἡ εὐθεῖα (sc. ὁδός), etc.
<
ή
So in N : ἡ δεξιά, ἡ οἰκουμένη “the world, ἡ δευτέρα, τρίτη, ταχινή (sc.
ἡμέρα)ἡ βοσκική, ψαρική (sc. τέχνη οι ἐπιστήμη), etc.
1183. Designations of place, time, manner, sequence, and frame of
mind, which English expresses mostly by means of adverbial turns,
are usually expressed in Greek by predicative adjectives (1159) agree-
ing in every point with their respective nouns (1181). Among such
predicative adjectives temporal numerals ending in -alos (1072) are
the commonest :
Xen. An. 5, 5, 21 σκηνοῦμεν Υπαίθριοι ἐν τῇ τάξει. Th. 2, 49 διεφθείροντο
οἱ πλείους ἐΝΑΤΑΙΟΙ καὶ ἑΒΔΟΜΑῖοι ὑπὸ τοῦ ἐντὸς καύματος. 1, 63, 3 roùs ve-
κροὺς Υποεπόνλογα ἀπέδοσαν. Χen. Αn. 4, 1, 1ο κατέβαινον εἰς τὰς κώμας ἤδη
σκοταίοι. 1, 2, 25. 6, 2, 4. 6, 3, 24 ÄCMENOI εἶδον ἀλλήλους καὶ ἠσπάζοντο
ὥσπερ ἀδελφούς.
1184. N also uses these turns, but less frequently, and hardly in
designations of place : ἔρχεται πρώτος, πεζός, βιαστικός, etc.
1185. Neuter adjectives, particularly in the plural, are often
used as adverbs, especially in connexion with intransitive and
passive verbs (1 266 f.) :—
άλλομαι Υψηλά, θαυμαστὴ ἐκπλήττομαι. Μέρα (ΟΞΥ) φθέγγομαι, βοῶ, λέγω.
ΗΔΥ (κακόν) όζειν, μέγα φρονείν.
1186. In the course of / times this usage met with ever increasing
popularity in the common language, and eventually ended by becom-
ing the regular mode of forming adverbs of manner in N. See 522.
1187. Comparative adjectives and adverbs require, for the
second member of the comparison, either the particle or
a genitive (1328; cp. 1615). The former expedient is neces-
sarily resorted to when the second member must stand in the
nominative or accusative (cp. also 1189):
ห
μείζων εἶ καὶ πλείω ἔχεις ἢ ἐγώ. τίνι ἂν μᾶλλον πιστεύσαιμι ἢ σοί ; μείζων
ἐμοῖ ἐστιν ἐκεῖνος. Pl. Rep. 1, 338 D τοῦτο καὶ ἡμῖν τοῖς ἥττοσιν ἐκείνου
ξυμφέρον. Th. 1, 8 ἔξεστιν ἡμῖν μᾶλλον ἑτέρων καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν βουλεύειν.
7, 77 ἤδη τινὲς καὶ ἐκ δεινοτέρων ἢ τοιῶνδε ἐσώθησαν.
Η
316
ADJECTIVES—ARTICLE.
[1188-1195.
1188. Instead of or its equivalent genitive, a preposition (such as
#apá, 644 & 1615 ff; dvri, 1501; πрó, 1647) is sometimes used. This
practice has gradually resulted in establishing in N Tapà as the
regular means of expressing the second member of the comparison,
especially between two clauses (1615 ff. 1734).
1189. When two properties referring to the person or thing
are compared with each other (rather than), they both stand
in the comparative :-
ท
H
στρаτηуοì пλeίONEC BEATIONEC, 'rather numerous than good.' CYNTO-
Μώτερον ή σαφέστερον διαλεχθῆναι.
મ
1190. Sometimes the comparative denotes simply a relatively
or somewhat high degree (rather) :—Th. 8, 84 aỶoadécтepón tɩ ảño-
κρίνεσθαι.
1191. The superlative denotes the highest degree either among
a class of more than three representatives, or absolutely (490).
In the former case it is usually preceded by the article (the most
-'relative superlative') and followed by a partitive genitive
(1307 f.); in the latter, it stands without article (most or very
absolute or elative superlative' 490):
ὁ σοφώτατος τῶν Ἑλλήνων, the wisest of the Greeks. Κῦρος φιλομά
θέστατος ἦν. κάλλιστα λέγεις.
So still in N.
1192. Since G times the elative superlative, especially of adverbs,
is often formed, in less cultivated diction, by repeating the positive
with or without intervening κai (513. 521), as:
¿ µéyiotos). For more illus-
CIG 4697, 19 ‘Epµñs d mésac kai mésac (= d µéylOTOS).
trations see 513 & 521.
1193. This is commoner in N, and that without raí (cp. 1156): поλλa'
πολλά - πλεῖστα. οἱ Μεγάλοι Μεγάλοι = μέγιστοι.
1194. The elative superlative is raised to the highest pos-
sible degree by placing before it ós, or, , also ofos, and sometimes
ἐν τοῖς. This peculiarity seems to have originated in the
dropping of δύνασθαι or οἷος τε :
ὡς (sc. οἷον τε ἦν οι ἐδύνατο) τάχιστα. ἄνδρας ὅτι πλείστους. χωρίον
οἷον χαλεπώτατον. Pl. Leg. 812 Ε δεῖ ὅτι μάλιστα εὐμαθεῖς εἶναι τοὺς νέους.
Th. I, 6, 2 ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι δὲ ᾽Αθηναῖοι τὸν σίδηρον κατέθεντο.
Similarly in N: öcon tô (or tà) µmopeîs yλnyopútepa, 'as quickly as you
can.'
THE ARTICLE.
Introductory.
1195. Originally the article ó, ró, , was a demonstrative pronoun
[236. 558 f.], as is shown by the Homeric poems, where it is almost
exclusively so used. On the other hand, its articular force and use
appear fully established in all subsequent dialects without exception.
Nevertheless, its final development becomes apparent only in A
prose, and particularly in Plato's philosophical language, where its
presence or absence shows the finest differentiation and distinction
317
1195–1200.]
THE ARTICLE.
between individual and general notions. As to the language of A
poetry the case is different. For the higher its class or kind, and the
higher above ordinary speech, the less common is the use of the article.
Conversely, in proportion as the character of the diction stands in
closer relation to common life, the use of the article becomes more
and more frequent. Hence the usual phenomenon that the higher
strata of lyric poetry, as well as the tragedies (in particular their
lyric parts), rarely employ the article, whereas in all other kinds
of poetry, which take their subject from actual life or stand in closer
connexion with it- a case especially applicable to comedy- the use of
the article is analogous to that of Attic prose.' (RKühner2 ii. 551 f.)
1196. The preceding remarks also hold good substantially for all
P periods down to the present time, inasmuch as Atticistic style
adheres more or less rigidly to the norm established by A prose,
whereas unscholarly compositions and popular speech make a still
more liberal use of the article.
FUNCTION OF THE ARTICLE.
I. Demonstrative use of the Article.
1197. In its original or demonstrative force (236. 559) the
article still appears in 4, as well as P-B compositions (some-
times accented ő, ró, ), in the four following combinations:
μὲν
a. ó pèv—ó dé (also ô µèr-ô dé) 'this-that,' 'the one-the other,'
through all the cases. Also adverbially τὸ μὲν—τὸ δέ, τὰ μὲν τὰ δέ,
'partly partly,' 'on the one hand on the other,' pò roû 'formerly.'
Xen. An. 3, 3, 7 οἱ μὲν ἐτόξευον, οἱ δ᾽ ἐσφενδόνων. 4, 1, 14 ἐπορεύθησαν
τὰ μέν τι μαχόμενοι, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυόμενοι.
b. ó dé (ô dé), ʼn dé (ŷ dé), tò dé, 'but he, she, it,' introducing a new
sentence with a new subject.
Xen. An. 1, 1, 9 Κῦρος δίδωσι Κλεάρχῳ μυρίους δαρεικούς· ὁ δὲ λαβὼν τὸ
χρυσίον στράτευμα συνέλεξεν ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν χρημάτων.
c. καὶ τόν, καὶ τήν, καὶ τούς, οι τὸν δέ, τὴν δέ, τοὺς δέ. These are per-
sonal accusatives serving as the subject of an infinitival clause
(2064 ff.) having the above ó dè and kaì ôs (1437) for their nominatives.
καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν. τὸν δὲ γελάσαι. Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 13 καὶ τὸν ἀποκρίνασθαι
kai
λέγεται.
α. τὸν καὶ τόν, τὸ καὶ τό, τὰ καὶ τά, 'so-and-so, this and that, used
TÙ TÙ
to avoid the specific name of someone or something.
Lys. 19, 59 και μοι κάλει τὸν καί τόν. Dem. 9, 68 ἔδει γὰρ τὸ καὶ τὸ
ποιῆσαι καὶ τὸ μὴ ποιῆσαι.
1198. The demonstrative force of the article still survives in N in
the expressions: τὸ καὶ τό, τὰ καὶ τά, this and that, und πρὸ τοῦ οι
rather poroù, 'before,' 'previously.'
1198h. On an elliptical and a relative use of the article see 1225-9
and 1438.
II. Ordinary use of the Article.
1199. In its ordinary or articular force the article marks
either an individual item or a generic class.
1200. The individualizing article singles out a particular item :
¿ Taîs ('the one boy in question'), 'the boy'; rò dévdpov ('the one
318
THE ARTICLE.
[1200-1207.
tree under consideration '), the tree'; ἡ δικαιοσύνη τοῦ βασιλέως,
'the justice of the king.'
Cp. πολλοί ' many
ὀλίγοι ' few
πλείονες ' more
πλείστοι ' a great many'
δοῦλος σου
So still in Ν.
a slave of thine'
οἱ πολλοί ' the masses (1207)
οἱ ὀλίγοι ' the few (1207)
οἱ πλείονες ‘the majority'
οἱ πλεῖστοι ' the great majority
ó doûλos σou 'thy slave.'
1201. The generic article raises its item to a representative of
a whole class. Hence it is put, contrary to English usage,
before nouns denoting a species, family, or class of any of the
kingdoms of nature; further before abstract nouns of virtues,
vices, sciences, and the like :
*
ó
ὁ ἄνθρωπος ‘man, mankind '; Η γυνή woman (as a class) '; ὁ ἰατρός
'a physician (as a typical representative of his class)'; ὁ ἵππος
a horse' (i.e. every horse); ὁ σῖτος corn'; ἡ ἀρετή ‘virtue'; ἡ σοφία
Η
wisdom '; Η μέθη ‘drunkenness'; ἡ ἀλήθεια truth'; ἡ γεωμετρία
: Η
geometry'; Η πενία 'poverty.
So too in N.
1202. But abstract nouns, including those of virtues and vices,
often dispense with the article:
Xon. Mem. 4, 3, 14 ανθρώπου ψυχὴ τοῦ θείου μετέχει. Th. 2, 87, 4 púßos
μνήμην ἐκπλήσσει, τέχνη δὲ ἄνευ ἀλκῆς οὐδὲν ὠφελεῖ.
So too in N : φοβέρα τὸν ἔπιασε, κακὸ νὰ σού 'ρθῃ, πόνος με κρατεῖ.
1203. The article is further used-
a. Before appellatives in order to indicate a proper or usual
connexion otherwise expressed by the possessive pronoun
(1415):
αἰδοῦμαι τὸν πατέρα ' my father'; μηδένα ἡγοῦ φίλον. Xen. An. 2, 5, 38
Κλέαρχος ἐπεὶ ἐπιορκῶν ἐφάνη ἔχει τὴν δίκην his due punishment.
1, 8, 3 Κύρος καταπηδήσας ἀπὸ τοῦ ἅρματος τὸν θώρακα ἐνέδυ καὶ ἀναβὰς
ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον τὰ παλτὰ εἰς τὰς χεῖρας ἔλαβε.
1204. b. Commonly before geographical names :
ἡ Ἑλλάς, ἡ ᾿Αττική, τὴν Αἴγυπτον, τῆς Κρήτης, αἱ Θῆβαι, τὸ Μέγαρα.
So too in N.
1205. c. Before proper names already referred to, generally
known, or standing in the plural:
Xen. An. 1, 14, 7 τοὺς στρατιώτας αὐτῶν παρὰ Κλέαρχον ἀπελθώντας εἴα
Κῦρος τον Κλέαρχον ἔχειν. ὁ Πλάτων (the well-known) Plato. οἱ
Πλάτωνες (men of the stamp of Plato) ' the Platos.
1206. In N the article is put before every proper name, whenever
the indefinite ἕνας, κάποιος ' a certain) would be out of place. (See
237, 594-7, 622-4, & 1448-53.)
1207. d. Bofore adjectives or participles used substantively
(1182 f. 1241, α) :
ὁ δίκαιος, τὸ ἀγαθόν, οἱ δίκαιοι, τὰ ἀγαθά. οἱ πολλοί 'the masses.
οἱ ὀλίγοι (the minority), the oligarchical party. ὁ βουλόμενος “who-
ever wishes. ὁ λέγων ' the speaker. οἱ πρῶτοι ερχόμενοι those coming
first. οι κινδυνεύσαντες those who incurred a danger.
319
1208-1217.]
THE ARTICLE.
1208. So too in P-B, as: Callin. 119, 17 οἱ διώκοντες. 137, 16
πάντες οἱ φιλοῦντες αὐτὸν. 107, 8 τὸ ἀποβησόμενον. So further in Nas
far as adjectives, also participles in -os, are concerned (1181"). For
the remaining participles see 2166.
1209. That the article before the participle reappears when the latter
is resolved to a finite clause, will be seen in 1219 & 2103-5.
1210. e. Before possessive pronouns :
ὁ ἐμὸς πατήρ or ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐμός. ἡ ὑμετέρα οἰκία or ἡ οἰκία ἡ ὑμετέρα.
So too in N, as : τὰ δικά του χωράφια or τὰ χωράφια τὰ δικά σου.
1211. f. After personal pronouns specified by an apposition
(1.59.1255); as: ἡμεῖς οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἐγὼ ὁ τλήμων. So too when
the pronoun is understood, as : Xen. An. 2, 5, 25 εἰ βούλεσθέ μοι (sc.
ὑμεῖς) οἵ τε στρατηγοὶ καὶ οἱ λοχαγοὶ ἐλθεῖν, λέξω. (Cp. 1250f.)
So too in N, as: ἐγὼ ὁ καϋμένος, ἐσεῖς οἱ ἀντρειωμένοι, ἀκουσετέ μου οἱ
φρόνιμοι.
1212. g. After the demonstrative pronouns οὗτος, ὅδε, ἐκεῖνος,
P-N αὐτός (= οὗτος), then after ἄμφω, ἀμφότερος, and ἑκάτερος :
οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος οι ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος. ἐκεῖνοι οἱ χρόνοι or οι χρόνοι
ἐκεῖνοι. ταῦτα τὰ βιβλία or τὰ βιβλία ταῦτα. ἄμφω τώ παῖδε. ἀμφότερα τα
στρατόπεδα.
1213. So too in the N representatives: ékeîvos ó 'that,' avròs ó ‘this.'
Mark further: καὶ οἱ δύο “both, καὶ ὁ ἕνας καὶ ὁ ἄλλος ‘both.
1214. In / rarely, but in G-B compositions often, αμφότεροι is also
preceded, instead of being followed, by the article, after the analogy
of oἱ δύο with which it is identified:
Pl. Theaet. 203 ο τὰ ἀμφότερα στοιχεία (bis). NT Acts 23, 8 ὁμολογοῦσι
τὰ ἀμφότερα. Eph. 3, 14 τά ἀμφότερα. Narr. Zos. 98, 5 τά ἀμφότερα
δένδρα. Theoph. 171, 28 ταῖς ἀμφοτέραις πόλεσιν. Vita SA 6*Β τὰ ἑκάτερα
μέρη. ib. 8* Β οἱ ἀμφότεροι. 51* Ε μεταξὺ τῶν ἀμφοτέρων.
B
12145. So also before αὐτὸς in T-B, where ὁ αὐτὸς = οὗτος ὁ (1420),
as Mal. 39, 25, et passim.
1215. 7. Before cardinal numerals denoting a part or fraction
of a known quantity:
Th. 2, 10, 1 ξυνήεσαν τὰ δύο μέρη two-thirds. 3, 15 ἔφραζον ιέναι ἐς
τὸν Ἰσθμὸν τοῖς δύο μέρεσιν. Xen. Hell. 7, 5, 10 ἀπῆσαν τῶν λόχων
δώδεκα ὄντων οἱ τρεῖς.
>
1216. In N this relation is expressed by an analogous turn, as:
ἀπὸ τὰ (οι ἀπὸ κάθε πέντε (μερτικά) τά δύο (‘two parts out of the fivol) (two-
fifths, ἀπὸ τὰ (or ἀπὸ κάθε δεκαπέντε τὰ τέσσαρα ‘4/15, ἀπὸ τὰ (or ἀπὸ κάθε)
τριάντα τὰ τέσσερα ‘4/30';—but a shorter designation is more common
ἀπὸ (κάθε) πέντε δυό 4 2/5, ἀπὸ τρία ἕνα, ' ono-third.
1217. i. Sometimes before the interrogative pronouns τίς, τί,
ποῖος, either in direct questions asking for a specification of
a preceding term, or in indirect questions introducing a whole
proposition :
Pl. Phaedr. 277 Α νῦν δὴ ἐκεῖνα ἤδη, ὦ Φαῖδρε, δυνάμεθα κρίνειν. ΦΑΙ. Τὰ
ποια; Lach. 193 Ε βούλει οὖν ᾧ λέγομεν πειθώμεθα τό γε τοσοῦτον; ΛΑ. τὸ
ποῖον δὴ τοῦτο καὶ τίνι τρόπῳ; Euthyph. 12 Ε πειρῶ δὴ καὶ σὺ ἐμὲ οὕτω
διδάξαι τὸ ποῖον μέρος τοῦ δικαίου ὅσιόν ἐστιν. Crat. 388 c, D.
:
320
THE ARTICLE.
[1218-1223.
1218. So still in N: ὁ ποιός ; τὸ τί ; For a further extension of this
use of the article since G, see 2041.
1219. When relative pronouns came to be misused for demonstra-
tives (2038), the article naturally found a place before relatives also.
This was moreover suggested by the presence of the article before
relative participles representing as they did relative clauses (1207 ff.
2103 ff.; cp. 612).
Aristid. 34,643, 125 τῶν ἅπερ ἠβούλεσθε. Men. 295, 10 ; 429, 3 ; 430, 3 τὰ
ὅσα. id. 293, 15 ; 298, 16; 320, 22 ; 321, 9; 323, 7 τοὺς ὅσοι. Zos. 44, 18
τῶν ὅσοι. Agath. 1275 Α τῶν ὅσα. 1305 Α τὰ ὑπόσα. Leont. Neap. V. J.
12, 15 τὸν οἱονοῦν μισθὸν οὐκ ἔσχεν. 29, 13 ΤΗΝ οἱανοῦν. Mal. 102, 3 f. ἀπέκρυψεν
αὐτὴν ὁ ᾿Αχιλλεὺς μετὰ τοῦ (add οὗ ἐφύρει κοσμίου . . . διότι ἐπιώρκησε διὰ τὸν
(ν) εἶχε πρὸς αὐτὴν ἔρωτα. 422, 17 ΤΗΝ οἵαν δήποτε ἀταξίαν. Agath. 1270 D.
1275 Α τῶν ὅσα ἐπράχθη. 1305 Α τὰ ὁπότα ἐτύγχανον ὡμολογηκότες. Cedr.
i. 299, 13 τὸν ὅνπερ. 561, 23 τοὺς ὅσοι (thrice). 605, το τῶν ὅσοι. Anna
Comn. i. 265, 5 τῶν ὅσοι. FTrinch. 34 (+1034) τα χωράφια τὰ ἅπερ καὶ
ἔχομεν. 150 (1133 Α. D.) τὰ ἅπερ ἐποίησεν κλέψειν. Belis. I τὸν ἂν ἡ τύχη
ὕψωσεν ἐτύφλανεν δ φθόνος. 765 τὸν ἂν ἠγάπας.
1220. In process of time the frequency of this usage led to the con-
venience of dropping the relative and transferring its force to the pre-
coding article. This phenomenon, which appears in compositions since T,
enjoyed a great popularity in M Greek, but is now obsolescent (607-8; cp.
ΔΜαυροφρύδης 66ο), except in proverbial expressions : τά φέρν' ἡ μέρα, ὁ
χρόνος δεν τα φέρνει. For more examples seo 1438.
1221. k. Before the infinitive or any other indeclinable word,
even before a whole proposition, conceived as a substantive
(1241):
H
τὸ λέγειν ' speaking, τὸ κολάζεσθαι being punished. τὸ ὑμεῖς ' the
word ὑμεῖς. Η περί (sc. πρόθεσις). τὸ γνῶθι σαυτόν ‘the saying
know thyself”. Xen. Oec. 7, 3 Ισχόμαχος ἐγέλασεν ἐπὶ τῷ Τί ποιῶν
καλός καγαθὺς κέκλησαι. Pl. Rep. 352 D οὐ περὶ τοῦ ἐπιτυχόντος ὁ λόγος
ἀλλὰ περὶ τοῦ Οντινα τρόπον χρὴ ζῆν. Aristid. 45, 12, 20 ἡγεμόνες του Τί
δεῖ ποιείν. ib. 65, 84 οὐ φεύγει τὴν τοῦ Ποῖ᾽ ἄττ' ἐστὶν ἃ βούλεται βάσανον.
Pallad. 1042 D ἢ ὅστις (read οἷος τις δήποτε εἰ, πιστεύω εἰς τὸν ἐν ᾧ
λατρεύω. Callin. 55, 27 τὸ ἀνάπαλιν. 56, 24 τῶν πρὸ ἐμοῦ. 58, 20. 68,
2 τὰ ὧδε. 68, 4 τῷ σὺν αὐτῷ.
a
1222. So too in N : μὲ τὸ σήμερο καὶ μὲ τὸ αὔριο, τὸ ἀνέβα καὶ κατέβα, τὸ
ἄμε κ' ἔλα, τὸ ἐγώ, - ἄλλο τὸ νὰ μὴ μπορῇς καὶ ἄλλο τὸ νὰ μὴ θέλῃς. As to infi-
nitivos, they are, of course, resolved into their respective subjunctives or in-
dicatives by vd οι πῶς (2072. App. vi. 13 f. 25 f.): μὲ τὸ νά σε πιστεύω ἐζημιώθηκα
'by trusting you I have incurred losses.' (See 2072 [2].)
1223. l. Before an adverb of place or time, also before a pre-
position with its case, to indicate persons or things associated
with these items (1241):
οἱ νῦν (sc. ὄντες) ' those of the present time. οἱ ἐνθάδε, οἱ ἐκεῖ, ' those
here, there.' τὰ ἐνθάδε ' affairs here. οἱ ἐγγυτάτω the next of kin.
τὰ εἰς τὸν πόλεμον ' things belonging to war. τὰ ἐφ' ἡμῖν ' what lies in our
power.' οἱ ἐν τῇ πόλει 'people in the city.” οἱ παρά Νικίου those
coming from N.' οἱ ἐφ' ἡμων ' our contemporaries.
Mal. 125, 15 οἱ CYN τινι. 273, 6 τα περὶ τοῦ πολέμου. 79, 14 τὰ κατὰ
Ιάσονα καὶ Γλαύκην.
321
Y
1224-1228.
THE ARTICLE.
1224. This does not apply to N speech, except in the case of a few adverbs
of place (ep. 1225), as : τὰ ἔξω ‘outer parts, τὰ μέσα ‘the inside, τὰ κάτω
'the parts below' ;-though even here either the noun referred to is
generally supplied, as : τὰ ἔξω (μέρη), or the adverb is turned to a substan-
tive, as: ὁ (κατεπάνω) κατεπάνος or καταπάνος (FTrinch. 5 [1975] ' captain ').
So 17; 19; etc.
III. Elliptical use of the Article.
1225. The neuter article is very often put elliptically before
a genitive. It thus supplies a general notion of whatever is
associated with or concerns a person or thing :
τὰ τῶν πολεμίων, τὰ τῆς πόλεως, ' the affairs of the enemy, of the city.
τὰ τῆς τύχης ‘the dispensation of fortune. τὰ τῶν Αθηναίων φρονεῖν ' to
side with the Athenians.” τὸ τοῦ Δημοσθένους “the saying of D.'
ἄδηλα τὰ τῶν πολέμων. Pl. Parm. 136 η δοκῶ μοι τὸ τοῦ Ιβυκείου ἵππου
πεπονθέναι ' what befell the horse of Ibykos. Fur. Phoen. 1202 καλῶς
τὰ τῶν θεῶν καὶ τὰ τῆς τύχης ἔχει,
Ε
1225 b. This usage is unknown in N. Cp. 1228.
1226. When an articular noun should be repeated with a different
adjunct (the . . . and that of or on, in, at, etc.), in Greek it is sufficient
to repeat merely the article which thus corresponds to the English
that:
ὁ ἐμὸς φίλος καὶ ὁ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου. τὸ ἐμὸν συμφέρον καὶ τὸ τῇ πόλει. Χου.
Symp. 8, 12 πολὺ κρείττων ἐστὶν ὁ τῆς ψυχῆς ἢ ὁ τοῦ σώματος ἔρως.
1227. In TN ecclesiastical diction the title of a dignitary (ἐπίσκο-
πος, ἀρχιεπίσκοπος, μητροπολίτης, πατριάρχης, πάπας) is generally omittel,
and the article o stands elliptically with the genitive of the city,
province, or diocese.
C
ὁ ᾿Αλεξανδρείας “the patriarch of Alexandria. ὁ Ρώμης ' the Pope of
Rome. ὁ Σιναίου 'the archbishop of Mount Sinai. ὁ Σμύρνης • the metro-
politan of Smyrna. Carth. 1256 ο τοποτηρητὴς τοῦ Ῥώμης. Pallad. Vit.
Chrys. 12 r τον ᾿Αλεξανδρείας Θεόφιλον. Socr. 153 Α Εὐσέβειος ὁ Νικομηδείας.
Theod. iii. 888 κ ὁ τῆς ᾿Αλεξανδρείας Αλέξανδρος. Theoph. 21, 18 Μακάριος ὁ
Ἱεροσολύμων καὶ ᾿Αλέξανδρος Αλεξανδρείας (road & 'Aλ- or at least Αλ-).
᾿Αλέξανδρος ὁ τοῦ Βυζαντίου. 77, 8 ὁ Κωνσταντινουπόλεως.
22
In present common speech the title noun is generally supplied, as :
ὁ μητροπολίτης τῆς Κρήτης.
1227¹. Or, less commonly, with the omission of the article ¿ :
Athan. ii. 808 Β Εὐσέβιος πόλεως Βιργίλλων τῆς Γαλλίας, Αστέριος Πατρῶν
τῆς ᾿Αραβίας. Socr. 1, 6 ἐπιστολὴ ᾿Αλεξάνδρου Αλεξανδρείας. 153 Λ Θέογνις
Νικαίας, Μάρις Χαλκηδόνος.
1228. On a similar principlo, Byzantine parlance used rà (sc, µépn) with
the genitive of a name given to a certain quartor of Constantinople
after some resident, as : Chal. 1409 ο των Προκοπίου. Stud. 1973 A
τὰ ᾿Αγαθοῦ. Theoph. Cont. 442, 2 ἐν τοῖς ᾿Αμαστριανοῦ. Το 688, 5 ; 824, 24.
836, 8 τά 'Ανθεμίου, τὸ Ψαμαθίων. This practice gradually extended to
other parishes and boroughs, so that many abodes mansions and villages
at present boar analogous appellations, as : Prodr. 4, 572 τὰ Βγενίου (i. o. τὰ
Εὐγενίου); so now (in Croto) τὰ Θοδωρού, τὰ Νεροκούρου, τὰ Συμπραγοῦ, το
Αλικιανού. The article τὰ can also be dispensed with (by dissimilation),
as: τοῦ ᾿Αποδούλου, τοῦ Καμπάνη, τῶν Καλαγκάδω". Honeo the alternativo
practice (in Crete) of forming from the proper name a topographical
322
THE ARTICLE.
[1228-1236.
adjective in -ιανά, ' quarters,
neighbourhood: τα Παππαδιανά the
priest's quarters, τὰ Θοδωριανά - Theodore's quarters.
>
1229. Likewise in N, speaking of a saint's day—a very frequent method
of designating a date (1276)-the term ἡμέρα (οι ἡμέραν) is dropped
(cp. 650) and the genitive stands elliptically : τοῦ ἁγίου Βασιλείου (com-
monly τ᾽ ἁγιου Βασιλειοῦ ' on Saint Basil's Day,' τοῦ ἁγίου Ἰωάννου (τ' αι
αϊ
Γιαννιοῦ), τοῦ ἁγίου Δημητρίου (τ᾽ ἁγιοῦ Δημητριοῦ), τοῦ ἁγίου Κωσταντίνου,
τοῦ Χριστοῦ, τῆς Παναγίας. In the case of feminines, however, the omission
of ἡμέρα is rather uncommon, as : (τὴν ἡμέρα”) τῆς ἁγίας Παρασκῆς, τῆς ἁγίας
Τριάδας, τῆς Πεντηκοστής.—See also i276.
IV. Peculiar use of the Article.
1230. Contrary to English usage, the article is omitted-
1. Before the predicate (1159)
Men. 449 πολλῶν ὁ καιρὸς γίγνεται διδάσκαλος. 275 κάλλιστόν ἐστι
ΚΤΗΜΑ παιδεία βροτοῖς.
So still in N: αὐτὸς εἶνε ξένος, ἔγινε στρατιώτης, εἶμαι πρῶτος.
1231. But, agreeably to English, the article precedes the predi-
cate when the latter stands as the item principally referred to, or
when it is a relative participle (1209. 2103) ; also in the expression
ὁ αὐτὸς ' the same':
Pl. Menex. 248 Α οὗτος ἐστὶν ὁ σώφρων, οὗτος ὁ ἀνδρεῖος καὶ φρόνιμος.
Xen. An. 3, 2, 18 οἱ ἄνδρες εἰσὶν οἱ ποιοῦντες ὅ,τι ἂν ἐν ταῖς μάχαις γίγνηται.
Th. 2, 61, 2 ἐγὼ μὲν ὁ αὐτός εἰμι, ὑμεῖς δὲ μεταβάλλετε.
So still in N: ἐγὼ εἶμαι ὁ ἀδελφὸς τοῦ φίλου σου. ἔκαμε τὰ μαθημένα του 11ο
did as usual.' For participles see further 2103-5 & 2166.
1232. 2. Before abstract nouns and the like. For illustrations
800 Ι2ΟΙ,
1233. 3. In general statements of measure, origin, and name
(cp. 1269 f.), such as
μέγεθος ‘in size, βάθος ‘in depth, εύρος ‘in width, πλῆθος ‘in
number,' yévos 'by birth,' ovoμa 'by name.'
1233". But in P-B Grook the article is generally added here, as: Callin.
117, 8 λάκκον δύο ὀργυιῶν τὸ βάθος. So too in N, but of measure only :
τρεῖς ὀργυιὲς τὸ βάθος, πλάτος, ψῆλος, μάκρος (1270. 1305).
1234. 4. In standing adverbial expressions, like the follow-
ing:
νυκτός by night,' ἡμέρας ‘by day, ἅμ᾽ ἔῳ 'early in the morning,
ἅμ᾽ ἡλίῳ ἀνίσχοντι at sunrise, ἀφ' ἑσπέρας in the evening, μέχρι
δείλης 'till late in the afternoon, ἐκ παιδός from childhood, μέσαι
νύκτες midnight, κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θαλασσαν ‘by land and by sea,
ἐν δεξιᾷ on the right,' ἐν ἀριστερᾷ on the left,' παῖδες καὶ γυναῖκες
'wife and children.
1
1
1235. So too in many corresponding N expressions : ἀποσπέρας = ἀφ'
ἑσπέρας, παιδιὰ καὶ γυναῖκες, ἀπὸ παιδί = ἐκ παιδός, etc.
--
1236. When an articular substantive is accompanied by an
adjective, the latter may stand either between the article and
its substantive, or, in case of emphasis, after the substantive
323
Υ 2
1236-1240.]
THE ARTICLE.
with repeated article. In either case the adjective is attributive
(1159). On the other hand an anarthrous adjective following
its articular substantive is predicative (1159).
α. ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ, the good man
ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἀγαθός
}'the good man': altributive;
b. ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός ' the man (is) good: predicative.
Ο
II
1236. So too in P-N, as : Callin. 69, 5 Τόν ἄνθρωπον τὸν ἰαθέντα. 70, 11
τοῦ κυρίου τοῦ λαλήσαντος. 91, 12 ἡ βρῶσις ἡ ἄμετρος.—Ν Η πέτρα ή μεγάλη.
ὁ Γιάννης ὁ ἀντρειωμένος.
1237. This attributive position may be taken in Greek by any
adjunct (adjective, participle, adverb, a genitive, a preposition with
its case, cp. 1223. 1241):
Η μακρὰ ὁδός
Η άνω οδός
οἱ τότε ἄνθρωποι
τὴν τοῦ ἀνδρὸς ἀρετήν
ὁ τῶν πολεμίων φόβος
ἡ ἐν τῷ παρόντι σωτηρία
H
For N compare 1223
f.
ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ μακρά
Ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ ἄνω
H
οἱ ἄνθρωποι οἱ τότε
ΤΗΝ ἀρετὴν τὴν τοῦ ἀνδρός
ὁ φόβος ὁ τῶν πολεμίων
Η σωτηρία ἡ ἐν τῷ παρόντι.
1238. The attributive genitivo may precede or follow without a re-
pented article, as : Η τῶν Περσῶν ἀρχή οι τῶν Περσῶν ἡ ἀρχή or ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν
Ĥ
Περσών.
So too in N, as : τὰ καμώματα τοῦ Στεφανῆ οι τοῦ Στεφανῆ τὰ καμώματα
'Stephen's doods.'
1239. The adjectives ἄκρος, μέσος, ἔσχατος, μόνος, also αὐτός,
and râs, have a different-but never a predicative-sense, ac-
cording as they hold an attributive or predicative position:
α. τὸ ἄκρον ὄρος, ' the high or projecting mountain.
τὸ ὄρος ἄκρον οι ἄκρον τὸ ὄρος, the top of the mountain.
δ. Η μέση πόλις, ' the middle town, the town between.
Η πόλις μέση οι μέση ή πόλις, ' the central part of the city.
C
c. ἡ ἐσχάτη νῆσος, ‘the furthermost island'
Ἡ νῆσος ἐσχάτη οι ἐσχάτη ἡ νῆσος, ' the extreme part of the island.
C
<
α. ὁ μόνος υἱός, the only son.
ὁ υἱὸς μόνος, μόνος ὁ υἱός, ' only the son.
ε. ὁ αὐτὸς βασιλεύς, the samo king.
ὁ βασιλεὺς αὐτός or αὐτὸς ὁ βασιλεύς, ' the king himself (540. 1419).
In N : (α) τὸ ἀκριμαιὸ βουνό-Η ἄκρα (or κορυφὴ τοῦ βουνοῦ. (1) ἡ μεσαιακή
πολιτεία-Η μέση τῆς πολιτείας. (c) τὸ ἀκριμαιὸ νησί——ἡ ἄκρα τοῦ νησιοῦ. (α) ὁ
μοναχονός—ὁ ὑ]γιος μοναχός. (ε) ὁ ἴδιος βασιλεῖς ὁ βασιλεᾶς ἀτός του.
1240. Jac (strengthened ἅπας and σύμπας), also ὅλος have the
following meaning:
A. With article: 'all,' 'whole':
1. Predicatively:
πᾶσα ἡ πόλις οι Η πόλις πάσα
also ὅλη ἡ πόλις οι ἡ πόλις ὅλη
}
4
the wholo city.'
πᾶσαι αἱ πόλεις or aἱ πόλεις πᾶσαι, ' all cities.
.
In N : ὅλη ἡ χώρα or Η χώρα ὅλη, ' the whole town.
324
THE CASES.
[1240-1242.
2. Attributively 'all counted together,' 'in all :'
ὁ πᾶς, οἱ πάντες ‘in all. οἱ πάντες ἑκατόν ‘a hundred in all'
ὁ πᾶς ἀριθμός ' the sum total.'
Hì nâσɑ móλis 'the city taken as a whole.'
In N : ΤΗΝ πᾶσαν ἀλήθεια or ὅλη τὴν ἀλήθεια”, “the whole truth.
B. Without article: every :
πᾶσα πόλις οι πόλις πᾶσα, ' every city.
nâσai móλeis, 'whole cities'; 'all kinds of cities.'
In N πασα πολιτεία or χώρα, ' every city.
1241. Every word or group of words can be raised to a sub-
stantive by prefixing the article to it (1223). In this way
there are substantivized
a. Adjectives and participles (1181 f. 1207 f.):
τὸ ἀγαθόν, οἱ πλούσιοι, οἱ παρόντες, οἱ δυνάμενοι, οἱ πλείονες, ἡ δεξιά, ὁ λέγων,
οι βουλόμενοι.
For N see 1208 and 2166.
b. Infinitives (1221):
Men. 387 νέοις τὸ σιγᾶν κρεῖττον ἐστὶ τοῦ λαλεῖν.
For N see 1222, 2072, and App. vi. 20 ff.
c. Adverbs and prepositional constructions (1223):
ὁ πέλας, οἱ νῦν, οἱ πάλαι, οἱ περὶ Ἀριαῖον, οἱ ἐν τῷ ἄστει, οἱ ἐν τέλει,
τὰ πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον.
d. Whole clauses, especially indirect questions (1221.2041):
Men. 584 το γνῶθι σαυτὸν πᾶσιν ἐστὶ χρήσιμον.
ἐγνώκαμεν, τὸ δὲ ὅπως, τοῦτο λέγε.
τό
So too in N : ἄκουσε τὸ τί μου εἶπε.
THE CASES.
Introductory.
Dem. 3, 1ο ὅτι δεῖ βοηθεῖν
1242. A parallel examination of ancient and modern Greek shows
that of the five cases used in A, the nominative and vocative still fully
obtain in N, while the oblique cases exhibit considerable changes.
This difference consists in the total loss of the dative, in the exten-
sion, in a large measure, of the accusative at the expense of the
dative and genitive, and in the restriction and partial modification of
the genitive. The process which has brought about this result is not
of recent date, but started in classical antiquity itself. Indeed, a com-
parative study of the history of this chapter shows that whenever in
A the accusative chanced to be more or less equivalent to either or
both of the other oblique cases, it gradually gained ascendency
over them and ultimately succeeded in dislodging them from common
speech. Thus the temporal accusative gradually prevailed over the
corresponding temporal dative and genitive (1274 f. 1287. 1342. 1392 f.).
Similarly, verbs which in A were neuter (1455 ff.) or governed the
genitive or dative, but also admitted, in a more or less synonymous
sense, of the accusative, such as:
ὠφελέω, βλάπτω, ὑβρίζω-λαμβάνω, ψαύω, θιγγάνω—λαγχάνω, τυγχάνω,
κληρονομέω-ὀρέγομαι, τοξεύω—καρπέομαι, ἐσθίω, πίνω, ἀπολαύω, ἀπαντάω,
325
1242-1247.]
THE CASES.
ὑπαντιάζω-αἰσθάνομαι-μιμνήσκομαι, μνημονεύω-φροντίζω, ἐπιμελέομαι,
ἀμελέω, καταφρονέω-κρατέω, τυραννέω-ἄρχομαι, etc.—λοιδορέω, πολεμέω,
ἐνεδρεύω, πομαι, λατρεύω-μέμφομαι, ἐπαινέω, ἐπιπλήσσω, ἐνοχλέω
oréρyw, ảɣanáw, etc. (For many more examples from subsequent
times see AMavpoppúins 502-523 and GHadzidakis 220-222.)
such verbs made, in process of time, more concessions to the accusa-
tive and finally resulted-so far as they still survive-in transferring
to it all their syntactical constructions. (Cp. 1286-1395.)
1243. An analogous phenomenon is exhibited by prepositions
constructed, in a synonymous sense, with the accusative and one
or both of the other oblique cases, inasmuch as the accusative
gradually superseded its rivals (cp. ἐπί 1583; περί 1633-43; ὑπό
1687-99).
1244. Meanwhile other classes of verbs, which in A were regularly
associated with either the genitive or dative, or with no case (neuter
verbs, 1457), were drawn, one after another, into the transitive or accu-
satival construction, so that the domain of the genitive and dative
respectively has been gradually reduced. Compare P-N:
· ἀλογέω, διαφέρω, ἐντρέπομαι, ἐπιβαίνω, κληρονομέω, προτερέω, διακρατέω,
καταγωνίζομαι, κατισχύω, καταπονέω, καταστρατηγέω, παρακρατέω, παρατρέχω,
πλεονεκτέω, δακρύω (uftor κλαίω IGB 581, 3), etc.
2. ἐνεδρεύω, προσέχω.
3. ἀποληρέω τινά, ενεργέω τι, ὀφθαλμιάω τι, παρασπονδέω τινά, προνομεύω
τι, στρατεύω τινά, χορηγέω τινά τινι, ὑπερηφανέω τινά, etc.
1245. But the greatest impulse-the impulse which most effect-
ively promoted the cause of the accusative-was given by the alter-
native, open to numerous verbs, substantives, adjectives and adverbs,
of taking, besides the genitive or dative, a preposition with its case:
Cp. γίγνομαι τινος and από τινος, ἐλευθερίω or σώζω τινός and από or ἔκ
τινος, ἄρχομαί τινος and ἀπό or ἔκ τινος-μάχομαί τινι and πρός τινα,
ἀκολουθέω οι πομαί τινι and σύν τινι, χαλεπαίνω τινί and επί τινι, τιμω
ρέομαί τινος and περί τινος—ἔκπωμα ξύλου and ἀπὸ or ἐκ ξύλου (1331), etc.
1246. For such a prepositional construction, whether it served as
a complement to a verb, substantive, etc., or whether it stood
independently in the sense of a loose adverbial expression (cp. ¿§ or
ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς, ἐκ παίδων, ἐν δεξιᾷ, ἐπὶ τούτῳ, διὰ μέσου, etc.), sooner or later
led to the climination of all varieties of construction, and finally to the
absolute predominance of the simple accusative (1242. 1256-85). Thus
it came to pass that the accusative gradually succeeded, one way or
the other, in extruding the other two cases altogether from the
domain of the prepositions (1493"), and for the most part from the
government of verbs. Its work with regard to the verbs has not yet
reached its completion, since many still cleave tenaciously to their
ancient construction. (Cp. 1295. 1327.)
1247. The final outcome, then, of the long struggle among the
obliquo cases was that the accusative, as the commonest and most
familiar case, has gradually dislodged the genitive from well-nigh
all its usages excepting those of the genitive proper (subjective
and objective genitive, 1286 ff.). As to the dutive, notwithstanding
its long record in written composition, especially in connexion
with év, it has been completely effaced from the living and popular
language, except in a very few crystallized phrases (233), as:
δόξα τoι ὁ θεός (due to church influence), σταυρέ βοήθει και (a school
هر
326
NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE.
[1247-1254.
>
term), etc. One reminiscence of it, however, seems to still linger
in a N phenomenon: namely wherever the dative denoted a person,
especially an indirect or remote object, and its change into the accu-
sative would necessitate a double accusative (thus causing a confusion
of direct and indirect object), the process followed was a double one:
insular and continental Greek (the former always, the latter gener-
ally) turned the indirect object representing the ancient dative into
genitive (datival genitive), whereas Levantine (Constantinople and
Asia Minor) and northern N resorted to both alternatives, with
a decided preference for the double accusative. This total or partial
indication of the indirect or remoter accusative accounts for the
phenomenon that the personal accusative of the classical double
accusative (didúσkw Tí TINA, 1279 f.) appears in N sometimes in its
seemingly ancient form, sometimes in the form of a genitive (TÒN
έμαθε γράμματα and τον ἔμαθε γράμματα).
NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE.
1248. The nominative is used-
1. As subject of a finite verb: Ahmoceénhc λéyel, čoti Deóc.
So too in N.
1249. 2. As predicate (1159) of copulative verbs, namely—
εἶναι ‘to be '; ὑπάρχειν 'to exist'; γίγνεσθαι ' to become'; φαίνεσθαι
to appear'; καλεῖσθαι, ὀνομάζεσθαι, λέγεσθαι, ἀκούειν ‘to be named ';
αἱρείσθαι, χειροτονεῖσθαι, to be elected '; νομίζεσθαι, κρίνεσθαι, to be
considered,' etc. [But cp. 1552.]
เ
So too in N: φαίνεται καλός, γίνεται φρόνιμος, ἀκούει Νικόλας.
1250. The nominative (commonly without the article) often takes
the place of the vocative, especially in connexion with ouros:
Soph. Αi. 89 ὦ οὗτος Αἴας, δεύτερόν σε προσκαλῶ. Pl. Menex. 234 Λ ἐξ
ἀγορᾶς ἢ πόθεν Μενέξενος; Χen. An. 1, 5, 16.
1251. This vocatival use of the nominative (with or without the articlo)
is peculiarly frequent in the NT compositions and their subsequent imita-
tions where the pronoun σù (vµeîs) seoms to be understood, as :
Matt. 27, 29 χαῖρε ο Βασιλευς τῶν Ἰουδαίων. Luke 8, 54 ή παῖς ἔγειρε.
CWessely N. Zaub. 78 iii. Seûpo μoi ỏ åkaтappóvηTos Deóc. Acta Xanth. 60,
27 συγγνώμην εὕροιμι παρὰ σοῦ, ὁ θεός ΜΟΥ. Apophth. 420 Β ο θεός, δός μοι
ισχύν. Vita Epiph. 49 » τί, ὁ Μέγας Ἐπιφάνιος, ο Μέγας ρήτωρ, τί παρε-
γένου ; Callin. 96, 18 ἃ ἔδωκάς μοι ὁ Θεός. Leont. Noap. V. J. 6, 11 σὺ κύριε
Ο πλούσιος. 23, 11 κύρι ὁ πατρίκιος.-α- δόξα σοι ὁ θεός ‘glory to theo,
Father,' thank God.
à
1252. The vocative-commonly preceded by & (N at ore, 251 f.)
-is used to denote a person (or thing) addressed: & anapec
ΑΘΗΝΑῖοι ἀκούεις, ΑἰσχίΝΗ ;
So too in N.
1253. A-N, especially since G times, frequently dispenses with the
interjection (&, aï, é, 251 f.), so that its presence in post-christian
compositions usually adds a certain solemnity or emphasis.
1254. Similar is in N the use of its substitulos at (e) and µœpé (µ'pé, pé
1364. 251 ) : Γεώργη! αν Γεώργη ! Μωρέ (Μ'ρέ, ρέ) Γεώργη !
327
1255–1263.]
ACCUSATIVE.
1255. If the vocative is followed by an adjunct in apposition (1159),
this is put in the nominative with the article:
ὦ ἄνδρες οἱ παρόντες. Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 41 Προξενε καὶ (sc. ὑμεῖς οἱ ἄλλοι οἱ
παρόντες Ἕλληνες, οὐκ ἴστε ὅ,τι ποιεῖτε. Th. 2, 11 ἄνδρες Πελοποννήσιοι καὶ
οἱ ξύμμαχοι. So too in N : Κώστα Γιάννη καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι.
ACCUSATIVE.
1256. The accusative still fully survives in N and has even gained
a large extension at the expense of the dative and genitive (1242-7).
1257. The accusative represents the direct object of a trans-
itive verb. Hence all transitive verbs govern the accusative :
σκάπτω ΤΗΝ ΓΗ͂Ν, ἐσθίομεν ἄρτον, φιλοῦσι τὸν ἑαυτῶν πατέρα. οἱ Ἕλληνες
ἐνίκησαν τους Πépcac
So too in N: γράφω Γράμμα, βλέπω τοὺς ΝΑΫτες.
1258. In many cases, however, Greek differs from English
in that it often views as transitive many verbs which English
conceives as intransitive, and so connects them with a preposi-
tion. Such are, e.g.
εὖ ποιέω
εὐεργετέω
τινά, 'do good to
εὖ λέγω τινά, ' speak well of
κακώς ποιέω
κακουργέω
} τινά, do evil to
κακῶς λέγω, κακολογέω τινα, speak ill of
ἀμύνομαί τινα, ' defend myself against'
αἰσχύνομαι, αιδέομαί τινα, stand in awe of
σιγάω, σιωπάω τι 'keep silence about
λανθάνω τινά ' escape the notice of
φυλάττομαι τινα, guard myself against
θαρρέω τινά, rely on
>
πλέω θάλασσαν, ' sail over a sea.
Εὖ λέγε τὸν εὖ λέγοντα. Men. 582 οὐδεὶς ποιῶν πονηρὰ λανθάνει θεόν.
Xen. An. 2, 3, 22 ᾐσχύνθημεν καὶ θεοὺς καὶ ἀνθρώπογε.
"
"
1259. Observe: ὄμνυμί τι Α swear by (as τοὺς θεούς). όμνυμι τι
swear to, affirm by oath (as σπονδάς, θεῶν πίστεις, ὅρκον). ἐπιορκέω
τινά 'swear falsely by,' as : Men. 253 θεὸν ἐπιορκῶν μὴ δόκει λεληθέναι.
In N : δμώνω (μνώγω) εἰς τὴν Παναγία”, ὀμώνω (μνώγω) ὅρκο.
1260. So too the swearing particles (1745 f.): affirmatively (also
negatively), as : ΝΗ (ναὶ Μὰ) Δία 'yes by Zeus'; negatively, as : o μὲ τοὺς
θεούς 'no by the gods.
1261. P N common speech always usos µd in either case (1746), as :
Theoph. 99, 25 ΜΕ ΤΗΝ Σωτηρίαν σου ἔφαγον αὐτό. So now καὶ (ὄχι) Μά
τὸ Θεό, καὶ νὰ ΤΗΝ ΠΙΣΤΗ ΜΟΥ, ναὶ μὲ τὴν ἀλήθεια.
1262. For the occasional omission and replacomont of μὰ soo 1746 f.
1263. Many verbs, originally intransitive, have become trans-
itive from being compounded with a preposition :---
διαβαίνω ποταμόν, παραβαίνω τοὺς νόμους, διέρχομαι τὴν χώραν, ἀποδιδρά-
σκω τινά,—ὑφίσταμαι (κίνδυνον), διεξέρχομαι go through, ὑπέρχομαι
'flatter.'
So too in N, as: διαβαίνω ποταμόν, ἀνεβαίνω (κατεβαίνω) τὴ σκάλα.
328
ACCUSATIVE.
[1264-1271.
1264. In many cases, a Greek verb is used now in a transitive,
now in an intransitive sense:
αἰσθάνομαι τι or τινός perceive. ἐνοχλέω τινά or TiNi trouble.
ἐνθυμέομαί τινος οι τι (1294 f.) ' consider. μέμφομαί ΤΙΝΑ ΟΙ ΤΙΝΙ ‘blame.
1265. Many verbs, which in other respects are usually in-
transitive, take an accusative of the same or kindred stem or
meaning (1282), as : φυλακας φυλάττω ' stand sentry, φόρον φέρω
'pay tribute. This cognate accusative is mostly accompanied
by an attributive adjunct:
Aesch.
Καλὸν ἔργον ἐργάζεσθαι, πᾶσαν ἐπιμέλειαν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, τὸν ἱερὸν πόλεμον
στρατεύσαι. Men. 186 ζήσεις ΒΙΟΝ κράτιστον ἢν θυμοῦ κρατῇς.
Pers. 748.
1265. So too in P-N, as : Callin. 75, 13 ὁ λεγειν ὁδός. Ι22, 20 δεινὴν
παιδείαν ἐπαιδεύθη. - Ν: κοιμάται Ϋπνο βαθύ, δὲν ἔφταιξε μεγάλο φταίξΙΜΟ",
ρωτῶ πολλὰ ᾿ρωτήματα.
1266. The cognate accusative is often omitted, and its attributive
adjective then assumes the (adverbial) form of a neuter plural or
singular (518 f. 1185):
ἡδὺ (=ἡδὺν γέλωτα) γελάν
δεινὰ (= δεινὴν ὕβριν) ὑβρίζειν
Ολύμπια (= Ολυμπιακὴν νίκην) νικᾶν ταῦτα (=ταύτην τὴν ἀνάγκην) ἀναγκά-
Το πάντα νικᾶν
ζεσθαι.
οὐδὲν φροντίζειν
τὰ ἄλλα ἐπιμελεῖσθαι
τὰ μέγιστα ὠφελεῖσθαι
οὐδὲν χρῶμαι σοι
μέγα βον.
Men. Frg. 359 ἅπαντα δουλεύειν ὁ δοῦλος μανθάνει. 697 οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις
πάντ' ἀνὴρ εὐδαιμονεί.
1267. This usage is very common in N also, and has doubtless largely
contributed to the formation of adverbs of manner from the neuter
plural (518–522. 1185):
φαντάζω μεγάλα, γελῶ πολλά, πονῶ Δυνατά, σε χαιρετῶ πολλὰ καὶ ἀκριβά.
1268. Analogous are the 4 phrases-
θύειν τὰ ῾Ηράκλεια (= τὰς θυσίας τῶν Ἡρακλείων)—θύειν εὐαγγέλια, σωτήρια,
διαβατήρια. νικᾶν γνώμην, δίκην τρέχειν στάδιον, etc.
1269. The accusative is further used with verbs, adjectives,
and substantives, tospecify the particular part of a whole referred
to (accusative of specification or reference, or Greek accusative):
κάμνω τὴν κεφαλήν, τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, have pain in the head, in the
eyes. Αθηναῖος τὸ γένος 'an Athenian by birth.
>
1270. So too : (τὸ ὄνομα ‘by nano, (τ) γένος by birth, (τ) εἶδος in
appourance, (τὸ εὖρος, ὕψος, βάθος, πλῆθος, κάλλος ' in width, height, depth,
number, beauty,' otc. (Cp. 1233 f.)
Mon. 75 βέλτιόν ἐστι σώμα γ' ἢ ΨΥΧΗΝ νοσείν. Soph. Ο. Τ. 371 τυφλός
τά τ᾽ ὦτα τόν ΤΕ ΝΟΥΝ τά τ' ΫΜΜΑΤ᾽ εἶ.
T
Xon. Mem. 4, 6, 7 ΠΑΝΤΑ σοφὸν οὐχ
οἷον τε ἄνθρωπον εἶναι.—Callin. 128, 18 λατόμος ΤΗΝ ΤΕΧΝΗΝ.
1271. The specification or reference is sometimes, though rarely,
expressed by the dutive:
Xon. Cyr. I, 3, το ταΐς Γνώμαις καὶ τοῖς σώματι σφαλλομένους. (4, 1,
8
329
1271-1276.]
ACCUSATIVE.
διεφθάρθαι τὰς γνώμας.) 2, 3, 6 ἐγὼ οὔτε ποείν εἰμι ταχὺς οὔτε χερσὶν ἰσχυρός.
So often τῷ τρόπῳ, τῷ λόγῳ as regards manner, spooch.'
1272. This construction becomes uncommonly frequent in Biblical
Grook and its subsoquent imitations, as : r Cor. 14, 20 μὴ παιδία γίνεσθε
ταῖς φρεσίν, ἀλλὰ τῇ κακίᾳ νηπιάζετε. Rom. 4, 20 ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει.
Iuko 24, 25 βραδείς τη καρδία. Acts 4, 36 Κύπριος τῷ γένει. 18, 3 σκηνοποιοί
τῇ τέχνη. Callin. 6ο, 13 Αρμένιον τῷ γένει. 72, 16 ἠρρώστει τῷ σώΜΑΤΙ.
1273. Neither the accusative nor the dative of specification is known
to N, their place having been taken either by els or more frequently by
a subject nominative, as: ἐβάρηκα 'ε τη χέρα, ο τόν πόδα (Cretan), 'I hurt
my hand, my foot, μὲ πονοῦν τά Μάτια ΜΟΥ (nom.) = ἀλγῶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς.
>
1274. The accusative serves also to denote extent of space or
time, then time generally, thus answering to the questions how
far? how long? when?-(1242).
Xen. An. 3, 1, 2 τῆς Ἑλλάδος οὐ μείον ἢ μύρια στάδια ἀπεῖχον. Th. 6, 49
ναύσταθμον Μέγαρα ἔφη χρῆναι ποιεῖσθαι, ἀπέχοντα Συρακουσῶν οὔτε πλΛΟΥ͂Ν
ΠΟΛΥΝ οὔτε ὁδός. Men. 547 ψευδόμενος οὐδεὶς λανθάνει πολύν χρόνον.
Xen. An. 5, 8, 24 τοὺς κύνας τοὺς χαλεπούς τὰς μὲν ἡμέρας δεδέασι τὰς δὲ
Νύκτας ἀφιᾶσι. Aeschin. I, 9 ὁ νομοθέτης διαρρήδην ἀποδείκνυσιν ἣν ὥραν
προσήκει ἰέναι τὸν παῖδα τὸν ἐλεύθερον εἰς τὸ διδασκαλεῖον. - G Philologus
52, 161, 6 SCON ζῇς φαίνου (read εὐφραίνου) [1], μηδὲν ὅλως σὺ λυποῦ ὅλως
τι ? ep. Acta Tho. 3, 16 f.).
So too in, as N: ἐπερπάτησαν Διακόσια μίλια. τὸ χωριὸ εἶνε τρία μίλια μακρυά.
κοιμᾶται ὅλη τὴν ἡμέρα”. ἔλειπα τρεῖς ἑβδομάδες. ἦρθε το βράδγ. ἐξύπνησα
Tȧ MECÁNYKTA.
1275. This use of the accusative assumed, in the course of H times,
a wider extension until it has ultimately established itself in N as the
only means (besides adverbs) of expressing space and time in the
sense of how far? how long? and then also simply where? when?
(1528, cp. 1391).
Sopt. 43, 15 μετ᾿ ἐμοῦ γὰρ φάγονται οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἄρτους ΤΗΝ MECHMβρίΑΝ.
Πχ. 7, 15 βάδισον πρὸς Φαραὼ τὸ πρωί. Dion. H. i. 448, 15 εἰς λόγους ἐλθὼν
ἐμοὶ τὴν τελευταίαν ἐπὶ στρατοπέδου εγΝΟΔΟΝ. John 4, 52 χθὲς ὥραν ἑΒΔΟΜΗΝ
ἀφῆκεν αὐτὸν ὁ πυρετός. Just. Apol. 1, 67 ΤΗΝ δὲ τοῦ ἡλίου ἡμέραν κοινῇ πάντες
τὴν συνέλευσιν ποιούμεθα. Acta Tho. 3, 2 εἶδεν αὐτὸν περιπατοῦντα τὸ
MECHMBPINÓN. Const. Apost. 7, 30 THN ANACTÁCIMON TOû Kupiov HME PAN, thn
ΚΥΡΙΑΚΗΝ φαμεν, συνέρχεσθε ἀδιαλείπτως. Callin. 79, 8 ΤΗΝ ΝΥΚΤΑ ΤΑΥΤΗΝ ἐθεα
σάμην σε. Mal. 405, 5 καὶ γίνεται ἐκεῖ ἡ ναυμαχία ὥραν τρίτΗΝ τῆς ἡμέρας.
So too now : ἦρθε το μεσημέρι, τὸν εἶδα ΤΗΝ ΚΥριακή”, ζευγαρίζουν τὸ
Χειμώνα, etc.
1276. In statomonts of timo associated with a Saint's day-a vory
popular method of dating since & timos owing to the great number of
Saints the accusative τὴν ἡμέραν is generally omitted, and the name of
tho Saint thus stands elliptically in the genitivo with the article (1229).
αὔριο εἶνε τ' Αγιος Χαραλάμπη, ἦρθε τον Μιχαήλ Αρχαγγέλου, πότε εἶνε τῶν
ΨΥΧώ"; ΤΗΣ ΠΕΝΤΗΚOCTC, της σταυροπροσκYNHCHC, etc. Soe also 1229.
[! The inscription boars the meaningless reading φαίνον, but εὐφραίνου
is required by both the sono and the τρίσημος χρόνος of the musical nota-
tion.
330
ACCUSATIVE OF REFERENCE.
[1277-1279.
1277. Observe further that the question • how old ?' is answered in
1 by γεγονώς with the accusative, while the question since when ? is
answered by the simple accusative of the ordinal numerals:
τριάκοντα ἔτη γεγονώς ' thirty years old 'N τριαντα χρονῶ”.
ἐνάτην ἡμέραν ' eight days since 'N εἶνε (ἦταν) ὀχτὼ ἡμέρες.
ἐνάτην ταύτην ἡμέραν ' a week ago 'N σήμερ᾽ ὀχτώ.
Ν
τρίτον ἢ τέταρτον ἔτος τουτί · three or four years ago 'N τώρα καὶ δύο ἢ
τρεις χρόνους or (ἀπ)ἐδὼ καὶ δυὸ ἢ τρία χρόνια. (Cp. 1834).
1278. A great number of accusatives of the cognate relation,
limitation, and extent (1265. 1269. 1274), have crystallized to
mere adverbs-adverbial accusative :
οὐδέν ' not at all.
ὀλίγον, (σ)μικρόν, βραχύ, ' a little.’
πολύ ‘by far.
πολλά
quently.'
in many ways, fre-
τὰ πολλά for the most part.
(τὰ) πάντα 'altogether.
(τὸ πρῶτον, (τὴν πρώτην, ‘at frst.
(τὸ δεύτερον, τρίτον, ' in the second,
third place.'
1
τὸ λοιπόν ‘for the rest, in fu-
ture.'
τὸ τελευταῖον ‘at length.
τὸ πρίν ‘before.
τὸ νῦν “ now.
τὸ μετὰ ταῦτα 'hereafter.
?
τὴν ἀρχήν ' at the beginning.
τέλος at last.
ἀρχὴν οὐ on the whole not,
not at all.'
τὴν ταχίστην (sc. ὁδόν) ' the quickest
way.'
τὴν εὐθεῖαν straight.
τι 'somewhat.
1
Tí; 'in what respect?' 'why?'
τίνα τρόπον ; in what manner?
τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον ' in this way.
πάντα τρόπον ‘in every manner.
πρόφασιν ' ostensibly.
δωρεάν ' gratuitously.
τυχόν (2125 f.) perchance.
ὅσον as far as
δίκην τινός ' in the manner of.
χάριν τινός for the sake of. τοῦ
λόγου χάριν ' for the sake of argu-
ment.' ἐμὴν χάριν ' for my sake.
1278. So too in N : (τί ποτε) τίποτε ' for something." μὲ θέλεις τίποτε ; δέ σε
θέλω τίποτε, πολλά σε φοβοῦμαι. τί γελᾶς; τί με βλέπεις ; πάντα ' always.' τὴν
πρώτη, δεύτερη, τρίτη (φορά), ' the first, second, third time. ὅσα ὅσα ' for the
lowest price, almost for nothing. τὲς προάλλες ‘recently. τὸ πρωί, τὸ
μεσημέρι ' ut noon, τὸ βράδυ, τὰ μεσάνυκτα, τὴν αὐγή. τὸ γληγορώτερο = τὴν
ταχίστην, τὸ πολὺ πολύ ' at the very most, etc.
DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE.
1279. Two accusatives, usually one of the person and another
of the thing (1247), are often required by verbs denoting teaching,
asking, reminding (1297), clothing, hiding, depriving, and the
like, as :
διδάσκω τινά τι, teach
παιδεύω instruct
κρύπτω, ἀποκρύπτομαι, ‘hide
ἀνα-, ὑπομιμνήσκω, remind
(εἰσ)πράττω, (εἰσ)πράττομαι, exact
ἐρωτάω, αἰτέω, τινά τι, ‘ask'
ἀμφιέννυμι, ἐνδύω, clothe
ἐκδύω, undress, strip
ἀφαιρέομαι, ἀποστερῶ, ‘deprive'
(1321).
συλέω ' despoil.
Xen. An. 3, 2, II ἀναμνήσω 〉μᾶς καὶ τοὺς τῶν προγόνων ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΥΣ. Ar.
Nub. 641 οὐ τοῦτ' ἐρωτῶ ce. Xen. Mem. 3, 1, 5 ἤρξατό σε διδάσκειν ΤΗΝ
στρατηγίαν. Cyr. 1, 3, 17 τὸν ἑαυτοῦ χιτῶνα ἐκεῖΝΟΝ ἠμφίεσε. Lys. 32,
7 ΤΗΝ ΘΥΓΑτέρα ἔκρυπτε τὸν θάνατον τοῦ ἀνδρός.
331
1280-1285b.
DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE.
1280. So too in P-B, as : Callin. 58, 10 ἐπαίδευσαν αὐτὸν τὰ ΓΡΑΜΜΑΤΑ.
94, 24 Ταῦτα ἐδίδασκεν ἡμᾶς. 101, 19 CÁKKON ΑΥΤὸν ἐνδύσας. So further in
N, at least partially : τί C ἐρώτησε; τὸν ἔντυσαν κόκκινα ρολα, ΤΗΝ ἐπότισε
Φαρμάκι. For the most part, however, the personal or remoter accusative
is now expressed by the datival genitive (1247).
1281. The above verbs, when used in the passive, retain the accu-
sative of the thing, but the personal accusative becomes subject
nominative (cp. 1285". 1462), as:
Pl. Menex. 236 Α ΜΟΥΣΙΚΗΝ μὲν ὑπὸ Λάμπρου παιδευθείς, ῥητορικὴν δ᾽ ὑπ᾽
᾿Αντιφῶντος. Χen. Memn. 4, 3, 14 ΤΗΝ ὄψιν ἀφαιρεῖται. Callin. 58, 12 ἐδιδά-
σκετο παιδείαν. 122, 2Ο ΠΑΙΔΕΙΑΝ ἐπαιδεύθη. See also 1283.
1282. Other transitive verbs may also take a second, cognate
accusative (1265), as:
Pl. Αpol. 19 Β Μέλητος με ἐγράψατο ΤΗΝ ΓΡΑΦΗΝ ταύτην. • M. brought this
impeachment against me.” Th. 8, 75 ὥρκωσαν τους στρατιώτας τους Μεγί
στογε ὅρκογε ' they made the soldiers swear the most solomn oaths. Xen.
Λη. 3, 1, 18 HMâc τὰ ἴχιστα αἰκίζεται. Dem. 18, 28 Λακεδαιμόνιοι πολλὰ ΤΗΝ
πόλιν ἡμῶν ἠδικήμασι καὶ μεγάλα.
1283. When used in the passive, these verbs retain the cognate
accusative, while that of the person becomes subject nominative, as :
Pl. Gorg. 520 € ΑΛΛΗΝ εξεργεσίαν εὐεργετηθείς. Phaed. 255 A macam θεραπείαν
θεραπευόμενος. See also 1281,
1284. Two accusatives, one serving as the object and the
other as its predicate, are required by verbs denoting to call,
dcclare, show, prove, make, choose :
ὀνομάζω, καλέω, λέγω τινά τι
νομίζω, ηγέομαι, κρίνω
ἀποδείκνυμι, ποιέω, ποιέομαι
αἱρέσμαι, καθίστημι
ταρέχω ἐμαυτόν τι
call one something'
consider, deem '
'prove, make, render'
choose' appoint'
'make myself.'
›
Men. 673 isίας νόμιζε τῶν φίλων τάς αγοράς. Χen. An. I, I, 2 Δαρείος
ΚΡΟΝ CAT' ΗΝ ἐποίησε καὶ ΣΤΡΑΤΗΓΟΝ ἀπέδειξε πάντων. Th. 8, 82
οἱ στρατιῶται ᾿ΑλκιβιάδΗΝ ΣΤΡΑΤΗΓΟΝ εἵλοντο. Xen. An. 3, 2, 5 ΑΡΙΑ ΟΝ
ἠθέλομεν Βασιλέα καθιστάναι. Cyr. 2, 1, 22 τὸν ἰδιώτην χρὴ ἑαυτὸν παρέχειν
εὐπειθῆ τοῖς ἄρχουσιν.
1284. So too P-N in all above vorbs or their substitutos, ns: Callin.
65, 22 οὐχὶ ΔΟΥΛΟΝ ἑαυτὸν ἔλεγεν ὁ Ὑπάτιος; 7, 9 κατεδέξαντο λοιπὸν ἔχειν
πατέρα του Υπάτιον. So too now : λέγω ‘call; κρίνω, ἔχω, consider,
'deem';
κάνω ‘make'; κατασταίνω ‘render '; διαλέγω ' select, choose,
etc., as : τὸν εἶπε κλέφτη”, ἔκαμέ με πλούσιο.
1285. In Biblical compositions and their imitations, the second or pre-
dicative accusativo is frequently expressed by the preposition els. Soo 1552.
1285. When turned to passive, the above verbs (1284) become
copulative (1249), and thus change both accusatives to nominatives,
one (the nearer or personal) to subject, and the other (the remoter) to
predicate (cp. 1281. 1462), 18 : ᾿Αλκιβιάδης στρατηγὸς ᾑρέθη.
So too in N, as: ὁ Νικόλας ἔγινε (ἐδιορίστηκε) δραγάτης.
332
GENITIVE PROPER.
[1286-1290.
THE GENITIVE.
1286. The Greek genitive has two fundamental functions :
first it serves to determine a noun and the nominal notion
inherent in a verb (of); and then to denote the emanation of an
action from somewhere, considered in the proper or metaphorical
sense. In the former case it is a genitive proper answering
on the whole to the English of, in the latter it is an ablative
answering to the English from.
1287. In its function as genitive proper, it still fully obtains in Ν
(1242 ff. 1288-1315), while us an ablatival genitive it has been replaced
either by the accusative (1316-1346) or by a prepositional construc-
tion (1245 f.).
I. GENITIVE PROPER.
1288. The GENITIVE PROPER may be-
A. Subjective genitive, denoting the possessor or author in
substantives, adjectives, and the copulative verbs εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι,
καλεῖσθαι, ποιεῖσθαι, etc. (1249).
ἡ Κύρου στρατιά-τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος-τὰ τῶν Ελλήνων - ἱερὸς χῶρος της
Ατέμιδος-Κίμων Μιλτιάδου -- Περικλῆς ὁ Ξανθίππου.
Πενίαν φέρειν οὐ παντός, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνδρὸς οφ- Xen. An. 2, 1, 12 βασιλεὺς
ἡγεῖται ὑμᾶς ἑαυτοῦ εἶναι. Men. 121 δὶς ἐξαμαρτείν ταὐτὸν οὐκ ανδρός
ροφογποιεῖσθαι τι ἑαυτοῦ.
So further : ἴδιος, οἰκεῖος, κοινός, ἀλλότριός τINO (but also τινι 1371),
'proper, pertaining, common, foreign to.'
So too in N, as : ὁ πατέρας του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ͂ ὁ κῆπος του Δασκάλογτίνος εἶνε τὸ
ἀμπέλι ; (Ελένη ΔΗΜΗΤΡΙΟΥ.)
1288. Associated with this genitive is tho use in N of είμαι with
a verbal substantive, chiefly in -μός, to denote that a person or thing
deserves or is about to suffer the action implied by the substantive, as :
4
εἶμαι τον σκοτωμον I am or deserve to be killed. εἶμαι τοῦ ἀΠΟΘΑΜΟΥ
I am dying. εἶμαι τον ΚOΙΝΙΟΥ ΚΑΙ ΤΟΥ παλιγκιον Ι deserve to be
hanged. είμαι τῆς καλοπεσιᾶς ‘I am very tractable.
1289. The subjective genitive often stands elliptically after the
prepositions eis, er, sometimes also after ek. In that case it refers to
something possessed by the genitive (generally house, school, temple,
place, etc.), but omitted owing to its great frequency (1517 f. 1553 bf.
1565"), as:
ἐν ᾅδου (sc. τόπῳ), εἰς ᾅδου (sc. τόπον)—φοιτῶν εἰς Διδασκάλου, εἰς φίλογ
(sc. οίκον) εἰς ᾿Απόλλωνος, εἰς Διός (sc. ἱερόν), into the temple of ἐν
κιθαριστον (sc. οἴκῳ), ἐκ Διδασκάλογ (sc. οἴκου) from the teacher's.
1289. So still regularly in N with eἰς (= εἰς and ἐν 1547) and από (= ἐκ 1506),
24: (ἐπῆγα ἔμεινα εἰς του Διδασκάλου. εἰς τοῦ Γειτόνοι, εἰς τοῦ ΓΙΑΝΝΗ, εἰς
τοῦ πραματευτή, εἰς τοῦ θειον του (ἔρχεται) από τον Διδασκάλου, ἀπὸ τοῦ
Δημήτρη, απο της θειάς του.
1290. B. Objective genitive denoting the object affected by
an action or emotion. This is common-
r. With verbal substantives :
ἡ τῆς πατρίδος σωτηρία-ἡ ἐπιθυμία ἡδονῶν ὁ φόβος τῶν πολεμίων-
ὁ ὄλεθρος τοῦ στρατογεὔνοια των φίλων-ἀπορία είτογ—ἀφορμὴ ἔργων.
333
1291–1298.]
GENITIVE PROPER.
C
1291. Though less common, this usage still substantially obtains in
Ν: ἡ ἀγάπη του κρασιοῇ ὁ πόθος τῶν Γραμμάτωὁ φόβος τον πολέμου
τὸ σκάμμα τοῦ κήπος τὸ παίνεμα τῆς Νύφης—τὰ καμώματα coy.
1292. 2. With verbs, substantives, and adjectives referring to
judicial matters, to denote the cause or crime :
διώκω τινά TINOc prosecute
κρίνω τινά TINOC try
αἱρέω
""
'convict'
φεύγω τινός am prosecuted
ἡ δίκη, γραφή ' charge, indictment'
αἴτιος, ἔνοχος, ὑπόδικος ' guilty
TINOC
αἰτιῶμαι τινά τINoc amuse
γράφομαι,
'indict'
ἁλίσκομαί τινος 'am convicted
ἀποφεύγω
am acquitted'
τὸ ἔγκλημα “ crime
αναίτιος “ not guilty
Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 7 οἱ Πέρσαι δικάζουσιν αχαριστίας. Lys. 27, 3 οἱ πρέ-
σβεις Δώρων ἐκρίθησαν. Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 6 γίγνεται εγκλήματα καὶ Βίας καὶ
ἀπάτης. Eur. Frg. 633 πολλῶν τὰ χρήματ' αἴτι᾿ ἀνθρώποις κακῶν.
1293. This genitive is foreign to N, seeing that the judicial system
of Greece has gone through many changes since A times. (011. 022 027.)
[Such N expressions as αἰτία τοῦ θανάτου, etc., belong properly to 129o f.]
1294. 3. With verbs and adjectives denoting expert in, eager
for, mindful of, caring for, ruling over-and their contraries.
Soph. Frg. 63 ΤΟΥ͂ ΖΗΝ γὰρ οὐδεὶς ὡς ὁ γηράσκων έρᾷ. Men. 438
ΓΡΑΜΜάτων ἄπειρος οὐ βλέπει βλέπων. Men. 8 ἄνθρωπος ὢν μέμνησο της
KOINC ΤΥΧΗ. Χen. Μem. 1, 4, 17 ἡ τοῦ θεοῦ φρόνησις ἅμα πάντων ἐπι-
μελεῖται, Pl. Rep. 579 € ἑαυτον ὢν ἀκράτωρ ἄλλων ἐπιχειρεῖ ἄρχειν.
Leg. 721 B.
So too : ἐφίεμαι ' desire, ὀρέγομαι, γλίχομαι 4 covet.
1295. In Nthis genitive survives in the case of a number of verbs, as :
θυμοῦμαι (i. c. ἐνθυμοῦμαι 135. 723) ‘remember, αναστοροῦμαι ' recollect,
συλλογοῦμαι ‘think of, ἀ]λησμονώ, ξεχνώ forget. So further : αμά
θητος της Δογλειας, ανήξευρος τον Kocmoy, etc. In the remaining cases,
it has been replaced either by the accusative (1242-7. cp. 1296), as:
Callin. 71, 11 φροντίζων τὰ πρὸς τὸ ζῆν. 96, 29 ἐπεμελεῖτο αὐτόν. CGL
643, 24 οὐ φροντίζω ce non curo te. Acta Xanth. 79, 13 μεριμνήσει ὁ θεὸς
καὶ τὰ περὶ σοῦ ὡς καὶ τὰ περὶ ταύτης τῆς ξένης—or by a preposition (1245).
1296. 4. But verbs of remembering and forgetting can have the object,
when it is conceived as a general thing, in the accusative: tà mape-
λεληθότα μνημονεύειν ἀμνημονείν τους λόγους.
2
1297. In A we may say αναμιμνήσκω τινά τινος beside τινά τι (1279),
'I remind one of something.' We must further distinguish between
ἡγέομαί τινος (e. g. στρατεύματος) ‘I lead, command, and ἡγέομαί τινι
(e. g. ναυσίν) 'I conduct as a guide ; then κρατέω τινός rule over,
and κρατέω τινά, conquer.
1298. 5. With verbs denoting tasting (eating, drinking),
enjoying, parlaking, when they refer to a part and not to the
whole (13ro):
ἐσθίω τινός eat of
γεύω τινά TINOC treat
ἀπολαύω τινός enjoy
μεταλαμβάνω ‘partake
πίνω drink’
γεύομαί τινος taste
ὀνίναμαί τινος benefit from
μετέχω, κοινωνέω, ' have a share
μεταδίδωμί τινί τινος ' give a share.
Xen. An. 4, 8, 2ο τῶν Κυρίων ὅσοι ἔφαγον πάντες άφρονες ἐγίγνοντο.
Mem. 4, 3, 11 απολαύειν πάντων τῶν ἀγαθῶν. Pl. Leg. 721 Β τὸ ἀνθρώπινον
γένος μετείληφεν ἀθανασίας.
,
334
GENITIVE PROPER.
[1299-1306.
1299. In Nthis genitive is replaced by the accusative (1242), mostly simple,
as séyouai σe 'am fond of you,' but sometimes preceded by the preposition
λέγομαι σε
ἀπό (1312) : τρώγω ψωμί eat bread, χορταίνω φαρί get food enough, τοῦ
'δωκα ἀπὸ τὸ κρασί 'gave him part of the wine. So even Narr. Zos.
107, 17 γεύσασθαι αὐτὸν ἀπὸ οῦ ξύλου τῆς ζωῆς.
1300. 6. With verbs denoting: touching, taking hold of,
aiming, hitting, reaching, missing ;-trying :
ër
Men. 314 ἤθογς Δικαίου φαῦλος οὐ ψαύει λόγος. Eur. Hipp. 1326 ἔτ᾽
ἔστι καὶ σοὶ τῶνδε CΥΓΓΝΩΜΗΣ τυχεῖν. Th. 4, 85, 2 ἐσφάλημεν τῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ
ἐκεῖ πολέμου Δόξης. Dem. 18, 253 τίς τῶν ἀνθρώπων οὐ πολλῶν κακῶν
πεπείραται;
1301. In N this genitive also has been replaced by the accusative (1242).
1302. C. Qualitative genitive denoting the extent, measure
or number, weight, size, value, or age:-
Xen. An. 2, 4, 12 τεῖχος εὖρος εἴκοσι πολῶν, ὕψος δὲ ἑκατόν. 2, 6,
20 Πρόξενος ἦν ὅτε ἀπέθνησκεν ἐτῶν ὡς τριάκοντα.—τριῶν ἡμερῶν
ὁδός—τριήρει ἡμέρας μακράς πλοῦς-μισθὸς τεσσάρων ΜΗΝῶν-δίκη χιλίων
Δραχμών.-στράτευμα διαμγρίων ὁπλιτῶν-στόλος ΔιαCocίων Νεῶν.
So too in PLN, as : Callin. 59, 16 ἐτῶν ἦν δέκα καὶ ὀκτώ.—Ν: τοῖχος δώδεκα
ὀργιῶν τὸ ψῆλος, τριῶν πηχών μαντίλι-πέντε δραχμών μετάξι— δέκα χρονών
κόρη τριῶν μερῶ" δρόμος.
1303. Conversely the thing measured or weighed not rarely stands
in apposition (1159b):
Hdt. 8, 4 ἐπὶ μισθῷ τριήκοντα ταλάντοισι. 1, 14 σταθμὸν ἔχοντες
τριήκοντα τάλαντα. Lys. 2, 21 πεντήκοντα μυριάδας στρατιάν. Xen. An.3, 16
βασιλικὴν στρατιάν δώδεκα μυριάδας-Alchem. 312, 1 λαβὼν Δράρον
λίτρας γ', καὶ ἐρετικόν λίτραν ά. 313, 25 λαβὼν χαλκόν μναν μίαν, et
passim. Theoph. 447, 12 αποστέλλει ὁ κῦρις Βουλγαρίας ιβ' χιλιάδας λαόν.
451, 23 ἔπεσον δύο χιλιάδες ApaBec. Porph. Adm. 232, 19 εχολαρίκια ζυγήν
μίαν. 233, Ι τὴν ζυγὴν τὰ εχολαρίκια. 243. 8 λογάριου κεντηνάριον ἕν.
Cedr. 2. 19 Στρογκ Ιακωβίτας πλῆθος πολύ.-FTrinch. 11 (1ooo) Ελ
δένδρη κε'.
I
1304. So too now invariably and universally : δύο χιλιάδες δραχμές, τρεῖς
δεκάδες Γάλα, ἑκατὸ δράμια καπνό.
1305. In like manner G-B writers sometimes, and N speech
always, use the accusative (instead of the genitive) in designations
of measure associated with the adverbial expressions μήκος (Ν μικρος)
εὖρος (πλάτος), "ὕψος (Ν ψῆλος) βάθος, μέγεθος, etc. (1333).
Jos. Ant. II, 1, 3 οἰκοδομήσωσιν αὐτὸν ὕψος μὲν ἑξήκοντα πήχεις, τῶν δ᾽ αὐτῶν
καὶ τὸ εὖρος, Porph. Cor. 472 ἔχων βάθος επιθεμάς δύο.
So N : εἶνε δυὸ ὀργ γιὲς τὸ βάθος (πλάτος, μάκρος, ψῆλος), or ἔχει βάθος (πλάτος,
μάκρος, ψῆλος) δυὸ ὀργιές.
1306. On the other hand, in naming a place or country, B writers
substitute the attributive genitive for apposition, a practice which
has many parallels in Homeric and A Greek, but is foreign to N.
(Β 133 Ιλίου πτολίεθρον. α 2 Τροίης πτολίεθρον. Ε 642 Ιλίου πόλιν, also
Eur. Hol. 156o. Δ 103 εἰς ἄστυ Ζελείης. θ 301 πρὶν ΛΗΜΝΟΥ γαῖαν ἱκέσθαι.
Hdt. 7, 156 ΚΑΜΑΡΥΝΗΣ τὸ ἄστυ. 7, 42 ΚΑΝΗΣ ὄρος Th. 4, 46 ἐν τῷ ὄρει τῆς
ΠετώNHC.) Niceph. Const. Histor. 52, 14 τὴν πόλιν Χερσώνος. 57, 16 τῇ
πόλει Νικαίας. 64 τὰς νήσους τῆς τε Θήρας καὶ Θηραciac καλουμένας. Theoph.
Cont. 295 πρὸς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ χώραν τῆς Φραγκίας. 312, 18 ἡ πόλις AmaΝτίας.
320 το κάστρον Ναυπάκτου. 463, 21 τῷ ὄρει τον ΟΛΥΜΠΟΥ.
335
1307-1314.]
GENITIVE PROPER.
1307. D. Partitive genitive denoting a whole, as contrasted
with its parts :—(cp. 1314).
οἱ σοφοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων-ὁ ἄριστος ἁπάντων τίς ἡμῶν; οὐδεὶς αὐτῶν
Θῆβαι της Βοιωτίας-που Γc ; ' where on earth ?’ὀψὲ τῆς ἡμέρας late in
the day εἰς τοῦθ᾽ ὕβρεως 'to such a degree of license. Th. 1, 65, 1 ('Αρι-
στεὺς) ἤθελε καὶ αὐτὸς τῶν ΜΕΝΟΝΤΩΝ εἶναι. 2, 56, 4 οἱ 'Αθηναῖοι ἔτεμον τῆς
Γῆς τὴν πολλήν. 2, 56, 6 ἀφίκοντο ἐς Πρασιὰς καὶ τῆς τε Γῆς ἔτεμον καὶ
αὐτὸ τὸ πόλισμα είλον.
1308. When the governing word is a quantitative adjective, it usually
takes the gender of the genitive (cp. 1191):
ὁ λοιπὸς τοῦ χρόνου τῆς γῆς τὴν πολλήν—το είτογ τὸν ἥμισυν.
1309. So too in N, especially with certain adjectives denoting a part, as :
ὁ καθένας Mac (534) each of us, μόνοι των ' by themselves, ὅλοι Mac Gall
of us,' kaì oi dvó cac 'both of you.' (Cp. 534.)
1310. Agreeably to its usage (1307), the genitive partitive
stands also with verbs of tasting and partaking. See 1298.
1311. For the sake of greater perspicuity, the partitive genitive,
especially when depending on a numeral or on an articular superlative,
is sometimes strengthened by ἀπὸ or ἐξ (1504. cp. 1299. 1329), as :
Hdt. 1,196 τὴν εὐειδεστάτην ἐκ πασέων. 5, 87 ἐκεῖνον μοῦνον ἐξ ἁπάντων.
Th. I, IIO ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν. Xen. Mem. 3, 6, 17 τοὺς θαυμαζομένους ἐκ τῶν
μάλιστα ἐπισταμένων. Th. 1, 116 λαβὼν ἑξήκοντα ναῦς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐφορμουσῶν.
(Cp. 1,120 ἐκ πάντων προτιμῶνται.)-Sept. Ps. 105 εἷς ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐχ ὑπελείφθη.
Callin. 77, 3 εἷς δὲ ἐκ τῶν παίδων. 78, 16 εἷς ἐξ αὐτῶν. ib. 19 ἕνα ἐξ αὐτῶν.
121, 20 τινὲς ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν. 125, 20. 109, 27 ὀλίγα ἐκ τῶν ἱματίων.
1312. In the course of p times this periphrasis became more popular,
especially in connexion with numerals, like eis, δύο etc., then τινές, πολλοί,
ὀλίγοι, ἄλλοι, πάντες, after which the prepositions ἐκ, ἀπό, sometimes also ἐν
(prompted as they were by the parallel usage in Latin of ex, de, inter) were
felt as an essential requisite. As time went on, this prepositional con-
struction became an almost normal feature of common speech, and finally
resulted in the N practice of expressing regularly by åтó (after ẻ had
become extinct, 1570) the relation of the partitive genitive and its cognate
comparative genitive. See 1504 ff.
1313. As an abbreviated or elliptical form of this partitive relation
we may consider the case where the numeral Tuès is omitted as self-
evident. The simple or prepositional genitive depending on Tivès then
assumes its syntactical function and so is treated like a subject nomi-
native or object accusative (cp. 1514 f. 1569; RKühner2 ii. 29, 3):
Acts 21, 16 συνῆλθον καὶ τῶν Μαθητῶν (sc. τινὲς) σὺν ἡμῖν. John 16, 17
εἶπον οὖν (sc. τινὲς ἐκ τῶν Μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ πρὸς ἀλλήλους. Matth. 23, 34
ἐξ ΑΥΤῶν (sc. τινὰς) ἀποκτενεῖτε . . . καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μαστιγώσετε. John 7, 40
ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλογ οὖν (sc. τινὲς) ἀκούσαντες τῶν λόγων ἔλεγον. 2 John 4 εὕρηκα
ἐκ τῶν τέκνων σου (sc. τινὰς) περιπατοῦντας ἐν ἀληθείᾳ. Acts 15, 7 ΕΝ ΥΜΙΝ
ÝMÎN
(for τινὰς ἐξ ὑμῶν) ἐξελέξατο ὁ θεός. Leont. Neap. V. J. 88, 12 quoted in 1793.
Cp. RKühner ii. 29, 3. [In John 3, 25 we might read: ἐγένετο ζήτηcis
(τιςιν) ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν Ἰωάννου μετὰ Ἰουδαίου.]
1314. The partitive genitive further stands, in a more or
less partitive sense, after adverbs, particularly those of place
and time (cp. 1307): ποῦ τῆς Γc; where on earth ?' πανταχοῦ
Tic fic in every part of the globe. ἄνω τοῦ ΠΟΤΑΜΟΥ above
the river.—πότε τῆς ἡμέρας ; “what time of the day ?' τρὶς το
336
GENITIVE,
[1314-1318.
ABLATIVAL.
MHNÓC 'three times a month '(cp. 1342), kpúþa TINÓC 'without the
knowledge of some one.'
So stand : που, ποῖ, πόθεν, ‘where,
whither,' 'whence'
ἐνταῦθα & ἐκεῖ, ἐκεῖσε, ἐκεῖθεν, “there,
'thither,'' thence
πανταχού everywhere
οὐδαμοῦ ‘nowhere
ἐντός “ within
εἴσω inside 1
ἐκτός, ἔξω, ' outside
μεταξύ between
πλησίον, ἐγγύς, ' near
>
ἔμπροσθεν ' before, in front’
ὄπισθεν behind
καταντικρύ ' opposite
πότε, πηνίκα, ' when
πρωί, early
ἅπαξ, δίς, τρίς, etc. once, twice,
three times, etc.'
πῶς ἔχεις τῆς ΓΝΩΜΗΣ; ‘what is
your opinion ?'
ὡς (οὕτως, εὖ, ἄριστα) ἔχω τοῦ ΒΙΟΥ
λάθρα, κρύφα, without the know-
ledge of"
χάριν ' for the sake of
δίκην ' in the manner of
πλήν ' except '
χωρίς ' apart
ἄνευ ' without
,
ἕνεκα ' for the sake of
ἄχρι, μέχρι, ' until.
1315. So far as they still survive in N, the above adverbs and their
substitutes but rarely take the genitive, as : κρυφὰ τοῦ δεῖνα, ὀπίσω ΜΟΥ,
ἀπάνω ΜΟΥ, κοντά Coy, ἀντίκρυτά του, ποτέ ΜΟΥ, ἀνάμεσα τῶ Αγὸ φιλῶ. They
are much more commonly followed by the preposition arò or els and
the accusative, a phenomenon, however, which is of ancient date, as:
Mal. 66, 6 & 144, 1ο ἄνω ἐν. 81, I ἔσω ἐν. So 245, 22. 98, 15 ἔμπροσθεν
ἐν. 113, 7 ἄντικρυς εἰc. 216, 21 & 347, I ἄνω εἰc. 352, 9 ἔσω εἰc.
Ν μέσα εἰς (μέσα c) τὴν καλύβα = ἐντὸς τῆς καλύβης. ἔξω ἀπὸ τὸ= ἔξω τοῦ.
ἀνάμεσα εἰς τούς = μεταξὺ τῶν. κάτω ἀπὸ τά (i. e. ὑπὸ τά 1508) = κάτω τῶν (ep.
Mal. 421, 6 κάτω ὑπὸ τὰ χώματα). κρυφὰ ἀπὸ τήν = κρύφα τῆς. χωρίς τόν
χωρὶς τοῦ.
II. ABLATIVAL GENITIVE.
1316. The ABLATIVAL GENITIVE stands as-
A. Genitive of separation:
I. With verbs and adjectives denoting a separation, removal,
release, distance, then impediment, yielding, as :
χωρίζω τινά TINOc separate
λύω, ἐλευθερόω τινά TINOc free
ἀπαλλάττω, σῴζω τινά TINOC
lieve'
εἴργω τινά τινος ' prevent
εἴκω τινί τινος yield
re-
ἀπέχω τινά TINO keep far from
ἀπέχω τινός ' am distant from
ἀπέχομαί τινος ' abstain from
χωρέω τινός (also τινί) yield'
καθαρός τινος 'pure from
ἐλεύθερος ' free from
1317. For the sake of greater perspicuity, this and the following class
of verbs and adjectives frequently take before the genitive the preposition
ἀπὸ or ἐξ, as : ἐλευθεροῦν ἀπαλλάττειν, σῴζειν, ἀπείργειν, κωλύειν, παύειν) ἀπό
Οι ἔκ τινος.-In the course of P times this alternative met with a wider
acceptance, especially in the common language and ultimately established
itself in N as the normal popular construction : ἐ]λευτερώνω, γλυτώνω,
ἀ]μποδίζω, σῴζω—ἀπό.
1318. 2. With verbs and adjectives denoting withdrawal,
privation, need, filling or fulness, and the like, as:
337
Z
1318-1327.]
GENITIVE, ABLATIVAL.
ἀποστερέω τινά TINoc deprive
ἀπορέω, σπανίζω τινός ' am in need ’κενάω τί τινος ‘empty
πληρόω ' [1] '
ἐνδεής TINO
needy'
γυμνός τινος ' naked
στέρομαι τινος 'am deprived of
κενός ' empty
ὀρφανός “ deprived of
πλήρης, μεστός, ' full.’
πένης destitute
1
ἔρημος ' deserted
Soph. Ant. 13 ΔΥΟΙ͂Ν ἀδελφοῖν ἐστερήθημεν δύο. Antiph. Com. 265
ὁ μηδὲν ἀδικῶν οὐδενὸς δεῖται νόμου. Men. Frg. 44Ι, 2 πολλῶν MECTON
ἐστι τὸ ζῆν φροντίδων.
γε
1319. This construction is foreign to B-N speech (1317), the accusative
having taken the place of the genitive, as: Apophth. 281 Α λῃστὴν γεμί
ζοντα τὴν κάμηλον τὰ σκεύη. 38 Β ταλαιπωρῶ πῶς αὐτὸν χορτάσω ἄρτον.-Ν
γεμίζω τὸ σταμνὶ Νερό, ἐχόρτασα ψωμί.
1320. Observe the peculiarities of δέω- (α) δεῖ μοί τινος (o. g. φρονήσεως)
4 am short of, noed; δεῖ ὀλίγογ come near being; πολλοί δεῖ it is far
from being - (4) δέω πολλον am far from being; τοοτογ ἐδέησα ‘I was
so far from '(ε) δέομαι TINOC 'sland in need of'; δέομαί τινός τι ' ask
somo ono for; ΤΟΥ͂ΤΟ ΥΜῶν δέομαι 'I ask this of you.
[Acta Xanth. 82, 29 οὐ τολμῶ ἐξ ἐμαυτῆς δεηθῆναι col, a macaronism. Cp. 1325.]
1321. Vorbs of depriving admit also of a double accusative. (1279.)
1322. 3. With verbs of beginning and ending :
Xen. Cyr. 1, 5, 13 πειρᾶσθε σὺν τοῖς θεοῖς ἄρχεσθαι παντὸς ἔργου.
Hell. 2, 2, 13 ἔπαυσαν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι Τιμόθεον τῆς στρατηγίας. Eur. Med. 121 1
ἔπειτα θρήνων καὶ γόων ἐπαύσατο.
1323. In N this genitive has made room for the accusative. (1242;
but cp. 1327.)
>
1324. There is a difference between ἄρχω and ἄρχομαι: ἄρχω τινός και
the first to bogin, open '; ἄρχομαί TINOC ' commence (also ἀπό, ἐκ' from '),
'open';
as : ἦρχε του λόγου he opened the discussion '; ἤρξατο τον λόγον ὧδε hie
bogan his speech thus.' (1471.)
1325. 4. With verbs denoting an action of the senses :
ἀκούω, πυνθάνομαι, ‘hear”; αἰσθάνομαι perceive, feel’; ὅζω have
a small, smell'; οσφραίνομαι smell'; ἀκροῶμαι listen, ἅπτομαι touch,
'feel.'
Pl. Apol. 17 Β ἀκούσασθε ἐμοῦ πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν.
πέμπει ἄνδρα πευσόμενον τοῦ ἐΞΗΓΗΤΟΥ͂ ὅ,τι χρείη ποιεῖν.
τί δῆτα βούλει δεύτερον μαθεῖν ἐΜΟΥ͂;
>
Euthyph. 4 c
Eur. Hec. 9gr
[Acta Punli of Thoolne 253, 8 οὐχ ἅψεταί μοι πειρασμός, & macaronism. Cp. 1320.]
1326. In N this genitive has made room for the accusative. (1242;
but cp. 1327).
1327. When the above (1325) object is not a person but a thing, it
generally stands in the accusative. However observe: ἀκούω and
αἰσθάνομαι τι = hear something'; ἀκούω and αἰσθάνομαι τιΝΟΣ (person
or thing) 'liston to':
Xen. Λn. 4, 4, 21 ἀκούσαντες τὸν θόργΒοΝ οὐχ ὑπέμειναν. Mon. 566 ἄκουε
πάντων, ἐκλέγου δ' & συμφέρει. 384 νέος ὢν ἀκούειν τῶν Γεραιτέρων θέλε.
So tou in N: άκουσε τὰ λόγια μου, ἄκουσέ ΜΟΥ, μυρίζεις τον Διαβολογ.
1298 f.)
(Cp.
338
GENITIVE,
[1328-1337.
ABLATIVAL.
1328. B. The comparative genitive stands with adjectives
and verbs containing the notion of superiority or inferiority (1187):
Men. 477 σιγή ποτ' ἐστὶν αἱρετωτέρα λόγου. 528 φιλεῖ δ᾽ ἑΑΥΤΟΥ͂
πλεῖον οὐδεὶς οὐδένα. Th. 6, 16, 1 προσήκει μοι μᾶλλον ἑτέρων (=ἢ ἑτέροις)
ἄρχειν. Pl. Menex. 237 D άνθρωπος ξυνέσει υπερέχει τῶν ἄλλων.
Th. I, 91, 5 ΟΥΔΕΝὸς ὕστεροι γνώμῃ ἐφάνημεν ἡμεῖς. Pl. Lach. 190 D τί
ἂν προελοίμεθα τῶν τῆς ἀρετῆς μερών ; Dem. 23, 211 οἱ ἡμέτεροι πρόγονοι
διενηνόχασιν ἁπάντων ἀρετῇ. More examples in 514.
1329. For this genitive N has substituted παρὰ and ἀπὸ with the
accusativo (1188. 1311).
1330. The genitive of material denoting the substance out of
which something is made:
Dem. 22, 70 οἱ στέφανοι οὐκ ἴων ἢ ῥόδων ἦσαν ἀλλὰ χργείου.
1331. The genitive of material may be replaced by the adjective derived
therefrom (1060) or the preposition ἀπὸ or ἐκ (1245). The latter (preposi-
tional) alternative met with popular favour in P, and N accordingly
expresses the genitive in question by and with the accusative.
1332. C. The genitive of cause accompanies verbs and
adjectives of emotion:
ἄγαμαί τινά τινοc admire
θαυμάζω τινά τιNoc wonder
εὐδαιμονίζω, μακαρίζω τινά TINOC
'deem happy
οἰκτίρω τινά τινoc pity
ζηλύω, φθονέω τινά TINOC 'envy
ὀργίζομαί τινί τινος (am angry
μέμφομαι τινί τINOc blame.
τιINOC
1
Soph. Εl. 1027 ζηλώ σε ΤΟ ΝΟΥ, ΤΗς δὲ Δειλίας στυγώ. Agathon
Frg. 25 σοφίας φθονῆσαι μᾶλλον ἢ πλούτου καλόν.—θαυμάσιος του κάλλους,
εὐδαίμων τον τρόπον καὶ τῶν λόγων.
1333. For this genitive of cause (1332), ἐπὶ with dative, διὰ with
accusative, and other prepositional constructions are also current in
4 (1389), and these alternatives have gradually led to the exclusive
practice in N of expressing the above relation by dià (now yɩà 155, a)
with the accusative (1336).
1334. The genitive of cause stands also in exclamations to denote the
cause of the fooling: οἴμοι κακῶν, οἴμοι ταλαίνης, φεῦ τοῦ ἀνδρός, ὦ τον
θαύματος.
1334". In G-B compositions, interjections are often constructed with
the dative or accusativo, as: Sept. Recl. 4, το οὐαὶ αὐτῷ. Esai. I, 4 οὐαὶ
ἔθνος ἁμαρτωλόν. Jor. 6, 4 οὐαὶ ἡμῖν. Epict. 3, 19, 1 οὐαί μοι, Basil. iii. 645 A
οἴμοι τὴν κεφαλήν. Acta Xanth. 59, 24 & 64, 27 οἴμοι τῇ ἀθλίᾳ. Apoc.
Mar. 122, 14 & 123, 27 οὐαὶ τοὺς ἁμαρτωλούς.
1335. Should the person towards or against whom the emotion is
felt be expressed, it usually stands in the dative (1355): θυμοῦσθαι,
ὀργίζεσθαι, χαλεπαίνειν, μνησικακεῖν ΤΙΝΙ TINOC.
1336. As expected, this dativo is expressed in N by the (datival)
gonitivo (1247, 1356, 1583, 4) :
θυμώνω, μανίζω, χολιάζω, παραπονοῦμαι, ὀργίζομαι τον ΔεῖΝΑ ΓΙΑ ΤΟΥ͂ΤΟ.
1337. The genitive of design is proper to the articular infinitive, for which
500 3077 & Αpp. vi. 23 f.
339
Z 2
1338-1344.]
GENITIVE, ABLATIVAL.
1338. The genitive of price accompanies verbs and adjec
tives denoting buying, selling, valuing, renting :
ἀγοράζω ) τί τιμοc ‘buy
ὠνέομαι
TINOC
μισθύω τινά τινoc rent
"
TINOC
πωλέω, πιπράσκω τί τινος sell
ἀποδίδομαι τι τινός sell
ἀξιόω ' deem worthy.
Χen. Μem. 2, 1, 20 των πόνων πωλοῦσιν ἡμῖν πάντα τἀγάθ' οἱ θεοί.
Pl. Phaed. 98 Β οὐκ ἂν ἀπεδήμην πολλοῖ τὰς ἐλπίδας. Αpol. 20 Β πόσογ
διδάσκει ; --πέντε ΜΝΟΝ.
7
So further: πολλοῦ ‘dear, ὀλίγου ‘cheap. τιμῶ τι πολλοῦ ὀλίγου)
'I value a thing much (little).'
1339. Beside πολλοῦ, A commonly uses περὶ πολλοῦ περὶ πλείστου), περὶ
παντός, in the case of ποιεῖσθαι 'value' (1642).
Pl. Crit. 48 Β οὐ τὸ ζῆν περὶ πλείστου ποιητέον ἀλλὰ τὸ εὖ ζῆν.
1340. For the genitive of price, åvrì is also admissible (1501; in & also
and 1511).
As to P-N, els is not rare in post-christian compositions
(1553), while N usos the simple accusative (so even Porph. Adm. 232, 21
ἐκτιμηθὲν καὶ αὐτὸ λίτρας δέκα).
1341. The genitive of time stands in a loose connexion
answering to the questions either When? or Since when? In the
former case, it refers to a general division of time and has
no attribute, in the latter it is accompanied by a specifying
attribute :
1
α. νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας 'by night and day,' θέρους in summer time,
χειμῶνος ‘in winter time, τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ each year, τοῦ μηνός per
month.' Aeschin. 3, 24 ΠΟΙΟΥ ΜΗΝὸς καὶ ἐν τίνι ἡμέρᾳ ἐχειροτονήθη
Δημοσθένης ;
b. πολλοῦ (πλείστου) χρόνου long since. πέντε, δέκα ἡμερῶν ' within
five, ten days. ταύτης τῆς νυκτός—τῆς ἡμέρας ὅλης,τοῦ λοιποῦ (sc. χρόνου)
in future.'
1342. The above relation of time may also be expressed by the
accusative, aus : CIA ii. 1055 (345 Β. C.) πεντήκοντα δυοῖν δραχμῶν τὸν
ENIAYTÓN. So too 'Enµ. ȧpx. 1883, p. 123-4 (329 B.C.), 70. This expedient
is exclusively resorted to in N speech (1242. 1274 f.; cp. Apophth.
380 Λ δὶς ΤΟΝ ΜΗΝΑ, 1314), the genitive being still used only in some
isolated adverbial expressions, as : τοῦ λοιποῦ, τοῦ χρόνου, τοῦ καιροῦ,
'next year."
1343. On the other hand, N sometimes expresses the manner by a loose
genitive, as : στερεᾶς καὶ τοῦ πελάγους = κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλασσαν, τοῦ
μάκρους lengthwise, τοῦ πλάτους (breadthwise, τοῦ ψήλους, (του) τοίχου
τοίχου along the wall, του κάκου ‘in vain.
1344. Peculiar to P-B Greek, especially since G times, is the exten-
sion of the above temporal genitive to cases where the accusative with
or without éì or du + genitive would be more appropriate, that is
in the sense of during (1527. 1574).
Luc. ii. 571 ἔοικα δὲ ἐνταῦθα διατρίψειν τριῶν ἢ πέντε ἡμερών. Phil. 362
Ημερῶν δὲ τετταράκοντα διαλεχθεὶς ἐν Ὀλυμπίᾳ. 365 ΔΥΟῖς ἐνδιατρίψας ἐτοΐν.
Clement. 1, 15 ήμερῶν δὲ διατρίψας. 358 ἡ ζήτησις τριῶν ἐπεκράτησεν ἡμερῶν.
ὁ Ὑπάτιος
12, 1 MIA Ημέρας ἐκεῖ μείναντες. Callin. 64, 9 μιας γοῦν Ημέρας
πάνυ πολεμηθείς. 67, 19. 70, 2 ἦν γὰρ ἡμερῶν μὴ γευσάμενος. 123, 1 Ημερών
I HMEрWN
δὲ ὀγδοήκοντα τινὸς οὐ μετέλαβεν τροφῆς. Porphyr. Vit. Plol. 52, 12 εἴκοσι καὶ ἐξ
ἐτῶν ὅλων ἐν τῇ Ῥώμῃ διατρίψας.
340
DATIVE.
[1345-1348.
1345. Elliptical is the use of the genitivo in connexion with names of
saints, on which see 1276.
1346. The genitive often accompanies also verbs compounded
with prepositions, which prepositions of themselves govern the
genitive. Such are in particular-
Από : ἀποτρέπω τινός dissuade from
ἀφίστημι τινός 'remove
ἐκ : ἐκβάλλω τινά TINOC expel
ἐξίστημι τινά τINOC
remove'
κατά: καταγελάω τινός ' deride
κατειπεῖν, κατηγορείν TINOC ‘accuse
κατακρίνω τινός condemn
καταδικάζω τινός sentence
πρό : προεστάναι τινός ' preside over
προστατεύω τινός protect
προέχω τινός excel
προκρίνω, προτιμάω τινά τιNOC ‘prefer.
ἀπογιγνώσκω τινός ' despair of
ἀφίσταμαι τιNOC desist from
ἐκπίπτω τινός 'am driven out
ἐξίσταμαι TINOC am turned out
καταφρονέω τινός despise
καταγιγνώσκω τινός condemn
καταψηφίζομαι TINoc vote against
προαιρέομαί τιNOC prefer
?
προτίθημι TINOC 'put before
προκινδυνεύω τινός run danger for
προτρέχω τινός ' run before.
1347. As expected, this construction is almost unknown to N, since the
force of the proposition has long faded away. For καταροῦμαι σου and the
like, if any, are felt as simple (cp. 1336).
THE DATIVE.
1348. Generally speaking, the personal dative, that is the dative
which indicates a person (or a thing conceived as a person), may be
replaced by the preposition πρὸς οι εἰς, sometimes also μετα
(RKühner ii². 423 A. 2, 3, 6, 7, 9, 12). This prepositional alterna-
tive, though not extensively used in 4, gains popularity in the
course of P and particularly G times, notably in connexion with eis
(ΔΜαυροφρύδης 511-521; GBWiner 266. 268 ; ΑButtmann 172. 188; εμ.
GHatzidakis 225 f.). With the opening of T, the preposition eis (or
rather 's, 1554) begins to be dropped, and the simple accusative appears
henceforward as a frequent substitute for the former personal dative.
(Sept. Ex. 34, 6 ἔδωκα αΥτὸν καὶ τὸν Ἐλιὰβ τὸν τοῦ ᾿Αχισαμὰχ καὶ παντὶ
συνετῷ καρδίᾳ . . . δέδωκα σύνεσιν. Acta Petri et Pauli 43 κἂν δοκεῖ αὐτὸν τοῦτο
είναι. Acta Tho. 28, 35 (S) είπεν αὐτοὺς ὁ ἀπόστολος. 42, 19 καὶ πάσας τάς
διὰ τῶν ἰδίων διακόνων ἀπέστελλε τὰ ἐπιτήδεια. 83, 26 (5) ἔδωκεν γὰρ αυτός
ἀπόστολος τὸ λουτρὸν καὶ τὴν ἐν Χριστῷ σφραγίδα. Το 87, 5. 89, 5 σὺ ὁ
μηνύσας Με τὸ σὸν ὄνομα. 93, 31 (R) ; 95, 5. Acta Xanth. 85, 13 δραμών
τις απήγγειλε τΗΝ ΞΑΝΘΙΠΠΗΝ τὴν παρουσίαν τῆς Πολυξένης. 59, 33 ὁ κἀμὲ τὴν
ἀναξίαν δείξας τὸν σπόρον τὸν ἀεὶ ζῶντα. Alchem. 305, 12 απιστοῦντες ΤΗΝ
ἐκ τῶν ὑγρῶν ὠφέλειαν. Apophth. 296 Β εἰπὲ τὸν Υἱόν μου ἐξελθείν.
JMoschos 2876 Β δηλοῖ ΑΥΤΟΝ ὁ γέρων Δεύρο ἕως ὧδε. 2877 a ¿dn-
λωσεν ΑΥΤΟΝ μερίδα πέμψαι τῆς αὐτοῦ κοινωνίας. 3068 Β δηλοῖ ΑΥΤΟΝ διὰ
φυλακίτου. Mal. 173, 6 βουλευόμενον τὰ περὶ τοῦ πολέμου ἐμήνυσεν αὐτὸν
Τιβεριανὸς ταῦτα. Theoph. 321, 2 ἐδήλωσε τὸν στρατὸν ἐκεῖ σωρευθῆναι ἵνα
πολεμήσωσί σε. Porph. Adm. 74, 5 ὁ βασιλεὺς δηλοποιεῖ μας ἀπελθεῖν,
153, 5 ἔδοξε τοὺς αὐτοὺς Σέρβλογα εἰς τὰ ἴδια ἀπελθεῖν. 208, 20 ἵνα ἀπέλθῃς
ἐν τῇ πόλει καὶ εἴπῃς τὸν Βασιλέα ἵνα ἀποστείλῃ καὶ παραλάβῃ τὸ κάστρον μου.
209, 9 ἐδηλοποίησε τὸν Βασιλέα ἡμῶν τὸν ἄΓΙΟΝ τοῦ ἀποστεῖλαι πιστὸν ἄνθρωπον.
211, η προεθυμήθη δοῦναι τὸ κάστρον αὐτοῦ μᾶλλον τόν Βασιλέα. δ οὖν Δαβίδ
τὴν ἑαυτοῦ χώραν οὐκ ἐδίδου τον Βασιλέα. 212, 15 οὐκ ἔγραφα τον πρωτο πΑ-
341
1348-1353.]
DATIVE PROPER.
•
•
θάριον περὶ τοῦ τοιούτου κάστρου.
å
Cer. 12, 12 ἐπιδίδωσιν ὁ δημο
κράτης, ἤγουν ὁ δομέστικος, τὸ λιβελλάριον τὸν Δεσπότην. 398 δίδωσιν ἕKACTON
τὴν ῥῶγαν ὁ βασιλεύς. 520, 5 λέγει τὸν ἀμεγάλιον ἀπελθόντα εἰσάξαι τὸν
λογοθέτην. Leo Gram. 352, 11 δηλοῖ τὸν πατριάρχης ὁ Λέων ὅτι ὁ λαὸς
σκανδαλίζεται διὰ τὰς εἰκόνας. Cp. 1373.
1349. This datival accusative is very common in Spancas, Prodromos, and all
other M-N popular compositions (1247. cp. GHatzidakis 222 f.).
1350. During B, however, a third substitute for the 4 dative made
its appearance in the simple genitive, as :
Porph. Cer. 376, 3 καλή coy ἡμέρα (beside 599, το καλὴ ἡμέρα ὑμῖν, ἄρχοντες)
Theoph. 211, τ8 ὑπαντήσαντες τοῦ Ῥωμαίων στρατεύματος; so ὅμοιός TINOC
(as Acta Xanth. 63, 10), Apoc. Mar. 120, 20 d dovλeúwv TOŶ NAOŶ. CIG
9121, 5 ζωὴν τοῦ κόσμου χαρισάμενος (2111 and [r]).
1350. This novelty seems to have appealed particularly to popular
taste, since we see it rapidly spreading during the succeeding M ages,
while the accusative with or without els (1348), though still popular, is
receding in proportion.
FTrinch. 65 (A.D. 1010) ἀφιέρωσεν αὐτῶν τῶν καλογήρων. 111 (A.D. 1034)
πουλῶ τον πρεσβτέρου. 189 (A.D. 1146) ἵνα μὴ ἐπιδώσω αὐτοῦ τίποτε. SCusa
306 εἶπεν τοῦ ἐπισκόπου. 417 ἔδωκεν ὁ ἡγούμενος ἡμῖν, τινός βοΐδιον, τινὸς
ἄλογον. 444 THC Ημετέραι απαρέσκει Μεγαλειότητος. Prodr. 1, 35 εἰ δὲ δύξει
(read dóğn) twN. (Cp. GHatzidakis 223.)
1350". In point of fact, with the latter part of M, this genitival repre-
sentative of the ancient personal dative may be considered to have
attained an indisputable ascendency in the popular speech, and
become the rule, such as it is now witnessed in N. (1242-7.)
1351. As to the dative denoting a thing (instrument, association,
cause, manner, measure, time, relation, &c.), the tendency has been,
ever since A, to replace it by a preposition appropriate to the sense
of the case, such as diá, év, oúv, èní, ég, áñó (RKühner ii². 425 A. 2, 3,
5, 6, 8; ib. 416 A. 2, 4), and above all μerú (1606 ff.). The special cases
of this phenomenon are treated in the sections of the respective
prepositions.
1352. The Greek dative performs four fundamental functions
in that it denotes-
a. the indirect or remoter object: dative proper (English to);
b. an associative relation dative of association (English with, for);
c. the instrument or manner: instrumental dative (English with);
d. a local relation answering to the question where? locative dative.
1352. In its last three functions (b-d), the dative corresponds
to the Latin ablative, and thus may be termed the ablatival
dalive.
I. DATIVE PROPER.
1353. The DATIVE PROPER indicates the indirect or remoter
object (to, towards) and accompanies—
A. 1. Transitive verbs denoting to give, send, say, promise,
advise, entrust, order-and their verbal substantives.
Men. 224 ἡ μωρία δίδωσιν ἀνθρώποις κακά. Aesch. Prom. 612 πυρὸς
Βροτοΐς δοτήρ' ὁρᾷς Προμηθέα.
Το δωρέομαι, παρέχω, λέγω, ὑπισχνέομαι, ὀφείλω, etc. τινί τι.
342
DATIVE PROPER.
[1354-1363.
1354. In N this class of verbs governs either the accusative or the
datival genitive (1247. 1348-50b).
1355. 2. Verbs (usually intransitive) denoting:
to seem, belong, profit, help, serve;
follow, obey, yield, vow, trust;
threaten, be angry, pardon, suffice;
and their verbal substantives.
Men. 391 ξένοις ἐπαρκῶν τῶν ἴσων τεύξῃ ποτέ. 372 Νόμοις ἕπεσθαι τοῖς
ἐπιχωρίοις καλών. 335 μὴ πάντα πειρῶ πλει πιστεύειν ἀεί. Th. 1, 84
Συμφοραῖς ἧσσον ἑτέρων εἴκομεν. Xen. An. 7, 3, 39 τῷ νόμῳ τῷ ὑμετέρῳ
πείσομαι. 1, 4, 12 οἱ δὲ στρατιῶται ἐχαλέπαινον τοῖς στρατηγοίς. Pl. Alcib.
116 Α τὴν τοῖς φίλοις βοήθειαν λέγεις καλὴν εἶναι. (Cp. 1335.)
1356. Also this dative is rendered in N either by the accusative
(Callin. 133, 12 ὑπήκουον αὐτόν) or the genitive (r247): Callin. 94, 19 τὸ
πεισθῆναι αὐτοῦ. But for verbs denoting to be angry and the liko see
1335 1.
1357. 3. Verbs, adjectives, and other expressions denoting:
useful, fitting, convenient, agreeable,
similar, near, easy, favourable, etc.
as well as their opposites.
Men. 407 οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐχ αὑτῷ φίλος. [Isocr.] 1, 29 τοὺς
κακοὺς εὖ ποιῶν ὅμοια πείσει τοῖς τὰς ἀλλοτρίας κύνας αιτίζOYCIN. Pl.
Theaet. 151 c οὐδεὶς θεὸς δύσνους ἀνθρώποις. Th. 3, 42 τάχος καὶ ὀργὴ
εγβυγλία ἐναντία.
G-B: Apophth. 360 D τὸ διδάξαι ὅμοιόν ἐστι τοῦ ἐλέγξαι. Macar. 525 B
ἡ πικρίς ἐστιν ὁμοία της θρίλακος . καὶ ἐν αὐτῇ δὲ τῇ χάριτι ὁποία ἐστιν
ἀληθείας. Callin. 133, 5 ἴσον ἑαυτοῇ.
•
1358. In N this dative has been replaced, when depending on verbs, by
the accusativo or datival genitive (1247), whereas, when it depends on
adjectives and other kindred expressions, it is generally replaced by a pre-
position (εἰς, διά [γιάζ, μέ, 1351).
1359. Adjectives and adverbs denoting an equality or similarity often
take a co-ordinate construction instead of the dative:
Pl. Ion 531 D οἱ ἄλλοι ποιηταὶ οὐχ ὁμοίως πεποιήκασι καὶ ΟΜΗΡoc.
1360. This construction is foreign to P-N discourse, for the only instanco
in the NT writings Eph. 4, 10 ὁ καταβὰς αὑτός ἐστιν καὶ ὁ ἀναβὰς is irrelevant:
ὁ καταβὰς καὶ ὁ ἀναβὰς αὑτός ἐστιν.
1361. B. Under the dative proper further fall—
1. The dative of interest denoting the person or thing
for whose advantage or disadvantage something is or takes
place :
Men 352 μισῶ σοφιστὴν ὅστις οὐχ αὐτῷ σοφός. Soph. Αi. 1366 πας
ἀνὴρ αὐτῷ πονεῖ. Dem. 18, 205 οὐ τῷ πατρὶ καὶ τῇ μητρὶ μόνον γεγενήμεθα,
ἀλλὰ καὶ τῇ πατρίδι. Th. 4, 6 ἐσπάνιζαν τροφῆς τοῖς πολλοῖς.
1362. This dativo is rendered in N by a proposition : διά (γιά), εἰς (1351).
1363. 2. The ethical dative, mostly a personal pronoun,
implying a remote interest :
Μή μοι θορυβήσητε - οὕτως ἔχει καὶ ταῦτα. τί σοι μαθήσομαι ;
COL
343
1364-1371.]
DATIVE OF ASSOCIATION.
1364. In N this dative, which is very common, is naturally expressed by
the datival genitive (1247) : τί ΜΟΥ τον κυττάξεις; coἳ τον (έ)τίναξαν ἕνα
καλὸ ῥαβδί.
1365. 3. The dative of the agent (for ὑπό + gen. 1695)
accompanying verbal adjectives in -τέος, frequently also passive
verbs (1464), especially in the perfect and pluperfect. In G-B
this dative may stand with any tense indiscriminately :
ἀσκητέα πλειν ἀρετή. τί μοι τὸ πρακτέον; “what am I to do? τὰ
ἡμῖν πεπραγμένα, " your deeds. Men. 511 τάληθὲς ἀνθρώποισιν οὐχ
εὑρίσκεται.
1366. Both verbal adjectives in -τέος and the perfect being
extinct in N (1951-2. 1875), the above construction is naturally un-
known to present speech.
1366. In G-B this simple dative of the agent is often proceded by èv
(1381b).
1367. 4. The dative of the possessor accompanying the
verbs εἰμί, γίγνομαι, and the like:
Xen. An. 1, 2, 7 ἐνταῦθα Κύρῳ βασίλεια ἦν καὶ παράδεισος. ἔστι ΜΟΙ
ὄνομα πὀνομάζομαι. Pl. Prot. 315 Ε ἔδοξα ἀκοῦσαι ὄνομα αὐτῷ εἶναι
Αγάθωνα.
1368. For the expression ἔστι Μοι N uses the equivalent ἔχω.
1369. 5. The relative dative, especially with the participle
of intransitive verbs, denoting the relation: 'as regards,' 'from
the standpoint of."
Xen. Hell. 2, 1, 27 ἦν ἡμέρα πέμπτη ἐπιπλέογει τοῖς ᾽Αθηναίοις.
Th. 1, 24 Επίδαμνός ἐστι πόλις ἐν δεξιᾷ εἰ πλέοντι ἐς τὸν Ιόνιον κόλπον.
5ο Διαβάντι, προϊοYCIN, etc. (ὡς) εγνελόντι εἰπεῖν, ‘to put it shortly.
Xen. Hell. 4, 1, 11 ἐπανέλθωμεν, εἴ coι ἡδομένῳ ἐστί, if it is agreeable
to you.'
Το 100 γίγνεταί μοι Βουλομένῳ, ἀχθομένῳ, to my pleasure, dis-
pleasure.'
1370. The above construction is unknown to N owing to the
absence of the appropriate participle (2170).
II. DATIVE OF ASSOCIATION.
1371. The DATIVE OF ASSOCIATION denotes a friendly or
unfriendly association. It accompanies verbs, adjectives, and
adverbs implying the idea of—
approaching, meeting, accompanying, following ; communicating,
mixing, reconciling, conversing; being like or unlike, agreeing,
warring, quarrelling, and the like :
Men. 475 σοφοῖς ὁμιλῶν καὐτὸς ἐκβήσῃ σοφός. 247 θεῷ μάχεσθαι δεινόν
ἐστι καὶ τύχη. 798 ὡς ἡδὺ εγνέσει χρηστότης κεκραμένη. Xen. Mem. 2, 4,
8 οὐκ αἰσχρόν ἐστι τοῖς πονηροΐς διαφέρεσθαι. An. 2, 1, 13 ἀλλὰ φιλοσόφῳ
ἔοικας, ὦ νεανίσκε.
21
So too : ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ' at day-break '; ὁμοῦ, ἐφεξῆς ΤΙΝΙ. (Cp. 1357 f.)
So further: ἴδιος, οἰκεῖος, κοινός, ἀλλότριός τινι (also τινος 1288), ὅμοιός
ΤΙΝΙ.
(Cp. 1359.)
1
344
DATIVE OF INSTRUMENT.
[1372-1381.
1372. On the same principle & autós TINI ‘identical with.' (Cp. 1359 f.)
1373. Observe πολεμεῖν οι μάχεσθαί τινι ' to fight against';-cYN TINI OF
META TINOC'in alliance with.'
1373. For P-N seo 1348 and ep. CGL 647, 4 οἰκοδεσπότης προερχόμενος
ΠΗΝΤΗΣΕΝ ΤΟΥ͂ φίλογ αὐτοῦ ' occurrit amico suo.
1374. Bordering on the above dative of association is that
denoting a military body accompanying some one :
ὀλίγῳ στρατεύματι ἐφέπεσθαι Δισχιλίοις ὁπλίταις στρατεύειν. Xen.
Cyr. 5, 3, 35 ἡμεῖς καὶ ἵπποις τοῖς δυνατωτάτοις καί ἀνδράσι πορευόμεθα.
Aesch. Pers. 748 πολλὴν κέλευθον ἤνυσεν πολλῷ στρατῷ.
1375. So too αὐτῷ οι αὐτοῖς together with all, as : Th. 7, 25, 4 μίαν ναῦν
λαμβάνουσιν αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν, ' crow and all.
1376. The dative of association, when used in the sense of in
company with, is often preceded by the preposition σύν :
Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 19 CYN θεοῖς οὐδενὸς ἀπορήσωμεν. Eur. Frg. 238 ΕΥΝ
αγρίοισι τὰ καλὰ γίγνεται πόνοις.
1377. In N the rolation of association is generally expressed by means
of the preposition μέ, the modern representative of μετά (1381).
1378. Many verbs compounded with σύν, ἐν, ἐπί, πρός, sometimes
also περί, παρά, ὑπό, take a dative on the strength of the sense under-
lying the preposition.
cύη: σύνειμι ' am with
συμπονέω ' suffer together
συμφωνέω 'agree
1
ἐν: ἐντυγχάνω come across
ἔνειμι ' am inside
ἐπί: ἐπιβουλεύω ' play false
ἐπιτίθεμαι attack
πρός: προσέρχομαι ' come to
"
συμμαχέω ' fight in company with
συμπράττω ‘co-operate
συναλλάσσω τινά τινι reconcile with
ἐμμένω ' persist, abide
ἐμπίπτω ' full in
ἐπιτρέπω ' permit
'
ἐπίκειμαι ' press on
προσέχω τὸν νοῦν τινι 'pay attention
III. INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE.
1379. C. The INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE denotes the means or
instrument by which something is done:
-
βάλλειν λίθοις, κτείνειν ξίφει ἀποθνήσκειν φαρμάκω. οὐδεὶς ἔπαινον
ΗΔΟΝΑῖς ἐκτήσατο.
1380. The verb χράομαι 'use' takes the dative of means: λόγῳ
Xpóμevos 'by using reason,' by means of reason,' as: Aesch. Ag. 953
ἑκὼν γὰρ οὐδεὶς Δογλίῳ χρῆται Ζγρῷ. But in GB χρῶμαι τινὸς and
τι, as : Callin. 80, 13 χρώμενος ΜΗΔΕΝὸς ἰατρον. Alchem. 309, 17 ΑΝ
χρῶνται οἱ χρυσοχόοι.
1381. The instrumental dative is sometimes replaced, notably in P
Greek, by the prepositions διά, ἐν, σύν, und μετά. In progress of time
μera prevailed over the rest and ultimately established itself in N as
the only representative, mostly in the mutilated form μέ (1608). For
examples see the respective prepositions (1531. 1559-62. 1669 fl.
1605, b. 1607 ff.).
345
1381b-1389.]
DATIVE OF INSTRUMENT.
1381. In G-Bunscholarly and particularly Christian compositions, the
dative of instrument, moans, manner, etc., is very often preceded by the
proposition év. This practico, under Hebrew influence, gainod great
popularity among post-christian writers, undoubtedly because the simple
instrumental dative had lost touch with the living language, and so the
scribes of the time sought to bring it into closer connexion with the
rost of the sentence by means of è, the most familiar companion of the
dativo (1562. 1366). Examples in 1562.
1382. The dative of manner denotes the mode or circum-
stances in which something takes place. It is usually accom-
panied by somo attribute.
τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ ' in this way'; οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ in no way '; παντὶ τρόπῳ
in every way'; πολλῷ θορύβῳ “ with a great noise'; μεγάλῃ σπουδῇ
Gin great haste'; οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ without any order '; τῷ ἔργῳ, τῷ ὄντι,
in effect,' 'in reality'; r Xóуæ, прodáσei, ostensibly'; Spóuo 'run-
λόγῳ, προφάσει, * δρόμῳ
ning'; oy 'silently'; onoud 'hastily'; Bía 'by force'; Kown 'in
common'; Snμooių 'publicly.'
1383. This dativo, which occurs also in P-B Greek (as: Callin. 63, 5
ταῦτα ἔλεγεν πίστει. 64, 19. 97, 6 καθεζόμενον εχΗΜΑΤΙ βασιλική. 98, 10), 18
rondered in N by means of adverbs, and adverbial expressions formed
chiefly with μέ (1.0. μετά 1381), as: μὲ τὸ παράπονο, μὲ κανένα τρόπον, μὲ
μεγάλη βιάση.
1384. The dative of comparison denotes the degree of dif-
ference between two items compared (by so much, by fur, etc.).
πολλῷ (Μακρῷ) κρεῖττον, ὀλίγῳ ἐλάττους τριακοσίων, πολλοῖς ἔτειν ὕστε-
ρον. ὅτῳ TOCOÝT the more . . the more.' Aesch. Prom. 514
τέχνη δ᾽ ἀνάγκης ἀσθενεστέρα Μακρῷ.
1385. Instead of the dutive (Hdt., Th., Dem.), the accusative is
equally common (Homer, Xen., Pl.) : πολύ χεῖρον, ὀλίγον πρότερον. Το
always ri 'a little,' oùdèv 'not at all'; ouder hooov nevertheless.' (Cp.
1278.)
T
1386. So always in N, tho dative having become extinct (232. 1242-7):
πολύ (πολλά) μεγαλύτερος, ὀλίγο χαμηλότερος.
1387. The dative of cause denotes the motive of some action
and particularly emotion (1388. 1582, d. 2128):
Men. 15 ἀβολίᾳ τὰ πολλὰ βλάπτονται βροτοί. Eur. Frg. 564 ἀλλ᾽
ἄλλος ἄλλοις μᾶλλον ἥδεται τρόποις.
Το ποιεῖν τι εὐνοίᾳ, ἀγνοίᾳ, φθόνῳ, φόβῳ, ‘to do something out of
favour, ignorance, envy, fear.'
1388. This construction is common notably with verbs of emotion
(1387), such as
χαίρω, ἥδομαί τινι, rejoice at '
aλyéw 'feel pain at '
áðvµéw ‘am depressed at '
aloxúvopai am ashamed of'
ἀγανακτέω τινί ‘am indignant at
χαλεπῶς φέρω τινί 'worry aut
ayaráw TINI am content with something'
(also aуañáo тI and always Tiná).
1389. The dative after verbs of emotion can be expressed also by
means of appropriate prepositions, such as érì with dative (1582, d),
and Sià with accusative (1333. 1520, 2. cp. 1334 f.), In N it is regularly
rendered by Siá (yiú). 1336.
346
DATIVE, LOCATIVE.
[1390-1397.
IV. LOCATIVE DATIVE.
1390. D. The LOCATIVE DATIVE stands as
1. Dative of place answering to the question where? It is
peculiar to poetry, whereas prose writers use some preposition
(like ev, Tаρá, Tó, etc.), save in a few adverbial expressions,
as : τῇδε, ταύτῃ, κύκλῳ, etc.
1390. For a dative of specification see 1271.
1391. 2. Dative of time answering to the question when? It
is used chiefly in statements of a definite or exact date (day,
night, month, year, etc.), as :-(1275)
C
ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ' on this day
τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ the same day
τῇ προτεραίᾳ ' the day before
τῷ ἐπιόντι μηνί ' in the following
month'
tetáptų ětel, 'in the fourth year'
Tn vσTepaia the day after'
τῇ τετάρτῃ Ολυμπιάδι ' in the fourth
Olympiad '
Παναθηναίοις * at the Panathonaea
τῇδε τῇ νυκτί ' to-night
1392. Otherwise, for the time during which something takes place,
év is used, as :
Pl. Crit. 52 E ἐν ἔτεσιν ἑβδομήκοντα ἐν οἷς ἐξῆν σοι ἀπιέναι. Men. 150
ἐν νυκτὶ βουλὴ τοῖς σοφοῖσι γίγνεται.
So ἐν θέρει, ἐν χειμώνι ' during the summer, winter'; ἐν τῷ παρόντι
at the present time'; EN TOUTŲ 'meanwhile '; en ø ‘during,''while';
EN TOλéμ 'in time of war'; èn cipium in time of peace.'
ἐν πολέμῳ
1393. In N the dative of time has been replaced by the accusativo (1275),
sometimes (notably in dates) by els, the successor of èv (1547. 1550).
1394. In Pand more particularly G compositions, the extent of
distance and time is also often expressed by the simple dative
(apparently suggested by the Latin ablative 2144"), instead of the
accusative (1274).
Dion. H. i. 38, 35 Μηφύλα δὲ ὡς τριάκοντα σταδίοις ἄπωθεν Σούνης. Strab.
17, 1, 2 ὑπὲρ δὲ τὰς συμβολὰς τοῦ ᾿Ασταβύρα καὶ τοῦ Νείλου σταδίοις έπτακο-
cίοις Μερόην εἶναι πόλιν ὁμώνυμον τῇ νήσῳ. Jos. Ant. 11, 6, 8 τροφῇ καὶ πύτῳ
καὶ τοῖς ἡδέσιν ἀποταξαμένη τPICIN ἡμέραις. B. J. Proem. ἢ ἑλὼν κατὰ κράτος
tpicin
Ἱεροσόλυμα καὶ κατασχὼν ἔτει τρισί ΚΑΙ MHCIN ΕΞ. Epict. 2, 6, 19 OvdÉTOT'
οὐδέποτ'
οὐδεὶς τύραννος ἓξ MHCIN τινα ἔσφαξεν. Hrdn. Hist. 3, 15, η βασιλεύσας δὲ
7 dè
οκτωκαίδεκα ἔTECIN.
1395. In a fow isolated cases, the temporal dativo, owing to its frequent
use in Church, is either presorved as an adverbial expression, as: т@ Kаιрậ
ekeivo (opening words of the Gospel on every Sunday), or has given birth
to an abnormal nominativo, as: (T@ σaßßáтw), N To oаßßáтo 'Saturday,'
(τῇ τετράδι), Ν ἡ τετράδη (iustond of ἡ τετράδα), Wednesday' (340).
PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
1396. For the ordinary use of the personal pronouns, em-
phatic and unemphatic, see 528-30.
1397. For the omphatic nominative of the third person
347
1397-1401.]
PRONOUNS, PERSONAL.
αὐτός, the forms ὁ δέ, ὅδε, οὗτος, also ἐκεῖνος, may be substituted
according to the nature of the case and in conformity with the
individual force of each of these pronouns.
For ὁ δέ see 1197, U; for ὅδε 1425; for οὗτος 1428 ; for ἐκεῖνος 1430.
Th. 8, 76, 6 ἔφασαν τοὺς μὲν ἡμαρτηκέναι, ἀγτοὶ δὲ σῴζειν τοὺς νόμους.
4, 28, 2 (Κλέων) οὐκ ἔφη αυτός ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνον στρατηγεῖν.
1398. So too in N as far as regards τοῦτοs and ἐκεῖνος (1430). For ὁ
δὲ and ὧδε see 1197, b. & 1425.
1399. Along with its other features of circumstantiality, due
mainly to the need of perspicuity, P Greek exhibits a fondness for
a frequent use of personal and possessive pronouns (cp. GBWiner
176. 178), while A dispensed with them whenever they were readily
inferred from the context (1203). This P feature is the more
noteworthy as it soon led to an accumulation of unemphatic personal
pronouns, in particular of the oblique cases of the 3rd person, and
above all of the genitive which acted also as an emphatic possessive
pronoun (551):
Luke ro, 35 ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ ἐπανέρχεσθαί Με ἀποδώσω. Col. 2, 13 Mᾶς νεκροὺς
ὄντας . . . συνεζωοποίησεν {Mac. Luke 16, 2 φωνήσας αὐτὸν εἶπεν αὐτῷ. Mark
10, 16 εναγκαλισάμενος αὐτά, τιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ' αὐτὰ κατευλύγει αυτά. 7, 25
γυνὴ fic εἶχε το θυγάτριον αὐτῆς πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον. John 2, 11 ἐφανέρωσε
τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐπίστευσαν εἰς αὐτὸν οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῇ. μετὰ τοῦτο κατέβη
εἰς Καφαρναούμ αὐτὸς καὶ ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ
ΑΥΤΟΥ͂. Luke 6, 20 και αυτός ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ εἰς τοὺς μαθητὰς
ΑΥΤΟΥ͂ ἔλεγε. Mark 3, 31 καὶ ἔρχεται ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ ΑΥΤΟΥ καὶ
ἔξω στήκοντες ἀπέστειλαν πρὸς αὐτὸν καλοῦντες ΑΥ̓τόν. καὶ ἐκάθητο περὶ ΑΥΤΟΝ
ὄχλος καὶ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ. Hermas Mund. rr, 2 f. οὗτοι οὖν οἱ δίψυχοι ὡς ἐπὶ
μάγον ἔρχονται καὶ ἐπερωτῶσιν αὐτὸν τί ἆρα ἔσται αὐτοῖς. κἀκεῖνος ὁ ψευ-
δοπροφήτης λαλεῖ μετ᾿ αὐτῶν κατὰ τὰ ἐπερωτήματα αὐτῶν καὶ κατὰ τὰς
ἐπιθυμίας τῆς πονηρίας αὐτῶν καὶ πληροῖ τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν, καθὼς αὐτοὶ βούλονται.
αὐτὸς γὰρ κτλ.
I
1400. This frequency, which in the case of the 3rd person (αὐτὸν)
bordered on excess, soon led to a weakening, that is to tonoclisis,
then to reduction in the sense explained in 530-4.
1401. Consequent on this wenkening of the personal pronouns is the
rather frequent practice in T-N speech of placing before or after thom
the object of the verb (by way of apposition) for the sake of groater
perspicuity (cp. 1439; for A see RKühner2 937 f.) :
δ
ΝΤ. Matt. 4, 16 τοῖς καθημένοις ἐν χώρᾳ καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου φῶς ἀνέτειλεν αὐτοῖς.
Protov. Jac. 15, 2 ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΘΕΝΩΝ ἣν παρέλαβεν ἐκ ναοῦ κυρίου ἐμίανεν ΑΥΤΗΝ.
Vita Epiph. 69 ο ρ' NOMIΣMATA & κεχρεώστηκέν μοι ὁ σὺς ἑταῖρος, δός μοι
ΑΥΤΑ. Ν τί θά το κάμης αυτό ; ' what will you do with it ?' τί Με μέλει ΜΕΝΑ ;
what do I caro ?' (ep. Ital. cosa m' importa a me 3). ἐκεῖνον δὲ θά τον πειράξουν,
hiu--they will not touch him '; δέν το είδα το καλό του I have had no bonolit
from him,' MÈ ẞrétteis, éména; ' do you see me?' THn eîdes th žanhuŶλa; ' woll,
have ye soon the fair maid ? τὸν ἀδερφό σου που τον πίστεψα ' your brother
in whom I had trusted, τὸ θέλεις αυτό; do you want this ? (Cp. Alchen
348, 16 τὸ δὲ λευκὸν τοῦ ᾠοῦ καὶ αὐτὸ ἀνάσπασον.)
C
348
PRONOUNS, REFLEXIVE.
[1402-1411.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
1402. The reflexive pronouns are used—
a. Either as direct reflexives, when they refer to the sub-
ject of their own clause:
σύνοιδα ἐΜαγτῷ--γνῶθι cαγτόν—ὁ σοφὸς ἐν αὐτῷ περιφέρει τὴν οὐσίαν.
So too in N, as: κάθ᾽ ἕνας κυτάζει τὸν ἀπατόΝ ΤΟΥ (546-8).
1403. For δοκῶ ἐμαυτῷ the construction δοκῶ μοι is more common.
1404. b. Or as indirect reflexives, when they occur in a
dependent clause, but refer to the subject of the principal sen-
tence:
>
Th. I, III, 1 Ορέστης φεύγων ἔπεισεν Αθηναίους ἑαυτὸν κατάγειν.
For N see 1405.
1405. For the indirect reflexive of the third person, ἑαυτόν,
we very often meet-
α. With the oblique cases of αὐτός, when the case is viewed
from the narrator's point of view, as :
Xen. An. 5, 6, 36 ἔρχονται πρὸς Ξενοφῶντα καὶ λέγουσιν ὅτι μεταμέλοι
αυτοίς. 3, 1, 7 Ξενοφῶν οὐ τοῦτο ἠρώτα, πότερον λῷον εἴη αὐτῷ (sibi)
πορεύεσθαι ἢ μένειν.
So too in N, as : μᾶς ἐρώτησε τί τον θέλομε".
1406. The reflexive of the 3rd person may refer also to the ist or
2nd person (cp. ADyroff, 184 fl.) :
Lys. 12, 33 ἡμῖν οὐκ ἐξῆν παρ' αὐτοῖς εἶναι. Xen. Hell. 4, 1, 35 ἔξεστί σοι
μεθ᾿ ἡμῶν γενομένῳ ζῆν καρπούμενον τὰ ἑαυτοῖ.
1407. This is by far commoner in P-B, as: Mart. Petri 82, 16 ἐγὼ γὰρ
ἀνελθὼν ἑαυτὸν ἐπιδείξω τῷ ὄχλῳ. 82, 11 χωρίσατε τὰς ἑαυτῶν ψυχάς.
1407. The great frequency of ἑαυτὸν then and its consequent weakening
has led to the N practice of appending to it all three persons of the
personal pronoun : τὸν ἑαυτό μου, τοὺς ἑαυτούς σας (546).
1408. b. With the dative forms oἳ or oi and σφίσιν, more rarely
the genitive σφῶν and accusative σφᾶς (526):
Xen. An. 1, 1, 8 Κῦρος ἠξίου ἀδελφὸς ὢν βασιλέως δοθῆναι οἱ (sibi)
ταύτας τὰς πόλεις. 1, 8, 2 ἐδόκουν οἱ Ἕλληνες ἀτάκτοις αφίσιν ἐπιπεσείσθαι
βασιλέα.
1409. These forms became extinct as early as A times (526).
1410. The plural of the reflexive pronouns is also very fre-
quently used instead of the reciprocal pronouns :
Dem. 4, 10 βούλεσθε περιιόντες αὐτῶν πυνθάνεσθαι; Pl. Rep. 621
δικαιοσύνην ἐπιτηδεύσομεν ἵνα καὶ ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς φίλοι ὦμεν καὶ τοῖς θεοῖς.
Lys. 8, 19 πρὸς ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς τρέψεσθε κἄπειτα καθ' ἕνα ἕκαστον ΥΜΙΝ ΑΥΤΟΙΣ
ἀπεχθήσεσθαι. Dem. 48. 6 HMIN αὐτοῖς διαλεξόμεθα.
1411. This alternative met with popular favour in P times and so
has led to the establishment of the reflexive pronoun, particularly
349
1411-1417.1
PRONOUNS, POSSESSIVE.
of the 3rd person ἑαυτούς, etc., as the regular reciprocal form, and in
N by ἁτούς, απατούς, etc. (546-9), the ancient representative surviving
only in the phrase συναλλήλως μας (σας, των).
1412. In cases of emphasis, however, ancient popular speech re-
sorted also to other analytical substitutes. Thus in G we meet with
the periphrasis εἰς τὸν ἕτερον, εἷς τὸν ἕνα :
NT 1 Th. 6, 11 οἰκοδομεῖτε εἷς ΤΟΝ ΕΝΑ. [Cyrill. A] x. 1085 Α οὐαὶ τοῖς
διαβάλλουσιν εἷς τῷ ἑνί.
1413. Following this process, N now expresses the notion of reciprocity
through the form ὁ ἕνας τὸν ἄλλο, one another,' as do the Romance
languages (e. g. Ital. l'un l'altro).
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
1414. For the form, distinction and usage of possessive pro-
nouns see 551-7.
Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 7 σοὶ τοῦτο δίδωμι, ὅτι Μογ τὴν μητέρα τιμᾷς. Dem. 40,
8 καὶ ὑμεῖς ἅπαντες τοὺς ἡμετέρογς παῖδας ἀγαπᾶτε. Xen. An. 2, 2, 8
ἀφικνοῦνται παρὰ ᾿Αριαῖον καὶ τὴν ἐκείνον στρατιάν. Soph. Εl. 880 κἀπὶ
τοῖς αγτῆς κακοῖσι κἀπὶ τοῖς ἐμοῖς γελᾷς. Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 1 Αστυάγης τὴν
ἑαυτοῦ θυγατέρα μετεπέμψατο καὶ τὸν παῖδα αὐτῆς. Lys. 24, 14 μάλλον
πιστεύετε τοῖς Υμετέροις αὐτῶν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἢ τοῖς τούτου λόγοις.
1415. The possessive relation in certain cases is indicated by the
mere presence of the article (1203).
ἴδιος
1416. For the emphatic and reflexive forms under 553 and 555, the
synonymous adjective idios (also oikeîos) 'own' was commonly sub-
stituted (556; cp. ἴδιος [and οἰκεῖος] in the Lexica ; also ιδιοπραγεῖν
[οικειοπραγείν] etc.). In the course of / times ἴδιος gained greater
popularity and finally prevailed over its associates:
ΓΙΑ ii. 470, 71. 8ο (69 Β.Ο.) : κάλλιστον ὑπόδειγμα τῆς ἰδίας φιλαγαθίας τοῖς
μεθ᾿ ἑαυτοὺς ἀπολείποντες. CIA iii. 480 τὸν ἴδιον σωτήρα. 486 τὸν ἴδιον εὐερ
γέτην. 1344 τοῦ ἰδίου συντρόφου. 3399 καὶ ἑαυτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἰδίοις. Polyb. i. 80, 8
ἑκάστου κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν διάλεκτον συμβουλεύοντος. Μat. 22, 5 ἀπῆλθον εἰς τὸν
ἴδιος ἀγρόν. 25, 14 ἐκάλεσε τοὺς ἰδίους δούλους. Eph. 5, 22 αἱ γυναῖκες τοῖς
ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν ὑποτάσσεσθε.
1417. This is further corroborated by the express testimony of the
Atticists (Phryn. 405 τὰ ἴδια πράττω καὶ τὰ ἴδια πράττεις οἱ πολλοὶ λέγουσιν
εἰκῇ, δέον τὰ ἐμαυτοῦ πράττω καὶ τὰ σαυτοῦ πράττεις ὡς οἱ παλαιοί, τὰ ἴδια
ἐμαυτοῦ πράττω καὶ τὰ ἴδια σαυτοῦ πράττεις). With the gradual displace-
ment of the clumsy reflexive forms ἡμῶν αὐτῶν, ὑμῶν αὐτῶν, ἐμαυτοῦ,
σεαυτοῦ, by the short ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, μου, σου, αὐτοῦ (546), the more con-
venient combinations ἴδιος μου, ἴδιός σου, ἴδιος αὐτοῦ (or αὑτοῦ) etc. gained
general popularity (as Callin. 117, 31 κατεδίωκεν αὐτὸν ἴδιος ΑΥΤΟΫ
άνθρωπος), to the gradual elimination and obliteration of all other
synonymous terms.
When finally ἴδιος degenerated from its ordi-
nary meaning town, into that of same (613), the confusion was
removed by modifying ἴδιος into ἰδικός, a form ever since current in
popular speech, and since T, even in literary compositions, as: Maur 1,
ο τῶν ἰδικῶν αὐτοῦ ἀνθρώπων. Leo Taet. 11, 22 και τινας δικούς σου
ἀνθρώπους. 14, 93 διὰ τῶν ἰδικῶν αὐτοῦ ἀνθρώπων. That this ἰδικὸς has
been modified in N to ]δικός has been explained in 130 & 554.
350
PRONOUNS, DETERMIN. AND DEMONST. [1418-1429.
DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS.
1418. In A there is one determinative pronoun avròs which
means-
a. When it is emphatic, self (539):
αὐτὸς ὁ βασιλεύς, the king himself. τρίτος αὐτός (“himself being
third'), 'himself with two others.'
1418. Since G times it appears also as an equivalent to ouros 'the said.'
For examples see 1399.
1419. b. With the article prefixed to it: the same (540. 1239, e),
as: ô avròs ůvýp, 'the same man.
1420. Since G times, & avròs is used like the Latin idem: the one referred
to, the said (ovтos) (cp. 1437 b):
Ael. V.H 7, 3 68, 13. 69, 26. 94, 29. 102, 1 (cp. WSchmid iii. 66). Euagr. 2561 A
ὀφείλοντες τὸν αὐτὸν προτρέψασθαι Διόσκορον. 2773 Α ΤΗΝ ΑΥΤΗΝ νέαν Λαύραν.
Mal. 20, 9 ΤΟΥ ΑΥΤΟΥ͂ Πίκου. 24, 2 ὁ Αὐτός Ἥλιος. 26, 5 οἱ αὐτοὶ Σκύθαι, et
passim. Chron. 67, 2 ó aỶтoc Kpúvos. 69, 5 o aỲтoс Пíños, et passim. Porph.
Adm. 153, 5 ἔδοξε τους αντυγο Σέρβλους εἰς τὰ ἴδια ἀπελθεῖν,—ot passim.
1421. c. In its oblique cases, it serves as a mere personal pro-
noun 3rd person: autóv 'him,' avr@ 'to him,' etc. See 525.
1422. In P and particularly G times, it becomes enclitic, and later
is reduced to άτον, τον (530).
1423. Of its modified and mainly popular forms eurós, árús, and *τós-
a. Euròs is equivalent to oûTOS, 'this' (542).
b. 'Arús, simple, lingers merely in its oblique cases, and that chiefly in
the Pontic dialect (543), as: elda áróv, eixa àтoús, eîñev åtá.
On the reflexive form åтòv soe 546.
c. *Tos, used mainly in its oblique cases, is a tonoclitic personal
pronoun : him, etc. (542 f.)
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
1424. Of the demonstrative pronouns-
1. ‘O, Tó, ý, had assumed the office of the article even in
pre-classical antiquity (1195).
For its demonstrative use see 1197-8; for its history see 1195-8.
1425. 2. "Ode, Tóde, de, this (one here),' points to something
ncar, present, or immediately following, either in reality or in
conception. Soo 1430b.
1426. In N it has become almost extinct (564), its place having been
takon by ToÛTOS. Soo 1429 & 1430".
1427. 3. Αὐτός, αὐτό, αὐτή, has been already treated in 1418 f.
1428. 4. Οὗτος, τοῦτο, αὕτη, ‘this,' refers to something already
spoken of. See 1430".
1429. Its N representative Touros (566 f. 1426) corresponds rather
to de (1425); see 1430".
351
1430-1437b.]
RELATIVE.
PRONOUNS,
1430. 5. Ἐκεῖνος, ἐκεῖνο, ἐκείνη, that, points to something
distant or absent, either in reality or in conception. (Cp. 1425.)
So still in N (570).
1430. Od. a 76 ἡμεῖς οἵδε. Th. 2, 12, 3 ΗΔε (Ν τούτη) ἡ ἡμέρα. Xen. An.
1, 9, 29 τεκμήριον δὲ τούτου καὶ τόδε (Ν τοῦτο, αὐτό). Xen. An. 2, 1, 20 ΤΑΥΤΑ
(Ν τοῦτα, αὐτὰ μὲν δὴ σὺ λέγεις, παρ᾽ ἡμῶν δὲ ἀπάγγελλε τάλε (Ν τούτα).
Pl. Men. 9o c' όταν τούτο (Ν αὐτὸ λέγωμεν, τόδε Ν τοῦτο) λέγομεν, ὅτι
etc. Xen. An. 1, 3, 18 ἐγώ γε φημί ΤΑΥΤΑ Ν αυτά) φλυαρίας εἶναι.
Rep. 327 Β ηρόμην ὅπου αὐτὸς (so in N) εἴη. οὗτος (Ν αὐτός), ἔφη, ὄπισθεν
προσέρχεται.
ΡΙ.
1431. As ὅδε is related to οὗτος, so is τοιόσδε to τοιοῦτος, τοσόσδε to
τοσοῦτος, and ὧδε to οὕτως : Xen. An. 2, 5, 15 Κλέαρχος μὲν τοσαῦτα εἶπε,
Τισσαφέρνης δὲ ὧδε ἀπημείφθη.
1432. Observe: καὶ οὗτος ‘this also, καὶ ταῦτα ‘and that, τοῦτ'
ἐκεῖνο ' this is the very thing, that's it.
1
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
1433. Of the relative pronouns (and adverbs)
1. Ὅς, ὅτος, οἷος, (also ὡς, ον, ὅτε), point to something
definite and individual: who, that;
2. Οστις, ὁπότος, ὁποῖος, (also ὅπως, ὅπου, ὁπότε), refer to
something indefinite and generic: who(so)cver, whatever.
Men. 179 ἔστιν δίκης ὀφθαλμὸς ὃς τὰ πάνθ' ὁρᾷ. 340 μακάριος ὅστις
οὐσίαν καὶ νοῦν ἔχει. Ar. Ach. 442 δεῖ τοὺς θεατάς μ' εἰδέναι, δε εἴμ᾽
ἐγώ. Χen. Cyr. 1, 4, 12 οὐκ οἶδ' ὅστις ἄνθρωπος γεγένημαι.
1434. In N όπου οι ποῦ, ὅσος, ὅ,τι, ὡς οι καθώς, also ὡς καθώς, ὅπου, ὅταν),
correspond to class I, ὅποιος (also ὅπου), ὅσος, ὅ,τι ([ὡς] καθώς, ὅπου, ὅταν
οι ὑπόταν) to class 2.
1435. However, ὅστις stands also for ὅs, especially after a
negation expressed or implied, from which it follows that dotis
had, even in A, a wider scope than ős. Hence P Greek often
uses őσris indiscriminately for ős (cp. RKühner ii² 906; FKael-
ker 205 f.).
ΤΙ
οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅστις—τίς ἐστιν ὅστις οὐδεὶς ὅστις none
who'οὐδὲν ὅ,τι. πὼς ὅστις 'every one that 'P1. πάντες οι, all
who.' (2015).
1436. The phrase εἰσὶν οἵ (or ἔστιν οἳ
some), occurs very frequently through
1
there are those who (=τινές,
all the cases : ἔστιν ὧν, ἔστιν
οἷς, ἔστιν οὕς. Note further ἔστιν ὅτε sometimes, ἔστιν οὗ οι ὅπου
4 somewhere, ἔστιν ὅπως somehow. (2015.)
"
1
Pl. Phaed. 62 A ἔCTIN ὅτε καὶ οἷς βέλτιον τεθνάναι ἢ ζῆν.
1437. "Os has demonstrative force in the phrase: kai ős
and ho' (1197, c), 8 ős 'quoth he' (605).
1437. Similarly as and ὅστις are used, not froquontly in 4, but com-
monly since (under the influence of Latin qui), for ὁ δὲ or οὗτος (δέ),
as: Th. 2, 44; 3, 39. Soph. Ο.Ο. 731. 1354. O.R. 723. [Dom.] 26, 26
(27). Cullin. 64, 12 ὃν ἰδόντες οἱ ἀδελφοὶ διεσάφησαν τῷ ἀρχιμανδρίτῃ. 68, 23.
352
PRONOUNS, RELATIVE.
[1437b-1440.
ὅστις ἀπολυθεὶς καὶ εἰδὼς ποῦ εἰσιν οἱ ἄλλοι ἦλθεν. 113, 6 οἵτινες διηγήσαντο
ἡμῖν πολλὰ θαυμάσια, et passim. Mal. 37, 15 ὧΝΤΙΝΩΝ ἐκάλεσε τὴν χώραν
Μήδων. 39, 19 ὅστις βασιλεύει τῶν Βοιωτῶν—SO 21, 22, et passim. Cp.
RKühner2 938 f.
1438. The function of as (ὅστις) is often performed also by the post-
positive article. This usage, which is very common in the Ionic
dialect, found its way into Doric and Attic, and through the latter
became panhellenic, though only in those forms which begin with
7 (606; Kühner-Blass i. 133 A; RKühner ii² 906 A. 3; KMeisterhans"
123, 12; GBWiner 133). In this usage and form, especially from
the time when relatives began to admit of the article before them
(1219. cp. 2038), it has been preserved in N, chiefly in sententious
expressions. Otherwise it is now obsolescent, making room for the
usual ὅπου (606 f. 1220).
Α 125 ἀλλὰ τὰ μὲν πολίων ἐξεπράθομεν, τὰ δέδασται. Hdt. 1, 1 τὸν χῶρον
τὸν καὶ νῦν οἰκέουσι. 2 τἆλλα των εἵνεκεν ἀπίκατο. Eur. Andr. 810 κτείνουσα
τοὺς οὐ χρὴ κτανεῖν. CIA ii. 611, 11 (Β.Θ. 300) ὧν τε αὐτὸς ἐκυρίευσεν καὶ τὰ
πρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους ἐξελογίσατο. 622, 8 (Β.C. 200-150) τὰς λοιπὰς θυσίας
τὰς καθῆκεν θύειν. Apophth. 408 ο ἐκεῖνο τὸ ἐφάγομεν τῆς ἀγάπης ἦν. Leont.
Noap. V. J. 24, 12 ὅλα τὰ ἐθεάσω τὰ κεράμια. V. S. 1717 Α τὰ παιδία τὰ φιλῶ.
[Mal. 95, 8 ἔφυγε διὰ τῶν (ὧν) είχε μεθ᾿ ἑαυτοῦ πλοίων ἐκ τῆς Τροίας. 102, 3
μετὰ τοῦ οὗ ἐφόρει κοσμίου. 4 διὰ τὸν ἂν εἶχε πρὸς αὐτὴν ἔρωτα.] Alchem.
325, 11 ἀπὸ τὸ ἀσῆμιν τὸ ποιεῖς.
So in M, as : IStaph. 180 τα λεγόμενα γλυκέα τὰ γίνονται εἰς τὴν κεφαλήν.
ii. 168 ἔπαρε νερὸν τὸ οὐ θωρεῖ ὁ ἥλιος. Pul. 19 τὴν μέμψιν τΗΝ με ἔκαμες οὐ
μή την ἐβαρέθην. 85 καὶ ἀπ' τὴν πικριὰν ΤΗΝ εἶχες την καὶ πεῖναν, ταπεινέ μου.
So now : τὰ φέρν᾽ ἡ ὥρα, ὁ χρόνος δέν τα φέρνει, ' what a single hour may
bring forth a whole year may not.'
1439. As a distinct departure from A usage we may note the
peculiarity by which a relative is often conceived as a mere connec-
tive and so is followed by a redundant demonstrative placed after one
or more intervening words, but always within the relative clause (cp.
1401), as: Mark 7, 25 γυνὴ âc εἶχε τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον.
This is apparently a Hebraism initiated by the Septuagint, imitated
by the NT writers, and spread through their subsequent imitators to
common speech (1401).
N
(1
Sept. Ex. 4, 17 (τὴν ῥάβδον ταύτην ἐν ᾗ ποιήσεις ἐν αὐτῇ σημεία.
Lev. 11, 32 παν σκεῦος ὃ ἂν ποιηθῇ ἔργον ἐν αὐτῷ. 34 εἰς ὃ ἂν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ᾿
Αὐτὸ ὕδωρ. 13, 52. Num. 17, 5. Deut. 11, 25. NT Rev. 3, 8 Oúpav
ἠνεωγμένην ἣν οὐδεὶς δύναται κλεῖσαι ΑΥΤΗΝ. 7, 2 οἷς ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἀδικῆσαι
τὴν γῆν. Mark 13, 19 θλίψις οἵα οὐ γέγονε τοιΑΥΤΗ ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως.
Rev. 12, 6 εἰς τὴν ἔρημον ὅπου ἔχει ἐκεῖ τόπον ἡτοιμασμένον ἀπὸ θεοῦ. Το
ib. 14, etc. Acta Tho. 46, 3 ὧν οἱ ὀδόντες αὐτῶν. 59, 16 ὧν αἱ ἑαυτῶν
(=αὐτῶν) ψυχαί, Mart. Petri 86, 19 ὧν καὶ αὐτῶν ἀπέστησεν τὰς γυναῖ
Acta Pil. A 9, 1 εἰς ὃν οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ. Alchem. 22,
17 ὅν μετ᾽ ὀλίγας ἡμέρας εὑρήσεις ΑΥΤΟΝ.
κας.
Belth. 259 τὸν οὐκ ἐφθάσαν τον (ubi τα) ποτὲ τὰ βέλη. Sachl. 2, 248
δν καὶ οἱ φίλοι ἀρνοῦνται τον κ' οἱ συγγενεῖς του πλέον. Pul. 19 τὴν μέμψιν
ΤΗΝ με έκα
με ἔκαμες οὐ μή την ἐβαρέθην. — So now : φορέματα που ακόμη τα χρωστῶ.
μιὰ γυναῖκα ποΥ ΤΗΝ εἶδα κ' ἐπέρνα. See 1401.
1440. For the peculiarity of relatives to act as interrogativos see 2038.
353
Α Α
1441-1445.]
ATTRACTION OF RELATIVES.
ASSIMILATION OR ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE.
1441. A relative pronoun which refers to an antecedent
genitive or dative, but owing to the construction of the verb from
which it depends, should stand in the accusative, can be drawn
to the genitive or dative referred to, especially when it stands
in close connexion with it. This construction, called assimila-
tion or attraction of the relative, is a mode of expression more
or less favourite with all writers of all periods, from classical
antiquity down to B times.
Xen. An. 1, 7, 3 ὅπως ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίας ἣς κέκτησθε (for
ἦν κ.). Xen. An. 1, 3, 16 τῷ ἡγεμόνι πιστεύσομεν ᾧ ἂν Κῦρος διδῳ (for ὃν
ἂν Κ. διδῷ). NT Luke 2, 20 ἐπὶ πᾶσιν οἷς ἤκουσαν. John 2, 22 ἐπίστευσαν
τῷ λόγῳ ᾧ εἶπεν. Mark 7, 13 τῇ παραδόσει ὑμῶν ἡ παρεδώκατε, et passim.
Hermas Vis. 1, 3, 2 τοῦ πράγματος οῇ θέλει. 3, ΙΙ, Ι τῶν τριῶν μορφῶν ὧν
ἐπιζητεῖς. Acta Tho. 16, 2 τοῦ πραιτωρίου οἱ ἔκτιζεν Ιούδας, et passim.
Callin. 85, 10 τῶν ἔργων ὧν ποιεί. 88, 16 περὶ πάντων ὧν ἀνταπέδωκεν
ἡμῖν, et passim. Leont. Neap. V. J. 20, 13 τῶν μαζίων ὧν ἔλαβες.
13, 19 νοσοκομείοις οἷς αὐτὸς ἐποίησεν. 26, 1 χρυσίου οἱ ἦν κεκτημένος, etc.
(For N see 1445.)
1442. If the antecedent genitive or dative is a demonstrative
pronoun, it is generally dropped; but if it is a substantive, it
is transposed without article to the end of the relative clause :
Pl. Apol. 22 c οἱ χρησμῳδοὶ ἴσασιν οὐδὲν ὧν (for ἐκείνων ἃ) λέγουσιν.
Xen. An. 3, 1, 45 νῦν ἐπαινῶ σε ἐφ᾽ οἷς (for ἐπὶ τούτοις ) λέγεις τε καὶ
πράττεις. Xen. 1, 9, 14 τούτους ἄρχοντας ἐποίει ἢς κατεστρέφετο χώρας
(for τῆς χώρας ἣν κ. NT Luke 9, 36 απήγγειλαν οὐδὲν ὧν ἑώρακαν.
Heb. 5, 8 ἔμαθεν ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἔπαθεν τὴν ὑπακοήν. Luke 3, 19 περὶ πάντων ὧν
ἐποιήσεν πονηρῶν ὁ Ἡρῴδης. 19, 37 περὶ πασῶν ὧν εἶδον δυνάμεων. Acta
Tho. 16, 3 οὔτε ἄλλο ἐποίησεν ὧν ἐπηγγείλατο ποιῆσαι.
N
1443. Conversely, sometimes the antecedent is drawn to the case
of the relative (inverse attraction), as : Lys. 19,47 ΤΗΝ ΟΥΣΙΑΝ ΗΝ κατέλιπεν
οὐ πλείονος ἀξία ἐστί. Xen. An. 3, 1, 6 ἀνεῖλεν αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Απόλλων θεοῖς οἷς
ἔδει θύειν. Acta Tho. 66, 28 ἐκεῖΝΟΝ ὃν φιλῶ βελτίων σου ἐστίν.
1444. When two or more relative clauses are co-ordinated
to each other, the leading relativo, instead of being repeated
ench time in the case required by its verb, is either omitted
every subsequent time, or replaced by αὐτὸς (also οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος),
or by some other personal pronoun appropriate to the case.
Xen. An. 3, 2, 5 ᾿Αριαῖος ἐν ἡμεῖς θέλομεν βασιλέα καθιστάναι καὶ (sc. )
ἐδώκαμεν καὶ (sc. παρ' οὗ) ἐλάβομεν πιστά, ἡμᾶς κακῶς ποιεῖν πειρᾶται.
Cyr. 3, 1, 38 ποῦ δὴ ἐκεῖνος ἐστιν ὁ ἀνὴρ ὃς συνεθήρα ἡμῖν καὶ σὺ μάλα
ἐθαύμαζες αὐτόν; Soph. Ai. 458 f. καὶ νῦν τί χρὴ δρᾶν, ὅστις ἐμφανῶς
θεοῖς ἐχθαίρομαι, μισεῖ δέ Μ' Ελλήνων στρατός ;
1445. In N the assimilation of the relative in any of the forms
specified above (1441-4) is naturally out of the question owing to the
absence of a declinable relative pronoun (604-612). Moreover there
is no dative to act as an antecedent case to the relative.
354
PRONOUNS, INTERROG. AND INDEFINITE. [1446-1448.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
1446. Classical Greek distinguishes two classes of interro-
gative pronouns and adverbs, according as they are used
directly or indirectly.
A. Direct and Indirect.
τίς; πότερος ; ποῖος; πῶς; πόσος ;—Ν (τίς ;) ποιός ; πόσος;
ποῦ; ποῖ; πόθεν; πῇ; πότε;-Ν ποῦ; πῶς; πότε(s);
B. Indirect only.
ὅστις, ὁπότερος, ὁποῖος, ὁπόσος
For P-N see 614 f. & 2037".
ὅπου, ὅποι, ὁπόθεν, ὅπῃ, ὅπως, ὁπότε
also the simple relatives ὅς, οἷος, ὅσος—and ου, ο, ὅθεν, ᾖ, ὡς, ὅτε.
Soph. Phil. 56 τίς τε καὶ πόθεν πάρει; Pl. Gorg. 508 Β σκεπτέον τι
τὰ συμβαίνοντα. Xen. An. 1, 5, 16 οὐκ ἴστε ὅ,τι ποιείτε. Pl. Rep. 414 D
οὐκ οἶδα ὁποία τόλμῃ ἢ ποίοις λόγοις χρώμενος ἐρῶ. Lys. 13, 4 ἀκούσατε
ῷ τρόπῳ ἡ δημοκρατία κατελύθη. Xen. Mem. 2, 2, 1 καταμεμάθηκας οὖν
τοὺς τί ποιοῦντας τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο ἀποκαλοῦσι. An. 2, 5, 7 οὐκ οἶδα οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ
ποίον ἂν τάχους οὔτε ὅποι ἄν τις φεύγων ἀποφύγοι οὔτ᾽ εἰς Ποιον σκότος
ἀποδραίη, οὔθ᾽ ὅπως ἂν εἰς ἐχυρὸν χωρίον ἀποσταίη. Dem. 18, 73 ἐξετάζεσθαι
τίς τίνος αἴτιός ἐστι. Xen. Mem. 2, 2, 3 τίνας οὖν ὑπὸ τίνων εὕροιμεν
ἂν μείζονα εὐεργετημένους ἢ παῖδας ὑπὸ γονέων ;—See also 2037.
Ν: τί τρέχει; “what is the matter? TiNoc εἶν᾿ αὐτό; “whose is this ?
ποιός ἔρχεται ; “who is coming? που ήσουν ἐψές ; ' where were you yester-
day ?' πότε(c) ἦρθε; ‘when did he come?’πέ μου τί ἔπαθες 4 tell me
what happened to you. μ' ἐρώτηξε πῶς εἶμαι ' ho asked me how I was.
1446. On the use of ποῖος for τις 500 589 [1].
1447. For the use of relativo pronouns and adverbs also as direct inter-
rogatives sce Interrogativo clauses (2038).
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
1448. The indefinite pronoun rìs rì is enclitic and postposi-
tive. Its disyllabic forms, however, in particular the plural
τινές, τινά, are also, in P-B Greek, often put at the beginning
of a sentence, in which caso they naturally retain their accent.
1448. Sinco H wo moet with ποτέ, then with the singular ris, at the
beginning of a clauso (589), as: Jas. 3, 13. (Cp. Aosch. Cho. 654 vi
ἔνδον, ὦ παί. Soph. Τr. 630. 865 τὶ φημί. Dem. 13, 6. Arist. Rop. 3, 4, 9)
τινός μέντοι πολίτου.)
Ο
1
Sept. Sup. 12, 12 & Clem. R. ad Cor. 27, 5 τὶς ἐρεῖ αὐτῷ· τί ἐποίησας ; Κ
28, 383 τίς ἂν δὲ τούτῳ τῷ μνημείῳ κακὸν ποιήσει. 386 (before 2001) τι
κακόν ποιήσει. Apophth. 437 Ο τίς ποτε ἔδωκέ μοι ἀρραβῶνα καὶ οὐκέτι
ἦλθε λάβε οὖν τὰ βάϊα σύ. Vita Epiph. 48 ο ποτὲ γοῦν τριῶν ἀγροίκων
εἰσελθόντων. So ib. D. 53 Β. 6ο . 61 . 64 C. 72 D, etc. Cullin. 8r,
11. 115, 11. 122, 19, et passim. Leont. Neap. V. J. 17, 8 ëri ovons tŷs
355
A a 2
1448b-1455.
THE VERB.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
•
•
αὐτῆς πληθύος ἐν τῇ πόλει τοῦ λαοῦ, τὶς τῶν ξένων . . . . ἠθέλησε πειράσαι
τὸν μακάριον. 99, 23 ἐν αὐτῇ γὰρ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τις τῶν τὴν ἀγγελικὴν
πολιτείαν ἐξησκηκότων . . . θεωρεῖ κτλ.
θεωρεί κτλ. 49, 16 τινὸς μοναχοῦ γυρεύοντος ἐν
τῇ πόλει. Vita SA 28* Α τινὶ περὶ αὐτῆς μὴ ἐντειλάμενος. ib. Β τινὸς μὴ
ἐπισταμένου.
1449. So too N rìs and rivás: they are treatod exactly like efs or évas, or
κανεὶς οι κανένας (589). Mark further that τὶς or τινὰs and κανεὶς οι κανένας
are very frequently associated with a negation, following or preceding,
and thus correspond to ancient οὐδεὶς οι μηδείς (1449).
1449b. In P, when rìs bogan to lose touch with popular speech (622 f.),
its successor els (589. 597) is often placed before it, for omphasis' sake:
Mart. Petri 82, 29 εἷς δέ τις ἐλθών. Acta Tho. 7, 9 εἷς τις τῶν εὐνούχων
ἐρράπισεν αὐτόν. Callin. 137, 14 ΕΝ ΤΙΝΙ διαδόχῳ αὐτοῦ. [But cp. Th. 6, 61
ΤΙΝΑ ΜΙΑΝ νύκτα, and 8, 11ο τινές δύο νῆες.]
1449°. When the indefinite enclitics rìs (with its successor els or
κανεὶς) and ποτὲ became propositives (1448), popular speech began to
place after thom the nogation οὐ or μή, and thus obtain a substitute for tho
compound οὐδεὶς μηδεὶς and οὐδέποτε μηδέποτε οι οὔποτε μήποτε. This mode
of expressing nogation is very popular in N speech: τινὰς δὲν οὐ κανεὶς
(κανένας δὲν for οὐδείς, ποτὲ δὲν τον οὔποτε, τινὰς (κανεὶς νὰ μή for μηδείς, ποτὲ
νὰ μὴ for μήποτε, καθ᾽ ὅλου (δι' ὅλου) δὲν for οὐδαμῶς, etc.
Callin. 101, 23 αὐτοὶ μέν τινι οὐκ ἐπήρχοντο. 123, 1 ἡμερῶν δὲ ὀγδοήκοντα
τινὸς οὐ μετέλαβεν τροφῆς. Vita SA 28* I TINOC Mὴ ἐπισταμένου.—N: TINAC
Δὲν ἐστοχάστηκε and commonor Κανείς Δεν ἐστοχάστηκε ‘no one ever
thought. ποτί μου δὲν ἄκουσα ' I never heard.
1450. In its ordinary function, rìs rì means a, an, but it is often
used ironically of a personality or of something of importance, as:
Eur. Fl. 939 ηὔχεις τις εἶναι ‘you did boast of being somebody';
Xen. Mem. 2, 1, 12 ἴσως ἄν τι λέγοις. Cyr. 1, 4, 2ο ἔδοξε τι λέγειν τῷ
Αστυάγει.
1451. So too tho N compound neuter κάτι or κάτι τι, as : θαρρεῖ πῶς εἶνε
κάτι (τι) ' ho thinks highly of himself.
1452. When it accompanies words denoting a quality or
quantity, τις means about, some, as :
τοιοῦτος τις, μέγας τις, ἔν τινι βραχεί χρόνῳ τριάκοντά τινες some
thirty. Pl. Soph. 255 ο δύ' άττα. Lys. 216 D τρί' άττα.
1453. Analogous is the N turn : καμμιὰ τριανταριά ' some thirty, καμμιὰ
δεκαρεά, δωδεκαρεά, εἰκοσαριά, πενηνταρεά, ἑκατονταρά, etc.
VOICES OF THE VERB.
A. ACTIVE VOICE.
1454. The active voice is usually transitive, in that it repre-
sents the subject as acting on some person or thing, as: σκάπτω
dig, παιδεύω ' educate.
1455. But a number of active verbs are used sometimes in a
356
THE VERB-ACTIVE VOICE.
[1455-1457.
transitive, sometimes in an intransitive sense. The commonest
of them are :
Transitive.
α. ἐλαύνω drive
"
Kатаλúш 'stop,'' destroy'
ǎyw 'lead'
""
alpw 'lift'
b. Ex∞ 'have '
>
прoσéɣw 'hold to,' 'apply'
τελευτάω ' finish
πράττω ' do
ἀπαγορεύω ' prohibit
ἐκλείπω ' quit
c. ȧnéxw 'keep off '
διαφέρω ' convey
เ
εἰσ-, ἐμ-βάλλω bring in '
ἐξίημι ' send forth
ἐπιδίδωμι ' givo besides
d. oneúdw'urge
ἐπείγω ' impel
σιγάω ' keep silent
σιωπάω ' keep secret
เ
Intransitive.
(sc. Iπтov, άрμa) ' ride,'' drive,' ' march '
(sc. roùs intous) 'stop,'' halt'
τοὺς ἵππους)
(Sc. тd σтрáтενμa) 'advanco,' 'march'
(SC. TÒ OтPÁTEVµa) 'set out,''start'
(sc. Tàs vaûs) 'sail to.'
(sc. Tas vaûs) 'land.'
ev, kakŵs
am well,' 'ill'
(sc. τὸν νοῦν) ' give heed
(sc. τὸν βίον) ' die
ev, kakŵs 'fare well,' 'ill
get exhausted'
'finish,'' vanish.'
am distant'
'differ'
'break in,' 'invade'
'discharge'
'increase,'' improve'
'hasten,' 'hurry'
'press,' 'urge'
am silent'
keep silence,'
For many more specimens see RKühner ii.2 80-84.
"
1456. This practice becomes much commoner in P-N, but particu-
larly in BN speech. In fact it applies to all languages and proceeds
from the natural desire for brevity, the speaker readily omitting what
appears as a regular concomitant and the hearer can easily supply
from the context. In this way a host of transitive verbs which, from
a logical point of view, ought to be accompanied by some complement
or adjunct, very frequently dispense with it, and thus become intransi-
tive when occasion requires.
1456. Compare the following verbs in the NT: ἐπι-, προ-, συμ-,
βάλλω, κλίνω, στρέφω, ἀπορρίπτω, παραδίδωμι, ἐνισχύω, ἀναλύω, σκάπτω
(sc. γῆν), ἀφανίζω, κλέπτω (sc. χρήματα), διορύσσω (sc. τεῖχος), ῥῆξον (sc.
φωνήν), στρωσον σεαυτῷ (sc. κλίνην), κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων (sc. κάλυμμα),
ἑτοιμάζω (sc. κατάλυμα), συλλαμβάνω (sc. υἱὸν) ἐν γαστρί, ἀποστέλλω,
πέμπω, ἀκούω, διακονῶ, λατρεύω, προσκυνῶ, καλῶ, κρούω, ἀγοράζω, πωλώ,
πάσχω, ἀνατέλλω, αὐξάνω, ἐπιστρέφω, etc.
1456. In N this usage is still commoner, as: γυρίζω, πετῶ, χαλῶ, φτάνω,
άφτω, πατῶ, φωνάζω, κλειῶ, σφαλῶ, περνῶ, and a host of others. Cp. also
Hatzidakis 202 ff.)
1457. When such a multitude of transitive verbs had become
intransitive also, and so applied to either case as occasion
required, it was inevitable that verbs originally intransitive
should now be attracted and forced into the transitive construc-
tion as woll (1244; cp. FKrebs 3−34):
Polyb. 1, 7, 8 παρεσπόνδησαν τους Ρηγίνους. Also I, 10, 4; so even
Rangabo Ant. Holl. ii. 453 [270 1.0.] ἠδικηκότες καὶ παρεσπονδηκότες τὰς πόλεις.
3, 69, 1 πραξικοπήσας πόλιν Κλαστίδιον. 2, 46, 2 Κλεομένους πεπραξικοπη
κύτος αὐτούς. Diod. 5, 46, 2 οἱ τοὺς γεωργοὺς ἐνεδρεύοντες. So Jos. Bell. 2, 21,
357
1457-1459. THE VERB-ACTIVE VOICE.
4;
3 ἐνεδρεύοντες Πτολεμαῖον. App. Illyr. 27, 1. Β. C. 3, 79. Jos. Ant. 13, 1, 2
τὸν δὲ Ἰωάννην ἀπιόντα ἐνεδρεύσαντες. Polyb. 1, 20, 6 ἀγωνιῶσαι τὰς πεζικὰς δυνά-
μεις. 3, 80, 4 αγωνιῶν τὸν ἐπιτωθασμὸν τῶν ὄχλων. 15, 7, 1. 11, 8, 5 ἐσπούδαζον
τὰς ἀκολουθίας. 34, 6, 14 ἀπολεληρηκέναι τὸν Βεργαῖον ᾿Αντιφάνην. 21, 26, 6
ἐνεργεῖν τὰ τῆς πολιορκίας. 18, 14, 8. Diod. 13, 95, 5. Polyb. 32, 2, 1 τὸ πλῆθος
τῶν προσόδων ὀφθαλμῶν. Dio C. 54, 2o ; Proc. Hist. Arc. 1.—Diod. 31, 1,
12 ἀπαντήσασιν τὸν ᾿Αντίγονον τοῖς Ῥωμαίοις. 36, 2, 3 ἐπιβουλεύσαντος γὰρ τοὺς
ἀπαιτοῦντας.—Polyb. 1, 15, 20 τὰς Συρακούσας ἐπολέμουν. 18, 47, 1 μηδένα
πολεμεῖν. II, 19, 3 πολεμήσας Ῥωμαίους. Diod. 2, 37, 3 μόνους τοὺς Γανδαρίδας
οὐκ ἐπολέμησε. 2, 46, 4, 4, 17, 5 ; 5, 46, 2. 14, 37, 2 πολεμήσω Θρᾷκας, ote.
Dion. H. 19, I Μεσσήνην ἐπολέμουν, τοὺς Ἰάπυγας ἐπολέμουν. Jos. Bell. 4, 3, 1,
Ant. 8, 11, 2. 5, 1, 18, etc. Polyb. 3, 82, 4 φυλάττεσθαι καὶ προσέχειν τὸ
πλῆθος τῶν ἱππέων. 15, 2, 4 προνομεύειν τὴν παραλίαν ; so τὴν χώραν
Diod. 13, 109, 3. 19, 25, 2.
Dion. H. 6, 2, 9, etc. Jos. Ant. 13, 13, 3, ote.
Dion. H. 1, 79 τὴν κοινὴν μόνους διακρατεῖν. Jos. Ant. 3, 2, 4 κελεύει
διακρατεῖν τὰς χεῖρας. Β. C. 5, 89 τὰς ναῦς ἑκατέρωθεν διεκράτουν.-Polyb. 2,
42, 3 πολεμοῦντες καὶ καταγωνιζόμενοι τοὺς τὰς σφετέρας πατρίδας καταδουλου-
μένους. 2, 45, 4 καταγωνίσασθαι τοὺς ᾿Αχαιούς. 3, 4, 1ο. 18, 3 7. 20, 5, 13.
Diod. 9, 10, 2 καταγωνίζεσθαι τὸν Ξέρξην. 4, 12, 3 ; 6. 12, 2, Ι. Dion. H.
I, 2. 6, 8, 10, 38. 11, I. Jos. Ant. 7, 2, 2. 13, 5, 8. Plut. Crass. 9 ; Dio C.
44, 46.-Diod, 1, 39, 5 ὅταν ἡ τῆς πείρας ἀκρίβεια κατισχύῃ τὴν τῶν λόγων
πιθανότητα. 23, 14, 4. 36, 26. Dion. H. 6, 65 μὴ κατισχύειν μηδετέραν τῶν
στάσεων.-Το καταμονομαχεῖν τινα : Plut. Thos. II. Ael. V. Η. 10, 22.—κατα-
μάχεσθαί τινα or τι: Diod. 3, 15, 7 τὰ θηρία. Plut. Tit. Flam. 3 'Αννίβαν.
Diod. I, 41, 4 τὴν ἀλήθειαν.—καταπονεῖν τινα or τι: Diod 3, 37, 7 ; 4, 14, 2.
1,
Jos. Ant. 14, 3, 2.—καταστασιάζειν τινά: Diod. 19, 36, 4 τὸν βασιλέα. Plut.
Mar. 28 τὸν Μέτελλον. Pericl. 9 τὴν βουλήν.—καταστρατηγεῖν τινα: Diod. II,
21, 3 τοὺς βαρβάρους. 11, 43, Ι. II, 61, 1. 13, 50, 5. 15, 16, 1; 16, 13, 2.
16, 11, 4; 17, 86, 1. 19, 26, 9, etc. Dion. I. 3, 26 κατεστρατήγησε τούς τε
πολεμίους καὶ Φιδηναίους. 4, 1ο ; 26. Jos. Vita 62. Appian. Celt. 3. Zos. 3, 25.
10;
4, 22 ; 37.—κατακρατεῖν τινα : Dio C. 51, 25 ; 54, 29.—καταπροτερεῖν τινα
Diod. 17, 33, 5.- ζῆν τινα : Sopt. Ps. 40, 3 ; 118, 40 ; 50 ; 93, etc.-μαθητεύειν
τινά : Matt. 28, 19. 2 Co. 2, 14 τῷ θεῷ χάρις θριαμβεύοντι ἡμᾶς.—κοπάζειν τινά :
Sept. Sir. 39, 28. 43, 23; 46, 7.—πλεονεκτεῖν τινα: Diod. 12, 46, 3 έπλεο-
νέκτουν τοὺς ἐκ τοῦ λιμένος.—Appian. Β. C. 1, 42 τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τε καὶ
δούλους ἐστράτευσεν. ὑπερηφανεῖν τινα Ignat. ad Polyc. 4, 3. So even
κατάφοβος or καταπλαγής εἰμί τι: Polyb. 1, 7, 6 ; 1, 39, 12 ; 2, 21, 6 ; 3, 40, 1 ;
3, 107, 15 ; 5, 42, 4. Jos. Boll. 1, 17, 8 ὑπερηφάνει τοὺς πολεμίους. ἀγνωμονεῖν
Τι Theophyl. 34, 10. ἀπογινώσκειν τὴν σωτηρίαν id. 277, 23. δραπετεύειν τι
id. 33, 5. 34, 10. For other examples see GHatzidakis 201 f.
1457". This practice is unduly common in B-N speech.
1458. When transitive and intransitive verbs had thus inter-
mingled, it was to be expected that many of them, though formerly
intransitive (neuter), being now felt as transitive, owing to their
active form, should form a passive voice as well. In this way most of
the above-cited verbs form a regular passive in G-B:
ἀπαντῶμαι, παρασπονδέομαι, πραξικοπέομαι, ἐνεδρεύομαι, ἐνεργέομαι, προσ-
έχομαι, προνομεύομαι, πολεμέομαι, κατισχύομαι, καταπονέομαι, καταστασιάζομαι,
καταστρατηγέομαι, κατακρατέομαι, καταπροτερέομαι, μαθητεύομαι, θριαμβεύομαι,
πλεονεκτέομαι, etc.
1458. So further modio-passivo : ἐμπιστεύομαι, ἐνασμενίζομαι, δυσαρεστέομαι,
ἐπιβουλεύομαι, ἐπιτηδεύομαι, παρουσιάζομαι, ὑπερηφανεύομαι, etc. (ep. Gatzi-
dakis 200).
1459. On the same principle, even verbs naturally neuter or reci-
procal have assumed a medio-passive form, as :
χαίρομαι CIG 5980 (+ II; ep. Ar. Pac. 291). συγχαίρομαι CCL 647, 4 ;
649, 6. ἀναπίπτομαι Louvro Pap. 51, 4; Protov. Jac. 20, 1 ἰδοὺ ἡ χείρ μου
358
THE VERB-PASSIVE VOICE.
[1459-1465b.
πυρὶ ἀποπίπτεται. Εr. Petri 18 ἀνεπέσαντο. Sophronios 3429 ο ἀποπτωθέντων.
Theoph. 224, 12; 412, 8, etc.-dokоûμai: Theoph. 222, 17 Пaûλov dé Tiva
δοκούμενον εἶναι ὀρθόδοξον. 365, 20.—φθάνομαι ' am reached ' : Theoph. 378,
14 φθασθέντος.—ἐρίζομαι: Pollux Interpr. 519 άνθρωπος καὶ λέων ἠρίζοντο εἰς
αυτούς.—δέχομαι παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως 4 am received Malchi Exc. 233, 1o (cp.
GHatzidakis 199).
1460. In many cases the transitive active is causative, in that
it denotes an action accomplished through the medium of some
one else (886): I cause to, I have something done for me. This is,
however, common to all languages, and proceeds from the
desire for brevity (cp. 1473).
Hdt. 3, 39 "Αμασις ἔφερε καὶ ἦγε πάντας. Xen. An. 1, 4, το Κῦρος τὸν
παράδεισον ἐξέκοψε καὶ τὰ βασίλεια κατέκαYCEN. So further ἀποκτείνω,
θάπτω, οἰκοδομέω, διδάσκω, παιδεύω, etc.
1460º. So too in N: krizo Túpyo" 'am having a tower built,' QYTEỶw
λ'am having a vineyard planted,' etc.
PASSIVE VOICE.
1461. The passive voice represents the subject as acted
upon, as:
παιδεύομαι ‘I am educated; ἡ γῆ θερμαίνεται ὑπὸ τοῦ ἡλίου ‘the
earth is warmed by the sun.'
1462. In Greek all active verbs, whether transitive or (con-
trary to Latin usage) intransitive, can form a passive voice.
Their direct or indirect object then turns to a subject nomi-
native (cp. 1281. 1285h).
>
παιδεύω τὸν δοῦλον ' train the slavo
γράφω ἐπιστολήν ' write a letter
ἄρχω τῆς πόλεως rule over the city᾽
ȧμeλéш TIvós 'neglect one'
καταφρονέω τινός ' despise one
καταγελάω τινός ' laugh at
,
ἐπιβουλεύω τινί insuro one'
πιστεύω τινί
TLOTEÚW TIVĺbolieve' 'trust'
φθονέω τινί ' envy one'
t
>
>
πraidevetai d doûλos 'the sl. is trained'
ἐπιστολὴ γράφεται η letter is written
ἡ πόλις ἄρχεται ' the city is ruled over
ἀμελεῖται τις one is neglected'
καταφρονεῖται τις one is despised'
καταγελᾶται τις 'one is laughed at
ἐπιβουλεύεται τις one is insmarod
TLOTEVETαÍ TIS 'one is believed, trusted'
φθονείται τις one is enviod.'
>
1483. This rule obtains also in N, and the more conveniently as
the majority of formerly intransitive verbs have become transitive
(1457 f.). On the other hand, despite this convenience, popular
speech shows a decided disinclination for the cumibrous passive
voice, preferring the simpler and direct form of active construction.
Thus μÈ TOTEúour 'they (people) believe me,' ayaπоûv тov they like
him,' etc. is far more popular than Tσтevoμai, ȧyaπâтшi, etc.
·
1464. In passive verbs the agent (by) is commonly expressed
by vπò with genitive (1695), rarely by other prepositions (as
ἐξ, πρός, παρά, διά, από, 1465), οι by the dative simple (1365).
1465. So too in P-B literary Greek, but popular speech began
during G times to exchange inò for ànó (1507 H.), and N now knows
only the latter expedient.
1465". For examples as well as for the P-B history of the other
prepositions see under their respective sections (úró 1695 f.; é§ 1568, c;
πρός 1664; παρά 1628; διά 1531; από 1507 ;-dative simple 1365).
359
1466-1470.] THE VERB-MIDDLE VOICE.
MIDDLE VOICE.
1466. The middle voice represents the subject as acting on,
for, or of itself. This reflexive relation is expressed in two
ways (670):-
1467. A. In the sense of direct object or accusative (self),
when the subject is conceived as acting directly on itself, so
that subject and object are virtually one and the same person
or thing (direct middle).
λούω ' wash
Xpíw 'anoint'
αμφιέννυμι ' dress
καλύπτω ' cover
γυμνάζω ' exercise
φυλάττω 'guard
ἀμύνω ' defend
φαίνω ' show
τάσσω post'
1
ȧñéɣw 'keep off'
yeúo 'give to taste'
rauw 'stop'
τρέπω 'turn
ἵστημι ' set up'
λούομαι wash myself
Xpíoµaι ‘anoint myself'
àµþiévvvµai ‘dress (myself)'
καλύπτομαι ' cover myself
yvμváčoμai 'exercise myself,' 'practise'
φυλάττομαι ' guard myself
1
apúvopai 'defend myself (against)'
ἀμύνομαι
paivopai ('show myself') appear'
τάσσομαι ' post myself
άréxoμa 'keep myself off,' 'abstain'
γεύομαι taste
пavoμaι 'stop (myself),''cease '
Tрérоμa 'turn (myself)'
ἵσταμαι ' rise '
1468. Owing to the numerical preponderance and greater popu-
larity of the indirect middle (1470), the direct middle naturally loses in
perspicuity and force. Hence A commonly dispenses with this group
of middle and (like English) prefers to express such a relation by the
clearer expedient of the active voice with the appropriate reflexive
pronoun, as : ἐθίζω ἐμαυτόν, ἀποκτείνειν ἑαυτήν, ἐσώσατε ὑμᾶς αὐτούς (ep.
1476 & 1478; also 1461 & 1412 f.).
1469. On the other hand when, in consequence of its subtle mean-
ing, the indirect and dynamic middle (1470) began, during P, to retreat
before the active (1478), the direct middle gained greater clearness
and so gradually became a favourite colloquialism owing to its brevity.
Hence in N almost every transitive verb, if active, admits of a direct
middle:
>
។
κτενίζω 4 comb, κτενίζομαι. ἀλείφω & χρίω smear, ἀλείφομαι & χριοῦμαι.
λού(γ)ω batho, λού(γ)ομαι. νίβω wash, νίβομαι. ἐ]ντύνω dross, ἐ]ντύνομαι.
γδύνω ' undress, γδύνομαι. γράφω ' write, γράφομαι ' sign my name. βλέπω
guard, βλέπομαι guard myself. κουράζω ' fatigue, κουράζομαι ' fatiguo my-
solf, get tirod. σταίνω ' set up, σταίνομαι ' stand τ». ἀπελπίζω (ἀπυρπίζω)
discourago,' -oµa 'get discouraged,' etc. etc.
>
1470. B. In the sense of an indirect object or dative (in-
direct middle). In this class of middle verbs, which is by
far commoner (1468), the subject is represented as acting
either for self, in its own interest (sibi); or in a dynamic senso
(of, from, or through self), i.e. with its own moans and powers
(dynamic middle) :
7
aipéopaι choose (for myself)
Topicou provide for myself'
μεταπέμπομαι 'send for
δανείζομαι ‘borrow
μισθόομαι 'rent'
συμβουλεύομαι ' consult.
360
THE VERB-MIDDLE AND RECIPROCAL. [14706-1477.
1470. So ἄγομαι γυναῖκα ‘take a wife to myself,
make some one a friend of mine, τίθεμαι τὴν ψῆφον
ἀποφαίνομαι γνώμην ' express my opinion.
"
เ
> C
4
ποιοῦμαι φίλον
give my vote,
*
1471. In A there is a distinction between aipéw take,' and aipéopau
choose'; ἀποδίδωμι ' give back, and ἀποδίδομαι (sell); ἄρχω ' am the first to
begin, and άρχομαι 'commenco (my work) ' (1324) ; γαμέω 'marry (a woman),
and γαμέομαι ' get married (to a man)'; γράφω νόμον · introduce a law, and
γράψομαί τινα ' sue one'; (δανείζω lend, and ῒδανείζομαι borrow', δικάζω
give judgement,' and δικάζομαι • litigate '; ἔχω ' have, hold, ἔχομαί τινος
hold on to, cleave'; μισθόω let for hire, μισθόομαι hire, rent';
παρέχω ' afford, and παρέχομαι provide from my own means '; πρεσβεύω
act as delegate, and πρεσβεύομαι ' negotiate through a delegate '; τίθημι
νόμον 'make a law, τίθεμαι νόμον ' pass a law (for my benefit)'; τιμωρέω
τινί 'avongo one, τιμωρέομαί τινα ' avenge myself on some one.
1
C
Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 19 τοὺς ἀγράφους νόμους οὐχ οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἔθεντο, ἀλλὰ θεοὶ
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἔθεCAN. Isocr. 3, 61 τὴν εὔνοιαν τὴν πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἐν τοῖς ἔργοις
ΕΝΔΕΙΚΝΥθε μᾶλλον ἢ ἐν τοῖς λόγοις.
1472. With rare exceptions, such as δανείζομαι borrow (διορίζομαι
'get appointed' is literary), the indirect and dynamic middle has
become extinct in N. Since when and how, will be seen in 1478 ff.
1473. Like the active (1470), the middle, whether direct or in-
direct, is sometimes causative (cp. 868), as : κείρομαι ' have my hair cut,
γράφομαι τινα sue one.
Th. 4, 50, 2 οἱ τὰς ἐπιστολὰς Μεταγραψάμενοι ἐκ τῶν ᾿Ασσυρίων γραμμάτων
ἀνέγνωσαν. Ρ1. Mon. 93 D Θεμιστοκλῆς Κλεύφαντον τὸν υἱὸν ἱππέα ἐδιδάξατο
ἀγαθὸν καὶ ἄλλα πολλὰ αὐτὸν ἐπαιδεύσατο ' had his son taught.
1474. This holds good also in N, but, as expected, only in the surviving
direct middle (1469), as : κουρεύομαι have my hair cut, ξυρίζομαι (ευρα-
φίζομαι) ' shuve, βαφτίζομαι, βεβαιώνομαι, εὐλογοῦμαι βλογο), στεφανώνομαι,
ἐξομολογοῦμαι (ξεμ.) ' confess, λουτρουγοῦμαι (λειτουργοῦμαι), ἐμπολιάζομαι,
ζυγιάζομαι, etc. (Cp. 1ooo f.).
RECIPROCAL VERBS.
1475. Some verbs, regardless of their voice, when used in
the plural, ropresent two or more subjects as acting on one
another. They are then called reciprocal. Such are for in-
stance:
Α (συμβουλεύονται, διαλέγονται, τύπτονται, διαφέρονται, μάχονται, διακε-
λεύονται, διαλύονται, διανέμονται τι, ἐρίζουσι, φιλονικοῦσι, (δι)ἀμφισβη
τοῦσι, etc.
So tou in N : ἀγαποῦνται, δέρνουνται, μάχουνται, τρώγουνται, ὑ]βρίζουνται,
σκοτώνουνται, φιλοῦνται, ἀγκαλιάζουνται, φιλιώνουνται, ἀνταμώνουνται, χαιρε-
τοῦνται, συβάζουνται (συμβιβάζονται), κατηγοροῦνται, κρισολογοῦνται, πιάνουνται,
μαλώνου", γογγύζου, etc.
1476. For the sake of greater perspicuity, however, this relation
of reciprocity is more frequently expressed in 1 by means of a
transitive verb followed by the pronoun ἀλλήλους οι ἄλλος ἄλλον,
one another, as : φιλοῦσιν ἀλλήλους (αρ. 1468).
1177. So too in N by means of the reciprocal vorb will συναλλήλως
(μας, σας, τω", 1411), or more commonly by ὁ ἕνας τὸν ἄλλο" (1412 f) with
the transitive verb placed in the singular, as: μιλούμε συναλλήλως μας ΠΟ
talk with each other'; κτυπᾷ ὁ ἕνας τὸν ἄλλο they beat one another.
361
1478-1479.] FUTURE AND AORIST MIDDLE.
Short History of the Future and Aorist Middle.
1478. It is generally held, though not established (Kühner-
Blass, ii. 535), that primitive Greek had only two voices, an active and
a middle, and that the latter performed also the office of the passive
voice.
Cp. tho Homeric forms ἅψεσθαι, φιλήσεαι, κατακτανέεσθε, κρανέεσθαι, δια-
κρινέεσθαι—έβλητο, ἀνετράπετο, ἐλίποντο, etc.—and the 4 durative futures
ἀδικήσομαι, οἰκήσομαι, ζημιώσομαι, στερήσομαι, etc. (1882).
A
Be it as it may, when we enter A, the period of the fullest develop-
ment of the language, we are faced by the phenomenon of
an already complete system of three voices: active, passive, and
middle, the latter two showing separate forms in the future and aorist
(σομαι, -σάμην, middle; θήσομαι, -θην, passive; cp. Ιασάμην & λάθην,
ᾐτιασάμην & ᾐτιάθην, μετεπεμψάμην & μετεπέμφθην, ἐβιασάμην & ἐβιάσθην,
etc.). With the close of A, however, the discrimination between middle
and passive forms begins to be obliterated, and a struggle for ascen-
dency ensues between them. This was also to be expected considering
that the two voices had from the outset the same form through all
tenses except in the future and aorist (672), and even in the case of
the aorist a certain confusion had arisen as early as in A times (cp.
ἠγάσθην & ἠγασάμην, ἠδέσθην & ᾐδεσάμην, ἠρνήθην & ἠρνησάμην, ἐδυνήθην
& édvvnσáµny, etc., 1004 f.), not to mention the fact that the general
tendency of the language was to obtain a uniformity among kindred
or associated items. In these circumstances, it was a foregone con-
clusion that the two voices, as now discriminated, should sooner or
later finish by being completely identified, and the question at issue was
only which of the two forms should prevail over the other, the middle
over the passive, or conversely. The final outcome was then that
the passive form soon gained ascendency over the middle and began
to extrude it (ep. A ᾐδέσθην, ἐνεθυμήθην, ἐπεμελήθην, ᾠήθην, ἐφοβήθην,
ἐπορεύθην, ἐκοιμήθην, etc. etc. RKühner ii. 92 Α. 1).
RKühner ii. 92 A. 1). One, probably
also the primary, cause of this issue was that the subtle functions of
the middle verb (used as it had been chiefly in an indirect sense,
1470), had been lost sight of in the popular language, which in the
great majority of cases dispensed altogether with such fine shades
of thought (cp. the 'optative,' 679. App. v. 6-13 & 15), or, when
indispensable, preferred to express them in a different, clearer mode,
popular even in 4, that is by means of a special complement
(cp. 1 ἑαυτὸν ἐπαινεῖν, φιλεῖν, ἀποκρύπτειν, ἐθίζειν, παρέχειν, ἀποκτείνειν,
σφάττειν, βλάπτειν, etc. [1468]ἑαυτῷ παρασκευάζειν, κατασκευάζειν, etc.).
This circumstance naturally led to the disuse and final disappearance
of all indirect middle verbs (such as αἱροῦμαι, ἄγομαι, ἀποδίδομαι, παρ-
έχομαι, ἐκλέγομαι, ποιοῦμαι, τίθεμαι, σκοποῦμαι, μισθοῦμαι, παύομαι, etc.
1470 ff.). It is now obvious that, as this class had been the com-
monest, the number of middle verbs was reduced to a very small
group as compared with the hosts of their rival or passive verbs.
1479. Another cause which, though simpler in itself, has equally
contributed to the preponderance of the passive over the middle
form of the future and aorist, was the convenience afforded by the
former's shortness and comparative regularity of inflection (cp. -Oŋv,
-Ons, -On etc. as against -"áµŋv, -"w, -"uto, etc., and -Ow, -Oŋs, -Oñ, etc.,
familiar through the contracted active verbs, as against "wμm, -"11,
ωμαι,
-"nrui, etc.).
362
FUTURE
AND AORIST MIDDLE. [1480-1483.
1480. In this way the passive form met, ever since A, with
a steadily increasing popularity, and it may be taken for granted
that, with the opening of G, the aorist ending -θην, -ης, -0η, etc. had
established itself in the common language as the normal form of
both the passive and middle voices. This is clearly shown by the
practice of contemporary and subsequent writers who, though
Atticistic in their tendency, cannot escape the influence of common
usage (1481; ep. P ἀπεκρίθην, ἠγωνίσθην, ἐπαρρησιάσθην, ώσφράνθην,
ἀπωλέσθην, ἐφείσθην, μετεχειρίσθην, ἀνήχθην, ἠμείφθην, ἀπελογήθην, ἐμέμ
φθην, ἐσκανδαλίσθην, etc. etc. ; cp. also G Hatzidakis 194). In this
juncture the above process, already so signally advanced, now re-
ceives an additional and no less powerful impetus in the retreat,
since G, of the future indicative before the steady advancing future
subjunctive (App. iv). As a consequence, all middle futures, including
those which in A belonged to an active present (as ᾄσομαι, ἀκούσομαι,
etc. 998), now exchanged their form for that of the active subjunctive
(as ᾄσω, ακούσω, ἁμαρτήσω, ἀπαντήσω, ἀπολαύσω, etc.).
1481. That the history of the middle voice is such as has just been
sketched, appears also from the following four additional criteria:
A. (a) Owing to the gradual obliteration, ever since A, of its true
force, the indirect middle is often misapplied for the active even
by A writers (cp. RKühner ii.² 96-99) :
Soph. Ο. R. 1143 ὡς ἐμαυτῷ θρέμμα ΘΡΕΨΑΙΜΗΝ ἐγώ. Xen. An. 5, 6, 17
Ξενοφῶν βουλεύεται . . . ἑαυτῷ ὄνομα καὶ δύναμιν περιποιήσασθαι. ib. 8, 14 προ-
ΕΜΕΝΟΝ ἑαυτὸν τοῖς πολεμίοις. 1, 8, 29 ἑαυτὸν ἐπισφάξασθαι. Ρl. Alc. I, 135 B.
Isocr. 4, 85 ἐπεδείξαντο τὰς αὑτῶν ἀρετάς. 5, 145. Lycurg. 42 ἐπικουρίαν αὑτῷ
Μεταπέμψασθαι. 141 τὴν σωτηρίαν αὑτοῖς ἔμελλον πορίζεσθαι. Dem. 18, 216
σώφρονας παρέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς αὐτούς.—For P-N 500 1486.
1482. (b) Conversely, the active is very often misused for the middle:
Xen, An. 1, 3, 21 ὁ Κῦρος ὑπισχνεῖται ἡμιόλιον πᾶσι δώσειν οὗ πρότερον
ἔφερον. 7, 6, 7 Δαρεικών φέρειν (but φέρεσθαι Occ. 1, 4). Pl. Rep. 468 c
ταριστεία φέρειν. Xon. An. 5, 6, 33 ὅτῳ δοκεῖ ταῦτα, ἀράτω τὴν χεῖρα.
᾿ΑνέτειΝΑΝ ἅπαντες. Th. 1, 16 τὰς ἐν τῇ ἠπείρῳ πόλεις ΔογλοΥ͂Ν. 3, 37, 4
Δηλώσαντες τὴν γνώμην their opinion. 3, 46, Ι τὴν ἁμαρτίαν καταλύσαι.
50: παρέχειν πεζόν, χρήματα, ναυτικών, ναῦς. Th. 2, Ι ; I, 30 ; 8, 44, 3 χρήματα
ἐξέλεξαν.—For P-N 400 1484.
1483. B. (a) During I times this misapplication assumes steadily
increasing proportions owing to the evanescence and eventual loss of
all feeling for the true force and correct use of the indirect and dynamic
middle:
Sept. Ps. 22, 19 Διεμερίσαντο τὰ ἱμάτιά μου ἑαυτοῖς. NT Tit. 2, 7 σαυτὸν
παρεχόμενος τύπον. Matt. 15, 2 οὐ νίπτονται τὰς χεῖρας αὑτῶν. Acts 7, 58
ἀπέθεντο τὰ ἱμάτια αὑτῶν. Acta Philippi 80, 13 περιποίηται δὲ ἑαυτῷ.
5ο : πέμπομαι for πέμπω Luc. Τοχ. 14. ἐπικλείομαι ib. 4. αλαλάζομαι, οἰκοῦμαι,
ὑπηρετοῦμαι, φενακίζομαι (WSchmid iii. 7o f.), διανεύομαι Acta Xanth. 59, 10 ;
Achmet 122. Martyr. Matt. 174, 11 ἀναθώμεθα ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Ἰησοῦ. Acta
Tho. 7, 3 στέφανον ἐπέθετο τῇ ἑαυτοῦ κεφαλῇ. 15, 11 ἀληθῶς τεχνίτης εἳ καὶ
πρέπει σοι βασιλεῦσιν ἐξυπηρετεῖσθαι. 77, 1 σὺ ἐπ' ἄνθρωπον ἀφορᾶ (if not
ἀφορᾷς). Vita Epiph. 53 Λ δ Μωϋσῆς γνεγράψατο. Callin. 138, 2 ηδυνήθημεν
ΠΑΥΣΑΣΘΑΙ αὐτοὺς ἐκ τούτου. 113, 13 ται ὁ ὀφθαλμός (pass.). 112, 4 τίς οὐ
παρεαγθείτο (pass.). Chron. 627, ι εγλλαβόμενοι τὸν Ὑπάτιον. Theoph. 378,
21 ἑαυτοὺς ἠσφαλίσαντο. 433, 4 ἑαυτὸν ἠσφαλίσατο, etc. (ep. G Hatzidakis 197).
363
14833-1486.] FUTURE AND AORIST MIDDLE.
[1483. Cp. Schol. Aeschin. 3, 41 ὑποκηρυξάμενοι ᾿Αττικῶς ἀντὶ τοῦ κηρύ
ξαντες· χαίρουσι γὰρ ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖστον τοῖς παθητικοῖς. Cp. 1486; WSchmid
iii. 71.]
1484. (b) Conversely, the use of the active instead of the middle
occurs times without number, as :
Sept. Ex. 23, 16 ἑορτὴν θερισμοῦ ποιήσεις. NT Matt. 6, 2 ποιῆς ἐλεημοσύνην.
6, 3. 13, 41 τοὺς ποιοῦνται τὴν ἀνομίαν. 26, 18. Mark 15, 1 συμβούλιον
TOIŃCANTEC.
ποιήσαντες. Luke 1, 68; 72. 14, 13 ὅταν ποιήε δοχήν. 14, 12 ὅταν ποιήε
ἄριστον. 18, 7 ποιήσει ἐκδίκησιν (whereas Polyb. 3, 8, το ποιείσθαι ἐκδίκησιν).
15, 6; 9. Eph. 3, 11. Luke 14, 28 ψηφίζει τὴν δαπάνην. Rev. 13, 18. Acts
7, 46 εὑρεῖν ἔλεος. 2 Tim. 1, 18. CIG 1108 αγωνισάντων. προσάγω for
-ομαι Luc. Τox. 4. πυνθάνω, συνεπιλαμβάνω, παραμείβω, μαντεύω (WSchmid
iii. 70). προσεπιλαμβάνω Ael. N. A, 163, 10. CGL 645 οὐ τολμῶ πλείονας
λόγους ποιcal. Callin. 70, 8 εἰρήνην ποιεῖν. 75, 23. 100, 6. 11, 12. 65, 7 εὐχὴν
ποιείν. So 69, 23. 70, 1, etc. 118, 15 βουλὴν ποιήσANTEC. 80, 26 σφραγίδα
ποιήCANTO. JLydos 1or, 8 νίκας πεποιηκώς. Theoph. 232, 32. 247, 16.
324, 16. 326, 1. 368, 1. Porph. Cer. 59, 14 χαρίζω. So further M N βε-
βαιῶ, δράττω, οσφραίνω, κτῶ (for κτῶμαι), ἐξηγῶ, λογίζω, σημειώνω, παραιτῶ,
etc. (cp. GHatzidakis 197 f.).
1485. (c) Even professional grammarians and staunch Atticists often
fail to understand the true force and use of the (indirect) middle, and
thus misapply or misinterpret it (cp. GHatzidakis 196):
Luc. de Soloec. 11 τό γε μὴν καθέζεσθαι τοῦ καθίζειν καὶ τὸ κάθισον τοῦ
κάθησο ἆρ᾽ οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι διενήνοχεν ;-Οὐκ οἶδα. 12 καὶ τὸ καταδουλοῦν σὺ μὲν ἴσως
ταὐτὸν τῷ καταδουλοῦσθαι νενόμικας, ἐγὼ δὲ οἶδα διαφοράν οὐκ ὀλίγην ἔχον.
Ammon. Η αἰτῶ καὶ αἰτοῦμαι διαφέρει τὸ μὲν γὰρ αἰτῶ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἅπαξ τι λαβεῖν
καὶ μὴ ἀποδοῦναι, τὸ δ' αἰτοῦμαι ἐπὶ τοῦ χρήσασθαι εἰς ἀπόδοσιν. Μένανδρος ἐν
τῷ Ὕμνιδι διαστέλλει· Οὐ πῦρ γὰρ αὐτῶν οὐδὲ λαμπάδ᾽ αἰτούμενος.
1486. (d) Also the opposite phenomenon observed since G, viz.
the frequent use of the middle instead of the active, points to its
having lost touch with the living language. Its presence in
less cultivated compositions shows only the general anxiety of the
scribes to write in a style as far as possible elevated above the ordi-
nary diction, thus claining to imitate A Greek (cp. 1483"; Bach-
man's Anecd. ii. 300, 8 πλείστα δὲ τῶν παθητικών [i. c. medio-passivel
κοινῶς λαμβάνεται ἐνέργειαν καὶ πάθος σημαίνοντα ἔθει Αττικῷ). Thus only
can we account for the presence in P-B of such middle aorists, as:
ἐφιλοτιμησάμην (Polyb.), ἐπεμελησάμην, ἐχωρισάμην, ἠσχολησάμην, παρε-
στησάμην, κατεστρατηγησάμην, ἐποιησάμην τὸ ἐπίγραμμα, κατ-, ἐπ-, ἐνεμη
σάμην, ὠφελησάμην, διελεξάμην, ἡρμοσάμην (2 Co. 11, 2), ἠμυνάμην τινά
(Acts 7, 24), etc. (GHatzidakis 194 f.)-- So further the middle forms:
οἰνοχοοῦμαι, ἀντιλοιδωροῦμαι, ὑποβλέπομαι, ἀποβλέπομαι, διακονοῦμαι, ἐμβι
βάζομαι, ἐμπεδοῦμαι, ἐμπολιτεύομαι, ἐνθεάζομαι, ἐπιβύομαι, ἐπικλείομαι,
ἐπιτέμνομαι, εὐπορέομαι, ἡσυχάζομαι (due to ἀναπαύομαι), καλλιλογέομαι,
καταθαρσύνομαι, λεπτολογέομαι, κατασκευάζομαι, οἰκονομέομαι, παννυχίζομαι,
παραζώννυμαι, παρηγορέομαι, ἐλπίζομαι, ἁρμόζομαι, and many others (1000,
2 f.)-all used for the active (cp. WSchmidt, i. 94 & 239).---For more
instances in B- M see 1005 and GHHatzidakis 195 f.;
364
THE PARTICLES. —PREPOSITIONS.
[1487-1489.
THE PARTICLES.
Introductory Remarks.
1487. If any particular section of Greek grammar were taken as
a specimen to illustrate the historical evolution of the Greek language,
no better representative could be selected than the section of the
particles. For this class of words shows pre-eminently how those
among them which were associated in one or more points gradually
resulted in a complete identification, each losing its specific notion;
and how they successively retreated before, or coalesced into, the
most expressive or most familiar representative among them (cp. ér,
εἰς, πρός ; μετά, σύν; ἀπό, ἐξ, ὑπό, παρά ; ὡς, ὅτι, ὅπως, ἵνα, ὥστε). And it is
further shown how this resultant representative, having once estab-
lished itself, again began to degenerate into a commonplace or feeble
particle, and thus necessarily retreated in its turn before some novel
substitute or some half-forgotten synonym, now restored to popular
favour in a more or less modified form or function; and finally it
is shown how phonetic agencies have often operated in the various
stages of the process, and thus contributed to effect a striking change
in the morphology, meaning, and function of each particular class of
associated particles. (112-122. 1700 f. 1999. App. iii. 1 & v. 4 f. 13.)
1487. The natural consequence of the above process was that those
particles which have ultimately prevailed over the rest or otherwise
taken their place, though now considerably diminished in number, have
greatly increased in frequency. In the case of the conjunctions this was
also to be expected, since the participial construction has been replaced
mostly by dependent clauses introduced by appropriate conjunctions.
(2141°. Cp. 1703.)
1488. The process just delineated may be illustrated by the follow-
ing particles taken as representative specimens:
4 ἐξ or ἐκ, από, ὑπό, αb, have become in N ἀπό (1507)
ἐν, εἰς, πρός
ὑπέρ, περί
μετά, σύν
ἐπί, ἐπάνω
ὅτε, ὅταν
el, éáv, av, hv
ὡσεί, ώσάν
ἕως, ἐς, ἔστε
ὅπῃ, ὅποι, ὅπου
""
17
>>
εἰς
περί, παρά
(μετά) μέ
(ἐπάνω) ἀπάνω
ὅταν ὅνταν, ὅντεν-ὅτι νά)
åv (å, äve—vá)
()σάν (σάσα" να
ως, ώστε
όπου (που).
1488b. Association then of form, meaning, or construction (i. e.
phonetic, morphological, or syntactical association) led to various
successive changes which will be discussed separately in the follow-
ing pages.
A. PREPOSITIONS.
1489. Eighteen (nineteen) particles are called prepositions,
because they are prefixed to other words in order to qualify
their meaning in regard to place, time, manner, or otherwise.
These are : ἀμφί, ἀνά, ἀντί, από, διά, εἰς, ἐξ, ἐν, ἐπί, κατά, μετά, παρά,
περί, πρό, πρός, σύν, ὑπέρ, ὑπό, (ὡς).
365
1490-1493b.]
THE PREPOSITIONS.
1490. These particles are at the same time also used as separate
words, and in this case stand before the oblique cases of the
noun in order to indicate the relation of this word to the other
words in the sentence. A similar prepositional function is
shared by a number of other particles or adverbs (such as aveu,
ἕνεκα, ἐκτός, πλήν, μέχρι, ἐγγύς, χάριν, μεταξύ, πόρρω, μακράν, etc.)
which are then called prepositional adverbs, differing from the
prepositions proper, in that they are never used in 'composi-
tion' as prefixes to other words.
1491. In its present stage N has preserved only seven prepositions
proper, and that not in all their A functions. These are: avtís, áñó,
διά (γιά), εἰς, (ἐκ), μέ (=μετά), παρά, then many of the prepositional
adverbs. The remaining eleven, as well as any lost functions of those
surviving, have been gradually replaced (as explained above, 1487 ff.),
partly by kindred purticles, partly by cognate adverbs, as:
ἀμφὶ by περί (so even in 4).
ἀνὰ by κατά, ἀπό, and ἄνω.
év by eis (also eow, eow els, now µéoa els or µéoa's).
ἐξ or ἐκ by ἀπὸ and ἔξω (now ἔξω ἀπό, also ὄξω ἀπό).
ἐπὶ by ἐπάνω (now ἀπάνω εἰς), διά, εἰς (now also 's).
παρὰ by ἀπὸ and eis, also by πλησίον (now κοντὰ εἰς).
περὶ by πέριξ, κύκλῳ (now γύρου), διά (now για 155, α).
πρὸ by πρίν, πρότερον (now προτύτερα από), or by ἔμπροσθεν, ἐμπρός
(now also ὀμπρός).
πρὸς by eis, also ἀπό.
σὺν by μετά (now μέ), also ἅμα.
ὑπὲρ by ὑπεράνω (now παράνω ἀπό), διά.
ὑπὸ by ὑποκάτω (now ἀποκάτω ἀπό), ἀπό
1492. This process refors of course not to written composition, for here
all prepositions, excepting uppí (1496), show a more or less continuous
record through all antiquity down to M times. The criterion for their
actual boaring on popular spooch is afforded by the fact that with the
opening of M ανά, ἐν, ἐξ, ἐπί, μετά, περί, πρύ, πρός, σύν, ὑπέρ, ὑπό, como to an
abrupt close, none or hardly any of them (except e 1571, apparently
also περὶ 1641 ; πρὸ 1649 ; πρὸς ? 1659) showing any genuine trace of life
in subsequent N popular compositions. We have therefore good reason to
assume that their continuance in post-christian literature was to a great
extent, at least since T, due to scholastic zeal and Biblical influence. This
inference is, moreover, justified by the fact that in T-B Greek most of
these propositions are sometimes used in a perverted sense and construc-
tion, and still oftoner replaced by cognate advorbs (1570. 1634. 1640.
1649-52. 1658-60).
1493. The prepositions proper govern one or more of the
oblique cases, whereas the prepositional adverbs regularly take
the genitive (only aua takes the dative 1671 ff., and is the
accusative 1699).
1493¹. In N all prepositions extant govern the accusative (1246;
a few exceptions 1246), while the prepositional adverbs, having lost
their prepositional force, are generally used as adverbs proper,
and thus take after them a preposition proper, as indicated above
(1491; cp. αντί 1502; από 15171; διά 1534; ἐν 1565, 2; ἐξ 1570; μετά
1607; περί 1640 ; σύν 1670).
1
366
PREPOSITIONS: ἀμφί, ἀνά.
ává.
[1494-1499.
1494. Of the prepositions proper the following govern the-
a. Accusative: åvá, eis, ws.
v. Genitive : ἀντί, από, ἐξ (ἐκ), πρό.
c. Dative : ἐν, σύν.
d. Accus. and Gen. : διά, κατά, μετά, υπέρ.
e. Accus. Gen. and Dat. : ἀμφί, ἐπί, παρά, περί, πρός, ὑπό.
1495. 1º. 'Aµþí‘about'.
᾿Αμφί.
1. with Accus. (=Teρí): 'about,' 'round,' as:
ἀμφὶ μέσον ἡμέρας, ἀμφὶ μέσας νύκτας. οἱ ἀμφὶ Ἀριαῖον (=the persons
surrounding Ariaeos), 'the associates of Ariaeos.'
2. with Gen. 'about,' 'concerning' (rare).
3. Dat. 'about,' 'on account of' (poetic and rare).
""
1496. 1. This preposition had, even in A, a limited and rather
poetic use, its work being commonly performed by repi (1633-42").
Hence with the close of 4, it disappeared altogether from the
common language. Neither Polybios, the Bible, Herodian, nor any
other writer out of the strictly Atticistic school shows a trace of it.
'ANá.
1497. 1ª. 'Avá 'up' (opposed to κará)—with the Accusative:
'up,' 'along,' 'over.'
a. Of place: and tò medíov ‘over the field.' åvà tà opη ‘over
the mountains.' ẲNȧ TÒV TOTAµóv 'up the river.'
b. Distributively (662, 2), by: ANA TÉVTE 'by fives.'
KaTÓν by hundreds.' ȧNà Tâσav μépar 'every day.'
ÅNÁ
c. Metaphorically: ANA Kрáros with all (one's) might.' ANA
Xóyov in proportion.' ȧNA σrópa exeu 'to have in one's
στόμα ἔχειν
mouth.'
1498. 1. With the close of A, this preposition had already given
up almost entirely its local function in favour of kará (1584-9).
It is chiefly in the expression dvà péσov that it still lingers in Aristotle,
Theophrast, Polybios, Diodoros (FKrebs 31 f.), and the Bible (ep. also
UWilken in llermes xxviii. 232 kaì óðòs àvà pérov thrice: 11, 19, 22
on a papyrus of III B.C.). This phrase passed as a crystallized
adverb avaμéσov 'in the midst,' 'between,' over to post-christian
speech, and still survives in the N adverbial form áváμera (1525).
Compare αναμεταξύ current since G. (Cp. Antatt. ἀνὰ μέσον: ἀντὶ τοῦ
ἐν μέσῳ. ᾿Αντιφάνης 'Αδώνιδι.)
1499. 1º. As to the distributive use of ává, it was also transferred
to kará (1589, b), us: kae' hμépar 'every day,' KAT' Tos every year,' kad'
one by one,' KATA Suo by twos a substitute still lingering
in N (1590 b).
και
367
1499b-1503.]
PREPOSITIONS: ἀντί, ἀπό.
1499b. 2. For other modes of expressing a distributive relation in
popular speech since G times, see 662 ff.
ἀπὸ
1500. In its distributivo sonse, ůvá, under the influence of its synony-
mous ảπd (1515), or ¿vтì (1501), appears since T misconstructed with the
genitive, as: Mal. 440, 12 δοθῆναι αὐταῖς χάριν προικὸς ἀνὰ χρυσίου λιτρῶν
eroot. Vita SA 14* A éveíμavтo anȧ dúo λenтON. Theoph. passim. Theoph.
cont. 54, 5; 81, 10. 105, 13. 418, 12. 433, 2; 4; 430, 20.
Cedr. i. 700, 8
διδόναι τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους ἀνὰ NOMICMATOC. 700, ΙΙ.
II. [For Theoph. cont.
242, 2 γίνεται δὲ κατ᾽ εὐχὴν τὸ πρᾶγμα ανα πάσαις ταϊς χώραις και πόλεις
we might read én máσais etc.] So too Porph. Cor. 412, 13.
1500. That dvd is sometimes misconstructed with the nominative las
been already explained in 664.
'ANTI.
1501. 1º. 'Avrì 'instead of,' '(in exchange) for' (1682)--with
the genitive only : αἱρεῖσθαι τὸ χεῖρον ἀντὶ τοῦ βελτίονος. τί μοι
δώσεις ἀντὶ τούτου; ἀνθ' ὧν “wherefore
'
1502. 1. This preposition still obtains in N, though with the
accusative (1493) and almost invariably in the form avrís: [Diosc.]
3, 33 (p. 378) antì tàs ékλúσels Kaì Xiñoðvμías. [Nil.] 545 A Anti otúxvas.
Prodr. 3, 285-6 οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι καταπίνουσιν ἀντὶς νερὸν φαρμάκιν, ἀντὶς ψωμὶν
τὸν δρόλικον, ἀντὶς φαγὶν τὸν σφάχτην; etc.-At present it is commonly
followed by yá (i.o. díá 155, a) ‘instead of,' as: ¿NTic èµéva, more commonly
Antic rià μéva, 'in my place.'
>
1503. 'Апò 'from' ;—'off','
1. Of place: ἀπὸ τῆς χώρας
I.
Απο.
ἀφ᾽ ἅρματος. ἄρχεσθαι από τινος.
away from.'—With the GENITIVE :
from the country.” ἀφ᾽ ἵππου,
2. Of time: ȧTÓ TоÚTOV TOU Xpóvov 'since that time.'
ἀπὸ τούτου τοῦ χρόνου
apxŵs 'from the beginning.'
3. Metaphorically:
:
'
a. Origin of anò Anuaрárov ('those who descend from D.')
'the descendants of D.'
καλεῖσθαι από τινος (‘to derive one's
name from '), 'to be named after some ono.'
b. Malerial: ¿ñò ¿úλov ‘of wood.' (1568, d.)
c. Cause: ἀπὸ τούτου τοῦ τολμήματος in consequence of this
bold stroke.'
d. Phrases: ảnо σкожоû 'off the mark, 'amiss.' And Tavroµárov ‘of
itself,' 'spontaneously. And aтóparos by heart,' 'verbally. ȧp' où
'since.' as an ouμúrov 'as far as sight can judge.'
368
PREPOSITIONS: ἀπό.
[1503b-1507.
1503'. In all above usages and is still the normal preposition in N, though
the genitive has made room for the accusative (1517 ff.).
1504. 3ª. Sometimes arò stands in a partitive sense, where the
simple genitive would suffice. This occurs chiefly after expressions
denoting a quantity or degree of comparison (1311), as: Th. 1, 110
ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλών. Isocr. 15, 205 τούτους τεχνικωτάτους εἶναι νομίζομεν
ἀπὸ πασῶν τῶν τεχνῶν.
1505. 35. In the course of Ptimes this mode of expressing partitive
relation met with wider popularity and eventually became the rule
in the common language. Hence in N the partitive relation is
regularly expressed by arò both in this case and in comparatives and
superlatives, particularly when they are preceded by the article.
(1329. 1617; cp. 1571.)
1506. 4. In P Greek, ἀπὸ shows several striking peculiarities arising
out of its association with ἐκ, ὑπό, and παρά. The confusion with ἐκ is
due to the internal affinity of anò and ék, which even in A caused
their frequent interchange. (Cp. ἀπὸ or ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, ἀποβαίνειν ἐκ τῶν
νεῶν οἱ ἀπὸ τῶν πλοίων, ἀπὸ οἱ ἐκ ξύλου, ἐξ οι ἀπ' ἀρχῆς, ἀφ' οὗ and ἐξ οὗ,
φόβος ἔκ τινος, ἀπό τινος, παρά τινος ; Διῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ Αθω CIA. i. 237 (443
Β.C.], 35 ; Διῆς ἐκ τοῦ ᾿Αθω ib. 244 [436 BC.], 53; ἔκ τε τῶν προτέρων
χρόνων καὶ ἀφ᾽ οὗ CIA. ii. 613 [298 B c.], 9; cp. also VRost7 569 and
RKühner ii.² 475 f.) As time went on, this synonymy naturally led
to a complete identification, and in the further process of time ἀπό,
owing to its phonodynamic superiority and vocalie ending (146. 218),
prevailed over ék and ultimately ousted it from popular speech, though
the struggle lasted as late as the XVIth. (Cp. 1570 1.)
2
1507. 5. A second P peculiarity of από consists in its frequent sub-
stitution for ὑπό, to designate the agent in passive verbs (1695 f.). This
phenomenon, though alleged to occur occasionally even in classical
authors (c. g. Thucydides, cp. VRost' 569; infra 1509), actually first
signalized itself during G, and may be safely attributed both to phonetic
confusion and Latin influence. Indeed, anò in this case is nothing
but a contamination of ὑπό, από, ab, the resultant being από, owing to
its phonodynamic prevalence over ὑπό (146): ὑπὸ κ ἀπὸ κ αὐ κ ἐκ=ἀπό]
Polyb. 1, 34, 8 ἀπὸ τῶν θηρίων ἀπώλλυντο (but ep. 3, 74, 7). Sept. I Fsdr.
1, 16 ορκισθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως. Dion. H. iii. 1768, 16 συνθήματος ἀρθέντος
[1] Polyb. 3, 69, 3 τοὺς ἀπὸ (cdd. ὑπὸ τῶν καιρῶν καταλαμβανομένους. Εχ. 1, 12
ἐβδελύσσοντο οἱ Αἰγύπτιοι ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ. Prov. 19, 4.
Strab. 5, 4, 12
εἰκὸς δὲ διὰ τοῦτο καὶ Σαβέλλους αὐτοὺς ὑποκοριστικῶς ἀπὸ τῶν γονέων προσ-
αγορευθήναι Louko 9, 22 πολλὰ παθεῖν καὶ ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ἀπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων.
So 17, 25; Mark 8, 31. Acts 2, 22 άνδρα ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ. 2 Cor. 7,
13 αναπέπαυται τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν. Jus. 5, 4 (μισθὺς) ὁ ἀπεστε-
ρημένος ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν. Rev. 12, 6 τύπον ἡτοιμασμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ.
1 Cor. 1, 30
ἐγεννήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ θεοῦ. Luko 22, 45 κοιμωμένους ἀπὸ τῆς λύπης. Matt.
13, 44 ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ ὑπάγει καὶ πωλεῖ πάντα. Polyaen. 6, 1, 2 ἀπαιτούμε
νος ἀπὸ τῶν μισθοφόρων ἀργύριον. 8, 58 φυλαττόμενον από μισθοφόρων
Iron, 5, 31, 2 τον τύπον τὸν ὡρισμένον αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ.
Athun. I. 224 C
ἐξωρίσθη ἀπὸ τῶν ἀειμνήστων Κωνστατίνου καὶ Κωνσταντίου. Proc. i. 309, 9 διήρητο
δὲ ὧδε τὸ Ῥωμαίων κράτος ἄνωθεν ἀπό τε Κωσταντίνου καὶ τῶν αὐτοῦ παίδων.
ii. 318, 6 ὅτι δὴ ἀπὸ Βώνου σταλεῖεν. Leont. Noup. V. J. 18, 19 ἠβουλήθη ἀπὸ
αἰσχύνης καὶ στενώσεως ἀπάγξασθαι. 21,5 ἠναγκάσθη ἀπὸ πολλῆς ἄγαν στενώσεως
προσελθεῖν. Το 38, 19. 41, 14. 43, 13 ἀπὸ θυμοῦ.
369
Bb
1507-1512.1
PREPOSITIONS: ἀπό.
ἀπὸ τοῦ στρατηγοῦ. LRoss ii. 35, 134 τετιμημένον ἀπὸ τῆς Κορινθίων
βουλῆς. Luke 6, 18 ενοχλούμενοι ἀπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων. Jas. I, 13 ἀπὸ
Θεοῦ πειράζομαι. So Matt. 14, 26 ἀπὸ τοῦ φόβου ἔκραξαν. Jos. Ant. 20, 8, 10
τοὺς ἀπατηθέντας από τινος ἀνθρώπου γόητος. Polyaen. 6, 8, 50 θεραπευομένην
ἀπό τούτων. ib. μεταπεμφθεὶς ἀπ' αὐτῶν. Acta Petri et Pauli 189, 7 ἀπὸ
τῆς χαρᾶς ἔκλαυσαν. Eus. ii. 325 ο ἐπιστολὴν ἐδεξάμην γραφεῖσαν μοι ἀπὸ
Σερεννίου Γρανιανοῦ. Acta Xanth. 62, Ι τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτῆς ἠλλοιωμένον ἀπὸ
τῶν δακρύων. 65, 1 οχλουμένους ἀπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων. 85, 15 ἐξελύθη
ἀπὸ τῆς ἀφάτου χαρᾶς καὶ ἔπεσε χαμαί. Narr. Zos. 96, 6 ἀπεστάλην ἀπὸ τοῦ
Υψίστου. 105, 12 δεδήλωται ἡμῖν ἀπὸ τῶν ἀγγέλων. 107, 8. Vita Epiph.
48 Α τὰ θηρία κατησχύνθησαν ἀπὸ τῶν λόγων Ἐπιφανίου.
1508. 6. As time went on, this use of ἀπὸ became more and more
frequent, especially during T, which clearly indicates that by that
time it had already established itself as the term generally received
in the common language, and that with the opening of B, vπò had
disappeared from the common speech. As a matter of course, there
is no trace of inò in N; even those of its compounds which survive
have mostly been changed to ἀπο-, as: ἀπομονή, ἀποδέχομαι (as Vita
Epiph. 97 D, & 48 Β ἀπεδέξαντο ἡμᾶς οἱ ἀδελφοὶ μετὰ χαρᾶς μεγάλης),
ἀπακούω, ἀποκάτω, ἀποσκεπάζω all for ὑπο- (1696; ep. 1615 & 1686.)
,
So even Αποκόρωνας from ancient Ιπποκορώνιον (in Crete).
1509. Considering then that ånd does not occur (either in the inscriptions
or in the papyri) before G, as a substitute for iró, we are warranted in
assuming that the sporadic examples found in A, particularly in Thucy-
dides (VRost7 569 b; IGolisch 9), are to be charged to the B-N copiers.
πι
1510. 7. To analogous influences is due the association of arò with
παρὰ and the consequent retreat of the latter. This was also to be
expected seeing that A rapà with genitive acted only as a variety of
ὑπὸ in denoting a personal agent after passive verbs (1628 ; cp. Xen.
Ven. 13, 4 διδάσκεσθαι παρὰ τῶν ἀληθῶς ἀγαθόν τι ἐπισταμένων μᾶλλον ἢ ὑπὸ
τῶν ἐξαπατῶν τέχνην ἐχόντων. RKühner ii. 442). Now as ὑπὸ was replaced
by ἀπό, it was inevitable that παρά, the partial representative of ὑπό,
should also share the same fate and make room for από (1628).
2
1511. 8. As a further P-N feature of arò we must reckon its use to
express the value or price, where A would either be content with the
simple genitive (1338), or resort to some other turn. This deviation
seems to be peculiar to G. (Cp. 1515).
b
CIA iv. 573 (328 Β.α.) χρυσῷ στεφάνῳ ἑκάτερον ἀπό ή' δραχμῶν. Sept.
Esth. 1, 7 ἀνθράκινον κυλίκιον προκείμενον ἀπὸ ταλάντων τρισμυρίων. Polyb.
21, 30, 1ο ἐδόθη στέφανος ἀπὸ ταλάντων πεντήκοντα. 21, 34, 4 (cp. 21.
36, 4). 24, 1, η δεξαμένη τον στέφανον ὃν ἐκόμιζεν ἀπὸ μυρίων χρυσῶν. 30, 5, 4.
32, 3, 3 στέφανον ἐξαποστείλας από χρυσῶν μυρίων. Diod. 18, 4, 4 ναῦς κατα-
σκευάσαι πολυτελεῖς ἐξ ἀπὸ ταλάντων χιλίων καὶ πεντακοσίων ἕκαστον (ἑκάστην ?)
20, 46, 2 στεφανῶσαι ἀμφοτέρους ἀπὸ ταλάντων διακοσίων. 31, 28 παρεγένοντο
στέφανον κομίζοντες ἀπὸ χρυσῶν μυρίων. So 31, 29. Jos. Ant. 14, 8, 5 ασπίδα
χρυσῆν . . . ἀπὸ χρυσῶν μυριάδων πέντε.
1512. 9. Noteworthy is the G -B use of από with the article or with
a numeral, to designate a member or follower of a particular school
or class (cp. 1569; RKühner ii. 396, 3, c), οἱ ἀπὸ Πυθαγόρου, οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς
Στους Plut. ii. 879 Λ. Luc. Pisc. 43.
2
Galen. 8, 68 Β οἱ ἀπὸ Μωϋσοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ ' the Jows and the Christians.
Sext. 187, 21 οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς σκέψεως ' the scoptic philosophers. 261, 29 οἱ ἀπὸ
Επικούρου ‘the Epicuroans. Hdn. Hist. 7, 1, 4 οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς βουλῆς. 7, 1, 9
370
PREPOSITIONS: ἀπό.
[1512-1514.
οἱ ἀπὸ ὑπατείας. Zoς. 115, 21 εἷς τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐν Ῥώμῃ συγκλήτου βουλῆς ε
senator. 227, 4 ἅμα τισὶ τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς γερουσίας.
1513. 10. Another peculiarity, manifestly due to Latin influence, is the
proleptic use and construction of ἀπὸ or ἄπο (if not ἄπω, after ἄνω κάτω ἔξω
ἔσω, ep. ἄπωθεν after ἄνωθεν, κάτωθεν, ἔξωθεν, ἔσωθεν, πόρρωθεν, κύκλωθεν)
in the sense of ab ('off')to designate the degree of distance from a place
(cp. 1651. 1603; see also RKühner ii.2 396). Plut. Philop. 4, 3 îv ảypòs avtậ
ἀπὸ σταδίων εἴκοσι τῆς πόλεως erat ei ager a viginti stadiis ex urbe (cp. Caes.
B. G. 2, 30; 4, 22; 5, 32; 6, 7; B. C. 1, 65; Liv. 24, 46; RKühner Lat.
Gram. ii. 298 Α. 28). This Latinism first appeared about the Ist B. C.
and disappeared with the Roman sway; and since it has left no trace
in the subsequent popular language, it seems to have been a sort of
literary mannerism among the writers of the time. Cp. 1603. 1651;
JStich 58.)
Diod. 1, 51 ἐπάνω τῆς πόλεως ἀπὸ δέκα σχοίνων λίμνην ὤρυξε. 4, 56, S
εὑρέθη τὰς πηγὰς ἔχων ὁ ποταμὸς ἀπὸ τεσσαράκοντα σταδίων τῆς θαλάσσης.
Dion. H. ii. 53 ἀπὸ τεσσαράκοντα σταδίων τῆς Ῥώμης κειμένῳ. Strab. 11, 2, 9
ἐκδίδωσι δ᾽ ἀπὸ δέκα σταδίων τῆς κώμης εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν. John 21, 8 οὐ γὰρ
ἦσαν μακρὰν ἀπό τῆς γῆς, ἀλλ' ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων. Jos. Ant. II, 5, 4
σαλπιγκτὰς ἀπὸ πεντακοσίων ἔστησε ποδῶν. App. Hisp. 46 παρεστρατοπέδευσαν
ἀπὸ σταδίων τεσσάρων καὶ εἴκοσι. Polyaen. iii. 11, 15 οἱ δὲ Λάκωνες ἀπὸ πέντε
σταδίων ἀντεστρατοπέδευσαν. Hermas Vis. 4, 1, 2 ἀπὸ τῆς ὁδοῦ τῆς δημοσίας
ἐστὶν ὡσεὶ στάδια δέκα. ib. 5 οὕτω γὰρ ἦν ἀπ' ἐμοῦ ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίου. Mal. 130,
8 ἄλσει ἀπὸ μικροῦ ὄντι. 136, 12 ὡς ἀπὸ μιλίων δύο τῆς θαλάσσης. 202, 2;
10. 218, II. 272, 12. 317, 8, etc. Callin. 62, 12 ἀπὸ μήκους. 98, 8 ἀπὸ τριῶν
σημείων. 70, 16. 119, 27. 60, 26. Narr. Zos. 98, 22 ὡς ἀπὸ μιλίων τριάκοντα.
Epist. Abgari 283, 3 ὡς ἀπὸ μιλίου ἑνός [1].
1514. nr. A still more striking Latinism is afforded by the use of
ȧrò with the plural genitive (only in abstract nouns with the gen.
sing.) in connexion with titles of office or profession as an equivalent
to Latin ex- (English late, formerly). This novelty made its appear-
ance during G and had a considerable run among writers down to
to B times, but it is foreign to M-N speech (cp. 1512. 1569).
CIG 372 από κομίτων ex-comes. CIG 521 ἀπὸ ἀγωνοθετών. Plut. Aom.
Paul. 3r οἱ ἀπὸ βουλῆς, et saope. Sull. 2 οἱ ἀπὸ σκηνῆς ; so id. Dem. 12. Cat.
[4] So further : Diod. 1, 97, 2 πέραν τοῦ Νείλου κατὰ τὴν Λιβύην ἀπὸ σταδίων
ἑκατὸν καὶ εἴκοσι τῆς Μέμφεως. 2, 7, 2. Το 14, 104, 1. 17, 112, 4. 18, 40; 19, 25, 2.
Dion. H. i. 14 ἀπὸ σταδίων ὀγδοήκοντα Ρεάτου, et saepo. 3, 32 γίνεται αὐτῶν περὶ
πόλιν Κρητὸν ἀπὸ σταδίων εξήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν τῆς Ῥώμης ἀγών. 9, 24 τὴν
πρώτην μάχην ἀπὸ σταδίων ὀκτὼ τῆς πόλεως ποιησάμενοι. Strab. 5, 2, 8. 8, 3, 4
ἔστι δέ τις ἄκρα τῆς Ηλείας πρόσβορρος ἀπὸ ἑξήκοντα τῆς Δύμης (sc. σταδίων).
10, 5, 8. Rov. 14, 20 ἀπὸ σταδίων χιλίων εξακοσίων as far as 1600 furlongs.
Jos. Ant. 14, 13, 9 συνεπέθεντο δὲ καὶ οὗτοι γενομένοις ἀπὸ σταδίων ἑξήκοντα
τῆς πόλεως. So Plut. Philop. 4. Otho rr, Appi. Pun. 14 ἔς τι χωρίον ἀπὸ τριά-
κοντα σταδίων Ιτύκης ἐνεδρεῦσαι. Civil. 3, 12 ὄντι αὐτῷ περὶ Ταρρακίνας ἀπὸ
τετρακοσίων που Ῥώμης σταδίων. 4, το7 τήν τε ἀγορὰν οἱ μὲν ἀπ᾿ ὀλιγων στα-
δίων ἐπήγοντο, οἱ δὲ ἀπὸ πεντήκοντα καὶ τριακοσίων. So Hann. 38; Pun. 102 ;
Civil. 1, 23; 50; 2, 56; 91; 3, 41; 4, Ιού. Polyaen. 4, 3, 27 ᾿Αλέξανδρος ἀπὸ
τριάκοντα σταδίων χάρακα ἐβάλετο. 4, 18. Galon. 6, 39, 3 F. Proc. i. 42, 18 ἔστι
δὲ ὁ ποταμὸς οὗτος Μαρτυροπόλεως μὲν ἀγχοτάτω, ᾿Αμίδης δὲ ὅσον ἀπὸ σταδίων
τριακοσίων. ii. 22), 2. ii. 268, 21 ἀπὸ σταδίων πεντήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν Καρχηδόνος
ἐγένοντο, et passim (ep. ISchelloin 22). JMoschos 3028 A ἕως ἀπὸ τριῶν σταδίων
του σπηλαίου, etc. Whether such anciont passagos as Theophr. Hist. 6, 2, 4
εκείνη δοκεῖ τριακοσίων σταδίων ἀπὸ θαλάττης ἐπάνω φύεσθαι aro gonuino is hard
to say.
1
371
Bb 2
1514-1516.]
PREPOSITIONS: ἀπό.
A
ο
54 οἱ ἀπὸ φιλοσοφίας. App. III. 13 ἔφθειραν βέβαιον ἄνδρα ἀπὸ βουλῆς =
βουλευτήν. Hisp. 99 ἔπεμψαν ἀπὸ τῆς βουλῆς ἄνδρας δέκα. Civil. I, 65 ὅσοι
1,
ἀπὸ τῆς βουλῆς ἐπεδήμουν. Socr. 16ο A Διονυσίου τοῦ ἀπὸ ὑπατικῶν. Acta
Xanth. 65, 22 ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ Φιλοθέου τοῦ ἀπὸ ἐπάρχων. Chal. 849 A. 852 a.
Apophth. 105 Α δ ἀπὸ λῃστῶν ' formerly a robber. 3o1 c ἦν δὲ ἀπὸ δούλων
ἀπελεύθερος. Callin. 78, 12 Μοναξίου τοῦ ἀπὸ ὑπάτων. 103, 3 από σχολα-
Mal. 227, 7 ἀπὸ ὑπάτων. 393, 21 τὸν ἀπὸ μαγίστρων. 393, 23
ἀπὸ ἐπισκόπων. 286, 13 ; etc. Αφρόνιος ὁ ἀπὸ ἐπάρχων. 252, 3 Διονύσιος
ὁ ἀπὸ φιλοσόφων. 436, 5 Ησαΐας ὁ τῆς Ῥόδου ὁ ἀπὸ νυκτεπάρχων Κωνσταντι-
νουπόλεως. Loont. Neap. V. S. 1744 D ὁ εἰρημένος ἀπὸ Ἑβραίων ‘formerly
a Jew [1.
__
στικών τινες.
1515. 12. Latin influence underlies finally the usage of and in a
distributive sense: apiece, at a time, where A would employ either ȧvà
οι κατά (662, 2. 1497 f. 1589). This new function of από cropped
up during T, and has ever since remained in popular favour. It is
now universal in N (663). Cp. 1511.
Pallad. 1o8r D παξαμάτας τέσσαρας ἔχοντας ὡς ἀπὸ ἓξ οὐγκιῶν ' oach weigh-
ing about six ounces.' IIOO D ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἄλλα μοναστήρια ἀπὸ διακοσίων καὶ
τριακοσίων ψυχῶν. Chal. 1557 » δανείζει ἀπὸ νομισμάτων διακοσίων καὶ τετρα-
κοσίων. Apophth. 277 Α πέντε ψαλμοὺς ἀπὸ ἓξ στίχων καὶ ἓν ᾿Αλληλούϊα.
Callin. 70, 17 ἀπὸ πεντήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν οἰκοῦντες ἀδελφοί. Mal. 441, 7 χαρι-
σαμένη ταῖς κύραις ἀπὸ νομίσματος ἑνός. JMoschos 2989 D παρείχεν πᾶσιν τοῖς
οὖσιν εἰς τὸν ναὸν ἀπό δύο λεπτών. 2992 Λ διδοῦσα ἀπὸ δύο νουμμίων. Leont.
Neap. V. J. 16, 17 τοῖς μὲν ἀνδράσιν ἀπό κερατίου ἑνὸς ἐδίδου, ταῖς δὲ γυναιξὶν
Από δύο. So too 57, 14; 58, 15. Alchem. 325, 23 ταῦτα ποίει. ἀπὸ
•
πέντε καὶ ἐξ φοράς [2].
1516. 13. From P downwards árò is frequently put before adverbs
of place and time (516).
Polyb. 40, 6, 1 ἀπ᾿ ἐντεῦθεν.—Sept. Jos. 3, 4 ἀπ᾿ ἐχθὲς καὶ τρίτης ἡμέρας.
2 Reg. 20. 2 ἀπὸ ὄπισθεν Δαυίδ.-2 Esdr. 5, 16 ἀπὸ τότε ἕως τοῦ νῦν ᾠκοδο-
μήθη.-ΝΤ Matt. 16, 21 από τότε. So Luke 16, 16.-Matt. 23, 39 (26, 29.
26, 64) άπ' ἄρτι (so John 13, 19. 14, 7).—CGL 229, 25 Από πότε ; ex quo ?
Apoll. D. Synt. 235, 25 ἀπ' ἐχθές ; also 340, 8. Λ. Ρ. ii. 76. Great Louvre
Pap. 923 ἀπὸ μακρόθεν. So Meta Tho. 3, 5. 12, 2 & 20 ἀπ᾿ ἔμπροσθεν. Εpiph. i.
276 1 ἀπ' ἐκεῖθεν. (=
Chron. 625, 5 ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ ( = αὐτόθεν). Porph. Adm. 77, 20
ἀπὸ κάτω. Cer. 357, 20 απ' εκεί"] See also 516.
[4] So further : Hrdn. 7, 1, 4 τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς βουλῆς ἁπάντων. 7, 9, 1 Καπελλιανὸς
ἦν τις ὄνομα τῶν ἀπὸ συγκλήτου. 7, 11, 1. Eus. ii. 1192 Β Διονύσιον τῶν ἀπὸ ὑπα-
τικών. Basil. iv. 609 Β Οὐίκτορι ἀπὸ ὑπάτων ‘ox-consul. Epiph. ii. 185 Β οἱ μὲν
ἀπὸ στρατιωτῶν ὄντες, οἱ δὲ ἀπὸ κληρικῶν ὑπάρχοντες. 502 D 'Αστερίῳ τινὶ ἀπὸ
σοφιστών ox-tonchor. Chrys. iii. 598 ν οἱ ἀπὸ ἡγεμόνων σοφισταί, οἱ ἀπὸ
τριβούνων. Pallad. 1035 Β 'Απολλώνιώς τις ὄνομα ἀπὸ πραγματευτῶν. 1204 Λ
Καπίτων τις ἀπὸ λῃστῶν γεγονὼν μοναχός. 1218 Β. 1244 D τοῦ ἀπὸ ἐπάρχων,
Nil. 105 D Αὐρηλιανῷ ἱλλουστρίῳ ἀπὸ Ἑλλήνων. 220 Λ Αλεξάνδρῳ μοναχῷ ἀπὸ
γραμματικῶν. 224 Ο. 336 ο Κρίσπῳ ἀπὸ αἰχμαλωσίας. 420 Λ 'Ακύλα ἀπὸ ὑπάτων.
Henco even compounds with ἀπο- are occasionally formed in B, as ἀπόδουλος,
ảo-
Αποεπίσκοπος, ἀπόθρονος.
•
[4] So further: Cosm. Ind. 444 ο ἔχων δὲ ἰδόντας ἐξ αὐτοῦ μεγάλους ὡς ἀπὸ
λιτρῶν δεκατριῶν ' euch woighing about thirteon pounds. 445 Λ οὐ βάλλει δὲ
καρπὸν εἰ μὴ δύο ἢ τρία σπάθια ἀπὸ τριῶν ἀργελλίων ‘each boaring three nuts.
JMoschos 2941 13 λαμβάνειν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ ἡμίσεως μοδίου σῖτον.
[*] Acts 28, 23 ἀπὸ πρωὶ ἕως ἑσπέρας.
400 Β ἀπ' ἐντεῦθεν. So Macar. 541 6.
2 Cor. 8, 10. 9, 3 από πέρυσι. Method.
Epiph. ii. 737 C. Cyrill. Scyth. V. S. 265 0
ἀπὸ ὀψὲ ἕως πρωί. Porph. Adm. 148, 9 ἀπ᾿ ἐκεῖσε, ἀπ᾿ ἐντεῦθεν, etc.
372
PREPOSITIONS: ἀπό, διά.
[1516b-1522.
1516. 13. This usage is now very common in N speech: ἀπὸ κάτω,
ἀπὸ πέρα, ἀπὸ 'πάνω, ἀπὸ ἐδῶ, ἀπό ἐκεῖ, ἀπὸ σήμερο, ἀπὸ αὔριο, ἀπὸ τότε, etc.
1517. 14. Lastly ἀπὸ began, during G-T, to lose its syntactical force
and exchange the genitive for the accusative:
Herm. Vis. 4, I wσeì åπto cтádioN. Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 122, 30 (+IV-Vth)
ἀπὸ ΗΜΙΟΝΟΝ. Gregent. 589 Α τὴν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ MECON τμηθῆναι.
JJejun. 1912 » ἀπὸ τοὺς κατηχουμένους. Theoph. 75, 25 από Αντιόχειαν.
428, Ι ἀπὸ δεκάτην τοῦ φεβρουαρίου μηνός. Porph. Cer. 53, 3 Από τους Αγίους
Αποστόλους. 211, 9 ἀπὸ τὴν μέσην. 58ο, 12 από ΙσπαΝΙΑΝ, etc. Adm. 74, 22
ἀπὸ τὸ Κάστρον. Leo Gram. 232, 18 ἀπὸ ὥραν πέμπτην μέχρις ἑσπέρας.
1517. This syntactical construction is the only one known to N (ep. ἐκ
1570), seeing that expressions like ἔρχομαι ἀπὸ τοῦ δασκάλου are elliptical :
ἀπὸ τὸ σπίτι τοῦ δασκάλου (cp. 1289. 1553. 1565).
1518. Sometimes, too, the macaronic construction with the dative is
met with. Porph. Cer. 619, 3 ἀπὸ τῇ πρώτη ἡμέρᾳ. Leo Gram. 352, 4 ἀπό
τῇ πεντηκοστῇ.This usage is of course unknown to N.
1519. 15. In its M-N stage, and is often dialectally changed (by dissimila-
tion from απο τὸ) to ἀπού, ἀπαί or ἀπέ (so even in Alchem. 325, 1 ἀπὸ τὸ ἀσῆμιν,
also ABC 3r, 6), and, before the article, to άφ', as : EGeorg. Θαν. 459 νὰ φυλαχθῇς
ἀφ᾿ τὸ κακόν, ἀφ' τη βροχὴν καὶ χιόνια. Sachl. 1, 347 καὶ ἀφ᾿ τὴν λωβάδα.
2, 398 καὶ ἀφ᾿ τὴν ἀγάπην τὴν πολλήν. 599 ἀφ᾽ τὸ παλαιόν.
Διά
1520. 12. Διά with AccuSATIVE and GENITIVE.
A with Accusative :
I. Of Place: through, throughout, only poetical : Διά πόντον - διὰ
πόντου. Διὰ στόμα ἔχειν = διὰ στόματος ἔχειν.
owing to :
Διά τί ; ' on what account ?'
τί;
Διά φόβον for fear. Διά
2. Of Cause: by reason of, on account of,
Διὰ ΤΑΥΤΗΝ ΤΗΝ ΑΙΤΙΑΝ, Διὰ τοῦτο, διὰ ταῦτα.
why?' ΔΙ' ΑΓΝΟΙΑΝ out of ignorance.
Φιλίαν ' out of friendship. Δι' HMAC through us.'
C
C
1520. This causal function of du still fully survives in its N
representative γιά (155, α): Για μένα, γιὰ σένα, Γι᾿ αὐτό, γιὰ τὴν κακήν του
κεφαλήν, γι᾿ ὅλ᾽ αὐτά.
1521. When in @ times ὑπὲρ began to retreat from popular speech (1491),
its function in behalf of, on account of, for the sake of, was gradually assumed
by διd with accusativo (1534. 1680), as: Aetn Tho. 6, 5 Διὰ μείζον τι τῆς
βρώσεως ἦλθον ἐνταῦθα καὶ ἵνα τὸ θέλημα τοῦ βασιλέως τελέσω.
1522. 2. Peculiar to G-B is the use of the combination διὰ τὸ with
the infinitive in the room of A iva or onws with the appropriate finite
mood: in order to (App. vi. 21). This telic use is uncommonly fre-
quent, especially in 7-B (cp. 1542):
Jos. Ant. 9, 4, 5 Διὰ τὸ κούφοι πρὸς τὸ φεύγειν εἶναι = ἵνα ὦσιν. Epiph. i.
956 ο Διὰ τὸ εἶναι = ἵνα ᾖ. Antoc. 3. 7. 3 (p. 580) Διὰ τὸ πᾶσιν εἶναι πρόδηλον
ἵνα f. Acta Pil. ii. 4, 3 οἶμαι γὰρ ὅτι διὰ τὸ πάντας ἀNACTĀCαι νεκροὺς ὧδε
παραγίνεται – ἵνα πάντας ἀναστήσῃ. Narrat. Jos. 3, 4 κατελθὼν εἰς τὸν κόσμον
Διά το σαρκωθῆναι καὶ σταυρῷ προσηλωθήναι. Apophth. 292 € για το
ΕΥΛΟΓΗΘΗΝΑΙ με παρὰ σοῦ ἐτόλμησα τοῦτο ποιῆσαι. Mal. 32, 21. 33, 8. 81, 7.
275, 18. 307, 22. 328, 12 ; et passim. 388, 4 Διά τό τοὺς ἀέρας αλλάξει for
373
1522-1530.]
PREPOSITIONS: diá.
διά.
a change of air.' Leont. Neap. V. S. 1741 A diÁ TÓ KOIMâceai. Anast.
Sin. 709 ν ἐὰν ἄνθρωπος ποιήσῃ ἁμάρτημα, καὶ ποιήσῃ τινὰς μισθούς διὰ τὸ
ΕΥΓχωρηθῆναι αὐτόν. Apoc. Mar. 126, 18 τῷ σταυρῷ προσηλώθην διὰ τὸ
ἐλευθερώσαι ὑμᾶς ἐκ τῆς ἀρχαίας κατάρας.
1523. 3. With the retreat of the infinitive and its final replacement
by iva or vá (App. vi. 13-18), the infinitival construction of dià tó was
naturally exchanged for dià vá or diavá (1769; cp. Italian per che,
English for to), a complex which has thus usurped the office of ancient
iva or onws with the subjunctive, and is now very common in N.
Alchem. 329, 7 diá nà kodaýon loia. Prodr. 3, 533 dià nà µǹv napaɣáλλŋ.
CGeorg. Const. 780 órav ópíoŋ őλoi evðùs dià Nà kaßaλλikeúrovv. So too now:
Γιά νά με λυπηθῇς, γιὰ νά του θυμᾶσαι, etc. See also 1769.
1524. 4º. B with Genitive: through, throughout:
(1) Of Place through, throughout: Sià péons Tŷs Tóλews
'right through the town.' διὰ τῆς ἀγορᾶς ‘through the
market.'
1525. 4. In P-N times this local function of dià has been usurped
successively by the adverbial expressions dià péσov, 'through the
midst,' then avà péσov (1498), also eis (To) pérov (as Mal. 329, 7; 464, 2)
Οι κατὰ (τὸ) μέσον (Mal. 233, 6. 339, 3), and still later by simple μέσον,
'through,' between,' 'in the midst.' Now it is usually expressed by
ανάμεσα εἰς Οι ἀπὸ μέσ᾽ ἀπό.
Great Louvre Pap. 2136 MÉCON (= èv µéow). Mart. Pauli 117, 3 dv eïdoµev
MECON ἡμῶν. Acta Pauli et Theclae 262, 2 ἔδησαν αὐτὴν ΜέCON τῶν ταύρων.
Acta Xanth. 81, 4 MÉCON avтâv поρevoμévov pov. Apophth. 141 B éμeiva
Mécon sáµvæv oтKwv. Mal. 126, 5 mécon tŵy innéwv. 479, 5. 204, 15. 221,
ῥάμνων στήκων.
τῶν
20, etc. Porph. Cor. 76, 17 diéρXETAL MÉCON TOû vaoû. 102, 21 & 166, 19
διερχόμενος μέσον τῆς ἐκκλησίας. 133, 14 διέρχεται ΜέCON αὐτῶν.
[However cp. Mal. 432, 19 did eaλáccнc éπeμse, dià sĤC KTλ. 460, 8
ἀγωνίσασθαι διὰ ΓΗc τε καὶ θαλάσcHc.]
>
Διά
1526. 5. (2) Of Time: throughout, during; within: Aid
νυκτὸς 'through the night. Διὰ πολλοῦ (se. χρόνου) for a long
'
time.' Δι᾿ ὀλίγου ‘for a short time. Διὰ παντὸς τοῦ βίου
'through life."
1527. In the sense of during the preposition did is sometimes omitted in
P (1344).
1528. 5. This usage of did began, as early as A, to be transferred first
to eis then to the accusative simple, and the latter alternative has finally
become the ordinary means of expressing duration of time (1275. 1550):
eic éviautóv 'for a (whole) year.' eic тòv åπаνта xрóvoν 'for ever.'
Xen. An. 1, 2, 6 ἐνταῦθα Κῦρος ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας πέντε. Thuc. 7, 77 σπουδὴ
ὁμοίως καὶ ΝΥΚΤΑ καὶ ἡμέραν ἔσται τῆς ὁδοῦ through the night and the
day.' John 2, 12 ékeî épeivav où пoλλठĤмépac.
1529. 6º. (3) Of the interval of time or space traversed:
with an interval of, every; after, at the end of:
Th. 3, 21 Διὰ δέκα ἐπάλξεων 'at every tenth battlement. Διὰ Δεκάτογ
ἔτογς every tenth year. δι᾽ ἐτῶν εἴκοσι ' every twenty years. Δι
TÉVTE ÉTON after five years,' 'every five years.'
1530. 6. This usage of dià seems to have been peculiar only to
A literary style.
374
PREPOSITIONS : διά.
[1531-1534.
1531. 7ª. (4) Of means (agent or instrument), especially in P
Greek: Δι' ἑρμηνέως λέγειν ' to speak through an interpreter.
Δι᾿ ὀφθαλμῶν ὁρᾶν 'to see through the eyes.
Polyb. 5, 58, 5 φρουρουμένη διὰ τῶν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ Βασιλέων. Paus. 3, 9, 2
πυνθάνεσθαι δι᾽ ἀγγέλων. 10, 32, 4 δι᾿ ὀνειράτων δείξαι. 8, 37, 11 ἀναβήσῃ
Διὰ κλίμακος. Μ. Aurel. 1, 12 διὰ τούτου τοῦ τρόπου. Han. Hist. 7, 6, 3
γράμματα δι᾽ ὧν ἐδήλου. 2, 13, 6 κτᾶσθαι (ἀρχὴν) δι᾿ ἀνδρείας ἐναρέτου.
7, 8, 9 ταῖς Διά χειρὸς ἀπειλαῖς, et passim. Mal. 118, 9 κατασκευάσας διὰ
ΒΟΤΑΝῶν τινων φάρμακον. 281, 1 στρώσας Διά γλίτου λίθου.
321, 18. 329, 2, etc.
Διά
302, 9.
1532. 7. In A this function of did was generally performed by the
intrumental dative (1379) which was later (especially since Christian
times) occasionally preceded by ἐν (1559-62), rarely σύν (1669 f.). Another
mode of expressing instrumental relation was sometimes resorted to, even
by A writers, by means of the preposition μετὰ with genitive (1606). This
last expedient met during G-B with a great popularity, and so ended by
becoming universal in N, chiefly in the abbreviated form μέ (1608).
>
<
1533. 8. Phrases : dià xeipoc éxew 'to have in hand.' i CTÓMATOC
ἔχειν ' to have in one's mouth. Διὰ ταχέων, διὰ τάχους, " quickly. Διά
Τέλογο ' finally, completely. Διὰ φόβος είναι to be in fear. Διὰ πέντε
σταδίων at a distance of five stades. Διά πολλον ' at a great distance,
'for a long while.' Ai oxiroy 'at a short distance,' 'for a little while.'
Δια Μακρών at great length. Διά βραχέων in a few words, briefly.
Δι' αἰῶνος “ for ever. Δι' ὀργῆς angrily. δ' ἔχθρας ιέναι τινί ' to quarrel
with one.' Διὰ δίκης ἰέναι τινί ‘to go to law with one. Δι' οὐδενὸς
ποιεῖσθαι ' to attach no importance to.
1
>
1534. When, with the opening of T, the construction of all prepo-
sitions became uniform by substituting the accusative for the other
oblique cases (1493), the various meanings of dià with genitive were
naturally transferred to its accusatival construction. Accordingly
dia with the accusative appears, since T, in the following additional
senses :
(α) By means of, through: Pallad. 1105 A τρεφέσθωσαν διά τά σινιάσματα
'with the chaff.'
(0) During, for : JMoschos 3000 c ἐλάλει σὺν αὐτῷ διὰ πολλὴν ὥραν “for
a long time.'
(c) Concerning, about ; for, for the sake of, for the purpose of: Hermas Sim.
9, 28, 3 ἔπαθον διὰ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ. Alchom. 36, II ὁ θεὸς τὸ
ἔδωκεν διὰ τοὺς πτωχοὺς καὶ ἀπηλπισμένους. Apoc. Mar. 124, 27 οὐ δέομαι Δια
τοὺς ἀπίστους. Apophth. 252 α ἔλεγεν ὁ ἀββᾶς Ποιμήν διὰ τὸν ἀββᾶν Κύπριν
ὅτι κτλ.
253 D παρεκάλεσαν αὐτὸν διὰ κελλίον. 265 σ οὐ δι᾿ ἐμὲ γέγονε
τοῦτο οὐδὲν γάρ εἰμι), ἀλλὰ διὰ τὴν χώραν καὶ τὰ ὀρφανὰ ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίησε τὸ
πράγμα. Vita Epiph. 6o B ἀπόλυσόν με διὰ τὸν θεὸν ὃν σέβῃ. Callin. 65, 23
Διὰ τὸν θεὸν τοῦτο ἐποίει καὶ διὰ τὴν ταπείνωσιν. 66, 3. 65, 4. 96, 12 ἐάσαντες
τὸν κόσμον διὰ τὸν θεόν. 134, 16 αναγκάζομαι λέγειν διὰ τὴν ὑμῶν ὠφέλειαν.
Mal. 102, 1 γνόντες δὲ πάντες διὰ τὴν Βρίσσου θυγατέρα. 133, 4 ακούσασα
Διὰ τὸν ἑαυτῆς ἄνδρα ὅτι τὴν Κασάνδραν φιλεί. 135, 10. 159, 18. 184, 18.
219, 18. 297, 22. 387, 7. 466, 20 γράψας Ρωμαίοις διὰ Σεργιόν τινα διάκονον.
Apoc. Mar. 117, η πῶς δι' ἡμᾶς ἐρώτησας καὶ δι' ἡμᾶς οὐ κατερώτησεν
᾿Αβραὰμ ὁ προπάτωρ. ib. 12 παρακαλοῦσα πολλὰ διὰ τοὺς Χριστιανούς. 126,
Vita SA 34* ο διὰ τὴν τῶν οὐρανῶν βασιλείαν ἀγωνι-
23 ἔκλαυσεν δι᾽ ὑμᾶς.
ζόμενος.
375
1535-1542.]
PREPOSITIONS: εἰς (ές).
1535. This last usage gradually assumed the ascendency and is now
the leading function of διὰ γιὰ) in N. (1769.)
Eic (ec).
1536. 1. eis (from èvs, cp. 169),—in old A also ès (reduced from
èvs), current in CIA previous to 334 B. C.-with ACCUSATIVE
only: into to.
It follows oxpressions of motion, and thus is opposed on the one side to
ἐξ from (1566), and on the other to ἐν ‘in' (1555).
1537. 1. Of Place: into:—eἰς τὴν πόλιν ‘into the town,
εἰς τὸ πλῆθος λέγειν 'to speak to (or before the crowd, to address
the crowd. παρεῖναι οι αφικέσθαι εἰς ‘to arrive in or at
ἀθροίζεσθαι, συλλέγεσθαι εἰc, ‘to assemble in.” εἰς χεῖρας ἔρχεσθαι
τινι ' to come to close quarters (or to blows) with.
1538. Not rarely, however, the distinction between motion and
rest is lost sight of, and thus eis is used for ev, and conversely (1548.
1564):
Xen. An. 3, 4, 13 εἰς τοῦτον τὸν σταθμὸν Τισσαφέρνης ἐπεφάνη. So often
παρεῖναι είς. Th. 4, 42 ἐν ᾿Αμπρακίᾳ καὶ ἐν Λευκαδίᾳ ἀπῄεσαν. CIA (κατα)-
θεῖναι εἰς πόλιν οι ἐν πόλει, αναγράψαι εἰς στήλην οἱ ἐν στήλῃ, κεῖσθαι
εἰς τύμβον, ἀναπαύεσθαι εἰς τόπον, KMeisterhans 2 176, 20-22.-IGS
1811 κοπιάσαντι ἐς ταῦτα τὰ χωρία. NT 2 Tim. I, II εἰς ὃ ἐτέθην ἐγὼ
κηρυξ. CLeemans 91, 5 γράψας ἐς τὰ δύο μέρη. ib. 99, 3 γνῶθι τίνος ἡμέρα
ἐστιν ἐς τὸ Ἑλληνικόν, etc. See 1547 & 1557. (Cp. G Hatzidakis 21o f.)
1539, 2. Of Time: until::
"
εἰς τὴν νύκτα ' until night. εἰς ἡμᾶς 'to our times. εἰς τὴν ὑστεραίαν
' until (or for) the next day. εἰς ὕστερον, εἰς ἔπειτα until or for later
on.' ἐς αὔριον until or for to-morrow. eic (τον) καιρόν ' at the right
εἰς
moment.' εἰς τὸ λοιπόν ' for the future, in future. εἰς τὸν ἅπαντα
Xpávov 'for ever,' eic anaέ 'for once.'
'
1540. 3. Metaphorically:
96
a. Of the object or purpose: χρῆσθαι τινί εἰς τι ' to use some-
thing for some purpose. παρασκευὴ ἡ εἰς τὸν πόλεμον pre-
parations for war. τὰ εἰς τὸν πόλεμον necessaries for war.
εἰς δέον 4 in time of need, in the right moment. eic καιρόν ' in
season. eic ἅπαξ ' for ones. So χρήσιμος, ἐπιτήδειος, ἱκανὸς εἴς τι.
6. To denote a feeling towards, as: φιλία, ἔχθρα εἴ τινα;
διαβολὰς λέγειν εἴς τινα. ἁμαρτάνειν εἴς τινα, εἴς τι.
1541. In A the above relations, 1540 a-b, can also be expressed by πpús
(1657, c), or by the simple dativo (1353-8), a circumstance which brought
about an inter-relation among cic, πρός, and the dativo rospectively, and
ultimatoly resulted in the rotrout of boll προς and the dativo before eis.
1542. Peculiarly frequent, especially in Biblical compositions and
imitations, is the use of els rò with the infinitive to denote the
376
PREPOSITIONS: eis
[1542-1550b.
εἰς (ές).
purpose or the designed consequence (App. vi. 22; cp. 1522):—eic
τὸ ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν, εἰς τὸ σταυρωθήναι, εἰς τὸ ἐμπαῖξαι.
1543. c. To denote a limit of measure or number:-eic
διακοσίους ' to the number of 200. εἰς τοὺς ἑκατόν ‘as many as
100. εἰς δύναμιν ‘to the best of one's ability.” εἰς τοσοῦτο
ávoías 'to such a degree of madness.'
1544. In this usngo eis is often confused with ἕως (1638).
1545. d. In respect of, with regard to, as: φρόνιμος εἴ τι
πρῶτος εἰς πάντα, (ἀποβλέπειν εἴς τινα, ei'c τι
1546. 4. As already observed (1348), a P feature of els is that it often
supplies the place of the dative of the indirect or remote object. This
usage, though not unknown to 4, becomes increasingly popular, especially
since G times. See 1348.
1547. 5. As a signal departure from A literary usage may be noted
the neglect or obliteration, in the common language, of all distinc-
tion between motion and rest (1538. 1557). Hence I compositions, in
particular those of unscholarly character, show an ever increasing
confusion and interchange of eis and év, until ultimately eis, owing to
the popularity of its final sound (-s) as well as to its convenient
construction (accusative), displaced and obliterated ἐν (1564).
1548. Accordingly in P-N eis stands for èv—
i. After expressions denoting rest, and that very frequently since
G times, if not earlier (1538).
Sept. Num. 35, 33 τὴν γῆν εἰς ἣν ὑμεῖς κατοικεῖτε. Mark 1, 39 ἦν κηρύσσων
εἰς τὰς συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν. Luke 11, 7 τὰ παιδία μου μετ'
ἐμοῦ εἰς τὴν κοίτην εἰσίν. John I, 18 θεὸς ὁ ὢν εἰς τὸν κόλπον τοῦ πατρὸς. Acts 25,
4 τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν. Diod. 3, 44 ὁρᾶται χερρόνησος καὶ λιμὴν εἰς
αὐτὴν κάλλιστος. 5, 84 διατρίβων εἰς τὰς νήσους τὰς καταντικρὺ τῆς Ἰωνίας. 13, 12
καθημένους εἰς Σικελίαν. Luc. Asin. ι εἴπερ ἐπίστανται ἄνδρα κατοικοῦντα εἰς
τὰ Ὕπατα. Αel. 7, 8 Ηφαιστίων εἰς Εκβάτανα ἀπέθανε. Proc. ii. gr, I ἐς τὸν
πύργον φυλακὴν εἶχον. 116, 14 διεχείμαζον εἰς τὰ ἐπ᾿ Αἰτωλίας καὶ ᾿Ακαρνανίας
χωρία. i. 339, 22 ἱκέτης ἐκάθητο ἐς τὸ ἱερόν. ii. 8, 9 κεῖται ἐς τοῦ Ιονίου κόλπου
τὰ ἔσχατα, οἱ passim. Leont. Neap. V. J. 7, 3 καὶ εἶδον εἰς αὐτὸν ἔργα. 7, 6
εὕρησα εἰς αὐτὸν κατορθώματα. 38, 22 πόσοι εἰς ὄρος ἐκοιμήθησαν. 39, 6 πόσοι
εἰσὶν εἰς τὴν πόλιν ταύτην, et passim. Mal. 29, 16 εἰς τὸ Σίλπιον ὄρος ᾤκησαν,
et passim. Nic. ii. 865 Λ ἐν Ῥώμῃ ἐστὶν εἰς μοναστήριον.—See also 1565.
1548. This usage of eis is now most common in N :—κοίτομαι εἰς τὸ κρεβ
βάτι, κάθεται εἰς τὰ σαμάρι, μένει εἰς τὸ σπίτι, etc.
ἐν
1549. 6. Conversely during the period of confusion ev very often performs
the function of els (1564 l.).
1550. ii. To denote space of time: within, in the space of, during
(1526-8. 1558).
Polyb. 32, 13, 5 προδοθέντων πάντων τῶν ἐπίπλων εἰς δέκα μήνας. Diod. 19.
15 μισθοδοτήσας δὲ τοὺς Μακεδόνας εἰς ἓξ μῆνας for six months. Strab. 17.
1, 2 διεστᾶσι δὲ εἰς δέκα ή δώδεκα ἡμερῶν ὁδόν. Athen. 4. 53 χοίνικα κριθῶν
εἰς τέσσαρας ἡμέρας διεμέτρει τοῖς ἀνοήτοις ᾿Αθηναίοις. See also 1528.
1550. Also this usage of eis is most common in N, as: eiς ἕνα μήνα, εἰς
εἴκοσι μέρες, εἰς δέκα ώρες.
377
1551-1554b.]
PREPOSITIONS: εἰς (ές).
1551. iii. Το denote the instrument: wilh. In this usage, which is
a translation of Hebraistic ev (1562), it is uncommon in P, and utterly
unknown to N.
Martyr. Areth. 1o εἶθ᾽ οὕτως εἰς πτύους λικμηθῆναι τὴν τέφραν εἰς τὸν ἀέρα.
JMoschos 2949 Β ἐσφύγγισεν τὸν φοῦρνον εἰς τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτοῦ. 2996 α εἰς τὸ
θανατικόν. Leont. Neap. V. J. 39, 14 εἰς γονάχιον θερμαίνῃ. 38, 17 εἰς παλλὶν
σκεπάζεται. Mal. 381, 3 ἐσφάγη εἰς καλάμια ὀξυνθέντα. 407, 15 εἰς ἀξίνας ἔκοπτον
τὸν ἄργυρον. 426, 9. 178, 15.See also 1562.
1552. As a distinctly foreign element may be considered the use
of eis before the predicate of a substantive (1159. 1285). This is an
Hebraism (beth substantiae) which, through the influence of the
Septuagint, became a favourite expression with Biblical imitators,
but remained alien to popular speech. It is utterly unknown to N.
Sept. Gen. 2, 24 ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν. 12, 2 ποιήσω σε εἰς ἔθνος
μέγα. 34, 12 δώσατέ μοι τὴν παῖδα ταύτην εἰς γυναίκα. 48, 19 οὗτος ἔσται εἰς
λαόν, et passim. 1 John 5, 8 οἱ τρεῖς εἰς τὸ ἕν εἰσιν. Clem. R. ad Cor. 11, 2 eic
κρίμα καὶ εἰς σημείωσιν γίνονται. Ignat. ad Εph. II, 1 ἵνα εἰς κρίμα γένηται.
Hermas Sim. 9, 13, 5 ἔσονται εἰς ἐν πνεύμα. Tost. xii. 1o7η Β ἔλαβον
αὐτὴν εἰς γυναίκα. 1125 Β ἐπράθην εἰς δοῦλον, εἰς αἰχμαλωσίαν ἐλήφθην.
Hdn. Hist. 5, 6, 5 χρήματα πάμπλειστα τῇ θεῷ εἰς προῖκα ἐπιδοῦναι. Neocaes.
Can. 12 eic πρεσβύτερον ἄγεσθαι οὐ δύναται ' he cannot be made a presybter.
Aela Tho. 22, 22 ἔσται ὑμῖν αὕτη ἡ εὐχαριστία εἰς εὐσπλαγχίαν καὶ ἔλεος καὶ
ἀμοιβήν. 36, 14 ἔσται σοι τοῦτο εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν. 82, το γενέσθαι ταῖς
ψυχαῖς ταύταις εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν. so ib. 28. Macar. 533 Β ὁ θεὸς ἔχρισεν
αὐτὸν εἰς βασιλέα. ib. Ο τοῦτον προορίσας εἰς ἡγούμενον. Socr. 7, 23 δεχθῆναι
εἰς βασιλέα δεύμενος. Lyd. 220, 3 προσελάβοντό με εἰς πρῶτον χαρτουλάριον.
Loont. Neap. V. J. 49, 22 κόρην ἔχων εἰς γυναίκα.
1553. Το Hebraistic influence seems further to point the use of εἰς
(like that of ev 1563) to denote the price : for, as: Greg. Nyss. iii. 1097 €
τριάκοντά μοι τεχνίτας συνέθεντο εἰς τὸν χρύσινον ἐπὶ τῷ τετραπεδικῷ ἔργῳ.
JMoschos 2992 Λ ἔλαβον εἰς τὰ δύο λεπτά θερμία. Const. iii. 1017 Α
ἀγοράσαι εἰς νομίσματα ἕξ. Codin. 99, 7 πιπράσκεσθαι τοῦ σίτου μόδιον ἓν
εἰς τὸ νόμισμα ' one bushel for a coin. Leont. Neap. V. J. 28, 5 où
συνεχώρησας τῷ δούλῳ σου εἰς χρήματα πωλῆσαι τὴν χάριν σου. 39, 25
ἠγόρασεν αὐτὸ εἰς τριάκοντα ἓξ νομίσματα. So 44, 17. 55, 20 τὸν μισθὸν ὃν
ἐποίησεν εἰς τὰς ἑπτὰ ἥμισυ λίτρας. (1340. 1660.)
1553. Elliptical is the construction of els with genitive in phrasos liko
πορεύομαι εἰς διδασκάλου (sc. οίκον), a peculiarity which still survives in N:
πάγω 'ς τοῦ δασκάλου, 'ς τοῦ γειτόνου, εἰς τοῦ ἰατροῦ. (1289 f. 1517 f.)
b
1554. In N els shows, boside this ancient form, two by-forms caused by
phonopathy:
a. An abbreviated form 's due to the weakness of the i-sound (146~
154), and found even in MSS of the IXh, a circumstance which points to
its still greator age. (Cp. ἢ 's for ἢ εἰς in Ar. Ran. 186 f. Thesm. 1122, and
FBechtol 174, a, 2, Chios.)
CGL iii. 648 'ς τὸ φόρον. 649 c τὰ δεξιὰ κρούσατε. κατέβῃς τὸν δαφνῶνα.
650 'ς τὴν οἰκίαν εἰμί. ἀκολούθησόν μοι c τὸ κρεοπωλείον, ότι τὸ δημόσιον
ὅτι
ἢ ἐν τῷ ἰδιωτικῷ. μήτι θέλεις ἐλθεῖν c τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα ; 652 ἔρχου c τὸ ἱδρωτήριον.
653 καὶ C κανίσκιον εἰσοίσει. Prodr. passim ; and so on ever since,
C
b. An amplified form cloé, now vory frequent before consonants (208).
1554". As a N curiosity mark that the frequent association with topo-
graphical names of eis, especially in the form 's, led to its provection and
incorporation with the succeeding namo (130), so that in N, topographical
378
PREPOSITIONS: ἐν.
[1554b-1562.
names often begin with a parasitic r, as : εἰ]ς Καρδαμύλην Σκαρδαμούλα,
Κάρπαθον Σκάρπαθος, 'ς 'Αμισόν (Σαμσος) Σαμψούς, 'ς Ήτειαν Σητεία (in east
Crete), ', Ιτανον Σίτανος (ib.), etc. So too Turkish Σταμπούλ ('ς τὴν Πόλιν),
Στάν-Κιοϊ ('ς τὴν Κῶν), etc.
'ς
Εν.
1555. Ἐν (from ers, 1536) with the DATIVE only : in.
It follows expressions of rest and thus is opposed to els (1536); also to ἐξ
(1566).
1556. I. Of Place:
N
α. in:—ἐν ᾿Αθήναις, ἐν τῇ πόλει, ἐν τῇ Ἑλλάδι. ἡ ἐν Μαρα-
θῶνι μάχη ' the battle in M.
b. among:— ἐν τοῖς φίλοις, ἐν Μήδοις. ἐν πολλοῖς λέγειν ' to
speak in the presence of many people.' So too in P-B Greek,
as Sept. Ps. 50 (51), η ἰδοὺ γὰρ ἐν ἀνομίαις συνελήφθην καὶ ἐν
ἁμαρτίαις ἐκίσσησέ (read ἐκύησέ) με ἡ μήτηρ μου.
1557. In this local usage (a & b), év is sometimes identified with
εἰς (1538). In either case, G-B uses sometimes (ἀνὰ) μέσον (1525),
sometimes ἐντὸς or εἴσω.
1558. 2. Of Time: in; during; within:
ἐν νυκτί. ἐν τῷ χειμῶνι. ἐν πέντε ἡμέραις. ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς
'during the armistice.'
1559. 3. Metaphorically : of manner and means: in; with :
ἐν τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ in this manner. ἐν σιωπῇ in silence.'-Xen.
An. 6, 1, 4 ἔπινον ἐν κερατίνοις ποτηρίοις. Lys. 26, 9 ἐν τῷ
ἕκαστον
δικαίως ἄρχειν ἡ πολιτεία σῴζεται. Isocr. 3, 61 τὴν εὔνοιαν τὴν πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἐν
τοῖς ἔργοις ἐνδείκνυσθε μᾶλλον ἢ ἐν τοῖς λόγοις.ὁρῶ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς I see
with my eyes'; so Luc. Amor. 29 ἐν ὄμμασιν βλέπειν.
1560. 4. Phrases : ἐν φόβῳ εἶναι ' to be in fear. ἐν σοί ἐστι it is in
your power. ἐν αἰτίᾳ ἔχειν τινά “to hold one responsible. ἐν παρα-
σκευῇ εἶναι ' to be in preparation. ἐλπίδας ἔχειν ἔν τινι ' to have one's
hopes on some one.' ἐν ὅπλοις εἶναι ‘to be under arms. ἐν βραχεί
briefly. ἐν δέοντι ' in the right moment. ἐν τάχει speedlily. ἐν
ὄμμασιν before one's eyes.
1561. 5. Peculiarly frequent, especially in Biblical writers and
their imitators, is the use of ev T with the present (also aorist)
infinitive, instead of the present (or aorist) participle (1601. 2075".
2141. 2163. 2170, i. App. vi. 21) :-ἐν τῷ σπείρειν, ἐν τῷ καθεύδειν, ἐν
τῷ ἀκούειν, ἐν τῷ λαλῆσαι —for σπείρων (σπείρας), καθεύδων, etc.
1562. 6. The metaphorical (instrumental) use of ἐν (1559-1561),
which on the whole is uncommon in A, becomes considerably fre-
quent in P times, notably among Biblical writers and their imi-
tators, who often go as far as to place it before any dative;
a phenomenon which points to Hebrew influence, and moreover
indicates the retreat of the loose (instrumental, etc.) dative (1381 b).
Sept. Gen. 48, 22 ἣν ἔλαβον ἐκ χειρὸς ᾿Αμορραίων ἐν μαχαίρᾳ μου καὶ τόξῳ.
Judith 1, 15 κατηκόντισεν αὐτὸν ἐν ταῖς ζιβύνναις αὐτοῦ. Esai, 10, 15 μὴ
379
1562-1566.]
PREPOSITIONS: ἐν, ἐξ (ἐκ).
δοξασθήσεται ἀξίνη ἄνευ τοῦ κόπτοντος ἐν αὐτῇ. Matth. 7, 2 μετρεῖν ἐν μέτρῳ.
5, 13 ἁλίζειν ἐν ἅλατι. Luke 22, 49 πατάσσειν ἐν μαχαίρᾳ. Mark 14, 1 ἐζήτουν
πῶς αὐτὸν ἐν δόλῳ κρατήσαντες ἀποκτείνωσιν. Rev. 6, 8 ἀποκτεῖναι ἐν ρομφαίᾳ,
et passim. Luc. Asin. 44 τεθνηκὼς ἐν ταῖς πληγαίς. Dial. Mort. 23, 3
καθικόμενον ἐν τῇ ῥάβδῳ. Conser. hist. 12 ἐν ἀκοντίῳ φονεύειν. Han. Hist.
7, 5, 2 ἐν βρόχῳ τοῦ βίου ἀνεπαύσατο. 1, 5, 4 τῶν ἐν ὅπλοις ἔργων. Acta Tho.
8, 16 αἱ παστάδες ἐν καλάμῳ κεκόσμηνται. Test. xii. 1125 B ΕΝ λιμῷ συνεσχέ-
Β
θην. Acta Xanth. 62, 4 ἐπικερασθῆναι ἐν τῇ θλίψει ἑτέραν θλίψιν. ib. 16
ἐτέρφθη πάνυ ἐν αὐτῷ. Callin. 57, 12 ἐν δίψῃ ζητοῦντες ποῦ εὑρεῖν ἄνδρα.
91, 2 ἐν ἐδέσμασι τρέφειν τὸ σῶμα. 113, το έκρουσεν ἐν ξύλῳ. 129, 10.
Mal. 50, II ἐν ᾗ ἐβάσταζεν ἀξίνῃ ἔκλασε τὸ ξύλον. Cp. also 1551.
N
1563. 7. Another P but rare use of ev is that denoting the price : for. This
is a paraphrase of els under Hebraistic influence (cp. 1553).
1 Chr. 21, 2af
ἀγοράσω ἐν ἀργυρίῳ. Rev. 5, 9 ἀγοράζειν ἐν τῷ αἵματι.
1564. 8. But the most notable feature in the P-N history of ev is
that, owing to its final v and its datival construction, it retreated
before its synonym els prior to T (1548), its continuance in the sub-
sequent literature being due solely to scholastic affectation (1247).
As a matter of course there is no trace of ἐν in N. See 1548.
1565. 9. As was to be expected, during the period of confusion, er was
used very frequently for eis, occasionally even with the accusativo.
1. En for cic : Sept. Judic. 6, 35 καὶ ἀγγέλους ἐξαπέστειλεν εἰς πάντα Μανασσῆ καὶ
ἐν Ασὴρ καὶ ἐν Ζαβουλὼν καὶ ἐν Νεφθαλί. Tobit 5, 5 πορευθῆναι μετὰ σοῦ ἐν Ῥάγοις.
Luke 9, 46 εἰσῆλθεν δὲ διαλογισμὸς ἐν αὐτοῖς. 23, 42 ὅταν ἔλθῃς ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ
σου. 1 Cor. 11, 18 συνέρχεσθαι ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ. Dion. H. i. 185, 12 ἐλθεῖν ἐν
Ἰταλίᾳ. Epict. 1, 11, 32 ἐν Ῥώμῃ ἀνέρχῃ. Luc. Τox. 17 ἐν ταύτῃ φεύγειν
εἰς ἀεὶ τεταγμένος. Αel. 4, 18 κατῆλθε Πλάτων ἐν Σικελίᾳ. Ρaus. 6, 20, 4 αὐτοὶ
κομίσαι φασὶ τῆς Ἱπποδαμείας τὰ ὀστᾶ ἐν Ὀλυμπίᾳ. Proch. 8, 3 εἴσελθε ἐν
Ἐφέσῳ καὶ μεῖνον ἐκεῖ μῆνας τρεῖς. 10, 10 κρατήσαντές με απήγαγον ἐν τῇ
φυλακῇ. Καὶ τῇ ἐπαύριον προσήνεγκάν με ἐν δημοσίῳ τόπῳ, et passim. Mal.
27, 6. 28, 19. 34, 20. 35, 10. 36, 6. 89, 9. 135, 14. 184, 25. 212, 4; et passim. Loont.
Noap. V. J. 1, 18 εἰσέρχεσθαι ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ θεοῦ. 20, 21 κατερχομένου ποτὲ
τοῦ ἁγιωτάτου τούτου ἐν κυριακῇ ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησία. 28, 2 πέμψας ἐν Σικελίᾳ διὰ
στον—et passim.
2. En with accusative: Apoc. Mar. 119, 26 πλῆθος ἀνδρῶν τε καὶ γυναικῶν
ἐκαίοντο ἐν αὐτά.
1585". Elliptical is the construction of èv with genitive in phrases like
ἐν τῷ Πλούτωνος, ἐΜ Πανδίονος (sc. ἱερῷ), οἰκοῦσα ἐν Ἡφαιστιαδῶν (sc. δήμῳ),
otc. KMeisterhans" 176 f. (ep. 1517b)[¹.
ΕΞ.
1566. ἘΞ, before consonants ἐκ, with GENITIVE only: out of
from.
It donotos motion from inside and thus is opposed to εἰς (1536) and ev
(1555-)
[1] Clerical orrors seem to underly such instancos, as : Mal. 483, το αμιξία
ἐγένετο ἐν ἀμφοτέρων τῶν μερῶν. Porph. Cor. 540, τῇ εἰ δὲ ἐν Δευτέρας
λάχῃ ἡ πρώτη τοῦ Αὐγούστου. 541, 5 εἰ δὲ ἐν παρασκευῆς λάχῃ ἡ πρώτου τοῦ
Αὐγούστου. 646, 17 κατετέθη ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ μονῇ ἐν χαμοσουρίου.
380
PREPOSITIONS: ¿¿(ÉK).
[1566-1571.
έκ
I. Of Place: out of, from: ἐκ τῆς πόλεως φεύγειν. ἐκ τῆς
γῆς φύεσθαι.
Phrases : ἐκ πολλοῦ at a great distance. ἐκ δεξιᾶς 'on the right
hand.' ez apiσtepas 'on the left hand.' EK Tŷs évavrías 'opposite.' ¿z
άπóПтоυat an invisible distance.'
[In Mart. Pauli 108, 3 for ἐξ αὐτοῦ γενόμενος write ἔξω αὑτοῦ γενόμενος.]
1567. 2. Of Time: from, since: Ek Tαídwv 'since childhood.'
ἐκ παλαιοῦ from of old. ἐκ τῆς εἰρήνης 'soon after the peace.
ἐξ ἀρχῆς from the outset.” ἐκ τούτου “thereupon.” ἐξ οὗ since.
ἐκ πολλοῦ ' a long time since.
(
1568. 3. Metaphorically:
(α) origin: ἐκ πατρὸς εὐγενοῦς εἶναι. ἐκ μητρός. ἐκ Διός.
(b) cause: owing to, by reason of: ¿z épidos 'in consequence of
a dispute.' (Cp. N é§ airías 'on account of.')
ม
(c) agency (=vñò 1695, a), by, an uncommon use: Tiμâσbai čк TIVOS.
πόλεις ἐκ βασιλέως δεδομέναι. Hdt. 7, 175 τὰ λεχθέντα ἐξ ᾿Αλεξάνδρου.
(d) material: from, of :—ékπwµa ěk έúλov. (1503, 3, b.)
(e) Inference or agreement: according to :-ẻK тŵν парóvтwν 'under
present conditions." ÉK Tŵyde 'in these circumstances.'
ἐκ τῶν
Suvarŵy 'to the best of one's ability.' EK TOUTOV accordingly,'
'hence.' éž úπovías 'on suspicion.' σKOTEV or Kêpívei èk ‘to judge by.'
¿½ loov 'equally.' èk Bias, Ek xepós, 'violently.'
1568. In all the above usages (1566–8), ¿¿ has been replaced by ảnò in
N speech. See 1506.
1569. 4. Under Latin influence, and agreeably to the usage of its
synonymous аяò (1512), ¿έ sometimes denotes:
(a) a member or follower of a particular school or class (1512):—Supt.
Judic. 15, 2 ἔδωκα αὐτὴν ἑνὶ τῶν ἐκ τῶν φίλων σου. Nicol. D. 87 ἀνὴρ τῶν ἐκ
τῆς συγκλήτου.
•
•
(b) The title or office, corresponding to the Latin ex- (1514) :—Aster.
224 ε τὸν ἐκ στρατηγῶν . tòv éž vnátwv éneîvov, 'ex-general, ex-consul.'
1570. 5. Lastly it is to be noted that, following the vicissitudes of all
other prepositions (1493), ¿§ lost its syntactical force and thus ex-
changed the genitive for the accusative. This appears in written
composition since the VIII.
C.
Alchem. 21, 24 éž aýtón (ubi ég aùтoû, but cp. ib. 317 noto). 317, 1 ÈK TÀN
κύπρον. 326, 13 ἐκ τὰ μέταλλα. Syncoll. 72, 9 ἐκ τὰ Χαλκιδικά Porph.
Cor. 214, 14 EK TÁC TATρinías. Leo Gram. 359, 20 Èk toỳc evyeveîs.— Prodr.
6, 34ο λαπάραν κ τὴν λαπάραν σου ἐξ ΑΫΤΗΝ τὴν βαστάζεις. GSpata 90 (A.D.
1096) ἐκ τὸν ἅγιον Πέτρον. 114 (1142 Α. D.) ἐκ τοὺς ἀνθρώπους. 122 (1142
4. D.) ἐκ τὸ δουμάνιον. 124 ἐκ τὸν ἅγιον Φίλιππον et passim.
>
A.
1571. It is in this accusatival construction that è survived down to the
XVI. Howovor, even here it usually appears accompanied by the article
(Túv, Tó, thy, toús, rá, rás), in the form of è or rather ex (174), dialectally
also on or ox, a form probably due to the influence of úπó (Pul. 243 ỦK THV
κεφαλήν σου).
[1] But ep. Louvro Pap. 54 (B. C. 163–2), 79 éž 'Нpakλeioýtoλein(?).
381
1572-1582.]
PREPOSITIONS: ÉT
ἐπί.
>
Επί.
1572. 'Erì upon-with AccuS., GEN. and Dat.
A. With ACCUSATIVE:
1573. 1. Of Place (motion): upon, to; against:
་
ἐφ᾽ ἵππον ἀναβαίνειν ' to mount on horseback. ὁδὸς ἐπὶ Σofca φέ
ρουσα ‘leading to. ἐπὶ τὰ ὅπλα τρέχειν. ἐπὶ Δεξιά to the right.' ἐπὶ
τριάκοντα στάδια ' to the extent of 3o stades.' ιέναι οι πορεύεσθαι ἐπί τινα
'to march against some one.'
1574. 2. Of Time: during:
ἐπὶ τρεῖς ἡμέρας. ἐπὶ πολὺν χρόνον, ἐπὶ πολύ for a long time.
1574". For P-B see 1275 f. & 1344.
:
TINA
1575. 3. Metaphorically with the object of, for, in search
of:
ἐπὶ λείαν ἐξιέναι, ἐφ᾽ ὕδωρ πέμπειν. ἐπ᾿ αὐτὸ τοῦτο πάρειμι ' for this
very thing.' [Mal. 469, 17 ἐξέπεμψε Ναρσῆν ἐπὶ τῷ (read τὸ παραλαβείν.]
1576. Phrases: eni noдý' over a great space,' 'for a long while.' os
ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ mostly. ἐπὶ Δόργ (sc. αναστρέφειν ' to the right.' ἐπὶ ΤΗΝ
ácпisa (sc. μeтaßáλλeodai) 'to the left.'
1576". For P-B see 1583.
1577. B. With GENITIVE: upon:
1. Of Place upon, on:
>
(a) rest on :-ep apмATOC oxεîoba. è innшN on horseback.' éni
τοῦ ὄρογε. ἐπί τοῦ δεξιοῦ κέρως ' on the right wing. ἐπί τΟΥ ΠΟΤΑΜΟΥ
'by the river.'
(b) motion: towards, to :-en' 'Iwniac amiéval, énì Zámoɣ tλeîv. ẻmì
oikoy lévai 'to return home.'
1578. 2. Of Time: in the time of :
ἐπὶ Κροίσοy in the reign of K.' ἐπὶ Περικλέους ἄρχοντος under the
archonship of P.' en éмoŶ 'in my time.' oi èo HMOON 'our contem-
poraries.'
1579. 3. Metaphorically :
(a) distribution (1497, b. 1589, b): by:—éni Teccápon 'four men deep.'
ép ésóc 'in single file,' 'one by one.' ' éAYTŵn each by himself."
(b) superintendence, at the head of:-ó éпi TOŶ OINOY 'butler.' ó énì
τῶν Δεσμων= δεσμοφύλαξ. ὁ ἐπὶ τῶΝ NOMIΣMάτων master of the mint.
ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ τῶν Βιβλιοθηκών librarian. (1582, α.)
ó
1580. C. With the DATIVE: upon.
1. Of Place (rest) on, upon :
ETI NAYCIN 'On board the ships.' ènì Toîc opioic 'on the frontier.' eni
TĤ BaλáccḤ on the shore,' 'by the sea."
1581. 2. Of Time: immediately after:
ἐπὶ τῷ τρίτῳ ΣΗΜείῳ. ἐπὶ τούτοις 'thereupon. ἐπ' ἐξειργασμένῳ this
being done.'
1582. 3. Metaphorically:
(a) superintendence: at the head of:-ó éni т CTPATEÝMATI. ó EmÌ TA
ἐπὶ τῷ στρατεύματι. ὁ ἐπὶ
Пóλel. oi ènì TOîc NAYCIN 'commanders.' (1579, b.)
382
PREPOSITIONS: ἐπί.
[1582-1583.
(6) dependence: in the power of:—ἐφ᾽ ἡΜῖΝ ἐστιν ‘it lies in our
power. τὸ ἐπ᾿ ἐμοί 'as far as it depends on me. ἐπὶ τῷ ἀδελφῷ. ἐπί
Βασιλεῖ γίγνεσθαι ' to come under the power of the king.
(c) condition: for : -- ἐπὶ μισθῷ 'for pay. ἐπὶ τούτοις 'on these con-
ditions.” ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε on the condition that.
(d) cause (chiefly with verbs denoting emotion, 1387 ff. 2128): at:
ἐπί τινι χαίρειν, ἀλγεῖν, ἥδεσθαι, γελᾶν, μέγα φρονεῖν, ἐκπλαγῆναι.
(e) aim or object : for (cp. 1657, ε) :—ἐπὶ τούτῳ to this end. ἐπὶ
Νίκη τρέχειν. ἐπὶ τόκῳ δανείζειν ' to lend upon interest.' ἐπ' αργύρῳ for
money.'
[A popular reminiscence of this use seems to underlie the expressions
ἐπὶ τούτου, ἐπὶ ταὐτοῦ (or rather ἐπιτ.) 'on purpose.]
(f) accumulation : upon :-ἔγχνη ἐπ᾿ ὄΓΧΝΗ γηράσκει 'pear upon
pear.'
1583. The Phistory of ἐπὶ is rather obscure. It is true that, to judge
from the written compositions, it was on the whole common as late
as M times, but since it comes here to an abrupt close, and no genuine
trace of it is shown in subsequent popular compositions, there is strong
reason to suspect that its post-christian record was due, at least since
T, to an Atticistic or scholastic zeal. This may be also inferred from
the fact that ènì is often used, since G times, in a perverted sense and
construction, and moreover too frequently replaced by some other
appropriate expression according to the sense. In its usual broad
meaning of upon it is mostly replaced by the adverb ἐπάνω, which at
still later times is often accompanied by the preposition cis.
I. Matt. 13, 2 ὁ ὄχλος ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλόν εἱστήκει. 9, 9 εἶδεν ἄνθρωπον
καθήμενον ἐπὶ το τελώνιον. So Mark 2, 14. Matt. 24, 2 λίθος επί λίθος
Phil. 2, 27 λύπην ἐπὶ ΛΥΠΗΝ. (But cp. Pl. Legg. 718 D πῦρ ἐπὶ πρ οχετεύειν.)
Luke 11, 17 οἶκος ἐπὶ οἶκον πίπτει. Luc. Zeux. 4, 1 ἐπὶ πλευράν κειμένης.
Hdn. Hist. 4, 8, 2 καυσίαν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν φέρων. Acta Xanth. (2, 6 ὀδύνην
ἐπ᾿ ΟΔΥΝΗΝ κερδαίνω. Leont. Neap. V. J. 15, 18 εἶχεν στέφανον ἐπὶ ΤΗΝ
Κεφαλήν αὐτῆς.[1]
2. App. Hisp. 41 διέμειναν ἐς πλεῖστον ἐπὶ εἰρήNHC. IOI ἤλαυνεν ἐς Ρώμην
ἐπὶ τόλμης καὶ φρονήματος λαμπροῦ. Syr. 40 ἐς τὸ δικαστήριον αὐτὸς παρῆλ-
θεν ἐπὶ λαμπρού σχήματος. M. Aur. 6, 21 βλάπτεται δὲ ὁ ἐπιμένων ἐπὶ τῆC
ἑαυτοῦ ἀπάτης καὶ ΓΝΟΙΑΣ. 6, 23 ἐφ᾽ ἅπασι δὲ τοὺς θεοὺς ἐπικαλού. 5, 4 κατε-
σκευάσθαι ἐπί τι. [9]
3. Matt. 5, 14 ἐπάνω ὄρογς κειμένη. 23, 20 ἐν πᾶσι τοῖς ἐπάνω αὐτυγ. Luke
19, 17 ἐξουσίαν ἔχων ἐπάνω δέκα πόλεων. John 3, 31 ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν.
Loont. Noup. V. J. 154, 2 σύναξιν εὐθέως ἐποίησεν τελείαν ἐπάνω ΑΥΤΟΥ͂. 15,
[1] So further : 2 Cor. 3, 15 κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν κεῖται. Acts 10, 17 ἰδοὺ οἱ
ἄνδρες . . . ἔστησαν ἐπὶ τῶν πυλῶνα. 1 Pot. 4, 14 τὸ πνεῦμα ἐφ' γαλα ΑΝΑΠΑΥΕΤΑΙ.
(Cp. Rev. 14, 9 ἐπὶ τοῦ μετώπου αὐτοῦ ἢ ἐπὶ τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ.)Luc. Hormot. 4,
· ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον ἔσεσθαί σε. Diod. 20, 7, 4 στὰς ἐπὶ ΤΗΝ ΠΡΥΜΝΑΝ. Leont. Neup.
V. Τ. 100, το ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν στέφανον περιβεβλημένην. 58, 8.
ג
[3] So further : App. Civil. 3, 7ι επ' αργίας ἐν Κερκύρα κατέμενον. 4, 37
ἐπ'
ἀλείας ἐξέπλευσεν. Higp. 32 Μάγων ἐπὶ ἀργίας ἦν. 36 ἐφ' εγχίας ἦν σκυθρωποῦ.
9 ἐπὶ κλέογα ἀθανάτου γενήσεσθαι. Pun. 93 ἐπὶ θαυμαστῆς ἐγίγνοντο μεταβολής τε
καὶ τόλμης. Civil. 1, 7 ἐπ' ἀργίας διετίθεντο. M. Aur. 8, 49 οὕτως οὖν μένε ἀεὶ ἐπὶ
τῶν πρώτων ΦΑΝΤΑΣΙῶν. 6, 40 ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν ὑπὸ φύσεως εγνεχομένων ἔνδον ἐστὶ
καὶ παραμένει ἡ κατασκευάσασα δύναμις. 9, 33 τὴν ἀναφορὰν ἔχειν ἐπί τι τέλος,
7, 4 ἀναφορὰ ἐπί τι γίνεται.
ΕΠ
:
383
1583-1589b.]
PREPOSITIONS: κατά.
17 €ioeλ0eîv ÉπáNW MOY. 34, 12 & Eπánæ TĤc åropâc. Theoph. 297, 17 8
ἐπάνω τοῦ ἀρμαΜέΝΤΟΥ. Alchem. 302, 12 ὔπτα Ξύλων ἐπάνωθεν.-J Moschos
2864 Β ἐπάνω εἰς τὸ χεῖλος τῆς κολυμβήθρας.
4. Matt. 15, 32 σπλαγχνίζεσθαι ἐπί ΤΙΝΑ. So Mark 8, 2. Narr. Zos.
104, 14 χαίρομεν μετὰ τῶν ἀγγέλων περὶ τῶν ἔργων τῶν δικαίων, ἐπὶ δὲ τὰ
ἔργα τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν λυπούμεθα. Vita SA * ο λυπηθεὶς ἐπί τό ΣΥΜΒΕΒΗΚὸς
αὐτῷ. 14* κ ἀγανακτεῖν ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν. 28* Β θαμβηθεὶς ὁ νέος ἐπὶ τὸ ὁρώΜΕΝΟΝ.
37* τ ἔφριξεν ἐπὶ τὴν πρόPHCIN.Mark further N ὀργίζομαι τιNOC hate
one' (1336).
Ката.
1584. Karà with Accus. and GEN.: down-opposed to åvá.
1585. A. with Accusative :
1. Of Place, down along :
Ката
KATA TON TOTAMÓN 'down the river.' Kar' ȧrpoýc 'over (or in) the
fields.' Talew Tivà KATA CтÉPNON 'to strike one on the breast.' KATà
τους Μήλογο τετάχθαι over against the M.' ή κατά Κέρκυραν ἤπειρος.
ΚΑΤΑ ΓΗΝ ΚΑΙ Κατά θάλασσαν by land and by sea '[cp. 1525]. τὸ καθ' αυτούς
'the part opposite them.'
1586. In the common language from G times to the present day,
Karà with the Accusative of place denotes direction towards :
Jos. Ant. 15, 9, 6 тàs Kata λiBa πpooßoλás. Diosc. 4, 169 katå åneMON. Arr.
P. Eux. 39 νεφέλη επαναστᾶσα ἐξερράγη κατ' εἶρον μάλιστα. So now : κατά
THN ANATOAH" eastward' (cp. 1588 & 1636).
1587. 2. Of Time: at, in :—Kar' ÈKEîVOV TÒV Xpóvov 'at that
κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον
time.' oi kae' ηuâs 'our contemporaries.'
เ
1588. In N this relation of card is expressed by the simple accusativo
(1274 f.). It is true that card is now used of time, but then it is equivalent
to Tepi about' (1636; cp. 1640).
περί '
1589. 3. Metaphorically:
a. According to, after :-KATA TOYC NÓMOYC according to the laws.'
Κατά Πλάτωνα. κατὰ τὴν ἐμὴν δόξαν in my opinion.” τὸ κατ' ἐμέ ‘I for
one,' as regards me.' KATA AÝNAMIN 'to the best of one's ability.'
μeitwv ǹ KAT ANOршпом 'beyond man's power.' KATA TAYTÁ ‘in the
same manner.' Κατά πάντα in all respects. κατά κράτος διώκειν ' to
pursue hard.' KAO' HCYXIAN 'at leisure. Tà KATA TON TÓλEMON 'military
affairs.' rà katà ton TEXXON 'the affairs of Tellos.'
C/
b. Distributively (662, 2): by, per:- KATA TETPAKICXIAOYC 'every 4000.'
KatÅ ¤☺NH ‘each people separately.' KAO' NA 'singly.' KNOTOS KAH'
ÉAYTÓN each by himself." KAO MÉPAN day by day,' 'daily.' ΚΑΤ
Ĕtoc, G N kah' ¤Toc (as Gr. Urk. Berlin 197 [† 18] thrice), annually.'
(For N see 1590 b.)
1589". In this distributivo sonso, kaтd is sometimes constructed with tho
nominative. (664.)
Loont. Noup. 34, 18
[So furthor: Matt. 28, 2 EKάonтO ÉTÁN AÝTOŶ.
δ ἐπάνω τῶν Καπήλων. Chron. 697, 14 δ ἐπάνω τῶν χειροτονιών. Hordn.
Hist. 6, 7, 7 én aỳtó (if not corrupt) for iπ' avτậ (1582, d).
3, 10, 7 επιτήδειος
ἐπὶ τὸ ἀποσκώψαι. Leont. Noap. V. Sy. 1692 B cîxov xapàv ènì toŶto (if no
ἐπὶ τούτῳ).
384
PREPOSITIONS: κατά.
[1590-1596.
1590. The above metaphorical usage of κατὰ (1589, b) still sur-
vives in N: κατά τά ΦΑΙΝΟΜΕΝΑ (more popular κατὰ τὸ φανῇ, App. vi.
26 f.) ‘according to appearances. κατὰ τὰ λόγια τοῦ Πέτρου, according to
what Peter says. ὀλίγο κατ' ὀλίγο (also ἔλιγο κατ' ὄλιγο) ‘little by little.
Sometimes the accusative is omitted and karà then stands elliptically
with the genitive dependent on the omitted accusative, as: KATA TOŶ
Πέτρου ‘according to Peter's account. κατά (sc. τὰ μέρη τοῦ Διαβόλογ
= in the direction of the devil (1586), ' to the devil. (Cp. 1594.)
,
1590 b. Also in its distributive usage (1589, b), κατὰ is still preserved in
N, but in the modified form κάθε, on which see 664 f.
C
1591. During T-B the curious combination & κατὰ τὸν followed by
a proper name was sometimos used to denote a surname : J Moschos 3069 Β
Αθανάσιος ὁ κατά Ζήμαρχος Αντιοχεύς. Mal. 494, 3 Ισαάκιος ὁ ἀργυροπράτης
ὁ κατά Βελισάριον τὸν πατρίκιον. Theoph. 237, 26 Ιωάννῃ τῷ λογοθέτῃ τῷ
Κατά ΔΟΜΕΝΤΖΙΟΛΟΝ ( ἐπονομαζομένῳ). 438, 16 Θεοφύλακτος κανδιδᾶτος
ὁ κατά τον ΜαρινάΚΗΝ. Theoph. Cont. 17, 6 Ιωάννης οὗτος ὁ κατὰ τὸν ΕΞΑΒΟΥ
ΛΙΟΝ. 69, 18. 122, 8. 137, 8. Porph. Cer. 629. 6 ὁ πατρίκιος ὁ κατά ΕΔΗΝ.
-This usage is foreign to N.
1592. B. With GENITIVE :
I. Of Place :
-
a. down from: κατ' ΟΥΡΑΝΟΥ. κατά τῶν ὀρών. ῥίπτεσθαι
κατά τείχογα, κατά ΚΡΗΜΝῶν.—Hardly current in popular Greek
even in ancient times.
b. down upon ; on: πίπτειν κατὰ πετρών. κατά χειρός χεῖν.
KATA NOTOY 'on the rear.' KATA [HC 'underground,' 'on the
κατά
ground.'
1593. In this usage, b, karà remained more or less popular through
all antiquity. But since G times it is peculiarly common in expres-
sions denoting to give a blow (on the head, etc.: δίδω κατά κεφαλής
κτλ.) :
Mal. 269, 2 ἔδωκε τῷ βασιλεῖ κατὰ τοῦ Μετώπου. 163, 4 δέδωκε
τῷ Συχαίῳ κατὰ τοῦ Νώτος αὐτοῦ τῇ λόγχῃ. 165, 1 τοξεύει αὐτὸν κατὰ
TOY MACTOŶ. 296, 22. 333, 1. 387, 15. Chron. 594, 19 ëdwkev avtÒY KATÀ
τῆς ἀκολc. Theoph. 283, 22 δὸς αὐτῷ κατά κΡΑΝΙΟΥ. 351, 31 δίδωσι κατά
κορυφῆς τοῦ βασιλέως. So Theoph. Cont. 704, 13 ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κατά
κεφαλῆς μετὰ ῥάβδου. (Cp. also 1607, 3.)
1594. In similar (adverbial) expressions it still survives in N, as: KATA
Γις, κατά κεφαλῆς κατὰ ΘΑΝΑΤΟΥ deadly, κατά Διαβόλου (1590), ΚΑΤ' ΑΝΕΜΟΥ
to the winds, κατά κράτος (ep. 1589, 3) 'completely, κατά Mecc (κατα-
μεσής,-Τ-Β κατὰ μέσον [ep. I. Ε 8; Od. x 157], as : Mal. 339. 3. 418, 10;
and KATA MECOY as: Mal. 200, 16. 264, 3. 286, 5) 'right in the middle' (1596)
- though it is now more commonly used as a prolix: κατακέφαλα, = κατὰ
κεφαλῆς, κατάμουτρα -- κατὰ προσώπου on the face, καταχαρούμενος = περιχαρής.
1595. 2. Metaphorically : (down upon), against : λέγειν κατά
ΤΊΝΟΣ & ΚΑΤ᾿ Ερατοσθένος λόγος.
1595. Honco καταψηφίζομαι, κατηγορώ, καταφρονῶ τινος (1346).
1596. This usage of κατά, though very common in A-P Greek, is
unknown to N. Its loss however can be traced back to 7, as may be
gathered from such blunders as : Vita Epiph. 92 4 παρείχεν αὐτῷ τὸν σῖτον
385
σε
1596-1604.]
PREPOSITIONS : μετά.
Κατὰ τριῶν Μολίων (for κατὰ τρεῖς μοδίους) at the rate of three modii (for
a coin). Mal. 436, 15 φόβος ἐγένετο κατὰ τῶν NOCOΥΝΤΩΝ (for εἰς τοὺς νοσοῦν-
τας) τὴν τῶν ἀρρένων ἐπιθυμίαν. 262, 21 Βώττιος ὁ σοφὸς χρονογράφος συνεγράψατο
Κατ' αὐτῶν (for περὶ αὐτῶν). 365, 21 λυπουμένη κατά ΜαξίΜΟΥ. 447, 14
ἠγανάκτησε κατά τον Δογκός (ep. 1583, 4). 264, 3 & 286, 5 κατά MECOY (for κατὰ
τὸ μέσον, now κατὰ μεσῆς 1594) in the centre. Theoph. 353, 2ο τὴν τοιαύ-
την τῶν Θεομάχων κατά ΚωνστΑΝΤΙΝΟ πόλει κίνησιν ἐγνωκώς.
1597. The 1 use of κατὰ against is expressed in N by the adverb ἐναντία,
commonly έναντίως, ἀνάντια, also ἐναντινά οι ἀναντινά.
Μετά
1598. Μετά with Accus. and GEN.
1599. A. With AccUSATIVE:
I. Of Place: among, between-only poetic, except in the phrases
META XEîpac exei 'to have in hand,' and meтà xeîpac pépew 'to hold in
the hand.'
1600. 2. Of Time: after, next to-very frequent :
Μετὰ ΤΟΥ͂ΤΟΝ Τὸν χρόνον, μετὰ ταῦτα. Μετὰ ΤΗΝ ΜΑΧΗΝ-P1.
Leg. 726 Α Μετά θεούς ψυχὴ θειότατον next to the gods the soul
is most divine. νύκτωρ καὶ Μεθ᾿ ἡμέραν ‘by night and by
day. So too in PB (1602. 16ο7).
1601. Peculiarly frequent is, especially in Biblical compositions and
their imitations, the use of μerà Tò with the infinitive aorist for the
temporal participle of that tense (cp. 1561. 1601. 2075". 2141. App.
vi. 21), as : μετὰ τὸ ἰδεῖν, μετὰ τὸ ἐλθεῖν, Μετὰ τὸ ἐγερθήναι-for ἰδών,
ἐλθών, ἐγερθείς.
1602. This usage of µerd survived until after T, when a confusion in the
construction led to its gradual disappearance from the popular language
(1607).
1603. Notoworthy for P Greek is that in clausos beginning with a tem-
poral accusative, μετὰ is not infrequently placed before it by way of pro-
lepsis, and then either repeated in the proper place of the sentence or
omitted; in the latter case the noun deponding on μerd is curiously put
in the genitive (cp. 1513. 1651. EASoph. Lox. s. v. μetá) :
Sept. Jos. 9, 22 Μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας Μετὰ τὸ διαθέσθαι πρὸς αὐτοὺς διαθήκην.
23, ι Μεθ᾿ ἡμέρας πλείους Μετὰ τὸ καταπαῦσαι κύριον τὸν Ἰσραὴλ ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν
ἐχθρῶν αὐτοῦ. Gen. 16, 3 Μετὰ δέκα ἔτη τοῦ οἰκῆσαι (for δέκα ἔτη μετὰ τὸ
οἰκῆσαι). Dion. H. iv. 2443, 9 οὐ Μετά πολλοὺς τοῦ γάμου τεκοῦσα χρόνους.
Inst. Tryph. 27 πρό μιᾶς ἡμέρας ἢ Μετά ΜίαΝ ἡμέραν του Σαββάτογ.
Diosc. 2, 21 ποθεῖσα Μετὰ ἡμέρας τρεῖς Μετὰ τὴν ἄφεδρον. Const. Apost. 5, 20, 2
Μετὰ δέκα ἡμέρας τῆς ἀναλήψεως. Socr. 464 Β Μετά τριάκοντα ἡμέρας της αὑτοῦ
ἀνακηρύξεως. Thood. ii. 276 Α Μετά πέντε μέντοι ἔτη του ἁλῶναι τὴν πόλιν.
iii. 576 Α Μετὰ μῆνας πέντε τῆς ἐν Νικαίᾳ συνόδου. iv. 68 ο Μετὰ πλεῖστον τῆς
ἑνώσεως χρόνον. 76 D Μετά πολλὰς τῆς ἑνώσεως γενεάς. Theod. Lector 2, 1
ἡνώθησαν μετὰ ἑκατὸν ἔτη τοῦ θανάτου Ευσταθίου. Autec, I, 20, 1 Μετά διετίαν
τῆς αὐτοῦ τελευτής. Callin. 114, 12 Μετά πολὺν χρόνον τοῦ ἐξορισθῆναι Νε
στύριον. 122, 27 Μετὰ ἐνιαυτὸν τῆς τελευτῆς τοῦ Ὑπατίου. Μul. ro, 11 Μετά δύο
ἔτη τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ. 88, 14 Μετὰ οὖν νβ' ἔτη τον τελευτῆσαι τὴν Πασιφάην.
1604. Β. With GENITIVE: with denoting union : · ΜΕΤ᾿
ΑΥΤΟΥ͂ with him. ΜΕΘ᾿ ὑμῶν “with you. οἱ μετά ΛεωνίΔΟΥ
386
PREPOSITIONS : μετά.
[1604–1607.
those with L. μάχεσθαι μετὰ τῶν ΣΥΜΜάχων 'to fight in
common with the allies.'
1605. 2. Metaphorically:
tears.'
Μετά δακρύων 'with
Μετ᾿ ἀδικίας ‘unjustly.
a. with, in denoting manner :
Μετά κινδύνων “with danger.
Μετά σπουδής ‘in haste. Μετά παιδιάς ‘in joke. Μετ᾿ ἀκρι
Βείας ' with precision. Μετά λόγου with reason.
b with, by means of denoting the instrument. This usage
is rather rare in A, but common in P, especially in post-christian
Greek:-Lycurg. 124Μετὰ πολλῶν παραδειγμάτων διδάσκειν.
For P-N see 1607, 3.
1606. In its instrumental usage, μετὰ is naturally associated or identi-
fied with the instrumental dative (1381), and through this with the
dative of the remote object or its prepositional analysis. Hence μerà
often stands, from G times onwards, for the simple dative as well as for its
analytical substitutes év, oúv, прós, eis, etc. (1351). See 1607 ff.
1607. Since @ the popular construction of μετὰ has been with the accusative
only, and that chiefly in the sense of with, the force of 'after' having early
disappeared (cp. 1602). Hence unscholarly writers of subsequent times not rarely
confound the construction of the accusative with that of the genitive, and
conversely. On the whole μετὰ is now identifed with σύν and ἅμα.
1. Μετὰ + accusative = with, together with :
Test. Patr. 1060 Α Μετά τον πατέρα ἡμῶν ' with our father. Epiph. ii. 48 c
χρῶνται γὰρ οἱ πλεῖστοι τῶν Περσῶν μετὰ τὰ) Περσικά στοιχεία καὶ τῷ Σύρῳ
γράμματι. 196 Β τοῦ πλήθους τοῦ μετὰ ᾿ΑθανάσION. Doroth. 1741 c.
Mal. 5,
14 ΜΕΤΑ ΤΗΝ Ε' ὁμοῦ. 61, 15 ἔστιν οὖν ἀπὸ ᾽Αβραὰμ ἕως ἐξόδου τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ
Μετά Μωσέα ἀπὸ Αἰγύπτου γενεαὶ ε. 90, κι τῶν δὲ Κορινθίων Μετά τους
ΛΑΚΕΔΑΙΜΟΝΙΟΥς ἐβασίλευσε τότε 'Αλήτης ἔτη λέ. Theoph. Cont. 174, 6 Μετά
τάς θυγατέρας ὁμοῦ. Porph. Adm. 144, 11 συμπεθερίας Μετά τους Τούρκος καὶ
ἀγάπας ἔχοντες. 91, 13. 242, 16. 279, 8. 293, 9.
2. Μετά + accusative = with, by means of, by way of :
Alchem. 32, 9 ἀνάλαβε μετά μελίτι (ubi male μέλιτι). 301, 5 σύμμιξον μετὰ τὸ
Δωρ τοῦτο. 321, 11 Μετὰ τὸ χρYcion. 323, 2 Μετά άλας. 333, 26 ΜΕΤΑ ΤΟΝ
äλac.
ΑΜΒΙΚΑ; etc., etc. Nicet. Byz. 704 D Μετὰ τὰς εἰς τὴν ὕψιστον ΔΥΣΦΗΜΙΑΣ
ἀνάμεστον. Porph. Cor. 316, 22 κατασφραγίζουσι μετὰ τὸ ἄκρον τῶν χλανιδίων
αὐτῶν. Apoc. Mar. 115, 8 Μετά τοὺς ἀγγέλους. Frinch. 3r (+ 1033) Μετά ὅρκον
cum iuramento.'
3. Μετὰ + Genitive = will, by means of:
Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 67, 64 f. (+ IVs.) ἔγχριε τὸν δεξιὸν ὀφθαλμὸν Μεθ' λατοC.
91, 226 (1) γράφε Μετ] Μέλανος γραφικού. Acta Xanthi. 68, το Μετά
Ηλων παγείς. Acta Pil. ii. 2, 2 Μετά της χειρός μου εβάπτισα αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ
Ἰορδάνῃ ποταμῷ. Alchem. 311, 13 ἔμφραξον τὴν βῆσσαν Μετὰ ἅλατος, Callin.
73, 13 Μετά Πηλοί χρισμένης. 98, 20 τὴν ῥάβδον μεθ᾿ ἧς ἔτυπτεν τὸν παῖδα.
82, 4. 137, 28 metà maxaipac éteµev. 110, 2. Loont. Neap. V. S. 1712 Β ἔδωκεν
αὐτῷ ΜΕΤ' ΑΥΤΟΥ͂ struck him with it. Vita SA 35* D δίδωσιν αὐτῷ Μεθ᾿ ἧς
ἐκράτει ῥάβδου. Theoph 318, 22 δέδωκεν αὐτῷ Μετά δόρατος εἰς τὸ χεῖλος.
Theoph. Cont. 704, 13 ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κατὰ κεφαλῆς μετά ράβδον ισχυρᾶς καὶ
παχείας. Porph. Adm. 116, ο δέδωκεν αὐτῷ Μετά ΜΕΝΑΥΛΟΥ εἰς τὸν πόδα, Apoc.
Mar. 123, 21 ἀποκτείνοντες μετά ξίφυγε. Prodr. passim, and so on through all
passim,—and
M compositions.
9
387
CC 2
1607-1613.]
PREPOSITIONS: μετά, παρά
4. Μετὰ + dat. (due to ἅμα and σύν): with: Alchem. 384, 8 υδράργυρον βράσου
Μετὰ ῥεφανίνῳ ἐλαίῳ θείῳ τε. Vita SA 102* σᾧ Μετὰ τῷ πατρὶ δόξα ἅμα τῷ
ἁγίῳ πνεύματι.
5. Μετὰ + gen, = after (for μετὰ τὸ 1601) : Mal. 187, 14 Μετά τον διοικῆσαι τοὺς
ὑπάτους. 362, 13 Μετὰ τοῦ δοῦναι εἰρήνην προσωμίλησεν οὕτως. 384, το διὰ τῆς
αὔριον καὶ τῆς Μετ᾿ αὐτῆς. 17, 16.
1608. Finally it should be notod that the too frequent association of μετὰ
with the article (μετὰ τόν, μετὰ τό, μετὰ τήν, μετὰ τούς, μετὰ τά, μετά το
etc. led to dissimilation, uerd being reduced to simple μé (cp. A-P µà ráde,
κὰ τοὺς νόμους, κὰ τὰ εἰωθότα in CIA [345-127 Β.Ο.], App. i. 16, α ; KMois-
terhans² 178, 32). This phonopathic abbreviation appears accomplished
even in the earliest popular M compositions, and the form μè has ever since
been in universal usage. (Cp. GHatzidakis 153).
Alchem. 322, 19 χρύσωσε αὐτὸ μὲ τὸ χρυσωτήριον. ib. 26 Μὲ ῥινάριν. 323,5 f.
Μὲ τὸ ἀκόνιν, Μὲ τζαπαρικόν, Μὲ κισῆριν, Μετὰ κάλαμον, Μὲ κάρβουνον, μὲ σηπό-
γαστρον, et passim. SCusa 318 (A.D. 1112) Μὲ τὸν μέγαν ποταμόν. Frinch. 125
(A.D. 1125) Μὲ τὴν γυναῖκαν. Span. 210 Μὲ τοὺς οἰκειούς μου. Prodr. 1, 1x Μὲ τὰ
συχνογυρίσματα καὶ μὲ τὰς κομποσίας. 3, 147 Μὲ τὸ ζέμαν. 164 καὶ δεύτερον ἀκρό-
βραστον μαζὶ ν' ἀρβελισμένον. 177 καὶ κιθαργός ὀπτούτσικος ἀκέραιος μὲ τὸ γάρος.
231 καὶ μὲ ψωμὶν λιγούτσικον. 255 τὸ πῶς νὰ ζήσω ἐξαπορῶ μὲ ταύτας τὰς τζερ-
δέλλας. 4, 230 ἅμα μὲ τὸ σκουτέλλιν. So 2, 19-20 ἀλλὰ μὲ τὴν ἐνοῦσαν μοι
πολλὴν στενοχωρίαν μὲ τὴν ἐξανεπήλπιστον πολλὴν πεζοπορίαν (ubi malo μά-μά),
et alibi. Roboam 2 Μὲ τὸν ἀφέντην σου. 17 Μὲ ταῦτα. το Μὲ ὅλην σου τὴν καρδίαν,
3. Μὲ ταύτην. 56 Μὲ φίλον, 60 Μὲ ψευδῆν συντυχίαν. 82 δικασθῇς Μὲ ταύτην.
102 Μὲ τὴν δύναμίν του. Hermon. 1, 254 Μὲ τὸ μῆλον. 2, 175 6 ἐσυνέζευξεν αὐτὴ
γὰρ Μὲ υἱὸν γὰρ τοῦ ᾿Αρτέως. 188 9 Μετὰ τῶν αὐτῆς δουλίδων καὶ μὲ γυναικῶν
ἑτέρων. 277 ἡ Ἑλένη Μὲ τὴν θέαν, and passim. Bolth. 81 καὶ μὲ τὰ (ubi male
μετὰ τριὰ παιδόπουλα καβαλλικεύει μόνος. 116 εἰπῆτε τον Μὲ τὸ καλὸν ἂν θέλῃ
νὰ γυρίσῃ. 123 ἐπέζευσε κ' ἐκάθισε μὲ τὰ παιδόπουλά του, etc.
C
19
1609. The full form μετά is still lingering in a few phrases, as : μετὰ
Xapas with pleasure.' Μετά μένα, μετά σένα, Μετ᾿ αὐτόν (also μετ' αὖτον),
Μετά μᾶς, Μετὰ σᾶς, Μετὰ κείνο”, ote. In Cypros MITÁ
Παρά
1610. Παρά with Accus., GEN. and DAT.
1611. A. With AccusATIVE:
1. Of Place:
μου, Μιτά της etc.
a. along, beside, by: παρὰ ΤΗΝ θάλαccan along the sea-
shore. παρὰ τὸν ποταμόν. παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν πορεύεσθαι, οἰκεῖν.
b. to (like πρός and ὡς, 1655 and 1699): ἀφικνεῖσθαι, ἰέναι,
πέμπειν, γράφειν παρά ΤΙΝΑ.
1611". Post-christian Atticists sometimos misunderstand usage b, and so
on the one hand extend it to things, and on the other substitute the dative for
the accusative, as : Proc. i. 186, 15 Παῦλον παρά τον περίβολον στείλας. 191,
14 παρὰ τὸν ποταμὸν ᾿Ορόντην ἐλθεῖν. ii. 528, 11 (πύλαι) φέρουσαι παρὰ τοῦ
λόφου τὴν ὑπώρειαν. Μπ1. 440, το τὰς θυγατέρας ἀχθῆναι κελεύω παρά τη
Αὐγούστα Θεοδώρα. 389, 10. Ορ. 1631.
ΒΙΟΝ.
1612. 2. Of Time : during :-παρά πότον, παρ' ὅλον τὸν βίον.
1813. Both the above usages of place and time (1611-2) occur also in P
Greek, but it may be doubted whother thoy outlived T speech. No trace of
them is found in N.
388
PREPOSITIONS : παρά.
[1614-1618.
1614. 3. Metaphorically.
a. Of comparisons in the sense of as compared with; rather
than; more than, beyond (ep. πέρα) ;-bordering on and often
confounded with ὑπέρ (1676) :
Pl. Apol. 28 ο ός (Αχιλλεὺς) τοῦ κινδύνου κατεφρόνησε παρὰ τὸ αἰσχρόν η
ΥΠΟΜΕΙΝΑΙ. 1on 539 E. Lach. 183. Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 2 διάδηλος ἦν παρά
τοὺς ἄλλογο εύτακτῶν. 1, 14, 4 παρά τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα ὥσπερ θεοὶ οἱ ἄνθρωποι
βιοτεύουσι. Ages. 5, 3. Th. 4, 6 χειμών μείζω παρὰ τὴν καθεστηκυίαν
ὥρα. Polyb. 10, 27, 5 πλούτῳ μέγα τι παρὰ τὰς ἄλλας πόλεις διαφέρειν.
1615. In this usage παρὰ assumed, during P times, a steadily in-
creasing popularity, and eventually established itself as the regular
second member of comparison, thus ousting both the genitive and
after comparatives proper and comparative ideas (ἄλλος, ἕτερος, διά-
φορος, etc., 1187. 1328). In progress of time this process affected
also positives, so that παρὰ ultimately appropriated the office of ὑπὲρ
as well (1686). The confusion of παρὰ and ὑπὲρ seems, moreover, to
have been furthered by their partial homophony (para-iper), and the
ultimate disappearance of the latter was only the natural outcome,
since ὑπὲρ was phonetically weaker than παρά, and, furthermore,
closed with which had become untenable as a final consonant (219).
Cp. JCramer An. Ox. i. 338 παραλαμβάνεται δὲ πολλάκις καὶ ἀντὶ τῆς ὑπέρ,
οἷον ὡραῖος κάλλει παρὰ τοὺς υἱοὺς τῶν ἀνθρώπων. ἔστι γὰρ ἀντὶ τοῦ ὑπὲρ
τοὺς υἱούς. Cp. Hesych. παρὰ πάντας ὑπὲρ πάντας.
Polyb. 3, 29, 5 μὴ προσλαμβάνειν ἑτέρους συμμάχους παρὰ τοὺς ὑπάρχοντας. Plut.
Alc. x. Sept. Ge. 37, 3. Luko 3, 13 πλέον παρὰ τὸ ΔΙΑΤΕΤΑΓΜΕΝΟΝ. Rom.
12, 3 Υπερφρονεῖν παρ᾽ ἃ δεῖ. 1 Cor. 3, 11 θεμέλιον γὰρ ἄλλον οὐδεὶς δύναται
θεῖναι παρὰ τὸν ΚΕΙΜΕΝΩΝ. Hebr. I, 4 διαφορώτερον παρ' αυτούς. 9, 23 κρείτα
TOCIN θυσίαις παρὰ ΤΑΥΤΑ. Luke 13, 2 ἁμαρτωλοὶ παρὰ (= υπέρ) πάντα. 13, 4
ὀφειλέται ἐγένοντο παρά (= ὑπερ) πάντας τοὺς ἀνθρώπους. [Conversely Luke
16,8 φρονιμώτεροι ὑπὲρ τοὺς υἱοὺς τοῦ φωτός. Hebr. 4, 12 τομώτερος ὑπὲρ πᾶσαν
μάχαιραν, 2 Cor. 12, 13 ἡσσώθητε ὑπὲρ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας.] Hermas Sim.
9, 18, 2 πλείονα πονηρίαν ποιεῖν παρὰ τὸν μὴ γινώσκοντα τὸν θεόν.
Iren. 1, 10, .
ἄλλον θεὸν παρεπινοείν παρὰ τὸν ΔΗΜΙΟΥΡΓΟΝ. Lyd. 178, 5 μηδὲν ἄλλο παρά
ΤΗΝ ΠΟΙΗΣΙΝ ἐπισταμένου. Acta Petri et Pauli 79 ὁ Παῦλος ἀθῷος φαίνεται
παρά (= ὑπὲρ) τὸν Πέτρον. Acta Tho. 74, 1 οὐδὲν κρείττον ἐστὶν παρὰ τὸ τὸν
ἄνδρα τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐπαναπαύεσθαι γυναικί. 42, 6 ἡ μοιχεία παρὰ τῷ θεῷ πάνυ χαλεπόν ἐστι
κακὸν παρὰ τὰ ἄλλα κακά. Mal. 341, 2 δοῦσαν παρ᾿ ὃ ἦν τὸ προάστειον ἄξιον.
Prodr. 5, 114 παρά κρανιαροκέφαλον πάντως νά μ᾽ ὀνομάσουν | νὰ τὸν εἰπ᾿ ὅτι
μάθε το τσαγκάρην τὸ παιδί σου. Βelth. 882 τὴν εἶχε πλέον ἔμπιστην παρ᾽ ἅλας τὰς
βαγίτσας.
1616. As a mattor of course, rapà in N is regular not only after compara-
tives (in the sonso of rather tαν, εις κάλλια σκοτωμένος παρά ντροπιασμένος),
but also in cases whoro ancient usage would require ὑπέρ. Even in
composition, ὑπὲρ has been mostly dislodged by παρά, as: παραπολύ = ὑπέρπολυ
too much. παραβέβαιος ὑπερβέβαιος ‘more than suro. παραπικραίνω
grievo too much παραπεινώ * am very hungry. παρακάνω' overdo. παρα-
τρώγω, 'cat too much. παρακοιμοῦμαι ' oversloop. παράνω - ὑπεράνω (524).
1617. Tlut in N articular comparativos and superlatives are conceived in
partitive senso, and consequently followed by ἀπό, has alroudy been explained
in 1311 f. and 1504 f.
1618. On the same principle παρὰ is ollon prefixod, fron 7 downwards,
to adverbs to form tho comparativo (524), as: παράνω (also παραπάνω =
ὑπεράνω or ἀνωτέρω, παρακάτω = κατωτέρω, παρεκεῖ = προσωτέρω. (1616.)
389
1619-1623.]
PREPOSITIONS: παρά.
1619. b. Of comparisons in the sense of minus, less ; then
except, but (644. 1734):
1
Th. I, 23, 3 ἄλλο λέγουσιν παρὰ τὴν ἑαυτῶν Δόξαν. 4,6 ἄλλο τι παρά
ταῦτα. Pl. Lach. 178 B παρά μικρόν, παρ' ὀλίγον but for a little. Phaedr.
235 C. Rep. 294 C. 296 B. 3oo C. 468. παρά πολύ ‘by far, completely.
Hdt. 9, 33, 3 παρά ἓν πάλαισμα ἔδραμε νικᾶν Ολυμπιάδα. Th. 8, 29 παρά
πέντε NAYC. Pl. Apol. 36 Α οὐ γὰρ ᾤμην οὕτω παρ᾽ ὀλίγον ἔσεσθαι ἀλλὰ
παρά πολύ. Dem. 24, 138 Φίλιππον παρ᾽ ὀλίγας ψήφογο ἐτιμήσατε. δο
688, 26 παρὰ τρεις ψήφους. Isocr. 19, 22 παρὰ μικρὸν ἦλθον ἀποθανεῖν.
Isae. 41, 36 παρὰ τέσσαρας ψήφογε.
1619. This usage is peculiarly common in P-N. Polyb. 3. 29, 5 μὴ
προσλαμβάνειν ἑτέρους συμμάχους παρά τους Υπάρχοντας. 2, 55, 4 παρ᾽ ὀλίΓΟΝ
ἦλθε τοῦ ἐκπεσεῖν. 1, 43, 7 παρά Μικρὸν ἦλθον ἀπολέσαι. So 12, 12, I.
Strab. 10, 2, 14 παρά δύο τοὺς ἡμίσεις. Nicom. 77 παρά μονάδα. Plut. i. 133
ο παρ' ΟΥΔΕΝ ἐλθόντες ἀπολέσθαι. 933 0. 1046 D. App. i. 344, 94 παρά
TOCOὟTON ἦλθον αἰχμαλωτίζεσθαι. Aristid. 34, 652, 137 εἰ δὲ δεῖ εἰπεῖν παρά
πάντα τὸ γνωριμώτατον. Α. Ρ. 695 Μᾶρκος, θηρίον εἶ παρά Γράμμα ' you aro
a beast all but one letter (i.e. ἄρκos bear ), NT 2 Cor. 11, 24 τεσσαράκοντα
Παρά ΜΙΑΝ.
Epiph. i. 940 Α παρά Ημέρας τέccaPac. Vita Epiph. 1o5 D
ἑκατὸν καὶ πέντε ἐτῶν εἰμι παρά τρείς ΜΗΝΑΣ So 168 A. Synes. 1445 Β
παρ᾽ ἐνίογα τῶν δακτύλων ἐγένετο, ' he lost some of his fingers.
41, 2.
(
1619. Ar. Nub. 698 οὐκ ἔστι παρὰ ταῦτ᾽ ἄλλα. Vesp. 1166. Pax. 11o. Th. I,
Pl. Phaedr. 235 ο παρὰ ταῦτα εἰπεῖν ἕτερα μὴ χείρω. Pol. 295 c. ib. Ε
μὴ ἐξέστω παρὰ ταῦτα ἕτερα πράττειν. Dem. 28, 139 μὴ γράφειν παρὰ ταῦτα
ἕτερα. Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 2. Pl. Gorg. 507 Α. Xen. Hell. 1, 5, 5. Dem. 28 235
οὐδεὶς ἂν ἔχοι παρὰ ταῦτ᾽ εἰπεῖν ἄλλο οὐδέν. Pl. Phaed. 244. 93 Α. 107 A. Legg.
693. 799. Tim. 510. Lys. 213 c. Theaet. 167 A. Rep. 492 E. Theaet. 156 Δ.
ἄλλο παρὰ τοῦτο οὐδέν. See FHRau in Curt. Stud. iii. 74f.
1619. So N : παρά λίγο (i. e, παρ' ὀλίγον). παρὰ τρία, παρά πέντε, ' minus
3, 5. ἕνα μήνα παρά τρεῖς ἡμέρες. δὲν ἔχω παρά εἴκοσι λεπτά 'I have but
30 lepta.'
1620. That in this exceptive usage παρὰ has become in N synonymous
and interchangeable with εἰμὴ οι ἀμμὴ and ἀλλὰ will be seen in 1734 f.
1621. c. In alternations: every (other) :—Tap' Ĥmépan 'day
by day. παρ' ἡμέραν μίαν ' every other day. παρὰ ΜΗΝΑ τρίτον
every third month.'
1622. This usage is peculiarly common in P-N, as :
Arist. Η. Α. 7, 2 ταῖς μὲν συνεχῶς φοιτᾷ, παρὰ δὲ ΜΗ͂Να τρίτον ταῖς πλείσταις.
Polyb. 3, 110, 4 παρά ΜΙΑΝ overy other day. 6, 33, 9 παρά τετάρτην
Ημέρας 'every fourth day.
HMÉPAN
Diod. 4, 65, 1 ΠΑΡ' ΕΝΙΑΥΤΟΝ ἄρχειν ' every
other year. 32, 12, 1 παρά μέρος alternately. NT Rom. 14, 5 ἡμέραν
παρ' ἡμέραν. Nicom. 94 ἕνα παρ᾽ ἕνα ‘overy other one. Cornut. 163 παρ'
È MĤNAC 'every six months.' Plut. ii. 1o6 m ἓν παρ᾽ ἕν ‘alternately.
50 942 r. Porphyr. V. Plot. 58, 18 σιτεῖσθαι παρά μίαν every other day.
Chrys. i. 180 η ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν τρεφόμενον. Theod. iv. 425 Β παρ'
ΗΜΕΡΑΝ μίαν ὕδατι τὸ σῶμα καθαίρειν. Mal. 52, 19 ἐνιαυτὸν παρ' ΕΝΙΑΥΤΟΝ.
1622". So still in N: μέρα" παρά μέρα", μήνα παρά ΜΗΝΑ, etc.
1623. d. Of cause : through, because of :-Th. I, 141 παρὰ ΤΗΝ
ἑαυτοῦ ἀμέλειαν. Dem. 9, 2 οὐ παρ' ἓν οὐδὲ δύο εἰς τοῦτο τὰ
πράγματα ἀφίκται. Polyb. 3, 103, 2 μὴ παρὰ τὴν τῶν δυνάμεων
ἀποδειλίασιν ἀλλὰ παρὰ τὴν τοῦ προεστῶτος εὐλάβειαν γεγονέναι.
390
PREPOSITIONS : παρά. [1624-1632.
1624. This usage is foreign to P-N speech.
1625. e. Denoting a violation: contrary to, against:-παρά τούς
Νόμος, παρά τοὺς ὅρκους, παρά Δόξαν, παρά ΓΝΩΜΗΝ, παρ'
ἐλπίδα, παρὰ φύσιν, παρὰ λόγου.
1626. This usage is common to all P compositions, but foreign to N
speech, except in a few adverbial phrases, as : παρὰ φύση (παρὰ φύσιν).
1627. B. With GENITIVE: on the part of, from, of opposed
to πρός + accus. (1655):
ἥκειν παρὰ βασιλέως. αἰτεῖν παρά φίλων. μανθάνειν, πυνθάνεσθαι παρὰ
σοφοῦ ἀνδρός. ὑπαίτιος παρὰ τῆς πόλεως. παρ' ἑαυτοῦ προστιθέναι τι.
1628. Sometimes apà performs the function of vπò after passive
verbs, such as δίδοσθαι, λέγεσθαι, ὁμολογεῖσθαι, etc. This usage ap-
pealed particularly to the taste of P writers, and so rapà gradually
came to be identified with irrò and almost indiscriminately substituted
for it (1510; cp. FHRau in Curt. Stud. iii. 26 ff.).—When further the
preposition vπò became confounded with ảπó, and this again with ¿§,
there ensued a struggle among ὑπό, ἀπό, παρά, and ἐξ, which resulted
in the retreat and final disappearance, one after another, of' ὑπό,παρά,
and ἐξ, before the victorious ἀπὸ (1487 ff. 15o6 ff.)- See also 1632.
1629. Another P feature of παρὰ is that its frequent association
with the genitive led to the partial obliteration of its original force
(from), so that it eventually became a mere sign of the simple but
emphatic genitive, chiefly after the article: Polyb. 3, 70, 4 τὰ παρ'
αὐτῶν στρατόπεδα. 3, 78, 5 ἡ παρ' αὐτῶν χώρα. 3, 9, 2 ή παρά ΤΟΥΤΩΝ
ἀλογία. 9, 19, 9 τὰ παρὰ τῶν Μαθηματικών=τὰ τῶν μ-. Hdn. Hist. 2, 13,
1 τά παρά της εγκλήτου ἐδηλώθη. (Cp. A ἡ ἐξ ᾿Αρείου πάγου βουλή, as
Isocr. 7, 37.)
1630. C. With DATIVE (mostly personal): at, (apud) by, with :
Παρά Κλεάρχῳ εἶναι παρὰ τοῖς Μήδοις καὶ ἐν τοῖς Πέρσαις. παρὰ τοῖς
Εξ ΦΡΟΝΟΫΣΙΝ. παρὰ τῷ ποταμῷ ὁρμίζεσθαι. παρὰ τῷ Βωμῷ θύειν. ἡ παρ'
ἑαγτῷ δύναμις.
1631. Raroly παρὰ stands with the dativo instead of the accusative, as
Xen. An. 7, 2, 25 τὰ παρὰ θαλάττη χωρία. 6, 2, 2 ὡρμίσαντο παρὰ τῷ Αερογ
CIÁI XEрPONнCO. Nevertheless, this exception did not fail to find imitators
among the Atticists, as: Luc. Dial. Mort. 20, 5 (i. 418) ĥne mapà coì
Αρίστιππος. Dio Cass. Exe. 15 ὡς φίλων παρὰ φίλοις ιόντων. Cp. 16ο.
πα
1632. Aftor passive and intransitive verbs the usage of παρὰ in the above
sonso (1630) sometimes naturally borders on the meaning of agency (by), and
thus appears equivalent to παρὰ with the genitivo (1627 f.), as: ἀξιοῦσθαι παρά
ΤΙΝΙ, νομίζεται παρά πάει, ὁμολογεῖται παρὰ τῷ Δήμῳ. Isocr. 4, 56 παρὰ πᾶσιν
ἀνθρώποις ἀγαπᾶσθαι. — This uncommon construction, which occurs
chiefly among tho orators, was mistaken by P writers for Tapd with the
genitivo, and thus led to a frequent interchange of the two cases. Polyb.
11, 14, 2 ὁμολογούμενος παρά πλει (besido 11, 34, 13 ὁμολογηθεὶς παρὰ τοῦ
βασιλέως). 10, 46, 4 ετοιμασθεὶς παρ' αμφοτέροις (beside II, 20, 3 ἑτοιμασθεὶς
παρὰ τούτου). Το παρά τις καλεῖσθαι, προσαγορεύεσθαι, ἀγνοεῖσθαι, γιγνώσκεσθαι,
διοικεῖσθαι, ote. (FKrobs. 49 f.) I, 34, 9 οἱ παρὰ τοῖς Καρχηδονίοις μισθο-
φόροι. 5, 3, 3 τὰ παρ' αὐτοῖς πλοῖα. 8, 14, 7 ἔτυχε τιμῆς παρὰ τῇ πατρίδι.
Hdn. Hist. 5, 2, 4 τῆς τοιαύτης πολυτελείας παρὰ τοῖς 'Ρωμαίων στρατιώταις οὐκ
ἐπαινουμένης. Acta Xanth. 71, 13 σύνες τὰ λεχθέντα σοι παρ' ἐμοί.
391
1633-1643b.]
PREPOSITIONS : περί.
Περί.
1633. Περὶ with Accus., GEN., and DAT.
A. With AcCUSATIVE:
I. Of Place: round, about: περί τήν πόλιν, περὶ τὰ ὅρια,
περὶ τὴν Σικελίαν. οἱ περὶ τὸν ΚΥΡΟΝ,
1634. This usage has been in universal favour down to N times. On
the other hand, popular speech has since @ substituted for it γύρωθεν
(= κύκλῳ), Ν γύρου or more commonly τριγύρου (also τριγύρω) (1491). Apollod.
Arch. 43 Γύρωθεν του σταυρώματος. Acta Pil. B ro, 2 ἱστάμεναι Γύρωθεν
AYTĤC.
Αᾐτής. Porph. Cer. 208, 22 ἁπλοῦντες αὐτὸ Γύρωθεν ατής. Nic. Phocas
211, 10 πυρὰ πλεῖστα ἀνάπτειν Γύρωθεν αὐτῶν.
1635. 2. Of Time: about:-περί MÉCAC Νύκτας, περὶ πλήθογ-
CAN Aгopán.
1636. N usually expresses this relation by κατὰ (1588), as: κατὰ τὰ
μεσάνυκτα 4 about midnight. [ κατὰ τὰς δέκα ' about io o'clock. ]
1637. 3. Metaphorically :-(a) about: περὶ τὰ ἑξήκοντα ἔτη,
περί τρισχιλίους.
>
"
1638. In G-N this relation is usually expressed by wc, c (152; cp.
1544. 1785) 4 to the number of up to, as : Mal. 5, 7 ἕως ἑπτάκις, ἀλλ ἕως
ἑβδομήκοντα ζ'. ὡς ἑξῆντα ' up to sixty, ὣς τρεῖς χιλιάδες 'up to three thousand.
1639. (b) about, concerning; towards :-
?
διατρίβειν, σπουδάζειν, εἶναι περί τι, 'to be busy with something." τὰ
περὶ τὸν πόλεμο ‘in matters of war. εὐσεβειν, σωφρονεῖν, ἁμαρτάνειν
περὶ θεογc, towards the gods.” ἄδικος, κακός, πονηρός, ἀγαθὸς περί τινα,
περί τήν πόλιν, towards.
1640. In this construction of περί, post-christian common diction sometimes
confounds the accusative with the genitive, as : Acta Th. 68, 36 ἔστω καὶ περὶ
σὲ ἡ σπουδὴ τοῦ κυρίου ὡς καὶ περὶ τῶν ἄλλων. So too perhaps Mal. 455,
20 ἀκούσας ταῦτα ὁ βασιλεὺς ἀνεδύη περὶ τὸ (it not των ?) ποιῆσαι τὰ πάκτα.]
(Cp. 1588.)
1641. On the other hand, περὶ with accusativo has in prosont speech
taken the place of the ancient περὶ with genitivo (1642), at least partially,
for διὰ (i.o. για 155, a) is the commoner representativo (1534, c).
1642. Β. With GENITIVE: about, concerning, of, on:-περί
TINOC λέγειν, ἀκούειν, βουλεύεσθαι, εἰκάζειν, ἐρίζειν, μάχεσθαι.
J
C
περί πολλοί (πλείονος, πλείστου) ποιεῖσθαι, to value much
(more, very much). περὶ ὀλίγοΥ οὐδενὸς) ποιεῖσθαι τι ' to attach
little (no) importance to something.' (Cp. 1339 & 1647.)
1042". In this relation περὶ in N is either constructed with the accusativo
or replaced by διά (1641).
1643. C. With DATIVE: (uncommon in prose) about, as: στρεπτοὺς
περί τοῖς τραχήλοις ἔχειν. CIA ii. 754 (349 344 Β.Ε.), 35 ἀμπέχονον περὶ τῷ
Δει. περί τάρβει in terror.
1643. In this construction, περὶ is foreign to P B diction, and naturally
unknown to N, seeing that the latter has altogether discarded the dative.
392
PREPOSITIONS : πρό. [1644-1651.
Πρό
1644. Πρὸ with GENITIVE : before.
1. Of Place: before:-πρὸ τῆς πόλεως, πρὸ τῶν Πγλῶν,
τὰ πρὸ ποδῶν. (1649.)
1645. 2. Of Time : before, prior to:-πρὸ τῆς ἡμέρας, πρὸ
τῆς μάχης. οἱ πρὸ ἡμῶν ' our predecessors." (1649.)
TĤC
1646. So further πρὸ τοῦ (προτοῦ) formerly, previously, an ad-
verbial combination still preserved in N (1197, a. 1198. 1787).
1647. 3. Metaphorically: before, i. e. in preference to, rather
than; for :-βούλου γονεῖς πρὸ παντὸς ἐν τιμαῖς ἔχειν. πρὸ πολλῶν
ποιεῖσθαι, τιμᾶσθαι, αἱρεῖσθαι, ἡγεῖσθαι. (Cp. 1642. 1649.)
1648. This metaphorical usage of πρò naturally borders on the
sense of protection. Hence pò is sometimes almost equivalent to
ὑπὲρ ' for the sake or benefit of, as :
π
1
Xen. An. 7, 6, 36 πρὸ γμῶν ἀγρυπνήσαντα. Cyr. 1, 6, 42 πάντες ἀξιώσουσί
σε πρὸ αὐτῶν βουλεύεσθαι. Polyb. 5, 4, 1 πρό τῆς χώρας εὐκαίρως κεῖσθαι.
App. Hisp. 72 φιλοκινδυνότατος ἐς ἅπαντα πρὸ ἁπάντων γενόμενος). Paus.
9, 17, 1 ἀποθνῄσκειν πρὸ τοῦ ΔΗΜΟΥ.
1649. In its above threefold function (1644-8), #pd is common also in P
compositions down to M (but cp. 1492). At the same time, mark that
from G onwards-
(a) the temporal usage comes more and more to the front; and-
(b) the genitival construction makes room for the accusatival (under the
influence of Latin ante?): JMoschos 2985 ο πρὸ ἔτη εἰκοσιδύο (ep. even Moschion
114 προ ολίγας ημέρας). Nevertheless even in this temporal uso, πρὸ is com-
monly replaced by πρίν (1491), als : Arr. An. 3, 18, 6 πριν φάυγε. Thatn. Dan. (init.)
mpin þáʊyc.
42 πριν Γενέσεως. Sext. 226, 16. 463, 17, etc. Eus. Alex. 432 Ο πριν της ΠΑΝΗ
TĤC
Γύρεως διαλυθείσης ante conventum dissolutum (a Latinism, ep. 1652).
1650. Occasional instances of πρὸ with dutive, such as CIC 84r (A.D. 149) τὸν
πρό πύλαις ἥρωα . . . Κλαυδιανοῦ πρὸ δόμοισι, and Acta Xanth. 8, 30 εἴθε ἤμην
προ τῇ χθὲς ἡμέρᾳ ἀποθανών-point to the influence of Latin pro with ablativo
(then ussociated with tho Groek dativo) and at the same time indicate tho
advanced retreat of πρò from the living language.
1651. A striking peculiarity of πρό, proper to P Greek, and pointing
to Roman influenco (ante), is its frequent proleptic construction in dates or
definitions of time. (Cp. μετά 1003 und από 1513.)
I
Sopt. Amos. 1, 1 πρὸ δύο ἐτῶν τοῦ σεισμοῦ ( δύο ἔτη πρὸ τοῦ σεισμοῦ).
John 12,
πρὸ ἓξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ πάσχα ἦλθεν εἰς Βηθανίαν. Strab. 2, 1, 20
πρὸ πέντε καὶ τεσσαράκοντα ἡμερῶν τῆς θερινῆς τροπῆς. Plut. ii. 717 ο πρό
μιας Ημέρας των γενεθλίων. App, Mac, το πρό τριῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ θριάμβου
Luo. Cronos. 14. (iii. 396) προ πολλοῦ τῆς ἑορτῆς, Adl. Ν. Λ. 1, 19 προ
πέντε ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἀφανισθῆναι τὴν ῾Ελίκην[1].—So oven in a local sonso, εις :
[1] So further: Diosc. I, 77 (p. 8o) πρὸ δύο ὡρῶν τῆς ἐπιβολῆς. 4, 190 (p. 193)
πρό μιᾶς ὥρα τῆς ἐπισημασίας. Plut. ii. 3rg A πρό μιᾶς ἡμέρας Νώνων Ἰανουα-
ρίων. Inst. Tryph. 27 προ μιας Ημέρας ἢ μετὰ μίαν ἡμέραν τον σαββάτου. Αpp.
393
1651-1658.]
PREPOSITIONS : πρό, πρός.
Mal. 142, 18 πρό μικρον της πόλεως.
στήματος της πόλεως.
207, II. 324, 7 πρό ὀλίγΟΥ ΔΙΑ
1652. With the establishment of the Roman system of dating (011. 1653),
the use of pò in the sense of Latin ante naturally became general. As
a further peculiarity we may note here that the word μépa (dies) is very
ofton dispensed with by placing the article τῇ before πρό :
Dion. H. ii. 1246, 3 ἡμέρᾳ τετάρτῃ πρό τριων εἰδῶν Δεκεμβρίων. CIG. 5879
(Α.Δ. 78) πρὸ ἡμερῶν ἕνδεκα καλανδῶν ἰογνίων. CIG 5906 προ τριών ΝωΝΩΝ
Μαΐων. Jos. Ant. 13, 9, 2 βουλὴν συνήγαγε πρὸ ὀκτὼ εἰδῶν Φεβρουαρίων.
Plut. i. 6 D πρό ΔΕΚΑΜΙΑ ΚΑΛΑΝΔΩΝ Μαΐων. Athan. i. 408 Α ἐδόθη πρὸ
Δεκαπέντε καλαλῶν ἰογνίων. Jos. Ant. 14, 10, το τῇ πρό τριών ειδών
ἀπριλίων, τῇ πρὸ πέντε εἰδῶν Φεβρογαρίων. Plut. i. 23 r τῇ πρὸ ἕνδεκα
ΚΑΛΑΝΔΩΝ Μαΐων. CIG 5898 τῇ πρὸ & ΝΩΝῶν Μαΐων τῇ πρώτῃ πρὸ νωνῶν
μαΐων. Mal. 227, 3 τῇ πρὸ Ἡ καλανδών. 236, 15. 257, 2. 316, 3.50 προ μιάς
pridie.
1653. With the adoption of the Christian era tho above mode of dating
necessarily fell into disuse and oblivion (or).
Πρόσ
1654. Πρὸς with Accus., GEN., and DAT. : in face of.
1655. A. With AccUSATIVE :
1. Of Place denoting a direction towards, to (mostly a
person)-opposed to παρὰ + gen. (1627):
προς ΜεσημβρίαΝ. ἰέναι πρὸς βασιλέα. λέγειν πρός ΤΙΝΑ.
1655. When it is used with a personal accusative, πρὸς is occasionally
replaced by ὡς, as: πορεύεσθαι ὡς βασιλέα (1699).
1656. 2. Of Time : towards :-πρὸς ἑσπέραν.
1657. 3. Metaphorically:
เ
(α) in reference to:—ἄθυμος προς ΤΗΝ ANABACIN. τρέπεσθαι πρός τάς
εγμφοράς. βουλεύεσθαι πρὸς τοὺς καιρούς according to circumstances.
οἰκείως διακεῖσθαι πρός τινα, towards. προς τα ΤΑ in this respect.
οὐδὲν πρὸς ἐμέ ' it is nothing to me.
(β) as compared with (cp. 1614) :-οὐδὲν τὰ χρήματα πρὸς τὴν σοφίαν.
πρὸς τὴν φύσιν ' according to nature.
(c) to the effect of, with a view to (1582, e) :-παιδεύεσθαι πρὸς ἀρετήν,
λέγειν προς χάριν, πίνειν πρὸς ἡΔΟΝΗΝ, προς τί;" to what end ?
1658. All these usages (1655-7) of πρὸς hold substantially good also
for P-M Greck (1492) with an increasing popularity of the meta-
phorical acceptation. In this way πpòs since G came to stand—
(a) Frequently for κarà or avà in a distributive sense (1589, b.
1497, b) : at the rate of:
Civil. 4, 101 μέχρι προ μιάς τῆς μάχης ἡμέρας ἀπέστησαν. Luc. Do Mort. poregr.
1 (iii. 326) οὐ πρὸ πολλῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ τολμήματος. Macr. 12, 3, 216 πρὸ δυοῖν
ΤΟΝ της τελευτής. Mart. Polyc. 5, 2 πρό τριῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ συλληφθῆναι
αὐτόν. Pallad. 1042 Β πρὸ ἐννέα ΜΗΝῶν τῆς κοιμήσεως τοῦ ἀθλητοῦ. Cullin.
139, 15 πρὸ τριῶν ἡμερῶν (τοῦ θανάτου) τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτῆς.
394
PREPOSITIONS : πρός.
[1658-1665.
Polyb. 5, 15, 9 πρός εἴκοσι τάλαντα κατεγγυησάμενος. Diosc. 5, 35 μνᾶν
πρὸς ὄξους ξέσται πέντε μίσγουσιν ' one mina to every five xestae. Apophth.
2 Β ἐδόθη ποτὲ εἰς Σκῆτιν πρὸς ὀλίγα ἰσχάλια. Chron. 732, 13 ἵνα πρὸς ἕνα
ἵππον εἷς ἕκαστος αὐτῶν ἔχῃ. Porph. Adm. 176, 9 τὰς τρεῖς ῥάβδους δέδωκε
τοῖς τρισὶ πρὸς ΜίαΝ. Cer. 432, 17 ἑκάστῳ διδόναι κατὰ τὸ ἔθος πρὸς πέντε
NOMICMATA. 487, 13 καὶ ἐπαίρουσι πρὸς ἓν ξύλου.
(b) Frequently of time (cp. 1574): during, for :
Luc. De hist. conscr. 4o (ii. 54) ἡδέως ἂν πρὸς ὀλίγον ἀνεβίουν. Philops.
3o (iii. 57) πρός τό λοιπόν οἰκεῖσθαι τὴν οἰκίαν ἐποίησε. So De Luct. 16 (ii.
929). De Dom. 14 (iii. 198). Dial. Door. 18, 1 (i. 248).-Hrdn. Hist. 1,
3, 5 πρὸς τὸ παρόν. 1, 6, 7 πρὸς ὀλίγον. 1, 14, 2 πρὸς τὸ μέλλον. 2, 5, 6
πρὸς τὸ ΝΥ͂Ν. Mal. 29, το προς Μικρὸν ἔμειναν ἐκεῖ. 488, 7 πρὸς ὀλίγον,-50
489, 8.
T
(c) Sometimes for παρά + dative, like Latin apud aliquem :
Mal. 451, 3 διέτριψε πρὸς αὐτόν. 348, 15 διατρίψαντος ἐν Ῥώμῃ Αρκαδίου
πρὸς τὸν αὐτοῦ ἀδελφόν.
1659. The occurrence of #pds (with accus.) in sporadic N phrases and in
epistolary addresses points to literary influence: πρὸς τὸν Κύριον ‘Το Mr. X.,
πρὸς τὰ ξημερώματα ' towards daybreak, πρὸς τὸ μεσημέρι • towards noon.
1660. In instances like Acta Tho. 78, 22 πρὸς γυναῖκα ἔχειν, and Callin. 134,
25 λογίζομαι ἐμαυτὸν πρὸς ἕνα τῶν ἐλαχίστων—πρὸς is an obvious paraphrase of
the Hebraistic use of els (1552).
1661. B. With GENITIVE.
ἑστάναι πρὸς τοῦ ΠΟΤΑ-
I. Of Place : in face of, facing, opposite:
τὸ πρὸς ἑσπέρας τείχος. πρὸς Θράκης κεῖσθαι.
ΜΟΥ.-προς Νότον “south. πρὸς ἄρκτος north. πρὸς ἡλίου δυομένου,
ἀνίσχοντος, west, east.
1662. So too with verbs of swearing and imploring: by Ν μά
1746) :-ὀμνύναι, ἱκετεύειν πρὸς θεῶν.- For G-N see 1746 f.
1663. 2. Metaphorically: 'from the side of,' on the part of :
ἔπαινον ἔχειν πρός TINOC. προς μητρός, προς πατρός, πρός τινος εἶναι
'to be on the side of."
1664. In this metaphorical function προς was identified by the
Atticists with und of the agency (by), and so came to be used as a
'stylish'alternative (1695, a).
I
Λιτ. πρός τινος ἄγεσθαι, ἁλίσκεσθαι, ἀπόλλυσθαι, ἐξελέγχεσθαι, στεφανοῦσθαι,
καταποντίζεσθαι, etc., etc., passim. (ABoehner 42f.). App. Syr. 67 σωτὴρ καὶ ὅδε
πρὸς τῶν Σγρίων ὀνομασθείς. Civil. 5, 66 προς πάντων ἐπαινούμενον. Pun. I,
30 ὑβριζόμενοι προς τον Απογλείου. Mithr. 67 πρός τινων ἐνοχλούμενος. Civil.
5, 79 πρός θηρίων δεδαπανημένος, et passim. Luc. Jup. Conf. 16 (ii. 639)
ἀνεσκολοπίζοντο πρὸς αὐτοῇ. Tim. 9 (i. 117) ἀμεληθῆναι πρὸς ἡμῶν. Do
Purus. 26 (ii. 856) ὡμολόγηται πρὸς ἁπάντων, et saepo. Hdu. Hist. 3, 9, 6
ἀμελείσθαι πρός τῶν πολεμίων. 5, 6, 2 κελεύεσθαι πρός τῶν ἱερῶν Νόμων.
2, 10, 4 μισείσθαι προς τον ΔΗΜΟΥ. 7, 9, 7 πλείους ὑπὸ τοῦ οἰκείου πλήθους
ἐφθάρησαν ἢ πρὸς τῶν πολεμίων. Proc. πρός τινος δηλοῦσθαι, ἐλέγχεσθαι,
ἐπιτάττεσθαι, φρουρεῖσθαι, τυραννεῖσθαι, πέμπεσθαι, ἀδικεῖσθαι, βιάζεσθαι, κακί
ζεσθαι, διαφθείρεσθαι, ἀπολωλέναι, θνῄσκειν, etc., etc., passim. (JScheftloin
48-52).
1665. C. With Dative : near, by the side of:
1. Of Place : by :-πρὸς Βαβυλώνι, πρὸς τοῖς ΠΗΓΑῖς, προς
τῇ ἀγορᾷ.-πρός τινι είναι ' to be engaged in.
395
1666-1670.]
PREPOSITIONS : πρός, σύν.
1666. This usage appears to be peculiarly common in Alexandrian
Greek (WSchmid iii. 288), but TM substituted πλησίον (Ν κοντά) for
it, as : Mal. 47, 2 ; 48, 16, etc.
1666. Constructions like App. Civil. 4, 105 ἔχει δὲ πρὸς μὲν ἄρκτῳ
δρυμοὺς πρὸς δὲ τῇ MECHMβρίᾳ ἕλος ἐστίν are macaronisms (cp. 1655. 1661).
1667. 2. Metaphorically : in addition to, besides :-πρὸς τῷ
Υπάρχοντι πόνῳ πρὸς τούτοις ‘moreover, besides.
(
1667”. This usage is common also in P-B compositions, but unknown to N.
ΣΥΝ.
1668. Σὺν (before 400 B.c. also ξύν with DATIVE only: with
rare in A writers (except Xen.), its place being supplied by μετά (1604).
1. Together with, in company with:
εγω τοῖς φίλοις εἶναι. CYN TINI πολεμείν in alliance with. οἱ cΫΝ
Φαλίνῳ 'the followers of Ph. Μένων καὶ οἱ εγώ αὐτῷ.-εν τοῖς θεοῖς 'with
the help of the gods.' cỲN TO NÓM in conformity with the law.'
9
cγΝ ΚΡΑΥΓΑ * shouting. cγΝ ΦΡΟΝΗΜΑτι in high spirits. εν τῷ δικαίῳ
δικαίως. εγν τῷ καλῷ = καλῶς. εν τάχει = ταχέως. cν τῷ τῷ ἀγαθῷ
'for thy benefit."
1669. 2. Sometimes instrumentally: with, by means of:
εγω τοῖς ὅπλοις 'with their arms. CYN Bia by force. Xen. Mom.
2, 1, 28 τὸ σῶμα γυμναστέον CYN πόνοις καὶ ἱδρῶτι. Polyb. 8, 6, 4 τροχιλίαι
προσήρτηνται εν κάλοις.
1670. Though used as a more variety of μετά (1668), σὺν maintained
itsolf through all P antiquity down to N times, as far as regards writton
composition. On the other hand, it seems questionable whethor ouv
actually formed part of the living language in G-B times, in view of its
scarceness oven in previous ages, and the striking frequency for it of aµa
in subsequent timos (1671). That ordinary writors were no longer familiar
with its proper force, is clearly shown from cases whoro it is completely
idontified with or mistaken for μετά, and thus constructed with the
genitive or ovon the accusativo (cp. 1607 and WSchmid iii. 289).
C.
-
Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 46, 11 (146 35 Β.Θ.) ΣΥΝ ΤΕΚΝΟΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΠΑΝΤΩΝ (also 12 &
20 f.); ib. 23 CYN τῶν ἐν αὐτῷ Νεκρών. Gr. Urk. Berlin 183 (185), 43 CYN Τραπέζης
καὶ τοῖς αὐτοῖς εγεί. CIG 539 (1) νῦν δὲ εἶν Ηρώων χῶρον ἔχοις φθίμενος.
2114 © & d (± IInd 4) cỳn synaikóc. 2131 b (udd.) cỶn ¿à¤λøĤc. 9853 (±VIŲ †)
ἐνθάδε κατάκιντε Σέργιος καὶ Μαρούση ἅμα Αναστασίῳ τοῦ αὑτῶν οἰκο
CYN Αγάθια (= αὑτῶν υἱοῦ, Αγάθης) τῆς συνζύγου αὐτοῦ καὶ Μαίμαλος . . . τούτον
οἱηὺς cγΝ Μουσχούσι αὐτοῦ cγΝΒίοΥ. CWessely, Akud. Wiss. 1889 μ. 115 (V-VII)
ΕΥ̓͂Ν Τῶν φοινίκων, εγΝ τῶν ΦΥΝΙΚΟΝ, CYM ΦΟΙΝίκων. [Diosc.] 2, 205 εγώ λίπογε.
Louvro Pup. 20, 15 CYN (ubi οὖν τῶν πάντων. Grout Louvro Pup. 700 μένε CYN
ἐμέ. Alchom. 301, 25 εγώ άλατος αμμωνιακού. Theoph. 294, 15 cγΝ τών βασι-
λικῶν λαγράτων. Porph. Cer. 654, 1 στρατὸς εγν ἀρχόντων. 669, 31 εγν κόρδων
διπλῶν. 680, 14 εγν τῶν ἀρχόντων. FTrinch. 1 (1000 λ. 1.) γν καὶ τῆς
διακρατήσεως. [ (1005 Α. 1.) ΕΫΝ ΗμεροΔένδρων καὶ ἀγριοδένδρων. (Spata
90 (1005 A.D.) Cν της Διακρατήσεως. 44 CYN ΤΟΥ͂ ἥμισυ τοῦ νεροῦ. 6ο (1995 Α.Μ.)
εν τῶν χωραφίων.-- [Nil.] 545 Λ τοὺς βίους τῶν πατέρων εν τὰ Γεροντικά.
Prodr. 3, 634 CYN THN ZHTHCIN.
396
PREPOSITIONS: σύν, ὑπέρ.
[1671-1679.
1671. The work of σὺν (or μετὰ with gen.) is sometimes performed
by the particle aμa with dative, as:
ἕπομαι ἅμα τινί. ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ οι ἅμ᾽ ἡμέρᾳ with daybreak. ἅμα τῷ
θέρει ' with the opening of summer.
1672. When σὺν had signally retreated before μετὰ (1670) and the latter
had become a commonplace particle, a variety was sought in the revival
of ἅμα, as JCramer 199, 6 ἅμα τῇ Αἴθρᾳ καὶ πέντε δουλίσι τῆς Ἑλένης. Mal. 51,
17. 115, 12, et passim [66 times]. As however the A construction of this
particle was now inconvenient in consequence of the retreat of the dative
from popular spoech (232. 1242 ff.), the difficulty was obviated by altogether
identifying the two particles, that is by constructing apa with the
genitive (cp. 1607, 1670, and 1794).
Acta Pil. A, ro, 1 ἅμα τῶν δύο κακούργων (CI). Parad. Pil. 6 ἅμα πλήθους
στρατιωτών. Const. (+ 536) 1208 ο ἅμα τῶν ὁσιωτάτων ἐπισκόπων. CIG 9853
(I VI+) ἅma Anactaciῳ τον αὑτῶν οἱΗοῇ (= υἱοῦ). Method. Conf. 684 D
ἅΜΑ ΤΟΥ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ ἁΓΙΟΥ ΠΝΕΥΜΑΤΟΣ. Μal. 51, 15 φονεύσας ἅμα τοῖς
(write THC) ΑΥΤῆς πολλούς. 95, το ἅμα της Αἴθρας. 219, 22 ἅμα τῷ αὐτῷ
᾿Αγρίππα στρατηγῷ καὶ στρατιωτικών Δυνάμεων αὐτοῦ. Theoph. 192, 3 ἅμα
Δισχιλίων. 193, 15 ἅΜΑ ΤῶΝ ΠΕΖΩΝ. 358, 29 ἅμα πέντε δρομόνων. Porph.
Cer. 20, 22. 72, 4. 122, 4. 680, 9 ἅμα τῶν ἁγιωτάτων ἐπισκόπων.
1672 b. This use of apa is foreign to present N.
1673. For a distributive use of oùv see 662, 1.
Ὑπέρ.
1674. Ὑπὲρ with Accus. and GEN. : over.
1675. A. With ACCUSATIVE :
r. Of place: over, beyond:ὑπὲρ τὸν ἙλλΗΣΠΟΝΤΟΝ οἰκεῖν.
Υπέρ τὰς στήλας τοῦ Ἡρακλέους πλεῖν.
1675 b. So too in P-M (cp. 1680), though inepávo is frequently used
instead, as: Mal. 141, 18; 201, 2; 233, 5, etc.
201, 2; 233, 5, etc. (Cp. 1491 f. 1678.)
1676. 2. Metaphorically : (α) Denoting excess: above, be-
yond: Υπέρ τΗΝ ΔΥΝΑΜΙΝ μου ‘beyond my power. Υπέρ
ἄνθρωπον ‘beyond man's power.’(3) beyond a measure:
upwards of, above :-Υπέρ τὰ πεΝΤΗΚΟΝΤΑ ἔΤΗ γεγονώς.
1676¹. So too in P-M compositions, but N speech substitutes for it
παράνω (οι παραπάνω) από, πέρα από, etc.
1677. B. With GENITIVE.
1. Of place: over, above:-
Υπέρ
Υπέρ της Γης. γήλοφος ὑπὲρ τῆς κώμης ἦν. στῆναι ὑπὲρ κεφαλής.
Xen. Mem. 3, 8, 9 ὁ ἥλιος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πορεύεται. Polyb. 5, 30, 4 ὑπὲρ τῆς
πόλεως κεῖσθαι.
1678. Raro in P-T, except in Atticistic compositions. Asto popular speech,
it has substituted for it ὑπεράνω (ἐπάνω) now παράνω ἀπό (1491 f. 1675').
1679. 2. Metaphorically.
(a) in behalf of, for :-
στρατηγῶν ὑπὲρ Φιλίππου. Φοβεῖσθαι ὑπέρ τῶν παίδων, Υπέρ της
Ημετέρας ψυχής. Υπέρ πατρίδος μάχεσθαι, ἀποθνῄσκειν. νῦν ὑπὲρ πάντων
ἀγών. λέγειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ βελτίστογ.
397
1680-1689.]
PREPOSITIONS : ὑπέρ, ὑπό
1680. So too in P-M Greek, though often misconstructed with
the accusative, as: Frinch. 34 (+ 1034) Υπέρ τοὺς προλεχθέντας γιαγ
καὶ ὑπὲρ τὰς ἡμετέρας ψυχάς. Otherwise διὰ began to assume this func-
tion as early as G timos (1521. 1534, c).
1681. (b) on account of, for:
ὀργίζεσθαι ὑπὲρ τῶν ΓΕΓΕΝΗΜΕΝΩΝ. χάριν ὑπὲρ τῶν εἰρημένων εἰδέναι.
1681. Hardly popular since P times.
1682. (c) Instead of, for (=ἀντί 1501):
ἐγὼ τοῦθ᾽ ὑπὲρ coῇ ποιήσω. Eur. Alc. 7or. Pl. Apol. 22 Ε ἑαυτὸν
ανερωτῶν ὑπὲρ τοῦ χρησμοῦ. Ael. V. H. 10, 29 τὸν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἄθλος μισθόν.
135, 27 Υπέρ του Γάλακτος παρατιθεῖσαι μέλι.
1683. Uncommon in A, but not rare in P compositions, though
hardly ever current in uncultivated speech (1686).
1684. (1)=περί : concerning, about, on :ἡ ὑπὲρ τοῦ πολέμου
γνώμη.
1685. This use is rare in 4, but becomes more and more common
since, as:
CIA ii. 307 (290 Β. σ.), 6 περὶ ὧν [ἀπαγγέλλει ὁ ἀγωνοθέτης ὑπὲρ τῶν θγειών.
So 390, 8. Polyb. 2, 71, 2 μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι ὑπέρ τιNOC. 1, 2, 3 ἀμφισβητεῖν ὑπέρ
TINOC. 9, 37, 3 φιλοτιμεῖσθαι ὑπέρ τινος, et saope. Arr. An. 1, 5, 3 ἐπειδὴ ἔμαθεν
Υπέρ τῶν Ανταριατῶν πυνθανόμενον ᾿Αλέξανδρον, et passim. App. πρεσβεύειν,
σεμνολογεῖν, ἐκλογεῖσθαι, παρακαλεῖν Υπέρ (beside περί) τιNOC, etc. saepe
(FKrumbholz 42 f.). Paus. ἐρωτῶν, ἔρεσθαι, ἐπέρεσθαι, ἐπικηρυκεύειν, σιωπὴν
ἄγειν, βουλεύεσθαι, στασιάζειν, δικάζειν ote. Υπέρ τινος, saepe (ARügur 5r f.).
Luc. Do Salt. 9 (ii. 273) Υπέρ τοῦ παιδὸς πυνθανόμενος. Phal. Λ. 1o (ii. 197)
ἄλλα μὲν ὑπὲρ ἐμυῇ ἀκηκοώς. Han. Hist. 4, 14, 6 φιλονικία Υπέρ παίδων και
ΣΥΓΓΕΝΩΝ. 3, 12, 1 ἀγγέλλειν Υπέρ σωτηρίας. 7, 6, 6 πεμφθῆναι Υπέρ ασφα-
λείας τοῦ βασιλέως. Proc. passim.
[1685. The monstrous construction ὑπὲρ ἐγὼ οι ὕπερ ἐγώ, found in 2 Cor.
11, 23, rests on au itacistic misspolling for eïnep kyw (1980).]
1686. The frequent interchango of vwèp and repì is due partly to their
affinity, but more particularly to their partial homophony (iper—peri). (Cp.
16154.) Notwithstanding this disadvantage of rivalry and the drawback
of its final p (219), væèp in consequence of its unusual frequency in the
Grook liturgy and prayer-book (εὔχομαι ως δέομαι ὑπέρ τινος), resisted longer
than any other particle of its class. IIonce it occurs in all compositions
down to recent times, though occasionally in a misconstruction, as Louvro
Pap. 21 (+616), η ὑπὲρ αὐταῖς for αὐτῶν. (Cp. 1679.)
Υπό.
1687. Ὑπὸ with Accus. GEN. Dat. : under.
1688. A. With ACCUSATIVE: under.
1. Of Place (chiefly after expressions of motion): under :-
Υπὸ τὰ Δένδρα ἀπῆλθον. ὑπ' αὐτὸ τὸ τεῖχος ἄγειν. ὑπὸ τὸν λόφον. Χen.
Λη. 3, 4, 37 Υπὸ τὴν ἀκρωνυχίαν τοῦ ὄρους ἡ κατάβασις ἦν.
1689. This use of ὑπὸ is very frequent also in P-M compositions,
where morcover the difference of rest and motion is lost sight of
(1698). In N, it has been replaced by the adverb (ὑποκάτω) ἀποκάτω
από (1491 1., 1693).
398
PREPOSITIONS: ÚTÓ[1690-1699.
ὑπό.
.
1690. 2. Of time: towards, about:
ÝTTO NÝKTA. ÝTTO TOYс AYTOYс XPÓNOYC. TO THN EAPINAN PAN.
1691. In P this use is scarce, especially in unscholarly compositions
subsequent to G.
1692. 3. Metaphorically (denoting a dependence, cp. 1698):
under:
ὑφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ποιεῖσθαι τινά ‘to bring under one's power. Υπό ΤΙΝΑ
γίγνεσθαι 'to come under one's power. ὑπάγειν τινὰ ὑπὸ τοὺς NOMOYC.
ἀπὸ ΤΟΝ ΖΥΓΟΝ ἄγειν.
1693. This metaphorical use is still more popular in P Greek
(especially after the retreat of the dative) in a new phraseology: Ŷno
ΤΗΝ ὄψιν ἔχειν Or εἶναι ‘to have or to be under consideration. Υπὸ ΤΗΝ
Öyın λaµßável 'to take into consideration.' But in Nall these relations
are expressed either by (úжoкÚтw) ȧtoкάтw ȧпó (1689), or by some other
turn.
1694. B. With GENITIVE—
1. Of place-(a) from under:-λúew ýпỏ zɣsoŶ, ýnỏ tĤc ámážнс. Ýпỏ
Γῆς ἦλθεν εἰς φῶς.— (1) under, beneath: Υπό Γῆς οἰκεῖν. οὔτ᾽ ἐπὶ γῆς οὔθ᾽
Υπὸ Γης.
1694". This use is rare even in A.
1695. 2. Metaphorically: under the influence of an agency :
(a) With passive and intransitive verbs or notions: by:
Υπό τινος νικᾶσθαι, ἄρχεσθαι, ἀποθνῄσκειν, κακὰ πάσχειν, εὖ ἀκούειν.-So
Υπό κήργκος, ὑπ' αὐλῶν, led by. Υπό φόβον, από Macτίρων, forced by.
(b) Of the efficient cause: owing to, through, out of, from (cp. è§,
1568, 6):- οὐ δύναμαι καθεύδειν από λίπης. Υπό λιμοῇ ἀπόλλυσθαι.
1696. In this double function (a, b), úrò is very common through all
antiquity down to Mtimes. Nevertheless an interchange with anò set
in already during G, and gradually led to the disappearance of vπò
before άnó. (See 1506-9). But mark also the use of the simple genitive
in N o THC пeinac, dipus ktλ., 'I die of hunger, thirst, etc.
1697. C. With Dative: under.
1. Of place (after expressions of rest, ep. 1688, 1): under:-
ὑπὸ τῷ ὄρει, ὑπὸ τῷ τείχει, ἀπὸ τῇ ἀκροπόλει. τὰ ἐπὶ γῆς ὑπὸ τῷ οὐρανῷ ἐστιν.
1698. 2. Metaphorically (denoting a dependence, cp. 1692):
under :-
Υπό τυράννοις, ὑπό τῷ Βασιλεῖ εἶναι. ἀφ' ἑαγτῷ ποιεῖσθαι τινά. Υπό ΤΙΝΙ
γίγνεσθαι.
1698. Altogothor the datival construction of vπò shows signs of retroat,
over since 4, bofore the accusatival construction. The former is raro in
Polybios (he uses it only in standing expressions), and entiroly absent in
the NT writings, as well as in all other subsequent unscholarly composi-
tions. On the other hand, it is more or loss popular with the Atticists,
though ovon they do not always use it in a correct sense (e. g. Luc. YпO TH
ΑΓΝΟἷς ἐλαυνόμενον, ἀπὸ νόμῳ τι δρᾶν, από μια τῷ ὁρμῇ, etc. Cp. AMosnil 39 f.).
་
1699. s with Accusative of person in the sonse of πpós (1655):
Antiph. 5, 20 (ἔπλεον) ἐγὼ ὡς τὸν πατέρα. Cll ii. 86 (314-364 Β. C.). 3
πορευθήσονται οἱ πρέσβεις ὡς βασιλέα. So too Xen. An. 1, 2, 4. ib. 24
πέμπῃ τινὰ ὡς αὐτόν. Mith. viii. 211 (325 Β. C.), 39 αφικόμενος ὡς Διονύσιον.
399
1700-1703.]
CONJUNCTIONS.
B. CONJUNCTIONS.
1700. Although the P-N history of this class of particles has been
determined by the same morphological and syntactical agencies
which have operated on the prepositions (1487 ff.), the conjunctions
exhibit this further peculiarity that all postpositives among them have,
in the course of P-B, one after another, disappeared from the living
language, their office having been either taken by kindred prepositives,
or, more generally, given up altogether; in a few cases again, as in
Toɩyapoûv and Toívu, before retreating, they became prepositives (as NT,
Clem. R. Cor. 15). To an advanced stage of the phenomenon, even as
early as H, points the testimony of Dion. Thrax, who states (p. 96, ed.
Uhlig) that expletive particles or παραπληρωματικοὶ (σύνδεσμοί) εἰσιν ὅσοι
Μέτρον ἢ κόσμοΥ ἕνεκεν παραλαμβάνονται. εἰσὶ δὲ οἵδε δή, ῥά, νύ, που, τοί,
θήν, ἄρ, δήτα, πέρ, πώ, μήν, ἄν, αὖ, νῦν, οὖν, κίν, yet. Subjoined is here a
av, yé!!]]
list of the principal of these postpositives with indication of their
proportionate frequency in Thucydides, Xenophon, Polybios, and the
NT. (For av see 1774.)
Xen. Anab.
Now Test.
Polyb.
Thue.| I-III. Pro-
port.
I-V.
as far
as Col.
whole
Thue. I-III
X en. Anab.
Polyb.
pro- I-V.
port.
Now Test.
as far
as Col.
whole
apa. 38
4 +24
I
48
48
(also proposi
tivo.)
αν
μέν..
μέντοι
μήν
··
69 29
±1750 1280 1420 1900
£170
164
7
6
Ye
170
37
γοῦν 19
δέ
δή
188
δήπου
δῆτα
δῆθεν
γάρ. 1116 173
±1050 ±900 ±980 ±1200
+220 131
I ±6. 6
±4560±900 ±5400 ±4000 ±2470 2800
οὖν..
17
236
167
+40 156
8001
199
IO
πέρα
210
(incl.compounds)
±4.00
34 +200 250
324 437
71
49 C
79
216
74.
+445
(±6) 2
100
6
6
τοί ..
τοιγαροῦν
3÷
I
τοίνυν
+18
4.
±24
13
2
2
(also proposi-
tive.)
7 ±42 3
4
4
1701. The course of the process thus delineated may be best illus-
trated if we class under separate groups all associated items and then
follow their historical changes since A antiquity.
1702. The conjunctions, that is particles which connect sentences
or members of sentences with each other, are either co-ordinating
or subordinating. (Cp. 1103.)
1703. In dealing here with the section of conjunctions, it will be well
to bear in mind a very crucial point which, next to phonopathy, has
been the most important factor in the PN history of this group of
particles. I mean the disinclination natural to popular speech for
periodic structure involving mental strain, and the decided preference
for parataxis (1930). In other words, the leading peculiarity of popular
Greek, as that of all popular languages, has been to place in the
a
[4] Cp. Schol. Dion, Thr. b Bekk An. 970, το where ἀλλὰ μήν, τοίνυν, τοιγάρ, του
γαροῦν, are also reckoned among the παραπληρωματικοὶ σύνδεσμοι. Further Schol.
ib. 920, 24 παραπληρωματικοὶ δὲ οὗτοι λέγονται, ὅσοι παρόντες οὐδὲν ὠφελεῖν δύν
ναται ούτε μὴν χωρισθέντες λυμαίνονται. οὗτοι δὲ παραλαμβάνονται τοῖς ποιηταῖς ἢ
διὰ τὴν στενότητα ἢ διὰ καλλωπισμὸν τῆς φράσεως. Op. Apoll. Constr. 266, 20.
400
CONJUNCTIONS: καί, τέ, δέ.
[1703–1706.
simplest way of juxtaposition, that is in the form of little independent
clauses, the several parts of a narrative which in the more reflective
literary style are generally subordinated either to a leading sentence
or to each other by means of conjunctions of more specific meaning,
thus forming a complex whole. This popular or paratactic construction
characterizes also the style of Homer, and to a considerable extent of
Herodotos, where it is effected by means of several little copulative
conjunctions. On the other hand, in A artistic literature (05) the
number of paratactic conjunctions is limited to kaì and rẻ (also dé),
and since P only to kai (also P-B dé). Hence connexion by means of
kai appears, from G onwards, times without number where A writers
would have used either circumstantial participles or dependent clauses
(2I4I". I7II. I487b. 1930. 1939. Cp. AButtmann 361).
I. CO-ORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS.
A. COPULATIVE: καί, τέ, δέ,οὐδέ, μηδέ, οὔτε, μήτε.
1704. 1. Kaí, always prepositive, is either unemphatic and
proclitic and,' 'also,' et; or emphatic and orthotone: 'and
also,' 'even,' atque (hence kai-Kaí, 'both-and,' et-et).
Tè is always postpositive and enclitic: 'and,'-que.
Kaì connects, in a free and easy manner, a word or clause with
another similar, preceding or following; re generally conjoins
a clause with another either following it or parallel to it; kaì
is the most common particle (1703. 17c6. 1710), and the com-
monest word after the article in the Greek language, Te is
comparatively infrequent.
1704". Liko English and, rai connects two or more co-ordinate members
of a clause, or two or more whole co-ordinate clauses. But while English
and is generally usod only once, before the last member, Greek al is repeatod
overy time, as : Xon. Cyr. 1, 2, 1 φιλανθρωπότατος καὶ φιλομαθέστατος καὶ
φιλοτιμότατος. Dom. 9, 72 ἐγὼ καὶ Πολύευκτος καὶ Ἡγήσιππος καὶ Κλειτόμαχος
καὶ Λυκούργος καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι πρέσβεις περιήλθομεν. Pl.. Crit. 47 Β ταύτῃ ἄρα αὐτῷ
πρακτέον καὶ γυμναστέον καὶ ἐδεστέον γε καὶ ποτέον.
So still in N: ἐγὼ καὶ σὺ καὶ ὁ ἀδερφός σου. πεινᾷ καὶ διψᾷ καὶ κρυώνει καὶ
πονεί.
1704. In the froquent combinations rai ɣáp, kai µýv, kai is very often
redundant, serving merely to place the postpositive ydp or µǹy at the head
of the sentence.
1705. Aè ‘and,' originally adversative (1709. 1732), is post-
positive and orthotone.-For its history see 1744" f.
1706. The close affinity or synonymy of the two conjunctions kai
and ré, the unqualified preponderance of a through all classical
antiquity over its associate, and its greater suitability in construction
as a prepositive, were advantages which could not but determine
the fate of Té. For the latter copulative particle, though often
convenient and useful as a variety of the unduly frequent kai,
began to retreat from the common language as early as P times,
and the NT writers apart from the scholarly Luke-make but
a limited use of it. In particular the combination ré-ré, so favourite
with A writers, appears but rarely in NT (Acts 17, 4; 26, 16; Hebr.
6, 2), except in compounds (εἴτε, εάν τε, οὔτε, μήτε).
401
D d
1707-1711.]
CONJUNCTIONS: τέ, καί.
1707. On the other hand, as a precursory attendant of Kai, Té
appears not infrequently in NT Greek, and even in the unscholarly
compositions of the first post-christian centuries.
ἐσθίειν τε καὶ πίνειν.
Luke 12, 45
Matt. 22, 1ο πονηρούς τε καὶ ἀγαθούς. So 27, 8. 28, 12.
Luke 22, 66 ἀρχιερεῖς τε καί γραμματεῖς. So 2, 16. 21,
John 2, 15. Acts 1, 1; 1, 8; 1, 13; 2, 3; etc.
II. 23, 15. 24, 20.
Tho. 18, 14, 15, 13;
I
Acta
30, 18 τὰ καὶ παράδοξα καμοί τε καὶ τῷ ὄχλῳ φανέντα.
1708. With the close of T, if not earlier, Tè may be considered as extinct
from the living language. This can be at least inferred partly from its
decreasing frequency in unscholarly writings, and partly from its misuse,
as: Acta Tho. 15, 13 τά τε πρὸς τὴν ζωὴν αὐτοῦ τε καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν ἐργατῶν.
1709. Closely associated with kaì is dé, a particle which, owing to its
original and A function, is generally classed among the adversative
conjunctions (1705). However, as early as A times, it had almost sunk
to the level of a copulative particle, and it is in this one function,
denoting mostly a progress or transition from one clause to another,
that it lingered down to B times, when it finally shared the fate of
all other postpositive particles (1700). With all that, its retreat from
popular speech probably dates from a much earlier period, seeing that
the NT writers make but a limited use of it. (AButtmann 363.)
1710. With the retreat and final disappearance of rè and de, kai
of necessity became the only copulative conjunction (in affirmative
speech). But this circumstance alone does not afford an adequate
idea of the scope and frequency gained by this particle. In conse-
quence of the decided predilection of popular language for parataxis
(1703), and its ever growing influence on the literary style, kai
had, as early as P, established itself as the ordinary representative
in cases where the literary language had been wont to resort to
subordinate discourse (1703. 1930) or participial construction (2141).
With the opening of G, its extension in the directions just indicated
assumed still greater proportions, and thus contributed very much
to the peculiar complexion of Biblical Greek and other unscholarly
compositions. But we are not on this account warranted in assuming
that kai has appropriated the functions and meanings of the particles
and constructions superseded by it. Notwithstanding its very great
extension, kai has through all times retained its original and proper
force and, also. (Cp. AButtmann 361; GBWiner 542 f.)
1711. The principal P-N features of kaì may be summarized in the
following sections:
1. Kai joins two or more co-ordinate clauses, one or more of which
would have been expressed in the A reflective style by different con-
junctions or by participial construction (1703. 1710. 2165), as:
Į
Matt. 7, 25 καὶ κατέβη ἡ βροχὴ καὶ ἦλθον οἱ ποταμοὶ καὶ ἔπνευσαν οἱ ἄνεμοι
καὶ προσέπεσαν τῇ οἰκίᾳ ἐκείνῃ καὶ οὐκ ἔπεσεν. So ib. 27. 14, 11 καὶ ἠνέχθη ἡ
κεφαλὴ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ πίνακι καὶ ἐδόθη τῷ κορασίῳ καὶ ἤνεγκεν τῇ μητρὶ αὐτῆς. ib.
14 f. Mark 1, 12-14. Luke 13, 17 ff., 18, 32 ff. John 2, 13; 16. 10, 3.
I Cor.
12, 5-6. Rev. 6, 2. 8, 12-16. 9, 1-4 (where nine raí). Matt. 26, 45 kabeúdere
TÒ XOLπdy Kai ȧvaraveole; [where the interrogation is wrongly omitted; so
Mark 14, 41] ἰδοὺ ἤγγικεν ἡ ὥρα και (=ἐν ᾖ) ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται
εἰς χεῖρας ἁμαρτωλῶν. Mark 15, 25 ἦν δὲ ὥρα τρίτη καὶ ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν.
Luke 23, 24. John 4, 35 ; 5, 1; 2, 13 καὶ ἐγγὺς ἦν τὸ πάσχα τῶν Ἰουδαίων
Kai (=őte) åvéßn els 'Iepooóλvµa d'Inovûs. 11, 5. Hebr. 8, 8 ( = èv als).-
Matt. 5, 15 οὐδὲ καίουσιν λύχνον καί τιθέασιν αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ
402
CONJUNCTIONS : καί.
[1711-1716.
τὴν λυχνίαν, καὶ (= and so) λάμπει πᾶσιν τοῖς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ. 23, 32. Hebr. 3, 19.
Luke rr, gr. Callin. 80, 27 ὁ κύριος ἰάσατο αὐτὸν καὶ ἀπῆλθε βλέπων. 99, 26
II,
ἔχει ὑγιᾶναι καί εὐθὺς ἀπόλυσον αὐτόν. 102, 11 ἐψώμιζεν αὐτὸν καὶ μόλις
ἐδέχετο, et passim (cp. id. 1o7, 20-26).
1712. Only in appearance does καὶ stand for final ἵνα (or ὅπως), as: Sept.
Nehem. 13, 9, 19 εἶπα καὶ ἔκλεισαν τὰς πύλας. ΝΤ Rom. 10, 20 Ησαΐας δὲ ἀποτολμᾷ
και λέγει. Chron. 74, 2 ἐκέλευσε καὶ ἐκαύθη ἡ μυσαρὰ κεφαλή ; Vita SA g* E
κελεύει καὶ ἐκβάλλουσιν τὴν ἅλυσιν τοῦ αὐχένος. For all such cases, numerous
though they are, constitute a pregnant construction or brachylogy. Thus the
above instances are in reality condensed sentences : εἶπα ἵνα κλείσωσι τὰς πύλας
καὶ ἔκλεισαν αὐτάς—Ησαΐας δὲ ἀποτολμᾷ λέγειν καὶ λέγει—ἐκέλευσεν ἵνα καυθῇ
ἡ μυσαρὰ αὐτοῦ κεφαλὴ καὶ ἐκαύθη οι ἐκέλευσε καυθῆναι τὴν μυσαρὴν αὐτοῦ
κεφαλὴν καὶ ἐκάηκελεύει αὐτοὺς ἐκβαλεῖν καὶ ἐκβάλλουσιν (ep. εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος
for εἴτις ἄλλος καὶ ὅστις ἄλλος 1980). For further examples see Sept. Lev. 14,
5; Num. 5, 2; Sap. 2, 6; Eus. Alex. 385 A; Acta Andr. et Matt. 4; Mal. 39, 8;
Porph. Cer. 474, 13.
1713. 2. Καὶ very commonly stands where artificial or polished
style would have used either a simple adversative particle (δέ, ἀλλά,
μέντοι), or the correlative μὲνδέ, as:
Luke 20, 19 καὶ ἐζήτησαν οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς ἐπιβαλεῖν ἐπ᾿ αὐτὸν
τὰς χεῖρας ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν λαόν. Mark 12, 12 ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν
κρατῆσαι καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον. Matt. II, 25. Mark 7, 24. John 8, 49.
6, 36. 17, 11. Jas. 4, 2.
I Th. 2, 18 ήθελήσαμεν ἐλθεῖν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐγὼ μὲν
Παῦλος καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς, καὶ ἐνέκοψεν ἡμᾶς ὁ σατανάς. However, similar cases
are not wanting even in A: cp. RKühner ii.² 792.)
1714. 3. Καὶ frequently introduces the apodosis of a temporal clause
denoting as soon as, when. This usage, however, is not peculiar to
P-N, but rather a continuation and extension of the A practice of so
introducing the apodosis in combinations like οὐκ ἔφθην—καί (1793.
2115), ἅμα—καί, ἤδη—καί, οὔπω—καί, ὡς καί ' as soon as.
Th. 2, 93 ὡς δὲ ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς καί ἐχώρουν εὐθύς. Xon. Hell. 7, 1, 28 ἅμα
ταῦτ᾽ ἔλεγε καὶ ἀπῄει. Λn. 1, 8, 8 ἤδη τε ἦν μέσον ἡμέρας καὶ οὔπω καταφανείς
ἦσαν οἱ πολέμιοι. Polyb. 1, 24, 7 ἅμα τῆς θαλάσσης ἥψαντο καὶ τῶν κατὰ
η
Σαρδόνα πραγμάτων εὐθέως ἀντείχοντο. NT Luke 7, 12 ὡς δὲ ἤγγισεν τῇ
πύλῃ τῆς πόλεως καί ἰδοὺ ἐξεκομίζετο τεθνηκὼς μονογενὴς υἱός. 2, 21 ὅτε
ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ τοῦ περιτεμεῖν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ
Ιησούς. Soz. I, 14. (p. 30, 20) ἅμα γὰρ ὁ βοῦς ἀπεδόθη καὶ τὸ πάθος τὸν παῖδα
ἀπέλιπεν. (Cp. Callin. 138, 15 οὐ παρῆλθον ἡμέραι τριάκοντα καὶ εὐθέως γέγονε
χάλαζα.) See also 1793.
1715. The opinion generally hold (AButtmann 362 ; GBWiener 357) that καὶ
in NT Greok introduces also tho apodosis of other subordinate, especially con-
ditional, sontoncos is erroneous, since the data adduced (Acts 13, 18; Phil.
1, 22; 2 Cor. 2, 2; 11, 12; Jas. 4, 15; Rev. 3, 20; 10, 7) are wholly irrelevant.
Moreovor in two of these instancos (Jas. 4, 15; 2 Cor. 11, 12) waì is followed by a
second correlativo kai and thus obviously means cl-ct, both-and, as well as.
1716. 4. Kai very often follows indefinite relatives (whoever, when-
ever, etc.), and is mostly attended by the modal particle àv (in G-B
confounded with ἐάν 1774) to intensify the generality of the case
(2024). Kai then, or rather kal tv (káv), is equivalent to A simple av,
οὖν, δήποτε, δηποτοῦν (-cumque, -ever, soever). This colloquialism is
now very common in the form kaì đ" (Kid') or kai vá (1771 ff.), and
bears some analogy to the A pregnant construction εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος
and the like (1712. 1980), inasmuch as ὅποιος καὶ ἂν ἔρθῃ originally
meant, and still may be resolved into, ὅποιος ἔρθῃ καὶ ἂν ἔρθῃ.
403
Dad 2
1716-1718.]
CONJUNCTIONS : καί.
·
Epict. 3, 3, 9 ὅσον καὶ θέλει (rather -λη). Iren. 1, 6, 2 τὸ πνευματικὸν ἀδύ-
νατον φθορὰν καταδέξασθαι κἂν ὁποίαις συγκαταγένωνται πράξεσι.
Dio C. 38,
2, 3 ὑπώπτευον γὰρ αὐτὸν ἐφ᾽ ᾧπερ που καὶ ἐγίγνετο. Eus. ii. 725 Β ὅποι και
βούλοιντο. Mal. 33, 2 τὰς τῶν προβάτων ἐρέας οἵαι κἂν ἦσαν, ταύτας ἐποίουν
ἱμάτια και εφόρουν. So Chron. 79, 14.
3/
Ν: ὅποιος καὶ ἂν (κι Ν) ἔρθῃ, ὅποιος καὶ νά 'ρθῃ (beside ὅποιος ἔρθη) whoever
may come.” ὅ,τι καὶ ΝΕ (καὶ ' or κι) θέλῃ, ὅ,τι καὶ θέλῃ whatever ho wishes.
ὅπου καὶ ἂν (KZN) εἶνε ' wherever he may be.” ὅντεν καὶ ἂν ἔρθῃ whenever
he may come. Sachl. 1, 7 εἰς ὅσα καί ἄν σου λέγω.
1717. 5. On a similar principle, καὶ in G-N often follows the condi-
tional av (äve"), as a more intensive particle. In that case av kaì is not
concessive (1993 f.), but simply an emphatic form of the tiny' av, as:
Clement. 32 Α εἰ δὲ καὶ τύχοι. Callim. 6o, I εἰ δὲ καὶ βούλοιτο. 63, 6. 92, 10
εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες. Αpophth. 361 ο ἐὰν δὲ καὶ συμβῇ. [Cp. Xon. Cyr. 1, 3, 12 ἣν
ǹv
ἄρχων τις τύχῃ σοι καὶ ἁμάρτῃ πότερον ἐᾷς ἄρχειν ἢ ἄλλον καθίστης ἀντ᾿ αὐτοῦ ;
Ν: ἂν καὶ τὸν ἀπαντήξης ‘if you meet him perchanco.] For the sake of
further intensification, M-N inserts ἴσως οι τύχῃ (also λάχῃ) : ἂν ἴσως (ἀνίσως)
καί, ἂν τύχῃ καί, ἄν λάχῃ καί, as : ἀνίσως κ᾽ ἔρθῃ, ἂν τύχῃ κ' ἔρθῃ, ἄνε λάχη
κ' ἔρθῃ, 'should he come (1749. 2049). The place of τύχη or λάχῃ and
lows is also frequently takon by eive (M éve), but whether this elve (eve) is an
actual insertion or a development from ave" (an amplified form of av 132.
177), and consequent misconception-ÅNEN kai rdv åπavthons, ånen' kai
τὸν ἀπαντήσῃς—is a point which requires further inquiry.
•
Suchl. 1, 130 ἂν ἔΝ᾽ καὶ ὀμύσῃ ψῶμαν. 2, 6ι καὶ ἂν εἶν᾿ καὶ φαίνεται κἀνείς.
220. 273. 337. (Cp. Chron. Mor. Ρrol. 566 ἂν ἔν᾿ ὅτι ἀρέσουν τον.)
1717. 6. So further in N ἐπεὶ καί, ἐπειδὴς καί (1739), ἀπῆς (καί), ἀφοῦ (καί)
A since, μὴν πᾷς οι μήν πας (μήμπας) καὶ ' lest (1749. 2049).
1718. 1. Different from the above is the case where the article is
followed by a with an epexegetic apposition and so corresponds to
alias; or where a relativo is conceived as a demonstrativo, and so is fol-
lowed by καί, as if the clauso so appouded were equally important and
co-ordinato with tho antecedent. This apparently superfluous ai is in
roality intensive or additive (eliam, qui idem-also, morcover) and serves to
emphasize the importance of the otherwise relativo clause. The phono-
menon, though not foreign to 4, bocame a favourite mode of expression
among G-B writers who seem to have been influenced by tho parallel and
preponderating Latin usage of qui et. But whether it was common in
tho uncultivated popular speech of the time is open to doubt, seeing that
N shows no genuine traces of it.
ΓΙ
Xen. Mom. 1, 2, 47 τὰ δὲ τῆς πόλεως ἔπραττον ὧνπερ ἕνεκεν καὶ Σωκράτει
προσῆλθον. 1, 2, 31 ἐξ ὧν δὴ καὶ ἐμίσει τὸν Σωκράτην ὁ Κριτίας. Λn. 2, 1, 22
καὶ ὑμῖν ταὐτὰ δοκεῖ ὅπερ καὶ τῷ βασιλεῖ, Human-Puchstein Roise in
Kleinas. 283, 14 'Αρταξέρξου τον και Μνήμονος. Dion. Thr. in Bukk. An.
637, 1 'Αλέξανδρος ὁ καὶ Πάρις. ib. 3 ὃ καὶ διώνυμον, ὃ καὶ πευστικόν. Louvre
Pap 7 (99) B.σ.), 4 Ασκληπιάδι τῇ καὶ Σεν[ιμουθίν]. 10, 3 ᾧ ὄνομα Ερμων c
καὶ Νείλος. 14, 3 Ερμίου τοῦ καί Πετενεφώτου, ole. NT Hobr. 7, 4 θεωρεῖτε
δὲ πηλίκος οὗτος ᾧ καὶ δεκάτην ᾽Αβραὰμ ἔδωκεν ἐκ τῶν ἀκροθινίων. 6, 7. 8, 6.
Luke ro, 30 λῃσταῖς περιέπεσεν οἳ καὶ ἐκδύσαντες αὐτὸν καὶ πληγὰς ἐπιθέντες
ἀπῆλθον. Acts I
1ο άνδρες παρειστήκεισαν αὐτοῖς οἳ καὶ εἶπαν (α). Latin
qui et). 10, 39. 24, 6 ὃς καὶ ἐκρατήσαμεν. Gal. 3, 10. 50 ὡς καὶ Acts 11, 17;
ön
2, So wc
r Cor. 7, 8. 9, 5, etc. καθώς καί Rom. 15, 7. I Cor. 13, 12.
Eph. 4, 17, 32.5, 2. AIO kai Luke 1, 35. 11. 49. Acts 1o, 29. Ro. 1, 24.
CIA III 140 (1801), ο Ασμένου του και
Acla
Αγρίππου. 2842 ο Δαμόθεμις ὃς καὶ Ἡδύς, ep. ib. index p. 388.
Tho. 2, 3 Θωμᾷ τῷ καὶ Διδύμῳ. 3, 10 Ἰούδαν τὸν καὶ Θωμᾶν. 30, 19 τὰ
Hebr. 13, 12.
Phil. 2, 9.
2 Cor. 1, 14.
404
καί οὐδε, μηδέ οὔτε, μήτε. [1718-1723.
καὶ παράδοξα κάμοί τε καὶ τῷ ὄχλῳ φανέντα, ἃ καὶ ἀπόκρυφα τοῖς πολλοῖς τυγ-
χάνειν ειώθασι. 44, 13 ἀλλ᾽ ὅπερ καὶ ἔχεις τοῖς δεομένοις παρέχεις. 55, 17.
59, 13 εὐχαριστοῦσιν σοι οἵсTINAC καὶ κατηξίωσας γενέσθαι οἰκητήρια τῆς
ἐπουρανίου σου δωρεάς. 63, 32 ὡςατως δὲ καὶ ἡ ἡμῶν θυγάτηρ ἢ καὶ πάσης
οἶδεν τῆς κτήσεώς μου πρωτεύειν, et passim. FTrinch. 34 (+ 1034) τὰ
χωράφια τα ἅπερ καὶ ἔχομεν. (Cp. WSchmid iii. 338f.)
1718". This additive force of rai becomes more evident in the case, rather
common during G-M, where it follows the kindred propositions μeтd and
σύν, thus giving rise to such contaminatory and pregnant combinations, as :
(μετὰ πολλῶν ἄλλων + καὶ πολλοὶ ἄλλοι) μετὰ καὶ πολλῶν ἄλλων, (σὺν ἄλλοις πολ-
λοῖς + καὶ πολλοὶ ἄλλοι) ΣΥΝ καὶ ἄλλοις πολλοῖς. NT Phil. 4, 3 Μετὰ καὶ Κλή-
μεντος. Clem. ad Cor. i. 65, 1 ΕΝ και Φορτουνάτῳ. Mal. 440, 14 Θεοδώρα
Μετὰ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἀγαθῶν ἐποίησε καὶ τοῦτο. Porph. 293, 9 Μετὰ καὶ τοὺς
τῶν μερῶν προύχοντας. Frinch. II (+ 1000) Cν καὶ τῆς διακρατήσεως. 15
(+ 1015) Μετά και χωραφίων.
1719. 2. For variety's sake G-B scribes often replace or rather para-
phrase ai in the above combination by its equivalent classical associate
δέ, an alternative which, as a matter of course, is unknown to N speech.
Moschion 55 (p. 26) εἴ τις δ᾽ ἂν ἐξ αὐτῆς ἔξω ἐξελθεῖν ἄρξηται. Eus. ii. 385 B ἐξ
οἵας δ᾽ οὖν ἀποστάσεως. 884 Α τημελεῖν ὁποῖον δ᾽ ἂν βούληται θεῖον. Acta Petri
et Pauli 181, 3 ἵνα ὅπου δ᾽ ἂν εὑρεθῇς ἀποκτανθῇς. Apophth. 336 c καὶ οἵαν δ᾽
ἂν ὥραν δόξῃ τῷ ἐχθρῷ αὐτοῦ, εὐκόλως αὐτὸν ῥίπτει κάτω. Acta Petri et Pauli
181, 4 ἵνα ὅπου δ᾽ ἂν εὑρεθῇς ἀποκτανθῇς. Acta Pauli et Theclue 253, 4 ὅπου
δ᾽ ἂν πορεύῃ. JMoschos 2968 A ὅπου δ᾽ ἂν ἀπήρχετο, ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ. Mal. 422,
16 ὁποίου δ᾽ ἂν ὑπάρχωσι μέρους. 437, 13 ἐξεῖναι αὐτῷ παραιτεῖσθαι τὴν κληρο-
νομίαν ὅτε δ᾽ ἂν βούληται. Cedr. i. 624 ὅπου δ᾽ ἂν ἦγε τὸ ῥεῦμα. Alchem.
141, 14 ὅπου δ᾽ ἂν τὰ ἐργαλεῖα κείνται. ib. 17 ἕως δ᾽ ἂν τῶν αἰθαλῶν παύσεται
ἡ ἀναγωγή. 343, 4 οἷον δ᾽ ἂν καὶ βούλῃ. 380, 8 εἴ τι δ᾽ ἂν θέλῃς, et passim.
Narr. Zos. 98, 7 ἐπορευόμην ὅπου δ᾽ ἂν οὐκ ἐγίνωσκον.
1720. 6. Kaì in T-B sometimes connects a participle with its leading verb,
as : Mal. 387, 2 δεξαμένη παρὰ τῆς ἰδίας αὐτῆς μητρός γράμματα λάθρα, καὶ
παρεκάλεσε τὸν βασιλέα Ζήνωνα ἵνα ἀπολυθῇ ἀπὸ καστελλίου. For this solecism
see 2168, b.
Ο ΔΕ, ΜΗΔέ; οὔτε—οτε.
1721. By means of oude and undè 'also not,' and not,' 'nor,ˆ
'not even,' nec (the former distinguished from the latter as in
1801 f.), a negative continuation is added to an antecedent
simple negation, sometimes also to an affirmative notion.
1722. From the time whon οὐ and μὴ wero amplified to οὐδὲν and μηδέν
(1798 f.), these adverbs lost ground before their correlative synonyms
οὔτε and μήτε (1723).
1723. By οὔτε--οὔτε and μήτε μήτε, neque, two or more
parallel members of a negative clause are connected into a
whole.
1723. Both οὔτε οὔτε and μήτε μήτε, neither-nor, have been in
unbroken use through all times, and are still current in N. They
have even acquired, since G times, a considerable extension at the
expense of οὐδὲ and μηδέ (cp. 1722). Hence we often meet in GB
with a single οὔτε οι μήτε, and this practice is now very common
in N speech.
Luke
Mark 3, 20 ὥστε μὴ δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς Μήτε ἄρτον φαγεῖν.
So 5, 3.
12, 26 εἰ οὖν οὔτε ἐλάχιστον δύνασθε. 20, 36 οὔτε γὰρ ἀποθανεῖν ἔτι δύνανται.
405
1723-1730.] n
—ἤ, εἴτε, ἐάν τε, οὔτε, μήτε.
Acts 4, 12 οὔτε γὰρ ὄνομά ἐστιν. 1 Cor. 3, 2 οὔπω γὰρ ἐδύνασθε, ἀλλ᾽ οὔτε ἔτι
νῦν δύνασθε. So Jas. 3, 12. Rev. 5, 3. 5, 4 οὐδεὶς ἄξιος εὑρέθη ἀνοίξαι . . . ΟΥΤΕ
βλέπειν. 12, 8 οὐκ ἴσχυσεν οὔτε τύπος εὑρέθη. So 20, 4.2 Thoss. 2, 2 εἰς τὸ μὴ
ταχέως σαλευθῆναι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ νοὸς Μήτε θροείσθαι. Clem. R. ad Cor.
3, 4 ΜΗΔΕ
πορεύεσθαι ΜΗΔὲ πολιτεύεσθαι. Callin. 92, 2 Οὐ δύναται πολεμῆσαι οὔτε ἀπαλ.
λαγῆναι. 107, το οὐ κοινωνῶ αὐτῷ οὔτε ἀναφέρω τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ. 89, 17 εἰρήνη
αὐτὸν οὐ τρέφει οὔτε ποιεί. 89, 25. 122, 9 μὴ λαβὼν Μήτε κατειρηνεύσας.
1724. In most of the above, as well as in other similar passagos, Biblical
critics, adhering rigidly to the norm of A, have unnecessarily substituted οὐδὲ
and μηδὲ for the genuine οὔτε and μήτε.
B. DISJUNCTIVE PARTICLES.
1725. I. H ‘or; H—ἤ eithermor. It is still fully proserved
in N.
1726. 2. εἴτε εἴτε ‘whether or. It is used in a plurality of
conditions amongst which a choice has to be made.
1726. It still obtains in N, though it is ofton mistakon for a strong
-ή. (So evon Callin. 62, 2ο εἴτε τραῦμα εἶχεν ᾖ τινα αρρωστίαν.)
1727. 3. ἐάν τε ἐάν τε (ἄν τεἄν τε, often preceded by καί :
κἄν τεκἄν τε, 1716) ‘whether or. It is identical with εἴτεεἴτε.
1727. This combination was even in / loss frequent than εἴτε εἴτε (ep.
177r fr., then ἐὰν . . . εἰ δὲ μή, 1983). In the course of P timos it retreatedl
more and moro into the background, so that in the latter part of G, it had
already lost all touch with popular speech. It hardly occurs in the NT
(only once in Rom. 14, 8 ἐάν τε ζῶμεν ἐάν τε ἀποθνῄσκωμεν ; while εἴτεεἴτε
occurs 4r timos ; cp. also Const. Apost. 6, 17 και ζῶσιν αὐτῶν αἱ γαμεταὶ κα
τεθνάσι)—and is entirely absent from N speech.
C
1728. The optional disjunctives εἴτε-εἴτε, ἐάν τε-ἐάν τε are often
strengthened by the additive καί : as : Pl. Menon 71 Β εἴτε καλὺς
εἴτε πλούσιος εἴτε καὶ γενναῖος ἐστὶν εἴτε καὶ τἀναντία τούτων. Lys. 212 c
ἐάν τε καὶ ἀντιφιλῆται εάν τε καὶ μισῆται. Dio C. 45, 43, 4 δοῦλοι γάρ εἰσι
ἄν τ᾽ ἐθέλωσιν ἄν τε καὶ μή.
1729. Another moro omphatic modo of oxpressing option among con-
ditional cases which appears sinco G, is rosorted to by simply dropping ere
or ἐάν τε and thus eflecting a closer copulativo connexion. This occurs
notably in the phrase θέλεις οὐ θέλεις, or rather θέλῃς οὐ θέλῃς (1988), willy
nilly, as : Epict. 3, 9, 16 θέλεις οὐ θέλεις velis nolis Apophth. 396 Α θέλεις
οὐ θέλεις οὐκ ἀφῶ σε. Epict. 3, 3, 3 θέλει ο θέλει. So M. Anton. 11, 15. Porph.
Adm. 117, 18 απελθε μετὰ τοῦ πλούτου σου θέλης εἰς τὴν χώραν σου θέλμα
ἀλλαχοῦ. Alchom. 326, το θέλημα εἰς κασσίτερον θέλῃ εἰς χάλκωμαν. 348, 13
θέλης ὑπὸ μαλθακοῦ πυρὸς θέλῃς ὑπὸ ἀπαύστου πυρός. IStaph. 1, 4 θέλης
τὰ κουκκία του θέλῃς τὰ φύλλα του. Cp. Theophil. 1, 8 (1o36 Β) τότε πιστεύσεις
θέλων καὶ Με θέλων. Vita SA g* ο θέλων κἂν μὴ θέλων.
1729". This turn gradually bocamo moro and more popular and is now
widosproad in N speech, as: θέλης δε θέλης, ἔρθης Δὲν ἔρθης, ΠΕΙΝΑΣ
Δεν πεινάς. So further καλός κακός, μικρός μεγάλος, πολλὰ ὀλίγα, Αγ
τρεῖς, πέντ' ἕξι, σήμερα αύριο. Τhat the copulativo composition originated
in a further contraction of this copulation is very probablo (1156).
1730. 4. οὔτε - οὔτε, μήτε μήτε, neither nor. On those negativo
disjunctives see 1723-4.
406
PARTICLES, ADVERSATIVE.
[1731-1735.
C. ADVERSATIVE PARTICLES.
1731. These are: (α) ἀλλὰ (P also πλήν), ' but ';ὅμως 'still,
‘yet';—εἰ μὴ or ἐὰν μή (ἂν μή), πλήν, χωρίς, ἐκτὸς οι παρεκτός,
πάρεξ ' except, save all prepositive.
26
(β) δέ ‘but," μέντοι 'yet, still
postpositive.
1732. Regarding P-N usage, it should be remembered that popular
speech very ofton discards the adversative relation, preferring the para-
tactic construction by means of καί (1703. 1710. 1713).
1733. Besides its proper and general function as an adversative
particle, ἀλλὰ “but was, even in A, occasionally used in the excep-
tive sense of ειμή, πλήν, ' except, save. (RKühner ii. 823 f. & 825.)
1
Φ 275 ἄλλος δ᾽ οὔτις μοι τόσον αἴτιος Οὐρανιώνων, ἀλλὰ φίλη μήτηρ. Soph.
O. R. 1331 ἔπαισε δ᾽ αὐτόχειρ νιν οὔτις ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ. So Eur. Hipp. 638. Xon.
An. 6, 4, 2 ἐν δὲ τῷ μέσῳ ἄλλη μὲν πόλις οὐδεμία οὔτε φιλία οὔτε Ελληνίς, ἀλλὰ
Θράκες καὶ Βιθυνοί. Pl. Prot. 354 Β ἔχετέ τι ἄλλο τέλος λέγειν, εἰς ὃ ἀποβλέ-
ψαντες αὐτὰ ἀγαθὰ καλεῖτε, ἀλλὰ ἡδονάς τε καὶ λύπας; Polyb. 10, 11, 5 οὐχ
ἑτέροις τισὶ χρώμενος ἀπολογισμοῖς ἀλλ᾽ οἷς ἐτύγχανε πεπεικὼς αὐτόν. Εpict.
1, 11, 33 οὔτε ἄλλο τι τῶν τοιούτων, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπολήψεις καὶ δόγματα. Ench. 5
μηδέποτ᾽ ἄλλους αἰτιώμεθα ἀλλ᾽ ἑαυτούς.
1734. This exceptive function of ἀλλά, which was proper to εἰ μὴ or
ἐὰν μὴ (ἂν μή), πλήν, ἐκτὸς οι παρεκτός, πάρεξ and παρὰ (644. 1188. 1619 f.),
brought about its association with these particles, and thus led, as
early as H (cp. WSchmid i. 133), to a mutual interchange and rivalry
in which adλà was ultimately forced to retreat and leave a consider-
able part of its adversative functions to its exceptive rivals εἰ μὴ ἐὰν
μή), πλήν, παρά, πάρεξ, later also χωρίς and ἐκτὸς οι παρεκτός.
?
[Schol. II. 9. 7 τὸ παρΕξ παρὰ τῷ ποιητῇ καὶ δύο μέρη λόγου ἐστὶ καὶ ἐγκλί-
νονται αἱ δύο προθέσεις . . . Τυραννίων δὲ ἓν μέρος λόγου ἤκουσεν, ἵν' ᾗ ἐπίρρημα,
καὶ βαρύνει καὶ ἔχει λόγον, ὡς Ἡρόδοτος ἐν δ' “πάρεξ τοῦ Σκυθικοῦ ἔθνους.
παρὰ δὲ τῷ ποιητῇ τὸ παρεξ δύο μέρη λόγου εἰσὶ καὶ ἐγκλίνονται αἱ δύο προθέσεις.
Eust, 732, 40 : Ιστέον δὲ ὡς ἡμεῖς μὲν οἱ ὕστερον πάρεξ ἀεί φαμεν βαρυτόνως
κατὰ κοινὴν διάλεκτον, καὶ ἀντὶ τοῦ Χωρὶς τὴν λέξιν νοοῦμεν, καὶ διὰ τοῦ Ξ γράφο
μεν αὐτήν, καὶ μύνῃ γενικῇ συντάσσομεν· Ὅμηρος δὲ παρεξ λέγει ὀξυτόνως.
Schol. Apoll. R. 2, 344 τὸ δὲ πάρεξ βαρυτόνως ἀντὶ τοῦ Χωρίς. συντάσσεται δὲ
γενικῇ καὶ αἰτιατική.
Hdt. 7, 32 απέπεμπε κήρυκας ἐς τὴν Ἑλλάδα, πλήν (= ἀλλὰ οὔτε ἐς Αθήνας
οὔτε ἐς Λακεδαίμονα ἔπεμπε. Dem. 56, 23 πλέουσα πανταχόσε πλὴν οὐκ εἰς
Αθήνας. Polyb. 3, 23, 3 ταῦτα, πάρεξ δὲ μηδέν. 8, 28, 9 μηδὲν ἰδιοπραγεῖν
πάρεξ τῶν προσταττομένων. 3, 58, 9. Sept. 3 Reg. 3, 18 οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδὲν πάρεξ
ἀμφοτέρων ἡμῶν. ib. 2, 20. Esdra 1, 6 ; eto. Matt. 12, 4 οὐκ ἐξὸν ἦν αὐτῷ
φαγεῖν οὐδὲ τοῖς μετ᾿ αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσι μόνοις. Gal. 2, 16 εἰδότες ὅτι οὐ
αμφοτέρων ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ἔργων νόμου ἐὰν μὴ διὰ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ. So too
Luke 4, 26; 27. Rov. 9, 4. Protov. Jac. 24, 3 τὸ μὲν σῶμα οὐκ εἶδον εἰ ΜΗ
τὸ αἷμα (as v. l.). Theoph. 18ο, 18 ὥστε μὴ πολιτεύεσθαι τοὺς ἑλληνίζοντας μηδὲ
τοὺς αἱρετικοὺς εἰ μὴ μόνους τοὺς ὀρθοδόξους Χριστιανούς. 415, 27 μὴ λογίσῃ υἱδι
θεοῦ εἶναι ἂν ἔτεκεν ἡ Μαρία, τὸν λεγόμενον Χριστόν, εἰ μὴ ψιλὸν ἄνθρωπον.
1735. It is to this association and affinity among the abovo particles that aro
duo such strengthened combinations εἰς ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως, ὅμως μέντοι, πλὴν εἰ μή, πλὴν
ἐὰν μή, ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ οι ἐὰν μή, παρεκτὸς εἰ μή οι ἐὰν μή, χωρὶς εἰ μή οκ ἐὰν μή,
σε
which occur moro or loss frequently, in particular since & times (cp. 1981).
407
1736-1741.]
CAUSAL.
PARTICLES,
1736. The ultimate outcome of the struggle among the exceptive and
adversative particles was that ἀλλά, εἰ μὴ οι ἂν μὴ Ν ἀμμή 195, μά, 1982),
χωρίς, παρά (also παρό), and πάρεξ, have survived down to the present
time in a more or less modified meaning. Thus λá, as a literary
rather than colloquial torm, still preserves its A force 'but'; so too &µws
yot," still.' Εἰ μὴ (or rather εἰμὴ) and παρὰ are purely exceptive :
'excopt,' 'save,' being rarely followed by a verb. Xapis (also x@pis accented
aftor dixws) is still popular in the sense of 'without'; while rápcg, being
πάρεξ,
untenable owing to its final έ (219), has been associated with and assimi-
lated to napá, and in this form it is now very popular, chiefly after
a negation, as an oquivalent to the more polished åλλd 'but,' 'except,'
(German sondern, aber).
1736. On the postpositive adversatives dè and μévтoi cp. 1700.
II.
SUBORDINATING PARTICLES.
CAUSAL PARTICLES.
1737. a. Prepositive : * ὅτι, * διότι, (ἵνα), because. ἐπεί, ἐπειδή,
'as,' 'since.'-άte (dý), oîa dý, 'as,' 'because.' ós 'on the plea
‘as,'
that,' 'inasmuch as,' 'as."
b. Postpositive: yàp 'because,' 'for' (Latin enim).
1738. Of the prepositives, or and erei, then their (strengthened)
compounds διότι (= διὰ + ὅτι) and ἐπειδὴ (=ἐπεὶ + δή), can stand only
before the indicative or secondary subjunctive [optative]; so too is in
older Attic. Usually, however, as introduces a causal participle; and
so do always are (dý) and oia dý (2150).
ὅτι
1739. The commonest causal particles ότι οι διότι, and ἐπεὶ οι ἐπειδή,
still survive in N (cp. 1790). However, or is now almost obsolete,
énéi, more generally éñeì kai (1717), is obsolescent, while dɩórı and
ere are still very common, the former phonopathically changed
into γιατί (διότι-διότι ότι [150], then iati by assimilation to γιατί,
i.c. Sari; rather than directly from ya+ori, i. e. dià óri), the latter
often supplied with an analogical finals: émeidns, and frequently fol-
lowed by και : ἐπειδὴ καί (1717).
1740. On the other hand, as as a conjunction introducing a causal
clause in the indicative or secondary subjunctive optative], enjoyed
no general popularity even in A, and so early made room for or or
Stóri. In point of fact, it is no longer used by Polybios, while the
NT writers and all P-N unlearned compositions totally ignore it.
ότι
1741. Peculiar bul unmistakable is the use, in @7-N, ofira (N và 1766) in the
sense of a causal participle or öri because, since, for, especially aftor expros-
sions of emotion (2128 (f.), as: Sopt. Gon. 22, 14. NT John 8, 56 'Aẞpadμ i
πατὴρ ὑμῶν ἠγαλλιάσατο ἵνα ἴδῃ τὴν ἡμέραν τὴν ἐμήν. So Luku 8, 10. Mark
4, 12 (cp. Matt. 13, 13). Rom. 5, 20. 6, 1. Apollon. De Conj. 510, 17 ëxe dè
(δ σύνδεσμος ἵνα) καὶ τὰς συνδεσμικὰς διαφορὰς δύο οὔσας, μίαν μὲν αἰτιολογικῊΝ
ἑτέραν δ᾽ ἀποτελεσματικήν. ἐν γὰρ αἰτίᾳ τοῦ ἀναγνῶναι φαμὲν οὕτως· ΝΑ ΑΝΑΓΝ
ἐτΙΜΗΘΗΝ (road ἐπετ-), ἵνα λοιδορήσω ἐπεπλήχθη. So 512 ὁ γοῦν λέγων Να
Γράφω ΤΑΥΤΑ ΜΟΙ ἐγένετο ὁμολογεῖ τὸ ἤδη γεγραφέναι, ὥστε ἐνήργησεν ἤδη τὸ
ἔγραψα καὶ αἰτίαν κατ' αὐτοῦ ἐπήγαγε. id. Do Synt. 3, 28 ἰδοὺ γὰρ κατ' αἰτιολογικὴν
oúrтağır ǹvíka paµèv ïna ånasnŵ (ét)etimúðhn, ína ánactâ Ĥniáoh Tpúqwr.
Theodos. 1035, 2 ἔστι δ᾽ ὅτε καὶ αἰτίαν (ἡ ὑποτακτικὴ δηλοῖ), ὡς ἐν τῷ ΝΑ ΤΙΜΗΘῶ
408
PARTICLES: μέν μήν, δέδή. [1741–1744.
слупненс. Tit. B. 1241 D οὐχ ὁρᾶτε, φησίν, ἵνα παιδία λοιδορήσωσι τὸν
Ελισσαῖον κατηρᾶτο ; (= ὅτι ἐλοιδόρησαν). Amphil. 121 c καὶ ἵνα μίαν ἡμέραν
ὁ παράλυτος κλίνην βαστάσῃ καὶ τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν παράσχῃ ἀγανακτεῖτε ; Chrys.
Χ. ΖI D Nα στυγνάσῃ μόνον, φησίν, ἀφῆκα τὰ ἁμαρτήματα (= διότι ἐστύγνασε).
Socr. 5, 16 ἔλεγε δεινὰ πεπονθέναι τὴν Ἑλλήνων θρησκείαν ἵνα μὴ καὶ ὁ εἷς
ἀνδριάς χωνευθῇ (ubi malo ἐχωνεύθη), ἀλλ' ἐπὶ γέλωτι τῆς Ἑλλήνων θρησκείας
φυλάττηται (= διὰ τὸ μὴ χωνευθῆναι, ἀλλὰ φυλάττεσθαι). [Chrys.] i. 8o2 Β.
IMoschos 2988 ο κἀγὼ ἵνα στρέψω τὸ καμάσιόν μου ἐγκαλεῖτε με.
So now : χαίρομαι να σε θωρῶ I rejoice to see you. μοῦ ἐ]κακοφάνηκε να
µáow nws 'I was sorry to hear that.'
1742. As to the participial prepositives are (dn), ola dń, ws (1738),
they are peculiar to A and Atticistic composition. In particular are
(d) and oia S are entirely foreign to P unconventional writings
(from Polybios downwards), while os has been a general favourite
through all antiquity. However, with the retreat and final dis-
appearance of the participle in general (2149 ff. 2168 f.), ws
necessarily went with it.
1742b. The postpositive yáp, though a great favourite with writers
of all classes and periods down to M times, has of course shared the
fate of all postpositive particles (1700).
EMPHATIC PARTICLES.
1743. These are yé, yoûv, πép, for which see 1700,—and μév,
μήν, δή.
1744. The two particles pèv and unv were originally identical both in
form (MEN) and meaning (indeed, it is true, quidem), and their distinc-
tion, as drawn in our grammars and lexica, is a comparatively later A
feature. In transliterating the original MEN from the old into the new
alphabet (6 ff. App. ii. 12 [2]), the transcribers adopted the form µǹv
for those cases where the particle appeared to be emphatic or formed
technical (prosodic or grammatical) length, while μèv was retained for
unemphatic and technically short cases, in particular such as pointed
to a correlative particle to come, the two particles then standing in the
relation of either antithesis (μὲν—δέ, αλλά, αὖ, ἀτάρ, μέντοι, εἶτα, ἔπειτα,
etc.) or mere parataxis (μev-dé 'and'). That being the case, it
follows that (1) while in prose the grammatical distinction between
μèr and μy has been carried out more or less systematically; (2) in
A and earlier verse, metrical quantity has, in a great many cases,
interfered with the above principle, and rendered necessary the
retention of the old form pèv for unv, pure and simple.
3,
ἅμα δέ,
dė
• •
(1) Μέ - Δέ : Pl. Rop. 457 Β τὸ μὲν ὠφέλιμον καλὸν τὸ δὲ βλαβερὸν
αἰσχρόν. Χen. Αn. 1, 1, 1 πρεσβύτερος ΜΕΝ 'Αρταξέρξης νεώτερος δὲ Κῦρος.
Mem. 2, 1, 3 σύνειμι Μὲν θεοῖς, σύνειμι δὲ ἀνθρώποις τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς. So further
ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, τοῦτο μὲν . . . τοῦτο δέ, ἔνθα μὲν .
τοῦτο δέ, ἔνθα μὲν . . . ἔνθα δέ, τοτὲ μὲν τοτὲ
δέ, ἅμα μὲν apa dé, ote.-For men. ..
MEN. dard ep. Xen. An. 1, 7, 17. Dee.
6. Ag. 3, 11. Hior. 1, 16. Th. I, 73, 1. MÈN
-MEN ATáp: Soph. O. R.
1051 f. Tr. 54. 760 f. IIdt. 2, 175. 41, 188. Xon. Holl. 5, 4, 17.
Thonot. 172 0.-MCN ... Ómwc: Soph. Ph. 471. 1063. O. R. 785. Xon. An.
1, 3, 21. 2, 1, 9. 5, 7, 23 ; ote.—MỀN ...CẢ ỐM Cc: Soph. El. 442.450. Ph.
1373--MEN d'af Xon. An. 1, 10, 5; etc.-MÈN MENTOI Hdt. 1,
109. 3, 36. Soph. O. R. 777. Ph. 353. Xon. An. 1, 3, 9. 5, 9, 26; 32.
Cyr. 1, 3, 2; ote. – MÈN MHN: Pl. Phnodr. 268 E. Sophist. 216 B.
Phileb. 12 D.
;
•
•
Xen. Ag. 6, 1; otc.
·
•
:
Pl.
409
1744-1746.] ΡΛΕTICLES : μέν μήν, δέδή, νή, μά.
(2) Men for MHN: A 234. 267. E 893. 92. 7 237; and often. (Cp. Hdn.
508, 17 τὸ δὲ μὴν ὁρκικὸν ἐπίρρημα οξύνεται. δ δὲ ποιητὴς ἀεὶ διὰ τοῦ ε
προφέρεται· ΗΜΕΝ μοι πρόφρων [Α 77], ΗΜὲν ἐμοὶ δώσειν [ξ 275].) Hdt. 3, 66.
Th. I, 10, I. I, 45 (TOLαÚTY MÈn yvwµn); 54. Xen. An. 5, 10, 4. 5, 6, 28.
1, 7, 6. Cyr. 1, 6, 2. 2, 2, 3. An. 7, 6, 12. 5, 7, 33. 1, 4, 12. 2, 2, 10. 4, 2,
45. Aesch. Pr. 541, et passim. Soph. Ph. II. 159. 995. 1218. 1418. O. R.
18. 82. 1251. 1321. 1466. O. C. 22. 44. 96. 469. 471. 836. 995. 1096. 1370.
1677. Ant. 255. 366. 498. 551. 634. 681. 1162. Tr. 6. 265. 380. 836. El.
1240. 1424. Eur. Med. 676. 1129; etc. Pl. Apol. 21 D. Crit. 43 D.
Menon 82 B. Charm. 153 0; etc. Isao. I, 1.—Ĥ mèn (for ĥ µýv): § 160.
μήν)
416. A 77. E 275. 8 254. ¥ 585. P 483. 7 159. a 77. 392. 173. Y 14. ʼn 159.
P 381. 0 552. T 89. 795, 634. 300; etc. Hdt. 4, 153. 5, 93. 6, 74.
9, 91. 2, 118. 3, 99.-kai mén (for kai µýv): A 269. § 88. I 632. ₪ 489. v 45;
Ar. Ly. 559 etc. (Theocr. 4, 122. 4, 60.)—se mén (for ye µýv): B 703. Hdt.
7, 152. 234.—oỶ MEN (for où µýv): A 163. ≈ 105.
= Z 125. 311. For many
moro instancos from Pl. Th. Xen. Isocr. etc. see Ch.Short in CDYonge's
Engl. Gr. Lox. p. civ. s.v. μév. (Cp. FPassow Lex. s. v. μév & JAHartung
ii. 390-402.)
¥
I.
Ψ
1744. The historical development and specialization of pèv-μnv
has a parallel in dè-8. In its transliteration from the old into the
hew alphabet, AE was specialized to the copulative or adversative
de and, but, and 8, the latter serving to emphasize any word or
clause, but more particularly adjectives, adverbs, pronouns, conjunc-
tions, and imperatives. Again, just as uè very often occurs for u
but still retains its old orthography, so de is very frequently found in
archaic and texts as a relic of pre-Eucleidian spelling, a circum-
stance which moreover accounts for its frequent synizesis.
μ 54. / 144 τοίη δέ.
5, 37. 1, 116. 5, 50.
Soph. Ant. 1172. O.
Eur. Or. 622. I. T.
Α 83. 135. 540.
5, 1, 37. 1, 28, 29.
1029, ot passim.
424 F. O. R. 380.
Ph. 155. And. 289 f. Ar. Av. 178. Xen. Cyr. 5, 1, 4.
(cp. 2, 1, 16). Cyr. 5, 5, 21. 2, 3, 19. 7, 2, 23
il. 6, 2, 14 ταῦτὰ δὲ ὁρῶντες).
5, 1, 4. Pl. Rop. 2, 367 0.
325 B. Gorg. 502 B. 512 A.
Hdt. 1, 115 (ἐγὼ δὲ ταῦτα ἐποίησα).
Aesch. Ag. 1016.
T. 378 f. 1267.
169 f. Rhes. 846.
Pors. 332. Ag.
El. 25 ff. Ant.
I. A. 401. 1436.
Mem. 2, 9, 2
(1, 6, 43. 4, 6, 4. ib. 4, 4, 3).
ib. 5, 5, 21. 8, 5, 12. Mem. 3, 7, 8. Cyr.
Phaod. 80 d. Rop. 5, 475 0. Prot. 313 A.
So often τί δέ
Apol. 28 0. Phaodr. 265 Aa.
(cp. FPassow Lox. s. v. dé & JAHartung i. 156–170.)
5
1744°. If we wore to apply consistently tho above principle of distinction be-
twoon µèv and µýv (1744), and dè and ôý (1744º), combinations liko µév ye, µèv dý,
μενοῦν, etc. would roquiro us to spell μήν γε, μὴν δή, μηνουν, etc. (ep. ὅδε 563).
ASSEVERATIVE PARTICLES.
1745. Of the two asseverative particlos v and μà 'by,' the
former is used mostly in affirmative, the latter mostly in noga-
tive sentonces, as: ΝΗ Δία, Νὴ τὴν ᾿Αθηνῶν-οὔτοι Μὲ τοὺς δώδεκα
θεούς—but also Nai μα Δία, οι μά Δία.
1746. In P Greek µà prevailed over výj (146) and so came to be used
in both affirmative and negative cases. In this double use it is now
very common in N speech (1261) : καὶ μὲ τὸ θεό", ὄχι μὲ τὴν πίστη μου.
1740. When μd gradually bocamo the sign of swearing, euphemism
and pioty, following the prescription of the Gospel (Matt. 5, 34. Jas. 5, 12),
sought to mitigate the sin by dropping the swearing particlo as well as
its synonymous πpós (1662), ofton oven the vorb, as:
Mark 5, 7 ὁρκίζω σε τον θεόν. Aels 10, 13 ὁρκίζω ὑμᾶς τὸν Ἰησοῦν. I Thoss.
Anacreont. 9, 1 άφες με, τοὺς θεούς σοι, πιεῖν ἀμυστί. Epiet. 2, 19, 15 λέγε
5, 27.
410
PARTICLES: ἆρα, ἦ, ού, μή, μῶν.
[1746b-1748.
μοι, τοὺς θεούς σοι, ἃ πρώην ἔλεγες, per dios. 3, 1, 36 μή, τοὺς θεούς σοι, νεανίσκε.
3, 20, 4 τὸν θεόν σοι, ἀπὸ θανάτου γὰρ οὐκ ἔστιν. 3, 23, 1ι τὴν ἐμήν σοι σωτηρίαν,
ita salvus sim (beside ib. 26 μὲ τὴν ὑμετέραν σωτηρίαν). Chal. 1541 ο τὴν σωτη
ρίαν τοῦ βασιλέως by the emperor's safety. Gregent. 573 Α τὴν εὐχήν σοι.
JMoschos 2925 Α τὸν Σέραπιν. 2997 Α τὸν θεὸν ἂν σέβεις, ἀπόλυσόν με. Vita
SA 41* ν τὸν θεὸν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς ὁρκίζω σε (ep. ib. 49* η κατάθεμά σε
a euphemism for ἀνάθεμά σε, like Λ νὴ τὸν ΚΥΝΑ for νὴ τὸν Ζῆνα).
1746º. Another pious but Hebraistic mode of expressing affirmation
without the swoaring particlo μd is sometimes resorted to by means of
the verb (@ in the sonso of 'by the life of, that is for the 4 οὕτω ζῴην οι
ὀναίμην, as : Sept. Num. 14, 21 Ζῶ ἐγὼ καὶ ζῶν τὸ ὄνομά μου as truly as
I live.' I Reg. 25, 26 Ζῇ κύριος καὶ τῇ ἡ ψυχή σου ' as the Lord liveth and
as they soul liveth. Jud. 2, 12 Ζώ ἐγὼ καὶ τὸ κράτος τῆς βασιλείας μου. 11. 7.
Protov. Jac. 4, 1 Ζῇ κύριος ὁ θεός μου, ἐὰν γεννήσω εἴτε ἄρρεν εἴτε θῆλυ, προσάξω
αὐτὸ δῶρον τῷ θεῷ μου. So 6, I. 13, 3. 15, 3 ; 4.
INTERROGATIVE PARTICLES.
1747. These are-
I. ἆρα, ή (pre-Attic and poetical ή ῥα), indifferent, i. e. intro-
ducing a question the answer to which may be either yes or no;
2. ού, ἆρ᾽ οὐ, οὐκοῦν, anticipating the answer yes ;
3. μή, ἆρα μή, μῶν
77
""
no.
Xen. Mem. 2, 5, 2 ἆρ᾽, ὦ ᾿Αντίσθενες, εἰσί τινες ἀξίαι φίλων ὥσπερ
οἰκετῶν; Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 17 Η καὶ σχολὴ ἔσται,
6, 17 ἢ καὶ σχολὴ ἔσται, ὦ πάτερ, σωμασκεῖν τοὺς
στρατιώτας; ib. 2, 4, 15 ΟΥΚΟΥΝ σοι δοκεῖ; Pl. Phaed. 64 Ο άρα ΜΗ
ἄλλο τι τὸν θάνατον εἶναι ἡγούμεθα) ἢ τὴν τῆς ψυχῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ σώματος
ἀπαλλαγήν; Prot. 310 D Μῶν τι σε ἀδικεῖ Πρωταγόρας; See 1812 & 2046.
1747. In archaic and pre-Attic Greek there were two common particles :
an illative apa (~~) or șa (~) ‘then,' therefore,' and an interrogative & pa
'I wonder.' The former, in the form äpa, passed into A and survived
down to B, while the latter pa, under the influence of apa, passed into
A in the form âpa (~~, but of course apa as well, 1748 f.), and thence was
relegated to P-N.
1747°. Of passages showing the original identity of apa with âpa (1747º),
mark among others: Pind. Pyth. 4, 138. Aesch. Ag. 1223. Soph. O. C.
863. Ant. 632. Eur. I. Λ. 300. Rhes. 118 ἢν ἆρα. Αr. Αν. 101. Eur. Andr.
1115. El. 1230. Eq. 1084 (ep. Andr. 761 1). Ar. Pac. 533.-Eur. Ph. 575-
1689. I. A. 300. Hol. 85. Soph. Ai. 1368. O. C. 409. 1400. Ausch. Ag.
1223.
Cho. 281.429. Ar. Av. 161. Plut. 575. Vesp. 839. Pl. Crat. 410 B.
(Cp. JAHartung i. 456 f. & AMatthiae Lox. Eur. 373-387, ospecially 378;
also 605.)
1748. All the above particles introduce a question in a direct
manner, but the monosyllables ἢ οὐ μή, besides involving an instan-
taneous expenditure of breath, connote a certain curtness or impa-
tience, while the disyllable apa seems to soften the bluntness of the
interrogation and at the same time add emphasis, thus giving the
sentence the colour of an indirect but solemn or vivid question (ἐρωτῶ,
θαυμάζω, I wonder). Hence the unceremonious ἢ οὐ μή are very often
softened through the accession of the solemn as well as forcible apu,
placed either before : ἆρ' ή, ἆρ' ού, ἆρα μή (in Homer ή μή), or after :
ἢ ρα
ἆρα (ή ῥα οι ἦρα), οὐκ ἆρα, μὴ ἆρα. In the latter case a euphonie γε
is commonly inserted (γε ἆρ', γ' ἆρ' = ἆρα γε : ep. τ' ἄρ), and this con-
plex is contracted, by association, to γάρ, thus producing : ή γάρ (for
ή γε άρα, as Pl. Crat. 390 Α), οὐ γάρ, μὴ γάρ (S0 εἰ γάρ 1904 & 1923)
411
1748-1753.]
PARTICLES: DECLARATIVE.
so further τί γάρ ; (for τί γε ἆρα;) ποῦ γάρ; πῆ γάρ; ποῖ γάρ ; all of
which are common in dialogue. Should the question be suggested as
a corollary to some preceding statement, this yàp is replaced by the
syllogistic οὖν, then, well, igitur: ἢ οὖν, οὐκ οὖν οι οὐκοῦν, μὴ οὖν οι μῶν
(the last originally ME ON, 2050).
か
​1748°. On the same principle, direct questions introduced by inter-
rogative pronouns or adverbs, are often softened by the accession
of the ceremonious and emphatic apa (commonly misaccented apa),
as: Aesch. S. 90 τίς άρα ῥύσεται, τίς ἆρ᾽ ἐπαρκέσει; Eur. I. Τ. 458 τίς
ἄρα μήτηρ ἡ τεκοῦσ᾽ ὑμᾶς ποτε; Ι. Α. 1223 τί δ' ἆρ᾽ ἐγώ σε πρέσβυν; ἆρ᾽
ǹ
up'
elodégoμai; Tro. 292. Ion 563. Ar. Vesp. 893 ris ap ó þeúywv oûtos;
Pac. 1240. Pl. Phaedr. 228 D rí âpu; Hip. Maj. 298 B ri d' apa; Phileb.
52 D τί ποτ' ἆρα; Theaet. 181 C ποῖον τί ποτ' ἆρα; Xen. Mem. 2, 5, 4
πόσου ἆρα; Cyr. 1, 6, 9 πῶς ἆρ᾽ ἕξει ; Pl. Hip. Μaj. 297 Ε πώς τι ἆρα;
See AMatthiae Lex. Eur. 602 ff.
1749. As early as G times, and uv, later also ouroûv, bogan to retreat
before their respective associates and rivals, and soon disappoured from the
common language, whereas all the rest have remained in continuous use
down to modern times. It must be noted, however, that âpa, whether
simple or in the usual strengthened form âpa ye, now savours of litorary
affectation (2048)-popular speech often substituting for it Táxα or тá-
Xates--while µń, also µýv (221. App. iii. 20, e), is still fully preserved
either simple or with the particles mês, rí, yáp (2039), which now act as
mere emphatic suffixes: unпws, μýti, unɣáp (μnyápi, NSophianos 83 ubi
μnyapn). In the present stage of the popular language, μm) is moreover
often followed by πᾷ (from πάει, i.Θ. ὑπάγει 863), οι τύχῃ : μὴν πᾷ (οι μήμπα)
καί, μήμπα νά (this sometimos contracted to μὴ νά), μὴν τύχῃ καί, μὴν τύχῃ να
(1717 fl.).
Acts 8, 30 pare γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις ; John 7, 41 ΜΗ Γάρ (= μὴ ἆρα)
ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ὁ Χριστὸς ἔρχεται ; 1 Cor. 11, 22 ΜΗ Γὰρ οἰκίας οὐκ ἔχετε
cis rd ¿oliei naì nível; Sopt. Gen. 20, 9 Múti ýµáptoµev eis oé; Luke 6, 39
Μήτι δύναται τυφλὸς τυφλὸν ὁδηγεῖν ;
TI
1750. As to ou, after a long and unbroken record, it has recently be
como oxtinct, its place having been taken during G-M by oùdév, since
B shortened to dév (1798 f.).
DECLARATIVE PARTICLES.
1751. These are-
Α : ὡς, ὅτι, ' that
Γ: ὅτι, διότι, ' that'
G-N: ὅτι, ὡσότι, πῶς.
1752. The declarative conjunctions are used in indirect dis-
course (1938 ff.) to connect the leading verb with its subordinate
clause. Hence they are used after vorbs of saying, thinking,
knowing (verba declarandi, sentiendi, cognoscendi); in P-B also
after verbs of hearing, seeing, showing, etc.-So still in N.
For examples and further illustrations see 1940 ff. & App. vi. 7. 13-14.
1753. In ▲ only őrt and the less assertive ós were in general
usage.
With the close of A, ós rotreated from the language,
while Stóri was added to the declaratives as a strengthened öri.
412
PARTICLES : DECLARATIVE.
[1753b-1755.
1
1753. The frequency and proportion of ὡς ὅτι διότι in Thucydides,
Xenophon's An. i-iii, Polybios' i-v books, and Diodoros' i book, is shown
by the following summary table (SBrief iii. 8–10):
Th.
Xen. An. i-iii.
ὡς
ὅτι 223
130
22
III
διότι
Polyb. i-v.
45
Diod. i.
8
87
36
60
9
1754. The P declarative διότι, however, being thwarted by the
presence of causal διότι (1738 ff.), retreated during G and so led to
the revival of the old as, now restored as a prefix in the room of
διά. It thus gave birth to a novel combination ὡς ὅτι or rather ὡσότι
(ep. ὡς ἵνα or ὡσίνα 1767), which has since been current beside ότι [1]͵
(Diod. Fgm. ii. 536, 51 λέγων ὡ ότι Θράκες ποτέ κτλ. Dion. H. Ant. 9, 14
ἐπιγνοὺς ὡ ότι ἐν ἐσχάτοις εἰσὶν οἱ κατακλεισθέντες ἐν τοῖς λόφοις. Strab. 15, 57
(p. 711) τὸ ὑπὸ Τιμαγένους λεχθὲν ὡςότι χαλκὸς ὕοιτο). NT 2 Cor. 11, 21 κατὰ
ἀτιμίαν λέγω ὡς ότι ἡμεῖς ἠσθενήκαμεν, Athan. i. 312 Α φανερὸν ἦν ἡμῖν ὡςότι
πολλὰ καὶ δεινὰ ἐμηχανῶντο. Apophth. 357 A ἐπῄνεσέ τινα ἀδελφὸν ὡςότι μισο-
πόνηρός ἐστι. Schol. Ar. Pac. 506 ὑπομιμνήσκει αὐτοὺς ἀναφέρων ὡςότι καὶ ἐπ᾿
ἐκείνων τῶν χρόνων ἐθαλασσοκράτουν. Schol. in Aeschin. et Isocr. (ed. GDin-
dorf) p. 6, 14 φασὶ γὰρ ὡς ότι οὐδὲν τοῦ χαρακτῆρος τοῦ Πλάτωνος σώζει. 24, 10
ἔγνωμεν πολλάκις ὡςότι ποτὲ μὲν ἐψηφίζοντο οἱ δικασταί, 59, 32 θέλει εἰπεῖν
ὡςότι οὐδὲ ὁ ἀνεψιὸς αὐτοῦ ἐτραυμάτισεν αὐτόν. 104, 18 ἔφησεν ὡςότι Ἔχω
τινὰς δύο μαθητάς κτλ. 104, 22 λέγεται δὲ καὶ τοῦτο περὶ αὐτοῦ ὡ ότι
κατηγορηθεὶς κτλ. Schol. II. B 78 φάσκων ὡςότι πολλαὶ πόλεις ὁμοφωνοῦσι
προσηγορικοῖς. Vita Epiph. 104 A ἔγραψεν ωςότι Ἰωάννης τὰ Ωριγένους φρονεῖ.
Loont. Neap. V. S. 1677 Α προβαλλόμενος μάρτυρα ώςότι οὐδὲν κτλ. Chron.
731, 13 ἐδεξάμεθα ἀπόκρισιν ὡςότι μέγαν χειμῶνα εὗρον.
1755. With the close of T the old established and still largoly predomi-
nating őr, owing to its very increased frequency, consequent on the now
regular analysis of all declarativo infinitives by means of őr (App. vi.
13-14), probably also owing to the interference of causal ὅτι (1754),
found, from G onwards, a novel rival in the adverb @s (possibly suggested
by ds), which beginning with the verba sentiendi gradually succeeded in
establishing itsolf, beside őr, as a legitimato declarative conjunction in
every way. In this manner Ti and râs have ever sinco remained in
concurrent use, but eventually mŵs gained a decided ascendency and
would have dispossessed its associate and immemorial predecessor őτi, were
it not for the reaction of the national spirit manifosted in recent times.
[1] [ Xon. Hell. 3, 2, 14 εἰπὼν τῷ Φάρακι ὡς ότι οκνοίη chargeable to the B copiers.]
Harpocr. s. v. εὐοί (p. 141, 7) Αριγνώτη δὲ ὡςότι τινὲς ἔλεξαν κτλ. NT 2 Cor. 5, 18
δόντος ἡμῖν τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς ὡς ότι θεὸς ἦν ἐν Χριστῷ κόσμον καταλ-
λάσσων ἑαυτῷ. 2 Thess. 2, 2 ἐρωτῶμεν . . . ὡεότι (= διότι ?) ἐνέστηκεν ἡ ἡμέρα
τοῦ Κυρίου. A. P. 9, 531 ἵνα δείξῃ ὡς ότι πάντα ποιεῖν δύναται. Schol. in
Aeschin. ot Isocr. 67, 8 ἔχει τις εἰπεῖν ὡςότι αὐτὸς μόνος ὁ Φάλαικος ἠγνύει τὴν
Φιλίππου γνώμην. 83, 30 εἶπεν ότι οἱ δῆμοι ἐξ αὐτῶν αἱροῦνται τινά. 92, 30.
93, II. 105, 1. 105, 3 εἴπομεν ὡςότι ζηλωτὴς ἐγένετο τοῦ Γοργίου. 195, 7.
105, 20 λέγεται δ' ὡςότι καὶ τέχνην ῥητορικὴν ἔγραψε. 105, 22 λέγομεν ὡς ότι,
λέγουσιν ούτι. 106, 6 δηλῶν ὡς ότι. 107, 24.
108, 19. 100, 20 ιστέον ὡςότι.
113, 3- 114, 2 κατηγόρουν δὲ αὐτοῦ ὡςότι καινά δαιμόνια εἰσφέρει τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις.
114, 14. 121, 29 Ιστέον δ᾽ ὡρότι. Schol. II. A 305 παρεφύλασσεν ὡ ότι. Ι 6
προσθεῖναι ἐκεῖνο ὡσότι. Γ 280. Cyr. Scyth. V. S. 311 ο λέγειν ὡούτι.
413
1755-1757b.]
PARTICLES: CONSECUTIVE.
(028. App. vi. 14.) For in this movement or received a powerful support
in the literary language and cultivated speech, which carefully eliminates
Tâs from its former declarative functions.-It may be further noted for
the sake of completeness, that anterior to this recent reaction popular
speech often had recourse to a combination of both ori and Tŵs, especially
in cases of emphasis, and this combination is still of no rare occurrenco:
μοῦ ἐμήνυσε ὅτι πώς ὁ ἀδερφός του ἀρρώστησε “he sent me word that his
brother fell ill.'
CONSECUTIVE PARTICLES.
1756. These are : A ὥστε, ὡς, ὅτι,
GN ὅπου or που ' so as, so that.
A: σre, uncommonly os,with the infinitive or a finite mood
(chiefly indicative).
P: ore, rarely as (constructed as in ▲); iva with the primary
subjunctive; also or with the indicative.
G-B: ὥστε, ἵνα, ὡς, also ὅτι (rarely ὅπως).
N: оñoυ or поû with the indicative or with và + primary subj.
1757. In consecutive or consequential (illative) clauses, A-B used
chiefly ore. Next to it came os, which however in A-P had only
a limited use (chiefly in Aesch., Soph., Hdt., Xen., Polyb.). With the
close of P, os retreated for a time (cp. 1754), leaving in its room on
the one side iva (N vá), and on the other ori, two substitutes suggested
by their synonomy with is (which had acted both as final=iva
[1760" f.] and declarative=ör), and possibly influenced by the partial
homophony of wore and őrı (=oste—oti). As to N %]πoυ, it may have
been suggested by the consecutive use of ős or őσris (2014-8).
Ο
1757". However, whon, during T-B, wore camo to be confounded with
ŵote (i.0. éws öte 1785), dissociation led to the rovival of ås, as : Diognet. 1
εἰπεῖν οὕτως ὡς μάλιστα ἂν ἀκούσαντά σε βελτίονα γενέσθαι, σοί τε οὕτως ἀκοῦ
σαι ὡς μὴ λυπηθῆναι τὸν εἰπόντα. Acta Pauli ot Theclae 261, 8 où× ηyavтo
αὐτῆς ὡς τὸν ᾿Αλέξανδρον εἰπεῖν. Alchom. 41, 7 βάλε ὕδωρ ὡς εἶναι ἐπάνω τῶν
wc
wc
βρύων τετραδάκτυλον. ib. 12 βάλε ἐν τῷ ζωμῷ ὕδωρ ὡς γενέσθαι τὴν ἀναλογίαν.
So 42, 4. Apophth. 417 ο τοσαύτη τῷ ποιμένι προσὴν ὁσιότης ὡς ἀξιωθῆναι
[] A comparison botwoon Thucydides, Xenophon, Polybios, and the NT may
serve to illustrate this point (cp. SBrief i. 48):
ὥστε
ὡς
Total

Infin.
Finito mood
Infin.
Finite mood
Thuc. (ontire)...
145
82
I
228
Xen. books 1-3 × 6
108
204
48
Polyb. books 1-5
114
9
7
(— ?)
9
360(+?)
139
NT as far as Coloss,
29
46
75
414
PARTICLES : CONSECUTIVE.
[1757b-1758.
αὐτὸν καὶ ἀνθρώπων ποιμένα Γενέσθαι. Callin. 103, 1 τοσοῦτον δὲ ἦν δυνατός
ὡς πάντοτε ὥσπερ θεοφορούμενον αὐτὸν δρᾶσθαι. 120, 12 τοσοῦτον ἤλασεν ὡς
κάμνειν αὐτόν. 128, 6, et passim.
1758. The gradual retreat and replacement of woтe by iva (N và) and őrɩ
(Ν που) may be illustrated by the following specimens.
α. Ωστε with infinitive replaced by ἵνα with the (primary) subjunctive
(according to EASoph. Lex. p. 600, 19):
Sept. Tobit 3, 15 οὐδὲ ὑπάρχων αὐτῷ υἱὸς ἵνα συντηρήσω ἐμαυτὴν αὐτῷ γυναῖκα.
Sup. 13, 9 εἰ γὰρ τοσοῦτον ἴσχυσαν εἰδέναι ἵνα δύνωνται στοχάσασθαι τὸν αἰῶνα,
τὸν τούτων δεσπότην πῶς τάχιον οὐχ εὗρον ; 2 Μacc. 6, 24. Dion. Thr. 629, 17.
Dion. H. iv. 2226, 7. John 9, 36 καὶ τίς ἐστιν, κύριε, ἵνα πιστεύσω εἰς αὐτόν;
Rev. 13, 13 καὶ ποιεῖ σημεῖα μεγάλα ἵνα καὶ πῦρ ποιῇ καταβαίνειν ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ
εἰς τὴν γῆν. 1 John 3, Ι ἴδετε ποταπὴν ἀγάπην δέδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ πατὴρ ἵνα τέκνα
αὐτοῦ κληθῶμεν. Jos. B. J. 4, 3, 10 πρὸς τοσοῦτον ἥκομεν συμφορῶν ἵνα ἡμᾶς
ἐλεήσωσι καὶ πολέμιοι; 6, 2, 1 μὴ γὰρ ἔγωγέ ποτε γενοίμην ζῶν οὕτως αἰχμάλωτος
ἵνα παύσωμαι τοῦ γένους ἢ τῶν πατρίων ἐπιλάθωμαι. Ignat. 68ο Α πολλὰ γὰρ
ἡμῖν λείπει ἵνα θεοῦ μὴ λειπώμεθα. Plut. ii. 179 Β μὴ γένοιτό σοι οὕτως,
ὦ βασιλεῦ, κακῶς ἵνα ἐμοῦ ταῦτα βέλτιον εἰδῇς. ii. 333 Α τί μοι πώποτε
τοιοῦτο συνέγνως ἵνα τοιαύταις με κολακεύσῃς ἡδοναῖς ; M.Anton. 2, 11 οὔτε ἂν
τηλικοῦτον ἥμαρτεν . ἵνα τὰ ἀγαθὰ . . . συμβαίνῃ. Clement. 2, 29 οὐ γάρ
ἐσμεν οὕτως νήπιοι ἵνα πανούργον ἐνσπείρῃς ἡμῖν ὑποψίαν τοῦ νομίζειν σέ τι τῶν
ἀπορρήτων εἰδέναι. Const. Apost. 1, 6, 2 τί γάρ σοι καὶ λείπει ἐν τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ θεοῦ
ἵν᾽ ἐπ᾿ ἐκεῖνα τὰ ἐθνόμυθα ὁρμήσῃς; Apophth. 224 D μὴ γὰρ κοινοβιάρχης εἰμὶ
ἵνα διατάξω αὐτῷ; Mal. 26, 17 οὐδὲ ἡμᾶς τοιοῦτος ἔρως κατείχεν ἵνα περὶ
τούτου ζητήσαιτε (write -σετε). Theoph. 104, 15 τίς γάρ εἰμι ἵνα εἰς ἐμὲ τοῦτο
γένηται [];
.
σε
[1] So further Job 7, 16 οὐ γὰρ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα ζήσομαι ἵνα μακροθυμήσω. Prov.
23, 35. Nicom. 11 ἡμίσους ἐπιδεκτικὸς οὐκ ἔστιν ἵνα καὶ ἄλλος ἀπ' αὐτοῦ γένηται
ἡμιόλιος. Philo i. 181, 43. 294, 3. 408, 23. 477, 1. 499, 19. ii. 421, 14.
Sim. 7.
I.
Luke
9, 45 οἱ δὲ ἠγνύουν τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο, καὶ ἦν παρακεκαλυμμένον ἀπ᾿ αὐτῶν ἵνα μὴ
αἴσθωνται αὐτό. Mark 11, 28 τίς σοι τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην ἔδωκεν ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς;
1 John 1, 9 πιστός ἐστιν καὶ δίκαιος ἵνα ἀφῇ ἡμῖν τὰς ἁμαρτίας καὶ καθαρίσῃ
ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἀδικίας. I Thess. 5, 4 ὑμεῖς δέ, ἀδελφοί, οὐκ ἐστὶ ἐν σκότει ΝΑ
ἡ ἡμέρα ἡμᾶς ὡς κλέπτης (rend as) καταλάβῃ. Jos. Ant. 8, 13, 7. 13, 6, 3 (p (52).
5, 9, 4 ὅμοια δὲ τῷ Ασσυρίῳ Ῥωμαῖοι δρῶσιν ἵνα καὶ ἄμυναν ὑμεῖς ὁμοίαν ἐλπίσητε;
Hormas Vis. 3, 1, 4.
Hermes Tr. Poom. 11, 9. 112, 13. Epict. 1, 7, 31,
1, 19, 13 καθόλου τε τοιαύτην (τὴν φύσιν τοῦ λογικοῦ ζῴου κατέστησεν ἵνα μηδενὸς
τῶν ἰδίων ἀγαθῶν δύνηται τυγχάνειν. 1, 28, 31. 2, 3, 16 οὕτω μωρὸς ἵνα μὴ ἴδῃ
(εἰδῇ) ? ὅτι αὕτη ἡ ὁδὸς ἐνταῦθα οὐ φέρει; 2, 22, 9. 3. 1, 12. 4,3. 9. 4, 7, 29.
4, 8, 21. Ench. 12, 2. Plut. i. 730 Λ. ii. 67 F. Inst. Orat. 1 οὐ γὰρ τοιαύ-
της ἀρετῆς ἐπιδικάζομαι ἵνα τοῖς Ὁμήρου μύθοις πείθωμαι. Αpollon. Conj. 5το, 8.
Luc. Amor. 5 (ii. 455). Do Loctu 19 (ii. 931). Galon. 8, 45 E. Sext. 144, 17. 162. 2.
449, 7. Clement. 2, 30 τίς τῆς ψυχῆς χρεία γίνεται ἵνα χωρισθῇ τοῦ σώματος ; 3, 12
μὴ προφητεύων ἀμαυρὰ καὶ ἀμφίβολα ἵνα ἄλλου προφήτου χρείαν ἔχῃ τὰ λεγόμενα
πρὸς ἐπίγνωσιν. Hippol. 676 D. 680 Α. 685 0. Haer. 136, 21; 26. 360, 27. 364,
99, et alibi. Dio C. 46, 5, 3. Diog. 7, 83. 4, 30. 9, 52. Philostr. 3, 47 ovdề yàp
σοφώτατοι τῶν Ἑλλήνων ᾿Αρκάδες ἵν᾿ ἑτέρου τι ἀνθρώπου πλέον περὶ τὰ λογιστικά
τῶν σπλάγχνων φαίνωσιν. Οrig. i. 53 Λ. 749 Α. 820 B. ii. 53 Α. iii. 257 C. 408 €.
477 B. 1052 B. 1092 0. 1181 A. Plotin. 1, 15, 12. 143, 1. 381, 7. Alox. Lyc. 417 B.
Iambl. Myst. 272, 5. Eust. Ant. 617 B. Athan. i. 390 σοὐ γὰρ Ῥωμαϊκή ἐστιν ἡ
κρίσις ἵν᾿ ὡς βασιλεὺς πιστευθῇς. 81 Β. 802 Β τί γὰρ ἐκείνῃ λείπει ἵνα καινότερα
ζητήσῃ τις ; 620 B, etc. Epiph. i. 638 A. Chal, 821 0. Chron. 575, 15 εγώ θέλω
εὑρεῖν νεωτέραν εὔμορφον πάνυ ἵνα τοιοῦτον κάλλος μὴ ἔχῃ ἄλλη γυνὴ ἐν Κωνσταν
ΓΙ
་
415
1758-1761.]
PARTICLES : FINAL.
b. "Ωστε with the infinitive replaced by ότι :
Sept. Ex. 3, 1 τίς εἰμι ἐγὼ ὅτι πορεύσομαι πρὸς Φαραώ, βασιλέα Αἰγύπτου,
καὶ ὅτι ἐξάξω τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου; 4 Rog. 8, 13 τίς ἐστιν
ὁ δοῦλος σου ὅτι ποιήσει τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο; Μatt. 8, 27 ποταπός ἐστιν οὗτος ὅτι
καὶ οἱ ἄνεμοι καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούουσιν αὐτῷ ; Theod. i. 1680 € τοσοῦτον δ᾽
ἀπέσχον τοῦ πιστεῦσαι τῷ τῶν ὅλων θεῷ ὅτι τὸν πρὸς αὐτοὺς κατὰ ταὐτὸν ἤραντο
πόλεμον. 1704 Ο οὕτω, φησίν, ἐστὶ μεγάλη ὅτι καὶ τὰ μυρία τῶν ἰχθύων περίκειται
γένη καὶ τὰ μέγιστα κήτη ἀδεῶς ἐν αὐτῇ νήχεται. Apophth. 252 ϋ εἰς τοσοῦτον
ἦλθε μέτρον ὅτι ἠσθένει καὶ κλινήρης ἦν. J Moschos 2884 Α ὃς οὕτω γέγονεν
ἐλεήμων και φιλοσυμπαθής ὅτι ποτὲ εἷς τῶν νοταρίων αὐτοῦ κτλ. 2896 B
τοιαύτην σκληραγωγίαν ἔχοντα ὅτι εἰς τέσσαρας ἡμέρας μίαν προσφορὰν ἤσθιεν.
Loont. Neap. V. S. 1721 A δίδει αὐτῷ κόσσον τοιοῦτον ὅτι ἐπὶ τρεῖς ἡμέρας
ἐφαίνετο. ICana. 68 D τοιοῦτος μέγιστος ἦν ἐκεῖνος ὅτι τὴν θυγατέρα τοῦ ἀμηρᾶ
ἤρπαξεν.
1759. Owing to the naturo of their case, which involves a periodic stylo,
consecutive sentences are proper to the reflective language of cultivated
writers (1701). On the other hand popular speech is satisfied with the
simple mode of short paratactic clausos connected either by means of
tai (1710) or by some other co-ordinating particle (1701), frequently also
by means of ἵνα οι νά (1762), thus avoiding the frequont use of consecu-
tive sentences (1951). Whon, however, this becomos unavoidablo, Nuses
όπου οι ποῦ in the sense of its A producessor ὅς (2014. 2016-7).
FINAL PARTICLES.
1760. These are: 1 ὡς, ὅπως, ἵνα, Β-Μ ὥστε, Ν νά, διανὰ
οι γιανά, ὡγιανά.
Λ: ὡς, ὅπως (ἄν), ἵνα ;
P-G ἵνα, (ὅπως);
G-T: ἵνα, ὅπως ;
Τ-Β : ἵνα, ὅπως, ὡσίνα, ὡς ἄν);
Β Μ : ἵνα, νά, (ώστε);
M-N: (ïva, wolva), vá.
Now : νά, διανά, γιανά, γιανά.
1760. Νolo further that in archaic Grook ἵνα is often used as a relativo
advorb where. For d - Β ἵνα, as a causal ὅτι oι διότι, s00 1741.
1761. Of the above final particles A Greek used iva, óñws (mostly
ὅπως ἄν), loss frequently the weaker form os and rarely ὥστε. With the
close of A, however, os had disappeared from the language as a final
conjunction. Soon after όπως (now commonly without an followed.
suit, the room left vacant by ὡς and ὅπως being now filled by ἵνα. In this
way i came to be the almost exclusive means of expressing final
relation, and thus became unduly common, the more so as by this
time almost every final infinitive (the exceptions in App. vi. 15) could
be resolved by means of iva. But this excess in the use of iva soon led
to a reuction, and during the latter part of G, όπως reappeared and
resumed its old place beside vu, though now, being felt as a novel
particle, it was adopted rather as a literary alternative than as a collo-
τινουπόλει. Ρorph. Adm. 119, 18 κλῶσαι ἔχω νήματα μετὰ τῆς ἀτράκτου καὶ
ἠλακάτης ἵνα, μέχρις ἂν ζῶσιν οἱ Ρωμαῖοι, μὴ δυνηθῶσιν ἐξυψᾶναι ταῦτα.
416
PARTICLES FINAL.
[1761-1764.
quial term (cp. 1754. 1757. and 1762). The process thus indicated
may be illustrated by the following summary table.
iv.i
όπως
ώς
Total
Thuc. (entire)
53
156
2
211
Xen. (books i-iii × 3)
96
156
84
336
Polyb. (books i-v)
62111
62
NT (as far as Col.)
493
52
545
1762. The succeeding T period does not seem to have materially
influenced the course of process initiated: iva was further confirmed
in its dominant position, while oras served as a literary variety
frequently resorted to by individual writers, particularly Atticists.
With the opening of the B period, however, the process seems to have
attained its close, seeing that by this time iva had also appropriated the
prospective function of the modal av (1774), and become, in common
speech, the universal and exclusive moans of introducing a final and
prospective clauso, and of resolving a final or prospective infinitive
(2063). Such a universal use of iva led fastidious scribes to an attempt
at reaction by returning to ancient wore (cp. 1754. 1757. 1761), or reviving
the genitive of the articular infinitive as a substitute for short final clauses
(App. vi. 23). This final or telic usage of wσte + infin. for iva + subj.,
though not unknown to classical Greek (App. vi. 9), is characteristic of
G-B writers [influence of Latin ut?].
1763. In this way ὥστε stands after: ἀναγκάζειν (Mal. 112, 7), ἀξιοῦν (Acta
Pilati A, I, 2), βουλεύεσθαι (Mal. 385, 15), γράφειν (Mal. 385, 20), δεῖσθαι pray
(Mal. 248, 6), diaráσocolai ' decree' (Mal. 195, 13), elmeîv (Theod. ii. 528 B), eion-
yeîσbaɩ (Thcod. ii. 620 A), eũɣeσdai (Mul. 65, 3), ëxew 'be able' (Jos. Ant. 12, 9, 6,
and very often elsewhere; App. iv. 6), 0eonífew (Cyr. Scyth. V. S. 265 c), voµo-
θετεῖν (Theol. i. 476 Β), δρίζειν (Socr. 581 A), ὅρκοις δεσμοῦν (Theod. iii. 148 Α),
opov Tíleσ0α (Chal. 984 D), mapaẞáλλev 'request' (Apophth. 544 C), Tapaiveîv
ὅρον τίθεσθαι παραβάλλειν
(Theod. i. 481 A), napakaλeiv (Acta Barn. 7 bis; 8; Socr. 7, 37); mapéxew 'grant'
(Jos. Ant. 12, 4, 6).—åpéoxei (Athan. ii. 1180 B; Carth. 3), diayopeúetai'it is
decrood' (Antec. 2, 6), doneî (Mal. 113, 19);— ¿§ovvíav didóvaι (Eus. ii. 828 B),
ἐξουσίαν
öpuµá éσtiv ¿p0év (Acta Barn. 7), etc. etc. (Soo also App. vi. 10 & 15.)
1764. To a similar tendency points furthermore the frequent misuse of
&ore for iva with the subjunctive, notwithstanding the macaronic nature
of this construction. That the complete identification of iva and wore, so
notorious especially since G, may have been furthered by the confusion of
final and consecutive clauses, is also very probable (1951).
Basil. iii. ror ο ὥστε παντὶ λόγῳ ἐπάναγκες ἢ ἡ τῷ θεῷ ὑποτάσσεσθαι κατὰ
τὴν ἐντολὴν αὐτοῦ ἢ ἄλλοις διὰ τὴν ἐντολὴν αὐτοῦ. Acta Phil. in Hollad. 14
ἔρχεται ἐπὶ παράδοξον πρᾶγμα, ὅπερ λαληθήσεται εἰς γενεάς γενεῶν, ὥστε καὶ
κατέλθης ζῶν κάτω εἰς τὸν ῞Αιδην. 23 ἦλθον ἐπὶ σὲ ἀπενέγκαι πρὸς τὸν ἀπόστο
λον ὥστε ζώντα σε παρέξη μοι (ubi mulo -ξει). Acta Tho. 61, 13 ῥῦσαι με ἀπὸ
τῆς ἀναισχυντίας Χαρισίου ὥστε μὴ κατεξυγιάς μου ἡ τούτου μιαρότης. Theoph.
ŵcte katežoyciácḤ
270, 23 Μαυρίκιος τὸν Πρίσκον... ἐπὶ τὸν Ιστρον ποταμὸν ἔπεμψεν ὥστε τὰ
Σκλαβινῶν ἔθνη διαπεράσαι κωλύει. 309, 12 σπεύσωμεν ὥστε αὐτὸν θορυβήσωμεν
(ν. 1. -σομεν). Porph. Adm. 73, 23 οὕτω δὲ χρὴ συμφωνεῖν μετ' αὐτῶν ὥστε,
ὅπου ἂν χρεωποιηθῇ αὐτοὺς ὁ βασιλεύς, ποιήσωσι δουλείαν.
Ul Tho exclusivo usage of iva in Polybios and the NT writors leads to the
inforonco that, as early as Polybios' timo, this conjunction had gained such a
proponderance over the other synonymous conjunctions, that Polybios was com-
polled to use it, much as it thwarted his tondoney to avoid the hiatus. As a
mattor of fact, the other two conjunctions, às and "ros, must have passed com-
plotoly out of use.' SBriof, ii. 36-Evon Aristotle uses almost exclusively
va, and only a fow timos öras (WSchmid iii. 87).
417
E e
1765-1769.]
PARTICLES : FINAL.
1765. Still more macaronic is the fastidious construction Eus. ii. 825 c:
ἤρεσεν οὖν ὥστε . . . βεβαιώσαιμι.
βεβαιώσαιμι. (1953. App. iv. 14 f.)
1766. All these expedionts, however, as well as the zealous use
among scribes of the verbal infinitive, could not resist the influx of the
popular iva. As artificial and poor makeshifts, they remained foreign to
the Greck masses and had no visible influence on the living language. On
the other hand, iva having become very common-perhaps the commonest
word next to Kai and the article (1762)—sank to a proclitic, and admitting
as it did of an easy abbreviation, now lost its initial syllable and became
νά (ep. ὅπου ποῦ, οὐδὲν δέν, αὐτὸν τόν), a shortened form which forced its
way into literary compositions as early as T, and has ever since remained in
universal usage, not only as a colloquialism but as a literary term as well.
Rus. Alex. 441 ο πῶς αὐτοὺς καταλείψω πτωχοὺς καὶ Να με καταροῦνται ; id.
433 Β ὄντως ἀδελφέ, ὁ θεὸς καλὰ νὰ ποιήσῃ μετὰ τοῦ δεῖνος. Alchem. 321, 5 ἕως
οὗ Νὰ καῇ. ib. 8 f. ἵνα ἔνι σφυρισμένον ὥσπερ λέπος καὶ νὰ ἔνι κεχρισμένον
γύρωθεν. ib. ο ὥστε νὰ ψηθῇ. 322, 9 ὥστε νὰ ψυχρανθοῦν. 323, 9 ὥστε νὰ θέσης.
ib. το ὥστε νὰ ἐξέβῃ ὁ ἀτμός, etc. etc. Porph. Cer. 693, 5 οφείλει διδόναι λίτρας
ἑπτά, δηλονότι νὰ ἔχῃ ῥύγαν νομίσματα δώδεκα.
9
1767. Another noticeablo feature in the post-christian history of ἵνα
(vd) is that, in consequence of its undue frequency, it gradually lost its
classical force, and thus called for some compensation. This was sought,
as early as T, in the attempt to restore its ancient associate as as
a strongthoning prefix, so that the double final conjunction as iva or
rathor ὡσίνα (cp. ωσότι 1754) and ὡς νὰ (ofton changed to ὡς ἄν 1773f.)
now made its appearance and had a considorable run.
α. Ωcina for ἵνα or όπως : Athan. ii. 824 Α ηξίωσαν τοὺς εὐνούχους ὡείνα
συστάσεως τύχωσιν οἱ ἄπιστοι 'Αρειανοί. Charth, 1254 D. Apophth. 92 Β ἐδόθη
ποτὲ εἰς Σκῆτιν πρὸς ὀλίγα ισχάδια καὶ ὡς μηδὲν ὄντα οὐκ ἀπέστειλαν τῷ ἀββᾶ
᾿Αρσενίῳ ὡείνα μὴ ὕβριν πάθη. Doroth. 1676 ο οὐ λέγει πολλῇ βουλῇ ὡcina
μετὰ ἑκάστου βουλεύηται. 1Canan. 73 D ὡείνα ἔχωσιν οὗτοι κέρδος καὶ κούρσος
τὰς καλογραίας τῆς πόλεως. ib. σκουτάριον ἐβάσταζων ἔμπροσθεν τούτου μέγιστον
παρὰ φύσιν ὡciNa θαυμάζωσιν ἀπὸ τούτου τὰ μωροθαύμαστα ἔθνη τῶν Μουσουλ-
μάνων. Ducas 3r, 6 τοῦ αἰτῆσαι ἀγωγὴν καὶ βοήθειαν ὡcina καταπολεμήσῃ τῷ
να
Καντακουζηνῷ. 27, 8 ταῦτα ἐν τῇ διατάξει προστάξας ὡείνα πρὸς τὸν αὐτοκράτορα
Μανουὴλ ἐγχειρίσῃ καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἔσται τούτων ἐπίτροπος. 165, τι κἀκεῖ ἐλθέτω
εἷς ἐκ τῶν οἰκείων καὶ πιστοτάτων σου ὡείνα περὶ τούτου (τοῦ) σκέμματος ἴδωμεν
τί ἄρα καὶ πῶς ποιήσωμεν. 173, 12 ὑπόσχομαι τῇ ὥρᾳ ταύτῃ ὡείνα ἔσωμαι καθαρὸς
φίλος ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν καὶ εἰς τὸ ἑξῆς τοῦ Μουράτ [1] (Cp. nigo 1953.)
6. Ὡcan or ὡς ἂν for ἵνα or ὅπως : Eus. ii. 172 Β ὡς ἂν καταλήψοι. 636
ὡς ἂν ἀπαντήσοι. Agath. 47 (1312 6) ὡς ἂν ἀνακαλέσοιτο. Mon. Hist. 282, 3 ώς
ἂν δι' αὐτοῦ γνώριμοι ἔσοιντο. 285, 14 ὡς ἂν αὐτοῦ ἐν κατοχῇ ἔσοιντο. 200,
18 ὡς ἂν ἔσοιτο ἐξεπιστάμενος. 295, 23 ὡς ἂν ἐκεῖσε ἀπιόντες ὤνιον παράσχοιντο
τὴν μέταξαν. That the future optativo horo is a fastidious paraphrase of the
primary subjunctivo, will be soon in 1936 and 1953. |
1768. On the other hand, ús av, that is ás vá, is sometimes carefully dis-
tinguished from ὡς ἵνα (1773).
1769. The nood for a similar compensatory strengthening of iva was
folt still more urgently, when this particle had been reduced to va.
Ionce the proposition dia, which in its accusatival construction denoted
Ο
[The roverso also seems to have boon attempted in the combination of
iva and óñws, if we may judgo from a fow sporadic instances. Acropol. 62, 19
ἑξήκοντα χιλιάδες συνηθροίσθησαν Φράγκων ἵν᾽ ὅπως κατὰ Ῥωμαίων χωρήσωσιν.
Prodr. 4, 339 ὁ ταπεινὸς παρακαλῶ νὰ πῶς με βάνουν ἔσω. ib. 541 Να πώς τον
δ
παραβάλῃ.
418
PARTICLES: CONDITIONAL.
[1769-1771.
FIL
εἰ εἴγε,
εἴπερ
εἴτε,
purpose (1534, c), was now resorted to and led to the combination
did vá (later phonopathically contracted to yiavá 155, a), for to,' in
order to' (1523). And when this compound also began to lose its force,
as was superadded to did and gave birth to the tripartite complex wodid
vá (e. g. Roboam 55; Prodr. 3. 330), popularly contracted to (woyid vá)
wyià vá, still frequent in N speech as a mere emphatic vá.
Prodr. 3. 533 Διὰ νὰ μὴν παραψάλλῃ. 581. Διά νά τους ἔχῃ. 408 Διά νά
μηδὲν βλαβοῦμαι. Roboam γι. 96 Διὰ νὰ νικήσῃς.—So now ἔρχεται Γιανά or
wsianà ¿dî µè tà µária rov 'he comes himself in order to see with his own eyes.'
See also 1523.
CONDITIONAL PARTICLES.
1770. These are: A-B ei, éàv or av (v)—N vá, åve, ‘if,' ‘in
case.' In particular-
4 : εἰ, less frequently ἐὰν or ἂν (ν);
P-T: éàv or av, also el;
T-M: (éàv) áv, rarely el;
M-N: av (also ave [132b. 1488], và [ïva], å,—åviows kai, âv ev' kai,
ἂν τύχῃ νά, ἂν τύχῃ καί, etc. 1717).
1771. The conditional particle generally current in A compositions
was el. At the same time éáv, phonopathically contracted to av (150, c),
was, under certain conditions, also popular, and, in its by-form v,
even a favourite with a few writers (as Thuc., Xen., Polyb.).
A. According to SBrief iii. 7, the frequency, relation, and construction
of el and ár, with their combinations and by-forms (elye, eiπep, ei—äv, ñv,
kav), in Thucydides, Xenophon's Anabasis (books i-iii), and Polybios
(books i-v) is represented by the following summary table, which does not
include doubtful cases (1 el in Th., 3 el in Polyb., and to edv in Polyb.).
INDICATIVE
PRIMARY. SUBJ.
pf.
past.
present.
future.
secondary
subjunctice.
without
verb.
Total
[1]
ἐάν, ἄν,
ἤν, κἄν
Th.
9130115 88 [342] || 189 46 580
Th. 174 95
6 276
Xen.
An. i-iii
I
I I
24
8
[=44]
58 13
115
Xen.
An. i-iii
40 24
64
Polyb.
i-y
18
7 35
2
[62] 38 19 120
98
Polyb.
i-v 38 58 2
B. Thus the proportion of el to ¿dv (àv etc.) is in Th. 580 to 276; in Xen.
An. i-iii. 115 to 64; in i-v Polyb. 120 to 98. In the case of the last-named
writer, the prevalence of ei over èdv (13 times ar) is due to his grent fondness for
the participial construction and his over-scrupulous avoidance of the hiatus,
[] In the first column of totals the figures should be not 580 115 120, but 477
115 119; then in the last column of totals not 276 but 275, respectively. The
slight error stands in Brief's original table and may of course lie either in the
particular items added or in their addition.
present.
future.
without
verb.
Total
419
E e 2
1771-1774.]
PARTICLES: CONDITIONAL.
two facts which do not tend to confirm the general belief as to his having
written in the 'common' language of his time (013).
1772. In process of time the form éáv (äv), owing to its phonody-
namic superiority over ei (150, c; cp. 1780. 1987), met with still wider
acceptance, and towards the close of G its ascendency, now com-
monly in the contracted form av, became unqualified, while ei was
reduced to a mere literary alternative, almost alien to the common
language (hence sometimes it is even followed by the popular år,
2023b), save in certain conditional forms (1992), and current only in
the T-B period. By this time, however, the phonopathic principle of
dropping final v (219) interfered with the supremacy of av. Accord-
ingly av, while retaining its regular form before sonants and к, π,
↑ (App. iii. 24),- before all other consonants had now either to drop
v and thus shrink to simple a, or to adopt a protective suffixal -e
(132. 1717). It did both and so now survives in the three varieties:
ǎv, ä, äve (App. iii. 23 ff). See also 1987 ff.
T
Prodr. 4, 198 φα και δεκατέσσερα. Roboam 32 υἱέ μου, ἄ σε δώσῃ ὁ θεὸς
ἐκ τὰ καλὰ τοῦ κόσμου. ABC 13, 12 74, 2. 77, 8. 83, 48.
1772. For the strengthened complex ἂν (or ἄνε) τύχῃ καί, ἄν λάχῃ καί, ἀνίσως
καί, 500 177 f.
1773. Beside äv, (ă, äve), there is the particle vd which in M-N appears
frequently used in conditional and potential clauses. This is nothing
else than the popular form of the ancient conditional av (ẻàv) and modal äv
(1774)—the two having been phonopathically confounded since G. (Cp. wai
ἄν, καὶ νά ; πρὶν ἄν, πρὶν νά; ὡς ἄν, ὡς νά; ἕως ἂν, ὡς ἄν, ὡς νά ; ὅταν, ὅτι νά ;
ἕως ὅταν, ὥστε νά ; ep. also τῆς, τ'ς, τσῆ.)
âv
1774. As may be seen, the conditional av appears here closely associated
with the homophonous modal (potential and indefinite) av. It is true that
to judge from the literary compositions of all Ptimes, this particle succeeded
in maintaining its own, especially in the apodosis of subjective conditions
(1974), as late as B, but signs of its retreat, misconception, and misinter-
pretation are unmistakable even in early G times. However, it is
particularly during later G that it is very often confounded with the con-
ditional ár, and thus written éáv (infra a), especially aftor relativos (so in the
papyri since the IIIrd B.C., occasionally in Polybios, frequently in tho Sept.,
the NT, etc.).-With the close of G and the opening of T, dv succumbed
to the morphological and phonopathic agencies which militated against
postpositive construction and final -v (1700. 219). At this juncture, tho
great popularity of the proclitic iva [already shortened to vá? 1766] gavo
rise to an association and confusion of the two particlos. Hence from G
onward we find that iva, besides preserving its own function, is not
unfrequently used for the conditional and modal av, but in particular
for the latter. When further iva was shortened to vá (1766), this pho-
nomenon bocame the ordinary rule ['.
[ In some early cases of course the confusion of iva and av may be charged
to the copiers, as for instanco in Soxt. 19, 9 ina yàp nɑð' vñóðéσw kai ovyxwphon
τις πιστοτέρους εἶναι τῶν ἀλόγων ζῴων τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ευρήσομεν καὶ ὅσον ἐπὶ τῇ
ἡμετέρᾳ διαφορᾷ τὴν ἐποχὴν εἰσάγομεν. 64, 5 ἵνα δὲ καὶ δῶμεν ὅτι καταλαμβάνε
i'na dè kai
ται ὁ ἄνθρωπος, μήποτε οὐκ ἂν ἐνδέχοιτο δεῖξαι ὅτι ὑπ' αὐτοῦ κρίνεσθαι δεῖ τὰ
πράγματα. 65, 31 ἵνα δὲ καὶ κατὰ συγχώρησιν δῶμεν ὅτι οὐδεὶς τοῦ ὑποτιθεμένου
συνετοῦ συνετώτερός ἐστιν οὔτε ἐγένετο οὔτε ἔσται, οὐδὲ ὡς πιστεύειν αὐτῷ προσ-
he. In those passages tho introductory iva-followed as it is by cai-is probably
a corruption of v-kaì or el-ai in the presence of such parallels as ib. 65, 6 AN
γὰρ καὶ λέγουσιν ὅτι τῷ σοφῷ πιστευτέον, ἐρωτήσωμεν αὐτοὺς ποίῳ σοφῷ . . . ; οὐχ
ἕξουσι γὰρ εἰπεῖν ; and 69, 4 εἰ μέντοι καὶ συγχωρήσειέ τις τὰς μὲν τῶν κατὰ
420
PARTICLES: CONDITIONAL AND TEMPORAL.
[1774-1776.
α. 'EÀN for modal ἄν: Xen. Mem. 3, 10, 12 ᾧ ἐὰν ἁρμόττῃ. 4, 2, 29 ὅσαι
ἐὰν ἀγνοήσασαι τὴν ἑαυτῶν δύναμιν κρείττοσι πολεμήσωσιν. Hier. 1, 14 ὅσα ἐὰν
λέγητε καὶ ὅσα ἐὰν ποιῆτε. [Dem. 24, 105 ὅ,τι ἐάν τις ἀπολέσῃ. 47, 43 ᾧ ἐὰν
κελεύσω Αθηναίων.] Lys. 753 οὓς ἐὰν βουληθῶσιν. Arist. 'Αθ. πολ. 30, 2 οἳ
εάν. Athen. 9, 399 fin. οὓς ἐάν λάβωμεν. ΝΤ passim (over 6o times; in Luke
17, 33 ὃς ἐὰν ἀπολέσει read -σῃ, 1990). Matt. 5, 19, 10, 14. Barn. 7, 11 ds É ÀN
θέλῃ. 11, 88 εὰν ἐξελεύσεται. Hermas Vis. 3, 2, 1 ὃς ἐὰν πάθῃ. Sim. 7, 7 ὅσοι
ἐὰν πορευθῶσιν. 9, 2, 7 ὅσα ἐὰν σοι δείξω. Great Louvre Pap. 2374 ὅπου ἐὰν
αὐτὸ ἱδρύσῃς. 224 οἷον ἐὰν βούλῃ and so on in @ -B passim.
ib.
b. "INA for modal ἄν: Epict. 1, 29, 16 Σωκράτης ἵνα πάθῃ ταῦτα ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αθη-
ναίων ; 2, 19, 21 τοῦ γὰρ ἵν᾽ ὑμεῖς τὴν ἀρετὴν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἄλλοις ἴσην ἢ καὶ κρείτα
τονα ἔργῳ ὑπολάβητε ; 4, 1, 142 ἵνα τις σοι τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ μόνον εἴπῃ ! Orig. iii.
297 ο περὶ ποιον γὰρ ἀγρὸν ἵνα καταγινώμεθα ; Macar. 545 D πως τις ἵνα αὐτοὺς
ἐξεύρῃ καὶ διακρίνῃ καὶ ἐκβάλῃ ἐκ τοῦ ἰδίου πυρός; 600 € ὥσπερ ἵνα ή (= ὥσπερ
ἂν ᾖ, Μ σὰν νὰ ἔνι) γυνὴ ἱμάτια ῥακώδη περιβεβλημένη (ep. 608 c ὥσπερ ἐὰν
ᾖ βασιλεὺς καὶ εὕρῃ πτωχόν τινα). Chrys. i. 613 Α πῶς ἵνα μὴ ὑστερήσωμεν
ἀπὸ τῶν δώρων κυρίου ; Pallad. 1113 Β ἐὰν γὰρ μάθω, ἵνα αὐτῷ συντύχω.
Acta Pil. i. B 4, 1 ἡμεῖς ἵνα εἴπωμεν τῇ μεγαλειότητί σου τί εἶπεν αὐτός.
5, 2 τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἵνα παραλάβης! ib. 10, 6 σήμερον λέγω σοι
ἀλήθειαν ΙΝΑ σε ἔχω εἰς τὸν παράδεισον. [Amphil.] 22 Β ἐὰν ἔλθω εἰς τὴν
αὔριον ἕως ὥρας ἕκτης τί ποιεῖς ; ὁ δὲ ἔφη· ἵνα ἀποθάνω . . . καὶ ἵνα ἀποθάνῃς τῇ
ἁμαρτία, ζήσῃς δὲ τῷ Χριστῷ μου. ib. 22 ~ ἐὰν ζήσῃς ἕως αὔριον ἵνα βαπτισθῶ.
Anast. Sin. 205 A ὡς ἵνα τις εἴπῃ ὅτι καὶ ὁ σίδηρος κτλ. Leont. Neap.
V. S. 1685 Β ὡς ἵνα (= ὡσὰν εἰς αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐβαπτίσθητε.
ὡς ἵνα ἐχώριζεν αὐτὸν μάχαιρα ἀπὸ τοῦ σώματος αὐτοῦ, οὕτως τοῦ λόγου τούτου
ἤκουεν. 1736 Α ἐμωροποίει ὡς ἵνα μὴ οἶδεν ὡσὰν εἰ μὴ ἠπίστατο) τί ἔλεγεν
αὐτῷ.For more examples bearing ospecially on this modal ἵνα see App. iv. 12.
1075 C
c. N: Ná=äv, as : vá 'nes ( = eînes äv) Sachl. 3, 113; 114; 165, etc.—So now :
Νὰ μ' ἐθώρειες καὶ νὰ μ' ἐλυπούσου, if you saw me you would pity me. καὶ νὰ
μὴν τό 'ξερες πως σὲ θέλω, ἔπρεπε νά 'ρθῃς even if you did not know that
I wanted you, you ought to have come ; Νὰ σ᾿ ἔπιανα γὼ καὶ σοῦ ἔδειχνα • had
I caught you I'd have shown you."
1775. The preceding conditional and modal function of va now
explains how the restrictive combination of raì và has become an equiva-
lent of καὶ ἂν (κἂν) or καὶ εἰ ' even if, even though" (1994).
,
TEMPORAL PARTICLES.
1776. These are exhibited in the following summary (1995 ff.):
A. Referring to a-
definite past and present :
1. when : ὅτε, οπότε, ὡς ἐπεί, ἐπειδή.
2. as long as, until : ἕως οὗ or ὅτε), μέχρι
οι ἄχρι (οὗ οι ὅτε), ἔστε.
3. before, until : πρίν (ή), πρότερον ἤ.
4. after, since: ἐπεί, ἐπειδή —ἐξ οὗ, ἀφ' οὗ.
5. as soon as: ἐπεὶ οι ἐπειδὴ with τάχιστα
(οι πρῶτον), ὡς τάχιστα.
6. whilst : ἕως, ἐν ᾧ, ἐν ὅσῳ, ὅσον χρόνον.
B. Referring to an-
indefinite present or the future:
I. ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ὡς ἄν, ἐπάν, ἐπειδάν ;
20. ἕως (ἄν οι ου), μέχρι οι ἄχρι (ἄν οι
οὗ), ἔστ᾽ ἄν.
3. πρίν (αν).
5. ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα, ὡς ἂν τάχιστα.
6".
φύσιν ἐχόντων φαντασίας εἶναι πιστάς κτλ., and 75, 3 εἰ μέντοι καὶ δοίημεν καθ'
ὑπόθεσιν εἶναι τι τῆς ἀληθείας κριτήριον κτλ. So too Anast. Sin. 240 A NA γὰρ
καὶ μηδὲν ὅλως ἀνθρώπινον διεπράξατο μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα μήτε ἔφαγε μήτε ἔπιε
μήτε ὕπνωσε κτλ.
421
1777-1785.]
PARTICLES: TEMPORAL.
[1777. Obs. Considered from a grammatical point of view, temporal con-
junctions are but a variety of relative particles, and so duly come under
that head (2010-26). On the other hand, their too frequent association
with av (1998), particularly in P-B Greek, entitles them to a place among
the conditional particles as well (1770). While then, referring to those
sections for thoir syntactical treatment, we shall consider thom here
merely from a morphological point of view.]
1778. As classified above, temporal conjunctions show at a glance
that for each particular case of time designation, A Greek possessed
agreat variety of interchangeable particles. Such a wealth of synonyms
the popular language could not be expected to preserve concurrently
through all P-N times, but had, in accordance with 1487 ff., to drop
most of them one after another in favour of the strongest or most
familiar representative among them. The process involved in each
particular case will be indicated in the following sections.
1779. 1. When :
""
Α: ὅτε, ὁπότε, ὡς, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή
ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ὡς ἄν, ἐπάν, ἐπειδάν
P-N: oτav, ús åv, åß ov, äµa.
1780. In this class ὅτε, ὁπότε, ὡς, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, had eventually to make
room for their associates ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ὡς ἄν, ἐπάν, ἐπειδάν, owing to
the presence in the latter items of the stronger sound a (146; cp. also
ei, éáv, äv, 1772. 1987). Again the latter group being still too numerous
to be concurrently preserved, popular speech dropped, one after
another, the majority of these representatives and preserved only
ὅταν and ὡς ἂν or rather ὡσάν, two particles still fully surviving in N
and applying equally to the past, present, and future (1999 ff.).
1781. It is noteworthy, howovor, that öre, Sπóтe and as also lingered through
all P-M periods alongside of their stronger corrolatives, especially in the cul-
tivated languago. Hence they still survive in N, but in a more or loss modified
form or sonse: (éws Ŏte, ŵs bte) ŵσTe vá, 'until;'ús as soon as ' (cp. 1793).
1782. From őrav popular N has evolved two collateral forms. Ono, övтav
(which occurs oven in Prodr., as 6, 71), with a later differentiation övter,
which was obtained either by dissimilation or through the influence of the
literary oтe, applies, like orav, oqually to the past present and future.
Another still more rocont item, which is due to the untenable position of final -v
(219), has been evolved in the form of (öτav, öt 'v, őt 'va) őtɩ vá, which by roason
of và applies to tho futuro (éπeidáv) 'when.'-In this way N speech now
possesses for the notion when the two ancient representatives őrav and doáv-tho
lutter mostly shortened to σáv-and three more or less dialectal modifications
of the former : övrаv (Prodr. 6, 71; ABC 26, 6), övtev (a contamination of őτav
and ὅτε), and ὅτι νά. As a matter of course, ὅταν, ὅνταν, und ὅντεν usually
drop their final -v before consonants except «, π, ↑ (219. App. iii. 24).
1783. In their A usago, őre and őтav are now represented in Crotan spoech
by ὅντε" and ὅτι νὰ respectively : ὅντεν ἤθελε, ὅντε θέλει—ὅτι νὰ θελήσῃ.
1783". On á' oû or ȧpoû seo 1790-2. On åμa 1794.
1784. As long as, until :
éws (oû or őтe), µéxpɩ or ŭxpi (ov or őte),
ἔστε
ἕως ἂν οι ὅταν), μέχρι οι ἄχρι (ἄν or
οὗ, also ὅτε), ἐστ᾽ ἄν.
1785. In this class cor' av was dropped as early as A times, leaving
the field to έως and μέχρι (or ἄχρι). In process of time these two
representatives began to extend beyond their A usage (past and
present) and thus apply to the future also, whether standing absolutely
422
PARTICLES : TEMPORAL. [1785-1789.
or with the relatives οὗ, ὅτου, ὅτε. The latter alternative, particularly
in the combinations ἕως (now ὡς 152) οὗ, ἕως (ως) ὅτου, and ἕως (ως)
ὅτε, soon met with popularity, and gradually resulted in the con-
tractions &s où (less correctly as où) or rather wooù (sometimes now
changed by association to όσο), ως ὅτου or rather ωσότου, and ὡς ὅτε
or rather ὡσότε, all of which still survive in the N contracted forms
ὡσοῦ οι ὥσου, ὥστου (from ὡς ὅτου), and ὥστε (from ὡς ὅτε), (1757 ),
further ὡς που or rather ὥσπου Sachl. I, 341 ὡς ὅτε ν' ἀποδιαντραπῇ
1,
ὥστε ν' ἀποκινήσῃ.
1786. Observe further that the frequent construction of ἕως, in particular
ἕως οὗ οι ἕως ὅτου and ἕως ὅτε, with the subjunctive (2000)—a mood
associated even during G with the regular presence of av or iva, B-N vá,
(App. v. 19)—gave rise to the practice in Ñ of adding và to the temporal
conjunctions in all cases referring to the future : ώσου νά, ὡς ὅπου νά or
ὦσο που νά, ὥστου νά, ὥστε νά, sometimes further reduced to ὡς να.
this way we can trace the following four stages:
Ι ἕως οὗ
ἕως ὅτου
ἕως ὅτε
II ὣς οὗ
ὡς ὅτου
ὡς ὅτε
III (ώσου ἵνα)
(ὡσότου ἵνα)
(ώστε ἵνα)
ώσπου νά
In
IV ώσου (or ώσο) να
ώστου να
(ἕως ὅπου
ὡς ὅπου)
ὥστε νά
ώσπου νά
αν
See 152 [1] and add: GKaibel 646 α ὡς (write ὡς οὗ καιρὸν ἔχεις.
Then Test. Patr. 1117 A καθ᾽ ὅσον χρόνον ἐνεῖχον τῷ Ἰωσὴφ ἕως ἵνα πραθῇ
(for 1 ἕως πραθείη) Alchem. 323, 13 ὥστε ἐρυθριάσῃ. 321, 9 ὥστε νὰ ψηθῇ.
322 9 ὥστε νά ψυχρανθοῦν. 323, 9 f. ὥστε νὰ θέσῃς, ὥστε νὰ ἐξέβῃ ὁ ἀτμός.
334, 9 ὥστε νὰ καλ. Porph. Adm. 266, ἕως ἂν πᾶσα ἡ φαμιλία αὐτῶν
ἐκοιμήθη. Ν: Prodr. 3, 429 ὥστον Νά το 'πιτύχη. 4, 433 καὶ τσιγαρίζεται
κανεὶς ὡς ἵνα τὸ ἐπιτύχῃ. Chron. Mor. Prol. 1065 ἕως οὗ να τους προφέρωσιν.
Κ. 206 ὡς να μάθῃ τίποτε. ABC 87, 2 ὥστε νὰ ποῦν τὰ χείλη σου.
1787. 3. Before, until : πρίν (*), πρότερον ή-πρίν (ἄν). In this
class there was no need for complex changes, since πρότερον ἢ was felt
Ĥ
as a distinct comparative of πρίν (προ): sooner than, earlier
than. Hence πρίν, especially in its strengthened form πρὶν ἂν (later
changed to πρὶν νά, 1773. 2008), had fair chances of an extensive and
lasting usage, and would have survived down to our time-its present
usage is limited to cultivated speech-were it not for the inter-
ference of two rivals. One was the 4 adverb πρὸ τοῦ, or rather
προτοῦ, which began to assume also the functions of πρὶν in its con-
struction with either the infinitive or the subjunctive (2004), and
that as early as G, if not earlier (cp. Polyb. 2, 63, 2; 68, 1. 3, 25, 11;
57, II. 5, 49, 2; 100, 5).
2
NT Gal. 2, 12 προτοῦ γὰρ ἐλθεῖν τινας. 3, 23 προτοῇ δὲ ἐλθεῖν τὴν
πίστιν ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα. John 13, 19 ἀπάρτι λέγω ὑμῖν προτο
Γενέθαι (for which in 14, 29 πριν γενέσθαι. cp. Matt. 6, 8. Luke 2, 21.
22, 25. John 1, 49. 17, 5.
Acts 23, 15). JMoschos 2989 D προτον
ἐγκλεισθῶ ἀπίην. Mal. 447, 15 προτοῦ ἐπιρρίψωσιν εἰς τὰ κτήματα.
Chron. 627, 8 προτοῦ πᾶσα ἡ πόλις καθῇ. Theoph. 318, 13 προτο
ἑνωθῶσιν αὐτοῖς οἱ τρισχίλιοι.
1788. Both in this and in its advorbial usage, προτού still fully obtains in
N speech, as: προτοῦ ἀκούσω, προτοῒ με ἀποχαιρετίσῃ,—ἦτον ἀποθαμμένος
προτοί. 500 1789.
1789. The other rival of πριν referred to (1787), though more recont,
has proved moro formidable. This was the N vocable πριγιοῦ οι πριχού (the
accont aftor προτοῦ), also πρίχου, an obvious contamination of πριν and tho
Latin prius (quam) in which the latter decidedly prevails. It is this
423
1789-1793.]
PARTICLES: TEMPORAL.
Θαν.
novel intruder which has considerably dislodged #piv by interfering with
most of its functions, and is now used beside and in preference to протоû.
Its current forms are #ρıyıοû (i. e. Latin prius), прiɣоû (EGeorg. Belis. 396.
also av. 481; sometimes corrupted to movpxov), and pixov (after prius).
All these N representatives of ancient pìv are still constructed in its
spirit, that is with or without vá, according as npiv would have required
the infinitive or the subjunctive (2003 ff.), as: протоŶ нá μe yvwpion=пpiv
γνωρίσαι (γνῶναι) με ; προτοῇ ἀκογεω = πρὶν (ἂν) ἀκούσω; πριχοῇ νά με ἰδῇ = πρὶν
¡deîv µe, πpixoŶ me idñ=πpìv (àv) ïdŋ µe 'priusquam me videat.'
ου
1790. 4. After, since: ἐπεί, ἐπειδή-ἐξ οὗ (also ἐξ ὅτου), ἀφ᾽ οὗ
(or åp öтov). Of these four representatives, the two former
being identical in form, and associated in sense, with their
causal correlatives reì and Tedn 'since,' were absorbed by
them (1739). Of the remaining two, è oû or eέ orov made
room for ἀφ᾽ οὗ or ἀφ᾽ ὅτου (just as ἐξ for ἀπό 15ο6. 1568 b),
which still survives chiefly in the form ad' of or rather åpov.
>
στου
>
1791. Beside d'ou there is a collateral form an' s, which is very common
in N speech. This seems to be a direct survival of the ancient (Ionic) and
Hellenistic form an's (sc. μépas; cp. 650), which for obvious reasons
in our texts regularly appears in the Atticized form of åò̟'Ĥc (cp. Åò̟' őte
or ἀφύτε [Sopt. 2 Esdr. 5, 12. Mal. 176, 8], ἀπ' ὅτε [so Mal. 176, 18], ἀπ' ὅντε”,
ån ÖNTAN 1782).-Sopt. 1 Macc. 9, 27 àp's huépas. So Ps. Sol. 18, 11 & 12.
Acts 20, 18 and пршτηs ǹµéρаs & Ĥc (cp. è auris Pol., NT). Leont. Noap.
V. J. 88, 19 οὕτως οὐδὲ ἐγὼ ἔγνων ἁμαρτίαν γυναικὸς ἀφ᾽ ἣς ἐγενήθην. Porph.
Adm. 248, 7 áø' Ĥc.
>
S.
ว
1792. It will be observod that in 1776 class 1 and 4 (1779 ff. and 1790 f.) are
now represented in N by ὅταν ὅνταν, ὅντεν, sometimes also Υπόταν), ώσαν or
rath :r σáv, åp’vỡ, and ảπ' îs,['] Of these surviving representatives those which
show the greatost aberration from A (that is ὅνταν, ὅντεν, ὅπόταν, ()σάν, ἀπ' ἧς),
are carefully avoided by modern scribes and trained speakers. On the other
hand őтav (Óπóтav) and ả‹p' oû, owing to their classical form, are favourite terms
with them, in particular ö7av 'when,' for the past, present, and more especially
the future, while ap' oû'since,' applies to both time or cause, and refors either
to the past or to the present and future,
*
·
1793. 5. As soon as: ἐπεὶ πρῶτον, ἐπεὶ τάχιστα, ὡς τάχιστα,—ἐπειδὰν
τάχιστα, ὡς ἂν τάχιστα. These combinations need no special treatment
here, since their fate was determined by that of their respective
constituents ἐπεί, ἐπειδάν (1780) -- ὡσὰν being left to perform the
office of both. The only noteworthy departure is that the ancient
(Ionic ?) and Hellenistic temporal usage of os 'when,' 'as soon as,'
has survived, especially in the sense of ouk ë¶oŋ kai, as soon as
(1714. 2115). It often appears in its strengthened form kabos (5184.
1434), sometimes also in the amplified combination &ore (or wote) vá,
also doo vu (1785 f.), especially in cases referring to the future (1781).
ὅσο
NT Luke 7, 12 ὡς δὲ ἤγγισεν τῇ πύλῃ τῆς πόλεως καὶ ἰδοὺ ἐξεκομίζετο τεθνηκὼς
μονογενής υἱός. 19, 5 καὶ ὡς ἦλθεν ἐπὶ τὸν τόπον, ἀναβλέψας ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν πρὸς
aúróv. (So furthor 1, 41; 44. 2, 39. 5, 4. II, I. 15, 25. 19, 29; 41. 22, 26.
23, 26. Acts 10, 7; 25. 13, 29), 14, 5. 16, 10; 15. 17, 3. 18, 15.
19, 21. 20, 18. 21,
1; 12. 27, 27. 28, 4.) John 11, 20 † vûv Mápta vìc Hicovσev ötɩ 'Inooûs épxerai,
ὑπήντησεν αὐτῷ. ib. 29 ἐκείνη ὡς ἤκουσεν, ἐγείρεται ταχὺ καὶ ἔρχεται πρὸς αὐτόν.
(So further 2, 9. 4, 1; 40. 6, 12; 16. 7, 10. 11, 6. II, 32; 33. 19, 33. 21, 9.)
[For obvious reasons the literary or revived form őтe (dπúтe) 'when,'
though common in cultivated speech, especially for the past when, is loft out of
account here.
424
NEGATIVES οὐ [1793-1798.
AND AND
μή.
Pallad. 104 A καὶ ὡς ἔκρουσε τὴν θύραν, ἀνέωξεν ὁ γέρων νομίζων ὅτι διακονητὴς
αὐτοῦ ἐστι. καὶ ὡς εἶδεν αὐτὸν ἄλλον, ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον. Leont. Neap.
V.J. 88, 12 f. ὡς οὖν ἠσθένησεν ὁ ἀββᾶς τὴν ἐπιθάνατον ἀσθένειαν, ἀπῆλθον εἰς
ἐπίσκεψιν αὐτοῦ ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ἕως ἑκατὸν ψυχῶν, καὶ λέγει φέρετε λαμπρά.
ὡς οὖν ἦλθεν τὸ θυμιατήριον γέμον τῶν λαμπρῶν, ἔλαβεν καὶ ἐκένωσεν αὐτά κτλ.
1794. 5. In connexion with ὡσὰν and ὡς, it may bo observed that
T-B Greek has changed the A adverbial and prepositional άua (1671 ff.)
to a purely temporal conjunction in the sense of as soon as (without subse-
quent καί). This particle has ever since been fairly popular perhaps owing
to the presence in it of two a's), though present uncultivated speech uses
more commonly ὡσὰν or ὡs, also εὐθὺς ποῦ (in Crete ὅτι καὶ for ἐπεὶ τάχιστα,
ὅτι νὰ for ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα 1783).
Acta Xanth. 75, 14 ἅμα δὲ εἶδεν ὁ Πέτρος τὸ πλοῖον εἶπεν μνησθεὶς τοῦ δράματος.
Basilic. 2, 2, 235 ΑΜΑ τις καταδικασθῇ ὑπόκειται τῇ ἀπὸ τῶν νόμων ποινῇ.
Cer. 391, 19 ἅμα εἰσέλθῃ. - So now Α γράψῃ, Α εἶδε, etc.
"
Porph.
1795. Another rather puzzling feature, peculiar to M-N speoch, is the con-
struction of rð (indeclinable) with the future subjunctive or the past (aorist)
indicative, in the sense of when or rather as soon as, commonly referring to
the past. This phenomenon, which is often mistaken for a relic of substantival
infinitive (App. vi. 28), is now obsolescent.
[Prodr. 6, 119 εὐθὺς τὸ βράσεις (read εὐθὺς ὡς BpácH [v] App. iii. 191.) τὸ θερμὸν
λέγει.] Chron. Mor. Prol. 338 χαρὰν μεγάλην ἔλαβε τὸ ἀκυγε τὸ μαντᾶτον.
554 ΤΟ ΔΟΥΝ τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Φραγκῶν ἐδράμασιν. Κουγκ. 198 τὸ ἰδῇ τὸ
πῶς ἐμίσσευαν τὰ Φράγκικα φουσᾶτα. 859 τὸ ἰδῇ τὲς σκάλες ἔδραμαν. 4455 το
ἰδῇ τον ὁ δοὴ Μαφρὲς ἐπροσηκώθηκε τον. Belth. 1264 καὶ τὸ ἰΔῆς ὁ Βέλθανδρος
ἐγνώρισεν ἐκεῖνον. Corn. Α 1097 το ΙΔΟΥΝ μιὰν κόρην μορφη, ἡ πεθυμιά 'ν' ἡ
πρώτη. 1608 παιγνίδι μᾶσε φαίνεται τὸ ἰΔΟΥΜΕ φουσκωμένη ͵ ἀπὸ μακρὰ τὴ
θάλασσα καὶ ἄγρια και θυμωμένη. Ε 843 τὸ μάθω πῶς ἐπίθανε, ζιμιὸ τὴν ὥρα
κείνη | πιάνω μαχαίρι νὰ σφαγῶ. 1835 τό 'KOYCEN ὁ Ρωτόκριτος τ᾿ ἀναθιβάν᾽ ἡ
μάνα | τὰ λόγια τζη 'σὲ λογισμοὺς μεγάλους τὸν ἐβάνα. 1990 χαρά μεγάλην
ἤπαιρνε τὸ θέλαν πῇ πῶς γιαίνει.
C. PARTICLES OF NEGATION.
1796. There are in Greek two simple negative particles :
o not, with its compounds οὐδείς, οὐδέ, οὔτε, οὔπω, οὔποτε,
οὐδαμῶς, etc.
MH
Mr don't,with its compounds μηδείς, μηδέ, μήτε, μήπω,
μήποτε, μηδαμῶς, etc.
I. Morphology of the Negations.
1797. Both on and µn have been in continuous use through all past
times. But while μὴ is still fully preserved in N speech (also as μήν,
Prodr. 6, 278; cp. App. iii. 20, e), où has become obsolete since the
last century, lingering only in a few proverbial expressions, and in
Pontos, where it survives in the by-forms oŸki, 'ki, K. (Pachom.
Mon. [ed. IMigne] 98, 1352 A οἱ Πόντιοι ογκ ἔχω λέγουσιν, ὅπερ ἕτεροι
Δὲν ἔχω 2061. Cp. ΔΜαυροφρύδης 689 and G Hatzidakis 161, 2.)
Α
1798. The neuter adjectives οὐδὲν and μηδὲν were, even in classical
antiquity, sometimes used as adverbs for οὐδαμώς and μηδαμώς, that
is for an emphatic où and µǹ ‘not at all,' ' not in the least,' ' by no means W
[1] ΔΜαυροφρύδης (627 f.) cites : A 412. Ω 370, υ 266. Aesch. Prom. 47. 128, 180.
344. 834. 953. Pors. 757. 844. Sept. 426. Agam. 588. 1038. 1375, etc. Soph. Αj. 11. 115.
425
1798-1799.]
NEGATIVES οὐ AND μή.
This usage, appealing as it did to the propensity of the common
language for emphasis, became very popular in the course of P. At
the same time its great frequency gradually involved a weakening of
its original force, and thus we very often find oudèv (after 4 also
in the form οὐθὲν (27) and μηδὲν employed as mere equivalents of οὐ
and µǹ respectively.
Matt. 13, 34 καὶ χωρὶς παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς. 26, 62 ΟΥ̓ Δὲν ἀποκρίνῃ
τί οὗτοι σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν ; so Mark 14, 60. Acts 4, 21 ΜΗΔΕΝ εὑρίσκοντες
τὸ πῶς κολάσωνται αὐτούς. 15, 9 καὶ οὐθὲν διέκρινεν μεταξὺ ἡμῶν τε καὶ αὐτῶν.
25, το Ιουδαίους ΟΥ̓Δὲν ἠδίκησα. 2 Cor. 12, 11 Ο Δὲν γὰρ ὑστέρησα τῶν ὑπερλίαν
ἀποστόλων. Gal. 2, ΔΕΝ
6 ὁποῖοι ποτὲ ἦσαν οὐδέν μοι διαφέρει. 4, 12 ΟΥΔΕΝ με
ἠδικήσατε. 5, 3 ὑμᾶς οὐδὲν ὠφελήσει. Rev. 3, 17 οὐδὲν χρείαν ἔχω. 1 Cor. 10, 25
& 27 ΜΗΔὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν. 2 Cor. 11, 5 λογίζομαι γὰρ ΜΗΔΕΝ
ὑστερηκέναι τῶν ὑπερλίαν ἀποστόλων. Phil. 2, 3. 4, 6 ΜΗΔΕΝ μεριμνᾶτε. 2 Thess.
3, τι ἀκούομεν γάρ τινας περιπατοῦντας ἐν ὑμῖν ἀτάκτως ΜΗΔὲν ἐργαζομένους ἀλλὰ
περιεργαζομένους. Jas. I, 6 αἰτείτω δὲ ἐν πίστει ΜΗΔΕΝ διακρινόμενος. Acla
Pilati 2, 4 λέγει ὁ Πιλᾶτος πρὸς ῎Ανναν καὶ Καϊάφαν· οὐδὲν ἀποκρίνεσθε πρὸς
ταῦτα ; ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν ὁρίζει ἵνα ΜΗΔΕΝ ὀμνύωμεν. 4, 2 παρακαλῶ ὑμᾶς ΜΗΔΕΝ
ποιήσατε κακὸν εἰς τοῦτον τὸν ἄνθρωπον. 5, ι δέομαί σου, κύριέ μου, ἵνα ΜΗΔΕΝ
παραχωρήσῃς φονευθῆναι τοῦτον. 8, 1 καὶ πῶς οὐδὲν ἐφοβοῦντο οὕτω καὶ τοὺς
γονεῖς ὑμῶν οἱ δαίμονες ; 9, 2 λέγετε ὅτι οὐδὲν ἀγαπῶ ἐγὼ τὸν Καίσαρα. 10, 2
ΟΥ̓ΔΕΝ φοβῇ σὺ τὸν θεόν, ὅτι ἐν τῷ κρίματι εἶ; Acta Tho. 3, 16 ἀπῆλθεν δὲ
πρὸς ᾿Αββάνην τὸν ἔμπορον ΜΗΔΕΝ ὅλως τι μεθ᾿ ἑαυτοῦ κομισάμενος ἀλλ᾽ ἢ τὸ
τίμημα αὐτοῦ μόνον. Acta Xanth. 70, 2 διατί καὶ αὐτὸς οὐδὲν ἀποκρίνῃ ;
Hesych. Ο Δὲν ἀντὶ τοῦ ογ.
où
1799. In the subsoquent T-B period the compounds οὐδὲν (no longer οὐδὲν)
and undèv bocame completely equivalent to simple où and un, so that tho
disyllabic and monosyllabic forms appear indiscriminately interchanged.
As time went on, the disyllabic forms grew more popular and gradually
becamo, like their originals and associates où and un, proclitic particles, as
is clearly indicated by the metrical compositions of tho succeeding M
period. Here we see furthermore that the proclisis has gone so far as to admit
of abbreviation (apliaeresis). Now as the original distinction between ou
and un was still clearly folt in popular speech, an abbreviation of both
οὐδὲν and μηδὲν was inadmissable. The difficulty was then obviated
in this way. Οὐδὲν being moro pliable owing to its sonantic initial sylla-
blo was reduced by aphaeresis to dév, a form ever since universally curront
in N speech (cp.ἵνα νά). On the other hand, μηδὲν being still successfully
opposed by the old-ostablished and still prevalent μn, retreated before it,
the more so as the dropping of its initial syllable μη- would produce δέν,
that is another οὐδέν.
Alchem. 326, 24 εἰ δὲ θέλεις να ΜΗΔΕΝ γένῃ βαθύ. 329, 32 ἐὰν γοῦν οὐΔΕΝ
ἐκαθάρισεν. 330, 9 νὰ ΜΗΔὲν ἔβγῃ ὁ ἀτμός. Span. 79-80 ο ψέγει φρόνιμος ποτὲ
τινὰ διὰ πτωχείαν, | οὐδὲ τὸν πλούσιον ἐπαινεῖ διὰ πλησμονὴν χρημάτων. οὐκ ἔνι ἐκ
προαιρέσεως ὁ πλοῦτος καὶ ἡ πενία. 90-2: Με προτιμᾶσαι συγγενοῦς ἀγάπην παρὰ
90-οι
124. 165. 276. 280. 940. 1072. 1114. Ant. 511. 550. 711. 716. El. 519. 716. 1005, otc. Eur.
Al. 310. Andr. 88. 161. 463. Hoc. 372. Bace. 209, 787. Sup. 803. Hippol. 968, etc.
Ar. Eqq. 1272.
Nub. 538 οὐδὲν ἦλθε ubi Schol. παρέλκει τὸ δὲν ὡς καὶ παρ᾽
Ὁμήρῳ οὐδὲν ἔτισε. Θέλει εἰπεῖν οὐκ ἦλθε συνήθως. So too Vesp. 20, 356. 443.
482. 1321. 1478 ubi Schol. ΟΥΔΕΝ παύσεται : ᾿Αντὶ οὐ παύσεται, ὡς παρ' Ομήρῳ
{ Λ 412] ' ὅτ' ἄριστον ᾿Αχαιῶν ΟΥ̓Δὲν ἔτισεν' ἀντὶ τοῦ οὐκ ἔτισεν. 548. 616. το8ο,
1293. Vesp. 20. 356. 444. 482. 1321. 1478. Ran. 735. 1112, 1117. ote,
34. 8, 112. Xon. Cyr. 2,1, 16. An. 5, 4, 19.
P1. Rop. το, 597 A. Arist. Pol. 2,
Diod. 2, 167, 7 [Toubn.] Malch. Phil. 241, 22. 246, 6.
Proc. Cuos. 3, 48, 1. Aguth. 25, 9.
6, 7. 3, 7, 5, 5. 9, 1. 6, 1, 14.
247, 1. Mon. Hist, 311, 20,
Hdt. 5,
426
NEGATIVES οὐ AND μή. [1799-1802.
44 κρασὶν
φίλου. 188 τίποτ' ἂν δώσῃς δέ τινα ΜΗΔέΝ τον ονειδίσῃς. 195 τῶν νέων δὲ τὰς
συμβουλὰς πολλὰ ΜΗΔΕΝ τας πιάσῃς. 223 ἀφῆκεν την ὡς ἄχρηστον καὶ ΟΥΔΕΝ
την ἠσχολήθη. 229 Ογκ ἐλαφρύνω τίποτε, ΜΗΔὲν παρακαλῆτε. Prodr. 1, 103 ἂν οὐκ
ἐθάρρεις κολυμβᾶν, κολυμβητὴς Μὴ ἐγένου. 194 οὐκ εἶσαι χωρικόπουλον οὐδὲ
μικρὸν νινίτσιν. 230 ὡς δ᾽ οὐ φωνῆς ἀκήκοα οὐδὲ τινὸς λαλίας, | οὐδὲ ψιλοῦ, προσ-
νεύματος οι σμικροτάτου λόγου. 3, 42 ψωμὶν ΜΗΔέΝ τον δώσουν.
ΜΗΔΕΝ τον δώσουν. 1οι οὐδέν ἐνι διὰ λόγου σου τ' ἀδρὸν τὸ παξιμάδιν. 90 καὶ σὺ
φύλαν οὐδὲν ἔχεις νὰ δῷς διὰ τὴν ψυχήν σου. 204 αἴ τσούκκα, ποῦ τὰ χώρεσες καὶ
πῶς οὐδὲν ἐσχίστης ! 152 στανεό μου δὲν ἐβγαίνω. 234 τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα δέν τα λέγω.
245 παρὰ μικρὸν Δὲν (?) ἔλειψεν ἵνα με θανατώσουν. 4, 4082 διὰ νὰ ΜΗΔΕΝ βλα-
βοῦμαι. 5, 63 αὐτὸς μικρὸς οὐδὲν εἶδεν τοῦ λουτροῦ τὸ κατῶφλιν. 6, 137 καὶ
οὐδὲν τρέχουν τὰ σάλια μου, ὡς τρέχει τὸ ποτάμιν. (so 235). 368 ὅλους χωρεῖ ἡ
ἐκκλησιὰ κ' ἐμὲν οὐδὲν ἐχώρει. 7ι αὐτὸς ὅνταν ἐμάθανεν ποτὲ δὲν ἐκτενίσθην.
276 ('s) τὰ δῶ (ubi male τάδω) δὲν ἔχεις τόπον. 278 μὴν βλέπῃς τὸ ἀπάκιν μας,
δὲν εἶσαι σὺ διὰ τοῦτο. Span>. 183 & 321 Δὲν ἦνε. 200. 273. 308. 336. ΔΕΝ
ἔχεις. κἂν δὲν ἔχῃς. Belth. 193 καὶ οὐδέν σε το λαλοῦμεν. ποιο ἀκούοντα
ὁ Βέλανδρος ο Δὲν ἀπηλογήθην. Hermon. Index πδ' διατί οὐδὲν ἤθελεν ὁ
᾿Αχιλλεὺς νὰ ὑπάγῃ εἰς τὸν πόλεμον. MGeorgilas Const. 6 διατί δὲν ἔχω φρόνησιν.
153 τὰ τρίμερα τῶν Χριστιανῶν, θεέ μου, Δέν τα θέλεις. 165 Δὲν πρέπει. 277 καὶ
τὶ νὰ λέγω οὐκ ἠμπορῶ, καὶ τί νὰ γράφω οὐκ οἶδα. 345 ΟΥΔΕΝ ἠξεύρω τί νὰ πῶ,
οὐδὲ τὸ τί νὰ λέξω. 349 καὶ νὰ ΜΗΔὲν λυποῦνται. 359 οι δύναμαι νὰ γράφω
πλεύν. 397 ΜΗΔΕΝ το ἀμελῆτε. 427 στέκει καὶ οὐδὲν σιμώνει.
464 ΜΗΔΕΝ
ἀναμελήσετε, ποσῶς ΜΗΔὲν σταθῆτε. 570 τὴν Δὲν ἐθυμήθηκα. 580 Δεν βλέπετε
τοὺς ἀσεβεῖς. 645 Δὲν εἶνε. 651 τὰ στάμενα οὐδὲν ψηφᾷ εἰς τοὺς ἀνδρειωμένους,
ποσῶς οὐκ ἔχει λογισμόν. 720 Δὲν ἔχει τόσην δύναμιν. 997 Δὲν τό 'χα εἰς τὸν
νοῦν μου.
1029 Δὲν ἔχω πλειόν, etc., etc.—and so on ever since
dèn
1800. From the preceding illustrations it becomes obvious that the N particle
μηδὲ (now obsolescent) is not the ancient μηδέ, but an abbreviated form of μηδὲν
(= μή), due to phonopathic causes (219). 221).
II. Use of the Negations.
1801. Considered absolutely or in association with a finite
mood, the two simple negative particles où or oỷk (N dèv 1799)
and un differ in this, that où simply denies the existence or occur-
rence of something, and so is direct or objective independent,
external);-while un prohibits the occurrence of something, and
so is indirect or subjective (dependent, internal). Accordingly où
serves to state negatively or deny, and un to prevent something.
Viewed from this relative function, où and have a parallel
in or and iva by which they are often preceded respectively
(1803. 1940. 1945. 1952).
1802. The difference between où and µǹ is also observed in their
respective compounds: οὐδεὶς and μηδείς, οὔτε and μήτε, οὔποτε and
μήποτε, οὐδαμῶς and μηδαμώς, etc. (1796).
Dom. 8, 68 ἐγὼ θρασὺς καὶ ἀναιδὴς οὔτ᾽ εἰμί, μήτε γενοίμην, Soph. Αnt. 500
ἐμοὶ τῶν σῶν λόγων ἀρεστὸν οὐΔέΝ, ΜΗΔ' ἀρεσθείη ποτέ. ib. 685 οὔτ᾽ ἂν δυναίμην,
ΜΗΤ᾽ ἐπισταίμην λέγειν. Dom. 19, 149 ὑμῖν δὲ τοιοῦτο μὲν οὐδὲν οὔτ᾽ ἦν, ΜΗΤΕ
γένοιτο τοῦ λοιποῦ.
1802). The preceding remarks (1801-2) still substantially obtain
in N. (However, see 1821.)
427
1803-1807b.] NEGATIVES οὐ AND μή.
1803. Agreeably to the distinction drawn above (1801):
2. Où stands in all clauses where or is admissible, that is
with the indicative, and dependent secondary subjunctive (also
infinitive and participle), when they stand in declarative,
interrogative or causal clauses ;-so further in definite relative
and temporal clauses. E. g.
οὐ δυνατόν ἐστιν-ἔλεγεν ὅτι οὐ δυνατὸν εἴη (or ἐστίν).—τί οὐκ ἤλθομεν ;
ἐπεὶ ταῦτ᾽ οὐκ ἐγένετο.—ὅθεν οὐκ ἔστιν ἐξελθεῖν.
So too P-N où, P-N oůdév, N dé (1798 f., cp. 1820).
1803. For où (N dè") in direct questions see 2046 & 2049.
1804. 3. Α. Μή stands with the primary subjunctive and the
imperative throughout; also with the independent secondary
subjunctive when it expresses a wish (optative proper 1923-4;
cp. 1904). In short, μή stands in all sentences expressing 2
direct wish, demand, prohibition, fear, supposition and the like.
Μὴ ὀργίζου, Μὴ ὀργιζώμεθα, Μὴ ὀργισθῇς. Μὴ γίνοιτο ταῦτα.Men.
Mon. 366 Μή μοι γένοιθ᾽ ἃ βούλομ', ἀλλ᾽ ἃ συμφέρει. Chares 3 Ν μή φθάνει
τοῖς εὐτυχοῦσι, Μὴ δοκῇς εἶναι κακός. Xen. An. 3, 2, 25 δέδοικα Μὴ ἐπιλα-
θώμεθα τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ. Pl. Rep. 2, 376 Λ δν μὲν ἂν ἴδῃ ἀγνῶτα χαλεπαίνει
Ο Δὲν δὴ κακὸν πεπονθώς· ὃν δ᾽ ἂν γνώριμον, ἀσπάζεται, κἂν ΜΗΔὲν πώποτε
ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἀγαθὸν πεπόνθῃ.
1804". So too in P-N (savo in the conditional subjunctive, for which see
1808), as N: ΜΗ γελᾷς, ΜΗΝ τρέχωμε", φοβοῦμαι ΜΗ με ἰδῇ.
1805. After expressions of fear, a negative clause dependent
thereon is rendered by μὴ οὐ lest not, that not, as: δέδοικα ΜΗ
οὐ γένηται τοῦτο (1825 f. 1956 ff.).
So too P-N" μὴ οὐ, now μὴ δέν, μήν πᾷς (μήπως ?) καὶ δέν (1957.
2049").
1806. B. My is used further—
(1) In all final clauses, that is to say after όπως, ὡς, ἵνα, ' (in order)
that,' expressed or understood:
Xon. An. 1, 4, 18 τὰ πλοῖα ᾿Αβρακώμας κατέκαυσεν "ΝΑ ΜΗ Κῦρος διαβῇ.
Mom. 2, 1, 2 παρακαλεῖς ἰατροὺς ὅπως μὴ ἀποθάνῃ. Soph. Αi. 986 οὐ δῆτε
αὐτὸν ἄξεις δεῦρο Μή τις αναρπάσῃ ;
1806. So too N μή", μήν πᾷς (also μήπως ?) (2049).
1807. (2) In the protasis of purely conditional sentences after εἰ, ἐάν,
av 'if,' whether.'
ἄν
Eur. Frg. 5 εἰ μὴ καθέξεις γλῶσσαν ἔσται σοι κακά. Pl. Rep. 473 D ΕΝ ΜΗ
ἢ οἱ φιλόσοφοι βασιλεύσωσιν ἢ οἱ βασιλῆς φιλοσοφήσωσιν, οὐκ ἔστι κακῶν παῦλα
ταῖς πόλεσιν. Χen. Mem. 4, 3, 3 φῶς εἰ Με εἴχομεν ὅμοιοι τοῖς τυφλοῖς ἂν
ἦμεν.
For N 800 1808,
1807. But when the condition borders on cause (sinco), tho nogation is that
roquired by causul clausos, namely οὐ (1803. 1945, but cp. 1947) : [Isocr.], 1 44 μὴ
θαυμάσῃς, εἰ πολλὰ τῶν εἰρημένων οὐ πρέπει σοι. Xon. Mom. 2, 3, 9. Th. 1, 121
Dom. 38, 18. Th. 3, 55 εἰ δ᾽ ἀποστῆναι τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων οὐκ ἠθελήσαμεν (= ὅτι δ᾽
οὐκ ἠθελήσαμεν). Seo RKühner ii. 748f.
428
NEGATIVES οὐ AND μή.
[1808-1812.
1808. However, sometimes we find où also after ei purely conditional
(RKühner ii. 748), as : Soph. Αi. 1131 εἰ τοὺς θανόντας οὐκ ἐᾷς θάπτειν (beside
κἂν Ηλεὶς ἐᾷ ib 1184). Isae. 3, 47 οὐδ᾽ ἐὰν οὐδὲ μίαν τῶν ψήφων οἱ εἰσαγ
γέλλοντες μεταλάβωσιν. In P and especially G-B compositions this becomes
more and more frequent, even among Atticists, and in NT it already
constitutes the rule : 34 times εἰ οὐ against 4 times εἰ μὴ (and that even with
past tenses, as John 15, 22; 24. 18, 30. Acts 26, 32), not counting of course
the exceptive εἰμὴ = except. Hence in conditional clauses μὴ has ultimately
disappeared from popular speech in favour of οὐ, οὐδέν, δέν.
Louvro Pap. 2 (before 160 B.C.), 9 (p. 103) εἰ οὗ ἀντίκειται ἀξίωμα καταφατικόν. ΝΤ
1 Cor. 1, 6 εἰ γὰρ οὐ κατακαλύπτεται γυνή, καὶ κειράσθω. John 10, 37 εἰ οὐ ποιῶ
τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πατρός μου μὴ πιστεύετέ μοι· εἰ δὲ ποιῶ, κ.τ.λ. 1 Cor. 15, 13 ei
ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν. 26, 12, and often. Aristid. 13, 286, 304 εἰ δ᾽ οὐκ ἂν
φύγοιεν τὴν αἵρεσιν. 29, 568, 24 εἰ Πελοποννήσιοι οὐκ ἀποκνήσουσι. 33, 604, 77
εἰ δ᾽ οὐ μέτρια ἐποίουν, and often (WSchmid ii. 62). Didache 6, 2 εἰ δ᾽ οὐ δύνα-
σαι, ὃ δύνῃ τοῦτο ποίει. So further 7, 2. 10, 6 εἴ τις οΥ̓κ ἔστι. 12, 4 εἰ δὲ ΟΥ̓κ
ἔχει τέχνην. ib. 5 εἰ δὲ οὐ θέλει. Barn. 6, 19 εἰ οὖν οὐ γίνεται τοῦτο. Apophth.
141 ο ὅταν ἐν εἰρήνῃ τυγχάνῃς καὶ οὐ πολεμῆσαι. Ael.Ν.Α. 109, 29 εἰ τὸ ἐκ
τοῦ Διὸς νεῦμα ἀτελὲς οὔτε πρὸς τὴν Θέτιν ἐγένετο, οὔτε πρὸς ἄλλον τινὰ γένοιτ'
ἄν. Callin. 79, 14 εἰ δὲ οι σωφρονεῖς. 114, 17 εἰ δὲ καιρὸς οὐκ ἔστιν.
119, το εἰ οΥ̓κ ἔστιν ἀπὸ θεοῦ.
€
122, 7.
1808. The gradual retreat, during G-B, of μὴ from the conditional protasis
seems to have been occasioned by the need of perspicuity. It will be remembered
that by this time the indicative and subjunctive, phonetically considered, had
become indistinguishable (779). We shall further see (1918" and App. v. 16) that
un with the primary subjunctive had by this time appropriated the work of the
prohibitive imperative, so that μὴ + ind, was confounded with μὴ + subj. = imprt.
that is (εἰ μὴ λέγεις was mistaken for μὴ λέγης = μὴ λέγε. The confusion then
of negative supposition with prohibition seems to have led to the substitution
for μὴ οἱ οὐ, οὐδέν, Ν δέν.
1809. (3) In the protasis of indefinite or conditional temporal clauses
with a 'ever,' expressed or understood.
Pl. Phaed. 65 ο τότε κάλλιστα λογίζεται ἡ ψυχὴ ὅταν ΜΗΔὲν τούτων αὐτὴν
παραλυπῇ, Μήτε ἀκοὴ, Μήτε ὄψις Μήτε ἀλγηδών Μήτε τις ἡδονή. Xen. Cyr.
2, 3, 2ο ἀεὶ ὁπότε μὴ ἄλλο τι σπουδαιότερον πράττοιεν, ταύτῃ τῇ παιδιᾷ
ἐχρῶντο.
1810. (4) In indefinite or conditional relative clauses ('whoever,' 'any
one-'), the nature of which is often made clearer by the presence of
av 'ever.'
Pl. Apol. 21 D & ΜΗ οἶδα οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι. Fur. Ino, Fr. 417 ἐπί-
σταμαι ὁρᾶν θ' ἃ δεῖ με, κοὐχ ὁρᾶν ἃ μὴ πρέπει. Th. 3, 89 ανθρώπους διέ-
φθειρεν (ἡ θάλασσα) ὅσοι μὴ ἐδύναντο φθῆναι πρὸς τὰ μετέωρα ἀναδραμόντες.
Dem. 21, 64 πάντες ἴσμεν Χαβρίαν οὐ προσιόνθ᾽ ὅποι Μὴ προσῆκεν αὐτῷ.
1811. In conditional and relative clauses the second member, if any, is
negatived by oithor οὐ οι μήτ
>
Pl. Rep. 5, 451 η σκοπῶμεν εἰ πρέπει ἢ ο. Rop. 1, 339 Α νῦν ἔμαθον δ λέγεις· εἰ δὲ
ἀληθὲς ἢ μὴ πειράσομαι μαθεῖν. Xon. Mom. 3, 6, το οἶσθα ὁπόσαι τε φυλακαὶ
ἐπίκαιροί εἰσι καὶ ὁπόσαι Μή, καὶ ὁπόσαι τε φρουροὶ ἱκανοί εἰσι καὶ ὁπόσοι μή εἰσιν.
1812. In direct negative questions, où (âp' ov) is used with the indi-
cative, when the answer anticipated is in the affirmative (yes), while
μὴ (ἆρα μή), μή πως οι μήπως, μὴ γάρ, is used when the answer antici
pated is in the negative (no). (2046.)
Soph. Εl. 997 ογκ εἰσορᾷς; “don't you soo ?' Ο. C. 883 ἆρ' οΥ̓χ ὕβρις
429
Uor M
1812-1816.]
NEGATIVES οὐ AND μή.
ταῦτα ; is not this insolence? Ar. Vesp. 457 οΥ̓κ ἐς κόρακας ; οὐκ ἄπιτε ;
Pl. Apol. 28 D Μὴ αὐτὸν τὸν ᾿Αχιλλέα) οἴει φροντίσαι θανάτου καὶ κινδύνου ; Xen.
Mem. 4, 2, 1Ο Μὴ ἀρχιτέκτων βούλει γενέσθαι ; An. 7, 6, 5 ἆρ᾽ οὖν Μὴ καὶ
ἡμῖν ἐναντιώσεται ὁ ἀνήρ ; See 1747 f. & 2046.
1813. So too with the subjunctive : Pl. Rep. 335 Ο ΜΗ οὕτω φῶμεν ; ' shall
we not say so?' Dem. 21, 35 δ τοιοῦτος ΜΗ Δῷ δίκην; Pl. Rep. I, 337 Β ΜΗ
ἀποκρίνωμαι ὧν προείπες ΜΗΔΕΝ ;
1814. Infinitival participial and adjectival expressions are
negatived by où or un according as, in substituting for them
a finite verb, où or un would be required.
Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 5.
Pl. Apol. 37 A πέπεισμαι ἑκὼν εἶναι Μηδένα ἀδικεῖν.
Dem. 18, 201 ὁ ὑπὲρ τοῦ ταῦτα Μὴ γενέσθαι ἀγών. Pl. Prot. 352 D πολλούς
φασι γιγνώσκοντας τὰ βέλτιστα οὐκ ἐθέλειν πράττειν. Xen. Mem. 4, 2,
39 κινδυνεύω (= δοκῶ) ἁπλῶς οὐδὲν εἰδέναι. [Isocr.] 1, 42 νόμιζε ΜΗΔΕΝ
εἶναι τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων βέβαιον. Xen. An. 4, 5, ΙΙ τῶν στρατιωτῶν οἱ
Μὴ δυνάμενοι διατελέσαι τὴν ὁδὸν ἐνυκτέρευσαν ἄσιτοι καὶ ἄνευ πυρός. Pl.
Phaedr. 79 Β ἡμεῖς γε τὰ ὁρατὰ καὶ τὰ μὴ τῇ τῶν ἀνθρώπων φύσει ἐλέγομεν.
Gorg. 457 c τὸν οὐκ ὀρθῶς χρώμενον τῇ ῥητορικῇ μισεῖν δίκαιον καὶ ἐκβάλ-
λειν καὶ ἀποκτιννύναι, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ τὸν διδάξαντα. Xen. An. 2, 6, 26 Μένων τὸν
Μὴ πανοῦργον τῶν ἀπαιδεύτων ἐνόμιζεν εἶναι.
1815. This general rule applies strictly only to A, though even
here où is not rarely replaced by uh, which latter may have been
favoured by reasons of euphony (in that it prevented hiatus, especi-
ally in the frequent case after the article: ó où, rù où, etc.). P Greek
followed a greater licence, and thus we find that, towards the
beginning of our era, un had supplanted où before all infinitives,
participles and adjectives, irrespective of their nature.
Diod. 3, 18, 5 καθ᾽ ὅλου δ᾽ ἀποφαίνεται μήτε εἰς σύλλογον ἔρχεσθαι πρὸς τοὺς
ἀλλοεθνεῖς, Μήτε τὸ ξένον τῆς ὄψεως τῶν προσπλεύντων κινεῖν τοὺς ἐγχωρίους. Το
1, 39, 8 ὁ δὲ συγγραφεὺς οὗτος οὐ μόνον ἡμῖν φαίνεται μὴ τὴν φύσιν τῶν κατὰ τὴν
Αἴγυπτον τύπων, ἀλλὰ ΜΗΔὲ παρὰ τῶν εἰδότων τὰ κατὰ τὴν χώραν ταύτην πεπυ-
σμένος. 2, 38, 1 λέγεται κατοικεῖν ἔθνη πολλά, καὶ τούτων ΜΗΔὲν ἔχειν τὴν ἐξ
ἀρχῆς γένεσιν ἔπηλυν, πρὸς δὲ τούτοις Μήτε ξενικὴν ἀποικίαν προσδέχεσθαι
πώποτε, Μήτε εἰς ἄλλο ἔθνος ἀπεσταλκέναι. Plut. Alcib. et Cor. comp. 4, 5
ἀνεχώρησε γὰρ Μήτε πεισθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμουμένων Μήτε πείσας τοὺς συμπολε
μοῦντας. Cim. 6, 2 προσετίθεντο γὰρ οἱ πλεῖστοι τῶν συμμάχων ἐκείνῳ τε
καὶ ᾿Αριστείδῃ τὴν χαλεπότητα τοῦ Παυσανίου καὶ ὑπεροψίαν μὴ φέροντες. Agos.
30, 4 δ δὲ Μήτε προσθείς τι μήτε ἀφελὼν Μήτε μεταγράψας εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ πλῆθος
τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων. Brut. 28, 5 Με ναῦν ἐνήρη, Μὴ στρατιώτην ἕνα, Μὴ πόλιν
ἔχοντες συνῆλθον εἰς ταὐτό [1].
1816. In the NT infinitives are invariably negativod by μή, nover by οὐ ;
and participles mostly (in Callin. always, with ono solitary exception,
106, 26 οὐκ εἰδώς) by μή, occasionally (chiefly in cases of antithosis) by οὐ.
Mark 12, 18 λέγοντες Μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν. so Matt. 22, 23. Luke 20, 7 ἀπεκρίθησαν
Μὴ εἰδέναι. 30 2, 26. Acts 23, 8 ; 2 Cor. II, 5, etc.-Matt. 18, 25 ΜΗ ἔχοντος αὐτοῦ
· so
ἀποδοῦναι ἐκέλευσεν, κτλ. 22, 25 Μὴ ἔχων σπέρμα ἀφῆκεν τὴν γυναῖκα. Acts 12,
19 Ηρώδης ἐπιζητήσας καὶ μὴ εὑρὼν ἐκέλευσεν, κτλ. Matt. 22, 12 πως ήλθες ὧδε
Μὴ ἔχων ἔνδυμα γάμου ; 22, 11 εἶδεν ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἐνδεδυμένον ἔνδυμα γάμου.
+
[1] On the whole plutarch psos in indirect discourgo, according to Stogian's
statistics, μὴ 3rd times as against οὐ 418 times after verbs of saying, thinking, etc.
(HAHolden, Plut. Dom. p. 174, i.)
Hol
430
NEGATIVES OÙ AND
οὐ
[1816-1820.
AND μή.
•
x Pet. 1,
8 ὃν οὐκ ἰδόντες. 2 Co. 4, 8-9 ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι ἀλλ᾽ οὗ στενοχωρού
μενοι, ἀπορούμενοι ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐξαπορούμενοι, διωκόμενοι ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐγκαταλειπόμενοι,
καταβαλλόμενοι ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι [-λυόμενοι ?].
Luko 13, ΤΙ ἦν ΜΗ
δυναμένη ανακύψαι. 1, 20 ἔσῃ σιωπῶν καὶ μὴ δυνάμενος λαλῆσαι. John 3, 18 ὁ
δὲ ΜΗ πιστεύων ἤδη κέκριται ὅτι ΜΗ πεπίστευκεν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ μονογενούς
υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ. Mart. Pauli 112, 4 ὁ Παῦλος ἦν Μὴ σιωπῶν τὸν λόγον. Callin.
80 9, απηγόρευσαν ὡς ΜΗ δυναμένους θεραπείας τυχείν. 80, 12 χρώμενος ΜΗΔΕΝOC
ἰατροῦ.
1817. It appears then that, owing to the gradual retreat of οὐ before
οὐδὲν in popular speech (1797 ff.), μὴ negatives, in all post-christian
unconventional compositions, every infinitive, even that which, if re-
solved to a finite mood, would in A require ὅτι οι ὡς (1801); it can also
negative any participle, not only relative or articular, but also temporal.
1818. With the gradual retreat of the infinitive and participle, the
negation appropriated by these verbal nouns attempted to pass over to
their analysis (App. vi. & 2169) as well; hence un now occurs before
the indicative also, in cases where formerly only où would have been
admitted (hence even after ὅτι, ἐπεί, etc.) [1]. On the whole, however,
its aggression on the indicative met with a successful resistance on
the part of the old established où for oùdév (dév, 1798 ff.), and the instances
testifying to its intrusion are not of such number and character as to
have influenced the ultimate issue.
Jos.
Jos. Apion. I, 23 διήμαρτον ὅτι Μὴ ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἡμῶν βίβλοις ἐνέτυχον. Cleomed.
37, κι ὅτι τοίνυν μή ἐστι πρὸς ἀνατολῇ. John 3, 18 ὅτι Μή πεπίστευκεν.
Ant. 14, 4, 4 εἶδον ὅca Μὴ θεμιτὸν ἦν τοῖς ἄλλοις ἀνθρώποις. Luc. D. Mort. 21, 2.
D. D. 2, 1. ἐπεὶ μή. id. Hist. conscr. 3, etc. ὅτι μή, ὡς μή, ib. 29, D. D. 20, 10.
Aristid. 1, 36. 10, 115, 122. 34, 648, 132. 46, 157, 194; and elsewhere (WSchmid ii.
60-62). Just. Cohort. 1. Apol. 1, 26 ὅτι ΜΗ διώκονται. Sext. 12, 16. 113, 12.
8, 1 ἐπεὶ μὴ δυνάμεθα. Clem. Α. i. 393 Α. Athen. 7, 5 (P. 297 D). Eus. ii. 293 C.
Athan. i. 368 ο διατί μὴ ἀντέστης Λιβερίῳ; Cyrill. H. Catech. 7, 9 ὅτι μὴ πάντως
καλεῖται. Mart. Petri 100, 16 ὅτι Μὴ μετὰ γνώμης αὐτοῦ ἀνῃρέθη. Mal. 476,
16 διατί Μὴ τοῦτο ἐποιήσατε; Porph. 128, 21 ἄρχοντας, ὥς φασι, ταῦτα τὰ ἔθνη ΜΗ
ἔχει.
1819. On the other hand, οὐ for prohibitive μὴ is very rare, as : Sept. Ex. 21,
21 ἐὰν δὲ διαβιώσῃ ἡμέραν μίαν ἢ δύο οὐκ ἐκδικηθήτω (contrary to 1804, but due
to 1890).
1820. With the gradual loss of the secondary subjunctive, then of the
infinitive, and the participle, in which cases A-P used οὐ or μή, accord-
ing to the nature of the case, the scope of either negative was clearly
marked out. Accordingly où (ovdév, N dèv) maintained itself abso-
lutely in the indicative (except in 1958; cp. 1805), as well as in the
conditional subjunctive (after ear or av), while μ asserted itself as the
only legitimate negative in the imperative, then in the prohibitive and
final subjunctive (after ἵνα, Ν νά). The following summary table will
illustrate the case:
Α-Μ οὐ κλαίω, G--Μ οὐδὲν κλαίω, Α Ν δὲν κλαίω.
Α-Β μὴ κλαῖε, G-N μὴ (μηδέν) κλαίῃς, -Β ἵνα (ὅπως) μὴ (μηδέν) κλαίῃς,
Β-Ν νὰ μὴ κλαίῃς.
Α-Β εἰ μὴ κλαίεις, α β ἐὰν μὴ (μηδέν) κλαίῃς, Β-Μ ἂν μὴ (μηδέν) κλαίης or ἂν
οὐ (οὐδὲν) κλαίῃς, Ν ἂν δὲν κλαίῃς.
(Soo also dependent clausos 1931-2061.)
[1] For the occurrence ovon in Atticistic compositions of this phenomenon (in
which ouphony may have played a part, 1815), seo also WSchmid i. 50; 99 f.;
245 ff.; ii. 60 ff.; iii. 88-90.- For Antiph. 5, 21 Őri mi éyéveto, 800 2032.
ὅτι Μὴ ἐγένετο,
431
1821-1826.] NEGATIVES οὐ AND μή οὐ μήζν).
1821. Nevertheless the former interchange of oử and µǹ) is still shown in
the N compounds μηδείς, μήτε, μηδέ, etc., where in either case the forms
beginning with μη- are even commoner than those beginning with οὐ-.
III. Idiomatic use of the Negations.
1822. After expressions of hindering it is an invariable rule,
and after those of forbidding, denying, refusing, guarding, desisting,
and the like, it is the usual practice, to negative the supplementing
infinitive by μή.
Eur. Ion 391 κωλυόμεσθα μὴ μαθεῖν. Χen. Cyr. 1, 4, 14 Αστυάγης ἀπη
γόρευε Μηδένα βάλλειν. Dem. 15, 9 Τιμόθεος ᾿Αριοβαρζάνει ἀπέγνω ΜΗ
ΜΗΔΕΝΑ
βοηθεῖν. Xen. Hell. 7, 3, 7 οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι ἠρνοῦντο Μὴ αὐτόχειρες γενέσθαι,
εἷς δὲ ὡμολογήκει.—So after ἀπειπεῖν, ἀπαυδῶν, ἀντιδικεῖν, ἀντιλέγειν,
ἀπείργειν, ἀποτρέπεσθαι, ἐναντιοῦσθαι, παύειν, etc.
So still in N: τὸν ἀπαντῶ νὰ μὴ φύγῃ, δέ σ' ἀμποδίζω νὰ μὴ μιλῇς.
1823. The negatives οὐδεὶς and μηδείς with their correlatives are
often intensified in two ways:
α. Either by separating their component parts οὐδὲ or μηδὲ andeis (οὐδὲ
eis, undè eís, etc.), an expedient resorted to through all A-P times (629 f.);
b. Or by replacing es by an indefinite relative pronoun or adverb, such as
ὅστις, (ὁστισοῦν), ὁποῖος, (ὁποιοσοῦν), ὑπότερος, ὁπωσοῦν, etc., a practice chiefly
resorted to in P Greek, as: οὐδ᾽ ὁστισοῦν, οὐδ᾽ ὁποιοσοῦν, ' no one whatever,
οὐδ᾽ ὁπότερος = οὐδέτερος, οὐδ᾽ ὁπωσοῦν = οὐδαμῶς.
[c. The seemingly analogous Biblical combination οὐ . . . πᾶς for οὐδὲ εἷς,
'not one,' is a Hebraism which never found its way into the common
language.]
1824. When two or more homogeneous negatives succeed
each other, the resulting sense is emphatically negative or
emphatically affirmative, according as the second or last negative
is a compound or simple word : οὐκ-οὐδείς no one.” οὐδεὶς οὐ
('there is no one who is not '), 'every one.'
Eur. Or. 1155 οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδὲν κρείσσον ἢ φίλος σαφής. Pl. Phil. 19 B
ἄνευ τούτου ογδεὶς εἰς ΟΥΔΕΝ ΟΥΔΕΝὸς ἂν ὑμῶν οὐδέποτε γένοιτο ἄξιος. Xen.
Symp. 1, 9 οὐδεὶς οὐκ ἔπασχέ τι ' every man was affected.
1824. In N speech the resultant in either case is negative : δὲν ἔμεινε
κανεὶς οι κανεὶς δὲν ἔμεινε ' no one remained.
1825. a. The heterogeneous combination µ où 'lest not' precedes
the subjunctive after verbs of fearing (1805. 1956).
Th. 3, 57 δέδιμεν Μὴ οὐ βέβαιοι ἦτε. Xon. Λn. 3, 1, 12 ἐφοβεῖτο . . . ΜΗ ΟΥ̓
δύναιτο ἐκ τῆς χώρας ἐξελθεῖν.
So too P-M μὴ οὐ, α-Μ μὴ οὐδέν, Ν μὴ δέν. δυο 1957.
1826. b. Mǹ où 'not to,' instead of simple un is used with the infinitive
after expressions either negative in themselves, or interrogative but
implying a negative answer; also after expressions implying some-
thing not feasible or something improper (ep. 1822).
Pl. Rep. 4, 427 Ε ὡς οὐχ ὅσιόν σοι ὄν ἐστι Μὴ οὐ βοηθεῖν δικαιοσύνῃ παντὶ τρόπῳ.
Phaod. 72 D εἰ ἀληθῆ ταῦτα, τίς μηχανὴ μὴ οὐχί πάντα καταναλωθῆναι εἰς τὸ
τεθνάναι; Xen. An. 2, 3, 11 ὥστε πᾶσιν αἰσχύνην εἶναι Μὴ οὐ συσπουδάζειν. Ρ1.
Symp. 210 Β πολλὴ ἄνοια Μὴ οὐχ ἡγεῖσθαι.
2046.²,
1826. For μὴ οὐ (οι μῶν οὐ) in direct questions 800 2046.
P
432
THE TENSES: PRESENT.
1827-1832.
(
[1827. Où µń 'surely (shall) not,' 'not indeed,'' of course not,' mostly
with the future subjunctive or indicative, but also with the present sub-
junctive. The frequent occurrence of this complex in the MSS has greatly
taxed the ingenuity of critics, most of whom now hold that it forms
an ellipsis (o◊ δέδοικα μή, οι δεινόν etc. ἐστι ΜΗ), and denotes in some cases
an emphatic denial, in others a peremptory prohibition ['. As a matter
of fact, um in this complex stands for unv, or rather is a corruption of µýv.
It will be remembered that unv expresses a subjective assertion or confident
expectation (surely, sure enough, German wohl'), and so usually refers to
a future time (1921). Now just as expresses an assertion in the
affirmative (yes indeed), so où μv expresses an assertion in the negative
(no indeed, surely not). In other words, où unv is the negative form of μýv.
(Hence in the NT οὐ μὴν), or rather οὐμὴν, and ἀμὴν or rather ἠμὴν [2055]
hold the balance, 95 and 77 times respectively.) —That où μny is the true
reading here appears from the following considerations: (1) u here is inex-
plicable, and où un cannot be reduced to any principle of the language;
(2) the sense requires everywhere an emphatic asseveration in the negative:
surely not, not indeed, that is où μhy as actually used elsewhere (as Soph.
El. 817; Eur. Hec. 401); (3) the construction is, like that of uny, with
a prospective mood (App. iv. 1); (4) the asseverative nature of the case is
also shown by the occasional presence of µd or пpòs (as Ar. Av. 508; Eccl.
1000; Eur. Hip. 606); (5) the sentence is continued not by undé, the cor-
relative of μn, but by ovdé, dé, кaí (as in Ar. Nub. 296; Ran. 298; Eur.
Bacch. 343; Hip. 606), and only then by undè when the antecedent où
introduces a prohibitive future (1890), equivalent to a prohibitive im-
perative (as Ar. Eccl. 1144); (6) the combination où un seems to be
absent from the inscriptions.]
[1828. Regarding the confusion of µǹ and µýv, we have seen (1700) that most
of the prepositive particles had retreated from the living language towards
the close of G, one of them being μny. The subsequent copiers of our MSS
then boing no longer familiar with this παραπληρωματικὸς σύνδεσμος and finding
it regularly after où, mistook it for another negative intended to strengthen
où, and so changed it to the familiar and classical μn. See also 2055 & [2], ]
THE TENSES.
1829. As each division of time comprises three different
stages (682-5), there are also three representative tenses for each
division of time: an effective, durative, and completed tense.
1830. Each tense generally retains its relations of time, grade (pre-
sent, past, future) and kind (mere occurrence, duration, completion)
through all three moods, generally also through both verbal nouns.
PRESENT.
1831. A. 1. The effective present denotes that something
happens or is usually true: ypápw 'I write' -Dem. 19, 46 OÛTOS
μὲν ὕδωρ, ἐγὼ δ᾽ οἶνον πίνω. Eur. Frg. 743 ἀρετὴ κἄν τις θάνῃ οὐκ
ἀπόλλυται.
So still in N, as : αὐτὸς πίνει νερὸ κ' ἐγὼ κρασί. ἡ καλωσύνη δὲν χάνεται.
1832. Sometimes a general truth, though properly referring to the
present, is expressed by the aorist (1852), or even by its equivalent
[1] See on the subject JAHartung ii. ooo, WB umlein Gr. Partik." 308 ff. ;
JKvičala Ztschr. f. Oost. Gymn. 1856, P. 745-759; RKühner2 ii. 775 ff.; WGood-
win, p. 389-397; FEThomson, Gr. Syntax, p. 382 ff.
433
Ff
1832-1837.]
PRESENT TENSE.
perfect. This implies that something having proved true in the past
is applicable to the present as well.
[Isocr.] 1, 1 τὰς τῶν φαύλων συνηθείας ὀλίγος χρόνος Διέλε. Xon,
Mem. 4, 2, 35 πολλοὶ διὰ δόξαν μεγάλα κακά πεπόνθασι.
So still in N, as : ὅποιος δὲν μιλεῖ ἐθάψαν τον (1852).
1833. 2. It often stands with adverbial expressions denoting
past time, such as πάλαι long since, ἄρτι οι αρτίως just now),
whero in English the progressive perfect would seem to be
required (I have long been looking) :
Soph. O. T. 1112 mádai zhtoŶmEN.
καὶ αὐτὸς πάλαι τὴν ἐμαυτοῦ σοφίαν.
Also Pl. Crat. 424 A. 428 D Baymázw
Soph. Εl. 346. Fur. Rh. 322.
1834. 25. In the course of P times, especially in G-B Greek, this
office is performed by (τόσον χρόνον) ἔχω with the present participle
(often omitted in case of ὤν, 2108), in T-N speech by τόσον καιρὸν
ἔχω αφ' οὗ (now δ]ποῦ) :--- (ep. 1845 & 2107 F.).
John 5, 6 γνοὺς ὅτι πολὺς ἤδη χρόνον ἔχει (κατακείμενος). Martyr. Polye
ὀγδοήκοντα καὶ ἐξ ἔτι ἔχω δουλεύων. Pallad. 1115 A τεσσαράκοντα
ὀκτὼ ἔτι ἔχω ἐν τῇ κίλλᾳ ταύτῃ. Cyrill. Α. Χ. 133 Ημέρας ἔχω τριάκοντα
Οδεύων. Apophth. 233 Α πόσον χρόνον ἔχει μετὰ σοῦ; 393 Β ἔχω ἕνδεκα MHNAC
ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ. Loont. Noup. V. J. 82, 15 ὀγδοήκοντα ἔτη, ὦ ταπεινὴ ψυχή,
ἔχεις δουλεύουσα τῷ Χριστῷ, Ens. Alex. 333 Α πόσον καιρὸν ἔχει ἀφ' ο οι
ἀσθενεῖ (= ἀσθενῶν); how long has he been in ?'
Ν: πόσον καιρὸν ἔχεις ὁ πολ εἶσαι άρρωστος;
B
1835. 3. In animated narration a past evont is ofton trans-
ferred to the prosent. This prosent, which is popular with all
languages, is called historic present, and applies to A and Nas well.
Th. 1, 91 κελεύει πέμψαι ἄνδρας αποστέλλογοιν οὖν καὶ περὶ αὐτῶν
ὁ Θεμιστοκλῆς κρύφα πέμπει. Leont. Neup. V. S. 1685 € ὡς οὖν ἦλθε
θεωρούσιν αὐτὸν ἀμφότεροι καὶ ἔπεσαν κτλ.
-
1836. 4. In animated speech it is often used by anticipation for
the future (see 1896º. App. iv. 2 (F.). This applies particularly to P-N.
Th. 6, 91 εἰ ἡ πόλις ληφθήσεται ἔχεται καὶ πᾶσα ἡ Σικελία. Dom. 19, 33 el
δέ φησιν οὗτος, δειξάτω καὶ παρασχέτω, κἀγὼ ΚΑΤΑΒΑΙΝΩ.-Sopt. Gen. 6, 13
ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ καταφθείρω (fut. subj. 9] αὐτοὺς καὶ τὴν γῆν. NT Matt. 26, 18
πρὸς σὲ ποιῶ τὸ πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου. 1 Cor. 15, 32 αὔριον γὰρ
ΑΠΟΘΝΗΣΚΟΜΕΝ. Martyr. Polye. ἡ ἄμοσον καὶ ἀπολύω σε. Hormas Sim. 9,
10, Ο παρατίθεμαι ὑμῖν τοῦτον ἕως ἔρχομαι. ib. 11, 1 μενείς (οι μένεις ? 893
& [1]) μεθ' ἡμῶν ὧδε ἕως έρχεται. Mart. Patri 88, 8 πάλιν σταυροι; Ναί,
Πέτρε, πάλιν εταΥΡΟΥΜΑΙ. Mart Potri et Pauli 134, 19 λάβε τὰ γράμματα καὶ
οὕτως γινώσκεις. Aela Tho. 10, 181. πότε οὖν ὑπάγομεν καὶ βλέπομεν (ubi
-ωμεν) αὐτό . . . ὅταν τοῦ βίου ἐξέλθῃς Βλέπεις αυτό. Alchem. 306, 12 χρῖς τὰ
πέταλα καὶ ἐκρωματίζεται δε χαλκός. 308, 21 τρίβε ἐπὶ ἡμέρας μ' καὶ μετὰ μ'
ἡμέρας Βάλλεις τὸ ὕδωρ τῶν κρόκων και τρίβεις ἐπὶ ἄλλας ἡμέρας κ', καὶ μετὰ
ταῦτα βάλλεις τὸ φάρμακον εἰς ἀγγεῖον καὶ καίεις αὐτό. Τοoph. 183, 33 εἰ
μὴ ἡσυχάσητε ἀποκεφαλίζω ὑμᾶς.
1836, This is the only mouna of oxprossing the futuro indicative in South
Italiam Grook (Αpp. iv. 2.).
Λ
1837. 5. It often performs the office of verbal adjectivos in -τός,
and so is to be translated in English by can with the infinitive. This
usage is resorted to chiefly since G times, in particular with où (cannot),
when the adjectives in -rds were losing their A force (1052).
434
PRESENT TENSE.
[1837-1846.
NT Matt. 17, 21 τοῦτο τὸ γένος οὐκ εκπορεύεται εἰ μὴ ἐν προσευχῇ καὶ νηστεία.
(Cp. Mark 9, 29 τοῦτο τὸ γένος ἐν οὐδενὶ δύναται ἐξελθεῖν εἰ μὴ ἐν προσευχῇ
kai vηorciq.) Hebr. 13, 18. Luc. D. Mort. 2, 1 (i. 336) où pépoMEN, & IIλOÚ-
Πλού-
των, Μένιππον τουτονὶ τὸν κύνα παροικοῦντα.
1838. 5". This mode of supplying the place of ancient adjectives in
-rds is naturally absoluto in N : Prodr. 1, 42 οὐ φέρω γάρ, ὦ δέσποτα, τὴν
ταύτης μοχθηρίαν.—Now: αὐτὸ τὸ κρέας δὲν τρώγεται 'this meat is not eatable.
1839. Poculiar is the practice, in prosent N (chiefly insular) speech, of ex-
prossing the above notion in tho negativo by moans of dèv exw with substantivos
in -μός (1018 11.), ns: δὲν ἔχει τελειωμό" = ἀτελεύτητός ἐστιν. δὲν ἔχομε γλυτωμόν
dèv
wo cannot be rescued.'
1840. B. 6. The durative present denotes that something
is going on, or is repeated at the present time (durative and
iterative present): Auλo I talk-am talking-keep talking."
(
1840. ypadow 'I am writing,' "pxo 'I am ruling,' pouet 'he is
knocking. So too in N : γράφω, περιπατῶ-λαβαίνω γράμματα.
1841. 7. It sometimes expresses a merely attempted (try
to'), but not accomplished action (1848); so especially with
δίδωμι, πείθω, κωλύω :
Isocr. 6, 12 ταύτην τὴν δόξαν πείθυγειν ἡμᾶς ἀποβαλείν.—John 13, 6 σύ
μου νίπτεις τοὺς πόδας; Matt. 3, 14 ὁ δὲ Ἰωάννης διεκώλυεν αὐτόν.
So still in N: µè kánei vù mwtéyw 'he tries to make me believe."
1842. 8. Owing to the association of the present with the
perfect, the former often stands for the latter (1866 f.). This
is particularly the case with certain verbs, such as:
ἡττῶμαι
*
ακούω 1 hear, πυνθάνομαι, μανθάνω I am informed, νικώ 'am
victorious,' "irr@pat 'am defeated,' *«par@ 'have prevailed,' *deúyw
'am in exile,' fadı@ am a wrong-doer'; so always with * 'am
come,' and 'oïxopa 'am gone.' (For the converse case see 1868.)
1843. g. In N only vi åkoúw and údık aro still used in this sonse, all
tho rost having either become extinct, or changed meaning.
1844. 9. The durative present is sometimes expressed periphras-
tically, by means of epi and the amarthrous present participle;
occasionally also by the effective present followed by exwv (2106f.):
Soph. O. R. 274 rúd er ápécкONTA. Ar. Plut. 479 ECTIN E OPON@N.
Eur. Hec. 1179 εἴ τις εἴρηκεν ἡ νῦν λέγων τις ἐστὶν ἢ μέλλει λέγειν. Αr.
Run. 524. 512. So Pl. Gorg. 490 E Ayapeîc eXwN. 500 0 Ti TOT' ¿CTIN
οὗτος ἐκείνου διαφέρων ;
1845. 9. This periphrastic expodiont mot with increasing popularity
in P times and became very common especially during &–B. Noto further
that since II times the irregular verb cµ makes room for the more
regular úrápx∞ (985º) (also yíropai as Didache 3, 1-8 six times, cúpíʊkoµai,
µéro, &c. (937. 2107); and finally that tho participle Exon is changed to
finito xa, while the former prosent indicative is now turned to participlo:
NT 2 Cor. 3, 1η καπηλεύοντες ἐσμέν. Rom. 3, 13 οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα.
2 Cor. 9, 12 ἔστι προσαναπληροῦσα, Gal. 4, 24 ἅτινά ἐστιν ἀλληγορούμενα. Col.
1, 0. 2, 23. 3, I. Jus. 1, 17. 3, 15. Acts 5, 25 clair iv re iepe tor@res, ot passim.
Cyrill. Α. x. 132 1 ἡμέρας ἔχω τριάκοντα ὁδεύων, Vita Εμίρη. 44 ο ἔσω καθήμενος.
For moro oxamplos seo 2100 ff.; also 1834.
1845. Owing to tho disappearance of the prosont participle (2164 M.),
this poriphrasis is naturally unknown to N.
1846. C. 10. For the completed present soo Perfoct, 1862-75-
435
r f 2
1847-1853.]
IMPERFECT—AORIST.
IMPERFECT.
1847. r. The imperfect is the durative past tense; hence it
represents an action as going on or recurring in some past
time referred to (I was walking,-kept walking-I used to walk):
* ραφον
was writing, used to write. Th. 2, 15 ἐπὶ Κέκροπος
ἡ ᾿Αττικὴ κατὰ πόλεις ᾠκεῖτο καὶ οὐ ZYNHECAN βουλευσόμενοι ἀλλ᾽ αὐτοὶ
ἕκαστοι ἐπολιτεύοντο καὶ ἐβογλεγοντο. Xen. Μem. 1, 1, 4 Σωκράτης ώσπερ
ἐγίγνωσκεν οὕτως ἔλεγεν.
So still in N: ἔγραφα. κάθε βράδυ ἐπήγαινε 'ς τοῦ φίλου του.
1848. 2. Like the present, it often denotes an attempted or
proposed action (1841):
Xen. Cyr. 5, 5, 22 ἔπειθον αὐτοὺς καὶ οὓς ἔπεισα τούτους ἔχων ἐπορευόμην.
Aeschin. 3, 83 Φίλιππος Αλόνησον ἐδίδου, Δημοσθένης δὲ ἀπηγόρεγε μή
λαμβάνειν.
So still in N, as : μου ἔδιδε πολλοὺς παρᾶδες νὰ μήν τονε προδώσω.
1848. Like the durative present, it is sometimes periphrased by
means of and the anarthrous present participle, an alternative
which became very popular in G-B, but is unknown to N (1845 f.):
Soph. Ph. 1219 ετείχων ἂν ἦν. Th. 3, 2 ΜΕΤΑΠΕΜΠΟΜΕΝΟΙ CAN. Xen.
An. 2, 2, 13 ἦΝ ΔΥΝΑΜΕΝΗ. Dem. 19, 75 εγμφέρον ἦν τῇ πόλει. Mark
ΑΝ
15, 43 ἦν προσδεχόμενος. Acts 8, 28 ΑΝ Υποστρέφων καὶ ΚΑΘΗΜΕΝΟΣ.
Call. 59, 15 ΗΝ Γινώσκων. 58, 8. (Cp. 2106 ff.)
in
1849. 3. The imperfect of εἰμί, and that of impersonal verbs denot-
ing a duty, often stands for the present (ought, should) :—(cp. 1901).
Pl. Phaedr. 230 Α ἂρ' οὐ τόδε Ν τὸ δένδρον ἐφ' ὅπερ ἦγες ἡμᾶς; Rep. 474 D
ἄλλῳ ἔπρεπει λέγειν ἃ λέγεις.
So still in N : ἔπρεπε νὰ ντρέπεσαι.
1850. In all cases whero the present has the force of the perfect
(1833 f., 1842–5), the imperfect naturally stands for the pluperfect.
AORIST.
1861. r. The aorist represents an action as merely brought
to pass or effected at a past time (I did, it came to pass):
ἔγραψα I wrote,' ἐπαύσατο “he stopped. Plut. Caes. 50 ἦλθον, εἶδον,
ἐνίκησα, veni, vidi, vici - So still in N: ἔγραψαἦρθα, εἶδα, ἐνίκησα.
1852. 2. It is often used of general truths applicable to the
present, but transferred to the past as a matter of past experi-
once. This aorist is called empiric or gnomic::-(ep. 1867. 1887).
Dem. 2, 9 ὅταν τις, ὥσπερ οὗτος, ἰσχύση, ἡ πρώτη πρόφασις καὶ μικρὸν
πταῖσμα ἅπαντα ανεχαίτισε καὶ Διέλε. NT 1 Pet. 1, 24 ἐξηράνθη ὁ χόρτος,
καὶ ἄνθος αὐτοῦ ἐξέπεσεN.
Ι
So still in N: ὅποιος δὲ μιλεῖ ἐθάψαν τον (1832).
1853. 3. In sundry verbs which in the present denote a
continued state, the aorist expresses the inception or beginning of
that state (I got to . . .). This is called the inceptive aorist :
ἐνόσησα I fell ill’νοσῶ 'am ill. ἐβασίλευσα I became king
βασιλεύω 'I am king. ἐδάκρυσα I burst into tears
ἐδάκρυσα I burst into tears δακρύω ‘I weep.
ήρξα 'I attained power —ἄρχω ‘I rule. ἴσχυση I grew strong
436
AORIST.
[1853-1861.
•
ισχύω 'I am strong. ἐμίσησα ‘I conceived a hatred μισῶ I hate.
ἔσχον ‘I got᾽ ἔχω I have. ἐκοιμήθην I went to sleep'κοιμώμαι
I am asleep. ηράσθην ‘I fell in love’ἐρῶ “I love. ἐσίγησα Ι
became silent'-oiy 'I am silent.'
-σιγώ 'I am silent. ἐκινδύνευσα I incurred risk
κινδυνεύω 'I am in danger. Cp. 1895.
So still in N: ἀγάπησα ‘I got to like 'ἀγαπῶ, ἐμίσησα—μισῶν ἐκοιμή
θηκα—κοιμοῦμαι, etc.
1853b. In ordinary cases all these inceptive aorists have, of course,
also their usual (effective) meaning.
1854. For a regular but P-N inceptive present see 868-871.
1855. 4. Sometimes it is used, particularly in colloquial speech,
for the present or future, to denote a speedy or certain realization of
an action. In this way the future is suddenly transferred to the
present (1832), and thence to the past:
a.
Ar. Eq. 696 ÅcOHN ἀπειλαῖς, ἐγέλασα ψολοκομπίαις. Eur. Ale. 386 απωλόΜΗΝ
εἴ με λείψεις. Pl. Gorg. 484 A. Eur. Med. 77 ἀπωλόμεθ᾽ ἄρ᾽ εἰ κακὸν
προσοίσομεν νέον παλαιῷ. NT John 15, 6 ἐὰν μή τις μείνῃ ἐν ἐμοί, ἐβλήθη ἔξω.
So still in N: ἄνε σε πιάσῃ ἐχάθηκες.
1856. For this aorist, G-B writers sometimes substitute its equivalent
perfect: NT Rom. 14, 23 ἐὰν φάγῃ κατακέκριται.
1857. 5. It often stands for the dependent English plu-
perfect, particularly in temporal clauses (after ἐπεὶ or ἐπειδὴ
after, ὡς ' when,' ἕως (περ), ἔστε, μέχρι οι ἄχρι, πρίν, ' until, etc.) ;
also in relative clauses (1879):
Th. 1, 102 οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι εὐθὺς ἐπεὶ ἀνεχώρησαν σύμμαχοι ἐγένοντο. Xen.
Hell. 1, 1, 3. An. 1, 2, 17 ἐπεὶ ἐσάλπιγξε, προβαλόμενοι τὰ ὅπλα, ἐπῇσαν.
4, 8, 20 τῶν κηρίων ὅσοι ἔφαγον πάντες άφρονες ἐγίγνοντο. 1, 1, 2 Δαρείος
Κῦρον μεταπέμπεται ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἦς αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίΗCEN. NT Acts 5,
24 ὡς HKOYCAN τους λόγους διηπόρουν. 1, 2.
So still regularly in N.
•
CIA
1858. 6. Similarly it sometimes stands, particularly in P-B, for
the perfect, an interchange presumably suggested by the terminal
homophony of the two tenses (-α, -ας, -ε, -αμεν, -ατε, 786-800) :
Aeschin. 1, 99 τῶν οἰκετῶν οὐδένα κατέλιπεν ἀλλ᾽ ἅπαντας πέπρακες.
ii. 567, 4 (Β. Ο. 285) ἐπειδὴ οἱ βουλευταὶ ... καλῶς καὶ δικαίως Βολεγαν
(beside ib. 114 Α 1 1 [Β. Ο. 343] ἐπειδὴ Φανόδημος καλῶς καὶ φιλοτίμως καὶ
ἀδωροδοκήτως βεβούλευσεν), NT Matt. 3, 17 & 17, 5 οὗτος ἐστὶν ὁ υἱός μου
ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἐν ᾧ ΗΥΔΟΚΗΣΑ. Hebr. 8, 1. So John 15, 8; Mark 15, 44, etc.
So always in N which has discarded the perfect (740. 1861. 1875).
1859. I. In A this is common in epistolary compositions (1867) as :
Th. I, 129 μετ' Αρταβάζου ὂν σοι ἔπεμψα πρᾶσσε. So particularly with ἔγραψα.
1860. 2. In this case N agrees with modern languages and so uses the present.
1861. 7. In A-II composition the use of the aorist for the perfect is,
on the whole, uncommon, Likewise in G-T times when the affinity
betwoon aorist and perfect roached the point of almost synonymy, it was
rather the perfect that provailed and partly replaced the aorist than
conversely (1875). On the other hand, when phonetic dissimilation
began to toll on the reduplication (736), the perfect could no longer hold
its own and retreated before the aorist (740). As a consequence, the
perfect has become extinct in N, its place, in some cases also its endings,
having been appropriated by the norist (1875).
437
1862-1868.]
PERFECT TENSE.
PERFECT.
1862. I. The perfect denotes an action as already accom-
plished for the present time and thus standing complete or still
remaining in its consequences. Hence it is the past tense pre-
eminently suitable for ordinary conversation : γέγραφα ' I have
written. ἐλήλυθα 'I am come.
So too in P-B; for N see 688. 1842. 1861. 1875. 2139 f.
1863. 2. Owing to its inherent force, the perfect, while fully
retaining its proper signification, stands between the effective
present and the effective past (aorist), bordering on either side.
Its contact with the present receives full expression in the
following three facts.
1864. a. It is frequently periphrased by the present of εἰμί (ὑπάρχω,
etc. 687. 1845. 2106 f.) with the perfect participle active, or by the
present of exw with the aorist or perfect participle active (2106 ff.):
Dem. 21, 104 ἐγὼ τὸ πρᾶγμ᾽ εἰμὶ τοῦτο δεδρακώς. Soph. Ο. Τ. 7οι οἷα μοι
Βεβογλεγκὼς ἔχει. For more examples soe 21o6 f.
1865. Also N uses εἶμαι (= εἰμὶ) and ἔχω for the periphrastic perfect,
but, with the excoption of South Italian Greek (822 f.), it generally sub-
stitutes for the active participle of the ancients now extinct (2164-70),
the passive participle in the spirit of the Romanic and other modern
languages (2139 f. App. iv. 17):
εἶμαι πεσμένος (=4 πεπτωκώς εἰμι), ἔχω γραμμένο (= γέγραφα οι ἔχω
γράψας).
1866. b. It sometimes stands simply for the present (1842):
Pl. Prot. 328 Β ἐπειδάν τις παρ' ἐμοῦ μάθῃ, ἐὰν μὲν βούληται ἀποδέδωκΕΝ
ὁ ἐγὼ πράττομαι ἀργύριον ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἐλθὼν εἰς ἱερὸν ὀμόσας, ὅσου ἂν φῇ ἄξια
εἶναι τὰ μαθήματα, τοσοῦτον κατέθηκεν. John 20, 29 ὅτι ἑώρακάς με πεπί-
CTEYKAC; : Tim. 6, 17 τοῖς πλουσίοις ἐν τῷ νῦν αἰῶνι παράγγελλε μὴ ὑψηλὰ
φρονεῖν μηδὲ ἠλπικέναι ἐπὶ πλούτου ἀδηλύτητι. 2 Cor. 1, 10; Jude 6.
1867. This is also the case in general truths (empiric or gnomic
perfect), and in epistolary compositions : (cp. 1852. 1859. 1887).
Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 35 πολλοὶ διὰ δόξαν καὶ πολιτικὴν δύναμιν μεγάλα κακὰ
πεπόνθασιν. [Isocr.] I, 2 ἀπέσταλκά σοι τοῦτον τὸν λόγον.
1867. So too in P-B Greek, as: Apophth. 345 ο ἐν ᾗ ὥρᾳ ὑποπίπτει
(write -p) άνθρωπος σφάλματι καὶ εἴπῃ Ημαρτον, πάραυτα έπαγΤΑΙ.
1868. C. In many cases the perfect has crystallized to a mere
present, and that since A. (For the converse case see 1842.)
μέμνημαι ' remember
κέκλημαι ' am called '
ἠμφίεσμαι ' have on
κέκτημαι possess
δέδοικα (δέδια) fear
εἴωθα ' am accustomed
yéyova ‘have become,' ‘am'
τέθνηκα am dead
πέποιθα ' rely on'
πέφυκα ' am by nature'
ἕστηκα stand
βέβηκα ' stand
ἔγνωκα know'
ἐγρήγορα am awake '
οἶδα know
ἀπ-όλωλα am lost
438
PERFECT TENSE.
[1869-1874.
1869. In all these verbs the pluperfect has naturally assumed the
force of the imperfect: ἐκεκτήμην possessed, ἑστήκη was standing,
-while the future perfect has become equivalent to the simple or
effective future: ἑστήξω ‘shall be standing, μεμνήσομαι shall re-
member. (Cp. 1878.)
1870. 3. On the other hand the perfect sometimes stands for the
aorist, even in 4:
Th. I, 21 οὔτε ὡς ποιηταὶ ΥΜNHKACI . οὔτε ὡς λογογράφοι γνέθειAN.
Dem. 7, 29 τὴν χώραν ἣν οἱ Ἕλληνες καὶ βασιλεὺς ὁ Περσῶν ἐψηφίσαντο καὶ
ὡμολογήKACIN ὑμετέραν εἶναι.
1871. 35. This usage, which proceeds from the natural suitableness
of the perfect for everyday talk (1862 f.), is more extensively repre-
sented in the less elaborate class of P compositions :
Polyb. [1]
3, 1, 2 ἐν τῇ τρίτῃ βύβλῳ ΔεδηλώκΑΜΕΝ· ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τὰς αἰτίας ἐν
avτn ékeivŋ diECAQHCAMEN. So 4, 28, 3, and elsewhere. Diod. 16, 1, 6
ΓΕΓΟΝΕ γὰρ ὁ βασιλεὺς οὗτος ἀγχινοίᾳ στρατηγικῇ καὶ ἀνδρείᾳ καὶ λαμπρότητι
ψυχῆς διαφέρων. ib. II, 15 ἔδοξεν οὖν αὐτοῖς πάντας τοὺς ὑφ' ἡγεμονίας τετα-
γμένους συνεδρεῦσαι καὶ βουλεύσασθαι κατὰ ποίους τόπους συμφέρει πεποιήσθαι
τὴν ναυμαχίαν. Strab. 2, 5, 35 ἐφ᾿ ἧς ἡ τῶν ἐλεφάντων ΓΕΓΟΝΕ θήρα. Dio i.
203, 24 ὅσα λελίπεται. ii. 49, 8 πολλάκις δὲ καὶ ἑάλωκε.
1872. 3. But the full development of this usage is manifested
during the latter part of G when, in historical narration, the colloquial
perfect freely took the place of the aorist (1861), as is shown in the pre-
ceding and following examples, taken from among numerous others :-
Sept. Ex. 32, 1 καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ λαὸς ὅτι κεχρόνικε Μωϋσῆς καταβῆναι ἐκ τοῦ ὄρους,
ἀνέστη ὁ λαὸς ἐπὶ ᾿Ααρών. ΝΤ Matt. 13, 46 ἀπελθὼν πέπρακε πάντα ὅσα εἶχε
καὶ ἠγόρασεν αὐτόν. Hebr. 11, 17. Cp. John 4, 6. 6, 3. 6, 9. Hermas Vis.
1, 1 & θρέψας με πέπρακές με Ρύδῃ τινὶ εἰς Ρώμην,—and so on in all post-
Christian compositions, in particular Biblical imitations, as: Acta Tho.
2, 13. II, 40. 18, 3. 31, 23. 34, 13. 41, 13. 44, 15. 52, 27. 57.3.
65, 30;
31. 76, 20. 77, 11. 78, 27. 93, 35. 94, 37.
Ι
1873. Το what extent the process had extended, may be seen from the
fact that the colloquial perfect is now freely admitted, even in potential
clauses with av (see KKóvros in Zwup. i. 317 ff.).
Rhet. Walz. i. 453, 29 οὐκ ἂν ᾿Αχιλλεὺς εἰς τοσοῦτον προελήλγθε τέχνης μὴ
Κενταύρου μαθών. ii. 626, 8. Gal. ix. 6ο7 εἰ τοιοῦτον τι σημεῖον . . . εἴχομεν
τῶν μελλόντων ἔσεσθαι βεβαίως δηλωτικόν, οὔτ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸς ὁ Ἱπποκράτης εἴρηκε
μακρὰν τέχνην, οὔτ᾽ ἂν οἱ νῦν ἐθαύμαζον. Orig. iii. 89 ἢ οὐδ᾽ αὐτοὶ ἐπιβεβλήκα
ΜΕΝ ἂν εἰ μὴ τῶν Ἑβραίων τις ἐπιδέδωκεν ἡμῖν τὰ κατὰ τὸν τόπον οὕτως ἔχοντα.
viii. 98 οὐ γὰρ ἂν εἴρεται περὶ τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ ὅτι ἐπεκράτησεν αὐτῶν ὁ λιμός.
iii. 23. Χ. 8.
Orib. iii. 253 οἷος ἐξ ἀμφοῖν μάλιστα ΓΕΓΟΝΕΝ Ν. Evagr. Η.
Eccl. 3, 26 ΓΕΓΟΝΕΝ Ν. Schol. Od. γ 155 ΓΕΓONACIN N. Schol. Eur. iii. 139,
29 (Dindorf). Schol. Luc. 156 (Jacb.) τίνας καὶ πέπεικεν ἂν παρασχεῖν ἑαυτοὺς
περιοδευθησομένους; Eust. 425, 4 περιΓΕΓΟΝΕΝ Ν. 1047, 9 οὐκ ἂν πέπονθεν.
1451, 28; 1622, 24. Zon. H. 5, 26 πέπραχεν ἄΝ.
ΚΕΚΙΝΔΥΝΕΥΚΕΝ.
ἀνθρώπων ἅπαν.
}
10, 19 ἐν αὐτῷ ἂν καταλειφθεὶς
11, 22; 15, 13; 16, 17. Christ. pat. το οὐδ᾽ ἂν γένος τ' όλωλεν
1874. 3ª. As a mattor of fact, even professed grammarians and zealous
Atticists, like Ammonios Hesychios and others, had lost consciousness of
[1] JStich 170 'sed, quod gravius ost, ita froquentat perfectum Polybius, ut
proximo accodat ad vim aoristi.'
439
1874-1878.]
PLUPERFECT.
PERFECT
the difference between the aorist and perfect (or rather of the true force
of the perfect), and so blundered in their doctrines (cp. WSchmid i. 95 ;
ii. 52 ; iii. 75):
Ηο-
Ammon. ἀπέθανε καὶ τέθνηκε διαφέρει ἀπέθανε μὲν ΝΥ͂Ν, τέθνηκε δὲ πάλαι,
ὡς περιεπάτησε μὲν δ δεῖνα σήμερον, περιπεπάτηκε δὲ πάλαι. Schol, Eur. Med.
33 ἀτιμάσας ἔχει· ᾿Αττικῶς ἀντὶ τοῦ TIMHCE. Hesych. [Hοχα ἤνεγκα.
χότων κομισάντων, ἐνεγκάντων. ἈνεπεποΙΗΜΕΝΗC ἀναζυμωθείσης, αναπεφυ
ραμένης. αναπεπτωκώς· ἀναπεσών. ἀναπεφοίτηΚΕΝ· ἀνῆλθεν. ἀνατέταλκεν
ἀνέτειλεν. ανηρήμεθα ἠρωτήθημεν. ἀΠΗΓμένων κρατηθέντων, ἀποφερομένων.
ἀπηλγηκότες ἀναίσθητοι γενόμενοι. ἀποκαμόντες. ἀπήρκει ἀπεδήμησεν. ἀπο-
τετίνακται ἀπέρριψεν. ἀπώς και ὤθησα. αφεστηκώς μακρυνθείς. Βεβίωκα
ἔζησα. Δελεκώς δήσας. Δέληκεν· ὑπεισῆλθεν. ἐκκέκγφει ἀνωρθώθη,-and
so on passim.
1875. 3°. The preceding specimens and testimonies, taken in conjunc-
tion with previous cases of interchange (740. 786. 1855), show that ever
since I times, the perfect and aorist have been associated and con-
currently used in the common language with a steady spread of the
colloquial perfect. Nevortholess, it was only during T that the perfect
gained a decided ascendency ovor its associate and competitor, and
would probably have rosulted in absorbing and extinguishing it, were
it not for the interposition of a third factor which roversed the process.
This was the principle of phonetic dissimilation which, having advanced
so far in other directions, now attacked the reduplication wholesale
736 f.), and consequently reduced the perfect to an aorist-like form.
The fusion of the two tonses thus effected accounts for a double pheno-
menon in N: on the one hand the perfect has become extinct, and on the
other the aorist exhibits, in a number of casos, the ending of the perfect, as:
ἀνέβηκα, (ἐκατέβηκα ἐμπῆκα), ἔθεκα (for ἔθηκα, ep. Kühner-Blass ii. 2or),
and dialectally ἔπωκα, ἔπιακα, έφτακα (έφθακα), ἕζηκα, ἔγνωκα, ἔποικα δ
ἐποῖκα (from πεποίηκα), ἐσάπηκα, ἐζύμωκα, έφτειακα (ἔρθεια κα), ἐσπούδακα, etc.
(ep. καταγεγραφηκέναι Louvre Pap. 21 [+612], 19). It is now obvious that
all those N representativos are rather remains of the former perfect than
recont formations due to the analogy of ἔδωκα and άφηκα, sooing that even
these vory forms may be traced back to δέδωκα and ἀφεῖκα (from ἀφίω or
ἀφελ 960). Cp. 2139 f.
PLUPERFECT.
1876. I. The pluperfect denotes that something had taken
place previous to a given past time (I had heard, I had been
heard): ἐγεγράφειν ‘I had written, ἐπεπαιδεύμην ‘I had been
educated.'
1. For the N pluperfect sce 1877 and 1880.
1877. 2. It is often periphrased by the imperfect of ciµì or
exo and the perfect or aorist participle (1864. 2106 ff.).
Isocr. 12, 19 ΔΙΑΠΑΣΑΜΕΝΗ ἦν. Soph. Ph. 600 είχον ἤδη ἐκβεβληκότες.
For further A-B examples see 2106 f.
1877. 2". So usually in G-B unscholastic compositions, and always
in N, as : Acta Tho. 13, 27 ὅπου ἦν καταλύσας.—Ν: εἶχα γραμμένα οι -νο,
ἤτανε φτασμένος, and in South Italian N είχα γράψοντα, ήτονε φτασμένος οι
εἶχε φτάσοντα.
1878. 1. The pluperfect has naturally the meaning of the, mere
imperfect, whenever the perfect stands for the present (1868 f.) : ᾔδειν
I know, ἐτεθνήκει ' he was dead, ειστήκει 'he stood.
>
440
FUTURE TENSE.
[1879-1883.
1879. 2. For the English pluperfect in temporal and relative clauses
Greek generally uses the aorist (1857. ep. 1902).
1880. 3. For obvious reasons the disappearance of the pluperfect
has preceded that of the perfect. In effect, the less learned com-
positions of T point to its almost total absence from the then current
speech.
FUTURE.
1881. The future is nothing else than the present transferred
to a time to come. Hence we have an effective future, a durative
future, and a completed future or future perfect.
1882. It has been already explained elsewhere (684-9) that though
the Greek language has not developed separate forms for the effective
and durative future respectively, in the case of the passive voice
A discriminated, in many cases at least, the effective from the dura-
tive future by means of special representatives (689). Thus the future
passive proper served as the normal effective future passive, while the
so-called middle future has been specialized to express the durative
future passive. This discrimination, though it does not appear
systematically carried out (a circumstance due also to the insufficiency
of the material available), is unmistakable in a large number of verbs,
among which the following are the principal.
FUTURE PASSIVE.
Effective.
Durative,
ἀχθήσομαι
ἄξομαι
Effective.
λυπηθήσομαι P
Durative.
λυπήσομαι
ἀδικηθήσομαι Γ
ἀδικήσομαι
μαρτυρηθήσομαι μαρτυρήσομαι
αἰδεσθήσομαι Ρ
αἰδέσομαι
μαστιγωθήσομαι Ρ μαστιγώσομαι
αἰσχυνθήσομαι
αἰσχυνοῦμαι
οἰκηθήσομαι ?
οικήσομαι
ἀνοιχθήσομαι
ἀνοίξομαι
ὀργισθήσομαι
ὀργιοῦμαι
ἀπαρνηθήσομαι
ἀρνήσομαι
ὁρμηθήσομαι
ὁρμήσομαι
αυξηθήσομαι
αὐξήσομαι
παιδευθήσομαι
παιδεύσομαι
ἀφαιρεθήσομαι
ἀφαιρήσομαι
πεισθήσομαι
πείσομαι
αχθεσθήσομαι
ἀχθέσομαι
περαιωθήσομαι
βλαβήσομαι
βλάψομαι
πλανηθήσομαι
διαλεχθήσομαι
διαλέξομαι
πορευθήσομαι
ἐνθυμηθήσομαι
Ενθυμήσομαι
προθυμηθήσομαι
περαιώσομαι.
πλανήσομαι
πορεύσομαι
προθυμήσομαι
ἐπιμεληθήσομαι Ρ
ἐπιμελήσομαι
στερηθήσομαι Ρ
στερήσομαι
εστιαθήσομαι Ρ
εστιάσομαι
ταραχθήσομαι Ρ
ταράξομαι
εὐφρανθήσομαι
εὐφρανοῦμαι
τηρηθήσομαι Ρ
τηρήσομαι
σχεθήσομαι Ρ
ἕξομαι
τιμηθήσομαι
τιμήσομαι
ζημιωθήσομαι
ζημιώσομαι
τραφήσομαι
θρέψομαι
ἡττηθήσομαι
ἡττήσομαι
φανήσομαι
φανοῦμαι
θεραπευθήσομαι
θεραπεύσομαι
φοβηθήσομαι
φοβήσομαι
κινηθήσομαι
κινήσομαι
φθαρήσομαι
φθεροῦμαι
κατα-λειφθήσομαι καταλείψομαι:
φυλαχθήσομαι P
φυλάξομαι
κοιμηθήσομαι 1
κοιμήσομαι
ψευσθήσομαι
ψεύσομαι
κωλυθήσομαι Ρ κωλύσομαι
ὠφεληθήσομαι
ὠφελήσομαι
1882. Comparo further : ἀρχθήσομαι P & ἄρξομαι, ἀνιαθήσομαι P & ἀνιάσομαι,
ἐλασσωθήσομαι δ ἐλασσώσομαι, νεμηθήσομαι F & διανεμήσομαι, πολιορκηθήσομαι
& πολιορκήσομαι, πολεμηθήσομαι & πολεμήσομαι, στρεβλωθήσομαι & στρεβλώ
σομαι, τριφθήσομαι P & τρίψομαι, σφαλήσομαι & σφαλοῦμαι, etc. ote.
1883. But the above discrimination of the effective from the dura-
tive future passive by means of separate simple forms is a development
441
1883-1888.]
FUTURE, EFFECTIVE.
peculiar to 4 (both poetry and prose). In H, and particularly in G,
times, when the middle future had already signally retreated from the
living language (1478-86), such a distinction was not practicable, and
recourse was had to the expedient of periphrasis by means of ἔσομαι
and the present participle for the durative future : ἔσομαι λυπούμενος
for λυπήσομαι, ἔσομαι τιμώμενος for τιμήσομαι, and so on. This expedient
which had been familiar even to A writers not only through the future
perfect (1884. 1897), but also through the durative future (764. 1884.
1892; cp. 1844-5), was soon extended to the effective future also
(ἔσομαι with the aorist participle, 1892) and so contributed to the
subsequent wholesale retreat of the future (1478-86. App. iv.).
1884. Similar but far earlier still and more effective has been
the process in the case of the future perfect (futurum exactum). In
the active voice this tense had been even in early antiquity peri-
phrased by means of ἔσομαι and the participle perfect (ἔσομαι πεποικώς,
γεγραφώς, λελυκώς), the only exception being the case of three in-
transitive verbs: ἑστήξω shall be standing, τεθνήξω shall be dead,
and κεχαρήσω ' shall have rejoiced. On the other hand, the passive
voice in A was expressed usually by a simple (reduplicated) form,
but not rarely also by a periphrasis through eropa and the par-
ticiple perfect passive: λελύσεται, πεπράξεται, λελείψεται, ειρήσεται,
κεκοσμήσεται —ἔσονται ἐψευσμένοι, διεφθαρμένοι. Dem. 4, 50 τὰ δέοντα
ἐσόμεθα ἐγνωκότες καὶ λόγων ματαίων ἀπηλλαγμένοι.
1885. Also the simple future perfect is a characteristic feature of
A and Atticistic Greek (689. 1897), and may be considered as having
become extinct in early P times, since its shorter form, the simple
future middle, disappeared as early as G times (1478-86).
EFFECTIVE FUTURE.
6
1886. I. The effective future denotes that something will
simply take place at a time to come : γράψω shall write (once),
σωθήσομαι shall be saved.
(
Α γελάσεται, Ρ γελάσει,
Τ-Β΄ ἵνα γελάσῃ,
(θενά) γελάσῃ,
-
G-T γελάσῃ (ἄν), G-B έχει γελάσαι,
Β-Ν νὰ γελάσῃ (θέλει γελάσειν), Με θὲ νὰ
Μ-Ν θὰ γελάσῃ.
1886. For the P-N form and history of the effective future soe App. iv.
1887. 2. It can be used as an empiric or gnomic future (1852.
1867): Men. Mon. 45 ἀνὴρ ὁ φεύγων καὶ πάλιν μαχείσεται.
8
So too in N, us : ὅποιος χάσῃ θα πληρώση.
1888. 3. It is sometimes used in questions of doubt, where
otherwise the interrogative subjunctive would be more appro-
priate (rgo9 ; ep. 2040).
Fur. El. 967 τί δῆτα δρῶμεν ; μητέρ' ἦ ΦΟΝΕΥCOMEN ; Pl. Rep. 397 D τί οὖν
ΠοιήCOMEN ; πότερον εἰς τὴν πόλιν πάντας τούτους παραδεξόμεθα;
So too in N : τί θὰ κάμωμε”; τί θὰ γενοῦμε" ;
[1] Compare Mooris 268 πεπαύσομαι ᾿Αττικῶς, παύσομαι Ελληνικώς. 269
πειράσομαι πεπράσῃ περάσεται 'Αττικῶς, πραθήσομαι πραθήση πραθήσεται
Ελληνικῶς.
442
FUTURE, EFFECTIVE.
[1889-1894b.
1889. It often stands, by way of modesty, in the place of a
less assertive present, as:
Th. 5, 26, 2 καὶ τὴν διὰ μέσου ξύμβασιν εἴ τις μὴ ἀξιώσει πόλεμον νομίζειν,
οὐκ ὀρθῶς Δικαιώσει. Isocr. 8, 106 εὑρήσετε τους πλείστους τῶν ἀνθρώπων
περὶ τὰς αἱρέσεις τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἁμαρτάνοντας. Dem. 19, I δεήσομαι δέ
πάντων ἡμῶν . . . μηδεμίαν μήτε χάριν μήτ' ἄνδρα περὶ πλείονος ποιεῖσθαι ἢ τὸ
δίκαιον. Pl. Rep. 376 ο φιλόσοφος δὴ ἡμῖν τὴν φύσιν ἔσται ὁ μέλλων καλὸς
κἀγαθὸς ἔσεσθαι φύλαξ τῆς πόλεως.
1889. So frequently with βουλήσομαι (ἐ]θελήσω), αἰτήσομαι, δεήσομαι.
So too in N: θά σε παρακαλέσω (instead of σὲ παρακαλῶ) νά μου κάμῃς
μια χάρη ‘I beg to ask a favour of you.
1890. 4. The 2nd person often expresses a peremptory or
absolute command, when the speaker feels certain that his
order will be carried out: you must.
Ar. Nub. 1352 πάντως δὲ τοῦτο δράσεις. Eur. Med. 1320 χειρὶ δ' οὐ
Ψαγρεις ποτέ. Ar. Vesp. 397 τί ποιεῖς ; οὐ μὴν) καταβήσει. For G-B
compare the ten commandments and Didache 2-4. Barn. 19, 2-8.
Hermas Vis. 2, 1, 3 λάβε καὶ ἀποδώσεις μοι.
So still in N : θα πάμε να του πῇς. θα με περιμένης ἐδῶ.
1891. 5. This is more frequent in interrogations, particularly
negative, as: Soph. Ο. Τ. 1146 οὐ σιωπήσας ἔτει ; Ar. Vesp. 397 τί ποιεῖς ;
οὐ μὴν) καταβήσει; Pl. Symp. init. οὐ περιμενεῖς; Gorg. 466 Ε οὐκοῦν
ἀποδείξεις τοὺς ῥήτορας νοῦν ἔχοντας ;
So too in N: δὲ θὰ σωπάσης ; δὲ θὰ εεγχάεμς; δὲ θά με ξεφορτωθῆτε ;
1892. 6. It is sometimes periphrased by means of ἔσομαι
and the aorist participle (1883. 2106 ff.):
Soph. Ο. C. 816 λυπηθείς ἔσει. Ο. Τ. 1146 οὐ σιωπήcac ἔτει ;
1892b. 6. So too in P (1883. 2106),-beside occasional cooμal with
infinitive (App. vi. 17), as: Sept. Num. 10, 2 Écονται ΑΝΑΚΑΛΕῖν.
1893. 7. Another circumlocution coming near, but not equivalent to,
the effective future is formed by means of μέλλω ' am about, propose,
and the future (rarely aorist) infinitive (2086b. App.iv.4). In this way--
μέλλω ἐρεῖν 'I propose to say (but may be prevented).—ἐρῶ οι ἔσομαι
εἰπών I shall say (App. iv. 4 ; ep. 1896).
=
Pl. Apol. 21 Β Μέλλω ὑμᾶς διδάξειν ὅθεν μοι ἡ διαβολὴ γέγονε. Rep. 412 A
οὐκοῦν δεήσει τοῦ τοιούτου τινὸς ἀεὶ ἐπιστάτου, εἰ μέλλει ἡ πολιτεία σώζεσθαι.
1894. 7. Analogous circumlocutions are formed in G-B by means of
such verbs as include in themselves the inception of future : δύναμαι-χρή,
πρέπει, δεῖ, etc. (cp. also A είμι)-in particular μέλλω, θέλω, βούλομαι, ὀφείλω
(2086 f. App. vi. 4), and above all the Latinism ἔχω with tho infinitivo
(App. iv. 6 ft.).
Clement. 1, 4 χεῖρον ἔχω παθεῖν. 1, 12 περὶ τούτου μαθεῖν ἔχεις, et passim.
Ignat. ad Rom. 2 ἐὰν σιωπήσητε κρείττονι ἔργῳ ἔχετε ἐπιΓΡΑΦΗΝΑΙ. Hormas Sim.
9, 10 μικρὸν ἔχω ἀνΑΠΑΥΘΗΝΑΙ. Maear. 561 Β οὐκ ᾔδεις ὅτι γλληφθῆναι ἔγεια
καὶ ἀΠΟΘΑΝΕΙΝ. Epiph. i. 736 Β ἐλέγξει σε ἔχω. Apophth. 96 Α ταχέως έχει
τὸ σῶμα σου ἀσθενῆCal. JMoschos 2865 ο βλέπε πόσους κόπους θέλεις ἀπολέσαι.
Loont. Neap. V. S. 1685 ο αύριον θέλομεν ἐκΔΙΚΑΣΑΙ Mac. Chron. 721, 20
ἔχετε γενέθαι. Theoph. 127, 23 ἢ Ἴλλος έχει εἶναι εἰς τὸ παλάτιον ἢ ἐγώ, - so
even ἔχω ἔχειν for ἕξω, as : Porph. Adm. 201, 5 & 218, 8 ἔχειν ἔΧΟΜΕΝ.
1894. 7. For N 500 App. iv. 6 f. and ep. Span. τοι ἔχεις δὲ καὶ συνείδησιν
ὁποῦ σὲ θέλει ἐλέγχειν. Prodr. 4, 514 καὶ τότε θέλω νά σε ἰδῶ τὸ πῶς τον θέλεις
CYPEIN.
443
1895-1899.] FUTURE, DURATIVE AND PERFECT.
DURATIVE FUTURE.
1895. 8. Morphologically considered, the durative future is,
with considerable exceptions (1882), identical with the effective
future, but syntactically denotes that something will go on,
recur, or be repeated at some time to come (shall be working) :
go'shall have' (also effect. 'shall obtain '), apέw 'shall be a ruler'
(also effect. ' shall obtain power'). (Cp. 1853.)
εἰ τοῦτο ποιήσομεν ῥᾳδίως τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἕξομεν ὅσον χρόνον ἐν τῇ πολεμία
ἐσόμεθα.—Xen. Μem. 2, 1, 17 τί διαφέρουσι τῶν ἐξ ἀνάγκης κακοπαθούντων,
είχε πειNHCOYCI καὶ διψήσογει καὶ ῥiricoγει καὶ ἀργαν#coc; Αr. Αν. 759
αἶρε πλήκτρον εἰ Μαχεῖ.
J
1896. 8. For the sake of distinctness and perspicuity, it is often
periphrased by means of ἔσομαι οι μέλλω (cp. 1893) and the present
participle (1883 f. 2106 f.), since G times also by one of the other
auxiliary verbs (1893 f.) θέλω, βούλομαι, ὀφείλω, and above all ἔχω, with
the present infinitive (App. iv. 4 & 6):
Pl. Phil. 324 E εἴπερ μέλλει πόλις εἶναι. ib. 30 μέλλω λέγειν different from
μέλλω ἐρεῖν (1893). ΝΤ Matt. 24, 9 ἔceCHE MICOΥΜΕΝΟΙ. Luko I, 20 ECH
σιωπῶν καὶ μὴ ΔΥΝΑΜΕΝΟΣ λαλῆσαι. Clement. 1, 17 σοὶ μὲν ἑτοίμως ἔχω
ΣΥΝΟΔΕΥΕΙΝ. Vita Epiph. 41 ο καὶ ἔcH προσέχων. ib. D και ἒCH Φρουρο
MENOC, EỶOPAINÓMENOC. 44 B f. ECOMAI KPATION, ECH ExepaiNwN, et passim.
Damasc. ii. 325 Α θέλεις λέγειν ὅτι ἐγὼ χειροποίητα οὐ προσκυνῶ.
Mal. 97, 8
γράμματα ὀφείλοντα πείσαι.
For N see App. iv. and ep. 1886.
1896. 8. Not rarely in A, and very often in P-N, the present acts
as a durative future. Illustrations in 1836 and App. iv. 2 f.
FUTURE PERFECT.
1897. 9. The completed future or Future Perfect (called also
3rd future), which in its simple form is peculiar to A and
Atticistic Greek (689. 1885), denotes that something will have
taken place previous to some other future occurrence.
It is
virtually a perfect transferred to the future time:
Ar. Plut. 1027 φράζε καὶ πεπράξεται. Xen. An. 2, 4, 5 εὐθὺς ᾿Αριαίος
ἀφεστήκει, ὥστε φίλος ἡμῖν οὐδεὶς λελείψεται. So Aristid. ειρήσεται, δεδή-
σεται, κεκλείσεται, ἐσκέψεται, πεπραξομένου (WSchmid ii. 51).
1898. 1o. In its simple form the perfect future is fairly
common in the passive, but in the active it is limited to the
two verbs ἑστήξω and τεθνήξω, all the rest being formed peri-
phrastically by means of eropa and the perfect participle
(1884. 1892 f. 2106 f.).
Ar. Nub. 1435 ἦν δὲ μὴ γένηται, μάτην ἐμοὶ κεκλαύσεται, σὺ δ' ἐγχανὼν
τεθνήξεις. Dem. 4, 50 ἂν ταῦτα εἰδωμεν, καὶ τὰ δέοντα ἐσόμεθα ἐγνωκότες
καὶ λόγων ματαίων ἀπηλλαγμένοι. Hermas Sim. 5, 4, 2 ἔcomαι έωρακώς,
ΕΣΟΜΑΙ ΑΚΗΚώς.
1899. 10º. In M-N it is expressed by means of the future of exw or eîµai
preceded by the sign of the futuro νά, θέλει νά), θενά (θὲ νά), θά, and
followed by the perfect participle passivo : θὰ ἔχω γραμμένου, θὰ εἶμαι λου-
σμένος, φτασμένος. (1886. App. iv. 12-15. 19.)
444
MOODS-INDICATIVE.
[1900-1903.
MOODS IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES.
(SIMPLE SENTENCES.)
A. INDICATIVE.
For an historical survey of the moods see App. v. 1 ff.
1900. Syntactically considered, the indicative which still
fully survives in N (save in the future, App. iv.), denotes
both in A and N something positive or actual, whether in the
present, past, or future. The actuality implied by it may
naturally assume the form of a direct assertion, denial, or
question. Accordingly the Greek indicative, in simple clauses,
substantially corresponds to the English indicative. The nega-
tion is in A où, in G-N ovdév, in N dév, according to 1796–1800.
ypάow 'I write or am writing.' yéypapa 'I have written.' ypávw
I shall write.' ypadov 'I was writing or I used to write.' ypaya
'I (once) wrote.' eyeypapew 'I had written.'-ypáþeɩ; 'does he write?'
or is he writing?' eypávare; 'did you write?' тi yeɣpápate; ‘what
have you written ?' ñóre ypáveis; 'when will you write ?
So too in N : γράφω. θὰ γράψω, ἔγραψα. εἶχα γραμμένα.—ἔγραψε ; πότε
σοῦ ἔγραψε ; τί θὰ γράψετε; πῶς ἔγραψες;
1901. Contrary to English usage, the Greek language employs
the potential indicative, that is-
1. The imperfect indicative of impersonal expressions to
indicate that something could be done, ought to (should) be done
or have been done, as : ἐξῆν, εἰκὸς (δίκαιον, ἀναγκαῖον, καλὸν, αἰσχρὸν)
ἦν, ἔδει, (ἐχρῆν, προσῆκεν, and verbals in -τέον ἦν,all without
av; that is where English would require the past subjunctive
(cp. 1849).
αν
Eur. Hipp. 297 τί σιγᾷς, οὐκ ἐχρῆν σιγαν, τέκνον; Ρl. Crit. 54 Ο αἰσχρῶς
κακὰ εἰργάσω τούτους οὓς ἥκιστα ἔδει. Clem. R. ad Cor. 46, 8.
1901. So too in N, which however lacks the modal âv (1774): tí ownậs
ποῦ δὲν ἔπρεπε νὰ σωπᾷς ; δέν του ἔπρεπε νὰ μιλῇ, δέν σού 'στεκε νὰ γελᾷς.
For P-B compare 1774, b, c.
1902. 2. Very often the indicative aorist after oλíyov or
jukpoû, but for a little,' 'well-nigh,' 'nearly' (also oλyou or
μικροῦ δεῖν [2008], ὀλίγου οι μικροῦ ἐδέησα with the infinitive
[1902]), corresponding to the English pluperfect subjunctive
(cp. 1879):
óλísoɣ éπeλaðómнN 'I had almost forgotten.' Pl. Menex. 238 в ỏмíгoy
πληγὰς ἔλαβον ὅτι ἐπελαθόμην. (Th. 2, 77, 5 τοὺς Πλαταιέας ἐλαχίστου ἐλέητε
διαφθείραι.)
1903. Hore N usually resorts to the infinitival construction resolved
through va : παρὰ (or ἀπὸ λίγο νὰ πέσω, ἀπὸ (οι παρὰ τρίχα νὰ πέσω, ὀλίγο"
Eλeuve và méσw, I had well-nigh fallon.' Novertheloss the ancient mode
has a certain parallel in the colloquialism ἀπὸ (or παρὰ) 'λίγο (κι) ἔπεφτα.
‘I
445
1904-1909.] INDICATIVE-PRIMARY SUBJUNCTIVE.
1904. 3. The indicative of the past after εἴθε, εἰ γάρ (1748), ὡς,
'would that' (1923), to express an unattainable wish; in par-
ticular the imperfect indicative for the present, and the aorist
indicative for the past (1907). Negation μή (1804).
Eur. Her. 73 εὔθ᾽ ἦρθα δυνατὸς ὁρᾶν ὅσον πρόθυμος εἶ. Alc. 536 εἴθ᾽
ΕἴΡΟΜΕΝ σ', "Αδμητε, μὴ λυπούμενον.
1905. Otherwise this wish may be expressed by the verbal form
ὤφελον (G-B ὤφειλον 996193; ep. App. iv. 5) with the present or aorist
infinitive :
Xen. An. 2, 1, 4 ἀλλ᾽ ὤφελε μὲν Κῦρος ζῆν. Soph. El. 1131 ὡς ὤφελον
πάροιθεν ἐκλιπεῖν βίον.
1905. In G-B this ὤφε(ι)λον (ὄφελον ? 717 [r]) is sometimes treated ad-
verbially as an equivalent of εἴθε, as : Ignat. ad Smyrn. 12, 1 ὠφελον πάντες
αὐτὸν ἐΜΙΜΟΥ͂ΝΤΟ.
1906. Since & times popular speech often expressos this interjectional
wish by simple i'va (N và) with the subjunctive, an elliptical phrase fre-
quently preceded in N by as, άμποτε ἄν ποτε), μακάρι νά, also ὢ νά, (&) που
νά, θεέ οι θέ μου νά, Χριστέ μου (Παναγία μου, μάνα μου, etc.) νά, etc.
Epict. 4, 1, 142 ἵνα τις ἐπιστὰς διατεινομένῳ σοι τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ μόνον εἴπῃ. Acta
Pil. B 5, 2 τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἵνα παραλάβης καὶ μέρος ἵνα ἔχῃς μετ᾿ αὐτοῦ.
Nicet. 5oo, 22 ἄν ποτε ἵνα ἐφρόντιζες. Cant. iii. 99, 2.
Prodr. 3, 269 ς ἐγενόμην ἔπαρχος κἂν δεκαπέντε ἡμέρας. 206 f. Χριστέ Νά
την επιάσα, Χριστέ μου να την έπιασα κτλ.
1907. 4. Very often the past indicative accompanied by ἂν
(potential indicative), to express the apodosis or sequence of an
hypothetical case: 'something would happen or would have
happened' (1974). In particular-
a. The imperfect for the present, as: ἔγραφον ἄν ‘I would write.
b. The aorist for the past, as: éypaya av 'I would have written.'
For more examples see 1974 f.
1908. So still in N where, howevor, av has been changod to và (1774)
and recently to (θὲ νὰ) 0ά : Prodr. 3, 211 καὶ τότε Νά 'Δες, δέσποτα, πηδήματα
νεωτέρου. Νὰ ἔγραφα, θά ἔγραφα, etc. (App. iv. 14 11.)
B. PRIMARY SUBJUNCTIVE.
[PRESENT AND FUTURE.]
1909. The independent (primary) subjunctive is used-
r. Deliboratively or dubitatively interrogative subjunctive),
chiefly in the 1st person, to express a hesitating interrogation,
or deliberation (ep. 2037). It is often introduced by βούλει (βού
λεσθε), θέλεις (θέλετε).--- Negation μή.
Aesch. Sept. 1057 τί πάθω; τί δὲ Δρῶ; τί δὲ μήσομαι ; Eur. Ion 758
ΕἴΠΩΜΕΝ ἢ εἰΓΩΜΕΝ; ἢ τί δράσομεν; Xen. Μem. 1, 2, 45 πότερον βίαν
φῶμεν ἢ μὴ φώμεν εἶναι; Ρ1. Gorg. 521 D Βούλει σοι εἴπω; Pl. Phaed.
228 F ποῦ δὲ Βούλει καθιζόμενοι ΑΝΑΓΝῶΜΕΝ; Soph. Εl. 81 θέλεις ΜΕΝΩΜΕΝ
αὐτοῦ κανακογεωMEN γύων ; Ο. R. 651.
446
SUBJUNCTIVE, PRIMARY.
[1909b-1914h.
1909. So too in P-B composition, where κελεύεις οι προστάσσεις is also used
for θέλεις, as: Vita Epiph. 52 c θέλεις, Κάλλιστε, διώξω τὸ πνεῦμα ἀπὸ σοῦ ;
53 ο θέλεις ἄρω τὰ σίδηρα ἀπὸ τῶν χειρῶν σου; 68 Α τί προτάσεις Δώρω
σαι ; Callin. 9r, 27 τί ἡμεῖς εἴπωμεν; 88, 15 τί ἀνταποδώσωμεν ; 88, 18 τί
εἴπω ἢ τί λαλήσω; 92, 2ο πως τολμήσωMEN; Apophth. 112 ο πάτερ, κελεγεια
λάβω αὐτό ;—For another substitute as well as for N, see App. v. 19.
1910. The interrogative subjunctive is uncommon in the 3rd person,
as: Soph. Αi. 403 ποι τις οὖν ΦΥΓΗ; Dem. 19, 88 τί τις εἶναι τοῦτο φῇ ;
1911. For the sake of clearness P-B Greek adds iva before this sub-
junctive, as :
Epict. 2, 19, 21 ποῦ γὰρ ἵν᾽ ὑμεῖς τὴν ἀρετὴν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἄλλοις ἴσην ἢ καὶ
κρείττονα ἔργῳ Υπολάβητε ; Orig. iii. 297 ο περὶ ποῖον ἀγρὸν ἵΝΑ ΚΑΤΑΓνώμεθα ;
Narr. Zos. 101, 3 τί θέλεις Να ποιήσωμέν σοι;
ត
For more examples as well as for N, see 1774 & App. iv. 12 f.
1912. 2. Hortatively (conjunctivus adhortativus) in the 1st
person (mostly plural), to express an invitation or exhortation.-
Negation μή.
(In this case English places led before the imperative, 1913.)
ἴωμεν ' let us go.
• let us not be mad.
'let us spare.'
καὶ δὴ λέγωμεν 'well, let us say. μὴ μαινώμεθα
Eur. Frg. 418 φειδώμεθ᾿ ἀνδρῶν εὐγενῶν, φειδώμεθα,
1913. 2b. In the case of the future subjunctive, a hortative
particle ἄγε, φέρε, (also ἄγετε, εἰ δ᾽ ἄγε, ἴθι, δεῦρο, δεῦτε, ἔα) is
placed before, corresponding to the English let (1912):
Dem. 18, 267 φέρε δὴ τὰς μαρτυρίας ὑμῖν ἀναγνώ. Pl. Soph. 239 Β ΕΑ
δὴ νῦν ἐν σοὶ σκεψώμεθα.
1914. This A hortative use of the subjunctive holds good for P- B
Greek also. The only noteworthy deviation therefrom is that in G- B
άφες (φετε), ἔασον (εάσατε), also δεύρο, δός, ἐπίτρεψον, etc., are com-
monly substituted for the A representatives (cp. 1915), and sometimes
used even before the 2nd person, that is before the imperative also, as :
NT Luko 6, 42 ἀδελφέ, ἔφες ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ σου.
Matt. 27, 49 ἄφες ἴΔΩΜΕΝ. Mark 15, 36 ἄφετε ἴδωμεν. Εpict. 1, 9, 15 ἄφεσ
Δείξωμεν αὐτοῖς ὅτι οὐδενὸς ἔχουσιν ἐξουσίαν. 1, 15, 7 Αφες ΑΝΘΗΣΗ πρῶτον εἶτα
προβάλη τον καρπόν, εἶτα πεπανθή. 2, 18, 24 άφες ἴδω τίς εἰ καὶ περὶ τίνος,
αφες σε Δοκιμάσω. Pallad. 1006 D ἄφες ἴδω. Εphes. (431) 1285 ο ἄφεσ
ἔλθωσιν. Chal. 965 A. Nic. ii. go1 ο Αφες σκέψωμαι. Theoph. 183, 7 ἄφες
κολαζώμεθα. Theoph. cont. 610, 19 Αφες μὴ ἴδω καὶ τὴν γραφήν.
d
Sept. Gen. 11, 3 Δείτε πλινθείρωμεν πλίνθους. 11, 4 Δείτε οἰΚΟΔΟΜΗΣΩΜΕΝ,
19, 32 Δερο και ποτίσωμεν. Εx. 3, 1ο Δερο ἀποστείλω σε πρὸς Φαραώ.
Clonont. 13, 3 άσατέ με προcarάτω. Acta Pauli et Theelao 257, 5 Δόσ
Απαγάγω τὴν θηριομάχον. CGL 655, 4 λός ΑΝΑΓΝ@. Vita Epiph. 53 4 δεύρο
πρόθες τὰς σὰς βίβλους κἀγὼ τὰς ἐμάς. 64 Α & Β ἐπίτρεψον παραθήσοYCIN
τράπεζαν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις καὶ φάροΝΤΑΙ καὶ πίονται καὶ ἀπελεύσονται (= -ωνται).
Apophth. 341 Α ἴδω ὑμᾶς, τέκνα μου ἠγαπημένα.
a
1914. Likewise G B often uses iva with the 3rd person subjunctive
instead of the 3rd person imperative simplo, as: Mark 5, 23.
2 Cor. 8, 7.
Ephes. 5, 33 έκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω ὡς ἑαυτόν, ἡ δὲ γυνὴ
ἵνα φοβῆται τὸν ἄνδρα.
447
1915-1918.]
SUBJUNCTIVE, PRIMARY.
1915. For all the above hortative prepositives (1913 f.), B-N speech has
substituted â (from aye? 155°), äïvre from άyeтe (155º), and above all âs,
a particle which appears even in literary compositions since the T, as:
Leont. Neap. V. J. 71, 11 (C) δ σκανδαλιζόμενος 3c σκανδαλίζεται καὶ ἃς δώσῃ
κριούς. Theoph. 387, 2 ἐλθὲ οὖν πρὸς ἡμᾶς καὶ ἦς λαλήσωμέν σοι τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην.
394, 26 ἆc εἰσέλθωσι πάντες. Porph. Adm. 201, 11 c ἀποστείλῃ, ἂς καθέζηται,
Ac Oεopn. Theoph. Cont. 751, 16 άc ldw autóv.
θεωρῇ.
Leo. Gram. 354, 22 λc kataßá-
σωμεν.
380, 6 ac
124, 2
Alchem. 311, 13 ac yévηTaι. 322, 2 âc pýνetai ews pas. ib. 7 ac Вpán. 324, 3
γένηται. ψήνεται
δε καῇ καλῶς. 336, 8 ac ἔνι τὸ ἀρτζέντο ὅσον χρήζεις. ib. 24 ãc στέκεται έως
μεσημέριν. 318, 3 c ξηρανθῇ. ib. 17 f. ac ẞpáon, ac oтaly.
σταθῇ.
ἁπαλύνῃ. 386, 2 c ἐπιπλέῃ ; etc. etc.
âc
Apoc. Mar. 123, 7 ac idwμev.
οι κολάζωμαι. ib. 23 c ἐξέλθω καὶ ἂς κολάζωμαι. 125, 16 &c κριθῶσιν.
Span. 28 τοιοῦτος ε εἶσαι. 41 åс σE KATаmaтwσi. MGlycas 167 f. kai kầy âc
τὸν ἐκέρδησες, καὶ κἂν ᾖς τὸν ἐχάρης | ᾶς εἶδες κἂν ἐνύπνιον. Prodr. 1, 104 ff.
ἀλλ' ἂς ἐκάθου σιγηρὸς καὶ ἀπομεριμνημένος | καὶ ἂς ἔκνηθες τὴν λέπραν σου καὶ
ᾶς ἔφινες ἐμέναν, | ãc ἔλαβες ὁμοίαν σου, καπήλου θυγατέραν. IStaph. 379 f. καὶ
Ac τα τρίβῃς ἀμάδι, c τα κάμῃς ἀλοιφήν.
and so on ever since passim.
1916. It is generally taken for granted that the above particlo ds is a cor-
ruption of apes, but this theory is erroneous. For the verb ἀφίημι, owing to
its irregular inflection (937; hence P by-forms ápíw and apeŵ or å‹péw 960) began
as early as G to retreat bofore its synonym éáw, a circumstance which furthered
the case of the latter. Accordingly apes, or rathor apnoe (813. 949), found
a formidable rival in éaσov or rather care (cp. its adverbial present ea and ela
in 4). In the struggle which thus ensued between the two adverbial impera-
tives apis and are, the latter prevailed, and admitting as it did of a phono-
pathic contraction, became dσe (150, c; also aoe? aftor 723), a form still common
in N speech, as: âoe µe (949). It is this doe then, not apes, which was reduced to
the hortative particle as, let, a syncopated form due to its prepositive and
proclitic use : ἆσε ἀκούσω, ἂς ἀκούσω, ἂσε τον ἀκούσω, ἃς τον ἀκούσω-ep. Belth.
184 Ἐκ λοιπὸν τὰ περιττὰ καὶ δεῦτε ᾖς στραφώμεν. Asin. 180 Ãc (i. e. ἆσ') τηνε
(= άφες αὐτήν). Picat. 299 καὶ ἂς τους νὰ βλέπουν ; 308 âc τον αὐτόν. Abraham
26 ac rη". So now ace με, άς τον,
ม
τον, c τους.
1916". The derivation of ås or, less correctly, as from apes moreover militatos
against both morphology and phonopathy. In the first place apes cannot
possibly bo admitted as a popular term, seeing that the T-N future indicative
and subjunctive is not ἀφω, but ἀφήσω (in N dialectally also ἀφήκω). Then N
speech knows of no active imperative in -s, all invariably closing with € (949).
Accordingly the imperative of ἀφήσω is ἄφησε (so too θέσε, δῶσε, etc.), and by
apocope, or rather syncope, a‹no' or apns, a form actually now curront in
ἄψησ' με, ἄφησ' τον. Now this apno' or apns, or oven apes, if syncopated,
in connected speech, would give *aps (the northern N form ap'ot is due to 030),
that is *άψ (cp. *γράφ-σε γράψε, παῦσε [i. e. παφ-σε] πάψε 1801), never as (or s).
σι
1917. 3. Prohibitively in the 2nd (then also 3rd) person future,
to express a prohibition.-Negation un 'don't' (1801. 1804).
Dem. 21, 211 ΜΗ κατὰ τοὺς νόμους Δικάσητε" ΜΗ Βοηθήσητε τῷ πεπονθότι
δεινά. Xen. An. 5, 4, 19. ΜΗΔὲν ἀθγμήςнτε ἕνεκα τῶν γεγενημένων. Isocr.
4, 129 ΜΗλεία Υπολάβη με δυσκόλως ἔχειν.
1918. For a prohibition addressed to the 2nd and 3rd person of the
present, A regularly uses the present imperative (1927, a). In P times,
however, the subjunctival mode of prohibition for all cases gained
popularity (owing to the easier inflection of the subjunctive 1919.
1928), and gradually altogether dislodged the imperative from pro-
448
SUBJUNCTIVE,
[1918–1922.
PRIMARY.
hibitions. This process, which naturally gave a wider scope to the
subjunctive, came to a close during T, and the use of the subjunctive
has ever since remained absolute.
στ
Sept. Tobit. 3 3 MĤ μe еKAIKĤc. Polemo 202 Mнde yeítova exeic (write
EXHC). Concil. Sard. († 347) II MH KATAOPONĤ ÈKELvov kaì ovvexéoтepov ÓMIXĤ.
Cyrill. H. Procat. 2 ΜΗ τις ὑμῶν εὑρεθῇ πειράζων τὴν χάριν. Μή τις ῥίζα πικρίας
ἄνω φύουσα ἐνοχλή. Apophth. 380 Α εἰς ὃν ἂν τόπον ἀπέλθῃς μὴ μετρεία (write
METPĤC) EaνTÓV. Nil. 552 B MH DIÁKнCAI. Damasc. ii. 324 a uŋdè átimázḤc
αὐτόν, μηδὲ λέγης αὐτὰς εἴδωλα καὶ ἀπόλλῃς τὴν ψυχήν σου. (More examples
in App. v. 16, b.)
1918. So now regularly in N (App. v. 17 f.).
1919. Prohibition being nothing else than a negative command
(1927) or exhortation (deprecation), its proper exponent, the subjunc-
tive mood, was naturally suggested also for the kindred notion of
affirmative exhortation or command. Accordingly the 3rd person of
the hortative subjunctive was identified with the 3rd person impera-
tive, and in the interchange consequent thereon the imperative being
less normal and familiar in point of inflection (1928) lost ground
before the subjunctive, and eventually disappeared from the common
language altogether. This process, which may have been furthered
by the influence of Latin usage, added to the further extension of the
subjunctive. (1921. 1988. App. v. 16.)
Hippol. 804 A ἔκβλητος ΓΕΝΗΤΑΙ κλήρου ἁγίου. Eus. ii. 325 ο ἐπὶ τοῦτο
μόνον τραπώσιν. Athan. ii. 7or A οἱ προειρημένοι ἐχθροὶ καθαιρεθώσιν. Apophth.
112 A 8 Oéλwv ÈX0‹îv čλ0Ḥ. For more examples see App. v. 16.
1920. From H times
onwards the hortative subjunctive, especially
that of the future, has received a further extension by appropriating
the cognate (hortative or desiderative) function of the secondary
subjunctive [optative]. (App. v. 15.)
Jos.
Sept. Ruth I, 9 Δῴη (or δώῃ) κύριος ὑμῖν καὶ εὕρΗτε ἀνάπαυσιν.
Β. J. 4, 3, το απίῳ δὲ ἡ πεῖρα τοῦ λόγου. Athan. i. 740 Λ ἀλλ᾽ εἴθε κἂν ἀκοYCHC
Iva où meioons. For more examples see App. v. 15.
1921. 4. Prospectively in the room of the future indicative,
mostly with the negation où. This usage, which is fairly com-
mon from Homer onwards, is resorted to chiefly in confident
denials, hence the negation où is frequently intensified by the
subjective asseveration pv, commonly mistaken for un (1827).
In P this construction spreads rapidly at the expense of the
future indicative which it eventually supersedes.
A
Z
Α 262 οὐ γάρ πω τοίους ἴδον ἀνέρας οὐδὲ ἴΔωμαι. Ζ 459 καί ποτέ τις εἴπιειν.
μ 383 δύσομαι ἐς ᾿Αΐδας καὶ ἐν νεκύεσσι φαείνω. π 434 οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνὴρ οὐδ᾽
ἔσσεται οὐδὲ ΓΕΝΗΤΑΙ, ὅς κεν Τηλεμάχῳ σῷ υἱέϊ χεῖρας ἐποίσει, Ηymn. Ap. r
μνήσομαι οὐδὲ λάθωμαι Απόλλωνος-Eur. H. F. 718 ὁ δ᾽ οὐ πάρεστιν οὐδὲ μὴ(ν)
Μόλις ποτέ. Αr. Αch. 662 κοὐ μή(ν) ποθ' άλω. - Xen. Cyr. 7, 3, 13 οὐ μή(ν) σε
κρύψω πρὸς ὅντινα βούλομαι ἀφικέσθαι. Dem. 4, 44 ἂν καθώμεθα οἴκοι οὐδέποτ'
οὐδὲν ἡμῖν οὐ μὴν) ΓΕΝΗΤΑΙ τῶν δεόντων. Soph. Ph. 381 οὐ μή(ν) ποτ' ἐς τὴν
Σкûρоν Éкпλ¤ÝсḤC Exov. For P examplos see App. iv. 8 and cp. 2016.
1922. Whon this subjunctival mode of oxprossing the future had become
very common, it gradually began to lose its original force and cloarness,
the more so as the subjunctive already performed too many other functions
(1909-20). The process of weakening was then stommod by placing before
449
G g
1922–1925.]
SUBJUNCTIVE, SECONDARY.
the subjunctive as a reinforcement the modal particle av, later mistakon
for iva, Nvá (1761. 1766. 1774 f.). The compound substitute thus obtained
for the ancient future indicative remained in general use through
B-M times and still sporadically obtains in present speech. But as
early as M (about the 13th) an additional word, è or 06 (i.e. Otλe, 863,
App. iv. 14) was placed before va and so led to è và Oerà eá, an extreme
contraction universal in N speech since the 16th (App. iv. 14).
"
મ
Plut. ii. 777 в ouk än σol пpodiaλé zwmal. Clement. 45 B Tís yàp än åmap-
Β οὐκ ἄν σοι προδιαλέξωμαι.
THCH ; Sext. 62ο, 28 οὐκ ὀλίγην δ᾽ ἂν ἔχῃ μοῖραν εἰς προτροπὴν καὶ ὅταν βλέπω-
μεν κτλ.
Pallad. 113 B ἐὰν γὰρ μάθω, ἵνα αὐτῷ εγντύχω· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ μάθω . . . οὐκ
ἀπέρχομαι ἕως τοῦ ὄρους. Acta Pil. B 4, 1 ἡμεῖς ἵνα εἴπωμεν τῇ μεγαλειότητί
σου τί εἶπεν αὐτός. Apoc. Mar. 117, 27 ἐπὶ μεσημβρίαν ἵνα ἀπέλθωμεν.
Nicet. 304, 26 εἰς βότρυν ἀγουρίδος μόλις ἵνα εὕρΗ τις μίαν ῥῶγαν ὥριμον. Span.
137 καὶ ἂν τὸ μικρὸν εὐχαριστῇς, νὰ σ᾿ ἔλθῃ καὶ ἄλλο μέγα Prodr. 2. 107 1. μὴ
προσδοκᾷς δὲ πάλιν | ὅτι ἄν με δώσῃς τίποτε νὰ τὸ κακοδικήσω.
So still at present: rúpa ná oe is. For more examples soe App. iv. 12 f.
σε
C. SECONDARY SUBJUNCTIVE.
[OPTATIVE.]
1923. In A the secondary subjunctive [optative] has two dis-
tinct functions, according as it is used without av or with äv.
1. Without är, the independent secondary subjunctive is
desiderative (optative proper), in that it expresses a wish that
something may or may not happen. It is often introduced by
a desiderative particle, such as eile, ei yúp (1748), s 'would
that' (1904):
Soph. Αi. 550 ὦ παῖ, γένοιο πατρὸς εὐτυχέστερος. Men. Mon. 336 μή
μοι γένοιθ᾽ ἃ βούλομ᾽ ἀλλ᾽ ἃ συμφέρει.
For P-N see 1905 ff. and App. iv. 5. 13.
1923. For another unattainable wish see 1904-8.
1924. This desiderative secondary subjunctive held its own in
the living language as late as T, and its currency in the time of the
ancient grammarians gave it the suggestive name optative (677), as:
NT I Thess. 5, 23 ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης αγιάσαι ὑμᾶς ὁλοτελείς. Phil. 20 ἐγὼ
σου ΟΝΑΙΜΗΝ ἐν Κυρίῳ. 1 Pet. 1, 2 χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη.
However, as early as II, it began to retreat before the primary sub-
junctive until it eventually disappeared altogether (App. iv. 12-15) [.
1925. 2. With av, the independent past subjunctive is potential,
in that it expresses a future possibility or potentiality (may,
might, can, could), often also a mild assertion or command, thus
bordering on the future indicative and imperative (1889 ff.),
also on the primary subjunctive (1918 ff.)-Negation où.
[1] In the NT, this dosiderativo secondary subjunctive occurs thirty-five times
in all, and that always (oxcopt once, Phil. 20) in the 3rd person singular: Mark
II, 14. Luke 1, 38; 20, 16. Acts 8, 20. Rom. 3, 4; 6; 31. 6, 2; 15. 7,7; 13. 9, 14.
11, 1; 11. 15,5; 13. 1 Cor. 6, 15. Gal. 2, 17. 3, 21. 6, 14. 1 Thoss. 3, 11; 12. 5, 23.
2 Thess. 2, 17. 3, 5; 16. 2 Tim. 1, 16; 18. Philom. 20. Hob. 13, 21.
a
Pet. I, 2.
1 Pet. 1, 2.
2
450
IMPERATIVE COMPOUND CLAUSES.
[1925-1930.
મ
Eur. And. 85 πολλὰς ἂν εἴροια μηχανάς. Xen. An. I, 9, 3 ἔνθα πολλὴν
μὲν σωφροσύνην καταμάθοι ἄν τις. Pl. Crat. 402 A dìs els tòv aútÒV TOTA-
μὸν οὐκ ἂν ἐμβαίμc. Soph. Αnt. 444 σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν ᾗ θέλεις.
an
Phil. 674 xwpoîc an elow. So too Acts 26, 29 eỷžaiмнN än (the only
passage in the NT).
1925. For the P-B history of the potential secondary subjunctive see
under dependent clauses, especially 2039-40 & App. v. 12.
[1925°. For the potential indicative of the past see 1901–7.]
1925ª. For a future optative see 1935-6, 1953 f., & App. v. 14 1
IMPERATIVE.
f.
1926. The imperative expresses a demand in the form of
command; hence it always refers to the future or present (never
to the past, 678).-Negation un 'don't' (1801. 1804):—λéye
'speak,' µǹ λéye 'don't speak.'
N
Eur. Alc. 651 ΜΕΝΟΝ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν καὶ συνέστιος ΓΙΝΟΥ. [Isocr.] 1, 16 τοὺς μὲν
θεοὺς φοβοῇ, τοὺς δὲ γονέας τίμα, τοὺς δὲ φίλους αἰσχΥΝΟΥ, τοῖς δὲ νόμοις πείθογ.
So too in N : γράφε ! σώπα ! λέγετε ! φύγε ! ἄκουσε ! ἔρχου ! κάθου ! ἔρχεσθε !
1927. In A negative commands, which are called prohibitions
(1918 ff.), are expressed-
a. If in the 2nd person, by the present imperative or future subujnc-
tive, as : μὴ ποίει, μὴ ποιήσῃς, μὴ φοβοῦ, μὴ φοβηθῇς.
b. If in the 3rd person, by the present or future imperative, as: µn
ποιείτω, μὴ ποιησάτω, μὴ φοβείσθω, μὴ φοβηθήτω—rarely by the future
subjunctive, as: Isocr. 4, 129 ΜΗλείς απολάβη με δυσκόλως ἔχειν.
1928. The alternative or mixed usage, found even in A antiquity,
of the future subjunctive and the imperative in prohibitions, and
the greater popularity of the former, consequent on its common fre-
quency as well as the simplicity of its inflection (1919), could not fail
to pave the way for its substitution in all cases for the prohibitive
imperative, in the 3rd person even in positive commands. For the
process of this phenomenon, which set in as early as I times, see
1918 ff. and App. v. 13 & 16.
1928. Comparatively speaking, the imperativo is more frequent in P-N
than in A, in consequence of the preference manifested by the former to
substitute the paratactic imperative for subordinate, espocially conditional,
clauses (1977, b. 2154).
MOODS IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES.
(Subordinate OR COMPOUND SENTENCES.)
1929. Dependent, subordinate or compound clauses are those which
qualify principal clauses by means of subordinating conjunctions
(declarative, causal, consecutive, temporal, conditional, final), or rela-
tive words. Mark, however, that in Greck the discourse so subordi-
nated can, in most cases, be replaced by a participial, sometimes also
by an infinitival construction.
1930. In dealing with dependont or compound clauses wo must con-
stantly romember that, in all languages, popular speech has a docided
prodilection for the simpler mode of parataxis (1703. 1710 f. 1928. 1939.
1943. 2031 f.).
451
Gg 2
1931-1937.]
COMPOUND SENTENCES.
1931. In dependent clauses the choice of the mood is deter-
mined by the nature of each individual case. Only when the
verb of the leading clause stands in a secondary tense, is the
choice of the mood influenced (in the sense of 1933 ff.).
1932. Secondary tenses are those verbal forms which refer to the past :
aorist, imperfect, and pluperfect of the indicative and subjunctive, includ-
ing the historic present (1835). All other verbal forms, referring as they
do to the present or future (present, perfect, and future of the indicativo,
all primary subjunctives and all imperatives), are primary tenses. (692.)
1933. The verb of a clause depending on a secondary tense
may stand also in the secondary subjunctive; when this happens
after a secondary subjunctive, there is apparently an assimila-
tion of mood (1954). See 1940, 1945, 1952.
1934. The above rule respecting the sequence of moods (consecutio
modorum), that is the use of the secondary subjunctive after secondary
tenses, lost its force during G times, and holds no longer in NT
Greek, not even in the writings of Luke. This writer, it is true, still
sometimes uses the secondary subjunctive as a dependent mood, after
secondary tenses, but, limited as it is, this usage applies only to cer-
tain indirect questions (2039 f.), and at the most to some conditional
sentences hardly relevant on account of their short and parenthetical
character (App. v. 10). In all other cases of dependence the secondary
subjunctive has retreated before either the primary subjunctive or the
indicative (cp. AButtmann 256 f.). See also 1984 & App. v. 6 ff.
1935. A future optative (677) makes its appearance first in Pindar,
and though regarded as peculiar to A, is rare even in that period. It
occurs chiefly in indirect discourse (sometimes after final oπws also),
and that only after a secondary tense. In all cases it serves as
a substitute for the future indicative (but cp. 1941 ff.), us:
Th. 1, 90, 4. δ μὲν ταῦτα διδάξας καὶ ὑπειπὼν τἆλλα ὅτι αὐτὸς τἀκεῖ πράξει
XETO. Xon.
(Cp. ib. 3 ἀποκρινάμενοι ὅτι πέμψουσιν.) Χen. Cyr. 3, 1, 3 εἴ τινα φεύ
γοντα λήψοιτο, προηγόρευεν ὅτι ὡς πολεμίῳ χρήσοιτο. Αg. 2, 8 ἐπεμελήθη ὅπως
οἱ στρατιῶται τους πόνους ΑγνήCOINTO ὑποφέρειν. See also 1941. 1953.
་
1936. In G-B compositions the future optativo bocomos comparatively
commonor (especially after ds and és or ås äv - iva in final clausos 1953),
but it is doubtful whether that be a continuation or a direct imitation of 4.
It rather points to an independent novelty suggested by the analogy of
other optatives, rosorted to by fastidious scribos as a substituto for the
commonplace future subjunctivo (cp. 1765). At any rate, considering
that it is unknown to early Greek and that it is apparently absont
from 4 inscriptions (cp. Meisterhans' 206), further that its occasional
presence in writings has come down to us through B copiors, who were
actuated by the spirit of scholastic roaction, its actual occurrence in A
writings is not beyond all doubt. For illustrations soo also 1953".
1937. Prolepsis. The subject of a dependent clause is frequently
transferred by anticipation to the principal clause (generally with
change of case), and thus subordinated to it. This kind of attraction
is called prolepsis (πpódŋ↓ɩs ‘anticipation ').
Soph. Αi. 118 ὁρᾷς, Οδυσσεύ, ΤΗΝ θεῶν ἰεχὴν ὅση (for ὅση ἡ θεῶν ἰσχύς).
Isocr. 4, 78 τοὺς Νόμους ἐσκόπουν ὅπως ἀκριβῶς καὶ καλῶς ἕξουσιν. Fur. Mod.
37 δέδοικα δ' ΑΥΤΗΝ μή τι βουλεύσῃ κακόν. Pl. Αpol. 22.
Dom. 43, 23.
So still in N : φοβοῦμαι σε μὴν ἀποθάνῃς
τὸν εἶδα πῶς ἔτρεχε.
452
DECLARATIVE AND CAUSAL CLAUSES.
1938-1945.
DECLARATIVE CLAUSES.
1938. Declarative clauses are those which report the statement,
thoughts, or feelings of another, not verbatim but indirectly (he says
or thinks that...). They are the principal representatives of indirect
discourse (2027 ff.).
1939. Since P, in particular G, times declarative clauses have on
the one side spread in consequence of the growing tendency of the
language to resolve the infinitive (App. vi. 7 & 13 f.), and on the other
lost ground owing to the preference of popular speech for direct dis-
course (1703. 1710. 1930. 2036).
1940. Unless they are expressed through an infinitival or
participial construction (1929), declarative clauses are intro-
duced by means of or or the less assertive ús (1753), and
stand in the indicative. Only when they depend on a secondary
tense, do they admit also of the secondary subjunctive (1933).-
Negation où.
Isocr. 5, 23 ἔλεγον ὡς ἐλπίζογοι σὲ καὶ τὴν πόλιν ἕξειν μοι χάριν.
30, 23 ΔΕ ΑΝ ὅτι τοὺς ἀπενεγκόντας οἰκέτας ἐξαιτήσομεν.
HAECAN
Dem.
Xen. An. 2, 1,
3 ἔλεγον ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, ᾿Αριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς ἐν τῷ στρατῷ εἴη.
Cyr. 7, 2, 19 ὁ δὲ εἶπεν ὅτι ἔCOINTO (1935). Pl. Apol. 21 € ἐπειρώΜΗΝ αὐτῷ
δεικνύναι ὅτι οἴητο μὲν εἶναι σοφὸς, εἴΗ δ᾽ οὔ. See also 2136.
1941. It is chiefly in this indirect discourse, when it depends on
a secondary tense, that the future optative is admissible instead of the
future indicative (1935 f.;. cp. 1953): Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 3 el dé tiva Pev-
γοντα λήψοιτο, προηγόρευεν ὅτι ὡς πολεμίῳ χρήσoιτο.
1942. Observe that in clauses, liko čλeyev öтı vɣiaivois, the dependent
sentence őr vylaivois means either that you were well' or 'that you are
well.' Hence for perspicuity's sake, preferenco is frequently given to the
indicative : ἔλεγεν ὅτι ὑγίαινες οι ὅτι ὑγιαίνεις.
1942. The above rule 1940 holds substantially good also for
P-B Atticistic and scholastic compositions. But as regards P-N
speech, it is to be remembered that declarative clauses are intro-
duced by I-N ὅτι, beside HG διότι (ως ?), also καθότι, G-B ὡσότι,
G-N πs (present N speech using was almost exclusively), and stand
regularly in the indicative (1751-5. 1936).-Negation in P-N où, beside
G-M ovdév, in M-N dév (1796-1800). For examples see App. vi. 13.
1943. That G-N popular speech frequently turns declarative clauses to
direct discourse with or without the introductory 871, has already been
pointed out in 1930, and will be further explained in 2031 f.
1944. Contrary to English usago, the declarative conjunction is never
omitted, either in 4 or in N. For such solitary instances as: Epict. 4, 1,
73 τίς δέ σοι εἶπε τὸ περιπατῆσαι σὺν ἔργον ἐστὶν ἀκώλυτον ; so far as they do
not point to a direct quotation (τίς δέ σοι εἶπε· Τὸ περιπατεῖν κτλ.) are pro-
bably chargeablo to clerical inadvertence (rís dé σol eltev (Őti) tỏ KTX.).
CAUSAL CLAUSES.
1945. Causal clauses, when not expressed by a participial
or relative construction (1929 & 2013), are introduced by TI,
dióti, 'because'; ós 'as'; or éteì 'since,' èπeidì 'seeing that,'
ἐπεὶ ἐπειδὴ
(1737-43)-and stand in the indicative. Only when tho principal
453
1945-1950.] CAUSAL AND CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES.
clause stands in a secondary tense and represents the cause as
a matter of some one else's opinion (ostensibly, as he says), do
they admit of the past subjunctive (but never in Homer).-
Negation οὐ.
Th. I, 52, 3 'Αθηναῖοι ἐνόμισαν λελύσθαι τὰς σπονδάς, Διότι ἐς χεῖρας
ἦλθον. 2, 21, 3 οἱ Αθηναῖοι τὸν Περικλέα ἐκάκιζον ὅτι στρατηγὸς ὢν οὐκ
ἐπεξάγοι. Pl. Prot. 335 D δέομαί σου παραμεῖναι ἡμῖν, ὡς ἐγὼ οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἑνὸς
ἥδιον ἀΚΟΥΣAIMI ἢ σου.
1946. In this case N has naturally departed from A, inasmuch as
is on the one hand, and the secondary subjunctive on the other, have
retreated since H-G times before or and the indicative respectively
(1740). Be it further noted that or is at present almost obsolete
(1755), ἐπεὶ (now also ἐπεὶ καί, 1717) obsolescent, and that I speech
has nodified ἐπειδὴ to ἐπειδὴ or ἐπειδὴς καί, and διότι to γιατί (1717).
1739).
1947. After expressions of emotion (2128 ff.), such as θαυμάζω,
ἀγανακτῶ, χαλεπαίνω, χαίρω, ἀγαπῶ, δεινόν ἐστι, etc., the cause, when
uncertain, is often conceived as an hypothesis and so is expressed
by el that' with the indicative :
Dem. 4, 43 θαυμάζω δ᾽ ἐγώ γε εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ' ἐνθυμεῖται μήτ' ὀργίζεται.
Pl. Lach. 194 Λ καὶ ὡς ἀληθῶς ἀγανακτῶ εἰ οὑτωσὶ ἃ νοῦ μὴ οἷος τ᾽ εἰμὶ
εἰπεῖν. Dem. 18, 16ο αἰσχρόν ἐστιν εἰ ἐγὼ μὲν τὰ ἔργα ὑπέμεινα, ὑμεῖς δὲ
μηδὲ τοὺς λόγους ἀνέξεσθε.
1948. So still in N with the difforence that el has been replaced by ἂν
'if' or more commonly và 'that' (1773 ff.) with the primary subjunctive,
15 : μου κακοφαίνεται ἢ δέ (οι Νά μή) μου πιστεύῃς ‘I am sorry if (or that)
you don't believe me,' od xap@ Ná σe 18w 'I shall be glad to see you.'
CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES.
1949. Unless they are expressed by a relative construction
(2014 ff.), consecutive or illative clauses are introduced by ὥστε
uncommonly by ós (1756 f.), -with a finite mood (mostly
indicative) when the consequence is an actual occurrence (so
that), and with the infinitive when the consequence is repre-
sented as a resulting possibility (so as to):
Dem. 2, 26 οὕτως ἀγνωμόνως ἔχετε ὥστε ἐλπίζετε αὐτὰ χρηστὰ γενήσεσθαι;
Isocr. 12, 103 εἰς τοῦτ᾽ ἀπληστίας ἦλθον ὥστ᾽ οὐκ ἐξήρκεσεν αὐτοῖς ἔχειν
τὴν κατὰ γῆν ἀρχήν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν κατὰ θάλασσαν δύναμιν οὕτως ἐπεθύμησαν
λαβεῖν, ὥστε τοὺς συμμάχους τοὺς ἡμετέρους ἀφίστα aN. Xen. An. 5, 6, 20
πλοῖα ἡμῖν πάρεστιν, ὥστε ὅπῃ ἂν βούλησθε ἐξαίφνης ἂν ἐπιπέεοιτε. Soph.
Εl. 1172 θνητὸς δ' Ορέστης, ὥστε μή λίαν ετένε. Eur. Hec. 730 σὺ δὲ
σχολάζεις ώστε θαγμάζειν ἐμέ. Isocr. 4, 43 τοιοῦτον ἔθος ἡμῖν παρέδοσαν
ὥστε σπεισαμένους εγνελθεῖν ἐς ταὐτόν. Χen. Cyr. 6, 3, 19 πάνυ μοι ἐμές
λησεν ὥστε εἰδέναι.
Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 81 τοσούτῳ πλεονεκτήσει ὡς πεινήσας τῶν ἡδίστων σιτίων
τεύξεται. 8,7, 27 ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ ἤδη ἔσομαι ώς μηδὲν ἂν ἔτι κακὸν ΠΑΘΕΪΝ.
1950. Accordingly ὥστε with the infinitive is regularly used-
α. Το express a designed result (so as to), as: Pl. Gorg. 476 ο παν
ποιοῦσιν ὥστε δίκην μὴ διδόναι.
454
CONSECUTIVE AND FINAL CLAUSES.
[1950-1952.
b. After a comparative with ἤ (1187), as : Xen. Mem. 3, 5, 17 ΜΕΪΖΟΝ
Η ὥστε φέρειν δύνασθαι κακόν.
c. After a negative or hypothetical principal clause: [Dem.] 59, 91
ταῦτα οὐ πάλαι ἐστὶ γεγενημένα ὥστε ἀγνοεῖν ὑμᾶς.
1951. The above rule (1949 f.) applies also to those P-B compositions,
whose authors show more or less skill in the use of the infinitive. But as
regards popular speech, on the one hand it avoids the consecutive con-
struction (1759), and on the other uses not only ὥστε and its rare com-
panion ὡs, but also ὅτι 'so that, ἵνα ' so as to, sometimes even ὅπως ' so as to
(thus confounding consecutive with final clauses)-while N speech for this
variety of particles has substituted ὅπου or ποῦ either with the indicative
(so that) or with và and the subjunctive (so as to). Cp. 1757 ff. & 2016 ff.
Sept. Εx. 3, 11 τίς εἰμι ἐγὼ ὅτι πορεύομαι προς Φαραώ, βασιλέα Αἰγύπτου,
καὶ ὅτι ἐξάζω τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου; NT Matt. 8, 27 ποταπός
ἐστιν οὗτος ὅτι καὶ οἱ ἄνεμοι καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ΥΠΑΚΟΥΟΥΣΙΝ αὐτῷ; John 7, 35 που
μέλλει οὗτος πορεύεσθαι ὅτι οὐχ εγρHCOMEN αὐτόν; Theod. i. 1680 ο τοσοῦτον δ᾽
ἀπέσχον τοῦ πιστεῦσαι τῷ τῶν ὅλων θεῷ ὅτι τὸν πρὸς αὐτοὺς κατὰ ταὐτὸν ἔραντο
πόλεμον. r704 σ οὕτω, φησίν, ἐστι μεγάλη ὅτι καὶ τὰ μυρία τῶν ἰχθύων περί-
κειται γένη καὶ τὰ μέγιστα κήτη ἀδεῶς ἐν αὐτῇ κεῖται. Apophth. 253 o els
τοσοῦτον ἦλθε μέτρον ὅτι ἠσθένει καὶ κλινήρης Ν.
Ο
ἵνα ΝT Mark
Λ
Sept. Job 7, 16 οὐ γὰρ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα ζήσομαι Να Μακροθυμήσω.
11, 38 τίς σοι τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην ἔδωκεν ἵνα ταῦτα ποιής; Jos. B. J. 4, 3, το
πρὸς τοσοῦτον ἥκομεν συμφορῶν ἵνα ἡμᾶς ἐλεήσωσι καὶ πολέμιοι; Plut. ii. 233 A
τί μοι πώποτε τοιοῦτο συνέγνως ἵνα τοιαύταις με κολακεύCHC ἡδοναῖς; Athan. i
390 σ οὐ γὰρ Ῥωμαϊκή ἐστιν ἡ κρίσις ἵν᾿ ὡς βασιλεὺς πιστευθῆς. Mal. 16, 17
οὐδὲ ἡμᾶς τοιοῦτος ἔρως κατεῖχεν ἵνα περὶ τούτου Ζητήσετε.
ΓΙ
For many more instances of ὅτι and ἵνα see 1757-8 & [1].
FINAL CLAUSES.
1952. Unless they are otherwise expressed (by a participial,
infinitival, or relative construction, 1929. 2020 f.), final clauses
are introduced by ἵνα, ὅπως ἂν), ὡς (αν) (176o f.)-negatively
ἵνα μή, ὅπως ἂν μή, ὡς μή, or simple μή—and stand in the
primary subjunctive. It is only when the verb of the principal
clause is in a secondary tense (1932 f.), that they equally admit
of the secondary subjunctive "],
Xen. Mem. 3, 2, 3 βασιλεὺς αἱρεῖται οὐχ ἵνα ἑαυτοῦ καλῶς ἐπιμελῆται, ἀλλ᾽
ἵνα καὶ οἱ ἑλόμενοι δι' (δὴ ?) αὐτὸν εὖ πράττωει. An. 2, 6, 21 φίλος ἐβούλετο
εἶναι τοῖς μέγιστα δυναμένοις, ἵνα ἀδικῶν μὴ διδοίη δίκην. Μem. 2, 10, 2
παρακαλεῖς ἰατροὺς ὅπως μὴ ἀποθάνη. Pl. Crit. 43 Β ἐπίτηδές σε οὐκ ἤγειρον
ἵνα ὡς ήδιστα διάρης. Xen. An. 1, 4, 18 τὰ πλοῖα Αβρακόμας κατέκαYCEN IN
>
8:
ΝΑ
[] According to Webor's statistical calculations extending to all writers before
Aristotle, the proportion of primary subjunctives to secondary subjunctives [opta-
tivos] after secondary tonsos, is 528: 894. In particular Homor 35 : 156, Pindar 2 : 10,
Aeschylos 2 : 9, Sophoclos 2 : 23, Euripidos 3r : 65, Aristophanes 13 : 37, Herodotos
86 : 47, Thucydidos 168 : 60, Lysias 22 : 19, Isocrates 21 : 17, Istios 8 : 17,
Domosthenes 40 : 40, Aeschinos 13 : 7, Plato 22 : 79, Xenophon 45 : 265. In tho
Attic writors and Horodotos, excluding Xenophon, the frequency of tho
primary and secondary subjunctive is just equal, namoly 441. (WGoodwin p. 114
footnote.)——According to WMüller, Thoophr. 52, neither Aristotle nor Theophras-
tos any longor us the secondary subjunctive in final clauses. However Αθην.
πολιτ. 18, 29) κατηγόρει τῶν τοῦ τυράννου φίλων ἐπίτηδες ἵνα ἀceBHCAIEN ἅμα καὶ
Γένοιτο ἀσθενεῖς.
455
1952-1955.]
FINAL CLAUSES.
μὴ Κῦρος Διαβῇ. Th. 3, 23, 5 παρανῖσχον φρυκτοὺς ὅπως ἀσαφῆ τὰ σημεῖα
# (if not εἴη) καὶ μὴ ΒΟΗΘΟΐΕΝ.
1953. In final clauses, P-N Greek has considerably departed from
A in that it has altogether discarded the secondary subjunctive (1934)
and modified the final particles (1760-9).
•
€
1953¹. That the secondary subjunctivo became, as early as H, foreign to ordi-
nary Groek is shown also by the occasional blundering of writers like Hdn. Hist.
2, 2, 1ο ἵνα αὐτοὺς ἐκβιάσοιντο ὑπακοῦσαι, πανδημεὶ συνῆλθον. Synes. 1433 Α μηδὲ
γὰρ δικαίου ποτὲ φόνου προσάψοιο. Basil. Sel. 585 D μηδὲ νῦν ἀνάσχοιο, μηδὲ
εγχωρήσοις. Eus. ii. 825 ο ἤρεσεν οὖν ὥστε . BeBaιwcaimi. Jos. Ant.
17, 4, 2 Ö DIAKONĤCOITO. 17, 9, 4 οἳ διαλλάξοιντο. 20, 2, 1 ἐξ ἧς λήψοιτο, Plut.
1. 721 Ε ἐξ ὧν ἀναδειχθήσοιτο. Dio C. 48, 36, 1 ἐφ᾽ οἷς καταλλαγή COINTO.
Epiph. i. 820 Ο Να κTHCONTO. 3ο 413 Β ὅπως ΔΙΑΔράση (or - σῃ ?), Agath. 37
(1304 Α) όπως παραστήσοιNTO. Hrdn. Hist. 3, 4, 11 ήθροιστο ὡς θεάςOINTO. So
too scan (c v) = ὡσίνα (1767, α) : Eus. ii. 172 1 ώραν καταλείψοι. 636 Β ΑΝ
ἐπὶ τὴν σύνοδον ἀΠΑΝΤΗΣοι. 761 Α ὡς αὐτῶν οἶκτον λάβοιεν.
171, 19 ΑΝ εἴΠΟΙΜΕΝ, Bekl, An. 8:9, 2ο εἴ τις ἐπισκέψοιτο. Agath. 47
(1312) ὡς ἀνακαλέσοιτο, et passim. Men. Hist. 280, 3 & 285, 14. 290,
18 @CAN ECOITO. 295, 23 ωσάν παράσχοιτο, et passim.
Proc. ii.
Vita Euthym.
2, 2 πρὶν αὐτὸν κατίλοι καὶ προσαπολογήσοιτο. 15, 2 εἰ μὴ καταλέξοιτο ἀλλ᾽
ἀναβάλλοιτο. Dosith. Mag. Arg Gramm. (HKoili vii.), p. 378 ἅπερ ἂν θέσει
μακρὰ εἴἐὰν ἡ προτέρα μακρὰ εἴ ἐὰν δ᾽ ἡ ὑστέρα ἐκτεταμένη εἴΗ — εἰ
ἀμφότεραι βραχεῖαι εἶΕΝ, etc. 379 ἵνα μὴ ῥῆμα εἴΗ, etc. Malchi excerpta
263, 20 ἕως ἐξοίceIEN. Theophyl. 150, 9 τερατολογοῦσιν ἵνα εχοίΗ. 136, 16 τὴν
ἔκθεσιν ὑποστορέσω ἵνα προσέλθοι (-0 ?). (805. 1765. 1767, b. App. v. 14 f.)
1954. When the principal clause stands in a past tense
and expresses a subjective potentiality (1974), or an unattainable
wish (rgo4), the final clause (then led by ἵνα, rarely by ὅπως)
naturally falls within the past and thus stands in the past
indicative (without år). This may be called assimilation of mood
(1934).
Pl. Gorg. 335 c ἀλλὰ σὲ ἐχρῆν ἡμῖν συγχωρεῖν τὸν ἀμφότερα δυνάμενον
Να συνουσία ἐγίγνετο. Meno 89 Β εἰ φύσει οἱ ἀγαθοὶ ἐγίγνοντο, ἐφυλάττομεν
ἂν ἐν ἀκροπόλει, ἵνα μηδεὶς αὐτοὺς διέφθειρεν. Dem. 22, 28 χρῆν σε ἀπάγειν
ΝΑ ΚΙΝΔΥΝΕΥΕς περὶ χιλίων. Lys. 3, 21 έβουλόμην ἂν Σίμωνα τὴν αὐτὴν
γνώμην ἐμοὶ ἔχειν ἵν, ἀμφοτέρων ἀκούσαντες τἀληθῆ, ῥᾳδίως ἔγνωτε τὰ
δίκαια.
1954. So too cver since down to the present time; but regularly
with ἵνα, Ν νὰ οι γιὰ νά :
Acta Xanth. 59, 24 οὐκ ἔμαθον τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ καινοῦ διδασκάλου Να
ἐπεκαλεσάΜΗΝ αὐτοῦ τὴν εὐχήν. 61, 1 ἵνα κἂν μικρὸν ἀνεπαγΑΜΗΝ. 67, 34
ἵνα αὐτὸς ἐλθὼν ἔδωκεν. 77, το εἴθε κἀγὼ ἤμην ὡς ἓν τῶν θηρίων ἵνα μὴ
Δειν τί ἐστιν αἰχμαλωσία. 81, 31 ἵνα μηδ᾽ ὅλως ταύταις εγνέτυχον. Acta
Noroi 8, 3 εἴθε ἐκ πάλαι ἡ τοῦ θεοῦ ἐπίγνωσις αὕτη πρός με ἐλήλυθεν,
ἵνα μήτε ὄνομα νύμφης προσέλαβον.-Ν: ἂς εἶχα γιὰ ΝΑ ΔΙΔ. ἃς ἐφύλαγε
τὰ πλούτη του Γιά νά 'χε 'ς τὴν ἀνάγκην του. θὰ σ' ἐπαίδευα ΓΙΑ ΝΑ ΜΑΘΑΙΝΕΣ.
ἂν ἐπρόφτανα θὰ σοῦ 'γραφα για να μ' ἐπερίμενες. ἃς μου 'γραφες Για Να τό
ξερα. ἂς μὴν ἐκοιμάτονε Γιὰ νὰ 'βλεπε. For a difforent and commoner con-
struction see the following section (1955).
1955. Considered from the point of time of the leading sentence,
the above final clauses naturally fall within the present or future, and
thus commonly stand in the primary subjunctive.
456
FINAL CLAUSES.
[1955-1961.
Dem. 23, η ταῦτ᾽ ἂν ἤδη λέγειν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐπεχείρουν ἵν᾽ εἰδῆτε κτλ. 30, 20 ᾧ
μὴ . . . εἰκῇ τις ἂν ἐπίστευσεν ἵν', εἴ τις γίγνοιτο διαφορά, κομίσασθαι ῥᾳδίως παρ'
ὑμῖν ΔΥΝΗΤΑΙ. Cp. 24, 44 ; 34, 30. Lys. 3, 44.
So still in N: ἂν ἐπρόφτανα θὰ σοῦ 'γραφα για να με περιμένε. ἃς ἐφύλαγε
τὰ πλούτη του Γιά νά χι'ς τὴν ἀνάγκην του.
1956. After expressions of fear, caution, danger, and kindred
notions, the object of fear is introduced by un 'lest,' 'that'
(negative un où lest not,' 'that not' (1805. 1827), and stands
in the present or future subjunctive, rarely in its kindred
future indicative. Only when the leading verb stands in
a secondary tense may the object of fear be expressed also by
the secondary subjunctive:
Isocr. 14, 38 κίνδυνός ἐστι ΜΗ Μεταβάλωνται καὶ γένωνται μετὰ τῶν πολε
μίων. Pl. Phaedr. 257 C ὀκνῶ μή μοι ὁ Λυσίας ταπεινός φανῇ. Th. 3, 53
ὑποπτεύομεν καὶ ὑμᾶς μὴ οὐ κοινοὶ ἀποβῆτε. Ρl. Theaet. 183 Ε αἰσχυνό
μενος Μὴ φορτικοὶ ΦΑΝῶΜΕΝ. Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 6 δέδοικα μή ἄλλου τινὸς
μεθέξω. Pi. Phil. 13 Α' φοβοῦμαι Μή τινας ἡδονὰς ἡδοναῖς EYPHCOMEN
ἐναντίας.
Xen. An. I, 10, 9 ἔδεισαν οἱ Ἕλληνες Μὴ προσάγοιεν πρὸς τὸ κέρας καὶ
αὐτοὺς κατακόψειαν. 3, 4, 29 οὐκέτι ἐπετίθεντο δεδοικότες ΜΗ ΑΠΟΤΜΗ
ΘείнCAN. Symp. 2, 11 οἱ θεώμεναι ἐφοβοῦντο Μή τι πάθη. Cyr. 1, 4, 2
ὑπερεφοβεῖτο ΜΗ οἱ ὁ πάππος ἀποθάνη.
1957. This usage still substantially survives in N. The only P-N
changes consist: (1) in the retreat of the secondary subjunctive and
future indicative since H-G and T-B respectively (App. v. 6-13 & 15.
App. iv.); (2) in the modification in N of μὴ οὐ τo μὴ δέν (1799. 1805);
(3) in the occasional amplification in N of μὴ to μὴν πᾷ νά (also μὴν
πᾷς καὶ, 1806, 2049), corresponding to ancient μή πως.
Thus N : ΦΟΒΟΥΜΑΙ οι ἐφοβήθηκα μὴ βρέξῃ, μὴ δὲν ἔρθῃ- also μὴν πᾷ νὰ
βρέξη (μὴν πᾷς [μήμπας] καὶ βρέξῃ)—μὴν πᾷ νὰ μὴν ἔρθῃ (μὴν πᾷς [μήμπας] καὶ
δὲν ἔρθῃ).
1958. But when the object of fear refers to the past or
prosent and at the same time is represented as an actuality, it
regularly stands in the indicative.
Th. 3, 53 φοβούμεθα Με ἀμφοτέρων ἡμαρτηκΑΜΕΝ. Pl. Lach. 196 c
ὁρῶμεν Μὴ Νικίας οἴεταί τι λέγειν. Charm. 163 Α ὅρα μὴ ἐκεῖνον κωλύει.
1959. So still in N, though μὴ in this caso may be replaced by μὴν πας
(μήμπας 2049) or more commonly by πῶς (= ὅτι 1755): φοβοῦμαι μὴν (μήν
πας [μήμπας, οι πῶς ἔβρεξε, φοβοῦμαι μὴ (οι πῶς) βρέχει.
1960. The word expressing the four is sometimes omitted, and
thus µǹ or µǹ où with the subjunctive stands elliptically [in so far as
it is not actually direct interrogative 2046 f.] :
Pl. Gorg. 462 Ε Μὴ ἀγροικότερον ᾗ τἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν. Apol. 39 A ἀλλὰ μὴ οὐ
τοῦτ᾽ ᾖ χαλεπόν, θάνατον ἐκφυγεῖν.
1961. When used in the sense of 'I fear or hesitate to,' the above
expressions (1956) govern the (prospective) infinitive (2087), and in N
its analysis with vú.
Xon. Cyr. 8, 7, 15 φοβήσεται ἀδικεῖ. Τh. 4, 11ο οὐ κατέδεισαν ἐσελθεῖν.
Dem. 25, 11 φυλαττόμενον καὶ προορώμενον μὴ καταισχίναι ταύτην.
5ο Ν : φοβοῦμαι νὰ περάσω 'I fear to cross over. δειλιῶ νὰ πηδήσω.
457
1962-1967.]
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1962. After verbs expressing an effort (exertion, care, etc.),
the object clause is introduced by όπως or ὡς-negative όπως μή,
&s, μ-with the future indicative or, less frequently (but
regular in G-B), with its cognate future subjunctive (App.
iv. 8). It is only when the leading verb stands in a secondary
tense that the object clause in A also admits of the secondary
subjunctive, rarely of the future optative (1935 f.).
Such verbs of effort are: ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, φροντίζειν, σκοπεῖν, σκέψασθαι,
μέλειν, σπουδάζειν, πράττειν, παρασκευάζεσθαι also φυλάττεσθαι, εὐλαβεῖ
obat, 'take care.
Isocr. 2, 37 φροντίζ᾽ ὅπως ΜΗΔὲν ἀνάξιον τῆς τιμῆς ταύτης πράξεις. Xen.
An. I, 3, 11 σκεπτέον ὅπως ὡς ἀσφαλέστατα ΜΕΝΟΥ͂ΜΕΝ. Symp. 8, 25 οὐ
γὰρ ὅπως πλείονος ἄξιος Γένεται ἐπιμελεῖται, ἀλλ᾽ ὅπως αὐτὸς ὅτι πλεῖστα
ωραία καρπώσεται. Dem. 6, 25 οὐ φυλάξεσθ' ὅπως μὴ δεσπότην εὕρΗτε.
Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 43 ἐπεμελεῖτο ὅπως μὴ ἄσιτοί ποτε ἔCOINTO. Th. 1, 57
ἔπρασσεν ὅπως πόλεμος ΓένΗΤΑΙ.
1983. With the gradual retreat, since P, of ñшs (or ∞s) before ïva
(1761 f.), the latter particle substituted itself for the former in all kinds
and cases of final clauses, and thus brought ones into disuse. Hence
öлs and still more as are foreign to G-N speech, their place having
been taken by iva (B-N và) and its various modifications, as explained
in 1760-9.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
General Remarks.
[1984. A conditional sentenco consists of a supposition and its conse-
quence: if you persevere you will succeed. The clause containing the supposition
(if you persevere) is called protasis (condition, hypothesis, If-clause), that con-
taining the consequence (you will succeed) is called apodosis (Then-clause).]
1965. Conditional sentences may be classed under two broad hoads,
according as they express an undetermined supposition (objective form) [¹],
or an unreal assumption (subjective form) [21. Eithor case may naturally
refer to the present, past, or future time.
1966. The conjunctions introducing the protasis are two: el 'if,'
and av or av (also ) 'if,' all identical in meaning but varying in point
of construction (cp. etre and éáv te 1727-8). The former (el), after
a long record, retreated before the latter (ear or ""), which thus acquired
an absolute dominion (1771 f.). It still fully survives in the form
❝r, often amplified to ❝ve, or abbreviated to simple á (1772), sometimes
also by metathesis to vá (1773 ft.).
:
1967. The protasis or If-clause may be expressed by ei and the
indicative or secondary subjunctive; by eàv (v, v) and the primary
subjunctive; by a relative clause (2023); or by a participle alone
(1977. 2153-4). The apodosis or Then-clause may be expressed by any
finite mood. Of these finite moods the indicative and secondary sub-
junctive are, in certain cases, accompanied by the modal particle av,
[1] As if it rains I shall get wet (but it may or may not rain, therofore I may
or may not got wot).
[9] As if I had been invited I should have gone (but I was not invitod, therefore
I did not go).
458
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
[1967-1971.
and called on this account potential indicative or potential subjunc-
tive [potential optative] respectively.
1968. The protasis is almost always negatived by μὴ (1804; but
cp. 1807" f.), the apodosis by οὐ (Ν δέ”) or μή, according to the nature
of the case (1801-1821).
1969. A. The objective conditional form (1965), which leaves
it undecided whether the protasis is a reality or a mere
assumption, has a threefold construction :
1969. 1. If it refers to any time (past, present, or future)
and puts no special stress on the supposition-which is the com-
monest case-the protasis is expressed by ei with the indicative
of any tense (or by the conditional participle, 1967), and the
apodosis by any finite mood.
εἰ θέλεις ΔYNAcal, oι θέλων SYNacal, if you wish, you can.
Eur. Bell. Frg. 294, 7 εἰ θεοί τε δρώσιν αἰσχρὸν οὐκ εἰciN θεοί. Soph.
Frg. 18 εἰ δείν' ἔδpacac, δεινὰ καὶ παθεῖν σε χρή. Eur. Frg. 5 εἰ μὴ καθέξεις
γλῶσσαν ἔσται σοι κακά. Pl. Cr. 49 Ε σοὶ εἴ πε ἄλλῃ δέδοκται, λέγε καὶ
Δίδασκε. Soph. Phil. 526 ἀλλ᾽ εἰ δοκεῖ πλέωμεν, ὁρμάσθω ταχύς.
Dem. 18, 10 εἰ μὲν ἴστε με τοιοῦτον ΜΗΔΕ φωνὴν ἀνάσχce. Ar.
Αν. 1390 σὺ δὲ κλύων εἴσει τάχα. Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 28 τοὺς φίλους εγερ-
Γετοῦντες, καὶ τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ΔΥΝΗcεcθε κολάζειν.
For P-N see 1984-92.
•
Η
1970. 2. If it refers exclusively to the present or future with
a certain emphasis upon the supposition, the protasis is expressed
by ẻàv (àv, v) with the primary subjunctive, or by the condi-
tional participle (1967) "), and the apodosis by any prospective
mood (indicative of any primary tense, imperative, primary
subjunctive).
ἐὰν θέλης ο θελήσHC SYNHCH, or θέλων (θελήσας) ΔΥΝΗΣΗ,
if you (really) wish, you will succeed.
Pl. Lach. 201 € ἥξω παρὰ σὲ αὔριον, ἐὰν θεὸς ἐθέλη. Men. 165 ἐάν
δ' ἔχωμεν χρήμαθ' ΕΞΟΜΕΝ φίλους. Χen. Cyr. 5, 3, 27 ἐὰν οὖν ἴης νῦν,
πότε ἔτει οἴκοι ; Pl. Rep. 473 D ἐὰν μὴ ἢ οἱ φιλόσοφοι βασιλεγCOCIN ἢ οἱ
βασιλῆς φιλοσοφήσωCIN οὐκ ἔστι κακῶν παῦλα ταῖς πόλεσιν. Αr. Ran. 586
HN σε τοῦ λοιποῦ ποτ' αφέλωμαι χρόνου, κάκιστ' ἀπολοίΜΗΝ. Xen.
Cyr. 3, 2, 13 ΜΝ πόλεμον αἱρλεθε, μηκέτι ἥκετε δεῦρο ἄνευ ὅπλων. Soph.
Ant. 1255 ἀλλ᾽ εἰσόμεθα δόμους παραστείχοντες. Gnom. Θεοῦ διδόντος
οὐδὲν ἰσχύει φθόνος, | καὶ μὴ διδόντος οὐδὲν ἰσχύει πόνος.
So still in N: ἂν ἔχῃς στείλε μου. ἂν ἐκουράστηκες κάθισε. ἂν ἔβρεξε
θὰ εἶνε λάσπη. See also 1984-92.
1971. 3. Conversely, if it refers to the future, but represents
the case as a mere potentiality, the protasis is expressed by
εἰ with the secondary subjunctive, or by the participle (1967),
and the apodosis by the potential secondary subjunctive (1925).
εἰ θέλοις (οι θέλων) ΔΥΝΔΙΟ Ν, if you should wish, you would
succeed.
ม
[1] All conditional particles connected with futuro tenses must be resolved into
ἐὰν with subjunctive. BLGildorsloovo, Trans. Amor. Phil. Soc. 1876, p. 14.
459
1971-1975.]
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 8 οὐδ᾽ εἰ πάντες ἔλθοιεν Πέρσαι, πλήθει γε οὐχ ὑπερβαλοί-
Μεθ᾽ ἂν τοὺς πολεμίους. Pl. Phaed. 68 Β οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο
τὸν θάνατον ὁ τοιοῦτος; Th. 1, 70, 9 εἰ τις ξυνελὼν ταῦτα φαίἩ ὀρθῶς ἂν
εἴποι. Aesch. Αg. 37 οἶκος δ' αὐτός, εἰ φθογγὴν λάβοι, σαφέστατ᾽ ἂν λέξειεν.
Sept. 195 τοιαῦτα τ᾽ ἂν γυναιξὶ γυναίων ἔχοις. Soph. Αnt. 185 οὐδ᾽ ἂν
σιωπήσαιμι τὴν ἄτην ὁρῶν (i. e. εἰ ὁρῴην) στείχουσαν ἀστοῖς.
મ
1972. Of this form of conditional sentences not one instance is found in
the NT, though once at least it was suggested in Acts 8, 31 (1984 f.).
1973. For the case when the protasis serves as indirect sentence ques-
tion, see 2054.
1974. B. The subjective conditional form (1965), which repre-
sents a case as a mere assumption contrary to reality, refers
either to the past, or to the present conceived as past. The
protasis then is expressed by ei with the indicative of any secon-
dary tense, or by the participle (1967), and the apodosis by the
potential indicative with av (1901. 1907. 1967).--In particular the
imperfect stands here for the present, and the aorist (rarely plu-
perfect) for the past (1904. 1907).
་
εἰ Ηθελες (or θέλων), ἐΔΥΝω ἄν, if you wished, you would succeed.
εἰ ἠθέλΗac (or θελήcac), ἐΔΥΝΗΘΗΣ N, if you had wished, you
would have succeeded.
મ
AN
Xen. Mem. 4, 3, 3 φῶς εἰ μὴ εἴΧΟΜΕΝ ὅμοιοι τοῖς τυφλοῖς ἂν ᾖΜΕΝ. Th. I,
οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν. Dem. 27, 63 τί ποτ᾽ ἂν
ἔπαθον ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν εἰ πλείω χρόνον ἐπετροπεύθην ; Xen. An. 2, 1, 4 εἰ μὴ
ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε ἐπορεγόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ βασιλέα. Dem. 18, 76 τῶν ἀδικημάτων ἂν
ἐΜέΜΝΗΤΟ τῶν αὑτοῦ εἴ τι περὶ ἐμοῦ γ᾽ ἔΓΡΑΦΕΝ. 18, 228 οὐ γὰρ ἂν
μεταπείθειν ἡμᾶς ἐζήτει μὴ τοιαύτης oᾔCHC τῆς ὑπαρχούσης υπολήψεως περὶ
ἑκατέρου. Pl. Rep. 620 D τὰ αὐτὰ ἂν ἔπραξε καὶ πρώτη λαχογια.
1974". So too in P-B compositions, as: Ignat. ad. Tral. 11, 2 ei yàp HCAN
ἐΦΑΙΝΟΝΤΟ ἂν κλάδοι τοῦ σταυροῦ καὶ ἦν ἂν ὁ καρπὸς αὐτῶν ἄφθαρτος. Callin. 57, 6
χαλκεὺς εἰ ΗΜΗΝ ἢ τέκτων οὐκ ἂν με MIMH αθε—but ἂν in this case is fre-
quently replaced by ἤθελον, as: Test. xii. εἰ μὴ Ἰακὼβ προσηύξατο ήθελε Κύριος
ἀνελεῖν με.
1975. Temporal condition. Only in appearance is conditional the
case where ei with the secondary subjunctive (and after its retreat,
the past indicative, App. v. 9), or ear with the primary subjunctive, is
used to express a repeated or customary action referring to the past or
present. In reality el and ἐὰν here are substitutes for ὅτε and ὅταν
when(ever),' so that such a conditional sentence is virtually an
iterative temporal clause and so must be treated accordingly (1997 ff.).
ei oéλolc or beλhceiac, čaýnw, when(ever) you wished, you
could.
Th. 8, 66 εἰ δέ τις καὶ ἀντείποι εὐθὺς ἐτεθνήκει 'whenever) any one objected,
ho was a dead man. Hdt.1, προ εἴ τινα πυνθάνοιτο ὑβρίζοντα τοῦτον ἐδικαίες.
Eur. Alc. 755 ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τι μὴ φέροιΜεΝ ὤΤΡΥΝΕΝ φέρειν. 671 ΗΝ ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος
οὐδεὶς Βούλεται θνήσκειν. Χen. An. 5, 8 Ξενοφῶν εἴ που τι
τι δρών βρωτὸν
Διεδίδογ. Dem. 2, 12 ἅπας ὁ λόγος, ἂν ἀπῇ τὰ πράγματα, μάταιόν τι φαίνεται καὶ
κενόν.
Callin. 63, 1. 64, 2 εἴ τις ἐθλίβετο. 105, 5 εἴ τις ὠφελήθη. 105, 16, 120,
460
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
[1975-1977.
20 εἴ που Ν. 127, 20 εἴ τι ἐλάλει. Leont. Neap. V. J. 65, 1 εἰ δὲ πού τινα
σκληρὸν καὶ ἀπάνθρωπον ᾔσθετο ( = ᾐσθάνετο, 996, ; App. iii. 3) δ μακάριος, τοῦτον
Μετεστέλλετο καὶ παρεκάλει.—More examples in App. v. 9.
PECULIARITIES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1976. Mixed forms. The form of the apodosis is not always fixed
by the form of the protasis, but depends on the individual conception
or intention of the speaker. Hence we frequently find that an
objective or real protasis is associated with a potential apodosis.
Xen. An. 5, 6, 7 Δείξαιμι ἂν ταῦτα, εἰ μοί τινα βούλεσθε συμπέμψαι.
2, 4, 19 οὐδὲ ἂν πολλαὶ γέφυραι ὦσιν, ἔΧΟΙΜΕΝ ἂν ὅποι σωθῶμεν. Pl. Apol. 25
Β πολλὴ γὰρ ἂν εὐδαιμονία εἴΗ περὶ τοὺς νέους εἰ εἰς μὲν μόνος αὐτοὺς Διαφθείρει,
οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι ὠφελογCIN.
1976. Sometimes while the protasis is conceived as a mere potentiality,
the apodosis is represented as a dofinite case: should you perchance see him,
write me at once. In that case the primary subjunctive of the If-clause is
replaced by the secondary subjunctive preceded by el, as: εἰ αὐτὸν ἴδοις,
παραχρῆμα γράψον μοι.
Pl. Meno 8o D εἰ ἐντίχοις αὐτῷ, πὼς εἴσει ὅτι τοῦτο ἐστίν ; Charm. 173 c εἰ
δὲ βούλοιό γε, καὶ τὴν μαντικὴν εἶναι ξυγχωρήσωμεν ἐπιστήμην τοῦ μέλλοντος
ἔσεσθαι. Eur. Ant. Frg. 211 τί δεῖ καλῆς γυναικός, εἰ μὴ τὰς φρένας χρηστὰς
ἔχοι ; Luc. Tim. 15 εἴ γε τἀληθὲς ἐξετάζοις, ἄμφω σοι εὔλογα δόξω ποιεῖν.
[Cyrill. H. Catech. 13, 22 καὶ εἴ τις ἐρεγνήσειε, εὑρήσει καὶ ἄλλας αἰτίας.
Hieron. Gr. Dial. 848 c εἰ τοῦτο δοίης, ἀντερῶ σοι.]
1977. Substitutions for the protasis. In objective conditional
sentences, the relation (1969-71) is often expressed by a simpler and
more vivid mode. This is effected by changing the protasis-
(a) to a direct interrogative clause, the apodosis then serving as a
reply to it, as :
Dem. 18, 274 ἐξήμαρτε τις ἑκών ; ὀργὴ καὶ τιμωρία κατὰ τούτου. ἐξήμαρτέ
τις ἄκων; συγγνώμη ἀντὶ τῆς τιμωρίας τούτου.—NT Jas. 5, 13 κακοπαθεί τις ἐν
ὑμῖν ; προσευχέσθω. εὐθυμεῖ τις ; ψαλλέτω. ἀσθενεῖ τις ἐν ὑμῖν ; προσκαλεσάσθω
τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους κτλ. 1 Cor. 7, 21 δοῦλος ἐκλήθης; μή σοι μελέτω. 1 Pet. I
24 ἐξηράνθη ὁ χύρτος ; καὶ ἄνθος αὐτοῦ ἐξέπεσεν. Εpict. Ench. 15 γέγονέ τι κατὰ
σέ; ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα κοσμίως μετάλαβε. παρέρχεται ; μὴ κάτεχε. οὔπω ἥκει ;
μὴ ἐπίβαλλε πόρρω τὴν ὄρεξιν, ἀλλὰ περίμενε.
>
(b) to an imperative, the apodosis then being subjoined by means of
καί. This case is very common, especially in P-N, as :
Soph. Εl. 1207 πείθου λέγοντι κοὐχ ἁμαρτήσῃ ποτέ.
Pl. Theaet. 149 B.
Rep. 467 0. Ar. Plut. 1o27 φράζε καὶ πεπράξεται. Luc. Indoc. 29 τοὺς κου
ρέας τούτους ἐπίσκεψαι καὶ ὄψει. Dial. D. 2, 2 εὔρυθμα ΒΑΐνε καὶ ὄψει.—Sopt.
Sir. 2
21 6 πίστεγον αὐτῷ καὶ ἀντιλήψεταί σου. 3, 17 ἐν πραύτητι τὰ ἔργα
σου Διέξατε καὶ ἀγαπηθήσῃ. ΝΤ John 2, 19 AYCAτε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον καὶ ἐν
τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ ἐγείρω ?) αὐτόν. So 1, 40. Matt. 7, 7 αἰτεῖτε καὶ δοθήσεται
ὑμῖν· ΖΗΤΕῖτε καὶ εὑρήσετε κρούετε καὶ ἀνοιγήσεται ὑμῖν. So II, 29, etc.
Matt. 4, 19. 8, 8. Luke 7, 7. 10, 28. Jas. 4, 7. Mark 6, 22. Luke 10, 28.
John 14, 16. Rov. 4, 1. Hermas Vis. I, 1, 9 προσεύχον πρὸς τὸν θεὸν καὶ
ἰάσεται τὰ ἁμαρτήματά σου. Vita Epiph. 41 c. 49 B. 96 c. 85 D. 96 c; et
passim-and so on over since.
(c) to a preposition with its case, or some other form of expression
(1991), as :
461
1977-1986.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES SINCE a.
Dem. 18, 49 Aiá Ye ŶMâc autoùs máλαi ân áпwλwλeite. Isoc. 4, 142 TO'
μὲν ἐπ' ἐκείνῳ πολλάκις ἂν ΔιελΥΘΗΣΑΝ.
મ
(d) to a relative clause, for which see 2023 f.
1978. Protasis omitted. The protasis of a subjective condition is
often omitted, especially when the apodosis, if expressed, would be
equivalent to a potential clause (one might, one could).
મ
Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 38 ἔνθα δὴ ἔγνω ἄν τις ὅσου ἄξιον εἴη τὸ φιλεῖσθαι ἄρχοντα.
Eur. And. 85 Toλλds an eŸpoic μnxavás' you could find many devices.' Pl.
Rep. 487 – Ακούοις ἄν, ὅτι ἔμοιγε φαίνονται τἀληθῆ λέγειν. So often ἐβουλόμην
av, and Bovλoíunv av I wish I could,' 'I should like.
1979. Verb omitted. The verb of the protasis may be suppressed
when it is readily supplied. This blending has led to a number of
pregnant and crystallized adverbial expressions :-
>
1980. 1. ei (or eineр) TIC Kai ä^^oc ('if any one it is he') 'as much as
any one,' 'more than any other.' (Cp. 1712.)
[1980b. On this principle we must road in NT 2 Cor. 11, 23 einep èyw
(1685b).]
1981. 2. ei mí, less common éàn mí, (=πλǹv) 'except,' 'unless,' used
chiefly after a negation or interrogation. (1735.)
Xen. An. 4, 7, 5 οὐ γὰρ ὁρῶμεν εἰΜὴ ὀλίγους τούτους. Pl. Crito 53 E ovdeis
οὐδέν σε κακὸν ἐρεῖ ἂν μή τινα λυπῇς.
મ
1981. Hence ei mh ei (=tλîv el) ‘unless.'
1982. In this excoptive senso both ei µǹ and av µ aro still preserved in
N as crystallized adverbs. The lattor, moreover, has been phonopathically
contracted to åµ(µ)½, recently also to åµ(µ)é, as: ABC 39, 4. 82, 6. 88, 4.
1982. For this (µ)µm) modern speech ofton substitutos pá, that is Italian
ma (from Latin magis 'rathor'). (1736.)
1983. 3. ei dẻ mà (rarer än de MH) 'if not,' 'otherwise,' used in alter-
native cases, especially after εἰ μέν, ἐὰν μέν, εἰ (ἐὰν) μὲν μή :—
Xen. An. 7, 1, 8 μὴ ποιήσῃς ταῦτα, εἰ δὲ μὴ αἰτίαν ἕξεις. Λη. 3, 2, 3.
Pl. Phaed.gr ο ἐὰν μέν τι ὑμῖν δοκῶ ἀληθὲς λέγειν ξυνομολογήσατε· εἰ δὲ μή,
παντὶ λόγῳ ἀντιτείνετε. Crito 52 r. Th. 3, 3 ἢν μὲν ξυμβῇ ἡ πεῖρα . . . εἰ δὲ μή.
Luke 10, 6. 13, 9. Acts 5, 38 £.
f.
1984. The P N history of the conditional sentences has been deter-
mined by various causes, both direct and indirect. In the first place the
secondary subjunctive had shown, even in A, unmistakable signs of
retreat (1923 ff. 1934). In the less subtle language of subsequent times.
this retreat was inevitably accelerated, and we shall see in App.v. 61f. (cp.
also 1934) that towards the beginning of our cra the secondary subjunc-
tive, as a dependent mood, had completely passed out of use in the
unconventional living language. As a natural consequence the third
form of objective conditional protases (1971) retreated with the
secondary subjunctive and soon disappeared completely.
1985. Evon Polybios makes hardly any uso of this form of conditional
protasis, and in the NT there are only nine instances of el with the
secondary subjunctive, but ovon those solitary examples aro doubtful, partly
also irrelevant. (2039. Cp. 1972.)
1986. A second and parallel cause which told on the P-N history
462
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES SINCE A. [1986-1988.
b
of conditional sentences was the early retreat of the future indica-
tive (App. iv). This inevitably led to a further limitation of the con-
ditional sentences, inasmuch as that portion of the first conditional
form which referred to the clear future (ei + fut. indic. 1969 f.) had now
to be given up in favour of the ever spreading primary subjunctive.
Accordingly with the disappearance of the secondary subjunctive and
the future indicative, the prospective part of the first form of condi-
tional sentences (1969-70) and the entire third form (1971) were
replaced by the primary subjunctive with ἐάν (ἄν). To put it another
way, all If-clauses referring to the future are henceforth expressed
indiscriminately by the primary subjunctive with ἐάν (ν).
1987. Lastly another morphological, but equally important, factor
contributed to determine the P-N fate of conditional sentences.
The two parallel conjunctions ei and eàv or av (v),—later also
their temporal correlatives őre and orav-synonyms as they were
ὅτε
even in A, became gradually identical in meaning, the only
distinction retained in P Greek being their respective construc-
tions. Before long, however, this syntactical difference was also
levelled, and the two groups of conditional particles became in every
respect synonymous and interchangeable (1772. 1780). At this stage
of complete identity, the stronger naturally prevailed over the weaker,
and thus éàv (v) and orav invaded the domain of ei and őre respectively.
Accordingly ἐὰν (ν) and ὅταν even in the Septuagint and in Polybios
appear with the past indicative in the room of el and őre respectively.
Gen. 38, 9 ὅταν εἰσήρχετο. Εx. 17, 11 ὅταν ἐπῆρε Μωϋσῆς τὰς χεῖρας.
Num. 11, 9 ὅταν κατέβη. 21, 9. 1 Reg. 17, 34 ὅταν ἤρχετο ὁ λέων. Ps. 119, 7
ὅταν ἐλάλογα. (So ἡνίκα ἄν Gen. 30, 42. Εx. 33, 8. 34, 34. 40, 36.) Deut.
2, 16 ἐπειδὰν ἔπεCAN.NT 1 John 5, 15 ἂν οἴΔΑΜΕΝ. Mark 3, 11 ὅταν αὐτὸν
Εθεώρουν. 11, 19 ὅταν ἐγένετο. Barn. 12, 3 οπόταν καθείλεν. 4, 14
Οταν βλέπετε. Ignat. ad Eph. 8, 1 ὅταν μηδεμία ἐπιθυμία ἐπήρειται ἐν ὑμῖν.
Hermas Sim. 9, 1, 6 ὅταν ὁ ἥλιος ἐπικεκαγκει ξηραὶ ἐγίνοντο.
9, 4, 5 όταν
ÉTÉOнCAN. 9, 6, 4 otan enátaсCEN. 9, 17, 3 UTAN ÉTÉOHCAN. Polyb. 4, 32,
5 ὅταν οὗτοι πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἢ πρὸς ἑτέρους πολεμοῦντες ἐν περισπασμοῖς
#CAN. 13, 7, 1ο ὅταν οὖν προσήρειτε ταῖς χερσὶ πρὸς τὰ νῶτα τῆς γυναικός.
9, 31, 2 ἂν δὲ καὶ προκατέχεσθε καὶ προδιειλήφατε περὶ τούτων, τίς ἔτι καταλεί
πεται λόγος ; 13, 7, 8 ἐπειδὰν ἀνέCTHCE. Strab. 1, 1, η ὅταν οὕτω φΗcί. 12,
3, 27 ΟΤΑΝ ΔΕΙΚΝΥΤΑΙ ψεύδος λογόμενόν τι. Philo i. 109, 27. 120, 26. ii. 112,
23 ὅταν εἰς ἔννοιαν ἦλθεν. ii. 252, 33. 584, 49. Jos. Λnt. 12, 2, 3 όταν
eis
αποδίδωσι, Apoc. Mar 132, 29 ΟΤΑΝ ΑΝΕΒΑΙΝΟΝ. Other examples in 779.
7 T
1988. On the other hand, ei and ὅτε, while retreating before their
advancing rivals, are also subjected to their influence; hence
fastidious scribes now begin to use them as equivalents to ear and όταν
respectively, and thus construct them with the subjunctive now so
popular in every respect (1990. App. v. 13 ff.).
Sept. Deut. 8, 5 ὡς εἴ τις ἄνθρωπος ΠΑΙΔΕΥΣΗ τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ. NT Phil. 3,
12 διώκω εἰ καὶ καταλάβω. 3, 11 εἴ πως καταντήσω εἰς τὴν ἐξανάστασιν.
Rom. 11, 14 εἴ πως παραζηλώσω μου τὴν σάρκα καὶ σώσω τινὰς ἐξ αὐτῶν. Luko
13, 35 έως ἥξει and ὅτε εἴπητε. CWassoly N. Zaub. 25, 445 ὅτε θέλεις (road
-AHC). Cyrill. H. Procat. 15 ότε εἰσέλθητε. Carth. 1319 Ε ότε λάβωσιν.
Apophth. 105 Β ὅτε δ᾽ ἔλθη ἡ ὥρα. 112 Β ὅτε θέλη. Alchom. 311, 15 ὅτε
ΨΥΓῇ καλῶς, 312, 16 ἕως ὅτε ὀσμὴν θείου μὴ ἀποπέμψη. Acta Tho. 5, 8 εἴ
τις δὲ παραιτήσηται καὶ μὴ παρατάχη. 27, 6 εἰ δὲ εἴπωμεν. 28, 18 εἰ μὴ ἐπάρετε
ἑαυτούς. Apophth. 413 ο ὅτε πεινάς φάγε ότε Διψάς πίε· ὅτε αγατάζεις
463
1988-1992.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES SINCE A.
κοιμώ. Callin. 83, II ότε πράξη. ib. 20 εἰ ΔΥΝΗΘΗ. 87, 28 ὅτε αλούς.
134, 9 εἰ δὲ ἐπέλθωσιν. CGL 232, 1 ὅτε ΥΠΑΓΟΜΕΝ (write-MEN) διηγήσομαί
oo 'quando uadimus narrabo tibi.' Narr. Zos. 105, 13 Öтe dè EXO@CIN.
ib. 29 ὅτε απέλθη. Porph. Cer. 211, το ὅτε απέλθη. 220, 16. 380, 9.
Vita SA. 6* ο τοῦ κόσμου τὸ χρυσίον εἰ μοι ἐνέγκης. 14* ο εἰ μὲν ἡ φίλος
avтoû.—So too É λḤC où BÉλḤC willy nilly' (1729).
2
(
•
•
.
•
1989. The construction of el with the primary subjunctive is frequent in
Homer, and occurs also in A poets, but in our normalized texts of 4 prose
it is rare (RKühner ii. 398, 2 D), as: Th. 6, 21 ei (v. 1. ǹv) ZYCT@CIN. Pl.
Leg. 761 c e tɩ A. 958 D EITE
H.
A. Rep. 579 D ei µý тw dokĤ. Xen.
An. 3, 2, 22 ei... &c. Mem. 2, 1, 12 ei AZIάCHC, DEPAпЄÝCHC. Cyr.
3, 3, 50; Andoc. 1, 141 el séNHTAI. Dem. 19, 221 €¡. . . àпóλ@MAI. [Dem.]
ΓΕΝΗΤΑΙ. εἰ . ἀπόλωμαι.
46, 11 ei... BOYλнOĤ.-In late prosaists, like Dion. H., Diod., Luc., Plut.,
el + prim. subj. is frequent (cp. Baehr ad Plut. Artax. p. 24, Jacob ad Luc.
Τox. p. 53). Luc. Τox. 7 εἰ μὴ ἐπ᾽ ἴσης ΚΟΙΝΩΝήσωc, (edd. - σουσι) τῶν ἡδέων.
Bis accus. 2 ei (odd. iv) yáp тi kai μukрov ÉTTINYCтÁZOOMEN. Hermot. 42 ei
ἐκείνῳ πρώτῳ ἢ δευτέρῳ ἐντύχης (edd. -χοις), τί ποιήσεις. Deo. Dial. 7, 2 εἴ
(edd. ἤν) σοι προσέλθη μόνον. Dial. Mort. 3, 2 τί φής ; εἰ μὴ ἐς Λεβάδειαν γὰρ
παρέλθω καὶ . . . εἰcepπήσω. Timon, 19 οὐκοῦν εἰ μὴ ἐμφράζεται (ν. 1. -ξεται) τὸ
κεχηνὸς τοῦτο Seo also 1921.
1990. This laxity, which appears at first sporadically, becomes more
common in process of time, until finally el and őre, having lost all
individual force, disappeared altogether during T from the living
language. (1988.)
1991. From the procoding evidence (1987 ff.), taken in connexion
with the general tendency of the language, since I times, for the
primary subjunctive (App. v. 13-20), it becomes clear that, in G M
unscholastic compositions, it is the primary subjunctive rather than
the indicative which is requirod in all conditional clausos roforring to
a clearly prospective supposition. Honce constructions like NT 1 Cor.
9, 11 εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσωμεν, and 14, 5 ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ διερμηνεύῃ,
well agree with the spirit of the language and need no omendation. On
the other hand, the construction of ἐὰν and ὅταν as woll as ἵνα (779),
with the indicative instead of with the primary subjunctive, in cases of
total homophony, is indefensible (2000). Accordingly instances like the
following ought to be emonded:
ἐὰν ἀποθνήσκομεν.
Hormas
NT Rom. 14, 8 ¿àv åπo◊výoкOμev. 1 Th. 3, 8. Acts 8, 31 edv ddŋyńoei. John 8,
éàv ddnyýσet.
36 ἐὰν οὖν ὁ υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσει. Luke ut, 12 ἐὰν αἰτήσει φόν. Acts 5, 15 ἵνα
ἐπισκιάσει. : John 5, 20 ἵνα γινώσκομεν. Acts 21, 24 ἵνα ξυρήσονται. Rov. 14, 13
ἵνα ἀναπαύσονται Gal. 6, 12 ἵνα διώκονται. R v. 6, τι ἵνα ἀναπαύσονται. Burn, ro,
4 ὁ χοῖρος ὅταν τρώγει τον κύριον οὐκ οἶδε. 15, 5 ὅταν καταργήσει τὸν καιρὸν τοῦ
ἀνέμου καὶ κρινεί (writo κρίνῃ) τοὺς ἀσεβεῖς καὶ ἀλλάξει τὸν ἥλιον κτλ.
Sim, 9, 12, 4 f. εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ οὐδεὶς εἰσελεύσεται εἰ μὴ λάβοι (writo -ῃ)
τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ. ἐὰν γὰρ εἰς πόλιν θελήσῃς εἰσελθεῖν τινα κἀκείνη ἡ (read )
πόλις περιτετειχισμένη κύκλῳ καὶ μίαν ἔχει πύλην, μήτι δύνησῃ εἰς τὴν πολιν ἐκείνην
εἰσελθεῖν εἰ μὴ διὰ τῆς πύλης ἧς ἔχει ; Mart. Patri 82, κι ὅταν ἀνέρχομαι. Mart,
Potri et Pauli 120, 5 ἐὰν θελήσει, 132, 14 ἐὰν μὴ βασιλεύσει. 144, 4 ἵνα μὴ τυλ-
μήσει. 16, 146 ἵνα μὴ μαστίξει, and so on. (Cp. 779.)
1992. The other leading form of conditional clauses-subjective or
unreal hypothesis (1974 f.)-has a simpler and at the same time
longer record, and this is mainly due to three favourable circumstances.
At the outset it had a distinct and well-defined office to discharge,
that is a mere assumption (el eixov édídovv äv, 'if I had I should give,'
- but I have not); then it was expressed by the permanent imperfect
and aorist indicative; and lastly it was at all times invariably led
464
CONCESSIVE AND TEMPORAL CLAUSES.
[1992–1996.
by the conjunction el, the use of eàv or av being perhaps felt as inap-
propriate in the protasis owing to the presence of another (modal) ay
in the apodosis (*än eixov édídovv än, however cp. Xen. An. 2, 4, 19).
As a consequence, conditional clauses of this form preserved their A
pattern as late as T. At that time, however, a different agency came
into play the conjunction el having been previously dislodged by ear
or av from the present indicative now retreated from the past indicative
also—its last intrenchment-before the all-carrying éáv, now regularly
av (1772). Accordingly, in the unconventional living language, av has
been ever since down to the present day the sole and absolute particle
introducing conditional clauses, whether objective or subjective. See
also 1972.
CONCESSIVE CLAUSES.
1993. Concessive clauses, when not expressed by a participial
construction (2155 f.), are introduced either by--
(ầv)
α. εἰ καί, ἐὰν (ἂν) καί, although ;-or-
b. kaì ei, kaì ẻáv, kaì àv (käv), even if;
and follow, as regards tense and mood, the rule of conditional
protases.-Negation un.
Dem. 16, 24 τὰ μὲν δίκαια πάντες, ἐὰν καὶ μὴ βούλωνται . . . αἰσχύνονται
μὴ πράττειν. Men. 19 γελᾷ δ' ὁ μωρὸς κἄν τι μὴ γελοῖον ᾖ.
αν
1994. So still in N, but kai ei or rather κaì àv (1771. 1992) has been
differentiated to καὶ νά (1775), while εἰ καὶ or rather ἂν και, owing to
the obliteration in it of the force of κai (1717), has been since M
either replaced by καλὰ καί also (ἂν καλὰ) ἀγκαλὰ καί (corresponding
to Italian [bene che] benchè), or commonly amplified by contamina-
tion to ἔστωντας (=ἴστω) also to ἔστωντας καὶ νά (Italian essendo che,
116) 'notwithstanding that.' A third form uè öλov нoû or µ' öλov öri,
which savours of literary affectation, is a translation of the Italian
con tutto che.
TEMPORAL CLAUSES.
1995. Unless they are expressed by a participial construction
(2147 ff.), temporal clauses are introduced by-
t
α. ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἡνίκα, whenἐπεί, ἐπειδή ‘when, after
ἐπεὶ (ἐπειδὴ τάχιστα as soon as '; ἀφ' οὗ, ἐξ οὗ ἀφ' ὅτου, ἐξ ὅτου
'since'
1. ἕως, ἔστε, μέχρι (ο), ἐν ᾧ as long as ';-πρίν (*) ere,
'before' (1776-94);-
and admit of a twofold construction according as they denote
a definite or indefinite time. (1776.)
1996. When they point to a definite or fixed time, they stand
in the indicative. - Negation où.
Xen. An. 3, 1, 13 ἐπεὶ πάντες εγνῆλθον, ἐκαθέζοντο· ὅτε δὲ ταῦτα ἦν,
ἦσαν μέσαι νύκτες. Th. 3, 1ο μέχρι ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου ΗΓΟΥ͂ΝΤΟ, προθύμως εἱπό-
μεθα. Xen. Hell. I, I, 3 ἐμάχοντο μέχρι οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι απέπλεγCAN. Cyr.
1, 1,
465
Hh
1996-2001.
TEMPORAL CLAUSES.
7, 5, 39 ὁ ὄχλος πλείων καὶ πλείων ἐπέρρει ἕωςπερ ἔφθασεν ἑσπέρα γενο-
μένη.
For P-N see 1999 f.
1997. But when they refer to an indefinite, potential or
conditional futurity (indefinite repetition, or duration : any time,
whenever, etc.) they are exprossed by the primary subjunctive
with ἄν (1975. 2023). Only when the principal clause stands in
a secondary tense, do they also admit of the secondary subjunctive
without ἄν (1933. 1954).-In either case the negation is μή.
1998. The particle av coalesces with those tomporal conjunctions which
admit of oligion, into one word : (ὅτε ἂν) ὅταν, ὁπόταν ; (ἐπεὶ ἂν ἐπάν, (ἐπειδὴ
ἂν ἐπειδάν —but ἕως ἂν (G-N ὡς ἂν 152), πρὶν ἄν, etc.
Eur. I. T. 625 τάφος δὲ ποῖος δέξεταί μ᾽ ὅταν θάνω ; Dem. 4, 14 ἐπειδὰν
ἅπαντα ἀκοýcнτε, κρίνατε. Philom. 156 μαινόμεθα πάντες οπόταν ὀργιζώμεθα.
Xen. An. 4, 1, 16 θαμινὰ παρήγγελλεν ὁ Ξενοφῶν ὑπομένειν ὅτε (whonever) of
πολέμιοι ἰσχυρῶς ἐπικέοιντο. Pl. Phaed. 59 D περιεμένομεν ἑκάστοτε ἕως
ἀνοιχθείη τὸ δεσμωτήριον· ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀνοιχθείη, εἰσῇμεν παρὰ τὸν Σωκράτη. Χen.
Cyr. 3, 3, 46 μὴ ἀναμείνωμεν ἕως ἂν πλείους ἡμῶν οἱ πολέμιοι γένωνται, ἀλλ᾽
ἴωμεν ἕως ἔτι οἰόμεθα εὐπετῶς ἂν αὐτῶν κρατῆσαι. Ignat. ad Smyrn.
9, 1 εὔλογόν ἐστιν λοιπὸν ἡμᾶς ἀνανῆψαι ὡς ἔτι καιρὸν ἔχομεν εἰς θεὸν μετανοεῖν.
See also 1975.
1999. Regarding P-N discourse it will be remembered that the
secondary subjunctive retreated early before the primary subjunctive
and partly before the indicative also (1934. App. v. 6 ff.). Again
the presence of a great variety in A of temporal conjunctions could
not but lead to a confusion among them, and to the consequent
retreat of some of them before others or before novel substitutes
(1487 ff. 1491. 1780). Thus-
For A
ὅτε, ὁπότε, ὡς
ἐπεί, ἐπειδή
ὡς (or ἐπεὶ τάχιστα
ἐξ οὗ, ἀφ' οὗ
ἐν ᾧἕως, ἔστε, μέχρι ' as long as
ἕως, ἔστε, μέχρι οὗ until
πρίν (άν), πρὶν ἤ, πρότερον ἤ
N has substituted
ὅταν (ὁπόταν)-also ὡ]σάν, ὅντε
ωσάν, ώς, ἅμα, αἶπο τό
ἀφ' οὗ, (ἀφ' ὅτου), ἀπ᾿ ἧς
ὅσο
ως νά, ώστε να
πρὶν νά, προτοῦ (νά), πρίχου (νά).
2000. This process of confusion, retreat, and substitution among
the particles inevitably affected their construction, and so established
a simpler principle in N. Accordingly, irrespective of the original
nature and force of temporal conjunctions, all temporal clauses which
refer to the future or to an indefinite present are now put in the primary
subjunctive, while all those referring to the past or to a definite
present are put in the indicative (1991).
For moro particulars and examples see 1776-95.
2001. In A, whether they refer to a definite or indefinite
time, the conjunctions ἕως and μέχρι (ἄχρι) aftor a negative ante-
cedent are usually replaced by πρίν (ν). (2005.)
466
USE OF πρίν.
[2002-2008.
PECULIARITIES OF πρίν.
2002. As a conjunction, the temporal particle πρὶν (often
preceded by πρότερον) has a twofold construction, according as
the antecedent or leading clause is affirmative or negative.
2003. a. When the antecedent clause is affirmative, πρὶν
governs the infinitive (mostly aorist, rarely present or perfect),
and corresponds to English before:
Th. 2, 12 ἀποπέμπουσιν οὖν αὐτὸν πρὶν ἀκοῆσαι. Xen. An. 1, 4, 16 διέ-
βησαν πρὶν τοὺς ἄλλους ἀποκρίνασθαι. Isocr. 6, 26 ἡμεῖς τοίνυν Μεσσήνην
εἵλομεν πρὶν Πέρσας λαβεῖν τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ κρατῆσαι τῆς ἠπείρου καὶ πρὶν
οἰκισθῆναι τινὰς τῶν πόλεων τῶν ῾Ελληνίδων. Χen. Cyr. 5, 2, 9 πολλοὶ
ἄνθρωποι ἀποθνῄσκουσι πρότερον πρὶν δῆλοι ΓΙΓΝΕΣΘΑΙ οἷοι ἦσαν.
2004. This construction of πρὶν holds good for P also, though its
range in this period suffered a considerable limitation through the
development of its rivals πρὸ (1644-52) and προτοῦ (1787 f.). With the
retreat and final disappearance of the infinitive, πρὶν as well as its
associates naturally acceded to the analysis of the infinitive by iva (N
và) and the subjunctive, the easier as this construction was already
suggested by the alternative form and construction of πρὶν ἄν (1997 f.).
Accordingly N constructs πρίν - now generally τρίχου οι πριχού (1789)
- as well as προτοῦ, with va and the subjunctive, the analytical suc-
cessor of the infinitive. (See 1787 f.)
2005. b. When the antecedent clause is negative, πρὶν is a mere
substitute for ἕως or μέχρι (ἄχρι) ' until (2001), and so governs
a finite mood (in the sense of 1996 ff.), rarely the infinitive.
Th. 2, 65 οὐ πρότερον ἐπαύσαντο ἐν ὀργῇ ἔχοντες αὐτὸν πρὶν ἐΖΗΜΙOCAN
χρήμασιν. Xen. An. 1, 2, 26 οὔτε τότε ἰέναι ἤθελε πρὶν ἡ γυνὴ αὐτὸν ἔπειτε.
5, 7, 5 ου χρή μ' ἐνθένδε ἀπελθεῖν πρὶν ἂν δῶ δίκην. 5, 7, 12 μή
ἀπέλθητε πρὶν ἂν ἀκοÝCHTE. Isocr. 14, 18 τοὺς δ᾽ οὐ πρότερον παύσονται πριν
ἂν οὕτως ὥσπερ ἡμᾶς Διαθῶσιν. Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 14 απηγόρευε μηδένα βάλλειν
πρὶν Κῦρος ἐμπλησθείη θηρών. - "Th. 8, 9 οὐ προεθυμήθησαν ξυμπλεῖν πρὶν τὰ
Ισθμια Διεορτάσωσιν. Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 8 εἶπον μηδένα τῶν ὄπισθεν
κινεῖσθαι πρὶν ἂν ὁ πρόσθεν ΗΓΕΤΑΙ. Oec, 12, Ι οὐκ ἂν ἀπέλθοιμι πριν
παντάπασιν ἡ ἀγορὰ λγθῇ.
2006. Λη inspection of the above examples will show that after
a nogativo antecedent rpiv mostly governs the primary subjunctive, chiefly
with av. Only whon the negativo antecedont clauso stands in a secondary
tonso, does πρὶν also govern the aorist indicativo (without ar), provided
it rofors to a past act; if not, it governs the primary subjunctivo (mostly
with av), sometimes also the past subjunctive without äv.
2007. The office of πρὶν after a negative antecedent is but rarely
performed by the otherwise proper particles ἕως und μέχρι (ἄχρι), 20:
Lys. 25, 26 καὶ οὐ πρότερον ἐπαύσαντο ἕως τὴν πόλιν εἰς στάσεις κατέστησαν.
Pl. Crat. 396 ο οὐκ ἂν ἐπαυόμην ἕως ἀπεπειράθην.
2008. N also regularly constructs πρίν, as well as its associates προτοῦ
and πριχού οι πρίχου (1787)-all followed or not by va, due to är with the
subjunctivo, and that in all casos :
δὲν πιστεύω πρίν (να) ἰδῶ
δὲν θὰ πιστέψω προτοῦ (1)
δὲν ἐπίστευα πριχού (,)
δὲν ἐπίστεψα
(") "1
δὲν ἔρχεται πρὶν (να) ξημερώσῃ
δὲ θά 'ρθη προτοῦ (,,)
δὲν ἤρχετο πριχού (.,)
δὲν ἦρθε
"
39
(,,)
467
Hh 2
2009-2014.]
RELATIVE CLAUSES.
2009. Only when 4 πρὶν would require the aorist) indicative, N by
preference uses either ὥστε (i. e. ἕως ὅτε 1786) που, or the exceptive formula
παρὰ σὰν ' except when, except after, until :
4
?
δὲν ἡσύχασε ὥστε που το κατώρθωσε. δὲν ἐσηκώθηκε ώστε που (or παρά cAN)
ἐξημέρωσε.
RELATIVE CLAUSES.
2010. Relative clauses are those introduced by a relative pronoun
or adverb. They are either definite, in that they mainly specify some
definite term in the principal clause, or indefinite in that they connote
some other relation (cause, consequence, purpose, condition, time),
which, if more emphasized, would change them in each individual
case to a dependent clause (causal, consecutive, final, conditional,
temporal).
2011. Observe hero that, in the less polished style, a relative pronoun
is often replaced, for brevity's sake, by its equivalent local adverb. (Cp.
RKuhner, ii.³ 907, 4; 941, 3.)
(Β 852 ἐξ Ἐνετῶν ὅθεν ἡμιόνων γένος = ἐξ ὧν. γ 319. δ 230 εἰς οἶνον βάλε
φάρμακον ἔνθεν ἔπινον = ἐξ οὗ. τ 62. Soph. Εl. 11 δῶμα Πελοπιδῶν τόδε | ὅθεν
σε... ἤνεγκα. Ant. 892 οίκησις οι πορεύομαι. Ai. ror. Hat. 3, 51
1081. 51Ĥ εἰς
τούτους.) Xon. Hier. 2, 4 ἐν ταῖς ψυχαῖς ἔνθαπερ. Cyr. 2, 3, 22.
An. 6, 2, I.
• •
2, 1, 3 ἐν τῷ σταθμῷ ὅθεν. Pl. Hipp. 1, 283 Β ἐκ Λακεδαίμονος οἵπερ καὶ πλει-
στάκις ἀφίξαι.—Λ 757 ᾿Αλεισίου ἔνθα κολώνη κέκληται. Simon, ep. r2 ἔνθα
καλείται 'Αρτέμιδος τέμενος. Pind. Ν. 9, 41.
N.
Soph. Tr. 638. O. R. 1451. Eur.
Οr. 331 ἵνα μεσόμφαλοι λέγονται μυχοί. Xon. Hell. 5, 1, το ἔνθα ἡ Τριπυργία
καλεῖται. Oec. 4, 6 πάντας ἅμα συνάγων ἔνθα δὴ ὁ σύλλογος καλεῖται. ΝΤ Acts
24, 11 οὐ πλείους εἰσίν μοι ἡμέραι ἀφ᾿ ἧς ἀνέβην. Phil. 3, 20 ἐν οὐρανοῖς ὑπάρχει
ἐξ οὗ καὶ σωτῆρα ἀπεκδεχόμεθα. Rev. 2, 13 παρ' ὑμῖν ὅπογ ὁ σατανᾶς κατοικεῖ.
I. DEFINITIVE RELATIVE CLAUSES.
2012. I. Definite (or descriptive, explanatory) relative clauses
are treated like simple or independent clauses. Hence they
take that construction which would be required if they were
independent clauses.
πρᾶγμα ὃ οὐ γίγνεται
ὃ οὐ γενήσεται —ὃ οὐκ ἐγένετο
ὃ οὐκ ἂν γένοιτοὃ οὐκ ἂν ἐγένετο
""
ὃ μὴ γένοιτο
""
μὴ ποιεῖτε
-8 μήποτε ποιῶμεν οι ποιήσωμεν
—ὸ μὴ ποιήσητε.
So still in N: πρᾶμα ποὺ δὲ” γίνεται- που δὲ θὰ γένῃ—ποῦ δὲν ἔγινε, πρᾶμα
ποῦ δὲν θὰ ἐγίνετο ποὺ νὰ μὴ γένῃ, ποῦ νὰ μὴ κάμετε.
II. INDEFINITE RELATIVE CLAUSES (2010).
2013. 1. Causal relative clauses (2010) stand in the indicative.
-Negation où, as:
Xen. Mem. 2, 7, 13 θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς δε (since') ἡμῖν οὐδὲν δίδως.
So still in N : εἶσαι καλότυχος που ἔχεις τέτοιους φίλους.
2014. 2. Consecutive relative clauses stand (contrary to Latin
468
RELATIVE CLAUSES.
[2014-2021.
usage) in the indicative, mostly of the future (2020).--Negation
οὐ, as :
Lys. 24, 6 παίδες μοι οὔπω εἰσὶν οἱ με θεραπεYCOYCIN, qui me colunt.
Xen. An. 2, 5, 12 τίς οὕτω μαίνεται ὅστις οὐ βούλεταί σοι φίλος εἶναι;
2015. On the same principle the indicative is used after the
following formulas (1435 f.) :
εἰσὶν οἳ (οι ἔστιν οἳ)
οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις
οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅστις οὐ
there are those who
τίς ἐστιν ὅς
οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως
οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως οὐ.
Eur. Hec. 864 ογκ ἔστι θνητῶν ὅστις ἔστ' ἐλεύθερος. Heracl. 7ο7 οὐκ ἔCTIN
ὅπως ἥβην κτήσει πάλιν αὖθις. Xen. An. 5, 2, 14 ĀCAN δ' οἳ καὶ πῦρ προσέφερον.
-ΝΤ Matt. 1o, 26 ΟΥ̓Δέν ἐστι κεκαλυμμένον ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται. So 24, 2.
1 Cor. 6, 5 ογκ ἔνι ἐν ὑμῖν οὐδείς σοφὸς ὃς δυνήσεται διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ
ἀδελφοῦ αὑτοῦ ;
Η
2016. Instead of the indicative, G-B writers use here also the
primary subjunctive, probably through the influence of Latin. (Cp.
1919. 1921. App. iv. 8.)
NT Luke 8, 17 οὐ γάρ ἐστιν κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ φανερὸν γενήσεται, οὐδὲ ἀπόκρυφον
ὃ οὐ μὴ(ν) Γνωσθῇ καὶ εἰς φανερὸν ἔλθη (ep. 1827 f.). Acta Tho. 73, 23 ἄρτον
τοῦτον ζωῆς ποίησον ὃν οἱ ἐσθίοντες ἄφθαρτοι διαμείνω ΙΝ.
2017. Following this usage, Ν substitutes όπου οι ποῦ for us or ὅστις
(608) with vá, or more commonly resorts to the direct consecutive construc-
tion by means of simple νά (1757 f.): ποιὸς εἶνε ποῖ δὲν ἀγαπᾷ τὸ συφέρον
του; κανεὶς δὲν εἶνε τόσο τυφλὸς (Πολ) Νὰ μὴ βλέπῃ, (που) να μὴ ἰδῇ, (πογ)
Νὰ μὴν εἶδε. See also 1951.
2018. It will be remembered (1759. 1951), however, that un-
scholarly writers since G times make but a limited use of consecutive
relative clauses, the alternative of resorting to direct final clauses
by means of iva and the subjunctive being a far more popular mode
of expressing purpose (cp. AButtmann 229).
John 5, 7 ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἔχω ἵνα βάλῃ με εἰς τὴν κολυμβήθραν.
Rov. 19, 15.
γοράσῃ.
2 Cor. 12, 7.
Gal. 4, 5 ἐξαπέστειλε τὸν υἱὸν αὑτοῦ ἵνα τοὺς ὑπὸ νόμον ἐξα-
2019. It is this construction which still rules in N (2017):
δὲν ἔχω δοῦλο" Να σου μηνύσω. ἔστειλαν μαντατοφόρο" Νὰ πῇ τοῦ δασκάλου πῶς
δὲν ἔρχουνται.
2020. 3. a. When definite, final relative clauses stand (contrary
to Latin usage) in the future indicative (2014).-Negation μή.
Soph. Ai. 658 κρύψω τόδ' ἔγχος ἔνθα Με τις ὄψεται. Xen. An. I, 3, 14
ἡγεμόνα αιτήσομεν Κῦρον ὅστις ἡμᾶς ἀπάξει. Hell. 2, 3, 2 ἔδοξε τῷ δήμῳ
τριάκοντα ἄνδρας ἑλέσθαι, οἳ τοὺς πατρίους νόμους (ΥΓΓράψογοι καθ' όγε πολι-
TEYCOYCIN (Conscriberent – viverent).
2021. 3. b. But when they are indefinite (in Homer in all
casos), they stand in the primary subjunctivo, occasionally also
in the secondary subjunctive, the latter being admissible after
a past tenso or after another secondary subjunctive (1933).
Th. 7, 25 (τῶν νεῶν) μία ἐς Πελοπόννησον ᾤχετο πρέσβεις ἄγουσα οἵπερ τὰ
σφέτερα φράσωσιN ὅτι ἐν ἐλπίσιν εἰσίν, καὶ τὸν ἐκεῖ πόλεμον μᾶλλον ἐποτρύνω
γίγνεσθαι. Isocr. 4, 44 τοιοῦτον ἔθος παρέδωσαν ὥστε ἑκατέρους ἔχειν ἐφ᾽ οἷς
φιλοτιμηθώ ΙN. Pl. Symp. 194 ν οὐδὲν ἔτι διοίσει αὐτῷ, ἐὰν μόνον ἔχῃ ὅτῳ
469
2021-2024.]
RELATIVE CLAUSES.
Διαλέγεται. Xen. Oec. 7, 20 τοῖς μέλλουσιν ἕξειν ὅ,τι εἰσφέρωσιν. Ρl. Ion
536 Β ἀπορεῖς ὅ,τι λέγης . . . εὐπορεῖς ὅ,τι λέγης (ep. 2093). Soph. Phil. 281
(δρῶν) ἄνδρα οὐδέν' ἔντοπον, οὐχ ὅστις ἀρκέσειεν, οὐδ᾽ ὅστις νόσου κάμνοντι
γλλάβοιτο. Τr. 903 κρύψασ' ἑαυτὴν ἔνθα μή τις εἰείδοι, βρυχάτο. Pl. Rep.
578 Ε εἴ τις θεῶν ἕνα ἄρας ἐκ τῆς πόλεως αὐτόν τε καὶ γυναῖκα καὶ παῖδας θείη εἰς
ἐρημίαν ὅπου αὐτῷ μηδεὶς μέλλοι βοηθήσειν. Xen. Holl. 2, 3, 11 αἱρεθέντες
ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε ξυγγράψαι νόμοις καθ' οᾕCTINAC πολιτεύCOINTO.
2022. With the early retreat of the secondary subjunctive from
final clauses and its replacement by the primary subjunctive (1934.
App. v. 8. 20), the latter mood obtained still greater popularity, and,
being at the same time fostered by the parallel use in Latin of the
subjunctive, gradually ended by dislodging the future indicative (1921.
App. iv. 8).
NT Acts 21, 16 ἄγοντες παρ' ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνί τινι Κυπρίῳ. Hebr. 8,
3 ἀναγκαῖον ἔχειν τι καὶ τοῦτον ὃ προσενέγκη. Luke 7, 4 ἄξιός ἐστιν ᾧ παρεξη
τοῦτο.
2023. 4. Conditional relative clauses refer to some word in
the leading clause, and at the same time connote a supposition.
Hence they are virtually condensed clauses capable of being
changed into conditional protases by means of e τις, ἐάν τις,
and take the construction of ordinary conditional sentences
(1969 ff. 1977, c).
ὅς, ὅστις
εἴ τις. ὃς ἄν, ὅστις ἄν
ἐάν τις.
A. Objective condition (1965 ff.).
).—α. (1969): Pl. Apol. 21 D à µn) oîda ( = eï
τινα μὴ οἶδα) οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι. Th. 3, 89 (ἡ θάλασσα) ἀνθρώπους διέφθειρεν
ὅσοι μὴ ΔΥΝΑΝΤΟ φθῆναι πρὸς τὰ μετέωρα ἀναδραμόντες (those, if any). Dem. 4,
51 νικῴη δ' ὅ,τι πᾶσιν ὑμῖν μέλλει συνοίσειν.—b. (1970) : Lys. 12, 24 ἀπόκριναι
ὅ,τι ἄν σε ἐρωτῶ (ἐάν σε ἐρωτῶ). Xon. An. 1, 3, 15 τῷ ἀνδρὶ ὃν ἂν ἕλησθε
πείσομαι. Gnom. νέος ἀπόλλυθ᾽ ὅΝΤΙΝ᾽ ἂν φιλῇ θεός. Pl. Symp. 196 Ε πᾶς
ποιητὴς γίγνεται οἳ ἂν "Ερως ἅΨΗΤΑΙ. —c. (1971): Xon. An. 1, 3, 17 èyà µèv
δινοίμην ἂν εἰς τὰ πλοῖα ἐμβαίνειν ἳ ὑμῖν Κῦρος Δοίη (εἰ δοίη). Pl. Mon. 92 Ο
πῶς οὖν ἂν εἰδείης περὶ τούτου τοῦ πράγματος οὗ παντάπασιν ἄπειρος εἴΗc. Lys.
215 Β ὃ δὲ μὴ ἀγαπῴΗ οὐδ᾽ ἂν φιλοῖ. Ar. Vesp. 1431 ἔρδοι τις ἣν ἕκαστος
εἰδείη τέχνην.
B
B. Subjective condition (1974 f.): Lys. 12, 98 οἱ παῖδες ὑμῶν ὅcοι ἐνθάδε CaN
ὑπὸ τούτων ἂν ὑβρίζοντο (εἴ τινες ἦσαν). 32, 23 ὁπότερον τούτων ἐποίηCEN,
οὐδενὸς ἂν ἧττον ᾿Αθηναίων πλούσιοι ἦσαν. Xon. Rep. Ath. 1, 16 εἰ δὲ οἴκοι
εἶχον ἕκαστοι τὰς δίκας, τούτους ἂν ἀπώλλυσαν οἵτινες φίλοι μάλιστα ĀCAN ᾿Αθη
ναίων δήμῳ.
2023". The close connoxion of indofinite relativo clausos with conditional
clausos in G-B Greek is moro strikingly shown by the occasional combination
of the particles el and ἂν (1772), as : Callim. 105, 7 εἴ τι ἂν εἶδες ἀγαθὸν τοῦ
Θεοῦ ἐστιν. 118, 14 ήλεγχε τοὺς ἄρχοντας εἴ τι ἂν συνέγνω ἄτοπον.
2024. Conditional relative clausos have become commoner since P
times owing to the propensity of popular speech to replace supposi-
tions, especially those of general character (if one ever, if any thing,
etc.), by the clearer and more emphatic relative clauses (whoever,
whatever, etc.). In this case καὶ (or δὲ is frequently inserted between
the relative and the particle ἄν (1716. 1719). This class of relative
clauses is uncommonly frequent in N:
A. Objective condition:a.(1969f.): ὅ,τι δὲ γνωρίζω οὔτε στοχάζομαι πως το γνωρίζω.
μὴ λέγῃς ὅ,τι δὲν πρέπει. ἂς γίνῃ ὅ,τι με συφέρνει. b. (1970): ἀποκρίνου μου εἰς ὅ,τι
els
470
INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
[2024-2031.
και ενα σε ρωτώ. θ᾽ ἀπακούσω εἰς ὅποιο καὶ ἂν διαλέξετε. ὅποιος ἔρθῃ καλῶς νὰ
᾿ρθῃ. ὅπου ἀστοχήσῃς γύρισε καὶ ὅπου πετύχῃς φύγε. c. (1971) : for this form gee
1972 & 1984-92.
B. Subjective condition (1974) : ὅ,τι καὶ νὰ μοῦ 'διδες δὲ θὰ πήγαινα, όποιος καὶ
Ave (or nà) μου τό 'λεγε δὲν θά το ἐ]πίστευα.
2025. As in final and temporal (1933. 1954. 1957), so in relative
clauses an assimilation of mood is admissible, especially in case the
secondary subjunctive should be the antecedent mood, as: Ar. Vesp.
1431 ἔργοι τις ἣν ἕκαστος εἰδείη τέχνην.
2026. Conditional clauses which at the same time act as
temporal relative clauses have already been treated separately
in 1995-2009 (cp. 1975).
INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
2027. When the words or thoughts of a person are not quoted
verbatim, or in direct discourse (oratio recta), but are merely reported
in the form of an oblique or dependent clause, they are said to be in
indirect discourse or oratio obliqua (1938).
A. Direct discourse: Σωκράτης ἔλεγεν οἱ θεοὶ πάντα ἴσασιν Socrates
said: 'The gods know all things.'
B. Indirect discourse:
α. Σωκράτης ἔλεγεν ὅτι οἱ θεοὶ πάντα
ἴσασιν (or εἰδεῖεν)
6. Σωκράτης ἔλεγε τοὺς θεοὺς πάντα εἰδέναι
'S. said that the gods knew
all things.'
2028. It will be seen that indirect discourse or oratio obliqua com-
prises all clauses depending on verbs or expressions which imply
thought or the expression of thought (verba sentiendi et declarandi), also
on such expressions as : φαίνεται ‘it appears, δοκεῖ ' it seems, δῆλον
éorí, σapés éot 'it is evident,' and the like.
2029. Indirect discourse is expressed in three ways:
}
(a) By declarative clauses, as already explained in 1940-4;
(b) By the declarative infinitive after verbs of saying and
thinking (verba declarandi et senticndi), which will be explained
in 2085 ff.;-For P-N cp. 2086 ff.
(c) By the participle after verbs of perceiving (verba sen-
tiendi), which will be treated in 2133-7;—For P-N seo 2138.
2030. Sometimes an indirect discourse commencing with or or s
and a finite mood, passes to an infinitival construction, and con-
versely (App. vi. 6 f.) : Lys. 10, 15 ὑμᾶς πάντας εἰδέναι ἡγοῦμαι ὅτι ἐγὼ μὲν
ὀρθῶς λέγω, τοῦτον δὲ σκαιὸν εἶναι. -- More illustrations in App. vi. 7, b.
ს.
2031. Very frequently the indirect discourse, though opening
with tho infinitive or by őrɩ (os) passos suddenly to the direct
discourse. This change which lends a vivacity to speech has
been popular through all times, particularly after verbs of
asking or ordering :
eis
Xon. Holl. 2, 1, 25 οὐκ ἐν καλῷ ἔφη αὐτοὺς ὁρμεῖν ἀλλὰ μεθορμίσαι εἰς
Σηστὸν παρῄνει πρός τε λιμένα καὶ πρὸς πόλιν· οὗ ὄντες Ναμαχιρετε, ἔφη, ὅταν
471
2031-2034.1
INTERROGATIVE CLAUSES.
βούλησθε. Dem. 50, 37 λέγοντος ἐμοῦ ταῦτ᾽ ἀποκρίνεται μοι ὅτι ὁ συντριήραρχος
αὐτῷ οὐχ ἥκοι ἐπὶ τὴν ναῦν· οὔκουν παραλήψομαι μόνος τὴν τριήρη.
NT Luke 5, 14 παρήγγειλεν αὐτῷ μηδενὶ εἰπεῖν, ἀλλὰ δεῖξον σεαυτὸν τῷ
ἱερεῖ καὶ προσένεγκε κτλ. Acta Tho. 16, 20 δ δὲ βασιλεὺς πάνυ ὀργισθεὶς
ἐκέλευσεν ὑπὸ δεσμὸν Γενέθαι τόν τε ἔμπορον καὶ Ἰούδαν τὸν καὶ Θωμᾶν καὶ εἰς
φυλακὴν ἀληθῆναι ἕως ἀνακρίνας μάθῃ τίνι ἐδόθη τὰ τοῦ βασιλέως· καὶ οὕτως
αὐτὸν ἀπολέσω μετὰ τοῦ ἐμπόρου.
2032. In this popular mode of direct discourse, it is very
common to indicate the dependence of the verbatim clause
by placing before it the conjunction or, which then seems
redundant (so in NT about r2o times) and corresponds to our
modern colon (:) or quotation marks (80), as :
TI
Th. 1, 137 ἐδήλου δὲ ἡ γραφὴ ὅτι Θεμιστοκλῆς ἥκω παρὰ σέ. So 1, 139. 8, 53.
Xen. An. 1, 6, 8 ὁ δὲ ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι οὐδ᾽ εἰ γενοίμην (φίλος), ὦ Κῦρε, σοί γ' ἂν ἔτι
ποτὲ δόξαιμι. Cyr. 3, 1, 8 εἶπε δὲ ὅτι Εἰς καιρὸν ἥκεις, ἔφη. Pl. Crit. 50 ο Ίσως
ἂν εἴποιεν (οἱ νόμοι) ὅτι, Ω Σώκρατες, μὴ θαύμαζε τὰ λεγόμενα. Antiph. 5, 21
αὐτὰ ταῦτα σκοπεῖτε ὅτι Μὴ προνοίᾳ μᾶλλον ἐγένετο ἢ τύχῃ.
ΝΤ Matt. 26, 74 τότε ήρξατο καταναθεματίζειν καὶ ὀμνύειν ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα τὸν
ἄνθρωπον. 26, 75. 27, 43 εἶπεν γὰρ ὅτι Θεοῦ εἰμι υἱός. Mark 14, 58 ἐψευδομαρ
τύρουν κατ' αὐτοῦ λέγοντες ὅτι Ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν αὐτοῦ λέγοντος ὅτι Εγώ κατα-
λύσω τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον κτλ. John 10, 34 ἀπεκρίθη· Οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ὅτι
Ἐγὼ εἶπα θεοί ἐστε ; Acta Tho, 2, 3 οὐκ ἐβούλετο δὲ ἀπελθεῖν λέγων μὴ δύνασθαι
μήτε χωρεῖν διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς καὶ ὅτι ῎Ανθρωπος ὢν Ἑβραῖος πῶς δύνα-
μαι πορευθῆναι ἐν τοῖς Ἰνδοῖς κηρύξαι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ; 5, 2 ἔλεγον δὲ αὐτῷ οἱ ἐκεῖσε
ὅτι καὶ σὲ οἱ θεοὶ ἤγαγον ἵνα εὐωχηθῇς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ. 9, 26 ; 27. 15, 20
etc. (Cp. Evang. Tho. A 14, 3 παρήγγειλε τῇ μητρὶ αὐτοῦ ὅπως Έξω της θύρας μὴ
ἀπολύσεις [read -σῃς] αὐτόν.) Callin. 57, 2ο βιαζόμενος ἔλεγεν ὅτι Εἴ τι παρ'
ἐμοῦ ζητεῖτε, ταῦτα ἐν τῇ θεοπνεύστῳ γραφῇ εὑρήσετε. 71, 12 ἔλεγεν ὅτι Λόγον
ἔχετε δοῦναι, et passim. Acta Pil. Λ, 1, 2 εἴπατέ μοι ὅτι Πῶς δύναμαι ἐγὼ
ἡγεμὼν ὢν βασιλέα ἐξετάσαι ;
2032). So now very often in N: ΑΒ 83, 28 ἐμήνυσέ τον μιὰν αὐγήν· Κυρά
μου ὅτι ἀγαπῶ σε.μᾶς ἐφώναζαν πῶς Εσείς δὲν εἶστε χρήσιμοι ἀθρωποι • they
shouted to us: you ain't respectable men. Και τότες εἶπε πῶς Δέ σου το 'λεγα
ἐγώ ; 'then he said : didn't I tell you so
INTERROGATIVE CLAUSES.
2033. So far as they are not indicated by the more tone of
the voice, interrogative clauses are introduced in A, as well
as N, either—
a. By interrogative pronouns and adverbs, also by ci
(Na) 'whether,' as in English; in which case they are called
Word-questions ; τίς εἶ καὶ πόθεν ἥκεις ; οι—
b. By special interrogative particles referring to the whole
clause, in which case they are called Sentence-questions (2046 ff.).
2034. Contrary to English usage, the syntactical position of the
subject in Greck interrogative clauses is not influenced by the presence
of the interrogation (cp. 1158).
ἔστι πλούσιος ἢ πένης ὁ ἀνήρ;ὁ ἀνὴρ πλούσιός ἐστιν ἢ πένης ;-πλούσιος ἢ
πένης ὁ ἀνήρ ἐστιν; τὸν υἱὸν φιλεῖ ὁ πατήρ ;
So still in Ν.
472
INTERROGATIVE CLAUSES.
[2035-2038.
2035. Either form of interrogative clauses can be direct or
indirect (dependent), according as it represents a question either
put directly or subordinated to an antecedent verb of enquiring,
saying, knowing.
A. Direct question: τίς εἶ καὶ πόθεν ἥκεις; ' who are you and whence
have you come ? '
B. Indirect question: ἐρωτῶ τίς εἶ καὶ πόθεν ἥκεις, I ask who you are
and whence you have come.'
2036. Since A times the scope of indirect questions has become
gradually narrower in consequence of the decided predilection of
popular speech for the more simple and vivid direct discourse (1703.
1710. 1930. 1939. 2031). Hence P-N is very fond of putting a direct
question after verbs of asking, deliberating, seeing, knowing, saying, etc.
NT John 9, 19 ἠρώτησαν· Οὗτος ἐστὶν ὁ υἱὸς ὑμῶν; 5, 6 λέγει αὐτῷ·
Θέλεις ὑγιὴς γενέσθαι;
2037. Whether direct or indirect, interrogative clauses have
commonly the form and construction of independent clauses.
In 1, however, indirect questions equally admit (a) of relative
beside interrogative pronouns and adverbs; (b) after secondary
tense, of the secondary subjunctive beside either the indicative
or the interrogative primary subjunctive (1909).
α. ἐρωτῶ σε ὅστις (beside τίc) εἶ καὶ ὁπόθεν (πόθεν) ἥκεις.
b. ήρόμην σε τίς or "στις εἴΗc beside εἶ) καὶ πόθεν οι
ὁπόθεν ἥκοις (beside fκειc).
a. Th. 1, 137 Θεμιστοκλῆς φράζει τῷ ναυκλήρῳ ὅστις ἐστὶ καὶ δι᾽ ἃ φεύγει.
Pl. Gorg. 500 A ἆρ᾽ οὖν παντὸς ἀνδρός ἐστιν ἐκλέξασθαι ποῖα ἀγαθὰ τῶν
ἡδέων ἐστὶ καὶ ὁποῖα κακά. 448 Ε οὐδεὶς ἐρωτᾷ ποία τις εἴη ἡ Γοργίου
τέχνη, ἀλλὰ τίς καὶ ὅΝΤΙΝΑ δέοι καλεῖν τὸν Γοργίαν. Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 13 οὐ
γὰρ αἰσθάνομαί σου ὁποῖον νόμιμον ἢ ποῖον δίκαιον λέγεις. - See also 1446.
b. Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 15 ἡ μήτηρ διαρώτα τὸν Κῦρον πότερον βούλοιτο
μένειν ἢ ἀπιέναι. Λη. 7, 2, 25 επήρετο τον Μηδοσάδην εἰ ἀληθῆ ταῦτα εἴΗ.
Dem. 19, 122 συνελθόντες ἐβογλεΥΟΝΘ' Οὗτοι τίν᾽ αὐτοῦ καταλείψογCIN. Pl.
Apol. 21 Β μπόρουν τί ποτε λέγει. Th. 1, 63. Μπόρнce μὲν ὁποτέρωσε Δια
Απόρησε
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΕΥΣΗ χωρήσας. 2, 4, 6 οἱ Πλαταιῆς ἐβουλεύοντο εἴτε ΚΑΤΑΚΑΥCIN
ὥσπερ ἔχουσιν ἐμπρήσαντες τὸ οἴκημα, εἴτε τι ἄλλο χρήσωνται. Χen. Μem.
2, 1, 23 ὁρῶ σε ἀΠΟΡΟΥΝΤΑ Ποίαν ὁδὸν ἐπὶ τὸν βίον τράπη. See also 1446.
2038. The use of the relatives in indirect questions brought
them into association with the ordinary or direct interrogatives
and thus rendered them admissible in questions also, especially
in A dialogue. This peculiarity is unusual in narrative A prose,
but fairly common in 1-B compositions, apparently owing to
the influence of the parallel use in Latin of relatives which
acted as interrogatives as well.
Eur. Rh. 703 ὁποῖον ἐπεύχεται τὸν ὕπατον θεῶν ; Γ1. Rep. 578 E ἐν ποίῳ
ἄν τινι καὶ ὁπόεῳ φόβῳ οἴει γενέσθαι αὐτόν; Lys. 212 ο ὁπότερος οὖν
αὐτῶν ποτέρου φίλος; Ar. Ran. 198 οὗτος, τί ποιεῖς ;-ΔΙ. ὅ,τι ποιῶ;
Ach. 594 ἀλλὰ τίς γὰρ εἶ;-ΔΙΚ. δετιε ; πολίτης χρηστός. Pl. Euthyph.
2 € ἀλλὰ δὴ τίνα γραφήν σε γέγραπται ;-ΣΩ, ΗΝΤΙΝΑ; οὐκ ἀγεννῇ, ἐμοί γε
473
2038-2040.]
INTERROGATIVE CLAUSES.
δοκεῖ. Hipp. I, 292 c. Leg. 662 Α καὶ πῶς ἂν ταῦτα γ' ἔτι ξυγχωροῦμεν ;
—ΑΘ. όπως ;
9, II
Sept. 1 Chron. 17, 6 ὅ,τι οὐκ ᾠκοδομήσατέ μοι οἶκον κέδρινον ; ΝT Mark
ἐπηρώτων λέγοντες· Ο,τι λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι Ἡλίαν δεῖ ἐλθεῖν πρῶτον; ib.
28 ἐπηρώτων αὐτόν· Ο,τι ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἠδυνήθημεν ἐκβαλεῖν αὐτό; (where Euthym.:
τὸ ὅ,τι ἀντὶ τοῦ διατί). Mark 2, 16. Matt. 26, 50 ἐφ' δ πάρει ; (ep. Jas. 3, 5 ἰδοὺ
ἡλίκον πῦρ ἡλίκην ὕλην ἀνάπτει.) Jul. Frg. 276 η Θεοτόκον ὑμεῖς ἀνθ᾽ ὅτου τὴν
παρθένον εἶναι φατέ ; 'wherefore ? Just. Cohort. 5 (p. 253 Α) δι᾿ ἣν αἰτίαν . .
ὡς ἀληθεύοντι προσέχεις Ὁμήρῳ ; [Just.] 1288 Β ὅ,τι οὖν τῶν δύο ἀληθέστερον ;
Method. 165 c. Cyrill. Α. i. 204 A ἀνθ᾽ ὅτογ δὴ οὖν ἀνίησι μὲν τοὺς ἐν ἥβῃ καὶ
ἐν ἀκμῇ ; Theod. iv. 512 A ἀνθ᾽ ὅταν τὰ βρέφη βαπτίζομεν ; Stud. 38ο Β ὅτογ
χάριν ; so Burn. 748 Β ὅτι (read ὅ,τι δὲ τὸ ἔριον ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον ; Apophth. 105 c
᾿Αρσένιε, δι᾿ ὃ ἐξῆλθες; CGL 231, 15 ὅπου ἦν; ubi erat ? 642, 21 ὅπου οὖν
λουσώμεθα ; ὅπου θέλεις. ubi ergo lauemur? ubi uis. Mal. 256, 20 εἰ δ' αὐτοῦ
μαθητὴς τοιαῦτα θαυμάσια ἐποίει, ὁ ὁποῖος ὑπῆρχεν ἐκεῖνος δυνατός ;
2038. That in G-N, interrogatives and their relative substitutes can
be precoded by the definite article rò in indirect questions, will be ox-
plained in 2041.
2039. As regards the use of moods in indirect questions among
P-N scribes, the practice holds good even in the case of the
secondary subjunctive which lingers as late as T, if we may judge
from the NT writings. (1934.)
Luko I, 29 διελογίζετο ποταπὺς εἴΗ ὁ ἀσπασμὸς οὗτος. 1, 62 ἐνένευον δὲ τῷ
πατρὶ αὐτοῦ τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό. 3, 15 διαλογιζομένων περὶ τοῦ
Ἰωάννου μή ποτε αὐτὸς εἴΗ ὁ Χριστός. 6, 11 διελάλουν πρὸς ἀλλήλους τί ἂν
ποιήσαιεν τῷ Ἰησοῦ. 8, 9. 9, 46 εἰσῆλθεν δὲ διαλογισμὸς ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸ τίς ἂν εἴΗ
μείζων αὐτῶν. 15, 26 ἐπυνθάνετο τί εἴΗ ταῦτα. 18, 36. 22, 23 ήρξαντο συνζητεῖν
πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς τὸ τίς ἄρα εἴη ἐξ αὐτῶν ὁ μέλλων τοῦτο πράσσειν. Acts 5, 24
διηπόρουν περὶ αὐτῶν τί ἂν ΓένοΙΤο τοῦτο. 10, 17 διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος τί ἂν εἴη τὸ
ὅραμα δ εἶδεν. 17, 11 ἀνακρίνοντες τὰς γραφὰς εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως. 21, 33
ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη καὶ τί ἐCTIN πεποιηκώς.--Clem. R. 14, 3 κατεσκόπουν τὸ τί
ἂν ἐν κρυφαίῳ εἰσιόντες πράττοιτε. Gr. Urk. Berlin 347 († 170), το Σερήνει
ανὺς ἐπύθετο τῶν κορυφαίων εἰ σημεῖον τι ἔχοι ὁ παῖς. (See also App. v. 1o.)
2
[2040. From the above list which is nearly completo for the NT writings,
it appears that tho secondary subjunctive lingored longer in indirect ques-
tions than in any other case of dependent spooch. At the same time it
must be noted that most of the instancos cited, coming as they do from
Luke, point to a Hellenizing tendoney. It is furthor significant that
they all oxpross a speculative or potential contingency, often intensified by
tho insertion of some modal partielo (ἄν, ἄρα, πῶς, τί, ποτέ, 1749), and so
border on potential clauses (1925). Finally it is rather striking that in all
these casos we should moet either with the ever recurring en and γένοιτο
-standing formulas in the devotional language of the church—or with
ondings homophonous in both the primary and secondary subjunctive
(οιπη), so that ono might be tompted to suspect an itacistic mis-spolling
traceable to the scholastic zoal of the copiors (cp. App. iv. 9. V. 14).
And the suspicion becomes the more warrantable as in those casos the
other NT writers (sometimos also Luko himself) use the interrogativo
primary subjunctive (1909), porhaps also its associated futuro indicativo
(1888):
Mark 9,
6 οὐ γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ. 14, 1 ἐζήτουν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματείς
πῶς αὐτὸν ἐν δόλῳ κρατήσαντες ἀποκτείνωσιν. ib. τι ἐζήτει πῶς αὐτὸν παραδοῖ
(App. v. 8"). ib. 40 οὐκ ᾔδεισαν τί ἀποκριθῶσιν αὐτῷ. Luko 22, 2 ἐζήτουν
οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς τὸ πῶς ἀνέλωσιν αὐτόν. ib, 4 ἀπελθὼν συν-
ελάλησεν τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ στρατηγοῖς τὸ πῶς αὐτοῖς παραδῷ αὐτόν. Acts 4,
474
INTERROGATIVE CLAUSES.
[2040-2044.
21 ἀπέλυσαν αὐτοὺς μηδὲν εὑρίσκοντες τὸ πῶς κολάσωνται αὐτούς, and elsewhere.
(John 21, 19 τοῦτο δὲ εἶπεν σημαίνων ποίῳ θανάτῳ δοξάσει [read -σῃ App.
v. 14 1.] τὸν θεόν. Mark 3, 2 παρετήρουν αὐτὸν εἰ ἐν τοῖς σάββασιν θερα
πεύ(σ)ει αὐτόν.)Cp. further Matt. 6, 25. Mark 6. 36. 13, II. Luke 12, 5 ;
11; 22; 29. John 12, 49.
Protov. Jac. 14, 1 διελογίζετο τὸ τί αὐτὴν ποιήσει
(write -ση). 22, 3 περιεβλέπετο ποὺ αὐτὸν κρύψει (-ψη). Callin. 67, 8 ἤριζον
ὅ τε Ὑπάτιος καὶ ὁ Τιμόθεος τίς πλέον νηστεύσει ἢ ἀγρυπνήσει ἢ εὔξεται ἢ ταπεινο-
φρονήσει ἢ ἐλεήσει (write everywhere -CH for -σει). 58, 15 ἐτήρει καιρὸν πότε
ἀπέλθη. 84, 2. 87, 8 κλαίει πως περάσῃ καὶ εἰσέλθη. 88, 5.]
ĥ
2041. Another peculiarity characteristic of G-N speech is the
frequent practice of introducing indirect word-questions by means of
the neuter article ró, as if the question were a direct quotation con-
ceived as one object (1217 ff.)." Though very common in M Greek,
this peculiarity is now obsolescent.
Aristid. 8, 88, οι καὶ τὸ ὅστις ἐστὶ καὶ τὸ ἥντινα ἔχει τὴν φύσιν. Luke
1, 62 ἐνένευον τῷ πατρὶ τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό. 9, 46. 19, 48. 22, 2
ἐζήτουν τὸ πῶς ἀνέλωσιν αὐτόν. Acts 22, 30 βουλόμενος γνῶναι τὸ ἀσφαλὲς τὸ τί
κατηγορείται παρὰ τῶν Ἰουδαίων. Clom. Rom. 14, 3 κατεσκόπουν τὸ τὶ ἂν
ἐν κρυφαίῳ εἰσιόντες πράττοιτε. Protev. Jac. 14, 1 διελογίζετο τὸ τί αὐτὴν
ποιήσει (write -ση). Acta Pil. Α 1, 4 ἰδόντες δὲ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι τὸ σχῆμα τῶν σίγνων
τὸ πῶς ἐκάμφθησαν. Narr. Josephi 2, 2 οὐκ εἶχον τὸ πῶς τὸ πάσχα ποιῆσαι. 5,
5, 2
οὐκ ἔτι τὸν λῃστὴν ἐθεασάμεθα τὸ τί ἐγένετο. Acta Phil. in Hellad. 7 ἵνα αὐτὸς
ἡμῖν ἀπαγγείλῃς τὸ τί βούλεται εἶναι τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο. Amphil. 177 ο διηγήσομαι
τὸ ὅπως ἐκ θείας ἐπιφανείας αὐτόπτης ἐγένετο. J Moschos 27 θέλων παρ' αὐτοῦ
μαθεῖν τὸ τίς ἔστιν. Mal. 206, 17 γνοὺς περὶ τῶν Ἰουδαίων τῆς Ἱερουσαλὴμ τὸ
τί πέπραχαν κατ᾿ αὐτοῦ. 231, 17 ἐπηρώτησε τὴν Πυθίαν τὸ διατί οὐκ ἐδόθη αὐτῷ
ἀπόκρισις. Leont. Neap. V. J. 5, 12 κανονίζων τὸ τί ἐποίησεν. 19, τι μὴ δυνη
θέντες γνωρίσαι τὸ ποῦ ὑπάγομεν. 21, 22 ἐρωτᾷ αὐτὸν τὸ τί ἔλαβεν.
ἐξωμολογεῖτο τὸ τί ἦν ποιήσας. 47, 2 μετενύουν καὶ ἐκύπτοντο ἅπαντες .
ἐν ποίᾳ ἀτιμίᾳ εἶχον αὐτόν. Chron. 729, 18 ἐσημάναμεν τὸ πῶς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ ἡ
δέσποινα ἡμῶν ἡ Θεοτόκος συνέπραξεν ἡμῖν. Porph. Adm. 220, 14 περιέχον το
τί οφείλουσιν.
74, 18
το
•
So still in N : μοῦ εἶπε τὸ τί ἔπαθε. να σου διγηθῶ τὸ πῶς ἐγλύτωσα.
2042. Sometimes two interrogative words are found in the same
clause, side by side, but without connective:
Xen. Mom. 2, 2, 3 τίνας ὑπὸ τίνων εὕροιμεν ἂν μείζονα εὐεργετημένους ἢ
παῖδας ὑπὸ γονέων ; Pl. Theaet. 280 m πώς τί τοῦτο ; Rop. 400 Α ποια δ' ὁποίου
βίου μιμήματα οὐκ ἔχω λέγειν ; Od. a 170 τίς πόθεν εἰς ἀνδρῶν ;
2043. In this case N insorts the conjunction καὶ : ἀπὸ ποῦ καὶ πῶς καὶ πόσα
2044. The question why? is expressed in 4 Greek by τί ;
also by διὰ τί (διατί), ἵνα τί ; -- indirectly by ὅτι (διότι)- but when it
implies surprise or disapprobation (why on earth? why should?)
recourse is very fondly had to the idiomatic phrase τί παθών;
(sometimes τί μαθών), also τί ἔχων ;-indirect by ὅ,τι παθών
(μαθών), ἔχων, as:
Ar. Nub. 341 λέξον δή μοι, τί παθονται θνηταῖς εἴξασι γυναιξίν ; Pl.
Phaedr. 236 Ε τί δῆτα ἔχων στρέφει ;
Protov. Jac. 13, 2 τί τοῦτο ἐποίησας ; τί ἐταπείνωσας τὴν ψυχήν μου ; Callin.
101, 27 τί ἔχεις μετ᾿ ἐμοῦ, ἄνθρωπε; τί ἐπαίρεις τοὺς ἐμούς;.. τί ἔχεις μετ'
ἐμοῦ ; τί τὰ ἐμὰ πραιδεύεις; CGL 233, 6 τί στήκεις; quid stas ? So 652, 11.
475
2045-2040b.]
INTERROGATIONS, DIRECT.
2045. So still in N: τί φωνάζεις; διατί (γιατί) φωνάζεις; but after
the retreat of the active participle (2166 ff.), the above terms πaðóv,
(µaðwv), ëxwv, have been necessarily turned into finite co-ordinate
verbs: Tí Tales kaì kλaleis ; ti ëxeis kai kλaieis; (EGeorg. Const. 426.) [']
2046. So far as it is not indicated by the mere tone of the
voice (2033), a direct SENTENCE-question is introduced by-
âpa, Ĥ (=Latin -ne), 'I wonder,' suggesting the answer yes or no;
*ou, ấp oỶ (=Latin nonne)
tun, APAMH, MÔN (Latin num)
""
وو
""
""
yes (cp. 1812);
no (cp. 1812);
while the second member, if any, is invariably introduced by
TH 'or."
αν
મ
Eur. I. T. 575 ἆρ᾽ εἰσίν ; ἆρ᾽ οὐκ εἰσί ; τίς φράσειεν ἄν; Xen. Mem. 3,
10, 1 άρα γραφική ἐστιν ἡ εἰκασία τῶν ὁρωμένων ; ᾿Αληθῆ λέγεις, ἔφη. 4, 2,
22 ἆρ᾽ ΟΥ̓͂ν διὰ τὴν τοῦ χαλκεύειν ἀμαθίαν τοῦ ὀνόματος τούτου τυγχάνουσιν;
οι δήτα. Pl. Rep. 341 Ε. Η ὀρθῶς σοι δοκῶ ἂν εἰπεῖν οὕτω λέγων ἢ οὔ;
Ορθῶς, ἔφη. Soph. Εl. 997 ογκ εἰσορᾷς ; Ο. C. 883 ἆρ᾽ οὐχ ὕβρις τάδε
Aesch. Pr. 962 NH T gói Sok rap Bêu; Xen. Mem. 4, 2, to a là MH
αρχιτέκτων βούλει γενέσθαι; 2, 6, 34 ἆρα μὴ διαβάλλεσθαι δόξεις ὑπ᾿ ἐμοῦ;
Soph. Εl. 446 ἆρα Μὴ δοκεῖς λυτήρι' αὐτῇ ταῦτα του φόνου φέρειν ; Pl. Prot.
310D Μῶν τί σε ἀδικεῖ Πρωταγόρας ;- Callin. 96, 31 Μή τι κακόν διεπράξω;
97, 21 ΜΗ τι προσέκρουσας τῷ θεῷ;See also 1747 f. & 1812.
2047. With certain modifications, the leading representatives of
the above particles (pa, ov, µn) still survive in N, and even preserve
their A usage and construction.
[2047. For ei=åpa in Biblical Greek see 2055 f.]
2048. In particular, apa is now very common in the amplified form
apayes, though it is open to doubt whether its prosent popularity be not
rather a revival than a survival of A apa, due to the influence of literary
style. At all events the NT writers hardly use it (only Luke twico: 18, 8
and Acts 8, 30; preferring instead 2050), unless we are willing, as we
ought, to admit its presence in such cases as ris àpa, rí åpa (writing rís
apa, тi apa, 1748) and the like (ep. AButtmann 247) ;-while it is com-
pletely absent from some N dialects 121.
2049. On the other hand, où in its modification où]dér (1798 f.), and µń
are still universally common in their A use and sonso: dé" σov tó 'λeya 'yw;
'did I not tell you so?' MH σov yiva doûλos; I haven't become your
servant, have I ?'
2049". The latter particlo (µn), howover, is now generally amplified to
μήπως or more commonly to μήμπας (with or without a following καὶ οι νά).
Of those two amplifications, the formor (µýπws), though the ono generally
received in cultivated speech, is opon to the suspicion of being an Hellonized
form of μnμmаs (1749. 1957), the more so as the latter appears unclas-
เ
The participle palav hus no corresponding substituto in N (nevor Tí
ἔμαθες καὶ
Eμales nai..) und this circumstance adds strength to the suspicion thut palav
Inay be a corruption of malwv.
12) E.g. in Creto, whore in the western parts its place is held by raidiú (op.
John 21, 5 παιδία, μή τι προσφάγιον ἔχετε ;) and in tho ouster commonly by
cá, this being an abbreviation of the univorsul vocative radé (251"), usod chiefly
in exclamations implying surprise: καλέ, τί λές !
476
INTERROGATIONS,
DIRECT. [2049b-2053b.
sical' and therefore unpalatable to the scribes. In reality, however, this
colloquialism is a corruption of μὴν πά(γ)ει(ς) να or καί (1749), analogous
and equivalent to μὴν τύχῃ νὰ or και ep. P τυχόν), μὴ λάχῃ νὰ or καί,
combinations also current in popular speech (1717 f. 1749), as: φοβοῦμαι
ΜΗΝ ἀποθάνῃ, — ΜΗΜΠΑ ν' ἀποθάνῃ (-- ΜΗΜπας καὶ πεθάνῃ) - ΜΗ λάχῃ καὶ ἀποθάνῃ
The complex μὴν πᾷς καὶ is often shortened to (μ)πᾷς καὶ (as : (μ)πας κ'
ἐτρελάθηκες ; ' have you perchance gone mad ?' very different from πῶς κ'
ἐτρελάθηκες; how is it that you have gone mad ?'), a circumstance clearly
disproving the presence of πῶς in μήμπας, and strengthening the suspicion
against μήπως as.u direct survival of A.
2
2050. Of the remaining two particles, μῶν (from μὴ οὖν or Doric μὴ ὦν
was peculiar to A and apparently never passed to P discourse (the NT
shows no trace of it), its place having been taken by its associatos un apa
(Moeris 242 : μῶν Αττικῶς, μὴ ἆρα Ἑλληνικῶς. Cp. RKühnor ii. 1o24 f.),
or rather μὴ γάρ (1948) (Ν μηγάρι), μή τι, μή πως (1749), as : Pl. Crat. 429 σ
ΜΗ Γὰρ οὐδὲ τοῦτο αὖ ᾖ ; Epict. 21, 19 ΜΗ Γὰρ ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἦλθες ; ΜΗ Γάρ
τούτου ἕνεκά μοι παρακάθησαι ; Μὴ γὰρ διὰ τοῦτο ποτὲ λύχνον ἦψας ἢ ἠγρύπνησας ;
ib. 21 ΜΗ Γὰρ ἐπύθου;-On the other hand 7, an alternative and equiva-
lent of apa, enjoyed a far wider and longer popularity, since it appears
even in Homer as a very common particle and remains so through A,
especially in colloquial speech (dialogue), down to post-christian times
(2055).
Plut. Apophth. 1o (ii. 209 ) ἢ δοκεῖ σοι ὃ καὶ τῷ πατρί; Ael. V. H. 6,
6 Η γὰρ οὐ καὶ ταῦτα Λακωνικά ; Aristid. I, 1, 4.-NT Matt. 26, 53 H (ubi
male ή) δοκεῖς ὅτι οὐ δύναμαι παρακαλέσαι τὸν πατέρα μου ; Rom. 3, 29.
6, 3. II, 2 17 οὐκ οἴδατε; so I Cor. 6, 9. 14, 36 ᾗ ἐξῆλθεν ; 2 Cor. 11, γ Η
ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησα ; Jas. 4, 5 17 δοκεῖτε ; 1 Thes. 2, 19. Stob. Εcl. 3, 23, p. 567
ἢ ποιοῦμεν ; ib. ἢ οὖν ἔγνωμεν; etc.
2051. The two interrogative particles un and où are fre-
quently joined together in the complex μὴ οὐ (nonne?) when
the interrogator confidently expects an emphatic affirmation:
yes indeed!
-
Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 12 ΜΗ οὖν οὐ δύναμαι ἐγὼ τὰ τῆς δικαιοσύνης ἔργα
ἐξηγήσασθαι; ΝΤ Rom. 10, 18 ΜΗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν; μενούνγε. so ib. 19.
I Cor. 9, 4-5 ΜΗ οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν φαγεῖν καὶ πιεῖν; Μὴ οὐκ ἔχομεν
ἐξουσίαν ἀδελφὴν γυναῖκα περιάγειν; SO 11, 22.
So still in N: ΜΗ Δὲν ἔβαλα τὰ δυνατά μου; haven't I done my
best ?' μὴ δέ σου τό 'λεγα; ' didn't I tell you so ?' ΜΗ Δὲν τό 'ξερες;
'surely you did know it'?'
2051. For the allogod converse complex οὐ μή, sce 1827 f.
2052. Alternative or disjunctive questions, whether direct or
indiroct, are often introduced by πότερον, utrum --an, as :
Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 12 ἢν ἄρχων τις τύχῃ σοι καὶ ἁμάρτῃ, πότερον ἐς ἄρχειν
ἢ ἄλλον καθίστης ἀντ᾿ αὐτοῦ; Aesch. Cho. 118 πότερα δικαστὴν ἢ δικηφόρον
λέγεις; Χen. Cyr. I, 3, 15 διηρώτα πότερον βούλοιτο μένειν ἢ ἀπιέναι.
Dem. 23, 79 πότερον δέδρακεν ἢ οὔ;
2053. But the introductory πότερον can be omitted, as : Pl. Prot.
310 Β ἐγρήγορας ἢ καθεύδεις; and this is the regular practico in P. N.
2053. In fact the custom of introducing the question by πότερον bad
become obsolete as early as the Ist A D., if we may judge from the NT writers
who scarcely evor uso it (only once, John 7, 17). Cp. Matt. 11, 3 où el å
ἐρχόμενος ἢ ἕτερον προσδοκῶμεν ; Mark 12, 14 ἔξεστιν δοῦναι κῆνσον Καίσαρι
ἢ οὐ; δῶμεν ἢ μὴ δῶμεν ;
477
2054-2055. INTERROGATIONS, INDIRECT.
2054. When they are conditional ('whether '), indirect
sentence-questions are introduced, if simple, by el (uncommonly
by ear) whether' (German ob), if double or alternative, by
ἐὰν)
ei . . . ½ or eite . . . eire 'whether . . . or.'
εἴτε
Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 10 ἐρωτᾷς εἴ που ἂν ἀπὸ σοῦ πόρος προσγένοιτο; Mem.
2, 5, 2 σκοποῦμαι τοῦτο, εἰ ἆρα ὥσπερ τῶν οἰκετῶν οὕτω καὶ τῶν φίλων εἰσίν
ἄξαι. An. I, 10, 5 ἐβουλεύετο εἰ πέμποιέν τινας ἢ πάντες ἴοιεν ἀρήξοντες.
Pl. Gorg. 452 C σκόπει δήτα ἐάν σοι πλούτου φανῇ τι μεῖζον ἀγαθὸν ὄν.
Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 12 σκέψαι ἐὰν τόδε σοι μᾶλλον ἀρέσκῃ. Cyr. 2, 4, 6 ἄκουε
τοίνυν ἄν τι σοι δόξω λέγειν. Lys. 20, 34 οὔπω ἴστε εἴτε ἀγαθοὶ εἴτε κακοὶ
ἡβήσαντες ἔσονται.
2054". So still in N where el has naturally made room for (éàv) äv
(1772), as :
મ
μ' ἐρώτησε ἂν ἔχω ἀδερφούς. στοχάζεται ἂν πρέπῃ νὰ μείνῃ ἢ νὰ πάγῃ, μοῦ
εἶν᾿ ἀδιάφορο εἴτε ἔχασες εἶτ᾽ ἐκέρδισες.
2055. It is alleged that el occurs as a direct interrogative particle (equiva-
lent to ἆρα), rarely in 4, but often in NT Greek, as : NT Acts 21, 37 μέλλων
εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν ὁ Παῦλος λέγει τῷ χιλιάρχῳ· εἰ ἔξεστίν μοι εἰπεῖν τι
πρὸς σέ ; Matt. 12, 1ο ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν λέγοντες· εἰ ἔξεστιν τοῖς σάββασιν θερα-
πεύειν ;
So furthor Matt. 13, 3. 19, 3. 20, 15. Mark 8, 23. Luko 13, 23. 22, 49.
Acts 1, 6. 7, I. 19, 2. 21, 37. 22, 25. 23, 9. But this assumption, though
general among Biblical scholars, is based on a misconception, since ei hore
is nothing but an itacistic misspelling of the colloquial (2050). The copiers
of our MSS, in whose timo ἦ ( = ὄντως, ἆρα) had disappeared from the living
languago, finding H unaccentod and being unable to account for any other
than disjunctive and comparative either mistook it for such and tran-
scribed ½, or, whore this was too obviously inadmissible, changed it to its
homophonous el (37 ff.), which they imagined to bo the nearest approximate
in sense, associating it with the conditional el in indirect questions. In
other cases again whore was followed by unv-a very frequent occurrence
the asseverativo combination ή μήν, then pronounced as one word ἠμήν [1],
was mistaken by Biblical roaders and Christian copiers for the now familiar
Hebrew ἀμὴν and changod accordingly [2], notwithstanding that its posi-
tion at the opening of a clause ought to have served as a criterion.
Henco is to be restored not only in all direct questions like the abovo
(2050), but also in assevorativo clausos 7 = verily), liko Rom. 7, 1. 11, 2.
1 Cor. 6, 9. 14, 36, and olsowhoro where or el now stands, as well as in
the numerous instances where (especially in John) it opens an assertion
(ἢ μὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, so for ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν).
Cp. Sept. Gen. 22, 17 Η ΜΗΝ εὐλογῶν εὐλογήσω σε, where Et. Μ. 416, 50
obsorvos ἢ ἐπίρρημα δρακόν, ὅπερ καὶ διὰ διφθόγγου (i. e. η or n) γράφεται
Η ΜΗΝ εὐλογῶν εὐλογήσω σε. ἢ ὄντως καὶ ἀληθῶς). Ezok. 33, 27 ζῶ ἐγὼ
(= by my life), Η ΜΗΝ οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἠρημωμέναις μαχαίραις πεσοῦνται. Το 34, 8.
H
[1] Hrdn. (ALontz) i. 508, 17 τὸ δὲ ΗΜΗΝ ὁρκικὸν ἐπίρρημα ὀξύνεται (1744, 2).
[2] If not direct, the process of interpolation and corruption is not diflieult
to trace: the asseveration & µhy, written HMHN, which sinco oarly Christian
conturies bocanie obsoloscont, appearod obscure to some Christian reader or
commentator who 'explained' it, on the margin or above the lino, by the more
familiar Biblical torm AMHN. The next copior then mistook this explanation
for part of tho text and interpolatod it, thus producing HMIIN AMIIN, a com-
plex which naturally struck the third copior as boing a 'clerical orror,' and so
he in his turn unbositatingly corroctol ΗΜΗΝ ΑΜΗΝ to ΑΜΗΝ ΑΜΗΝ (ἀμὴν
ἀμὴν), ut phrase both Christian-liko and grammatically not incorrect, sinco nt
that timo a torm could be strengthened by its muro repetition. (513. 521. 603.)
478
ANSWERING A QUESTION.
[2055-2060.
•
H
35, 6. Num. 14, 28. Job 27, 3 ζῇ ὁ θεὸς (=by Godl) Η ΜΗΝ λαλήσει τὰ
χείλη μου ἄνομα, Judith 1, 12 ὤμοσε ᾖ ΜΗΝ ἐκδικήσειν πάντα τὰ ὅρια
τῆς Κιλικίας. Baruch 2, 29 ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσητε τῆς φωνῆς μου Η ΜΗΝ ἡ
βόμβησις ἀποτρέψει κτλ. - ΝΤ' Ηebr. 6, 14 (= Sept. Gen. 22, 17). Polyb. 6,
NT 17).—Polyb.
21, 2 ἐξορκίζουσιν ἢ ΜΗΝ πειθαρχήσειν. 6, 58, 3 ορκίσας Η ΜΗΝ ἐπανήξειν πρὸς
αὐτόν. 11, 30, 4 ὤμνυον ἢ ΜΗΝ πειθαρχήσειν τοῖς παραγγελλομένοις. 12, 6, 3
ὁμολογίας ποιήσαιντο ᾖ ΜΗΝ εὐνοήσειν αὐτοῖς. 9, 30, 9 ι που ἀξιόχρεως ἂν εἴη.
(Cp. 12, 11, 9 Η που γ᾽ ἂν οὗτος παρεσιώπησεν). Plut. C. Mar. 29, 2 (i. 422 c)
ομόσαι Η ΜΗΝ ἐμμενεῖν οἷς ἂν ὁ δῆμος ψηφίσαιτο. id. Alex. 47, 4 (i. 692 Δ)
ἐπώμοσεν ἢ ΜΗΝ μάλιστα φιλεῖν ἀνθρώπων ἁπάντων ἐκείνους. Cat. min. 32, 2
(ii. 775 Α). Tib. Grac. 14, 3 (i. 83I B) εἰς ὁρισμόν τινα προυκαλεῖτο τὸν
Τιβέριον ἢ ΜΗΝ ᾐτιμωκέναι τον συνάρχοντα. Cic. 23, I (i. 872 Β). Pyth. Or.
I (ii. 394 ) Η φιλοθεάμων τις ἡμῖν καὶ περιττῶς φιλήκοος ὁ ξένος. Aelian N. A.
I, 32 Η δεινὸν κακὸν καὶ νόσημα ἄγριον ἡ ἔχθρα. Babr. 40, 3 ή κακῶς πράσσω.
Apoc. Mar. 122, 15 Η ΜΗΝ οὐχ ἑώρακας τὰς μεγάλας κολάσεις.
H
ANSWERING A QUESTION.
2056. The answer to a question is expressed-
A. In word-questions by a term corresponding to that
which leads the question:
Τί λέγει ;-Δημοσθένης, ὁ ξένος, οὗτος, ὃς ἂν βούληται, ὁ βουλόμενος.
πώς ;-μετρίως, πράως, καθ᾿ ἡσυχίαν, γελῶν.
πότε;-χθές, νύκτωρ, τότε, ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ χρόνῳ, ἐπειδὰν ἔλθῃ, ἐλθών.
που ; ποῖ;—ἐνθάδε, ἐκεῖ, ἄνω, πανταχοῦ, ἐν ᾿Αθήναις, εἰς τὴν ᾿Ασίαν.
So too in N.
2057. B. In sentence-questions the notion of yes or no is ex-
pressed-
a. By repeating in the affirmative or negative the word
bearing the stress of the question :
Fur. Hipp. 1396 όρος με, δέσποιν, ὡς ἔχω, τὸν ἄθλιον; Ορώ. F1.
Phaed. 65 D ΦΑΜΕΝ τι εἶναι δίκαιον αὐτὸ ἢ οὐδέν;-ΦΑΜὲν μέντοι, μὴ Δία.
Soph. Ant. 512 οὔκουν ὅΜΑΙΜΟC χώ καταντίον θανών ;-Όμαιμος.
2057. So too in N, though less frequently than in 4, as: ἔχεις
χρήματα ;—ἔχω. Μ' ἄκουσες ποὺ σοῦ φώναζα ;-Δὲ σ' ἄκουσα.
Soph. Ant.
Dem. I, 19
Crat. 391 E.
2058. b. By means of ἐγώ, ἐγώ γε, οὐκ ἐγώ γε-φημί, οὐ φημί :
Pl. Rep. 352 Ε δοκεῖ τι σοι εἶναι ἵππου ἔργον ;-Ἐμοί γε.
498 θέλεις τι μεῖζον ἢ κατακτεῖναι μ᾽ ἑλών;—Ἐγὼ μὲν οὐδέν.
σὺ γράφεις ταῦτ᾽ εἶναι στρατιωτικά ;-Μὰ Δι᾿ οὐκ ἐγώ γε.
2058. This mode of answering is questionable in G-B speech and
foreign to N.
Pl.
2059. C. By means of certain affirmative or negative parti-
cles, such as--
ναί 'yes, πάνυ μὲν οὖν, (καὶ) πάνυ (γε), μάλα γε, καὶ μάλα (γε), ἔγωγε,
ἔμοιγε (529 "), certainly, ή ' surely,' verily' (2055), etc.-πῶς γὰρ οὔ ;
why not?'
οὐ ‘no, οὐχί, οὐδαμῶς (μηδαμῶς), ἥκιστά γε, οὐ μὰ Δία, ‘by no means, etc.
2060. This is the commonest way of answering a sentence-question
in N also. The particles still fully surviving and universally used in
N are vai 'yes' and ὄχι ' no, such other terms as μάλιστα ‘yes (in-
deed), βέβαια ' certainly, ἐννοεῖται ' of course, καθ' ὅλου (καθόλου), δι'
ὅλου (διόλου) not at all, and the like being due to literary influence.
7
479
2061-2063.]
INFINITIVE.
2061. For the sake of emphasis A où and vai were often amplified
to oixí (oйxı? cp. Et. M. 607, 29; 638, 49.) and vaixi (vaixí? [¹). The
former is found even in Homer (beside ouki [or okt ?]) and served as
pattern for the latter (οὔχ and ναίχί, ep. μηκέτι after οὐκέτι). Their
respective representatives in N are 3x (dialectally also o 155°), often
amplified to Möxıka (i. e. öɣı kadé cp. 251º), oɣeoke (NSophianos 81) or
oуeσke, then contracted to (*dïoke) σke, 'no indeed,' and, after it,
valoke 'yes indeed,'-all these lengthened forms being considered, in
popular parlance, as politer than axı (öï) and vai respectively.
INFINITIVE.
INTRODUCTORY.
2062. The infinitive is a verbal substantive partaking of the
nature of both the substantive and the verb. Its nominal nature
is clearly shown by its combination with the article (ró, Toù,
τῷ): τὸ λέγειν, τοῦ ἱέναι, τῷ ἐπαινεῖσθαι. On the other hand, its
verbal nature is fully borne out by the following principal facts:
(a) like an ordinary verb, it is qualified by adverbs (not adjec-
tives): rò eỶ v (2071). (b) it takes an object and that in the
case required by the other verbal forms: τὸ ἀσκεῖν τὴν ἀρετὴν, τὸ
τοῖς νόμοις πείθεσθαι (ἀσκοῦμεν ΤΗΝ ἀρετήν, πείθονται τοῖς νόμοις);
(c) it shows the nature and voice of the verb: παιδεῦσαι, παιδεύ
σασθαι, παιδευθῆναι. (d) it specializes time: φυγεῖν, φεύγειν,
Tε Evуévα. (c) it can be accompanied by the modal particle av.
gôm
2063. Notwithstanding its convenience, the Greek infinitive,
compared with its two associates- noun and finite verb- from the
outset laboured under several serious disadvantages. In the first
place, as a noun, it lacked nominal inflection, having neither case-
endings nor plural form, and thus appeared abnormal and foreign to the
genius of the Greek language which at no time admitted of a noun
without inflectional properties (App. vi. 2 & 25). Then as a verb, it
was still more indefinite, since it indicated neither number nor
person, often also no precise time. Now when it is remembered that
the cardinal points aimed at in popular discourse are simplicity,
perspicuity, and emphasis, and that, speaking of the Greek language
in particular, these conditions have at all times (A-N) been fulfilled
by means of inflectional properties (endings, prefixes, etc.), it is evi-
dent that the absence of these requisites from the infinitive often
rendered it unfit for the purpose. As a natural consequence, popular
discourse began as early as G times to dispense with the infinitive
and replace it either by equivalent abstract nouns (in -a, -tov, -µós,
-vis, vía, 1021) or finite moods (va with primary subjunctive, ori
with indicative). This process of retreat and substitution, though
slow in its manifestation, advanced steadily and reached its close in
carly B times. All subsequent (M-N) cases of the infinitive, whether
nominal or verbal, savour of scholasticism or literary mannerism.
For fuller particulars see App. vi.
[1] Hdn. in JACramer's An. iii. 279 : τὰ εἰς 1 λήγοντα (ἐπιρρήματα) ὀξύνεται·
ἀμισθί, δευρί. προπερισπῶνται δὲ ταῦτα· αὖθι, ἧχι, ΐφι, τὸ Ναί, χιι (read Αιχί)
¿§úveraι. Et. M. 315, 21; 607, 20.
480
INFINITIVE.
[2064-2069.
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE OF THE INFINITIVE.
2064. I. The subject of the infinitive, when different from
the subject of the leading verb, stands in the accusative; so too
its predicate, if any. (Cp. 1160 f.)
Xen. Mem. I, 1, 19 Σωκράτης ἡγεῖτο θεοὺς πάντα εἰδέναι. An. I, 3, 6
νομίζω YMᾶς ἐμοὶ εἶναι καὶ πατρίδα καὶ φίλους καὶ εγμάχους.
So too in P-B compositions.-For M-N speech see 2063 & App. vi.
2065. 2. The subject of the infinitive, when it is identical
with that of the leading verb, is omitted (cp. 1164). In that
case its predicative or attributive adjuncts, if any, stand in the
case of the leading subject.
Th. 3, 74 ἡ πόλις ἐκινδύνευσε πλέα διαφθαρήναι. Xen. An. 1, 3, 10
ἀδικεῖσθαι νομίζει. 4, 4, 17 ερωτώμενος ποδαπός εἴη, Πέρει ἔφη εἶναι.
Th. 2, 65, 1ο ὠρέγοντο τοῦ πρῶτος ἕκαστος γίγνεσθαι. 1, 34, Ι οὐκ ἐπὶ τῷ
δοῦλοι εἶναι ἐκπέμπονται ἄποικοι. Pl. Apol. 41 Α ἀπαλλαγεὶς τῶν φασκόν-
των Δικαστών εἶναι.
So too in P-B compositions.--For M-N specch see 2063 & App. vi.
2066. 3. But when special emphasis is laid on the subject of
the infinitive, then, notwithstanding its identity with the sub-
ject of the leading verb, it is expressed separately by means of
a personal or reflexive pronoun put either in the accusative or
in the nominative (ep. 1163):
Soph. Εl. 471 δοκῶ Με πεῖραν τήνδε τολμήσειν ἔτι. Pl. Hipp. maj. 282
Ε οἶμαι ἐμὲ πλείω χρήματα εἰργάσθαι ἢ ἄλλους σύνδυο. Symp. 175 Ε.
Xen. Λn. 8, 1, 30. Fur. Alc. 641. Dem. 9, 74 εἰ δ᾽ οἴεσθε Χαλκιδέας τὴν
Ελλάδα σώσειν ἢ Μεγαρέας, Υμεῖς δ᾽ ἀποδράσεσθαι τὰ πράγματα, οὐκ ὀρθῶς
οἴεσθε.
2067. This is still commoner in P-B diction, even where there lies
no perceptible emphasis: NT Rom. 2, 19 πέποιθας ΣΕΑΥΤὸν ὁδηγὸν εἶναι
τυφλών. Luke 20, 20 ὑποκρινομένους ἑαγτους δικαίους εἶναι. Acts 25, 21
τοῦ δὲ Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αυτόν
ἕως οὗ ἀναπέμψω αὐτὸν πρὸς Καίσαρα. (Cp. 1399.)
2088. Particularly striking is here (in P-B Greek) the vory frequent
use of the articular infinitive with a redundant subject in cases where 4
would have proforred the adverbial or circumstantial participle (2102.
2164 1.), us : Μatt. 26, 32 & Mark 14, 28 μετὰ τὸ ἐγερθῆναι Με (for 4 ἐγερθεὶς)
προάξω ὑμᾶς. Luke ro, 35 ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ ἐπανέρχεσθαί Με (for A επανερχόμενος)
ἀποδώσω σοι. 22, 15. John 2, 24. Hebr. 7, 24. 2 Cor. 2, 13.
2069. 4. When the subject of the infinitive is identical with
some oblique case in the loading clause, it is omitted, while
its predicative or attributive adjuncts, if any, are either attracted
by that oblique case, or put in the accusative.
Xen. Hell. I, 5, 2 Κύρου ἐδέοντο ὡς προθγμοτάτοι γενέσθαι. Dem. 3, 23
ἔξεστιν ΥΜΙ͂Ν ΕΥΔαίμοσι γενέσθαι. Xen. An. I, 2, 1 Κῦρος παραγγέλλει τῷ
Κλεάρχῳ λαβόντι ἥκειν ὅσον ἦν αὐτῷ στράτευμα καὶ Ξενίᾳ τῷ ᾿Αρκάδι ἥκειν
παραγγέλλει λαβόντα τοὺς ἄλλους. 3, 1, 5 ὁ Σωκράτης συμβουλεύει τῷ
Ξενοφώντι ἐλθόντα εἰς Δελφοὺς ἀνακοινῶσαι τῷ θεῷ περὶ τῆς πορείας.
So too in P-B compositions, as : NT Acts 25, 27 ἄλογον γάρ μοι δοκεῖ
ΠέΜΠΟΝΤΑ . . . σημᾶναι. Hebr. 2, 1ο ἔπρεπεν αὐτῷ πολλοὺς υἱοὺς εἰς δόξαν
481
I i
2069-2074.]
INFINITIVE, ARTICULAR.
åsasónta
ἀγαγόντα τὸν ἀρχηγὸν . . . τελειῶσαι. Acts 15, 25 ἔδοξεν ἡμῖν . . . ἐκλεξαμένοις.
hmîn
méμpai. So also 11, 12. 27, 3. 26, 20; 21.
2070. 5. The subject of the infinitive, when it is indefinite
or general (Tɩá, tivás, åvěpáπovs, 'some one,' 'people'), is com-
monly omitted (1165), while its predicative or attributive
adjuncts, if any, are put in the accusative.
Men. 118 δίκαιον εὖ πράττοντα μεμνῆσθαι θεοῦ. Isocr. 2, 15 φιλάνθρωπον
εἶναι δεῖ καὶ φιλόπολιν.
2070b. So too in P-B compositions, but the omission of the subject is
far less common.
I. SUBSTANTIVAL OR ARTICULAR INFINITIVE.
2071. 1. Preceded by the article, the infinitive assumes the
character of a substantive without, however, forfeiting its verbal
nature and function (2062) ♫¹.
[1]
2072. Owing to the absence of the article in carly (Homeric)
Greek, the articular infinitive makes its appearance first in Theognis
(256 Tò Tuxeiv), Simonides (95, I rò kaλws Ovýoke) and Pindar, but
its complete development is manifested in A. Here while fully pre-
serving its verbal nature and function, it at the same time holds the
room of an abstract substantive and stands in all the cases of the
singular, with or without prepositions. From A it passes to P with a
steadily increasing popularity and extension of usage. For while in
A its verbal character prevailed over the substantival, in G-T the
latter function comes to greater prominence. With the opening of
Bit had become almost an ordinary abstract noun, but lacking the
inflectional properties of a noun (2063), could no longer hold its
own against it and so became extinct. N therefore preserves_no
sure trace of the articular infinitive, its place having been taken
either by its analysis (rò và for actions referring to the future and
conditional present, and rò őr or rather rò Ts for actions referring
to the past and actual present 1222 ), or by abstract substantives,
especially neuters in -μa and -μo" (1021). For fuller particulars see
App. vi. 20 ff., 25.
2073. 2. The substantival infinitive stands usually in the present or
aorist, uncommonly in the future (chiefly after eλnis, vnóoxeois and
the like, 2086"), rarely in the perfect.
2074. 3. The article is admissible before the infinitive when
the latter acts as subject or direct object; it is indispensable
[] The articlo might tako a demonstrativo besides, as in Ar. Vosp. 89) ẻ pậ
TE τούτου τοῦ σπουδάζειν, but in classic Greek thoro is no parallel for certain
Soo my
Latin constructions, such as are usually sot down as Hellenisms.
romarks on Persius 1, 9). In such Creek as that of Ignatius, we are not
surprised to find (Ep. ud Eph. 3) тd ádiáкρITOVÝμ Šv. 11 τὸ ἀληθινὸν ζῆν.
nd Magn. 1 τοῦ διὰ παντὸς ἡμῶν ζῆν. 5 τὸ ζῆν αὐτοῦ, -ull vulgarisms or Lutinisms.
BLGildersloovo in Trans. Amor. Phil. Soc. 1878, p. 7.
[4] Compuro Apophth. 120 Β τρεῖς λογισμοὶ ὀχλοῦσι με· ἢ τὸ πλάζεσθαι ἐν
ταῖς ἐρήμοις, ἢ ἵνα ἀπέλθω ἐπὶ ξένης . . ἢ ἵνα ἐγκλείσω ἑαυτὸν εἰς κελλίον. IStaph.
p. 25, 2 ἀπήγαιναν οἱ τρεῖς καλοὶ ἀδελφοὶ εἰς τὸ ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν διὰ τὸ ἵνα εὕρωσι
βότανα. ib. 9 ὑπάγομεν εἰς τὸ ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν διὰ τὸ ἵνα εὕρωμεν βότανα.
426 περὶ νὰ μηδὲν πέφτουν τὰ μαλλία. 430 περὶ νὰ μηδὲν πέεογν τρίχες.
482
INFINITIVE, ARTICULAR.
[2074-2077.
when the latter stands in the genitive or dative, or when it
depends on a preposition.
Men. 724 τὸ πολλὰ τολμᾶν πόλλ᾽ ἁμαρτάνειν ποιεῖ. Pl. Gorg. 476 D
τὸ δίκην διδόναι πότερον πάσχειν τί ἐστιν ἢ ποιεῖν ; Men. 387 νέοις τὸ σιγᾶν
κρεῖττον ἐστὶ τοῦ λαλεῖν. 381 νίκησον ὀργὴν τῷ λογίζεσθαι καλώς. Xen.
Mem. 2, I, 15 διὰ τὸ ξένος εἶναι οὐκ ἂν οἴει ἀδικηθῆναι ; Dem. 3, 3 ἐκ τοῦ
πρὸς χάριν δημηγορεῖν. Xen. Mem. 4, 8, 2 ἐθαυμάζετο ἐπὶ τῷ εὐθύμως ζῆν.
Cyr. 1, 3, 1 πάντων διαφέρων ἐφαίνετο καὶ εἰς τὸ ταχὺ μανθάνειν ἃ δέοι καὶ
εἰς τὸ καλῶς ἕκαστα ποιεῖν.
So too in P-B compositions. App. vi. 21 ff.
2075. 4. Like any ordinary noun, the substantival infinitive
may stand in any case of the singular :
Nominative. Soph. Ant. 1347 το φρονεῖν εὐδαιμονίας πρῶτον ὑπάρχει.
Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 42 οὔτοι ἡδύ ἐστι τὸ ἔχειν χρήματα οὕτως ὡς ἀνιαρὸν
τὸ ἀποβάλλειν. 5, 4, 19. 7, 5, 8. 7, 5, 76. Pl. Gorg. 497 A.
Accusative. Pl. Gorg. 522 Ε αὐτὸ τὸ ἀποθνῄσκειν οὐδεὶς φοβεῖται. Apol.
28 D δείσας τὸ ζῆν. Soph. 247 c αἰσχύνονται τὸ τολμαν. Χen. Cyr. 1, 4,
21. Pl. Gorg. 512 E.
Ε
Genitive. Th. 7, 84 τον πιεῖν ἐπιθυμία. Xen. An. I, 4, 15 ἄρξαντες τοῖ
διαβαίνειν. Pl. Phaed. 117 E ἐπέσχομεν τοῦ δακρύειν. Χen. Cyr. 1, 5, 13.
Dative. Pl. Phaed. 71 c τῷ ζῆν ἐστι τι ἐναντίον, ὥσπερ τῷ ἐγρηγορέναι
τὸ καθεύδειν. Dem. 18, 269. Th. 2, 42. Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 9. Dem. 8, II.
2075. So too in P-B Greek, but the prepositional usage is by far
commoner, in that it very often (especially in historical narration)
takes also the place of the now retreating circumstantial participle
(1561. 16ο1. 2068. 2141 °), as : ἐν τῷ καθεύδειν, εἰς τὸ λαλῆσαι, εἰς τὸ εἶναι,
εἰς τὸ παρακαλέσαι, διὰ τὸ ἔχειν, ἀντὶ τοῦ λέγειν, πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι, μετὰ τὸ
ἐγερθῆναι, ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, ἕως τοῦ ἐλθεῖν, etc.-Peculiarly common are the
combinations ἐν τῷ (λέγειν = λέγων), μετὰ τὸ ἰδεῖν=ἰδών), and above all
εἰς τὸ (ἐσθίειν, ἰδεῖν = ἐδόμενος, ὀψόμενος οι ἵνα φάγῃ, ἴδῃ). App. vi. 20-28.
2076. Rarely the substantival infinitive without a preposition
stands independently to denote the purpose (App. vi. 23 b): Th. 1, 4
τοῦ τὰς προσόδους μᾶλλον ἰέναι αὐτῷ. 2, 22, 2. Dem. 18, 107 τοῦ μὴ τὰ
δίκαια ποιεῖν. Pl. Gorg. 457 Ε πρὸς τὸ πρᾶγμα φιλονικοῦντα λέγειν τον
καταφανὲς γενέσθαι. See also App. vi. 23 1.
2077. In the course of P, however, this usage met with a wider
popularity, notably in G-T diction, and furthermore extended beyond
its 4 scope (influence of Latin ut ?). In fact, τοῦ with infinitive in
P-B very often assumes the work not only of all final and other pro-
spective infinitives or their corresponding final participles, but even
that of finite clauses. (1337. App. vi. 23 ff.)
Polyb. 1, 12, 6 ἀναδραμόντες ἔτι τοῖς χρόνοις τον μηδὲν ἀπόρημα καταλιπεῖν.
2, 55, 4 παρ' ὀλίγον ἦλθε τοῦ μὴ μόνον ἐκπεσεῖν ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς ὅλοις κινδυνεῦσαι.
(ep. 1, 43, 7)-Sopt. Gen. 18, η ετάχυνε τον ποιῆσαι αὐτό. Ps. 39, 13 οὐκ
ἠδυνάσθην τον βλέπειν. 118, 57 εἶπα τον φυλάξασθαι τὸν νόμον σου. ΝΤ
Matt. 2, 13 μέλλει γὰρ Ἡρῴδης ζητεῖν τὸ παιδίον τοῦ ἀπολέσαι αὐτό. Diod.
17, 42, 4 παρ' ὀλίγον ἦλθον τοῦ πάντες ἀπολέσθαι. Gr. Urk. Borlin 164
(|ΙΙ-ΙΙ), 24 παρακαλῶ ἤδη ποτὲ πεῖσαι αὐτὸν τοῦ ἐλθεῖν. Acta Petri et
Pauli 179, 4 αιτησάμενος Καίσαρα τοῦ ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς. 183, Ι ἐφύλαττον το
πιάσαι καὶ ἀποκτεῖναι αὐτόν. Leont. Noap. V. I. 11, 20 σπεύδομεν τον γενέσθαι.
Mal. 449, 11 κελεύσας τον δοθῆναι. Theoph. 43, 16 προετρέψατο αὐτὸν καὶ τοῖ
483
I i 2
2077-2082.]
INFINITIVE, ANARTHROUS.
γενέσθαι σύνοδον. Porph. Adm. 132, 6 δέδοικα τοῦ μὴ παρ᾽ ἡμῶν κατάδηλον
γενέσθαι. 268, 14 παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν πολλὰ τοῦ ἡσυχάσαι καὶ παραχωρῆσαι.
20776. For further particulars see App. vi. 20–28.
II. VERBAL OR ANARTHROUS INFINITIVE.
Historical Survey.
2078. The P-B history of the verbal or anarthrous infinitive
shows various stages and vicissitudes which can be best compre-
hended when we look into its relation to the governing verb or word.
In so doing we find that all verbs and other words requiring an
infinitival complement may be divided into two classes, one consisting
of the small group leading the indirect discourse (2027 fl.), and
the other comprising all the rest. Either class, instead of the infini-
tive, admits, under certain conditions, also its analysis to a dependent
clause, but in the former class the analysis is a declarative clause
introduced by őrɩ (ws), while in the latter the analysis is a prospective
clause, that is a more or less final clause introduced by iva (öπws). In
other words, the infinitive is in the former case declarative, in the
latter prospective (or final). This broad division, though chiefly
deduced from the P history of the infinitive, holds good also for the
classical period of the language (2079. 2089. App. vi. 2-6; cp. also
the A construction of λέγω, εἶπον, φημί, νομίζω, ὑπολαμβάνω-ἀξιῶ,
déoµai, teipŵµui, etc. in the lexica; see further SBrief iii. 8-30).
2079. The start towards the analysis and subsequent retreat of
the infinitive was made by verba declarandi, followed by verba sentiendi,
that is by that class of verbs which in A could exchange their infinitive
for a declarative clause with örɩ or ås (1938 ff. 2027 ff.). A little later,
if not at the same time, the other class forming the large majority
followed, beginning with those cases where the infinitive could
be resolved into a final clause with va or oпws (2094 ff.). Next
in order came the loose infinitive (2098 f.), then the objective
infinitive (2085 fl.), then that depending on nouns denoting an
ability (2090 ff.), and lastly the infinitive depending on impersonal
and sundry other incomplete verbs (2081ff. 2088).
2080. The verbal infinitive may be the subject, the object,
or some othor complement of a verb or other word.
2081. I. As subject, the verbal infinitive of any tense excepting
that of the perfect, is required by impersonal verbs and expres-
sions : δεῖ, χρή, πρέπει, δοκεῖ, ἔξεστι, οἷον τέ ἐστι, προσήκει, συμβαίνει,
διαφέρει, μέλει,πἄξιον, δίκαιον, δυνατόν, καλόν ἐστι—ὥρα, καιρός, νόμος,
Oos éσTív, and the like.
Men. 96 γράμματα Μαθεῖν δεῖ καὶ μαθόντα νοῦν ἔχειν. Ρl. Apol. 42 A
ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἤδη ώρα απιέναι. Xen. An. 3, 4, 39 EZECTI ApÂN. 2, 1, 2
ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς προϊέναι.
2082. So too in P-B Greek, both literary and colloquial. This
usage of the infinitive seems to have proved the most popular and
484
|
|
INFINITIVE, ANARTHROUS.
[2082-2086.
so lasted the longest in the P history of the infinitive. (2079. App.
vi. 15.) However, from G onwards the analysis of the infinitive by iva is
also admissible. This is the case, for instance, after δεῖ, ἀρκεῖ, ἀρέσκει,
στοιχεῖται ‘it is stipulated, δίκαιον, καλόν, κακόν, ἀρκετόν ἐστιν—ὥρα,
καιρός, δέον, συνήθειά ἐστιν, καλῶς ἔχει, and the like. See App. vi. 16.
"
2082. In G-B times when the infinitivo began to rotreat from the
living language, we sometimes meet, even in Atticistic compositions, the
perfect infinitive misused for the aorist or present infinitive after im-
porsonal expressions, as: Ael. Ν. Λ. 80. 5 ἐξὸν ἀπηλλάχθαι. 114, 4 αποχρή
οἱ ταῦτα πεφροντικέναι. Julian adv. Christ. 224, 6 (CJNeumann) χρὴ πεπι-
στευκέναι (ep. WSchmid iii. 74). Cp. 2073.
2083. The impersonal construction of the above verbs and
expressions (2081) is frequently turned to a personal, especially
in the case of δοκεῖ, ἔοικε, δεῖ ‘it lacks (1902), συμβαίνει, δίκαιον,
ἀναγκαῖον, ἐπιτήδειόν ἐστι, and the like ; also in that of λέγεται ' it is
said, and other passive verbs of saying and thinking : δοκῶ or (δοκῶ
x δοκεῖ μοι δοκῶ μοι [whence even φαίνομαι μοι, as Pl. Crat. 399 Α]
'I seem, ἄξιος, δυνατός, δίκαιος, ἐπιτήδειος, ἱκανός, αμήχανός είμι.
Xen. An. I, 3, 12 ΔΟΚΟΥ͂ΜΕΝ. καθήσθαι. Pl. Apol. 30 D πολλοῦ λέω ὑπὲρ
ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογεῖσθαι. Prot. 339 Ε Δίκαιος εἶ Βοηθεῖν τῷ ἀνδρί. Χen. Cyr.
5, 3, 30 ὁ Ασσύριος εἰς τὴν χώραν ἐμβαλεῖν ἀγγέλλεται. Pl. Phaedr. 230 E
ἐγώ μοι δοκῶ κατακείσεσθαι. Crat. 400 E, 399 Α.
,
2084. This substantially applies also to P-B Atticizing com-
positions, but popular speech gives unqualified preference to the
impersonal construction (2124). This is invariably the case in N, if
we discard such solitary combinations as άξιος (καλός) εἶνε νά το πιστέψῃ
'I shouldn't be surprised if he believed it,' which belong to 2090.
2085. II. As object, the verbal infinitive stands—
1. With verbs of saying and thinking (verba declarandi et sen-
ticndi), where the infinitive is declarative and can be resolved
by ὅτι into a declarative clause (2078 f. App. vi. 6 f.). Such
verbs are―
λέγειν, εἰπεῖν, φάναι. ὑπισχνεῖσθαι, ὑποδέχεσθαι, ὑφίστασθαι, ἐπαγγέλ
λεσθαι. ὀμνύναι, ἀπειλεῖν, προσποιεῖσθαι-οἴεσθαι, νομίζειν, ἡγεῖσθαι, δοκεῖν,
ἐλπίζειν, πιστεύειν, απιστεῖν.—εἰκάζειν, συμβάλλεσθαι, ὑποπτεύειν, ὑπο-
λαμβάνειν. - φαίνεται, δοκεῖ. δῆλον, σαφές ἐστιν ' it appears.
Gnom. ὅ,τι ἂν ποιῇς Νόμιζ᾽ ὁρᾶν θεόν. Pl. Crat. 386A Πρωταγόρας
ἔλεγες πάντων χρημάτων μέτρον εἶναι ἄνθρωπον. Xen. An. 5, 1, 8 ΑΤΟΜΑΙ
βέλτιστον εἶΝΑΙ. 1, 3, 18 ΦΗΜὶ ταῦτα φλυαρίας εἶναι. Dem. 39, 40 όμω
Μόκατε ΔικάσεIN. Isocr. 3, 26 λέγεται καὶ τοὺς θεοὺς ὑπὸ τοῦ Διὸς BACI-
λεγεσθαι. Χen. Αn. 4, 6, 18 ἐλπίζω οὐδὲ τοὺς πολεμίους ΜΕΝΕΙΝ.
2086. Instead of this infinitive, A admitted also its analysis by ὅτι
or ås (2079. 2136). In the course of H-G this alternative gained
decided ascendency, and before the close of G it had established
itself in common discourse as the normal mode of expression, that
is in the form of either the oratio obliqua or the oratio recta (2027 ff.
App. vi. 7). With the opening of r this analysis by ὅτι - now also ly
πώς (1754 f. Αpp. vi. 13)-met with the widest popularity and soon
led to the total disappearance of the declarative infinitive.
485
2086b-2087.]
ANARTHROUS.
INFINITIVE,
2086b. A class of verbs and nouns, which in themselves
contain a prospective notion or border on futurity, take as
complement the future infinitive in the form of either the effec-
tive future or of the present acting as a durative future (1896.
1836. App. iv. 2 & 4). Such verbs and nouns are in particular
those denoting a--
Design, as: μέλλω (1893), ἐ]θέλω, βούλομαι, ἐφίεμαι, διανοέομαι, παρα-
σκευάζομαι, and the like ;
Expectation, as: ἐλπίζω, προσδοκάω, ἐπίδοξός εἰμι, δι᾿ ἐλπίδος ἔχω, ἐν
ἐλπίδι εἰμί,—οἶμαι οι οἴομαι, νομίζω, ὑπολαμβάνω,—ἐλπίς οι προσδοκία
ἐστίν, and the like ;
Promising, as : ὑπισχνέομαι, ἐπαγγέλλομαι, φημί, λέγω, ὁμολογέω, συντί-
θημι, ἐγγνῶμαι, and the like ;
Swearing and Threatening, as: ὄμνυμι, ὅρκον ποιοῦμαι, etc.—ἀπειλέω.
Th. 4, 71 ἤλπιζον γὰρ μάχην ἔσεσθαι. 7, 46 ἐν ἐλπίδι ὢν τὰ τείχη αἱρήσειν.
Pl. Rep. 573 ο ἐλπίζει δυνατὸς εἶναι ἄρχειν. Xon. An. 3, 1, 14 τὸν στρατηγὸν
προσδοκῶ ταῦτα πράξεις. Cyr. 6, 1, 21 ἐκ τούτου ὑπέσχετο μηχανὴν παρέξειν.
Pl. Rep. 427 Ε. Symp. 174 A ὡμολόγησα εἰς τήμερον παρέσεσθαι. Phaedr.
254 B. Antiph. 6, 23. Andoe. I, 62. Pl. Crit. 52 ο ώμολόγεις καθ' ἡμᾶς
πολιτεύεσθαι. ib. D ἡμῖν ξυνέθου πολιτεύεσθαι. Xen. An. 7, 4, 13 ήγγυάτο
μηδὲν αὐτοὺς κακόν πείσεσθαι. Hell. 5, 3, 26 ομόσαντες ταύταις ἐΜΜΕΝΕΪΝ.
2, 4, 30. Λη. 2, 3, 27 ομόσαι ἢ μὴν πορεύειθαι. 4, 5, 15.
2086º. The future infinitive with the above verbs and nouns is not
rarely replaced by its cognate aorist infinitive, especially when the
impending action is viewed with less confidence, as one that will
merely take place. But while this seems to constitute a special case
in A, in P-B diction it becomes the general rule owing to the gradual
retreat of the futuro proper (App. iv).
Eur. Η. Γ. ἤλπισεν παθεῖν. Th. 4, 24. Dem. 4, 2 οὐδ' ἂν ἐλπὶς ἦν αὐτὰ
βελτίω Γενέσθαι. Lys. 19, 8 ἐλπὶς ἦν ὑπὸ τοῦ πάππου ἐκτραφΗΝΑΙ. Isae. II,
22 προσδοκῶν ῥᾳδίως ἡμᾶς ἐξαπατήσαι. Xon. Λn. 2, 3, 2ο ὑπέσχετό μοι Βογλεγ
cachat. I, 2, 2. Hell. 5, 4, 7 ἠπείλησεν ἀποκτεῖναι ἅπαντας τοὺς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ.
Polyb. 1, 23, 9 ήλπιζον ποιήσασθαι τὰς ἐμβολάς. 2, 37, 2 ἐπηγγειλάμεθα ποιή-
cacθαι τὴν ἀρχήν. 3, 15, 3. 3, 61, 5. 5, 29, 2. 2, 64, 5. 3, 17, 7. 4, 10, 8.
2, 65, 7, etc. 6, 22, 6 ώμοσαν αθροισθήναι. 3, 17, 5 τὴν ἐλπίδα του εγετή-
εαεθαι τὸν πόλεμον. Sept. Gen. 27, 42 ἀπειλεῖ σοι τοῦ ἀποκτείναι. CIA iii.
1350, 4 ἤλπιζα Γενέσθαι. Clem. R. ad Cor. 55, 6 τὸ μέλλον ἀπολέσθαι. Polyc.
ad Phil. 5, 2 ὑπέσχετο ἡμῖν ἐρεῖραι ἡμᾶς. Barn. I, 3 ἐλπίζων cωθῆναι. 14, 1
ὤμοσεν ΔΟΥ͂ΝΑΙ. Hermas Sim. 8, 9, 4 μὴ ἐλπίζοντες σωθῆναι. Ignat. ad Eph.
1, 2 ἐλπίζοντα ἐπιτυχείν. Callin. 123, 14 ἐλπίζομεν ἔλεος εὑρεῖν. 81, 12
στρατηλάτης ἔμελλε γενέσθαι. 129, 9 ὑποσχόμενος ἀποτάξασθαι. [For 74, 32
σύ μοι λέγεις ὡς εἰς ? 1552) ἕνα ἁμαρτωλὸν ἔcecθαι, soo App. iv. 10.] CGL
234, 25 ἐλπίζω ἰδεῖν. Mart. Petri 98, ο ὑπέσχου ΔΟΥ͂ΝΑΙ. Acta Pauli ot
Thocle 243, II ὑπισχνοῦμαι ΔΟΥΝΑΙ
Ι
20864. The infinitivo depending on the abovo torns (2086) is resolved
in N by πŵs 0à (= A őrı + fut.) or by và (=Alva), according as the emphasis
of the clause lies on the infinitive or on the governing word. Only after
verbs donating a dosign (μέλλω, θέλω, βούλομαι), the infinitive in N is
rogularly rosolved by vá.
2087. 2. With verbs denoting the expression of will (verba
voluntatis et studii, i. o. wish, intention, command, persuasion,
compulsion, causing, etc. —heed, refusal, prohibition, hindrance, etc.
486
INFINITIVE, ANARTHROUS.
[2087-2091.
βούλομαι ἐθέλω, μέλλω. ἐπιθυμῶ, αἱροῦμαι, δέομαι, ἀξιῶ, δικαιῶ.
πείθω, ἀναγκάζω. κελεύω, λέγω, εἶπον (' order '), παραγγέλλω,
ἐπιτάσσω, προστάσσω, ἐντέλλομαι—ἐποτρύνω, παροξύνω, ἐξορμῶ.
ὁμολογῶ, συγχωρῶ, ἐπιτρέπω-ποιῶ, διαπράττομαι ( cause to '), etc.
αἰσχύνομαι, αἰδοῦμαι (' hesitate, 1961) φεύγω, ἀπαρνοῦμαι-ἀπαγορεύω,
ἀπεῖπον, κωλύω, είργω, etc.
Men. 285 καλῶς ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ πλογτεῖν θέλε. Xen. Mem. I, 2, 23
αἱ ἡδοναὶ πείθογει τὴν ψυχὴν μὴ σωφρονεΐν. Pl. Crat. 407 D ἐγὼ δέδοικα
περὶ θεῶν διαλέγεσθαι. Men. 727 τὴν τῶν κρατούντων κάθε φέρειν
ἐξουσίαν.
2088. So too in P-B compositions, but in G-B popular speech the
infinitive is either replaced by the imperative or subjunctive in para-
tactic construction (1702. 1930, 1939. 2031-2. 2086), or more com-
monly, it is resolved by ἵνα (ὅπως, ὡς, ὥστε)-later by νὰ (1766)-and
these imperatival and subjunctival substitutes gradually succeeded in
altogether dislodging the infinitive (App. vi. 15-19). On the whole,
however, a few verbs of this class, such as βούλομαι, θέλω (μέλλω,
ὀφείλω) seem to have retained their infinitival construction to the
last (2079. App. vi. 15).
2089. The reason why the objective infinitive should be resolved
in case of 2086 by őrt, and in case of 2088 by iva, becomes obvious
when it is borne in mind that, should it be replaced by an inde-
pendent clause, it would become in the former case indicative, thus
requiring chiefly où for its negative, while in the latter case it would
become imperative rquiring μ for its negative.
2090. III. As a complement, the verbal infinitive (mostly in
the active voice) stands with verbs, adjectives, and other expres-
sions incomplete in themselves, and implying power or ability,
fitness, condition, and their opposites. Such are, e.g.
α. Verbs: δύναμαι, ἐπίσταμαι, ἔχω, οἷος τ᾽ εἰμί
πέφυκα, μανθάνω, etc.
T
b. Adjectives, etc. : δυνατός, ἱκανός, ἐπιτήδειος, δεινός
χαλεπός, ῥᾴδιος, ἡδύς—ἄξιος, καλός, etc.
οἷος, ὅσος—ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε ' on condition that.'
Pl. Symp. 201 C σοὶ οὐκ ἂν ΔΥΝΑΙΜΗΝ ἀντιλέγειν. Xen. An. 2, 2, ΙΙ ἐκ
II
τῆς χώρας οὐδὲν εἴΧΟΜΕΝ λαμβάνειν. Cyr. I, 3, 18 δεινότερος διδάσκειν.
Th. 2, 6ο οὐδενὸς ἥCCON ΓΝΩ͂ΝΑΙ τε τὰ δέοντα καὶ ἑΡΜΗΝΕΥ͂αι ταῦτα. Isocr.
16, 11 καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους διδάσκειν τέχνην ἔχOYCIN. Th. 4, 61 πέφγκε τὸ
ἔχυγειν.
ἀνθρώπειον διὰ παντὸς ἄρχειν μὲν τοῦ εἴκοντος, φυλάσσεσθαι δὲ τὸ ἐπιόν.
Eur. I. T. 1032 Δειναὶ γὰρ αἱ γυναῖκες εὑρίσκειν τέχνας. Pl. Rep. 415 Ε
τοιαύτας οἵας χειμώνος τε στέγειν καὶ θέρους ἱκανὰς εἶναι. Χen. Αn. 2, 3, 13
οὐ γὰρ ἦν ὥρα ολα ἄρδειν τὸ πεδίον. Hell. 2, 3, 11 αἱρεθέντες ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε
ΣΥΓΓράψαι νόμους. An. 4, 4, 6 σπείσασθαι ἐφ᾽ ᾧ μήτε αὐτὸς τοὺς Ἕλληνας
ἀδικεῖν μήτε ἐκείνους καίειν τὰς οἰκίας, λαμβάνειν τε τὰ ἐπιτήδεια.
2000. So too: (1) Θαῦμα ὁρᾶν, ἰδεῖν, ἀκοῦσαι.-(2) For πρίν see
2002-9.-(3) For ὥστε 1949-50.
2001. Of the above terns (δύναμαι, since Η δύνομαι), and δυνατός, ἱκανός,
etc. είμι, also εὐπορῶ 'um ablo, preserved their infinitival construction to
the lust (2088. App. vi. 15), but all the rest began since II first to place
εἰς τὸ before the infinitive (NT Jas. 1, 19 ταχὺς εἰς τὸ ἀκοῦσαι, βραδύς
εἰς τὸ λαλήσαι), then to follow the then preponderating analysis by
487
2091-2097.]
INFINITIVE, ANARTHROUS.
ἵνα (ὅπως, ὡς, ὥστε), and this alternative gradually obliterated and
finally (during B) ousted the infinitive. See App. vi. 15-17.
2092. On the other hand, the infinitival construction of exo, owing
to its substitution, since G, for the future and the potential indicative
(1894. App. iv. 6-7), gains a wider popularity among all classes of
G-B scribes: exw eineîv for èpw, eixov (ùv) elñeiv for éλeyov äv, eînov äv.
For further particulars on this point see App. iv. 6–7.
2093. Contrary to A usage, G-B diction conceives ouк éxw, ảñoрâ,
σκοπῶ and the like as negative terms of δύναμαι, ἔχω, εὐπορῶ, etc.,
and thus constructs them with the infinitive, not with the subjunc-
tive (2020 ff.), as: Josephi Narr. 2, 2 oỶk eiɣon tò tŵs tò đáoxa moiĤcai.
Apophth. 92 D MH EXON ödev ȧropácal. More examples in App. vi. 17, c.
2094. As an indirect object and in a purely final sense (in
order to, with a view to) the verbal infinitive stands with verbs
of giving, receiving, leaving, permitting, choosing, appointing, and
the like. Such are, e.g.
δίδωμι, ἐπιτρέπω, παρέχω-λαμβάνω, δέχομαι-καταλείπω
αἱροῦμαι, καθίστημι, etc.
Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 15 τὴν πόλιν καὶ τὴν ἄκραν φυλάττειν αὐτοῖς παρέδωκαν.
Pl. Apol. 33 Β ὁμοίως καὶ πλουσίῳ καὶ πένητι παρέχω ἐμαυτὸν ἐρωτάν.
Demn. 19, 71 ὃς γὰρ ἂν ὑμᾶς λάθῃ, τοῦτον ἀφίετε τοῖς θεοῖς κολάζειν. Xen.
Hell. 5, 1, 14 ʼn Oúpa ǹ éµǹ ånéwkto eiciénai tw deoµévæ tɩ éµov. Pl. Apol.
28 Ε οἱ ἄρχοντες οὓς ὑμεῖς εἵλεσθε ἄρχειν μου. Th. 2, 12 τοὺς ἱππέας
παρείχοντο Πελοποννησίοις εγcτρατεύειν. Isocr. 7, 37 οἱ πρόγονοι τὴν ἐξ
Αρείου πάγου βουλὴν ἐπέστησαν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τῆς εὐκοσμίας.
2095. Under this class fall verbs of motion (sending, going,
coming), in that they sometimes (oftener in poetry than in prose)
take the infinitive instead of the future participle (2157):
Soph. Ο. C. 12 ΜΑΝΘΑΝΕΙΝ γὰρ ΕΚΟΜΕΝ ξένοι πρὸς ἀστῶν. Th. 6, 50 (οἱ 'Αθη-
vaîoi) déka tŵv veŵv spoýnemyan és tdv péyav diµéva ñdeŶcai.
2095. This construction is very popular with G-B scribos (2097. App.
vi. 17, b).
2096. Besides the above infinitive of purpose (2094-5), ▲ equally
admits of a final clause with iva (öπws). This alternative then, in
the course of P, gained preponderance, and so contributed to the
eventual extinction of the infinitive.
2097. On the other hand, since iva with the primary subjunctive
had established itself, during G, as the almost universal substitute
for every infinitive excepting the declarative, and so had become
a very commonplace expression, a reaction set in among scribes
towards reviving the retreating infinitive. Now as the commonplace
"Iva-clause expressed chiefly purpose, its revived substitute or rather
paraphrase, the infinitive, naturally took the place of purely final
clauses and participles. On the whole, however, this reaction was
artificial, and the revived infinitive was now used promiscuously some-
times even at random, that is to say sometimes simple, sometimes with
&ore, and sometimes with the article; in the last case chiefly in the
genitive or with the preposition eis (2075 ff. App. vi. 15. 21–24).
NT Matt. 25, 35 éawkaté μol paseîn. 27, 34 ¤AWKAN auto mieîn. Mark
5, 43 εἶπεν Δοθῆναι αὐτῇ ΦΑΓΕΙ͂Ν. Μark 7, 4 ἄλλα πολλὰ ἃ παρέλαβον ΚΡΑΤΕΙΝ.
488
INFINITIVE-PARTICIPLE.
[2097-2101.
Rom. II, 8 ἔδωκεν ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ Βλέπειν καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀΚΟΥΕΙΝ. Matt.
2, 2 ἤλθομεν προςKYNical. II, 8 τί ἐξήλθατε ἰδεῖν; Luke 3, 12 ἦλθον δὲ καὶ
τελῶναι βαπτισθήναι. Mark 3, 14 ἵνα ἀποστέλλῃ αὐτοὺς KHpYCCEIN. Matt. 13, 3
ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων τον σπείρειν (ep. Mark 4, 3). Hebr. 10, 7 ἥκω τον ποιήσαι
τὸ θέλημά σου.
Matt. 3, 13 παραγίνεται Του Βαπτισθῆναι ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ. Matt.
20, 19 παραδώσoγειν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εἰς τὸ ἐμπαίζει (ad inludendum). 26, 2
παραδίδεται εἰς το σταυρωθήναι (ut crucifigatur). 27, 1 συμβούλιον ἔλαβον οἱ
ἀρχιερεῖς κατὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὥστε θανατώσει αὐτόν. Theod. ii. 620 Α εἰσηγεῖσθαι
αὐτῷ ὥστε δικάζειν. Acta Tho. 9, 16 κατήλθεν εἰς τὴν πηγὴν ἀντλήσαι ὕδωρ.
15, 6 τὰς θύρας ἔCTHCEN κατὰ τὴν ἀνατολὴν τοῦ ἡλίου βλέπεις πρὸς τὸ φῶς.
37, 23 άπελθε Νίψαι σου τὰς χεῖρας. 39, ΙΙ οὐκ ἐγκατέλιπέ με παραμείναι εἰς
ἐκεῖνον τὸν χῶρον. 51, 34 ὥσπερ γὰρ σὺ ἦλθες εὐαγγελίcacθαι, οὕτως ἀφανίσει
ἦλθον ἐγώ. 22, 25 ἐξῆλθεν ἀπόστολος τοῦ ἀπελθεῖν ὅπου αὐτὸν ὁ κύριος
προσέταξε. Protey. Jacobi 2, 4 κατέβη εἰς τὸν παράδεισον τον περιπατήσει.
Mal. 160, 14 ἀπελθεῖν τον κτίσαι τὴν Ἱερουσαλήμ. 408, 6 ανεχώρηAN ΤΟΥ
εγναθροίζεσθαι. Theoph. 216, 23 παρέδωκεν ἸΟΥΣΤΙΝΙΑΝΟΣ ΤΟΥ ψάλλεθαι
ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις.
2098. IV. In a loose or absolute sense, the infinitive stands,
often with us or with the article ró, thus forming an adverbial
or parenthetical phrase.
ὀλίγου δεῖν, μικροῦ δεῖν (but for a little) almost.
ἑκὼν εἶναι ὁ willingly, τὸ νῦν εἶναι “ for the present, τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον
είναι ' so far as he is concerned.
ὡς (ἔπος) εἰπεῖν ' so to speak, (ὡς) συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, ' to speak briefy.
ὡς συντόμως εἰπεῖν ' to put it shortly, ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν ' as far as I can
judge,' 'as it appears to me.'
Pl. Apol. 17 Α αληθές γε ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν οὐδὲν εἰρήκασιν. Symp. 215 A
ἑκὼν εἶναι οὐδὲν ψεύσομαι. Xen. Hell. 3, 5, 9 τό ἐπ' ἐκείνοις εἶναι ἀπω
λώλειτε.
2009. This loose or parenthetical usage of the infinitive figures
also in P-B compositions, but whether it was familiar to popular
speech as well, is another question. In the NT there is only one
instance: Hebr. 7, 9 is éños eiñeîv.
PARTICIPLE.
2100. The use of the participle in A is a twofold one, viz.
A. Adjectival, in which case it performs the work of an ordi-
nary adjective, and that in the sense of either an attribute,
when the participle is called attributive (as ἡ Μίδου ΚαλογΜέΝΗ
κρήνη 'the so-called Midas spring);- or in the sense of a
predicate predicative participle, as ἐτύγχανον περιπατών
chanced to be walking'). (1159.)
Ι
2101. B. Adverbial, in which case it denotes an attendant
circumstance and performs the work of an ordinary adverb,
thus supplying the answer to an adverbial question when?
why? to what purpose? under what conditions? in what manner?
etc. (2141). Since it expresses then the various circumstances
attending an action, this participle is commonly called cir-
cumstantial.
489
2102-2106.]
PARTICIPLE.
2102. It follows that the adjectival participle is an inseparable
part of the leading clause, while the adverbial participle is essential
only in so far as it qualifies or specifies the conditions under which
something is done or said.
2102". For the use and history of the participle in P-N see 2164 ff.
ADJECTIVAL PARTICIPLE.
I. ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE.
2103. The attributive participle specifies a substantive as
does any attribute: Tóλs oikoYMÉNH 'an inhabited town. It
is preceded by the article (so far as it would not be the indefi-
nite; cp. 1209) and stands for a relative clause, as:
Xen. Mem. 4, 1, 3 ai åplotaι dokoŶcai eivaι þúveis. Men. Mon. 422
ὁ μὴ Δαρείς ἄνθρωπος οὐ παιδεύεται.
2104. For the attributive participle a relative clause is equally
common in both A and P Greek (2010-26), as:
Lys. 24, 6 παῖδες μοι οὔπω εἰσὶν οἵ με θεραπεYCOYCIN (= οἱ θεραπεύσοντές με).
Xon. An. I, 3, 15 τῷ ἀνδρὶ ὃν ἂν ἕληςθε πείσομαι (=τῷ ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν αἱρεθησο
μένω). Lys. 12, 98 οἱ παῖδες ὑμῶν ὅσοι ἐνθάδε CAN (= οἱ ὄντες) ὑπὸ τούτων ἂν
ὑβρίζοντο.
2105. To judge from the literary productions dating prior to M,
the attributive participle was just as common as its analysis by
a relative clause. But whether both expedients were equally popular
with the masses is doubtful considering that with the first appearance
in M of popular compositions the participle had completely retreated
before its analysis by ὅστις οι ὅπου (now που οι όποιος), save in the
case of the perfect in -uévos which still fully survives either as simple
adjective or as a predicate (2110 f.).
II. PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLE.
2106. The predicative participle sorves, like a predicate (1159),
to supplement the notion of certain incomplete or auxiliary
verbs. Such verbs are the following two classes (A & B 2133,
cp. 687).
A. Referring to the subject of the governing verb the
predicative participle (subjective participle) stands with—
,
1. εἰμὶ 'am, γίγνομαι become, rarely ὑπάρχω (2127) Fam,
then διαγίγνομαι, διατελῶ, διάγω ' continue, I am constantly,
also exw have,'-by means of which a compound or emphatic
tense is frequently effected (RKühner ii². 35 f. & 624 f.). This
periphrasis was, from the outset, in many cases dictated by
phonetic considerations (687. 886. 1844. 1848h. 1864 f. 1877 f.
1892 f. 1896. 1898):
Dom. 21, 104 ἐγὼ τὸ πρᾶγμ᾽ εἰμὶ τοῦτο Δεωρακώς (=δέδρακα). 28, 23 οὐ
γὰρ ἦν πρεσβεία πρὸς οὐδένα ἀπεσταλμέΝΗ (=ἀπέσταλτο) τότε τῶν Ἑλλήνων.
Soph. Ο. R. 7or οἷα μοι ΒεΒογλεγκὼς ἔχει. Ο. C. 817 ποίῳ σὺν ἔργῳ τοῦτ᾽
490
PARTICIPLE, PREDICATIVE.
[2106-2108.
Απειλήσας ἔχεις; Phil. 1362 θαγμάcac ἔχω (= τεθαύμακα). Ο. C. 140. Ai. 22
έχει περάνας. Ant. 22 ἀτιμάcac ἔχει. 192 ΚΗΡΥΞΑΣ ἔχω. Phil. 412 ἦΝ ΖΩΝ
(=ἔζη). Ai. 588 μὴ πρόλογο ἡμᾶς ΓΕΝΗ. Ο. Τ. 957 CHMHNAC ΓΕΝΟΥ. Xen.
An. I, 3, 14 πολλὰ χρήματα ἔχομεν ἀΝΗρπακότες. Soph. Phil. 600 ὅν γ᾽ εἶχον
ἤδη ἐκβεβληκότες. Dem. 4, 50 τὰ δέοντα ἐσόμεθα ἐγνωκότες καὶ λόγων
ματαίων ἀπηλλαγμένοι. Xen. An. 7, 7, 27 ἃ νῦν καταστρεψάμενος ἔχεις.
Soph. Ο. Τ. 1146 οὐ σιωπή Ac ἔει; Ο. C. 816 λγηθεὶς ἔσει. Th. 1,38 τοῖς
πλείοσιν ἀρέσκοντές ECMEN. Dem. 3, 36. Xen. Mem. 4, 3, 8 ὅταν αὖ πάλιν
ἀπιών ΓΕΝΗΤΑΙ. Dem. 3, 7 Υπήρχον Ολύνθιοι δύναμίν τινα κεκτημένοι.—Χen.
Men. 4, 8, 4 οὐδὲν ἄλλο ποιῶν ΔιαΓΓΕΝΗΤΑΙ ἢ Διακοπών τά τε δίκαια καὶ
τὰ ἄδικα.
2107. So too in P-T Greek with this difference that the
auxiliary ciui, though it had become far commoner, is now often
replaced by the more regular verbs ὑπάρχω (937), χρηματίζω, εὑρίσκομαι
Gam, μένω remain,' ἔχω ' have been (1834), ποιῶ (= Α διάγω) spend
in' while διαγί(γ)νομαι and διάγω, so far as they still survived, assumed
a different meaning and construction (1845) [1].
Polyb. 7, 9, 5 ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τ᾽ εἶναι σῳζομένους ὑπὸ βασιλέως Φιλίππου. Diod. 14,48
ἡ πόλις ἦν ἐπί τινος νήσου κειμέΝΗ.
บ
contai
NT 2 Cor. 9, 12 ἔτι προσαναπληρofca . . . καὶ περιcce/orca. Mark 4, 38
ĤN KAÐEÝAWN. 10, 32 ĤN прoáгwn. 14, 54 Ĥn cyrkaðHMENOC. 1, 22 ĤN didá-
(Κων. 1, 39 ÂN KHpYCCON. 2, 18 ĀCAN NHCTYONTEC. 9, 4 ĀCAN Ελληλογν
TEC. Luke 1, 22 ΗΝ ΔΙΑΝΕΥΩΝ. 5, 17 ÂCAN ΚΑΘΗΜΕΝΟΙ. 11, 14 ἦν ἐκβάλλων.
23, 8 ἣν θέλων. 1, 20 ÉCH Cιωπών. Acts 2, 2 ĀCAN ΚΑΘΗΜΕΝΟΙ. 8, 28 ΑΝ
ĤN
Υποστρέφων. Phil. 2, 26 ἐπιποθών ΑΝ. Rev. 3, 2 ΓΙΝΟΥ ΓΡΗΓΟΡῶν. John
1, 28 Ν βαπτίζων. Mark I3, 25 CONTαι πίπτοντες καὶ . . . σαλευθήσονται. Matt.
10, 30 ὑμῶν δὲ καὶ αἱ τρίχες τῆς κεφαλῆς πᾶσαι ΑΡΙΘΜΗΜΕΝΑι εἰcin. Luke 12, 6
καὶ ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐκ ἔστιν ἐπιλελημένον ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ. 23,15. 24, 38. Johu
2, 17 ἔCTIN ΓΕΓΡΑΜΜΕΝΟΝ. 30 6, 31 ; 45. 10, 34. 12, 14. 20, 30. 3, 21 ἐν θεῷ
ἐCTIN €ἰpracμένα. so ib. 28. Mark 15, 26 ΗΝ ἡ ἐπιγραφὴ ἐπιγεγραμμέΝΗ. 15, 43
Αν προσδεχόμενος (ep. Luke 23, 51 προσεδέχετο). Luke 5, I ἦν ἑστώς. 5, 17
ACAN ἐληλυθότες. 23, 55 ÂCAN CΥΝΕΛΗΛΥΘΥΔΙ. 4, 16 ΑΝ τεθραμμένος. Also
8, 2. 13, 5. Matt. 16, 19 ἔσται ΔΕΔΕΜΕΝΟΝ, ἔσται λελυμένον. Acts 8, 16
Υπήρχον βεβαπτισμένοι. Matt. 1, 18 εὑρέθη ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχογca. Luke 17, 18.
Acts 21, 13 τί ποιεῖτε κλαίοντες ; Mark r1, 5. So further Mark 6, 52. 14,
40. 15, 46. Luko 26. 4, 17, et passim.
Polyb. 2, 5, 6 ἐν παρωρείαις προσανέχων ΔιαΓε. So 16, 21, I. 4, 46, 3 δῶρα
Διετέλογο διδόντες. Sept. 2 Μacc. 5, 27 τὴν χορτώδη τροφὴν CΙΤΟΥΜΕΝΟΙ Διε
Τέλογκ.
บ
Ant.
Acta Barn. 5 ΜΗΝ ἐγὼ ΔΙΑΚΟΝῶν. Martyr. Polye. 9 ὀγδοήκοντα καὶ ἐξ ἔτη
ἔχω Δογλεγων αὐτῷ. Cyrill. Λ. x. 132 Β ἡμέρας ἔχω τριάκοντα ὁλεγων.
Pallad. 1044 ο σήμερον έχει τρεῖς ἡμέρας μηδενός ΓΕΥΣΜΕΝΗ.
Mon. 1692 κ οὐκ ἔχει τρία ἔτη κακῷ θανάτῳ τὴν ψυχὴν ἀπορρήξας. Chal.
(+451) 1613 D τρεῖς μῆνας ἐποίησε διαγινώσκων μεταξὺ αὐτοῦ καὶ τῶν
κληρικῶν. Test. xii. 1048 A καὶ ἐποίησα μῆνας πέντε ἐργαζόμενος αὐτῷ,
Vita Epiph. 60 13 ΕΜΕΙΝΕΝ δὲ ἀπὸ ὥρας ἕκτης ἕως ὥρας ἐνάτης οὕτως ἀποκράζων.
Apophth. 141 Β ΕΜΕΙΝΑ μέσον δάμνων ετήκων.
2108. The participial construction of the above verbs 2106 f.
receives in P-B this limitation, that when the participle should
[1] At longt in the Sept, διάγω means διακομίζω, whereas in the NT it does
not occur at ull. On tho other hand, διαγίνομαι in the NT means παρέρχομαι,
491
2108-2113.]
PARTICIPLE, PREDICATIVE.
be v, it is generally dropped, and its predicate, if any, then
becomes predicate of the governing verb. This practice how-
ever is occasionally found even in A writers, at least in the
case of διατελῶ (ep. 2116).
>
A
I
Th. 6, 89 Διατελῶ πρόθυμος (sc. ὤν). Polyb. 16, 21, 1 κατὰ τὸ συνεχὲς
ἐν στρατιωτικῷ βίῳ Διεγεγόνει. NT Acts 27, 33 ἄαιτοι Διατελείτε. Matt.
20, 12 μíav &pav ETOIнCAN. So Acts 15, 33. 18, 23. 20, 3. 2 Cor. 11, 25.
μίαν ώραν
Pallad. 111 5 Α τεσσαράκοντα ὀκτὼ ἔτη ἔχω ἐν τῇ κέλλα ταύτῃ. Apophth.
232 Α πόσον χρόνον ἔχει μετὰ σοῦ; 393 Β ἔχω ἕνδεκα μῆνας ἐν τῷ ὄρει
τούτῳ. Vita Epiph. 168 A ἔχω ἐν τῇ ἐπισκοπῇ πεντήκοντα ἔτη παρὰ τρεῖς
μήνας. JMoschos 2992 Λ ἔχει δὲ ἡ χήρα περὶ τὰ ὀγδοήκοντα ἔτη. (Cp. 1834.)
2109. This omission of av was evidently suggested by the precedent of
dropping it evon in A in causal and concessive participlos introduced by
ἅτε, οἷα, ὡς, καίπερ (2152 ; cp. 2143).
2110. When in the course of G-B times the reduplication dropped
off and the simple form of the perfect and pluperfect could no
longer be maintained (736-40), the periphrasis of these tenses, already
fairly familiar even in A (687-90. 764), naturally received an impetus
and eventually, being also influenced by a parallel usage in con-
temporary Latin (and subsequent Romanic), became the absolute
means of forming the passive and neuter perfect, pluperfect, and
future perfect (cp. 2139). Meanwhile the imparisyllabic participles
having also become untenable (338. 2166), there remained only those
ending in -uevos, and it is this class among them, notably that of the
perfect passive -pévos, which still fully survive in N speech and has
even received a considerable extension in the circumstance that
a great number of formerly neuter and intransitive verbs have become
transitive and thus admit of a perfect participle passive (1457-60.
2111. 2139 f.).
>
<
2111. Owing to its groat frequency in N spooch, the prodicative participle
has become so familiar as to assumo in many cases the force of an adjoc-
tive (chiefly of manner), as: λeyáμevos so-called,' xaipáμevos (formerly =
χαίρων, now) one whose wife or husband is living, χαρούμενος = χαίρων
cheerful,' (w) xapiσáμevn [4] ' delightful', noтáuevos lying in bed,' трeµá-
μevos trombling,' μπope(áμevos' possiblo,' 'well-to-do,' rpexáμevos ' running,'
'flowing, тpexoúuevos current,' aproúμevos burning,' 'living,' XperŠíμevos
& XpeιαŠvýµevos' needful,' yeλaÇoúμevos smiling,'' cheerful,' etc. (Cp. 2162.)
2112. A fow specimens have even bocomo substantivos, as : rà vñáрxovra (also in
A-P) property,' rd Врiokоúμevo 'pot-luck,' rà oráµeva (M-N) 'monoy,' now
τὸ στεκάμενο ' estute, μελλούμενα (liko Λ μέλλοντα) ‘future, πετούμενα (= πτηνά)
'birds,' λaλoúpeva 'musical instruments,' yevoúμeva (=yıɣvóµeva) 'occurrencos,'
εἰς τὰ καλὰ καθούμενα ' without any cause, τὸ ποθούμενο desideratum.
เ
>
2113. 2. Οἴχομαι am gone, *τυγχάνω ‘chance, *λανθάνω
'escape notice, *p0ávo overtake,' which in English are usually
rendered by an adverbial expression (as olxouat by 'away,' 'off,'
Xavbávo by 'unobserved,' plávw by 'previously '), while the
participle is turned to a finite vorb, as:
Β 71 ᾤχετ' αποπτάMENOC. Ar. Pl. 933 οίχεται φεύγων ὃν εἶχες μάρτυρα.
[1] From the Eastor hymu Χριστὸς ἀνέστη ἐκ νεκρῶν θανάτῳ θάνατον πατήσας
καὶ τοῖς ἐν τοῖς μνήμασι ζωὴν χαρΣΑΜΕΝΟΣ (996300).
492
PARTICIPLE, PREDICATIVE.
2113-2120.
So frequently oixomai áttión, traéwn, élaýnwn, amoapác.—Pl. Phaed. 72 E
ἡ μάθησις οὐκ ἄλλο τι ἢ ἀνάμνησις ΤΥΓΧΑΝΕΙ oica. Th. 4, 113 ἔΤΥΧΟΝ
ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ ὁπλῖται καθεύδοντες ὡς πεντήκοντα. 2, 2 ἔλαθον ἐσελθόντες.
Pl. Crit. 49 Β ἐλάθομεν ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς παίδων οὐδὲν Διαφέροντες. Th. 3, 112
ἔφθασαν προκαταλαβόντες. Xen. Hell. 7, 2, 14 öπws QUάCEIEN BOHUH-
CONTEC.
2114. So oỷk av plávois be quick in,'' make haste to.' Hdt. 7, 162
ΟΥ̓κ ἂν φθάνοιτε ἀπαλλασσόμενοι. Pl. Symp. 185 η ογκ ἂν φθάνοις λέγων.
2115. Bosides its participial construction, the phrase où plávw is
followed by aì or kai evoús, in the sense of' no sooner. . . than ' (1714. 1793).
Isocr. 4, 86 οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι οὐκ ἔΦΘΗΣΑΝ ΠΥθόμενοι τὸν περὶ τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν
πόλεμον καὶ πάντων τῶν ἄλλων ἀμελήσαντες ἧκον ἡμῖν ἀμυνοῦντες. 8, 97 ΟΥ̓κ
ἔφθασαν τὴν ἀρχὴν κατασχόντες καὶ Θηβαίοις εγθις ἐπεβούλευον. So 19, 22
ΟΥ̓Κ ΕΦΘΗΜΕΝ εἰς Τροιζῆν ἐλθόντες καὶ τοιαύταις νόσοις ἐλήφθημεν.
2116. In the caso of rvyxávw, should its participial complement be av
(from eiµí), it can be dropped (especially in P) and its predicate then, if any,
becomes the prodicate of Tuyxávo (cp. 2108), as: Pl. Prot. 313 E ei øv
ΤΥΓχάνεις ἐπιστήμων τούτων (sc. ὤν). Xen. An. 2, 2, 17 ὡς ἕκαστοι ἐτίΓΧΑΝΟΝ
(sc. ὄντες) ηὐλίζοντο.-Apophth. 141 ο ὅταν ἐν εἰρήνῃ ΤΥΓΧΑΝΗΣ καὶ οὐ πολε-
μῆσαι. Cp. 2119.
2117. So far as they outlived H, the above verbs (2113) exchanged
their participial construction for the prospective infinitive (or its
analysis by iva 2079). Thus
ม
2118. a. Olxopai, though occurring 24 times in the Septuagint, is
troated thero as an equivalent of Tоpevoμai or elμ, in two cases being
followed by the final infinitive (Gen. 31, 19 wɣETU keîpai tà mpúßata. Jor. 48
(41) 12 XONTO TOλemeîn autóv, cp. 2095 f.). On the other hand, it does not
occur any longer in the NT, nor apparently in any other subsequent com-
position of unscholarly character.
น
2119. b. *Tvyxáva, though common in P-B (it occurs 14 times in the
Sept., and 13 in the NT), seems to have lost its participial construction
in early G. In the Septuagint at least, it occurs only once with the
participle (2 Macc. 3, 9 taûтa oűtws exunta tysɣáner, whilo in other con-
temporary and subsequent compositions it is usod also impersonally (it
chances that) and so is rogularly constructed either with the (prospoctivo)
infinitivo (2081) or with its analysis by iva (N vá), as: Paus. 4, 20, 3
ἔτυχεν ΫΕΙΝ τὸν θεόν. Galen. xii. 178 εἰ μαλακόσαρκοι τύχοιεν εἶναι. Clement.
32 Α εἰ δὲ καὶ τύχοι με Nocical. Acta Tho. 2, 1ο ἔτυχεν ἔμπορύν τινα εἶνα
dè
ἐκεῖ. 9. 17 ἔτυχε δὲ ἐκεῖ εἶναι λέοντα. Pallad. 101I DETYXE δέ με ἀπελθόντα
Ocácacoal. So Theophyl. 61, 21; 71, 11. JJejun. 1929 c ei TýX01 (TúX? ?
τύχοι (τύχῃ
1988) ὁ ἐξομολογούμενος ἵνα πρὸ τοῦ ἐξομολογήσασθαι ἀποκύψῃ τὸ ἁμαρτάνειν.
I
2120. c. *Aav@áva preserves its construction in P composition (as Polyb.
13, 1, 1. 9, 35, 10; Plut. Educ. 16 [ii. 12 B]. Symp. 8, 9, 2, 12 [ii. 732 ▲].
Stoic. 19, 4 [ii. 1043 ▲]. Comm. not. 41, 6 [ii. 1081 E]. Adv. Colot. 8, 1
[ii. 1110 E]. Lat. viv. 2, 1 [ii. 1128 0]. 4, 1 [ii. 1129 A]. Dio Chrys. 3. 64;
etc.);--but in Biblical Greok, though not uncommon (8 timos in the Sopt.
and 6 timos in the NT), it is only once constructed with the participle in
Sopt. (Tob. 12, 13 oùí ëλaðéc µe ásatonoiŵn) and once in the NT (Hobr. 13, 2
čλaðón tives ženÍCANTEC). Otherwise in & Bit governs also the infinitive :
Plut. Arist. 17 λέληθε Θεόδωρον εἶναι. Paus. 9, 41, 1 καί σφας λέληθε Θεόδωρον
kai 'Poîkov Zaplovs eînal. Aesop. 46 (ACoraes) ëλAUEN EMITЄceîn.
23 έλαθε
AlappĤžai. (Cp. Pind. P. 5. 30.)
493
2121-2125b.]
PARTICIPLE, PREDICATIVE.
J
2121. α. Φθάνω has remained in common use through all P antiquity,
though chiefly in the sense of arrive, reach (hence also pass. φθάνομαι ως
Mal. 331, 7), in which it still survives in N. However, even when used in
its 4 sense overtake, in which case the form προφθάνω (also προλαμβάνω)
is also common in G-N, it began as early as G to exchange its participial
for the infinitival construction (cp. Th. 1, 34; 3, 82, 7), as: Sept. 3 Rog.
12, 18 ὁ Ροβοάμ ἔφθασεν ΑΝΑΒΗΝΑΙ τοῦ φυγεῖν εἰς Ἱερουσαλήμ. Sap. 4, 7
δίκαιος δ᾽ ἂν φθάς τελευτήσαι. Plut. Apophth. Phil. 2t (ii. 178 Ε) ἔΦΘΗ
21 E)
τελευτήσαι. Glor. Athen. 2 (ii. 346 c) μικροῦ ἔφθη τὴν πόλιν ἔρημον ἐξ ἐφόδου
λαβεῖν καὶ κατασχεῖν. Sol. Anim. 14, 5 (ii. 970 Ε) τοὺς μὴ πρόσω ἴεσθαι μηδ'
ἀποφεύγειν φθάσαντας. Pol. 14, 1 (i. 104 ) καθιερώσαι δὲ οὐκ ἔφθασαν
G.Mar. 26, 2 (i. 420 o) ểmicxeîN OUK EQнCAN. Sylla 9, 1 (i. 456 r)
φθάσαντος ΔΙΑΦΥΓΕΙΝ. Pomp. 33, 3 (i. 637 A) ἀλλ' ὁ Πομπήιος ἔφθη τῆς δεξιᾶς
αὐτοῦ λαβόμενος προσαγαγέσθαι. Dem. 32, r (i. 903 r). Brut. 15, 4 (i.
991 A). 41, 2 (i. 1003 α).—Clement. 18, 23 ÈkBainein peacac. NT Mark
14, 8 προέλαβεν Mypical. Callin. 87, 6 φθάσας Γεθαι. Theoph. 44, 8 πριν
ἢ φθάσαι ἀπελθεῖν τὸν βασιλέα. 402, 6 δόγμα φθάσαν ἀκογθῆναι τοῖς πολλοῖς.
2122. 3. Φαίνομαι, φανερός εἰμι, δῆλος εἰμί 'am evidently.
I
Ε
I
Dem. 27, 16 εἰ φανήσεται ταῦθ᾽ ὡμολογηκώς. Pl. Phaed. 107 c ἡ ψυχὴ
ἀθάνατος φαίνεται oica. Th. I, 140 Λακεδαιμόνιοι δῆλοι CAN ἐπιβουλεύοντες
ἡμῖν. Dem. 18, 19 οἱ Θηβαῖοι φανεροί ÂCAN AΝΑΓΚΑΣΘΗΣΟΜΕΝΟι καταφεύγειν
ἐφ' ὑμᾶς. See also 21 37 h.
2123. In the case of these verbs and expressions, however, the
participial construction may be replaced by a declarative clause
introduced by ὅτι (2085) :
Xen. 5, 2, 6 οἱ πολέμιοι δῆλοι CAN ὅτι ἐπικείσονται ἐν τῇ καταβάσει.
2124. In P-N compositions, though the participle is current (so even
in NT, as Matt. 6, 16; 18-but not in Rom. 7, 13), the alternative of
its analysis decidedly preponderates, with this further peculiarity that
the verbs in question are mostly used in an impersonal sense (2181 ff.):
φαίνεται (φανερόν ἐστιν, δῆλον ἐστὶν ὅτι. In process of time δῆλον ἐστὶ
retreated and so φαίνεται and φανερόν ἐστι with ὅτι (later πῶς, 1755)
remained down to M times. The form now current in present speech
is therefore φαίνεται πῶς ‘it seems that, or εἶνε φανερὸ πῶς it is
evident that.'
For A φαίνομαι with infinitivo in the sense of appear, seo 2085.
2125. Not rarely the construction of φθάνω, τυγχάνω, λανθάνω, is
reversed by changing these verbs to participles, or in the case of τυγ-
χάνω and λανθάνω to adverbs (τυχόν, λεληθότως, λανθανόντως),—and their
participial construction to finite moods, as:
Soph. Ant. 532. Th. 1, 65 ἔκπλουν ποιεῖται λαθὼν τὴν φυλακήν. Cp. 2, 80.
3, 4. ib. 25 Διαλαθὼν ἐσέρχεται τὴν Μυτιλήνην. 3, 51 ὅπως μὴ ποιῶνται ἔκπλους
αὐτόθεν λανθάνοντες. Xon. Cyr. 6, 4, 10. Th. 2, 52. Xon. Cyr. 1, 5, 3.
Eur. I. Λ. 958 τίς δὲ μάντις ἔστ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὃς ὀλίγ᾽ ἀληθῆ, πολλὰ δὲ ψευδῆ
3, 3, 18.
λέγει τυχών, Plut. Sylla 8, 6 (i. 456 κ) αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Πομπήιος λαθὼν ἐξέφυγε.
Clomont. 1, 3 φθάσας εἶπον. Το 3, 15. 20, 4. 3, 40 φθάσας εγνωμολόγητα.
Callin. 130, 27 φθάσας εἶπεν. 131, 5 φθάσας έΡMHNEYCEN.
2125. For τυχὸν us adv. porchanco'ep. Polyb. 12, 11, 2. _2, 58, 9. ΤΥΧΟΝ
ïows eiñoi tis äv. NT, 1 Cor. 16, 6. Clement. 20, 11 & 13. Epict. 1
1, 11, 28.
3, 21, 18. Soxt. 615, 20. Basil. i. 26o a (ep. 996242) . Λανθανόντως Clement.
1,3 & II. 3, 25 & 73. 4, 6. Poll. 6, 209. Dio C. 66, 5, 3. Λεληθότως even in A.
194
PARTICIPLE, PREDICATIVE.
[2126-2129.
2126. 4. Υπάρχω, κατάρχω (also ἄρχομαι), start first'; παύο-
μαι, λήγω ' cease ᾽; ἀνέχομαι, καρτερῶ, ὑπομένω, ἐπιμένω, persevere,
endure'; οὐ διαλείπω cease not”; κάμνω, ἀπαγορεύω get
tired'—and their synonyms.
Xen. An. 5, 5, 9 ἡμεῖς ὑμᾶς οὐδὲν πώποτε ΥπΗΡΞΑΜΕΝ κακώς ποιοΥ͂ντες.
Eur. Hipp. 706 Acal λέγοYCA. Xen. An. 3, 1, 19 οὔποτε ἐπαγόΜΗΝ ὑμᾶς
οἰκτίρων. Cyr. 5, 1, 16 ΑΝΕΞόμεθα καὶ καρτερHCOMEN ὑπὸ σοῦ εὐεργετού
ΜΕΝΟΙ. Mem. 2, 6, 35 οὐκ ἀποκΑΜΝΕΙΣ ΜΗΧΑΝΩΜΕΝΟΣ. An. 5, 12 ἀπείρηΚΑ
τρέχων. -ΝΤ Acts 5, 42 οὐκ επαγCANTO Διδάσκοντες.
21, 32 ἐπαγCANTO
ΤΥΠΤΟΝΤΕΣ. Hermas Vis. 3, 8, I ἐπαγράMHN ἐρωτῶν. 12, 16 ὁ δὲ Πέτρος
ἐπέμενε κρούων. John 8, 7 ἐπέΜΕΝΟΝ ἐρωτῶντες. So Luke 5, 4. Acts
6, 13. 12, 16. 13, 10. 20, 31. I Cor. 13, 8. Eph. 1, 16. Col. 1, 9.
Hebr. 10, 2. Babr. 9, 5 φγῶν ἔκαμε. 19, 9 ἔΚΑΜΝΕ ΠΗΔΑ.
ëkame.
2127. In P-B unconventional compositions the above verbs, so far as
they still survived, either became transitive (with the probable excep-
tion of παύομαι), and thus lost the special meaning requiring the
participle, or exchanged the participial for the infinitival construc-
tion. In this way, υπάρχω became equivalent to εἰμὶ (985°, 2106)
and κάμνω to ποιῶ (cp. Hesych. καμῶ, ἐργάσομαι), while P-Β ἄρχομαι
exchanged the participle first for the infinitive, and then for its
analysis by iva, B-N vá.
Sept. 2 Reg. 15, 14 ἐπαγcaτο πᾶς ὁ λαὸς παρελθεῖν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως. Jer. 38,
36 (31, 35) τὸ γένος Ἰσραὴλ παύσεται γενέσθαι ἔθνος. Plut. Apophth. Ag. 15
(ii. 216 A) σὺ μὲν μόλις ἐπαγσω λέγειν (beside ὡς ἐπαύσατο λέγων ib.).
Ag. ult. (ii. 216 D) παῖαι ἐπ' ἐμοὶ κλαίειν. Longos 2, 3 ἐξ οὗ ΝΕΜΕΙΝ διὰ γῆρας
ἐπαγάΜΗΝ. A. P. 6, 21. Babr. 122, 15 Ĥpžámhn ¡atpeýein.—Jos. Ant. 17,
9, 2 οὐδενὸς ἠνείχοντο εἰπεῖν. Hermas Sim. 9, 1 1, 5 ΗΡΞΑΜΗΝ καὶ αὐτὸς παίζεις
μετ' αὐτῶν. Acta Tho. 14, 28 f. ἄρξαι κτίζειν, οὐ δύναμαι ἄρξασθαι κτίζειν.
JMoschos 2820 Β μὴ ἀνεχόμενος ἵνα ἰατρὸς ἴΔΗ αὐτόν. 3036 Β οὐκ ἠνέχετό
ποτε ἵνα ἄλλος αὐτῷ Γemic ὕδωρ.
2128. 5. Verbs denoting a frame of mind or emotion (verba
affectuum), to express the cause or attendant circumstance of the
emotion (1582, d. 1387 1.):
χαίρω, ήδομαι, ἀγαπῶ am glad;
ἄχθομαι, ἀγανακτώ, χαλεπῶς οι βαρέως φέρω, λυποῦμαι 'am vexed,
'grieve';
αἰσχύνομαι 'am ashamed to (ep. 2137,0), μεταμέλομαι regret;
χάριν οἶδα οι ἔχω ' am thankful.
Xen. An. 2, 5, 16 ΗΔΟΜΑΙ ΑΚΟΥων σου φρονίμους λόγους. Mem. I, 2,
47 ὑπὲρ ὧν ἡμάρτανον ἐλεγχόμενοι ἤχθοντο. Th. 1, 77 οὐ τοῦ πλέονος μὴ
στερισκόμενοι χάριν ἔχογειν. Xen. Hell. 3, 3, 13 Φαρνάβαζος τῆς Αἰολίδος
χαλεπῶς ἔφερεν ἀπεστερημένος. Pl. Phil. 47 ο ελπίζων μὲν χαίρει, κΕΝΟΥ-
MENOC δὲ ἀγγεῖ. Th. 4, 27 οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι Μετεμέλοντο τὰς σπονδὰς οὐ λεξά
MENOI. Pl. Rep. 328 η χαίρω διαλεγόμενος τοῖς σφόδρα πρεσβύταις. Th.
1,77 ΑΔΙΚΟΥΜΕΝΟΙ οἱ ἄνθρωποι μᾶλλον ὀργίζονται ἢ ΒΙΑΖΟΜΕΝΟΙ. 2, 16. Xen.
Cyr. 5, 1, 21 καὶ τοῦτο μὲν οὐκ εἰ ΧΥΝΟΜΑΙ λέγων.
ΜΕΝΟΙ.
2128. For (ep. ἀγαλλιάομαι with tho analysis of the infinitivo, John 8, 56.
so too χαίρω id. 11, 15. Ι. Ν. Α. 14, 14 χαίρει δὲ καὶ ἐν λίμνῃ ΝΗΣΑΣΘΑΙ.
(Cp. 2151.)
2129. The cause or attendant circumstance of emotion may be
expressed also by a finite clause, led by ori and ei respectively (1945.
1947. 1807b).
495
2130-2134.]
PARTICIPLE, PREDICATIVE.
2130. In G-M unconventional compositions and N speech the
cause after verba affectuum is generally expressed by a finite clause
introduced either by ὅτι (διότι etc. 1737), or by G-M ἵνα, Ν νά (1741).
2131. In the preceding class of verbs (2130), as well as in the one
following (2132), the supplementing participle virtually denotes an
attendant circumstance (2101), and so may be assigned to the cir-
cumstantial (causal) participles as well (2150).
2132. 6. Verbs denoting an acting well or wrongly, a supe-
riority or inferiority. Such are e. g.
καλῶς ποιῶ, εὖ ποιῶ, καλῶς πράττω ' do right;
ἀδικῶ, ἁμαρτάνω, κακῶς ποιῶ ' do wrong";
νικῶ, κρατῶ, succeedἡττῶμαι, λείπομαι ' am behind.
Th. I, 53 ἀδικεῖτε πολέμου ἄρχοντες καὶ σπονδὰς λύοντες. 2, 7Ι οὐ
Δίκαια ποιεῖτε ἐς γῆν τὴν Πλαταιέων στρατεύοντες. Xen. An. 3, 3, 56 ὁ
Κυαξάρης ἔλεγεν ὅτι ὁ Κῦρος) εξαμαρτάνοι Διατρίβων καὶ οὐκ ἄγων ὡς τάχιστα
ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους. Pl. Phaed. 6o c εγ γ' ἐποΙΗΣΑΣ ΑΝΑΜΝΗΣAc με. Xen.
NAMNHCAC
Mem. 2, 4, 6 ενεργετῶν οὐδενὸς λείπεται. Αn. 2, 3, 36 οὐχ ἡττηεόμεθα εὖ
Ποιοντες.-ΝΤ Phil. 4, 14 καλῶς ἐποιήσατε CΥΓΚΟΙΝΩΝHCANτές μου τῇ
θλίψει. Acts 10, 33 καλῶς ἐποίΗcac παραγενόμενος. Ignat. ad Smyrn.
10, 1 καλώς έποιήσατε ΥποδεξΑΜΕΝΟΙ ὡς διακόνους Θεοῦ.
2132b. As intimated above (2131), also this class of participles
strictly denotes an attendant circumstance (2141), and as such
virtually belongs to the head of circumstantial participles. (Cp.
NT Rom. 12, 21 Νίκα ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακόν. Rev. 5, 5 ΕΝΙΚΗΣΕΝ ὁ λέων
ἀνεῖται τὸ βιβλίον. Gr. Urk. Berlin 335, 3 καλῶς οὖν ποιήσις πέμψε μοι
αὐτά [for -σεις, πέμψαι].) Hence N speech treats them according to
their proper function (2150. 2153. 2160).
καλὰ (κακὰ) ἔκαμες καί μ' ἐθύμισες ‘you did well wrong) in reminding
me.” καλὰ (κακά) θὰ κάμῃς νά του γράψης ' you will do well (wrong) to write
him. καλὰ θὰ ἔκανες να του γράψης you had better write to him. ἐνίκησες
(ἐνικήθηκες) εἰς τὸ περπάτημα. σ' ἐπέρασε c τὴν φρονιμάδα".
>
ว
(
2133. B. Referring to the object of the governing verb,
the predicative participle (objective participle) stands with--
I. Verbs denoting a perception or notion (verba sentiendi), as:
δράω 'see, περιοράω ' overlook, ἀκούω hear, αἰσθάνομαι ‘feel,
συνίημι ' understand, πυνθάνομαι am informed, μανθάνω learn,
γιγνώσκω, οἶδα, ἐπίσταμαι know μέμνημαι remember, ἐπιλαν
θάνομαι forget’εὑρίσκω ‘find, φωράω, καταλαμβάνω ‘seize,
4 catch, αλίσκομαι ' am seized, caught.
,
เ
6
Xen. An. 5, 5, 24 ὁρῶ πάντα ἀληθῆ ὄντα ἃ λέγετε. Mem. 2, 6, 33
οὐδένα οἶΔΑ ΜICOYNTA τοὺς ἐπαινοῦντας. 4, 3, 13 ὁ θεὸς τὰ μέγιστα μὲν
πράττων ὁρᾶται, τάδε δὲ οἰκονομῶν ἀόρατος ἡμῖν ἐCTIN. Th. 4, 6 ὡς ἐπγε
θοντο της Πύλου κατειλΗΜΜΕΝΗC. Pl. Charm. 156 1 ΜΕΜΝΗΜΑΙ Κριτίᾳ τῷδε
ΞΥΝΟΝΤΑ σε Th. 2, 6 ὁ κῆρυξ ἀφικόμενος ερε τοὺς ἄνδρας Διεφθαρμένος.
Xen. Mem. 2, 4, I ᾤκoγca δέ ποτε αὐτοῦ καὶ περὶ φίλων διαλεγομένου. An.
I, 4, 5 ᾤκογε Κῦρον ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ὄντα. Pl. Rep. 389 D ἄν τινα λαμβάΝΗ
Ψευδόμενον. Αpol. 22 D ἐμαυτῷ εγΝΗΔΗ οὐδὲν ἐπισταμένῳ.
2134. Should the object of these verbs act as subject as well, it is
496
PARTICIPLE, PREDICATIVE.
[2134-2138.
omitted, and the participle exchanges its oblique case for the
nominative, as:
οἶδα ἄνθρωπος ὤν (for οἶδα ἐμαυτὸν ἄνθρωπον ὄντα). ΜEMNHCO θνητὸς ὤν.
Xen. An. 2, 1, 13 ἴσθι ἀνόητος ὤν.
2134¹. For the P-N construction of the above verbs 2133, see 2136
& 2138.
2135. II. Verbs denoting to prove, declare and the like (verba
declarandi), as :
δείκνυμι, (ἀποφαίνω, (ἐξἐλέγχω 'prove';
?
δηλόω ' declare,᾽ ἀγγέλλω ' announce, ὁμολογέω confess.
Xen. An. 2, 3, 19 Κῦρον ἐπιστρατεύοντα πρῶτος ἤγγειλα. Dem. 19, 177
ἐπέδειξα Αἰσχίνην οὐδὲν ἀληθὲς ἐπηγγελκότα ἀλλὰ ΦΕΝΑKICANθ' ὑμᾶς. 2, 8
πάνθ' ἕνεκα ἑαυτοῦ ποιῶν Φίλιππος ἐξελήλεγκται.
2136. Both this class and the one preceding 2133 (verba declarandi
et sentiendi) may be also followed by a finite declarative clause with
ὅτι or ὡς (1940 f. 2086).
Xen. An. I, 2, 21 ᾔσθετο ὅτι τὸ Μένωνος στράτευμα ἤδη ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ἦν. Ρ1.
Apol. 22 ν τούτους (τοὺς χειροτέχνας) ΗΔΗ ὅτι εὑρήσοιμι πολλὰ καὶ καλὰ ἐπιστα-
μένους. Dem. 43, 23 ῥᾳδίως αἰσθήσεσθε τούτους ὅτι εἰσὶ βίαιοι καὶ ἀσελγείς
ἄνθρωποι. (Both constructions are blended in Th. 4, 35 γνοὺς δὲ ὁ Κλέων
καὶ ὁ Δημοσθένης ὅτι, εἰ καὶ ὑποσονοῦν μᾶλλον ἐνδώσουσιν οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι,
Διαφθαρησομέν γε αὐτοὺς ὑπὸ τῆς σφετέρας στρατιᾶς, ἔπαυσαν τὴν μάχην.)
2137. With the following verbs, a difference in construction
involves a difference of meaning:
a. akoúw with gen. + part. means:
""
acc. + part.
acc. +inf.
""
'hear with my own ears,' 'listen';
'hear as a fact' (őrı);
'hear indirectly,' 'understand.'
Xen. Mem. 2, 4, I ŠkoYca δέ ποτε αὐτοῦ καὶ περὶ φίλων Διαλεγομένου. Το
Pl. Rep. 493 D. Xen. An. I, 4, 5 Škorce Κῦρον ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ὄντα· 5, 5, 7 περὶ τῆς
χώρας ὅτι ἤΚΟΥΟΝ ΔΗΟΥΜΕΝΗΝ. Cyr. I, 3, I ἰδεῖν ἐπεθύμει ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης τὸν
Κῦρον ὅτι ἤκογε καλὸν κἀγαθὸν αὐτὸν εἶναι.
b. aloxúvoμaι with part. means:
am ashamed to' (2128);
' hesitate to.'
"}
19
C. γιγνώσκω
""
inf.
part.
inf.
19
""
· know” (ὅτι) ;
""
d. ἐπίσταμαι & οἶδα with part.
""
inf.
e. μανθάνω with part. means:
11
inf.
' decide to.'
means: know that';
'know to.'
learn that';
'learn to.'
Γ. ἐπιλανθάνομαι with part. means:
""
inf.
""
g. μέμνημαι with part. means:
inf.
h. φαίνομαι part.
""
""
inf.
(
")
"
""
forget that';
'forget to.'
recollect that';
'remember to.'
Fam evidently (2122)
appear to ' (2085).
2138. As doclarative participles, liko declarative infinitives, were, even
in A, interchangeable with their corresponding (declarative) finite clauses
(2086. 2136), it was inevitable that the participial construction should,
in the course of P-N times, be confounded with, and morged into, that of
the other two cognato classes. Accordingly N speech supplements verba
declarandi et sentiendi eithor by @s chiefly for the A finito declarativo
497
K k
2138-2141b.]
PARTICIPLE, CIRCUMSTANTIAL.
clause, or by và chiefly for the A declarative participle and infinitive
(2085 f.):
τὸν Ηρα νὰ κοιμᾶται (for 4 εὗρον αὐτὸν κοιμώμενον), but also τον Ηρα
Κοιμισμένο" (where the part. = adj.). σὲ εἶδα να τρέχῃς (for A εἶδον σε τρέχοντα)
beside είδα πως ἔτρεχες. ΘΥΜΟΥ͂ΜΑΙ πῶς ἐγέλας (for A μέμνημαί σου γελῶντος).
Kocae σε Να φωνάζῃς or πῶς ἐφώναζες. ἐΜΗNYC μου (A ἤγγειλέ μοι) πως
ἔρχεται. θά σε δείξω πῶς εἶσαι ψεύτης (for A δείξω σε ψευδόμενον).
2139. III. The verb ἔχω with the participle perfect passive in the
sense first of keep then have, forming a periphrastic substitute for the
simple perfect and pluperfect (2106). This expedient made its
appearance in G times and being furthered by the parallel use in
Latin of habeo with perf. part. pass., gradually became popular and
resulted in the N (and Romanic) practice of regularly forming the
compound tenses of the active voice (1865. 2110) by means of ἔχω
with the participle perfect passive.
•
•
Diod. 2, 32, 4 ἐν αἷς (διφθέραις) οἱ Πέρσαι τὰς παλαιὰς πράξεις κατά τινα νόμον
εἶΧΟΝ ΣΥΝΤΕΤΑΓΜΕΝΑC. 2, 53, η τὰ μὲν γὰρ πάντῃ τοὺς ῥάδικας έχει περι-
τὰ δὲ ἐφ' ἓν μέρος ἔχοντα κεκλιμένας τὰς ἐπὶ τῆς κορυφῆς
κόμας. 3, 36, 5 ἔχοντες ἐΞΗΡΤΗΜΕΝΑ πάντα τὰ πρὸς τὴν χρείαν. Jos. Ant.
7, 9, 7 οἱ δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς ἐξεπίτηδες τοὺς υἱοὺς ἔξω τῆς πόλεως κεκρυμμένους εἶχον.
7, 13, 2 ὅτι πολὺν αὐτὸς ἐγκεκλεισμένον ἔχοι σίτον. 8, 13, 4. 12, 2, Ι πόσας
ἤδη μυριάδας ἔχοι εγειλε ένας βιβλίων. 20, 11, 65 πρὸ γὰρ εἴκοσιν ἐτῶν
είχες ΓΕΓΡΑΜΜΕΝΗΝ (τὴν ἱστορίαν). Plut. Cam. 34, 5 (i. 147 Α) οὐδὲν ἄκος
οὐδὲ σβεστήριον ἔχοντες οἱ Λατίνοι παρεσκεγασμένον. ib. 38, 3 τὰς δὲ πύλας
εἶχαν ἀνεῳ μένα. Pelop. 35, 6 (i. 297 Ε) τοὺς μὲν ἀδελφοὺς εἶχε πλησίον ἐν
οἴκῳ τινὶ κεκΡΥΜΜΕΝΟΥΣ. Tit. Flam. 20, 4 (i. 38ο ») τὴν οἰκίαν ἔτι πρότερον
ἐξόδοις ἑπτὰ καταγείοις εγΝτετΡΗΜΕΝΗΝ ἐκ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ διαίτης εἶχεν. Schol.
Apoll. Rhod. 1, 970 μεμόρητο .. . μεμοιραμένος εἶχε· ἔνθα ὀρθότερον ΜεΜοιρά
ΜέΝοΝ γραπτέον. Eunap. 45, 11 ἕως οὗ ἀποδῷ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους οὓς ἐκ τῆς
καταδρομῆς εἶχε CYNHTA ΜΕΝΟΥΣ. (Cp. ΔΜαυροφρύδης 328 f.)
2140. From these remarks on ἔχω, as well as those on εἰμί (2107.
2110), it is clear that since B, if not earlier, Greek speech formed the
compound tenses (perfect, pluperfect, future perfect) by means of
ἔχω and εἶμαι (Β-N form for εἰμί), sometimes also ὑπάρχω, with the
participle perfect passive, and that, as in modern languages, yo
serves for the active, and εἶμαι (ὑπάρχω) for the passive and neuter
voice. Cp. 2110.
(1)
2140. For the periphrasis at prosont of tho compound tenses by means
of ἔχω and tho alleged infinitive (ἔχω φάγει”, ἔχω κοιμηθή), see App. vi. 18 f.
III. CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE.
2141. The circumstantial or adverbial participle either refers
directly to some member of the governing clause, or stands loose
as an apparently independent member. In the former case, it
may be called participle in construction, in the latter it is called par-
ticiple absolute (participium absolutum). This participle absolute
generally stands in the genitive (genitivus absolutus), but under
certain conditions (2143 ff) also in the accusative (acc. absolutus).
2141". As already stated (2101), the circumstantial participle
qualifies the leading clause in an adverbial sense, that is in regard to
time, cause, purpose, condition, manner, means, etc.
498
PARTICIPLE, CIRCUMSTANTIAL.
[21410-2144b.
2141º. For the P-N history of the circumstantial participle it is
important to bear in mind that popular speech has throughout had
a decided preference for the simpler and clearer mode of substituting
for the participle either a prepositional infinitive (2068. 2149. 2151.
2158. 2164), or, far more commonly, a finite clause, and that either
subordinate or co-ordinate to the principal clause (1930).
2142. The Greek genitive absolute substantially corresponds
to the Latin ablative absolute; it differs from it mainly in the
following three points:
a. It is much less frequent, because of the presence in Greek of the
participle aorist which lends itself conveniently to a participle in
construction. In Latin, on the contrary, the absence of a par-
ticiple aorist necessitates the use in its place of a passive participle
in the ablative, as: Κῦρος τὸν Κροῖσον ΝικΗας κατεστρέψατο τοὺς Λυδούς
Cyrus CROESO VICTO Lydos in suam dicionem redegit.
b. Its subject may be omitted when it is readily supplied from the
context, as: Xen. An. 3, 2, 10 οὕτως ἐχόντων = quae cum ita sint.
c. It cannot be represented by a mere substantive or adjective as
in Latin which lacks the present participle of sum, but the participle
ὢν must be added: Pericle duce= Περικλέους ἡγεμόνος ὄντος. Only the
two participle-like adjectives éкov and Kwv regularly perform the
work of participles, after the analogy of ἐμοῦ οὐ θέλοντος oι βουλομένου:
ἐμοῦ ἄκοντος = me invito. Soph. Αi. 455 ἐμοῦ μὲν οὐχ ἑκύντος. Th. 7, 86.
Pl. Theaet. 18ο C παρὰ τούτων οὐκ ἂν λάβοις λόγον οὔτε ἑκόντων οὔτε
ἀκόντων. (Cp. also 2144.)
2143. The place of the absolute genitive is taken by an
accusative absolute-often preceded by ὡς, ὥσπερ as though
when the participle is that of an impersonal verb or expression,
and stands in the neuter, thus acting as an adjective implying
the participle ov. (Cp. 2152.)
δέον, προσῆκον
ὄν, ἐξόν, παρόν, μετόν
δοκοῦν, δόξαν, δεδο-
γμένον, εἰρημένον
as (while, though) it is or was necessary.'
""
""
>>
29
Το ἄδηλον (δυνατόν, ἀδύνατον, δίκαιον, αἰσχρόν, etc.) ν.
possible.'
decreed.'
Pl. Prot. 358 D οὐδεὶς τὸ μεῖζον κακὸν αἱρήσεται ἐξὸν τὸ ἔλαττον. Xen.
An. 3, I, 14 κατακείμεθα ὥσπερ ἐξὸν ἡσυχίαν ἄγειν. Cyr. 2, 2, 20 οἶμαι τὸ
πλῆθος ψηφιεῖσθαι ἃ βουλόμεθα, ἅμα μὲν ὑμῶν συναγορευόντων ἅμα δὲ καὶ
αἰσχρὸν ἂν ἀντιλέγειν. 8, 5, 28 εγκΔΟΞΑΝ τῷ πατρὶ καὶ τῇ μητρὶ γαμεῖ τὴν
Κυαξάρου θυγατέρα. Th. 5, 30 εἰρημένον κύριον εἶναι ὅ,τι ἂν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν
ξυμμάχων ψηφίσηται.
2144. Even a nominative absolute is often used by way of anaco-
luthon, when the narrator inadvertently changes the original
construction of the sentence (cp. RKühner ii.2 661 ft.):
δ
Pl. Αpol. 21 ο και Διαλεγόμενος αὐτῷ, ἔδοξέ μοι ὁ ἀνὴρ εἶναι σοφός. Th. 5, 70
μετὰ ταῦτα ἡ ξύνοδος ἦν, ᾿Αργείοι μὲν ὀργῇ χωροῒντες. Eur. Hoc. 970 αἰδώς
μ' ἔχει ἐν τῷδε πότμῳ ΤΥΓΧΑΝΟΥΣ᾽ ἵν' εἰμὶ νῦν. See also 2145.
2144". In G-B compositions, the place of the genitive absolute is
occasionally taken by a datire absolute, as IGS 1093 ἐνθάδε ἦλθα ἀγῶνα
ἰδεῖν Βογλεγοντι Σεβήρῳ. This however is nothing but a mistranslation
499
K k 2
2144h-2147.]
PARTICIPLE, TEMPORAL.
into Greek of the Latin ablative absolute: senatore Severo (cp. 1394).
Cp. CIG 2562 Νουκίῳ Ἐπιδίῳ, Τιτίῳ ᾿Ακυλείνῳ, Υπάτοις = consulibus. So
ib. 2943. 5898 (1461) Σέξτῳ Ἐρουκίῳ, Κλάρω Β, Γναΐῳ Κλαυδίῳ Σεβήρω,
κώς (! for cos. i. e. consulibus). Jos. Ant. 14, 10, 13 Λευκίῳ Λέντλῳ, Γαΐῳ
Μαρκέλλῳ, Υπάτοις = consulibus.
2145. As was to be expected, in the course of P-B times the
specific function and use of each of the above absolute cases (2142-4)
was lost sight of, and a confusion ensued which increased as time
went on, and in proportion as the circumstantial participle retreated
from the living language and became an unfamiliar instrument.
21.
NT Acts 19, 34 ἐπιγνόντες δὲ φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων. Judo 16 το
στόμα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα θαγμάζοντες. Col. 2, 2. 9, II & 13. Mark 9, 20
ἰδὼν αὐτὸν ὁ Ἰησοῦς), τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς ἐσπάραξεν αὐτόν. Eph. 4, 2 παρακαλῶ
ὑμᾶς περιπατῆσαι ἀνεχόμενοι. Mark 5, 18 καὶ ἐμβαίνοντος αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ πλοῖον,
παρεκάλει αὐτὸν ὁ δαιμονισθείς. 5, 2. 2 Pot. 3, 3. Acts 20, 3 ποιήσας
μήνας τρείς . ἐγένετο γνώμης τοῦ ὑποστρέφειν. Col. 3, 16. Acts 15, 22
ἔδοξεν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις Γράψαντες. 22, 17. 2 Cor. 4, 17-8. John 7, 38. Rev. 2,
26 καὶ ὁ Νικῶν καὶ ὁ τηρῶν ἄχρι τέλους τὰ ἔργα μου, δώσω αὐτῷ ἐξουσίαν. 3, 12 &
Acta Petri ot Pauli 179, 6 f. συμβούλιον ποιήCANTEC πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι,
ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς. Acta Tho. 46, 5 f. ἡλίου δὲ δύνοντος καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν γάμων ἡμῶν
ἐπανιόντων μετὰ τῶν συνόντων νεανίσκων ἡμῶν, καὶ ἔγγιστα τοῦ ἀγωγοῦ ΓΕΝΟΜΕΝΟΙ,
ἡ θυγάτηρ ἡμῶν πρότερον εἶδεν αὐτούς. 77, 33 εὐξαμένου δὲ αὐτοῦ κατ᾽ ὀλίγον
τὸ ὕδωρ ἀνηλώθη, ξηρὸς πάλιν ὁ τόπος ΓΕΝΟΜΕΝOC. So too 31, 38. 32, 31. 37, 39.
61, 31. 65, 5. 87, 31. 18. 2, 6 ταῦτα αὐτοῦ Διαλογιζομένου καὶ λέγοντος ὤφθη
αὐτῷ ὁ σωτήρ. 14, 13 εἰσελθόντος οὖν αὐτοῦ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ βασιλεύς. 18, 2
τοῦ δὲ ΜΗΧΑΝΗCANTOC λέγει αὐτῷ πάλιν. 20, Ι καὶ προθύμων ἡμῶν ὄντων
περὶ τὸν θεὸν δὺς ἡμῖν τὴν σφραγίδα, οι passim. Cullin. go, 24 ὃ οὐκ ἦν ἐξόν.
Ν ΕΞΟΝ.
73, 21 λειτοΥΡΓΟΥ͂Ντος δὲ αὐτοῦ . . . στενάζων ἀνεβύα. 66, 26 πολλῶν δὲ ἐπιχει-
PHCANTON μείναι οὐκ ἴσχυον. 73, 28 ἐγκλειομένΟΥ αὐτοῦ ἀπεκαλύπτετο αὐτῷ,
ot passim. Leont. Noup. V. J. 70, 1, ὁ ὅσιος Βιτάλιος Βογλόμενος . . . ἔλεγεν
αὐτῷ (ἡ γυνή). 7, 18 προχειρισθέντος αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐνθρονιασθέντος ἐπεδείξατο.
24, 18 ἐπιδοθέντος αὐτῷ τοῦ πιττακίου καὶ ἀποβογλεγεάντων ἐκείνων εὐθέως
καὶ Κειωσάντων ἐπὶ ὅλων τὸ χρῆμα, ἐγνώρισαν αὐτόν. 44, 4 τοῦ νοταρίου
ΠΑΡΑΙΤΟΥΜΕΝΟΥ λέγει αὐτῷ. So 25, 10. 31, 7, et passim. το, 9 ὡς ἀξιομνη
μονεύτου οὖν καὶ τούτου αὐτοῦ (read αὖ τοῦ) δημοσίου προστάγματος ἐνταῦθα
ἐνθεῖναι ἐλθεῖναι ?) αὐτὸ ἐσπουδάσαμεν. (Cp. 2152.) Mon. Hist. 290, 20
Τιμόθεος, τοῦτο ἐπιτετραμμένον αὐτῷ, παρεγένετο ἐν τοῖς δρίοις. 326, 6. 374, 14
Ἰωάννης οὖν, τΟΥ͂ΤΟ προειρημένον αὐτῷ ἐκ βασιλέως, ἀφίκετο εἰς τὸ Δάρας.
417, 16. Theophyl. 100, 1. 122, 3. 237, 20. (Cp. 2143.)
2146. A noteworthy reminiscence of the absolute participle seems to
underlio the B-N participial adverbs in -οντα, now -οντας (822 1.), which aro
more common in northorn than southern speech, and denote a synchronous
action, bosides manner and cause. These adverbs therefore correspond
to the English gerund in -ing, or rather to tho Italian -ando, -endo, as:
ἀνεβαίνοντας 'going up, περιπατώντα-s walking, περνώντα-s passing,
γελώντα-s laughing'; βλέποντας καὶ κάνοντας ‘we'll see and uct accordingly';
θέλοντας καὶ μὴ θέλοντας (= ἑκὼν ἀέκοντί γε θυμῷ) willy hilly' (cp. 2142, 2163).
'
A. TEMPORAL PARTICIPLE,
L
>
2147. The temporal participle is often strengthened by ἅμα
' at the same time, μεταξύ while, εὐθύς, αὐτίκα, as soon as.
a. In construction : Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 37 νῦν μὲν δειπνεῖτε ΔειπνήCANTEC δὲ
ἀπελαύνετε. 5, 2, 22 ἅμα προϊών ἐπεσκοπεῖτο εἴ τι δυνατὸν εἴη τοὺς πολε-
500
PARTICIPLE, TEMPORAL
[2147-2151.
CAUSAL.
μίους ἀσθενεστέρους ποιεῖν. Ρl. Αpol. 40 Β πολλαχοῦ δή με ἐπέσχε λέγοντα
ΜΕΤΑΞΥ. Th. 2, 39 ἐπιπόνῳ ἀσκήσει εγωγε νέοι ὄντες τὸ ἀνδρεῖον μετέρχονται.
b. Absolute Men. 123 dрvòs песоÝснс Tâя άvǹp Evλeveral. Pl. Euthyd.
275 Ε καὶ αὐτοῦ Μεταξὺ ταῦτα λέγοντος ὁ Κλεινίας ἔτυχεν ἀποκρινάμενος.
2148. Under this group may be classed a few other participles
which in English are rendered by an adverbial expression, as: ȧpxó-
μενος (ἀρξάμενος) in the beginning, τελευτῶν ‘at the end, διαλιπών
(also επισχών) χρόνον ' after a little while.
Th. 4, 64 ἅπερ καὶ ἀρχόμενος εἶπον. Pl. Apol. 22 Ο τελεγτῶν οὖν ἐπὶ τοὺς
χειροτέχνας γα. Phaed. 117 Ε οὗτος ὁ δοὺς τὸ φάρμακον διαλιπών χρΟΝΟΝ
ἐπεσκόπει τους πόδας.
2149. The temporal participle occurs also in P-B compositions,
though usually without any strengthening particle. At the same
time the indefiniteness attending this class of participles not only in
regard to their true nature, but also in regard to the division of time
implied, could not appeal to the plain and direct popular speech.
Hence even in A it was often resolved either into a finite temporal
clause (1995 ff.), or turned to a prepositional infinitive (2068. 2075"). In
particular, participles denoting a synchronous action were replaced by
a finite clause opening with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἕως, ἐν ᾧ “while'; ὅταν, ὁπόταν,
'when'; or (this especially in G-B) by the articular infinitive
preceded by év 'in' (2068);-whereas participles implying priority
of time gradually made room for a finite clause introduced by enei,
ap' ou, orar, when,' 'after' (1790. 1999); or, during G-B, for the
ἀφ᾽ ὅταν,
articular infinitive in the combination μerà TÓ (2068).
2149. Macaronisms like Apoc. Mar. 115, 7 & 122, 21 äµа тa λóyw einovoa
ἅμα τῷ λόγῳ εἰποῦσα
naturally provo nothing except that the (temporal) participle had become
extinct in the living language (2168, a).
2149º. For a N reminiscence of the synchronous participle soo 2146.
B. CAUSAL PARTICIPLE.
2150. The causal participle is often strengthened by ❝re (olov,
ola dn) 'because,' or os on the plea' (1737).-Negation oỶ
δή)
(1814. 1803).
a. In construction: Pl. Hipp. 1, 285 В параvoμоvoi äpa Aakedaiµóvioi
οὐ Διδόντες σοι χρυσίον καὶ ἐπιτρέποντες τοὺς αὑτῶν υἱεῖς. Xen. An. 6, 3, 3
ἅτε ἐξαίφνης ἐπιπεσόντες πολλὰ ἀνδράποδα ἔλαβον.
b. Absolute: Xen. An. 5, 6, 3 οὐχ ὡς τοῖς Ἕλλησιν πολεμησόντων ἡμῶν
εἶπον ἃ εἶπον. 6, 1, 3 ἀνεθορύβησαν ὡς εὖ εἰπόντος τοῦ ᾿Αγασίου.
à
2150. So further the set phrase tí taðwv (tí µaðór) 'why on earth,'
for which see 2044 f.
2151. The causal particle is fairly common also in P-B unscholarly
compositions, though without are, olor, or oia dǹ (cp. 2149). At the
same time the above remarks on the P-N history of the temporal
participle (2149; cp. also 2154) fully apply to the causal participle as
well, in that it was replaced either by a finite clause introduced
by one of the prepositive particles éneí (éreidy) 'as,' 'since,' őri
because,' 'for' (1737. 1945); or, during G-B, by the articular in-
finitive in the combination dià To 'for,' on account of' (2068.
2075"); or finally by iva (N và) with the primary subjunctive (1741).
(Cp. 2128, 2164.)
501
2152-2156.] PARTICIPLE, CONDITIONAL AND CONCESSIVE.
2152. Should the causal participle be v and at the same
time be introduced by ἅτε, οία δή, ὡς, it is often omitted and
its predicate then, if any, stands by itself. (Cp. 2143)
Xen. An. 6, 6, 9 ἔφη κηρύξειν μηδεμίαν πόλιν δέχεσθαι αὐτοὺς ὡς
πολεμίους (sc. ὄντας). Pl. Rep. 358 ο αὐτὸ ἐπιτηδεύουσιν ὡς ΑΝΑΓΚΑΙΟΝ
ἀλλ᾽ οὐχ ὡς ἀγαθόν. So Xen. An. 7, 8, II ὡς ἑτοίμων δὴ χρημάτων
(sc. ὄντων). Soph. Ο. C. 83. Th. 2, 35 ὡς καλόν (sc. όν). Xen.
Cyr. 5, 1, 13. Pl. Rep. 449 C.
568 Β αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν πολιτείαν οὐ παρα-
δεξόμεθα ἅτε τυραννίδος ΥΜΝΗΤάς (sc. ὄντας). Χen. Cyr. 1, 3, 2.-Leont.
Neap. V. J. ro, 9, cited above (2145).
2152b. In N the analysis of the suppressed participle is regularly
expressed, as : αὐτό σου ἔφερα ὄχι ΓΙΑΤΙ 'ΝΕ καλὸ παρὰ Γιατί ' Νε φτηνό I have
brought you this not because it is good, but because it is cheap.'
C. CONDITIONAL PARTICIPLE.
2153. The conditional participle is not accompanied by any
strengthening particle. Negation μή (1807. 1814).
a. In construction : Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 28 τοὺς φίλους ενεργετοντες καὶ
τοὺς ἐχθροὺς δυνήσεσθε κολάζειν. Pl. Symp. 196 ο κρατῶν ἡδονῶν καὶ
ἐπιθυμιῶν ὁ Ἔρως διαφερόντως ἂν σωφρονοί.
b. Absolute : Gnom. θεοῦ διδόντος οὐδὲν ἰσχύει φθόνος, καὶ μὴ διδόντος
οὐδὲν ἰσχύει πόνος. Th. 1, 1ο Αθηναίων δὲ τὸ αὐτὸ τοῦτο παθόντων, διπλα-
σίαν ἂν τὴν δύναμιν εικάζεσθαι (οίμαι).
2154. The process which brought about the retreat of the temporal
and causal participle during P-B (2149. 2151) has been still more
efficient in the case of the conditional participle. Accordingly in
P the latter began to retreat before its analysis by el, or rather by ear
or av (cp. Luke 9, 25, Matt. 16, 26). Here morcover we have to note
áv
that, as in the absence of a conditional preposition no prepositional
infinitive could be substituted for the participle in question (cp. 2149–
2151), recourse was had to the paratactic expedient resorted to even in
A of turning the participle into a finite verb (now always antecedent)
in the form of either an imperative followed by kaí (1977, b. 1928, b),
or of a direct sentence question, the leading clause then serving as an
answer to it (1977, a).
D. CONCESSIVE PARTICIPLE.
2155. The concessive or restrictive participle is often strength-
ened by καί, καίπερ (also καίτοι), although Negation οὐ.
a. In construction: Eur. El. 551 πολλοὶ γὰρ ὄντες εὐγενεῖς εἰσιν κακοί. F1.
Lach. 197 Ο οὐδὲν ἐνῷ πρὸς ταῦτα ἔχων εἰπεῖν. Th. 4, 39 τοῦ Κλέωνος
καίπερ μανιώδης oca ἡ ὑπόσχεσις ἀπέβη. Isocr. 15, 272 καίπερ οὕτω δια-
κείμενος ἐπιχειρήσω διαλεχθῆναι περὶ αὐτῶν. Soph. Ο. Τ. 1325 ἀλλὰ
γιγνώσκω σαφῶς, καίπερ σκοτεινός (sc. ὤν, see 2109), τήν γε σὴν αὐδὴν
όμως.
b. Absolute : Dem. 44, 65 εἰ μὲν ὁ τετελευτηκὼς ἐποιήσατό τινα καίπερ οὐ
Διδόντος τοῦ νόμου, συνεχωροῦμεν ἂν αὐτῷ.
2156. As early as A, the concessivo participle was sometimes re-
solved into a finite clause introduced by el kai, làv or hy kaì ‘although,'
or kal ei, kai éáv, kaì àv--kầy (1993). In the course of P-B the tendency
for analysis became more manifest and gradually led to the extinction
of the participle in N speech, its place being now supplied by ἂν καί,
ἂν καλὰ (ἀγκαλὰ) καί ' although, καὶ νά ' even if' (1993 1.).
502
PARTICIPLE, FINAL AND OF MANNER. 2157-2161.
E. FINAL PARTICIPLE.
2157. The final participle is often strengthened by ὡς for
the purpose of,' 'with a view to.' The leading verb of the
principal clause usually denotes motion and the participle
commonly stands in the future, not rarely also in the present
tense acting as a durative future (2095). Negation μή (1806).
•
Th. 1, 29 προπέμψαντες κήρυκα πρότερον πόλεμον προερούντα Κερκυραίοις
ἔπλεον ἐπὶ τὴν ᾿Επίδαμνον Κερκυραίοις ἐναντία πολεμήCONTEC. Xen.
Mem. 3, 7, 5, σέ γε διδάξων ώρμημαι. 3, 1, 2 κατασκεψομένοις ἔπεμπε.
1, 1, 3 'Αρταξέρξης συλλαμβάνει Κῦρον ὡς ἀποκτενῶν.
2158. The final participle alternates with a finite clause intro-
duced by ἵνα, also όπως (1952-63), or ὃς (2020 ft), and since I also
with the infinitive either simple (App. vi. 17, b) or preceded by ὥστε,
τοῦ, χάριν τοῦ, εἰς τό, πρὸς τό, ἐπὶ τό (2075–7. App. vi. 21-24). In G-B it
is also often replaced by an imperative co-ordinated to the leading
verb by means of καί (171o f.).
2159. The final participle occurs, it is true, also in G-T (in the NT
rarely and only in the Acts 8, 27. 22, 5. 24, 11 & 17. 25, 13; and
with os Heb. 13, 17; otherwise it is generally avoided, as Matt. 2, 8.
9, 2. 1 Cor. 4, 17. 26, 3. Acts 10, 5. Luke 7, 19. Cp. Sept. 1 Reg.
16, 2 & 11.4 Reg. 14, 8-9), and even in B compositions, but as it is fre-
quently misapplied-it often stands in the aorist in the sense of the
effective future-we are warranted in holding that it had lost touch
with popular speech during G and only lingered in the conventional
language of the scribes as a fossilized relic.
Cp. Gr. Urk. Berlin 300 (+148), 3 f. συνέστησά σοι (for σε) φροντιοῦντα
καὶ ἀπαιτήσαντα, μισθώσαντα, ἐπιτελέσαντα, ποιησάμενον. Men. Hist.
308, 9 στείλε οὖν τοὺς ΒεβαιώσANTA (ed. - σοντας). 345, 21 ἐκπέμπει
πρεσβεγραμένω (ed. -σομ-) άμφω ὡς "Λμμιγον. Εunap. 67, 22 ὁ Ἡράκλειος
ἐκάλει ἀKPOACAMENΟΝ τὸν Ἰουλιανόν. Prisc. 141, 13 πρέσβεις τους Διαλεξα
Μένος ἀφικνεῖσθαι. 147, 17 αὐτὸν ΔΕΞΑΜΕΝΟΝ σφᾶς ἐς τὴν Σαρδικὴν
διαβήσεσθαι. 147, 19 ὑπεξῆλθεν ὁ Ἐδήκων σὺν τῷ Βιγίλᾳ ἐPMHNEYCANTI.
149, 11 πέμπεσθαι Βιγίλαν τὴν ἀπόκρισιν ΔΕΞΑΜΕΝΟΝ. 159, 10 φρουρά
CANTA ἀφικνεῖσθαι. 179, 3 συμπέμψειν λέξαντα.
F. PARTICIPLE OF MANNER AND MEANS.
2160. The participle of manner and means represents the
manner in which, or the means by which, something is done,
and has no corresponding finito clause owing to the want of
appropriate conjunctions.
a. Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 26 τί δεδιότες σφόδρα οὕτως ἐπείγεσθε; Ρl. Gorg.
486 Ο τὸν τοιοῦτον ἔξεστιν ἐπὶ κόρρης τύπτοντα μὴ διδόναι δίκην. Symp.
202 Β καὶ ἡ Γελάcaca ... ἔφη. Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 25 ΛΗΙΖΟΜΕΝΟΙ ζῶσιν.
Isocr. 12, 44 τοὺς Ἕλληνας ἐδίδαξαν ὃν τρόπον Διοικοῒντες τὰς αὑτῶν
πατρίδας καὶ πρὸς οὓς πολεμοῒντες μεγάλην ἂν τὴν Ἑλλάδα ποιήσειαν.
2161. Under this head fall the standing expressions ἔχων, ἄγων,
φέρων, λαβών, which in English are commonly rendered by a simple
with (1175"), as:
503
2161-2164.]
PARTICIPLE, ITS HISTORY.
Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 1 ἔρχεται ἡ Μανδάνη πρὸς τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὸν Κῦρον τὸν υἱὸν
Exorca. 1, 6, 1ο σὺ δὲ πεζὴν δύναμιν ἐνθένδε ἔχων ἔρχῃ. An. 1, 2, 4
Τισσαφέρνης πορεύεται ὡς βασιλέα ἱππέας ἔχων ὡς πεντακοσίους. 7, 7, 53
ταῦτα λαβὼν καὶ τοὺς . . . ὁμήρους προσλαβών ἄπιθι. Th. I, III, 2, 84. 7, 25.
Xen. I, 2, I. Hell. I, I, I.
2162. Participles of manner and means admitting as they did of
no analysis to a finite clause for want of suitable conjunctions (2160),
G-N speech had recourse either to some preposition (as μετά, σύν, ἅμα,
1175 ) or to post-verbal adjectives of manner, especially those in -τος
(1052), which naturally increase in proportion as the participle in
question retreats, so that they have become very common in N
speech, as : Mal. 44, 4 Μετὰ ὀλίγων ἀνδρῶν ἦλθεν. 31, 15. 42, 13. 102, 3
ΙΟΙ, 3 ἅμα τοῖς μετ᾿ αὐτοῦ. Γελαστός γελών, τρεχάτος = τρέχων,
πετακτός = πετόμενος. See also 2111.
2163. Another still more common substitute for the participle of manner
is afforded in the M-N participial adverb in -οντας, 04: τρέχοντας ‘running,
περιπατώντας ' walking, στερώντας standing, etc. See 823 & 2146.
2163 b. During G-B times the office of the participle of manner was fre-
quently performed also by the articular infinitive preceded by év (1561.
cp. 2068. 21410).
HISTORICAL SURVEY OF THE PARTICIPLE.
2164. The history of the participle since 1 affords a parallel to
that of the infinitive (2062 f., App. vi.). As the latter was foredoomed
to extinction in consequence of its indefiniteness and want of in-
flection, in like manner the participle, in particular the class termed
adverbial or circumstantial (2101), did not appeal to the taste and
needs of popular speech because of its ambiguity and inconvenient
infection (2166). For apart from its vagueness in regard to person,
it did not even specify its own nature and meaning, but subordinated
it to the context. Thus, to take an exam
Thus, to take an example, λέγων could mean
saying, who says or said, when he says or said, if he says or said, by
saying, in order to say, etc. ; so further ειπών, εἰρηκώς, λεγόμενος, ῥηθείς,
εἰρημένος. (App. iii. 13).
A-B
-
Compure for instance the classical passages in: Dem. 29, 5 ἐπιδείξω τοῦτον
οὐ μόνον ώμολογηκότα εἶναι τὸν Μιλύαν ἐλεύθερον, ἀλλὰ καὶ φανερὸν τοῦτ᾽
ἔργῳ πεποιηκότα, καὶ πρὸς τούτοις ἐκ βασάνου περὶ αὐτῶν πεφεγγότα τοῦτον
τοὺς ἀκριβεστάτους ἐλέγχους καὶ οὐκ ἐθελήσαντ᾽ ἐκ τούτων ἐπιδεῖξαι τὴν ἀλήθειαν
ἀλλ᾽ ἀεὶ ΠΑΝΟΥΡΓΟΥ͂ΝΤΑ καὶ μάρτυρας ψευδείς παρεχόμενον καὶ διακλέπτοντα τοῖς
ἑαυτοῦ λόγοις τὴν ἀλήθειαν τῶν πεπραγμένων, Pl. Symp. 181 D παρεσκευά
ΜέΝοι γάρ, οἶμαι, εἰσὶν οἱ ἐντεῦθεν ἀρχόμενοι ἐρᾶν ὡς τὸν βίον ἅπαντα γνεόμενοι
καὶ κοινῇ εγΜβιωσόμενοι, ἀλλ' οὐκ ἐξαπατήσαNTEC ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ λαβόντες ὡς
νέον καταγελάσαNTEC οἰχήσεσθαι ἐπ' ἄλλον ἀποτρέχοντες. - Pl. Gorg. 471 1-1
νῦν δὲ θαυμασίως [ὡς] άθλιος γέγονεν· ὅς γε πρῶτον μὲν τοῦτον αὐτὸν τὸν δεσπότην
καὶ θεῖον Μεταπεμψάμενος ὡς ἀποδώσων τὴν ἀρχὴν ἣν Περδίκκας αὐτὸν ἀφείλετο,
ZENICA καὶ Καταθήκας αὐτόν τε καὶ τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ᾿Αλέξανδρον, ἀνεψιόν αὑτοῦ
σχεδὸν ἡλικιώτην, ἐμβαλὼν εἰς ἅμαξαν, νύκτωρ ἐΞΑΓΑΓΩΝ ἀπέσφαξε τε καὶ
ἠφάνισεν ἀμφοτέρους· καὶ ταῦτα ἀδικήσας ἔλαθεν ἑαυτὸν ἀθλιώτατος ΓΕΝΟΜΕΝΟΣ,
καὶ οὐ μετεμέλησεν αὐτῷ, ἀλλ᾽ ὀλίγον ὕστερον τὸν ἀδελφὸν τὸν γνήσιον τοῦ
Περδίκκου υἱόν, παῖδα ὡς ἑπταετῆ, οὗ ἡ ἀρχὴ ἐγίγνετο κατὰ τὸ δίκαιον οὐκ ἐβουλήθη
εὐδαίμων γενέσθαι δικαίως ἐκθρέψας καὶ ἀπολογς τὴν ἀρχὴν ἐκείνῳ ἀλλ᾽ εἰς φρέαρ
ἐμβαλὼν ἀποπνίξας πρὸς τὴν μητέρα Κλεοπάτραν χῆνα ἔφη Διώκοντα ἐμπεσεῖν
καὶ ἀποθανεῖν. Th. 1, 2,
504
PARTICIPLE, ITS HISTORY.
[2165-2168.
2165. Το avoid such ambiguities as well as the mental strain
involved by the frequent use of participles, even A writers, though
fond of participial construction (φιλομέτοχοι), very often resorted to
the expedient of a lengthy but clearer and easier analysis into a
subordinate clause, thus resolving e. g. βουλόμενος into εἰ βούλεται
or ἐβούλετο, ἐπεὶ βούλεται or ἐβούλετο, ὃς βούλεται οι έβούλετο, ὅτι
(ώς) βούλεται or ἐβούλετο, etc. In Ρ literature this tendency for
analysis naturally became more popular, and so we find that in G
compositions, especially those of unconventional or unscholarly
character, the accumulation of circumstantial participles is shunned,
their place being taken by finite verbs with either the appropriate
subordinating particles or the co-ordinating conjunction καί (1703.
1711 ff.).
Cp. Matt. 7, 27 καὶ κατέβη ἡ βροχὴ καὶ ἦλθον οἱ ποταμοὶ καὶ ἔπνευσαν οἱ
ἄνεμοι καὶ προσέκοψαν τῇ οἰκίᾳ ἐκείνῃ καὶ ἔπεσεν, καὶ ἦν ἡ πτῶσις αὐτῆς μεγάλη.
17, 18 καὶ ἐπετίμησεν αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ τὸ δαιμόνιον και
ἐθεραπεύθη ὁ παῖς. So 26, 40. 8, 14-16. Mark I, 12-13.
Luke 28, 32-34.
19, 2-3. Mark 14, 16 καὶ ἐξῆλθον οἱ μαθηταὶ καὶ ἦλθον εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ εὗρον
καθὼς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς καὶ ἡτοίμασαν τὸ πάσχα. John 3, 2-3 (for ἐλθὼν—εἶπεν and
ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν). 4, 47-50. Protev. Jac. 24, 4 καὶ ἤκουσαν πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τοῦ
λαοῦ καὶ ἐπένθησαν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐκύψαντο τρεῖς ἡμέρας.-On the other hand for
several participles cp. Matt. 14, 19. 27, 48. Eph. 1, 15-21. Col. 1, 3-12.
Acts 22, 26. 16, 27. 24, 5.
2166. The other cause which has considerably told on the P-N
history of the participle -- at all events since G-was the cumbersome
infection of its imparisyllabic class (-ων, -ON, -ουσα; - ώς, -oc, -υία ;
-AC, -AN, -ασα; -είς, -έΝ, -εῖσα; -C, -ΥΝ, -ύσα; -OC, -ΟΥΝ, -ούσα), that is
the same morphological inconvenience which caused the retreat and
disappearance of the 3rd declension (338. App. iii. 13).
2167. It may be objected that the literary productions of P-N
times show a great frequency of the participle in well-nigh all its A
varieties. However, a closer examination leads to the conviction
that the phenomenon had become a scholastic practice, while
popular speech being governed by the spirit of analysis and aiming
at perspicuity and emphasis, was, as before, altogether unfit for such
compressed and artificial forms of structure. Hence even writers of
systematic training could not but occasionally blunder in the use
of the circumstantial participle.
2168. That the circumstantial participle, especially that of im-
parisyllabic inflection, has been foreign to the living or popular
language since T, if not earlier, may be inferred—
a. From its frequent misapplication and misconstruction, notably in
tho genitivo and nominativo absoluto (2145. 21495).
b. From its identification with the finite verb or the infinitive, and its
consequent misuse as an independent finite verb or oven its co-ordination
to them by means of και (1720):
I
Alchom. 37, 19 καὶ τρίψας ἀμφότερα εἰς τὴν θυείαν ἡμέραν μίαν καὶ ἔμβαλε αὐτὰ
εἰς βίκον ὑέλινον. Evang. Tho. Β. 7, 1 γράψας δὲ δ Ζακχαῖος τὴν ἀλφάβητον Εβραϊ
στὶ καὶ λέγει πρὸς αὐτὸν ἄλφα. Vitu Epiph, 100 Β ΔΕΞΑΜΕΝΟΣ οὖν ὁ βασιλεὺς τὰ
γράμματα παρὰ Επιφανίου καί ἐποίησεν τύπον τοιοῦτον. Mal. 120, 16
φυσικὸν γὰρ τοὺς ἀντεραστὰς ὁρᾶν ἀλλήλους ὡς θηρία καὶ πρὸς ἀλλήλους
ἐπερχομένους ἄχρις φόνου. 124, 5 ἑωρακὼς δὲ αὐτοὺς ὁ Πρίαμος, ἑαυτὸν εἰς
τὸ ἔδαφος ρίψας, κόνιν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ φέρων καὶ ΔεόμεNOC αὐτῶν
505
2168–2170.]
PARTICIPLE, ITS HISTORY.
συνικέτας (sic) γενέσθαι πρὸς τὸν ᾿Αχιλλέα ὑπὲρ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Ἕκτορος. ib.
14 ἡ δὲ Πολυξένη περιπλακεία τοῖς ποσὶ τοῦ σοῦ γενέτου περὶ τοῦ αὑτῆς ἀδελφοῦ
*Εκτορος δουλεύειν ἐπαγγειλαΜέΝΗ καὶ μένειν σὺν αὐτῷ εἰ ἀποδῷ τὸν νεκρόν.
313, 11-15. 387, 1 ἡ δὲ βασίλισσα ᾿Αριάδνη ΔΕΞΑΜΕΝΗ παρὰ τῆς ἰδίας αὐτῆς
μητρὸς γράμματα λάθρα καὶ παρεκάλεσε τὸν βασιλέα Ζήνωνα ἵνα ἀπολυθῇ ἀπὸ
καστελλίου ὅπου ἦν ἀποκεκλεισμένη ἡ δέσποινα Βηρίνα. 389, 5 καὶ ἀкo'cac Λεόντιος
καὶ Ἰλλοῦς καὶ οἱ μετ᾿ αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀνῆλθαν μετὰ Βηρίνης εἰς τὸ Παπῦριν καστέλλιον.
435, 5-8. 446, 16–7. 468, 12-3. 473, 9-11. 495, 10 проσeтéon dè
τῷ τρούλλῳ κατὰ τὸ παλαιὸν σχῆμα πόδες λ', καὶ τὰς δύο καμάρας ἐκ προσθήκης
ποιήCANτες, τήν τε ἀρκτῴαν καὶ τὴν μεσημβρινήν.
407, 22.
c. From the confusion of its gondor, chiefly in the imparisyllabic
declension, on which see 1181b.
d. From its adverbial function, especially in tho accusative singular
neuter, on which see 822 f.
e. From the express testimony of M grammarians, as Pachom. (ed.
JMigne) 1352 Β οἱ μὲν Κυθήριοι τὰς μετοχὰς ἔχουσιν ἐν συνηθείᾳ, ἄλλοι δὲ σπανίως
καὶ οὐχ ὡς δεῖ.
f. From its absence in N speech.
2169. Vagueness then and inconvenience of inflection, coupled
with the analytical spirit of the time, were the chief factors which
have operated on the P-N history of the circumstantial participle.
On the other hand it will be remembered that in cases where the
nature and function of the participle were sufficiently clear, or where
its form followed a familiar type of inflection (as in the passive
ending - μενος: λεγόμενος, εἰρημένος) there were fairer chances of its
longer preservation and partial survival to the present day (2110 ff.).
2170. To recapitulate, the A participle survives in N speech only
in the form -μeros, and that chiefly as a predicative participle (perfect
passive) (2110f.), or as a mere adjective (2111), rarely substantive
(2112). In all other cases, it has been replaced either-
(4) by an independent finite mood, co-ordinated to the leading
verb by means of kai (1710 ft. 2165); or-
(B) by a subordinate finite mood introduced by the appropriate
particle. In particular, in this case it has been replaced-
a. If attributive, by a finite relativo clause (2010-26. 2103 ff.);
b. If predicative (so far as it does not survive | 2110 f.]), first (that is during
G-B) by the infinitive (2117-21. 2127), thon (during M-N) by the
analysis of this infinitive.
c. If objective (2133-5), partly by a declarative clause, partly by the pro-
spective infinitive, later replaced by its analysis (2138).
d. If temporal, by a finito temporal clause, in G-B also by ev tậ or μetà
To with the infinitive (2149), lalor by its analysis (2072).
e. If causal, by a finito causal clause and sometimes (especially during
G B) by did Td with the infinitive (2151), in M-N by its analysis (2072).
f. If conditional, by a finite conditional clause, in G-N also partly by the
imperative co-ordinated to the leading verb by means of aí (2154), partly
by a direct interrogative finito clauso the apodosis then serving as an
answer to it (1928 ↳. 1977, b. 2154).
g. If concessive, by a finito concossive clause (2156).
h. If final, by a final clause (2158f.), or a final relativo clauso (2020);
during II-B also by the infinitive often preceded by wote, or by els tú, πpds
Tú, xáρiv Toû, ¿ì Tó, and the infinitive (2158); raroly by the indicative
preceded by raí (1710 f.).
If denoting manner or means, by an appropriate (advorbial or proposi-
tional) expression or clause; sometimos also by an adjective in -70s or
by a propositional infinitive (2162 ff.).
506
APPENDIX I.
ACCENT.
A. ORIGIN AND HISTORY OF ACCENT.
1. Just as the twenty-four letters of the Greek alphabet were
invented or adopted to express pre-existing sounds, so accentual
marks were devised to express accents already pre-existing in the
language (76). For the accent or stress of the voice in a language
is coeval with the language itself. There is only this difference
between letters and accentual marks, that the former indispensably
precede, while the latter, serving as they do less urgent needs, can
either be altogether dispensed with, as it has happened in Latin
and most modern languages, or they follow long after the alphabet
proper has been generally received. Accordingly the Greek language,
though it unquestionably indicated the accent at all times, shows on the
whole no accentual marks either in the inscriptions or in the earlier
papyri. Such accents seem to have been current as early as the
Vth B.C.-though as scanning marks-if we are to place faith in Varro
(iv. 530, HKeil), who, while enumerating the various names of the
circumflex, asserts that Epicharmos (Vth B.C.) called it pоσædia
kekdaoµćvŋ (infra 5). A similar practice is attributed to Glaukos of
Samos who lived in the same century. This last theorist is represented
as speaking of no less than six different accents or mрoodin, namely
the ἀνειμένη, μέση, ἐπιτεταμένη, κεκλασμένη, αντανακλαζομένη (ωμένη ?), and
a sixth of which the name has not been preserved. See 76 [2]; infra
5; and App. ii. 16.
2. It is only during the IVth that we get some explicit information
in the accounts given of a number of theorists and professed gramma-
rians, such as Dionysios of Olympos, Ephoros of Cumae, Hermocrates
of Iasos, and others ([Sergius] in HKeil iv. 530 f.), and above all in
Plato and Aristotle.
Pl. Crat. 399 Α-Β : πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ τὸ τοιόνδε δεῖ ἐννοῆσαι περὶ ὀνομάτων ὅτι
πολλάκις ἐπεμβάλλομεν γράμματα, τὰ (ἅττα?) δ᾽ ἐξαιροῦμεν παρ' δ βουλόμεθα
ὀνομάζοντες καὶ τὰς ΟΞΥΤΗΤΑ μεταβάλλοντες, οἷον Διὶ φίλος. τοῦτο ἵνα ἀντὶ
ῥήματος (i.o. complex) ὄνομα (i.o. word) ἡμῖν γένηται, τό τε ἕτερον αὐτόθεν ἰῶτα
ἐξείλομεν καὶ ἀντὶ ὀξείας τῆς μέσης συλλαβῆς ΒΑΡΕῖαν ἐφθεγξάμεθα. ἄλλων δὲ
(road ἄλλοτε, which will also correspond to the procoding πολλάκις) του
ναντίον ἐμβάλλομεν γράμματα, τὰ δὲ βαρύτερα ή θεγγόμενα [1].
' So too Pseudo-Plutarch records in Demosthenos' Vila 845 B ( = 283 AWestor-
mann) that the lattor was froquently hooted for pronouncing 'AokλýπOS in
order to represent that god as ἤπιος : ὤμνυε δὲ καὶ τὸν ᾿Ασκληπιὸν προπαροξύνων
Ασκλήπιον, καὶ παρεδείκνυεν αὑτὸν ὀρθῶς λέγοντα· εἶναι γὰρ τὸν θεὸν μπιον, καὶ
ἐπὶ τούτῳ πολλάκις ἐθορυβήθη.
507
3-5.]
APP. I.—HISTORY OF ACCENT.
3. This analytical commont of Plato on Διὶ φίλος-Δίφιλος is very instructive
for the speech of his time, since it shows: (a) that Au piλos became Aiλos
by the more dropping of one ; (b) that this, though 'contracted' according
to our notions, did not differ 'quantitatively' from the ordinary, otherwise
Plato could not have failed to emphasize the difference between the original l
and the resulting ī; and (c) that the unaccented syllable -- in Aípıλos was
called Bapela (unstressed) or Baрvrépa (less stressed). Op. 76 [1] & 105 [1].
τ
4. Still more valuable is Aristotle's testimony, since he not only
speaks of (acoustic) accent, as in Elen. Soph. 20, 3; 21 [Poet. 20];
but even mentions accentual marks in Elen. Soph. 20, 3: 'There can
be no ambiguity in divided words; for an expression does not remain
the same when divided, since OPOE and OPOE when pronounced
with the (proper) accent mean something different. But while in
writing a word is the same when it is written with the same characters.
and in the same order-though they now provide words with marks— its
sound is not the same '
"
5. If it ever had a real existence, the system of numerous scan-
ning-accents attributed to Glaukos (supra 1) was far too subtle and
complicated for practical purposes, and so we find that in the IIIrd
accentual marks are resorted to with the object of facilitating the
rhythmical reading and understanding of 'ancient texts, in particular
those of ancient poets whose prosody and language had by this time
become obsolete and incomprehensible. Accordingly the words were
marked by school-masters in the interest of their pupils with accentual
(rhythmical) marks, like many English and German reading and
hymnal books in our own days. This practical purpose was also kept
in view by the grammarians, inasmuch as, while applying rhythmical
accent to prose texts in the shape of natural or grammatical accent,
they refrained from unnecessary subtleties in symbolizing its gram-
matical form [2].-The first work systematically accented was presum-
ably (according to KLehrs de Aristarchi Studiis 257-316) the Homeric
text of Aristarchos, possibly also his editions of other poets.-Finally
Aelios Herodian (Id A.D.), son and pupil of Apollonios Dyscolos,
collected in his καθολικὴ προσῳδία, Ἰλιακὴ προσῳδία, and Οδυσσειακὴ
πрoơædia, all information found in the various works of his Alexandrian
predecessors, and these porodia of his seem to have remained for
all subsequent grammarians the direct and indirect source of all our
information on Greek accent.
เ
[1] The rather corrupt Greek text runs thus : οὐ γάρ ἐστι διττὸν τὸ παρὰ
διαίρεσιν. οὐ γὰρ ὁ αὐτὸς λόγος γίνεται διαιρούμενος, εἴπερ μὴ καὶ τὸ ὄρος
(D ὁ ὅρος) καὶ ὅρος [originally ΟΡΟΣ καὶ ΟΡΟΣ which I should road pos and
ορός; ep. Bekk. An. ii. 743 ἀναγινώσκειν δὲ κατὰ προσῳδίαν ἤτοι καθ᾿ ὃν ἔχει
τόνον ἡ λέξις ὡς μὴ ἀναγνῶναι τὸ ὄρος ὀρός] τῇ προσῳδία λεχθὲν σημαίνει
ἕτερον, ἀλλ' ἐν μὲν τοῖς γεγραμμένοις ταὐτὸν ὄνομα ὅταν ἐκ τῶν αὐτῶν στοιχείων
γεγραμμένον ἢ καὶ ὡσαύτως—κἀκεῖ δ' ἤδη (D κἀκεῖ δὴ τά; I reud κάνει ήδη)
παράσημα ποιοῦνται—τὰ δὲ φθεγγόμενα οὐ ταὐτά. Cp. ib. 4, 2 ἔστι δὲ τὰ μὲν παρὰ
τὴν λέξιν ἐμποιοῦντα τὴν φαντασίαν (ἔμφασιν ?) ἓξ τὸν ἀριθμόν· ταῦτα δ᾽ ἐστὶν
ὁμωνυμία, ἀμφιβολία, σύνθεσις, διαίρεσις, προσῳδία, σχῆμα λέξεως [mark again
that 'quantity' is not mentioned at all!] Soe also ib. 21 [further Poot, 20].
[2] [Sergius] 23 HKoil iv. 531, 3: 'nec magistros qui tres solas (sc. prosodias, i.c.
/ \ ^) demonstrant erroris arguerim, si modo hoc docendi causa faciunt, cum
ipsos quarta non latout.' The neglect of the fourth here alluded to is \/, which
evidently is no other than that mentioned by Tyrannio and Varro. (Seo abovo
1, & cp. 76.)
508
APP. I.—ACCENT IN GREEK.
[6-8b.
B. NATURE AND FUNCTION OF ACCENT.
[6. Before entering into the discussion of the nature of acrent in Greek,
it will be well at the outset to clear up a point the overlooking of which
has very often tended to obscure and complicate matters. I refer to the
fact that just as the phonetic value of each alphabetic symbol has been,
from our natural preference for concrete notions, identified with its
external symbol, so too the acoustic accent represented by each accentual
mark has been identified with its graphic and conventional symbol. In
progress of time, when grammar rose to a theoretic science (25), it was
inovitable that the converso practice should also have been resorted to.
Accordingly the description proper to the graphic symbols or accentual
marks was applied to the acoustic qualities of the accent. Hence when
we read the grammatical treatises of the G-B theorists we are faced with the
phenomenon that the terminology and language proper to the acoustic
qualities of the Greek accent are transferred to its graphic symbols, and
conversely, the terminology and language characteristic of the accentual
marks are frequently or rathor indiscriminately applied also to the
acoustic qualities of the accont symbolized by them. It is therefore
essential that in our study of the ancient grammarians, we should keep
in mind the above association and interchange between accent and its
graphic symbols (25°).]
7. In view of the absence of accentual marks in all inscriptions and
in the earlier papyri, we are necessarily thrown upon the incidental and
scanty information of classical authors (supra 1-2) and the theoretical
but often irreconcilable precepts of the Alexandrian grammarians,
or rather of their Byzantine excerptors and commentators (25 ff.).
The value of such incidental and second, often even third, hand and
mostly speculative information is obviously not absolute, but as there
are other allied fields which can serve as tests, we can, by a judicious
combination of the two sources, arrive at unmistakable results 1.
8. Regarding the nature and function of accent in ancient Greek,
there are two opposite theories. One maintains that it was essen-
tially what it still is in modern Greek and in all living languages:
dynamic or expiratory, that is stress-accent moving between low and
high stress; the other asserts that it was essentially musical or
chromatic moving between low and high pitch, in other words it was
pitch-accent.
8h. It will be seen that in theory the two doctrinos seem to stand in direct
contrast to each other. Virtually, howover, they have much common ground,
seeing that no language is built upon oither dynamic or musical accent exclu-
sively, for the roal distinction is due to the fact that one of the two modes of
accontuation always appears as dominant and typical [3]. Henco followers of
[1] Choor, in Bekk. An. ii. 7o3 : ἱστέον ὅτι τριχῶς λέγεται ἡ προσῳδία. καὶ ἡ
παρὰ τοῖς μουσικοῖς, τουτέστι τὸ στόμα καὶ ἡ ἐκφώνησις τῶν αὐλῶν, λέγεται προστ
ῳδία· καὶ ἡ ἐν τῇ ἐκφωνήσει γινομένη, τουτέστιν ἐν τῷ παροξύνεσθαι λέξιν ἢ
ὀξύνεσθαι ἢ περισπᾶσθαι· καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ χαρακτήρ τῶν τύνων καὶ τῶν χρόνων καὶ
τῶν πνευμάτων, οἷον ἐξεῖα, βαρεία, περισπωμένη. (25.)
[2] 'Our means of dotormining tho accentuation in the older periods of the
Indogermanic languages are the works of the native grammarians, motre, the
accont marks of the toxts handed down to us, the modifying influences oxercisod
by the accont on the sounds, and tho accontuation in the living languages
which form the continuation of those oldor stages of dovolopment.' KBrug-
mann, Comp. Gram, i. 530.
[3] None of tho Indo-Germanic languagos had and has oxclusively oxpiratory,
and none exclusivoly musical accont. But ono of the two kinds of accont
509
8b-9.]
APP. I.—ACCENT IN GREEK.
the stress-accent theory in accenting (stressing) a syllable, inevitably raise also
their voice to a higher pitch, and conversely professors of the pitch-accont
theory inevitably fall back upon stress. (Cp. App. ii. 1.)
8°. 'It is correct to say that accent consists in the intensification or ele-
vation of the tone, but it is wrong to seek to distinguish a word-accent effected
by the elevation of the tone from a word-accent effected by intensification of
the tone. In the course of speech the tone of the voice moves up and down
corresponding to the alternation of the poriods and their content. But what
we call the high tone or the low tone of a word are virtually accents of a
various degree, so however that the high tone is the stronger and the low
tone the wouker. That in the case of the stronger accent the tone of the voice
is raised more or loss perceptibly to the higher, is a secondary phenomenon.'
EBrücke 3.
9. The arguments advanced by the followers of the stress-accent
theory are first all those physiological factors which give language
an organic life, since they contend that classical Greek was not
a mummy, as represented in the surviving lifeless texts, but, like all
modern languages, a living and spoken tongue; then the peculiar
nature of trisyllabic accentuation which physiologically can be ex-
plained only as the result of expiratory effort, and at the same
time as the chief factor in the preservation, to the present day,
of the eminently inflectional character of Greek (81). Such con-
siderations, as well as other criteria and historical data, will be
specified in dealing with the counter-arguments adduced by pro-
fessors of the pitch-accent theory. These are three :
(1) Anumber of passages in ancient grammarians, rhetoricians, and
musicians testify to the musical character of Greek accent [2];
(2) The very terminology used in accentuation points to a musical
origin (προσωδία, τόνος, ὀξύς, βαρύς, ὀξύνειν, βαρύνειν); and--
(3) Accent has absolutely no influence on the rhythm of the Greek
verse; or to put it another way, quantity on which the whole system of
always appears, in the stages of development accessible to our observation, us
dominant and typical for the history of sounds. Essentially expiratory accent
appears in Old Armonian, in the Old Italic dialects, in Keltic, Germanic, and
Lithuanian, essentially musical [?] in Sanskrit and Ancient Greek. We have
no satisfactory information concerning the accent in the Old Iranian dialects
and of the Old Bulgarian.' KBrugmann, Comp. Gram. i. 529. Cp. II Hirt 24 f.
[The phenomenon was correctly accounted for by the ancients themselves.
Bekk. An. ii. 686, 12 απορήσειε δ᾽ ἄν τις διατί μή ἐστι τάσις (accent) πρὸ τριῶν
συλλαβῶν. λέγομεν οὖν πρῶτον ὅτι ἀδύνατόν ἐστι ἐκταθῆναι τὴν φωνὴν πέραν
τοῦ τοιούτου μέτρου, ἤτοι προ τριῶν συλλαβῶν ὀξυνθῆναι, etc.—and 802, 12 καὶ
περαιτέρω τούτων οὐ δέδωκεν ἡμῖν ἡ φύσις, οὐδὲ ἐὰν ἐθελήσωμεν ἐπαρκεῖ τὸ
πνεῦμα. ὥστε πρὸ τριῶν συλλαβῶν, τουτέστι τετάρτην ἀπὸ τέλους ἐξεῖαν ἐπί τινων
λέξεων ποιῆσαι ἡμᾶς ἀδύνατον.—Also iii. 1211 = Arc. 139, 18 οὐδέποτε πρὸ τεσσά-
ρων χρόνων τίνος πίπτει. Arc. 190, 14 πόρρω τοῦδε (τοῦ τρίτου ἀπὸ τοῦ πέρατος
Ο τόνος) οὐ πρόεισιν οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἐπιμήκιστον εἴη τὸ ὄνομα. Bekk. An. ii. 685
ἀδύνατόν ἐστιν ἐκταθῆναι τὴν φωνὴν πέραν τοῦ τοιούτου μέτρου, ἤτοι πρὸ τριῶν
συλλαβῶν ὀξυνθῆναι. Cie. Orat. 18, 58 ipsa enim natura, quasi modularetur
hominum orationem, in omni vorbo posuit acutam vocem, nec una plus nec a
postrema syllaba cilra tertiam.
12 As a matter of course tostimonios to the contrary aro not wanting, as:
Schol. in Dion. Th. 754 1. πᾶσα φωνὴ ἐκπεμπομένη, μετὰ δυνάμεως εκπέμπεται.
αὕτη οὖν ἡ δύναμις κατὰ τὸν τεχνικὸν τόπος λέγεται ἀνάγκη οὖν πᾶσαν συλ-
λαβὴν ἥτις συντείνει εἰς τὴν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου φωνὴν τόνον ἴδιον ἔχειν. 755, 15 ἀμή-
χανον γάρ ἐστι φωνὴν δίχα τάσεως ἀποτελεσθῆναι. εἰ γὰρ φωνή έστι ἀὴρ
πεπληγμένος, δεῖ δὲ τὴν πλῆξιν μετὰ τάσεως γίνεσθαι, οὐκ ἂν εἴη φωνὴ δίχα τόνου
πᾶσα τοίνυν συλλαβὴ τόνῳ κέχρηται. Cp. also proceding and following notes.
510
APP. I. ACCENT IN GREEK.
[9–11.
ancient Greek verse rests, cannot possibly be reconciled with stress-
accent.
10. It must be stated here at once that, in taking our stand on this
pitch-accent theory, we are faced by many and almost insuperable
difficulties. In the first place Greek is a language which, owing to
its singular aptitude for forming compounds and its wealth in prefixes
and suffixes, consists essentially of polysyllabic words, words which
very frequently are of unusual length. Cp. ȧyopevéµevai (v 327), kara-
ἀγορευέμεναι κατα-
κοσμήσησθε (χ 440), ποντοπορευέμεναι (ε 277), ἐπικρατέουσιν (Κ 214. a 245.
π 122. τ 120), δολοφρονέουσα (κ 339), πολυκοιρανίη (Β 204), συγκαθελκυ-
σθήσεται (Aesch. Theb. 614), διαλεπτολογοῦμαι (Ar. Nub. 1496), καταπε-
πυρπολημένος (Thesm.243), παρακεκινδυνευμένον (Ran. 99) ;-Λακεδαιμονίων,
ἐπιτετηδευμένος, προῳδοιπορηκότες, ἐβεβουλεύκεσαν, πεντακισχιλιοστός,
ἑπτακοσιοπλασιάκις, κυμινοπριστοκαρδαμογλύφος, στρεψοδικοπανουργία, etc.,
not to speak of ἐννεακαι εικοσι και επτακοσιοπλασιάκις (Pl. Rep. 9, 587 )
nor of Ar. Vesp. 505 and Eccl. 1168 ff.
11. We must further remember that in Greek no word, however
lengthy, can have more than one accented syllable ; that short words
and particles (tonoclitics 94". 97ff.) have no accentual individuality
of their own, but attach themselves to preceding or succeeding words
(94-108"), and that not only in ordinary speech and in written com-
position, but also in verse. Now as in each word, especially polysyl-
labic, or in each complex of words like the above, stress or dynamic
accent is virtually the point d'appui and, as without such hold the
constituent parts cannot form an organic whole but remain loose and
lifeless elements, in denying the existence in Greek of such coherent
dynamic accent, we virtually deny the existence in it of fixed
words, and ignore the very significant principle of trisyllabotony and
tonoclisis. In point of fact, those who contend that Greek-and
classical Greek only- was founded on musical accent, believe in
a physiological impossibility, or at least in a unique phenomenon,
since it is now established that all other languages, including Latin [2],
have been and are based on stress-accent [8].
[1] Dion H. Comp. rr (p. 134 Sch.) αμηχάνου ὄντος ἐν ὄνομα δύο λαβεῖν οξείας.
-and p. 130 ταῖς δὲ πολυσυλλάβοις, οἷαι ποτ᾽ ἂν ὦσιν, ἡ τὸν ὀξὺν τόνον ἔχουσα
µía èv noλλaîs Bapeíais eveσtiv. Cp. Thood. Can. 362 (ed. AHilgard).
[2] FStolz, Lat. Gram.2 (JMüller, Handbuch ii.) 317 f.: 'Since the publication
of Weil and Benloev's Théorio générale de l'accentuation Latine (Paris 1856),
with which Corsson (ii. 797) substantially agrees, scholars used to conceive Latin
accent as purely musical. Langen alone (Phil, xxxi. 98 f. and rocently in N. J.
cxiii, 620) saw in it "a transition period of the accontuation." School (Acta Soc.
Phil. Lips. vi.) was more correct in considering it as substantially identical
with our modern accent. To speak strictly scientifically, we must denote, with
Seelmann (p. ii), Latin accent as expiratory (dynamic). The syllable, therefore,
which bears the principal ictus, recoivos not only an elevation of tone (the
characteristic of musical accent, "une note musicale plus élevée" Weil and
Benloov), but also an intensity of tono (intentio according to Cledonius plus sonat,
Servius comm. in Don.). It is only the expiratory character of tho Latin accent
that can account for its tondoney to rocedo as far as possible from the final
syllable.' So further id, in his Hist. Gram. Lat. Spracho 95 ff. and tot ff. Cp.
RWestphal, Allg. Motrik 228 f.; HGleditsch, Motrik 090. -It is only such a
stross-accent that can account for the phenomenon of trisyllabotony also iu
Intin. Now as trisyllabotony in Latin is traced back to Groek influence
(PKretschmer Einl. 150 ff.), it cannot be argued that in adopting the Grook
musical' trisyllabotony, the Romans adapted to their 'dynamic' accent.
[3] The reputed musical charactor of Sanskrit accont rests on ossontially the
samo improbable and foeble thoory: the absence of any connexion between accent
511
12-13.]
APP. I.—ACCENT IN GREEK.
12. But this is not all. If we accept the theory that Greek accent
was musical, no one can perceive how it could be musical when it was
tied down on one of the three closing syllables, all the rest thus being
destitute of music. It is also inconceivable how musical accent
can hold together the constituent parts of a lengthy word, like the
above (10 f.), or even a complex of words as in the very significant
phenomenon of tonoclisis (as ὧν τινων, δή ποτε, εἴπερ τις, εἰς τὴν
xopav), and how the seat of musical accent should be influenced by
the quantity of the ultima. Again, the very frequent phenomenon
of 'contraction,' whether it coincides with the accent or not, cannot
possibly be the effect of pitch, but only the effect of stress. Finally, if
Greek accent were musical, it would have resulted in a very remark-
able phenomenon: the palatal sonants e and i being relatively more
convenient for high pitch than are the guttural sonants a o u: (1) the
higher tone-the acute and circumflex - would of necessity be found
to rest commonly on the sonants e and i (e, ai, [n]; i, eɩ, etc.), not
on a o(w) ov; and (2) in cases of vowel contraction or crasis, the
front sonants e and i, as the higher or stronger in point of pitch,
would probably have prevailed over the back sonants a o u, whereas
the Greek language betrays absolutely no sign of such a tendency.
13. On the other hand, if we recognize the dynamic nature of
accent also for Greek, all the above difficulties are removed, and,
furthermore, a whole series of grammatical phenomena, otherwise
utterly irreconcilable with pitch-accent, find a satisfactory explana-
tion. I mean the anomalies classed under the heads of contraction,
synizesis, vowel-reduction, and syncope, which are commonly explained
and rhythm in verso, the accentual marks of the MSS, and the procopts of tho
Indian grammarians (though see MHang, Wedischer Accont, München 1874,
p. 106 f.). The arguments thoroforo as to the nature of accent in Sanskrit are
identical with those for Greek, and the oxplanation of the phenomenon in Greok
will substantially hold also for Sanskrit, the more so as it curiously happens that
systomatical grammar with all its thoorios ronched its full dovolopment among
the Grooks of Asia Minor and Egypt, that is in the East, and that the Indian
grammarians crop up aftor Alexander's invasion which certainly influencod the
Indian lungungo (cp.34" & 77 & [2]). It is a strange coincidence, indood, that Panini,
the father and most ominent of Indian grammarians extant, was a native of tho
extreme north-west' (IWackornagol, p. lix); lived in Ptolemaic timos (altor
300 B.C.); was familiar with the Grook writing (callod yavanānī), and seems to apply
Stoic principles (25") to Indian grammar.-'As is well known, in consequence of
Alexander's expeditions, the Greeks came to, and remained for a long time in
direct contact with India. Grook princes ruled for ovor two conturios in the north-
western districts of India, nay, as far as the very heart of West India. Groek am-
bassadors wero sont to the courts of Indian kings, Grook merchants, Grook art and
scionce found their way, either through Ponjab or through Alexandria, into tho
contro of Indian lifo. The influence exerted thoroby has been unquestionably
very great, presumably far greater than is commonly assumed. And this rofors
not only to the domain of practical life, as to coinage (even the silver coins of
Gupta show Groek characters), to architecture, to dramatic performancos, to
astronomy and astrology; but also to matters of puroly intellectual culturo, as
particularly to the importation of occidontal talos, fables, sngas, myths, and
other legendary and religious subjects. It was inevitablo therefore that
a great number of Grook words and namos should have found their way into
India, and vice versa. Alb. Wobor, p. 613 T.; cp. BVHoad, p. 701 ff. and IWacker-
nagol, p. lvi.
❤
Nor is it easy to reconcilo 'musical' accont, that is inherent music, with
the external or principal music (vocal or instrumental) which accompanied
poetry, sinco accent, whatever its naturo may have boon, has no regard to motro
and moreover we know that Grook pootry was sung in unison. Cp. infra 24.
512
APP. I.—ACCENT IN GREEK.
[13-16b.
away by artificial and forced methods. For these phenomena too are
nothing but the natural result of stress-accent affecting those un-
stressed syllables which precede or succeed the accented syllable;
that is to say the accented syllable affects the unstressed pre-tonic
and post-tonic syllables tl
13. Contraction. For the nature and effect of this phonetic prin-
ciple see 156 ff. and App. ii. 9. 14.
14. Synizesis. In the case of synizesis, whether pre-tonic or post-
tonic, it is obvious that its occurrence in prose compositions escapes
our observation owing to the absence of any marks for it. On the
other hand, its frequent presence in verse is too familiar to be
exemplified here (cp. 155). It must only be remembered that in
quantitative' versification the accent in the form of ictus operates
from a different seat as a new dynamic factor (85 ff. infra 16b & [1]).
15. Vowel-reduction.- a. In cases of a vowel sequence, pre-tonic
reduction naturally results in pre-tonic synizesis, and thus escapes
our observation for the reason just given above. But in cases where
a vowel is followed by a consonant, reduction is noticeable in
many instances, as: πνιγῆναι, βλαβῆναι, ταφῆναι, ἀλλαγῆναι, τραφήναι,
κραγεῖν, σφαλῆναι, κριτής, πυρός (πυρ), συός (σις), συβώτης, etc.
b. Post-tonic reduction : Lw = 88, as: Ξέρξεω, πόλεως, πόλεων, ὄφεως,
ὄψεων, πήχεως, πήχεων, ἄστεως, ἵλεως, ἀξιόχρεως (ep. πόλεος, φύσεως, ὕβρεος
in the dramatists); ἐκήρυξα, τέτριφα, τέσσερα, etc. So too proparoxy-
tones with a long penultima, as : άτιμος, κατάρατος, ἔρημος, ἄνθρωπος,
ἄσωτος, βαρύτητος, σώτειρα, ἤπειρος, δέσποινα, ευρυάγυια, κάθημαι, τύπτωμαι,
δεδήλωται, ἐλύθημεν, ἐφάνησαν, ἤκουσα. (App. ii. 5. Künner-Blass i. 318 f.)
16. Syncope. a. Pre-tonic: δ' ώδεκα, τετράκις (τετρακόσιοι), ἐπ᾿ τόμην,
π᾿ τήσομαι, ἐκ ράθην, ἐγρόμην, περι-, ἐπι-π' λόμενος, ἐσ' πόμην, γνήσιος, π᾿ τηνός,
π'τερόν, ἀγρόμενοι, ἀγρύπνου, ζω γράφος, μον όφθαλμος, φέρ' ασπις, ῥηξ' ήνωρ,
μελαγχρ ής (from χροιής), δορυξός (148 f.), στ' λεγγίς, πατρός, μητρός,
θυγατρός, γαστρός, ἀν'-δαρός, ἀρ νός [πατέρος, μητέρος, etc. are later and
regressive formations from πατέρα, μητέρα], (αν πότιδος) ἀμπώτιδος, κεκ-
μήκαμεν, κεκλήκαμεν, τετ' μήκαμεν, βεβλήκαμεν, τεθνήκαμεν, βεβ ρώκαμεν,
etc. Cp. also : καμ' μύω, ἀμ βολάδην, ἀμ βολάς, ἀμ βάτης, ἀμ φέρειν,
ἀντρέψῃ, ἀντολή, καλ λείψω, και ρέουσα, κατ᾿ θάνῃ, παρ βαίνουσι, ἀγ' ξηράνῃ,
ἀμ' βωμοῖσι, ἀμ' μέσον, ἀμ' πέλαγος, παρ' τόν (142) [also κα' τάδε, και τούς
for κατὰ τάδε, κατὰ τούς in Attic inscriptions, 1608; though cp. 126];
further: 'τράπεζα (from *τετράπεζα, τ'τράπεζα), etc.
For further A-N examplos sce 136 f.
b. Post-tonic: ἔσται, ἦλ᾽θον, ἔσ᾽χον, ὤφλον, φέρ'τε, τίποτε, σκόρδον,
τάραχος, δίφορος, ἄλ' φα (aleph), δέλτα (daleth), ἅλ' το, (*δεξ σθαι) δέχθαι,
ἔπλεν. (Also μ' πέλαγος, πάρ' τόν.) See also 136.
16. This dynamic nature of accent naturally accounts also for the frequent
phenomenon in verso that a syllable can be lengthened under the ictus and
reduced or ‘shortoned' after it, since ictus is only a different application of
the samo accent (85 ff.; cp. 89, supra 14).
Roduc-
[1] From sound-changes we may often gather what the accent was.
tion and total loss of syllables point to a more strongly-developed expiratory
accont. If tho accent-force of several syllables is concontrated upon one, those
left without forco lessen thoir duration and firmness. Thus the position of the
principal tone is at once recognizablo.' KBrugmann, Comp. Gram. i. 531.
513
L I
17-19.]
APP. I.—ACCENT IN GREEK.
17. It may be pleaded here that the cases of vowel reduction and
syncope are much less frequent in A Greek than in N speech or in
such modern languages as English and German, and that this serves
as an indirect proof that accent in A was different from ours, hence
not dynamic. Such an argument however is of no avail, seeing
that we have no direct specimens of A Greek as it was actually
spoken by the masses (05 ff. 25 f. & [1]), and then it is a notorious.
fact that in Teutonic tongues the accent has become, within the
last few centuries, so strong that it has reduced or absorbed
all unstressed vowels - though this is mostly concealed in the script-
and thus rendered these languages almost monosyllabic and unin-
flectional, whereas in the Romanic and modern Greek languages it
is, as was the case in classical Greek and Latin, much weaker, and
therefore has not succeeded in reducing the unaccented syllables and
thus deeply affecting general phonology (77. 137).
18. After these general considerations which, though conclusive in
themselves, are ignored by professors of the pitch-accent doctrine, let
us proceed to the particular examination of the three arguments
brought forward in support of their pitch-accent theory.
19. The first two rest on the testimony of ancient grammarians or
theorists and on the meaning of the accentual terminology. But
first the very same theory is held and still more fully worked out, with
an identical terminology, by the Roman grammarians in regard to their
own accent which, as we well know, was purely dynamic (supra 11
[2]); no one of them having ever alluded to a difference between
Latin and Greek accent. Then if we collect all ancient information
and terminology, and peruse it carefully and intelligently, we find
that it sometimes refers not to the ear, that is to the acoustic quali-
ties of the accent, but to the eye, that is to the concrete or graphic
symbols of the accent (25°; supra 6 & [1]), and thus virtually describes
the form of the accentual marks ( 1, \, ^ ); in other cases, again, the
above information applies partly to rhetorical accent, that is to the
syntactical or sentence accent, in so far as it refers to the modu-
lation of the voice, and thus deserves the term musical. Here then
it is simply the inflection produced by the periodic or rhythmical
movement of the voice between the lower and higher pitch which
goes hand in hand with stress, and naturally varies with each indi-
vidual case and person. But then this occurs in every language,
whether ancient or modern-φυσικὸν γὰρ τὸ ἐπιτείνειν καὶ ἀνιέναι ἐν τῷ
diadéyeobat (Aristox. 24 PMarquard)-and the accent thus described,
though unwritten, is manifested in every sentence and word of speech,
from the ordinary conversation or personal talk up to the highest
rhetoric and the unaccompanied recitative tone.
Here in every
language the voice rises and falls periodically (rhythmically) and
produces a rhythmical or musical' effect. For while there is no
singing without speech, the converse is also substantially true:
there is no real speaking without some singing. Est etiam in dicendo
quidam cantus obscurior, as Cicero aptly puts it (Orat. 57, 18). See
infra 4 and 20.
[ Judging from the analogy of such oligosyllabic languages, wo may reasonably
assume that in its primitive and oligosyllabic stago, Grook also possessed a con-
siderably stronger stress-accont (32"). Honco ovon londing Erasmians find them-
solves now compelled to recognize a stress-accent for the early stago of Greok
at loast. (KBrugmann 82; IWackernugel § 244.)
514
APP. I.-ACCENT IN GREEK.
[19.
a. Dion. H. p. 126 (GSchaefcr) Μουσική τις ἦν καὶ ἡ τῶν πολιτικῶν λόγων
ἐπιστήμη, τῷ ποσῷ διαλλάττουσα τῆς ἐν ᾠδαῖς καὶ ὀργάνοις οὐχὶ τῷ ποιῷ. καὶ
γὰρ ἐν ταύτῃ καὶ μέλος ἔχουσιν αἱ λέξεις καὶ ῥυθμὸν καὶ μεταβολὴν καὶ πρέπον.
ὥστε καὶ ἐπὶ ταύτης ἡ ἀκοὴ τέρπεται μὲν τοῖς μέλεσιν, ἄγεται δὲ τοῖς ῥυθμοῖς,
ἀσπάζεται δὲ τὰς μεταβολάς, ποθεῖ δ᾽ ἐπὶ πάντων τὸ οἰκεῖον. ἡ δὲ διαλλαγὴ κατὰ
τὸ μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον.
b. Ib. Διαλέκτου μὲν οὖν μέλος ἑνὶ μετρεῖται διαστήματι τῷ λεγομένῳ διὰ πέντε
ὡς ἔγγιστα. καὶ οὔτε ἐπιτείνεται πέρα τῶν τριῶν τόνων καὶ ἡμιτονίου ἐπὶ τὸ ὀξύ,
[p. 128] οὔτε ἀνίεται τοῦ χωρίου τούτου πλεῖον ἐπὶ τὸ βαρύ. οὐ μὴν ἅπασά γε ἡ λέξις
ἡ καθ' εν μόριον λόγου ταττομένη ἐπὶ τῆς αὐτῆς λέγεται τάσεως, ἀλλ' ἡ μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς
ὀξείας ἡ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς βαρείας ἡ δὲ ἐπ᾽ ἀμφοῖν. τῶν δὲ ἀμφοτέρας τὰς τάσεις ἐχουσῶν
αἱ μὲν κατὰ μίαν συλλαβὴν συνεφθαρμένον ἔχουσι τῷ ἐξεῖ τὸ βαρύ [p. 130], ἃς δὴ περι-
σπωμένας καλοῦμεν, αἱ δὲ ἐν ἑτέρῳ τε καὶ ἑτέρῳ χωρίς, ἑκάτερον τὴν οἰκείαν φυλάτ-
τον φύσιν. καὶ ταῖς μὲν δισυλλάβοις οὐδὲν τὸ διὰ μέσου χωρίον βαρύτητός τε
καὶ ὀξύτητος· ταῖς δὲ πολυσυλλάβοις, οἶαι ποτ᾽ ἂν ὦσιν, ἡ τὸν ὀξὺν τόνον ἔχουσα
μία ἐν πολλαῖς βαρείαις ἔνεστιν. ἡ δὲ ὀργανική τε καὶ ᾠδικὴ μοῦσα διαστήμασί τε
χρῆται πλείοσιν οὐ τῷ διὰ πέντε μόνον, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπὸ τοῦ διὰ πασῶν ἀρξαμένη καὶ τὸ
διὰ πέντε μελῳδεῖ καὶ τὸ διὰ τεσσάρων καὶ τὸ διάτονον καὶ τὸ ἡμιτόνιον, ὡς δέ
τινες οἴονται, καὶ τὴν δίεσιν αἰσθητῶς, τάς τε λέξεις τοῖς μέλεσιν ὑποτάττειν ἀξιοῖ
καὶ οὐ τὰ μέλη ταῖς λέξεσιν, ὡς ἐξ ἄλλων τε πολλῶν δῆλον καὶ [p. 132] μάλιστα τῶν
Εὐριπίδου μελῶν, ἃ πεποίηκε τὴν Ἠλέκτραν λέγουσαν ἐν Ορέστῃ πρὸς τὸν χορόν
(follows an obscure or rather corrupt passage commenting on Eur. Or. 140 ff.).
c. [p. 134] Τὸ δ' αὐτὸ γίνεται καὶ περὶ τοὺς ῥυθμούς. ἡ μὲν γὰρ πεζή λέξις (prose
composition) οὐδενὸς οὔτε ὀνόματος οὔτε ῥήματος βιάζεται τοὺς χρόνους, οὐδὲ
μετατίθησιν, ἀλλ᾽ οἵας παρείληφε τῇ φύσει τὰς συλλαβάς, τάς τε μακρὰς καὶ τὰς
βραχείας, τοιαύτας φυλάττει. ἡ δὲ ῥυθμικὴ καὶ ἡ μουσικὴ μεταβάλλουσιν αὐτὰς
μειοῦσαι καὶ αὔξουσαι, ὥστε πολλάκις εἰς τἀναντία μεταχωρεῖν. οὐ γὰρ ταῖς
συλλαβαῖς ἀπευθύνουσι τοὺς χρόνους ἀλλὰ τοῖς χρόνοις τὰς συλλαβάς.
α. Δεδειγμένης δὲ τῆς διαφορᾶς ᾗ διαφέρει μουσικὴ λογικῆς, λοιπὸν ἂν εἴη κἀκεῖνα
λέγειν, ὅτι τὸ μὲν [p. 136] τῆς φωνῆς μέλος (λέγω δὲ οὐ τῆς ᾠδικῆς ἀλλὰ τῆς ψιλῆς)
κἂν ἡδέως διατιθῇ τὴν ἀκοὴν εὐμελὲς λέγοιτ᾽ ἂν ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐμμελές· ἡ δ᾽ ἐν τοῖς
χρόνοις τῶν μορίων συμμετριάζουσα (I read εγΜετρία δρίζογca, JReiske συμ-
μετρία σώζουσα) τὸ μελικὸν σχῆμα εὔρυθμος ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἔκρυθμος.
e. Aristox. 24 (PMarquard) λέγεται γὰρ δὴ καὶ λογῶδες τι μέλος τὸ συγκείμενον
ἐκ τῶν προσῳδιῶν τῶν ἐν τοῖς ὀνόμασιν. φυσικὸν γὰρ τὸ ἐπιτείνειν καὶ ἀνιέναι ἐν
τῷ διαλέγεσθαι.
f. Cic. Orat. 17, 57: Mira est enim quaedam natura vocis ouius quidem
e tribus omnino sonis, inflexo acuto gravi, tanta sit et tam suavis varietas
perfecta in cantibus. Est autom in dicondo etiam quidam cantus obscurior,
non hic e Phrygia ot Caria rhetorum epilogus paene canticum, sed ille quem
significat Demosthenes et Aeschines, cum alter alteri obicit vocis flexiones.
Dicit plura etiam Demosthenes, illumque saepe dicit voco dulci et clara
fuisse. In απο illud etiam notandum mihi videtur ad studium persequendae
suavitatis in vocibus ipsa enim natura quasi modularetur hominum
orationem in omni verbo posuit acutam vocom, noc una plus nec a postrema
syllaba citra tertiam; quo magis naturam ducom ad aurium voluptatem
soquatur industria.—ib. de Orat. iii. 216: nam voces ut chordae sunt intentae,
quae ad quemque tactum rospondeant: acuta gravis, cita tarda, magna parva,
quas tamen inter omnes est suo quoque in genoro mediocris.
g. Arcad. 1. 186 1. Οἱ χρόνοι καὶ οἱ τόνοι καὶ τὰ πνεύματα ᾿Αριστοφάνους εκτε
πώσαντος γέγονε πρός τε διάκρισιν (ν. 1. διαστολὴν τῆς ἀμφιβόλου λέξεως καὶ πρὸς
τὸ μέλος τῆς φωνῆς συμπάσης καὶ τὴν ἁρμονίαν, ὡς ἐὰν ἐπίδοιμεν φθεγγόμενοι.
σκέψαι δ᾽ ὡς ἕκαστον αὐτῶν φυσικῶς ἅμα καὶ οἰκείως, καθάπερ τὰ ὄργανα, ἐσχημά
τισται καὶ ὠνόμασται· ἐπειδὴ καὶ ταῦτα ἔμελλε τῷ λόγῳ ὥσπερ ὄργανα ἔσεσθαι.
ἑώρακε γὰρ καὶ τὴν μουσικὴν οὕτω τὸ μέλος καὶ τοὺς ῥυθμοὺς σημαινομένην, καὶ πῇ
μὲν ἀνιεῖσαν, τῇ δ' ἐπιτείνουσαν, καὶ τὸ μὲν βαρὺ τὸ δὲ ὀξὺ ὀνομάζουσαν. εἰ δέ
ποτε ἐπάδοιμεν ἢ τέλεον ἐπιτείνοντες ἢ πάλιν ἀνιέντες, τοῦτο σκληρὸν καὶ μαλακὸν
515
Ll 2
19-21.]
APP. I.- ACCENT IN GREEK.
ἐκάλει. κατὰ τοῦτο καὶ ὁ ᾿Αριστοφάνης σημεῖα ἔθετο τῷ λόγῳ πρῶτα ταῦτα ἵν'
ἅμα συλλαβῆς καὶ λέξεως γενομένης κανών τις ἕποιτο καὶ σημεῖον ὀρθότητος· ἔπειτα
τρίχα τεμὼν τὴν κίνησιν τῆς φωνῆς τὸ μὲν εἰς [p. 187] χρόνους, τὸ δὲ εἰς τόνους τὸ δὲ
εἰς αὐτὸ τὸ πνεῦμα. καὶ τοὺς μὲν χρόνους τοῖς ῥυθμοῖς ἥκαρε τοὺς δὲ τόνους τοῖς
τόνοις τῆς μουσικῆς. καὶ σημεῖα ἔθετο ἐφ' ἑκάστῳ καὶ ὀνόματα, τοῖς μὲν χρόνοις τὸ
βραχὺ καὶ τὸ μακρὸν ἐπονομάσας καὶ σχήματα οἰκεῖα ποιησάμενος, τῷ μὲν μακρῷ
τὴν εὐθεῖαν γραμμὴν καὶ ἀποτεταμένην -, τῷ δὲ βραχεῖ τὴν συνεστραμμένην καὶ
συνέχουσαν ὥσπερ ἑκατέρωθεν τὴν φωνήν μ' τῶν δὲ τόνων τὴν μὲν ἄνω τείνουσαν
καὶ εὐθεῖαν καὶ εἰς ὀξὺ ἀπολήγουσαν ἐοικυῖαν τοῖς βέλεσι τοῖς ἐφιεμένοις (read ἀφ-)
οξείαν ἐπωνόμασε 1, τὴν δὲ ἐναντίαν ταύτῃ βαρείαν \. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἑώρα τὴν ἔξω τοῦ
μέλους λέξιν οὐ κατὰ τὸ βαρὺ μόνον οὐδ᾽ ἐν τῷ (read οὐδὲ τὸ ὀξὺ καταμένουσαν,
ἀλλὰ καὶ τρίτου τινὸς δεομένην τόνου, τούτου δὴ τοῦ περισπωμένου, πρότερον
αὐτῆς τῆς φωνῆς τὴν δύναμιν ἐσκοπεῖτο. καὶ ἐπεὶ συνέβαινε ταῖς περισπωμέναις
λέξεσιν εὐθὺς ὑπαρχομένην (read ἀπ-) τὴν φωνὴν ὀξύ τι ὑπηχεῖν, κατατρέπειν δὲ
ὡς εἰς τὸ βαρύ, οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ μίξιν καὶ κρᾶσιν ἐξ ἀμφοῖν, τοῦ τε ὀξέος καὶ τοῦ
βαρέος, ἡγησάμενος εἶναι τὸ περισπώμενον, οὕτως αὐτῷ καὶ τὸ σχήμα ἐποιήσατο.
[p. 188] ἐφαρμοσάμενος γὰρ ἀλλήλαις τὰς εὐθείας εκατέρας, τήν τε τοῦ ὀξέος καὶ τοῦ
βαρέος, ταύτην εἶναι τὴν περισπωμένην ἔλεγεν ὧδε πως ἐξ ἀμφοῖν τοῖν τόνοιν ἐξ
ὧν ἐγένετο (Λ) ὀξυβάρειαν ονομάζων. ἐπεὶ δὲ ὁμοιότητα αὐτὸ τὸ σχῆμα τοῦ τόνου
πρὸς ἐν τῶν γραμμάτων ἔμελλεν ἕξειν, τὸ Λ, δεδοικώς μή τι ἄρα ἐν τῇ παραθέσει τῶν
γραμμάτων παραμιγνύηται τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν, βραχύ τι τὴν εὐθεῖαν τῶν γωνιῶν κλάσας
καὶ περιτείνας αὐτὰς εἰς ἡμικύκλιον ἅμα τῷ σχήματι τῆς περισπωμένης καὶ τὸ
ὄνομα ἐπὶ τὸ οἰκειότερόν τε καὶ εὐφωνότερον μετέβαλεν (~)... [p. 190] ὥρισε καὶ
τοῖς τόνοις καὶ τοῖς πνεύμασι τεταγμένως περιπολεῖν τὴν λέξιν, τὸν μὲν ὀξὺν τόνον
ἐν ἅπαντι μέρει καθαρῷ τόνου ἅπαξ ἐμφαίνεσθαι δοκιμάσας· καὶ μεμετρημένως ἐπὶ
τοῦ πέρατος τῆς λέξεως ὁπότε καὶ κυριεύοι τοῦ ὀνόματος, ἡ (read ἢ) παρὰ τὸ πέρας
(penult), ἢ τρίτον ἀπὸ τοῦ πέρατος. πόρρω γὰρ τοῦδε οὐ πρόεισιν οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἐπιμή
πιστον εἴη τὸ ὄνομα, ὁπότε δὲ αὐτὸς ἐνσταίη τὴν λέξιν δ τόνος, τηνικαῦτα
περισπώμενος γίνεται. ἄμφω γὰρ ἀδύνατον, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ ὀξέος καὶ τοῦ βαρέος
δ περισπώμενος, ὥσπερ εἴρηται, γέγονεν. φαίνεται δὲ καὶ οὗτος τὰ πολλὰ
ἐπὶ τοῦ πέρατος (ἢ πρὸ μιᾶς τοῦ τέλους), ἐπιπόρρω (wrile ἐπεὶ πόρρω) εὑρεῖν
ἀδύνατον. ὁ δὲ βαρὺς τόνος ἅτε καὶ ἁπλοῦς τις καὶ μικροτέραν ἔχων δύναμιν,
ἀτάκτως καὶ ἀμέτρως περίεισι τὴν λέξιν ἁπανταχῇ καὶ πολλάκις καὶ ὅπῃ τύχοι
φαινόμενος.
19". It noods only a little attention to soo that, in tracing the origin and
dovolopment of the accentual system back to Aristophanes of Byzantium,
Arcadios, or his authority Herodian, draws a parallel between music and spooch.
But this very fact of comparison docides the question, proving as it doos that
ancient speech was not music but resembled music, a characteristic of every
language.
20. 'In speech the voice glides up and down what, by an allowablo
figure, may be called an inclined plane in song it makes stops the pro-
portions of which to one another aro ascertained. Speech is for the most
part only during the passage of tho voice from one sound to another; it is
the result of intervals: in song intervals are traversed silently and the
voice is heard only on sounds-the torms or boundarios of intervals. The
variations of pitch in spooch may be compared to the effect produced by
sliding the finger up and down a vibrating string; those in song to that
produced by "stopping" such a string at certain points and at no others.
In brief, spooch consists almost exclusively of concrete sounds; song almost
exclusively of discrete sounds.' (JIIullah, The Speaking Voico, p. 19.) —
Those phenomena, which lio within common observation and apply to all
languages and all timos, are the very subject discussed by the ancient
grammarians and theorists or rhetoricians.
-
21. Regarding the derivation of the accentual terminology, wo
shall see in App. ii. 8 & 16, that it originated in connexion with the
scanning or by-singing of metrical texts. Moreover we must remember
that as accent virtually consists of stress plus pitch, the accentual
516
APP. I.-ACCENT IN GREEK.
[21-24.
terminology, even if it had originated in ordinary speech, could
equally have been suggested by the one as by the other constituent
element. The Greeks founded their accentual system on the 'musical'
element (pitch), simply because this element only is perceptible or
audible, representing a scale of concrete sounds, whereas stress or
intensity is inaudible, that is a merely mute effort which escapes
observation.
[22. How unsafe it is, moreover, to draw inferences from the 'original'
meaning of names of things as to their nature, is a matter of common ex-
perience, and even Plato expressly warns us against such a theory. Crat. 436 a -B
φέρε δὴ ἐννοήσωμεν, ὦ Κρατύλε, εἴ τις ζητῶν ἀκολουθεῖ τοῖς ὀνόμασι σκοπῶν οἷον
ἕκαστον βούλεται εἶναι, ἆρ᾽ ἐννοεῖς ὅτι οὐ μικρός κίνδυνός ἐστιν ἐξαπατηθῆναι ;
Cp. also 414 0-D, and 421 D. In point of fact, if we were to assume that
πроowdía, or its Latin literal translation accentus, indicates a real singing,'
because it points to pooάdev, accinere, we might with more reason form totally
different views as to the nature of the Iliad and Odyssey, seeing that the latter
begins with "Ανδρα μοι ἔΝΝΕΠε Μούσα, and the former with Μήνιν Χειλε θεά
What can be inferred from the 'original' meaning of terms like nos (word),
Spâµa (deed), toíŋois (making), ovλλaßý (holding together), etc. as to the nature
of their subsequent technical application? Or is the spiritus asper also musical,
seeing that it is one of the προσωδίαι ?]
23. The last argument for the pitch-accent theory, that classical
verse rests absolutely on quantity, or rather that rhythm (since quan-
tity is very often arbitrary, App. ii. 5 [1]) makes no account what-
ever of accent, appears at first sight not only conclusive against the
stress-accent doctrine, but almost unanswerable. However, by a
closer examination this argument also loses much of its force. For
granting that Greek accent was essentially musical, does verse make
any account of it? Can scanning of classical verse be possibly
reconciled with accent, by assuming the latter to have been musical?
The force of the pitch-accent theory then lies not in the explanation
of accent, but in the utter disregard of accent, be it musical or
dynamic, since we are still faced with the same great problem: Was
there any connexion, in classical Greek, between quantity and accent?
If not, what was the use of accent?
24. The answer hitherto generally given to these questions is
that archaic and classical poetry was never meant to be read. It
was entirely different from modern poetry, which is calculated for
a reading public. As a matter of course, it cannot well be argued that
the classical poetry of the Greeks was subservient to music, in the
sense of our modern librettos, with the exception of its lyric part.
On the other hand, we must remember that ancient prosody was
virtually rhythmic and follows rhythm, a case quite unmistakable in all
the non-lyric parts of tragedy. But a far more forcible criterion we have
in the total absence of any connexion or relation between metrical
structure and grammatical sense, for a metrical period or colon in
Greek makes no account whatever of the underlying sense of the
syntactical period or colon, and in a metrical foot a coincidence of
its end with the end of the word scanned is not only disregarded, but
almost avoided. This phenomenon is both irrational and unique in
language. (Sec App. ii. 5 & [1].) As to the external testimony, we
know from the unanimous statements of the ancients that a poet was
also a composer [', very frequently even the performer of his com-
[4] [Plut.] de Mus. 3 οἱ ποιοῦντες ἔπη τούτοις μέλη περιετίθεσαν.
517
24-25.]
APP. I.—ACCENT IN GREEK.
position. In other words, poetry was regularly accompanied by
music, either vocal or instrumental. In particular we know that
epic poetry was sung by the bards (dodoi) to the accompaniment of
the flute and phorminx (2 495; Pind. Ol. 3, 8; N. 10, 93); that all
classical poets (as Pindar, Archilochos, Alkaeos, Phrynichos, Pratinas,
Lasos, Aeschylos, Sophocles, Cratinos, Aristophanes, etc.) were also
famous composers, a fact further emphasized by the story told of
Euripides that he was indebted for the music of his plays to Cephi-
sophon (Ar. Ran. 944, also Schol. and Frg. 231, b), sometimes also to
Callias (Clearchos quoted by Athen. vii. 276 A & x. 453). Accordingly,
when we study ancient Greek verse, we must not forget that metre
and music were inseparable from each other. This intimate con-
nexion, which in our modern notions of polyphonous harmony would
lead to the subordination of the text to the music, had no such over-
powering effect in ancient poetry, because stage singers then sang
all in unison, so that singing did not interfere much with the parallel
individuality and independence of the words. The classical poetry
of the Greeks was therefore of a different character from that of
modern languages, inasmuch as Greek poetry had reference to music
(vocal or instrumental, or both (1), whereas modern poetry is calcu-
lated almost exclusively for reading.
25. Now this line of argument, much as it tends to invalidate the
theory that A accent was musical, cannot, on the other hand, claim
to afford a positive solution of the problem, since the question still
remains unanswered: Why should metre be founded on quantity and
not on stress-accent, as happened in all other European languages?
As one of the reasons it might be pleaded that Greek being an essen-
tially polysyllabic language with only one (dominant) accent, and that
too weak and shifting, was from the outset ill-suited for a dactylic or
anapaestic metre, and still more so for an iambic or trochaic rhythm.
But the whole problem will be better understood when we have dis-
cussed the nature and history of quantity, for which I must refer to
the next appendix.
[1] Dion. H. de comp. rr (p. 130 Sch.) (ἡ δὲ ὀργανική τε καὶ ᾠδικὴ μοῦσα) τάς τε
λέξεις τοῖς μέλεσιν ὑποτάττειν ἀξιοῖ καὶ οὐ τὰ μέλη ταῖς λέξεσιν, ὡς ἐξ ἄλλων τε
πολλῶν δῆλον καὶ μάλιστα τῶν Εὐριπίδου μελῶν.—and p. 134 ἡ μὲν πεζὴ λέξις
(prose composition) οὐδενὸς οὔτε ὀνόματος οὔτε ῥήματος βιάζεται τους χρόνους,
οὐδὲ μετατίθησιν, ἀλλ᾽ οἵας παρείληφε τῇ φύσει τὰς συλλαβάς, τάς τε μακρὰς καὶ
τὰς βραχείας, τοιαύτας φυλάττει. ἡ δὲ ῥυθμική και μουσικὴ μεταβάλλουσιν
αὐτὰς μειοῦσαι καὶ αὔξουσαι, ὥστε πολλάκις εἰς τἀναντία μεταχωρεῖν· οὐ γὰρ ταῖς
συλλαβαῖς ἀπευθύνουσι τοὺς χρόνους, ἀλλὰ τοῖς χρόνοις τὰς συλλαβάς.
518
APPENDIX II.
QUANTITY IN GREEK.
1. On the nature of quantity in modern languages it is agreed that it
consists in a relatively longer or shorter duration of sound. But that
the two extreme limits of this duration cannot be fixed is evident from
the fact that no two speakers in one and the same language observe
the same tempo (άywyŋ), and that even one and the same speaker
varies his tempo according to the occasion or emotion. Still less fixed
is the relation of short and long sounds in two different languages.
Thus long e in English 'mean' is longer than in French 'mine,'
and o in English 'Rome' is longer than in Italian Roma,' though
the respective sounds are conceived as simply long in each of these
three languages. Generally speaking, in the Teutonic tongues, par-
ticularly in modern English, the long vowels are drawn considerably
longer than in the Romanic, Slav, and modern Greek languages. The
cause of this phenomenon among the Teutonic languages seems to lie
in their prevailing monosyllabism (consequent on the tendency for
abbreviation). This monosyllabism seems to have developed, as
a compensation, a rich gradation of accent and its concomitant
quantity. For it will be remembered that stress-accent and quantity
go hand in hand (App. i. 8 f. 19), so that a stressed syllable is of
necessity drawn longer than an unstressed syllable. In other words,
quantity (prosodic length) appears as the result of stress-accent.
Languages therefore with a strong or diversified scale of accent
have also a strong or diversified scale of quantity, and conversely
languages with little difference of accent show also a small variety
of quantity. To the former class belong, as just stated, the Teutonic
languages; to the latter, the Romanic, Slav, and modern Greck group.
And the contrast between the two groups is very marked. For whereas
the Romanic languages, as well as modern Greek, practically ignore
degrees of quantity, unless wo consider the slight prolongation
attending an accented syllable, English and German distinguish
a whole scale of quantity, that is to say—
a. Very long or overlong, as in see, seed, piece, broad, good-ja, bat,
kam, tot, Sohn.
[' 'It is a well-known fact that in all Romance languages, from the outset, nay
even in prohistoric times, the quantity (length or shortness) of a vowel has
played and still plays a very subordinate part.' EStengel, Romanische Verslehre
in GGröber's Grundriss ii, 1[1893], p. 6.—At the same time, it must be noted that
in all these languages as well as in present Greek, there is a porceptiblo difforonce
of quantity when the vowels stand in position, since here a vowel, which other-
wiso would bo half long (according to Teutonic standard), becomes rather longer
whon followed by two or more consonants or by certain simplo consonants (as
p, λ, µ, v, o), which all soom to act as bars, as: mōnte, pādre, adōre, prêtre, ile
(though hotel - hotel), πατήρ (-), πατρός (-), έξω (τ), άστρα (-4).
519
1-2.]
APP. II. — DEGREES OF QUANTITY.
b. Long, as in arm, far, father, fern, her, place, brogue, note, rude,
fool.
c. Medium or half long, as in ask, dance, event, depend.
d. Short, as in am, fat, add, end, met, it, pity, not, book.
e. Very short or overshort, as in seven, London.
2. As a matter of course, the above varieties of quantity have nothing
in common with the a posteriori speculations of ancient theorists as to
the nature and variety of quantity in Greek, seeing that these specula-
tions rest not on the nature (φύσις) of the elements of a syllable, but
first on the very terms μακρόν βραχὺ and δίχρονον, next on the concrete
number of the letters constituting a syllable, and finally on the grammatical
function of the vowels. Even the best professional musicians' had not
emancipated themselves from this theory.
a. Aristox, 7, 17 (W.) διαιρεῖται δὲ ὁ χρόνος ὑπὸ (read ἐπὶ τῶν ῥυθμιζομένων
τοῖς ἑκάστου αὐτῶν μέρεσιν. ἔστι δὲ τὰ ῥυθμιζόμενα τρία, λέξις, μέλος, κίνησις
σωματική. ὥστε διαιρήσει τὸν χρόνον ἡ μὲν λέξις τοῖς αὐτῆς (read αὐτοῖς i. e. τρισὶ)
μέρεσιν, οἷον γράμμασι καὶ συλλαβαῖς καὶ ῥήμασι (words) καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς τοιούτοις.
b. Dion. H. comp. c. 15, p. 178 (Sch.) μήκους δὲ καὶ βραχύτητος συλλαβῶν οὐ
μία φύσις, ἀλλὰ καὶ μακρύτεραί τινές εἰσι τῶν μακρῶν καὶ βραχύτεραι τῶν
βραχειῶν. ἔσται δὲ τοῦτο φανερὸν ἐπὶ τῶν παραδειγμάτων. ὁμολογεῖται δὴ
βραχείαν είναι συλλαβὴν ἣν ποιεῖ φωνῆεν βραχύ, τὸ ο ᾧ λέγεται ὁδός. ταύτῃ
προστεθήτω ἓν γράμμα, τῶν ἡμιφώνων τὸ Ρ, καὶ γενήσεται Ρόδος. μένει μὲν ἔτι
βραχεῖα ἡ συλλαβή, πλὴν οὐχ ὁμοίως, ἀλλ᾽ ἕξει τινὰ παραλλαγὴν ἀκαρῆ παρὰ
τὴν προτέραν. ἔτι προστεθήτω ταύτῃ τῶν ἀφώνων γραμμάτων τὸ τ καὶ γενέσθω
Τρόπος μείζων αὕτη τῶν προτέρων ἔσται συλλαβῶν καὶ ἔτι (καίτοι ?) βραχεία
μένει (read μενει). [p. 180] τρίτον γ᾽ ἔτι γράμμα τῇ αὐτῇ συλλαβῇ προστεθήτω,τὸ σ,
καὶ γενέσθω Στρόφος. τρισὶν αὕτη προσθήκαις ἀκουσταῖς μακροτέρα γενήσεται
τῆς βραχυτάτης (βραχείας αὐτῆς ?), μένουσα ἔτι βραχεῖα. οὐκοῦν τέσσαρες αὗται
βραχείας συλλαβῆς διαφοραί, τὴν ἀνάλογον ἔχουσαι αἴσθησιν τῆς παραλλαγῆς
μέτρον (-ρων ?). ὁ δὲ αὐτὸς λόγος καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς μακρᾶς. ἡ γὰρ ἐκ τοῦ Η γινομένη
συλλαβὴ μακρὰ τὴν φύσιν οὖσα τεττάρων γραμμάτων προσ[p. 182]θήκαις παραυ-
ξηθεῖσα, τριῶν προταττομένων ἑνὸς δὲ ὑποταττομένου καθ᾿ ἣν λέγεται Σπλήν,
μείζων ἂν δήπου λέγοιτο εἶναι τῆς προτέρας εκείνης τῆς μονογραμμάτου. μειον
μένη δ᾽ αὖ πάλιν καθ' ἓν ἕκαστον τῶν προστεθέντων γραμμάτων τὰς ἐπὶ τοὔλαττον
παραλλαγὰς αἰσθητὰς ἂν ἔχοι. αἰτία δὲ ἥτις ἐστὶ τοῦ μήτε τὰς μακρὰς ἐκβαίνειν
τὴν ἑαυτῶν φύσιν, μέχρι γραμμάτων ἑπτὰ μηκυνομένας, μήτε τὰς βραχείας εἰς ἐν
ἀπὸ πολλῶν γραμμάτων συστελλομένας ἐκπίπτειν τῆς βραχύτητος, ἀλλὰ κἀκείνας
ἐν διπλασίῳ λόγῳ θεωρεῖσθαι τῶν βραχειῶν, καὶ ταύτας ἐν ἡμίσει τῶν μακρῶν, οὐκ
ἀναγκαῖον ἐν τῷ παρόντι σκοπεῖν. ἀρκεῖ γὰρ ὅσον εἰς τὴν παροῦσαν ὑπόθεσιν
ἥρμοττεν εἰρῆσθαι ὅτι διαλλάττει καὶ βραχεῖα συλλαβὴ βραχείας καὶ μακρὰ μακρᾶς,
καὶ οὔτε τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχει δύναμιν οὔτε ἐν λόγοις ψιλοῖς οὔτ᾽ ἐν ποιήμασιν ἢ μέλεσι
διὰ ῥυθμῶν ἢ μέτρων κατασκευαζομένοις) πᾶσα βραχεῖα καὶ πᾶσα μακρά.
c. Schol. in Hephaest. Studemund p. 34 f. οἱ δὲ ῥυθμικοὶ λέγουσι τόδε εἶναι
μακρότερον τοῦδε, φάσκοντες τὴν μὲν τῶν συλλαβῶν εἶναι δύο ἡμίσεος χρόνων,
τὴν δὲ τριῶν, τὴν δὲ πλειόνων· οἷον τὴν ως οἱ γραμματικοὶ λέγουσι δύο χρόνων
εἶναι, οἱ δὲ ῥυθμικοὶ δύο ἡμίσεος, δύο μὲν τοῦ ω μακροῦ, ἡμίχρονον δὲ τοῦ σ. πᾶν
γὰρ σύμφωνον λέγεται ἔχειν ἡμιχρόνιον.—So Pompeius v. 112, 25 ff. (HKeil) : ut
puta si dicas' ct,' unum semis habet. e vocalis est brevis, unam habet tempus.
t consonans ost, et omnis consonans dimidium habet tempus: ecco 'et'
unum semis habet tempus. adhuc non est nec longa ncc brevis; plus tamen
habet a brevi, miuus quidem habet a longa. adde ad
adde ad let's, etiam fit longa.
qua re?
e brevis unum tempus habet, 1 dimidium tempus habet, s dimidium
tempus habet: ecco duo tempora sunt; focerunt duo tempora longam syllabam.
d. Theodos. can. in Bekk. Αn. iii. 1187 ὅτι δὲ τὸ ἡ ἀσθενέστερόν ἐστι πάντων
τῶν φωνηέντων δῆλον ἐντεῦθεν. τῶν φωνηέντων τὰ μέν εἰσι προτακτικὰ τὰ δὲ
ὑποτακτικά. καὶ προτακτικὰ μέν εἰσι ταῦτα Δ Ε Η Ο ω, ὑποτακτικὰ δὲ δύο, 1 καὶ γ.
520
APP. II.—DEGREES OF QUANTITY.
[2.
καὶ τὸ γ δὲ τὸ ὑποτακτικὸν πολλάκις εὑρίσκεται τοῦ ἡ προτακτικόν, ὡς ἐν τῷ ΜΥΪΑ
καὶ ἅρπγια καὶ γιὸς καὶ ἐν τοῖς ὁμοίοις. εἰ ἄρα οὖν τὸ ι καὶ τοῦ ὑποτακτικοῦ
ὑποτακτικόν ἐστι, δῆλον ὅτι ἀσθενέστερόν ἐστι πάντων τῶν φωνηέντων. (19.)
e. Schol. Dion. Th. in Bekk. Αn. ii. 797 f. ‘μακρά εἰσι δύο, Η καὶ ω.
μακρὰ δὲ λέγεται ταῦτα ὡς παρὰ τοῖς παλαιοῖς ἐν διπλασίονι χρόνῳ τῶν βραχέων
ἐκφωνούμενα.—Δεῖ δὲ τὸ ἡ μὲν ἐκφωνοῦντα μηκύνειν τὸ στόμα ὡς ἐπὶ τὰ ὦτα
ἑκατέρωθεν, τὸ δὲ ω ἐκφωνοῦντα μηκύνειν τὰ χείλη ὡς ἐπὶ τὴν ῥῖνα καὶ τὸν
πώγωνα. διὸ καὶ ἐνομοθετήθη μακρὰ εἶναι ὡς μηκύνοντα τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν τῶν
φωνητικῶν ὀργάνων ὑπὲρ τὰ ἄλλα φωνήεντα. καὶ τὰ δύο μὲν παρὰ πᾶσιν ἐν
ισότητι δοκεῖ εἶναι ἕνεκεν τῆς μακρᾶς. ζητησάντων δέ τινων ποῖον ἐστὶ τῶν δύο
μακρότερον εὑρέθη τὸ Η. ἐπὶ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ ω προπαροξύνονται λέξεις τινές, ὡς
ἐπὶ τοῦ Μάντεων καὶ φύσεως καὶ τῶν ὁμοίων, ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ Η οὐδέποτε. ἀλλ᾽ ἐρεῖ
τις ὅτι οἱ ᾿Αττικοὶ τοῦτο ἐτόλμησαν. ἀλλὰ καὶ ἡμεῖς φαμεν πρὸς αὐτὸν ὅτι οἱ
᾿Αττικοὶ οἱ τολμήσαντες ἐπὶ τοῦ ω, εἰ εὗρον τὸ Ἡ ἴσον τοῦ ω ἢ ἔλασσον, εἶχον καὶ
ἐπ᾿ αὐτοῦ τολμῆσαι προπαροξύνειν· μὴ τολμήσαντες δὲ ἀνεδέξαντο εὑρηκέναι τὸ Η
τοῦ ω μείζον.
J. Id. p. 798 Τῶν δύο μακρῶν ποῖον ἐστὶ μακρύτερον; τὸ Η. ποίῳ λόγῳ ; ὅτι ἐν
τέλει λέξεως εὑρισκόμενον οὐ δίδωσι τρίτην ἀπὸ τέλους ἀναπεμφθῆναι τὴν ὀξείαν,
ὅτι κατὰ φύσιν ἐστὶ μακρόν. τὸ δὲ ω ἔστιν ὅτε (προπαροξύνεται· οὐκ ἄρα ἐστὶ
κατὰ φύσιν μακρὸν ὥσπερ τὸ Η. λέγουσι δὲ πρὸς ταῦτα ὅτι ᾿Αττικῷ λόγῳ
(προπαροξύνεται τὸ ω. ἡμεῖς δέ φαμεν ὅτι οἱ ᾿Αττικοί, ἅτε δὴ ὄντες σοφοί,
αἰτίαν τινὰ τὸ (read τοῦ) ω ἀκριβῶς ἐπιστάμενοι διὰ τὸ μὴ εἶναι αὐτὸ φύσει μακρόν,
τούτου χάριν (προπαροξύνουσιν· ἐπεὶ καὶ τὸ Η, εἴγε εὗρον ἀξιόλογον αἰτίαν
(insert τοῦ) μὴ εἶναι κατὰ φύσιν μακρόν, ὡσαύτως τοῦτο συνέστελλον.
= i]
9. ‘Βραχέα δύο, ε καὶ ο. δηλονότι οἱ πάλαι ταῦτα παρατρέχοντες ἐφθέγγοντο
καὶ οὐ τοσαύτην ὥραν ὅσην ἐπὶ τοῦ Η καὶ τοῦ ω ἐποίουν ἐν τῷ ἐκφωνεῖν, ἀλλὰ τὸ
ἥμισυ μέρος. καὶ ἐπὶ τούτων δὲ τῶν βραχέων φημὶ ὅτε (read ὅτι) Ηρωδιανὸς καὶ
ὁ τούτου πατὴρ ᾿Απολλώνιος ἐζήτησαν τί τίνος ἐστὶ βραχύτερον, καὶ ὁ μὲν
Απολλώνιος φησι τὸ ο εἶναι βραχύτερον τοῦ ε ἀποδείξει τοιαύτῃ χρώμενος. λέγει
γὰρ ὅτι τὸ ' ἑκατέρῳ αὐτῶν προσθεὶς ποιήσεις δηλονότι δύο διφθόγγους· καὶ ἡ μέν
ἐστι μείζων ἡ τὸ ε ἔχουσα, ἡ δὲ ἐλάσσων ἡ τὸ ο ἔχουσα, ὡς εἶναι αὐτὴν καὶ βραχείαν
ἐν τοῖς τόνοις, ὡς ἐν τῷ ῞Ομηροι Πρίαμοι καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα. ὁ δὲ Ἡρῳδιακὸς τὸ ε
μᾶλλον λέγει βραχύτερον ἀποδεικνὺς οὕτως. φησὶ γὰρ πρὸς τὸν πατέρα ὅτι οὐ δεῖ
τῇ παραθέσει τοῦ ἡ ἐξετάζειν ἐκείνων τὴν δύναμιν ἀλλὰ κατ' ἰδίαν ἄνευ τινὸς παρα-
θέσεως, καὶ μάλιστα τῆς τοῦ 1. τοῦτο γὰρ συγγένειάν τινα ἔχει πρὸς τὸ ε. καὶ
δείκνυσιν ἐκ τοῦ τὴν ἐκφώνησιν τοῦ ' [that is i] εἶναι ὄνομα τοῦ € [that is ei =
γράμματος, τῷ συγγενεῖ οὖν προστεθὲν μεγάλην τινὰ καὶ δυναμικωτάτην δίφθογγον
ἀπετέλεσεν. τὸ δὲ ω, προσελθὸν τοῦ ω (ubi male ), οὐκ ἔχει συγ[p. 799]γένειαν
οὐκ (read οὐδ᾽ ἐνεδείξατο ὅλην τὴν ἑαυτοῦ δύναμιν. ὡς ἐπὶ παραδείγματος άνθρω
πείου, ἵνα μᾶλλον καὶ σαφῶς αὐτὸ νοήσωμεν, εἴ τις ἀδελφὸν αὑτοῦ θεάσαιτο χρείαν
ἔχοντα βοηθείας ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ ὑπερασπίζει αὐτοῦ καὶ συμπράττει καὶ ὑπερμαχεῖ.
ἀλλ᾽ οὖν οὐχ ὕλῃ ψυχῇ ὑπὲρ ξένου τοῦτο ποιήσει, ἐξ οὗ καὶ ἀδρανεστέρα ἡ τῶν
ἀμφοτέρων δύναμις πρὸς τοὺς ἐξ ἐναντίας ὤφθη. οὕτως καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ ' νύησον ὅτι
οὐχ ὁμοίως ἐπεδείξατο τὴν ἑαυτοῦ δύναμιν ὡς ἐπὶ τοῦ ε τοῦ συγγενοῦς. διὰ τοιούτων
λόγων ὁ Ἡρωδιανὸς ἀποστρέψας τὴν τοῦ πατρὸς δόξαν ἐπιφέρει τοιαύτην δικαιολογίαν
δεικνὺς τὸ ε βραχύτερον ἐλεγχόμενον ὑπὸ τῆς κλίσεως τῶν ὀνομάτων. φησὶ δὲ
ἀληθέστατον κανόνα τοιοῦτον, ὅτι πᾶσα κλητικὴ τῆς ἰδίας εὐθείας ἢ ἴση ἐστὶν
ἢ ἐλάσσων, μείζων δὲ οὐδέποτε. ἢ γὰρ φυλάσσει τὸ τῆς τελευταίας συλλαβῆς
φωνῆεν καὶ δηλονότι ἴση ἐστίν, ὡς ἀπὸ τοῦ (6) ΞΕΝΟΦΩΝ -ὦ Ξενοφῶν, ἡ καλή-ὦ
καλή, το παιδίου-ὦ παιδίον ἢ ἐὰν μὲν τρέπῃ, οὔτε εἰς ἴσον οὔτε εἰς μεῖζον τρέπει
αὐτὸ ἀλλὰ πάντως εἰς ἔλαττον· ὁ Ὀρέστης-ὦ Ορέστα (τὸ ἡ τοῦ Η βραχύτερον),
ὁ Μέμνων-ὦ ΜΕΜΝΟΝ (ἐπὶ μὲν τῆς εὐθείας τὸ ω, ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς κλητικῆς τὸ ο),
ὁ ᾿Απόλλων-ὦ ῎Απολλον, ὁ ᾿Αριστοφάνης-ὦ Αριστόφανες. ἐπὶ τοῦ Ὅμηρος
οὖν καὶ ἐπὶ πάντων τῶν εἰς -oc (ή) φυλάττει τὸ ο ἡ κλητικὴ ἢ ἐὰν τρέπῃ
αὐτό, ὥσπερ καὶ πρέπει, πάντως εἰς βραχύτερον τοῦ ο. ἐπειδὴ οὖν εἰς € τρέπει
δῆλον ὅτι βραχύτερόν ἐστι (τὸ ε?) τοῦ ο, οἷον ὁ ΟΜΗΡΟΣ-ὦ ΟΜΗΡΕ.
>
521
2-4.]
QUANTITY AND ACCENT.
APP. II.
.
•
h. Id. p. 800 Πάλιν τῶν δύο βραχέων βραχύτερον μὲν κατὰ ᾿Απολλώνιον τὸ ο.
φησὶ γὰρ ὅτι τὸ ε καὶ τὸ ο, εἰ προσθήσεις ἐν ἑκατέρῳ αὐτῶν τὸ ι, ποιήσεις δηλονότι
δύο δ φθόγγους, καὶ ἡ μέν ἐστι μακροτέρα ἡ τὸ ε ἔχουσα, ἐν τέλει γὰρ λέξεως
εὑρισκομένη ἡ οι δίφθογγος διηνεκώς συστέλλεται, ἡ δὲ ει οὐδέποτε. πρὸς ὅν
φησιν Ηρωδιανὸς ὅτι ὥσπερ ἔφην ?) οὐ δεῖ τῇ παραθέσει τοῦ ' τὴν τοῦ € καὶ ο
δύναμιν ἐξετάζεσθαι, ἀλλ᾿ ἰδίᾳ ἕκαστον αὐτῶν. ὁ δὲ ᾿Απολλώνιος πρὸς αὐτόν·
ὦ τέκνον, τίνι λόγῳ ; καί φησιν ὅτι πᾶν στοιχεῖον ἀφ' ἑαυτοῦ ἄρχεται, τὸ δὲ
οὐκ ἀφ' ἑαυτοῦ ἀλλὰ (ἀπὸ ?) τοῦ ε ὥστε συγγενὲς αὐτῷ ἐστι. τὸ δὲ συγγενὲς τὸ
ἴδιον προσλαμβάνον μεγαλικωτάτην τινὰ δίφθογγον ἀποτελεῖ. πρὸς ὁ δ᾽ οὐκ ἔχει
συγγένειαν προσλαμβάνον τὸ ο οὐχ οὕτως ἐπιβοηθεῖ ὥστε μεγάλην ἀποτελέσαι
δίφθογγον. διὰ τοῦτο οὐ δεῖ τῇ παραθέσει τοῦ ' ταῦτα ἐξετάζεσθαι. καὶ λοιπὸν
ἀποδείκνυσιν Ηρωδιανὸς τὸ ο βραχύτερον οὑτωσὶ λέγων, ὅτι πᾶσα κλητικὴ ἢ τὸν
ἴσον χρόνον θέλει ἔχειν τῆς ἰδίας εὐθείας ἢ ἐλάττονα, οὐδέποτε δὲ μείζονα. ἐπεὶ
δὲ εὑρίσκεται τὸ τῆς εὐθείας τελικὸν φωνῆεν ὡς ἐν τῷ κύριος τρεπόμενον ἐπὶ τῆς
κλητικῆς εἰς €, βραχύτερον ἄρα ἐστὶ τὸ ε τοῦ 0. καὶ πότε ἰσοχρονεῖ ἡ κλητικὴ τῇ
εὐθείᾳ, καὶ πότε βραχύτερον ἔχει χρόνον ; ἡνίκα μὲν ἡ εὐθεῖα οὐ μεταβάλλει τὸ
φωνῆεν αὑτῆς ἰσοχρονεῖ τῇ κλητικῇ, ἡνίκα δὲ μεταβάλλει ἐλάττονα ἔχει χρόνον.
3. The actual existence as well as gradation of quantity in a living
language can be easily perceived by any attentive observer. But with
ancient and dead languages the case is very different. Here we have
no means at our command of direct observation, except the indirect
test of verse or prosody. Now comparative prosody (metrics) has
established that the versification or rhythmical (metrical) speech in all
languages, whether living or dead, must rest on one of the following
three principles:
(a) The principle of treating language or uttered speech as mere
matter and counting syllables as metrical units without regard to
accent or quantity. In such a system, it is immaterial which syllables
assume the accent or ictus for the expression of rhythm. We may
call it the syllabic or, to translate the German term 'silbenzählend,'
the syllabometric principle. It is represented in the Arian-old
Indian or Vedic and Iranian-poetry (Vedas and [Zend-]Avesta).
(b) The accentual principle which rests the ictus on the accented
syllable regardless of quantity. This system forms the basis of all
versification in all Indo-European languages-excepting the few
mentioned in the following (c) class.
(c) The quantitative principle in which versification rests on the
natural quantity (shortness and length) of the syllables without
regard to accent. This system underlies on the one hand the poetry of
Sanskrit, and on the other the poetry of the ancient Greeks and their
imitators, the Romans and Arabs (RWestphal, Theorie" iii. 36-38).
3. Now this classification plainly shows that, if we leave aside
Roman and Arabic verse as an imitation of Greek metre, the quan-
titative system of versification is virtually restricted to two solitary
representatives: classical Greek and Sanskrit. It is the metrical
prosody of these two languages that we have to consider.
4. In the very earliest specimens of Greek verse known to
history, the Homeric poenis, as they have come down to us, the prac-
tice of quantitative versification appears as a fully developed system,
though by no means rigidly attended to ll. And this system, too, is
[1] Even Martial remarks ironically that no licence was forbidden to the Greok
poets: Epigr. 9, 13 'Dicunt "Eiarinon " tamon poetae, Sed Graeci quibus est nihil
negatum et quos 'Apes "Apes decet sonare.'-'Tho Homeric languago shows an
almost unlimited freedom in the use of long and short as occasion arises, and
522
APP. II.—QUANTITY IN GREEK.
[4-5.
relegated to subsequent classical antiquity and thence passes to the
post-classical and Byzantine versifiers. The strict observation of
such principle through all antiquity then would seem to settle the
question. But here we must draw a line of qualification. We
know, and the fact is incontrovertible, that post-classical speech, at
least since Greco-Roman times, had lost all feeling of quantity (cp.
supra 2 a ff.), and that quantitative versification ever since has been
a purely artificial fabric. That is to say, all post-classical and
Byzantine poets, such as Apollonios of Rhodes, Aratos, Callima-
chos, Lycophron, Menandros, Theocritos, Bion, Moschos, Oppianos,
Manetho, the Anacreontea, Babrios, Nonnos, Musaios, Sibylla,
Georgios Pisides, Theodoros of Crete, Leo Sapiens, Theodoros Pro-
dromos, Gregory Nazianzenos, Agathias, Maximos Planudes - these
and other more or less copious poets, like their Roman contemporaries,
followed a purely artificial system alien to the nature of their native
speech; which is the more significant when it is remembered that
these versifiers laboured under the double disadvantage of painfully
copying both the metre and diction of their classical predecessors,
two elements surely extinct from the living language of their time.
5. In this way quantitative prosody is virtually restricted to the
classical and archaic periods of Greek literature. It is here then
that we must look for the key to a solution of the problem. Now in
perusing Homer, and the tragedians with Aristophanes, we find that
quantity with them consists in three classes of syllables: those 'natu-
rally short,' those 'naturally long,' and those 'long by position.' We
need not raise here objections to the rather misleading notion con-
veyed by the term 'naturally long,' on the ground that the classical
dramatists and comedians were ignorant of such technical distinc-
tions (infra 8). But we cannot pass over several other anomalies which
must have struck every Greek student. I refer first to the frequent
use in metre of long vowels and diphthongs as simple short vowels
(as Il. A 299 οὔτε σοὶ οὔτε τῳ ἄλλῳ, ἐπεί μ' ἀφελεσθέ γε δόντες), then
to the very common occurrence of combinations like o@ppоvās,
σπουδάζουσιν, ἠγάπησας, ἔρημος, κῆπος μου, νοῦς τινῶν, etc. which, if
accent means anything, are physiologically impossible, or at any rate
unnatural in actual speech (cp. App. i. 15, b). Nor can it be contended
with more reason that the ancient Greeks made a perceptible dis-
tinction in pronunciation between ανιαρότερος and μιαρώτερος, or
σοφώτερος and κουφότερος, between δικαιοσύNH and ἱερωσύνη. But above
all I must refer to the singular and unnatural phenomenon of utter
dissociation- and that chiefly in A verse-between metre and sense
(App. i. 24). For we know that iambic verse in Greek makes no
account whatever of the synactical or logical pause, since, with the
rare exception of the bucolic diaeresis and the ἀπηρτισμένον μέτρον
(RWestphal, Theorie iii. 1, 134 ff. etc. & Allg. Metrik 386), the poet
never aims at reconciling his metrical units or their members (lines,
hemistichs, dipodies, feet, etc.) with the logical sentences or their
subdivisions and members (final, middle, and sectional pauses) ¹.
that so, that the quantity is or is not reprosented by the script.'
i. 308, 6.
Kühner-Blass
For the practice in other languages soe RWostphal, Theorie iii. 1, 136 f.;
also Allg. Motrik 386 ff.-For English verse see EGuest, A History of English
Rhythms (ed. by WWSkoat, London, 1882), p. 144: Thoro is no doubt, that
our (grammatical) stops were at one timo identical with our pauses. In the
Anglo-Saxon poems we find the close of every sentonce or member of a sentence,
523
5-6.]
APP. II. QUANTITY IN GREEK.
Still more forced and unnatural is the case-the frequent case-
when the poet forcibly disjoins the parts of a measure (foot) through
a natural stop, and assigns them to two different sentences or even
two interlocutors-as in dialogue-and furthermore squeezing them
into metre by means of elision, or aphaeresis, or even by anticipa-
tion and transposition of the aspiration. Or are we to believe that
in dialogue the questioner knew prophetically both the nature of the
reply to his question and the order of words, and so regulated accord-
ingly the time (mora) in uttering his last syllable, or even snapped
his interlocutor's initial aspiration ? (cp. 171).
Soph. El. 1502 : ΟΡ. ἀλλ᾽ ἔρφ'. ΑΙ. ὑφηγοῦ. ΟΡ. σοὶ βαδιστέον πάρος.
Soph. Ο. Τ. 786 ἔκνιζέ μ' ἀεὶ τοῦθ᾽ ὑφεῖρπε γὰρ πολύ.
&
Soph. Ο. C. 883 ΧΟ. ἆρ᾽ οὐχ ὕβρις τάδ' ; ΚΡ. ὕβρις, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνεκτέα.
Eur. Or. 1345 ΕΡΜ. σώθηθ' ὅσον γε τούπ᾽ ἔΜ. ΗΛ. ὦ κατὰ στέγας
Fur. Rhes. 157 ἥξω. 'πὶ τούτοις τόνδ' ὑφίσταμαι πόνον.
Ar. Ran. 645 ΑΙ. ἤδη 'πάταξά σ'. ΞΑ. οὐ μὰ Δί. ΑΙ. οὐδ᾽ ἐμοὶ δοκῶ.
[2]
(So further: Od. µ 439. λ 441. Aesch. Pr. 482. Soph. Phil. 591.
Eur. Cycl. 261. Or. 1345. Rhes. 157. Ar. Ran. 58, etc.);
5b. But even in the narrative, position between two words cannot have
applied to actual speech, that is to the ear, because no man ever pre-
arranges his words inetrically before uttering them; he simply
expresses his thoughts in words as they occur to him. The artificial
character of metrical position is morcover shown by the fact that in
cases of 'natural length' followed by two or more consonants, the
accumulation of such consonants adds no extra length to the existing
natural 'length'; and that in accentuation, a syllable 'long' by posi-
tion is treated exactly as a naturally 'short' syllable, while the short
diphthongs at and or form metrical length. Add finally that even the
technical term 'length by position' (Dece1 µakpà ovλλaßý) originally
denoted rhythmical length' (89b), or, as others put it, 'length by
(arbitrary) disposition, i.e. institution (by the poets), at any rate,
length by convention.' (Cp. also RWestphal in Kühner-Blass i. 301,
3, and WChrist Metrik § 13).
6. So far then we already see-and we shall presently see more
clearly-that versification with the Attic poets was founded not upon
natural or intrinsic quantity. It was an artificial method [3] founded
coincident with a middle or final pause. In the works of Cadmon and other
masters of the art, wo find even the sectional pause so placed as to aid the
sense.' And p. 145: 'As a general rule, we may lay it down, that the final
and middle pauses ought always to coincide with the close of a sentence or
of some member of a sentenco,'
[RWestphal, Theorie, iii.1, 99 & Allg. Metrik 335; Kühnor-Blass i. 301, 3 & A. 2.
[2] To cite a few moro instances : Ar. Ran. 312 ΗΛ. οὗτος. ΔΙ. τί ἐστιν ; ΞΑ.
Ach. 46. 402.
οὐ κατήκουσας ; ΔΙ. τίνος ; 50 184. 301. 632. 045. 653. 657. 1205.
408. Soph. O. C. 539. 546. 832. etc. otc. Eur. Or. 1608-1026, olc.—Compare also
the émouvaλoph, so frequout in Sophocles, us : O. R. 29. 332. 785. 791. 1184.
El. 1017. Ant. 1031. O. C. 77. 1164. Ar. Run. 298. Av. 1716. Ecol.
1224.
351.
A. P. 12, 73.
Hence Euripides is represented by Aristophanes as using instruments (i.e.
forced methods) in the construction of his verse. Ar. Ran. 956 (ἐδίδαξα) λε-
πτῶν τε κανόνων ἐσβολὰς ἐπῶν τε γωνιασμούς. 797 ταλάντῳ μουσικὴ σταθμή
σεται. 799 καὶ κανόνας ἐξοίσουσι καὶ πήχεις ἐπῶν | καὶ πλαίσια ξύμπηκτα
πλινθεύσουσι γε | καὶ διαμέτρους καὶ σφήνας. ὁ γὰρ Εὐριπίδης | κατ᾽ ἔπος
βασανιεῖν φησι τὰς τραγῳδίας.
524
APP. II. —QUANTITY IN GREEK.
[6-7.
upon precedent practice, a system developed in the course of previous
antiquity and duly handed down to them. Indeed just as they served
as canon and standard for all post-classical and Byzantine versifiers, so
they were themselves pupils and followers of an ancestral system [,
pupils and followers of Homer (Homerists). This being so, it is to the
pre-classical or archaic period of Greek verse (Homer) that we must
ultimately go back for the clue to the solution of the problem.
7. If we take a few representative specimens from Homer and com-
pare them with similar specimens from classical Attic and dialectal
compositions, we are at once struck by the diversity observable in the
phonological structure of these representatives. In Homer we witness
a very frequent succession of vowels. In Attic we observe a regular
vowel contraction and unmistakable avoidance of heterosyllabic vowel
sequences. In dialectal (Doric and Achaeic [Aeolic]) Greek, we notice a
striking frequency of certain vowels (a o w ), then a toleration of certain
consonantal combinations inadmissible in classical Attic. Again if we
turn to the old inscriptions, especially those of Attica, and examine
their language, we find that they show regularly E and O there where
our texts of Homer and the Attic poets now show εη ει and οω ου
respectively. In other words the sonants n w ει ουthe principal
exponents of quantity-are absent, or almost absent, from early Attic
and previous Greek. A few specimens taken from among the older
class of inscriptions will illustrate the case.
1. ESRoberts p. 78 (= IGA 492): Attica (Sigeum): 600-580 B. C.
N.B. An Ionic inscription in prose with a transcription and expansion
into old Attic-both versions βουστροφηδόν, on the sano stone.
a. Ionic: Φανοδικο | εμι το ρμοκρατεος το | Προκονήσιο κρητηρία δε :
και υποκρητηριον: και ηθμον : ες πρυτανηιον | εδωκεν : Συκελευσιν.
b. Early Attic: Φανοδικο: ειμι: το h|ερμοκράτεος : το Προκο νεσιο : καγο :
κρατερα | καπιστατον: και εθμον : ες πρυτανείον: ε|δοκα: μνεμα : Σιγευουσι
εαν δε τι πασχο μελεδαινεν : με ο Σιγειες : και μ επόλεισεν: Καισοπος:
και : Καδελφοι.
[c. In later or scholastic 4 spelling, ib. : Φανοδίκου εἰμὶ τοῦ Ερμοκράτους
τοῦ Προκοννησίου· κἀγὼ κρατῆρα κἀπίστατον [χυπόστατον ?] καὶ ἠθμὲν ἐς
πρυτανεῖον ἔδωκα μνῆμα Σιγεεῦσιν. Ἐὰν δέ τι πάσχω, μελεδαίνειν με, ὦ
Σιγειεῖς, καὶ μ' ἐποίησεν Αἴσωπος καὶ ἀδελφοί.]
2. ESRoberts p. 65 (=IGA 407): Naxos: VII-VI B. C.-Metrical.
Νικάνδρη μ ανεθεκεν ικηβολοι ιοχέαιρη
φορη Διοδικο το Ντήσιο εισοχος αληον
Δεινομενευς δε κασιγνετη ραησο δ' άλοχος μ
·
[As a matter of course, anciont testimony to the artificial character of
quantity is also not wanting altogether. Commenting on the passage of Dion.
Thr. 632, 29 : μακρὰ συλλαβὴ γίνεται κατὰ τρόπους οκτώ, φύσει μὲν τρεῖς, θέσει
δὲ πέντε-hig Schol. expressly admits that such quantity is not fixed phoneti-
cally or physiologically, but morely rests on tradition : ib. 821, 25 f. οὐχ ὡς
ἔτυχε περὶ μακρᾶς συλλαβῆς λέγει ὁ τεχνικὸς τὰς ἐπεκτάσεις ἢ τὰς συστολὰς τῶν
συλλαβῶν γίνεσθαι, ἀλλὰ κατὰ παράδοσιν λέγει αὐτὰς γίνεσθαι, and 822, 2: ἆρ'
οὖν ἔξεστί μοι τὰς διφθόγγους καὶ τὰ δίχρονα διὰ παντὸς ἐκτείνειν ; λεκτέον ὅτι ἐν
τοῖς μετρικοῖς τὰς διφθόγγους ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου, τὰ δὲ δίχρονα οὐκ εἰκῇ ἀλλὰ κατὰ
τὴν παράδοσιν και χρήσιν τῶν παλαιῶν. So too 825, 8: (ἡ βραχεία συλλαβὴ) ἢ
φύσει βραχέα ὄντα τὰ φωνήεντα τὰς συλλαβὰς βραχύνει ἢ βραχυνόμενα τὰ δίχρονα,
οὐ χύδην ἀλλὰ, καθάπερ ἐν τῷ περὶ μακρᾶς συλλαβῆς εἰρήκαμεν, τῇ χρήσει προστ
έχοντες τῶν ποιητῶν.
525
7-8.]
APP. II.—QUANTITY AND METRE.
3. ESRoberts p. 56 (=IGA 402): Paros: VIth B. C.-Metrical.
Αρτεμι σοι τοδε ἄγαλμα Τελεστωδι[κη ανέθηκεν]
Ασφαλίω μητηρ Θερσελεο θυγατηρ
Το Παριω πωιημα Κριτανιδεο ευχομ[αι εἶναι].
4. ESRoberts p. 74. Attica: VIIth B. C. (Retrograde).—Metrical.
ος νυν ορχεστον παντον αταλοτατα παιζει
το τόδε . . .
5. ESRoberts p. 76 (=CIA 463): Attica: early VIth B. C.-Metrical.
[Ειτ αστος τις ανερ είτε χςενος αλοθεν ελθον
Τετχον οικτίρας ανδρ αγαθον παριτο:
εν πολεμοι φθιμενον νεαραν ηβεν ολέσαντα
ταυτ αποδυραμενοι νεσθε επι πραγμ αγαθον.
6. ESRoberts p. 79 (=CIA 469): Attica: early VIth B. C.-Metrical.
Σεμα Φρασίκλειας κορη : κεκλεσομαι αιει
αντι γαμο παρα θεον τουτο λαχοσ ονομα.
7. ESRoberts p. 86 (=CIA i. Suppl. 373 e): Attica: after 527 B. C.
-Metrical.
Μνεμα τοδε λες αρχες Πεισιστρ[ατος Ιππιο] υιος
θεκεν Απολλονος Πυ[θιο] εν τεμενει.
8. OHoffmann ii. p. 48: Thessaly: ±500 B. C.—Metrical.
Μναμ εμι Πυριαδα hoς ουκ επιστατο φευγεν
αλ αυθε περ γας τασδε πολον αριστευον εθανε.
7. These specimens show very clearly that the (Attic) inscriptions
What we
previous to the Peloponnesian war, know no 'natural' quantity.
find indicated in those of them which are metrical, is 'length by position,'
and this 'position' virtually constitutes the principal indicator of quan-
tity. Add here by the way that the Cyprian dialect has no symbols for
long vowels or syllablos, but ignores natural 'quantity. Likewise the
Boeotian and Thessalian dialects know no n, but use a instead; and
Thessalian knows no w, but uses ov instead.
η,
8. As a matter of course there is not a word in the whole classical
literature about quantity, as understood by us; nothing about short,
long, or common syllables or vowels ll, nor is there a Greek word for
quantity '[2]; all these technical terms having made their first appear-
ance in late grammatical treatises, that is in Greco-Roman times [9].
Let us then hold fast to this simple and indisputable fact that the
early and classical poets knew nothing of natural quantity' as under-
stood by us; they only knew what constitutes the soul of poetry among
all nations they knew rhythm [, that is the regular recurrence of
[4] Plato's account of ι α ω manicostly rofors to thoir oxternal form or size,
to the script. Crut. 426 Ε τῷ δ' αὖ ἰῶτα (1) πρὸς τὰ λεπτὰ πάντα, ἃ δὴ μάλιστα
διὰ πάντων ἴοι ἄν. διὰ ταῦτα τὸ Ἰέναι καὶ τὸ ἴεσθαι διὰ τοῦ ἰῶτα ἀπομιμεῖται.
il. 427 Ο τὸ δ' αὖ ἄλφα (α) τῷ Μεγάλῳ ἀπέδωκε καὶ τῷ Μήκει τὸ ἦτα (ur), ὅτι μεγάλα
τὰ γράμματα. So Phaedr. 244 C ἣν (οἰονοϊστικὴν νῦν τῷ Ω σεμνύνοντες οἱ νέοι
καλοῦσιν.
T
[4] The term χρόνος denotes time, tempus, mora, but not quantity in the
current sense of prosody.
[3] Of course no account is taken horo of Arist. Poet. 20-21, those chapters
among many other passagos boing intorpolations of somo G-B grammarian.
Rhythm was called pyemoc in so far as it referred to scanning, i. c. to
tho regular movement of the foot (άρσις and θέσις οι βάσις); and ἁρμονία will
reference to the voice, Pl. Legg. 665 Α τῇ δὴ τῆς κινήσεως τάξει βαθμὸς ὄνομα
526
APP. II.
[8.
QUANTITY AND METRE.
thesis and arsis, of ictus and fall, and this rhythm was indicated by the
προσωδία ('by-singing) or accent, scanning (5), the acute symbolizing
the ictus or thesis, and the grave symbolizing the arsis or fall [ So
they went by rhythm, which they naturally identified with music and
thus called simply 'Musicians,' in special cases also 'Rhythmicians,' ['l
the theorists whom we know as 'Metricians' since Alexandrian times [8].
This fundamental basis, this sole guide in verse, was indicated, as the
earlier inscriptions show, by fixing its beat or ictus (thesis 85 ff. 89), by
means of the acute (infia 16), upon a positional syllable. Now as the
Greek language, even in its A period, is very poor in consonants and
so cannot supply 'position' for every recurring ictus, the question,
the great question arises: How did the Greek poets manage to indi-
cate the rhythm in all the remaining measures of non-position ?
Philologists will of course give here again the time-worn reply that
quantity was from the outset inherent to the language, and that the
necessity of expressing it as well as some new sounds previously de-
veloped in the language led to the adoption of η ω ει ov etc. (28). But how
can we conceive inherent quantity independent of, or rather antagonistic
to, accent? And why should this intrinsic quantity be absent from
the earlier inscriptions and then, though uniform by nature, be after-
wards variously expressed in the various dialects? How are we to
account for all these phenomena? On what principle and by what
process could, for instance, μοντέα, τους νόμους, ἐνς, Χέσμι, Χένεμσα, etc.
become, by compensatory lengthening, μῶσα, τὼς νόμως, ἧς, ἠμί, ἔνημα,
etc. in Doric; μοῖσα, τοὶς νόμοις, εἰς, ἔμμι, ἔνεμμα, etc. in Aeolic; and
μοῦσα, τοὺς νόμους, εἷς, εἰμί, ἔνειμα, etc. in Ionic and Attic ? What
physiological agencies underlie this 'compensatory lengthening'?
The account that the lost sound acts upon the preceding syllable by
developing in it a new vowel sound (ι ν) or quantity (η ω @
*
εἴη, τῇ δὲ αὖ τῆς φωνῆς, τοῦ τε ὀξέος ἅμα καὶ τοῦ βαρέος συγκεραννυμένων, ἁρμονία
ὄνομα προσαγορεύοιτο, χορεία δὲ τὸ ξυναμφότερον κληθείη. See below, note 8.
[5] That προσῳδία originally referred to verse and denoted no intrinsic or
inherent quantity but the art of scanning is distinctly stated by our oldest
grammarian Dion. Thr. § 2: ἀνάγνωσίς ἐστι ποιημάτων ἢ συγγραμμάτων ἀδιά-
πτωτος προφορά. ἀναγνωστέον δὲ καθ' ὑπόκρισιν, κατὰ προσωδίαν, κατὰ δια-
στολήν. ἐκ μὲν γὰρ τῆς ὑποκρίσεως τὴν ἀρετήν, ἐκ δὲ τῆς προσωδίας ΤΗΝ
τέχΝΗΝ, ἐκ δὲ τῆς διαστολῆς τὸν περιεχόμενον νοῦν ὁρῶμεν· ἵνα τὴν μὲν τραγῳ
δίαν ἡρωϊκῶς ἀναγνῶμεν, τὴν δὲ κωμῳδίαν βιωτικῶς, τὰ δὲ ἐλεγεῖα λιγυρῶς, τὸ δὲ
ἔπος ἐντόνως, τὴν δὲ λυρικὴν ποίησιν ἐμμελῶς, τοὺς δὲ οἴκτους ύφειμένως καὶ γοερώς.
[Mark that prose composition, though at first comprised, is now loft out of
account !] τὰ γὰρ μὴ παρὰ τὴν τούτων γινόμενα παρατήρησιν καὶ τὰς τῶν ποιητῶν
ἀρετὰς καταρρίπτει καὶ τὰς ἕξεις τῶν ἀναγινωσκόντων καταγελάστους παρίστησι.
[*] Ag was to be expected, these two degrees of προσῳδία or rhythmical
accent, the so-called οξεία or acute and the βαρεία or grave, are the only
accentual terms known to classical antiquity, the romaining (eight) marks of
προσωδία having been invented by late theorists. See supra and infra 16.
[7] Cp. Pl. Crat. 424 Ο οἱ ἐπιχειροῦντες τοῖς ῥυθμοῖς, and again ib. οἱ δεινοὶ
περὶ τούτων. [Pl. Hipp. mai. 285 D. Hipp. min. 368 d. Ar. Nub. 634 & 646.]
[8] Longin. Frg. 3, 1 w μέτρου δὲ πατὴρ ῥυθμὸς καὶ θεός. ἀπὸ ῥυθμοῦ γὰρ ἔσχον
τὴν ἀρχήν, θεὸς δὲ τὸ μέτρον ἀπεφθέγξατο. Rhythm is based on a number of
syllables grouped togothor under one measure or foot. Bacch. 93 κατὰ
Φαίδρον ρυθμός ἐστι συλλαβῶν κειμένων πως πρὸς ἀλλήλας ἔμμετρος θέσις.
Arist. Metaph. B, 1, 7 (μέτρον) ἐν ῥυθμοῖς βάσις ἢ συλλαβή. Aristox. Rhyth
2, 16 ᾧ δὲ σημαινόμεθα τὸν ῥυθμὸν καὶ γνώριμον ποιοῦμεν τούς ἐστιν εἰς ἢ πλείους
ενός. Arist. Quint. 34 πούς ἐστι μέρος τοῦ παντὸς ῥυθμοῦ δι᾽ οὗ τὸν ὅλον κατα-
λαμβάνομεν. τούτου μέρη δύο, ἄρσις καὶ θεσις. See also abovo note 4.
.
527
8-9.]
APP. II. GENESIS OF QUANTITY.
an empty phrase analogous to the mediaeval axiom natura abhorret
vacuum. For how can physiologically a lost (consonantal) sound re-
appear, and that not in the same place but in a different place (some-
times even in the preceding or following syllable), and in the form
of a vowel, thus affecting the quality of the syllable? (Cp. *TEKTαriw
τεκταν' ω τεκταίνω, *λεγονται λεγονσι λέγουσι.) True, some authorities
seeing the abnormity of the phenomenon argue that the developed
vocalic substitute is 'silent' or 'mute.' But how can a lost sound
reappear in a silent or mute form? Or is there any meaning in the so-
called metathesis of quantity ? (Cp. πόλεος πόλεως πόληος, ἱερέα ἱερα,
λews Mãos.) These phenomena, which constitute a great problem in the
Greek language, will be discussed here by laying under contribution
the following data
a. The phonological interrelation of the various phases (dialects)
and stages of archaic and classical Greek
b. A series of rhythmical phenomena observed in Greek verse;
c. A number of striking analogies and affinities, established by com-
parative philology, between Greek and other ancient languages, in
particular Old Indian and Latin;
d. Certain historical data hitherto misinterpreted;
e. The artistic or aesthetic principle underlying Greek writing, as
explained in 25º.
9. In every language the tendency generally is to shorten the words
by what is styled in Greek grammar aphaeresis, hyphaeresis, contrac-
tion, synizesis, syncope, elision, and apocope. Now if a written com-
position is not fixed from the outset by means of engraving or printing,
it is obvious that, in progress of time, its original constitution or dic-
tion will suffer gradual phonetic changes in the above sense. These
changes, however, forming as they do part of the slow process of the
growth of language, escape our observation. But if the original com-
position happens to have been metrical, the phonetic alterations
suffered in years after cannot fail to tell on its original metre or
rhythm. Here then the necessity arises for restoring or rather indicat-
ing the disturbed rhythm by having recourse to some artificial expedi-
ent, that is by filling up the vacant places, a process which we are wont
to call compensatory lengthening (antectasis), contraction, crasis, etc.,
all of which are virtually nothing else than various manifestations of
one and the same principle: metrical compensation. It is exactly with
this phenomenon that the Greeks were confronted when, after their
national consolidation during the VIIth B. C. (4"), they awoke to the
necessity of adopting a system of national education. Their ancestral
literature, which naturally served as basis of their educational system,
was all in verse (Homer), verse composed long ago and therefore
phonetically changed and metrically disturbed. Consequently school-
masters who had to expound to their pupils not only the subject-
matter and aesthetic part of the poetry, but also its metrical and
grammatical structure, found that the current versions had been
affected by the changes of the languages, in particular by the loss
of certain sounds, and thus presented many mctrical and gram-
matical anomalies which had to be explained or rather indicated in
the interest of scholars or pupils. Accordingly teachers and com-
mentators (Homerists) now began to mark the affected parts or
syllables with conventional signs, such simple signs as would not inter-
fere with the sense, form, sound or aesthetic appearance of the text,
528
APP. II.-GENESIS OF QUANTITY.
[9-10.
L
บ
and yet serve as visible indicators of the underlying phonetic changes.
In Achaeic (Aeolic) communities" the conventional marks resorted
to were either a doubling of the adjoining (preceding or following)
consonant (compensatory doubling), as: *έσμι ἔμμι, Χάσμες ἄμμες,
Χέφνυμι ἔννυμι, Κολοφυρίω ὀλοφύρρω, *κρινέω κρίννω, κτενίω κτέννω,
*φθερίω φθέρρω, *ξενιος ξένος, στενος στέννος (= Α στενός) ; cp. Doric
δικαίω δικάσω, δικάζω, αθεριδίω θερίδδω (θερίζω); then Attic θάρσος
θάρος θάρρος, ἄρσην ἀρην ἄρρην, μυρσίνη μυρίνη μυρρίνη, *μαλλον μᾶλον
μᾶλλον, *φυλλον, φῦλον φύλλον, άλλος άλλος ἄλλος (ep. μικρός, Doric
μικός μικρός), μελιτζα μελιτσα whence μέλιτα μέλιττα and μέλι σα
μέλισσα, etc.—or a vertical (straight) stroke 1, inserted not into the
precise place of the lost sound (which could not be always traced)
but into the metrically affected syllable, whether preceding or fol-
lowing; an epenthetic stroke suggested by its natural simplicity [,
by its already established use as a divisor or mark of punctuation
(e.g. in inscriptions of Crete, Thera, etc.), possibly also by its use as
I-adscript in the spurious diphthongs (2o ff). That this epenthetic
stroke may have been used also as a divisor between heterosyllabic
vowels analogous to the later diacritic marks placed over and u in MS
texts, is of course very probable (20°). On this principle, when original
a e o v occurred before a missing sound (consonant) and thus had lost
their positional length, they came to be marked αι ει οι νι, and so gave
birth to these hysterogeneous diphthongs. That the here was origin-
ally mute and the hysterogeneous diphthongs retained for a time
the phonetic value (quality and quantity) of their simple parents
αεου, is self-evident [3]. Accordingly Achaeic (Aeolic) τὰς ἄρχαιs is
an hysterogeneous and prosodic (metrical) development from original
τὰς ἀρχάνς, and so stands for τὰς ἀρχάς; τὰις δίκαις for (τάνς δίκανς)
τὰς δίκα'ς, μέλαις for (μέλανς) μέλας, ἔσταιμι for (ἱστανμι) ἵστα μι, πάς
for (*παντς, παν'ς) πᾶς, λύσαις for (*λυσαντς λυσαν'ς) λύσα'ς, ἴσταις for
(*ίσταντς ἱσταν'ς) ἱστάς, φᾶισι for (*φαντσι φαν σί) φασί, κλάω for
(*κλαίω *κλα ω) κλάω;—s for (έως) s=εἷς ; τίθεις for (*τιθεντς
τιθεν'ς) τιθές, ἔνειμα for (*ένεμσα) ἔνεμα, ἔστειλα for (*ἐστελσα) ἔστελία,
ἔφθειρα for (*έφθερσα) ἔφθερα, πάτερ for (*πατερς) πατέρ', σώτειρα for
(Εσωτερια) σώτερα, κρέιττων for (*κρετίων i.e. Εκρετσων) κρέτων; κρέισσων
for (κρετσων) κρείσων; ep. τίθειμι, ἐπεισε, ποέτας, εὐγένεις (=-νής), ἔ
(=), μές (=μή);-τός=τούς for (τους) τός, μόισα for *μοντα) μόσα,
ἔχοισα for (*έχοντσα *ἔχονσα) ἔχουσα, φέροισι for (*φεροντσι φερον σι)
φερούσι ; so too μέτρα for (*μορία) μόρια.
ι
10. Actuated by similar considerations, the Ionians also adopted
certain compensatory (prosodic) symbols, viz. the Achaeic (Aeolic) et
for original e', then ου (i.e. ΟΥ) for Aeolic os (= original o'), -- whence
the names et où of the letters e and o--
Ε
while a before a missing sound,
that is a', was retained as compensated a. Accordingly φαεινός, ξένος,
ἕνεκα (from *ένδεκα), τους νόμους, μόυσα, ἔχουσα, but μέλας, πᾶσα, φασί.
In the same way, Doric communities adopted 7, that is E joined with
[4] The order adopted here is Apolinns (Achaeans), Ionians, Dorians, Athonians,
-but it is immaterial to our presont purpose whether we credit the one race
rather than the other with tho priority in the use of the rhythmical or prosodic
system.
[2] Such a stroko | could not then be confounded with iota, as the latter had, at
that archaic period, tho formas A or S.
131 On this point KBrugmann (Curt. St. iv, 82 ff.) and after him GMeyor
aro cortainly right in holding against FBlass that hysterogeneous 'erigin-
ally' had not the value of a diphthong among the Athenians and Ionians, but
was only an orthographic expression of e. (FBlass. Pron. 31.)
529
M m
10-11.]
APP. II.—GENESIS OF QUANTITY.
I to El (later H), for e', as: huì for (*éoµ) è'µí, ĥs for e's = eis, nλñotos
for (*πλείστος) πλεστος (ep. τίθημι, ἐπόησε, ποητάς, ή, μή, ευγενής with
Achaeic τίθειμι, ἐπόεισε, ποέιτας, ἔι, μέι, εὐγένεις); then Ω, probably o
underlined with the stroke (Q), for Achaeic OI or Ionic OY, as: Tws
νόμως for (τους νόμους) τος νόμος, μῶσα for (*μοντα) μεσα, διδωσι for
(διδονσι) διδόσι, ἄγωσα for (άγουσα) αγόσα, βωλά for (βολλα) βολ'ά,
χώρος for (kopfos) κόρος. [But also written τὰς προξένος, τὸς θεός, τὸς
νόμος, τὸ Αἰγιναίος, τὰς παρθένος, etc. in old inscriptions! OHoffmann i.
210, ii. 476; KBrugmann² 69; Kühner-Blass i. 168.]
11. At last the Athenian schoolmasters also saw the necessity of
adopting such conventional symbols in the interest of their schools,
and the more urgently as their own (Attic) dialect had, both phoneti-
cally and grammatically, departed the most from the original or pro-
ethnic form of the Homeric diction, and so exhibited the most
disturbing anomalies. What principle they initiated is not clear,
though the earliest inscriptions recovered, which go as far back as the
VIIth B. C., show a few instances of' compensatory'e for e, and ou for o.
However we know that, about the middle of the VIth B. C., they had
for dictator (rúpavvos) Peisistratos, a man of superior genius, ability
and light, a ruler who promoted the interests and welfare of the
people by affording facilities to the rural and commercial classes,
by founding tribunes, by laying aqueducts, by erecting fine temples,
and even a public library, etc. We further hear of him in connexion
with Homer. That Peisistratos did not institute a collection, redac-
tion, or edition of Homer is now universally admitted. But that he
did something in connexion with the Homeric poems is too strongly
attested by historical tradition to be altogether dismissed as a pure
figment of post-classical antiquity. What he did then was apparently
an attempt to have the Homeric text normalized in the interest of
the Athenian schools. So we hear that he appointed a commission
of scholars-Onomacritos of Athens, Zopyros of Heraclea, Orpheus of
Croton (to pass over the corrupted fourth name)- with instructions
to draw up a rational and practicable system of normal spelling
calculated to facilitate the reading at school of the national or
standard texts (Homer, Hesiod, Archilochos, etc.) [2].
On Poisistratos' character and work see Hdt. 1, 59. Th. 6, 54. Arist. Pol. 8
12, 2 (=p. 229, 32); 'Аðŋv. пoλ. 162 ff. Plut. Sol. 31.-Also AHolm, Gr. Hist. i. 408 ff.
& 419.-Gollius N. A. 6, 17 libros Athenis disciplinarum liberalium publico ad
legendum praebendos primus posuisso dicitur Pisistratus tyrannus. Cp. Lib. I
3 A.
[2] It is this orthographic normalization for school purposes that is alluded to,
with an allowably rhetorical exaggeration, by Cicoro, our oldest authority on
the subject. De Orat. 3, 34: sed ut ad Graecos referam orationem, septem fuisse
Hi omnes
dicuntur uno temporo, qui sapientes et haberentur et vocarentur.
praeter Milesium Thalon civitatibus suis pruofuorunt. Quis doctior eisdem illis
temporibus et cujus eloquentia litteris instructior fuisse traditur quam Pisi-
strati? qui primus Homeri libros confusos antea sic disposuisse dicitur ut nunc
habemus? non fuit ille quidem civibus suis utilis sed ita eloquentia floruit ut
litteris doctrinisque pracstarot.-That later writers and scribes should fail to see
the importance of such an educational measure, and so endeavour to improve or
clear it by raising it to the moro memorable and more palatable logond that Poisi-
stratos had collocted and edited the hitherto scattored fragments of Homor (Bekk.
An. 768. Jos. c. Ap. 1, 2. Plut. Thes. 20, 3. Aol. V. H. 13, 14. Paus. 7, 26, 6. Diog. Luert.
i. 57. Liban. ud Jul. i. 385. Eust. ad. Il. i. A p. 5. ud. Il. K p. 785. Bekk. An. 767.
Villois. ii. 182. JCramer An. i. 6. HKeil in Rhein. Mus. vi. N. r. 108 ff. & 243 ff.
ib. 118), need not surprise us: it well agroes with the spirit and character of
those uncritical ages which wanted something more substantial, more heroic,
For
more gratifying, than an abstract or indirect service to public education.
had Peisistratos actually made a collection or redaction of Homor; or had
530
APP. II.—GENESIS OF QUANTITY.
[12.
12. What were the results arrived at by the above commission, and
whether their recommendations met with immediate application at
school, is impossible to ascertain, the whole matter having been lost
sight of in the midst of the political convulsions of those times: three
(or one?) downfalls and restorations of the Peisistratean dynasty, then
Persian wars, that is, political events which absorbed the interest of
all contemporary and subsequent annalists and historians. Never-
theless it is a significant fact that even in the contemporary and sub-
sequent Attic inscriptions we meet with a sporadic beginning of a new
spelling- among poets probably adopted by Simonides of Ceos (Plin.
H. N. 7, 56, 57; Schol. Dion. Thr. 780 f.), pointing to a compromise of
the above orthographic systems initiated in Achaeic (Aeolic), Ionic, and
Doric communities. Accordingly, when representing a rhythmical or
grammatical length, E now begins to figure in the Attic inscriptions as
EI (later on as ¦ or H, identified with EI), while O figures as Oy (later
on as a or, evidently identified with O). The phenomenon, however,
appears only in sporadic cases, the old orthography (ypáμuara ȧpxaia,
παλαιά, Αττικά, ἐπιχώρια) remaining in universal practice down to the
middle of the Vth B.C. It is only since this time, when grammar had
become a powerful factor in general education, that the scholastic
(Peisistratean ?) spelling and herewith the hitherto technical or com-
pensatory symbols I H -being now mistaken for real phonetic symbols
-forced their way into ordinary writing (hence the confusion of E and
H, O and 2, 26), and only since the year 403 B. C., under the archon-
ship of Eucleides, that the new spelling obtained, by a public act,
official recognition or formal sanction 12. It may be added here by
he materially meddled with the constitution of the text, that is with the subject-
matter and language of the national poet, how could possibly such a momentous
event or such a sacrilege have passed off unrecorded or unnoticed not only by
classical antiquity which so often quotes Homer, but even by the very Alexan-
drian Homorists Zenodotos, Aristophanes, Aristarchos, Aristonicos, Didymos?
That by this time grammar-conceived in a philosophic spirit- had
rison to be a favourite subject among theorists (sophists, philosophers) and
writers, is sufficiently borne out by contemporary sources. Evon special works
on higher grammar or philology are expressly mentioned, as a treatise
of Gorgias περὶ ὀνομάτων, another of Protagoras περὶ ὀρθοεπείας, another
of Prodicos περὶ ὀνομάτων ὀρθότητος, and another of Democritos περὶ Ομήρου
ορθοεπείης καὶ γλωσσέων (from which Callimachos compiled his Πίναξ τῶν
Δημοκρίτου γλωσσών), even περὶ εὐφώνων καὶ δυσφώνων γραμμάτων (Diog. Laert.
9, 7, 48). This grammatical speculation is morcover illustrated by Plato's
etymological disquisitions in his Cratylos, to pass over Aristophanes (Ran. 818-
829) and Euripides (Et. M. 92, 25). Compare also 29cc [2].
>
[2] The rather obscure story of this public act, that a bill was introduced
by Archinos of Athens and carried, to the effect that the Athenians should
honceforth use (officially also) the Ionic script, rests on the following two
passagos : Suid. s. v. Σαμίων ὁ δῆμος· παρὰ Σαμίοις εὑρέθη πρώτοις τὰ κδ' γράμματα
ὑπὸ Καλλιστράτου, ὡς ῎Ανδρων ἐν τρίποδι. τοὺς δὲ ᾽Αθηναίους ἔπεισε χρῆσθαι τοῖς
τῶν Ιώνων γράμμασιν Αρχίνου Δ' ΑΘΗΝΑΙΟΥ (sic) ἐπὶ ἄρχοντος Εὐκλείδου. . . . περὶ
δὲ τοῦ πείσαντος ἱστορεῖ Θεόπομπος. Schol. Ven. ad Il. Η 185 Καλλίστρατος δ' δ
Σάμιος ἐπὶ τῶν Πελοποννησιακῶν ταύτην μετήνεγκε τὴν γραμματικὴν (script) καὶ
παρέδωκεν ᾿Αθηναίοις, ὥς φησιν Εφορος. Bekk. An. 783, 26 ἄλλοι παρ' ἄλλοις
εἰσὶ χαρακτῆρες τῶν στοιχείων. οἷς δὲ νῦν χρώμεθα εἰσὶν Ιωνικοί, εἰσενέγκαντος
Αρχίνου παρὰ Θηβαίοις (read παρ' Αθηναίοις) ψήφισμα τους γραμματιστὸς ἤγουν
τοὺς διδασκάλους παιδεύειν τὴν Ἰωνικὴν γραμματικὴν ἤγουν τὰ γράμματα. Com-
pare also Plut. Arist. ι ὡς ἐλέγχει τὰ γράμματα τῆς μετ᾿ Εὐκλείδην γραμματικής.
Thon Schol. ad Eur. Phoen. 682 σοί νιν ἔκγονοι : γράφεται τῷ NIN ἐκρόνῳ
κτίσαν, ἵν' ᾗ τῷ ἐκρόνῳ Coy, τῷ Κάδμῳ αἱ θεαὶ κατέκτισαν τὰς Θήβας, γέγονε δὲ
περὶ τὴν ἀρχαίαν γραφὴν ἁμάρτημα. ἐπ' ἄρχοντος γὰρ ᾿Αθήνησιν Ευκλείδου μήπω
531
M m 2
12-13.]
APP. II. GENESIS OF QUANTITY.
the way that, with the incorporation into the alphabet of the new
symbols, a new system of orthography was created into which all
previous literary and many inscriptional compositions had to be
transliterated. Such a proceeding was naturally attended by con-
siderable confusion and misinterpretation traceable even in our present
texts ['.
13. This official act then marks the completion of the Attic and after-
wards Panhellenic alphabet. It denotes the ultimate stage of a process
or rather practice which had originated long before at school, and which
in progress of time had found its way into common life. It cannot be
termed a spelling reform,' as some authorities represent it; for were it
a reform, that is a systematic and abrupt remodelling of the Greek ortho-
graphy on any principle [2], such an event involving the change of the
entire system, and thus affecting not only public instruction but also
social intercourse, could not possibly have passed off without meeting
with some public remonstrance or criticism; such a revolutionary measure
would have been duly emphasized and commented upon by contemporary
historians and annalists; nor could it have failed to elicit the censure
of contemporary satirists (Aristophanes etc.). But because it was a
mere ratification of accomplished facts, it passed off quietly and without
public stir. As a matter of fact, a systematic chango of the orthographic
system, an orthographic reform institutod by some authority or some
body of men-has never taken place in the whole history of the Greek
language.
Nor is there any proof or probability that the Greeks ever
since the dawn of classical antiquity have consciously followed the
phonetic principle.
τῶν μακρῶν εὑρημένων, τοῖς βραχέσιν ἀντὶ τῶν μακρῶν ἐχρῶντο, τῷ ε ἀντὶ τοῦ Η
καὶ τῷ ὁ ἀντὶ τοῦ ω. ἔγραφον οὖν τὸ δήμῳ μετὰ τοῦ 1, δῆμοι· μὴ νοήσαντες δὲ
καὶ ὅτι κατὰ τὴν ἀρχαίας γραφὴν καὶ δεῖ μετατεθεῖναι τὸ ο εἰς τὸ ὢ μέγα ἐτάραξαν
TO VONTóv.-Tho meagreness, incidental character and confusion of the account
clearly indicatos that the public decreo alluded to made no impression upon the
Athonian public, but passed off almost unnoticed, that is as a mere formal
sanction of an accomplished fact, as a mere recognition of a spelling system
already familiar to the people.
t
Of such a transliteration we have proofs: Direct in tho express remarks
of Aristonicos in A 104; Schol. Town. H 238. Porphyr. Quaost. 8 p. 287
(Schrader on 127); a 52;-whore o is confounded with w.
Þ
For e and n
Schol. 241; a 275. For and ni a 252.—Indirect in tho misspelling of reро-
σέων for περουσίων (η 107), ώλεσίκαρπος for οὐλεσίκαρπος (« 512), περιώσιος for
περιούσιος (Δ 350 ; π 203), ναιετάωσαν for ναιετάουσαν etc. ἀρύωσι for ἀρύουσι
(ι 108), δηλόων for δηιύοιεν (δ 226; so Λ 153, Ν 675) ὁμοστιχάει for ὁμοῦ στιχάει
(Ο 635), επιδημίου ὀκρυόεντος for ἐπιδημίου κρυόεντος (Ι 64), κακομηχάνου δκρυ-
ỏípv-
οέσσης for -voo περ. (Ζ 344), ἔγρετο λαός for #γρετο (ΙΙ 434, Ω 78%), ὠμιστής for
wμeoτns, etc. (PCauer Hom. 76 ff.),—thon in the misspelling of men and de for
uĤn and dú (1744 f.); and in the numerous cases of the so-called 'distraction
(as Spáeis: Spas, ópáas). The same holds true also of the subjunctives toper,
δράεις
γνώομεν, φθίεται, δαμήετε, εἴδομεν, etc. (for ἴῳμεν, γνώωμεν, φθίηται, δαμήητε,
elhouer, etc.), which are now explained away by forced methods.
precoding note.
Sco also
[2] FBlass Pron. 10 'Now it is actually the case that in Atticn towards the
close of the fifth century [B.C.] the entiro systom was absolutoly changed. Horo
was the opportunity in those cases where the living sound had hero and thore
dovinted from the writing, to bring them again into harmony. Moreover sinco
the Athenians and also the other races did not yot [?] possoss any grammarians
or etymologists to attach importance to a historical mode of writing, the only
principle which could have weight was the phonetic.' All this ronsoning is
invalidated by the above historical evolution of Greek orthography, then by the
fact that grammatical or philological speculation was a favourito subject with
the philosophers and sophists as early as the VB.C. See above, 12 [¹].
532
APP. II. GENESIS OF QUANTITY.
[14.
14. Now let us see how far the above historical account agrees
with, or explains, the phenomena of Greek phonopathy and prosody.
Of course I need not discuss here the principles of aphaeresis,
hyphaeresis, syncope, elision, and apocope, seeing that these are cases
of phonetic loss pure and simple, a loss which at the very outset was
implied by the author and so does not affect the nature or quantity
of the remaining syllables. We are concerned here only with the
phenomena of contraction (including crasis, also metathesis of quan-
tity) and antectasis. Regarding contraction, we should remember
that it appears fully effected first in Attic, then in Doric, but is
largely dispensed with in Achaeic and Ionic. On the other hand, as
Doric and Achaeic admit of several consonantal complexes (e. g. νσ ρσ)
they show no antectasis in these cases. Note finally that antectasis is
altogether absent from the Achaeic of Thessaly and Asia Minor.
A. Prosodic compensation for a lost vowel: CONTRACTION
(including Crasis and Metathesis of Quantity).
PRO-ETHNIC
FORM
αα: γεραία
Αθανα α
REDUCED RHYTHMICALLY COMPENSATED FORM (after 400 B.C.)
FORM
Achaeic
Doric
(in early
inscript.) (Aeolic)
Ionic
New Attic &
Panhellenic
γέρα
Αθηνά
τ' άλλα
γερα
γερα
γέρα
Αθενα
Αθάνα Αθάνα
τὰ ἄλλα
τ' άλλα
(τ' ἄλλα) τ᾿ ἄλλα
T
γέρα
Αθηνά
τ' ἄλλα
ee : δέετε
δετε
ΤΕ
δῆτε
δειτε
δειτε
βασιλεξες
βασιλίες (Βασίλης)
βασιλήες
βασιλῆς,- λεις
έσχες
ἔχες
ήχες ήχες
έρχες
είχες
ἐξεσθιον
ἔσθιον
ἤσθιον
ἤσθιον
ἤσθιον
ἤσθιον
φερεεν
φερε ν
φέρην
Φέρεν
φέρειν
φέρει
ii difios
διος
διος
διος
διος
διος
πόλι
πολι
πόλι
πόλι
πόλι
00 : vofos
νος
(νέος)
νῶς
νους
νους
δηλύομεν
δηλο μεν
δηλωμεν δηλῶμεν
δηλούμεν
δηλοῦμεν
λυσοχο
λυκο
λύκολο
λύκω
λύκοιο
λύκου
αε: τιμάετε
τιμάτε τιμᾶτε τιμάτε
τιματε
τιμάτε
σιγά εν
σιγαν
σίγαν
σιγήν
σιγαν
σιγαν
уаға
γα α
γα
γα
γέα
γῆ
ἀμελιος
άλιος
Ήλιος
ἥλιος
Σέλιος
τὰ ἐν
ταν
τάν
τάν
ταν
-
ήλιος
-ἥλιος
-ἥλιος
τάν, τὰν
-ἥλιος
δραξε
δρα
δρα
δρα
δρ' ε
όρη
όρη
όρα
4ο : Αλκμαίον
τιμάομεν
Αλκμάν "Αλκμαν
γελαίουσα γελασα γέλασα
τιμα μεν
Αλκμάν
τιμα μες
τιμ'ομεν
τιμ᾽ ὦμεν
τιμώμεν
γελώοσα
γελ'ῶσα γελ' ώσα
γελ' ώσα
Τον
ταν
των
τ' αν
τον
των
τ' ων
533
14.
APP. II.- GENESIS OF QUANTITY.
PRO-ETHNIC
FORM
(in early Achaeic
inscript.) (Aeolic)
Doric
REDUCED
FORM
RHYTHMICALLY COMPENSATED FORM (after 400 B.C)
Ionic
New Attic &
Panhellenic
χωραων
χωραν χωραν χωράν
χωρίων
χωράων
χωρ᾽ ὧν
χωρ᾽ ὧν
τα : έξαρος
έρος
ἦρος ἦρας
ἦρος
ἦρος
τεύχεα
Ερμεξας
βασιλεία
τευχε
τεύχη
(τεύχεα)
τεύχη
Έρμες
Ἑρμένας
Ερμής
βασιλέα βασίλεια βασιλέα
βασιλῆα
βασιλέα
00: σε ρο
σεν
σεν τε(αλύ
σεν, σειο
στο
σ' ου
σου
φράζει
Φράζεν
φράζεν
φράζεν
φράζει
φραζο
φράζου
* γενεσος
γενες γένους γένεος
γένεος, -ευς
γενος
γένους
βασιλεος
φιλεομεν
φιλομεν
φρονέοντα
φρον όσα
a
βασιλέος βασίλειος βασιλέως βασιλήος
φρονῶσα φρονευσα, - έουσα φρονοῦσα
βασιλέως
φιλῶμες φιλέομεν
φιλοῦμεν
να : προβατος
πρώτος πρῶτος
πρώτος
πρῶτος
πρατος
πράτος
ὁ ἀνήρ
σε : δηλοετε
δ' νηρ
-ἀνήρ
ὤνηρ
ὡνήρ
ἀνήρ
ἁνήρ
δηλότε
δηλώτε
δηλόντε
ἱεροεργος
ἱερο ργος
ἱεροργός Τρουργός
ἀμεινους
ἀμεινός
ἀμείνως
ἀμείνους
ῥιγοεν
ῥιγόν
ῥιγῶν
ριγουν, τῶν
τὸ ἐμὸν
το μον τώμον
τὠμόν
το μόν
τὸ ἔργον
το ργον τῶργον
τὦργον
τουργον
δηλοῦτε
ἱερουργός
ἀμείνους
ῥιγῶν, οὖν
το μόν
τούργον
B. Prosodic compensation for a lost consonant: ANTECTASIS,
RHYTHMICALLY COMPENSATED FORM
REDUCED
PRO-ETHNIC
FORM
FORM
(in early Achaeic(Aeolic)
Doric
Ionic
New Attic
& Pan-
hellenic
inscript.)
ΑΝ : Κόλουμι
*βολύομαι
ὀλ' υμι
βολ'ομαι
ἄλλυμε
βάλλομαι
όλλυμι
βώλομαι
ἄλλυμε
βύλομαι
ὄλλυμι
βούλομαι
Ν: πανρησια πα'ρησια
συνάπτω συ'ραπτω
κλ : συνλέγω συ'λέγω
παρρησία
παρρησία
παρρησίη παρρησία
συρράπτω
συρράπτω
συρράπτω συρράπτω
συλλέγω συλλέγω
συλλέγω συλλέγω
F: ξενος ξενος
ξένγος
ξῆνος
ξένος
ξένος
534
APP. II.-GENESIS OF QUANTITY.
[14-15.
PRO-ETHNIC
FORM
REDUCED
FORM
RHYTHMICALLY COMPENSATED FORM
(in early Achaeic(Aeolic)
inscript.)
Doric
Ionic
New Attic
& Pan-
hellenic
λα: Κέστελσα έστελ'α
στελλα
ἔστηλα
ἔστειλα
ἔστειλα
pc : *χερς
θάρσος
χερ'
χήρ
χήρ
χειρ
χείρ
θαρος
θάρρος
θάρρος
θαρρος
θάρρος
MC: ένεμπα
ἐνεμ'α
νεμμα
ἔνημα
ένειμα
ἔνειμα
Να : τὰς δίκαις τας δικας
τὰς δικας
τάνς δικανς
τὰς δίκας
τὰς δίκας
πάνσα
πασα
πάσα
πά(νσα, πᾶσα)
πάσα
πᾶσα
τιθευσα
τιθεσα
τίθεσα
τιθέντα
τιθέσα
τιθείσα
άκοσαν
ἀκουσας
ἀκούσαις
ἀκουσας
ἀκόυσας
ἀκούσας
ἐνς
e's
ές
ές
ές
εἰς
μενς
μες
μεις
μής
μείς (μήν)
μήν
*έκρινα
έκρινα
έκριννα
ἐκρῖνα
ἔκρινα
ἔκρινα
τους, αυτους τους, αὐτος
τόις, αὐτοις
τως αυτώς
τοὺς αὐτοὺς τοὺς αὐ.
διδόντα
διδοσα
δίδοσα
διδῶσα
διδούσα
διδῶσα
μοντία
μο'σα
μέσα
μωσα
μουσα
μούσα
λι: άλλος
άλλος
άλλος (Cypr.) άλλος, ἄλος
ἄλλος
ἄλλος
ὀφελίω
ὀφελω
ὀφέλλω
ὀφήλω
ὀφειλω
ὀφείλω
Να: κτενίω
κρινέω
κτενω
κτέννω
κτήνω
κτέμνω
κτείνω
κρινω
κρίννω
κρίνω
κρίνω
κρίνω
τεκτανίω
τεκτανίω
τεκτάννω
τεκταινω
τεκταίνω
Ριφθερίω
φθερ'ω
φθέρω
φθήρω
φθέρω
φθείρω
φθήρω (Arc.)
χεριων
χεριων
χέρρων
Χήρων
χέιρων
Χείρων
PF: kopfa
κομ'α
κάρρα
χώρα
κόρη
κόρη
cm: *έσμι
ἔμι (Cypr.) ἔμμι
ημί
εἰμί
εἰμί
(asma-)
άμες
αμμες
ἁμές
ἡμεις
ἡμεῖς
CN: Χέφναι
έναι
ἦναι
ἦμεν, εἶμεν
ειναι
εἶναι
15. The preceding explanation of the phenomena commonly classed
under the head of contraction and antectasis requires little comment.
It shows that contraction is the process by which two formerly
separate or heterosyllabic sonants, two adjoining sonantic syllables,
were first phonetically reduced, then metrically lengthened to one
syllable having the value of the former two. In the same way antectasis
is the process by which one of two incompatible consonants forming
position is first phonetically dropped, then metrically replaced in the
rhythmically affected syllable, the substitute gradually assuming the
form and value of a certain vowel and thus effecting a 'natural' length
in the place of the former 'position.' In other words, before the period
or stage of 'contraction' and 'antectasis,' Greek, like other languages,
535
15-16.] APP. II.
QUANTITY AND READING MARKS.
showed only two classes of syllables: syllables naturally short and
syllables long by position. Accordingly what we are now wont to
call length by position was originally, as it still is, natural length, and
what we now call natural length represents an hysterogeneous and
accidental length, that is an artificial growth.
15. Admitting the above results to be correct, the question naturally
suggested by them is: Would a practical application of them involve
a reform in our system of reading verse (scanning), and if so, what changes
would have to be made? The reply is plain: since our general system-
the system followed in England and Germany, as well as in Greece ['l-is
not quantitative but rhythmical (ictus and fall), no reform, no change is
required except a more thorough application of the rhythm so as to
indicato the caesuras etc.
Prosodic and Reading marks since A.
16. The gradual transformation of IY H from compensatory marks
to phonetic symbols or characters was attended by two results of great
importance for the subsequent history of Greek writing. One was
that all previous literature had to be now systematically transcribed
from the old spelling (apxaïkn onμaría) into the new or scholastic
orthography (ἡ μετ' Ευκλείδην γραμματική), a circumstance which in-
volved considerable confusion and misrepresentation, still traceable in
our own texts [2]. The other was that new prosodic marks had to be
now devised to fill the place of the old ! YH 2. We therefore first
hear now of a set of new prosodic marks (onμeia #рoowdías), namely
the βραχεία sc. προσῳδία (C) and the μακρά (-) [3], signs which were
It is a common but fundamental error among European scholars that pre-
sont Groeks road classical poetry without metre or rhythm. As a mattor of
fact they follow the system of scanning handed down to them by their Byzantine
ancestors who again had inherited it from their forefathers, and who first intro-
duced it also to Europo together with the rest of the Greek language. Para-
doxical though it may sound, metrical reading or scanning is the only modern
Greck' relic still preserved among Erasmian scholars.
Sce supra 12 [3].
H
ئی
เ
[*] Arist. Poet. 26, 3 περιεργάζεσθαι τοῖς CHMeίοις καὶ ῥαψῳδοῦντα ὅπερ ἐποίει
Σωσίστρατος καὶ διάδοντα (δὴ ᾄδ-?) ὅπερ ἐποίει Μνασίθεος ὁ Οπούντιος. Bekk. Λη.
780, 10 (πάλαι οὐκ ἦν τὰ δύο μακρὰ, Η καὶ ω. ὅταν οὖν ἤθελον γράψαι ἔχουσαν
ἐκφώνησιν τοῦ Ἡ λέξιν, ἔγραφον τὸ ε καὶ ἐπάνω του Ε τὸ σημεῖον τῆς μακρᾶς. ὅταν
δὲ τὴν ἐκφώνησιν τοῦ ω, ἔγραφον τὸ δ καὶ ἐπάνω τοῦ ὁ ὡς προείρηται τὸ σημεῖον τῆς
μακρᾶς. 782, 5 ἄλλοι δὲ λέγουσιν ὅτι καὶ τὰ μακρὰ τελευταῖον ἐπενοήθησαν, τῶν
βραχέων τὸ πρότερον μετὰ μακρᾶς προστιθεμένης αναπληρούντων τὴν τάξιν. ἐποί-
ουν γὰρ ἀντὶ τοῦ ω 5 καὶ ἄνω μακράν, καὶ ἀντὶ τοῦ Η ἢ καὶ ἄνωθεν μακράν. Victor.
i. 11, 8 (43, 25 HKeil): 'onμeîov veteros Xpóvor, id est tempus, non absurde
dixerunt ex eo quod signa quaedam accentuum, quao Graeci πpoowdías vocant,
syllabis ad doclaranda tomporum spatia superponuntur, unde tempora signa
Graeci dixerunt. sed et hoc loco suggerente non practormisorim, eosdem
figuras pedum socundum spatia temporum per litteras ita dosignasse, ut
brevis syllabae loco, quae sit unius temporis, ponatur B, longao autom loco,
quao sit temporum duum, M; hoc ideo ut per litteras regula pedum facile
intollegatur.' Victorinus' account is fully confirmed by the ourlier papyri
(e. g. the Harris Iliad, I B.C.), and MSS, in which the use of the parрà (—) and
Bpaxeîa (~) is frequent. It is only since the XIIIth of our era that these quan-
tity marks have been gradually dropped, evidently because they interfered
with the then rogular addition of the accents. See also ALudwich, Quanti-
tätszeichen in den ältesten Iliashandschriften, Königsberg, 1892.
C.
536
APP. II.
[16–17.
QUANTITY AND RHYTHM.
-
naturally classed by the side of the older rhythmical marks (/\ ^,
supra 8), and so enlarged the system of poor. As time went on
and prose writers also became the subject of study at school and else-
where, the onpeia #poowdias were applied to prose texts also, and were
conceived as accents [2] or accentual marks, poogia now assuming
the meaning of accentuation [8] besides scanning (App. i. 5). Again
when later on-during the IIIrd B. C.-Alexandrian critics took up
systematically the study and interpretation of the old-now styled
classical - texts, a fresh set of symbols or reading marks was devised,
they say, by Aristophanes of Byzantium (70). These new symbols
are the two breathings (and '), the comma (,), the apostrophe ('),
and the hyphen (u or). The whole system of porodia was there-
fore now brought up to the number of ten [41.-It should be added
here that when in the course of their P development the various
exponents of рoo@diu came to be identified with their graphic symbols,
each symbol misappropriated the name porodia, and this led to the
system of δέκα προσωδίαι, notwithstanding that the term προσωδία
denotes an abstract notion, a 'by-singing,' or 'scanning,' and that
originally it had been applied, as already explained (supra 8), to
symbolize the rhythm produced by the regular recurrence of ' and
that is by the ictus and fall.
π
π
π
17. It may be objected here against the above theory that, by
substituting the principle of simple rhythm for that of quantity,
the difficulty of reconciling stress-accent with rhythmic prosody
is not wholly removed. This is true of languages with a strong
stress where the difference between accented or long syllables and
unaccented or short syllables is very marked (as in modern English
and German), but in Greek where accent is much weaker and all
syllables are virtually isochronous half-long-the case is different
(supra 1). Here the fulness and distinct individuality of each sylla-
ble considerably weaken the stress of the (dominant) accent and,
under the guidance of the rhythm, help to count the number of
syllables, so that a versifier can easily subordinate accent to the
rhythmical ictus (cp. App. i. 24 13]) or even ignore it altogether.
That this was the case also in classical Greek may be seen from
many ancient specimens. Thus if we attentively peruse the Ana-
creontea in ThBergk's edition, we find that whereas quantitative
metre is often violated, rhythmical syllabometry is almost rigidly
observed, so that the sixty-five songs form two classes of eight and
seven syllables, or rather of sixteen and fourteen syllables respec-
A greator variety of poowdia is mentioned by [Sergius] 529 ff. (HKeil),
but the account there given is too confused and improbable to be of value.
(76 [2]).
[2] The use of the plural #poodía in Pl. Rep. 399 a 40óyyоUS те Kаi проσṆ-
καὶ προσῳ-
Sías (the tones and accents of brave men') is meaningless and suspect.
[9] Hence the Schol. commenting on Dion. Thr. § 2 naтà mроowdiav' says
(Bokk. Λη. 743, 7): ἀναγινώσκειν δὲ κατὰ προσῳδίαν, ἤτοι καθ᾿ ὃν ἔχει τύνον
ἡ λέξις, ὡς μὴ ἀναγνῶναι τὸ ὄρος ὀρὸς, καὶ τὸ ἁγνὸς ὁ καθαρὸς ἄ[NOC, κἀντεῦθεν
εἰς πλάνην ἀγαγεῖν τὸν ἀκροατήν, καὶ ἀντὶ τοῦ ὄρος τυχὸν ὁ Ὑμηττὸς ἢ τὸ
Ταΰγετον ἤ τι άλλο, ὀρὸν νοῆσαι ἤγουν τὸ ὑδατῶδες τοῦ γάλακτος κτλ.
>
Accordingly another Schol. in Dion. Thr. (744, 12) explains the term
· κατὰ προσῳδίαν ' by : κατὰ τέχνην, τουτέστι κατὰ τόνους, χρόνους, πνεύματα,
Táoŋ. So further ib, 745, 9.
537
17.]
QUANTITY AND RHYTHM.
APP. II.
tively, with a regular division in the middle of the line. The rhythm
is often indicated by one or more stress syllables.
A. Heptasyllabic: ×
a trochaic or iambic
× × × × × × of which the rhythm points to either
x x x x x
trimeter acatalectic: ☺ ☺
᾿Ανακρέων ιδών με
ὁ Τήιος μελωδός,
ὄναρ λέγων προσείπεν
κἀγὼ δραμὼν πρὸς αὐτόν
5 περιπλάκην φιλήσας.
γέρων μὲν ἦν, καλὸς δέ,
καλός γε καὶ φίλευνος.
τό χείλος ὦζεν οἴνου
τρέμοντα δ' αὐτὸν ἤδη
Ἡ γῆ μέλαινα πίνει,
πίνει δὲ δένδρε᾽ αὖ γῆν
πίνει θάλασσα δ' αὔρας
ὁ δ᾽ ἥλιος θάλασσαν,
Νο. 1.
No. 2.
or ú
το Ερως χειραγώγει.
ὁ δ᾽ ἐξελὼν καρήνου
ἐμοὶ στέφος δίδωσιν.
τὸ δ᾽ ὦς Ανακρέοντος
ἐγὼ δ' ὁ μωρὸς ἄρας
ἐδησάμην μετώπῳ
καὶ δῆθεν ἄχρι καὶ νῦν
ἔρωτος οὐ πέπαυμαι.
5 τὸν δ᾽ ἥλιον σελήνη.
τί μοι μάχεσθ' ἑταῖροι;
καὐτῷ θέλοντι πίνειν ;
So further nos. 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26A, 26 B, '33
34, 52, etc.
B. Octasyllabic: × × × × × × × × of which the rhythm points to a trochaic
x x x
tetrameter acatalectic:
Υακινθίνη με ῥάβδο
χαλεπῶς Ερως ραπίζων
ἐκέλευε συντροχάζειν.
διὰ δ᾽ ὀξέων μ' ἀναύρων
ξυλόχων τε καὶ φαράγγων
τροχάοντα τειρεν ίδρως.
Ἐπειδὴ βροτὸς ἐτέχθην
βιότου τρίβον ὁδεύειν,
χρόνον ἔγνων δν παρῆλθον,
ὃν δ᾽ ἐγὼ δραμεῖν οὐκ οἶδα.
5 μέθετέ με (α) φροντίδες
No. 29
Νο. 38.
κραδίη δὲ ῥινὸς ἄχρις
ἀνέβαινε, κὰν ἀπέσβην
ὁ δ᾽ Ερως μέτωπα σείων
ἁπαλοῖς πτεροῖσιν εἶπεν·
σύ γὰρ οὐ δύνῃ φιλῆσαι.
μηδέν μοι 'καὶ ἦμιν ἔστω
πρὶν ἐμὲ φθάσῃ τὸ τέλος
παίξω, γελάσω, χορεύσω
μετὰ τοῦ καλοῦ Λυαίου.
So further nos. 2, 2 B, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 27 A, 27C, 28, 30, 31, 32, 35, 37, '42, 48,
51, 53, 54, 55, 56, 58, 59, 60, 63, 64, 65, etc.
C. In a similar way, the so-called Babrian choliambics
-υ --υ are virtually dodecasyllables, pointing to a combination of a
trochaic dimeter catalectic with an iambic trimeter catalectic: × × × × × I
•
Babr. no. 19 : Βότρυς μελαίνης ἀμπέλου παρωρείου
ἀπεκρέμαντο· τοὺς δὲ ποικίλη πλήρεις
ἰδοῦσα κερδὼ πολλάκις μὲν ὡρμήθη
πηδῶσα ποσσὶν πορφυρῆς θιγεῖν ὥρης.
ἦν γὰρ πέπειρος κ' εἰς τρυγητὸν ἀκμαίη.
καμοῦσα δ' ἄλλως (οὐ γὰρ ἔσχεν ψαύειν)
παρῆλθεν οὕτω βουκολοῦσα τὴν λύπην
ὄμφαξ ὁ βότρυς, οὐ πέπειρος, ὡς μην.
+
538
APP. II.
[17-18.
QUANTITY AND RHYTHM.
Νο. 35 : Δύω μὲν υἱοὺς ἡ πίθηκος ὠδίνει
τεκοῦσα δ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἐστὶν οὐκ ἴση μήτηρ,
ἀλλ᾽ ἂν μὲν αὐτῶν ἀθλίης ὑπ᾽ εὐνοίης
θάλπουσα κόλποις ἀγρίως ἀποπνίγει
τὸν δ᾽ ὡς περισσὸν καὶ μάταιον ἐκβάλλει.
κἀκεῖνος ἐλθὼν εἰς ἐρημίην ζώει.
[τοιοῦτο πολλῶν ἐστὶν ἦθος ἀνθρώπων
οἷς ἐχθρὸς ἀεὶ μᾶλλον ἢ φίλος γίνου.]
So further nos. 5, 14, 34, 52, 78, 120, 121, 128, 131, etc.
18. It will be noticed, moreover, that these Anacreontean and
more particularly the Babrian verses show an unmistakable tendency
to a compromise of syllabometry with accentual rhythm by closing
the line with a paroxytone, thus leading to Neohellenic verse which,
like popular Latin and Romanic verse, requires a fixed number of
syllables with a fixed stress syllable, as the indicator of rhythm, at
least at the closing measure of each hemistich or line:
xx x x x x x x x x x x
11
(Cp. Ὦ κοινὸν αὐτάδελφον, || Ισμήνης κάρα.)
Ο Ιάννης μὲ τὸν ἥλιο
συνορίζουνταν
τὸ ποιὸς νὰ πᾷ 'ς τὴ δύση
γληγορύτερα.
Καὶ ὁ ἥλιος ἐδιασκέδα
:
ὄρη καὶ βουνὰ
καὶ ὁ Ἰάννης ὁ καϋμένος
τὰ χαμόκλαδα.
Καὶ ὁ ἥλιος ἐβραδυάστη
.
'ς τσῆ μανίτσας του
καὶ ὁ Ἰάννης ὁ καϋμένος
'ς τὰ χαμόκλαδα.
(Cretan folk-song, Jann. no. 113.)
xxxxxxx x)
Τὴ Διαμάντω θὰν ἀρχίσω
καὶ καρδιὲς θὰ σκανταλίσω.
τετρακόσια παλληκάρια
τση Διαμάντως μπέμπου γράμμα, etc.
(Cretan folk-song, Jann, no. 133.)
Τὸ παιδὶ ὅντε γεννᾶται
σὰν τὸ πωρικὸ λογᾶται.
Εἰς τσοὶ δέκα μεγαλώνει
καὶ τὸν κόσμο καμαρώνει, etc.
(Cretan folk-song, Jann. no. 186.)
(xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.)
Αστρι μου, ἀστρίτσι μου,
καὶ ἑσπερινὸ καὶ αὐγερινέ,
αὐγερινὲ τῆς ἐρωθιᾶς
ἦρθε τὸ ξημέρωμα
κ' ηὗρε μ' ἐπᾶ 'ς τὴ γειτονιά, etc.
(Cretan folk-song, Jann. no. 172.)
(
xxxxxxx x x x x x.)
Ixxxxxxx
Σε ψηλό βουνό, σε χαμηλό λαγκάδι
Γιάννης πορπατεῖ μαζὶ μὲ τὴν καλήν του.
κ' εἰς τὴ στράταν του κ' εἰς τὴν πορπατηξιάν του
δράκος τ' ἀπαντᾷ, θεριὸ τοῦ συντυχαίνει·
• Γειά του Γιαννακή, γειά σου κάλ᾽ ἀντρωμένε,
καὶ ἂς τα παίξωμε, Γιάννη, γιὰ τὴν καλή σου.
καὶ ἀπαλεύγανε ἀπ' τὸ ταχὺ ὡς τὸ βράδυ,
Γειά σου, Γιαννακῆ.
(Cretan folk-song, Jann. no. 78.)
539
18-19.] APP. II.
QUANTITY AND RHYTHM.
5
Ένας γέρος γέροντας
καὶ οὐδὲ τόσο γέροντας
ἑκατὸν ἐννεὰ χρονῶ
πότιζε τὸν γρίβα του.
τὰ βουνὰ τριγύριζε
καὶ τὰ δέντρα κύταζε
Μπρὲ βουνά, ψηλὰ βουνά,
τώρα μὲ τὴν ἄνοιξη
δέ με ξανανεώνετε
(xxxxxxx)
το 'μένα καὶ τὸ γρίβα μου;
σαν πως ξανανεώνονται
καὶ καινούρια γένονται
τοῦτα τὰ χαμόδεντρα,
τὰ χιλιόχρονα κλαριά;
15 νὰ γενόμουν κ' ἐγὼ νεός,
σαν πως ἤμου μια φορά,
κορασίδα νά 'παιρνα,
να 'ταν δώδεκα χρονώ.
(Epirotic folk-song.)
Τὸν καιρὸ τσῆ Βενεθιᾶς
ἔκαμα κ' ἐγὼ μιὰ θειά.
παίρνω πάω να τη βρω
μὲ κανίσκιν ἀκριβό, etc.
(Cretan folk-song, Jann. no. 252.)
19. The peculiarity of subordinating accent to syllabometry in sung
verse is not peculiar to Greek alone but common to all languages with
a weak stress-accent. During my stay at Moscow, I gained the conviction
that, in regard to the prosody of all nations, a sharp line of distinction must
be drawn botwoen sung verse and spoken verse, that is between vorse
devoted to the accompaniment of music and verse merely spoken. In
both classes the lines consist of metrical feet with rhythmical theses and
arses; but it is only in sung poetry that the metrical feet have a fixed
rhythmical duration.' (RWestphal, Allg. Motrik (1893], proface v., f.)
And p. 311 f.: 'Bosides Serbian and Lithuanian, Russian secms to bo,
among all modern languages of the Indog. group, the only one which has
essentially retained the accentuation of Greek, whereas in all others the
seat of accent depends mostly on the number of syllables. Every syllable
which in a Russian word has the accent, also serves as thesis in Russian
versification. But as regards sung folk-songs the lines are subjected to
different norms: here, as in the old Iranian poetry, the thesis need not
coincide with the syllabic accont, so that, were the melody not added, it
would often be difficult to ascertain the metre.' [Follow as illustration
the words kalína kalína which in a popular song are pronounced kálina
kálina.] "This phenomenon occurs still oftener in the folk-songs of the
Lithuanians. The Lithuanian folk-song stands entirely on the same
footing with old Iranian metropoea. Nesselmann in his Lituanische
Volkslieder (Berlin 1853, p. ix) says: "It is extremely difficult to deter-
mine the metro of a daina whon we do not know the melody, for the
scansion of the "dainos" is independent from the word-accent which in
other respects holds good. A Lithuanian himself distinguishes between
musical accent and word-accent, and so in reciting the text of a "daina "
follows the former, not the latter.' He also calls this mode of reciting
ant balso skaityti, reading according to the voice,' i.o. according to the
melody. Thus the beginning of No. 87 according to the word-accent runs
as follows:
Aut tiltùźio stowójau | Su morgýto kalbéjau,
whereas according to the melody, it is accented thus:
Aut tiltuzio stówejúu | Sù mergýte kalbojáu.
Hence it comes that without the assistance of the melody, one constantly
gropes in the dark.
540
APPENDIX III.
TERMINAL CONSONANTISM AND ITS INFLUENCE
ON THE P-N INFLECTION.
——
1. One of the characteristic features if not the most characteristic
- of P- N has been its gradual evolution on the principle of associa-
tion and analogy (112-120). Wherever we may direct our attention,
we find that among terms or words which popular conception and
feeling might, in any way, associate with one another, the com-
monest or most familiar representative among them gradually suc-
ceeded in attracting, one after another, the rest, so that it has
ultimately led to a general uniformity (1487 f.). A striking illustration
of this levelling process is afforded by the history of terminal sounds
in the inflection.
C
2. Our classical Greek grammars lay down two fundamental canons,
one of which is that a Greek word may close with any sonant
(vowel or diphthong) or one of the semi-sonants s, v, p' (218). The
first part of this rule has remained in full force through all post-
classical periods and vicissitudes of the Greek language, and still
holds good in N speech (219.) It has even, since M, gained some
extension beyond its A boundaries, and in so far will be considered
in the course of our study of the second part of the rule which
declares that --
'No other consonant is admissible at the end of a genuine Greek
word except one of the semi-sonants s, v, p' (also έ and as com-
binations of s with a preceding guttural or labial respectively). Et. M.
638, 11 οὐδέποτε λέξις Ελληνικὴ εἰς ἄφωνον λήγει. (218.)
I. ANALOGICAL TERMINAL v.
A. Extension of Terminal v to all Accusatives Singular.
3. We know from our school grammar that, in A, the accusative
singular of Greek nouns, whether substantive or adjective, ended, in
all three declensions, mostly in », as:
τὸν ναύτην, τὸν "Αρην, τὸν ταμίαν, τὴν ὥραν, τὴν γνώμην, τον βορρᾶν,
τὸν ᾿Απελλῆν, τὴν ἀργυρᾶν, τὴν μνᾶν, τὴν γῆν—τὸν δοῦλον, τὴν ἄμμον, τὸ
ζῷον, τὸ ξύλον, τὸν νοῦν, τὸν λαγών, τὸν ἰχθύν, τὸν βοῦν, τὴν ναῦν, τὴν
πόλιν, τὴν φύσιν, τὴν ὄρνιν, τὴν χάριν,—τὸν καλόν, τὴν καλήν, τὸ καλόν
αὐτόν, αὐτήν, ἐμαυτόν, ἐμαυτήν, ἐκεῖνον, ἐκείνην, τόν, τήν, τοῦτον, ταύτην,
ὅν, ἦν, πόσον, πόσην, etc.
541
4-6.]
APP. III. -TERMINAL CONSONANTISM.
4. There was only one class of nouns-chiefly the so-called con-
sonantal stems of the third declension (338 ff.)-which ended with
a sonant, as :
τὸν κόρακα, Αιθίοπα, μήνα, πατέρα, βασιλέα—τὴν φλέβα, χιόνα, Δήμη
τρα, τὸν ἥρω, τὴν ἠχώ, τὸ ἄστυ, τὸ πρᾶγμα, σῶμα, etc. so too ἐμέ, σέ.
5. In our modern notions of systematic grammar, we are wont to
draw a sharp boundary-line between the two categories. But speak-
ing of ancient times, we must remember that neither classical nor
post-classical speech knew anything of such grammatical classifica-
tions and distinctions. The current literature too cannot have exerted
a controlling influence on the uneducated masses, because the Greek
people at large did not read much in those times. The nation merely
followed the genius of the language, that is their innate feeling
according to which the object case, or, to use the modern grammatical
term, the accusative (singular), ended commonly in N. To put it
another way, final v in the declension was taken for the sign of the
accusative singular. Consequently forms like μηνα beside ταμίαν, ἱερέα
beside βορέαν, μητέρα beside ἡμέραν, χεῖρα beside χήραν, ἀληθῆ beside
ἀγαθήν, etc., were felt incomplete and abnormal, and so had to be
supplied with the finishing N.
6. The carliest traces of such normalization go back to classical
antiquity itself. The start seems to have been made by contracted
nouns, particularly proper names, ending in -ης, which were associated
or identified with those substantives now classed under the first declen-
sion. Thus Σωκράτης, Διογένης, Δημοσθένης, ᾿Αριστοτέλην, etc., occur
even in 4 beside Σωκράτη, Διογένη, Δημοσθένη, ᾿Αριστοτέλη, etc. (432).
Soon hereafter-since the IVth B. C., if not earlier-appellatives fol-
lowed, as τριήρης beside τριήρη, τετρήρης beside τετρήρη (CMeisterhans
107, 14), and since 300 B. c. (if not earlier) proper names ending in
-κλής, as: Μενεκλῆς, ᾿Αμεινοκλῆς, Λυσικλῆς, Εύκλη, beside Στρατοκλέα,
Διοκλέα, Σωκλέα, Αριστοκλέα, Χαρικλέα, etc. (ib. 105; cp. Phryn. 134
Ηρακλέα, Περικλέα, Θεμιστοκλέα ἐπεκτείνων τὴν ἐσχάτην λέγε, ἀλλὰ μὴ
Ἡρακλῆν καὶ Περικλῆν καὶ Θεμιστοκλῆς). From the II B. c. down-
wards the instances become so frequent as to warrant the assumption
that popular speech closed every accusative singular with v.
a. Sept. Ex. 8, 18 σκνίφαν ; 10, 4 ἀκρίδαν ; 16, 15 νύκταν; Lev. 13, 15
ὑγιῆν ; Num. 15, 27 αἶγαν; Ruth 4, 12 γυναῖκαν. 1 Reg. 2, 10 ἀσθενῆν.
2, 19 διπλοείδαν (for διπλοΐδα); 17, 39 θώρακαν ; 19, 11 & 24 νύκταν ; 21, 8
χεῖραν; 22, 11 ἱερέαν ; 30, 24 μερίδαν ; 2 Reg. 2, 29 & 4, 7 νύκταν ; 5, 18
κοιλάδαν ; 13, το κοιτῶναν ; 3 Reg. 1, 45 βασιλέαν ; 4 Reg. 22, 3 & 25, 19
γραμματαίαν (for -τέα); 2 Par. 35, 23 βασιλέαν. Esdra 8, 8 ἱερέαν ; Judith
13, 10 φάραγγαν ; Ps. 9, 23 (also 10, 5; 36, 35, etc.) ἀσεβῆν; 21, 21 μονο-
γενὴν ; Sira 13, 6 ἐλπίδαν; 42, 2 ἀσεβῆν. Jer. 15, 5 σάρκαν; 21, 1 iepéav ;
21, η βασιλέαν. I Macc. Io, I Πτολεμαΐδαν. Baruch
Baruch 4, 16 μονογενῆν ;
Ezech. 18, 13 avopakav. Jes. 7, 19 paɣádav. (Cp. FGSturz 27 f.; EASopho-
cles Lex. p. 361.)
b. NT Matth. 9, 18 xcîpar; John 7, 23 vɣıñν; 20, 25 Xeîpav. Acts 6, 5
Αντιοχέαν : 14, 12 τὸν Δίαν ; 20, 31 νύκταν. Rom. 16, 11 συγγενὴν; 16, 15
Νηρέαν. Hol. 6, 19 ἀσφαλῆν. 8, 5 δειχθένταν. Rev. 1, 13 ποδήρην ; 12, 13
ἄρσεναν. 13, 14 εἰκόναν — Burn. ἢ τὸν ἕναν. Diosc. 1, 33 τὸν χύαν.
7
c. Gr. Urk. Berlin 15 (A.D. 197) 21 oppayîdav. 27 (IInd IIIrd) 14 µndé-
148, 3 Ουγατέραν. 155 (+ 153), 13 χείραν. 155 (Α.Φ. 152-3) 13 χεῖραν.
93 (IInd III) Tηv yuvaîkav σov. 13 (A.D. 289) 8 ὑγιῆν καὶ ἀσινῆν, etc.
ναν.
d. CIG 1781 ἄνδραν; 2089 γυναῖκαν, θυγατέραν ; 8619 (A.D. 451-74) 21
κατὰ χίραν. 8795 χεῖραν; 2264 ήρθαν; 1988, το μητέραν. 2264, 8 θυγα-
542
APP. III. — TERMINAL CONSONANTISM.
[6-9.
τέραν ; 4000 ἀνδρειάνταν, Ι. 8692, 18, 19 ἄρχονταν. CIA iii. 1379 πατρίδαν.
LRoss 261 ἄνδραν ; Mitth. iii. 339 θυγατέραν. xxi. 37 γλυκύτηταν. ib. 113,
9 ovyyevîv,—Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 110 (III) 801 àσтépav. ib. 124 (Vt) 11
γυναῖκαν. - GKaibel 167 χάριταν. 168 = CIA iii. 1379 (III) λιμέναν, πατρί-
368, 8 νεότηταν. 372 (IV) πατέραν, ἀωρότηταν. 522, 1ο μητέραν.
716 Πετροκόρακαν. 920 πατρίδαν. 1038, 32 τὴν ἀσφαλῆν πράξιν. 1135 Οἰδί-
δαν.
ποδαν.
e. Great Louvre Pap. 190 δράκονταν; 1774 τὸν μελαμψαῆν; 2942 παρα-
μήκην. CWessely Akad. Wiss. 1889, p. 78 χεῖραν (frequently), θυρίδων,
ἀστέραν. id. Prol: 65 (487 A.D.) τὸν κόμιταν, τὴν χεῖραν.
f. Acta Tho. 7, 38 χεῖραν ; 18, 30 χάριταν ; 45, 35 (also 78, 37) γυναῖκαν.
45, 31 (also 46, 31) θυγατέραν ; 94, 28 χρηστότηταν; Evang. Tho. A 3, 3
τὴν νεότηταν. 10, 2 τὸν πύδαν. 16, 1 τὴν χεῖραν. Β 3, 2 τὸν ἀέραν ; 7, 2 τὸν
παῖδαν. Acta Pilati A G, 1 φονέαν. 12, 2 κλεῖδαν. Β 4, 4 τὴν νύκταν.
Anaphora Pil. A 3 τὴν χεῖραν ; το τὴν νύκταν. Β. 1ο τὴν νύκταν.
g. Leont. Neap. V. J. 70, 6 νύκταν; 100, 19 χείραν ; 100, 14 μῆναν ; ΙΟΙ,
2 βασιλέαν ; 22, 24 εὐλαβῆν. V. S. 1737 C ἑβδομάδαν; 1708 Β μονήρην. 1,
η θεοσεβῆν.
7. Similarly neuters like ἡδύ, γλυκύ (στίμμι οι) στίμι, μελίτι, etc., asso-
ciated as they were with χωρίων, παιδίον, ξύλον, etc., appeared naked
and thus called for the analogical finishing : τὸ ἡδύν, γλυκύν, μελίτιν,
(GKaibel 719, 8 f, Ια), στίμιν Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. 95, 336, also
CWessely, Neue Gr. Zaub. p. 78; so too the numerous diminuives
τὸ ἡμιωβέλιν (on Coins, BVHead 348, 146-3 Β.C.), τὸ στάδιν, 'Αρτέμ ν,
Ερώτιν, ᾿Ακέσιν, ᾿Αφροδείσιν, Ἑλλάδιν, Δυναμιν, Χαρίτιν, Χρυσίν, Ἡδυν
(FGBenseler, in Curt. Stud. iii. 171 f.); further CIA iii. 156 Φιλημάτιν ;
238 (p. 495) αμφιδέξιν; 238 κηστρὶν ἀργυροῦν; CIG 8841 & 9704
μαρτύριν; 9906 ψυχάριν;- and on papyri ζωϊδιν, χοιρίδιν, ἐπιστόλιν
(CWessely Prol. 64), πεπόνιν, πηττάκιν, ἐπαῦλιν (id. Akad. Wiss. 1889,
p. 115) ; and in Byzantine writers: ῥιζάριν, ὀψάριν, κοντάριν, ἀσῆμιν,
θεμάτιν, καλαμάριν, ἐνοίκιν, καράτιν, λογάριν, κουβάριν, σακκίν, σελλίν, παλλίν,
χαρτίν, etc. etc. [1] (Cp. 302.)
8. Corresponding influences operated on the pronouns ἐμὲ and σέ,
and led to eµén (GKaibel 326, 6 = CIG_3440, III; so too even
in no. 274 δ' εμέν, not δέ μιν) and σε (? CLeemans ii. 117), forms very
common in M-N speech (532 ; ep. infra 30).—Even ταύτῃ θαλάμειν
for θαλάμη ΚΖ xxviii. 386 (+ II).
9. But the full development and popularity of this analogical -
cannot be adequately gauged from the sporadic instances scattered
in the literary productions of the time, numerous though they are.
Nor are we better informed as to its actual condition in the succeed-
ing B period down to the Xth. This is also not surprising when
we remember that by this time a systematic grammar, founded
on the Atticistic or, what amounts to the same, ecclesiastical Greek
(019f.), had long been universally adopted and uniformly taught
in the schools, and that this grammar had fixed the elementary rule
regarding final - v. All scribes, therefore, as well as their copiers,
whose training was based exclusively on the received grammar just
alluded to, could never be so ignorant as to misapply this rudimen-
[1] That tho final y in all those diminutives in - is not constituent but
analogical appears also from a papyrus of the V-VI (Louvro Pap. 126-8)
where we road οἰνάρι, ἐλάδι, δσπιτι, βαυκάλι, μυάκι, περιστέρι, πωγῶνι, ἀξινάρι,
etc., bosido ψάριν, ποτῆριν, κεφάλι, etc.
543
9-11.] APP. III. -TERMINAL CONSONANTISM.
tary rule and write invariably τὸν κόρακαν, μῆναι, ἐμέ, and the like.
That this was actually the case appears sufficiently also from the cir-
cumstance that, with the very first appearance of N popular composi-
tions in the XIth, the parasitic final reappears in overwhelming
multitudes. Indeed, every accusative- in the case of neuters also
every nominative-singular appears supplied with a final -v. It would
be idle to adduce here special proofs seeing that every page of
mediaeval popular productions teems with the parasitic v. And this
is the more significant, as all such productions proceed from more or
less professional schoolmen (Spaneas or whoever the author may be,
ThProdromos, MClycas, etc.), who were carried by the spirit of classi-
calism still strongly prevailing in their time (024-028; infra 21).
A few samples and passages, however, may illustrate the case :-
(α) CIG 8704 (A.D. 1927), 19 ἐς τὸ θέμα. Span. 12 τὸν βασιλεάν. 27
παιδίν μου πρὸς ἐσέναν; 62 πατέραν ; 172 τοὺς πρὸς ἐσέναν σφάλλοντας παιδίν
μου συγγνωμόνει. 179 τὸ δικαιολογημέν σου; 183 χάριν πλήρην. 280 τὸ θέλη
μάν του. (Cp. 131 ὡς γὰρ τὰ ξύλα τοῦ πυρὸς τὴν φλόγαν ἐπαυξάνει); and so all
diminutives in -ιν, as παιδίν μου passim. 5ο γενολόγιν. 52 κυνήγιν, etc.
Roboam 28 τὸ χρῆμαν. 33 συγγενην. 46 f.
τὸ χάρισμαν, τὴν ῥύγαν του καὶ τὴν φιλοτιμιάν του
καὶ ἔχῃς κρίμαν ἐκ Θεοῦ καὶ βλασφημίαν μεγάλην
ὅτι δι᾿ αὐτὸ δουλώνεται, παιδίν μου εἰς ἐσένα,
πουλεῖ τὰ πάντα του ὡς δι᾽ ἐσὶν καὶ βάνει τὸν ἑαυτόν του
καὶ βάνει καὶ τὴν σάρκας του εἰς κάμινον δι᾿ ἐσέναν.
6ο ψευδῆν συντυχίαν. 7 πρᾶγμαν του; 85 γείτοναν. 86 τὴν ἐλπίδαν του, et
passim. Pul. 119 f. ἐμέναν καθυβρίζεις ] ἐμένανε γνωρίζουσι κ' ἐσὲν κατέ-
χουσί σε.
(3) Pecat. 1-4 Εμὲν οὐ πρέπει νὰ λαλῶ οὐδὲ νὰ συντυχαίνω,
οὐ πρέπει ἐμὲν νὰ βλέπωμαι . . . ἐμένα πρέπει νὰ θρηνῶ.
(c) Prodr. 1, 33 τὸ στόμαν της. 49-52 ταττίκιν εἰς ποδάριν, | ἱμάτιν, οὐκ εἶδα 's
τὸ δακτύλιν μου κρικέλιν δακτυλίδιν, οὐδὲ βραχιόλιν. 249 μακρὸν καλάμιν.
2, 39 μέλιν ὀξειδιν σύσγουδον, ἅλας, ἀμανιτάριν, et passim. 3, 35 τὸ πλάτυ
σμαν. 76 τινὰν λαχαίνει τὸ δ' ἐμεῖς, ἐμεῖς δὲ πάλιν τίναν, | καὶ τίναν τὸ παραβατόν,
καὶ τίναν τὸ τῆς πρόβας. 85 τὸν μῆναν. 86 οὐδίναν. και τ' ἀδρὸν τὸ παξη-
μάδιν, καὶ τὸ παλαμιδόκομμαν. 111 δὸς νίμμαν τοῖς πατράσιν. 147 τὸ ζέμαν.
186 πίνακαν κανέναν. 346 ὀρύζιν μὲ τὸ μέλιν,-et passim.
10. The same state of things continues to the present day in some
insular idioms, particularly in the northern sporades (219. 221), partly
also in that of Crete. On the whole, however, a reaction began
during M, and gradually led to the opposite process as we shall
presently sec.
A Retreat of Final -v (also -p, -§, -4) from the Nominative
Singular and elsewhere.
11. As soon as final -v came to be felt as the characteristic sign of
the accusative (supra 5 f.), its position in the nominative was shaken.
Just as the minority of accusatives, formerly ending in a sonant,
were drawn into the majority by adopting an analogical -», so now
nominatives ending in -v, being less in number, submitted to the
plurality of those closing with any other letter than -v. But this
normal plurality used to end, as we know
(α) if musculine, in -s, as : ταμίας, ναύτης, Πέρσης, βορρᾶς, λόγος, αγα-
θός, χρυσοῦς, νεώς, υπόχρεως; ὄφις, ἰχθύς, βασιλεύς, ἀληθής, γλυκύς, μέλας
(ep. also Κρής, ίδρώς, γέλως, etc.) ;
544
APP. III.- -TERMINAL CONSONANTISM.
[11-12.
(δ) if feminine, in a vowel, as : σοφία, χώρα, μέλισσα, ἀλήθεια, βασιλεία,
τιμία, γλυκεῖα, ἀργυρᾶτιμή, πύλη, καλή, μεγάλη, φακῆ, χρυσῆ, ἠχώ,-less
frequently in a vowel +s, as: ἄμμος, ἐλπίς, πόλις, κίνησις, ἡ ἄνομος,
αληθής [1]
12. Apart. then, from these two leading classes of nouns, there
remained but a small number of masculines and feminines closing
with -r.
Now at a period when final -v had already been mistaken, by
popular feeling, for the sign of the accusative (supra 5), the minority
was naturally felt as an anomaly, and thus had to retreat before
the normal ending. Similarly final pέ could no longer resist the
influence of this pervading plurality and so adapted themselves to the
established and familiar type which required -s for all masculines,
and a sonant - commonly a or i-(this i representing η, ι, υ, ει, τις
vi) -- or a vowel +s for feminines (248). And in order to arrive at
such a normalization, there were two ways open: (a) either final v p s έ
ρ
had to make room for -s, or for a vowel, according as the noun
under consideration was masculine or feminine (338), and this actually
happened in some instances, as : γέρος for γέρων, χάρος for χάρων, ἄρχος
for ἄρχων, παθός fur παθών (as ὁ παθὸς εἶνε ἰατρός = πάθος μύθος), διακος for
διάκων (a T-Β form of διάκονος); ep. the ancient φρίκη & Φρίξ, φύλα-
κος & φύλαξ, μάρτυρος & μάρτυρ, κράκη & κράξ, κλαγγή & κλάγξ, πτύξ
& πτυχή, ἄμβιξ & -ικος, ἅρπαξ & -αγος, έλιξ & -ίκη, ἴλιγξ & ἴλιγγος,
ὄρυξ & ορυχή, κρέξ δ' κρέκα, Καππάδος & δόκης, Γόρτυν & να,
πέλιξ & -ίκη, πίθηξ & -ηκος, βόστρυξ & τυχος, φάλαγξ & φαλάγγη,
τρίβαξ & -ακός, δόρξ & δόρκος, ο άμβυξ & -ύκη, ψᾶρος & ψάρ, ἐθέλημος
for ἐθελήμων, μεγιστάνος for μεγιστάν (Vita SA. 30* B. 31* E.
40* c, etc.), μείζος for μείζων, πλείος (Prodr. 4, 544) for πλείων, etc. ;
(b) or a more serviceable expedient had to be resorted to: the
accusative singular to be used as a nominative. The latter alter-
native offered far more advantages, since it already closed commonly
with the suggestive ending -a, as : τὸν πατέρα, γείτονα, γέροντα, βήχα,
πίνακα, βασιλέα; τὴν αἶγα, φλέβα, ἀκρίδα, etc. It was the com-
monest and most familiar case, since it not only acted as the object
case - having succeeded the ancient accusative and moreover replaced
the dative and genitive to a great extent (1247)-but also occurred
very frequently with prepositions (εἰς, πρός, ανά, κατά, διά [for], μετά
[after], παρά, ἐπί, περί, ἀμφί, ὑπό, ὑπέρ, later also ἀπό, and still later σύν,
ἐκ, μετά [= with), ἐκ); finally it exhibited the full stem, an additional
advantage appealing to popular speech which aims particularly at
perspicuity and emphasis. It was the accusative form, therefore. that
lent itself most conveniently for the purpose, since it was already in
itself a finished nominative feminine : (τὴν αἰγα) ἡ αἶγα, (τὴν ῥῶγα) ἡ ῥῶγα
(so even Achmet. 285), (τὴν θυγατέρα) ἡ θυγατέρα, (τὴν ἀκρίδα) ἡ ἀκρίδα,
(τὴν νύκτα) ἡ νύκτα, etc. 121. As to the masculine gender, it was also sufi-
ciently indicated : the normal ending - s (263) had only to be affixed
and the nominative was ready and complete for use, as: (τὸν ἀέρα) ὁ
αέρας? (CLeemans 117 I'd A. D.), (τὸν κόρακα) ὁ κόρακας, (τὸν πατέρα)
ὁ πατέρας, (τὸν γείτονα) ὁ γείτονας, (τὸν μὴνα) ὁ μῆνα-ς, (τὸν ἄρχοντα) ὁ
η
η
η
[1] Nontors, after deducting those ending in r, -μα or a vowel, which have
boon already considered abovo (9, a, b, c), como hardly into account.
[2] The two words θυγατέρα and ἁπλότητα, quoted as nominatives from so
onrly compositions as Hormas (EASoph. Lox. s. vv., also introd. 36 ii. 4) rest
on interpolations of tho notorious forger Simonides.
545
N n
12-16.] APP. III.- TERMINAL CONSONANTISM.
ἄρχοντας, (τὸν βασιλέα) ὁ βασιλέας, (ὁ βασιλεύς [i. e. βασιλεος] being
inadmissible 407), etc.
13. In like manner, all participles inflected after the 3rd declen-
sion (-wv, -ov, Lovoa; -wv, -oûv, -oûσa; -as, -av, -ara; -ws, -ós, -via; eis,
-έν, -εῖσα ; -ύς, -ύν, -ῦσα ; -ούς, -όν -ουσα), as far as they were still surviv-
ing, could no longer hold their own, and so were now replaced by their
analysis to a finite relative clause, or by a prepositional infinitive, as :
(ὁ λέγων) ὅστις oι ὅπου λέγει, (ὁ εἰπών) ὅστις oι ὅπου εἶπε, (λέγων) ἐπεὶ or
ὅτε ἔλεγε, οι ἐν τῷ λέγειν, ἐπειδὴ λέγει οι ἔλεγε, ἐὰν λέγῃ or ἔλεγε, etc.
(2166.)
14. In cases where the accusative ended in -in (that is -w or -vv),
the course to be adopted was plainly indicated': -v was simply dropped
and the preceding i, being identified with the final - of the 1st
declension, served as a normal basis. Accordingly, in the case of
feminines, it was already so used, as :
τὴν χάριν
τὴν πίστιν
τὴν ῥάχιν
τὴν δύναμιν
χαρι
πιστι
ραχι
δυναμι
πραξι
όψι
δυσι
ή χάρη (343)
ἡ πίστη
ἡ ράχη
ἡ δύναμη
πράξη
ἡ ὄψη
ἡ δύση
whereas masculines (which are but few) had only to annex the
τὴν πρᾶξιν
τὴν ὄψιν
τὴν δύσιν
normal ending -s, as :
τὸν ὄφιν
τὸν & τὴν δρῦν
όφι
δρυ
ὁ ὄφις or "φης (343 f.)
ὁ δρυς οι δρῆς.
τὴν αἶγα
τὴν μητέρα
τὴν νύκτα
15. The process which has been operative in the formation of
this novel nominative singular applies, as a matter of course, also to
the vocative. It may be illustrated by the following examples:
ἡ αίγα
ἡ μητέρα
η
νύκτα
τὴν γνώση
τὴν πράξη
ἡ γνώση
ἡ πράξη
(ω) αίγα
δ) μητέρα
δ) νύκτα
(δ) γνώση
(ω) πράξη
τὸν πατέρα
ὁ πατέρας
ὦ πατέρα
τὸν κόρακα
(δ) κόρακα
τὸν δαίμονα
(δ) δαίμονα
τὸν βασιλέα
(δ) βασιλελ
ὁ κόρακας
ὁ δαίμονας
ὁ βασιλεῖς
15. Compare CIG 1153 ὦ Μενεκράτη. Evang. Tho. 3, 1 άδικε ἀσεβῆ
καὶ ἀνόητε. 8, 2, 1 ἀσεβῆ καὶ παράνομε. HCollitz 1206 Πολυκλή. 121ο Διο-
μήδη. 1191 Αριστοφάνη. 1215 Δωρικλή. 1243 ᾿Αγαθοκλή. (278. 442.)
II. MOVABLE OR EUPHONIC v.
16. The old grammatical rule prescribing that the verbal endings
-e and -t annex a movable or euphonic -, (commonly but erroneously
called εφελκυστικόν), when a sonant or a pause succeeds, holds, every
scholar knows, no longer considering that all direct and authentic
literary monuments-inscriptions and papyri-fail to confirm such
a doctrine. According to Hadde JJ Maassen's instructive researches
(in Lpz. Stud. iv. 1-64), founded on the public or 'official' inscrip-
546
APP. III.—TERMINAL CONSONANTISM.
[16-19.
tions, the annexation of final - appears to have been the regular
practice in the IVth B.C. Its actual addition or omission is illustrated
by the following table (ib. 16):—
N in tertia persona sing. temporum praeteritorum.
IN MEDIA ORATIONE.
Ante vocales
Ante consonus
Adest
Abest
Adest
Abest
B. C. 500-403
3
O
22
О
403-336
9
I
37
4
""
336-300
20
O
58
2
IN PAUSA.
B. C. 500-403
I
23
3
40
""
""
403-336
336-300
33
13
31
19
17
о
22
I
Tò
17. In the subsequent or P period, the practice of movable - became
so popular as to affect also artistic compositions and sometimes defy
even metre, as may be seen from the following inscriptional specimens:
RWagner 65 f.=GKaibel 189 (III B.C., Melos) povrioin Oratóv.
270 σοι θέμις ἐστὶν δόμων. 402, 1 ἐν οὔρεσιν παρθένον ἁγνήν. ib. 2 τὸ
πάροιθεν νῦν αὐδήεσσαν ἅπασιν. 545 (p. 528) τίς Πλάταιαν σύλησεν; τίς
ὤλεσε; 616 ήρμοσεν τοὔνομ᾽ ἐμόν. 726 (+III-IV, Rome), ο ζώει μὲν
ζωοῖσιν, θάνειν δὲ θανοῦσιν ἀληθῶς. 8ο (+III, Cyzicus), 3 εἰκόνα ἐξετέλεσ
σεν καὶ εἶσατο. 903a 5 Ισίδωρον δ᾽ ἐν ἰκόσιν μαρμαρέησιν.
18. Traces of this misuse, however, appear even in A inscriptions
(FAllen in Arch. Inst. Amer. iv. 158), as: VIth B.C. (Attica) ávéoŋ]KEN
Διός. GDittenberger 367 (Delos) ἀνέθηκεν Κάλλωνος.-(Attica) επέθηκεν
θανό(ν)τοι(ν).—εἶπεν δίκαιον.—IV B.c. (Amorgos) ἔστησεν τόδε.
or
19. Once established in the popular conscience, -v movable became
a constituent suffix and remained in common practice down to the
beginning of the Christian era, when the spirit of general reaction.
manifested in the language at large, interfered also with the use of
final in written composition, and fixed its position and character on
the plea of avoiding hiatus and aiming at euphony. From this
time onward Atticizing or scholastic writers adhered more
less rigidly to the rule laid down, while unlearned scribes could
not help making liberal concessions to popular speech, and so
admitted more freely the intrusive in the wrong place, that is
before a consonant. The latter class of literature shows plainly that
movable - not only remained in full practice, but had even extended
to the 3d person sing. of contracted imperfects in -, of imprf. and
aor. pass. in -To and -7, then to the subj. in -, and even to adverbs, as:
Gr. Urk. Berlin 300 (†148), 5 nàv Sévv yN; 246 [IInd III] 17 f. µeλŋoáto
ὑμῖν πῶς ἄλυπος N. Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 203 [VIC | 83 παρεσχέθην παρ'
Compare -ev III person (for -ei): hokei 388; èmolew HRoch! IGA 485;
ἠνώγειν, βεβλήκειν, ἑστήκειν, ἤδειν (220, 5), προσῄειν, etc. (Kühner-Blass i. 293).
547
N 1 2
19-21.] APP. III.-
TERMINAL CONSONANTISM.
Οὐαλεντίνου. Πανδώρα 19, 47 ἐγένετο. GKaibel στο πατρὶς δέ μοι ἦτον
Απαμέα CIG 8690 ἱστορήθην ὁ ναός. Bull. Corr. Hell. vii. 261 ανενεώθη Ν.
Acta Tho. 16, 40 ἐβαρέθην ; 37, 39 ἠβουλήθηΝ; 49, 5 ἐδεήθηΝ; 50, 9
κατέβηΝ ; 5Ι, 15 ἀπεστάληΝ ; 58, 6 ἐκοιμήθην ; 87, 40 επλήγη (all 3rd person).
Leont. Neap. V J. 18, 17 (C) εξερρίφηΝ ; 30, 13 (F) ἐσωφρονίσθηΝ ; 42, 25 (C)
ἐλυπήθην ; 77, 1ο (C) & 92, 8 (AC) ἠδυνήθην ; 82, 19 C) ἐφοβήθην. V. S.
1673 Α κατηξιώθηΝ; 1721 Α ἐπνίγηΝ ; 1733 Β ἐτυφλώθηΝ; 1740 Β ἐδιοικήθηΝ;
1740 Ο εβαρήθηΝ; 1741 Β ηὐξήθην. 1688 Β ἐφύρει. 1721 Β ηύλειο (all
3rd person). Louvre Pap. 2, 362 μήτεΝ. ἔπειτα Jahr. Kl. Phil. Supl.
xvi. 825.
B
20. As to the practice in the current speech of the time, we have
no direct evidence illustrating the actual state of things. Neverthe-
less we have indirect criteria that -v movable remained in unbroken
currency down to M. This evidence is: (1) it was regularly affixed
as an almost constituent element even in pre-Christian inscriptions
and papyri; (2) it appears more or less constantly in all post-Christian
compositions of unlearned character; and (3) with the first appear-
ance of popular N compositions during M, it suddenly reappears in
overwhelming numbers; in point of fact, it is annexed to every third
person of all verbs, whether barytone or contracted, whether active,
passive or middle, frequently even to adverbs.
a. Prodr. 3, 41-45 ἦτον (four times), et passim; 209 f. νὰ 'χρίστηΝ τὸ
μουστάκιν μου νὰ ᾿κράτησεν λιγδίτσαν, \ ν᾿ ἀγκώθηΝ ἡ κοιλία μου, ν' ἁπλώθην ἡ
ψυχή μου. 2, 55 τὸ πηγαδόσχοινον ἐκόπηΝ.
νεΝ ἡ εὐγενικές.
724 ἡ ὅλη δύνα
καὶ νά 'χαν
•
5. EGeorg. Const. 313 που 'νεΝ ἡ παρρησιά σας; 316 καὶ ποῦ
477 θέλει γενῇΝ ἀνήμερος. 626 θέλει γενῇ ἀπέραντο ποτάμι.
μις αὐτοῦ ἔνει ὁ κροτισμός του. 730 ὦ θέ, νὰ τό 'χαν πολεμᾷΝ
κάμνῃΝ. 735 καὶ τοῦτο ἔνεΝ ἀληθές. 922 νὰ ἔνεΝ διὰ πάντα.
c. Bolth. 1010 ὁ Βέλθανδρος οὐδὲν ἀπηλογήθη Ν. 1109 f. ἐξεγυμνώθηΝ
ἔφθασε κοντὸ εἰς τὸ πνιγῆναι, | μόλις ἐσώθην εἰς τὴν γῆν γυμνὸς μὲ τὸ βρακίν
του.
d, Hormon. I, 210 τὴν φύσιν | ἥνπερ γὰρ ἔχειν ἡ Ερις. 11, 215 ἔστησεν
γὰρ τοῦτον τότε ... μὴ στραφῇς ἐκ τοῦ πολέμου. 14, 18 φωτίζονταιΝ ; 8, 152
μάχωνταιΝ ; 21, 136 κυριεύονταιΝ ; index νη' μετὰ τῆς σπάθης ἐσφάγηΝ ὁ Αἴας,
et passim.
>
C
e. Now : ποτέ του novor in his life, μὴν ἀκοῦς don't liston, μὴν
παραπονᾶσαι ' don't complain, μήν το ξεχάσης 'don't forget it." (1797)-50
a for av, dè for dév, etc. (infra 25).
20. Also adverbial participles in -ντα (822 f.) occasionally become
-νταν, as Hormon. 22, 326 βλέπονταΝ; 19, 363 γυρίζονταν, etc.
21. The above specimens (17-20), which might be multiplied to any
extent, speak for themselves. Their full import, however, can be
realized only when it is remembered that the authors from whom
they are taken are more or less scholarly littérateurs with a pro-
nounced bias for 'classical' Greek, so that their N popular productions
are simply archaistic and artificial compositions with liberal conces-
sions to the vernacular idiom hitherto ignored (supra 9). With all
that, they cannot resist the uncontrollable influence of popular speech,
and thus admit -v movable, almost indiscriminately, in every third
person of all tenses. This practice is continued to the present day
in several modern Greek idioms, mentioned above (10), whereas its
retreat from the other dialects will be explained presently.
548
APP. III. -TERMINAL CONSONANTISM. [22-24.
III. OMISSION OF FINAL v.
22. The truism that every excess leads to reaction finds its applica-
tion also in the use of final -". Its original presence or gradual exten-
sion over all accusatives singular, including the nominative neuter; to
all datives plural in -ov; and to all persons singular of the verb, in-
cluding those in -μly not to speak of its constant presence in the genitive
plural: this profusion of final -v could not but lead to confusion, and
confusion again could not but lead to reaction. Accordingly, as soon
as it had reached the stage of excess, the formerly euphonic and
later constituent terminal began to be dropped. This reactionary
process signalizes itself naturally first in sporadic cases, then spreads
gradually until it has finally dislodged almost every final -v, whether
euphonic or constituent. The earliest manifestation of this process
may be traced as far as the material is available-to G times, that
is to the period of its great spread.
α. CIG 5074 (A.D. 31 ) θεὸν μέγιστον Ἑρμῆ.
b. Gr. Urk. Berlin 183 (A.D. 85), 24 тην проσńкovσa rĥ[s] ΣaraBoûtos Tapijr
καὶ σκηδίαν (read κηδείαν).
c. Great Louvre Pap. 3183 τον βορρᾶ καὶ τὸν λίβα. 1721 τὴν ψυχή. Gr.
Pup. Br. Mus. p. 117, 2η τὴ χάριν, τὴ ψῆφον. 241, 24 ἕνα μὲν εἰς βορρᾶ,
eis
τὸν δὲ ἄλλον εἰς ἀπηλιώτην. CWessely Akad. Wiss. 1889 p. 11ῇ ἁπλῆν
ἀσφάλεια.
dopáλeia. ib. ovoa (for ovoav), eis Boppâ often.-Leont. Neap. V. J. 51,
16 & 26 τὸν ἅγιον ἀββᾶ . . . Acta Pil. B 1, 1 εἰς τὸν κορβανᾶ.Porph. Adm.
170 τὸν ᾿Αρπαδῆ, τὸν Σαλμούτζη.
d. Acta Tho. 39, 34 τapedúoŋ. 89, 5 ovvýpon. Leont. Neap. V. J. 88, 20 (E)
ἐγεννήθη. 17, 1 (C) ἐπληροφορήθη. 92, 25 (AC) προεχειρίσθη. 16, 8 (Ε)
¿§avéorη; 7, 9 (C) ëpn—all 1st persons.
23. The subsequent T-B periods, as far as we may judge from the
literary monuments extant, do not show an adequate progress of the
reaction against final -v. This cannot, however, indicate a discon-
tinuance, but rather testifies to the scholastic zeal of the scribes of
the time (supra 19-20). For soon hereafter, when M popular litera-
ture made its appearance, we are suddenly faced with a bewildering
state of things: final -v is added and dropped promiscuously and indis-
criminately, showing, as it were, a still undecided struggle.
του.
Span. 12 τον βασιλεάΝ & 235 τὸν βασιλέα. 82 θέλημα & 28ο θέλημά
185 ἡ χάρις ὅλη ἐγάθη & 224 οὐδέν την ἠσχολήθη & 228 ὁ βασιλεὺς τους απε
κρίθηΝ. Roboam 32 ἅ σε δώσῃ & 121 ἄν σε δώσῃ, 62 ἂν σε θλίψη. Prodr.
4, 198 τὰ κὰ δεκατέσσερα, beside κἂν passim. 1, 17 ἀρρώστημα, but 32 τὸ
στόμων της. 3, 99 μὴν θωρῇς & 227 μὴ βλαβῆτε, 48 μὴ κνήθεσαι, μὴ τρίβεσαι,
μὴ παρακαμπουρίζης. 139 μὴ ἐξέρχεσαι. 316 νὰ μὴν χορταίνω & στὴ νὰ μὴ
χορταίνω. 3, 517 δεῖναι & 527 δεῖνα, 567 τὸν δεῖνα. 504 τον βασιλεάν
& 545 βασιλέα. 4, 340 τετράδα καὶ παρασκευή, 556 ἐκύπην τὸ ζωνάριΝ μου.
ABC 12, 4 ποτέ μου δὲ νὰ σ᾿ ἔλλαξα.
và
74, 2 ἃ δὲ(ν) πιστεύῃς λιγερή, καὶ ἃ δὲν
πληροφορᾶσαι.
24. Since that time the struggle has been carried on, but the pro-
cess of reaction eventually gained the upper hand, and so final -
is now fast retreating from popular speech. In point of fact,
it subsists only in the few insular dialects specified in 221;
generally also in the proclitics (τόν, τήν, τόν, τῶν, δέν, ἄν, μήν, etc.),
when they are followed by a sonant or K, π, T, as: Tòν àɣanṆ, TẦν
πειράζω, μὴν πάῃς, μὴν ἀκοῦς, ἂν ἔρθῃς, δέν το θέλω, τὸν κακόν του καιρό,
Tò Taidí(Y) TOU; further in a few more cases where its dropping
would give rise to confusion (ep. εἶχα with είχαν, ἤθελα with ἤθελαν,
{
549
24-28.] APP. III.-TERMINAL CONSONANTISM.
εἶπα ἔφυγα with εἶπαν ἔφυγαν infra 28 ; also τὸ with τόν). But even in
these exceptional cases the phonetic difficulty is obviated by another
expedient a suffixal or rather protective vowel - is annexed and
produces amplified forms like τόνε, τήνε, τῶνε for τόν, τήν, τῶν; αὐτόνε,
αὐτήνε, αὐτῶνε for αὐτόν, αὐτήν, αὐτῶν (the analogy of which is followed
by μασε, σώσε, τούσε, τῶσε for μας, σας, τούς, τώς 1. c. τῶν), δένε for δέν,
ἄνε for ἄν (cp. also εἰσέ and 'σέ for els and 's respectively), etc. (130.
132b. 208). This protective - is apparently due to the influence
of the syllabic augment of verbs with which the words under con-
sideration are so often associated, as: τὸν (τὴν ἐγύρευα, ἔβλεπα τόνε
(τήνε) γυρεύω, βλέπω γυρεύω, βλέπω τονε (τηνε); τῶν ἔδωκα, τῶνε δίδω,
δίδω τωνε; τῶν ἐθυμήθηκα (Crete), τῶν θυμοῦμαι, θυμοῦμαι τωνε; 50 σας
ἐφίλησε, σῶσε φιλεῖ; μᾶς ἐμίλησε, μᾶσε μιλεῖ; ἂν ἐφοβήθηκε, νε φοβάται,
etc. (536 f. 725).
25. Sometimes also a protective is appended, probably due to the
accusative singular (τινά, ἕνα, δεῖνα etc.), as: (αὐτόν) αὐτόνα, (αὐτήν) αὐτῆνα,
(ἐμέν) ἐμένα, (ἐσέν) ἐσένα. So too the neuter form v with its con-
pounds οὐδέν, μηδέν, κανέν, καθέν, has been amplified to ἕνα, οὐδένα, μηδένα,
κανένα, καθένα, as: Apophth. 1ο5 Β πλέοντες εἰς ἕνα; 144 C ἕνα ἀγγεῖον
ἐλαίου ; so Cosm. Ind. 101 Β. Mal. 346, 11 μίλιον ἕνα ; further 279, 8;
280, 13; S. Pelagia p. 56 συναγαγὼν εἰς ἕνα πάντας τοὺς πολίτας [where
HUsener mistakes it for masculine and refers to Latin unum]; Porph.
Cer. 121, Ι καθένα ἕκαστον βῆμα. Span. 133 εἰς τὸ καθένα πρᾶγμα; Ρrodr.
5, 56 κερνοῦν τον ἄλλο ἕνα (for ἄλλο ἕν); and with further movable ",
as Prodr. 6, 167 μ' ἕναν βελτῶιιν; 3, 86 λουτρὸν οὐδίναν βλέπεις (unless
ο λουτρός).
26. In cases, however, where the absence of final - would not leadl
to confusion, it is simply dropped, and words like the above (24)
obtain a threefold form, viz. (α) αυτόν (οι εὐτόν) -ήν, τῶν; τόν, τήν,
τῶν ; δέν (after which also μήν for μή), ἄν ; μᾶς, σᾶς, τούς, τῶς (i,e. τῶν),
eis: all used in connected speech and before a vowel or κ, π, T ;—(b)
αυτόνε, (or -a), -ήνε, (-α), -ώνε, (-α) ; τόνε, (-α), τήνε, (-α) ; τῶνε, (-α) ; δένε,
ἄνε : in connected speech before consonants other than κ, π, τ; but
μᾶσε, σᾶσε, τοῦσε, τῶσε, εἶσε before any consonant. (c) αυτό, αυτή,
αὐτῶ, τό, τή, τῶ, δέ, ἄ.
27. That final - is often assimilated to following μ λ ρ, or appears
as nasal γ before gutturals, has been explained in 195 and 200 ff.
28. The retreat of final -v is a phonetic phenomenon which has neces-
sitated a number of grammatical changes in the language especially
since T times. One of them is that forms like ἔλυσα and ἔλυσαν, ἔλεγα
and ἔλεγαν (G-B for ἔλεγον, Ist and 3rd person, 794), ἐκοιμήθην and
ἐκοιμήθη, τόν and τό (tonoclitic pronoun for αὐτὸν and αὐτό), distin-
guished as they were only by the final -v, have since its retreat become
identical and thus called for a protective suffix, suggested by associa-
tion or analogy (132'. For 1.). Thus in ἔλυσαν and έλεγαν a protective
-e was appended, and gave birth to the N forms ἐλύσανε, ἐλέγανε
(=ἔλυσαν, ἔλεγαν). This -e was presumably suggested by the third
person singular of past tenses (ἔλυε, ἔλυσε, λέλυκε, ἔφαγε). In process
of time it was transferred also to the other persons and thus called
forth the more recent but still dialectal forms ἤρχον μουν- " or ἠρχόμουνα
(also ἠρχόμανε) = ἠρχόμην; ἤρχουσου -ε[] = ἤρχου; ἤρχετον ε[] ἤρχετο ;
ἤρχομέστανε οι ἠρχόμεστο Nel=ἠρχόμεθα, etc. beside the less frequent
[1] So accented throughout, aftor ἤμουνε, ἤσουνε, ήτονε, current even in Μ
as : Pul. 441 ήσουν ε.
550
APP. III.-TERMINAL CONSONANTISM.
[28-30.
forms of northern speech ἠρχόμουνα, ἠρχόσουνα, etc. where the final
-a is due to the influence of the first person ἔμενα, ἔμεινα, εἶχα, εἶτα,
пурnkа, etc. (801). That this protective or suffixal -e (or -a) was
resorted to when euphonic -v had been identified with constituent v,
needs no special elucidation here.
29. On the other hand, the aorist passive (ékoiµýlŋv, ékoμnen) was
amplified by the superaddition of the perfect ending -ka (the two
tenses having meanwhile become identical and equally characteristic
of the past [786. 1875]; ep. ἔστην and ἕστηκα, εὗρον and εὕρηκα, ἔσχον
and ἔσχηκα, ἔθανον and τέθνηκα, ἔδων, ἔδωκα and δέδωκα, etc.), and thus
received additional emphasis through the double ending -On-κa, as:
ἐκοιμήθηκα, ἐκοιμήθηκε, ἐκοιμηθήκανε. (761. 801.)
30. The various stages of the whole process of euphonic and ana-
logical amplification may be exemplified in the two pronouns euè and
ré. As already explained (532 and supra 8), their seemingly abnormal
form called for their supply first with the analogical -v (µív, vér).
Then the necessity arose for their assimilation to one of the received
accusative endings (-av, -v, -a by this time all amplified to -ar).
The nearest and most convenient of such endings was naturally
-a, since it was suggested by forms like τινά, δεῖνα, ἕνα, λιμένα, μῆνα,
xuâva, piva, and moreover suited both genders, consequently also the
forms εμέ(ν) and σε(ν). Accordingly ἐμὲν now became ἐμίνα, and der or
(with the analogical prefix suggested by éµé 532) éσév became é-σé-v-a.
In the further progress of time, when every accusative closed with
final (supra 5 f.), this new suffix was appended also to éµé-v-n and
é-ré-v-a and led to eué-v-a-r and e-σé-v-a-v (cp. Tivá-r, deiva-v etc.), as
in Span. 172 etc. When lastly final - became untenable (supra
22 ff.), a second suffixal or protective - came to its defence and led to
éµé-v-a-v-e and é-σé-v-a-v-e, now often heard in popular speech (537).
551
APPENDIX IV.
THE FUTURE INDICATIVE SINCE A TIMES.
1. Compared with the other tenses of the present and past, the
future indicative from the outset laboured under serious disadvan-
tages. For while present action was assigned almost entirely to the
present indicative, and past action exclusively to the past (i. e. aorist.
imperfect and pluperfect) indicative, future action was distributed
between the future indicative on the one hand, and the other moods
(subjunctive, [optative], and imperative) on the other (App. v. 1), not
to speak of the infinitive (App. vi. 1 & 4), nor of the present indicative
(1836). Each of these moods was of its own an exponent of prospec-
tive action, in that it referred to a time to come, and thus performed
part of the office otherwise appropriate to the future indicative.
The future tense therefore had virtually a much narrower scope than
had the present and past indicative. With the gradual retreat of the
secondary subjunctive (App. v. 6-13), of the 3rd person imperative
(1918ff. 1928. App. v. 16), and above all of the infinitive (2063 App. vi.
13-17), and their succession mostly by the primary subjunctive simple
or in company with the appropriate conjunction, but particularly
with iva (App. vi. 16), this mood--the primary subjunctive--became
as it were the sole heir and successor of all extinct moods and thus
came to be felt as the principal exponent of future action. The
future indicative therefore, owing to its limited use, eventually
became so unfamiliar with the masses as to be altogether dispensed
with, its place having been assumed by various substitutes partly
permanent, partly transient. These are in chronological order:
2. A. a. The present indicatire acting as a durative future. This has
been a permanent substitute from classical antiquity down to the
present time, with steadily increasing popularity (1836. Cp. RKühner
ii. 115, 1 & 119, 5).
2
Xen.
Λ 365 ἢ θήν σ' ἐξανύω γε καὶ ὕστερον ἀντιβολήσας, | εἴ που τις καὶ ἐμοί
γε θεῶν ἐπιτάρροθύς ἐστι. Hat. 7, 140 οὔτε γὰρ ἡ κεφαλὴ Μένει ἔμπεδον, οὔτε
τὸ σῶμα . . λείπεται . . πέλει. Also 8, 77. Th. 4, 95 ἐν μιᾷ μάχῃ τήνδε τὴν
χώραν προεκτάσθε καὶ ἐκείνην μᾶλλον ἐλευθεροῦτε. Fur. Andr. 381 ἢν θάνῃς
σὺ παῖς ὅδ᾽ ἐκφεύγει μόρον σοῦ δ᾽ οὐ θελούσης κατθανεῖν τόνδε κτενῶ.
An. 4, 7, 3 τῇ στρατιᾷ οὐκ ἔστι τὰ ἐπιτήδεια εἰ μὴ ληψόμεθα τὸ χωρίον.
Antiph. 3, 8, 11 καταλαβόντες καθαροὶ τῶν ἐγκλημάτων ἔσεσθε, ἀπολύσαντες
ὑπαίτιοι καθίστασθε. Martyr. Polyc. 11, 2 πυρί σε ποιώ δαπανηθῆναι εἰ τῶν
θηρίων καταφρονεῖς, ἐὰν μὴ μετανοήσης. Apophth. 396 Α θεός, θέλεις οὐ θέλεις
οὐκ ἀφῶ (present 960) σε ἐὰν μὴ αὐτὸν θεραπεύσῃς.
552
APP. IV.—FUTURE INDICATIVE SINCE A TIMES.
[2b–6.
2. This substitute is now very common in Nspeech, as: ἄνε με μαρτυρήσῃς
σε σκοτώνω, and the almost exclusive means of expressing the future in-
dicative in South Italian Greek (1836). (GMorosi 145.)
3. b. The association thus effected between present and future may
account not only for the converse usage (1889), but also for the con-
fusion, since A, of the future subjunctive-acting as future indicative
in that case (infra 8)—with the present subjunctive, a circumstance
which has finally called into existence several verbal doublets, as:
(ᾐσθόμην) αἴσθωμαι-novel present αἴσθομαι. (ἔθιγον) θίγω θιγω. (ὑπε
σχόμην) ὑπόσχομαιὑπόσχομαι. (εσπόμην) ἔσπωμαι-σπομαι. (ὦφλον) φλω
φλω. (ἐγενόμην) γένωμαι- γένομαι. (ὤρυγον Ρ) ὀρύγωὀρύγω (as
Callin. 117, 15). So εἴρω (' say ') fut. ἐρῶ-ἐρῶ. So too in N : ἐξεύρω,
then recently (κατέσχον) κατάσχω-κατάσχω, (συνέδραμον) συνδράμω-
συνδράμω.
4. B. c. Especially regular and common appears the use of the present for
a less assertive future in the case of such verbs as include in themselves
the inception of future. Such are: ἔρχομαι, εἶμι (984)), πορεύομαι, ὑπάγω
more commonly δύναμαι; also οἴομαι οι οἶμαι, ἡγοῦμαι, νομίζω, φημί, λέγω,
ἐλπίζω, φοβοῦμαι (especially when they are used parenthetically); χρή,
δεῖ, πρέπει, etc.and above all μέλλω, (ἐθέλω, βούλομαι, ὀφείλω, and the like.
(1893. 1896. 2086.)
Ar. Vesp. 534 εἴπερ, δ μὴ γένοιτο, νῦν οὗτος ἐθέλει κρατῆσαι. Sept. Josu.
1, 11 ἔτι τρεῖς ἡμέραι καὶ ἡμεῖς Διαβαίνετε τὸν Ἰορδάνην τοῦτον.
John 1.4.
3 ἐὰν ἑτοιμάσω τόπον ὑμῖν, πάλιν ἔρχομαι καὶ παραλήμψομαι ὑμᾶς. So 4, 23,
1, 30. (Cp. Matt. 3, κι ὁ ἐρχόμενος and Mark to, 30 ὁ αἰὼν ὁ ἐρχόμενοι).
Rom. 15, 25 νυνὶ δὲ πορεύομαι εἰς Ἱερουσαλὴμ διακονῶν τοῖς ἁγίοις. Diod. ii. 616,
53 τοῖς ὀφείλογειν ἀναδέχεσθαι τὸν θάνατον = τοῖς ἀναδεξομένοις. Hesych. ἐλεύ
σομαι· ἔρχομαι, ἐπανέλθω. JMosch. 2865 βλέπε πόσους κόπους θέλεις ἀπολέσαι.
Leont. Neap. V.S. 1685 Β αὔριον θέλομεν ENA Caι ὑμᾶς. Span. 1οι ἔχεις δὲ καὶ
συνείδησιν ὁποῦ σε θέλει ἐλέγχειν. Prodr. 4, 514 καὶ τότε θέλω νά σε ἰδῶ τὸ
πως τον θέλει εγPEIN and then I want to see how you will drag him.
5. It is obvious that the imperfect of the above verbs (ἐ-ἠδυνάμην, ἔδει,
ἔπρεπε, ἔμελλον, ἤθελον, ὤφειλον [1995], etc.) in G-B perform the office of the
potential indicative (would, might; cp. infra 7).
Test. ΧΙΙ. 1040 Α εἰ μὴ Ἰακὼβ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν προσηύξατο περὶ ἐμοῦ πρὸς κύριον,
ἤθελε κύριος ἀνελεῖν με (=ἀνεῖλεν ἄν με). Callin. 81, 12 στρατηλάτης ἔμελλε
Γενέσθαι εἰ μὴ ἐτελεύτα, Acta Xanth. 62, 25 εἰ ἦν μοι δυνατὸν Ἤθελον ἅψασθαι
τοῦ κρασπέδου τῶν ἱματίων αὐτοῦ.
6. d. On a similar principle, during G, ἔχω with the aorist infini-
tive takes the place of the future, and thus corresponds to the Latin
phrase habeo with infinitive, used in the sense of δύναμαι, ὀφείλω,
μέλλω, then as an equivalent to the future tense (cp. French j'aimer-
ai, finir-ai). This Latinism, however, seems to have struck no deep
roots in popular speech, seeing that modern Greek, even in its M
stage, uses this turn much less frequently than synchronous scholastic
writers. Be it further observed that exo in this construction appears
first in the sense of I have cause to - I have (a duty) 10, 1 must (ὀφείλω),
then (when the simple future had disappeared I am about (μέλλω),
and finally I shall or will (ἔσομαι).
Clement. 1, 4 εἰ μήτι γε τοῦ νῦν με λυποῦντος ἐκεῖ χεῖρον παθεῖν ἔχω.
1, 17 συὶ μὲν ἑτοίμως ἔχω εγΝΟΔΕΥΕΙΝ. περὶ ὧν ἔπραξεν ἐνταῦθα (ἡ ψυχὴ)
ἔχει κριθήναι. 1, 12 εἴ γε τὰ τῷ θεῷ διαφέροντα γνῶναι θέλεις, παρὰ τούτου
μόνον μαθεῖν ἔχει. 3, 28 ὑφ' οὗ (Θεού) κριθῆναι ἔχει ἡ ἑκάστου ψυχὴ περὶ ὧν
ἔπραξεν ἐνταῦθα. 2, 33 οὗ (κανόνος) μὴ ἀφιστάμενός τις οὐκ ἔχει πΛΑΝΗΘΗΝΑΙ.
553
6-7.] APP. IV. -FUTURE INDICATIVE SINCE A TIMES.
2, 36 πρὸς ἀγαθοῦ τινος ἀγνώστου συντελούμενον ἐλθεῖν ἔχει. 3, 15 ἅτινα αὐτοῖς
ὀφθαλμοῖς ἰδεῖν ἔΧΟΜΕΝ. 3, 17 πᾶν ψεῦσμα, καν μυρίαις ἐπινοίαις βοηθῆται, τὸν
ἔλεγχον κἂν ἐν μικρῷ χρόνῳ λαβεῖν ἔχει 11. 15, 11 ὁ παρὰ τοῦτο ποιῶν αἰωνίως
έχει κολασθήναι. Ignat. Rom. 2 οὔτε ὑμεῖς ἐὰν σιωπήσητε κρείττονι ἔργῳ ἔχετε
ἐπΙΓΡΑΦΗ͂ΝΑΙ. Hermas Sim. 9, το μικρὸν ἔχω ΑΝΑΠΑΥΘΗΝΑΙ.
105 B el
10, 5 μικρὸν
ἔχω ἀφαιρεθήναι (v. 1. ἀναιρεθῆναι) καὶ πάντα σοι ἐπιλύσω. Cyrill. H. Catech.
1, 2 καὶ τότε ἀκοῦσαι ἔχεις ἐὰν ἄξιος γένῃ. Macar. 561 Β ὅτε ἐποίεις τὰ κακὰ
οὐκ ᾔδεις ὅτι εγλληφθῆναι ἔχεις καὶ ἀποθανεῖΝ ; Epiph. i. 736 Β ἐλέγξει σε
Έχει Pallad. 1043 ο ἀνάσχου μοι τῆς νουθεσίας καὶ CΥΝΕΝΕς και σοι ἔχει.
Nilos 541 Α πολλοὶ ἐπισκόπων ἔχογει κατακΛΗΡΟΝΟΜĀCaι τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρός.
(hal. 984 Β CYNΤΥΧΕΪΝ γὰρ ἔΧΟΜΕΝ τῷ ἀρχιμανδρίτῃ. 1404 Β ἔχει χειροτονή-
και ἐπίσκοπον. Narr. Zus. 106, 35 ἡ δόξα τῆς πίστεώς σου Sica (ubi malo δεῖ
σε) ἔχει τὸν Σατανᾶν. 107, 12 ἐγὼ ᾔδειν ὅτι οὕτως ποιῆσαι σε είχεν ὁ θεὸς
ὡς καὶ τοὺς μάκαρας, καὶ ἔχογCIN εἶναι ἀναμάρτητοι καὶ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ὑπὲρ
τοὺς ἀγγέλους. Αpophth. 96 Α ταχέως ἔχει τὸ σῶμα σου ἀσθενῆται.
ἐποίησα ἐμαυτῷ ἀγάπην, ταύτην ἔχω ερεΐν. 285 Β εἰ δὲ μὴ φυλάξωμεν έρημω-
ΘΑΝΑΙ ἔχει ὁ τόπος οὗτος. Euseb. Alex. 400 Β σὺ ἀφίειν με ἔχεις κἀκείνου φίλος
Γενέσθαι. Thood. Scyth. 233 D εἴ τις λέγει ὅτι ὁ δεσπότης ἔχει ἐν τῷ μέλλοι τι
σταυρωθήναι ὑπὲρ τῶν δαιμόνων ἀνάθεμα ἔστω. Protev. 19, 3 Σαλώμη,
καινόν σοι θέαμα ἔχω διηγήσασθαι. JMoschos 2897 » ἔχεις ἀποθανεῖν καὶ εἰς
κόλασιν ἀπελθεῖν. 2976 ο Βασιλεῖται ἔχω. 2856 D ἄρτι ἔχω ἀποθανεῖν. So 2805 Α.
2872 Β. 2948 Β. 2976 c, et passim. Chron. 721, 20 ἔχετε γενέθαι. Nic. ii. 665 A
ΕΚΔΙΚΑΣΑΙ ἔχοIN. Theoph. 127, 23 ἢ Ιλλος έχει εἶναι εἰς τὸ παλάτιον ἢ ἐγώ.
170, 10 μετὰ πολλῆς αἰσχύνης ἔχει ὁ χαγάνος ὑποστρέψαι εἰς τὴν χώραν. 325, 28 f.
ἐὰν λαλήσῃς τὸν στρατὸν ἵνα δέξωνταί με, καὶ τὰς ῥόγας αὐτῶν ἐπαγεται ἔχω καὶ
εἰρήνην ποιῶ . καὶ καλῶς ἔχομεΝ ΖΗΣΑΙ καὶ πάντας ὑμᾶς προαναβιβάσαι ἔχω
καὶ συγκροτήσαι. το οὐδὲ ἐμοὶ ἔχει ὁ βασιλεὺς πιστεῖται. 349, 22 εἰ ζῶ Δείξαι σοι
ἔχω τὸ τίς εἰμι. So further 4, 16. 381, 12, 15. 473, 13. So too ἔχει ὁpiceIn (for ὁρίσαι).
Porph. Cor. 489, 9.
"
•
19
• ..
6. Evon a future of ἔχω and εἰμὶ came to be formed by means of this con-
struction : Narr. Zos. 107, 13 ἔχΟΥΣΙΝ εἶναι (= ἔσονται) ἀναμάρτητοι καὶ εἶναι,
αὐτοὺς ὑπὲρ τοὺς ἀγγέλους. Theoph. 197, 15 ἔχει είναι (= ἔσται). Porph. Adm.
201, 5 & 212, 8 ἔχειν ἔΧΟΜΕΝ (= ἕξομεν).
6. So still ἔχω νὰ πάθω, ἔχεις ν' ἀκούσῃς, etc.
7. e. As a matter of course, the imperfect of exo in all the above
cases has the force of οἷος ἦν οι ἔμελλον, might, should, would (ep.
supra 5). Hence it frequently stands in the apodosis of a subjective
or unreal condition, thus performing the work of a potential indica-
tive (1907. 1974). The particle ἄν in this case is mostly omitted.
Test. XII. 1073 Α εἰ μὴ Δὰν ὁ ἀδελφός μου συνεμάχησέ μοι, εἶχον με ἀνελεῖν,
1080 D εἰ μὴ ἢ (ubi male *) μετάνοια τῆς σαρκός μου, ἄτεκνος εἶχον ἀΠΟΘΑΝΕΝ.
Acta Petri et Pauli 185, 15 τοῦτο εἶχε παθεῖν ἡ Ῥώμη. Callin. 98, 4 εἰ γὰρ
ἀνήγγειλας περεΚΑΛΟΥ͂ΜΕΝ καὶ ἡμεῖς. Apophth. 176 Α εἰ ἧς ἐν τῇ χώρα σου, καὶ
[1] So further: Clomont. 3, 37 εἰ δέ τις τολμήσειεν ἀϊδίως τὴν ψυχὴν κολασθῆναι
ἔχει. 15, το μηδὲν ἁμαρτάνοντες ἐπὶ μόνῳ τῷ τὴν ἐλεημοσύνην μὴ ποιεῖν κατά
ΔΙΚΑΣΘΗΝΑΙ οὐκ ἔχογει. 20, 4 περὶ ὧν πράσσουσι κακῶς πάντως κολασθήναι
ἔχειν. 3, 61 πάντως καὶ πεσεῖν ἔχειν. 11, 11 τέλος λαβεῖν οὐκ ἔχει. 11, 32
καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐπαισχΥΝΘΗ͂ΝΑΙ ἔΧΟΜΕΝ αὐτοὶ δὲ ἀπολέσθαι.
N
12, 3: ἄνευ τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ
βουλῆς οὐδὲ στρουθὸς ἐν παγίδι ἐνπεσεῖν ἔχει. 13, 8 ἀθανάτως καὶ ἀλύπως βιώαι
ἔχει. 13, 14 τὴν κατὰ πάντων νίκην λαβοῦσα σωθῆναι ἔχει. 16, 9 οἱ μὴ πεποιη-
κότες ἀπολέσθαι ἔχογειν. 16, 1ο ταύτης τον γεννήτορα ἐὰν καταλίπω, δικαίᾳ
κρίσει καὶ αὐτή με καταλιπεῖν ἔχει. 19, 3 ἐὰν εἴπῃς μὴ εἶναι, ἐκ πολλῶν καὶ τῶν
τοῦ διδασκάλου σου αποδείξαι ἔχω ὅτι ἐστίν.
554
APP. IV.—FUTURE INDICATIVE SINCE 4 TIMES. [7-8.
ἐπίσκοπος πολλάκις καὶ κεφαλὴ πολλῶν εἶχες εἶναι. Doroth. 1700 Β εἰ συνέφερέ
μοι, εἶχε πάντως πέμψαι μοι ὁ θεός. Nic. ii. 657 A κἀκεῖνον ἂν εἴχομεν ἱστορίαι
καὶ ζωγραφίσει. JMoschos 2948 Β όντως εἶχον λαβείν εὐλογίαν τῶν ἁγίων.
Chron. 732, 3 εἶχεν ἐλθεῖν.
8. B. The future subjunctive simple. This substitute is familiar to
Homer and the Attic poets, fairly common in 4 prose (1921, 1962),
chiefly after où µý(v) (also µǹ où 1956), but very popular in P, particu-
larly G-B compositions with or without οὐ μή(ν) (2016). Though
obsolescent, this simple future subjunctive still survives in N speech
(infra 10).
τριών
ΙΙ. Α 262 οὐ γάρ πω τοίους ἴδον ἀνέρας οὐδὲ ἴΔωμαι. Γ 287 ἥ τε καὶ ἐσσομένοισι
μετ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλεται. Ζ 459 και ποτέ τις εἴπHCIN. So too Z 201. Μ 191. Π 437
Hymn. Apoll. 1 μνήσομαι ούδε λάθωμαι ᾿Απόλλωνος Εκάτοιο. Aesch. Sept. 38
ΟΥ ΜΗ(Ν) ληφθῶ δόλῳ. Soph. Τr. 1190 οὐ μὴν) λάβω. So too Ai. 560. Phil. 103.
Eur. El. 988 oỶ MH(N).. TECHC. Xen. An. 2, 2, 12 Av yàp änag dúo ĥ tpiâv
ἡμερῶν ἀπόσχωμεν ΟΥΚΕΤΙ ΜΗΝ ΔΥΝΗΤΑΙ dur. fut., ep. supra 4) βασιλεὺς ἡμᾶς
καταλαβεῖν. So Hier. II, 15. Pl. Rep. 341 B. Xen. An. 7, 3, 26 ὃν ἂν θέλῃς αἱρήσεις
καὶ ἀποχωρῶν οὐ ΜΗΝ) Δείτε τὸν πολέμιον. Pl. Symp. 214 Α οπόσον ἂν
κελεύῃ τις ἐκπιὼν οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ΜΗ(Ν) ποτε Μεθγεθῇ. Dem. 22, 39 ἅπαντές
εἰσιν ἀπηλλαγμένοι καὶ δίκην οὐδεὶς οὐδεμίαν ΜΗ(Ν) Δῷ.
N
N
Sept. Iob 7, το ἐὰν ἄνθρωπος καταβῇ εἰς ᾅδην, οὐκέτι ΜΗ(Ν) ΑΝΑΒἢ οὐδ᾽ οὐ
ΜΗΝ) ἐπιστρέψῃ εἰς τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον οὐδ᾽ ΟΥ̓ ΜΗ(Ν) ἐπιγνῷ αὐτὸν ἔτι ὁ τόπος
αὐτοῦ. Esa, ro, 14 καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ὃς διαφεύξεται με ἢ ἀντείπι μοι. 3 Reg.
18, 3 ἔστω ὅτι δράμω. Tobit 6, 8.
NT Luke 1, 15 ἔσται γὰρ μέγας ἐνώπιον κυρίου, καὶ οἶνον καὶ σίκερα ΟΥ ΜΗ(Ν)
πίμ καὶ πνεύματος ἁγίου πλησθήσεται. Matt. 7, 6 μηδὲ βάλητε τοὺς μαργαρίτας
ὑμῶν ἔμπροσθεν τῶν χοίρων, Μήποτε ΚΑΤΑΠTHCOYCIN αὐτοὺς ἐν τοῖς ποσὶν
αὐτῶν καὶ στραφέντες ῥύξωσιν ὑμᾶς. John 1o, 28 καὶ ΟΥ ΜΗ(Ν) Απόλωνται
εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, καὶ οὐχ άρπάσει τις αὐτὰ ἐκ τῆς χειρός μου. Luke 8, 17 οὐ γάρ
ἐστιν κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ φανερὸν γενήσεται οὐδὲ ἀπόκρυφον ὃ οὐ ΜΗ(Ν) Γνωσθῇ καὶ
εἰς φανερὸν ἔλθη. 11, 5 τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἕξει φίλον καὶ πορεύσεται πρὸς αὐτὸν μεσο
νυκτίου καὶ εἴπῃ πρὸς αὐτόν, φίλε κτλ. Barn. 17, 2 ΟΥ̓ ΜΗΝ) NOHCHTE.
ΟΥ̓ MNHCΙΚΑΚΗΣΕΙΣ, ΟΥ ΜΗΝ) ΔΙΨΥΧΗΣΗΣ, ΟΥ ΜΗΝ) λάβης, ΟΥ ΜΗΝ ἄρμι,
ἀλλὰ διδάξεις, οΥ ΜΗ(Ν) ΓΕΝΗ.
N
Hermas Sim. 5, 7, 3 εἰ δὲ γέγονεν ἄγνοια
προτέρα, πως εωθῇ ὁ ἄνθρωπος;
N
MH(N)
•
19. 4 fr.
Symm. Ps. 54, 24 Κατενέγκης. Thdtn. Dan. 12, 1ο ἐκλεγώει, ἐκλεγκανθώει,
πυρωθώσι, ἁγιασθῶς, ἀNOMHCωει. Clement. 349 Α ἐγὼ δὲ θεοῦ δεηθεὶς τὴν ἴασιν
παράσχω (ν. 1. παρέξω). Great Louvre Pap. 2097 ἐπενέγκω for ἐποίσομαι.
Alchem. 305, 16 ταύτην χωνεύσας εὕροις (write εὕρῃς) ἄργυρον κάλλιστον. Men.
Rhet. 232, 12 εργάση, παραδράμης. Cyrill. H. Procut. 357 Α ποτὲ μὲν ὑμῖν
Δείξῃ ὁ θεὸς ἐκείνην τὴν νύκτα .. τότε παραδείσου θύρα ἀνοιχθη τότε ὑδάτων
ἀπολογητε χριστοφόρων ἐχόντων εὐωδίαν· τότε Χριστοῦ προσηγορίαν λάβητε.
Nil. 461 D πότε γνώσῃ . πότε μισῆσαι θελήσεις . . πότε κατὰ νοῦν λάβης.
Mart. Potri et Pauli 12r, η ὅτι κατανοῆσαι ΔΥΝΗΘΗΤΕ eum poteritis advertere.
130, 5 πέμψει ὁ θεὸς ἅγιον ὅστις βασιλεὺς αὐτῶν λεχθῇ ἐκλ-?) Apocr. Evang.
Tho. 3, 2 ἰδοὺ νῦν καὶ σὺ ὡς δένδρον ἀποξηρανθῆς καὶ ΟΥ ΜΗ ΕΝΕΓΚΗΣ φύλλα οὔτε
ῥίζαν οὔτε καρπών. Acta Andr. et Matt. 4 ἀνέλθης. 31 πορευθής. 33
ἐπανέλθω. Acta Barn. 8 οὐ γὰρ ἔλθη μεθ' ἡμῶν. Gr. Urk. Berlin 302 († 538),
22 με μίσθωμαι τὰς προγεγραμμένας ἀρούρας καὶ παράσχω ἐνιαυσίας τὸν φορον
αὐτῶν. Mal. 111, 21 άτινα καὶ νῦν εἴπω. Cone. Nic. ii. 920 α ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ ἐξορύττω
τὸν ὀφθαλμὸν αὐτῆς καὶ ἴδω τί με βλάπτει. Vita Epiph. 41 D τότε ΜΝΗΘΗΣ.
04 Δ ἐπίτρεψον τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παραθήσοYCIN τράπεζαν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις καὶ
φάγονται (writo -ωνται) καὶ εὐφρανθώσι καὶ ἀπελεγονται (-ωνται) τὴν ὁδὸν
αὐτῶν. So ib. B. Callin, 136, 19 οὐ μὴ ὑμᾶς ἐγκαταλείψῃ ὁ θεὸς ἀλλὰ ἐλεήση
καὶ ἀπολάβητε καὶ προσδέξωμαι ὑμᾶς. (Cp. EASoph. r. Lex. 45.)
NE
555
9-12.] APP. IV.—FUTURE INDICATIVE SINCE A TIMES.
9. That the primary subjunctive had established itself, in early Christian
times, as the legitimate substitute for the future indicative is further
corroborated by the express testimony of the grammarians themselves.
COL.
Lesbon, 186 f. Τῶν ᾿Αττικῶν τὸ συντάσσειν τὸ μὴ μετὰ μέλλοντος χρόνου· ΜΗ
πείσομαι. Εστι δὲ τοῦτο τὸ σχῆμα τῶν περὶ τὸν ᾿Αντιφώντα· σπανίως δὲ καὶ
Ὅμηρος κέχρηται. Ἡμεῖς δὲ τὰς ἐξ ἀμφοτέρων φωνὰς τήν τε μὴ ἀπαγόρευσιν
καὶ τὴν οὐ ἄρνησιν ὑποτακτικοῖς ῥήμασι συντάσσομεν· οἷον ΟΥ̓ ΜΗ Διαλεχθώ
ΣΗΜΕΡΟΝ, ΟΥ̓ ΜΗ εἴπω. ᾿Ανακύπτει δ᾽ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ σχήματος καὶ ἕτερον Δώριον δ
γίνεται τῆς αὐτῆς συντάξεως χρεωκοπουμένης, οἷον οΥ̓κ εἴπω coι ἀντὶ τοῦ οὐκ ἐρῶ
Καὶ σήμερον οὐκ ἴδια ἀντὶ τοῦ Μὴ ἴδῃς, κατὰ (ubi male και) τό· Οὐ γάρ
πω τοίους ἴδον ἀνέρας οὐδὲ ἴδωμαι. So Hesych. οὐχ ὑποίσω: ογκ Υπενέγκω, οὐ
βαστάσω. οἴσει ἐνέγκει, προσφέρει, κομίσει (bad spellings for -η). παροίσομεν
παρενέγκωμεν, παρακομίσομεν. τευξόμεθα τύχωμεν. μελλήσω υπογλάσω
ἢ ὑπερθῶμαι. περιτεύξεται· εΥΝΤΥΧΗ ἢ περιπέσηται (read -εῖται). ἐλεύσομαι·
ἔρχομαι· ἐπανέλθω. πόρωει χαρίσωνται δώσουσιν. ἔδονται· φάγωσιν. πείσονται·
πάθωσι, et passim. Phot. Lex. πείσονται· πάθωσιν. περιτεύξεται εγΝΤΥΧΗ.
περιπεσείται. συντεύξομαι εγντύχω. σχήσουσιν εχώειν, κρατήσουσιν, ἐφέ-
ξουσιν. τίσωσιν· τιμήσωCIN, τιμωρήσονται, οἴσω· κομίσω, ἐνέγκω. Schol. Il.
Δ 237 ἔδονται φάγωσι.
10. This primary subjunctive is still lingering in modern Greek, chiefly
in wishes, that is in the sense of the ancient secondary subjunctive
to which it has succeeded (supra 8; infra 123; App. v. 15) : χαρώ σε =
οὕτως ἀναίμην σου, ὁ θεὸς φυλάξῃ (incorrectly -go) God forbid.
10b. The longest record of the future simple is shown by such defective
forms as ἔσομαι, ὄψομαι, ἐλεύσομαι, which being felt us independont verba
without present, were used accordingly, as: Vita Epiph. 49 Λ άγωμεν, τέκνο,
καὶ ὀψόμεθα (-ψώ- ?) τὸν λέοντα. ib. Η δεῦτε τέκνα καὶ ὄψεσθε τὸ πτῶμα. 53 Ο
ἔCOMAI πίστιν ἔχων, καὶ ἔCH πεποιθώς. COL 33, 32 άφες ΟΨΟΜΑΙ (rond ὕψωμαι).
Ducas 27, 8. 173, 12; sce 1767, a.
11. That at a time when the subjunctive of the future was on the ascendency
over its indicative, tho spirit of reaction should sometimes lead to the converse
phenomenon, that is to the use of the indicative for the subjunctive, was inevitable.
We therefore find sometimes finul ira and oπws with tho future indicative
epelt with the thematic vowel (η and w of the subjunctive. (Cp. EASoph.
Lex. p. 40.)
I
A
NT Acts 21, 24 ἵνα ξυρήσωνται τὴν κεφαλὴν καὶ γνώσωνται. 1 Cor. 13, 3 ἵνα
καυθήσωμαι. 1 Pet. 3, 1 ἵνα κερδηθήσωνται. Athen. 12, 23, p. 527 Α ὅπως παρα-
θήσωνται, παρασχήσωνται. Dio Chrys. 1, 136, 7 ὅπως μὴ ἔσωνται. Aristid. 35
Ρ. 482, 11 ὅπως γενήσωνται. Basil. ii. 683 Ε ίνα πλησθησώμεθα. Mart. Barthol. 7
ἵνα γνωσώμεθα. Proc. ii. 454, 9) περιεσώμεθα. i. 479, 17 ἔσησθε. ii. 43, 13
περιέσωνται (ν. 1.). i. 54, 17 διαθήσωνται (v. 1.) 220, το γενήσωνται. 277, 17
θήσωνται. 336, 13 συλλήψηται. ii. 71, 20 ἀκούσησθε, Agath. 41 πείσησθε (from
πάσχω). 163 καθεστήξη. Theophyl. 278, 8 ἵνα γενήσωνται. Cp. 1990.
12. C. The present or future subjunctire strengthened by the modal
particle "v, which, in progress of time, was confounded with iva, and
later changed to νά (1774). This formation marks the gradual trans-
ition from the potential secondary subjunctive [optative] (1925)-
now fast retreating-to the more concrete and simple future sub-
junctive (1773 f.).
Polyb. 1, 6, 6 οὔτ᾽ ἂν ὑβρίζειν ὑπομείνητε τοὺς ἐλευθέρους. 18, 18, 2 θαρρήσω ἂν
ἀποφήνασθαι. Dion. H. ii. 1175, 13 οὐ γὰρ ἂν οὗτος ὀλιγαρχίας ὄνομα θῆται τῇ τῶν
κρατίστων ἡγεμονίᾳ. ν. 615, 13 οὐδὲν ἂν Υπολάβῃ λέγεσθαι κατὰ τέχνην. Philo 1.69,
32 μὴ γὰρ ὄντων ὀνομάτων οὐδ᾽ ἂν διάλεκτος ᾖ. Diosc. 2, 91, p. 215 τὸ δὲ ὀρνίθειον
dè
καὶ χήνειον στέαρ οὕτως ἂν εγωλιασθῇ. Plut. ii. 556 Β σκοπῶν ἂν €YPHC. 777 Β
556
APP. IV. FUTURE INDICATIVE SINCE A TIMES. [12-13.
"
οὐκ ἄν σοι προσδιαλέξωμαι. [Demetr.] 13, 14 μόλις ἂν ἐΝΝΟΗΘΩΜΕΝ.
Clement. 45 B rís yàp än ȧmaptícḤ; Galen. ii. 8 в Étainéch d'an tis Kai Tòv
Αθηναῖον νομοθέτην. vi. 355 ο οὐκ ἄν ποτε φάγωμεν τῶν ἐκείνοις ἐδωδίμων.
Sext. 620, 28 οὐκ ὀλίγην δ' ἂν ἔχῃ μοῖραν εἰς προτροπὴν καὶ ὅταν βλέπωμεν κτλ.
Cyrill. H. Procat. 12 ὅταν τῇ πείρᾳ λάβῃς τὸ ὕψωμα τῶν διδασκομένων, τότε
ἂν Γνώση. Callin. 104, 19 λιμὸς ἔχει γενέσθαι καὶ ἵνα τότε αὐτοῖς δώσῃς. 123,
26 ὅσα οὖν καλὰ ἔργα ἐὰν ποιήσῃ τις, ἵνα λέγῃ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ. Proc. ii.
135, 19 οὕτω γὰρ ἂν ποιήσHςθε. 171, 19 ἤν τι καὶ περὶ Καμπανίας ὑμῖν ἢ Νεα-
πόλεως αὐτῆς εἴποιμεν, οὐκ ἂν Δέξηςθε; 263, 12 τῆς παρούσης αὐτῶν πρεσβείας
οὐδὲν ἂΝ ΓΕΝΗΤΑι μιαρώτερον. Acta Xanth. 75, 24 ἂν γὰρ συναντήσωμεν αὐτῷ
οὐκ ἂΝ ΚΙΝΗΣΩΜΕΝ. Pallad. 1113 Β ἐὰν γὰρ μάθω, ἵνα αὐτῷ εγντύχω· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ
μάθω αὐτοῦ τὴν πολιτείαν οὐκ ἀπέρχομαι ἕως τοῦ ὄρους. Acta Pil. i. Β, 4, 1 ἡμεῖς
ἵνα εἴπωμεν τῇ μεγαλειότητί σου τί εἶπεν αὐτός. 1ο, 6 σήμερον λέγω σοι ἀλήθειαν·
ἵνα σε ἔχω εἰς τὸν παράδεισον. [Amphil.] 222 B (ed. Camposis) ἐὰν ἔλθω εἰς
τὴν αὔριον ἕως ὥρας ἕκτης, τί ποιεῖς; ὁ δὲ ἔφη· ἵνα ἀποθάνω. λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ
ἅγιος ναί, ἵνα ἀποθάνης τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ΖΗΣΗΣ δὲ τῷ Χριστῷ μου. 222 σ ἐὰν ζήσης
ἕως αὔριον, ἵνα βαπτισθώ. See also 1774, b.
IScylitses 643, 12 έω σε ἔκτισα, φοῦρνε, ἐὼ ἵνα σε χαλάσω. [Cp. MGlycas 282 ὁποῦ
τὸν φοῦρνον ἔκτισε πάλε ἃς τον χαλάσῃ.] Nicet. 304, 26 εἰς βότρυν ἀγουρίδος μόλις
ΝΑ ΕΥΡΗ τις μίαν ῥῶγαν ὥριμον. 598, 24 πῶς ἵνα .. ετήσωνται; 783, 23 Τ.
ΝΑ Γενώμεθα. Span. 137 καὶ ἂν τὸ μικρὸν εὐχαριστῇς, Νά σ᾽ ἔλθῃ καὶ ἄλλο μέγα
208 καὶ τότε δεῦτε πρὸς ἐμὲ καὶ ὁκάτι Νά σας εἴπω. 215 ἀνάπαυσέ τους ὀλιγὸν καὶ
πάντα Νά τους ἔχης. 232 1. ἐπαίδευσέ σας διὰ δαρμῶν κ᾿ ἐγώ να σας παιδεύσω
Μετὰ σκορπίων . . . καὶ Να σας εξαλείψω. 203 καὶ ἂν ποιήσῃς τίποτε καὶ ἄν μας
παρηγορήσῃς, Δούλοι σου πάντες νὰ εἴμεθα καί νά σ' ευχαριστοΥΜΕΝ. 5ο 110, 123,
137, 168, 174, 191, 247. MGlycas 218 ἀφ' οὗ χλωριάνῃς καὶ ψυχῇς πότε νὰ φέρμε
ὄψιν; Αφ' οὗ κλιθῇς καὶ μαρανθῇς πότε νὰ ἐξαναθάλης; ᾿Αφ' οὗ γηράσῃς καὶ
σαπῇς πότε ΝΑ ΓΕΝΗΣ νέος ; 'Αφ᾿ οὗ ἀποθάνῃς καὶ σαπῇς πότε νὰ ἐξΑΝΑΖΗΣΗΣ;
Prodr. 62 τὰ λουτρικὰ τὰ μὲ ἔποικες καὶ τὸ κραββατοστρῶσιν Εἰς κλῆρον να τα
δέξωνται οἱ παῖδες σου πατρῷον. 2, 107 μὴ προσδοκᾷς δὲ πάλιν Ὅτι ἄν με
δώσῃς τίποτε να το κακοδικήσω. Ὅμως ἐκ τῆς ἐξόδου μου καὶ σὺ νὰ καταλάβο
5, 45 καὶ ἄκουσον τὴν βιωτὴν τζαγγάρου καὶ Να Μάθης Τὴν βρῶσιν καὶ
ἀνάπαυσιν τὴν ἔχει καθ' ἑκάστην. 6, 75 ἂν γὰρ πεισθῇς ταῖς συμβουλαῖς καὶ τοῖς
διδάγμασί μου, Σὺ μὲν λοιπὸν νὰ ΤΙΜΗΘῇς, μεγάλως (δ) εὐτυχήσῃς, ἐμὲ δὲ τὸν
πατέρα σου . . .
Να θρέψης ὡς ἀδύνατον καὶ νὰ ΓεροκομHCHC. 6, 122 καὶ δός με
Νὰ προσεύσωμαι καὶ τότε νὰ πετζώνω. Bolth. 968 f. ἐπεὶ ὡς οἰκειὰν τῆς θυγατρὸς
αὐτὸς τῆς ἰδικῆς μου Ενέπλεξε καὶ ἠγάπησεν, νά τής τον δώρω ἀπάρτι, Νὰ πίσω
τώρ᾽ ἀνδρόγυνον καὶ Να τους εὐλογήσω, Καὶ Να τον δώσω και ΝΑ Ζῇ ὡς ἀγαπᾷ καὶ
θέλει. (Op. IStaph p. 25, τι ὀμύσατε ὅτι οὔτε δῶρα νὰ ἐπάρετε οὔτε κρυφὰ νά το
λέγετε, καὶ ἐγὼ Να σας ἑρμηνεύω. . . καὶ ὤμοσαν ὅτι οὔτε δῶρα νὰ ἐπάρωμεν
οὔτε κρυφὰ νά το λέγωμεν. Sophianos 85 τάσσω σας ὅτι εὐκολώτατα να φθά
σετε, So too 86.)
etc.
nå
12. So too now τώρα να σε ἰδῶ I'll see you now'; ἐγὼ Νά σου δείξω 'Ι'Ι
show you'; aurds ná μe mách ; ' shall ho catch me?'
13. Observe that the particlo vd introducing tho imperfect or aorist indicative
forms the potential apodosis of a subjective conditional clause, expressed or
unde stood (1773 L. 1907. 1974). It thus stands for the A modul av : 'might,'
'should,' 'would'.
Prodr. 4, 211 καὶ τότε νά εἶδες, δέσποτα, πηδήματα νεωτέρου. 6, 376
ἐβγάνω τ᾽ ὁλοκόκκινον, νὰ 'πες βαφεἂν ὁμοιάζω (= εἶπες ἄν ' you would say ".
Bolth. 238 Να είπες οὐρανόδρομεν ἀστέρα ἔχει ἔσω. 250 f. ἐκ δὲ τὸ στόμα τῶν
αὐτῶν ἂν ἔβλεψες νὰ εἶδες Πῶς συριγμὸς ἐξήρχετο φρικώδης ἀγριώδης, Να είπες
ὅτι κίνησιν ἔχουσιν ὥσπερ ζῶντα. 352 τὰ δὲ ἐπὶ τὰ ἄνωθεν εἰς χειρας τῶν ἐρώτων
Νὰ εἶπες χαχατουρίζουσι, συχνοπυκνογελοῦσιν.
557
14-17.] APP. IV. -FUTURE INDICATIVE SINCE A TIMES.
14. D. The preceding combination (và + subj.) was strengthened
once more by the superaddition to it of é, an abbreviated form of
Oλa (not law which is never shortened 863). This new particle
made its appearance during the XIIIth and has ever since remained
in popular use. However, the combination bè và soon coalesced to deví,
and this again was gradually (since the XVIth) contracted to simple
ú, the ultimate and now universal prefix to the future tense ¹. See
1922 & infra 18.
Asin. 178 poprouva Đẻ và moich (but 0è và = 0xe và 21, 269, etc.). So Picat. 50
θε νά στρέψω θέλω. Chron. Mor. Prol 825 ὁποῦ θά τους πιστεύσῃ. Abraham
TOUS
989 θὰ ἰδῇς.
15. The full form of @éλe with yd for levd or ed is still heard
among old-
fashioned people. It is used always adverbially (cp. A´åpeλov = éï0€ 1905) and
εἴθε
commonly follows the inflected subjunctive, thus ná σe ¡àâ oéder 'I will
or shall see you, Νά με ἰδῇ θέλει, να σε δούμε θέλει, να με ἰδῇτε θέλει, να με
ΔοΝε θέλει. In the second person singular νά με ἰδῇς θέλει, the con-
tiguity of the incompatible σ0 (177) is usually avoided by interchanging the
verbal forms : νά με ἰδῇ θέλεις. So further: νὰ νυστάξω θέλει, νὰ νυστάξῃ
và và
θέλεις, νὰ νυστάξῃ θέλει, νὰ νυστάξωμε θέλει, νὰ νυστάξετε θέλει, νὰ νυστάξουνε
θέλει νὰ χαρῶ θέλει, νὰ χαρῇ θέλεις, νὰ χαρῇ θέλει, νὰ χαροῦμε θέλει, νὰ χαρῆτε
θέλει, νὰ χαροῦνε θέλει [1]
16. This modern combination of féλei + và or eè + vá, used as it always is
in an adverbial sonse, could not appeal to the Hellenizing taste of the
scribes and thus led them to attempt at restoring the full verb in its
personal function and infinitival construction. As however the infinitive
by this time had become extinct from the popular language (App. vi.
13-18. 25-27), another expedient was resorted to: the third person singular
of the subjunctive usually closed with the then commonest movable -
(App. i 19 ff). In this form (-pin), now very familiar with the
massos, a relic of the ancient infinitive was thought to have been dis-
covered, and thus an artificial makeshift obtained with the erroneous
spelling -ev (instead of -pv), evor since tenderly adhered to by scribes :
θέλω γράφειν, θέλω γράψειν, θέλω φάγειν later θέλω γράφει, θέλω γράψει, θέλω
φάγει instead of the correct form θέλω γράφη-ν, γράψη-ν, φάγην, where -
is movable (infra 17. See also App. vi. 18 f.).
>
17. A similar process is traceable in the ostensibly infinitival construc-
tion of ἔχω, viz. ἔχω γράψει (φάγει, φθάσει), I have writton (enten, arrived),
ἔχω λυπηθῆ ‘I have been grieved, ἔχω σηκωθῆ ‘I have got up. This is
a modern coinage due to the misconception or misapplication of the
Latinism formerly favourite with scribes (supra 6): čxw ɣpápai, payei.
pláσai, otc. ‘I shall write, cat, arrivo,' etc. N penmon, familiar with
modern languages, wanted to have an exact equivalent of the Romanic
[Compare SPortius p. 33 f. (ed. WWagner): 'Fut. Sing. Oéλw payei,
θέλεις γράψει, θέλει γράψει, scribam. Plur. θέλομεν γράψει, θέλετε γράψει,
θέλουσι γράψει vol aliàs magis "corrupte": Sing. 0è yрayo, of
θὲ γράψω, θέ
γράψεις, θὲ γράψει, scribam. Plur. θὲ γράψομεν, θὲ γράψετε, θὲ γράψουσι.” And
p. 50: Appendix de particula Oè vel Oér: Quamvis "frequentior" sit apud
hodiernos Graecos usus futuri secundo modo explicati, et particula Oè vol Oè\
aut Oèv per syncopen ita dicitur, sicut ot 0€[?] pro 40‹λa volebam, quia tamen
non raro roporios futurum "primo" modo traditum, quod affinitatem quandam
cum Graeco literali futuro prae se ferre videtur, idcirco pauca de dictarum par-
ticularum usu conseo disserendum,'
Est igitur particula Oé, sicut et verbum Oéλo, quando absolute ponitur,
nulláque particula superaddita, specialis nota futuri. Dixi, absolute, nam si
cum particula vd conjugatur ut éλo và ypaw, non donotat futurum, sed
definitam quandam animi constitutionem ad scribendum.' (Cp. infra 18.)
558
APP. IV.—FUTURE INDICATIVE SINCE A TIMES. [17-19.
perfect, but being averse to the already existing periphrasis exw ypaµµévo
or -να (φαγωμένου οι -να, εἶμαι φθασμένος, λυπημένος, σηκωμένος, κουρασμένος),
because it lacked the reduplication of the participle and so rendered it unfit
for stylish composition, they resorted to the circumlocution: exa ypápai,
payeiv, eineîv, etc. 'I shall write, eat, say,' etc., no longer felt as a future.
However, as it was impossible to revive the long extinct infinitive, they
had recourse to something which approached and suggested it, or
rather was mistaken for it: the third person of the (future) subjunctive
which ended in -i and very frequently in -in owing to the almost regular
presence of the parasitic or euphonic -v (App. ii. 19 ff.). This form then,
sounding as it did like the former normal infinitive (-e), gave rise to the
now current spelling ἔχω γράψει, ἔχω φάγει, ἔχω σηκωθῆ (as if from σηκωθῆναι ! »,
ἔχω κοιμηθῆ (as if from κοιμηθῆναι !) etc. It is evident however that snel
spelling has no historical foundation and ought to be given up for the correct
form ἔχω γράψη φάγῃ, σηκωθῇ, κοιμηθῇ, etc. Nor should it be forgotten
that this novel mode of forming a periphrastic perfect, being as it is
the fabric of scribes, savours of a certain pedantry and has not yet
established itself fully in popular speech. (Cp. App. vi.18 f.)
-
18. The preceding remarks make it now clear that the ancient future
has not been displaced by féλw with its successive complements: infinitive
-iva-vá, as commonly believed by philologists who are misled to such
a retrospective inference by the very recent phenomenon of è + vá = 0.
This is also confirmed by the following considerations respecting P and
post-christian Greek: (1) The future indicative, when it began to retreat,
was replaced mainly by the primary subjunctive either simple or (later)
preceded by iva, but never by means of, or in company with, 0éλw. (21
its expression by means of the subjunctive with simple (iva) vá—without
déλw—is still obtaining (though limited and obsolescent supra 8 & 10) in
N speech. (3) The verb 0λw, whenever occurring, ever since A times,
retains its proper volitive forco I wish or desire, hardly ever weakening to
the auxiliary function of I will or shall. (4) féλw, when accompanied by ira
or vá, is never equivalent to the future. (5) Were éλw in former times
used as a purely auxiliary vorb, it would have of necessity attained an
unusual frequency, whereas this is not borne out by the P-B compositions.
(6) éλw would figuro as an already long established and normal auxiliary
verb in the M popular compositions, where the regular future tense is
entirely absent (podantries are not taken into account), and where we
meet instead the subjunctive either simple or strengthened by the pre-
positive particle vá, in conformity with the traditional practice.
Lastly θέλω in the abbreviated and corrupted form θέλει] νά-θὰ makes
its appearance as an auxiliary expedient not earlier than the XIII
(supra 14). In these circumstances the particle vá, contained in (0è + và)
@á, is not a complementary adjunct to @éλw, but the reverse: 0éλ@ or
rather éλe is a strengthening prefix resorted to only in recent times.
(7)
19. The various stages through which the futuro indicative has sue-
cossively gone since classical antiquity may be illustrated by the following
example: (I shall suffer): I A-N пelooμai. II P-B ná◊w; G B náðw äv; ira
πάθω; ἔχω μέλλω ote. παθεῖν. III Τ-Ν νὰ πάθω, θέλω παθεῖν. IV M-N θὲ +
νὰ πάθω, Ν θὰ πάθω.
559
APPENDIX V.
THE MOODS CHIEFLY SINCE A TIMES
1. Syntactically considered, the four or rather three Greek moods
(676-9), may be brought under two groups: the indicative on the
one side, and the subjunctive and imperative on the other side. The
cardinal difference between the two groups lies in the broad fact
that the indicative may refer to all three divisions of time: past,
present, and future, whereas the two (three) other moods refer
decidedly to the future (cp. ἄγωμεν, μὴ ἄγωμεν; ἄγετε, μὴ ἄγετε;
γένοιτο, μὴ γένοιτο ; also combined φέρε ἀκούσωμεν, etc.). Hence we may
call the indicative the assertire mood, and the subjunctive and
imperative the prospective moods. As a matter of course the indicative
of the future is also and above all a prospective mood. For primitive
Greek ep. BDelbrück Synt.; then WDWhitney §§ 573 f., and
WGoodwin pp. 371-389.
[Cp. Acta Tho. 59, 3 εἰ ἀληθῶς καὶ βεβαίως ἀνέτειλεν ὁ κύριος εἰς τὴν ταύτης
ψυχὴν καὶ προσεδέξατο τὸν καταβληθέντα σπόρων, οὔτε τῆς προσκαίρου ζωῆς
φροντίδα ποιήσεIEN οὔτε τὸν θάνατον φοβηθήσεται οὔτε Χαρίσιός τι ταύτην κατα-
βλάψαι δυνήσετΑΙ.
2. Thus distinguished, the prospective moods have then one
fundamental idea common: a desire expressed. But the expression of
desire may be conceived in a threefold form, as an exhortation,
a prayer, or a command, the three notions being nothing but
different shades of desire. (Cp. WGoodwin p. 384) ἄγωμεν, μὴ ἄγωμεν,
γένοιτο, μὴ γένοιτο, ἄγετε, μὴ ἄγετε, ἀκούσωμεν, μὴ ἀκούσητε, φέρε εἴπω.
μὴ εἴπῃς. εἰπέ, εἰπάτω. εἴποι, μὴ εἴπῃ. Cp. Ar. Nub. 1352 πάντως δὲ
τοῦτο δράσεις [= δράσου]. Men. Mon. 397 ξίνον ἀδικήσεις μηδέποτε
καιρὸν λαβών.
Pl. Euthyd. 296 D σὺ αὐτὸς ἐπιστήσει καὶ ἅπαντα ἂν ἐγὼ Βούλωμαι. ᾿Αλλὰ
Βουληθείης. Symp. 212 Ε μεθύοντα άνδρα δέξεσθε συμπύτην ἢ ἐπίωμεν ;
Euthyph. I Β οὐκ ἔχω ὅπως σοι εἴπω ἃ νοῶ. Dem. 8, 32 οὐκ ἔχετε, οἶμαι, ὅ,τι
ποιήσετε. Eur. Ion 758 εἴπωμεν ἢ CΙΓῶμεν ἢ τί ΔράCOMEN ;-Isocr. 4, 44
τοιοῦτον ἔθος παρέδοσαν ὥστε ἑκατέρους ἔχειν ἐφ' οἷς φιλοτιμηθώσιν. Pl. Symp.
194 D οὐδὲν ἔτι διοίσει αὐτῷ ἐὰν μόνον ἔχῃ ὅτῳ Διαλέγεται. Xen. Oec. 7, 30
τοῖς μέλλουσιν ἔξειν ὅ, τι εἰσφέρωσιν. Pl. Ion 536 Β ἀπορεῖς ὅ, τι λέγης beside
εὐπορεῖς ὅ, τι λέγης.
3. We are wont to express these varieties of desire by means of
verbal forms and draw a sharp distinction among such 'moods' from
one another by grammnatical technicalities. Thus we speak of an
imperative because it expresses command (εἰπέ, ἐλθέτω); but the very
same command, when expressed negatively, is styled prohibition, and
560
APP. V.-MOODS SINCE A TIMES.
[3-7.
generally allotted to another mood called subjunctive (µǹ eiñŋs, µn ëλOŋ).
Again we draw a distinction between Ζεῦ θεωρὸς τῶνδε πραγμάτων ΓΕΝΟΥ͂
(Aesch. Cho. 246) and ☎ #aî séno10 matpòs evtuxéσrepos (Soph. Ai. 550),
and assign the former example to a mood styled imperative, and the
latter to another mood called optative, although the real meaning
and force of the two instances adduced actually call for the reverse
name.
4. These conventionalities were fixed by grammarians and Atticists
at a time when the ancestral vocabulary and diction were thought to
be the only legitimate stock and standard to be considered (25 f.).
But the masses felt that cognate or associated notions, whether
affirmative or negative, should be expressed by associated or similar
forms. And as this association was not always distinguishable from
identity, it naturally led first to interchange, then to uniformity of
expression. In other words, for each class of cognate or associated
ideas popular instinct adopted by preference one form of expression
generally the simplest, the most familiar, or most forcible-and it
was this form which sooner or later succeeded in supplanting all its
previous associates from the living language. (Cp. 1487.)
5. In conformity with this principle, which applies to all sections
of grammar, the leading features of the 'prospective' moods- wish,
exhortation, command--being as they were mere varieties or shades
of one fundamental idea (desire), could not fail to be, even in classical
times, often mistaken for one another and thus pave the way for
equalization. Such a levelling, however, was not the work of associa-
tion only; it was due also, in a great degree, to the collateral agency
of terminal homophony (779): w=", et = n = y=ol, as: ypá√ei=ypa↓?} ==
οι, γράψει γραψ
γράψοι; ἄγομεν= άγωμεν; ποιείτε= ποιῆτε = ποιοῖτε (cp. κοιμήθητε and
κοιμηθῆτε).
6. The first to be affected by these agencies was the secondary
subjunctive optative], and that as early as classical antiquity. For its
shifting and interchange with the primary subjunctive or the indi-
cative, when dependent on a secondary tense (1932), is nothing but
an early manifestation of the influence of association and homophony.
H
[Cp. Pl. Crit. 43 B Étítndés σe ovi нseipon îna ús diota diárнc. Th. 3, 4
Еп Paccon όπως τις βοήθεια Ηξει. 1, 57 ἔπPACCEN ὅπως πόλεμος ΓΕΝΗΤΑΙ. 50
empaccen
too Xon. Λn. 2, 1, 3 οὗτοι ἔλεγον ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθΝΗΚΕΝ, ᾿Αριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς
EiH.]
7. But the early retreat of the secondary subjunctive from common
speech is due not to the influence of association and homophony
only. Compared with the other moods, it laboured under the disad-
vantage that it expressed a modality, that is an indeterminate and
subtle thought. It was morcover used mainly in dependent sentences,
that is in a periodic structure which involved reflection and mental
strain, and so rendered it unsuitable for the plain and direct speech of
the masses. These disadvantages become more perceptible when we
descend from the period of A literature to P compositions. Here the
secondary subjunctive appears signally retreating before the primary
subjunctive or the indicative. In particular the so-called consecutio
modorum (or temporum) applies no longer; instead of the secondary
subjunctive, after an historical tense (1934), we now find in prospec-
561
0 0
7-9.]
APP. V.—MOODS SINCE A TIMES.
tive clauses only the primary subjunctive, whereas in all declarative
and causal clauses the indicative alone is employed (1942). In fact,
all dependent clauses formerly expressed by the secondary subjunctive
henceforward stand, when referring to the past or unconditional
present, invariably in the indicative, and when referring to the
future, invariably in the primary subjunctive or future indicative
(supra 6 & 1934).
8. Thus in his first five books, Polybios omploys in dependent sentences,
that is in-
a. Declarative clauses (after ὅτι διότι, ὡς), the indicative only.
b. Causal clauses (after ὅτι, διότι, ὡς, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή), regularly the indicative,
rarely the secondary subjunctive.
c. Temporal clauses (after ἐπεί, οπότε οι ὅτε, ἕως, πρίν, etc.), regularly the
indicative, rarely the secondary subjunctive.
d. Final clauses (after ἵνα, ὅπως), invariably the primary subjunctive [the
secondary subjunctive only in 3, 43, 37. This is, however, the only con-
struction found even in Aristotle and Theophrast. (WMüller, Theophr.
52.)
8. As to Biblical Greek, there is not one authenticated instance of the
use of the secondary subjunctive in dependent clauses. (However cp.
2039 f.)
8º. The four cases commonly adduced as dependent secondary subjunctives
(Mark 14, 1ο ἀπῆλθεν ἵνα παραδοῖ; ib. 11 ἐζήτει πως εὐκαίρως αὐτὸν παραδοῖ; 9, 30
οὐκ ἤθελεν ἵνα τις αὐτὸν γνοῖ; and Acts 25, 16 πρὶν ἢ ἔχοι) aro obviously scho-
lastic transcriptions of παραδῇ and γνῇ (οι =η), which latter are due to tho
analogy of other cognate forms. The same holds true of other G-B instances,
as: Mitth. xix. 252 [IIIrd A.D., Athens] 59 60 ẻàv (oûтos) прŵтоv doî râ iepeî rò
Ισηλύσιον. ib. 254, 101-5 μέχρις ἂν ἀπολοῖ, ἐάν τις μὴ διδοῖ, μέχρις ἂν ἀπολοί.
Mart. Pauli 112, το μέχρις ἂν ΔΙΑΓΝΟΙ. (Cp. Bull. Corr. Hell. 1894 p. 145
[Pap. 24Ο Β.C.], 4 μισθῇ for μισθῷ; CLeemans 15 [III-IV+1, 3 ἵν᾿ ἀπολοῖς.
CWessely, Zaub. L [IVth A.D.] 17 ANTAпOAḤC). In other words—
Just as ἔστην
""
>>
ἔφην
So algo ἔγνων
στω στης
φω
φῇς
γνώ
γνῇς
στῇἔβην βῶ
ψῇ- (ἔθην)
γνῇ-(ἔδων)
Bus
βῇ
θῇς θῇ:
δω δῇς δῇ.
9. On this principle, for the protasis of conditional and temporal
sentences denoting a repeated or habitual occurrence in the past
(1975), which d expressed through the past subjunctive (especially
in the case of the aorist), P N speech resorts to the past (imperfect
or aorist) indicative, as:
Sept. Num. 21, 9 ΟΤΑΝ ΕΔΑΚΝΕΝ ὄφις ἄνθρωπον καὶ ἐπέβλεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν ὄφιν
τὸν χαλκοῦν καὶ ἔζη. Εx. 40, 37 εἰ δὲ μὴ ἀνέβη ἡ νεφέλη οὐκ ἀνεζεύγνυσαν.
Tobit I, 18 εἴ τινα ἀπέκτεΝΝΕ . ἔθαψα αὐτοὺς κλέπτων. 7, 11 οπότε
ἐὰν εἰσεπορεύοντο πρὸς αὐτήν, ἀπέθνησκον ὑπὸ τὴν νύκτα. NT Mark 3, 11
ὅταν αὐτὸν ἐθεώρει, προσέπιπτεν αὐτῷ. Callin. 63, 1 εἴ τις ἦν πυρέξας τῇ χειρὶ
ἀσυμφανῶς τὸν τίμιον σταυρὸν ἐποίει. Apophth. 113 ο ὅτε ἔβλεπε πραγμα
καὶ ἤθελεν ὁ λογισμὸς αὐτοῦ κρῖναι ἔλεγεν αὐτῷ. JMoschos 2869 Β εἴποτε
ἔβλεπέν τινα μὴ εὐποροῦντα σπεῖραι τὸ χωρίον τὸ ἴδιον, ἀπήρχετο ἐν νυκτὶ καὶ
ἐλάμβανεν τὰ ἴδια βοΐδια καὶ σπόρον ἴδιον καὶ ἔσπειρεν τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου χωρίον .
εἴποτε εἶΔεν τινὰ ἀτονήσαντα, ἐβάσταζεν τὸ γομάριν αὐτοῦ. ἄλλοτε ἐκάθητο τὰ
ὑποδήματα, εἰ εκόπη, ἀνδρὸς ἢ γυναικὸς ποιῶν. More examples in 1975.
562
APP. V.-MOODS SINCE A TIMES.
[10-12.
10. The only case where the secondary subjunctive lingered as late
as T, is that of indirect questions and parenthetical clauses introduced
by el 'whether perchance,' in which it depends on some verb of in-
terrogation expressed or implied (2039). In NT Greek the following
list is nearly complete.
Luke 1, 29 διελογίζετο ποταπὺς εἴη ὁ ἀσπασμός. 3, 15 διαλογιζομένων Μήποτε
αὐτὸς εἴΗ ὁ Χριστός. So 1, 62. 6, 16. 8, 9 ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν τίς εἴΗ ἡ παραβολή.
9, 46. 15, 26 ἐπυνθάνετο τί εἴη ταῦτα. So 18, 36. 22, 23 (ep. 2 Macc. 3, 37).
[Acts 2, 12 άλλος πρὸς ἄλλον λέγοντες τί θέλοι τοῦτο εἶναι, better λέγοντες
τι θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι ;] Acts 5, 24 ; 8, 20 ; 10, 17; 17, 11; 25, 20 ἀπορούμενος δὲ
ἐγὼ ἔλεγον, εἰ βούλοιτο, πορεύεσθαι εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα [not εἰ βούλοιτο πορεύεσ
θαι]; 21, 23, 24, 19-Solitary and dubious is the case: Acts 25, 16 οὐκ
ἔστιν ἔθος Ῥωμαίοις χαρίζεσθαί τινα ἄνθρωπον πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος κατὰ
πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους, τόπον τε ἀπολογίας λάβοι περὶ τοῦ ἐγκλήματος
[for ἔχῃ . . . λάβῃ, since or is homophonous with ?).
οι
1 Cor. 14, 10
& 15, 37 εἰ τύχοι. Acts 24, 19 εἰ ἔχοιεν 27, 39 εἰ ΔΥΝΑΙΝΤΟ. 20, 16 εί
ëxoien
δυνατὸν εἴΗ (Taf. ἦν). I Pet. 3, 17 εἰ θέλοι τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ.
3, 14. Acts
27, 12 εἴ πως ΔΥΝΑΙΝΤΟ παραχειμάσαι. 17, 27. John 13, 24 πυθέσθαι τίς ἂν
εἴΗ (v. 1. τίς ἐστιν) περὶ οὗ λέγει.
Gr. Urk. Berlin 243, 13 εἰ δὲ ΦΑΝΕΙΗ. Callin. 60, 1 εἰ δὲ καὶ βούλοιτο.
dè paneih.
10. This retreat of the secondary subjunctive, coinciding as it does
with the first appearance of professional grammarians, now explains why it
received from then the inappropriate name of optative (εὐκτική). Were it
still, at that time, current in its formerly preponderating, i. o. dependent
functions as a. living mood, it would doubtless have been termed rather
subjunctive (ὑποτακτική) than optative. But because it was lingering mainly
or only as a wishing mood, it received the specific name of optative (677.
1924).
11. The retreat of the past subjunctive from dependent clauses
was followed by its disappearance from principal clauses also. Here
the first signal was apparently given by the sacrifice of its potential
function (secondary subj. with av) in favour of the primary sub-
junctive.
મ
Sext. Adv. Gr. 4 p. 237 οὐκ ὀλίγην δὲ ἂν ἔχΗ μοῖραν εἰς προτροπὴν καὶ ὅταν
βλέπωμεν κτλ. Cyrill H. Procat. 12 ὅταν τῇ πείρᾳ λάβῃς τὸ ὕψωμα τῶν
διδασκομένων, τότε ἂν Γνώση. Proc. ii. 135, 19 οὕτω γὰρ ἂν ποιήcHcθε. 171,
19 ΗΝ τι καὶ περὶ Καμπανίας ὑμῖν ἢ Νεαπόλεως εἴπΟΙΜΕΝ, οὐκ ἂν ΔέξΗεθε; 168,
ΙΙ οὐδεὶς ἄν, οἶμαι, τοῦτο γε οὐκ ὄντως ἀνύητος ὢν ἀντείπη. 263, 12 τῆς
παρούσης αὐτὸν πρεσβείας οὐδὲν ἂν γένεται μιαρώτερον.
12. It appears then that before the close of G, the secondary sub-
junctive had lost, one after another, its various A functions and still
lingered only as a mood of wish (infra 15). Now as wish or solicita-
tion is very closely associated with exhortation (primary subjunctive),
commund (imperative or future indicative, 1890) (supra 2 f.), this fune-
tion could not fail to cause occasional confusion among cognate
representatives, and that even in 4. Thus we find there-
a. In (mild) commands the secondary subjunctive instead of the impera-
tivo, usually with ἄν (WGoodwin, Moods 234): Pl. Euthyd. 296 D σὺ αὐτὸν
ἅπαντα ἐπιστήσει ἂν ἐγὼ βούλωμαι. ᾿Αλλὰ Βουληθείης. Soph. Ph. 674
χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω. Xon. Mem. 2, 3, 11 ΟΥ̓κ ἂν φθάνοις λέγων.—So too oeca-
sionally in P Atticistic imitations.
II
b. In prohibitions the imperative for the primary subjunctivo, as: Pl.
}
563
0 0 2
12-15.]
APP. V.—MOODS SINCE A TIMES.
Apol. 17 ο Μηδεὶς ὑμῶν προσδοκησάτω ἄλλως. (For more examples see
WGoodwin, Moods 259 f.)
c. In commands and prohibitions the future indicative for the impera-
tive (WGoodwin, 69 f.) :-Ar. Nub. 1352 πάντως δὲ τοῦτο δράσεις. Men.
Mon. 397 ξένον ἀδικήσεις μηδέποτε καιρὸν λαβών. Eur. Med. 8ο4 λέξεις δὲ
ΜΗΔΕΝ τῶν ἐμοὶ δεδογμένων. Soph. Ant. 84 ἀλλ᾽ οὖν προHNYCEIC γε τοῦτο
ΜΗΔΕΝΙ. So too in P-B, as : Sept. Gen. 17, 9 σὺ δὲ τὴν διαθήκην μου διατηρήσεις.
Εx. 20, 3 ογκ ἔσονταί σοι θεοὶ ἕτεροι πλὴν ἐμοῦ. ib. 13 οὐ ΦΟΝΕΥΣΕΙΣ, ΟΥ̓
μοιχεύσεις, οι κλέψεις, οὐ ψευδομαρτυρήσεις. Jos. Ant. 11, 6, 5 εἴ τινα
θέλεις τοῖς ὑπηκόοις εὐεργεσίαν καταθέσθαι, κελεύσεις πρόρριζον ἀπολέσθαι. 12,
2, 4 ἐὰν οὖν σοι δοκῇ, βασιλεῦ, γράψεις τῷ τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἀρχιερεῖ ὅπως ἀποστείλῃ
κτλ. Phryn. passim.
d. This usage, suggested as it was by the familiar ten commandments,
became still more frequent in post-christian compositions, particularly
Biblical imitations.
13. But it was in P that the confusion and interchange among
cognate moods came to full manifestation. In particular, it was
towards the 1st B.C. that it became so general that all four pro-
spective moods could be almost indiscriminately used for one
another, even in stylish composition. The presence then of many
equivalents led to a struggle, with the inevitable result that the
strongest soon prevailed (1487). This was the primary subjunctive,
because it was the most regular and most familiar of all other pro-
spective moods. It was the most regular, because of its homophony
with the indicative (since o=w, eɩ=n="); in contracted verbs in -áw it
was even identical). And it was the most familiar because it occurred
very frequently (in exhortations, after indefinite relatives, after eάν,
ὅταν, ἵνα, ἕως, etc.). Consequently the primary present or future)
subjunctive came to be used :—
ειπ
14. A. For the potential secondary subjunctive with av, as:
Polyb. 1, 6, 6 οὔτ᾽ ἂν ὑβρίζειν ΥΠΟΜΕΙΝΑΤΕ τοὺς ἐλευθέρους. 18, 18, 2
θαρρήσω ἂν ἀποφήνασθαι. Dion. H. ii. 1175, 13 οὐ γὰρ ἂν οὗτος ὀλιγαρχίας
ὄνομα θῆται τῇ τῶν κρατίστων ἡγεμονία. ν. 615, 13 οὐδὲν ἂν ὑπολάβω λέγεσθαι
κατὰ τέχνην. Philo i. 69, 32 μὴ γὰρ ὄντων ὀνομάτων οὐδ᾽ ἂν διάλεκτος .
Diosc. 2, 91 (p. 215) τὸ δὲ ὀρνίθειον καὶ χήνειον στέαρ οὕτως ἂν εγωλιασθή.
Plut. ii. 556 Β σκοπῶν ἂν εἴPHC. 777 Β οὐκ ἄν σοι προσδιαλέξωμαι. [Demetr.]
13, 14 μόλις ἂν ΑΝΑΓΝῷ τις ἐν τοῖς ἀσώτοις. Clement. 45 Β τίς γὰρ ἂν ἁμαρτήση.
Gal. ii. 8 Β ΕΠΑΙΝΕΣΗ Δ᾽ ἄν τις καὶ τὸν ᾿Αθηναίων νομοθέτην. vi. 375 ο οὐκ
ἄν ποτε φάγωμεν τῶν ἐκείνοις ἐδωδίμων. Sext. 620, 28 οὐκ ὀλίγην δὲ ἂν ἔχε
μοίραν εἰς προτροπήν. Acta Xanth. 62, 32 ἴσως ΓΕΝΗ μοι πρόφασις.
[14. Hence, in instancos like the following (EASoph. Lox. p. 132 f.), the
'futuro optative' is due to the misspolling of o for its homophonous 7:
Philo i. 469, 36 τιθασσὸν γὰρ καὶ χειρόηθες εἰ γένοιτο ἥκιστα ἂν βλάψοι. Tatian.
22 τίς οὐκ ἂν χλευάσοι; Ζως. 11, 15 οὐκ ἂν ἀρκέσοι. Thood. iv. 368 D τούτους
εἰκότως ἄν τις ἐφευρετὰς ὀνομάσοι. Codin. 88, 9 ὅσον ἂν προστάξει ὁ βασιλεύς,
and clsowhore; also Core. Quin. [692 A.D.] Can. 65 ὅστις οὖν τοιοῦτον τι
πράξοι, εἰ μὲν κληρικὸς εἴη καθαιρείσθω κτλ.—and all similar casos. Cp. infra
154.]
15. B. For the secondary subjunctive in wishes, thus dislodging it
from its last entrenchment (1920), us:
Sept. Rath r, ο δε (οι δώῃ, subj.) κύριος ὑμῖν καὶ εὕρητε ανάπαυσιν. Dion.
H. iii. 1445, 4 CΥΝΕΝΕΓΚΗ (-κοι ?) μὲν ταῦτα ὑμῖν καὶ γενοίμην ἐγὼ κακὸς εἰκαστὴς
564
APP. V.-MOODS SINCE A TIMES.
[15-16.
•
τῶν ἐσομένων. Jos. B. J. 4, 3, 1ο ἀπίμ δὲ ἡ πεῖρα τοῦ λόγου ‘may it never
come to pass. Ignat. ad Polye. 8 ἐρρῶσθαι ὑμᾶς διὰ παντὸς ἐν θεῷ ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ
Χριστῷ εὔχομαι ἐν ᾧ ΔΙΑΜΕΙΝΗτε ἐν ἑνότητι θεοῦ. Orig. ii. 1o16 Α. Athan. i.
740 A ἀλλ᾽ εἴθε κἂν ἀκοÝCHC ἵνα καὶ σὺ πεισθῇς. Εpiph. i. 428 A ΓΕΝΗΤΑΙ
δύναμις ἐν τούτῳ τῷ ὕδατι. CIG 8649, 6 ὁ θεὸς αὐτὸν διαφυλάξη. Apophth.
397 A cγχωρή H ὑμῖν ὁ θεός. Const. (+536) 1148 D ἀνασκαφὴ τὰ ὀστᾶ τῶν
Μανιχαίων. 1209. Ε ἀναπαγθῇ τὰ ὀστέα τοῦ πατρός σου. Mal. 146, 17 eica-
KoÝCH κύριος ὁ θεός σου τοὺς λόγους Ῥαψάκου. JMoschos 3105 Β ΜΗ ΠΟΙΗΣΗ
ὁ θεός.
[15. So too in the following instances, among many others, where the
endings -ol and -er are misspellings for their homophonous -H (ep. 2040
and supra 14 ) : CIG 5760 γραῦ μεθύστρια, ζήσοις (Ν νὰ ζήσῃς). Eus. ii. 891 A
ὑγιαίνοντά σε ὁ θεὸς διαφυλάξοι. Protov. Jac. 9, 3 κύριός σε διαφυλάξει. Cyrill.
H. Procat. 17 φυτεύσοι δὲ ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν καὶ στρατεύσοι ὑμᾶς ἑαυτῷ.
Theophyl. 327, 9 ὁ θεός, αὐτοκράτωρ, δ καλέσας σε βασιλεύειν, ὑποτάξοι σοι πάντα
τὰ πολεμοῦντα τῇ βασιλείᾳ. Nic. ii. 744 Β ὁ θεὸς φυλάξοι τοὺς εὐλαβεῖς βασιλεῖς
ἡμῶν. Apophth. 124 Α ὁ θεὸς συγχωρήσει ὑμῖν. Nic. ii. 700 Β φυλάξει ὁ θεὸς
τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτῶν ! μακρυνει (write μακρύνῃ) ὁ θεὸς τοὺς χρόνους αὐτῶν !
ἐπὶ πλεῖστον ὁ θεὸς χαροποιήσει αὐτούς. CGL 648 ἐν νῷ ἔχοις, alongside with
ἀμέριμνος ᾖς. 649, 6 ὅταν ἔλθῃ εἴποις αὐτῆς. Τheoph. 182, 11 εἴ τις ποτέ
ἐστιν, τὸν μόρον ποιήσει τοῦ Ἰούδα !' ὁ θεὸς ἀνταποδώσει. αὐτῷ ἀδικοῦντι με διὰ
τάχους. Porph. Cer. 217 ὁ θεὸς πλεονάσει, καταπέμψει, χορηγήσει, πολυχρόνιον
ποιήσει, and elsewhere. (805 [1]; ep. EASoph. Lex. p. 47.)]
I
15. Compare N : νὰ ζήσῃς !' ὁ θεὸς νὰ φυλάξῃ ! ὁ θεὸς νὰ δώσῃ ! νὰ χαρῇς τὴ
ζωή σου ! νά σε χαρῶ ! νὰ σκάσης ! ( = Α διαρραγείης). νὰ χαθῇς ! ( = Α ἀπόλοιο).
(See also below 19.)
16. C. For the imperative 3rd person which is fast retreating before
the primary subjunctive; also for the 2nd person present chiefly in
prohibitions, then in assertions also. This usage was presumably
furthered by Latin influence (1919. 1928. cp. EASoph. Lex. p. 46):
•
a. Hippol. 804 A ἔκβλητος ΓΕΝΗΤΑΙ κλήρου ἁγίου. Eus. ii. 325 ο ἐπὶ τοῦτο
μόνον τραπώσιν. Athan. ii. 7or A οἱ προειρημένοι ἐχθροὶ καθαιρεθώσιν. 821 κ
ὁ μὴ εἰδὼς τὸν τῆς πίστεως λόγον Μάθη παρὰ ᾿Αθανασίου. Basil. iv. 401 Β
ἐπὶ τοὺς λαϊκοὺς ἀπορριφώει. 753 ο Εξετασθῶσι δὲ Πισίδαι. Alchom.
305, 13 ἔστω δὲ ὡς φυράσαντα, CΥΓΧΩΝΕΥθώσιν εἰς κάμινον. Pachon. 952 B
Μηδείς τὴν κεφαλὴν κείρεται. Epiph. i. 421 ο ἔξελθε τὸ [ἐξελθέΤΩ τὸ ?]
δαιμόνιον ἀπ' αὐτοῦ καὶ ὑγιὴς ΓΕΝΗΤΑΙ. ii. 712 Β δειξάτωσαν είπωσι.
Carth. 19 ἐάν τις τῶν ἐπισκόπων κατηγορῆται, παρὰ τοῖς τῆς αὑτοῦ χώρας
πρωτεύουσιν ὁ κατήγορος ΑΝΑΓΑΓΗ τὸ πρᾶγμα. 83 ὅσα γὰρ δι᾽ ἐνυπνίων καὶ
ματαίων ἀποκαλύψεων ἀνθρώπων τινῶν ὅπου δήποτε καθίστανται θυσιαστήρια,
παντὶ τρόπῳ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἀποδοκιμασθώσιν. Mart Petri 80, ο πεμφθῆ ἐπ᾿
αὐτὴν τὸ παρ' αὐτῆς. 82, 25 εγετῇ καὶ μὴ ἀποθάνη. Pallad. 1178. Ephes. 1000
Β τοῦτο ὑμῖν Μαρτυρηθῇ. Chal. 905 A ἔλθωσιν οἱ νοτάριοι καὶ εἴπωςιν.
Β οὗτος ζῶν Και, οὗτος εἰς δύο ΓΕΝΗΤΑΙ. 1080 Α ἐρωτηθῇ ἡ ἁγία σύνοδος.
Apophth. 112 Α΄ ὁ θέλων ἐλθεῖν ἔλθη. 130 € ἕκαστος ὅπου θέλει ἀπέλθη.
δ
9
101 2
357 B
b. Sopt. Tobit 3, 3 ΜΗ με ἐκλικής. Sard. (347) 11 ΜΗ Καταφρονῇ ἐκείνου καὶ
συνεχέστερον ὁμιλῇ. Cyrill. H. Procat. 2 Μή τις ρίζα πικρίας ἄνω φύουσα
ενοχλή. Nil. 552 Β ΜΗ ΔιάκΗσαι. Eus. Alex. 324 ο ΜΗ παραλείπε.
ΜΗ αμφιβάλλης τοῦτο. 440 ο ΜΗ προσδοκής. Cedr. i. 686 Μὴ ἐπιχαίρε
αἵμασι . . . Μὴ ὑπερήφανος με τοῖς ὁμοφύλοις, καὶ οὐχ ἁμάρτης CGL 648
αμέριμνος ᾖς, ἕτοιμος ᾖc (for ἔσω οι ἴσθι). [So too in instances like the
following: Sept. Sir. 11, 2 Μὴ αἰνέσεις. Hermas Vis. 4, 1, 4 ΜΗ διψυχήσεις.
mĤ
565
16-20.]
App. V.—MOODS SINCE A TIMES.
Apophth. 380 Α εἰς ὃν ἂν τόπον ἀπέλθῃς μὴ μετρεῖς ἑαυτόν—where the ending
-es is a misspelling for its homophonous -ns. Cp. EASoph. Lex. s. v. μή.
So probably also poßηente (as Narr. Zos. 99, 18 & Theoph. 388, 2), Xаρîte
(Acta Petri et Pauli 183, 8); κοιμηθῆτε, σωθῆτε, etc. (for A φοβήθητε, χάρητε,
κοιμήθητε, etc. ; cp. 814).]
17. That this construction had become the received form in Herodian's
time, appears clearly from the fact that he deprecates it: Philet. 436 TÒ MH
απαγορευτικὸν οὐ συντάσσεται ὑποτακτικοῦ ἐνεστῶτι. So too Thom. Mag. 233
οὐκ ἐρεῖς ἐπὶ ἐνεστῶτος μὴ τύπτης, ἀλλὰ μὴ τύπτε.
17. So now regularly in N : μὴ φωνάζῃς ! μὴν τρέχῃς ! μὴ γελᾶς ! μὴ φοβᾶσαι !
μη σε νοιάζη 1 etc.
18. D. For the independent future indicative which is by this time.
retreating before the primary subjunctive and present indicative. For
examples see App. iv. 8-11.
19. Having thus obtained the ascendency over its fellow-moods,
the independent primary subjunctive appropriated one after another
also their functions (wish, exhortation, command, duty, etc.). Now
these functions, however significant and characteristic in themselves,
were after all only few as compared with those which the primary
subjunctive already performed in dependent or subordinate sentences.
Its very great frequency in such cases can be gauged by remembering
that by this time it had established itself as a more or less regular con-
comitant of μή, ἵνα, ὅπως, ὡς, ὥστε, ἐάν, ἄν, ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ὡσάν, also ὅτε or
οπότε, έως οι μέχρις (ἄν οι οδ), πρίν (ν), προτοῦ, ἅμα, besides the indefi
nite relatives in prospective clauses, and had moreover appropriated
the functions of nearly all infinitives (App. vi), and the majority of
participles (2164-70), by regularly substituting itself for them mostly
in company with iva. This peculiarity was of great moment in that in
consequence of its too frequent presence, iva had become so familiar
with the masses as to be felt as an essential concomitant of the sub-
junctive in the absence of any other subordinating conjunction or
relative (1786). Accordingly the primary subjunctive now becomes the
KAT Çox prospective mood, in both dependent and independent
clauses.
KO
ام
a. For examples soo supra 1 and the sections dealing with the above
particlos (19), the infinitivo (App. vi), and the participle (2100-70), and cp.
Orig. iii. 297 ο περὶ ποῖον ἀγρὸν ἵΝΑ Καταγελώμεθα ; Macar. 545 Β πῶς τις
ἵνα αὐτοὺς ἐξεγρῳ καὶ Διακρίνῃ καὶ ἐκβάλῃ ἐκ τοῦ ἰδίου πυρός; Chrys. i. 613 A
πῶς ἵνα μὴ γcτερήσωμεν ἀπὸ τῶν δώρων κυρίου ; Epict. 1, 39, 16 Σωκράτης οὖν
ἵνα πάθη ταῦτα ὑπ' Αθηναίων ; 3, 4, 9 ἄγε να στεφανωθῇ. Acta Pil. Β. 5, 2
τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἵνα παραλάβης καὶ μέρος ἵνα ἔχη μετ' αὐτοῦ !
b. So too now : Tôi và ralia; ‘where shall I sit ? Tí và các ; ‘what shall
I do? ἐγὼ νὰ σωπάσω; ‘I shall hold my tongue? νὰ περιμένω ἢ νὰ μὴν
và
và
Tepiμévw; 'shall I wait or not wait?' (Cp. 1909 & App. iv, 12 f.)
20. To sum up briefly, the primary subjunctive displaced one after
another-
A. In dependent sentences:-1. The secondary subjunctive in final
clauses (1952-3. 1956. App. v. 8 ff.). 2. The future indicative first in final
clauses (1962-3), then in conditional protases with ei (1986).—3. The
566
APP. V.-MOODS SINCE A TIMES.
[20.
participle to a great extent (2170).—4. The infinitive almost entirely
(App. vi. 15-19).
B. In independent clauses :-5. The future indicative preceded by
où µý(v) (1825).-6. The (prohibitive, then the hortative) imperative
beginning with the 3rd person (1918. 1930).—7. The secondary sub-
junctive of wish conceived as a hortative mood (1924).-8. The future
indicative wholesale, so far as it had not been already replaced by the
present indicative (App. iv. 2-12).
567
APPENDIX VI.
THE INFINITIVE CHIEFLY SINCE A TIMES.
1. Remark. In view of the dual character of the infinitive, I have
deemed it expedient to examine separately either function, under the
respective heads of verbal infinitive and substantival infinitive. I might
have adopted the current designation of anarthrous and articular re-
spectively, but this distinction appeared to me purely mechanical. For
οὐ ῥᾴδιον ζητεῖν τὴν ἀλήθειαν is manifostly different from οὐ ῥᾴδιον τὸ
ζητεῖν τὴν ἀλήθειαν, in that ζητείν is conceived mainly as a verb and
emphasized accordingly, while rò (ŋte is conceived mainly as a sub-
stantive (Sýtnois Tŷs åλnŋ0cías) and emphasized as such. Even if
considered in themselves, the terms (nтeiv and rd ŋreiv are not suffi-
ciently discriminated by the mechanical designation of anarthrous and
articular. It is a distinction which appeals, it is true, to the eye, but
does not satisfy the mind.
I. VERBAL INFINITIVE.
2. When we remember that the characteristic feature of the Greek
finite verb in A was wealth of forms (249 in all, as against 94 in Latin,
and 38 in Gothic; GCurtius The Greek Verb p. 3 ft.), a fact which
lent it a unique perspicuity and precision, the conditions of the
infinitive compared with it very unfavourably. For the latter expresses
neither number nor person, in many cases not even time. Thus ypá-
pay means to write or writing without specification of person, number,
or time (infra 25). Another serious disadvantage of the infinitive lay
in the circumstance that neither its nature nor its meaning was clearly
defined except when taken in connexion with the governing word.
In short the infinitive was an imperfect instrument of the language,
and was serviceable only as the complement of a leading word. Now
in this complementary function, it served either to complete a declara-
tion, statement or opinion, as: λέγει γράφειν=λέγει ότι γράφει, αγγέλλει
γεγραφέναι = ἀγγέλλει ὅτι γέγραφεν ; or to imply also a certain futurity
from the standpoint of the governing word (βούλεται γράφειν, ἐκέλευσε
γράψαι, ἐλπίζει γράψειν).
:
3. We have then, broadly speaking, two leading functions of the
infinitive the complement of a statement, and the notion of a more
or less definite prospect (futurity, purpose), either of which is
determined by the character of the governing word. Thus after verbs
of saying or thinking, perceiving, and their synonyms, frequently also
after verbs of hoping or expecting, promising and swearing, the infinitive
serves mainly as the complement of a declaration, and is therefore
568
APP. VI.-INFINITIVE SINCE A TIMES.
[3-7.
conventionally called declarative. It is equivalent to orɩ or as with
a finite mood. (2078.)
4. In all other cases-and they form the by far greater majority
(infra 7)—the infinitive serves to complete the notion of the govern-
ing word with a more or less distinct connotation of futurity or purpose
(prospective result). This infinitive, when resolved to a finite mood,
comes near a final clause with oπws (av), ws, iva. Hence it may be
conveniently called the prospective (or final) infinitive.
5. To these introductory and general remarks we must add another
consideration of cardinal importance: the genius of all languages, as
they are actually spoken by the masses, is simplicity, clearness, very
often also emphasis. Now of these characteristics of popular speech
only simplicity or brevity may be claimed for the infinitive. A Greek,
then, who aimed particularly either at precision, or emphasis, or
both, was often compelled to resolve the infinitive into a finite mood
with the appropriate particle, and thus obtain the desired efl'ect with
regard to the precise meaning, person, number, or time. The particle
(conjunction) suggested in this circumlocution was naturally deter-
mined by the nature of the individual case in declarative clauses the
infinitive was resolved by means of or or as 'that'; in prospective or
final clauses by means of orшs (äv), ws, or iva in order that.' In some
final clauses also, notwithstanding that emphasis was aimed at, the
infinitive was retained, but then it was strengthened by placing before
it the redundant particle bore (rarely is), 'in order to,' a case
which must not be identified with the consecutive function of &ore
(infra 8 & 15).
6. That the infinitive was, even in A, resolved into a declarative or
final clause, and that this clause was equivalent to the infinitive
simple, appears from the following three facts:
a. Verbs or kindred expressions regularly complemented by an
infinitive are often found with a declarative or final analysis without
any perceptible difference of meaning (infra 7, a. 12, B, a).
b. The infinitive and its analysis often alternate (infra 7, b. 12 B,b).
c. Declarative clauses sometimes begin analytically (with ori, rarely
s) and yet close with an infinitive (infra 7, c).
A. CLASSICAL PERIOD.
1. DECLARATIVE INFINITIVE.
7. Since declarative verbs (verba declarandi et sentiendi) form but
a small minority (supra 4), the scope offered for resolving the declara-
tive infinitive was naturally limited. Nevertheless a considerable
number of instances may be adduced from even A writers. The
following specimens and references may suffice for our purpose :--
α. Declarative infinitive resolved by means of ὅτι ο ὡς : Th. 5, 9 ἐλπίσαντες
wc av ênezé 1001 tis autoîs ès páxηy. So too 3, 38. Eur. El. 916. Xen. An.
7, 1, 5.
Mem. 3, 3, 16 oleolai ds.
ὡς αὐτονόμους τὰς πόλεις χρὴ εἶναι.
evnoes λései d toÛTO λéywv. Apol. 35 A. Gorg. 487 D. Lach. 200 a. Lys.
Cyr. 8, 3, 40.
Hell. 6, 3, 7 vµcîs pare
Pl. Phaed. 87 ο πᾶς ἂν ὑπολάβοι ὅτι
569
7-10.] APP. VI.-INFINITIVE SINCE A TIMES.
7, 19 φησὶν ὡς. Even οἴομαι ὡς, Isocr. 15, 311. νομίζω ὡς, Th. 3, 88, 3.
voμíça öтI, Xen. Hell. 5, 4, 62 (see WSchmid ii. 58; cp. infra 11).
•
b. Declarative infinitive alternating with its analysis (2030; cp. Kühner ii. 876 A.
3) : Hdt. 6, 63 ἐξαγγέλλει ὡς οἱ παῖς ΓΕΓΟΝΕ (but 65 ὅτε οἱ ἐξήγγειλε παῖδα
ΓΕΓΟΝΕΝΑΙ). 3, 75 ἔλεγε τὸν μὲν Κύρου Σμέρδιν ὡς αὐτὸς ἀποκτείνειε, τοὺς μάγους
δὲ Βασιλεύειν. Cp. 8, 118. Th. I, 98 εἶπον ὅτι σφίσι μεν δοκοΐΕΝ ἀδικεῖν οἱ
Αθηναῖοι, Βούλεσθαι δὲ κτλ. 3, 3 ἐσηγγέλθη αὖθις ὡς εἴΗ Απόλλωνος Μαλόεντος
ἑορτή καὶ ἐλπίδα εἶναι κτλ. 90 3, 25. 8, 78. Lys. 10, 15 ὑμᾶς πάντας
εἰδέναι ἡγοῦμαι ὅτι ἐγὼ μὲν ὀρθῶς λέγω, τοῦτον δὲ σκαιὸν εἶναι. Χen. Cyr.
1, 13, 13 ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι βούλοιτο μὲν . . . Νομίζειν μέντοι κτλ. (Cp. also 2031.)
c. Declarative conjunctions ÖτI and &c with the infinitive(2031): Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 18.
2, 4, 15 ἀκούω ὅτι καὶ συνθηρευτάς τινας τῶν παίδων σοι γενέσθαι. 5, 4, 1. 8, I, 25.
Hell. 2, 2, 2.
3, 4, 27. 6, 5, 42. 7, 5, 14. Pl. Phaed. 63 0. Logg. 892 D
εἶπον ὅτι πρῶτον ἐμὲ χρῆναι πειραθῆναι κατ' ἐμαυτόν. Rep. 470 D. Lys. 13, 9.
Isae. 6, 10 προσδιαμεμαρτύρηκεν ὡς υἱὸν εἶναι γνήσιον τοῦτον.—Compare also
Polyb. 31, 20, 4. Diod. 4, 76. Acts 27, 10.
See also 2031.
2. PROSPECTIVE INFINITIVE.
8. The tendency for analysis shown in the case of the declarative
infinitive is far more marked in prospective infinitives. Here, however,
the transition from the infinitive simple to its periphrasis is some-
times effected through the intermediate stage of placing before the
infinitive the particle bore (supra 5. infra 15), which then merely em-
phasizes the final force of its attendant. This practice is, moreover,
uncommon in A, the general tendency being, in cases of emphasis
or precision, or both, simply to resolve the infinitive into a final clause,
that is into a finite mood with onws (av), ws, or ïva !.
9. a. Final infinitive with CTE: Hdt. 4, 145; 6. 5; 7, 6 ȧvéπeiσe Bép§ca
ὥστε ποιέειν ταῦτα. 1, 82 ; Th. 5, 17 ψηφισαμένων ὥστε καταλύεσθαι. 8, 79 ;
8, 63. 2, το αναπείθεται ὑπὸ Σεύθου ὥστ᾽ ἐν τάχει ἀπελθεῖν. Χen. Cyr. 6,
3, 9. Soph. Phil. 656. Eur. Hipp. 13, 27.
Ar.
b. Final infinitive resolved through óпws (av), ùs, ïva (A 558; 0 344;
β 316 ; γ 9; γ 327 λίσσομαι ἵνα beside A 174 λίσσομαι μένειν. Hdt. 9, 117
ἐδέοντο τῶν στρατηγῶν ὅπως ἀπάγοιεν σφέας ὀπίσω. So 6, 133. 7, 161 ὡς
cтpathsúchc tŷs 'Exλádos yλíxeat. 8, 15): Soph. Ai. 556; Phil. 54.
Ach. 536; 106ο ; Eq. 1256 καί σ' αἰτῶ βραχὺ ὅπως ἐcomal σοι Φανός. Crat.
Fr. 108. Th. 2, 99 παρεσκευάζοντο ὅπως ἐςΑλογCIN ἐς τὴν κάτω Μακεδονίαν.
5, 36 ¿déovro önwc napadwcoyci. 3, 15. Xon. An. 3, 2, 3; Oec. 20, 8; Hell. 2,
3, 13 ἐπεμελήθη ὡς τύχοιεν πάντων τῶν καλῶν. Cyr. 1, 2, 6 ; 2, 1, 3 (bosido
infin. in Mem. 4, 7, 1 and Th. 6, 14, 54). Pl. Rop. 339 A éµoí je
a
ånnyópevoas öпwc µì) Toûto ¿TOKPinoímín; Phaed. 59 F; Rep. 549 E; Antiph.
[12, 41 αἰτεῖσθαι ὅπως μὴ καταψηφίσθε. 114, 1. Dem. 18, 155 å§ioûv îna
BонOŃCḤ. Lys. 31, 17; 10, 29. Lycurg. 165, 40. Isao. 66, 14.
воносн.
"
B. //-G TIMES.
10. But, while in A the analysis of the verbal infinitive into a finite
clause constitutes the exception, and was for each individual writer
a matter of convenience and taste, in P the practice met with steadily
['] In A inscriptions final iva occurs very raroly, ds never, whereas őños with
dv is tho rogular representativo. (KMoisterhaus * 212 f.)
2
570
APP. VI.-INFINITIVE SINCE A TIMES.
[10-12.
increasing popularity, so that, towards the beginning of our era,
almost every infinitive could be replaced by its analysis (cp. AButt-
mann 238). In particular it may be taken for granted that the
declarative infinitive had almost entirely retreated before its analysis
with or¹, or the direct discourse (1701. 1932), while the final
infinitive on the whole still resisted the tendency for analysis (cp.
2031-2). The tenacity of the latter may be to a certain extent attri-
buted to the custom, very popular by this time, of placing before it
the redundant particle &ore (supra 5. infra 15)— frequently confounded
with eis rò owing to their partial homophony: oste isto (infra 22)
--behind which the prospective infinitive sought as it were shelter
(cp. GBWiner 400). The other final conjunction, ó›s, which in A was
admissible before the infinitive, had by this time fallen into disuse, at
all events in the non-Atticistic and unsophisticated language (2).
·
oi
Among other numerous instances note: Sept. Gen. 15, 7; 1 Macc. 4, 2
& 28; 10, 3 ; 2 Macc. 2, 6 καὶ προσελθόντες τινὲς τῶν συνακολουθούντων ὥστε
ἐπισημήνασθαι τὴν ὁδόν. NT Luke 9, 52 πορευθέντες εἰσῆλθον εἰς πόλιν
eis
Σαμαριτών ὥστε ἑτοιμάσαι αὐτῷ. 4, 29. Matt. 27, 1 συμβούλιον ἔλαβον οἱ
ἀρχιερεῖς κατὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὥστε θανατῶσαι αὐτόν,—and so on down to B times
(cp. GB Winer 400), as: Euseb. H. F. 3, 28, 3. Theod. ii. 528 в eineîv Tậ
Ιερουσαλὴμ ὥστε σαλπίσαι. 62ο A. Acta Pil. i. Λ 1, 2 ἀξιοῦμεν τὸ σὺν μέγεθος
ὥστε αὐτὸ παραστῆσαι τῷ βήματί σου.
4
11. On the whole, however, the analytical spirit in this case had already
so thoroughly pervaded popular feeling that almost every verb, even those
formerly constructed invariably with the infinitive (such as Boúλoμai,
θέλω, οἴομαι, δεῖ, χρή, etc., though ep. supra 7, α), now began to yield to
analysis.
12. By this time, however, another parallel factor had operated on the
particles at large (1487 ?) and thus affected the declarative and final con-
junctions also (1753-5. 1761-2. 1776). I refer to τɩ, és, öñws (äv), ús, iva,
which previously were used both as adverbs and conjunctions, each in more
than one function. These particles then had by this time been gradually
specialized and restricted to certain fixed usages. Thus ws, formerly
current both as declarative and final conjunction ( = öri, öπws), had now
altogether retreated from the common language before 7 and iva
respectively. Similarly final ones had lost ground considerably before
ἵνα [3] On the other hand, iva had lost its adverbial force (=wσñeр, öñov),
and limited itself to the final function in order that.' In this way, the
number of declarative and final conjunctions formorly current side by
side (öri, ás—бпws, ws, iva) had been by this time reduced to three items
(öri,iva, öπws), or rather two (őtɩ, ira), and these three or two particles had
to be instrumental in all cases of analysis of the infinitive. Accordingly
the infinitive had to be resolved, when declarative, by moans of öтi
(now often amplified to dióri, 1753 f.) with tho indicativo; when prospective,
Even such zealous Atticists as Lucian, now often rosolvod the infinitive
with T in cases where A admitted only the infinitival construction, i.c. after
olopai (Alex. 265; Dom. 385; Asin. 587; Adv. Ind. 106) and voµífw (D. Syr. 474)
(ep. WSchmid i. 242).
?
12 At least it never occurs in the NT writings, for the solitary instance
cited (Acts 20, 34) οὐδὲ ἔχω τὴν ψυχήν μου τιμίαν ἐμαυτῷ ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν
δρόμον μου μετὰ χαρᾶς is an obvious corruption of ὥστε Τελειώσαι.
[9] Among numerous other instances where önws had yielded to ïva noto
Polyb. 2, 8, 2 φροντίζειν ἵνα ; 5, 2, 8; 11, 27, 2, 5, 104, 9 σπουδάζειν ἵνα ; 12, 22, 1 ;
23, 9, 12 προνοηθῆναι ἵνα ; 11, 9, 5 περιβλέπειν ἵνα ; Hrdu, 2, 3, 10 ; 8, 9 (p. 387).
Epiph. 1376 D,
571
12.]
APP. VI.-INFINITIVE SINCE A TIMES.
by means of iva, or, less popular, öπws, with the primary subjunctive (the
secondary subjunctive having already disappeared from the common
language, App. v. 6-16). This fact, besides its own significance, shows
further that the conjunctions ori and iva, having appropriated the functions
of all former declarative and final particles, had become very common.
A. Declarative infinitive resolved by means of OTI, now often amplified to Aióri
(also KABÓTI). Examples are found in every writer, and that in great
numbers. Here a few references and instances of dióri for öri may suffice:
KMoisterhans ' 211 (Πα Β.Ο.) ἐπειδὴ Ονασος ἐμφανίζει . . . Διότι καὶ κοινῇ ὁ
(III
δῆμος τὴν εὔνοιαν ἀποδέδεικται. Polyb. 23, 2, 9 ἀπόκρισιν ἔδωκε διότι περί
πάντων καὶ τῶν εἰρημένων καὶ τῶν ἀνεγνωσμένων Δημητρίῳ πιστεύει Διότι τὰ μὲν
γέγονε τὰ δ᾽ ἔσται; 1, 10, 7; 4, 25, 2; 16, 12, 3; 18, 34, 7; 18, 35, 2 (ep.
FKaelker in Lpz. Stud. iii. 243-5; WSchmid iii. 80 f.).
•
B. a. Prospective infinitive resolved by means of ina, rarely önwc [. Instances
are very common in overy writer. E. g. Louvre Pap. 51 (160 B. C.), 36 λéyw
πρὸς τὸν δαίμονα ἵνα προσκυνήσῃς αὐτόν. 49 (164-158 Β. σ.), 11 ἀξιώσαντός με
ὅπως, ἐὰν ἐνέγκῃ τρίτονον, μεταλάβωσιν. Polyb. 4, 26, 3 ; 5, 9, 2; 6, 35, 8;
18, 4, 8; 31, 15, 3; 39, 7, 10[2]. Diod. 10, 549, 23 паpekáλcoav avтdy i̇na
παρεκάλεσαν
dún Toùs ¿dúvras. Dion. H. i. 215; ii. 666 f. Plut. Mor. 183 a. Dio Cass.
51, 10, 7. Ael. Ν. Λ. 383, 3 ἐδεήθη Πομπίλου ἵνα αὐτὴν διαγάγοι τον πορθμόν.
-Sept. 2 Macc. 2, 8 ǹ§iwoev ina d tútos kabaɣiao0n; Esdra 4, 16; Sirach
37, 15. NT Mark 3, 9; 5, 18; 6, 25 0éλw iva; 7, 26; 8, 22 (so too Ignat.
ad Tral. 3, 1); Mark 9, 30 ou hoeλev îna tis yoî (rather yn App. v. 8º).
Matt. 4,
3; 7, 12; 10, 25; 16, 20; 18, 6. Luke 4, 3; 7, 34; 8, 31; 9, 40;
10, 40. Acts 27, 42. I Cor. 1, 10; 2 Cor. 12, 8; Col. 4, 16. (Cp. AButt-
mann 236 f. & GBWiner 420-6.)
+
b. Prospective infinitive allernating with its analysis. NT 1 Cor. 9, 15 naλdv ɣáp
μοι μᾶλλον ἀποθανεῖν ἢ τὸ καύχημά μου ἵνα τις κενώσι, ib. 14, 5 θέλω δὲ
πάντας ὑμᾶς λαλεῖν γλώσσαις, μᾶλλον δὲ ἵνα προφητεύητε.
c. As to John, it would be superfluous to adduce any examples,
seeing that he employs the analysis of the prospective infinitive more
frequently than any other writor of the time. Indeed it may be even
questioned whether in his ordinary conversation and preaching ho ever
used any verbal infinitive, except after dúvapai, occasionally also after
Oéλw and a few other expressions, chiefly impersonal verbs [9], At
By this time iva had become almost the only means of expressing purpose,
for it had taken the place not only of the object infinitive in all cases except after
verbs of 'saying, thinking, hoping, sooing, hearing' (where őr had established
itsolf), but also of the future or final participle (λ0ev iva idŋ for A Hλ0ev
ὀψόμενος; 2157).
入
​121 Cp. FKnolkor Lpz. Stud. iii. 290: praeter cotera adnotandum ost Polybium
etiam iis locis interdum malle uti ina, quibus Attici soleant scribere infinitivum.
[3] The following table is a fairly complete list of the verbal infinitives
occurring in the Gospel of John. It stands with the following oxpressions :
δύναμαι (always), 1, 47. 8, 2, 3, 4,
4, 5, 9, 27. 5, 19, 30, 44. 6, 44, 52, 60, 65.
7, 7, 34, 36. 8, 21, 22, 43. 9, 4, 16, 33.
10, 21, 29, 35. 11, 37. 12, 39. 13, 33,
36, 37. 14, 5, 17. 15, 4, 5.
15, 4, 5. 16, 12
16, 12 =37
times.
θέλω 1, 44. 3, 8. 5, 6, 21, 35, 40.
6, 11, 21, 67. 7, 1, 17, 44. 8, 44. 9, 27,
27. 12, 21. 15, 7. 16, 19. 21. 22, 23
(beside Oéλw iva 17, 24; so Mutt. 7, 12.
Mark 6, 25. 10. 35. Luko 6, 31)–20
times.
μéλλ (always) 4, 4. 6, 6, 15, 71.
7, 35, 35, 39. 11, 51. 12, 4, 33. 14, 22.
18, 3212 times.
deî (always) 8, 7, 14, 30. 4, 4, 20, 21.
9, 4. 10, 16.
10, 16. 12, 34. 20,9=10 times.
ζητώ 5, 18. I, 4, 19, 20, 25, 30.
8, 37, 40. 10, 39. 11, 8. 19, 12 (in
particular ζητῶ ἀποκτεῖναι 5, 18,
1, 19, 20, 25. 8, 37, 40.-miáoαi 7, 30,
40.—πιάσαι
10, 39. Cp. Întâ iva 1 Cor. 14, 12):
12 times.
7,
δίδωμι (πιεῖν) 4, 7, 10. (φαγεῖν) 6, 31,
572
APP. VI.-INFINITIVE SINCE A TIMES. [12-13.
all events it is very striking that on almost every occasion where a
prospective infinitive was expected, we meet with its analysis by means of
iva and the primary subjunctive. A comparison of the four Gospels shows
that iva with the subjunctive occurs in Mark 58 times, in Matthew 34 times,
in Luke 38 times, whereas in John it occurs no less than 125 times, not-
withstanding that this Gospel is much shorter than either that of Matthew
or Luke.
C.
POST-CHRISTIAN TIMES.
I. DECLARATIVE INFINITIVE.
13. We have now arrived at a stage which marks a distinct transition
from the infinitive to its analysis. This change particularly applies
to the declarative infinitive, which is now regularly resolved by or
(also ὡσότι) with the indicative (ep. supra 7). It is very doubtful
indeed whether, after verbs of saying, thinking, believing, seeing, hearing,
and the like, popular speech admitted of any other verbal comple-
ment than or with the indicative [. However, with the opening of
T, if not earlier, another particle made its appearance, and soon
began to dispute the hitherto absolute dominion of ört, and the inore
successfully as őr acted also as a causal conjunction (because ').
This novel particle was the adverb ñós (probably suggested by ws),
naturally acting as a proclitic; it figures even in T popular composi-
tions (1751. 1756).
Clom. R. ad Cor. 21, 3 ἴδωμεν πῶς ἐγγύς ἐστιν καὶ ὅτι οὐδὲν λέληθεν αὐτόν.
Ignat. ad Smyrn. 6, 2 καταμάθετε τοὺς ἑτεροδοξοῦντας πῶς ἐναντίοι εἰσὶ τῇ
γνώμῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ Barn. 14, 6 γέγραπται γὰρ πῶς αὐτῷ ὁ πατὴρ ἐντέλλεται.
16, 1 ἐρῶ ὑμῖν πῶς ἤλπισαν. Acta Xanth. 59, τι ὁρᾷς, ἀδελφέ, τὰ ξύανα τῶν
δαιμόνων ταραττόμενα πῶς οὐ φέρουσι τοῦ λόγου τὴν δύναμιν. 80, 34 ἰδὼν πώς
ἡ μέριμνα αὐτοῦ πᾶσα ἦν εἰς τοὺς πτωχούς. 82, 27 νῦν ἔγνων ἀκριβῶς πώς φθονεί
Ο διάβολος τῇ παρθενίᾳ. 85, 23 δρᾷς δὲ πῶς διὰ πολλῶν προφάσεων σῴζει ὁ θεός.
Vita SA. 10* Α βλέπεις πώς ἐτάχυνα τοῦ βοηθῆσαι σοι ; 15* η διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς
ὁ Ἐπιφάνιος πῶς ἐκάλεσεν αὐτόν. Acta Pil. ii. I, 2 γογγύζουσι κατ' αὐτοῦ πῶς
τοσαύτης τιμῆς τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἠξίωσεν. ib. ἰδὼν Ἰούδας πῶς ἤγαγον τὸν Ἰησοῦν
52.—ἐξουσίαν 1, 12, 5, 27. 19, 10,'10=
8 timos.
ἔχω 8, 22. 16, 12.—ἐξουσίαν 10, 18,
19, 10, 10.—xpeíav 13, 10 (beside
—χρείαν ἵνα 2, 25. 16, 30) =7 times.
18.
ὀφείλω 13, 14.
7 = 2 times.
19, 7=
2
δοκῶ 5, 39. 16, 3 (ep.—ὅτι 5, 45.
11, 13, 31, 56. 13, 29). 90, 15) =. 2 times,
ἄφετε ὑπάγειν 11, 44. 18, 8 (beside
å‹pes iva 12, 7)=2 timos.
ἔξεστι 5, 10. 18, 31 = 2 times.
ἔθος ἔστι 19, 40=1.
αἰτῶ 4, 9 (so αἰτοῦμαι Acts 7, 46.
13, 28. Eph. 3, 13) 1.
ἐρωτῶ 4, 40 (besideἵνα 4, 47. 17.
15. 1.9, 31, 38)=1.
ἄρχομαι 13, 5 -1.
ὑπάγω 21, 3=1.
πορεύομαι 11, 2 (besideἵνα 11, το)
=1.
πέμπω 1, 33 = 1.
ποιώ 6, 10 = 1.
πρίν 4, 49. 8, 58.
συμφέρει 18, 14 (besideἵνα 11, 50.
πρὸ τοῦ 1, 49.
times.
14, 29= 3 times.
13, 19. 17, 5 3
16, 7)=1.
Total: 129 times.
On the whole thon John employs tho verbal infinitive about 129 times, 57
which come to δύναμαι und θέλω, το το δεῖ, and ra to μέλλω.
of
[1] Thus ὅτι stands niter ἀκούω, even in John 14, 28 ; βλέπω 2 Cor. 7, 8; Heb.
3, 19; Jns, 2, 22 ; θεώμαι John 6, 5; ὁρῶ Jas. 2, 24; γινώσκω Μatt. 21, 45; Luko
10, 11; John 4, 53; 2 Cor. 13, 6; John 4, 53 ; 5, 6; 6, 15, 69, otc.
573
13-16.] APP. VI.—INFINITIVE SINCE A TIMES.
ἐνώπιον Πιλάτου, 16, 3 ὁ οὖν Ἰωσὴφ ώμολόγει ὅτι ἐκήδευσε καὶ ἔθαψεν αὐτὸν μετὰ
τοῦ Νικοδήμου, καὶ πῶς ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ὅτι ἠγέρθη. Narr. Josephi 3, 3 θεωρώ
γὰρ πῶς ὁ διάβολος χαίρων τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ λαμβάνει. Apophth. 249 Α οὐ
βλέπεις τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς πῶς εἰσιν ὡς ἄγγελοι εἰς τὴν σύναξιν ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ ;
Doroth. 1629 4 λέγω πῶς αἱ ἐντολαὶ πᾶσι τοῖς Χριστιανοῖς ἐδόθησαν. 1832 B
λέγω ὑμῖν πῶς ἡ ψυχή, ὡς λέγει ὁ ἅγιος Γρηγόριος, τριμερής ἐστι. Leont. Neap.
V. J. 5, 21 καὶ εἰπόντος πρὸς αὐτὸν πῶς Διὰ τὴν ἀγάπην ὠφέλησον με. IMoschos
2992 ο ἀρέσκει σοι πῶς ἡ ἀδελφὴ αὐτὴ ὑπὸ τοῦ δαίμονος ἀδικεῖται καὶ ἀσχημονεῖ.
14. For a time both ὅτι (or ὡσάτι) and πως were current side by
side, but eventually nos gained the ascendancy and became the
received declarative conjunction to the gradual elimination and almost
total exclusion of or and door from popular speech. As a con-
sequence, N speech now hardly knows or except as a causal particle
(=dióri, “because ')—and this use is even obsolescent-while as is the
universal declarative conjunction (1755).
τι
2. PROSPECTIVE INFINITIVE.
15. As to the prospective infinitive in post-christian popular Greek,
it may be averred that, little used as it already was, it still lingered
for a time chiefly as a complement of a few incomplete verbs, like
δύναμαι (now δύνομαι 774), εὐπορῶ, ἔχω (2091. App. iv. 6), θέλω, βούλομαι,
πρέπει, etc. (1894), also with the final (not consecutive) conjunction
ώστε, now often associated and confounded with εἰς τό (2082 & supra Io).
Socr. 7, 37 παρακαλῶ ὥστε. 581 Α δρίζω ὥστε . ΕΝΑ διοικῇ (1).
Theod. ii. 528 Β εἰπεῖν τῇ Ἱερουσαλεὶμ ὥστε καλπίσαι. 620 Α εἰσηγεῖσθαι
αὐτῷ ὥστε δικαίως δικάζειν. i. 476 Β νομοθετεῖν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ ὥστε
Δέξασθαι. Mal. 435, 7 δεόμενος τοῦ βασιλέως ώστε λαβείν αὐτὸν
ἐπίτροπον. 437, 5 ἔπεμψε κατὰ πόλιν ὥστε τὸν ἄρχοντα .
οἶκον. 439, 12 εἰπὼν ἐν τῇ διαθήκῃ ὥστε τὸν εὐσεβέστατον Ἰουστινιανὸν
παρασχείν κτλ. 449, 6 ἐθέσπισε δὲ ὁ βασιλεὺς ὥστε μὴ πολιτεύεσθαι τοὺς
ἑλληνίζοντας. 465 γράψας ὥστε ΠΕΜΦΘΗΝΑΙ αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν. 385,
•
•
•
·
·
•
P
μὴ κτίζει
21 ἐβουλεύσαντο ὥστε λούσασθαι (so too 121, 7; 113, 19). 112 αναγκάζουσι
τὸν ᾿Αντήνορα ὥστε ἐξελθείν (so too 195, 13). 385, 20 γράφω ὥστε.
Theoph. 180, 18 ἐθέσπισεν ὥστε μὴ πολιτεύεσθαι.
15. For the frequent construction, at this period, of ἔχω and εἶχον with
the infinitivo see App. iv. 6-7.
16. In all other cases which formerly gave it the widest scope, the
prospective infinitive had been, by this time, replaced either by the
imperative or, much more commonly, by the primary subjunctive
with ἵνα (soon reduced to νά). This construction is very commonly
found in T-B unscholarly compositions, after the following verbs and
other expressions, taken from among many others (1762 ") :
αἰτέω
ἀρκετόν ἐστιν
ἀναγκάζω
ἄτοπον ἐστιν
ἀναγκαῖον ἐστί
βεβαιόω
ἀνέχομαι
βουλεύομαι
ἄξιός οι ἄξιόν ἐστι βούλομαι
διασαφέω
διδάσκω
δίδωμι
δίκαιόν ἐστι
δογματίζω
δυσωπέω
ἐξορκίζω
ἐπικαλέομαι
ἐπιτιμάω
ἐρωτάω
εὐλαβέομαι
εὔχομαι
ἀξιόω
γίνεται
ἀπαγγέλλω
γράφω
ἀπαιτέω
δεί
ἀποστέλλω
ἀρέσκει
ἀρκεῖ
δέομαι, δέον
διαγορεύεται
διαλέγομαι
ἐάω
εἰπεῖν
ἐνορκέω
ἐντέλλομαι
ἐξαιτέομαι
ζητέω
θέλω
θεσπίζω
Σκετεύω
καιρός ἐστι
574
APP. VI.—INFINITIVE SINCE A TIMES. [16–18.
κακόν ἐστι
παραγγέλλω
προσέχω
συγχωρείται
καλόν ἐστι
παραινέω
προσπέμπω
συμβουλεύω
καλῶς ἔχει
παρακαλέω
προστάσσω
συμφέρει
κελεύω
παραχωρέω
προστίθημι
συνήθειά ἐστι
κωλύω
λαλέω
λέγω
πείθω
προτρέπω
τηρίω
περιβλέπω
σημαίνω
ὑπομιμνήσκω
περιμένω
σπουδάζω
φοβέομαι
ὁρίζω
ὁρκίζω
ὀφείλω
ποιέω
στοιχεῖται ‘it is
φυλάσσω
προάγει prodest
προπέμπω
stipulated
χρείαν ἔχω
στοχάζομαι
ὥρα ἐστί.
For examples in each individual case see EASoph. Lex. s. vv. and
Gloss. pp. 106-112.
17. Moreover, the retreat of the infinitive is clearly indicated also
by its frequent misapplication in P compositions. For here we often
find it used sometimes even with the article (cp. infra 23)—
a. For the predicativo participle after εἰμί, τυγχάνω, φθάνω, and the like
(2117 ff.), as: Sept. Num. 10, 2 καὶ ἔσονται ἀνακαλεῖν τὴν συναγωγὴν καὶ ἐξαίρειν
τὰς παρεμβολάς ; 2 Reg. 10, 11· ἐσόμεθα τον ται σε. Tobit 5, 15. More
examples in 2117-21.
Π
b. For the final (futuro) participle (2158) (which is rare even in the
NT) [Acts 8, 25; 24, 11]), after verbs of motion, as: Louvre Pap. 22 (IInd
Β. C.), 24 & 23, 21 κατάγουσιν ἡμᾶς ΠΕΝΘΕΙ͂Ν τῷ θεῷ. 26, 4 αναβᾶσι θγειάται.
Sept. Is. 61, 1 f. ἀπέσταλκέν με Acacial, κηρύξαι, καλέσαι. Matt. 2, 2. ΑΛΘΟΜΕΝ
προεκγνῆσαι αὐτῷ. ΙΙ, 7; 20, 23; 28, 1 ; Hebr. 9, 24 ; 1 Cor. 16, 3 τούτους
πέμψω ἀΠΕΝΕΓΚΕῖν τὴν χάριν ὑμῶν εἰς Ἱερουσαλήμ. Rom. 10, 6; 1 Cor. 10, 7
ἐκάθισεν ὁ λαὸς ΦΑΓΕΙΝ καὶ ΠΙΕΪΝ καὶ ἀNECTHCAN παίζειν. Luke 9, 52. IGS 1093
ἐνθάδε ἦλθα ἀγῶνα ἰδεῖν; βουλεύοντι Σεβήρῳ. Ael. V. H. 3, 8 είλοντο αὐτὸν
сTPATHΓEIN. 10, 1 τὸν υἱὸν ἦγεν ἐς Ολύμπια ἀθλεῖν. Frg. 27 où deûpo
ἀφίγμαι κεκφέναι. 86 ἀφίκετο ἀkofcat, and often (WSchmid ii. 56 ; iii. 79).
Hermas Sim. 9, 9, 1 ἦλθε ΚΑΤΑΝΟCAI. Mart. Petri 88, 7 εἰσέρχομαι εἰς τὴν
KatanoĤcai.
Ῥώμην σταυρωθήναι. Acta Petri et Pauli 186, 14 ὅπερ ἀπῄει ποιήcal.
I
>
c. For the interrogative subjunctive after ἀπορέω, οὐκ ἔχω, σκοπέω and the
like, associated with some interrogative or relative word (2093), as: Acts
25, 26 περὶ οὗ ἀσφαλές τι γράψαι τῷ κυρίῳ οὐκ ἔχω· ὅπως σχῶ τι γράψαι. Josephi
Narratio 2, 2 οὐκ εἶχον τὸ πῶς τὸ πάσχα ποιήical. Apoc. Mar. 125, 27 τί
ἀποκριθῆναι οὐκ εἶχον. Callin. 57, 12 ζητοῦντες ποῦ εὑρεῖν. 113, 11 τί ποιῆσαι
οὐκ εἶχον. Apophth. 85 Β ἐσκόπει τί ποιήσαι. 92 D μὴ ἔχων ὅθεν ἀγοράσει.
433 Β ἀπορῶν τί ποιῆσαι. Theoph. 435, 4 ἀποροῦντες τί εἰπεῖν πρὸς τοῦτο. 333,
11 ηπόρουν τί πράξει. 265, 17 ἠπύρει τί space. 30. 270, 4. Theoph. Cont.
559, II; 599, 4; 505, 16 οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως Υπεκκλίνει τὴν μνήμην ; 511, 10.
Prodr. 5, 158 οὐκ ἔχω τί φορείν. 162 οὐκ ἔχω τί ΦΑΓΕΪΝ, and so on in other
M compositions. Theophyl. 130, 19 ὅποι στῆναι οὐκ ἔχοντες.
?
18. The instancos, many though they are, of the verbal infinitive in M
compositions, do not prove its use in the popular speech of the time, but
merely testify to the pedantic zeal and mannerism of the scribes. Simi-
larly, N combinations like θέλω φάγει I shall eat, and ἔχω φάγει I have
enten, in which φάγει is alleged to represent the infinitive (hence the
current misspelling φάγει, App. iv. 16 f.) are, as tho accentuation plainly
shows, mongrel formations (future subjunctives acting as infinitives)
due to scholastic influence, their parallel and genuine popular forms being
θὰ φάγω (formerly νὰ φάγω App. iv. 12-18) and ἔχω φαγωμένα (-vo). It has
been already explained elsewhere (App. iv. 19) that ἔχω φύγει, used as
a perfect, is a comparatively modern formation, coined by scribes after the
pattern of the Romanic languages by contamination of ἔχω φαγών I have
eaten und ἔχω φαγείν ' I have to eat, can ent, shall eat. Seo also App. iv. 16 f.
575
19-20h.] APP. VI. - INFINITIVE SINCE A TIMES.
19. That N combinations like the above θέλω φάγῃ, ἔχω φάγῃ and θέλω
vayn, terwyрapn are not infinitives, but misapplied (future and present)
subjunctivos, is borne out by two more considerations: the passive
form is θέλω ἔρχομαι, θέλω διγηθῇ (i. e. διηγηθῇ), ἔχω κοιμηθῇ (never θέλω
ἔρχεσθαι, θέλω διγηθῆναι, ἔχω κοιμηθῆναι) ; and then the accent is always
identical with that of the (future or present) subjunctive. The latter
criterion is very conclusive, especially in the case of futures formed from
the strong or 2nd aorist stem (τúxw, λáßw, µáow, etc.) which are barytone,
whereas the corresponding A infinitives are perispomena (tuxeîv, λaßeîv,
palciv.) The only exceptions are three: (xw or déλw) einĤ, eýpĤ, ¡aĤ,
commonly pronounced ', 'ẞpî, 'dy. But even these exceptions are only
apparent (912 ff.).
II. SUBSTANTIVAL INFINITIVE.
1. CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY.
20. The substantival or articular infinitive (rò ypá¶ew), though
generally assumed to be the primitive forin, cannot be clearly traced
in early (Homeric) Greek owing to the absence or ambiguous
character in it of the article (2072). The articular infinitive therefore
appears at a later period-unmistakably first in Theognis and
Simonides and thence spreading gradually obtains a general
popularity in A literature. Its full development and establishment
in the language of the time is reflected above all in Thucydides, the
orators, Plato, and Xenophon, where it already performs nearly all
the functions of a regular substantive. In fact, it stands in all cases
of the singular and may be governed by almost every preposition [2].
(Cp. Men. Mon. 378 νέοις τὸ σιγῶν κρεῖττον ἐστὶ τοῦ λαλείν. Pl. Gorg.
512 Ε αὐτὸ τὸ ἀποθνῄσκειν οὐδεὶς φοβεῖται. Χen. Mem. 4, 8, 2 ἐθαυμάζετο ἐπὶ
τῷ εὐθύμως ζῆν. Th. 7, 28 ἀντὶ τοῦ πόλις εἶναι φρούριον κατέστη.)
20b. But though substantivized by means of the article, the articular
infinitive distinctly preserves its verbal character, and thus admits of
all kinds of adjuncts, be they single words or short expressions, or
even lengthy clauses [9], as: Th. 1, 141; 3, I; 2, 37. Xen. Ages. 5, 4.
Mem. 1, 2, 4; Oec. 13, 6. Dem. 19, 55; 24, III.
[ According to FBirkloin's statistic researches (in MSchanz vii. 90 ff.), the
gradual development of the substantival infinitive is indicated by the following
ordor of classical authors, divided into three groups :-
Group
""
I: Homer 1; Hesiod 2; Hymns-; Pind. 9; Lyrics 9;
II: Aosch. 51; Soph. 97; Eur. 93; Ar. 65. Hdt. 49;
III: Th. 298; Antiph. 26 (including the spurious writings 36); Andoc. 18;
Lys. 36 (44); Isocr. 271 (306); Isao. 36; Lyc. 26; Dom. 784 (1130);
Aeschin. 61; Din. 33; Hyp. 42; Pl. 1680 (2032); Xon. 1306
(1310).
In group I the infinitive occurs only in the nominative (ró). In group II, it
occurs chiefly in the nominativo and accusativo, but also in the genitive and
dalivo proceded or not by a proposition (TÓ, TOû, Tậ). In group III, it is
equally frequent through all the cases with or without a preposition.
[2] On the whole, classical writers muko use of tho propositional construction
of the substantival infinitive about 2000 times. (FBirklein, in MSchanz vii. 103.)
[] That the vorbal naturo of thosubstantival infinitivo was sometimes completely
lost sight of, appears from the following instances: Xon. An. 7, 7, 24 yıŴOKW TÀS
τούτων ἀπειλὰς οὐχ ἧττον σωφρονιζούσας ἢ ἄλλων τὸ ἤδη κολάζειν. Dem. 19,
269 ἀλλὰ τό γ' εὖ φρονεῖν αὐτῶν μιμεῖσθε. id. 19, 289 εἰ τῆς πόλεως τέθνηκε τὸ τοὺς
ἀδικοῦντας μισεῖν καὶ τιμωρεῖσθαι. (For P Greek ep. BGildersloove in Trans.
Amer. Phil. Assoc. 1878, p. 7.)
576
APP. VI.-INFINITIVE SINCE A TIMES. [21-22.
2. H-G TIMES.
21. The above A use and force of the substantival infinitive holds
on the whole good also for P writers, notably the Atticists. At
the same time a close comparison of A with P unsophisticated
compositions shows that, while in A the substantival nature of the
articular infinitive still recedes into the background, P conceives it
more as a substantive and employs it as such. Hence the substantival
infinitive now assumes an increasing popularity, and so extends
beyond its former limits. For it now often stands also in the room
of a simple verbal infinitive, and that not only at the beginning of
a sentence in which case instances might be adduced even from
A writers (as Th. 2, 5, 3; Xem. Mem. 4, 3, 1)- but also, and very
frequently too, after the governing word. This distinct substantivation
naturally rendered it inconvenient to detach too far the article
from its infinitive by inserting between them cumbrous adjuncts or
complicated clauses. In like manner, lengthy infinitival constructions
involving a separate clause as subject of the infinitive are now avoided
in the common and unconventional language.
Polyb. 1, 41, 6 περὶ τὸ βοηθεῖν ἐγίνοντο καὶ παραβάλλεσθαι καὶ πᾶν ὑπομένειν
ὑπὲρ τῆς προειρημένης πόλεως διὰ τὸ μηδεμίαν ἀφορμὴν καταλείπεσθαι σφίσιν,
πάσης δὲ τῆς ἄλλης Σικελίας ἐπικρατεῖν Ῥωμαίους. 1, 4, 4 ὑπέλαβον ἀναγκαῖον
εἶναι τὸ μὴ παραλιπεῖν μηδ᾽ ἐᾶσαι παρελθεῖν ἀνεπιστάτως τὸ κάλλιστον ἅμα καὶ
ὠφελιμώτατον ἐπιτήδευμα τῆς τύχης. 1, 39, 8 χάριν τοῦ τὰς ἀγορὰς κομίζειν.
3, 42, 2 χάριν τοῦ κωλύειν τὴν τῶν Καρχηδονίων διάβασιν. 2, 47, Ι ; 3, 107, 2 ;
1, 7, 9 διὰ τὸ συνέχεσθαι τοῖς προειρημένοις πολέμοις. ib. 11 διὰ τὸ προορᾶσθαι
To μéλλov. So further 1, 49, 8; 1, 50, 2; 1, 62, 5; 2, 32, 11; 6, 46, 6; 1,
2, 8; 1, 50, 15; 1, 51, 9; 1, 62, 5).
Louvre Pap. 27, 5 (Β. c. 162) ἐπεδώκαμέν σοι ὑπόμνημα ὑπὲρ τοῦ μὴ εἰληφέναι
παρὰ τῶν ἱερειῶν. ib. 34 (B. C. 146) φάσκοντος καταβεκηκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν χάριν
τοῦ ἄρτους ἀγοράσαι. ib. 6, 7 (Β.Ο. 158) μετὰ τὸ γράψει τὴν πρὸ ταύτης
EπOTOλýν. Plut. G. Grac. 19. T. Grac. 15, 3 прùs тậ (or тd?) пâσav åрxùv
ἔχειν. G. Grue. 14, 2 ἐπὶ τῷ (οι το ?) ανελεῖν. (So too Mal. 469, 17.)-ΝΤ
Rom. 13, 8 μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν. 14, 3. 2 Cor. 3, I.
-Ev T Matt. 13, 4; Acts 11, 15; Luke 10, 35, Acts 8, 6; Luke 1, 21. (See
also 1561 & 1601.)—µeтà тó Matt. 26, 32; Mark 1, 14.-прùs тó Matt. 6, 1 ;
Luke 18, 1; Matt. 26, 12; Acts 3, 19. —прd тvû Matt. 6, S.-ȧvtì Toû Jas. 4,
15.—Eveka Toû 2 Cor. 7, 12.—dià Tú Hebr. 7, 24. Clem. R. ad Cor. 51, 5 DIÀ TO
dià tô
σκληρυνθῆναι αὐτῶν τὰς ἀσυνέτους καρδίας Μετὰ τὸ γενέσθαι τὰ σημεῖα καὶ τὰ
Tépara. See also 1522 and infra 24.
I
22. The construction eis rò with the infinitive is peculiarly common,
notably in Biblical and post-christian compositions (supra 10), as an
['] As a matter of course, there are exceptions sometimes evon unnatural, as :
Acta Xanth. 75, 7 Πέτρος ἦν παράγων ἐν πλοίῳ ἐπειγόμενος ὑπὸ ὁράματος Γενί εθαι
εἰς Ρώμην διὰ τὸ ἐξελθόντος Παύλου ἐπὶ τὴν Ισπανίαν εἰσελθεῖν ἐν τῇ Ῥώμῃ
πλάνον τινὰ καὶ μάγον ὀνόματι Σίμωνα καὶ διαλῆσαι τὴν ἐκκλησίαν ἣν συνεστήσατο
ὁ Παῦλος. But such complicated cases morely testify to the effort of scribes to
riso as far as possiblo above the plain spooch (05. 07. 019).
[2] In his first fivo books Polybios uses this propositional construction of
the substantival infinitive about 273 timos (SBriof i.8–10; cp. FKaelker in Lpz, Stud.
iii, 252: 'si quis vol paucas historiarum Polybii paginas perlegorit, intollogot
malle hunc scriptorom sententias efforro infinitivis additis articulo et praeposi-
tionibus, quam enuntiatis secundariis aut simplici infinitivo ').
577
PP
22-24.] APP. VI. INFINITIVE SINCE A TIMES.
equivalent to the simple infinitive-emphatic or unemphatic-of pro-
spect, purpose, often also to a final clause with iva (1542; cp. AButt-
mann 264 f.).
Polyb. 1, 74, 14; 3, 59, 4—NT Matt. 20, 19 пapadwoovoi aůrdv Tois
παραδώσουσιν τοῖς
ἔθνεσιν εἰς τὸ ἐμπαῖξαι ; 26, 2 παραδίδοται εἰς τὸ σταυρωθῆναι (Vulg. ut cruci-
figatur; cp. John 19, 16 iva oravρwen); Heb. 8, 3; 1 Cor. II, 22 oirías exeTE
εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν.
Eic TÒ EσbíεL Kai Tível. II, 33, Acts 7, 19; Rom. 15, 16; 1 Thess. 3, 10
11,
δεόμενοι εἰς τὸ ἰδεῖν ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον. Phil. 1, 23 τὴν ἐπιθυμίαν ἔχων εἰς τὸ
ἀναλῦσαι καὶ σὺν Χριστῷ εἶναι. 2 Thess. 2, 2. Clem. B. ad Cor. 34, 7 cc rỏ
μετόχους ἡμᾶς γενέσθαι.
23. Another peculiarity of the articular infinitive in P-B is its
unusual frequency in the genitive without a governing preposition.
It stands in a loose construction, which originated in A (2076 f., infra
24), has a decidedly final force (frequently preceded by un), and so
performs the work of a final clause or final participle (in order
to,' 'in order that'; 2097, supra 17).
J Par.
Polyb. 1, 12, 6 αναδραμόντες ἔτι τοῖς χρόνοις τοῦ μηδὲν ἀπόρημα καταλιπεῖν.
2, 34, 1 ἔσπευσαν οἱ κατασταθέντες ὕπατοι ... τοῦ μὴ συγχωρηθῆναι τὴν εἰρήνην
αὐτοῖς. 2, 55, 4 παρ' ὀλίγον ἦλθε τοῦ μὴ μόνον ἐκπεσεῖν ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς ὅλοις
κινδυνεύσαι (beside 1, 4, 3, η παρὰ μικρὸν ἦλθον ἀπολέσαι τὰ πράγματα). 5, 102,
6; 7, 16, 7; 9, 36, 1.-Sept. Gen. 1, 14. 16, 2; 18, 7 éráxvvE TOŶ moiñoαi
ἐτάχυνε ποιῆσαι
αὐτό. 12, 20 σπεῦσον τοῦ σωθῆναι ἐκεῖ. 18, 25 ; 19, 21 ; 20, 6 ; 24, 21 ; 38, 9 ;
Ex. 2, 18; 7, 14; 8, 29; 9, 17; 14, 5; Joshu. 19, 48; 22, 10; 22, 26; 23,
13 ; Ps. 38, 1 φυλάξω τὰς ὁδούς μου τοῦ μὴ ἁμαρτάνειν ἐν γλώσση μου. 39, 13
οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην τον βλέπειν. 118, 57 εἶπα τον φυλάξασθαι τὸν νόμον σου.
21, 30; 2 Par. 5, 14; 1 Macc. 6, 27; 6, 59. (For more examples from
the Sept. seo GBWinor 441.) ΝΤ Matt. 2, 13 μέλλει γὰρ Ἡρῴδης ζητεῖν
τὸ παιδίον τοῦ ἀπολέσαι αὐτό.
Td Tαidíov TOŶ ảпoλéσαi avтó. II, 1; 13, 3; 24, 45: Luke 2, 27; 12, 42.
Acts 3, 2 ; 7, 19; 15, 20 ; 20, 30 ; 26, 18; 27, 1 ὡς δὲ ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν
quâs els Tv 'Iraλíav. Rom. 6, 6; 11, 10; Gal. 3, 10; Hebr. 11, 5;-CIG
4896, 11 f. κινδυνεύειν ἡμᾶς τοῦ μὴ ἔχειν τὰ νομιζόμενα—Strab. 15, 1, 66 τὸν
δ᾽ ἄλλον ἐμπιπράναι τον ἔχειν εἰσαὖθις ἐργάζεσθαι καὶ μὴ ἀργὸν εἶναι. Arrian.
Λιοχ. 2, 21, 8.-Diod. 17, 42, 4 παρ' ὀλίγον ἦλθον τοῦ πάντες ἀπολέσθαι. Gr.
Urk. Berlin 164 († II-III) 24, 27 паракarŵ σe hdŋ worè neîσai avтdy toŶ
ἐλθεῖν. Acta Petri ot Pauli 183, 1 οἱ τοπάρχαι ἐφύλαττον τοῦ πιάσαι καὶ
ἀποκτεῖναι αὐτόν. Acta Xanth. 59, 26 οὐκ οἶδα τοῦ εἰπεῖν.
23. In Ʌ prose this loose infinitive of design is found: 12 times in
Thucydides (in Lysins), 6 in Demosthenos (besides 6 in the spurious writings),
3 in Plato, and 5 in Xenophon. These authors use for it more frequently veka
τοῦ (chiofy the philosophers), ὑπὲρ τοῦ (orators), and ἐπὶ τῷ. Thucydides
however uses only once everа TOû, 9 times ènì r [1. 34, 1; 38, 1 (tor); 70,5;
74, 3; 121, 5 (bis). 3, 42, 51, against 12 times simple roû. (FBirkloin in MSchanz
vii. or.) Also Polybios in his first five books usos roû 6 times, all negative.—
'Of the NT writers John, in consequence of his decided prodilection for iva
[supra 12, c], makes no more use of this construction than of els ró, either in
his Gospel or his Epistle. Matthew employs it often, but Lnke the most
frequently and with the most varied application (25 times in the Gospel and
about as often in the Acts). In Paul's and the other opistles, it recodes some-
what before the other final constructions with els Tó. In Mark and tho
Rovolation wo are almost in doubt whether it occurs.' AButtmann 266.–
Seo also 2077.
3. T-B TIMES.
24. The subsequent T-B vicissitudes of the substantival infinitive.
cannot be traced step by step. This much however is certain, that
it lingered through B times. Its striking frequency at least chiefly
-
578
APP. VI.—INFINITIVE SINCE A TIMES. [24–26.
in the simple genitive (supra 23), or with a preposition, especially in the
combinations εἰς τό, ἐν τῷ, μετὰ τό, διὰ τό, πρὸ τοῦ, ὑπὲρ τοῦ, περὶ τοῦ
shows that it was a favourite mode of expression, particularly among
writers trained in Biblical diction.
►
Among many others, compare Apophth. 140 a îλev 8 ½λos eic tò dûvai.
ib. ο ἐν δὲ τῷ ὑποστρέφειν ἡμᾶς, et alibi. Eus. Alex. 365 a, etc.
Narr.
Josephi 2, 4 mì tỏ miáσai aútúv, etc. Leont. Neap. V. J. 1,.11 eic tò pœτíÇew.
2, 5 εἰς τὸ δεῖξαι καὶ . . . ἀναδειχθῆναι καὶ . . . διοδεῦσαι καὶ ἐμφράξαι. 3, 9
εἰς τὸ δύνασθαι. 4, 2 (ἐπί τό, ἐν τῷ. 11, 20 σπεύδομεν του γενέσθαι. ἐκ τοῦ
25, 22; EN TO 45, 16. 45, 17. 86, 1. 57, 11.-Malal. 7, 9. 18, 9. 35,
5. 50, 13. 53, 18. 56, 2. 80, 6; 15. 87, 23. 229, 2. 243, 5. 440, 11 кeλeúσas TOŶ
δοθῆναι. 440, 20. 440, 2 δηλώσας αὐτῷ τοῦ μὴ δέξασθαι. 463, 1. 467, 4 et passim.
Theoph. 43, 16 προετρέψατο δὲ αὐτὸν καὶ τοῦ γενέσθαι σύνοδον ἐν Σαρδικῇ. 71,
6 ἐξωπλίζετο το κατελθεῖν. 216, 9 παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν τοῦ εἶναι αὐτὸν σύμμαχον.
ib. 21 πρὸς τὸ ἐκχοηθῆναι καὶ βοηθῆναι. ib. 23 παρέδωκεν Ἰουστινιανὸς τοῦ
ψάλλεσθαι, et passim. Porph. Adm. 132, 6 δέδοικα τοῦ μὴ παρ' ἡμῶν κατάδηλον
γενέσθαι. 268, 14 παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν πολλὰ τοῦ ἡσυχάσαι καὶ παραχωρήσαι
avтoîs To птaîoμa. (Cp. EASoph. Lex. p. 45 f.)
25. But whether the belief generally held that the articular infinitive
was popular with the masses rests on firm ground is very question-
able. For all evidence points to the probability that it had retreated
from the common speech with the close of T. At least it is uncommon
in St. John (cp. supra 23"), scarce in the unlearned papyri and inscrip-
tions of the B period, disputable in M popular compositions, and totally
absent from N speech. This is moreover indirectly borne out by the
parallel spread of abstract nouns (neuters in -μa and -tov, masculines
in -uós, and feminines in -ois and oia) which ever since H increase
in proportion as the articular infinitive retreats (1021. 2063), thus in-
dicating that the latter was being superseded by the above nouns.
It will be further remembered that the substantival force and form of
the articular infinitive (rò ypúder)—as it was distinctly conceived
since T-and the absence in it of inflection and endings, rendered
it odd and foreign to the genius of the Greek language, which
at no time admitted of a noun or verb without inflectional proper-
ties (2063). The articular infinitive, therefore, could not resist any
longer the tendency of the time, whether it was conceived as a noun
or as a verb. For as a noun it had no case-endings or plural form;
as a verb, it was still more indefinite, since it indicated neither
person, number, nor even precise time (supra 2). Under such con-
ditions and limitations, it naturally could not outlive long the verbal
or anarthrous infinitive, but had to make room for its analysis to tò vá,
as: Spaun. 143 οὐ βούλεσαι τὸ νά το φανερώσης. Callim. 863 πρὸς τὸ Νά
το δηλώσῃ. 2491 πικρὸν ἡγούμην τὸ νὰ ζῶ. (2072.)
26. All instancos adduced to prove the existence of traces of the infinitive
in N speech point to the influence of scholastic mannerism. For examples
like το φαγεῖ, τὸ φιλεῖ, τὸ πρεπεῖ, τὸ ἔχει, τὸ λέγει, τὸ ἰδεῖ, τὸ πιεῖ, τὸ φανεί,
Tò λúrei nai Tò désa, current in N popular speech and commonly cited
as rolics of the substantival infinitivo, rost on mero fallacy. Some of
them are regular substantives, some finito verbs fossilized to substantivos.
[4] Such ancient instances us : ἡ περὶ (sc. πρόθεσις), τῆς περί, τὸ ἄλφα, τοῦ
άλφα («p. N ή άλιφα. Η βῆτα, 131], δ καὶ (se. σύνδεσμος), τοῦ καί, and all other
articular or substantivizod particlos (1221 ff.), or foreign (Hebrow) namos liko
Αδάμ, Ἰακώβ (ep. "Αδαμος Αδάμης, Ιώσηπος, 218), provo nothing to the contrary,
since they woro more tochnical and religious terms, alion to popular spooch.
579
Pp 2
26-28.] APP. vi.
-INFINITIVE SINCE A TIMES.
Thus rd payeî,'cooked food,' 'dish,' is a normal abbreviation of the ancient
φαγίον (Apophth. 408 Β ὅσα ἐποιήσατε φαγία.—τὸ φαγίν as early as Cyrill. Scyth.
V. S. 283 c), of which also a compound τὸ προσφάγιον, ' anything eaten with
bread,' 'by-meat' (the German Zukost), occurs even in the NT John 21, 5;
also in Moschion 55, 26; Hippol. Haer. 476, 42: Pallad. 1131 c; cp. Moeris
251 ὄψον Αττικῶς, προσφάγιον [v. 1. -φάγημα] Ελληνικῶς), and is still common
in the form το προσφάγι ; so too αποφάγι, usually in the plural form ἀποφάγια,
scraps,' 'odds and ends.' Hence the current spelling paycî should be
given up for the correct φαγί. Similar to φαγὶ is the case of τὸ φιλί (not
φιλα) kiss, though φιλίον has not yet been noted, as far as I know, in
ancient texts. But that both payì and pıλì are real and normal substantives,
appears also from the fact that they are declined like regular diminutives
(τοῦ φαγιοῦ, τοῦ φιλιοῦτὰ φαγιά, τὰ φιλιά-τῶν φαγιῶν, τῶν φιλιών.) Were
they infinitivos, they would remain indeclinable. (See also the following
section 27.)
เ
1
27. As to the remaining instances, cited above, τὸ ἔχει (also in the
plural rà exe), 'what one has,'' possessions,' 'property' (German Habe);
τὸ ἰδεῖ, looks᾽; τὸ φανεῖ, appearancos'; τὸ λέγει “what ono says,'
statemont, account (Aussage); τὸ λύσει καὶ τὸ δέσει, ' unlimited power,
carte blanche;-they are one and all simple relative clauses gradually
crystallized to substantivos, τὸ here being a post-positive articlo (6o7. 1438).
Thus τὸ ἔχει = (ἐκεῖνο) ὃ ἔχει, τὰ ἔχει = (ἐκεῖνα)
(ἐκεῖνα) ἃ ἔχει, τὸ λέγει
ἔχει, τὸ λέγει = (ἐκεῖνο)
ὃ λέγει, τὸ ἰδεῖ—writo τὸ ἰδῇ - ὃ ἂν ἴδῃ (for the accont see above 19) τὸ
πιῇ (not πιει) = ὃ ἂν πίῃ, τὸ φανῇ [more commonly ὅ,τι φανῇ].So too τὸ
λύσῃ καὶ τὸ δέσῃ is identical with the more common ὅ,τι λύσῃ καὶ ὅ,τι
δέση (always used personally, ὅ,τι λύσω καὶ ὅ,τι δέσω, ὅ,τι λύσης καὶ ὅ,τι
δέσης, etc. ep. τὴν ἀγαπῶ = τὴν ἀγαπητικήν μου, i.o. ἐρωμένην, whence ἡ
ἀγαπῶ = ἡ ἀγαπητική μου). Analogous to these crystallized constructions are
some substantival imperatives (that is again a finite verb) occurring since
T', as: Tð áváßa Epiph. Mon. 272 A), now Tò ȧvéßa (1222), 'going up,' TÙ
κατάβα (Porph. Cer. 495, 8), now το κατέβα, coming down, τὸ διάβα
(Prodr. 4, 114, so still now) (passing, EGeorg. Θαν. Ρόδου 84 ἀπὸ τὸ πὲ καὶ
κλάψε ; 531 'ς ς τὸ πέσε καὶ τὸ γεῖρε ;τὸ φάγε, food, τὸ πιέ, drink, τὸ
ἅμε κ' ἔλα, go-and-return, τὸ δῶσε καὶ πάρε, give-and-take, etc. [1]
>
C
28. For T with fut. subj. or with past indic. in the sense of a temporal
participle, see 1795.
The only caso, as far as I know, bearing real resemblanco to an infinitivo
occurs in a popular distich at Siphnos (which I owo to my friend Dr. JValetta,
a native of that island): ἐξώφλησ᾽ ἀπ' τὸν ἔρωτα κ' ἤσπισα τὰ χαρτιά του, | οὔτε
τὸ ἰδεῖν τον θέλω πλειὰ οὔτε τὴν ὁμιλιά του.
580
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
All figures refer to the sections, in particular 01-033 to the Introduction, 1–1157
to the Morphology, and 1158-2170 to the Syntax. App. refers to the
Appendicos.
References in square brackets [] point to the footnotes.
-
Double-accented words are used either way, as ταχύτής=ταχύτης οι ταχυτής,
Ν φιλιά = φιλία or φιλιά, κλείω = κλείω or κλειῶ, κακία = κάκια, κακία, κακιά.
For other explanations see p. xiv.
N.B.
For the sake of convenience and perspicuity, contracted verbs are given
here mostly in the open form of the present indicative.
A, a, origin of, 2 f., 32.
forms of, 2, 9.
â
å rom a(y), 150b, 155º.
a' (= 1), 620.
(=1000), 645.
a-, collective or intensive,
1104, 1131 f.
sound of, 9, 32; dignity,a
of, 25 [1] a & d.
frequent in dialects, app.
ii. 7.
a, provective, 130.
4, 23 φωνήεν προτακτικόν,
19.
a, conf. with ai, 46 ff.,
46 ff., with
E, ib.
- becomes at, 29 f., App.
ii. 9.
for al, 47.
alternates with 7, 167.
its quantity in Plato,
App. ii. 8 [1].
a 'long' euphonious, 25
[1] a.
à-, prothetic, 129.
A-, N-, privative, 1104,
1129 f.
A-, augment in Sanskrit,
714b.
d-, augmented to 7-, 7141.
a-, dropped, 134.
26 ff.; due to Tivá, etc.,
in verbs, App.
ib. 25;
iii. 28.
-a, elided, 141.
-a (1), in Ist decl., 238, 248,
253, 261, 262, 1023 f.
-a, fem. adj. in, 306.
frequent in fem., 338.
influence of nouns in,
248.
changes to -7, 2694, 310.
remains only before
-a-, short in penult, 494.
vowels & p, 2694; always
-a-, thematic, 758 b, 784; in popular speech, 270.
extended to all persons, -a, pure changes to -7, 310.
796 f.
-A, in accus. sing., 328, 330;
lengthened to -77- in
App. iii. 12 b.
contr. verbs, 825, 838-|-a, in accus. & gen., 535.
845.
-a, analogical suffix in N,
535.
etc., 829 f.; in P-N, -a, transferred from accus.
830.
to nom., 338.
-a-,
a=compensated a, 29 f., -a-, replaced by -n- in Saw,
|-a-, fáw,
App. ii. 10, 14 3.
A & ǎ, interchanged, 168.
a, €, o, interchanged, 167.
A & H, interchanged, 167.
A, 0, e, interchanged, 167.
å for (el, ¿dv) äv, 1488, 1966,
1770, 1771 ft., App. iii.
20 e, 23, 26.
λάχῃ καί, 1717, 1772.
a for άλφα, 9.
-a-, in -páw, -cáw, etc., 839 f. | -a (Tó), in nanies of letters,
-a-, epenthetic, 383.
gd.
-a-,
from -- in verb stems -a, in neuter pl., 328; short,
(τρέπω ἐτράπην), 921.
&-H- in verb stein, 924.
compositional, 1106,
-A-,
11 10.
-a, protective, App. iii. 25,
293.
-a, in Doric gen.
? 277.
-, in dual, 2692.
-ă, voc. of masc. in (-7)ns,
279.
581
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
-4, verb ending in
(έφερα, είδα),
801bi.
G-N|ἀγάγας, 9963.
ἄγαγε, 9963.
794,
for ov in Ist person,
794 f., 801bi.
-a for -ws in adverbs, 522.
-A from δά, 575.
-a, intensive in N, 575; in
demonstr. pron., 575;
weakened, 576.
-q, spurious diphthong, r9 b.
in inscriptions repre-
sented by AI, 20º.
long, 20.
-4, in dat. of ist decl., 262.
4 +4=a, 146, 148 f., 285.
a+al = a, 146, 150 c.
a+¤=α, 146, 150 c, 826.
A + €1 = q, 826.
a,
A+ H = a, 826.
4 + H =q, 826.
a + i = a, 146, 150 d.
a + 0 =α, 146, 150 a.
a,
1+0=ω, 826.
^ + 01 = @, 826.
a+oy =α, 146, 150 b.
ΟΥ a,
A+UY=w, 826.
A+w=α, 146, 150 a.
1 + ω πω, 826.
ἀάατος, 124.
αμβρόται, 30.
ἀαμβρόταν, 30.
λαμπέχει, 30.
Αβαεόδωρος, 19".
ἀβάκιον, 10380
άβαξ, 1038.
ἀβαρής, 1140.
άβατος, ἡ, 292.
άβαφος, 1151.
ἀββᾶ (τόν), App. iii. 22 c.
αββαδας (τούς), 290.
ἀββάδες, οἱ, 289.
ἀββάδιον, τό, 29o.
ἀββαδόπουλον, 1041.
ἀββαδόπουλος, 1041 [1].
αββάδων (τῶν), 290.
ἀββᾶς, 287.
ἀβδέλλα, 130.
ἄβε for ave, 51.
Αβιάνιος, 51
•
᾿Αβιδιανός, 51.
᾿Αβίδιος, 51.
Αβιος, 51.
᾿Αβίτος, 5 Ι.
ἄβλαβος, 430, 1151.
'Αβραάμ, Αβράμ, 148.
᾿Αβράμ, Αβραάμ, 148.
αβράμηλο, 130.
αβρωνιά, 130.
άβω, αξω, 875.
ου
ἄγαγον for ἄγαγε, 122, 9963.
ἀγάγουσιν, ἄχρις οὗ, 779.
ἀγάγω, 996..
ἀγαγών, 9963.
ἀγάγωσιν, 9963.
ἀγαθεῖ τύχει, 26, 28 b.
ἀγαθῇ τύχῃ, -θεῖ τύχει, 28 6.
᾿Αγαθίας, 283.
ἀγαθοεργός, 1113.
'Αγαθοκλή (ω), 432 a, App.
iii. 15.
᾿Αγαθοκλή (του), 278.
'Αγαθοκλῆς, 431.
ἀγαθός, 441, 505; in com-
par., 5011, 504".
adverb of, 517.
ἀγαθὸς περί τινα, 1639.
ἀγαθουργός, 13.
ἀγαθῶς, 517.
ἀγαθώτερος, -ώτατος, 504
&
[2], 505.
ἀγαλλιάομαι + infin., 2128.
ἄγαμαι, 9744, 996, 1004 f.
constr., 1332 f.
Αγάμεμνον (ω), 257, 353.
ἄγαν for superl., 490, 515.
ἅγανα (σαγήνην), 84.
ἀγανακτέω τινί, 1335, 1355 ;
ἐπί τινα, 15834; κατά
τινος, 1596.
+ part., 2128.
+ el, 1947, 2129 ff.
+ ὅτι, 2129 1.
αγαπάω, 869, 1853 f.
+ part., 2128.
+εi, 1947, 2129 ff.
+ ὅτι (διότι), 2129 f.
ἀγαπαω, 862 [2].
ἀγαπίζω, 869, 1096.
ἀγαποῦντες, 850.
ἀγαπούντων, 850.
ἀγαπῶ, ἡ & τήν, App. vi. 27.
ἀγαπῶν, μᾶλλον -, 510.
ἀγαστέρα, ἡ, 386.
ἀγγειό”, 1035.
Αγγελικώ, ή, 414.
ἀγγέλλω, 892, 895.
constr., 2135 Π.
ἀγγέλοι for ἄγ-, 294.
-άγγι", 1038.
ἄγε becomes (ε) ᾶ,
155°, 1915.
+ subj., 1913.
ἀγείστω (ἀγέσθω), 177.
αγελάδα, ή, 364.
ἀγελάς, 364.
ἀγέννητος, 1130.
ἀγέρας, αέρας, 155.
1500,
ἄγετε (ἄετε), άϊντε, 155%
9963, 1915.
ἄγετε + subj., 1913.
ἄγγελος, 57.
ἀγήσχα, 996, .
ἀγηόχασι, 9963.
ἀγήρχεν, 9963.
ἀγήρως, 1147.
῾Αγία Τριάδα, ἡ, 658.
ἁγιασμός, 1020.
ἅγιος, 155 b.
ἀγκαλὰ καί, 1994, 2156.
ἀγκινάρα, 130.
ἀγκομαχώ, 1155.
'Αγκυρανός, 1ο78.
ἀγκώθην for θη, App. iii.
20 α.
ἀγνοέω, 1140; ἀγνοεῖσθαι
παρά τινι, 1636.
ἀγνοίᾳ ποιεῖν τι, 1387.
ἄγνος ἀγνός, App. ii. 16 [6].
ἄγνυμι, 9431, 9962.
ἀγνωμονεῖν τι, 1457.
ἀγνώς, δ & ἡ, 439, 476.
ἄγνωτος, 439.
ἀγξηράνῃ, App. i. 16 a.
ἄγονσα, App. ii. 10.
ἀγοράζω, 868.
intr., 1456.
constr., 1338 ff.
ἔν τινι, 1563.
ἀγόρακα, 718.
ἀγόρακας, 718.
ἀγορανόμος, 1o6.
ἀγόρασα, 718.
ἀγοράσατε for ἠγ-, 718.
ἀγοράσετε, imprt., 813.
ἀγορασμένον, 718.
ἀγορεύω, 996 80
ἄγοσα for ἄγουσα, App. ii. 1o.
ἀγουρίτσης, 1040 0 0.
ἄγουρος, 155.
ἀγριαπιδου, 1146.
ἀγριολαιά, 1112.
ἀγριόχοιρος, 1144.
Αγριπήσιος, 430.
Αγρίππα (του), 277.
ἄγροικος, 465, 492.
ἀγρόμενοι, App. i. 16 α.
ἀγρόπολις, 59 0.
ἀγρύπνου (του), App. i. 16.
ἄγχι, in compos., 112o f.
ἀγχίμαχος, 1120.
άγω, 733, 97, 9963.
ὑπὸ τὸν ζυγόν, 1692.
- intrans., 1455 α.
ἄγομαι γυναῖκα, 1470.
-άγω fur -άω, 863.
ἄγωμε, ἄωμε, με, 155,
996g.
582
Ι. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ayor,' with,' 2161.
ἄγων,
ἀγών, δ, 375.
ἀγωνιάω, trans., 1457.
ἀγωνιέσαι, 858.
ἄγωσα τον ἄγουσα, App. ii. 1o.
ἄδακρυς, 1147.
Αδάμ, Αδαμος,
2184.
Αδάμης,
ἀδαμαντίνις for -οις, 44.
Αδάμης, 'Αδάμ, 218.
Αδαμος, Αδάμ, Αδάμης,
218b
ἄδεια, άδια, 155 α.
αδειειαν, 30.
ἀδελφιδός, 321.
ἀδελφιδοῦς, 313.
ἀδερφικός, 1070.
ἀδερφοί, 187.
αδερφός, 187.
-âsec (oi), 289.
ἀείζωος, 1 1 20.
ἀεικίνητος, 1120.
ἀει όλοιοις, 30.
ἀειπάρθενος, 15o d,
1132.
1120,
ἀέλιος, ἄλιος, ἅλιος, ἥλιος,
App. ii. 14 A.
ἄεντε, ἄιντε (ἄγετε), 9963.
ἀέραν (τόν), App. iii. 6. 7.
αέρας, δ, 379, App. iii. 12 b.
ἀεργός, ἀργός, 15o c.
ἀέρδην, ἄρδην, 150 c.
¿épes, oi, 379.
ἀέριοι, -ροι, 148.
αέροι, ἀέριοι, 148, 379.
ἄερσα, 126.
Δέσχρων άγετε), άϊντε, 155,
>
ἄετε
996g.
ἀετός, αἰετός, 20°, 1555.
ἄδηλον ὄν, as accus. absol., Αλώνι, 51.
ἄθυμος, 494;
1667 a.
πρός τι,
AI, al, proper diphthong,
19 a.
sound of, 24, 26 f., 30,
46-50, 717, 723;
= ä, 48 f.
why now pronounced
as e, 19", 32d.
why rendered in Latin
by ae, 19".
short, 20.
'long,' 20.
>
for a, 29 f., App. ii. 9
& 14.
in elision, 141".
resolved, 32.
conf. with a, 20, 322,
48; with €, 322, 48 Η.
reduced to a, 20°, 47,
891.
how changed to e, 32b,
2143.
in P-B, 2145.
-á▲нC, 1028 f.
"Αιδης, 283, 298.
άδια, άδεια, 155 α.
ἀδιάτροπαι for -ποι, 310.
ἀδικάω, 748, 854.
ἀδικέω, 784, 854, 1478,
1882 f., 1885.
as pf., 1842 f.
+ part, 2132 f.
ἀδικηθήσομαι, 1885.
ἀδικήσομαι, 1478, 1882,1885.
ἀδικία, 271, 1020.
άδικος, 465, 1140, 1149.
περί τινα, 1639.
ἀδολέσχης, 430.
ἀδύλεσχος, 430.
ἄδουλος, 1130.
c.
'Adpavoúτons, 1040 D b.
αδράχνω, 10001·
ἁδρύν, App. iii. 9 e.
αδρύς (αδρός), 402, 496.
ἁδρύτερος, 496.
ἀδυνασία του -τία, 181.
ἀδυνασία, 1020.
Fra..., 51.
ἀρταῖσι, 51.
ἀρτόν, 51.
ἀρτύς, 51.
ἀστοῦ, 51.
ἀξυτάρ, 51.
|
ἀηδής, 1147.
-ázw, 856, 1091 ff., 1095 f.
ἀηδίζετο, 717.
λήρ, 375.
ἀθάνατος, 465.
Αθαναέα, 19".
'Αθενας, 26, α.
ἀθέω ἀνθέω), 194, 857.
'Aoŋvâ, app. ii. 14 a.
frou & θεονύα, 41.
Αθηνάα, ναία, 20.
Αθηναγόρας, 283.
Αθήναζε, 434.
>
Αθηναία, -νάα, 200.
Αθηναικός, 48.
Αθηναις, 48.
Αθήναιος, Αθήναις, 299.
Αθηνος, 49.
᾿Αθήνηθεν, 434
Αθήνησι, 434.
ἀδύνατον ὄν, as accus. absol., 'Αθθίς, 56, 125, 171.
2143.
in P-B, 2145.
ἀδύνατος, 1129).
εδω, άσομαι, 998.
αε,
Ae, predecessor of al, 19";
leads to Latin ae,
sounded as a ? 48 f.
ἄε (from ἄγε) ά, 150, 155.
Ανθρα, 19".
Ačowv, 19ª.
ἀεί, 200, 2001 [1].
in compos., 1120 f.
ἀθλητής, 283.
ἀθλιέστερος, 500.
ἄθλιος, in emprt., 500.
Αθουσ(σ)α, 1067.
ἀθρόος, 441, 1131.
ἀθρωπ᾽ ἄνθρωποι), 210.
ἀθρώπακας, δ, 1042.
άθρωπάκι", 1038.
ἀθρωποι του ἄ-, 29.4.
ἀθρώποι for -θρώ-, 295.
ἀθρώπους, 194.
ἀθυμέω τινί, 1388.
32d
repl. by η in Boeotian,
48.
& Latin ai or ae, 19ª,
53.
- leads to a, 32d ff.
2. Al, 4, spurious diph-
thong, 19, 31 ff.; genesis
of, 32 tl.
ai, article, 250; in N, 560;
in Otranto, 560.
atonon, 98 a.
at for ŵ, 251, 1253 f.
ai, repl. by au, 48.
αι,
in augment, 717.
augmented to -, 714.
mistaken for augment
(E-), 723.
- dropped, 723.
-al-, reduced to -a-, 891.
-at, elided, 141.
-a (ol, al), in 1st decl., 262.
ropl. by -es, 267.
-al, in verb leads to 4αισαν,
792.
-a, long in 2ndary subj.,705.
-aía (1), in N -aιá, 271.
Αἰαντώ, ἡ, 414.
Αἰαντῶς (τῆς), 414.
αἶγα οι αἴγα, ή, in N', 338,
347.
αἶγα (τήν & ἡ), 338, Αpp.
iii. 12 b.
* & &, App. iii. 15.
alyav (Týv), 230", App. iii.
σα.
Alyîdos (Tîs), 386.
583
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
Αιγιναίος for -ναίους, App. ii. | -αίρνω, from -αίνω, 903.
10.
αιδέομαι, 840, 1004 f.
αἰδεσθήσομαι, 840, 1885.
αἰδέσομαι, 1885.
"Αιδης, 283, 298.
αἰδιος, 44.
αἰδώς, ἡ, 410.
aieí, ¿eí, 20º, 2061 [1].
-ΑΙΕΝ, becomes -αισαν
-οισαν, 792.
αἰετός, ἀετός, 20°.
αἰθαλοῦσσα, 106.
αιθήηρ, 30.
αιθήρ, 375.
alt for al, 48.
αἴρω, 895, 9965.
intr., 1455 a.
-A1c, dat. pl. rst decl.,
262.
-alc or -es, in nom. & acc.
pl. ist decl., 267.
-A1c (δ), from -αιος, 299.
ΟΙ
-AICAN for -ειαν, 792.
αισθανείς, 996.
αλλος, άλλος, Αpp. ii. 14 B.
αἷμα, γαλμα, 155, 348, 368.
αἱματόω, ματώνω, 723.
Αιμιλία, 35.
-AIN, in dual of 1st decl.,
262.
ΣΑΙΝΑ (ή), 380.
Λινέας, -νείας, 200
Ανεᾶται, 20.
Αινειάδες for - δαι, 267.
Αἰνείας, -νέας, 20.
Αἰνειᾶται, 20.
aivéoa oav, 792, 805.
αἰνέω, 843.
Αἰνήου, 37.
äïvre, 155º, 9963, 1915.
-αίνω, meaning of, 1o89.
in present, 899, 900.
has -ava in aor., 893.
for -άνω, -ήνω, 400.
leads to -αίρνω, 903.
from -ivw, 902.
I. -aloc, -aos, 20º, 1072.
2. -aîoc, used for adv., 1183.
3. -aîoc, -quaíos, 1056.
4. -aîoc, adj. in, 1072 f.
adj. & subst. in, 1081 f.
cnipr., 497.
5. -a10c (in proper names),
shortened to aις, 399.
6. -aidc,ethnic,10314, 1082.
αλπαρήγειν for ἐπ-, 49.
αιρεθῆ for -07, 20.
1. αἱρέω, 733, 9964; -ομαι,
1470.
& -ομαι, 1470, 1471.
τινά τινος, 1292.
2. αἱρέομαι, constr., 2087 ff.
τινά τι, 1284.
πρὸ πολλῶν, 1647.
+ infin., 2087, 2094 ff.
+ ἵνα, 2088.
αἱρῆσαι, 9964.
αισθανθείς, 996.
αἰσθανθήσομαι, 996.
αἰσθάνομαι, 996, 1001.
constr., 2133 ff.; with
gen., 1325 ff.
τί τινος, 1264.
αἰσθηθήσομαι, 996. .
αἰσθηνθέντες, 996
αἴσθησις, 395.
αἴσθομαι, 996, App. iv. 3.
Αισχίνης, 283.
αίσχιον, 502.
αἴσχιστος, 502.
αἰσχίων, αἴσχιον, 502.
αἰσχρὸν ἦν fur ἐστί, 1901.
αἰσχρὸν ὄν, as accus. absol.,
2143.
in P-B, 2145.
αἰσχρός, 503 ; cuprt., 502.
αἰσχρότατος, 502.
αἰσχρότερος, 502.
αἰσχυνθήσομαι, 1885.
αἰσχυνοῦμαι, 1885.
1. αἰσχύνω, 9967.
2. αἰσχύνομαι, constr., 2137
τινι, 1388.
1.
b;
+ part., 2128, 2137
'hesitate,' 2087 il.
αιτέω, 1485.
τινά τι, 1279.
-αίω (verbs in ), how con-
jugated, 701.
αιών, 374.
άκακος, 1130.
ἀκάματα, adv., 518.
ακαρι, τό, 303.
Lakac (8), 1043.
ἀκέομαι, 1001.
Ακέσιν, τό, App. iii. 7.
ἀκήκοα, 735, 848, 9968-
ἀκήκοαν, 9968.
-άKHC (8), 1029, 1040 B u.
-πουλος, 1041.
its fem. in -πούλα, 1041.
-άκι” (τό), 1038, 1040 Β α.
1. -áki(ON), 1029, 1037 ff.
genesis of, 1038".
superadded, 1038b f.
2. -AKION, 1037 ff., 1040 B.
-AKIOC, 1040 B.
-άκια (δ), 648 f., 1029, 1040.
its fem. in -πούλα, 1041.
ἀκλουθάω, 854.
ἀκμὴ for ἀγμή, 178.
ἀκμήν, ἀκόμη, 116.
ἀκμής, adj., 439.
ἄκμητος, adj., 439.
-ΆΚΝΙΟΝ (τό), 1037.
ἀκολουθέω, 854.
constr., 1245.
ἀκόμα, 116.
ἀκόμη, 116.
ἀκονάω, 869.
ἀκονίζω, 869.
ακοντίας, 283.
-λκος (δ), 1040 Β α.
b.-akóc, ethnic adj., 1076 f.
ἄκου for ἄκουε, 153.
ἀκούγει, ακούει, 155.
ἀκούγω (ἀκούω), 155, 860.
ἄκουε, ἄκου, 153.
ἀκούεις, ἀκοῦς, 153.
ἀκοῦμε, 996 4.
+ infin., App. vi. 12 De
[3].
+iva, App. vi. 16.
2. αιτέομαι, 1485.
airhoaro, 717.
αιτήσομαι, as pr., 1889.
αἰτία, ἡ, 1048; in N, 155 4;
τοῦ θανάτου (in N),
1.
2.
1293.
αἰτιάω, 1003.
αιτιάομαι, 1001, 1002.
τινά τινος, 1292 f.
αἴτιος, αἰτία, 1048.
αἴτιός τινος, 1292 f.
αἰτιτοίωσεν ? 823.
αἰφνίδια, adv., 518.
αἰχμαλώτευσα, 723.
αἰχμαλώτευσαν, 717.
αἰχμάλωτος, 1111.
ἀκοῦν, ἀκούουν, 148, 996.
ἀκούοντα, as adv., 823.
ἀκούουσι, subj., 779.
ἀκοῦς, ἀκούεις, 153, 996..
ἀκούσαις, -σας, App. ii. 14 Β.
ἀκούσαμεν, 750 1.
B.
ἀκούσας, σανς, App. ii. 14 1.
ἀκούσησθε, 779.
ἀκοῦσι”, 9964.
ἀκουσμένος, 996. .
ἀκούσομαι, 996..
ἀκούσω, 9964, 999.
ἀκούω, 448, 737, 860, 9964,
998.
- intr., 1456; — περί τινος,
1642.
584
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἀκούω, as pf., 1842 f.
constr., 2133 f., 2137 α.
+ gen., 1325 ff., 2137.
+ ὅτι, App. vi. 13 [1].
᾿Ακραγαντίνος, 1031 6, 1080,
ἀκρατής, 1140.
ἀκριβής, 425.
- leads to -βός, 440.
ἀκριβοδίκαιος, 1156, 1157.
ἀκριβός, 430, 440, 1058.
ἀκρίδα (τήν & ἡ), 338, App.
iii. 12 b.
|
ἄληθες, 257.
ἀληθεστέρως, 520.
ἄλλος ἄλλον, 550, 1476 f.
ἄλλος-καλός, 50.
ἀληθής, 425 ; leads to -θός, άλλος καὶ ἄλλος, 513.
430, 440.
ἀληθινός, 1058.
ἀληθύς for -θής, 430, 440.
ἀλήλειπται, 735.
ἀλήλιμμαι, 735.
ἀλήλιφα, 735.
ἄλλοσε, 434.
ἀλλοτεσινός, 1ο63.
αλλοτινός, 1063.
ἄλλου (τοῦ), 578.
ἀλησμονῶ, with gen., 1295. ἀλλωνῶν (τῶν), 579.
ἀλθαίνω, 900.
ἁλιεύς, 403.
330, App.
ἀλίο for ὀλίγο, 155 d.
iii. 6 a.
- άλιον (τό), 1037.
Ακρίκολος, 59 c.
ἀκρίδαν (τήν),
ἀλλουνοῦ (τοῦ), 578.
ἄλλων (τῶν), 579.
ἄλλως, adv., 516.
αλμυρήθρα, 1026.
ἀλόγατα for ἄλογα (τά), 297.
ἀλογέω + accus., 12441.
Ακρίτα (του), 277.
ἀκροᾷ, 773.
ἀκροάζομαι, 868.
ἀκροάομαι, 839, 868, 1001.
+gen., 1325 ff.
ἀκροᾶσαι, 773.
ἀκρόπολις, 59 δ, 395, 1144.
ἄκρος, constr., 1239.
ἀκτουάριος, 1040 Δ.
ἀκτουάρις, 1040 Α.
᾿Ακύλα (του), 277.
ἀκυλάντως, 36.
᾿Ακυλοῖνος, 44.
ἄκων, 457; as part., 2142 c.
Αλαεύς, 20°, 47.
ἀλαζών, ὁ & ἡ, 476.
Αλαιεύς, 20, 47, 148.
ἀλακάτα, ἠλακάτη, 29.
ἀλαλάζω, 872.
ἅλας, τό, 421.
ἀλαφρύς, 496.
ἀλαφρύτερος, 496.
Αλβανός, 187.
αλγεινός, its emprt., 504·
ἀλγενήσιος, 430.
αλγέω τινί, 1388.
ἐπί τινι, 1582 d.
ἄλγιον, 5048·
άλγιστος, 5048.
ἀλγίων, ἄλγιον, 5048
ἀλέθω, 8653
ἀλείφω, 735; & mil., 1469.
άλειψα, 717.
ἀλέκτορας, δ, 206.
αλεκτόρου του ἀλέκτορος, 296.
Αλεξανδρίνος, 103, 1080.
Αλέξανδρος becomes Αλε-
fâs, 287.
Αλεξαντρινός, 1ο8ο.
Αλεξάς, from 'Αλέξανδρος,
287.
ἀλεστικά, τά, Ιο7Ι.
ἀλέτρι, τό, 126.
'Αλεύς, Αλαιεύς, 148.
ἀληθεῖς (οἱ, αἱ, τούς, τάς), 332.
ἄλιος, ἅλιος, ἥλιος, App. ii. ἄλογον, τό, 297.
14 Λ.
ἅλις for ἅλις, 84.
Αλισάβη, -βα, Ελισάβετ,
218.
ἁλίσκομαι, 9969, 98010
constr., 2133 ff.; + rivos,
1292.
ἄλιφα (τὸ & ἡ), 9, 131, 187.
ἀλίως for ἀλλοίως, 032.
᾿Αλκιβιάδης, 283, 298.
᾿Αλκίμαχος, 201.
*Αλκμάν, App. 14 Λ.
ảλλá, 1731 ff., 1736, 1744.
repl. by καί, 1713.
· μήν, 1700 [1].
ἀλλαγῆναι, App. i. 15 .
ἀλλάζω, 873, 880.
ἀλλάξιμα, τά, 371.
ἀλλαξίματα, τά, 371.
ἀλλαξίματος (τοῦ), 371.
ἀλλαξιμάτων (τῶν), 371.
ἀλλάξιμο", τό, 371.
ἀλλαξίμων (των), 371.
ἀλλᾶς, δ, 287.
ἀλλάσσω, -ττω, 878 1, 880,
992.
ἄλλες for ἄλλας (τάς), 332.
ἀλλήλους, 549, 550: in
recipr. verbs, 1476.
repl. by ἑαυτούς, 1410 f.
ἀλληνῆς (τῆς), 578 & [2].
-άλλιον (τό), 1037.
ἄλλο του -ον, τό, 539.
for
ἄλλοθεν, 434.
ἄλλοθι, 434.
ἄλλοι ἐκ οἱ ἀπό, 1312.
ἄλλοι ἄλλους, 550.
ἀλλοιῶς, 518;
becomes
ἀλίως, 032.
ἀλλοιωσείνη, 35.
άλλομαι, 99610, 1001.
ἄλλον ἕνα fur ἄλλο ἕν, App.
iii. 25.
ἄλλος, App. ii. 9, 14 B;
550.
539,
ἄλογος, 465.
ἁλοίην, 9969.
ἆλος, ἄλλος, App. ii. 14 Β.
ἁλοῦμαι, 99610
ἁλούς, 9964.
öλoxos, 1131.
ἅλτο, App. i. 160.
"Αλυ ποταμοῦ (του), 278.
ἀλυθινός, 35.
άλλυς for ἄλλους, 29 *.
αλφα (τύ), aleph, 2, 9 f., 131,
1361, App. i. 16b; be-
comes ἄλιφα (ή),9,131.
ἀλφάβητος, ὁ & ἡ, 9.
in N alphavitos, 24-
ἀλφάδιον, ἀρφάδι, 131.
ἁλω, 9969.
ἁλῶναι, 996.
Αλωπεκονήσιοι, 125.
Αλωποκονήσιοι, 125.
ȧλŵs, 9969.
ἀμ' for ἀνά, App. i. 16.
ἀμ' βωμοῖσι, Αpp. i. 16 a.
ἀμ' μέσον, App. i. 16 α.
ἀμ' πέλαγος, App. i. 16 a.
ἄμ for ἄν, 195.
ἂμ μή for ἂν μή, 195.
ἅμ' for ἅμα, 2, which see.
1. äµa, 'when,' 1779, 1792,
1999.
Gas soon as, 1794-
καί, 1714.
for
2. ἅμα for σύν, 1491, 1607,
1670, 1671 H.;
μετά, il.
+ dat., 1493, 1671 f.
+ gen., 1672 f.
+ part., 21.47.
conf. with μετὰ & σύν,
1607, 1670.
ἅμ' ἕψ, 1234.
ἅμ᾽ ἡλίῳ ἀνίσχοντι, 1234.
ἅμ' ἡμέρᾳ, 167.
ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, 1671.
ἅμα τινὶ ἕπομαι, 1671.
585
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἅμα τῷ θέρει, 1671.
ἅμα τῷ λόγῳ εἰποῦσα, 2149.
ἄμμος, ἡ & δ, 292, 292° ; in | ἀμώσω, 996183.
N, 2920.
ἀμαθής, 11502 5 beconies | ἀμνήμων, 469.
άμαθος, 430.
ἀμάθητος τῆς δουλειάς, 1295.
ἄμαθος for -θής, 430.
ἀμανιτάριν, τό, App. iii. 9 c.
ἁμαξήποδα, 37.
ἁμαρτάνω, 99611
περί τινα, 1639.
999.
+ part., 2132 f.
ἁμαρτηκέναι, γι.
ἁμαρτήσω, 9961
ἁμαρτία, in N, 155 c.
ἁμαρτοεπής, 1113.
ἀμάτι, τό, 130.
ἀμαυρὸς becomes μαῦρος, 447.
ἀμβάτης, App. i. 16 α.
ἄμβικος, δ, App. iii. 12.
ἄμβιξ, App. iii. 12.
ἀμβολάδην, App. i. 16 a.
ἀμβολάς, App. i. 16 α.
᾿Αμβρακιωτών, 61 [1].
ᾶμε, from ἄγωμεν, 155,
863, 996g.
—, τό, App. vi. 27.
ἀμέ οι ἀμμέ, 1982 f.
ἀμείβω, 875.
y
ἀμείνους, App. ii. 14 Λ.
Αμεινοκλῆν (τόν), 432 1,
App. iii. 6.
Αμεινοκλίας, 19.
ἄμεινον, 506 [1].
ἀμείνος, App. ii. 14 Α.
ἀμεινότερος, 506 & [r].
αμείνους, App. ii. 14 Λ.
ἀμείνων, ἄμεινον, 5041·
ἀμείνως, App. ii. 14 Α.
ἀμέλγω, ἀρμέγω, 143.
ἀμελέω, & pas8., 1462.
ἄμελος του -λής, 1151
AMEN, in G-N verbs, 801,i.
ἁμές, ἡμεῖς, Αpp. ii. 14. 1.
άμες, ἡμεῖς, Αpp. ii. 14. B.
ἀμή οι ἀμμή, 195, 1982.
ἀμήν & ἢ μήν, 1827, 2055 &
[2].
ἀμηρᾶδας (τούς), 290".
àµnpâdes, oi, 289, 290".
ἀμήτωρ, 375, 472, 1147.
ἀμήχανος, 465 ; -νός εἰμι for
-νόν ἐστι, 2083 f.
ἁμιλλάομαι, 1004 f.
αμισθί, 2001 [1].
Αμισός, Σαμψούς, 1554.
ἀμμέ (αμέ), 1982 f.
άμμες, App. ii. 9, 14 Β.
ἀμμή, 195, 1736, 1982 f.
ἄμμι, τό, 303.
ἄμμο, ή, 292.
ἀμπελᾶς, δ, 287.
ἀμπελοτέμνω, 1155.
ἀμπελοχώραφα, τά, 1156,
1157.
ἀμπέχω, 99638.
αμπίσχω, 99698 -
ἀμποδίζω, constr., 1317.
Αμπρακιώτις, 61 [1].
άμπω(γ)μένος, 996920-
ἀμπώθω, 996320-
αμπώνω, 990320
αμπώξω, 996380 -
ἀμπωσμένος, 996320 -
ἀμπώσω, 990320
ἀμπώτιδος (τῆς), App. i. 16.
ἀμπώχνω, 996320-
}
1. ấv (=¿áv, el), ' if,' 150 c,
629.
proclitic, 97 d.
frequency of, 1771.
becomes ἄ, 1771, App.
iii. 23.
- becomes ἄνε, 132,
∙1488, 1770, 1771 ff.
becomes νά, 1774.
2. åv (= ei), 'if,' constr.,
1967, 1970 ff., 1987.
in condit. clauses,
1966 f.
αμύγδαλον, μύγ, 134 C.
Αμύνανδρος becomes ᾿Αμυ- 3.
vâs, 287.
>
Αμυνας from 'Αμύνανδρος,
287.
Αμύντας, 283.
ἀμύνω, & mid. 1467.
ἀμφέξω, 99608·
ἀμφέρειν, App. i. 16 α.
αμφί, 1489, 1495 f.
repl. by περί, 1491.
extinct since H, 1592,
15935.
ἀμφιάζω, 937, 94414, 996 1.
ἀμφίβολα φωνήεντα, 17.
ἀμφιγνοέω, 1140.
ἀμφιδέ[ι]α, 201
ἀμφιδέξιν, 1040, App. iii. 7.
aµpré5w, 937, 94414", 99681.
ἀμφιέννυμι, 937, 944143
99681.
81·
& wid., 1467; ήμφίεσμαι,
as pres., 1868 f.
τινά τι, 1279.
ἀμφιεννύω, 99631.
αμφιεσθείς, 996 1.
αμφιέσομαι, 996ει·
Αμφικτιονες, 35.
Αμφικτύονες, 35.
ἀμφιτρής & Στρητος, 439.
ἀμφιφορεύς, ἀμφορεύς, 126.
| ἀμφιῶ, 99641 -
fut. of åµpiévvvµu, 94414
ἀμφοῖν, 634.
ἀμφορεύς, 126, 403.
ἀμφότεροι, preceded by
preceded by
article, 1214.
ἀμφότερος, δ, 1212.
άμφω, 634.
+ article, 1212.
αμώνω, 996 183
-
in temp. clauses, 1975.
for ὅταν, 1975.
for ei' whether,' 2054";
after verbs of emotion,
1948.
for condit. part., 2154.
ἄν, modal, 17oo, 1774·
conf. with condit. ἂν
οι ἐάν, 1774.
written ἐάν, 1774-
+ 2ndary subj., 1925 ff.
+ pres. or fut. subj.
for fut. ind., 1922, App.
iv. 12.
+pf., 1873.
mistaken for ἵνα, 1922.
repl. by ἤθελον, 1974;
by νά, 1008; by θά,
ib.; by kai, 1716.
omitted after εἶχον,
App. iv. 7.
ἂν δὲ μή, 1983.
ἂν εἶν(ε) καί, τητη.
àv ev(e) nai, 1717, 1770.
ἂν ἴσως και, 1717.
I. ἂν καὶ for emphatic ἄν,
1717.
2. av kal,' although,' 1993 a,
1994.
for concess. part., 2156.
ἂν καλὰ καί, 1994, 2156.
ἂν μή, 1731 f., 1736, 1982 f.
ἄν τε ἄντε, 1727 f.; with
καί, ib.
ἄν το”, for νά το", 543.
ἂν τύχῃ να or και, 1717,
1770, 1772.
àn- or 4-, privative, 1104,
1129 f.
-AN, gen. Lavos, in neuter
adj., 380.
-AN, accus. of 1st decl., 262.
-AN, verb ending in G-N,
801b, i.
-AN for -ασι", pf., 786.
586
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
-AN for ov in 2nd aor. pl., ἀνάδιος, ἐναντίος, 155 9.
787; in N, 788.
in imprf., 789.
-AN for ζοντο, 790.
-an for -alev in P-B, 805.
-AN in verb replaced by
Looav, 791.
*AN in aor. replaced by
-ασι", 793.
ává, as adv., 664.
ává, 1492, 1497 ff.
1500b.
+ accus., 1497 ff.
+ nom., 664.
+ gen. for accus., 150ο
repl. by πρὸς + accus.,
1658 α; by κατὰ τ᾿
accus., 1491, 1499; by
ἀπό, 663, 1491.
ἀνὰ δέκα, 6622.
ἀνὰ δύο παρθένοι, 664.
ἀνὰ εἰς ἕκαστος, 664.
åvà Ékatóv, 1497 b.
ἀνὰ κράτος, 1497 C.
ἀνὰ λόγον, 1497 0.
ἀνὰ μέσον, 1498, 1525, 1557·
ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέραν, 1497 0.
ἀνὰ πέντε, ἀνὰ ἑκατόν, 6622,
1497 b.
ἀνὰ στόμα ἔχειν, 1497 c.
ἀνὰ τέσσαρες, 664.
ἀνὰ τρεῖς, 664.
ANA- (unaccented), becomes
ἀνε- in N, 754 F.
ἀνάβα, τό, App. vi. 27.
ἀναβαίνω, in Ν, 753.
ἀνάβασις, retreats before
ἀνέβασμα, 369.
ἀνάβηκα, 753.
ἀναβιβάσομαι & βιβῶμαι,
99625 •
αναβιωθείς, 99620 -
ανάβλεμμα, τό, 1119.
ἀναγαλλιῶ, 755.
αναγελάω, 99635.
ἀναγίνωσκον τον ἀνεγ-, 7500.
αναγκάζω, constr., 2087 f.
+ ἵνα, App. vi. 16 ; - έσθαι
ταῦτα, 1266.
ἀναγκαῖον ἐστὶν + ἵνα, APF.
vi. 16 ; ἦν for ἐστί,
Igor.
App.
ἀναγκαῖος, 309.
ἀνάγκασα, 750 0.
ἀνάγκη (sc. ἐστέ), 1167 0.
ἀνάγκη ἐστὶ for -τέος, 1051.
αναγνώθω, 8659.
ἀναγογῆς (τῆς), 26, α.
αναδεδράμηκα, 996278 -
αναδεξιμαῖος, 1056.
ανάδιοξε μου, 754.
ἀνάδωμα, τό, 754.
ἀνάθεμα, 754.
ἄναιμος, 1147.
ἀναιρήσῃ, 9964.
ἀναίτιος, 309.
ἀνακαινίσαντο, 750 h.
ἀνακάτωνε, 853.
ανακεχωκότες, 996313.
ανακράζω, 917.
ἀνακτᾷ, 773.
ἀνακτᾶσαι, 773.
ἀναλαμβάνεσαι, 773.
·
ἀνάλισις, 35.
ἀναλίσκω, 99612
ἄναλκις, ΓΙΑ
ἀναλύω, 9962.
ἀναλύω (intr.), 1456.
ἀνάμελος, 1151.
ἀναμένω, 755.
ἀνάμεσα, 1498.
εἰς, 1315, 1525.
αναμεταξύ, 1498.
ἀναμιμνήσκω, 996100-
τινά τι, 1297-
άνανδρον (το) τον ανανδρία,
1050.
Ανανία (του), 277.
'Avavías, 283°.
ἀνάντια, 99679, 1597.
ἀναντινά, 1547.
| ἀναντιωθῶ, 99679·
ἀναντιώνομαι, 99670, 1006.
ἀνάξιος, 1130.
ἀναπαγώ, 996199-
ἀναπάηκα, 996199-
ἀναπαημένος, 996190 -
ἀναπαήσομαι, 996199-
ἀναπαύγομαι, 996199-
ἀναπαύομαι, 1486.
ἀναπαω, 996 ου
ávaπawσiv, 996199 ·
ἀνάπεσε, imprt., 813.
αναπεταννύω, 996207.
ἀναπέον, 996199-
199 *
ἀναπετάω, 996 07.
ἀναπεύ(γ)ομαι, 996190.
ἀναπεῦον, 996199-
ἀναπίπτομαι, 1459.
·
αναπνέγω, 996219-
αναπνέξω, 996 19
ἀναπνέψω, 996 19
ἀναπνέω, 996210
αναπνίξομαι, 996200-
ἀνάπτοιτο, 996200-
ἀναρίθμητος, ἀρίφνητος, 179.
ἀναρράπτω, 755.
ἀνασπάω, 755.
ἀνάσταιμα, 754-
ἀναστάντα, as adv., 823.
Αναστάσης, 283.
ἀναστενάζω, 873, 996 54-
ἀναστεναμένος, 996204
ἀναστοροῦμαι, with gen.,
1295.
Αναστροφή, 11o f.
ἀνασύρω, 755.
ȧvaoxýow, 99698-
ἀνατεθείκασι, 37.
ἀνατεθήκασι, 37.
ἀνατέλλω, 996207.
intr., 1456.
ἀνατελμάτου (του), 369.
ἀνατέταλκα, 996207-
ἀνατίθω, 959 αι.
ανατριχιάζω, 869.
ἀνατρίχιασα, 853°.
ἀνατριχιάω, 853, 869.
ἀναύω, 875; from ἐναύω,
723.
ἀναφαλαντίας, 283.
ἀναφερμένος, 996305.
ἀναφέρεται, 996293.
ἀναφέρνω, 903, 996305-
ἀνάφορος, 755.
ἀναφύρω, 993.
fut., 996305.
αναχασκίζω, 996310-
ἀναχωρήθην, 750 1.
ἄνδρα (τύν), 188.
ἄνδρα (τύν), 57.
ἀνδραγαθία, 1.
ἀνδράκι", 1038.
ἄνδραν (τόν), 330, App. iii.
6 d.
ἄνδρας, δ, 386.
᾿Ανδρέα (του), 277.
᾿Ανδρέας, 283.
ἀνδρεία, 271, 1048.
ἀνδρειάνταν (τόν), 330, App.
iii. 6 d.
ἀνδρεῖος, -ρεος, 20°.
ἀνδρεος, -ρεῖος, 20
άνδρες, 150 77.
ἀνδρίζομαι, 868.
ἀνδρόγυνα (τά), 1156.
ἀνδρίομαι, -ίζομαι, 868.
Ανδροκλέου for -ous, 432 c.
ἀνδρός (τοῦ), 131, App. i. 16 a.
Ανδροσθένου for -vous, 432 c.
ἄνε four ἂν ἐάν, εἰ), 132,
1488, 1770, 1771 tt,
App. iii. 24, 26; see av.
in condit. clauses, 1966.
λάχῃ καί, 1717, 1772.
τύχῃ νά or καί, 1717,
1772".
ANE-, in N verbs, 755-
ἀνέβα, τό, App. vi. 27.
ἀνεβάζω, 99625-
587
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἀνέβαινα, in N, 753, 755.
ἀνεβαίνω, 753, 755, 99623.
ἀνέβασμα, τό, 369, 753, 755.
ἀνεβασμός, δ, 753, 755.
ἀνέβηκα, 753, 755, 1875.
ἀνεβωκατεβαίνω, 1157.
ἀνεγαλλιῶ, 755·
ἀνεγειρα, 750 c.
ἀνεγελάω, 754.
ἀνέδια, 49.
ἀνεδιόχνει μου, 754.
ἀνήκοος, 1140.
ἀνήλισκον, 49612
ανήλωμα, τό, 753.
ἀνηλωμάτων, 753.
ἀνηλώσας, 753.
ἀνηλώσωσι, 753.
ἀνημένω, 755-
ἀνήξευρος τοῦ κόσμου, 1295.
ἀνήρ, 385 ; from ἀνερς, 28 ο.
ανήρ, 150 α, App. ii. 14 Λ.
ἀνηφορᾶς, δ, 755.
Αντηφώντι, 37.
åvтl, 1489, 1501 ff.
+ gen., Igor f,
+ accus., 1502.
for gen. of price, 1340.
for 4, 1188, 1501.
repl. by ὑπέρ, 1682.
becomes ἀντίς, 1502.
ἀντιβίης for -οις, 44.
ἀντιδιδόαμεν, 996τι·
ἀντιδικεῖν, constr., 1822.
ἀντίδικος, 1140.
ἄντικρυς εἰς, 1315.
ΑΝΕΙΜΕΝΗ (προσωδία), 76 [2], ἄνθος, 423.
ἀνεθέθη, 184.
ἀνήφορος, 755.
ἀνεθεματίζω, 754.
ἀνθέω, 857, 868.
ἀνέθηκε, 37.
ἀνθίζω & -έω, 868.
App. i. I.
Ανθούσ(σ)α, 1067.
ἄνελε, 9963-
ἀνθράκιον, 1038.
ἀνελών, 9963.
άνθραξ, 1038.
ανεμίζω & -όω, 868.
ἀνείων, 96ο α.
ἀνεμογάμης, 1152.
ανεμόμυλος, 1145.
ανεμόω & -ίζω, 868.
ἀνὲν καί, 1717; see ἄν ἐν(ε)
καί (under ἄν).
ἀνενεώθην for θη, App. iii.
-
19
ἀνενεωσάμενοι, 753.
ἀνεπάην, 996100-
ἀνεπέσαντο, 996215
ἀνεπτόμην, 996208 -
·
ἀνεπε ώμην, 996199-
ἀνεπνέω, 754.
ἀνεπνοιά, 754.
άvep (ŵ), 257¹.
άνεργος, 1130.
ἀνερράβω, 755.
ἀνέρρωγα, 996235-
ἀντιλέγειν, constr., 1822.
ἀντιλημμένου, 34.
ἀντιλοιδοροῦμαι (mid.), 1486.
ἄνθρακαν (τόν), App. iii. 6 a. ἀντιύομαι, 99679.
ἀνθρωπάκι”, 1038.
ἀνθρωποδαίμων, 1156.
ἄνθρωπος, App. i. 15 b.
ἀνθρώπω for -που, 294.
ἀνθ' ὧν, 15ΟΙ.
ἀνιαθήσομαι, 1885.
ἀνιαρός, 494.
ανιαρότερος, & μιαρώτερος,
App. ii. 5.
ἀνιάσομαι, 1885.
ἀνίστατο, 750 (.
'Αντιοχέαν (τόν), 330, App.
iii. 6 b.
Αντίπα (του), 277.
ἀντίς, 149 ; see αντί.
Αντιφάνου for -νους, 432 c.
ἀντολή, App. i. 16 α.
άντρας, δ, 194, 386.
αντρειά, ἡ, 271, 1020.
ἀντρέψῃ, App. i. 16 α.
ἀντρίστικος, 1077.
ἀντρογυναίκα, ἡ, 1145.
ἀντρόγυνο, τό, 1156.
ἀντρός (τοῦ), 341.
ἀνίσως (ἂν ἴσως) καί, 1717, Αντρούτσος, 1040.
1770.
Αννίβα (του), 277.
'Avvína, ǹ, 1040 ɑ ɑ.
ἄνοδος for ἀνάποδος, 72.
ἀνοιγήσομαι, 996173
ἀνοιγμένος, 996173.
ἀνοίγνυμι, 943, 996173.
ἀνερῶντες του -ροῦντες, 9967. ἀνοίγω, 726, 747, 8652,
ανεσπάω, 755.
ἀνέστακεν, 973·
ἀνεσύρω, 754, 755.
ανετράπετο, 1478.
ἄνευ, 1490, 1314.
ἀνεφέρασαν, 791.
ἀνέφορο, 755.
ἀνεχασπίζω, 754.
ἀνέχομαι, 745.
+ part., 2126 f.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
úvéxw, 99698-
ἀνεψύχην, 996310-
ȧvéwya, -xa, 996173.
ἀνέωγμαι, 747.
ἀνέργον, 720, 747, 996173.
ανέωξα, 747, 990173
ἀνεβαίνω, 755.
άνηθος, 1058.
ἀνήκεστος, 1129.
•
ἀνηκοδομήσαντος, 44,
9436, 996178.
ἀνοιγωσφαλίζω & -λάω, 1157.
ἀνοικτός, 1052.
ἀνοιμένος, 990173
ἀνοίξομαι, 1885.
ἀνοιχθήσομαι, 1885.
ἀνόμοιος, 1129.
ἄνομος, 465.
ἀνορθύω, 99614·
ἀνορθώθη ? 750 b.
ἀνταμείβω, 755.
ΑΝΤΑΝΑΚΛΑΖΟΜΕΝΗ (προσω-
δία), 76 [2], App. i. 1.
ΑΝΤΑΝΑΚΛΩΜΕΝΗ (προσωδία),
76 [2], App. i. I.
ἀντάω, 996 σ.
ANTÉKTACIC, 163.
ἀντέπεσαν, 787.
ἄντερο, τό, 130.
ἄντζα, ή, 205.
ἀντημέβω, 755.
Αντωνάκης, 1040 Β α.
Αντώνης, 298, 301, 1040.
Αντώνης for ὁ ᾿Αντ-, 150 α.
'Avtúvios, 298, 1040.
᾿Αντώνις, 301, 304, 1040.
ἀνύγετε, 36, 49.
ἀνύγω, 36.
ἀνέαι, 36, twice.
ἀνύξας, 36.
ἀνύξι for ἀνοίξει or -ξῃ, 36.
ἀνύτω, 8658.
ἀνύω, -υσθησομαι, 840.
άνω, 508, 523, 524, 1513.
for ἀνά, 1491.
+ gen., 1314.
ἐν, 1315.
els, 1315.
ἄνω ἄνω, 521.
-άνω, in monosyl. stems,
902.
in fut. & pres., 899;
chiefly fut., 900.
becomes -αίνω, 900.
ἀνάγει" οι ἀνῶγι", τό, 302.
'Avwyelavós, 1079.
ἀνώγη for - γοι, 44.
ἀνωγοκατάγειν, 1156.
ἀνώδυνος, 1142.
ἄνωθεν, 1513.
588
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ávávvµos, 1140, 1142.
ἀπαρνηθήσομαι, 1885.
ἀπέσταλκαν, 786.
ἀνωρθώθη ? 750 b.
ανώρθωσα, 99614.
ἀνώτατος, 508.
ἀνωτάτω, 523.
ἀνώτερος, 508.
ἀνωτέρω, 523.
ανωφελής, 1147.
- Αξ, ακος, (δ), 1042.
Αξιά, Νάξος, 134 C.
ἀξινάρι, App. iii. 7 [1].
ἀξινορύγια, 1156.
ἄξιόν ἐστι, with infin., 2081 f.;
with iva, App. vi. 16.
ἀξιόνω, 853.
ἄξιος, 493 ; μᾶλλον —, 510.
with infin., 2040, 2091.
εἰμι for ἄξιόν ἐστι, 2083 f.
ἔστιν + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
Αξιόχοι for -χῳ, 26g.
ἀξιοχρέους (τούς), 327.
αξιόχρεως, 326, App. i. 15 b.
ἀξιόω, constr., 1338 ff., 2078,
2087 ff.
8
+iva, App. vi. 16.
ἀξιοῦσθαι παρά τινι, 1632.
ἄξομαι, 9963, 1685.
ἄξος for ἄξιος, 155 e.
ἄξωσιν, 9963.
ἀοιδοί, ' bards, App. i. 24.
-40c for -αιος, 20%.
ἀπ', see ἀπό.
ἀπαγγέλλω + ἵνα, App. vi.
16.
ἀπαγορεύω (intr.), 1455 δ.
+ part., 2126 f.
ἀπαθής, 1140.
ἀπαί for ἀπό, 1519.
άπαις, 476, 1129, 1147.
ἀπαιτέω + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
ἀπακούω τον ὑπακούω, 1508.
ἁπαλαίνω, 900.
ἀπαλλάσσω οι -άττω, 92117.
constr., 1316 f.
ἁπαλύνω, -αίνω, 900.
Απανηχώρι, 755.
ἀπαντάω, 99616, 998; pass.,
1458.
+ τινί, 1371; + τινός,
1373; + τινά, 1457.
ἀπαντήξω, 996
ἀπαντήσω, 996. 999.
ἀπαντήχνω, 99615.
ἀπαντρευτος, 1130.
ἀπάνω for ἐπὶ & ἐπάνω, 1488.
εἰς for ἐπί, 1488, 1491.
ἀπανώγραμμα, 1145.
ἅπαξ, 648; with gen., 1314.
ἀπάρθενος for ἀειπ-, 150 d,
1132.
ἀπαρνοῦμαι, constr., 2087 f. ἀπέσταλκες, 798.
ἅπας, 448.
ἄπαστρος, 1130.
ἀπέτυχα, 794.
ἀπέχρη, 996314, 3.
mid., 1467.
ἀπατός, 542, 547, 549; | ảnéxw, 1137; intr., 1455 C;
μου, 547.
ΠΙ
ἀπατούς, 546 f., 1411.
ἀπάτωρ, 375, 472.
ἀπαυδάν, constr., 1822.
ἀπαυτέ, ‘I say 'I 251b.
ἀπαντός, 547, 549.
ἀπὸ for ἀπό, 1519.
ἀπεδίδει, 996 πι·
ἀπεδίδετο, 961.
ἀπέδοκα, 26, 4.
ἀπέδρα, -δρη, 200.
ἀπέδραν, 979, 99650-
ἀπέδρασα, 9803.
ἀπέδρη, -δρα, 29.
ἀπεδώκαμεν, 9525.
ἀπέδωκαν, 9520.
ἀπεδώκασι, 793.
ἀπεδώκατε, 952.
ἀπέθανα, 724ο
ἀπέθαναν, 787.
ἀπέθανον, 996112
ἀπειλέω, constr., 2085 f.
+infin., 2086b f.
·
ἄπειμι, 989 α.
ἀπειπείν, constr., 1822.
ἀπείργω, constr., 1317,1822.
ἄπειρος, 465; constr., 1294f.
ἀπείσησθε, 779.
άπεισιν, 989 α.
ἀπεκατέσταινεν, 751, 755.
ἀπεκατέστη, 751, 755-
ἀπεκρίθην, 1480.
for -θη, App. iii. 23.
ἀπεκτίννυον, 936 α.
ἀπέκτονα, 924, 996145 -
ἀπεκτόνημα, 996145 -
ἀπελεύσεται, ο89 α.
ἀπελεύσομαι, 989 α.
ἀπελέφτερος, 51.
ἀπέλθατε, imprt., 800.
ἀπελθάτω, 800.
ἀπελίπαμεν, 795.
ἀπελλάγην, 26, α [1].
ἀπελογήθην, 1.80.
ἀπέλου, 996103-
ἀπέλου(ε), 153, 996163.
ἀπελπίζω, & uid., 1469.
ἀπέμεινα, 724.
ἀπερνάω, 996200-
απέσβηκα, 9807, 996.99 -
ἀπέσβην, 979, 99639-
ἀπέσπασες, 798.
ἀπεστάλην for -λη, App. iii.
19.
ἀπέσταλκα, 996203 -
constr., 1316 f ; -ομαι, ib.
ἀπέχωι, 20.
ἀπεύσομαι, 996920
ἀπῆλθαν, 787.
ἀπῆλθον, 787.
ἀπήλθοσαν, 791.
·
ἀπηλλάγησαν, 786.
ἀπολογάομαι, 854, 855.
ἀπολογήθην for -θη, App. iii.
20 C.
ἀπήνεγκαν, 787.
ἀπῆρκα, 9960.
ἄπηρος for ἤπειρος, 29°.
ἀπηρτισμένον μέτρον, spp.
ii. 5.
ἀπ᾿ ἧς or ἀπῆς (i.e. ἀφ' ἧς),
for ap' où, 1791 f.,
1999.
ἀπῆς (καί), τητη.
ἄπιμι, 34.
ἀπιστέω, 748; + infin., 2085.
ἀπιστία, 1045.
ἄπιστος, 465, 1ogo.
ἁπλᾶ, adv., 522.
Απλάκης, 1040 Βα.
ἁπλῆ, 286.
ἀπληκευμένος, 717, 736.
ἁπλός (ἁπλοῦς), 499 1, 654-
ἁπλότερα, adv., 522.
ἁπλύτερος, 321, 654.
ἁπλότητα (τήν & *), App. iii.
1 2 1 [2].
ἁπλοῦς, 499 1, 516, 653.
ἁπλούστερος, 499 0.
ἄπλυτος, 1130.
ἁπλώθην for -θη, App. iii.
20 (1.
ἁπλῶς, 516.
ἄπο (ἄπω), 1513.
από, 508, 1489, 1503-19;
in A, 1503 ff.; in P,
1506-19; in N, 1491 ;
by-forms, ἀπού, ἀπαί οι
ἀπέ, ἀφ', 1519.
+ gen., 1503-15 ; 'from
the house of,' 1289".
+ accus.,1517; for simple
gen., 1299; after cmpr.
& sprl., 1505, 1617.
+ dat., 1518.
+ adverbs, 1516.
for ἐκ, ὑπό, παρά, «
1464 (E., 1488, 1491,
1506 fl., 1513, 1696.
589
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἀπό for πρός, 1491.
for Latin ab, άπω, ἄπωθεν,
1513.
for ex-, 'late,' 1514
for åvá, apiece,' 'at a
time,' 623, 1515.
for part. gen., 1311 f.
for gen. of value, 1511;
of material, 1331; οἱ
separation, 1317; of su-
periority or inferiority,
1329.
denotes a follower or
member, 1512.
replaces ἐκ, 1488, 1568 ;
παρά, ὑπό, 1488, 1491,
1628.
ἀπ' ἀρχῆς, 1246.
ἀπ' ἐκεῖ, 435.
ἀπ' ἐκεῖθεν, 435.
ἀπ' ἐκεῖσε, 435.
ἀπ' ὅντε", 1791.
ἀπὸ ὄπισθεν, 435.
ἀπ' ὅτε, 1791.
ἀπὸ λίγο” (καί), 1903.
ἀπὸ λίγο νά, 1903-
ἀπὸ μεσ' από, 1525.
ἀπὸ παιδί, 1235.
ἀπὸ πέντε δυό, 1216.
ἀπὸ σκοποῦ, 1503 d.
ἀπὸ στόματος, 1503 d.
ἀπὸ ταυτομάτου, 1503 .
ἀπὸ τρία ἕνα, 1216.
ἀπὸ τρίχα νά, 1903.
ἀπὸ for ἀπό, 72 [3].
ἄπο (ἄπω) for από (=ex-),
111, 508, 523, 1513.
for ab, 1513.
Απο- (= ex-) in / com-
pounds, 1514 [1].
ἀπο- for ὑπο-, 1508.
ἀποβάλλω, 742.
ἀποβαλοῦ, 911 b.
ἀποβέβληκα, 742.
ἀποβλέπομαι, 1486.
ἀπογιγνώσκω, 1346 f.
ἀπογινώσκω τι, 1457.
ἀπογράφεσθη for -σθαι, 48.
ἀπογραφέστω, 177.
ἀποδέδοκε, 26η 1.
ἀποδείκνυμί τινά τι, 1284.
ἀποδεκατεῖν, 851.
ἀποδεκατοῖν, 851.
ἀποδέχομαι for ὑποδ-, 1508.
Αποδήμης, 1040.
Αποδήμιος, 298, 1040.
Αποδημις, 298, 1040.
ἀποδίδει, 996,1·
ånodidere, 961, 99661 ·
ἀποδιδούν for -δόν, 996 τι·
ἀποδιδράσκω, 9809.
ἀποδίδω, 996 1.
I. ἀποδίδωμι & -ομαι, 1471.
2. ἀποδίδομαι for πιπράσκω,
996214.
- constr., 1338 ff.
ἀποδύντωσαν, 811.
ἀπόδουλος, 1514 [1].
ἀποδραίημεν, 979.
ἀπόδωκα, 750 c.
ἀπόδωκε, 750 c.
ἀποδώσαντες, 996 1.
ἀποδώσειαν, 996τι·
ἀποδώσεν, 26, 4.
ἀποδώσωσι, 99651.
ἀποεπίσκοπος, 1514 [1].
ἀποθαίνω, 996 112.
ἀποθαμμένος, 996112
ἀπύθανα, 996112-
•
ἀποθανόντα, as adv., 823.
ἀποθανοῦμαι, 996112
ἀποθάνω, 996112-
ἀποθανών, 823.
ἀποθέστε fur -θέσθαι, 177.
ἀποθνῄσκω, 996112, 1679.
πρὸ τοῦ δήμου, 1648.
ἀποθηκάριος, 1040 Α.
ἀποθρέξομαι, 996278
ἀπόθρονος, 1514 [1].
ἀποκαταστάνεις, 962.
ἀποκάτω for ὑποιε-, 15ο8.
ἀπό, for simple ὑπό, 1491.
ἀποκεκόψομαι, 990137.
ἀποκέκριται, 1002.
ἀποκοπή, 142.
Αποκόρωνας, 1508.
ἀποκριθήσομαι, 990141 2.
ἀποκριθῶ, 990141 2.
ἀποκρίνω, 996141 ;
1001 ff.
ἀποληρέω τινά, 12443, 1457.
ἀπολήσαται, 35·
ἀπόλησε, 35.
“Απολλᾶ & -άδος (του), 288.
*Απολλον (ω), 257.
ἀπολλύασιν, 936 b.
ἀπόλλυε, 936 α.
ἀπολλύει, 936 α.
ἀπόλλυμι, 937, 9438, 996182,
99711; ἀπόλωλα as pres.,
1868.
ἀπολλύουσι, 936 a, b.
ἀπολλύς, 936 8.
ἀπολλύω, 937,943, 996182
ἀπολλύων, 636 a & b
απόλλω, 775, 937, 996152 -
Απολλώνιος, 1040.
Απολλώνις, 298, 1040.
ἀπολνάω, 904, 906.
ἀπολογέομαι, 755, 854
ἀπολυοῦν, 859.
ἀπόλυσα, 750 c.
ἀπολυτίκιον, 1040 0.
ἀπολυτικόν, 1040 0.
ἀπολύω, ἀπολνώ, 904, 906;
ἀπολῶ, 859, 904, 906.
ἀπολῶ for ἀπολύω, 859°,904,
906, 996182.
απόλωλα, 996 182 -
as pres., 1868.
ἀπολώλεκα, 996,82 -
ἀπόμεινα for ἀπέμ-, 724.
ἀπόμελι, τό, 303.
ἀπομονή (or ὑπο-, 1508.
ἀπονίζω, 996,πι·
ἀποξενοῦσαι, 773.
ἀποπαύσαμεν, 750 c.
αποπέμπομαι, 996203.
-ομαι,
ἀποπίπτομαι, 996. 15, 1459.
ἀποπολιτεύσασται, 177.
ἀποπταίην, 996208
ἀποκρύπτομαι τινά τι, 1279. ἀπόπτηθι, 996208·
9961419 2
ἀπόκριφος, 35.
ἀποκταίνω, 996145 -
#
ἀποκτείνυμι, 996 15
ἀποκτείνω, 924, 9433.
causat., 1460.
ἀποκτέννω, 996 145-
ἀποκτημένος, 996144
ἀποκτίνῃ, 34·
•
ἀποκτίννυμι, 9433, 996145 -
ἀποκτῶ, 996144, 10001
ἀπολάβομεν for ἀπελ-, 750 c.
ἀπόλαβον fur ἀπέλ-, 750 €.
ἀπόλαυα, 750 c.
ἀπολαύσω, 999; -σομαι, 998.
ἀπολαύω, 875, 998, 999.
τινός, 1298.
ἀπολεῖς (ἀπολύεις), 859°.
ἀπόλεκες, 750 α.
ἀπολέλιπται, 34.
ἀποπτωθέντων, 996215
ἀπορέω τινός, 1318.
+ iufin., 2003, App. vi.
17 C.
ἀπορπίζω, & mid. 1469.
ἀπορρέρηκται, 996230
ἀπορριζιμαιός, 1056.
ἀπορρίπτω (intr.), 1456.
ἀπορρώξ, 1137.
ἀποσβαίημεν, 979.
αποσβέννυμι, 9978-
αποσβήσομαι, 996439-
ἀποσκεδάννυμι, 996240.
ἀποσκεδῶ, 996240
αποσκεπάζω for ὑποσ-, 1508.
αποσπέρας, 1235.
ἀποσταλήσομαι, 996.203 -
ἀποστέλλω (intr.), 1456.
590
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἀποστέλλω + ἵνα, App. vi. 16. | ἆρα ού, 17472, 1748, 1812, | -άριος (-άρις) = -ᾶς (δ), 1044.
ἀποστερέω, constr., 1279,
1318.
ἀποστόλοι for ἀπό-, 294.
>
ἀποτείσει, 34·
ἀποτέτευγμαι, 996282·
ἀποτίνοιαν, 792, 805.
-ομαι, 1822.
ἀποτρύφυ, 36.
2046 f.
· repl. by el, 2055 1.
Αραβηκοῦ, 37.
Αράβοις (τοῖς), 346.
ἆρα γε, 1749; reversed to
(γε άρα) γάρ, 1749.
ἀποτρέπω, constr., 1346 f.; άραγες, 2048.
ἀποφάγι, τό, App. vi. 26.
ἀποφαίνω, constr., 2135 f.;
-ομαι, 996201
γνώμην, 1470.
ἀποφεύγω τινός, 1292.
-ομαι
ἀποχράω, 98, 99631433;
-μαι, ib.
ἀποχρῆ (-χρή), 987.
ἀποχρῇ, 996314 3 3 -
•
ἀποχρῆν, 996314, 3
ἀποχρήσειν, 996314 3 3.
ἀποχρῶμαι, 996314 3 3
ἀποχρῶν, 9903143 9.
᾿Αππα (τοῦ), 288.
᾿Αππάδος (του), 288.
ἀπράγμων, 469.
ἄπρεπος, 1151.
•
Απρίλιος, ίλις, -ίλης, 298,
430.
ἅπτομαι, constr., 1325 f.
τινι, 1325.
ἄπω, 508, 523, 1513.
ἀπωγμένου, 996320-
ἄπωθεν, 111, 1513.
ἀράομαι, 1001.
ἀράσσω, 126.
Αρβανίτης, 187.
Αρβανίτικος, το77.
ἀργάζομαι, 723, 99638
ἀργασμένος, 99638.
ἀργαστήρι, 1026.
ἀργαστώ, 99638
'Αργείος, 205.
᾿Αργεννοῦσσαι, 1067.
'Apyños, 38.
'Apynos, 265.
•
αργός, αεργός, 15o C.
Αργυρός, 321.
Αργυρώ, ή, 414.
ἄρδην, ἀέρδην, 150 c.
ἀριπρεπής, 1125.
-ápic, -ápнc, (¿), 1040 A.
ἄριστα, 519.
ἄριστα ἔχω βίον, 1314.
'Αρίσταιος & -σταις, 299.
ἀριστέ[οντα, 51.
→
Αριστείδης, 26, 28, 283,
298.
ἀριστερά (ή), 1182; ἐν -ρᾷ,
>
1234.
Αριστῄδης, 285.
Αριστίδου, 34.
Αριστίο, 26, 4.
ἀριστόδειπνον, 1156.
Αριστοκλέα (τόν), App. iii. 6.
Αριστοκλέου for -ous, 432 c.
Αριστύκληα, 38.
Αριστοκράτου
432 c.
for -τους,
Αριστομένης, 431.
Αριστομένου for -vous, 432 c.
Αριστόνοι for -νῳ, 26g-
ἄριστος, 5041·
-αρέα (ή), numeral subs. in, 'Αριστοτέλη & την (τόν),
661.
αρέζω, 99617.
Άρει (τῷ), 4311,
*Αρες (ω), 4331, spp. ii. 4 [1].
Αρες (ὦ), App. ii. 4 [1].
ἄρεσα, 99617.
ἀρέσκει, with ἵνα, 2082, App.
vi. 16.
ἀρέσκω, 99617.
ἀρέσσω, 99617.
Αρέτα (του), 277.
Αρέτας, 283.
ἀπώθω, 996320
ἀπωλέσθην, 1480.
ἀπώλλυν, -υον, 996182
•
ἀπώλλυον, 936 α.
ἀπώξυσμαι, 996185-
ἆρ᾽ ἦ, 1748.
ἀπωσμένος, 996320-
'Αρην (τόν), 4331
ἀπώσμαι, 727.
ἀπώσω, 996.201
ἀπώτατος, 508.
ἀπωτάτω, 523.
ἀπώτερος, 508.
ἀπωτέρω, 523.
ap, 1700.
α p', sec âpa.
ἀρετή, derivation of, 41.
Αρεως (του), 4331·
>
>
330, App. iii. 6.
᾿Αριστοτέλης, 298, 431.
'Apiotopávn (&), 432 a, app.
iii 15.
Αριστοφάνης, 298, 431.
Αριστοφάνου, 432 c.
ἀρίφνητος, ἀναρίθμητος, 179.
ἀρκεῖ, with ἵνα, 2082, Αρ.
vi. 16.
ἀρκετόν ἐστιν ἵνα, App. vi.
16.
ἀρκέω, 841.
ἀρκτῷος, 1072.
άρμα, τό, 72 [3].
ἀρήν (δ), gen. ἀρνός, 385, 386. ἀρμέγω, ἀμέλγω, 143.
ἅρμα, τό, 368.
αρματωμένος, 717, 736.
Αρμένης, 1040.
Αρήνσης, 301.
Αρμένιος, 1040.
"Αρηος, 38.
Αρμένις, 1040.
ἀρήρεια, 99617.
ἁρμηνεύω from ἑρμ-, 723.
"Αρης, 298, 4331;
from
ἄρρην, 4Ι.
ἁρμόζω, 879; -ομαι (vid.),
1486.
ἄρα, 117,
1748.
1700, 17.47,
conf. with ἆρα, 1748°.
ἆρα, 116, 1747 11.
origin of, 116, 1747.
conf. with ἄρα, 1748ο.
11ΗΘ of, 2046 f.
, 1748.
- μή, 1748, 1748, 1812,
20.16 f.
- γε, 1749; reversed to
γάρ, 1749.
Αρι-, 1104, 1125.
ταριά (*), numeral subs.,
661.
ἀριγνὼς & γνωτος, 439.
αριδάκρυος, 439.
ἀρίδακρυς & -υ(τ)ος, 439, 474·
-Αρίδιον (τό), 1037.
ἀριθμὸς for -σμός, 178.
-άριν, -άρις, -APHC, 1040 Λ.
-ápí”” (Tó), 1038,, 104 a.
-άριον (τύ), 1036, 1040 1;
- & -arius, 1040 A.
ἁρμύττω, 886, 879.
åpmonía, app. ii. 8 [4].
αρμυρήθρα, 1026
ἁρμυρός, 187.
ἀρνάομαι, 854.
ἄρνα (τύν), 385, 386.
ἀρνέομαι, 854, 1004 f.
ἀρνήσομαι, 1885.
αρνί & -ίον, τό, 386.
ἀρνός (του), App. i. 16 a.
ἀρξάμενος, ne adv., 2148.
ἄρξομαι, 1885.
591
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἄρξω, effect. & dur. fut., 1895. | ἀρφάδι, 131
ἄροτρον, 126.
ἀρύουσι, App. ii. 12 [3].
âp' où, 1748.
ἀρύω, 842.
ἀρύωσι, App. ii. 12 [3].
ἁρπα, 99618.
Αρπαγάθῃ τῷ), 37.
Αρπαγάθι, τι (for -θῃ, τῷ),
37.
ἅρπαγος & ἅρπαξ, δ, App. iii.
12.
᾿Αρπαδῆ (τόν), App. iii. 22 c.
ἁρπάζω, 870, 99619, 998.
ἅρπαξ & ἅρπαγος, δ, App. iii.
12.
ἁρπάξω, 99618.
ἁρπάσω, 999.
ἁρπάω, 870, 9961; -ώμαι,
ib.
ἀρραβών, 126.
ἀρρεβωνας, δ, 126.
ἄρρην, App. ii. 9; changed
to ἄρρης, 338.
ἄρρης for ἄρρην, 338.
'Αρσάκης, 298, 1040 Β α.
Αρσάκιος, 104Ο Β.
ἄρσεναν (τόν), App. iii. 6 b.
ἀρσενίκιν, τό, 302.
ἄρσην, ἄρρην, App. ii. 9, 14 B.
ἀρσηνάλης, 301.
Apcic, in netre, 89 f., App.
ii. 8 [4] ; in G-1, 89 1. ;
at present, 89b.
καὶ θέσις, 39 f.
αρτάω, -ύ(ζ)ω, 871.
ἀρτεῖς, ἀρτύεις, 148.
Αρτεμάς, 287.
Αρτεμίδωρος, Αρτεμάς, 287.
Αρτέμιν, -μιον, 302, 331,
1040, App. iii. 7.
Αρτέμιον, 1040.
Αρτέμιος, 1040.
'Αρτέμις, 298, 1040.
Αρτζερίνος, 10315.
άρτι, in compos., 112o f.
constr., 1833.
ἄρτι ἄρτι, 521.
ἀρτιέπεια tor -επής, 430.
ἀρτίζω & -ύω, 868.
ἀρτιθαλής, 1120.
ἀρτίως, constr., 1833.
αρτόκρεας, τό, 1156.
αρτύτυρος, δ, 1156.
ἀρτύεις, ἀρτεῖς, 148.
αρτύεται, 858.
αρτύζω & -ύω, 871.
ἀρτύνω, 902.
αρτύω & -ίζω, 868.
αρύς (ἀραιός), 496.
ἀρχαῖα Γράμματα, App. ii. 12.
ΑρχαϊκΗ CHMACIA, App. ii. 16.
ἀρχαιότατον, 506 [2].
ἄρχαις (ταίς), 29", App. ii. 9.
ἀρχάνς (τάς), 28 c.
ἀρχάριος, 1040 4.
ἀρχει περέτην, 35.
ἀρχέλαος, 1106.
Αρχενανίδας 63 [2].
Αρχεστράτο, 26, α.
ἀρχηγός, 1142
ἀρχήν (τὴν —), 1278; ἀρχήν,
οὐ, ib.
ἀρχήσαμεν, 718.
ἀρχθήσομαι, 1885.
Αρχίας, 283.
ἀρχιεπίσκοπος,
1227.
ἀρχίζω, 868.
Αρχίνος, 654.
omitted,
ἀρχιτέκτων, 1106.
άρχομαι, see ἄρχω.
ἀρχόμενος, as adv., 2148.
ἄρχονταν (τόν), 330, App.
iii. 6 d.
ἄρχοντας, δ, 296, 339, APP
iii. 12 b.
ἀρχύντοι, οἱ, 296, 346.
ἀρχόντοις (τοῖς), 346.
ἀρχοντόπουλος, 1041.
ἀρχόντου (τοῦ), 296.
ἄρχος for άρχων, App. iii. Ι 2.
άρχουνται, 778.
ἀρχύτερος, 496.
1. ἄρχω, 1462, 1853 f.; pass.,
1462; differs from ἄρ-
χομαι, 1324, 1471;
constr., 1324.
|
-άς, -άδος, 288, 364, 1032;
in N, 367.
in numerals, 658.
-ac (T6), 417, 418; in P-N,
420.
-ac, in pf. & aor., 798 f.
repl. by -es, 798 f.
-âc (¿), gen. -â, pet names,
etc., 287, 1042 f.
uncommon in A, 287.
of Doric origin, 287.
accentuation of, 287b.
- ac (5) = (-άριος) -άρης, 1044-
-âc (d), with fem. in -oû,
1043 f.
-āc, -āv, Laivă, 380.
-āc, -ăv, -aivă, 380, 146.
-AC, -αν, -ασα, adj. & part.,
448, 449, 450 f., 705,
App. iii. 13.
ἀσβεστᾶς, δ, 287, 1044.
ἄσβολος & -η, 292.
ἄσε, 1916.
άσε (ἔασε), 150c, 949,
99656, 1916; see âs.
ἀσεβήν (τόν), App. iii. 6 a.
ἀσεβῆ (π), App. iii. 15.
ἀσεβής, 425.
σεμναι for -μνοι, 310.
ἄσετε, ᾶστε, 1362, 99660 -
ἀσῆμιν (τό), 331, App. iii. 7.
Ασημώ, δ, 414.
-acle, in N, 800.
ἀσθενῆν (τόν), App. iii. 6 a.
'Ασιανός, 1ο78.
-aci” (τιθέασι”), 930 α;
becomes -ουσι", 937.
Laci", leads to -αν, 786.
2. ἄρχομαι, coustr., 1245, 4act", in aor. replaces -ar,
1324.
+ part., 2126 f.
12 c [3].
793.
ἀσινὴν (τύν), App. iii. 6 c.
— + infin., 2127, app. vi. -ácion (tó), 1037.
-+íva (vá), 2127.
ἄρχων, ἄρχος, App. ii. 12.
äpŵ, 996..
as (from ἔασε), 150 €, 99638,
1915 f.
for είθε, 1906.
in exhortations, 1915 f.
-Ας (δ), 248, 283, 261, 262.
of trade, etc., 1044.
from -os, 296b.
gen. -a, 277.
pl. -οι, 296.
proper names in, 283º.
- influence of, 248.
in compounds, 1150,
1152f.
ἀσκαίρω, σκαίρω, 129.
Ασκλειπιείου, 264-
Ασκληπιός, App. i. 2 [1].
ἀσπάζομαι, 1001.
ἀσπάλαθος, ὁ & ἡ, 292.
ἀσπασάμην, 71η.
ἀσπάσαντα, as adv., 823.
ασπίς, 365.
άσπλαχνος, 191.
ἄσπρος, 496.
ἀσπρύτερος, 496.
αστακός, στακός, 134 6.
στάχι, τύ, 389.
άσταχυς, στάχυς, 129.
ὥστε, άσετε,
136, 949,
996.0·
ἀστενής, 177.
592
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἀστέραν (τόν), App. iii. 6 d?
ἄστεως for -έως, App. i. 15.
ἑστίλιον, τό, 430.
ἄστομος, 1147.
ἀστονόμος, 11ο8.
ἀστοχέω, -ίζω, 869.
ἀστοχίζω, 869.
ἀστράπτει, its subj., 1166.
αστράφτω, 875.
ἄστρο”, 424.
ἄστρος, τύ, 424.
ατός (i.e. αὐτός), ‘he, 542, | Αὐριλίας, 37.
1423b; μου, 542.
αὖς fur οὖς, 43315
ἁτός, 546 ;
μου, 542.
-άτος, -alus, 1052.
στούς, 546, 1411 ;
μας, 546.
ἄτροφος, 1150.
-άτσα (ή), 1040 Β C.
-άTCHC (d), 1040 B c.
-ÁTCIN (TÓ), 1040 B c.
άOTU, Tú, 303, 391, 397; in -ATCION (TÓ), 1040 B c.
Ν, 398.
Αστυγένου for -vous, 432 c.
ἀστυνόμος, ΙΙ08.
acynaipecía, 30, 158.
ασύνετα, adv., 518.
ἀσφάλεια (τήν), App. iii.
22 C.
ἀσφαλέστερον, adv., 520.
ἀσφαλεστέρως, 520.
ἀσφαλῆν (τόν), 330, App.
iii. 60 & d.
ἀσφαλής, 425.
ἀσφαλίζω, σφαλ(ν)ῶ, 724,
870, 906.
ἀσφαλισμένα, 718.
ἀσφαλῶς, 520.
ἀσφένταμος, δ, 245.
ἄσχημος, 338.
ἀσχήμων becomes ἄσχημος,
338.
ǎow, 999.
ἄσωτος, App. i. 15 0.
>
•
-ac (ή), 408 ; in N, 409.
αὐτα becomnes τα, 530.
τοὺς αὑταιί (-ω-), 850.
-ATCIOC (8), 1040 B c.
-άTCIC (8), 1040 B C.
ἄττα (ὦ), 257.
ἄττα, 102 1, 546, 587 f., 61ο.
Αττικά Γράμματα, App. ii.
12.
Αττικόν CXRMA, 117o f.
AY, ay, proper diphthong,
19 a.
'long,' 20.
- pronunciation of, 24, 32,
51 f.
= au, 53 ; leads to av or
af, 32º.
αὖ, 1700, 1744.
ay-, in augment, 717.
augmented to η-, 714.
αὐγάζω & -έω, 868.
αὐγέω & -αύζω, 868.
αὐγή, ἡ, 249.
αὐγολέμονο, 1156.
avyos, tó, 249”.
-ATA for -a, in neuter pl., Αὐγουστάλιος, 430.
ἅτε (δή), 1737 f., 1742.
Αὐγουστοῖνος, 44.
-Αγγω for -αύω, 861, 876.
ανελλα, 63 [2].
297.
ἀτάρ, 1744.
+ part.,
1738, 2109,
ανηρ, 63 [2].
2050 ff.
avlades (@), 353-
αὐθάδης, 425, 429.
LATE for Leτe, in imprt., 800.
in G-N, Soo, So1bi.
Laτe, repl. by Ζετε, 797.
ἄτεκνος, 1147, 1149.
ἀτενής, 1131.
ἀτυπάδων (τῶν), 2go.
"Ατη (του), 278.
Ατθίς, Αθθίς, 56, 125, 171.
ἄτιμος, 494, 1147, App. i.
15 0.
ἀτμίζω, ἀτομ-, 179.
ατμός, αχνύς, 179.
ἀτομίζω, ἀτμ-, 179.
ἀτομός, ἀτμός, 179.
ἀτόν (i. c. αὐτόν), 1422 f.
στόν . Θ. ἑαυτόν), 546,
14236; Tdv
ǎtona, 94, 98.
ἄτοπον ἐστι + infin., App. vi.
16.
αὐθαδιάζω, 10001·
αὐθαδίζομαι, 10001
αὐθει μερί, 37.
αὐθέντης, 593.
αὐθεντόπουλος, 1041 [1].
αὖθι, 2001 [1].
ανίαχοι, 63 [2].
αὐλακάκι", 1038.
αὐλάκιον, 1038.
αὖλαξ, 1038.
19
αὐξάνω, 996, ; intr. 1456.
αυξηθήσομαι, 99610, 1885.
αὐξήσομαι, 99614, 1885.
αυξομείωσις, 1156.
αύξω, 99610-
μου, 546.
Αυρήλης, 1040.
Αυρήλιος, 1040.
Αὐρηλίου, 35.
Αὐρηλις, 301, 1040.
αὐτάρκης, 429, 11502.
αὐτας becomes τας, 530.
αὐταυτόν, 550.
αὐταυτός, 549.
!'
αὐτέ! I say ! 251.
αὐτεί, αὐτῇ, 26.
αὕτη, 565.
αὐτή fur -τήν, App. iii. 26.
αύτη (--), 854, 574.
αυτήκοος, 1140.
αὐτὴν becomes την, 530.
αὐτῆνα (αὐτήν), 535, 580,
App. iii. 25.
αὐτήνε fur -τήν, App. iii. 24,
26.
αὐτήνη, 577.
αὐτήνη", 577 & [3], 580.
αὐτήνης, 577, 578, 581.
αὐτῆνος, 581.
αὐτης becomes της, 530.
αυτί, τό, 43315
αὐτίκα, with part., 2147.
αὐτὸ for -v, 539, App. iii.
26.
αυτο becomes το, 530.
αὐτῷ for αὐτῷ, 26, α.
αὐτοί, 525, 526.
αὐτοῖνοι, 577.
avtoîs, 525, 526³; 'together
with,' 1325.
αὔτοις, αὐτούς, App. ii. 14 Β.
αὐτοκράτωρ, 472.
1. αύτον, 525, 530, see
αὐτός.
2. αὐτόν, see αὐτός; as pers.
pron. him,' 525, 1421;
8ce αὐτός.
- most common in P-B,
530 ff., 1399 ff.
enclitic, 530, 1422.
becomes άτον, τον,
133", 530, 608, 1422.
for ἑαυτόν, 1405 f.
αυτόν for ἑαυτόν, 150 c,
544 f. (cp. 1405 f.).
for ἐμαυτόν, 546.
fur σεαυτόν, 546.
αὐτόνα for αὐτόν, 132, 535,
580, App. iii. 35.
αὐτόνε for -τόν, App. iii. 24,
26.
αὐτόνο, 577.
αὐτόνο”, 577, 580.
αὐτόνος, 577 & [2].
αὐτόν, αὐτούς, Αpp. ii. 14 B.
593
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
>
αὖτος, Aeolic, 84; Ν, 542.
1. αυτός, -6, -ή, lie, 525,
530, 558, 568, 1421;
see αὐτόν.
- inflection of, 593.
2. αὐτός, self, 539, 1418;
αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν, 1375.
= οὗτος, 1418b.
δ
same,' 1419; 8
the same, idem, 540,
1372, 1420;
1214b.
constr., 1239.
*
οὗτος,
ἀφ' οὗ οι ἀφοῦ, 1503 d,
1776, 1779,1790,1792.
constr., 1995, 1999.
+ part., 2149.
καί, 1717.
ἀφαιρεθήσομαι, 1885.
ἀφίομεν, 96ο α.
-Αφιον (τύ), 1037.
ἀφίονται, 96ο α.
ἀφίουσαι, 960 .
ἀφίσταμαί τινος, 1346 f.
ἀφιστάω, 962.
ἀφαιρέω, 1137; -ομαί τινά ἀφίστημι, constr., 1346 .
τι, 1279.
ἀφαιρήσομαι, 1885.
ἀφανής, 425.
ἀφανίζω (intr.), 1456.
ἀφατός, 549.
ἀφείκατε, 26.
ἀφείκε, 264, 37.
= ὅς, 1444.
>
repl. by δ δέ, ὅδε,
ἀφειλάμην, 9964.
ἀφείλατο, 9964.
ἀφείλετο, 9964.
τινι,
ἀφειλόμην, 9964.
Αφέλη, 38.
ἀφέντης, 126, 593.
Αφιτρίτη, 56.
ἀφίω, 775, 937, 958, 960.
ἀφίωμεν, 96ο α.
ÅPÓTE, 1791.
apoû, 'since'; see åp' où,
under ἀφ'.
ἀφοῦ οἱ ἀφίεμαι, 953 c.
ἀφονηροῦμαι, 1003.
ἀφοῦμεν, 96ο α.
οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, 1397.
after ἐγώ & σύ, 544.
δ, 1212 1. ; δ
1372.
3. αὐτός, αὐτούς, App. ii.
14 B.
4. αὐτός, εὐτός, 542 f.
5. αὐτός, see αὐτόν.
αὐτὸς αὐτόν, 549.
αὐτὸς οὗτος, 544.
αὐτός (του), 43315
αυτός, 540.
αὐτόσε τον αὐτοῦ, 435.
αὐτου becomes του, 530.
αὐτοῦ, as poss., 551.
αὐτοῦνον, 581.
αὐτοῦνος, 581.
αὐτούνου, 577, 578, 581.
αὐτούνους, 577 & [2], 578.
αὐτουνών, 578.
αὐτους becomes τους, 530.
αὐτούς, 525, 526.
αὑτούς for ἡμᾶς (or ὑμᾶς
αυτούς, 546.
αὐτῶ fur -τῶν, App. iii. 26.
αὐτῷ, together with, 1375.
αὐτων becomes των, 530.
avtŵv, as pos8., 551.
ἀφεῖς, ἀφίεις, 148, 702, 960 α. 'Αφροδίσιος, 34.
ἀφρᾶτος, 1052.
Αφροδείσιν, App. iii. 7.
Αφροδεισίῳ, 34.
Αφροδίσιος, 1040.
'Appodiois, 298, 1040.
150 €,
ἀφεντός (του), 341, 355.
ἄφες, 949.
becomes as?
99688, 1916 f.
+ subj., 1914, 1916 f.
ἀφεστάθη, 973.
ἀφεστάκει, 973.
ἀφέσταλκα, 114.
άφετε + subj., 1914.
åpeŵ, 116, 152, 960 a.
ἀφέω, 958, 960, 1916.
ἀφῇ, 96ο α.
ἄφηκα, in N, 1875.
ἀφήκαμε", 720.
ἀφῆκεν, 37.
ἀφῆκες, 798.
ἀφήκετε, 797.
ἀφήκω, 1916.
άφης for άφες, 949.
άφησ(ε), 949, 1916.
ἀφῆστε, 949.
ἀφήσω, 949, 1916.
αὐτῶνε for -τῶν, App. iii. 24, ἀφί for ἀμφί, 56.
26.
αὐτώνω", 577, 578.
αὐτώς, αὐτούς, App. ii. 14 B.
αὐτοῦ for -του, 267.
αὐθέντης, ἀφέντης, 126.
ανω, 875.
-άγω & αγγω, τοι f.,
861, 876.
treated as -άβω, 8651
ἀφ' for ἀπό, 1519; see ἀπό
ἀφ' ἑσπέρας, 1234f.
ἀφ᾿ ἧς = ἀφ' οὗ, 1791;
ἡμέρας, ib.
ἀφ' ὅτε, 1791.
ἀφ' ὅτου, 1790, 1999.
repl. by ἀφ' οὗ, 1790.
ἀφίδω, 114.
Αφρόδιτα, 84.
Αφρικανός, 35.
aps, 1916h.
ἀφσηλός (ὑψηλός), 180.
äd'oi, 1916º.
ἀφταυτός, 549.
ἁφτούμενος, 2111.
ἅφτω, 875 ; intr., 1456.
ἀφῶ, ἀφεῶ, 152, 960.
ἄφωνα, defined, 23 ; see
semivowels.
ἀφωροῦμαι, 10002.
Αχαικός, 48.
ἄχαρις, 474.
ἀχρεῶνας, 1035.
αχθεσθήσομαι, 996,1, 1885-
ἀχθέσομαι, 996 1, 1885.
ἀχθήσομαι, 1882.
άχθομαι, 99621 1004-
+ part., 2128.
+ ὅτι or el, 2129 f.
'Αχιλλείδη (του), 278.
Αχιλλεύς, 403.
ἀφίει, 746, 860, 960 α, αχνάρι, τό, 130.
99661.
ἀφίειν, 960 4.
ἀφίεις, αφεις, 148, 702.
ἀφιερόννομεν, 853.
ἀφιερώννοντα, 823, 853.
ἀφιερώσασιν, 793.
ἀφίημι, 746, 775, 937, 957.
becomes apia & ápéŵ,
960, 1916.
+ infin., App. vi. 12 c [3].
ἀφικνέομαι, 996 α
ἀφικόμην, 996
ἀφίνω, 902, 906, 958, 960.
ἀφίξομαι, 996.01 990110
ἀχνός, ἀτμός, 179.
ἀχρειέστερος, -τατος, 500.
ἀχρεῖος, 465 ; emprt., 500.
1. ἄχρι (ἄχρις), 222.
with gen., I314.
for πρίν, 2007.
'until,' constr., 2001.
2. äxpi, 'as long as,' 17762,
1784 f.
- dv, 1776", 1784.
οὗ, 1776, & 2, 1784.
ὅτε, 1776,, 1784.
+aor. for plpf., 1857.
ἄχρι(ς), 222.
594
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
άχυρα, 35.
ἄχώρα, 35.
ἅψεσθαι, 1478.
ἀψηλός, 130.
ἀψινθᾶτον, 1052.
ἄψινθος, ἡ & δ, 292.
-άω, in 4-P, 1085 f.; in
P-N, 850 ff., 856, 862;
in northern N, 854.
& -άγω, in N, 863.
& -έω, struggling, 85o ff.,
854.
in N from .ίω, 859°;
from aor. Ζησα ? 853.
ἄωμε” for ἄγωμεν, 863.
& âµe, 155°.
-Βαίνω, ils compounds in βάσαρμος, 187.
G-B, 755 [1].
Βακαρίτζα, 1040 0 0.
Βακαριτζιώτης, 1040 c c.
Βάκχιος, 1040.
Βάκχις, 298, 1040.
Βάκχος, Βάχχος, 56.
Báλe, 99624 •
βαλείν, 911 α.
Βαλέριος, 52.
βαλέσθαι, 911 α.
Βασιλάκης, 1040 Β α.
Βασιλάκιος, 104ο Β.
Βασιλάς, 1043.
βασιλέα, - ληα, Αpp. ii. 14 1.
βασιλεᾶ (&), App. iii. 15.
βασιλεα(ν) (τύν), App. iii.
23.
βασιλέων (τόν), 330, App.
iii. 6a & g.
βασιλέα, -λεια, 201
βάλλω, 864, 904, 99624; βασιλέας, δ, 339, App. iii.
ἔβαλον, 917.
still in N, 905.
from ἐμβάλλω, 723.
βαλμένος, 1875, 99624.
-¿WN, -AON, -Aoyca, part. in, Báλvw, 904.
458; in N, 459.
ἄωρος, ἄγουρος, 155.
βαλομενος, 911 a.
βάλον for βάλε, 99624
ἀωρότηταν (τήν), App. iii. βαλοῦ, 9I 1 b.
6 d.
B, B, forms of, 2, 5 [2], 9.
pronunciation of, 9, 24,
54 f., 61 ff., 193.
a labial, 22.
a media, 22.
a mute, 23".
B for F, 63.
B, symbol for Βραχεία συλ-
βάλω, 99624.
βάλω from ἐμβάλω, 99625
βάλων, 996 4
βαλών, 911 α.
Báve, 99624 ·
Bávw, 723, 902, 904, 99624 ·
βαπτισμένος, 736.
βάπτω, 874, 875.
βάρβαρος, 465.
12 0.
βασιλέας, δ, 407, 1017.
βασιλέες, App. ii. 14 Α.
Βασίλει (του), 3ΟΙ.
βασιλέια, -λέα, 201, App. ii.
14 Λ.
βασιλειά (τόν), 155 1.
βασιλεικοῦ, 34.
Βασίλειος, 298.
βασιλεῖος, -λέως, App. ii.
14 A.
Βασίλεις (δ), 301.
βασιλεῖς οἱ, τούς), 332,
App. ii. 14 A.
βασιλειώς (τοῦ), 155 6.
βασιλέος (του), App. ii.
14 Δ.
βασιλές, δ, 273.
βασιλεῦ, ὦ, in exclam., 2184.
βασιλεύγω, 861.
Βαρεία (προσωδία), 703, 76, βασιλεύγω, 1088.
βαρβάτος, 1052.
Βαρβύλλεια, 35.
βαριά, adv., 522.
App. i. 2 f.
intersonantic
155d.
dropped,
βαρειέται, 858.
λαβή, App. ii. 16 [3].
-Β-, epenthetic, 188.
B+C = 4, 180, 337 α, 884.
B'(=2), 631, 645-
B(=2000), 645.
Βαβιλών, 35.
Βαβυλών, 35.
Βαγγέλης, 135.
Bayiroa, 1040 α c.
βάδαν, βάδην, 29.
βαδίζω, 99632, 998.
βαδιοῦμαι, 996.2.
βάζω, 737, 99620
βάθητα, τά, 424.
βάθος, 348, 423, 424; (το)
• in depth, 1233,
,
1270, 1305.
>
βάθου & -s (τοῦ), 341.
βαθουλός, 1059.
βαθύρριζος, 1108.
βαθύς, 401, 402.
βαίημεν, 979.
βαίνω, 980, 9962; ἔβην,
979, 980, ; βέβηκα, ας
pres., 1868 f.
from βάλλω, 904.
βαρέως φέρω, 2128 f.
βαρίς for -ρύς, 35.
βαρίσκω, 1098.
βαρμένος, 99624
Βαρνάβα (του), 277.
Βαρνάβας, 283.
βαρνούκιος, 1040 D.
βαροκαρδίζω, 1109.
Bápos, 348, 423, 424.
Βαρούχας), 2181.
βαροφορτωμένος, 1151.
βάρσαμο, 187.
βαρύθυμος, 11ο8.
βαρυκαρδίζω, 1109.
ΒΑΡΥΝΕΙΝ, as accentual term,
App. i. 9, 19-22.
βαρύς, 401, 402; in com-
pounds, 1109.
Bapyc, as accentual
App. i. 9, 19-22.
βαρύτερα, adv., 522,
term,
βασιλευκότες, 736, 740.
βασίλευς, 84.
βασιλεύς, 403.
becomes βασιλέας, 407.
βασιλεύω, 701, 1088 1853 f.
4 set (intr.), yor.
βασιλέως (τοῦ), App. ii.
14 A.
βασιλῆ (τόν), 406.
βασιλήα, -λέα, App. ii. 14 Α.
βασιλῆες, -λῆς, Αpp. ii. 14 Α.
Βασίλης, 283, 301,
βασιλιάς for -εύς, 407.
Βασιλίτσης, 1040 cc.
Βασιλώ (ή), 414.
Bácic or Oécic, in A, 18,
App. ii. 8 [4].
βαστάζω, 870, 801.
βαστάω, 853°, 869, 9804
-βάστε, 99623 & 25.
Βαστίας, 63 [2].
-βάσω οι βιβάζω, 996...
βάτος, ἡ & δ, 245, 292.
βαρύτητος (τῆς), App. i. 150. Βατραχομυομαχία, 1157.
ΒαρτόHCIC, 84.
βάσανον, τό, 249.
βάσανος, 249.
ΒΑῒ, τό, ΙΙ.
βαυκάλι, τό, App. iii. 7
[I].
+
595
Q q 2
Ι.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
βῆτα (τό), from beth, 2,
9 f.; 7d & † —, 9ª.
ἡ
-, 1266.
Bódi, Tú, 152.
Βοηδρομιών, 201
βαφέας, δ, 273.
βοάω, μέγα
βαφές, δ, 273.
βαφτίζομαι, 1474.
βάφω, 875.
βγάζω, 723.
or βήχας, 347.
βήχω, 8652.
βγαίνω, 135, 143, 755
βήχας (δ) for βήξ, 357.
Βάχχος, Βάκχος, 56, 171. βῆχοι for βήχες, 357.
βγάλλω, 143.
-Βρω from -βω, 876.
Βd from πδ or οδ, 172.
βδέλλα, ἀβδέλλα, 130.
βέ, ban, 39.
βέβαια, ' certainly,
βέβαιος, 309.
βία, 1382.
βιάζομαι, 10001, 1001 f.
βιάζω, 10001, 1003.
βίαιος, 309.
βιβάζω, 889, 996.9 &
25*
leads to βάζω, 737.
2060.
Βίβιος, 51, 52.
βεβαιόω + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
βεβαιώνομαι, 1474.
βεβέ(ε), 39.
βέβηκα, as pr., 1868 f.
βεβίβασται, 996 25.
βεβίωταί μοι, 996.
βέβλαμμαι, 132, 990 27.
Béßrapa, 732, 996,7.
βέβλεψα, 99620-
βέβληκα, 99624
βεβλήκαμεν, Αpp. i. 16.
βεβλήκειν for -κει, App. iii.
19 [1].
βέβλημαι, 29.
βεβλήσομαι, 99624 •
βεβύηκα, 99630.
βεβούλευσεν δ ἐβούλευκεν,
736 [1].
,
βεβούλημαι, 99692
βεβρώκαμεν, Αpp. i. 16 a.
βεβώς, 996.3.
βέε, ‘ban, 62.
Βειθινάρχης, 35.
βέκας, 63 [2].
βελονάδες, οἱ, 29o.
βελονᾶς, 287.
βελτίονα (τόν), 381.
βελτίονας (τούς), 351.
βελτίους (τούς), 381.
βέλτιστος, 5041
βελτίω (τόν), 381.
βελτίων, βέλτιον, 5041
Η
Βέργον, 63 [2].
Βερνίκη, 1361.
Βερενίκη, 1361.
βέτος, 63 [ 2 ].
βῆ for βῆτα, 9.
βῆ, bun, 39, 62.
βῆ βῆ, 39.
βηβῆ, 39.
βηβῆν, 39.
Βυζαντίου, 35.
*
βιβλιογράφος, 1106.
-βιβῶ, 99620.
-βιβῶμαι, 99620
Βιόλας, 63 [2].
Bíos, & & To, 249".
Biów, 9899, 99626 •
Βιτάλης, 298, 301.
Βιττᾶδος (του), 288.
βιώσομαι, 980, 99620 &
βιώσω, 99620.
100 ·
Βλαμμένον (τύν), 736.
βλαμμένος, 99627.
βλαβῆναι, Αγγ. i. 15 α.
βλαβήσομαι, 920, 99621,
1885.
βλάβω, 875, 996 27.
βοηθάω, 854, 1088.
βοηθέω, 854.
βοήσομαι, 99640 -
βοήσω, 999.
Βοιβάδος (του), 288.
βόΐδι, τύ, 152.
Βοηδρομιών, 20.
βοΐζω, 869.
βολά, ή, 651, App. ii. 1o.
βολεί, βολῇ, 2016.
βόλτα, 131.
βόλλα, App. ii. 1o.
βύλλομαι, Αγ. ii. 14 B.
βύλομαι, βούλ-, App. ii. 14 Β.
Bûv, 26" b.
0
βορεᾶς, 286, 390.
1
Βορθαγόρας, 63 [2].
Βορρά (τόν), 195, App. iii.
22 C.
Boppas, 285, 287".
βορρέας, 285.
'βύς for βουβύς, 030.
βοσκηθήσομαι, 99031
βοσκημένος, 996 ι·
βοσκήσω, -σομαι, 99631
βοσκίζω, 869, 99631·
βλάπτω, 732, 874, 9217 f., βοσκική, ή, 1970, 1182 0.
99627.
with accus., 1242.
βλάστακας, 5, 1042.
βλαστάνω, 99628 -
βλαστάω, 99628.
βλαστήσω, -ομαι, 99628
βλαστολογώ, 1104.
βλάφτω, 875, 99627 -
Βλάχικος, 1077.
βλάψομαι, 990,1, 1885.
βλάψω, 996 27.
27
βλέποντα, as adv., 823.
βλέπονταν, ας adv., App. iii.
201.
βλέπω, 8651, 99630 δε
maid. -ομαι, 1469.
ὅτι, App. vi. 13 [1].
βλέψομαι, 99620
βλέψω, 99620.
·
βληθήσομαι, 99624
βλητέον, 1051.
βληχάομαι, 10ΟΙ.
186;
βλογάω (εὐλογ-), 135, 723,
854; -οῦμαι, 1474.
βλογιά, εὐλογία, 135.
βλογοῦμαι, 1474.
βλύζω δε -ύω, 868.
βόσκομαι, 996 1.
βύσκω, 869, 99631, 1098.
βόστρυξ, Αp. iii. 12.
βόστρυχος, δ, Αpp. iii. 12.
βοτάνη, ή, 249.
βοτανίσ τι, 713.
βότανον, τύ, 249.
βότρυς, 388.
Βοττᾶ & -άδος & -ᾶτος (τοῦ),
288.
βουβός, 'βύς, ο30.
βούζω, 869, 99630-
βοηθάω, 854.
βουήξω, 99630 •
βούκύλος, 1104.
βουλεῖ, βουλῇ, 20
βούλει for -λῃ, 763, 99632 -
+subj., 1909.
βούλεσαι, 773.
βούλεσθε + mulj., 1909.
I. βουλεύω, 701.
2. βουλεύομαι περί τινος,
1642.
πρὸς τοὺς καιρούς,
1657 a.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
βουλῇ, βουλεῖ, 20.
βουληθήσομαι, 9903
βηθοῦ for βυθοῦ, 35.
Βησεύς, 49.
βλύω & -ύζω, 868.
Bhooμai, 980, 996×3 -
-βήσω, 996.3.
βοάω, 869, 99630;
ήσομαι,
23
998.
βουληθώ, 9963
βούλῃς, ἐὰν
9963-
596
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
βουλήσομαι, as pres., 1889. | βρίσκω, from εὑρ-, 135, 723, | γααλύψω, 30.
Β.
βουλλωμένος, 736.
βουλοίμην ἄν, 1978.
βούλομαι, App. ii. 14 B.; 119,
99632, 1004, 1006.
augment of, 722 ff.
constr., 2087 f.; βου-
λοίμην ἄν, 1978.
+ infin., 2086 f.; in
G-1, App. vi. 15; in
Ν, 2086; for fut.,
1894, 1896, App. iv.
4.
+ἵνα (Ν νά), 20864,
2088, App. vi. 16.
+ ὅτι, App. vi. II.
βουνάκι", τό, 1038.
βουνόν, τό, 249.
βουνός, δ, 249.
βουπλήξ, 1153.
βους, 408; in compounds,
BovoeBoúrons, 1040 D b.
Βογοτροφηδόν, writing, 4.
βουτάω, 853.
βούτυρο, τό, 186.
βου ζω, 99630-
βουῶ, 99030 ; see βοάω.
βούων, 63 [2].
Bow, 869; see Boáw.
βράδ' (βράδυ), 219.
βράδιον, 51ο.
βράδυ, τό, 503.
βραδυάζει, 868.
βραδύς, 401 ;
λαλῆσαι, 2001.
βραδύτερον, 519.
βραδύτής, 360.
βρακκᾶς, δ, 1043.
βράμηλον, αβρ-, 130..
Βρασίδας, 283.
βραστές, 442, 1052.
βράν (βράδυ), 155.
Βραχέα φωνήεντα, 17.
99696, 1098.
βρίστω, 99640-
βρίχνω, 99608.
βροντᾷ, ils subj., 1166.
βροντάζοντα, 868 [1].
βροντάζω, 868 & [1].
βροντάζων, 868 [1]
βροντάω, 853°, 868 & [1].
βρυωνία, αβρωνιά, 130.
βρῶ, 996 40
96
1. βρωμάω, 10001, 1003.
2. βρωμάομαι, 1001.
- becomes βρωμάω & -έω,
10001.
·
βρωμένος, 99690
βρωμέω, 10001·
βρωμούσ(σ)α, 1067.
βρώσομαι, 996 91.
By becomes πτ, 172.
Βύβλος, Bibulus, 136.
Βυζαντίνος, 1031, 1080.
βυζάνω, 902.
βύζω & βύω, 868.
βυθύς, δ, 249.
βύθος, τό, 249".
βύω & βύζω, 868.
-Βω, from -πτω, 875:
- & -βγω, 876.
-βῶ, from βαίνω, 99629.
βῷδι, βύΐδι, βύδι, 152.
βωλά, App. ii. 10.
Γαβιανός, 51.
Γαβίδιος, 51.
Γάβιλλος, 51.
Γαβρήλης, Γαβριήλ, 148,
218".
Γαβριήλ, Γαβρήλης, 148,
218.
γαϊδουρολάτης, 1104.
γαλμα, αἷμα, 155.
ráïs, 298.
γάλα, 4332.
γαλάζιος, 1073.
γάλακτος (τοῦ), 4332.
γάλατα for -κτα, 4332.
γαλατᾶς, δ, 4332
Γαλάτηα, 38.
γάλατι for -κτι, 4332.
γάλατος for -κτος, 4332
γαλάτου for -κτος, 4332.
Γάλβα (του), 277.
Γάλβας, 283.
γαλεομυομαχία, 1156.
γαλήνη, 10.48.
γαλήν᾽ ὁρῶ, 85°.
yahópuŠv“, 1105”, 1156.
γαμ-β-ρός, 188.
γαμβρός, 57.
γαμέω, 99631.
4
different from -ομαι,
1471.
γαμηθήσομαι, ήσομαι, 99034
βώλομαι, βούλ-, Αpp. ii. 1.4 B. γαμημένος, 99634 -
βῶλος, ἡ & δ, 292.
εἰς τὸ βωμοῖοισιν, 30.
Βραχεία προσωδία, App. ii.
16 & [3].
βραχιόλιν, App. iii. 9 e.
βραχύ, ' a little, 1278.
βραχύς, 301.
βρέ from μωρέ, 251.
'βρέ from εὑρέ, 914.
βρεγμένος, 99639 .
βρεμένος, 179 & [1], 99639 -
βρέφος, 251.
βρέχει, its subj., 1166.
βρέχω, 8652, 99639.
for ὕω, 996.89
βρῇ for εὑρῇ, Αpp. vi. 19.
βρίζω, from ὑβρ-, 723.
βρισκούμενο, τό, 2112.
[, г, origin of, 1 f.
forms of, 2, 5 [2], 9.
sound of, 9, 24 L., 54 f.,
58.
jjh, Gol
aspirated, 72.
a guttural, 22.
a media, 22.
a muta, 23".
[ for k, 59 b.
Γ
for Latin c, 59 c.
from r, 189 ff.
repl. by (Italian) g, 24.
dropped before r, Χ. ξ, ψ,
190.
--, anaptyctic, 155".
interconsonantal, 155°.
inter sonantic, 155, 860,
863.
‍+c=έ, 180, 337 a, 884 1.
γ' (-3), 635, 645.
‚Y (=3000), 645.
γὰ fur γάμμα, 4,4.
γα, γεά, γῆ, Αpp. ii. 14. 4.
γαμήσομαι, 99034
γαμήσω, 99634-
34°
γάμμα (τύ), from giuel, 2,
9 f., qd.,
γαμοῦμαι (fut.), 99634.
Taμovрeiva, 59 c.
γαμψώνυξ & -υχος, 439.
γαμώ (fut.), 99634 ;
γαμέω.
γαμάω & -ύω, 852.
γανύω & -άω, 852.
Γάντιος, 59 c.
see
Αγαπᾷ for ἀγαπᾷς, 219.
γάρ, 117, 1737 6, 1742,
1748.
γαρέλαιον, 1156.
γαστέρα, ή, 386.
γαστήρ, 383.
γαστρός, App. i. 16 a.
γάστρων, 1042, 1043
γάτα, ή, 1038.
γατί, τό, 1038.
yavyújw, 1096.
ΓΓ, as initial, 57.
-ΓΓ-, in syllabication, 92.
γγαλονόμος, 1104.
ΓΔ for κδ, 173 f.
597
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
Γò from as or χδ, 172.
γδαίνω, γδένω, 902.
γδαρμένος, 99648.
γδάρω, 99648.
γδένω, γδαίνω, 902.
γδέρνω, 99643.
γδέχομαι, 755.
γδικιώνομαι, 755, 10002.
γδύνω, ἐκδύνω, 135, 99656.
& mid., 1469.
yé, enclitic, 102 e.
attached to pers. pron.,
529 f.
use of, 1700, 1743.
inserted, 1748.
+ ἄρα or ἆρα leads
γάρ, 117, 1748 f.
μὲν for -μήν, 17442
·
γελάω, 840, 841, 853, Γερμανίκηα, 38.
99685, 998.
ἐπί τινι, 1582 d.
γελοιότερον, adv., 520.
γελοιοτέρως, 520.
γελοίως, 520.
γελώσα, γελώσα, App.
14 Λ.
γελοντα, as adv., 823.
γέλως (δ), 362.
γελως, 326.
γερμένος, 996 58-
γερνάω, 906, 99636 -
γέρνω, 903, 99658.
γεροκομάω, 1104.
γέροντας, δ, 296, 339, 373.
ii. γερόντοι, οἱ, 296, 346.
γερόντου (του), 296.
γέρος for γέρων, 338, App.
iii. 12.
γεροῦ for ἱεροῦ, 59 c, 155 α.
γελώσα, γελάονσα, App. ii. γέρων, 163, 359.
14 Λ.
γεμάτος, 1052.
to
γεμίζω, 868. 937.
for πίμπλημι, 9742·
with double accus., 1319.
γέμω & -ίζω, 868.
-re for & from -ee & ie, yeváμevos, 99637.
861.
γέα, γῆ, App. ii. 14 Λ.
γεγένημαι, 99637.
γεγραμμένα, 738.
γέγονα, 99637.
as pres., 1867 f.
γέγοναν, 786.
γεγονεία, 200.
yeyovús, 'so old,' 1277.
γέγραμμαι, 732.
γεγραμμένοι εἰσίν & ἦσαν,
764.
γεγραμμένος, 126, 441.
γέγραφα, 732.
γέγραφεται, 764.
γέεννα, γέννα, 148.
γειά, υγεία, 134 e.
γεινωμένος, 99637-
γείνω, 99697.
γείρε, τό, App. vi. 27.
γείρω, 996 8 -
γεις, εἷς, 155, 595, 621.
γεισηπόδισμα, 37.
γεισήπους, 37.
γείτοναν (τόν), App. iii.
g a.
γείτονας, δ, App. iii. 1 2 6.
γειτόνοι, οἱ, 3.46.
γειτόνους (τους), 346.
γελαζούμενος, 2111.
γελαῖσα, γελώσα, App.
14 A.
γενειάζω & -άω, 868.
γενειάσκω, 868, 1097.
γενειάω & -άζω, 868.
γένειεν, 805.
γένεος, γένους, App. ii. 14 Λ.
γενέστω, 177.
γένευς, γένους, App. ii. 14 Λ.
γενηθήσομαι, 99637.
γενὴν for -νῇ, Αpp. iii. 20 b.
-ΓΕΝΗΣ, 298.
γενήσομαι, 99637.
γένιτο, 44.
γέννα, γέεννα, 148, 148 ?
γεννάδες fur -δαι, 267.
γενναῖος, μᾶλλον —, 510.
γεννάω fur τίκτω, 996272.
for ψύω, 996.00 •
γεννούμενος, 99637.
γενολόγον, App. iii. 9 α.
γένομαι, as pres., 99637,
App. iv. 3.
γενόμενος, as pres., 99637.
γένος, 423 ; (το)
by
birth,' 1233, 1269 f.
for γένους, App. ii. 14. Λ.
γενοῦ, 99637.
A.
γενούμενα, τά, 2112.
γενούμενος, 99637.
γένους, γένεος, App. ii. 14 4.
γένω, 99637.
ii. γενωμένος, 99637.
γέρα, τά, 421, Αpp. ii. 14. Λ.
γεραιός, 497.
γελάσα, γελώσα, App. ii. γεραίτερος, 497.
γελἂν ἡδύ, 1266.
14 Λ.
γελασείω, 1099.
γελασμένος, 99635.
30
γελάσομαι, 9963
γέλασον, in N, 813.
γελαστός, 1052, 2162.
γελάσω, 996.
γεράματα, τά, 421.
γερανός, δ, 292.
γέρας, 186, 440.
γερασμένος, 99636.
γεράσω, 99630 -
γερατειά, τά, 421.
γέρικος, 1077.
·
becomes γέρος, 338, App.
iii. 12.
Γέτα (του), 277.
γεύγω, 861.
γεύω, & mid., 1467.
τινά τινος, 1298; ομαί
τινος, ib.
γεφυρίτζι, τό, 1040 0 0.
Γεω-, γη-, 1135.
γεώλοφος, 1135.
γεωμετρηκέναι, 736.
γεωμέτρης, 283, 1135, 1152.
γεωργηκέναι, 736.
Γεώργης, 283.
Γεωργιάδης, 1029.
Γεώργο (ω), 294.
Γεώργος, 294.
γεωργός, 1135-
γῆ, 286, 290.
in compounds, 1135.
ΓΗ-, γεω-, Ι1135.
γήλοφος, 1135.
vîpas,.29b,
& γέρας (τό), 186, 420.
dat. ήρει, 421.
γηράσκω, 99636,1097; -ομαι,
99630-
·
γηράσομαι, -σω, 99636
γηράω, 906, 99630 ; -ομαι,
99686
γηρῶντος (τοῦ), 99630 -
-γήρως, 326.
γῆς, ἡ, 248, 286.
γητειά, γοητ-, 152.
γητεύω, γοητ-, 152.
re, becomes xo, 172.
γι' = γιά for διά, 1520.
γιὰ for διά, 1491, 1520,
1535-
for dat., 1358, 1362; see
διά.
γιαίνω (ὑγιαίνω), 723,996 45 -
γιαμένος, 996 200 -
γιανὰ οι γιὰ νά (διανά), 1760,
1769.
•
in final clauses, 1954".
for past action, 1954".
Γιαννάκος, 1040 Β α.
598
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
Γιάννης, Ιάννης, 150 α.
γιάνω, 996285.
γιὰ ὅτι, γιατί, 15ο α.
γιατί for διὰ τί, ' why, 2045.
for διότι, because, Igod.
γίγνομαι, γίν-, 59 6, 96997,
1001 ; γέγονα, as pres.,
1868 f.; see also γί-
νομαι.
>
auxiliary, 687.
τινος, 1245, 1288 f.
από τινος, 1245.
+ dat., 1367 f. ; γίγνεταί
μοι βουλομένῳ, 1369.
+ part., 2106 f.
γιγνόμενος,
1361.
from γιγεν-,
pf.
γιγνώσκω, γιν-, 59 6, 969,
99638, 980g; aud aor.
έγνων, 1868 f.;
ἔγνωκα as pres., ib.
leads to γνώθω, 737.
constr., 2133 f.; 2137 c;
-εσθαι παρά τινι, 1632.
ὅτι, App. vi. 16.
γίδιος, ίδιος, 155.
γιερός, 1860.
γίνομαι, γίγν-, 591, 99637,
1003; see γίγνομαι.
+ pres. part. for pf., 1845.
γίνεται ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
τινὸς οι από τινος, 1245.
γίνουνται, 778.
γίνω, 99637.
γινωμένος, 99637.
γινώσκουσιν, as subj., 779.
γινώσκω, γιγν-, 59 6, 99638 ;
see γιγνώσκω.
γιός (υιός), δ, 433.
ΓΚ-, as initial, 57.
γλάρος, λάρος, 131.
Γλαυκίας, 283.
Γλαύκος, 76 [1].
γλαυκός Γλαύκος, 46 [1].
γλέπ' (βλέπει), 219 5.
γλέπω, 99629-
γλήγορος, 126, 134, 135,
99658.
γληγορύτερος, 496.
γλίχομαι with gen., 1294.
γλυκλας, 30.
γλυκαίνω, 893, 900.
γλυκεία, γλυκιά. 032.
γλυκεῖς οἱ, αἱ, τούς, τάς),
332.
γλυκές (τῷ) for -κεί, 402.
γλυκόξινος, 1156.
γλυκὺς for -κύς, 496.
γλυκύφωνος, 1109.
γλυκύθυμος, ιτοδ.
|
γλυκύν (τό), 331, App. iii. 7. γουδί, τό, 131.
γλυκύνω, -αίνω, 900.
γλυκύπτερος, 1156.
γλυκύς, 401, 402 ; -ύτερος,
492.
γλυκώτερος, 496.
γλυμμένον, 736.
γλυτώνω, constr., 1317.
γλωσσᾶς, δ, 287, 1043.
γλωσσοῦ, ἡ, 1043.
γνάπτω, 875.
γραφείον, 59 b.
γράφω, 875.
γούμενος, ἡγούμ-, 135.
γοῦν, 1700, 1743.
γούρνα, urna, 155.
γουρουνόπουλου, 1041.
γρᾶ, γραῖα, 409.
γραιά for γροῦς, 409.
γράμμα, 368.
·
yun for yvoî, App. v. 8º.
γνῇς for γνοίς, Αpp. v. S.
γνήσιος, App. i. 16 a.
Γνίφων, 59 0.
γνοιάζει με, 996162
γνοιάζομαι, 1000
γνοίημεν, 979.
γνοίην, 979, 99638.
Γνόμη, 267.
γνούς, 455, 99633-
γνώ, 99638.
γνώην, 99638
γνώθι, 99638 -
γνώθω (from γινώσκω), 737,
865, 980, 996gg.
γνώμην ἀποφαίνομαι, 1470.
γνώναι, 99638.
γνώνω, 99638.
γνώομεν, App. ii. 12 [3].
γνωρίζω, 130, 143, 868.
for γι(γ)νώσκω, 980.
γνώριμος, 1055.
γνῷς, 979, 99638-
γνώση, ή, 1020, App. iii. 15.
γνώσκω, 737.
γνωσμένος, 99638.
γνώσομαι, 99638
γνώσω, 99638
- Γž, final, 90.
γογγύζω, 868.
γοητεία, γητ-, 152.
γοητεύω, γητ-, 152.
γοιός, 155.
Γολγοθά, 125.
Γολγοθά, 125.
Γονατάς, 287, 1043.
γόνατο” for γόνυ, 433.
γόνατος (του), 433·
yoveîs, ol, 403".
γονέοισιν (τοῖς), 346.
γονέους (τους), 346.
γονῆ (του), 407.
γονῆς, δ, 407.
γόνυ, τό, 4339•
Γοργίας, 283.
Γόρτυν & -υνα, ή, App. iii. 12.
Γορτύνιος, Κορτ-, 59 0.
Γράμματα αρχαία, App. ii.
12; παλαιά, Ατ-
τικά, ἐπιχώρια, ib. ;
Φοινικήΐα, Καδμήτα,
5 [1].
γραμματαίαν (τόν), App. iii.
σα.
γραμματεῖ & -τῇ, 26, 28 b.
γραμματε(ι)ον, 20.
γραμματῆ (τύν), 406.
γραμματῇ & -τεί, 26, 28 b.
1. γραμματική (ή), 1182 b.
2. Γραμματική, defined, 25;
see grainiar.
γραμματίς (τούς), 34.
γραμμένος, 126, 442, 737,
99689-
Ypaû (ŵ), 218d.
γραύς, 408; in N, 409;
& γρης, 29.
- (αἱ, τάς), 332.
γραφεύς, 403.
γραφή τινος, 1292.
γράφου", 777.
γράφσε, imprt., 813 [1].
γράφω, 732, 8651, 886, 921 1,
99699;mid., 1469; pass.,
1462.
different
from -ομαι
(mid.), 1471, 1473;
νόμον, 1471; -ομαί τινα,
ib.; -ομαί τινά τινος,
1292.
— ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
γράψε, imprt., 813.
γράψετε, imprt., 813.
γράψιμον (τό), 1022.
γράψον, in N, 813.
γράψου" for -ουσιν, 777.
γράψ'τι, 713.
γρεμνός, 130.
γρηά for γραία, 409.
Γρηγορᾶς, 1043.
γρηγορεί, 723 [1].
γρηγορέω, 99658 -
γρήγορος, 126.
γρηγορώ, 723 & [1].
γρης, γραύς, 295.
γρωνίζω, γνωρίζω, 143.
[т, becomes KT, 172.
γυάλινον, 155 α.
|
Γύλιος, 1040.
599
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
Γύλις, 1040.
δαγκωμένος, 99610-
γυμνάζω, 886 ; mid. 1467. δαγκώνω, 99640 -
γυμνασίας, 200.
γυμναστική, 1069.
γυμνής, 360.
γυμνός τινος, 1318.
γύναι (δ), 257, 4334·
γυναί, αί, 4331
— or -αίκα, 347.
γυναικάκι", 1038.
iii. 6 a, c ff.
δάδοιν for -δοῖν, 351.
δαδοῦχος, 1113.
δάδων for -δῶν, 351.
δαιμον (δ), 377.
δαίμονα (ω), App. iii. 15.
δαίμονας, δ, 296, 379.
γυναίκα, ἡ, 338, 348, 4334 b. δαιμονάω & -ίζω, 868.
δαιμονιάρης, 1040 Α.
δαιμονίζω & -άω, 868.
γυναῖκαν (τήν), 330, App. δαιμόνοι, οἱ, 296, 346, 379.
γυναικάνηρ, 1145.
γυναῖκες (τάς), 332.
γυναικόπαιδα, 1156.
γυναικός (της), in N, 341.
γυνεκί (τ), 49.
γυνή, 4334; accentuation
of, ib.
in N, 343, 4331·
γυνῆς (της), 4331·
γυνί, ὑνίον, 159.
γυρεύγω, 861.
γυρεύοντα, as adv., 823.
γυρεύω, 701.
γυρίζονταν, as adv.,
20.
App. iii.
γυρίζω, 868, 906 (intr.),
14564.
γυρνάω, 906.
γυροπόδι, 1105.
γύρου (for περί), 1491, 1634.
γύρ' σι for ἐγύρισε, 030.
γύρωθεν, 1634.
γύψος, ή, 292.
γυψῶται, ἐὰν —, 850.
'γώ for ἐγώ, 133".
Δ, Δ, origin of, 2.
forms of, 2, 9.
predecessor of ζ, 20.
sound of, 9, 24, 54 f.,
61 f.
a dental, 22.
a media, 22.
a mute, 23.
repl. by at in South Ita-
lian N, 24°.
-Δ-, openthetic, 188, 385.
intersonantic dropped,
155°.
δ' (=4), 636, 645.
Ô ( = 4000), 645.
A+ c = 0, 884 c.
δά, in N, 575.
Aa-, 1125.
δαγκαμένος, 99640
δαγκάνω, 902, 99040-
δαγκασμένος, 99610-
δαιμόνου for δαίμονος, 296.
δαίμων, 374, 377.
dáis, dâs, 150 d.
δακαμένος, 99640-
δακάνω, 99640
δακέθυμος, 1 106, 1116.
| δακνᾶς, δ, 287, 1043.
δάκνω, 99640 -
δακύνοντα, 853, 99640-
δάκρυ, τό, 303, 387, 390.
δακρύζω, 869, 1996.
δάκρυον, τό, 390.
δακρύω, τοι, 869; ἐδάκρυσα,
1853 f.
·
+ accus., 1244
δακτυλάκι, 1038.
δακτυλήθρα, 1026.
δακτυλίδιν, τό, spp. iii. 9 c.
δακτύλιν, τό, App. iii. 9 c.
δάκτυλον, τό, 249.
δάκτυλος, δ, 249.
δακωμένος, 99640 -
δακώνω, 9960.
Δαμαενέτος, 19" [r].
δάμαλις, 1041.
δαμήετε, App. ii. 12 [3].
Δαμοκλέα, τοῦ, 277.
δάμυ των δάμου, 29".
δάμω fur δήμου, 20.
Δάναπρι, τοῦ, 278.
Δάναστρι, τοῦ, 278.
δανείζω, 868 ; for κίχρημι,
996181; mid.,
mid., 1470,
1472.
differs from -ομαι, 1471.
δαπανούμενα, 850", twice.
δαπανοῦνται, 850.
δαρθάνω, 99641
δαρμένος, 99648.
δαρμός, 1020.
|
δασκαλεύω, οι.
δάσκαλος, δ, 126; from διδ-,
737, 99619.
δάσκιος, 1125.
δάσος, τό, 348.
δάσου & -s (του), 341.
Sac πνεῦμα, 7Ι.
δασύς, 401, 402.
Δατισμός, 996301 -
δαχθέντας, 996410
δαχτύλι, τό, 174.
δαψιλής, 425.
1. δὲ for δέλτα, γι
2. dé, ‘but,' 102, 563, 1704f.,
1709 f., 1731 f.
· enclitic, 1o2 e.
after μέν, 1744 f.
for καί, 1719.
after relat., 2024.
repl. by καί, 1703,
1713.
conf. with δή, 563,
1744b.
differs from δή, 1744.
3. δέ for δέν, App. iii. 20 €,
23, 26.
4. δέ or 'δέ from ιδέ, 914.
-Ae, enclitic, 102 f.
intensive, 582.
adverbs in, 433, 1102b.
Δέγμος, 59 C.
δεδάρθαι, 99643 -
δεδέηκα, 99640 -
δεδίημαι, 99610-
δέδεκα, 99645.
δέδεμαι, 99645-
δεδήλωται, App. i. 15 1.
-δεδήσομαι, 99640
δεδηχώς, 99640 -
dédia, 967 b.
49°
δεδιαιτηκώς, 996, 1.
δεδιακόπηκεν, 99648
δεδιακόνημαι, 99648.
δε διακονήσομαι, 99648 -
δεδίδαγμαι, 996 19.
dedidaxa, 99619-
δεδιήγηται, 750 1.
δεδιηκύνημα, 751.
δεδιῄτηκα, 745, 99647.
dedńirnµai, 745, 99647.
δεδιώκηται, 751.
δέδεγμαι, 996.2.
δᾷς from δάις, 150d; δάδων, δεδογμένον, as accus, absol.,
351.
saceîa (πрoowdia), †, 701,
71.
δασκάλα, ή, 292.
δασκάλαμα, το, 99640-
δασκαλεμός, 99040
δασκαλεύ(γ)ω, 99649-
2143.
in P-B, 2145-
δέδοικα, 967 0.
repl. by φοβοῦμαι, 968.
as present, 1868 f.
- μή, 1805, 1827.
δεδόκηκε, 29652
*
600
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
·
δεδόκημαι, 99662 •
δέδομαι for -ωμαι, 963 α.
δεδόξακαν, 786.
δεδόχθη for -θαι, 48.
-δέδρακα, 996 το
δεδρασμένος, 996.53
δεδράμηκα, 996278 •
δέδυκα, 996 55.
-δέδυμαι, 99605-
δεδυστύχημα, 748.
δέδωκαν, 786, 996τι·
δεδώκασι, 793.
δέδωκες, 798.
δέεται, 835.
δέει οι δέῃ, 99610-
δέῃ οι δέει, 996.40 •
δεηθήσομαι, 99646-
δεήσει, 99640.
δεήσομαι, 99640
as present, 1889b.
deńow, 99610.
δέηται, δέιηται, 20.
δειπνέω, -ίζω, -άω, 868, 871. |δένδρι for -δρη (τά), 424.
δειπνίζω, 868.
δεῖπνον, τό, 249.
δείπνος, δ, 249".
δείρω, 99643.
deis, bindest,' 834".
δεῖται, 99648.
deîte, dîte, app. ii. 14 A.
δειχθένταν, App. iii. 6.
δέκα, 645.
δύο, 645.
els, 645.
ἐννέα, 645.
ἕξ, 645.
ἑπτά, 645.
ὀκτώ, 645.
- πέντε, 645.
τέσσαρες, -ρα, 645.
τρεῖς, -τρία, 645.
δεκάδα, ή, 658.
δεκάδες (τάς), 332.
δεκαδύο, 645.
δεκαέξ, 645.
δεκάκις, 648.
δεκακισμύριοι, 645.
δεῖ, 99645 ; changed to δέω, δεκαεπτά, δεκαφτά, 150 c.
δεθήσομαι, 99645 -
2083 f.
constr., 1320.
+ infin., 2081 f.; in de/cavveá, 645.
John, App. vi. 12 c [3] ;
for fut., 1894, App. iv.
4; for -τέος, 1051.
+ ἵνα, 2082, App. vi. II,
16.
δειγματίσουσιν, ἵνα -, 779.
δέιηται, δέη-, 201
δεικνύασι, 936 Δ.
δείκνυε, 936 α.
δεικνύει, 936 α.
δεικνύειν, 936 α.
δεικνύεις, 936 α.
δείκνυμι, 942.
constr., 2135 ff.
δεικνύουσι, 936 € & 0.
a
δεικνύς, 460.
δεικνύσι, 936 1.
δεικνύων, 936 α.
δείλη, μέχρι -5, 1234.
δειλία, whence derived, 41.
δειλιάω, 853° ; -άσω, 839.
δεῖν, 9964; ὀλίγου οι μικροῦ
- 2098.
deîva, d, ró, †, 504, 599.
δεινὰ ὑβρίζειν, 1266.
deîva(v), App. iii. 23.
Δεινοκράτου (or -τους, 432 C.
δείνας, δ, 600.
δεῖνοι, οἱ, 600.
δεῖνον (τόν), 600.
δεινόν ἐστιν εἰ, 1947.
δεινόν ἐστι μή, 1827.
| δεκαννεά,
δεκαπενταρέα, 661.
δεκαπέντε, 1156.
δεκαριά, 661.
δεκάς, 658.
δεκατέσσαρες for - ρας, 332.
δέκατος, 646.
δεκαφτά, 150 c, 645.
δεκοχτώ, 150 α, 645.
δέλιτα, ή, 9, 131.
δέλτα, τό, from daleth, 2,
9 f.; rd & 1, 9b, gª.
ñ,
becomes ἡ δέλτα, 131.
δελτία, used in writing, o7.
δελφάκιον, 1038.
δέλφαξ, 1038.
δελφίς, 376.
δεμένος, 845, 99645-
δέμω, 1104.
δενδροκοπημένην, 736.
δενδροκοπημένης, 736, 740.
δέν for δέν, 725, App. iii.
24, 26.
μπορώ, 132.
δένι μπορώ, 132.
δέντρη lor -δρα (τά), 424.
δένω, 845, 900, 99646-
δεξιά (ή), 1182 1; ἐν -ᾷ,
1234.
Δεξιμένου for -νους, 432 c.
δέξιμον, τό, 371, 1022.
δεξίμου (του), 371.
δεξιότης, 36ο.
δεξιοῦσαι, 773.
δέξομαι, 99644
δεξύς for -ιός, 496.
δέομαι, 99648, 1004.
constr., 1320 f., 2078,
2087 f
+ infin., 2087.
+iva, 2088, App. vi. 16.
τινί, 1320.
-δέομαι, 99645-
δέον, 99640
as accus, absolute, 2143;
in P-B, 2145.
+iva, 2082, App. vi. 16.
δέοντες, in numerals, 642.
δέος, 423.
δέπας, 420.
δέρμα, 368.
δέρνουνται, 778.
δέρνω, 903, 99648.
for τύπτω, 996293 -
δέρω, 903, 92119, 99643 -
δερώ, 99643.
δέσει οι δέσῃ? (τό), App.
vi. 26, 27.
δέσῃ or δέσει? (τό), App. vi.
26, 27.
δεσμοφύλακες (τούς), 332.
δεσπήνης, 35.
δέσποινα, App. i. 15 b.
δέν (δέ), 630; from οὐδέν, δέσποτα (ω), 257, 281.
1799.
proclitic, 97 e.
δεσποτάδες, οἱ, 200.
δέσποτας, ύ, 282.
equivalent to 4 οὐ, 1797, δεσπότης, 281, 282, 283.
1799.
use of, 1801 ff., 1820.
in questions, 20.49.
reduced to δέ, App. iii.
23, 26.
ἐμπορῶ, 130 & [1], 132.
ἔχω -μόν, 1839.
ἠμπορώ, 132.
δὲν . . . κανείς, 1824.
δέντρα, 57.
δεινός, constr., 2090 2091. | δένδρη, τά, 424.
déow, 845, 99645 •
δευρί, 2001 [1].
δεῦρο for ἐλθέ, 996. .
+ subj., 1913 f.
δεῦτε for ἔλθετε, 99630-
+ subj., 1913.
δευτέρα, ή, Μonday,' 647,
650, 1182 b.
δεύτερον (τό), ' twice, 652.
δεύτερος, 646 ; in N, 647.
δέχθαι, App. i. 16 b.
601
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
- δεχθείς, 99644·
-δεχθήσομαι, 9964.
Δημοσθένη & -ην, 330, App. | διὰ νὰ for ἵνα, 1523, 1760,
iii. 6.
δέχομαι, 99644, 1001, 1003. Δημοσθένης, 298, 431.
as pass., 1459.
+ infin., 2094 f.
δεχτώ, 99644
τ. δέω, “bind, 834, 99645;
δήσω, 844.
2. déw, 'want,' 99646-
constr., 1320; déoµai,
ib.
dń, 563, 1700, 1744" f.
origin of, 1744" f.
differs from δέ, 1744.
δῇ, δοίη, δοῖ, 148, App. v.
8.
dy or 'dy for id, App. vi.
19.
δῆθεν, 1700.
δηιοίο, 124.
δημύοιεν, -ύψεν, App. ii.
12
[3].
δηλύετε, δηλοτε, App. ii.
14 A.
δηλομεν, δηλωμεν, δηλοῦμεν,
App. ii. 14. Δ.
δῆλον ἐστί, constr., 2028,
2085 f.
δῆλος εἰμί + part., 2122,
2124.
becomes impers., 2124.
+ ὅτι, 2123 f.
δηλᾶτε, δηλοῦτε, App. ii.
14 1.
δηλοῦμεν, δηλῶμεν, δηλομεν,
App. ii. 14 A.
δηλοῦτε, δηλώτε, App. ii.
14 Λ.
δηλόω, 837.
- constr., 2135 ff.
δηλῶμεν, δηλοῦμεν, App. ii.
14. Α.
δηλώτε, δηλοῦτε, App. ii.
14 A.
Δημᾶς frou Δημήτριος, 287.
δημηγορέω, 1140.
Δήμητερ (ω), 257.
Δημήτηρ, 384, 386.
Δήμητρα, ἡ, 384, 386.
Δημητράκης, 1040 13 1.
Δημητράκος, 1040 Β α.
Δημήτρης, 301.
Δημήτρι (τοῦ), 301.
Δημητριάδης, 1029.
Δημήτριος, 298, 1040.
Δημήτριος, Δημᾶς, 287.
Δημήτρις, 301, 304.
Δημήτρις, 298, 1040.
Δημοκράτου (or -τους, 432 c.
Δημόσθενες (ω), 257.
Δημοσθένου, 432 c.
Δημοσθήνης, 26 b.
δημοσίᾳ, 1382.
Δημοχάρου, 432 0.
δήμοι for -μῳ, 263.
δήμω for -μῳ, 20.
-AHN, adv., 1102 b.
δήξομαι, 99640.
δήξω, 99640-
δήποτε repl. by καί, 1716.
δηποτοῦν repl. by καί, 1716.
δήπου, 1700, 1444".
dns for dois, App. v. 8c.
-AHC, 1028 f.
δήσω, 844, 99645-
δῆτα, 1700.
dîte, deîte, app. ii. 14'^.
δι' = διά.
ἄγνοιαν, 1520.
αἰῶνος, 1533.
ἐλπίδος ἔχω, with infin.,
2086 f.
ἑρμηνέως λέγειν, 1531.
ἔχθρας ιέναι τινί, 1533.
ἡμᾶς, ' through us,
15202.
ὀλίγου, 1526, 1533.
và
1769.
ὅτι, γιατί, 150 α.
παντὸς τοῦ βίου, 1526.
πέντε ἐτῶν, 1529.
- πέντε σταδίων, 1533.
- πολλοῦ, 1526, 1533.
- στόμα ἔχειν, 15201.
στόματος ἔχειν, 1533.
ταῦτα, 15202.
ταχέων, 1533.
τάχους, 1533.
τέλους, 1533.
διὰ τί, οι διατί, 15202,
2044 f.
το + infin. for ἵνα, or
ὅπως, 1522, App. vi. 24;
for causal part., 2151.
TOÛTO, 15202-
φιλίαν, 15202.
φόβον, 15202.
φόβου είναι, 1534.
χειρὸς ἔχειν, 1533.
| Δια-, ζα-, δα-, 155 α, 1125
Δία (τόν), 4336
διάβα, τό, Αγγ. vi. 27.
διαβάζω, 99625 -
διαβάντα, as adv., 823.
διαβάντι, 1369.
διαβιβασθήσομαι, 996 25.
ὅλου, οι διόλου, ' not at διαγίγνομαι + part., 2106 f.
all,' 2060.
ὀργῆς, 1533.
οὐδενὸς ποιεῖσθαι, 1533.
ὀφθαλμῶν ὁρᾶν, 1531.
διά, 1489, 1520-35; in N,
1491; N by-form για
(já), 1554, 1520b,
1535.
+accus., 1520 ff.; for
ὑπὲρ + gen., 1421 ; for
dat. of emotion, 1333,
1388, 1582dl; for ὑπὲρ
+ gen., 1421, 1534 f.;
for διὰ + gen., 1534;
for περὶ + gen., 1421,
1534, 1641, 1642); for
ἐπί + dat., 1389.
+ gen., 1524-35°; for
ὑπό + gen., 1464, 1531;
for instr. dat., 1381.
- repl. by els, 1528; by
simple accus., ib.
βραχέων, 1533.
γῆς, θαλάσσης, 1525.
δεκάτου ἔτους, 1529.
δίκης ἰέναι τινί, 1533.
θαλάσσης, γῆς, 1525.
μακρῶν, 1533.
μέσου, 1524.
διαγίνομαι
2107 & [1].
διαγνώμη, 1137.
παρέρχομαι,
διαγορεύεται + ἵνα, App. vi.
16.
διάγω, 9968.
+ part., 2106 f.
διακομίζω, 2107 & [ 1 ].
repl. by ποιέω, 2107 f.
διαδίδων, 961 ; διδίδων, 996 1.
διαδώ χω, 26, α.
διαζευχθήσεται, 996 τοι·
διαιτάω, 745, 996, τ, -ομαι,
99617;
99647, 1004.
διαιτήσω, 99647.
διακεῖσθαι οἰκείως πρός τινα,
1657 α.
διακονᾶσαι, 99648·
διακονεμένος, 99648 -
διακονέσι ον ήσῃ, 26, α,
37, 99648.
διακονέσω, 843, 99648-
diakovéw, 99648; mid., 854,
996.18, 1486.
intr., 1456".
διακονήσομαι, 99648 -
διακονισμένος, 99648
διακονιστῶ, 99648.
Διακονίτσης, 1040 0 0.
602
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
διάφορος, 465.
διάω, 9963.
ΔΙΓΑΜΜΑ, 2, 11.
διακοσιάκις, 648.
origin of, II.
διάκονος & διάκων, 338, App. | διαφθείρω, 926.
iii. 12.
διακος for διάκων, 338, App.
iii. 12.
διακοσαρέα, 661.
διεδίδετο, 961.
διεθήκασι, 736, 793-
διαφυλάξοι for -ξαι, 805.
διείλαμεν, 796?
διειλεγμαι, 734.
διελάβοσαν, 791.
διελεξάμην, 1005, 1436.
διακόσιοι, -α, 645.
διακοσιοστός, 646.
διδάσκω, 99649.
διακόσοι, 645200-
causative, 1460.
διακρατέω τι, 1244, 1457.
τινά τι, 1279 f.
διακρινέεσθαι, 1478.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
διάκτορος, 439.
δίδει, 996 ι·
διάκτωρ, 439.
δίδειν, 961; δίδειν, 996τι·
App. iii. 12.
διάκων for διάκονος, 338, δίδεις, 961, 996 1.
διαλαλητάδες, οἱ, 29o.
διαλέγομαι, 734, 9901513 2, διδόαμεν, 996τι·
διδάσκαλος, 126, 737, 99649. διενοησάμην, 1005.
διερρωγεία, 260
Διες του Διεῖς, 26", α, 27.
διέφθαρκα, διέφθορα, 925.
διέφθορα, 925, 996297.
διηκονεῖτο, 99648.
διερίσματι, 34.
διέρρηχα, 996235
δίδετε, 961, 996τι·
didns, 961, 99651 ·
διηκονήθην, 99648-
διηκόνησα, 99648
διηκονησάμην, 99648.
1004 f.
διδύασι, 776, 930 α.
+ ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
διδόατε, 776.
διαλέγω τινά τι, 1284.
διδοι, 996 1 -
διαλείπω, οὐ
+ part.,
2126 f.
διαλεκτός, 1052.
διαλέξομαι, 1885.
διαλεχθήσομαι, 1885.
διαλιπών χρόνον, 2148.
Δίαν (τόν), 33o", App. iii.
6 b.
διανὰ διὰ νá) for ἵνα, 1533,
1760, 1769.
διανεμήσομαι, 1885.
διανενέμηκα, 966169.
διανοέομαι, 1004.
+infiu., 2086 f.
διαπεπέταμα, 996207-
διαπέπλοχα, 996210
διαπράττομαι, cause to,'
2037 ff.
διάργυρος,
135"-
δίδοῖς, or eis, 958.
δίδοισα, διδοῦσα, App.
14 B.
47
•
διηκύνουν, 99648
διήλθοσαν, 791.
διηρπάζωσαν, 791.
διητημένος, 99641.
ii. διῄτησα, 99647.
διῃτώμην, 99641.
Διί (τῷ), 4336
Διὶ φίλος, Δίφιλος, 76 [1],
App. i. 2 f.
δίδομαι, 774.
διδόνσα, App. ii. 14 Β.
δίδονσι, App. ii. 1o.
δίδος, 99651.
διδόσα, App. ii. 14 Β.
δίδοσαι, 773.
δίδοσθαι παρά τινος, 1628.
διδῶσι for -δοῦσι, App. ii. 1o.
δίδου, 996 τι·
διδούς, 455.
διδοῦσα, διδόνσα, App.
14 B.
διδράσκω, 9803, 99650 -
in 2nd aor., 979.
1. dida, subj., 931, 99661.
υδράργ-, 126, 2. δίδω, 958, 961.
διαρερρηγμένην, 739.
διαρμίζω, 136..
διαρρηγμένας, 750 d.
διαρρυθμίζω, 1362.
διασαφέω - ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
διασκεδάννυμι, 996240
διασκεδασμένος, 996240-
διασκεδώ, 996240 -
διαστραφήσομαι, 996207.
διάταξις, 1137.
διατελῶ + part., 2106 f.
with ὤν suppressed,
21182
διατετέλεκαν, 786.
διατέτρωγμαι, 990281
διατρίβειν περί τι, 1639.
διαφέρει, with infin., 2081 f.
διαφερόντων, 516.
διαφέρω (intr.), 1 2441, 1455 c.
διαφθαρήσομαι, 996207.
•
δίος διος, App. ii. 14 Α.
διιστάνω, 462.
διιστάω, 962.
δικάδδω, app. ii. 9.
δικάζω, App. ii. 9.
Δικαιίδης, 48.
Δικαιογένου for vous, 432 c.
ii. δικαιολόγημαν, App. iii. 9 a.
1. δίκαιόν ἐστι, with infin.,
2081 f.; with iva, 2082,
App. vi. 16; changed
to δίκαιός είμι, 2083 f.
δίκαιον ἦν for ἐστί, 1901.
δίκαιον ὄν, as accus. absol.,
3. δίδω, fron δίδωμι, 737,
775, 937, 958, 961,
99651.
διδώη, της, 996σι [1].
δίδωμι, 927 f., 945 f., 955,
963", 99661.
accentuation of, 953.
compounds of, 956.
- P-Ñ history of, 957 ff.,
961.
becomes δίδω, 737, 775.
of attempted action,
1841, 1848.
+ infin., 2004 f.; in
John, App. vi. 12 o [3].
+iva, App. vi. 16.
didov, 961, 99661·
διδῶσα, διδοῦσα, Ap]. ii. 141.
διδῶσι for -οῦσι, App. ii. 1o.
δίδωσιν for -ουσιν, 996τι·
διδῶτο, @το, 996 οι
2.
3.
2143.
in P-B, 2145.
δίκαιος, 441, 443, 516; be-
comes δίκοs or δίκιος,
032.
εἰμι του -όν ἐστιν, 2083 f.
δικαιοσύνη by the side of
ἱερωσύνη, App. ii. 5.
δικαιότης, 360.
δικαιύω, constr., 2082 f
ff.
δίκαις for -κας, 29, App. ii.
9, 14 B.
δικαίως, 516.
δικαιώσαισαν, 792.
δίκανς (τὰνς), App. ii. 14 B.
δικαστής, 283.
δίκη τινός, 1292.
δίκην, with gen., 1278, 1314.
δίκος or δίκιος, Ο32.
δικός, ἐδικός, 130, 554, 1417.
603
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
δίκρος for δίκροος, 654.
διπλός for διπλούς, 654.
Διπλος,654.
1. δοκέω, 996 2.
δικτυωτός, 1053.
Διμίτριος, 37.
δινάρια, 37.
divw, 99651.
διξᾶς, 287.
διπλότερος, 321, 654.
διπλοῦς, 653.
διπλών(ν)ω, 853.
δίπους, 365, 1147.
Διογένη & την (τύν), 330, διπτυχής & δίπτυχος, 439.
App. iii. 6.
Διογένης, 298, 431.
Διογένου for -νους, 432 C.
διοικεῖσθαι παρά τινι, 1632.
διοίκησαν, 44·
Διοκλέα (τόν), 330, App. iii.
6.
Διοκλῆ & -ῆδος (του), 288.
Διοκλῆν (τόν) 432 1.
διόλλυμι, 99618
διολλώ, 996182
Διομαιεύς, 49.
1. Διομήδη (ω), 432 (, App.
iii. 15".
2. Διομήδη (του), 278.
Διομήδης, 298, 431.
Διομίδης, 37.
-A"" (TU), 1038".
Διονῆς, 287.
Διονισιγένης, 35.
Διόνισος, 35.
Διονοισίου, 36.
δίς, 648; with gen., 1314;
τὸν μήνα, 1342.
in compounds, 1120 f.
δισκοειδές for -δής, 26, α [1].
δισμυριάκις, 648.
δισμύριοι, 645, 1120.
δισμυριοστός, 646.
δισσός, 653 f.
δίστομος, 1120, 1121.
δισχιλιάκις, 648.
δισχίλιοι, 645.
δισχιλιοστός, 646.
δίτυνος (προσῳδία),
76 [2].
διφθεράρις, 1040 Λ.
διφθέρες for - ραις, 49.
(τάς), 332.
52·
for δοκεί μοι, 2083 f.
μοι οι ἐμαυτῷ, 1403.
2. δοκεῖ, constr., 2028, 2085 f.;
See also δοκοῦν & δόξαν.
+ infin., 2081 f., app.
vi. 12 c [3].
μοι & δοκῶ ἐμαυτῷ,
1403.
- changed to δοκώ, 2083 f.
δοκῇ, δοκεῖ, 265.
δοκήσω, 99662-
δοκός, ἡ & δ, 292.
δοκοῦν, as accus. absol.,
2143.
- in P-B, 2145; see also
δόξαν & δοκέω.
δομάτων for δωμ-, 267.
-AÓN, adv., 1102 b.
702, δοντάς, δ, Ιο43.
δόντι, ὀδόντιον, 134 b.
δόξαν, as
Δίφιλος from Διὶ φίλος, 76
[1], App. i. 2 f.
Δίφιλος, 267.
δίφρος, App. i. 16 b.
διχόμην & -μηνος, 439.
Δίχρονα φωνήεντα, 17 f.
Δίχρονος συλλαβή, 89.
dixws, in N, 518".
Διονύς, 287.
Διονύς, 1040.
Διονύσης, 287, 301.
Διονύσιος, 298, 1040.
διψᾷ, 830.
διψάζω, 869, 1096.
διψάω, 853, 869.
διψήν, 830 [1].
Διονύσις, 301.
Διονύσις, 1040.
Διονύσοι fur -σῳ, 26g
Διονυτᾶ & -άδος (του), 288.
διόξει = δόξει, 9962-
Διοπείθου for -θους, 432 c.
δίοπος, 439.
διορθώνω, 996189.
διορίζομαι, 1472.
διορύσσω (intr.), 1456.
διος, δίιος, App. ii. 14. 4.
Διός (του), 4330·
Διοτίμου, 34.
>
I. διότι, that, 1751, 1753 f.,
1942.
2. διότι, because, 1737 f.
becomes γιατί, 1739.
3. διότι, ' why, 2044.
Διότιμος, 34.
διώχνει -- δοκεῖ, 996 με
δίοψ, 439.
δίπατος, 1149.
δίπηχυς, 474.
διπλάσιος, 655.
διπλή, 286.
σα.
2143.
accus.
absol.,
in P-N, 2145; see also
δοκούν.
δόξας, δόξης, 29.
δόξω, 996 2
δορίληπτος, 1119.
δόρκος & δόρξ, Αpp. iii. 12.
δόρξ & δύρκος, App. iii. 12.
δόρυ, 4335.
δορυξέ, 321.
δορυξός, 654, Αpp. i. 16 a.
δύς, 948 F., 955; with subj.,
1914.
δοσμένος, 996τι·
διώ, ἰδῶ (ίδω), 143, 915, δοσοληψία, 1156.
99664 &
180
180 *
δίω (δίδω), 155.
διώκω, ξομαι, 998.
δότε, in N, 949.
δοτήρ, 29.
δούδω, 996 1.
δουλειά, 271, 1020.
δουλεύγω, 1088.
δουλεύσουσιν, ᾧ ἐὰν —, 779.
δουλεύω, 7οι, 875 ; becomes
δ'λεύον, 030.
δουλέψω for -εύσω, 18ο.
δουλύεν, 26, α.
•
δοῦλος σου, & δ
τινά τινος, 1292.
διωλέσθη, 996182.
διωμένος, 913", 99684
Διωνύσοε, 19" [1].
Διώνυσος, 267.
δίωξις, 395.
διώξω, 999.
διωρθωμένος, 996 199
διωρώρυκτο, 996,
διώχνει - δοκεῖ, 9962
δογματίζω + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
δοθήσομαι for δωθ-, 963 a.
doî, doin, dî, 14.8", 99661•
δοίεν, 996 1 [1].
51
190
δοίη, δοῖ, δῇ, 148, 996.1.
δοίημεν, 996 1.
δοίητε, 996τι·
διπλοείδαν (τήν), App. iii. δοκείσθαι, 1459.
δοκεῖ, δοκῇ, 26.
δομές, 20 α.
1
1200.
δοῦμεν, ' we bind,' 834.
δουνάν for δοῦναι ἄν, 20.
δούς, 455.
-δρα, -δρας, 996 τυ
-δραίην, 996 το
δράκονταν (τύν), App. iii. 6e.
δράκος for -κων, 338.
δράκων & δράκος, δ, 338.
δρακωνάριος, 1040 Λ.
δρακωνάρις, 1040 Λ.
δραμεῖν (or θεῖν, 996 μι·
δραμοῦμαι, 996,
278
604
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
δράμω, 996278 -
δραμώ, 996278 -
-δράναι, 996 το
.
δραπετεύω τι, 1457.
-δράς, 99650 -
δρασε, inprt., 813.
-δράσομαι, 996 το
-δράσω οι διδράσκω, 99650.
δράττω, 10001.
δράττομαι, δράττω, 10001·
δράχνω, 10001
δράω, 846 f., 99633 ; in N,
847.
-δράω of' διδράσκω, 996 το
Apñs, 287.
δρῆς for δρυς, 245, 343, 389,
App. iii. 141.
δριμύλος, 1059.
δριμύς, 401 Η.
δρόμῳ, 1382.
δρύσο, ἡ, 292.
δρύσος, ἡ & τό, 249.
Spûs, 1 & 8, 245, 386b, 389.
(δ), beconies
App. iii. 14.
δρῆς,. 343,
δρύφακτος, 1 26.
δρύφρακτος, 126.
δρώνω frown ιδρύω, 723.
dc, becomes.ζ, 23.
reduced to o, 180, 337 b.
δύο ἄττα, 1452.
δυάς, 364, 658.
Sveiv, 44, 631' & [1], 632.
- δυνήσομαι, 996.5.
δύθι, 99605.
δυνάζομαι, 869, 996 ι·
δύναμαι, 774, 9746, 996 43
1004 1.
041
becomes δύναμαι, 114,
774, 869, 937, 9745,
996 4, 2001, Αpp. vi. 15.
augment of, 722 tf.
coustr., 2000, 2091.
+ infin., 2001; in G-1,
vi. 15; in John, vi.
12 c & [3]; for fut.,
1894, App. iv. 4.
dropped, 1194.
δύνατος, 84.
δυνατός, constr., 2000, 2001.
εἰμι, for -τόν ἐστι, 2083f.
δυνατώτερα, adv., 522.
δύνῃ, 99654·
δυνηθήσομαι, 99634 -
dúvoµai, 114, 774, 869, 937,
9745 99664 2091,
App. vi. 15.
+ infin.,
2091 f.;
G-B, App. vi. 15.
δυνόμεθα, 774, 996 04.
δύνω, 996 55.
δύνωμαι, 996 4
in
I. δύο, two, 579, 631, 634;
in N dúo or dvú, 155 C,
623, 645; τῶνι δυό,
132, 632.
with plural, 63r, 633;
ἐκ or ἀπό, 1312.
'twice,' 650.
2. dúó, 155 c; Tŵvɩ—, 132,
632.
- popés, 651.
χιλιάδες, 645.
3. δύο δύο, 666.
δυοῖν, 631 & [1], 632.
δέοντες, 642, 645.
δύομαι, 98011 ; its zur aor.,
979.
δυονῶν (τῶ"), 579, 632.
δυόσμος, ἡδύοσμος, 185.
δύς, part. of δύομαι, 99655.
Syc., in comp., 1104, 1122,
1126.
& κακο-, 1122.
in verbs, how augmented,
749.
δυσαρεσκίζομαι, 1000,.
δυσαρεστέω, 749 ; -ομαι,
10002, 1458.
δύσβατος, 465.
δυσειδής, 1122.
|
δυστυχηκόσι, 736, 740.
δυστυχής, 1122, 1126, 1147.
δύστυχος, 430.
δύσφημος, 1 1 22.
δύσφρων, 1 122.
δυσωπέω + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
Súw, i. e. dúo, 631, 631º, 634.
δνώ for δοιώ, 36.
dúw (verb), 99655 •
peculiarities of, 9972-
1. d@, subj., 931, 99661 [1].
2. δῶ for δίδω, 737.
3. dŵ, 'bind,' 834".
4. 'δῶ for ἴδω, 915.
δώδεκα, 645, 1156, App. i.
16a; & 647.
δωδεκαετῇ, 430.
δωδεκάκις, 648.
δωδεκαρέ, 661.
δωδεκάς, 658.
δωδέκατος, 646.
δώη, 99651 •
δῴη (δώῃ) or δῷ, 116, 996 1
& [1].
δώημεν, δῴημεν, 996τι·
δῴην, 996.1-
51
64*
δώητε, δῴητε, 996 1.
δώκω fur δώσω, 99651
δωμένος, 996τι &
δώνω, 853, 996.ι·
δωρεά, -ρειά, 200
δωρεάν, adv., 1278.
δωρειά, -ρεά, 20, 26, α.
δωρέω, 1003; -ομαι, 10001
Δωριεύς, 403.
Δωρικλῆ (ὦ), 432 4, App. iii.
15b.
Swons, 99601.
1. δῶσε τον δύς, 949.
2. δώσε, τό, Αpp. vi. 27.
δώσειε, 996 ι·
οι
δώσῃ, δώσης, 946m
δώσοντα, as adv., in N, 823.
δύση, from δύσις, App. iii. 14. δώσουσιν, ὅταν -, 779.
δυσηρέστουν, 749.
δύσθυμος, 494, 1126.
δυσί, 631 & [1], 632, 633.
δύσις, Ν δύση, App. iii. 14.
δύναμη fur -μις, 396, App. Ακολο-, 1123.
iii. 14.
Δυναμιν, App. iii. 7.
δύναμις, 395.
δυσκολοπερνώ, 1123.
δυσκολόπιαστος, 1123.
δύσμαχος, 1126, 11591·
in N δύναμη, App. iii. 14. Δύσπαρις, 1122.
dúvaoai, 773, 99654-
δυναστῶ, 996 μι·
δυνατά, μάν., 522.
2081 f.
δύσπεπτος, 112 2.
δυσπόρευτος, 1126, 1150 ".
δυσπρόσωπος, 1122.
δυνατόν ἐστι, will infin., δυστάλας, 4.16.
δύστροπος, 1122.
ὄν, as necus, absol., 2143; | δυστυχέω, 748.
in P-B, 2145.
δυστυχηκνίᾳ, 736, 740.
δῶστε from δώσετε, 949.
δώσω, 949, 964.
E, €, origin of, 2.
names of, 9, 9º, app. ii.
10.
why named eî, app. ii.
ΙΟ.
forms of, 2, 5 [2], 9.
multiple value of, 6, 26.
originally for e, N, EL, 6,
26, 27, 50, 29 f., app.
ii. 9 f., 12, 14.
for et, 26, 4, 27.
for ai, 46 H., 50º.
for a, 46 ft.
605
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
η,
E, e, conf. with et, 26f.; with
n, 262, 168, app. ii. 7,
10, 12; with o, a, 167.
repl. by ŋ, in Boeotian,
48.
- becomes 7, 29 f., 164;
el, 29 f., app. 9 ff.
€, a prepositive vowel, 19.
€ + d=α, 150 c.
€ + €= εl, 156%.
€ + two or more consonants,
29, 163.
E-, prothetic, 129.
|
ea for eía, 717.
ča + subj., 1913 f.
-éa (†), in Ñ -eá, 271.
-éa, contracts to -â, 428;
to -ĥ, 285, 406.
-Éā (Tóv), P -î, 406.
-¤á (†), in N shortened to
-É, 272.
-έά (sc. πληγή), 1027.
ΐα (λα), 187.
éáynv, 714º, 717.
čáλwnα, 717, 98010, 996.
Eaλwv, 714", 98010, 9969.
€-, revective, 132, 536, 725. éáv, av, 20f, 1500, 1770 ff.;
€-, protective, 725.
e-, augment, 711, 717, 723.
mistaken for augment,
134,723, 724; dropped,
ib.
augmented to n-, 714;
to EL, 717, 719.
é-, in èµé, suggests ẻ-oé, 532.
e'-, in exeîvos, intensive, 570.
-e-, thematic vowel, 698,
578 a.
becomes -7- in contracted
verbs, 825, 838-45.
-- for -n-, before -VT- in
aor. & fut. pass., 919.
-e-, compositional, 1106,
1108, 1110; for -o-,
1116.
-e-, in verb stems becomes
-o-, 924; -a-, 921.
-E-, suppressed in liquid
stems, 383.
-€-, augment-like in N, 753.
-e, suffixal, App. iii. 24, 26 ff.
-e, elided, 141.
-ε (ενίκαε, νίκαε), 862.
-e, in imprt., in '-N, 813.
-€, in imprf., 780.
-e, in verb superadded to
El, 857.
-e, in dual 3rd decl., 328.
-é, intensive in N, 575-
-é- from -éa (1)), in N, 272.
-é, opideictic, 913.
-Є or -EN, 2202.
é' (= 5), 645-
€' (= 5000), 645.
* for 2 ψιλόν, 9.
for &, interjection, 251,
1253 f
for al, 251.
&, 530.
é, 526.
|
see also av.
proclitic, 97 d.
conf. with modal av,
1774; with iva, 1774
& [1].
use of, 1770 ff., 1967,
1970, 1987.
in conditional clauses,
1966 f.
for conditional participle,
C
2154.
with indic., 1987 ff.
after relatives, 1774.
repl. by ei, 1988.
dislodges el, 1990, 1992.
whether,' 2054 f.
καί, for emphatic ἐάν,
1717; for ei kaí, ‘al-
though,' 1993 a; for
concessive part., 2156.
edv µév · εἰδὲ μή (ἂν δὲ μή),
1983.
ἐὰν
àv µèv µý, 1983.
¿àv μn, except,' 1731 ff.,
1981, 1982.
ἐάν τε
1727 ff.
ἐάν τις, repl. by ὃς ἄν, ὅστις
äv, 2023.
-éâc (5), from -eús, 1017;
shortened to -és, 273.
¿áσare + subj., 1914 ff.
éage for -oov, 99656.
becomes ἆσε, 15o c; ᾶς,
150 c, 9966; seo âs.
ἔασεν fur ἴασεν, 717.
ἐάσετε, 99650.
ἐάν τε, 1706,
ἔασον, 949 [1]; + subj.,
1914 ff.
ἑατῇ, 546.
ἑατῆς, 546.
ἑατοῖς, 546.
ξατόν, 546.
ἑατοῦ, 546.
ἑαυτόν, becomes αυτόν, 15oc.
for ἐμαυτόν & σεαυτόν,
546, 1406 f.; Tòv kav-
τόν μου, 546, 1407.
repl. by aurov, 1405 f.;
by oî (oi), opâs, opioi,
1408 f.
ἑαυτοῦ, ειαυτοῦ, 20.
as possessive, 555-
ἑαυτούς for ἡμᾶς αὐτούς
ὑμᾶς αὐτούς, 546 ;
ἀλλήλους, 141o f.
for
ἑαυτῶν, as possessive, 555.
káw, 719, 839, 99618-
+iva, App. vi. 16.
ἔβαλα, 917, 99624 -
Bapéony for -On, App. iii. 19.
Baphony for -0ŋ, app. iii. 19.
ἐβαρήθην -θη,
-έβασα, 99625.
Báoтaga, 853°.
ἑβδομάδα, ἡ, 658.
ἑβδομάδαν (τήν), App. iii.
6 g.
ẞdopádes (Taîs), 332".
ἑβδομάς, 658 f.
>
¿ẞSóμn, 'seventh day,' 650.
ἑβδομήκοντα, 639, 645.
ἑβδομηκοντάκις, 648.
ἑβδομηκοστός, 646.
ἑβδομήντα, 639, 64570 -
ἕβδομος, 646; for ἕπτμος,
100 ·
29
131.
eßeßnλovoav, 789.
Bevvos & -n, 292.
-έβηκα οι βαίνω, 996 9.
ẞny, conjugated, 979.
ἐβιασάμην (net.), 1002.
Biáσonv, 1002, 1478.
ἐβίων, 99624 &
ἐβίωσα, 996.
ἐβλάβην, 920, 99627-
ἔβλαμμαι, 99627.
ἐβλάστημα, 736.
BλаOTOV, 99628.
¿ßrapa, 736, 99627 •
ἐβλάφθην, 99627
ἔβλεπα, 795.
ἐβλέπετε, 720.
ἔβλητο, 1478.
ἐβλόγησα, 724.
ἐβόηξα, 99630-
ἐβύουν, 850.
ἐβούηξα, 99630-
ἐβούλευμα, 736.
ἐβούλευσεν, 736 [1].
ἐβουλήθησαν, 786.
ἐβουλόμην, 722, 9963;-άν,
82
1978.
ἢ ψιλόν, for ancient ei, 9, 9°.
origin of name, 9º f.
ta for iv, 714.
ἑαυτόν, 544 f. ; in N, 548, ἐβούτηξα, 853°.
549.
ἐβράχην, 99638.
606
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἐβρέχθην, 99639
ἐβρόντηξα & -ησα, 853.
ἐβρόντησε, its subject., 1166.
ἐγ for er, 173.
Βυζαντίου, 57.
Δήλου, 57.
Δρυμού, 57.
λιμένος, 59 4.
Μακεδονίας, 59 α.
νήσων, 59 (.
'Pódov, 59 a.
ἐγανάχτησα, 724.
ἐγάπησα, 724.
ἐγβάτης, 57.
ἐγβολή, 57.
ἐγγαλονόμος, 1104.
ἐγγεγύημαι, 99657.
ἐγγεγυήμην, 996,7.
ἔγγιον, 523 [1].
ἔγγιστα, 523.
ἔγγιστος, 508.
ἔγγονας, δ, 296.
ἔγγονος του ἔπγ·, 59 α, 173.
ἔγγονων for -νον, 267.
ἐγγυάω, 996,7
ἐγγυῶμαι.
ἐγγυημένος, 996,7
ἐγέρνω, 903, 99668·
ἐγερῶ, 99658.
ἐγήγερμα, 99659.
ἐγηγέρκειν, 99668.
ἐγήγερμαι, 735, 99668
ἔγημα, 99634.
ἐγημάμην, 99634.
ἔγινα, 99637.
ἔγιναν, 788.
ἐγίνηκα, 99637.
ἐγκαινίσθη, 750 c.
ἐγκάλεσεν, 750 c, 752.
ἐγκατέλειπα, 794.
ἐγκαταλείψουσιν, ὅπως
779.
ἐγκατελείπαμεν, 796.
ἐγκατέλιπα, 794·
ἐγκατελίπαμεν, 746.
ἐγκατελίπατε, 796.
ἐγκεκωμίακα, -σμαι, 996 το·
ἐγκενίσθη, 750 c.
ἐγκεντρισμέναις, 750 d.
ἐγκεραννύω, 936 α.
ἐγκέχεδα, 996311
see also
ἐγκέχυκα, 996312.
ἐγγυητής, ἐγγυτής, 148.
ἐγγυμένος, 99657.
ἐγγυοῦμαι, 996 στο
èyyús, 508, 523, 1490.
+ gen., 1314.
ἐγγύτατα, 523.
ἐγγύτατος, 508.
ἐγγυτάτω, 523.
ἐγγύτερον, 523 & [1].
ἐγγύτερος, 508.
ἐγγυτέρω, 523.
ἐγγυτής, εγγυητής, 148.
ἐγγυώμαι, + infin., 2086 f.
ἐγδάκτυλος for έκδ-, 173.
ἔγδοσις, 57.
ἐδοχή, 57.
ἔγεινα, 99637.
ἐγείνηκα, 99637.
ἔγειρεν fur ἤγ, γιη.
ἔγειρον for ἤγ-, 723.
ἐγείρω, 735, 903, 924,
99658.
peculiarities of, 996.8,
9974; ηγρόμην, 917.
Zyeva, 99687.
ἐγενάμην 99637.
ἐγένετον for -το, App. iii. 19.
ἐγενήθην, 99637
ἐγεννήθη for -θην, App. iii.
22 d.
ἐγενόμην, 99637.
as imprr., 99637.
ἐγεννῶσαν, 789.
ἔγγονος, 57.
ἐγκ Πειραιῶς, 59 α.
ἔγκλημά τινος, 1292 f.
έγκλισις, 1o1 f.
ἐγκύνοις, 59 (.
ἐγκρατής, 4250, 1140.
ἐγκρεμνός, 130.
ἔγκτησιγ καί, 2030.
ἐγκωμιάζω, 99659.
ἐγκωμιάσομαι, -σω, 99669·
ἐγλέγειν, 59 4.
ἐγλογῆς, 59 α.
ἐγλυμμένος, 736.
ἔγνωκα, 736 ; in N', 1875.
as present, 1868.
ἔγνωκαν, 786.
ἔγνων, 937, 979, 99638.
& oida, 969.
ἐγνωρίζω, 130.
ἔγνωσα, 99634-
& ἔγνων, 937.
ἐγόρασα fur ἠγ, 724.
έγπλευσασῶν, 59 α.
ἔγραιο, 49.
ἐγραμμέναι, 736.
ἐγραμμένον, 736.
ἐγράφεσο, 783.
ἐγράφην, -φθην, 99639-
ἐγράφησαν, 791.
έγραψες, 798 f.
ἔγρετο, ἤγρ-, App. ii. 12 [3].
ἐγρήγορα, 924, 99668, 9974.
as present, 1868 F.
- leads to γρηγορέω, 723
& [1].
ἐγρήγορεν, 723 [1].
ἐγρηγόρειν, -ρη, 99668.
ἐγρηγορέω, 99668.
ἐγρήγορος, 135, 99658.
ἐγύρευσες, 798.
ἐγχανοῦμαι, 996310-
ἐγχέαιμι, 996312
ἐγχεάτω, 996312·
ἐγώ, 525, 533.
becomes ίγώ, 030 ; ἐώ,
155°.
='yes,' 2058.
αὐτός, 529.
γε, 529" (cp. 2058).
Eywye, 'yes,' 529 f., 2059;
οὐκ 2058.
ἐγών, 132.
ἐγὼν for αἰγῶν, 49.
ἐδάκην, 99640-
ἔδακον, 996.10.
ἐδάκρυσα, 1853 f.
ἐδάρην, 99643 -
-
ἔδέ for ιδέ, 573, 915 ; — νά,
575-
Δε-, 915.
ἐδέδοση, 782.
ἐδέετο, 835 [2].
ἐδεήθην for θη, App. iii.
19.
ἔδει for δεῖ, as potent. indic.,
1901, App. iv. 5.
ἐδείκνυε", 936 4.
ἐδείκνυον, 936 α.
ἐδείκνυσο, 782.
ἐδείπνησες, 798.
ἔδειρα, 99643 -
ἐδεῖτο, 835 [2].
ἐδεκεῖνος, 573.
ἔδεσα, 845.
ἐδετύσος, 573.
ἐδετοῦτος, 573-
ἐδέχτηκα, 99644 .
ἐδήδοκα, 99631
δηξα, 99040.
ἔδησα, 844.
ἐδιακονήθην, 99643
ἐδιακονησάμην, 99648-
ἐδιακύνουν, 99648 -
ἐδιατάξατο, 753-
ἐδιδαξάμην, 996.49.
ἐδιδάχθην, 99649·
ἐδίδει, 996 1.
ἐδίδετο, 961.
ἐδίδοση, 782.
διεκδίκησαν, 751.
ἐδιετάξατο, 753.
έδιηγήσατο, 750 α.
ἐδιῄτων, 745.
ιδικός, 130, 554, 1417.
ἐδιοίκει, 750 α.
607
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἐδιοικήθη, 750 α.
ἔζηες, 996100-
edioikηony for -On, App. iii. Snica, 736 [1], 996100 ·
19.
ἐδιοίκουν, 750 4.
ἔδιοξε, 99652
ἐδίψασα, 853.
ἐδιώρθωσεν, 751.
ἐδόθηκα, 996τι·
ἐδόθην for ἐδώ-, 963 α.
ἐδόκησα, 990 2.
ἐδοκοῦσαν, τ89.
ἐδολιοῦσαν, 789.
ἔδομαι, 114, 996,1
ἔδοξα, 996.2.
ἔδοσαν, -ωκαν, 937.
ἐδούλευε, 720.
ἔδραμα, 794.
¿Spaµov, 996278-
έδραν (τήν), 72 [3].
-édpav (verb), conjugated,
979, 99650.
- έδρασα (verb), 996 το
ἔδρασεν οἱ διδράσκω, 99650·
ἐδράσθην, 996 3
ἐδύθην, 996 μ.
ἔδυν, 937, 974, 979, 996 55.
ἔδυνα fur ἔδυν, 937, 990 σ.
édvváµnv, 722, 99661 ·
for potent. indic., App.
iv. 5.
ἐδυνάσθην, 99651 -
ἐδύνετο, 774, 99604
ἐδυνήθην, 1478.
ἐδυνησάμην, 99654, 1005,
1478.
ἐδυστύχουν, 748.
ἐδώθη, 20η α.
čdwka, 952, 963 c; in N,
1875.
ἐδώκαμεν, 952.
ἔδωκαν, 786, 937, 952.
ἐδώκασι, 793.
as N aor., 1875.
ἐζημιά, ἡ, 130.
ἔζησαν, 996100 -
eins, 829.
ἔζησα, 996100 -
ἔζησες, 798.
ἐζήτησα, 731.
ζητηκέναι, 731.
ἐζήτηξα & -ησα, 853.
ἕζομαι, 99660.
ἐζύγην, 996101·
ἐζύμωμα, N aor., 1875.
Ν
ζωμαι, 996102.
¿Cúvvves, 936 a.
ἐξώσθην, 996102
ἔζωσμαι, 990102
ή contr. to 4, 152 [1].
env, 714".
-EHC, adj. in, contracted,
428.
ἔθανον, 996112·
ἐθαυμασάμην, 996 100
ἐθάφθην, 996108
ἐθέθην, 184.
ἔθεια, N aor., 1875.
ἐθέκασι, 793.
| 0éλnμos, -nμwv, app. iii.
I 2.
ἐθελήμων, ἐθέλημος, App.
iii. 12.
ἐθελήσω, 99661.
as present, 1889".
ἐθέλχθην, 184".
ἐθέλω, 722, 722, 996 1.
becomes θέλω, 723.
constr., 2087 ff.
+ infin., 2086" f.
+iva (vá), 2088.
for fut., App. iv. 4.
¿Onia, 952, 963 c, 964.
ἐθήκαμεν, 952.
ἔθηκαν, 786, 952.
ἐθίζω, 719, 99602.
ee never substituted for 7, ¿Ouncev, 37.
ἐδώκατε, 952.
ESWICES, 798".
Edwoα, 99661-
28 a.
831.
eel for Exel, 155°.
ἐεῖνος, 571.
>
ἔθιμα, τά, 370.
-ce- contracts to el, 150%, | ¿01ŵ, 996n2•
€0, 996as -
ἐθλασμένον, 736.
βλασται, 736.
-eƑ-, in nouns in -eús, 403, 20vos, 423.
404.
in verbs, 719.
drops F, 404.
contracts, 404 f.
efleros, 51.
ἐσπραγίαις, 51.
En, 829.
esne for en, 857.
ἐθορυβοῦσαν, 789.
ἔθος, 423.
éorí + infin., 2081, app.
vi. 12 c [3].
€0 peta, 996278-
ἐθύθην, 182 €, 996 118.
¿Ovías for -On-, 35.
ἐθυμιώσαν, 789.
El, e, diphthong, 19a;
'long,' 20.
genuine, 34"; repres.
by e, 6 ff., 27, App. ii.
7f., 9, 10, 12, 14; sound
of, 24, 26 ff., 30, 34¹ff.,
37 ff.
spurious or compensa-
tory, 34; repres. by
e, 6, 12, 29 ff., app. ii.
7, 9, 12, 14; sound
of, 28 a & [1].
not euphonious, 25[1]d.
conf. with 1, 29ª, 34,
168; with v, 35; with
n, 26, 264, 37 ff.; with
O, 44; with u, 36";
with e, 26₁ b; with p,
265.
- in Boeotian & Thes-
salian, App. ii. 7.
& Latin ei, 53.
in Sanskrit i, 34°.
for e, 26, b, app. ii.
7b, 9 f., 12.
from e, 29 f., app. ii.
7, 9, 12, 14.
for 7, 27 ff.
forn,, v, in + V-VIth,
50".
leads to 7, 32 ff.; to
i, ib.
€1-, augment, 717.
from e-, 719.
for 7-, 719.
rarer than -, 723.
dropped, 723.
for reduplication, 734-
-€1-, thematic, 758 c.
from -ee-, 156, 831.
in verb stem, 924".
reduced to --, 891.
-ei, adv., 1102 b.
el, proclitic, 97 d.
atonon, 98 c.
acconted el, 96.
relativo frequency of,
1771.
use of, 1770 ff.
constr., 1967, 1969, 1974,
1987.
in condit. clauses, 1966 f.
in temporal clauses,
1976.
+ subj., 1987, 1988 ff.
for ὅτε, 1975-
for ear, 1988.
for T, that,' 1947 f.
for condit. part., 2154.
whether,' 2054.
608
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ei, for âpa, 2047, 2055.
mistaken for 7, 2055.
retreats, 1990, 1992.
ei for ½, App. ii. 9 f.
είδα, 720, 794 f., 99664 & 180·
είδα μετά οι ξανά, 1139.
εἴδαμεν, 796.
είδαν, 787, 788.
-ει, verb ending, 765 f., εἴδατε, 796.
861 [1].
from -ἔτι, ε-ι, 767.
from -εσαι, ε-αι, 769.
for -n, 763, 765, 769 ff.
-ει & EIN, in imprt. 3rd per-
son, 2205, App. iii. 19.
εἰἤ, whether—or, 2054.
el av, 2023b.
C
with
el d''äye + subj., 1913.
εἰ γάρ, 996 103, 1748; with
indic., 1904 ;
2ndary subj., 1923.
εἰ γὰρ ὠφελον, 996193, 1904.
εἰ δὲ μή, 1983.
εἰ καί, although, 1993 (,
1994; for concess, part.,
2156; for emphatic el,
1717.
εἰ μὲν—εἰ δὲ μή, 1983.
εἰ μὲν μή, 1983.
εἰ μή or εἰμή, if not,”
17314, 1736, 1807,
1981 ff.; πλŋv —, ÉKTÒS
πλὴν
(παρεκτός) -, χωρὶς
1735; εἰ, 1981.
ei où, 1807¹ f.
—,
|
εἶδε & ίδέ, 12Ι.
εἰδέτω, 970.
εἰδέτωσαν, 970.
εἴδησα, 970.
εἰδῆσαι, 970.
eldhow, 970.
εἰδῆται for -τε, 49.
εικοστός, 645.
εἰκοστρεῖς, 645.
εἰκότως, 516.
eikvîa, 99667 ·
εἴπω, 996 στ
constr., 1316.
εἰκώς, 723, 996.7.
elda, 9964.
ειλάμεθα, 9964
ειλάμην, 9964.
είλαντο, 996.
-είλεγμαι, 990151 19
εἴδομεν fur εἴδωμεν, App. ii. Ειλειθεία, 365.
12 [3].
εἶδον, 720, 99668 &
misspelt ἴδον, 717 [1].
είδος, 423.
186
as 2nd component,III3f.;
(TU)
Gin appear-
ance,' 1270.
eldooav, 121, 791.
eldw, 99664 ·
elda, 969; in 7-B, 971.
-€ι€, in verb for -ει, 857.
είειλες, 30.
εἴην, 295, 981.
είθε with indic., 1904; with
2ndary subj., 1923.
εἴθ᾽ ὤφελον, 996193, 1904.
είθην, 964.
εἴθιζον, 719, 996 ...
εἴ τις, repl. by ὅς οι ὅστις, εἴθικα, -σα, 99602
2023.
εἴ τις ἄν, 2023.
εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος, 1716, 1980.
εἶ, τό, ancient name for ἓ
ψιλόν οι ἦτα, ο2, 9 f., 9",
App. ii. 10.
Cron Phoenician ho, 2.
el, 'art,' 981.
not enclitic, 102 d,
982.
εἶ, οι' είμι, 988.
eťa, já, 151, 155 a.
Leia (1), 1013, 1018, 1045 f.;
from -εύω, 1019.
• from compounds in -ης,
1154.
accent of, 10.46; in N,
151, 155 6-4, 271, 1047.
conf. with -na, 38.
-ειά, N for -εία οι -εία, 271.
εἰάθην, 99650 -
εἴαμαι, 996.
elúv, éáv, 20, 26, a.
-ΕΙΑΝ, repl. by L'αισαν
Ζοισαν, 792.
elaoa, 719, 99666 ·
ἑαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ, 201
eiye, 1771 a.
62
εἰθίσθην, 9960-
εἴθισμαι, 996».
είκα, 963 0, 964.
εἴπαζον, 715, 99605.
εἰκάζω, 715, 99605-
constr., 2085 f.; —ñepí-
τινος, 16.42.
εἴκαθον, 996.6.
εἴκακα, 99005
εἰκάς, ἡ, 658.
εἰκάσθην, 99665.
είκασμαι, 99605-
elkov, 99668 ·
-είλεχα, 996 101, 1
•
εἴληγμαι, 734.
εἴλημμαι, 734.
εἰλημμένος, 736 [1].
εἴλημπται, 996119.
εἵληται, 996.
εἴληφα, 734, 996149.
εἴληφαν, 786.
εἴληχα, 734, 996148-
είλιγμαι, 996 τι
ελιξα, 99676.
εἵλισσον, 71').
εἱλίσσω, -ττω, 99676 -
ελίχθην, 99676·
είλκον, 717, 719, 99677.
είλκυσα, 967.
ελξα, 99677.
εἱλύμην, 9964.
εἷλον, 996,
είλως (δ), 363.
εἶμαι (= εἰμί) 985 f.
replaces εἰμί, 937.
+ pf. part. for pf. indic.,
1865, 2140.
τοῦ -μοῦ (σκοτωμοῦ, ἀπο-
θαμμοῦ, etc.), 12884.
τοῦ σκοινιοῦ καὶ τοῦ πα
λουκιού, 1288.
είμαι, 963 b, 964.
είμαρται, 734, 996100-
εἴμεθα, 985.
•
εἶμεν fur είναι, App. ii. 14 B.
εἱμέρα, ἡμέρα, in Plato,
29º [1], 41.
εἰμή, 1736; kee εἰ μή
εἰμί, Fam, from ἐσμι, 29,
App. ii. 8 th, 14 B;
conjugation of, 981-5°;
in P-N, 985 Η.
becomes εἶμαι, 937.
enclitic, 102 d, 982.
in composition, 98.4.
auxiliary verb, 687.
imprf. for aor., 1849.
repl. by ὑπάρχω, 937,
985, 1845, 2107; liy
χρηματίζω, 2107; by
εἰκόνα (κόνα), ή, 134 e.
εἰκόναν (τήν), App. iii. 60.
εικός, 99607; - ἦν for ἐστι, εἰμή, 1
· ἦν for ἐστι,
1901.
εικοσάκις, 648.
εικοσαπλάσιος, 655.
εἰκοσαρέα, 661.
εἴκοσι", 2203, 645.
εἴκοσι (καὶ) πέντε, 6.40, 6.45.
εἴκοσι πέντε, 640.
οι εικοσιδυό, 645,
εἰκοσιπενταρέα, 661.
εἰκοσιπέντε, 640 1, 645 ?
εἰκοσπέντε, εἰκοσιπ-, 1362.
εἰκοστεί, -τῇ, 265.
609
R r
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
εὑρίσκομαι, μένω, ἔχω,
ποιω, 2107.
eiµí, as subj. (for ☎), 985¹.
+ part., 2106.
+ pres. part. for dur.
pres., 1843 f., 1844 f.
+pf. part. for pf. indic.,
1864 f., 2110, 2140.
+gen., 1288 f.
+ dat., 1367 f.
+infin., App. vi. 17 a.
TIVOS, 1288 f.
περί τι, 1639.
ὑπό τινι, 1698.
ὑπὸ τὴν ὄψιν, 1693.
εἰπάτωσαν, 99636.
einé, 912 ff., 99686 ·
& εἶπε, 121.
becomes 'Té, 914.
eine, eïπy, 265, 28 b.
εἰπεῖν, 99680.
& ciné, 912 ff.
είρξα, 99670-
είρξω, 99670-
εἴρομαι, 99071·
εΐρπον, 719.
ερχθην, 99670 -
είρω, 99672 & 86⚫
-eipw, in aor., 893.
constr., 2078, 2085 f., eis, also ès, 1536, 1489.
2087 ff.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
εἴπερ, 1771 α.
εἴπερ ἐγώ, 1685, 1980.
εἴπερ τις καὶ ἄλλος, 1980.
Elπes, 99682.
εἰπές, 99680-
είμι, 689, 988 ff., 99660 ; in εἰπέτε, 99680.
P-N, 989b.
meaning of, 989.
as fut. indic., 989, 1894,
App. iv. 4.
-
-EIN for e, in imprf. 3rd
person, 2206, App.iii.19.
είναι, 981, 985; τινός,
περί τι, ὑπό τινι, ὑπὸ
τὴν ὄψιν, see εἰμί.
in N for ἐστὶν or εἰσίν,
sce eîve.
εἶναν for ἕνα, 621.
εἶνε (= ἐστί), 985; whence
derived, 985 [1].
or είναι ?, 985 [1].
eivera, 29, App. ii. 10.
INOC, 1061; becomes
-ένιος, ib.
εἶντα for ἴντα, 592 [3].
-einw, in fut. & pr., 899.
elεa, 99600.
eitw, 99607.
-EÎÓN (TO), 1034 f.
ἕιος for ἕως, 26, α.
-eîoc, adj. & subs., 1072 f.,
1081 f.
alternates with -eos, 20º,
26, a; with -nos, 38.
Loc, becomes Ζεις or -ης,
298.
cìña, 720, 99672, 80, 151, 2.
εἴπαιεν, 99630.
εἴπη for -πῃ, 20.
εἴπῃ, εἴπει, 26, 28 b.
einn for elπn, app. vi. 19.
εἴπηκα, 996151, 2·
eπηкаν, 99688 ·
eπou, 99686.
εἴποισαν, 792, 805.
εἱπόμην, 99637.
εἶπον, 720, 99672 &
imprt. for eimé, 122,
99686.
86
constr., see eineîv.
εἰπόντων, 99680.
εἴποσαν, 791.
εἰπῶ for εἴπω, 915, 99630 &
151 2.
151 2.
εἰπωμένος, 996 101,
εἰπών, 99680.
-Єipa (1), fem. adj., 472.
εἰργαζόμην, 719.
εἴργασμαι, 99648
εἴργασται, pass., 1002.
είρημαι, 99670 -
είργνυμι, 99670-
ei pyvów, 99670.
Eipya, 99670; constr., 1316 f.
elpyw, 99670-
εἱρέθη, πρ-, 265, 28 b.
εἴρειν, ἐρωτᾶν, 41.
Elpevaîos, 26, 1, 40.
εἴρηκα, 734, 9967, &
εἴρηκαν, 786.
εἴρηκες, 798.
εἴρημαι, 734.
161 2.
elpηuévov, as accus. absol.,
2143.
- in P-B, 2145-
εἴπασα τον εἰποῦσα (part.), Ειρηνᾶ (τοῦ), 288.
cinaιμev, 99686 •
εἴπαισαν, 792.
εἴπαμεν, 796, 99680-
εἶπαν
elmar, 787, 99680-
είπαν, 99680
εἴπας, 996.0·
εἰρημένος, 99672
996-
Εἰρηνᾶδος (τοῦ), 288.
εἴπασαν, 791.
Ειρήναιος, -ναις, 299.
εἴπασιν, 793.
αἰρηνεύετε, ἐὰν
779.
cinate (ind.), 796, 99680 •
ειρήσομαι, 99672
εἰπάτω, 99682·
elpηTaι, its subject, 1165.
from evs, 169, 1536, app.
ii. 9.
- atonon, 98 b.
in N, 1491; becomes 's,
1554 f.; or eloe, 208,
536, 1554 f., App. iii.
24, 26.
use of, 1536-54; Hebra-
istic, 1552 f.
for reinote accus., 1285,
1552.
for gen. of price, 1340.
for dat., 1358, 1362,
1551.
for ȧπó, 1491.
for diá+ gen., 1527.
for iv, 1488, 1491, 1551.
for ení, 1491.
for mρús, 1488, 1491.
conf. with πpòs + accus.,
1660.
+ gen. elliptically, 1289 f.,
155ვს.
eis ädov, 1289.
εἰς ἅπαξ, 1540 α.
εἰς διδασκάλου, 1289.
εἰς ἐνιαυτόν, 1528.
εἰς ἔπειτα, 1539.
εἰς καιρόν, 1540 α.
εἰ]ς μία”, 621.
eis µíó”, 621.
els To + infin., 2075; in
G-B, app. vi. 22, 24;
for final part., 2158;
conf. with wore, App.
vi. 10, 15.
εἰς τὸν
1528.
ἅπαντα χρόνον,
εἰς ὕστερον, 1539.
els or els from evs, 29, App.
ii. 8 ff., 14 B.
1. els from evs, 29, App. ii.
8 fr.
2. els, év, pía, 620 ff., 645 ;
πᾶσα (κάθε ος κάθα)
621; in N also yeîs,
155".
used as indefinite article,
'a, an,' 237, 594, 595 ;
for Tis, 589, 590, 597,
622 ff.; proclitic, 97 a,
623.
610
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
els, repl. by ὅστις,
etc., 1823 b.
3. els els, 666.
εἷς ἐκ or ἀπό, 1312.
εἰς καθ' εἷς, 664.
εἷς παρ' εις, 664.
ὁποῖος, εἴχασιν, 793.
εἷς τις, 1449.
εἰς τὸν ἕνα, 1412 f.
εἰς τὸν ἕτερον, 1412 f.
-εις, pers. ending, 765 f.;
fron -εσι, -ε-ις, 767.
-ΕIC, -εν, -εσσά, adj., 451 ;
in N, 452.
Leic
Ζεις (-εν, -εσσα), adj., 1064,
1066 f.
-είς, -έν, -εῖσα, part., 453,
707.
in N, 454, App. iii.
13.
εἰσαγήοχεν, 9963.
είσαι, ' thou art, 773, 985.
εἰσβάλλω (intr.), 1455 c.
εἰσε for εἰς, 208, 536; see
εἰς.
εἰσελήλυθαν, 786.
εἰσελήλυθας, 798 [1].
εἰσέλθατε, imprt., 800.
εἰσήλθαμεν, 796.
εἰσῆλθας, 798 [1].
|
εἴχει for ἔχει, 26 I b.
εἶχες, ήχες, App. ii. 14 A.
εἰχθρολέων, 26 1 b.
eixov, 717, 719, 99698.
+ infin. for potent. indic.,
2092, App. iv. 6 f.;
εἰπεῖν for ἔλεγον ἄν,
2092, ib. ; see ἔχω.
εἴχοσαν, 791, 99638.
-είω, verba in, how conju-
gated, 701 ff.;
tracted in G-N, 702.
εἴωθα, 734, 99668; as pres.,
1868 f.
εἰώθειν, 99663.
εἴων, 719, 99660.
ἐκ, see ἐξ.
closes with r, 218.
ἐκ διδασκάλου, 1289.
ἐκ νηπιώθεν, 435.
con-
ἐκ παιδιόθεν, 435.
ἐκ παιδός, 1234.
ἐκάην, 996129.
ἐκάθαιρον, 996119
ἐκάθαρα, 745, 996113
ἐκαθεζόμην, 746, 99660 & 114 -
ἐκαθέσθη, 99660
ἐκαθέσθην, 9960.
ἐκάθευδον, 746, 750, 99695.
ἐκαθήμην, 750 (, 994-
ἐκάθηρα, 745, 990119-
ἐκαθηράμην, 99610-
ἐκάθιζον, 746, 750 α.
εἶσθαι (= εἶναι, “be '), 985. ἐκάθισα, 746, 996 14
εἰσήλθατε, 796.
εἰσήλθοσαν, 791.
εἰσήλθωσαν, Ι.
εἰσήρρημα, 99639.
εἰσῆχεν, 9963.
είσθε, 985.
εἰσιαίτω, 49.
εἰσὶν οἵ, 1436, 2015.
εἰσκύπτω, 996117 •
εἰσμίύ, 621.
εἴσομαι, 969, 996 04.
εἰσπήδησεν, 750 c.
ἐκάλει fur -λει, 857.
ἐκάλεσα, 853.
εκάμετε, 720.
ἐκαμύμην, 996 120-
ἕκαστος, repl. by κάθε, 665.
ἔκαμον, 996120.
ἐκάρην, 996128.
εἰσπράττω & -ομαί τινά τι, εκάστωις for -στοις, 26g.
ἐκατεφίλει, 753.
ἐκατεφρόνησε, 753.
ἐκατεφύτευσεν, 753.
ἐκατηγράψατο, 753.
ἐκατήλλαξεν, 753.
ἐκατήντησαν, 750 α.
εκατηράθην, 751, 755.
ἐκατήρπαξε, 753, twice.
ἐκατηρώμην, 751, 755-
ἐκαύθην, 996123-
έκαυχᾶσο, 783.
ἑκατό, 645.
ἑκατόν, 645.
ἑκατονπενηνταριά, 661.
ἑκατονπεντηταρέα, 661.
ἑκατοντάδα (ή), 658.
ἑκατοντάκις, 648.
ἑκατονταρέα, 661.
ἑκατοντάς, 658.
ἑκατοστή, ἡ, 647, 66ο.
ἑκατοστός, 646.
ἑκατοστύ, ἡ, 66ο.
ἑκατοστύς, 647.
ἔκατσα, 996114·
ἕκατσεν, 996114.
ἐκβαίνω Ν βγαίνω), 135,
143, 1137.
ἐκβάλαι, 99624.
ἐκβάλας, 99624 •
ἐκβάλλω Ν βγάλλω), 143,
742.
constr., 1346 f.
ἐκβαρβαρῶσθαι, 736 [2].
ἐκβέβληκα, 742.
ἐκβιβάζω in N βγάζω, 723.
ἐκγ Μυρρινούττης, 59 4.
ἔκγονος, ἔγγονος, 591,
173.
ἐκδέρω, 996.43.
ἐκδικέω becomes αδικιώνο-
μαι, 10002.
ἐκδύνω (Ν γδύνω), 135,
996bb
èkdúw, 99655.
1279.
εισται, 985.
είστε, 985.
εἰστήκει, 72 [8].
εἱστίων, 719, 99633.
εἴσχηκαν, 786.
εἴσω, with gen., 1314.
εἶτα, 1744.
eire, 1706, 1771 a.
εἴτε,
εἴτεεἴτε,
whether or,
1726 f., 2054; repl.
by —ἤ, 1726.
εἴτις, ἔτσι, 562.
Εἰφιστιάδης, 34.
είχα, 99608
εἴχαμεν, 796.
είχαν, 789.
ἐκατάβηκα, 753.
ἐκατάρπαξεν, 753.
ἐκατέβαινα, 753, 755.
ἐκατέβη, 751.
1875.
ἐκατέγραψα, 753.
τινά τι, 1279 f.
ἐκδώσητε, 99651.
ἐκδώσωι, 200.
ἐκατέβηκα, 753, 755, δο1, ἐκεῖ, with gen., 1314.
ἐκατεγράψατο, 753.
ἐκατεδέχετο, 75, 755.
ἐκατελαβόμεθα, 751, 755.
ἐκατέλαβον, 753.
ἐκατέλαχεν, 753.
ἐκατέλειπεν, 753.
ἐκατελήφθησαν, 753·
1212.
ἐκατέστησα, 753.
ἑκάτερος, δ
ἐκατετέθη, 751.
for ἐκεῖσε, 435.
ἐκεῖθεν, with gen., 1314;
ἀπ' -, 435.
ἐκεῖνες, 570.
ἐκεῖνεσά(s), 575.
ἐκεινέτερος, 554.
ἐκείνηνά, 575·
ἐκείνης, 570.
ἐκείνησᾶ(ς), 575.
ἐκεῖνο for -oν, 539.
ἐκεῖνοινά, 575.
ἐκεῖνονά, 575.
611
Rr 2
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἐκεῖνος (κεῖνος), 133, 158,
569 ff., 575; in N, 570,
declension of, 539.
use of, 1397 f., 1430 f.
followed
by article,
1212 f.
for relative, 1444.
ἐκεῖνοσά(ς), 575.
ἐκεινοσί, 574.
ἐκείνου, 570.
ἐκείνουνά, 575.
ἐκείνούς, 570.
ἐκείνουσά(ς),
575·
ἐκείνωνά, 575.
ἐκειό (ἐκεῖνο), 155.
ἐκειός, 57Ι.
ἔπειρα, 990128
ἐκεῖσε for ἐκεῖ, 122, 435 ;
ἀπ᾿ - 435.
,
+ gen., 1314.
ἐκέκραγον, 996138
ἐκέκραξα, 996198-
ἐκπλαγῆναι ἐπί τινι,
1582 d.
ἔμπωμα ξύλου οι ἀπὸ or ἐκ
ξύλου, 1245.
έκράθην, 996129, App. i. 16 a.
ἔκραξα, 917.
ἐκράτειε for -τει, 857.
ἐκράτειεν, 858.
ἐκρεμάννυεν,937 [1], 99610·
ἐκρέμαστο, 736.
ἐκρέμνα, 937 [1], 996140 -
ἐκρεμνοῦντο, 850, 937 [1],
996140.
ἔκρινα, ἔκκριννα, App. ii. 14. B
ἔκριννα, App. ii. 14 Β.
ἐκρίνοσαν, 791.
ἔκρυβον, imprf. & aor.,
996148
ἔκρυφον, 996143 -
ἐκτέθη, 750 0.
ἐκτελέσαντες (τούς), 332.
ἐκτετακότα, as adv., 823.
ἐκτέτισμαι, 996274
ἐκκλησία, in N ekklisia, 24. έκτομίας, 283.
ἐλασθήσομαι, 99676.
ἔλασσον, 520.
ἐλάσσονες (τούς), 332.
ἐλασσόνως, 520.
ἐλασσωθήσομαι, 1885.
ἐλασσώσομαι, 1885.
ἐλάστε, 99675, 00
ἐλάσω, 889.
ἐλᾶτε, 99690·
ἐλάτη, ἡ, 245.
ἔλατος, δ, 245.
ἐλάττων, ἔλαττον, 5044
ἐλαύνω, 735, 889, 9967. ; in
N, 914, 1104.
- intrans., 1455 α.
ἐλαφηβόλος, 1106.
ἐλάφιον, λάφι, 135.
ἐλάχιστος, 5044 δ 5.
ἐλαχιστότερος, 506.
ἐλάω, as present, 99675.
ἐλέ, in N for ἐλαία, 272.
ἔλεγα, 704, 795.
ἐλέγαμε, 704
ἐλέγανε τον ἔλεγαν, App. iii.
28.
ἐλέγετο, 783.
ἐλέγοσαν, 791.
ἐλέγχω, 735.
ἐκεχειρία, 1116.
ἐκήρυξα, App. i. 15 b.
ἔκτικα, 731.
έκθλιψις, 139.
ἐκτικέναι, 731.
εκκαίδεκα, 645.
ἔκτισες, 798 f.
ἕκτος, 646.
ἐκτός, 1490; with gen.,
r316.
ἐλεεινά, adv., 518.
M
εἰ μή,
ἔκτοτε, 1137.
'except,' 1731, 1734 £.
ἐὰν μή, 1735.
ëλeupa, 917, 996152 -
ἐκκλησίαζον, 717.
ἐκκλησιάζω, 99614 -
ἐκκλησιάρχης, 150 d.
constr., 2135 ff.
ἐκκόπτω (causat.), 1460.
ἐκκόψαισαν, 792.
ἐκλέγω, 996101, 1·
ἐκλείποισαν, 792.
ἐκλείπω (intr.), 1455 b.
ἐκλείψας, 996 152
ἐκλέψασι, 793.
ἐκλίνθην, 996,
ἐκλιπών, 996102
ἔκλυσις, 1137.
ἐκνίζω, 996, τι
"
ἐκοιμήθηκα, App. iii. 29.
ἐκοιμηθήκανε, App. iii. 29.
ἐκοιμήθηκε, App. iii. 29.
ἐκοιμήθην, 1478.
-
for -0η, App. iii. 19.
ἐκεῖνοι, 44.
ἐκχέετε, 835.
ἑκών, 457.
as participle, 2142 C.
είναι, 2008.
ἔλα for ἐλθέ, 914, 9967, & g
τό, App. vi. 27.
ἔλα δά, 823.
έλα 'πά, 823.
ἐλάα, ἐλαία, 20.
ἔλαβα, 794.
ἔλαβαν, 121, 787.
ἐλάβασιν, 793.
ἐλάβατε, 796.
ἐλάβοσαν, 791.
ἐκόπην fur -πη, App. iii. 2o a, ἐλαδᾶς, δ, 287, 1044.
23.
ἐκουέστης, 301.
ἔκουσα for ἤκουσα, 724.
ἔκπαλαι, 1118.
ἐκπέμπομαι, 996200-
ἐλάδες, ἐλάιδες, 150 d.
ἐλάδι, τό, App. iii. 7 [r].
ἐλαθήσομαι, 9967
ἐλαί, in N for ἐλαία, 272.
ἐλαία, ἐλάα, 20.
ἐλάιδες, ἐλάδες, 150 d.
ελαιόμελι, τό, 303.
ἐκπλαγῆναι ἐπί τινι, 1582 d. ἐλαίου for ἐλέου, 49.
ἐκπηδοῦσαν, 850.
ἐκπίπτω τινός, 1346 f.
ἐκπλαγήσομαι, 996218
ἔκπλεως, 326.
ἐκπλήξω, 996218
•
ἐλάλεια του -λει, 857.
ἐλαμβάνεσαν, 791.
ἐλαμβάνοσαν, 791.
ἐκπλήσσω, 92110 ; -ομαι, ib. ; ἐλᾷς, 9967.
90·
ἐλέξει ἐλέγξει), 191.
ἐλέξι (ἐλέγξει), τοΙ.
ἔλεος, δ & τύ, 249.
Ελεούσιος, 49.
ἑλέσται τον -σθαι, 177.
ἐλευθερία, 1050.
ἐλεύθερον, τό, for ἐλευθερία,
1050".
ἐλεύθερός τινος, 1316 f.
ἐλευθερύω, constr., 1245,
1316 f.
ἐλευθερώθην, 717.
ἐλευθερώνω, 853.
leads to λευτερώνω, 723.
Ελευσίνα, Λεψίνα, 135.
ἐλεύσομαι, 996
- long record of, App. iv.
10".
ἐλευτερώνω, constr., 1317.
ἐλήλακα, 735, 990
ἐλήλαμαι, 735, 99676
ἐλήλασμαι, 9967.
ἐλήλεγμαι, 735.
ἐλήλυθα, 99640 -
ἐλήλυθαν, 786.
ἐληλύθειν, 99600
ἐλήλυθες, 798.
¤Anya, 990149 -
ἔλθαται fur -τε, imprt., 800.
612
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE. GREEK WORDS.
ἔλθατε, imprt., 800.
ἐλθάτω, 800.
ἐλθέ, 912 f., 92690 -
ἐλθεῖν, 99600.
a.
•
ἔλθοισαν, 792, 793, 805.
ἐλθοσαν, 26, .α.
ελιγήσομαι, 9967.
ἔλιγο κατ᾿ ὄλιγο, 1590.
ἐλιθώθην, 184.
Ελίκη & Ελιξ, App. iii. 12.
έλιξ & ἑλίκη, App. iii. 12.
ἑλίξω, 99670.
ἥλιος, ἥλιος, App. ii. 14 1.
ἐλιπόμην, 916.
ἔλιπον, 916, 996102.
ἐλίποντο, 1478.
Ελισάβετ, -άβη, 218.
ἑλίσσω, -ττω, 719, 99673 -
ἑλκύζω & -ύω, 868.
ἑλκυσόμενος, 99677.
ἑλκύσω, 99677.
ελκύω & -ύζω, 841, 868,
99677.
ἕλκω, 719, 99677.
Ελλάδα, ἡ, 364.
Ἑλλάδιν, 331, Αpp. iii. 7.
Ελλάς, 364.
ἐλλείπι fur -πει, 34.
ἑλλήνιζεν, 717.
-έλλιον (τό), 1037.
Έλξω, 99677.
ἐλούετο, 996153·
ἐλούμεθα, 996103-
ἐλοῦμεν, 990159•
ἐλούμην, 996153 -
ἐλοῦντο, 996153-
ἐλουόμεθα, 996 159.
ἐλουόμην, 996153
ἐλούοντο, 996109 -
ἐλούου, 996159.
ἐλοῦτο, 996163
ἐλπίδα, ἡ, 373.
ἐλπίδαν (τήν), App. iii. 9 a.
ἐλπίζω, 865 ; mid, 1486.
leads to ὀρπίζω, 723.
constr., 2085 ff.
+infin., 2086h f.
for fut., App. iv. 4.
ἐλπίς, 359; with fut. infin.,
2073; ἐστι, with
infin., 2086 f. ; δι' ἐλ-
πίδος ἔχω, ἐν ἐλπίδι εἰμί,
ib.; ἐλπίδας ἔχω ἐν
τινι 1560.
ἐλύθηκα, 801.
ἐλύθημεν, App. i. 15 b.
ἐλυπήθην του -θη, App. iii. 19.
ἐλύσανε for ἔλυσαν, App. iii.
28.
έλω, 996 1.
ἐλῶ, 889, 99675
ελω? 9964
ἐμ for ev, 195 ; see ἐν.
ἐμ μηνί, 195.
ἐμάθοσαν, 789, 791.
ἐμαράθηκα, 996150 •
ἐμαρηνάμην, 996 1.0·
èµâs, 532 e, 538.
-
for ἡμῶν, 534, 538.
ἐμάσεις for -σει, σα, 857.
ἐμαυτόν, 544, 549; in N,
548.
repl. by ()αυτόν, 1406.
ἐμαυτοῦ for ἐμός, 555.
ἐμαχησάμην, 996168
ἐμάχουμου”, 996108
•
ἔμμι for εἰμί, 29, App. ii. 8,
9, 14 Β.
ἐμνησάμην, 1005.
ἔμοι for ἐμοί, 84.
ἐμοί, 525, 530;
ἐμοῖ, 525.
ἐμοί γε, 529.
- ye, 529b.
ἔμοιγε, 529, 529, 2059.
ἔμορφος, 496..
ἐμορφότερος, 496.
ἐμορφότερος, 496.
ἐμύς, 553 ; in N, 554"; δ
ἴδιος, 557.
ἐμοῦ, 525, 530.
ἐμοῦγε, 529.
ἐμοῦμαι, 99673.
εμβαίνω, in N μπαίνω, 135, ἔμπα (ἔμβα), 193.
723.
ἐμβάλλω, 742, 1137.
in Ν βάλλω or βάνω,
723.
intrans., 1455 C.
ἐμβέβληκα, 742.
ἐμβιβάζομαι (mid.), 1486.
ἐμβριμούμενος, 850.
ἐμέ, μέ, 129, 525.
in N ἐμέν), ἐμένα(ν),
ἐμένανε, 532 0, 535,
App. iii. 30.
ἐμέγε, 529.
ἐμπαλωτοῦν τήν), 1043.
ἐμπεδούμαι (mid.), 1486.
ἔμπειρος, 465.
ἐμπέπεισμαι, 996100-
ἐμπέπληκα, 996, 11.
ἐμπέπλησται, 996 211-
Εμπήδου, 262 α [1].
Eμπrnica, 1875.
ἐμπίμπλημι, 126.
ἐμπίπλαμαι, 996211.
ἐμπίπλημι, 126, 996.11.
ἐμπίμπρημι, 126.
ἐμπίπρημι, 126, 996212
ἐμεῖς for ἡμεῖς, 532, ib. e, εμπίπτω τινί, 1378.
538.
· becomes ιμεῖς, 030.
ἐμελέτουν, 85ο.
ἐμέλησα, 996102-
ἔμελλον, 722.
for potent. indic., App.
iv. 5.
ἐμέμφθην, 1480.
ἐμέν for ἐμέ, 532 b, 535,
App. iii. 8, 30.
- for ἐμοί, App. iii. 9 b.
ἐμένα = ἐμέ, 132, 5321, 535,
538, Αpp. iii. 25, 30.
= ἐμοί, app. iii. 9 b.
ἐμέναν, 532 0, 535, App. iii.
9 (1, 30.
ἐμένανε, 537, App. iii. ga,
30.
ἡμέρα, ἡμέρα, in Plato, 41.
ἐμέτερος for ἡμ-, 554.
ἐμέω, 99673.
ἐμήμεκα, 99673.
ἐμήμεσμαι, 9967
μηνα, 996154
ἐμί, εἰμί, Αpp. ii. 14 B.
ἐμίηνα, 996 1
ἐμμέμονα, 742.
ἐμμένω, 742.
τινί, 1378.
·
ἐμπιστεύω, becomes -ομαι,
1000); medio - pass.,
1458"
ἐμπλήσω, 996211
ἐμποδίζω, 744.
becomes μποδίζω, 723.
ἐμποδών, 744.
ἐμπολιάζομαι, 1474·
έμπολιτεύομαι, 1486.
έμπορας, δ, 296.
ἐμπόρεσα, 830.
ἐμπορέω, 130 & [1], 132,
839".
ἐμπόροι, οἱ, 296.
έμπορος, μπορῶ, 130.
ἐμπρήσω, 996012 -
εμπρός, Ν ὀμπρός, 114.
for πρό, 1491.
ἔμπροσθεν, with gen., 1314.
του πρό, 1491.
Ev, 1315.
ἐμφανίζομαι, leads to φαν-,
723, 996201
ἐμψυχωμένος, 750 7.
ἐμῶν for ἡμῶν, 534.
ἐν from eys, 169, 1536.
atonon, 98".
before ρ, σ, ζ, 199.
uso of, 1555-65".
613
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
'
έν, ' with (of means), 1559. | -EN, in infin., 815 ; becomes ] ἐνδύω, 94414.
'for' (price), 1563.
-ειν, 817.
ένα for v, 132, 621, App.
iii. 25.
éva éva, 666.
Οι
for els, 1538, 1557,1564 f.
for ὑπὸ + gen., 1366.
for partitive gen., 1312.
for dat. of agent
instr., 1366", 1381 f.
for dat. of place, 1392.
+ gen. 15652 ; elliptic-
ally, 1289, 1565".
+ accus., 15652.
long record of, 1247,
1564.
repl. by eis, 1491, 1548,
1566; by ἔσω, μέσα,
etc., 1491.
see also έμ.
ἐν ᾅδου, 1289.
ἐν αἰτίᾳ ἔχειν τινά, 1560.
ἐν ἀριστερᾷ, 1234.
ἐν βραχεί, 156ο.
ἐν δεξιᾷ, 1234.
ἐν δέοντι, 15 60.
ἐν εἰρήνῃ, 1392.
ἕνα παρ' ἕνα, 1622.
τινά τι, 1279 f.
ἐνδώσωσι, 996 1
ἔνε (ναι), 985 & [1].
= ἐστί, 985.
= eloí, 985.
•
ἶναι for είναι, 26, α, 27, ενεβάλασαν, 791.
14
B.
App. ii.
ναι oι ἔνε, 985.
ἐνάκις, 648.
ἐνακισχίλιοι, 645.
ενακισχιλιοστός, 646.
ἐνακόσιοι, 150 €, 639, 645.
ἐνακοσιοστός, 646.
ἕναν (τόν), 621, App. iii.
6 b.
for ev, App. iii. 25.
ἐνεβριμοῦντο, 850.
ἐνέγκαντες (τούς), 332.
èveyúŋoa, 99667.
67
ἐνεγυησάμην, 996 7.
ἐνεδρεύω τινά, 12442, 1457;
-ομαι, pass., 1458.
ἐνεθυμήθην, 1478.
ἐνθυμούμην, 99680.
ἐνειά, 155 α.
ἔνειμα, App. 8 f., 14 Β.
ένανε, 537, 621, App. iii. 30. ἔνειμί τινι, 1378.
ἐναντία, 1597.
ἐναντινά, 1597.
ἐναντίον, 1597.
ἐναντιύομαι,
746,
99679,
1004, 1006; constr.,
1357, 1822.
ἐν ἐλπίδι εἰμί + infin., 2086 f. ἐναντιοῦσαι, 773.
ἐν θέρει, 1392.
ἐν ὄμμασιν, 1560.
ἐν ὀνόματι, 233.
ἐν ὅπλοις εἶναι, 1560.
ἐν ὅσῳ, 1776.
ἐν παρασκευῇ εἶναι, 1560.
ἐν πολέμῳ, 1392.
ἐν σιωπῇ, 1559.
ἐν σοί ἐστι, 1560.
ἐν τάχει, 1560.
ἔν τινι ἔχειν ἐλπίδας, 1560.
ἐν τοῖς, before superl. adv.,
1194.
ἐν τούτοις, 233.
ἐν τούτῳ, 1392.
ἐν τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ, 1559.
ἐν τῷ + infin., 1501, 2075,
App. vi. 24 ; for purl.,
2149, 2164.
ἐν τῷ παρόντι, 1392.
ἐν φόβῳ εἶναι, 1560.
ἐν χειμώνι, 1392.
ἐν ᾧ, 233, 1392; for part.,
2149; as long as,'|
1995, 1999; 'whilst,'
17766-
v for iv, 96.
*ν - ιδού, 543
ἔν τον, 543.
ἐναντιοῦται, ἵνα —, 850".
ἐναντιοῦτο, 717, 750 b & c,
99679.
ἐναντίως, 1597.
ἐναντιώσομαι, 996 το
ἐνάρκουν, 850.
ἕνεκα, 1490; with gen.,
1314.
τοῦ + infin., App. vi. 23.
ἐνεκωμίαζον, 99650
ἔνεμα, App. ii. 9, 14 Β.
ἐνέμενον, 742.
ἐνεμησάμην, 1486.
B.
eveμμa, app. ii. 8 ff., 14 B.
ἔνεν for ἔνε, App. iii. 2o b,
ter.
ἐνενήκοντα, 639, 645.
ἐνενηκοντάκις, 648.
ἐνενηκοντούτην, 430.
ἕνας for τίς, “a, an, 590, ενενηκοστός, 646.
594, 621, 1206.
τὸν ἄλλου, 1413.
ενασμενίζομαι, 1458.
ἐνάτει, -τῃ, 265
ἔνατος, 646.
Εναύω becomes ἀναύω, 723.
ἐνγίθεν, 37.
ἐνδεᾶ (τόν), 428.
ἐνδέσμους, 68, 69.
ἐνδεής, 428.
τινος, 1318.
ἕνδεκα, 645, 1156.
ενδεκάκις, 648.
ενδεκάς, 658.
ενδέκατος, 646.
ἐνδίδεις, 961, 99651
¿vdidoín, 99651 ·
évdídovoir, 961, 99661-
ἐνδιδῴη οι δώη, 996 1
ἔνδον, 508, 523.
ἔνδοξος, 465; cprt., 493.
ἐνδότατος, 508.
ἐνδότερος, 508.
ev for ev, 72 [3].
ἐνδοτάτω, 523.
év, 620 ff.
ἐν καθ᾽ ἕν, 6622.
ἐν παρ' ἕν, 1622.
N-, constr. of compounds,
1378.
ἐνδοτέρω, 523.
ἐνδύνω, 902, 937, 94114",
99665*
leads to N ντύνω, 723.
ἐνενήντα, 639, 64500 -
ἐνεούρησα & -κα, 990192
ἐνεπέσαμεν, 796.
ἐνεπίμπρην, 996212 -
ἐνέπεσαν, 787.
ἐνεπύδιζον, 744.
ἐνέπρηκαν, 786.
•
ἐνεργεῖν τι, 1244, 1457.
ἐνεργέομαι (pas.), 1458.
ἐνέργησαν, 750 c.
ἐνεστῶτος, 267 4.
ἐνετεθύμητο, 996 0-
80
ενεχθήσομαι, 996293 -
ἐνζεύγνυμι, 199.
ἐνήκοντα, 639.
·
ἔνημα, App. ii. 8, 14 Β.
ἐνήνεγμαι, 996.293.
ἐνήνοχα, 996203 -
ἐνθάδαι [οι -δε, 41).
ἐνθαυθοί, 184.
ἐνθιάζομαι, 1486.
ἐνθυμείσαι, 773-
ἐνθυμέομαι, 854, 99680,
1004, 1006.
in Ν θυμούμαι, 135, 723.
— τι ur τινός, 1264.
ἐνθυμηθήσομαι, 99640, 1885.
ἐνθυμήσομαι, 99630, 1885.
614
Ι.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἐνθυμίζω, 99680-
ἔνι (= ἔνεστι), 1 Ι.
( = ἐστί), 985 [1].
ἐνίκα, 720.
ἐνίκι for ἐνοίκιον, 44.
ἐνικίου for ἐνοι-, 44·
ἐνικῶσαν, 789.
-ÉNIOC, adj., 1061.
ἑνιους for ἑνός, 621.
ἐνισχύω (intr.), 1456.
ἐννέα, 154, 155 €, 645-
évvéá,
εννεακαίδεκα, 645.
ἐννεακόσιοι, ἐνακ-, 15ου.
ἐννεακόσοι, 645000
évveás, 658.
ἐννήκοντα, 639.
ἐννοεῖται, ' of course, 2060.
ἔννοιά μοι ἐστί, 996102-
Έννυμι, 99631, App. ii. 9.
ἐνοίκιον, νοίκι, 135.
ἐνοίκιν, App. iii. 7.
ἐνοικύντων, 26, α.
ένοικους, 30.
ἐνοοῦσαν, 739.
ἐνορκέω + ἵνα, Αpp. vi. 16.
évós, 579, 620 f.; in N, 621.
ἑνὸς δέοντες, 642.
ἑνὸς δέοντες εἴκοσι, 645.
ἑνοῦς for ἑνός, 621.
ἐνοχλέω, 745, 99632
τινά oι τινί, 1264.
ἐνοχλοῦντα, as uulv., 823.
ἐνρίπτω, 199.
ers leads to εἰς & ἐς, 169,
1536, App. ii. 9.
vs leads to eis, 29, app. ii.
8 f.
ἐνσείω, 199.
ἐνταγήσομαι, 996 4
ἐνταῦθα, with gou., 1314.
ἐντεθύμημαι, 996 -
ἐντείλασται, 177.
ἕντεκα, 645.
80
ἐντέλλομαι, 10or ; act., 1003.
constr., 2087 f.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
ἐντελοῦμαι, 996207.
ἐντέλλω, 1003.
ἔντερον, άντερο, 130.
ἐντέταλμαι, 996207 -
ἐντέτευχαν, 786.
ἐντεῦθεν, ἀπ'
435.
ντηροῦμαι, 1000.
ἔντιμος, 404 ; σompar., 193.
ἐντός, with gen., 1314.
εντός, 7 2 [3].
èvтpéñoµai, 996270 •
+ accus., 1244.
- leads to N ντρέπ, 135.
ἐντυγχάνω τινί, 1378.
ἐντύνω & -ομαι, 1469.
Ενυαλίῳ, 155 b.
ἐνυκίων, 36.
ἐνχειρίσθη, 750 c.
-ένω, from -ίνω, 902.
from -λλω, 904.
ἐνωγάλισται, 736.
ενώσαμεν, 718.
ἐνώχλουν, 745, 99632-
ἐξ or ἐκ, 222, 1488, 1491 f. ;
in N, 1491; by-forms |
¿x, ox, 1571.
atonon, 98b.
use of, 1566-71; ἡ ἐξ
Αρείου πάγου βουλή,
1629.
for gen. of separation,
1317; of material,
1331; for partit. gen.,
1311.
- for ὑπό + gen. by, 14641.,
1568 c.
for ἀπό, ex, 1512, 1569.
+ gen. elliptically, 1289f.
+ accus., 1570.
repl. by ἀπό, 1488, 1491,
1506, 1568 ; by ἔξω
(από), 1491.
extinct in present N,
1492, 1571.
see also ex.
ἐξ αἰτίας, 1568 b.
ἐξ ἀπόπτου, 1566.
ἐξ ἀρχῆς, 1246.
ἐξ ὅτου, 1790; repl. by ἀφ'
οὖ, ib.
ἐξ οὗ, 17764, 1790; repl. by
ἀφ' οὗ, 1790.
since constr., 1995,
1999.
ἕξ, 645.
Εξάδιπλος, 654.
|
ἐξέβαλον, 755 [1].
ἐξέβῃ, νὰ — 755 [1].
và
ἐξεβῆναι, 755 [1].
ἐξεγυμνώθην for -θη, App. iii.
20 C.
ἐξέδετο, 996τι·
ἐξεδιῃτήθην, 99647.
ἐξέδραν, 996 το
ἐξεικάζω, 99005
—, 1581.
leads to N EELK-, 723.
ἐξειργασμένῳ, ἐπ'
ἐξεκίνησα, 755.
ἐξεκίνουνα, 755.
ἐξεπλησίαζον, 99674.
ἐξεκρέμετο, 996199-
ἐξελέγχω, constr., 2135 f.
ἐξέλθατε, imprt., 800.
ἐξελιχθήσομαι, 9967
ἐξελούμενος, 996.
ἐξέμαθα, 755.
ἐξεμάθαινα, 755.
ἐξέμεσαν, 750
ἐξεπέσατε, 746.
ἐξεπλάγην, 996218.
ἐξέρασα, 724.
ἐξεράω, 99678
leads to N ξερνάω, 135,
723, 906.
ἐξερρίφην for -φη, App. iii.
19.
ἐξέρχεσαι, 773.
ἔξεστι, its subject, 1165.
+ infin., 2081 f., app. vi.
12 c [3].
ἐξέταζεν, 750 c.
ἐξετάζω, 996 κα; fut. ἐξετῶ,
889, 900 μα
- leads to N ξετάζω, 134,
723, 873.
for πυνθάνομαι, 996.1
ἐξετάσαμεν, 750 c.
ἐξαιτέομαι + ἵνα, App. vi. 16. ἐξέτασις, 395.
εξάκις, 648.
εξακισχίλιοι, 645.
εξακισχιλιοστός, 646.
εξακόσιοι & -σοι, 645.
εξακοσιοστός, 646.
ἐξανέστη for την, App. iii.
22 d.
εξαπλάσιος, 655.
ἑξάς, 658.
¿¿e for é§, 132", 645.
ἐξεαγεῖσα, 496.
ἐξεβαίνει, 755 [1].
ἐξεβαίνῃ, 755 [1].
ἐξέβαλα, 900, 1
ἐξέβαλαν, 787.
ἐξεβάλῃς, νά, 755 [1].
ἐξέβαλλον, 742.
ἐξετάσθησαν, 750 c.
ἐξετάσω, 99633 -
εξέτη, τόν, 430.
ἑξέτης, ὁ & ἡ, 430.
εξέτιν (τήν), 430.
¿¿etŵ, 887", 99633 ; SOC
ἐξετάζω.
ἐξεύρω, as present, App. iv. 3.
ἐξέωκα, 996320 -
ἐξεώσασθαι, 996920 -
ἕξη for ἕξ, 132, 645.
ἐξήβαλε τον ἔκβαλε, 755 [1].
ἐξηγάγοσαν, 791.
ἐξηγέομαι, Ν -άω, 1000.
εξήκοντα, 29, 639, 645.
εξηκοντάκις, 648.
Εξηκοστός, 6.46.
ἐξήλθαμεν, 796.
615
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἐξήλθατε, 796.
ἐξήλθοσαν, 791.
ἐξῆν for ἔξεστι, I9OI.
ἐξήνεγκαν, 787.
ἑξήντα, 639, 645co •
εξηνταρέα, 661.
εξήταζον, 99633
εξήτακα, 9968.
ἐξήταξα, 996 3.
ἐξήτασα, 99638.
ἐξητάσθην, 99638.
ἐξήτασμαι, 996gg -
έξι, see ἕξη.
ἐξίημι (intr.), 1455 c.
ἐξιλασάμην, 996 117
ἐξίσταμαι τινός, 1346 f.
ἐξιστάνω, 962.
ἐξιστάω, 962.
ἐξίστημι, constr., 1346 f.
εξόλλυμι, 990182
εξομαι, 99608, 1885.
ἐξομοιοῦσαι, 773.
ἐξομολογέομαι, 1474
ἐξομολογεῖτο, 717 [1].
ἐξομολογήσεται, ἵνα —, 779.
εξόν, as accus. absol., 2143.
in P-B, 2145.
ἐξορίζω, leads to fop-, 723.
ἐξορισιμαῖος, 1056.
ἐξορκίζω + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
ἐξόρκισαν, 717 [1].
ἐξόρκισεν, 717 [1].
ἐξορμῶ, constr., 2087 ff.
ἐξουσιαστάδες, οἱ, 290.
ἐξυπνῶ, Ν ξυπνώ, 135.
ἔξω, 114, 508, 523, 524, 1513.
in N also ὄξω, 524.
for ἀπό, 1491.
+ gen., 1314.
ἔξω ἀπό, 1315, 1491.
Έξω, 996gs ; effect. & durat.,
08
1895-
ἔξωθεν, 1513.
ἐξώλεοι for -λεις, 430.
ἐξώτατος, 508.
ἐξωτάτω, 523.
ἐξώτερος, 508.
εξωτέρω, 523.
-co, imprf. from - εσο, 782.
-ε-, contracted to -or-, 313,
S31.
čoika, 99607.
ξύs contr. to us, 152 [1].
-Єoc or -Єioc, 20ª.
adj. in, 467; how con-
tracted, 3r3 f.; how
accented, 3191.
-eoc, -oŶc, adj., 1060 f.
-eoúpnoa, 153, 996192-
-εούρουν, 714, 990192
ἐονύδρου, 300.
•
ἑαυτῶν fur ἑωυτών, 267.
ἐπαγγέλλομαι,
2085 f., 2086b.
ἐπάην, 996109.
ἔπαθαν, 788.
ἔπαθον, 996197.
ἐπαίνεσα, 724.
ἐπαινέσω, 999.
constr.,
ἐπαινέω, 843, 845 ; fut.
- έσομαι, 998; in N,
843.
leads to N παινάω, 135,
723.
ἐπαινεῖσθαι παρά τινι,
1632.
ἔπαινος, ὁ & τύ, 249.
ἔπαιξα, 996100-
ἐπαίρνω, 903, 996
283 •
becomes παίρνω, 723.
ἐπαίρω, παίρνω, 135, 723,
903.
ἔπαισα, 996100 &
ἐπαισχύνθη, 750 0.
ἐπακροῶμαι, 1003.
ἐπαλινοδοῦσαν, 789.
Επαμεινώνδας, 283.
ἐπάν, from ἐπεὶ + ἄν, 1998,
1999.
use of, 1776, 1779 f.
ἐπάνα γιος, 430.
ἐπανείλαντο, 996 1
επανορθύω, 745.
ἐπάνω for ἐπί, 1488, 1583,
1591.
for ὑπέρ, 1678.
becomes ἀπάνω, 1488.
ἐπάνω εἰς, 1583.
ἐπαρέδωκα, 753.
ἐπαρεδώκαμεν, 753.
ἐπαρεκαθέζοντο, 750 α.
ἐπαρεχωρήσαμεν, 753.
ἐπαρήνει, 751.
ἐπάροντα, as adv., 823.
ἔοικε, changed to ἔοικα, ἐπαρρησιάσθην, 1480.
2083 f.
ἐοίκω, 99637.
ἐοικώς, 723, 99607.
ξόν contr. to ὅν, 152 [1].
εύρακα, 717, 996180.
ἔοργαν, 786.
ἑορτάσιμος, 1055.
ἐπαρώνουν, 751.
επάταξα, 996249
ἐπάτησα, 720, 849.
ἐπάτησες, 798.
ἐπατοῦσαν, 789.
ἐπαύλιν, τύ, Αpp. iii. 7.
ἐπαύσθην, 996 100.
επαφή, ἐφαφή, 126.
Επαφρᾶ & -άδος (τοῦ), 288.
Επαφρόδειτος, 34.
| Έπαχτο, Ναύπακτος, 134 C.
ἐπέβαλαν, 787.
ἐπεβόουν, 850.
ἐπεγραμμένῳ, 736.
ἐπέδοκα, 26. α.
ἐπεδραμοσαν, 791.
ἐπέθανα, 996412
ἐπεθύμησα, 24.
'
ἐπεί, when, 1776, 1779f.,
1790.
constr., 1995 ff., 1999.
+ aor. for plpf., 1857.
+äv, 1998.
4 since (causal), 1737 f.,
17764, 1945 l.
1
I.
for part., 2149, 211.
replaced by ap' ov, 1790.
πρώτον, 1776, 1793.
τάχιστα, 1776, 1793,
1995, 1999.
ἐπεὶ καί, 177, 1739, 1946.
ἐπείγεσαι, 773.
ἐπείγω (intr.), 1455. d.
ἐπειδάν, from ἐπειδὴ + ἄν,
1998.
constr., 17.761, 1779 f.
τάχιστα, 1776", 1793,
ἐπειδή, when, 17761,
1790, 1793,
1779 f.,
1995 ff., 1999.
+ av, 1998.
with aor. for plpf., 1857.
'since,' 1737 ff., 1776,,
1945 1.
for causal part., 2151.
replaced by ἀφ' οὗ, 1790.
πρῶτον, 1776, 1793.
τάχιστα, 1776ο, 1793,
1995.
ἐπειδής, 1716, 1739.
καί, 1716, 1717", 1946.
ἐπείκεια, ἐπιεικ-, 148.
Ἐπεικίδης, Επιεικ-, 148.
ἐπείνασα, 853°.
ἐπείνουν, 850.
ἐπειρασάμην, 1005.
ἔπειτα, 1744.
ἔπειταν for -τα, App. iii. 19.
ἐπεκατέλαβεν, 751, 755-
ἐπεκρατοῦσαν, 789.
ἐπεμελήθην, 1478.
ἐπεμελησάμην, 996132 -
ἐπενεμησάμην, 1486.
ἐπέξειμι, 989 α.
ἐπ' ἐξειργασμένῳ, 1581.
ἐπεξελεύσομαι, 989 α.
ἐπεξελευσόμενος, 989 α.
616
Ι.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἐπεξιών, 989 α.
ἐπερίκλεισεν, 752.
ἐπέρνα, 720.
ἐπερπάτηξα & -ησα, 853.
ἔπεσα, 794, 996215 -
ἐπέσαμε”, 720.
ἔπεσαν, ηδη.
ἐπεσκέπην, 996247.
ἔπεσον, 996215.
ἐπέσταλκα, 996258.
ἐπετόμην, ἐπτόμην, 136.
ἐπέτου μου”, 996208.
ἐπετρίκλεισεν, 752.
ἐπέτυχα, 724.
ἐπεφθάνει, 996208
ἐπῆγα, 9963.
ἐπηδήμησα, 750 c.
ἐπήδηξα & -ησα, 853.
ἐπηετανόν, 155 0.
ἐπήκοος, 1140.
ἐπῆλθαν, 787.
ἐπήλθασι, 793
ἐπηνώρθουν, 745, 751, 99614·
ἐπηνώρθωμαι, 745, 99614
ἐπηνώρθωσα, 99614.
ἐπῆρα, 996..
ἐπήρασιν, 793.
ἐπί, 1489, 1492, 1572-83.
constr., 1572-83.
+ accus., 1572-6; for
dat., 15831.
+ gen., 15771. ; for gen.
of cause, 1333; for
dat. simple, 1389),
1582 €7.
+ dat., 1580 ff., 15824.
misused, 1583 & [1, 2].
its P-N history, 1583.
repl. by ἐπάνω (εἰς), 1488,
1491, 1583 & 3 ; by
διά, 1491; by εἰς οι 'ς,
ib.
see also ἐφ'.
ἐπ' ἀργύρῳ, 1582 e.
ἐπ' ἐμοί, τὸ —, 1582 8.
ἐπ' ἐμοῦ, 1578.
b.
ἐπ' ἐξειργασμένῳ, 1581.
ἐπ' ονόματι, 23.3.
ἐπὶ δεξιά, 1573.
ἐπὶ δόρυ, 1576.
ἐπὶ μισθῷ, 1582 c.
ἐπὶ ναυσίν, 1580.
ἐπὶ νίκῃ τρέχειν, 1582 e.
ἐπὶ πολύ, 1574, 1576.
ἐπὶ ταυτοῦ, 1582 c.
ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάσσῃ, 1580.
ἐπὶ τὴν ἀσπίδα, 1576.
ἐπὶ τεσσάρων, 1578.
T
ἐπὶ τὸ + infin. for final part.,
2158, App. vi. 21.
ἐπὶ τοῖς ὁρίοις, 1580.
ἐπὶ τόκῳ δανείζειν, 1582 e.
ἐπὶ τούτοις, 1581, 1582 c.
ἐπὶ τούτου for -τῳ, 1582 e.
ἐπὶ τούτῳ, 1582 e.
ἐπὶ τῷ + infin., App. vi. 23.
ἐπι-, constr., 1378.
ἔπια, έπιια, 155 α.
ἐπιλέλησμαι, 996150 -
ἐπιλήσμων, 469, 1974.
ἐπιμελέομαι & επιμέλομαι,
996162, 1004.
τι, 1295; ἐπιμέλειαν,
1265 ; τὰ ἄλλα, 1266.
+ ὅπως or ὡς, 1962.
+iva, 1963.
ἔπια for ἔπιον, 720, 794, ἐπιμεληθήσομαι, 1885.
996213-
ἔπιακα, aor., 1875.
ἐπιβαίνω + accus., 12441
ἐπιβάλλω (intr.), 1456.
ἐπιβουλεύω & pass., 1458,
1462.
- -ομαι, leads to Nπιβουλ-,
723
τινί, 1378 ; τινά, 1457.
ἐπίβουλος, Ν πίβ., 135.
ἐπιβύομαι, 1486.
ἐπίγειοι, -γοι, 148.
ἐπίγοι, -γειοι, 148.
ἐπιδεδραμηται, 996278 -
ἐπιδέδωκαν, 786.
ἐπιδείκνυτο, 750 c.
ἐπιδένω, 99645
ἐπιδέξιος, Ν πιδέξιος, 135.
ἐπιδημίοο, -μίου, App. ii. 12
[3].
ἐπιδίδωμι (intr.), 1455 c.
ἐπιδοθίσης, 34.
ἐπίδοξύς εἰμι, with infin.,
2086b f.
ἐπιδώσαντος, 996 1.
ἐπιδώσασαν, 996 1.
ἐπιείκεια, ἐπείκ-, 148.
Επιεικίδης, Επεικ-, 148.
ἐπίθεσις, 395.
ἐπίθοιτο, 954.
ἐπιθόμην, 996200-
ἐπιθυμίζω, 869.
ἐπιθυμέω, 755, 854, 869.
leads to N πεθυμῶ, 723.
constr., 2087 ff.
+ infin., 2087.
+íva (vá), 2088.
·
ἐπιμελήσομαι, 1885.
ἐπιμέλομαι, see - έομαι.
ἐπιμεμέλημαι, 996102
ἐπιμένω, with part., 2126 f.
ἐπίμετρον, 1137.
ἐπιμήκιστος, 504.
ἔπιον, 720, 996.
ἐπιορκέω, 744, 996 4
ἐπίορκος, 744.
ἐπίοσαν, 789, 791.
ἐπιοῦσα (ή), 1182 1.
ἐπίπαν, 1137.
ἐπίπας, 448.
ἐπίπρασεν, 996214-
ἐπιπτάς, 996208-
ἐπιπτόμενος, 996208 -
επίσημον, 26, α [1].
ἐπισκοπή, πισι-, 135
135b.
ἐπίσκοπος, omitted, 1227.
ἐπίσταμαι, 9746, 996857
1004.
constr., 2090, 2091,
2133 ff., 2137 d.
ἐπιστάμην, 717, 723, 750 c.
ἐπίστασαι, 996 σ
85
ἐπίστασο, 99685.
ἐπιστάτης, iu Ν πιστ-, 135.
ἐπίστεφσε, 51.
ἐπίστῃ, 99685-
ἐπιστήμων, 469.
ἐπιστήσομαι, 99685-
ἐπιστολιμαῖος, 1056.
ἐπιστόλιν, 1040, App. iii. 7.
ἐπιστρέφω (intr.), 1456.
ἐπίστω, 99635-
ἐπίστωμαι, 99645.
85*
ἐπισύναξαν, 750€.
ἐπικαλέομαι + ἵνα, App. vi. ἐπισχὼν χρόνον, 2148.
16.
ἐπίκειμαί τινι, 1378.
ἐπικόχρωμα, 996310-
ἐπικλείομαι, 1486.
Επικλῆν (τόν), 432 6.
ἐπικλίσθαι, 736 [2].
ἐπικράτεια, 322, 146.
Επικρατής for -τίς, 37.
ἐπικράτησαν, 750 c.
ἐπιλανθάνομαι, 996100-
ἐπιταγή, -ταή, 59.
ἐπιταγήν, -ταήν, 155°.
ἐπιταή, ταγή, 59.
ἐπιταήν, ἐπιταγήν, 155.
ἐπιτάσσω, constr., 2017 f.
Επιτέλου (or -λους, 432 C.
ἐπιτέμνομαι, 1486.
ἐπιτεταμένη προσῳδία, 76
[2], App. i. I.
ἐπιτετελεκεῖα, 36.
– constr., 2133 H., 2137 f. ἐπιτετ ρίψομαι, 996 79
ἐπίλεκτος, 465.
ἐπιλέλημμαι, 996140.
ἐπιτήδειόν ἐστι, changed to
-ός είμι, 2083 1.
617
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἐπιτήδε(ι)ος, 20.
ἐπιτήδειος leads to N πιτή-
δειος, 135.
constr., 1 540, 2000, 2001.
εἰμι for -όν ἐστι, 2083 f.
ἐπιτηδεύομαι, leads to N
πιτηδ-, 723.
constr., 1458.
ἐπιτηδεύσουν, 777.
ἐπιτίθειν, 959 α (twice).
ἐπιτίθεμαί τινι, 1378.
ἐπιτίθων, 959 α.
ἐπιτιμάω + ἵνα, app. vi. 16.
ἐπιτραχήλιον, in Ν πετρα-
χῆλι, 135.
ἐπιτρέπω, constr., 2087 f.
τινί, 1378.
+ infin., 2094 ff.
+ prim. subj. for ἄγε οι
φέρε, 1914.
ἐπίτροπος, in N πίτρο, 135.
Ν
ἐπιτροχάδην, 1137.
ἐπιτυφήσομαι, 996284
ἐπιτυχαίνω, 755, 996282
Επιφάνη (του), 278.
ἐπίχαρις, 474.
ἐπιχειρέω, becomes -ίζομαι,
868, 10002.
ἐπιχειρίζομαι, 868, 10002.
ἐπίχυννε, 902.
ἐπιχώρια Γράμματα, App. ii.
I 2.
ἐπιώρκηκα, 744.
ἐπιώρκησα, 744, 99634
ἐπιώρκουν, 744.
ἐπλάκην, 996210-
ἐπλάνεσα, 853.
ἐπλανησάμην, 1005.
ἐπλέετο, 835 [2].
ἔπλεις, 834.
ἐπλεῖτο, 835 [2].
ἔπλεν, App. i. 16 b.
ἐπλεύσθην, 996217.
ἐπληγην, 996 100 & 218
for -γη, App. iii. 19.
ἐπληροῦσαν, 121, 789.
ἐπληροφορήθη for -θην, App.
iii. 22 d.
ἐπλήχθην, 996218
ἐπνίγην for -γη, App. iii.
19.
επόεισε, App. ii. 9 f.
ἐπόησε, App. ii. 10.
ἐπέθανα, 724.
ἐποῖον for ἐπῇεν, 44·
ἐποίειν for -ει, App.
19[1].
ἐποίηκας. 736.
εποιήκασιν, 736, 793.
εποίημαι, 736.
ἐποιησάμην τὸ ἐπίγραμμα, Ερατώ, 411.
86
1875.
1486.
ἐποιήσασιν, 793.
ἔποικα, 996222,
ἐποῖκαν, 99636.
ἐποιοῦσαν, 789.
ἐπολιόρκουν, 748.
έπομαι, 719, 99637, 1001.
constr., 1245.
ἅμα τινί, 1671.
Απόμεινα for ἀπέμ-, 724.
ἐπόνεσα, 853.
ἐπ' ὀνόματι, 233.
ἐπορεύθην, 1478.
ἔπος, as and const., 1113 f.
ἐποτρύνω, constr., 2087 f.
ἐπουλούντασι, 793, 801 [2].
ἐπραγματεύθησαν, 786.
ἔπρεπε, for pres. ind., App.
iv. 5.
ἐπριάμην, 996321-
ἐπροδέσποσεν, 752.
ἐπροεκράτουν, 751.
ἐπροεφασιζόμην, 751.
ἐπροέταξε, 751.
πρόσεχα, 704".
ἐπρόσθεσα, 752.
ἐπρόσταξα, 752.
ἐπροφήτευον, 750 α.
ἐπροφήτευσα, 750 α.
ἐπροφήτευσαν, 750 a.
ἐπροχειρήσαμεν, 752.
ἐπροχτές (προχθές), 174.
ἑπτά, 645.
ἑπτὰ ἑπτά, 666.
ἑπτακαίδεκα, 645.
ἑπτάκις, 648.
ἑπτακισχίλιοι, 645.
ἑπτακισχιλιοστός, 646.
ἑπτακόσιοι, 645.
ἑπτακοσιοστός, 646.
ἑπτάς, 658.
ἔπταρον, 996227.
ἐπτερύγωμαι, 736.
ἑπτέτις κύρη, 430.
έπτηκα, 996228 -
ἔπτην, 996208-
ἔπτηχα, 990228
·
Ι. ἐράω, ἐρασθήσομαι, 840 ;
ἠράσθην, 1857 f.
2. ἐράω = λέγω, 852, 99672 ·
ἐργᾷ for ἐργάσῃ, 99638
ἐργάζομαι, 99638, Ioor ff.
leads to N ἀργο, 723.
augment of, 719?
ἔργον, 1265.
ἐργαζομένοις, 72 [3].
ἐργασμένος, 99633 &
ἐργάσομαι, 99638
ἐργαστῶ, 99638.
ἐργᾶται for -άσεται, 99648.
ἐργάτης, 283.
236*
εργάω, 132, 996236.
Εργομένου fur -νους, 432 C.
epyov, as 2nd const., 1113 f.
ἐρεῖν (as present) for λέγειν,
9967, & [1], App. iv. 3;
see also ἐρέω.
ἐρέσθαι, 99638.
ἐρέσσω, 879.
88
Ερετριέων & -ιῶν, 405.
Ερετμός, 178.
Ερετριέας & -ιᾶς, 405.
ἐρέφω, 126.
Ερεχθείς, - χθηίς, 28 Δ.
Ερεχθηίς, -χθείς, 28 1.
Ερεχθίδος, 385.
ἐρέω, see ἐρεῖν ; becomes
ἐράω, 852.
ἐρημάζω, in N ῥημ-, 135.
ἔρημος, 309, 1317, App. i.
15b; becomes ἔρ'μους,
030.
ἐρημωμένα, 718.
ἐρήμωσα, γι.
ἐρήσομαι, 996τι·
έρθω, 99690.
έρι-, 1104, 1125.
ἐριβῶλαξ, 1125.
ἐρίζειν, 1642.
ἐρίζομαι, 1459.
ἐρίηρ(ος), 439.
Ερικαιεύς, 49.
ἔριν (τήν), 358.
Ερινύς, 3885.
ἐπτόμην, ἐπετ-, 1361, 996208, ἔρισα for ὥρ-, 724-
App. i. 16 a.
ἔπτυκα, 996 480-
ἐπτώθη, 996210-
ἐπύησα, 36.
ἔπω, 99640
έπω, 996.7.
•
iii. ἐ]πῶδε, 534.
έρ
ἔπωμα, aor., 1875.
ἐρ for ἐν, 201
Ερα μία, 68.
Ερακλεώτις, 40.
ἕρπος, aus 2nd const., 11t3 f.
ἔρκεσο, 783.
Ερματικός, 48.
Ερμέας, της, 285.
Ερμείας, 283, App. ii. 14. 4.
A.
Ἑρμες, Ἑρμῆς, App. ii. 14 4.
'Epµñ (tóv), app. iii. 22 a.
Ἑρμῆ (τοῦ), 278.
Ἑρμῆ & -ῆδος (του), 288.
Έρμηα, 38.
ἑρμήνευεν, γι.
618
I..
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἑρμήνευον, 723.
ἑρμηνεύς, 403.
ἑρμήνευσεν, 71.
ἑρμηνεύω, leads to N ἁρμ- &
ὁρμ-, 723.
Ἑρμῆς, 285.
Ερμιονοῦσσα, 1067.
Ερμογένου for -ous, 432 c.
ἔρ'μους for ἔρημος, 030.
-έρνω, from -έρω, -ύρω, 903.
Ερξιγένου for -vous, 432 c.
Εροδότου, 40.
ἒρος (του), ἦρος, App. ii. 144.
Εριδίου, 187.
ἑρπύζω & ἕρπω, 868.
έρπω & -ύζω, 719, 868.
ἐρράγην, 996235 -
ἔρραγκα, 996232-
ἔρραμμαι, 996233
ἐρραμμένος, 996232
ἐρράφην, 996233 -
έγραψες, 798.
ἐρρέετο, 835 [2].
ἐρρέθην, 99672.
ἔρρεον, 712.
ἐρρηγεία, 365.
ἐρρήσω, 99639.
·
ἐρρήθην, 99672.
ἐρριγωκότες, 996236.
ἔρριμμαι, 996237.
ἔρριπτον, 712.
Eppipa, 731, 996237 •
ἐρριφέναι, 731
ἐρρίψομαι, 996237.
ἐρρύηκα, 9805, 996234
ἔρρω, 99639-
ἔρρωγα, 996235-
ἔρρωμαι, 99638.
ἐρρωμενέστερος, 499 C.
ἐρρωμένος, its emprt., 499 c.
ἐρρώμην, 996238 •
ἐρρώσθαι, 996.38 -
ἔρρωσο, 996238.
ερυθρία for '-, 717.
ερυθρίας, 283.
ερυθρόλευκος, 1156, 1157.
ερυθρομέλας, 1157.
κρύφια for ερίφια, 35.
έρχεστε, 177.
ἔρχομαι, 99600; ἐλθέ, 912 π.
for fut. indic., App. iv. 4.
Ερχομενός, 125.
ἐρχομός, 1020.
ἔρχουνται, 778.
ἐρῶντες for -οῦντες, 99672.
Έρως, δ, 362.
conf. with ἥρως, 41.
ἐρωτῶν & εἴρειν, 4Ι.
έρωτας, δ, 363, 373.
ἐρωτῶ, for εἴρομαι, 996τι·
for μανθάνω, 996.31
τινά τι, 1279 f.
+ infin., App. vi. 12 c [3].
+iva, App. vi. 16.
ἐρωτεύομαι, 100o.
ἐρωτηματικόν, 70g.
Ερῶτιν, τό, 302, 331, 1Ο4Ο,
App. iii. 7.
Ερώτιον, 1040.
-έρω leads to N -έρνω, 903.
ἐρῶ, 99672 ; see ἐρεῖν.
es, see eis.
ἐς κόρακας, 130.
Lec0e, in A-N, 765, 801' ii.
in imprf., 780; in N,
814.
-ECOHN, imprf., 780.
ἐσθής, ἡ, 360.
ἐσθίουν, 777.
ἐσθίω, 99691.
τινός, 1298.
LECOON, 765 ff.
imprf. 780.
ἔσθω, 99601.
Lec, in verb becomes -εις,
767.
ἐσιμωμέναι, 736.
ἐς, ἕως, ἔστε, 1488, App. ii. 9. ἔσκαμμαι, 996245
és for év, 201.
ἐς Σάμῳ, 201.
és, 948, 955, app. ii. 10.
-ec-, in adj. -ŋs, 426.
of
-ec, in nom. pl., 3rd decl.,
328 ; attracts
acc. pl., 332 f.
-ec for -αι & -as, in nom. &
acc. pl. rst decl., 267 f.
spelt also -ais, 267Þ.
its influence on τάς, 561.
-έc for -έας (δ), 273 ; ab-
normal, 299; foreign &
recent, 300.
-ec, in imprf., 780 ; in G-N,
801 i.
-ec for -as in pf. & aor.,
798 F.
-Ecal, restored in P-N, 773.
ἐσανίδι (ἐνσαν-), 201.
ἐσάπηκα, N aor., 1875.
Ν
ἐσάπην, 996342.
ἐσᾶς for ὑμῶν, 534, 538.
ἔσβηκα, 9807.
ἔσβην, αυτ. οἱ σβέννυμαι,
29b, 979, 94616.
ἐσέ for σέ, 532.
becomes ἐσέν, ἐσένα (v-e),
535, App. iii. 30.
542,
535,
ἔσει οι ἔσῃ, 763, 981.
koeîs, 532, ib. d, 538,
572.
ἐσέν for (ἐσέ, 532 α,
App. iii. 9 a, 30.
ἐσένα (= σὲ & σοῦ), 535,538,
App. iii. 9 a, 25, 30.
ἐσέναν, 533 α, 535, App. iii.
9 α, 30.
ἐσένανε, 537, App. iii. 30.
ἔσεται, ἔσται, 1361.
ἐσῃ (ἔσει), 763, 981.
σήμανα, 996241
σήμηνα, 996 και
ἐρωτῶ, Ν ρωτ-, 134 d, 723. ἐἔσησθε, 779.
ἐσκανδαλίσθην, 1480.
ἐσκάφην, 996245
ἐσκέδασμαι, 996240-
ἐσκέπασες, 798.
kokéferai, 990247 ·
ἐσκύπημαι, 996247 .
ἔσκωμμαι, 996248 -
ἔσο, 985 & [2].
deco, verb ending in A-B,
Sorb ii.
imprf., 780; becomes
-0, 782; restored iu
P-N, 783.
ἐσοδιάζω, in N σοδ-, 135.
ἔσομαι, 981.
auxil. verb, 690.
long record of, App. iv.
Iob.
+ part. for fut. indic.,
1883 f., 1892 f., 1896,
1898 f.
+ infin., 1892b.
ἐσοῦ for σου, 532 α.
ἔσπακα, 996249-
ἔσπαρμαι, 996200-
ἔσπαρκα, 996200-
ἔσπασμαι, 99629 •
ἔσπεισμαι, 990201 -
ἑσπέριζον, 717, 723.
ἔσπευκα, 736 [r].
ἕσπομαι, as pres., App. iv. 3.
| konúµny, 99687, app. i. 16 a.
ἐσπούδακα, 996252; in Nas
aor., 1875.
ἑστά, ἑπτά, 174.
ἔσται, ἔσεται, 1361, 981,
App. i. 16 b.
σταίην, 966.
ἕστακα, 996 με α,
ἑστακεία, 36'
ἔσταλκα, 996208
118
σταμαι, 96.4, 996 18 0.
ἕσταμεν, 966.
ἑσταμένου, 973.
ἔστ' ἄν, 1776,, 1784 f.
619
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἑστάναι, 966.
ἑστάομαι, 1004.
ἕστασαν, 966.
ἐσυνμαρτύρησαν, 752.
ἑστῶμεν, 966.
ἔστωντας καί, 116.
-€т€, 765 ff.; in G-N, 801
i.; in N, 797.
imprt. in P-N, 813.
imprf., 780.
έστατε, 966.
-έστατος, 499.
ἔστε (of ειμί), 1488.
ἔστε, as long as, constr.,
-
1995, 1999.
+ aor. for plpf., 1857.
LECTE, in N, 801b ii, 801º.
ἔστειλα, App. ii. 9, 14 B.
ἔστελα, App. ii. 9, 14 Β.
ἐστεναγμένος, 996254•
ἐστέρεσα, 996255 -
ἐστέρημα, 996200-
ἐστεφανωμένος, 849.
-έστερος, 499.
ἐστεφάνωσα, 849.
ἔστηκα, 996118 4 [1].
B.
ἕστηκα, 962, 964, 996118 8.
as present, 1868.
as imprf., 996118 b [1].
leads to στήκω, 723.
ἑστήκατε, imprt., 800.
ἑστήκειν for -κει, App. iii.
19 [1].
ἑστήκω, 937, 958, 962, 965,
99692, 118
& b.
ἔστηλαν for ἔστειλαν, 29.
ἑστήξω, 972, 1869, 1884,
1898.
ἔστησα, 964.
ἐστήσαντι (ενστ-), h2or.
ἑστιαθήσομαι, 996393, 1885.
Εστιαιες, 26, α.
Εστίαιος, -αις, 299.
εστιάσομαι, 99603, 1885.
ἑστιάω, 719, 839, 996.
ἐστίν, 3204, 98r; how ac-
cented, 983; for 7, 985º.
ἔστι μοι, 1367 f.
ἐστιμ περί, 203.
ἔστιν οἵ, 1436, 2015.
ἔστιν ὅπου, 1436.
ἔστιν ὅπως, 1436.
ἔστιν ὅτε, 1436.
ἔστωντας καὶ νά, 1994.
εστώς, 966.
ἐτεθελήκεσαν,
996 1
ἑστῶσι, 966.
ἐτέθνασαν, 967.
ÉTEKOV, 996272·
ἔτεμον, 996208
ἐσύ for σύ, 532, ib. d, 538. ἔτεινα, 996200-
ἐσυμβούλευε, 750 α.
ἐσυναινέσασιν, 793.
ἐσυνάλλαξα, 752.
ἐσυνάλλαξαν, 752.
ἐσυναρέσθησαν, 752.
ἐσυνεπαθήσαμεν, 753.
ἐσυνῆκε, 750 α.
ἐσφάγην, 996200-
for -γη, App. iii. 2o d
σφαγμαι, 996259 •
topaka, 996259
ἐσφάλιζεν, 724.
ἐσφαλισμέναι, 724.
ἐσφάλθην, 996200-
ἔσφαλμα, 996200-
ἔσφαλμαι, 996 200 -
ἐσφαλόμην, 996200
ἐσφάχθην, 996259.
ἔσφηλα, 996200-
ἔσχα for ἔσχον, 794.
ἐσχάζυσαν, 791.
ἔσχαμεν, 796.
ἐσχάρα, σκάρα, 135.
ἔσχατον, 506 [2].
ἔσχατος, 507 ; use of, 1239.
ἐσχατώτατον, 506 [2].
ἔσχηκα, 99698 -
ἔσχηκαν, 786.
ἔσχησα, 99608.
ἔσχον, 1361, 99698, App. i.
16 b.
ἔσχοσαν, 791, 996gg -
čow, 508, 523, 524, 1513;
after ἔξω, 114;
ἐν,
els, 1315; for
1315;
simple ev, 1491.
-ecw becomes -éw, 892.
ἔσωθεν, 1513.
•
Ετεοκλής, 431.
ἐτέτοιος, 572.
ἐτήκουμου", 996 270
-έΤΗΝ, imprf., 780.
ἔτης (λογῆς), 562.
-ετι, in verb leadsto-et, 767.
ἐτιθέασι, 793.
ἐτίθετο, 782.
ἐτίλλοσαν, 791.
ἐτίμα, 857.
ἐτίμησα, 849.
ἕτιμον for ἕτοιμον, 44.
ἐτίμουν, 85ο.
ἐτίσασιν, 793.
ἔτλην, 9804
LETO, verb ending in A-B,
801" ii.; in N, 801" ii.
inprf., 780.
ἑτοιμάζω (sc. κατάλυμμα),
1456.
ἑτοιμάζεσθαι
παρά τινος,
1632 ; παρά τινι, ib.
ετοιμάσθησαν, γι.
ἕτοιμος, 309.
ἔτοιος, 126, 572, 584, 593.
ἐτόλμουν, 850 (twice).
LETON, verb ending, 765 ft.
imprf., 780.
in N fur -ετο, 801 ii.
ἔτος, 423, 424.
as 2nd component, 1113 f.
ἔτος for αὐτός, 542, 549, 572,
577-
ἐτός, 542, 572, 577.
ἐτύσος, 572.
ἐτοῦνος, 581.
ἐσώθην fur -θη, App. iii. ἐτοῦταν-ά, 575.
20 C.
ἔστιν οὗ, 1436.
ἔστολα, 996203.
ἐσταρεσάμην, 996200-
ἐσῶν, 534.
ἐσῴσθην, 996202-
ἐτοῦτεσ-άς, 575.
ἐτούτην, 572.
ἐτούτην ά, 575.
ἐστράφην, 887.
ἐστορέσμην, 996200-
ἔστραμμαι, 887, 996207 -
ἐστράτευμα, 731.
ἐστροφώς, 996207
ἔστρωμα, 990250
ἔστρωμαι, 990250
ἔστω, 981 ;
ἔστωι, 200.
συνήθισα, 99602
ἐσύνιον, 750 α, 752.
ἐσωφρονίσθην for. -θη, App. ἐτούτησ-ας, 575.
iii. 19.
ἐσώτατος, 508.
ἐσωτάτω, 523.
ἐτοῦτον-ά, 575.
ἐτοῦτον-ά, 575.
ἐτοῦτος, 572, 575.
εσώτερος, 508.
ἐσωτέρω, 523.
ἐτάζω, 99643.
•
ὅτι, 116.
ἐτάγην, 996384-
Ζεται, pers. ending, 765 fr.
ἐτάκην, 996270-
έτακτο, 736.
ἐτοῦτοστά, 575.
ἐτοῦτοσ-ά(ς), 575-
ἐτοῦτοσ-έ, 575.
ἐτοῦτοσ-έ(ς), 575.
ἐτούτουν-ά, 575.
ἐτούτων ά, 575.
·
ἐτράβηξα, 853.
620
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἔτραγον, 996281·
ἐτράπην, ἐτρέφθην, 923.
ἐτραπόμην, 9i8, 996276.
ἔτραπον, 918.
ἔτρεξι, 713.
ἐτρέφθην, ἐτράπην, 923.
ἐτρίβην, 996279.
τρώγαμε, 720.
ἔτσι, 562.
ἐτύθην, 996113.
ἔτυπον, 996283.
ἐτυφλώθην for -θη,App.iii.19.
ἔτυχον, 996283
ΕΥ, εγ, proper diphthong,
19 α.
'long,' 20.
- pronunciation of, 24, 30,
32, 51 f.
= eu, 53 ; leads to ev or
ef, 325.
εν, 4330, 519.
associated with καλός,
II22.
εὐδοκείσωσι, 264, 37.
ξυδομήκοντα, 51.
ἕυδομον, 51.
εύδοξος, 72 [3].
εύδω, 99695.
-εγει, -ευει + ε, 861 [1].
εὔελπις, 474; μᾶλλον
510.
εὐεργεσία, 1154.
evepyetéw, 748, 749, 1154.
τινά, 1258.
εὐεργέτηκα, 716, 748.
εὐεργέτης, 1154.
εὐεργέτης for -ταις, 48.
εὐεργέτουν, 748.
Ευέριστος, 187.
εὐεστώ, 411.
εὐεύδρου, 30.
εὐετηρίς, 51.
εύζωνος, 1122.
ευήθης, 425, 1147.
εὐηργέτουν, 749.
εὐηρίστουν, 749.
εὐθεῖα, ἡ, 1182 6.
βίου,
in composition, 1120 f.
εὖ ἔχω, 14550;
1314.
εὖ λέγω τινά, 1258.
εὖ ποιώ, Ι Ι 22, 2132 f. ;
τινα, 1258.
εὖ πράττω, 1455 δ.
€Ỷ-, II22.
before
712".
initial p, 51",
& καλλι-, 1122.
in augment, 717, 749;
not augmented, 749,
715 ff.
-ε- & -Y-, 32'; in verb
stem, 168, 864.
Εὐάγγελος, Βαγγέλης, 135.
εὐαρεστέω, 749.
Εὐβαίονος, 51.
εὐβάλκης, 63 [2].
εὐγένεις for -νής, App. ii. 9 f.
εὐγενής, 29.
& evyévns, app. ii. 9 f.
Εὐγένης, 301.
Εὐγένι (τοῦ), 301.
Εὐγένις, 301.
εὐγενίς, ἡ, 430.
εὐγενούς (τους), 430.
εὐγνώμων, 1122,
εὔγνωμων for -μον, 26. α.
-Εγγω for -εύω, 861, 877,
1088.
εὐθέως, 114.
εὐθυνίας for εὐθην-, 50.
εύθριξ, 439.
εὐθύδικος, ΙΙ47.
εύθυμος, 494.
εὐθυπύρος, 11501·
εὐθύς, adj., 401.
adv. with part., 2147.
που, 1794.
εὐθύφρων, 11οδ.
εὐκή for εὐχή, 174.
εὐκήστηκα, 99697.
εὐκηστῶ, 99697.
εὐκλεᾶ (τόν), 428.
εὐκλεής, 428.
Εὐκλῆν (τύν), 432 b,
iii. 6.
εὐμαθής, 1152.
εὐμενής, 425.
εὐνάζω & -άω, 868.
εὐνάω & -άζω, 868.
εὔνοα (τά), 313.
εἶνοι for εὔνοι, 313.
εὐνοίᾳ ποιεῖν τι, 1387.
εὔνους, 313 ; in emprt.,
499 b.
εὔνους (οἱ, τούς, τάς), 313,
332.
εὐξάμην, 99697.
εὔξενος, 465.
εὔξησεν for ηὔξησεν, 26 [1],
99619.
εὐοδοῦται, ἐὰν
εὐοδώθη, 717 [1].
εὐπάτωρ, 472.
εὐπειθής, 4250.
εύπεπτος, 1122.
εὔπλος, 321.
εὐπορέω, 1486.
850b.
- leads to N μπορώ, 1 30 [1],
723.
+ infin., 2091, 2093, App.
vi. 15.
εὐπρέπεια, πρεπειά, 130 [1].
εὐπρεπής, 425.
becomes πρεπός, 440.
eûpa, 99696.
εὕραμεν, 796.
εὑράμην, 99690 -
eûpav, 787.
εὕρασθαι, 9960
εὑρέ & εύρε, 121, 912 f.
ευρέ, βρέ, 914.
εὑρέθηκα, 801.
εὑρέθην, δοι.
εὑρέσθαι, 99696-
App. εὑρετής, 283.
εύκολο- for εὐ-, 1123.
εὐκολοκάμωτος, 1123.
εὐκολοπερνῶ, 1123.
εὔκολος, 1121.
εὐκοῦμαι, 99637.
εγκτική, ή, whence the term,
677, 1924, App. v. 10".
εὐλαβέομαι, 1004.
+ ὕπως οι ὡς, 1962.
+iva, 1963, app. vi. 16.
εὐλαβήθη, 716.
εὐλαβὴν (τόν), App. iii. 6 g.
εὐλογέω, 854 : -ομαι, 1474.
leals to Ν βλυγώ, 135,
723.
εὐδαιμονίζω, constr., 1332 f. εὐλύγηκα, γι6.
εὔδαιμον (δ), 257.
εὐδαιμόνως, 516.
εὐδαίμων, 380, 516.
ils cmprt., 499 α.
εὐλόγησα, 724.
εὐλογήσαισαν, 792, 805.
εὐλογία, βλογιά, 135.
ευρέως, 520.
εὑρῇ for εὕρῃ, App. vi. 19.
Evpnica, 99696.
εὕρησα, 99690.
εύρινος, 439.
εὔρις, 439.
εὕρισκα, 99600
1. εὑρίσκω, 996, 1998;
2.
ευρέ, 912 1.
962
leads to N βρίσκω,
135, 723.
constr., 2133 ff.
εὑρίσκομαι for εἰμί, 2107.
+ present part. for dur.
fut., 1845.
εὕροιαν, 8ο5.
εὕροιεν, 8ο5.
εὕροισαν, δος.
εύρον, 99640 -
εὐρύνατος, 1156.
621
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
εὔροος, 1122.
εύρροος, 515.
εύρος, τό, 423.
' in width,' 1233, 1270,
1305.
εύροσαν, 791.
εὐρυάγυια, App. i. 15 b.
εὐρυβάνασσα,
cůpús, 4016.
63 [2].
εὐρύτερον, adv., 520.
εὐρυτέρως, 520.
εὑρῶ for εὕρω, 915.
-εγκ (δ), 403, 1013 f., 1017;
voc., 404.
ethnic, 1030.
εὐχή, εὐκή, 174.
εὐχθεῖσα, 99697
εύχομαι, 715, 76, 996 97.
ΙΟΟΙ.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
εὐχόμην, 715, 716.
-¤ýw, verbs in, 701 ff., 875.
- meaning of, 1087 f.
in N also εύ (γ)ω, 861,
876, 1088.
treated as labial -έβω,
8651.
- produces abstract fem. in
-eía, 1019.
εὐῶδες (τό), 429.
in N becomes -éâs, 407, evwdns, 425b, 429°.
1017.
εὐσεβέω περί τι, 1639.
εὐσέβηα, 38.
Εὐσέβης, 298.
εὐσήβειαν, 26, α [1].
εὐσπλαγχνίζομαι,
εὐσπλαγχνέστερος, 500.
σπλαχν-, 1000,
in
Ν
Εὐστάθης, 130 [1], 1040.
Εὐστάθιος, 130 [1], 1040.
Εὐστάθις, 1040.
Εὐστράτιος, Στρατής, 130 [1].
εὐτῆνος, 581.
Εὐτιχίς for Εὐτυχίς, 35.
εὐτόνος, 577.
εὐτός for αὐτός, 538 & [1],
542, 572, 577, 1423 α.
εὐτοῦνος, 581.
εύτριχος, 439.
Εὐτύχη (τοῦ), 278.
εὐτυχής, 425, 1120, 1122.
Εὐτύχιος, Εὐτύχις, Εὐτύχης,
298.
Εὐτύχο, 26, α.
ενύδρου, 305.
Εὐφέμου, 26, α.
εὐφήβοισι, 51.
Εύφιβος for Εὔφηβος, 37.
εὐφραίνομαι, 716.
εὐφραινόμην, 716.
εὔφρανας, 716.
εὐφράνθη, 716.
εὐφράνθην, 716.
εὐφρανθήσομαι,
1885.
εὐφρανοῦμαι, 1885.
Εὐφροσύνη, in N Φρ-, 135.
εὐφυα (τόν), 428.
εὐφυή (τόν), 428.
εὐφυής, 428.
εύφωνος, 465.
εύχαρις, 474.
εὐχαριστέω, 716.
- in N φκαριστάω, 135.
εὐχαρίστουν, γι6.
εὐωπός, 1104.
εὐωχεύμαι, 1004.
ἐφ' see under ἐπί.
ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν, 1589.
ἐφ' ἑνός, 1579.
ἐφ' ἔτος or ἐφέτος, 114.
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ + infin., 2090.
ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, 1582 C.
+ infin. 2090.
ἐφάγαμεν, 796.
ἔφα(γ)ες, 863.
ἐφάγετε, 720.
ἔφαγον, 996οι ·
ἐφάγοσαν, 789, 791.
ἔφαες, ἔφαγες, 863.
ἐφαίνεσαν, 791.
ἐφαίνουνταν, 790.
ἐφάνηκα, 996201
¿pávnv, 923, 996291 ·
ἐφάνησαν, App. i. 15 b.
épávonv, 923, 996201 -
ἔφας for έφα(γ)ες, 863.
ἔφασκον, 977, 996292-
ἐφάσκοσαν, 791.
ἐφαφή becomes επαφή, 126.
ἐφείδεν, 114.
ἐφείσθην, 1480.
ἐφελκγετικόν -Ν, 220, App.
iii. 16-21.
misused, App. iii. 17 ff.
in N, app. iii. 20 ff.
ἔφερα, 794; as aor., 996298.
ἐφέρετε, 720.
ἐφέροσαν, 791.
ἐφέτος, 114.
ἐφεύγοσαν, 791.
ἔφευξα, 996204 -
ἐφεύροσαν, 791.
ἔφη, 976.
•
for ἔφην, App. iii. 22 d.
ἔφην, as aor., 977.
ἔφηνα, 996291.
ἔφης, 975 & [2].
ἔφησα, asserted, 977.
ἔφησθα, 975 & [2].
ἔφθακα, 736 [1], 99636.
- as aor., 1875.
ἔφθακε, 736 [1].
ἐφθάκειν, 996200-
ἐφθάνοντο, 996200-
eplaga, 996296 •
ἔφθαρμα, 996297.
ἔφθαρμαι, 996297.
ἐφθάσθην, 996200-
έφθειακα, N aor., 1875.
έφθειρα, App. ii. 9.
ἔφθερα, App. ii. 9.
ἔφθην, 996200-
ἔφθιθ᾽ οὗτος, 184.
ἔφθορα, 94, 996297.
ἔφισε, 114.
ἐφίεμαι + gen., 1294.
+ infin., 2086b f.
ἐφικνέομαι, 996110
ἐφίλει(ε), 132 f., 859.
ἐφίλειες for -λεις, 859.
ἐφιλειούμουν, 859.
ἐφιλειούσαμε”, 859.
ἐφιλειοῦσαν, 859.
ἐφιλειούσατε, 859.
ἐφίλησες, 798 f.
ἐφιλοτιμησάμην, 1005, 1486.
ἐφιστάω, 962.
ἐφκή, εὐχή, 174.
ἐφοβήθην, 1478.
for -θη, App. iii. 19.
ἐφοβοῦνταν, 790.
ἐφονευμένου, 736.
εφόρει for -ρει, 857.
ἐφόρειν for -ρει, App. iii. 19.
ἐφόρεσα, 853, 996300.
ἐφρούονρει, 30.
εφτά, ἑπτά, 174, 645; &
647.
εφτάδιπλος, 654.
ἔφτακα, aor., 1875.
ἑφτακόσιοι & -σοι, 645700 -
ἔφταξα, 9802.
ἔφτασα, 9802.
Εφτάψυχος, 1149.
ἔφτειακα, N aor., 1875.
Ν
ἔφυγα, 794, 795, 917.
ἔφυγαν, 787, 788.
ἐφύγετε, 779.
ἔφυγον, 9962048
ἐφύγοσαν, 791.
ἐφύην, 996300.
ἔφυν, 996300.
ἔφυρα, 996300 -
ἔφυρσα, 996305 -
ἐφυσμένος, 996280
ex for eu, 173; see ἐξ.
ἐχ Θετταλίας, 56.
ἐχ θητῶν, 56.
622
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἐχ τόν for ἐκ τοῦ, 174.
ἐχ Χαλκίδος, 56.
ἐχάθην for -θη, App. iii. 23.
ἐχαιρέτηξα & -ησα, 853.
ἐχάλασα, 853.
ἐχάλκευται, 736 [1].
ἔχανον, 996310-
ἐχάρηκα, 801, 996307.
¿xápηv, 801, 996307·
ἐχάρησαν, 786.
ἔχάωσες, ἔχασες, 15ο α.
ἔχεα, 996312 -
ἐχεάμην, 996312.
ἔχει, ἔει, 155.
ἔχειναίχι, 50.
ἔχει, τό, App. vi. 26 f.
έχει εις, 30.
ἔχειν for - χει, App. iii. 2o d.
Εχεκράτη (ω), 432 α.
ἔχεσες, 798.
ἔχετε, subj., 779.
ἐχέφρων, 1106, 1116.
ἐχθαίρω & -ομαι, 10002.
ἐχθές, χθές, 129.
becomes évés, 132b.
ἔχθιον, 502.
ἔχθιστος, 502.
ἐχθίων, ἔχθιον, 502.
ἐχθρός, 502 ; in N, 503.
cinprt. of, 502.
ἐχθρότατος, 502.
ἐχθρότερος, 502.
ἔχω, in aor. inceptive, 1853. ] ἔω for ἔχω, 863.
differs from -ομαι, 147?.
τινά τι, 1284.
+infin., 2090 ff.; in
G-B, App. vi. 15; in
John, ib. 12 c [3].
+infin. for fut. indic.,
1894, 1896, 2092, App.
vi. 6 f. ; οὐκ with
infin., 2093, App.vi. 17 c.
+ part., 2106 ff.
+ pres. part. for durat.
pres., 1845.
+pf. part. pass. for pf.,
1865, 2139 f.
+ aor. or pf. part. act.
for pf. indic., 1864 f.
+ vá for fut. indic., App.
iv. 60.
ἔχω repl. by ἔστι μοι, 1368.
ἔχω for εἰμί, 2107.
ἔχω εἶναι for ἔσομαι, App.
iv. 6b.
ἔχω τόσον χρόνον), with
pres. part., 183.4.
ἔχω ἔχειν fur έξω, 1894
(end), App. iv. 65.
ἔχω γραμμένο” or -va, Aγγp.
iv. 17.
ἔχω γράψει, φάγει, φθάσει,
σηκωθῆ, etc., artificial,
2140, App. iv. 17.
ἔχοισα for ἔχουσα, 29, App. ἔχω ὑπὸ τὴν ὄψιν, 1693.
ii. 9.
χύμενος, 72 [1].
ἔχονσα for ἔχουσα, 29 f.
ἔχοντα, as adv., 823.
ἐχορήγησαις fur -σες, 798.
ἔχοσα for ἔχουσα, Αpp. ii.
9, 10.
ἔχουν for -ουσι, 777.
ἔχω φάγει οι -γῃ, κοιμηθῆ
or -θῇ, etc., 214ου,
Aup. vi. 18.
ἔχω εὖ οι κακῶς, 1455 b.
ἔχωμ διετέλει, 194.
ἔχων for ἔχον, 26, α.
ἔχων, with, 2161.
ἔχωντος, 26, «.
ἔχουσα, ἔχοισα, App. ii. 9 f. ἐχωρισάμην, 1486.
ἐχρατο, 996414·
ἔψανκα, 731.
ἐχρήζασιν, 793.
ἐψαυκέναι, 731.
ἐχρῆν, 986; for χρή, 1901.
ψάω, 99639-
ἐχρήσθην, 9963149 20
ἐψές, 1325.
ἐχρῆτο, 829.
ἔψευσμαι, 996318.
ἐχρύσωτο, 736.
ψέω, 99639.
ἐχρωμάτιστο, 736.
εψηθείς, 99639.
ἐχσαλέψατο, 261 α.
ἕψηκα, 99600 -
ἐχτρός, 503.
Εχτωρ, 173.
ἐχύθην, 184.
έχυσα, 84, 996312
ἐφέρω, 56.
ἔω, 863.
augment of, 719.
intrans., 1455 b.
ψημένη, γι.
ψήσω, 99690.
ψηφησμένα, 37.
ἐψήφισες, 798.
ἔψιλον, τό, 9° f
ἐψύγηκα, 996319•
ἐψύγην, 996319 -
ἐ for ἐγώ, 155°.
ἔχω, 8652, 99698; in N also έψομαι, 99637.
as 2nd component, 1113 f. yw, 99699.
I
έω- (in augment) contr. to
w-, 727
εω (Ξέρξεω, πόλεως) for -έω,
App. i. 15 a.
-έω, verbs in, 831, etc. ; in
P-N, 850 ff.
meaning of, 1087 f.
in compound
1154 f.
verbs,
in fut. from έσω, 892.
coincides with - ω, 851.
confounded with -άω,
850 ff., 854.
how far survives in N,
853º, 855 f.
prevalent in southern
Ν, 854-
in Otranto for -εύω, 861.
in N from Ζησα?, 853.
ἐώθουν, 714, 726, 996320
έων, -ου, -éorca, pati-
·
ciples in, 458; in N,
459.
-E@Nac from -eúv (v), 1035.
ἐωνηκώς, 996321 -
ἐώνημαι, 996921 -
έωνησάμην, 996321 -
ἐωνούμην, 714, 726, 996321 -
ἑωράθην, 996186 -
ἑώρακα, 99610-
ἑώρακαν, 786.
ἑώρακες, 798.
ἑωράκη, 996186
ἑωρακοῦσα, 996136.
ἑώρουν, 850.
ἑώρταζον, 717.
kúpov, 714b, 717, 726,
996186
contr. to ὥρων, 152.
ἕως, ή, 326, 412; ἅμ᾽ ἕψ,
1234.
ews (particle) becomes &s
(ὡς), 152 & [1], 1544,
1785.
ἕως, until, 1488, 17762,
1784 ft.
C
'up to,' 1638.
whilst,' 1776, 1795,
1999 f.
for part., 2149.
ews av, 1773, 1776b, 1784 f.
ἕως ὅταν, 1773.
ἕως ὅτε, 17762, 1781, 1784
ff.; becomes first s
ὅτε, 1785 f.; then ὥστε,
1786.
ἕως ὅτου, 1785; becomes first
ὡς ὅτου, 1786; then
ώστου, ib.
623
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἕως οὗ, 1776, f., 1784 f. ;
becomes ὡς οὗ, ώσου,
1786.
ἕως περ, 1857.
او
+aor. for plpf., 1877.
woa, 717, 996320
ἐῶσαν for εἴων, 789.
ἐώσθην, 996320 -
ἔωσμαι, 996320-
ζευθέντες, 174.
ζεύξω, 996101·
Zeus, 4336; as subject,1166.
ζευχθέντες, ζευθ-, 174.
ζέφνω, 996101-
Ζεφύριος, 1040.
Ζεφύρις, 1040.
ζέψω, 996 101 ·
Sn for Cnra, 9d.
(imprt.), 996100 ·
F, pre-Phoenician symbol?, C, Cîs, 829 f., 996100-
2II.
forms of, 2, 9.
sound of, 9, 63.
aspirated, 72.
Sné, imprt., 857.
ñol, 996100
ζηλεύω, 701.
ζῆλος, ὁ & τό, 249.
850b, 851.
Snλów, constr., 1332 f.
ζηλωταί, 20°
replaced by β, 63 ; by v, ζηλοῦτε, ἵνα
ib.
Γἔπιια, ἔπεα, 155 α.
Z, z, compound consonant,
20b, 23.
double
25 [1]b.
gemivowel, 23, 25 [1] b.
forms of, 2, 9.
origin of, 2, 12, 23, 69.
pronunciation of, 9, 24b,
69.
from σ, 68.
$'(=7), 645.
,$ (=7000), 645.
consonant, 23,
za-,dia-, 155 α, 1125.
SάKOTOS, 1125.
Zaxapías, 283º.
Jaw, 829 f., 857, 996100-
τινά, 1457.
by the life of,' 1746º.
ζέννυμι, 68, 69.
-ze, adverbs in, 434, 1102 l.
Zéu, Zéia, 20º.
Séel, 835 [2].
Cégnia, 738, 996100-
ξεζοφωμένος, 738.
ξεζυμωμένος, 738.
Seî, 835 [2].
Zéia, Zéa, 20º.
ζέμαν, τό, App. iii. 9 c.
Ceμévos, 990101-
Čepẞús, 490b.
ζέστη, ἡ, 1049.
Žeû (&), 4336.
Sevyâs, 287.
Čevyi(w, 937, 996101·
ζημιά, ἐζημ-, 130.
ζημιωθήσομαι, 1885.
nμwooμai, 1478,
1885.
1478, 1882,
Sv, see (áw.
Ζηνᾶς from Ζηνόδωρος, 287.
Ζηνόδωρος becomes Ζηνάς,
287.
ζηούμε” (ζῶμεν), 996100-
Sms, 829.
Coal for -oe, imprt., 813.
noe, imprt., 813.
ζήσεται, ἵνα
- 779.
ζήση, ἡ, 1020.
ζήσης for -σειας, 805.
Choois for -ons, 805.
ζήσομαι, 996 του
ζήσω, 996100-
ζῆτα, τό, Zayin, 2, gf. ; τὸ &
Ź ga.
ζητάω & -έω, 854, 853,
862.
Gîte, 829 f.
ζητίω, 731, 854.
+ infin., App. vi. 12 c [3].
+iva, App. vi. 16.
ζήτω, 996100 -
Snw, 996100-
ζιμιό, 621.
ζμάραγδος, 68, 69.
(μήγμα, 68.
μερδαλέος, 68.
(μικρός, 68.
(μίλιον, 68.
(μινύη, 68.
Σμύρνα, 68, 69.
Çevɣvvµ, 937, 9432, 996101-$6"
ζεύγνω, 990101 -
ζευγνύω, 996101 -
ζευγολάτης, 1104.
ζεύγος, 423.
Čeúyw, 9432º, 996101 •
from (@ov, 148b.
ζυγιάζομαι, 1474·
ζυμωμένος, 736.
(@, see jáw.
for μá 'by,' 1746º.
-zw, dental verbs in, 867-
871; very cominon in
N, 868 ff,
-zw, guttural, 872 f.
for - σσω, 880.
-
intensive, iterative, facti-
tive, 868.
for -σkw, 868.
from -áw, -éw, -ów, 856.
in N affixed to every
verb, 869.
ζωγραφίζω, 868.
ζωγράφος, App. i. 16 α.
ζώην, 996100 -
τό,
(widiv, Tó, 1040, app. iii. 7.
ζώννυμι, 94417, 996102
becomes (wvvw, 996102,
94417.
ζωννύω, 94417.
ζώννω, 775, 853, 94417,
996102.
Cwvovoi, 853, 996102 ·
(@vтa, as adv., 823.
ζώνω οι ζώννω, 853, 996102 -
ζῷον, ζόν, τό, 148.
Ζωπα & -άδος (του), 288.
Ζωσα & -άδος (του), 288.
Ζωσάδι, 288.
Ζωσιμάς, 287.
ζωσμένος, 737, 996102
ζώσομαι, 996102 •
ζώσω, 996102
H (−k), 2, 12; for spiritus
asper, 72 ff.; has no
name in A, 72; see
spiritus asper in Index
II.
H, H (ĥTα), 2, 9; forins
of 2, 9;
absent
from western alpha-
bets, 6; from early
Attic, 26; from Boco-
tian and Thessalian,
App. ii. 7; from the old
abecedaria, 29″ [2];
imported into Athens,
6; why adopted, 28 l.,
App. ii. 8-15; a school
mark, 29 f.; for EE?
29°; a mere prosodic
symbol, 29", 2000, App.
ii. 8-15; effects of its
adoption, 29" ff., App.
ii. 8-15-
originally repr. by e, 6,
12, 29 ff., App. ii. 9 IF.
introduced as
a moro
prosodic mark for e,
17, 29 ff., 88 a ff.
App. ii. 8-15.
624
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
H, н (ra), in Latin expr.
by e, 43.
the chief point of con-
troversy, 24.
absent from early A, 26,
29co.
-H (), for -os, 292.
femin. adj., 306.
for -1, -v, 343.
for -is, 396.
preserved in gen., 2693.
-H in gen. for -ov, 278.
& -HN (Túv), from nom, in
-ns, 431.
-H
its pronunciation in 4,-H
9, 24; as e, 9, 24, 39
fi.;
as a, 28 a; as i, 29°,
37-41; in Plato, 41.
how euphonious, 25 [1]a.
H for Doric a, 29 f.
for EE, 29°.
for e, 261 f., 29, 29°;
in the endings -elos,
-eia, 38.
interchanges with e,
26 f., 28 f., 42 f., 168;
with
17, 20º.
Hor
for e in Boeotian, 48,
App. ii. 7; elsewhere,
28 f., 42 f.; during
V-VIth, 50b.
equivalent to e, 39b.
for ä, 28 a.
for at in Boeotian, 48.
for 1, 37 ff., 50b.
for u, 50b.
alternates with a, 167;
with w, ib.
ἢ μή, 1748.
ή μήν, mistaken for ἀμήν,
2055 & [2].
ἢ οὖν, 1748
ĥ pa (ǹpa), 17471, 1774",
1748.
& -HN, in imprf. & aor.,
pass. 3rd person, App.
iii. 19.
-Ĥî for -éã (Tóv), 406.
-Ĥ in voc., 427.
-Ḥ in dat. of 1st decl., 200,
262.
4
-H, pers. ending, 765 ff.
in verb from -eda, 769.
repl. by et in βούλει, οἴει,
ὄψει, ἔσει, 763.
in subj., 20", 771 f.; in
P-N, 779:
-H+
(тd στηO-HA), from
nom. sing. -os, 424".
Ĥ for ǹ, 72 [3]
, article, 250; atonon, 98a;
see ¿.
ǹ or ǹ for ai, 560.
subj. of eiuí, 980; repl. by
ἐστί, 985°.
before superl., 1194.
as interrogative, 1446 B,
2038.
ña, 714b.
nja, 988.
-Ha for -ela, 38.
ἡβάσκω, 1097.
ἡβάω, 1085.
βλεπες, 720.
ἠβουλήθην, 722.
for -On, App. iii. 19.
Bovλóµny & hoeλov, 114,
119, 717, 722, 7220,
99632.
ἠγαγόμην, 917.
ἤγαγον, 996.
yav for hyov, 789.
ἠγάπουν, 85ο.
ἠγασάμην, 1005, 1478.
ἠγάσθην, 1478.
† dé (1) dé) but she,' 1 197 b. yeλ0€, 897.
† for oi, 44.
n' (= 8), 645.
ἠγγύα, 99657-
ἠγγύηκα, 996.7.
ἠγγύησα, 99657.
or HI, spurious diph-n (8000), 645.
thong, 19 b.
absent from early 4, 6, 26.
origin of, 32 ff.
in inscriptions (HI), 20°.
counts 'long,' 20.
its sound in early 4,
20º f., 26, 28 a & b, 29,
32 a fl.; in later A, 20º.
alternates with e, 26, f.,
403; with 7, 20º.
- repl. by e, 26, f., 28 ƒ.
H-, as temporal augment,
(relat.), 603, 604; for eń, ýyyvýkel, 99057.
152 [1].
1) dè († dé), 1197 b.
conf. with ǹ, 2055.
ἤγειρον, 99658 -
ἡγεμών, 374.
ʼn for ei, 37 (thrice), App. ii. yéομaι, 1001.
4,
10.
or,' App. ii. 10; 1725.
after comparatives, 1187 f.
in questions, 2046, 2052.
一份 ​either-or,' 1725;
•
for εἴτεεἴτε, 1726.
ǹ WOTE, 1950 b.
714,715,717; accented, for τα, 9.
720; less familiar than,
E-, 723.
quoth,'978.
ĥ (= 1), 714b.
mistaken for augment, ἢ
723; dropped, ib.
н-, provective, 130.
-H-, compositional,
IIIO.
106,
-H-&-a-, in verb stem, 924b.
-H- for -On-, tense character,
919.
(=άρα), 17471
1748 #, 2046,
2055.
constr., 285 f.
τινός & τινί, 1297.
πρὺ πολλῶν, 1647.
for fut., App. iv. 4.
τινά τι, 1284.
ἠγερόμην, ἠγρ-, 1361, Αρμ.
i. 16 a.
'Hynoías, 283°.
ἦγμαι, 9963-
ἡγούμενος, γούμ-, 135.
nyov, 714 f.
1747,
2050,
- misspelt el, 2055.
'verily,' 2055, 2059.
mistaken for , 2055;
for el, ib.
ĥ âpa, 1748.
-H- for -a-, in sns, etc., 829 | gáp, 1748.
f.; in P-N, 830.
ἢ μεγάλον του ἦτα, 9°.
-H (), in 1st decl., 238,8','quoth she,' 978.
248, 261, 262, 1023 f.;' ős, quoth he,' 605,
how frequent, 338; in- 978, 1437.
fluence of, 248.
ἢ μέν for ἢ μήν, 1744 &
Yρeto, čyp-, app. ii. 12 [3].
ἠγρόμην, 136, 917, 996583
App. i. 16 a.
ἠγωνίσθην, 1480.
del(v), 220, 969, 99661 ›
App. iii. 19 [1].
ᾔδεισθα, 969.
-Ĥaec, (vi), 289.
ᾔδεσάμην, 1005, 1478.
ᾔδεσαν, 969.
ndéo0nv, 1478.
ἡδέως, 519.
ἤδη καί, 1714.
625
S S
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἤδη ἤδη, 521.
ἤδη, 969.
Ήδα, 38.
ᾔδησθα, 969.
ἥδιον, 502.
ἥδιστα, 519.
ἥδιστος, 502.
ἡδίων, ἥδιον, 502.
ἥδομαι, 996103, 1004 f.
τινί, 1388; ἐπί τινι,
1582 d.
+ part., 2128, 2129ff.
ήδον, 714 f.
ἡδὺ γελᾶν, 1266.
ἡδυέπεια for -επής, 430.
Ηδύν (τό), 302, 331, App.
iii. 7.
ἡδύν (τό), 331, App. iii. 7.
ἠδυνάμην, 71, 722, 996 4.
for potential indic., App.
iv. 5.
ἠδυνήθην, 722.
for -θη, App. iii. 19.
ἠδύνοντο, 774, 996 04.
ἡδύς, 4or; in cuprt., 502f.,
503; in N, 503.
+infin., 2090, 2091.
ἡδύτατος, 502.
ἡδύτερος, 502.
ἡδύφωνος, 1108.
ᾔεις, 988.
-HeIc, adj. in, 451.
ἠζήσανε, 720.
ἠξιμίωται, 26, α [1].
ἠθάρρειε, 720.
01
ἤθελα, 720, 722, 996 1.
ἠθέλασι, 793.
ἠθέλημα, 722, 996 1 -
ἠθελήκειν, 99661·
ἠθεληκέναι, 996 1.
ἠθέλησα, -κα, 722, 996 1.
ἤθελον, 720, 722, 996, see
2140 θέλω.
& ἠβουλόμην, 114, 119.
for modal ἄν, 1974.
for potential indic., App.
iv. 5.
ἠθικῶς, in N ithikos, 24.
ἦθος, 423.
Hl or hi repl. by n, 20° ; see
η ก above.
-HIOC, -nos, 20º.
†ka, 952, 963 c, 964, 996104.
nicatov, 99685⋅
ήκαμα, 720.
ᾤκασα, 99635.
γκάσθην, 996 65.
γκασμαι, 9960
ἥκειν, 99637.
-HKI"", 1038" f.
ἥκιστα, 5042
ἠκκλησίαζον, 99674
ἤκουσα, 724, App. i. 15 b.
ἠκουσάμην, 996g.
ἤκουσμαι, 735, 9963.
ἠκροασο, 783.
ἠκτύπα, 720.
ἥκω, 295, 996104; as pres.,
996104.
as pf., 1842.
ἠλακάτη, ἀλακάτα, 295.
ἡλάμην, 99610.
Κλασα, 9967:
ἠλάσμην, 9967 -
ἤλεγα, 720.
ήλειπται, 735·
ἠληλάμην, 9967
ἦλθα, 794.
ήλθαμεν, 795.
ἦλθαν, 121, 787.
καὶ ἀπῆλθον, 787.
ἦλθας, 798 [1].
ἤλθασιν, 793.
ἤλθατε, 796.
ἦλθον, 9960, App. i. 16 b.
ἤλθοσαν, 791.
ἡλιάζω, in N λιάζω, 723.
Ηλίας, 283.
ἡλίκος, 614; extinct in N,
615.
ἥλιος, ἀέλιος, ἅλιος, App. ii.
14 Λ.
ἡλύμην, 996.
ἤλπιζα, 794.
ἤλπιζαν, 121.
ἤλπιζον, 714 f., 717.
ἥλωμα, 9960.
ημαι, 205, 996100-
ἡμάρτησα, 9961
ἡμάρτησαν, 791.
ἥμαρτο, 99611.
ἥμαρτον, 996
ἡμάρτησαν, 789, 791.
ἡμᾶς & ἡμας, 525, 533.
αὐτούς, repl. by ἑαυτούς,
546.
ήμασταν, 985.
ἡμέδιμνον, ἡμιμέδ-, 126.
ήμεθα, 985.
ήμέθην, 99678 ·
ἡμεῖς, App. ii. 14B; 525,
533-
suggests ἐσεῖς, 531.
ἡμεῖς αὐτοί, 544.
ἡμεῖς γε, 529.
ἠμείφθην, 1480.
ἠμέλλησα, 996,
ἤμελλον, 720, 722, 722°,
996101.
ἦμεν for ὦμεν, 985.
ἦμεν for εἶναι, spp. ii. 14 Β.
ή μεν, 988.
ἤμενον for ἔμ-, 823.
-HMENOC, in N, 849.
ἡμέρα & ἱμέρα in Plato,
29 [1], 41.
in N 'μέρα, 134 e, 148.
as unit of time, 650.
of a saint's day, 1229;
omitted, 1229, 1652.
-in dates, 650, 1229, 1652.
ἡμέραις, οἱ, 267.
ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν, 1622 f.
ἡμέρας, ‘by day, 1234.
ἡμέρες (τάς), 332.
ἡμεροδρόμος, 1106.
ήμερος, 465.
ἡμερόω, in Ν μερώνω, 723.
ἤμεστα, 985.
ἡμέτεροι ἴδιοι, οἱ
ἡμέτερος, 553, 555 f.
for ὑμέτε, 35.
557.
ἤμην for ἦν, 985 & [3].
ἠμήν=ἢ μήν, 1827, 17442
2055 & [1].
ημί, 'say, 29, 978, App. ii.
8, 10, 14 Β.
ĤMI-, 1127 f.
ἡμίβρωτος, 1127.
ημίλειε, 720.
ἠμιλήσανε, 720.
ἡμιλλησάμην, 1005.
ἡμιμέδιμνον, ἡμέδ-, 126.
ἡμῖν & ἡμιν, 525, 533.
ἡμιόλιος, 1108.
ἡμίονος, 1127, 1144.
ἥμισοι for -συ, 36.
ἥμισος του -συς, 401, 440,
1128.
ἡμίσους (τούς), 401.
ἥμισσον, 401.
ἥμισυ, 303; indecl., 4orb.
misspelt ήμισυ, 35.
ἥμισυς, 401, 444.
becomes ἥμισος, 401,
440, 1128.
in compounds, 1108.
ἡμιτελής, 1127, 1128.
ΗΜΙΤΟΝΑ, 94.
Ημίφωνα, defined, 23; see
semivowels.
ἡμιχύνει for -χώνη, 26.
ἡμιωβέλιν, 302, 331, 1040,
App. iii. 7.
ἡμιωβέλιον, 1108.
ήμνησα, 35.
ήμουνα for ήμην, 132.
ἤμουνε for ἤμην, 132, 985,
App. iii. 28 [1].
ἠμπειχόμην, 751, 99698.
626
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἠμπέσχον, 9969.
ἠμπίσχετο, 99698.
ἠμπορῶ, 130 [1], 132.
ἠμυνάμην τινά, 1486.
ἥμυσυ, 35 (often).
Αμφιγνύουν, 751.
ἠμφεσβήτουν, 751.
hμpleoa, 750 a, 99681·
ἠμφίεσμαι, 99681.
ἡμῶν, 525, 533; reduced
to μων, 530 f.; to μας,
532 C, 534.
for ἡμέτερος, 551.
ἤν, proclitic, 97 d; see ἂν
& éáv.
relative frequency of,
177Ι.
conf. with ἵνα, 1774 [1].
ἥν, repl. by τήν, 607.
ἦν, 714, 981.
ἦν δ' ἐγώ, ' quoth I, 978.
ἦν for ᾖ (subj.), 221, App.
iii. 19.
-ΗΝ (τόν, τήν), in ist decl.,
262.
from now. -ης, 431.
-HN for ea (Tóv), 432 b.
ἦναι, εἶναι, App. ii. 14 B.
ἠναντιούμην, 746.
ἠναντιώθην, 99670.
ἠναντίωμαι, 99679.
hvavov, 750 a.
ἤνεγκα, 996293.
ἤνεγκον, 996295 -
ἠνειχόμην, 745, 751, 99608.
ἠνεσχόμην, 745.
ἠνέχθην, 996203
ἠνέχθησαν, 186.
ἠνήχθην, 1480.
ἡνίκα, constr., 1995 f., 1999.
ἠνίστατο, 750 .
žvolyov, 747, 996173 •
ἤνοιγμαι, 747.
Ανοιξα, 747.
ἤνοιξαν, 750 α.
ἠνομοῦσαν, 789.
-HNÓC, ethnic adj., 1078 f.
ἤνου for οἴνου, 37, 44.
ἠνοχλοῦντο, 717 [1],
ἤνοχος for ἔνοχος, 262 0.
ἠντεβύλησε, 751.
ἠντεδίκει, 751.
ἠνώγειν, App. iii. 19 [1].
ἠνωρθώκειν, 99614
ἠνώχλησα, 745, 99632
ἥξουσιν, as subj., 779.
new, 99690 &
104.
-HOC for -ειος, 38.
ήπαιρνα, 720.
ἠπαιτήθη, 750 α.
ἠπαίτησε, 750 α.
ἠπάτησα fur ἐπ-, 720.
ἠπατοῦντο, 850.
Ηπειροθεσσαλία,
1157.
ήπερ, 603, 609.
ἠπέρασε, 720.
ἠπέρνα, 720.
ἤπεσε, 720.
•
hpoav for -wa, App. iii. 6 d.
ἠρόμην, 996τι·
ἦρος (τοῦ), App. ii. 14 Δ.
ἤροσαν for ἦραν, ΟΙ.
Ηροφίλη, 262 0.
Άρπαξες, 798.
ήρπασες, 798.
ἤρρησα, 99639.
1156,
ἤρχεσο, 783.
ήπια for ἔπια, 720, 996213-
Ηπιρῶτις, 34.
ἠπιστάμην, 750 α, 99635.
ἠπίστασο, 996
ἠπιστήθην, 996 gr.
ἠπίστηκα, 748.
ἠπίστουν, 748.
ἠπίστω, 99685-
Υπογράψας, 35.
Ηποκράτης, 37.
ήπον for εἶπον, 29°.
-Ηρ (δ), see -τήρ.
Ηρα, whence derived, 41.
Ηρᾶ & -άδος (του), 288.
ήρα (verb), 996.
ἦρα or ἦ ῥα, 1748.
Ηραιος, Ηραις, 299.
Ηραις from "Ηραιος, 299.
Ηρακλᾶς, 287.
Ηρακλέα, -κλέτα, 148, App.
iii. 6.
Ἡρακλέσης, 26, 4.
Ηρακλείδης, 283.
Ἡρακλεώτις for -της, 37.
Ηράκληα, 38.
Ηρακλῆν (τόν), 4320, App.
iii. 6.
Ἡρακλῆς, 431.
Ἡράκλητος for -πλει-, 29°.
ĥpav, 791.
ἠργαζόμην, 719, 99688-
ἠργασάμην, 996 3.
ἠργασμένος, 996 gg.
'Hpéas, 283.
ᾑρέθη, είρ-, 26, 28 b.
ἠρέμουν, 714.
ᾕρηκα, 733.
-HPHс, how accented, 429.
ἦρθα, 99610-
ἦρθα μετά, ἦρθα ξανά, 1739.
ἠριγένεια for -γενής, 430.
ἠνώχλουν, 745, 751, 99632 - ἤριζον, 717.
εa, 996 10.1⋅
ήξερα, 99620.
ήξευρα, 99600 -
ἠξεύρω, 132, 99690.
·
ήρισες, 798.
ἡρμοσάμην, 1486.
ἠρνήθην, 1478.
ἠρνησάμην, 1005, 1478.
ἤρχετον for ἤρχετο, Αγγ.
iii. 28.
ἠρχόμανε for -όμην, App. iii.
28.
ἤρχομέστανε for ἠρχόμεθα,
App. iii. 28.
ἠρχόμην, 99630·
ἠρχόμουνα for
App. iii. 28.
ἠρχόμην,
ἠρχόμουνε for ἠρχόμην, App.
iii. 28.
ἠρχόντησαν, 823.
ἠρχόσουνα for ἤρχετο, App.
iii. 28.
ἤρχουμουν-
for ἠρχόμην,
App. iii. 28.
ἤρχουσουν-ε for -εσο, App.
iii. 28.
ἥρωας, δ, 416.
ἥρωος (του), 85.
I. ἥρως, o, in Ν, 416.
2. ἥρως, οἱ, 327, 332 & [1].
τούς, 332 & [1].
3. ἥρως from ἔρως, 41.
ἠρώτουν, 850.
-HC (της), in Ist decl. 262.
-HC (δ), in Ist decl., 248,
261, 262, 283b.
influence of, 248.
attracts nounsin-tos, 298.
its gen. in -η, 378.
in compounds, 1147,
1150.
in Ist & 3rd decl., App.
iii. 6.
-HC (6), for -ις, -υς, 343.
-HC (¿ & †}), gen. -eos, 417,
425 H.; in P-N, 430;
gen. -ov, 432.
-HC, gen. -ητος, 360.
-HC, proper names in, 283,
431.
-HC, -EC, adj., 425-30, 471,
1057 1.
from neuters in -os or
adj. in -us, 1148.
in compos. becomes -os
or -µévos, 11502, 1151.
-Ĥc (5), 287¹.
-ic (δ), gen. -ήδος, 288.
627
SS 2
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
-HC, verb ending, 771 f.;
in P-N, 779.
ἧς for ἕνς, εἷς, 29, 29°, App.
ii. 8, 10, 14 B.
ἧς for ἦσθα, 985 & [4].
-HCA, aor. in N, 849.
Ητεια-Σητεία, 1554.
ᾐτιάθην, 1002, 1478.
ᾐτιασάμην, 1002, 1478.
ἥτις, 603.
ἦτο for ἦν, 720, 985.
ἦτον for ἦτο, 221, 720, App.
iii. 19, 20 a.
leads to -άω & -έω?, 853. ήτονε, 985, App. ii. 28 [1].
ἡσάμην, 1005.
ἦσαν, 981.
ήσαν, 988.
ήσανε, 987.
ήσασταν for ἦσθε, 987.
ἠσελεύσοντε, 49.
ᾐσθάνθην, 996.
нc0€, subj., 771 f.
in P-N, 779.
ᾔσθετο, 996.
ᾐσθήθην, 9960.
ᾔσθημαι, 996 -
ἦσθην, 996103 -
ἡσθήσομαι, 996108 -
ἤσθιον, 9960, Αpp. ii. 14. 4.
ᾐσθόμην, 9960.
-HCOON, in subj., 771 f.
ἤσκειν, App. iii. 19 [1].
ῇσμεν, 969.
ἤσου του ἔσο, 985 & [2].
ήσουνε for ἦσο, 985, Α Ρ.
iii. 28 [1].
ἡσσάομαι, 40 ἡττάομαι.
ἡσσόομαι, 996 107.
"
ᾐστάνομαι, 132, 996.
ήστε, ' were, 987.
ἦστε for ἔστε, 985 & [2].
τστε, 969.
ἡστίασεν, 9960-
ἤστω οι ᾔστω for ἔστω, 116,
985 & [2].
ἡσυχάζω, 723; -ομαι, 1486.
leads to N συχάζω, 723.
ήσυχος, 465.
ἠσχολησάμην, 1486.
ᾔσχυγκα, 9967.
ᾔσχυμμαι, 9967.
ᾔσχυνον, 714
ήσω, fut. of ἵημι, 964.
-ήσω, fut. in 4-Ν, 849.
its influence, 853º.
ήτα, τό, chell, 2, 5 f. ; τό &
gd.
ἤτρωγα, 720.
1. ἡττάομαι, 906107, 1004.
as pf., 1842.
+ participle, 2132 1.
2. ἡττάω, 996 107
ἡττηθήσομαι, 996107, 1885.
ἥττηκα, 996107·
ἥττησα, 996107-
ἡττήσομαι, 996107.
ἡττήσω, 996107.
ἧττον, 5042·
ἥττων, ἧττον, 5042.
ήτω (ᾐτω) for ἔστω, 116, 985
& [2].
ήτωσαν (ᾐτ-), 985 & [3].
HY, proper diphthong, 19 a.
'long,' 20.
rare, 30.
absent from early 1, 26.
- pronunciation of, 3o (cp.
51 fl.).
nûyμai, 99697.
ηὔλειν, App. iii. 19.
ηύξάμην, 722.
ηύξανον, 714 f.
ηυξήθην for -0η, App. iii. 19.
ηΰξον, 714.
nûpa, 720.
η ραμεν, 796.
ηὑρέθη, 99690.
ηὕρηκα, 730, 996ου
η ρήκει, 996.0·
ηὑρήκη, 996ου -
ηὕρισκα, 99600 -
ηὕρισκον, 9969-
ηὗρον, 99600.
ήφαγα, 720.
ήμερα, 794.
as aor., 996298-
hopepes, 720.
φεστος, 49.
ἤφηκα, 720.
ήφιε, 96ο αι.
- he, 2, 9, 9º; † —, 9ª.
ἠφίει(ν), 746.
-ΗΤΑΙ, in subj., 77. f.;
in
Ήφιστιάδης, 34.
P-N, 779.
ἠφόρισαν, 750 11.
ἦταν" for ἦσαν, 985.
ἠφύρισεν, 750 α.
τασα, 99633.
ἠφορίσθη, 750 α.
HTE, in subj., 771 f.;
in
xª, 733, 99013•
-
P-N, 779
axe, 99618-
όχι, 2001 [1].
ἠχώ, 411.
ἡψημένος, 90000-
ἥψησα, 996ου-
ήψον, 99638.
ἥψουν, 99690.
ἠώς, ἡ, 412.
b.
έως (έως), 26, U.
→, 0, origin of, 2 f.
originally repres. by TH,
3, 12.
forms of, 2, 9.
namnes of, o f., ga.
9
- a dental, 22.
- an aspirate, 22.
a semivowel, 23".
a mute, 23.
- pronunciation of, 9, 24,
54 Γ., 56 f.
θ, from 7, 17o f.
repl. by r or σ, 184°;
in South Italian N, 24º.
repl. by a in Laconic,
24º; in Tsaconic, 56º.
repl. by r in Tsaconic,
24°.
θ' (=9), 645.
10 (=9000), 645.
θά, from θέλει) νά, 1922,
App. iv. 14 f.
proclitic, 97 d.
for vá, i. e. modal äv,
1908.
θάβω, 875.
θαλάμειν τον -μη, App. iii. 8.
Θαλθύβιος, 184.
θάλπος, 423.
θαμάζω, 9961.
θαμάζομαι, 996, & 109 *
θάμασμα, θαμμ-, 179 & [1].
θαμαστῶ, 990100
θαμβεῖσθαι ἐπί τι, 15834·
θαμπώνω, 57.
θαμμένος, 996 108
θάπτω, 874, 92110 &
for τάπτω, 183.
causative, 1460.
108 *
Θάρος, θάρρος, Αpp. ii. 14 B.
θάρρητα, τά, 424.
θάρρος, App. ii. 9, 14 Β;
207, 423, 424.
B;
B;
Θάρσος, Αpp. ii. 9, 14 Β;
207, 423.
& θράσος, 143.
Θάσο, ή, 292.
Θάσσον, 519.
θάσσων, 183.
ἦτε, in imprf. (wero'), 985.
τε, imprt. of είμι, 988.
ήχες του εἶχες, 29°, App. ii. θᾶτον, 150 d.
14 A.
θάττον, 502, 519".
628
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
θάττων, 183, 502.
θαῦμα ὁρᾶν, ἰδεῖν, ἀκοῦσαι,
2090b.
θαυμάζετε, ἵνα
-, 779.
θαυμάζω, 9961, 996109, 998,
10002.
constr., 1332 f.
- εἰ, 1947.
θαυμάσομαι, 996109
θαγματικόν, 70.
θαυμάσω, 999.
θάφτω, 875, 996108.
1. θέ, from θεέ, 148.
μου να, 1906.
θελίζω, 869.
θέλοντας καὶ μὴ θέλοντας,
[102b.
θέλον for θέλω, 030.
θέλουν, θέν, 863.
θέλουνε, 132, 777, 996 1.
θέλ'ς (θέλεις), 219.
61
1. θέλω, ἐθέλω, 723, 996 1.
in N, 7 225 f. ; beconies
θέλου, 030.
assoc. with βούλομαι,
II); with μέλλω, ib.
- constr., 2087 f.; see
also ἤθελον.
2. θέ, from θέλει, 863, 996 1, 2. θέλω + infin., 2087; in
1922, App. iv. 14.
61
Θέ μου να, 1906.
θὲ νά, θενά, θά, App. iv. 14 f.
-θε-, tense character, 756.
becomes -θη-, 757-
becomes -TE-, 182 c.
Θεαγένη (του), 278.
Θεαγένη (ω), 432 α.
Θεαγένου for -νους, 432 C.
θεάομαι, 1001.
ὅτι, App. vi. 13 [1].
θεατής, 283.
θέατρον, θέητρον, 29.
Océ, Oé, 148b; cp. 1906.
θέητρον, θέατρον, 295
θεία, 271.
θειάφια, θάσχα, 155 α.
Θειβήα for Θηβαία, 37.
-θελεν, 804.
-θείη, 804 b.
-AeiHn, 804 11.
-HEIHC, 804 b.
-Heîmen, 804 b.
θειο-, θεο-, 155 α.
-θείτε, 804 1.
-θείΤΗΝ, 8041.
-θεῖτον, 804 0.
θέλ for θέλει, App. iv. 14 [1].
θέλει, θέ, 863.
θέλει + (ἵνα) νά = θενά, 1922,
App. iv. 14 ff., 18 f.
θέλεις, θές, 863 & [1].
+ subj., 1729 f.
θέλεις (ού) θέλεις, 1729 f.
θέλετε, θέτε, 863.
θέλετε + subj., 779, 1909 f.
θεληθῆτε, 990 αι·
θέλημα του -σις, 369.
θέλημαν, τό, 221, App. iii.
9a, 23.
θέλῃς (ού) θέλῃς, 1729 f.
θέλησις yields to -μα, 369.
θελήσω, 996 1.
as present, 1889b.
G-B, App. vi. 15; in
John, App. vi. 12 c &
[3]; for fut., 1894,
1896, App. iv. 4.
3. θέλω + ἵνα (Ν νά), 20864,
2088, App. vi. II, 14
[1], 16.
4. θέλω νὰ differs from θέλω
+ infu., App. iv. 14 [1],
18.
5. θέλω, its use in N, App.
iv. 18.
in N never means 'I
shall,' App. iv. 18.
θέλω γράφει(ν) οι γράψει(ν),
artificial, App. iv. 14
[1], 16.
θέλω γράφῃ οι γράψῃ, App.
vi. 19.
θέλω κοιμηθῇ, App. vi. 19.
θέλω φάγει οι φάγῃ, Αργ.
vi. 18 f.
θέ(λ)ωμεν, θέμε, 863.
θέλων, 457.
θέλων καὶ μὴ θέλων, 1729.
θέμαν, τό, 331, App. iii.
9 α
θεμάτιν, App. iii. 7.
θέμε” for θέλομεν, 863,996 1.
Θεμιστοκλέα (τόν), Αpp. iii.
6.
Θεμιστοκλῆν (τόν), 432 1,
App. iii. 6.
Θεμιστοκλῆς, 431.
θέν for θέλουν, 996 1.
Θεόδωρος, Θόδωρος, 152.
becomes Θεοδᾶς, 287.
Θεοδωσία, 267.
Θεοκλητώ, ή, 414.
Θεοκρίνη (δ), 432 α.
θεός, θεός or θεός, 32, 155
a & b.
θεός, as subject, 1166.
θεός for θεούς, App. ii. το.
θεοσέβεια, 1154.
θεοσεβέω, 1154.
θεοσεβῆν, App. iii. 6 g.
θεοσεβής, 1154.
θεότη for της, 338.
Θεοφάνου for -vous, 432 c.
Θεοφανώ, ἡ, 414.
θεοφιλής, 11502.
Θεοφυλίτσης, 1040 C C.
θεραπήα, 38.
θεραπευθήσομαι, 1885.
θεραπεύσομαι, 1885.
θερίδδω, App. ii. 9.
θερίζω, 868, App. ii. 9.
θεριό”, 40.
θερμαίνω, 893.
Θέρμη, 1048.
θέρος, 348, 423, 424.
θέρους, in summer time,
1341 (.
oés, imprt. of τίθημι, 948,
949, 955, 99661-
θές for θέλεις, 863 & [1].
θέσε for θές, 949, 1916.
θέσει μακρά φωνήεντα, 89' ;
συλλαβή, App. ii. 5.
θέσις, in netre, 89 f., App.
ii. 8 [4]; ἄρσις καὶ
89.
now misused, 89.
θέσον for θές, 949 [1].
θεσπίζω + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
Θεσσαλονίκη, Σαλονίκη, 126.
θέστε, 949.
θέστων, 177.
θέσω, 949.
θέτε repl. by θέστε, 949.
θέτε for θέλετε, 863, 990 αι
Θετταλόν, 56.
1.
θέτω, 8653, 937, 958, 959.
θεύσομαι, 996111
θέν for θέλει), App. iv. θέω, 996111·
14 [1].
-OEN, adv., 434, 1102 h.
Oevá, Oá, 1922, App. iv. 14fÏ.
θένε for θέλουνε, 863, 996 α
Θεο-, θειο-, 155 €.
Θεοδᾶς from Θεόδωρος, 287.
Θεοδόσιος, 1040.
Θεοδόσις, 1040.
θεωρέω, θωρώ, 152.
θῆ for θῆτα, 9.
,
|
-9H-, thematic, 785; from
.
-Oe-, 957-
20н, aor. ind., 785; in A-B,
801" iii.; in N, ib.
-θῇ, in verb, 772 f.
Θηβος, 48.
Θεοδοτάκης, -άκις, 1040 Βα.'θηθίς, τηθίς, 184.
629
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
20нka, in aor. for -0ŋv, 801. | -91, imprt., 806, 808.
in N, 801' iii., App. iii.
29.
-Oúkame”, in N, 801¹ iii.
20HKAN, in N, 801' iii.
-OĤkane, in N, 801b iii.
-OĤkacı”, in N, 801b iii.
-OHKATE, in N, 801' iii.
LOнKE", in N, 801b iii.
20нKEC, in N, 801b iii.
-OHKETE, in N, 801b iii.
θηλυκός, 401.
θηλυς, 401, 444.
becomes -T, 182 b, 808.
in N, 920.
in στηθι, 951.
-01, adv., 434, 1102 b.
-in N, 435.
Olyɣávw + accus., 1242.
θιγονουσα, 30.
Oiya, as present, App. iv.
3.
θίθημι becomes τίθημι, 126.
θεός οι θεός, θεός, 032, 155 α.
θίτω, 959.
θλάσπι, τό, 399.
LOHMEN, in aor. indic., 785. exάomis, †, 399.
in A-B, 801 iii.
Onv, particle, 1700.
ΑΘΗΝ, θης, -θη, 785, 1478, θλίψη, ἡ, 1020.
1479 f.
in A-B, 801b iii.
θλίβγω, 861.
θλίβω, 875.
θ'μός for θυμός, 030.
θνήξομαι, 996112.
becomes έθηκα, 801, App. θνῄσκω or θνή-, 967, 996112.
iii. 29.
θήρ, δ, 374.
θήρα for θύρα, 35.
Θηραεύς, 47.
Θηραιεύς, 47.
θηράω, -άσω, 839.
θηρεύσαισαν, 792, 805.
θηρεύω, 730.
θηριώδης, 425.
θής, θητός, 359.
756.
& τέθνηκα, 1868 f.
Oodwрâkos, 1040 Ba.
Θόδωρος, Θεόδ-, 152.
θύλος, ἡ & δ, 292.
Θοραιεύς, -ρεύς, 148.
Θορεύς, ραιεύς, 148.
-Opa & -тpa (†), 10266.
Θράξ, Θραξ, 150 d.
Θραξ, Θράξ, 15od.
θράσος, θάρσος, 143.
-OHC-, character of fut. pass., Opaoudeiλos, 1156.
of aor. pass., 803.
OHC, in aor. indic., 785.
in A-B, Sorb iii.
-OḤc, in verb, 772 f.
in fut. pass., 850.
20нCAN, in aor. indic., 785.
- in A-B, 801' iii.
Θησείον, -σεον, 20.
Θησέον, -σεῖον, 20°.
Θήσης, 38.
θησοίμην, 803.
-OĤCOIO, 803.
-OŃCOITO, 803.
-OĤCOMAI, fut. pass., 1478.
-Өнсома,
θήσω, 949, 964.
θῆτα, τό, teth, 2, 9 f. ; τὸ &
9d.
OHTE, in aor. indic., 785.
in A-B, 801¹ iii.
-OĤTE, in verb, 772 f.
as imprt., 814.
ZOHTI, imprt., 808, 814.
in N, 814.
-ØĤTHN, aor. ind., 785.
-OĤTON, in verb, 772 f.
OHTON, in aor. ind., 785.
θρασύς, 401.
θραύω, 875.
•
277
θρεμμένος, 996211
θρέξω, 990273
θρεφθείς, 184.
θρεφθεῖσι, 1845, 996277.
Opépw, 8651, 9213, 996277.
Optioµaι, 996277, 1885.
θρέψω, 996271 ; for τρ-, 183.
θριαμβεύω τινά, 1457; -ομαι
(pass.), 1458.
θρινάκιον, 1038.
θρίναξ, 1038.
θρῆνος, δ & τό, 249, 424.
θρηνῶντας, as adv., 823.
θρίξ, 4337; for τρίξ, 183.
θριξίν (ταῖς), 4337
-OPON (TÓ), 1025 f.
Opoûs, 313"; compounds of,
317.
θροφός, 184.
θρύβω, 875.
θρύμβος, θύμβρος, 143.
θρυοκόπτω, 1155.
0
+ c = σ, 180, 337 b, 884 c.
-Oy-, becomes -TV-, 182 c.
θυαίνι, 37.
θύγατερ (ω), 257.
θυγατέρα, ἡ, 338, 386.
τὴν & ἡ, App. iii. 12 b.
θυγατέραν (τήν), 3300, App.
iii. 6 c ff.
θυγάτηρ, 383.
θυγατριδούς, 313.
θυγατρός (τῆς), App. i. 16 a.
Θύμβρος, θρύμβος, 143.
Ovμáoμaι, 854, 99680, 1006;
see also θυμούμαι.
θυμηθώ, 99680 -
θυμήτην for - μοί-, 44.
θυμιάζω, 868.
θυμιάω & -άζω, 868.
θυμίζω, 99640 -
θυμισμένος, 99680-
θυμοειδής, 1 1 1 3.
θύμον, τό, 249.
θυμόομαι τινί τινος, 1335.
θύμος, δ, 249.
θυμός, 1020; becomes θ'μός,
030.
compounds of, 494.
θυμοῦμαι ἐνθυμ-, 135, 723.
+ gen., 1295; see also
θυμάομαι.
θυμωμένος, 737.
θυμών (ν)ω, 853;
1336.
τινός,
θυρίδων (τήν), App. iii. 6 e.
θυσανωτός, 1053.
θύω, 730, 996113 ;
Ἡρά
κλεια, ευαγγέλια, etc.,
1268.
θάχα, θειάφια, 155 α.
-Oŵ, -oñs, -on, etc., 772,931,
1479.
- in N, 850.
θώρακαν (τόν), 330, App. iii.
6 α.
θωράκιον, 1038.
θώραξ, 1038° ; θώρηξ, 295.
θωρέω, 996186 : from θεωρέω,
152; becomes Twр@,
τωρῶ,
184°.
for ópáw, 996186 ·
θώρης, θώραξ, 395.
θώς, 415.
-0ac", in verb, 772 f.
I, 1, origin of, 2.
forms of, 2, 9, app. ii.
9 [2].
names of, 2, 9, 9º f. &
[1].
-frequency of, app. ii. 7.
a mere prosodic mark,
29 f., App. ii. 9 & 12,
14.
630
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
1, 1, adivisor, 20º, App. ii. 9. Į -1
pronunciation of, 9,
33, 34 #.
least euphonious, 25-1,
[1], a & à.
conf. with u, 34" ff.
1, common in A-N, 20³.
aς φωνῆεν ὑποτακτικόν,
19, 20ს
as consonant, 18d, 19b.
(76) for dimin. -tv, -1ov, | 18′ ( = 14), 645.
302, 1038; becomes-o" "Ida, Nísa, 7, 130.
in composition, 1146. -IAάPION (TÓ), 1037.
ending of 3rd declension, idé, 912 ff, 99664⋅
238, 253.
-& eîde, 121.
-1, gen. -ews, 391.
1 for is (†), 396.
-1, adv., 434, 11021, 2061
[1]; in N, 435-
1, pers. ending, 760 ff.
, mute in AI, HI, NI, TI, elided, 141.
(α, 1, w, vi), 20º.
often omitted, 20º f.
misused, 20d.
place of, 20d.
adscript, 20d f.; in
crasis, 160; mute, 20°;
a mere prosodic mark,
20°, 29 ff.; dropped,
20c ff.; affects every
postpositive and inter-
sonantic, 20°, 28 c.
subscript, 20d; spuri-
ous in a, 19; dropped,
20°; see adscript.
1, conf. with eɩ, 29ª, 33,
50b; with v, 35 ff., 50b;
with 01, 44, 50b; with
n, 50.
ī & I interchanged, 168.
1 (for iŵTα), Tó, 9, 9º [1].
1-, in augment, 717.
ĭ-, augmented to i-, 714.
i-, unaugmented, 715.
1-, dropped, 134, 723.
--, intersonantic, a mere
prosodic mark, 280;
freely dropped, 20°;
added, 20¹.
-1-, between σ and a sonant
-1,
dropped, 155 e.
in dat. 3rd decl., 328?.
-1-, modal vowel, 759.
compositional, 1106,
1108, 1110; repl. by
-1-2
-σl-, 1116.
-- epenthetic in τσῆ (τσοί),
etc., 562.
í
-i, iota paragogicum, 574-
1+1=2, 146, 148 f.
î for iŵTa (Tó), 9, 9ª [1].
2 μικρόν, 9° f.
(= 10), 645.
(=10000), 645.
-ia (), 1018 ff., 1045 ff.
accent of, 1046 f.
compounds in, 1154 f.
in N becomes -iá, 271.
-á (†), from -ía, 271, 1047;
from -éa, 1027.
-a for -ŋa (τá), from nom.
sing. -os, 424b.
i+a=a, 150 d; =ia, 151.
la' (= 11), 645-
á, ela, 151.
τά, διά, 155 α.
λάθην, 1478.
-tainw, in aor., 893.
Ἰακώβ, Ιάκωβος, 218.
Ιακωβίτσης, 1040 0 0.
Ἰάκωβος, Ἰακώβ, 218.
καλί, ύαλος, 151.
Ἰαμβῆς, 287.
-IANA (Tá), 'quarters,' or
'village,' 1228.
'Iavvâkos, 1040 B α.
'Iávvns, 'Iwávvns, 150 a.
-IANÓC, ethnic, 10312,1078f.
ἰάομαι, 1001.
-tấc, from -cús (0), IOI7.
Ιασάμην, 1478.
tao", 988.
Ιατρόμαντις, 1156, 1157.
ἰατρός, πατρός, 151.
-τάω, -άσω, 839.
intersonantic, 217; in-law (desid.), 1099 ff.
verbs, 860, 863.
'B' (=12), 645.
anaptyctic, 155 a, 155.-iBrw for -íßw, 861, 876.
--&-e-, in verb stem, 924. -i8w, -ißyw, 875, 876.
-1-, short in penult, 924. ¿y' (=13), 645-
- (Tó), foreign neuters in,-irri” (tú), 10386.
399.
model for N neuters in
-", 303, 400.
iydi, youdí, 131.
'Iyvátns, 1040.
Ιγνάτιος, 1040.
in compos. becomes -o", 'Iyvátis, 1040.
1146.
¡yú for ¿yú, 030.
ideî or ìòîì?, tó, app. vi. 26,
27.
ἰδεῖν, 9964 -
& idé, 912 ff.
ides for eldes, 7¹7 [1].
idere for eid-, 717 [1].
-IDEÝC (¿), 1028 f.
ion for ion, app. vi. 19.
ἰδῇ or ἰδεῖ?, τύ, App. vi. 26,
27.
-ÍAнC, 1028 f.
ἰδικός (μου, σου, etc.), 554,
1417.
ἴδιοι σφῶν αὐτῶν, οἱ -557-
-IDION (TÓ), dimin., 1036 ff.
ιδιοπραγείν, 1416.
idios, vidios, 155".
idios, 'own,'' same,' 554,
556, 614, 1417.
for poss. pron., 1416 f.
ίδιος, ὁ 'the same,' 541,
613.
ἴδιος αὐτοῦ or αὑτοῦ, 557,
1417.
ἴδιος ἑαυτοῦ, 557-
ἴδιος ἐμαυτοῦ, 557.
ἴδιος σεαυτοῦ, 557.
ιδιός μου (σου), 1417.
ἴδοιμι, 99664.
ïdoμev for eid-, 717 (1).
ἴδον for εἶδον, 717 [1].
ιδόντας, as adv., 823.
ἴδοσαν, 791.
idoú, suggests idé, 913.
ιδρύω, leads to δρώνω, 723.
ιδρύσειας, 155 α.
18pús, 362.
ιδρώς,
ίδρωτας for ίδρως, 363.
ïdŵ, 99664 &
186 *
from 186, 915.
& διῶ, 143.
186
& eidâ, in T-B, 971.
ιδωμένος, 996 51, 64 &
le' (= 15), 645.
-ie or ye, from -eie,
LÉ
861.
ἰείη, 124.
-Ele, 859,
ἰέναι, 988 ; - πρὸς βασιλέα,
1655.
ἱερακάκι", Ιο38.
Ιέρακας, δ, 339.
ἱέρακας, δ, 1039.
¡epákiov, 1038".
ἱερακομύτης, 1149.
itpat, 10380.
631
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
iepéā (тbv), App. ii. 8.
¡epéav, App. iii. 6 a, bis.
ιερέας, 72 [1].
ἱερέας for ἱερεύς, 273, 407.
¡épe(1)a, 20".
Ἱερεμίας, 283.
iepés for -éas, d, 273, 407.
ἱερεύς, 403.
becomes iepéas & iepĤs
(iepés), 407.
ἱερῆ (τόν), 406.
ἱερα (τόν), App. ii. 8.
iépna, 38.
ἱερᾶς, δ, 407.
iepo Fepyós, App. ii. 14 A.
iepopyós, app. ii. 14 A.
iepós, in CIA, 73.
ἱεροῦ, γεροῦ, 155 €.
ἱερουργός, App. ii. 14. 4.
ἱερωσύνη, beside δικαιοσύνη,
App. ii. 5.
-τέω, fut. in 4, 887 f. ; see
-ιω.
18 (=17), 645.
ζόμην, 990114.
i sw, 996111.
-izo, meaning of, 1091 ff.
for -άω, -έω, -όω, 856.
common in N, 868-73,
906.
ικονόμος for εἰκ-, 44.
ἰκόνος, 34.
-IKóc, adj., 1068 ff.; in
cmpr., 494.
-IKóc, ethnic adj., 1076 f.
KOC, ethnic adj., 1077.
ἰκουμένη for οἰκ-, 44·
in∞, 996116.
ικρίωμα, 72 [3].
ἵλαος, App. ii. 8.
ἱλάσκομαι, 996 μτ ; fut. -σω,
996117
ib.
λεύομαι, 996117.
ἵλεως, App. ii. 8.
ἐλήφασι, 34.
ἵλεως, 325 ; for ἱλέως, App.
i. 15 b.
ίλιγγος & ἴλιγέ, App. iii. 12.
ἴλιγξ & ἴλιγγος, App. iii. I 2.
Ιλίου πόλις, 1306.
-Imaîóc, adj., 1056.
ἱμάσθλη, μάσθλη, 133.
ἱμάτιν, τό, App. iii. 9 c.
ἐμεῖς from ἐμεῖς, 030.
ἴμεν, 988.
ἱμέρα & ἡμέρα, in Plato,
29º [1], 41.
Ίμι for είμι, 29".
μnpov, 9º f.
ἱμῖν for ἡμῖν, 37.
has fut. in @, 888;|-imóc, adj., 1056.
since A-low, 890.
in' (= 18), 645.
inμi, 927 ff., 945 ff., 955,
963".
accentuation of, 953.
compounds of, 956.
its P-N history, 957 ff.,
960.
-THC (8, 1), has acc. sing. in
-iâ & -in, 428.
'Inσoûs, 322.
ἵηται, 954.
10′ ( = 19), 645.-
101, 988; with subj., 1913.
-ika (†), 1040 ɑ ɑ.
ikavós, constr., 1540, 2090,
2091.
εἰμι for -νόν ἐστι, 2083 f.
ἱκέτευον, 714 f.
ἱκετεύω πρὸς θεῶν, 1662.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
-IKH (†), 1069.
-KHC (8), Io40 0 0.
-ÍKIN (TÓ), 1040 α a.
-ÍKION(TÓ), 1038" f., 1040 0.
-IKIOC (8), 1040 0.
-IKIC (0), 1040 0 α,
ikvéoµai, 1001.
IMON (TO), origin of, 1022 f.
for -σis (†), 1021, 1022 f.
for infin., 2072.
-IMOC, adj., 1094; cmprt.,
494.
leads to μor, 1022b.
for -Tos, 1052.
41M0C x -αῖος = ιμαῖος, 1056.
-IN, -1”, from -10V (Tó), 301,
302.
-IN (TηV, Tóν), how treated
(τήν, τόν),
in N, App. iii. 14.
tv for ἥν, 37.
iva (local) for ónov, 'where,'
1760.
|íva (final), 1760 ff.
proclitic, 97 d.
rare in CIA, App.
9 [1].
repl. by onшs.
iva for elee, 1906.
for aye, in exhort., 1914b.
in final clauses, 1952 ff.,
1963.
for past action, 1954.
furthered by Latin ut?
1762.
frequency of, 1762, 1766.
iva + primary subj. for in-
fin., 1762, 1766, 2063,
2079, 2088 f., App. vi.
4 f., 8; in Aristotle,
1761 [1]; in Polybios,
1761 [1], App. vi. 12 Ba
[1]; in NT, 1761 [1],
App. vi. 12 c.
for final part., 2158.
for causal part., 1741.
for fut. indic., App. vi.
12.
for interrog. subj., app.
v. 19.
repl. by els Tó + infin.,
1542, App. vi. 22; by
TOU +infin., 1762, app.
vi. 24.
before interrog. subj.,
1744, 1911, App. iv. 12.
iva + fut. indic. for fut.
subj., 1990º, app. iv. 1 1.
iva conf, with wore, 1756,
iva
1758, 1763.
preceded by ws, 1707;
by diá, 1769.
shortened to vá, 608b,
1766 f.
iva (causal), 'because,' 1741,
1760ს.
iva-clause, 2097.
ïve
ἵνα μή, 1952 F.
iva Tí, why,' 2044.
ινδικτυόνος, 35.
ive for elve, 985 [1].
-INIKOC, adj., 1080.
INOC, in comp., 494.
-ÎNOC, ethnic, 10315, 1080.
-INÓC, 1062 f.
ethnic adj., 1080.
vi.INOC, adj., 1060 f.; becomes
ἵνα for ὡς & όπως, 1761,
App. vi. 12 & [3].
for wote, 1756, 1758 f.,
1951.
for modal av, 1762, 1774,
App. iv. 12.
(ἐάν),
for condit. av (čáv),
1770, 1774 & [1].
-έϊνος, 1061.
ivra, 592 & [3], 593; not
εἶντα, 592 [3].
for motos, 611".
-inw, in fut. & pres., 899,
900.
becomes -aivo, 900.
monosyllabic stems in
902.
Ιόλας, 283.
632
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
loper for iwμev, App. ii. 12-ickoc (), dimin., 1036, -iTZIN (TÓ), 1040 C C [1].
[2-3].
-ION (TÓ), dimin., 1036 ff.
shortened to iv, 301,
302, 1040.
for infin., 2063, App. vi.
25.
-10c, adj. & subs., 1081 f.;
adj., 1072 f.; in cmprt.,
494, 502.
ethnic, 1030.
Loc, appellat. in, 298, 1040.
shortened to -s or -ns,
298; by analogy, 301.
Ιός, Νιό, ή, 130.
Ἰούδα (του), 277.
'Ioúdas, 283º.
Ἰούλης, 1040.
Ιούλιος, 1040.
Ἰούλις, 1040.
Ἰούνγος, 59 c.
ióp, 218ª
ἱππόδρομος, 1144.
Ιπποκορώνιον, 15ο8.
ἱππότες for -ται, 267.
ἱππότη for -ται, 48.
ἱπποτροφέω, 1154.
ἱπποτροφία, 1154.
ἱπποτρόφος, 1154.
ἵπταμαι, 996208, 1001.
ιράνα for εἰρήνη, 29.
-IC, IOC, -HC (8), 343,
1040.
-IC, accus. iv, 358.
-ic, -idos (1), patronymic,
1028 f.; ethnic, 1030.
-ic, gen. -ídos, 365; in N,
367.
-ic, accus. -ída, 359.
-îc, -îdos, shortened names
in, 288.
-IC, gen. -los, 387.
-IC, gen. -ews, 391, 395.
-Ic, in composition, 1147,
1149.
-IC, -1, adj., 474; in N,
475.
-IC, person ending, 760.
loasa & loów, 868.
Ισάκιος, 1040 13.
toaoi", in NT, 970.
ἰσέπραξε, 34.
ἴσθι, 969.
Ισιγένηα, 38.
-ÍCKн (), dimin.,
-ickápion (tó), 1037.
1036,
1038".
-ICKÍAION (TÓ), 1037.
-ICKION (TO), 1037.
1038b.
-ICKÝAPION (T6), 1037.
loμev, 969.
Ισμήνα, 35.
'Iσокрáтηя, 431¹.
ισόρροπος, 1106.
-ITZION (TÓ), 1040 C h [1].
-ITZIOC (8), 1040 C b [1].
-ITZIC (8), 1040 C c [1].
-ITCA (†), 1040 © c; Slav?,
ib. [2].
-ITCHC (5), 1040 C C.
oos, constr., 1357 f.; cp.-ITCIN (TU), 1040 0 c.
1371 f.
icocλλάβοι κλίσεις, 255.
ισοτελοῦ, 430.
ἰσύω & ισάζω, 868.
14' (=16), 645.
loraívw, 900.
ἔσταις, App. ii. 9.
ἵσταμι, App. ii. 9.
ἱστάναι, 962 ; see ἵστημι.
ἱστανόμενος, 962.
ἱστάνω (ἵστημι), 937, 958,
962, 996118 a.
becomes first ἱσταίνω,
900; then σTaiva, 723.
σταίνω,
ioτás, 450, App. ii. 9.
ἱστάς,
ἵστασαι, 773.
ἵστατο, 782.
-істатос, 501.
-ITCION (TO), 1040 0 b.
-ITCIOC (8), 1040 0 b.
-ITCIC (S), 1040 α C.
ἴτω, 988.
Ιφιστιάδης, 34.
ιχθυβόλος, 1108.
ιχθυοβόλος, 1108.
ιχθυοφάγος, ι1ο6.
ixoûs (ix0ús), 387.
ἰχθύς (οἱ, τούς), 332.
έφι, 2061 [1].
ἰχνάρι", (ἀχνάρι, 130, 134 C.
-iXNYON (TÓ), 1037.
-iw, conjugation of, 701 ff.
contracted in G-N, 702.
-iw, coincides with -éw, 859.
-iw in N leads to -áw, 859º.
ἱστάω (ἵστημι), 937, 958, -ώ, fut. in 1, 887 f.
962, 996118.
ἴστε, in ΝΤ, 970.
ἱστέκω, 965.
ioτýk∞, 965.
-істерос, 501.
ἵστημι, 945 F., 955, 963",
996118.
peculiarities of, 9971-
accentuation of, 953.
compounds of, 956.
its P-N history, 957 ff.,
962.
trans. & intrans., 972 f.
differs from -aµaι, 1467.
& ἔστηκα, 1868 f.
becomes first ἱστάνω,
937; then (i)σTaivw.
()σταίνω.
Ιστιοκώπη, 1156.
lorophenv for -0ŋ, 221, App.
iii. 19.
-ICTOC, sprlt., 486, 502-8;
in N, 486.
ἱστῶ, sbjnct. of ἵστημι, 931.
Ισχαδοκάρυα, 1156, 1157.
ισχναίνω, 893.
ισχύω, ἴσχυσα, 1853 f.
lows, 518b.
Ίτανος, Σίτανος, 130, 1554.
ire, 988.
-ITZA (1), 1040 0 c [1]; see
-ίτσα.
-ÍTZHC (3), 1040 C c [1].
retreats in H-T, 890.
doubtful in NT, 890.
ïw, of eîµı, 988.
'Iwavváкns, 1040 в а.
Ἰωάννη (του), 278.
'Iwávvns, 150 α, 283º, 298.
Ιαννήτζη, 1040 0 0.
Ιωαννίκιος, 1040 0.
-IN (5), 1028 f.
-iwn, Lion, adj., 381.
in N extinct, 382.
-iwN, Lov, compar. ending,
486, 506.
retreats
506.
before Στερος,
τίων, -ιστος, 502-8.
lúv, 988.
Ιώσηπος, Ἰωσήφ, Σήφης,
218".
'Iwons, 287".
Ἰωσήφ, Σήφης, 134 α, 218,
'Iwoía (TO), 277.
Ἰωσία
ἰῶτα, τό, 2, 9 f., 9.
Ιωσίας, 283.
K, K, origin of, 2.
forms of, 2, 9.
sound of, 9, 24.
a guttural, 22.
a tenuis, 22, 23".
a mute, 23".
a stop, 22.
633
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
K, K, for Latin c, 59 c.
palatalized before e i,
56b.
becomes X, 170 f.
replaced by 7, 59 b.
-K-, intersonantic dropped,
155° f.
anaplyctic, 155 f.
tense character, 756.
in ἔθηκα, etc., 952, 963 c.
-K, movable, 223 F.
'k for οὐκ, 1797.
κ' (= 20), 645.
* (= 20000), 645.
και (= 21), 645-
κἃ for κάππα, γι
κα from καλέ, 251, 2048
[2].
for âpa, 251b, 2048 [1].
κά or και for κατά, 1608;
see κατά
κà тáde, 1608, app. i. 16 a.
κὰ τὰ εἰωθότα, 1608.
κὰ τούς, App. i. 16 α.
κὰ τοὺς νόμους, 1608.
-KA, in pf., 785; in N,761,
801, 1875.
in N -θηκα from pf., 801.
in ἔθηκα, etc., 952.
for -σα in N aor. pass.,
761, 1875, App. iii.
29.
κά for κάν, App. iii. 33.
καβαλλάρης, 1040 Λ.
καβαλλάριος, 1040 Α.
καβαλλικεύω, π01.
κάβειρος, 296.
κάβουρας, 296.
καβουροι, 296.
κάγώ, 20.
καημένος, 996123
Καλαμια γράμματα, 5 [1].
καήσομαι, 996 12:
•
καθ' ὅλου, οι καθόλου, 2060 ; | καθῇτο, 994.
Sév, 1449°.
καθ' ώραν, 665.
κάθα for κάθε, 665.
κάθα εἷς, 621, 626.
καθαιρίζω, 116, 996 119.
καθαίρω, 116, 893, 996119.
καθαριζέστω, 17.
καθαρίζω, 116, 990119
καθαρισμένος, 996119.
κάθαρον fur κάνθ-, 194.
καθαρός, 442 ;
1316 f.
καθαρῶ, 996 119.
1590".
τινος,
καθηΰδον, 746, 99659.
καθιζήσω, 990114
καθίζω, 746, 868, 996114-
& έζομαι, 1485.
καθικνέομαι, 996 116.
καθίσα, 996111·
κάθισε, 1362, 995.
καθίσεις, 996111·
καθισμένος, 995, 996114
κάθισον & κάθησο, 1485.
| καθίσω, 995, 996114
καθίστημι τινά τι, 1284.
+ infin., 2094.
κάθε (from κατά), 663, 665, καθιω, 996114·
·
κάθε εις, 621.
κάθε μία, 665.
κάθε τι, 596.
καθεδεῖ, 996114
καθεδούμαι, 99600 -
καθεδούμενος, 996ου -
καθεδούνται, 99660.
καθέζομαι, 746, 99660
& καθίζω, 1485.
καθεζούντησαν, 823.
καθείλκυκα, 99677.
καθείλοσαν, 79.
καθείς, οι καθείς, 626, 664.
καθελόντωσαν, 811.
καθένα for -θέν, App. iii. 25.
καθένας, oι κάθ' ένας, 626.
καθερίζω, 996110-
καθεσθείς, 99600
καθεσθήσομαι, 596 €
καθεσθήσονται, 99600.
καθέστακα, 973.
καθέσταμαι, 973·
καθέστηκα, 9971·
καθεύδηκα, 996gr.
καθευδήσω, 99690 -
καθεύδον, 996,
95
καθεύδω, 146, 9960-
καθ' from κατὰ or κάθε, see καθήλιον, 37.
κατά.
in N, 665.
καθ᾽ αὑτούς, τὸ
1585.
καθ᾿ ἑβδομάδα, 665.
καθ' εις, 604.
καθ' ἑκάστην, 650.
καθ᾽ ἕκαστον, 665.
1588 b.
κάθημαι, 774, 994 f., App. i.
15 b.
- in P-N, 995.
& -ομαι, 937.
καθημερινός, 1362, 1063.
καθημερνός, ρινός, 1362.
καθήμην, 994.
καθ' ένα, 6622, 665, 1499, καθήμην, 994.
καθ' ἐνιαυτόν, 114.
καθ' ἔτος, 114, 665, 1588 b.
καθ' ἡμέραν, 665, 1499,
1588 b.
καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν, 1588 .
καθ᾿ ἡμᾶς, οἱ
καθ' ιδίαν, 114.
1587.
καθῆντο, 994.
καθῇς, 994.
κάθησαι, 773.
καθῆσθε, 994.
καθησμένος, 995.
κάθησο, 994 & [r].
& κάθισον, 1485.
καθήσω, 995.
καθοίμην, 994.
κάθομαι, 937, 995-
καθότι for ὅτι, declar., 1942.
κάθου, 801, 994 & [1].
καθούμενα, εἰς τὰ καλὰ —,
2112.
καθούμενος, 995, 2112.
κάθουνται, 778.
κάθισε, 995:
καθώς, in Ν, 518, 1434-
as 400n a9, 1793.
και for καίει, 863.
καί, proclitic, 97 47.
connects two or more
subjects, 1755.
very common in P-N,
1703, 1710, 2165.
use of, 1711-20.
for dependent clauses,
1711.
for adversative clauses,
1716.
before apodosis?, 1715.
after av or el, 1717.
after relatives, 1718,
2024.
after μετὰ & σύν, 1718.
connects participle with
its verb, 1720.
- intensive, 1717 ff.
repeated
1704".
each
time,
redundant, 1704º,1716ff.
- in compound numbers,
640.
in perphr. superl., 513,
521.
with concess. part., 2155.
in double questions,2043.
after οὐκ ἔφθην, ἅμα, ἤδη,
οὔπω, ὡς, 1714.
after μετὰ or σύν, 1718,
και for δέ, 1703, 1713.
replaced by δέ, 1719.
for ἀλλά, μέντοι, 1713.
634
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
καί for ἄν, δήποτε, etc., 1716. | κάκιον, 5042·
for ἵνα or ὅπως, 1712.
καί τέ, 1707.
καὶ ἄν or καὶ ἐάν, 1715 f.,
1773; becomes κἄν,
593 ; for concess. part.,
2156; even if,' 1993 1,
1994.
και γάρ, 17040.
καὶ εἰ,
even if, 1993 δ,
1994; for concess. part.,
2156; in N repl. by
kai vá, 1716, 1771 ff.
καὶ μάλα (γε), 3059.
καὶ μέν (or καὶ μήν, 17442·
καὶ μήν, 17ο4.
καὶ νά for καὶ ἄν, 1716,
1771-5, 1993 f.; (even
if, 1994; for concess.
part., 2156.
καὶ ὁ ἕνας καὶ ὁ ἄλλος, 1213.
καὶ οἱ δύο, 121 3 f.
•
>
καὶ ὅs, and he, 1437.
καὶ ὃς ἔφη, 605.
καὶ οὗτος, 1432.
καὶ ταῦτα, ‘and that, 1432.
καὶ τήν, 1197 c.
καὶ τόν, 1197 c.
καὶ τούς, 1197 c.
καιαείς, κιαείς, 595, 598.
καιανείς, 595.
καιανένας, 595.
Καϊάφα (του), 277.
καίγω for καίω, 996123.
καίει, και, 863.
καίεις, καῖς, 154, 863.
καικίας, 283.
Καικίνα (του), 277.
καίκλυτι for κέκλυθι, 49.
καινίζω & -ύω, 868.
καινουργηκότα, 736.
καινουργής, 1114.
καινούργιος, 1114.
καινίω & -ίζω, 868.
Káïos, 59 c.
καίπερ, with part., 2109,
2152, 2155.
καιρός ἐστι, with infin., 2081
f., App. vi. 16.
καῖς, καίεις, 154, 863.
Καισάρηα, 38.
Καισαρίκια, τά, 1040 0.
καίτοι, 1700; with concess.
part., 2155.
καίω, κάω, 20, 848, 996123.
N for πίμπρημι, 937, 9743.
κακά for -ὣς, adv., 518, 522.
κακαψωροῦμαι, 10002.
κάκη, 1048.
κακία (ή), 271, 1020, 1047.
|
& δυσ-, ib.
κάκιστος, 502, 5042
κακίων, κάκιον, 502, 5042
κακκαβίτσιν, 1040 0 0.
κακο-, 1122 ;
κακόβολος, 11501 b.
κακόβουλος, 1147.
καλόγνωμος, 1107.
κακόγραμμα, 1155.
κακογράφω, 1155-
κακοειδής, 1122.
κακοεργός, 1 1 13.
Κακοΐλιος, 1122.
κακολογέω τινά, 1258.
κακομαθαίνω, 1155.
κακομάθημα, 1155.
κακομαθημένος, 1151.
κακομαθημός, 1155.
κακομάθητος, 1151.
κακοπλερωτής, 1132.
κακοπρόσωπος, 1122.
κακός, 516; in N, 503.
in emprt., 502, 505;
in P, 504"; in N, 503,
505.
& δυσ-, 1 122.
κάλει for -λει, 857.
καλειώ, 996124
καλένδαις ἀπριλίας, 332.
καλεσμένος, 990124
καλέσω, 889, 996124-
Ι. καλέω, 853, 857, 904,
996124-
as fut., 889, 996124 ·
intrans., 1456.
τινά τι, 1284 f.
2. καλέομαι, as pres. & fut.,
996124 ·
τινός, 1288.
ἀπό τινος, 1503 α.
παρά τινι, 1632.
3. κέκλημαι, as pres., 1868 f.
καλημέρα, 148.
καλὴ νύχτα, 187.
καλινάριος, 430.
καλικάριος, 59 c.
καλικίων, 59 c.
καλικών for -κίων, 59 c.
καλλείψω, App. i. 16 α.
Καλλήστρατος, 37.
Καλλητύχη, 37.
Καλλι-, 1108, 1133;
εὐ-, 1122.
κακόν ἐστι, with ἵνα, 2082, κάλλιά, adv., 522.
περί τινα, 1639.
App. vi. 16.
κακοσκελής, 1147.
κακοσύβαστος, 1122.
κακοτεχνημένος, 736, 740.
κακότυχος, 1122.
κακουργέω τινά, 1258.
κακούργος, 1 1 1 3 f.
κακόφημος, 1122.
κακόφρων, 1122.
κακοχώνευτος, 1122.
κακῶς, 516, 519.
- ἔχω, 1455 0.
- λέγω τινά, 1258.
ποιεῖν τινά, 1258.
καλλιᾶς for καλλίων, 505.
καλλίζωνος, 1122.
&
Καλλικλῆ & -ῆδος (τοῦ), 288.
καλλίκομος, 1133.
καλλιλογέυμαι, 1486.
καλλίνικος, 1133.
κάλλιο, 522.
κάλλιον, 502, 505, 506 [1],
520b.
καλλιόνως, 520.
κάλλιος, 338, 496', 505, 506.
καλλίπαις, 1108.
ποιεῖν, with part., 2132 f. κάλλιστα, 511).
πράττω, 1455 b.
κακώτατος, 504.
κακώτερα, adv., 522.
κακώτερος, 502, 505.
Καλλίππο, 26,
καλλίρροος, 1122, 1133.
καλλίστατος, 506.
Καλλίστιν, 303, 1040.
Καλλίστιον, 1040.
κάλλιστος, 502.
καλά, adv. 518, 522; ἂν Καλλιστώ, ή, 414.
-, 1994.
καί, 1994.
καλακούω, 15o a, 1112.
καλαμάομαι, 1001.
καλαμαρᾶς, 287.
καλαμάριν, 331, App. iii.
καλαμεῶνας, δ, 1035.
καλάμιν, App. iii. 9 c.
καλαμίνθη, 126.
Καλαμίτζι, 1040 € 0.
καλαμαμίνθη, 126.
καλαναρχω, 126.
7.
Καλλιστῶς (τῆς), 414.
καλλίστως, 520.
καλλίτερα, adv., 518, 522.
καλλίτερος, 496, 505.
καλλίων, 338, 496, 502.
becomes κάλλιος, 338,
505.
καλλιώτερος, 506 & [1].
κάλλος, τό, ‘in beauty,
1270.
καλλύτερος, 505.
καλνώ, 904.
635
I' INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
Καλο-, 1108, 1122, 1133.
καλογερική, ή, το7ο.
καλόγερος, 338, 1133.
καλογηρίτσιν; 1040 0 c.
καλόγηρος, 118, 1133.
καλόγνωμος, 1133.
καλογνώμων, 1108, 1122,
1133.
κάλοι, οἱ, 327.
καλοκαιρινός, 1ο63.
καλομαθαίνω, 1155.
καλομάθημα, 1155.
καλοπερνῶ, 1122.
καλοπληρωτής, 1122.
καλοποιώ, 1122.
καλός, 442 ; in N, 503.
cmprt., 502 ; in I', 506 ;
in N, 496", 5042, 505.
in compos., 1108, 1133.
& eû, 1122.
+infin., 2090, 2091.
καλός, καλλι-, καλο-, 1133.
καλός—ἄλλος, 50.
καλόν ἐστι, with infin., 2081
f.; with ἵνα, 2085, App.
vi. 16.
καλὸν ἦν for ἐστι, 1901.
καλὴ καλή = καλλίστη, 513.
κάλος, δ, 327.
καλοσυβάζομαι, 1122.
καλοσύβαστος, 1122.
καλοσύμβουλος, 1133.
καλότυχος, 1122.
Καλονήσιος, 37.
καλούτσικος, 1o4ob
καλόχροος, 1133.
καλοχώνευτος, 1122.
καλῦ for καλού, 29.
καλύπτω, 874; & mid., 1467.
καλύτερα, adv., 522.
Καλυψώ, 411.
καλώ, as fut. of καλέω.
κάλωες, οἱ, 327.
κάλως, δ, 326 ; οἱ —, 327,
,
332 ; τοὺς - 332.
καλῶς, 519 ; in N, 518.
καλῶς ἔχει, with ἵνα, 2082,
App. vi. 16.
καλῶς ποιῶ, constr., 2132 f.
καλῶς πράττω, constr., 2 1 3 2 f.
καλώτατος, 491.
κάμ' for κάμῃ, 219.
καμακάκι", 1038.
καμάκιον, 1038.
κάμαξ, 1038
καμαρωτός, 1053.
καματερός, 1058.
KAMEN, in pf., 785.
καμένος, καϋμ-, 150 1.
Καμερής, 40.
Καμηρῆς, 37 (twice).
καμηλάτης, 126.
καμηλολάτης, 126.
καμηλωτή, 1053.
Καμιρης, 37.
καμμάω, 871.
δέκα-
καμμεί, μύει, 148.
καμμεῖς, καμμύεις, 148.
καμμιά, see κανείς ;
ρεά, δωδεκαρεά, etc.,
1453.
•
καμμύει, μει, 148.
καμμύεις, μεῖς, 148.
καμμύζω, 871.
καμμυσμένος, 996108
Καμμύτσης, 1040 0 0.
καμμύω, 871, 996108, App. i.
16 α.
κάμνην for -vn, App. iii. 2o b.
κάμνω, 996126.
+ part., 2126 f.
= ποιέω, 996222, 2Ι27.
τὴν κεφαλήν, etc., 1269.
καμοί, 200.
καμοῦμαι, 996120
κάμπος, 193.
καμπόσοι, 594 f.
καμπόσος, 595, 598.
κάμω, 990120
καμωθέντων, 853, 99620-
καμωμένος, 853, 996120 -
καμώνω, 996120 ;
1000.
-ομαι,
κἄν (see καὶ ἄν), 595, 598f,
1716, 1771 a; in N,
598b.
with numerals, 598b.
'even if,' 1993 b.
for concess. part., 2156.
for simple και, 598.
reduced to nd, App. iii.
23.
καν—κάν, 1727 f.
κἂν εἰ, 598.
ei,
κἂν εἶς, 595 ;
Κάνθαρος, 267.
κανίσκι, 1038.
κάνιτι for κάνετε, 030.
καννυσμένος, 996108
καννυω, 996108.
κανοναρχώ, 126.
κανοῦν, 313.
κάνω, 902, 996126
for ποιέω, 996322-
for φύω, 996300-
τινά τι, 1284.
καλός (καλός), 187.
κάπελας, 296.
κάπηλος, 296.
καπιστράκιον, 1038.
καπνά, τά, 43318 U.
καπνίζω, 868.
καπνοί, οἱ, 43318 0.
καπνός, 4331g 1.
κάποιανοῦ, 579.
κάποιανῶν, 579.
κάποιοι, 594.
κάποιος, 595,598, 615, 1206.
for vis, 597.
καποιουνοῦ, 579.
κάποιωνών, 579.
κάποτες, 598.
κάπου, 595, 598.
kánna, ró, kaph, 2, 9 f., 9ª;
τὸ & ἡ
gd.
Καππαδόκης & -πάδος, Αpp.
iii. 12.
κάπτω, 875.
κάπως, 598.
4
repl. by κάτι, 596.
κάρα, τό & ἡ, 249.
καράβι, τό, 43311
καραβίτσιν, 1040 0 0.
κάραβος, 43311·
καγάθι (καλάθι), 187".
καράτιν, app. iii. 7
καρδαμάμωμον, 126.
Καρδαμύλη - Σκαρδαμούλα,
1554.
οὐ for οὐδείς, καρδάμωμον, 126.
598", 1449°.
κανοναρχώ, 126.
κανείς, 626, 589, 595, 598.
for rìs, 589, 594, 597.
for οὐδείς, 1449.
κανείς δέν, 1449, 1824.
κανένα for κανέν, App. iii.
25.
κανέναν, App. iii. 9 c.
κανένας, 626.
for vis, 594.
for οὐδείς, 1449.
κανένας δέν = οὐδείς, 1449.
κάνετε, κάνιτι, 030.
κάνθαρος, σκάνθ-, 130.
καρδιά, 271.
κάρδοπος & -όπη, 292.
καρδούλα, 1059.
Κάρπαθος-Σκάρπ-, 1554".
καρπεύω, -ίζω, -ύω, 868.
καρπίζω, -σω, -εύω, 868.
καρπύω, -εύω, -ίζω, 868.
καγός (καλός), 187.
καρρέουσα, App. i. 16 a.
καρτερέω + part., 21 26 f.
καρτζιμάδων (τῶν), 2go.
καρύδι, 1038.
καρυδίτσιν, 1040 0 0.
καρυδόσυκα, 1156.
κάρυξ, κῆρυξ, 29.
636
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
καρχαρίας, 283.
-Kac, in pf., 785 ; becomes
-ICES, 798.
>
4kaci", in pf., 785; extended
to aor., 793.
Κάσο, ή, 292.
καστελλωμένα, 736.
Καστρινός, 1ο80.
κατά, 1489, 1584-97.
+ accus., 1585-91;
towards, 1586; for
περί, 1587, 1596, 1636;
for ává, 1491, 1499;
-surnamed, 1591;re-
pl. by simple accus.,
1274 f., 1588 ; by πρὸς
+ accus., 1658 α.
+gen., 1592-7; of a
blow, 1593; repl. by
ἐναντία, etc., 1597.
+ dat., 1596.
+ nom., 664, 1589".
misused, 1596; as ad-
verbial prefix, 664.
changed to κάθε, 663,
665, 1590b.
reduced to na, 1608.
κατ' ἀγρούς, 1585.
κατ᾿ ἀνέμου, 1594.
•
κατ' ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον,
1587.
κατ' ἐμέ, τὸ —, 1588 α.
κατ᾽ ἔτος, 1499, 1589 b.
κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλασσαν,
1234, 1585.
κατὰ γῆς, 1592, 1594.
κατὰ διαβόλου, 1590, 1594.
κατὰ δύναμιν, 1588 α.
κατὰ δύο, 6622
κατὰ θάλασσαν, 1234, 1585.
κατὰ θανάτου, 1594.
κατὰ κεφαλῆς, 1593, 1594.
κατά κεφαλῆς ἔχων (sc.
κάλυμμα), 1456.
κατὰ τοῦ, ‘according to,
1590.
κατὰ τοὺς νόμους, 1588 α.
κατα, 200.
κατάβα, τό, App. vi. 27.
καταβαίνω, in N, 753.
καταβασία, 753.
| κατάμουτρα, 1594.
καταμύω, 996104
καταντικρύ, with gen., 1314.
καταντούσης, 850.
κατάξω, 9962.
καταπάνος, ό, 1224
καταπατήσουσιν, μήποτε -,
779.
καταπατητάδες (τούς), 290.
καταπεφόρηκα, 996300.
καταπλαγής εἰμί τι, 1457.
99630,
καταπλήξω, 996218
κατάβασις, 369.
καταβάσωμεν, 99625
καταβατόν, 755-
καταγεγέλασται, 99636.
καταγεγραφηκέναι,
1875-
καταγεῖναι, 99637.
καταγελασθήσομαι, 99635.
καταγελάω, 99635, 1462 ;
pass., 1462.
constr., 1346 f.
καταγιγνώσκω τινός, 1346 f.
καταγνύει, 935 α.
κατάγνυμι, 9431", 9962-
καταγνύω, 9962.
καταγωνίζεσθαί τινα, 1244,
1457.
καταδαρθάνω, 99641.
καταδεδαρθηκώς, 99641.
καταδικάζω, constr., 1346 f.
καταδουλοῦν & -οῦσθαι, 1485.
καταδουλώσουσιν, ἵνα—,779.
καταδύω, 9972.
καταζητοῦντα, as adv., 823.
καταθαρσύνομαι, 1486.
κατάθεμα for ἀνάθεμα, 1746.
κατακάειν (causat.), 1460.
κατακαίνω, 917.
κατακαυχάσαι, 773.
κατακαών, 996123-
κατακέφαλα, 1594.
καταπολεμημένων, 750 d.
καταποθήσομαι, 996213
καταπονεῖν τινα or τι, 12441,
·
1457; pass., 1458.
καταπροτερεῖν τινα, 1457;
pass., 1458.
καταπτάς, 996208-
καταπτωθῆναι, 996215 -
καταράομαι, 1003.
becomes -οῦμαι, 996,7,
1003.
κατάρατος, App. i. 15 b.
καταροῦμαι, 99697, 1003.
+ gen., 1347.
καταρχέστων, 177.
κατάρχουνται, 778.
κατάρχω, constr., 2126 f.
κατασαπήσομαι, 996212-
κατασκαφήσομαι, 996245
κατασκευάζομαι (vid.),1486.
κατασκευασμένοι, 750 d.
κατασκηνεῖν, 851.
κατασκηνοῖν, 851.
κατασπείσω, ορ6 201
κατάσσω, 1500, 9431, 9962.
κατασταίνω τινά τι, 1284".
κατακεχωρισμένη for -νη, καταστασιάζω τινά, 1457 ;
20º.
κατάκου, 153.
κατακρατέω τινά, 1457;
pass., 1458.
κατακρίνω, constr., 1346 f.
κατὰ κράτος διώκειν, 1588 α. κατακτανέεσθε, 1478.
κατὰ κράτου, 1594.
κατὰ μεσῆς, 1594, 1596.
κατὰ μέσον, 1594.
κατὰ μέσου, 1594.
καταλαμβάνω, with part.,
2133 ff.
καταλεγείς, 996101, 1
καταλείπω, with
•
infin.,
κατὰ πάντα, 1588 α.
2094 ff.
κατὰ στέρνον παίειν
τινά,
καταλειφθήσομαι, 1885.
1585.
κατὰ τὰ μεσάνυκτα, 1636.
κατὰ ταὐτά, 1588 α.
κατὰ τὰ φαινόμενα, 1590.
κατὰ τὴν ἀνατολή", 1586.
κατὰ τὴν ἐμὴν δόξαν, 1588 α.
κατὰ τὸ φανῇ, 1590, Αργ.
vi. 26 f.
κατὰ τὸν ποταμόν, 1585.
καταλείψομαι, 1885.
καταλελήψεται, 996148-
καταλεχθείς, 99015121
καταλύω (intr.), 1455 α.
καταμάχεσθαί τινι
1457-
or
τι,
καταμεσής οι κατὰ μεσῆς,
pass., 1458.
καταστρατηγέω τινά, 12441,
1457; in pass., 1458.
κατάσχω, ως present, Αp.
iv. 3.
κατατριβήσομαι, 990279
καταφαγᾶς, ὁ, 287 f.
κατάφορος, 755.
εἰμί τι, 1457.
καταφρονέω, constr., 1346 f.;
τινος, 15950; pass.,
1462.
καταχαρούμενος, 1594.
καταχέσομαι, 999, 10
καταψηφίζομαι τινος, 1346,
1595".
κατε- for κατα-, 755; in N
verbs, ib.
“ΚΑΤΕ, in pl., 785.
κατέαγα, 9962.
1594, 1596.
καταμονομαχείν τινα, 1457. [ κατεαγείς, 9962.
637
Ι. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
κατεαγῇ, 9962.
κατεαγῆναι, 9962.
κατεαγύ(ι)α, 200.
κατέαξα, 9962.
κατεάξαντα, 9962.
κατεάξαντες, 9962.
κατεάξει, 9962
κατεάξῃ, 9962.
κατεάσσω, 150c, 9431, 9962.
κατέβα, τό, App. vi. 27.
κατεβάζω, 99625 -
κατεβαίνω, 753, 755, 99623.
κατεβασιά, 753, 755.
κατέβασμα, 369, 753, 755.
κατεβασμός, 753, 755-
κατεβατόν, 755.
κατέβηκα, 801.
κατέβην, δοι.
for -βη, App. iii. 19.
κατέδαρθον, 99641
κατεδήδεσμαι, 99601.
κατεδιήτα, 996,7
κατεδιῃτησάμην, 99647.
κατεδιήτων, 745, 751.
κατέδομαι, 99641
κατειπείν, constr., 1346 f.
κατέκλειστο, 750 d.
κατηξιώθην for -θη, App. iii. | «e for και, 49.
19.
κατηράσασθαι, 755.
κατήφορος, 755.
κατηχθημένος, 99621
Κατηχώρι, 755.
καταπερ, 52 [4].
κατ' θάνῃ, App. i. 16 α.
κάτι, 594, 596, 598, 1178.
for κάπως, 596.
κάτι τι, 596, 1178, 1451.
κάτιν τις, 596.
κάτις, 594, 595.
κατιστᾶσιν, 72 [3].
-κε, in pf., 785.
κέδρος, ἡ & 6, 292.
κέῃ, 990.
κέηται, 990.
Σκει, in plpf., 785.
-κει-, thematic, 785.
κείμαι, 990 ff. ; in P-N, 993.
compounds of, 991.
accentuation of, 991.
for τέθειμαι, 964, 992.
KEIMEN, in plpf., 785.
LKEIN, in plpf., 785.
κεινέτερος, 554.
κατισχύω τι, 12441, 1457 ; κεῖνος for ἐκεῖνος, 133.
pass., 1458.
κατοικέω & -άω, 854.
KATON, in pf., 785.
κατορθούμην, 717 [1].
κατορυχήσομαι, 996100
κατορώρυκται, 735.
κατορωρυχα, 996100 -
κατουρειοῦμαι τον οὐρητιάω,
ΙΙΟΙ.
κατουρέω, 996192 -
κείρω, 996 128 ; -ομαι, 1473.
Σκεις, in plpf., 785.
κείσαι, 773.
Leican, in plpf., 785.
κείσομαι, 990.
Σκειτε, in plpf., 785.
-κείτΗΝ, in plpf., 785.
κείτομαι, 993.
έκειτον, in plpf., 785.
κάτσε (κάθισε), 1362, 205, κείωνται, 990.
99611.1.
κάτσω, 995.
κάτσωμεν, 996111.
κάτω, 508, 523, 524, 1513.
κάτω κάτω, 521.
κεκάθαρα, 999119.
κεκάθικα, 990114
κεκάθικεν, 738.
κεκάμμνκα, 750 α, 996168.
κέκαρμαι, 996120
κεκέρακα, 996 120
κατέκοπταν, 789.
κατελίπαμεν, 796.
κατελίπατε, 796.
κατενεμησάμην, 1486.
κατενεχθέντα,
as adv.,
κάτω από, 1315.
823.
κατενοοῦσαν, 789.
κατεπάνος, δ, 1324.
κατεπάνω, δ, 1224
κατώτατος, 508.
κατεπατοῦσαν, 789.
κατωτάτω, 523.
κέκλαμμαι, 996185
κατεπιτηδεῦσθαι, 750 €.
κατώτερος, 508.
κατεπλάγην, 996 218
κατωτέρω, 523.
κατεπροενόμευσεν, 751.
κατεσκέβασε, 51.
καυθήσομαι, 990123-
κέκληκα, 996 124 App. i. 16.
κατεσπεικώς, 996251
κατεστησάμην, 9971·
καυματάω & -ίζω, 868.
κατέσχεσαν, 791.
κατέτακτο, 736 [2].
κατέτηκτο, 736 [2].
κατευοδοῦτο, γι7 [1].
κατεστρατηγησάμην, 1486.
κατέφορο, 755.
κατέφυγα, 794.
κατηβαίνω, 753, 755.
κατηγορέω, 744, 1140, 1142.
constr., 1346 f.; τινός,
1595".
κατηγόρηκα, 744.
κατηγόρηση, ή, 1020.
κατήγορος, 74, 1142.
κατηγόρουν, 744.
κατηξίεις, 851.
κατηξίοις, 851.
ὑπό, 1315.
κάτωθεν, 1513.
κατώρυκται, 735.
κεκατηραμένος, 750 α.
κεκέρδακα, ηκα, 996130-
κεκερδημένος, 996,
κεκίρναμαι, 996129.
•
130 •
κεκλασμένη προσωδία, 76
[2], App. i. I.
καυμένος, καμ-, 150d, 996 123. κεκλεισμαι, 996134 •
καυματίζω & -ύω, 868.
καύσομαι, 996 123-
καυχάσαι, 773.
καυχηματίας, 283.
καύω, 996123.
κανά for καλά, 187.
κακὸς φίνος, 187.
καφές, δ, 300.
κάχρυ, τό, 303.
κάψα for καῦσις, 18ο.
καψάκιον, 1038.
καψούλης, 1059.
κάψω, 996128.
κεκλήκαμεν, Αpp. i. 16 a.
κέκλημαι, 996 124
as present, 1868 f.
κεκλήσομαι, 990124
κεκλίνθαι, 996 130
κεκλίσεται, 996 130-
κέκλοφα, 990135
κέκμηκα, 996126, App. i. 16.
κεκμηκαμεν, Αpp. i. 16 a.
κεκοπίακες, 798.
κέκοφα, 99017.
κέκραγα, 996138.
κέραμαι, 996 120; - & κέκρη
μαι, 29.
κάω, καίω, 20, 848, 996 129. κεκράξομαι, 996133•
κβ' (=22), 645.
κγ' (=23), 645.
κλ becomes γδ, 172.
κέ, enclitic, 1o2 6.
κεκράξω, 990134.
κεκρέμασμαι, 996 199
κέχρημαι, κέκραμαι, 295.
κέκρικαν, 786.
638
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
κέκρου (σ)μαι, 996142-
κεκρύψομαι, 996143
κεκτενισμένα, 738.
κέκτημαι, 731, 996144·
as present, 1868 f.
κεκτῆσθαι, 731.
κεκτήσομαι, 996144.
κεκτῆται, 996144
κεκτητο, 996144 •
κέκτισμαι, 738.
κεκτισμένη, 738.
κεκτισμένον, 738.
κεκυρίευσαν, 786.
κέκυψα, 996147.
κλαδισμός, 1020.
κελαινεφής, 126.
κελαινονεφής, 126.
κελεύεις + subj., Igog.
κελεύω, 846 f. ; in N, 847.
constr., 2087 f., App. vi.
16.
Κελτιβηρες, 1156.
κέν, 1700; enclitic, 1o2 e.
κέν'μα for κέντημα, 030.
κενός τινος, 1318.
& πλήρης, 114.
κενύω, constr., 1318.
κεντέω, -ίζω, 869.
030.
κεντίζω, -έω, 869.
κεντρίζω & -όω, 868.
κερήθρα, 1026.
κερί, κηρίον, 186.
περνάω, 116, 84410, 853,
906, 937, 94410,
996129.
κεροῖν οι κερών ?, 418.
κεροσέων, App. ii. 12 [3].
κερουσέων, App. ii. 12 [3].
κερω, fut. of κεράννυμι,
94410, 996128 & 129 •
κερών οι κεροῖν ?, 418.
Σκερως, nouns in, 326.
-Kec for was, in pf., 798.
κεται, 261 α.
κεφαλάδες, οἱ, 289.
κεφαλαλγής, ΙΙΙΙ.
κεφαλαλγία, 126,
κεφαλαργήσης, 187.
κεφαλαργία, 126, 187.
κεφαλᾶς, 287, 1043.
Kepaλâs, 287.
κεφάλι, κ'φάλ', 030.
κεφαλόποδα, τά, 1156.
κεφαλόπονος, 1105, 1145.
κεφαλοῦ, ἡ, 1043.
κεφάλων, 1042.
κεχάλακα, 996308 -
κεχάλασμαι, 996308 -
κέντημα becomes κέν'μα, κεχάλκευται, 736 [1].
κεντρύω & -ίζω, 868.
κεντρώννομεν, 853.
κέντρωται, 736.
κεξυσμένον, 739.
κέοιτο, 990.
κερά, κυρά, 186.
κεραννύει, 936 α.
κεράννυμι, 937,
94410,
996129*
κεραννύουσι, 936.
κεραννύω, 936 4, 996 120
κεχάρηκα, 996307 •
κεχάρημαι, 996 07.
κεχαρήσομαι, 996307.
κεχαρήσω, 996 307, 1884.
κεχάρισμαι, 996309.
κεχείρικα, 736 [1].
κεχεσμένος, 996311
κέχηνα, 996310-
κεχήνετε (imprt.), 996310-
κεχήνη, 996310-
κεχηνώς, 996 10 •
κεχόρευκα, 730.
κεχόρευμαι, 730.
•
κέχρηκα, 996 131·
κέχρημαι, 996314,
κεχρήσεται, 996314
1
·
κέ
έχρικα, 996315.
μέχριμαι, 996315
•
κεχρωσμαι, 996310
κέχυμαι, 996312-
κεράω, 937, 996120 ; -ομαι, κέχρισμαι, 996315
κέρας, 418, 419.
περασμένος, 996120 -
κερατάδες, οἱ, 289.
κερατάς, 287, 1043.
996129.
κερδαιμένος, 996 120
κερδαίσω, 990130 •
κερδανώ, 990130
κερδαίνω, 893, 990130 -
κερδήσω, 996130
κέρδητα, τά, 424.
κερδίζοντας, ως adv., 823.
κερδίζω, 990130
κερδισμένος, 996 130
κέρδος, 348, 423, 424.
κεράλης, 301.
κέχωσμαι, 996313.
κέωμαι, 990.
KH, originally for X, 12.
κή for καί, 48.
κηλύχνιον, 35.
κηνιγός for κυν-, 500.
κῆνος, 29°.
κηρήθρα, 1026.
κηρίον, κερί, 186.
κηρύπισσος, 1156.
κῆρυξ, κάρυξ, 29.
κηρύσσω & -ττω, 878 α.
κηστρίν, 1040, App. iii. 7.
Κηφᾶς, 287.
κθ, becomes χθ, 172; χτ,
174.
κι for k', before e i, 565.
'κι, from οὐκ, 1797.
-κι (τό), 1038.
κιαείς, 595, 598.
κιἄν οι κι ἂν (κὶ ἄν) for κἄν,
1716.
κανείς, 595.
κανένας, 795.
Κιανίς for Κυανίς, 35.
κίκεως (τῆς), 399.
κίκι, τό, 303, 399.
Κίκιος, 1040.
Κίκις, 1040.
Κίλας, 283.
Κιλίκισσα, 1030.
κινάρα, ἀγκιν-, 130.
Κινδιῆς, Κυνδ-, 35.
κινδυνεύω &
1853 f.
ἐκινδύνευσα,
κίνδυνο, τό, 249.
κίνδυνος, δ, 249.
compounds of, 494.
κινηθήσομαι, 1885.
κινήσομαι, 1885.
κιννάβαρι, 303, 399.
κιννάβαρις, δ, 399.
Κιντύλιος, 35.
-KI" (TÓ), 1038b.
κιονάκιον, 1038.
κίρι for κυρίῳ, 35.
κιρία for κυρία, 35.
κίρναμι, 996120-
κιρνάω, 937, 94410, 996124
κίρνημι, 996129.
κίς, 387, 388.
Luc, adv., 11o2 α.
κιτρινωπός, 1104.
κίχραμαι, 996131·
κιχράω, 996131
κίχρημι, 990131 :
κλαγγή & κλάγξ, App. iii. 12.
κλάγξ & κλαγγή, App. iii. 12.
κλαδιά, 15o d.
κλάζω, 872.
κλαήσω, 996 132
κλαιγε fur κλαίε, 860.
κλαίγω for κλαίω, 155, 860,
996182*
κλαίε, κλαίγε, 860.
κλαίει, 835.
κλαίεις, κλαῖς, 154, 835-
κλαίετε, κλαῖτε, 148.
κλαῖς for κλαίεις, 154.
κλαῖτε for κλαίετε, 148.
639
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
κλαίω & κλάω, 20°, 948,
996132, App. ii. 9.
becomes κλαίγω, 860.
κλαμένος (κλαϋμ-), 150d,
996132-
κλάννι του κλάνει, 996133 -
κλάνω, 841, 906, 996133-
κλασμένος, 996199-
Κλαύδης, 1040.
Κλαύδιος, 1040.
Κλαύδις, 1040.
κλαϋμένος (κλαμ-), 150 d,
996132-
κλαῦσε, imprt., 813 [1].
κλαυσθήσομαι, 996132
Κλαυσιάω, 1099.
κλαυσίγελως, 1156, 1157.
κλαύσομαι, 996132
κλαύσω, 996132·
κλαυτῶ, 990132
κλάφσω, 180.
་
κλάψε, τό, App. vi. 27.
κλάψω for κλαύσω, 180,
996182.
κλάω, κλαίω, 20, 848,
996132, App.
ii. 9.
κλάω, break, 841, 996133.
'
κλέβω for κλέπτω, 875,
996135.
κλες for κλαίε, 49.
Κλεοσθένου for -νους, 432 c.
κλέπτης, 283; compar., 5or.
κλέπτω, 874, 9219, 996135,
998.
intr., 1456b.
πλερονομάω, 854.
κλέφτης, 174.
κλέφτ's for κλέφτης, 030.
κλέφτω, 996136 •
κλεψά for -ψιά, 155 €.
κλέψω, 996136, 999.
κληδών, 295.
κλήζω, κλείζω, 26 μ.
κληθήσομαι, 996124
κλήθρα, σκλ-, 130.
κληρονομέω, 854, 12421
κληρονομήσαισαν, 792.
κληρονομήσουν, 777.
κλής, κλείς, 26, 28 b.
-KAĤC, nouns in, 330, 431.
accus. -κλῆν, App. iii. 6.
κλησάρχης, 150, 1152.
Κλησθένης for Κλει-, 29.
κλησιάζομαι, 996 74.
κλησιαστῶ, 99674
κλησιάρχης, 1152.
πλήτορας, δ, ιοι7.
κλήτωρ, 1017.
κλήω, 996134.
κλιμένος, 996190 -
•
-κοι, plpf. subj., 803.
κοιλάδαν (τήν), App. iii. 6α.
κοιλαίνω, 893.
κοιλαρᾶς, δ, 1043.
κοιλᾶς, 6, 1043.
κοιλιόδουλος, 1107.
κοιμάσαι, 773.
κοιμάω & ίζω, 868; -ώμαι
for καθεύδω, 99695;
ἐκοιμήθην,
1853 f.
inceptive,
κοιμηθήσομαι, 1885.
κοιμηθῆτε, imprt., 814.
κοιμήσομαι, 1885.
κοιμήσου, 814.
-KOIMI, plpf. subj., 803.
κοιμίζω & -άω, 868.
κοιμοῦ for -μῶ, 85o (twico).
κοιμούμαι, 9969; becomes
κ' μοῦμ', 030.
κοινεῖ for κοινῇ, 26.
κοινῇ, 1382.
·
κοινωνέω τινός, 1298.
-κoιc, plpf. subj., 803.
κοιτάζω & σσω, 993.
κοιτάμενος, 21II.
κοιτάσσω & -άζω, 993.
κοίτη, 993.
κοίτομαι, 993.
κοιτών, 993.
œ.
-κλέης, κλῆς, nouns in, κλίνω, 896, 996188 ; in N, κοιτῶναν (τόν), App. iii. 6 a.
431.
κλεῖ του κλείει, 148.
κλεῖδα (τήν), 4334
κλείσαν τήν), App. iii. 6 f.
κλεῖδας (τάς), 4338
κλειδᾶς, δ, 287.
κλειδί & -ίον, τό, 4333·
κλείει, κλεί, 148.
κλείεις, πλεῖς, 148, 702.
κλειειτύν, 30.
κλείζω, κλήζω, 26.
κλεῖν (τήν), 4338·
Κλεινίας, 283.
κλείνω [οι κλείω, 406.
πλείς, ή, 4334-
τάς, 4338
& κλής, 26, 28 1.
κλεῖς του κλείεις, 148, 702.
κλεισε, imprt., 813.
κλείσιμο", 1022.
κλεισμένος, 996 14
κλειστός, 1052.
κλείω, τοι, 846 f.,
996 134 -
intrans., 1456%.
κλεμμένος, 996135-
Κλεόβιος, 1040.
Κλέοβις, 1040.
Κλεομήνης, 262 0.
902.
intr., 1456.
κληρουχίας, 37.
κλοπή, 1023.
κλοπιμαίος, 1ο56.
κλόπιμος, 1055.
κλώθω, 8653.
κλωθωγυρίζω, 1157.
κλών & κλῶνος, δ, 338.
κλωνάρι, 10380
κλώνοις for κλωσί, 346.
κλώνους for κλῶνας, 346.
Κλωπάς, 287.
κλωσοῦ, ἡ, 1044.
κ' μου μ' του κοιμούμαι, 030.
ανάπτω, 875.
b.
κναφεύς, 59 0.
κνάω, κνύω & κνύζω, 868.
κνησείειν, 1999 [1].
κνηστικῶς ἔχειν, 1o99 [r].
Κνίφων, 590.
κνίψ, σκνίψ, 13o.
857, κ'νοῦτ᾽ for κουνούπι, 030.
κνυζάομαι, 1001.
κνύζω & -ύω, 868.
κνύω & -ύζω, 868.
κόβγω fur κύπτω, 996 97.
κύβω, 8651,875, 990137 &
Κοέρανος, 19" [x].
208.
κόκκαλο, τό, 249.
κόκκαλος, δ, 2495.
κοκκινογένει (του), 301.
κοκκινογένεις, δ, 301.
κοκκινογένης, δ, ι1ο7.
κοκκινόχωμα, 1145.
κολ- οι πολ-, in composi-
tion, 1104.
Κολασσαί, 126.
κολλάω & -έω, 854.
κόλλιπις for κόλποις, 131.
κολοκυθᾶς, ὁ, 287.
κολοκύθι, τό, 194.
Κολοσσαί, 126.
κόλποις, κόλλιπις, Ι3Ι.
κόλπις for -ποις (twice), 44.
κόλπος, κόρφος, 187.
κολυμβήθρα, το26.
Κολωνήθεν, 20.
κύμαρος, ἡ & 5, 245.
κομβώνεις, 853.
κομέω, in N, 1104.
κομητόπουλοι, οἱ, 1041.
Κομητώ, ή, 414.
κομίζεσαι, 773.
κόμιταν (τόν), Αpp. iii. 6 e.
κομμένος, 196 197
κόμμεως (του), 399.
κόμμι, 399.
640
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
κόμμιδος (του), 399.
κομμιδώδης, 399.
κομμιώδης, 399.
κομοιδία (κωμωδία), 263.
κομπάζω & -έω, 868.
κομπέω & -άζω, 868.
κόνα for εἰκόνα, ἡ, 134 e.
κόνις, σκόνη, 130.
κονίω, 701.
Κόννιος, 1040.
Κόννις, 1040.
κοντά for πλησίον, 1666.
ΣΚΟΝΤΑ, in numerals, 639;
syncopated to -ντα, ib.
κοντὰ εἰς for παρά, 1491.
κονταρέαν (τήν), 1027.
κοντάριν, τό, 331, App. iii. 7.
κόντες, δ, 300.
κοντεύω, 7οι.
κοντογένης, 298.
κοντογόνατος, 1149.
κοντολαίμης, 1149.
κοντομύτης, 298.
κοντούλης, 1059.
κοντοχέρης, 298.
κοντόχοντρος, 1156.
κοντύτερος, 496.
κοπάζειν τινά, 1457.
κοπήσομαι, 99617 -
κοπιάζω, 853°, 868.
κοπιάσ(ε)τε, 949.
κόρυν (τήν), 358.
κορυφαῖον, 506 [2].
κορυφαιότατον, 506 [2].
κορυφή, κορφή, 1362.
κορφή, κορυφή, 1362.
κόρφος, κόλπος, 187.
κορῶ, fut. of κορέννυμι, 94415
Κορωναιικός, 48.
κορωνίς, 159 a.
κρασοῦ for -σιοῦ (τοῦ), 155 e.
κράτειε for -τει, 857.
κρατειέσαι, 858.
κρατειέσθε, 858.
κρατειέται, 858.
κρατέω, 857, 869.
τινός & τινά, 1297.
+ part., 2132 f.
as pf., 1842.
-κός, ethnic, 10316, το75 f. κρατήρ, 375 ; κρητήρ, 29b.
κοσκινάς, δ, 287.
κοσκινισμένου, 736.
κοσκινοῦ, ἡ, 1044.
κοσμημένον, 736.
κουβάριν, τό, App. iii. 7.
κούκι, τό, 303.
κούμαρος, δ, 245.
κούμη, κύμη, 35°.
Κουμής, 190.
κουμοῦ for κοιμοῦ, 850.
κουνούπι, κ'νοῦπ', 030.
κουράζω, 1469 ; wid., ib.
κουρεύω for κείρω, 995 120 ;
-ομαι, 1474.
κούρη, κύρη, App. ii. 14 B.
κούρος, App. ii. 1o.
κουρούλης, 301.
κουρούλλιος, 430.
κουρσεύοντας, as adv., 823.
Κουρτίκης, 298, 1040 ca.
Κουρτίκιος, 1040 0.
κοπιάω & -άζω, 853°, 868.
κόππα, goph, 2, II.
Κούρτις, 298.
κουτεντές, δ, 300.
κουτοπόνηρος, 1156.
εἰς
κουτσός, 205.
κόπτω, 874, 921, 996137.
for τέμνω, 996208 ;
ἀξίνας, 1551.
κύρα, κόρη, App. ii. 14 B.
κόρακα (ω), Αpp. iii. 15.
κόρακας, δ, 296.30, App. iii.
12 b.
κοράκοι, οἱ, 296, 346.
κοράκου for κόρακος, 296.
κοράσι(ο), τό, 1038.
κορβανά (τύν), App. iii. 22 c.
κορβανᾶς, δ, 287.
κορδαλλός, κορυδαλλός, 1362.
κορέννυμι & κορέω, 937,
94415
B.
κόρδα (κύρη), App. ii. 14 1.
κύρζα for καρδία, 84.
κορήσουσι, 9441.
Κόρθο, ή, 292.
κόρι, τύ, 303.
Κόρινθος (τῆς), 292.
κορίτσι, τό, 1040 0 0.
αόρος, App. ii. 1Ο.
κύρρα, κόρη, App. ii. 14 B.
Κορτύνιος, 590.
κορυδαλλός, σκορδ-, 130.
κορυζας, δ, 287, 1042.
κουκούρια, 187.
κούφιος, 1073.
κούφος, in cuprt., 492.
κουφότερος & σοφώτερος,
App. ii. 5.
κόφτω, 875, 996137.
κοχλάκιον, 108
κύχλας, 1038.
κοχλία (του), 277.
κοχλίας, 283.
κόψ' for κόψη, 219.
κραββάτιον, τό, 126.
κραβάτριος, 59 .
κραγείν, App. i. 15 α.
κράζω, 872, 917,924, 996138,
in N, 873, 1096.
κραθήσομαι, 996120 -
κραίνω οι κρένω for κρίνω,
902.
κρανέεσθαι, 1478.
κράνος, 423.
κράξω, 990138.
κρασά (for -σιά), τά, 155 e.
κρασάς, δ, 287, 1044.
κρασοπιωτής, 1153.
-κράτης (δ), its influence,
298.
κράτησο, imprt., 813.
κρατίζω, 869, 1996.
Κρατίνος, 654.
κράτιστος, 5041·
κράτος, τό, 423.
κραυγάζω, 990138 -
κρέα, κρέαα, 148.
κρέας, 418, 421; in N,421; in
compos. (κρεο-, κρεω),
1136.
κρεάς for κρέας, 421.
κρέατα, τά, 431.
κρεατάκι", 1038.
Κρεββατάδων (των), 29o.
κρεββάτι, 126.
κρείσσον, 506 [1], 530.
κρεισσόνως, 520.
κρεισσότερον, 506 [1].
κρεισσότερος, 506.
κρείσσων, Αp. ii. 9.
κρείττων, κρεῖττον,
App. ii. 9.
5041
κρέκα & κρέξ, ή, App. iii. 12.
κρεμάγω, 996 10.
κρεμάζω, 871, 94411, 996140.
κρεμάθρα, 10260
κρέμαμαι, 7741, 94411,
996139, 1004.
κρεμάννυμι, 871, 937 & [1],
94411, 9961.10
κρεμαννύουσι”, 936 α.
κρεμαννύω, 996 1
κρεμασμένος, 736, 996139 &
1.10 ·
κρεμαστός, 1052.
κρεμαστώ, 996 19.
κρεμάω, 937, 871, 996140 -
fut. of κρεμάννυμι, 94411,
996140 ·
κρεμήσομαι, 996199-
κρεμνάω, 937 & [1], 94411,
9961.40 •
κρέμομαι, 94411, 9747,
996139, 1006.
κρέμωμαι, subj., 996199-
κρένω οι κραίνω for κρίνω,
902.
κρεο- & κρεω, 1136.
641
Tt
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
κρεοῖν στ κρεών ?, 418.
κρεοκοπέω, 1136.
κρεοφάγος, 1136.
κρύπτεται, 875 [1].
κρύπτω, 886, 996113.
τινά τι, 1279 f.
-
κρές & κρέκα, ή, App. iii. 12. κρύφα τινός, 1314 f. ?
9.
9.
κρέσων, App. ii.
κρέτων, App. ii.
κρεω & κρεο-, 1136.
κρεών οι κρεοῖν ?, 418.
κρημνός, γκρεμ-, 130.
Κρής, 36ο.
Κρηταεύς, 47.
Κρηταιεύς, 47.
Κρητεί, 34
κρητήρ, κρατήρ, 29.
Κρητί, 34.
Κρητικός, 1077.
κριγιός for κριός, 131.
κρικέλι", App. iii. 9 c.
κρυφὰ τοῦ δεῖνα, 1315;
ἀπό, ib.
κρυφθήσομαι, 996149-
κρύφτω, 996143.
ΚΣ or ao, originally for ξ, 12.
a,
= ξ, 23, 180, 337 α, 884 b.
Κτ becomes χτ, 174, 885.
becomes φτ, 174.
from γτ οι χτ, 172.
κτάομαι, 731, 9964; κέ-
κτημαι, as pres., 1868 f.
becomes κτάω, 996144,
10001.
κτεινύω, 996145
κρίμαν, τό, 331, App. iii. κτείνω, 924, 996 145
9 a.
κριμένος, 996141 •
κρίνατε, 813.
κρινε, 813.
κρίνετε, 813.
κτενᾶς, ὁ, 287, 1044.
κτένι, 1038.
κτενίζω, & mid. 1469.
κτένιν, τό, 302.
κτέννω, 29, App. ii. 9, 14 Β.
κρίννω, 29, App. ii. 9 & 14. B. κτένω, κτείνω, App. ii. 14 Β.
κρίνον, τό, 245.
κρίνον, imprt., 813.
κρίνος, δ, 245.
κρίνω, App. ii. 9, 14 Β ; 892,
896, 899, 902, 996 1.
τινά τι, 12841.; τινά
τινος, 1292.
κριλ, 26, α.
κτενῶ, 996145.
κτήνω, κτείνω, App. ii. 14 Β.
κτημα, 368.
κτημάτου (τοῦ), 369.
κτίζω, 731, 868; causative,
1460b.
κτίννυμι, 9433, 996145-
κτιστής, 1015, 1017.
κτυπάω τον τύπτω, 996283.
κυαμοτρώξ, 1153.
κριτής, 283, 1016, App. i. κυδωνάτου, 1052.
κριός, κριγιός, 131.
κρίση, ή, 1020.
κρίσις, 395.
15-
κριτήριο", 1035.
Κροΐσος, 19" [1].
κροκοδίλων, 34.
Κυδαθηνεύς, 49.
κυδωνίτζια, τά, 1040 σ.
Κυζικηνός, το78.
κυκλέω & -όω, 852.
κρύκη & κρύξ, ή, App. iii. 12. κυκλύω & -έω, 852.
κρομμυδάς, 287.
κρομμυδίτσιν, 1040 0 0.
κρύς & κρόκη, ή, App. iii. 1 2.
προτοθόρυβος, 1156.
κρούγω, κρούω, 155, 860,
996142.
κρουσμένος, 996112
κύκλῳ, 1634; for περί, 1491.
κύκλωθεν, 1513.
κύκλων for ov (τόν), 267 α.
κυκλώνει, 853.
κυλάω, - ί(()ω, 871.
κυλεῖ for κυλίει, 702, 851.
κυλεῖν for κυλίειν, 148.
κυλεῖς for κυλίεις, 859.
κρούω, 846 f., 860, 996 142. κυλεῖτε for κυλίετε, 859.
intr., 1456b.
κρύβγω, 861, 996143.
κρύβεται, 875 [1].
κρυβήσομαι, 996 με
113
κρύβω, 8651, 875, 996143-
κρύβεσθαι, 875 [1].
κρυμμένος, 996 143-
κρυύεις, σκρυόεις, App. ii.
[3].
κρύπτεσθαι, 875 [1].
κυλίει, κυλεῖ, 702.
κυλίειν, κυλεῖν, 148.
κυλιέσαι, 858.
κυλιέστε, 859.
κυλιέται, 858.
κυλίζω & -ίω, 871.
κυλιού, 859.
12 κυλιοῦμαι, 859.
κυλιούμεν, 859.
κυλιούμεστα, 859.
|
κυλίον, 859, 859.
κυλιούνται, 859.
κυλίω, 857, 859, 871.
κυλοῦν for κυλίουν, 859.
κυλῶ for κυλίω, 859, 871.
κῦμα, τό, 368.
κυματίζω & -όω, 868.
κυματόω & -ίζω, 868.
Κύμη, Κούμη, 35°.
κυμητήριον, 36.
κυμοδώκη, 267.
Κυνδιῆς for Κινδιής, 35.
κυνήγιν, App. iii. 9 α.
Κυνθυκῷ for Κυνθικῷ, 35.
Κυντήλιος, 37.
κύον (ω), 4339.
κυπάρισσος, ἡ & δ, 245, 292.
Κύπρο, ή, 292.
κυπτάζω & κύπτω, 868.
κύπτω, 868, 996 147.
κῦρ (6) = 4 Mr, 298.
κυρά, 35, 186, 290.
καρά, 350.
Κυρᾶδος (του), 288.
κυράτσα, ή, 1040 Β 6.
κύρης from κύρις, 298.
κυριακή, 1865
Κυριακούλης, 159.
κυριεύονταιν for -ται, Αγ.
iii. 20 d.
κυριεύουν, 777.
Κυρινάλιος, 430.
Κυρίνης, 37.
κύριος, κύρις, κύρης, 298.
Kúpιos oîde, 970".
κύρις, δ, 298, 304.
κυρίτσης, 1040 0.
Κυριακός, 155 /.
κυρούλης, 1059.
κυρταίνω, 900.
κυσίν (τοῖς), 4339·
κυτάζω, 870.
κυτάω & -άζω 870.
κύων, δ, 4339·
κ' φάλ' for κεφάλι, 030.
KX, becomes XX, 171.
κωλαγρέται, 590.
κωλακρέται, 59 0.
κωλον, τό, 249.
κώλος, ό, 249.
κωλυθήσομαι, 1885.
κωλύσομαι, 1885.
κωλύω, 7οι.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
κωμάρχης, 1152.
κωμῳδιδάσκαλος, 126.
κωμῳδοδιδάσκαλος, 126.
Κωνσταντής, 287.
Κωνσταντίς, 287.
B.
χώρα, κύρη, Αpp. ii. 14 Β.
642
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
Κώς, Στάν-Κιοϊ, 1554.
κὣς for cos. (i. e. consulibus),
2144b.
Κωσταντής for Κωνσταν-
τίνος, 287.
Κωσταντινίδης, 1029.
Κωσταντινόπολη, ἡ, 1115.
Κωστῆδες, οἱ, 289.
Κωστής, from Κωσταντής,
287.
κωφάω, -έω & -όω, 852.
Λ, λ, origin of, 2.
forms of, 2, 5 [2], 9.
sound of, 9, 66 f.; three-
fold, 67.
a liquid, 22.
a semivowel, 23, 25 [1]
aspirated, 72.
makes position, 66.
becomes p, 187.
λ' (= 30), 645.
λᾶ for λάβδα, τό, gr.
Λαατούς, 30.
λαβαίνω, 996149•
λαβάνω, 501, 996149 -
λάβδα, τό, lamed, 2, gf., g;
τὸ & ἡ
gd, 193.
λaßé, 912 f., 996119 ·
λάβε, 996149.
λαβείν, 990149.
λάβον for λάβε, 122, 996110.
λαβόντα, as adv., 823.
λάβου, 777.
λάβρακας, 6, 1039.
λαβράκιον, 1038.
λάβραξ, 1038.
λάβω, 996149.
λαβωμένος, 996140.
λαβών, 990149:
λαιμόπονος, 11ο5.
λαμπατέω, 126.
λακτοπατέω, 126.
Λάκωνες, in Ν Τζάκωνες,
823b
λάλει for -λει, 857.
λαλέω, 857.
+ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
λάλος, 465 ; emprt., 501.
λαλούμενα, τά, 2112.
λαμβάνουσιν, ὅταν -, 779.
λαμβάνω, 734, 996110, λαβέ,
912 ff.; λáße, 996119·
λάβε,
becomes λαβάνω, λα-
-
βαίνω, 901.
+ accus., 1242.
+ infin., 2094 ff.
. λαμβάνω ὑπὸ τὴν ὄψιν,
'with,' 2161.
λαβώνω, 990140 •
λαγαρισμένου, 736.
λάγνος, 430; in cmprt., 501.
λαγός του -ώς, 301, 327.
λαγουδόκαρδος, 1149.
λαγχάνω, 734, 901, 996 113.
996118.
becomes λαχάνω, λα-
χαίνω, 901.
+ accus., 1242.
λαγώς, becomes -ύς, 301.
λαδόξιδο", 1156.
Λαερτίου, Λαρτίου, 1561.
λαβαίνω ?, 990 100
λαθεμένος, 990160
λαθεύω, 996 100
λαθέψω, 996 100.
λάθος, 424.
λάθρα, λάθρη, 29.
•
•
with gen., 1314.
1693.
λά(μ)βδα, 193 ; see λάβδα.
λάμνα, lamina, 1365.
λαμπάδα, ἡ, 364.
λαμπαδηφόρος, 1106.
λαμπάνω, 996119.
λαμπάς, 364.
λαμπρά, τά (= πυρά), 43317·
λαμπρία, τά, 43317.
λαμπρότης, 360.
λαμπροχριστόγεννα, 1156.
λαμπερώτατος, 491.
λα(μ)ψάνη, 193.
λάμπω, 8651
λανθανόντως, 2125 f.
λανθάνω, 996150 ; -ομαι, ib.
+ part., 2113, 2120.
+ infin., 2120.
changed to part., 2125.
changed to adverb, 2125.
Λαοδάμνα, 38.
λαός, δ & τό, 249.
Λαοσθένης, Λασθ-, 150 α.
Λαρισαίων, 19" [1].
λάρος, in N γλάρος, 131.
Λαρτίου for Λαερτίου, 1561.
λαρυγγᾶς, ὁ, 287.
λάρυξ του λάρυγξ, 191.
Λασθένης, Λαοσθ-, 150 α.
Λατοί (τῇ), 414.
λατρεύω (intr.), 1456.
Λατῷ (τῇ), 414.
λάφι, ἐλάφιον, 135.
λαχαιμένος, 996 1.48
λαχαίνω, 501, 990148-
λαχανᾶς, δ, 287.
λαχανίτσιν, τό, 1040 0 0.
λαχάνω, 901, 990148
λαψάνη, 193.
λάχω, 996148.
•
λ'βάδ' for λιβάδι, 030.
λέ, λέ(γ)ει, 154.
λεγάμενος, 211.
λέγει, λέει, λέ, 154.
λέγει, τό, App. vi. 26, 27.
λέγεις, λέεις, λές, 154.
λέγιτι for λέγετε, 030.
λέγοι for λέγῃ, 44·
λέγοισαν, 792.
λέγονσι, App. ii. 8.
λέγοντα, as adv., 823 ; adv.,
ib.
λέγοντες (τούς), 332.
λέγουσι for -οντι, 181; for
1.
γονσι, App. ii. 8.
Aéya, 'gather,' 996151, 1;
in N, 1104.
2. λéyw, ‘say,' 99685 & 151' 2
in N also λέω λῶ, 152,
863.
replaces φημί, 937;
ەpw, 99672.
as fut., App. iv. 4.
constr., 2078, 2085 f.,
2087 f. ; ὁ λέγων, 1207.
+ infin., 2086b f.
+iva, 2088, App. vi.
12 Bα, 16.
λέγω τινά τι, 1284 f.
λέγω εὖ οι κακῶς τινα, 1258.
λέγω περί τινος, 1642.
λέγω πρός τινα, 1655.
λέγω προς χάριν, 1657 €.
λέγω ὑπὲρ τοῦ βελτίστου,
1679.
λέγεσθαι παρά τινος, 1628.
λέγεσθαι παρά τινι, 1633.
λέει, λέ, λέγει, 154, 155.
λέεις, λές, λέγεις, 154, 863.
λεϊ for λύει, 148.
Λείναιος, -ναις, 299.
λειοτρίβεται, 1165.
λειοτριβημένα, 736.
λείπω, 864, 8651, 917, 924,
996152; -oμaι + part.,
2132 f.
λεῖς for λύεις, 148, 702.
λειστής, ληστής, 265, 28.
λειτουργέω, λητ-, 28b;
-ομαι, 1474.
λειχήν, δ, 249.
λειχῆνα, ἡ, 249.
λειχούδης, δ, 298.
λείψανον, τό, 2.49.
λείψανος, δ, 249.
λειώνεται, 853.
Λειωντίδος, Λεωντ-, 20.
λειώνω, 996 270
λέλαθα, 996 το
·
λελαθήσεται, 996100-
λέλαχα, 996 1.43.
λελάχαται, 996148
643
Tt 2
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
•
λέλεγμαι, 996151, 19
λελείψομαι, 996 152
λελέξομαι, 9961513 2·
λέλεχα, 9901511 2·
λέληθα, 996100-
λεληθότως, 2125 f.
λελήσεται, 996 150 -
λέλησμαι, 996 100
λελογχα, 996148 ·
λέλοιπα, 924, 996152
λελοιπεία, 265.
λέλου (σ)μαι, 996108 -
Λεναίου, 262 α.
Λέντλος, Lentulus, 1361.
λεξιθήρας, 1154.
λεξιθηρέω, 1108, 1154.
λεξιθηρία, 1154.
Λεοντίνος, 1ο80.
λεοντίς, 267.
λεοντοκεφαλή, 1144.
λεπτόγεως, 1147.
λεπτοκοπημένην, 736.
λεπτοκοπημένος, 740.
λεπτολογέομαι, 1486.
λεπτός, in emprt., 492, 493.
λές, λέγεις, 154, 863.
Λεστίτζι, 1040 0 0.
λευκέρυθρος, 1156, 1157.
λευκομέλας, 1156.
λευκοπόρφυρος, 1156.
λευκοπυρρος, 1156.
λεύκος for λευκός, 84.
λευτερία, ἐλευθερία, 135,
1050º.
λευτερώνω, 723.
— constr., 1317.
λεχοῦσ(σ)α, ἡ, 414, 1067.
λεχώ, 411, 41.
Λεψινα for 'Ελευσίνα, 135,
180b
λέω & λ@ for λέγω, 152, 155°,
863, 996151› 2.
Λεωνᾶς, 287.
Λεωνίδας, 283.
becomes Λεωνας, 287.
Λεωντίδος, Λειων-, 201
λεωντίς, 267.
λεως, 336.
λήγω, with part., 2126 f.
λήμης for λύμης, 35.
λήμψομαι, 996 149·
Λήναιος, -ναις, 299.
λήξομαι, 996 148·
ληπά for λοιπά, 44.
Λήσβιος for Λέσβιος, 26 b.
2
λησμονῶ, with gen., 1295.
λήσομαι, 996 πο
ληστής, λειστής, 26, 28 1,
283b.
λήσω, 996100 -
Λητοί, αἱ, 413.
λῃτουργεῖν, λειτ-, 281.
Λητώ, 411.
ληχούνα, 414.
ληψοδοσία, 1156.
λήψομαι, 996149 -
λογογράφος, 1106.
λογοποιός, 11501·
Ι. λόγος, τὰ λόγια, 4331 0.
2. λόγος, μετὰ λόγου, 1605 α;
παρὰ λόγον,
1626;
(τοῦ) λόγου χάριν, 1278.
-λι-, pron. as Ital. gl, t, λογοῦμαι, -ίζομαι, 870.
1870.
λιάζω for ἡλ-, 723.
λόγους for λόγος, 030.
λόγ's for λόγους, 030.
λίαν, 515 ;
& λiny, 29b.
λοιμός & λιμός, 47.
as superl., 490.
λοιμῷ for λι-, 44.
λιβάδι, λ'βάδ', 030.
Λίβιος, 51.
λιβύνοτος, 1156.
λίγος του ὀλίγος, 134 α.
λιγούτσικος, 1040.
λίην, λίαν, 295.
λιθοβόλος, 11501
λιμέναν (τόν), Αpp. iii. 6 d.
λιμένοις τοῖς), 346.
λιμήν, 375.
λιμικήν for λοι-, 44.
λιμός & λοιμός, 47.
-λιμπάνω, 996152
λιοντάρ' for -άρι, 219.
λιπαίνω, 893.
.
λιπόν for λιπών, 261, 44.
λιποπυρία, 126.
λιποτακτέω, 1154.
λιποτάκτης, 1154.
λιποταξία, 116, 1156.
λιπυρία, 126.
λες, δ, 388.
λισάρι for λιθάρι, 184.
λιτανίκιον, 1040 0.
λιτανικόν, 1040 0.
λιτουργία, 385.
-λίω- (in verbs assimilated
to -λω, 859.
-λλ-, in syllabication, 92.
reduced to -λ-, 891.
-λλω, leads to -λνω, -ρνω,
904.
becomes -evw, 904.
-AM- in N, 187b.
-AN-, in N, 1876.
-λνω from -λλω, 904, 906.
λόγ' for λόγου, 030.
λογαριασμός, 155 1.
λογάριν, τό, App. iii. 7.
λογῆς, μιας
591".
λόγια, τά, 43318 0.
λογιάζω, 868.
λογιεῖται, 889.
λογίζομαι, 100Ι,
· & λογοῦμαι, 870.
λογίσεται, 889.
λογισμός, 1020.
λογιῶν, πολλῶν —,591 &[2].
λοιπείς for -ποις, 44.
λοιπόν, τὸ —, 1278.
λοϊσμός for λογισμός, 1020.
-λóc, adj., 1057 f.
λοῦγε for λούε, 890.
λούγει for λούει, 155.
λούγω for λούω, 155, 860,
863, 996153; mid., 1469.
λονε, λούγε, 890.
λούεσθαι, 996158.& λου-
σθαι, 153.
λούεται, λοῦται, 153, 996153-
λούετε, λοῦτε, 153.
Λουκᾶς, 287.
Λούκις, 298.
Λουκρήτις, 298.
λοῦμαι, 996153 •
λοῦμεν, λοῦτε, etc., 996 13.
λούομαι, 996153, 1467.
λούουσι, λοῦσι, 148.
λουρί, 1041.
153,
λοῦσι, λούουσι, 148.
λούσιμο", 1022.
λοῦσθαι, λούεσθαι,
996153.
λουσμένος, 996 153.
λουστῶ, 996151-
λοῦται, λούεται, 996153
λοῦτε, λούετε, 153.
λουτρόν, τό, Αpp. iii. 25.
λουτρός, δ, App. iii. 25.
λουτρουγοῦμαι, 1474.
λoúw, 996158; mid. 1467.
in Ν 1ο λούγω, 155,
860, 863.
λοχαγός, IIII.
λύεαι, λύῃ, 762.
λύει, λεῖ, 148.
λύεις, λεῖς, 148, 702.
λύεσαι, λύεαι, 762.
λύῃ, from λύεαι, 762.
λύῃς, 29.
λύθητι του λύθηθι, 182 b.
λυθοῦν, 777.
Λύκηος, 38.
Λύκης for Λύκις, 298.
Λύκιος, Λύκις, Λύκης, 298.
λύκο, λύκοιο, λύκου, λύκω,
App. ii. 14 A.
644
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
λυμαίνω, 1003; -ομαι, 1ΟΟΙ.
λυμενομένους, 49.
λυμένος, 126.
λύνω, 906.
λύξ for λύγξ, 191.
λυπά for λοιπά, τά, 36.
λυπέομαι, becomes -άομαι,
854.
+ part., 2128.
+ ὅτι (διότι), οι εἶ, 2129f.
ἐπί τι, 15834·
λυπηθήσομαι, 1885.
λυπήσομαι, 1885.
λυπήσου, 801
λυπών for λιπών, 35.
λύρα, ή, 1038.
λυρί, τό, 1038.
1. µá, ‘by,' 1745 ff.
proclitic, 97 e.
use of, 1260 ff.; où
126ο ; καὶ -, 126ο ff.
vai
+ accus., 1260 ff.
omitted, 1262, 1746 f.
replaced by ζάω, 1746.
μά, ma, but, 1736, 1982.
-ΜΑ (τό), 348, 368 f., 1023 1.
survives in N, 348, 369;
increased, 369, 1155.
leads to -μον (τό), 370.
has gen. -μάτου, 369.
for -σις (ή), 1021, 1024,
1155.
for infin., 2063, 2072.
μάγερας, δ, 296.
λύσαις for λύσαν (τ)ς, 29, μαγέροι, οἱ, 294, 296.
Λυσανίας, 19.
App. ii. 9.
Λυσανίας, 283.
λύσας, App. ii. 9.
λυσάστω for -σθω, 177.
λύσει οι λύσῃ, τό, App. vi.
b,
26, 27.
Λυσικλήν, 330, 432 U, App.
iii. 6.
Λυσίονι, 267.
λυσιτελέω, 1116.
Λυσίωνι, 267.
λυσσύγερος, 338.
λύσου, 777.
λυτροῦσαι, 773.
λυώνω, 996270 -
λύω, 155', 701, 857.
becomes λυ, 155.
constr., 1316 f.
λύω, 155 c.
λῶ, λέω, λέγω, 152, 155°,
863, 996151, 2-
-λω (in verbs assimilated
to -λiw, 859º.
λωβάομαι, 1001.
λῶιον, λώον, 20.
λωίτερος, 506.
λῶον, λῶιον, 20.
λῷον, 5041·
λεύτερος, 506.
λφων, λῷον, 5041.
M, M, origin of, 2.
forms of, 2, 9.
a semivowel, 23b.
sound of, 9, 66.
makes position, 66.
affects precoding mutes,
175 f.
M, yubol for Μακρὰ συλ-
λαβή, App. ii. 16 [3].
µ' (= 40), 645.
μαδάρα, ή, 1049.
μαδάω & -έω, 854.
μαζεύω, ποι.
Μάης for Μάϊς, Μάϊος, 298.
μαθαίνω, 90, 990150
μαθάνω, 901, 990155
μάθετε, ἵνα —, 779:
μάθημα, τό, 348, 368.
μαθημένος, 996155.
μαθησομαι, 996105
μαθητάδες, οἱ, 2go.
μαθητεύειν τινά, 1457.
μαθητής, 283.
μαθῆτρα, ἡ, ΙΟΙ7.
Μαθθαιός, 125, 155 €, 171.
μάθος, τό, App. iii. 12.
μαθών, τί —, 2044 f.
-Mal, pers. ending, 7601 ff.
μαϊμοῦ, ἡ, 414.
μαίνω, 996154 ; -ομαι, 92124
1004.
Μάϊος, Μάϊς, Μάης, 298.
| μαιοῦσθε, ὅταν -, 850b.
Máis for Maïos, 298.
μακάρι να, 1906.
μακαρίζω, constr., 1332 f.
Μακεδόνες (τούς), 332.
Μακεδώνος, 26, α.
μακος, μῆκος, 294.
μακρά, adv., 518.
Μακρά (προσωδία), App. ii.
16 & [3].
Μακρά φωνήεντα, 17 11.
μακράν, 1490.
μακρολαίμης, 1109).
μακρομάλλης, 1109.
μακρύς, in cuprt., 492;
μακρῷ κρεῖττον, 1384.
μάκρος, τό, 424; (τ)
?
length, 1305.
μακρουλός, 1059.
μακρόχειρ, 1147.
μακροχέρης, 1109.
μακρυγένης, 110g.
μακρυλαίμης, 1109.
μακρυμάλλης, 1109.
μακρύς, 402, 496.
in compounds, 1109.
μακρύτερος, 496.
μακρυχέρης, 1109.
μάλα, 519.
μάλα γε, 2059; καὶ —, ib.
μαλάσσω, 880.
Μαλθακίο, 26, α.
μάλιστα, 519.
in superl., 488, 509, 515.
'yes,' 2060.
μάλλιος, 506.
μᾶλλον, App. ii. 9; 488, 506,
509, 513.
in superl., 488, 509, 515;
in N, 511 f.
repl. by πλέον, 511.
μᾶλλον μᾶλλον, 513.
μάμις for -μης, 37.
μαμμωνας, 287.
μάν, μήν, 29.
μάνα μου νά, 1906.
μανάκιον, τό, 1038.
Μανασσής, 287.
μάνδαλος, 57.
Μανδηλάδων (των), 290.
μανδραγόρα (του), 277.
μανήσομαι, 996154 -
μανθάνω, 901, 9961. ; leads
to μαθάνω δ -θαίνω,
901; replaces πυνθά
νομαι, 996231
as pf., 1842.
constr., 2133 f., 2137 :
τί μαθών, 2044 F.
+ infin., 2090.
μανιάκιον, 1038.
μανίζω, 996154
•
τινός, 1336.
μανισμένος, 996 154
μανοῦμαι, 996 104
1511
μαντείειον, 30 (twice).
μαντήα, 38.
Μαντίας, 283.
μάντις, 395.
Μαραθώ, ἡ, 414.
μαραθῶ for μαρανθώ, 99610-
Μαραθώνι, 434.
μαραίνω, 996150.
μαραμμένος, 737, 996100-
μαργαρίτες for -ai, 267.
Μάρης, 1040.
in | Μαρής, from Μαρίνος, 287.
Μαριγώ, ή, 414.
Μαρίκα, ή, 1040 0 α.
Μαρινάκης, δ, 1040 Β α.
645
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
Μαρίνος, Μαρῆς, 287.
Μαριό, τό, 414.
Μάριος, Μαρής, 287, 1040.
Mapís, 287b.
Μάρις, 1040.
μαρμάρωται, 736.
Μαρσύας, 283.
μάρτηρος for μάρτυρος, 35.
μαρτηρῶ for -τυρῶ, 35.
μαρτήρω for τύρων, 35.
μαρτήρων for -τύρω, 35.
Μαρτιάλης, 301.
Μαρτινάκης, 1040 Β α.
μάρτυρ & -ρος, App. iii. 12.
μάρτυρας, δ, 296, 43310-
μαρτυράω, 996107-
μαρτυρέω, 1861, 996 157;
-ομαι, ib.
μαρτυρηθήσομαι, 1885.
μαρτυρημένος, 99617 -
μαρτυρήσομαι, 1885.
μαρτυριν, 302, 331, 1040,
App. iii. 7.
μαρτύροι, οἱ, 296, 346.
μαρτύρομαι, 996 107, 1001,
μάρτυρος, δ, App. iii. 12.
μαρτύρου (του), 296.
μάρτυς, 43310
μάρτυσι (τοῖς, ταῖς), 43310·
μᾶς or μας, 532 €, 538.
*
tomoclitic, 97 6, 102 α.
for ἡμῶν, 534, 538.
as possess. pron., 552.
becomes μασε, 536.
μασάομαι, 1001.
becomes -άω, 10001·
μασάω, 854, 857?, 10001,
1003.
becomes -έω, 854, 10001·
μασε fur μας, 208, 536, 725,
App. iii. 24, 26.
μάσει for -σει, 857.
μασειέται, 858.
μάσθλη, ἱμάσθλη, 133.
MACTAN for 4μεθα, 801.
4MACTE for 4μεθα, 801.
μαστιγίας, 283.
μαστιγωθήσομαι, 1885.
μαστιγώσομαι, 1885.
μάστορας, δ, 1017.
MACTON for 4μεθα, 801.
ματά for μετά, ' again, 1139.
μάταιος, 309.
Ματθαίος, 125, 131, 171".
Ματθία (του), 277.
Ματθίας, 283.
ματόπονος, 11ο;.
ματόφρυδα, τά, 1156.
Ματρέας, 283.
ματρωνίκιον, 1040 0.
Ματρωνικόν, 1040 c.
Ματταθίας, 131, 283.
ματώνω for αἱματόω, 723.
μαυρίζω, 1093.
Μαυρίκιος, 1040 0.
μαυρογένει (τοῦ), 301.
μαυρογένεις, δ, 301.
μαυρογένης, 1149.
μαυροκόκκινος, 1156.
μαυρομούστακος, 1149.
μαύρος, 447,496; in cmprt.,
4964.
μαυρούτσικα, 1040.
μαυροφορεμένος, 1151.
μαυροφόρος, 1150.
μαυρύτερος, 496.
Μαφρές, 300.
μάχα, μάχη, 29.
μαχαιράκι", 1038.
μαχαιρᾶς, 287.
μαχαιριά (-ιά), 1027.
μαχαιροβγάρτης, 11525.
μαχαιροπήρουνα, τά, 1156.
μάχη, μάχα, 29.
μαχήσομαι, 996158.
μάχομαι, 996158, 1001, 1003.
constr., 1245, 1373; περί
τινος, 1642 ; ὑπέρ τινος,
1679.
μαχοῦμαι, 996 158.
μάχωνταιν for -ται, App. iii.
20 d.
-ΜΒ-, in Ν -μπ-, 193.
μέ οι με (=ἐμέ), 129, 525 ;
becomes μί, o30.
for μετὰ οι σύν, 1488,
1491.
for dat. simple,
1377, 1383.
μὲ κανένα τρόπον, 1383.
μὲ μεγάλη βιάση, 1383.
μὲ τὸ παράπονο, 1383.
μέγα, adv., 518.
μέγα βοάν, 1266.
1358,
μέγας (και) μέγας = μέγιστος,
513.
μέγας τις, 1452.
μεγεθέστερος, 506.
μέγεθος, 423; (τό) -, in
size,' 1233, 1305.
μεγεθυσμένως, 736.
μεγιστάν & -άνος, δ, App. iii.
12.
μεγιστάνος & -στάν, ὁ, App.
111. 12.
•
μεγιστάνους for -ἂνας, 346.
μέγιστος, 5043
μεγιστότατος, 506.
μεγιστύτερος, 506.
Me0a, in verb, 760 b ff.
μεθάω, -ύζω & -ύω, 871.
μεθερμηνευμένα, 750 1.
μεθερμηνευται, 750 1.
μεθιστάω, 962.
μεθοπορινός, 267.
μεθοπωρινός, 114.
μέθυ, τό, 303.
μεθύζω, -θύω, θω, 87o f.
μεθύσκω, 996159, 1097.
μεθυσμένος, 996 19
μεθύω, 155 €, 857, 871,
996159.
b
μεθώ, -ύζω, 870 f.
μέι οι μεί for μή, 29", App.
ii. 9 f.
μέζι for μέλι, 187.
μείγνυμι, 9434, 996 9 & 10
159 165;
see μίγνυμι.
Μειδία (του), 277.
Μειδίου (του), 277.
μείζον, 504.
μειζονώτερος, 506.
μείζος του μείζων, App. iii. 12.
μειδύτερος, 506.
μείζους (οἱ, αἱ, τούς, τάς),
332.
μείζων, μείζον, 20. α.
μείζων, μείζος, App. iii. 12.
μέγα φρονεῖν ἐπί τινι, 1582 d. Μειλιχίῳ, Μιλ-, 34.
μεγάλα, adv., 518 f.?
μεγαληγορέω, 1111.
μεγάλος, 481, 585.
μεγαλύτη & -ότητα, ἡ, 361.
μεγαλούτσικος, 1040.
μεγαλόψυχος, 1147.
μεγαλύτερος, 496, 505.
Μεγαλώ, ή, 414.
μεγαλωπές, 1104.
μεγαλώτατος, 401, 50.4.
μεγαλώτερος, -ώτατος, 504,
Μέγαρα, 434.
μέγας, 479 1.
in emprt., 5043
μεγάλη σπουδῇ, 1382.
|
Μείλιχος, 37.
Μείμνων, 26, 1.
μεῖον, 5045
μειόνοις τοῖς), 346.
μεῖος του μείων, 505.
μειότερος, 556.
μείρομαι, 996 100
μείς, μήν, App. ii. 14 1.
μείων, μεῖον, 504
μελαγχρής, 148, App. i. 16 α.
μελαγχροιής, χρής, 148.
μελάγχρους, 439.
μελάγχρως, 439.
μέλαις fur -λανς, 29, Αρ.
ii. gr.
646
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
μελαμψαν (τόν), App. iii. | μεμιστωκέναι, 177.
68.
μέλαν, τό, 447.
μελάνι & -ιον, τό, 447.
μελανός for μέλας, 447.
μέλανς, 29, App. ii. 9.
μελάντατος, 492.
μελάντερος, 492.
μέλας, 330, 446, 447, App. ii.
9 f.; in cmprt., 492.
μελεδαίνεν, 261 α.
μέλει, 990132 3
με, ib.
subject of, 1165.
+ όπως or ὡς, 1962.
+ infiu., 2081 f.
Μελεμίτζης, 1040 0.
μέλι, τό, 303, 368; gen.
-ιοῦ, 372 ; τὰ μέλια, ib.
μέλιν, τό, App. iii. 9 c.
μέλισσα, App. ii. 9.
μελισσόκηπος, 1145.
Μελιταιέοις (τοῖς), 346.
μελιτύεις, -οῦς, 451, 1067.
μελιτοῦσσα, 1067.
μέλιττα, App. ii. 9.
μέλλει, 990161 -
μελίτιν, 331, 1040, App. iii. 7.
μέλλεται, 996101·
•
μελλήσω, 996161 -
μέλλοντα, as adv., 827.
μέλλοντα, τά, 2112.
μελλούμενα, τά, 2112.
μελλούμενον, τό, 996101·
μέλλω, 722, 996 101
augment of, 722 ff.
constr., 208(1 f., 2087 ff.
+ infin., 2087; for fut.
indic., 1893 f., 1896,
App. iv. 4.
+infin., in John, App.
vi. ra B c [3].
+iva (vá), 2086ª, 2088.
μέλω, 996102 ; see also μέλει.
με μάθημα 996100-
Με μακτηριώνα, 49.
+
167*
με μάνημαι, 996104
μεμάραμμαι, 900 150-
με μαρασ μαι, 996100-
μεμαρτύρημαι, 9961
με μάχημαι, 99618-
μέμ-β-λωκα, 188.
με μέθυσμαι, 996100-
με μέληκας, 996 102.
μεμέληκε, 996162.
με μέλημαι, 996162
μεμένηκα, 990183
μέμηνα, 996154
με μια γκώς, 996101
με μίαμμαι, 996104
με μίασμαι, 990104
μέμιχα, 996185.
μέμνημαι, 996184 ; as pres.,
1868 f.
- constr., 2133 ff., 2137 g.
με μνήμην, 996100-
μεμνήσομαι, 996166, 1869.
μεμνωμαι, 99616
μέμυκα, 996168.
μέμφομαι, 1001, 1332 f.
constr., 1264.
μεμψίμοιρος, 1116.
μέν, 1700, 1743 f.
enclitic, 102 e.
& μήν, 1744 f.
for μήν, 1744 f.; καὶ
for καὶ μήν, ib. ; γε
for γε μήν, ib.; οὐ
for οὐ μήν, ib.
μὲν
•
•
μὲν
μὲν
·
μὲν
μὲν
μὲν
μὲν
•
• •
·
•
•
•
·
·
•
δέ, 1713, 1744.
ἀλλά, 1744.
αὖ, 1744.
ἀτάρ, 1744.
γε, 1744.
δή, 1744.
εἶτα, 1744.
μὲν . . . ἔπειτα, 1744.
-MEN, pers. ending, 760 ff.
Μενεκλέδες, 201 α.
Μενεκλῆν (τον), 330, 432 1,
App. iii. 6.
Μενεκράτη (ω), App. iii. 15.
Μενέλας, 283.
Μενέλεως, 326.
-MÉ NHC (), influence of,
298.
μένοις, 44.
-MENOC,
2IIO f.
participles in,
as adjectives, 2111.
as substantives, 2112.
-MÉ NOC, 681, 706 b, 8211.
ΜΕ
in P-N, 822; in N, 2105,
2110 f., 2169 f.
for adj. in -ης, -es, 1151.
μενοῦν, 1744.
μένουσιν, ἵνα
779.
μένς, μήν, App. ii. 14 B.
μέντοι, 1731 f., 1744; ὅμως
—, 1735; μὲν —, 1744.
µérw, 892, 899, 900, 996163.
for εἰμί, 2107.
+ pres. part. for dur.
pres., 1845.
μενω, 996103.
μέρα του ἡμ-, 134 €, 148.
μέρα” παρὰ 'μέρα", 16225.
μερίδαν (τήν), App. iii. 6 a.
μερικοί, 594.
μεριμνάω τι, 1295.
Μερκουριάλης, 301.
μερός for μηρός, 40.
μερώνω from ἡμερύω, 723.
μέσα εἰs or 's, 1315, 1491.
μέσαι νύκτες, 1234.
Μέση προσωδία, 76 [2], 106,
App. i. I.
MECH CTIMH, 703, 79, 80.
μεσίτρα, 1017.
MECO- & MICO-, 1128.
μεσογραμμένος, 1128.
μεσοδάκτυλα, τά, 1145.
μέσον, ἀνὰ - Eis (TÙ) -
1525.
- adv., 1525, 1557-
μέσος, its place & sense,
1239.
assoc. with μισός, 1128.
μεσοτελειωμένος, 1128.
μεσοφαγωμένος, 1128.
Μεσσάλας, 283.
μεστός τινος, 1318.
μετά, 1489, 1492; in N,
1491.
I. μετά, use of, 1598-1609.
+ accus., 1599-1603;
followed by gen., 1603;
for gen., 160711 2:
+ accus. & gen., 1603.
+ gen., 1604-7; com-
moner than σύν, 1668;
for accus., 1603, 16075;
for dat., 1381, 1606,
16078.
2.
conf. with σύν & ἅμα,
1607, 1670.
+ dat., 16071.
repeated, 16o3.
for σύν, 1488, 1491,
1607.
for ἅμα, 1607.
for καί, 1175.
followed by redundant
και, 1718.
μετά, shortened to μέ,
1608.
survives as μετά, 1609.
confounded with ἅμα,
1672.
3. μετά, as adv. ( again '),
1139.
μετ᾿ ἀδικίας, 1605 α.
μετ᾿ ἀκριβείας, 1605 α.
μετ᾿ αὐτό” for μετ᾿ αὐτοῦ,
1609.
μετ' αύτον, 1609.
μεθ' ἡμέραν, 1600.
μετὰ δακρύων, 16ος α.
μετὰ δέκα ἔτη τοῦ οἰκῆσαι,
1603.
647
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
μετὰ καί for simple μετά, μέχρι, 222, 1490.
1718b.
μετὰ ἐκεῖνον, 1609.
μετὰ κινδύνων, 1605 α.
μετὰ λόγου, 1605 α.
μετὰ μᾶς, 1609.
μετὰ μένα, 1609.
μετὰ παιδιᾶς, 1605 α.
μετὰ σᾶς, 1609.
μετὰ σένα, 1609.
μετὰ σπουδῆς, 1605 α.
μετὰ ταῦτα, 1600.
μετὰ τὸ + infin., 16or f.,
2075, 2149, App. vi.
24.
μετὰ τοῦ + infin. for μετὰ
τό, 1607-
μετὰ χαρᾶς, in N, 1609.
μετὰ χεῖρας ἔχειν, φέρειν,
1599.
Μεταβολικά ΦΩΝΗΕΝΤΑ, 17.
μεταδίδω, 961.
μεταδίδωμί τινί τινος, 1298.
μεταείδα, 1139.
Μετάθεσις, 142 f.
δείλης,
+ gen., 1314 ;
1234.
μέχρι, until, with aor. for
plpf., 1857.
μέχρι, ' as long as, 17762,
1784 ff.
dv, 17762, 1784, app. v.
19.
· (ο), 1776 (twice), 1784,
1999, ΑΡΡ. v. 19;
constr., 1995, 2000;
for πρίν, 2007
ETE, 17762, 1784.
μέχρις, 222 ; see μέχρι.
μή, App. ii. 9 f., 1796 f.
proclitic, 97 e.
confused with μήν, 1827 f.
use of, 1801, 1804 fl.;
for où, 1815 ff.; after
ὅτι, 1818; with pres.
subj., 1918, App. v. 16
b ff.
μὴ & οὐ in Plutarch, 1815
[I].
μή, in conditions, 1807 ff.,
1810, 1814; retreats,
1808 f.
μεταλαβών for βών, 26η α.
μεταλαμβάνω, 1298.
μεταμελέομαι, 996192
μεταμελησόμενον, το, 996 102.
T6,9961e2n,
μεταμέλομαι, 996102, 1004.
+ part., 2128.
+őri (dióti) or el, 2129 ff.
μετάμελος, 430.
μετανοήσουσιν, ἐὰν
, 779.
μεταξᾶς, ὁ, 287.
μεταξοῦ, ἡ, 1044.
μεταξύ, 1490; with
1314.
gen.,
+ part., 2147.
μεταπέμπομαι, 996203, 1001,
1470.
μεταπέμπω, 1003.
Μεταποντίνος, 103I, 1080.
μεταστασίματα, τά, 371.
μεταστάσιμον,τό, 371,1022.
μετάστασις, 1022.
μετάστημα, 1022.
metaɖwnia, 166' & [1].
μετελάβαμεν, 796.
μετεπέμφθην, 1478.
μέτερος for ἡμ-, in N, 554.
μετέσχον, ηδη.
μετεχειρίσθην, 1480.
μετέχω τινός, 1298.
μετόν, as accus. absol., 2143.
in P-N, 2145.
Μεταγιαστικά, 1ο6ο.
μετράω δ -έω, 854.
μέτρος, τό, 424, 554.
μετρός for μητρός, 262 α [1].
μή,
in questions, 1747. f.,
1812 f., 2046 f., 2049";
ἆρα, 204, 2050;
ἆρα
–, 1747, 1748,
2046; γάρ, τι,
πως, 1749, 1812.
followed by ού, 1805,
1825 f.
preceded by où, 1827 f.
μή, in final clauses, 1952 f.,
1956 f. ; omitted, 1960.
after verbs of effort,
1962 f. ; of fear, 1805.
μή, interrog., 1747, f.; ἆρα
- 1748.
μὴ for μήν, 1827 f.
μὴ ἆρα, 1748, 204, 2050;
becomes μὴ γάρ, 1748 f.
μὴ γάρ, 1748 f., 1812, 2050.
μὴ δέν, 1805, 1957.
μὴ νά, 1749-
μὴ οὐ, 1805, 1825 f., 1956 1.,
App. iv. 8; elliptically,
1960.
µr) ovv, 1748, 2050.
μή πως, 1749, 1812.
μή τι, 1749, 2050.
μὴ ὢν, 2050.
-ΜΗ (ή), 1023 1.
μηγάρ σε μὴ γάρ, 1748 f.,
1812, 2050; suggested
by μὴ ἆρα, 1749.
μήγαρη, 1749.
μηγάρι, 174), 2050.
μηδ' ἂν εἶς, 629.
μηδ' ἕνα, 665.
μηδαμώς, 1796, 1802, 1804 f.
how expr. in N, 1449º.
μηδέ, use of, 1796-1802,
1804 ff.
for οὐδέ, 1821.
μηδέ from μηδέν, 1799.
µndè + ovdé, 626.
µndè eîs, 629, 1823 a.
- in N, 626, 629.
μηδὲ ἕνα for -ἕν, 629.
μηδὲ ἕνας, 629.
μηδείς (μηδείς), 625; in N,
626, 1449°, 1821.
- intensified, 629, 1823.
use of, 1796, 1802,1804 ff.
for οὐδείς, 1821.
repl. by μηδὲ εἰς, 629,
1823; by τὶς οὐ, 629,
1449°.
μηδέν, 1798 1.
for μηδαμώς, 1798.
for simple μή, 630, 1798
f.; in N, 630.
becomes proclitic, 1799.
μηδένα for -δέν, App. iii. 25.
μηδενικών, τό, 630.
μηδέναν for -va, App. iii. 6 c.
μηδένας for μηδείς, 626.
Μήδηος, 38.
-ΜΗΔΗΣ (δ), influence of,
298.
μηδενί, 54 [4].
μηθείς for μηδείς, 627.
μηθεμία fur μηδεμία, 628.
μηθέν for μηδέν, 627.
μηκάομαι, 1001.
μηκέτι, 2061.
μήκος, 423, 424, (τό)
(TJ)
in length,' 1305.
& μάκος, 29.
μηλέ, Ν for μηλέα, 272.
μηλέα, 150, 155 c & d, 271.
μηλέες, μηλές, 148.
μηλές, μηλέες, 148.
μηλιά, 271.
Μηλισίππου, 26, α [1].
Μήλιχος, 37.
Μήλο, ή, 292.
μηλύμελι, τό, 303.
μήμπας, 1957, 1959.
μήμπας και, τ7ι7.
μήν (δ), 29;
App. ii. 14 B.
& μείς,
1. μήν, 29, 1700, 1744 f.
enclitic, 102 e.
- followed by où, 1825 f.
648
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
μήν, preceded by οὐ,
1827 f.
changed to μή, 1827 f.
& μέν, 1744; see μέν.
μήν γε, 1744.
μὴν δή, 1744.
2. μήν for μή, 1797, 1827 f.,
1921, App. ii. 20 e, 23.
proclitic, 97 e.
interrog., 1749.
mistaken
1827 f., 1921.
μὴν πᾷ (νά), 1957.
for μή,
μήν πας μήμπας),
1806b, 2049".
1805,
µǹν пậs kai, 1717b, 1749,
1957, 1959, 2049b.
μὴν πᾶς καὶ δέν, 1805.
μὴν τύχῃ καί, 1749.
μὴν τύχῃ νά, 1749.
4MHN, pers. ending, 76o b f.
Μηνᾶ & -άδος (του), 288.
µñvav (Tóv), App. iii. 6g, 9c.
Μηνάς, from Μηνόδωρος, 287.
μῆνας (μήνας), δ, 347, App.
iii. 12 b.
μήνες (τούς), 332.
μηνήουσα, 35.
Μήνις, 298.
Μηνόδωρος, Μηνᾶς, 287.
μηνοειδής, 1113.
μηνός (του), in N, 341.
μηνοῦν, μενοῦν, 1744.
μηνύει, 35.
μήποτε, 1796, 1802, 1804 f.
how expr. in N, 1449º.
μήπω, 1796, 1802, 1804 1.
μήπως, 1749, 1811, 2049 f.;
(καί), 1805.
in questions, 2049º.
μήριγξ, σμ-, 130.
μῆτο for μῆλον, 187.
μήρυνθος, σμ-, 13o.
μής, μήν, App. ii. 14 B.
μηστηρίων, 35.
μήτε, 626, 1706, 1723 f.,
1796.
use of, 1801, 1804 ff.
for μηδέ, 1722, 1723.
for οὔτε, 1821.
μήτε μήτε, 1723 f., 1730.
μήτε ἕνα, 665.
μήτειρ του μήτηρ, 37.
μήτεν fur μήτε, App. iii. 19.
μητέρα, ἡ, 386.
μητέρα, ἡ & ὦ, App. iii. 15.
μητέραν (τήν), App. iii. 6 d.
µŋrépos, app. i, 16 a.
μήτηρ, 383.
Μητρᾶς, Μητρόδωρος, 287.
Μητρόδωρος, Μητρᾶς, 287.
μητροπολίτης, omitted, 1227.
μητρός (τῆς), App. i. 16 α.
μήτρως, 415.
μί for μέ, 030.
μι - conjugation, 698 f.
μι-verbs, 927-945.
extent of 927, 937; as
compared with w-verbs,
937.
- reduplicated, 928, 945 11.
in subjunctive, 931.
in imperative, 932.
peculiarities of, 782,929-
- M',
35.
accentuation of, 935.
P-N history of, 936 f.
changed to w-verbs, 766,
774 f., 936 f.
pers. ending, 76o fr. ;
primitive, 930 a.
µía, 620 ff.; see also eîs.
μία,
μία, ' once, 650 ; ' -, 621.
's
μιά, μνιά οι μπά, 032,
155 α.
μια φορά, 651.
μιᾷ τῶν ἡμερῶν,
των, 650.
μιαίνω, 892, 996104
μίαν μίαν, 666.
σαββά-
μιανῆς του μιᾶς, 579, 621.
μιανοῦ for ἑνός, 579, 621.
μιαρώτερος, ανιαρότερος, App.
ii. 5.
μιας, 579, 620 f.
μιγήσομαι, 996100
μίγνυμι, 937, 9434, 9961.
μίγω, 943..
Μιδίας, 34.
μικκύλος, 1059.
μικρά, adv., 518.
μικρογλάφυρος, 1156.
μικρόκομψος, 1156.
μικρόν, adv., 518; a little,”
1278.
μικρός, 130, 441, 442.
in cmprt., 5041
•
μικρότατος, 5041
μικρότερος, 5044, 505.
μικρούλης, 1059.
μικρουλός, 1059.
μικρούτσικον, 1040.
μικρούτσικος, 1040.
μικροῦ (δεῖν), 1902, 2008.
μικρωπός 1104.
μίλαξ, σμίλαξ, 130.
Μιλιχίο Διός, 34.
Μιλιχίῳ, 34.
|
μιμέομαι, 1001.
μιμνήσκω (οι
μιμνήσκω),
996166 ; -ομαι, 1004 f.
μιμώ, ἡ, 414.
μιν, 530.
μίνθος & -η, 292.
Mivos for -νως, 416.
Μινύκιος, 35.
*
b
Μίνωας, δ, 416.
Μίνως, 415; in N, 416.
μίξω, 996105
μίον for μίαν, in M, 621.
μισάω & -έω, 854.
μίσγω, 937, 9434.
μισέω, 854, 869; ἐμίσησα
(incept.), 1853 f.
μισθόντα, 26, α.
μισθός, δ, 249.
μισθύω, constr., 1338 f.
-ομαι, 1470, 1471.
μισθωσάντωσαν, 116, 811.
μισίζω, 869.
MICO- & MECO-, 1128.
μισογραμμένος, 1128.
μισόγυνος, 1106.
μίσος, τό, 423.
μισός for ἥμισυς, 401, 440,
1128.
& μέσος, 1128.
μισοτελειωμένος, 1128.
μισοφαγωμένος, 1128.
μισσεύω, 7οι.
μιστό, τό, 249.
μιστός, 177.
μισυ, τό, 303.
'μισυ for ἥμισυ, 641.
μιτὰ for μετά, 1609.
Μιχαήλ, Μιχαήλος, 218.
Μιχαηλάς, 287, 1043.
Μιχαήλης, Μιχάλης, 150 d.
Μιχάλης, Μιχαήλ,
2186.
μιωμένος, 996104
μιώνω, 990134
•
-ῆλος,
-MM-, in syllabication, 92.
μνᾶ, 285.
μνάα, 285.
μνάμα, μνήμη, 29.
Μνασιγένου for -vous, 432 c.
μνέσκω, 996103, 1098.
μνημείων fur -ον, 207.
μνήμη, μνάμα, 29.
μνημονεμένος, 996 107
μνημονεύω, 996167.
μνημονέψω, 996107.
μνήμων, 469, 1074.
μνησικακεῖν τινί τινος, 1335.
μνήσκω, 996103, 1098.
μνήστητι, 177, 996100
μήτι, interrog., 1749.
Μίλιχος, 37.
-μνήσω, 996100-
649
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
μνιά or μπά for μία, 032, | μοὐδόκει, 200.
155 α.
μνίσκω, 996163, 1098.
-MNW, in pr., 899.
μνώγω, 996183 -
μνωμένος, 990189
Μοέριχος, 19" [1].
μοι οι μοί, 525.
μοὶ τον μοι, 525.
μοιάζ' for ὁμοιάζει, 219.
μοιάζω for ὁμοιάζω, 1093.
μοίρα for μύρα, 36.
μοίρα, ή, 347, 1023 f., App.
ii. 9.
μοιρασμένη, 736.
μόισα οι μοῖσα for μοῦσα, 29,
29ª, App. ii. 8 f., 14 B.
Μολδοβλαχία, 1156.
μολιβέϊνος, 1061.
μολιβένιος, 10 Ι.
μολιβῆν, 35, twice.
μολυβοῦ, 35.
μολυβοῦν, 35.
-Μο” (τό), gen. Ωματος, -ίμου,
371.
ΜΟΝ, gen. έμονos, adj., 380.
μονάδα, ή, 658.
μονάμπυκος & -πυξ, 439.
μοναξά for -ξιά, ἡ, 155 6.
μόναρχος, IIII.
μονηδέ, 116, 626.
evas, 629.
μονηδένας, 626.
Μούνιχος, 35.
μυριάδες,658; τὰς —,332;
ταῖς,
290", 1338; μv-
ριαδών, 659.
μυριάκις, 648.
μοῦσα, μοῖσα, μῶσα, App. μυρίζομαι, 1ooo.
ii. 9 f., 14 B.
Μούσαιος, Μούσαις, 299.
μουσική, ἡ, 1182 b.
μουσκάρι, 1041.
μουστακάκι”, 1038.
μουστάκιον, 1038.
Μουτουνήσιος, 430.
μοχθέω & -ίζω, 868.
μύχθηρε (ω), 257.
μοχθίζω & -έω, 868.
ΜΠ, in N for A, 193.
ΜΠ-, as initial, 57, 62.
μπαίνω, ἐμβαίνω, 135, 723,
99623.
μπάς, 2040.
μπέε, βῆ, 62.
·
μπεμπᾶτος, 996203 •
μπέ(μ)πω, 996203
μπέψω, 990203 •
μπῆ, βῆ, 62.
μπηγμένος, 996.09.
μπήγω, 996200-
μπήζω, 996200-
μπιστεύ(γ)ομαι, 10002
μποδίζω for ἐμπ-, 723.
constr., 1317.
μπολιάζομαι, 1474.
μονογενῆν, 330, App. iii. μποντικός for ποντ-, 130.
μονάς, 658.
μοναχός, 1145.
μονήρην, App. iii. 6
g.
6 a.
μόνον, adv., 518.
μόνος, its place &
sense,
μόνος καὶ μόνος, 513.
μονοκόμματος, 1149.
1239.
MONÓCHMOC, 19¹ & [1].
μονοφάγος, cuprt., 501.
μονόφθαλμος, Αpp. i. 16 a.
μονῶνυξ, 126.
μονώψ, 1104.
-MÓC (8), 1018, 1020 ff.,
1155.
for -σις (ή), 1021, 1155.
for infin., 2003, ΑΡ. vi.
25.
in the phrase εἶμαι τοῦ
-μου, 1288.
μᾶσα fur μοῦσα, App. ii.
9 f., 14 B.
μοσχομυρίζω, 1155.
μοσχομυρισμένην, 1155.
μόσχος, ' : youth, 1041.
μου οι μου, 525, 530.
>
for ἐμός, 551.
'μοῦ for ἐμοῦ, 153.
μπορεζάμενος, 2111.
μπορώ, 130 & [1], 132, 839.
-Μπτ-, in N, 193.
μέρε, 'ρε, (μωρέ), 1364, 251.
μῦ (μῶ), τύ, mem, 2, 9 f., ga,
303.
μυ for μοι, 36.
μύ for μή, 37.
μὺ εἰτύης, 38.
μυάκι, τό, App. iii. 7 [1].
μυαλά, τά, 43318 b.
μvaroí, oi, 43318
μυαλό, τό, 249, 43318 0.
μυαλός, δ, 43318 b.
μύγδαλο" for ἀμ-, 134 0.
μύδρος, σμ-, 130.
μυελός, δ, 249.
μύλη, ἡ, 249.
μυλοκυδώνια, τά, 1156.
μύλος, δ, 249.
μυλωνού, ἡ, 1044.
Μυνύκιος, 35.
μυξᾶς, ὁ, 1043.
μυξοῦ, ή, 1043.
μύραινα, σμύναιρα, 130.
μυρία μυρία, 666.
μυριάς, 658, 659.
μύριοι, 645.
μυριοπλάσιος, 655.
μυριοστός, 646.
μυριοστύς, 660,
μυρμήκιον, 1038.
μύρμηξ, 103.
μυροπισσόκηρος, 1156.
μυροπώλης, 1152.
μυρρίνη, App. ii. 9.
μυρσίνη, App. ii. 9.
μυρωδάτος, 1052.
μυς, 387.
μῦσα for μοῦσα, 29".
μυσάττομαι, 1004.
μυστάκιον, 1038.
μύσταξ, 1038.
μυταρᾶς, ὁ, 1043.
μυταροῦ, ἡ, 1043.
μυτᾶς, δ, 1043.
Μυτιληναιος, 1082.
μύω, 996108 -
-м-, in N, 193.
-ΜΨ-, in N, 193.
μῶ (τό), see μῦ.
-Μω, in fut., 899.
μῶν, 17473, 1748, 2046,
ού,
2050; – o0, 2016.
μων οι 'μων του ἡμῶν, 530,
531, 534.
-ΜωΝ, - μον, adj., 380, 469,
1074 f.
- in P-N, 374-380, 470.
μώνυξ, μονῶνυξ, 126.
μώνω, 990183 -
Μωραΐτικος, 1077.
μωρε (δ), 251, 257.
μωρέ, μ'ρέ, 'ρέ, 136, 251.
μωρή, 251.
μωρό, τό, 251.
μωροκακοήθης, 1156.
μωρύπιστος, 1107.
μωροπλούσιος, 1156.
μωρός, μωρέ, 136, 251,
.257".
μωρόσοφος, 1156.
µŵσa, 29, App. ii, 8 ff., 14 1.
Μωσής, Μωύσης, 152, 287.
Μωϋσης, 152, 287, 290.
N, N, origin of, 2.
forms of, 2, 5 [2], 9.
sound of, 9, 66.
a semivowel, 23", 25
[1] 0.
650
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
N, N, makes position, 66.
assimilated, 195, 200 ff.
+ labial, 192 f.,
203b.
see
-N, euphonic, 220 ff.;
movable.
(=n), in syllabication,
90 ff.
1956, -N
+ guttural, 195", 203".
+ dental, 194.
+ 8, 194; in N, ib.
+ 0, in N, 194.
+ liquid, 195 f., 203b.
+ μ, 195, 896 f.
+σ, 123, 197, 337 c.
+σ, p, S, in speech, 201.
- becomes y, 189 ff.
N-, dropped, 134.
provective, 130.
-N-, epenthetic, 575, 577.
-N-, before -σ”, 123, 378.
-N-, intersonantic dropped,
155a.
-N, final, 3352.
closes
a Greek word,
218 f.; in A-N, 218 f.,
App. iii. 2-30; survives
in N, 219, 221, App.
iii; retreats, 219.
an essential suffix, 535.
characteristic of the ac-
cus. sing., App. iii. 3
ff., 9.
- protective, app. iii. 24
ff.; in verbs, ib. 28; in
adverbs, ib. 19 ff.
parasitic, App. iii. 9.
excessive, app. iii. 21 ff.,
30.
repeated, 537, App. iii.
30.
in proclitics followed by
ктп,
Tπ, App. iii. 24, 26.
reaction against, App.
iii. 22 fl.
dropped, App. iii. 22 ff.,
26.
its stages illustrated,
App. iii. 30.
-N, movable, 220 if., App.
iii. 16-30.
identified with terminal
V, 221.
-N, in N neuters, 248.
-N for -a, in accus. sing.,
358.
-N,
as sign of accus. sing.,
330, 339, Αpp. iii. 5 f. ;
in 3rd decl., 328, 330;
affects
every accus.,
330 f.
pers. ending, 760 ff.;
dropped in aor. & pf.,
784.
'v' for elve, 593 [3].
v'(= 50), 645.
•
;
vá, from & for iva, 1760,
1766 ff.; proclitic, 97 d.
in final clauses, 1766
διὰ -, 1769; γιὰ -,
ib.; wyd —, ib.
frequency of, 1762, 1766.
vd for av or éáv, 1488, 1770,
1773 ff., 1966; after
verbs of emotion, 1947.
from & for modal av,
1774 f., 1908, App. iv.
vá,
12.
;
|
ναναρίζω, 868.
Νάξος, Αξιά, 134 C.
vaós, 327.
Ναπολιτάνικος, 1880.
νάπυ, τό, 303, 399.
vâσos, vñoos, 29".
ναύαρχος, 1 1501.
vavátηs, 11501.
ναῦλον, τό, 249.
vaûros, 8 & T6, 249º, 424.
vavμaxéw, 1154.
ναυμαχία, 1106, 1154.
vavµáxos, 1154.
Ναύπακτος, Έπαχτο, 134 C.
ναυπηγός, 11501·
vaûs, 408, 43311; al
43311; τὰς
>
ib.
>
in composition, 1108.
vavoíTорos, 1115.
vaúтais, oi, 267º.
vαúτηs, 283, 298.
vâxes, 150 d.
332,
-nd-, in N -vт-, 194.
NAC=σ, 202 f.; =Tσ, VTŜ,
ντζ,
TC, 203.
've for elve, 593 [3].
veavías, venvíns, 29.
νεαρών, νηρόν, νερό, 150 €
[2].
νέειν for ναίειν, 49.
νεηνίης, νεανίας, 29.
νείκεα, 155 b.
App.véros, 1077.
in wishes, App. v. 15º.
for εἴθε, 1906; for ἄμποτε
(ἄν ποτε) —, ib.
for potential indic.,
iv. 13.
for interrog. subj., App.
v. 19 b.
vá, of past action, 1954,
App. iv. 13.
vá, of cause, 1741.
νά for ὥστε, 1757, 1951.
νά after (θέλει) θέ, App. iv.
14; before θέλει, οι θέ,
ib. 15.
và + fut. subj. for fut. ind.,
App. iv. 12 ff.
vá Toi, 543.
νά τονε, 543.
vá Tos, 543.
νά τους, 543.
retreats, 221, App. iii. NaFтактíwv, 51.
II ff.
survives in N, 221.
dropped in N, 534, App.
iii. 22 ff., 26.
-N, analogical, App. iii. 3-15 ;
spreads, ib. 3-10; re-
treats, ib. 11-15;
effects of, ib. 27 ff.
-Ν εφελκυστικόν, 220 f.,
App. iii. 16-30.
|
να
vafv..., 51.
vai, 'yes,' 562, 2059 ff.
vai µd + acc., 1260 f.
-NAI, in infin., 815 f., 950.
ναιετάουσαν, -ωσαν, App. ii.
12 [3].
-Naîóc, ethnic, 10314.
ναίσκε, 562, 2061.
ναίχί, 2001 & [1].
ναίχι & ἔχει, 50.
169
νέϊν for ναίειν, 49.
veipevoμai for oveιp-, 1000b.
νειώς, νεώς, 201
veμnonooµai, 1885”.
νεμήσω, 996 100
véμw, 892, 9969; in N,
νέμω,
1104; -oµai, 892.
νεμῶ, 996100-
νεν for εἶνε ( -- ἐστι), App.
iii. 20 h, often.
vevéμnuaι, 996189 ·
vévnμai, 996170 •
vévnoμai, 996170 -
νένιμμαι, 996 τι·
νεοιν, 43311·
Neokλn (), 432 a.
νεόνυφος, ή, 2920.
véos, emprt. of, 493.
νεύς, νιός, 155 c.
νεοσσός, νοσσός, 152.
νεότερον, 26, α.
νεύτη, ή, 1047; & -s, 343.
νεύτητα, ἡ, 1047.
νεότηταν (τήν), 330, App.
iii. 6 d, f.
νεοφερμένος, 1151.
Νέρβα (του), 277.
651
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
νερό, see νερόν.
νερόκρασο”, 1146.
νεροκράτης, 11524.
νερόλαδα, τά, 1156.
νερό, νηρόν, νεαρόν,
[2], 43321 ; becomes
νερό, 030.
15ο c
νερουλός, 1059.
Νερούτσος, 1040.
νεσθαι, 261 α.
νέφος, 424.
véw, 848, 996, 996170 -
-New, in N verbs, 843".
νεώς, νεώς, 20, 325.
vews (TŶs), 43311-
νεώσοικος, 1115.
νεωτέρισται, 736.
νεωτέρῳ, 20.
νή, 1745 1.
+ accus., 1260.
repl. by μά, 1746.
νὴ Δία, 1745
νὴ τὸν Ζῆνα, 1746.
νὴ τὸν κύνα, 1746.
ΝΗΡ, ΙΙΟ4.
vñes, 43311.
vnt (T), 43311:
νήπιον, τό, 251.
νήπιος, 251.
Νηρέαν, App. iii. 6 b.
[2], 43321.
Νικήτα (του), 277.
Nîño (☎), 294.
Νικολαΐδης, 1029.
Νικολάκης, 1040 Β α.
Νικόλαος, Νικολῆς, 287.
| Νικόλας, 283.
Νικολήδες, οἱ, 289.
Νικολῆς for Νικόλαος, 287.
Νικομᾶς, Νικόμαχος, 287.
Νικόμαχος, Νικομᾶς, 287.
νίκος, τό, 249, 424.
νικοῦμαι, 850.
νικοῦνται, 85ου
νικοῦντας, 8500.
νικοῦντι, 85ο.
νίμμαν, τό, App. iii. 9 c.
νιμμένος, 99617ι·
νινίτσιν, τό, 1040 ο C.
Νιό for "Ιός, ἡ, 130, 292.
νιός, νεός, 155 c.
νιούς for ἑνός, 621.
νίπτω, 996171·
νερό for νερό, 030.
νιφήσομαι, 996 71
νιφύεις, 451.
νίφτω, 875, 996171.
Νίχαρχον, 184.
νίψου, 814
-NM-, becomes -σμ-, 196 f.
-NN-, in syllabication, 92.
νηρόν, νεαρόν, νερό, 150 c -NNY-, in μι-verbs, 938.
>
quantity of, 941b?
νηρός νερόν, 150° [2], | -ΝΝΥΜΙ, verbs in, 928, 938.
4.2321.
νησά for -ιά, 155 €.
νῆσος, νάσος, 294.
νήστητι for μνήσθητι, 990166.
νηστικός, 1070.
νήσω, 996170 -
νήχομαι, 1001,
NOC=σ, 202; =τσ οι τζ,
203.
-Ni-, pronounced fii, 187.
νίβγω, 996, τι ·
νίβω, 875, 996171; midl.,
1469.
Νίδα (for Ιδα), ἡ, 130.
νίζω, 996 πι
Νικαιεύς, Νικεύς, 148.
νικάω, 862 ; in M-N, ib.
as pf., 1842 f.
+part., 2132 f.
+infin., 2132".
ἔν τινι, 2132.
νικᾶν γνώμην, δίκην, 1268.
νικᾶν Ολύμπια, 1266.
νικᾶν πάντα, 1266.
Νικεύς, Νικαιεύς, 148.
νίκη, ή, 249".
Νικηφορίτσης, 1040 0 0.
conjugation of, 941, 943.
repl. by -ω, 937.
-N(N)Ýw, & -v(v)vµc, 941.
νογῶ, νοῶ, 155.
vóels for vocês, 84.
νοήμων, 469..
νοιάζει με, 990192
νοιάζομαι, 1000.
νοῖκι, ἐνοίκιον, 135.
νοικοκύρης, 130.
νοιώθω, 8653.
νομάρχης, 1111.
νομίζω, 865, 886, 888.
for fut., App. iv. 4.
- constr., 2078, 2085 f.
τινά τι, 1284 1.
+infin., 2086¹ f.
+ ὅτι, App. vi. 1ο [1].
νομίζεται παρὰ πᾶσι, 1632.
νομίσω, 8861.
νομιῶ, 8861, 888.
νομοθεσία, 1154.
νομοθέτης, 1 1 11, 1152, 1154.
νόμοις for νόμους, Αμμ. ii.
8, 10.
νόμονς leads to νόμους, App.
ii. 8 f.
νόμος for νόμους, App. ii. 10.
νόμος ἐστί, with infin.,
2081 f.
νόμους from -μονς, App. ii.
8 f.
νόμως for -μους, 29, App.
ii. 8 f.
νόος, App. ii. 14 Α.
νος, νόος, νοῦς, App. ii. 14 Λ.
-Noc, ethnic adj., 10313,
1057 f., 1078 f.
νοσέω, ἐνόσησα, 1853 f.
νοσσάκιον, 1038.
νοσσός, νεοσσός, 152.
νοταρᾶς, 1044.
νοτάριος, 1040, 1044
voûdes, oi, 322.
voûs, 8, 313, 408b; in N,
322, App. ii. 14. Λ.
in composition, 317
vow, voyŵ, 155".
-NC-, in early Greek, 123,
App. ii. 14.
in accus. pl. 3rd decl.,
328:
- in dat. pl., 198.
-NCI, in verb, 197 c.
NT~, as initial, 57º.
-NT-, in participles, 820.
-NTA, neuter part. used as
adv., 823.
-Ντa in numerals for Luova,
639.
-NTAI, pers. ending, 760 b ff.
in pf. repl. by periphr.,
764.
-ΝΤΑΝ for -ντα, as adv., App.
iii. 20b.
NTZ, in N, 203, 205.
Ντζεφρές, 300.
ντηροῦμαι, 100o
-NTI, pers. ending, 760 ff.
-ΝΤΙ-, changed to -σι-, 181;
to -di-, 155 g.
'
NT, became σ, 211 b.
-NTO, pers. ending, 760 b ff.
in plpf. repl. by peri-
phrasis, 764.
ντραπώ, 996210-
ντρέπομαι, ἐντρ-,135,996273
-NTC-, in early Greck, 123.
= =6, 202; = 70 or TZ, 203.
ντυμένος, 996. •
ντύνω, 194, 723, 902, 94414",
996; mid., 1469.
ντύσω, 99655.
-NTON, in imprt., 806, 811.
ΕντωCAN, in imprt.,
811".
vû (Tó), nun, 2, 9 f., 9“, 303.
652
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
vý, particle, 1700.
-NY- (in deík-NY-μ, etc.),
938.
νύκτα, ἡ, 338.
νύκτα, ἡ & ὦ, App. iii. 15.
†,
νύκτα, τὴν & ἡ, App. iii.
12 b.
νύκταν,
vúkтaν, 330, App. iii. 6 a ff.
νυκτερινός, 1063.
νυκτικός, 1ο7ο.
νυκτιφανῆ (ὦ), 427, 432 α.
νυκτιχαρῆ (ω), 427, 432 α.
νυχτοκόρακας, δ, 1107.
VUKTUS, 'by night,' 1234.
νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας, 1341 α.
νύκτωρ καὶ μεθ' ἡμέραν,
1600.
-ΝΥΜΙ, verba in, 928, 938-
944.
z, repl. by po in South | Feтaoμévos, 99683.
Italian N, 24º.
-Z, in syllabication, 91, 93.
dropped, 219, 221, 338,
App. iii. 12.
-ź,
-
-z
-Z,
(δ), parent of -κιον,
10380.
in composition, 1150,
1153.
¿' (= 60), 645.
ξαίνω, ξένω, ξύνω, 902.
gavá, as adv., 1139.
ξαναείδα, 1139.
ξανθός, Ξάνθος, 76 [2].
Ze-, in N, 755.
from è¿e- or ex- ? 755.
¿eî, tó, 2, 9 f., gª.
ξείδι, οξείδιον, 134 b.
ξείδι, 304.
ξειδόλαδο", 1156.
ξεικάζω, from ἐξεικ-,
99665
ξεικασμένος, 996 5.
ξεικάσω, 99665.
¿eîvos, 29, app. ii. 10.
ξεκαρδίζομαι, 1000.
4
• ¿ekiváw, 755.
ξεκίνημα, 755.
ξεκινημύς, 755.
conjugation of, 941 ff.
retreats before -w, 937.
Νυμφᾶς, Νυμφόδωρος, 287.
Νύμφιος, 1040.
Νύμφις, 1040.
Νυμφόδωρος, Νυμφᾶς, 287.
vúv, enclitic, 102 e.
vûv, adv., 1700; TO
'now,' 1278.
νυσταγμένος, 996 172
νυστάζω, 996172.
νυσταμένος, 996172.
Núpas for Núupas, 56.
Νύφης for Νύμφης, 56.
νύφτα for νύκτα, 174.
νυχθήμερον, 1156, 1157.
νύχι fur ὀνύχιον, 134 b.
νύχτα οι νύκτα, ή, 174.
νυχτός (τῆς), 341.
-NÝw & -NYMI, 937.
vw, 525 & [1].
-Nw, verbs in, 892 f., 899 ff.
in P-N, 899 ff:; very
common in N, 906.
for -pw in present, 903.
affects sonantic verbs,
906.
νῶμος for ὦμος, 130.
vậy, 525 & [r].
E, ź, origin of, 2.
65
¿exváw, 906; with gen.,
1295.
§eúpw, 132b, 99696, App.iv. 3.
-ZH for -§is (†), 396.
ξηγάω, 10001·
ξηγγάω, 10001.
ξῆνος, App. ii. 14 Β.
ξηραίνω, 899.
-Zi for -¿is (1), 396.
-zic (), barytones in, 395.
ξιφίας, 287.
B.
ξιφοκτόνος, 1106.
ξομολογοῦμαι, 1474.
ξορίζω for ἐξορ-, 733.
¿û (TÓ), samekh, 2, 9 f., 9ª,
303.
ξυβάλλεσθαι, 193.
ξύεται, 858.
ξυλάγγουρο", 1112, 1146.
723, ξυλεά & -ιά, ἡ, 1027.
ξυλοκοπώ, 1155.
ξύνω, 902, 906.
ξυπνῶ for ἐξ-, 135.
ξυράφι, τό, 103
ξυραφίζομαι, 1474.
ξυράω & -έω, 852.
ξυρέω, -άω, 852.
ξυρίας, 283.
ξεμαθαίνω, 753, 755.
ξεμάθημα, 755.
ξεμαθημύς, 755.
ξεμολογοῦμαι, 1474.
ξεμυστηρεύ(γ)ομαι, 1000.
¿év Fos, App. ii. 14 B.
ξενίζω & -ύω, 868.
§évvos, 29, App. ii. 9, 14 B.
ξενοδούλευμα, 1155.
ξενοδουλεύω, 1155.
Ξενοκλῆν (τύν), 432 b.
gevoπeion (w), 432 a.
¿évos, App. ii. 14 B.
ξενόφιλος, 107.
ξενύω & -ίζω, 868.
¿evTwμévos, 996265-
ξεντώνω, 996205
ξένω, ξαίνω, 902.
§ε§NY(Y)ŵ, 10001 •
ξέρα, ἡ, 1049.
ξερασμένος, 99678.
ξεράσω,
épn, 1, 1049.
ξερνάω from ἐξεράω, 135,
forms of, 2, 5 & [2], 9. §epάow, 99678.
a compound consonant,
23.
a double consonant, 23 f.,
25 [1] b.
=K | σ, 12, 23b.
-X +σ, 12.
guttural + 337 a.
originally repr. by ko or
χσ, 12.
723, 906, 99678.
Bépfew for -éw, app. i. 15 b.
ξερός for ξηρός, 40.
ξερότοπος, 1145.
ξέρω, 99640.
geтásw, è§-, 134 d, 733, 873,
99683
ξυρίζω & ξυρέω, 868 ; -ίζομαι,
1474.
§úoov, in N, 813.
ξύστρα, 1026.
ξύω, 857.
Ο, ο, (ο μικρόν), 2 f., 9 f.,
9º f.
ancient names of, 2, 9, 9º,
App. ii. 10.
origin of, 2 f.
- formis of, 2, 9.
- frequent in dialects, App.
ii. 7.
- multiple function of, 6,
26, app. ii. 9-14.
stood originally for o w
ov, 6, 29 f., App. ii.
9 f., 12, 14.
sound of, 9.
second in euphony, 25
[1]α.
confounded with ou, 26,;
f., 29 f., App. ii. 9 f.,
12, 14; with w, 29 f.,
50, 168, App. ii. 10,
12, 14.
interchanges with o e a,
167.
- becomes o, 29 f., App. ii.
9 f. & 14.
653
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
τίς,
o, becomes w, 29 f., App. | ô tís, 1217 f.
ii. 9 & 14, 164.
o+a=α, 150 a.
0+ a1=0, 146, 152.
0+¤=0, 146, 152.
0+0=0, 146.
o+oy=a, 146, 152.
0+w=0, 146.
'(= 70), 645.
ŏ or oû, 76, 9 f., 99º.
¿ µpóv, origin of name, 9° f.
ő for 8, 96, 1197 a.
(
which,' 603, 604; repl.
by τ6, 607.
Χα, οἵα, 200.
Οαεύς, 47.
Ο, ας φωνήεν προτακτικόν, 19. Οαιεύς, 41.
o-, prothetic, 129.
o-, provective, 130.
o-, augmented to a-, 714.
not augmented? 717 [1].
dropped, 134.
-0-, in compos. becomes -w-,
493.
-0-, dropped before -τερος &
-τατος, 497.
-O-, thematic vowel, 698,
758 a, 1106.
-o- & -e- in verb stem, 924.
-0-, compositional, 1106 ft.
repl. by --, 1116.
-0-, in contr. verbs becomes
-w-, 825, 828, 838-845.
-0, ending of 2nd decl., 238,
253.
-0, elided, 141.
¿ for ó, 84.
an-
, 250; atonon, 98 a;
ciently written ő, 96;
see also ó, Tú, H.
ὁ δέ (δ δέ), 1197, 1397;
after δ μέν δ μέν,
1197 a; repl. by ὺς
οι ὅστις, 1437.
δ μέν (δ μέν), 1197 α; sce
ὁ δέ.
8... μov, 551 f.
¿+gen. of a diocese, 1227.
1. δ, τό, ή, dem. pron., 558
562, 1197 f., 1424.
2. 8, Tó, , article, 251, 539,
|
-0€- becomes -ov-, 836.
o/e, thematic vowels, 698.
-0Є1-=-01-, 836.
-óeic, adj. in, 451, 1064,
1067.
¿56" for (@ov, 130.
fw, constr., 1325 ff.
-óza), verbs in, 853b.
-OH-=-w-, 836.
-OḤ- =-01-,
-она
-οάω, -άσω, 839.
Οβελός, 125.
ὀβολός, 125.
Οβραίος, 130.
¿ydoás, 658.
152,
ὀγδοήκοντα, 639, 645.
ὀγδοηκοντάκις, 648.
ὀγδοηκοστός, 646.
ὀγδοῆντα, ὀγδῶντα,
639, 64580.
ὀγδόντα, ὀγδῶντα, 152, 639,
64580.
ὄγδοος, 646.
bydŵvтa, ¿ydoñvтa, 152,639,
ὀγδοῆντα,
64580.
yoke, 2061.
ὀγκάομαι, 1001.
ογκωμένην, 717 [1].
oyotos from
612, 615.
¿ypaσíá, 1020.
dɣpús, 130.
ἔγχνη ἐπ' ἄγχνῃ, 1582 f.
ὅδε for ὅ δε, 103.
ὅδε, τόδε, ἥδε, 558, 563.
use of, 1212, 1390,
1425 f., 1430;
˜olos, 155",
oûros, 1431; -8, 1212.
¿dé ( = oỷdé), 26. b.
¿déïva, 600.
ὕδεινος for δεῖνα, 130, 600,
612.
¿déva (=ovdéva), 26¸ b.
1),
558-62; in N, 560–2. | údeúeiv ddbv, 1265.
ὁ αὐτός, “the same, 1419; ὅδευον, 717 [1].
'the said' (=OûTOS), | idi, 574.
1214", 1420.
δ αὐτός τινι, 1372.
οὗτος),
Οδοιπορέω, 1154.
οδοιπορία, 1154.
ὁ ἕνας τὸν ἄλλο", 1412 f., ὁδοιπόρος, 1115, 1154.
1477.
& idios, the same,' 613.
ὁ καθ᾽ εἶς οι καθείς, 664.
5 kai...?
καί ..., 1718.
δ μή οι ὁ οὐ, 1815.
Skard'surnamed,' 1591.
ὁ μὲν ὁ δέ (ὃ μὲν
1197 a.
¿ ofos, 612, 615, 1219.
δέ),
ὁ οὐ repl. by δ μή, 1815.
d moîós, in M, 512, 1217 f.
¿dovrâs, 1043.
ὀδόντιον, δόντι, 134 b.
Οδοντοπονία, 1145
Οδοντόπονος, 1105.
Οδοντωτός, 1053.
58oroinoe, 717 [1].
ὁδοποίησε,
ὀδυνᾶσαι, 773.
ὀδύρετο, 717 [1].
ὀδύρομαι, 1001.
Οδυσσεύς, 403.
oe for o, 19 a [1].
836.
Οῆθεν, Οἰῆθεν, 20 f.
0ev, as interrog., 1446 B,
2038.
ὀθένα (οὐθένα), 26, b.
θρός for ἐχθρός, 503.
o, diphthong, 19 a; spelt
oe, 19 a [1].
from 0, 29 f.
spurious or hysterogene-
ʊus, 29 f.
'short,' 20; 'long,' ib.,
705.
- pronunciation of, 24, 26
ff., 29 f., 30, 33, 44 ff.,
141b, 716.
conf. with e, 44; with
7, ib.; with 1, 44 f.,
47; with v, 36, 50b.
interchanges with @,
268.
- & Latin oi or oe, 19"
[1], 53.
for w, 26g, 28 a.
- leads to @, 311, 32 ff.;
to ib.
,
01-, in augment, 717; aug-
mented to @-,714; not
augmented, 716.
01-, mistaken for augment,
723; dropped, ib.
-01-, from -OEL-, -on-, -OUL-,
836.
-01, elided, 141.
401, instead of 2 -01, 294.
-01, long in 2ndary subj.,
20, 705.
-01, in verb leads to Looav,
792.
ol, 250; atonon, 98 a; an-
ciently of, 9, 96; see
also and S, TÚ, H.
οἱ παἱ, 560.
ai,
οἱ for αὐτῷ, 530 ; for ἑαυτῷ,
1408 f.
oi dúo, 1214.
of for oi, 96.
of, pers. pron., 526.
of, ubi, 525; as interrog.,
1445 B, 2038.
654
Ι. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ϊ for ὄχι, 155°, 2061.
oía, oa, 20º.
οἷα, with part., 2009, 2152.
οἷα δή, 1737 f., 1742; with
part., 1738, 2150 f.,
2152.
οιακοστρόφουν, 44, 716.
οἴγνυμι, 9435, 996173-
οἶδα, 969 f., 99633; in N,
970b.
as present, 1868 f.
constr., 2133 f., 2137 d.
οίδαμεν, 970.
οἶδαν, 786.
oîdas, 970.
οἴδασι, 970.
οἴδατε, 970.
oidáw & -éw, 852.
οἰκονόμος, Ι1ο6.
οικοσίτωις for -τοις, 263.
οἰκουμένη, ἡ, 1182.
οἰκοῦντα, as adv., 823.
οἰκτειρήσω, 996175
οικτείρω, 926175
οἴκτιρε fur ᾤκτιρε, 716.
οἰκτίρησε, 716.
οἰκτίρω, 996175·
constr., 1332 f.
οἶμαι or οἴομαι, 996178 1004.
+ infin. 2085 f.; 20860 f.;
App. vi. 1o [1], II.
for fut., App. iv. 4.
οἱμᾶς for ὑμᾶς, 44.
-οίμεθα, 802.
~ΟΙΜΕΝ, 802.
οἶδε, τίς
Κύριος
in
N, 970b.
oîdes, 798, 970.
οιδέω & -άω, 852.
οἴδηκεν, 716.
οιδηκώς, 716.
Οἰδίποδαν (τόν), 330, App.
iii. 6 d.
οἴει for οἴῃ, 763, 946178 -
-ΟΙΕΝ, 802.
οἴετο, 44, 716.
Οιῆθεν, Οῆθεν, 20.
οἰηθήσομαι, 996178-
-OHN for -οιμι, 827.
οιήσομαι, 996 178.
οἴκαδε, 434.
οἰκαίτη (του), 278.
οἴκει for οἴκοι, 44.
οἰκεῖν, 72 [2].
οἰκειοπραγείν, 1416.
οἰκεῖος for poss. pron., 556,
1416 f.
οἰκέσεως, 26, α [1].
οἰκέω & -ίζω, 868.
οἰκηθήσομαι, 1885.
οίκησαν, 716.
οἰκήσομαι, 1478, 1882, 1885.
οἴκητο, 716.
οἰκίζω & -έω 868.
οἴκισται, 716.
οικοδομέω, 748;
causat.,
1460.
οἰκοδόμηκεν, 716.
οικοδομημένοι, 45.
οικοδόμησα, 716.
οικοδόμησε, 716.
οἰκοδόμησες, 798.
οἰκοδόμος, 104.
οίκοθεν, 434·
οἴκοι, accent of, 434, 525.
οἰκοία for οἰκία, 44
οἰκονομέομαι (midl.), 1486.
οἱμέρας for ἡμ-, 35.
-ΟΙΜΗΝ, in verb, 802.
OIMI, in 2ndary subj., 802.
repl. by -οίην, 828.
οἴμοι for οἴ μοι, 103.
constr., 1334 f.
οιμώζω, 872, 996177;
998; -έw, 999.
οιμώξω, 999.
-ξομαι,
οἰμώσσω οι -ττω, 996177.
-OIN, in dual 3d decl., 328.
οἰνάρι, App. iii. 7 [r].
οἰνέλαιον, 1156.
Οἰνίδος, 385.
οἰνόγαλα, τύ, 1156.
ονόγαρον, 1156.
οἰνοπότης, 1152.
οἰνοῦσσα, 1067.
οινοχό(ι)η, 20.
οινοχοοῦμαι, 1486.
-OINTO, in verb, 802.
Οινώμαος, 267.
οἰνωμένος, 45, 716.
-010, in 2ndary subj., 802.
οἴομαι, see οἶμαι.
οδον, with causal part.,
2150 f.
οἷον τέ ἐστι, with infin.,
2081 f.
οἷος, 614, 14331; in N, 615
δ
615.
615; in M, 612,
+ superl., 1194 ; see also
οἷον & οἷος τε.
+infin., 2090.
;
οἷος τε, see olos ; - dropped,
1194.
οἷος τ᾽ εἰμί, 2000.
-010C, -005, 20°; in A in-
scriptions, ib.
adj. in, 1072 f.
-OIC, in 2ndary subj., Soz.
-OICAN for -ειαν, 792.
οἶσε, 996293.
οἶσθε, 996178.
-οισθε, 802.
-oiceнN, 802.
οισθήσομαι, 996293 -
-OICOON, 802.
ΐσκε, 2061.
οἴστρησα, 716.
οἴσω, 996293 -
|
-orre, in 2ndary subj., 802.
-οίΤΗΝ, in 2ndary subj., 802.
-OITO,
-Οιτο, in 2ndary subj., 802.
-OITON, in 2ndary subj., 802.
οἴχετο, 716.
οἰχήσομαι, 996 το
οἴχομαι, 996 79, 1001.
179-
as present, 1842.
+ part., 2113.
+ infin., 218ο ?
οἰωνίζομαι, 996180, 1001.
οἰωνίζοντο, 44, 716, 996180-
οἰωνιοῦμαι, 996180
|
οἰωνισάμην, 996180·
οκ for οὐκ, 26. b.
δκάποιος, 612.
δκάτις, 612.
σκρύσεις, κρυόεις, App. ii. 12
[3].
Οκταβιανός, 5Ι.
Οκτάβιος, 5Ι.
οκτάκις, 6.48.
οκτακισχίλιοι, 645.
ὀκτακισχιλιοστός, 646.
ὀκτακόσιοι, 645.
ὀκτακοσιοστός, 646.
οκτάς, 658.
Οκτώ, 645.
οκτωκαίδεκα, 645.
οκτωκαιδεκέτην (τόν), 430.
ὅλα ὅλα, 513.
ὀλέξον fur ὀλείζων, 26. α.
ὀλέσαισαν, 79, 805.
ὀλέσκω, 937.
ὀλέσω, 996182·
ολίας, ὀλίγας, 155.
ὀλιγάκις, 649.
ὀλίγο κατ᾽ ὀλίγο, 1590.
ὀλίγοι & οἱ
1200.
ὀλίγοι ἐκ or ἀπό, 131 2.
¿λíyor, ‘a little,' 1278.
ὀλίγον πρότερον, 1385 f.
ὀλίγον ἔλειψε νὰ, 1903.
ὀλίγος, 134 α.
becomes ὀλιος, 597, 59.
emprt., 505; in P, 504".
ὀλίγου, for little,' 1338;
περὶ —, 1339, 1642.
ὀλίγου δεῖν, 1902, 2008.
655
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ὀλίγους, ὀλίους, 155°.
ὀλιγούτσικον, 1040.
ὀλιγοψύχησε, 717 [1].
ὀλίγῳ ἐλάττους, 1384.
ὀλίγων, ὀλίων, 155.
ὀλιγωρέω, όλιω-, 50 0.
ὀλιγώτερος, 504, 505.
ὀλιότερος, 506.
ὀλιος, ὀλίγος, 59 8, 59.
ὀλίους, ὀλίγους, 155°.
ὀλισθαίνω, 900.
ὀμνύει, 936 α.
ὀμνύειν, ὑμνεῖν, 148, 702.
ὀμνύετε, imprt., 936 a.
ὀμνυέτω, 936 α.
Όμνυμι, 9430, 996183 -
constr., 2085 f., 2086.
+ infin., 2086b f.
τινα, 2059 ;
ὀλισθάνω, -αίνω, 900, 996181 . ομνύς, 996183.
ὀλίων, ὀλίγων, 155°.
τι, ib.
πρὸς θεῶν, 1662.
ὀμνύοντες, 936 α.
ὀμνύουσι, 936 a, b.
ὀμνύω, 936 α, 9961R3 -
ὀμνύων 936 α.
ὁμοιάζω & -όω, 868.
1371 f.
3d person pl. repl. by
-αν, 789.
-ON, in and aor. Ist pers.
repl. by .a, 794; 3d
pers. repl. by -av, 787 f.
-ON or -o" from in com-
pounds, 1146.
ὀναίμην, 9741, 996184.
ναιο, 996184 -
ὄναρ, 43312
•
νασθαι, 9741.
Ονάτας, 283.
ὀλιωρέω, 590.
ὁλκάς, 364.
ὀλλύασιν, 9360.
ὀλλύεις, 936 α.
ὄλλυμι, App. ii. 14 B; 9438,
996182.
peculiarities of, 99711-
becomes ὀλέσκω, 937.
ἐλλύουσιν, 9360.
ὀλόλυζαν (imprt.), 717 [1].
ὁλύτη for της, ἡ, 338, 343,
361, 373, 1047.
δλότητα, ἡ, 338, 343, 1047.
ὁλουθε, 435.
ὀλοφύρομαι, 1001.
ὀλοφύρρω, 29, App. ii. 9.
ὄλυμι, App. ii. 14 1.
Ολυμπᾶς, from Ὀλυμπιόδω-
pos, 287.
Ολύμπια νικᾶν, 1266.
Ολυμπιόδωρος,
becomes
Ολυμπᾶς, 287.
Ολύμπιος, 1040.
Ολύμπις, 298, 1040.
ὀλώλεσμαι, 996132 -
LOMA, in verb, 765 ff.
-ÓмACTE, in verb, 801°.
ὀμεῖ for ὀμόσεις, 889,996183 -
ὀμεῖται for ὀμύσει, 884,
996183.
-όμεθα, in verb, 765 f. ; in
A-B, 801", ii.
in imprf., 780.
LOMEN, in verb, 765 ff.
in imprf., 780.
-MECTA, in N verb, 8orb ii.
-óмнn, imprf., 780; in A-B,
Sorb ii.
Όμικρον for ὃ μικρόν, 9° f.
ὁμίλουν, 717 [1].
Όμιος, 44.
ὀμμάτι, ἀμμάτι, 130.
ὀμματόπονος, 1105.
ὀμνεῖν, ὀμνύειν, 1485, 702.
μνυ, 996183.
ὀμνύασιν, 936 6.
όμνυε, 936 α.
ονειδίζω, 733.
όνειδος, 423.
ὀνείρατα, τά, 297, 43312-
ὀνειρεύομαι, Ιοοο.
ὅμοιος, constr., 1357 f., ὀνείρατος (τοῦ), 43312
ὁμοιύω & -άζω, 868.
ὁμοιώθημεν, 717 [1].
ὁμολογέω, constr. of, 2o87 f.,
2135 ff; with infin.,
2086 f.; -γεῖται παρά
τινος, 1628 ; -γεῖται
παρὰ τῷ δήμῳ, 1632.
ὁμολόγουν, 717 [1].
Ονειροκρίτης, 1ο16.
ὄνειρον, τό, 43312
ὀνειροπολέω, 1104.
overpos, 8, 43312-
ὄνειρος, δ,
ὀνέω, 937, 9741, 9961.1.
ἀνήθη, 717 [1].
'Ornoâs, 287.
Ονήσιμος, 287.
ὁμονοήσατε for ᾧμ, ητη νήσω, 996 134
[r].
ὀμόνω, 9430.
όμορος, 405.
όμορφος, 130, 496.
δμορφότερος, 496.
ὀμόσασιν, 793.
ὀμόσει, 889.
Ομόσεις, 889, 990183
Π
ὁμοστιχάει, App. ii. 1 2 [3].
ὀμύσω, 889, 990183
ὁμοῦ στιχάει, Αpp. ii. 1 2 [3].
ἐμοῦμαι, 889, 990188
ὁμονου, 30.
|
ὀνίνημι ἀνέω, 937, 9741,
996184
•
ὀνίναμαι, 9741, 996184.
τινος, 1298.
ὄνομα, 348, 368; (το) – ‘by
name,' 1233, 1270.
ὀνομάζω τινά τι, 1284 1.
ὀνόμασεν, στη [1].
όνομάσθη, 717 [1].
ὀνόμασται for ὦν -, 717 [4].
ὀνομάτου (τοῦ), 369.
ὠνοῦμαι as pres., 996184
ὄντα (τύ), 823.
·
ὀμπρός for ἐμπρός, 114, 524. -ΟΝΤΑ, as adv. in N, 822 f. ;
for πρό, 1491.
ἐμφακόμελι, 303.
ομφαλός, φαλός, 134 α.
ὀμώμοια, 996183.
ὀμώμοιε, 735.
ὀμώμο(σ)ται, 996189 -
ὀμώνω, 9430, 990183
ὅμως, 1731 Η., 1736; ἀλλ'
1735.
– μέντοι, 1735-
ὀμώσασιν, 793.
ὤν, as accus. absol., 2143;
in P-B, 2145-
őv, repl. by τóv, 607.
from ὖν, 152 [1].
-ON, neuters in, 291.
-ON, gen. -ovos, adj. in, 380.
-ON, imprt., 813; in N, 813.
-ON, imprf., 780; Ist person
|
See also -οντας.
CONTAι, pers. ending, 765 ff.
changed to -ουνται, 778.
ὅνταν, 1782 f., 1792; see
ὅταν.
-ONTAC, as adv. in N, 823,
1102b; see also -ovra.
as part. absol., 2146,
2163.
ὅντεν (= ὅτε, ὅταν), 1488,
1782,1792, 1999.
ὅντηνα, 37.
ΣοΝτο, imprf., 780; in 4-N,
801b, ii.
becomes -ονταν, 790.
ὄντως, 516.
¿vúxiov, vúxi, 134 a.
οξάλμη, 1156.
ὀξέα, ndv., 518.
sing. repl. by -a, 794 f. ; | Οξεία προσωδία, '702, 76.
656
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
Οξείδιον, ξείδι, 134 1.
ὀξειδιν, App. iii. 9 c.
Οξειδύλᾳδον, 1156.
ỏzyBápeιa, 702, 76 [2].
ὀξύγλυκυ, 1156.
οξύθυμος, 1108.
ὀξύμελι, 303, 1157.
ůzÝNEIN as accentual term,
App. i. 9, 19-22.
ὀξύνω, 996185 -
ὀξύρινχος, 35.
ὀξύς, 401.
ožýc as accentual term,
App. i. 9, 19 ff.
ὄξω, έξω, 524 ;
1491.
ἀπό,
00 never substituted for w,
28 a.
-00- contracted to -ov-, 313,
836.
-001-=-OL-, 836.
doiós for ¿ olos, 155, 612,
615.
-ooc for -otos in A inscrip-
tions, 20º.
-ooc, -oon, adj. in, 467.
όπερ, 609.
ömn, as interrog., 1446 B,
2038.
dπηλíños, 614; in N, 615.
ὄπισθεν, with gen., 1314;
ἀπὸ -435.
› 435.
ὀπισθοθέναρ, 126.
ὀπισθέναρ, 126.
ὀπίσω, 20°.
¿πóσos, 614; in N, 615.
δπύσος,
use of, 14332-
as interrog., 1446B, 2038.
ὅπόταν, 1434, 1792.
ὁπόταν, 1776.5;
1792, 1998.
for ὁπότε, 1780.
for part., 2149.
ὄποτε οὔπ-), 26ο Β.
OTTÓTE, 17761,
1792 [1].
as relat., 14332.
1779 f.,
ὅπως ἄν, 176, 1761, 1952f.,
ib.
App. vi. 9 [1], 9b; µn,
1962 f.
όπως μή, 1962 f.
όπωσοῦν, 18230 ; οὐδ᾽ -,
öpa, öpae, öpn, app. ii. 14 A.
δράας, δράεις, Αρ. ii. 1 2 [3].
δραθήσομαι, 990186
ὁρᾶσαι, 773.
1779 ff., ¿paraι for -TE, 49.
as interrog., 1446 B, 2038.
for part., 2149.
constr., 1995 ff., 1999.
+ äv, 1998.
ὁπότερος, 1823 b.
I.
as interrog., 1446 B, 2038.
Oжоυ, adv., 14332; in N,
1434.
for ὅπῃ & ὅποι, 1488.
as interrog., 1446 B,
2038.
2. óпov for ős, 603, 608f.,
1434; objected to, 612.
for 8+ part., 2105.
for ὥστε, 1756, 1951.
proclitic, 97 a, 6081.
reduced to που, 608,
1766.
ὅπου ὅπου, 521.
ὅπου καὶ ἂν (καὶ νά), 1716.
àv vá),
ὅπου καὶ ὅπου, 521.
ὅπου νὰ for ὅς, 2017.
ὀπτούτσικος, 1040.
ὄπχιος or ὄπχος fur
δπλέω & -ίζω, 868.
ὁπλίζω & -έω, 868.
δπλισμένος, 717 [1].
ὁπλοδύτησεν, 717 [1].
ὅπο for ὅπου, 26ο 0.
b.
¿πóðer, as interrog., 1446 B, 2.
2038.
OTTOL, as interrog., 1446 B,
2038.
ὁποιός, 615.
dπоîos, 614; in N, 615; be-
cones πχιος oι ύπχος,
032; 8 612.
>
use of, 14332-
as interrog., 1446 B, 2038.
- repl. by boris, 611; by
Ö,Tɩ, 611Þ.
ὅ,τι,
for els, 1823 h.
ỐπTOLOS, 603, 611.
meaning of, 1434.
for 8+ part., 2105.
ὅποιος καὶ ἂν (κιἄν, καὶ νὰ),
1716.
SπоLOσоûν for Els, 1823 b.
ποῖος,
032.
οπωρικόν, πωρ-, 1340.
1. oπws, relat., 14332.
us interrog., 1446 B,
2038.
πws, final, 1760, 1761;
accomp. by av, 1760,
1761, 1952 f., App. vi.
9 [1].
in final clauses, 1952 ff.
after verbs of effort,
1962 f.
for infin. simple, App.
iv. 4 f. 8.
+ indic. or subj. for
infin., 2079.
fut. indic. for fut.
subj., App. iv. II.
for final part., 2158.
for past action, 1954.
for ὥστε, 1756, 1951.
retreats before ἵνα,
1761, app. vi. 12 & [3].
- reappears, 1761 f.
δράω, 996133 ; εώρων, 726.
constr., 2133 ff.
т, App. vi. 13 [1].
ὀργαίνω, 893.
ὀργιάζω, 868.
ὀργιάω & -άζω, 868.
1. ὀργίζω, 9961-7; -ομαι, ib.
2. opíšoμaι, 996187, 1004,
1006; hate, 1000".
<
τινί
- constr., 1332 f.; Twi
τινος, 1335; TIVOS,
1336, 15834; ὑπὲρ τῶν
γεγενημένων, 1681.
¿pɣioûμai, 1885.
¿pyioon, 717 [1].
ὀργισθήσομαι, 1885.
όργν(ι)ά, 200.
¿pdívevoa, 717 [1].
τ. ορέγω, 990188
2. ὀρέγομαι, 1000
•
- leads to N péyoμai, 723.
+ gen., 1294.
+ accus., 1242, 1299.
ορείχαλκος, 34.
ὕρη, όρα, όρας, App. ii. 1 4 4.
ὄρθα, ἡ, 43318-
ὀρθιάζω, 868.
ὀρθιάω & -άζω, 868.
ὀρθοέπεια, 1113
OpeоTÓNнCIC, 109.
ὀρθύω, 990189.
¿píyavos, & & 1, 292.
ὀρίγανος,
ópiɣváwμaι, 996188
όριγνάωμαι,
Spicw, 868.
•
leads to N siłw, 723.
+ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
Spioere, -σte, 1362, 949.
ὁρισμένον, 717 [1].
Spoμévos, 717 [1].
Ορίστε, ὁρίσετε, 1362, 949.
opixaλnos, 34.
ὁρκίζω σε [μα] τὸν θεόν,
1746b
+ira, App. vi. 16.
ὅρκον ποιοῦμαι, with infin.,
2086b f.
δρικών (ν)ω, 853.
δρμάομαι, 1004.
Spµéw & -{Jw, 868.
ὁρμηθήσομαι, 1885.
657
U u
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ὁρμηνεύω, from έρμ-, 723.
ὅρμησεν, 717 [1].
ὁρμήσομαι, 1885.
δρμίζω & -έω, 868.
ὁρμισμένος 717 [1].
ὁρμοῦντα, as adv., 823.
ὄρνεις, οἱ & αἱ, 43318.
ὄρνιθα, τὴν & ἡ, 43313·
Ορνιθοθήρα (τοῦ), 277.
Ορνιθοθήρας, δ, 1152.
ορνιθόπουλου, 1041.
ὄρνιν (τήν), 33319·
ὄρνιξι, 43318-
+
ὄρνις, 43313.
ὄρνισι", 43319-
Ορόντα (του), 277.
opos, 348, 422.
opos ópós, App. i. 4 & [1],
App. ii. 16 [6].
opov & -s (roû), 341.
¿popη for op-, 72 [3].
ὀρπίδα for ἐλπίδα, 373.
ὀρπίζω for ἐλπ-, 723.
ὀρυγήσομαι, 996190
púyw, as pres., App. iv. 3.
ὀρύζιν, App. iii. 9 c.
ορύζιον, ρύζι, 134 b.
ὀρυζόγαλο, 1105.
ὄρυξ & ὀρυχή, App. iii. 12.
ὄρυξε, imprt., 813.
ὀρύσσω & -ττω, 129, 735,
878 c, 996190-
ορυχή & όρυξ, App. iii. 12.
ὀρφανός τινος, 1318.
Ορφός, δ, 327.
ὀρχειοῦμαι, 1003.
ορχέομαι, 1001, 1003.
Ορχομενός, 125.
ὀρχομένος, 99600
Ορωρεγμένος, 996188.
ορώρεχα, 990188-
δρώρυγμαι, 735, 996100-
δρώρυχα, 735, 990188 &
190.
os, 8, 1, 503 tf., 539,603,604,
606 f.,610; in l'-N,606b.
declension of, 604.
use of, 14331 ?
for final part., 2158.
for & δέ or οὗτος (δέ),
1437b.
for el Tis, 2023.
for αὐτός, 505.
repl. by postpos. article,
1438.
repl. by droîos, 611.
ὅς, ἦ δ'
ᾖ δ' ἥ, 978 ; καὶ
and he,' 1437; 5
612, 1219.
ὃς ἂν for ἐάν τις, 2023.
ὃς ἔφη, 605.
ὃς καί, 1718.
ős for oűs, 26, b.
-oc, subst. & adj. in, 291.
masc. & fem., 291; com-
monest in compounds,
1147.
-oc (5), masc. in, 291.
changed to -as, 296b.
-oc (), fem. in, 291.
how frequent in A, 292;
in P-Ñ, ib.; rare in N,
292b f.
-OC
trees in, 245; why fem.,
ib.; in N -os (d), ib.
changed to masc. or to
fem. in -7, 292.
(TÓ), neuters in, 417,
422, 423, 1023 f., 1045,
1047; in N, 348, 424.
-oc (ró), peculiarities of,
424f.
leads to compound adj.
in -ns, 1148.
-oc, -on, -h or -a, adj. in,
306, 438, 439 f., 441;
in N, 495;
495; from -ns
της
(-es) in compos., 1151.
conf. with adj. in
-OUS,
654.
repl. by N -ύς, ύ, ετά, 496.
-oc (adj.) for ‑ns, 430.
-OC, -ON, adj. in, 309, 465;
in P-N, 306 ff., 466.
in compounds, 1147
1149, 1150.
-oc, in gen. 3d decl., 328.
-Úc (ô, n), IO13, Ion7.
-óc (To^), surviving, 345.
-óc, gen. -óros, in part. pf.,
362.
ús óv from ós éóv éý, 152,
[1].
boa doa, for the lowest
price,' 1278".
Οσάκις, 649.
LOCAN for -av, in verb, 791;
in G-N, 791, 801b i.
ὅσκε, 2061.
ὀσμάομαι, 1000, root.
ὅσο for ἕως οὗ, 1785 f.;
νά, 1786, 1793; see ὦσο.
öoov, as far as,' 1278.
'as soon as,' 1999.
ὅσον το οι ὅσον τα, 1194.
Soov xpóvov, 17766 ·
boos, App. ii. 9, 614; in N,
όσος,
615.
use of, 14331 f.; in N,
1434.
|
doos + infin., 2090.
>
ὅσος, δ 612, 1219.
ὅσος καὶ ἄν or καὶ νά, 1716.
ὅσπερ, όπερ, ήπερ, 603, 609.
Somiri, App. iii. 7 [1].
-ócco (verbs in); from-woa?
853b.
ὀστέον, 321.
ὅστις ὅ,τι (or ὅ τι), ἥτις,
603, 610, 615.
use of, 14332-
for os, 1435.
for ὁ δέ or οὗτος (δέ),1437.
for el Tis, 2023.
for &+ part., 2105.
for els, 18238.
as interrog., 1446 B, 2038.
repl. by postpos. art.,
1438.
repl. by omoios, 611.
ὅστις ἄν for ἐάν τις, 2023.
ὅστις καὶ ἄν, 1716.
doTiσoûr for els, 1823 b.
¿σToÛV, T6, 313, 321.
Οστρακᾶς, 287.
ὀστρείδιον, στρείδι, 134 1.
οσφραίνω, 9961 οι
οσφραίνομαι, 996191, 1001.
+ gen., 1325 ff.
οσφράομαι, 996191
ooppoμai (present), 996191-
ὀσφύς, 388.
ὅσῳ ... τοσούτῳ, 1384.
-OT-,
%rav (from őre av), 1434,
in participles, 820.
1773, 1776, 1779 ff.,
1998, 1999.
becomes vrav, 1782;
ὅντεν, ib.; ὅτι νά, ib.
replaces ore, 1488, 1780.
for part., 2149.
+ indic., 1987 ff.
repl. by èáv, 1975.
őre, 1776, 1779ff., 1792[1].
becomes ὅντεν, 1782.
constr., 1995 ff., 1999.
+ av, 1998.
for ὅταν, 1988.
for part., 2149.
+ subj., 122, 1987, 1988,
1990.
repl. by oτav, 1780, 1987.
repl. by ei, 1975-
retreats before
1988, 1990.
ὅταν,
in present speech, 1792
[1].
őre, as relat., 14331-
28 interrog., 1446 B,
2038.
658
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
-ÓτЄpoc, in N cmprt., 495, | -ÓTT∞ (verbs in), from -woa, | ou, an emphatic où, 100,
496.
-ÓTH (†), in N for -bтns, 361.
-OTHC (†), gen. -ÚTηTOS, 360,
ὅτι,
361.
-ÓTHTA, in N, for -óτns, 361.
'that which,' written
ὅ,τι οι ὅ τι, στο [1];
610
see ő,TI.
conf. with woTE, 1757.
because,'
öri, 'because,'
ὅτι,
1945 f.
1737 £f.,
for causal part., 2151.
repl. by @s, App. vi. 14.
ὅτι for διὰ τί, ‘why, 2044.
Ti (declar.), 'that,' 1751-5;
becomes dióti, 1753 f.,
App. vi. 12 A ; καθότι,
A;
App. vi. 12; ὡσότι,
1754 f.
repl. by πws, 1755; app.
vi. 14.
replaces &s, App. vi. 12.
πως, 1755.
ori, 'that,' constr. in declar.
clauses, 1940, 1942.
+ indic. for infin., 2063,
2079, 2082, 2089, App.
vi. 7 a, 10 & [1] f.
+infin., 2030, App. vi.
6 ff.
followed by uń, 1818.
redundant, 2031 f.
for wote, 1756 ff., 1951.
before superl., II
94.
TI + fut. in N repl. by @s
Đá, 20864.
ὅτι μή, 1818.
ὅτι νά for ὅταν & ὅτε, 1488,
1773, 1782 f., 1794.
ὅτι πῶς, 1755.
ő,Ti or 8 Ti, 79, 603, 610 [1],
ὅ,τι
VII; see also ὅστις.
in N, 611, 1434.
for olos, 591, 610; for
ὁποῖος, 6irb
ὅ,τι καί, 1794.
ὅ,τι καὶ ἄν, 1716.
I
ὅ,τι καὶ νά, 1716.
ὅ,τι ἔχων, ‘why, 2044.
ὅ,τι μαθών, ‘why, 2044 f.
ὅ,τι παθών, ' why, 2044.
ότινος, (II.
ὅτις for ὅστις, 61 1.
ὅτοις, 610.
ὅτοισι", 61ο.
>
ÚTOV, 546, 610; Ews
1785; ap' —, έξ
1790.
Οτρυνες, 26. α.
853.
öтW, 610.
Öтwv, 610.
224.
οὖ, old name for 8 μικρόν, 2,
9, 9º, App. ii. 10.
OY, oy, proper diphthong, où for où, 530.
où for ó, 030.
19.
'long,' 20; never 'short,'
28 a.
genuine, 34b; rare, ib. ;
from ou leads to u,
32d; affects v, 29ª, 35b.
for o, 6 ff., 27, App. ii. 7 f.,
9, 10, 14.
- spurious, 29 f., 34b; app.
ii. 7, 9, 12, 14; very
common, 34b; origin-
ally o, 6, 12.
conf. with o,
26 f.
|
|
λόγους fur ὁ λόγος,
030.
où, pers. pronoun, 526.
où, relat. pron., 604.
repl. by Tоû, 607.
où, relat. adv., 14331.
as interrog., 1446 B, 2038.
-oy (TOû), in 1st decl., 262,
276; in 2d, 293.
-oy for -ous (TOU), 432 C.
Loy, imprf., 780, 782.
-Oy, imprt. in N, 814.
-OY
leads to u, 29 f., 32 ff., 35-oy,
from 0, 29 f., App. ii. 9,
12, 14.
in Thessalian, App. ii. 7.
as to Latin V, 53.
Oy + a=a, 150 b.
OY
où or ouk, 223, 1796-1828.
- proclitic, 97 e.
atonon, 98 d.
emphatic
accented or
(oű), 100.
history of, 1796-1828.
où, use of, 1801 ff., 1814 ff.,
1820.
in conditions, 1807bf.,
- in
1810 f.
questions,
17472)
1748, 1750,
1750, 2046 f.,
2049.
after μn, 1805, 1825.
before un, 1827 f., 2051".
repl. by μn, 1815 ff.
for μή, 18:9; in condit.
clauses, 1808 f., 1810 f.;
in prohibitions, 1819.
+indic. for 'cannot,'
1837.
μń, 1827 f., 2051.
où, 'no,' in answers, 2059,
2061.
οὐ δέδοικα μή, 1827.
οὐ δενύν ἐστι μη, 1827.
où μd with acc., 1260.
οὐ μὰ Δία, 2059.
où µèv for où µýv, 17442.
οὐ μή, 1827 f., 2051; with
fut. subj., 1827, app.
iv. 8.
οὐ μή, nonne?, 2051.
où µýv, 1827 f.; changed
μήν,
το οὐ μή, 1827 f.
οὐ . . . πᾶς for οὐδείς, 1823 c.
659
|
-oŶ
retreats from active
voice, 857.
(†), 1043; as fem. of
-âs, 1043 f.
oy-, in augment, 717.
not augmented, 715.
-OY-, from -oe or -00, 81,
836.
ovaí, constr., 1334.
οὐδαμοῦ,
ovdaμoû, with gen., 1314.
ovdaµŵs, 1796, 1802 ff.; in
N, 1449°.
in answers, 2059.
oùdé, 1721, 1723b f., 1796.
use of, 1802 ff.
repl. by undé, 1821.
oudé, in N, from oùdév, 1799.
ovdè eîs, 629, 1823 a; repl.
by οὐ . . .
Tâs, 1823 c.
nus' av eîs, 629.
οὐδ᾽ ἕνα, 665.
οὐδ' ὁποιοσοῦν, 1823 b.
oùò' ¿πbтepos, 1823 b.
οὐδ᾽ ὁστισοῦν, 1823 b.
oud' inwσoûv, 1823.
οὐδ᾽
ovdels (ovdeîs), 625; in N,
626.
intensified, 1823.
use of, 1796, 1802 ff.
repl. by ovde eis, 629,
1823; by undeís, 1821;
by τίς ού, 629°, 1449,
1821.
how expr. in N, 1449".
οὐδεὶς οὐ, 1824 f.
ovdeís èotiv boris, 1435.
οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅστις οὐ, 2015.
οὐδεὶς ὅστις, 1435.
oùdév, 1798 ff.; in N, 630.
for ovdaµŵs, 'not at all,'
1278, 1385, 1798.
U u 2
A
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
οὐδέν, for simple οὐ, not, | -ΟΥΜΟΥΝ for -ούμην, 8ο1 f.,
630, 1798 f.; in ques-
tions, 2049.
becomes proclitic, 1799.
shortened to dév, 608,
630, 1799.
οὐδὲν ὅ,τι, 1435.
οὐδὲν πρὸς ἐμέ, 1657 α.
οὐδὲν φροντίζειν, 1266.
οὐδὲν χρῆσθαι τι, 1266.
ovdéva for -dév, app. iii. 25.
oùdévav for -va, App. iii. 9 c.
οὐδένας for μηδείς, 626.
οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ, 1382.
οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ, 1382.
-OYE-0, 150º.
οὐθείς, 627.
οὐθεμία, 628.
ი,
οὐθέν for οὐδέν, 627, 1798 f.
οὐκ, 223 ; see οὐ.
why closes with -x, 218°.
οὐκ ἂρα, 1748.
οὐκ . . . εἰ μή, 1981.
οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως, 2015;
οὐ, ib.
οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις, 1435.
οὐκ . . . οὐδείς, 1824 f.
οὐκ ἔφθην—καί, 1714, 2115.
οὐκ ἔχω + infin., App. vi.
17c.
οὐκ οὖν, 1748.
οὐκ ὑπάρχει, 114.
οὐκὲ for οὐ, 208.
οὐκέτι, 2061.
οὐκί for οὐ, 1797, 2061.
-OÝKHC (ó), 1040 Dɑ.
-OŶKIN (TÚ), 1040 1) a.
-OÝKION (TÓ), 1040 D.
-0ÝKIOC (5), 10406, 1040 D.
-OŶKIC (8), 1040 D a.
-oýkoc (³), 1040 D.
οὐκοῦν,
OÙkoûν, interrog.,
1748 f.
-oŶλa (†), 1059-
17472,
|
859b.
-OÝMOYNA, in N verb, 801º.
-oÝMOYNE, in N verb, 801º.
ovv, 1700, 1748.
-OYN, from -εov or -oov, 852.
-ΟΥΝ, from -ουσι”, 777.
-OŶNTAI for -ŵvтaι, 850b ff.
Σουνται for ζονται, 778.
LOYNTA”, in N verb, 801b ii.
-OÝNTAN, in N verb, 801º.
-OÝNTACI", in N, 801b [2].
-έοντες οι
-OŶNTEC from -ÉOVTES or
-ύοντες, 852.
-OŶNTO from
-έοντο
or
-ύοντο, 852.
οὔποτε for οὔ ποτέ, 103,
1796; in N, 1499º.
use of, 1802 ff.
ovπw, use of, 1796, 1802 ff.
οὔπω—καί, 1714.
oúpavía, whence derived, 41.
Οὐρβίκιος, 1040 0.
-oyрrг-, 1113 f.
ουρέω, 996192-
οὔρησα, 153, 996102-
οὐρητιάω, ΙΙΟΙ.
Ουρίας, 283.
Ουρσάκιος, 1040 0.
Οὐρφίλας, 187.
οὔτε, 627, 17ο6, 1723 f.,
1796.
use of, 1802 ff.
for oùdé, 1722, 1723".
repl. by μήτε.
οὔτε ούτε, 1723 f., 1730.
οὔτε ἕνα, 665.
οὔτε ἕνας for οὐδὲ εἷς, 62g.
-ούτζικος, 1040 [1].
-OŶTZIN (TÓ), 1040 Db [1].
-OŶTZIC (5), 1040 Db [1].
-OŶTZOC (8), 1040 0 b & [1] c.
οὕτῃ for τῇδε, 567.
οὔτις for οὔ τις, 103.
οὗτοι (--), 85.
οὗτον, 567.
οὗτος for οὗτος, 84-
οὗτος, τοῦτο, αὕτη, 539, 558,
565.
use of, 1397 f., 1428 f.;
8, 1212; kai - 1432.
repl. by airós, 1418b;
by ὁ αὐτός, 1420.
8
- (dé) repl. by öσтis or ös,
1437b.
for a relat., 1444.
& öde, 1431.
ουτοσί, 132, 574.
ovтpavós, veteranus, 1361.
-OÝTCHC (8), 1040 D b.
-oŶc, subs. in, 408; in N, -OÝTCIKOC, 1040".
409.
-OŶTCIN (TÓ), 1040 d b.
-OŶTCIC (5), 1040 D b.
in-ofтCOC (5), 1040 D, 1040”.
OÚTw(s), 222, 516º, 562.
& ade, 1431.
οὕτως ἔχω βίου, 1314.
οὕτω ζῴην οι ὀναίμην, 1746.
ovwos (oûλos, üλos), 187c.
-OYX-, 1113 f.
οὐχ είδον, 1 14.
οὐχ ἰδόντες, 114.
οὐχ ιδού, 114.
iyos, 114.
-oŶc, from -beış, 1067.
-OYC, -OYN, -H (-a), adj.
-,320 f., 443, 1060 f.
-OYC, -OYN, adj. in, 467.
in emprt., 499 b.
-conf. with adj. in -os, 654.
-oýc, -ón, -oŶca, part. in,
455; in N, 456, App.
iii. 13.
οὖς, τύ, 351, 43315
οὖσα for -σαν, App. iii. 22 ο.
Ovλeσíkaρπos, App. ii. 12 [3]. -oŶCAN, not Lovoav, 789 end.
-OÝλHC (5), 1059.
ουλος for ὅλος, 187.
-ογλός, adj., 1059.
-oŶmat for -ŵμaι, 850 ff.
-oÝмeea, from -cóμela &
-ούμεθα, 852.
-oÝмeða for -úμeða, 850¹ ff.
-oŶmen for -éoµev or -boμev,
852.
-OŶMEN from -@µev, 850³ ff.
οὐμήν, 1827.
-OÝMHN from -εóμη or
-ούμην, 852.
LoÝMOY", in N verb, 801
ii.
ovoía, in N, 155 c.
-ʊycı", in verb, 765 ff.; from
-οντι οι -ονσι, 768.
attracts -av, 793.
survives in N, 777-
becomes -ovv, 777.
-oŶcı" for -ŵot", 850¹ ff.
-oÝcoYN for -eloo, 859".
Loycoy", in N verb, 801b ii,
801º.
-CÝCOYNA, in N verb, So1º.
-oÝCOYNE, in N verb, 801º.
-oŶcca (†), 1067.
-ofтal for -ŵτaι, 850º.
|
ox
οὐχ ὄψεσθε, 114.
οὔχί, 2061.
¿parús, 193.
ὀφεῖδι, 1038.
õpeiλes, 717 [1].
ὀφειλέτη for -ται, 48.
ὄφειλον, 717 [1].
ὀφειλήσω, 996193
ὀφείλουσιμ for -σιν, 203.
¿peíλw, App. ii. 14B; 996193 ·
+infin., 2088, app. vi.
12 c [3].
+infin. for fut., 1894,
1896, app. iv. 4.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
660
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
οφέλλω, App. ii. 14 Β.
ὄφελον, 717 [1], 996193 •
for ὤφελον, 1905.
ὀφέλω, ὀφείλω, App. ii. 14. B.
ὄψεων for -έων, App. i. 15.
ὄψεως for -έως, Αpp. i. 15 0.
ὀψήλω, ὀφείλω, App. ii. 14. B.
ὄψης for ὄφις, 343, 396, App.
iii. 14.
τι,
ὀφθαλμιάω, 1100;
12443, 1457.
ὀφθαλμός, φταρμός, 134α,
187.
ὀφθήσομαι, 996186
ὄφις, 395; becomes ἔφης,
343, 396, App. iii. 14.
ὀφλήσω, 996194
ἐφλισκάνω, 990194
φλω, 996193 f.
as present, App. iv. 3.
ὀφρύδιον, φρύδι, 134.
¿‹œpûs, 388, 389.
ὐχ for eu, see ἐξ.
ὄχεσκε, 2001.
οχθέω & -ίζω, 868.
οχθίζω & -έω, 868.
ox', 'no,' 2060 f.
becomes ő, 155º.
- κα, 2061.
ὄχικα, 2001.
-όω, & -έω, 851.
how far surviving, 855,
856.
becomes -ώνω, 853.
-ow-=-w-, 836.
Π, π, origin of, 2.
forms of, 2, 5 [2], 9.
sound of, 9.
a labial, 22.
a tenuis, 22, 23b.
- a mute, 23.
п becomes p, 170 f.
π'(=80), 645.
πᾷ, from πά(γ)ει.
Πάβλος, 51.
παγαιμένος, 9963.
πάγεις, πάεις, πως, 150 d.
πάγῃ, πάῃ, 155°.
παγήσομαι, 996209.
πάγκαλος, 1134.
πάγος, ὁ & τό, 249, 424.
πάγω, πάω, 863, 9963.
from ὑπάγω ?, 723.
from ὑπαγάγω ?, 737.
παγωτόν, 1052.
πάεις, πᾶς, 150 ε, 863.
πάῃ, πάγῃ, 155.
παναι, 996199-
παθαίνω, 900 f., 996197.
παθάνω, 901.
ὀχτακόσιοι & -σοι, 645, 800. πάθη fur -θῃ, 20°.
ὄχισκε, ὄσκε, ἔσκε, 2061.
Οχτάδιπλος, 654.
Οχτρεύομαι, 10002.
οχτρός, 130, 503.
οχτώ, οκτώ, 174, 645.
ὀχυρωμένος, 717 [1
ὀχύρωσαν, 717 [1].
ψαρᾶς, 1044.
ὀψάριν, τό, 331, App. iii. 7.
Οψάριον, ψάρι, 134 1.
ὄψει for ὄψη (fut.), 763,
996180-
ὄψη for ὄψις, ή, 248, 343,
396, App. iii. 14.
ὄψι, ή, 248, 344.
ὄψιμος, 1055.
ὄψις, ή, 248, 395 ; becomes
ὄψη, 248, 343, 396, App.
iii. 14.
ὄψομαι, 996180 -
πάθημα, 348.
παθημάτοις (τοῖς), 346.
παθητός, 1052.
πάθνη, ἡ, 179.
παθνίον, παχνί, 179.
πάθος, 348, 423, 424,
μάθος, App. iii. 12.
παθός for -θών, 338, App.
iii. 12.
πάθω, 996107.
παθωμένος, 996197.
παθών becomes παθός, 338,
App.i
.iii. 1 2 ; Tí —, 2044f.
παιγμένος, 996 105
παιδαγωγός, 111.
παιδάκι", 1038.
παῖδαν (τόν), App. iii. 6 f.
παῖδες καὶ γυναῖκες, 1234.
παιδεύγω, 861.
long record of, App. iv. παιδευθήσομαι, 1885.
as present, 996186 ·
Iob.
υψοφάγος, in emprt., 5or.
παιδεύσομαι, 1885.
παιδεύω &
ψωνίζω, 868.
ὀψώνιον, ψώνι, 134 b.
-ύω, verbs in, 836.
meaning of, 1o89.
in P-N, 850 ff.
pass., 1462;
causat., 1460.
τινά τι, 1279 f.; -ομαι
πρὸς ἀρετήν, 1657 c.
παιδία, 38 (twice).
παιδήᾳ, 38 (twice).
παιδί, 1038 ; becomes π'δί,
030.
παιδιά, 155 c f.
παιδιά for ἆρα, 2048 [2].
παιδιὰ καὶ γυναῖκες, 1235·
παιδίν, 302, App. iii. 9 a.
παιδίου, 153, 155 cf.
παιδόγγονα, τά, 152, 1156.
παιδοέγγονα, 152, 1156.
παιδολέτωρ, 472.
παιδοποιγίαν, 155.
παιδοτρίβης, 2831, 1111.
παίδων for -δῶν, 351.
παίζει for -ξεις, 219.
παίζω, 867, 996195
παιζωγελῶ, 1157.
παιήσω, 996196-
παινάω for ἐπαινάω, 135,
723, 843b, 854.
παίξαι, 996100-
παίξομαι, 996195-
παίξω, 996195-
παίρνω from ἐπαίρω, 135,
720, 723, 903, 996.
παις, 351, 365; ἐκ παιδός,
1234 1.
πάις οι παίς from
or
παντε
(πᾶς), 29, App. ii. 9.
παῖσα, πᾶσα, Αpp. ii. 14 Β.
παῖσαι, 996190
παίσατε, 990195
παίσειν, 996283 •
παισμένος, 990196
παίσομαι, 990195
παίσω, 996 190
Tаiw, 701, 996196;
κατὰ
στέρνον, 1585.
for πλήττω, 1585.
πάλαθρον, σπάλ-, 130.
πάλαι, in compos., 1120 f.
+ present, 1833.
παλαιά Γράμματα, App. ii. 12.
παλαιάθρωπος, 1112, 1145-
παλαίγω for παλαίω, 860.
παλαιόπαιδο", 1146.
maλaiós, 155, 497, 498; be-
cones παλιός, Ο32.
παλαιότερος, 498.
παλαίτερος, 497.
παλαίφυτος, 1120.
παλαίω, 860.
παλαμάομαι, 10ΟΙ.
παλαμά (-ιά), 1027.
παλαμιδόκομμαν, spp. iii. 9 c.
πάλιν, in compos., 112o f.
παλούς for παλαιός, 032.
Πάλλας, 283.
παλλίν, App. iii. 7.
παλούκι, τό, 1040 D.
παμμέλας, 446.
661
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
παμμήτειρα, 472.
παμμήτωρ, 472.
πάμπολυς, 1134.
ΠΑΝ-, 1134.
Παναγιά μου νά, 1906.
Παναθήναια, 1134.
Παναθηναίοις, 1391.
Παναθήναιος, -ναις, 299.
πανδαμάτειρα, 472.
πανδαμάτωρ, 472.
πανδημεί, 2061 [1].
πανθάνω, 901, 996107.
πανιστρου, 1026.
παννυχίζομαι, 1486.
πανουργέω, 1154.
πανουργία, 1134, 1154.
πανοῦργος, 465, 1154.
Πανούτσος, ΙΟ4o.
πανρησία, παρρησ-, App. ii.
14 B.
πάνσα, πάσα, App. ii. 14 B.
πάντα, adν., 449, 1278.
πάντα, τά, 1278.
παντάλας, 446.
παντάπασι, 220g.
πανταχοῦ, with gen., 1314.
πάντες ἐκ οι ἀπό, 1312.
πάντες (τούς), 332.
πάντες ὅσοι, 1435.
παντὶ σθένει, 233.
παντὶ τρόπῳ, 1382.
παντοδύναμος, 1134.
πάντοθεν, 434.
παντοκράτωρ, 1134.
πάντων for -τῶν, 352.
πάντως, 515, 516.
πάνυ, 515; for sprlt., 490.
πάνυ γε, 2059.
πάνυ μὲν οὖν, 2059.
Πάνφαιος, 184.
πανώλεθρος, 1134.
πανώλοι for -λεις, 430.
πανώλης, 1 1 34.
πανώραιος, 1073, 1134.
παξημάδιν, App. iii. 9 c.
πάπα (του), 277.
παπάδες, οἱ, 289.
παπαδία, ή, 289.
παρ' τόν, App. i. 16 α.
πάρ' τόν, 142, App. i. 16 b.
πάρα πάρεστι, 111.
παρά, 1489, 1610-32; iu N,
1491.
use of, 1610-1632.
παρά + accus., 1610-26.
παρὰ τοσοῦτον, 161g.
παρὰ τοὺς νόμους, ὅρκους,
1625.
παρὰ τρία (τέσσαρα, etc.),
1619b f.
παρὰ τρίχα νά, 1903.
παρὰ φύση, 1626.
παρὰ φύσιν, 1626.
with,
b
for πρός or ὡς, 161 1 1 f.
as compared
1614 f., 1734.
for ἢ or gen. of comparison,
1188, 1615 f., 1734.
for gen. of superiority or
inferiority, 1329.
for ὑπὲρ + accus., 1488,
1615 f.
against, 1625 f.
'minus,' 644, 1625 f.
'except,' 1620, 1734 ff.
before a numeral, 644.
after comparatives, 1188,
1615 f., 1734.
παρά + gen., 1627-32.
for ὑπό + gen., 1464,
1465", 1628.
for ἀπό, 1628.
for simple gen., 1629.
παρά + dat. at, by,
1611 f., 1630.
for accus., 1631.
for gen., 1632.
apud, 1630.
>
παρά, redundant, 1629.
παρά, repl. by ἀπό, 1491,
1510; by εἰς, πλησίον,
etc., 1491.
παρ' εἷς, 664.
παρ' ἐλπίδα, 1626.
παρ' ἐνιαυτόν, 1622.
παρ' ἡμέραν (μίαν), 1621.
παρ' ὀλίγον, 1619 f.
παρ' ὅλον τὸν βίον, 1612.
παρ' οὗ for παρὰ μοῦ, 72.
παρ' οὐδέν, 161g.
παρ' τόν, App. i. 16 α.
nàp' тóv, 142, app. i. 16 b.
παρὰ γνώμην, 1625.
παρὰ δόξαν, 1625.
παπαδίτζης, δ, 289, 1040 0 c. παρὰ δύο (τρεῖς, πέντε, etc.),
παπαδίτζιν, τό, 289.
παπαδοποῦλα, ἡ, 1041.
παπαδόπουλο", 1041.
παπαδόπουλος, 1041.
πάπας, omitted, 1227.
παπᾶς, 287, 290.
παπία (του), 277.
πάππα (ω), 257.
1619b f.
παρὰ 'λίγο, 1619, 1903;
- καί, 1903 ; — νά, ib.
παρὰ λόγον, 1626.
παρὰ μέρος, 1622.
παρὰ μῆνα τρίτον, 1621.
παρὰ μίαν, 1622.
παρὰ μικρόν, 1619 f.
παρὰ πολύ, 1619.
παρὰ πότον, 1612.
πάρα πολύ, 1616.
παρα- for ὑπερ-, 1616, 1618.
for -τέρω, 524, 1618.
constr. of compounds
wilh, 1378.
παραβάλλω, 742.
παραβέβαιος fur ὑπερβ-,
1616.
παραβέβληκα, 742.
παραγγελλέτοσαν, 267.
παραγγέλλω, 904; becomes
-λνω or -ρνω, ib.
constr., 2087 1.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
παραγγένω, 904.
παραγγέρνω, 904.
παραγενέσται, 177.
παραγωγή, 132.
παράδεισο, ή, 449.
παράδεισος, δ, 249.
παραδῇ for -δοῖ, 99651
παραδίδει, 961, 996 1.
παραδίδοι (subjunc.), 779.
παραδίδωμι (intr.), 14564.
παραδοι & -δῇ, 996 σι
παραδόσαντες, 996 1
παραδόσθαι, 736 [2].
παραδώσαντα, 996 1
παραδώσατε, 996 1
παραδώση, 996 1.
παραδώσωσιν, 996 1.
61
παραεμπρός παραμηρός, 150 c.
παραέξω, 524.
παραέσω, 524.
παραζώννυμαι, 1486.
παραθῆσαι, 959 α.
παραινέω, 843.
+ ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
παραιτήσαντο, 750 c.
παρακαλέω + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
παραπάνω, 1616.
παρακατιών, 524.
παρακάτω, 524.
παρακελεύομαι, 1001.
παρακοιμοῦμαι, 1616.
παρακοίτης, 993.
παράκοιτις, 993.
παρακρατέω + accus., 12441
παραμήκην, App. iii. 6 e.
παραμπρός, 150 €, 524.
παππίας, 283.
παππούς, δ, 322.
πάπυρος, δ & ἡ, 292.
παραμυθέομαι, 1001.
παρά τινι for παρά τινος, 1632. | παράνομος, 465.
662
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
παράνω, 524, 1616, 1618; | Παρένθεσις, 70g.
ἀπό (for ὑπέρ), 1491,
16766, 1678.
παραξενίζομαι, Ioodb.
παραοπίσω, παραπίσω, 150 α.
παραπάνω, 1618, 1677.
παραπεινῶ for ὑπερ-, 1616.
παραπέρα, 524.
ὑπερπι-
παραπικραίνω for
κραίνω, 1616.
παραπίσω, παραοπίσω, 150 α,
524.
παραπολύ, 1616.
παραπονέομαι & -άομαι, 854,
1000b; τινος, 336.
παραπονημένη, 736.
παρασκευάζομαι, with ὅπως or
ὡς, 1962; with infin.,
2086b f.
παρασπονδέω τινά, 1244,
1457; -έομαι (pass.),
1458.
παρασπονδημένας, 750 d.
παραστανέτω, 962.
παραστορώ, 996200-
παρατίθειν, 959 α.
παραστώ, 962.
παρατίθων, 959 α.
παρατρέχω + accus., 12441
παρατρώγω, 1616.
παραφίων, 96ο α.
παραχωρέω + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
παραψίδιον, παροψίδιον, 126.
παρβαίνουσι, App. i. 16 a.
Πάρδικος, 107.
πάρε, τό, App. vi. 27.
παρεδίδει, 961.
παρεδίδεις, 961.
παρεδίδετο, 961.
παρεδίδης, 961.
παρέξ, 1731, 1734, 1736.
παρέξω, 524.
παρέστακα, 973.
παρεστησάμην, 1486,
παρεστώσοι for -σῃ, 35.
παρεσχέθην for -θη, App. iii.
19.
παρέσω, 524.
πάρετε, πάρτε, 1362, 949.
παρέχουν for - χειεν, 805.
παρέχοισαν, 792, 805.
παρέχοντα, as adlv., 823.
παρέχω, differs from -ομαι,
1471.
ἐμαυτόν τι, 1282.
+ infin., 2094 ff.
παρά, παρειά, 28 1.
παρηγορέομαι, 1486.
πάρεδρος, 72 [4].
παρθένα, ἡ, 292.
Παρθένις, 298.
other peculiarities of,
1240.
πᾶς ὅστις, 1435.
πᾷs, from πάεις, 150 (7, 863.
πᾷς for μήπως, 2049.
πᾶσα, App. ii. 10, 141;
indecl., 449, 665.
B;
πᾶσα εἷς, 621, 626.
Πασικράτη (του), 278.
πασκίζω, 869, 990197
πάσκοι for - σχοι, 17.
πάσκω, πάσχω, 177, 869,
996197, 1098.
πασσαλείφω, 1157.
πάσσω, 879, 880.
πασχίζω, 868, 869, 996107.
πάσχω, 869, 996197, 1998.
intr., 1456; τί παθών,
'why,' 2044 f.
παταγμένος, 996198 -
παταμένος, 990198
παρθένος for -νους, App. ii. πατάσσω, 880, 996198.
ΙΟ.
παριστάνοντος, 962.
παριστάνω, 962.
παριστάω, 962.
Παρμενᾶς, Παρμενίδης, 287.
Παρμενίδης, Παρμενᾶς, 287.
παρμένος, 9965.
παρό for παρά (= εἰμή), 1736.
πάροδος for παράποδος, 72.
παρόν, as accus. absol., 2143;
in P-B, 2145.
παροξύνω, 996186·
constr., 2087 ff.
παρύξω, 524.
παροπίσω, 524.
παρουσιάζομαι, 1458.
παρουσιάζω, 10002.
παρεδόθη for -θην, App. iii. παροψίδιον, παραψ-, 126.
22 d.
παρεδώκασι, 793.
παρεδώκατε, 952.
παρειά, παρά, 28 b.
παρείδαν του -δον, 787.
παρείλαντο, 9964.
παρείληφαν, 786.
πάρειμι, 984.
παρεισάγω, 74Ι.
παρεισεδύησαν, 99650.
παρεισηγμαι, 741.
παρεισήγον, 741.
παρακαλοῦσαν, 789.
παρέκει, 534, 1618.
παρεκτός, 1731 ;
ἐὰν μή, 1735·
παρελάβοσαν, 791.
παρελείσθαι, 9964.
παρεμπρός, 524.
εἰ
μή,
παρρησία, App.ii. 141; 1134.
παρρησιάζω, 1003.
παρρησιάζομαι, ΙΟΟΙ.
for παρουσιάζομαι, 10002.
παρρησίη, App. ii. 14 1.
πάρτε, πάρετε, 1362, 949.
παρ' τόν, App. i. 16 α.
πάρ' τόν, 142, App. i. 16 b.
πάρω for ἐπάρω, 996.
παρῶ (not πάρω), 984.
παράδε, 524, 564.
παρώξυγκα, 996186-
παρώχηκα, 996170
πᾶς, παντός, 352, 448, 449,
516, App. ii. 9, 14 B.
becomes παν- in emprt.,
1134.
repl. by κάθε, 665.
position & sense of, 1239;|
πατάξω, 996198.
for παίω, 906 190
πατειέται, 858.
•
πατείρ for -τήρ, 29, App.
ii. 9.
πατέρ, δ, App. ii. 9.
πάτερ (ω), 383; ὁ ¿ 386.
πατέρα (@), App. iii. 15.
πατέραν (τόν), App. iii. 6 d.
πατέρας, δ, 339, 386, App.
iii. 3, 12 0.
πατέρος, frown πατέρα, App.
i. 16 a.
πατέω, 857 ; intr., 1456.
πατημένος, 849.
πατήρ, 29, 383.
πατήσω, 849.
πατητήρι, 304.
πατητήρι, 1026.
Πάτινο, ἡ, 179, 292.
Πάτμος, Πάτινο, 179, 2920.
πατραλοία (του), 277.
πατράσι (τοῖς), 383.
πατριάρχης, δ, 298 ; omitted,
1227.
πατρίδαν (τήν), 330, Αγ.
iii. 6 d.
Πατρίκης, 1040 0 α.
Πατρίκιος, 1040 0.
Πατρινός, 1980.
πατρώϊος, πατρῷος, 1561.
πατρός (του), 1361, App. i.
16 a.
πατρῷος, πατριος, 156 1
1072.
πάτρως, 415.
πάτ' σα for ἐπάτησα, 713.
navyw, 861, 996199-
663
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
πανε, 996190
παύειν, 817.
παύεσο, παύου, 762, 809.
παυθείς, 820.
παυθεῖσα, 820.
παυθέν, 820.
παυθέντς, 820.
παυθῆναι, 816.
παύθητι, 808.
παλα, 700
παυόμενος, 821.
πανον, 820.
παύου, 809.
παύουσα, 820.
παῦσαι, 810, 818.
παυσάμενος, 821.
παῦσαν, 820.
Παυσανίας, 283.
παύσας, 820.
παύσασα, 820.
παῦσε, 8ιο.
παυσόμενος, 821.
παῦσον, 810, 820.
παύσου, διο.
παύσουσα, 820.
παύσων, 820.
παύω, 700 f., 817, 875,
996199; constr., 1822.
& -ομαι (mid.), 1323,
1467.
παύομαι, 700°, 1323, 1467.
constr., 2126 f.
+ part., 2126 f.
παύων, 457, 820.
παχνί, παθνίων, 179.
παχουλός, 1059.
Παχούμης, 1040.
Παχούμιος, 1040.
Παχούμις, 1040.
παχυλός, 1059.
παχύς, 401, 402.
πάψω for παύσω,
180,
996 199-
πάω, πάγω, 155, 863, 9963.
πλ, becomnes βδ, 172.
π' δᾶτι for (ἐπηδᾶτε, 030.
π'δί for παιδί, 030.
επέ, from εἰπέ, 914, 99636·
τό, App. vi. 27.
πεθαίνω, 990 12:
πεθαμμίνος, 906112.
πέθανα, 996 12
πεθάνω, 996112
Πεθύνεις, Πειθώνιος, 26, α.
πεθυμάω, 723, 755, 854, 869.
πεθυμίζω, 869.
πεί (τό), pe, 2, 9 f., 9,
303.
πειθανάγκη, 1156, 1157.
πειθαρχηκόσι, 736, 740.
πείθω, 8653, 924, 996200 ; | Πελοπόννησος (τῆς), 292.
πέπεικα, 925; πέποιθα, πέλω, ΙΙΟ4.
925, 1868 f
-ομαί
- peculiarities of, 9979-
constr., 2087 ff.; -oμaí
τινι & τινος, 1355 f.
of attempted action,
1841, 1848.
+ ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
πειθώ, ἡ, 410.
Πειθώνειος, Πεθόντος, 21, α.
πεῖν, πιεῖν, πῖν, 148, 702,
996213.
πεινά, 990201
πεινάζω, 869.
πεινᾶν, 996201·
πεινᾷς, 830, 996201 -
πεινασμένος, 996201 -
πεινάσω, 996201 -
πεινάω, 829, 853°, 869,
996201; in M-N, 862.
πεινῇ, 996201 -
πεινήν, 996201-
πεινῇς, 996201 -
πεινήσω, 990201 ·
πειραγμένος, 996202 -
Πειραεύς, ραιεύς, 20°, 47.
πειράζω, 868, 996202.
for πειράομαι, 10011·
Πειραιά (τόν), 405.
Πειραιέα (τόν), 405.
Πειραιεύς, 20°, 47, 148, 403.
Πειραιέως (του), 405.
Πειρατικός, 48.
Πειραιώς (του), 405.
πείραξη, ή, 1020.
πειράξω, 996.02 -
πειράομαι, 10001, 1004 1.
constr., 2078.
πειρασμένος, 996202 -
πειρασμός, 1020.
πειράσομαι, πειρήσομαι, 29.
πειράω & -άζω, 868, 996202 -
Πειρεύς, 49.
Πειρεύς, ραιεύς, 148.
πεισθήσομαι, 1885.
πείσομαι, 996 107, 1885.
πέλαγος, 155, 348, 423, 424.
πέλαος, πέλαγος, 155.
Πελαγικόν, 68, 69.
πελεγρίνος, 126.
πέλεθος, σπέλ-, 13o.
πελεκᾶς, δ, 287.
πελέκι, τύ, 398.
πέλεκυς, 397.
πελίκη & πέλιξ, App. iii. 12.
πέλις & -ίκη, App. iii. 12.
πελλας, 287.
Πελοπίδας, 283.
Πελοπόννησος, ή, 1115.
Πεμπάς, 658.
πέμπτη, 7 Thursday, 647,
650.
πέμπτος, 646.
πεμφθήσομαι, 996209 •
πέμπω, 99620s ; intr., 1456.
+ἵνα, App. vi. 12 c [3].
πενέστερος, 499 c.
πενεχρός, 125, 1058.
πενῆντα, 593, 639, 64550
πενηνταρεά, 661.
πένης, in cmprt., 499 c.
τινός, 1318.
πενιχρός, πενεχρός, 125.
πεντάδιπλος, 654.
πεντάκις, 648.
πεντακισχίλιοι, 645.
πεντακισχιλιοστός, 646.
πεντακόσιοι, 645.
πεντακοσιοστός, 646.
πεντακόσοι, 645500
πενταπλάσιος, 655.
πενταπλούς, 653.
πεντάς, 658.
πέντε, 6455
πέντε (καὶ) είκοσι, 640,
64525.
πεντεκαίδεκα, 64515
πεντεκαιδεκάκις, 648.
Πεντελεικός, -ληκός, 265,
28 b.
πεντήκοντα, 593, 639, 64560 -
πεντηκοντάκις, 648.
πεντηκοντάς, 658.
<
πεντηκοντούτας (τούς), 430.
πεντηκοστή, Whit Sunday,'
647.
πεντηκοστός, 646.
πεντηκοστύς, 66ο.
πεντῆντα, 593, 639, 645 0 -
πεντηνταρέα, 661.
πέπαιγμαι, 996105 -
πεπαίδευκα, 72().
πεπαίδευμαι, 729.
η επαίηκα, 996100
πέπαικα, 996105 f.
πεπαίνω, 893.
πέπαισμαι, 996100-
πεπαίτατος, 5049•
πεπαίτερος, 5040
πέπαιχα, 996195-
πετάνθαι, 736 [2].
πέπανται, 736.
πεπατημένος, 849.
πέπαυκε, 813.
πεπαυκέναι, 816.
πεπαυκός, 820.
πεπαυκυία, 820.
!
664
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
πεπαυκώς, 820; – ὦ, εἴην,
764.
πεπαυμένος, 821 ; — ὦ, εἴην,
764.
πεπαύσομαι, 996199-
πέπεικα, 925.
πεπείνηκα, 996201 -
πέπεμμαι, 996203 -
•
πεπέρασμαι, 990204
πεπερασμένος, 996204-
πεπέρεως (τοῦ), 391, 399.
πέπερι, 303, 391, 399 twice.
πεπέριδες, 399.
πεπέριδος (τοῦ), 399.
πέπεριν (τόν), 399.
πεπέριος (του), 399.
πέπερις, δ, 399.
πέπηγα, 990200 -
πέπηγμαι, 996200-
πέπηχα, 996209-
πεπλευσμένος, 996217
πέπλεχα, 996210 -
πέπληγα, 996218-
πέπληγμαι, 996218 -
πεπλήξομαι, 996218 -
πέπλησμαι, 996211
πεπλήσομαι, 996211·
πέπλοις for πέπλους, 29.
πεπόθηκα, 996221 -
πεποίηκα, πεποῖκα, 148.
πεποίηκαν, 786, 99680 -
πεποιήκασιν, 793.
πεποιηκώς, 462.
πεποίησαι, 773.
b
πέποιθα, 924 f., 996200
as present, 1868 1.
πέποιθαν, 786.
πεποίθατε, imprt., 800.
πεποιθήσω, 996 200
πεποιθώς, -ύτος, 362.
πεποίκα, πεποίηκα, 1481.
πεποίκει, 996292.
πεπολιόρκηκα, 748.
πέπομαι, 990213 1
•
225)
πέπομφα, 996203•
πέπονθα, 996107.
πεπόνιν, τό, App. iii. 7.
πέπραγα, 996220-
πέπρακα, 996214-
πέπρακον for -αν (κασι), 786.
πέραμαι, 996214-
πεπράξεται, 900,25, 1884.
πειράσομαι, 990214
πέπραχα, 990225 9
πεπροφητεῦσθαι, 750 α.
πεπρωμένη, ἡ, τ182 1.
πεπταικέναι, 738.
πέπταμαι, 996207 -
πεπτερύγωμαι, 738.
πέπτωκα, 996210-
·
πέπτωκαν, 786, 996210-
πέπτωκες, 798, 996210
πεπύημαι for -ποί-, 36.
πέπυσμαι, 996231·
πέπωκα, 996213.
πέπωκαν, 996213-
πέπων, 469 ; cmprt., 5049.
πέρ, 609, 1700, 1743.
enclitic, 102 e.
dissociated from περί, 743.
πέρα, 508, 523 ; ἀπό,
1675b.
Περαεύθεν, 19".
περαζόμενος, 996200-
περαίνω, 892, 996204 f.
περαίτατος, 508.
περαίτερος, 508.
περαιτέρω, 523.
περαιωθήσομαι, 1885.
περαιώσομαι, 1885.
Περαιώτης, 1030.
Περαιώτισσα, 1030, 10311·
πέραμα, τό, 421.
περανθήσομαι, 996204
περανω, 996204
•
πέρας, 419, 421 ; in N, 421.
περασμένην, 736, 740.
περασμένος, 996200-
περασπίζομαι, 723, 10002.
πέρατα, τά, 421.
περίω, 996200 -
περβόλι, περιβόλι, 1362.
Περγαμενή, 26, α.
περδικάριος, -ρις, -ρης, 298.
περδίκιον, 1038.
περδικούλα, 1059.
πέρδιξ, 1038°.
περεχύννω, 755.
περηφανεύομαι, 723, 1000,.
περηφανιά, ὑπερηφανία, 134.
περήφανος, ὑπερήφ, 135.
πέρι for περί, 110 f.
περί, 1489, 1492, 1633-43.
- proclitic, 97e; dissociated
from πέρ, 743.
never elided, 141, 743.
use of, 1633-436.
περὶ + accus., 1633-41.
repl. by adverbs, 1634 ;
by κατά, 1636; by ἕως
οὖ, 1638; by ὑπὲρ + ac-
cus., 1684 (cp. 743).
for gen., 1640.
περί + gen., 1642 f.
repl. by accus., 1640 f. ;
by διὰ + accus., 1491,
1641.
in P-N, 1686.
Tepì + dat., 1643 f.
in P-N, 1643".
περὶ for ἀμφί, 1491.
for ὑπέρ, 1488.
repl. by πέριξ, κύκλῳ, διά,
γύρου, etc., 1491.
περί τινα for περί τινος, 1640,
1642.
περὶ μέσας νύκτας, 1635.
περὶ ὀλίγου (οὐδενὸς) ποιεῖ-
σθαί τι, 1642.
περὶ πλήθουσαν ἀγοράν, 1635.
περὶ πολλοῦ (πλείονος, πλεί-
στου) ποιεῖσθαι, 1642.
περὶ τὰ ἑξήκοντα ἔτη, 1037.
περὶ τοῦ + infin., App. vi. 24.
περὶ τρισχιλίους, 1637.
περι-, in compos. not elided,
743.
- constr., 1378.
περιβάλλω, 743.
περιβλέπειν ἵνα, App. vi. 12
[3], 16.
I
περιβόλι, περβόλι, 1362.
περιγελάω, 99635, 1119.
περιελαύνω, 1137.
περιέλθατε, imprt., 800.
περιέχοντα, as adv., 823.
περιεχωμένας, 26, α.
περίζωσε, imprt., 813.
Περιθείδης, 44.
Περικλέα (τόν), App. iii. 6.
Περικλήδες, οἱ, 289.
Περικλῆν (τύν), 432 b, App.
iii. 6.
Περικλῆς, 431.
περιμένω + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
πέριξ for περί, 1491.
περιορίζουνται, 778.
περιοράω, constr., 2133 f.
περιούσιος, App. ii. 12 [3].
περιπατῶ, περπ-, 1362.
περιπατώντας, as adv., 2163.
περιπεφραγυίαι, 996302 -
περιπήλωνε, 853.
περιπλευσθήσεται, 996217.
περιπλόμενος, Αpp. i. 16 a.
περίπλους, 313.
περίπλουτος, III).
περιπτάμενος, περιιπτ-, 1485.
περιρρανάμενος, 996232 -
περισπᾶσαι, 773.
περίcnacic, 76 [2].
περισπωμένη, 702, 76 [2].
περίσσα, adv., 5220.
περίσσια, adv., 522.
περίσσιος, 1073.
περισσότερα, dv., 522.
περισσότερος, 505.
περισσοτέρως, 5 20.
περιστερεών, -ρών, 152.
περιστερεώνας, δ, 1035.
*
665
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
περιστέρι, App. iii. 7 [r].
περιστερών, -εών, 152.
περιττολλαβος κλίσις,255.
περιχύννω, 755.
περιώνυμος, 1 140.
περιώσιος, App. ii. 12 [3].
περνᾷ, 996200 -
περνάω, 853, 906, 996200 ;
intr., 1456°.
περνω διαβαίνω, 1157.
περπατώ, 1362, 853.
περπάτ'σα τον ἐπεριπάτησα,
713.
Περσαρμενία, 1156.
Πέρσες for -σαι, 267.
Πέρσης, 283.
πέρσι, πέρυσι, 1312.
περσινός, 1362 [3].
Περσωφάτα, 267.
πέρυσι, πέρσι, 1362.
περυσινός, 1ο63.
πές for εἰπέ, 99680 -
πέσε, τό, App. vi. 27.
Πέσιδος (Πείσ-), 261 α.
πεσμένος, 996210-
πέσομαι, 996215-
πεσόντα, as adv., 823.
πεσοῦμαι, 996215
πέσω, 996210
b
πεταγμένος, 996207
πετάζω, 871, 94412.
πεταχτός = πετόμενος, 2162.
πεταλᾶς, δ, 287, 1044.
πεταμένος, 996207.
πετάννυμι, 87, 937, 94412,
996207:
πετάξω, 996207.
πετάσω, 996207 -
πετάω, 871, 937, 94412.
intr., 1456.
fut. of πετάννυμι, 94412.
'πέτε fur εἰπέτε, 99644 -
πετήσομαι, 1361, 996201 -
Πετίσης, 1040.
Πετίσιος, 1040.
Πετίσις, 1040.
πέτομαι, 996204, ΙΟΟΙ, 1003.
πετούμενα, τά, 2112.
πετοῦσ(σ)α, ή, 1067.
πέτρα, 1038.
πετραδάκι", 1038.
πετράδι, 1038.
πετραχῆλι for ἐπιτραχήλιον,
135".
πετρέ for πετρέα, ἡ, 272.
πέτρινος, 1061.
Πέτρο (ω), 294.
πετροβολώ, 1104, 1155.
Πετρώνης, 1040.
Πετρώνιος, 1040.
Πετρωνις, 1040.
πετσέϊνος, 1061.
πέτσινος, 1061.
πετυχαμένος, 996292.
πετυχαίνω, 723, 755, 996282.
πετύχω, 996282-
πεύκη, ή, 245.
πεύκος, δ, 245.
πεύσομαι, 996231-
πέφανε, 897.
πέφασμαι, 897, 996 91
πέφευγα, 924, 996204
πέφηνα, 924, 925, 996201 -
πέφθακε, 736 [1].
πεφθακώς, 737, 996200-
πέφθαρμα, 996 97.
πεφθαρμένος, 738.
πεφθύνημα, 7.38.
πεφίλημα, 730.
πεφίλημαι, 730.
πεφιλοτίμημαι, 996298-
πεφόβημαι, 996200-
πεφορηκότες, 996300 -
πεφορημένος, 996300 -
πέφραγμαι, 996302.
πέφραδα, 735 [1].
πέφρακα, 996301 -
πέφρασμαι, 996301 -
πέφρικα, 996303 -
π
έφρικαν, 786, 996308
πέφτη, πέμπτη, 174, 193,
647, 996215-
πέφτω, 996210-
πέφυκα, 182 α, 99630s
as present, 1868 f.
constr., 2000.
πέφυκαν, 786, 996300 -
πεφύλαγμαι, 996301
πεφύλακα, 996304 -
πεφύλαχα, 996304·
πεφύραμαι, 996305.
πέφυρμαι, 996300
πέψυγμαι, 738.
πέψυχα, 738.
ΠΗ, originally for 4, 12.
πῇ, enclitic, 1o2 e; use
1446 ^.
of,
'πῇ for εἰπῇ, App. vi. 19.
πηαίνω for πηγαίνω, 9963.
πηγάδι, 10385.
πηγαιμένος, 996.
πηγαίνω, 996.
πηγαινοέρχομαι, 1157.
πήγαμι for ἐπήγαμε", 713.
πηγμένος, 736, 996200-
πήγνυμι, 937, 9436, 996,00.
peculiarities of, 9976-
Πετροκόρακαν, App. iii. 6 d. πηγνύω, 937, 996200-
πηδα fur παῖδα, 20".
Πηδασης, 37.
πηδάω, 853, 99610 &
998.
πηδημένος, 996210-
πηδήξω, 996210-
πηδήσομαι, 996210
πηδήσω, 996 210-
πήζω, 873, 996249
-
πηλά, τά, 43318
πηλίκος, 589, 6οι f.
πηλός, ὁ & ἡ, 299;
43318 b.
πημένος, 9962
πηνίκα, with gen., 1314.
πῆξις, πύξις, 35.
πήξω, 996200-
πῆσαι, ποιῆσαι, 148.
210,
πήσσω & πήττω, 937, 9436,
996 209
πηττάκιν, τό, App. iii. 7.
πήττω, 996200
πήχεων for -έων, App. i. 15 b.
πήχεως for -έως, App. i. 1 5 6.
πήχεις (οί, τούς), 332.
πήχη, ή, 249, 398.
πήχυ, ἡ, 344, 398.
πήχυς, δ, 249, 391.
leads to πήχη (ή), 398.
πî or neî, tó, pe, 2, 9 f., 9ª.
πιάζω, 902.
πιάνω, 902.
πιάσε, 949.
πιάσετε, πιάστε, 1362.
πιάσοντα, as adv., 823.
πιάστε, πιάσετε, 1362, 949.
πιβουλεύ(γ)ομαι, from ἐπιβ-,
723.
πίβουλος, ἐπίβ-, 135.
Πιδασῆς, 37.
πιδέξιος, ἐπιδ-, 135.
πιεῖ οι πιῇ ? τύ, App. vi. 26,
27.
mɩeîv, neîv, nîv, 148, 702.
πίε, 155 1, 996218 -
πίε, 155 €, 996213 •
tó,
•
πιέ, τό, App. vi. 27.
πίεσαι, 773 996213-
πιθάρι, 1038.
πίθηκος & πίθης, App. iii. 12.
πίθης & πίθηκος, App. iii. r2.
πιθι, 996213
πικρός, πρικός, 143, 496.
cmprt. of, 493.
πικρότερος, 4965.
πικρύς for πικρός, 402.
πιμήν fur ποι-, 44.
πίμπλαμαι, 996211.
πιμπλάω, 9742, 996211
πιμπλέω, 9962119
πίμπλημι, 937, 9742, 996 1
666
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
πίμπληται, 996211
πίμπλω, πίμπλημι, 937.
πιμπράω, 937, 9743, 996 212.
πίμπρημι, 937, 9743, 996212.
πῖν, πεῖν, πιεῖν, 1
148.
πινακάκι", 1038.
πίνακαν (τύν), App. iii. 9 c.
πινακας, δ, 287.
πινάκιον, 1038.
πινακωτή, ἡ, 1053.
πίναξ, 1038.
πινην, 830 [1].
πίνω, 996213; — τινός, 1298;
-
προς ἡδονήν, 1657 τ.
πίομαι, 114, 996213-
πιοῦμαι, 996213.
ii. IO.
πλεύσιμος, 1055.
πλεύσομαι, 996 217.
πλανάω, 8530 ; -ομαι, 1004 f. πλεστος for πλεῖστος, App.
πλανηθήσομαι, 1885.
πλανήσομαι, 1885.
πλανοῦμαι, 850.
πλανούμεθα, 850.
π'λάρ' for πουλάρι, 219.
-πλάσιος, 655 ; in N, 657.
-πλασίων, -πλάσιον, 656;
in N, 657.
πλάσσω, 879.
Πλαταιικός, 48.
πλάτανος, ἡ & δ, 245, 292.
Πλατεαῖς, 49.
πλευσοῦμαι, 996217.
πλεύσω, 996217, 999.
πλέψω for πλεύσω, 996217.
πλέω, 834, 835 & [2], 848,
096217; -σομαι, 998.
becomes πλέγω, 860,863.
πλέων, πλείων, 20.
πλέως, 325.
|
πληγή, πλαγα, 29.
πλάτος, 348; (το)
4 in
πληγήσομαι, 996218.
width, 1305.
πληγωμένος, 996 270 -
πλάτου & -s (του), 341.
πληγώνω, 996 1,75 -
πλῆθος, 423; (τ)
'in
πλατύς, 401, 402.
πλέα, τά, 326.
πιπλάω & -έω, πίμπλω, 937. πλατυπόδης, 298.
πιπλῶντας, 996211
πιπράσασαι, 996,
•
πιπράσκοντα, as adv., 823.
πιπράσκω, 996214 -
constr., 1338 ff.
πιπράσωμεν, 996214·
πίπτω, 996215.
πισκοπή for ἐπισκ-, 135.
πιστάκη, 1038.
πιστάκιον, 1038.
πιστάτης for ἐπιστ-, 135.
πιστεύγοντας, 861.
πίστευσο, imprt., 813 [1].
πιστεύω, οι f.; & pass.,
701
1462.
+ infin., 2085 f.
πίστη fur πίστις, ή, 396, App.
iii. 14.
πίστις, Ν πίστη, 395, App.
iii. 14.
πιστός, 441.
πιστότης, 360.
πιτήδειος, ἐπιτ-, 135.
πιτηδεύ(γ)ομαι, from ἐπιτηδ-,
723.
πίτροπος του ἐπίτρ-, 135.
πιττάκιον, 1038.
πιτυά, ή, 389.
Η
*
πίτυς, 388, 389.
πιτυχαιμένος, 996282
πιτυχαίνω, 996.282 •
πιτύχω, 990282
πιω, 996219.
πιωμένος, 996213 -
πιός for ποῖος, 155 f.
πλαγα, πληγή, 29.
πλαγιάζω, 868.
πλαγίαυλος, 1144.
πλάθω, 8653, 879.
πλαίνω, πλένω, 902.
πλάκαις (ταῖς), 33δ.
πλάν, πλήν, 29.
πλανᾶσαι, 850.
|
number,' 1233, 1270.
πλάτυσμαν, τό, App. iii. 9 c. πληθυσμένων, 736.
πλεά for πλέον, 512.
πλέγε for πλέε, 860.
πλέγει for πλέει, 155.
πλεγμένος, 996210-
πλέγω for πλέω, 1551, 860,
863, 996217-
πλές for πλέγε, 860.
πλέει, 835 & [2].
πλέειν, 835.
πλέεις, 835.
πλεῖ, 834, 835 & [2].
πλειά, adv., 512, 522.
πλειᾶς for πλείων, 505.
πλειάτερος, 505.
πλεῖν, 834, 835.
πλειό, 522.
πλειόν, 512.
πλεῖον, 5046, 512.
πλείονες & οἱ
I 200.
πλήθω, 937, 9742
πλημμελής, 1120.
.
πλήν, 29, 1490; in cou-
pos., 112o f.
+ gen., 1314.
ảλλá, 1731 ff.
ἐὰν μή, 1735.
πλήξιππος, 11 16.
[
πλὴν εἰ μή,
πλήξω, 996218-
πλήρην χάριν, App. iii. 9 .
πλήρης, 425;
1318.
τινός, 114,
πληρύω for πίμπλημι, 937,
9742.
constr., 1318 f.
πληρώνω for τίνω, 996 τα
πλησθήσομαι, 996211
πλησιαίτερον, 523.
πλησιαίτερος, 507.
πλησιαιτέρω, 523.
πλειός, 505, 506, App. iii. 12. πλησιέστατος, 500.
1200,
πλειότερα, adv. 522.
πλειότερος, 505, 506.
πλείς, 834, 835. 996217.
πλείστοι & οι
πλείστου χρόνου, 1341 0.
πλεῖτε, 834.
πλείων, 20, 5040
>
·
& πλειός, Αpp. iii. 12.
πλέκω, 8652, 92112, 996 16.
πλεμένος, 996210 4.
πλένω, πλαίνω, 902.
πλέξω fur πλεύσω, 996217.
πλέο for πλέον, 522.
πλέον, 5940, 512; fur μᾶλ
λον, 509 & [1], 511.
πλεονεκτέω τινά, 12441,
(pass.),
1457; -ομαι
1458.
πλερωμένος, 996 74
πλερώνω for τίνω, 996 74
πλησιέστερος, 500.
πλησίον, 500, 507, 523.
+ gen., 1314.
for παρά, 1491.
- repl. by κοντά, 1666.
πλησίστιος, 1116.
πολήσον του πουλήσουν, 030.
πολήσ᾽ τι for πουλήσετε, 030.
πλήσσω, -ττω, 878 1, 921 16
966218.
πλῆστος του πλεῖστος, Αpp.
ii. 10.
6
167
-πλυος, 653; accentuation
of adj. in, 3192:
πλᾶτος (πλοῦτος), 26 1.
πλουθυγίεια, 1157.
π'λοῦμ' for ἐ]πουλοῦμεν, 030.
πλοῦς, 313 ; compounds of
317.
-πλυγε, 653 ; seulso -πλοος.
667
Ι. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
πλούσια, adv., 518b.
πλούσιος for -τιος, 181.
πλουσιότη for -s, 343, 361.
πλουσιότητα, ἡ, 343, 361.
πλοῦσος for -σιος, 155 C.
πλούταξ, 1042.
πλουτέω & -ίζω, 868.
πλούτη, τά, 424.
πλουτίζω & -έω, 868.
πλοῦτος, 424; ὁ & τὸ
249b.
πλυθῆτε, imprt., 814.
πλῦνε, imprt. of pr. & fut.,
813.
πλύνετε, imprt. of pr. & fut.,
813.
πλύνω, 896, 899, 902; in N,
902.
πλύσιμον, τό, 1022.
πλυστικά, τά, 1ο7ι.
π'λῶ for πουλώ, 030.
πλώρη, ἡ, 126.
πνεέτω, 835.
πνέμα, πνεῦμα, 179 & [1].
πνέμμα, πνεῦμα, 179 [1].
πνεῦμα, πνέμ(μ)α, 179
[1].
πνευμάτου (τοῦ), 369.
πνευσοῦμαι, 996219
&
πνέω, 848, 99629 ; πνεύ-
σομαι, 998.
πνίγῆναι, App. i. 15 α.
πνιγμένος, 990220 -
πνίγω, 865, 92115, 996220 -
πνιμένος, 996220 -
·
-ΠΝΟΥΣ, compounds in, 317.
Πνύκα (τήν), 43316
Πνυκί (τῇ), 43316
Πνυκός (της), 43310
Πνύξ, ή, 43310-
πύδαν (τόν), App. iii. 6. .
ποδάρι, 1038.
ποδάριν, App. iii. 9 c.
πόδημα, ὑπόδ-, 134 C.
ποδήρες (τό), 429.
ποδήρην, App. iii. GU.
ποδήρης, 492.
πόδι, 302.
ποδόγυρος, 1105.
ποδοκέφαλα, τά, 1156.
ποεῖν, ποιεῖν, 20.
ποέιτας, App. ii. 9 f.
ποηθώ, 99640 -
ποημένος, 99686 -
ποητάς, App. ii. 1o.
πύθεν, 589, 1446 Λ;
with
gen., 1314.
ποθέν, enclitic, 1o2 c.
ποθές, 435.
ποθέσομαι, 996221 -
ποθέω, 99630 & 221
πολεμείσαι, 773.
ποθούμενο, τό, 996221, 2112. πολεμέω, 854 ; -ομαι (pass.),
ποι, enclitic, 1O2 C.
use of, 1446 Λ.
+ gen., 1314.
Ποιανεψιώνα, 36.
ποιανῆς, 578 & [1].
ποιανών, 578.
ποιᾶς, 578.
ποιείν, ποείν, 200.
Ι. ποιέω, 833, 996222;
τινά τι, 1284 f.; εὖ or
κακῶς
τινα, 1258.
-
cause to, 2087 f. ;
with infin., ib., App. vi.
12 c [3], 16.
for εἰμί or διάγω,
2107 f.
2. ποιείσθαι τινά τι, 1284 Γ. |
φίλον, 1470.
τινος, 1288 f.
ποιεῖσθαι περὶ πολλοῦ (πλεί-
ονος, πλείστου, ὀλίγου,
οὐδενός), 1642.
ποιεῖσθαι πρό πολλῶν, 1647.
ποιεῖσθαι, δι᾿ οὐδενὸς
1533.
ποιεῖσθαι ὑπό τινι, 1698.
ποίημα, 29.
ποιῆσαι, ποῖσαι, 148.
ποιήσαισαν, 792, 805.
ποιησάντωσαν, 811.
ποιήσατε του -σητε, 800.
(or
ποιήσις for -σεις, 34.
ποίησις, ή, 395, App. i. 22.
ποιήσοντα, ως adv., 823.
ποιήσουν for -σουσιν, 777.
ποιήσω, 29.
ποιητής, 283.
ποιμήν, 374, 376, 377.
ποιός, 152, 155 €, 571, 589,
590, 601 f.; 5 —, 615,
1217 f.
use of, 1446 a.
for ris, 589, 602, 611.
repl. by ποταπός, 591;
by τί or ἵντα, 591 Η.,
611b.
ποιοῦ for ποίον, 578.
ποιουνοῦ, 578.
ποῖσαι ποιῆσαι), 148, 996222 -
ποισάμενοι, 996222
ποιῶν for ποίων, 578.
ποιωνῶ” for ποίων, 578.
πολ- (οι πολεῖν), 1104.
πόλει, πύλῃ, 20, 281.
πόλεις (αἱ, τὰς), 332.
πολεμᾶν for μᾷ, App.
200.
πολεμάω, 1088.
1458.
- constr., 1373; τινά, 1457;
σύν τινι, 1668.
πολεμηθήσομαι, 1885.
πολεμησείω, 1099.
πολεμήσομαι, 1885.
πολέμοι for πόλ-, οἱ, 294.
πόλεος (τῆς), App. i. 156,
App. ii. 8.
πόλεων for -έων, App. i.
15 b.
πόλεως, App. ii. 8; for -έως,
App. i. 15 b.
πόλη, πόλει, 26, 28 b.
πόληος, App. ii. 8.
πολητείας, 37.
Α.
πόλει, πόλι, App. ii. 14. 4.
πολιορκέω, 748, 1113 ?
πολιορκηθήσομαι, 1885.
πολιορκήσομαι, 1885.
πόλιος, 155 1.
Πόλις becomes Σταμπούλ,
1554b.
πόλις, 391.
πολίταις, οἱ, 267.
πολιτέ(ι)α, 200.
πολίτης, 283.
Πολίτικος, 1077.
πολλ-, see under πολύς.
πολλά, adv., 515, 518 f.,
522", 1278 f., Tà
1278.
πολλὰ πολλά, 522.
πολλάκις, 649.
πολλαπλάσιος, 655.
πολλαπλούς, 653.
πολλῶν λογιῶν, 591.
πολούσι, 20. α.
πολύ, adv., 490, 515, 518;
see also under πολλὰ
& πολύς; 'by far,'
1278; — Xeîpov, 1385 f.
πολὺ πολύ, 521.
Πολυαράτος, 19" [1].
Πολυδεύκης, 298.
πολυκαιρία, 1109.
πολυκέφαλος, 1108.
Πολυκλή (ω), 432 a, App. iii.
15".
Πολυκράτης, 431.
πολύλογος, 11ο8, 1109.
Πολυμίδας, 19".
Πολυνείκης, 431.
πολυπαινεμένος, 1151.
πολυπάταγος & ταξ, 439.
iii. πολύπους, 365.
πολυπράγμων, 469, 1106,
1147.
668
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
πολύς, 4791. ; see also under | πόσος, 589, 6οι f.; use of, έπογλος (δ), patronymic,
πολύ & πολλά.
cmprt. of, 5046
- in compos., 1108 f.
πολλοί & οἱ —, 1200.
πολλοὶ ἐκ οι ἀπό, 1312.
πολλοῖς ἔτεσιν ὕστερον,
1384.
πολλοῦ, ' for much, 1338;
περὶ -,
—, 1339, 1642.
πολλοῦ (πλείστου) χρόνου,
1341 b.
πολλῷ θορύβῳ, 1382.
πολλῷ κρεῖττον, 1384.
πολυτελής, 425, 1106.
πολυτίαν, 35.
πομένος, 99636.
Πομπύλιος, 35.
πονέζω, 869.
πονεμένος, 996223
πονέσω, 843, 996223.
πονέω, 843, 853°,
996223-
πόνηρε (ω), 257.
πονηρός, 493.
1446 A.
ποταμάκι”, 1038.
ποτάμι, πουτάμ', 030.
πόταμος for -μός, 84.
ποταπός for ποῖος, 591.
ποτάσσω from ὑποτ-, 723.
πότε, 589, 596 [1], 1446 Λ;
C.
with gen., 1314.
ποτέ, enclitic, 1o2 c.
- prepositive, 1448, 1449°.
ποτὲ δὲν for οὔποτε, 1449°.
ποτὲ νὰ μὴ for μήποτε, 1449°.
ποτὲ οὐ μὴ), 1449.
ποτὲν for -τέ, App. iii. 20 e.
πότερον, 2052f. ; in NT,
2053".
omitted, 2053 f.
πότερος, use of, 1446 Λ.
1029, 1040 f.
--άκης, 1041.
from πώλος, Ι041 ; from
pullus, ib. [r].
πουλώ (-άω & -έω), 996214
becomes πλῶ, 030.
πουργός for ὑπουργός, 135.
πουρχοῦ, 1789.
πούς, 314, 365 ; compounds
of, 314, 365.
πογc, as metrical term,85 0,
b,
89.
repl. by the hand, 89b.
-πογc, compounds in, 314,
365.
πουτάμ' for ποτάμι, 030.
-ππ-, in syllabication, 92.
πραγειά for πραεία, 480.
πότες, 596 [1]; use of, 1 446 Δ; πρᾶγμα, πραμ(μ)α, 179 &
see πότε.
869, ποτηράκι”, 1038°.
ποτήρι, 304.
περί τινα, 1639.
πονόδοντος, 11ος.
πονοκέφαλος, 1105.
πονόλαιμος, 11ος.
πονόμματος, 11o5.
Ποντικός, μπ-, 130.
πορεύγομαι, 996224
πορευθήσομαι, 1885.
πορεύομαι, 1004, 1006.
ὡς βασιλέα, 1655.
+infin., App. vi. 12 c.
for fut., App. iv. 4.
πορεύσομαι, 1885.
πορεύω, 996224 -
πορέω, συ πορῶ.
πορίζομαι, 1470.
πορίτζιον, 1040 0 0.
πορπατώ, 116.
πόρρω, 508, 523, 1490.
πόρρωθεν, 1513.
πορρωτέρω, 523.
πορρωτάτω, 523.
πύρσω, 143, 523.
πόρτις, 1041.
Πορφύριος, τρις, -ρης, 298.
πορφυρώτερος, 321, 654.
πορῶ (μπορῶ), from εὐπορῶ,
130, 723.
ποσαπλάσιος, 655.
ποσαπλούς, 653.
Πόσειδον (ω), 257.
Ποσιδε(ι)ών, 20.
ποσκεμένος, 99608.
ποσκεύγομαι, 99608.
ποσκεύομαι, 99608
'98*
ποτήρι", 302, 1026, 1035.
ποτήριον, 1025.
πύτης, in cmprt., 501.
ποτίζω τινά τι, 1280.
'ποτίσ'τι fur ἐποτίσετε, 713.
ποτίστρα, 1026.
I. ποῦ, 589; use of, 1446 Α ;
with gen., 1314.
που 'ν' τοι, 543
που 'ν' τος, 543.
που 'ν' τους, 543.
2. πού, postp. adv., 17oo.
enclitic, 102 r.
3. ποῦ for ὅπου (= ὅς), 608,
612, 1434; objected to,
612.
proclitic, 97 a.
for &+ part., 2105.
for ὅπου (ὅπῃ, ὅποι),
1488.
for ὥστε, 1756, 1951.
ποῦ νὰ for ὅs, 2017.
ποῦ νὰ = εἴθε, 1906.
πουθε, 435.
[1], 368.
b
supplied in N, 1178b.
πρᾶγμαν, τό, App. iii. 9 a.
πραγματεύομαι, ΙΟΟΙ.
πραγματευόμενη for you, 36.
πραγμάτου (του), 369.
πραγύς, πραΰς, 155, 402, 408.
πραήνων fur πραύνων, 35.
πραθήσομαι, 996214, 1885 [1
[I].
πρᾶμα, πρᾶγμα, 179 & [1].
πραμάτου (του), 369.
πραμμα, 179 [1].
πρανής, 65, 435.
πρᾶξε, imprt., 813.
πράξη (or πρᾶξις, ή, 248, 343,
1020, App. iii. 14.
- ἡ & ὦ, App. iii. 15.
πρᾶξι, ή, 248, 344, 1020.
πραξικοπέω (trans.), 1457;
-ομαι (pass.), 1458.
πράξιμος, 1055.
πρᾶξις, ἡ, 248, 395 ; becomes
πράξη, 248, 343, ΑΡ.
iii. 14.
Πραξιτέλης, 431.
πρᾶος (προς), 479.
- cuprt. of, 493.
-πολλα (ή), 1041 ; fem. of πράσσω & -ττω, 878 1, 880,
-άκης or -άκις, ib.
πουλαδίτζιον, 1040 6 b.
πουλάρι, 1041 & [r].
πουλάω & -έω, 996214
πουλειέται, 858.
πουλέω & -άω, 996211
πουλικάριος, 430.
πουλίτσιν, 104.
πουλλίον, 1041 [1].
πουλλολόγος, 1104.
ποῦλλος, 1241 [1].
Σπογλλος (ΐ), 1041 [1].
886, 924, 925, 996226;
& πρήσσω, 29.
εὖ (κακῶς), 1455 0.
+ ὅπως or ὡς, 1962.
- & -ομαί τινά τι, 1279.
ΠΡΑΤΤΟΜΕΝΑ, τά, 35.
πρᾶτος, Αpp. ii. 14 Α.
πραΰς, 1555, 402, 480.
πρεςβευτοῦ, 68-69.
πρέπει, constr. of, 1357,
2081 f.
+ dat. 1357.
€69
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
πρέπει + infin., 2081 ; in G-
B, App. vi. 15 ; for fut.
indic., 1894, App. iv. 4;
for -τέος, 1051.
πρεπεί (τύ), App. vi. 26.
πρεπειά, ή, 130 [1].
πρετόν for πρέπον, 338.
πρεπός, 440.
πρέσβεις, οἱ, 43314
πρέσβες for - βεις, 261 α.
πρέσβεσι (τοῖς), 43314.
πρεσβευκέναι, 736.
πρεσβευτή (του), 278.
πρεσβευτής, 43314-
πρεσβεύω & -ομαι different,
•
1471.
πρέσβυς, 397 ; in N, 398.
πρήθω, 937, 996212
πρησθήσομαι, 996212
πρήσκω, 9743, 996212, 1098.
πρησμένος, 996212-
πρήσσω, πράσσω, 29.
πρήστω, 996212-
πρηστῶ, 996212-
πρήσω, 996212.
πρίασθαι, 996321·
πριγιοῦ, see τρίχου.
πρίχου, 1789, 2004, 2008; | προδιέλυον, 742.
προδοσία, 1020.
νά, ib,
- (νά), 1789, 1999, 2004, | προδότης, 2835.
2008.
πρό, 507, 1489, 1492.
not elided, 141, 743.
constr., 1644-1652.
πρό + gen., 14490, 1644-9α,
1651 ff.; in P-M, 1649.
for ὑπὲρ + gen., 1648.
repl. by πρίν, 1491,
1649 b.
προεγαμοῦσαν, 789.
προείλαντο, 9964.
προεστάναι τινός, 1346.
προεστηκός. for -κώς, 26η α.
προεστός for -ώς, 301, 338,
363.
προεστώς becomes -τός, 301.
προέσχον not προϋσχον, 743.
προευχρήστηκεν, 716.
προεχειρίσθη for -θην, App.
iii. 22 d.
προέχω, 1137 ;
1346 f.
τινός,
like | προεώρων not προώρων, 743.
πρύματος, App. ii. 14 4.
πρόηται, 954.
identified with Latin
pro, 1650.
πρό + dat., 1650.
πρό + accus., 1649 b.
πρό, used proleptically
anle, 1651 f.
for 4, 1188, 1647.
for πρίν, 2004.
repl. by πρίν, πρότερον,
etc., 1591.
πρὸ τοῦ + infin., 1787, App.
vi. 12 c [3], 24.
πρὸ τοῦ οι προτοῦ, ' for-
merly, 1197 α, 1646;
see also προτοῦ.
πρικύς for πικρός, 402, 496. πρὸ δεκαμιᾶς καλανδῶν ἰου-
πρικύτερος, 496.
πριμιπιλάριος, 430.
1. πρίν, 17763, 1787; τὸ -,
1278.
for πρό, 1491, 1649 b.
πρὶν γενέσεως, 1649 b.
πρὶν τῆς πανηγύρεως διαλυ-
θείσης, 1649 0.
πριν φάους, 1649 6.
2. πρίν, Gere, constr., 1995,
1999, 2000-9; after
negatives, 2005 f.; in
N, 2008 f.
+ infin., 2002, 2003 f.,
2090, app. vi. 12c [3].
+finite mood, 2005 f.;
with aor. for plpf.,1857.
& prius, 1789.
3. πρὶν repl. by πρό, 2004;
by προτού, 1787, 2004;
by πριγιου οι πρόχου,
1787 1.; by ἕως, 2007;
by μέχρι οι άχρι, ib.
in N, 2008 f.
πρὶν ἄν, 1773, 1776,", 1787,
1999, 2001, 2004, 2006.
πριν 4, 1776, 1787, 1995,
1999.
πρὶν ἵνα, 2004.
πρὶν νά, 1773, 1787, 1998,
2004, 2007, 2008.
πρίνος, ἡ & δ, 292, 245.
|
νίων, 1652.
πρὸ δύο ἐτῶν τοῦ σεισμοῦ,
1651.
πρὸ μιᾶς, pride, 1652.
προ παντός, 1647.
πρὸ πολλοῦ τῆς ἑορτῆς, 1651.
πρὸ πολλῶν ποιεῖσθαι, 1647.
πρὺ τριῶν εἰδῶν δεκεμβρίων,
1652.
πρὸ ἔτη εἰκοσιδύο, 1649 0.
πρὸ ὀλίγας ημέρας, 1649 b.
πρὸ πύλαις, 165ο.
πρὸ τῇ χθὲς ἡμέρᾳ, 1650.
προ- not elilled, 141, 743.
+e contracts to πρου,
I
743.
προάγει + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
προαιρεῖσθαι, constr., 1 346 f.
προαστίτσιν, 1040 0 0.
πρόατα for πρόβατα, 1554.
προβαίλνω, 904.
προβαίνω, from -βάλλω, 904,
1119.
προβαίρνω, 904.
προβάλλω, 904 (intr.), 1456.
προβατας, 287, 1044.
Προβινκιάλης, 301.
προβλής & 4βλητος, 439.
πρόδηλος, 1137.
προδιαλέλυκα, 742.
προδιαλύω, 742.
προδίδω, 961.
A.
προθυμέομαι, 996%0, 1004.
προθυμηθήσομαι, 99630,1885.
προθυμήσομαι, 99630, 1885.
πρόθυμος, in emprt., 493.
προικιό, 1038.
προϊοῦσιν, 1369.
προκαλίζομαι, 1001.
προκειμηθέντος, 44.
προκινδυνεύω τινός, 1346 f.
Πρόκλος, Proculus, 1361.
προκρίνω, constr., 1346 f.
προλαμβάνω for 4 φθάνω,
2121.
προνία, 44.
προνοηθῆναι ἵνα, App. vi. 12
[3].
προνομεύω τι, 12443, 1457;
(pass.), 1458.
προνοέομαι, 1004 f.
προξένος for -νους, Αpp. ii.
ΙΟ.
προοιμιάζομαι, 1ΟΟΙ.
πρόοιτο, 954.
προορώμην, 717 [1].
προπέμπομαι, 996203.
προπέμπω + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
πρόπαλαι, 1137.
πρύπας, 448.
πρός, 1489, 1492; constr.,
1654-67.
πρός + accus., 1654-60.
for κατὰ or ἀνά, 1658 α.
during, for, 1658 0.
for eis (Hebraism), 1660.
repl. by ws, 1655".
repl. by eis or ἀπό, 1491.
in N, 1659.
πρὸς + gon., 166. f.
facing, 1661.
by' (in onths), 1662;
dropped, 1746b.
670
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
πρός, ' from, 1663.
fur ὑπό + gen. (‘by'),
1465 ff., 1646.
πρὸς + dat., 1665 f.
for gen., 1666
repl. by πλησίον, 1666.
πρὸς τὸ + inán. for final
part., 2158.
πρὸς βασιλέα ἰέναι, 1655.
πρὸς γυναῖκα ἔχειν, 1660.
πρός με (not πρὸς μὲ), 528.
πρὸς τί, “to what end?'
1657 c.
πρὸς χάριν λέγειν, 1657 c.
πρὸς ἡδονὴν πίνειν, 1657 c.
πρὸς ταῦτα, “ in this respect,
1657 a.
πρὸς ἑσπέραν, 1656.
πρὸς μεσημβρίαν, 1655.
πρὸς τὰ ξημερώματα, 1659.
πρὸς τὸ μεσημέρι, 1659.
πρὸς τὸν Κύριον Ε, το Mr.
X,' 1659.
πρὸς μητρός, πατρός, 1663.
πρός τινος for ὑπό τινος,
1664.
πρός τινος ἔχειν ἔπαινον,
1663.
πρός τινος εἶναι, 1663.
πρὸς θεῶν ὀμνύναι, ἱκετεύειν,
1662.
πρὸς ἄρκτου, 1661.
προσγειν for -ει, App. iii. 19
[1].
προσήκει, with infin., 2081 f.
προσῆκεν for ήκει, 1901.
προσήκον, as accus. absol.,
2143.
- in P-B, 2145.
προσήκουσα for -σαν, App.
iii. 22 b.
προσῆλθαν, 787.
προσθού, 953 c.
προσίοιντο, 954.
προσκηνήσομεν, 35.
προσκολλᾶσαι, 773.
προσκολλοῦ, 850.
προσκυνέω& -άω, 854; (intr.),
1456.
προσκυνήσουσιν, ἵνα —, 779.
προσπαθέω, 996197.
προσπέμπω + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
προσπίπτοντα, as adv., 823.
προσποιείσθαι, constr., 2085 f.
προσεχHMATICMóc, 132 f.
προστάσσεις, with subj.,
Igog.
προστάσσω, 74Ι.
- constr., 2087 ff.;
App. vi. 16.
προστίθημι, with ἵνα,
vi. 16.
προστίθητι, 959 α.
προστίθων, 959 α.
|
πρῶτος, App. ii. 14 Α.
προτοῦ, 1197 α, 1198, 1646 ;
for πρίν, 1787 f., 2004 ;
(vá), 1789, 1999,
2004, 2008; see also
πρὸ τοῦ.
προτρέπω with ἵνα, App. vi.
16.
προτρέχω τινός, 1346 f.
προτύτερ᾽ ἀπὸ for πρό, 1491.
προύβαλλον, 743.
προὔβαλλον, wrong, 743.
προνθυμήθην, 99640
προνθυμούμην, 99630 -
προυνοησάμην, 1005.
πρόφαση for -σις, ἡ, 396.
προφάσει, 1382.
προφασίζομαι, 1001, 1003.
πρόφασιν, ostensibly,' 1278.
πρόφασις, 395.
πρόφρων, 469.
προφταίνω, 902.
προφτάνω, 902.
προχτές, προχθές, 174,
'π'ρ'πάτ'σα for ἐπεριπάτησα,
ἵνα,
713.
πρυτάνες, 26, α.
πρωί, with gen., 1314.
App.
πρωί πρωί, 521.
πρώϊμος, 1055-
πρῶτον,
at first, 1278;
πρὸς ἡλίου δυομένου, ἀνί- προσφάγημα, το, App. vi. 26.
σχοντος, 1661.
προς νότου, 1661.
πρὸς ἄρκτῳ, 1666.
πρὸς τούτοις, 1667.
πρός τινι εἶναι, 1665.
προς-, constr. of verbs com-
pounded with, 1378.
προσαγορεύεσθαι παρά τινι,
1632.
προσαναπληρώκει, 750 d.
προσδέεσθαι, 835 [2].
προσδεῖσθαι, 835 [2].
προσδοκάω, with infin.,
2086b f.
προσδοκία ἐστι, with infin.,
2086b f.
προσεβλέφθην, 99620 -
προσέδεναν, 789, 99640 -
προσεμίγνυον, 936 α.
προσέρχομαι τινι, 1378.
προσέτασσον, 741.
προσετίθοντο, 959 α.
προσέχω (intr.), 1455 δ;
(pass.), 1458.
τι, 12.442, 1457 ;
νοῦν τινι, 1378.
- + ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
τὸν
προσφάγιον, τό, App. vi. 26.
προσφωνῆσθαι, 37.
πρόσω, 143, 523.
προσωδία (by-singing,
scanning '), App. i. 9,
19-22, ii. 8 & [5], 16
& [4-7].
for accentuation, App. ii.
16.
προσωδίαι, 76, App. i. 1, 5,
ii. 16 & [5].
προσώπατα, τά, 132, 297.
προσώπο, 26, α.
προσώτατα, 523.
προσωτάτω, 523.
προσωτέρω, 5 23.
προτερέω, 12441.
πρότερον του πρίν, 1591.
for
πρότερον ἤ, 1770, ;
cmprt. of πρίν (πρό),
1787; repl. by προτοῦ,
1787.
for πρό, 1491.
πρότερον πρίν, 2002.
πρότερος, 507.
προτίθημι, constr., 1346.
προτιμάω, constr., 1346.
25
το ib.
πρρα, 126.
πρώτη for -τοι, 44.
πρώτιστος, 507.
Πρωτογένου (τοῦ), 432 c.
πρῶτον or τὸ 'once,' 652.
πρῶτος, App. ii. 14 Α ; 507,
646; in N, 647.
πρωτοφανή (ω), 427, 432 1.
πρωτύτερος, 496.
ΠΣ, ancient digraph for Ψ,
12.
π+c=4,23, 180, 337 4, 884.
πτ from βτ or φτ, 172.
πτ becomes φτ, 885.
πτάραντες, 996327.
πτάρνυμι, 996227; -υμαι, ib.
πτερόεις, 451.
πτερόν, πτερόν, App. i. 16 a.
πτερούσσα, 1067.
πτερωτή, 1053.
πτερωτός, 1053.
πτῆναι, 996208
·
πτηνός, App. i. 6 a.
πτήσομαι, 1361, 996208, Αργ.
i. 16 a.
πτήσσω, 996228 •
πτοινοῦ του πτηνού 44.
Πτολεμαΐδαν, App. iii. 6 a.
671
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
Πτολεμαιίς, 48.
πτολίπορθος, 1108.
πτυάριον, φιάρι, 155 α.
· πτύει, φτεῖ, 148, 702.
πτύεις, φτεῖς, 148.
πτύξ & πτυχή, App. iii. 12.
πτύσσω, 99620-
πτυχὴ & πτύξ, app. iii. 12.
πτύω, 857, 906, 996230-
πτύω, 857.
-πτω, verba in, 861b, 874 f.
becomes -βω, 875.
πτωχός, in emprt., 501.
πυγμάχος from πυγμομ-, 126.
πυγμομάχος becomnes πυγμά
χος, 126.
Πυθαγόρας, 283.
πυκνά, adv., 518.
Πύκνα, Πνύκα, 143, 43316
Πυκνί (τῇ), 43316
Πυκνός (τῆς), 43310-
πικρίας, 35.
πυνθάνομαι, 996231 ; as pre-
sent, 1842.
constr., 2133 fr.
+ gen., 1325 ff.
πυνθάνω, 1484.
π'ύνω for πλύνω, 187.
πυξία, used in writing, o7.
πύξις, 35.
πύξος, ἡ & δ, 292.
Πυόνιος, 1040.
Πυύνις, 1040.
πῦρ, τό, 43317; πυρός (τοῦ),
App. 1. 15.
πυρά, τά, 43317:
πύραθος, σπύραθος, 13ο.
πυργίτης, σπουργίτης, 130.
πυρίπνους, 1106.
πυρόβολος, δ, 43317
πυροειδές for -δής, 26, α [1].
πυρσεύσαισαν, 792, 805.
πυρών(ν)ω, 43317, 853.
πχαίνω frou πηγαίνω, 996.
πώ, 1700; enclitic, ro2 e.
πῶ οι πῶ for εἰπω, 915,996 κα
& 1512-
πωγώνι, App. iii. 7 [1].
πώδε, 524, 564.
πωηθώ, 99680-
πωημένος, 996 κα & 1512.
πωθω, 996 κα
πωλάριον, 1041 [1].
πωλέω, 996214; (intr.), 1456.
constr., 1338 4.
πωλίων, 1041 [1].
πῶλος, Σπουλος, 1041 & [1].
πωμένος, 996 και σε 1529.
πωρικόν του οπωρ-, 134 1.
86
@s, enclitic, 102 c, 2040.
πως, use of, 1446 Α.
for ὅτι, that, 1751,1755,
1942, App. iv. 13 f.
for un, lest,' 1959 f.
πῶς ἔχεις γνώμης; 1314.
πῶς γὰρ οὔ; 2059.
πῶς θά for ὅτι + fut., 2086.
P, P, origin of, 2 f.
forms of, 2, 9.
a liquid, 22.
a tenuis, 23.
an aspirata, 23.
a scmivowel, 23,
[1] Δ.
b.
ῥᾴδιος, constr., 2000, 2001.
ῥᾳδιώτερος, 506.
ραίνω, 996232-
-ραίνω, in aor., 893.
païo µévos, 996235 •
Ραμιστανίτσα, 1040 0 0.
ραμμένος, 996083 -
ῥαντέω, -ίζω, 870.
ραντίζω, -τῶ, 870.
pávŵ, 996232 •
sãov, 5047, 506 [1].
ῥᾳύτερον, 50% [1].
δαύτερος, 506 & [1].
25 ράπτω, 874, 996233 -
ῥᾷστος, 5047·
δάτερος, 506.
an alveolar, 65.
aspirated, 72.
pronunciation of, 9, 64 ff.
trilling sound of, 64.
makes position, 64.
favours terminal -pa for
-ρη, 65.
doubled, 64, 185 ff.
p for λ, 187.
Ρ
p, in syllabication, 90 ff.
P+σ = p, 123, 337 c.
p-, or p-, 71, 73; why aspi-
rated, 64.
P-, after ev-, 51, 712.
P-, in augment, 51, 63, 186,
209, 712 f.; doubled,
ib. ; not doubled, 712.
p-, not reduplicated, 729,
731.
reduplicated, 739.
-P, final, 3352, closes a
Greek word, 218 f.,
App. iii. 2.
retreats, 219, App. iii.
I2.
in Tsaconic, 219.
.
ῥάνδους του ῥάβδους, 51.
| paprâdes, oi, 290¹.
ράφτω, 8653, 875, 996233 -
ῥάχη for ῥάχις, ή, App. iii.
14.
ῥάχις, Ν ράχη, ή, App. iii.
14.
ράψιμο", 1022.
ῥαψῳδός, 1116.
-ράω, fut. -άσω, 839; in N,
839".
sáwv, pậov, 5047·
ορέ, μ'ρέ, μωρέ, 136, 251.
-Ρέα, contracts to -ρᾶ, 285;
to -ρη, 417.
ῥέγομαι for ὀρέγομαι, 723,
996188, 1000.
constr., 1298 f.
Ρεθεμνιώτισσα, 1030.
ῥέει, 835 [2].
ῥεῖ, 835 [2].
δέμα, ῥεῦμα, ρέμμα, 179 &
[I].
ῥέμμα, δεῦμα, 179 & [1].
μεραδιουργήκασι, 739.
dropped, 219, 221, 338. δερᾳδιουργημένα, 739.
ρ' (= 100), 645.
P(= 100000), 645.
ρά, 1700, 1747 f. ; enclitic,
102 e.
-Pa for -ρη, 65, 186, 2691;
cp. 839, 892.
becomes -ρη, 417.
ραβδί, 1038.
ῥαβδοῦχος, 1113 f.
Ραβέννα, 51.
Ραβήριος, 37.
ράβω του ῥάπτω, 875, 996233.
Ραγάδαν, Αpp. iii. 6 a.
ῥαγήσομαι, 996200-
ραγίζω, 9437, 996230 -
ραγισμένος, 990280
ῥᾳδιέστερος, 506.
ῥᾴδιος, in cuprt., 5047.
235
ξεραθύμημα, 739.
δέρανται, 739.
δεραφανιδωμένος, 739.
ῥέρευσε, 139.
ξερητινωμένην, 739.
δέριμμαι, 739).
δέριπται, 739.
δερυπωμένη, 739.
ερυπωμένος, 739.
ῥερυτιδωμένην, 739.
4peca for ρησα, 839.
-pecw for -ρήσω, 839.
ῥετορικής, 26. α [1].
δεύσομαι, 99624 -
δεύσω, 480.
DEXTW, 996188
ρέω, 980, 996234, 998.
-ρέω, fut. -ρέσω, 839.
672
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
-PH (), repl. by -pa, 65;
remains -pn, 417".
ῥήγα (του), 277.
¿nyâdes, oi, 289.
ῥῆγας, δ, 339.
ρηγνύασι, 936 6, 996296
ῥήγνυμι, 937, 9437, 996236.
- peculiarities of, 9977.
ῥηγνύουσιν, 936, 996295 -
ρηγνύω, 937, 996295
ῥήγνω, 996 97.
pnyós, regis, 341, 355.
ῥηθήσομαι, 99672
δημάζω for ἐρημάζω, 135.
ρήξατε for ρίψατε, 996237.
δηξήνωρ, 472, Αpp. i. 16 a.
ῥῆξον (sc. φωνήν), 1456.
ρήξω, 996230, 966.7.
shooovoiv, 936 b, 99695.
δήσσω, 937, 9437, 996235
ῥητορική, ή, 1182 1.
phтwp, 163, 374, 376, 472.
δηχθείσα, 996230-
ῥήχτω, 996235
-PI (TÓ), 1038.
ῥιγᾶτε, 996230-
Siɣáw, 132, 852, 996236*
διγεῖν, 996236, App. iv. 8.
piyev, piyoûr, app. ii. 14 A.
ῥιγύεν, ῥιγοῦν,
piyoir, 996236-
A.
ῥιγον, ῥιγοῦν, Αpp. ii. 14 Λ.
διγοπύρετος, 1156, 1157.
pîyos, тd & d, 249".
ῥιγοῦν, 996236, Αpp. ii. 14. 4.
ῥιγοῦντος, 996290
ῥιγούντων, 996290
διγοῦσι, 996230-
'236 ·
·
ῥιγύω & -άω, 852, 996230 -
Styŵv (infin.), 996236, App.
ii. 14 A.
ῥιγῶντος, 996234 -
διγώσω, 990230 -
ρίζαις for ρίζαι, 267.
ῥιζάριν, τό, 331, App. iii. 7.
ριζιμαιός, 1056.
ρίζω τον δρίζω, 723.
ριμμένος, 996 97.
ῥινοκοπημένος, 736.
ρίξω, 996. 7.
กม
-PI" (TÓ), 1038".
διπτέω, 906.237.
SinTw, 731, 942, 996037-
διψήσομαι, 996237.
Sîpae, imprt., 813 [1].
dixvw, 996235 &
287.
δίχτω, 8053, 996 290
&
-pná, verbs in, 839".
287 *
-PNw (in verbs), from -Av∞,
-λλw, 904, 906.
Ρόδο, ή), 2925.
'Pódos, ý, in N, 292°.
Ροδοῦσσα, Ιο67.
ῥολόγι for ὡρολόγι, 134 1,
1107.
-póc, adj.,1057 f.; in N, 442.
poûs, 313b.
ρους, ὁ & ἡ, 408.
ρουφάω, 869.
ῥουφίζω, 869.
ῥοφάω, 852.
ροφέω, 852, 869.
ροφίζω, 869.
PP, cause of its doubling, 64.
pp or pp, 716.
-pp-, in syllabication, 92.
pc in early Greek, 123, App.
ii. 14.
Ανακάκι”, 1038.
δυάκι”, τό, 302.
ῥυάκιον, 1038.
púaέ, 1038c.
ρύζι, ορύζιον, 134 b.
sufóyaλo”, 1105", 1156.
¿y móc, app. ii. 8 [4].
¿YOMÓC,
δνήσομαι, 1805, 996291
δύομαι, 1001.
•
pŵ (Tó), resh, 2, 9 f., 9ª.
Pw, in pres. & fut., 903.
ῥωγα (τὴν & ή), App. iii.
120.
Ῥωμαίικος, 107.
Ρωμαῖός, 155 c.
Ῥωμέων, 49.
ῥώννυμι, 944183 990234
ρωννύω, 944, 99638
δωσθήσομαι, 996 34
ρωτάω for έρωτάω, 134,
723.
ρωτεύομαι, 100o
Σ, c, origin of, 2 f.
•
forms of, 2, 9, 13, App.
ii. 9 [2].
great frequency of, 69
1], 267, 536.
a dental, 22.
a sibilant, 22.
a semivowel, 23",
[1] b.
25
its sound as ss, 9, 66; as
for 2, 68; fitted for
animals, 69 [1 ).
effects position, 66.
, 442.
c, from a dental, 176.
for 0 in Laconic, 24°; in
Tsaconic, 56°; in South
Italian N, 24°.
c, provective, 130.
-C-,
-c-, in syllabication, 90 ff.
intersouantic, 782;
dropped, 762, 782.
-c-, interconsonantal, 204 f.,
897; dropped, 884 d.
-c-, tense character, 756.
-c-, inserted in fut. pf. &
aor. pass., 840.
-c-, after liquids & nasals,
206, 207.
-C-, assimilated, 207.
-c-, dropped, 762, 782,
884 d.
-c final, form of, 13 f.
-- in early Greek, 123
883.
-C
or -s, closes a Greek
word, 218, 3352, APP.
iii. 2.
- coalesces with preceding
consonant, 336.
-c, common in pl., 267.
-c, sign of nom. sing. masc.,
263, 276, 339, app. iii.
II u f.
in nom.
sing. fem.
dropped, 343-
in nom. 34 decl., 328.
superadded to Ñ de-
monstr. pron., 576.
- sign of gen. sing. fem.,
263.
-c, movable, 222.
-c, dropped with antectasis,
376.
-c, pers. ending, 760 ff.,
930 11.
o' (= 200), 645-
s, see eis.
's μíá, 621.
σά for ὡσάν or ὡσεί, 1488,
1782.
-ca, in aor., 785 f., 794.
repl. by ka in N, 1875-
σαββάτω", τό, 340, 1395.
σαββατοκύριακο", τό, 1156.
σαγματωμένος, 736.
σαγώνιον του σιαγ-, 150 d.
-Cat, pers. ending, 760 b ff.
retained, 934-
restored in N, 773-
drops its o, 762.
-CA, in aor. subj., 804 a.
CAI, in fut. imprt., 810.
-cal, or Scal, in infin.,
706 c.
for -σew, 818.
-σειν,
caten, 80.4 a.
-caimeDa, 804 a.
673
X X
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
LCAI MEN, 804 α.
'caiMHN, 804 a.
-CAIMI, 804 α.
ICAINTO, 804 α.
Icaro, 804 a.
Lcalc, 804 0.
LCAICHE, 804 a.
4caicOHN, 804 u.
-CAICAON, 804 α.
LCAITE, 804 .
CAITHN, 804 a.
LAITO, 804 α.
LCAITON, 804 α.
Σακκάς, 287.
σακκίν, τό, Αγρ. iii. 7.
App.
σάκχαρι, τό, 303.
Σαλαμείνιος, 34.
Σαλαμίς, 376.
σαλεύγω, 861.
Σαλήνιος, 37.
σαλιβαρᾶς, 287, 1043.
Σαλμούτζη (τόν), App. iii.
22 C.
Σαλονικιός, 103, 1082.
Σαλονίκη, 126.
σαλπίγγιον, 1038.
σάλπιγξ, 1038.
σαλπίζω, 872.
σαλπικτής, 191.
σάλπιξ, 191.
σάλπιξιν, 191.
Σαλωμών, 125.
LCANTO, 201., 785.
σάξιμον, τό, 371.
σαπηθώ, 996242
σαπημένος, 990242
σαπίζω, 996242.
Σαπφω, 84.
-
171”,
Σαπφώ, 56, 125, 171, 411.
σαράγαρον, 59 €.
σαράκοντα, 64540-
σαρακοστή, ἡ, 647 f.
σαρακοστός, 64540, 647.
σαράντα, 639, 64540-
σαρανταρέα, 661.
Σαραπιγής, 59 6, 155 α.
Σαραπιείῳ, 59 c.
Σαρδιανός, 1078.
σάρι, τό, 303.
σάρκαν (τήν), Αpp. iii. 6 a.
oâs or oas, tonoclitic, 97 b,
102 (.
for ὑμᾶς, 532 c, 538.
for ὑμῶν, 532 c, 534, 538.
as possess. pron., 552.
becomes σασε, 536; see
σάσε.
-cac, in aor., 785.
becomes -σes, 798.
σᾶς(ε), 208, 536, App. iii.
24, 26.
Lcache, aor. ind., 785.
-caciHN, aor., 785.
4cacioN, Dor. ind., 785.
4caci”, aor. ind. for - σαν,
σαμάρι, σαμμάρι, 179 & [1]. “caci”, aor. ind. for -σαν,
Σαμβα (του), 287.
Σαμβας, 287.
σαμβύκη & σάμβυξ, App. iii.
12.
σάμβυξ & -ύκη, App. iii. 12.
-τάμεθα, 785.
ICAMEN, aor. ind., 785 f.
-ΣάΜΗΝ, ίσω, Ισατο, etc.,
785, 1478, 1479.
σαμμάρι, 179 [1].
Σάμος, ή, in N, 292.
Σαμψούς, 1554.
Σάμων for - μον, 267.
σάν (from ὡσάν),
when,
1488, 1782, 1792, 1999;
sce also ὡσάν.
σὰν νὰ for ὡσάν, ὡσεί, 1488.
-CAN, pers. ending, 76o ft.,
785 ff., 930 b.
frequency of, 786.
leads to -σασι", 793.
-CAN for -σαιεν, 805.
σανιδάκι", τό, 1038.
σαννᾶς, δ, 287.
σαντί, tsadle, 2 f., 617.
σαντάλιον, 194.
793.
LCACTAN, in N verb, Sor
4cacre, in N verb, 8οι".
CACTEN, in N verb, Sor°.
4care, nor. ind., 785 ff.;
repl. by -σετε, 797.
-CÁTHN, aor. ind., 785.
ECATO, in aor., 785.
LCATON, in aor. ind., 785.
σαφές ἐστι, constr., 2018,
2085 f.
σαφέστατα, 519.
σβεννύω, 94410.
σβένω, σβαίνω, 902, 996239-
σβεσθήσομαι, 996239 -
σβέσω, 94418, 996239.
σβημένος, 996239
Π
σβήνω, see σβύν(ν)ω.
σβήσομαι, fut. of σβέννυμαι,
94416.
σβήσω, 996230-
σβυμμένος, 996299-
σβύν(ν)ω (σβήνω), 902, 937,
94616", 996239, 9807.
σβύσω, 996239.
σγάλη, 59 c.
σγουρούτζικος, 1040.
cs, 69.
σέ, 525; σε, ib.
-ce, in aor., 785 ff.
-ce, adverbs in, 434, 1102 h.
'σέ for εἰσέ (i. e. eis), 536,
App. iii. 24, 26.
σεαυτόν, 544 f.; repl. by
ἑαυτόν, 1406.
σεαυτοῦ for σύς, 555.
σεβάζομαι & σέβομαι, 868.
σεβαίνῃ, νὰ —, 755 [1].
σέβας, 420.
σέβη, τά, 420.
Σεβηρεῖνος, 51.
Σεβηριανός, 51
Σεβήρος, 51.
•
σέβομαι, 868, 1004, 1006.
σει for σείει, 996 440
-ce, in fut., 770 ff.
LCEIAN, 804 α.
cerac, 804 a.
-cele, 804 a.
Σειμάκης, 298.
-CEIN, in infin. repl. by -σαι,
818.
σείο, σοῦ, App. ii. 14 Λ.
σεις for ὑμεῖς, 531, 532 d,
538.
σεις for σείεις, 996240-
-ceic, in fut., 770 H.
σαφής, 425, 516; emprt., σεισμένος, 996 210
492.
σαυτόν, 544.
•
σείω, 846 1., 996240; ἐσεί
σθην, 846 1.
Σappú, 56, & 11, 125, 171, -ceiw, 1099 ff.
411.
|
σαφῶς, 516, 519.
σβαίνω, σβένω, 902.
σβεννύει, 936 α.
σβεννύεις, 936 α.
σβέννυμι, 937, 94410 9801,
996230-
- peculiarities of, 997g; in
2nd aor., 979.
σβέννυμαι, 980.
σέλας, 420.
σελλίν, App. iii. 7.
σελλοσ καλοχάλινα, 1156.
σελλοχάλινα, τά, 1156.
σεμνότας & της, ή, 29.
σὲν for σε, App. iii. 8.
σερακοστός, 647.
Σεραντάπηχος, 64540 •
Σέρβυλλα, 35.
σέρι for θέρος, 56°.
674
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
σέρνω, 903.
σέσεισμαι, 996240 -
σέσελι, τό, 303, 399.
σέσελις, ή, 399.
σεσήμαγκα, 996241
σεσημασμαι, 996241-
σεσημμαι, 996242.
σέσηπα, 924, 996242
cecoe, 770 ff.
LcecooN, 77off.
σεσίγηκα, 996243 •
σεσίγημαι, 996213
σεσιγήσομαι, 996243 -
σεσιώπηκα, 996244
σε συγχωρηκέναι, 750 α.
σεσυνήθικα, 996 ...
σέσωκα, σέσωκα, 996262
σέσωμαι, 9962020
σέσωσμαι, 996.02.
-εετε, in fut., 77o ft.
-Cere, in aor. ind. for -σατε,
797.
σέτερος, 554.
CETON, in fut., 770 ff.
σεν, σέο, App. ii. 14. Λ.
-CH for -σις (ή), 349, 396,
1020.
-CH, in fut. ind., 770 f.
4CHTAI, 77 I f. ; in P-B, 779. | σίλι, τό, 399.
LCHTE, 771 f. ; in P-N,779.
Σητεία, 1554.
Σήφης, Ιωσήφ, 134 α, 218.
ce becomes στ, 177, 885.
εθαι or cθαι, infin., 7061,
815.
-cee, pers. ending, 760b ff.
in imprt., 806.
-ΘέNHC (&), influence of,
-COÉNHC
298.
4cOHN, pers. ending, 76o vf.
-COON, pers. ending, 760 b ff.
in imprt., 806.
4cθω, imprt., 806.
4cθων, imprt., 806, 811.
-CO@CAN, 806, 811.
σἳ for σίγμα, 9.
-c-, in N reduced to -σ-,
155 €.
-ci, compositional for -ι-,
116.
-CI OF CIN, 2201, App. iii. 22.
- in verbs, 765, 768.
-ct for -σις (ή), 343, 396,
1020.
-ci, adv., 1102 b.
-CH, in fut. subj., 771 f.; in -ciá (†), 1018 ff., 1020.
P-N, 779.
σηκώνω, σ' κώνου, 030.
σηκώσουν, 777.
σηκωτός, 1052.
σηλυκό for θηλ-, 56°.
σημαδεύω, 7οι.
σημάδι, 1038.
σημαίνω, 893, 996241
+ ἵνα, App. vi. 16.
σημανθήσομαι, 996241
σημαντήρ, 1017.
σημαντηρας, ὁ, 1017.
for - σις, 1021.
-
σίλλι, τό, 303.
Σιμπλίκιος, 1040 C.
-ci”, in dat. pl. 3d decl., 328 ;
600 - σι.
ci', pers. ending, 765, 768 ;
see -σι.
|-ci", adverbs in, 434; in
N, 435.
σινάπεως (τοῦ), 399.
σίναπι, τό, 303, 399.
σινάπιος (του), 399.
σίναπυ & -5, 399.
σίναπυν (τόν), 399.
σίνηπι, τό, 399.
σίνηπυ, τό, 399.
Σιρίκιος, 1040 0.
-CIC (†), 395, 1018, 1020 ff.
- for infin., 2003, App. vi.
25.
repl. by -μα (τό), 369;
by - σία (ή), μύς (δ),
etc., 1o21 f., 1155.
-CIC + -MA ==ιμον, 1022.
Σισιννάκιος, 104Ο Β.
Σισίννιος, το4ο Β.
oîta, tá, 43318.
σιταρᾶς, δ, 287.
for infin., 2003, App. vi. Σίτανος, 1554.
σιαγώνιον, σαγ-, 150 d.
25.
σίαλος, σάλιο, Isod.
Σίβιλλα, 35.
σιτάρι, στάρι, 1362, 4331
Σίτανο, ἡ, 130.
σιτέω & -ίζω, 868.
σιτλολέκανα, τά, 1156.
σιτίζω & σιτέω, 868.
σίτος, 43318·
σιγάεν, σιγάν, σιγῆν, App. | Σιφναίικος, 1077.
ii. 14 A.
·
σιγά (()ω, 868.
σήμαντρο, 996211 1026.
σημάνω, 996241
σημασμένος, 99621.
σήματα λυγρά, 43.
σημέαν (τήν), 49.
CHMETA of quantity, App. ii.
9, 16.
CHMEION and χρόνος, App.
ii. 16 [3].
σημερινός, 1063.
σηπία, 126.
σήπω, 864, 996242 -
σήπομαι, 921, 924.
LcHc, subj., 77I f.; in P-N,
779.
2CHCHE, 77I f.; in P-N,
779
CHCOON, 771 f.
σιγαίνω, 900.
σιγάω, 868, 9962439 998.
intr., 1455 (; ἐσίγησα
(incept.), 1853 f.
Σιγενεύσι, 35.
σιγῇ, 1382.
σιγῇ σιγῇ (σιγῇ), 521.
σιγήν, σιγάν, Αpp. ii. 14 Λ.
σιγήσομαι, 996243.
σιγήσω, 996243
Σιφναιός, 1082.
σιχαίνομαι, 1000,-
σιώπα, σώπα, 152.
σιωπάω, 9962143 998.
intr., 1455 4.
σιωπήσω, 9962443 999.
σιωπήσομαι, 996244
ck from σχ, 177.
b.
-CKA, -CKON, in N verbs,
1098.
σκάβω for σκάπτω, 875,
9962.45
σίγμα (το), shin, 2, 9 f., 9. σκάθαρος, 130.
σιδερένιος, 1061.
σιδερένιος, 106.
σίδερο", τό, 249.
σίδηρον, τό, 249.
σίδηρος, δ, 249.
σιδηρωμένος, 736.
Σικινῆται, 37, twice.
σιχαίνομαι, σιχ-, 10022.
σιχαίνω, 10002
σιληνώδης, 1065.
σκαιότης, 360.
σκαίρω, ἀσκαίρω, 129.
σκάλαθρο", 1026.
σκαλιστήρι, 1026.
σκαλώνω, 853.
σκαμμένος, 996245
σκανά, σκηνή, 291.
σκάπτω, 874, 92111, 996245
becomes σκάβω, 875,
9962db •
675
X X 2
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
σκάπτω (γῆν), 1456.
σκάρα for ἐσχάρα, 135.
Σκαρδαμούλα, 1554.
σκαρμός, 187.
Σκάρπαθος, 1554.
σκατό", τό, 43310
σκάτος, τό, 43310
σκατός (του), 43319
σκαφτικά, τά, 1071.
σκάφτω, 875, 996245
σκορδαλ(λ)ός, 130, 1362.
σκόρδον, App. i. 160.
σκορπάω, -ίζω, 870.
σκορπίζω, 143, 868, 870,
94413".
σκοτεινός, φωτεινός, 114.
σκαφοειδές for -δής, 26, α [1]. | σκουληκάκι”, 1038.
σκεδάζω, 937, 94413, 996240 -
937,
σκεδάννυμι, -ά(έ)ω,
94413, 996246-
σκεδαννύω, 996240 1
σκεδάω, 937, 94413, 996210.
σκεδώ (fut.), 94-413, 996246
σκέληα, τά, 424.
σκέλι, τό, 424.
σκέλος, 423, 424.
σκεμμένος, 996247.
σκεπάζω, 868.
σκέπας, 420, 421,
σκέπος, τό, 421, 424.
σκέπτομαι, 996247.
+ όπως οι ὡς, 1962.
σκευάζω, its fut., 889.
Σκευάς, 287.
σκεύος, τό, 423.
σκέφτομαι, 875, 996247.
σκεφτώ, 996247 -
σκέψομαι, 996217 •
σκηνέω & -άω, 852.
σκηνή, σκατά, 29.
σκηνόω & -έω, 852.
σκηπτούχος, 126.
σκηπτροῦχος, 126.
σκίζω, σχίζω, 177.
σκίνος, δ, 245.
σκιύεις, 451.
Σκιψ for Σκή-, 37·
σκλήθρα, 130.
σκλῆρος του τρός, 84.
σκαλί for σκυλί, 030.
σκνίφαν, 330, App. iii. 6 a.
σκνίψ, κνίψ, 130.
σκολά(()ω, 870.
σκολειό", 177, 1035.
σκολνάω, 906.
-ΕKON & CKA, in N verbs,
-cka,
1098.
σκόνη for κόνις, 130.
Σκόπα (του), 277.
Σκόπας, 287.
σκοπέω, 996247·
+ ὅπως or ὡς, 1962.
+ infin., App. vi, 17 c.
σκοπέομαι, 996247.
σκοπήσω, 996 247
σκορακίζω, 130.
σκοτωμός, 1020.
σκοτώνω, 943.
σκουλήκι, 1041.
σκουλήκι, 304.
σκουλῆκοι, οἱ, 346.
σιροπίζω, σκορπ-, 143.
σκύβγω, 996 17.
σκύβω, 8651, 996 17.
Σκύθες for -θαι, 267.
σκυλάκιον, Ιο38.
σκύλαξ, 1038.
σκυλί, σκ'λί, 030.
σκυλίστικος, το77.
σκυλίτικος, 1077.
Σκυλίτσης, 1040 0 0.
σκύλλος, 4339·
σκύλος, 4339·
σκυμμένος, 996 147.
σκύπτρον, 35.
σκύφτω, 130, 996 17.
4col, in verb, 803.
-COÍMHN, in verb, 803.
4colm, in verb, 803.
4colo, in aor. subj., 803.
Lcorc, in aor. subj., 803.
4colo, in aor. subj., 803.
Σολομών, 125.
Comal, in fut., 770 ff., 1478;
in N, 1098.
-εόμεθα, 770 f.
LCOMEN, in fut., 77o f.
-CON, imprt., 810; in N,
813.
›
LCONTAI, in fut., 77o f.
σύς, 553 ; in N, 554.
σὺς ἴδιος, ὁ - 557.
σου, 525 ; σου, il.
σου for σός, 551 f.
4coy, imprt. for -σαι, 814.
4core for -σουσι”, 777.
ZOYNTAI for έσονται, 778.
σουρτούκης, 1040 D.
coycı”, in fut., 770 ff.; in
N, 777-
leads to 1σουν, 777.
σουπιά, 126.
-ckw, meaning of, ro97 f.; σοὖστι, 200.
in N, 1098.
repl. by -ζω, 868.
σκωλήκιον, 1038.
σκώληξ, 1038.
•
σ' κώνου του σηκώνω, 030.
σκώπτω, 996248, 998.
σκωρ, τό, 43319
σκῶτι from συκώτι, 1362.
σκώψομαι, 996248
σμη ριγέ, μήρ, 130.
σμήρινθος, μήρ, 130.
σμιγμένος, 996
186 ·
σμίγω, 136, 8652,
9434" 996165-
σμικρόν, ' a little, 1278.
σμικρός, μικρός, 13ob.
σμίλαξ, μίλαξ, 130.
σμιμένος, 996100-
,
's μía, 621,
σοφία, σοφίη, 291.
Σοφοκλέους, -λέιους, 20.
Σοφοκλής, 431.
σύφος for σοφός, 84.
oopós, in cmprt., 493; µâλ-
λον -, 510.
σοφῶς, 519.
σοφώτατα, 519.
σοφώτερος beside κουφότερος,
App. ii. 5.
σπάγος, σπάος, 155.
σπάζω, 996249 -
937,
σπαθέας (τάς), 1027.
σμύδρος, μύδρος, rgo.
σμύραινα, μύρο, 130.
Σμυρναίικος, 1077.
Σμυρναϊός, 152, 1082.
σμυρνιασθέντα, as adv., 823.
-co, pers. ending indic.,
760bff, 934; imprt.,
806, 809 f.
drops o, 762.
σοδιάζω for ἐσοδ-, 135.
σοί, 525 ; σοι, il.
σοί for σοι, 525.
σοὶ λέγοι του σὺ λέγῃ, 36.
σπαθί, σπασί, 184.
σπαθίτσιν, τό, 1040 0 0.
σπάλαθρον, πάλ-, 130.
σπανιάκις, 649.
σπανίζω τινός, 1318.
Σπανίκιος, 1040 0.
σπάνις, 395.
-
σπάνω, 906, 9431 & 7,
99623h & 219.
σπάος τον σπάγος, 155.
σπαργανίζω & - ύω, 868.
σπαρήσομαι, 996200-
σrapμévos, 996250 ·
σπάρτος, ὁ & ἡ, 292.
σπάσαντα, as adv., 823.
σπασί του σπαθί, 184.
σπασμένος, 996249
σπάω, 841 f., 9431 & 1,
996235
& 210*
b
676
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
σπείρω, 864, 892, 895, 903, σταίνω (ἱστάνω), 723, 958,
92120, 996250.
as fut., 996200-
σπείσομαι, 996251
σπείσω, 996251.
σπέλεθος, πέλ-, 130.
σπένδω, 996201
σπέρνω, 903, 996200-
σπερώ, 996200-
•
σπεύδω (inir.), 1455 .
σ'πί from στουππί, 030.
σπίθα (σπινθήρ), 194.
σπινθηράκιον, 1038.
σπίρτο, spirito, 1362.
σπλαγχνίζομαι & σπλαχν-,
10002.
ἐπί τινα, 15834·
σπλάχνος, τό, 424.
σπλήν, δ, 249.
σπλήνα, ἡ, 249.
σπληνιάω, Ι 100.
Σποδίας, 26, 1.
σπονδύν for -δήν, 44.
σπουδαγμένος, 996202
σπουδάζω, 868, 996252, 998.
περί τι, 1639.
+ ὅπως or ὡς, 1962.
ἵνα, 1963, App. vi. 12 [3]
& 16.
trans., 1457.
σπουδασμένος, 996252.
σπουδῇ, 1382.
σπουργίτης, 130.
σπύραθος, πύρ-, 130.
-cc-, in syllabication, 92.
-cca (†), ethnic, 1030 f.
-ccw & -TTW, 877 ff.
-ccw, mistaken for fut. -σω,
880.
attracted by - ζω, 873.
repl. by -ζω, 880.
CT from σθ, 177, 885.
from πτ οι φτ, 174.
στ' οι δ' (=6, 645-
,σ7 or ‚5 ( = 6000), 645.
στάβλος, δ, 249.
Σταγερίτης, 40.
Σταγιρίται, 34.
στάδια, τά, 43320
962,965, 996118a; -oμai
(mid.), 965, 1469.
σταίσω, 990118 α.
στακός, ἀστ-, 134 C.
σταλάζω, 880.
σταλμένος, 996203-
στάμενα, τά, 211 2.
στάμενος, 962.
στάμνος, ἡ & δ, 292.
Σταμπούλ, 1554.
στερήσομαι, 1478, 1882,
1885.
στερίσκω, 996255
στέρνω, 904, 996258.
στέρομαι, 996255 ;
1318.
στέρφος, τέρφος, 13o.
στέσω, 996115
Στεφανάκιος, 1040 Β.
Στεφανᾶς, 287.
TIVOS,
στεφανεῖν for -νοῦν, 851.
Στεφανῆδες, οἱ, 289.
Στεφανής, 287.
στάρι for σιτάρι, τύ, 1362, στέφανο, τό, 249.
Στάν-Κιοϊ, 1554.
στάνω, 996118.
43318 b.
σταροκρίθι, 1156.
στάση, ἡ, 1020.
στέφανος, δ, 249.
στεφανῶι for -νοι, 26g.
στεφανωμένος, 849.
στεφανώσω, 849.
στεφανῶται, ἐὰν
8.50€.
στέψιμον, 1022.
στάσις, 391 ; becomes στάση, στεφανώνομαι, 1474.
1020.
στατήρες (τούς), 332.
Σταυράκιος, -άκις, -άκης, 298,
1Ο4Ο Β.
σταυρίτσιν, 1040 0 0.
στάφνη, στάθμη, 179.
στάχι, τύ, 389.
στάχυς, 129, 388, 389.
στάχυας, 267.
στεγάζω & στέγω, 868.
στέγνη, ἡ, 1049.
στέγω & -άζω, 868.
στείλω, 996203-
b.
στέκα fur στέκε, 996118 b.
στεκάμενο, τό, 2112.
στεκάμενος, 996 με b.
OTEKâTE, 996118 b.
στεκούμενος, 1961 D.
στέκω, 937, 962, 965,
996118b; -oμai (mid.),
-ομαι
996118 b.
στειῶντας, as adv., 2163.
στέλλα, -λνω, -ρνω, 904,
92122, 996253.
στέλνω, 1871, 90.4, 996258.
στέμμα, 1022.
στενάζω & στένω, 868,
996254 ·
στενάκιον, 1038.
στενάξω, 996254
στεναχωρώ, 1107.
στάδιν, 302, 331, 1040, App. στέννος, App. ii. 9.
iii. 7.
στάδιοι, οἱ, 43320
στάδιον, τό, 43320
στάζω, 872 ; in N, 873.
σταθέντα, as adv., 823.
Στάθης, 130 [1].
στάθμη, στάφνη, 179.
σταθώ, 996 με 1.
σταίκω, 965.
σταιμένος, 996 με δ.
118
στενόμακρος, 1156.
στενός, App. ii. 9.
στενοχωρώ, 1107.
στένω & -άζω, 868.
στενώνων, 853.
στενωπός, ἡ & δ, 292.
στερεάς (τῆς), 1343.
στερέω, 996200-
& ὑστερέω, 996200
στερηθήσομαι, 1885.
&
στεψίμου (τοῦ), 371.
στεψίμῳ τῷ), 371.
στέψις, 1022.
-CTH-, in ἵστημι, 951.
στήθηα, τά, 424.
στηθι, τό, 424, 948, 951.
στήθια, τά, 424.
στῆθος, 424.
στήκεσθαι, 965 [1].
στήκετε, ἐὰν
779.
στήκω, 723, 937, 958, 962,
965 & [1], 996118 b.
203.
στημένος, 9961 α.
στήνω, 906, 965, 996 18-
στηρίζω, 872.
στήσαμ πρόσθε,
ornow, 996118.
στήσω,
στήχι for στίχοι, 44.
στίγμα, 6161.
στιγματίας, 283.
στίζω, 872.
στίμι, τό, 303, 399.
στίμιν, τό, 331, App. iii. 7.
στίμιν (τήν), 399.
στίμις, ἡ, 399.
στίμμι, τό, 303, 399.
στίμμις, ἡ, 399.
Στιριεύς, 3.1.
στιφύς, 496.
στιφύτερος, 496.
oripw, 8651.
στλεγγίς, 130, App. i. 16 a.
στοά, στοιά, 20.
στοιά, στοά, 20.
στοιχειό", 1035, 1ο38
στοιχείται with ἵνα, 2082,
App. vi. 16.
στοιχηδόν writing, 30.
στολίζω, 868.
677
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
στόμα, 348, 368.
σύ γε, 529.
στόμαν, τό, 221, App. iii. 9 c συββῇ for συμβῇ, 193.
& 23.
στόμφαξ, 1042.
στορέσω, 996200-
στόρνυμι, 990256 •
συμμαχέω τινί, 1378.
συμμίγω, 1362, 937, 9434,
9961.05.
συμβήσετε for συμβ-, 193.
συβήνη, 37.
συμμίσγω, 9434.
συβίου (τῆς), 193.
συμπαθής, 1140.
συβότης, App. i. 5.
συμπαίστης, 996105
σύβουλος, 193.
συμπαραπόλλυμι, 742.
9 a.
συμπαραπώλλυν, 742.
συγγενής, 425.
σύμπας, 448.
-στορῶ, 996200-
-croc, in ordinal numbers,
646.
στουππί, τό, 126; becomnes
σ'πί, 030.
Στούρα, Στύρα, 35°.
στοχάζομαι, 1001, 1003.
+ïva, app. vi. 16.
στραβοκυτάζω, 1155.
στραβοκύταμα, 1155.
στραβομύτης, 298.
στραβοπόδης, 1149.
στραθιώτης, στρατιώ-, 1559.
στραταγός, -ηγός, 291.
στρατεύω, 731 ;
τινά,
12448, 1457.
στρατηγιάω, 109.
στρατηγός, 142, 11501·
& -ayós, 29".
Στρατῆς Εὐστράτιος, 130 [1].
στρατιώτης, 283".
Στρατοκλέα (τόν), 330, App.
iii. 6.
στραφῇν for -φῇ, App. iii.
20 d.
στραφήσομαι, 990257.
στραφώ, 996257.
στρεβλωθήσομαι, 1885.
στρεβλώσομαι, 1885.
στρείδι, ὀστρείδιον, 1340.
στρέψω, 887, 9214, 996207
- intr., 1456b.
στρίβω, 8651-
στρίψω, 8651-
στριφωγυρίζω, 1157.
στρογγυλοπρόσωπος, 1149.
στρογγυλωπός, 1104.
στρωμένον, 736.
στρωμένος, 737, 996206 -
στρώννυμι, 944183 990200
στρωννύω, 944, 996200-
στρώννω, 775, 853, 94410,
996250*
στρώνω, 853, 996200-
στρώσον σεαυτῷ (sc. κλίνην),
1456".
στρώσω, 996200-
στυππέϊνος, 1061.
στυππείον, 126.
Στύρα, Στούρα, 35°.
στῶ, subj., 931.
σύ, 525.
σύ for σοί, 36; for σή, 35.
σὺ αὐτός, 544.
συγγενῆν, App. iii. 6 b, συμπαραπολώλεκα, 742.
συγγενίς, ἡ, 430.
σύγγραμμα, 1137.
συγκαταβαίνω, 742.
συγκαταβέβηκα, 742.
συγκατέβαινον, 742.
συγκεχώρηκα, 742.
συγκλειμένου, 736 [2].
εγγκοπή, 136 & [2].
συγχαίρομαι, 1459.
συγχαρίκια, 1040 0.
συγχέαιμι, 996312
συγχυθήσομαι, 996312
συγχύννου, 996312-
συγχωρέω, 742 ;
constr.,
2087 f.; συγχωρεῖται
with iva, app. vi. 16.
συκέ for συκέα, ή, 272.
συκέα, 285.
συκέα, 271.
συκέες, συκές, 148.
Συκεεῦσιν, 35.
συκές, συκέες, 148.
συκή, 285.
συκιά, 27 Ι.
συκολόγος, 1104.
συκοφάγος, 11501.
συκῶτι, σκῶτι, 1362.
συκωτόν, 1052.
σύλ for σύν, 195.
συλέγω, συλλ-, App. ii. 141.
συλέω τινά τι, 1279.
Σύλλα (του), 277.
ΣΥΛΛΑΒΗ, 19", 90.
συλλαμβάνω (sc. υἱὸν ἐν
γαστρί, 1456.
συλλέγω, App. ii. 14 B; 734,
92118, 996161, 1•
συλληφθέντα, as adv., 823.
συλλήψηται, ὅπως -, 779.
συλλογοῦμαι, with gen.,
1295.
Σιλουανός, 35.
συμβαίνει, with infin., 2081,
2083.
συμβάλλω (intr.), 1456.
συμβάλλεσθαι, its constr.,
2085 f.
συμβουλεύομαι, 1470.
συμβουλεύω with ἵνα, App.
vi. 16.
συμπεθερίας, 194.
σύμπεντε, 6621.
Σύμπλεκτος προσωδία, 702
συμπολεμήσαντες
332b.
συμπονέω τινί, 1378.
σύμπραξις, 1137.
συμπράττω τινί, 1378.
συμπτωμένας, 750 d.
συμφανώνεται, 853.
(τούς),
συμφέρει with infin., App. vi.
12 c [3] & 16.
συμφέρον, συφέρον, 338.
συμφυρήσομαι, 996305-
ΣΥΜΦΩΝΑ (γράμματα), 16.
συμφωνέω τινί, 1378.
συμφωνιάν (τήν), 155 6.
σύν (ξύν), 1489,
1668-73.
proclitic, 97 c.
1492,
a variety of μετὰ + gen.,
1668.
συν + 6, 200.
oúv (¿úv) + dat., 1668 ff.;
rarer than μετά, 1668.
of 'means,' 1669 f.; dis-
tributively, 6621, 664.
for instrum. dat., 1381.
for dat. of association,
1376.
in P-N, 1670 ff., 1104;
misused, ib.; for cum,
1175.
- repl. by ἅμα, 1491,
1607, 1671 f.; by μετά,
1491, 1668; by καί,
1175"; by μετά + dat.,
16074; by μέ, 1591.
- conf. with μετά & ἅμα,
1607, 1670.
followed by redundant
καί, 1718.
σὺν + accus., 1670.
σὺν βίᾳ, 1669.
σὺν δύο, 6621
σὺν θεοῖς, 1376 f.
σὺν Θεῷ, 233
σὺν καὶ for σύν, 1718.
σὺν κραυγῇ, 1668.
σὺν πέντε, 6621-
678
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
σὺν πόνοις καὶ ἱδρῶτι, 1669. | συνηκολουθηκότοι for -τι, 44.
σὺν τάχει, 1668.
σύν τινα, 167ο.
σύν τινι πολεμεῖν, 1668.
σύν τινος, 167ο.
σὺν τοῖς θεοῖς, 1668.
σὺν τοῖς ὅπλοις, 1669.
σὺν τρεῖς, 6621.
σὺν τῷ δικαίῳ, 1668.
σὺν τῷ νόμῳ, 1668.
σὺν τῷ καλῷ, 1668.
σὺν τῷ σῷ ἀγαθῷ, 1668.
σὺν φρονήματι, 1668.
CYN-, constr. of verbs com-
pounded with, 1378..
συναγαγοχεία, 26.
συναγείρω, 1137.
συνάζω, 873.
συναλλάσσω τινά τινι, 1378.
συναλλήλως μας (σας, etc.),
1411, 1477.
συναναφυρέντες, 996300.
συναντάω, 99615.
συναντοῦσαν, 850.
συνάξετε, imprt., 813.
συνδιασώσαντες (τούς), 332).
συνδιῃτᾶτο, 99647.
σύνδικος, 1140.
συνδιοίκησεν, 44.
σύνδουλος, 1137.
συνδράμω, pres., App. iv. 3.
σύνδυο, σὺν δύο, 6621
συνδώδεκα, σὺν δώδ., 6621
συνειλεγμαι, 734.
συνείλοχα, 734, 9961011
σύνειμί τινι, 1378.
συνεκκαίδεκα, σὺν ἐκ καὶ δέκα,
6621.
εγκεκφώνηCIC, 155.
συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, 1369, 2008.
συνεπλέκησαν, 996 210
συνέρραπτον, 742.
συνέρραφα, 742,
συνέρρηγμαι, 996295
συνέστακα, 973-
συνέσταμαι, 973·
*
συνεστράτευμαι, 742.
συνεστρατευόμην, 742.
συνετεταράχειν, 990208·
συνετήρησες, 798.
συνέτρησα, 996200-
συνεχώρουν, 742.
-CYNH (ή), 1045, 1047.
συνήγοσαν, 791.
συνήθειά ἐστι, with ἵνα, 2082,
App. vi. 16.
συνήθης, 429.
συνηθίζω, 99662 -
συνήθικα, 996 12
συνηθισμένος, 99602
*
συνήφθη for -θην, App. iii.
22 d.
oúvie, 960 a.
CYNÍZHCIC, 155.
συνίημι, συνίω, 937.
constr., 2133 ff.
συνίουσι, 96ο αι.
συνίω, 937 ; see συνίημι.
συνίων, 96ο αι.
συνίωσι, 96ο αι.
συννεφιάζει, 868.
συνλέγω, App. ii. 14 B.
| Συνπλίκιος, 35.
συνράπτω, App. ii. 14 B.
συνστέη, 49.
σύντεκνος, 1119.
συντίθημι,with infin. 2086
σύντρεις, σὺν τρεῖς, 6621·
σύντρια, 6621.
συνύφαγια, 996288
Συνφάς, 287.
συνχαρήσονται, 996307-
συνψνφίσας, 35.
σύξυλος, 190.
σύρ for σύν, 195.
Σύρα, ή, 292.
συράπτω, App. ii. 14 Β.
συρίγγιον, 1038.
συριγέ, 1038.
συρίζω, 880.
B
σφαλῆναι, App. i. 15 α.
σφαλήσομαι, 99620, 1885.
σφαλίζω, 724, 906.
σφάλλω, 904, 92123, 996200
in N, 905.
σφαλμένος, 996200-
σφαλοῦμαι, 990200, 1885.
σφαλνάω, 187, 906.
σφάλνω, 904.
oparvŵ, 904, 906; see
σφαλνάω.
σφαλτός, 187.
σφάλω (fut.), 996200-
σφαλῶ (fut.), 99620; (intr.),
1456º.
σφαμένος, 996250-
σφάνταμα, φάντασμα, 143.
f.
σφάνω, 902, 904.
σφάξουσιν, 779.
σύρνω for σύρω, 903.
συρράπτω, App. ii. 143; 742.
σύρω σύρνω σέρνω, 903.
συς, 388; συός (του), App.
i. 15.
συστρατεύομαι, 742.
συφάμελος, 1104.
συφέρον (συμφέρον), 338.
συφέρουσι, 193.
συχάζω for ἡσυχάζω, 723.
συχνά, adv., 518.
συχνάκις, 649.
συχνοτρώγω, 1155.
συχνοφάγωμα, 1155.
συχωρῶ, 190.
σύψυχος, 193, 1104.
εφ-, enclisis of pronouns
beginning by, 105d.
σφαγῇ, σφαῇ, 155.
σφαγήσομαι, 996 209 -
σφαγμένος, 996209
σφαγῶ, σφαω, 155°.
σφάζω, 873, 880, 996200-
| σφαῇ, σφαγῇ, 155°.
σφαίλνω, 904, 996200-
σφαίνω for σφάλλω, 904.
σφαίρνω, 904, 996200-
Σφακιανός, 1979.
oparáw & -í5w, 870, 904.
σφάξω, 996200-
σφυρμένος for σφαλμένος,
996260*
σφαρτός for σφαλτός, 187.
opâs, 526, 526¹.
enclitic, 530.
{ω ἑαυτούς, 1408 f.
σφᾶς αὐτούς, 546.
σφάττω, 92115, 996259 -
σφαῶ, σφαγῶ, 155.
σφείς, 526.
σφέλας, 420.
σφένδαμος, ή, 245.
σφένταμος, δ, 245.
σφεντόνη, 194.
σφέτεροι ἴδιοι, οἱ -, 557·
σφέτερος, 555.
σφηγγα, ἡ, 249.
σφήκα, ἡ, 2.49.
σφηκώδης, 1065.
σφήν, δ, 249.
σφήνα, ἡ, 249.
σφήξ, δ, 249.
σφίγγα, ή, 249.
σφίξοντα, as adv., 823.
σφίσι", 526, 526.
enclitic, 530.
for ἑαυτοῖς, 1408.
σφιχτός, 190.
σφιχτοχέρης, 1149.
σφλῶμος, 130.
σφόδρα, 515; for superl.,
490.
σφόδρα σφόδρα, 521.
σφραγίδαν (τήν), App. iii. 6 c.
σφυρί, 186.
σφυρίζω, 880.
σφυρίχτρα, 1026.
σφώ, 525.
σφῶν, 5 26 ; enclitic, 530.
for ἑαυτῶν, 1408.
679
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
σφῶν, 525, 526.
b
cx, becomes σκ, 177.
σχάραν for ἐσχ-, 135 [1].
σχεθήσομαι, 99638, 1885.
oxeiv, 99698.
CXĤMA ATTIKÓN, 1170 f.
σχήσομαι, 99638
σχήσω, 99608.
✔
σχίζω, σκίζω, τη, 868.
- succeeds ῥήγνυμι, 996235.
oxîvos, † & d, 245, 292.
σχοίην, 99608.
σχοινᾶς, δ, 287.
σχολάζω, 870, 906.
σχολάρχης, δ, 298.
σχολαίος, 497.
σχολαίτερος, 497.
σχολάω, 870.
σχολεῖον, σκολειό, 177.
σχών, 99698.
-cw, fut., 77of., 899; in
P-N, 779.
mistaken for -σσω, 880.
-cw, in aor. mid. 785.
-co, in fut. subj., 771 f.
σώζω (σώζω), 996202
constr., 1245, 1316 f.
σώθηθι, 126.
σώθηθ' ὅσον, 184.
σώθητι for σώθηθι, 126.
σωθής fur -θείς, 37.
σῶιος, σπος, 20.
σωιω, σωω, 200
Σωκλέα (τόν), App. iii. 6.
Σώκρατες (ω), 257.
Σωκράτη & ην, 330, ΑΡρ·
iii. 6.
Σωκράτης, 298.
App.
Comal, -CH, ~CHTAI, etc.,
771 f., 1479; in P-N,
779.
σωμωτέμπορος, ΙΙΙ.
σωματοφύλαξ, 1106, 1111.
-cœmeða, 771 f.; in P-N,
779.
LCOMEN, 77I f.; in
779.
σῶν for ὑμῶν, 534.
σων(ν)ίζω, 996202 -
σών (ν)ω, 996202 -
.
·
P-N,
σωπάω for σιωπάω, 9962443
σῶς from σῶος, 148, 326.
4cwci”, 77r f.; in P-N, 779.
Σωσιγένου for -νους, 432 c.
Σωσικλέου for ous, 432 c.
σωσμένος, σωσμ-, 996202.
σώσομαι, 996.02.
σώσω, σώ-, 996201
Σωτας, 287.
σώτειρα, App. i. 150, App.
ii. 9.
σώτερα, ή, App. ii. 9.
Σωτερος, 26, 4, 40.
σωτήρ, 375.
Σωτήριος, Σωτῆρις, Σωτήρης,
298.
Σωτῆρις, 304.
σωφρον, τό, for σωφροσύνη,
1050".
σωφρονείν περί τι, 1639.
σωφρονίζουσιν, ἵνα —, 779.
σώφρων, 469, 1147; cuprt.,
499 α.
σωω, σωιώ, 20.
T, T, origin of, 2 f.
forms of, 2, 9.
a dental, 22.
a tenuis, 22, 23b.
a muta, 23".
pronunciation of, 9.
T, becomes 0, 170 f.
T for e in Tsaconic, 24° ; in
South Italian N, 24.
intergonantic, dropped,
155d.
τ' (= 300), 645.
-Τ-,
τ' λόγ᾽ for τοῦ λόγου, 030.
τά, 250, 530.
+ gen. of place,
cp. 1225 1.
τάδες (δ), 564.
τάζω, 880, 996204 -
ταθήσομαι, 996200-
-Tal, pers. ending, 760 b ff.
ταΐζω for ταγίζω, 155°
ταίρι or ταίρι, τό, 304.
Taîs, 250; cp. 29, 561.
ταίς or ταῖς for τάς, 29, 29,
App. ii. 9;
δίκαις,
App. ii. 9, 14 B; ἄρ
χαις, 29, App. ii. 9.
τακήσομαι, 996 270
τάκω, τήκω, 20.
τάλαις for -λας, 29.
τάλαν (τόν), 447.
τάλας, 446, 447.
τάλασσα for θάλ-, 184.
τἆλλα, App. ii. 14 Λο
ταμεῖον, ταμιείον, 148.
ταμένος, 996264
ταμία (του), 277.
ταμία for -iq, 20°
ταμίας, 283.
ταμιείον, ταμεῖον, 148.
ταν, τὰ ἐν, App. ii. 14 1.
τᾶν, τάων, App. ii. 14 4.
Tâvdov, 150 c.
τἀνδρι, 150 α.
τἀνδρός, 150 b.
τάνς του τάς, 29, App. ii. 9,
14 B.
τάξη for τάξις, ἡ, 343.
τάξι, ἡ, 344·
ταξίαρχος, 1111.
τάξις, becomes τάξη, 343.
τάξω, 996204:
Ταούρων, 30.
ταπεινά, adv., 522.
ταπεινότερα, adv., 522.
1228;
ταπεινότη for
της, 361.
τα, from αὐτα, 530.
τᾶ for ταῦ (τό), 9.
τὰ δέ, after τὰ μέν, 1197 α.
τὰ ἐμαυτοῦ πράττω, 1417.
τὰ ἐν, τάν, Αpp. ii. 14 Λ.
τὰ ἴδια πράττω, -τεις, 1417.
τὰ καὶ τά, 1197 d f.
τὰ μεσάνυκτα, αsadv., 1278.
τὰ πάντα, altogether, 1278.
' |
τὰ περὶ τὸν πόλεμον, 1639).
ζωνται, 771 1.; in P-N, τὰ πολλά, 1278.
-cwntai,
779.
σώνω, 996202.
σπος, σῶιος, 20.
σώπα του σιώπα, 152.
σωπάζω, 996241) 1096.
σωπαίνω, 996244
σωπᾷς, 990244
σωπασμένος, 996 244.
*
τὰ σαυτοῦ πράττεις, 1417.
ταβερνάριος, 1040.
ταγίζω, ταΐζω, 155.
ταγμένος, 996264
τάγυρι, τό, 303.
τάδε (δ, τό, ή), in N, 546.
τάδε ποιά (ή, τά), 564.
τάδε ποιός (δ), 564.
ταπεινότητα, ἡ, 361.
ταπίλοιπα, 15ο C.
τάπης, 36ο.
τ' ἄρ, 1748.
ταραγμένος, 996203 •
ταράζω, 873, 880, 996203.
ταραμμένος, 996203 •
Ταραντίνος, 1080.
ταράξομαι, 1885.
ταράξω, 99620.
ταράσσω & -ττω, 878 4, 880,
996 203.
ταραχθήσομαι, 1885.
τάργα, 150 c.
τάριχος, τάρχος, 136.
ταρρύμ πηδάλια, 203.
τάρχος, τάριχος, 136, Αρ.
i. 16 b.
τάρων for τεττάρων, 64540
τάς, 250, 530 ; iu N, 561.
680
Ι. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
τάς from αὐτάς, 530.
changed to της (τοῖς,τίς),
561 ; to res, ib.
τάς(ε), 208.
τάσσω, 878 6, 880, 996204;
-ομαι (mid.), 1467.
τατό, 542.
TATOC, TATON, -táth, 484;
in N, 485.
affixed to stem, 492.
ταττίκιν, τό, App. iii. 9 c.
τάττω, see τάσσω.
ταῦ (τό), tau, 2, 9 f.
becomes râ, 9d.
ταυάυρον, 300.
ταυαύρων, 300.
ταύρων, 300.
τεμώ,
-TE, pers. ending, 760 ff.; | TEµŵ, 996268.
in imprt., 806.
τεθάψομαι, 996108
τέθεικα, 963 0, 964.
τέθειμαι, 963 1, 964.
- repl. by κείμαι, 964 f. ?
τεθέλημα, 996 ε1·
| Teleλŋkévaι, 99661 •
τεθελήμεθα, 99601.
τεθήαμαι, 26, b.
τέθηκα, 963 b.
τεθήρευκα, 730.
τεθήρευμαι, 730.
τέθλασται, 736.
τέθναθι, 184.
τέθνηκα, 967 &α; as pre-
sent, 1868.
ταῦτα, see οὗτος; καὶ —, ‘and | τεθνήκαμεν, App. i. 16 a.
that,' 1432.
ταὐτά, 540.
ταῦτέρου for ταχυτέρου, 155.
ταῦτες foυ ταύτας, 332.
ταύτη, 567.
ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, 1391.
ταυτηΐ (--), 854.
ταυτί, 574.
ταυτό & -τόν, 540.
ταὐτοῦ, 540.
ταὐτῷ, 540.
ταφήσομαι, 996108
τάχα, as interrog., 1749.
τάχατες, 1749.
ταχέως, 516, 519.
ταχήν for -χύν, 35.
ταχινή, ή, 1182 b.
ταχινός, 1063.
τάχιον, 502 [1], 519.
τάχιστος, 502.
ταχίων, 502.
ταχύ, τό, in N, 503.
ταχύ, adv., 518.
ταχὺ ταχύ, 521.
ταχύς, 401, 516; in N,
503.
cmprt. of, 502 f.; in N,
503.
ταχὺς εἰς τὸ ἀκοῦσαι, 2001.
ταχύτατος, 502.
ταχυτερινός, 1063.
ταχύτερος, 502.
ταχυτέρου, 503.
becomes ταϋτέρου, 155.
ταχύτής, 360.
τάων, τῶν, τῶν, App. ii. 144.
τέ, 1703, 1704.
cnclitic, 1o2 e.
uso of, 1706 f.
TE—TE, 1706.
τεθνήξομαι, 996112
τεθνήξω, 996112, 1884, 1898.
τεθνιότα, 37.
τέθοιος, τέτοιος, 155 9.
τέθραμμαι, 996277.
τέθνκα, 730.
τέθυμαι, 730.
τεθυμμένος, 996284 -
τεί, τῇ, 26.
τεῖ βολεῖ τῇ βουλῇ), 26.
τείνω, 896, 996200-
for τίνω, 996274•
Στειρα (ή), 1013 f.
τ' εις for τρεῖς, 187°.
τείχε, τείχεα, App. ii. 14 A.
τείχη, τείχεα, Αpp. ii. 14 4.
Τειχιοῦσσα, 1067.
τειχομαχία, 1106.
τεκταίνω, App. ii. 8, 14 Β.
τεκτάννω, App. ii. 14 Β.
τεκτάνω, App. ii. 8, 14 B.
τελεία (cτιγμή), 703, 79-
τέλε(ι)ος, 20, 26, α.
τελειοῦσαι, 773.
τελειωμένος, 736, 740.
τελειώνω, 853, 996200
τελεσμένος, 736.
τελευταῖον, 506 [2]; τὸ
1278.
τελευταιότατον, 506 [2].
τελευτάω (intr.), 1455 b.
τελευτῶν, as adv., 2148.
τελεύω, 996200-
τελέω, 840, 996200-
as fut., 889.
τέλλω, 996207.
τέλος, 348, 423, 424,
'at last,' 1278.
τέλω for θέλω, 184.
τελῶ (fut.), 996200
-τε- for -θε-, in aor. pass., τέμνω, 996208
182 c.
τεμόν, 554.
-τενοῦμαι, 996205 •
τεντωμένος, 9962
τεντώνω, 996200-
τενώ, 996200-
τέξομαι, 996272-
τέξω, 996212, 999.
τεύ for θεός, 219.
-TÉON, verbal adj., 1051; in
NT, ib.
τέον (sc. ἐστιν), 1167 1.
-τέον ἦν for ἐστί, 1901.
-τέος, -τέον, -τέλ, 1050 f.
constr., 1365 f.
peculiar to A, 1051.
in NT, 1051.
substitutes
for, 1051,
App. vi. 13 ff.
τεοῦ, σοῦ, App. ii. 14 Α.
τέρας, 418.
Τερμεσσεύς, 26, α.
Στερος, έτερον, τέρα, 484 ;
in N, 485.
affixed to stem, 492.
superadded, 506.
doubled, 506".
succeeds -ίων, 506.
τέρφος, στέρφος, 130.
-τέρω, adv. in, 523.
- repl. by παρα-, 1618.
-τέρως for Ιτερον, 520.
τές & τες for τάς & τας, 530,
538 & [2], 561.
τὲς προάλλες, 1278.
τεσόν, 554.
τεσσ- fur τεττ-, 636, 645.
τέσσαρα, 636.
τεσσαράκοντα, 639, 645.
τεσσαρακοντάκις, 648.
τεσσαρακοντάς, 658.
τεσσαρακοστή, ‘lent, 647.
τεσσαρακοστός, 646, 647.
τεσσαράντα, 639.
τέσσαρες, 636-7 ; in N, 637.
becomes -αροι, 346.
τέσσαρες καὶ δέκα, 645.
τέσσαρες αρούρας, 332.
δραχμάς, 332.
οβολούς, 332.
ὔνους, 332.
τέσσαροι του -ρες, 346.
τεσσάρους for τέσσαρας, 346.
τεσσάρων, 656.
τέσσερα, 637, 645, App. i.
15 b.
τεσσεράκοντα, 645 [1].
τεσσερακοστός, 647.
τέσσερεις, 637.
τέσσερες, 637.
τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάκις, 648.
681
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
τέσσεροι, 637.
•
·
τεσσέρων, 637.
τέταγμαι, 996234 •
τέτακα, 996265.
τέταμαι, 996200
τετάραγμαι, 996263 -
τετάρτη, 'Wednesday,
650.
τέταρτος, 646.
τετάρτῳ ἔτει, 1391.
τετάφατε, 990108
τετάφθαι, 990108.
τέταχα, 996204 •
τέτεγμαι, 996 272
τετέλεκα, 996200-
τετέλεσμαι, 996206
τέτευχα, 996282-
τέτευχε, 996282 -
τέτυγμαι, 990270•
τέτηκα, 924.
τετήρηκαν, 786.
b
τέτικα, 996274
τετιμημένος, 849.
τετιμήσομαι, 996273
τέτμηκα, 996268•
τετριμμένος, 996279 -
τὴν for ἥν, 607.
τέτριφα, 996279, App. i. 15 b. την from αύτην, 530.
τέτροφα, 996 7
τετρωκώς, 996275-
τέτρωμαι, 996275 -
τετρώσομαι, 926270
.
647, τέττ- for τεσσ-, 636, 645.
τεττα (ω), 257.
τετμήκαμεν, Αpp. i. 16 a.
τέτμημαι, 996264-
268'
τετταρ-, see τεσσαρ.
τέτυμμαι, 990253
τετύπτημαι, 996283.
288
τέτυχα, 996282·
τετύχηκα, 990282
τετύχηκε, 996232
τεύξομαι, 996282-
τεχθήσομαι, 990272
τεχνάζομαι, 868.
τεχνιτευμένη, 736.
τεχνίτης, 283.
τεχνιτώων, 30.
TZ, in N. 203, 205.
sound of, 203, 205, 1040
ob [1].
in B-M misused for τσ,
1040 0 b [1].
Τζάκωνες for Λάκωνες, 823.
τζάμι, 1040 ο ύ [1].
TH, primordially for 0, 12.
TÉTOLOS, 126, 571, 572, 584, | Tñ for rỷ, 20º.
τετμήσομαι, 996208 -
593.
τέτοια, 924, 996372
τῇ, 250; in
Teî, 265.
written also
τετράδη, ἡ, 340, 647, 658, τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ, 1391.
1390.
τετράδην for -δα, 340.
τετράδιπλος, 654.
τετραδοπαρασκευή, 1156.
τετραδοπαρασκο", 1156.
τετραεξηκοστός, 6465.
τετραίνω, 996200-
ετράκις, 648, App. i. 16 a.
τετρακισχίλιοι, 645.
τὴ βελτίωσιν, 193.
τῇ πρὸ τριῶν εἰδῶν ἀπριλίων,
1652.
τῇ προτεραίᾳ, 1391.
τῇ τετάρτῃ Ολυμπιάδι, 1391·
τῇ τετράδι, in Ν, 340, 1395.
τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, 1391.
τὴ χάριν, App. iii. 22 c.
τὴ ψῆφον, 193, App. iii. 22 c.
Τηβέριος, 37.
τετρακόσιοι, 645, App. i. 16 a. τὴν γυναῖκα, 203 [1].
τετρακισχιλιοστός, 646.
τετρακοσιοστός, 646.
τετρακτύς, 66ο.
τέτραμμαι, 996273
τῇδε τῇ νυκτί, 1391.
τήθη των τίτθη, 37.
τηθηλᾶς, 287.
τετραπλᾶ & -λ (τά), 321, τηθίς, θηθίς, 184.
654.
τετραπλάσιος, 655.
τετραπλοῦς, 653.
τετράποδον, τό, 321.
τετράπους, 365.
τετράς, ἡ, 658.
τετρᾶς, δ, 287.
τέτραψα, 496 τα
276*
τετράψομαι, 996270 -
ThKW, 29³, 864, 996270 i
-ομαι, 92114, 924.
& τάκω, 29.
- peculiarities of, 9976-
τηλικαύτη, 583.
τηλίκος, 582 ; in N, 585.
τηλικόσδε, 587.
τηλικοῦτο & -τον, 583.
τὴν δέ, as subject, 1197 c.
τὴν ἀρχήν, 1278.
τὴν αὐγή, as adv., 1278.
τὴν εὐθεῖαν, 1278.
τὴν ἡμέραν (of a Saint's
day), omitted, 1276.
"
τὴν πρώτην, ' at first, 1278.
τὴν ταχίστην, as adv., 1278.
-THN, pers. ending, 760 ff.
τηνε for την, 208, 536, App.
iii. 24, 26.
Τηνιακός, 1077.
Τῆνο, ἡ, 2925.
τῆνος του ἐκεῖνος, 566.
τήξω, 996270·
•
-THP (), 383 ff., 1013 f.; in
Ν -τήρας, 101.
in composition becomes
Στωρ, 1147.
Tηpá(5)w, -éw, 871.
τηρέω, 871.
-TĤPAC (8), 1017.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
τηρηθήσομαι, 1885.
τηρήσομαι, 1885.
-TĤPI (TÓ), 302 ff., 1026,
1035.
-THPION (TO), 302 ff., 1025 f.,
1034 f.
leads to -τῆρι, 302 ff.,
1026.
τὴς for τίς, 37.
τῆς, 250, 530.
becomes τση, 205, 562.
τῆς στερεάς, 1343.
της
from αύτης, 530.
as possess. pron., 552.
τῆς for τάς, 561.
-THC (5), 283, 1013, 1015 ff.,
1032 f.
accentuation of, 1015.
4THC (δ), ethnic, roof.
ΣΤΗΣ (ή), 36ο 1'., 1045, 1047.
leads to N Στη οι άτητα,
1045, 1047.
τῆς(ε) for τῆς, 208.
τῆς ποσί, 44.
Te becomes 00, 171".
Tí, 'what,' 586 f.; in N, 590;
τὸ
1217 f.
repl. by ἴντα in N, 592.
Tí, 'why,' 1278, 2044 f.
τηλικούτος, 566, 583; in N, τί for ποῖος, 591, 611; τί -
τέτρημαι, 996.2010 -
585.
τετρήρη & ην, 330, App. τὴ μίσθωσιν, 195.
iii. 6.
τέτριγα, 996280-
τήν, 250, 530.
- leads to τηνε, 208, 536.
λογής, 591.
τί ἆρα, 2048.
τί ἔνε τά, 592 F.
τί ἔνι τά, 592
1.
682
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
τί ἔνι τό, 593.
τί ἔν' τα, τίντα, 154, 592 f.
τί ἔπαθες καί, wly, 2045.
τί ἔχεις καί, ' why, 2045
τί ἦ, 1748.
τί λογῆς, 592.
Tí μalwv, 'why,' 2044 f.
τί 'ν' τά, 154, 592 f.
τί παθών, 2044 f.
Tì (indefin.), 586 f.; mis-
accented rì, 588; in
N, 596.
enclitic, 102 b.
meaning of, 587, 1450 f.
repl. by τίποτε, 596.
a little,' 1385.
'somewhat,' 1278.
Tì for Tý(v), 37.
-TI from -01, 182 b.
τίμαε, τίμα, 150 c.
τιμάετε, τιμᾶτε, App. ii. 141.
τιμάομεν, τιμᾶμεν, τιμῶμεν,
App. ii. 14 A.
τιμαίς, οἱ, 267.
Τιμασιθέοι for -θέω, 263.
τιμάω, 828, 996278
τιμᾶσθαι πρὸ πολλῶν, 1647.
τιμᾶμες, App. ii. 14 Δ.
TIμâTE, TIμάETE, App. ii. 14 A.
| Tiµéas, 283º.
σ
Tiμn, compounds of, 494.
τιμήεις, 451.
Tiμnenooμaι, 996273, 1885.
τιμῆμα, τμῆμα, 179
τιμημένος, 849, 996278
τιμήσομαι, 996 273, 1885.
τιμήσω, 849.
Τιμοκράτου for -τους, 432 c.
-TI- leads to -o-, 181; to тiμôμev, тiμâμev, App. ii.
-01-, 1559.
-Tí, adverbs in, 1102 b.
Τιβέρης, 1040.
Τιβέριος, 1040.
Τιβέρις, 104C.
TíẞOTOι, 562, 596 & [1].
τιγγάβαρι, 399.
τίη i. e. τί 7, 1748.
τιθέαμεν from τιθέασι, 776.
Tiléaσi, leads to тiléaµev,
776.
τιθέατε, 776.
τίθειμι, 29", App. ii. 9, 1o.
tideís, 453, App. ii. 9.
τιθεῖσα, App. ii. 14 Β.
τιθένσα, App. ii. 14 Β.
τιθές, App. ii. 9.
14 4.
Τιμοσθένου for -vous, 432 c.
τιμοῦντες, 85ο.
τιμοῦσι, 850.
τιμῶμεν, τιμάομεν, App. ii.
14 A.
τιμωρέω, different from -ομαι,
1471 ; -ομαί τινος & περί
τινος, 1245.
Tivá, 'some,' 594; in N, 596.
τίνα τρόπον ; 1278.
τινάζω, 873, 880.
Tɩvá”, in N, 596, app. iii. 9 c.
Twas for Tis 'some,' 590,
τινὰς τὶς
594, 595, 596.
prepositive, 1448", 1449º.
with negatives, 1449.
for οὐδείς, 1449.
τινὰς δὲν for οὐδείς, 1449°.
Tɩvàs và µn for ovdeís, 1449°.
Tivȧoow, 880.
Tivés, 'some,' 594; omitted,
1313; see also τὶς
(indef.).
τιθέσα, App. ii. 14 Β.
τίθεσαι, 773.
τίθημι, μὴ
Tíon, App. ii. 10; 126,
182 a, 774, 927 ff.,
945 r., 955, 963.
accentuation of, 952.
compounds of, 956.
P-Ñ history of, 955 ff.
leads to τίθω, 937, 959 α;
to θέτω, 959.
τίθημι νόμον & εμαι νόμον,
1470 f. ; -εμαι τὴν ψῆ-
pov, 1470b.
τίθῆται, 954.
τίθοιτο, 954.
τίθω, 959 α.
τίθω, τίθημι, 937, 958, 959.
Tɩow, subj., 931, 953 α.
-tiká (tá), ' loc,' 1071.
-τικό" (τό), 1071.
τίκτω,864, 917,924, 996212,
998.
τίμα, 150 €, 857.
b
as prepositive, 1448.
τινὲς ἐκ or ἀπό, 1312.
τινὶ & τῳ, 530.
τίνοις του τίσι, 346.
τίνος, 587 f. ; in N, 590.
τίνος λογῆς, 591.
τινὸς & του, 530 f.
Tivós, in N, 590, 596.
τίντα (τί 'ν' τα), 592 f.
becomes ivra, 592 f.
τίντο, 593.
τίνω, 990274
τίποτα, 596 & [1].
τίποτε, in
P-N, 596;
'nothing,' 12786; TO
—, 596 [1].
I
τίποτες, 596 & [1].
τίποτις for -τε, 562,596 &[r].
τίποτσι, 562, 596 & [1].
τίπτε, App. i. 163.
1. Tis (interrog.), 586 f.;
in N, 590.
use of, 1446 ^; ♪
1217 f.
repl. by πotos, 589, 597,
611.
τις ἆρα, 2048.
τίς ἐστιν ὅς, 2015.
τίς ἐστιν ὅστις, 1435.
Tis olde, 970b.
2. Tìs (indefin.), 586 f.; mis-
accented ris, 588b; en-
clitic, 102b; orthotone,
109, 1448b.
as indefin. article, 237,
586, 591, 594, 595,
1448 ft.
in N, 596.
repl. by eis, 589, 597,
622 ff
'
some one,' 1450.
a personality,' 1450.
about,' 1452.
prepositive, 1448" f.
omitted, 1313; see also
τινές.
Tìs els, 1449b.
τὶς οὐ for οὐδεὶς or μηδείς,
598º, 629º, 1449°;
for où or un, 1449°.
Tís for Tás, 561.
τις μάμις, 37.
TIC (), gen. idos, 1030,
1032.
repl. by Tiooa, 1033.
TICCA (1), 10311, 1033.
Τισσαφέρνης, 431.
ríow, 990271.
τίσω,
τέτοιος, 126, 584.
τιτραίνω, 996 209-
τιτράω, 996200-
τιτρώσκω, 496.270
τλεγγίς, στλεγγίς, 130.
τλήμων, 469, 1074.
tλñvai, 9804.
-Tм-, in N, 179.
τμηθήσομαι, 996208
τμῆμα, τιμῆμα, 179.
TÚ, 250, 530.
+gen., 1225 f.
for 8, 607.
from αὐτό, 530.
- in indirect questions,
2038", 2041.
>
as soon as, 1795, 1999.
τὸ fur τόν, App. iii. 26.
683
Ι. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
το βράδυ, as adv., 1278.
τὸ γληγορύτερο, adv., 1278.
τὸ δέ, but it, introduces
a new clause, 1197 b.
τὸ διακο" for τὸν δ-, 194.
τὸ ἐπ' ἐμοί, 1582 d.
τὸ ἵνα + subj., 2072 [2].
τὸ θεόν for τὸν θ-, 194.
τὸ καὶ τό, 1197df.
τὸ κατ' ἐμέ, 1588 α.
τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον είναι, 2008.
τὸ λοιπόν, 1278.
at noon,
τὸ μὲν τὸ δε, 1197 α.
τὸ μεσημέρι,
12784.
τὸ μετὰ ταῦτα, 1278.
τὸ μὴ for τὸ οὐ, 1815.
τὸ 'μὸν τοῦμόν, App. ii. 14 A.
rò và for infin., 2072 & [2],
App. vi. 25.
τὸ νῦν, “ now, 1278.
τὸ νῦν εἶναι, 2098.
τὸ ὅτι for infin., 2072.
τὸ οὐ repl. by τὸ μή, 1815.
τὸ πολὺ πολύ, 1278.
τὸ πρίν, 1278.
τὸ πρωί, adv., 1278.
τὸ πρῶτον, ' at first, 1278.
τὸ πῶς for infin., 2072.
τὸ τελευταῖον, 1278.
τὸ τί ; 1217 f.
-TO, pers. ending ind.,
760 b ff.
in imprf. & aor. becomes
-τον, App. iii. 19.
-το, N neuters in, 1o52.
τοί, 1700 ; enclitic, 102 e.
as dem. pron., 566.
τοι for τῷ, 26, often.
τοι δήμοι, 268.
το ἱεροι, 26..
τοιγάρ, 1700 [1].
τοιγαροῦν, 1700 & [1].
τοῖν, 250.
τοίνυν, 1700 & [1].
τολος, 566, 582, 594.
τοιύσδε, 582.
& τοιοῦτος, 1431.
τοιοῦτο & -τον, 583.
τοιοῦτος, τοιοῦτο", τοιαύτη,
566, 583.
leads to τοίτοιος, 584; to
τέτοιος, ib. ; το ἔτοιος,
ib.
& τοιύσδε, 1431.
τοιοῦτος τις, 1452.
τύις οι τοίς for τόνς (τούς),
29, 29, Αp. ii. 8 f.,
App.
14 B.
τοῖς, 250.
τοῖς for τάς, 561.
for τῆς, 35.
τοῖς ἁγίας, 44.
τοῖς δεσποίνης, 44.
τοίτοιος, 126, 584.
τοίχου τοίχου, 1343.
τὸλ for τόν, 195, 201.
τοσοῦτος & τοσόσδε, 1431.
τοσούτῳ, 1384.
τότες, 596 [1].
τότο for τούτου, 26, b (bis).
τύτων for τούτων, 26, b (bis).
του for τινός, 587 f.; for
αὐτου, 530.
τόν, 250, 530, 608 ; leads to του, 250, 530 ; as poss., 552.
τονε, 536.
for ov, 6o7.
for ἀτόν, αὐτόν, 136,530,
1422 f.
Tov dé, as subject, 1197 c.
τὸν καὶ τόν, 1197 d.
-TON, neuters in, 1o52.
ΤΟΝ,
ΤΟΝ, pers. ending, 76o ff.;
imprt., 806.
for -ro, in imprf. & aor.,
App. iii. 19.
τόνε fur τόν, 1 32 f., 208, 536,
725, App. iii. 24, 26.
τόνε γνωρίζω, 132.
ΤοΝοκλισία, 94.
τύνομα, 26 α.
τόνος, points to pitch, App.
i. 9 & [1], 19 ff.
B
τόνε leads to τούς, 29, App.
ii. 8 f.
τοξάζομαι, 1001.
τοξοφάρετρα, τά, 1156.
τοῦ + infin. to denote pur-
pose, 2076 f., 2158, App.
vi. 17, 23 f.
τοῦ ἁγίου . . ., on Saint
day, 1229.
'
-'s
τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ, each year,
1341 α.
τοῦ καιροῦ, next year, 1342.
τοῦ κάκου, 1343.
τοῦ μάκρους, 1343.
τοῦ μηνός,
1341 a.
each month,
τοῦ πλάτους, 1343.
τοῦ τοίχου τοίχου, 1343.
τοῦ χρόνου, ‘next year, 1342.
τοῦ ψήλους, 1343.
τοῦ for οὗ, 607.
τοῦ; for τίνος; 587.
τουμόν, App. ii. 14 Λ.
τοῦνος, 581.
τοῦντο, 566.
τοῦο [or τοῦτο, 155.
τῶργον οὐ τοῦργον, App. ii. τοῦργον, App. ii. 14 A.
14 Λ.
τορέω, 996200 -
τορμήσι for τολμήσει, 187.
τος for αὐτός, 542 Γ., 1423 C.
τός for τούς, App. ii. 9 f.,
14 B.
-TOC, adj. in, 1050", 1052 f.
repl. by Lipos, 1052.
repl. by indic., 1837 f.
=pf. part., 1o52.
-tus, 1052.
for part. of manner, 2162.
-TOC, ordinal numbers in,
646.
τόσα, adv., 518.
τόσα μεγάλος, 585.
τοσάκις 649.
τοσαυτάκις, 649.
τοσαύτη, 583 ; see τοσοῦτος.
τόσον, adv., 518.
τόσον καιρὸν ἔχω ἀφ' οὗ (or
δ]που), 1834.
τόσος, 566, 582, 583 ; iu N,
584.
τοσύσδε, 582.
& τοσοῦτος, 1431.
26ο
τοσοῦτο & -ον, 583.
τοσοῦτος, 583.
τοσοτοι, 26, υ
Τούρκικος, Ιο77.
Τουρκόπουλα, τά, 1041.
τούς, 250, 530, 534 ; from
Tóvs, App. ii. 8 ff., 14 B.
for αὐτούς, 530.
leads to τουσε, 536.
changed to τσοί or τσή,
562.
Toùs dé, as subject, 1197 c.
τούσδε for τούς δε, 103.
τοῦσε, τούσε or τουσε for
τους, 208, 536, App. iii.
24, 26.
TOYT-, deictic force of, 566.
τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι, 983 Α.
τοῦτα, 567.
τούτας, 566.
τοῦτ' ἐκεῖνο, 1432.
τοῦτες, 566, 567.
τούτη, 566.
τούτην, 566.
τούτη-νῆς, 567.
τούτης, 567.
τουτί, τουτοί, 1361, 574.
τοῦτο, 565 ; sec οὗτος.
for τοῦτον, 539.
τοῦτοι, 566, 567.
τουτοΐ, τουτί, 1361.
τοῦτοι νά, 575.
684
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, 1278.
τοῦτο-νά, 575.
τοῦτο-νέ, 575.
τρελός, 542.
τρέφεται, 177.
τρέφω, 887, 9213, 996277 -
τοῦτος, 566, 567 f., 572, 575, τρέχα for -χε, 830, 996 278.
577.
use of, 1420, 1429.
τοῦτο-σά(s), 575.
τοῦτο-σέ(ς), 575.
τούτου, 567, 578.
τουτουί (--), 85, 574.
τούτου-νά, 575.
τούτου-νοῦ, 567, 578.
τουτουνῶν, 578 [1].
τούτου-σά(ς), 575.
τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ, 1382.
τουτωί (--), 854.
τούτων, 567.
τούτω-νά, 575.
τούτω νων, 567, 578.
τρᾶ for τρία, 6453-
-Tра (1), of means, 1025,
1026".
& -Opa (1), 1026".
from 'τρια, 1017.
τραβώ, 853.
Τραγειανοῦ, 59 c.
Τραγιανός, 59 €, 155 α.
τραγίστικος, 1077.
τραγίτικος, 1077.
τραγοιδοῖς for -γῳδοίς, 26.
τραγῳδιδάσκαλος, 126.
τραγῳδοδιδάσκαλος, 126.
τρακόσιοι & -σοι, 645300 -
τραντάφυλλο", τριαντ-, 150d.
τράπεζα, App. i. 16α.
τραπεζείτου, 34.
τραπέζι, 302.
τραπήσομαι, 996 270
τραυλός, 542.
τραυματίας, 283.
τραφῆναι, App. i. 15 α.
τραφήσομαι, 996 277, 1385.
τράφος, ἡ & δ, 249.
τραχηλᾶς, 1043.
Τραχηλᾶς, 287.
τραχύνω, τρηχύνω, 29.
τραχύς, 401.
τρεις, ' three, 635 f., 645.
τρεις, 'thrice, 650.
τρεῖς τρεῖς, 666.
τρεῖς καὶ δέκα, 6.45.
τρεῖς χιλιάδες, 645.
τρελός, 542.
τρεμάμενος, 21 II.
τρέξω, 996.278 -
•
τρέπω, 887, 918, 9212, 923,
996276; mid., 1467.
τρέπομαι, 923, 1467.
πρός τι, 1657 α.
τρεσᾶς, δ, 287.
τρεχάμενος, 996278, 2111.
τρεχάτε for τρέχετε, 830,
996278.
996278, 2111.
τρεχάτος, 996278, 1052, 2162.
τρέχοντας, as adv., 2163.
τρεχούμενος, 996 27
τρέχω, 8652; for θέω, 996 111;
for ῥέω, 996234 -
-στάδιον, 1268.
τρέω, 841.
τρῆς for τρεῖς, 29°.
τρηχύνω, τραχύνω, 29.
τρί᾽ ἄττα, 1452.
τρία, 155 €, 635 f., 6453.
contr. to τρα, 6453
Στρια (ή), 1o13 f., 1017.
—
becomes -τρα, 1017.
Τριάδα, Αγιὰ 658".
Τριαδίτσα, 1040 ο C.
τριακάς, 658.
τριάκοντα, 639, 645.
τριάκοντά τινες, 1452.
τριακονταέτης, 1113.
τριακοντάκις, 648.
τριακοντάς, 658.
τριακονταστός, 126.
τριακόντερος, 125.
τριακόντορος, 125.
τριακοντούτας (τούς), 430.
τριακοντούτις, 11 13.
τριακοσιάκις, 648.
τριακόσιοι, 150 17, 645.
τριακοσιοστός, 646.
τριακοστός, 126, 646.
τριάντα, 639, 645; δ -, 647.
τριανταρέα, 661.
τριαντάφυλλου, τραντ -, 15od.
τριάς, ή, 364, 658.
τριᾶς, δ, 287.
τριβακός & τρίβας, App. iii.
12.
τρίβας & βακός, App. iii.
12.
τρίβγω, 861, 996 279-
-τριβήσομαι, 996279-
τριήρη & -ην, 330, App. iii. 6.
τριήρης, 429.
τρικά for τρία, 155 f.
τρικάταρτος, 1149.
τρίμερα, τριήμ-, 148.
τριμμένος, 737, 996 το
Τρινεμαιεύς, 49.
τρίξω, 996200-
τριπλᾶ & -πλά, 321, 654.
τριπλάσιος, 655.
τριπλός, 654.
τριπλούς, 653.
τρίπους, 365.
τρίς, 648;
I 120 f.
in compos.,
τρὶς τοῦ μηνός, 1314.
-τρία (ή), 1013 f., 1017.
τρισίν, 631, 635.
τρισκαιδεκάκις, 648.
τρισκατάρατος, 1121.
τρισκελής, 1120.
τρισμένος, 996280-
τρισσύς, 653 f.
τρισχίλιοι, 645.
τρισχιλιοστός, 645.
τρίτει for τρίτῃ, 265.
τρίτη (ή), 1182 V; Tues-
day,' 647, 650.
'thrice,' 652.
τρίτον δ τὸ
τρίτος, 646 ; in N, 647.
τριτύς, 660.
τριτωωνιάδος, 30.
τριφθήσομαι, 1885.
τρίχα (τὴν & ἡ), 4337.
τρίψομαι, 1885.
τρίψω, 996,79 -
τριῶν, 579, 635 f.
τριωνῶν, 579.
τρομάζω, 873.
τρομήσῃ for τολμήσῃ, 187.
-τρου (τό), 1025 f.
τρόπον,τίνα —, 1278; τοῦτον
τὸν ib. ; πάντα
ib.
,
τρόπῳ, τούτῳ τῷ -, οὐδενὶ
παντὶ 1382.
τροχαδάριος, 1040.
τρύγη, ή, 349.
τρίβω, 8651, 8651, 875, τρυπάω for τετραίνω, 996209 -
9216, 996279-
τριγμένος, 906.0
τριγύρω, 1634.
•
τριγύρου, 1634.
τρίδιπλος, 654.
Τριεστίνικος, ιοδο.
Τριεστίνος, 1031 για
τριετῆν τον -τῆ, 430.
τρίζω, 872, 996230 ; in N, ib.
τριήμερα, τρίμερα, 1485.
τρύγος, τὸ & δ, 249, 424.
τρώ(γ)εις, τρῷς, 152.
τρώγου", 777.
Tрwɣw, 996281, 998.
succeeds ἐσθίω, 996 1
τρώεις, τρῷς, 152,
996981.
τρῶν tor τρώ(γ)ουν, 863.
τρώξομαι, 946 κι
τρώουν for τρώγουν, 863.
Τρώς, Τρώων, 351.
,
863,
685
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
τρῷς for τρώγεις, 152, 863, Τύρινθι, 35.
996281
τρώσω, 990275
Τρώων for Τρωῶν, 351.
T+C=σ, 180, 337 b, 884 c.
TC, in N, 203, 205, 1040 ob
[1]; sound of, ib.
τ's fur τούς, 030 ; -λογές,
ib.
τσ' for τσῆ, τούς, τάς, 562.
тσáμ, 1040 0 b [1].
τσάπα, 205.
τσαπεροῦ, ἡ, 1043.
Ton for Tηs, 205, 562.
fur τούς & τάς, 562.
τσόχα, 205.
-TT-, in syllabication, 92.
-TTW & -CCW, 878 ff.
τῦ for τοῦ, 29.
τυρνή, τυρινή, 1362.
τυροκόμος, 1104
τυρόψωμο, 1105.
τύς for τούς, 29.
άλλυς, 29.
Τύτος, 35.
τυφῆναι, App. i. 15 α.
τυφθείς, 453.
τυφλώνων, 853.
τύφω, 996214-
τυχαίνω, 901, 996282-
τυχάνω, 901, 996282·
τύχει, τύχῃ, 26, 28 b.
τύχῃ, τύχει, 28 1.
τύχοιτο, 996202-
TUXÓv, as adv., 996282, 1278,
2125 f.
τύχω, 996282.
τύψω, 996283 -
·
-TY for -Ov-, in aor. pass., 7 (dual), 250.
182 c.
τυαύτην, 36.
Τιβέριος, 35.
τυγχάνω, 90I, 996282, 998.
as auxiliary verb, 687.
Tvyxávw + part., 2113.
+ ὤν, 2116.
τὰ Μητρόδωρον for τὸν Μ-,
195.
τῷ fur τῷ, 20°.
Tŵ for TOû, 29".
τῶ for τῶν, App. iii. 26.
τῶ δασκάλων, 194.
+infin., 2119, App. vi. Ta dvváμewv, 194.
17 a.
+iva (vá), 2119.
impersonal, 2119.
changed to part., 2125;
to adv. (ruxóv), ib.
+ accus., 1242.
τυγχάνομαι, 996282·
τυΐ [or τυρί, 187.
τυλιγμένος, 996 78-
τυλιγμός, 179 & [1].
TUλí(w, 880; succeeds
σω, 99673
τυλιμένος, 9967-
τυλιμός, 179 & [1].
τυλίσσω, 880.
τῶ δύω ἱεράκων, 194.
τῷ θεώ, 20.
To for Tivi, 587 l.
τω
τῷ, 250.
τῷ ἐπιόντι μηνί, 1391.
τῷ ἔργῳ, 1382.
τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ, 1395.
τῷ λόγῳ, 1382.
τῷ ὄντι, 1382.
τῷ σαββάτῳ, in N, 340,1395.
Exío--TW, imprt., 806.
Τωβίας, 283.
τυπτήσειν, 996283 -
τυπτήσομαι, 996283-
τυπτήσω, 996283 -
τύπτομαι foι πατάσσομαι,
996198
τύπτω, 990288-
for παίω, 996218 •
τὠμύν, τῶμον, τουμόν, App.
ii. 14 A.
τῶμον, τουμόν, App. ii. 14 Λ.
Tŵv, 250, 530, App. ii. 14 A.
from αὐτῶν, 530, 552 ?
becomes râs, 534.
leads to Twve, 536.
-TWN, imprt., 806.
Twve for Twv, 208, 536, App.
iii. 24, 26.
τύπτωμαι (υ), App. i. τῶνι foν τῶν, 132, 632.
15 b.
τυραννάω, 854.
Tâvi duó, 132, 632.
'Twp (d), 1013 f., 1017.
from Thp, 1147.
· becomes τωρας (δ), 1017.
Túpavvos (Peisistratos), App. Twpac (5), 1017.
τυραννέω, 854.
τυραννίζω, 869.
ii. II.
τυρί, 35, 186.
τρί, 35.
τυρινή, τυρνή, 1362.
τῶργον, τοῦργον, App. ii.
14 4.
τωρῶ for θωρῶ, 184.
τως for των, 530, 534, 538.
τως leads to τωσε, 536.
τὼς for τόνς (τούς), 29, App.
ii. 9 f., 14 B.
νόμως, 29 f.
Twσe for Tws, 208, 536, app.
τωσε
iii. 24, 26.
-TWCAN, 805, 811.
Y, y (i.e. û frλóv), origin of,
3, 9, 9º.
forms of, 3, 9.
names of, 9, 9º f.
•
place of, 3, 9; called
the fifth vowel, 29ºº [2]
a postpositive vowel, 19.
pronunciation of, 9, 24;
according to Dion. H.,
25 [1] a.
passes over to 1, 34bf
by what process, 34";
through uu?, ib.
conf. with, 34" ff.
for ei, 1, 7, oi, 35, 50b.
for F, 63, 404.
;
for Latin b, 51, 52, 63.
for Latin u or 1, 53.
conf. with, 35; with
El, ib. ; with
7, ib.;
with o, 36.
& ev, 32, 168.
transcribed by ov, 34";
by u, 53.
in Sanskrit, 34°.
Ủ, TÚ, 9, 90.
-Ý, initial, 73.
-, in augment, 717; aug-
mented, 714; not aug-
mented, 715.
Y-, dropped, 723.
-Y-, in penult, 494.
-y, ending of 3rd declension,
238, 253.
-Y, gen. -vos, 387.
-Y, gen. -ews, 391.
-y change to ending -7 († &
8), 343.
-Y, in compos., 1108.
λov for ancient û, 9, 9º.
v' (400), 645-
ὑάκινθος, ἡ & &, 292.
vaλâs, &, 287, 1044.
vaλos, jaλí, 151.
-Υβρω for -ύβω, 861.
üßpeos for -ews, App. i. 15 b.
ὕβριζαν for -ζον, 789.
ὕβριζον (3), 714 f.
ὑβρίζω, Ν βρίζω, 723.
ὑβρίζω δεινά, 1266.
ὕβρις, 395.
Τὕβρισον, in N, 813.
686
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
αὐτούς, repl. | ὑπὲρ repl. by παρὰ + accus.,
1615 f.; by διά + accus.,
-άβω, -ύβγω, 861.
ὑμᾶς, 545 ;
Υγεία, 148 1 [1].
by ἑαυτούς, 546.
ὑγεία, γειά, 134 e.
ὑμεῖς, 525.
I].
ὑμερινόν for ἡμερινόν, 35.
ὑμέτεροι ἴδιοι, οἱ -557-
(αὐτῶν),
ὑγεία, ἁγία, υγίεια, 148 & ὑμεῖς αὐτοί, 544.
Ὑγείνος, 148 b [1].
ὑγειοῦ του υἱοῦ, 6ο.
ὑγία, ὑγεία, υγίεια, 1485 &
[r].
ὑγια (τὸν), 428.
υγιαίνω, 899, 996285
becomes γιαίνω, 723.
•
•
Ἁγίανα, 996245
υγιάνθην, 996285
ὑγιαν, 996.285.
ἁγιάσθην, 996235.
ἁγιασθήσομαι, 996285
ἡγιασμένος, 996245
ὑγίε(ι)α, 200.
•
ὑμέτερος, 553 ;
555 f.
ὑμῖν, 525; ὑμῖν, 525, 530.
ὑμναίομεν, 49.
ὕμνωων, 30.
ὑμῶν, 525, 530.
tur ὑμέτερος, 551.
ὑμῶν for ἡμῶν, 35.
ὑμῶν αὐτῶν as poss., 556.
-YN (accus. sing.), how
treated in N, App. iii.
14.
ὑνίον, γυνί, 155.
vyiela, vyeîa, vyîa, 20, 148h -YNTHC (U), 1016.
& [1].
ὑγιῆ (τόν), 428.
α
& b.
ὑγιῆν, 330, App. iii. 6, a
ὑγιῆν καὶ ἀσινῆν, App. iii.
6c.
ὑγιής, 428.
ΥΓΡΑ ΦΩΝΗΕΝΤΑ, 17.
ὑγρασία, 1020.
υδάρμη, 126, 186.
ὕδατος (του), 43321
υδράργυρος, 126.
υδράλμη, 126.
ὑδρέλαιον, 1156.
-ΥΔΡιον (τό), 1037.
ὕδωρ, 42321·
ὕει, subject of, 1166.
-ýzw, meaning of, 1095 f.
-yHc, accus. sing. -νὰ & -υῆ,
428.
YI, γι, spurious diphthong,
19 b
origin of, 32.
· pronunciation of, 24,
30 f., 32, 36.
conf. with et, 36.
leads to 1, 32, 34" ff.
ι,
affects simple v, 34".
reduced to v, 20º.
υἱεῖ (τῷ), 43322
vieîs, ol, 43322.
υἱέος (του), 43322.
υἱέσι" (τοῖς), 43322
viós, vós, 200, 43322·
ὐκετήριον for οἰκητ-, 36.
"Υλα (του), 277.
ὕλιν for ὕλην, 37.
-ύλλιον, 1037.
ΥΛΛΥΔΙΟΝ, 1037.
-ýλoc, adj., 1059.
-γνω, neaning of, 1089.
- in fut. & pres., 899;
mostly in fut., 900.
leads to -αίνω, 900.
vós, viós, 200, 43322.
ὑπαγάγω leads to ὑπάγω?
737, 996g.
ὕπαγον, imprt., 813.
ὑπάγω, 863, 996g.
in N, 996, ; from ὑπα-
γάγω ? 737.
leads to πάγω, 723; to
πάω, 863.
for fut., App. iv. 4.
+ infin., App. vi. 12 c [3].
ὑπάγω υπό
ὑπὸ τοὺς νόμους,
1692.
ὑπακούω τινὶ & τινά, 1355 f.
ὑπαντηκότες, 750 1.
ὑπάρχοντα, τά, 2112.
υπάρχοντα, us adv., 823.
ὑπάρχω, 4 start first, constr.,
2106 ff., 2126 f.
+ part., 2106 f., 2126 f.
ὑπάρχω, am, 937, 2107,
2126 f.
as auxiliary, 687.
+ pres. part. for durat.
pres., 1845.
+ pf. part. for pf. indic.,
1864 f.
+ part. pass., 2140.
ὑπάτοις = consulibus, 2144.
ὕπατος, 507.
ὑπεγενοέρχετον, 1157.
ὑπέρ, 507, 1489, 1492.
proclitic, 97º; dissociated
from πὲρ & περί, 743.
use of, 1674 86.
ὑπὲρ + accus., 1674 f.
1521, 1534, 1680; by
ὑπεράνω, 1491, 1675,
1678.
ὑπὲρ + gen., 1677-86; for
ἀντί, 1682 f.; for περὶ +
gen., 1684 f.; repl. by
ὑπεράνω, 1491, 1678 f.;
by did + accus., 1679³.
ὑπὲρ + dat., 1686.
conf. with περί, 1686.
Υπερ-, repl. by παρα-, 1676.
ὑπὲρ ἄνθρωπον, 1676.
ὑπὲρ ἐγώ οι ὑπέρεγω in NT,
1685, 1980.
ὑπέρ τινος for περί τινος,
1684 f.
ὑπὲρ τοῦ + infin., App. vi.
23, 24.
ὑπεράνω for ὑπὲρ + accus.
1491, 1675, 1678.
ὑπερασπίζετο, 750 b.
ὑπερασπίζω leads to περασπί
ζομαι, 723, 10002
ὑπερβαρής, 1140.
ὑπεργηραθείς, 99630 -
ὑπέρεγω, in NT misspelt
for εἴπερ ἐγώ, 1685 1,
1980b.
ὑπερέτην for ὑπηρέτην, 40.
ὑπερηφανεύομαι,
1458b.
leads to περηφ-, 723.
ὑπερηφανεω & -εύομαι,
10002,
10002.
τινά, 12443, 1457.
ὑπερηφανία, περηφ-, 134 e.
ὑπερήφανος, περήφ-, 135.
ὑπερπέπαικα, 996 90.
ὑπέρτατος, 507.
ὑπέρτερος, 507.
ὑπέσχημαι, 99698
ὑπεύθινοι, 35.
ὑπήκοος, 465, 1142.
ὑπηρέτης, 283.
ὑπήρχασιν, 793.
ὑπισχνέομαι, 99608,
99698, 1001,
1003.
constr., 2085 f., 2086".
+ infin., 2086".
leads to ὑπόσχομαι, App.
iv. 3.
ὑπνομάχος, 1150.
ὑπό, 1489, 1492, 1687-98.
proclitic, 97 c.
use of, 1687-98".
repl. by ἀπό ὑποκάτω,
1491, 1689, 1693.
ὑπό + accus., 1688-93.
687
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ὑπὸ repl. by ὑποκάτω (ἀπο- | ὑπόσκομαι, 99698.
κάτω ἀπό), 1491, 1689, Υποστιγμή, 703, 79.
1693.
misused, 1689, 1693.
ind + gen., 1694 ff.
denotes agent in pass.
verbs (by'), 1464,
1695.
repl. by ἀπό, 1506 f,,
1696; by παρὰ + gen.,
1628; by dat. simpl.,
1365 ff.
ὑπό + dat., 1697 ff.
for gen., 1698b.
absent from P-N, 1698.
ὑπ' αὐλῶν, 1695 α.
ὑφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ποιεῖσθαι τινά,
1692.
ὑπὸ κήρυκος, 1695 α.
ὑπὸ μαστίγων, 1695 α.
ὑπὸ νύκτα, 1690.
ὑπὸ τὴν ἐαρινὴν ὥραν, 1690.
ὑπὸ τὴν ὄψιν ἔχειν, λαμ-
βάνειν, εἶναι, 1693.
ὑπό τινα γίγνεσθαι, 1692.
ὑπό τινι γίγνεσθαι, εἶναι,
ποιεῖσθαι, 1698.
ὑπὸ τὸν ζυγὸν ἄγειν, 1692.
ὑπὸ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους,
1690.
ὑπὸ φόβου, 1695 α.
Υπο-, constr. of verbs com-
pounded with, 1378.
ὑποβλέπομαι (mid.), 1486.
ὑποβολιμαῖος, 1056.
ὑπόγραψα, 750 c.
ὑπόδεσε, imprt., 813.
ὑπόδημα, πύδημα, 134 6.
ὑπόδησε, imprt., 813.
Υποδιαστολή, 79.
ὑπόδικός τινος, 1292.
ὑποκαμισοβράκια, τά, 1156.
ὑποκάτω for ὑπό, 1491.
ὑποκειμένων, 34.
ὑποκρίνομαι, 1001.
ὑπολαμβάνω, constr., 2078,
2085 f.; with fut. infin.,
2086".
ὑπόλευκος, 1137.
ὑπομένω + part., 21 26 f.
ὑπομιμνήσκω, or -μνήσκω,
990100.
τινά τι, 1279.
+iva, app. vi. 16.
ὑποπτεύω, 744;
2085.
ὕποπτος, 744.
ὑποργοῖς, 20, α.
ὑποσκεύγομαι, 99608
ὑποσκεύομαι, 9960..
+ infin.,
ὑποστορώ, 996200-
ὑπόσχεσις, with fut. infin.,
2073.
ὑποσχήσομαι, 99698·
ὑπόσχομαι, 1003.
as present, app. iv. 3.
Υποτακτική, App. v. Io.
ὑποτάξοι for -ξῃ, 805.
ὑποτάσσω, ποτάσσω, 723.
ὑποτοπέομαι, 1004.
ὑπουργός, πουργός, 135.
ὑπόχρεος, 327.
ὑπώπτευον, 144.
-YTHC (ή), 360.
-ÝTHC (n), 360.
ὑφ', see ὑπό
ὑφαίνω, 996238.
Υφαίρεσις, 138.
ύφαμμα, 990288
úpava, 996288.
ὑφανάμην, 996288
ὕφασμαι, 996288-
ύφηνα, 990288
ὑφηνάμην, 996288·
ὑφανῶ, 996288-
-ΥΦΙΟΝ (τό), 1037.
ὑφίστασθαι
with
infin.,
2085 f.
-ύρω, leads to -ύρνω, -έρνω, ὑφοράω, ἀφωροῦμαι, 1000.
903.
-Yc, in nouns becomes -ns,
343.
-YC, in compos., τΙο8,
1147 ff.; becomes -ns,
1148.
-YC, acc. -vv, 358.
-YC, gen. -ews, 391.
-YC, gen. -vos, 387.
ὑψαγόρας, becomes ὑψᾶς,
287.
ὑψᾶς, from ὑψαγόρας, 287.
υψηλός, 295, 441.
leads to N Ψηλός, 135.
ὑψηλοτάπεινος, 1156.
ύψιλον for ἢ ψιλόν, 9° f.
ὕψος, τό, 423, 424; (τό) -
in height,' 1270, 1305.
-γε, -Υ, -ΕΙΑ, 438, 439 f., ύψος (γύψος), δ, 292.
444.
in P-N, 401 f.
-Yc, -y, adj. in, 474.
-'c for -ós, 496.
-úos, numerals in, 660.
-ýc, acc. -úda, 359-
-Ýc, -Ý, -¤îa, 401, 444,
1057 f.
in N, 402; modern
formations in, 496.
-Ýc, -ÝN, -Ŷca, part. in,
460; in N, 461.
in N, App. iii. 13.
-jc, gen. -ύδος, 366; in N,
367.
-Ŷc, -ûdos, shortened names
in, 288.
us, 388.
ὖσα (aor. of ὕω), 996289.
σμήνα, 35.
ὑστεραία, ἡ, 1182 0.
ὑστερέω, 996287•
for στερέω, 996 250
ὑστεροῦμαι, 906 287
&
ὑστερηθῶ, 996297
υστερήσει, 996 247
ὑστερημένος, 996287.
ὑστερήσομαι, 996247.
ὕστερος, 505, 507.
ὑστερώτερος, 505, 506.
vow, fut. of vw, 996289.
-ύτερος, in Ν, 495.
287 •
νω, 996230-
-ýw, verbs in, 701 ff.
in G-N contracted, 702.
Φ, Φ, origin of, 3, 5.
forms of, 2, 9.
various values of, 5.
originally expr. by ΠΗ,
3, 12.
a labial, 22.
an aspirata, 22.
a muta, 235.
a semivowel, 23.
pronunciation of, 9, 24,
54 f., 56, 193.
for Latin PH, 43.
from π, 170 f.
'(=500), 645-
φάβος, 63 [2 |.
Φαβώνιος, 51.
φαγάδες, οἱ, 289.
φαγάς, δ, 287 f., 290, 478,
1042.
φάγε, τό, App. vi. 26.
φαγεῖ οι φαγί ? τό, App. vi.
26 f.
φάγεσαι, 773.
φάγῃ, φάῃ, 155°.
páyns, pậs, 863.
φαγησιπόσια,
1157.
τά,
1156,
φαγίν, τό, App. vi. 26.
φαγίον, τό, Αpp. vi. 26.
688
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
φάγομαι, 996 91.
φαγοῦ, ἡ, 1043.
φαγοῦμαι, 99691
φάγου", 777.
φάγουσι, φάουσι, φᾶσι, 150 b.
φάγω, 996281 -
leads to N φάω, 155°,863.
φαγωμένος, 996231-
γαγωμός, 1020.
φαγώσιμος, 1055.
φαεινός, 29, App. ii. 1o.
φάῃ, φάγῃ, 155.
páns, pậs, 863.
φάθι, 184, 975 & [1].
Φαιδροκάτσα, 1040 B c.
φαιμιλίας, 35.
φαιμυλίας, 35.
1. paívw, 864, 892, 895,
923, 925, 996288 & 291;
mid., 1467.
peculiarities of, 99710·
constr., 2135 ff.
2. φαίνομαι, 892, 92125,
923, 924b, 996291
constr., 2137 7.
+ part., 2122, 2137 h.
+ ὅτι, 2 1 23 Γ.
+ infin., 2085, 2137 h.
inpersonal, 2028,2124.
φαίνομαι μοι, 2083.
3. φαίνεται, constr., 2028.
+ infin., 2085.
+ ὅτι ὡς), 2086.
App. ii. 9.
φανίζομαι, from ἐμφαν-, 723,
996291.
φανοῦμαι, 996291, 1885.
φαντάζομαι, 1004.
φάντασμα, σφάνταμα, 143.
φαντάσου, 814.
Φάνφαιος, 184.
φάνω, 996283-
pava, 996291.
φάουσι, φᾶσι, 150 b.
φάραγγαν, App. iii. 6 a.
φαράγγιον, το38.
φάραγξ, 1038.
φάραξιν, 191.
φαρμάκιον, 1038.
Φαρνάκης, 298.
φάρυξ for φάρυγξ, 191.
pâs, from pá(y)ns, 863.
φᾶσι, from φά(γ)ουσι, 150.
paoí", 975; in P, 976, app.
ii. 10.
- subject of, 1165.
φάσκω, 906.02.
996292-
φάσκων, 975, 996292.
φατρία, 126.
páw, páyw, 1 55°, 863, 996281 •
φαωμένος, 99621·
φαώσιμος, 1055.
φλ becomes βδ, 172.
Φεβράρης, Φλεβάρης, 143.
Φεβράρις, -βρουάρις, 150 1.
Φεβρουάρις, 150 0.
φέγγω, 8652.
φάισι οι φαῖσι for φασί, 29, Φεδίλας, 261 α, 27.
φακᾶς, δ, 287.
φακελίτσιν, τό, 1040 0 0.
φακή, ἡ, 286, 290.
φαλάγγη & φάλαγξ, App. iii.
12.
φάλαγξ & φαλάγγη, App. iii.
I 2.
φαλαντίας, 283.
Φαλερέως, 40.
Φαληρεί Γου -ροί, 44.
ψαλός τον ομφαλός, 134.
φαμελιάριος, 430.
φαμ(μ)ένος, 996.08.
φανεί οι φανῇ ? τό, App. vi.
26, 27.
φανερός είμι + part., 2122,
2124; + ὅτι,
2123 f.
2085,
becomes impers., 2124.
φανερών(ν)ω, 853.
φανῇ οι φανείς τό, App. vi.
26, 27.
φανῇ, ὅ,τι —, App. vi. 27.
φανησιμαιός, 1056.
parĤooµai, 996291, 1885.
φέλιμον, 49.
Φεδίο, 26, α, 27.
peî, tó, 8, 9 f., 9ª.
peîdi, 1038h.
Φειδίας, 283.
φείδομαι, 1001.
Φειδώ, ἡ, 414.
Φειδῶς (τῆς), 414.
φελάω for ὠφελέω, 874,
9741, 996184.
φέρασπις, App. i. 16 α.
φέρε, as fut. imprt., 996203.
+ subj., 1913.
φέρει, -ρειν, -ρην, App. ii.
14 A.
φερέοικος, Ι Ι 13.
φερέπονος, 1116.
φέρετε, 949.
| φέρσιμο", 1022.
pépre, 949, app. i. 16 b.
φέρυσι for φέρουσι, 29.
φέρω, 996, &
293.
as fut., 996239.
leads to N φέρνω, 903.
φέρω βαρέως οι χαλεπῶς,
2128 ff.
φέρω καὶ ἄγω (causat.),
1460.
>
φέρων, with, 2161.
Φέτταλος, 56.
peû, 2189.
φεῦ τοῦ ἀνδρός, 1334.
φευγα for φευγε, 830,
996291.
φευγᾶς, δ, 364, 478.
pevyâte, 830b, 996291·
φευγάτος, 996204, 1052.
peúyw, 861 [1], 86-4, 917,
924, 996294, 998.
suggests Ν χορεύγω ?
861 [1].
used as pf., 1842.
constr., 2087 ff.; τι
νός, 1292.
φεύξομαι, 996291
φευξούμαι, 996294
φεύξω, 996.04 -
φευχθῆναι, 996294
φέφρασα (for πεφρ-),736 [1].
Φηγαεύς, 47.
Φηγαιεύς, 47.
Φηγεεύς, 49.
ψηλώτα, 37.
1. φημί, 9748, 975, 99686 ; in
NT, 976.
enclitic, 102 d.
& λέγω, 937.
repl. by λέγω, 976.
used as fut., App. iv. 4.
constr., 2078.
+ infin., 2086» f.
after οὐ π'deny,
2058.
977,
2. φημί, yes, 2058; οὐ -
'no,' 977, 2058.
orthotone,
φής, 975 f.;
102 17, 975.
φησί", in P, 976.
C
φήσω, shall assert, 977.
φθαίην, 996200-
φέρην (or -ρειν, 29", 29%, φθάνομαι, 1459.
App. ii. 14 Λ.
203-
φερμένος, 996393 •
φερμός, 1020.
φέρνω, 903, 996, &
φέροισι τον φέρουσι, 29 f.,
App. ii. 9.
φίροσι τον φέρουσι, App. ii. 9.
φθάνοντα, as adv., 823.
>
1. płárw, 980,, 996296, 998;
in N, 902 ; -ομαι, 1459.
2. φθάνω, overtako, 2 1 1 3 ;
'reach,' 2121; in pass.,
ib.; repl. by προφθάνω
οι προλαμβάνω, ib. ; οὐκ
689
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ἂν φθάνοις, 2114; οὐ
και, 2 1 15.
φιλιά, ἡ, Iod, 155 c f., φοβηθήσομαι, 996209, 1885.
271, 1020, 1047.
3. φθάνω + part., 2113;
οὐ
φιλίες, 155 c.
καὶ εὐθύς), 2115.
+ infin., 2121, App.
vi.
17 a.
- changed to part., 2125.
φθαρήσομαι, 996.07, 1885.
φθάς, 996200
φθάσω, 996 2953 999.
pláowoiv, 996296·
φθείρ, δ, 249 [1].
φθείρω, App. ii. 14 Β; 92121,
924", 925, 996297 ·
φθεξάσθωσαν, 191.
φθεροῦμαι, 188.
φθέρρω, 29, Αpp. ii. 9, 14 B.
φθέρω, φθείρω, App. ii. 14 B.
φθερώ, 996297.
φθῆναι, 906.00-
φιλόγελῳ & -γέλωτες, 327.
φιλοικτίρμων, 469.
Φιλοκλέου for -ους, 432 C.
Φιλόκληα, 38.
φιλοκαλημένον, 736.
φιλομεν, App. ii. 14. Λ.
φιλομέτοχοι, the ancient
Greeks, 2165.
Φιλοξήνη, 20, 1.
φιλοπάτωρ, 1147.
φιλόπολις, 474.
φιλοπονίας (τῆς), 200.
φίλος, 497 ; in Ν, 498; in
+2
emprt. μᾶλλον —, 510.
Φιλοσθένου fur -νους, 432 c.
φιλοτιμέομαι, 996293, 1oo4 f.
φιλοτιμηθήσομαι, 996.
φθήρω, φθείρω, App. ii. 14. B. φιλότιμος, ι1ο6.
φθήσομαι, 996.00
φθίεται, App. ii. 12 [3].
φθονέω, 1462 ; pass., ib.
constr., 1332 f.
φθύνῳ ποιεῖν τι, 1387.
φθῶσιν, 996.90-
pî, Tú, 8, 9 f., 9ª, 303.
Φιαλεύς, 500.
φιαλίο, 26 4.
Φιβάμμων, 44.
φιβλώνουσι, 853.
Φιγαλεύς, Φιαλ-, 59 0.
Φιδίας, 34.
Φιλαθήναιος, -ναις, 299.
φιλακτήριον του φυλ-, 35.
φιλάνθρωπος, ΙΙΙ,
Φιλέας, 283.
φιλεῖ οι φιλί? τύ, App. vi.
26.
φίλειε, imprt., 859, 859.
φιλειέσαι, 858, 859.
φιλειέστε, 859.
φιλειέται, 858, 859.
φιλειοῦ του φιλοῦ, 859.
φιλειοῦμαι for -λοῦμαι, 859.
φιλειοῦμεν, 859.
φιλετούμεστα, 859.
φιλειοῦν, 859, 859.
φιλειῶ των φιλῶ, 859.
φιλέομεν, Αγ. ii. 1.4 1.
φιλεύω, 7or.
φιλέω, 730, 857, 859.
becomes φιλειῶ, 859.
Φιλημάτιν, -τιον, 302, Αρ.
iii. 7.
φιλήσεαι, 1478.
φιλήτω fur -λείτω, 29.
φιλί οι φιλεῖ, τό, App. vi.
26.
298)
φιλοῦμεν, App. ii. 14 Λ.
φιλοῦντες (τούς), 332.
φίλτερος, 497.
φιλτέρου του φιλωτο, 1361.
for
Φιλωνάδι (τῷ), 288.
φιλωτέρου, φιλτ-, 1361.
φιμί του φημί, 37.
φίλος for φίλος, 187.
φίνος for φίλος, 187.
κάρι, πτυάριον, 155 α,
φχαριστῶ for εὐχαρ-, 135.
Φλαβιανός, 51.
Φλαβιλλιανός, 51.
Φλάβιλλος, 51.
Φλάβιος, 51.
Φλάβος, 51.
Φλαβώνιος, 51.
φλακή του φυλακή, 1362.
φλέβα for φλέψ, 126, 357.
Φλεβάρης, 143, 150.
φλέγα, φλέβα, 126.
φληναφέω & -άω, 852.
φλύγαν, App. iii. 9 α.
Φλογειάδων (των), 290.
prú(()w, 868.
a.
φλωμος, σφλ-, 130.
φοβάμαι for -έομαι, 854.
φοβέρα, ή, 1049.
φοβερίζω, 990200 -
φοβέω, 990200 -
φοβέομαι, 996200, 1004,
1006.
leads to -άομαι, 854.
succeeds δέδοικα, 968.
as fut., App. iv. 4.
ὑπέρ τινος, 1679.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
πως, 1959.
φοβηθήτε, imprt., 814.
φοβηθώ, 996299-
φοβήσομαι, 1885.
-φοβήσω, 996200 -
φοβίζω, 996299.
φοβισμένος, 996299 -
φοβοῦ, 801.
φοβοῦμαι, see φοβέω.
φόβῳ ποιεῖν τι, 1387.
φοιλόθεος, 44.
ΦΟΙΝΙΚΗΤΑ γράμματα, 5 [1].
Φοινίκισσα, 1030.
Φοίοιβον, 30.
-,779.
φονέαν (τόν), App. iii. 6f.
φονέας, δ, 407.
φονεύς, 403, 407.
φονεύσουσιν, ἵνα
φονεύω, 94330.
φονιᾶς for φονεύς, 407.
φορά, βολά, 118, 651.
φοράδα, ή, 126.
φορβάς, φοράδα, 126.
φορέςω, 869.
φύρεις for -ρει, 858 (twice).
φορεμένος, 996300.
popés, times,' 651 f.
φορέσω, 839, 996300
φορέω, 853, 857, 869,
996300
φορήσομαι, 996300 €
φορήσω, 996300 -
φορτώνει, 853.
φορτώνειν, 853.
Φούλβιος, 52.
φουντωτός, 1053.
φουρναροῦ, ἡ, 1044-
φραγήσομαι, 996302
Φράγκικος, 1077.
Φραγκοπούλα, 1041.
φραγμένος, 996302
φράδμων, 469.
φράζει, φράζο, φράζου, Αγ.
ii. 14 A.
φράζω,
996301-
declare,' 865 ?
φρας wr close, 873, 880,
996302-
φραμένος, 996302-
φράξω, 900.02 -
φράσσω & -ττω, 880, 996302-
φράσω, fut., 996301 -
φρατρία, 126.
φράττω, seu φράσσω.
φρήν, 29.
φρίκη δ φρίξ, App. iii. 12.
φρίξ & φρίκη, App. iii. 12.
φρίξω, 996303 -
φρίσσω δ -ττω, 878, 924,
ἐπί τι, 15834·
690
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
φρονεῦσα, App. ii. 14 Λ.
φρονηματίας, 283.
φρόνιμος, 1055.
φρονῦσα,-νοῦσα, App. ii. 14 Λ.
φροντίζω τι, 1295.
+ όπως or ὡς, 1962.
+ ἵνα, 1963, App. vi. 12
[2].
φρονῶσα, App. ii. 14. Λ.
Φροσύνη for Εὐφροσύνη,
135b
φρύδι, ὀφρύδιον, 1340, 389.
φρυκτόν fur φρικτόν, 35.
ΦΣ, anciently for ψ, 12.
4ο =ψ, 30 [2], 180, 337 α,
884.
for ξ, 24.
φτ, beconies πτ, Ι72.
· renais, 174.
stands for πτ, 885.
- from κτ οι χτ, 174.
φταίω, φταίγω, 860.
φτάνω ου φθάνω, 174, 902,
996 296.
intr., 14560.
φτάξω, 996200-
φταρμίζομαι, 996227
φταρμισμένος, 996 27.
φταρμός, from οφθαλμός,
134 a, 187.
φταρνίζομαι, 996227.
φταρνισμένος, 996227
φτασμένος, 996200-
φτεῖ for πτύει, 148, 702.
φτείς for πτύεις, 148.
φτέρνα for πτέρνα, 174.
φτερό" for πτερόν, 174.
φτερωτή, ή, 1053.
φτύνω, 906.
φτυσμένος, 996230-
φτύω for πτύω, 996230-
φτῶ fur πτύω, 996200-
-φτω, from -πτω, 875.
φτωχιά, ή, 1020.
φτωχός fur πτ-, 174.
φυλακή, φλακή, 1362.
φυλάκοι, οἱ, 357-
φωνιαλάς, 1043.
φώρ, 375.
φύλακος & φύλαξ, App. iii. φωράω, 869; constr., 21 33 f.
12.
φυλάκου (τοῦ), 357.
φυλάκους (τούς), 357.
φυλάμε", 996304 -
φυλαμένος, 990304
φύλαξ & φύλακος, App. iii.
12.
•
φυλάξοι for -ξη, 805.
φυλάξομαι, 996304, 1885.
φυλᾷς for φυλάγεις, 863,
996301*
φυλάσσω & -ττω, 878 α,
996304; -ομαι (mid.),
1467.
+ ὅπως or ὡς, 1962.
+iva, App. vi. 16.
φυλαχθήσομαι, 996304, 1885.
φυλάω, 863, 996304
φυλλαράκι", 1038.
φύλλον, App. ii. 9.
φῶς, τό, 351, 43317
φωτεινός & σκοτεινός, 114.
φωτορύς, 1058.
φωτιά, ή, 43317·
φωτίζονταιν for -ται, App.
iii. 20.
Φωτώ, ἡ, 414.
φώτων (τῶν), 35, 43317
φωτῶν (τῶν), 354.
X, x, origin of, 3, 5.
forms of, 2, 5 121, 9.
various values of, 5.
a guttural, 22.
- an aspirata, 22, 23.
a semivowel, 23.
a muta, 23.
pronunciation of, 9, 24,
54 f., 56.
for Latin ch, 43.
palatalized before e i, 56.
x from , 170 f.
φυλλοξύς, 654.
φυλύρινον, 35.
X
φυνίκων του φοιν-, 36.
φυράσω, 996305 •
φυράω, 996305
φύρω, 996305
φύς, φύν, φύσα, 460.
φυσᾷ, subject of, 1 166.
φυσάω, in M-Ν, 862.
Φύσει μακρά φωνήεντα),
89.
φύσεως, App. i. 15 b.
φύση του φύσις, ή, 396.
φυσιολόγος, Ι1ΙΙ.
φυσιοῦσθε, ἵνα
φύσις becomes φύση, 395 1.
φύσω, 996306 -
850°, 851.
φυτεύσοι for -ση, 805.
φυτεύω, τοι;
1460b.
φυτρώνω, 996390 •
(causat.),
succeeds φύομαι, 98012
φυγάς, δ & ἡ, 364, 476, 478. φύω, 996300-
φύγε, 813.
φύγομαι, 905201 •
φύγων, inprt., δι3.
φυγοῦμαι, 996204·
φύγω, 996204 &
φνήσομαι, 996300
310 ·
φυλᾷ for φυλάγει, 996304
φυλάγεις, 863.
φυλαγμένος, 996304
φυλάγω, 863, 990304
φυλάει, 996304
φυλάεις, 863, 996301
φύλακα (τοῦ), 357.
φύλακας for φύλαξ, 357.
peculiarities of, 9973;
πέφυκα, as pres., 18681.
φύομαι, 1802, 996301
--, in syllabication, 92.
φωθιά, φωτιά, 1559.
Φωκᾶς Του Φωκίων, 287, 1043.
Φωκίων, becomes Φωκᾶς, 287.
φωνάζω, 868, 1094.
intr., 1456.
φωνακλάς, 1043.
φώνασο (iuprt.), 813 [1].
φωνέω & -άζω, 868.
φωνήεις, 451.
φωνήεντα, 16.
-X-, dropped, 155° f.
Χ'(=600), 645.
Χαβρίας, 283.
χαθῆτε, imprt., 814.
χαϊδεύω, 7or".
χαιράμενος, 996307, 1980,
2111.
χαιρετάω, 853, 870.
χαιρετίζω, 870.
χαιρήσεις, 996 307
χαιρήσῃ, 996307 •
χαιρήσω, 980, 996307-
Χαιριμένου for -νους, 432 c.
χαίρουνται, 778.
χαίρομαι, 903, 980€, 996307,
10002, 1459.
vá, 2130.
1. χαίρω, 980, 996 307,
1388.
- leads to -ομαι, 1000,·
+ dat., 1388.
+ ei, 1947.
+ part., 2128.
+ infin., 2128".
+öri (dióti), or ei, 1947,
2129 f.
+íva (vá), 2130.
2. χαίρω τινί, 1388.
ἐπί τινι, 1582 d.
περί τινος, 15834.
see also χαίρομαι.
χαλασμένος, 996308
χαλάω, 853,904,906, 9433,
996308
intr., 1456°.
691
Y y 2
Ι. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
χαλεπαίνω τινὶ οι ἐπί τινι,
1245, 1355 ;
τινος, 1335.
τινί
- ei, 1947.
χαλεπός, constr., 2000, 2091.
χαλεπῶς φέρω, 2128,21 29 1.;
τινί, 1388.
χαλικάκι", 1038.
χαλίκιον, 1038.
χαλινωμένον, 736.
χάλιξ, 1038.
χαλκάνθη, ἡ, 292.
χαλκέα, ἡ, 321.
χάλκεος, 321.
χαλκέας, δ, 407.
χαλκεύς, 4030.
χαλκή, ἡ, 321.
χαλκήν (τήν), 321.
χαλκιᾶς, ὁ, 407.
χαλκοβάρεια, adj.
-βαρής, 430.
χαλκούς, 321.
χάριν (τήν), 358.
χάριν, adv., 1490 ; with gen.,
1278, 1314; τοῦ
λόγου, 1278; ἐμὴν —, ib.
χάριν οἶδα or ἔχω, with part.,
2128; with ὅτι (διότι),
Οι εἰ, 2129 f.
χάριν οἶδα ὑπέρ τινος, 1680.
χάριν τοῦ + infin. for fiual
part., 2158.
χαριοῦμαι, 996300:
χάρις becomes χάρη, ή, 338,
343, App. iii. 14; see
21-0 χάριν.
χαρισάμενος, 996300, 2111.
χάρισμαν, τό, Αpp. iii. 9 a.
χάριταν, 330", App. iii. 6 df.
Χαρίτιν fur -τιον, 302, App.
iii. 7.
for Χαρίτος fur -των, 338.
Χαριτώ, ἡ, 414.
χαροκόπος, 1107, 1150 μ.
χαλνάω, 853, 904, 906, χώρος for χάρων, 338, App.
996308-
χάλχη, 184.
Χαλχηδόνιοι, 184.
χαμάζε, 434.
χαμαθεν, 434.
χαμαί, 434; in compos.,
112o f
χαμαικέρασος, 1120,
χαμένος, χαωμ-, 150 α.
χαμηλά, adv., 518.
χαμηλός, 1058.
χαμηλότερα, adv., 518.
χαμόκλαδο", τό, 1121.
χαμοκοιτῶν (part.), 1121.
χαμομήλι, 1121.
Χανιώτισσα, 1030.
χάνω, 9434".
χαράζω, 873, 880.
χαρακάκι", 1038.
χάρακας, δ, 1039, 1043.
χαράκιον, 1038", 1039.
χαρακωμένον, 736.
Xápaέ, 10386, 1039.
χάραξ,
χαράσσω, 880.
iii. 12.
χαροῦμαι, 996 307.
2011.
χείλος, 423, 424.
χειμώνας, δ, 347.
χωμῶνας, δ, 339, 379.
χειμῶνοι, οἱ, 379.
χειμῶνος, in winter time,
1341 a.
χείρ, ή), App. ii. 14 B; 43329.
χεῖραν, 330", App. iii. 6a-g.
χείριστα, 519.
χείριστος, 5042.
χειρο for χείρων, 505.
χεῖρον, 5042·
χειρομαι, 1001; -ύω, 1003.
χειρότερα, adv., 522.
χειρότερος, 504 f.
χείρου tur χείρων, 503.
χειρύψελλα, τά, 1156.
χειρύω, 1001, 1003.
χείρων, χέρρων, App. ii. 14 B.
χείρων, χείρον, 5042
χείς, 996312.
b
χεόμενον (fut.), 996312-
χέρ, χείρ, App. ii. 14 B.
χεράκι”, τό, 1038.
χεράριος, 1040.
χαρούμενος, όδου, 996 207, χερᾶς, δ, 1043.
980,
χαρτάρης, 1040 Λ.
χαρτάρις, 1040 Λ.
χαρτί", 1938, App. iii. 7.
χαρτοκαλαμάρια, τά, 1156.
χαρτοπαίχτης, 1152.
χαρώ, 996 ποτ
•
χάρων, χάρος, Αpp. iii. 12.
χαρωπός, 1104.
χάσκα του -σπε, 830, 996 10.
χασκήσω, 996310
χάσκω, 996 10, 1098.
996×107
χασμάομαι, 1001, 1003.
χασμοῦμαι, 1003.
χασμουρειοῦμαι, 1003.
χασμωδία, 124.
χατζῆς, δ, 205.
χάφτω, 875.
χαχα (του), 277.
χαωμένος, χαμένος, 150 α.
Xd becomes γδ, 172.
χάρη του τρις, ή, 338, 343, χέει, 835.
App. iii. 14.
χαρήσῃ, 996 307.
Χαρήσιος, 37.
χαρήσομαι, 980, 996307.
χαρίεις, 451; cuprt., 499°.
χαριέντως, 519.
8092
χαριέστατα, 519.
χαριέστερος, 499 c.
χαρίζομαι, 996300, 1001.
— leads to -igw, 10001.
χαρίζω, 996 του, 1043.
Χαρικλέα (τόν), App. iii. 6.
χερε for χαίρε, 49.
χερειότερος, 504, 506.
χέρισος, Ι3Ι.
χεροίν, 43323·
χεροπόδαρα, τά, 1156.
χεροπιαστός, 1115.
χερρόννησος, χερσόν-, 207.
χέρρος, χέρσος, 207.
χέρρων, 29, App. ii. 14 B.
χερσί, 43323.
χερσόνησος, χερρόν-, 207.
χέρσος, χέρρος, 207.
χέρσος, χέρισος, 131.
χέρων, χείρων, Αpp. ii. 14 Β.
χερώτερα, adv., 522.
Xeoâs, ó, 287.
χέσειν, 996, 1.
χεσμένος, 996311
χεσοῦμαι, 996 11
χεχείρικα, 736 [1].
xéw, 848, 996, 996812-
Xew, 996812-
χηλας, 287.
χήρ του χείρ, 29", 29, 29°,
χέεις, 835.
χείς, 996312 -
χεζητιάω, 11ΟΙ.
App. ii. 1.4 B.
for
χέζω, 99634; midl. -ομαι for χῆρε του χαῖρε, 48.
χεζητιάω, 1101.
χεί, τό, 8, 9 f., 9.
χεί (verb), 996312
χειλᾶς, δ, 287.
χείληα, τά, 424.
χείλι, τό, 424.
χείλια, τά, 424.
| χείλιοι, 34.
B.
χήρων, χείρων, App. ii. 14. 1.
χθ from κθ οι χθ, 172.
becomes χτ, 174, 885.
χθές, εχθές, 129.
χι, τό, 8, 9 Ι., 9', 303.
χιθών, χιτών, 184.
χιλιάδα, ή, 658, 661.
χιλιαδῶν (τῶν), 354, 659.
›
692
I.
INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
χιλιάκις, 648.
χιλιάς, 658, 659.
χιλιετεῖ περιόδῳ, 430.
χίλιοι, 645.
χιλιοστός, 646.
χιλιοστύς, 660.
Χιό, ή, 292.
χιονίζει, its subject, 1166.
χιονόνερο, 1145.
Xîos, †, 292º.
χραν for χείρα, App. iii. 6 cl.
χιρογραφησάτοσαν, 26, α.
χιτών, χιθών, 184.
χλαμύς, 359, 366.
χλοά(()ω, 868.
Χλόη, Χλοίη, 20.
Χλοίη, Χλόη, 20.
χλώρη, ἡ, 1049.
χνάρι for ίχν-, 134 C.
χνοά(ζ)ω, 868.
I
Xbav (Túv), App. iii. 6b.
Χοιρίλος, rg" [1].
χοιρίδιν, 1040, App. iii. 7.
χοιρινός, χοιρνός, 1362.
χοιρνός, χοιρινός, 1362.
Χοιρύλος, 35.
χολιάζω τινός, 1336.
Χολίδην, 384.
Κόλχος, Κόλχος, 184.
χοντρύτερος, 496.
χορατεύω, 701.
χορεύγω, 861 [1].
Xopevrâdes, oi, 290b.
χορεύτρα, ἡ, 1017.
χορεύω, 701, 730, 875.
χορέψω for -εύσω, 180.
χορηγέω τινά τινι, 12443.
χορτάζω, 94410.
succeeds κορέννυμι, 937.
+ double accus., 1319.
χορταίνω, 94415.
Χορτάτσης, 1040 Β. C.
χορτολόγος, 1101.
χόρτου, τό, 249.
χόρτος, δ, 249.
Xoûs, 408b.
χύχλακας, δ, 1043.
χύω, 996313
χρᾷ, χρᾶν, 996314 2:
χράομαι, 829, 830 & [1],
839, 9968119 19 1001.
constr., 1380.
χρᾶσθαι, 830 & [1], 996314·
χρᾶται, 830 [1].
χρέα, χρεία, 200, 986.
χρεῖ του χρίσι, 148.
χρεία, χρέα, 20.
χρεία ἐστὶ for adj. in -τέος,
1051.
χρείαν ἔχειν for χρῆναι, 987.
χρείαν ἔχω ἵνα, App. vi. 16. | χρόνος and CHME ΟΝ, App.
χρειάζομαι, 868.
χρειαζόμενος, 2111.
χρειαζούμενος, 2111.
χρείη, 986.
χρεῖς fur χρίεις, 148.
χρείστης for χρή-, 37.
χρέος, 424.
χρεστός, 262 α.
χρεών, 986.
χρεωστῶ, χρω-, 152.
χρεωφειλέτης, 996193 -
χρή, conjug., 986 f.; in P-B,
987.
+ infin., 2081 f.; for fut.,
1894, App. iv. 4.
+iva, App. vi. II.
repl. by χρείαν ἔχειν, 987.
χρῇ, 829, 986.
χρήας, 37.
χρήμα, τό, 29, 368 ; χρή-
ματα, money, ib.
χρῆμαν, τό, 331, App. iii.
9 a.
χρηματίας, 283.
χρηματίζω for εἰμί, 2107.
χρημάτοις (τοῖς), 346.
χρήν, 986.
χρῆν for χρή, 1901.
χρῆναι, 986.
χρησιμόν, 68.
χρῆσθαι, 829, 830 & [1];
see χράομαι.
χρήσιμος, 309, 1055 ; εἴς τι,
1540.
χρήσομαι, 99631131·
χρῆσται τον -σθαι, 177.
χρηστότηταν, Αpp. iii. 6f.
χρήσω, 29, 996131 & 9143 2.
χρῆται, 829, 830 [1].
χρίει, χρει, 148.
χρίεις, χρεις, 148.
χρίεται, 858.
χρίνω, 906, 996315
χρισμένος, 996 915
Χριστέ μου νά, 1906.
χρίστην των ἐχρίσθη, App.
iii. 20 α.
χρίω, 846 f., 857, 996 16;
(mid.), 1467.
χρίω, 857, 996315; midl.,1469.
χροά, χροιά, 20.
χροιά, χροά, 200.
Xpotyw, 996316-
Χρόμιος, 1040.
Χρόμις, 1040.
χρόνια, τά, 43318.
χρόνος, 4331.
χρόνος, mora,
App. ii. 8 [2].
quantity,
ii. 16 [3].
Χρυσά (του), 287.
Xpvøâs, ¿, 287.
χρυσέα, ἡ, 321.
χρύσεον, 155 1.
χρύσεος, 321.
χρυσή, ἡ, 321,
χρυσή for - σῆ, 286 [1].
χρυσίν, -σίον, 302.
Χρυσίν, App. iii. 7.
Χρυσοϊαννάκης, 1040 Β (.
χρυσός for -σους, 321.
χρυσότερος, 32Ι.
χρυσοστεφῆ (&), 427.
χρυσούς, 321.
χρυσοχέρης, 298.
χρυσοχόος, - χός, 148.
χρυσοχός, -χύος, 148.
Χρυσώ, ἡ, 414.
χρύσωνα, 853.
χρυσώνης, 853.
χρυσῶται, ἐὰν
8.500.
χρώ, 9963145 2.
χρώζω, 996315 .
χρώννυμι, 996310-
χρωστῶ for χρεω-, 152.
χρώσω, 996310-
χρωφελέτης, 996193-
X + c =§, 180, 337 a, 884 b.
ΧΣ, anciently for f, 12, 28 α,
App. ii. 8.
XC = έ, 30 [2].
χτ, leads to ur, 172; to φτ,
174".
remains, 174.
for ur, 885.
for χθ, 885.
χτένι, 302.
χτίζω, 174.
χτύπος, κτύπος, 174.
χυθήσομαι, 996312-
χυθρίς, χυτρίς, 184.
χυμένος, 996312-
Xúv(v)w, 848, 902, 996312;
-ομαι succeeds ῥέω,
996284.
χύσω (fut.), 848, 996.
χυτός, 1052.
χυτρίς, χυθρίς, 184.
χύω, 848, 996312
-XX-, in syllabication, 92.
χα for χώρα, 187.
χώννυμι, 996313.
leads to χών (ν)ω, 775.
χωννύω, 996313.
χών (γ)ω, 775, 853, 996313.
χώρα, χώρη, 29.
χωρᾶν, χωρῶν, App. ii. 1.4 1.
χωράφι, τό, 1038.
693
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
Xwpapírjia, rá, 1040 cb.
χωράων, χωρᾶν, χωρῶν, Α]].
ii. 14 A.
χωρέσω, 839.
xwpew, 839b; constr., 1316.
χώρη, χώρα, 29.
χωρίζω, 868 ; constr., 1316f.
χωριό, τό, 1038.
χωρις του χωρίς, 1736.
Xopis, without,' with gen.,
1314; with accus.,1315.
χωρίς, 'except,' 1731,
1734 ff.;
εἰ μή,
ἐάν μή, 1735.
χωριστός, 1052.
χωρκόν for χωριών, τό, 155. 7.
χωρῶν, χωράων, Αpp. ii. 141.
χωσαμένη, 996313
χώσε, 949.
χωσθήσομαι, 900 13-
χωσμένος, 996313-
χώστε, 949.
χώσω, 996 μ..
Y', y, origin of, 3, 5-
forms of, 5, 9.
various valuos of, 5.
originally expr. by ПE or
2, 3, 12.
a compound or double
consonant, 23 f.
a guttural, 22.
an aspirala, 22.
asomivowel, 23", 25[1]b.
from a labial+o, 337 a.
pronunciation of, 9.
for Latin ps, 43.
repl. by de in South
Italian N, 24º.
4′( = 700), 645.
-P, in syllabication, 91, 93.
-y, retreats, App. iii. 12.
-y, dropped, 219, 221, 338.
ψάθη, ψίαθος, 150 d.
ψαίνω, μένω, 902, 99649.
ψαίρνω, 904.
|
ψαρος & ψάρ, δ, App. iii. ψυχάρι", τό, 302, 1040, App.
12.
ψαύω, 731.
ψέγω, 8652.
yeîpa, 19, 249b.
μένω, 902, 996 49
ψευδάς (τάς), 430.
Pevdevédpa, 1111, 1144.
ψευδὴν for -δῆ, Αpp. iii. 9 a.
feudýs, 425”.
becomes ψευδός, 440.
ψεύδομαι, 886.
ψευδός του -δής, 430, 440,
1058.
ψεύδος, τό, 423.
ψεύδω, 8953, 996318•
ψευδώνυμος, 1171.
ψευσθήσομαι, 1885.
ψεύσομαι, 1885.
ψεύτικος, 1077.
-H for -is (1), 396.
ψηλαφήσαισαν, 79, 805.
ψηλός του υψηλός, 130, 135,
442, 1058.
819·
ψῆλος for ὕψος, τό, 424;
T-, ' in height,' 1305.
ψήλου & -ς (τοῦ), 341.
Ynuevos, 99699 &
Yńvw, 902, 906, 996µÿ ·
now, 99699.
ψηφάω, 870.
ψηφηφορώ, 126.
ψήφισμα, 68.
Ynpiw, -pw, 870.
Ympioμévov, 736.
ψηφισμένον,
ψήφος, ἡ & δ, 292.
ψῆφος, ὁ & τό, 2.49.
Ynpocopŵ, 126.
-yı for -yus (1), 396.
ψίαθος, ψάθη, 150 1.
pixâs, 5, 287.
ψιλή, του 71.
Viλñs, 287b.
YIAÒN TINEŶMA, 71.
ψίλωσις, 84.
-VIC (1), 395.
ψήφισμα, 37.
ψοφέω & -άω, 54; -άω τῆς
πάνας, δίψας, 1696.
ψαλιτῆρι for ψαλτήρι, 131, ψομὸν πολοῦσι, 20η α.
ψαλτήρι, ψαλιτήρι, 131, 187. ψυ, τό, ο F., 9', 303.
ψαλίδι, τό, 1038.
187.
ψάλλω, -λνω, 904.
Ψάλτης, 1015, 1017.
ψάμμος, ὁ δε ή, 292.
papas, d, 1044-
ψαρευτική, ή, το70.
ψαρεύω, τοι".
ψάρι, ψάριον, 134 b.
ψυγῆναι, 996.0·
ψυχήσομαι, 990319
ψάρ & ψάρος, δ, App. iii. 12. ψύγω, 990 10.
Ψαριανός, 1974.
ψαρική, ή, το7ο, 1182 0.
ψυγῶ, 99639-
ψυδράκιον, 1038.
ψύδρας, 1038.
ψύλλα, ή, 249 [2].
Ψύλλος, δ, 249)" [2].
ψυμ(μ) ένος, 196
819
iii. 7.
ψυχή (τήν), App. iii. 22 c.
ψυχῆναι, 996310-
ψυχικός, 1070.
ψυχίτσα, 1040 α .
ψυχομαχώ, 1155.
ψυχοπαίδι, τό, 1145.
ψυχοπονούμαι, 1000.
ψύχρα, ή, 1049.
ψυχρανθούν, 777.
ψύχω, 996319 -
ψωμᾶς, δ, 287.
ψωμοζήτης, 1107.
ψωμοτύρι, 11ο.
ψωμότυρο, 1105.
ψώνι, οψώνιον, 1341.
Ψωνίζω, 868.
ψωράρις, 1040 4.
N, w (ŵ µéya), origin of, 6,
28 a fl., App. ii. 7, 14.
forms of, 5 [2], 9, App. ii.
[2.
frequent in dialects, App.
ii. 7.
- originally expr. by 0,6,12,
29 ff., App. ii. 9 ff.
absent from Western
alphabets, 6;
from
early A, 26, 27, 28 a ff.;
from the old abece-
daria, 2900 [2].
an alien symbol, 28 d.
imported, 6, 28 a ff.
introduced as
niere
prosodic mark for ō,
17, 28 a H., App. ii.
9 ft
sound of, 9; in carly
A, 26, 28 a H., 88 a f.
dignity of its sound,
25 [1] a & d.
third in the scale of
euphony, 25 [1]α.
counts long, 17 f., 28 a ff.,
Appii; short, 324, 393.
rarely for 0, 29 0.
o,
@ from 9, 29 C., 39, App.
ii. 7, 9 f., & 14.
interchanges with 0,
26 II., 50", 168.
alternates with α, 167.
for ov, 29 f., App.
14..
@tal=w, 146, 152.
(1) + € = ∞, 146, 152.
W+1=w, 146, 152.
w) + 1) = ∞ (or o), 146.
w+oy=w, 146, 152.
ii. り
​&
694
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
, spurious diphthong, 19 b. | 0ŋoa, 727, 996320 ·
absent from early A, 26. | weitw & -kw, 868.
appears as ΩΙ in the in-
scriptions, 20°.
origin of, 32.
ὤθουν, for ἐώθουν, 727.
-ώθω, from -ωσα? 853.
-ωθώ, Ν -ώνω, 853 f.
pronunciation of, 32; in 1 for w, 20°, 26; see w.
early A, 26, 29.
wivoxón, 268.
~10C,-0C, 2O, IO72.
'long,' 20.
interchanges
with
οι, ώκιμα, τά, 370.
268.
w' (=800), 645.
& for o, 267 u.
ὢ νὰ = εἴθε, 1go6.
ὢ ποῦ νὰ = εἴθε, 1906.
ὦ (verb), 981 ; repl. by εἰμί,
985b.
voc.,
& (exclain.), before
251 f., 1250 f.
repl. by al or ἔ, 251,
1253 f.
omitted, 1252 ff.
& péya for ancient &, 99º.
ὦ τοῦ θαύματος, 1334.
w-, in augment, 717.
augmented, 715-
for ew, 727.
-w for -, in verbs, 774 f.,
936 F.
-w-, from -o-in compos., 493.
-w-, modal vowel, 759.
-w-, from -oŋ-, -ow-, 146,
836.
-w, nominal stems in, 323.
-w, pers. ending, 765 H.
for -μ, 766, 936 f.
-w, in subj., 771 f.
-w, adverbs in, 523.
-6(1), gen. -óos, 410, 411;
in N, 414; pl., 410,
413.
- C, FC, -H, in fut. 1298.,
850.
-@, for -o in 2nd Attic
decl., 323.
w-conjugation, 698, 700-
926.
attracts
774, 936 f.
-conjugation,
ᾠκοδόμημα, 748.
ᾠκοδόμηκεν, 716.
ᾠκοδομημένοι, 44.
ᾠκοδόμουν, 748.
ᾠκοδομοῦσαν, 789.
ὠκταετηρίδα, 267 α.
εκτειρήθην, 990175
ᾤκτιρον,
ὠκύς, 401.
ὤλεσα, 996152.
ὠλεσίκαρπος, Αpp. ii. 12 [3].
-¿λнC, accent of adj. in, 429.
wλio0ŋoa & -va, 996181-
ὤλισθον, 996181
'Ωλυσσεύς, 207.
TIPOV, 714 f., 716.
·
-WN, ovos, (8), 10.12 f.
- in compos., 1147, 1149.
-WN, -ov, adj., 380.
in cmprt., 499 a.
-WN, -ON, -oуcă, part. & adj.,
457-8; in N, 459, app›.
iii. 13.
-WN, ŵvos, (d), instrument,
1034 f.
-ŵN (Tŵv), Ist decl., 2692.
ὠνάμην, 996184 δε
& 321·
-ŵnac from -wv, (d), 1035.
ὤνασο, 996321
ὤνατο, 99621 -
ὠνείδικα, 733.
wvéw, 996821.
ὠνέομαι, 726, 996921, 1001.
constr., 1338 ff.
ὠνήμην, 906 21
ὤνηρ, Αpp. Η. 14 Α.
wp, App. ii. 14 A.
ὠνησάμην for ἐω-, 727.
ὤνησο, 996321 -
ὤνητο, 996321-
-wnnw for -ów, 853.
-oûμai,
-UNTA, as adv. in N, 1102",
WNTAI, 771 f.; in P-N,
-@mai, subj., 771 f.; in
P-N, 779.
-@MAI, leads to
850b ft.
ὤμεγα for ὦ μέγα, 9° f.
-wmeða, 771 f.; in P-N,
779-
779.
-ΝΑΙ, leads to -οῦνται,
850b ff.
leads to -oúμela, 850b fr.-CONTAC, as adv. in N, 1102".
wμev, 981; repl. by uer,
985".
τι -οῦμεν,
women, subj., 771 f.; in
P-N, 779.
-CÔMEN, leads
850 ff.
-WMÉNOC, in N, 849.
suggests wvw, 853 f.
ὠμεστής, ὠμηστής, Αpp. ii.
12 [3].
ᾤμην, ᾠόμην, 148, 990178
ὠμηστής, μεστής, Αpp. ii.
12 [3].
&pua, 996186 •
ώμνυες, 936 α.
wa, wia, 20º.
wµvvv, 996188-
γιανά
¿ɣiavá for iva, 1760, 1769.
|
ώμνυον,
wµvvov, 936 a-b.
âde, 913;
ώδηκεν, 716.
ᾠδηκώς, 716.
& οὕτως, 1431.
-άAнC, adj. in, 1064 ff.
accentuation of, 429.
ὠδύνουν, 85ο.
ᾠήθην, 1478.
ψησάμην, 996 τε
178*
wéw, 726, 868, 996320-
ὠθηθείς, 99620 -
ὠμοβρώς & βρωτος, 439.
ὠμύθην, 99613-
ώμοιε, 735.
ὤμος, in N νωμος, 130.
ὠμύσθην, 996138.
ὤν, ὄντος, 352, 981.
omittod, 1834, 1845,
2108 f., 2116, 2152.
-WN (Tŵv), 262, 328; in 3rd
decl. short, 393.
|
NO, succeeds 1 -ów, 853 f.,
855, 1090; from aor.
-ωσα ? 85.3.
common in N, 853 £., 906.
ξυμμαι, 996185-
ᾠόγαλα, 1150.
178
ὠύμην, ώμην, 148, 990 τα
wón, exclam., 2184.
-o, adj. & subs., 20,
1072 f., 1081 f.
& -ŵ06, 20º.
ὦπται, 9961se·
-wp (ó), from -ýp, 11.48.
in compounds, 1147 fl.
-wp (-op), adj., 375, 472;
in N, 473-
ὥρα (κα. ἐστίν), 1167 1.
pa èσTív, withinfin.,208 | f.;
with iva, App. vi. 16.
ὡράθην, 996 1.0·
wpatos, wpios, 155 α, 1073.
&para, 990188.
ὡράται, 207 α.
wpé for µœpé, 251".
-PHC, how accented, 429.
¿pios, wpaîos, 155 a.
ὡρίτσα, ή, 1040.
695
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
ὡρμησάμην, 1005.
ὡρολόγι, τό, 1107.
ὥρμουν for - ων, 850.
ὡρολόγιον, 134 1.
ὤρυγμαι, 990100 -
ὤρυγον, 996100-
ὠρύομαι, 1001.
6.
ὥρων for εώρων, 125, 727,
996180-
ὠρωρύχειν, 996100-
1. ¿s, prep. (=πpós), 1489.
atonon, 98 b.
+ accus. for mрós, 1493,
1655", 1699.
ὡς βασιλέα πορεύεσθαι,
1655".
2. ús, declar. (=örı, 'that'), | 7.
1751 ff.
in declarative clauses,
1940, 1942.
+ secondary subj.,
1923.
+ indic. for simple
infin., 2079, 2086, app.
vi. 7 a.
edundant, 2031; be-
fore infin., App. vi.
6 ff.
retreats before ὅτι,
App. vi. 10 f.
superlatives,
3. ds, relative ('us'), 14331.
before
1194
in N, 518b; see 5 ús.
ὡς τάχιστα, 1793.
4. ús, final (=iva), 1760,
1761.
absent from inscrip-
tions, app. vi. 8 [1].
- in final clauses, 1952 f.;
after verbs of effort,
1962 ff.
for simple infin., App.
vi. 4 f., 8.
retreats before nws or
iva, 1761, App. vi. 12.
iva (woiva), 1767 f.,
1773-
vá, 1767 f.
äv, 1767 f., 1774,
1952 ft.
dià vá, 1769.
για νά, 1769.
μή, 1952 f.
5. ὡς, temporal (= ὅτε, ἐπεί,
when '), 1776,, 1779
ff., 1793, 1794, 1999.
'as soon as, 1781,1793.
with aor. for pipf.,
1857.
8.
ås àv (woáv), 1776 в 1b, |-wc, in gen. sing. short,
1779-
ΒΙ
- (àν) TÁXIOTA, 1776B 5",
1793.
ws ... kai, no sooner
than,' 1714.
ds, causal ('because,'
since'), 1737 f., 1742,
1945.
with causal part.,
1738, 1740, 2109, 2150,
2152.
with accus. absolute,
2143.
repl. by ὅτι οι διότι,
1740.
ds, consecutive (=WOTE),
1756 f., 1949, 1951.
retreats, 1757".
repl. by iva, 1757b;
by ὅτι, ib.
ws+indic. (€ï0€), 1904.
9. ås, as interrog. (= πŵs),
πως),
1446 B, 2038.
10. ås for ews, see ŵs.
ws är, 1773, 1776 в 1º.
ås av Táxιota, 1793.
ås av for iva, 1767 f.,
1774.
ὡς ἀπ᾿ ὀμμάτων, 1503 d.
ús eineîv, 2098 f.
as quoi Sonev, 2098.
ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ, 1576.
ŵs éπos eineîv, 2098 f.
ὡς ἔχω βίου, 1314.
ús naows, 1434.
ὡς νά, 1767, 1773.
&s ouveλóvTi eireiv, 1369,
2098.
ws ouvтóμws eineîv, 2098.
ás ráɣiota, 1999.
is ŵpedov, 99810, 1904.
(commonly s), from
Eos, 152 & [1], 1488,
1785.
&s
for repì+ accus., 1638.
oû for tws où, 1785.
ὡς ὅπου, 1785 f.
ὅτου for ἕως ὅτου, 1785.
ὅτε for ἕως ὅτε, 1785.
ὡς ἄν, 1773.
ὡς ἑξήντα, 1638.
ŵs vá, 1773; 'as soon as,'
1999.
ὡς ὅτε, 1781, 1785 f.;
1786.
ὡς ὅτου, 1785.
s ov, 1785.
as Toû, 1785 f.
ὣς τρεῖς χιλιάδες, 1638.
νά,
393.
-wc, in compounds, 1147.
-wc (), gen. -oos, 410,
413; in N, 414.
-WC, gen. -WTOS, 362; in N,
363.
-wc (5), gen. -wos, 415; in
N, 416.
-wc, -ON, adj., 469; in
P-N, 374-380, 470.
WC, WN, adj., 468.
-wc, adv., 516 ff., 1102 a.
-wc,
-
rare in N, 518.
repl. by neuter adj., 518,
522.
CÚC, TÓC, yêu, 302, 402,
707.
- in N, 367, 463, App. iii.
13.
-wca, aor. in N, 849, 853".
suggests a present in
-ώθω, -ύσσω, -ύζω, 853 ;
also in -wvw? 853.
wody for woei, 1488, 1780,
1782, 1792.
woár, when,' 'as soon as,'
1793 f., 1999; see also
σάν.
for woíva, 1767 a, 1953b.
woyid vá, 1769.
ὡσδιὰ νά, 1769.
ὡσεί, 1488.
ὠσθήσομαι, 996320
-wce, suggests -úvw, 853).
wơi” (roîs), 43315•
4wc" (subj.), 771 f.; in
P-N, 779.
-wcr" (subj.), leads to -oûơi”,
850b ff.
¿oíva or is iva, 1760, 1767.
repl. by ώσάν (ὡς ἄν),
1953b.
ὠσμένος, 996920 -
-WCMÉNOC, suggests -wvw,
851b.
οσο νά, 1786.
ώσο που να, 1786.
ὡσότε, 1785 1. ;
ὡσύτι οι
νά, 1786.
Οι ὡς ὅτι, that,'
1751, 1754 & [1].
in declar. clauses, 1942.
for mere Ti, App. vi.
13 f.
ὡσότου, 1785 f.;
1786.
νά,
woov for ews oû, 1785 f.;
vá, 1786.
696
I. INDEX OF NOTABLE GREEK WORDS.
WoTep, with accus. absol.,
2143.
ώσπου, 1785 f.
1. WOTE, 'So that,' 1756 ff.,
1947, 1951.
+indic., 1949 ff.
repl. by ws, 1949; by
ὅτι, ὅπου (που), 1757 f.,
1951.
conf. with 87, 1757-
2. ὥστε, ‘so as to,
1761, 1949 ff.
1760,
f.,
+ infin., 1949
2090b, 2158; redun-
dant, App. vi. 5, 8, 10,
15; —, 1950 b.
+ subj., 1764.
+ 2ndary subj., 1765,
1953b.
,
for iva, 1760; rare,
1761; revived, 1762 f.
- redundant before in-
fin., App. vi. 5, 8, IO,
15.
conf. with els TO +
infin., App. vi.
15.
10,
conf. with woTE, 1757”.
|
σTE, repl. by iva, 1757;
by vá, 1757 ff.
ὥστε (from ἕως ὅτε), 1488,
1785 f.; conf. with
ώστε, 1757.
ὥστε νά, 1773, 1781, 1786.
as soon as,' 1793, 1999.
ὥστε που, until, 2009.
ὥστου for ἕως ὅτου, 1785 f.
vá, 1786.
ὠσφράνθην, 996191, 1480.
ὠσφρησάμην, 996 19
ὠσφρόμην, 996101
wow, 996920-
A
•
-wcw, fut. in N, 849.
suggests a present -ώνω,
853 f.
-@Taι, repl. by -oûraι, 850°.
-wτeроc, 493; in N, 495.
-WTH (), 1053.
wríov, Tú, 43315·
Tous for woi, 346, 43315 ·
TÚs (TO), 43316.
(του),
-wτóc, adj. in, 1053.
ὤτων ὠτῶν,
wy, pronunciation of, 30.
long,' 20.
ὤφειλον for ὤφελον, 996193,
1905 f.
for potential indic., App.
iv. 5.
wpeλeiéσai, 858.
ὠφελέω, 733, 854.
replaces ὀνίνημι, 937,
9741, 996181.
ὠφελεῖσθαι τα μέγιστα,
1266.
ὠφεληθήσομαι, 1885.
ὠφέληκα, 733.
ὠφελησάμην, 1486.
ὠφελήσομαι, 1885.
ὠφέλιμος, 309.
weλov for elle, 1905 f.
ὡς 996193 f.
with indic., 1905".
ὤφληκα, 996 104
wpλnoa, 996191.
f. ;
ŵpλov, 996194, App. i. 16 7.
ὠχρομέλας, 1156.
WTWV for wтŵv, 351, 43316.,
wy, diphthong, 19 a.
rare, 30.
1104.
ŵyai, 996180.
ὠψάμην, 990186
absent from early A, 26. &wv for av, 30.
697
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
A(= classical Attic), p. xiv, 03 B, 04 ff.,
et passim.
a, an (i.e. indef. article), how expr. in
Greck, 237, 594 1, 597, 622 ff.,
1450, etc.
a-sound, primitive and N, 16º, 35",
144.
strongest sonant, 146.
a+α=a, 146, 148 f.
ate =a, 146, 150 c.
a+i=a, 146, 150 d.
a +0=α, 146, 150 a.
a+u=α, 146, 150 h.
-sound in ? 48 f.; expr. by n? 28 a.
in Pontos, 24°.
'a little,' rí, 1385.
ab-, German prefix, 166 [1].
abbreviations explained, p. xiv.
aber, 1736.
ability, terms expressing, 2090 ff.
ablatival dative, 1352.
ablatival genitive, 1316-47.
of separation, 1316-27.
of comparison, 1328 H.
of cause, 1331-7.
of price, 1338 H.
of time, 1341-5-
with compound verbs, 1346 f.
ablative in Greek, 1352.
ablative expr. by Greek dative, 1394.
absolute, 2142; in G-B, 2144".
'ablaut,' metaphony, 166" [1].
absolute nominative, 2144, 2145; in N,
2146.
absolute dative, 2144"; without verb,
ib.
absolute infinitive, 2098 f.
absolute participle, 2141-6; N relics
of, 2146.
absolute superl., 490, 1191 ff.; strength-
ened by ori, ws, n, olos, 1194.
abstract nouns, gender of, 242; in N,
245; endings of, 1023 f., 1045 ff.
abstract nouns, without article, 1202,
1232.
- repl. by neuter of adjectives, 1050",
1182.
abundance, adjectives of, 1064-7.
Acarnania, ancient dialect of, 03 A.
accent (by-singing,' 'scanning'), 85 ff.,
App. i. 9, 19-22, ii. 8; as a term,
85 f.; misunderstood, App. i. 6.
inherent to language, 76.
pulse or soul of speech, 85.
origin and history of, 76 ff., app. i.
1-5.
age of, App. i. I.
varieties of, 76 & [2], App. i. 1 ff.
marks of, 70, 76 ff., App. i. 1 fr.
nature and function of, 32", 77, 85,
854, App. i. 6-25; weak in Greek,
77", App. i. 17, ii. 17; theories of,
76, App. i. 8.
ancient theories of, 76.
-pitch (musical, chromatic), 76,
85 ff., app. i. 8, 19 tr., ii. 16.
stress (dynamic, expiratory), 76,
85 ff., App. i. 8; 10-24.
originally strong, 324, App. i. 17 &
[1]; weaker in A Greek and Latin,
77, 137, App. i. 17; similar to
Italian or Spanish, 77; much
weaker than Teutonic, ib., App. i.
17, ii. 17.
ignored in Greek verse, App. ii. 17.
seat of, 81, 84, 104; originally, 32d;
in Acolic, 84 £; ; s. also trisylla-
botony.
in speech, 85 a, 85".
in verse, 85, 85b; antagonistic to
quantity, App. i. 8.
in grammar, 85".
in declension, 257 ff., etc.; in con-
jugation, 704 fl., etc.
in N, 030; criterion between southern
& northern speech, ib.
698
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
accent, in Aeolic, 84 f.
in Latin, 84, App. i. 11 & [2], 19.
in Sanskrit, 84, App. i. 8" & [3], 11
[3], 77:
of one kind only, 81; various sym-
bols of, 76, 77; rising, 77; fall-
ing, ib.
never on two successive syllables,
105°, 108.
in enclisis, 104 ff.
secondary, 106, 108b; in English &
German, 1086.
- secondary, in synenclisis, 107 f.; in
demonstr. pronouns, 575.
recessive, 32, 84b; but limited to
last three syllables, 81, 104.
effects of, 32d ff., 136 f., app. i. 12 ff.;
synizesis, 155, App. i. 14; contrac-
tion, 156 ff.; syncope, 136, App. i.
16 f.
its place on diphthongs, 78 f.; on
ciphers, 618.
double, 567, 570, 575, 578 f.
applied as ictus, 85, App. i. 16º.
transposed in synizesis, 155 c.
source of dactylic rhythm, 85d.
accentless words, 94, 98.
accents, 70, 76-85°; see also accent &
accentual marks.
all identical in nature, 77 f., 85°.
in MSS, 76º.
accentual marks, 70, App. i. 1–5.
in MSS, 76; see also accent(s).
accentual prosody, app. ii. 3 b.
accentual terms, 81 ff.; why musical,
App. i. 9, 19–22, ii. 16.
accentuation in Greck, 32, f., 81 ff.
of 3rd doel., 350 ff.
of monosyllabic stems, 350 ff.
of compound barytones in -75, 429.
of derivatives, 1011.
of trochaic endings in N, 347.
source of dactylic rhythm, 854.
accentus, translation of mpoo@día, App.
i. 22.
· gravis, 76.
acutus, 76.
- circumflexus, 76.
accinere, προσᾴδειν, Αpp. i. 22.
accommodation (phonetic), 124, 124",
125, 131, 136, 169.
accompanying, expr. of, 1371 ff.
1. accusative, 231, 1256-85.
survives in N, 232, 1242-7, 1256.
the commonest case, App. iii. 12 b.
serves as nom. in N, App. iii. 1 2 6.
in T-N follows the prepositions,
App. iii. 12 b.
- pl. assimilated to nom. pl., 332,
394, 427.
I. accusative, accent of, 260; in Ist
decl., 2691; in 3rd decl., 330.
2. accusative, use of, 1256-85.
3. accusative simple, 1256-78".
as direct object, 1257 ff.
cognate, 1265 f., 1282 f.
of specification
I 269 ff.
or reference,
of extent & time, 1274 ff.; omitted,
1229, 1276.
of extension, 1242 ff.
adverbial, 1278 f., 518; in P-N,
518b.
after γεύω, πίνω, etc., 1299.
for genitive, 1295.
for dative, 1348 f., 1393.
as adverb, 518; in P-N, 518¹.
after ȧvá, 1494, 1497.
after eis, 1494, 1530-54".
after ås, 1494, 1699.
after diá, 1494, 1520 ff.
after kará, 1494, 1584-91.
after μeтá, 1494, 1598-1603, 1607.
after vπép, 1494, 1674 #.
after nepi, 1494, 1633-41.
after ȧupi, 1494 L.
after mi, 1494, 1572-6".
after παρά, 1494, 1610-26.
after após, 1494, 1654-60.
after ȧvrí, 1502.
after ȧmó, 1517.
after èv, 15669.
after §, 1570.
after mрó, 1649 b.
after oúv, 1670.
after imú, 1697 H.
4. accusative double, 1279-85".
5. accusative absolute, 2141, 2143; in
P-B, 2145; after ås or woπEP,
2143; for gen. absol. 2143.
accusativus absolutus, 2143; see accu-
sative absolute.
Achaeic dialects, 03 A ii.; see also A eolic.
Achaeic phonology, 29 fl., app. ii. 7, 9,
14, etc.
Achaeic metric system, 29 ft., app. ii. 7,
9, 14, olc.
Achaia, ancient dialect of, 03 A ii. ; pre-
sent, 029.
'acting well or wrongly,' 2132 f.
action, endings denoting, 1018-22; in
verb, 1085f., 1087 l.
action of the senses, verbs of, 1325 ff.
active verbs, 669; admit of pass. voice,
1462 f.
as deponents, 1000.
as causatives, 1460.
as intransitives, 1455 f.
active voice, 669.
misappliod for middle, 1482 ff,
699
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
acute accent, 70,; origin of, 76; value
of, 77 ff.; place of, 81b; see also
accent(s).
1. adjectives, 436-82; in N, ib., 495.
how inflected in N, 312.
how accented in N, 311.
endings of, 436; in N, 401 f., 438,
444.
of one ending, 476 ff.
of two endings, 464-75.
of three endings, 306, 441; in N,
442.
ethnic or gentile, 1075-82.
in -os, -ov, -ŋ or -a, 306; inflection
of, ib.
diminutive, 582 tf.
as 2nd components, 1147.
derivative, 1050-82;
1050-82; common,
1050-74; ethnic, 1075-82.
neuter, as abstract substantives,
1050, 1182; as adverbs, 518;
in P-N, 518.
2. adjectives, conform to their subst.,
1181 f.
substantivized, 1182, 1241 a; by
the article, 1207 fl.
quantitative, 1308.
adscript, 20, 29 ff.; dropped, 20°;
inserted 20°; spurious in at, 19";
see also subscript 1.
adverb for pronoun, 2011; see adverbs.
adverbial accusative, 1278 f.
1. adverbs, derivation of, I IOI f.
in -ws, 516 ff.; comparison of,
519-24.
case-like, 434; in N, 435.
of manner, 516-24; formation of,
516 ff.; comparison of, 519-24.
of place, 523.
denominative, 516, 518, 522, 1102.
numeral, 648-52.
prepositional, 1490.
forined with mapa-, 524.
in composition, 1120 ff.
2. adverbs substantivized, 1223, 1241 C.
with gen. 1314.
after ånd or els for gen., 1315.
adversative particles, 1731-6".
advising, words of, 1353 f.
ue in Latin from Greek ae, 19ª, 53.
Aegina, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
present dialect of, 029; resists syni-
zesis, 155d; -éa, -ía, for- cá,-iá, 271.
Aelian, Atticistic style of, 013, et passim.
Aelios Herodian on accents, App. i. 5.
Aenos, modern dialect of (népva, îµí-
λele, etc.), 720.
Aeolians, 29 fl., App. ii. 9.
Acolic, 01, 03 II B; see also Achaeic.
phonology, 29 ff., App. ii. 7, 9 & 14.
Aeolos, reputed father of Acolic, o1.
Aeschines, style of, 05, et passim.
Aeschylos, poet & composer, App. i. 24;
style of, 05; et passim.
Aetolia, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
aev (Latin), in Greek expr. by aιov or
αιβ, 52.
af from av, 32, 51 ff.
affection, verbal ending of, 1100.
affirmative particles vǹ & µá, 1745 ff.;
omitted, 1746"; repl. by (@, 1746º.
Agathias, his verse artificial, app. ii. 4.
age, demonstr. adj. of, 582.
interrog. adj. of, 601.
relat. adj. of, 614 f.
genit. of, 1302.
agent (by), endings of, 1013 ff.
in pass. verbs expr. by dative,
1365 ff., 1379, 1532; by preposi-
tions, 1464 ff.; by vnd + gen., 1695;
by and + gen., 1509; by and +
accus., 1365; by did + gen.. 1531 f.;
by év, 1532, 1559 ff.; by eis, 1551;
by eg, 1568 c; by our, 1532, 1669 f.;
by μerd + gen., 1532, 1605 f.; by
Tара + gen., 1628; by naрà + dat.,
1632; by πрds + gen., 1646, 1664;
by μé, 1532, 1608.
agorasa (úyópaσa), 717.
agorasamen (åyopáσaµev), 717.
agorasan (åyópaσav), 717.
agreeable, constr. of terms denoting,
1357 f.
agreeing, expr. of, 1371 ff.
Agricolus, 59 c.
ai in Latin imitation of Greek al, 19", 53.
aiming, verbs of, 1300 f.
Albanian phonology, 030 [1], 031; its
influence on northern N, ib.
alchemistic texts, style of, 021.
aleph, ärpa, 2, 1361, App. i. 16.
Alexander the Great in the East, 08.
Alexandria seat of Greek learning, 08.
Alexandrian period, 03 B, 08; cp. p. xiv.
alias, 1718.
Alkaeos, poet & composer, App. i. 24.
allopathy, 90 [1].
alphabet (Greek), 1-12.
origin of, 1 ff.
age of, 1.
borrowed from Phoenicia, I ff.; how
imported, 5.
history of, 1-8.
originally deficient, 5.
incongruous, 5 & [3].
varieties of, 5 & [2].
numerical value of, 616 ff.
Roman, 5, 43; origin of, ib.
alphabets, grouped, 5; epichoric, 5&[2];
nestern or Ionian, ib.; western, ib.
700
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
6
alphabetum (άλφάβητος), 24.
alphavitos (αλφάβητος), 24.
also,' kai, 1704, 1718.
am about to, εἶμαι τοῦ -μοῦ, 1288.
Amorgos, its present dialect palatalizes
k before e, i to í, 56b.
amplification of words, 127-32; pro-
thesis, 129 ff.; epenthesis, 131;
paragogue, 132 f.
an (i. e. one), see a.
anacolou/hon, 2144.
Anacreonten, artificial verse of, app. ii.
4, 17 f.
anagorengi (åvaɣopeúɣei), 861.
anayoreugis (avaɣopeúɣeis), 861.
anagoreugo (αναγορεύγω), 861.
analogy, 112, 113 ff.; its effects on
P-N, 115, App. ii. 1, App. iii. 1 ;
et passim.
Anaphe, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
anaptyxis, 127, 131, 188, 385, etc.
anarthrous infinitive, 2078-99; see in-
finitive.
anastrophe, 110 f., 1138.
ancora, ἀκόμη, 116.
-ando (Ital.), N -оvтα(s), 2146.
Andros, present dialect of, 029.
Anglo-German pron. of Greek, 24 [2].
Anglo-Saxon and English, 022.
angry, to be, constr., 1355 f
animal cries as tests of pronunciation,
25.
animals, gender of, 244; in N, 245.
answering a question, 2056-61.
anle, πрú, 1651 f.
τα
-unle (Ital.), N -ovтa(s), 1102".
antectasis, 163 if., 377.
process of, App. ii. S ., 14 B, 15.
completed in archaic Greek, 165".
antepenult(ima), 81.
anticipation, see prolepsis.
Antioch seat of Greek learning, 08.
Antonis, Αντώνις, 301.
Antonius, 1040.
anūnasika, 56.
anusvāru, 56.
any time,' 1997.
I. 1. aorist, 682; in N, 688.
thematic vowel of, 784.
syncopated, 980.
subj. [optat.], how formed, So3 f.;
see also fut, subj.
imprt., 678; see fut. imprt.
2. aorist, active Isl.
drops -v, 784.
subj., ondings of, 802 f.
3. aorist active 2nd, formation of, 909-
918.
altructed by Ist, 787.
- subj., endings of, So2 f.
4. aorist middle, formation of, 909-18.
in P-N, 799, 1478–86.
2nd formed after torny, 979 f.
history of, 1478-86.
conf. with passive, 1478.
retreats, 1478 ff.
5. aorist passive, endings of, 761.
formation of, 919-23.
prevails over middle, 1478 ff.
2nd formed after čorηy, 979 f.
II. aorist, use of, 1851-61.
repl. by pf., 786, 1870 H.
for plpf., 740, 1857, 1879, 1907 1.
for pf., 1856, 1858 f., 1861, 1875-
for present, 1852, 1860.
for future, 1855.
inceptive, 1853 f.
empiric, 1852.
gnomic, 1852.
epistolary, 1859.
with ὀλίγου οι μικροῦ, 1902.
in Latin, 691.
aphaeresis, 133, 133b ff., app. ii. 9, 14.
'apiece,' 1515.
аросоре, 142, дрр. іі. 9, 14.
apodidi (åπodídeɩ), 99651.
apodido (ἀποδίδω), 996τι·
apodosis, in conditional clauses, 1964.
potential, 1976, 1978.
negatived by où (N dèv) or µý, 1801-
21, 1968.
Apollo, Delphian hymns to, 30.
Apollonios of Rhodes, his verse arti-
ficial, App. ii. 4.
' apophony' (dropwvía), 166º [1].
apostrophe, 139 f.
appellatives, in -âs, 287; in -(7)ns, 283".
appointing, verbs of, 2094 ff.
apposition, 1159", 1211, 1255, 1303.
for gen., 1303 f.
repl. by attributive gen., 1306.
of pers, pron, redundant, 1401.
approaching, expr. of, 1371 ff.
appurtenance, endings of, 1032.
adj. of, 1068-745.
apud =πupà + dat., 1630.
Arabic verse, prosody of, app. ii. 30; 3".
Aratos, his verse artificial, App. ii. 4.
Arcadia, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
Archilochos, poet & composer, app. i.
2.4, App. ii. 11.
Archinos, mover of new spelling, App.
ii. 12 [2].
Archipelago, ancient dialects of, 03 a;
present, 029 f.
Ares (Apns) in N extinct, 433-
Argolis, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
Arian verse, App. ii. 3 «, 9 ti.
languages, App. ii. 3 «.
Aristarchos, App. ii. 11 [2].
701
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
Aristides, Atticistic style of, 013; et
passim.
Aristonicos, App. ii. 11 [2].
Aristophanes, poot & composer, 05,
app. i. 24; style of, 5; et passim ;
his etymologizing, App. ii. 12 [1].
Aristophanes of Byzantium reputed in-
ventor of accents, elc., 70, App. i.
19g, ii. 11 [2].
Aristotle, style of, 05; et passim.
on accents, 76 [2], app. i. 2 f.
-arius, -ápis, 1040 & A.
arsis (in metre), 89 f., App. ii. 8.
indicated by the grave, App. ii. 8.
now misused for thesis, 89.
& thesis reversed, 89b.
art, expressed by -uh (†), 1069.
I. article, definite:
1. article definite prepositive, 235;
in N, 235, 251, 559 ff.
originally a demonstr. pron., 236,
251b.
history of, 1195 f.
inflection of, 250.
affects pronouns, 530.
becomes proclitic, 97 a; atonon,
98 a.
2. article (definito prepositive), use of,
1197-1241.
history of, 1195 f.
survives as demonstrative, 236,
251b.
generic use of, 1199, 1201 f.
ordinary use of, 1199-1224; indi-
vidualizing, 1199 f; substanti-
vizing, 1241.
before adj. & part., 1207 f.
before attribut. part., 2103 f.
before comparatives, 514b.
before cardinal numbers, 1215 f.
before possessive pronouns, 1210.
- before relat. pronouns, 1219f., 1718.
before infinitive, 1221 f., 2002,
2074.
bofore adverbs, 1223 f.
before any terin or expression,
1221 ff., 1241.
before whole clauses, 1223 f.
after vocative, 1255.
after personal pronouns, 1211.
after demonstr. pron., 1212 f.
repeated, 1236 f.
used elliptically, 1225 ff.; in
church titles, 1227 f.
used idiomatically, 1230-41.
omitted, 1230 ff.
3. article definite, postpositive, 606 ff.
for ős (boris), 1438; in N, 606",
1438.
repl. by ὅπου, 606 f.
II. article, indefinite, 237, etc.
how expressed in Greek, 237,
534ff., 595, 622 H., 1206, 1448 ff.
articular infinitive, 2071-7 ;
see in-
finitive.
artificial Greek, 05 f., 022.
artistic Greek, 05.
C
artys (ἀρτεῖς i. c. αρτύεις), 148.
as he says,' 1945.
as regards,' expr. by dat., 1369 f.
as soon as,' 1781, 1793, 2147.
Asia Minor Hellenized, 08.
present dialects of, 029.
'asking,' verbs of, 1279 H., 2031, 2036.
aspasamen (àoтáoaµev), 717.
Ө
aspiratae (x 0 ), 22; see also aspirates.
pronunciation of, 9, 24, 54 f., 56.
dissimilated, 182 ff. ; in reduplica-
tion, 730.
transposed, 183.
aspirates, 22; in
Phoenician, 3;
borrowed therefrom, ib.; see also
aspiratae.
aspiration (h), 24, 71 ff.; is Indo-
European? 73; transposed, app.
ii. 5; see also spiritus asper.
sound of, 24, 71-5; in Plato's time,
41.
misapplied, 170 [1].
assertive moods, App. v. 1.
asseverative particles, 1745 ff.
assibilation, 181.
assimilation, 125, 177, 195; et passim.
of relatives, 1441-5.
of moods, 1954, 2025.
association, 117 IE, 1488, App. iii. 1;
et passim.
effects of, 120; et passim.
dative of, 1371 H.
Astypalaca, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
at a time,' 1515.
athematic verbs, 927.
aorist, 980.
Athens, its dialect in 4, 04;
Attic.
the panhellenic centre, 04.
atona, 94, 98 f.; accented, 99 ff.
attempted action, 1841, 1848.
at the rate of,' 1658 a.
Attic, see Attic dialect.
Attic alphabet, 6.
Attic ciphers, 619.
Attic dialect, 01, 03 B.
branch of Ionic, 01, 03 B.
See
- periods of, 3; classical, i. 05; post-
classical, etc., ib.
prevails over all dialects, 04 fr.
character of, passim.
phonology, 29" ff., App. ii. 7, II, 14.
spelling, app. ii. 11, 14.
702
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
Attic dialect, literary monuments of, 05,
13, 21; et passim.
as international language, 08, 028.
Attic grammar, its influence, 019.
Attic future, 888-90; retreats in H-T,
890, 894; doubtful in NT, ib.
Attic inscriptions, age of, App. ii. 11.
Attic reduplication, 735.
Attic 2nd declension, 323-7.
Attic 2ndary subjunctive, 827.
II.
Atticists, motto of, o11; school of, 013.
attraction of relatives, 14/1-5; in N,
I445.
- inverse, 1443 f.
attribute, 1159.
attributive relation, 1159; position,
1236 ff.
· participle, 2103 ff.; see participle,
attributive.
-atus, -âтos, 1052.
au from av, 32, 3, 324, 51 f.
expr. by aov, av, aß, 52 f.
augment, 709-27, 741-55 ; in P-N, 736
(ep. also 753 ff.); in old Indian, 714".
syllabic, 710 ff.; in N, 713; as
suffixal or revective -e, 132 f., 208,
536, 725, App. iii. 28.
temporal, 714 ff.; in N, 717 f.
origin of, 714; associated with ëa,
, ib.
fluctuates in early Greek, 714.
accented, 720.
in compound verbs, 741-55; initial
& internal, 751; in N, 750, 752 ff.;
in N always external, 755.
before prepositions, 746, 752 f.
before prefixes, 748.
double, 745 f., 751; in N, 753, 755.
in present N, 753 ft.
in verbal nouns, 753-
augmentatives, 1042 ff.
Aurelis, 301.
auxiliary verbs, 687, 1896.
ave, ἄβε, 51.
Avesta verse, app. ii. 3 a.
agin, οὗ or ὃ μικρόν, 2.
B (=Byzantine), p. xiv, 03 B, 019 ff.,
et passim.
b-sound in Greek, 9, 24, 54, 57 f., 61 ff.
Babrios, his verse artificial, app. ii. 4 ;
accentual, app. ii. 17 f.
back sonants, 144.
'bad or difficult,' 1123.
'ba-lamb,' a, 39.
bards, doidoí, app. i. 24.
barytone, 83 b.
conjugation, 700-823.
barytonesis, 83 b, 84.
beal, as rhythmical term, 85 b, 89.
'before,' 1787.
beginning, verbs of, 1322.
being, verb endings of, 1087.
believing, verbs of, with or for infin.,
App. vi. 13 f.
belong (to), constr., 1355 f.
benchè, 1994.
bene che, 1994.
Delut, βήτα, 24 [x].
belli, βήτα, 2.
beth substantiae, 1552, 1660.
Bible, chief book during T-N, 019.
Biblical names, 218b.
Bibulus, Βύβλος, 1361.
-bilis -Tos, 1050.
Bat (Bartholomew), 1040 [1].
Bion, his verse artificial, App. ii. 4.
-ble=ipos, 1054.
'blow,' to give a, 1593.
Boeotia, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
adopts first Phoen. alphabet 5 [1].
Boeotian dialect, 03 A 11; uses σт for σ0,
177; ignores 7, App. ii. 7.
phonology of, 29ª, 29º.
boustrophedon writing, 4.
Bova, dialect of, 029; et passim ; korá
for ἑπτά, 174; τοῦντο, 566;
ETOûVO, 581; -equo for -eúw, 861 ;
see also South Italian N.
brachylogy, 1712; see pregnant con-
struction.
breathings, 70-6.
marks of, 70,, 72; origin of, 72 & [1].
irregular use of, 72 & [1].
sound of, 72 ff., app. i. 21.
bucolic diaeresis, app. ii. 5.
Bulgarians in Greece, 022 [1].
buying, verbs of, 1338 ff.
buzzes in Greek, 61.
by far,' 1384 ff.
by my life,' 1746º.
'by so much,' 1384 ff.
Byzantine period, 03 B, 019 ff.
style, 015.
settlements in South Italy, 029.
Byzantium, ancient dialect of, 03 1.
during G-B, 015 f.
C, e (Latin), transcr. by y or k, 95 c.
cada uno, κάθε εἷς, 626.
caliyarum, 59 c.
Callimachos, his verse artificial, app. ii.
14.
on ei & 1, 50; on grammar, app. ii.
12 [1].
calling, verbs of, 1284 f.
Callinicos, style of, 021; et passim.
Calymna, ancient dialect of, 03 A;
modern, 221, 903.
Camurena, Taμovpeîva, 59 c.
703
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
can,' expr. by mere present, 1837; by
secondary subj., 1925.
cannot,' how expr. in Greek, 1837 ff.
Cantius, Távτios, 59 c.
capitals, forms of, 9; use of, 15.
Cappadocia, modern dialect of, 554",
1098.
cardinal numbers, 620-45; indeclin-
able, 638 f.; repeated, 666.
'caring for,' expr. by gen., 1294.
carte blanche, app. vi. 27.
case-like adverbs, 434; in N, 435.
cases, number of, 231; in N, 232.
identical in form, 234.
use of, 1242-1395; generally, 1242-
7; in particular, 1248-1345; nom.
& voc., 1248-55; accus., 1256-78;
double accus., 1279-85; gen.,
1286-1347; dat., 1348-95.
casus obliqui, 231; recti, 231.
causal clauses, 1945 f.; cp. causal par-
ticles.
in Homer, 1945.
after verbs of emotion, 1947 £.
moods in, 1945 f.; in Polybios, app.
v. 8; in N, 1946.
relat. clauses, 2013.
causal participle, 2150 ff.;
with ἅτε,
without
ús, etc., 2150, 2152;
particle, 2151; dropped when it
would be wr, 2152.
in P-B, 2151, 2128; in N, 2151,
2152".
repl. by ἐπεί (ἐπειδή), ὅτι, 2151; by
did Td+infin., ib.; by iva + subj.,
1741.
causal particlos, 1737-42, 1945 f.; in
H-N, 1946; cp. causal clauses.
causative verbs, 868, 1089 f., 1097 ff.
in middle voice, 1473 f.
cause expressed by gen., 1292 f., 1332-7.
by dative, 1387 ff.
C
- by a clause, 1945 ff.; by relat, clause,
2010, 2013.
by participle, 1945, 2150 ft.
of emotion, 1947 (., 2128 H.
cause,' to, 1460.
causing, verb endings of, 1089 1.
verbs denoting a, 2087 f.
'caution,' verbs of, 1956 M., 1961.
celeugis (reλevyes), 861.
801.
celeugely writing, 07.
cerae
'cortainly,' 2059.
cerysmenon («εξυσμένον), 739.
CII in Latiu for X, 43.
chacun, kále els, 626.
'character,' adj. of, 1057 ff.
C
chè sorta, 591 b.
chelh, ĥτα, 2.
chicken,' pullus, 1041 [1].
IC
Chios, present dialect of, 029; pala-
talizes before e, i to i, 56b; fond of
final -v (oróµav), 221; masculines
in -és, 273; accus. pl. in -as, 333;
retains rás, 561; 4(o)ovoi, 777;
Ισαστεν, 801.
choosing, verbs of, 1284 f., 2094 ff.
Christianity, influences Greek, 014 ff.
Christianization of Greeks, 014.
chromatic accent, app. i. 8 ff.; see pitch-
accent.
Chronicon, language of, 021; et passim.
Church (Greek) saving Greek, o17.
Chalcidian alphabet, 43.
character of nouns, 252; of verb, 756.
in antagonism with Latin Church,
023, 025.
spared by Sultans, 026.
influences Greek, 017; et passim.
church dignitaries, their title omitted,
1227 f.
Church Fathers, style of, o17.
Cicero on Homer, App. ii. 11 [2].
ciliu (noλía), 44.
ciphers, 616-9; origin of, 3, 616; Attic,
619.
circunflex, 70, 76.
form of, 702, 77 f.; conf. with A, 702.
origin of, 76.
nature of, 77 £.
identical with acute, 77.
place of, 83; see also accent(s).
challengi (κλαδεύγει), 861.
cladengis (nλadeúyeis), 861.
cladeugo (λadevɣw), 801.
class, a,' preceded by article, 1201.
classical Greek, 05; et passim.
literature, o6; et passim.
period, xiv, 03..
classicalism during G, 011; revived in
M, 028.
and common speech, 020.
clauses, independent or simple, 1900-28.
dependent or compound, 1929-2061;
in popular speech, 1930; repl. by
participles, 1929; by infin., ib.;
by parataxis, 1702, 1710 f., 1931,
1939.
substantivized, 1221, 1241 d.
clearness or perspicuity, characteristic
of popular speech, 121, 127, App.
iv. 5; et passim.
clothing,' verbs of, 1279 ff.
Cockneys,' Greek, 72.
cognate accus., 1265 il., 1282 1.
omitted, 1266.
loads to advorbs in -a, 1266.
collective -, 1131 L.
subject and its verb, 1174.
704
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
colloquial Greek, 05 f., 022; compared
with A style, 022; et passim.
characteristics of, 022, App. vi. 5.
ignored by ancients, 05 fl., 020, 25,
25b & [1].
veiled, 020.
no A relics of, 07.
in Egyptian papyri, 013.
in G, 013.
in T-B compositions, 021 [2].
'colon' in Greek, 70, 80.
(
its equivalent in A-P, 2032 f.
colt, a,' 1041 [1].
'coming,' verbs of, 2095.
comma, 70, 79.
command, how expressed, 1926 ff.; App.
V. 12 a, c.
negative, 1927 f.
verbs denoting, 2087 ff.
commaudments (ten), their influence on
G-N, App. v. 12 d.
common' or 'conventional' Greek, 09,
OII; school of, 013; see also col-
loquial Greek.
exceptionable or vulgar, 020.
common gender, 244.
common' syllables, 88; vowels, 17.
communia, 308.
communicating, expr. of, 1371 ff.
Comneni, classicalism under, 028.
'company, in,' 1376.
comparative, 483 ff.; see also com-
parison.
adj from adverbs, 508".
of adverbs in -ws, 519.
periphrastic, 500-15.
preceded by article, 514".
for rather,' 1190.
for relat. superlative, 514 f.
followed by genitive, 1187 f., 1328 ff.;
by M, 1187 f.; by ἢ ὥστε, 1950 0.
comparison of adjectives, 483-515.
by endings, 483, 509-15.
poriphrastic, 509–15.
defective, 507 f
dative of, 1385 f.
compensation, metrical, App. ii. 9, 14;
never phonetic, ib.
compensatory doubling, App. ii. 9.
lengthening, 163 f., App. ii. 8 f.; sce
also antectasis.
complementary symbols, 70-80, app.
ii. 16; see also reading marks.
composition of words, 1103-57; origin-
ally, 1110; in Homer, 1104'; in
G-N, 1155.
proper, 1105-55; it Ist part,
1106-36; its 2ud part, 1137-55.
syntactical, 1115 f
copulative or dvandva, 1156 f.
compositional vowel, 1106 ff.
compound consonants, 23; see also
consonants.
sentences, 1929 ff.; see clauses.
compulsion, verbs denoting, 2087 ff.
concessive clauses, 1949-51, 1993 f.
concessive participle, 2155 f.; introd.
by καί, καίπερ, καίτοι, 2155; repl.
by finite clause, 2156.
concord in syntax, 1168-80.
concrete nouns, endings of, 1023 f.
condition (state), verb endings of,
1085 f.
condition (hypothesis), terms express-
ing, 2090 ff.
formis of, 1965, 1969-74.
expr. by relat. clause, 2010, 2023 il.
-temporal, 1975.
conditional particles, 1770-5, 1966;
relative frequency of, 1771.
1. conditional clauses, 1964-92; defined,
1964 l.; forms of, 1965; their par-
ticles, 1966; parts of, 196.4,
1967; substitutes for, 19284,
1991 H., 2154.
objective, 1965,1969-73; threefold
constr., 1969, 1991 f.; repl. by
direct quest., 1991 a; by inprt.,
1991 b; by parataxis, 2154-
subjective, 1974 f. ; in P-T, 1992;
in N, ib.
temporal, 1975.
2. conditional clauses, peculiarities of,
1976-83.
P-Ñ history of, 1984-924.
mixed, 1976-83.
3. conditional relat. clauses, 2023 fr.;
commoner in P, 2024.
conditional participle, 2153 f.
repl. by el or èàv (àv) and finite
verb, 2154; by parataxis, ib.; by
interrog. clause, 1991 a, 2154; by
imprt., 1991 b, 2154.
conjugation, 697; reduced in N, 030;
accent in. 704 fl.
common (in -w), 698, 700 ff.; iu
-μι, ib.
- barytone, 700-S23.
contracted, 824-63; in P-N, 849-
63; vorbs in -άw, 826-30, 85011.;
in éw, 831 H., 850 T., 853°; in -ów,
836, 850, 853 1.; peculiarities of
contr. verbs, 838-48.
conjunctions, 1487 ff.; 1700-95; de-
fined, 1702.
proclitic, 97 d.
atona, 98 c.
prepositive, 1700.
postpositive, 1700.
co-ordinating, 1704-36; copulative,
705
Z Z
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
1704-24; disjunctive, 1725-30;
adversative, 1731-6.
conjunctions, subordinating, 1737-95;
causal, 1737-42; emphatic, 1743
ff.; asseverative, 1745 ff.; interroga-
tive, 1747 ff.; declarative, 1751
ff.; consecutive, 1756 fr.; final,
1760-9; conditional, 1776-95.
conjunctive, 676; sce subjunctive.
conjunctivus adhortativus, 1912.
connective vowel, 698, 1106; see the-
matic vowel.
conseculio modorum or temporum, 1934,
App. v. 7.
consecutive particles, 1756-9.
Constantino, Ist Christian Emperor, 015.
Constantinople during T-M, 015 f.
centre of Christian Greeks, 015.
Constantinos Porphyrogennetos, style
of, 021; et passim.
consulibus, iráтois, 2144.
contamination, 116, 626; et passim.
contracted 2nd decl. 313-22; in P-N,
320.
uncontracted forms in, 316.
accent of, 318 f.
contracted verbs, 824-63; see conju-
gation contracted.
contraction, 156–62 ff., App. ii. 14 f.;
as hyphaeresis, 157 f.; as crasis,
159 ff.
homophonous, 157 f.; in N, ib.
heterophonous, 157".
omitted, 158.
consecutive clauses, 1949 ff.
avoided in popular speech, 1951.
expr. by wore, 1949 ff.; by ws, 1949,
1951; by ὅτι, ἵνα, ὅπως, όπου στ
που, 1951.
consecutive relat. clausos, 2014-9; in
G-N, 2018 f.
consequence expr. by rolat. clause,
2010, 2014 f.
consonantism, 123, 169-224; mutae,
170-81; aspiratae, 182 ff.; liquids
& nasals, 185-20; spirant o, 204-
8; semivowels i & F, 209-17.
in dialects, 123, App. ii. 14.
final or terminal, 218-24, App. iii. ;
limited to σ v p, 218 f., 3352, APP.
iii.; in où & è, 218°; in iúp,
wón, eû, 2181.
modern, 030; in southern N, 030;
in northern N, 030, 219".
consonantization of postpositive vowels,
18, 32, 51, 78".
1. consouants, 16, 22 f.
classification of, 22 fl.; modern,
22 f.; ancient, 23".
compound or double, 23, 23", 25
[1] b; better than simple, 25
[I].
consonants, semivocalic (µípwva), 23b.
mute, 23".
double, in syllabication, 92.
2. consonants, pron. of, 9, 24, 54-69.
aspiratae, 54, 56 fr.
mediae, 54, 57-63.
-liquids, 64 tf.
contraction, 156 ff.; process of, App. ii.
9, 14 A, 15; as rhythmical com-
pensation, ib.; written, 156; un-
written, 162; phonetic,
phonetic, 1561;
grammatical, 156" 2.
foreign to Homer, 30; App. ii. 9.
proper to 4, App. ii. 9, 14 a.
in dialects, App. ii. 14.
its bearing on pronunciation, 25.
discarded in popular speech, 286.
contamination, 116, et passim.
con lullo che, 1994.
convenient,' constr. of terms exp.,
1357 f.
conversing,' expr. of, 1371 ff.
co-ordinating conjunctions, 1704 ff.
co-ordination for subordination, 2154.
copula, 982, 1249.
copulative composition, 1156 ff., 1729".
disputed for A-P, 1157.
copulative verbs εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι, κτλ.,
1249; (cp. 1285", 1288); with gen.,
1288 f.
Corcyra, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
Corinth, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
Cornaros, a N Cretan poet, 021; et
passim.
coronis, 159 a; omitted, 161³.
Cos, ancient dialect of, 03 A.
present, 221.
cos. (consulibus), râs, 2144".
cosa m'importa a me? 1401.
'could,' how expr. in 4, 1901, 1925,
1978.
'countries,' gender of, 242; in N, 245-
crasis, process of, 159 ff., App. ii. 14.
in A, 30.
its bearing on pronunciation, 25, 165".
where used, 161.
sign of, 159.
admits of subscript, 160.
Cratinos, poet & composer, App. i. 24.
on Bî Bî, 39.
Crete under Venice, 025.
ancient dialect of, 03 A.
present dialect of, 025, 029, 031;
phonology, 155, 155 g; ta(X)Ü-
Tépov, 155"; masculines in -és,
273; πρικύς, 402; ή γρά, 409;
EXTρÚS, 130, 503; Šó", 130; "Ew,
524 ; καλλιᾶς, 505 ; παρῶδε, πὧδε,
706
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
د
524; τσῆ for τῆς, τούς, or τάς,
562; τίβοτσι, 562; ἴντα, 592 f. &
[3]; yels for eis, 295, 621; kalaveis
και ανείς
or μια(ν)είς, ib.; κἄτιν τις, 595 ;
ἑ]νιοῦς, 621; μουηδέ, 626 ; μουηδὲ
eîs, -évas, 621, 626, 629b; &TIVOS,
611; ζιμιό, 621 ; βολά, 116, 651;
åve- for ava-, 754; ¿vnpopâs, 755;
Απανηχώρι, Κατηχώρι, 755;
Loovoi", 777; éve, 985 [1]; diá(y)w,
99613; δούδω, 9965 : βρίστω,
996ος ; κερδαίνω, 996130; μιώνω,
996 104 ; πρήστω, 996212; πλέξω for
πλεύσω, 996217; πορεύγομαι,
996221; ¿pɣáw for piɣáw, 136",
996236; σαπίζομαι, 996242 ; σων(ν)-
ίζω, 996362. ἐβάρηκα 'ς τὴ χέρα,
etc., 1273; ὅτι νά, ὅτι καί, 1783,
1794 ; παιδιά, κᾶ (= ἆρα), 2048 [2].
Crete, dialect of eastern districts pala-
talizes before e, i, to í, 56.
Lakkoi in, nawá, ovwos, 187c.
- Sphakia in, peculiarity of A-sound,
67.
cries of animals as tests of sounds, 25.
crime expr. by gen., 1292 f.
cum (Latin) influences oúv, 1175°;
μετά, ib.
Cumae, present dialect of, 155 J; -éa,
-ía, 27.
-cumque, 1716.
Cyclades, ancient dialect of, 03 a;
present, 029.
cyclеugi (KUKλεúɣei), 861.
cylengis (кvкλevɣeis), 861.
cycleшyo (кvíλeńɣw), 861.
Cypros, ancient dialect of, 03 ^; 84,
App. ii. 7º; knows no long vowels,
ib.; ignores natural quantity, ib.
present dialect of, 029; xwpkóv,
155 f.; στόμαν, 221; τσῆ (ίον τῆς,
(for
τούς, τάς), 562 ; ἴντα, 592 f. & [3];
knows only syllabic augment, 721;
σουσιν, 777 ; - σον (imprt.), 813 ;
βάλλω, σφάλλω, 905 ; ένε, 985 [1];
-σkw, 1098.
D), d (Latin), corresponds to Greek 8,
9, 54, 57 E., 61.
d-sound in Greck, 9, 24, 57 ff.
d-sound in Greek, 9, 24, 57 f., 61 ff.
d for 8 in South Italian N, 24º.
dactyl, origin of, 85ª.
dactylic rhythm suggested by accent,
859.
daleth, déλтα, 2, App. i. 16 b.
danger,' terms expr., 1956 ff., 1961.
dash in Greek, 705, 80.
dating in G-T, 1651 f
datival accusative, 1348 f.
datival genitive, 1350 f.
1. dative, 231; in N, 233.
accent of, 259.
2. dative, use of, 1346-95.
history of, 1242-7, 1348 ff.
proper, 1352, 1353-70.
- ablatival, 1352.
of person, 1348; after verbs of
emotion, 1335; becomes gen.,
1 336.
of thing, 1351.
of association, 1371–8.
of agent, 1365.
of instrument, 1379-89.
locative, 1390-5.
relative, 1369 £.
of possessor, 1367 f.
of interest, 1361 f.
ethical, 1363 f.
of time, 1391 ff.; in N, 1395;
repl. by èv, 1392; by eis, 1393;
for accus. of extent, 1394; for
Latin ablative, 1394.
of cause, 1387 ff.
of specification, 1271 ff.; in N,
1273.
of comparison, 1385 ff.
after prepositions: after ev, 1494,
1555-65; oúv, 1494, 1668 πr. ;
ἀμφί, 1494, 14953; ἐπί, 149,
1580 ff.; Taрá, 1494, 1630 ff.;
παρά,
περί, 1494, 1643 f.; πρύς, 1494,
1665 f.; ἀπό, 1518; πρό, 1650.
replaced by пpós, eis, µetá, 1348;
by διά, ἐν, σύν, ἐπί, ἐξ, από,
1351; by simple accus., 1242,
1348; by simple gen., 1242,
1350 ff.
b
3. dative absolute, 2144 f.; a Latinism,
ib.
without verb, 2144".
day' as unit of time, 650, 1791; cp.
1652.
de (Latin), associated with åró& è§, 1312.
Decapolis, ancient dialect of, 03 B.
Decimus, Δέγμος, 59 c.
declarandi verba, 1284; constr. of,
2028 f., 2035 f., 2085 f., 2135 ff.
with infin., 2085 f., app. vi. 7
with ort, 2079, 2586, app. vi. 13 f.
with διότι, ὡσότι, πῶς, 1751, 1755,
1942, App. vi. 13 ff.
declarative clauses, 1938-48.
b
introd. by őr, 1940. 1942; by ws.
1940; by διότι, καθότι, ὡσότι, πῶς,
1751, 1793 f., 1942, App. vi. 13 f.
in P-N, 1939; in Polybios, app. v.
8 lb.
moods in, 1940 ff.
form indirect discourse, 1938, 2027.
707
Z Z 2
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
declarative clauses, repl. by direct dis-
course, 1943, 2031 f.
declarative conjunctions, 1751-5.
frequency of, 1753".
never omitted, 1944.
<
declarative infinitive, 2085 f., app. vi. 3,
7-14; see also infinitive.
declaring, verbs of, 1284; see declar-
andi verba.
declension, 225 f., 238, 252-666.
1st, 261-90b; its endings, 261, 262;
its gender, ib.
2nd, 291-327; in N, 294, 305;
affects 1st, 296; contracted, 313-
22; Attic, 323 ff.; in P, 325.
- 3rd, 328-432; stem of, 334; end-
ings, 328 f.; accent of, 350 ff.
anomalous, 433.
declensions, three, 225 f., 238; for-
merly ten, 239.
in N, 226: intermixed, 226, 256.
degree of difference, 1385 ff.
degrees of comparison, see comparison.
deities (4) in N, 015 ff., 4331.
doliberating, verbs of, 2036.
deliberative subjunctive, 1909 ff.
Delphi accepts first Phoenician alpha-
bet, 5 [1].
Delphian hymns to Apollo, 30.
Democritos on Homer, App. ii. 12 [1].
demonstrative adj., 582-5; see den.
pronouns.
demonstrative pronouns, 558-85; inten-
sified, 574; in N, 572 f., 575 f.
use of, 1424-32; 5, tó, †, 1424;
öde, túde, üde, 1425 f.; aúrós, ú, ʼn,
1427; οὗτος, τοῦτο, αὕτη, 1428 f. ;
ἐκεῖνος, 1430 1.
redundant, 1439.
dropped in relat. clauses, 1442.
Demosthenes, style of, 05; et passim.
denominative words, 1008 ff.
verbs, 1083-93.
adverbs in -ws, 516, 518, 522, 1102;
in N repl. by -a, 522.
dental consonants, 22.
+ dental σ, 176.
+μ=0, 177; in N, 179.
+σ = dropped, 185.
denying, verbs of, 1822.
deponent verbs, 674. 1000 ff.; become
active, 1000, 1002 f.
middle, 1001 ff.
passive, 1004 ff.
depriving, verbs of, 1379 ff., 1321.
der, die, das, 236.
derivation, 1007, 1008–1102.
descent, endings denoting, 1028-31.
deserve, expr. by εἶμαι τοῦ - μου, 1288.
desiderative verbs, 1099 ff.
desiderative secondary subjunctive,
1923 ff.
design, verbs of, 2086 f.
gen. of, 1337.
desire, verbal endings of, 1099 f.
desisting, verbs of, 1822.
determinative pronouns,
1418-22;
αὐτός, 1418-21; ἀτός, 1422 f.;
εὐτός, τός, 1423.
deverbal, see postverbal.
diacritic marks, 21, 29, App. ii. 9.
diaeresis (non-contraction), 158.
marks of, 21, App. ii. 9.
1. dialects, ancient, or ff.
number of, 01-03.
grouped, 03.
- phonology of, 29ª, 29°, App. ii. 7, 14.
their value in pronunciation, 25.
2. dialects, modern, 029 f.
grouped, 029.
relative value of, 032 f.
dicendi verba, see declarandi verba.
dictator (rúpavvos), App. ii. 11.
Didache, style of, 021.
Didymos, App. ii. 11 [2].
lies, μépa, in dates, 1652; cp. 650,
1791.
difference, degree of, 1385 ff.
'difficult & bad,' 1123.
difficulty, how expressed in compounds,
1121 ff.
diganima, 11, 51 f., 209 f., 216 f.
dignitary, his title omitted, 1227 f.
diminutives, 303 f.
endings of, 303 f., 1036-41.
gender of, 243; in N, 245.
as primitives, 1038.
spreading since ▲, 338.
in N, 1038; why increased, 1039.
Dion Chrysostomos, style of, 013; ct
passim.
Diodoros, style of, 013; et passim.
Dionysios of Halicarnassos, style of,
013; et passim.
his theories on Greek, 25 [1] a-c,
69 [1].
his testimony on pronunciation,
25 [1] a-c.
Dionysios of Olympos on accents, App.
i. 2.
diphthong, definition of, 19 f.
constitution of, 19; seo also diph-
thongs & sonant.
diphthongs, 19 ff., 78b.
in Greek graphic only, 32h.
genesis of, 30-32h.
proper, 19a; genesis of, 30-32".
spurious or compensatory, 19 b, 20º,
29" b, App. ii. 11; hysterogeneous,
29 f., App. ii. 9, 11; genesis of,
708
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
29d ff., App. ii. 9; in verse, 20º;
affect proper diphthongs, 200
long, 20; why long, 17, 32.
diphthongs, never dissected in papyri,
30.
repeated instead of resolved, 30.
accent & breathings on, 78 f.
quantity of, 20.
pronunciation of, 30 ff.
how monophthongized, 32 ff.
direct discourse, 2027, 2031 f.; for
indirect, 2031 f.
dis- (Latin), §e-, 755.
discourse, direct, 2027, 2031 f.; in-
direct, 2027-32; see oratio obliqua.
disjunctive particles, 1725-30.
dissimilation, 126.
of aspiratae, 182 ff.
in reduplication, 736 f.
mistaken for augment, 753, 755.
dissociation, 121 f.; et passion.
distance, verbs expr., 1316 f.
distraction, cases of, App. ii. 12 [1].
distribution expr. by oúv, 662; by
ανα & κατά, 662,; by ἀπό, 1515 ;
in numerals, 666.
distributive numerals, 662-6.
σύν,
division of words, 90-3; in papyri, 30;
in inscriptions, ib.
divisor of syllables, 20°, 29, App. ii. 9.
dono, δώνω, 853.
Doric dialects, 03 A f.; grouped, 03 a.
Doric influence on 4, 04, 277, 283; on
N, 611.
Doric phonology, 29ª, 29°, App. ii. 7,
10, 14.
Doros, reputed father of Doric, o1.
double consonants, 23; in syllabica-
tion, 92.
double accusative, 1279-1285'; in pas-
sive verbs, etc., 1281, 1283; see
also accusative, double.
doubling, compensatory, App. ii. 9.
'doubtful' syllables, 88 f.
vowels, 17.
drinking, verbs of, 1298 f.
ds-sound expr. by ?, 69.
dual number, 228.
basis of, 631".
use of, 229.
in nouns, 228 f.; in contracted 2nd
decl., 315.
in verbs, 667 f., 1172 f.
retreat of, 229, 315, 668.
dubitative subjunctive, 1909 f.
durative present, 1840-5.
future, 1895 ff.
past (imprf.), 1847-50.
<
during expr. by gen., 1344.
'duty,' verbs denoting, 1849.
dvandva composition, 1555 ff., 1729";
disputed for A-P, 1157.
dynamic accent, App. i. 8; see accent
and stress-accent.
dz in N, 203, 205; for in South
Italian N, 24º.
E, e, primitive & N sound, 16°, 35", 144.
its relative power, 146.
e-sound expr. by 7, 39 ff., 42 f.
overpowered by a o u, 136, 146 ff.
e-sounds in N, 24.
e prevocalic becomes i, 38, 155 a.
e Latin expr. by e in Greek, 43.
e+e=e, 146, 148 f.
e+i=e or i, 146, 154.
-ea († & Tá) in 4 paroxy tone, in N
oxytone, 155 c, 271.
each-other,' 550.
'eager for,' expr. by gen., 1294.
easy,' constr., 1357 f
'easy & good,' 1123.
eating, verbs of, 1298 f.
ebdominta (ẞSоµñνта), 639.
ecato (ékatív), 639.
ecclésia (ἐκκλησία), 24.
echeses (exeσes), 798.
edipneses (èdeínvnoes), 798.
elrama (ἔδραμα), 794.
education in A times, 05, 4", app. ii. 9.
in G, OII & [2].
ef from ev, 32, 51 ff.
effect,' its ending in B-N, 1027.
effective present,
1886-94.
1831-9;
effort,' verbs denoting, 1962 f.
efileres (¿‹píλŋoes), 798.
-eyuo, -cúyw, 861.
future,
Egyptian papyri, language of, 013; et
passim.
ei (Latin) & Greek e, 53.
eight+tens, 642.
ekklisia (ἐκκλησία), 24.
elabu (čλaßa), 794-
elativo superlative, 490, 1191, 1194.
Elis, ancient dialect of, 03 A; uses σт
for 00, 177.
clision, 139 ff., app. ii. 9, 14.
sign of, 139.
as test of pronunciation, 141.
emotion, words denoting, 1004, 1332 ff.,
1387 ff, 2128 ff.
cause of, 1947 f.; expr. by dat., 1387
ff.; by mi + dat., 1582 d; by iva,
vá, 1741.
empiric aorist, 1852;
future, 1887.
perfect, 1867;
emphasis in popular speech, 121, 127,
155", 1798, 2003, 2167, App. vi. 5;
et passim.
709
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
emphatic particles, 1743 ff.
emphatic pers. pronouns, 525, 528-9.
enclisis, 94 f., 101 ff.
enclitics, 94, 102 ff.
lose their accent, 104 ff.
succeeding one another, 108.
orthotone, 109.
as suffixes, 103.
ending,' verbs denoting an, 1322 f.
endings of nouns, 252; in 1st decl.,
262; in 2nd decl., 292 ff.; in 2nd
Attic decl., 323 H.; in 3rd decl.,
328.
of verb, 760 ff.
-endo (Ital.) and N -ovtas), 2146.
eneninta (èvevñvтa), 639.
English phonetically transcribed, 032.
enjoying, verbs of, 1298 f.
enquiring, verbs of, 2035.
-ente, -ovтa(s), 1102b.
entrusting, words of, 1353 f.
epaenesa (emaiveoa), 750 c.
epaenesan (èπaíveσav), 750 c.
panesen ἐπαίνεσεν), 750 c.
epaleses (ἐπάτησες), 798.
epeneses (èπaíveoes), 750 c.
epenthesis, 127, 131, 188.
Ephoros of Cumae on accents, app. i. 2.
Epicharmos on accents, App. i. 1.
epichoric alphabets, 5.
epicoene gender, 244 f.
Epiphanii vitae, style of, 021.
Epiros, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
present dialect of, 029; paoтev for
μεθα, 801° ; φέρω, σύρω, 903.
epsefises (¿Ÿýpiões), 798.
equality, adj. and adv. of, 1357 lf.,
1371 f.
erupses (eppayes), 798.
Erasmian pronunciation, 24-69; in
England, 24 [2]; in Germany, ib. ;
in France, ib.
origin of, 24 & [1].
misused, 24 [1].
Erasmianism, 24 [I].
Erasmiaus, 24.
Erasmus (Desiderius) on pron., 24 & [1].
erises (hpɩoes), 798.
-es=-es or -ais (in nouns), 2, 267.
essendo che, 116, 1994.
elu, ἦτα, 24 [1].
etacists, 24.
ethical dative, 1363; repl. by gen.,
1247, 1364.
ellice, ηθικῶς, 24.
ethnic adjectives, 1075-82; subst.,
1030 f.
eliam, 1718.
etymological spelling, 032, 25 f.
etymologies as test of pronunciation, 25.
etymologies in Plato, 25 [1].
etymology, 1007-1157b.
Euboea, present dialect of, 029.
Eucleides, archonship of, 6, App. ii. 12.
spelling reform, 6, 9, app. ii. 12 f.
Eucleidian spelling, 6, 9, 28 f., App. ii.
12 & [2].
Eugenis, Evyévis or -ns, 301.
euphonic -v, App. iii. 16-21.
misused, app. iii. 17 ff.
in N, App. iii. 20 ff.
euphuisms, 122.
710
Euripides, style of, 05; et passim.
a poor composer, app. i. 24.
a poor metrician, App. ii. 6 [1].
etymologizing, App. ii. 12 [1].
ev (Latin) from ev, 32, 51 f.
in Greek expr. by ev, eß, eov, 52.
-ever, -soever, 1716.
'every other,' 1621 f.
evévdpov, 30b.
ἀπό,
ex=è§, 1312; =åmó, 1514 [1].
- becomes ge- in N, 755.
exclamation, 70%.
mark of, 80.
constr. of terms expressing an, 1334 f.
except,' пapá, 644, 1619 fr., 1808.
excutitur, 755-
exinta (è§îvтα), 639.
exparesco, 755.
expectation, verbs of, 2086" f.
with infin., App. vi. 3.
'expert in,' expr. by gen., 1294.
expiratory accent, 324, 85, App. i. 8;
see stress-accent.
expletive particles, 1700.
exposco, 755-
extent, accus. of, 1274 ff.
gen, of, 1302.
dat. of, 1394.
f-sound in Greek, 63.
F, 9, 11, 123, 209 f., 216 f., 616¸.
its name, II.
its place in the alphabet, 616,.
its form in G-B, 616¸.
initial, 216.
intersonantic, 217.
before h, 72.
becomes B or v, 63, 404.
numerical value of, 616,.
facility, compounds denoting, 1121 11.
factitive verbs, 868.
'fall,' see arsis.
family (class)'a, takes the article, 1201.
favourable,' constr., 1357 f.
fear,' verbs denoting, 1805, 1827,
1956 ff., 1961.
feature,' adj. denot. a, 1057 ff.
'fee' denoted by -uá, -uó", 1071.
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
feeling,' verbs of, 2128 ff.
females, gender of, 242; in N, 245.
feminines, 227.
by sense, 242.
by endings, 247 ff., App. iii. 11 b.
in -ois, -is, -is, 395.
filling, verbs of, 1318 f.
1. final clauses, 1952-68.
their moods, 1952 fl.
their particles, 1952 ff.
in Polybios, App. v. 8 d.
2. final relat. clauses, 2020 ff.
final particles, 1760-9.
final infinitive, 2078 f., 2094 ff.; see
infinitive.
final participle, 2157-9 ; in P-B, 2159.
in the fut. 2157; in the present, ib. ;
in the aor., 2159; after verbs of
motion, 2157.
repl. by final clause, 2158; by relat.
clause with us, ib.; by final infin.
ib., App. vi. 17 b, 2170.
rare in NT, 2159.
misapplied, 2159.
finite moods, 676; in N, 679.
fitness, terms expressing, 2090 ff.
fitting, terms of, 1357 f.
flute, used in epic recitations, app. i. 24.
follow (to), constr., 1355
following,' expr. of, 1371 ff.
foot, its use in boating time, 89 f.
replaced by hand, 89".
(Tous, pes), as technical term, 89.
forbidding, verbs of, 1822.
foreign element in Greek, 016, 022,027;
et passim.
(
foreign influence on N, 032.
forgetting, verbs of, with gen., 1294;
with accus., 1296, 1295.
formerly,' δ ἀπό, 1514.
fractions, how expressed, 1215 f.
'frame of mind,' adj. of, 1183 f.
Franco-Slavonic clement in N, 022.
Franks in Greece, 023, 025; their in-
fluence on Greek, ib.
Fred (Frederick), 1040 [1].
French phonetically transcribed, 032.
in N (lequel), 612.
frequentative verbs, 1095 f.
from,' expr. by gen., 1286.
'from the standpoint of,' 1369 f.
front sonauts, 144.
'fruits,' gender of, 243; in N, 245.
fs for & in South Italian N, 24".
<
ૐ
>
full stop, 703.
fullness,' adj. denoting, 1064-7.
verbs denoting, 1318 f.
full-point, threefold use of, 79.
furnishing with,' its verbal ending,
1091.
future action, how expressed in A, ^pp.
iv. I.
1. future (tense), 682 ff.; in N, 686.
threefold, 684, 1881 ff., 1886-99.
twofold in N, 686.
2. future, use of, 1886-99, app. iv.
future middle, 682 ff., 771.
with active present, 998.
history of, 1478-88.
retreats, 1480 ff.
in P-N, 799, 770b, 1478–86.
future passive, 682 ff, 685.
endings of, 761, 807.
threefold, 1882.
has separate forms for effect & dur.,
1882 ff.
periphrased, 1883.
future indicative, 682 ff., App. iv.
endings of, 770 ff.
threefold, 684, 1881 ff., 1689-99.
twofold in N, 686; see future tense.
history of, app. iv.; summed up, ib.
19.
disadvantages of, App. iv. I.
longest record of, app. iv. 10.
substitutes for, App. 2-14; in G,
App. iv. 6; in G-B, ib. 8 ff., 12.
in A-P, App. iv. 1 ff., 8.
in B-M, App. iv. 12 ff.
in N, App. iv. 14 ff.
in South Italian N, App. iv. 3.
retreat of, 894, app. iv.
repl. by pr. indic., app. iv. 2 ff.; by
exw + infin., ib. 6 f.; by fut, subj., ib.
8 H.; by pr. or fut. subj. +äv (iva,
vá), ib. 12 ff.; by Oéλei vá, 0è vá
(Oevá), Oá, ib. 14 ff.
periphrased by Oéλw + fut. subj., App.
iv. 16 ; by θέλει νά, θενά, θά, App. iv.
14. ff.
future, effective, 683 f.; in N, 686.
use of, 1886-96.
in commands, 1890 f.
in interrog., 1888, 1891.
empiric or gnomic, 1887.
for interrog. subjunctive, 1888.
for assertive present, 1889.
periphrased by tooμai + aor. part,
1892 ff.
repl. by fut. pf., 1869; by pf. 1856;
by present, 1836 l., 1855, 1896º,
App. iv. 2 f.
in South Italian N, 1836, App. iv. 2.
future, durative, 683 f.; in N, 686.
use of, 1882, 1895 fl.
simple, 1892 ff.
periphrased, 1883, 1896.
- repl. by present, 1896".
future, perfect, 684, 689 f.; in N, 686.
use of, 1884 f., 1897 ff.
711
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
future, simple, 1884 f., 1897 f.
periphrased, 1884; by eσoμaι + part.,
1898 f.; in N, 1899.
repl. by effect. fut., 1869.
extinct since P, 1885.
future, 2nd, 908.
3rd, see luture perfect.
future, Allic, 888g.
retreats in II, 890, 894.
doubtful in NT, 890, 894.
future subjunctive [aorist optative], 678.
formation of, 771 ff.
endings of, 810, 910.
for fut. indic., App. iv. 8.
future imperative [aorist imprt.], 678.
endings of, 910; in passive, 761.
future optative, 677, 1767 b, 1927,
1935 f.
use of, 1923 ff., 1935 f., 1941; in
G-B, 1936, 1953".
misuse of, 1953"-
future participle with verbs of motion,
2157.
repl. by infin., App. vi. 17 b; see par-
ticiple.
futurum exactum, 689.
G (Greco-Roman period or diction,
B.C. 150-300 A.D.), p. xiv, 03 B,
OIO ff., et passim.
g-sound in Greek, 9, 24, 57 fi.
9
for Y in South Italian N, 24º.
Gab (Gabriel), 1040 [1].
Gaius, Káïos, 59 c.
Gaul Romanized, 022 [2].
gemination in Greek, 92, 179 [1]; in
N, 179 [1], 905.
gender, 227; et passim.
threefold, 227; in N, ib.
determined by sense, 240; by end-
ings, 240, 246 fr.
masculine, 227, 241.
feminine, 227, 242.
neuter, 227, 243.
common, 244.
epicoene, 244 f.
of adjectives, 4.6.
confounded, 245, 249", 292.
generic use of article, 1199, 1201 f.
genitival dativo, 1242 ff., 1247, 1350 ff.
genitive, 231; survives in N, 232,
1247.
accent of, 259-
genitive, use of, 1288–1346.
force of, 1286; in N, 1287.
proper, 1286, 1288-1315; objective,
1290-1301; qualitative, 1302-6;
partitive, 1207-15; with quanti-
tative adjectives (& λοιπός τοῦ
χρόνου), 1308.
genitive, ablatival, 1316-46; of separa-
tion, 1316-27; of comparison,
1328 ff.; of cause, 1332-7; of price,
1338 ff.; of time, 1341 ff.; in com-
pound verbs, 1346 f.
attributive, 1238.
of material, 1330 f.
of price, 1338 ff.; repl. by accus.,
1340.
for subject nominative, 1313.
after comparatives, 1187 f.
of design, 1337, 2077, app. vi.
with names of saints, 1229, 1276,
1345.
elliptical after ev, eis, èk, 1289 f.;
indicates a Saint's day, 1229, 1276,
1345-
preceded by redundant #apá, 1629.
after prepositions: after åvrí, 1495,
1501 f.; àπó, 1494, 1503-19; è§,
1494, 1566-71; diá, 1494, 1524-
35°; κατά, 1592-7; μετά, 1494,
1604-7; vnép, 1494, 1677-85;
ἀμφί, 1494, 14952; εἰς, 1553; ἐν,
1565; meрí, 1642; πpó, 1643-52 ;
πρός, 1661-4; σύν, 167ο; ὑπέρ,
1677-86; ÜTÚ, 1694–6.
retreat of, 1242 fl.
misused in N, 1247.
datival, 1247.
for personal dative, 1247, 1351 f.
genitive absolute, 2141 ff.; compared
to ablative absolute, 2142.
repl. by accus. absol., 2143.
in P-B, 2145.
genilirus absolulus, 2141 ff.; see geni-
tive absolute.
gentile nouns, 1030 f.
adjectives, 1075-82.
Georgios Pisides, his verse artificial, App.
ii. 4.
German phonetically transcribed, 032.
gh-sound in Greek, 9, 24, 57 ff.
gimel, γάμμα, 2.
Giovannicio, 'Iwavvínios, 1040 ɑ.
'give a blow,' to, 1593.
giving, verbs of, 1353 f., 2094 fl.
Glaucos of Samos on accents, App. i. 1.
Glycâs, style of, 024, App. iii. 9.
gnomic aorist, 1852.
future, 1884.
perfect, 1867.
'going,' verbs of, 2095.
good & easy,' how exprossed, 1123.
goph, κύππα, 2, ΙΙ.
Gorgias on grammar, App. ii. 12 [1].
Gortyn inscription, 48-
b
Gothic & Greek verb, 32º, [3].
Goths in Greece, 022 & [1].
grabatarius, κραβάτριος, 59 0.
712
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
grammar, defined, 25".
modern, 25b; N, 022, 031.
ancient, 25, 25°, App. ii. 12 & [1];
its scope, 25°; how far preserved in
N, 022, 031.
in A, App. ii. 12 & [1], 13 [1].
A preserved in N, 022.
grammarians, ancient, 25 f.
requisites of, 25".
mere commentators, 25.
on pronunciation, 25.
grammatica, defined, 25"; see grammar.
grammatical function and sound, 25°;
and script, 25°.
grammatical
principles, 112-122;
association,
analogy, 113 H.;
117 ff.; dissociation, 121 f.; see
also phonetic principles.
grave accent, 702; see also accent(s).
mark of, 702.
origin of, 76.
nature of, 76.
value of, 77 f.
use of, 82b f.
symbolizes continuation, 82 it.
on every unaccented syllable, 76¹
& [3].
omission of, 76.
retention of, 76b; symbolizes con-
tinuation, 82 ff.
in enclisis, 104.
ΟΙΟ.
Greco-Roman period, p. xiv, 03 B, 010.
Greek language, its history, 01-033;
its changes and losses, App. ii. 9 ;
its peculiarities, passim.
Greek and Latin churches, 023, 025.
Gregory Nazianzenos, his verse arti-
ficial, App. ii. 4.
guarding, verbs of, 1822.
Gus (Augustus), 1040 [1].
guttural consonants (y « X) 22.
dropped, 155º f, 179.
+μ=Y, 177; in N, 179.
+σ = έ, 180.
guttural sonants, 144.
stronger than palatals, 145.
H (Hellenistic Greek, 300-150 B. U.),
p. xiv, 03 B, 08 f., et passim.
H=h, 2, 12.
forms of, 3, 5 [2], 12, 72 & [1].
not a letter, 72.
a Phoenician relic, 3, 72; retained
as cipher, ib. 6163.
no name for it in 1, 72.
as 2nd constituent of x 0, 12, 170 l.
II for spiritus asper, 72 ff.; see spiritus
asper.
Habe, τὸ ἔχει, App. vi. 27.
habeo + pl. part. for pf. iudic., 2139.
habeo + infin. for fut. indic., App. iv. 6.
'half' and 'middle,' 1128.
hand used in beating time, 89 b.
hard sonants, 144.
'have something done for me,' 1460.
he, ἦτα, 2.
'hearing,' verbs of, with part., 2133 f.;
with or for part., App. vi. 13 f.
Hebraisms: év for instrum. dat. ('with'),
1381, 1562; (cp. also els 1551);
εἰς ἀξίνας κύπτειν, 1551; πρὸς
γυναῖκα ἔχειν, 166ο; γυνὴ ἧς
αὐτῆς, 1439; ἔσονται εἰς σάρκα μίαν,
1552 f.; où... πᾶς, 1823 0.
heed, verbs denoting, 2087 ff.
Hellen ("Eλλny), legend of, o1.
as national name repl. by Romaios,
016.
Hellenistic period, p. xiv, 03 B, 08 f.
school, o13.
'help' (to), constr., 1355 f.
Heraclia, ancient dialect of, o3 a.
Hermocrates, on accents, App i. 2.
Hermogenes, on pronunciation, 25 [1] d.
Herodotos, language of, 05", 1703; et
passim.
Hesiod, App. ii. 11; et passim.
on λιμός & λοιμός, 47.
hiatus, 124.
in Polybios, 1771 b.
hiding, verbs of, 1279 ff.
Himerios, style of, 013.
hindering, verbs of, 1822, 2087 fl.
historians, language of ancient, 05; et
passim.
historic present, 1835 f.
historical tenses, 692; see secondary
tenses.
historical spelling, 032, 25ª f.
hitting, verbs of, 1300 f.
Homer, his language, 30, 1730, app. ii.
9, II, et passim; artificial, 05".
his influence on A-P, 05b, app. ii. 6,
9, II.
and Peisistratos, App. ii. 11.
Homeric Greek, artificial, 05.
its influence on A-I', 05", App. ii. 9 ff.
Homeric question, App. ii. 8 ff.
Homeric rhythm and accentuation, 85ª.
Homeric sonantism, 30, App. ii. 7, 9.
Homeric phonology, 30, App. ii. 7, 11.
Homeric text normalized, App, ii. 11.
Homeric verse, its origin & history,
App. ii. 4 & [1], 7 ff., 11 ff.; its in-
fluence on A-P' verse, 05", App. ii.
6, 9, 11.
Homerists, App. ii. 6, 9.
homoeopathy, 90 [1].
hoping, verbs of, with infin., 2073,
2086 f., App. vi. 3.
713
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
hortative subjunctive, 1912 ff.
<
- particles, 1913 ff.; in B-N, 1915 ff.
'house,' understood, 1289 f.
how far'? expr. by accus., 1275.
how long? expr. by accus., 1275.
how many times'? 648.
how many times as much'? 655.
how old?' expr. by yeyovás, 1277.
hundreds,' declined as adj., 638 f.;
how marked in A, 617.
hyphaeresis, 138, 148 f., 157, App. ii. 9,
14.
hypodese (vmódere, imprt.), 813.
hypotaxis repl. by parataxis, 2154.
hysterogeneous diphthongs, 29 f.; see
diphthongs.
I (Latin) as consonant j, 17, 19".
i-sound, primitive & N, 16º, 35, 144;
variously expressed in N, 24.
its relative power, 146.
weakest in the scale, 146.
overpowered by every sonant, 136,
146 ff.
i-sound + sonant palatalized to į or y (y),
155 a; gutturalized to y (jh),
155, 155.
i for ai, 560.
i before becomes e in N, 40, 186.
i + ¿=¿, 146, 148 f.
i (yod), 9, 24, 58 f., 123, 209, 211 ff.;
symbol of, 11.
from provocalic i or e, 37, 155 a.
after palatals, 211.
after dentals, 212; after d (y), 214.
after liquids (A, v, p), 214.
assimilated with autectasis, 215.
-i-intersonantic, 217; in verbs, 860, 863.
-i- anaptyctic, 155 a, 155", 562.
- (acconted) in augment, 720.
- (final) frequent in nom. fem., 338;
in the article, 561.
j, see i.
j (Latin), as consonant, 17º.
-ia in A paroxytone, in N oxytone,
155 C, 271.
id for cia, 151; for diá, 155 a.
καλί, ύαλος, 151.
ianbus, prevalent verse in A, 18b.
πατρός, 151.
-ic (in English) from -uch, 1059.
Icaros, present dialect of, 029; pre-
serves -as in accus. pl., 333, 561;
fem. in os, 292°; βάλλω, σφάλλω,
905; masc. in -és, 273; fond of
hnal -ν (στόμαν), 221.
Lico, Lucos, 1077.
-ics (in English), 1069.
ictus, 85 ff., App. ii. 3 a; pulse of
rhythm, 85".
}
ictus, indicated by the acute, App. ii. 8.
nature of, 85 f.; identical with
accent, 85b ff.; differs only in ap-
plication, 85, 85d.
its influence on quantity, 29 f., 85°,
88h f., App. i. 16b.
Licus, Lucos, 1077.
idem, & avrós, 1420.
in N (8 dios), 613.
dolatry & mythology in G-N, 016.
-ie, i. e. -ete, 861.
-ELE,
Jews Hellenizing, 013.
If-clause, 1964, 1967.
il Romanic (, Tb, †), 236.
il quale (ὁ ποῖος or ὁ ὁποῖος), 612.
illative clauses, see consecutive clauses.
inparisyllabic declension, 255.
impediment, verbs denoting, 1316 f.
imperative (mood), 676.
endings of, 806-14; in P-N, 812 ff.
use of, 1926 ff., App. v. 1–5, 17.
in prohibitions, 1927 f.
repl. by primary subj., 1919, 1928,
App. v. 16.
for cond. protasis, 1977 b.
for cond. participle, 2154.
commoner in N than in A, 19286.
imperfect (tense), 682; in N, 688.
endings of, 760, 780 ff.
use of, 1847 ff.
of attempted action, 1848.
for present, 1849, 1901, 1907 a.
for plpf., 1850, 1869.
periphrastic, 1848.
imperfect subjunctive [optative], 802.
impersonal expressions as accus. absol.,
2143; in P-B, 2145.
impersonal verbs, constr. of, 2081 ff.,
App. vi. 12 c, 16.
turned to personal, 2083 f.
in potential indicative, 1901.
in-, ȧ-, åv- (negative), 1129
-in (- or -vv), accus. sing. in, 330,
358, 387 ff.
in N, 343, App. iii. 14.
inception, vorb endings denoting, 868 ff.,
1096, 1097 ff.
tenses denoting, 868 ff., 1853 H.
inceptive prosent, 868-71, 1854.
inceptive aorist, 1853 f.
inceptive verbs, 868 ft., 1096 ff.
inchoative, see inceptive.
indefinite article, 622-4; see article.
indefinite pronouns, 568 ff., 594–602.
use of, 1448-53.
-
India, Grecks in, App. i. 11 [3].
Indian (old) accent, 84, App. i. 11
[3]; augment, 714b; see also
Sanskrit.
verse, app. ii. 3 a; see also Sanskrit.
714
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
1. indicative, 676; in N, 679.
Sup
formation of, 760-801.
attracts subjunctive, 779.
2. indicative (indep.), use of, 1900-8;
negatived by où (ovdév), 1803,
1900.
potential, 1901; with av, 1907 f.;
in G-B, App. iv. 5; see poten-
tial indicative.
after ὀλίγου or μικροῦ (ἐδέησα),
1902.
after elle, el yáp, ús, 1904; after
ὤφε(ι)λον, 1905 f. ; after @s, νά,
1906, 1908; after á, 1908.
indirect discourse, 2027-32.
threefold, 2029.
expr. by declar. clause, 2029 a; by
infin., 2029 b; by part., 2029 c.
- passes to direct discourse, 2031.
Indo-Iranian, see Arian.
inferiority, gen. of, 1328 f.
verbs denoting, 2132 f.
infinite moods, 680.
1. infinitive, 680 f., app. vi.
a verbal noun, 680.
endings of, 815; in N, 819.
2. infinitive, gencral use of, 2c62-99,
App. vi.
negatived by où, 1814; by µń,
1814 ff., 1822.
histor. survey of, 2062 f., 2072,
App. vi.
function of, 2062 f., 2071 f., App.
vi. I.
disadvantages of, app. vi. 2, 25.
subject & predicate of, 2064-70.
in A, 2062-99, App. vi. 7-9, 20.
in H-G, 2062 f., 2071 f., 2078 f.,
App. vi. 10 ff., 21 ff.
in post-Christian times, App. vi.
II-19.
in T-B, App. vi. 24 ff.
in M-N, App. vi. 18 f., 23h, 25 fl.
3. infinitive, special uses of, 2071-99,
App. vi.
a. infinitive substantival or articular,
1221 f., 1241b, 2062, 2071-7, 4pp.
vi. 1, 20-7.
force of, app. vi. 20, 25.
- historical survey of, 2072, APP.
vi. 20.
dates since Theognis, 2072, app.
vi. 20.
a regular subst., 2062.
stands in any case of sing., 2075 f.
its tenses, 2073 C.
with prepositions, 2074, 2075",
App. vi. 20 ft.
after ἐλπίς, ὑπόσχεσις, etc., 2073,
2086b f.
infinitive in a loose constr. (Toû), to
denote purpose, 2076 f., app. vi.
23 ff.
in
its frequency in A, app. vi. 20
& [1]; in H-G, ib. 21 ff.;
T-B, ib. 24 fl. ; in N, ib. 25 ff.
for participle, 2068, 2075º, 2149.
retreats, 2072, App. vi. 25 ff.
repl. by subst. in -µa, -ɩov, -σis, etc.,
2063, 2072, App. vi. 25 ; by (Tà)
νά, ὅτι, πῶς, 2072, App. vi. 25.
in N, App. vi. 23b, 25 H. (τd paycî,
Tò exe, etc., ib. 26 f.).
b. infinitive, verbal or anarthrous,
2062, 2078-99, App. vi. 1, 2-19.
histor. survey of, 2078 f., App. vi.
resolved into finite verb, 2078 f.,
App. vi 8, 12, 15 ff.; when by
ira, 2089; when by őrt, 2089.
alternates with its analysis, app.
vi. 6 b.
declarative, 2078 f., App. vi. 3,
7-14; repl. by örɩ or us, 2086 f.,
App. vi. 7, 13 f.; by διότι, ὡσότι,
πŵs, App. vi. 12, 13 f.; alternates
πῶς,
with its analysis, App. vi. 6, 7,
10, 12 retreats, App. vi. 10 ff.;
in M-N, App. vi. 18 f.
prospective or final, 2078 f.,
2094 ft., app. vi. 4, 15 ff.; introd.
by wore, App. vi. 8, 10, 15; by
els tú, app. vi. 10, 15, 22; repl.
by öпws (äv), ws, iva, 2082, App.
vi. 8, 12, 15 ff.; by vá, App. vi. 16.
as subject, 2081-4; with imper-
sonal verbs, 2081 ff., App. vi. 12 c;
with passive verbs of saying &
thinking, 2083 f.
as object, 2085-90; declarative
with active verbs of saying &
thinking, 2085 ff. (in the fut.
2086 f.); with verbs of will,
2087 ff.
as indirect object, 2094-7.
as complement, 2090-3.
in a loose or absolute constr.,
2098 f.
in pf. for aor. or pres., 2082b.
in future tense, 2086 f.
retreats before its analysis, 2063,
App. vi. 7, 10 fl., 12, 13 f.
in Polybios, app. vi. 12 B [2]; in
NT, ib. 12 c.
misapplied, 2159, 2068, 2075",
2149, app. vi. 17; for fut. part.,
2158, App. vi. 17 b; for part.
of 3rd decl., App. iii. 13; for
interrog. subjunctive, ib. c.
infix, 127, 131; in verb, 709, 756 f.
in verbs, 709, 756 fr., 928, 938.
715
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
infixal -vu- or -vvv-, 928, 938; short,
941b; long, ib.
inflection, 225-996; preserved by
trisyllabotony, 81, App. i. 9.
tends to simplification, 264 ff.
reduced in N, 030.
-ing corresponds to -ovтa(s), 2146.
iva in fut. & pres., 899, 900.
& -αίνω, 900.
' in order to,' 2094 ff.
inscriptions as test of pronunciation, 25.
- phonology of, App. ii. 7.
language of, 25d, app. ii. 7, 14.
inseparable particles, 1124-36.
instrument, endings donoting, 1025 ff.,
1034 f.
dative of, 1379 ff.; see also means.
intensive ȧ-, 1131 f.
intensive verbs, 868, 869 ff., 1095 f.,
1097 ff.
intention, verbs denoting, 2087 ff.
inter & ev, 1312.
intoraspiration, 72 & [4].
interest, dative of, 1361 f.
interjection &, etc., 251, 1252.
repl. by al, e, μwpé, etc., 251, 1253 f.
omitted, 1253 ff.
interjections, constr. of, 1334 f.
intermixture, 116; sce contamination.
interrogation, sign of, 70, 80.
interrogative pronouns, 586 M.
use of, 1446 f.
preceded by article, 1217 f.
interrogative particles, 1747-50.
interrogative subjunctive, 1909 fr.
repl. by infin., App. vi. 17 c.
interrogative clauses, 2033-61; how
answered, 2056-61; position of
words in, 2034; moods in, 2037,
2039 f.
direct, 2035, 2037, 2046-55; spread
in P-N, 2036; introd. by rela-
tives, 2038.
indirect or dependent, 2035, 2037 ff.;
restricted in P, 2036; introd. by
relatives, 2037-
introd. by pronouns, adverbs, or ei
(av), 2033 a; by particles, 2033 b,
2046 ff.
for cond. protases, 1977 a.
intransitivo verbs used as trans., 1263,
145 ff.; have passive voico, 1458,
1462.
-iw verbs in, contract in G-N, 702.
jod, seo yod & i.
John avoids use of infin., App. vi. 12 c.
fond of iva, App. vi. 12 c, 23".
Ion, reputed father of Ionic, oI.
Ionian Nλ & v sounds as t & ñ, 187º.
resists synizesis (-ía, -éa), 155ª.
Ionian N uses ékeιós for èkeîvos, 571.
Jonians, metric system of, App. ii. 10.
Ionic dialects, 02 f.; do not contract
in 2nd decl., 316.
Ionic influence on A-P, 04, 287b (316,
327), 637, etc.
Ionic phonology, App. ii. 10.
Jonic script, App. ii. 12 [2].
-ios (in nouns) shortened to -is, 298.
Josephos, style of, 013.
iota paragogicum, 574.
iotacists, 24.
-ir- becomes -er- in N, 40, 186.
Iranian verse, App. ii. 3 a.
τη
-is (-is, -Us, -[7]ns), in fem., 248; in-
fluences P-N inflection, ib.
-is (-ns, etc.) for -ios (¿), 298.
-is (Latin) & Greek -is or -ns, 301.
identified with -ns, 301.
I say! 2516.
'islands,' gender of, 242; in N, 245-
Isocrates, style of, 05; et passim.
ita, hrα, 24 [1].
itacists, 24.
Italian accent, 77b, App. i. 17.
Italian influence on N, 022, 031;
κλάφσω for ψω, 180° ; τέλω for
Oéλw, 184º; -éa & -ía for -eá & -iá,
271; meglio, µáλλíos, 506; più,
522; τί λογῆς, 591; ὁ ποιός, il
quale, 612; (δυδ οι τρεις φορές, 653);
E-, 755; -OVтa(s), 822 f., 2146;
dono, Swvw, 853; -ullo, 1059;
δώνω,
l'un l'altro, 1413; cosa m'importa
a me? 1401; per che, 1523.
Italian N, see South Italian N.
Italo-Venetian influence on N, 032; see
Italian influence.
iterative verbs, 868, 869 ff.
ithikòs (ỷouŵs), 24.
Iuncus, 'Ioûvyos, 59 c.
-ius, -is, 298, 1040.
iv (Latin) in Greek 1ov or 1ß, 52.
lapl, κάππα, 2.
kh-sound in Greek, 9, 24, 56 ff.
knowing, verbs of, 2035 f.
koppa, 3, 11, 6162, 617.
its place in the alphabet, 3, 6162.
as cipher, 11, 6122.
labial consonants, 22.
+ dental, 172.
+μ =μ, 177.
+0=4, 180.
Laconia, ancient dialect of, 03 a;
present, 029; see also Tsaconic.
lal, a, πωλος, 1o4t [1].
Lakkoi (in western Crete), dialect of,
187°; see under Crete.
I
716
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
lamed, λά(μ)βδα, 2.
lamina, λάμνα, 136.
language (Greek), age and extent of,
028b.
'late,' 1514.
Latin and Greek churches, 023, 025.
Latin accent, 84, App. i. 11 [2], 19.
alphabet, 5, 43.
verse, why quantitative, App. ii. 3 c,
ვს, 5.
Latin influence on Greek, 011, 023;
plus, πλέον, 51ο f.; ἔχω γράψῃ,
onkwon, App. iv. 17;
σηκωθῇ,
Latinisms.
see also
Latin verb as emprd. with Greek, 32° [3].
Latinisms in Greek, o11, 022 f.; έe-
for ex- (dis-), 755; -ulus, 1059;
dat. for ablat., 1394; idem, &
αὐτός, 1420; ὅστις or ὃς for ὁ
δέ οι οὗτος δέ, 1437; πρὶν like
anle, 1649 b;
; mрd like ante,
1649 b, 1651 f.; like pro, 1650;
πρός τινα, αγκd aliquem, 1658 c;
prolepsis of prepositions, 1513,
1603, 1650 f.; and for ab, 1507 ff.;
for ex, 1514; oùv for cum, 1175";
τὸν ἐκ τῶν φίλων, ὁ ἐξ ὑπάτων,
1569 ; ἀπό = 'upiece, 1515 ; πριγιου,
πрíxοû, 1789; dat. absolute, 2144b;
Ὑπάτιος σὺν τῷ Τιμοθέῳ ἐπέτειναν,
1175"; exw+pf. part., 2139; ëxw
+ infin. fut., App. iv. 6; subjunct.
for imprt. (ἔκβλητος γένηται), Αpp.
v. 16; see also Latin influence.
Latino-Venetian influence, 35°; see
Latin & Italian influence.
Lautalfull (ảñopwvía), 166 [1].
Lautgesetz, a misleading term, 90 [1].
le, Romanic, 236.
I
'leaves' used for paper, 07.
leaving, verbs of, 2094 ff.
length, mark of prosodic, 17, 29, 70,
88 ff., App. ii. 8 fr., 16.
natural, 86, App. ii. 5b, 7, 9 ff.,
15.
by position, 862, App. ii. 5, 7, 9 ff., 15.
lengthening, compensatory, see antec-
tasis.
Lentulus, AirTλOS, 1361.
Leo Sapiens, his verse artificial, App. ii.
I 4.
Leontios of Neapolis, style of, 021; et
passim.
lequel (δ ποιος or ὁ ὁποῖος), 612.
Leros, its N dialect preserves тás, 561;
-(σ)ουσι”, 777.
Lesbos, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
'less,' minus, Taρá, 1613 A.
·less (= un-, in-), d-, ár-, 1129 f.
'let,' in exhortations, 1912 ft.
letters, Phoenician, 1-4.
letters (Greek), number of, 9; in N,
9b; see also alphabet.
names of, 1, 9. 9b f.; in N, 9ª;
gender of, 9, 9ª, 243; in N, 9ª.
origin of, 1-4, II.
table of, 2, 9.
aboriginal or pre-Phoenician, I, II.
form of, 2, 9; varying, 5 [2].
classified, 16.
extinct, II.
Levantine Greek: ancient, O13; modern,
029, 187b.
Libanios, style of, 013; et passim.
'like' (i. e. similar), constr., 1371 ff.
liquid consonants (λ µ v p), 22 ; doubled,
215.
pronunciation of, 9, 64; of p, 65 H.
+σ, 123, 337 c.
& nasals, 185-203b.
liquid verbs, 889-906.
in fut. & aor., 892-8; in N, 997 ff.
literary style, 05 f., 07; et passim.
literature (Greek), monuments of A, 05 ;
of N, 020 f.
age and extent of, 028".
Lithuanian verse, App. ii. 19.
litteratura, γραμματική, 255.
little,' a, 7, 1385.
lo (¿, Tó, †), Romanic, 236.
locative dative, 1390-95;
1390-95; of place,
1390; of time, 1391 ff.
Locris, ancient dialect of, 03 A; uses
στ fur σθ, 177
long' syllables, 86 ff.; see long vowels.
'long' vowels, 17 f., 28 H., 86, 89.
'by nature,' 17, 28 a fl., 86 ff.
by position,' 86 ft., App. ii. 5.
Lord's prayer, its influence on N, 533
& [1].
Lucian, style of, 013; et passim.
Luke, style of, 1934; et passim.
l'un l'altro, 1413.
Lycophron, his verse artificial, App. ii. 4.
lyric parts of drama, their prosody, app.
i. 24.
Lysins, style of, 05; et passim.
M (=mediaeval period or diction
A.D. 1000-1450), p. xiv, 03 B, 024 f.;
et passim.
ma, µá (‘but'), from magis, 19824.
macaronisms (solecismus), 1320, 1325,
1666", 1764 f., 2149", etc.
Macedonia, present dialect of, 029 ff.;
4μασταν, δο1; -σκω, Ιουδ.
magis, parent of ma, µá, 1982.
Maina, present dialect of, 155ª, 271.
majuscule form of script, 9.
'making,' verb endings denoting, 1089 f.
- verbs denoting a, 1284 f.
717
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
៩
Malalas, style of, 021; et passim.
males,' gender of, 241; in N, 245.
man,' omitted in Greek, 1182 a.
Manetho, his verse artificial, app. ii. 4.
manner, expr. by adverbs, 516–24; by
gen., 1343; by dat., 13816, 1382 f.;
by μerd + gen., 1605 a; by par-
ticiple, 1183 f., 2160 ff.
mannerisms, 122.
marks, reading, 70 f., App. ii. 16.
prosodic, 17, 29 f., App. ii. 9-16.
masculine gender, 227; determined by
sense, 241; by endings, 247 ff.,
App. iii. 11 a.
material, adj. of, 1060-3.
gen, of, 1330 f.
Mat (Matthew), 1040 [1].
Maurice (Emperor), satire against, 020.
Maximos Planudes, his verse artificial,
App. ii. 4.
may' (might, can'), 1925.
mcans,' endings of, 1025 ff.
expr. by dat., 1379 ff., 1532; by
dia + gen., 1531 T.; by ev, 1532,
1559 f.; by eis, 1551; by §,
1568 c; by oúv, 1532, 1669 f.; by
μcrd + gen. 1532, 1605 f.; by μé,
1532, 1608; by participle, 2160 ff.;
see also instrument.
ineasure' expr. without article, 1233;
with art., 1233".
accus. of, 1305.
gen. of, 1302 fr.
measure, noús, pes, 85".
mediae (y 8 B), 22.
δ
pronunciation of, 9, 24, 54f., 57–63.
mediaeval period ( 1000-1450 A.D.),
p. xiv, 03 B, 024 f.; et passim.
medio-passive voice of verb, 674, 672,
etc., passim.
in neuter or reciprocal verbs, 1459.
meeting, expressions of, 1371 ff.
Megara, present dialect of, 092.
Megaris, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
meglio, μάλλιος, 506.
Melos, ancient dialect of, 03 Aa.
mem, µû, 2.
'membership,' ondings denoting, 1032.
Menandros, his verse artificial, App.
ii. 4.
Messenia, ancient dialect of, 03 A; uses
07 for 00, 177.
metaphony (μerapwvía), 166 [1], 166b
fl.; defined, 166 £.
qualitative, 167.
quantitative, 168 f.
as metathesis, 168.
metaplasmus, 43318.
inetaplastic adjectives, 479–82.
metathesis, 142, 143.
metathesis, of quantity, 168b; an empty
term, App. ii. 8, 14.
metre in Greek, artificial, App. ii. 4 ff.
independent from sense, App. ii. 5.
metrical beat, 85 b.
metrical position, 4, 89, App. ii. 5'; see
also position.
before liquids, 64, 66.
metricians (= musicians, rhythmicians),
App. ii. 8 & [7].
'middle' & ' half,' 1128.
middle consonants, 22; see mediae.
middle ages, their effect on Greek, 022.
1. middle voice, 669 ff.; in N, 671; in
P-N, 1472.
form of, 672 ff.
repl. by active + refl. pron., 1468,
1478.
- fut., 672; in N, 674, 770b; in
P-N, 1478-86; its history,
1478-88.
aor., 672; in P-N, 675, 1478–88.
2. middle voice, use of, 1466-86.
direct, 1467 ff.; uncommon in A,
1468; repl. by active + accus.,
ib.; spreads in P-N, 1469; in
N commonest, 1469.
- indirect, 1470 ff.; prevails in A,
1468, 1470; retreats in P-N,
1469, 1478; misapplied, 1481 f.;
extinct in N, 1472, 1478 ft.
dynamic; see indirect.
as causative, 1473 f.
'might,' 1925, 1967, 1978; how expr.
in G-B, App. iv. 5, 7.
expr. by eixov +infin., App. iv. 7;
by và + imprf. or aor., App. iv. 3.
military body,' dat. indicating a, 1374.
'mindful of,' expr. by gen., 1294.
'minus,' expr. by wapá, 644, 1619 ff.
minuscule form of script, 9.
miss-, Germau prefix, 166 [1].
missing, verbs of, 1300 f.
misslaut (ἀποφωνία), 166 [1].
misspellings, tests of pronunciation, 25,
26 f.
mixing, expr. of, 1371 ff.
modal vowel, 759.
modality, mood of, app. v. 7.
modern Greek, see N.
modern Greek pronunciation, 9, 24-69.
Moeris, an Atticist, 013; et passim.
monophthongization of diphthongs,
30-32"; see diphthongs.
monosyllabic stems in 3rd decl., how
accented, 350, 352.
monosyllabic stems in verb, 834, 835 &
[1]; in P-N, 835 & [1].
'monthis,' gendor of, 241; in N, 245.
mood, assimilation of, 1954, 2025.
718
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
1. moods, 670 ff.; in N, 679.
name & meaning of, App. v. 1 ff.
grouped, App. v. I; assertive, ib. 1;
prospective, ib.
2. moods in indep. clauses, 1900-28b
indic., 1900-8; primary subj.,
1909-22; 2ndary subj. [opt.],
1923-25d; imprt., 1926-85.
in depend. clauses, 1929-2061;
declarative, 1938-44; causal,
1945-8; consecutive, 1949-51;
final, 1952-63; condit., 1964–
92; concess., 1993 f.; temporal,
1995-2009; relat., 2010-32;
interrog., 2033-61.
after a secondary tense, 1931 ff.
sequence of, 1934, App. v. 7.
mora, xpóvos, app. ii. 8 [2].
'moreover,' kаi, 1718.
morphology, 225-1006.
(
I. Moschos, his verse artificial, App. ii. 4.
2. Moschos (Ioannes), style of, 021; et
passim.
'
most.
•
-TATOS, 1191.
'motion,' verbs of, 1004, 2095 S., 2157.
movable consonants, v, σ (k), 220 ff.
movable v, 220 ff., app. iii. 16–21.
misused, 639, App. ii. 17 ff.
in N, 220 H., App. iii. 20 ff.
multiplicatives, 653-7; in -#λoûì, 653;
in -πλος, 654 ; in -πλάσιος, 655-7;
in -πλασίων, 656.
Musaios, his verse artificial, app. ii. 4.
music and poetry in 4, App. i. 24.
musical notes, invention of, 28 a.
musical accent, App. i. 8 ff.; see pitch-
accent.
musicians' (= metricians, rhythmi-
cians), App. ii. S.
mute consonants, 23b.
mule verbs, 865-888.
my,' 554; my own,' 553, 554; 'my
very own,' 557-
mythology identified with idolatry, 016.
N (= Modern Greek or Neohellenic
period or speech, from 1000 to pre-
sent time) p. xiv, 03 B, 019 tf.,
passim.
origin of, 012.
first appearance of, 012.
age and extent of, 028.
periods of, 03 A, 019 ff., 021-033; et
passim.
dialects of, 029 f.; grouped, ib.;
relative value of, 032.
compared with A style, 022.
free from Slav elements, 022 & [1].
under Turkish rule, 027.
verse, App. ii, 18 f.
n, v, 91.
nasal consonants, 22.
liquids, 185-200; cp. also liquids.
Naxos before e, i =
É, 56ს.
-ndus -TÉOS, 1050b.
=
K
Ζιμος, 1054.
-ne (Latin) in questions, 2046.
near,' constr., 1357 f.
necessity, adj. of, 1050bf.
need, verbs expressing, 1318 f.
negative particles (ού, μή, δέν), 1796-
1828.
morphology of, 1797 ff.
use of, 1801-28; idiomatic, 1822-8.
combined, 1824 ff.
Nell (Helen, Eleanor), 1040 [1].
Neo-grecists, 032; errors of, ib.
Neohellenic; see N.
neuropathy, 90 [1].
neuter gender, 227;
in N, 245;
determined by sense, 243; by
endings, 247 ff.
neuter adj. used as adv., 518 ff., 522,
1184 f., 1185, 1266 f.
neuter pl. with verb in sing., 1169 ff.
neuter verbs forming passive voice,
1458 f.
as mediopassive, 1459.
New Rome, o15.
New Testament, style of, 013, 017, 021;
et passim.
newt, 130 [1].
nickname, 130 [1].
nicknames, 1040; in -âs, 287; as aug-
mentatives, 1042 ff.
nine, how added to tens, 642.
no,' how expressed, 2057 It
no sooner than,' 1714, 2115, 2117.
nominative, 231.
accent of, 260.
same as voc. in 3d decl., 349.
nominative, use of, 1248 t
used as voc., 1250.
repl. by gen. or by prep., 1313.
absolute, 2144, 2145 (cp. 2149º).
non-Attic Greek, 09.
non-contraction, 30, 158.
- in Homer, 30.
non-Ionic dialocts, o2 f.
nonne, où, âp' où, 2046.
Nonnos, his verse artificial, app. ii. 4.
northern Grecce, ancient dialects of,
03 A; modern, 029 f.
northern N, 029 f.
character of, 030.
inflection in, 030.
its peculiarities : 'ρέ, 136,; ἀπαυτός,
251", 549; in conjugation, So1º;
-aw for -éw, 854: -λw & -λiw assi-
milated, 859º; -dyw for -áw, S63.
719
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
no sooner than,' 1714, 2115, 2117.
not at all,' ovdév, 1385.
notion, verbs of, 2133-6.
nought, 630.
noun,' meaning of, 225, 1106.
nouns, verbal, 680 f.
NT, see New Testament.
num, âpa, µŋ, µâv, 2046.
numbers: three in (early) A, 228, 667;
two in P-N, 230, 633, 668.
concord of, 229, 1168–80.
numeral adverbs, 648-52; in N, 651 f.
numeral substantives, 258; in N, 661.
in -ás, -áôos, 658.
in -ús, -úos, 660.
numerals, 616–66.
cardinal, 620-45.
ordinal, 646 ff.
other, 653-66.
compound, 640 ff.
nun, vû, 2.
O, o, a primitive & N sound, 16º, 35", 144.
originally = o, w, ov, 6, 12.
its relative power, 146.
o + e 0, 146, 152.
0+i + 0, 146, 152.
0 +0
0, 146, 148.
O + U 0, 146, 152.
ö in Pontic Greek, 24º.
'
ob, whether,' el, 2051.
'obey' (to), constr., 1355 f.
object, accus. of direct, 1257-
objective gen., 1290 ff.
oblique cases, 231.
oe (Latin), origin of, 19" [1].
of,' expr. by gen,, 1286.
ogdointa (¿ydoñvta), 639.
oi (Latin) & Greck o, 19" & [1], 53.
Old Testament (Greek); see Septuagint.
' one,' how subtracted from tens, 642.
Onomacritos and Homer, App. ii. 11.
Oppianos, his verse artificial, App. ii. 4.
optativo, 677; see subjunctive, secon-
dary.
origin of torın, 677, 1924, App. v. 10".
represents past subj., App. v. 3, 10.
as the mood of wish, App. v. 10, 12.
of future, 677; see future optative.
'or', 1725, 1726"; in questions,
2046, 2052.
oralio obliqua, 2027-32, 2086; seo
indirect discourse.
oratio recta, 2027, 2086; see direct
discourse.
orators, style of, 05; et passim.
use of dual by, 668.
ordering, terms of, 1353 f., 2031.
ordinal numbers, 646 fľ.; in N, 647.
Orpheus of Croton, App. ii. 11.
oriental influence on Greek, 09.
orthography; see spelling.
- Attic, App. ii. 11 f., 14.
etymological, 032, 25d f.
- historical, o32, 25d f.
phonetic, 032 f., 25ª.
orthotone tonoclitics, 109.
orthotonesis, 109.
4
ostensibly,' 1945.
Otranto, dialect of, 029; Tovo, diw, &c.,
155ª; vúpra, 174b; po for 4, 180º;
τέλω (θέλω), 184"; πλέο, 522; αἱ
(art.) surviving, 560; roûvo, 581;
-(o)ov (imprt.), 813[1]; -éw for-euw,
861; see also South Italian N.
ov (Latin) in Greek oov, ov, oß, 52.
ought,' 1849.
,
oxylone, 81.
P (= post-classical Greek, B.O. 300-
600 A.D.) p. xiv, 03 B, 08-013, et
passim.
Palaeologoi, classicalism under, 028.
palatal consonants; + dentals, 172.
palatal sonants, 144.
weaker than guttural sonants, 145.
Pamphylia, ancient dialects of, 03 a.
panhellenic Attic, 05, 08-30.
panhellenic Greek, 09, 013.
Panini, Indian graminarian, App. i. 11
[3].
papyri, language of, 07, 013; et passim.
as tests of pronunciation, 25, 25".
division of words in, 30.
paragogue, 127, 132 f.
analogical, 132º.
protective, 132.
epenthetic, 132".
revective, 132.
parataxis for hypotaxis, 2154.
parathesis, 1110, 1138; in G-N, 1141,
1155.
pardon (to), constr., 1355 f.
parenthesis in Greek, 70, 80.
parisyllabic declensions, 255.
Paros, present dialect of, 754.
paroxytono, 81'.
equivalent to proparoxytone, 106ª.
partaking, verbs of, 1298 f., 1310.
participium absolutum, 2141.
conjunctum, 2141.
1. participle, 680 f.
a verbal noun, 680.
character of, 820.
endings of, 820 fl.
in - μενος, 821 (.
in -OVTα(s), 822 f.
f.
iparisyllabic, App. iii. 13; re-
placed in N, ib.
agrees with its subst., 1181 f.
720
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
participle, active in P-N, 822.
medio-passive, 821.
future; see future participle.
- perfect; see perfect participle.
2. participle, use of, 2100-70; much
favoured in A, 2165.
- history of, 2164(5)-70; summed
up, 2170.
in construction, 2141.
absolute, 214-6; in N, 2146.
negatived by où, 1814; by μng,
1814 ff.
substantivized, 1241 a.
adjectival, 2100, 2106-40.
retreats, 2164-70.
repl. by infin., 2068, 2149, App.
vi. 17 b; causes of, 2164 ff., 2169;
substitutes for, 2170.
3. participle, attributive, 2100, 2103 f.
in P-N, 2170 a.
with article, 2103.
repl. by relat. clause, 2104 f.,
2110.
4. participle, predicative, 2100, 2106-
40b
subjective, 2106-32.
objective, 2133-40; in P-N,
2170 c.
- in P-N, 2170b.
5. participle, circumstantial, 2141–64;
use of, 2101, 2114"; in P-N, 2141º,
2165-70.
replaced, 2141º, 2170.
P-N history of, 2164-70.
dropped since T', 2168 f.
of time, 2141", 2147 ff.; in P-N,
2170 d.
of cause, 2141, 2150 ff.; in P-N,
2170 e.
of condition, 21.11b, 253 f., 000;
in l'-N, 2170ƒ.
concessive, 2155 f.; in P-N,
2170 g.
of purpose or final, 2141, 2157 ff.
of manner and means, 21416,
2160-4; not resolved, 2161;
repl. by adj. in -Tos, 2162; by
adv. in -ovra(s), 2163; by èv
T@ +infin., 2164, 2170i.
particles, 1487-1830.
historical survey of, 1487 ff.
very common in P-N, 1487", 1703.
conjunctions, 1700-95.
negations, 1796–1830.
in composition, 1117-36; separable,
1118-23; inseparable, 1124-36.
partitive genitive, 1307-15; with quan-
titative adjectives, 1308.
with and or eέ, 1311 f.
elliptical, 1313.
passive voice, 669.
form of, 672 ff.; admitted by trans.
& intrans. verbs, 1462 f.; by
neuter verbs, 1458 f.
passive deponents, 675; in P-N assume
active form, 675; diminished in N,
ib.
passive future, 685; see future passive.
use of, 1461-5".
avoided in popular speech, 1463.
past subjunctive, 677; see subjunctive,
secondary.
past tenses, 684, 692; see tenses,
secondary.
Pat (Patrick), 1040 [1].
pater, пáтeр, 386.
Patmos, dialect of, 720, 754.
Patriarch, head of Greeks, 026.
Patriarchae duodecim; see Testamenta.
patronymics, 1028.
Pausanias, style of, 013; et passim.
pe, πει, 2.
peculiarity,' adj. denoting a, 1068–74".
Peisistratean spelling, App. ii. 12.
Peisistratos, App. ii. 11 f.; his character,
ib.
- and Homer, App. ii. 11 & [1 f.], 12.
Peloponnesos, present dialects of, 029.
pentinta (πevrĥvta), 639.
penult(ima), Sib.
people, as subject, 1165.
per che, 1523.
เ
perception,' verbs denoting a, 2133-6.
with part., 2133 ff.
with infin., App. vi. 3.
with T, Ts, App. vi. 13 f.
peregrinus (Teλeypivos), 126.
1. perfect tense, 682; in N, 688, 2139 f
1st & 2nd, 925.
formation of, 000, 924 ff.
f.
- periphrased, 764, 2110; in N,
2139 f.
assimilated to aorist, 740.
infinitive, 816.
- participle, 690; in N, 740.
2. perfect, use of, 1862-75; stands be-
tween pres. and aor., 1863; how
rendered in Latin, 691.
for present, 1864, 1866 fr., 1670-5,
2082b.
with modal dr, 1873.
for aorist, 1861, 1870 ff., 2082Þ.
repl. by ciui+pf. part., 1864 f.;
by exw + aor. or pf. part., 1864 f.
repl. by present, 1842.
ropl. by aorist, 740, 1861.
in N, 1861.
opistolary, 1867.
empiric, 1867.
gnomic, 1867.
721
3 A
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
perfectum historicum, 691.
- praesens, 691.
Pericle duce, 2142 c.
period (full stop), 703.
periphrastic comparison, 509-15.
periphrastic tenses, 687.
'permitting,' verbs of, 2094 ff.
person endings in verb, 760-823.
normalized, 801b.
personal pronouns, 525-43-
tonoclitic, 530 ff.
abbreviated, 530 ff., 1400.
frequent in P-N, 1399 f.
use of, 528 ff., 1396–1401.
redundant, 1401.
personality, a (TIS, TI), 1450.
persons in verb, 667.
perspicuity, see clearness.
persuasion, verbs of, 2087 fr.
pes, пoús, 'foot' (in metre), 89.
pet names, 1040; in -âs, 287.
PII in Latin for P, 43.
p+h in Greek, 9, 24, 56 ff.
Phil (Philip), 1040 [1].
Philo(n), style of, o13, et passim.
philology in 4, 25”.
philosophers, style of, 05; et passim.
Phocis, ancient dialect of, 03 a; uses
στ for σθ, 177.
C
Phoenician alphabet in Grecce, I ff., 11.
pre-Phoenician, 1, 11.
letters, I ff., II; as ciphers, 3, 616.
phonetic decay,' 90 [1].
phonetic principles, 123-224; prothesis,
127, 129 (provection 130 f., epen-
thesis, 127, 131 f.); aphaerosis,
133 f., 134 H.; syncope, 133, 136 ff.
(hyphaeresis, 138); elision, 133,
139 ff. (apocope, 133, 142); meta-
thesis, 143; see also grammatical
principles and sonantic phono-
pathy.
'phonetic law,' 90 [1]; a misleading
term, ib.
phonetic spelling, 032 f., 25“.
phonetic transcription
of modern
languages, 032; of N, 032; its
evils, ib.
phonodynamic scale, 32, 145 ff.
phonodynamy, 146 il.
homophonous, 148 f.
heterophonous, 149 ff.
phonology (classical), 1-224, App. ii.
9 ff.; seo also Achaeic, Ionic, Doric.
preserved in N, 022, 1–224.
phonopathy, 90-2245 term dofined,
90 & [1]; assimilation, 125; dis-
similation, 126; amplification, 127
ff.; retrenchinent, 133 ff.; sonant-
ism, 144-68; consonantism,196-224,
phorminx, used in epic recitations, App.
i. 24.
phrenopathy, 90 [1].
Phrynichos, poet & composer, App. i. 24.
Phrynichos, an Atticist, 013; et passim.
Phthiotis, ancient dialect of, 03 A.
pictographic system, 1.
Pindar, poet & composer, app. i. 24.
makes early use of articular infin.,
2072, App. vi. 20.
Pisistratos, see Peisistratos.
pitch-accent, App. i. 8.
theory of, App. i. 8-25.
arguments for, App. i. 9; against, ib.
IO ff.
γκ, πλέον, 51, 522.
place, substantives of, 1034 f.
adverbs of, 523.
expr. by predic. adj., 1183 f.; by
gen., 1314 f.; by dat., 1390 f.
indicated by тd + gen., 1228.
understood, 1228, 1289 f.
Plato, style of, 05; et passim.
etymologies of, 25 [1], App. ij. 12 [1].
on accents, 76 [2], App. i. 2 f.
his writings metrical?, 25 [1] c.
-plex, -πλοος, 3192.
1. pluperfect, 682; in N, 688.
formation of, 728, 785; 2nd act.,
924.
subjunctive, endings of, 803;
periphrased, 764.
1st & 2nd distinguished, 925.
periphrasis of, 764, 2110; how
originated, 2139 f.
2. pluperfect, use of, 1876-80.
for imprf., 1869, 1878.
periphrased, 764, 2110, 2139 f.
repl. by imprf. of eiµì or exw + pf.
or aor. part., 1877 f.
repl. by imprf., 1850.
repl. by aur., 1857, 1879.
extinct since T, 1880.
plural number, 228; in N, 230.
in 1st & 2nd decl. confounded, 332 f.
in 2nd & 3rd decl. confounded, 345.
of 3rd decl. attracting plural of 1st
decl., 332.
of 1st decl. in P-N, 267; attracted
by plural of 3rd decl., 332 f.
plural in verb, 667; after a collective
subject, 1174; with subject in
sing., 1175".
of neuter with verb in sing., 1169 fr.
plus (Latin), mλéov, 511.
Plutarch, stylo of, 013; ot passim ; mis-
uses οὐ & μή, 1815 [1].
Polybios, style of, 013, 1771 b, 1985,
1987, App. v. 8, vi. 12 B [2]; et
passim; fond of i'va, 1761 [1].
722
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
Pontic dialects, 029, 031; palatalize
before e i to ź, 56; resist synizesis,
155 d, 271; éa, -ía for -eá, -iá,
271; fond of final -v, 221; teµóv,
τεσόν, μέτερος, 554; preserve
Tás, 561; ¿eivos, 567b, 571; ȧTÓV
for αὐτόν, 1423 b; εἶναι for ἕνα,
621; -(σ)ov (imprt.), 813 & [1];
-OnT (imprt.), 814; -σxw, 1098;
ovкí, 'k, 'к, 1797.
ἀτόν
Pontic pronunciation of Greek, 24°.
popular speech in Greek, 04 f., 07,
102, 25; et passim.
- ignored even in A, 06 f., 25b; see
colloquial Greek.
Porphyrogennctos (Constantinos), style
of, 021; et passim.
position of words, 1158 (cp. also 2034).
posilion in verse, 89, App. ii. 5 f.
artificial, 4", App. ii. 5 f.
meaning of, 89, app. ii. 5.
origin of quantity, 29 ff., 88, app.
ii. 9 ff.
1. possessive pronouns, 551-7; in N,
554".
expr. by article, 1203.
2. possessive pronouns, use of, 1414 ff.
repl. by article, 1203, 1415; by
& idios (oikeîos), 1416 f.
with article, 1210.
possessor, dative of, 1367 f.
possibility, adj. denoting, 1050, 1052.
post-classical period, p. xiv, 03 B, 08-
013; et passim.
postfix, 127; sec suffix.
postpositive article, 606 ff.
for os (8σTIs), 1438; in N, 606b,
1438.
- repl. by onоυ, 608.
postpositive conjunctions, 1700.
postpositive vowels, 19 f.; in Latin, 19ª.
consonantized, 18, 32, 51, 78".
post-tonic syllables, 030.
postverbal words, 1008 ff.
verbs, 1083, 1094-1101.
potential indicative, 1901, 1907 f., 1967,
2974 f.; in G-B, 000, App. iv. 5.
potential 2ndary subj. [optat.], 1925 fl.,
1967.
in dep. clauses, 2039 f., App. v. 12.
retreats, App. v. 11 (cp. 2039 f.).
power, ternis expressing, 2090 ft.
predicato, 1159, 1236.
of several nouns, 1177 ff.
in the neuter, 1177 ff.
takes no article, 1230 f.
predicative relation, 1159;
1236 f.
prefix, 127; in verbs, 709 ff.
intrusive or parasitic, 130.
- position,
pregnant construction, 1441 ff., 1713,
1716, 17186, 1980, 1978 ff., etc.
prepositional adverbs, 1490; construc-
tion of, 1493 f.
prepositional expressions substantivized,
1223, 1241 a; used for a cond.
protasis, 1977 c.
prepositions, 1487 ff., 1489-1699; in M,
1592; in N, 1488, 1491 f.
as adverbs, 1138.
proclitic, 97 c, 98 b.
with anastrophe, 110 f.
before auginent & redupl., 741, 744 f.
in composition, 1118 f., 1137 ff.
construction of, 1493-1699; in N,
1493b.
before personal pronouns, 5286.
prepositive vowels, 19 f.
prepositive particles, 1700.
I.
1. present (tense), 682 f.; effective,
684; durative, ib.
assimilated to fut. subj., App. iv. 3.
2. present, use of, 1831-45.
a. present, effective, 1831-9.
repl. by imprf., 1849; by aor.,
1833, 1852; by perf., 1832, 1866
ff.; by exw with participle, 1834;
by effective fut., 1889.
with máλa, 1833.
for fut., 1836, 1896", 1855, App.
iv. 2 fl.
for English pf., 1833.
for verbal adj. in -Tós, 1837 f.
historic, 1835 f.; strengthened by
Ιδού, 1835.
inceptive, 868-71, 1854".
b. present, duralive, 1840-5.
iterative, 1840.
of attempted action, 1841.
for pf., 1842.
repl. by pf., 1842, 1868; by effect.
pres.+exwv, 1844 f.
repl. by eiµì + pres. part., 1843,
1844 f.
repl. by pf. + exwv, 1844 f.
c. present, completed, see perfect.
3. present participle for fut. part., 2157.
present reduplication, 928.
pre-tonic syllables, 030.
price, expr. by ảтó, 1511.
pridie, пpò μuâs, 1652.
primary tenses, 692; in N, 693; see
tenses, primary.
primitive words, 1008 ff.
principal tenses, 692; see tenses,
primary.
Priscian on quantity, 17 [2].
prius, πριγιοῦ, πρίχου, 1789 ; quam,
ib.
private correspondence, style of, 07.
723
3 A 2
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
privation, verbs denoting, 1318 f.
privative à-, ȧv-, 1129.
proclisis, 94 ff.
not indicated by ancients, 96.
a recent term, 96.
proclitics, 94, 97 ff.
Proculus, Πρόκλος, 1361.
prodelision, 133.
prodes!, πрoáɣe, app. vi. 16.
Prodicos on grammar, App. ii. 12 [1].
Prodromos, Theodoros, style of, 024,
App. iii. 9; et passim.
- his verse artificial, App. ii. 4.
profession, ending denoting a, 1044.
expressed by -un, 1069.
'profit' (to) constr., 1355 f.
prohibition, verbs of, 2087 ff.
expr. by primary subj., 1917 ff.,
App. v. 3; by imprt., 1927 f., app.
V. 3, 12 b.
prohibitions, 1927 f.
μετά,
prolepsis, 1937; of aπó, 1513; of μeтá,
1603; of πро, 1651.
promising, verbs of, 2068 f.
pronouns, 525-615.
personal, 525-43 (emphatic, 525,
527-30; unemphatic & tonoclitic,
976, 525, 530-1); use of, 1395-
1400.
reflexive, 544-9; use of, 1402-13.
reciprocal, 550-7.
possessive, 551-7; use of, 1414-7.
determinative, 1418-23.
demonstrative,
1424-32.
558-85; usc of,
relative, 603-15; use of, 1433-45.
interrogative, 586 ff.; use of, 1446 f.
indefinite, 586 fr., 599-601; use of,
1448-53-
pronunciation of Greck, 9, 24-69; et
passim.
- history of, 24.
theories on, 24.
points of dispute, 24 f.
of sonants, 26-53 (of diphthongs,
26 ft.); during V-VIth A.D. 50b.
C.
of consonants, 54-69; of aspiratae &
medino, 54-63; of liquids, 64-9.
in some N dialects, 24º.
means of determining, 25, 25ª.
and script, 25.
Erasmian, 9, 24-69; misused, 24 [2].
Anglo-German, 24 [2].
traditional, 9, 24-69.
proparoxytone, 81".
proparoxy tonesis, 81b.
proper names with article, 1205 f.
properispomenon equal to paroxytone,
105º.
prosodic symbols, 17, 29 ff., App. ii. 12.
prosody (metrical), App. ii. 3; prin-
ciples of, ib.
- syllabometric, app. ii. 3 a.
accentual, App. ii. 3 b.
quantitative, App. ii. 3 c; restricted
to A, App. ii. 5, 9 ff.
in Indo-European lauguages, App. ii.
ვ ს.
in Greek, App. ii. 3 c, 3, 4 ff.
in Latin, Sanskrit, Arabic, App. ii.
3 0, 3b.
ვს.
in Homer, App. ii. 4 & [1].
in P-B poetry, app. ii. 4.
prospective moods, App. v. I ff.; con-
founded, ib.
infinitive, 2078, App. vi. 4, 15 ff.;
see infinitive.
Protagoras, App. ii. 12 [1].
protasis of conditional clauses, 1964.
negatived by μń, 1968; by où,
1807b f.
conceived as potentiality, 1973.
in indirect questions, 2054.
repl. by part., 1967, 1977; by a
prep., 1977; by imprt., ib.; by
other means, ib.
omitted, 1978.
without verb, 1979-83.
protective suffix -a, 132, App. iii. 25,
26 ff.; due to Tivá, etc., ib. 25; in
verbs, ib. 28.
-e, 132 f., 208, 536 f., 725, App. iii.
24, 26 M.; due to augment, 132”,
208, 725, App. iii. 28.
-v, 132 f., 208, App. iii. 24 f., 28 1f.;
Soveral, App. iii. 30.
prothesis, 127, 129 ff., 134; see also
provection.
progressive, 130 f.
as provection, 130 f.
prothetic, see provective.
provection, 130 f.
proving, verbs of, 1284 f., 2134-
PS in Latin for P, 43.
psilosis (píλwors), in Aeolic, 84.
psychopathy, 90 [1].
pullus, Tovλos, 1041 [1].
puns, as tests of pronunciation, 25.
purists, efforts of, 011.
purpose, expr. by final clauses, 1952 fl.;
by relat. clauses, 2010, 2020 ff.;
by participles, 2157 ff.; by infin.,
2078 f., 2094 ff.; by roû + infin.,
1337, 2076 f., App. vi. 23 f.
Q, origin of, 2, 11.
qualitative genitive, 1302-6.
qualitative metaphony, 167.
quality, demonstr. adj. of, 582.
nouns of, 1045 ff.
724
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
quality, adj. of lasting, 1054, 1056.
interrog. adj. of, 601.
- relat. pronouns of, 614 f.
quantitative metaphony, 168.
quantitative prosody, App. ii. 3 c.
I. quantity, demonstr. adj. of, 582.
- interrog. adj. of, 601.
relat. pron. of, 614 f.
'quantity' (metrical), no name for it in
4, App. ii. 8; dates since a, ib.
symbols of, 17", 29 ff., 86 ff., App.
ii. 16 & [3]; complementary, 70,
App. ii. 16.
other marks of, 704, App. ii. 9 ff., 16
& [3].
nature of, 17, 86 ff., app. ii; see
also prosody.
definition of, app. ii. 1.
origin of, 17, 29 ff., 89, 123, App.
ii. 8, 9 ft.
degrees & varieties of, app. ii. 1,
3, 5.
metathesis of, 168, app. ii. 8, 14.
with ancient theorists, App. ii. 2.
in Plato's time, 41.
phonetic, 20 a, App. ii. 1 f.; unknown
in Greek, 89, App. ii. 1, 16;
generally discarded, App. ii. 15.
technical, 28 a ff., 86 ff., App. ii.
6, 9 ff.; artificial, ib.
grammatical, 28 ú ff., 76 ff., app.
ii. 2.
accentual, App. ii. 3 b, 20 f.
natural, App. ii. 7, 15.
antagonistic to accent, App. ii. 8.
and rhythm, App. ii. 17.
and stress-accent, App. ii. 17.
quarrelling, expr. of, 1371 f.
qu'est ce que, Ti'v' Tа, 592.
question, direct, 2035; for conditional
protasis, 1991 a.
indirect, 2035-
double, 2042 f.
alternative, 2052.
'why'? 2044 f.
how answered, 2056-61.
qui et, ὃς καί, δ καί, 1718.
qui idem, 1718.
"quoth,' 978.
quotation marks, how indicated in
Grock, 80, 2032 f.
rather,' expr. by comparative, 1190.
rather than,' maрd + acc., 1614 fl.; πpó,
1647.
referring to same word, 1189.
reaching, verbs of, 1300 f.
reading signs, 70-80, App. ii. 16; absent
from 4, 70; an Alexandrian inven-
tion, ib.; ten in number, 70, app.
ii. 16; forms of, ib.; breathings, 701,
72; accents, 702, 76 ff.; stops, 703;
other signs, 701.
receiving, verbs of, 2094 ff.
recessive accent, 32", 84 f.
reciprocal pronouns, 550 f.
reciprocal verbs, 1475 ff.
with middle form, 1457.
admit of ἀλλήλους οι ἄλλος ἄλλον,
etc., 1476 f.
reconciling, expr. of, 1371 ff.
reduction of sonants, 126, 753, 755,
App. i. 13, 15, 17.
due to stress accent, App. i. 13,
mistaken for internal augment, 753,
755-
reduplicated presents & nouns, 737; in
N, ib.
- μ-verbs, 928, 945 ff.
reduplication, 728-40, 741 ff.; in pre-
sent, 928, 945 ff.; P-N, 736-40.
of an initial aspirate, 730.
Attic, 735.
of compound verbs, 741-55; in N,
752; before prefixes, 748; initial &
internal, 750, 751; external, 750.
repl. by augment, 731, 733; by ei-,
734.
prevented by dissimilation, 736.
dropped, 736 f., 740.
misapplied, 738.
unknown to N, 740.
reference, accusative of, 1269 ff.
reflexive pronouns, 544-9.
use of, 1402-13; direct, 1402 f.; in-
direct, 1404 ft.
for personal pronouns, 1406 f.
refusing, verbs of, 1822, 2087 ff.
regis, pnyús, 341, 355.
relative clauses, 2010-26.
definite (descriptive, explanatory),
2010, 2012.
indefinite, 2010, 2013-26; causal,
2013; consecutive, 2014-9; final,
2020-2; conditional, 2023 ff.
with a redundant demonstr., 1439.
for participle of 3rd decl., 338, 2105,
2110, 2166, App. iii. 13.
for cond. protases, 1977 d, 2023 f.
relative dative, 1369 f.; see dative.
relative pronouns, 603-15; see also
pronouns, relative.
use of, 1433-45.
assimilated or attracted, 1441-5.
preceded by article, 1219 f, 1718.
repl. by postpositive article, 1438;
by adverbs, 2011.
relatives, mere connective, 1439.
omitted or replaced, 1444.
as interrogatives, 1440, 1446 f., 2038
725
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
(in direct questions, 2038); pre-
ceded by ró, 2038, 2041.
remembering, verbs of: with gen., 1294;
with accus., 1296, 1295.
reminding, verbs of, 1279 fr.
removal, verbs of, 1316 f.
renting, verbs of, 1338 ff.
repetition, verbal endings of, 1095 f.
resh, ¿ŵ, 2.
restrictive participle, 2155; see con-
cessive participle.
result, endings denoting a, 1023 f.;
a designed, 1950 a.
retrenchment of words, 133-42; aph-
aeresis, 133, 133b ff.; syncope,
136 ff.; hyphaeresis, 138; elision,
139 ff.; apocope, 141.
Reuchlin (J.), an anti-Erasmian, 24.
Reuchlinian pronunciation, 24.
Reuchlinians, 24.
revection, 132b.
revective, -, 132b, 725.
Rhodes, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
present dialect of, 029; fond of final
I
-ν (στύμαν), 221; preserves τάς,
561; knows syllabic augment only,
721; -(σουσιν, 777; βάλλω, σφάλ
λω, 905.
rhythm in A, independent of sense, App.
i. 24.
sole guide in A verse, App. ii. 8 &
[4, 8].
and quantity, app. ii. 17.
pulse of, 85b.
rhythmical beat, 85 b.
metricians), App. ii. 8
rhythmicians (
& [5 & 8].
riga (piɣậ), 996236 •
riyas (divas), 996230.
riyo (¿ɩy@), 996236-
rigomen (ῥιγώμεν), 996236.
'rivers,' gender of, 241; in N, 245.
Ronaic, 022; see N.
Romaios = 'Christian Greek,' 016.
Roman alphabet, origin of, 5.
Roman and Greek churches, 023, 025.
Roman emperors Hellenized, 015, 023;
Christianized, ib.
Roman influence on Greek, 010, 020;
see Latinisms.
Roman prosody borrowed from Greek,
App. ii. 3 c, 36.
Romanic influence: exw payn, app. vi.
18; comparative, 510; 8 roîos, d
dπоîos, 612; see also Latin influence,
Latinisms, and Italian influence.
Romanic verse, App. ii. 18.
Rome influenced by Greece, 014, 022;
New see Byzantium & Constan-
tinople,
ruling over,' expressions denoting a,
I294,
Russian verse, app. ii. 19.
rustic speech, 05.
-s- in early Greek, see -- in Greek
index.
-s closes a word, 218 f., 219.
Romans, character of, 022.
Hellenized, 010, 022 & [2].
Romanizing Gaul & Spain, 022 [2].
dropped in South Italian, 219b; in
Tsaconic, ib.
Saint's day,' a, how expressed, 1229,
1276; on St. George's (day),'
1229.
Sum (Samuel), 1040 [1].
'same,' & auTÓS, 1419.
samekh, ¿û, 2.
Samothrace, its present dialect drops
λ & p, 1870.
sampi, 2, 3, 616, 617; its place in
alphabet, 3, 6133.
its numerical value, 6139.
san, oavnî, as cipher, 3, 616.
1
Sanskrit, how far inflectional, 32°, & [3].
verb 32º [3].
II
verse, App. ii. 3 c, 3b, App. i. 1
& [3].
influenced by Greek, App. i. 11 [3];
sce also Indian.
i & u, how transcribed in Greek, 35".
transcriptions into and from, 35".
see also Indian.
saranla (oapávтa), 639.
sarracum, σαράγαρον, 59 c.
'save,' 'except,' 644.
saying, terms of, 1353 f.
saying, verbs of, 2035, 2083, 2085 f.
with infin., App. vi. 3.
with őπɩ, App. vi. 13 f.; for infin.,
ib.
scala, σγάλη, 59 c.
scale of sonants, 32, 145 ff.
b
scanning (accent), 85 b, App. ii. 8 & [5];
adopted from Ñ, App. ii. 15 [1].
scansion, 85 b.
را
scholastic spelling, 6, 29, App. ii. 12.
'school' understood, 1289.
schools in early Greece, 4'4-
'sciences,' preceded by article, 1201.
-sco, -σkw, 1098.
script, 1-9; forms of, 2, 5, 9; direction
of, 4; history of, 1 ff., 4".
aboriginal or pre-Phoenician, 1, II.
as test of sound, 25, 25º.
and grammatical function, 25º.
scriptura continua, 8, 25°, 79.
scutitur, 755.
secondary accent, sce accent.
726
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
secondary subjunctive, see subjunctive,
secondary.
secondary tenses, see tenses, secondary.
seeing, verbs of, 2036.
with part., 2133 f.
with or for part., App. vi. 13 f.
with mŵs, 1751, 1755, 1942, App. vi.
14.
seem' (to), constr., 1355 f.
self,' avros, 1418.
selling, verbs of, 1338 ff.
sending, verbs of, 1353 f., 2095.
เ scnses,' verbs denoting action of the,
1325 ff.
sentence-questions, 2033 b, 2046 ff.
sentences, see clauses.
simple, 1900 ff.
compound, 1929 ff.
sentiendi verba, 2028 f., 2085 f., 2133 ff.,
2136 ff.; see also perception.
separable particles in compos., 1118–23.
separation, gen. of, 1316-27; verbs of,
1316 f.
Septuagint, language of, 013, 017; et
passim.
sequence expressed by predic. adj.,
1183 f.
of moods, 1934, app. v. 7.
Serbian verse, app. ii. 19.
serve' (to), constr., 1355 f.
shin, σίγμα, 2.
short' syllables, 87 ff., App. ii. 1; in
Greek, ib. 5; see quantity.
- vowels, 17 f., S9; see quantity.
shortness of vowels, symbol of, 70, 701,
App. ii. 16; see quantity and
prosody.
'should' expr. by imprf., 1849, 1901;
by exor+infin., App. iv. 7; by và
+ imprf. or aor., App. iv. 13.
'should like,' 1978.
showing, verbs of, 1284 f.
sibilant (o), 22.
sibilants in Phoenician, 3; in Greek,
ib.
silbenzählend (in verse), App. ii. 3 a.
'similar,' how constr., 1357 ff.
similarity, adj. of, 1065.
- adj. & adv. of, 1357 ff., 1371.
Simonides makes early use of n and w,
App. ii. 12; of articular infin., 2072,
App. vi. 20.
simplicity in popular speech, App. vi. 5.
'since,' 1737, 1776, 1807b.
since when' expr. by accus., 1277; by
gen., 1341.
singular (number) in nouns, 228; in N,
230.
of 1st decl. in P-N, 265; its in-
fluence on 3rd decl., 266, 330 f.
singular (number), in verb, 667; after
neuter pl., 1169 ff.
singuli, 6622.
'size,' demonstr. adj. denoting, 582.
interrog. adj. of, 601.
relat. pron. of, 614 f.
gen. of, 1302.
skins, used for paper, 07.
Slavs in Greece, 022 [1]; their influence
on Greek, 022, 1040 0 c [2].
smooth consonants, 22.
so as to,' 1949 f., 1951.
so that,' 1949, 1951.
-soever, -cumque, 1716.
soft sonants, 144.
solecisms, see macaronisms.
some, τινές, 594.
sonant, meaning of, 21b; see sonants.
sonantism (vocalism), 124, 144-68b;
extent of, 144; phonodynamic
scale, 146-54; synizesis, 155;
consonantization, 155b; vocaliza-
tion, 155 ff.; contraction, 156 ff.;
crasis, 159 H.; antectasis, 163 ff.;
metaphony, 166 f.
·
in Homer, 30, 124, App. ii. 7.
in dialects, 124, App. ii. 7.
terminal, 218, App. iii. 2.
in southern N, 030.
in northern N, 030.
sonants (vowels & diphthongs), inter-
change of, 26.
pronunciation of, 26-51.
relative power of, 146 ff.
homophonous, 148 f.
heterophonous, 149 ff.
sondern, åλλá, 1736.
Sophocles, poet & composer, App. i. 24.
style of, 05; et passim.
sound, how far indicated by script, 25°
and grammatical function, 25º.
sounds (in Greek), primitive, 16º, 35",
144; in N, ib.
their number in A, 16b; in N,
16º, 35b.
southern N, 029 f.; nearest to A, 032.
South Italian N, 029, 031; its pro-
nunciation, 24°; palatalizes before
e i to i, 56¹; resists synizesis,
155 (; νύφτα (νύχτα), ἑστά (εφτά),
174; χεῖρο (χείρων), 505 ; τίς, τί,
590; -(o)ov (imprt.), 813 & [1];
-Ovтα, 822 f.; čve, 985 [1]; uses
pres. for fut., 1836, App. iv. 2; eîxa
γράψοντα, 1878.
South Italy, Byzantine colonists in, 029.
space, accus. of, 1274 ff.
Spain Romanized, 022 [2].
Spaneas, an early M poem, 024.
language of, App. iii. 9.
*
727
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
Spanish accent, 77b.
sparesco, 755-
speaking accent, 85 a, 85b.
'species,' preceded by article, 1201.
specification, accus. of, 1269 ff.; in N,
1273.
speech, common, 05 f., 25b; see collo-
quial Greek.
spelling, 25, 25° ff.; Attic, App. ii.
II, 14; see also orthography.
etymological or historical, 032,
25d f.
'correct,' 25.
་
Eucleidian, 6, App. i. 12 & [2], 13
& [1].
spelling reform at Athens, 6, App. ii.
12, 13 & [1].
object of, 28 tf., App. 12 f.
account of, App. ii. 12 [2].
Sphakian dialect, see under Crete.
spirant (o), 22.
pronunciation of, 9.
- phonopathy of, 204-8.
spirito, σπίρτο, 1362.
spiritus on diphthongs, 78 f.
spiritus asper, 70, 71, 72 ff.
one of the Tрoodiaι, 701, app.
i. 22.
how symbolized, 2, 5 [2], 72 ff.
no name for it in A, 72.
Indo-European, 73".
in Aeolic, 72, 84.
in A inscriptions, 72.
irregular use of, 72 & [2 & 3], 73.
over initial p, 71b; over pp, ib.
after ρ λ γ F, 72.
prevents not elision, 72.
Plato & Aristotle on, 72.
in MSS, 74; a diacritic mark,
ib.; general reception of, ib.,
.י77
over diphthongs, 78 ff.
sound of, 71 ff.; musical, App. i.
22.
spiritus lenis, 701, 71, 75-
one of the προσῳδίαι, 701.
absent from inser. & papyri, 75.
mute, 71.
in MSS, 75-
over diphthongs, 78 ff.
object of, 75.
spondee, origin of, 85.
Sporades (northern), present dialects
of, 029; fond of final -v (oróµav),
221, App.
sposco, 755.
spurious, 19, 20°, App. ii. 9 & 14.
spurious diphthongs, 19 b, 29a b'; seo
diphthongs.
stabulum, στάβλος, 249.
stem of nouns, 252; in 3rd decl., 334-
432.
of verbs, 694 ff.
stem character, 253, 694.
Stoic philosophy and grammar, 25".
'stop, full,' 70g; see stops.
stops (, . ;), 22, 70g.
invention of, 79.
form of, 70%.
use of, 79.
in inscriptions, 79-
in MSS, 79.
strengthening, verb endings denoting a,
1095 f.
stress-accent in Greek, 324, 76, 77b,
85 fl., App. i. 8 ff., ii. 17 ff.
theory of, App. i. 8-25.
arguments for, App. i. 9; against,
App. i. 10 ff.
in Teutonic languages, 77, App. i. 17,
ii. 17.
and quantity, App. ii. 17.
'stroke' or 'blow,' how expressed in
B-N, 1027.
studii verba, 2087 ff.
subject, 1160 ff.; its position, 1158; in
interrogations, 2034.
stands in the nom., 1160; by the
accus., 2064; by a prepositional
turu, 1313.
omitted, 1161-7, 2065.
subjective genitive, 1288 ff.
I. subjunctive, primary, 676.
formation of, 771 f.; with e/o
for ŋ/w, App. ii. 12 [1].
attracted by indic., 779.
a. subjunctive, primary, use of, 1909–
22.
- interrog., 1909 f.; after Boúλei
or éλes, ib.; in the 3rd pers.,
1910; introd. by iva, 1911;
repl. by infiu., 2093, App. vi.
17 c.
hortative, 1912-6; for imprt.,
1919 ff., App. v. 16 f., 20;
intr. by aye, pépe, etc., 1913;
by apes, éaoov, etc., 1914; by
iva, 1914; by â & as, 1915,
1919 f.
desiderative, 1919 f.
prohibitive, 1917 f.; for imprt.,
1919.
extension of, App. v. I, 13,
19 f.
great frequency of, App. v. 19.
for fut. indic., 1921 f., App. v. 18,
20; introd. by íva, vá, 1922,
App. iv. 12 f.
for 2ndary subj., 1920, app. v.
II, 15, 20.
728
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
subjunctive, primary, for potent.
2ndary subj. + äv, App. v. 14, 20.
- P-B history of, app. v. 16 ff.;
summed
up, ib.
ib. 20; chiefly
with iva, ib. 19; the Kar'
ἐξοχὴν mood, ib.
II. subjunctive, secondary or past
[optative], 677; why called
optative, ib., 1924, App. v. 5.
endings of, 802; in P-B, 805.
Attic, 827.
retreats in P-N, 679, 2038 ff.,
App. iv. 6 ff.
a. subjunctive, secondary, its use in
indep. clauses, 1923-5.
desiderative, 1923 ff.; in NT,
1924 [1].
- potential, 1925.
with av, 1925 ff.
without av, 1923 ff.
with εἴθε, εἰ γάρ, ὡς, 1923.
-in (mild) commands, App. v. 12 A.
b. subjunctive, secondary, its use in
dependent clauses, 1933-2061.
in decl. clauses, 1940-2.
in causal clauses, 1945 f.
in final clauses, 1952, 1956 f.,
1962; misused, 1953".
in condit. clauses, 1971 ff., 1975,
1984; in NT, App. v. 10.
in temporal clauses, 1997, 1999,
2005.
in relat, clauses, 2021 ff.
in indirect discourse, 2027.
in interrog. clauses, 2037,2039 f.;
in NT, 2039 f., App. v. 8.
III. subjunctive, secondary, history
of, App. v. 6 ff.
disadvantages of, App. v. 7.
assimilated to 2ndary tenses, 792.
disappearing in NT, App. v. 8¹ f.
longest record of, App. v. 10, 12,
15.
repl. by primary subj., app. v.
IO, 14 f.
retreats, App. v. 6 ff.
subordinate sentences, see dependent
clauses.
subordinating particles, 1737 f',
subordination makes room for co-ordina-
tion, 2154.
subscript, 20; dropped, 20°; spurious
in a, 192.
- in crasis, 160.
substantival infinitive, 2062, 2071-7;
see infinitive.
substantive as 2nd component, 1144 f.
substantives, dorivative, 1012-49;
from verbs, 1013-27; from subst.,
1028-44; from adj., 1045-9.
'suffice' (to), constr., 1355 f.
suffix, 127, 1009; in verb, 709, 760-823.
superiority, gen. of, 1328 f.
verbs denoting a, 2132 f.
1. superlative (degree) of adj., 484-
524; of adverbs, 508.
absolute, 490; of adverbs in -ws,
519.
elative, 490, 1191, 1194.
periphrastic, 509–15.
repl. by comprt., 514 f.; by posi-
tive, 1192 f.
- expr. by posit. repeated, 513, 521.
2. superlative, use of, 1191 ft.
- absolute, repl. by positive, 1192 f.
strengthened by ὡς, ὅτι, ᾖ, οἷος,
1194.
surnanie expr. by kaтd тóv, 1591.
susceptibility, adj. of, 1050, 1052 f.
svarabhutki, 127, 131.
swearing particles, 1260.
swearing, verbs of, 2086, App. vi. 3.
Sybilla, artificial verse of, App. ii. 4.
syllabic augment, 710 ff.; sec augment.
repl. by temporal, 720.
for temporal, 721.
for reduplication, 731.
in N, 713-
syllabication, 91 ff.
principles of, 91.
ancient precepts on, 91.
in inscriptions, 30, 91, 92.
in papyri, 30, 91.
of compound words, 93.
syllable, defined, 19".
constitution of, 91.
long, 86 ff., App. ii. 5b ff., 9 fl.; short,
ib.
syllabometric verse, App. ii. 3 a.
syllabometry, app. ii. 17.
Syme, its present dialect knows syllabic
augment only,721 ; βάλλω, σφάλλω,
905.
syncopated liquid stems in 3rd decl.,
350; in N, 386.
tenses, 980, App. i. 13, 16 f.
syncope, 38, 136 ff., 138 (cp. 148 f.),
App. i. 16, ii. 9, 14.
- due to stress-accent, 136 f., app. i. 13,
16.
impeded, 137.
synenclisis, 107 f.
synelereses (ovvetńpnoes), 798.
synizesis, 155, App. i. 14.
influence of, 155 a ft.
accent in, 155 b ff.
resisted in N dialects, 155 d.
syntactical composition, 1115 f.
syntactical position of words, 1158.
syntax, 1158-2170.
729
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
T(=transitional period, A.D. 300-600),
p. xiv, 03 B, 014, 018; et passim.
tablets used in writing, 07.
taking hold of, verbs of, 1300 f.
Taras, ancient dialect of, 03 a.
tasting, verbs of, 1298 f., 1310.
tau, ταῦ, 2.
teaching, verbs of, 1279 ff.
temple,' understood, 1289.
temporal augment, 710, 714 ff.; see
augment.
i-sound in, 720.
for syllabic, 720.
for reduplication, 733.
repl. by syllabic, 721.
disadvantages of, 717.
discarded in N, 718.
temporal clauses, 1995-2009.
their particles, 1995.
constr., 1995 ff.; in P-N, 1999 f.
definite, 1995, 1996 f.
indefinite, 1995, 1997.
in Polybios, App. v. 8.
temporal particles, 1776-95.
relative, 1777; with άv, ib.; with vá,
1786.
temporal participle, 2147-9°; see par-
ticiple.
preced. by aua etc., 2147; in P-B,
2149.
repl. by finite clause, 2149; by ev
τῷ (μετὰ τὸ with infin., 2149.
resolved by ὅτε, ὅταν, ἀφ' οὗ, etc.,
2149.
tempus, Xpóvos, App. ii. 8 [2].
Tenos, ancient dialect of, 03 A; present,
029.
tons, how symbolized in A, 617.
how formed, 639.
+ units, 640 ff.
tense-character, 756.
1. tenses, 682-93; how formed, 709-
823; in N, 693, 996 d.
number of, 683 f.
simple, 687; in N, 688.
compound, 687; in N,
origin of, 2139 f.
second, 907-26b.
688;
primary, how formed, 692, 709-
823, 1932.
secondary, 692, 1932; how formed,
709-823"; assimilated in form,
789.
2. tenses, use of, 1829-92; present,
1831-46; imperfect, 1847-50;
aorist, 1851-61; perfect, 1862-
75; pluperfect, 1876-80; future,
1881-99.
tennes (K T π), 22; oxplosive aspirates,
171.
tenues (KTT), before aspiratae, 170.
terminal sounds in Greek, 218-224,
App. iii.
terminations, 252; see endings.
tessaris (Téoσapeis), 637.
Testamenta XII Patriarcharum, style
of, 021; et passim.
tell, θήτα, 2.
telimemenon (τετμημένον), 179.
Teutonic languages, accent in, 77b,
App. i. 17, ii. 17.
t + h in Greek, 9, 24, 56 ff.
'that,' as relat., 14331-
the...
and that of,' 1226.
'the most,' 490, 1191.
the one referred to,' 1420.
'the said,' 1418, 1420.
'the which,' 612.
thematic vowel or sonant, 698, 758,
1106.
omitted, 699.
Themistios, style of, 013; and often.
Then-clause, 1964, 1967.
Theocritos, his verse artificial, App.
ii. 4.
Theodoros of Crete, his verse artificial,
App. ii. 4.
Theodoros Prodromos, see Prodromos.
Theognis makes first use of articular
infin., 2072, App. vi. 20.
Theophanes, style of, 021; et passim.
continuatus, style of, 021; et passim.
theorists (ancient) on pronunciation,
25; value of their precepts, 25
& [1].
Thera, present dialect of, 029; palatal-
izes before ei to i, 56"; fond of
temporal augment (πéрva), 720;
-(o)ovoi”, 777; åve- for åva-, 754.
thesis (in metre), 89 f.
indicated by the acute, App. ii. 8.
confounded with arsis, 89".
Thessaly, ancient dialects of, 03 a; use
στ fur σθ, τη; ignore η and w,
App. ii. 7b.
present dialect of, 029, 1098.
thetic vowel-symbols, 17, 29 ff.
"thing,' omitted in Greek, 1182 a.
'thinking,' verbs of, 1004, 2028, 2083,
2085 f., App. vi. 3.
with infin., 2029, 2085 ff., App. vi.
4, 7.
with őrı, 1752, 1940-4, 2029, App.
vi. 13 f.
with Tws, wobтı, 1755, App. vi. 17 f.
thousands, how symbolized in 4, 617.
Thrace, present dialects of, 029; -σkw,
1098.
'threaten' (to), constr., 1355 f.
threatening, verbs of, 2086" f.
730
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
Thucydides, style of, 05; et passiin.
his writings metrical?, 25 [1] c.
on λοιμός & λιμός, 47.
Tim (Timothy), 1040 [1].
time, adj. of, 1062 f.
accus. of, 1274 ff.
gen. of, 1314.
expr. by predic. adj., 1183 f.
expr. by relat. clause, 2010.
time, xpóvos, app. ii. 8 [2].
tmesis, 1138 f.
'to' (unto), expr. by dat., 1353 ff.
Tom (Thomas), 1040 [1].
tonic stress, 85 a.
tonoclisis, 94-108.
as proclisis, 94, 97 ff.
as enclisis, 94, 101-6.
as synenclisis, 107 ff.
& Teutonic accentuation, 108b.
tonoclitics, 94, 97 ff., 102.
touching, verbs of, 1300 f.
towards,' expr. by dat., 1353 ff.
'towns,' gender of, 242; in N, 245.
'trade,' endings denoting a, 1044.
expr. by -uch, 1069.
traditional pronunciation, 9, 24 ff.
-spelling, 254f., see historical spelling.
tragedians, language of, 05; et passim.
transcriptions (from & into Latin), as
tests of pronunciation, 25.
transitional period, p. xiv, 03 B, 014,
018; et passim,
transitive verbs, 1257, 1451-
as causatives, 1455 f., 1460.
as intrans., 1264, 1455 fr
in English intrans., 1258.
transposition in relative clauses, 1442.
Trapezuntian dialect; τεμόν, τεσόν,
clc., 554b; see Pontos.
'trecs,' gender of, 242; in N, 245.
trianta (Tpiavтa), 639.
را
tribal period of Grecce, 4' & [1].
trisyllabic accentuation in Greek, 32°2,
32; in Latin, App. i. 11 [2].
trisyllabotony, 32°2, 324, 81; in Latin,
App. i. 11 [2]; preservative of
Greek inflection, 32 ff., 81, App. i.
II.
trochaic endings, how accented in N,
347.
- rhythm in enclisis, 105°.
'trust' (to), constr., 1355 f.
try' (to), 1841, 1848.
trying, verbs of, 1300 f.
ts in N, 203, 205; in B-M misspelt
75, 1040 06 [1].
Tsaconic dialect uses T for 0, 24°;
resists synizosis, 1554; -éa, -la for
-cá, -iá, 271; č'a for čλa, 187°;
EKELÚS, 571.
tsade, σαντί, 2.
as cipher, 3.
Turkish rule, its influence on Greek,
026 f.; on N, 032; on Pontic N,
24°.
its policy, 025, 027.
condition of Greek under, 027.
-tus (Latin), -TOS, 1052.
'two,' basis of dual, 631.
how subtracted from tens, 642.
U, u, in Greek repr. by v, 16 f., 34",
124; by ov, 34º fl., 53.
u-sound, primitive & N, 16, 35", 144.
never short,' 28.
relative power of, 146.
overpowered, 136.
u+e=u, 146, 153.
u+u=u, 146, 148.
ü in 4, 9, 322, 34; in N, 35b; in
Pontic N, 24º.
-uccio, -oúmios, -OÛTσOS, 1040b.
Uebellaut, anodavía, 166 [1].
-ullo, -ύλος, -ουλός, -ούλης, 1059.
ultima, 81b.
-ulus, -ύλος, -ουλός, ούλης, 1059.
um-, German prefix, 166 [1].
Umlaul, perapwvía, 166 f. & [1], 166b.
un- (negative), ủn, cv-, II29 f.
uncials in MSS, form of, 9.
'unison' in Greek music, App. i. 24.
units, how symbolized in 4, 617.
+tens, 640 ff.
unlike,' constr., 1371.
' until,' 1787.
urnu, yoûpva, 155.
useful, constr., 1357 f.
ut (Latin), roệ + infin., 2077.
influences iva? 1762.
ulruman, πότερον, 2052.
ur, in Greek ovov, ov, ouß, 52.
-120, -ούτσος, 1040.
-uzzo, -OÛTOOS, 1040b.
Vor v, as consonant, 18, 19".
v, in Greek expr. by v or B, 52 f.
V (Latin) transcribed by ov, 53.
v-sound in Greek, 9, 24, 57 fl., 61 ff.
Vaccaritia, 1040 0 4.
Val (Valentine), 1040 [1].
value, gen. of, 1302.
expr. by ámú, 1511.
valuing, verbs ol, 1338 ff.
variable' syllables, 88; vowels, 17.
Varro on accents, App. i. 1.
ναι, δίγαμμα, 2, 11, 6161 ; seo F.
Vedic verse, App. ii. 3a; see Sanskrit.
Veller (J.), influence of his grammar,
239.
Velvendos, presont dialect of, 030 f.
731
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
Venetian rule, 025.
its influence on Greek, 025, 031;
on Cretan dialect, 025 [2].
verb in Greek, 967-1006; as compared
with Sanskrit, Latin and Gothic,
32 [3]; see also verbs.
I
person endings of, 760-823.
number in, 668.
character of, 694.
conjugation of, 697.
as 2nd component, 1150.
agrees with its subject, 1168; in
number, 1168-80; disagrees, 1174,
1175".
in dual, 1172 f.
after a collective subject, 1174.
omitted, 1979.
see also verbs.
verba declarandi, 1284, 2028 f., 2035 f.,
2085 f., 2135 ff.
constr., 2079, 2586, App. vi. 13 f.
with infin., 2085 f., app. vi. 7.
with 8T, App. vi. 13 f.
verba declarandi el sentiendi, 2085 f.
verba sentiendi, constr., 2028 l., 2133 ff.
with infin., App. vi. 7.
with or, App. vi. 13 f.
with, ὡσύτι, πως, 1751, 1755, 1942,
App. vi. 13 f.
verba voluntatis el stulii, 2087 ff.
verbal infinitive, 2078-99; see infini-
tive.
verbal nouns, 680 f.; in N, 681.
verbs, 667–1006; see also verb.
classified, 694-9.
barytone, 700 ft.
contracted, 824-863.
sonantic, 695.
consonantal, 696, 864 ff.
liquid, 864, 891-906.
mute, 865-890.
of monosyllabic stems, 834, 835 &
[2]; in P-N, 835 & [2].
deponent, 674, 1000 ff.
irregular in form, 996; in meaning,
997-1004.
derivation of, 1083-1101; from
nouns, 1084-93; froin verbs, 1094-
ΙΙΟΙ.
see also verb.
vernacular Greek, 05 f.; see colloquial
Greek.
verse in early Grock associated with
music, App. i. 24.
quantitative, App. ii. 3 c, 3"; sec
prosody.
spoken and sung, App. ii, 19.
very,' how expr. in Greek, 1191.
veleranus, οὐτρανός, 136.
'vices,' expr. with article, 1201 f.
'village,' indicated by article (rá), 1228.
'virtues,' expr. with article, 1201 f.
visarga, 56.
vila, Bñтa, 24 [1].
Vitae Epiphanii, style of, 021; et
passim.
-va in N becomes -vyw, -Byw, 861.
vocalism, 124, 144; see sonantism.
vocative (case), 231.
same as nom., 349, 356, 377; in
common speech, 280.
accentuation of, 257º, 260; in com-
pound barytones, 353.
- singular in Ist decl., 269; in 3rd
decl., 383".
use of, 1252 ff.
voices of verb, 669; originally two?,
1478; in A-N three, ib.
use of, 1454-86; active, 1454–60;
passive, 1461-5; middle, 1466-86;
see also verb(s).
volatalization of gulturals (y z X), 155º;
see guttural consonants.
wolla, βολά, 118, 131, 651.
voluntatis verba, 2087 ff.
vow' (to), constr., 1355 f.
vowel-reduction, 126, 753, 755, App. i.
13, 15, 17; due to stress-accent,
App. i. 13.
vowel sounds, number of, 16 f.
their paucity in Greek, 16" f.; cause
of, ib.
relative power of, 32, 146 fľ.
in modern languages, 16 [1].
vowels, 16, 17 ff.; see also sonants &
vowel sounds.
- absent in Phoenician, 3.
of Greek origin, 3.
five in all, 16º & [1]; later seven,
16; in N, 16; in Latin, ib.
as consonants, 19, 32, 51, 78",
155-155".
prepositive, 19, 32.
C
postpositive, 19 f., 32; act as con-
sonants, 19, 32, 51, 78.
short,' 17 ff., App. ii. 7 FF.; ill-sound-
ing or bad,' 25 [1] a & d.
'long,' 17 ff., 28 ff., 86, app. ii. 7 ff.
pleasing, 25 [1] a & d.
>
common,' doubtful,' 'variable,'
etc., 17, 17" & [2], 88.
'short & long,' 17, 17' & [2], 89.
vulgar or common language, 020.
vulgarisms, 020.
warring, oxpressions of, 1371 fl'.
wax-boards, used in writing, 07.
weight, gen. of, 1302 ff,
'whatever,' 14332-
732
II. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
'when,' expr. by accus., 1275, 1342;
by gen., 1341.
'whenever,' 1997.
'where'? expr. by accus., 1275.
เ
(
C
C
whether,' el, 2054 f.
or,' 2054 f.
which,' the, 612.
who,' interrog., 585; relat., 603 fr.,
14331:
'whoever,' 14332.
'whosoever,' 14332.
why,' how expr., 2044 f.
'why not,' 2059.
Will (William), 1040 [1].
will, verbs expressing, 2087 ff.
t
willy nilly,' 2146.
winds,' gender of, 241; in N, 245.
wish,' source of optative, 677, 1924,
App. v. 10.
unattainable, 1904 ff.
verbs denoting a, 2087 ff.
'with a view to,' 2094 ff.
withdrawal, verbs of, 1318 f.
wohl, 1828.
word-questions, 2033 a.
'would,' how expr. in A, 1849, 1901;
in G-B, App. iv. 5, 7.
'would,' expr. by imprf., 1849; by eîxov
+ infin., App. iv. 7; by vd + imprf.
or aor., App. iv. 13.
'would that,' 996193.
writing, art of, I ff., 4b; direction of, 4 ;
see also script.
yavanānī or Greek script, app. i. 11 [3].
'yes,' how expr. in Greek, 529b, 2057 ff.
'yield' (to), constr., 1355 f.
yielding, verbs of, 1316 f.
yod, iŵτa, 2.
yod or jod, see į.
assumed, II.
'youth,' a, 1041 [1].
Xenophon, style of, 05; et passim.
z-sound in Greek, 69.
zayin, Çîra, 2.
zd-sound of (, 69.
Zend-Avesta, metre of, App. ii. 3 a.
Zopyros of Heraclea, app. ii. II.
733
1
INDEX III.
PASSAGES EMENDED OR CRITICALLY DISCUSSED.
[For an explanation of the abbreviated names and titles found in this index
see under pp. xxxiii-xxxviii.]
In A-P compositions οὐ μὴ stands for οὐ μήν, 1827 f.
SECTION
SECTION
Acta Andreae 129, 15
178, 18
&
717[1]
Aristoxenos 7, 17.
Athanasios i. 361 D
App. ii. 2 a
805
Acta Petri et Pauli 6, 16
717 [1]
Acta Phil. in Hellad. 23.
1764
Barnabas 10, 4 & 15, 5 ·
1991
Acta Pilati A 14, 2.
16,
748 B
687
. 717 [1
P ii. I
·
717 [1]
•
Belthandros et Chrysantza 81 1608
Bull. Corr. Hell. 1894 p.
2038
Acta Thomae 15, 15
99661
145, 4.
•
App. v. 8c
16, 18
•
17, 9
19, 29
1836
717 [1]
27, 35
•
996
717[1]
09
33, 40
996199
36, 31
9966!
Callinicos 67,
74, 32
CGL 33, 32
232, I.
642, 20
8
2040
20860
•
App. iv. 1ob
1988
798 [1]
77, 2
43, 39 & 44, 26
Acta Xanthippac 63, 36
64, 35
Aeschylos Eum. 367
Sep. 628
Alchemists 21, 24
32,9.
•
796
648 & 649, 6
App. v. 15h
1483
Choer. 707, 27
820
717[1]
CIA iii. 2746, 3
26., a [1
996
CIG 5760
805 & App. v. 15h
152 [1]
.
152[1]
1570
1607%
305, 16.
Anast. Sin. 240 A
Antiphon 5, 21
•
APP. iv. 8
1774 [1
18181] & 2032
Apocalypsis Mariae 124, 14. 996997
Apollon. De Conj. 510 & 512
Apophthegmata
120 B
124 A
280 0
380 A
Patrum
Clem. Rom. 1, 44 (Migne 1,
Conc. Quin. Can. 65 App. v. 14
Cramer's Anecd. iii. 279.
Cratinos Frg. 43
•
Cyrill. H.Procat. 17. 805&App. v. 15h
Diodoros 18, 4, 4
1741
Dion. H. iii. 1445, 4
666
App. v. 15b
996
1867b
1918
345 C
Arcadios 187, 15 & 19.
190, 13 & 20.
Aristid. Quint. 89
Aristotle Elen. Soph. 4,2
Poct. 20
[Probl.] 20, 20 (iv. 210) 736 [2]
De Comp. 136, 4
164, 2
172, 6 f
176, I
178, 15.
180, 3 & 6
Ducas 165, 12
•
•
•
1511
App. v. 15
App. i. 19 c
25 [1] a
69
55
App. ii. 25
App. ii. 2b
1767 a
App. i. 199
"
App. 1. 199
55
App.i.4[1
Epicletos 2, 2, 16.
1758 a [1]
19b
3, 3, 9
4, 1, 73
•
1716
1944
297 B).
793
Codinos 88, 9
App. V. 14
b
2061 [1]
39
734
PASSAGES EMENDED OR CRITICALLY DISCUSSED.
1
SECTION
SECTION
Epiphanios i. 413 B
1953b
Malalas 51, 15
1672
i. 421 C
App. v. 16 a
ii. 48 c.
Ion 758
Eur. Hel. 1124 & Med. 955
Eusebios ii. 891 a 805
Eustathios 759 & 1750
Evang. Tho. A 14, 3
▲ 19, 4
Gr. Pap. Br. Mus. p. 23, 31
96, 395.
Gr. Urk. Berlin 183, 24 App. iii. 226
16071
152[1]
95, 8
102, 3 f
102, 4
1438
1219, 1438
1438
&
App. v. 2
app. v. 15b
116, 5
•
750 a
455, 20
1640
·
736 [1]
469, 17
1575
•
2032
717 [1]
483, 10
1565b
Mart. Pauli 108,
3
1566
112, 10
App. v. 8c
791
117, 3
717 [1]
850b
Mart. Petri 82, 11
1991
84, 19
717 [1]
223, 3 & 230, 3 .
[Greg. Naz.] ii. 712 A
37
Mart. Petri et Pauli 120, 5
1991
961
132, 14
136, 5
1991
•
App. iv. 8
959 a
τόμ. α'
a
p. 291
25 [1] d
•
152[1]
οὐχ ὑποίσω
App. iv. 9
•
152 [1]
108,
K 512, π 203
.
•
App. ii. 7 [1]
Hermas Sim. 9, II, I
9, 12, 4
Vis. 1, 1, 3 & 2, 1, 2
I,
Hermogenes Περὶ ἰδεῶν
Herodian Hist. 6, 7, 7 1583 [1]
Herodotos I, 205
•
Hesychios s. v. Teρiteúţetaι App. iv. 9
Homer II. ▲ 359, Z 344,
H 434, 164, A 153, N 675,
0 635, 789 . App. ii. 7 [1]
Z 170, M 280, E 153,
¥ 150
Od. 8 226, n 107,
Mittheilungen 19,252,59f
19, 254, 101 ff
Moeris 366
106, 35
NEW TESTAMENT:
Passim κρίνω, αποκτέν(ν)ω
1836
1991
140, 4 & 146, 16
1991
191, 2
KMeisterhans² 15, 6, b
796
262 α [1]
App. v.8°
App. v.80
996 307
JMoschos 3077 D.
99661
Narratio Josephi 2, 3
Narratio Zosimi 102, 22
717[1]
717 [1]
App. iv. 6
894 [1]
Acts 1, 6
2055
2, 12.
App. v. 10
5, 15.
7, I
1991
2055
JJejunator 1929 C
Ignat. ad Smyrn. 9, I
IGS 1811
GKaibel epigr. add. 646 a
•
2119
152 [1]
7,7
7,34
779
894[1]
1538
8, 31
1991
19, 2
2.
2055
1786
21, 24
1991
Kühner-Blass ii. 55
+
791
21, 37
2055
22, 25
2055
CLeemans 15, 3
App. v. 80
23, 9.
2055
Leo Gram. 354, 22
1915
25, 16
App. v. 10
361, 8.
9966L
25, 26
App. v. 8°
Leont. Neap. V. J. 10, 10
2145
26, 29
30, 8
791
46, 6
717
65, 2
9966
V. S. 1681
1688 0
1701 A.
•
796
796
794
14, 36
Lesbonax 187
I Cor. 3, 17. 6, 3, 6, 14
6, 2
6,9
•
9, 11 & 14, 5.
14, 15
2050, 2055
1925
894[1]
2055
2050, 2055
1991
894[1]
App. iv. 9
2 Cor. 9, 10
894 [1]
Louvre Pap. 20, 15
1670
I
[1, 7.
2050
11, 23
1685h & 1980b
Malalas 26, 4
996K1
Eph. 3, 16.
99651
26, 18.
. 1758 a
4, 10
1360
735
INDEX III. PASSAGES EMENDED
SECTION
SECTION
Gal. 6, 10.
6, 12
Hebr. 7, 5
152 [1]
Rev. 7, 17
894 [1]
1991
8, 3
99651
•
851
10, 9
894 [1]
Jas. 4, 5
5, 15
John 2, 19
•
2050
894 [1]
12, 6. 13, 15
779
14, 13
1991
894 & 1977
19, 15
•
894 [1]
2,20 & 3, 36
894 [1]
Rom. 3, 29
2050
5, 20
779
6, 3
2050
8, 36
1991
7, I
2055
14, 17
894 [1]
-7, 13
·
2124
15, 16
99661
II, 2.
2050, 2055
16, 13, 14, 15, 25
894 [1]
17, 3
779
1991
894 [1]
20, 23
960
21, 19
1 John 2, 12.
3, 17
2040
3,8
960
5, 4
894 [1]
3, 25.
5, 20
1313
700 B
2050
1991
1758 a [1]
App. v. 15h
1990.
•
Luke 5, 20, 23. 7, 48, 49
2
·
960
1991
894 [1]
750 b
II, 12
II, 49. 12, 18
•
13, 13
13, 23
17, 33
19, 43. 21, 12
2055
1744 a
894 [1]
App. v. 80 &
•
894 [1]
App. v. 80
Mark 4, 29
8, 23.
9, 30
13, 27
14, 10
ΙΟ
•
996B1
2055
App. vi. 12 B a
2040 & App. v. 8c
14, 8
15, 9
I Thess. 2, 19
Nicacnum Concilium ii.
744 B 805 & App. v. 15b
Notices et Extraits vol. 23
p. 290
•
Palladios (Laus.) 1042 D
"
1073 C
Parad. Pilati 3 ·
S. Pelagia p. 56
Philo i. 496, 36
Philologus 52 p. 161,6
Phrynichos 27
51
160
172
185
•
50b
1221
851
717 [1]
App. iii. 25
App. v. 14b
1274[1]
989
506 [2]
627
1145
Plato Crat. 396 B. 398 C-D 4I
14, II
•
631 [1]
14, 41
1711
15, 20
779
399 B
App. i. 2 [1]
16, 17 & 18
894 [1]
400 C.
405 B.
406 A.
22, 49
2055
Matt. 2, 6. 4, 6
7,6
•
II, 10. 13, 4
12, 10
13, 3.
13, 32
13, 42 & 50
18, 19
•
407 B, D.
408 A, B.
409 B.
894 [1]
410 C.
415 C, D.
416 B.
779
418 C
4I
41
.
•
894 [1]
427 A
61
2055
2055
Gorg. 471 A
Legg. 888 B
•
2164
•
1175
851
•
•
779
19, 3.
2055
20, 15
2055
Polemo 202
23, 34. 24, 31
894 [1]
Polyb. 3, 58, 8
26, 45
1711
Porph. Cor. 217
26, 53
Phil. 1, 25
2, II
2050
894 [1]
779
Rev. 2, 27. 3, 5
3,9
6, II
894 [1]
•
99661
1991
894 [1]
Rep. iii. 394
Tim. 28 B & 32 B
Plut. G. Grac. 15, 3
T. Grac. 14, 2
412, 13
463, 7
540, 17 & 541, 5
Priscian i. II
Prodromos I, 35
2, 19.
•
1918
736 [2]
App. v. 156
1500
853 ?
1565b
•
56 [1]
13506
1608
A
•
152 [1]
41
App. vi. 21
App. vi. 21
736
OR CRITICALLY DISCUSSED.
SECTION
SECTION
13, I
Prodromos 3, 86 .
6, 76
•
6, 119
6, 276.
•
Protev. Jac. 9, 3
14, I
15, 1 & 2
App. iii. 25
Socrates scholasticus 5, 16
1741
App. iv. 12
Soph. Ai. 442
152 [1]
1795
O. C. 1639
152 [1]
1799
O. R. 1248
152 [1]
•
App. v. 155
Tr. 266 & 525
•
152 [1]
•
717 [1]
GSpata 90
•
2040 & 2041
122 .
•
717 [1]
Strabo 14, 14
752
532 e
200
•
19, 3
22, 3
24, 3
•
894 [1]
2040
Tatian. 22
•
App. v. 22
• 717 [1]
Test. xii. 1073 A
•
App. iv. 6
Theodoretos iv. 368 D
App. v. 14b
augment, as όμοιώθημεν,
ὀχύρωσαν, ἐξομολογείτο,
κατορθούμην,
Schol. Ar. Ran. 303
Schol. Dion. Thr. 798
798 (five times).
799 (thrice)
800 (twice)
Schol. Eur. Or. 279
Sept. o- misspelt for w- in
каторðοúµην, etc.-passim 717 [1]
85°
850
Theophanes 21, 19
1227
App. ii. 2 f
182, 12
App.
App. v. 15t
App. ii. 2
P. 734
717 [1]
App. ii. 2 g
Theoph. Continuatus 242, 2 1500
App. ii, 2 h
Theophr. Hist. 6, 2, 4
1513 [1]
850
Theophylactos, 327, 9
805&
App. v. 15b
136, 16
1953b
Thucydides 3 23, 5
1952
Gen. 6, 13
1836
Vita Epiph. 49 A
App. iv. Iob
28, 3 & 20
996
Deut. 7, 19
791
64 A & B
89 A
1914 & App. iv. 8
823
I Macc. 3, 7.
717 [1]
II, 40
•
9961
Ps. 17 (18), 50
894 [1]
CWessely Prolegomena 65 793
Zauberpapyri L 17. App. v. 8c
50 (51), 7.
1556b
NZaub. 25, 445
•
1988
90 (91), 12
894 [1]
120 (121), 3
Ruth 1,9
·
•
Sextus 19, 9. 64, 5. 65,31
Sikelos' inscription
Xen. An. 2, 2, 12
•
99661
Hell. 3, 2, 14
App. iv. 8
1754 [1]
I
1920
1774[1]
Mem. 3, 2, 3.
1952
•
1274 [1]
Zosimos II, 15
App. v. 14
b
737
3 B
OXFORD: HORACE HART
PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY
MACMILLAN & CO.'S BOOKS FOR CLASSICAL STUDENTS.
8vo.
Price 14s.
Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb. By
WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, Ph.D., Eliot Professor of Greck Literature in
Harvard College. Second Edition, revised and enlarged.
OXFORD MAGAZINE.-' Few books in English on Grammar have been so stimulating and
interesting as Professor Goodwin's original book was, and the new one is even more so.'
Crown 8vo. Price 6s.
A Greek Grammar. By WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, LL.D., Eliot Pro-
fessor of Greek in Harvard College; Author of 'Syntax of the Moods and
Tenses of the Greek Verb,' &c. New Edition, revised and enlarged.
Thirteenth Thousand.
ATHENAEUM.-'It is the best Greek Grammar of its size in the English language, and
ought to meet with a wide circulation on this side the Atlantic.'
Crown Svo. Price 6s.
A Greek Grammar for Schools and Colleges.
By JAMES HADLEY.
Revised and in part re-written by FREDERIC DE FOREST ALLEN, Professor in
Harvard College.
(
SATURDAY REVIEW. Throughout the accidence Homeric forms are freely given at the
foot of each page. The rules of syntax are for the most part very clearly stated, and an appendix
contains a scheme of the various Greek metres,'
Crown Svo. Price 10s. 6d.
A Short Manual of Comparative Philology for Classical Students.
By P. GILES, M.A., Fellow and Lecturer of Emmanuel College, and Reader
in Comparative Philology in the University of Cambridge.
TIMES. A very clear account of comparative philology as applied to Greek and Latin,
according to the best standards of present day knowledge.'
870. Price 18s.
The New Phrynichus. By the Rev. W. G. RUTHERFORD, M.A., LL.D.,
Headmaster of Westminster. Being a Revised Text of the Ecloga of the
Grammarian Phrynichus, with Introductions and Commentary.
ACADEMY.-' Mr. Rutherford has seen the new use to which his author could be applied,
and the result is a monumental addition to the masterpieces of English scholarship.'
Classical Library.
Being Standard Greek and Latin Texts, Edited, with Introduction and
Notes, for the use of Advanced Students.
Aeschylus. The Supplices. A Revised
Text with Translation. By T. G. TUCKER,
M.A. ros. 6d.
The Seven against Thebes. With
Translation. By A. W. VERRALL, Litt.D.
78. 6d.
Agamemnon. With Translation. By
the same.
125.
Choephori. With Translation. By the
same. 125.
Aristotle. The Politics. A Revised Text,
with Introduction, Analysis, and Com-
mentary. By F. SUSEMIHL and R. D.
HICKS. Books I-V. 18s. net.
Aristotle's Constitution of Athens.
A Revised Text, with an Introduction,
Critical and Explanatory Notes, Testi-
monia, and Indices. By J. E. SANDYS,
Litt. D. 15S.
Babrius. With Lexicon. By the Rev. W. G.
128. Od.
Rutherford, M.A., LL.D.
Cicero. The Academica. By J. S. REID,
Litt. D. 155.
Euripides. Medea. Edited by A. W. Ver-
RALL, Litt.D. 78. 6d.
Iphigenia in Aulis. Edited by E. B.
ENGLAND, M.A. 78, 6d.
δυο.
Herodotus. Books I-III. The Ancient
Empires of the East. Edited by A. H.
SAYCE. 16s.
Books IV-VI. Edited by R. W. MACAN,
M.A. 2 vols. 328.
Homer. The Iliad. By WALTER LEAF,
Litt.D. Books 1-XII. 14s. Books XIII-
XXIV. 145.
Pindar. The Nemean Odes. By J. B.
BURY, M.A.
125.
The Isthmian Odes. By the same.
108. 6d.
Plato. Phaedo. By R. D. ARCHER-HIND,
M.A. 8s. 6d,
Timaeus. With Translation. By R. D.
ARCHER-HIND, M.A. 165.
Pliny. Correspondence with Trajan.
Č. Plinii Caecilii Secundi Epistulae ad
Traianum Imperatorem cum Eiusdem
Responsis. By E. G. HARDY, M.A.
10s. 6d.
Tacitus. The Annals. By G. O. HOL-
BROOKE, M.A. With Maps. 165.
The Histories. By the Rev. W. A.
SPOONER, M.A. With Introductions. 165.
Thucydides. Book VIII. By H. C. GOOD-
HART, M.A. 95.
MACMILLAN & CO., Ltd., LONDON.
MACMILLAN & CO.'S BOOKS FOR CLASSICAL STUDENTS.
Pausanias. Description of Greece. Translated with a Commentary by
J. G. FRAZER, M.A., LL.D. (Glasgow), Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge,
Author of 'The Golden Bough." With numerous Maps and Illustrations.
6 vols. 8vo. Six guineas net.
[Immediately.
In this important work, the fruit of many years' labour, Mr. Frazer's aim has been to give first
a faithful and idiomatic rendering of Pausanias, and second a commentary which shall illustrate
his description of ancient Greece by the light of modern research.
?
Marcus Aurelius Antoninus to Himself. Being a new Translation,
with Introduction and Notes of the Meditations,' by G. H. Rendall, M.A.,
Principal of University College, Liverpool. Crown 8vo. [Immediately.
Crown 8vo. Price 7s. net.
Some Aspects of the Greek Genius. By S. H. BUTCHER, Litt.D.,
LL.D., Professor of Greek in the University of Edinburgh, formerly Fellow of
Trinity College, Cambridge, and of University College, Oxford.
ST. JAMES'S GAZETTE.-' Professor Butcher writes so fluently and brightly, that in
reading these essays we are in danger of overlooking his solid attainments and accurate scholar-
ship.'
Crown 8vo. Price 6s.
A Companion to School Classics. By JAMES GOW, M.A., Litt.D.,
Head Master of the High School, Nottingham; late Fellow of Trinity College,
Cambridge. Third Edition, revised.
CLASSICAL REVIEW-'This is a remarkable little book, which, unless we are much
mistaken, will be warmly received by classical teachers, and will be of no small use to many
advanced students and scholars.'
Crown 8vo. Price 7s.
The Growth and Influence of Classical Greek Poetry. Lectures
delivered in 1892 in the Johns Hopkins University. By R. C. JEBB, Litt. D.,
M. P., Regius Professor of Greek and Fellow of Trinity College in the Uni-
versity of Cambridge.
OXFORD MAGAZINE.-'It is hardly necessary to say that the subject is handled with
the sanity of judgment and grace of style which we are accustomed to associate with the work
of Professor Jebb.'
8vo. Price 25s.
2 vols.
The Attic Orators from Antiphon to Isaeus. By R. C. JEBB, Litt.D.,
Regius Professor of Greek and Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, and
M.P. for the University. Second Edition.
QUARTERLY REVIEW.-'It is a happy conjunction by which one who is not only
among the first of living Greek scholars, but himself an artist in English prose, should have
undertaken to interpret the earliest prose artists of Greece.'
Crown 8vo. Price 7s. 6d.
A Companion to the Iliad for English Readers. By WALTER LEAF,
Litt.D., formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge.
TIMES.-' Forms an important contribution to Homeric literature, and one which will be
highly valued by advanced students of Homeric poems.'
Demy 8vo. Price 14s.
The Elder Pliny's Chapters on the History of Art. Translated by
K. JEX-BLAKE, Classical Lecturer at Girton College, Cambridge. With
Commentary and Historical Introduction by E. SELLERS, former Student of
Girton College, Cambridge, and of the British School at Athens; and Addi-
tional Notes contributed by Dr. HEINRICII LUDWIG URLICHS.
TIMES.-'Of the translation we may say in a single word that it is excellent; of the
introduction and commentary that they are on the level of the highest scholarship of the day.
... In the hands of any student of arcliacology, such as are beginning to abound in the Universi-
ties, it will not only explain Pliny but will be a valuable lesson in modern methods of criticism.'
MACMILLAN & CO., Ltd., LONDON.
MACMILLAN & CO.'S BOOKS FOR CLASSICAL STUDENTS.
{
Crown 8vo. Price 4s. 6d. cach Part.
A History of Classical Greek Literature. By the Rev. J. P.
MAHAFFY, M.A., D.D., Fellow and Professor of Ancient History in Trinity
College, Dublin, and Hon. Fellow of Queen's College, Oxford. In 2 vols.
Vol. I. THE POETICAL WRITERS. In two Parts. Part I. EPIC AND
LYRIC. Part II. DRAMATIC. Third Edition, revised and enlarged. Vol. II.
PROSE WRITERS. Part I. HERODOTUS TO Plato. Part II. ISOCRATES
TO ARISTOTLE.
LITERARY WORLD.-'It is brightly written, and serves the useful purpose of informing
the English reader of the latest German views on every point.'
Crown Svo.
The Social Life of the Greeks. I.
Price 9s.
Social Life in Greece from Homer
to Menander. By the Rev. J. P. MAIAFFY, M.A., D.D. Seventh Edition.
SATURDAY REVIEW.—'He gives us a scries of thoughtful and intelligent pictures of the
home-life of the ancient Greeks, and undertakes to explain how they reasoned and felt and loved;
why they laughed and why they wept; how they taught and what they learned. . . . The book
as a whole is really a valuable addition to the classical library.'
Second Edition. Crown 8vo. Price 12s. 6d.
The Social Life of the Greeks. II. Greek Life and Thought from
the Age of Alexander to the Roman Conquest. By the Rev. J. P. MAHAFFY,
M.A., D.D.
CAMBRIDGE REVIEW.—'This book will certainly be read by all with profit and interest
of no common order.'
Extra Crown Svo. Price 6s.
A Survey of Greek Civilization. By the Rev. J. P. MAHAFFy, M.A., D.D.
MORNING POST.-'Much has been written by Professor Mahaffy on Greek culture, but in
no case has he written more admirably than in the present volume,'
Crown Svo. Price 6s.
The Student's Companion to Latin Authors. By GEORGE
MIDDLETON, M.A., Lecturer in Latin, Aberdeen University, late Scholar of
Emmanuel College, Cambridge; and THOMAS R. MILLS, M.A., late Lecturer
in Greek, Aberdeen University, and Classical Lecturer, Owens College,
Manchester, formerly Scholar of Wadham College, Oxford. With an Intro-
ductory Note by Prof. W. M. Ramsay, D.C.L., LL.D., Aberdeen University.
ACADEMY.-'A volume which not only will be found extremely useful and time-saving for
purposes of reference, but which can be read with profit and with interest from cover to cover.'
New Edition.
Globe 8vo. Price 5s.
Classical Essays. By F. W. H. MYERS.
[Eversley Series.
CONTENTS: Greek Oracles, Virgil, Marcus Aurelius Antoninus.
ATHENAEUM.-They are the independent judgments of a man whose knowledge is
always first hand, and whose power of creating ideas is above rather than below his power of
expressing them.
Extra crown 8vo. Price 8s. 6d.
Plato and Platonism. A Series of Lectures by WALTER PATER,
Fellow of Brasenose College, Oxford, Author of
Oxford, Author of Imaginary Portraits,'
Marius the Epicurean,' &c.
DAILY TELEGRAPH.—'A book which even those who know little of early philosophy, or
the old Greek culture, can read with pleasure and profit.'
Extra crown 8vo.
Price 10s. 6d.
Greek Studies. A Series of Essays. By WALTER PATER, late Fellow
of Brascnose College. Prepared for the Press by CHARLES L. SHADWELL,
Fellow of Oriel College.
MACMILLAN & CO., Ltd., LONDON.
MACMILLAN & CO.'S BOOKS FOR CLASSICAL STUDENTS.
ARCHAEOLOGY AND ANTIQUITIES.
In two parts. Extra crown 8vo. Price 5s. each.
Parts I and II, complete in I vol. Price Ios.
A Handbook of Greek Sculpture. By ERNEST ARTHUR GARDNER,
M.A., late Fellow of Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge, and formerly
Director of the British School of Archacology at Athens, Yates Professor of
Archaeology in University College, London.
ACADEMY.-The book is full of illustrations, and written in scholarly, though by no means
pedantic, style. The chapter on the Parthenon and the Erectheum is particularly interesting.'
Price 25s. net.
Super royal 8vo.
Sculptured Tombs of Hellas. By PERCY GARDNER, Litt.D., Lincoln
and Merton Professor of Archaeology and Art in the University of Oxford.
With 30 Plates and 87 Engravings in the text.
<
TIMES. Professor Gardner's volume is very clear and orderly in design; it is expository,
as a lecturer's work should be; the illustrations are well chosen and well executed. The style
is simplicity itself.... Professor Gardner's concluding chapters on the mausoleum and on the
magnificent sarcophagi which were found not many years ago at Sidon are of great interest.'
Crown Svo. Price 16s.
Mythology and Monuments of Ancient Athens. Being a translation
of a portion of the 'Attica' of Pausanias. By MARGARET DE G. VERRALL.
With an Introductory Essay and Archacological Commentary by JANE E.
HARRISON, author of 'Myths of the Odyssey,' 'Introductory Studies in Greek
Art.' With Illustrations and Plans.
•
SPEAKER.This book is a most welcome addition to the scanty list of English archaco-
logical works. . . A sound and scholarly attempt towards the solution of a very difficult problem.'
Extra crown Svo. Price 7s. net.
Select Passages from Ancient Writers Illustrative of the History
of Greek Sculpture. Edited, with a Translation and Notes, by H. STUART
JONES, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Oxford, late Craven University
Fellow, formerly Student of the British School at Athens.
SPECTATOR.—'We can safely recommend Mr. Jones's book to the careful study of the
lover of Hellenic literature as well as of the cultivator of art, and hope to see more from a writer
who has exhibited so much industry, learning, and good taste.'
Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo.
Price 10s. 6d.
Rambles and Studies in Greece. By the Rev. J. P. MAHAFFY, M.A.,
D.D., Fellow and Professor of Ancient History in Trinity College, Dublin,
and Hon. Fellow of Queen's College, Oxford.
ATHENAEUM.-'A singularly instructive and agreeable volume.'
Oblong 4lo. Price 21s. net.
Atlas of Classical Antiquities. By TH. SCHREIBER. Edited for
English use by Professor W. C. F. ANDERSON, Firth College, Sheffield.
With a Preface by Professor PERCY GARDNER.
TIMES.-'An atlas like that of Dr. Schreiber's is almost indispensable to the study of
classical archacology.'
4lo. Price 245.
The Mycenaean Age. A Study of the Monuments and Culture of
Pre-historic Greece. By Dr. CHRESTOS TSOUNTAS, Ephor of Antiquities and
Director of Excavations at Mycenac, and J. IRVING MANATT, Ph.D., LL.D.,
Professor of Greek Literature and History in Brown University. With an
Introduction by Dr. DÖRPFELD.
This work is based on the Greek publication of Dr. Tsountas' entitled Mycenae and the
Mycenaean Civilisation, rewritten and enlarged by Professor Manatt.
TIMES. Patient investigations of many scholars have during the past twenty years both
greatly added to Dr. Schlieman's discoveries and have put his theories on a sound footing. Of
what has been done in this way no better or more trustworthy account exists than the book which
Professor Manatt has published, chiefly basing it, as we have said, upon the work of Dr. Tsountas.'
MACMILLAN & CO., Ltd., LONDON.
да
7212

:
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
3 9015 01070 8553

I
E